AI Tipiṭaka Translations
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Vinayavinicchayaṭīkā
Vinayavinicchayaṭīkā
(Paṭhamo bhāgo)
(First Part)
Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Words
(Ka)
(Ka)
Ādiccavaṃsambarapātubhūtaṃ;
Born from the lineage of the sun;
A rainbow of light spanning a fathom;
Extinguishing the heat of evil with the nectar of the Dhamma;
The great cloud of the Buddha.
(Kha)
(Kha)
Pasannagambhīrapadāḷisotaṃ;
A stream of clear and profound words;
A garland of countless waves of various methods;
A multitude of fish immeasurable with the aggregates of virtue, etc.;
The great river of the Dhamma.
(Ga)
(Ga)
Sīloruvelaṃ dhutasaṅkhamālaṃ;
The shore of virtue, adorned with a conch-shell necklace;
Contentment its water, tranquility its mind-waves;
The practice of exertion, the essence of higher consciousness;
The great ocean of the Saṅgha.
(Gha)
(Gha)
Ye tantidhammaṃ munirājaputtā;
Those sons of the King of Sages who,
Maintaining the doctrine of the scriptures for as long as life lasts,
Brought forth stainless commentaries;
To those teachers of old, I pay homage.
(Ṅa)
(Ṅa)
Yo dhammasenāpatitulyanāmo;
He who was named like the General of the Dhamma;
Similar to him, a lamp to the island of Sri Lanka;
My great preceptor, the great ascetic Sāmi;
Caused growth in the Dispensation of the Conqueror.
(Ca)
(Ca)
Ṭīkākatā aṭṭhakathāya yena;
The Ṭīkā was composed by him on the Aṭṭhakathā,
Named Samantapāsādikā;
And on the Aṅguttara Aṭṭhakathā as well;
[And on] Jotisattha.
(Cha)
(Cha)
Nikāyasāmaggividhāyakena;
By him who established harmony in the Order;
By Parakkantibhuja, indeed;
An offering was made even by the lord of Laṅkā;
The Guru deserving of reverence is he.
(Ja)
(Ja)
Namassamānohamalatthamevaṃ;
Paying homage, I have attained thus;
The three objects worthy of veneration having been worshipped;
Whatever accumulation of merit has been abundantly made;
By its power, may obstacles be destroyed.
(Jha)
(Jha)
buddhaghosācariyāsabhena;
Buddhaghosācariya, best among teachers;
Also well-versed in wisdom;
Named Buddhadattācariya;
A great poet, a lamp of the lineage of elders.
(Ña)
(Ña)
vinayavinicchayavhayaṃ;
The Vinayavinicchaya by name;
The excellent and beneficial Suttara treatise;
For those desiring skill in the methods of the Vinaya,
There was formerly a Sinhala commentary on it.
(Ṭa)
(Ṭa)
Yasmā na dīpantarikānamatthaṃ;
Since it does not fully serve the purpose
Of the monks in other lands,
Therefore, wishing for the benefit of ascetics everywhere,
With compassion.
(Ṭha)
(Ṭha)
Sumaṅgalattheravarena yasmā;
By the venerable Sumaṅgala Thera, because
It was respectfully and earnestly requested,
By him who knows the methods, who dwells in the forest,
Whose nature is adorned with good qualities.
(Ḍa)
(Ḍa)
Ākaṅkhamānena cirappavattiṃ;
Desiring the long duration
Of the Dhamma taught by the Lord of the Dhamma,
By Buddhamitta-
Thera, endowed with faith and other virtues.
(Ḍha)
(Ḍha)
mahākassapaavhayena;
By him named Mahākassapa;
Thera, who reveres the trainings;
The lion who tears apart hordes of wrong views;
Worshipped by the king of Coḷa.
(Ṇa)
(Ṇa)
dhammakittīti pasatthanāmo;
Well-known by the name Dhammakitti;
Also by that faithful lay follower;
Adorned with virtue and various other qualities;
A scholar here, a lover of the true Dhamma.
(Ta)
(Ta)
Saddhena paññāṇavatā vaḷattā-;
By the faithful, wise, and wealthy
Of the Maṅgalyavaṃsa, of great fame;
Also by Vāṇijabhāṇu;
An excellent and virtuous man.
(Tha)
(Tha)
Tasmā tamāropiya pāḷibhāsaṃ;
Therefore, having translated it into the language of the Pāli,
Relying on the advice of former teachers,
Having abandoned the faults found in other schools,
Having made it neither too extensive nor too concise.
(Da)
(Da)
Avuttamatthañca pakāsayanto;
And revealing what was unsaid,
Also clarifying the order of the text,
I will comment on its essential meaning,
Taking the essence also from other texts.
(Dha)
(Dha)
Ciraṭṭhitiṃ patthayatā janānaṃ;
For the long lasting benefit of people,
For the pure Dispensation that brings good,
The commentary that is being composed
By me in brief, may the good listen well.
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Introductory Words
1-5
1-5
.Suvipulāmalasaddhāpaññādiguṇasamudayāvahaṃ sakalajanahitekahetujinasāsanaṭṭhitimūlabhūtaṃ vinayappakaraṇamidamārabhantoyamācariyo pakaraṇārambhe ratanattayappaṇāmapakaraṇābhidhānābhidheyyakaraṇappakārapayojananimittakattuparimāṇādīni dassetumāha‘‘vanditvā’’tiādi. Tattharatanattayaṃnāma.
Now, this teacher, beginning this treatise on the Vinaya, which brings about the accumulation of exceedingly vast and pure faith, wisdom, and other virtues, which is the sole cause of benefit to all people, and which is the basis for the establishment of the Dispensation of the Conqueror, says "vanditvā" and so on, in order to show the homage to the Triple Gem, the naming of the treatise, the subject matter, the manner of composition, the purpose, the occasion, the agent, the extent, and so forth. Therein, the Triple Gem is:
‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;
"Esteemed, of great value, incomparable, rare to see;
Unsurpassed, enjoyed by beings, therefore it is called a gem." (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.223; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50) –
Niddiṭṭhasabhāvaṃ
Whose nature is specified,
‘‘Buddho sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, dhammo lokuttaro nava;
"The Buddha is the knowledge of omniscience, the Dhamma is the nine supramundane [Dhammas];
The Saṅgha is those standing in the paths and fruits, this is called the Triple Gem." –
Vibhāvitappabhedaṃ sakalabhavadukkhavinivāraṇaṃ tibhavenekapaṭisaraṇaṃ vatthuttayaṃ.
Whose divisions are distinguished, the three objects that completely avert suffering in all existence, the unique refuge in the triple world.
paṇāmonāma paṇāmakiriyānipphādikā cetanā. Sā tividhā kāyapaṇāmo vacīpaṇāmo manopaṇāmoti. Tatthakāyapaṇāmonāma ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇapubbikā añjalikammādikāyakiriyāvasappavattikā kāyaviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā.Vacīpaṇāmonāma tatheva pavattā nānāvidhaguṇavisesavibhāvanasabhāvathomanākiriyāvasappavattikā vacīviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā.Manopaṇāmonāma ubhayaviññattiyo asamuṭṭhāpetvā kevalaṃ guṇānussaraṇena cittasantānassa tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāratāya gāravabahumānanavasappavattisādhikā cetanā.
Homage is the volition that accomplishes the act of paying homage. It is of three kinds: bodily homage, verbal homage, and mental homage. Therein, bodily homage is the volition that arises from physical expression, bringing about physical intimation consisting of reverential salutations and other bodily actions, preceded by recollection of the virtues of the Triple Gem. Verbal homage is the volition that arises similarly, bringing about verbal intimation consisting of praising actions expressive of various special qualities. Mental homage is the volition that, without arousing either intimation, brings about the accomplishment of reverence and respect due to the inclination, leaning, and tendency of the mind-continuum merely by recollection of the virtues.
sāratthadīpaniyādīsu (sārattha. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 2.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā) dassitanayeneva ñātabbaṃ.
It should be understood in the same way as shown in the Sāratthadīpanī and other texts (sārattha. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 2.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā).
Abhidhānakathanaṃ pana vohārasukhatthaṃ.Abhidheyyassasamuditena pakaraṇena paṭipādetabbassa kathanaṃ pakaraṇassa ārabhitabbasabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Viditāninditasātthakasukarānuṭṭhānābhi dheyyameva hi pakaraṇaṃ parikkhakajanā ārabhitabbaṃ maññantīti.Karaṇappakārasandassanaṃ sotujanasamussāhanatthaṃ. Anākulamasaṃkiṇṇatādippakārena hi viracitaṃ pakaraṇaṃ sotāro sotumussahantīti.Payojanakathanaṃ pana pakaraṇajjhāyane sotujanasamuttejanatthaṃ. Asati hi payojanakathane aviññātappayojanā ajjhāyane byāvaṭā na hontīti.Nimittakathanaṃ sarikkhakajanānaṃ pakaraṇe gāravuppādanatthaṃ. Pasatthakāraṇuppanneyeva hi pakaraṇe sarikkhakā gāravaṃ janentīti.
The stating of the name, however, is for ease of usage. The stating of the subject matter, which is to be expounded by the entire treatise collectively, is to show that the treatise is worthy of being begun. For discerning people consider only a treatise with a known, blameless, meaningful, easily understood, and practiced subject matter to be worth beginning. The showing of the manner of composition is to encourage the audience. For the listeners are encouraged to listen to a treatise composed in a clear and unconfused manner. The stating of the purpose, however, is to incite the audience to study the treatise. For without stating the purpose, they will not be engaged in studying it, as the purpose is unknown. The stating of the occasion is to generate respect for the treatise among similar people. For similar people only generate respect for a treatise that has arisen from a worthy cause.
Kattukathanaṃ puggalagarukassa pakaraṇe gāravo puggalagāravenapi hotūti.Parimāṇakathanaṃ asajjhāyanādipasutānaṃ sampahaṃsanatthaṃ. Pakaraṇaparimāṇassavanena hi te sampahaṭṭhā ‘‘kittakamidamappakaṃ na cireneva parisamāpessāmā’’ti sajjhāyanādīsu vattantīti.Ādi-saddena sakkaccasavananiyojanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ, taṃ sabbasampattinidānasutamayañāṇanipphādanatthaṃ. Asakkaccaṃ suṇamānassa ca savanābhāvato taṃhetukassa sutamayañāṇassāpi abhāvoti. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇitabba’’nti bhaṇati.
The stating of the agent [is] so that respect for the treatise may also arise from respect for the individual. The stating of the extent [is] to delight those who are devoted to non-study and the like. For upon hearing the extent of the treatise, they become greatly delighted, thinking, "How small this is, we will finish it in no time," and they engage in study and the like. By the word "ādi" [and so forth], directing [listeners] to listen respectfully is included, [and this is] for the accomplishment of knowledge based on learning, which is the basis of all good fortune. For one who listens without respect does not have learning because of the absence of listening, and thus there is also the absence of knowledge based on learning which is caused by it. Thus, even when good fortune is being described, a person with a distracted mind says, "I did not hear, it must be spoken again."
‘‘vanditvā’’ti iminā tividhopi paṇāmo avisesato dassito. Visesato pana‘‘seṭṭhaṃ, appaṭipuggalaṃ, bhavābhāvakaraṃ, niraṅgaṇa’’nti imehi catūhi padehi vacīpaṇāmo,‘‘sirasā’’ti iminā kāyappaṇāmo,‘‘buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ, gaṇañcā’’ti imehi pana tīhi padehi paṇāmakiriyāya kammabhūtaṃ ratanattayaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
By "vanditvā," homage of all three types is shown without distinction. Specifically, however, by these four words, "seṭṭhaṃ, appaṭipuggalaṃ, bhavābhāvakaraṃ, niraṅgaṇa," verbal homage, by "sirasā," bodily homage, and by these three words, "buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ, gaṇañcā," the Triple Gem, which is the object of the act of paying homage, is shown, and this should be seen.
‘‘Vinayassavinicchaya’’nti iminā abhidhānaṃ dassitaṃ aluttasamāsena vinayavinicchayanāmassa dassanato. Tassa anvatthabhāvena saddappavattinimittabhūtaṃ sakalenānena pakaraṇena paṭipādetabbamabhidheyyampi teneva dassitaṃ.‘‘Samāsenā’’ti ca‘‘anākulamasaṃkiṇṇaṃ, madhuratthapadakkama’’nti ca etehi karaṇappakāro dassito.‘‘Hitatthāyā’’ti ca‘‘paṭubhāvakaraṃ vinayakkame’’ti ca‘‘apāraṃ otarantāna’’ntiādinā ca payojanaṃ.‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīna’’nti iminā bāhiranimittaṃ dassitaṃ. Abbhantaranimittaṃ pana bāhiranimittabhūtabhikkhubhikkhunivisayā karuṇā, sā ācariyassa pakaraṇārambheneva viññāyatīti visuṃ na vuttā.‘‘Pavakkhāmī’’ti iminā samānādhikaraṇabhāvena labbhamāno ‘‘aha’’nti suddhakattā sāmaññena dassito. Visesato pana pakaraṇāvasāne –
By "Vinayassavinicchaya," the name is shown, by dissolving the compound to show the name Vinayavinicchaya. By that name's accordance with its meaning, the subject matter to be expounded by all of this treatise is also shown by that. By "Samāsenā" and "anākulamasaṃkiṇṇaṃ, madhuratthapadakkama," the manner of composition is shown. By "Hitatthāyā" and "paṭubhāvakaraṃ vinayakkame" and by "apāraṃ otarantāna" and so on, the purpose. By "Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīna," the external occasion is shown. The internal occasion, however, is compassion concerning monks and nuns, who are the external occasion, and it is understood by the teacher's beginning of the treatise, and thus is not stated separately. By "Pavakkhāmī," the agent, obtained by co-reference, denoted by "aha," is shown in general. Specifically, however, at the end of the treatise –
buddhadattena,suddhacittena dhīmatā;
"By Buddhadatta, of pure mind, wise;
Wishing for the long duration of the Dispensation of the Great Sage." (u. vi. 961) –
buddhadattenaracitoyaṃ vinayavinicchayo’’ti (vi. vi. 3183) iminā vākyena ca dassito – ‘‘mādisāpi kavī honti, buddhadatte divaṅgate’’tiādinā pacchimakehi ca pasatthatarehi kavivarehi abhitthutaguṇobhadantabuddhadattācariyoveditabbo. Hetukattā ca tattheva vakkhamāno pakaraṇajjhesane katādhīnobuddhasīhamahāthero, so –
"This Vinayavinicchaya was composed by Buddhadatta," (vi. vi. 3183) by this sentence and – "even those like me are poets, after Buddhadatta passed away," by later and more famous excellent poets, Bhadantabuddhadattācariya should be known, whose virtues were praised. And the causal agent is the Buddhasīhamahāthera, who will be mentioned there, whose dependence on study for the treatise, who is –
‘‘Vuttassa buddhasīhena;
"The Vinayavinicchaya spoken by Buddhasīha;
Addressing Buddhasīha,
My pupil;
This was made for the benefit of the monks in brief." (vi. vi. 3177-3178) –
Evaṃ dassito.
Thus it was shown.
Uttarappakaraṇassa hetukattā panasaṅghapālamahāthero, sopi –
And Saṅghapāla Mahāthera is the causal agent of the Uttara treatise, who –
‘‘Khantisoraccasosilya-buddhisaddhādayādayo;
"Patience, gentleness, good conduct, wisdom, faith, compassion, and so on;
Qualities are established in whom, like gems in the ocean.
‘‘Vinayācārayuttena, tena sakkacca sādaraṃ;
"By him endowed with Vinaya conduct, respectfully and attentively;
Saṅghapāla, Thera of steadfast mind.
‘‘Suciraṭṭhitikāmena, vinayassa mahesino;
"Wishing for the long duration of the Vinaya of the Great Sage;
For the proficiency of monks in the Vinayavinicchaya;
Uttara by name." (u. vi. 965-968) –
mahāvaṃsādīsu –
In the Mahāvaṃsa and other texts –
‘‘Buddhassa viya gambhīra-
"Because of the depth of his voice like the Buddha's,
They declared him;
He who is 'Buddhaghosa',
[Is] like a Buddha on earth." –
bhadantabuddhaghosācariyo ca anussutivasena ‘‘hetukattā’’ti veditabbo.
Bhadantabuddhaghosācariya should be understood as "causal agent" by way of recollection.
bhadantabuddhadattācariyo laṅkādīpato sajātibhūmiṃ jambudīpamāgacchantobhadantabuddhaghosācariyaṃ jambudīpavāsikehi paṭipattiparāyanehi yuttabyattaguṇopetehi mahātheravarehi katārādhanaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathaṃ parivattetvā sakalajanasādhāraṇāya mūlabhāsāya tipiṭakapariyattiyā aṭṭhakathaṃ likhituṃ laṅkādīpaṃ gacchantaṃ antarāmagge disvā sākacchāya samupaparikkhitvā sabbalokātītena asadisena paṇḍiccaguṇena ratananidhidassane paramadaliddo viya balavaparitosaṃ patvā aṭṭhakathamassa kātukāmataṃ ñatvā ‘‘tumhe yathādhippetapariyantalikhitamaṭṭhakathaṃ amhākaṃ pesetha, mayamassā pakaraṇaṃ likhāmā’’ti tassa sammukhā paṭijānitvā tena ca ‘‘sādhu tathā kātabba’’nti ajjhesito abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaabhidhammāvatāraṃ,vinayaṭṭhakathāyasauttaraṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇañcaakāsīti anussuyyateti.
It is heard that when Bhadantabuddhadattācariya was coming from the island of Laṅkā to his native land, Jambudīpa, Bhadantabuddhaghosācariya, having been honored by the great venerable elders of Jambudīpa who were virtuous, skilled, and devoted to practice, and going to the island of Laṅkā to translate the Sinhala commentary and write the commentary on the Tipiṭaka scriptures in the original language for the common benefit of all people, was seen by him on the way, and having examined him through discussion, and having attained strong joy, like a very poor man seeing a treasure trove, with an incomparable quality of wisdom surpassing all the world, and knowing his desire to write the commentary, he promised in his presence, "You send us the commentary written as far as you intend, and we will write a treatise on it," and having been requested by him, "Good, that should be done," he made the Abhidhammāvatāra on the Abhidhamma commentary and the Suttara Vinayavinicchayapakaraṇa on the Vinaya commentary.
‘‘Samāsenā’’ti iminā ca parimāṇampi sāmaññena dassitaṃ vitthāraparimāṇe tassa parimāṇasāmaññassa viññāyamānattā. Visesato pana paricchedaparimāṇaṃ ganthaparimāṇanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha paricchedaparimāṇaṃ imasmiṃ pakaraṇe kathāvohārena vuccati.
By "Samāsenā," the extent is also shown in general, since that generality of extent is understood in the extent of the detailed extent. Specifically, however, the extent of the chapters and the extent of the verses are two types. Therein, the extent of the chapters is called kathā in this treatise.
vinayavinicchaye kathāparicchedo sattatiṃsa.
In the Vinayavinicchaya, there are thirty-seven chapters of kathā.
Uttarappakaraṇeca vuttanayena bhikkhuvibhaṅge sattavidhā kathā, bhikkhunivibhaṅge chabbidhā, tadanantarā vipattikathā, adhikaraṇapaccayakathā, khandhakapañhākathā, samuṭṭhānasīsakathā, āpattisamuṭṭhānakathā, ekuttaranayakathā, sedamocanakathā, vibhaṅgadvayanidānādikathā, sabbaṅgalakkhaṇakathā, parivārasaṅkalanakathātichattiṃsa kathāparicchedā.
In the Uttarappakaraṇa, in accordance with the manner stated, in the Bhikkhuvibhaṅga there are seven kinds of kathā, in the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga there are six kinds, followed by the kathā on adversities, the kathā on the causes of disputes, the kathā on the questions in the Khandhakas, the kathā on the origins of the rules, the kathā on the origins of offenses, the kathā on the Ekuttara method, the kathā on removing sweat, the kathā on the introduction to the two Vibhaṅgas, the kathā on all auspicious characteristics, and the kathā on the compilation of the Parivāra, thus thirty-six chapters of kathā.
Nissandehepana ‘‘aṭṭhatiṃsa kathāparicchedā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ekuttaranaye adassitehipi dvādasakapannarasakanayehi saha soḷasaparicchede gahetvā appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti katvā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ubhayattha kathāparicchedaparimāṇaṃtesattatividhaṃhoti.Nissandehe‘‘pañcasattatividhā’’ti vacane parihāro vuttanayova. Ganthaparimāṇaṃ pana vinayavinicchayeasītiganthādhikāni cattāri ganthasahassāni, uttarepaññāsaganthādhikāni nava ganthasatānihonti. Tena vuttaṃuttarāvasāne–
In the Nissandeha, it is stated, "thirty-eight sections of discourse." This should be understood as referring to taking sixteen sections together with the twelvefold and fifteenfold methods, even though the singlefold method is not shown, and it is said thus because it does not lend itself to numerical calculation with slight excesses or deficiencies. The extent of the discourse sections is seventy-threefold in both. In the Nissandeha, the solution to the statement "fifty-sevenfold" is as stated above. As for the extent of the text, in the Vinaya-vinicchaya, there are four thousand and eighty verses, and in the Uttara, there are nine hundred and fifty verses. Therefore, it was said at the end of the Uttara:
‘‘Gāthā catusahassāni, satañca ūnavīsati;
"Four thousand verses and ninety less than a hundred,
The Vinaya-vinicchaya should be known as the extent.
Paññāsādhikasaṅkhāni, nava gāthāsatāni hi;
Nine hundred verses, fifty more in number,
This is the calculation of the Uttara, by the Anutubbha meter." (u. vi. 969-970);
vinayavinicchayonāma ubhatovibhaṅgakhandhakāgatavinicchayasaṅgāhakapakaraṇaṃ. Tato paraṃ parivāratthasaṅgāhakapakaraṇaṃuttaronāma. Teneva vakkhati –
Vinaya-vinicchaya means the treatise that comprises the decisions on the Āgama of both Vibhaṅgas and Khandhakas. After that, the treatise that comprises the meaning of the Parivāra is called Uttara. Therefore, he will say:
‘‘Yo mayā racito sāro, vinayassavinicchayo;
"The essence that I have composed, the Vinaya-vinicchaya;
Now I will make the Uttara, the ultimate of all." (u. vi. 2)
Taṃ kasmā uttaranāmena vohariyatīti? Pañhuttaravasena ṭhite parivāre tatheva saṅgahetabbepi tena pakārena pārājikakathāmattaṃ dassetvā –
Why is it called by the name Uttara? Even though the Parivāra, which stands as questions and answers, should be compiled in the same way, after showing only the section on the Pārājika matters by that method—
‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya muñcitvā, pañhāpucchanamattakaṃ;
"From here on, giving up only the asking of questions,
The decision of meaning is only by way of explanation," (u. vi. 14) —
Vatvā pañhaṃ pahāya tato paṭṭhāya uttaramattasseva dassitattā tathā voharīyanti.
Having said this, from then on, only the answer is shown, hence it is referred to as such.
‘‘Tasmā vinayanūpāya’’ntiādinā pana sotujanaṃ sakkaccasavane niyojeti. Sakkaccasavanapaṭibaddhā hi sabbāpi lokiyalokuttarasampattīti ayamettha samudāyattho. Ayaṃ pana avayavattho – so yasmā atthayojanakkamena padayojanaṃ katvā vaṇṇite suviññeyyo hoti, tasmā tathā padayojanaṃ katvā atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma –
However, with "Tasmā vinayanūpāya" etc., he enjoins the audience to listen respectfully. For all worldly and supramundane attainments are bound up with respectful listening. This is the overall meaning here. Now, this is the sectional meaning: Because it is easily understood when described by arranging the words according to the sequence of the meaning, therefore, we will describe the meaning by arranging the words in that way—
Seṭṭhaṃ appaṭipuggalaṃ buddhañceva bhavābhāvakaraṃ dhammañceva niraṅgaṇaṃ gaṇañceva sirasā vanditvā bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca hitatthāya samāsena samāhito vinayassavinicchayaṃ vakkhāmīti yojanā.
Having bowed with my head to the Buddha, the best, without a peer, and to the Dhamma, the stainless, and to the Saṅgha, I will speak briefly on the Vinaya-vinicchaya for the welfare of the bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs.
seṭṭhanti sabbe ime pasatthā ayametesaṃ atisayena pasatthoti seṭṭho. Tathā hi so bhagavā ‘‘ahañhi brāhmaṇa jeṭṭho seṭṭho lokassā’’ti (pārā. 11) verañjabrāhmaṇassa attano jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvassa parijānanavinicchayahetubhūtāhi jhānādīhi niratisayaguṇasampattīhi samannāgatattā –
Seṭṭha: he is the best because he is exceedingly praised among all these who are praised. For that Blessed One, indeed, is endowed with unsurpassed qualities, such as jhāna, which are the cause of determining and ascertaining his seniority and excellence to the Verañja brahmin, "Indeed, brahmin, I am the eldest, the best in the world," (pārā. 11) —
‘‘Tvameva asi sambuddho, tuvaṃ satthā anuttaro;
"You alone are the fully enlightened one, you are the unsurpassed teacher;
In the world with its devas, there is no peer for you. (dī. ni. 2.370);
Tuvaṃ buddho tuvaṃ satthā, tuvaṃ mārābhibhū muni;
You are the Buddha, you are the Teacher, you are the Sage who has conquered Māra;
Having cut off the underlying tendencies, you have crossed over and carry this population across.
Upadhī te samatikkantā, āsavā te padālitā;
Your attachments are overcome, your āsavas are shattered;
You are a lion, without clinging, fear and dread abandoned. (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 550-551; theragā. 839-940);
Mahāvīra mahāpañña, iddhiyā yasasā jala;
Great Hero, Great Wisdom, blazing with power and fame,
Having gone beyond all enmity and fear, I bow at the feet of the one with vision." (saṃ. ni. 1.159; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.56); –
Ādīhī nānānayehi sadevakena lokena abhitthaviyatāya pasatthatamo, tameva seṭṭhaṃ pasatthatamanti attho.
Being praised by the world with its devas in various ways beginning with these, he is the most praised. That very one is the best, the most praised, is the meaning.
Appaṭipuggalanti natthi etassa paṭipuggalo adhiko, sadiso vāti appaṭipuggalo. Tathā hi guṇavasena anantāparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu attanā adhikassa, sadisassa vā puggalassa abhāvato –
Appaṭipuggala: there is no peer for him, neither superior nor equal; hence, he is without a peer. Indeed, due to the absence of a person superior or equal to himself in the endless, immeasurable world-systems in terms of qualities—
‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati;
"I have no teacher, no one equal to me is found;
In the world with its devas, there is no peer for me." (mahāva. 11) —
Attanāva attano aviparīto appaṭipuggalabhāvo paṭiññāto, tasmā taṃ appaṭipuggalaṃ sabbalokuttamanti attho.
His own state of being without peer, not contrary to himself, is declared by himself. Therefore, that peerless one is the highest in all the world, is the meaning.
Buddhanti anantamaparimeyyaṃ ñeyyamaṇḍalamanavasesaṃ buddhavāti buddho, etena anekakappakoṭisatasahassaṃ sambhatapuññañāṇasambhārānubhāvasiddhidhammarūpakāyasirivilāsapaṭimaṇḍito saddhammavaracakkavattī sammāsambuddho dassito. Atha vā cattāri saccāni sayaṃ vicitopacitapāramitāparipācitena savāsanānavasesakilesappahāyakena sayambhuñāṇena bujjhītibuddho. Yathāha –
Buddha: he knows the entire sphere of knowable things without remainder; therefore, he is the Buddha. By this, the Sammāsambuddha, adorned with the glory of the form-body and the Dhamma-body, the sovereign of the excellent Dhamma-wheel, is shown, whose attainment is due to the power of the accumulations of merit and wisdom gathered over hundreds of thousands of myriads of aeons. Or rather, he awakens to the four noble truths by his own self-existent knowledge that has matured the perfections he has accumulated and developed, and that destroys the defilements along with their latent tendencies without remainder; hence, he is Buddha. As he said—
‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ;
"What should be known is known, what should be developed is developed;
What should be abandoned is abandoned by me; therefore, brahmin, I am the Buddha." (ma. ni. 2.392, 399; su. ni. 563; theragā. 828);
niddesādīsu vuttanayena veditabbo. Saddasiddhi sāsanikānaṃ avagamanatthe vattamānā budha-dhātuto ‘‘bhāvakammesu ta’’ iti ito tātivattamāne ‘‘budhagamāditthe kattarī’’ti iminākaccāyanasuttena kattari tappaccayavidhānato veditabbā. Lokiyānaṃ pana bodhanatthadhātūnampi gamanatthatāya vuttattā gatyatthākammakādi suttato kattari ta-ppaccayakaraṇena veditabbā.
It should be understood in the way stated in the Niddesa etc. According to the grammatical tradition, the word 'Buddha' is derived from the root 'budh' with the suffix 'ta' in the senses of object and action and, when the suffix 'ta' comes, the rule of the agent is to be understood by this Kaccāyana-sutta, "budhagamāditthe kattari." However, for those who follow the worldly tradition, since the root signifying 'to awaken' is also said to have the sense of going, the 'ta' suffix in the agent is to be understood by the sutta 'gatyatthākammakādi'.
Atha vā dhātūnaṃ anekatthatāya budha-iccayaṃ dhātu jāgaraṇavikasanatthesu vattamāno akammakoti ‘‘pabuddho puriso, pabuddhaṃ paduma’’ntiādīsu viya buddhavā aññāṇaniddāvigamena ñāṇacakkhūni ummīlanto pabuddho, guṇehi vā vikasitoti kattari siddhena buddha-saddena ‘‘buddho’’ti tibhavanekacūḷāmaṇipādapaṅkajarāgaratano bhagavā lokanātho vuccati, imasmiṃ pakkhepi gatyatthādisutte akammakaggahaṇena paccayavidhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Or rather, since roots have multiple meanings, the root 'budh', existing in the meanings of waking up and blossoming, having the meaning of becoming awake, just as in "a man awakened, a lotus blossomed," he becomes awakened, opening the eyes of wisdom by the disappearance of the sleep of ignorance; or he blossoms with virtues, so the Blessed One, the Lord of the World, is called "Buddha" by the word 'Buddha' established in the agent, a jewel at the crest of three existences. In this case also, the affixation of the suffix should be seen with the inclusion of aggregation in the suttas beginning with 'gatyattha'.
Atha vā sakammakānaṃ dhātūnaṃ kammavacanicchāya abhāve akammakabhāvato ‘‘phalaṃ sayameva pakka’’ntiādīsu viya bodhanattheyeva budha-dhātuto kattari vidhānaṃ sijjhati. Atha vā nīlaguṇayogena paṭādīsu nīlavohāro viya bhāvasādhanaṃ buddha-saddaṃ gahetvā buddhaguṇayogato ‘‘buddho’’ti voharīyati. Evamanekadhā siddhena buddha-saddena vuccamānaṃ taṃ bhagavantaṃ taṃ dhammarājanti attho.
Or rather, since the meaning of the action of roots is not absent, because there is no absence of aggregation, the affixation of the suffix in the agent is accomplished from the root 'budh' in the sense of awakening itself, as in "the fruit ripened by itself" and so on. Or rather, just as the term 'blue' is used for cloth etc., due to association with the quality of blue, so too, taking the word 'Buddha' as a means of expression of state, he is referred to as 'Buddha' due to association with the qualities of a Buddha. Thus, by the word 'Buddha,' established in many ways, the Blessed One, that Lord of Dhamma, is referred to, is the meaning.
‘‘Seṭṭhaṃ appaṭipuggala’’nti padadvayaṃ ‘‘buddha’’nti etassa visesanaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘buddhaṃ, seṭṭhaṃ, appaṭipuggala’’nti imehi tīhi padehi nayato ‘‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.157; 3.6; ma. ni. 1.147, 144; 3.434; saṃ. ni. 1.249; 5.479; a. ni. 5.14, 30; 6.25, 26; netti. 93), ‘‘yo vadataṃ pavaro manujesu, sakyamunī bhagavā katakicco’’tiādīhi (vi. va. 886) ca anekehi suttapadehi dassitadūrāvidūrasantikanidānahetuphalasattopakārāvatthādhammattha- lokuddhārattikattayasaṅgahitaṃ suparisuddhaṃ buddhaguṇasamudayaṃ niravasesaṃ dasseti. Ayameva hi buddhaguṇānaṃ niravasesato dassanūpāyo, yadidaṃ nayadassanaṃ. Itarathā paṭipadavaṇṇanāya aparimitānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ ko hi nāma samattho pariyantaṃ gantuṃ. Yathāha –
The two words, "Seṭṭhaṃ appaṭipuggalaṃ," are adjectives of "Buddhaṃ." And here, with these three words, "Buddhaṃ, seṭṭhaṃ, appaṭipuggalaṃ," the entire, supremely pure collection of Buddha qualities is shown, which is gathered by the three kinds of benefit—benefit for beings, benefit of Dhamma, and benefit of the world—with proximate and remote causes and conditions shown by many Sutta passages, such as "Itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho," (dī. ni. 1.157; 3.6; ma. ni. 1.147, 144; 3.434; saṃ. ni. 1.249; 5.479; a. ni. 5.14, 30; 6.25, 26; netti. 93) and "Yo vadataṃ pavaro manujesu, sakyamunī bhagavā katakicco" (vi. va. 886). This alone is the means of showing the Buddha qualities without remainder, namely, this showing of method. Otherwise, who indeed would be capable of reaching the end of the immeasurable qualities of the Buddha through description by means of practice? As it was said—
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ;
"Even a Buddha might describe the qualities of a Buddha;
Even if he were not to utter another word for an aeon;
Evametehi tīhi padehi niravasesaguṇasaṃkittanathutiyā vasena ‘‘vanditvā’’ti iminā paṇāmassa ca vuttattā imāya aḍḍhagāthāya buddharatanasaṅkhātapaṭhamavandanīyavatthuvisayā thutipaṇāmasabhāvā vandanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Thus, because praise in brief of qualities without remainder has been stated by these three words, and because reverence has been stated by this "vanditvā," it should be seen that by this half-verse, reverence has been shown as the nature of praise and obeisance regarding the first object of veneration, which is called the Buddha-jewel.
‘‘bhavābhāvakaraṃ dhamma’’nti. Etthabhava-saddena dve bhavā vuttā kammabhavo, upapattibhavoti. Tattha kammabhavo bhavati etasmā phalanti‘‘bhavo’’ti vuccati. Vipākakkhandhakaṭattārūpasaṅkhāto pana upapattibhavo avijjātaṇhupādānasaṅkhārādisahakārikāraṇayuttena kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātakammabhavapaccayena yathārahaṃ bhavatīti‘‘bhavo’’ti vuccati. So pana kāmabhavarūpabhavaarūpabhavasaññībhavaasaññībhavanevasaññīnāsaññībhava- ekavokārabhavacatuvokārabhavapañcavokārabhavavasena navavidho. Evametesu navasu bhavesu dasavidhopi dhammo attānaṃ dhārentassa puggalasantānassa anupādisesanibbānadhātuyā paraṃ appaṭisandhikatāsādhanena bhavesu, bhavassa vā abhāvaṃ karotītibhavābhāvakaro,taṃ, aparāparajātippabandhassa hetusamugghātena appavattidhammatāpādakanti attho.
"Bhavābhāvakaraṃ Dhammaṃ": Here, by the word bhava, two kinds of becoming are stated: kamma-bhava and upapatti-bhava. There, kamma-bhava: from this, a result comes to be; therefore, it is called "bhava." However, upapatti-bhava, reckoned as the aggregates of result and materiality, comes into being appropriately due to kamma-bhava, which is reckoned as wholesome and unwholesome volition together with co-operative causes such as ignorance, craving, clinging, and volitional formations; therefore, it is called "bhava." And that is ninefold, as kāmabhava, rūpabhava, arūpabhava, saññībhava, asaññībhava, nevasaññīnāsaññībhava, ekavokārabhavacatuvokārabhavapañcavokārabhava. Thus, in these nine kinds of becoming, the Dhamma, even tenfold, makes the non-existence of becoming or in the becomings for the continuum of a person who maintains himself until the unconditioned Nibbāna element, by accomplishing a state of non-rebirth; therefore, it is bhavābhāvakaro, meaning that it causes the non-arising of the continuity of repeated births by the eradication of the root cause.
Dhammanti attānaṃ dhārente catūsu apāyesu, saṃsāre ca apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, so catumaggaphalanibbānasaṅkhātanavalokuttaradhammo ca tappaṭipādako navaṅgasāsanāparanāmadheyyacaturāsītisahassadhammakkhandhappabhedabhinno pariyattidhammo cāti dasavidho. Sopi nippariyāyadhammo, pariyāyadhammo cāti duvidho. Tattha nippariyāyadhammo nāma apāye, saṃsāre vā padhānahetubhūtānaṃ uddhambhāgiyānaṃ, orambhāgiyānañca dasannaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ samucchindanena maggadhammo, tassa taṃkiccanipphattinimittabhāvena nibbānadhammo cāti pañcavidhopi nippariyāyena puggalasantānaṃ dhāretīti katvā ‘‘nippariyāyadhammo’’ti vuccati. Cattāri pana sāmaññaphalāni paṭippassaddhipahānena maggānuguṇappavattiyā, pariyatti ca magganibbānādhigamassa mūlakāraṇabhāvatoti pañcavidhopipariyāyadhammonāma.
Dhamma: it maintains one from falling into the four woeful states and in saṃsāra; therefore, it is Dhamma. That is tenfold: the nine supramundane Dhammas, reckoned as the four paths, the four fruits, and Nibbāna, and the Dhamma of learning, which is the same as the ninefold teaching, which is divided into eighty-four thousand aggregates of Dhamma. That too is twofold: the Dhamma without interpretation and the Dhamma with interpretation. There, the Dhamma without interpretation is called "nippariyāyadhammo" because it maintains the person's continuum without interpretation by the path-Dhamma that cuts off the ten fetters, both higher and lower, which are the main causes of falling into the woeful states or into saṃsāra, and by the Nibbāna-Dhamma, due to its nature of being the result of that action. However, the four fruits of the ascetic life, by the arising in accordance with the paths through tranquility and abandonment, and the learning, because it is the root cause of attaining the path and Nibbāna, are called "pariyāyadhammo."
tadaṭṭhakathādīsuca vaṇṇitassa saraṇānussaraṇavasenāpi saggamokkhasampattipaṭilābhakāraṇassa anavasesassa dhammaratanaguṇassa nayato uddiṭṭhattā ca ‘‘vanditvā’’ti iminā paṇāmassa dassitattā ca dhammaratanasaṅkhātassa dutiyassa vandanīyassa thutipaṇāmasabhāvā vandanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
And because the qualities of the Dhamma-jewel, described in the commentaries etc., as the cause of obtaining the attainments of heaven and liberation, are completely and methodically indicated by way of mindfulness of the Buddha etc., and because reverence has been shown by this "vanditvā," it should be seen that reverence as the nature of praise and obeisance regarding the second object of veneration, which is called the Dhamma-jewel, has been shown.
‘‘gaṇañceva niraṅgaṇa’’nti. Ettha ‘‘rāgo aṅgaṇaṃ doso aṅgaṇaṃ moho aṅgaṇa’’nti (vibha. 924) vuttehi rāgādiaṅgaṇehi tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttivasena niggato vimuttotiniraṅgaṇo,taṃ niraṅgaṇaṃ. Ariyavaṃse sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātehi guṇagaṇehi gaṇīyatītigaṇo,taṃ.
"Gaṇañceva niraṅgaṇaṃ": Here, niraṅgaṇa, free from the defilements, is the state of being liberated by way of dispelling, eradicating, tranquilizing, and escaping from the defilements of rāga etc., which are stated as "Rāgo aṅgaṇaṃ, doso aṅgaṇaṃ, moho aṅgaṇaṃ" (vibha. 924); that is, niraṅgaṇaṃ. Gaṇo, the Saṅgha, is reckoned by the groups of virtues reckoned as the Noble Lineage, virtue, concentration, wisdom, liberation, and the knowledge and vision of liberation; that is, the Gaṇa.
tadaṭṭhakathādīsu ca vaṇṇitānaṃ vimalātulanikhilavisālapesalasīlādinānappakārānagghasaṅgharatanaguṇānaṃ saṃkittanasabhāvāya thutiyā ca ‘‘vanditvā’’ti etena yathāvuttasarūpapabhedapaṇāmassa vuttattā ca saṅgharatanasaṅkhātatatiyavandanīyavatthuvisayā thutippaṇāmasaṅkhātā vandanā dassitāti veditabbā.Sirasāti attappasādagāravāvahantena muddhanā.Vanditvāti paṇamitvā thomitvā vā.
And because the varieties of the priceless Saṅgha-jewel qualities, such as pure, incomparable, complete, extensive, gentle virtue etc., which are described in the commentaries etc., are of the nature of praise in brief, and because reverence of the previously stated form and divisions has been stated by this "vanditvā," it should be understood that reverence, counted as praise and obeisance, regarding the third object of veneration, which is called the Saṅgha-jewel, has been shown. Sirasā: with the head, bringing about delight and respect for oneself. Vanditvā: having bowed down or praised.
pāḷiyaṃ(pārā. 44-45; vibha. 510) pana ‘‘bhinnapaṭaṃ dhāretīti bhikkhu, bhikkhanasīloti bhikkhū’’tiādinā bhikkhusaddassa atthuddhāravasena nibbacanantarāni dassetvā pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvaraṇārahasseva adhippetabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampanno, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto bhikkhū’’ti dassitā sikkhākāmā sāsanāvacārā kulaputtā idhādhippetā, tesaṃ bhikkhūnañca.Bhikkhunīnañcāti aṭṭhavācikaupasampadākammena ubhatosaṅghe upasampannātādisāyeva kuladhītaro dassitā. Ekatopasampannāpi sāmaññena gayhanti.Ekatopasampannāti ca bhikkhunisaṅghe upasampajjitvā yāva bhikkhusaṅghe na upasampajjanti, tāva, bhikkhunī ca liṅgaparivattanena bhikkhunibhāvappattā adhippetā, tāsaṃ bhikkhunīnañca.
In the Pāḷi(pārā. 44-45; vibha. 510), however, after showing other explanations by way of extracting the meaning of the word 'bhikkhu' as "one who wears cast-off robes is a bhikkhu; one whose nature is to beg is a bhikkhu," in order to show that only one who is worthy of restraint by the Pātimokkha is intended, it is shown, "One who has been ordained by the Saṅgha with the ñatticatuttha procedure, which is unshakeable and fitting, this bhikkhu is intended in this meaning." Here, those sons of good family who desire training and are within the dispensation are intended as bhikkhus. Bhikkhunīnañca: and those daughters of good family who have been ordained in both Saṅghas by the ordination procedure with eight weighty rules are shown. Even those ordained in one Saṅgha are included generally. Ekatopasampannā means that until those who have been ordained in the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha are ordained in the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and also those Bhikkhunīs who have attained the state of being a Bhikkhunī by a change of gender, are intended; to those Bhikkhunīs.
Hitatthāyāti sabbasampattinipphādakaraṇatthāya hinoti gacchati yathādhippetaphalasādhane pavattatīti hitanti arogatādikāraṇaṃ amatosadhādi vuccati. Idha pana saggamokkhasampattisiddhikāraṇaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlarakkhanaṃ vuccati, tadatthāya.
Hitatthāyā: for the sake of benefit, meaning for the purpose of accomplishing all kinds of success. "Hita" means that which eliminates, goes towards, and brings about the desired result; it refers to the cause of well-being, such as health, or the elixir of immortality. Here, however, it refers to the preservation of the Pātimokkha-saṃvara Sīla, which causes the attainment of the bliss of heaven and liberation. It is for that purpose.
Samāhitosammā āhito pavattito vinicchayamaggo etenāti ‘‘samāhito’’ti pakaraṇakārako dassito. Atha vā sammā āhitaṃ vinayavinicchaye ṭhapitaṃ pavattitaṃ cittametassāti ‘‘samāhitacitto’’ti vattabbe uttarapadalopena‘‘samāhito’’ti vutto. Paramagambhīrasuduttaravinayapiṭakatthavinicchaye pavattanārahassa iminā visesanena attani samāhitacittappavattinimittabhūto attano ñāṇassa padaṭṭhānabhūto samādhi dassito tena samādhinā samāhito hutvāti attho.
Samāhito: well composed, established, and set forth, the path of judgment is called "samāhito". Thus, the agent of the context is shown. Or, alternatively, because his mind is well-established, placed, and directed in the adjudication of the Vinaya, he should be called "samāhitacitto" (one whose mind is composed), but by the elision of the latter part of the compound, he is called "samāhito". By this adjective, a state of mental composure is indicated, which enables him to engage in the profound and difficult task of determining the meaning of the Vinaya Piṭaka. It indicates the composure of mind within himself, the basis for the arising of his knowledge. The meaning is that having become composed with that samādhi.
Pavakkhāmīti pakārena vakkhāmi, yena pakārena vinayavinicchaye vutte ajjatanā mandasatimativīriyā paṭipajjanakā gambhīrataraṃ vinayapiṭakatthavinicchayaṃ sukhena uggaṇhituṃ, dhāretuñca sakkonti, tādisena pakāravisesena vakkhāmīti attho.Samāsenāti samasanaṃ saṃkhipanaṃ samāso, tena, saṃkhittarucikānamugghāṭitaññūnaṃ katādhikārānaṃ ñāṇuttarānaṃ puggalānañca papañcabhīrukānaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇe mandayantānaṃ mandabuddhīnañca upakārakena nātivitthārakkamenāti attho.Vinayassāti vinayapiṭakassa. Tañhi –
Pavakkhāmī: I will speak in a manner, by which those of little learning, intelligence, energy, and application can easily learn and retain the profound interpretations of the Vinaya Piṭaka. That is, I will speak with such a special method. Samāsenā: "samāsana" means condensing, shortening, "samāso" (a summary), by that, in a way that is not too extensive, so that it benefits those who like brevity, those who grasp the meaning with a little explanation, those who have developed their faculties, those whose knowledge is superior, those who are afraid of elaboration, those whose minds are slow to grasp and retain, and those of dull intellect. Vinayassa: of the Vinaya Piṭaka. For indeed –
‘‘Vividhavisesanayattā;
"Because of its diverse and specialized guidance;
And because it guides bodily and verbal actions;
The wise, skilled in the Vinaya,
Call this the Vinaya, meaning ‘guidance.’" (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) –
Vinicchayanti visesena, vividhena vā ākārena vippaṭipattinīharaṇavasena cīyati vibhajīyatīti ‘‘vinicchayo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ vibhajanaṃ, vinayavinicchayaṃ nāma pakaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Vinayassavinicchaya’’nti ca aluttasamāsoyaṃ ‘‘devānaṃpiyatisso, kaṇṭhekāḷo’’tiādīsu viya.
Vinicchaya: "Vinicchaya" (judgment) is so named because it discerns or divides in a special or varied manner, resolving disputes. It is called "vinayavinicchaya", meaning the subject matter. The phrase "‘‘Vinayassavinicchaya’’" is an alutta-samāsa (a compound with an indeclinable word), like in the phrases "devānaṃpiyatisso, kaṇṭhekāḷo" etc.
‘‘anākula’’miccādi. Tatthaanākulanti natthi ettha saddato, atthato, vinicchayato vā ākulaṃ pubbāparavirodho, missatā vāti anākulo, vinayavinicchayo, taṃ vadato me nibodhathāti sambandho.Asaṃkiṇṇanti nikāyantaraladdhīhi asammissaṃ.
‘‘anākula’’etc. Here, anākula means that in which there is no confusion in terms of words, meaning, or judgment; it is without contradiction, inconsistencies, or mixing up. This Vinaya-vinicchaya is "anākula". The connection is, "Listen to me as I speak it". Asaṃkiṇṇa: unmixed with the views of other schools.
Madhuratthapadakkamanti padānaṃ kamo padakkamo, padagati, saddānamuccāraṇanti attho. Madhuro attho ca padakkamo ca yassa so madhuratthapadakkamo, taṃ –
Madhuratthapadakkama: the order of words is "padakkamo", the progression of words, the pronunciation of sounds. That whose meaning and order of words is sweet is "madhuratthapadakkamo", that –
‘‘Padāsattaṃ padatthānaṃ, madhuratthamudīritaṃ;
"Connected to the words, related to their meanings,
Uttering sweet meanings;
By which the wise are delighted,
Like bees by honey." –
Iminā lakkhaṇena saddānamatthānañca vasena padāsattāparanāmadheyyamādhuriyālaṅkārena samalaṅkatattā madhuratthapadakkamaṃ.
By this characteristic, being adorned with the embellishment of sweetness, also called padāsattā, in terms of both sounds and meanings, it is "madhuratthapadakkama".
Paṭubhāvakaranti paṭati gacchati pajānātīti paṭu, paññavā, paṭuno bhāvo, saddappavattinimittabhūtā paññā, taṃ paṭubhāvaṃ paññāvisesaṃ karoti janetīti paṭubhāvakaro, taṃ, paññāvisesajanakanti attho. Etaṃ vinayassa vinicchayanti yojanā.Paramanti uttamaṃ.Vinayakkameti vinayapiṭake, tadatthe ca, pavattikkame paṭubhāvakaranti attho.
Paṭubhāvakara: one who goes to, understands, is wise, is "paṭu". The state of the "paṭu" (wise one), the wisdom that causes the arising of words, that which generates that wisdom, that specialized knowledge, is "paṭubhāvakara", meaning the generator of specialized knowledge. This is "vinayassa vinicchaya". Parama: excellent. Vinayakkame: in the Vinaya Piṭaka, and in its meaning, it is "paṭubhāvakara" in the order of exposition.
‘‘apāra’’ntiādicatutthagāthāya pakaraṇañca tannissayaṃ vinayapiṭakañca nāvāsāgarabhāvena dassetvā tirobhūtopameyyopamānabhedena rūpakālaṅkārena pakaraṇaguṇaṃ pakāsento sotujanaṃ samuttejeti. Tatthaapāranti natthi pāraṃ etassāti apāro, vinayasāgaro. So hi purimabuddhuppādesu sāsanaṃ pasīditvā vinayapiṭake uggahaṇadhāraṇapaṭipādanapaṭipattivasena akatādhikārehi puggalehi duradhigamanīyadhammatthaniruttipaṭibhānapariyantatāya ‘‘apāro’’ti vuccati.
‘‘apāra’’etc. In the fourth verse, by showing the subject matter and the Vinaya Piṭaka dependent on it in terms of a ship and an ocean, and by the figure of speech of concealed simile, he praises the qualities of the subject matter, encouraging the audience. Here, apāra: that which has no shore, is "apāro", the ocean of the Vinaya. Because in the times of previous Buddhas, the dispensation prospered, and because the Vinaya Piṭaka, in terms of learning, retaining, teaching, and practice, has an extent of Dhamma, meaning, expression, and insight that is unattainable by individuals who have not developed their faculties, it is called "apāro".
Otarantānanti sajjhāyanasavanadhāraṇādivasena ajjhogāhantānaṃ.Sāranti nibbānasampāpakabhāvena sārabhūtāya ariyamaggasambhārāya pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyā mūlabhūtapātimokkhasaṃvarasaṅkhātasīlasārappakāsakatāya sāraṃ.Vinayasāgaranti vinayapiṭakasaṅkhātaṃ sāgaraṃ. Vinayo hi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā kālappattajānanassāpi dhammasenāpatiādīnampi avisayattā atigambhīrātivitthiṇṇabhāvena sāgaro viyāti sāgaro, vinayo ca so sāgaro cāti vinayasāgaro, taṃ, agādhāpāraguṇayogato sāgaropamaṃ vinayapiṭakanti attho.
Otarantāna: for those who are diving in, engaging in study, listening, and retaining. Sāra: essence, because it reveals the essence of the Sīla consisting of the Pātimokkha-saṃvara, which is the root of the preliminary practice for the accumulation of the Noble Path, which is essential for attaining Nibbāna. Vinayasāgara: the ocean called Vinaya Piṭaka. Because the Vinaya, due to its profundity and vastness in the rules of training, is beyond the scope of even the Dhammasenāpati (Sariputta) and others in knowing when it is the right time, it is like an ocean. Therefore, the Vinaya is an ocean, hence "vinayasāgaro", meaning the Vinaya Piṭaka, which is comparable to an ocean due to its unfathomable and boundless qualities.
‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīna’’nti puna vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nāvā viya bhūtonāvābhūto,taṃ, nāvāṭṭhāniyaṃ mahānāvāsadisanti attho.Manoramanti mano ramati ettha, etenāti vā manoramo, taṃ, ajjhāyanavohārapasutānaṃ paṭipattiparāyanānañca sādhūnaṃ manoramanti attho.
‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīna’’: should be seen as repeated. That which is like a ship is nāvābhūto, meaning like a great ship in a harbor. Manorama: that in which the mind delights, or by which the mind delights, is "manoramo", meaning delightful to the virtuous who are devoted to learning and practice.
‘‘tasmā vinayanūpāya’’ntiādimāha. Tatthatasmāti yasmā yathāvuttaṃ anākulatādivividhānagghaguṇālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ, tena hetunāti attho.Vinayanūpāyanti vividhākārena, visesanayato vā kāyavācānaṃ nayanaṃ damanaṃ akattabbato nivattetvā kattabbesu niyojanaṃ vinayanaṃ, upecca taṃ phalaṃ āyati uppajjatīti upāyo, hetu, vinayanassa upāyo vinayanūpāyo, taṃ, kāyajīvitānapekkhānaṃ sikkhākāmānaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ kāyavācānaṃ ananulomikavipphanditāpanayanasaṅkhātadamanassa kāraṇabhūtanti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘‘tasmā vinayanūpāya’’etc. he said. Here, tasmā: because it is adorned with the various invaluable qualities such as being "anākulatā" (unconfused), etc., for that reason. Vinayanūpāya: "vinayanaṃ" means guiding, taming, turning away from what should not be done and directing towards what should be done, in various ways or with special guidance of body and speech; "upāyo" means that the result arises dependent on it, a cause. "Vinayanūpāyo" means the means of guiding. That is, for monks and nuns who desire training and are gentle, without regard for their lives, it is the cause of taming, which consists of removing unwholesome expressions of body and speech.
‘‘vinayassavinicchaya’’nti. Ettha ca dutiyagāthāya ‘‘vinayassavinicchaya’’nti ‘‘pavakkhāmī’’ti kiriyāya kammadassanavasena vuttaṃ, taṃ idha ānetvā sambandhiyamānampi dūrasambandhaṃ hotīti tamanānetvā ‘‘nibodhathā’’ti imissā kiriyāya kammasandassanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayassavinicchaya’’nti vuttattā punaruttidosābhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
‘‘vinayassavinicchaya’’. Here, in the second verse, "vinayassavinicchaya" is stated as the object of the verb "pavakkhāmī". If that is brought here and connected, it would be a distant connection. Therefore, without bringing that, "vinayassavinicchaya" is stated to show the object of the verb "nibodhathā". Thus, there is no fault of repetition, it should be seen.
Avikkhittena cittenāti ettha vividhe ārammaṇe khittaṃ pesitaṃ vikkhittaṃ, uddhaccavicikicchādiparetaṃ asamāhitaṃ cittaṃ, na vikkhittaṃ avikkhittaṃ, tappaṭipakkhaṃ samāhitaṃ kusalacittaṃ, tena, etassa pakaraṇuttamassa savanādibyāpāraṃ vinā nānārammaṇesu pavattivasena vikkhepamanāpannena samāhitena cittenāti attho. ‘‘Avikkhittena…pe… nibodhathā’’ti vadantena ca ‘‘avikkhittassāyaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo vikkhittassā’’ti vacanato vikkhittassa dhammesu dāyādābhāvato attano pakaraṇatthabhūtāya adhisīlasikkhāya sammāpaṭipajjanāpadeso kato hoti.
Avikkhittena cittenā: here, "vikkhittaṃ" means scattered, sent to various objects, agitated, overcome by uddhacca (restlessness) and vicikicchā (doubt), uncomposed mind. "Na vikkhittaṃ" means "avikkhittaṃ", its opposite, a composed, wholesome mind. By that, it means with a composed mind that is not scattered by being engaged in various objects apart from the activity of hearing etc. of this excellent treatise. By saying "Avikkhittena…pe… nibodhathā", and by the saying, "This Dhamma is for one who is not scattered, this Dhamma is not for one who is scattered", because the scattered one has no inheritance in the Dhammas, an indication of proper practice of the adhisīla-sikkhā, which is the essential meaning of his treatise, is made.
Vadatometi ettha ‘‘gāravena cā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Tatthāyamattho – bhāsamāne mayi gāravena, yathāvuttena kāraṇena cāti sāmibhummānamavisesatāya ‘‘me’’ti sāmivacanassa ‘‘mayī’’ti atthasambhavato ayamattho vutto. Pakaraṇassa anākulatādiguṇasamannāgatattā ca vattari mayi gāravena ca samāhitena cetasāti adhippāyo.Nibodhathāti vākyatthapadatthaṃ sandhāyabhāsitatthabhāvatthādivasena nisesato bodhatha, sakkaccaṃ sutvā vinayavinicchayaṃ bujjhatha vijānāthāti attho, cintābhāvanāmayañāṇānaṃ mūlabhūtapakaraṇavisayaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ nipphādethāti adhippāyo.
Vadatome: here, the rest of the reading is "gāravena ca". Here is the meaning: "me" (to me) implies respect, and also due to the reason stated previously. Because the word "me" (to me) has the sense of "mayī" (in me) due to the excellence and non-difference of ownership, this meaning is stated. The implication is that with a composed mind, and with respect for me, the speaker, because the treatise is endowed with qualities such as being "anākulatādi" (unconfused) etc. Nibodhathā: understand completely, having carefully listened, understand and know the Vinaya-vinicchaya in terms of the meaning of the sentence, the meaning of the words, the expressed meaning, the implied meaning, etc. The implication is to produce the sutamaya-ñāṇa (knowledge based on hearing), which is the foundation for the cintāmaya-ñāṇa (knowledge based on thinking) and bhāvanāmaya-ñāṇa (knowledge based on meditation) regarding the subject matter of the treatise.
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of the introduction to the book is finished.
Bhikkhuvibhaṅgo
Bhikkhuvibhaṅgo
Pārājikakathā
Pārājikakathā
Paṭhamapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the First Pārājikakathā
6.Evaṃ pañcahi gāthāhi ratanattayapaṇāmādiṃ dassetvā idāni yathāpaṭiññātavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tividhe’’tiādi. Tattha‘‘tividhe’’tiādinā paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadavinicchayaṃ dasseti.Tividheti vaccapassāvamukhamaggānaṃ vasena tippakāremaggeti iminā sambandho.Tilamattampīti tilabījamattampi aṅgajātanti sambandho.Maggeti vaccapassāvānaṃ nikkhamanadvāratāya, annapānapittasemhādīnaṃ pavesananikkhamanadvāratāya ca maggavohāragate sarīrappadese, allokāseti sambandho. ‘‘Maggesu tilamattampi, tīsu sevanacetano’’ti vattabbepi ‘‘tividhe’’ti pakāravācividhasaddopādānena sajātisaṅgahavasena tīhi rāsīhi saṅgahetvā pabhedavasena tiṃsavidho maggo dassito hoti.
6. Having shown the homage to the Triple Gem etc. with these five verses, now, in order to show the judgment as promised, he says ‘‘tividhe’’etc. Here, with ‘‘tividhe’’etc., he shows the judgment of the first pārājika training rule. Tividhe: in three ways, in the three types, in terms of the vaginal passage, the anal passage, and the oral passage. This is connected with magge (in the passage). Tilamattampī: even the size of a sesame seed. This is connected with "aṅgajātaṃ" (the organ). Magge: in the part of the body that is called "magga" (passage) because it is the exit for urine and feces, and because it is the entrance and exit for food, drink, bile, phlegm, etc., it is connected with "allokāseti" (exposes).
pāḷiyaṃdassitamanussāmanussatiracchānagatitthīnaṃ paccekaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vasena nava maggā, tatheva dassitānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ubhatobyañjanakānaṃ vasena nava maggā, tiṇṇaṃ pana paṇḍakānaṃ mukhamaggavaccamaggānaṃ vasena paccekaṃ dve dve maggāti cha maggā, tathā tiṇṇaṃ pana purisānanti evaṃ tiṃsavidho hoti.
In the pāḷi, there are nine passages in terms of the three passages each for human females, non-human females, and animal females as shown. Likewise, there are nine passages in terms of the three intersexes shown. However, for the three paṇḍakas (eunuchs), there are two passages each in terms of the oral passage and the anal passage, thus six passages. Likewise, for the three males. Thus, there are thirty types.
Sevanacetanoti sevane methunapayoge cetanā assāti viggaho, methunarāgūpasaṃhitāya cetanāya samannāgatoti attho.Allokāseti tiṃsamaggānamaññatare magge pakativātena asaṃphuṭṭhe allapadese, iminā bāhiraṃ pārājikakkhettaṃ na hotīti dīpeti. Visesanassa visesāpekkhattā dutiyagāthāya ‘‘sasikkho so’’ti padadvayaṃ āharitvā ‘‘sevanacetano sasikkho so bhikkhū’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
Sevanacetano: "sevana" means sexual intercourse, "cetanā assā" (there is intention in him), is the derivation, meaning endowed with intention accompanied by sexual desire. Allokāse: in the untouched, exposed part of any of the thirty passages that is not touched by the natural wind. By this, he indicates that the outside is not the pārājika territory. Because the specification requires a specific relation, the two words "sasikkho so" from the second verse should be brought in and connected, so that it becomes "sevanacetano sasikkho so bhikkhū" (that monk who has intention for intercourse and is in training).
aṅgajātaṃ,purisanimittaṃ. Satipi avasesasarīrāvayavānaṃ tathābhāve ruḷhivasena tadeva tathā vuttaṃ.Pavesentoti dvayaṃdvayasamāpattisaṅkhātakāyikakiriyaṃ nipphādento.Parājitoti dullabhāya khaṇasampattiyā laddhabbato dullabhā lokiyalokuttaraguṇasampattisukhato parihāpetvā kilesasapattehi parājayamāpāditoti attho.
aṅgajātaṃ: the male organ. Even though there is such a state in the remaining parts of the body, it is so called because of the established convention. Pavesento: causing the performance of the physical action that is called dual intercourse. Parājito: defeated, because he has fallen away from the bliss of having attained the rare occurrence of favorable conditions and the attainment of worldly and supramundane qualities, having been defeated by the enemy of defilements.
Ayamettha yojanā – sasikkho sevanacetano tividhe magge allokāse aṅgajātaṃ tilamattampi pavesento so bhikkhu parājito hotīti. Ettāvatā –
Here is the connection: that monk who is in training and has intention for intercourse, by inserting the organ even the size of a sesame seed in an exposed spot in the threefold passage, is defeated. To this extent –
‘‘Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti (pārā. 44) –
"Whatever monk, adhering to the training and way of life of the monks, without renouncing the training, declaring his weakness, engages in sexual intercourse, even with an animal, is defeated and no longer in communion." (pārā. 44) –
Bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadaṃ saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
The training rule declared by the Buddha is summarized, it should be seen.
7.Evaṃ imissā gāthāya attūpakkamamūlakaṃ pārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena (pārā. 58) aṅgajāte abhinisīdentī’’tiādinayappavattaṃ paropakkamamūlakaṃ pārājikañca dassetumāha‘‘pavesana’’ntiādi. Tatthapavesananti bhikkhupaccatthikehi suttapamattādimanussitthiādīnamaññataraṃ ānetvā yathāvuttamaggānamaññataraṃ maggaṃ yathā pavisati, tathā bhikkhuno aṅgajāte abhinisīdāpane sambhavantaṃ maggappavesanamāha. Pavesanaṃ sādiyanto sasikkho soti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘pavesanaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, tasmiṃ khaṇe sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.58)aṭṭhakathāvacanato aggato yāva mūlaṃ pavesentesu assādacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpento taṅkhaṇeyeva sāsanato cutoti attho.Paviṭṭhantiādīsu padesupi evameva yojanā.
7. Having shown the pārājika that has self-initiated action as its root in this verse, now, in order to show the pārājika that has action initiated by others as its root, which occurs in the manner of "hostile people bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down on his organ with her anal passage" (pārā. 58) etc., he says ‘‘pavesana’’etc. Here, pavesana: refers to the act of causing entry into the passage that occurs when hostile people bring a human female etc., one of the sleepy or intoxicated ones, and make her sit down on the monk's organ in such a way that she enters one of the passages as stated above. "Pavesanaṃ sādiyanto sasikkho so" (he who approves the entry, who is in training). This is the connection. Here, according to the aṭṭhakathā statement, "he approves and accepts the entry, and at that moment establishes a mind of sexual enjoyment" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.58), the meaning is that he falls from the dispensation at the very moment when he establishes a mind of enjoyment while they are causing entry from the beginning to the base. The connection should be made in this way in the phrases Paviṭṭhantiādi (entered) etc. as well.
Paviṭṭhanti paviṭṭhakkhaṇo. ‘‘Paviṭṭha’’ntiādinā tāya tāya kiriyāya upalakkhito khaṇo gahetabbo. Tenevettha accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ.Ṭhitanti ettha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanassa sabbathā byāpārarahitaṃ kālaṃ sandhāya vuttattā sukkavissaṭṭhisamayopi gahetabbo. Tenevagaṇṭhipadevuttanayena paviṭṭhassa ca yāva uddharaṇārambho, tāva sambhavanto ṭhitakālopi gahetabbo.Uddharaṇanti nīharaṇakālo.
Paviṭṭha: the moment of entering. By "Paviṭṭha" etc., the moment characterized by that action should be taken. Therefore, the locative case is used to indicate continuous connection. Ṭhita: here, the meaning of the aṭṭhakathā statement, "at the time of semen emission", is stated in reference to the time that is completely devoid of activity. Therefore, the time of semen emission should also be taken. Therefore, as stated in the gaṇṭhipada, the time of standing that occurs from the moment of entering until the beginning of the removal should also be taken. Uddharaṇa: the time of removing.
Vāti vikappe,apīti samuccaye, sovā-saddena vikappitānaṃ pakkhānaṃ tulyabalataṃ joteti. Iti imehi dvīhipi ‘‘so ce pavesanaṃ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṃ sādiyatī’’tiādinā (pārā. 58)pāḷiyaṃāgatanayena labbhamānaṃ pavesanādiekakkhaṇampi sādiyanapaccayā āpajjamānaṃ pārājikaṃ dasseti.Sasikkhoti sikkhāya saha vattatīti sasikkho, apaccakkhātasikkhoti attho.Sādiyantoti sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpento.Sobhikkhu.Ṭhapetvā kiriyanti attūpakkamanaṃ vinā.Cutoti ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikehi katamidaṃ, na mayā’’ti lesena na muccati, sādiyanacitte sati sāsanato cutoyeva hotīti adhippāyo.
Vā: means alternative, apī: means combination. The "sovā" emphasizes the equal weight of the alternatives presented by the "vā" (or). Thus, with these two, it shows the pārājika that is incurred due to approving even a single moment of entry etc., which is obtained in the manner that comes in the pāḷi, "if he approves the entry, approves the entered" etc. (pārā. 58). Sasikkho: one who lives with the training, meaning one who has not renounced the training. Sādiyanto: establishing a mind of sexual enjoyment. So bhikkhu (that monk). Ṭhapetvā kiriya: without self-initiated action. Cuto: fallen, the implication is that he is not freed by the excuse that "this was done by hostile people, not by me". If there is a mind of approval, he has indeed fallen from the dispensation.
sasikkhoti idaṃ ‘‘sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti (pārā. 44) sikkhāpadapāṭhassa atthadassanavasena niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tassapadabhājane(pārā. 45),tadaṭṭhakathāyaca vibhattaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ saṅkhepato evaṃ veditabbaṃ – cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānanavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Upasampannabhāvato cavitukāmatācitteneva hi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na davā vā ravā vā vadantassa. Evaṃ cittavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
Sasikkho (with training) here is specified in relation to showing the meaning of the phrase in the sikkhāpada (rule), "without renouncing the training, without declaring weakness" (pārā. 44). This renunciation of training, which is distinguished in the Padabhājana (analysis of terms) (pārā. 45) and in its commentary, should be understood concisely as follows: Renunciation of training occurs based on mind, field, time, application, person, and understanding, not without these. Renunciation of training occurs only with the intention to abandon the state of being a fully ordained monk (upasampanna), not when speaking under duress or in jest. Thus, renunciation of training occurs based on mind, not without it.
Tathā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ catuddasannaṃ, ‘‘gihīti maṃ dhārehi, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, assamaṇo, asakyaputtiyoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ gihiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannañcāti imesaṃ bāvīsatiyā khettapadānaṃ yassa kassaci savevacanassa vasena tesu yaṃ kiñci vattukāmassa yaṃ kiñci vadato sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na rukkhādīnaṃ aññatarassa nāmaṃ gahetvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhantassa. Evaṃ khettavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
Similarly, renunciation of training occurs when one intending to say anything whatsoever, says anything whatsoever of these twenty-two field-terms with any variation: the fourteen, such as, "I renounce the Buddha, I renounce the Dhamma, I renounce the Sangha, the training, the discipline, the Pātimokkha, the recitation, the preceptor, the teacher, the co-resident, the pupil, the one with the same preceptor, the one with the same teacher, the fellow-brahmacāri (one who lives the holy life)"; and the eight, such as, "Consider me a layman, a follower, an attendant in a monastery, a novice, a sectarian, a follower of a sectarian, a non-ascetic, a non-son of the Sakyans," but not when renouncing the training while taking the name of a tree or another thing. Thus, renunciation of training occurs based on field, not without it.
Tattha yadetaṃ ‘‘paccakkhāmī’’ti ca ‘‘maṃ dhārehī’’ti cāti vuttaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ, yāni ca ‘‘alaṃ me buddhena, kiṃ nu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādinā nayena ākhyātavasena kālaṃ anāmasitvā purimehi cuddasahi padehi saddhiṃ yojetvā vuttāni ‘‘alaṃ me’’tiādīni cattāri padāni, tesaṃyeva savevacanānaṃ vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na ‘‘paccakkhāsi’’nti vā ‘‘paccakkhissa’’nti vā ‘‘maṃ dhāresī’’ti vā ‘‘maṃ dhāressatī’’ti vā ‘‘yaṃ nūnāhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vātiādīni atītānāgataparikappavacanāni bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ vattamānakālavasena ceva anāmaṭṭhakālavasena ca paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
Here, that which is said, the present-tense word "I renounce" and "Consider me," and those four terms such as "Enough for me is the Buddha, what is the Buddha to me, I have no need of the Buddha, I am well rid of the Buddha," which are stated without reference to time in the manner of verbal inflection, having been combined and stated with the preceding fourteen terms, renunciation occurs based on those same variations, but not when uttering past, future, or speculative words, such as "I renounced," or "I will renounce," or "Considered me," or "Will consider me," or "Indeed, I should renounce." Thus, renunciation occurs based on the present tense and on non-reference to time, not without it.
Payogo pana duvidho kāyiko ca vācasiko ca. Tattha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā nayena yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vacībhedaṃ katvā vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na akkharalikhanaṃ vā hatthamuddādidassanaṃ vā kāyapayogaṃ karontassa. Evaṃ vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
Application (payoga), however, is of two kinds: bodily and verbal. There, renunciation occurs only by verbal application, making a distinction in speech in any language, in the manner of "I renounce the Buddha," etc., not when making a bodily application by writing letters or showing hand gestures, etc. Thus, renunciation occurs only by verbal application, not without it.
Puggalo pana duvidho yo ca paccakkhāti, yassa ca paccakkhāti. Tattha yo paccakkhāti, so sace ummattakakhittacittavedanaṭṭānaṃ aññataro na hoti. Yassa pana paccakkhāti, so sace manussajātiko hoti, na ca ummattakādīnaṃ aññataro, sammukhībhūto ca sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Na hi asammukhībhūtassa dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocanaṃ ruhati. Evaṃ yathāvuttassa puggalassa vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
The person (puggala), however, is of two kinds: the one who renounces and the one to whom he renounces. There, the one who renounces must not be any of the following: insane, deranged, or in a state of mental distress. However, if the one to whom he renounces is of the human species, and is not any of the insane, etc., and is present, then the renunciation of training occurs. Indeed, announcement by a messenger or a letter to one who is not present does not take effect. Thus, renunciation occurs based on the person as described, not without it.
Vijānanampi niyamitāniyamitavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa, yesaṃ vā niyametvā ‘‘imassa, imesaṃ vā ārocemī’’ti vadati. Sace te yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā āvajjanasamaye jānanti, evaṃ tassa vacanānantarameva tassa ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ jānanti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti cintetvā jānanti, aññe vā jānanti, apaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aniyametvā ārocentassa pana sace vuttanayena yo koci manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ vijānanavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Yo pana antamaso davāyapi paccakkhāti, tena apaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā.
Understanding (vijānana) too is twofold: determinate and indeterminate. There, if one specifies to whom he will announce, saying, "I announce to this one, or to these ones," and if they, as humans in the world would naturally do, understand the speech upon hearing it and turning their minds to it, then immediately after that speech, if that person knows the fact of the renunciation of training in any way, such as "this one is disgusted," or "desires the state of a householder," then the training is renounced. But if they think about it later, "What did this one say?" and then understand, or others understand, the training is not renounced. However, if one announces indeterminately, and if any human being understands the meaning of the speech in the manner stated, then the training is renounced. Thus, renunciation occurs based on understanding, not without it. However, if one renounces even under duress, the training is not renounced.
Iti imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ cittādīnaṃ vasena apaccakkhātasikkho ‘‘sasikkho’’ti vutto.
Thus, one who has not renounced the training due to these aforementioned mind, etc., is called "sasikkho" (with training).
8-10.‘‘Idāni santhatena santhatassa ghaṭṭane upādinnakaghaṭṭanābhāvato doso natthī’’ti pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesakappanaṃ paṭikkhipituṃ ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena, passāvamaggena, mukhena aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdenti santhatāya asanthatassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 61) nayenapāḷiyaṃvuttasanthatavārānamatthaṃ saṅgaṇhanto āha‘‘santhatenā’’tiādi. Tatthasanthatenāti cammacoḷatipupaṭṭādīhi paṭicchāditena.‘‘Pavesento’’ti iminā santhatavārassa paropakkamaṃ nissāya dassanamupalakkhaṇanti attūpakkamepi yojetabbataṃ dasseti, tassa vakkhamānena ‘‘parājito’’ti iminā sambandho.‘‘Tathevā’’ti iminā pavesentotiādippakāraṃ parāmasati.
8-10. To reject the deceitful notion of evil monks that "there is no offense in rubbing what is covered against what is covered, since there is no rubbing of what is appropriated," he, summarizing the meaning of the sections on covering stated in the Pāli in the manner of "hostile monks bring a human female near a monk and make the sexual organ be placed in the vagina, the urinary passage, or the mouth, what is covered against what is uncovered," etc. (pārā. 61), says "Santhatenā" (with what is covered), etc. There, santhatenā (with what is covered) means with what is covered by a leather covering, a strip of bark, or a cloth, etc. "Pavesento" (inserting): by this, he shows that the indication of the section on covering is on the basis of another's action, implying that it should be applied even to one's own action; its connection is with "parājito" (defeated) which will be stated later. "Tathevā" (just so): by this, he refers to the manner of "pavesento" (inserting), etc.
‘‘upādinnenā’’tiādi. Etthaupādinnenāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi upetena kammunā attano phalabhāveneva ādinnaṃ gahitanti upādinnaṃ, etena attano aṅgajātassa, vatthupuggalānaṃ maggassa ca ghaṭṭanaṭṭhānagataṃ kāyappasādaṃ dasseti. Imināva aṅgajātagataṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ cammakhilaṃ, piḷakādi ca gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Upādinnakaṃ nāma kāyindriya’’ntigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. Tabbipariyāyena ‘‘anupādinnaka’’nti tappaṭicchādakaṃ coḷādi vuttaṃ. Upādinnena upādinne, anupādinne vā pārājikakkhette ghaṭṭite, anupādinnakena vā upādinne anupādinne vā pārājikakkhette ghaṭṭiteti yojanā. Ettha ca karaṇavacanantāni padāni ‘‘aṅgajātenā’’ti imassa visesanāni.
"Upādinnenā" (with what is appropriated), etc. Here, "upādinnenā" (with what is appropriated) means that which is taken, appropriated, by karma associated with craving, views, etc., as its own fruit; by this, he shows the sensitivity of the body located in the place of rubbing of one's own sexual organ and of the path of the objects and persons. By this same (term), the insensitivity of the body located in the sexual organ, the prepuce, pimples, etc., should be included. "What is appropriated is called the bodily sense faculty," it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. By the opposite of that, "anupādinnaka" (what is not appropriated) is said to be a cloth etc., that covers it. The application is: when what is appropriated is rubbed against what is appropriated or what is not appropriated in the field of the pārājika offense, or when what is not appropriated is rubbed against what is appropriated or what is not appropriated in the field of the pārājika offense. And here, the terms ending in the instrumental case are adjectives of "aṅgajātena" (with the sexual organ).
‘‘sace’’tiādi.Etthāti etesu catūsu vikappesu.Pārājikakkhette paviṭṭhe tūti etthatu-saddena pavesanaṭṭhituddhārakkhaṇattayaṃ samuccinoti. Yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ niccasambandhattā hi ‘‘so’’ti taṃ-saddopādāne ‘‘yo’’ti yaṃ-saddopi ajjhāharitabbo, sāmatthiyena sampiṇḍanattho apisaddo ca. Ayamettha atthayojanā – bhikkhupaccatthikehi ānetvā bhikkhuno aṅgajāte abhinisīdāpitamanussitthiādīnaṃ tīsu maggesu aññataramaggasaṅkhātaṃ pārājikakkhettaṃ paviṭṭhe vātu-saddena sampiṇḍitapavesanaṭṭhituddhārānamaññatarakkhaṇe vā sace yosādiyati,sappamukhādippavesanakāle viya anuttasitvā kāmarāgapipāsābhibhūto yadi sādiyati, sopi bhikkhu parājito hotīti yojanā.‘‘Sace sādiyatī’’ti iminā sāsaṅkavacanena na sādiyati, anāpattīti sūcitaṃ hoti.
"Sace" (if), etc. "Ettha" (here): in these four alternatives. "Pārājikakkhette paviṭṭhe tū" (when it has entered the field of the pārājika offense): here, the particle "tu" combines the three moments of inserting, remaining, and withdrawing. Since the words "yaṃ" and "taṃ" are always connected, when the word "taṃ" is used, the word "yaṃ" must also be supplied, and also the word "api," which has the meaning of inclusion, by implication. The application of meaning here is: if that bhikkhu approves, overpowered by thirst for sensual pleasure, without being alarmed, as at the time of inserting the head of the penis, etc., when what hostile bhikkhus have brought and made be placed on the sexual organ of the bhikkhu, namely the field of the pārājika offense consisting of one of the three paths of the human female, etc., has entered, or at any moment of inserting, remaining, or withdrawing combined by the particle "tu", then that bhikkhu is defeated. By the hesitant expression "sace sādiyati" (if he approves), it is indicated that if he does not approve, there is no offense.
‘‘khette’’tiādi. ‘‘Etthā’’ti ānetvā sambandhanīyaṃ.‘‘Khette’’ti sāmaññaniddesepi heṭṭhā ‘‘pārājikakkhette’’ti visesitattā, uparithullaccayādīnañca vidhīyamānattā aññathānupapattilakkhaṇāya sāmatthiyā thullaccayadukkaṭānaṃ khetteti ayamattho labbhati. ‘‘Kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāsū’’tiādinā nayena vakkhamānesu jīvamānakasarīragatathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettesūti vuttaṃ hoti.
"Khette" (in the field), etc. "Ettha" (here): should be connected with "ānetvā" (having brought). Even though "khette" (in the field) is a general designation, since it is specified below as "pārājikakkhette" (in the field of the pārājika offense), and since a serious offense (thullaccaya) and a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa) are being prescribed above, the meaning "the field of a serious offense (thullaccaya) and a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa)" is obtained by implication, which is the characteristic of incompatibility otherwise. It is said that it is in the fields of serious offenses (thullaccaya) and wrong-doings (dukkaṭa) located in the living body, which will be stated in the manner of "ear-hole, nostril," etc.
Imesu dvīsu khettesu ‘‘santhatādinā santhatādiṃ pavesentassa upādinnādīhi upādinnādīnaṃ ghaṭṭane adhivāsentassa anāpattī’’ti vattumasakkuṇeyyatāya pārājikakkhette vuttasabbavikappe ettha yojentehi evaṃ yojetabbaṃ – thullaccayakkhette santhate vā asanthate vā santhatena vā asanthatena vā aṅgajātena sevantassa upādinne vā anupādinne vā upādinnena, tathā anupādinnena vā ghaṭṭite thullaccayaṃ tassa viniddiseti. Evaṃ dukkaṭakkhette santhate vā…pe… ghaṭṭite dukkaṭañca tassa viniddiseti yojetabbaṃ.
In these two fields (of thullaccaya and dukkaṭa), since it would not be possible to say "there is no offense for one inserting what is covered, etc., against what is covered, etc., or for one who is tolerating the rubbing of what is appropriated, etc., against what is appropriated, etc.," one should apply all the alternatives stated in the field of the pārājika offense, applying them thus: if one engages in sexual intercourse with the sexual organ, whether covered or uncovered, with what is covered or uncovered, in the field of a serious offense (thullaccaya), when what is appropriated or what is not appropriated is rubbed with what is appropriated or with what is not appropriated, then he incurs a serious offense (thullaccaya); thus he specifies. Similarly, in the field of a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa), whether covered or …pe… rubbed, he specifies that he incurs a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa).
upādinna-saddena anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ aṅgajātañca tatthajātacammakhilapiḷakā ca gayhanti, dukkaṭakkhette pana aṅguliādiitarāvayavāpi. Tīsupi khettesuanupādinna-saddena aṅgajātādipaṭicchāditavatthādayo ca gayhanti, dukkaṭakkhette pana nimitte naṭṭhakāyappasādacammakhilapiḷakaromādīni. Imāni ca anupādinnāni. Aṅgajātetaropādinnāvayave ca tīsupi khettesu pavesentassa dukkaṭameva.
By the term upādinna (appropriated), insensitivity of the body and the sexual organ, and prepuces and pimples originating there are included; however, in the field of a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa), other limbs such as fingers are also included. In all three fields, by the term anupādinna (unappropriated), cloths, etc., covering the sexual organ, etc., are included; however, in the field of a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa), signs (nimitta) such as sensitivity of the body that has been destroyed, prepuces, pimples, and body hair are included. And these are unappropriated. If one inserts appropriated limbs other than the sexual organ in all three fields, it is only a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa).
11.Ettāvatā jīvamānasarīre santhatāsanthatavasena paccekaṃ tividhesupi pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettesu santhatāsanthatavaseneva duvidhena nimittena sevantassa paropakkame sati sādiyantassa labbhamānapārājikathullaccayadukkaṭāpattiyo yathāsambhavaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘matasarīre pana tathā tathā sevantānaṃ doso natthī’’ti pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsapaṭibāhanatthaṃpāḷiyaṃdassitesu yathāvuttesu tīsu khettesu labbhamānā tisso āpattiyo dassetumāha‘‘mate’’tiādi.
11. Thus far, having shown the pārājika, serious offense (thullaccaya), and wrong-doing (dukkaṭa) offenses that can be incurred when one engages in sexual intercourse with signs (nimitta) of two kinds, namely, covered and uncovered, in each of the three fields of pārājika, serious offense (thullaccaya), and wrong-doing (dukkaṭa) in a living body, due to another's action when one approves, now, to refute the opportunity for deceitful notions of evil monks that "there is no offense for those engaging in sexual intercourse in such and such a way in a dead body," he says "mate" (in a dead body), etc., in order to show the three offenses that can be incurred in the three fields as stated, shown in the Pāli.
‘‘mate’’ti etassa ‘‘manussitthiādīnaṃ sarīre’’ti ajjhāharitvā atthayojanā kātabbā. Iminā‘‘akkhāyite’’tiādinā dassitānaṃ nimittānaṃ nissayaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Nimittamattaṃ sesetvā’’tiādinā nayena vakkhamānagāthāyaṃ viya sakalasarīre khāditepi nimittassa vijjamānāvijjamānabhāvoyeva āpattiyābhāvābhāvassa pamāṇanti ‘‘akkhāyite’’ti etena ‘‘mate’’ti etaṃ avisesetvā ‘‘nimitte’’ti ajjhāharitvā taṃ tena visesitabbaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘nimittamatta’’ntiādinā vakkhamānagāthāya ‘‘nimitte’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
To "mate" (in a dead body), the meaning must be applied by supplying "in the body of a human female, etc." By this, the basis of the signs (nimitta) shown by "akkhāyite" (when it is completely eaten away), etc., is shown. Just as in the verse that will be stated in the manner of "after leaving only the sign," even when the entire body has been eaten, the presence or absence of the sign (nimitta) is the measure of the presence or absence of the offense, thus, "mate" (in a dead body) should not be specified by "akkhāyite" (when it is completely eaten away), but "nimitte" (in the sign) should be supplied and specified by that. Or else, the word "nimitte" (in the sign) should be brought and applied to the verse that will be stated as "nimittamatta" (leaving only the sign).
Akkhāyiteti sabbathā akkhāyite pārājikavatthubhūte nimitte.Yebhuyyakkhāyitepi cāti kiñci kiñci khāditvā bahukāvasiṭṭhe nimitte. ‘‘Yassa catūsu bhāgesu tibhāgamattaṃ khāditaṃ, taṃ nimittaṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti.Methunanti rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisabhāvāpattiyā mithunānaṃ idaṃ methunaṃ, matitthiādīnaṃ rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisattābhāvepi tattha vītikkamo ruḷhiyā ‘‘methuna’’nti vuccati.
Akkhāyite (when it is completely eaten away): when the sign (nimitta) that is the basis of the pārājika is completely eaten away. "Yebhuyyakkhāyitepi cā" (and also when it is mostly eaten away): when the sign (nimitta) is mostly eaten away, having eaten a little bit. "When three parts out of four parts have been eaten, that sign (nimitta) is called mostly eaten away," say some. Methunaṃ (sexual intercourse): this is sexual (methuna) because of the similarity to the state of being overcome by lust; even if there is no similarity to the state of being overcome by lust in the case of a dead female, etc., transgression there is conventionally called "methunaṃ" (sexual intercourse).
Pārājikotiparājito, parājayamāpannoti attho. Ayañhi pārājika-saddo sikkhāpadāpattipuggalesu vattati. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ ānanda anavakāso, yaṃ tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā vajjiputtakānaṃ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṃ pārājikaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’ti (pārā. 43) evaṃ sikkhāpade vattamāno veditabbo. ‘‘Āpatti tvaṃ bhikkhu āpanno pārājika’’nti (pārā. 67) āpattiyā. ‘‘Na mayaṃ pārājikā, yo avahaṭo, so pārājiko’’ti (pārā. 155) evaṃ puggale. ‘‘Pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 384) pana dhamme vattatīti vadanti. Yasmā pana tattha dhammoti katthaci āpatti, katthaci sikkhāpadameva adhippetaṃ, tasmā so visuṃ na vattabbo.
Pārājiko (defeated): one who is defeated, one who has incurred defeat, is the meaning. This word pārājika applies to the training rule, the offense, and the person. There, it should be understood as applying to the training rule in the manner of "This is impossible, Ananda, there is no opportunity that the Tathāgata would abolish a pārājika training rule for the sake of the Vajjis or the sons of the Vajjis or remove (it) from the disciples" (pārā. 43). (It applies) to the offense (āpatti) in "Bhikkhu, you have incurred a pārājika offense" (pārā. 67). (It applies) to the person in "We are not pārājika, he who is cast out is pārājika" (pārā. 155). However, some say that it applies to the Dhamma in "He should not be shaken by a pārājika Dhamma" (pārā. 384), etc. However, since there, by Dhamma is meant sometimes the offense, sometimes the training rule itself, therefore, that should not be stated separately.
‘‘Naro’’ti iminā pubbe vuttabhikkhuyeva adhippeto. Sāmaññajotanā visese avatiṭṭhatīti.
By "naro" (man), the bhikkhu mentioned earlier is intended. A general expression applies to a specific case.
12.Yebhuyyakkhāyiteti catūsu koṭṭhāsesu ekakoṭṭhāsāvasesaṃ katvā khādite.Upaḍḍhakkhāyiteti samabhāgāvasesaṃ khādite. Thūlo accayothullaccayo,soyeva āpajjīyatītiāpattīti thullaccayāpatti. Pācittiyādayo sandhāyettha thullaccayavohāro, na pārājikasaṅghādiseseti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Seseti avasese upakacchakādīsu. Vuttañhiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘avasesasarīre upakacchakādīsu dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60). Duṭṭhu katantidukkaṭaṃ, dukkaṭa-saddo niyatanapuṃsakattā itthiliṅgassāpiāpatti-saddassa saliṅgena visesanaṃ hoti.
12.Yebhuyyakkhāyite (mostly eaten away): when it has been eaten, leaving one koṭṭhāsa (part) out of four koṭṭhāsas (parts). Upaḍḍhakkhāyite (half eaten away): when it has been eaten, leaving an equal part. A serious offense (thūlo accayo) is thullaccayo (serious offense); because that is what is incurred, therefore āpatti (offense) is thullaccayāpatti (a serious offense). The term thullaccaya applies here to the pācittiya offenses, etc., not to the pārājika or sanghādisesa offenses; this should be seen. Sese (in the remainder): in the remaining armpit, etc. For it was said in the commentary: "in the remaining body, in the armpit, etc., (it is) a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa)" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60). What is badly done is dukkaṭa (a wrong-doing); since the word dukkaṭa (a wrong-doing) is invariably neuter, it is an adjective of the word āpatti (offense), which is also feminine.
13.Nimittamattaṃ sesetvā khāyitepīti ettha tiṇṇamaññataraṃ nimittaṃ sesetvā sakalasarīre khāditepi.Pi-saddo byatireke, pageva itareti dīpeti. Tasmiṃnimitteakkhāyite vā yebhuyyakkhāyite vāti dvidhā vuttesu tīsu nimittesu aññatarasmiṃ nimitte methunaṃ sevatopiparājayopārājikāpatti hotīti adhippāyo.Sevatopīti etthapi-saddo apekkhāyaṃ. Tasmā na kevalaṃ heṭṭhā vuttānamevāti apekkhati. Santhatādayo vikappā yathāvuttanayena etthāpi yojetabbā.
13.Nimittamattaṃ sesetvā khāyitepī (even when it has been eaten leaving only the sign): here, even when the entire body has been eaten, leaving one of the three signs (nimitta). The particle pi (even) is in the sense of exclusion; it reveals "pageva itareti" (especially the other). Even if one engages in sexual intercourse in one of the three signs (nimitta) stated in two ways, as nimitte (in the sign) being either completely eaten away or mostly eaten away, the intention is that there is parājayo (defeat), a pārājika offense. Sevatopī (even if he engages in sexual intercourse): here, the particle pi (even) is in the sense of expectancy. Therefore, it expects that it is not only of those stated below. The alternatives such as covered, etc., should be applied here too in the manner stated.
14.‘‘Uddhumātādisampatte’’ti ettha ‘‘yadā pana sarīraṃ uddhumātakaṃ hoti kuthitaṃ nīlamakkhikāsamākiṇṇaṃ kimikulasamākulaṃ navahi vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbakuṇapabhāvena upagantumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ, tadā pārājikavatthuñca thullaccayavatthuñca jahati, tādise sarīre yattha katthaci upakkamato dukkaṭamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60)aṭṭhakathāvacanatosabbatthāpi cāti akkhāyitādisabbavikappopagatāni pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettāni gahitānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatthāpi vītikkamo anāpatti na hotīti dassetumāha‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti.‘‘Khāyitakkhāyita’’ntiādīsu khāyitakkhāyitañca nāmetaṃ sabbaṃ matasarīrakeyeva veditabbaṃ, na jīvamāneti yojetabbaṃ.
14.In "Uddhumātādisampatte," here, "when the body becomes bloated, decayed, blue, infested with flies, swarming with worms, unable to be approached due to the stench of pus flowing from nine wound openings, then it relinquishes the pārājika and thullaccaya objects. In such a body, a dukkata occurs from interference anywhere," according to the Aṭṭhakathā statement (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60), it should be understood that the areas of pārājika, thullaccaya and dukkata, which are indicated as "everywhere and in all possible conditions" (sabbatthāpi cāti) such as eaten and uneaten, are included. Even there, to show that transgression is not without offense, he says "dukkata". In "Khāyitakkhāyita," etc., this entire designation of eaten and uneaten should be understood as applying only to a dead body, not to a living one, should be connected.
15.Jīvamāne kathanti āha‘‘chinditvā panā’’tiādi. Tatthavaṇasaṅkhepatoti vaṇasaṅgahato.Tasminti yattha ṭhitaṃ nimittaṃ uppāṭitaṃ, tasmiṃ padese. Ettha dutiyopana-saddo idha adassitaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayena viññāyamānaṃ atthavisesaṃ joteti.Aṭṭhakathāyahi ‘‘yadipi nimittaṃ sabbaso khāyitaṃ, chavicammampi natthi, nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, pavesanaṃ jāyati, pārājikamevā’’ti evaṃ ajīvamāne vuttavinicchayānusārena jīvamānepi chavicammamattaṃ ce sabbaso uppāṭitaṃ, nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, pavesanakkhamaṃ hoti, tattha sevantassa pārājikamevāti viññāyamānamatthaṃ jotetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
15.How is it in a living being? He says, "but having cut off," etc. There, "vaṇasaṅkhepato" means by the collection of wounds. "Tasmiṃ" means in that place where the sign that was there is uprooted, in that area. Here, the second "pana"-word indicates a specific meaning understood by way of the Aṭṭhakathā not shown here. Because in the Aṭṭhakathā, it is said "even if the sign is completely eaten away, even skin and flesh are gone, but the form of the sign is apparent, and penetration is possible, it is still a pārājika." Thus, according to the decision stated regarding a non-living being, it indicates that even in a living being, if only skin and flesh are completely uprooted, and the form of the sign is apparent, and it is capable of penetration, then engaging in sexual intercourse there is indeed a pārājika, this is what is being indicated.
16.Tato nimittatoti sambandho.Patitāyāti patitāyaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.Nimittatoti nimittappadesato patitāyaṃ maṃsapesiyanti sambandho. Chinditvā vā tacchetvā vā patitāyaṃ tassaṃ nimittamaṃsapesiyanti attho. Methunarāgena upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ viniddiseti yojanā.
16.Therefore, connected to nimittato.Patitāyāti fallen, or this itself is the reading. Nimittato means the flesh pellet fallen from the sign area is connected. The meaning is a flesh pellet of the sign having fallen by being cut or scraped. Dukkata is specified for one who interferes with sexual desire, this is the construction.
17.‘‘Nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepī’’tiādigāthāya ‘‘chinditvā’’tiādikā aṭṭhakathā ānetvā sambandhitabbā.Satīti ettha ‘‘avasiṭṭhe’’ti pāṭhaseso.Jīvamāneti ettha ‘‘sarīre’’ti pāṭhaseso. Jīvamānasarīre pana chinditvā tacchetvā nimitte uppāṭite nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepi maṃse, nhārumhi vā avasiṭṭhe sati methunaṃ paṭisevanto parājitoti yojanā.
17.The Aṭṭhakathā beginning with "chinditvā" etc., should be brought and connected to the verse beginning with "Nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepī".Satīti here, "avasiṭṭhe" is the remaining reading. Jīvamāneti here, "sarīre" is the remaining reading. The construction is: But in a living body, having cut or scraped, when the sign is uprooted, even if a nail-bed-sized piece of flesh or sinew remains, one who indulges in sexual intercourse is defeated.
18.‘‘Kaṇṇacchiddakkhī’’ti gāthāya ‘‘jīvamāne’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘sarīre’’ti pāṭhaseso. ‘‘Assagomahisādīna’’ntiādinā assādīnaṃ vakkhamānattā pārisesato ‘‘manussāna’’nti labbhati. Manussānaṃ jīvamānasarīre kaṇṇa…pe… vaṇesu vāti yojanā.Vatthikoseti muttapathabbhantare.Vaṇesu vāti satthakādīhi katavaṇesu.Aṅgajātanti tilamattampi aṅgajātekadesaṃ.Rāgāti methunarāgena.
18.The verse "Kaṇṇacchiddakkhī" should be brought and connected to "jīvamāne," "sarīre" is the remaining reading. Since asses, cows, buffaloes, etc., will be mentioned, by implication, "manussānaṃ" is obtained. The construction is: in the living body of humans, in the ear...pe...or in wounds.Vatthikoseti in the interior of the urinary passage.Vaṇesu vāti or in wounds made by a knife etc. Aṅgajāta means even a sesame-seed-sized part of the genital area. Rāgāti by sexual desire.
19.Avasesasarīrasminti kaṇṇacchiddādiyathāvuttasarīrāvayavavajjitasarīrappadese. Tenāha‘‘upakacchūrukādisū’’tiupakacchaṃnāma bāhumūlantaraṃ.Ūrukādisūti ūruvemajjhādīsu.Ādi-saddena vuttāvasesaṃ sarīrappadesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Aṅgajāta’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pavesetvā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati, aṅgajātaṃ tilabījamattaṃ pavesetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Vasā methunarāgassa sevamānassāti methunarāgena vītikkamantassāti attho. ‘‘Santhatenā’’tiādinā vuttappakāro etthāpi yojetabbo.
19.Avasesasarīrasmiṃ means in a body area other than the body parts mentioned previously, such as ear-holes etc. Therefore, he says "upakacchūrukādisū".Upakacchaṃ means the inner armpit. Ūrukādisū means in the middle of the thighs etc. The word "ādi" includes the remaining body areas that have been mentioned. "Aṅgajāta" should be brought and connected. "Pavesetvā" is obtained by implication, meaning having inserted a sesame-seed-sized genital area. Vasā methunarāgassa sevamānassā means for one who transgresses with sexual desire. The types described by "Santhatenā" etc. should also be connected here.
20.Assagomahisādīnantiādi-saddena gokaṇṇagavajādayo saṅgahitā. Assādayo pākaṭāyeva. ‘‘Matāna’’nti vakkhamānattā ‘‘jīvamānāna’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati.Sevanti ‘‘vasā methunarāgassā’’ti anuvattamānattā methunarāgavasena tilabījamattampi aṅgajātappadesaṃ pavesento thullaccayaṃ phuseti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘oṭṭhagadrabhadantīnaṃ, assagomahisādina’’nti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Evañhi sati aṭṭhakathāvasāne niddiṭṭhena pakāratthavācināādi-saddena thullaccayavītikkamārahanāsāvatthikosavanto avuttā sabbepi sattā gayhanti. ‘‘Assagomahisādīna’’nti paṭhamapādāvasāne niddiṭṭhenaādi-saddena oṭṭhagadrabhadantīnampi saṅgaho hotīti tesaṃ punavacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyāti.
20.Assagomahisādīnanti the word "ādi" includes cow-eared cattle and bovine species. Asses, etc., are clearly known. Since "Matānaṃ" will be stated later, "jīvamānānaṃ" is obtained by implication. Sevanti because "vasā methunarāgassā" is continuing, the construction is: one who, due to sexual desire, inserts even a sesame-seed-sized portion of the genital area incurs a thullaccaya by touching. And here, the reading should be "oṭṭhagadrabhadantīnaṃ, assagomahisādina." If it is so, all beings not mentioned, who are capable of thullaccaya transgression, possessing mouths, anuses, and vaginas, are included by the word "ādi" at the end of the Aṭṭhakathā which signifies type. If the word "ādi" is specified at the end of the first line, "Assagomahisādīna," the inclusion of camels, donkeys, and elephants would result in a pointless repetition.
21.Tathā sevamānassa dukkaṭanti sambandho.Sabbatiracchānanti tiriyaṃ añcanti vaḍḍhantīti tiracchā, sabbe ca te tiracchācāti sabbatiracchā, tesaṃ sabbatiracchānaṃ.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘vasā methunarāgassā’’tiādīnaṃ parāmaṭṭhattā sabbatiracchānānaṃ akkhiādīsu tilabījamattampi aṅgajātappadesaṃ methunarāgena pavesentassa dukkaṭanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etthāpi santhatādivikappe niddosabhāvo na sakkā vattunti tampi yojetabbaṃ.
21.Likewise, a dukkata is connected to one who indulges. Sabbatiracchānanti tiracchā means those that grow horizontally, and all those tiracchā are called sabbatiracchā; of those, sabbatiracchānaṃ. Because "Tathā" refers to "vasā methunarāgassā" etc., it is stated that one who, due to sexual desire, inserts even a sesame-seed-sized portion of the genital area into the eyes etc. of all animals incurs a dukkata. Here too, the state of being without offense in the variations of "santhata" etc. cannot be stated, so that should also be connected.
22.Evaṃ tiracchānānaṃ jīvamānakasarīre labbhamānā āpattiyo dassetvā tesaṃyeva matasarīrepi sambhavanakaāpattiyo dassetumāha‘‘tesa’’ntiādi.‘‘Tesa’’nti iminā manussatiracchānagatānaṃ gahaṇanti vadanti. Manussānaṃ matāmatasarīre pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettesu tissannaṃ āpattīnaṃ dassitattā, puna gahaṇe payojanābhāvā te vajjetvā anuvattamānasabbatiracchānanti iminā yojetabbaṃ, tesaṃ sabbatiracchānagatānanti attho.Allasarīresūti uddhumātakādibhāvamasampattesu allamatasarīresutividhe khettasmiṃasanthate, santhate vā sati methunarāgassa vasā sevato tividhāpi āpatti siyāti anuvattamānapadehi saha yojanā.
22.Having shown the offenses obtainable in the living bodies of animals in this way, to show the offenses that may occur in their dead bodies as well, he says "tesa" etc. "Tesa" here means the inclusion of humans and animals, some say. Because of the showing of the three offenses in the pārājika, thullaccaya, and dukkata areas in the dead and not-dead bodies of humans, since there is no purpose in including them again, having excluded those, it should be connected to "anuvattamānasabbatiracchānanti," meaning of those who belong to all animals. Allasarīresūti in fresh dead bodies that have not reached the stage of being bloated etc., tividhe khettasmiṃ, whether it is santhata or asanthata, if one indulges because of sexual desire, all three types of offenses are possible, this is the connection with the continuing terms.
Tividhe khettasminti matamanussasarīre vuttanayena akkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitabhede maggattayasaṅkhāte pārājikakkhette ca yebhuyyakkhāyitaupaḍḍhakkhāyitabhede tasmiṃyeva maggattayasaṅkhāte ca, akkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitabhede kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāvatthikosavaṇasaṅkhāte ca thullaccayakkhette upaḍḍhakkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitabhede tasmiṃyeva kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāvatthikosavaṇasaṅkhāte ca, akkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitaupaḍḍhakkhāyita yebhuyyakkhāyitabhede avasesasarīrasaṅkhāte dukkaṭakkhette cāti tividhepi khette.Satīti vijjamāne. Santhate vā asanthate vā methunarāgassa vasā sevato yathārahaṃ pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭasaṅkhātā tividhā āpatti bhaveyyāti attho.
Tividhe khettasmiṃ means in the three areas in a dead human body: in the pārājika area, which is of three types described in the manner stated, being un-eaten, mostly-eaten, and eaten-states, and in that same area consisting of three paths, being mostly-eaten, half-eaten states; and in the thullaccaya area, which is of eaten, mostly-eaten states and consists of ear-holes, eyes, nose, vagina, and wounds, and in that same area consisting of half-eaten, mostly-eaten states and consists of ear-holes, eyes, nose, vagina, and wounds; and in the dukkata area consisting of un-eaten, mostly-eaten, half-eaten, mostly-eaten states and consists of the remaining body, in all three areas.Satīti existing. Whether it is santhata or asanthata, if one indulges due to sexual desire, the three types of offenses called pārājika, thullaccaya, and dukkata would occur as appropriate, this is the meaning.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kuthitakuṇape pana pubbe vuttanayeneva sabbattha dukkaṭa’’nti.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ "But in a decayed corpse, everywhere is dukkata, in the same way as previously stated."
23.Bahi chupantassāti yojanā.Nimittaṃmuttakaraṇaṃ.‘‘Itthiyā’’ti sāmaññena vuttepi catutthagāthāya ‘‘tiracchānagatitthiyā’’ti vakkhamānattā pārisesato iminā manussāmanussitthīnameva gahaṇaṃ, iminā amanussitthiyāpi gahaṇassa. Imissānantaragāthāya ito ‘‘itthiyā’’ti anuvattite tatrāpi amanussitthiyāpi gahaṇaṃ siyāti tampi vajjetvā kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesassa vatthubhūtaṃ manussitthimeva dassetuṃ tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘itthiyā’’tiadhikavacanameva ñāpakanti veditabbaṃ.
23.Connected to one who touches outside. Nimittaṃ means the urinary organ. Even though "itthiyā" is stated generally, because "tiracchānagatitthiyā" will be stated in the fourth verse, by implication this means the inclusion of only human and non-human females; by this, even non-human females are included. To show only a human female, who is the object of the sanghādisesa of physical contact, and to avoid the possibility that non-human females might also be included when "itthiyā" is carried over from this immediately following verse, the additional specification "itthiyā" is indicative and should be understood.
Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60) ‘‘itthinimittaṃ methunarāgena mukhena chupati, thullaccaya’’nti sāmaññena vuttattā cadhammakkhandhake‘‘na ca bhikkhave rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) sāmaññavacanato ca uddhumātādibhāvamasampattāya allamatamanussitthiyā ca akkhāyite vā yebhuyyakkhāyite vā nimitte sati pārājikavatthubhāvato tatthāpi bahi chupantassa thullaccayanti ayamatthopi matāmatavisesaṃ akatvā ‘‘itthiyā’’ti imināva sāmaññavacanena gahetabbo.
And because in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60), "one touches the female organ with sexual desire with the mouth, a thullaccaya" is stated generally, and because in the Dhammakkhandhaka, "Monks, the genital area should not be touched with lustful thoughts; whoever should touch it incurs a thullaccaya" (mahāva. 252) is stated generally, and because in the fresh, dead body of a human female that has not reached the stage of being bloated etc., a pārājika object exists in a eaten or mostly-eaten sign, this meaning should be taken by the general term "itthiyā" itself, without making a distinction of dead or not-dead.
24.Nimittenāti attano aṅgajātena.Mukhenāti pakatimukhena.Nimittaṃ itthiyāti jīvamānakamanussitthiyā aṅgajātaṃ. Yasmā pana kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadavinītavatthūsumatitthivatthumhimatitthiyā sarīre kāyasaṃsaggarāgena yo chupati, tassa ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu saṅghādisesassa, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 281) vuttattā matamanussitthī na gahetabbā. Tathevayakkhivatthumhikāyasaṃsaggarāgena yakkhiniyā sarīraṃ yena phuṭṭhaṃ, tassa ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu saṅghādisesassa, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti vuttattā, idheva upari dutiyasaṅghādisese ‘‘paṇḍake yakkhipetīsu, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā’’ti (vi. vi. 341) vakkhamānattā ca amanussitthīpi na gahetabbā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvamānakamanussitthiyā aṅgajāta’’nti. Anto pavesetukāmatāya sati kāyasaṃsaggarāgāsambhavato ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’ti iminā ca bahi chupitukāmatā viññāyatīti ‘‘bahī’’ti anuvattanaṃ vināpi tadattho labbhati.Garukanti saṅghādiseso.
24.Nimittenāti with one's own genital area.Mukhenāti with the natural mouth.Nimittaṃ itthiyāti the genital area of a living human or non-human female. But since in the cases disciplined by the physical contact training rule, for one who touches the body of a dead female with physical contact desire "matitthivatthumhi" "there is no sanghādisesa offense for the monk, but a thullaccaya offense" (pārā. 281) is stated, a dead human female should not be included. Likewise, in yakkhivatthumhi, for one who has touched the body of a yakkhini with physical contact desire, because "there is no sanghādisesa offense for the monk, but a thullaccaya offense" is stated, and because in the second sanghādisesa above, "in a eunuch, yakkhini, or peta, a thullaccaya would occur for him" (vi. vi. 341) will be stated, a non-human female should not be included either. Therefore, it is stated "the genital area of a living human or non-human female." Since physical contact desire is not possible with the intention to penetrate inside, by this statement "kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā" it is understood that touching on the outside is intended, so that meaning is obtained even without carrying over "bahī." Garukanti means a sanghādisesa.
25.Tatheva bahi chupantassāti yojanā, anto appavesetvā bahiyeva chupantassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ubhayarāgenāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, methunarāgena vā.Purisassāpīti jīvamānakapurisassapi.Pi-saddo na kevalaṃ vuttanayena itthiyā nimittaṃ phusantasseva āpatti, atha kho purisassāpīti dīpeti.‘‘Nimitta’’nti muttakaraṇameva vuccati. ‘‘Jīvamānakapurisassā’’ti ayaṃ viseso kuto labbhatīti ce? ‘‘Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena vā methunarāgena vā jīvamānakapurisassa vatthikosaṃ appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, dukkaṭa’’nti itoaṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60) labbhati.
25.Likewise, connected to one who touches outside, it is stated as one who touches only on the outside without penetrating inside.Ubhayarāgenāti with physical contact desire or sexual desire.Purisassāpīti even of a living male. The word "Pi" indicates that it is not only for one who touches the female organ in the manner stated, but also for a male."Nimitta" means the urinary organ itself. If one asks, "From where is this specification 'of a living male' obtained?", it is obtained from this Aṭṭhakathā statement (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60): "Either with physical contact desire or with sexual desire, one who touches the urinary organ of a living male, without penetrating the vagina, incurs a dukkata."
26.Aciravatitarantānaṃ gunnaṃ piṭṭhiṃ abhiruhantā chabbaggiyā bhikkhū methunarāgena aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṃ chupiṃsūti imasmiṃ vatthumhi ‘‘na ca bhikkhave rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) āgatanayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘nimittenā’’tiādi. Etthāpi ‘‘tathā’’ti imassānuvattanato ‘‘bahī’’ti labbhati. Attanonimittenatiracchānagatitthiyā nimittaṃ methunarāgato bahi chupantassa thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā.
26.To show the method that occurs in this case where the Chabbaggiya monks, who were recently ordained, while mounting the backs of cows, touched genital area with genital area due to sexual desire, namely, "Monks, the genital area should not be touched with lustful thoughts; whoever should touch it incurs a thullaccaya" (mahāva. 252), he says "nimittenā" etc. Here too, because "tathā" is carried over, "bahī" is obtained. The construction is that one who touches the genital area of an animal female with his own nimittena outside of sexual desire incurs a thullaccaya.
27.‘‘Methunarāgato’’ti iminā byavacchinnamatthaṃ dassetumāha‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’tiādi. Etthāpi‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’tivacanasāmatthiyā bahi chupanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Nimittassāti passāvamaggassa.Chupaneti phusane.
27.To show the meaning distinguished by "Methunarāgato", he says "kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā" etc. Here too, by the ability of the statement "kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā", touching on the outside should be understood. Nimittassā means of the urinary passage.Chupaneti in touching.
28.Tamāvaṭṭakateti ettha ‘‘taṃ āvaṭṭakate’’ti padacchedo.Āvaṭṭakateti vivaṭe. ‘‘Mukhe’’ti sambandhisaddattā, aññassa sambandhino ca aniddiṭṭhattā sutānulomikānaṃ sutasambandhasseva balavattā ca purimānantaragāthāya ‘‘tiracchānagatitthiyā mukhe’’ti kiñcāpi sutasseva sambandho viññāyati, tathāpi imāya gāthāyavinītavatthumhi(pārā. 73)‘‘aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṃ gantvā chinnasīsaṃ passitvā vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesesī’’ti dassitachinnasīsavatthussa saṅgahitattā manussamukhameva gahetabbaṃ siyā. Tiracchānagatānaṃ, pana amanussānañca mukhe tathā paveso niddosoti vattumasakkuṇeyyattā tatthāpi idameva upalakkhaṇanti pārājikappahonakānaṃ sabbesaṃ mukheti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃ aṅgajātaṃ. Tattha āvaṭṭakate pārājikappahonakānaṃmukhe ākāsagataṃ katvākatthaci aphusāpetvānīharantassaukkhipantassa dukkaṭanti yojanā. Atha vā tiracchānānaṃ āvaṭṭakate mukheti yojetvā tadaññasaṅgaho upalakkhaṇavasena kātabbo.
28.Tamāvaṭṭakateti here, "taṃ āvaṭṭakate" is the word division.Āvaṭṭakateti means open. Since "Mukhe" is a relational word, and since another relating term is unspecified, and since the connection of the suttas is stronger for those that follow the suttas, even though a connection to what was just stated in the previous verse "tiracchānagatitthiyā mukhe" is understood, nevertheless, because this verse includes the case shown in the vinītavatthumhi (pārā. 73) "another monk went to the charnel ground, saw a severed head, and inserted his genital area into the open mouth without touching anything," a human mouth should be included. Since it cannot be said that such insertion into the mouths of animals and non-humans is without offense, there too, this is merely an example, so a mouth that is adequate for a pārājika should be seen as belonging to all. The meaning is that one who raises that genital area, that is adequate for a pārājika, having made it airborne in the mouth and bringing it out without touching anywhere, incurs a dukkata. Or alternatively, having connected it to "tiracchānānaṃ āvaṭṭakate mukheti," the collection of others should be done by way of example.
29.Tathāti ‘‘ākāsagataṃ katvā’’ti yathāvuttappakāraṃ parāmasati.Catūhi passehīti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.‘‘Passehī’’ti sambandhisaddattā ‘‘nimittassā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.‘‘Itthiyā’’ti sāmaññasaddattā ‘‘sabbassā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Jātivācakattā ekavacanaṃ.‘‘Catūhi passehi, heṭṭhimattala’’nti ca imesaṃ sambandhipadassa aniddesepi methunapārājikādhikārattā ca santhatacatukkassa aṭṭhakathāvasāne imāya gāthāya saṅgahitassa imassa vinicchayassa pariyosāne ‘‘yathā ca itthinimitte vuttaṃ, evaṃ sabbattha lakkhaṇaṃ veditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.61-62) nimittavinicchayassātidesassa katattā ca sāmatthiyena ‘‘nimittassā’’ti labbhati. Idameva‘‘pavesetvā’’ti etassa ādhāravasena gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṅgajāta’’nti anuvattati.
29.Tathāti refers to the way stated as "having made it airborne."Catūhi passehīti with the hand, it is an instrumental case."Passehī" because it is a relational word, "nimittassā" is obtained by implication."Itthiyā" because it is a general word, "sabbassā" is the remaining reading. Because it is a class noun, it is singular. Even though the related term of these "Catūhi passehi, heṭṭhimattala" is unspecified, and because of the authority of the methuna pārājika, and because at the end of the Aṭṭhakathā of the group of four santhata states, the decision of this verse, which is included, is followed by the pronouncement "just as it was said regarding the female organ, so the characteristic should be understood everywhere" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.61-62) at the end of the decision regarding the sign, "nimittassā" is obtained by implication. This itself should be taken as the basis of "pavesetvā". "Aṅgajāta" continues.
itthiyānimitte passāvamaggasaṅkhāte aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā tassa catūhi passehi sahaheṭṭhimattalaṃcattāro passe, heṭṭhimattalañca acchupantaṃ ākāsagataṃ katvā nīharantassa dukkaṭa’’nti yojetvā attho vattabbo.
Having inserted the male organ into the genital area of a woman, known as the passage for urination, and making the four sides along with the lower surface not touch (anything), and then withdrawing it, there is a dukkaṭa. The meaning should be stated by connecting it in this way. (pāci. 239)
30.Uppāṭitoṭṭhamaṃsesūti uppāṭitaṃ oṭṭhamaṃsaṃ yesanti viggaho.Tesudantesu.Bahinikkhantakesu vāti pakatiyā oṭṭhamaṃsato bahi nikkhamitvā ṭhitesu vā dantesu.Vāyamantassāti aṅgajātena chupantassa.
30. Uppāṭitoṭṭhamaṃsesū means "whose lip flesh has been torn out"; this is the compound's analysis. Tesu means "in those" teeth. Bahinikkhantakesu vā means "or in teeth that have naturally come out from the lip flesh and are situated outside." Vāyamantassā means "while touching with the male organ."
31.Aṭṭhisaṅghaṭṭanaṃ katvāti nimittamaṃsasannissayāni aṭṭhīni saṅghaṭṭetvā.Maggeti aṭṭhisaṅghātamaye magge.Duvidharāgatoti methunarāgena vā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena vā.Vāyamantassāti aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā cārentassa.
31. Aṭṭhisaṅghaṭṭanaṃ katvā means "having made the bones that are dependent on the genital flesh rub together." Magge means "in the passage," which is full of colliding bones. Duvidharāgato means "due to two kinds of lust," either lust for sexual intercourse or lust for physical contact. Vāyamantassā means "while inserting the male organ and moving it around."
32.Āliṅgantassāti parissajantassa.Hatthagāhādīsuhatthonāma kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā. Hatthassa, tappaṭibandhassa ca gahaṇaṃhatthaggāho. Avasesasarīrassa, tappaṭibandhassa ca parāmasanaṃparāmāso. Nissandehepana ‘‘mātugāmassa sarīrassa vā tappaṭibandhassa vā hatthena gahaṇaṃ hatthaggāho’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Tasmā yathāvuttanayasseva aṭṭhakathāsu āgatattā soyeva sārato paccetabbo. Parāmasepi ‘‘hatthena sarīrassa, tappaṭibandhassa ca parāmasana’’nti yaṃ tattha vuttaṃ, tampi na yujjati. Avasesasarīrāvayavenāpi parāmasato dukkaṭameva hotīti.Cumbanādīsūtiādi-saddena veṇiggāhādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.‘‘Ayaṃ nayo’’ti etena ‘‘itthiyā methunarāgena hatthaggāhādīsu dukkaṭa’’nti imamatthaṃ atidisati.
32. Āliṅgantassā means "while embracing." Among hatthagāhā etc., hattho (hattha) means from the elbow joint (kappara) up to the tip of the fingernails. The grasping (gahaṇaṃ) of the hand and what is connected to it is hatthaggāho. The touching (parāmasanaṃ) of the remaining body and what is connected to it is parāmāso. However, in Nissandeha, it is said, "The grasping of a woman's body or what is connected to it with the hand is hatthaggāho," but that does not agree with the Commentary. Therefore, since the way it has been stated is how it appears in the Commentaries, that itself should be accepted as essential. In parāmāsa also, what is said there, "touching the body and what is connected to it with the hand," that too is not fitting. Because there is a dukkaṭa even when touching with the remaining body parts. Among cumbanādīsū, the term ādi includes things like holding the flute. By ‘‘Ayaṃ nayo’’ ("This is the method"), he extends this meaning: "In a woman, due to sexual desire, there is a dukkaṭa in hatthaggāha etc."
33.Manussāmanussehi aññesu tiracchānagatesu heṭṭhimaparicchedena methunadhammapārājikavatthubhūte satte dassetumāha‘‘apade’’tiādi.‘‘Apade, dvipade, catuppade’’ti imehi visesanehi visesitabbaṃ ‘‘sattanikāye’’ti idaṃ vattabbaṃ.Apadesattanikāye.Ahayoti thalacaresu ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato hatthigilanake ajagare upādāya heṭṭhimaparicchedena nāgā ca.Macchāti jalajesu uparimakoṭiyā pañcasatayojanikāni timirapiṅgalādimacche upādāya heṭṭhimantato pāṭhīnapāvusādayo macchā ca.Dvipadesattanikāye.Kapotāti uparimakoṭiyā garuḷe upādāya heṭṭhimantato kapotākapotapakkhī ca. Pārāvatāti keci.Catuppadesattanikāye.Godhāti uparimakoṭiyā hatthiṃ upādāya heṭṭhimantato godhā cātiimesattā.Heṭṭhāti heṭṭhimaparicchedato.Pārājikassavatthūti methunadhammapārājikassa vatthūnīti pāṭhaseso.
33. To show beings who are other than human and non-human, who are of the animal realm, and who are the object of a pārājika offense related to sexual intercourse, by way of a lower limit, he says, ‘‘apade’’ etc. The words "being (satta) assemblage (nikāye)" should be stated qualified by these adjectives: ‘‘Apade, dvipade, catuppade’’. Apade sattanikāye. Ahayo means, among land creatures, starting from pythons that swallow elephants as the upper limit, and snakes as the lower limit. Macchā means, among water creatures, starting from timirapiṅgala fish measuring five hundred yojanas as the upper limit, and fish like pāṭhīna and pāvusa as the lower limit. Dvipade sattanikāye. Kapotā means, starting from garuḷas as the upper limit, and doves and dove-like birds as the lower limit. Some say pigeons (pārāvata). Catuppade sattanikāye. Godhā means, starting from elephants as the upper limit, and lizards as the lower limit. These ime beings. Heṭṭhā means "from a lower limit." Pārājikassavatthū means "the objects of the pārājika of sexual intercourse"; this is the remaining portion of the passage.
34.Sevetukāmatāmethunasevāya taṇhā, tāya methunarāgasaṅkhātāya sampayuttaṃ cittaṃsevetukāmatācittaṃ. Maggeti vaccamaggādīnaṃ aññataremagge. Maggassa attano muttakaraṇassa pavesanaṃ. Pabbajjāya, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlassa vā ante vināse bhavotiantimo,pārājikāpanno puggalo, tassa vatthu antimabhāvassa kāraṇattā pārājikāpattiantimavatthūti vuccati, tadeva paṭhamaṃ catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ ādimhi desitattā paṭhamantimavatthu, tassapaṭhamantimavatthuno,paṭhamapārājikassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
34. Sevetukāmatācittaṃ means "the mind associated with the desire to have sexual intercourse (methunasevā)", that is, with the emotion called sexual lust. Magge means "in one of the passages" like the excretory passage etc. The insertion of one's own urine-excrement-making (organ) into the passage. The one who is on the verge of ruin (vināse) of the Going-Forth (pabbajjā) or of the Pātimokkha-restraint morality is called antimo, a person who has incurred a pārājika; the transgression that is the cause of the state of being ultimate (antimabhāvassa kāraṇattā) is called antimavatthū, a pārājika offense. That very thing, because it was taught at the beginning of the first of the four pārājikas, is the first ultimate object (paṭhamantimavatthu); this means paṭhamantimavatthuno, of the first pārājika.
35.Sāmantā āpattisamīpe bhavaṃsāmantaṃ,pārājikāpattiyā samīpe pubbabhāge bhavanti attho.Sesānaṃ pana tiṇṇampīti avasesānaṃ adinnādānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pārājikadhammānaṃ. Thullaccayaṃ sāmantamiti udīritanti sambandho. Kathamudīritaṃ? ‘‘Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 94) dutiye, ‘‘manussaṃ uddissa opātaṃ khaṇati, patitvā dukkhavedanaṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti, tatiye, ‘‘paṭivijānantassa āpatti pārājikassa, appaṭivijānantassa āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 215) catutthe samudīritaṃ.
35. Sāmantaṃ means "being in the vicinity of the offense (āpatti)"; that is, being in the preceding part, near the pārājika offense. Sesānaṃ pana tiṇṇampī means "but of the remaining three," the three pārājika offenses of stealing etc. "A thullaccaya is proximity" is how it should be connected to this passage. How was it said? "He causes to quiver, the offense is thullaccaya" (pārā. 94) in the second; "having dug a pit intending (it) for a human, having fallen, he causes a painful sensation to arise, the offense is thullaccaya," in the third; "for one who recognizes (it), the offense is pārājika; for one who does not recognize (it), the offense is thullaccaya" (pārā. 215), it was declared in the fourth.
Ettha ca catutthapārājikassa thullaccayāpattiyā sāmantāpattibhāvo yassa uttarimanussadhammaṃ samullapati, so yāva na paṭivijānāti, tāva samullapanapaccayā thullaccayāpattisambhāve, samullapite tasmiṃ samullapitamatthe paṭivijānante pārājikāpattisambhāve ca yujjati. So ca ‘‘appaṭivijānantassa vutte thullaccaya’’nti imināva saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
And here, for the fourth pārājika, the state of being a proximate offense (sāmantāpattibhāvo) of the thullaccaya offense is fitting in the case of the one who speaks falsely about an extraordinary human quality (uttarimanussadhammaṃ). So, as long as he does not recognize (it), there is the possibility of a thullaccaya offense due to the cause of speaking falsely. And when he recognizes the matter about which he spoke falsely, there is the possibility of a pārājika offense. And that is to be seen as included by this very statement, "When one does not recognize (it), there is a thullaccaya."
36.Ajānantassavātūpatthaddhaṃ aṅgajātaṃ disvā attano ruciyā vītikkamaṃ katvā mātugāmesu gacchantesu ajānamānassa, mahāvane divā niddupagatabhikkhuno viya parehi kiriyamānaṃ ajānantassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tathevāti iminā ‘‘anāpattīti ñātabba’’nti idamākaḍḍhati.Assādiyantassāti bhikkhupaccatthikesu abhibhavitvā vītikkamaṃ karontesu ca kārāpentesu ca, sappamukhaṃ paviṭṭhakāle viya uttasitvā anadhivāsentassa ca, mahāvane divāvihāropagatabhikkhuno viya paropakkamaṃ ñatvāpi kāye ādittaagginā viya uttasitvā anadhivāsentassāti attho. ‘‘Ajānantassā’’ti ettha api-saddo yojetabbo. Buddhasāsane khīrasāgarasalilanimmale sabbapaṭhamaṃ pātubhūtattā ādi ca taṃ vītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ kammañcātiādikammaṃ,taṃ etassa atthīti ādikammī, ettha sudinno bhikkhu, tassaādikamminoti gahetabbo. Uparipi imesaṃ padānaṃ āgatāgataṭṭhāne imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Idha ca upari sabbasikkhāpadesu ca nidānādivasena sattarasavidho sādhāraṇavinicchayo pakiṇṇake saṅkhepato, uttare vitthārato ca āvi bhavissati. Tasmā ettha na dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
36. Ajānantassa means "of one who does not know." It means that, when monks go to women, having committed a transgression according to their own liking upon seeing the male organ moved by the wind, (there is no offense) for one who does not know, just like a monk who has gone to sleep in the great forest. Tathevā means "just so"; by this, he draws in the statement "it should be known as no offense." Assādiyantassā means "of one who is not enjoying." When those who are adversaries of monks overcome (him) and commit a transgression or cause (him) to do (it), and when, like when a snake has entered the mouth, he is frightened and does not endure (it), and when, like a monk who has gone to a day's retreat in the great forest, even after knowing of the aggression by others, he is frightened like (if) fire had been set to his body and does not endure (it), this is the meaning. The word "api-" should be connected in ‘‘Ajānantassa’’. Because it manifested first in the Buddha's Dispensation, which is as pure as the ocean of milk, the first action (kamma) and that which is called transgression is ādikammaṃ; he has that, therefore he is ādikammī; here, the monk Sudinna, of that ādikammino is what should be taken. Above as well, the meaning of these words should be understood in this very way in the places where they occur. And here, in all the training rules above, a seventeenfold common judgment (sādhāraṇavinicchayo) by way of the introduction etc. will become apparent in the miscellaneous section (pakiṇṇake) in brief, and in the later section in detail. Therefore, it should be understood that it is not shown here.
37-38.Vinayeti vinayapiṭake.Anayūparameti neti pāpeti sīlasampadaṃ samādhisampadaṃ paññāsampadañcātinayo,kāyavacīdvārehi avītikkamasaṅkhāto saṃvaro, tappaṭipakkho asaṃvaroanayonāma, tassa uparamo nivatti etthāti anayūparamo, vinayo, tattha anayūparame vinaye.
37-38. Vinaye means "in the Vinaya Piṭaka." Anayūparame means that which leads to the attainment of moral virtue (sīlasampadaṃ), the attainment of concentration (samādhisampadaṃ), and the attainment of wisdom (paññāsampadaṃ) is nayo, morality, the restraint consisting of non-transgression through the doors of body and speech; the opposite of that, non-restraint is called anayo; the cessation of that is what is meant by anayūparamo; (so it means) in the Vinaya, there, in the Vinaya that is the cessation of non-restraint.
parameukkaṭṭhe. Anayassa vā uparame nivattaneparameukkaṭṭheti gahetabbaṃ. Parā uttamā mā sāsanasirī etthātiparamo,vinayoti evampi gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Vinayo nāma sāsanassa āyū’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.mahāsaṅgītikathā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251) vacanato uttamasāsanasampattiyutteti attho.
parame means "supreme." Or, in the cessation, the turning away, of non-restraint, parame should be taken as "supreme." Where Parā, the ultimate glory of the Dispensation, (exists), that is paramo, the Vinaya; in this way also it should be taken. Because of the statement, "The Vinaya is the life of the Dispensation" (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.mahāsaṅgītikathā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251), it means endowed with supreme Dispensation accomplishment (sāsanasampattiyutteti).
Sujanassāti sobhaṇo jano sujano, sikkhākāmo adhisīlasikkhāya sobhamāno piyasīlo kulaputto, tassa nayane nayanūpame vinayeti sambandho. Anayūparamattā, paramattā ca sujanassa kulaputtassanayanenayanūpame.Sukhānayaneti lokiyalokuttarabhedaṃ sukhaṃ ānetīti sukhānayanaṃ, tasmiṃ. Idañca ‘‘nayane’’ti etassa visesanaṃ.
Sujanassā means "of the good person (sujano)", the person with refined qualities (sobhaṇo jano), the one who desires training, the noble youth who shines with higher moral training (adhisīlasikkhāya sobhamāno piyasīlo kulaputto); (it should be connected as) that the Vinaya is like an eye for him. Because of being the cessation of non-morality and because of being supreme, to the noble youth (kulaputtassa), nayane means "like an eye." Sukhānayane means "that which brings happiness (sukhaṃ)," which is twofold: mundane and supramundane; in that. And this is an adjective of nayane.
Etaṃ visesanaṃ kimatthanti ce? Upamābhāvena gahitapakatinayanato idha sambhavantaṃ visesaṃ dassetunti veditabbaṃ. Kataro so visesoti ce? Pakatinayanaṃ rāgadosādikilesūpanissayo hutvā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadukkhassa ca paccayo hoti. Idaṃ pana vinayanayanaṃ imassa kulaputtassa evaṃ ahutvā ekaṃsena mokkhāvahanasukhasseva paccayo hotīti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ. Yathā vinayamavirādhetvā paṭipajjanena sijjhanakasīlasaṃvaramūlakaavippaṭisārādianupādisesaparinibbānāvasā- naphalasampattivasena uppajjanakalokiyalokuttarasukhāvahane vinayeti vuttaṃ hoti.
If one asks, what is the purpose of this adjective? It should be understood (as being used) to show a distinction that is possible here, compared to an ordinary eye (pakatinayanaṃ) that is taken by way of comparison. If one asks, what is that distinction? An ordinary eye becomes a support for defilements like greed and hatred, and is a cause for suffering in this very life and in future lives. However, this Vinaya-eye, without being like that for this noble youth, is solely a cause for happiness that leads to liberation; (the adjective is used) to show this distinction. It is said that the Vinaya leads to the attainment of mundane and supramundane happiness in the sense of the accomplishment of a fruit that culminates in anupādisesa-parinibbāna, which has its root in the morality of restraint that is conducive to success through practicing without violating the Vinaya, and which is free from remorse etc.
Padhānaratoti ettha ‘‘apī’’ti pāṭhaseso. Padhāne vinayābhiyoge ratopi, vinaye ajjhāyanasavanacintanādivasena vāyamantopīti attho. Atha vā ‘‘virāgo seṭṭho dhammāna’’nti (dha. pa. 273; netti. 170; kathā. 872) vacanatopadhānaṃnibbānaṃ, tasmiṃ ratoti attho.Sāramateti ‘‘sāra’’nti adhimate. Atha vā sāraṃ apheggumataṃ mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ ācariyamataṃ etthāti‘‘sāramato’’ti vinayavinicchayo vutto, tasmiṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye.Ratoti accantābhirato.‘‘Na rato’’ti ettha na-kāraṃ ‘‘ramate’’ti osānapadena yojetvā yo pana na ramateti sambandho.
Padhānarato here, the word "api" is the remainder. It means "even one who delights in effort (padhāne) in the Vinaya, even one who strives in the Vinaya by way of studying, listening, thinking etc." Or else, because of the statement, "Dispassion is best of all things" (dha. pa. 273; netti. 170; kathā. 872), padhānaṃ means Nibbāna; one who delights in that is the meaning. Sāramate means "in a well-considered opinion (adhimate)." Or else, where the essential meaning (sāraṃ apheggumataṃ) is the opinion of the teachers residing in the Mahāvihāra, there ‘‘sāramato’’ the judgment of the Vinaya is stated; in that. Idhā means "in this" judgment of the Vinaya. Rato means "extremely delighted." ‘‘Na rato’’, connecting the "na-" with the concluding word "ramate," it should be connected as "but the one who does not delight."
yo panapuggalo niccaparivattanasavanānussaraṇacintanavasenana ramate nakīḷati, so puggalovinaye padhānaratopivinayapiṭake ajjhayanasavanādivasena yuttapayuttopi paṭu hoti kiṃ, na hotevāti dasseti. Vinayapiṭake pāṭavamākaṅkhantehi paṭhamaṃ tāvettha sakkaccaṃ abhiyogo kātabboti adhippāyo.
yo pana the person who na ramate na does not rejoice by way of constant repetition, hearing, remembering, and thinking, that person, vinaye padhānaratopi, even though diligent in the Vinaya Piṭaka by way of studying, listening, etc., is he skilled? He is not! This is what he shows. The intention is that, by those who desire skill in the Vinaya Piṭaka, first effort should be made here with respect.
‘‘ima’’ntiādi.Imanti vuccamānaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ, ‘‘avedī’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Yo’’ti pāṭhaseso. Yo kulaputto satisampajaññasaddhāsampannoimaṃvinayavinicchayaṃ sammāavediaññāsi. Kiṃ bhūtanti āha‘‘hitavibhāvana’’nti. Lokiyalokuttarasampattiyā mūlasādhanattā sīlamidha hitaṃ nāma, taṃ vibhāveti pakāsetīti hitavibhāvanoti viggaho. ‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya…pe… vijaṭaye jaṭa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; mi. pa. 2.1.9) vuttattā sabbakilesajaṭāvijaṭanalokuttarañāṇassa padaṭṭhānasopacārasābhiññārūpārūpaaṭṭhasamādhīnaṃ padaṭṭhānatāya sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇasampadānaṃ mūlabhūtesu catupārisuddhisīlesu padhānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ, tappakāsakattā ayaṃ vinayavinicchayo ‘‘hitavibhāvano’’ti vutto.
‘‘ima’’ntiādi. Imaṃ means "this" judgment of the Vinaya that is about to be spoken; (this) is connected with "avedī." The word "yo" is the remainder. The noble youth who is accomplished in mindfulness (satisampajañña) and accomplished in faith (saddhāsampanno) imaṃ properly avedi knows "this" judgment of the Vinaya. What kind of (judgment)? He says ‘‘hitavibhāvana’’. Because morality (sīla) is the root cause of mundane and supramundane accomplishment, here hitaṃ means "welfare"; that which illuminates (vibhāveti) that is hitavibhāvanoti. Because it is stated, "Established in morality…he disentangles the tangle" (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; mi. pa. 2.1.9), this judgment of the Vinaya is called "illuminator of welfare" because it is the revealer of the Pātimokkhasaṃvara morality, which is the foremost among the four kinds of pure morality (catupārisuddhisīlesu), which are the root for all mundane and supramundane qualities (sabbakilesajaṭāvijaṭanalokuttarañāṇassa padaṭṭhānasopacārasābhiññārūpārūpaaṭṭhasamādhīnaṃ padaṭṭhānatāya sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇasampadānaṃ mūlabhūtesu catupārisuddhisīlesu padhānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ), and are the foundation for supramundane knowledge that disentangles all the tangles of defilements.
Bhāvananti bhāvīyati punappunaṃ cetasi nivesīyatīti bhāvano, bhāvanīyoti vuttaṃ hoti. Hitavibhāvakattāyeva hitatthīhi punappunaṃ citte vāsetabboti vuttaṃ hoti, taṃ evaṃvidhaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ.Surasambhavanti rasīyati assādīyatīti raso, saddaraso attharaso karuṇādiraso vimuttiraso ca, sobhaṇo raso etassātisuraso,vinayavinicchayo, taṃ surasaṃ.Bhavaṃbhavantaṃ, santanti vuttaṃ hoti, surasaṃ samānaṃ, surasaṃ bhūtanti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Sileso pasādo samatā madhuratā sukhumālatā atthabyatti udāratā ojo kanti samādhī’’ti evaṃ vuttehi kavijanehi assādetabbasilesādidasavidhasaddajīvitaguṇasaṅkhātasaddarasasampattīhi ca sabhāvākhyānaṃ upamā rūpakaṃ dīpakaṃ āvuttīti evamādikkamaniddiṭṭhapañcatiṃsaatthālaṅkāresu anurūpasabhāvākhyānādippadhānaatthālaṅkārasaṅkhātaattharasasampattīhi ca yathāsambhavaṃ pakāsitabbakaruṇārasaabbhutarasasantarasādīhi ca yuttattā surasaṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayanti vuttaṃ hoti.
Bhāvanaṃ means "that which should be cultivated (bhāvanīyoti)," (since) it is cultivated (bhāvīyati), repeatedly placed in the mind (punappunaṃ cetasi nivesīyatīti). Because it illuminates welfare, it is said that it should be repeatedly placed in the mind by those who desire welfare; that kind of judgment of the Vinaya. Surasambhavaṃ, that which is savored (rasīyati), enjoyed (assādīyatīti) is raso, taste; the taste of words, the taste of meaning, the taste of compassion etc., and the taste of liberation. That which has a beautiful taste is suraso, the judgment of the Vinaya; that which is bhavaṃ, becoming, existing. What is said? This judgment of the Vinaya is surasaṃ because it is endowed with the taste of words consisting of the qualities that give life to words, namely the tenfold accomplishment of fine expression etc. that is to be enjoyed by wise people, like "clarity, pleasantness, balance, sweetness, subtlety, meaningfulness, nobility, vigor, beauty, and concentration," and with the taste of meaning consisting of the chief figures of speech revealing the respective natures, from among the thirty-five figures of speech related to meaning and not specifically mentioned, like simile, metaphor, illustration, repetition etc., and with the taste of compassion etc., which should be revealed as appropriate.
Sambhavanti etthasaṃvuccati sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikañca, taṃ bhavati etasmāti sambhavo, vinayavinicchayo, taṃ, kāyacittasukhānaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtaṃ, vuttanayena surasattā ca yathāvuttarasasampadasāramahussavena sambhūtamānasikasukhassa, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpanissayakāyikasukhassa ca pabhavabhūtanti attho. Ettāvatā imassa vinayavinicchayassa sammā viññātabbatāya kāraṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
Sambhavaṃ here, saṃ means "happiness, both physical and mental (kāyikaṃ cetasikañca)"; that comes from this (bhavati etasmāti) is sambhavo, the judgment of the Vinaya; that, is the source of physical and mental happiness (kāyacittasukhānaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtaṃ), and because it is surasaṃ in the way that has been stated, it is the origin of mental happiness that is born from a great festival that is the essence of the accomplishment of taste in the way that has been stated, and of physical happiness that has that same arising as its support. To this extent, the reason why this judgment of the Vinaya should be properly understood has been shown.
Pālināti sāsanaṃ pāletīti‘‘pālo’’ti vinayo vuccati, vuttañhi ‘‘vinayo nāma sāsanassa āyū’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.mahāsaṅgītikathā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251) so assa atthītipālī,pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhasāsanassa jīvitabhūtavinayapaññattisaṅkhātasāsanadharattā ‘‘pālī’’ti laddhanāmena upālinā, ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhikkhave mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānaṃ yadidaṃ upālī’’ti (a. ni. 1.219, 228) catuparisamajjhe nisinnena saddhammavaracakkavattinā sammāsambuddhena mukhapadumaṃ vikāsetvā pakāsitaetadaggaṭṭhānena visesato sāyanarakkhanakabhāvena paṭiladdhapālītināmadheyyena upālimahātherena samo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
Pālinā means "by Upāli (upālinā)". Because it protects the Dispensation (sāsanaṃ pāletīti), the Vinaya is called ‘‘pālo’’; for it has been said, "The Vinaya is the life of the Dispensation" (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.mahāsaṅgītikathā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251). He has that, therefore it is pālī. It is similar to Upāli, who has the name pālī because it is the life of the threefold Dispensation by way of learning (pariyatti), practice (paṭipatti), and realization (paṭivedha), (and) because he is the bearer of the Dispensation called the rule of the Vinaya. It means that it is similar to the Elder (mahātherena) Upāli, whose eminent position (etadaggaṭṭānena) was declared by the Sammāsambuddha, the Wheel-Turning King of the Excellent Dhamma (saddhammavaracakkavattinā), seated in the midst of the four assemblies, having opened the lotus of his mouth (mukhapadumaṃ vikāsetvā), and who has especially obtained the name pālī because of his nature of protecting what should be recited (sāyanarakkhanakabhāvena).
Sāsaneti yathāvutte tividhe sāsane, tatrāpi thāvarajaṅgamasakalavatthuvitthārādharamaṇḍalasadise paṭipattipaṭivedhadvayadhāre pariyattisāsane, tatthāpi vinayakathādhikārattā labbhamāne vinayapiṭakasaṅkhātapariyattisāsanekadese samo bhavatīti attho.
Sāsane means "in the threefold Dispensation" in the way that has been stated; and even there, in the Dispensation of learning (pariyattisāsane), which has the two aspects of practice and realization and which is like the surface of the earth that is vast with all the movable and immovable objects, and even there, since the topic is the discussion of the Vinaya, it means that it is similar to a part of the Dispensation of learning that can be obtained (from it), namely the Vinaya Piṭaka.
mārabali,māragocaro, tassa sāsanaṃ hiṃsakaṃmārabalisāsanaṃ,tasmiṃ. Khandhādīsu pañcasu māresu padhānabhūtakāmarāgādipabhavakilesamārassa gocarabhāvena balisaṅkhātaitthisarīrādinissayaphoṭṭhabbādivisayassa pariccajāpanatthaṃ ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu…pe… asaṃvāso’’tiādinā (pārā. 44) nayena vuttattā tassa mārabalissa hiṃsakaṃ hotīti mārabalisāsananāmadheyyavinayapaññattisaṅkhātasāsaneti attho.
Mārabali, the territory of Māra, because his teaching is harmful, it is called mārabalisāsanaṃ, in that. Among the five Māras, due to the territory of the defilement Māra, which originates from the prominent sensual lust, etc., for the purpose of abandoning the support-objects such as bodies of heretics, which are referred to as bait, and the touch-objects, etc., it is said in the manner of "Yo pana bhikkhu...pe... asaṃvāso" (pārā. 44), therefore it is harmful to that Mārabali, meaning the teaching known as Vinaya-paññatti.
udakaṭṭhakathāyavakkhamānattā baḷisa-saddena macchamāraṇakaṇṭakamāha, taṃ mārassa baḷisaṃ asati khipati vajjetītimārabaḷisāsanaṃ,tasmiṃ, ‘‘samantapāso mārassā’’ti vuttattā saṃsārasāgare parivattamānakasaṃkilesadāsaputhujjanasaṅkhātamacche gaṇhituṃ māramahākevaṭṭena pakkhittabaḷisasaṅkhātaitthirūpasaddādipañcakāmaguṇā- misāvutakāmarāgādikilesamahābaḷisaṃ tadaṅgappahānavītikkamappahānādivasena pajahante vinayapaññattisaṅkhāte sāsaneti adhippāyo.
Because it will be explained in the Udakaṭṭhakathā, the word baḷisa refers to the thorn that kills fish. That is Māra's baḷisa. When one does not throw or avoid it, it is called mārabaḷisāsanaṃ, in that. Because it is said, "Samantapāso mārassā," the intention is that, in the teaching known as Vinaya-paññatti, when one abandons the great baḷisa of sensual lust, etc., covered with the bait of the five strands of sense pleasure in the form of women, which is thrown by the great fisherman Māra to catch the fish consisting of ordinary people who are slaves to defilements revolving in the ocean of saṃsāra, through abandonment by the stages of abandonment of its parts and abandonment by transgression, etc.
idhaimasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye yo pana na ramate, so puggalo anayūparame tato evaparameuttame sujanassa sukhānayanenayanenayanupame vinayeratoabhiratopadhānaratopivinaye ajjhāyanādīsu yogamāpajjantopipaṭu hotipaṭutaro hoti kiṃ, na hoteva. Tasmā vinaye pāṭavatthinā ettheva sakkaccābhiyogo kātabboti saṅkhepato sādhippāyā atthayojanā veditabbā. Atha vā padhāne catubbidhe sammappadhāne vīriyeratoabhiratoyo pananaro sāramateidhaimasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye yato ramate, ato tasmā so anayūparame sujanassa sukhānayane vinayepaṭu hotikusalo hotīti yojanāti no khanti.
Here, in this Vinaya judgment, the person who does not delight is not skilled parame in the supreme Vinaya which brings happiness to good people, nayane which is comparable to the best, rato delighted, padhānaratopi even when applying effort in studying Vinaya, etc., paṭu hoti is he skillful? He is certainly not. Therefore, a person desiring to read the texts should make a committed effort right here. This is the brief explanation of the meaning with its intended purpose that should be understood. Or rather, yo pana that person rato delighted padhāne in the four types of right effort, idha in this Vinaya judgment, since he delights in the essence, therefore he is paṭu hoti skilled in the Vinaya that removes misfortune and brings happiness to good people. This is our interpretation.
Hitavibhāvanaṃhitappakāsakaṃbhāvanaṃbhāvanīyaṃ āsevitabbaṃsurasambhavaṃsurasaṃ samānaṃ surasaṃ bhūtaṃsambhavaṃsukhahetukaṃimaṃvinayavinicchayaṃ yoavediaññāsi, so puggalomārabaḷisāsanemāravisayappahānakare, atha vā mārabaḷisassa mārassa vatthukāmāmisāvutakilesakāmabaḷisassa asane vajjamānesāsanetividhepi jinasāsane, tatthāpi paṭipattipaṭivedhānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūte pariyattisāsane, tatrāpi sakalasāsanassa jīvitasamāne vinayapaññattisaṅkhātapariyattisāsanekadesepālināvinayapariyattiyaṃ etadagge ṭhapanena sāsanapālane taṃmūlabhāvato pālasaṅkhātavinayapariyattiyā pasatthatarenaupālināupālimahātherena samo bhavatīti yojanā.
Hitavibhāvanaṃ Revealing what is beneficial, bhāvanaṃ something to be cultivated, to be frequented, surasambhavaṃ similar to ambrosia, having become ambrosia, sambhavaṃ a cause for happiness, imaṃ this Vinaya decision, whoever avedi understands, that person is in mārabaḷisāsane the dispelling of Māra's territory, or in the sāsane teaching where the mārabaḷisa, the kilesakāma baḷisa (defilement-desire bait) covered with material desires and bait of Māra, is being avoided, even in the three types of Buddha's teaching, and even in the teaching of learning (pariyatti sāsana) which is the foundation for the teaching of practice and the teaching of realization, and even in one area of the pariyatti sāsana consisting of Vinaya-paññatti which is like the life of the entire teaching, pālinā in the Vinaya teaching by establishing it as foremost, he is equal to upālinā the venerable Upāli, who is renowned for preserving the teaching through the Vinaya teachings, which is the root of the teaching.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the commentary on the Vinayavinicchaya,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
In the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Paṭhamapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the First Pārājika is complete.
Dutiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Second Pārājika
39.Idāni dutiyaṃ pārājikavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ādiyanto’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti pāṭhaseso. So ca paccattekavacanantehi sabbapadehi yojetabbo, theyyacittenaādiyantoparājitoti sambandho. Parasantakaṃ ārāmādiṃ abhiyuñjitvā sāmikaṃ parājetvā theyyacittena gaṇhanto tadatthāya kate pubbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ, sāmikassa vimatuppādane thullaccayañca āpajjitvā tassa ca attano ca dhuranikkhepena pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasampattiyā adāyādo hutvā parājito hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
39. Now, to show the second Pārājika decision, he says ‘‘ādiyanto’’ etc. There, “theyyacittenā” is the remainder of the text. And that should be connected with all the words ending in the singular case, the connection is "ādiyanto parājito" with a mind of theft. Taking property belonging to another, such as a monastery, after suing and defeating the owner, taking with a mind of theft, he incurs a dukkaṭa for the initial effort made for that purpose, and a thullaccaya for causing the owner to be displeased, and by abandoning the burden for both himself and the owner, becoming not an heir to the attainment of virtue of pātimokkhasaṃvara, he is said to be defeated.
‘‘Tathā’’ti ca‘‘apī’’ti ca‘‘parājito’’ti ca ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti iminā saha ekato katvā‘‘haranto’’tiādīhi catūhipi padehi yojetabbaṃ. Theyyacittenaharantopitathā parājitoti yojanā sīsādīhi parasantakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ haranto theyyacittena bhaṇḍassa āmasane dukkaṭañca phandāpane thullaccayañca āpajjitvā sīsato khandhoharaṇādipayogaṃ karontopi tathā parājito hotīti attho.
And ‘‘Tathā’’ also ‘‘apī’’ also ‘‘parājito’’ also, having made it one with ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ it should be connected with the four words beginning with ‘‘haranto’’. The connection is "harantopi tathā parājito" with a mind of theft. Carrying goods belonging to another from the head etc., touching the goods with a mind of theft he incurs a dukkaṭa and a thullaccaya for making it move and even doing the act of removing it from the shoulder to the head he is likewise defeated. This is the meaning.
avaharantopitathā parājitoti yojanā. Ayaṃ panettha attho – aññehi saṅgopanādiṃ sandhāya attani upanikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti codiyamāno ‘‘na mayā gahita’’ntiādinā musā vatvā theyyacittena gaṇhantopi tassa vimatuppādane thullaccayamāpajjitvā tatheva dhuranikkhepena parājito hotīti. ‘‘Nāhaṃ aggahesi’’ntiādinā avajānitvā paṭikkhipitvā haranto ‘‘avaharanto’’ti vutto.
avaharantopi likewise defeated is the connection. And this is the meaning here - When asked to return the goods entrusted to himself after concealing it from others etc., saying falsely "I have not taken it" etc., taking with a mind of theft, incurring a thullaccaya for causing the owner to be displeased, he is likewise defeated by abandoning the burden. The one who rejects and carries away after denying with "Nāhaṃ aggahesi" etc., is called "avaharanto".
iriyāpathaṃ vikopentopitathā parājitoti yojanā. Yaṃ pana aññesaṃ bhaṇḍaharaṇakamanussādīnamaññataraṃ ‘‘tena bhaṇḍena saha gaṇhāmī’’ti bhaṇḍaṃ harantaṃ theyyacittena nivāretvā attanā icchitadisābhimukhaṃ katvā tassa pakatiiriyāpathaṃ vikopentopi paṭhamapāduddhārena thullaccayamāpajjitvā dutiyapadavārātikkamena tatheva parājito hotīti attho.
iriyāpathaṃ vikopentopi likewise defeated is the connection. If, having a mind of theft, he prevents another, one of those who carry away goods or a person, from carrying away the goods, thinking "I will take him with the goods," and having made him face the direction desired by himself, even changing the natural posture, he incurs a thullaccaya with the first lifting of the foot, and by transgressing the second foot-turn, he is likewise defeated. This is the meaning.
ṭhānā cāventopitathā parājitoti yojanā. Thalādīsu ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacittena avaharitukāmatāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanentopi dutiyapariyesanādīsu āmasanāvasānesu sabbesupi payogesu dukkaṭāni ca phandāpane thullaccayañca āpajjitvā upari vakkhamānappakāresu viya ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi apanento tatheva parājito hotīti attho.
ṭhānā cāventopi likewise defeated is the connection. Also, when moving an item located in a place such as on land, with the intention of stealing it, even with all efforts in the stages of the second search, the touching, etc., he incurs dukkaṭa and a thullaccaya for making it move and just like in the ways that will be said above, even moving it as little as a hair's breadth from its original position, he is likewise defeated. This is the meaning.
aṭṭhakathāsu(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) vuttapañcavīsatiavahāre dassetuṃ tadavayavabhūtapañcapañcakāni dassetukāmena vuttā, tasmā ettha chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā vakkhamāne tatiyapañcake nissaggiyāvahārapadena, pañcamapañcake parikappāvahārapadena ca saṅgayhamānattā ettha nānekabhaṇḍapañcakadvayaṃ asaṅkarato dassetuṃ chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ na gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
aṭṭhakathāsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) The twenty-five removals mentioned were spoken by one intending to show the five sets of five which are components of it, therefore, it should be seen that the sixth word is not mentioned here. Or, because in the third set of five that will be spoken, the word nissaggiyāvahāra is included, and in the fifth set of five, the word parikappāvahāra is included, it should be understood that the sixth word is not taken here in order to show the two sets of five of various items without confusion.
40.Imasmiṃ adinnādānapārājike vatthumhi otiṇṇe kattabbavinicchayassa pañcavīsatiavahārānaṃ aṅgāni honti, te ca nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakanti niddiṭṭhā pañcapañcakabhedā, tattha imāya gāthāya nānekabhaṇḍapañcakadvayappabhede dasa avahāre saṅgahetvā avasesapañcakattayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tatthā’’ti āraddhaṃ. Tatthatatthāti tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ.Nānekabhaṇḍānanti nānā, eko ca bhaṇḍo yesanti viggaho. Saviññāṇakaaviññāṇakabhaṇḍavasena nānābhaṇḍapañcakañca saviññāṇakabhaṇḍavaseneva ekabhaṇḍapañcakañca veditabbaṃ. Pañca parimāṇā yesantepañcakā,tesaṃ.Avahārāti avaharaṇāni, corakammānīti vuttaṃ hoti.Eteti anantaragāthāya ‘‘ādiyanto’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhā ādiyantādayo. Paṭipattisantāne visesaṃ vinicchayaṃ bhāveti uppādetīti vibhāvī, vinayadharo, tenavibhāvinā. Viññātabbāti paresaṃ ārāmādisaviññāṇakavatthūni vā dāsamayūrādiṃ kevalaṃ saviññāṇakavatthumattaṃ vā avaharituṃ katā yathāvuttasarūpā ādiyanādayo ṭhānācāvanapariyosānā pañca avahārā yathāvuttanānābhaṇḍaekabhaṇḍavisayā hutvā pavattantīti nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ ekabhaṇḍapañcakanti dasa avahārā bhavantīti vinayadharena otiṇṇassa vatthuno vinicchayopakārakattā tathato ñātabbāti attho.
40. In this subject of the Pārājika of taking what is not given, there are elements of twenty-five removals for the decision to be made, and those are the divisions of five sets of five specified as the five sets of various items, the five sets of one item, the five sets of own-handed, the five sets of prior effort, the five sets of theft removals. There, in order to show the remaining three sets of five after including the ten removals in the two types of five sets of various items, with this verse, ‘‘tatthā’’ is begun. There, tatthā in the third verse. Nānekabhaṇḍāna the analysis is, "nānā ca eko ca bhaṇḍo yesaṃ". The five sets of various items are to be understood in terms of items with consciousness and without consciousness, and the five sets of one item are to be understood only in terms of items with consciousness. pañcakā, Those which have five measures, of them. Avahārā removals, the acts of theft it is said. Ete those specified in the immediately preceding verse beginning with "ādiyanto" etc., The one who brings about, produces the distinction, the decision in the continuum of practice, is vibhāvī, the one who is expert in Vinaya. By that vibhāvinā. Viññātabbā the five removals beginning with ādiyanto and ending with ṭhānācāvana that are done in order to remove the properties of others such as monasteries or only properties with consciousness such as slaves and peacocks etc., as said before are to be known by the vinaya expert as they occur, being objects of various items and one item. Therefore, it means that the ten removals are helpful in deciding the matter at hand for the expert in Vinaya, they should be known as such.
41.Evaṃ pañcavīsati avahāre dassetuṃ vattabbesu pañcasu pañcakesu nānekabhaṇḍapañcakāni dve dassetvā idāni avasesapañcakattayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sāhatthā’’tiādi. Tatthasāhatthoti sako hattho, tena nibbatto, tassa vā sambandhīti sāhattho, avahāro, corena sahatthā kato avahāroti attho.Āṇattiko cevāti āṇattiyā nibbatto āṇattiko, avahāro, corassa ‘‘imaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhā’’ti yassa kassaci āṇāpanena siddho avahāro ca.Nissaggoti nissajjanaṃ nissaggo, avahāro, suṅkaghātaṭṭhāne, parikappitokāse vā ṭhatvā bhaṇḍassa bahi pātananti vuttaṃ hoti.
41. After showing two of the five sets of various items among the five sets to be stated, in order to show the twenty-five removals, now in order to show the remaining three sets of five, he says ‘‘sāhatthā’’ etc. There, sāhattho one's own hand, produced by that, or related to that is sāhattho, removal, the meaning is removal done with one's own hand by a thief. Āṇattiko cevā produced by command, āṇattiko, removal, removal accomplished by the command of the thief to someone or other, "take such and such item." Nissaggo letting go, nissaggo, removal, dropping the item outside, standing in a place to evade tolls or in a prearranged location it is said.
Atthasādhakoti pārājikāpattisaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sādhetīti atthasādhako, so avahāro ca yathāṇattikaṃ avirādhetvā ekaṃsena avaharantassa ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti avisesena vā avaharitabbavatthuviseso gahaṇakālo gahaṇadeso gahaṇākāro cāti evamādivisesānamaññatarena visesetvā vā āṇāpanañca ekaṃsena pādagghanakatelapivanakaṃ upāhanādikiñcivatthuṃ telabhājanādīsu pātanādippayogo cāti evamādippayogo ca kiriyāsiddhiyā puretarameva pārājikasaṅkhātassa atthassa sādhanato atthasādhako avahāro cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Atthasādhako accomplishing the goal, which is the Pārājika offense, it is called atthasādhako, that is, the removal which accomplishes the goal. The command not contradicting the command, that one takes without fail, and the act of commanding, "remove the item of such and such person," either in a non-specific way or in a way specifying one of the various specifics such as the thing to be removed, the time of taking, the place of taking, the manner of taking, etc. and the effort, such as dropping a trivial item like a foot-washing oil-drinking vessel or a shoe into an oil pot, etc., that accomplishes the goal, that is, the Pārājika offense, even before the accomplishment of the action is called atthasādhako avahāro.
Dhuranikkhepanañcāti dhurassa nikkhepanaṃ dhuranikkhepanaṃ, tañca avahāro, parasantakānaṃ ārāmādīnaṃ abhiyogavisaye ca upanikkhittassa bhaṇḍādino visaye ca corassa sāmino vissajjane ca sāmino ca, yadā kadāci yathākathañci gaṇhissāmīti gahaṇe nirussāhabhāvasaṅkhāto dhuranikkhepāvahāro cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iti idaṃ dhuranikkhepanañca yathāvuttappakāraṃ sāhatthādicatukkañca pañcannaṃ avahārānaṃ samūhopañcakaṃ,sāhatthādipañcakaṃ‘‘sāhatthapañcaka’’nti vuccati.Ādi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbaṃ.
Dhuranikkhepanañcā abandonment of the burden, that also is a removal. The dhuranikkhepāvahāra, which is the lack of enthusiasm for taking, thinking, "I will take it at whatever time, in whatever manner," in the matter of suing others' properties such as monasteries, and in the matter of items entrusted to one, and in the matter of the thief relinquishing the owner and the owner, is said to be the abandonment of burden. Thus, this dhuranikkhepana and the four beginning with sāhattha as said before, the group of five removals pañcakaṃ, the five beginning with sāhattha is called ‘‘sāhatthapañcaka’’. The Ādi word should be understood as specified by omission.
42.Pubbasahapayogā cāti ettha ‘‘pubbapayogo sahapayogo’’ti payoga-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. ‘‘Āṇattivasena pubbapayogo veditabbo’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) yathāṇattikamavirādhetvā gaṇhato ‘‘asukassa itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti āṇāpanaṃpubbapayogonāma avahāro. Kāyena, vācāya vā payujjanaṃ āṇāpanaṃpayogo,āṇattassa bhaṇḍaggahaṇato pubbattā pubbo ca so payogo cātipubbapayogoavahāroti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhānācāvanavasena sahapayogo veditabbo’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanassa upalakkhaṇapadattā ṭhānācāvanañca parāyattabhūmigahaṇe khīlasaṅkamanādikañca sahapayogo avahāroti veditabbo.
42. Pubbasahapayogā cā here, the word "payogo" should be connected individually to "pubbapayogo sahapayogo". aṭṭhakathā Because of the statement (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) "prior effort should be understood in terms of command," the command "remove the item of such and such person," when one takes without violating the command is called pubbapayogo removal. The command that is applied by body or speech is payogo, because the command comes before the taking of the item, it should be seen that prior to that, that is pubbapayogo removal. Because of the characteristic word of the statement of aṭṭhakathā "concurrent effort should be understood in terms of moving from the place," moving from the place and objects such as the khīlasaṅkamana when taking land belonging to others should be understood as concurrent effort removal.
Saṃvidāharaṇanti bahūhi ekato hutvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ avaharissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā sabbehi, ekato vā sabbesaṃ anumatiyā ekena vā gantvā parasantakassa theyyacittena haraṇasaṅkhāto saṃvidāvahāro ca. Samaṃ ekī hutvā visuṃ ekenāpi theyyacittena pāde vā pādārahe vā gahite katamantanānaṃ sabbesampi pārājikaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saṃvidahitvā mantetvā avaharaṇaṃsaṃvidāharaṇaṃ. Niruttinayena saddasiddhi veditabbā. ‘‘Saṃvidāharaṇa’’nti ‘‘saṃvidāvahāro’’ti imassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Sambahulā saṃvidahitvā eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āpatti sabbesaṃ pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 118) vacanato evaṃ sahakatamantanesu ekenāpi theyyacittena pāde vā pādārahe vā gahite katamantanānaṃ sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Saṃvidāharaṇa Having gathered together, "we will remove such and such item," having conspired, by all, or with the approval of all by one, going and taking property belonging to another with a mind of theft is called saṃvidāvahāra. It should be seen that for all those who have conspired, when one person with a mind of theft takes a foot or something worth a foot, a Pārājika occurs for all. Saṃvidāharaṇa removing after conspiring and planning. The word accomplishment should be known in the way of expression. "Saṃvidāharaṇa" is a synonym for "saṃvidāvahāro". Sambahulā saṃvidahitvā eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āpatti sabbesaṃ pārājikassā (pārā. 118) Because of the statement, it should be seen that when one person with a mind of theft takes a foot or something worth a foot, a Pārājika occurs for all those who have conspired in this way.
Saṅketakammanti pubbaṇhādikālaparicchedena sañjānanaṃsaṅketo,tena kataṃ kammaṃ avaharaṇaṃ saṅketakammaṃ nāma. Taṃ pana purebhattādīsu kañci kālaṃ paricchinditvā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti vutte tasmiṃyeva kāle taṃyeva yathāvuttaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati ce, saṅketakārakassa saṅketakkhaṇeyeva pārājikanti saṅkhepato veditabbaṃ.
Saṅketakamma Knowing by specifying a time such as morning etc., saṅketo, the action, the removal done by that is called saṅketakamma. However, if after specifying a time before the meal etc., "remove such and such item at this time," when he removes that same item as said at that very time, it should be known in brief that the maker of the sign incurs a Pārājika at the very moment of making the sign.
Nemittanti parabhaṇḍāvahārassa hetuttā akkhinikhaṇanādinimittaṃnāma, tena nibbattaṃ nemittaṃ, avaharaṇasaṅkhātakammaṃ avahāro. ‘‘Mayā akkhimhi nikhaṇite vā bhamumhi ukkhitte vā itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti āṇattena taṃ nimittaṃ disvā vuttameva bhaṇḍaṃ vuttaniyāmamavirādhetvā gahitaṃ ce, nimittakārakassa nimittakaraṇakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hoti. Vuttaniyāmaṃ virādhetvā gahitaṃ ce, nimittakārako muccati, avahārakasseva pārājikaṃ. Pubbapayogo ādi yassa taṃpubbapayogādi,pubbapayogādi ca taṃ pañcakañcāti viggaho.
Nemitta Because it is the cause for the removal of another's item, the indication like winking is called nimittaṃ, the action, the removal done by that is called nemitta, removal. If, by commanding, "When I wink or raise an eyebrow, remove such and such item," when he sees that indication, takes that very item without violating the rules stated, the maker of the indication incurs a Pārājika at the very moment of making the indication. If he takes it violating the rules stated, the maker of the indication is freed, the remover alone incurs a Pārājika. That of which prior effort is the beginning is pubbapayogādi, the analysis is "pubbapayogādi ca taṃ pañcakañca".
43.Theyyañca pasayhañca parikappo ca paṭicchanno ca kuso catheyyapasayhaparikappapaṭicchannakusā,te ādī upapadabhūtā yesaṃ avahārānaṃ tetheyya…pe… kusādikā, avahārā, iminā theyyāvahāro ca…pe… kusāvahāro cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthatheyyāvahārotithenovuccati coro, tassa bhāvotheyyaṃ,ettha na-kāralopo niruttinayena daṭṭhabbo, tena avaharaṇaṃ theyyāvahāro, sandhicchedādivasena adissamānena gahaṇañca kūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇādīhi vañcetvā gahaṇañca theyyāvahāro.
43. The words "theyyañca pasayhañca parikappo ca paṭicchanno ca kuso ca" mean: theyya, pasayha, parikappa, paṭicchanna, and kusa. These words are the beginning, the foundation, of those avahāras, therefore they are called theyya…pe… kusādikā, avahārā. By this it is said that there is theyyāvahāra, etc., and kusāvahāra. Herein, theyyāvahāro means theno is called a thief, the state of a thief is theyyaṃ, here the deletion of the na-kāra should be seen according to the rules of etymology; therefore, the act of stealing is theyyāvahāro, which means taking something invisibly by means of breaking and entering, etc., or deceiving and taking something by means of false measures, false kahāpaṇas, etc., is theyyāvahāro.
pasayhāvahāro,gāmavilopakā viya sāmike abhibhavitvā gahaṇañca rājabhaṭādayo viya abhibhavitvā nibaddhakaraggahaṇe adhikaggahaṇañca pasayhāvahāro.
pasayhāvahāro means, like those who plunder villages, taking something by overpowering the owner; or like royal officers, taking excessive taxes by force when collecting fixed taxes is pasayhāvahāro.
parikappāvahāro,so ca bhaṇḍokāsaparikappavasena duvidho hoti. Tattha nikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ andhakārappadesaṃ pavisitvā suttādibhaṇḍāni tattha nikkhittāni, te peḷādayo gaṇhantassa ‘‘vatthāni ce gaṇhissāmi, suttāni ce na gaṇhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena parikappetvā ukkhipanaṃ bhaṇḍaparikappapubbakattābhaṇḍaparikappāvahāronāma. Ārāmapariveṇādīni pavisitvā lobhanīyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ disvā gabbhapāsādatalapamukhamāḷakapākāradvārakoṭṭhakādiṃ yaṃ kiñci ṭhānaṃ parikappetvā ‘‘etthantare diṭṭho ce, oloketuṃ gahitaṃ viya dassāmi, no ce, harissāmī’’ti parikappetvā ādāya gantvā parikappitaṭṭhānātikkamo okāsaparikappapubbakattāokāsaparikappāvahāronāmāti saṅkhepato veditabbo.
parikappāvahāro is twofold based on the parikappa (intention) regarding goods and location. Here, nikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ (goods that have been deposited): entering a dark place where goods like threads, etc., have been deposited, and as one picks up those baskets, etc., thinking, "If I pick up the cloths, I will not pick up the threads," lifting them up with such intention is called bhaṇḍaparikappāvahāro because of the intention regarding goods. Entering monasteries, etc., seeing desirable goods, and intending regarding any place such as a roof of a building, a platform, a surrounding wall, a gate, or a tower, "If I am seen here, I will pretend to have taken it to inspect it, if not, I will steal it," taking it away and passing beyond the intended place is called okāsaparikappāvahāro because of the intention regarding location; this should be understood in brief.
paṭicchannāvahāro,uyyānādīsu kīḷamānehi vā saṅghaparivisantehi vā manussehi omuñcitvā ṭhapitaṃ alaṅkārādikaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhaṇḍaṃ disvā ‘‘oṇamitvā gaṇhante āsaṅkantī’’ti ṭhatvā tiṇapaṇṇapaṃsuvālukādīhi paṭicchādetvā sāmikesu pariyesitvā adisvā sālayesu gatesu pacchā theyyacittena gahaṇañca tadeva bhaṇḍaṃ kaddamādīsu theyyacittena aṅguṭṭhādīhi pīḷetvā osīdāpetvā heṭṭhābhāgena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uparibhāgena atikkamanañca paṭicchannāvahāroti vuttaṃ hoti.
paṭicchannāvahāro means seeing any object, such as ornaments, etc., that people playing in gardens, etc., or monks in a monastery enclosure have taken off and placed down, thinking, "If I bend down and pick it up, they will suspect me," standing and covering it with grass, leaves, dust, sand, etc., and after the owners have searched for it and gone to their residences without finding it, then taking it with the intention of stealing; or pressing the same object into mud, etc., with a finger, etc., sinking it down, and stepping over the spot touched by the lower part with the intention of stealing is called paṭicchannāvahāro.
kusāvahāro,theyyacittena kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā parakoṭṭhāsassa agghena mahantassa vā samasamassa vā gahaṇanti attho. Yo pana bhikkhu kusapātanena saṅghassa cīvaresu bhājiyamānesu attano koṭṭhāsena samaṃ vā adhikaṃ vā ūnakaṃ vā agghena pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ aññassa koṭṭhāsaṃ avaharitukāmo attano koṭṭhāse patitaṃ kusaṃ parakoṭṭhāse pātetukāmo uddharati, taṅkhaṇe ca parassa koṭṭhāse pātitakkhaṇe ca na pārājikaṃ anāpajjitvā parakoṭṭhāsato paranāmalikhitaṃ kusaṃ ukkhipento tato kesaggamattampi apanāmeti, pārājiko hoti. Yadi paṭhamaṃ parakoṭṭhāsato kusaṃ uddharati, uddhaṭakkhaṇe ca attano koṭṭhāse pātitakkhaṇe ca sakanāmalikhitaṃ kusaṃ uddharaṇakkhaṇe ca pārājikaṃ anāpajjitvā parakoṭṭhāse pātanakkhaṇe hatthato kesaggamattampi mutte pārājiko hoti.
kusāvahāro means, with the intention of stealing, moving the kusa (lot marker) and taking another's share, whether it is of great value, of equal value, or of the same value. Furthermore, if a bhikkhu, when robes are being distributed to the Saṅgha by means of lot markers, intending to steal another's share that is of the same value, more, or less in value than his own share, or five māsakas or more than five māsakas in value, lifts up the kusa that has fallen on his share intending to drop it on another's share, he does not commit a pārājika at the moment of lifting it up, nor at the moment of dropping it on the other's share, but if he removes even a hair's breadth from the other's share while lifting up the kusa with another's name written on it, he commits a pārājika. If he first lifts up the kusa from the other's share, he does not commit a pārājika at the moment of lifting it up, nor at the moment of dropping it on his own share, but if even a hair's breadth falls from his hand at the moment of dropping it on the other's share, he commits a pārājika.
samantapāsādikāyavinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
This should be understood in the manner stated in the Samantapāsādikā Vinaya commentary.
44.Ettāvatā adinnādānapārājikassa vinicchayāvayavarūpena uggahetabbe pañcavīsati avahāre dassetvā idāni adinnādānavinicchaye sampatte sahasā āpattiṃ anāropetvā paṭhamaṃ oloketabbāni pañca ṭhānāni dassetuṃ‘‘vatthukālagghadese cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
44. Having shown twenty-five avahāras that should be grasped as the aspects of the decision regarding the adinnādāna pārājika, now, in order to show the five places that should be first examined without hastily imposing an offense when a decision regarding adinnādāna is reached, the passage beginning with "vatthukālagghadese cā" is commenced.
vatthunāma avahaṭabhaṇḍaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Avahārakena ‘‘mayā itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avahaṭa’’nti vuttepi tassa bhaṇḍassa sassāmikaassāmikabhāvaṃ upaparikkhitvā sassāmikaṃ ce, avahārakāle tesaṃ sālayabhāvaṃ vā nirālayabhāvaṃ vā niyametvā sālayakāle ce gahitaṃ, bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā māsakaṃ vā ūnamāsakaṃ vā hoti, dukkaṭena, atirekamāsakaṃ vā ūnapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, thullaccayena, pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, pārājikena kātabbo. Sāmikānaṃ nirālayakāle ce gahitaṃ, natthi pārājikaṃ. Bhaṇḍasāmike pana bhaṇḍaṃ āharāpente taṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ tadagghanakaṃ vā dātabbanti.
vatthu means the object that is stolen. What is said? Even if the thief says, "I stole such and such an object," after examining whether that object has an owner or not, if it has an owner, after determining whether it was taken from a place of safe-keeping or not at the time of the theft, if it was taken from a place of safe-keeping, after appraising the object, if it is one māsaka or less than one māsaka, it should be dealt with by a dukkaṭa; if it is more than one māsaka or less than five māsakas, it should be dealt with by a thullaccaya; if it is five māsakas or more than five māsakas, it should be dealt with by a pārājika. If it was taken when the owners were not keeping it in a place of safe-keeping, there is no pārājika. However, if the owner of the object has the object brought back, either that object or its value should be given.
Kālonāma avahārakālo. Bhaṇḍaṃ nāmetaṃ kadāci mahagghaṃ hoti, kadāci samagghaṃ. Tasmā avahaṭabhaṇḍassa agghaṃ paricchindantehi avahaṭakālānurūpaṃ katvā paricchindanatthaṃ kālavinicchayo kātabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
Kālo means the time of the theft. An object is sometimes very valuable, sometimes of equal value. Therefore, when determining the value of a stolen object, a decision regarding the time should be made in order to determine it according to the time of the theft.
Agghonāma avahaṭabhaṇḍassa aggho. Ettha ca sabbadā bhaṇḍānaṃ aggho samānarūpo na hoti, navabhaṇḍaṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, purāṇaṃ ce samagghaṃ. Tasmā avahārakāle bhaṇḍassa navabhāvaṃ vā purāṇabhāvaṃ vā niyametvā aggho paricchinditabboti adhippāyo.
Aggho means the value of the stolen object. Here, the value of objects is not always the same; a new object is very valuable, while an old one is of equal value. Therefore, the intention is that after determining whether the object was new or old at the time of the theft, the value should be determined.
Deso cāti bhaṇḍāvahāradeso. Ettha ca sabbassāpi bhaṇḍassa uṭṭhānadese samagghaṃ hutvā aññattha mahagghattā avahaṭabhaṇḍe agghaṃ paricchinditvā tadanurūpā āpattiyo niyamantehi agghaṃ paricchindanatthāya avahāradesaṃ niyametvā tasmiṃ dese agghavasena tadanurūpā āpattiyo kāretabbāti adhippāyo.
Deso cāti means the place where the object was stolen. Here, since all objects are of equal value in the place of origin but more valuable elsewhere, when determining the appropriate offenses after determining the value of the stolen object, the intention is that after determining the place of the theft for the purpose of determining the value, offenses appropriate to that value should be imposed in that place.
Paribhogonāma avahaṭabhaṇḍe avahārato pubbe parehi kataparibhogo. Ettha ca yassa kassaci bhaṇḍassa paribhogena aggho parihāyatīti bhaṇḍasāmikaṃ pucchitvā tasmiṃ bhaṇḍe navepi ekavārampi yena kenaci pakārena paribhutte parihāpetvā aggho paricchinditabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
Paribhogo means the use of the stolen object by others before the theft. Here, since the value of any object decreases with use, after asking the owner of the object, even if that object has been used in some way even once when it is new, the value should be determined after deducting the decrease in value.
‘‘pañcapi ñatvā etāni kattabbo paṇḍitena vinicchayo’’ti.
"pañcapi ñatvā etāni kattabbo paṇḍitena vinicchayo"ti.
45.Ettāvatā adinnādānavinicchayāvayavabhūte pañcavīsati avahāre ca pañcaṭṭhānāvalokanañca dassetvā idāni anāgate pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsapidahanatthaṃ parasantakaṃ yaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ yena kenaci pakārena gaṇhato mokkhābhāvaṃ dassetukāmena tathāgatena yā panetā –
45. Having shown twenty-five avahāras that are aspects of the decision regarding adinnādāna and the examination of the five places, now, in order to prevent future evil bhikkhus from concealing their loopholes, the Tathāgata, wishing to show that there is no escape for one who takes any object belonging to another, wherever it is situated, in any way, (spoke the following verses):
Bhūmaṭṭhañca thalaṭṭhañca;
That which is on the ground and that which is on dry land;
And further that which is in the sky;
That which is in space and that which is in the water;
And also that which is on a boat or vehicle.
Bhārā rāma vihāraṭṭhaṃ;
That which is on a load, in a park, in a monastery;
And also that which is in a field or on property;
Water in a village or forest;
A tooth cleaner and a forest tree.
Haraṇako panidhi ceva;
A thing for carrying and also a treasure;
A toll barrier and living beings;
That which is footless and two-footed;
Four-footed and many-footed.
Ocarakoṇirakkho ca;
A border marker, a corner marker, a guard;
And also an agreement to carry;
A conventional act and a sign;
These thirty are the topics here.
padabhājane, tadaṭṭhakathāyaca āgatanayena vinicchayaṃ dassetukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva bhūmaṭṭhe vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘dutiyaṃ vāpī’’tiādi.
In the padabhājana (text analysis) and its commentary, wishing to show the decision in accordance with the method presented, he first says "dutiyaṃ vāpī" etc., in order to show the decision regarding what is on the ground.
Kudālaṃbhūmikhaṇanatthāyapiṭakaṃ vāpipaṃsuuddharaṇatthāya yaṃ kiñci bhājanaṃ. Imesu dvīsu kudālassa ce daṇḍo natthi, daṇḍatthāya rukkhato daṇḍaṃ chindato ca kudālo ce na hoti, kudālakaraṇatthāya ayobījaṃ uddharaṇatthāya akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇantassapi pacchikaraṇatthāya paṇṇāni chindatopi piṭakavāyanatthāya valliṃ chindatopi ubhayatthāpi pariyesane musā bhaṇatopi dukkaṭañceva pācittiyañca, itarapayogesu dukkaṭamevāti veditabbaṃ.
Kudālaṃ means a hoe for digging the ground, piṭakaṃ vāpi means any container for removing dirt. Among these two, if the kudāla does not have a handle, when cutting a stick from a tree for the handle, and if there is no kudāla, even when digging unallowable ground to extract iron ore for making a kudāla, and when cutting leaves for making a basket, and when cutting a vine for weaving a container, in both cases, even when speaking falsely in the search, there is both a dukkaṭa and a pācittiya, it should be understood that in other uses there is only a dukkaṭa.
Gacchatoti dutiyādiṃ pariyesitvā laddhā vā aladdhā vā nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchantassa pade padedukkaṭanti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā pariyesatī’’tiādipāḷiyaṃ(pārā. 94) ‘‘theyyacitto’’ti vuttattā, idha ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti vacanato ‘‘imaṃ nidhiṃ labhitvā buddhapūjaṃ vā karissāmi, saṅghabhattaṃ vā karissāmī’’ti evamādinā nayena kusalacittappavattiyā sati anāpattīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Pubbayogatoti adinnādānassa pubbapayogabhāvato, dutiyapariyesanādīsu pubbapayogesu dukkaṭanti attho.
Gacchatoti means that for one who goes to the place of the treasure after searching for a second time, whether it is found or not, there is a dukkaṭa at each step. Here, since in the Pāḷi (pārā. 94) it is said "theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā pariyesatī" (one searches for a second time with the intention of stealing), because it is said here "theyyacittena", it should be seen that there is no offense when there is the arising of a wholesome intention in this way: "Having obtained this treasure, I will make an offering to the Buddha, or I will provide a meal for the Sangha," etc. Pubbayogato means because of the previous action of adinnādāna, there is a dukkaṭa in the previous actions such as the second search, etc.
pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃnāma. Idha pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyaṃ, itaresu pubbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vā chindati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttaṃsahapayogadukkaṭaṃ. Idha adinnādānasahitapayogattā pācittiyavatthumhi, itaratra ca dukkaṭamevāti ayamettha viseso. Muttāmaṇiādīsu dasasu ratanesu, sāliādīsu sattasu dhaññesu, sabbesu ca āvudhabhaṇḍādīsu āmasanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃanāmāsadukkaṭaṃ. Kadalināḷikerapanasādirukkhaṭṭhameva phalaṃ āmasantassa vuttaṃ dukkaṭaṃdurupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ. Upacaraṇaṃupaciṇṇaṃ,parāmasananti attho. Duṭṭhu upaciṇṇaṃ durupaciṇṇaṃ, durupaciṇṇe dukkaṭaṃ durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ. Bhikkhācārakāle patte rajasmiṃ patite pattaṃ appaṭiggahetvā vā adhovitvā vā bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇena dukkaṭaṃvinayadukkaṭaṃ,vinaye paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vinayadukkaṭaṃ. Kiñcāpi avasesadukkaṭānipi vinaye paññattāneva, tathāpi ruḷhiyā mayūrādisaddehi morādayo viya idameva tathā vuccati. ‘‘Sutvā na vadanti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttaṃñātadukkaṭaṃnāma. Ekādasasu samanubhāsanāsu ‘‘ñattiyā dukkaṭa’’nti vuttaṃñattidukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Tassa bhikkhave bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 207) vuttaṃpaṭissavadukkaṭaṃnāma. Imesu aṭṭhasu dukkaṭesu idha āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Tenāha ‘‘pubbayogato’’ti. Gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ upasaggaṃ anādiyitvā ‘‘pubbapayogato’’ti vattabbe ‘‘pubbayogato’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ means a dukkaṭa due to a prior action. Here, a pācittiya in the case of a pācittiya matter, and a dukkaṭa in other prior actions. "Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vā chindati, āpatti dukkaṭassa" (He cuts wood or a vine that has grown there, the offense is a dukkaṭa) is said to be sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ (a dukkaṭa due to a concurrent action). Here, due to the concurrent action of adinnādāna, a pācittiya in the case of a pācittiya matter, and a dukkaṭa elsewhere is the distinction here. A dukkaṭa due to touching in the case of the ten jewels such as pearls and gems, the seven grains such as rice, and all weapons, etc., is anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ (a dukkaṭa due to not touching). A dukkaṭa is said to be incurred by one who touches a fruit that is on a tree such as a banana, coconut, or jackfruit is called durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ (a dukkaṭa due to improper behavior). Upacaraṇaṃ means upaciṇṇaṃ, touching. Duṭṭhu upaciṇṇaṃ (improperly touched) is durupaciṇṇaṃ, a dukkaṭa for improper behavior is durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ. A dukkaṭa due to receiving alms without taking the bowl or without washing it when dust has fallen on the bowl during alms-gathering is vinayadukkaṭaṃ, a dukkaṭa prescribed in the Vinaya is vinayadukkaṭaṃ. Although the remaining dukkaṭas are also prescribed in the Vinaya, nevertheless, just as morādayo (peacocks etc.) are called by the words mayūrādisaddehi (peacock-like sounds), this alone is so called by convention. "Sutvā na vadanti, āpatti dukkaṭassa" (Having heard, they do not speak, the offense is a dukkaṭa) is called ñātadukkaṭaṃ. The ñattidukkaṭaṃ (dukkaṭa due to the formal motion) is said to be "ñattiyā dukkaṭa" in the eleven announcements. "Tassa bhikkhave bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassa" (mahāva. 207) (For that bhikkhu, the former is not evident, and in promising, there is an offense of dukkaṭa) is called paṭissavadukkaṭaṃ. Among these eight dukkaṭas, the dukkaṭa to be incurred here is called pubbayogadukkaṭaṃ. Therefore, he said "pubbayogato". It should be understood that "pubbayogato" is said instead of "pubbapayogato" omitting the prefix for the ease of the verse's meter.
sāratthadīpaniyaṃ(sārattha. ṭī. 2.94) vuttanti.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) pana rajokiṇṇadukkaṭasseva ‘‘vinayadukkaṭa’’nti gahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ. Itarathā aṭṭha dukkaṭānīti gaṇanāparicchedoyeva niratthako siyāti pubbapayoge dukkaṭādīnampi vinayadukkaṭeyeva saṅgahetabbabhāvepi katipayāni dassetvā itaresamekato dassanatthaṃ tesaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgahitattepi geyyagāthādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ visuṃ dassanaṃ viyāti veditabbaṃ.
It is stated in the Sāratthadīpanī (sārattha. ṭī. 2.94). In the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94), however, the taking of "vinayadukkaṭa" as rajokiṇṇadukkaṭassa (dukkaṭa due to dust contamination) is merely illustrative. Otherwise, the delimitation of counting eight dukkaṭas would be meaningless; therefore, even though dukkaṭas due to prior actions etc. should be included in vinayadukkaṭa itself, their separate mention is for the purpose of showing some examples and showing the others together, just as the separate showing of the eight components such as geyyagāthā even though they are included in the suttanta.
46.Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vāti tasmiṃ ciranihitanidhūpari jātaṃ allaṃ sukkhaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā.Lataṃ vāti tādisaṃ valliṃ vā. Idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ tiṇādīnaṃ khuddakagacchānañca gahetabbattā.Ubhayatthāpīti alle ca sukkhe cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Allarukkhādīni chindato pācittiyaṃ ahutvā dukkaṭamattassa bhavane kāraṇaṃ dasseti‘‘sahapayogato’’ti. Avahārena sahitapayogattā pācittiyaṭṭhānepi dukkaṭamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sahapayogato ubhayatthāpi dukkaṭa’’nti vadanto paṭhamagāthāya dassitapubbapayogato imāya dassitasahapayogassa visesaṃ dasseti.
46. Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā means dry or wet wood that has grown on that long-buried treasure. Lataṃ vā means a vine of the same kind. This is illustrative, since it is to be taken to include grass and small bushes. Ubhayatthāpīti means in both wet and dry (wood). He shows the reason for only incurring a dukkaṭa, not a pācittiya, when cutting wet trees etc., by saying "sahapayogato". It is said that even in the case of a pācittiya matter, it is only a dukkaṭa because of the concurrent action with avahāra. By saying "sahapayogato ubhayatthāpi dukkaṭa" (due to the concurrent action, there is a dukkaṭa in both cases), he shows the distinction between the pubbayoga (prior action) shown in the first verse and the sahapayogato (concurrent action) shown in this verse.
47.Pathavinti kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ vā pathaviṃ. Akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇato sahapayogattā dukkaṭameva.Byūhatoti paṃsuṃ ekato rāsiṃ karontassa. ‘‘Viyūhati ekapasse rāsiṃ karotī’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanato ūha-iccetassa dhātuno vitakke uppannattepi dhātūnamanekatthattā vi-upasaggavasena idha rāsikaraṇe vattatīti gahetabbaṃ. Rāsibhūtaṃ paṃsuṃ kudālena vā hatthena vā pacchiyā vā uddharantassa ca apanentassa ca payogagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃpaṃsumeva vāti ettha avuttasamuccayatthenavā-saddena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Āmasantassāti nidhikumbhiṃ hatthena parāmasantassa.Vāti samuccaye.Dukkaṭanti duṭṭhu kataṃ kiriyaṃ satthārā vuttaṃ virādhetvā khalitvā katattāti dukkaṭaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃparivāre(pari. 339) –
47. Pathavi means earth, whether permissible or not. Digging impermissible earth incurs a dukkata for the accompanying effort. Byūhato means one who makes a heap of dust. Since the commentary says, "Viyūhati means heaping on one side," although the meaning of the root ūha is to produce thoughts, because roots have multiple meanings, here, due to the prefix vi, it should be understood as referring to heaping. For one who lifts or removes a heap of dust with a hoe, hand, or basket, a dukkata is incurred for each effort. Here, it should be understood that paṃsumeva vā is included by the word vā in the sense of an unstated combination. Āmasantassa means one who touches a treasure pot with his hand. Vā is for combination. Dukkaṭa means a wrongly done action, said by the Teacher, done by violating and transgressing. This was said in the Parivāra (pari. 339) –
‘‘Dukkaṭanti hi yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ;
‘‘Dukkaṭa, indeed, what is said,
Listen to it as it really is;
Offended, violated, and transgressed,
Whatever is done is dukkaṭa.’’
parivāre(pari. 339) –
Parivāra (pari. 339) –
‘‘Yaṃ manusso kare pāpaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho;
‘‘Whatever evil a person does,
Whether openly or in secret;
They declare it ‘dukkaṭa,’
Therefore it is called that.’’
mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) vuttaṃ. Yathāpāḷiyā gayhamāne purimapurimāpattīnaṃ paṭipassaddhi ‘‘ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayā paṭipassambhantī’’tipāḷiyaṃ(pārā. 414, 421, 428, 439) āgatattā anussāvanāya eva labbhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imassa pana suttassa anulomavasenamahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttā imasmiṃ adinnādānasikkhāpadepi āpattipaṭipassaddhi pamāṇanti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
It is said in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94). If one takes it according to the Pali, the cessation of the previous offenses "a dukkata by the ñatti, a thullaccaya ceases by the two kammavācās" because it comes in the Pali (pārā. 414, 421, 428, 439), it should be seen that it is obtained only by the anussāvana. However, according to the implication of this sutta, the cessation of offenses is the standard even in this adinnādāna sikkhāpada, as stated in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā. This should be the final conclusion here.
48.‘‘Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 94) vuttaṃ ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca tassa sāmantāpattibhūtaṃ thullaccayañca ṭhānabhedaviññāpanamukhena vattabbanti idāni taṃ dassetumāha‘‘mukhepāsa’’ntiādi. Tatthamukhekumbhimukhavaṭṭiyaṃ.Pāsaṃ pavesetvāti bandhanaṃ pāsaṃ pakkhipitvā.Khāṇuketi ayokhāṇumhi, khadirakhāṇuke vā. Baddhakumbhiyā ṭhānabhedo bandhanānaṃ vasā ñeyyoti sambandho.
48. "If he shakes it, there is an offense of thullaccaya. If he moves it from its place, there is an offense of pārājika," (pārā. 94) it is said. The pārājika for moving from its place and the thullaccaya that is an offense near to it occur by way of indicating the change of place. Now, to show that, he says ‘‘mukhepāsa’’ and so on. There, mukhe means at the mouth-rim of the pot. Pāsaṃ pavesetvā means having put the binding noose into it. Khāṇuke means in an iron stake or a khadira stake. The change of place of the bound pot should be understood through the bindings.
49.Idāni ṭhānabhedaṃ dasseti‘‘dve’’tiādinā.‘‘Ekasmiṃ khāṇuke’’ti iminā dvīsu disāsu vā tīsu catūsu vā disāsu khāṇuke khaṇitvā baddhakhāṇugaṇanāya sambhavanto ṭhānabhedo upalakkhito hoti. Valayaṃ…pe… katāya vā dve ṭhānānīti yojanā.Vāti samuccaye upalakkhito hoti.
49. Now he shows the change of place with ‘‘dve’’ etc. With ‘‘Ekasmiṃ khāṇuke’’ the change of place is indicated, which occurs by counting the stakes tied to stakes dug in two, three, or four directions. Valayaṃ…pe… katāya vā dve ṭhānānīti yojanā. Vā is for combination, it is indicated.
50.Evaṃ ṭhānabhedaṃ dassetvā idāni ṭhānavasena āpajjitabbā āpattiyo dassetumāha‘‘uddharantassā’’tiādi.Saṅkhalinti dāmaṃ.Thullaccayanti ekassa santike desetabbāsu āpattīsu thūlattā, accayattā ca thullaccayaṃ nāma. Vuttañhetaṃparivāre–
50. Having shown the change of place in this way, now to show the offenses that should be incurred according to the place, he says ‘‘uddharantassā’’ etc. Saṅkhali means a rope. Thullaccaya means, among the offenses that must be confessed to one person, because it is gross and an offense, it is called thullaccaya. This was said in the Parivāra–
‘‘Thullaccayanti yaṃ vuttaṃ;
‘‘Thullaccaya, indeed, what is said;
Listen to it as it really is;
He who confesses at the root of one;
And he who accepts it;
There is no offense equal to that;
Therefore it is called that.’’ (pari. 339);
Tatosaṅkhalikabhedato paraṃ.Ṭhānā cāvetīti ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi apaneti. Ettha canāvaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘uddhaṃ vā adho vā tiriyaṃ vā antamaso kesaggamattampi saṅkāmeti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 99) vuttanayena ‘‘tiriya’’nti vuttā catasso disā, uddhamadho cāti chaṭṭhānāni. Tāsu ekaṃ disaṃ apanīyamānāya kumbhiyā taṃdisābhimukhaṃ itaradisāyaṃ ṭhitapasse orimadisāya ṭhitapassena phuṭṭhokāsassa kesaggamattampi anatikkante phandāpanavasena thullaccayaṃ hoti, atikkante ṭhānā cāvitattā pārājikaṃ hotīti veditabbo. Imameva sandhāyāha‘‘ṭhānā cāveti ce cuto’’ti. Eseva nayo phandanarahitāya nidhikumbhiyā ṭhānācāvanepi.
Tato, after the breaking of the chain. Ṭhānā cāvetī means he moves it even by the tip of a hair from the place where it was. Here, in the Nāvaṭṭhakathā, according to the method stated, "whether he moves it up, down, or sideways, even by the tip of a hair, there is an offense of pārājika" (pārā. 99), "sideways" means the four directions, and up and down are the sixth place. When a pot is moved in one of those directions, if the space touched by the side standing in the opposite direction to that direction does not exceed the tip of a hair from the side standing in the near direction, there is a thullaccaya because of shaking; if it exceeds it, it should be understood that there is a pārājika because of moving it from its place. With this in mind, he says ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti ce cuto’’. The same method applies to moving a treasure pot without shaking it.
51.Evaṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanaṃ chinditvā pacchā kumbhiggahaṇe nayaṃ dassetvā idāni paṭhamaṃ kumbhiṃ apanetvā pacchā bandhanāpanayane nayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādi.So nayoti ‘‘paṭhamuddhāre thullaccayaṃ, dutiyuddhāre pārājika’’nti tamevatthamatidisati.
51. Having shown the method of cutting the first binding and then taking the pot, now to show the method of removing the pot first and then removing the binding, he says ‘‘paṭhama’’ etc. So nayo means he emphasizes the same meaning, "thullaccaya at the first lifting, pārājika at the second lifting."
52.Valayanti kumbhiyā baddhasaṅkhalikāya mūle pavesitaṃ valayaṃ. Mūle ghaṃsanto ito cito ca sāretīti yojanā.Ghaṃsantoti phusāpento.Ito cito ca sāretīti orato ca pārato ca sañcāleti.Rakkhatīti ettha ‘‘sīlaṃ bhikkhu’’nti pāṭhaseso, pārājikaṃ nāpajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Tatthāti tasmiṃ mūle.Khegataṃ karontovāti sabbapassato mūlaṃ aphusāpetvā ākāsagataṃ karontova.Parājitoti ṭhānācāvanassa katattā parājayamāpanno hoti.
52. Valaya means a ring inserted at the base of the chain tied to the pot. Mūle ghaṃsanto ito cito ca sāretīti yojanā. Ghaṃsanto means rubbing. Ito cito ca sāretī means he moves it from near and far. Rakkhatīti, here the rest of the text is "sīlaṃ bhikkhu," it is said that he does not incur a pārājika. Tatthā means in that base. Khegataṃ karontovā means without causing the base to touch from all sides, just making it go into the air. Parājito means he has incurred defeat because he has moved it from its place.
53.Kumbhimatthake jātanti yojanā. Cirakālaṃ nihitattā mūlehi kumbhiṃ vinandhitvā ṭhitanti attho. Samīpe jātaṃ rukkhaṃ chindatoti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā’’tiādikāya gāthāya nidhimatthake bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitarukkhalatādiṃ chindantassa āpatti vuttā, imāya pana gāthāya bhūmiṃ nikhaṇitvā otiṇṇakāle nidhiṃ vinandhitvā ṭhitamūlaṃ allarukkhaṃ, khāṇukaṃ vā gahetvā āhāti punaruttidosābhāvo veditabbo.‘‘Atatthaja’’nti iminā sahapayogābhāvamāha. Imināva purimagāthāya vuttaṃ kaṭṭhalatādīni nidhisambandhāni ce, yathāvuttadukkaṭassa vatthūni, samīpāni ce, pācittiyasseva vatthūnīti dīpeti.
53. Kumbhimatthake jātanti yojanā. It means that because it has been buried for a long time, it stands clinging to the pot with roots. Samīpe jātaṃ rukkhaṃ chindatoti yojanā. Here, in the verse beginning "tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā," an offense is stated for cutting wood, creepers, etc., standing on the ground at the top of the treasure. However, in this verse, it should be understood that there is no fault of repetition for taking a fresh tree or stake whose roots have grown clinging to the treasure after digging into the ground at the time of burial. ‘‘Atatthaja’’ means he states the absence of accompanying effort. By this, he indicates that if the wood, creepers, etc., mentioned in the previous verse are connected to the treasure, they are objects for the dukkata as stated; if they are nearby, they are objects for pācittiya.
54.Idāni evaṃ pariyesitvā diṭṭhanidhibhājanaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato acāletvā antoṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍamattaṃ gaṇhato vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘antokumbhigata’’ntiādi. Tatthaphandāpetīti antocāṭiyā pakkhitte attano bhājane pakkhipituṃ rāsikaraṇādivasena phandāpeti.Apabyūhati vāti heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ gaṇhituṃ upari ṭhitāni apanento viyūhati vā. Atha vā apabyūhantoti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) aṭṭhakathāvacanassa dvidhā karontotigaṇṭhipadeattho vuttoti attano bhājane pakkhipituṃ ito cito ca rāsiṃ karontoti attho veditabbo.Tatthevāti antokumbhiyameva.
54. Now, to show the decision regarding taking only the goods inside without moving the treasure container found after searching in this way from its standing place, he says ‘‘antokumbhigata’’ etc. There, phandāpetī means he shakes the contents to put them into his own container placed inside the pot. Apabyūhati vā means he removes the ones on top to take the ones underneath. Or else, apabyūhantoti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94), the meaning is stated in the Gaṇṭhipada as one who makes it into two, so the meaning should be understood as one who heaps it here and there to put it in his own container. Tatthevā means in the pot itself.
55.Harantoti avaharanto.Muṭṭhiṃ chindatīti attano bhājanaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhituṃ asakkuṇeyyo antokumbhimhi hatthaṃ otāretvā kumbhigatabhaṇḍena yathā abaddhaṃ hoti, tathā muṭṭhiyā paricchindati, kumbhigataṃ muṭṭhiyā gaṇhanto kumbhigatena muṭṭhigataṃ yathā asammissaṃ hoti, tathā paricchinditvā pādagghanakaṃ vā atirekapādagghanakaṃ vā gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Attano bhājane gataṃ katvā vā chindatīti yojanā. Attano bhājanagataṃ katvā kumbhigatena yathā asammissaṃ hoti, tathā paricchindatīti attho, sace attano bhājanagataṃ hutvā kumbhigatena asammissaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghati, pārājikoti vuttaṃ hoti.
55. Haranto means carrying away. Muṭṭhiṃ chindatī means, being unable to put it into his own container and take it, he lowers his hand into the pot and cuts off with his fist in such a way that it is not attached to the goods in the pot; while taking with his fist from the pot, he cuts off in such a way that what is in his fist is not mixed with what is in the pot, and he takes half a pāda or more than half a pāda. It is said that he does this after making it go into his own container. Attano bhājanagataṃ katvā kumbhigatena yathā asammissaṃ hoti, tathā paricchindatīti attho, meaning, having made it go into his own container, he cuts it off in such a way that it is not mixed with what is in the pot. If the goods, having become his own container, are worth five māsakas or more than five māsakas without being mixed with what is in the pot, it is said to be a pārājika.
56.Hāraṃ vāti muttāhāraṃ vā.Pāmaṅgaṃ vāti suvaṇṇamayaṃ, rajatamayaṃ vā pāmaṅgaṃ dāmaṃ.Suttāruḷhanti sutte āruḷhaṃ suttāruḷhaṃ, suttañca suttāruḷhañca suttāruḷhanti ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Suttena āvutassāpi suttamayassāpi etaṃ adhivacana’’ntiaṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) paṭhamamuttāhāraṃ vinā suvaṇṇarajatapavāḷādimaṇikaṃ vā suttesu āvuṇitvā katā nānāvaliyo ceva suttamayāni ca bhaṇḍāni gahetabbāni. Kumbhiyā ṭhitanti pāṭhaseso.Phandāpetīti theyyacittena gaṇhitukāmatāya cāleti.Yathāvatthunti vītikkamānurūpaṃ thullaccayaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.Ṭhānā cāvetīti ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi atikkāmeti.Cutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlā parihīnoti attho.
56. Hāraṃ vā means a pearl necklace. Pāmaṅgaṃ vā means a golden or silver chain. Suttāruḷhaṃ means threaded on a string, sutte āruḷhaṃ suttāruḷhaṃ, suttañca suttāruḷhañca suttāruḷhanti ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. Because the commentary says, "this is a designation for what is covered with thread or made of thread" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94), various necklaces made by wrapping gold, silver, coral, etc., gems on threads, and goods made of thread should be taken apart from the first pearl necklace. Kumbhiyā ṭhitanti pāṭhaseso. Phandāpetī means he shakes it, desiring to take it with a thieving mind. Yathāvatthu means according to the offense, the intention is that it becomes a thullaccaya. Ṭhānā cāvetī means he exceeds even the tip of a hair from the place where it was. Cuto means he has fallen from the sīla of the Pātimokkhasaṃvara.
mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) idaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Bhājanatale koṭiṃ ṭhapetvā kamena sakalabhājanakucchiṃ teneva pūretvā mukhavaṭṭiyā ekā koṭi nikkhittā ce, tathāṭhapitassa hārādino sakalabhājanaṃ aṭṭhānanti koṭiṃ gahetvā ujukaṃ ukkhipantassa osānakoṭi bhājanatalato kesaggamattampi ākāsagataṃ karoto ca mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ ghaṃsitvā ākaḍḍhantassa sakalabhājanodaraṃ khepetvā mukhavaṭṭiyā ṭhapitakoṭiyā phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ aparāya koṭiyā kesaggamattampi atikkāmayato ca bhājanakucchiyā upaḍḍhaṃ vatthādinā kenaci pūretvā tassopari ṭhapitahārādisuttāruḷhassa ṭhitokāsameva ṭhānanti tato kesaggamattaṃ apanentassapi pārājikaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
This is the conclusion in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94). If, after placing the tip on the bottom of the container, the entire inside of the container is gradually filled with it, and one tip is dropped at the mouth-rim, and when he lifts up straight what was placed like that, if the final tip becomes airborne even by the tip of a hair from the bottom of the container, and when he scrapes it on the mouth-rim and pulls it, and when he empties the entire inside of the container, and the place touched by the tip placed on the mouth-rim exceeds the tip of a hair by the other tip, and even if he moves by the tip of a hair from the place where the threaded necklace, etc., placed on top of it is standing, after filling half of the inside of the container with cloth, etc., it is said that there is a pārājika.
57.Sappiādīsūti bhājanagatesu sappiādidravavatthūsu yaṃ kiñci.Pādapūraṇanti pādaṃ pūretīti pādapūraṇaṃ, pādagghanakanti attho. Pivato parājayoti sambandho. Kadāti ce? Ekeneva payogena pītamatte pādapūraṇeti yojanā. ‘‘Mukhagataṃ vinā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Tatthaekeneva payogenāti dhuranikkhepamakatvā ekābaddhaṃ katvā ākaḍḍhetvā pivanapayogena. ‘‘Mukhagataṃ vinā’’ti iminā sace galagateneva pādo pūrati, antogalaṃ paviṭṭheti vuttaṃ hoti. Mukhagatena pūrati, mukhagataṃ bhājanagatena viyojetvā oṭṭhesu pihitesūti vuttaṃ hoti. Veḷunaḷādīhi ākaḍḍhetvā pivantassa nāḷagatena pūrati, nāḷagataṃ bhājanagatena viyojetvā nāḷikoṭiyaṃ aṅguliyā pihitāyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Idaṃ ‘‘attano bhājanagataṃ vā karoti, muṭṭhiṃ vā chindatī’’ti (pārā. 94) vuttanayassa anulomavasena mahāpaccariyādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanayena gahetabbanti adhippāyo.
57. Sappiādīsū means in any of the liquid substances such as ghee, etc., in the container. Pādapūraṇa means filling a pāda, meaning half a pāda. Pivato parājayoti sambandho. When is that? It is connected that there is half a pāda when drunk with a single effort. ‘‘Mukhagataṃ vinā’’ti pāṭhaseso. There, ekeneva payogenā means with an effort of drinking by making it one continuous flow without making a pause. ‘‘Mukhagataṃ vinā’’ti means it is stated that if the pāda is filled only by what is in the throat, it has entered inside the throat. It is stated that it is filled by what is in the mouth, after separating what is in the mouth from what is in the container, when the lips are closed. For one who drinks by sucking with bamboo tubes, etc., it is stated that it is filled with what is in the tube, after separating what is in the tube from what is in the container, when the end of the tube is covered with a finger. The intention is that this should be understood according to the method stated in the commentaries in the Mahāpaccariya, etc. (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94), in accordance with the method stated, "either he makes it go into his own container, or he cuts off with his fist" (pārā. 94).
‘‘Ekeneva payogena pītamatte parājayo’’ti iminā sappiādīsu mahagghesu tattakeneva pādapūraṇañce hoti, ekavārameva mukhena vā sappiādinā vā bhājanagatena ekābaddhabhāve chinnamattepi attano bhājane kumbhiṃ paṇāmetvā pakkhittena kumbhigate chinnamattepi pārājiko hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
By "ekeneva payogena pītamatte parājayo," if there is half a pāda with just that much of expensive substances such as ghee, etc., it should be understood that there is a pārājika even if the continuous flow is broken with just one gulp with the mouth or ghee, etc., in the container, even when the pot is poured into one's own container and it is cut off in the container.
58.‘‘Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā punappunaṃ pivantassa na parājayo’’ti iminā dhuranikkhepamakatvā punappunaṃ pivato parājayoti sāmatthiyā vuttaṃ hoti. Dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā punappunaṃ mukhena gahetvā vā puṭādīhi vā gahetvā pādapūraṇamattaṃ pivantassa parājayo hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
58. By "dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā punappunaṃ pivantassa na parājayo," it is stated by implication that there is a pārājika for repeatedly drinking without making a pause. It should be understood that there is a pārājika for one who repeatedly takes with the mouth or takes with leaves, etc., without making a pause and drinks an amount filling half a pāda.
59-60.Sace khipati theyyacittoti sambandho.Yaṃ kiñci bhaṇḍakanti telapivanārahaṃ dukūlasāṭakacammakhaṇḍādikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ.Telakumbhiyaṃparassāti labbhati.Taṃnikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ.Dhuvanti ekaṃsena. Tāvade vinassatīti sambandho.Tāvadeti tasmiṃ khaṇeyeva. Katarasmiṃ khaṇeti āha‘‘hatthato muttamatte’’ti, telassa pītakālaṃ anāgamma pubbapayogattā paṭhamameva hotīti adhippāyo.Vinassatīti sīlavināsaṃ pāpuṇāti.Āviñjetvāti paṇāmetvā.Gāḷetīti paggharāpeti. ‘‘Sāḷetī’’tipi paṭhanti, soyeva attho. Sāḷa savaneti dhātu.Tathāti ‘‘theyyacitto vinassatī’’ti ākaḍḍhati, theyyacittena evaṃ karontassa pārājiko hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
59-60. Sace khipati theyyacittoti sambandho. Yaṃ kiñci bhaṇḍaka means any kind of goods such as dukūla cloth, sāṭaka, pieces of leather, etc., suitable for soaking in oil. Telakumbhiyaṃ is obtained for another. Taṃ means that deposited goods. Dhuva means certainly. Tāvade vinassatīti sambandho. Tāvade means at that very moment. In which moment? He says, ‘‘hatthato muttamatte’’, the intention is that because it is a previous effort not reaching the time of soaking in the oil, it happens first. Vinassatī means he reaches the destruction of morality. Āviñjetvā means after pouring it out. Gāḷetī means he causes it to drip. Some read "Sāḷetī," that is the same meaning. Sāḷa is a root meaning to flow. Tathā means "theyyacitto vinassatī," he pulls it; it is said that there is a pārājika for one who does this with a thieving mind.
61.Tanti telassa okiraṇabhāvaṃ ñatvā paṭhamameva tucchabhājane theyyacittena nikkhittaṃ pādagghanakatelapivanakaṃ taṃ vatthādibhaṇḍaṃ.‘‘Uddharantovā’’ti sāvadhāraṇavacanena ‘‘pītamatte parājayo’’ti dassitaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāmataṃ paṭikkhittaṃ hoti.Dhaṃsitoti ‘‘sāsanakapparukkhā pātito, pārājikāpannoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Theyyacitto’’ti ākaḍḍhanatthaṃ ‘‘tathā’’ti ānetvā sambandhanīyaṃ. Iminā suddhacittena gopanatthāya tucchabhājane vatthādiṃ nikkhipitvā aññena taṃ anoloketvā tele āsitte pacchā suddhacitteneva uddharato na dosoti dīpitaṃ hoti.
61. Knowing that the oil would be poured out, he places the foot-washing oil-drinking cloth etc. into the empty container with the intention of theft. The opinion of the Great Commentary, which indicates that "defeat occurs when it is drunk," is rejected by the emphatic word "Uddharantova" ("even while taking it out"). Dhaṃsito means "he is brought down, like a tree from the Dispensation; the intention is that he has incurred a Pārājika offense." "Theyyacitto" (with the intention of theft) is to be connected by bringing in "tathā" (thus) for the sake of drawing it out. By this, it is shown that there is no offense for one who, with a pure mind, puts cloth etc. in an empty container for the sake of protecting it, and then takes it out after oil has been poured over it, without anyone else looking at it.
62.Tatthevāti ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva.Bhindatoti ṭhānā acāvetvā tiṇajjhāpakassa viya bhikkhuno ṭhānācāvanādhippāyaṃ vinā pāsāṇādinā kenaci paharitvā bhindato. ‘‘Mantosadhānubhāvena bhindato’’ti ca vadanti.Chaḍḍentassāti achaḍḍetukāmassāpi sato paripuṇṇatelaghaṭādīsu cāpallena vālukaṃ vā udakaṃ vā okiritvā uttarāpentassāti attho. ‘‘Udakamātikaṃ ghaṭābhimukhaṃ katvā opilāpentassā’’ti vadanti. Ṭhānācāvanādhippāye satipi theyyacittābhāvena pārājikā na vijjati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ.Jhāpentassāti kaṭṭhāni pakkhipitvā jhāpentassa.Aparibhogaṃ karontassāti uccārapassāvādimokiritvā aparibhogaṃ karontassa.Dukkaṭanti etesu bhindanādīsu catūsupi ṭhānesupadabhājaniyaṃdukkaṭameva āgatattā vuttaṃ.
62. Tattheva means in the same place where it is. Bhindato means breaking it by striking it with a stone etc. without moving it from its place, without intending to move it from its place, like a monk who burns grass. They also say, "breaking it by the power of a mantra or medicine." Chaḍḍentassā means even if he does not intend to throw it away, but carelessly pours sand or water into a full oil pot etc. and empties it. They say, "causing it to drip by placing a water dipper facing the pot." Even if there is an intention to move it from its place, there is no Pārājika offense due to the absence of the intention of theft; however, there is liability for the value of the item. Jhāpentassā means burning it by throwing wood into it. Aparibhogaṃ karontassā means making it unusable by pouring urine, excrement, etc. on it. Dukkaṭa means in all four instances of breaking etc., padabhājaniyaṃ (according to the word analysis), only a dukkaṭa offense results.
Bhūmaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Things on the Ground.
63.Idāni thalaṭṭhe vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ṭhapita’’ntiādi. Tatthapattharitvāti attharitvā. Etthaca-saddo avuttasampiṇḍanattho, tena thale rāsikatadhaññādīsu vinicchayo nimikumbhiyā vuttavinicchayānusārena viññātuṃ sakkāti taṃ sarūpato avuttaṃ samuccinoti.Attharaṇādikanti paccattharaṇādikaṃ.Veṭhetvā uddharantassāti kilañjasaṃharaṇaniyāmena vaṭṭetvā saṃharitvā uddharantassa.Mutte ṭhānāti kamena saṃharitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi mutte sati.Parābhavoti sāsanato parihīno.
63. Now, to show the judgment regarding things on land, he says "ṭhapitaṃ" ("placed") etc. Here, pattharitvā means spreading out. Here, the word ca has the meaning of including what has not been said; therefore, the judgment regarding piled-up grain etc. on land can be understood according to the judgment stated regarding the Nimikumbhi, so it includes that which was not stated in terms of its form. Attharaṇādikaṃ means spreading out etc. Veṭhetvā uddharantassā means for one who rolls it up according to the method of gathering creepers, rolls it up and lifts it. Mutte ṭhānā means when it is released, even as little as a hair's breadth from the place where it was standing. Parābhavo means he is fallen from the Dispensation.
64.Evaṃ attharitvā ṭhapitavatthādīnaṃ saṃharitvā gahaṇe vinicchayaṃ dassetvā tiriyato ākaḍḍhane vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘orimantenā’’tiādi.Pi, vāti pakārantarameva samuccinoti.Ujukaṃ kaḍḍhatopi vāti attharitvā ṭhapitavatthādikaṃ catūsu disāsu ekaṃ disaṃ ujukamākaḍḍhato ca pārājikaṃ hoti. Kadāti ce? Etthāpi orimantena phuṭṭhamokāsaṃ pārimantato atikkante pārājikanti yojanā.Orimantena phuṭṭhamokāsanti gahetvā ākaḍḍhantassa attano ṭhitadisāgatapariyantena phusitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ.Pārimantatoti pārimantena, karaṇatthe to-paccayo.
64. Having shown the judgment regarding gathering and taking things like cloth etc. that have been spread out and placed, he now shows the judgment regarding dragging it horizontally, "orimantenā" ("by the near edge") etc. Pi, vā only include another way. Ujukaṃ kaḍḍhatopi vā means that even if one drags cloth etc. that has been spread out and placed straight in one direction out of the four directions, there is a Pārājika offense. When is that? Here also, the connection is that a Pārājika offense occurs when the opportunity touched by the near edge is crossed by the far edge. Orimantena phuṭṭhamokāsa means the place touched by the edge of one's own standing direction when taking and dragging it. Pārimantato means by the far edge; the suffix to is in the sense of instrument.
Thalaṃnāma paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhūmipāsādapabbatatalādīni, tatraṭṭhaṃ dhaññādibhaṇḍaṃthalaṭṭhaṃnāma hoti. Tattha sabbattha vinicchayo vuttanayena veditabbo.
Thalaṃ (land) means covered and uncovered ground, the surface of a palace, the surface of a mountain, etc.; goods such as grain etc. that are on it are called thalaṭṭhaṃ (things on land). Here, the judgment should be understood everywhere in the manner stated.
Thalaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Things on Land.
65-6.Paricchedāti ṭhānaparicchedā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
65-6. Paricchedā means boundaries of the place. The rest is easy to understand.
67-8.Khegatanti ākāsagataṃ.Assāti morassa.Tanti moraṃ.
67-8. Khegata means gone into the sky. Assā means of a peacock. Ta means that peacock.
69.Ṭhānāti yathāparicchinnā chabbidhā ṭhānā.Tassāti morassa phandāpaneti yojanā.Tassāti vā bhikkhussa thullaccayamudīritaṃ.
69. Ṭhānā means the six kinds of places as specifically defined. Tassā is to be connected with frightening the peacock. Tassā can also mean the thullaccaya offense declared for the monk.
70.Aggahetvā hatthena leḍḍukhipanādipayogena moraṃ tāsetvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato apaneti.Attano ṭhānāti morassa attano chappakāraṭṭhānā.Sayaṃ ṭhānāti bhikkhu sakaṭṭhānā, samaṇabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
70. Having taken pebbles etc. in his hand and frightened the peacock with such actions, he removes it from its standing place. Attano ṭhānā means from the peacock's own six kinds of places. Sayaṃ ṭhānā means from the monk's own place, which means from his state of being a samaṇa.
71-2.Idāni ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti ce mora’’nti dassitaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ vibhāvetumāha‘‘phuṭṭhokāsa’’ntiādi.
71-2. Now, to explain the removal from its place that was shown by "if he moves the peacock from its place," he says "phuṭṭhokāsa" ("the place touched") etc.
73.Kare nilīyatīti pasāritahatthatale nisīdati.
73. Kare nilīyatī means it sits on the palm of the outstretched hand.
75.Uḍḍetvāti ākāsaṃ uppatitvā.
75. Uḍḍetvā means having flown up into the sky.
76.Aṅgenilīnanti aṃsakūṭādisarīrāvayave nilīnaṃ.Pādeti attano paṭhamuddhārapāde.Dutiyepāde.
76. Aṅge nilīnaṃ means nestled on a part of the body such as the shoulder. Pāde means on its own first lifted foot. On the dutiye (second) foot.
77.Pādānanti dvinnaṃ pādānaṃ.Kalāpassāti bhūmiyaṃ phusiyamānassa kalāpaggassa.
77. Pādānaṃ means of the two feet. Kalāpassā means of the tip of the tail that is touching the ground.
78.Tato pathavitoti tīhi avayavehi patiṭṭhitapathavippadesato, na paṭhamato tattha dukkaṭattā, na dutiyato tattha thullaccayattā, tatiyā pana ṭhānā kesaggamattampi cāvayato pārājikanti vuttaṃ hoti.
78. Tato pathavito means from the area of ground supported by three limbs; not from the first, because there is a dukkaṭa offense there; not from the second, because there is a thullaccaya offense there; but it is said that from the third, a Pārājika offense occurs when it is moved even a hair's breadth from its place.
Ettāvatā –
To this extent –
‘‘Pañjare ṭhitaṃ moraṃ saha pañjarena uddharati, pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana pādaṃ nagghati, sabbattha agghavasena kattabbaṃ. Antovatthumhi carantaṃ moraṃ theyyacitto padasā bahivatthuṃ nīharanto dvāraparicchedaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Vaje ṭhitabalibaddassa hi vajo viya antovatthu tassa ṭhānaṃ. Hatthena pana gahetvā antovatthusmimpi ākāsagataṃ karontassa pārājikameva. Antogāme carantampi gāmaparicchedaṃ atikkāmentassa pārājikaṃ. Sayameva nikkhamitvā gāmūpacāre vā vatthūpacāre vā carantaṃ pana theyyacitto kaṭṭhena vā kathalāya vā utrāsetvā aṭavībhimukhaṃ karoti, moro uḍḍetvā antogāme vā antovatthumhi vā chadanapiṭṭhe vā nilīyati, rakkhati. Sace pana aṭavībhimukho uḍḍeti vā gacchati vā, ‘aṭaviṃ pavesetvā gahessāmī’ti parikappe asati pathavito kesaggamattampi uppatitamatte vā dutiyapadavāre vā pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā gāmato nikkhamantassa ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.96) –
"If he lifts a peacock standing in a cage, together with the cage, it is a Pārājika offense. But if it is worth less than a pāda, it should be done according to the value in every case. If, with the intention of theft, he takes a peacock roaming inside a building out to outside the building by means of its feet, and it crosses the boundary of the doorway, it is a Pārājika offense. The enclosure where a strong bull is kept is its place, just like the enclosure. But it is a Pārājika offense even if he takes it into the sky while it is inside the building, having taken it with his hand. If it is roaming inside a village and he crosses the boundary of the village, it is a Pārājika offense. But if it goes out by itself and roams in the vicinity of the village or the vicinity of the property, and with the intention of theft, he frightens it with a stick or potsherd and makes it go towards the forest, and the peacock flies up and hides inside the village or inside the property or on the roof, he protects it. But if it flies or goes towards the forest, if there is no intention of ‘I will take it after making it enter the forest,’ a Pārājika offense occurs as soon as it rises even a hair's breadth from the ground or on the second foot-movement. Why? Because its standing place is its place when it is going out from the village" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.96) –
Aṭṭhakathāgato vinicchayo upalakkhitoti veditabbaṃ. Kapiñjarādiparasantakasakuṇesu ca eseva vinicchayo daṭṭhabbo.
The judgment that comes in the Commentary should be understood as illustrated. And this same judgment should be seen in the case of other people's birds such as partridges etc.
79.Patteti dvāre bhikkhāya ṭhitaṃ bhikkhuno hatthagate patte.Tassatheyyacittassa.
79. Patte means in the bowl that is standing at the door, in the bowl that is in the monk's hand. Tassa means of the thief.
80.Anuddharitvāvāti patte patitaṃ suvaṇṇādiṃ hatthena anukkhipitvāva paṭhamapadavāre thullaccayaṃ gammamānattā na vuttaṃ.
80. Anuddharitvāvā means without lifting up the gold etc. that has fallen into the bowl with his hand, a thullaccaya offense on the first foot-movement is not stated, since it is implied.
81.Hattheti hatthatale.Vattheti cīvare.Matthaketi sirasi. Gāthāchandavasena vā-sadde ākārassa rassattaṃ.Patiṭṭhitanti patitaṃ.Tanti chijjamānaṃ taṃ suvaṇṇakhaṇḍādi. Yadi ākāse gacchantaṃ, patantaṃ vā hatthena gaṇhāti. Gahitahatthe ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ, tato kesaggamattampi apanentassa pārājikaṃ. Tathā gahetvā theyyacittena gacchato dutiyapāduddhāre. Vatthādīsu patitepi eseva nayo.
81. Hatthe means on the palm of the hand. Vatthe means on the robe. Matthake means on the head. The shortening of the ā sound to a is due to the meter of the verse. Patiṭṭhitaṃ means fallen. Taṃ means that piece of gold etc. that is being cut. If he takes hold with his hand of one going in the sky or one falling, the place where it stands in the hand that has taken hold is its place; a Pārājika offense occurs for one who removes it even a hair's breadth from there. Similarly, this same method applies even when it has fallen on cloth etc.
Ākāsaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Things in the Air.
82.Mañcapīṭhādīsūti etthaādi-saddena mañcapīṭhasadise vehāsabhūte aṭṭavitānādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Āmāsampīti hatthena vā kāyena vā āmasitabbaṃ vatthādiñca.Anāmāsampīti tathā aparāmasitabbaṃ suvaṇṇādiṃ.Āmasantassāti hatthādīhi parāmasantassa.‘‘Dukkaṭa’’nti iminā phandāpane thullaccayañca ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca heṭṭhā thalaṭṭhe vuttanayena viññātuṃ sakkāti atidisati. Ṭhānaparicchedo pana mañcādīhi eva ukkhipantassa catunnaṃ pādānaṃ vasena, tatraṭṭhameva gaṇhantassa mañcassa catūsu pādasīsesu phusitvā majjhe aphusitvā ṭhitassa khalimakkhitathaddhasāṭakassa catunnaṃ pādasīsānaṃ vasena, aṭanīsu phusitvā ṭhitassa aṭanīnaṃ vasena vā veditabbo.
82. Mañcapīṭhādīsu means here, the word ādi includes things like bed canopies, etc., which are similar to beds and chairs and are aerial. Āmāsampī means cloth etc. that can be touched by hand or body. Anāmāsampī means gold etc. that cannot be touched in that way. Āmasantassā means of one who touches it with hands etc. ‘‘Dukkaṭa’’ means by this, he extends it, saying that the thullaccaya offense for frightening and the Pārājika offense for moving from its place can be understood in the manner stated below in the section on things on land. However, the determination of the place is in terms of the four legs for one who lifts up the bed etc.; for one who takes only what is on it, it should be understood in terms of the four leg-ends of the bed for a stiff cloth smeared with dirt that is touching the four leg-ends but not touching the middle, or in terms of the pegs for one touching the pegs.
83.Vaṃseti cīvaravaṃse, iminā cīvaranikkhepanatthāya ṭhapitarukkhadaṇḍasalākārajjuādayo upalakkhitā.Oratoti attano ṭhitadisābhimukhato.Bhoganti saṃharitvā cīvaraṃ tassa nāmetvā ṭhapitamajjhaṭṭhānaṃ.Antanti nāmetvā ekato kataṃ, ubhayānaṃ vā antaṃ.Pārato katvāti vaṃsato parabhāge katvā.
83. Vaṃse means on a clothes-hanger; by this, tree branches, sticks, skewers, ropes, etc. placed for the purpose of putting clothes on are indicated. Orato means from the direction facing himself. Bhogaṃ means having gathered up the robe, the middle part of it that is bent over and placed. Antaṃ means bent over and made into one, or the end of both. Pārato katvā means having made it on the far side from the hanger.
84.Cīvarena phuṭṭhokāsoti cīvarena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ.Tassāti tathā ṭhapitassa cīvarassa.So sakalocīvaravaṃso ṭhānaṃ na tu hotīti matoti sambandho.
84. Cīvarena phuṭṭhokāso means the place touched by the robe. Tassā means of that robe placed in that way. "That entire clothes-hanger is not its place" – the connection is that this is the opinion.
85-6.Orimantena phuṭṭhaṃ vā taṃ okāsanti sambandho. Cīvarabhogaṃ gahetvā theyyacittena attano abhimukhaṃ ākaḍḍhato attano ṭhitadisāya cīvaravaṃse cīvarena phusitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānapariyantaṃ itarena atikkāmayato cutīti sambandho.Itarenapārimantena bhittidisāya cīvarassa phuṭṭhokāsapariyantaṃ itarena phuṭṭhaṃ taṃ okāsaṃ orimantena atikkāmayato vā cutīti yojanā.Itarenāti pārimantena bhittipasse cīvaravaṃse phusitvā ṭhitacīvarapariyantena.Phuṭṭhaṃcīvaravaṃsokāsaṃ.Orimantenāti attano ṭhitadisāya cīvaravaṃse phusitvā ṭhapitacīvarappadesena.Atikkāmayatoti kesaggamattampi atikkāmentassa.
85-6. The connection is that it is a cuti when the place touched by the near edge is crossed. When, with the intention of theft, he drags the folded robe toward himself, a cuti occurs when he crosses the end of the place on the clothes-hanger touched by the robe in the direction of his standing with the other edge. The connection is that a cuti occurs when the place touched by the robe in the direction of the wall is crossed by the near edge. Itarenā means by the end of the robe touching the clothes-hanger on the wall side. Phuṭṭhaṃ means the place on the clothes-hanger that is touched. Orimantenā means by the part of the robe touching the clothes-hanger in the direction of his standing. Atikkāmayato means for one who crosses even a hair's breadth.
‘‘dakkhiṇantenā’’tiādi.Punāti atha vā. Dakkhiṇantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ vāmantena atikkāmayato cutīti yojanā. Cīvaraṃ harituṃ cīvarābhimukhaṃ ṭhitassa attano dakkhiṇapasse cīvarakoṭiyā phuṭṭhaṃ cīvaraṭṭhitappadesaṃ vāmapasse cīvarantena atikkāmayato pārājikamevāti attho. Vāmantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ itarena atikkāmayato vā cutīti yojanā.Vāmantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānanti cīvarābhimukhaṃ ṭhitassa vāmapasse cīvarantena phuṭṭhaṃ cīvaraṭṭhitappadesaṃ.Itarenadakkhiṇapasse cīvarantena atikkāmayato vācutipārājikā hotīti attho.
‘‘dakkhiṇantenā’’ ("by the right end") etc. Punā means or else. The connection is that it is a cuti when the place touched by the right end is crossed by the left end. The meaning is that for one standing facing the robe in order to steal the robe, a Pārājika offense occurs when he crosses the place where the robe is standing, which is touched by the tip of the robe on his right side, with the end of the robe on the left side. The connection is that it is a cuti when the place touched by the left end is crossed by the other end. Vāmantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ means the place where the robe is standing, which is touched by the end of the robe on the left side of one standing facing the robe. Itarena means when the end of the robe on the right side crosses it, cuti (falling away) means a Pārājika offense occurs.
87.Vaṃsatoti cīvarena phusitvā ṭhitacīvaravaṃsappadesato. ‘‘Kesaggamatta’’nti katthaci potthake likhanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.‘‘Ukkhitte’’ti bhummekavacanantena samānādhikaraṇattā paccattekavacanantatā na yujjatīti. ‘‘Kesaggamatte ukkhitte’’ti katthaci pāṭho dissati, so ca pamāṇaṃ.
87. Vaṃsato means from the part of the clothes-hanger that is touching the robe. "Kesaggamatta" ("a hair's breadth") is written in some books; that should not be taken. Because it is in the same case as the nominative singular ‘‘Ukkhitte’’ ("when it is lifted up"), it is not proper to have it be in the nominative singular case in each instance. In some texts, the reading "kesaggamatte ukkhitte" ("when it is lifted up by a hair's breadth") is seen, and that is authoritative.
88.Vimocento thullaccayaṃ phuseti yojanā. Cīvaravaṃse phusāpetvā, aphusāpetvā vā rajjuyā bandhitvā ṭhapitacīvaraṃ gaṇhitukāmo theyyacittena bandhanaṃ mocento thullaccayaṃ āpajjatīti attho.Mutteti muttamatte. Pārājiko hoti ṭhānā cutabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
88. The connection is that he incurs a thullaccaya offense when he loosens it. The meaning is that one who wants to take a robe tied to a clothes-hanger with a rope, whether it is touching or not touching, incurs a thullaccaya offense when, with the intention of theft, he loosens the tying. Mutte means as soon as it is released. The intention is that he incurs a Pārājika offense because of falling away from its place.
89.Veṭhetvāti ettha ‘‘vaṃsamevā’’ti sāmatthiyato labbhati. Cīvaravaṃsaṃ paliveṭhetvā tattheva ṭhapitacīvaraṃ nibbeṭhentassa bhikkhunopi ayaṃ nayoti sambandho.Nibbeṭhentassāti viniveṭhentassa.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘nibbeṭhentassa thullaccayaṃ, nibbeṭhite pārājika’’nti yathāvuttanayamatidisati. Valayaṃ chindato vāpi ayaṃ nayoti sambandho. ‘‘Bhikkhuno, vaṃse, ṭhapitaṃ, cīvara’’nti ca ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Cīvaravaṃse pavesetvā ṭhapitaṃ cīvaravalayaṃ yathā chinnamatte ṭhānā cavati, tathā chindantassa bhikkhuno chedane thullaccayaṃ, chinne pārājikanti attho.Mocentassāpyayaṃ nayoti etthāpi ‘‘valaya’’nti iminā saddhiṃ ‘‘bhikkhuno’’tiādipadāni yojetabbāni. Cīvaravaṃse ṭhapitaṃ cīvaraṃ valayaṃ mocentassāpi thullaccayapārājikāni pubbe vuttanayāneva.
89. Veṭhetvā means here, it is obtained from the implication that "it is only the clothes-hanger." The connection is that this is the method for a monk who unwraps a robe that has been wrapped around a clothes-hanger and placed there. Nibbeṭhentassā means for one who unwraps it. Ayaṃ nayo means he extends the method stated previously, "a thullaccaya offense for one who is unwrapping it, a Pārājika offense when it is unwrapped." The connection is that this is also the method for one who is cutting a ring. And the words "bhikkhuno, vaṃse, ṭhapitaṃ, cīvaraṃ" ("a monk's robe placed on a clothes-hanger") should be brought in and connected. Just as a Pārājika offense occurs when a robe-ring placed on a clothes-hanger falls away from its place as soon as it is cut, so for a monk who is cutting it, there is a thullaccaya offense when he is cutting it, and a Pārājika offense when it is cut. Mocentassāpyayaṃ nayo means here also, the words beginning with "bhikkhuno" should be connected with the word "valaya" ("ring"). The thullaccaya and Pārājika offenses for one who is loosening a robe-ring placed on a clothes-hanger are the same as those stated previously.
api-saddena yathāvuttapakāradvaye sampiṇḍite itarenaapi-saddena avuttasampiṇḍanamantarena atthavisesābhāvato avuttamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tena ‘‘ākāsagataṃ vā karoti, nīharati vā’’ti pakāradvayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tena rukkhamūle pavesetvā ṭhapitanidhisaṅkhalikavalayamiva cīvaravaṃse sabbaṭṭhānehipi aphusāpetvā cīvaravalayaṃ ākāsagataṃ karontassāpi cīvaravaṃsakoṭiyā bahi nīharantassāpi thullaccayapārājikāni vuttanayeneva ñātabbānīti eteyeva saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Valayaṃ chindato vāpi, mocentassa vāpi, valayaṃ ākāsagataṃ vā karoti, nīharati vā’’ti imesu catūsu vikappesu ekampi tathā akatvā cīvaravalayaṃ cīvaravaṃse ghaṃsetvā ito cito ca sañcārentassa cīvaravalayassa sabbopi cīvaravaṃso ṭhānanti ‘‘ṭhānācāvanaṃ natthī’’ti vuttabyatirekavasena dassitabbanti gahetabbaṃ.
The api particle, when combining the two previously stated methods, while the other api particle combines the unstated without an intervening difference in meaning, thereby combines the unstated meaning; thus, it encompasses the two methods: "either makes it go into the sky or takes it out." Just as a necklace or bracelet of treasure, having been placed at the root of a tree, is kept without being touched anywhere, so too, whether one makes the valaya (ring) on the robe go into the sky without touching it anywhere on the robe support, or whether one takes it outside the tip of the robe support, a thullaccaya or pārājika is to be understood in the manner already stated; thus, it encompasses these very instances. Among these four alternatives—"either cuts the ring, or releases it, or makes the ring go into the sky, or takes it out"—even without doing any one of them in that way, if one moves the robe-ring around on the robe support, causing it to rub back and forth, the entire robe support is a place [of contact] for the robe-ring, thus it should be understood that it shows, in a way that exceeds what was said, that "there is no moving from its place."
90.Ṭhapitassa hīti ettha pasiddhisūcakaṃhi-saddaṃ ānetvā ‘‘cīvare viya hī’’ti yojetvā visesatthajotakaṃtu-saddaṃ ānetvā ‘‘ṭhapitassa tū’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Atha vā nipātānamanekatthattā yathāṭhāne ṭhitānameva visesatthehi-saddo, pasiddhiyaṃtu-saddo ca yojetabbo. Vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Dīghato vā tiriyato vā pasāretvā cīvaravaṃse nikkhittassa cīvarassa vinicchayo pana saṃharitvā cīvaravaṃse ṭhapitacīvaravinicchayo viya vutto, ‘‘orimantena…pe… pārājikaṃ bhave’’ti gāthāttaye vuttanayena veditabboti attho.
90. In "ṭhapitassa hi," by bringing in the particle hi, which indicates well-knownness, and connecting it as "just like on the robe, hi," and by bringing in the particle tu, which indicates a distinction in meaning, it should be connected as "but of that which is placed." Alternatively, since particles have multiple meanings, the particle hi should be connected to indicate distinction in meaning for those already situated in their respective places, and the particle tu should be connected to indicate well-knownness. The interpretation should be understood thus. However, the interpretation of the robe that has been spread out lengthwise or widthwise and placed on the robe support has been stated to be like the interpretation of the robe that has been gathered up and placed on the robe support, and its meaning should be understood in the manner stated in the three verses, "by the inner edge…pe…it becomes a pārājika."
91.Sikkāyāti olambikādhāre. Yaṃ bhaṇḍakanti sambandho.Pakkhipitvāti nivesetvā.Laggitaṃ hotīti olambitaṃ hoti.‘‘Sikkāto taṃ haranto vā cuto’’ti etasmiṃ vikappe sikkāya phuṭṭhaṭṭhānavasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dutiyavikappe sikkāya, bandhanaṭṭhānassa ca bhittipasse phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ yadi siyā, tassa ca vasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
91. "Sikkāya" means in the support of a hanging net. "Yaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ" is a connection. "Pakkhipitvā" means having placed into. "Laggitaṃ hoti" means it is hanging. In the alternative "sikkāto taṃ haranto vā cuto" (or cut off from that which is hanging), moving from the place [of contact] should be understood in terms of the place touched by the hanging net. In the second alternative, if there is a place touched on the side of the wall at the place of binding on the hanging net, then moving from the place [of contact] should be understood based on that.
92-3.Kuntādītiādi-saddena bhindivālādi dīghavatthu gahetabbaṃ. Taṭṭikākhāṇukā viya bhittiyaṃ paṭipāṭiyā nivesitāni migasiṅgāni vā sūlāni vānāgadantānāma.Agge vāti kuntaphalakoṭiyaṃ vā.Bunde vāti kuntadantamūle vā.Parikaḍḍhatoti ujukaṃ ākaḍḍhato.
92-3. "Kuntādī": The ādi (etc.) includes long objects like a bhindivāla. Deer horns or stakes arranged in order on a wall like a taṭṭikākhāṇukā (a rack or frame for holding pots) are called nāgadantā (wall pegs). "Agge vā" means either at the tip of the spearhead. "Bunde vā" means either at the base of the spear-shaft. "Parikaḍḍhato" means pulling directly.
Phuṭṭhokāsanti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ nāgadante phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ atikkāmayato kesaggamattena parājayo siyāti sambandho, ṭhapitaṭṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ vihāya kesaggamattampi atikkāmayato pārājikanti attho. Kesaggena antarena hetunā parājayoti gahetabbaṃ, kesaggamattampi apanayanahetu pārājikaṃ hotīti attho.
Phuṭṭhokāsaṃ: (If) the place touched on each and every wall-peg is exceeded, losing by the breadth of a hair is related, meaning that a pārājika occurs if even the breadth of a hair is exceeded, abandoning the place that was placed. It should be understood as losing due to a gap the size of a hair, meaning that even the breadth of a hair is a cause for removal, thus a pārājika occurs.
94-5.Evaṃ dīghato ākaḍḍhane, ukkhipane ca vinicchayaṃ dassetvā tiriyaṃ ākaḍḍhane, parato nayane ca vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pākārābhimukho’’tiādi.Ākaḍḍhatīti attano ṭhitaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ āviñchati.Orimantaphuṭṭhokāsanti orimantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ, attano disāya kuntadaṇḍena phuṭṭhokāsanti attho. Ettha accayanakiriyāsambandhe sāmivacanappasaṅge upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Sakammakadhātuppayoge upayogavacanassa māgadhikavohāre dassanato kammattheyeva upayogavacana’’nti eke vadanti, etaṃ kaccāyanalakkhaṇena samānaṃ.Itarantaccayeti itarantena kato accayoti itarantaccayo, majjhepadalopasamāso, pārimantena kattabbātikkame kateti attho. Kesaggena cutoti yojanā. Yathāvuttoyeva attho.
94-5. Having thus shown the interpretation for pulling lengthwise and lifting up, to show the interpretation for pulling sideways and moving it away, he says "pākārābhimukho," etc. "Ākaḍḍhati" means he pulls towards the place where he is standing. "Orimantaphuṭṭhokāsaṃ" means the place touched by the inner edge, meaning the place touched by the spear-shaft on his side. Here, in the connection of the act of transgression, with the occasion of the possessive case, it is a dative of purpose. "In the application of a transitive verb, the dative of purpose is shown in Magadhi usage, only the accusative is the dative of purpose," some say, this is similar to Kaccāyana's grammar. "Itarantaccaye" means the transgression done by the other, itarantaccayo, a middle-term-omission compound, meaning having transgressed in what should be done by the outer edge. "Kesaggena cuto" should be connected. The meaning is just as has been stated.
Parato pellantassāti parato katvā pellantassa, bhittipassābhimukhaṃ katvā nippīḷentassāti attho.Tathevāti ‘‘kesaggena cuto’’ti ākaḍḍhati.Ṭhapitepi cakuntādimhi ayaṃ nayoti yojanā. ‘‘Kesaggenā’’tiādinā ayameva vinicchayanayo vattabboti attho.
Parato pellantassā: for one who, having made it face away, moves it, meaning having made it face the side of the wall, presses it. "Tathevā" means "cut by a hair," he pulls. "Ṭhapitepi ca kuntādimhi ayaṃ nayo" should be connected. The meaning is that this same method of interpretation should be stated by way of "kesaggenā" etc.
96.Tālassa phalaṃ cālentassaassabhikkhunoyenaphalenavatthupañcamāsakaṃ pūrati,tasmiṃphale bandhanā mutte pārājikaṃ bhaveti yojanā.
96. Of that bhikkhu who is shaking a tāla fruit, if an object worth five māsakas is filled by yena (which) fruit, a pārājika occurs when tasmiṃ (that) fruit is released from its attachment. This should be connected.
97.Tālassapiṇḍiṃ chindatīti tālaphalakaṇṇikaṃ chindati. Yāya vatthu pūrati, tassā chinnamattāya ‘‘assa pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttanayo idhāpi yojetabbo. Tālapiṇḍi sace ākāsagatā hoti, piṇḍimūlameva ṭhānaṃ. Paṇṇadaṇḍe vā paṇṇe vā apassāya ṭhitā ce, ṭhitaṭṭhānehi saha piṇḍimūlaṃ gahetvā ṭhānabhedaṃ ñatvā ṭhānācāvanena pārājikampi daṭṭhabbaṃ.Eseva nayoti ‘‘yena vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ bandhanā mutte assa pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti yathāvutto eva nayo. Etesu sabbesu ṭhānesu pārājikavītikkamato pubbabhāgānantarappayoge thullaccayañca sahapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭañca tatopi pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca gamanadutiyapariyesanādiavasesapayogesu adinnādānapubbakattā dukkaṭañca asammuyhantehi veditabbaṃ.
97. Tālassa piṇḍiṃ chindati: He cuts off the core of the tāla fruit. The method stated below, that "a pārājika occurs for him when that which fills an object is cut off," should also be applied here to the extent that it is cut. If the tāla core is in the sky, then the base of the core is the place [of contact]. If it is resting leaning against a leaf stalk or a leaf, then having taken the base of the core together with the place where it is resting, having known the change in place, a pārājika should be seen by moving from the place [of contact]. Eseva nayo: The method just as has been stated, "a pārājika occurs for him when that which fills an object is released from its attachment." In all these places, due to the transgression of a pārājika, in the immediate usage before the main action, a thullaccaya; and in the concurrent usage, a dukkaṭa in the place of a pācittiya; and even before that usage, a pācittiya and a dukkaṭa in the place of a pācittiya; and in the remaining usages such as going for a second search, etc., a dukkaṭa should be understood by those who are not confused, since the beginning is un-given taking.
Vehāsaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Vehāsaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
98.Udake nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchatoti sambandho. Agambhīrodake nidhiṭṭhānaṃ padavārena gacchato pade pade pubbapayogedukkaṭaṃhotīti yojanā.Gambhīre pana tathāti ‘‘padavārena gacchato dukkaṭa’’nti yathāvuttamatidisati.Gacchatoti tarato, hatthaṃ acāletvā tarantassa padavāragaṇanāya, hatthena ca vāyamantassa ‘‘padavārenā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇanti katvā hatthavāragaṇanāya padavāragaṇanāya dukkaṭāni veditabbāni. Tena vuttaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘gambhīre hatthehi vā pādehi vā payogaṃ karontassa hatthavārehi vā padavārehi vā payoge payoge dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98).
98. The connection is that he goes to the place of the treasure in the water. For one who is going to the place of the treasure in shallow water by way of steps, a dukkaṭaṃ occurs at each step, in the usage before [the main action]. This should be connected. Gambhīre pana tathā: He reiterates what was said, that "a dukkaṭa occurs for one who is going by way of steps." Gacchato: For one who is swimming, without moving his hands, by counting the steps; and for one who is striving with his hands, this "by way of steps" should be taken as a characteristic, and dukkaṭas should be understood by counting the times he uses his hands, by counting the steps. Therefore, it was said aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (in the commentary): "For one who is using his hands or feet in deep water, a dukkaṭa occurs with each usage, by the times he uses his hands or by the times he uses his feet" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98).
Ummujjanādisūti etthaādi-saddena nimujjanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Etthāpi ‘‘tathā’’ti anuvattamānattā payoge payoge dukkaṭanti ayamattho veditabbo. Nihitakumbhiyā gahaṇatthaṃ nimujjanummujjanesupi hatthavārena, padavārena, hatthapadavārehi ca dukkaṭamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘eseva nayo kumbhigahaṇatthaṃ nimujjanummujjanesū’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98).
Ummujjanādisū: Here, the ādi (etc.) includes diving. Here too, since "tathā" (thus) is continuing to apply, this meaning that a dukkaṭa occurs with each usage should be understood. It has been said that even in diving and emerging for the purpose of taking the buried pot, there is only a dukkaṭa by the times he uses his hands, by the times he uses his feet, and by the times he uses his hands and feet. Therefore, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (in the commentary) says: "This same method applies to diving and emerging for the purpose of taking the pot" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98).
Imissā gāthāya ‘‘nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchato dukkaṭa’’nti vacanato tathā gacchantassa udakasappacaṇḍamacchadassanena bhāyitvā palāyantassa gamanassa atadatthattā anāpattīti byatirekena viññāyati. Ettha dutiyapariyesanādisabbapayogesu pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañca pācittiyena saha dukkaṭañca avasesapayogesu suddhadukkaṭañca sahapayoge bhājanāmasane anāmāsadukkaṭañca phandāpane thullaccayañca ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca nidhikumbhiyā vuttanayena viññātuṃ sakkāti na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha ṭhānabhedo pañcadhā hoti, idha pīḷetvā osāretuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā adhodisāya saha chabbidhaṃ hotīti ayametesaṃ viseso.
From the statement in this verse that "a dukkaṭa occurs for one who is going to the place of the treasure," it is known by way of exclusion that there is no offense for one who, while going in that way, becomes frightened by seeing a fierce water snake or fish and runs away, since that going is not for that purpose. Here, since it is possible to discern in the manner stated, regarding the pot of treasure, the pācittiya and the pācittiya together with a dukkaṭa in the place of a pācittiya in all usages such as the second search etc.; and a pure dukkaṭa in the remaining usages; and a dukkaṭa for not touching in the sharing of food at the time of concurrent usage; and a thullaccaya for agitating; and a pārājika for moving from the place [of contact], it should be seen that it was not stated. There, the change of place is fivefold; here, the distinction for these is that it is sixfold together with the downward direction, since it is possible to force it down and lower it.
99.Tattha jātakapupphesūti tasmiṃ jale ruḷhesu uppalādikusumesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Yena pupphenāti niddhāritabbaṃ.Chindatoti ettha vattamānakālavasena atthaṃ aggahetvā ‘‘chinnavato’’ti bhūtavasena attho gahetabbo. Evaṃ aggahite antimassa payogassa yāva anuparamo, thullaccayārahattā pārājikavacanassa vatthuvirodhitāya ca imasseva pacchimakusumassa kantanakāle pupphanāḷapasse tacamattepi acchinne pārājikaṃ natthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekanāḷa…pe… parirakkhatī’’ti ettheva anantare vuccamānanayassa viruddhattā ca imaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetuṃ likhitassa ‘‘yasmiṃ pupphe vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ chinnamatte pārājika’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98)aṭṭhakathāvacanassa viruddhattā ca vattamānakālamagahetvā bhūtakālasseva gahetabbattā ‘‘kadā devadatta āgatosī’’ti pañhassa ‘‘esohamāgacchāmi, āgacchantaṃ mā maṃ vijjhā’’ti uttare viya vattamānasamīpe vattamānevāti bhūte vattamānabyapadesato vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
99. Tattha jātakapupphesū: Among those lotus and other flowers that have grown in that water, the locative is used to specify. Yena pupphenā: That which should be specified. Chindato: Here, one should take the meaning in the past tense as "having been cut," not taking the meaning in the present tense. If it is taken thus, since there is an unbroken continuation of the final usage, and since the word pārājika is inappropriate due to the gravity of thullaccaya and contradictory to the object, to show that there is no pārājika even if only the layer of bark next to the flower stalk of this very last flower is uncut at the time of cutting it, and since the method that will be stated immediately after, "if he protects even one stalk…pe…", is contradictory, and also to show this interpretation, and since the statement in the aṭṭhakathā (commentary), written as "a pārājika occurs when that flower by which an object is filled is cut" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98), is contradictory, one should only take the past tense, not taking the present tense, thus it should be seen that it was stated with the designation of present tense near the present tense, in the past, just as in the answer to the question "when did Devadatta come?" is "here I come, do not pierce me as I am coming."
100.‘‘Uppalajātiyā’’ti iminā ‘‘padumajātiyā’’ti byatirekato vuttattā ‘‘padumajātikānaṃ pana daṇḍe chinne abbhantare suttaṃ acchinnampi rakkhatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98)aṭṭhakathānayo saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Ekanāḷassa vā passeti ‘‘nāḷassa ekapasse’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.Tatoti nāḷato.
100. Since it was stated distinctly as "uppalajātiyā" (of the lotus type), by "padumajātiyā" (of the paduma type), it should be seen that the aṭṭhakathā (commentary) method is included that "but for those of the paduma type, even if the thread inside is uncut when the stalk is cut, he protects" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98). Ekanāḷassa vā passe: It should be understood that it was said for the ease of composing the verse, when it should have been said "nāḷassa ekapasse" (on one side of the stalk). Tato: From that stalk.
101.Bhārabaddhakusumesu vinicchayassa vakkhamānattāchinditvā ṭhapitesūti abaddhakusumavasena gahetabbaṃ.Pubbe vuttanayenāti tatrajātakakusumesu vuttavinicchayānusārena. ‘‘Yena pupphena pūrati, tasmiṃ chinnamatte’’ti avatvā gahitamatte pārājikanti yojanā cettha viseso.
101. Since the interpretation for bunches of flowers tied together will be stated, it should be taken as being about chinditvā ṭhapitesū (those that have been cut and placed) as not tied together. Pubbe vuttanayenā: According to the interpretation stated earlier for those flowers grown in that very place. The distinction here in the connection is that a pārājika occurs as soon as it is taken, not saying, "when that flower by which it is filled is cut."
102.Bhāraṃ katvā baddhānibhārabaddhānīti majjhapadalopīsamāso.Pupphānīti pādagghanakāni uppalādikusumāni.Chasvākāresūti udake osīdāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā adhodisāya saha catasso disā, uddhanti imāsu chasu disāsu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Kenaci ākārenāti niddhāretabbadassanaṃ. Ṭhānācāvanassa sādhakatamattā karaṇeyeva karaṇavacanaṃ.Nassatīti pādagghanakapupphānaṃ ṭhānācāvanena pārājikamāpajjitvā lokiyalokuttarānaṃ anavasesaguṇānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ nāsetvā sayaṃ guṇamaraṇena mīyatīti attho.
102. Bhārabaddhāni means having made a bundle and tied it, a middle-term-omission compound. Pupphānī: Lotus and other flowers worth a foot. Chasvākāresū: In these six directions—the four directions together with the downward direction since they are able to be submerged in water, and upwards—the locative is used to specify. Kenaci ākārenā: A showing of what should be specified. Since it is the most effective means of moving from the place, the instrumental case is indeed the instrumental case. Nassati: By losing the flower's worth a foot, having incurred a pārājika by moving it from its place, having destroyed the sīla of the Pātimokkha restraint, which is the foundation for all mundane and supramundane qualities without remainder, he dies himself by way of the death of qualities, this is the meaning.
103.Pupphānaṃ kalāpanti pādagghanakauppalādikusumakalāpaṃ.Udakaṃ cāletvāti yathā vīci uṭṭhāti, tathā cāletvā.Pupphaṭṭhānāti pupphānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānā.Cāvetīti kalāpaṃ kesaggamattampi apaneti. ‘‘Pupphaṃ ṭhānā cāvetī’’ti katthaci potthakesu pāṭho dissati. Pupphakalāpasseva gahitattā purimoyeva gahetabbo.
103. Pupphānaṃ kalāpaṃ: A bundle of lotus and other flowers worth a foot. Udakaṃ cāletvā: Having stirred the water such that a wave arises. Pupphaṭṭhānā: From the place where the flowers are situated. Cāveti: He moves the bundle even by the breadth of a hair. In some books, a reading is seen: "Pupphaṃ ṭhānā cāveti". Since only the bundle of flowers has been taken, the former should be taken.
104.‘‘Ettha gataṃ gahessāmī’’ti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā.Parikappetīti ‘‘ettha gataṃ gahessāmī’’ti ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā takketi.Rakkhatīti ṭhānācāvanepi sati so parikappo pārājikāpattito taṃ bhikkhuṃ rakkhati.Gataṭṭhānāti pupphakalāpena gataṃ sampattañca taṃ ṭhānañcāti viggaho.‘‘Uddharanto’’ti etena ‘‘pupphānaṃ kalāpa’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.‘‘Kataṭṭhānā’’tipi pāṭho, katā pupphānaṃ ṭhānā uddharantoti sambandho. Udakaṃ cāletvā vīciyo uṭṭhāpetvā vīcippahārena udakapiṭṭhena parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ sampattaṃ pupphakalāpaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānā uddharanto kesaggamattampi ṭhānā cāventoti attho.‘‘Ṭhānā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘bhaṭṭho’’ti iminā sambandhanīyaṃ.Bhaṭṭho nāma pavuccatīti attanā samādāya rakkhiyamānā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasaṅkhātasabbaguṇaratanaṅkurābhinibbattaṭṭhānā patito nāma hotīti pavuccati.
104. "Ettha gataṃ gahessāmī": The connection is with the rest of the reading. Parikappeti: Having delimited the place as "I will take that which has gone here," he imagines. Rakkhati: That imagination protects that bhikkhu from the offense of a pārājika, even if there is moving from the place [of contact]. Gataṭṭhānā: The separation is gataṃ sampattañca taṃ ṭhānañca (the place which has gone to and reached). "Uddharanto": "Pupphānaṃ kalāpaṃ" (bundle of flowers) should be brought in and connected with this. There is also a reading "kataṭṭhānā," the connection is katā pupphānaṃ ṭhānā uddharanto (lifting up the flowers from the place that was made). Having stirred the water, having raised up waves, due to the impact of the waves, he is moving the bundle of flowers, which has reached the place that was imagined on the surface of the water, from the place where it is situated, even by the breadth of a hair. "Ṭhānā" (from the place) should be connected with "bhaṭṭho". Bhaṭṭho nāma pavuccatī: He is said to have fallen from the place where the sprout of all the qualities, known as the sīla of the Pātimokkha restraint, which is being maintained by himself, has been produced.
105.Jalato accuggatassāti ettha ‘‘pupphassā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Jalapiṭṭhito accuggatassa pupphassa sakalajalaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kaddamapiṭṭhito paṭṭhāya udakapiṭṭhipariyantaṃ pupphadaṇḍena pharitvā ṭhitaṃ sabbamudakaṃ ṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti.Uppāṭetvāti pupphaggaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā uppīḷetvā.Tatoti tasmā pupphaṭṭhānabhūtasakalajalarāsito.Ujunti ujuṃ katvā.Uddharatoti uppāṭentassa.
105. Jalato accuggatassā: Here, "pupphassā" (of the flower) is obtained by implication. The entire water is the place [of contact] for a flower that is raised very high from the surface of the water, it has been said that all the water standing touching with the flower stalk from the surface of the mud up to the surface of the water is the place [of contact]. Uppāṭetvā: Having pulled up the tip of the flower, having squeezed it. Tato: From that entire mass of water that is the place [of contact] for the flower. Ujuṃ: Having made it straight. Uddharato: For one who is pulling it up.
106.Nāḷanteti uppāṭitapupphanāḷassa mūlakoṭiyā.Jalatoti udakapiṭṭhito. Muttamatte kesaggamattaṃ dūraṃ katvāti pāṭhasesayojanā kātabbā. ‘‘Jalato’’ti paṭhamatatiyapādesu dvikkhattuṃ vacanaṃ atthāvisesepi padāvuttialaṅkāre aḍḍhayamakavasena vuttattā punaruttidoso na hotīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Muttamatte, amutte’’ti ca sambandhitabbaṃ, atthānaṃ vā visesato ubhayattha vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ nāḷanteti sambandho.
106. Nāḷante: At the root-tip of the stalk of the flower that has been pulled up. Jalato: From the surface of the water. The connection with the rest of the reading should be made as "having made a gap the breadth of a hair as soon as it is released." The statement of "Jalato" twice in the first and third lines should be understood as not being a fault of repetition, since it was stated by way of a figure of speech with the partial repetition of a word, even without a difference in meaning. "Muttamatte, amutte" should also be connected, or it should be understood that the meanings are stated distinctly in both instances. Tasmiṃ nāḷanteti sambandho.
107.Tassanāmetvā uppāṭitassa. Saha gacchena uppāṭitassāpi ayameva vinicchayo. Idha pana sabbapupphapaṇṇanāḷāni mūlato pabhuti paṭhamaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanāmanavasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ pupphādīni uppāṭentassa bhūtagāmavikopanāpattiyā ṭhāne sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
107.Tassa: Having bent and uprooted it. The same judgment applies to one uprooted along with its clump. Here, however, the removal of flowers, leaves, stalks, etc., from the root onwards, from their original position should be understood as moving from their place. Thus, it should be understood that while uprooting flowers etc., there is a dukkaṭa due to the effort involved, along with a pārājika for destroying plant life.
108-9.Baḷisādimacchaggahaṇopakaraṇānaṃ vacanato, jale ṭhitamatamacchānaṃ vinicchayassa ca vakkhamānattāmaccheti jīvamānakamacchānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Upalakkhaṇavasena vā avuttasamuccayatthavā-saddena vā khipakādīni macchavadhopakaraṇāni vuttānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Vatthūti pādo.Tasmiṃmacche. Uddhaṭoyevauddhaṭamatto,maccho, tasmiṃ.Jalāti udakato kesaggamattampi apanetvā ukkhittamatteti vuttaṃ hoti.
108-9.Because of the statement regarding equipment for catching fish, such as hooks, and because the judgment regarding fish in water will be stated, macche means the catching of living fish. Or, by way of implication, or by the word vā (or) implying the inclusion of what has not been said, it should be seen that equipment for killing fish, such as throwing sticks, are also included. Vatthū means the foot. Tasmiṃ macche: in that fish. Uddhaṭoyeva uddhaṭamatto: the fish is raised; in that (state). Jalā: it is said that even if a hair's breadth is removed from the water, it is considered raised.
110.Pupphānaṃ viya macchānampi ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānanti aggahetvā sakalajalaṃ ṭhānaṃ katvā kasmā vuttanti āha‘‘ṭhānaṃ salilajānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Salile jātāsalilajā,iti pakaraṇato macchāyeva vuccanti. Atthappakaraṇasaddantarasannidhānādīhi saddā visesatthaṃ vadantīti.Hīti pasiddhiyaṃ.Kevalanti avadhāraṇe, jalamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā bahiudakaṃ nivattitaṃ hoti. Sakalaṃ jalameva ṭhānaṃ yasmā, tasmā salilaṭṭhaṃ jalā vimocento pārājiko hotīti hetuhetumantabhāvena yojanā veditabbā. Āpannaṃ parājetītipārājikā,āpatti, sā etassa atthītipārājiko,puggalo.
110.He says, "ṭhānaṃ salilajānaṃ hī (the place of aquatics is indeed)," etc., why is it stated that the entire water is the place, instead of considering the position of the fish itself as its place, as with flowers? Salilajā means born in the water, and in this context, it refers to fish. Words express specific meanings due to the context, subject matter, sound, proximity, etc. Hī means it is well-known. Kevalaṃ means only, for emphasis; it is said to be only water. By this, external water is excluded. Because the entire water is the place, therefore, the connection should be understood as a cause-and-effect relationship: one who removes an aquatic creature from its watery place commits a pārājika. Pārājikā: one falls, defeats. Pārājiko: is the offense; a person who has that offense.
111.Nīraṃudakaṃ. Vārimhi jale jātovārijo,iti pakaraṇato macchova gayhati. Eteneva ākāse uppatitamaccho, gocaratthāya ca thalamuggatakummādayo upalakkhitāti veditabbaṃ. Tesaṃ gahaṇe vinicchayo ākāsaṭṭhathalaṭṭhakathāya vuttanayena veditabbo.Bhaṇḍagghena viniddiseti dukkaṭādivatthuno bhaṇḍassa agghavasena dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikāpattiyo vadeyyāti attho.
111.Nīraṃ: water. Vārijo: born in water; in this context, it refers to fish. By this same reasoning, fish that leap into the air, and turtles etc. that emerge onto land for foraging, are implied. The judgment regarding the taking of these should be understood in the manner stated in the discussion of creatures in the air and on land. Bhaṇḍagghena viniddise: meaning, he should state the dukkaṭa, thullaccaya, or pārājika offenses based on the value of the item, which is the object of the offense.
112.Taḷāketi sarasmiṃ, iminā ca vāpipokkharaṇisobbhādijalāsayā saṅgayhanti.Nadiyāti ninnagāya, iminā ca kandarādayo saṅgayhanti.Ninneti āvāṭe.Macchavisaṃ nāmāti etthanāma-saddo saññāyaṃ. Macchavisanāmakaṃ madanaphalādikaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Gateti visapakkhipake macchaghātake gate.
112.Taḷāke: in a pond; by this, reservoirs of water like tanks, lotus ponds, and puddles are included. Nadiyā: in a river; by this, mountain streams etc. are included. Ninne: in a depression. Macchavisaṃ nāmā: here, the word nāma (named) is in the sense of a designation. Macchavisa-named should be seen as madanaphala etc. Gate: when the poisoned bait, the fish-killing bait, is brought.
114.Sāmikesūti visaṃ yojetvā gatesu macchasāmikesu.Āharantesūti āharāpentesu.Bhaṇḍadeyyanti bhaṇḍañca taṃ deyyañcāti viggaho, attanā gahitavatthuṃ vā tadagghanakaṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ dātabbanti attho.
114.Sāmikesū: in the fish owners, having applied poison to the baits. Āharantesū: when they are bringing or having brought. Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ: is the resolution of the compound of bhaṇḍaṃ (goods) and deyyañca (to be given), meaning one must give either the stolen item itself or goods of equivalent value.
115.Maccheti matamacche.Seseti namatamacche.
115.Macche: a dead fish. Sese: a dying fish.
116.Amatesugahitesūti pakaraṇato labbhati, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Anāpattiṃ vadantīti adinnādānāpattiyā anāpattiṃ vadanti, māraṇappattiyā pācittiyaṃ hoteva. Ayañca vinicchayo arakkhitaagopitesu assāmikataḷākādīsu veditabbo.
116.Amatesugahitesūti, it is obtained in this context; this locative expresses reason. Anāpattiṃ vadantī: they say there is no offense of stealing; there is a pācittiya for causing death. And this judgment should be understood in the case of unguarded and unprotected, ownerless ponds etc.
Udakaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Water Creatures.
117.Nāvanti ettha ‘‘nāvā nāma yāya taratī’’ti (pārā. 99) vacanato jalatāraṇārahaṃ antamaso ekampi vahantaṃ rajanadoṇiveṇukalāpādikaṃ veditabbaṃ.Nāvaṭṭhaṃnāmabhaṇḍaṃyaṃ kiñci indriyabaddhaṃ vā anindriyabaddhaṃ vā.‘‘Thenetvā gaṇhissāmī’’ti iminā ‘‘theyyacittassā’’ti imamatthaṃ viññāpeti.Pāduddhāreti dutiyapariyesanādiatthaṃ gacchantassa pade pade.Dosāti dukkaṭāpattiyo.Vuttāti ‘‘nāvaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharissāmī’ti theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā pariyesati gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 99)padabhājaniyaṃbhagavatā vuttā, iminā pubbapayogasahapayogadukkaṭāni, phandāpane thullaccayaṃ, ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca upalakkhaṇavasena dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
117.Nāva: here, from the statement, "nāvā nāma yāya taratī (a boat is that by which one crosses over)," (pārā. 99) it should be understood as anything suitable for crossing water, even a single floating raft of split bamboo or reeds. Nāvaṭṭhaṃnāmabhaṇḍaṃ: any item on a boat, whether attached to the senses or not. ‘‘Thenetvā gaṇhissāmī’’: by this, he makes known the meaning of "with the intention of stealing." Pāduddhāre: at each step while going for the sake of a second search etc. Dosā: are dukkaṭa offenses. Vuttā: "nāvaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharissāmī’ti theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā pariyesati gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā (if, with the intention of stealing an item from a boat, he searches a second time or goes, there is an offense of dukkaṭa)," (pārā. 99) it is stated by the Blessed One in the padabhājaniyaṃ; by this, it should be understood that the dukkaṭas of the preliminary act and the concurrent act, the thullaccaya for causing movement, and the pārājika for moving from the place, are shown by way of implication.
118.Caṇḍasoteti vegena gacchante udakappavāhe, ‘‘caṇḍasote’’ti iminā bandhanaṃ vinā sabhāvena aṭṭhitabhāvassa sūcanato‘‘bandhanameva ṭhāna’’nti vuttaṭṭhānaparicchedassa kāraṇaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Yasmā caṇḍasote baddhā, tasmā bandhanamekameva ṭhānaṃ matanti vuttaṃ hoti.Tasminti bandhane.Dhīrāvinayadharā.
118.Caṇḍasote: in a swiftly flowing current of water; by "caṇḍasote," the reason for the demarcation of the place stated as "bandhanameva ṭhāna (the mooring is the place)" is shown, since it indicates a state of instability due to the natural current without any binding. Because it is moored in a swift current, therefore, it is said that only the mooring is considered the place. Tasmiṃ: in that mooring. Dhīrā: wise vinaya masters.
119-120.‘‘Niccale udake nāva-mabandhanamavaṭṭhita’’nti iminā chadhā ṭhānaparicchedassa labbhamānatte kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Nāvaṃ kaḍḍhato tassa pārājikanti sambandho. Punapi kiṃ karontoti āha‘‘ekenantena samphuṭṭha’’ntiādi. Taṃ nāvaṃ atikkāmayatoti sambandho. Etthāpi ‘‘kaḍḍhitavato atikkamitavato’’ti bhūtavasena attho yojetabbo. Yamettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
119-120.‘‘Niccale udake nāva-mabandhanamavaṭṭhita (a boat is moored by a mooring in still water)’’: by this, he shows the reason for the possibility of determining the place in six ways. Tassa pārājikanti sambandho: that is a pārājika to him who drags the boat. Punapi kiṃ karontoti āha: Again, what is he doing? He says, ‘‘ekenantena samphuṭṭha’’ntiādi (touched on one side), etc. Taṃ nāvaṃ atikkāmayatoti sambandho: It is related to crossing that boat. Here also, the meaning should be connected in the past tense as "having dragged, having crossed." What should be stated here is the same as the manner stated below.
121.Evaṃ catupassākaḍḍhane vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni uddhaṃ, adho ca ukkhipanaosīdāpanesu vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tathā’’tiādi.Tathāti ‘‘tassa pārājika’’nti ākaḍḍhati. Kasmiṃ kāleti āha‘‘uddhaṃ kesaggamattampī’’tiādi.Adhonāvātalanti nāvātalassa adho adhonāvātalaṃ, tasmiṃ uddhaṃ kesaggamattampi udakamhā vimociteti iminā sambandho. Tena phuṭṭhaṃ kesaggamattampi mukhavaṭṭiyā vimociteti yojanā.Tenāti adhonāvātalena phuṭṭhe udake mukhavaṭṭiyā karaṇabhūtāya kesaggamattampi vimociteti gahetabbaṃ.
121.Having shown the judgment for dragging on all four sides in this way, now, in order to show the judgment for lifting up and submerging, he says ‘‘tathā’’tiādi (likewise), etc. Tathā: tassa pārājika (that is a pārājika) is drawn in. Kasmiṃ kāleti āha: In what circumstance? He says ‘‘uddhaṃ kesaggamattampī’’tiādi (even a hair’s breadth upwards), etc. Adhonāvātalaṃ: below the bottom of the boat; that which is below the bottom of the boat; in that, by releasing even a hair's breadth from the water, this is the connection. Tena phuṭṭhaṃ kesaggamattampi mukhavaṭṭiyā vimociteti yojanā: The connection is that even a hair's breadth touched by it is released by the mouth rim. Tenā: by that, it should be understood that even a hair's breadth touched by the water touching the bottom of the boat is released by the mouth rim, which is the instrument.
122.Tīre bandhitvā pana niccale jale ṭhapitāyānāvā,tassānāvāyaṭhānaṃbandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dvidhā matanti yojanā.
122.However, yānāvā (that boat) which is tied to the bank and placed in still water, tassānāvāyaṭhānaṃ: the place of that boat bandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dvidhā mataṃ: is considered to be twofold: the mooring and the location where it is placed.
123.Pubbaṃpaṭhamaṃ bandhanassa vimocane thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā.Kenacupāyenāti ‘‘purato pacchato vāpī’’tiādikkamena yathāvuttopāyachakkesu yena kenaci upāyenāti attho.Ṭhānā cāvetināvaṃ.
123.Pubbaṃ: First, it is related that there is a thullaccaya when the mooring is released first. Kenacupāyenā: by any method; ‘‘purato pacchato vāpī’’tiādikkamena yathāvuttopāyachakkesu yena kenaci upāyenāti attho: meaning, by any of the six methods stated in order, beginning with "from the front or the back." Ṭhānā cāveti: he moves the boat from its place.
124.Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvāti ‘‘purato pacchato vā’’tiādinā yathāvuttesu chasu ākāresu aññatarena ākārena nāvaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānato paṭhamaṃ cāvetvā.Eseva ca nayoti nāvāya paṭhamaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvane thullaccayaṃ, pacchā bandhanamocane pārājikanti eseva nayo netabboti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘tīre bandhitvā niccale udake ṭhapitanāvāya bandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dve ṭhānāni, taṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanā moceti, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā channaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvā pacchā bandhanamocanepi eseva nayo’’ti (pārā. 99)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttavinicchayo saṅgahito. Āmasanaphandāpanesu dukkaṭathullaccayāni heṭṭhā kumbhiyaṃ vuttanayeneva ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā na vuttānīti veditabbaṃ. Evamuparipi.
124.Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvā: having first moved the boat from its placed position in one of the six ways stated, beginning with "from the front or the back." Eseva ca nayo: this same method nāvāya paṭhamaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvane thullaccayaṃ, pacchā bandhanamocane pārājikanti eseva nayo netabboti attho: meaning, this same method should be applied: thullaccaya for moving the boat from its initial placed position, and pārājika for releasing the mooring afterwards. Ettha ca, here, "tīre bandhitvā niccale udake ṭhapitanāvāya bandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dve ṭhānāni, taṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanā moceti, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā channaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvā pacchā bandhanamocanepi eseva nayo’’ti (pārā. 99)aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavinicchayo saṅgahito: the judgment stated in the commentary, "for a boat tied to the bank and placed in still water, there are two places: the mooring and the location where it is placed; if he first releases it from the mooring, it is a thullaccaya; afterwards, if he moves it from the place by one of the six means, it is a pārājika; even if he first moves it from the place and afterwards releases the mooring, it is the same method," is included. Since the dukkaṭa and thullaccaya for touching and causing movement can be known in the same way as stated below in the case of the pot, they are not stated; it should be understood that it is the same above as well.
125.Ussāretvāti udakato thalaṃ āropetvā.Nikujjitvāti adhomukhaṃ katvā. Thale ṭhapitāya nāvāya mukhavaṭṭiyā phuṭṭhokāso eva ṭhānanti yojanā.Hīti viseso, tena jalaṭṭhato thalaṭṭhāya nāvāya vuttaṃ visesaṃ joteti.
125.Ussāretvā: having raised it up, having lifted it from the water onto the land. Nikujjitvā: having turned it upside down. Thale ṭhapitāya nāvāya mukhavaṭṭiyā phuṭṭhokāso eva ṭhānanti yojanā: The connection is that for a boat placed on land, the place is only the space touched by the rim of the boat. Hī: is a distinction; by that, it indicates a distinction that has been stated for a boat that is on land from one that is in the water.
126.Ettha adho osīdāpanassa alabbhamānatāya taṃ vinā itaresaṃ pañcannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ñeyyo’’tiādi.Yato kutocīti tiriyaṃ catassannaṃ, uparidisāya ca vasena yaṃ kiñci disābhimukhaṃ kesaggamattampi atikkamento.
126.Here, since lowering it down is not possible, in order to show the movement from the place in terms of the other five modes, he says ‘‘ñeyyo’’tiādi (should be known), etc. Yato kutocī: from wherever; tiriyaṃ catassannaṃ, uparidisāya ca vasena yaṃ kiñci disābhimukhaṃ kesaggamattampi atikkamento: meaning, in whatever direction facing any direction, even a hair's breadth, passing beyond, in terms of the four transverse directions and the upward direction.
127.Ukkujjitāyapīti uddhaṃmukhaṃ ṭhapitāyapi.Ghaṭikānanti dārukhaṇḍānaṃ.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ñeyyo ṭhānaparicchedo’’tiādinā vuttanayaṃ atidisati. So pana ukkujjitvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitanāvāya yujjati. Ghaṭikānaṃ upari ṭhapitāya pana nāgadantesu ṭhapitakunte vuttavinicchayo yujjati.
127.Ukkujjitāyapī: even for one placed upside down. Ghaṭikānaṃ: of wooden pieces. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ñeyyo ṭhānaparicchedo’’tiādinā vuttanayaṃ atidisati: By ‘‘tathā’’ (likewise), he extends the meaning as stated in "the demarcation of the place should be known," etc. So pana ukkujjitvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitanāvāya yujjati: But that applies to a boat placed upside down on the ground. Ghaṭikānaṃ upari ṭhapitāya pana nāgadantesu ṭhapitakunte vuttavinicchayo yujjati: However, for one placed on top of wooden pieces, the judgment stated for a carriage placed on pegs applies.
128.‘‘Theyyā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘pājentassā’’ti visesanaṃ.Tittheti titthāsannajale.Arittenāti kenipātena.Phiyenāti pājanaphalakena.Pājentassāti pesentassa.‘‘Taṃ pājetī’’tipi pāṭho dissati,taṃnāvaṃ yopājeti,tassaparājayoti attho.
128.‘‘Theyyā’’: this is a qualifier of ‘‘pājentassā’’ (to one who propels). Titthe: in the water near the landing place. Arittenā: with an oar. Phiyenā: with a paddle. Pājentassā: to one who sends forth, propels. ‘‘Taṃ pājetī’’tipi pāṭho dissati,taṃnāvaṃ yopājeti,tassaparājayoti attho: ‘‘Taṃ pājetī’’ (he propels that) is also seen as a reading; taṃ (that) nāvaṃ (boat) yo (who) pājeti (propels), tassa (to him) parājayoti attho: meaning, there is a pārājika.
129-30.Chattanti ātapavāraṇaṃ.Paṇāmetvāti yathā vātaṃ gaṇhāti, tathā paṇāmetvā.Ussāpetvāva cīvaranti cīvaraṃ uddhaṃ uccāretvā vā. Gāthāchandavasena ‘va’iti rassattaṃ.Laṅkārasadisanti pasāritapaṭasarikkhakaṃ.Samīraṇanti mālutaṃ.Na doso tassa vijjatīti idaṃ vātassa avijjamānakkhaṇe evaṃ karoto pacchā āgatena vātena nītanāvāya vasena vuttaṃ. Vāyamāne pana vāte evaṃ karontassa āpattiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
129-30.Chattaṃ: a sunshade. Paṇāmetvā: having turned it so that it catches the wind. Ussāpetvāva cīvaraṃ: or having raised up the robe upwards. Gāthāchandavasena ‘va’iti rassattaṃ: ‘va’ is shortened due to the meter of the verse. Laṅkārasadisaṃ: similar to a stretched cloth. Samīraṇaṃ: the wind. Na doso tassa vijjatī: this is stated in terms of a boat carried by the wind that comes afterwards when he is doing so when the wind is not present. However, it should be seen that there is an offense for one doing so when the wind is blowing.
131-2.Sayameva upāgatanti sambandho. Gāmasamīpe titthaṃgāmatitthaṃ. Tanti nāvaṃ.Ṭhānāti chattena vā cīvarena vā gahitavātena gantvā gāmatitthe ṭhitaṭṭhānā.Acālentoti phandāpanampi akaronto, iminā thullaccayassāpi abhāvaṃ dasseti.‘‘Acāvento’’tipi pāṭho, ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi anapanentoti attho, iminā pārājikābhāvaṃ dasseti.Kiṇitvāti mūlena vikkiṇitvā.Sayameva ca gacchantinti etthaca-kāro vattabbantarasamuccaye. Tathā paṇāmitachattena vā ussāpitacīvarena vā gahitavātena attanā gacchantiṃ.Ṭhānā cāvetīti attanā icchitadisābhimukhaṃ katvā pājanavasena gamanaṭṭhānā cāveti.
131-2.Sayameva upāgatanti sambandho: It is related to arriving by itself. Gāmasamīpe titthaṃ: A landing place near a village is gāmatitthaṃ. Taṃ: that boat. Ṭhānā: from the place where it is, having gone by the wind caught by the umbrella or robe, at the landing place near the village. Acālento: even without causing movement; by this, he shows the absence of even a thullaccaya. ‘‘Acāvento’’tipi pāṭho, ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi anapanentoti attho, iminā pārājikābhāvaṃ dasseti: ‘‘Acāvento’’ (not causing to move) is also a reading; meaning, without removing even a hair's breadth from the placed position; by this, he shows the absence of a pārājika. Kiṇitvā: having bought it for a price. Sayameva ca gacchantinti etthaca-kāro कर्तव्यन्तरसमुच्चये: In Sayameva ca gacchanti (and it goes by itself), the particle ca is for including another statement. Tathā paṇāmitachattena vā ussāpitacīvarena vā gahitavātena attanā gacchantiṃ: Likewise, it is going by itself due to the wind caught by the umbrella that has been turned, or by the robe that has been raised up. Ṭhānā cāvetī: he moves it from the place of going by directing it towards the direction he desires for the purpose of propelling.
Nāvaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Boats.
133-4.Yanti etenātiyānaṃ. Ramayatītiratho. Vahati, vuyhati, vahanti etenāti vāvayhaṃ. ‘‘Upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ, sabbapāliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena kataṃ sakaṭaṃ vayhaṃ nāma.Sandamānikāti ‘‘ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇarajatādimayā gopānasiyo datvā garuḷapakkhakanayena katā sandamānikā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena katayānaviseso.Ṭhānā cāvanayogasminti ṭhānā cāvanappayoge.
133-4.Yanti etenātiyānaṃ: That by which they go is a vehicle. Ramayatītiratho: That which delights is a chariot. Vahati, vuyhati, vahanti etenāti vāvayhaṃ: Or, that which carries, is carried, or by which they carry is a conveyance. "Upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ, sabbapāliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā (having covered the top with a covering of woven reeds similar to a pavilion, or having covered it entirely with Pāli cloth)," (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) a cart made in the manner stated in the aṭṭhakathā is called a vayha. Sandamānikā: a type of vehicle made in the manner stated in the aṭṭhakathā: "ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇarajatādimayā gopānasiyo datvā garuḷapakkhakanayena katā sandamānikā (having placed railings made of gold, silver, etc. on both sides, a sandamānikā is made in the style of Garuda's wings)," (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100).Ṭhānā cāvanayogasmiṃ: in the application of moving from the place.
135-6.Dasaṭṭhānācāvanavasena pārājikaṃ vadantehi paṭhamaṃ ṭhānabhedassa ñātabbattā taṃ dassetvā āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yānassa dukayuttassā’’tiādi.Dukayuttassāti dukaṃ goyugaṃ yuttassa yassāti, yutte yasminti vā viggaho.Dasa ṭhānānīti dvinnaṃ goṇānaṃ aṭṭha pādā, dve ca cakkānīti etesaṃ dasannaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānānaṃ vasena dasa ṭhānāni vadeyyāti attho. Eteneva nayena catuyuttādiyāne aṭṭhārasāti ṭhānabhedassa nayo dassito hoti.Yānaṃ pājayatoti sakaṭādiyānaṃ pesayato. ‘‘Dhureti yugāsanne’’ti aṭṭhakathāyagaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. Rathīsāya yugena saddhiṃ bandhanaṭṭhānāsanneti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Dhura’’nti ca yugasseva nāmaṃ. ‘‘Dhuraṃ chaḍḍetvā, dhuraṃ āropetvā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100)aṭṭhakathāvacanato taṃsahacariyāya sambandhanaṭṭhānampi dhuraṃ nāma. Idha pana gaṅgā-saddo viya gaṅgāsamīpe dhurasamīpe pājakassa nisajjārahaṭṭhāne dhurassa vattamānatā labbhati.
135-6.Dasaṭṭhānācāvanavasena pārājikaṃ vadantehi paṭhamaṃ ṭhānabhedassa ñātabbattā taṃ dassetvā āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha: Because those who state a pārājika in terms of moving from ten places must first know the distinction of places, he shows that and then says in order to show the distinction of offenses ‘‘yānassa dukayuttassā’’tiādi (of a vehicle yoked with a pair), etc. Dukayuttassā: dukaṃ goyugaṃ yuttassa yassāti, yutte yasminti vā viggaho: to which a pair of oxen is yoked, or in which (a pair of oxen) is yoked. Dasa ṭhānānī: ten places; dvinnaṃ goṇānaṃ aṭṭha pādā, dve ca cakkānīti etesaṃ dasannaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānānaṃ vasena dasa ṭhānāni vadeyyāti attho: meaning, he should state ten places in terms of the ten positions of establishment of these: eight feet of the two oxen and the two wheels. Eteneva nayena catuyuttādiyāne aṭṭhārasāti ṭhānabhedassa nayo dassito hoti: By this same method, the method of distinguishing the places as eighteen etc. in a vehicle yoked with four (oxen) etc. is shown. Yānaṃ pājayato: to one who propels a vehicle such as a cart. ‘‘Dhureti yugāsanne’’ti aṭṭhakathāya gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ: It is said in the knot-word in the commentary, "dhureti yugāsanne (dhura means near the yoke)." Rathīsāya yugena saddhiṃ bandhanaṭṭhānāsanneti vuttaṃ hoti: It is said to be near the place of binding together with the yoke for the chariot driver. ‘‘Dhura’’nti ca yugasseva nāmaṃ: And ‘‘Dhura’’ is a name for the yoke itself. ‘‘Dhuraṃ chaḍḍetvā, dhuraṃ āropetvā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100)aṭṭhakathāvacanato taṃsahacariyāya sambandhanaṭṭhānampi dhuraṃ nāma: From the statement in the aṭṭhakathā, "having discarded the yoke, having placed the yoke," the place of connection associated with that is also called the yoke. Idha pana gaṅgā-saddo viya gaṅgāsamīpe dhurasamīpe pājakassa nisajjārahaṭṭhāne dhurassa vattamānatā labbhati: Here, however, like the word gaṅgā (Ganges), the application of dhura is obtained in the place near the yoke that is suitable for the driver to sit.
‘‘thullaccayaṃ tu’’iccatratu-saddenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana goṇā ‘nāyaṃ amhākaṃ sāmiko’ti ñatvā dhuraṃ chaḍḍetvā ākaḍḍhantā tiṭṭhanti vā phandanti vā, rakkhati tāva. Goṇe puna ujukaṃ paṭipādetvā dhuraṃ āropetvā daḷhaṃ yojetvā pācanena vijjhitvā pājentassa vuttanayeneva tesaṃ pāduddhārena thullaccaya’’nti vuttaviseso saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo.Cakkānaṃ hīti ettha adhikenahi-saddena ‘‘sacepi sakaddame magge ekaṃ cakkaṃ kaddame laggaṃ hoti, dutiyaṃ cakkaṃ goṇā parivattentā pavattenti, ekassa pana ṭhitattā na tāva avahāro hoti. Goṇe pana puna ujukaṃ paṭipādetvā pājentassa ṭhitacakke kesaggamattaṃ phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkante pārājika’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaviseso dassito hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
137-9.Ettāvatā yuttayānavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni ayuttayānavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ayuttakassā’’tiādi. Dhurena upatthambhaniyaṃ ṭhitassa tassa ayuttakassāpi ca yānakassa upatthambhanicakkakānaṃ vasena tīṇeva ṭhānāni bhavantīti yojanā. Tatthaayuttakassāti goṇehi ayuttakassa.Dhurenāti yathāvuttanayena dhurayuttaṭṭhānasamīpadesena, sakaṭasīsenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Upatthambhaniyanti sakaṭasīsopatthambhaniyā upari ṭhitassa. Upatthambhayati dhuranti upatthambhanī. Sakaṭassa pacchimabhāgopatthambhanatthaṃ dīyamānaṃ daṇḍadvayaṃ pacchimopatthambhanī nāma, purimabhāgassa dīyamānassa upatthambhanī purimopatthambhanī nāmāti ayamupatthambhanīnaṃ viseso. Idha purimopatthambhanī adhippetā.‘‘Upatthambhanicakkakānaṃ vasena tīṇeva ṭhānānī’’ti idaṃ heṭṭhā akappakatāya upatthambhaniyā vasena vuttaṃ, kappakatāya pana vasena ‘‘cattārī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ṭhānāni tīṇevā’’ti ākaḍḍhati, dārucakkadvayavasena tīṇi ṭhānānīti attho.‘‘Dārūna’’nti iminā bahuvacananiddesena rāsikatadārūnaṃ dārukassa ekassāpi phalakassāpi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.‘‘Bhūmiyampi dhureneva, tatheva ṭhapitassa cā’’ti iminā tīṇiyeva ṭhānānīti atidisati. Ettha dhuracakkānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsavasena tīṇi ṭhānāni. Ettha caupariṭṭhapitassa cātica-kāraṃ ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitassā’’ti etthāpi yojetvā samuccayaṃ kātuṃ sakkāti. Tattha adhikavacanena ca-kārenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yaṃ pana ayuttakaṃ dhure ekāya, pacchato ca dvīhi upatthambhanīhi upatthambhetvā ṭhapitaṃ, tassa tiṇṇaṃ upatthambhanīnaṃ, cakkānañca vasena pañca ṭhānāni. Sace dhure upatthambhanī heṭṭhābhāge kappakatā hoti, cha ṭhānānī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) vuttavinicchayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
Purato pacchato vāpīti ettha ‘‘kaḍḍhitvā’’ti pāṭhaseso.Api-saddena ‘‘ukkhipitvāpī’’ti avuttaṃ samuccinoti. Yo pana purato kaḍḍhitvā ṭhānā cāveti, yo vā pana pacchato kaḍḍhitvā ṭhānā cāveti, yo vā pana ukkhipitvā ṭhānā cāvetīti yojanā.Tiṇṇanti ime tayo gahitā, ‘‘tesa’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati, tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā kiṃ hotīti āha‘‘thullaccayaṃ tu…pe… parājayo’’ti.‘‘Ṭhānā cāve’’ti idaṃ ‘‘thullaccaya’’nti imināpi sambandhanīyaṃ.Tu-saddassa visesajotanatthaṃ upāttattā sāvasesaṭṭhānācāvane phandāpanathullaccayaṃ, niravasesaṭṭhānācāvane pana kate ṭhānācāvanapārājikā vuttā hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
140.Akkhānaṃ sīsakehīti akkhassa ubhayakoṭīhi. ‘‘Jātyākhyāyamekasmiṃ bahuvacanamaññatarāya’’miti vacanato ekasmiṃ atthe bahuvacanaṃ yujjati.‘‘Ṭhitassā’’ti etassa visesanassa ‘‘yānassā’’ti visesitabbaṃ sāmatthiyā labbhati. ‘‘Ṭhānāni dve’’ti vuttattā yathā sakaṭadhuraṃ bhūmiṃ na phusati, evaṃ uccataresu dvīsu tulādidārūsu dve akkhasīse āropetvā ṭhapitaṃ yānameva gayhati.
141.Kaḍḍhantoti dvinnaṃ akkhasīsānaṃ ādhārabhūtesu dārūsu ghaṃsitvā ito cito ca kaḍḍhanto.Ukkhipantoti ujuṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato uccārento.Phuṭṭhokāsaccayeti phuṭṭhokāsato kesaggamattātikkame.Aññassāti yathāvuttappakārato itarassa.Yassa kassacirathādikassa yānassa.
142.Akkhuddhīnanti catunnaṃ akkharuddhanakaāṇīnaṃ. Akkhassa ubhayakoṭīsu cakkāvuṇanaṭṭhānato anto dvīsu sakaṭabāhāsu akkharuddhanatthāya dve aṅguliyo viya ākoṭitā catasso āṇiyo akkhuddhi nāma.Dhurassāti dhurabandhanaṭṭhānāsannassa rathasīsaggassa.Taṃyānaṃ.Vā-saddena passe vā gahetvā kaḍḍhanto, majjhe vā gahetvā ukkhipentoti kiriyantaraṃ vikappeti.Gahetvāti ettha ‘‘kaḍḍhanto’’ti pāṭhaseso.Ṭhānā cāvetītiuddhīsugahetvā kaḍḍhanto attano disāya uddhiantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ itarena uddhipariyantena kesaggamattampi atikkāmeti.
‘‘Uddhīsu vā’’ti sāsaṅkavacanena anuddhikayānassāpi vijjamānattaṃ sūcitaṃ hoti.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘atha uddhikhāṇukā na honti, samameva bāhaṃ katvā majjhe vijjhitvā akkhasīsāni pavesitāni honti, taṃ heṭṭhimatalassa samantā sabbaṃ pathaviṃ phusitvā tiṭṭhati, tattha catūsu disāsu, uddhañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhānātikkamavasena pārājikaṃ veditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) vuttavinicchayañca byatirekavasena saṅgaṇhāti.
143.Nābhiyāti nābhimukhena.Ekameva siyā ṭhānanti ekaṃ nābhiyā phuṭṭhaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ bhavatīti attho. ‘‘Ekamassa siyā ṭhāna’’nti potthakesu dissati, tato purimapāṭhova sundarataro.Paricchedopīti etthapi-saddo visesatthajotako, paricchedo panāti attho.Pañcadhāti nābhiyā catupassapariyantaṃ, uddhañca pañcadhā, ṭhānācāvanākāro hotīti attho.
144.Ṭhānānidveti nemiyā, nābhiyā ca phuṭṭhaṭṭhānavasena dve ṭhānāni.Assāti cakkassa.Tesaṃdvinnaṃ ṭhānānaṃ. Bhittiādiṃ apassāya ṭhapitacakkassāpi hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvutto ayampi vinicchayo vutto, yopi iminā ca pāṭhena dassito hoti.
145.Anārakkhanti sāmikena asaṃvihitārakkhaṃ.Adhodetvāti goṇe apesetvā.Vaṭṭati,pārājikaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Sāmike āharāpente pana bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hoti.
Yānaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
146.Bhāraṭṭhakathāyasīsakkhandhakaṭolambavasāti evaṃnāmakānaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ vasena bhāro catubbidho hoti. Tattha sīsabhārādīsu asammohatthaṃ sīsādīnaṃ paricchedo veditabbo – sīsassa tāva purimagale galavāṭako piṭṭhigale kesañci kesante āvaṭṭo hoti, galasseva ubhosu passesu kesañci kesāvaṭṭā oruyha jāyanti, ye ‘‘kaṇṇacūḷikā’’ti vuccanti, tesaṃ adhobhāgo cāti ayaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedo, tato uparisīsaṃ,etthantare ṭhitabhārosīsabhāronāma.
khandho,etthantare ṭhitabhārokhandhabhāronāma.
kaṭiparicchedo, etthantare samantato sarīre ṭhitabhārokaṭibhāronāma.
olambakaparicchedo, etthantare ṭhitabhāroolambakonāma.
bhāro,bharati etena, etasminti vābhāro,iti yathāvuttasīsādayo avayavā vuccanti. Bhāre tiṭṭhatītibhāraṭṭhaṃ. Iti sīsādīsu ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Bhāroyeva bhāraṭṭha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.101)aṭṭhakathāvacanato bharīyatītibhāro,kammani siddhena bhāra-saddena bhaṇḍameva vuccati.
147.Sirasmiṃyevāti yathāparicchinne sirasi eva.Sāretīti anukkhipanto ito cito ca sāreti.Thullaccayaṃ siyāti phandāpanathullaccayaṃ bhaveyya.
148.Khandhanti yathāparicchinnameva khandhaṃ.Oropiteti ohārite.Sīsatoti ettha ‘‘uddha’’nti pāṭhaseso, yathāparicchinnasīsato uparīti attho.Kesaggamattampīti kesaggamattaṃ dūraṃ katvā.Pi-saddo pageva tato adhikanti dīpeti.Mocentopīti kesaggena aphusantaṃ apanento. Etthāpipi-saddena na kevalaṃ khandhaṃ oropentasseva pārājikaṃ, apica kho mocentopi parājitoti heṭṭhā vuttamapekkhati. Pasibbakādiyamakabhāraṃ pana sīse ca piṭṭhiyañcāti dvīsu ṭhānesu ṭhitattā dvīhi ṭhānehi apanayanena pārājikaṃ hoti, tañca‘‘sīsato mocento’’ti imināva ekadesavasena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
149-50.Evaṃ sīsabhāre vinicchayaṃ dassetvā tadanantaraṃ uddesakkamesu khandhabhārādīsu vinicchaye dassetabbepi avasāne vuttaolambakabhāre vinicchayaṃ dassetvā ādyantabhārānaṃ vuttanayānusārena sesesupi vinicchayaṃ atidisitumāha‘‘bhāra’’ntiādi.Suddhamānasoti pātarāsādikāraṇena atheyyacitto, hatthagatabhāraṃ theyyacittena bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapananissajjanādiṃ karontassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikanti idametena upalakkhitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Ettha vuttanayenevāti sīsabhāraolambakabhāresu vuttānusārena.Sesesupi bhāresūti khandhabhārādikesupi.Matisārenasāramatinā.Veditabbo vinicchayoti yathāparicchinnesu ṭhānesu ṭhitaṃ pādagghanakaṃ yaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ theyyacittena ‘‘gaṇhissāmī’’ti āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ, ṭhānā acāvetvā phandāpentassa thullaccayaṃ, yathāparicchinnaṭṭhānātikkamanavasena vā uddhaṃukkhipanavasena vā ṭhānā cāventassa pārājikaṃ hotīti ayaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti attho.
Bhāraṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
151-3.Idāni ārāmaṭṭhavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘dukkaṭa’’ntiādi.Ārāmanti campakādipupphārāmañca ambādiphalārāmañcāti dvīsu ārāmesu yaṃ kañci ārāmaṃ. Āramanti ettha pupphādikāminoti viggaho, taṃārāmaṃ, abhi-saddayoge upayogavacanaṃ.Abhiyuñjatoti parāyattabhāvaṃ jānanto ‘‘mama santaka’’nti aṭṭaṃ katvā gaṇhituṃ theyyacittena sahāyādibhāvatthaṃ dutiyakapariyesanādivasena abhiyuñjantassa dukkaṭaṃ muninā vuttanti iminā sambandhanīyaṃ, adinnādānassa pubbapayogattā sahapayogagaṇanāya dukkaṭanti bhagavatā vuttanti attho.Dhammaṃ carantoti aṭṭaṃ karonto.Paraṃsāmikaṃparājeti ce,sayaṃ sāsanatoparājitoti yojanā.
Tassāti bhaṇḍasāmino.Vimatiṃ janayantassāti ‘‘iminā saha aṭṭaṃ katvā mama santakaṃ labhissāmi vā, na vā’’ti saṃsayaṃ uppādentassa corassa. Yopi dhammaṃ caranto sayaṃ parajjati, tassa ca thullaccayanti yojanā.
Sāmino dhuranikkhepeti ‘‘ayaṃ thaddho kakkhaḷo jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyampi me kareyya, alaṃ dāni mayhaṃ iminā ārāmenā’’ti sāmino dhuranikkhepe sati, attano ‘‘na dassāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepe cāti yojanā. Evaṃ ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepe pārājikaṃ.Tassāti abhiyuñjantassa.Sabbesaṃ kūṭasakkhīnañcātica-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Corassa assāmikabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi tadāyattakaraṇatthaṃ yaṃ kiñci vadantā kūṭasakkhino, tesaṃ sabbesampi bhikkhūnaṃ pārājikaṃ hotīti attho.
Ārāmaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
154.Vihāraṭṭhakathāyaṃvihāranti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘pariveṇaṃ vā, āvāsaṃ vā’’ti ca gahetabbaṃ.Saṅghikanti cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa bhikkhūnaṃ dinnattā saṅghasantakaṃ.Kañcīti khuddakaṃ, mahantaṃ vāti attho. Acchinditvāna gaṇhituṃ abhiyuñjantassa pārājikā na sijjhatītipi pāṭhasesayojanā. Hetuṃ dasseti‘‘sabbesaṃ dhuranikkhepābhāvato’’ti, sabbasseva cātuddisikasaṅghassa dhuranikkhepassa asambhavatoti attho. ‘‘Vihāra’’nti ettakameva avatvā ‘‘saṅghika’’nti visesanena dīghabhāṇakādibhedassa gaṇassa, ekapuggalassa vā dinnavihārādiṃ acchinditvā gaṇhante dhuranikkhepasambhavā pārājikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha vinicchayo ārāme viya veditabbo. Imesu tatraṭṭhabhaṇḍe vinicchayo bhūmaṭṭhathalaṭṭhaākāsaṭṭhavehāsaṭṭhesu vuttanayena ñātuṃ sakkāti na vuttoti veditabbo.
154. In the Vihāra Commentary, vihāra should be taken to mean "pariveṇa or āvāsa" because it is indicative. Saṅghika means belonging to the Saṅgha, because it is given to the bhikkhus dedicating to the Saṅgha of the four directions. Kañcī means small or large. Even if one tries to seize it by force, a pārājika offense is not incurred; this is how the remaining text should be construed. He shows the reason: "because there is no relinquishing of responsibility for all," meaning it is impossible to relinquish responsibility for the entire Saṅgha of the four directions. By saying only "Vihāra" and specifying "Saṅghika," it is stated that a pārājika offense is incurred by seizing a vihāra, etc., given to a group distinguished by reciters of long texts, etc., or to a single individual, because the relinquishing of responsibility is possible. Here, the judgment should be understood like that for an ārāma. It should be understood that the judgment regarding belongings located there is not stated because it can be known in the manner stated for things located on the ground, on a platform, in the sky, and in the air.
Vihāraṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Vihāra Commentary Explanation.
155-6.Khettaṭṭhesīsānīti valliyo.Nidampitvānāti yathā dhaññamattaṃ hatthagataṃ hoti, tathā katvā.Asitenāti dāttena.Lāyitvāti dāyitvā. Sabbakiriyāpadesu‘‘sāliādīnaṃ sīsānī’’ti sambandhanīyaṃ. Sāliādīnaṃ sīsāni nidampitvā gaṇhato yasmiṃ bīje gahite vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ bandhanā mocite tassa pārājikaṃ bhaveti yojanā. Asitena lāyitvā gaṇhato yasmiṃ sīse gahite…pe… bhave, karena chinditvā gaṇhato yassaṃ muṭṭhiyaṃ gahitāyaṃ…pe… bhaveti yojanā.Bījeti vīhādiphale.Vatthu pūratīti pādagghanakaṃ hotīti.Muṭṭhiyanti sīsamuṭṭhiyaṃ, bījamuṭṭhiyaṃ vā.Bandhanā mociteti bandhanaṭṭhānato mocite.
155-6. Regarding fields, sīsānī means tendrils. Nidampitvānā means having made it such that just the amount of grain is in hand. Asitenā means with a sickle. Lāyitvā means having cut. In all the action descriptions, "the heads of rice, etc." should be connected. The construction is: when one gathers the heads of rice, etc., having bundled them, if the object is fulfilled when a seed is taken, a pārājika offense is incurred when the binding is released. When one gathers it having cut it with a sickle…pe… it is incurred when the head is taken; when one gathers it having cut it with the hand, it is incurred when what is taken in the fist…pe…. Bīje means in the fruit of vīhi, etc. Vatthu pūratī means it is worth a pādāggha. Muṭṭhiya means a fistful of heads or a fistful of seeds. Bandhanā mocite means when released from the place of binding.
157.Daṇḍo vāti vatthupūrakavīhidaṇḍo vā. Acchinno rakkhatīti sambandho.Taco vāti tassa daṇḍassa ekapasse challi vā acchinno rakkhaticceva sambandho.Vā-ggahaṇena idhāvuttaṃaṭṭhakathāgataṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.104) ‘‘vāko’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Vākonāma daṇḍe vā tace vā bāhiraṃ. Idhāpi taco vā acchinno rakkhatīti yojanā.Vīhināḷampi vāti gahitadhaññasālisīsena patiṭṭhitaṃ vīhikudrūsādigacchānaṃ nāḷaṃ, tacagabbhoti vuttaṃ hoti.Dīghanti dīghaṃ ce hoti.‘‘Anikkhantovā’’ti iminā ‘‘daṇḍo’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Tato’’ti pāṭhaseso. Tato dīghavīhināḷato sabījavīhisīsadaṇḍo sabbaso chinno chinnakoṭiyā kesaggamattampi bahi anikkhantoti attho.Rakkhatīti taṃ bhikkhuṃ dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikavatthūnaṃ anurūpāpattito pāleti. Mutto ce, na rakkhatīti attho.
157. Daṇḍo vā means either a vīhi stalk that fulfills the object. "If unsevered, it protects" is the connection. Taco vā means either bark on one side of that stalk; the connection is just "if unsevered, it protects." The word vā, by including the Aṭṭhakathā’s statement (pāci. 239) "vāko," incorporates it. Vāko is the exterior on the stalk or bark. Here too, the construction is, "if the bark is unsevered, it protects." Vīhināḷampi vā means the stalk of rice plants, etc., on which the gathered grain-rice head is placed, it means the inner bark. Dīghanti means if it is long. The word "Anikkhantovā" is related to "daṇḍo." "Tato" is the remainder of the text. The meaning is: if, from that long rice stalk, the seed-bearing rice head stalk is completely cut off and even an amount equal to a hair-tip of the cut edge does not extend outward. Rakkhatī means it protects that bhikkhu from offenses appropriate to a dukkata, thullaccaya, or pārājika object. It means, if released, it does not protect.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘vīhināḷaṃ dīghampi hoti, yāva antonāḷato vīhisīsadaṇḍako na nikkhamati, tāva rakkhati. Kesaggamattampi nāḷato daṇḍakassa heṭṭhimatale nikkhantamatte bhaṇḍagghavasena kāretabbo’’ti (pārā. 1.104). Tathā imināva vinicchayenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘lāyitabbavatthupūrakavīhisīsamuṭṭhiyā mūle chinnepi sīsesu acchinnavīhisīsaggehi saddhiṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitesu rakkhati, jaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā viyojitesu yathāvuttapārājikādiāpattiyo hontī’’ti evamādiko vinicchayo ca sūcitoti gahetabbo.
In the Aṭṭhakathā: "The rice stalk can be long; as long as the rice-head stalk does not emerge from the inner stalk, it protects. As soon as even the amount of a hair-tip of the stalk emerges at the lower surface of the stalk, it should be valued according to the value of the item" (pārā. 1.104). Similarly, by this very judgment, in the Aṭṭhakathā: "If, at the base of a fistful of rice heads bundled to be cut, the unsevered tips of the rice heads remain tangled together, it protects; if the tangle is untangled and separated, offenses beginning with the pārājika offense as stated occur"; it should be understood that such a judgment is also indicated.
158.Madditvāti vīhisīsāni madditvā.Papphoṭetvāti bhusādīni ophunitvā. Ito sāraṃ gaṇhissāmīti parikappetīti yojanā.Itoti vīhisīsato.Sāraṃ gaṇhissāmīti sārabhāgaṃ ādiyissāmi. Sace parikappetīti yojanā.Rakkhatīti vatthupahonakappamāṇaṃ dāttena lāyitvā vā hatthena chinditvā vā ṭhānā cāvetvā gahitampi yāva parikappo na niṭṭhāti, tāva āpattito rakkhatīti attho.
158. Madditvā means having crushed the rice heads. Papphoṭetvā means having winnowed away the husks, etc. The construction is, "he intends, 'I will take the essence from this.'" Ito means from the rice heads. Sāraṃ gaṇhissāmī means "I will take the essential part." The construction is, "if he intends." Rakkhatī means even if one cuts or breaks off with the hand an amount that is adequate to be the object, and having moved it from its place, takes it, as long as the intention is not completed, it protects from offense; this is the meaning.
159.Maddanepīti vīhisīsamaddanepi.Uddharaṇepīti palālāpanayanepi.Papphoṭanepīti bhusādikacavarāpanayanepi.Doso natthīti agghavasena pārājikādiāpattiyo na bhavanti, sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ pana hoteva.Attano…pe… parājayoti attano paṭhamaṃ parikappitākārena sabbaṃ katvā sārabhāgaṃ gaṇhituṃ attano bhājane pakkhittamatte yathāvuttapārājikādayo hontīti attho.
159. Maddanepī means even in crushing the rice heads. Uddharaṇepī means even in removing the straw. Papphoṭanepī means even in removing the husks and other rubbish. Doso natthī means offenses beginning with the pārājika offense do not occur according to value, but a dukkata offense with each action certainly occurs. Attano…pe… parājayo means once one has done everything according to one's initial intention and has placed it in one's own bowl to take the essential part, the aforementioned pārājika offenses, etc., occur; this is the meaning.
160.Ettāvatā ‘‘khettaṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ khette catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ hoti bhūmaṭṭhaṃ thalaṭṭhaṃ ākāsaṭṭhaṃ vehāsaṭṭha’’nti (pārā. 104) vuttāni khettaṭṭhāni cattāri yathāvuttasadisānīti tāni pahāya ‘‘tatthajātaka’’ntiādipāḷiyaṃāgate tatrajāte vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘khettaṃ nāma yattha pubbaṇṇaṃ vā aparaṇṇaṃ vā jāyatī’’ti (pārā. 104) evamāgate khettepi vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘jāna’’ntiādi.Jānanti parasantakabhāvaṃ jānanto.Khīlanti appitakkharaṃ vā itaraṃ vā pāsāṇādikhīlaṃ.Saṅkāmetīti parāyattabhūmiṃ sāmikā yathā passanti, tathā vā aññathā vā attano santakaṃ kātukāmatāya kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ yathā sasantakaṃ hoti, tathā theyyacittena nikhaṇatīti attho.
160. Thus far, the four field-related items that were stated to be "an item in a field is placed in a field in four ways: located on the ground, located on a platform, located in the sky, located in the air" (pārā. 104) are similar to what was stated, so setting those aside, now, after showing the judgment regarding what is born there (tatthajātaka), which comes in the Pāḷi as "tatthajātaka," in order to show the judgment regarding a field, which comes as "a field is where early-season grain or late-season grain grows" (pārā. 104), he says "jāna," etc. Jāna means knowing the state of being owned by another. Khīla means either a peg with letters marked on it or another peg of stone, etc. Saṅkāmetī means, intending to make land belonging to another his own, whether the owners see it as such or otherwise, he buries even an amount equal to a hair-tip in such a way that it becomes his own; this is the meaning.
161.Taṃ pārājikattaṃ tassa kadā hotīti āha‘‘sāmikānaṃ tu dhuranikkhepane satī’’ti. ‘‘Hotī’’ti pāṭhaseso.Tu-saddena ‘‘attano vā’’ti visesassa saṅgahitattā sāmino nirālayabhāvasaṅkhātadhuranikkhepe ca ‘‘sāmikassa na dassāmī’’ti attano dhuranikkhepe ca tassa pārājikattaṃ hotīti attho.Evamudīritanti ‘‘kesaggamattampī’’ti evaṃ niyamitaṃ kathitaṃ.
161. When does that state of being a pārājika offense occur for him? He says, "when there is relinquishing of responsibility by the owners." "Hotī" is the remainder of the text. By the word tu, because the specification "or by oneself" is included, the meaning is that the state of being a pārājika offense occurs for him both when there is a relinquishing of responsibility consisting of the owner's state of being without concern, and when there is a relinquishing of responsibility by oneself, thinking "I will not give it to the owner." Evamudīritanti means "even an amount equal to a hair-tip" is what was thus definitively stated.
162.Yā panāti yā bhūmi pana.Tesudvīsu khīlesu.Ādo thullaccayanti paṭhame khīle saṅkāmite so bhikkhu thullaccayaṃ āpajjati.Dutiyeti dutiye khīle saṅkāmite parājayo hotīti yojanā. Bahūhi khīlehi gahetabbaṭṭhāne pariyantakhīlesu dvīsu vinicchayo ca eteneva vutto hoti. Ettha pana ante khīladvayaṃ vinā avasesakhīlanikhaṇane ca itaresu tadatthesu sabbapayogesu ca dukkaṭaṃ hotīti viseso.
162. Yā panā means whichever land, however. Tesu means in those two pegs. Ādo thullaccaya means when the first peg is moved, that bhikkhu incurs a thullaccaya offense. Dutiye means when the second peg is moved, a pārājika offense occurs; this is the construction. The judgment regarding two of the boundary pegs among many pegs in a place where pegs should be driven is also stated by this. Here, however, the distinction is that in burying the remaining pegs apart from the two end pegs, and in all actions for those purposes, a dukkata offense occurs.
163-4.‘‘Mamedaṃ santaka’’nti ñāpetukāmoti sambandho. Parasantakāya bhūmiyā parāyattabhāvaṃ ñatvāva theyyacittena kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ gaṇhitukāmatāya ‘‘ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ mama santaka’’nti rajjuyā vā yaṭṭhiyā vā minitvā parassa ñāpetukāmoti attho.Yehi dvīhi payogehīti sabbapacchimakehi rajjupasāraṇayaṭṭhipātanānamaññatarehi dvīhi payogehi.Tesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.
163-4. The connection is "intending to make it known, 'this is mine.'" Knowing that land belongs to another, intending to take even an amount equal to a hair-tip with the thought of theft, the meaning is "intending to make known to others, 'this much land is mine'," by measuring with a rope or stick. Yehi dvīhi payogehī means by two of the very last actions of stretching the rope or dropping the stick or others. Tesū means a locative of specification.
rajjuṃ vāpīti vikappatthavā-saddena ‘‘yaṭṭhiṃ vā’’ti yojetabbepi avuttasamuccayatthaṃ adhikavacanabhāvena vuttapi-saddena idhāvuttamariyādavatīnaṃ vinicchayassa ñāpitattā yathāvuttarajjuyaṭṭhivinicchayesu viya parasantakāya bhūmiyā kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ theyyacittena gaṇhitukāmatāya vatipāde nikhaṇitvā vā sākhāmattena vā vatiṃ karontassa mariyādaṃ vā bandhantassa pākāraṃ vā cinantassa paṃsumattikā vā vaḍḍhentassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca sahapayoge kevaladukkaṭañca pacchimapayogesu dvīsu paṭhamapayoge thullaccayañca avasānapayoge pārājikañca hotīti vinicchayopi saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
The word vā in rajjuṃ vāpī, by implying "or a stick" with the word pi said in the manner of additional speech to accumulate what was unsaid, shows the judgment regarding boundaries already stated. Therefore, just as in the judgments regarding rope and stick already stated, for one intending to take even an amount equal to a hair-tip of land belonging to another with the thought of theft, by burying a fence post or making a fence with just a branch, or binding a boundary, or building a wall, or adding dust or clay, in the prior actions, in a situation for a pācittiya offense, there is a pācittiya offense and a dukkata offense, and in the subsequent actions, in the first action there is a thullaccaya offense, and in the final action there is a pārājika offense; it should be seen that such a judgment is also included.
Khettaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Field Commentary Explanation.
165.Vatthaṭṭhādīsuvatthaṭṭhassāti ettha ‘‘vatthu nāma ārāmavatthu vihāravatthū’’ti (pārā. 105)padabhājanevuttattā pupphādiārāme kātuṃ saṅkharitvā ṭhapitabhūmi ca pubbakatārāmānaṃ vināse tucchabhūmi ca vihāraṃ kātuṃ abhisaṅkhatā bhūmi ca naṭṭhavihārabhūmi cāti evaṃ vibhāgavati vasati ettha uparopo vā vihāro vāti ‘‘vatthū’’ti vuccati iccevaṃ duvidhaṃ vatthuñca ‘‘vatthuṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ vatthusmiṃ catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ hoti bhūmaṭṭhaṃ thalaṭṭhaṃ ākāsaṭṭhaṃ vehāsaṭṭha’’nti (pārā. 105) vacanato evaṃ catubbidhaṃ bhaṇḍañcāti idaṃ dvayaṃ vatthu ca vatthuṭṭhañca vatthuvatthuṭṭhanti vattabbe ekadesasarūpekasesavasena samāsetvā, u-kārassa ca akāraṃ katvā ‘‘vatthaṭṭhassā’’ti dassitanti gahetabbaṃ. Yathāvuttaduvidhavatthuno, vatthaṭṭhassa ca bhaṇḍassāti attho.Khettaṭṭheti etthāpi ayameva samāsoti khette ca khettaṭṭhe cāti gahetabbaṃ. Nāvaṭṭhādivohārepi eseva nayo.Gāmaṭṭhepi cāti ‘‘gāmaṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ gāme catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ hoti bhūmaṭṭhaṃ…pe… vehāsaṭṭha’’nti (pārā. 106) vutte catubbidhe gāmaṭṭhabhaṇḍepīti attho.
165. Regarding items in a plot of land, etc., vatthaṭṭhassā refers to vattha because it is said in the Padabhājana that "vattha means ārāma-vattha, vihāra-vattha" (pārā. 105). Thus, "vattha" is said to refer to: land prepared for planting flowers, etc., in a park; vacant land in the destruction of previously made parks; land designated for building a vihāra; and the site of a destroyed vihāra. Thus, there are two types of "vattha": a settlement is here, an uparopa or a vihāra is there. Because it is said that "an item in a plot of land is placed in the plot of land in four ways: located on the ground, located on a platform, located in the sky, located in the air" (pārā. 105), there are also these four kinds of items. Thus, what should be called vattha-vatthaṭṭha, combining vattha and vatthaṭṭha, has been shown as vatthaṭṭhassā, by way of a compound with oneness of form in one place and by changing the u-sound to an a-sound; this should be understood. The meaning is: of vattha as the two types already stated, and of vatthaṭṭha as the items. Khettaṭṭhe also means that this same compound should be understood as "in the field and in the items in the field." This same method applies to expressions such as nāvaṭṭha. Gāmaṭṭhepi cā means in the four kinds of items in a village (gāmaṭṭha) stated as "an item in a village is placed in the village in four ways: located on the ground…pe… located in the air" (pārā. 106).
Vatthaṭṭhagāmaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Vatthaṭṭha-Gāmaṭṭha Commentary Explanation.
166.Araññaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tiṇaṃ vā’’tiādipadānaṃ ‘‘tatthajātaka’’nti padena sambandho.Tatthajātakanti ‘‘araññaṃ nāma yaṃ manussānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107) vacanato tatthajātaṃ yaṃ kiñci manussasantakaṃ sāmikānaṃ akāmā agahetabbato sārakkhe araññe uppannanti attho.Tiṇaṃ vāti parehi lāyitvā ṭhapitaṃ vā attanā lāyitabbaṃ vā gehacchādanārahaṃ tiṇaṃ vā.Paṇṇaṃ vāti evarūpameva gehacchādanārahaṃ tālapaṇṇādipaṇṇaṃ vā.Lataṃ vāti tathārūpameva vettalatādikaṃ valliṃ vā. Yā pana dīghā hoti, mahārukkhe ca gacche ca vinivijjhitvā vā veṭhetvā vā gatā, sā mūle chinnāpi avahāraṃ na janeti, agge chinnāpi. Yadā pana aggepi mūlepi chinnā hoti, tadā avahāraṃ janeti. Sace pana veṭhetvā ṭhitā hoti, veṭhetvā ṭhitā pana rukkhato mocitamattā avahāraṃ janetīti ayamettha viseso. Sāmikena avissajjitālayaṃ challivākādiavasesabhaṇḍañca imināva upalakkhitvā saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ.Kaṭṭhameva vāti dāruṃ vā.Bhaṇḍaggheneva kātabboti ettha antobhūtahetutthavasena kāretabboti attho gahetabbo. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo’’ti. Avahaṭatiṇādibhaṇḍesu agghavasena māsakaṃ vā ūnamāsakaṃ vā hoti, dukkaṭaṃ. Atirekamāsakaṃ vā ūnapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, thullaccayaṃ. Pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, pārājikaṃ. Pārājikaṃ ce anāpanno, āmasanadukkaṭaṃ, phandāpanathullaccayañca kāretabboti attho.Gaṇhantoti avaharanto.
166. In the Arañña Commentary, the connection of the words "tiṇaṃ vā," etc., is with the word "tatthajātaka." Tatthajātaka means, because "arañña means whatever is possessed by humans" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107), whatever is born there, whatever belongs to humans, and whatever is born in a protected wilderness where it should not be taken without the owners' consent. Tiṇaṃ vā means either grass placed by others after cutting, or grass suitable for roofing that one must cut oneself. Paṇṇaṃ vā means leaves such as palm leaves suitable for roofing of this same kind. Lataṃ vā means a vine such as rattan suitable in this same way. However, a vine that is long, and has penetrated or wrapped around a large tree or shrub, does not cause removal even if cut at the base, nor even if cut at the tip. However, when it is cut at both the tip and the base, it causes removal. However, if it is standing having wrapped around, it causes removal as soon as it is released from the tree; this is the distinction here. It should be understood that residual items, such as bark, that the owner has not released the use of are also included by this. Kaṭṭhameva vā means wood. Bhaṇḍaggheneva kātabbo means it should be valued according to the value of the item; here, the meaning of "it should be done according to the value because it is an included cause" should be taken. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā says, "bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo": "it should be valued according to the value of the item." Among items of removed grass, etc., if it is a māsaka or less than a māsaka according to value, there is a dukkata offense. If it is more than a māsaka or less than five māsakas, there is a thullaccaya offense. If it is five māsakas or more than five māsakas, there is a pārājika offense. If he is not subject to a pārājika offense, touching incurs a dukkata offense, and agitating incurs a thullaccaya offense; this is what should be done. Gaṇhanto means removing.
167-74.Idāni ‘‘kaṭṭhameva vā’’ti vuttarukkhadārūsu vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘mahagghe’’tiādi.Mahaggheti pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghakaṃ hutvā mahagghe.Nassatīti theyyacittasamaṅgī hutvā chinnamattepi pārājikaṃ āpajjati.Pi-saddo avadhāraṇe.‘‘Kocipī’’ti iminā addhagatopi allaṃ vā hotu purāṇaṃ vā, tacchetvā ṭhapitaṃ na gahetabbamevāti attho.
167-74. Now, to show the judgment regarding tree wood stated as "kaṭṭhameva vā," he says "mahagghe," etc. Mahagghe means when it is expensive because it is worth five māsakas or more than five māsakas. Nassatī means even when he cuts it, being of one mind with the thought of theft, he incurs a pārājika offense. The word pi is for emphasis. "Kocipī" means by this, even if it is aged or wet or old, wood that has been planed should certainly not be taken.
Mūleti upalakkhaṇamattaṃ. ‘‘Agge ca mūle ca chinno hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107)aṭṭhakathāvacanato mūlañca aggañca chinditvāti gahetabbo.Addhagatanti jiṇṇagaḷitapatitatacaṃ, cirakālaṃ ṭhitanti vuttaṃ hoti.
Mūle is merely indicative. Because the Aṭṭhakathā says "Agge ca mūle ca chinno hotī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107), it should be understood as "having cut the base and the tip." Addhagata means rotten, decayed, and fallen, it means it has been standing for a long time.
Lakkhaṇeti attano santakaṃ ñāpetuṃ rukkhakkhandhe tacaṃ chinditvā katasallakkhaṇe.Challiyonaddheti samantato abhinavuppannāhi challīhi pariyonandhitvā adassanaṃ gamite.Ajjhāvutthañcāti ettha ‘‘geha’’nti pāṭhaseso. Gehaṃ katañca ajjhāvutthañcāti yojanā. Gehaṃ kātuṃ araññasāmikānaṃ mūlaṃ datvā rukkhe kiṇitvā chinnadārūhi taṃ gehaṃ katañca paribhuttañcāti attho.Vinassantañcāti etthāpi ‘‘avasiṭṭhaṃ dāru’’nti pāṭhaseso. Taṃ gehaṃ katvā avasiṭṭhaṃ vassātapādīhi vividhā jīritvā vinassamānaṃ, vipannadārunti vuttaṃ hoti. Gaṇhato na doso kocīti sambandho. ‘‘Sāmikā nirālayā’’ti gaṇhato kācipi āpatti natthīti attho. Kiṃkāraṇanti ce? Araññasāmikehi mūlaṃ gahetvā aññesaṃ dinnattā, tesañca nirālayaṃ chaḍḍitattāti idamettha kāraṇaṃ.
Lakkhaṇeti: "Lakkhaṇa" means having made a mark by cutting the bark on the trunk of a tree to indicate that it is one's own property.Challiyonaddheti: "Challiyonaddhe" means having been completely covered over on all sides by newly grown creepers, so as to be out of sight.Ajjhāvutthañcāti: Here, the word "geha" (house) is understood. The construction is: having made a house and having dwelt in it. The meaning is: having bought the trees by giving payment to the owners of the forest in order to build a house, and having built and used that house with the cut timber.Vinassantañcāti: Here also, the words "avasiṭṭhaṃ dāru" (remaining timber) are understood. Having made that house, the remaining timber, having been variously weathered by rain and sun, is decaying, which means the timber is ruined. "Gaṇhato na doso kocīti sambandho": There is no fault in taking. The meaning is that there is no offense whatsoever in taking because the owners of the forest have received payment and given it to others, and those others have abandoned it, leaving it without protection. This is the reason here.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘gehādīnaṃ atthāya rukkhe chinditvā yadā tāni katāni, ajjhāvutthāni ca honti, dārūnipi araññe vassena ca ātapena ca vinassanti, īdisānipi disvā ‘chaḍḍitānī’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Yasmā araññasāmikā etesaṃ anissarā. Yehi araññasāmikānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ datvā chinnāni, te eva issarā, tehi ca tāni chaḍḍitāni, nirālayā tattha jātā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107). Evampi sati pacchā sāmikesu āharāpentesu bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ: In the commentary: "When trees are cut down for the purpose of houses and so on, and those houses are made and dwelt in, and the timber also decays in the forest due to rain and sun, it is permissible to take even these things, seeing them as 'abandoned'. Why? Because the forest owners have no control over these things. Those who cut them down after giving the due payment to the forest owners are the ones who have control, and they have abandoned them, leaving them without protection there" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107). Even in this case, it should be understood that if the owners later come and demand them back, compensation is due.
Yo cāti araññasāmikānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pavisanto adatvā ‘‘nikkhamanto dassāmī’’ti rukkhe gāhāpetvā nikkhamanto yo ca bhikkhu.Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvāti araññapālakā yattha nisinnā araññaṃ rakkhanti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā.‘‘Cintento’’ti kiriyantarasāpekkhattā ‘‘atikkameyyā’’ti sāmatthiyato labbhati. Tasmācitte kammaṭṭhānādīni katvāti etthaādi-saddena pakāratthena kusalapakkhiyā vitakkā saṅgayhanti. Aññaṃ cintento vā ārakkhanaṭṭhānaṃ patvāyeva atikkāmeyyāti yojetvā attho vattabbo. Tatthaaññaṃ cintento vāti aññaṃ vihito vā, iminā yathāvuttavitakkānaṃ saṅgaho.Assāti ettha ‘‘deyya’’nti kitayoge kattari sāmivacanattā anenāti attho.
Yo cāti: "Yo ca" refers to the bhikkhu who, entering the forest owners' domain, takes trees after promising "I will pay when I leave" without paying the due compensation.Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvāti: "Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvā" means having reached the place where the forest guards sit and protect the forest.‘‘Cintento’’: Because of the need for another action, "atikkameyya" (he would transgress) is obtained by implication. Therefore, in citte kammaṭṭhānādīni katvā, with the word ādi-saddena, thoughts on the side of skillful qualities are included through implication. One should state the meaning by construing "aññaṃ cintento vā ārakkhanaṭṭhānaṃ patvāyeva atikkāmeyyāti" (or having reached the guard station while thinking of something else, he would transgress). There, aññaṃ cintento vā means one who is inattentive. This includes the above-mentioned thoughts. Assāti: Here, because "deyya" is a passive participle, in the sense of the agent, it means "by this".
ca-saddena araññapavisanakāle yathāvuttanayena mūlaṃ adatvā araññaṃ pavisitvā dārūni gahetvā gamanakāle ‘‘araññapālakā sace yācanti, dassāmī’’ti parikappetvā gantvā tehi ayācitattā adatvā gacchantopi tatheva āgantvā ārakkhakesu kīḷāpasutesu vā niddāyantesu vā bahi nikkhantesu vā tattha ṭhatvā ārakkhake pariyesitvā adisvā gacchantopi tatheva āgantvā tattha niyuttaissarajanehi attano hatthato dātabbaṃ datvā vā attānaṃ sammānaṃ katvā vā pālake saññāpetvā vā pālake okāsaṃ yācitvā tehi dinnokāso vā gacchantopīti ettakā vuttena sadisattā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā.
By the ca-saddena, similarly included through similarity with what was said is the case of one who, upon entering the forest, takes timber without paying compensation in the manner described above at the time of entering the forest, and while departing, thinks, "If the forest guards ask, I will give," and goes, and because they do not ask, he goes without paying; or one who comes again and, when the guards are engrossed in sports or are sleeping or have gone out, having stood there, looks for the guards and, not seeing them, goes; or one who comes again and, after giving what should be given from his own hand to those in charge stationed there, or after honoring himself, or after informing the guards, or after asking the guards for permission, and having received permission from them, goes.
Varāhāti sūkarā.Vagghāti byagghā.Acchāti issā.Taracchāti kāḷasīhā.Ādi-saddena dīpimattahatthisīhādayo vāḷamigā saṅgayhanti. Eteyeva varāhādayo samāgamavasena maraṇādianiṭṭhasamīpacāritāya upa aniṭṭhasamīpe davanti pavattantīti‘‘upaddavā’’ti vuccanti. Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ āgatakāle diṭṭhavarāhādiupaddavatoti vuttaṃ hoti.Muccitukāmatāyāti mokkhādhippāyena.‘‘Tathevā’’ti iminā pavisanakāle deyyadhammaṃ adatvā ‘‘nikkhamanakāle dassāmī’’ti pavisitvā dāruṃ gahetvā ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ pattoti purimagāthāya sāmatthiyato labbhamānoyevattho dassito.Taṃ ṭhānanti taṃ ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ.Atikkāmetīti ‘‘idaṃ taṃ ṭhāna’’ntipi asallakkhaṇamattabhayupaddavo hutvā palāyanto atikkamati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti yojanā.
Varāhāti: "Varāhā" means pigs.Vagghāti: "Vagghā" means tigers.Acchāti: "Acchā" means bears.Taracchāti: "Taracchā" means hyenas. By the word Ādi, other wild animals such as leopards, elephants, and lions are included. These very varāhas and so on, due to their association, wander and occur near unwanted things, such as death, thus they are called ‘‘upaddavā’’ (dangers). "Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ āgatakāle diṭṭhavarāhādiupaddavatoti vuttaṃ hoti": It means that at the time of arriving at the guard station, one has seen dangers such as pigs, etc. Muccitukāmatāyāti: "Muccitukāmatāyā" means with the intention of release. ‘‘Tathevā’’ti: By this, the meaning, which is obtained from the implication of the previous verse, is shown: having entered after promising to pay compensation at the time of departure, and having taken timber, he has arrived at the guard station. Taṃ ṭhānanti: "Taṃ ṭhāna" means that guard station. Atikkāmetīti: "Atikkāmeti" means "this is that place," and being overcome by fear and danger due to not noticing, he flees and transgresses; however, compensation is due.
Suṅkaghātatoti etthāpipi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbo, suṅkagahaṇaṭṭhānatopīti attho. Suṅkassa rañño dātabbabhāgassa ghāto musitvā gahaṇamatto, suṅko haññati etthāti vā suṅkaghātoti viggaho. Suṅkaghātasarūpaṃ parato āvi bhavissati.Tasmāti suṅkaghātato tassa garukattā eva.Tanti taṃ suṅkaghātaṭṭhānaṃ.Anokkamma gacchatoti apavisitvā gacchantassa.Dukkaṭaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 113).
Suṅkaghātatoti: Here also, the pi-saddo (particle) should be understood as omitted; the meaning is, "from the place of tax collection." "Suṅkassa rañño dātabbabhāgassa ghāto musitvā gahaṇamatto": The evasion of the king's share of the tax is merely taking by deceiving. Or, "suṅko haññati etthāti vā suṅkaghātoti viggaho": The derivation is "that by which the tax is evaded is suṅkaghāta." The nature of tax evasion will become clear later. Tasmāti: "Tasmā" means just because of the seriousness of tax evasion. Tanti: "Ta" means that place of tax evasion. Anokkamma gacchatoti: "Anokkamma gacchato" means to one who goes without entering. "Dukkaṭaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 113)": A dukkata offense is declared: "He evades the tax, there is an offense of dukkata."
Etanti yathāvuttaārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ.Theyyacittena pariharantassāti theyyacittena pariharitvā dūrato gacchantassa. Ākāsenapi gacchato pārājikamanuddiṭṭhaṃ satthunāti sambandho.
Etanti: "Eta" means the above-mentioned guard station. Theyyacittena pariharantassāti: "Theyyacittena pariharantassa" means to one who evades with a thieving mind, going from afar. "Ākāsenapi gacchato pārājikamanuddiṭṭhaṃ satthunāti sambandho": It is connected: A pārājika offense is not declared by the Teacher, even if one goes through the air.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttavacanaṃ vināpāḷiyaṃ‘‘araññaṭṭha’’nti mātikāpadassavibhaṅge‘‘tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vā tiṇaṃ vā pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 106) sāmaññavacanato suṅkaghāte ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vacanaṃ viya ettha ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ pariharantassa visuṃ vuttapārājikāpattivacane asatipi ‘‘aṭṭhakathāya’’nti avatvā ‘‘satthunā’’ti kasmā āhāti? Vuccate – aṭṭhakathācariyena tatheva vuttattā āha. Kasmā pana aṭṭhakathācariyena ‘‘apaññattaṃ na paññapessāma, paññattaṃ na samucchindissāmā’’ti (pārā. 565) pāḷipāṭhaṃ jānantenapi pāḷiyaṃ avuttapārājikaṃ niddiṭṭhanti? Ettha vinicchayaṃ bhikkhūhi puṭṭhena bhagavatā vuttanayassa mahāaṭṭhakathāya āgatattā tasseva nayassa samantapāsādikāyaṃ niddiṭṭhabhāvaṃ jānantena imināpi ācariyena idha ‘‘satthunā’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttavacanaṃ vinā: Apart from what is said in the commentary, in the pāḷiyaṃ, the word araññaṭṭha in the summary, in the vibhaṅge: "If, with a thieving mind, he touches wood or creepers or grass born there, worth five māsakas or more than five māsakas, there is an offense of dukkata. If he moves it, there is an offense of thullaccaya. If he removes it from the place, there is an offense of pārājika" (pārā. 106). Because of the general statement, like the statement about tax evasion, "He evades the tax, there is an offense of dukkata," why does he say "satthunā" (by the Teacher) instead of saying "aṭṭhakathāya" (in the commentary) here, even though there is no specific statement of a pārājika offense for one who avoids the guard station? It is said: He says it because it is stated that way by the commentary master. But why, even knowing the Pāḷi passage "apaññattaṃ na paññapessāma, paññattaṃ na samucchindissāmā" (pārā. 565) (we will not make known what is not made known, we will not abolish what is made known), did the commentary master declare a pārājika offense that is not stated in the Pāḷi? Here, it should be understood that this teacher also said "satthunā" here because he knew that the method stated by the Blessed One when asked by the bhikkhus had come in the Great Commentary, and that the same method was declared in the Samantapāsādikā.
Atha vā ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vatvā ārakkhaṭṭhānavinicchaye avacanaṃ yathāvuttavisayassa adiṭṭhabhāvena vā siyā, imassa tathā anavajjatā vā siyā, vuttānusārena suviññeyyatā vā siyāti tayo vikappā. Tesu paṭhamavikappo sabbaññubhāvabādhanato dubbikappamattaṃ hoti. Dutiyavikappo lokavajjassa imassa anavajjabhāvo nāma anupapannoti anādātabbo. Pārisesato tatiyavikappo yujjati.
Or else, after saying "suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (he evades the tax, there is an offense of dukkata), there are three possibilities for not stating a decision about avoiding the guard station: either because the subject matter described above was not seen, or because this is indeed faultless, or because it is easily understood according to what has been said. Among those, the first possibility is merely a bad idea because it contradicts the omniscience. The second possibility, that this, which is an offense against the world, is faultless, is untenable and should not be accepted. The third possibility is suitable by elimination.
Tattha ‘‘vuttānusārenā’’ti kimettha vuttaṃ nāma, tadanusārena imassāpi suviññeyyatā kathanti ce? Paṭhamaniddiṭṭhe araññaṭṭhaniddese sāmaññena ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 106) idaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana theyyacittena ārakkhaṭṭhānapariharaṇañca. ‘‘Gamanakāle ‘mūlaṃ datvā gamissāmī’ti pubbaparikappitaniyāmena adatvā gacchato parikappāvahārova hotī’’ti ca ‘‘taṃ pana yena kenaci ākārena parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya gamanaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ nāma hotevāti tena vatthunā pārājikameva hotī’’ti ca ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’ti iminā ca viññātatthameva hotī’’ti ca visuṃ na vuttaṃ. Suṅkaṭṭhānapariharaṇaṃ pana ṭhānapariharaṇasabhāvattā sabhāvato īdisaṃva santampi idaṃ viya parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti vakkhamānarājasammataṭṭhānato aññaṃ parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ samānampi theyyacittuppattimattena taṃ pariharitvā gacchantassa theyyacittena attano pattaṃ gaṇhantassa viya pārājikāya avatthutañca dukkaṭasseva vatthubhāvañca viññāpetuṃ ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttanti bhagavato adhippāyaññunā aṭṭhakathācariyena ‘‘pārājikamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107) vuttattā tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanīhārameva dassetuṃ ayamācariyopi ‘‘satthunā pārājikamanuddiṭṭha’’nti āhāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
There, if one asks, "What exactly is said 'according to what has been said', and how is this easily understood according to that?", in the first declaration, in the declaration about the forest place, it is said generally, "ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā" (pārā. 106) (if he removes it from the place, there is an offense of pārājika), but the act of avoiding the guard station with a thieving mind is not specifically mentioned. And also, "gamanakāle 'mūlaṃ datvā gamissāmī'ti pubbaparikappitaniyāmena adatvā gacchato parikappāvahārova hotī" (if one goes without paying according to the previously arranged agreement that 'I will give payment at the time of departure,' it is only an agreement) and "taṃ pana yena kenaci ākārena parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya gamanaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ nāma hotevāti tena vatthunā pārājikameva hotī" (but leaving the arranged place in any way is indeed called removing it from the place, so by that action, it is indeed a pārājika) and "ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā'ti iminā ca viññātatthameva hotī" (and the meaning is understood by this: 'if he removes it from the place, there is an offense of pārājika') are not specifically stated. However, because avoiding the tax station is of the nature of avoiding a place, even though it is of such a nature, it is not an arranged place like this, but it is similar to an arranged place other than the royal-approved place that will be described later, the commentary master, who understood the intention of the Blessed One, said "suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (he evades the tax, there is an offense of dukkata) in order to make known that for one who avoids that with the arising of a thieving mind, just as for one who takes his own bowl with a thieving mind, there is no basis for a pārājika offense, but there is only a basis for a dukkata offense. Therefore, it must be concluded here that this teacher also said "satthunā pārājikamanuddiṭṭha" in order to show the very method stated in the commentary, "it is indeed a pārājika" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107).
Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ pariharitvā theyyacittena dūrato vajjetvā gacchantassāpi pārājikappahonakatāya accantabhāriyaṃ hoti, tasmā.Etthāti imasmiṃ araññārakkhaṭṭhāne.‘‘Visesenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘appamattena hotabba’’nti iminā hetubhāvena sambandhanīyaṃ.Satisampannacetasāti capiyasīlenāti ca ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti etassa visesanaṃ. Asikkhākāmassa bhikkhuno imassa ovādassa abhājanatāya taṃ parivajjetumāha‘‘piyasīlenā’’ti. Piyasīlassāpi sativirahitassa pamattaṭṭhāne saraṇāsambhavā imassa abhājanatāya taṃ vajjetumāha‘‘satisampannacetasā’’ti.
Tasmāti: "Tasmā" means because it is extremely serious due to being capable of causing a pārājika offense even for one who evades in this way, avoiding it from afar with a thieving mind. Therefore, Etthāti: "Etthā" means in this guard station in the forest. ‘‘Visesenā’’ti: "‘‘Visesenā’’" is to be connected with "appamattena hotabba" (one should be unnegligent) in this sense of a reason. Satisampannacetasāti and piyasīlenāti are adjectives of bhikkhunāti. He said ‘‘piyasīlenā’’ti (by one who is dear to virtue), avoiding that, because one who does not desire training is not a vessel for this advice. He said ‘‘satisampannacetasā’’ti (by one with a mind endowed with mindfulness), avoiding that, because one who is dear to virtue but lacks mindfulness has no possibility of recollection in a state of negligence, and is not a vessel for this.
Araññaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Forest Discourse Commentary.
175-6.Toyadullabhakālasminti toyaṃ dullabhaṃ yasmiṃ so toyadullabho, toyadullabho ca so kālo cāti toyadullabhakālo, tasmiṃ.Āvajjetvā vāti udakabhājanaṃ nāmetvā vā.Pavesetvā vāti attano bhājanaṃ tasmiṃ pakkhipitvā vā.Chiddaṃ katvāpi vāti udakabhājane omaṭṭhādibhedaṃ chiddaṃ katvā vā gaṇhantassa bhaṇḍagghena viniddiseti vakkhamānena sambandhanīyaṃ.
175-6.Toyadullabhakālasminti: "Toyadullabhakālasmi" means "toyadullabho yasmiṃ so toyadullabho, toyadullabho ca so kālo cāti toyadullabhakālo, tasmiṃ": that in which water is scarce is toyadullabha, and that toyadullabha is also a time, therefore toyadullabhakāla, in that. Āvajjetvā vāti: "Āvajjetvā vā" means either by tilting the water vessel. Pavesetvā vāti: "Pavesetvā vā" means either by putting one's own vessel into that. Chiddaṃ katvāpi vāti: "Chiddaṃ katvāpi vā" means either by making a hole in the water vessel, such as by piercing it; this is to be connected with "bhaṇḍagghena viniddiseti" (he declares regarding the value of the goods) which will be said later.
Tathāti yathā toyadullabhakālasmiṃ bhājane rakkhitagopitaṃ udakaṃ avaharantassa pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ, teneva nīhārena.Vāpiyaṃ vāti parasantakāya sārakkhāya vāpiyaṃ vā.Taḷāke vāti tādise jātassare vā. Evaṃ sārakkhānaṃ pokkharaṇiādīnaṃ etehi vā avuttasamuccayenavā-saddena vā gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.Attano bhājanaṃ pavesetvā gaṇhantassāti upalakkhaṇapadanti bhājanagatajale ca idha ca telabhājane viya mukhena vā vaṃsādīhi vā ākaḍḍhitvā theyyacittena pivantassa yathāvatthukamāpattividhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
Tathāti: "Tathā" means in the same way, with the same method, as it was said that there is a pārājika offense for one who steals water that is guarded and protected in a vessel during a time when water is scarce. Vāpiyaṃ vāti: "Vāpiyaṃ vā" means either in a pond belonging to another, that is guarded. Taḷāke vāti: "Taḷāke vā" means or in a natural lake of that kind. Thus, it should be understood that by these, or by the implied inclusion of those not mentioned, such as ponds, etc., the vā-saddena is used. Attano bhājanaṃ pavesetvā gaṇhantassāti: "Attano bhājanaṃ pavesetvā gaṇhantassa" is an indicative term; here, just as in the case of a vessel of oil, it should be understood that when drinking water in a vessel or drawing it out with the mouth or with bamboo, etc., with a thieving mind, the appropriate offense should be determined according to the case.
177.Mariyādanti vāpiādīnaṃ pāḷivaṭṭabandhaṃ.Chindatoti kudālādīhi paṃsuādīni uddharitvā dvidhā karontassa. Visesatthāvajotakenatu-saddena ‘‘mariyādaṃ chinditvā dubbalaṃ katvā tassa chindanatthāya vīciyo uṭṭhāpetuṃ udakaṃ sayaṃ otaritvā vā gomahiṃse vā aññe manusse vā kīḷante dārake vā otāretvā vā attano dhammatāya otiṇṇe tāsetvā vā udake ṭhitaṃ rukkhaṃ chinditvā vā chedāpetvā vā pātetvā vā pātāpetvā vā jalaṃ khobheti, tato uṭṭhitāhi vīcīhi mariyāde chinnepi teneva chinno hoti. Evameva gomahiṃsādayo mariyādaṃ ārohantenāpi aññehi ārohāpentenāpi tesaṃ khurehi mariyāde chinnepi, udakaniddhamanādiṃ pidahitvā vā pidahāpetvā vā vāpimariyādāya nīcaṭṭhānaṃ bandhitvā vā bandhāpetvā vā atirekajalāpagamanamaggato nīharitabbodakaṃ vāretvā vā bāhirato udakaṃ pavesetvā vā pūreti, oghena mariyāde chinnepi teneva chinnaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.108 atthato samānaṃ) evamādikaṃaṭṭhakathāgatavisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Adinnādānapubbatoti adinnādānassa pubbapayogattā.Bhūtagāmena saddhimpīti bhūtagāmenapi saddhiṃ.Api-saddena pathavikhaṇanaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Mariyādaṃ chindanto tatthajātaṃ tiṇādiṃ chindati, bhūtagāmapācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Jātapathaviṃ chindati, pathavikhaṇanapācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti adhippāyo.
177.Mariyādanti: "Mariyāda" means the embankment surrounding the pond, etc.Chindatoti: "Chindato" means to one who divides it by removing earth, etc., with a hoe, etc. By the tu-saddena, which indicates a specific meaning, "mariyādaṃ chinditvā dubbalaṃ katvā tassa chindanatthāya vīciyo uṭṭhāpetuṃ udakaṃ sayaṃ otaritvā vā gomahiṃse vā aññe manusse vā kīḷante dārake vā otāretvā vā attano dhammatāya otiṇṇe tāsetvā vā udake ṭhitaṃ rukkhaṃ chinditvā vā chedāpetvā vā pātetvā vā pātāpetvā vā jalaṃ khobheti, tato uṭṭhitāhi vīcīhi mariyāde chinnepi teneva chinno hoti. Evameva gomahiṃsādayo mariyādaṃ ārohantenāpi aññehi ārohāpentenāpi tesaṃ khurehi mariyāde chinnepi, udakaniddhamanādiṃ pidahitvā vā pidahāpetvā vā vāpimariyādāya nīcaṭṭhānaṃ bandhitvā vā bandhāpetvā vā atirekajalāpagamanamaggato nīharitabbodakaṃ vāretvā vā bāhirato udakaṃ pavesetvā vā pūreti, oghena mariyāde chinnepi teneva chinnaṃ hotī""ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.108 atthato samānaṃ): "Having cut the embankment and weakened it, in order to raise waves to cut it, either by going into the water himself, or by having cows or buffaloes or other people or children playing go into it, or by frightening those who have entered by their own nature, or by cutting or having cut or felling or having felled a tree standing in the water, he agitates the water; even if the embankment is cut by the waves that arise from that, it is cut by him himself. In the same way, even if the embankment is cut by the hooves of cows and buffaloes, etc., either when they climb onto the embankment themselves or when others have them climb onto it, or by closing or having closed the water outlet, etc., or by building or having built a low place in the pond's embankment, or by preventing water that should be discharged from an excess water drainage route, or by filling it by letting water in from outside, even if the embankment is cut by the current, it is cut by him himself" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.108, similar in meaning): the commentary includes such specific details.Adinnādānapubbatoti: "Adinnādānapubbato" means because of the prior use of theft.Bhūtagāmena saddhimpīti: "Bhūtagāmena saddhimpī" means even together with vegetation. The Api**-saddena combines digging the earth. "Mariyādaṃ chindanto tatthajātaṃ tiṇādiṃ chindati, bhūtagāmapācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Jātapathaviṃ chindati, pathavikhaṇanapācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti adhippāyo": The intention is that one who cuts the embankment cuts grass and so on that grows there, incurring a dukkata offense together with a bhūtagāma pācittiya. He cuts the earth that has come into existence, incurring a dukkata offense together with an earth-digging pācittiya.
178.Kātabboti ettha ‘‘bhaṇḍagghena āpattiyā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Antobhūtahetvatthavasena kāretabboti gahetabbo. Anto ṭhatvā chindanto bahiantena, bahi ṭhatvā chindanto antoantena, ubhayatthāpi ṭhatvā chindanto majjhato bhaṇḍagghena āpattiyā kāretabboti yojanā. Ayaṃ panettha attho – antovāpiyaṃ ṭhatvā mariyādaṃ chinditvā udake bahi nikkhamite nikkhantaudakagghena dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikāsu yathāpannāya āpattiyā kāretabbo. Bahi ṭhatvā mariyādaṃ chinditvā antovāpiyaṃ pavisantodakassa ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvitakkhaṇe nikkhantaudakagghena āpattiyā kāretabbo. Kadāci anto kadāci bahi ṭhatvā mariyādaṃ majjhe ṭhapetvā chindanto majjhe ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā udakassa nīhaṭakkhaṇe nīhaṭaudakassa agghena āpattiyā kāretabboti.
178. Kātabbo ti: Here, the rest of the passage is "by the value of the goods, for the offense." It should be understood as causing to be done in terms of the inherent cause. The construction is that if one stands inside and cuts, it should be caused to be done by the value of the goods from the outer end; if one stands outside and cuts, it should be caused to be done from the inner end; if one stands in either place and cuts, it should be caused to be done by the value of the goods from the middle. Here, the meaning is this: standing inside the well and cutting the boundary, if the water flows out, he should be made to pay with the value of the outflowing water according to the offense he has incurred, whether dukkaṭa, thullaccaya, or pārājika. Standing outside and cutting the boundary, when the water entering inside the well is drained from its place, he should be made to pay with the value of the outflowing water according to the offense. Sometimes standing inside, sometimes outside, if he cuts, keeping the boundary in the middle, he should be made to pay with the value of the water removed at the moment of cutting the middle standing place and removing the water.
Udakaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Water Story
179-80.Vārenāti vārena vārena sāmaṇerā araññato yaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ saṅghassatthāya ānetvā sace ācariyānampi āharanti, yāva te dantakaṭṭhaṃ pamāṇenachinditvāsaṅghassa ca ācariyānañcana niyyādenti,tāva araññato ābhatattātaṃ sabbaṃsaṅghassa ca sakasakaācariyānañcaābhataṃdantakaṭṭhaṃtesameva cadantakaṭṭhahārakānaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃsantakaṃhotīti atthayojanā.
179-80. Vārena: Meaning, the young novices who bring tooth wood from the forest for the Sangha in turns, if they also bring it for their teachers, until they cut that tooth wood to the proper size and do not deliver it to the Sangha and the teachers, all that which has been brought from the forest, the brought tooth wood belonging to the Sangha and their respective teachers, belongs to those same young novices who brought the tooth wood. This is the connection of the meaning.
181.Tasmāti yasmā tesameva sāmaṇerānaṃ santakaṃ hoti, tasmā.Taṃaraññato ābhataṃ dantakaṭṭhañca saṅghassa garubhaṇḍañca dantakaṭṭhanti sambandho. Saṅghikāya bhūmiyaṃ uppannaṃ saṅghena rakkhitagopitattā garubhaṇḍabhūtaṃ dantakaṭṭhañcāti vuttaṃ hoti.Gaṇhantassa cāti adhikaca-kārena ihāvuttassaaṭṭhakathāgatassa gaṇapuggalagihiparibaddha ārāmuyyānasañjātachinnāchinnarakkhitagopitadantakaṭṭhassa samuccitattā tañca theyyacittena gaṇhantassa avahaṭadantakaṭṭhassa agghavasena āpattiyo vattabbāti ayamattho dīpito hoti.
181. Tasmā: Because it belongs to those same novices, therefore. Taṃ: That tooth wood brought from the forest is also the heavy goods of the Sangha, the tooth wood, is the connection. It is said that the tooth wood that grows on Sangha land and is protected and guarded by the Sangha is heavy goods. Gaṇhantassa cā: Due to the additional ca, here the commentary’s accumulated taking of tooth wood that has arisen in the gardens and groves attached to a group, an individual, or a householder, and is cut or uncut, protected or guarded, it should be stated that the offenses are according to the value of the tooth wood removed by one taking it with the intention to steal. This meaning is shown.
182.Tehidantakaṭṭhahārakehi sāmaṇerehi.Niyyāditanti mahāsaṅghassa paṭipāditaṃ.
182. Tehi: By those novices who bring tooth wood. Niyyāditaṃ: Handed over to the great Sangha.
183.Saṅghikakālato paṭṭhāya theyyacittena gaṇhatopi avahārābhāve kāraṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘arakkhattā’’tiādi. Tatthaarakkhattāti saṅghikabhāvena laddhepi rakkhitagopitadantakaṭṭhe viya saṅghena katārakkhāyābhāvā.Yathāvuḍḍhamabhājetabbatoti saṅghikattassāpi sato yathāvuḍḍhaṃ paṭipāṭimanatikkamma bhājetabbaphalapupphādīnaṃ viya bhājetabbatābhāvato.Sabbasādhāraṇattā cāti saṅghapariyāpannānaṃ sabbesameva sādhāraṇattā.
183. From the time of the Sangha, to show the reason for the absence of removal even when taking with the intention to steal, he says, "arakkhattā" etc. There, arakkhattā: because of the lack of protection done by the Sangha like tooth wood that is obtained as Sangha property but is protected and guarded. Yathāvuḍḍhamabhājetabbato: Because, even though it is Sangha property, it is not to be divided like fruits, flowers, etc., which are to be divided without transgressing the order of seniority. Sabbasādhāraṇattā ca: And because it is common to all those included in the Sangha.
Idanti saṅghassa niyyāditadantakaṭṭhaṃ.Aññaṃ viyāti aññaṃ gaṇapuggalādisantakaṃ rakkhitagopitadantakaṭṭhaṃ viya. Evaṃ corikāya gaṇhato avahārābhāve kāraṇena sādhitepi theyyacittena sakaparikkhārampi gaṇhato dukkaṭassa vuttattā tathā gaṇhanto dukkaṭā na muccatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vattaṃ pana jānitabbaṃ – saṅghikadantakaṭṭhaṃ gaṇhantena padhānagharādīsu pavisitvā cirena osarantena bahi vītināmetabbadivase gaṇetvā taṃpamāṇena gahetabbaṃ, maggaṃ gacchantena ekaṃ dve dantakaṭṭhāni thavikāya pakkhipitvā gantabbaṃ, tattheva vasantena divase khāditabbadantakaṭṭhaṃ gahetabbanti.
Idaṃ: Tooth wood handed over to the Sangha. Aññaṃ viyā: Like other protected and guarded tooth wood belonging to a group, an individual, etc. Even though the reason for the absence of removal by theft has been established in this way, because the dukkaṭa offense was stated for taking even one's own requisites with the intention to steal, it should be seen that one taking in that way is not freed from the dukkaṭa offense. But the practice should be known: one taking Sangha tooth wood should enter the main house, etc., slowly descending, calculating the days to be spent outside, and take according to that measure; one going on the road should put one or two tooth woods in his bag and go; one living there should take the tooth wood to be chewed on that day.
Dantakaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Tooth Wood Story
184.‘‘Aggiṃvā detī’’tiādīsu ‘‘rukkhe’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati ‘‘rukkho vinassatī’’ti vakkhamānattā, rukkho ca ‘‘vanappati nāma yo manussānaṃ pariggahito hoti rukkho paribhogo’’ti (pārā. 110)pāḷiyaṃāgatattā caaṭṭhakathāya(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.110) ca vuttanayena ambalabujapanasādiko manussānaṃ paribhogāraho manussāyatto rakkhitagopitoyeva gahetabbo.Aggiṃ vā detīti corikāya aggiṃ ālimpeti vā.Satthenarukkhesamantato ākoṭetīti vāsipharasuādisatthena rukkhatacaṃ chindanto samantato āvāṭaṃ dasseti.Maṇḍūkakaṇṭakanāmakaṃ visaṃ vārukkheākoṭetīti corikāya rukkhaṃ nāsetukāmo rukkhe maṇḍūkakaṇṭakanāmakaṃ visaṃ paveseti.
184. In "Aggiṃ vā detī" etc., "rukkhe" is obtained from the context, because it will be said "rukkho vinassatī," and the tree is "named vanappati, the tree whose use and enjoyment is claimed by people" as it comes in the Pāli (pāci. 110), and in the way stated in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.110), it should be understood as mango, breadfruit, jackfruit, etc., worthy of human use and enjoyment, dependent on humans, and protected and guarded. Aggiṃ vā detī: Or he sets fire to it by theft. Satthena rukkhe samantato ākoṭetī: Cutting the bark of the tree with a weapon such as an axe or adze, he shows a cavity all around. Maṇḍūkakaṇṭakanāmakaṃ visaṃ vā rukkhe ākoṭetī: Wishing to destroy the tree by theft, he inserts poison named maṇḍūkakaṇṭaka into the tree.
185.Yena vā tena vāti yathāvuttena vā avuttena vā yena kenaci upāyena.Rukkho vinassatīti aggiṃ datvā jhāpito dhaññakalāpo viya, telakumbhī viya ca vināva ṭhānācāvanena yathāṭṭhitamevanassati.‘‘Ḍayhatī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘aggiṃ detī’’ti idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vinassatīti maṇḍūkakaṇṭakākoṭanādiavasesapayogaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘theyyacitto chindati, pahāre pahāre āpatti dukkaṭassa, ekaṃ pahāraṃ anāgate āpatti thullaccayassa, tasmiṃ pahāre āgate āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 110) ṭhānācāvanena pārājikassa āgatattā.Pakāsitanti ettha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāya’’nti labbhati. Pāṭhāgataṃ pārājikaṃ pana pārisesato ca sūcīyatīti tabbācakassa vā saṅgāhakassa vā vacanassa ihāvijjamānattā tattha vinicchayo pāsaṃsikopi ihāvutto.
185. Yena vā tena vā: By whatever means, stated or unstated. Rukkho vinassatī: The tree perishes, like a heap of grain burnt by giving fire, and like a pot of oil, it decays as it is, without moving from its place. "Ḍayhatī" is said referring to "aggiṃ detī." Vinassatī should be seen as said referring to the remaining applications such as injecting maṇḍūkakaṇṭaka, because the pārājika comes with the removal from the place, "he cuts with the intention to steal, there is an offense of dukkaṭa with each stroke, an offense of thullaccaya if a stroke is not completed, and an offense of pārājika if that stroke is completed" (pārā. 110). Pakāsitaṃ: Here, "aṭṭhakathāya" is obtained. The pārājika that comes in the text, however, is indicated by suggestion, and because there is no word here that expresses or includes it, the decision there, even though incidental, is stated here.
Vanappatikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Tree Story
186-7.‘‘Haraṇakaṃ nāma aññassa haraṇakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 111) vuttaharaṇakaniddese ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 111) pāṭhe ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti gahitasīsādiṭṭhānappabhedavasenaaṭṭhakathāya(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.110) āgatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘chinditvā mocetvā gaṇhato’’ti. Kiriyānaṃ sakammakattā ‘‘alaṅkāra’’nti pāṭhaseso.Chinditvāti gīveyyakādiṃ.Mocetvāti kaṇṇapiḷandhanādiṃ.
186-7. In the definition of taking, "Haraṇakaṃ nāma aññassa haraṇakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā" (pārā. 111), in the passage "ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā" (pārā. 111), to show the decision that comes in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.110) according to the types of locations taken as head etc., he says "chinditvā mocetvā gaṇhato." Because the actions have the nature of possessions, the rest of the passage is "ornament." Chinditvā: Cutting the necklace etc. Mocetvā: Releasing the earrings etc.
Sīsādīhimocitamattasminti etthāpi visesitabbadassanatthaṃ ‘‘alaṅkārasmi’’nti tameva bhummekavacanantavasena gahetabbaṃ.Ākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhananti ettha abhimukhaṃ kaḍḍhanaṃ ākaḍḍhananti katvā attano samīpamāviñchanaṃākaḍḍhanaṃ,viparītaṃ kaḍḍhanaṃ vikaḍḍhananti katvā tabbiparītaṃvikaḍḍhanaṃ.
Sīsādīhi mocitamattasmiṃ: Here too, to show what should be specified, the same should be taken as the locative singular of "alaṅkārasmiṃ." Ākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhanaṃ: Here, making pulling toward the front as ākaḍḍhanaṃ, the drawing near to oneself is ākaḍḍhanaṃ, making pulling in the opposite direction as vikaḍḍhanaṃ, the opposite of that is vikaḍḍhanaṃ.
188-9.Valayanti avaṅkaṃ maṭṭhahatthūpagaṃ.Kaṭakampi vāti anekavaṅke yojetvā bubbuḷādīni dassetvā vā adassetvā vā kataṃ hatthūpagaṃ.Aggabāhunti kapparato paṭṭhāya aggahatthaṃ.Aparāparaṃ cāretīti ito cito ca sañcāreti.‘‘Sāretī’’ti vā pāṭho, soyeva attho.Taṃvalayaṃ vā kaṭakaṃ vā.Ākāsagataṃ karotīti sabbadisāhi yathā hatthaṃ na phusati, tathā ākāsagataṃ karoti. Nidhivalayassa pavesitarukkhamūle sabbadisāhi aphusantaṃ ākāsagatakaraṇe pārājikaṃ hoti, idha ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha‘‘saviññāṇakato’’tiādi.Idanti valayaṃ kaṭakañca.
188-9. Valayaṃ: A bangle, a smooth armlet. Kaṭakampi vā: Or an armlet made by joining many curves, showing or not showing bubbles etc., that is worn on the hand. Aggabāhuṃ: The upper arm from the elbow joint. Aparāparaṃ cāretī: Moves it from here and there. "Sāretī" is also a reading, the meaning is the same. Taṃ: That bangle or armlet. Ākāsagataṃ karotī: He makes it go in the air so that it does not touch the hand in any direction. If a treasure bangle that does not touch in all directions is put in the root of a tree, it is pārājika; why is "rakkhatī" said here? He says "saviññāṇakato" etc. Idaṃ: The bangle and armlet.
190.‘‘Nivatthaṃ vattha’’nti iminā cīvarampi gayhati.Parassavatthasāmikassa.Paropīti vatthasāmikopi.Tanti corena acchijjamānaṃ attanā nivatthavatthaṃ.Lajjāya sahasā na muñcatīti lajjāya sīghataraṃ na pariccajati.
190. "Nivatthaṃ vatthaṃ" includes the robe. Parassa: Of the owner of the cloth. Paropi: Even the owner of the cloth. Taṃ: The cloth worn by oneself that is being snatched by the thief. Lajjāya sahasā na muñcatī: He does not quickly give it up out of shame.
191.Coropi ākaḍḍhati, so paropi ākaḍḍhatīti yojanā.So parocorato añño, vatthasāmikoti attho.Parassāti vatthasāmikassa.
191. The thief pulls, and that other pulls, is the construction. So paro: Other than the thief, meaning the owner of the cloth. Parassā: Of the owner of the cloth.
192.‘‘Ṭhānā cāveyyā’’ti pāṭheṭhāna-saddena saṅgahitasīsādiṭṭhānato harīyateti haraṇakanti vuttālaṅkārādibhaṇḍassa cāvanena pārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni tadeva haraṇakaṃ hārakena saha harantassa hārakassa ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanayanena ṭhānācāvanañca ‘‘ṭhānā cāveyyā’’ti imināva saṅgayhatīti tatthāpi vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sabhaṇḍahāraka’’ntiādi. Bhaṇḍaṃ harati netītibhaṇḍahārako,purisādiko, tena sahātisabhaṇḍahārakaṃ,alaṅkāravatthādīni ādāya gacchantehi itthipurisādipāṇehi saheva.Bhaṇḍanti tehi hariyamānattā haraṇakasaṅkhātavatthābharaṇādibhaṇḍaṃ.Nentassāti ‘‘nento assā’’ti padacchedo.Nentoti ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvetvā attanā icchitadisābhimukhaṃ pāpento. Assa paṭhame pāde atikkante thullaccayaṃ āpajjitvāti pāṭhasesayojanā.Assāti imassa bhaṇḍahārakassa. Paṭhamapāde atikkante attanā paṭhamaṃ gantabbadisato corassābhimatadisaṃ gate thullaccayaṃ āpajjitvā dutiye atikkante cuto siyāti yojanā.
192. In the passage "Ṭhānā cāveyyā," having shown the pārājika by removal of the ornament etc. that has been defined as taking, from the locations such as the head etc. included by the word ṭhāna, now, to show the decision there too, that even taking that same taken item together with the taker is included by "ṭhānā cāveyyā," he says "sabhaṇḍahārakaṃ" etc. Bhaṇḍahārako: One who takes and carries goods, a man etc., with him is sabhaṇḍahārakaṃ, together with living beings such as women and men who are going carrying ornaments, clothes, etc. Bhaṇḍaṃ: The goods called taking, such as clothes and ornaments, because they are being carried. Nentassā: "Nento assā" is the word separation. Nento: Causing to move from the place and bringing toward the direction desired by oneself. The construction of the rest of the passage is that having incurred a thullaccaya when the first foot of the horse has passed. Assā: Of this goods taker. The construction is that having incurred a thullaccaya when the first foot has passed, when it has gone from the direction to be gone by oneself first to the direction desired by the thief, if he dies when the second foot has passed.
193.Theyyacetano sace tajjetvā parassa hatthato bhaṇḍaṃ pātāpeti, parassa hatthato bhaṇḍe muttamatte tajjetvā pātāpakassa parājayoti yojanā.Bhaṇḍe muttamatteti bhaṇḍe hatthato kesaggamattampi muttakkhaṇe.
193. If, with the intention to steal, he threatens and makes the goods fall from the hand of another, the connection is that when the goods are released from the hand, the one who threatened and made it fall is defeated. Bhaṇḍe muttamatte: When the goods are released from the hand, even by the measure of a hair tip.
194.Athāpīti atha vā.Parikappetvā pātāpeti vāti ettha ‘‘yaṃ mayhaṃ ruccati, taṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘evarūpaṃ ce hoti, gaṇhissāmī’’ti visesetvā vā parikappetvā tajjetvā pāteti, dukkaṭaṃ. Evaṃ pātitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃtassacorassa āmasane dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
194. Athāpi: Or else. Parikappetvā pātāpeti vā: Here, having conceived specifically, "I will take what pleases me" or "If it is of such a kind, I will take it," and making it fall by threatening, it is dukkaṭa. The connection is that touching the goods made to fall in that way is said to be dukkaṭa for tassa thief.
195.Yathāvatthunti bhaṇḍassa agghānurūpaṃ, thullaccayaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.Chaḍḍitepīti tassa corabhāvaṃ jānitvā bhītatasitena attanā nīyamāne bhaṇḍe chaḍḍitepi sati. Teneva ṭhānācāvanaṃ kārāpitanti pārājikanti na gahetabbanti āha‘‘na doso’’ti. ‘‘Tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vutte pana uttasitvā chaḍḍanaṃ tassa āṇattiyā vinā hotīti tattha tassa anāpattīti adhippāyo. Tathā vadato pana adinnādānapubbapayogattā dukkaṭameva.
195. Yathāvatthu: According to the value of the goods, the intention is that it is thullaccaya. Chaḍḍitepī: Even when the goods being carried by oneself are thrown away, frightened by knowing that he is a thief. Because removal from the place was caused by him, he says "na doso" so that it should not be taken as pārājika. However, if it is thrown away out of fear when told "Stop, stop," there is no offense for him there because it happens without his order. However, since he is saying that, there is only a dukkaṭa because of the prior effort of taking what was not given.
196.Tanti taṃ chaḍḍitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ.Taduddhāreti tassa chaḍḍitassa bhaṇḍassa uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Pārājikaṃ kadā siyāti āha‘‘sāmike sālaye gate’’ti. Nirālayaṃ chaḍḍitaṃ pana gaṇhato asati theyyacitte na dosoti byatirekato dasseti.
196. Taṃ: That thrown goods. Taduddhāre: The taking up of that thrown goods is pārājika. When is it pārājika? He says "sāmike sālaye gate." However, he shows by contrast that there is no fault in taking what was thrown away without a shelter, if there is no intention to steal.
197.Sāmikassa sālayakāle gaṇhantassāpi pārājikābhāvappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘gaṇhato’’ti. Pubbagāthāya ‘‘ta’’nti idhānuvattate.Sakasaññāyagaṇhatoti ‘‘tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vacanato uttasitvā sālayaṃ chaḍḍitaṃ taṃ vatthuṃ sakasaññāya gaṇhantassa.Gahaṇeti sakasaññāya gahaṇahetu, sakasaññāya gahitabhaṇḍaṃ attano gahaṇakāraṇā bhikkhuṃ avahārāpattito rakkhatīti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘gahaṇe pana rakkhatī’’ti. Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti yojanā.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā gahaṇe rakkhatīti atidisati.
197. To show the way that there is an absence of pārājika even when taking when the owner is under shelter, he says "gaṇhato." "Ta" from the previous verse continues here. Sakasaññāyagaṇhato: For one taking with his own perception the thing thrown away under shelter out of fear from the words "Stop, stop." Gahaṇe: Because of the taking with his own perception, the goods taken with his own perception protect the bhikkhu from the offense of removal due to his cause of taking. Therefore, he says "gahaṇe pana rakkhatī." However, there is a debt for the goods. "Tathā" likens that it protects in the taking.
198-9.Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvāti ‘‘mayhaṃ kimetena bhaṇḍena, jīvitarakkhanameva varatara’’nti nirālayo hutvā. Tenāha‘‘bhīto corā palāyatī’’ti.Corāti ettha ca hetumhi nissakkaṃ.Gaṇhatoti ettha ‘‘ta’’nti pāṭhaseso, tathā chaḍḍitaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍanti attho.Uddhāre dukkaṭanti vatthumhi anavajjepi theyyacittavasena dukkaṭaṃ hoti, asati theyyacitte dukkaṭampi na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.Āharāpenteti ettha bhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ, tasmiṃ bhaṇḍasāmini āharāpente satīti attho.
198-9. Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā: Becoming without shelter, thinking "What is the use of these goods to me, protecting my life is better." Therefore, he says "bhīto corā palāyatī." Here, Corā is certain in the reason. Gaṇhato: Here, "ta" is the rest of the passage, meaning that thrown goods. Uddhāre dukkaṭaṃ: There is a dukkaṭa offense due to the intention to steal even though there is no fault in the thing, it is said that there is not even a dukkaṭa if there is no intention to steal. Āharāpente: Here, the locative is in the sense of condition, meaning when that goods owner brings it near.
200.Nirālayena chaḍḍitavatthuno gahaṇe bhaṇḍadeyyañca adentassa parājayo ca kasmāti āha‘‘tassā’’tiādi.Aññāsūti mahāpaccariyādīsu itarāsu aṭṭhakathāsu.
200. Why is there pārājika for not giving the debt for the goods and taking the thing thrown away without shelter? He says "tassā" etc. Aññāsu: In other commentaries, such as the Mahāpaccari etc.
Haraṇakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Taking Story
201.Upanidhikathāya ‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti sampajānamusāvādaṃ bhāsatoti yojanā. Yena kenaci rahasi ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā dehī’’ti niyyāditaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pacchā sāmikena ‘‘dehi me taṃ bhaṇḍa’’nti vutte accantamupagantuṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti sampajānamusāvādaṃ bhāsatoti attho.Gaṇhāmīti aggahesiṃ. Accantā heso atīte vattamānappayogoyaṃ. ‘‘Sampajānamusāvāde pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 2) imassa sikkhāpadassa visaye kasmā dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti āha‘‘adinnādānapubbakattā’’tiādi. Tatthaadinnādānapubbakattāti adinnādānassa sahapayogavasena pubbaṅgamattā, na pubbapayogattā. Na hi adinnādānassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭamatthīti. Tenevāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘adinnādānassa payogattā’’ti.
201. In the Upanidhikathā, "‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti sampajānamusāvādaṃ bhāsatoti yojanā" means he utters a deliberate lie saying "I do not take it." If someone secretly entrusts an item saying, "Return this belonging of mine to me," and later the owner says, "Give me that item," and he completely denies having received it, uttering the deliberate lie, "I do not take it," that is the meaning. Gaṇhāmī means "I have taken." This is a reference to the past tense in the present usage. Regarding why a dukkata was stated in the case of this training rule, "In deliberate lying, a pācittiya" (pāci. 2), he says, ‘‘adinnādānapubbakattā’’tiādi. Here, adinnādānapubbakattā means that the taking of what is not given is a preliminary action due to its simultaneous occurrence, not a prior action. For there is no dukkata in place of pācittiya for a prior action of taking what is not given. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā says, "because of the action of taking what is not given".
202.Etassāti etassa samīpe.Kiṃ nu dassatīti dassati kiṃ nu.Vimatuppādeti hetumhi bhummaṃ.Tassāti yassa bhikkhuno santike upanikkhittaṃ, tassa.
202.Etassāti means near to this. Kiṃ nu dassatīti means what indeed will he give. Vimatuppādeti is an adverb in the sense of a cause. Tassāti means of that bhikkhu, in whose presence it was deposited.
203.Tasminti yasmiṃ upanikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ bhikkhumhi.Dāne nirussāheti attani nikkhittassa bhaṇḍassa sāmikassa dānavisaye ussāharahite sati, ‘‘na dāni taṃ dassāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepe kateti adhippāyo. Tenevāha‘‘ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepe’’ti.Paroti bhaṇḍasāmiko.Dhuranti ‘‘yena kenaci ākārena gaṇhissāmī’’ti ussāhaṃ.Nikkhipeti nikkhipeyya.
203.Tasminti means in that bhikkhu, in whom it was deposited. Dāne nirussāheti means when he is without enthusiasm in the matter of giving to the owner of the deposited item, the intention is that he has made a rejection of the burden, thinking, "I will not give it now." Therefore, he says ‘‘ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepe’’ti. Paroti means the owner of the item. Dhuranti means the effort, "I will take it by any means." Nikkhipeti means he would reject.
204.Cittenādātukāmovāti ettha ‘‘yo tassā’’ti pāṭhaseso.Ceti api-saddatthe. Yo coro cittena adātukāmova, tassa corassa ‘‘dassāmī’’ti mukhena vadatopīti yojanā. Atha vāadātukāmoti ettha ‘‘hutvā’’ti pāṭhaseso.Ceti vuttattho.Evāti ‘‘parājayo’’ti iminā yujjati.Cittena adātukāmohutvā mukhena ‘‘dassāmī’’ti vadatopisāmino dhuranikkhepesatiparājayohotevāti yojanā.
204.Cittenādātukāmovāti here, the rest of the phrase "yo tassā" is understood. Ceti is in the sense of api. The connection is that even if a thief, intending not to give with his mind, says "I will give" with his mouth. Alternatively, adātukāmoti, here the rest of the phrase "hutvā" is understood. Ceti has the meaning stated above. Evāti is connected with "parājayo". The construction is that even if one, being of mind not to give, says with the mouth "I will give," when the sāmino dhuranikkhepe occurs, parājayo certainly happens.
Upanidhikathāvaṇṇanā.
Upanidhikathāvaṇṇanā.
205.Suṅkaghātassāti ‘‘suṅkaghātaṃ nāma raññā ṭhapitaṃ hoti pabbatakhaṇḍe vā nadītitthe vā gāmadvāre vā’’ti (pārā. 113)pāḷiyaṃāgatassa ‘‘suṅkaṃ tato hananti…pe… vināsentī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.113)aṭṭhakathāyaṃniruttassa ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya nīyamāne bhaṇḍe ettakato ettakaṃ rājabhāgaṃ gahetabba’’nti rājādīhi taṃtaṃpadesasāmikehi niyamitassa pabbatakhaṇḍādiṭṭhānassa.Bahīti suṅkagahaṇatthāya parikappitasīmato bahi.Pātetīti ettha ‘‘theyyacitto’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati. ‘‘Rājārahaṃ bhaṇḍa’’nti pāṭhaseso. Yato kutoci bhaṇḍato pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanako bhāgo rājādidesasāmikassa dātabbo hoti, tādisaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto yathā bahi patati, evaṃ khipatīti attho.Dhuvaṃ patatīti etthāpi ‘‘ta’’nti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘bhaṇḍa’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati. Yathā khittaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ekantena bahi patatīti. Hatthatomuttamattetasmiṃ bhaṇḍe.
205.Suṅkaghātassāti "suṅkaghātaṃ nāma raññā ṭhapitaṃ hoti pabbatakhaṇḍe vā nadītitthe vā gāmadvāre vā"ti (pārā. 113) according to the Pāḷi, "suṅkaṃ tato hananti…pe… vināsentī"ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.113) according to the Aṭṭhakathā, the place such as a section of mountain, etc., determined by the king and others, the owners of that particular area, as "from now on, so much royal share should be taken from goods being brought." Bahīti means outside the boundary designated for the purpose of collecting tolls. Pātetīti here, "theyyacitto" is obtained from the context. "Rājārahaṃ bhaṇḍa" is the remainder of the text. From whatever goods, a part worth five māsakas or more than five māsakas has to be given to the king or owner of the territory, he throws such goods with a thieving mind so that they fall outside.
206.‘‘Dhuvaṃ patatī’’ti ettha byatirekaṃ dassetumāha‘‘taṃ rukkhe’’tiādi.Tanti theyyāya bahi pātetuṃ khittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ paṭihataṃ hutvāti yojanā.Vātakkhittampi vāti pāṭho gahetabbo. ‘‘Vātakkhitto’’ti liṅgavipallāso vā daṭṭhabbo.
206.To show the distinction in "Dhuvaṃ patatī," he says ‘‘taṃ rukkhe’’tiādi. Tanti, the goods thrown to cause it to fall outside by theft, having been obstructed, is the construction. Vātakkhittampi vāti, this reading should be taken. "Vātakkhitto" should be seen as a gender shift.
207.Pacchāti patitaṭṭhāne thokaṃ cirāyitvā, iminā thokampi cirāyitamatte payogasādhiyaṃ kāriyaṃ siddhamevāti pārājikassa kāraṇaṃ sampannamevāti dasseti. Tenāha‘‘pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti.
207.Pacchāti, after dwelling a little while at the fallen place. This shows that even if it lingers a little while, the act accomplished through the effort is indeed accomplished, and the condition for parājika is complete. Therefore, he says ‘‘pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti.
208.‘‘Ṭhatvā’’tiādinā patitaṭṭhāne acirāyitvā gatepi tasmiṃ bahi patitaṭṭhānato itaratrāpi cirāyitena bahi pātanappayogena sādhiyaṃ kāriyaṃ siddhamevāti pārājikakāraṇassa siddhataṃ dasseti. Tenevāha‘‘parājayo’’ti.‘‘Atiṭṭhamāna’’ntiādinā yattha katthaci acirāyanena payogassa niratthakataṃ dasseti. Tenevāha‘‘rakkhatī’’ti.
208.‘‘Ṭhatvā’’tiādinā, by "Ṭhatvā" etc., even if it does not linger at the fallen place, the fact that the action accomplished through the effort of causing it to fall outside is indeed accomplished due to lingering elsewhere after falling outside, shows that the condition for parājika is fulfilled. Therefore, he says ‘‘parājayo’’. ‘‘Atiṭṭhamāna’’ntiādinā shows the meaninglessness of the effort due to not lingering anywhere. Therefore, he says ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti.
209.Tanti aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ.
209.Tanti means the Aṭṭhakathā's statement.
210.Sayaṃ vā vaṭṭetīti anto ṭhito sayaṃ vā hatthena vā pādena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahisīmāya ninnaṭṭhānaṃ parivaṭṭeti.Aṭṭhatvāti pavaṭṭitamatte anto katthacipi aṭṭhatvā.Vaṭṭamānanti pavaṭṭantaṃ.Gatanti bahisīmaṃ kesaggamattaṭṭhānampi antosīmamatikkamamattaṃ.
210.Sayaṃ vā vaṭṭetīti, standing inside, he himself rolls it with his hand, foot, or a stick to a lower place outside the boundary. Aṭṭhatvāti, without stopping anywhere inside as soon as it is set in motion. Vaṭṭamānanti, while rolling. Gatanti, the mere act of crossing the boundary, even if only by the space of a hair-tip.
211.Taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sace anto ṭhatvā ṭhatvā bahi gacchatīti yojanā. Yadi antosīmāya ṭhatvā ṭhatvā bahisīmaṃ gacchatīti attho.Rakkhatīti antosīmāya paṭhamagatinivattaneneva etassa bhikkhuno payogavegassa nivattattā, tato upari nivattanārahakāraṇassa aladdhabhāvena attanā ca gatattā tathā bahisīmappattaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ taṃmūlakapayojakaṃ bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā rakkhatīti adhippāyo.Suddhacittena ṭhapiteti ‘‘evaṃ ṭhapite vaṭṭitvā gamissatī’’ti theyyacittena vinā ‘‘kevalaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti cittena bahisīmābhimukhaṃ ninnaṭṭhānaṃ otāretvā ṭhapite.Sayaṃ vaṭṭatīti bhaṇḍaṃ sayameva ninnaṭṭhānaṃ ninnaṃ hutvā bahisīmaṃ ce pavaṭṭantaṃ gacchati.Vaṭṭatīti āpattiyā akaraṇato vaṭṭati.
211.Taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sace anto ṭhatvā ṭhatvā bahi gacchatīti yojanā. The meaning is: if, having stood inside the boundary, it goes to the outside boundary. Rakkhatīti, because the momentum of this bhikkhu's effort is averted merely by stopping the initial movement inside the boundary, and because a worthy cause for averting it further is not obtained, and it has gone by itself, the intention is that such goods that have reached the outside boundary protect the bhikkhu, who is the originator of that action, from offense. Suddhacittena ṭhapiteti means having placed it facing the low place towards the outside boundary with the intention of "I will merely place it," without a thieving mind, thinking "Having been placed like this, it will roll and go." Sayaṃ vaṭṭatīti means the goods themselves becoming low due to the low place, roll and go to the outside boundary. Vaṭṭatīti means he escapes from offense.
212.Gacchanteti corassa payogaṃ vinā attanāva gacchante.Tanti rājadeyyapañcamāsakaatirekapañcamāsakamattaṃ suṅkavantaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Nīhaṭepi nāvahāroti yojanā. Kevalaṃ theyyacittassa āpattiyā anaṅgabhāvato, yānādipayojakakāyavacīpayogassa abhāvato, bhaṇḍaṭṭhapitayānādino attanāva bahisīmappattattā, teneva bhaṇḍassāpi gatattā ca bhikkhuno avahāro natthīti attho.
212.Gacchanteti, while it is going by itself without the thief's effort. Tanti, that amount of goods subject to toll, worth five māsakas or more than five māsakas of royal dues. The connection is that even if it is taken out, there is no avahāra. Because the thieving mind alone is not an integral part of the offense, because there is no physical or verbal effort causing the movement of vehicles, etc., because the vehicle on which the goods were placed has reached the outside boundary by itself, and therefore, the goods have also gone by themselves, the meaning is that there is no avahāra for the bhikkhu.
213.Payogena vināti corassa sakapayogamantarena.Avahāro na vijjatīti ettha yutti vuttanayāva.
213.Payogena vināti means without the thief's own effort. Avahāro na vijjatīti, the reason here is the same as stated above.
214.Maṇinti pādārahaṃ suṅkadātabbamaṇiratanaṃ, eteneva upalakkhaṇapadattā yaṃkiñci bhaṇḍaṃ saṅgahitameva.Pārājikaṃ siyāti yānassa attanā pājitattāti adhippāyo.Sīmātikkamaneti suṅkaggahaṇassa niyamitaṭṭhānātikkamane.
214.Maṇinti means a jewel worthy of toll payment, and by this characterizing term, any kind of goods are included. Pārājikaṃ siyāti, the intention is that the vehicle was driven by oneself. Sīmātikkamaneti means upon crossing the boundary of the place designated for toll collection.
215.Matanti ‘‘ettakabhaṇḍato ettakaṃ gahetabba’’nti rājūhi anumataṃ.Seso kathāmaggoti ‘‘suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ patvā suṅkikesu niddāyamānesu, kīḷantesu, bahigatesu vā pariyesitvā adisvā gacchato na doso, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotī’’ti evamādiko vinicchayakathāmaggo.Araññaṭṭhakathāsamoti ‘‘yo cārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvā’’tiādinā (vi. vi. 170) yathāvuttaaraññaṭṭhakathāya sadiso,
215.Matanti, approved by kings as "so much should be taken from such and such goods." Seso kathāmaggoti, the rest of the discussion path is the path of decision-making discussion such as, "there is no offense to one who arrives at the toll station and goes without seeing after searching when the toll collectors are sleeping, playing, or have gone out, but the goods become liable." Araññaṭṭhakathāsamoti is similar to the Araññaṭṭhakathā stated as "yo cārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvā"tiādinā (vi. vi. 170),
‘‘Kammaṭṭhānaṃ citte katvā;
‘‘Kammaṭṭhānaṃ citte katvā;
Cintento aññavihito;
Suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ patvā gacche;
Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotevassā’’ti. –
Ādinā nayena vuccamānasadisoyeva. Teneva gatatthatāya idāni na vicārīyatīti adhippāyo.
In this way, it is similar to what is being said. Therefore, the intention is that it is not being considered now because it is understood.
Suṅkaghātakathāvaṇṇanā.
Suṅkaghātakathāvaṇṇanā.
216.‘‘Pāṇo nāma manussapāṇo vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 114)pāḷitoca ‘‘tampi bhujissaṃ harantassa avahāro natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.114)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca paradāsamanussoyeva adhippetoti tameva dassetumāha‘‘antojāta’’ntiādi. Gehadāsiyā kucchimhi dāsassa jātoantojātonāma, taṃ vā. Dhanena kītodhanakkīto,taṃ vā.Dinnaṃ vā pana kenacīti mātulaayyakādīsu yena kenaci dāsaṃ katvā dinnaṃ vā.Dāsanti paccekaṃ sambandhanīyaṃ.Karamarānītaṃ vā dāsanti paravisayaṃ vilumpitvā ānetvā dāsabhāvāya gahitasaṅkhātaṃ karamarānītadāsaṃ vā.Harantassa parājayoti ettha ‘‘corikāya harissāmī’’ti āmasane dukkaṭaṃ, phandāpane thullaccayaṃ āpajjitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi atikkāmayato pārājikaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.
216.Since Pāḷi states "Pāṇo nāma manussapāṇo vuccatī"ti (pārā. 114) and the Aṭṭhakathā statement states "tampi bhujissaṃ harantassa avahāro natthī"ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.114), it is understood that only a slave belonging to another is intended, and to show that, he says ‘‘antojāta’’ntiādi. One born to a slave woman in the house is called antojāto, or that. One bought with wealth is dhanakkīto, or that. Dinnaṃ vā pana kenacīti, or one given as a slave by anyone among maternal uncles, paternal uncles, etc. Dāsanti should be connected individually. Karamarānītaṃ vā dāsanti, or a slave brought by plundering a foreign territory and taken as a slave, known as karamarānītadāsaṃ. Harantassa parājayoti, here, a dukkata results from thinking "I will steal him", a thullaccaya results from agitating, and a pārājika results from moving him even by the space of a hair from the place where he is standing.
217.Bhujissaṃ vāti yassa kassaci manussassa adāsabhūtaṃ.Mānusanti manussajātikaṃ sattaṃ.Āṭhapitanti upanikkhittaṃ.
217.Bhujissaṃ vāti, or one not a slave belonging to someone. Mānusanti, a being of human origin. Āṭhapitanti, deposited.
218.Tanti antojātādīsu dāsesu yaṃ kañci dāsaṃ.Palāyitukāmovāti palāpetukāmo nīharitukāmo. Atha vā taṃ dāsaṃ bhujehi ukkhipitvā ayaṃ palāyitukāmotipi attho gahetabbo.Bhujehīti ubhohi hatthehi.Taṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānatoti tassa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ taṃṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ, tato taṃṭhitaṭṭhānato, corena attanā ṭhitaṭṭhānatoti attho na gahetabboti dassetumevaṃ vuttaṃ.Kiñci saṅkāmetīti kesaggamattampi tato aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ pāpeti.Bhujehi vāti etthavā-saddo vakkhamānapakārantarāpekkho, ‘‘saṅkāmeti vā’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
218.Tanti, any of the slaves, such as one born in the house. Palāyitukāmovāti, wanting to help escape, wanting to take out. Or, it should be understood that it also means lifting that slave with one's arms, thinking, "This one wants to escape." Bhujehīti, with both hands. Taṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānatoti, that standing place is taṃṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ, tato taṃṭhitaṭṭhānato; it is said thus to show that it should not be taken as the thief's own standing place. Kiñci saṅkāmetīti, he moves him even by the space of a hair to another place. Bhujehi vāti, here the vā-particle anticipates another case to be stated, "saṅkāmeti vā"ti should be connected.
219.Tajjetvāti bhayakarena vacanena lesena, iṅgitena vā tāsetvā nentassa tassāti sambandho.Padavāratoti padavārena yuttā thullaccayādayo āpattiyo hontīti yojanā. Paṭhamapadavārayuttā thullaccayāpatti, dutiyapadavārayuttā pārājikāpatti hotīti attho.
219.Tajjetvāti, the connection is that it is of one who takes him away after frightening him with frightening words, tricks, or gestures. Padavāratoti, the meaning is that offenses such as thullaccaya occur depending on the sequence of steps. A thullaccaya offense occurs with the first step sequence, and a pārājika offense occurs with the second step sequence.
220.Hatthādīsūtiādi-saddena kesavatthādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tanti dāsaṃ.Kaḍḍhatopīti ākaḍḍhatopi.Parājayoti ‘‘padavārato’’ti anuvattamānattā paṭhamapadavāre thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapadavāre atikkante pārājikanti attho.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘padavārato yuttā thullaccayādayo āpattiyo hontī’’ti vuttanayo.
220.Hatthādīsūti, ādi-saddena includes hair, clothing, etc. Tanti, the slave. Kaḍḍhatopīti, even of one who drags him. Parājayoti, because "padavārato" is continuing, the meaning is thullaccaya in the first step sequence and pārājika when crossing in the second step sequence. Ayaṃ nayoti, this way is the way stated as "padavārato yuttā thullaccayādayo āpattiyo hontī".
221.Vegasāvāti vegeneva, corassa vacanena kātabbavisesarahitena balavagamanavegenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā anāpattibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti.
221.Vegasāvāti, only by speed, it means by the powerful speed of walking without special actions to be done by the thief's words. By this, he shows the reason for the absence of offense.
222.Saṇikanti mandagatiyā.Vadatīti ‘‘gaccha, yāhi, palāyā’’tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ katheti.Sopi cāti yo mandagatiyā gacchanto evaṃ vutto, sopi ca.
222.Saṇikanti, with slow speed. Vadatīti, he speaks words such as "go, proceed, escape". Sopi cāti, and also he who, while going slowly, is told thus.
223.Palāyitvāti sāmikaṃ pahāya gantvā.Aññanti sāmikāyattaṭṭhānato aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Sāpaṇaṃ vīthisannivesayuttaṃnigamampi vā.Tatoti palāyitvā paviṭṭhagāmādito.Tanti palāyitvā paviṭṭhaṃ taṃ dāsaṃ.
223.Palāyitvāti, having gone abandoning the owner. Aññanti, a place other than the place under the owner's control. Sāpaṇaṃ vīthisannivesayuttaṃ nigamampi vā. Tatoti, from the village etc. entered after escaping. Tanti, that slave who has escaped and entered.
Pāṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Pāṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
224.Theyyāti theyyacittena.Sappakaraṇḍanti sappasayanapeḷaṃ.Yathāvatthunti thullaccayamāha.Ṭhānatoti sappapeḷāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato.Cāvaneti kesaggamattātikkame.
224.Theyyāti, with a thieving mind. Sappakaraṇḍanti, a snake-carrying basket. Yathāvatthunti, he refers to thullaccaya. Ṭhānatoti, from the place of the snake basket. Cāvaneti, upon crossing even by the space of a hair.
225.Karaṇḍanti sappapeḷaṃ.Ugghāṭetvāti vivaritvā.Karaṇḍatalatoti antopeḷāya talato.Naṅguṭṭheti naṅguṭṭhapariyante.
225.Karaṇḍanti, a snake basket. Ugghāṭetvāti, having opened. Karaṇḍatalatoti, from the bottom of the inner basket. Naṅguṭṭheti, at the tail end.
226.Ghaṃsitvāti peḷāpasse phusāpetvā.Sappakaraṇḍassa mukhavaṭṭitoti karaṇḍapuṭamukhavaṭṭito. Tassa naṅguṭṭhe muttamatteti yojanā.
226.Ghaṃsitvāti, having caused it to touch the side of the basket. Sappakaraṇḍassa mukhavaṭṭitoti, from the edge of the mouth of the basket. The construction is that his tail is released.
227.Nāmatoti nāmena, nāmaṃ vatvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Pakkosantassāti avhāyantassa.Tassāti pakkosakassa.
227.Nāmatoti, by name; it means having spoken the name. Pakkosantassāti, of one who is calling out. Tassāti, of the one who is calling out.
228.Tathāti karaṇḍaṃ vivaritvā. Maṇḍūkamūsikānaṃ ravaṃ katvā nāmena pakkosantassāti yojanā.Vā-saddena lājāvikiraṇaaccharapahārādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
228.Tathāti, having opened the basket. The connection is, of one who, having made the sound of frogs or mice, calls out by name. The vā-particle includes scattering parched grain, striking with dice, etc.
229.Mukhanti sappakaraṇḍassa mukhaṃ.Evameva ca karontassāti maṇḍūkasaññaṃ, mūsikasaññaṃ katvā vā lājā vikiritvā vā accharaṃ paharitvā vā nāmaṃ vatvā pakkosantassa.Yena kenacīti vuttanīhārato yena vā tena vā.
229.Mukhanti, the mouth of the snake basket. Evameva ca karontassāti, of one who, having made a frog sign, a mouse sign, or having scattered parched grain or struck with dice, calls out having spoken the name. Yena kenacīti, by whatever among the stated removals.
230.Na pakkosati ceti yathāvuttanayena yojetvā nāmaṃ vatvā na pakkosati.Tassāti karaṇḍamukhavivarakassa bhikkhussa.
230. Na pakkosati ce means "if he does not call," it should be construed according to the method stated earlier, and he does not call, having stated the name. Tassā refers to that bhikkhu of the karaṇḍamukha.
Apadakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Apada Story.
231.Hatthinti hatthimhi, bhummatthe eva upayogavacanaṃ.
231. Hatthi means "on the elephant," where the locative case is used in the sense of location.
232.Sālāyanti hatthisālāyaṃ. Vasati etthātivatthu,rājāgāraṃ, tassa antoantovatthu,antorājagehanti attho.Aṅgaṇeti antorājaṅgaṇe.Pi-saddo ‘‘antonagare’’ti avuttampi sampiṇḍeti.Vatthu cātica-saddena aṅgaṇaṃ samuccinoti.Sakalaṃ aṅgaṇaṃ ṭhānanti hatthino vicaraṇayoggaṃ aṅgaṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha, sakalasālāti gahetabbaṃ.
232. Sālāya means "in the elephant stable." Vatthu means a dwelling; antovatthu means the interior of the royal residence, or the inner royal palace. Aṅgaṇe means "in the inner royal courtyard." The word pi includes what was not said, namely, "in the inner city." The word ca in vatthu cā combines it with aṅgaṇa. Sakalaṃ aṅgaṇaṃ ṭhāna refers to the courtyard space suitable for the elephant to roam, and the entire stable should be included.
233.Abaddhassāti yathāvuttasālārājavatthaṅgaṇāpekkhāya vuttaṃ. Abaddhassa hi hatthino sakalasālādayo ṭhānaṃ, tadatikkame ṭhānācāvanaṃ hotīti attho.Hīti avadhāraṇe vā.‘‘Baddhassa hī’’ti yojanāya visesatthova daṭṭhabbo, baddhassa panāti vuttaṃ hoti.Baddhassa panāti sālādīsu sannihitassa pana.Ṭhitaṭṭhānañcāti sālādīsu ṭhitaṭṭhānañca, catūhi pādehi akkantaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti.Bandhanañcāti gīvāya vā pacchā pādadvayabandhanavalaye vā ubhayattha vā bandhanaṭṭhānañca.Tasmāti yasmā ṭhitaṭṭhānañca bandhanañca ṭhānanti cha vā pañca vā ṭhānāni labbhanti, tasmā.Tesaṃṭhānānaṃ.Kārayeti ettha ‘‘āpatti’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhatīti.Haratoti hatthisālādito corikāya harantassa.Kārayeti āmasane dukkaṭaṃ, ṭhānabhedagaṇanāya yāva pacchimaṭṭhānā purimesu thullaccayāni, antimaṭṭhānā kesaggamattampi cāvane pārājikaṃ kāreyyāti attho.
233. Abaddhassā means it is said in relation to the aforementioned stable, royal residence, and courtyard. For an unchained elephant, the entire stable and so on are a place, and exceeding that is a removal from the place, this is the meaning. Hī is for emphasis. The specific meaning should be seen by construing ‘‘Baddhassa hī’’, it is said meaning "but for the chained elephant." Baddhassa panā means but for the one chained near the stable and so on. Ṭhitaṭṭhānañcā means the place where it stands in the stable and so on, meaning the place trodden by the four feet. Bandhanañcā means the place of binding, either on the neck or on the hoops binding the two hind feet, or both. Tasmā means because six or five places are obtained as ṭhitaṭṭhāna and bandhana are places. Tesaṃ means of those places. Here, kāraye means "causes," it is understood by implication that "an offense" occurs. Harato means "when stealing" from the elephant stable etc. Kāraye means touching incurs a dukkaṭa, according to the calculation of place divisions, the thullaccaya offenses apply to the earlier places up to the final place, and causing removal from the final place, even by a hair's breadth, incurs a pārājika offense.
234.Ṭhitaṭṭhānanti catūhi pādehi akkantaṭṭhānaṃ, idañca abaddhahatthiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Baddhassa vinicchayo sālādīsu baddhassa vuttavinicchayasadisoti gatatthatāya na vutto.
234. Ṭhitaṭṭhāna means the place trodden by the four feet, and this is said with reference to an unchained elephant. The judgment for a chained elephant is similar to the judgment already stated for the chained one in the stable etc., so it is not stated due to having the same meaning.
235.Ekaṃ ṭhānanti sayitaṭṭhānamattaṃ.Tasminti gaje.Tassāti bhikkhussa. Turaṅgamahisādīsu dvipade ca bahuppade ca.
235. Ekaṃ ṭhāna means only the sleeping place. Tasmi means "on that" elephant. Tassā means "of that" bhikkhu. For horses, buffaloes, and so on, whether biped or multiped.
236.Eseva nayo ñeyyo, vattabbaṃ kiñcipi natthīti yojanā. Tatthaturaṅgāassā.Mahisālulāyā.Ādi-saddena gogadrabhaoṭṭhādicatuppadānaṃ saṅgaho.Natthi kiñcipi vattabbanti assasālārājāgāraṅgaṇabahinagarādīsu abandhitasayanaassādīnaṃ ṭhānabhedo yathāvuttasadisattā na vutto.
236. This same method should be known; there is nothing to be said, is the construction. Here, turaṅgā means horses. Mahisā means buffaloes. The word ādi includes quadrupeds such as cows, donkeys, and camels. Natthi kiñcipi vattabba means the distinction of places such as horse stables, royal residences, courtyards, outer cities, etc., for unchained sleeping horses and so on, is not stated because it is similar to what has already been said.
Bandhitvā ṭhapitaassassa pana sace so catūsu pādesu baddho hoti, bandhanānaṃ, khurānañca gaṇanāya aṭṭha ṭhānāni, sace mukhe ca baddho hoti, nava ṭhānāni, mukheyeva baddho, pañca ṭhānānīti ṭhānabhedo ca tatheva sasamigasūkarādicatuppadesu bandhitvā ṭhapitesu baddhabaddhaṭṭhānehi saha catūhi pādehi akkantaṭṭhānavasena labbhamāno ṭhānabhedo ca gomahisesu baddhesu evameva labbhamāno ṭhānabhedo ca vajādīsu padesesu pavesitesu dvāresu rukkhasūciyo apanetvā vā anapanetvā vā nāmaṃ vatvā vā avatvā vā pakkosantassa, sākhābhaṅgatiṇādīni dassetvā pakkositvā vā apakkositvā vā palobhentassa tāsetvā nikkhamantassa sappakaraṇḍake sappassa vuttanayena labbhamāno viseso ca netabbo. Iha sabbattha ṭhānabhedesu bahukesupi upantaṭṭhānesu thullaccayaṃ, antaṭṭhāne pārājikaṃ vuttasadisanti imassa sabbassa vinicchayassa ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti imināva gatattā, āhaṭato aviññāyamānassa kassaci visesassābhāvā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi kiñcipi vattabba’’nti.
But if a horse is tied and kept, if it is tied by the four feet, there are eight places by counting the bindings and hooves; if it is also tied by the mouth, there are nine places; if tied only by the mouth, there are five places. Similarly, the distinction of places obtainable in quadrupeds such as deer, pigs, and so on, when tied and kept, based on the places where they are tied and the places trodden by their four feet, and the distinction of places obtainable similarly in tied cows and buffaloes, and the distinction obtainable in enclosures and so on, when they are led into those places, either after removing the wooden pins at the doors or without removing them, whether calling the name or without calling it, showing branches, grass, and so on, or enticing them after showing them, or frightening them into exiting, and the distinction obtainable according to the method stated for a snake in a snake basket, should be applied. Here, in all cases, even in many distinctions of places, a thullaccaya is incurred in the proximate places, and a pārājika in the final place, as has been stated. Because this entire judgment is covered by this ‘‘eseva nayo’’, and because there is no specific detail that could be brought forward that is not already known, it is said, ‘‘natthi kiñcipi vattabba’’.
Dvipadepīti ‘‘dvipadaṃ nāma manussā pakkhajātā’’ti (pārā. 115)pāḷiyaṃvuttā manussā ca mayūrādilomapakkhā ca vagguliādicammapakkhā ca bhamarādiaṭṭhipakkhā cāti evamādike satte ca.Bahuppadeti ‘‘bahuppadaṃ nāma vicchikā satapadī uccāliṅgapāṇakā’’ti (pārā. 117)pāḷiyaṃvuttabahuppadasatte cāti attho.
Dvipadepī means also in beings with two feet, such as humans and feathered birds like peacocks mentioned in the pāḷi ("dvipadaṃ nāma manussā pakkhajātā" (pārā. 115)), and also leather-winged creatures like bats, and bone-winged creatures like bees, and so on. Bahuppade means also in multiped creatures mentioned in the pāḷi ("bahuppadaṃ nāma vicchikā satapadī uccāliṅgapāṇakā" (pārā. 117)), such as scorpions, centipedes, and so on.
Ettāvatā pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsapidahanatthaṃ padabhājane vuttabhūmaṭṭhāditiṃsavinicchayamātikākathāsu pañcavīsati mātikākathā dassetvā avasiṭṭhāsu pañcamātikākathāsu saṃvidāvahāro, saṅketakammaṃ, nimittakammanti mātikattayakathā paṭhamameva adinnādānavinicchayasambhārabhūtānaṃ pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ dassanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā –
Thus, having shown twenty-five topic-stories among the topic-story explanations of the thirty judgments beginning with "bhūmaṭṭha" stated in the section on division of terms, for the purpose of providing a slight opportunity to wicked bhikkhus, the three topic-stories of communication of agreement, conventional act, and sign act, among the remaining five topic-stories, stand in the place of showing the twenty-five behaviors that are the equipment for the judgment of ungiven taking, which were given first—
‘‘Pubbasahapayogo ca, saṃvidāharaṇampi ca;
‘‘Pubbasahapayogo ca, saṃvidāharaṇampi ca;
Saṅketakammaṃ nemittaṃ, pubbayogādipañcaka’’nti. (vi. vi. 42) –
Iminā saṅgahitāti taṃ pahāya avasese ocarako, oṇirakkhakoti kathādvaye ocaraṇakakathāya āṇattikappayogattā, tañca oṇirakkhakena kariyamānaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ sāhatthikena vā āṇattikena vā payogena hotīti tassāpi ‘‘sāhatthāṇattiko cevā’’ti sāhatthikapañcake paṭhamameva saṅgahitattā ca thalaṭṭhavehāsaṭṭhakathādīsu saṅgahitattā ca tañca dvayaṃ na vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
Because they are included by this, having omitted that, the two stories of ocarako and oṇirakkho, because the story of patrolling is the application of an order, and that removal from a place done by the oṇirakkho occurs by means of a self-performed act or an ordered act, and that too is included first in the five self-performed acts beginning with "sāhatthāṇattiko cevā," and because it is included in stories such as the thalaṭṭhavehāsaṭṭhakathā, those two should be understood as not stated.
pāḷiyaṃvutto corāpanapuriso ‘‘ocarako’’ti veditabbo. Ocaratītiocarako,tattha tattha gantvā anto anupavisatīti vuttaṃ hotīti. ‘‘Oṇirakkho nāma āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento’’ti (pārā. 118)pāḷiyaṃvutto muhuttaṃ attani ṭhapitassa parabhaṇḍassa rakkhako ‘‘oṇirakkho’’ti veditabbo. Oṇitaṃ rakkhatītioṇirakkho,yo parena attano vasanaṭṭhāne ābhataṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘idaṃ tāva bhante muhuttaṃ oloketha, yāvāhaṃ idaṃ nāma kiccaṃ katvā āgacchāmī’’ti vutto rakkhati, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
The thief-searcher mentioned in the pāḷi should be understood as "ocarako." Ocarako means one who patrols, meaning it is said that he goes here and there, entering inside. The protector of another's goods, kept in one's possession for a moment, mentioned in the pāḷi ("Oṇirakkho nāma āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento" (pārā. 118)), should be understood as "oṇirakkho." Oṇirakkho means one who protects what is entrusted, which is an epithet for one who, when another brings goods to his dwelling and says, "Please look after this for a moment, venerable sir, until I do such-and-such a task and return," protects it.
Dvicatubahuppadakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Two-footed, Four-footed, and Multiped Story.
237.‘‘Pañcahi ākārehi adinnaṃ ādiyantassa āpatti pārājikassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 122) nayenapāḷiyaṃāgatāni pañcaṅgāni saṅgahetumāha‘‘paresa’’ntiādi. Tattha‘‘paresaṃ santakaṃ dhana’’nti iminā paramanussasantakatā,‘‘paresanti vijānitvā’’ti iminā parāyattabhāvassa jānanaṃ,‘‘garuka’’nti iminā pādaṃ vā atirekapādaṃ vā agghanakatā,‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti iminā theyyacittatā,‘‘ṭhānā cāvetī’’ti iminā pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññatarassa samaṅgitāti evamettha pañcaṅgasaṅgaho veditabbo.
237. He says ‘‘paresa’’ and so on, to include the five factors that come in the pāḷi in the manner that begins with "Pañcahi ākārehi adinnaṃ ādiyantassa āpatti pārājikassā" (pārā. 122). Here, ‘‘paresaṃ santakaṃ dhana’’ means ownership by another person, ‘‘paresanti vijānitvā’’ means knowing that it belongs to another, ‘‘garuka’’ means being worth a pada or more than a pada, ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ means having a thieving intention, ‘‘ṭhānā cāvetī’’ means being associated with one of the twenty-five behaviors; thus, the inclusion of the five factors should be understood here.
238.Ettāvatā tiṃsamātikākathāvinicchayaṃ saṅgahetvā idāni ‘‘anāpatti sasaññissa vissāsaggāhe tāvakālike petapariggahe tiracchānagatapariggahe paṃsukūlasaññissā’’tiādinā (pārā. 131) nayenapāḷiyaṃāgataṃ anāpattivāraṃ saṅgahetumāha‘‘anāpattī’’tiādi. Tatthasasaññissāti parasantakampi ‘‘sasantaka’’nti suddhasaññāya gaṇhantassa anāpattīti sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ gahitaṃ sāmikehi disvā yācite adentassa ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena pārājikaṃ.
238. Thus, having summarized the judgment of the thirty topic-stories, now, he says ‘‘anāpattī’’ and so on, to summarize the non-offense section that comes in the pāḷi in the manner that begins with "anāpatti sasaññissa vissāsaggāhe tāvakālike petapariggahe tiracchānagatapariggahe paṃsukūlasaññissā" (pārā. 131). Here, sasaññissā means there is no offense for one who takes even what belongs to another with the pure perception that it is one's own, and this should be applied everywhere. If, having taken it in this way, the owners see it and request it back, and he does not give it, a pārājika is incurred by the removal of both burdens.
Tiracchānapariggaheti tiracchānehi pariggahitavatthumhi. Sacepi hi nāgagaruḷamāṇavakamāṇavikāpi manussavesena āpaṇaṃ pasāretvā nisinnā honti, bhikkhu ca theyyacittena tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhāti, anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sīhabyagghadīpipabhutīhi vāḷamigehi gahitagocaraṃ paṭhamaṃ mocāpentassa taṃ muñcitvā attanopi hiṃsanato thokaṃ khāyite vārentassa doso natthi. Senādīsu tiracchānesu yena kenaci gahitaṃ gocaraṃ mocāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Vuttañhetaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘senādayopi āmisaṃ gahetvā gacchante pātāpetvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131). Evameva dhammanideḍḍubhādīhi gahitamaṇḍūkādayo jīvitarakkhanatthāya mocāpetuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
Tiracchānapariggahe means in an object possessed by an animal. Even if nāgas, garuḷas, māṇavakas, and māṇavikās are sitting spreading out goods for sale in the guise of humans, and a bhikkhu takes their property with a thieving intention, it is said that there is no offense. There is no fault for one who first causes to be released, and then prevents, a wild animal such as a lion, tiger, or leopard from slightly devouring food that has been seized, as it also involves harming oneself. It is permissible to cause the release of food seized by animals in the army etc., from whatever animal it may be. This was stated in the aṭṭhakathā, "It is permissible to knock down and take food that animals in the army etc. are taking away" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131). Similarly, it should be understood that it is permissible to cause the release of frogs etc. seized by dhammanideḍḍubhas and so on for the purpose of protecting life.
Tāvakālikaggāheti ‘‘paṭikarissāmī’’ti tāvakālikaṃ gaṇhantassa evaṃ gahitaṃ sace bhaṇḍasāmiko puggalo vā gaṇo vā ‘‘tumheva gaṇhathā’’ti anujāneyya, vaṭṭati. Nānujāneyya, na gaṇheyya, dātabbaṃ. Adentassa ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghasantakaṃ pana paṭidātumeva vaṭṭatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
Tāvakālikaggāhe means there is no offense for one who takes something temporarily, thinking, "I will return it." If, having taken it in this way, the owner of the goods, whether an individual or a group, permits, "You may take it," it is permissible. If he does not permit, he should not take it; it should be given back. If he does not give it back, a pārājika is incurred by the removal of both burdens. It is said in the aṭṭhakathā, "But what belongs to the Saṅgha should certainly be returned."
Vissāsaggāheti ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa vissāsaṃ gahetuṃ, sandiṭṭho ca hoti, sambhatto ca, ālapito ca, jīvati ca, gahite ca attamano hotī’’ti (mahāva. 356)pāḷiyaṃāgataṃ pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa santakaṃ vissāsena gaṇhantassa gahaṇe vinicchayo yathāvuttasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ veditabbo. Yathāhasamantapāsādikāyaṃ–
Vissāsaggāhe means there is no offense for one who takes property on trust belonging to one who is endowed with five factors that come in the pāḷi: "I allow, bhikkhus, to take on trust from one who is endowed with five factors: he is seen, he is intimate, he is spoken to, he is alive, and he is pleased when it is taken" (mahāva. 356). The judgment for taking should be understood according to the explanation of the aforementioned sutta. As it is said in the Samantapāsādikā—
Tattha sandiṭṭhoti diṭṭhamattakamitto. Sambhattoti daḷhamitto. Ālapitoti ‘‘mama santakaṃ yaṃ icchasi, taṃ gaṇheyyāsi, āpucchitvā gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthī’’ti vutto. Jīvatīti anuṭṭhānaseyyāya sayitopi yāva jīvitindriyupacchedaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Gahite ca attamanoti gahite tuṭṭhacitto hoti, evarūpassa santakaṃ ‘‘gahite me attamano bhavissatī’’ti jānantena gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Anavasesapariyādānavasena cetāni pañcaṅgāni vuttāni, vissāsaggāho pana tīhaṅgehi ruhati – sandiṭṭho, jīvati, gahite attamano, sambhatto, jīvati, gahite attamano, ālapito, jīvati, gahite attamanoti.
There, sandiṭṭho means a friend by mere sight. Sambhatto means a close friend. Ālapitoti means one who has been told, "You may take whatever you want of my property; there is no need to ask permission." Jīvatīti means even if he is lying down due to not getting up, he has not yet reached the cessation of the life faculty. Gahite ca attamanoti means he is delighted when it is taken; it is permissible to take the property of such a person, knowing that "he will be pleased when it is taken." These five factors are stated in the sense of complete enumeration, but taking on trust thrives with three factors: seen, alive, and pleased when taken; intimate, alive, and pleased when taken; spoken to, alive, and pleased when taken.
Yo pana jīvati, na ca gahite attamano hoti, tassa santakaṃ vissāsaggāhena gahitampi puna dātabbaṃ. Dadamānena ca matakadhanaṃ tāva ye tassa dhane issarā gahaṭṭhā vā pabbajitā vā, tesaṃ dātabbaṃ. Anattamanassa santakaṃ tasseva dātabbaṃ. Yo pana paṭhamaṃyeva ‘‘suṭṭhu kataṃ tayā mama santakaṃ gaṇhantenā’’ti vacībhedena vā cittuppādamattena vā anumoditvā pacchā kenaci kāraṇena kupito paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yopi adātukāmova, cittena pana adhivāseti, na kiñci vadati, sopi puna paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yo pana ‘‘mayā tumhākaṃ santakaṃ gahitaṃ vā paribhuttaṃ vā’’ti vutte ‘‘gahitaṃ vā hotu paribhuttaṃ vā, mayā pana taṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ pākatikaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadati, ayaṃ paccāharāpetuṃ labhatīti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131).
But if he is alive but not pleased when it is taken, even what is taken on trust of his property should be given back. When giving it back, the property of a dead person should be given to those who have authority over his property, whether laypeople or renunciants. The property of one who is displeased should be given back to that same person. But one who, having approved at the very beginning with a verbal expression or with a mere thought, saying, "It is well done by you in taking my property," cannot later demand it back due to some reason. And one who is unwilling to give it back but acquiesces with his mind, saying nothing, he also cannot demand it back. But one who, when told, "My property has been taken or used by you," says, "Let it be taken or used, but I have kept that aside for some purpose, it is fitting to make that natural," this one is able to demand it back (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131).
Petapariggahetipettivisayuppannā ca maritvā tasmiṃyeva attabhāve nibbattā ca cātumahārājikādayo devā ca imasmiṃ atthe petā nāma, tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhantassa ca anāpattīti attho. Sacepi hi sakko devarājā āpaṇaṃ pasāretvā nisinno hoti, dibbacakkhuko ca bhikkhu taṃ ñatvā satasahassagghanakampi vatthaṃ tassa viravantasseva acchinditvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Devapūjatthaṃ rukkhādīsu maṭṭhavatthādīni gaṇhato niddosatāya kimeva vattabbaṃ. Paṃsukūlasaññāya gaṇhatopi anāpatti. Tathā gahitampi sace sassāmikaṃ hoti, sāmike āharāpente dātabbanti upalakkhaṇato veditabbaṃ.
Petapariggaheti means also that there is no offense for taking the property of petas, which means beings born in the realm of the dead and also devas of the Cātumahārājika realm and so on who are reborn in that same existence in this context. Even if Sakka, the king of the gods, is sitting spreading out goods for sale, and a bhikkhu with divine vision knows it and may seize and take even a garment worth a hundred thousand, while he is writhing. What more need be said about freedom from fault for one who takes sacrificial cloths and so on on trees etc. for the purpose of worshipping devas. There is also no offense for one who takes with the perception of rags from a dust heap. It should be understood by implication that even what is taken in that way, if it has an owner, should be given back when the owner demands it.
239.Etthāti dutiyapārājikavinicchaye.Ca-saddena avuttasamuccayatthena avasesasikkhāpadavinicchaye saṅgaṇhāti.Vattabboti mātikaṭṭhakathādīsu viya avasāne kathetabbo.Pāḷimuttavinicchayoti samuṭṭhānādiko taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapāḷiyaṃ anāgato upālittherādīhi ṭhapito vinicchayo.
239. Etthā means in this second pārājika judgment. The word ca gathers the remaining training rule judgments with the sense of unstated aggregation. Vattabbo means should be spoken at the end, as in the topic-story explanations and so on. Pāḷimuttavinicchayo means the judgment established by elders such as Upāli, which did not come in the Pāḷi of that particular training rule, such as origin etc.
240.Parājitānekamalenāti aparimeyyakappakoṭisatasahassopacitapāramitāsambhūtena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānena āsavakkhayañāṇena saha vāsanāya samucchedappahānena parājitā rāgādayo anekakilesamalā yena so parājitānekamalo, tena parājitānekamalena. Jinena yaṃ dutiyaṃ pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ,assadutiyapārājikassa ca attho mayā samāsena vutto.Asesenaativitthāranayenavattuṃtassa atthaṃ kathetuṃ ko hi samatthoti yojanā. Etthaca-saddo paṭhamapārājikasamuccayattho.Hi-saddo avadhāraṇe, tena asesena tadatthaṃ vattuṃ samattho nattheva aññatra tathāgatāti dīpeti.
240. Parājitānekamalenā means by him who has vanquished countless defilements, whose rāga and other defilements are vanquished by the destruction of the defilements of the āsavas, which is the basis of the knowledge of omniscience, which is produced by the accumulation of hundreds of thousands of millions of aeons of perfections, along with the eradicating abandonment of tendencies. The meaning of assa, that second pārājika, which was spoken by the Victor, the second pārājika, has been spoken by me in brief. Who indeed is capable of vattuṃ asesena, of speaking its meaning in a very detailed way? Here, the word ca is for aggregating the first pārājika. The word hi is for emphasis, therefore, it indicates that there is no one capable of speaking its meaning completely except the Tathāgata.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāyā
Dutiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Second Pārājika is Concluded.
Tatiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
The Commentary on the Third Pārājika
241-2.Evamatisukhumanayasamākulaṃ dutiyapārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni tatiyapārājikaṃ dassetumāha‘‘manussajāti’’ntiādi. Tatthamanussajātinti jāyatīti jāti, rūpārūpapaṭisandhi, manussesu jāti yassa so manussajāti, manussajātiko manussaviggahoti vuttaṃ hoti, taṃ manussajātiṃ.
241-2. Having shown the second pārājika, which is entangled with such subtle aspects, he now says "manussajāti" etc., in order to show the third pārājika. There, manussajāti means: jāti, because it is born, rebirth of form and formless (existence); he who has birth in humans is manussajāti, meaning a human being, that manussajāti.
manussesūti kusalākusalamanassa ussannattā manussasaṅkhātesu naresu. ‘‘Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppanna’’nti (pārā. 172)padabhājanevuttanayena mātukucchimhi paṭhamaṃ uppajjamānapaṭisandhicittañca taṃsampayuttavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārasaṅkhātakhandhattayañca taṃsahajātāni –
Manussesu: because of the excess of skillful and unskillful mind in beings called humans. The first mind arising in the mother's womb and the three aggregates consisting of feeling, perception, and mental formations associated with it, as well as those born together with it, in accordance with the method stated in the padabhājana "Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppanna" (pārā. 172)—
‘‘Tilatelassa yathā bindu, sappimaṇḍo anāvilo;
‘‘Just as a drop of sesame oil, a clear globule of ghee;
Similarly, the appearance of form is called ‘kalala’.’’ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172; vibha. aṭṭha. 26) —
‘‘jātī’’ti gahitā.‘‘Yassā’’ti iminā aññapadena ‘‘yāva maraṇakālā etthantare eso manussaviggaho nāmā’’ti (pārā. 172)padabhājanevuttanayena paṭhamabhavaṅgato paṭṭhāya cuticittāsannabhavaṅgapariyantasantānasaṅkhātasatto gahito. Iminā manussaviggahassa paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya pārājikavatthubhāvaṃ dasseti.
are "jāti" taken. With the different word "yassa", the being consisting of the continuity from the first bhavaṅga until the cuti-citta near bhavaṅga, in accordance with the method stated in the padabhājana, "Yaava maraṇakālā etthantare eso manussaviggaho nāmā" (pārā. 172), is taken. By this, he shows the state of being an object of pārājika from the rebirth of the human being onwards.
Jānantoti ‘‘satto aya’’nti jānanto.Jīvitā yo viyojayeti yo bhikkhu jīvitindriyā viyojeyya voropeyya, tassa jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindeyya uparodheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāhapadabhājane‘‘jīvitā voropeyyāti jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodhetī’’ti (pārā. 172).
Jānanto: knowing "this is a being." Jīvitā yo viyojaye: whichever bhikkhu would separate, remove, or cut off the life faculty, would obstruct his life faculty. Therefore, the padabhājana says, "jīvitā voropeyyāti jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodheti" (pārā. 172): to remove from life means to cut off or obstruct the life faculty.
Tañca jīvitindriyaṃ rūpārūpavasena duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha arūpajīvitindriyaṃ aviggahattā upakkamavisayaṃ na hoti. Rūpajīvitindriyupacchedena pana tadāyattavuttitāya taṃsamakālameva occhijjamānatāya ettha sāmaññena ubhayampi gahetabbaṃ. Idañca atītānāgataṃ na gahetabbaṃ tassa avijjamānattā. Upakkamavisayārahaṃ pana paccuppannameva gahetabbaṃ. Tañca khaṇasantatiaddhāvasena tividhaṃ hoti.
And that life faculty is twofold, in terms of form and formlessness. There, the formless life faculty is not subject to action because it is without a body. However, with the cutting off of the form life faculty, both should generally be taken here, since its function depends on that and it is cut off at the same time. And the past and future should not be taken here, because it does not exist. However, only the present, which is worthy of action, should be taken. And that is threefold in terms of moment, continuity, and duration.
khaṇapaccuppannaṃnāma. Taṃ sarasabhaṅgabhūtattā sayaṃ bhijjamānaṃ upakkamasādhiyaṃ vināsavantaṃ na hoti. Ātape ṭhatvā gabbhaṃ paviṭṭhassa andhakāravigamantarañca sītena ovarakaṃ paviṭṭhassa visabhāgautusamuṭṭhānena sītapanūdantarañca rūpasantatisantatipaccuppannaṃnāma. Paṭisandhicutīnamantarāḷappavatti khandhasantatiaddhāpaccuppannaṃnāma. Imasmiṃ dvaye upakkamasambhavo, taṃvasena upacchijjamānaṃ jīvitaṃ santānaparihānipaccayabhāvato santatiaddhāpaccuppannadvayaṃ yathāparicchinnakālamappatvā upakkamavasena antarāyeva nirujjhati, tasmā santatiaddhāpaccuppannarūpajīvitindriyañca taṃnirodhena nirujjhamānaarūpajīvitindriyañcāti ubhayaṃ ettha ‘‘jīvitā’’ti gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Idameva sandhāyāhapadabhājane‘‘santatiṃ vikopetī’’ti (pārā. 172).
Khaṇapaccuppannaṃ (momentary present): Because it is of a dissolving nature, it is not destructible by action, since it dissolves by itself. Santatipaccuppannaṃ (continuous present): the interval of the disappearance of darkness for one who has entered a room after standing in the sun, and the interval of the removal of cold for one who has entered a warm room from the cold. Addhāpaccuppannaṃ (durational present): the continuity of aggregates occurring between rebirth and death. In these two, there is the possibility of action. Because life, which is being cut off in that way, is a condition for the decline of continuity, the two, continuity and durational present, cease in between by way of action without reaching their allotted time. Therefore, it should be understood that both the form life faculty of continuity and duration and the formless life faculty ceasing with its cessation are taken here as "jīvitā". With this in mind, the padabhājana says "santatiṃ vikopeti" (pārā. 172): he disrupts the continuity.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) pāṇapāṇātipātapāṇātipātīpāṇātipātappayogānaṃ vibhāgo dassito. Tatthapāṇoti vohārato satto, paramatthato upacchijjamānaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, taṃ ‘‘jīvitā’’ti iminā vuttaṃ.Pāṇātipātonāma vadhakacetanā, so ca ‘‘viyojaye’’ti iminā sandassito.Pāṇātipātīnāma puggalo, so ca ‘‘yo’’ti iminā sandassito.Pāṇātipātappayogopana –
In the aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172), the distinction between pāṇa, pāṇātipāta, pāṇātipātī, and pāṇātipātappayoga is shown. There, pāṇo means a being in conventional terms, and the life faculty being cut off in ultimate terms, that is stated by "jīvitā". Pāṇātipāto means the intention to kill, and that is indicated by "viyojaye". Pāṇātipātī means a person, and that is indicated by "yo". However, pāṇātipātappayogo—
‘‘Vuttā pāṇātipātassa;
‘‘The applications of killing
Have been spoken of as six by the great seer’’—
Ādinā nayena idheva vakkhamānavibhāgattā vakkhamānanayeneva daṭṭhabbo.
Should be seen according to the method to be spoken of, since the division will be spoken of here itself in the manner beginning with this.
Assāti manussajātikassa. ‘‘Hatthapāse’’ti pāṭhaseso.Hatthapāsonāma samīpoti.Assāti samīpasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ.Satthanti ettha jīvitavihiṃ sanupakaraṇabhāvena sammatā dhārāvantaasiādi ca dhārārahitayaṭṭhibhindivālalaguḷādi ca upalakkhaṇavasena gahetabbā. Sasati hiṃsatīti satthaṃ. Tenevāhapadabhājane‘‘asiṃ vā sattiṃ vā bhindivālaṃ vā laguḷaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā satthaṃ vā visaṃ vā rajjuṃ vā’’ti. Idhāvuttaṃ karapālikāchurikādi samukhaṃ ‘‘satthaṃ vā’’ti iminā saṅgahitaṃ.Nikkhipeyyāti yathā bhogahetuṃ labhati, tathā upanikkhipeyya, attavadhāya icchitakkhaṇe yathā gaṇhāti, tathā samīpe teneva cittena ṭhapeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā thāvarappayogo sandassito.
Assā: of the human being. "Hatthapāse" is the remainder of the reading. Hatthapāso means nearby. Assā: the word sāmi in the sense of proximity. Satthaṃ: here, sharp swords etc., which are agreed upon as instruments for harming life, and blunt sticks, knives, stones, clubs etc., should be taken by way of indication. Satthaṃ, because it harms. Therefore, the padabhājana says, "asiṃ vā sattiṃ vā bhindivālaṃ vā laguḷaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā satthaṃ vā visaṃ vā rajjuṃ vā": whether a sword, or a lance, or a knife, or a club, or a stone, or a weapon, or poison, or a rope. The karapālikā, churikā, etc., mentioned here are included directly by "satthaṃ vā". Nikkhipeyya: just as he obtains the cause for enjoyment, he should place it nearby, he should place it near with that same thought, just as he takes it at the desired moment for his own killing. By this, he shows the fixed application.
padabhājanevuttattā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, yo tvaṃ na labhasi paṇītabhojanāni bhuñjitu’’miccādinā nayena maraṇatthāya jīvite avaṇṇaṃ vadanto ca ‘‘tvaṃ khosi upāsaka katakalyāṇo akatapāpo, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo, ito tvaṃ kālakato vividhavihaṅgamavikūjite paramasurabhikusumabhūsitataruvaranicite paramaratikaralaḷitagatibhāsitavilapitasurayuvatigaṇavicarite varanandane accharāsaṅghaparivārito vicarissasī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇatthāya maraṇānisaṃsaṃ dassento ca ‘‘maraṇe guṇaṃ vadeyya’’icceva vuccati.
Saying words disparaging life for the purpose of death, in the manner of "kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, yo tvaṃ na labhasi paṇītabhojanāni bhuñjitu" because it is stated in the padabhājana, and showing the advantage of death for the purpose of death, in the manner of "tvaṃ khosi upāsaka katakalyāṇo akatapāpo, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo, ito tvaṃ kālakato vividhavihaṅgamavikūjite paramasurabhikusumabhūsitataruvaranicite paramaratikaralaḷitagatibhāsitavilapitasurayuvatigaṇavicarite varanandane accharāsaṅghaparivārito vicarissasī", is called "maraṇe guṇaṃ vadeyya".
padabhājanevuttasatthaharaṇāni ca avuttampi sobbhanarakapapātādīsu papatanañcāti evamādikaṃ maraṇūpāyaṃ ācikkheyya. ‘‘Hoti ayampī’’ti padacchedo,apīti pubbe vuttadvayaṃ samuccinoti.Dvedhā bhinnasilā viya asandheyyovaso ñeyyoti dvidhā bhinnapāsāṇo viya bhagavato paṭipattipaṭivedhasāsanadvayena so paccuppanne attabhāve sandhātumasakkuṇeyyovāti ñātabboti attho.
He should describe a means of death, such as the means of taking weapons stated in the padabhājana and the unstated falling into a pit of glowing embers or a precipice. "Hoti ayampī" is the word division. Api includes the previously stated two. Dvedhā bhinnasilā viya asandheyyova so ñeyyo: he should be known as one who, like a rock split in two, is unable to be rejoined in the present existence by the two, the practice and the realization, of the Blessed One's Teaching, is the meaning.
243.Thāvarādayotiādi-saddena vijjāmayaiddhimayapayogadvayaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.
243.Thāvarādayo: with the ādi-word, the two applications of knowledge-made and psychic-power-made are included.
244.Tatthāti tesu chasu payogesu. Sako hatthosahattho,tena nibbattosāhatthiko,payogo. Idhahatthaggahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ, tasmā hatthādinā attano aṅgapaccaṅgena nipphādito vadhappayogo sāhatthikoti veditabbo.
244.Tattha: among those six applications. One's own hand is sahattho, made by that is sāhatthiko, application. Here, the taking of hattha (hand) is indicative, therefore the killing application made by one's own limbs such as hands should be understood as sāhatthika.
245.‘‘Tvaṃ taṃ evaṃ paharitvā mārehī’’ti bhikkhuno parassa yaṃ āṇāpanaṃ, ayamāṇattiko nayoti yojanā.Āṇattiko nayoti āṇattiyeva āṇattiko. Neti pavattetīti nayo, payogassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
245.The instruction of the bhikkhu to another, "pahara it that way and kill him," this is the āṇattika method, is the interpretation. Āṇattiko nayo: āṇatti itself is āṇattiko. Naya because it leads, this is a name for application.
246.Dūranti dūraṭṭhaṃ.Kāyena paṭibaddhenāti ettha kāyekadeso hatthādi kāyo avayave samudāyopacārato ‘‘gāmo daḍḍho’’ti yathā. Kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ cāpādikaṃ paṭibaddhaṃ nāma pubbapadalopena ‘‘devadatto datto’’ti yathā. Vā-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vāti vuttaṃ hoti, ‘‘usuādinipātana’’nti iminā sambandho. Vidhānaṃvidhi,payogoti attho.
246.Dūraṃ: a distant place. Kāyena paṭibaddhena: here, a part of the body such as a hand is the body, because the whole is treated as a part, just as "the village is burned." Kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ cāpādikaṃ (related to the body) is named paṭibaddhaṃ by the elision of the preceding word, just as "Devadatto datto." The word "vā" is understood by ellipsis; it is said, "kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā", the connection is with "usuādinipātana". Vidhānaṃ: vidhi, meaning application.
247.Asañcārimupāyenāti asañcārimena niccalena upāyena. Opatanti etthātiopāto,so ādi yesaṃ apassenavisabhesajjasaṃvidhānādīnaṃ teopātādayo,tesaṃ vidhānaṃopātādividhānaṃ,opātakkhaṇanādikiriyā.
247.Asañcārimupāyenā: by a non-moving, still means. Opatanti ettha: opāto, that and the like of setting traps and arranging unsuitable medicines, are opātādayo, their arrangement is opātādividhānaṃ, the action of digging a pit, etc.
248.Vijjāyāti āthabbanavedāgatamaraṇamantasaṅkhātavijjāya.Jappananti yathā paro na suṇāti, tathā punappunaṃ vacanaṃ.
248.Vijjāyā: by knowledge, meaning the death mantra that comes from the Atharva Veda. Jappanaṃ: repeatedly speaking so that another does not hear.
249.Māraṇe samatthā yā kammavipākajā iddhi, ayaṃ iddhimayo payogo nāmāti samudīritoti yojanā. Kammavipāke jātākammavipākajā,iddhi, yā ‘‘nāgānaṃ nāgiddhi supaṇṇānaṃ supaṇṇiddhi yakkhānaṃ yakkhiddhī’’tiādinā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) bahudhāaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttā. Tattha diṭṭhadaṭṭhaphuṭṭhavisānaṃ nāgānaṃ disvā, ḍaṃsitvā, phusitvā ca parūpaghātakaraṇenāgiddhiveditabbā. Evaṃ sesānampi. Iddhiyevaiddhimayo,bhāvanāmayo iddhippayogo panettha na gahetabbo. Vuttañhetaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
249.That psychic power born of the result of karma which is capable of killing, this is named the psychic-power-made application, is the explanation. Jātā vipāke kammano: kammavipākajā, idhi, which is said in many ways in the aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) beginning with "nāgānaṃ nāgiddhi supaṇṇānaṃ supaṇṇiddhi yakkhānaṃ yakkhiddhī." There, the nāgiddhi should be understood as the act of harming others by seeing, biting, or touching with the visible, bitten, or touched poison of nāgas. Thus, also for the rest. Iddhiyeva: iddhimayo, the psychic power application made by meditation should not be taken here. For this was said in the aṭṭhakathā—
‘‘Keci pana bhāvanāmayiddhiyāpi parūpaghātakaraṇaṃ vadanti. Saha parūpaghātakaraṇena ca ādittagharūpari khittassa udakaghaṭassa bhedanaṃ viya iddhivināsañca icchanti, taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattameva. Kasmā? Yasmā taṃ kusalavedanāvitakkaparittattikādīhi na sameti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi bhāvanāmayiddhi nāma catutthajjhānamayā kusalattike kusalā ceva abyākatā ca, pāṇātipāto akusalo. Vedanāttike adukkhamasukhasampayuttā, pāṇātipāto dukkhasampayutto. Vitakkattike avitakkaavicārā, pāṇātipāto savitakkasavicāro. Parittattike mahaggatā, pāṇātipāto parittoyevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172).
‘‘Some, however, say that harming others is also done by psychic power made by meditation. And they desire the destruction of psychic power together with harming others, like the breaking of a water pot thrown over a burning house; that is merely their desire. Why? Because it does not accord with the wholesome triad of feeling, thought, etc. How? For this psychic power made by meditation, which is wholesome in the wholesome triad consisting of the fourth jhāna, is both wholesome and indeterminate, while killing is unwholesome. In the feeling triad, it is associated with neither pain nor pleasure, while killing is associated with pain. In the thought triad, it is without thought and without examination, while killing is with thought and with examination. In the limited triad, it is great, while killing is merely limited’’ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172).
250.Tatthāti tesu chabbidhesu payogesu.Uddesopīti uddisanaṃ uddeso, taṃsahito payogopi uddesoti vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘kunte pavesehī’’ti yathā. Evaṃ vattabbatāya caanuddesoti tabbiparītavacanameva ñāpakanti veditabbaṃ. Ettha ekeko uddesopi anuddesopi hotīti tesamayaṃ bhedo pana duvidho hotīti paridīpitoti yojanā. Imesu chasu payogesveva ekekasseva uddissānuddissakiriyamānatāya duvidhabhāvato tesaṃ dvādasavidho bhedopadabhājanecaaṭṭhakathāyaca dīpito, tattha vinicchayamidāni dassayissāmīti adhippāyo.
250.Tattha: among those six kinds of applications. Uddesopī: uddisanaṃ is uddeso, the application together with that is called uddeso, just as "pavesehi kunte". And because it must be said thus, anuddeso (non-direction) should be understood as only an indication of its opposite. Here, each direction and non-direction exists, and this distinction of theirs is twofold, thus this has been shown. Because of the twofold nature of each of these six applications being done either by direction or non-direction, their twelvefold distinction is shown in the padabhājana and the aṭṭhakathā, and now I will show the determination there, is the intention.
251.Bahūsupīti manussesu bahūsupi.Tena kammenāti pahāradānasaṅkhātena kammena.Bajjhatīti apāyaṃ netuṃ kammapāsena kammantaraṃ nivāretvā bajjhatīti attho.
251.Bahūsupī: even in many humans. Tena kammenā: by the karma consisting of giving a blow. Bajjhatī: he is bound, having prevented another karma by the karma fetter, in order to lead him to the apāya, is the meaning.
252.Pahārepīti paharaṇepi.Dehinoti manussaviggahassa.Tassāti pahaṭassa.
252.Pahārepī: even with a blow. Dehino: of the human being. Tassā: of the one struck.
253.Pahaṭamatte vāti pahaṭakkhaṇe vā.Pacchāti tappaccayā kālantare vā.Ubhayathāpi ca mateti dvinnaṃ ākārānamaññatarena matepi.Hantāvadhako.Pahaṭamattasminti tasmiṃ maraṇārahapahārassa laddhakkhaṇeyeva, maraṇato pubbabhāgeyevāti mattasaddena dīpeti. Maraṇatthāya ca aññatthāya ca dinnesu anekesu pahāresu maraṇatthāya dinnappahāreneva yadā kadāci marissati, pahāradānakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hoti. Amaraṇādhippāyena dinnappahārabalena ce mareyya, na hotīti vuttaṃ hotīti.
253.Pahaṭamatte vā: or at the moment of being struck. Pacchā: or later because of that. Ubhayathāpi ca mate: even if dead in either of the two ways. Hantā: the killer. Pahaṭamattasmi: at that very moment of receiving the blow that deserves death, he indicates by the word "matta" that it is before death. Among the many blows given for the purpose of death and for another purpose, the pārājika occurs at the very moment of giving the blow for the purpose of death, whenever he will die. If he should die by the force of a blow given without the intention of death, it does not occur, is what is said.
254.Dve payogāti uddissānuddissakiriyābhedabhinnā sāhatthikāṇattikā dve payogā.
254.Dve payogā: the two applications of sāhatthika and āṇattika that are distinct by the distinction of action and non-action.
255.Karaṇassāti kiriyāya.Visesoti nānattaṃ.Āṇattiniyāmakāti āṇattiṃ niyāmenti vavatthāpentīti āṇattiniyāmakā.
255.Karaṇassā: of the action. Viseso: difference. Āṇattiniyāmakā: those who determine the command, those who ascertain the command are āṇattiniyāmakā.
256.Tatthāti tesu āṇattiniyāmakesu chasu ākāresu.Yobbanādi cātiādi-saddena thāvariyamandakhiḍḍavuddhādiavatthāviseso saṅgahito.
256.Tattha: among those six aspects of command determination. Yobbanādi cā: with the ādi-word, the distinction of states such as being old, young, feeble, playful, aged are included.
257.Yaṃ mātikāya niddiṭṭhaṃsatthaṃ, taṃkatamaṃ?.Sattamāraṇanti satte mārenti etenāti sattamāraṇaṃ, asiādivadhopakaraṇaṃ.
257.Which weapon is indicated in the mātikā? Sattamāraṇaṃ: that by which they kill beings is sattamāraṇaṃ, instruments of killing such as swords.
258.Vijjhananti usuādīhi vijjhanaṃ.Bhedananti kakacādīhi dvidhākaraṇaṃ.Chedananti khaggādīhi dvidhākaraṇaṃ.Tāḷananti muggarādīhi āghātanaṃ.Evamādividhoti evamādippakāro.Anekoti bahuko bhedo.Karaṇassa visesokiriyāvisesoti attho.
258.Vijjhanaṃ: piercing with arrows, etc. Bhedanaṃ: making into two with saws, etc. Chedanaṃ: cutting into two with swords, etc. Tāḷanaṃ: striking with mallets, etc. Evamādividho: of such a kind. Aneko: much difference. Karaṇassa viseso: the distinction of action, is the meaning.
259-60.‘‘Purato paharitvāna mārehī’’ti yobhāsitoāṇāpakena, tena āṇattena pacchato…pe… māriteti yojanā.Vatthāṇatti visaṅketāti ettha ‘‘yaṃ ‘mārehī’ti…pe… tato’’ti vatthuvisaṅketo dassito. ‘‘Purato…pe… mārite’’ti āṇattivisaṅketo dassito.Mūlaṭṭhoti āṇāpako.Mūlanti hi pubbakiriyānurūpaṃ āṇāpanaṃ, tattha ṭhitotimūlaṭṭho.
259-60.He who was spoken to by the instigator, "pahari it in front and kill him," by that command, from behind…pe… he killed him, is the interpretation. Vatthāṇatti visaṅketā: here, the inconsistency of the object is shown by "yaṃ ‘mārehī’ti…pe… tato". The inconsistency of the command is shown by "Purato…pe… mārite". Mūlaṭṭho: the instigator. Mūlaṃ: for the command is in accordance with the previous action, he who stands in that is mūlaṭṭho.
261.Iminā visaṅkete āṇāpakassa anāpattiṃ dassetvā saṅkete avirādhite ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vatthu’’ntiādi. Taṃ vatthuṃ avirajjhitvā mārite ubhayesaṃ…pe… udīrito, yathāṇatti ca mārite…pe… udīritoti yojanā.Māritevatthusminti sāmatthiyā labbhati.Ubhayesanti āṇāpakaāṇattānaṃ.Yathākālanti āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇaṃ, āṇattassa māraṇakkhaṇañca anatikkamitvā. Bandhanaṃ bandho, kammunā bandhokammabandho. Atha vā bajjhati etenāti bandho, kammameva bandhokammabandho.
261.Having shown the non-offense of the instigator in this inconsistency, he now says "vatthu" etc., in order to show the pārājika for both when the consistency is not violated. When that object is killed without deviation, for both…pe… it is declared, and when killed according to the command…pe… it is declared, is the interpretation. Mārite: is obtained by implication in the object. Ubhayesaṃ: of the instigator and the one instigated. Yathākāla: without transgressing the moment of command for the instigator, and the moment of killing for the one instigated. Bandhanaṃ is bandho, the binding with karma is kammabandho. Or, that by which one is bound is bandho, karma itself is the binding, kammabandho.
264.Visaṅketo nāti visaṅketo natthi, dvinnampi yathākālaparicchedaṃ kammabandhoyevāti attho.
264.Visaṅketo nāti: There is no discrepancy, meaning that the connection to the deed exists for both, according to the appropriate time.
265.Sabbasoti sabbesu kālabhedesu, sabbaso veditabboti vā sambandho.Sabbasoti sabbappakārena.Vibhāvināti paṇḍitena. So hi atthaṃ vibhāvetīti tathā vutto.
265.Sabbaso: In all divisions of time; or the connection is, "to be known in every way." Sabbaso: In every manner. Vibhāvinā: By the wise one, for he is said thus because he illuminates the meaning.
266-7-8.‘‘Imaṃ gāme ṭhita’’nti idaṃ taṃ sañjānituṃ vuttaṃ, na māraṇakkhaṇaṭṭhānaniyamatthāyāti ‘‘yattha katthaci ṭhita’’nti vatvāpi‘‘natthi tassa visaṅketo’’ti āha.Tassāti āṇāpakassa.‘‘Tatthā’’ti vā pāṭho, tassaṃ āṇattiyanti attho.‘‘Gāmeyevaṭhitaṃ veriṃ mārehī’’ti sāvadhāraṇaṃ āṇatto vane ce ṭhitaṃ māreti vā‘‘vaneyevaṭhitaṃ veriṃ mārehī’’ti sāvadhāraṇaṃ vutto gāme ṭhitaṃ ce māreti vāti yojanā. ‘‘Bhikkhunā sāvadhāraṇa’’nti ca potthakesu likhanti, taṃ aggahetvā‘‘vane vāsāvadhāraṇa’’nti pāṭhoyeva gahetabbo. Vigato saṅketo āṇattiniyāmo etthātivisaṅketo.
266-7-8."Imaṃ gāme ṭhita"nti: This was said to identify him, not to stipulate the place of killing. Therefore, even after saying "yattha katthaci ṭhita," he said "natthi tassa visaṅketo." Tassā: Of the one who orders. "Tatthā" is another reading, meaning in that order. The construction is, if he is ordered definitively, "Gāmeyevaṭhitaṃ veriṃ mārehī" [kill the enemy who is] standing only in the village, and he kills one standing in the forest; or if he is told definitively, "vaneyevaṭhitaṃ veriṃ mārehī" [kill the enemy who is] standing only in the forest, and he kills one standing in the village. In some books they write "Bhikkhunā sāvadhāraṇa," but without taking that, the reading "vane vāsāvadhāraṇa" should be taken. Visaṅketo: Because the stipulation of the order is gone here.
269.Sabbadesesūti gāmavanaaṅgaṇagehādīsu sabbesu ṭhānesu.Bhedatoti nānattato.
269.Sabbadesesū: In all places such as villages, forests, courtyards and houses. Bhedato: From variety.
270.‘‘Satthena pana mārehī’’ti yena kenaci yoāṇatto,tena yena kenaci satthena mārite visaṅketo natthīti yojanā.
270.The construction is that, if someone is āṇatto [ordered] to kill with any weapon, there is no discrepancy when he is killed with any weapon.
271-2.Iminā vāsinā hīti etthahīti padapūraṇe.‘‘Iminā asināmāreyyā’’ti vuttoaññena asināmāreti vā ‘‘tvaṃ imassa asissa etāya dhārāya māraya’’ iti vutto taṃveriṃsaceitarāya dhārāyamāretivā tharunāmāretivā tuṇḍenamāretivā,tathā mārite visaṅketoyeva hotīti yojanā.Tharunāti khaggamuṭṭhinā.Tuṇḍenāti khaggatuṇḍena.‘‘Visaṅketovā’’ti saṅketavirādheneva pārājikaṃ na hotīti dassanapadametaṃ.
271-2.Iminā vāsinā hī: Here, hī is merely a particle. The construction is, if he is told, "Iminā asināmāreyyā" [you should kill with this sword], and he kills with aññena asinā [another sword]; or if he is told, "Tvaṃ imassa asissa etāya dhārāya māraya" [you kill that enemy with this sword's edge], and he kills that veriṃ [enemy] with the itarāya dhārāya [other edge], or kills him with the tharunā [flat of the sword], or kills him with the tuṇḍena [sword's tip], in such a killing, there is indeed a discrepancy. Tharunā: With the hilt of the sword. Tuṇḍenā: With the tip of the sword. "Visaṅketovā": This is a demonstrative term showing that there is no Pārājika due to the violation of the stipulation.
273.Sabbāvudhakajātisūti idhāvuttakarapālikāchurikādisabbapaharaṇasāmaññesu.Visesatoti bhedato.
273.Sabbāvudhakajātisū: In all kinds of weapons such as knives, sickles, and daggers, which were said here. Visesato: From variety.
274.Parenāti bhikkhunā.Soti āṇatto.Nisinnaṃ naṃ māreti, visaṅketo na vijjatīti ‘‘gacchantameva mārehī’’ti sāvadhāraṇaṃ avuttattā ‘‘nisinnopi soyevā’’ti taṃ mārentassa visaṅketo na hoti, avadhāraṇaṃ antarena kathanaṃ taṃ sañjānāpetuṃ vuccatīti iriyāpathaniyāmakaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo.
274.Parenā: By the bhikkhu. So: The one ordered. Nisinnaṃ naṃ māreti, visaṅketo na vijjatī: Since it was not said definitively, "kill him only while he is walking," the intention is to communicate that "even if he is sitting, it is the same person," and there is no discrepancy for one who kills him because saying something without definiteness does not stipulate posture.
275-6.Asati sāvadhāraṇe visaṅketābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sāvadhāraṇe iriyāpathantaresu visaṅketaṃ dassetumāha‘‘nisinnaṃyevā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nisinnaṃyeva mārehī’’ti vutto gacchantaṃ māreti, visaṅketanti ñātabbaṃ. ‘‘Gacchantaṃyeva mārehī’’ti vutto nisinnaṃ māreti, visaṅketanti ñātabbanti yojanā. Imameva yojanākkamaṃ sandhāyāha‘‘yathākkama’’nti.
275-6.Having shown the absence of discrepancy when there is no definiteness, now, to show discrepancy in other postures when there is definiteness, he says "nisinnaṃyevā"tiādi [only sitting], etc. It should be understood that if he is told, "Nisinnaṃyeva mārehī" [kill him only while he is sitting], and he kills him while walking, there is discrepancy. It should be understood that if he is told, "Gacchantaṃyeva mārehī" [kill him only while he is walking], and he kills him while sitting, there is discrepancy. Keeping this order of construction in mind, he says "yathākkama"nti [according to order].
277.Vijjhitvāti sarādīhi vijjhitvā.
277.Vijjhitvā: Having pierced with arrows and the like.
278.Chinditvāti asiādīhi chinditvā. Punasoti payogo.
278.Chinditvā: Having cut with swords and the like. Puna so: Is a repetition.
279.Karaṇesūti vijjhanādikiriyāvisesesu.
279.Karaṇesū: In specific acts of piercing and the like.
280-1.Ettāvatā āṇattiniyāmakaniddesaṃ dassetvā idāni dīghādiliṅgavasenāpi sambhavantaṃ visaṅketaṃ dassetumāha‘‘dīgha’’ntiādi. ‘‘Dīghaṃ…pe… thūlaṃ mārehīti aniyametvā āṇāpetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.174)aṭṭhakathāvacanato eva-kāraṃ vinā ‘‘dīghaṃ mārehī’’ti aniyametvā kenaci yoāṇattohoti, sopi āṇatto yaṃ kiñci tādisaṃ sace māreti, natthi tattha visaṅketo, ubhinnampi parājayoti yojanā. Evaṃ‘‘rassa’’ntiādisabbapadehipi paccekaṃ yojanā kātabbā.Aniyametvāti visaṅketābhāvassa hetudassanaṃ.Evakāro vākyālaṅkāro.Tatthāti āṇattikappayoge. ‘‘Ubhinnampi parājayo’’ti vuttattā āṇāpakaṃ vinā aññaṃ yathāvuttakkhaṇaṃ manussaviggahaṃ‘‘yaṃ kiñci tādisa’’nti iminā dasseti.
280-1.Having shown the specification of the order, now, to show the discrepancy that can occur based on length and other characteristics, he says "dīgha"ntiādi [long], etc. From the Aṭṭhakathā vacana (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.174) "Dīghaṃ…pe… thūlaṃ mārehīti aniyametvā āṇāpetī" [He orders, 'Kill the long…etc…the thick one,' without specifying], whoever is āṇatto [ordered] without specifying "dīghaṃ mārehī" [kill the long one] without the eva-kāraṃ [the word 'only'], if that ordered person kills anything similar, there is no discrepancy there, the downfall is for both. The construction should be done individually with all the terms beginning with "rassa"ntiādi [short]. Aniyametvā: [Without specifying] is showing the reason for the absence of discrepancy. Evakāro [the word 'only'] is an embellishment of the sentence. Tatthā: [There] in the application of the order. Because it was said "Ubhinnampi parājayo" [the downfall is for both], "yaṃ kiñci tādisa"nti [anything similar] shows the human form at the moment as described, other than the instigator.
Sace āṇāpako āṇāpetvā attānameva māreti, āṇāpako dukkaṭaṃ āpajjitvā marati, āṇattassa pārājikaṃ. Āṇāpakena attānamuddissa āṇattiyā katāya āṇatto ajānitvā tādisaṃ aññaṃ māreti, okāsassa aniyamitattā āṇāpako muccati, itaro kammunā bajjhati. Yadi ‘‘amukasmiṃ rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā nisinnaṃ īdisaṃ mārehī’’ti okāsaṃ niyametvā āṇāpeti, tattha āṇāpakato aññasmiṃ mārite ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. Tato bahi mārite vadhakasseva kammabandho. Āṇāpako attānameva uddissa āṇāpeti, itaro ca tameva tattha māreti, āṇāpakassa dukkaṭaṃ, āṇattassa pārājikaṃ. Sace aññattha māreti, mūlaṭṭho muccati. Ajānitvā aññaṃ tattha vā aññattha vā māreti, vadhako pārājikaṃ āpajjati, mūlaṭṭho muccati. Ānantariyavatthumhi ānantariyena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
If the instigator, having given the order, kills himself, the instigator incurs a dukkata and dies, the one ordered incurs a Pārājika. If, when the instigator makes an order aimed at himself, the one ordered unknowingly kills another similar person, the instigator is freed because the opportunity was unspecified, the other is bound by the deed. If he specifies the opportunity and orders, "Kill such and such a person sitting in such and such a place at night or during the day," the downfall is for both if someone other than the instigator is killed there. If he is killed outside of that place, the doer alone is bound by the deed. The instigator gives an order aimed at himself, and the other kills that very person there, the instigator incurs a dukkata, the one ordered incurs a Pārājika. If he kills him elsewhere, the instigator is freed. If, unknowingly, he kills another there or elsewhere, the killer incurs a Pārājika, the instigator is freed. In the case of offenses entailing immediate retribution, it should be connected with immediacy.
282.Yo manussaṃ kañci uddissa sace opātaṃ khaṇati, tathā opātaṃ khaṇantassa tassa dukkaṭaṃ nāma āpatti hotīti ajjhāhārayojanā. Yojanā ca nāmesā yathārutayojanā, ajjhāhārayojanāti duvidhā. Tattha pāṭhāgatapadānameva yojanāyathārutayojanā,ūnapūraṇatthamajjhāhārapadehi saha pāṭhāgatapadānaṃ yojanāajjhāhārayojanāti veditabbā.‘‘Khaṇantassaca opāta’’nti potthakesu pāṭho dissati.‘‘Khaṇantassa tathopāta’ntipāṭho sundaro’’tinissandehevuttaṃ.‘‘Āvāṭanti etassa ‘opāta’nti pariyāyo’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tatopi –
282.If someone digs a pit aiming at any person, that person incurs a dukkata while digging the pit—this is the construction supplied by implication. There are two kinds of construction: construction according to the text and construction supplied by implication. There, the construction of the terms according to the text is yathārutayojanā, the construction of the terms in the text together with terms supplied by implication to fill what is missing is known as ajjhāhārayojanā. In some books the reading "Khaṇantassaca opāta"nti [and for the one digging the pit] appears. "Khaṇantassa tathopāta'ntipāṭho sundaro"tinissandehevuttaṃ [The reading 'for the one digging that pit' is more beautiful] was said in the Nissandeha. It was also said that "‘Āvāṭa’nti is a synonym for ‘opāta’." Even more so—
‘‘Manussaṃ kañci uddissa;
"Manussaṃ kañci uddissa;
Yo ce khaṇativāṭakaṃ;
Khaṇato taṃ tathā tassa;
Hoti āpatti dukkaṭa’’nti. –
Pāṭho sundarataro. Jātapathaviṃ khaṇantassa pārājikapayogattā payogagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ.
The reading is even more beautiful. For one digging into the ground, it is a dukkata in the enumeration of actions, because it is an attempt at Pārājika.
283.Tatthāti tasmiṃ āvāṭe.Tassāti patitassa manussaviggahassa.Dukkhassuppattiyāti dukkhuppattihetu.Tassāti yena āvāṭo khato, tassa bhikkhuno.Patitvāso ce marati, tasmiṃmate tassabhikkhuno pārājikaṃ bhaveti yojanā.
283.Tatthā: In that pit. Tassā: Of that human form that has fallen. Dukkhassuppattiyā: Because of the arising of suffering. Tassā: Of that bhikkhu by whom the pit was dug. The construction is, if patitvā [having fallen] he dies, the Pārājika is for that bhikkhu mate tassa [when he dies].
284.Aññasminti yaṃ samuddissa āvāṭo khato, tato aññasmiṃ.Anuddissakanti kiriyāvisesanaṃ, anuddissakaṃ katvāti attho. Opātavisesanaṃ ce, ‘‘anuddissako opāto’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.139; a. ni. 4.34; 10.15; itivu. 90; netti. 170) viya o-kāraṭṭhāne a-kāro, ma-kārāgamo ca daṭṭhabbo, anodissako opāto khato hotīti attho.
284.Aññasminti: In another person than the one aimed at for whom the pit was dug. Anuddissakanti: Is an adverb of the action, meaning having done it without aiming. If it is an adjective of the pit, the word break is "anuddissako opāto." Like in "Aggamakkhāyatī"tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.139; a. ni. 4.34; 10.15; itivu. 90; netti. 170) [the foremost is declared], the replacement of the o-kāra [o vowel] with a-kāra [a vowel] and the addition of ma-kāra [m consonant] should be seen, meaning he has dug a pit without aiming.
285.‘‘Ettha patitvā yo koci maratū’’ti anodissako opāto sace khato hoti, yattakā nipatitvā maranti ce, assa tattakā dosā hontīti yojanā.‘‘Yo kocī’’ti iminā attano mātāpitaro ca saṅgahitā.Dosāti kammabandhadosā, pārājikaṃ pana ekameva.Assāti yena anodissa opāto khato, tassa.
285.The construction is, if a pit is dug without aiming, "yo koci maratū" [let anyone who falls here die], however many die falling into it, those many faults are his. "Yo kocī": [Anyone] includes his own parents. Dosā: [Faults] means faults of connection to the deed, but the Pārājika is only one. Assā: Of the one by whom the pit was dug without aiming.
286.Ānantariyavatthusmiṃmateti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘tattha patitvā’’ti adhikāro, arahante, mātari, pitari ca tasmiṃ patitvā mate kālakateti attho.Ānantariyakanti ettha sakatthe, kucchite, saññāyaṃ vā ka-paccayo daṭṭhabbo.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ānantariyavatthusmi’’nti imasmiṃ samāsapade avayavabhūtampi ‘‘vatthusmi’’nti idañca ‘‘tattha patitvā mate’’ti idañca ākaḍḍhati.Thullaccayādīnaṃvatthusmiṃ tattha patitvā matethullaccayādayo hontīti yojanā. Tasmiṃ āvāṭe patitvā yakkhādīsu matesu, pārājikavatthuno dukkhuppattiyañca thullaccayaṃ, manussaviggahe mate pārājikaṃ, tiracchāne mate pācittiyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
286.Ānantariyavatthusmiṃmateti [in the case of offenses entailing immediate retribution, when he dies] is the remaining text, "tattha patitvā" [having fallen there] is the scope, meaning when an arahant, mother, or father falls there and dies, the one who has passed away. Ānantariyakanti: Here, the ka-paccayo [ka suffix] should be seen in the sense of "own," "despicable," or "name." "Tathā": By this, both "ānantariyavatthusmi"nti [in the case of offenses entailing immediate retribution] and "vatthusmi"nti [in the case] which is a part of this compound word, and "tattha patitvā mate"ti [having fallen there, when he dies] are drawn in. Thullaccayādīnaṃvatthusmiṃ tattha patitvā matethullaccayādayo hontīti yojanā [The construction is that when one falls there and dies in the case of serious offenses and the like, serious offenses and the like occur]. It is said that in that pit, when yakkhas [spirits] and the like die, there is a serious offense due to the arising of the basis for the Pārājika, when a human form dies there is a Pārājika, when an animal dies there is a pācittiya.
287.Pāṇātipātā dveti dvinnaṃ matattā dve pāṇātipātā, ekena pārājikaṃ, itarena kammabandhoyeva.Ekovekekadhaṃsaneti mātu vā dārakassa vā maraṇe eko pāṇātipātova.
287.Pāṇātipātā dveti [two instances of killing] because two died, there are two instances of killing, by one there is a Pārājika, by the other there is only connection to the deed. Ekovekekadhaṃsaneti [one in the destruction of one each] in the death of a mother or a child, there is only one instance of killing.
288.Corehi anubaddhoetthaāvāṭe patitvā marissati ce, opātakhaṇakasseva pārājikaṃ hoti kirāti yojanā.Kirāti anussavane arucisūcakaṃ.
288.The construction is, if someone pursued by thieves falls into the ettha [here] pit and dies, is it the digger of the pit alone who incurs a Pārājika? Kirā: [Indeed] is indicative of hearsay and aversion.
289-90.Verinobhikkhuto aññe veripuggalā.Tatthatasmiṃ opāte sace manussaṃpātetvā mārenti,tathā verino tattha sayameva patitaṃ manussaṃ bahi nīharitvā sace mārenti, tatthaopapātikāmanussā opāte nibbattitvā tatonikkhantuṃ asakkontā matā cesiyuṃ,sabbattha cayathāvuttasabbavāresu opātakhaṇakasseva parājayoti yojanā.Nibbattitvā hīti etthahīti padapūraṇe. Yattha yattha nipātasaddānaṃ attho na dassito, tattha tattha padapūraṇamattatā veditabbā.
289-90.Verino: Enemy persons other than the bhikkhu. Tattha: In that pit, if they pātetvā mārenti, [cause a human to fall and kill him], if those enemies, having taken a human who has fallen there by himself, carry him out and kill him, if the opapātikāmanussā [spontaneously born] humans opāte nibbattitvā [having arisen in the pit] and then nikkhantuṃ asakkontā matā cesiyuṃ [if they die unable to get out], sabbattha ca [everywhere] in all the cases mentioned, the downfall is for the digger of the pit alone. Nibbattitvā hī: Here, hī is merely a particle. Wherever the meaning of nipāta [indeclinable] words are not shown, it should be understood that they are merely particles.
291.Yakkhādayotiādi-saddena tiracchānānaṃ saṅgaho.Vatthuvasāti thullaccayapācittiyānaṃ vatthubhūtayakkhatiracchānānaṃ vasā.Thullaccayādayotiādi-saddena pācittiyasaṅgaho.
291.Yakkhādayo: The ādi-saddena [and so forth] includes animals. Vatthuvasā: Depending on the basis of the yakkha [spirit] animals that are the basis for serious offenses and pācittiyas. Thullaccayādayo: The ādi-saddena [and so forth] includes pācittiya.
293.Ayaṃnayoti ‘‘anāpattī’’ti yathāvutto nayo.
293.Ayaṃnayoti: The procedure as stated, "anāpattī"ti [there is no offense].
294-5.Bajjhantīti sace avassaṃ bajjhanti.Tatthāti tasmiṃ pāse.‘‘Hatthato muttamattasmi’’nti iminā payogassa atthasādhakataṃ dīpeti.
294-5.Bajjhantī: If they are certainly trapped. Tatthā: In that snare. "Hatthato muttamattasmi": By this, he shows that the action is effective.
296.Yaṃ pana uddissa pāsooḍḍito,tato aññassa bandhane tu anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
296.The construction is, it has been declared that there is no offense in trapping someone other than the one aimed at when the snare is oḍḍito [set up].
297.Mudhā vāpīti amūlena vāpi.Mūlaṭṭhassevāti pāsakārakasseva.Kammabandhoti pāṇātipāto. Bajjhati etenāti bandho, kammameva bandho kammabandho. Pārājikamatte vattabbepi yāva so vattati, tāva tattha bajjhitvā matasattesu paṭhamamatassa vasena pārājikaṃ, avasesānaṃ pāṇātipātasaṅkhātassa akusalarāsino sambhavato taṃ sabbaṃ saṅgahetvā sāmaññena dvayampi dassetumāha ‘‘kammabandho’’ti.
297.Mudhā vāpī: Alternatively, without a basis. Mūlaṭṭhassevā: Only for the snare maker. Kammabandho: Killing. Bandho [bond] because one is bound by it, kammameva bandho kammabandho [the deed itself is the bond, therefore deed-bond]. Although it should be stated only in terms of Pārājika, in order to show both in general by including everything, from the perspective of the first being to die among the beings who are trapped and die there as long as it lasts, there is a Pārājika, and there is a mass of unwholesome deeds called killing from the remaining ones, therefore he says "kammabandho" [deed-bond].
298.‘‘Sace yena laddho, so uggaḷitaṃ vā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, tassa passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā sammukhe paveseti, thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapeti, daḷhataraṃ vā pāsarajjuṃ bandhati, thirataraṃ vā khāṇukaṃ ākoṭetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.176)aṭṭhakathāgataṃ vinicchayaṃ saṅgahitumāha‘‘pāsamuggaḷitampi vā’’ti. Ettha avuttasamuccayatthenapi-saddena ‘‘saṇṭhapetī’’tiādikā ‘‘bandhatī’’ti dassitakiriyāvasānā payogā dassitā.Thiraṃ vāpīti etthaapi-saddo aṭṭhakathāya avasiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘khāṇukaṃ ākoṭetī’’ti kiriyaṃ samuccinoti ubhayatthapi pakārantaravikappatthattāti gahetabbā.Evanti evaṃ sati. Yena pāso laddho, tenāpi evaṃ pāse katavisese satīti vuttaṃ hoti.Ubhinnanti pāsakārakassa ca idāni labhitvā paṭijaggantassa cāti ubhayesaṃ.
298.To summarize the determination from the Aṭṭhakathāgataṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.176) [commentary], "sace yena laddho, so uggaḷitaṃ vā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, tassa passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā sammukhe paveseti, thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapeti, daḷhataraṃ vā pāsarajjuṃ bandhati, thirataraṃ vā khāṇukaṃ ākoṭetī" [if the one who obtained it prepares the loosened snare, or having made a path having seen one going by the snare, he brings him in front, or he sets up a more rigid snare stick, or he ties a stronger snare rope, or he drives in a more stable stake], he says "pāsamuggaḷitampi vā"ti [or even a loosened snare]. Here, by the pi-saddena [the word 'also'] with the sense of an unsaid inclusion, the actions shown ending with "bandhatī"ti [he ties], such as "saṇṭhapetī"tiādikā [he prepares], are shown. Thiraṃ vāpīti [or even a steady one] here the api-saddo [the word 'even'] includes the action "khāṇukaṃ ākoṭetī" [he drives in the stake] that is left in the commentary, it should be taken that in both cases there is the sense of optional variations. Evanti [thus], when it is thus. It is said that even when the snare has been made special in this way by the one who obtained the snare. Ubhinnanti [for both] for both the one who made the snare and for the one who has now obtained and is looking after it.
299-300.Yoti pāsakārako, laddhapāsakoti imesaṃ yo koci.Uggaḷāpetvāti vighāṭetvā, yathā tattha pāṇino na bajjhanti, evaṃ katvāti attho.Tattha cāti puna saṇṭhapite pāse ca. Ko vimuccati? Yena laddho, so.
299-300.Yo: [Whoever] which includes the snare maker and the one who has obtained the snare. Uggaḷāpetvā: [Having dislocated] Having dislocated it, having done it in such a way that beings are not trapped there, this is the meaning. Tattha cā: [And there] and again in the snare that has been prepared. Who is freed? The one by whom it was obtained, he is.
301-2.Gopetvāti gopanahetu mokkho na hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī’’tiādīsu viya hetumhi tvā-paccayo daṭṭhabbo.Tamañño…pe… na ca muccatīti etthana cāti neva.Nāsetvā sabbaso vāti so yathā yassa kassaci sattassa vināsopakaraṇaṃ na hoti, tathā chindanādīhi nāsetvā.Taṃpāsayaṭṭhiṃ. Ko vimuccati? Pāsakārako.
301-2.Gopetvā: [Having protected] The construction is that there is no release because of protecting. The tvā-paccayo [tvā suffix] should be seen in the sense of reason, like in "Sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī"tiādīsu [having seen the lion, there is fear]. Tamañño…pe… na ca muccatī: Here, na cāti [and not] means never. Nāsetvā sabbaso vā: [Or having completely destroyed] Having destroyed it by cutting and the like in such a way that it is no longer an instrument of destruction for any being. Taṃ: [That] snare stick. Who is freed? The snare maker.
303.Sūlaṃropentassāti sūlaṃ nikhaṇantassa.Sajjentassāti saṇṭhapentassa.
303.Sūlaṃropentassā: Of the one who is planting a stake. Sajjentassā: Of the one who is preparing it.
304.Asañciccāti ettha ‘‘katena payogenā’’ti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘matepi anāpattī’’ti etehi sambandho. ‘‘Imināhaṃ upakkamena imaṃ māressāmī’’ti acetetvā apakappetvā avadhakacetano hutvā katena aññatthikenapi upakkamena pare matepi āpatti natthīti attho,musalussāpanādivatthūsu(pārā. 180) viya ayaṃ sattotisaññī hutvā ‘‘iminā upakkamena imaṃ māressāmī’’ti vītikkamasamuṭṭhāpakacetanāsampayuttavikapparahito hutvā aññatthikena payogena manusse matepi pārājikaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
304.Asañciccā: [Unintentionally] Here, "katena payogenā"ti [by an action done] is the remaining text, it is connected with "matepi anāpattī"ti [there is no offense even when he dies]. The meaning is that even when a person dies by an action done without intending "I will kill this person by this method," without planning, without having a intention to kill, even by an action done for another purpose, there is no offense. Like in musalussāpanādivatthūsu(pārā. 180) [in the case of lifting up a pestle], even when a human dies by an action done for another purpose, without having the perception of a sentient being, without having the consciousness associated with the intention to cause transgression "I will kill this person by this method," there is no Pārājika, this is what is said.
Ajānantassāti ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’ti ajānantassa upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti,visagatapiṇḍapātavatthumhi(pārā. 181) viya ‘‘idaṃ kāraṇa’’nti ajānitvā katena manusse matepi anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘anāpattī’’ti ākaḍḍhati.Amaraṇacittassaamaraṇicchāsahitacittassa upakkamena pare matepi anāpattivuddhapabbajitādivatthūsu(pārā. 180) viyāti attho. Ummattakādayo vuttasarūpāyeva.
Ajānantassā: "For one not knowing," means even if a person dies due to the efforts of someone who did not know "this person will die by this," there is no offense, just as in the case of food mixed with poison (pāci. 239) (pārā. 181), it is said that even if a person dies from something done without knowing "this is the reason," there is no offense. "Likewise" this draws in "no offense." Even if a person dies due to the efforts of one whose mind is not set on death, meaning a mind without the intention of causing death, there is no offense, as in the cases of the old renunciant, etc. (pārā. 180). The meanings of "one who is insane, etc." are as previously stated.
305.‘‘Manussapāṇimhī’’ti iminā manussabhāvo aṅgabhāvena dassito.‘‘Sacassa cittaṃ maraṇūpasaṃhita’’nti iminā maraṇūpasaṃhitacittatā dassitā.
305. "In a human being" shows human existence as a necessary factor. "If his mind is set on death" shows that his mind is set on death.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the commentary on the Essence of the Meaning of the Vinaya,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
The Explanation of the Vinaya-vinicchaya,
Tatiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Third Pārājika is Finished.
Catutthapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Fourth Pārājika
306-7.Evaṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayena tatiyapārājikavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni catutthapārājikavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘asanta’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘asanta’’nti apekkhitvā ‘‘attanī’’ti ca ‘‘jhānādibheda’’nti apekkhitvā ‘‘uttarimanussadhamma’’nti ca ‘‘samudācareyyā’’ti apekkhitvā ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’ti ca sāmatthiyā labbhatīti ajjhāharitvā ‘‘attani asanta’’ntiādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ.
306-7. Having shown the analysis of the third pārājika neither too concisely nor too extensively, now to show the analysis of the fourth pārājika, he says "If, being non-existent," etc. Herein, by supplying through inference the words "if," in relation to "non-existent"; "in himself," in relation to "own"; "of the type of jhāna, etc.," in relation to "superior human state"; and "should declare," in relation to "whatever bhikkhu," the passage should be construed in the manner of "if, being non-existent in himself," etc.
Attaniasantanti tasmiṃ attabhāve attano santāne anuppāditatāya avijjamānaṃ.Attassitameva katvāti attupanāyikaṃ katvā attani vijjamānaṃ viya katvā taṃ upanetvā.Bhavaṃ adhiṭṭhāya ca vattamānanti paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya ca vattantaṃ bhavaṃ cittena adhiṭṭhahitvā takketvā, citte ṭhapetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññāpadesañca vināti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasatīdha bhikkhū’’tiādinā nayena vakkhamānaṃ pariyāyakathaṃ ṭhapetvā.Adhimānañca vināti adiṭṭhe diṭṭhasaññitādisabhāvaṃ adhigatamānasaṅkhātaṃ ‘‘adhigatauttarimanussadhammo ahamhī’’ti adhimānañca ṭhapetvā.Jhānādibhedanti jhānādayo bhedā visesā yassa taṃ jhānādibhedaṃ, ‘‘uttarimanussadhammo nāma jhānaṃ vimokkho samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṃ maggabhāvanā phalasacchi kiriyā kilesappahānaṃ vinīvaraṇatā cittassa suññāgāre abhiratī’’ti (pārā. 198, 199)padabhājanevuttaṃ jhānādidhammavisesanti attho. ‘‘Uttarimanussadhammanti uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhamma’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.197)aṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ jhānalābhīhi ceva aṭṭhahi ariyapuggalehi ca adhigatattā tesaṃ santakanti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃuttarimanussadhammaṃ.
Non-existent in himself means not produced or not existing in his own being or in his own continuum. Having made it only his own means having made it suitable to himself, having made it as if existing in himself, having brought it near. "And the becoming, maintained by thought" means having determined or considered with the mind the becoming that proceeds from rebirth onwards, having established it in the mind. "Without hinting" means setting aside the mode of indirect speech that will be stated in the manner of "the bhikkhu who dwells in your monastery," etc. "And without pride" means setting aside the conceit consisting of the state of thinking the unseen as seen, the unreached as reached, the unacquired as acquired, the unexperienced as experienced, and the pride of thinking "I have attained a superior human state." "Of the type of jhāna, etc." means that which has jhāna, etc., as divisions or distinctions; "superior human state is jhāna, liberation, concentration, attainment, knowledge and vision, the path, development, fruition, realization, abandonment of defilements, absence of hindrances, delighting in empty places of the mind" is the meaning, according to the section on word analysis (padabhājane) (pārā. 198, 199). Superior human state means "the state of superior humans, of both those who practice jhāna and the noble ones" according to the commentary (aṭṭha.) (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.197), that which is attained by those who have gained jhāna and by the eight noble individuals, and therefore has come to be designated as belonging to them, superior human state.
Viññattipathe ṭhitassāti dvādasahatthabbhantare padese ṭhitassa ‘‘itthiyā vā purisassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā’’ti (pārā. 198)padabhājanevuttassa yassa kassaci.Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādivasena kāyena vā. ‘‘Sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hatthamuddāya sīsaṃ na otarati, idaṃ abhūtārocanaṃ hatthamuddāyapi otaratī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.215)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā idha hatthamuddādihatthavikāro ca aṅgapaccaṅgacopanañca ‘‘kāyenā’’ti iminā gahetabbaṃ.Vācāya vāti yo savanūpacāre ṭhito tena viññātuṃ sakkuṇeyyena yena kenaci vohārena vā.Yo bhikkhūti yo upasampanno thero vā navo vā majjhimo vā.Samudācareyyāti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādivacanappakāresu yaṃ kañci pakāraṃ vadeyya.Tadattheti tena vuttavākyassa atthe.Ñātevāti ñāte eva. Mātugāmaṃ vā purisaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci uddissa vutte, teneva vā anuddissa vutte savanūpacāre ṭhitena yena kenaci manussabhūtena vacanasamanantarameva ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamajjhānalābhī’’tiādike yathāvutte atthappakāre ñāteyeva. ‘‘So’’ti ajjhāharitvā ‘‘so puna ruḷhibhāve abhabbo’’ti yojetabbaṃ, attani avijjamānaguṇaṃ santaṃ viya katvā icchācāre ṭhatvā evaṃ kathitapuggalo sīle patiṭṭhāya uparūpari labbhamānalokiyalokuttaraguṇehi buddhisaṅkhātaṃ sāsane buddhimadhigantuṃ anarahoti attho. Kiṃ viyāti āha‘‘yatheva…pe… ruḷibhāve’’ti.‘‘Yathā’’ti etena sambandho ‘‘tathā’’ti, yathā tālo matthakacchinno abhabbo puna viruḷhiyā, sopi pārājikaṃ āpanno tatheva daṭṭhabboti attho.
Of one standing within the range of communication means of anyone standing in a place within twelve hatthas, whether "a woman or a man, a householder or a renunciant" as stated in the section on word analysis (pārā. 198). "By body" means by body, such as with hand gestures. "Renunciation of the training does not come about by hand gesture, [but] this false claim comes about even by hand gesture," since it is said in the commentary (aṭṭha.) (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.215), here gestures of the hand, such as hand gestures, and moving the limbs and extremities should be included in "by body." "Or by speech" means by whatever expression which one standing within earshot might be able to understand. "Whatever bhikkhu" means whatever bhikkhu who is ordained, whether senior, junior, or middle. "Should declare" means he should speak in whatever manner of expression, such as "I am attaining the first jhāna," etc. "Knowing it as such" means knowing it exactly as it is. If it is spoken addressing a mother, a man or whatever person, or if it is spoken without addressing anyone, then immediately upon the utterance of the statement, whatever human being standing within earshot knows, "This one has attained the first jhāna," or whatever is stated in that way. By supplying "he," the passage should be construed as "he is incapable of growth," meaning that person who, having established himself in desire and conduct, speaks of a quality not existing in himself as if it exists, is unfit to achieve growth, meaning intellectual development in the Dispensation, which is reckoned by the superior mundane and supramundane qualities that can be attained one after another in the Dispensation while being established in virtue. What is it like? He says, "Just as… until… growth." "As" is related to "so," just as a palm tree with its crown cut off is incapable of further growth, so too, the one who has committed a pārājika should be seen in that way.
308-9.Idāni ‘‘ñāteva abhabbo’’ti ca ‘‘aññāpadesañca vinā’’ti ca etasmiṃ vākyadvaye byatirekatthavasena sambhavantaṃ āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘asantamevā’’tiādi.
308-9. Now, to show the different offenses that may occur in the two statements "knowing it as such, he is incapable" and "without hinting," by way of contrast, he says "Being non-existent indeed," etc.
Anantaranti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādivacanasamanantarameva.Soti dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhatvā yena taṃ vacanaṃ sutaṃ, so paro puggalo.Jānāti ceti ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamajjhānalābhī’’tiādivasena tena vuttavacanappakārena atthaṃ avirādhetvā acireneva sace jānātīti attho. Yo pana jhānādīnaṃ attanā aladdhabhāvena vā āgame uggahaparipucchādivasena aparicitattā vā jhānādisarūpaṃ ajānantopi kevalaṃ ‘‘jhānaṃ vimokkho samādhi samāpattī’’tiādivacanānaṃ sutapubbattā tena ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādivacane vutte ‘‘jhānaṃ kira esa samāpajjatī’’ti yadi ettakamatthampi jānāti, sopi ‘‘jānāti’’ccevaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.215) vuttoti gahetabbo.Cuto hītihi-saddo avadhāraṇe, attanā vutte tena tattakeyeva ñāte so asantaguṇadīpako pāpapuggalo phalasampattisampannaṃ imaṃ sāsanāmatamahāpādapaṃ āruyhāpi phalaṃ aparibhuñjitvā virādhetvā patitvā mato nāma hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Imassevatthassa ‘‘asanta’’miccādinā paṭhamaṃ vuttassapi byatirekatthaṃ dassetuṃ anuvādavasena vuttattā punaruttidoso na hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Immediately means immediately after the utterance of the statement "I am attaining the first jhāna," etc. He means the other person who, standing within twelve hatthas, heard that statement. "If he knows" means if he knows the meaning without misrepresenting it, very quickly, in the manner of the statement that was made, "This one has attained the first jhāna," etc. But even if one does not know the nature of jhāna, etc., either because of not having attained the jhāna, etc., oneself, or because of being unfamiliar with the texts due to not studying them, and only knows so much as "He is attaining jhāna," when one says "I am attaining the first jhāna" because one has heard the statements "jhāna, liberation, concentration, attainment," etc., even this much is to be taken as "he knows," according to the commentary (aṭṭha.) (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.215). "For he": the particle hi is used in the sense of determination; it means that the evil person who reveals a quality that does not exist in himself, once the statement uttered by himself is known exactly as it is, having climbed this great tree named the Dispensation which is endowed with the accomplishment of fruition, dies having fallen down without enjoying the fruit, meaning he is dead. It should be seen that since the first statement "being non-existent" etc., was stated to show the contrasted meaning of this same meaning, it is a restatement without the fault of repetition.
‘‘no ce…pe… hotī’’ti. Yassa so āroceti, socenajānāti, assaasantaguṇadīpakassa musāvādino.
"If he does not... until... there is." If he to whom he declares does not know, then there is for him, the false speaker who reveals a quality that does not exist.
‘‘yo te’’tiādi. Yo bhikkhutetavaidhaimasmiṃ vihāre vasatīti yojanā.Dīpiteti attano adhippāye pakāsite.Jānāti ceti yo tathā vuttavacanaṃ assosi, so ‘‘esa aññāpadesena attano jhānalābhitaṃ dīpetī’’ti vā ‘‘eso jhānalābhī’’ti vā vacanasamanantarameva sace jānāti.Assāti evaṃ kathitavacanavato tassa bhikkhuno.Taṃtena vuttavacanaṃ.Dukkaṭameva hoti,na thullaccayanti attho. Attano āvāsakārānaṃ dāyakānaṃ aññassa pavattiṃ kathentassa viya attanoyeva asantaguṇaṃ santamiva katvā kathanākāro imāya gāthāya atthato vuttoti daṭṭhabbo.
"The one who..." etc. The meaning is: whatever bhikkhu dwells in your this monastery. "Having revealed" means having revealed his intention. "If he knows" means if one who heard that statement knows immediately after the statement, "He reveals his attainment of jhāna by indirect speech," or "This one has attained jhāna." "For him" means for that bhikkhu who spoke that statement. "There is" means for him there is only a dukkata offense, not a thullaccaya. The mode of speaking after making a quality that does not exist in himself seem as if it exists, like someone telling others about the circumstances of his own monastery builders and donors, is to be understood as stated in meaning in this verse.
jhānalābhīti cāti avuttasamuccayatthenaca-saddenapāḷiyaṃ(pārā. 220) āgatā avasesapariyāyavārā ca saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathājhānalābhīti etthajhānaggahaṇena vimokkhādīnañca upalakkhitattā jhānādidasavidhauttarimanussadhammavisayapariyāyakathaṃ sutavatā taṅkhaṇe tadatthe ñāte pariyāyasamullāpakena āpajjitabbaṃ thullaccayañca aviññāte vā cirena viññāte vā āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭañca imāya gāthāya atthato dassitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
"And attainment of jhāna" means that by the ca-particle, in the sense of implied inclusion, the remaining indirect expressions that occur in the Pāli (pārā. 220) are also included. Thus, because jhāna here stands for liberation, etc., it should be seen that in this verse the thullaccaya that is incurred by one who, having heard the indirect way of speaking about a superior human state related to jhāna, etc., knows the meaning of it at that instant, and the dukkata that is incurred when it is not known or known after a long time, are shown in meaning.
310.Etanti yathāvuttappakāraṃ jhānādibhedaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ.Adhimānāti ‘‘adhigatoha’’nti evaṃ uppannamānā, adhikamānāti attho, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo mayā adhigato’’ti daḷhamuppannena mānena kathentassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Vutto anāpattinayoti āpattiyā abhāvoanāpatti,sā eva nayo netabbo bujjhitabboti katvā, anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Adhimānenā’’tievaṃ vuttobhagavatāti attho, ‘‘adhigatadhammoha’’nti adhimānena ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamajjhānalābhī’’tiādīni vadantassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
310. This means the jhāna-like division of superior human states spoken of as before. "Because of pride" means because of pride that has arisen like "I have attained," meaning excessive pride; it means by one who speaks with firm pride that has arisen, "I have attained this state." "The way of no offense is spoken" means the absence of an offense is no offense, that itself is the way, it should be understood in this way, thus it is said "no offense." The meaning is: the Blessed One has said that one saying "I have attained the Dhamma" with pride, "I have attained the first jhāna," etc., there is no offense.
Ayamadhimāno kassa hoti, kassa na hotīti ce? Ariyānaṃ na hoti maggapaccavekkhaṇādīhi pañcahi paccavekkhaṇāhi sañjātasomanassānaṃ vitiṇṇakaṅkhattā. Dussīlassāpi na hoti tassa ariyaguṇādhigame nirussāhattā. Susīlassāpi kammaṭṭhānānuyogarahitassa niddārāmatādimanuyuttassa na hoti vissaṭṭhabhāvanābhiyogattā. Suparisuddhāya sīlasampattiyā patiṭṭhāya samathabhāvanāmanuyuttassa rūpārūpasamāpattiyaṃ pattāsino vā vipassanābhiyuttassa sopakkilesodayabbayañāṇalābhino vā uppajjati. So samathavipassanābhāvanāhi kilesasamudācārassa abhāve uppanne te visesabhāgino bhavituṃ adatvā ṭhitibhāgino katvā ṭhapetīti veditabbo.
For whom does this pride occur, and for whom does it not? It does not occur for noble ones, because they have abandoned doubt, and have generated joy with the five reflections such as reflection on the path. It also does not occur for one who is immoral, because he is without enthusiasm for the attainment of noble qualities. It also does not occur for one who is moral but devoid of commitment to meditation practice, and is devoted to sleep, delighting in talk, etc., because he is neglectful in applying himself to development. It arises in one who, established in a very purified accomplishment of virtue, is committed to the development of serenity aspiring to the rūpa and arūpa attainments, or in one who is committed to insight and has gained knowledge of the arising and passing away with defilements. It should be understood that because of the absence of arising of defilements in those developments of serenity and insight, it establishes them as partakers of stability rather than giving them to be partakers of those special attainments.
Panāti api-saddattho.‘‘Eva’’nti iminā ‘‘anāpattinayo vutto’’ti paccāmasati.‘‘Avattukāmassā’’ti idañcapāḷiyaṃāgataṃ ‘‘anullapanādhippāyassā’’ti (pārā. 222, 225) idañca anatthantaraṃ. Avattukāmassāti evaṃ vuttoti yojanā. Kohaññena pāpicchāpakatassa ‘‘jhānādīnaṃ lābhimhī’’ti vadantassa ajjhāsayo ullapanādhippāyo nāma, tathā ahutvā sabrahmacārīsu aññaṃ byākarontassa evameva anāpattibhāvo vutto bhagavatāti attho.Ādikassāpievaṃ vuttoti yojanā. ‘‘Anāpatti ādikammikassā’’ti (pārā. 222) ādikammikassāpi anāpattibhāvo vutto bhagavatāti attho. Imasmiṃ sikkhāpade vaggumudātīriyā bhikkhū ādikammikā. Avuttasamuccayatthenatathā-saddena idha avuttaummattakakhittacittavedanaṭṭā gahitā.
Panā has the meaning of the api-particle. "Indeed" refers back to "the way of no offense is spoken." "For one who does not wish to boast" this and the Pāli term "for one who does not have the intention to deceive" (pārā. 222, 225) have the same meaning. The construction is "for one who does not wish to boast" means it was said in this way. The meaning is that the Blessed One said that for one who has evil desires and has been overcome by evil, the underlying intention of one saying "I have gained jhāna, etc.," is called the intention to boast, and likewise for one who has not, but declares something different to his fellows in the holy life, there is likewise no offense. The construction is also "for one who is initial." The meaning is that the Blessed One said that there is no offense for one who is initial (pārā. 222). In this training rule, the bhikkhus of Vaggumudā-Tīriya were initial offenders. By the tathā-particle, in the sense of implied inclusion, those not mentioned here, such as one who is insane, one whose mind is deranged, and one afflicted by pain, are included.
311.Pāpicchatāti ‘‘evaṃ maṃ jano sambhāvessatī’’ti jhānalābhitādihetukāya sambhāvanāya sambhāvanānimittassa paccayapaṭilābhassa patthanāsaṅkhātāya pāpikāya lāmikāya icchāya samannāgatabhāvo ca.Tassāti yaṃ jhānādibhedabhinnaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ samullapi, tassa dhammassa.Asantabhāvoti attasantāne paccuppannajātiyaṃ anuppāditabhāvena avijjamānabhāvo.Manussakassa ārocanañcevāti vuttavacanassa atthaṃ taṅkhaṇe jānanakassa manussajātikassa ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādinā nayena savanūpacāre ṭhatvā ārocanañca. Naññāpadesena ārocanañcāti sambandho. ‘‘Yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjī’’tiādinā (pārā. 220) nayena pavattaaññāpadesaṃ vinā ujukameva ārocanañca.Tadeva ñāṇanti tadā eva ñāṇaṃ, acirāyitvā vuttakkhaṇeyeva jānananti attho.Etthāti imasmiṃ catutthapārājikāpattiyaṃ.Dhīrāvinayadharā.
311. Evil desire is the state of being endowed with evil and base desire, consisting of longing for gain and support arising from being honored due to having attained jhāna, etc., thinking "people will esteem me in this way." "Of that" means of that state which is different because of the jhāna-like division. "The state of non-existence" means the state of not existing because of not being produced in one's own continuum in the present existence. "And declaring it to a human being" means declaring in a way that a person of human birth, who knows the meaning of the statement at that moment, standing within earshot, in the manner "I am attaining the first jhāna," etc. "And declaring it not indirectly" is connected. And declaring it directly without resorting to indirect ways of speaking such as "The bhikkhu who dwells in your monastery, he is attaining the first jhāna" (pārā. 220). "That very knowing" means knowing at that very moment, knowing at the very instant without delay. "Herein" means in this fourth pārājika offense. The wise means those who are upholders of the Vinaya.
312.Paṭhame dutiye canteti manussaviggahapārājikavajjite yathāvuttapārājikattaye.Pariyāyo na vijjatīti pārājikāpattipathaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ na labhati. ‘‘Na panetare’’ti idaṃ etthāpi yojetabbaṃ, itare pana tatiyapārājike pariyāyo na vijjatīti attho. ‘‘Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti (pārā. 172) ca ‘‘ambho purisa kiṃ tuyhiminā’’tiādinā (pārā. 171) ca ‘‘yo evaṃ marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā (pārā. 175) ca pariyāyena vadantassa pārājikamevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Āṇattipārājikahetuāṇattikappayogo.Na panetareti paṭhamacatutthapārājikadvaye pana pārājikahetubhūtā āṇatti na labhatīti attho.
312. "In the first, second, and third" means in the three pārājikas as stated, excluding the pārājika concerning human form. "There is no indirect way" means the path of a pārājika offense does not have an indirect way of speaking. "But not in the others" should be connected here as well, meaning that in the third pārājika there is no indirect way. It is stated that for one who speaks indirectly in ways such as "one should praise death" (pārā. 172), and "Good man, what is the use to you of this life?" (pārā. 171), and "He who dies in this way gains wealth" (pārā. 175), it is a pārājika offense. Command means the use of a command that is a cause for a pārājika. "But not in the others" means that in the first and fourth pārājikas, a command that is the cause for a pārājika cannot be found.
313.Ādīti paṭhamapārājikaṃ.Ekasamuṭṭhānanti ekakāraṇaṃ. Samuṭṭhāti āpatti etasmāti samuṭṭhānaṃ, kāraṇaṃ kāyādi. Taṃ pana chabbidhaṃ kāyo, vācā, kāyavācā, kāyacittaṃ, vācācittaṃ, kāyavācācittanti. Tesaṃ vinicchayaṃuttare(u. vi. 325 ādayo) yathāgataṭṭhāneyeva ca vaṇṇayissāma. Tatridaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ ekaṃ kāyacittaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ etassāti katvā. Tenāha‘‘duvaṅgaṃ kāyacittato’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ samuṭṭhāna’’nti ajjhāhāro. Yena samuṭṭhānena paṭhamapārājikāpatti uppajjati, taṃsamuṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Aṅgajātasaṅkhātaṃ kāyañca sevanacittañcāti dvayaṃ aṅgaṃ avayavaṃ etassātiduvaṅgaṃ,tadubhayasabhāvanti attho yathā ‘‘duvaṅgaṃ catutthajjhāna’’nti.Sesāti avasiṭṭhāni tīṇi pārājikāni.Tisamuṭṭhānāti kāyacittaṃ, vācācittaṃ, kāyavācācittanti tisamuṭṭhānā tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni etesanti katvā.Tesanti tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samuṭṭhānānaṃ.Aṅgānīti avayavāni.Sattakāyo, cittaṃ, vācā, cittaṃ, kāyo, vācā, cittanti, taṃsabhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
313. Ādī means the first Pārājika. Ekasamuṭṭhāna means a single cause. Samuṭṭhāna means that an offense arises from it; it is the cause, such as the body, etc. That, however, is sixfold: body, speech, body and speech, body and mind, speech and mind, body, speech, and mind. We will describe the determination of these later (U. Vi. 325 ff.) in their respective places. Here, ekasamuṭṭhāna means having a single cause, a single body-mind as its arising. Therefore, he said, "two-factored, from body-mind." "That is the arising" is to be understood. That cause, which is designated as the arising, through which the Pārājika offense arises. Duvaṅga means having two factors, two limbs or components: the body, which is designated as the organ of generation, and the mind of engagement; it has both of these natures, just as in "two-factored is the fourth jhāna." Sesā means the remaining three Pārājikas. Tisamuṭṭhānā means having three causes: body-mind, speech-mind, and body-speech-mind. Tesa means of those three arisings. Aṅgānī means the components. Satta means seven: body, mind, speech, mind, body, speech, mind; that is, having that nature, is what is said.
314.Ādīti methunadhammapaṭisevanacittasampayuttacetanāsabhāvaṃ paṭhamapārājikaṃ. Sukhopekkhāyutaṃ udīritanti yojanā. Iṭṭhālambaṇapaṭilābhādisomanassahetumhi sati sukhavedanāsampayuttaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ asati upekkhāvedanāya sampayuttaṃ hotīti vuttanti attho.
314. Ādī means the first Pārājika, which is the nature of the volition associated with the mind of engaging in sexual intercourse. It should be construed as "endowed with pleasure and equanimity" (sukhopekkhāyutaṃ udīritaṃ). It means that when there is a cause for pleasure, such as the attainment of a desirable object, it is associated with pleasant feeling; when that is not present, it is associated with equanimous feeling, is what is said.
Tatiyaṃ dukkhavedananti tatiyaṃ manussaviggahapārājikaṃ dosacittasampayuttacetanāsabhāvattā dukkhavedanāya sampayuttanti attho.
Tatiyaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ means the third Pārājika, concerning taking human life, is associated with painful feeling because it is the nature of volition associated with a mind of aversion.
Dutiyanti adinnādānacetanālakkhaṇaṃ dutiyapārājikaṃ. Lobhena parasantakaṃ corikāya gaṇhantassa somanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, kodhena abhibhūtassa vilumpitvā vā vilumpāpetvā vā gaṇhato domanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, somanassaṃ, domanassañca vinā aggahetukāmo viya hutvā udāsīnassa gaṇhato upekkhāsampayuttaṃ hotīti‘‘tivedanamudīrita’’nti āha.
Dutiyaṃ means the second Pārājika, which has the characteristic of volition of taking what is not given. Tivedanamudīrita means that when one takes another's property by theft with greed, it is associated with pleasant feeling; when one takes by plundering or ordering to plunder, being overwhelmed by anger, it is associated with painful feeling; and when one takes being indifferent, like one desiring unowned things, without pleasant or painful feeling, it is associated with equanimous feeling.
Catutthañcāti uttarimanussadhammasamullapanacetanālakkhaṇaṃ catutthapārājikañca. Sambhāvanicchāya paccayāsāya vā tuṭṭhatuṭṭhasseva ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādinā nayena attano uttarimanussadhammalābhitaṃ vadantassa somanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, aññapuggalesu paṭihatacittassa kalahapurekkhāratāya vadato domanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, paccayālābhena jighacchādidukkhaṃ sahitumasakkuṇeyyatāya udāsīnassa vadato upekkhāsampayuttaṃ hotīti‘‘tivedanamudīrita’’nti āha.
Catutthañcā means also the fourth Pārājika, which has the characteristic of volition of falsely claiming superior human qualities. Tivedanamudīrita means that when one speaks of one's attainment of superior human qualities, saying "I attain the first jhāna," etc., being delighted and pleased with the desire for recognition or expectation of requisites, it is associated with pleasant feeling; when one speaks with a mind hostile towards other individuals, with quarrel as the primary motive, it is associated with painful feeling; and when one speaks being indifferent because of being unable to endure the suffering of hunger, etc., with the non-attainment of requisites, it is associated with equanimous feeling.
315.Aṭṭha cittānīti lobhasahagatāni aṭṭha cittāni labbhareti yojanā, labbhantīti attho, cetanāsabhāvena paṭhamapārājikena sampayuttānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evamuparipi.Duveti paṭighasampayuttāni dve cittāni.Dasa cittānīti lobhasahagatāni aṭṭha, dve paṭighasampayuttānīti.Labbhareti sampayuttabhāvena labbhanti.
315. Aṭṭha cittānī means the eight types of consciousness accompanied by greed can be obtained; it means they are obtained and associated with the first Pārājika through the nature of volition. The same applies above as well. Duve means two types of consciousness associated with aversion. Dasa cittānī means the eight types of consciousness accompanied by greed and the two types of consciousness associated with aversion. Labbhare means they are obtained in the sense of being associated.
316.Tasmāti yasmā yathāvuttacittehi sampayuttaṃ, tena hetunā.Kriyāti karaṇena āpajjitabbattā kiriyā. Vītikkamasaññāya abhāvena muccanato saññāya vimokkho etassātisaññāvimokkhaṃ. Lokavajjantilokena akusalabhāvato vajjanīyantidīpitaṃpakāsitaṃ.
316. Tasmā means because it is associated with the consciousnesses as stated. Kriyā means an action, because it must be committed through action. Saññāvimokkhaṃ means it has release from perception because one is freed due to the absence of the perception of transgression. Lokavajjaṃ means it should be avoided by the world because of its unwholesome nature. Dīpitaṃ means revealed.
317.Āpattiyaṃyevātievakārena na sikkhāpadeti dasseti.Idaṃ vidhānanti samuṭṭhānādikaṃ idaṃ yathāvuttaṃ vidhānaṃ.Vibhāvināti paññavatā vinayadharena.
317. Āpattiyaṃyeva means the eva shows that it is not a training rule. Idaṃ vidhānaṃ means this arrangement, such as the arising, etc., as stated. Vibhāvinā means by the discerning, by the expert in the Vinaya.
318-9.Mudupiṭṭhi cāti latā viya namitvā karaṇaṃ dassetvā naccituṃ samavāhitvā mudukatapiṭṭhiko ca.Lambī cāti palambamānena dīghena aṅgajātena yutto. Lambatītilambaṃ,aṅgajātaṃ, taṃ yassa atthi so lambī. Ime dvepi kāmapariḷāhāturabhāve sati attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhaṃ, vaccamaggañca pavesetvā vītikkamitumarahattā pārājikāpannasadisattā parivajjitā.Mukhaggāhīti mukhena gahaṇaṃmukhaggāho,so etassa atthīti mukhaggāhī, parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhantoti attho.Nisīdakoti parassa aṅgajāte attano vaccamaggena nisīdanto. Ime dve sahavāsikānaṃ sīlavināsanato aññehi saṃvasituṃ anarahāti pārājikāpannasadisattā vivajjitā.Tesanti asaṃvāsatāsāmaññena cattāro pārājikāpanne saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Tesañca maggenamaggapaṭipattisāmaññena paṭhamapārājikāpannasseva anulomikāti gahetabbā’’ iccevaṃnissandehevuttaṃ. Iminā ca akatavītikkamānampi mudupiṭṭhiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ anulomapārājikabhāvo vuttoti viññāyati.
318-9. Mudupiṭṭhi cā means the one with a soft back, who, after showing the act of bending down like a creeper, having made arrangements to dance, and. Lambī cā means one endowed with a long organ of generation that hangs down. Lambaṃ means the organ of generation that hangs down; he who has that is lambī. Both of these are to be avoided because, when there is the state of being tormented by sexual infatuation, they are similar to one who has committed a Pārājika because they are capable of transgressing by inserting their own organ of generation into their own mouth or anus. Mukhaggāhī means the one who takes with the mouth; mukhaggāho means taking with the mouth; he who has that is mukhaggāhī, meaning one who takes another's organ of generation with their mouth. Nisīdako means one who sits on another's organ of generation with their own anus. These two are to be excluded because they are not fit to live with others, due to the destruction of the morality of those who live together, and are similar to one who has committed a Pārājika. Tesa means the four are included among those who have committed a Pārājika, by way of their shared characteristic of non-association. It should be understood that "because of the similarity of practicing what is not the path with the path, they should be regarded as analogous to the first Pārājika," is said without doubt. Through this it is understood that even for the mudupiṭṭhi, etc., who have not committed a transgression, the state of being analogous to a Pārājika is stated.
Samantapāsādikāyaṃpana –
However, in the Samantapāsādikā –
‘‘Aparānipi lambī, mudupiṭṭhiko, parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhāti, parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti imesaṃ catunnaṃ vasena cattāri anulomapārājikānīti vadanti. Etāni hi yasmā ubhinnaṃ rāgavasena sadisabhāvūpagatānaṃ dhammo ‘methunadhammo’ti vuccati, tasmā etena pariyāyena methunaṃ dhammaṃ appaṭisevitvāyeva kevalaṃ maggena maggappavesanavasena āpajjitabbattā methunadhammapārājikassa anulomentīti ‘anulomapārājikānī’ti vuccantī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.233) –
"Moreover, lambī, mudupiṭṭhiko, one who takes another's organ of generation with the mouth, one who sits upon another's organ of generation – concerning these four, some say that there are four analogous Pārājikas. For since the act of those who have attained a similar state due to the passion of both is called 'sexual intercourse', therefore, because they are capable of committing the offense merely through the insertion of the path into what is not the path, without actually engaging in sexual intercourse in this way, they are called 'analogous Pārājikas'," (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.233) –
sāratthadīpaniyaṃ–
in the Sāratthadīpanī –
‘‘Lambaṃdīghatāya palambamānaṃ aṅgajātametassāti lambī. So ettāvatā na pārājiko, atha kho yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ mukhe vā vaccamagge vā paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti. Mudukā piṭṭhi etassāti mudupiṭṭhiko, kataparikammāya mudukāya piṭṭhiyā samannāgato. Sopi yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhe paveseti tadā pārājiko hoti. Parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhātīti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa suttassa vā pamattassa vā aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhena gaṇhāti. Parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa aṅgajātaṃ kammaniyaṃ disvā attano vaccamaggena tassūpari abhinisīdati, taṃ attano vaccamaggaṃ pavesetīti attho. Lambīādayo cattāro kiñcāpi paṭhamapārājikena saṅgahitā, yasmā pana ubhinnaṃ rāgapariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhātena pariyāyena methunaṃ dhammaṃ appaṭisevino honti, tasmā visuṃ vuttā’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.233) –
"Lambī means one who has an organ of generation that hangs down due to its length. He is not a Pārājika by that much alone, but rather, when, afflicted by discontent, he inserts his own organ of generation into his mouth or anus, then he is a Pārājika. Mudupiṭṭhiko means one who has a soft back, one who is endowed with a soft back that has been prepared. He too is a Pārājika when, afflicted by discontent, he inserts his own organ of generation into his own mouth. 'One who takes another's organ of generation with the mouth' means one who, afflicted by discontent, takes the organ of generation of another who is asleep or inattentive with his own mouth. 'One who sits upon another's organ of generation' means one who, afflicted by discontent, sits upon another's organ of generation with his anus, having seen that it is fit for action, that is, he inserts his own anus upon it. Although the four, beginning with lambī, are included by the first Pārājika, because they do not engage in sexual intercourse by way of the state of being overcome by the passion of both, they are stated separately," (Sārattha. Ṭī. 2.233) –
Vuttattā ca katavītikkamāyevete ‘‘pārājikā’’ti gahetabbā.
And because it has been said, these should be regarded as "Pārājikas" only when a transgression has been committed.
Bhikkhunīnañca cattārīti ettha ‘‘asādhāraṇānī’’ti pāṭhaseso, bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnameva niyatāni ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā, vajjapaṭicchādikā, ukkhittānuvattikā, aṭṭhavatthukāti cattāri pārājikāni ca.Vibbhantā bhikkhunī sayanti ettha ‘‘tesaṃ anulomikā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tesaṃ catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ anulomikā sayaṃ vibbhantā bhikkhunī cāti yojanā. Cittavasikā hutvā attanā nivatthacīvarampi hi mātugāmānaṃ nivāsananīhārena sayameva nivāsetvā gihivesaṃ rocetvā gahitamatte sāsanato cutā bhikkhunī cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃkaraṇena gihibhāvāpannatāsāmaññena saṃvāsārahā na hontīti imesaṃ catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ anulomikā jātā.
Bhikkhunīnañca cattāri in this case the rest of the passage is "asādhāraṇānī" (not common), four Pārājikas that are not common to monks, but specific to nuns: ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā, vajjapaṭicchādikā, ukkhittānuvattikā, and aṭṭhavatthukā.Vibbhantā bhikkhunī sayaṃ in this case, "tesaṃ anulomikā" (analogous to those) should be brought in and connected. It should be construed that a nun who is herself deranged is analogous to those four Pārājikas. It also means that a nun who, being under the control of her mind, herself dresses up even the robe she has worn with the intention of clothing a woman, and having favored a lay person's appearance, is expelled from the Sāsana as soon as it is taken. Because of the similarity to having attained a lay state through such action, they are not fit to live together, and so they become analogous to these four Pārājikas.
Tathāti yathā ime dassitā tena asaṃvāsārahatāya, bhikkhubhāvāya abhabbatāya ca pārājikāva, tathā ekādasa abhabbapuggalāpi hontīti attho.Ekādasābhabbāti mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, paṇḍako, tiracchānagato, ubhatobyañjanako, theyyasaṃvāsako, bhikkhunidūsako, titthiyapakkantakoti ekādasa.Sabbete catuvīsatiete sabbe catuvīsati puggalā samodhānato veditabbāti adhippāyo.
Tathā means just as these have been shown, in that they are unfit for association and incapable of monkhood, and thus are Pārājikas, so also the eleven kinds of unfit individuals are. Ekādasābhabbā means eleven: one who has killed their mother, one who has killed their father, one who has killed an arahant, one who has caused a schism in the Saṅgha, one who has intentionally shed blood, a paṇḍaka, an animal, one with both sets of organs, one who steals association, one who defiles a nun, and one who has gone over to a heretical sect. Sabbete catuvīsati all these twenty-four individuals should be understood by way of combination, is the intention.
320.Ime catuvīsati pārājikā puggalā sīsacchinnova jīvituṃ idha bhikkhubhāvāya abhabbāti vuttāti yojanā.
320. These twenty-four Pārājika individuals are said to be incapable of living the monastic life here, like one whose head has been cut off, is the meaning.
321.Imesaṃ ekādasannaṃ abhabbatāya hetudassanatthamāha‘‘paṇḍako cā’’tiādi.Paṇḍako cāti āsittapaṇḍako, usūyapaṇḍako, pakkhapaṇḍako, opakkamikapaṇḍako, napuṃsakapaṇḍakoti vutto pañcavidho paṇḍako ca.Tiracchānoti tiriyaṃ añchati gacchatīti ‘‘tiracchāno’’ti gahito nāgasupaṇṇādiko sabbatiracchānayoniko ca. Yakkhādayo sabbe amanussāpi idha tiracchāneyeva saṅgahitāti veditabbā.Ubhatobyañjanopi cāti itthipurisabyañjanasādhakehi ubhato kammato jātāni thanādikāni byañjanāni yassāti nirutto itthiubhatobyañjano, purisaubhatobyañjanoti duvidho ubhatobyañjano ca.Vatthuvipannāti tabbhāvabhāvitāya bhikkhubhāvo vasati etthātivatthu,puggalānaṃ bhikkhubhāvārahatā, sā pana pabbajjākkhandhakāgatasabbadosavirahitaguṇasampayuttatā, taṃ vipannaṃ paṇḍakabhāvādiyogena yesaṃ te ‘‘vatthuvipannā’’ti gahetabbā.Hi-saddo hetumhi. Yasmā vatthuvipannā, tasmā idha attabhāve pabbajjāya abhabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Ahetupaṭisandhikā’’ti vacanena imesaṃ vipākāvaraṇayuttabhāvamāha, iminā etesaṃ maggādhigamassa vāritabhāvo dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
321. In order to show the reason for the unfitness of these eleven, he says ‘‘paṇḍako cā’’ etc. Paṇḍako cā means the five kinds of paṇḍaka that have been mentioned: āsittapaṇḍako, usūyapaṇḍako, pakkhapaṇḍako, opakkamikapaṇḍako, and napuṃsakapaṇḍako. Tiracchāno means "animal," that which goes horizontally (tiriyaṃ añchati gacchatīti), thus all animal species, beginning with nāgas and supaṇṇas, are included. It should be understood that all non-humans, beginning with yakkhas, are also included here as animals. Ubhatobyañjanopi cā means one with both sets of organs, of whom there are two kinds: a female ubhatobyañjana and a male ubhatobyañjana, which is defined as one who has female and male organs, such as breasts, that originate from both kinds of karma. Vatthuvipannā means those whose basis is ruined. Vatthu means that monkhood resides in this condition; it is the suitability of individuals for monkhood, but that is the state of being endowed with qualities that are free from all the faults mentioned in the Pabbajjākkhandhaka; they whose basis is ruined due to the condition of being a paṇḍaka, etc., are to be regarded as "vatthuvipannā". The word Hi is in the sense of reason. Because they are those whose basis is ruined, therefore it is said that they are unfit for ordination in this existence. By the statement ‘‘Ahetupaṭisandhikā’’, he indicates that they are endowed with a karmic obstruction, by this it should be understood that the way to the attainment of the paths is obstructed for them.
322.Pañcānantarikāti kammāvaraṇena yuttatāya saggamokkhasampattito parihāyitvā maraṇānantaraṃ apāyapaṭisandhiyaṃ niyatā mātughātakādayo pañcānantarikā ca.Theyyasaṃvāsopi cāti liṅgatthenako, saṃvāsatthenako, ubhayatthenakoti tividho theyyasaṃvāsako ca.Dūsakoti pakatattāya bhikkhuniyā methunaṃ paṭisevitvā tassā dūsitattā bhikkhuniṃ dūsetīti ‘‘bhikkhunidūsako’’ti vutto ca.Titthipakkantako cāti titthiyānaṃ laddhiṃ, vesañca rocetvā taṃ gahetvā tesamantaraṃ paviṭṭho ca. Iti aṭṭha pana kiriyānaṭṭhāti yojanā.Itīti idamatthattā imeti vuttaṃ hoti. Te imeti sambandho. Te ime aṭṭha pana mātuvadhādikiriyāya ihattabhāve bhikkhubhāvāya anarahā hutvā naṭṭhāti attho. Ettāvatā ekādasaabhabbānaṃ abhabbatāya kāraṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
322. Pañcānantarikā means the five ānantarika deeds, namely, those who have killed their mother, etc., who are determined to be reborn in the lower realms immediately after death, having declined from the attainment of heaven and liberation due to being endowed with karmic obstruction. Theyyasaṃvāsopi cā means the three kinds of those who steal association: one who steals association by appearance, one who steals association by association, and one who steals association by both. Dūsako means one who has defiled a nun, having engaged in sexual intercourse with a nun who has been previously ordained. Titthipakkantako cā means one who has gone over to a heretical sect, having favored their doctrine and appearance, and having taken them up and entered among them. Iti aṭṭha pana kiriyānaṭṭhāti means thus, indeed, eight are ruined by their actions. Itī means because of this meaning, it is said by this. "Te" is related to "imeti". It means that those eight, indeed, are ruined by their actions beginning with matricide, having become unfit for monkhood in this existence. So far, the reason for the unfitness of the eleven unfit individuals has been shown.
323.Mayā pārājikānaṃ sārabhūto yo ayaṃ vinicchayo vutto,tassavinicchayassaanusārenaanugamanenasesopivinicchayobudhenapaṇḍitena asesatova viññātuṃ sakkāti yojanā.
323. The essence of my explanation of the Pārājikas is what has been said; tassa means of that explanation; anusārena means in accordance with, by following; sesopi means the remaining explanation; budhena means by the wise; it is possible to fully understand it, is the meaning.
324.Paṭubhāvakare parame vividhehi nayehi yutte vinayapiṭake paramatthanayaṃ abhipatthayatā ayaṃ satataṃ pariyāpuṇitabboti yojanā. Tatthavividhehinānappakārehi.Nayehīti nīyanti vuttānusārena udīriyantīti ‘‘nayā’’ti vuttehi cakkapeyyālādīhi nayehi.Paramatthanayanti paramo ca so attho cātiparamattho,paramo vā visesena nicchitabbo atthoparamattho,soyeva vinicchayatthikānaṃ buddhiyā netabboti paramatthanayo, vinicchayūpāyo nīyati etenāti katvā ‘‘paramatthanayo’’ti vuccati, taṃ paramatthanayaṃ.Abhipatthayatāti vinayapiṭake vinicchayaṃ vā tadupāyaṃ vā patthayatā, icchantenāti attho. ‘‘Pariyāpuṇitabbo aya’’nti padacchedo. Ma-kāro āgamasandhijo, o-kārassa a-kārādeso.Pariyāpuṇitabboti paṭhitabbo, sotabbo cintetabbo dhāretabboti vuttaṃ hoti.Ayanti vinayavinicchayo.
324. This Vinaya Piṭaka, which causes understanding to arise, is supreme, and endowed with various methods, should be constantly studied by one who desires the supreme meaning. Therein, vividhehi means with various kinds of. Nayehī means by the "naya", which is said to be that by which one is guided and expressed in accordance with what has been said; by the cakkapeyyāla, etc. Paramatthanayaṃ means paramattho, which is the supreme meaning, or paramattho, which is the supreme meaning that should be especially determined, is the supreme meaning that should be guided by the intelligence of those who seek explanation; "paramatthanayo" is said to be that by which the means of explanation is guided, that supreme meaning. Abhipatthayatā means by one who desires or wishes for explanation or the means to it in the Vinaya Piṭaka. "Pariyāpuṇitabbo ayaṃ" is the word division. The Ma-sound is a euphonic addition, and the O-sound becomes the A-sound. Pariyāpuṇitabbo means it should be learned, heard, thought about, and retained. Ayaṃ means the Vinaya explanation.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Explanation of the Vinayavinicchaya,
Catutthapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Fourth Pārājikakathāvaṇṇanā is finished.
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā
325.Evaṃ nānānayapaṭimaṇḍitassa pārājikakaṇḍassa vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni tadanantaramuddiṭṭhassa terasakaṇḍassa vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘mocetukāmatā’’tiādi. Mocetuṃ kāmetītimocetukāmo,tassa bhāvomocetukāmatā,tāya sampayuttaṃ cittaṃmocetukāmatācittaṃ. Ettha ‘‘mocetukāmatā’’ti iminā ekādasasu rāgesu ‘‘mocanassādo’’ti vuttaṃ imassa saṅghādisesassa mūlakāraṇaṃ sukkamocanavisayaṃ rāgamāha.
325. Thus, having shown the explanation of the Pārājikakaṇḍa, which is adorned with various methods, now, in order to show the explanation of the thirteen sections that were mentioned immediately after that, he says ‘‘mocetukāmatā’’ etc. Mocetuṃ kāmetīti mocetukāmo, tassa bhāvo mocetukāmatā, tāya sampayuttaṃ cittaṃ mocetukāmatācittaṃ. Here, by "mocetukāmatā", he indicates the root cause of this Saṅghādisesa, the passion related to the release of semen, the pleasure of release (mocanassādo), among the eleven types of passion.
Ekādasarāgānāma ‘‘mocanassādo, muccanassādo, muttassādo, methunassādo, phassassādo, kaṇḍuvanassādo, dassanassādo, nisajjassādo, vācassādo, gehassitapemaṃ, vanabhaṅgiya’’nti evamāgatā. Idhamocanaṃnāma sambhavadhātumocanaṃ, tadatthāya tabbisayarāgasampayuttavedanāmocanassādonāma. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘mocetuṃ assādo mocanassādo’’ti. Muccamāne assādo muccanassādo, sambhavadhātumhi muccamāne taṃrāgasampayuttā vedanāmuccanassādonāma. Eteneva nayena muttassādādivācassādāvasānesu padesu atthakkamo veditabbo. Imehi navahi padehi assādasīsena kuntayaṭṭhiñāyena taṃsahacarito rāgo dassito. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘navahi padehi sampayuttaassādasīsena rāgo vutto’’ti.
The eleven rāgas are those that come in the form of "the pleasure of release (mocanassādo), the pleasure of being released (muccanassādo), the pleasure of having been released (muttassādo), the pleasure of sexual intercourse (methunassādo), the pleasure of contact (phassassādo), the pleasure of scratching (kaṇḍuvanassādo), the pleasure of seeing (dassanassādo), the pleasure of sitting (nisajjassādo), the pleasure of speaking (vācassādo), affection dwelling in the home (gehassitapemaṃ), and forest gleanings (vanabhaṅgiya)." Here, mocanaṃ means the emission of the generative element; the feeling associated with the rāga pertaining to that is mocanassādo. Therefore, it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "The pleasure of emitting is mocanassādo." The pleasure experienced while the generative element is being emitted is muccanassādo; the feeling associated with that rāga while the generative element is being emitted is muccanassādo. In this same manner, the sequence of meanings should be understood in the passages ending with the pleasure of speaking (vācassādāvasānesu). By these nine terms, rāga together with its associated pleasure is shown in the manner of a spearhead. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "By the nine terms, rāga is stated with the pleasure it is associated with as the head."
Gehassitapemanti ettha gehaṭṭhā mātuādayo ādheyyaādhāravohārena‘‘gehā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’tiādīsu viya tannissito sinehapariyāyo rāgo ‘‘gehassitapema’’nti vutto. Iminā padena rāgassa sabhāvo sandassito. Vanato bhañjitvā ābhataṃ yaṃ kiñci phalapupphādivanabhaṅgiyaṃnāma. Idha pana rāgavasena paṭibaddhacittaṃ mātugāmehi virahadukkhāpanayanatthaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.240) tesaṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā dassanaphusanavasena vindituṃ rāgīhi gahetabbato tehi piḷandhitamālasahitaṃ tambūlanti evamādi ‘‘vanabhaṅgiya’’nti adhippetaṃ. Iminā patthitavisayagocaro rāgo tadāyattavatthuvasena sandassito. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ekena padena sarūpeneva rāgo, ekena padena vatthunā vutto. Vanabhaṅgo hi rāgassa vatthu, na rāgoyevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.240).
In gehassitapema, mother and others living in the home are called gehā using the expression of container and content. Like in "the couches make a noise" etc, the affection based on that is called "gehassitapema". With this term, the nature of rāga is shown. Anything, such as fruits or flowers, brought having broken (a twig) from the forest is called vanabhaṅgiyaṃ. But here, vanabhaṅgiyaṃ is intended to mean, due to rāga, a betel (nut) along with a garland worn (around the neck), which is taken by those who are lustful to experience seeing and touching by placing them in the place of mothers and wives to remove the sorrow of separation from them (whose) minds are bound with rāga. By this, rāga which has desired object as its range is shown by way of the object that depends on it. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "By one term, rāga is stated by its own nature, by one term it is stated by the object. For vanabhaṅga is the object of rāga, not rāga itself." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.240)
‘‘vāyāmo’’ti iminā dasseti.Vāyāmonāma taṃcittasampayuttavīriyaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘semho guḷo’’tiādīsu viya phale hetūpacārañāyena vītikkamassa visesahetubhūtavīriyavācakena ca padena vītikkamova vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ajjhattabāhiravatthughaṭṭanaṃ, ākāse kaṭikampananti sukkamocanattho vāyāmoti attho. Sukkassa mocanaṃ sukkamocanaṃ.
‘‘vāyāmo’’ indicates this. Vāyāmo means the effort associated with that thought. Here, however, just as in "the phlegm is molasses," the transgression itself should be seen as stated by the term denoting effort, which is the specific cause of transgression, using the device of treating the effect as the cause. The rubbing of internal or external objects, the shaking of the waist in the air, this means effort for the emission of semen. Emission of semen is sukkamocanaṃ.
sukkassāti ‘‘sukkanti dasa sukkāni nīlaṃ pītakaṃ lohitakaṃ odātaṃ takkavaṇṇaṃ dakavaṇṇaṃ telavaṇṇaṃ khīravaṇṇaṃ dadhivaṇṇaṃ sappivaṇṇa’’nti (pārā. 237)padabhājanevuttāni sattānaṃ pittādiāsayabhedena, pathavidhātuādīnaṃ catunnaṃ vā rasasoṇitamaṃsamedaaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjānaṃ channaṃ dehadhātūnaṃ vā bhedena anekadhā bhinne dasavidhe sukke aññatarassa sukkassāti attho. Mocanaṃ vissaṭṭhīti pariyāyaṃ, pakatiyā ṭhitasakaṭṭhānato mocananti attho. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘vissaṭṭhīti ṭhānato cāvanā vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 237). Iha ‘‘ṭhānaṃ nāma vatthisīsasaṅkhātaṃ muttakaraṇamūla’’nti keci. ‘‘Kaṭī’’ti apare. ‘‘Sakalakāyo’’ti aññe. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vacanesu ‘‘tatiyassa bhāsitaṃ subhāsita’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237)aṭṭhakathāyaṃtatiyavādassa katapāsaṃsattā kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañca muttakarīsakheḷasiṅghāṇikāthaddhasukkhacammañca vajjetvā avasesaṃ sakalasarīraṃ kāyappasādabhāvajīvitindriyaabaddhapittānaṃ viya sambhavadhātuyā ca ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
sukkassā: “Sukka means ten kinds of sukka: blue, yellow, red, white, takkavaṇṇa, dakavaṇṇa, telavaṇṇa, khīravaṇṇa, dadhivaṇṇa, sappivaṇṇa” (pārā. 237) as stated in the Padabhājana, according to the difference in the dwelling of bile etc. of beings, or according to the difference in the four primary elements or according to the difference in the six body elements of rasa (essence), blood, flesh, sinew, bone and bone marrow, sukka is divided in many ways, here it means one of the ten kinds of divided sukka. Mocanaṃ, emission, is a synonym; it means emission from its natural position. As it is said in the Padabhājana, “vissaṭṭhīti means removal from its position” (pārā. 237). Here, some say "position means the root of the organ of secretion, known as the head of the bladder". Others say "waist". Others say "entire body". Among these three statements, "the third one is well spoken" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237), because the Aṭṭhakathā praises the third view, except for the hair of the head and body, nails, teeth which are free of flesh, and except for the excrement, urine, phlegm, snot, hardened sukha and skin, the entire remaining body is to be known as the position for the generative element, like for the bile bound to the physical sensitivity, state and life faculty.
uccāliṅgapāṇakānāma lomasapāṇā, yesaṃ lome alline aṅgajātaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti.
uccāliṅgapāṇakā means those who have hairs in their hands, those whose hairs make the sexual organ that is worthy of action wet.
Aññatra supinantenāti supino eva supinanto, nissakkavacanappasaṅge karaṇavacanato supinantāti attho.Supinānāma ‘‘vātādidhātukkhobhavasena vā pubbānubhūtaitthirūpādivisayavasena vā iṭṭhāniṭṭhadevatānubhāvena vā puññena paṭilabhitabbaatthassa, apuññena pattabbānatthassa ca pubbanimittavasena vā hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237) vuttesu catūsu kāraṇesu ekena kāraṇena kapiniddāya supine dissamānārammaṇato yaṃ sukkamocanaṃ hoti, taṃ avisayaṃ sukkamocanaṃ vināti vuttaṃ hoti.
Aññatra supinantenā: supino is itself supinanto; from the perspective of expression when there is no deliberation, the meaning is supinantāti. Supinā means, among the four causes stated as "either because of the disturbance of elements such as wind, or because of objects such as previously experienced female forms, or because of the power of desired or undesired deities, or as a prior sign of benefit to be obtained by merit and harm to be suffered by demerit" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237), the emission of semen that occurs due to an object appearing in a dream due to drowsiness, by one cause, that emission of semen is said to be not an offense.
saṅghādisesatā. Saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhātukāmassa kulaputtassa ādimhi parivāsadānatthaṃ, majjhe ca mūlāyapaṭikassanena vinā vā saha vā mānattadānatthaṃ, avasāne abbhānatthañca saṅgho esitabboti ‘‘saṅgho ādimhi ceva sese ca icchitabbo assāti saṅghādiseso’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttattā saṅghādisesā nāma, sukkavissaṭṭhisaṅghādisesāpatti hotīti attho. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘saṅghova tassā āpattiyā parivāsaṃ deti, mūlāya paṭikassati, mānattaṃ deti, abbheti, na sambahulā, na ekapuggalo, tena vuccati ‘saṅghādiseso’ti. Tasseva āpattinikāyassa nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tenapi vuccati ‘saṅghādiseso’’ti (pārā. 237). Ettha ca parivāsādikathā saṅghādisesāvasāne āgataṭṭhāneyeva āvi bhavissati.
saṅghādisesatā: For a clansman who, having incurred a Saṅghādisesa offense, wishes to be absolved from it, the Saṅgha must be requested, firstly for the granting of parivāsa, and in the middle, either without or with retraction to the root offense, for the granting of mānatta, and at the end for the act of absolution. Thus, “because the Sangha is required at the beginning and at the end, it is a Saṅghādisesa offense,” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) is said. It means it is a Saṅghādisesa offense of emission of semen. As it is said in the Padabhājana, “The Saṅgha itself grants parivāsa for that offense, retracts to the root, grants mānatta, absolves; not many, not one individual; therefore it is called ‘Saṅghādisesa’. That itself is the name, designation, and epithet for the group of offenses; therefore it is also called ‘Saṅghādisesa’” (pārā. 237). Here, the discussion of parivāsa etc. will become clear in the place where it occurs at the end of the Saṅghādisesa section.
326.Ettāvatā mūlasikkhāpadāgataṃ attūpakkamamūlakaṃ āpattiṃ dassetvā idāni imissā saṅghādisesāpattiyā parūpakkamenapi āpajjanaṃ dassetumāha‘‘parenā’’tiādi.Upakkamāpetvāti aṅgajātassa gahaṇaṃ vā ghaṭṭanaṃ vā kāretvā.
326.Having thus shown the offense based on self-induced effort, which is mentioned in the root training rule, now, in order to show the incurring of this Saṅghādisesa offense even by effort induced by another, he says, "parenā" etc. Upakkamāpetvā means having someone else grasp or rub the sexual organ.
327.Sañciccāti ‘‘upakkamāmi mocessāmī’’ti cetetvā pakappetvā.Upakkamantassāti ajjhattarūpādīsu tīsu yattha katthaci ghaṭṭentassa.Samuddiṭṭhanti ‘‘ceteti upakkamati na muccati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 262)padabhājanebhagavatā vuttanti adhippāyo.
327.Sañciccā means having the intention and determination "I will make an effort, I will emit." Upakkamantassā means while rubbing anywhere on the three, internal form etc. Samuddiṭṭha means what was stated by the Blessed One in the Padabhājana "he intends, he makes an effort, he does not emit, there is an offense of thullaccaya" (pārā. 262).
328.Imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ ‘‘attano aṅgajātaṃ upakkamantassā’’ti iminā ajjhattarūpe vā bahiddhārūpe vā ajjhattabahiddhārūpe vā attano aṅgajātaṃ ghaṭṭentassāti imassa atthassa vuttattā aṅgajātaghaṭṭanena vinābhāvato iminā asaṅgayhamānassāpi ākāse kaṭikampanena sukkamocane saṅghādisesassa paṭhamagāthāyaṃ ‘‘vāyāmo’’ti sāmaññavacanena saṅgahitattā taṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno mocanādhippāyassa ākāse kaṭiṃ kampentassa asuci mucci…pe… asuci na mucci. Tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosi…pe… anāpatti bhikkhu saṅghādisesassa, āpatti thullaccayassā’’tiākāsekaṭikampanavatthumhivuttattā amutte thullaccayaṃ saṅgahetumāha‘‘sañciccā’’tiādi.
328.In this verse, because the meaning of "while rubbing his own sexual organ," by this phrase "attano aṅgajātaṃ upakkamantassā," has been stated as "while rubbing his own sexual organ on an internal form or an external form or an internal-external form," because of the absence of the act of rubbing the sexual organ, even for one who is not included by this (verse), in the case of emission of semen by shaking the waist in the air, because it is included by the general term "vāyāmo" in the first verse of the Saṅghādisesa section, setting that aside, "at that time, semen was emitted from a certain bhikkhu who, with the intention of emitting, was shaking his waist in the air…pe…semen was not emitted. He had remorse…pe…there is no offense of Saṅghādisesa for the bhikkhu, there is an offense of thullaccaya," because it is stated in the case of shaking the waist in the air, in order to include thullaccaya in the case of non-emission, he says ‘‘sañciccā’’ etc.
sañciccāti ‘‘upakkamāmi mocessāmī’’ti jānitvā sañjānitvāti attho. ‘‘Upakkamantassā’’ti sāmaññato taṃ visesetuṃ‘‘ākāse kampanenapī’’ti āha, kaṭikampanenāti gahetabbaṃ. Kathamidaṃ labbhatīti ce? Imāya kathāya saṅgahetabbavatthumhi ‘‘ākāse kaṭiṃ kampentassā’’ti (pārā. 266) pāṭhe ‘‘kaṭiṃ kampentassā’’ti vacanasahacarassa ‘‘ākāse’’ti vacanassa sannidhānabalena labbhati atthappakaraṇasaddantarasannidhānā saddānaṃ visesatthadīpanato.
sañciccā means having known and understood "I will make an effort, I will emit". In order to specify that general statement "Upakkamantassā", he says ‘‘ākāse kampanenapī’’, it should be taken as "kaṭikampanena". How is this obtained? If it is asked, in the case to be included by this statement, in the reading "ākāse kaṭiṃ kampentassā" (pārā. 266), the word "ākāse" is obtained by the power of proximity of the word "kaṭiṃ kampentassā", because proximity of meaning, context, word and intonation illuminates the specific meaning of words.
329.Vatthinti muttavatthiṃ, muttakaraṇassa vatthinti attho.Kīḷāya pūretvāti gāmadārako viya kīḷitukāmatāya muttavatthiṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā pūretvāti attho. Yathāhavatthivatthumhi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘te bhikkhū vatthiṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā pūretvā pūretvā vissajjentā gāmadārakāviya passāvamakaṃsū’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.264). ‘‘Na vaṭṭatī’’ti sāmaññena kasmā vuttanti? Tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ vuttanayena mocanādhippāyena daḷhaṃ gahetvā pūretvā pūretvā vissajjentassa sukke mutte mocanādhippāyo ceteti, upakkamati, muccatīti aṅgānaṃ sampannattā saṅghādisesassa, amutte thullaccayassa sambhavato ubhayasaṅgahatthamāha.
329.Vatthi means bladder, the bladder of semen, it means the container of the organ of secretion. Kīḷāya pūretvā means, like village boys, having firmly grasped and filled the bladder with the desire to play. As it is said in the Vatthivatthu Aṭṭhakathā, “Those bhikkhus, having firmly grasped and filled the bladder, urinated like village boys” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.264). Why is it stated generally "Na vaṭṭatī"? In that case, for one who, in the manner stated, with the intention of emitting, having firmly grasped and filled it, emits it, if semen is emitted, because the conditions of "he intends emission, he makes an effort, he emits" are complete, there is a Saṅghādisesa offense; if not emitted, there is a Thullaccaya offense; to include both, he states it.
330.Upanijjhāyanavatthumhi‘‘na ca bhikkhave sārattena mātugāmassa aṅgajātaṃ upanijjhāyitabbaṃ, yo upanijjhāyeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 266)pāḷiyaṃ‘‘mātugāmassā’’ti sāmaññena vuttattā‘‘tissanna’’nti vadati.Tissannaṃ pana itthīnanti manussāmanussatiracchānagatavasena tissannaṃ itthīnaṃ. ‘‘Aṅgajāta’’nti visesetvā vuttattā‘‘nimitta’’nti muttakaraṇameva vuccati, paṭasatenāpi paṭicchāditaṃ vā appaṭicchāditaṃ vā yonimagganti attho. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sacepi paṭasataṃ nivatthā hoti, purato vā pacchato vā ṭhatvā ‘imasmiṃ nāma okāse nimitta’nti upanijjhāyantassa dukkaṭameva. Anivatthānaṃ gāmadārikānaṃ nimittaṃ upanijjhāyantassa pana kimeva vattabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.266).Purato vāti ettha ‘‘ṭhatvā’’ti pāṭhaseso.
330.In the Upanijjhāyanavatthu, "Bhikkhus, the sexual organ of a woman should not be stared at intently. Whoever should stare intently, there is an offense of dukkaṭa” (pārā. 266), because in the Pāḷi, it is stated generally "mātugāmassā", he says ‘‘tissanna’’. Tissannaṃ pana itthīnaṃ: for three kinds of women, namely, human, non-human, and animal. Because it is stated specifically "Aṅgajāta", ‘‘nimitta’’ means the organ of secretion itself, it means the vaginal passage covered or uncovered even by a hundred cloths. Therefore, it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, “Even if she is wearing a hundred cloths, if he stands in front or behind and stares intently, thinking ‘the sexual organ is in this place,’ there is only a dukkaṭa offense. What then should be said about one who stares intently at the sexual organ of village girls who are not wearing anything?” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.266). Purato vā, here, the remainder of the reading is "ṭhatvā".
331.Ekena…pe… passatoekaṃdukkaṭanti sambandho. ‘‘Ekena payogena ekaṃ dukkaṭa’’nti vacanato anekehi payogehi anekāni dukkaṭānīti byatirekato labbhati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ito cito ca viloketvā punappunaṃ upanijjhāyantassa payoge payoge dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.266). Imissā aṭṭhakathāya ‘‘ito cito cā’’ti vuttattāummīlananimīlananti ettha ‘‘vividhā taṃ anoloketvā tameva olokentassā’’ti labbhati.
331.Ekena…pe…passato ekaṃ dukkaṭanti sambandho. Because of the statement "For each effort, one dukkaṭa," it is obtained by contraposition that with many efforts, there are many dukkaṭa offenses. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, “For one who looks this way and that, and stares intently again and again, there is a dukkaṭa offense for each effort” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.266). Because in this Aṭṭhakathā it is said "ito cito ca", in ummīlananimīlana, it is obtained that "while turning (the eyes) this way and that, looking at that same thing."
332.Amocanādhippāyassa muttasmiṃ anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā. Mocanādhippāyaṃ vinā bhesajjakaraṇatthaṃ suddhacittena aṅgajāte bhesajjalepaṃ karontassa vā suddhacitteneva uccārapassāvādiṃ karontassa vā muttepi anāpattīti idaṃ ‘‘anāpatti supinantena namocanādhippāyassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 263) nayenaanāpattivārevuttamevāti attho.
332.Anāpatti pakāsitā, it is said that there is no offense for one who does not have the intention to emit. Even if semen is emitted from someone who, with a pure mind, is applying medicine to the sexual organ for the purpose of making medicine, or from one who, with a pure mind, is defecating or urinating, there is no offense; this is said in the anāpattivāre in the same way as "anāpatti supinantena namocanādhippāyassā" etc. (pārā. 263).
‘‘anupakkamatopi ca muttasmiṃ anāpatti pakāsitā’’ti. Mocanassādarāgena pīḷito hutvā ‘‘aho vata me mucceyyā’’ti cintetvā vā evarūpamocanassādarāgapīḷāpubbaṅgamacitte asatipi kevalaṃ kāmavitakkamattena upahato hutvā tādisaajjhattikabāhiravatthūsu ghaṭṭanavasena vā ākāse kaṭikampanavasena vā upakkamaṃ akarontassa tādisacintābalena vā kāmavitakkabalena vā sukke muttepi anāpattīti idaṃ yathāvuttapāṭhavasena pakāsitanti attho.
‘‘anupakkamatopi ca muttasmiṃ anāpatti pakāsitā’’. Even if semen is emitted from one who, being afflicted with the pleasure of release, thinks "oh, if only I could emit", or from one who, even in the absence of a mind preceded by such affliction with the pleasure of release, being affected only by thoughts of desire, without making an effort by rubbing such internal or external objects or by shaking the waist in the air, by the power of such thoughts or by the power of thoughts of desire, there is no offense; this is stated in the manner as said.
Supinantena muttasmiṃ, anāpatti pakāsitāti ettha antasaddatthābhāvato supineti attho. Supine methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa vā mātugāmehi kāyasaṃsaggaṃ āpajjantassa vā sukke muttepi avisayattā anāpattipāḷiyaṃ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu supinantenā’’ti (pārā. 263) iminā pakāsitāti attho.
Supinantena muttasmiṃ, anāpatti pakāsitā: Here, because there is no sense of the word "anta", it means supine. Even if semen is emitted from one who is engaging in sexual activity in a dream or from one who is engaging in bodily contact with women, because it is not intentional, there is no offense, this is said in the Pāḷi by this "anāpatti bhikkhu supinantenā" (pārā. 263).
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘supine pana uppannāya assādacetanāya sacassa visayo hoti, niccalena bhavitabbaṃ. Na hatthena nimittaṃ kīḷāpetabbaṃ. Kāsāvapaccattharaṇarakkhanatthaṃ pana hatthapuṭena gahetvā jagganatthāya udakaṭṭhānaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.262) vuttattā aṇḍapālikā kikīsakuṇā viya, vālapālikā camarī viya, ekanettapālako puriso viya ca kāyajīvitepi apekkhaṃ pahāya sīlaṃ rakkhitukāmena sikkhākāmena nibbānagāminipaṭipattiṃ pūretukāmena kulaputtena ‘‘aññatra supinantā’’ti (pārā. 237) vadato tathāgatassa adhippāyānukūlaṃ aṭṭhakathāto ñatvā appamattena paṭipajjitabbanti ayamatrānusāsanī.
In the Aṭṭhakathā, “If, in a dream, a feeling of pleasure arises, there must be steadiness. The sexual organ should not be played with by hand. But it is permissible to go to the water station to wash, holding the organ with the cupped hand to protect the lower robe” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.262). Therefore, like the aṇḍapālikā kikī bird, like the vālapālikā yak, and like the person guarding one eye, a clansman who wishes to protect his sīla, having abandoned regard even for his body and life, who is a trainee, who wishes to fulfill the path leading to Nibbāna, should know from the Aṭṭhakathā in accordance with the intention of the Tathāgata who says "aññatra supinantā" (pārā. 237) and practice diligently; this is the instruction here.
Sukkavissaṭṭhikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sukkavissaṭṭhikathā.
333.Manussitthinti manussajātikaṃ itthiṃ, ‘‘mātugāmo nāma manussitthī, na yakkhī, na petī, na tiracchānagatā, antamaso tadahujātāpi dārikā, pageva mahattarī’’ti (pārā. 271)padabhājanevuttattā tadahujātakumārikābhāvenapi ṭhitaṃ jīvamānakamanussamātugāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Manussitthi’’nti sāmaññavacanena jīvamānakamanussitthinti ayaṃ viseso kuto labbhatīti?Vinītavatthumhi(pārā. 281 ādayo) matitthiyā kāyaṃ phusantassa thullaccayavacanato pārisesato labbhati.Āmasantoti ‘‘hatthaggāhaṃ vā veṇiggāhaṃ vā aññatarassa vā aññatarassa vā aṅgassa parāmasana’’nti (pārā. 270) vuttattā hatthādiaṅgapaccaṅgaphusanādinānappakārānaṃ aññatarena pakārena āmasantoti attho. Attano kāyena itthiyā kāyassa saṃsagge missībhāve rāgokāyasaṃsaggarāgo. Saṅghādiseso etassa atthītisaṅghādisesiko,kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādiseso āpanno hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
333. Manussitthi means a female of human birth. As it is said in the Padabhājana, "A woman means a female human being, not a yakkhi, not a peti, not an animal, even a girl born that very day, let alone a grown woman" (pārā. 271), it refers to a living female human being, even in the state of a young girl born that day. Why is this distinction, "a living female human being," obtained from the general term "manussitthi"? It is obtained by implication (pārisesato) from the rule of a thullaccaya offense for touching the body of a dead woman in the Vinītavatthu (pārā. 281 onwards). Āmasanto means touching in some way, as it is said, "whether by holding the hand, or holding the braid, or touching any part of any limb" (pārā. 270), meaning touching any part or appendage of the body, such as the hand, in various ways. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgo is the lustful desire (rāga) for bodily contact, the mixing together (saṃsagge missībhāve) of one’s own body with that of a woman. Saṅghādisesiko means one who has incurred a saṅghādisesa; it means that one has incurred the saṅghādisesa of bodily contact.
334.Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena itthiyā antamaso lomampi attano sarīrelomenaphusantassa bhikkhuno saṅghādisesāpatti hotīti yojanā. Ettha (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.274) ‘‘lomagaṇanāya saṅghādisesā hontī’’ti kurundaṭṭhakathāmatassa aṭṭhitattā, ‘‘koṭṭhāsagaṇanāya na hoti, itthigaṇanāya hotī’’ti mahāaṭṭhakathāmatassa ṭhitattā saṅghasantake mañcapīṭhe paccattharaṇādinā kenaci appaṭicchādite phusantassa viya lomagaṇanāya ahutvā phuṭṭhalomānaṃ bahuttepi ekasmiṃ payoge ekā eva āpatti, bahūsu payogesu payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo hontīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ.
334. The construction is that a bhikkhu incurs a saṅghādisesa offense if, with lustful intention for bodily contact, he touches a woman’s body, even just a hair, with his own body lomena. Here, because the Kurunda commentary’s view that "the counting of hairs results in saṅghādisesa offenses" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.274) is not established, and because the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā's view that "counting body parts does not result in an offense, but counting women does" is established, the conclusion is that, just as when touching an un-covered Saṅgha-owned cot or seat, even if many hairs are touched, there is only one offense in one instance; but in multiple instances, there are offenses according to the number of instances.
335.Itthiyāti manussitthiyā.Samphuṭṭhoti hatthādisarīrāvayave saṃsaggaṃ samāpanno. Sevanacetanovāyamitvākāyasaṃsaggarāgena attano kāyaṃ cāletvāti attho.Saṅghādisesatāti ettha sakatthe taddhitappaccayo.‘‘Saṅghādisesitā’’ti pana pāṭho sundaro, saṅghādisesassa atthitā vijjamānabhāvoti attho. Saṅghādisesāpattiyā sabbhāvasaṅkhātā atthitā īpaccayatthe puggale saṅghādisesīsaddapavattinimittaṃ hotīti bhāvapaccayo taṃatthavasena labbhati. Yathāhu ‘‘yassa guṇassa hi bhāvā dabbe saddasanniveso, tadabhidhāne ttatādayo’’ti.
335. Itthiyā means of a female human being. Samphuṭṭho means having attained contact with body parts such as the hands. Vāyamitvā means deliberately moving one’s body with lustful intention for bodily contact. Saṅghādisesatā here is a taddhita suffix used in its own sense (sakatthe). However, the reading "saṅghādisesitā" is more elegant, meaning the existence or presence of a saṅghādisesa. The existence, known as the state of being subject to a saṅghādisesa offense, is obtained from the meaning of the suffix ī, as the instrumental cause for the application of the word saṅghādisesī to a person. As they say, "The combination of sound in a substance is due to the nature of its qualities; ttatādayo are used to denote it."
336.Ekena hatthena gahetvāti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ettha ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Manussitthi’’nti ajjhāhāro.Taṃmanussitthiṃ.Tattha tatthāti itthiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sarīrāvayave.‘‘Ekāvāpattī’’ti paṭhamaṃ gahitahatthassa anapanītattā vuttaṃ. Gahitahatthaṃ pana mocetvā punappunaṃ phusantassa payogagaṇanāya āpatti hotīti byatirekato labbhati.
336. Ekena hatthena gahetvā (Kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) should be connected by supplying "with lustful intention for bodily contact." Manussitthi is to be supplied by implication. Taṃ means that female human being. Tattha tattha means on this and that part of the woman's body. "Ekāvāpattī" is said because the hand that was first taken has not been removed. However, it is obtained by difference (byatirekato) that if, after releasing the hand that was taken, one touches again and again, there are offenses according to the number of instances.
337.Ekena hatthenaaggahetvāsīsato yāva pādaṃ, pādato yāva sīsañca kāyā hatthaṃ amocetvā divasampi taṃ itthiṃ phusantassa ekāvāpattīti yojanā. Etthāpi ‘‘amocetvā’’ti byatirekato mocetvā phusantassa payogagaṇanāya anekāpattiyoti labbhati.
337. The construction is that if one touches a woman from head to foot, or from foot to head, without releasing the hand, even for a whole day, there is only one offense. Here too, it is obtained by difference ("amocetvā") that if one touches after releasing, there are many offenses according to the number of instances.
338.Ekato gahitapañcaṅgulīnaṃ gaṇanāya sace āpatti siyā, ekassa mātugāmassa sarīraṃ rāgacittena phusantassa dvattiṃsakalāpakoṭṭhāsato byatirekassa sarīrassābhāvā dvattiṃsakalāpakoṭṭhāsagaṇanāya āpattiyā bhavitabbaṃ, tathā abhāvato idampi na hotīti dassanatthaṃ‘‘na hi koṭṭhāsato siyā’’ti āha.
338. If there were to be an offense according to the counting of the five fingers taken together, then since there is no distinction of body from the thirty-two kalāpa constituents when touching the body of one woman with lustful thoughts, there should be offenses according to the counting of the thirty-two kalāpa constituents; to show that this is not so, because of the absence of such distinction, he said, "na hi koṭṭhāsato siyā".
340-1.Itthiyā vimatissāpiattanokāyena itthiyākāyaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā, itthiyā paṇḍakādisaññinopi attanopikāyenaitthiyākāyaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā.Ādi-saddena purisatiracchānagatānaṃ saṅgaho. Itthiyā itthisaññino attanokāyenaitthiyā kāyasambaddhaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā.Paṇḍakepaṇḍakasaññino attanokāyenapaṇḍakassa kāyaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā.Yakkhipetīsuyakkhipetisaññino attanokāyenatāsaṃ kāyaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyāti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘paṇḍakaggahaṇena ubhatobyañjanakopi gayhatī’’tivajirabuddhiṭīkāyaṃvuttaṃ. ‘‘Itthiyā vematikassāpi paṇḍakādisaññinopi attanokāyenaitthiyā kāyasambaddhaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā’’ti na yojetabbaṃ. Kasmā? Tathā yojanāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, na thullaccayanti aniṭṭhappasaṅgato.
340-1. Itthiyā vimatissāpi if even when uncertain about the woman, one touches the woman’s body with one’s own kāyena, there would be a thullaccaya offense for him; even if the woman is perceived as a paṇḍaka, etc., and even if one perceives oneself as such, if one touches the woman’s body with one’s own kāyena, there would be a thullaccaya offense for him. The word Ādi includes male animals. If a man, perceiving her as a woman, touches something connected to the woman's body with his own kāyena, there would be a thullaccaya offense for him. If a paṇḍaka, perceiving himself as a paṇḍaka, touches the body of a paṇḍaka with his own kāyena, there would be a thullaccaya offense for him. If one perceiving them as a yakkhi or petī, touches their body with one's own kāyena, there would be a thullaccaya offense for him. Here, it is said in the Vajirabuddhi-ṭīkā that "the term paṇḍaka includes one of indeterminate gender (ubhatobyañjanaka)." "Itthiyā vematikassāpi paṇḍakādisaññinopi attano kāyena itthiyā kāyasambaddhaṃ phusato tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā," should not be construed. Why? Because in such a construction, the Pāḷi states a dukkaṭa offense, not a thullaccaya, which would lead to an undesirable consequence.
‘‘Dukkaṭaṃ kāyasaṃsagge, tiracchānagatitthiyā’’ti imināvinītavatthumhiāgatanaye saṅgahitepi teneva nayena paṇḍake vimatiitthisaññitādiaññamatipakkhe ca purisatiracchānagatesu purisatiracchānagatasaññivimatipaṇḍakādiaññamatipakkhe ca iti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kāyapaṭibaddhāmasanādīsu capadabhājanevuttasabbadukkaṭāpattiyo upalakkhitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Even though the principle stated in the Vinītavatthu, "Dukkaṭaṃ kāyasaṃsagge, tiracchānagatitthiyā" is included by this, it should be understood that all the dukkaṭa offenses stated in the Padabhājana in relation to the touching of the body, etc., in the case of uncertainty or misperception regarding a paṇḍaka, etc., or in the case of male animals, as well as in the case of perceiving male animals as male animals, or in the case of uncertainty or misperception regarding a paṇḍaka, etc., are implied by the same principle.
342.Attanokāyena paṭibaddhenaitthiyā kāyena paṭibaddhaṃ phusantassa bhikkhuno pana dukkaṭanti yojanā. Etthapi-saddo vuttadukkaṭānaṃ samuccayattho.Ca-saddena pana avuttasamuccayatthena ‘‘nissaggiyena kāyaṃ āmasati. Nissaggiyena kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ āmasati. Nissaggiyena nissaggiyaṃ āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 276)pāḷiyaṃāgatadukkaṭānaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo.
342. However, if a bhikkhu touches something connected to a woman's body with something connected to his own kāyena paṭibaddhena, there is a dukkaṭa offense. Here, the word pi implies the collection of the dukkaṭa offenses that have been stated. The word ca, however, implies the collection of unstated offenses, and the dukkaṭa offenses that appear in the Pāḷi, "He touches his body with a nissaggiya. He touches something connected to his body with a nissaggiya. He touches a nissaggiya with a nissaggiya. There is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pārā. 276), should be understood.
343-4.Na kevalaṃ padabhājanāgataitthisarīrādikameva anāmāsaṃ,vinītavatthūsudārudhītalikavatthuanulomato potthalikādiitthirūpakañca nissaggiyavārānulomato asarīraṭṭhaṃ mātugāmehi paribhuttavatthābharaṇādiñca vibhaṅgakkhandhakādīsu vuttanayānusārena aṭṭhakathāgataṃ avasesaṃ anāmāsavatthuñca āmasantassa āpattiṃ saṅgahetumāha‘‘itthīna’’ntiādi.
343-4. It is not only the woman's body, etc., mentioned in the Padabhājana that are not to be touched; to include the offenses for touching also the female forms made of wood, clay, or cloth in accordance with the Vinītavatthu, the female likenesses such as dolls, and, in accordance with the Nissaggiya rules, the clothes and ornaments, etc., used by women, which are not part of the body, as well as the remaining untouchable objects mentioned in the Vibhaṅga, Khandhaka, etc., according to the method stated in the commentaries, he said "itthīna" etc.
‘‘Itthīnaṃ itthirūpañcā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘itthikāya itthidhanaṃ (pārā. 34), saddhānaṃ saddhāparāyana’’ntiādīsu viya lokavohāravasena vuttaṃ. Itthīnaṃ dārulohamayādikaṃ itthirūpañcāti yojanā.Ādi-saddena heṭṭhimaparicchedato mattikāya, piṭṭhena vā kataṃ mātugāmarūpaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Mātugāmarūpaṃ yena kenaci dinnaṃ sabbaratanamayaṃ vinā avasesaṃ sādiyitvā bhinditvā samaṇasāruppaparikkhāraṃ kārāpetuṃ, aphusitvā paribhuñjitabbe vā yojetuṃ vaṭṭati.
"Itthīnaṃ itthirūpañcā" is said according to worldly convention, as in "itthikāya itthidhanaṃ (pārā. 34), saddhānaṃ saddhāparāyana," etc. The construction is: female forms made of wood, metal, etc., belonging to women. The word Ādi includes, with the lower limit being a female form made of clay or flour. A female form given by anyone, except for one made entirely of precious materials, is fit to be accepted, broken up, and made into requisites suitable for a renunciate, or to be utilized or applied without touching it.
‘‘Vattha’’nti iminā nivāsanapārupanadvayampi sāmaññena gahitaṃ. Idañca mātugāmena paribhuñjituṃ ṭhapitampi anāmāsameva, cīvaratthāya dinnaṃ sampaṭicchitvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Heṭṭhimaparicchedena tiṇacumbaṭakaṃ, aṅguliyā paṇṇamuddikaṃ upādāyaalaṅkārameva. Ettha ca vālakesavaṭṭakesesu pavesanakadantasūciādi kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ diyyamānaṃ samaṇasāruppaparikkhāratthāya gahetabbaṃ.
By the word "Vattha", both the lower and upper garments are generally included. And this, even if kept for use by a woman, is untouchable. It is fit to accept and receive if given for the sake of robes. With the lower limit being a grass container, or a leaf-ring for the finger, it is merely an ornament. Here, acceptable goods such as toothpicks, etc., inserted into hairpins and hair ornaments, should be taken if given for the purpose of renunciate requisites.
Tatthajātaphalaṃ khajjanti rukkhe ṭhitaṃ khāditabbaṃ panasanāḷikerādiphalañca manussehi rāsikataṃ paribhuñjitabbaphalañca ‘‘manussehi rāsikatesupi eseva nayo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā anāmāsanti upalakkhaṇato imināva gahetabbaṃ. Araññe rukkhato patitaṃ phalaṃ ‘‘anupasampannassa dassāmī’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.‘‘Muggādiṃ tatthajātaka’’nti upalakkhaṇapadattā gacchato viyuttampi gahetabbaṃ.Muggādinti ettha ‘‘aparaṇṇa’’nti pāṭhaseso.
Tatthajātaphalaṃ khajja means edible fruits that are on the tree, such as jackfruit and coconuts, as well as fruits collected by people for consumption. Since it is said in the commentary that "this same principle applies even to those collected by people" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281), they should be regarded as untouchable by implication. A fruit fallen from a tree in the forest is fit to be taken in order to give to a non-ordained person. "Muggādiṃ tatthajātaka" is also to be taken even if separated while going, because it is an illustrative expression. Muggādi here has the alternative reading "aparaṇṇa."
Sabbāni dhaññānīti ‘‘sāli vīhi yavo kaṅgu, kudrūsavarakagodhumā’’ti vuttāni satta dhaññāni. Khettamaggena gacchatā sālisīse hatthena aphusantena gantabbaṃ. Sace maggo sambādho hoti, sarīre dhaññaṃ phusantepi maggattā na doso. Vīthiyaṃ, gehaṅgaṇe vā dhaññesu pasāritesu apasakkitvā ce gantuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘maggaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gantabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ‘‘imaṃ maggaṃ gamissāmī’’ti gantuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Kulagehe dhaññamatthake ce āsanaṃ paññāpetvā dinnaṃ hoti, nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281 atthato samānaṃ)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. ‘‘Āsanasālāyaṃ dhaññe vippakiṇṇe anukkamitvā ekamante pīṭhakaṃ paññāpetvā nisīditabbaṃ. Sace manussā tasmiṃ dhaññamatthake āsanaṃ paññāpetvā denti, nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281 atthato samānaṃ)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā attanā tattha āsanaṃ paññāpetvā nisīdituṃ na vaṭṭati.
Sabbāni dhaññānī means the seven grains that have been stated: "sāli, vīhi, yavo, kaṅgu, kudrūsa, varaka, and godhuma." One should walk along a field path without touching the heads of rice with one's hand. If the path is congested, there is no offense even if the grain touches the body, because it is a path. If it is not possible to avoid walking on grains spread out in a street or courtyard, it is fit to walk, intending, "I will walk on this path," according to the commentary's statement that "a path should be determined" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281). It is said in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281, similar in meaning) that "If a seat is offered on top of grain in a family's house, it is fit to sit on it." It is said in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281, similar in meaning) that "If grains are scattered in a assembly hall, one should avoid them and set up a small seat on one side and sit down. If people offer a seat on top of the grains, it is fit to sit on it." Therefore, it is not fit to set up a seat oneself and sit down.
345.Dhamanasaṅkhādiṃ sabbaṃ pañcaṅgaturiyampi cāti sambandho.Dhamanasaṅkhonāma saddakaraṇasaṅkho.Ādi-saddena vaṃsasiṅgatāḷādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Pañcaṅgaturiyanti ātataṃ, vitataṃ, ātatavitataṃ, ghanaṃ, susiranti pañcaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ turiyaṃ. Tatthaātataṃnāma cammapariyonaddhesu bheriādīsu ekato ākaḍḍhitvā onaddhaṃ ekatalaturiyaṃ.Vitataṃnāma ubhato ākaḍḍhitvā onaddhaṃ ubhayatalaturiyaṃ.Ātatavitataṃnāma ubhayato ca majjhato ca sabbato pariyonandhitaṃ.Ghanaṃsammādi.Sammanti tāḷaṃ, ghaṇṭākiṅkaṇiādīnampi ettheva saṅgaho.Susiranti vaṃsādi.
345. The connection is: dhamanasaṅkhādiṃ sabbaṃ pañcaṅgaturiyampi cāti. Dhamanasaṅkho means a conch used for making sound. The word Ādi includes flutes, horns, drums, etc. Pañcaṅgaturiya means the five-fold musical instrument: ātataṃ, vitataṃ, ātatavitataṃ, ghanaṃ, and susiraṃ. Here, ātataṃ means a single-sided instrument stretched and fastened on one side, such as drums, etc., with leather stretched over them. Vitataṃ means a double-sided instrument stretched and fastened on both sides. Ātatavitataṃ means one covered on all sides, both from above and from the middle. Ghanaṃ means cymbals, etc. Samma means tāḷa (a type of cymbal); the collection of ghaṇṭā, kiṅkaṇi, etc., is also included here. Susira means flutes, etc.
kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena bheripokkharañca bheritalacammañca vīṇā ca vīṇāpokkharacammañca daṇḍo ca anāmāsaṃ. ‘‘Pūjaṃ katvā cetiyaṅgaṇādīsu ṭhapitabheriyo acālentena avasesaṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitabbaṃ. Kacavarachaḍḍanakāle kacavaraṃ viya gahetvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetabba’’ntimahāpaccariyaṃvuttaṃ. Turiyabhaṇḍesu yaṃ kiñci attano dīyamānaṃ taṃ parivattetvā kappiyaparikkhāraṃ gahetuṃ adhivāsetabbaṃ. Doṇi vā pokkharaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhanikkhipanatthāya, cammañca satthakosakaraṇatthāya gahetabbaṃ.
In accordance with the method stated in the Kurunda Commentary, the drum kettle and the drumhead leather, as well as the lute and the lute's soundboard leather, and the stick are untouchable. It is stated in the Mahāpaccariya that "after making an offering, the remaining area of the monastery courtyard etc., where the drums have been placed should be swept without moving them. When discarding rubbish, it should be taken like rubbish and placed in one place." Any musical instrument offered to oneself should be accepted and approved for the purpose of exchanging it for an allowable requisite. A trough or cover is to be taken for the purpose of depositing tooth sticks, and leather for the purpose of making a knife sheath.
Ratanāni ca sabbānīti muttā maṇi veḷuriyo saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ lohitaṅko masāragallanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281) vuttāni sabbāni ratanāni ca. Ettha ca viddhā, aviddhā vā sāmuddikādī sabbāpimuttāanāmāsā. Bhaṇḍamūlatthañca gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Antamaso jātiphalikaṃ upādāya nīlapītādibhedo sabbopimaṇidhotaviddho anāmāso. Āhatākāreneva ṭhito aviddhādhoto maṇi pattādi bhaṇḍamūlatthaṃ adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana paṭikkhittaṃ. Pacitvā kato kācamaṇiyeveko vaṭṭati.Veḷuriyeca maṇisadisoyeva vinicchayo.
Ratanāni ca sabbānī means all the precious materials that have been stated: "pearls, gems, lapis lazuli, conch shells, stone, coral, silver, gold, ruby, and emerald" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.281). Here, all pearls, whether pierced or unpierced, from the sea or elsewhere, are untouchable. It is not fit to take them for the purpose of trading. All gems, at least including jātiphalika (cat's eye), of various colors such as blue, yellow, etc., once washed and pierced, are untouchable. It is said that an unpierced, unwashed gem that remains in its natural state is fit to be accepted for the purpose of trading for bowls, etc. However, this is rejected in the Mahāpaccariya. Only a glass gem that has been fired is acceptable. The same ruling applies to veḷuriye (lapis lazuli) as to gems.
silāanāmāsā. Sesā silā khuddakanisānādikammatthaṃ adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati.‘‘Pavāḷaṃdhotamadhotañca viddhamaviddhañca sabbathā anāmāsaṃ, nāpi adhivāsetabba’’ntimahāpaccariyaṃvuttattāpavāḷapaṭimācetiyāni ceva potthakesu pavesetabbaāṇiyā mūle, aggeca pavesetabbaṃ padumādiākārena kataṃ vaṭṭañca na gahetabbaṃ na phusitabbaṃ.
Silā (stone) is untouchable. The remaining stones are fit to be accepted for the purpose of making small whetstones, etc. It is stated in the Mahāpaccariya that "Pavāḷa (coral), whether washed or unwashed, pierced or unpierced, is in every way untouchable, nor should it be accepted." Therefore, coral images and stupas, as well as pegs to be inserted into books at the top and bottom, and round objects made in the shape of a lotus flower, etc., should not be taken or touched.
rajataṃ, jātarūpañcakataṃ vā hotu akataṃ vā, sabbaso anāmāsaṃ, na ca sāditabbaṃ. Iminā kataṃ paṭimādikañca ārakūṭalohañca anāmāsanti vakkhati. Katākatasuvaṇṇarajatānaṃ asādiyitabbatāya idha aṭṭhakathāya āgatattā uttarena rājaputtena kāretvā āhaṭaṃ suvaṇṇacetiyaṃ na vaṭṭatītimahāpadumattherenapaṭikkhittanti suvaṇṇapaṭimācetiyapotthakāvacchādakamaṇipadumavaṭṭādi yaṃ kiñci na sāditabbameva, na ca āmasitabbaṃ. Etena kataṃ senāsanopakaraṇaṃ pana paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Dhammamaṇḍape katampi paṭijaggituṃ vaṭṭati. Lohitavaṇṇo maṇi,masāragallamaṇi ca sabbathā anāmāso, na ca adhivāsetabbotimahāpaccariyaṃvuttaṃ.
Silver and gold, whether wrought or unwrought, should in every way not be touched, nor should it be received. Here, it will be stated that things made of imitation and ārakūṭa metal are not to be touched. Because the Commentary states here that wrought and unwrought gold and silver are not to be received, the Elder Mahāpaduma rejected the gold cetiya that a prince had made and brought, saying that it is not allowed. Therefore, a gold image, cetiya, book covers, jeweled lotus wheels, etc., whatever it may be, should not be received, nor should it be touched. However, it is permissible to use furniture made of these. It is also permissible to take care of things made in a dhamma hall. According to the Mahāpaccariya, a red-colored gem and a masāragalla gem should in every way not be touched, nor should they be kept for oneself.
346.Sabbamāvudhabhaṇḍanti khaggādi sabbaṃ āvudhopakaraṇaṃ pattādikappiyaparikkhāramūlatthāya dīyamānaṃ satthavāṇijāya akātabbattā na gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti dinnaṃ bhinditvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ katvā ‘‘khurādikappiyaparikkhāraṃ kāressāmī’’ti sādituṃ vaṭṭati. Saṅgāmabhūmiyaṃ magge patitakhaggādiṃ disvā pāsāṇena bhinditvā ‘‘khurādikappiyabhaṇḍāni kāressāmī’’ti gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Ususattiādikaṃ phalato daṇḍaṃ apanetvā kappiyaparikkhārakārāpanatthāya gahetabbaṃ.
346.All weapons and equipment: All weapon equipment such as swords, etc., when given for the purpose of providing permissible requisites like bowls, etc., should not be accepted because it is not permissible to engage in the weapon trade. If someone gives something saying, "Take this," it is permissible to break it into small pieces and receive it, intending to make permissible requisites like razors. Having seen swords, etc., fallen on the road in a battlefield, it is permissible to break them with a stone and receive them, intending to make permissible items like razors. Arrows, spears, etc., should be received after removing the head from the shaft, for the purpose of making permissible requisites.
Jiyāti dhanuguṇo.Ca-kārena imissā gāthāya avuttaṃ aṅkusatomarādiṃ parahiṃ sopakaraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Dhanudaṇḍakoti jiyāvirahito dhanudaṇḍako. Idaṃ parahiṃsopakaraṇabhaṇḍādikaṃ vihāre sammajjitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhapitaṃ ce, sāmikānaṃ vatvā tehi aggahitaṃ ce, acālentena sammajjitabbaṃ.
Jiyā: bowstring. The particle Ca includes in this verse things not mentioned, such as the elephant hook and the tomara, along with their equipment, for harming others. Dhanudaṇḍako: the bow stave without a string. If these items of equipment for harming others, etc., are placed in a place to be swept in the monastery, and if the owners do not take them after being told, they should be swept around without moving them.
Jālañcāti macchajālapakkhijālādijālañca. Jālaṃ dīyamānaṃ chattaveṭhanatthaṃ, āsanacetiyādimatthake bandhanādipayojane sati tadatthañca gahetabbaṃ.Saravāraṇaṃnāma phalakādikaṃ aññehi attano vijjhanatthāya vissaṭṭhasaranivāraṇaṃ vināsanoparodhakāraṇaṃ hotīti bhaṇḍamūlatthaṃ sādituṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Dantakaṭṭhādhāraphalakādi yadicchitaṃ karomī’’ti muṭṭhiṃ apanetvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Jālañcā: And nets, such as fishing nets, bird nets, etc. When a net is given, it should be accepted for purposes such as wrapping an umbrella or tying it to the top of a seat or cetiya. Saravāraṇaṃ: Name for things like shields, etc., it prevents arrows released by others to pierce oneself and causes destruction, obstruction, and harm, so it is permissible to receive it as a material for requisites. It is permissible to remove the handle and receive it, intending to make whatever one desires, such as tooth sticks and stand for tooth sticks etc.
347.Cetiyanti ettha ‘‘suvaṇṇacetiya’’nti idaṃ ‘‘suvaṇṇapaṭibimbādī’’ti anantaraṃ vuttattā labbhati. Suvaṇṇaggahaṇañcupalakkhaṇanti rajatamayañca gahetabbaṃ.Ārakūṭakanti suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ lohavisesamāha.‘‘Anāmāsa’’nti idaṃ ‘‘asampaṭicchiyaṃ vā’’ti etassa upalakkhaṇaṃ.
347.Cetiya: Here, "gold cetiya" is obtained from what is stated immediately afterward, "gold images, etc." The mention of gold is representative, and therefore silver items should also be included. Ārakūṭaka: Refers to a special metal with the color of gold. "Anāmāsa": This is representative of "asampaṭicchiyaṃ vā" (or not to be accepted).
348.Sabbaṃ vāditamiti sambandho.Onahitunti cammavarattatantīhi bandhituṃ.Onahāpetunti tatheva aññehi kārāpetuṃ.Vādāpetunti aññehi vādāpetuṃ.Vādetunti attanā vādetuṃ.Vāditanti vādanīyaṃ yathā ‘‘karaṇīyaṃ kārita’’nti, vādanārahaṃ turiyabhaṇḍanti attho. Idañca onahanādikiriyāya kammaṃ.
348.The connection is: Sabbaṃ vāditamiti (all instruments). Onahitu: To bind with leather straps and strings. Onahāpetu: To have others do the same. Vādāpetu: To have others play. Vādetu: To play oneself. Vādita: playable, like "karaṇīyaṃ kāritaṃ," meaning an instrument suitable for playing. And this is the object of the actions of binding, etc.
349.Upahāraṃ karissāmāti pūjaṃ karissāma. Iti anumatiggahaṇatthāya.Vattabbāti te vattāro vattabbāti yojanā.
349.Upahāraṃ karissāmā: We will make an offering. This is for the purpose of consenting to receive it. Vattabbā: They, the speakers, should be told, is the construction.
350-1.Dhuttiyā itthiyāti vipannācārāya loḷitthiyā.Sayaṃ phusiyamānassāti bhikkhuno payogaṃ vinā itthiyā attanāva phusiyamānassa.Kāyena avāyamitvāti tassā sarīrasamphassānubhavanatthaṃ attano kāyaṃ acāletvā.Phassaṃ paṭivijānatoti phassaṃ anubhavantassa.
350-1.Dhuttiyā itthiyā: To a woman who is corrupt in conduct, a loose woman. Sayaṃ phusiyamānassā: To a monk being touched by a woman of her own accord, without the monk's instigation. Kāyena avāyamitvā: Without moving one's body, in order to experience the bodily contact with her. Phassaṃ paṭivijānato: To one who is experiencing the touch.
Asañciccāti ettha ‘‘phusane’’ti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘iminā upāyena imaṃ phusāmī’’ti acetetvā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Iminā pattapaṭiggahaṇādinā upāyena etissā sarīrasamphassaṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti acintetvā pattathālakataṭṭakapaṇṇapuṭabhesajjādiṃ paṭiggaṇhāpentiyā hatthe attano hatthena phusanādīsu anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Assatiyā’’ti idaṃ pana imināva saṅgahitattā idha visuṃ na vuttaṃ, mātugāmassa sarīre phusanabhāvaṃ ajānitvā aññavihito hutvā satiṃ anupaṭṭhapetvā hatthapādapasāraṇādīsu phusantassāti attho.
Asañciccā: Here, there is an implied "phusane" (in touching), without intending, "I will touch her in this way." What is said? It is said that there is no offense in touching with one's hand the hand of a woman who is having one receive a bowl, dish, plate, leaf-cup, medicine, etc., without thinking, "I will experience bodily contact with her by this means of receiving a bowl, etc." "Assatiyā" (unmindfully), however, is not stated separately here because it is included in this. It means that without knowing the state of touching the body of a woman, having become otherwise and without establishing mindfulness, one touches by extending a hand or foot, etc.
Ajānantassāti dārakākāraṃ dārikaṃ ‘‘mātugāmo’’ti ajānitvā kenaci karaṇīyena phusantassa.Mokkhādhippāyino cāti ‘‘mokkhādhippāyo kāyena vāyamati, phassaṃ paṭivijānāti, anāpatti. Mokkhādhippāyo kāyena vāyamati, na ca phassaṃ paṭivijānāti, anāpatti. Mokkhādhippāyo na ca kāyena vāyamati, phassaṃ paṭivijānāti, anāpatti. Mokkhādhippāyo na ca kāyena vāyamati, na ca phassaṃ paṭivijānāti, anāpattī’’ti (pārā. 279) vuttamokkhādhippāyavato catubbidhassa puggalassāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Anāpattī’’ti iminā sambandho.
Ajānantassā: To one who touches a girl for some reason without knowing that a young girl is a woman. Mokkhādhippāyino cā: And for a person intending to escape, "One intending to escape makes an effort with the body and experiences the touch, there is no offense. One intending to escape makes an effort with the body but does not experience the touch, there is no offense. One intending to escape does not make an effort with the body but experiences the touch, there is no offense. One intending to escape does not make an effort with the body and does not experience the touch, there is no offense" (pārā. 279). It means for the four types of persons who have the intention to escape, as was said. "Anāpattī" (no offense) is connected with this.
paṭhamo puggalo. Attānamajjhottharituṃ āgacchantiṃ itthiṃ disvā paharaṇākārādisabbapayogaṃ dassetvā tāsetvā attano sarīraṃ phusituṃ adentodutiyo. Itthiyā ajjhottharitvā āliṅgito copanarahitaṃ maṃ ‘‘anatthiko’’ti mantvā ‘‘sayameva palāyissatī’’ti, ‘‘acopanameva mokkhopāyo’’ti ñatvā niccalova hutvā phassaṃ paṭivijānantotatiyo. Attānaṃ ajjhottharitumāgacchantiṃ itthiṃ disvā dutiyo viya tāsetuṃ kāyappayogaṃ akatvā ‘‘agate pātessāmi, paharitvā tāsessāmī’’ti vā cintetvā niccalova hutvā tiṭṭhantocatutthoti veditabbo.
paṭhamo puggalo: The first person: Having seen a woman coming to overpower oneself, showing all efforts such as gestures of striking, scaring, and not allowing her to touch one's body. dutiyo: The second: Thinking "I am of no use" after being embraced and clung to by a woman who is unwilling to leave, and knowing that "remaining motionless is the means of escape," remaining still and experiencing the touch. tatiyo: The third: Having seen a woman coming to overpower oneself, like the second, without making a bodily effort to scare her, thinking, "I will knock her down when she comes close, or scare her by striking her," remaining still. catuttho: The fourth: Should be understood.
352.Paṭhamenāti ettha ‘‘pārājikenā’’ti pāṭhaseso, kāyacittasamuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha cittaṃ nāma kāyasaṃsaggarāgasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ, sukkavissaṭṭhimhi mocetukāmatāya sampayuttaṃ cittaṃ.
352.Paṭhamenā: Here, there is an implied "pārājikenā" (by the pārājika), meaning arising from body and mind. Here, mind means mind associated with lust for bodily contact, mind associated with the desire to release semen.
Kāyasaṃsaggakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Bodily Contact.
353-4.Duṭṭhullavācassādenāti duṭṭhu kucchitabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatītiduṭṭhullā,duṭṭhullā ca sā vācā cātiduṭṭhullavācā,vaccamaggapassāvamagge methunadhammapaṭisaṃyuttā vācā, yathāha ‘‘duṭṭhullā nāma vācā vaccamaggapassāvamaggamethunadhammapaṭisaṃyuttā vācā’’ti (pārā. 285), duṭṭhullavācāya assādo duṭṭhullavācassādo, tathāpavattavacīviññattisamuṭṭhāpakacittasampayuttā cetanā, tena sampayutto rāgo idha sahacariyena ‘‘duṭṭhullavācassādo’’ti vutto, tena, duṭṭhullavācassādasampayuttena rāgenāti attho. Iminā ‘‘obhāsantassā’’ti vakkhamānaobhāsanassa hetu dassito.
353-4.Duṭṭhullavācassādenā: Duṭṭhullā: that which goes to a bad, blameworthy state; duṭṭhullā vācā: bad speech, speech connected with the urinary and excretory passages and sexual intercourse, as it was said, "Duṭṭhullā nāma vācā vaccamaggapassāvamaggamethunadhammapaṭisaṃyuttā vācā" (pārā. 285), duṭṭhullavācassādo: the pleasure in bad speech, the intention associated with the consciousness that arises along with the intimation of such speech, here lust is called "duṭṭhullavācassādo" due to association, thus, it means with lust associated with the pleasure of bad speech. By this, the cause for the soon-to-be-mentioned exposing "obhāsantassā" is shown.
Itthiyā itthisaññinoti ‘‘mātugāmo nāma manussitthī, na yakkhī, na petī, na tiracchānagatā, viññū paṭibalā subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ ājānitu’’ntipadabhājaneniddiṭṭhasarūpāya subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ jānantiyā manussitthiyā itthisaññino bhikkhunoti attho.‘‘Dvinnaṃ maggāna’’nti etassa sambandhīvasena ‘‘itthiyā’’ti idaṃ sāmivasena yojetabbaṃ, yathāvuttasarūpassa mātugāmassa vaccamaggapassāvamagganti attho.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇavasena cāti ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇati nāma dve magge thometi vaṇṇeti pasaṃsati. Avaṇṇaṃ bhaṇati nāma dve magge khuṃseti vambheti garahatī’’ti niddese vuttanayena ubho magge uddissa thomanagarahaṇavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Itthiyā itthisaññino: Itthī (woman): For a monk who perceives a woman in a human woman who knows what is well-spoken and ill-spoken, what is bad and not bad, whose form is defined in the Padabhājana as "a woman is a human female, not a yakkha, not a petī, not a beast, intelligent, capable."‘‘Dvinnaṃ maggāna’’nti: This should be connected with "itthiyā" in relation to the two passages, in reference to the relationship, meaning the urinary and excretory passages of a woman with the form described above. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇavasena cā: And by way of praise and dispraise: It means with regard to both passages, by way of praise and dispraise, in the manner stated in the explanation, "To speak of praise means to praise, extol, and commend the two passages. To speak of dispraise means to denigrate, disparage, and revile the two passages."
methunayācanādīhi,‘‘yācatipi āyācatipi pucchatipi paṭipucchatipi ācikkhatipi anusāsatipi akkosatipī’’ti (pārā. 285) uddese vuttamethunayācanādivasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Imehi dvīhi ‘‘obhāsantassā’’ti vuttaobhāsanā dassitā.Obhāsantassāti uddesayantassa, pakāsentassāti attho.‘‘Viññu’’nti iminā obhāsanakiriyāya kammamāha, iminā visesitabbaṃ ‘‘manussitthi’’nti idaṃ pakaraṇato labbhati, yathādassitapadabhājanāgatasarūpaṃ viññuṃ paṭibalaṃ manussitthinti vuttaṃ hoti.Antamaso hatthamuddāyapīti obhāsane antimaparicchedadassanaṃ. Duṭṭhullavacanassādabhāve sati yo vaccamaggapassāvamaggapaṭibaddhaṃ guṇadosaṃ vā methunadhammayācanādivasena vā duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ jānantiṃ manussitthiṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedena hatthamuddāyapi vadeyyāti attho.
methunayācanādīhi: With requesting sexual intercourse, etc., It means by way of requesting sexual intercourse etc., as stated in the outline, "begs, importunes, asks, questions, describes, advises, reviles" (pārā. 285). By these two, the exposure stated as "obhāsantassā" is shown. Obhāsantassā: To one who designates, to one who makes manifest, is the meaning. ‘‘Viññu’’: By this, he indicates the object of the action of exposing; this "manussitthi" (human female) which is to be qualified by this is obtained from the context, it means a human female who is intelligent and capable, whose form is as it appears in the Padabhājana that was shown. Antamaso hatthamuddāyapī: Even by a hand gesture: Showing the lowest limit of exposure. If there is pleasure in bad speech, he means that even by a hand gesture, in the lowest degree, one should address an intelligent woman who knows what is bad and not bad, in relation to the excretory and urinary passages, or by way of requesting sexual intercourse.
Imasmiṃ gāthādvaye duṭṭhullavācassādena itthiyā itthisaññino viññuṃ taṃ itthiṃ dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vaṇṇavasena antamaso hatthamuddāyapi obhāsantassa bhikkhuno garukaṃ siyāti ekaṃ vākyaṃ, tathā ‘‘dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ avaṇṇavasenā’’ti iminā ca ‘‘methunayācanādīhī’’ti iminā ca yojanāya vākyadvayanti evaṃ yojanāvasena tīṇi vākyāni honti.
In these two verses, there is one sentence: for a monk who, with pleasure in bad speech, perceiving a woman in a woman, exposes that intelligent woman in relation to the praise of the two passages, even by a hand gesture, it is a serious offense; likewise, there are three sentences by way of construction, with the connection of "dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ avaṇṇavasenā" and "methunayācanādīhī" in this way.
vaṇṇavacanena saṅgahitaṃ thomanādikathaṃ kathentassa saṅghādiseso hoti. ‘‘Itthilakkhaṇena subhalakkhaṇena samannāgatāsī’’ti ettakameva thomanatthaṃ vadato saṅghādiseso na hoti, ‘‘tava vaccamaggo ca passāvamaggo ca īdiso subho susaṇṭhāno, tena nāma īdisena itthilakkhaṇena subhalakkhaṇena samannāgatāsī’’ti vadantassa hoti. ‘‘Vaṇṇeti, pasaṃsatī’’ti padadvayañca ‘‘thometī’’ti padassa pariyāyo.
For one who tells the tale of praise, etc., included by the word vaṇṇa, there is a saṅghādisesa. There is no saṅghādisesa for one who speaks only this much for the sake of praise: "You are endowed with auspicious marks of a woman," but there is for one who says, "Your urinary passage and excretory passage are so beautiful and well-formed; therefore, you are endowed with such auspicious marks of a woman." The two words "vaṇṇeti, pasaṃsatī" are synonyms for the word "thometī".
avaṇṇapadasaṅgahitaṃ khuṃsanādittayekhuṃsanaṃnāma patodopamehi pharusavacanehi tudanaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘khuṃsetīti vācāpatodena ghaṭṭetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285). Patujjatenenāti‘‘patodo’’tiagacchante assādayo pavattetuṃ vijjhanakapācanadaṇḍo vuccati.Vambhanaṃnāma apasādanaṃ.Apasādanaṃnāma guṇato parihāpanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vambhetīti apasādetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285).Garahānāma dosāropanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘garahatīti dosaṃ detī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285). Imaṃ khuṃsanādipaṭisaṃyuttavacanaṃ vakkhamānesu ‘‘sikharaṇīsi, sambhinnāsi, ubhatobyañjanāsī’’ti imesu tīsu padesu aññatarena yojetvā kathentasseva saṅghādiseso, na itarassa.
For the three instances of dispraise included by the word avaṇṇa: khuṃsanaṃ means to prick with harsh words like a goad. As the Commentary says, "khuṃsetīti vācāpatodena ghaṭṭetī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285). With a prod: ‘‘patodo’’ is said to be a bamboo stick with a sharp iron point, for urging on oxen and elephants which are going slowly. Vambhanaṃ means disparagement. Apasādanaṃ means to cause to fall away from good qualities. As it is said, "vambhetīti apasādetī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285). Garahā means to impute faults. As it is said, "garahatīti dosaṃ detī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285). A saṅghādisesa only arises for one who tells this speech connected with dispraise, etc., connecting it with one of the three statements to be mentioned: "You are a hermaphrodite, you are mixed, you are of double gender," not for another.
methunayācanādivacanehi saṅgahitaṃ āyācanādiṃ karontassāpi saṅghādiseso. ‘‘Yācati nāma dehi me arahasi me dātu’’ntiādinā (pārā. 285) nayena ekekaṃ padaṃ ‘‘dehi me methunaṃ dhamma’’ntiādivasena methunadhammapadena saha ghaṭetvā methunadhammaṃ yācantasseva hoti.
A saṅghādisesa also arises for one who makes a request, etc., included by the words methunayācanā etc. A saṅghādisesa only arises for one who requests sexual intercourse, combining each word with the word sexual intercourse in the manner such as, "Give me sexual intercourse," in the way such as "yācati nāma dehi me arahasi me dātuṃ" (pārā. 285).
‘‘Kadā te mātā pasīdissati, kadā te pitā pasīdissati, kadā te devatāyo pasīdissanti, kadā te sukhaṇo sulayo sumuhutto bhavissatī’’tiādiāyācanapadaniddese ekekaṃ padaṃ tattheva osāne vuttena ‘‘kadā te methunaṃ dhammaṃ labhissāmī’’ti padena ghaṭetvā methunaṃ yācantasseva hoti.
In the statement of requesting words such as, "When will your mother be pleased, when will your father be pleased, when will your deities be pleased, when will your lucky moment, auspicious conjunction, and good time occur?," a saṅghādisesa only arises for one who asks for sexual intercourse, combining each word at the end with the word "When will I obtain sexual intercourse?"
‘‘Kathaṃ tvaṃ sāmikassa desi, kathaṃ jārassa desī’’ti (pārā. 285) pucchāniddesavacanesu ca aññataraṃ methunadhammapadena ghaṭetvā pucchantasseva hoti.
A saṅghādisesa only arises for one who asks, combining one of the statements of inquiry such as, "How do you give to your husband, how do you give to your lover?" (pārā. 285) with the word sexual intercourse.
‘‘Evaṃ kira tvaṃ sāmikassa desi, evaṃ jārassa desī’’ti (pārā. 285) paṭipucchāniddesavacanesu aññataraṃ methunadhammapadena ghaṭetvā visesetvā paṭipucchantasseva hoti.
A saṅghādisesa only arises for one who cross-examines, specifying and combining one of the statements of cross-examination such as, "Thus, it seems, you give to your husband, thus you give to your lover" (pārā. 285) with the word sexual intercourse.
‘‘Kathaṃ dadamānā sāmikassa piyā hotī’’ti pucchato mātugāmassa ‘‘evaṃ dehi, evaṃ dentī sāmikassa piyā bhavissati manāpā cā’’ti āṇattivacane, anusāsanivacane ca eseva nayo.
And the same method applies to the statement of command and the statement of instruction, when asking a woman, "How is one pleasing to her husband when giving?" "Give in this way; giving in this way, she will be pleasing and agreeable to her husband."
355.Akkosaniddesāgatesu ‘‘animittāsi nimittamattāsi alohitāsi dhuvalohitāsi dhuvacoḷāsi paggharantīsi sikharaṇīsi itthipaṇḍakāsi vepurisikāsi sambhinnāsi ubhatobyañjanāsī’’ti ekādasasu padesu ‘‘sikharaṇīsi sambhinnāsi ubhatobyañjanāsī’’ti padattayaṃ paccekaṃ āpattikaraṃ, iminā padattayena saha pubbe vuttāni vaccamaggapassāvamaggamethunadhammapadāni tīṇi cāti chappadānaṃ paccekaṃ āpattikarattā ito parāni animittādīni aṭṭha padāni ‘‘animittāsi methunadhammaṃ dehī’’tiādinā nayena methunadhammapadena saha ghaṭetvā vuttāneva āpattikarānīti veditabbāni, ‘‘methunayācanādīhī’’ti etthaādi-saddasaṅgahitesu ‘‘animittāsī’’tiādīsu ekādasasu akkosapadesu antogadhattepi kevalaṃ āpattikarattā garutaraṃ padattayaṃ visuṃ saṅgahetabbanti ñāpetumāha‘‘sikharaṇīsī’’tiādi.
355. Regarding the accusatory terms, in the eleven instances of "you are without a nimitta," "you are merely a nimitta," "you are without blood," "you are perpetually bloody," "you are perpetually red," "you are discharging," "you are a sikharaṇī," "you are a female eunuch," "you are an impotent man," "you are mixed," "you are of double gender," the three terms "you are a sikharaṇī," "you are mixed," "you are of double gender" each incur an offense. Together with these three terms and the previously mentioned terms concerning the path of excrement, the path of urine, and the act of sexual intercourse, since these six terms each incur an offense, the remaining eight terms, beginning with "you are without a nimitta," should be understood as incurring an offense only when used in conjunction with the term "sexual intercourse" in phrases such as "you are without a nimitta, give me sexual intercourse." In "etc., through requesting sexual intercourse," the word etc. includes the eleven accusatory terms beginning with "you are without a nimitta," which, even when internally included, only incur an offense. To indicate that the three more serious terms are separately included, he says, "‘you are a sikharaṇī’ etc."
Sikharaṇīsīti ettha ‘‘sikharaṇī asī’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Asī’’ti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Tu-saddo kevalayuttampi āpattikaraṃ hotīti visesaṃ joteti. Kevalenāpi akkosavacanenāti yojanā.Sikharaṇīsīti bahi nikkhantaāṇimaṃsā bhavasi.Sambhinnāsīti missībhūtavaccamaggapassāvamaggā.Ubhatobyañjanāsīti itthinimittena, purisanimittena cāti ubhatobyañjanehi samannāgatā. ‘‘Ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti byañjayatītibyañjanaṃ,muttakaraṇāni.Suṇantiyāti ettha ‘‘viññumanussitthiyā’’ti adhikārato labbhati, iminā akkositabbavatthu dassitaṃ hoti. Bhāsitaṃsuṇantiyāsubhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ jānantiyā manussitthiyā visaye pavattaakkosavacanena saṅghādiseso hotīti attho.
In "you are a sikharaṇī," the phrase is divided as "sikharaṇī asi." "Asi" should be connected to each term individually. The word "tu" indicates a distinction, that even a simple statement incurs an offense. It is to be construed as: even with a simple accusatory statement. "You are a sikharaṇī" means you are one whose protruding flesh resembles an awl. "You are mixed" means having the path of excrement and the path of urine mixed together. "You are of double gender" means possessing both female and male characteristics. What manifests, saying "this is a woman, this is a man," is called "byañjana," the organs of generation. "To one who hears" is obtained by implication from "to a woman who is a conscious human being"; this shows the object to be insulted. In "to one who hears", if a Saṅghādisesa offense occurs through accusatory language directed at a human woman who understands what is spoken, knowing good and bad speech, this is the meaning.
356.Punappunaṃ obhāsantassa vācānaṃ gaṇanāya garukā siyunti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘ekaṃ itthi’’nti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Ekavācāya bahū obhāsantassa ca itthīnaṃ gaṇanāya garukā siyunti yojanā. Etthāpi ‘‘itthiyopī’’ti labbhati.
356. It is to be construed that serious offenses occur by counting the utterances of one who repeatedly insults. Here, "one woman" should be supplied. It is to be construed that serious offenses occur by counting the women of one who insults many with a single utterance. Here, "women" is also obtained by implication.
357.Sā ce nappaṭijānātīti ettha ‘‘yaṃ suṇantiṃ manussitthiṃ dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇavasena obhāsati, sā ce na paṭijānātī’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhamānaṃ ādāya yojetabbaṃ. Attano bhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ vuttasamanantarameva atthavasena sace na jānātīti attho.Tassāti tassa duṭṭhullabhāsitabhikkhussa. Ubbhajāṇuṃ, adhakkhakaṃ vā ādissa bhaṇane cāpi tassa thullaccayaṃ siyāti yojanā.Bhaṇaneti dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vaṇṇādikathane, ‘‘bhaṇato’’tipi likhanti, bhaṇantassa, bhaṇanahetūti attho. Hetumhi ayamantapaccayo ‘‘asambudha’’ntiādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) viya.Ubbhajāṇunti jāṇuto uddhaṃ.Akkhekanti akkhakato heṭṭhā.
357."If she does not acknowledge it": here, it should be construed by including what is obtained by implication, "if he insults a human woman who is listening by describing the good and bad qualities of the two paths, and if she does not acknowledge it." This means that if she does not understand the offensive language spoken immediately after it is uttered, in terms of its meaning. "Of him" means of that bhikkhu who speaks offensively. It is to be construed that a thullaccaya offense occurs of him also when speaking referring to above the knee or below the hip bone. "Speaking" means speaking about the qualities etc. of the two paths; they also write "of one speaking"; the meaning is of one speaking, or because of speaking. This affix -ana is in the sense of a cause, as in "asambudha" etc. (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā). "Above the knee" means above the knee joint. "Akkhekaṃ" means below the hip bone.
358.Ubbhakkhakanti akkhakato uddhaṃ.Adhojāṇumaṇḍalanti jāṇumaṇḍalato adho.Uddisanti uddissa. ‘‘Uddissubbhakkhaṃ vā tathā, adhojāṇumaṇḍala’’nti ca likhanti, so pāṭho sundaro. Vaṇṇādibhaṇane dukkaṭanti sambandho. ‘‘Viññumanussitthiyā’’ti adhikārato labbhati.Kāyapaṭibaddhe vaṇṇādibhaṇane dukkaṭanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Vaccamaggapassāvamaggā saṅghādisesakkhettaṃ, adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ thullaccayakkhettaṃ, uddhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ dukkaṭakkhettanti imesu tīsu khettesu akkhakañceva jāṇumaṇḍalañca thullaccayadukkaṭānaṃ dvinnaṃ avadhibhūtaṃ kattha saṅgayhatīti? Dukkaṭakkhetteyeva saṅgayhati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘akkhakaṃ, pana jāṇumaṇḍalañca ettheva dukkaṭakkhette saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.286).
358. "Above the hip bone" means above the hip bone. "Below the knee-cap" means below the knee-cap. "Referring to" means referring to. They also write "referring to above the hip bone, or likewise, below the knee-cap," that reading is preferable. The connection is that a dukkaṭa offense occurs when describing the qualities etc. It is obtained by implication from "to a woman who is a conscious human being." "A dukkaṭa offense occurs when describing the qualities etc. related to the body": the same method applies here also. The path of excrement and the path of urine are the area for a Saṅghādisesa offense, below the hip bone and above the knee-cap are the area for a thullaccaya offense, above the hip bone and below the knee-cap are the area for a dukkaṭa offense. Among these three areas, where are the hip bone and the knee-cap, which are the two boundaries for thullaccaya and dukkaṭa offenses, included? They are included in the area for a dukkaṭa offense itself. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "The hip bone and the knee-cap, however, come to be included in this very area for a dukkaṭa offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.286).
359.Paṇḍake yakkhipetīsu dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vaṇṇādibhaṇanetassabhaṇantassa thullaccayaṃ bhaveti adhikāravasena āgatapadehi saha yojetabbaṃ.Paṇḍakādīsūtiādi-saddena yakkhipetīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
359. When describing the qualities etc. of the two paths to eunuchs or hermaphrodites, "of him," it should be construed together with the terms that come by way of implication, that a thullaccaya offense occurs of the one speaking. "To eunuchs etc.": the word "etc." includes hermaphrodites.
360.Ubbhakkhaka…pe… ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘paṇḍakādīsū’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘dukkaṭameva hotī’’ti vutto nayo.Sabbatthāti saṅghādisesathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettavasena sabbesu khettesu.
360."Above the hip bone…pe… this method" should be connected with "to eunuchs etc." "This method" is the method that has been stated, "only a dukkaṭa offense occurs." "Everywhere" means in all areas, in terms of the areas for Saṅghādisesa, thullaccaya, and dukkaṭa offenses.
361.Atthapurekkhāro hutvā obhāsatopi anāpattīti yojanā. Mātugāmānaṃ ‘‘animittāsī’’tiādīsu padesu atthakathanaṃ purekkhatvā ‘‘animittāsī’’tiādipadaṃ bhaṇantassa vā mātugāmehi saha aṭṭhakathaṃ sajjhāyantānaṃ vā anāpattīti attho. Dhammapurekkhāro hutvā obhāsato anāpattīti yojanā. Pāḷidhammaṃ vācentassa vā tāsaṃ suṇantīnaṃ sajjhāyanaṃ vā purekkhatvā ‘‘animittāsī’’tiādīsu padesu yaṃ kiñci pabbajitassa vā itarassa vā mātugāmassa kathentassa anāpattīti.Purekkhatvānusāsaninti ‘‘idāni animittāsi…pe… ubhatobyañjanāsi, appamādaṃ dāni kareyyāsi, yathā āyatimpi evarūpā nāhosī’’ti anusāsaniṃ purekkhatvā.
361. It is to be construed that there is no offense when speaking with consideration for the meaning. There is no offense for one speaking the terms "you are without a nimitta," etc., considering the commentary on the passages about women, or for those studying the commentary together with women. It is to be construed that there is no offense when speaking with consideration for the Dhamma. There is no offense for a renunciant or other speaking about the terms "you are without a nimitta," etc., considering the reciting of the Pāḷi Dhamma or the studying by those women who are listening. "Considering the instruction" means considering the instruction, "Now, you are without a nimitta…pe… you are of double gender; now, be heedful, so that such a thing does not happen to you in the future."
362.Ummattakādīnanti pittummattakayakkhummattakavasena dvinnaṃ ummattakānañcaādi-saddasaṅgahitassa imasmiṃ ādikammikassa udāyittherassa ca anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyacittato ca vācācittato ca kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacitta’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.287)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttapakiṇṇakavinicchayaṃ dasseti‘‘samuṭṭhānādayo…pe… tulyāvā’’ti. Vedanāya adinnādānena asamattā‘‘vedanettha dvidhā matā’’ti āha, sukhopekkhāvedanāvasena dvidhā matāti attho.
362. "To the insane etc." means it has been stated that there is no offense to the two insane persons, in terms of those insane due to bile and those insane due to spirits, and to the Ādikammika Thera Udāyi included by the word "etc." "This training rule arises from three sources: from body and mind, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind. It is inaction, relinquishment of perception, intentional, a fault of the world, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome state of mind" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.287). The Aṭṭhakathā shows the miscellaneous analysis that has been stated "the origins etc…pe… are similar." Because of non-completion through feeling in the case of not-giving what is not given, he says "feeling here is considered twofold," the meaning is that it is considered twofold in terms of pleasant and neutral feeling.
Duṭṭhullavācākathāvaṇṇanā.
Account of Offensive Language.
363.Kāmapāricariyāyāti methunadhammasaṅkhātena kāmena pāricariyāya, methunadhammena pāricariyāyāti attho. Atha vā kāmitā patthitātikāmā,methunarāgavasena patthitāti attho, kāmā ca sā pāricariyā cāti kāmapāricariyā, tassākāmapāricariyāyātipi gahetabbaṃ, methunarāgacittena abhipatthitapāricariyāyātiattho. ‘‘Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsato’’ti iminā sambandho, ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhagini pāricariyānaṃ yā mādisaṃ sīlavantaṃ kalyāṇadhammaṃ brahmacāriṃ etena dhammena paricareyyā’’ti attano methunadhammena pāricariyāya guṇaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ kathentassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tasmiṃyeva khaṇeti tasmiṃ bhaṇitakkhaṇeyeva.Sā ce jānātīti yaṃ uddissa abhāsi, sace sā vacanasamanantarameva jānāti.
363."For sexual intercourse" means for service through desire, which is synonymous with sexual intercourse, for service through sexual intercourse is the meaning. Or else, what is desired is "kāmā," desired in terms of sexual lust is the meaning; it should be taken as "kāmā ca sā pāricariyā cāti kāmapāricariyā, tassā kāmapāricariyāya," service desired with a mind of sexual lust is the meaning. The connection is with "speaking of the qualities," it has been stated of one who describes the good qualities and benefits of service through one's own sexual intercourse, "this is the foremost of services, that one should serve a virtuous, noble, and celibate person like me with this practice, sister." "In that very moment" means in that very moment of speaking. "If she understands" means if she, to whom he was referring, understands immediately after the utterance.
364.Sāmanussitthī no jānāti ce, tassa thullaccayanti sambandho.Yakkhipetidevīsujānantīsu, paṇḍake ca jānante attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatotassabhikkhuno thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā.Seseti purisatiracchānagatavisaye, yakkhiādīnaṃ ajānanavisaye ca attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsato tassa āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
364. It is to be connected that if she, the human woman, does not understand, a thullaccaya offense occurs to him. It is to be construed that when speaking of the qualities of one's own sexual intercourse to hermaphrodites and goddesses who understand, and to eunuchs who understand, a thullaccaya offense occurs to that bhikkhu. "In the remaining cases" means with regard to the sphere of animals and beings other than human women, and with regard to the sphere of hermaphrodites etc. who do not understand, it is to be construed that a dukkaṭa offense occurs to him who speaks of the qualities of one's own sexual intercourse.
365.Cīvarādīhīti cīvarapiṇḍapātādīhi.Vatthukāmehīti taṇhāya vatthubhāvena vatthū ca kāmitattā kāmāti ca saṅkhātehi paccayehi.
365."With robes etc." means with robes, alms food, etc. "With sense objects as desires" means with requisites that are known both as objects because they are the basis for craving, and as desires because they are desired.
366.Rāgo evarāgatā. ‘‘Rāgitā’’ti vā pāṭho, rāgo assa atthīti rāgī, tassa bhāvorāgitā,attakāmapāricariyāya rāgoti attho.Obhāsoti attakāmapāricariyāya guṇabhaṇanaṃ.Tena rāgenāti kāmapāricariyāya rāgena.Khaṇe tasminti bhaṇitakkhaṇe.Vijānananti yaṃ manussitthiṃ uddissa attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇati, tāya tassa vacanatthassa vijānananti vuttaṃ hoti.
366. Lust itself is "rāgatā." Or there is the reading "rāgitā," one who has lust is rāgī, the state of that is "rāgitā," the meaning is lust for one's own sexual intercourse. "Insulting" means describing the good qualities of one's own sexual intercourse. "With that lust" means with lust for sexual intercourse. "In that moment" means in the moment of speaking. "Understanding" means that the meaning of the words is understood by that human woman to whom he is referring when speaking of the qualities of his own sexual intercourse.
367.Pañcaṅgānīti manussitthitā, taṃsaññitā, pāricariyāya rāgitā, tena rāgena obhāsanaṃ, khaṇe tasmiṃ vijānananti imānietthaattakāmapāricariyasikkhāpade pañca aṅgāni, pañca āpattikāraṇānīti attho.Assāti attakāmapāricariyasikkhāpadassa.
367."Five factors": being a human woman, perceiving her as such, lust for sexual intercourse, insulting with that lust, understanding in that moment—these here in the training rule concerning one's own sexual intercourse are five factors, five causes for an offense, this is the meaning. "Of this" means of the training rule concerning one's own sexual intercourse.
Attakāmapāricariyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Account of Describing One's Own Sexual Intercourse.
368.‘‘Paṭiggaṇhātī’’tiādikiriyāttayopādānasāmatthiyena tikkhattuṃ paṭipādanakaṃ ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’ti ca ‘‘garu hotī’’ti padasāmatthiyena ‘‘tassā’’ti ca labbhamānattā tividhehi saha ‘‘yo bhikkhu purisassa sandesaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, vīmaṃsati paccāharati ce, tassa garu hotī’’ti ekaṃ vākyaṃ hoti. Evaṃ ‘‘itthiyāpi vā’’ti iminā yojanāyapi ekaṃ vākyaṃ hotīti imissā gāthāya vākyadvayaṃ yujjati.
368. By virtue of taking up the three actions "accepts," etc., which occur three times, and because "yo bhikkhu" and "garu hoti" can be obtained by implication, and "tassā" also, together with the three divisions, "yo bhikkhu purisassa sandesaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, vīmaṃsati paccāharati ce, tassa garu hoti" is one sentence. Likewise, with the connection of "itthiyāpi vā," there is also one sentence, therefore, two sentences are fitting for this verse.
itthiyodasavidhā honti. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘dasa itthiyo māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sārakkhā saparidaṇḍā’’ti.Bhariyā cadasavidhā honti. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘dasa bhariyāyo dhanakkītā chandavāsinī bhogavāsinī odapattakinī obhaṭacumbaṭā dāsī ca bhariyā ca kammakārī ca bhariyā ca dhajāhaṭā muhuttikā’’ti (pārā. 303). Imāsaṃ pabhedo ca sarūpāni ca saṅkhepato evaṃ veditabbāni –
There are ten kinds of women. As the Padabhājana says, "ten women are protected by their mother, protected by their father, protected by their mother and father, protected by their brother, protected by their sister, protected by their relatives, protected by their clan, protected by the Dhamma, well-guarded, subject to punishment." There are also ten kinds of wives. As the Padabhājana says, "ten wives are: bought with wealth, living by choice, living for enjoyment, one given with a lowered water pot, one brought by force, a female slave who is also a wife, a worker who is also a wife, one brought by the flag, one for a moment" (pārā. 303). Their divisions and characteristics should be understood briefly as follows:
māturakkhitā. Yathāha ‘‘māturakkhitā nāma mātā rakkhati gopeti issariyaṃ kāreti vasaṃ vattetī’’ti.Piturakkhitādīsupi eseva nayo. Tattha yasmiṃ koṇḍaññādigotte jātā, tasmiṃyeva gotte jātehi rakkhitāgottarakkhitā. Yathāha ‘‘gottarakkhitā nāma sagottā rakkhantī’’tiādi. Ekaṃ satthāraṃ uddissa pabbajitehi vā ekagaṇapariyāpannehi vā rakkhitādhammarakkhitānāma. Yathāha ‘‘dhammarakkhitā nāma sahadhammikā rakkhantī’’tiādi (pārā. 304).Sārakkhānāma ‘‘gabbhepi pariggahitā hoti ‘mayhaṃ esā’ti antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpī’’tipāḷiyaṃvuttasarūpā.Saparidaṇḍānāma ‘‘kehici daṇḍo ṭhapito hoti ‘yo itthannāmaṃ itthiṃ gacchati, tassa ettako daṇḍo’’ti vuttasarūpāti ayaṃ dasannaṃ itthīnaṃ sarūpasaṅkhepo. Imāsu dasasu sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dvinnaṃ parapurisasevāyaṃ micchācāro hoti, itarāsaṃ na hoti. Imā dasapi pañcasīlaṃ rakkhantehi agamanīyā.
Protected by her mother: as it says, "protected by her mother means her mother protects, guards, exercises authority, and controls her." The same method applies to those protected by their father, etc. Therein, one who is protected by those born in the same clan in which she was born, such as the Koṇḍañña clan, is protected by her clan. As it says, "protected by her clan means those of the same clan protect her," etc. One who is protected by those who have gone forth dedicating themselves to the same teacher or are engaged in the same group study is called protected by the Dhamma. As it says, "protected by the Dhamma means fellow practitioners protect her," etc. (pārā. 304). Well-guarded means having the characteristic stated in the Pāḷi "even while in the womb she is taken possession of, 'she is mine,' even if she is surrounded by a garland of flowers." Subject to punishment means having the characteristic stated, "punishment has been established by some, 'whoever goes to a woman named so-and-so, will receive such-and-such punishment.'" This is the brief account of the characteristics of the ten women. Among these ten, unchastity occurs through serving another man in the case of the two, well-guarded and subject to punishment; it does not occur in the case of the others. These ten should not be approached by those observing the five precepts.
dhanakkītānāma. ‘‘Chandavāsinī nāma piyo piyaṃ vāsetī’’ti vuttattā attaruciyā saṃvasitena purisena sampaṭicchitāchandavāsinīnāma. ‘‘Bhogavāsinī nāma bhogaṃ datvā vāsetī’’ti vuttattā udukkhalamusalādigehopakaraṇaṃ labhitvā bhariyabhāvaṃ gacchantī janapaditthībhogavāsinīnāma. ‘‘Paṭavāsinī nāma paṭaṃ datvā vāsetī’’ti vuttattā nivāsanamattaṃ vā pārupanamattaṃ vā laddhā bhariyabhāvaṃ gacchantī dalidditthīpaṭavāsinīnāma.Odapattakinīnāma ‘‘udakapattaṃ āmasitvā vāsetī’’ti (pārā. 304) vuttattā ‘‘idaṃ udakaṃ viya saṃsaṭṭhā abhejjā hothā’’ti vatvā ekasmiṃ udakapatte purisena saddhiṃ hatthaṃ otāretvā bhariyabhāvaṃ nīto mātugāmo vuccati. ‘‘Obhaṭacumbaṭā nāma cumbaṭaṃ oropetvā vāsetī’’ti (pārā. 304) vuttattā sīsato cumbaṭaṃ oropetvā bhariyabhāvamupanītā kaṭṭhahārikādiitthīobhaṭacumbaṭānāma.Dāsīca bhariyā canāma ‘‘dāsī ceva hoti bhariyā cā’’ti (pārā. 304) vuttattā bhariyaṃ katvā vāsitā ‘‘tasseva dāsī ca bhariyā cā’’ti vuttā.Kammakārī ca bhariyā canāma ‘‘kammakārī ceva hoti bhariyā cā’’ti (pārā. 304) vuttattā padhānitthinirapekkhena kuṭumbakiccaṃ kāretvā bhariyabhāvaṃ nītā bhariyā katakammā ‘‘kammakārī ca bhariyā cā’’ti vuttā. ‘‘Dhajāhaṭā nāma karamarānītā vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 304) vuttattā dhajaṃ ussāpetvā gacchantiyā mahāsenāya saddhiṃ gantvā paravisayaṃ vilumpantena pacchinditvā ānetvā bhariyabhāvamupanītā itthīdhajāhaṭānāma. ‘‘Muhuttikā nāma taṅkhaṇikā vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 304) vuttattā acirakālaṃ saṃvāsatthāya gahitā itthīmuhuttikānāmāti ayaṃ dasannaṃ bhariyānaṃ sarūpasaṅkhepo. Yathāvuttāsu dasasu itthīsu aññataraṃ dasannaṃ bhariyānaṃ aññataraṭṭhāne ṭhapanatthamadhippetabhāvaṃ vattuṃ purisena ‘‘gaccha bhante itthannāmaṃ māturakkhitaṃ brūhi ‘hohi kira itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā’ti’’ādinā nayena dinnasandesaṃ ‘‘sādhu upāsakā’’tiādinā nayena vacībhedaṃ katvā vā sīsakampanādivasena vā paṭiggaṇhātīti āha‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti sandesaṃ purisassā’’ti.
Dhanakkītā is so named. Because it is said, "One named Chandavāsinī dwells with the beloved, pleasing them," a woman who is accepted by a man who lives according to his own desires is called Chandavāsinī. Because it is said, "One named Bhogavāsinī dwells providing wealth," a woman from the countryside who, having obtained household equipment such as mortars and pestles, becomes a wife is called Bhogavāsinī. Because it is said, "One named Paṭavāsinī dwells providing cloth," a poor woman who, having received merely clothing or covering, becomes a wife is called Paṭavāsinī. Odapattakinī is so named, because it is said, "Having touched the water bowl, she dwells," (pāci. 239) the mother-to-be is said to be led to wifehood by placing her hand together with the man's in a water bowl while saying, "May you be united and inseparable like this water." Obhaṭacumbaṭā is so named, because it is said, "Having removed the veil, she dwells," (pārā. 304) a woman such as a wood carrier who has her veil removed from her head and is brought to wifehood is called Obhaṭacumbaṭā. Dāsī ca bhariyā ca is so named, because it is said, "She is both a slave and a wife," (pārā. 304) one who is made a wife and made to dwell is said to be "his slave and wife." Kammakārī ca bhariyā ca is so named, because it is said, "She is both a worker and a wife," (pārā. 304) a wife who is made to do household work without regard for a chief wife is called "a worker and a wife," having done work. Because it is said, "Dhajāhaṭā is said to be brought from the hand-to-hand combat," (pārā. 304) a woman who is brought to wifehood after being captured and brought back by one looting a foreign territory while going with a great army that is raising a flag is called Dhajāhaṭā. Because it is said, "Muhuttikā is said to be momentary," (pārā. 304) a woman taken for the purpose of dwelling for a short time is called Muhuttikā. This is a summary of the nature of the ten kinds of wives. Among the ten kinds of women described, to indicate the intended state for placing one of the ten kinds of wives in a certain place, the text says that a man gives a message in the manner, "Go, venerable sir, and tell such-and-such a mother-protected woman, 'Become the dhanakkītā wife of such-and-such a man,'" and that the message is received by making a change of words in the manner, "Good, layperson," or by nodding the head, etc., thus, he "receives the message from the man."
purisassāti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘purisassa mātā bhikkhuṃ pahiṇatī’’tiādinā (pārā. 321) nayenapāḷiyaṃvuttapurisassa mātāpituādayo ca gahetabbā.Vīmaṃsatīti evaṃ paṭiggahitasāsanaṃ tassāyeva ekaṃsena avirādhetvā vadantassa mātāpituādīnamaññatarassa vā ārocetīti attho. Etthāpivīmaṃsatīti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti antevāsiṃ vīmaṃsāpetvā attanā paccāharati, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti (pārā. 338) vuttattā vīmaṃsāpetītipi gahetabbaṃ.Paccāharatīti tathā āhaṭaṃ sāsanaṃ sutvā tassā itthiyā sampaṭicchite ca asampaṭicchite ca lajjāya tuṇhībhūtāya ca taṃ pavattiṃ paccāharitvā ācikkhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idhāpipaccāharatīti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti vīmaṃsati antevāsiṃ paccāharāpeti, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti (pārā. 338) vuttattā paccāharāpetīti ca gahetabbaṃ.
Because "from the man" is indicative, the mother, father, etc., of the man mentioned in the Pāḷi in the manner of "the man's mother sends a bhikkhu" (pārā. 321) should also be included. "Investigates" means that, having received the instruction in this way, one announces it to the mother, father, etc., of that woman, without contradicting it in any way. Here too, because "investigates" is indicative, it should also be taken as "he causes to be investigated," as it is said, "He receives (the message), has (the woman) investigated by a student, and reports it himself; there is an offense entailing expulsion" (pārā. 338). "Reports" means that, having heard the instruction brought in that way, he reports that matter, whether that woman has accepted it, not accepted it, or remained silent out of shyness. Here too, because "reports" is indicative, it should also be taken as "he causes to be reported," as it is said, "He receives (the message), investigates, and causes (the woman) to report; there is an offense entailing expulsion" (pārā. 338).
‘‘Itthiyāpi vā’’ti iminā yojetvā gahitadutiyavākye ca evameva attho vattabbo. Tattha sandesakkamo pana ‘‘māturakkhitā bhikkhuṃ pahiṇati ‘gaccha bhante itthannāmaṃ brūhi ‘homi itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā’ti’’ādipāḷinayena (pārā. 330) daṭṭhabbo. Etthāpi ‘‘vīmaṃsāpeti paccāharāpetī’’ti idañca vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Iminā niyāmena dasannaṃ itthīnaṃ nāmaṃ visuṃ visuṃ vatvā dasannaṃ bhariyānaṃ aññataratthāya dīyamānasandesakkamo yojetabbo. Idhāpiitthiyāpi vāti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘māturakkhitāya mātā bhikkhuṃ pahiṇati ‘gaccha bhante itthannāmaṃ brūhi ‘hotu itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā’’tiādipāḷivasena (pārā. 324) itthiyā mātupituādīnañca sandesakkamo yojetabbo.
And in the second sentence taken by connecting with "or by the woman too," the meaning should be understood in the same way. But the order of the message there should be seen in the way of the Pāḷi, "A mother-protected woman sends a bhikkhu, 'Go, venerable sir, and tell such-and-such a woman, 'I will be the dhanakkītā wife of such-and-such a man'" (pārā. 330). Here too, "he causes to be investigated, he causes to be reported" should be taken in the manner stated above. By this method, the order of the message being given for one of the ten kinds of wives should be connected by stating the name of each of the ten kinds of women separately. Here too, because "or by the woman too" is indicative, the order of the message from the woman's mother, father, etc., should also be connected in the way of the Pāḷi, "A mother sends a bhikkhu to a mother-protected woman, 'Go, venerable sir, and tell such-and-such a woman, 'Let her be the dhanakkītā wife of such-and-such a man'" (pārā. 324).
370.Taṃpavattiṃ.Sañcarittāsañcaraṇahetu.Na muccatīti itthipurisānaṃ antare sāsanaṃ paṭiggahetvā sañcaraṇahetu āpajjitabbasaṅghādisesato na muccatīti attho.
370.That matter. Because of the cause of communicating. Is not freed means that, due to receiving and communicating the message between the woman and man, one is not freed from the Saṅghādisesa offense that should be incurred.
371.Aññaṃ vāti mātāpiturakkhitādīsu aññataraṃ vā.‘‘Bhāsato’’ti likhanti. ‘‘Pesito’’ti iminā viruddhattā taṃ pahāya ‘‘bhāsatī’’ti pāṭho gahetabbo. Pāṭhaseso vā kātabbo. ‘‘Yo aññaṃ bhāsati ce, tassa bhāsatoti yojanā’’tinissandehevuttaṃ. ‘‘Mātarā rakkhitaṃ itthiṃ ‘gaccha brūhī’ti yo pesito hoti, tassa piturakkhitaṃ vā aññaṃ vā bhāsato visaṅketovā’’ti, ‘‘mātarā…pe… brūhī’ti pesito hutvā piturakkhitaṃ vā aññaṃ vā bhāsato visaṅketovā’’ti yojanā yuttatarāti amhākaṃ khanti.
371.Or another means either another of those protected by mother and father, etc. "Speaking" they write. Because it contradicts "sent," that should be abandoned and the reading "speaks" should be taken. Or the rest of the reading should be done. In the Nissandeha, it is said, "If one speaks of another, the connection is 'speaking of him.'" "For one who is sent by the mother to a protected woman, 'Go, speak,' speaking of one protected by the father or another is a deception," our opinion is that the connection, "For one who, having been sent…to speak…speaks of one protected by the father or another, it is more appropriate that it is a deception."
372.Paṭiggaṇhanatādīhīti paṭiggaṇhanameva paṭiggaṇhanatā.Ādi-saddena vīmaṃsanapaccāharaṇāni gahitāni.Sañcaritteti sañcaraṇe.Samāpanneti gate sati.Garukāpattimādiseti ettha ‘‘tassā’’ti seso.Ādiseti katheyya.
372.By receiving, etc. Receiving itself is the state of receiving. The words "etc." include investigating and reporting. Communicating means in communicating. Having completed means when it has gone to completion. In a grave offense, let him say here, "of her" is implied. Let him say means he should speak.
373.Dvīhi thullaccayaṃ vuttanti ettha dvīhi dvīhi aṅgehi sañcaritte samāpanne thullaccayaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhāti vīmaṃsati na paccāharati, āpatti thullaccayassa. Paṭiggaṇhāti na vīmaṃsati paccāharati, āpatti thullaccayassa. Na paṭiggaṇhāti vīmaṃsati paccāharati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 338) dvīhi dvīhi aṅgehi thullaccayaṃ vuttanti attho.Paṇḍakādīsūti paṇḍakayakkhipetīsu.Tīhipiaṅgehi sañcaritte samāpanne thullaccayaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
373.Thullaccaya is stated with two here means that thullaccaya is stated when the communication is completed with two, two factors. "He receives (the message) and investigates, but does not report; there is an offense of thullaccaya. He receives (the message) but does not investigate and reports; there is an offense of thullaccaya. He does not receive (the message) but investigates and reports; there is an offense of thullaccaya" (pārā. 338), thullaccaya is stated with two, two factors, is the meaning. In the case of eunuchs, etc. means in the case of eunuchs and yakkhī-spirits. When communication is completed with three factors, the connection is that thullaccaya is stated.
Ekenevāti ekeneva aṅgena.Sabbatthāti māturakkhitādīsu sabbamātugāmesu cavinītavatthumhi‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro puriso aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āṇāpesi ‘gaccha bhante itthannāmaṃ itthiṃ vīmaṃsā’ti. So gantvā manusse pucchi ‘kahaṃ itthannāmā’ti. Suttā bhanteti…pe… matā bhanteti. Nikkhantā bhanteti. Anitthī bhanteti. Itthipaṇḍakā bhanteti. Tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosi. Anāpatti bhikkhu saṅghādisesassa, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 341) āgatāsu suttādīsu pañcasu ca.
By one alone means by one factor alone. Everywhere means in all mother-protected women, and in all kinds of women, and in cases that are well-defined, "Now at that time, a certain man instructed a certain bhikkhu, 'Go, venerable sir, and investigate such-and-such a woman.' He went and asked the people, 'Where is such-and-such a woman?' 'She is sleeping, venerable sir…she is dead, venerable sir…she has left, venerable sir…she is not a woman, venerable sir…she is a female eunuch, venerable sir.' He had doubt. There is no offense entailing expulsion for the bhikkhu, there is an offense of wrong-doing" (pārā. 341), and in the five cases that have come, such as sleeping, etc.
374.Anāpatti pakāsitāti cetiyādīsu kattabbaṃ nissāya itthiyā purisassa, purisena ca itthiyā dinnasāsanaṃ paṭiggahetvā vīmaṃsitvā paccāharitvā ārocentassa anāpattibhāvo ‘‘anāpatti saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā gilānassa vā karaṇīyena gacchati, ummattakassa ādikammikassā’’ti (pārā. 340)pāḷiyaṃvuttāti attho.
374.No offense is declared means that, concerning what is to be done at a shrine, etc., for the bhikkhu who, having received the instruction given by a woman to a man or by a man to a woman, investigates and reports, there is no offense, as it is said in the Pāḷi, "There is no offense if he goes for the sake of the Saṅgha, or a shrine, or a sick person, or one who is insane, or one who is the first offender" (pārā. 340), is the meaning.
375.Tathā tassāti manussajātikāya tassā.Nanālaṃvacanīyatāti ‘‘mamāya’’nti vā niggahapaggahe vā nirāsaṅkaṃ vattuṃ nāharatītialaṃvacanīyā,assāmikā, sā hi kenaci ‘‘mayhaṃ esā’’ti vattuṃ vā nirāsaṅkena niggahapaggahavacanaṃ vā vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyā, alaṃvacanīyā na bhavatītinālaṃvacanīyā,sassāmikā, sā hi sāmikena tathā kātuṃ sakkuṇeyyātinālaṃvacanīyā,nālaṃvacanīyā na bhavatītinanālaṃvacanīyā,alaṃvacanīyapadena vuttā assāmikā eva, paṭisedhā dve pakatimatthaṃ gamayantīti, nanālaṃvacanīyāya bhāvo nanālaṃvacanīyatā, nirāsaṅkena avacanīyatā assāmikabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sañcarittavasena bhikkhunā vacanīyā na hotīti vā ‘‘alaṃvacanīyā’’tipi gahetabbameva.Paṭiggaṇhanatādīnaṃ vasāti ettha cakāro luttaniddiṭṭho. Tato paṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsanapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena ca pubbe vuttamanussitthitā nanālaṃvacanīyatāti vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena ca idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ āpattikāraṇehi pañcahi aṅgehi yuttanti attho.
375.Similarly, of that woman, of that woman of human birth. The state of not being able to claim means she is alaṃvacanīyā because she does not dare to say "mine" or to speak in restraint or acceptance without hesitation; she is ownerless, for she would not be able to say "this is mine" or to speak words of restraint and acceptance without hesitation. She is nālaṃvacanīyā since it is not alaṃvacanīyā, she has an owner, for she would be able to do that with the owner's permission. She is nanālaṃvacanīyā, since it is not nālaṃvacanīyā, the word alaṃvacanīyā states only the ownerless state, two negations convey a positive meaning. The state of nanālaṃvacanīyā means the state of not being able to speak without hesitation, it is said to be the state of being ownerless. Or it can also be taken as "alaṃvacanīyā" since it should not be spoken by a bhikkhu by way of communication. Due to receiving, etc. Here, the "ca" is elided. Therefore, it means that this training rule is endowed with five factors as causes for offense, due to the three factors consisting of receiving, investigating, and reporting, and due to the two factors consisting of the human state previously stated and the state of not being able to claim.
376.Idaṃsañcarittasikkhāpadaṃ. Atha vā liṅgavipallāsena ca ayaṃ saṅghādisesoti gahetabbo. Kāyato, vācato, kāyavācato, kāyacittato, vācācittato, kāyavācācittato vā uppajjanatochasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Tato evaacittakamudīritaṃ. Missakasamuṭṭhānañhi acittakaṃ. Avasesacittesupi yasmiṃ citte asati acittakaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ dassetumāha‘‘alaṃvacaniyattaṃvā’’tiādi. Gāthābandhavasena rasso, ‘‘alaṃvacanīyatta’’nti gahetabbaṃ. Yo sandesaṃ peseti, tasmiṃ paṭibaddhabhāvanti attho.Paṇṇattiṃ vāti sañcarittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātaṃ paṇṇattiṃ vā ajānato acittakamudīritanti sambandho.
376.This is the Sañcaritta training rule. Or, by a change of gender, this should be taken as a Saṅghādisesa. Arising from the body, speech, body and speech, body and mind, speech and mind, or body, speech, and mind, it has six origins. Therefore, it is unintended and uttered. Mixed origin is indeed unintended. To show the remaining thoughts in which, if that thought is absent, it is called unintended, he says, "Or the state of being able to claim" etc. Due to the meter of the verse, it is short; it should be taken as "alaṃvacanīyatta." It means the state of being bound to the one who sends the message. The connection is that one is unintentionally uttering, without knowing "the enactment" or the enactment consisting of the Sañcaritta training rule.
377.Sāsananti mātugāmassa, purisassa vā sāsanaṃ.Kāyavikārenāti sīsakampanādinā kāyavikārena.Gahetvāti paṭiggahetvā.Taṃ upagammāti paṭiggahitasāsanaṃ yassa vattabbaṃ hoti, taṃ mātugāmaṃ, purisaṃ vā upagamma.Vīmaṃsitvāti taṃ kiccaṃ tīretvā.Harantassāti paccāharantassa.Kāyato siyāti vacībhedaṃ vinā paṭiggahaṇādīnaṃ kāyeneva katattā kāyasamuṭṭhānatova saṅghādiseso hotīti attho.
377.Instruction means instruction of the woman or man. By a bodily gesture means by a bodily gesture such as nodding the head. Having taken means having received. Having approached that one means having approached that woman or man to whom the received instruction should be spoken. Having investigated means having completed that task. For one who brings back means for one who reports back. It might be from the body means that because the receiving, etc., are done only by the body without a change of words, the Saṅghādisesa arises only from bodily origin, is the meaning.
378.Itthiyā vacanaṃ sutvāti yojanā.Yathā nisinnovāti pakatiyā nisinnaṭṭhāneyeva nisinno.Taṃvacanaṃ.Tatthevāgatassevāti yattha nisinno itthiyā sāsanaṃ paṭiggaṇhi, tameva āsanaṃ avijahitvā attanā nisinnaṭṭhānameva āgatassa sannisitabbapurisasseva, ettha ‘‘ārocetvā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Puna‘‘ārocentassā’’ti idaṃ tatthevāgatāya tassā eva itthiyā evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Sāsanaṃ datvā gantvā puna tattheva āgatassa mātugāmasseva ñātamanantaraṃ kāyikakiriyaṃ vinā vacaneneva ārocentassāti attho. Idaṃ itthiyā sāsanaṃ paṭiggahaṇādivasena vuttaṃ.
378.The connection is having heard the woman's words. Just as one is sitting means one is sitting in the very place one usually sits. That word. For one who has come to that very place means for the man who has come to sit in the very seat, not abandoning that very seat where he sat and received the woman's message, here "having announced" is implied. Again, "for one who announces" this should be connected to that very woman who has come to that very place. The meaning is that, for the woman who, having given the message and gone and come again to that very place, announces it immediately after it is known, by word alone, without bodily action. This is said by way of receiving the woman's message, etc.
tatthevāgatassāti upalakkhaṇaṃ. Sāsanavacanamatteneva paṭiggahetvā, kiccantarena gantvā vā yadicchāvasena diṭṭhaṭṭhāne vā vatvā punapi tattheva diṭṭhaṭṭhāne puna ārocentassa ca vacaneneva samuṭṭhānabhāvo veditabbo.
For one who has come to that very place is indicative. It should be understood that the arising is by word alone also for one who, having received it merely by the word of the message, or having gone due to another task, or having spoken in a place seen as one wishes, again announces it again in the very place seen.
379.‘‘Alaṃ…pe… ajānato’’ti acittakattakāraṇaṃ vuttameva, kasmā puna ‘‘ajānantassa paṇṇatti’’nti vuttanti ce? Tadubhayassāpi visuṃ kāraṇābhāvaṃ viññāpetuṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.Naṃ vidhinti sāsanaṃ paṭiggahetvā āharitvā ārocetvā paccāharitvā ārocanasaṅkhātaṃ vidhānaṃ.Arahatopīti khīṇāsavassapi, sekhaputhujjanānaṃ pagevāti ayamattho sambhāvanatthenaapi-saddena jotito.
379."Alaṃ…pe… without knowing," the reason for being unintended has been stated; if so, why is it stated again as "for one who does not know the enactment?" It should be understood that it is stated to make known that there is no separate reason for either of them. Namely, the procedure means the procedure consisting of receiving, bringing, announcing, reporting, and announcing the message. Even for an Arahat this meaning is indicated by the word "api" by way of possibility; needless to say for trainees and worldlings.
380.Jānitvāti alaṃvacanīyabhāvaṃ vā paṇṇattiṃ vā ubhayameva vā jānitvā.Tathāti kāyavācato karontassāti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Sacittakehīti yathāvuttacittena sacittakehi.Tehevāti kāyādīhi tehi eva,‘‘tīhevā’’tipi pāṭho.
380.Having known means having known the state of being able to claim or the enactment or both. Similarly should be connected with "doing from the body and speech." With intentional ones means with intentional thoughts as stated. By those alone means by those, by body, etc. alone, "by the three alone" is also a reading.
Sañcarittakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Commentary on the Sañcaritta (Message-Bearing) story.
381-2.Sayaṃyācitakehevāti ettha ‘‘upakaraṇehī’’ti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘purisaṃ dethā’’tiādinā nayena attanāva yācitvā gahitehi upakaraṇehevāti attho. Yathāha ‘‘saññācikā nāma sayaṃ yācitvā purisampi purisattakarampi goṇampi sakaṭampi vāsimpi parasumpi kuṭhārimpi kudālampi nikhādanampī’’ti. Ettha eva-kārena ayācitaṃ nivatteti. Tena assāmikanti dīpitaṃ hoti.‘‘Kuṭika’’nti iminā ‘‘kuṭi nāma ullittā vā hoti avalittā vā ullittāvalittā vā’’ti (pārā. 349) vuttattā bhūmito paṭṭhāya bhitticchadanāni paṭicchādetvā mattikāya vā sudhāya vā dvāravātapānādialepokāsaṃ ṭhapetvā anto littabhāvena ullittānāmakaṃ vā tathā bahi littabhāvena avalittānāmakaṃ vā anto ca bahi ca littabhāvena ullittāvalittānāmakaṃ vā kuṭinti vuttaṃ hoti.
381-2.By things asked for oneself here "with requisites" is implied, it means with the requisites taken by asking for oneself in the manner of "Give me a man," etc. As he said, "Saññācikā means oneself having asked for a man or what makes a man a man, or an ox, or a cart, or an axe, or a hatchet, or a hoe, or a spade." Here, the eva-kāra excludes what is not asked for. Therefore, it indicates being ownerless. By "hut" it is said that "a hut is either plastered or unplastered or plastered and unplastered" (pārā. 349). It means that, having covered the walls and roof starting from the ground, either one called plastered because it is plastered inside, or one called unplastered because it is plastered outside, or one called plastered and unplastered because it is plastered both inside and outside, is called a hut, having left a space for plastering the door, window, etc., with clay or mortar.
Appamāṇikanti ‘‘tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso dvādasavidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ sattantarā’’ti (pārā. 348) dīghaputhulānaṃ vuttappamāṇena atirekattā appamāṇikanti attho.
Appamāṇikaṁ: The meaning is 'appamāṇika' because it exceeds the stated measure of length and width, which is "in length, twelve spans with the Sugata span, and in width, seven interior spaces" (pārā. 348). Here, 'pamāṇa' means measure, specifically defined as "there, this is the measure: in length, twelve vidatthi (spans) by the Sugata-span, and across, seven antara (interior spaces)".
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sugatavidatthi nāma idāni majjhimassa purisassa tisso vidatthiyo vaḍḍhakihatthena diyaḍḍho hattho hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.348-349). Tasmā sugatavidatthiyā dvādasa vaḍḍhakihatthena aṭṭhārasa hatthā honti. ‘‘Dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyāti bāhirimena mānenā’’ti (pārā. 349)padabhājanevuttattā antimaṃ sudhālepaṃ aggahetvā thusamattikapariyantena vā mahāmattikapariyantena vā bāhirantato aṭṭhārasahatthappamāṇaṃ, ‘‘tiriyaṃ sattantarāti abbhantarimena mānenā’’ti (pārā. 349)padabhājanevuttattā abbhantarimena puthulato dvādasaṅgulādhikadasahatthappamāṇañca kuṭiyā pamāṇanti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ ṭhitapamāṇato dīghato puthulato vā ubhato vā kesaggamattādhikāpi kuṭi āpattiyā aṅgaṃ hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘appamāṇika’’nti āhāti saṅkhepato veditabbaṃ.
According to the Aṭṭhakathā: "The Sugata-span is now two and a half hattha (cubits) by the carpenter's measure, which is three spans of a middle-sized man" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.348-349). Therefore, twelve Sugata-spans are eighteen cubits by carpenter's measure. In the Padabhājana, it is stated that "In length, twelve spans by the Sugata-span, by the external measure" (pārā. 349); therefore, excluding the final layer of plaster, the measure of the kuṭi (hut) should be eighteen cubits externally, including the husk-clay limit or the great clay limit; and in the Padabhājana, it is stated that "Across, seven interior spaces, by the internal measure" (pārā. 349); therefore, the width internally should be ten cubits plus twelve finger-breadths. This should be taken as the measure of the kuṭi. Thus, to show that a kuṭi exceeding this established measure in length or width, or both, even by a hair's breadth, is a factor in the offense, it is said "appamāṇikaṁ". This should be understood in brief.
Attuddesanti uddisitabbotiuddeso,attā uddeso etissāti attuddesā, kuṭi, taṃ attuddesaṃ. ‘‘Attuddesanti attano atthāyā’’tipadabhājanevuttattā ‘‘mayhaṃ esā vāsatthāya bhavissatī’’ti attānaṃ uddisitvāti attho.‘‘Karontassā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘kārayamānenāti karonto vā kārāpento vā’’tipadabhājanevuttanayena payojakakattuno ca gahetabbattā upalakkhaṇanti gahetabbaṃ.Tathāti teneva pakārena, yehi assāmikatādīhi pakārehi yuttaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ kuṭiṃ karontassa āpatti, teheva pakārehi yuttaṃ adesitavatthukampi kuṭiṃ karontassāti. Iminā appamāṇikaṃ viya adesitavatthukampi visuṃyeva āpattiyā padhānaṅganti. Vasati etthātivatthu,bhūmi, sā adesitā etissāti adesitavatthukā, kuṭi, taṃadesitavatthukaṃ.
Attuddesaṁ: 'Uddesa' means 'to be specified'; attā (self) is the uddesa for it, therefore, it is attuddesā, the kuṭi, that attuddesa. Because it is stated in the Padabhājana that "Attuddesaṁ means for one's own sake," the meaning is "having specified for oneself, thinking 'this will be for my dwelling.'" The word "Karontassa" should be taken as indicative because the agent causing the action is also to be included, according to the rule stated in the Padabhājana: "Kārayamānena means either doing it himself or having it done." Tathā: In the same manner; just as there is an offense for one who builds a kuṭi exceeding the measure associated with those conditions such as being without an owner, so too for one who builds a kuṭi without an assigned site associated with those same conditions. By this, just like appamāṇika, adesitavatthuka is also separately a principal factor of the offense. Vatthu means a place where one dwells, land; that which does not have an assigned place is adesitavatthukā, the kuṭi, that adesitavatthukaṁ.
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Tena kuṭikārena bhikkhunā kuṭivatthuṃ sodhetvā samatalaṃ kāretvā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante saññācikāya kuṭiṃ kattukāmo assāmikaṃ attuddesaṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ kuṭivatthuolokanaṃ yācāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā yācitena saṅghena vā saṅghena ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya sammatehi byattehi paṭibalehi dvīhi bhikkhūhi vā tena saddhiṃ gantvā kuṭivatthuṃ oloketvā sārambhabhāvaṃ vā aparikkamanabhāvaṃ vā ubhayameva vā passantehi ‘‘māyidha karī’’ti nivāretvā anārambhaṃ ce hoti saparikkamanaṃ, āgantvā saṅghassa ārocite kuṭikārakeneva bhikkhunā pubbe vuttanayena saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante saññācikāya kuṭiṃ kattukāmo assāmikaṃ attuddesaṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ kuṭivatthudesanaṃ yācāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā yācite vuḍḍhānumatena byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya desetvā niyyāditakuṭivatthussa abhāvā adesitavatthukaṃ, teneva assāmikatādipakārena yuttaṃ yathāvuttappakāraṃ kuṭikaṃ attanā yācitehi upakaraṇehi karontassa, kārāpentassa cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
What is said is this: That bhikkhu (monk) who is building a kuṭi, having cleared the site for the kuṭi and having made it level, should approach the Saṅgha, salute the feet of the elder bhikkhus, sit in the squatting position, raise his joined hands, and say three times, "Bhante, I wish to build a small kuṭi, without an owner, for my own use; therefore, Bhante, I request the Saṅgha for the inspection of the kuṭi site." Having been requested, if the Saṅgha, or two bhikkhus who are capable and intelligent, approved by the Saṅgha with a motion and second announcement, go with him and inspect the kuṭi site, and seeing a condition of sārambha (disturbing living beings), or a condition of not having enough space to go around it, or both, they should prevent him, saying, "Do not build here." If it is free from sārambha and has enough space to go around it, and it is reported to the Saṅgha, then that bhikkhu who is building the kuṭi, having approached the Saṅgha in the manner previously stated, having saluted the feet of the elder bhikkhus, having sat in the squatting position, having raised his joined hands, and having said three times, "Bhante, I wish to build a small kuṭi, without an owner, for my own use; therefore, Bhante, I request the Saṅgha for the assignment of the kuṭi site," having been requested, with the approval of the elders, a bhikkhu who is capable and intelligent should assign the kuṭi site with a motion and second announcement. Adesitavatthukaṁ means the absence of an assigned kuṭi site. It is said that he builds or has built with his own requested tools a kuṭi of the type described above associated with those conditions such as being without an owner.
Dve saṅghādisesā hontīti ‘‘bhikkhū vā anabhineyya vatthudesanāya, pamāṇaṃ vā atikkāmeyya, saṅghādiseso’’ti (pārā. 348) tulyabalatāsūcakenavā-saddena sampiṇḍitvā vuttaaṅgadvayasahitattā dve saṅghādisesā hontīti attho. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhu kuṭiṃ karoti adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ, āpatti dvinnaṃ saṅghādisesāna’’nti (pārā. 355) ca ‘‘bhikkhukuṭiṃ karoti adesitavatthukaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti (pārā. 354) ca ‘‘bhikkhu kuṭiṃ karoti pamāṇātikkantaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti (pārā. 355) ca vuttattā dvīsu aṅgesu ekaṃ ce, ekova saṅghādiseso hotīti. Taṃ pana ‘‘sace ekavipannā sā, garukaṃ ekakaṃ siyā’’ti vakkhati.
Dve saṅghādisesā hontī: Because it is said, combining the two factors, "A bhikkhu, either without having an assigned site or exceeding the measure, it is a Saṅghādisesa" (pārā. 348), with the word "vā" indicating equal weight, the meaning is that there are two Saṅghādisesas. As it was said, "If a bhikkhu builds a kuṭi without an assigned site, exceeding the measure, without sārambha, with enough space to go around it, there is an offense of two Saṅghādisesas" (pārā. 355), and "If a bhikkhu builds a kuṭi without an assigned site, without sārambha, with enough space to go around it, there is an offense of a Saṅghādisesa" (pārā. 354), and "If a bhikkhu builds a kuṭi exceeding the measure, without sārambha, with enough space to go around it, there is an offense of a Saṅghādisesa" (pārā. 355), if there is one of the two factors, there is only one Saṅghādisesa. That, however, he will say, "If one is defective, it would be a single serious offense."
Sārambhādīsūti etthasārambha-saddo sopaddavapariyāyo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sārambhaṃ anārambhanti saupaddavaṃ anupaddava’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.348-349). Ettha ‘‘setaṃ chāgamārabhetha yajamāno’’ti payoge viya ā-pubbassa rabhassa hiṃsatthepi dissamānattā kattusādhanoārambha-saddo hiṃsakānaṃ kipillikādisattānaṃ vācako bhavatīti taṃsahitaṭṭhānaṃ sārambhaṃ nāma hoti. Tenevapadabhājanepi vuttaṃ ‘‘sārambhaṃ nāma kipillikānaṃ vā āsayo hoti, upacikānaṃ vā, undūrānaṃ vā, ahīnaṃ vā, vicchikānaṃ vā, satapadīnaṃ vā, hatthīnaṃ vā, assānaṃ vā, sīhānaṃ vā, byagghānaṃ vā…pe… āsayo hotī’’ti (pārā. 353).
Sārambhādīsu: Here, the word sārambha is a synonym for something dangerous. As it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Sārambhaṁ, anārambhaṁ means dangerous, not dangerous" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.348-349). Here, just as in the usage "The sacrificer might slaughter a white goat," the word ārambha, which is derived from the root rabh with the prefix ā, also appears in the sense of harming, and the agent noun ārambha refers to beings that cause harm, such as ants; therefore, a place associated with them is called sārambha. Therefore, it was also said in the Padabhājana: "Sārambhaṁ means a dwelling place of ants, or termites, or rats, or snakes, or scorpions, or centipedes, or elephants, or horses, or lions, or tigers...pe... is a dwelling place" (pārā. 353).
Ādi-saddena aparikkamanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Saparikkamanaṃ nāma sakkā hoti yathāyuttena sakaṭena anuparigantuṃ, samantā nisseṇiyā anuparigantuṃ, etaṃ saparikkamanaṃ nāmā’’ti (pārā. 353) vuttalakkhaṇavipariyāyato nibbakosassa udakapātaṭṭhāne ekaṃ cakkaṃ ṭhapetvā itaraṃ cakkaṃ bahi ṭhapetvā kuṭiṃ parikkhipitvā āvajjiyamānassa goyuttasakaṭassa vā nisseṇiyaṃ ṭhatvā kuṭiṃ chādayamānānaṃ nisseṇiyā vā parato gamitumasakkuṇeyyattā aparikkamananti veditabbaṃ.
With the word ādi, not having enough space to go around it is included. "Saparikkamanaṁ means it is possible to go around it with a cart properly fitted, to go around it completely with a ladder; this is called saparikkamanaṁ" (pārā. 353). From the opposite of the characteristic stated, not having enough space to go around it should be understood as not being able to move it further by placing one wheel of a bullock cart at the water-pouring place of the eaves and placing the other wheel outside, surrounding the kuṭi, or not being able to move beyond the ladder for those covering the kuṭi while standing on a ladder.
Evaṃ vuttasārambhaaparikkamanasaṅkhātaaṅgadvayena yuttaṃ ce, dve dukkaṭāni honti. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhu kuṭiṃ karoti desitavatthukaṃ pamāṇikaṃ sārambhaṃ aparikkamanaṃ, āpatti dvinnaṃ dukkaṭāna’’nti (pārā. 355). Ekaṃ ce, ekameva hoti. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhu kuṭiṃ karoti desitavatthukaṃ pamāṇikaṃ sārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Bhikkhu kuṭiṃ karoti desitavatthukaṃ pamāṇikaṃ anārambhaṃ aparikkamanaṃ, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 355) etaṃ tayampi ‘‘sārambhādīsu dukkaṭa’’nti sāmaññena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Thus, if it is associated with the two factors called sārambha and not having enough space to go around it as described above, there are two dukkaṭas. As it was said, "If a bhikkhu builds a kuṭi with an assigned site, of the proper measure, with sārambha, without enough space to go around it, there is an offense of two dukkaṭas" (pārā. 355). If there is one, there is only one. As it was said, "If a bhikkhu builds a kuṭi with an assigned site, of the proper measure, with sārambha, with enough space to go around it, there is an offense of a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu builds a kuṭi with an assigned site, of the proper measure, without sārambha, without enough space to go around it, there is an offense of a dukkaṭa" (pārā. 355), all three of these should be understood as included generally in "Sārambhādīsu dukkaṭaṁ."
ekavipannā. Pubbe vuttatthānaṃ saṅghādisesādipadānamattho vuttanayeneva veditabbo.Sāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇakuṭi.
Ekavipannā: The meaning of the words Saṅghādisesa, etc., in the previously stated meanings should be understood in the same manner. Sā: That kuṭi with the characteristics described above.
383.Idāni imasmiṃ sikkhāpade aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ ‘‘te yācanabahulā viññattibahulā viharanti ‘purisaṃ detha purisattakaraṃ dethā’’tiādipāḷiyā(pārā. 342)aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342) āgataṃ kappiyākappiyavinicchayaṃ saṅkhepato dassetumāha‘‘purisa’’ntiādi.Kammasahāyatthāyāti kismiñci kamme sahāyabhāvāya, kammakaraṇatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Itthannāmaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ purisaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti yācituṃ vaṭṭatīti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kammakaraṇatthāya ‘purisaṃ dethā’ti yācituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342).Mūlacchejjavasenāti sāmikānaṃ āyattabhāvasaṅkhātamūlassa chindanavasena, attano āyattabhāvakaraṇavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
383. Now, in this sikkhāpada (training rule), to show briefly the determination of what is allowable and what is unallowable that came in the Pāḷi (pārā. 342) and in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342) in the eight cases of origin, "They live requesting much, soliciting much, saying, 'Give a man, give a man to do the work'," he says, starting with "Purisa". Kammasahāyatthāya: For the sake of companionship in some work, that is, for the sake of doing work. The meaning is that it is allowable to request, saying, "It is allowable to obtain a man to do such-and-such work." As it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "It is allowable to request 'Give a man' for the sake of doing work" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342). Mūlacchejjavasenā: In the manner of cutting off the root, which is the state of being under the control of the owners, that is, in the manner of making it under one's own control.
384.Avajjanti vajjarahitaṃ, niddosanti attho. Migaluddakamacchabandhakādīnaṃ sakakammaṃ vajjakammaṃ nāma. Tasmā migaluddakādayo hatthakammaṃ yācantena pana ‘‘tumhākaṃ hatthakammaṃ dethā’’ti, ‘‘hatthakammaṃ dātabba’’nti sāmaññena avatvā ‘‘itthannāmaṃ kammaṃ dātabba’’nti visesetvāyeva yācitabbaṃ. Luddake vā itare vā nikkamme ayācitvāpi yathāruci kammaṃ kārāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Hatthakammayācanāya sabbathāpi kappiyabhāvaṃ dīpetuṃ taṃtaṃsippike yācitvā mahantampi pāsādaṃ kārāpentena hatthakamme yācite attano anokāsabhāvaṃ ñatvā aññesaṃ karontānaṃ dātabbaṃ mūlaṃ diyyamānaṃ adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭatīti vitthāratoaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342 atthatosamānaṃ) vuttattā kusalānaṃ atthaṃ aparihāpentena kappiyena sāruppena payogena yācitabbaṃ. Yācitakammaṃ kātuṃ asamatthehi karontānaṃ diyyamānaṃ hatthakammamūlaṃ kammaṃ kārāpetvā kammakārake dassetvā dāpetabbaṃ. Evaṃ yācanāya anavajjabhāve aṭṭhakathāgataṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘hatthakammampī’’tiādi.Pi-saddo avadhāraṇe, padapūraṇe vā.Hi-saddo hetumhi. Yasmā idaṃ hatthakammaṃ kiñci vatthu na hoti, tasmā anavajjameva hatthakammaṃ yācituṃ pana vaṭṭatīti.
384.Avajjaṁ: Without fault, meaning without offense. The work of hunters, fishermen, etc., is called faulty work. Therefore, when requesting manual labor from hunters, etc., one should request, specifically saying, "Such-and-such work should be given," and not generally saying, "Give your manual labor," or "Manual labor should be given." It is allowable for a hunter or others who are unemployed to have work done as they please without requesting. To show that requesting manual labor is allowable in every way, when one is having a large building built by requesting from various artisans, if one knows that one does not have the opportunity when manual labor is requested, it is allowable to accept the material being given to those who are doing it. Because it is stated in detail in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342, meaning similar), one should request with an appropriate expression that is allowable, not depriving those with skill of their benefit. If those who are incapable of doing the requested work are having the work done, the cost of the manual labor being given should be shown to the workers who are having the work done and should be given. To show the reason in the blamelessness of requesting in this way, he says, starting with "Hatthakammampi". The word pi is for emphasis or to fill out the sentence. The word hi is in the sense of a reason. Because this manual labor is not any object, therefore, it is indeed blameless to request manual labor.
385.Ñātakādiketi ñātakapavārite.Ṭhapetvāti vajjetvā.Goṇamāyācamānassāti aññātakaappavārite tāvakālikaṃ vinā kevalaṃ kammakaraṇatthāya goṇaṃ yācantassa.Tesupīti ñātakādīsupi mūlacchejjena goṇamāyācanassa dukkaṭanti yojanā. ‘‘Tāvakālikanayena sabbattha vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342)aṭṭhakathāvacanato yāva kammakaraṇakālaṃ, tāva niyametvā ñātakaaññātakapavāritaappavārite sabbepi yācituṃ vaṭṭati. Tathā yācitvā vā ayācitvā vā gahito ce, rakkhitvā paṭijaggitvā sāmikānaṃ niyyādetabbo, goṇe vā naṭṭhe visāṇe vā bhinne sāmikesu asampaṭicchantesu bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ.
385.Ñātakādike: To a relative or one who has been invited. Ṭhapetvā: Except for. Goṇaṁ āyācamānassa: To one who is requesting an ox from a stranger or one who has not been invited, only for the purpose of doing work temporarily. Tesupi: Even among relatives, etc., the implication is that there is a dukkaṭa for requesting an ox in a way that cuts off the root. According to the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "In the manner of temporarily, it is allowable in all circumstances" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342), it is allowable to request from all relatives, strangers, those invited, and those not invited, specifying the time until the work is done. Thus, if it is taken after requesting or without requesting, it should be protected and cared for and returned to the owners; if the ox is lost or a horn is broken and the owners are not satisfied, the price of the goods should be given.
386.Demāti ettha ‘‘tumhāka’’nti pāṭhaseso. ‘‘Vihārassa demā’ti vutte pana ‘ārāmikānaṃ ācikkhatha paṭijagganatthāyā’ti vattabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Sakaṭavinicchayassāpi goṇavinicchayena samānattā taṃ avatvā visesamattameva dassetumāha‘‘sakaṭaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ demāti vutte’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tumhākameva demāti vutte dārubhaṇḍaṃ nāma sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342).
386.Demā: Here, "yours" is the rest of the reading. "However, when it is said, 'We will give to the monastery,' it should be said, 'Tell the ārāmikas (monastery attendants) for the sake of caretaking'" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342), it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā. Because the determination regarding carts is similar to the determination regarding oxen, without stating that, to show only the distinction, he says "Sakaṭaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī". It should be connected by bringing in "When it is said, 'We will give to you.'" As it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "When it is said, 'We will give to you,' it is allowable to accept wooden goods" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342).
387.Kuṭhārādīsūti etthaādi-saddena nikhādanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ayaṃ nayo veditabboti pāṭhaseso. ‘‘Sakaṭaṃ goṇo viya tāvakālikaṃ akatvā aññātakaappavārite na yācitabbaṃ, mūlacchejjavasena aññātakaappavārite na yācitabbaṃ, tāvakālikaṃ yācitabba’’nti vinicchayo ca ‘‘sakaṭaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti visesavinicchayo cāti ayaṃ nayo vāsiādīsu ca veditabboti attho.Anajjhāvutthakanti kenaci ‘‘mameta’’nti apariggahitaṃ, ‘‘rakkhitagopitaṭṭhāneyeva hi viññatti nāma vuccatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanato arakkhitāgopitakanti vuttaṃ hoti.Aṭṭhakathāyavalliādivinicchayampi vatvā ‘‘anajjhāvutthakaṃ pana yaṃ kiñci āharāpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342) vuttattāsabbanti idha vuttagoṇādikañca vakkhamānavalliādikañca gahetabbaṃ. Iminā pubbe vuttavinicchayassa rakkhitagopitavisayattaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.Harāpetumpi vaṭṭatīti etthaapi-saddena pageva kenaci haritvā dinnanti dīpeti.
387.Kuṭhārādīsu: Here, with the word ādi, digging is included. The rest of the reading is that this method should be understood. The meaning is that this method should be understood regarding axes, etc., which is the determination that "A cart should not be requested from a stranger who has not been invited except temporarily, it should not be requested from a stranger who has not been invited in a way that cuts off the root, it should be requested temporarily," and the specific determination that "Sakaṭaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī". Anajjhāvutthakaṁ: Not possessed by anyone, not claimed by anyone as "This is mine," because "Indeed, requesting is said only in a protected and guarded place," according to the Aṭṭhakathā statement, it is said as unprotected and unguarded. Having stated the determination regarding creepers, etc., in the Aṭṭhakathā, "However, it is allowable to bring whatever is not possessed" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342), sabbaṁ here should include the oxen, etc., stated earlier and the creepers, etc., that will be stated later. By this, the previously stated determination is shown to be regarding a protected and guarded object. Harāpetumpi vaṭṭatī: Here, with the word api, it indicates that it was given after someone else had taken it away.
388.Valliādimhītiādi-saddena vettamuñjatiṇamattikā saṅgaṇhāti. Ettha muñjapabbajatiṇaṃ vinā gehacchādanatiṇaṃtiṇaṃnāma.Garubhaṇḍappahonaketi ‘‘valli aḍḍhabāhumattāpī’’tiādinā nayena vuttalakkhaṇe garubhaṇḍappahonake.Paresaṃ santakeyevāti avadhāraṇena na anajjhāvutthake dukkaṭanti byatirekato dīpeti.
388.Valliādimhī: With the word ādi, rattan, muñja grass, and clay are included. Here, tiṇa (grass) means grass for covering dwellings, excluding muñja pabbaja grass. Garubhaṇḍappahonake: In the characteristics stated in the manner, starting with "A creeper, even half a fathom long." Paresaṃ santakeyeva: By the emphasis, it shows by contrast that there is no dukkaṭa for what is not unpossessed.
389.Paccayesūti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanasaṅkhātesu tīsu paccayesu. Eva-kārena gilānapaccayasaṅkhāte catutthapaccaye viññatti vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.Viññattināma ‘‘āhara, dehī’’ti icchitapaccaye nāmaṃ vatvā yācanā.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ ‘‘sabbena sabbaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342) sāvadhāraṇatthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā neva vaṭṭatīti attho gahetabbo.
‘‘tatiye parikathobhāsanimittāni ca labbhare’’ti vuttattā avasiṭṭhadvaye pana parikathādayo na labbhantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avutte catutthapaccayepi samuccayatthena ca-kārena parikathādittayaṃ labbhatīti siddhattā ‘‘tīsvevā’’ti eva-kārena byatirekamukhena viññattiyā ca anuññātattā catutthe gilānapaccaye parikathobhāsanimittakammaviññattiyo vaṭṭantīti siddhaṃ. Ettāvatā catutthe paccaye parikathādayo cattāropi vaṭṭanti, tatiyapaccaye viññattiṃ vinā sesattayaṃ vaṭṭati, purimapaccayadvaye sabbampi na vaṭṭatīti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
parikathādikanti uposathāgārādikaraṇārahaṭṭhānaṃ oloketvā upāsakānaṃ suṇantānaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ vata okāse evarūpaṃ senāsanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vā ‘‘yutta’’nti vā ‘‘anurūpa’’nti vā pavattā kathāparikathānāma. ‘‘Upāsakā tumhe kattha vasathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘pāsāde bhante’’ti vutte ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ pana upāsakā pāsādo na vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā nayena pavattā kathāobhāsonāma. Upāsakesu passamānesu bhūmiyaṃ rajjuṃ pasāretvā bhūmiṃ bhājetvā khāṇuke ākoṭetvā ‘‘kimidaṃ bhante’’ti vutte ‘‘ettha āvāsaṃ karoma upāsakā’’tiādikā kathānimittakathānāma. Gilānapaccaye ca iminā nayena yathārahaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sabbametaṃaṭṭhakathāya(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.342) vuttaṃ.
390-3.Idāni kuṭikārassa bhikkhuno āpattidassanatthamāha‘‘adesite’’tiādi. Taṃ uttānatthameva.Nisentassāti pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā tikhiṇaṃ karontassa.Pācittiyā sahāti ‘‘bhūtagāmapātabyatāya pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 90) vuttapācittiyena saddhiṃ.
Āpattinti pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañceva dukkaṭañca itaratra suddhapayogadukkaṭañcāti āpattiṃ.
Yā panāti yā kuṭi.Paṭhame dutiyeti ettha ‘‘piṇḍehī’’ti karaṇabahuvacanaṃ vibhattivacanavipariṇāmavasena ‘‘piṇḍe’’ti bhummekavacanantaṃ katvā yojetabbaṃ, ‘‘nikkhitte’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ, bhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ, nikkhitte satīti attho.
394.‘‘Sace aññassā’’ti padacchedo.Vippakatanti āraddhamaniṭṭhitaṃ.‘‘Anāpattī’’ti idaṃ niṭṭhite āpajjitabbasaṅghādisesābhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Pubbapayogamattena hi pācittiyadukkaṭānipi honti, tāni pana desetabbāni.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘anāpattī’’ti ākaḍḍhati, tena saṅghādisesāpattiyā abhāvato pubbabhāge āpannānaṃ pācittiyadukkaṭānaṃ desetabbatā ca dīpitā hoti.Taṃ kuṭinti taṃ vippakatakuṭiṃ.
395.Aññaṃbhojanasālādiṃ.Tathāti anāpattimāha.
396.‘‘Karoto’’ti iminā ‘‘kārāpayato’’tipi labbhati. Ubhayenāpi‘‘kriyato’’ti imassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti.‘‘Appamāṇika’’nti iminā saṅghādisesassa aṅgaṃ dasseti.
397.Tanti ‘‘appamāṇika’’nti evaṃ paccāmasati.‘‘Kriyākriyato’’ti idaṃ kuṭiyā karaṇañca vatthudesanāya akaraṇañca upādāya vuttaṃ.
Kuṭikārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā.
398.Vatthuṃ adesetvāti sambandho, ‘‘tena vihārakārakena bhikkhunā vihāravatthuṃ sodhetvā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā’’tiādinā (pārā. 367)padabhājaneāgatanayena vihāraṃ kārāpentena bhikkhunā vihāravatthuṃ sodhetvā samatalaṃ kāretvā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamma vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante mahallakaṃ vihāraṃ kattukāmo sassāmikaṃ attuddesaṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ vihāravatthuolokanaṃ yācāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ yācitvā laddhe vuḍḍhe vā bhikkhū ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya saṅghena sammate vā bhikkhū netvā kataparikammaṃ vihāravatthuṃ dassetvā kuṭivatthuolokane viya gatabhikkhūhi oloketvā sārambhādibhāvaṃ upaparikkhitvā anārambhasaparikkamanabhāvaṃ ñatvā āgantvā saṅghassa ārocite puna tena saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante mahallakaṃ vihāraṃ kattukāmo sassāmikaṃ attuddesaṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ vihāravatthudesanaṃ yācāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ yācitvā saṅghena ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya vihāravatthu desetabbaṃ, tathā akatvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iha sārambhādi paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
Mahallakanti ‘‘sassāmikabhāvena saññācikakuṭito mahantabhāvo etassa atthīti mahallako. Yasmā vā vatthuṃ desāpetvā pamāṇātikkamenāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā pamāṇamahantatāyapi mahallako’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.366)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena mahantabhāvena yuttanti attho.Vihāranti ‘‘vihāro nāma ullitto vā hoti avalitto vā ullittāvalitto vā’’ti (pārā. 371)padabhājanevuttappakāraṃ senāsananti attho. Viharanti asminti viggaho. Ullittādisarūpaṃ purimasikkhāpade vuttanayameva. Taṃ vihāraṃ yo kareyyāti yojanā. Kareyya vā kārāpeyya vāti pubbe vuttanayameva.Attavāsatthanti attano vāsaṃ paṭicca, iminā parassa vāsatthāya karoti, anāpattīti byatirekato viññāyati.‘‘Garuka’’nti ettha vatthudesanāya akārāpanena ‘‘ekova saṅghādiseso hotī’’ti pubbe vuttavikappattayaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Idañca vakkhati ‘‘pamāṇā…pe… saṅghādisesatā’’ti (vi. vi. 399 ādayo).
399.Kriyāsamuṭṭhānābhāvanti pamāṇātikkamepi āpattiyā asambhavato kiriyāsamuṭṭhānassa idha abhāvo ñātabbo.Kriya…pe… lakkhayeti ettha byatirekato adesitavatthukatāya akiriyāsamuṭṭhānatā anuññātā.
Mahallakavihārakathāvaṇṇanā.
401-3.Tesūti catuvīsatiyā pārājikesu.Bhikkhuno anurūpāni ekūnavīsatīti bhikkhunīnaṃ paṭiniyatā ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikādayo cattāro tadanulomāya vibbhantabhikkhuniyā saha pañca pārājike vinā bhikkhuno anurūpā sesā ekūnavīsati pārājikā.
padabhājane‘‘pārājikena dhammenāti catunnaṃ aññatarenā’’ti (pārā. 386) vuttanayassa idha ‘‘ekūnavīsatī’’ti vacanaṃ virujjhatīti ce? Na virujjhati. Kasmā? Yasmā padabhājanaṃ pātimokkhuddesāgatamattaṃ gahetvā pavattaṃ, idaṃ pana buddhānumatiṃ gahetvā vinayapariyattipavattakānaṃ ācariyānaṃ mataṃ gahetvā pavattaṃ, tasmā na virujjhatīti gahetabbaṃ. Ācariyo sabbapārājikānaṃ ‘‘brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti (pārā. 385) vuttaanuddhaṃsanassa ekantasādhanattā bhikkhunīnaṃ paṭiniyatasānulomapārājikapañcakaṃ vinā avasesaṃ sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhi, teneva vinayaṭṭhakathāyagaṇṭhipadavivaraṇe‘‘catunnaṃ aññatarenāti pātimokkhuddese eva āgate gahetvā vuttaṃ, itaresaṃ aññatarenāpi anuddhaṃsentassa saṅghādisesovā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘anuddhaṃseyyā’’ti (pārā. 384) pāṭhe adhippāyaṃ gahetvā pavattattā imesaṃ ācariyānaṃ mataṃ pamāṇanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Tesu aññatarenā’’ti vakkhamānattā ‘‘ekūnavīsatī’’ti ettha ‘‘yānī’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.
Amūlakenāti codakassa dassanādīhi codanāmūlehi virahitattā amūlakaṃ, pārājikaṃ, tena. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yaṃ pārājikaṃ codakena cuditakamhi puggale neva diṭṭhaṃ na sutaṃ na parisaṅkitaṃ, idaṃ etesaṃ dassanasavanaparisaṅkāsaṅkhātānaṃ mūlānaṃ abhāvena amūlakaṃ nāmā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.385-386). Ettha ca maṃsacakkhunā vā dibbacakkhunā vā diṭṭhaṃdiṭṭhaṃnāma. Pakatisotena vā dibbasotena vā sutaṃsutaṃnāma. Cittena parisaṅkitaṃparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Taṃ tividhaṃ diṭṭhasutamutaparisaṅkitavasena.
diṭṭhaparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Kuṭṭatirohite bhikkhumhi mātugāmassa saddaṃ sutvā tattha aññassa viññupurisassa sabbhāvaṃ ajānitvā ‘‘vītikkamanaṃ nu khoyamakāsī’’ti evaṃ gahaṇaṃsutaparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Vihārapariyante taruṇamātugāmapurisānaṃ divasaṃ vītināmetvā gataṭṭhāne vippakiṇṇapupphāni oloketvā, maṃsasuragandhañca ghāyitvā ‘‘idaṃ kassa kamma’’nti upaparikkhantena bhikkhuno cetiyapūjitamālāgandhassa pītāriṭṭhassa bhikkhuno sarīragandhaṃ ghāyitvā ‘‘taṃ etassa kammaṃ nu kho’’ti kiriyamānasaṃsayomutaparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Evarūpassa diṭṭhasutaparisaṅkitamūlakassa abhāvato amūlakena pārājikenāti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro panasamantapāsādikāya(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.385-386) vuttanayena daṭṭhabbo.
Codetīti ‘‘pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannosī’’tiādivacanena sayaṃ codeti. Codāpanaṃ pana vakkhati.Cāvanacetano hutvāti ‘‘appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti uppannena paraṃ sāsanā cāvetukāmena cittena samannāgato hutvā.‘‘Suddhaṃ vā asuddhaṃ vā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘codetī’’ti iminā vuttacodanākiriyāya kammaniddeso, ‘‘aññaṃ bhikkhu’’nti seso, pārājikamanāpannaṃ vā āpannaṃ vā aññaṃ bhikkhunti attho.Yoti mātikāgatabhikkhu, ‘‘duṭṭho doso appatīto’’ti idaṃ ajjhāharitabbaṃ, uppannena dosalesena sayaṃ dūsito, parañca dūsento pītisukhādīhi apagato yo bhikkhūti attho. Vakkhamānena ‘‘tassā’’ti iminā sambandho.
‘‘kate’’ti ‘‘kārite’’ti etassa pariyāyo hoti, ‘‘okāsaṃ me karohi, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti okāse kārāpiteti attho. ‘‘Akate okāse’’ti padacchedo, pubbe vuttoyevattho.Dukkaṭāpattiyā sahāti okāsassa akārāpitattā dukkaṭāpattiyā saddhiṃ.
404-5.Koṇṭhosīti dhuttosi.Jeṭṭhabbatikosīti kālīdevīvataniyuttosi. Kālīdevī kira sirideviyā jeṭṭhā, tasmā tassā vatadharo jeṭṭhabbatiko vuccati. Taṃ pana vataṃ samādiyitvā pūrento sakalasarīre masiṃ makkhetvā kākapattāni muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā kālīdeviṃ phalake likhāpetvā taṃ kājakoṭiyaṃ bandhitvā ucchiṭṭhodakādiasucisannicitaoligallaṃ pavisitvā ‘‘dussīlosi nissīlosi sīlavirahitosī’’ti thomento vicaratīti.
pāpadhammolāmakasabhāvosi. Pūtinā kammena sīlavipattiyā anto paviṭṭhattāantopūti. Chahi dvārehi rāgādikilesānussavanena tintattāavassuto. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.Garukaṃ niddiseti ettha ‘‘katokāsamhī’’ti ca ‘‘tatheva akatokāse, dukkaṭāpattiyā sahā’’ti ca ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Evamuttaratrāpi.
406.Sammukhāti cuditakassa sammukhā, avidūreti attho.Hatthamuddāyāti muttapāṇādivasena.Taṃhatthamuddāya kathitaṃ.Paroti yaṃ codesi, so cuditako paro.Bhikkhunoti codakassa bhikkhuno.
407.Sammukhe ṭhatvāti cuditakassa āsanne ṭhatvā.‘‘Codāpentassā’’ti etassa kammabhāvato paroti idaṃ upayogantavasena sambandhitabbaṃ. Evamuttaratra.Kenacīti aññena kenaci puggalena.Tassacodakassa.‘‘Codāpentassā’’ti puna vacanaṃ niyamatthaṃ.
407. Sammukhe ṭhatvā means standing near the accused. ‘‘Codāpentassā’’—this should be connected by way of usage to mean ‘from the one who is instigating’, and similarly in the subsequent passages. Kenacī means by some other person. Tassa means of that accuser. The repetition of ‘‘Codāpentassā’’ is for the purpose of specification.
408.Sopīti uggahāpitattā codanaṃ karonto itaro payojjakapuggalopi.Tesaṃ dvinnampīti payojakapayojjakānaṃ dvinnampi.
408. Sopī means even that other person, the instigator, who is making the accusation because he has been instigated. Tesaṃ dvinnampī means of both the instigator and the one instigated.
409.Vuttaṭṭhānaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sandesaṃ vā haranto dūto nāma, so‘‘paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā pesetvā’’ti iminā saṅgayhatīti tasmiṃ visuṃ avattabbepi‘‘duta’’nti vacanena nissaṭṭhadūtamāha. Paṇṇaṃ vā adatvā ‘‘evañca evañca vadā’’ti sāsanañca adatvā ‘‘taṃ codehī’’ti atthamattameva datvā nissaṭṭho bhikkhu idha ‘‘nissaṭṭhadūto’’ti gahetabbo.
409. A messenger is one who carries a letter or a message to a place that has been mentioned, so he is included by ‘‘paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā pesetvā’’, even though he is not specifically mentioned there, the word ‘‘dūta’’ refers to a messenger who has been sent. Here, a bhikkhu who is sent after being given only the gist of the matter, without being given a letter or a command saying, "Say this and that," is to be understood as a "sent messenger."
‘‘dūta’’nti iminā codetuṃ uggahāpetvā, tamanuggahāpetvā vā nissaṭṭho bhikkhu dūtoyeva gahetabbo.‘‘Paṇṇa’’nti iminā pabbajitassa vā apabbajitassa vā kassaci hatthe codanaṃ likhitvā dinnapaṇṇaṃ gahetabbaṃ.Sāsananti ‘‘pārājikaṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena vatvā pesiyamānaṃ sāsanaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Idaṃ tayampi dūre nisīditvā aññehi kārāpanato‘‘codāpentassā’’ti āha. ‘‘Para’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ettha okāsakārāpanaṃ natthi.
The bhikkhu who is instigated to accuse by ‘‘dūta’’, or who is sent after instigating someone, should be regarded as a messenger. By ‘‘Paṇṇa’’, one should understand a letter in which the accusation is written and given into the hand of a layperson or a renunciate. Sāsana means a message that is sent, stating in the manner of "He has committed a pārājika," etc., which is to be taken. Since these three also cause it to be done by others while sitting far away, he said, ‘‘codāpentassā’’. "Para" should be brought and connected. There is no causing of making an opportunity here.
410.Tathāti yathā amūlakena pārājikena sammukhā okāse kārite, akārite ca, tathā amūlakehi saṅghādisesehīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vutte sammukhā pare’’ti bhummavasena adhikatena yojetabbaṃ, codeti codāpetīti vuttaṃ hotīti.Pācittiyāpattīti okāse kārite kevalā, akārite dukkaṭena sahāti gahetabbaṃ. Sammukhā sesāpattīhi pare vutte cāvanasaññino dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. Okāsākārāpanenapi dukkaṭameva hoti.
410. Tathā means just as an ungrounded pārājika is caused to be spoken face to face in an opportunity or not caused, so it is said to be with ungrounded saṅghādisesa offenses. Vutte sammukhā pare should be connected by way of ground with what is additional, it means he accuses or causes to be accused. Pācittiyāpattī should be understood as a single pācittiya when an opportunity is made, and when an opportunity is not made, it is with a dukkaṭa. The connection is that when others speak face to face with remaining offenses, for one intending to depose, it is a dukkaṭa. Even by not making an opportunity it is only a dukkaṭa.
411.Akkosanādhippāyassāti khuṃsanādhippāyassa.Akatokāsanti akāritokāsaṃ, ‘‘para’’nti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Attanāti codakena, ‘‘sayaṃ akāritokāsa’’nti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Saha pācittiyenāti ‘‘omasavāde pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 14) vuttapācittiyena saha.Vadantassāti codentassa vā codāpentassa vā, ettha ‘‘sammukhā’’ti idaṃ vakkhamānassa ‘‘asammukhā’’ti etassa vipariyāyato labbhati, ca-kārena kāritokāsapakkhe dukkaṭena pācittiyasambandhī.
411. Akkosanādhippāyassā means with the intention of reviling. Akatokāsa means not making an opportunity, it should be connected with ‘‘para’’. Attanā means by the accuser, it should be connected with ‘‘sayaṃ akāritokāsa’’. Saha pācittiyenā means together with the pācittiya stated in "in case of insult, a pācittiya" (pārā. 14). Vadantassā means to the one accusing or the one causing to accuse, here ‘‘sammukhā’’ is obtained from the opposite of the upcoming ‘‘asammukhā’’, and by the ca-conjunction, in the case of causing an opportunity, the relationship of pācittiya is with dukkaṭa.
412.Asammukhā vadantassāti ettha ‘‘akkosanādhippāyassā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Akatokāsamattanā’’ti nānuvattati.Sattahi āpattīhīti pārājikasaṅghādisesathullaccayapācittiyapāṭidesanīyadukkaṭadubbhāsitasaṅkhātesu sattasu āpattikkhandhesu yena kenacīti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘asammukhā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Kammanti tajjanīyādisattavidhaṃ kammaṃ.
412. Asammukhā vadantassā—here, ‘‘akkosanādhippāyassā’’ should be brought and connected. "Akatokāsamattanā" is not repeated. Sattahi āpattīhī means by any one of the seven groups of offenses, namely pārājika, saṅghādisesa, thullaccaya, pācittiya, pāṭidesanīya, dukkaṭa, and dubbhāsita. ‘‘Tathā’’ includes ‘‘asammukhā’’ by this. Kamma means the seven types of actions beginning with tajjaniya.
413.Ummattakādīnantiādi-saddena ‘‘anāpatti suddhe asuddhadiṭṭhissa asuddhe asuddhadiṭṭhissa ummattakassa ādikammikassā’’ti (pārā. 390) vutte saṅgaṇhāti.Pañcaṅgasaṃyutanti yaṃ codeti, tassa ‘‘upasampanno’’ti saṅkhyūpagamanaṃ, tasmiṃ suddhasaññitā, yena pārājikena codeti, tassa diṭṭhādivasena amūlakatā, cāvanādhippāyena sammukhā codanā, tassa taṅkhaṇavijānananti imehi pañcahi aṅgehi yuttaṃ hoti.
413. Ummattakādīna—the ādi-word includes what was stated in "there is no offense for one who is insane, for one who is innocent, for one of impure view in the impure, for one of impure view in the pure, for one who is insane, for the first offender" (pārā. 390). Pañcaṅgasaṃyuta means that which he accuses, the counting of "he is fully ordained," the perception of purity in him, by whichever pārājika he accuses, its being groundless in terms of seeing, etc., accusing face to face with the intention of deposing, the immediate knowing of that by him—is endowed with these five factors.
415.Idanti ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti seso, ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti ca iminā tappaṭipādanīyā āpattiyeva gayhati.Tisamuṭṭhānanti kāyacittato, vācācittato, kāyavācācittatoti sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānato tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘sacitta’’nti. Paṭighacittānaṃ dvinnaṃ aññatarena sahitattā sacittakaṃ. Taṃsampayuttāya domanassavedanāya vasenadukkhavedanaṃ.
415. Ida means the remainder is "training rule," and by "training rule" only the offense that is the subject of that is taken. Tisamuṭṭhāna means arising from three sources with intention: from body and mind, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind. Therefore, he said, ‘‘sacitta’’. Because of being associated with one of the two repelling thoughts, it is intentional. Due to the feeling of displeasure associated with it, it is dukkhavedanaṃ.
Duṭṭhadosakathāvaṇṇanā.
Description of Fault-Finding Talk.
416.Lesamattanti ‘‘aññampi vatthuṃ lissati silissati vohāramatteneva īsakaṃ allīyatīti leso, jātiādīnaṃyeva aññatarakoṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.391) aṭṭhakathāya dassitanibbacanesu ‘‘leso nāma dasa lesā jātileso nāmaleso’’tiādinā (pārā. aṭṭha. 394) nayenapadabhājanevuttesu jātināmagottādīsu dasasu lesesu aññataralesamattanti vuttaṃ hoti.
416. Lesamatta means "lesa is that which adheres slightly, sticks by mere usage, even to another thing; it is a designation for a certain division of race, etc.," among the definitions shown in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.391), it is said that "lesa is ten lesas, jātilesa is the name of the lesa," etc. (pārā. aṭṭha. 394), in the manner stated in the padabhājane, it means just one of the ten lesas, such as race, name, lineage, etc.
jātināma khattiyabrāhmaṇādijāti.Nāmaṃnāma imasmiṃ sikkhāpade ‘‘chagalako dabbo mallaputto nāma, chagalikā mettiyā bhikkhunī nāmā’’ti ṭhapitaṃ nāmaṃ viya codakehi ṭhapitanāmañca buddharakkhitādisakanāmañcāti duvidhaṃ nāmaṃ.Gottaṃnāma gotamamoggallānādigottaṃ.Liṅgaṃnāma dīghatādisaṇṭhānanānattañca kaṇhatādivaṇṇanānattañcāti idaṃ duvidhaliṅgaṃ.Āpattilesonāma lahukādirūpena ṭhitapācittiyādiāpatti.Pattonāma lohapattādi.Cīvaraṃnāma paṃsukūlādi.Upajjhāyonāma cuditakassa upajjhāyo.Ācariyonāma cuditakassa pabbajjācariyādiko.Senāsanaṃnāma cuditakasseva nivāsapāsādādikaṃ.
jāti means the race such as khattiya or brāhmaṇa. Nāmaṃ means a name established in this training rule, such as "Chagalako, Dabbo, Mallaputto by name; Chagalikā, Mettiyā, bhikkhunī by name," and also a name established by the accusers and one's own name such as Buddharakkhita, thus, name is of two kinds. Gottaṃ means lineage such as Gotama, Moggallāna, etc. Liṅgaṃ means the diversity of shapes, such as length, etc., and the diversity of colors, such as blackness, etc., thus, this is a twofold mark. Āpattileso means an offense such as pācittiya existing in the form of light, etc. Patto means an alms bowl made of iron, etc. Cīvaraṃ means robes made of rags, etc. Upajjhāyo means the preceptor of the accused. Ācariyo means the ordination teacher, etc., of the accused. Senāsanaṃ means the dwelling, mansion, etc., of the accused himself.
Codeyyāti aññakhattiyajātikaṃ puggalaṃ pārājikaṃ ajjhāpajjantaṃ disvā attano verikhattiyajātikaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘khattiyo mayā diṭṭho, pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpannosī’’tiādinā nayena codeti.Garukāpattināma saṅghādiseso.Sace cāvanacetanoti ‘‘appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti (pārā. 392) vuttattā sace imaṃ sāsanā cāveyyāmīti adhippāyo hutvā codetīti vuttaṃ hoti, iminā byatirekavasena na aññādhippāyoti vuttameva hotīti purimasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitesu ‘‘cāvanādhippāyo akkosādhippāyo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.389) evamādinānappakārādhippāyesu āpattiyā aṅgabhūtaṃ cāvanādhippāyaṃ dassetvā sesādhippāye paṭikkhipati.
Codeyyā means, having seen a person of another khattiya race committing a pārājika, he accuses a person of his own hostile khattiya race, saying in the manner of "A khattiya has been seen by me, you are one who is engaging in a pārājika offense." Garukāpatti means a saṅghādisesa. Sace cāvanacetano means, because it was said, "so that he might depose him from this holy life" (pārā. 392), it means if, with the intention "may I depose him from this teaching," he accuses. By this, it is stated by way of exclusion that there is no other intention. In the commentary to the previous training rule, among the various kinds of intentions shown such as "with the intention of deposing, with the intention of reviling" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.389), having shown the intention of deposing, which is a part of the offense, he rejects the remaining intentions.
417.Tathāsaññīti ayaṃ pārājikamajjhāpannoyevāti tathāsaññī. ‘‘Codeti vā codāpeti vā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘tathāsaññī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘codāpetī’’ti imināpi yojetabbaṃ.Sesoti ettha ‘‘pārājikāni vuttānī’’tiādiṃ katvā ‘‘sacittaṃ dukkhavedana’’nti pariyantaṃ katvā dassitapaṭhamasikkhāpadavinicchayasaṅgāhakakathāpabandhena vuttasabbavinicchayesu taṃsikkhāpadaniyataṃ ‘‘amūlakenā’’ti idañca imasmiṃ sikkhāpade ‘‘bhikkhumantimavatthunā…pe… anāpatti siyā’’ti vuttamatthañca ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhasabbavinicchayoti attho.Anantarasamo matoheṭṭhā anantaraṃ vuttasikkhāpadeneva sadisoti veditabbo.
417. Tathāsaññī means he perceives him as truly being one who has committed a pārājika. Because it was said, "he accuses or causes to be accused," ‘‘tathāsaññī’’ should be connected with ‘‘codāpetī’’ as well. Seso—here, having made "the pārājikas have been stated," etc., and having made the end with "intentional, painful feeling," the meaning is all the remaining judgements in the collection of statements summarizing the judgements shown in the first training rule, having set aside ‘‘amūlakenā’’ which is specific to that training rule, and the meaning stated in this training rule, "a bhikkhu ... may there be no offense," etc. Anantarasamo mato—it should be understood as similar to the training rule stated immediately below.
Dutiyaduṭṭhadosakathāvaṇṇanā.
Description of the Second Fault-Finding Talk.
418.Samaggassa saṅghassāti ‘‘samaggo nāma saṅgho samānasaṃvāsako samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhito’’tipadabhājanevuttattā cittena ca kāyena ca ekībhūtassa saṅghassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ca-kāro padapūraṇo, eva-kārattho vā, nasamaggassāti byatirekattho veditabbo.Bhedatthaṃ vāyameyyāti ‘‘ime kathaṃ kadā bhijjissantī’’ti rattindivaṃ cintetvā upāyaṃ gavesitvā pakkhapariyesanādiṃ kareyyāti attho. Vuttañhipāḷiyaṃ‘‘bhedāya parakkameyyāti kathaṃ ime nānā assu vinā assu vaggā assūti pakkhaṃ pariyesati gaṇaṃ bandhatī’’ti (pārā. 412).
418. Samaggassa saṅghassā means, because it was stated in the padabhājane that "the saṅgha is harmonious, dwells in the same dwelling, is established within the same boundary," it means of the saṅgha which is unified in mind and body. The ca-conjunction is merely a particle, or it has the meaning of eva, it should be understood as having an excluding meaning of "not of a harmonious saṅgha." Bhedatthaṃ vāyameyyā means thinking day and night, "How and when will these be split?" and seeking a means, he should do seeking factions, etc. For it was said in the pāḷi, "He strives for division, he seeks a faction thinking, 'How will these be different, separate, in groups?' he gathers a following" (pārā. 412).
Bhedahetunti ‘‘idhupāli bhikkhu adhammaṃ ‘dhammo’ti dīpeti, dhammaṃ ‘adhammo’ti dīpetī’’tiādinā (pari. 459) nayenakhandhakevuttaṃ aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthusaṅkhātaṃ saṅghabhedakāraṇamāha. Idameva hipadabhājanevuttaṃ ‘‘bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇanti aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthūnī’’ti.Gahetvāti paggayha.Tiṭṭheyyāti nappaṭinissajjeyya.Paridīpayanti ettha paridīpento, na paṭinissajjantoti attho. Yathāha ‘‘tiṭṭheyyāti na paṭinissajjeyyā’’ti.
Bhedahetu means the cause of division of the saṅgha known as the eighteen grounds for division stated in the khandhaka in the manner of "here, a bhikkhu of this teaching declares what is not the Dhamma to be 'Dhamma,' and declares what is the Dhamma to be 'not Dhamma'" (pari. 459), etc. For this is what was stated in the padabhājane: "or an issue conducive to division means the eighteen grounds for division." Gahetvā means taking hold of. Tiṭṭheyyā means he does not relinquish it. Paridīpaya means here, one who fully proclaims, he does not relinquish it. As he said, "tiṭṭheyyā means he does not relinquish it."
419.Bhikkhūhīti tassa saṅghabhedakassa parakkamanaṃ passantehi vā dūre ce, ṭhitaṃ pavattiṃ suṇantehi vā lajjīhi supesalehi sesabhikkhūhi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘bhikkhūhīti aññehi bhikkhūhi. Ye passanti ye suṇanti, tehi vattabbo’’ti (pārā. 412). Tassa vadantehi evaṃ vattabbanti vacanākāradassanatthamāha ‘‘māyasmā samaggassa saṅghassa bhedāya parakkami, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ samādāya paggayha aṭṭhāsi, sametāyasmā saṅghena, samaggo hi saṅgho sammodamāno avivadamāno ekuddeso phāsu viharatī’’ti (pārā. 411) pāṭhaṃ, taṃ ekadesasaṅgahavasena upalakkhetumāha‘‘bhedatthaṃ…pe… bhedakāraṇa’’nti. Iti vattabboti yojanā.
419. Bhikkhūhī means by the remaining bhikkhus who are ashamed and well-behaved, who see the striving of that saṅgha-divider or who hear of the matter while staying far away. For it was said, "bhikkhūhi means by other bhikkhus. Those who see and those who hear should speak" (pārā. 412). In order to show the manner of speaking of those who are speaking to him, he says, "māyasmā samaggassa saṅghassa bhedāya parakkami, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ samādāya paggayha aṭṭhāsi, sametāyasmā saṅghena, samaggo hi saṅgho sammodamāno avivadamāno ekuddeso phāsu viharatī" (pārā. 411), he indicates this by way of including a part, saying ‘‘bhedatthaṃ…pe… bhedakāraṇa’’. It should be connected as "iti товаровoti".
420.Vuccamāno hīti etthahi-saddo api-saddattho.‘‘Pī’’ti vā pāṭho, tehi lajjibhikkhūhi ‘‘māyasmā’’tiādinā nayena visuṃ tikkhattuṃ vuttopīti attho.Nissajjeyya na ceva nanti taṃ bhedāya parakkamanaṃ appaṭinissajjanapaccayā dukkaṭāpattiṃ āpajjitvāpi na vissajjeyyāti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘no ce paṭinissajjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 412). Tathā hi appaṭinissajjanto hatthesu, pādesu ca gahetvā saṅghamajjhe ānetvā tatheva tikkhattuṃ vuttopi taṃ avissajjetvā dukkaṭāpattiṃ āpannoti iminā ca saṅgahito. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘so bhikkhu saṅghamajjhampi ākaḍḍhitvā vattabbo ‘māyasmā…pe… phāsu viharatī’ti. Dutiyampi vattabbo. Tatiyampi vattabbo. Sace paṭinissajjati, iccetaṃkusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti. Idaṃ ubhayattha dukkaṭaṃ sāmaññena vakkhati ‘‘tikkhattuṃ pana vuttassa, apariccajatopi ta’’nti.
420. Vuccamāno hī—here, the hi-particle has the meaning of the api-particle. ‘‘Pī’’ is also a reading, it means even after being spoken to three times separately by those ashamed bhikkhus in the manner of "māyasmā," etc. Nissajjeyya na ceva na means even after incurring a dukkaṭa offense due to not relinquishing that striving for division, he does not relinquish it. For it was said, "no ce paṭinissajjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (pārā. 412). Thus, he is also included by this because, while not relinquishing, having taken him by the hands and feet and bringing him into the middle of the saṅgha, even after being spoken to three times in the same way, he has incurred a dukkaṭa offense. For this was said by the Blessed One: "That bhikkhu should be dragged into the middle of the saṅgha and spoken to, 'māyasmā…pe… phāsu viharatī.' He should be spoken to a second time. He should be spoken to a third time. If he relinquishes it, that is skillful. If he does not relinquish it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa." This dukkaṭa in both cases will be stated generally, "tikkhattuṃ pana vuttassa, apariccajatopi taṃ."
Samanubhāsitabboti ettha ‘‘so bhikkhū’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘yāvatatiya’’nti seso, yathāha ‘‘so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo’’ti (pārā. 411), tathā saṅghamajjhepi tikkhattuṃ vuccamānopi no vissajjetvā dukkaṭaṃ āpanno so ādhānaggāhī bhikkhu saṅghena tikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ kammavācaṃ vatvā samanubhāsitabboti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabboti yāva tatiyaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ, tāva samanubhāsitabbo, tīhi samanubhāsanakammavācāhi kammaṃ kātabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.411).Tanti bhedāya parakkamanaṃ, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ paggahetvā ṭhānañca.Accajanti, ñatticatutthāya kammavācāya vuccamānāyapi accajanto.Garukaṃ phuseti tatiyāya kammavācāya ‘‘so bhāseyyā’’tiyyakārappattāya saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjati.
Samanubhāsitabbo—here, ‘‘so bhikkhū’’ should be brought and connected, the remainder is ‘‘yāvatatiya’’, as he said, "so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo" (pārā. 411), similarly, even after being spoken to three times in the middle of the saṅgha, he does not relinquish it and incurs a dukkaṭa, that adherent bhikkhu should be formally censured after reciting the statement of action spoken three times by the saṅgha. As he said in the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, "yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabboti yāva tatiyaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ, tāva samanubhāsitabbo, tīhi samanubhāsanakammavācāhi kammaṃ kātabba" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.411). Ta means striving for division, taking hold of an issue conducive to division, and remaining. Accaja means while the statement of action with announcement is being recited, he abandons it. Garukaṃ phuse means by the third statement of action, because of the suffix yya in "so bhāseyyā," he incurs a saṅghādisesa.
421.Saṅghassa bhedāya parakkamantaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā, sutvā, ñatvā ca avadantassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭanti yojanā.
421. The connection is that for a bhikkhu who sees, hears, and knows of a bhikkhu striving for division of the saṅgha and does not speak, there is a dukkaṭa.
422.Kīvadūre vasantehi sutvā gantvā vattabbanti āha‘‘gantvā’’tiādi. Addhayojanamevaaddhayojanatā,tato adhikaṃ vā. Gilānaṃ paṭicca addhayojanaṃ vuttaṃ, itaraṃ paṭicca‘‘adhikaṃ dūrampi pana gantabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘sace sakkotī’’ti.Tāvadeti tadā eva, acirāyitvāti attho.
422. How far away must they be dwelling in order to hear and go to speak? He says, ‘‘gantvā’’ etc. Half a yojana itself is addhayojanatā, or more than that. Half a yojana was stated with reference to a sick person; with reference to the other, it was said, ‘‘adhikaṃ dūrampi pana gantabba’’. Therefore, he says, ‘‘sace sakkotī’’. Tāvade means at that very moment, without delay.
423.Tikkhattuṃ pana vuttassāti ‘‘māyasmā’’tiādinā nayena visuñca saṅghamajjhe ca tikkhattuṃ vuttassāpi apariccajantassa.Taṃbhedāya parakkamādikaṃ. Bhedappavattiyā sutakkhaṇe sayaṃ agantvā paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā pesentassa āpattiṃ dassetumāha‘‘dūtaṃ vā’’tiādi. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.411) ‘‘dūtaṃ vā paṇṇaṃ vā pesetvā vadatopi āpattimokkho natthī’’tiādi.
423. Tikkhattuṃ pana vuttassā means even for one who, after being spoken to three times separately in the manner of "māyasmā," etc., and in the middle of the saṅgha, does not relinquish it. Taṃ means that striving for division, etc. In order to show the offense for one who, upon hearing of the occurrence of division, sends a letter or a message without going himself, he says, ‘‘dūtaṃ vā’’ etc. As he said in the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.411), "there is no release from the offense even for one who speaks after sending a messenger or a letter," etc.
425.Yyakāre pana sampatteti ‘‘yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyyā’’ti (pārā. 413) tatiyakammavācāya anteyyakāre uccārite.Passambhantīti paṭippassambhanti, vūpasamantīti attho.Dukkaṭādayoti ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi dve ca thullaccayā. Yathāha ‘‘saṅghādisesaṃ ajjhāpajjantassa ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayā paṭippassambhantī’’ti (pārā. 414). Tasmā ñattiyā pubbe bahi ca saṅghamajjhe ca tikkhattuṃ vuttepi appaṭinissajjanena āpannāni dve dukkaṭāni desetabbānīti viññāyati.
425. Yyakāre pana sampatte means when the final yya-sound is uttered in the third act of declaration: "Let him who does not approve speak" (pārā. 413). Passambhantī means paṭippassambhanti, they are appeased, they subside. Dukkaṭādayo means a dukkaṭa offense for the declaration (ñatti), and two thullaccaya offenses for the two acts of declaration (kammavācā). As it was said, "For one incurring a saṅghādisesa, there is a dukkaṭa for the declaration, and the thullaccayas are appeased by the two acts of declaration" (pārā. 414). Therefore, it is understood that two dukkaṭa offenses, incurred by not relinquishing after being spoken to three times in private and in the midst of the Saṅgha, must be confessed.
mahāsumattherassavādaṃ ‘‘kimanāpannānaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā’’ti paṭibāhitvā ‘‘liṅgaparivattane asādhāraṇāpattiyo viya āpannā paṭippassambhantī’’timahāpadumattherassavādo ṭhito.
The opinion of Mahāsumatthera, "What is the appeasement for those who have not incurred offenses?" having been refuted, the opinion of Mahāpadumatthera stands: "Just as non-common offenses change with a change of gender, offenses are appeased (by the formal act)."
426.Akate pana kammasminti yathāvuttasamanubhāsanakamme akate.Apariccajatopi cāti taṃ saṅghabhedāya parakkamanaṃ apariccajantassāpi.‘‘Saṅghādisesenā’’ti iminā kammaṃ akatvā saṅghamajjhe ca bahi ca tikkhattuṃ vuccamānassa appaṭinissajjanena dukkaṭaṃ pana hotīti byatirekatova dasseti.
426. Akate pana kammasmiṃ means when the aforementioned act of admonishment is not done. Apariccajatopi cā means even if one does not relinquish that effort to divide the Saṅgha. ‘‘Saṅghādisesenā’’ by this it shows by contrast that merely a dukkaṭa occurs from not relinquishing when one is being spoken to three times in the midst of the Saṅgha and in private, without performing the act (kamma).
427.Pubbe vāti ñattiyā pubbe visuṃ, saṅghamajjhe vā tikkhattuṃ vuccamānepi.Taṅkhaṇepīti ñattikkhaṇe vā. Ñattiyā aniṭṭhitāyapipacchāpi,imassa avadhiṃ dasseti‘‘asampatte yyakārasmi’’nti.Paṭinissajjatopi catassa saṅghādisesena anāpatti pakāsitāti paṭhamagāthāya pacchimaḍḍhaṃ idhānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
427. Pubbe vā means separately before the ñatti, or even while being spoken to three times in the midst of the Saṅgha. Taṅkhaṇepī means even at the moment of the ñatti. Pacchāpi, even after the ñatti has not been completed, he shows the limit of this with ‘‘asampatte yyakārasmiṃ’’, "before the yya-sound is reached." Paṭinissajjatopi ca and it is declared that there is no offense of saṅghādisesa for him; the latter half of the first verse should be brought in and connected here.
428.Ettāvatā ‘‘anāpatti asamanubhāsantassa paṭinissajjantassa ummattakassa khittacittassa vedanāṭṭassa ādikammikassā’’ti (pārā. 416) pāṭhe ‘‘paṭinissajjantassā’’ti padena gahitesu ‘‘ñattito’’tiādīsu vinicchayaṃ dassetvā taṃ nigametuṃ‘‘paṭinissajjato vāpi ta’’nti āha. Nigamanatthajotako evaṃ-saddo sāmatthiyā labbhati, evaṃ ‘‘ñattito’’tiādinā yathāvuttanayena paṭinissajjantassa vāti attho.Tanti saṅghabhedappayogaṃ.Asamanubhāsato vāti asamanubhāsiyamānassa. ‘‘Asamanubhāsiyato’’ti vattabbe vikaraṇapaccayalopena ‘‘asamanubhāsato’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘asamanubhāsantassāti asamanubhāsiyamānassā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.416). ‘‘Saṅghādisesena anāpatti pakāsitā’’ti anuvattamānattā icchitatthe siddhepi puna ‘‘anāpatti pakāsitā’’ti vacane punaruttatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, padāvutti nāma alaṃkāro hotīti.
428. Thus far, having shown the resolution in "from the ñatti," etc., among those included by the word "relinquishing" in the passage "there is no offense for one who is not admonished, for one who relinquishes, for one who is mad, of deranged mind, overcome by pain, for the original offender" (pārā. 416), he says ‘‘paṭinissajjato vāpi ta’’ in order to conclude that. The evaṃ sound, which indicates the meaning of conclusion, is obtained by capability; thus, it means for one who relinquishes in the manner described above beginning with "from the ñatti." Taṃ means that attempt to divide the Saṅgha. Asamanubhāsato vā means for one who is not being admonished. It should be seen that "asamanubhāsato" is said with the elision of the vikaraṇa suffix when "asamanubhāsiyato" should have been said. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "asamanubhāsantassa means for one who is not being admonished" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.416). Even though the desired meaning is established since "it is declared that there is no offense of saṅghādisesa" is carried over, would repetition occur in saying "it is declared that there is no offense"? It does not occur; the repetition of words is called an embellishment.
429.Imassa sikkhāpadassa atthuppattiyaṃ saṅghabhedatthaṃ pañca vatthūni yācantena devadattena ‘‘sādhu bhante bhikkhū yāvajīvaṃ macchamaṃsaṃ na khādeyyuṃ, yo macchamaṃsaṃ khādeyya, vajjaṃ naṃ phuseyyā’’ti (pārā. 409) vutte ‘‘alaṃ devadatta mayā tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ macchamaṃsaṃ anuññātaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ aparisaṅkita’’nti (pārā. 409) anuññātesu macchamaṃsesu kappiyākappiyavinicchayaṃ pubbe anokāsābhāvena avatvā pakataṃ sikkhāpadavinicchayaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā idāni pattāvasesaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘yañhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ tassā’’ti vakkhamānattā‘‘ya’’nti idaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu’’nti iminā ca ‘‘macchamaṃsa’’nti etena ca yojetabbaṃ.Macchanti odakaṃ.Maṃsanti thalajānaṃ maṃsaṃ.Nibbematikoti ‘‘maṃ uddissa kata’’nti vā ‘‘saṅghaṃ uddissa kata’’nti vā uppannāya vimatiyā virahito.
429. In the origin of the meaning of this training rule, when Devadatta, requesting five items for the purpose of dividing the Saṅgha, said, "It is good, venerable sirs, that monks should not eat fish and meat for life; whoever should eat fish and meat, may an offense touch him" (pārā. 409), and in the case of fish and meat having been allowed with "Enough, Devadatta, fish and meat purified in three ways has been allowed by me, unseen, unheard, unthought of" (pārā. 409), in order to show now the remaining portion pertaining to the determination of what is allowable and unallowable in regard to fish and meat, without having spoken earlier due to the absence of opportunity, after having completed the determination of the training rule at hand, he begins ‘‘yañhī’’ etc. Since it will be said "taṃ tassā," ‘‘ya’’ this should be connected with "bhikkhu," and with "macchamaṃsa." Maccha means from the water. Maṃsa means meat of land animals. Nibbematiko means without doubt arisen with "done intending for me," or "done intending for the Saṅgha."
430.Samuddissa katanti saṅghaṃ vā attānaṃ vā uddissa kataṃ.‘‘Ñatvā’’ti iminā ajānitvā bhuñjantassa anāpattibhāvamāha.
430. Samuddissa kataṃ means done intending for the Saṅgha or oneself. ‘‘Ñatvā’’ with this he states the state of non-offense for one eating without knowing.
431.Hatthīnaṃ assānaṃ acchānaṃ manussānaṃ ahīnaṃ kukkurānaṃ dīpīnaṃ sīhānaṃ byagghānaṃ taracchānaṃ maṃsaṃ akappiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.
431. The connection is that the meat of elephants, horses, bears, humans, snakes, dogs, leopards, lions, tigers, hyenas is unallowable.
432.Sacittakatā āpattiyāyeva yujjati, idha pana taṃhetukaṃ maṃsameva hetumhi phalūpacārenasacittakanti gahitaṃ. Ettha cittaṃ nāma attānaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā uddissa katabhāvajānanacittaṃ.Sesanti anuddissakataṃ akappiyamaṃsaṃ.Acittakanti vuttanayameva.
432. "Having consciousness" (sacittaka) is suitable only with regard to an offense; here, however, the meat that is the cause of that is taken as sacittaka by way of metaphorical application of the fruit to the cause. Here, consciousness (citta) is the consciousness of knowing that it was done intending for oneself or the Saṅgha. Sesaṃ the remaining unallowable meat not done intending (for anyone). Acittakaṃ in the manner stated itself.
433.Pucchitvāyevāti akappiyamaṃsaparihāratthaṃ dasasu maṃsesu nāmañca uddissakatassa parihāratthaṃ ubhayassāpi paṭiladdhākārañca pucchitvāyevāti attho. Odakesu macchesu akappiyābhāvato laddhākārova ñātabbo. Maṃse diṭṭhamatteyeva ‘‘idaṃ asukamaṃsa’’nti jānanti ce, apucchitepi doso natthi. Dāyakesu maṃsassābhāve laddhaniyāme apucchitepi doso natthi. Yathā vā tathā vā vimatiyā uppannāya appaṭiggāhetvā nisinne ‘‘kasmā na paṭiggaṇhathā’’ti pucchite vimatiyā uppannākāraṃ vatvā ‘‘mayaṃ tumhe vā itare bhikkhū vā uddissa na karimhā’’ti vatvā ‘‘amhākameva sandhāya kataṃ, paṇṇākāratthāya kataṃ, atithīnaṃ vā atthāya kata’’ntiādinā attanā laddhappakāraṃ vatvā ‘‘saṃsayaṃ akatvā paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadeyyuṃ ce, paṭiggahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti sabbamidaṃaṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ.
433. Pucchitvāyevā means only after asking the name among the ten kinds of meat for the sake of avoiding unallowable meat, and for the sake of avoiding that done intending (for someone), the manner in which each was obtained. Since there is no unallowable (kind) among fish from the water, only the manner in which it was obtained should be known. If one knows "this is such-and-such meat" as soon as the meat is seen, there is no fault even if not asked. In the absence of meat among the donors, there is no fault even if the rule by which it was obtained is not asked. If, when doubt has arisen in any way whatsoever, when they have sat down without receiving (the food), when they are asked "why do you not receive (it)?" and after stating the manner in which the doubt has arisen, they say "we, you, or other monks did not do (this) intending for (anyone)," and after stating the manner in which it was obtained by themselves with "it was done intending for ourselves, it was done for the sake of a gift, it was done for the sake of guests, etc.," they should say "it should be received without making doubt," it is allowable to receive; all this was said in the Aṭṭhakathā.
Vattaṭṭhāti sammāsambuddhena mahākaruṇāya desitaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ visodhetvā paṭipajjane patiṭṭhitā.‘‘Vinayaññuno’’ti iminā vinayaṃ ajānitvā upadesappamāṇeneva vattaṃ pūrentehi vattassa virodhopi siyāti te nivatteti.‘‘Vattaṭṭhā’’ti visesanena vinayaṃ ñatvāpi apūraṇe nivatteti. Ubhayenapi attanā vuttavinicchayassa parisuddhabhāvaṃ dīpeti.
Vattaṭṭhā established in purifying and practicing the Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīla, taught by the Sammāsambuddha out of great compassion. ‘‘Vinayaññuno’’ with this, he prevents those who, not knowing the Vinaya, fulfill the duty merely by the measure of instruction, (because) opposition to the duty might occur; ‘‘Vattaṭṭhā’’ by the specification, he prevents even those who, knowing the Vinaya, do not fulfill (the duty). With both, he shows the pure nature of the determination spoken by himself.
434.Idaṃ samanubhāsananti yathāvuttasikkhāpadamāha. Samanubhāsanena sādhetabbā āpatti samanubhāsanā kāraṇūpacārena. Aññathā ekasamuṭṭhānādibhāvo na yujjati.Ekasamuṭṭhānaṃkāyavācācittasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ etassāti katvā.Kāyakammanti hatthamuddāvasena kāyena kātabbassa paṭinissajjanassa akatattā kāyakammaṃ.Vacīkammanti vacasā kātabbassa akatattā vacīkammaṃ.Akriyanti yathāvuttanayena ‘‘saṅghabhedopakkamanivāraṇāya parakkamanaṃ paṭinissajjāmī’’ti kāyavikārena vā vacībhedena vā aviññāpanato akiriyaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
434. Idaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ refers to the aforementioned training rule. The offense to be accomplished by admonishment is admonishment by way of transference of cause. Otherwise, the state of having a single origin, etc., would not be suitable. Ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ having made (it) "a single origin is the origin of this" which is reckoned as bodily, verbal, and mental. Kāyakammaṃ bodily action, because of the non-performance of the relinquishment that should be done with the body by way of a hand gesture. Vacīkammaṃ verbal action, because of the non-performance of what should be done with speech. Akriyaṃ non-action; it is said that it is called non-action because of not making known by bodily gesture or difference in speech "I relinquish the effort to prevent the undertaking to divide the Saṅgha" in the manner stated.
Saṅghabhedakathāvaṇṇanā.
Narration of the Section on Division of the Saṅgha.
435.Kiñcipi vattabbanti ‘‘eko vā dve vā tayo vā’ti vuttasaṅghabhedānuvattakabhikkhuṃ passantehi suṇantehi lajjibhikkhūhi visuñca saṅghamajjhe ca netvā tikkhattuṃyeva saṅghabhedānuvattanassa akattabbataṃ vatvā tato anoramantānaṃ ñatticatutthāya kammavācāya samanubhāsanakammaṃ kātabba’’nti idañca ‘‘tatiyānussāvanāyayya-kārappattāya āpajjanakasaṅghādisesato pubbe āpannā dukkaṭathullaccayā paṭippassambhantī’’ti idañca anāpattipakāro cāti imaṃ sādhāraṇavinicchayaṃ sandhāyāha. Vacanappakārabhedo pana attheva, so saṅkhepatomātikāya(pārā. 418-419) vitthāratopadabhājane(pārā. 418-419) āgatanayena vattabbo.Assāti dutiyasaṅghabhedasikkhāpadassa.‘‘Samuṭṭhānā…pe… matā’’ti iminā sādhāraṇavinicchayo atidiṭṭhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
435. Kiñcipi vattabbaṃ this general determination having in mind this: "When monks who are ashamed see or hear a monk persisting in division of the Saṅgha spoken of as 'one, two, or three,' after leading him separately and in the midst of the Saṅgha, after speaking three times the non-doing of persisting in division of the Saṅgha, then the act of admonishment should be done with a declaration and fourth (act of declaration)"; and this: "The dukkaṭa and thullaccaya offenses, incurred before the saṅghādisesa of incurring (the offense) reaching the yya-sound of the third announcement, are appeased"; and this: the declaration of non-offense. However, there is certainly a difference in the manner of speaking; that should be spoken of in brief according to the method that has come in the Mātikā (pārā. 418-419), and in detail in the Padabhājana (pārā. 418-419). Assā of the second saṅghādisesa training rule. It should be seen that the general determination is shown in excess with ‘‘Samuṭṭhānā…pe… matā’’.
Dutiyasaṅghabhedakathāvaṇṇanā.
Narration of the Section on the Second Division of the Saṅgha.
436.Uddesapariyāpanneti ettha ‘‘sikkhāpade’’ti seso, nidānapārājikasaṅghādisesaaniyatavitthārasaṅkhāte pañcavidhauddesalakkhaṇapātimokkhe antogadhasikkhāpadavisayeti attho.‘‘Uddesapariyāpanne sikkhāpade’’ti iminā ‘‘avacanīyamattānaṃ karotī’’ti imassa visayaṃ dasseti.Bhikkhu dubbacajātikoti ettha ‘‘yo’’ti ajjhāhāro. ‘‘Dubbacajātikoti dubbacasabhāvo, vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyoti attho’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.425-426)aṭṭhakathāyavuttadovacassatāya hetubhūtapāpicchatādīhi ekūnavīsatiyā dhammehi samannāgato hutvā attani vuttaṃ anusiṭṭhiṃ sādaramaggahaṇena nāsanatā dovacassasabhāvoti attho. Vuttañhetaṃpadabhājane‘‘dubbacajātiko hotīti dubbaco hoti dovacassakaraṇehi dhammehi samannāgato akkhamo appadakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsani’’nti (pārā. 426).
436. Uddesapariyāpanne here, "sikkhāpade" is the remainder; it means in regard to a training rule included in the Pātimokkha that has the five characteristics of recitation (uddesa), reckoned as the expanse of the introduction, pārājika, saṅghādisesa, and aniyata rules. With ‘‘Uddesapariyāpanne sikkhāpade’’, he shows the scope of "he makes himself unadmonishable." Bhikkhu dubbacajātiko here, "yo" is to be supplied. Aṭṭhakathā says, "Dubbacajātiko means of an unadmonishable nature, meaning unable to be spoken to" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.425-426); (it) means the state of being unadmonishable is the nature of not quickly accepting instruction spoken to oneself with respect, being endowed with nineteen qualities, beginning with evil desire, which are the cause of unruliness. This was said in the Padabhājana: "Dubbacajātiko hotīti, he is unadmonishable, endowed with qualities causing unruliness, impatient, unskilful in grasping, (resistant to) instruction" (pārā. 426).
Avacanīyamattānaṃkarotīti ‘‘mā maṃ āyasmanto kiñci avacuttha kalyāṇaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā, ahampāyasmante na kiñci vakkhāmi kalyāṇaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā, viramathāyasmanto mama vacanāyā’’ti (pārā. 425) vuttanayena attānaṃ avacanīyaṃ karoti.Garukaṃ siyāti ettha ‘‘tassā’’ti idaṃ ajjhāhāranayasambandhena labbhati. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – dubbacajātiko yo bhikkhu uddesapariyāpanne sikkhāpade attānaṃ avacanīyaṃ karoti, tassa garukaṃ siyāti.
Avacanīyamattānaṃ karotī means he makes himself unadmonishable in the manner stated with "Let the venerable ones not say anything to me, either good or bad, and I will not say anything to the venerable ones, either good or bad; venerable ones, desist from speaking to me" (pārā. 425). Garukaṃ siyā here, "tassā" is obtained by way of the rule of supplying. Here, this is the connection: for that monk who is of an unadmonishable nature, who makes himself unadmonishable in a training rule included in the uddesa, there is a grave (offense).
yyakārappattāya pubbe vuttanayeneva ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccaye ca paṭippassambhayamāno saṅghādiseso hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
Reaching the yya-sound, it is said that a saṅghādisesa occurs for one who appeases the dukkaṭa for the ñatti and the thullaccaya offenses for the two acts of declaration in the manner stated earlier.
437.Dubbaceti ettha ‘‘sikkhāpade’’ti seso, tathāsaṅghabhedakavaṇṇaneti etthāpi. Saṅghabhedo evasaṅghabhedako,taṃ vaṇṇeti kathetīti saṅghabhedakavaṇṇanaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Sikkhāpadaṃ, tañca paṭhamameva saṅghabhedakasikkhāpadaṃ gahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ vuttanayenāti yojanā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamasaṅghabhedasadisānevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.425-426).‘‘Sabbo vinicchayo’’ti etena idha dassitena ‘‘garukaṃ siyā’’ti etena saṅgahitaṃ saṅghādisesāvasānavinicchayaṃ vajjetvā ‘‘akate panā’’tiādigāthāttayena vuttaanāpattippakāre ca ‘‘idamekasamuṭṭhāna’’ntiādigāthāya vuttasamuṭṭhānādike ca atidisati.
437. Dubbace here, "sikkhāpade" is the remainder; likewise, in saṅghabhedakavaṇṇane. Saṅghabhedo eva is saṅghabhedako, to narrate, to speak that is saṅghabhedakavaṇṇanaṃ; what is that? A training rule, and that first saṅghabhedaka training rule should be taken, the connection is "in that in the manner stated." As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "the origin, etc., are just like the first division of the Saṅgha" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.425-426). With ‘‘Sabbo vinicchayo’’, he extends to the types of non-offense stated with the three verses beginning with "akate panā," and to the origin, etc., stated with the verse beginning with "idamekasamuṭṭhāna," leaving out the final determination regarding saṅghādisesa, included by this "garukaṃ siyā" shown here.
Dubbacakathāvaṇṇanā.
Narration of the Section on Unadmonishability.
438.Yokuladūsako bhikkhu, so chandagāmitādīhi pāpento bhikkhuhikamme kariyamāne taṃchandagāmitādīhi pāpanaṃ accajantogarukaṃ phusesaṅghādisesaṃ āpajjatīti yojanā. ‘‘Kuladūsakoti kulāni dūseti pupphena vā phalena vā cuṇṇena vā mattikāya vā dantakaṭṭhena vā veḷuyā vā vejjikāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā’’ti (pārā. 437) vacanato saddhāsampannakulāni lābhaṃ nissāya pupphadānādīhi saṅgaṇhitvā tathā akarontesu lajjibhikkhūsu kulānaṃ saddhādūsanatokuladūsako,bhikkhu.
438. The connection is: that monk who is a family-corrupter, when kamme kariyamāne an act is being done by the monks, if taṃ while preventing that corruption by means of partiality to desire, etc., garukaṃ phuse he incurs a saṅghādisesa. Kuladūsako bhikkhu, because of "kuladūsako means one who corrupts families with flowers, or with fruit, or with powder, or with clay, or with a tooth-cleaner, or with bamboo, or with a brush, or with a leg-massager" (pārā. 437), (he is) a family-corrupter, a monk, from corrupting the faith of families, having associated with families endowed with faith by means of giving flowers, etc., relying on gain when monks who are ashamed do not do so.
Chandagāmitādīhi pāpentoti kuladūsanakammaṃ karontaṃ disvā vā sutvā vā avacanato āpajjitabbadukkaṭato muccanatthāya ‘‘āyasmā kho…pe… alante idha vāsenā’’ti vadante lajjī pesale bhikkhū ‘‘chandagāmino ca bhikkhū…pe… ekaccaṃ na pabbājentī’’ti chandagāmitādīhi catūhi agatigamanehi yojentoti attho.Kamme kariyamāneti yathāvuttanayena attānaṃ garahantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kariyamānaṃ akkosanañca paribhāsanañca ye passanti, ye ca suṇanti, tehi ‘‘māyasmā evaṃ avaca, na ca bhikkhū chandagāmino…pe… alante idha vāsenā’’ti tikkhattuṃ vuccamānopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjitvāpi appaṭinissajjantaṃ hatthe gahetvā ākaḍḍhitvā saṅghamajjhaṃ ānetvā ‘‘māyasmā evaṃ avacā’’tiādinā nayeneva punapi tikkhattuṃ vutte dukkaṭaṃ āpajjitvāpi appaṭinissajjantassa ñatticatutthāya kammavācāya samanubhāsanakamme kariyamāneti vuttaṃ hoti.Garukaṃ phuseti ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccaye ca paṭippassambhento tatiyakammavācāya anteyyakāre sampatte saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
Chandagāmitādīhi pāpento means those monks who are ashamed and upright, seeing or hearing one doing the act of corrupting families, in order to be freed from the dukkaṭa to be incurred from not speaking, are connecting those who are ashamed with the four courses of going to wrong destinations, saying "The venerable one…is not fit for dwelling here." Kamme kariyamāne means when the act of admonishment is being done with a declaration and fourth (act of declaration) for one not relinquishing, even after incurring a dukkaṭa offense, even after being spoken to three times in the same manner after seizing (him) by the hand, dragging (him), and bringing (him) into the midst of the Saṅgha those who see and those who hear the monks censuring themselves in the manner stated, saying "May the venerable one not say thus, and the monks are not partial to desire… (he) is not fit for dwelling here," even after incurring a dukkaṭa offense. Garukaṃ phuse it is said that a saṅghādisesa is incurred when the yya-sound is reached at the end of the third act of declaration for one who appeases the dukkaṭa for the declaration and the thullaccaya offenses for the two acts of declaration.
439-40.‘‘Kulāni dūseti pupphena vā’’tiādinā (pārā. 437) nayena vuttakuladūsanopakaraṇabhūtacuṇṇapaṇṇādīsu vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘cuṇṇa’’ntiādi.Cuṇṇanti sirīsapaṇṇādicuṇṇaṃ.Paṇṇanti tambūlapaṇṇatālapaṇṇādikhāditabbākhāditabbapaṇṇaṃ.Phalanti tālapanasādiphalaṃ.Pupphanti campakādipupphaṃ.Veḷunti andoḷikāpāṭaṃ kiraṇḍādikaṃ veḷuṃ.Kaṭṭhanti gehadāruṃ, indhanañca.Mattikanti pākatikaṃ, pañcavaṇṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ.
439-40. To show the decision regarding powders, leaves, etc., which are instruments for corrupting families as stated by the method beginning with "Kulāni dūseti pupphena vā" (pārā. 437), he says, "cuṇṇa" etc. Cuṇṇa means powder made from acacia leaves etc. Paṇṇa means betel leaves, palm leaves, and other edible and non-edible leaves. Phala means fruits like palmyra fruits, jackfruits, etc. Puppha means flowers like champak flowers etc. Veḷu means bamboo such as andoḷikāpāṭa, kiraṇḍa, etc. Kaṭṭha means wood for houses and firewood. Mattika means natural clay or clay of five colors.
Theyyāti corikā.‘‘Dadato’’ti idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ‘‘kātabbo’’ti paccattavacanantaṃ visesitabbamapekkhitvā ‘‘dadanto’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmena paccattavacanantaṃ anuvattetabbaṃ.Kātabboti ettha kāretabboti attho. Iminā saṅghasantakaṃ, gaṇasantakaṃ, aññapuggalasantakañca cuṇṇādiṃ kulasaṅgahatthaṃ corikāya dento bhaṇḍagghena kāretabboti imaṃ vinicchayaṃ dasseti.Saṅghaññasantaketi saṅghaññasantakacuṇṇādiketi attho. Etthaañña-saddena gaṇapuggalānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
Theyyā means stealing. In "dadato," which is a word indicating ownership, "kātabbo" which is a word indicating individual action, should be applied by expecting distinction. "Dadanto" should be followed in the transformation of the विभक्ति (inflection) into a word indicating individual action. In "kātabbo," the meaning is kāretabbo (should be made to do). By this, he shows the decision that one who, for the purpose of supporting a family, steals and gives powder etc. belonging to the Sangha, a group, or another individual, should be made to pay the cost of the goods. Saṅghaññasantake means powder etc. belonging to the Sangha or another. Here, the word "añña" includes groups and individuals.
441.Saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ vāti saṅghasantakaṃ garubhaṇḍapahonakaṃ vā paṇṇādikaṃ.Senāsananiyāmitanti ‘‘ettakā phalarukkhādayo senāsane navakammatthāyā’’ti evaṃ niyamitaṃ vā.Issaravatāye vātievakārena ‘‘theyyā’’ti idaṃ nivattitaṃ.
441. Saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ vā means belongings of the Sangha or leaves etc. sufficient for heavy goods. Senāsananiyāmita means designated for the monastery, such as "so many fruit trees are for new construction in the monastery." Issaravatāye vā: The word eva negates "theyyā".
442.Haritvā vāti attanāyeva haritvā vā. ‘‘Pupphaṃ dentassā’’ti iminā sambandho. Esa nayo uparipi.Harāpetvā vāti aññassa hatthe pesetvā vā.Pakkositvā vāti āmantetvā vā pakkosāpetvā vāti upalakkhaṇato labbhati.Āgatassa vāti attanā eva āgatassa vā.‘‘Kulasaṅgahaṇatthāyā’’ti vacanena ‘‘evarūpe adhippāye asati vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘cetiyaṃ pūjaṃ karontāpi ‘pūjessāmā’ti pupphāni gahetvā gacchantāpi tattha tattha sampattānaṃ cetiyapūjanatthāya denti, etampi pupphadānaṃ nāma na hotī’’tiādikaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437)aṭṭhakathāgataṃ sabbaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
442. Haritvā vā means either by carrying oneself. This is related to "Pupphaṃ dentassa." This method applies above as well. Harāpetvā vā means either by sending it in the hands of another. Pakkositvā vā means either by inviting or can be obtained by implication pakkosāpetvā (by causing to be invited). Āgatassa vā means either to one who has come on his own. By the statement "Kulasaṅgahaṇatthāya," since it is said that "it is permissible if such an intention is not present," all the decisions found in the Aṭṭhakathā such as "even when worshiping a Cetiya, even when taking flowers to ‘I will worship,’ they give to those who have arrived at various places for the purpose of worshiping the Cetiya, even this giving of flowers is not called..." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) are shown.
443.Evaṃ ussaggaṃ dassetvā apavādaṃ dassetumāha‘‘haritvā vā’’tiādi.‘‘Harāpetvā’’ti iminā yojetabbassavā-saddassa avuttasampiṇḍanatthatāya ‘‘pakkositvā vā pakkosāpetvā vā, āgatānaṃ vā’’ti ca saṅgayhati.Āgatassevātievakārena haritvā dānādiṃ nivatteti.
443. Having shown the general rule in this way, to show the exception, he says "haritvā vā" etc. The word vā which should be connected to "harāpetvā" is inclusive of what has not been said, so it includes "pakkositvā vā pakkosāpetvā vā, āgatānaṃ vā." Āgatassevā: The word eva negates carrying and giving etc.
444.Tañcāti mātāpituādīnaṃ taṃ pupphadānañca.Vatthupūjatthanti ratanattayapūjanatthaṃ.Na panaññathāti aññena pakārena dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yena pakārena dātuṃ na vaṭṭati, koyaṃ pakāroti āha‘‘sivādī’’tiādi.Sivādipūjanatthanti mahissarādidevatāpūjanatthañca.Maṇḍanatthanti piḷandhanatthaṃ. Evaṃ adātabbappakāraniyamanena ‘‘imaṃ vikkiṇitvā jīvikaṃ kappessantī’’ti mātāpituādīnaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.
444. Tañcā means that giving of flowers to parents etc. Vatthupūjatthaṃ means for the purpose of worshiping the Triple Gem. Na panaññathā means it is not permissible to give in another way. In which way is it not permissible to give? He says, "sivādī" etc. Sivādipūjanatthaṃ means for the purpose of worshiping gods such as Maheśvara. Maṇḍanatthaṃ means for the purpose of ornamentation. By this restriction on ways of not giving, they say that it is permissible to give to parents etc., thinking "they will make a living by selling this."
445.‘‘Phalādīsu…pe… vinicchayo’’ti iminā ‘‘haritvā vā harāpetvā vā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttavinicchayo phalapaṇṇādīsu sabbattha samānoti dasseti.
445. By "Phalādīsu…pe…vinicchayo," he shows that the decision previously stated beginning with "haritvā vā harāpetvā vā" is the same in all cases for fruits, leaves, etc.
446.‘‘Pupphādibhājane’’ti pupphaphalādīnaṃ bhājanakāle.Sammatenāti pupphādibhājanatthaṃkhandhakevuttanayena saṅghena sammatena bhikkhunā.Assāti bhājanaṭṭhānaṃ āgatassa.Itarenāti saṅghasammutiṃ vinā pupphādīni bhājāpentena.Ñāpetvā dātabbanti sabbaṃ saṅghaṃ jānāpetvā dātabbaṃ.
446. "Pupphādibhājane" means at the time of distributing flowers, fruits, etc. Sammatenā means by a bhikkhu who is approved by the Sangha in the manner stated in the khandhaka for the purpose of distributing flowers, etc. Assā means to one who has come to the place of distribution. Itarenā means by one who distributes flowers, etc. without the Sangha's approval. Ñāpetvā dātabbaṃ means it should be given after informing the entire Sangha.
447.Upaḍḍhabhāvanti ekena bhikkhunā laddhabbabhāgato upaḍḍhaṃ.‘‘Thokaṃ thoka’’nti iminā upaḍḍhatopi appataraṃ gahitaṃ.
447. Upaḍḍhabhāvaṃ means half of the share that should be received by one bhikkhu. By "thokaṃ thokaṃ," it means less than half has been taken.
448.Paribbayavihīnassāti taṇḍulādijīvitavuttivayamūlarahitassa.Sampattissariyassāpīti attano samīpamupagatassa issarassa ca. ‘‘Dātabbaṃ tu sakaṃ phala’’nti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Paribbayavihīnānaṃ, dātuṃ saparasantaka’’ntikhuddasikkhāyaāgataṃ, idha ‘‘sakaṃ phala’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha paravacanena vissāsikānaṃ gahaṇaṃ, idha pana vissāsaggāhena gahetvā dīyamānampi sasantakamevāti ‘‘saka’’nti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
448. Paribbayavihīnassa means one who lacks the means of livelihood such as rice. Sampattissariyassāpī means also to a wealthy person who has come to one's presence. This is related to "Dātabbaṃ tu sakaṃ phala." In the Khuddasikkhā, it comes as "Paribbayavihīnānaṃ, dātuṃ saparasantaka," here it is said "sakaṃ phala". There, the word "para" includes those who are trustworthy, but here, it should be understood that even if it is given by taking those who are trustworthy, it is still one's own property, so "saka" is said.
449-50.Yatra saṅghārāme saṅghena phalarukkhaparicchedaṃ katvā katikā katāti yojanā, ‘‘āgantukānaṃ ettakaṃ phalaṃ dātabba’’nti phalaparicchedaṃ katvā vā ‘‘ettakesu rukkhesu phalaṃ dātabba’’nti rukkhaparicchedaṃ katvā vā saṅghena katikā yena pakārena katāti attho.Tatrāgatassapīti evaṃ ṭhapitakatikavattaṃ taṃ saṅghārāmaṃ phalatthāya āgatassāpi.
449-50. The connection is: where in a Sangharama, the Sangha has made a boundary of fruit trees and made an agreement. Or the meaning is: in whatever way the Sangha has made an agreement, either having made a boundary of fruit, saying "so much fruit should be given to visitors," or having made a boundary of trees, saying "fruit should be given from so many trees." Tatrāgatassapī means even to one who has come to that Sangharama, where a practice of established agreement is in place, for the purpose of fruit.
Yathāparicchedanti saṅghena tathākataphalarukkhaparicchedamanatikkamma.Dadatoti ocinitvā ṭhapitaphalaṃ, kappiyakārakehi ocināpetvā vā dentassa. Ocitaphale ca kappiyakārake ca asati phalatthāya āgatesu vattitabbavidhiṃ dassetumāha‘‘dassetabbāpi vā’’tiādi. ‘‘Vatvā’’ti seso.Ca-kāraṃapi-saddena ekato katvā ‘‘apicā’’ti yojanā. Evaṃ vatvā saṅghena paricchinnarukkhā dassetabbāti iminā ‘‘idha phalāni sundarāni, ito gaṇhathā’ti evaṃ pana na vattabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437)aṭṭhakathābyatirekato dassitā hoti.
Yathāparicchedaṃ means without exceeding the boundary of fruit trees established by the Sangha in that way. Dadato means to one who gives fruit that has been picked and kept, or having had it picked by those who are allowable. To show the method that should be followed when there are no picked fruits or allowable attendants, to those who have come for the purpose of fruit, he says "dassetabbāpi vā" etc. "Vatvā" is understood. By combining the ca-particle with the api-particle, the connection is "apicā" (moreover). By showing the trees designated by the Sangha in this way, the distinction shown by the Aṭṭhakathā "but it should not be said, ‘here the fruits are beautiful, take from here’" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) is shown.
451.‘‘Khaṇitvā’’ti etena ‘‘khaṇāpetvā’’ti idampi saṅgahitaṃ, ‘‘kappiyabhūmi’’nti vakkhamānattāpathavinti ettha ‘‘akappiya’’nti labbhati. Tenevāha‘‘pācittiyenā’’ti.‘‘Mālāgaccha’’nti iminā pupphūpage taruṇagacche ca mallikāsumanādigumbagāgacche ca saṅgaṇhāti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāya‘‘taruṇakā hi puppharukkhāpi pupphagacchāpi ‘mālāvacchā’tveva vuccantī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431).Ādi-saddena phalūpagarukkhe ca bhesajjarase osadhagacche ca saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Ropāpane’’ti vakkhamānattā‘‘saya’’nti idaṃ ‘‘ropane’’ti iminā yujjati.
451. By "Khaṇitvā," "khaṇāpetvā" is also included, since it will be said "kappiyabhūmi," here "akappiya" is obtained for pathavi. Therefore, he says "pācittiyenā". By "mālāgaccha," it includes young shrubs bearing flowers and clumps of jasmine, Arabian jasmine, etc. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "young flower trees and flower shrubs are both called ‘mālāvacchā’" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). By the Ādi-word, it includes trees bearing fruit and shrubs of medicine, juice, and herbs. Since it will be said "ropāpane," this "saya" is connected to "ropane."
Kuladūsaneti kuladūsananimittaṃ. Akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇitvā, khaṇāpetvā ca sayaṃ mālāgacchādiropane kateassamālāgacchādiropakassa bhikkhuno akappiyapathavīkhaṇanapaccayenapācittiyenasaddhiṃkuladūsanekuladūsananimittaṃ dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
Kuladūsane means a cause for corrupting families. If one digs up unallowable ground, and also plants a mālāgaccha etc. oneself, then assa to that bhikkhu who plants the mālāgaccha etc., due to the cause of digging up unallowable ground, along with the pācittiya, there is a duukkaṭa for the kuladūsane, a cause for corrupting families. This is the connection.
452.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘sayaṃ ropane’’ti idaṃ vinā avasesappakāraṃ saṅgaṇhāti.‘‘Akappiyena vākyenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇāpetvā’’ti iminā ca ‘‘ropāpane’’ti iminā ca yujjati. ‘‘Imaṃ bhūmiṃ khaṇa, imaṃ gacchaṃ ropehī’’tiādikaṃ akappiyaṃ vohāraṃ vatvā akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇāpetvā mālāgacchādiropanaṃ kārāpentassāpi tatheva pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca hotīti attho.
452. By "Tathā," it includes the remaining ways without "sayaṃ ropane." "Akappiyena vākyenā" is connected to "akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇāpetvā" and also to "ropāpane." If, after saying unallowable speech such as "dig up this ground, plant this shrub," one causes the digging up of unallowable ground and the planting of mālāgacchas etc., then likewise, there is a pācittiya and a dukkaṭa. This is the meaning.
‘‘sabbatthā’’tiādi.Kuladūsaneti nimitte, visaye vā bhummaṃ. Akappiyena vākyena pana pathaviṃ khaṇāpetvā akappiyena vākyena ropāpanepi tathā pācittiyena saha kuladūsane bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.Sabbatthaito paresupi tadatthikena sabbavohārabyāpāresu kuladūsananimittaṃ bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
"sabbatthā" etc. Kuladūsane means in the cause or object, a bhumma. But it is said that even if one causes the digging up of ground with unallowable speech and also the planting with unallowable speech, likewise, along with a pācittiya, there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu in kuladūsana. Sabbattha means from here onwards, in all speech and activities for that purpose, it is said that there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu in kuladūsana. This is the connection.
453.Kappiyabhūmiyā attanā khaṇane, akappiyavohārena khaṇāpane ca pācittiyābhāvato dukkaṭaṃyeva vuttanti āha‘‘ubhayattha cā’’tiādi. Ettha ‘‘eva’’nti seso, so yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigameti. Evaṃ yathāvuttanayena kappiyabhūmiyampi mālāgacchādiropanaropāpanasaṅkhātesu dvīsu ṭhānesu ca bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
453. Since there is no pācittiya for digging oneself in allowable ground or for causing to dig with unallowable speech, only a dukkaṭa is stated, he says "ubhayattha cā" etc. Here, "eva" is understood, that concludes the meaning as stated. Thus, in the two situations described, namely planting and causing to plant mālāgacchas etc. even in allowable ground, it is said that there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu. This is the connection.
454.Sadukkaṭāpācittīti ‘‘āvāṭaṃ khaṇa, gacchaṃ ropehī’’ti ekavāraṃ āṇatte bahū āvāṭe khaṇitvā bahūsu gacchesu ropitesupi āṇattiyā ekattā dukkaṭena saha pācittiyaṃ hotīti ayamattho akappiyabhūmiṃ sandhāya vutto.‘‘Suddhaṃ vā dukkaṭa’’nti idaṃ akappiyabhūmiyaṃ kappiyena vohārena āvāṭaṃ khaṇāpakassa ca kappiyabhūmiyaṃ akappiyavohārena āvāṭaṃ khaṇāpakassa ca ‘‘imaṃ gacchaṃ ropehī’’ti ekavārāṇattapaccayā āpajjitabbaṃ kuladūsanadukkaṭaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
454. Sadukkaṭā pācittī means if, when ordering once "dig a hole, plant a shrub," many holes are dug and many shrubs are planted, due to the singleness of the order, there is a pācittiya along with a dukkaṭa. This meaning is said with reference to unallowable ground. "Suddhaṃ vā dukkaṭa" is said with reference to the kuladūsanadukkaṭa that must be incurred due to a single order "plant this shrub," both by one who causes to dig a hole in unallowable ground with allowable speech, and by one who causes to dig a hole in allowable ground with unallowable speech.
455.Kappiyeneva vākyenāti etthakappiyavākyaṃnāma ‘‘ettha āvāṭaṃ jāna, ettha āvāṭaṃ jānitabbaṃ, ettha āvāṭena bhavitabba’’nti evarūpaṃ vākyañca ‘‘imaṃ gacchaṃ ettha jāna, ayaṃ gaccho ettha jānitabbo’’tiādivākyañca.Evakārena akappiyavohārañca kappiyākappiyamissakavohārañca nivatteti. Pariyāyobhāsanimittakammaṃ pana ‘‘itarattayaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431)aṭṭhakathāvacanato vaṭṭati.Ubhayattha ca bhūmiyāti kappiyākappiyabhūmīsu dvīsu.Ropaneti ettha sambandhato, pakaraṇato ca ‘‘mālāgacchādīna’’nti labbhati.
455. Kappiyeneva vākyenā: Here, kappiyavākyaṃ means speech such as "know a hole here, a hole should be known here, there should be a hole here," and also speech such as "know this shrub here, this shrub should be known here," etc. The word Eva negates unallowable speech and speech mixed with allowable and unallowable. But pariyāyobhāsanimittakamma (circumlocution, hinting, and signaling) is permissible, according to the Aṭṭhakathā statement "the other three are permissible" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). Ubhayattha ca bhūmiyā means in both allowable and unallowable grounds. In Ropane, "mālāgacchādīna" is obtained from the connection and context.
aṭṭhakathāvinicchayoimāya gāthāya saṅgahitoti veditabbo.Koci dosoti pācittiyañca dukkaṭañcāti vuttadosesu ekopi doso na vijjatīti attho.
It should be understood that the Aṭṭhakathā decision is summarized by this verse. Koci doso means none of the faults that have been stated, such as pācittiya and dukkaṭa, exist.
456-7.‘‘Sayaṃropetu’’nti idaṃ ‘‘ārāmādīnamatthāyā’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ.
456-7. "Sayaṃ ropetu" should be connected to "ārāmādīnamatthāyā."
Ādi-saddena vanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Sayaṃ ropitassa vāti etthavā-saddena ‘‘ropāpitassā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, etassa visesanatthaṃ ‘‘kappiyena vohārenā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ayaṃ pana vinicchayo ‘‘ārāmatthāya pana vanatthāya ca chāyatthāya ca akappiyavohāramattameva na vaṭṭati, sesaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431)aṭṭhakathāgatanayena veditabbo. Anto ārāmabhūsanatthāya, bahi araññatthāya viya chāyatthāya suddhacittena ‘‘imaṃ jānā’’tiādikappiyavohārena ropāpitarukkhe ca kappiyabhūmiyañca attanā kate vā akappiyavohārena kārāpite vā akappiyabhūmiyañca kappiyavohārena attanā kārāpite vā aññehi kate vā āvāṭe attanā ropite rukkhe ca phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ icchati ce, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.
The Ādi-word includes forests etc. Sayaṃ ropitassa vā: Here, the vā-word includes "ropāpitassā," and "kappiyena vohārenā" is a supplementary reading for the purpose of distinguishing this. But this decision should be understood according to the Aṭṭhakathā statement "for the sake of a monastery and for the sake of a forest and for the sake of shade, only unallowable speech is not permissible, the rest is permissible" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). If one wishes to use the fruit from a tree planted with pure intention for the sake of beautifying the interior of a monastery or for the sake of a forest outside or for the sake of shade, either by causing it to be planted with allowable speech such as "know this," and either in allowable ground or in unallowable ground caused by oneself with allowable speech, or in a hole made by others, it is permissible to use it. This is the meaning.
Ārāmādīnamatthāya kappiyabhūmiyaṃ sayaṃ ropitassa vā kappiyabhūmiyaṃ vā akappiyabhūmiyaṃ vā kappiyavohārena ropāpitassa vā rukkhassa yañca phalaṃ, taṃ phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Katthaci potthakesu ‘‘ārāmādīnamatthāyā’’ti gāthāya likhitaṭṭhāne ‘‘kulasaṅgahaṇatthāyā’’tiādigāthā dissati. Sā pāḷikkamaviruddhattā aṭṭhānappayuttā, ‘‘pupphāna’’ntiādigāthāya purato vuccamānā pana ṭhānappayuttā hoti.
It is permissible for bhikkhus to use whatever fruit there is from a tree planted oneself in allowable ground for the sake of a monastery etc., or from a tree caused to be planted in allowable ground or in unallowable ground with allowable speech. In some books, in the place where "ārāmādīnamatthāyā" is written in the verse, the verse "kulasaṅgahaṇatthāyā" etc. is seen. Since that is contrary to the order of the Pāḷi, it is inappropriate. But the one that will be said in front in the verse "pupphānaṃ" etc. is appropriate.
458.Sabbatthāti ārāmādiatthāya pubbe viya attanā ropitesu, ropāpitesu ca sabbesu mālāgacchādīsu.Akappiyodakeneva pācittīti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ tiṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 140) vuttā pācitti eva, na dukkaṭanti attho.
458. Sabbatthā means in all mālāgacchas etc. planted oneself or caused to be planted for the sake of a monastery etc. as before. Akappiyodakeneva pācittī means only the pācittiya that is stated as "yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ tiṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā, pācittiya" (pāci. 140), not a dukkaṭa. This is the meaning.
459.Idāni dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiyavisayaṃ dasseti‘‘kula…pe… dukkaṭa’’nti.Siñcatoti kappiyodakeneva siñcato, siñcāpayato ca.
459. Now, to show the scope of the pācittiya along with a dukkaṭa, "kula…pe…duukkaṭa". Siñcato means to one who waters or causes to water with allowable water.
460.Tesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ pana atthāyāti kuladūsanaparibhogānaṃ dvinnamatthāya.Siñcane siñcāpaneti ettha ‘‘mālāgacchādīna’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati.Dukkaṭanti ettha ‘‘kevala’’nti seso.
460. Tesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ pana atthāyā means for the sake of the two, namely corrupting families and using. Siñcane siñcāpane: Here, "mālāgacchādīna" is obtained from the context. Dukkaṭaṃ means "kevala (only)" is understood here.
461.Ocināpaneti aññehi pupphānaṃ ocināpane.Sayamocinane cāpīti attanāva ocinane ca.Sapācittiyadukkaṭanti ‘‘bhūtagāmapātabyatāya pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 90) vuttattā pupphocinanahetu pācittiyañca kuladūsanadukkaṭañca hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
461. Ocināpane means in causing others to pluck flowers. Sayamocinane cāpī means also in plucking oneself. Sapācittiyadukkaṭa means since it is said that "bhūtagāmapātabyatāya pācittiya" (pāci. 90), it is said that due to the cause of plucking flowers, there is a pācittiya and a kuladūsanadukkaṭa.
462.Pūjādiatthāya, kulasaṅgahatthāya ca pupphānaṃ ocinanaocināpanāni kārāpentassa āpattiyā āpajjanappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘pupphāna’’nti. ‘‘Pupphānaṃ gaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ hotī’’ti vuttattāpupphamocinatoti ettha ‘‘visuṃ visu’’nti seso. Ekekapupphaṃ ocinantassa pupphagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho. ‘‘Ekena payogena bahūni pupphāni ocinantassa pana payogagaṇanāya hotī’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ idha byatirekato labbhati.‘‘Ocinato’’ti iminā ‘‘ocināpayato’’ti idañca kiriyāsāmaññe visesassa antogadhabhāvato vā upalakkhaṇato vā dassitanti.
462. To explain how an offense is incurred when someone causes the picking or having picked of flowers for the purpose of offering and for maintaining family relations, he says, "of flowers." Since it was said, "There is a pācittiya for counting flowers," pupphamocinato, here "visuṃ visuṃ" (separately, separately) is understood. Meaning, for one who picks each individual flower, there is a pācittiya for counting flowers. What is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, "However, for one who picks many flowers with one effort, it is counted by the efforts," is obtained here by contrast. By "Ocinato" and also by "ocināpayato," either because the specific is included in the general due to similarity in action or by way of indication, it is shown.
‘‘kulatthaṃ ce sadukkaṭā’’ti.Kulatthanti kulasaṅgahatthaṃ. ‘‘Sadukkaṭā’’ti vuttattā pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca pupphagaṇanāya hotīti siddhaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pupphagaṇanāya dukkaṭapācittiyānī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431).
"If for family, then with dukkata." Kulatthaṃ means for the purpose of maintaining family relations. Since "Sadukkaṭā" is stated, it is established that there is pācittiya and dukkata for counting flowers. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "There are dukkata and pācittiya for counting flowers" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431).
463.Ganthanaṃgantho,tena nibbattaṃganthimaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ganthimādisarūpaṃ sayameva vakkhati. Saṅgahaṇaṃsaṅgaho,pupphānaṃ saṅgahoti viggaho.
463. Ganthanaṃ is gantho (a compilation), ganthimaṃ is that which is produced by it. This method applies everywhere. He himself will explain the form of ganthima, etc. Saṅgahaṇaṃ is saṅgaho (a collection), the analysis is the collecting of flowers.
464.Imāni ganthimādīni sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘tattha daṇḍena daṇḍaṃ vā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti tesu chasu pupphasaṅgahesu.‘‘Daṇḍena daṇḍaṃ vā’’ti idaṃ sadaṇḍauppalādikusumaṃ sandhāyāha.‘‘Vaṇṭenapi ca vaṇṭaka’’nti idaṃ savaṇṭakarattakusumādiṃ sandhāyāha.Karaṇaṃ sabbanti kataṃ sabbaṃ. Idha sabbattha kappiyavidhivibhāgaṃ ‘‘sabbameta’’miccādigāthāyaṃ vakkhati.
464. To show these ganthima, etc., in terms of their form, he says, "There, with stem to stem, or..." Tattha (tatthā) means among those six flower collections. "Daṇḍena daṇḍaṃ vā" refers to kusuma such as uppala, etc., which have stems. "Vaṇṭenapi ca vaṇṭaka" refers to rattakusuma, etc., which have stalks. Karaṇaṃ sabba means all that is done. Here, he will explain the distinction in permissible procedures everywhere in the verse beginning with "sabbameta."
465.Suttādīhi gopphetvāti ettha ‘‘vassikapupphādīnī’’ti seso. Suttena vā kadalivākādīhi vā vassikādipupphe ganthitvā katapupphavikārogopphimaṃnāma. Ekato vaṇṭāni yassāti viggaho.Ubhatovaṇṭikāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Appatthe vā sakatthe vāka-kāro daṭṭhabbo. Itthiliṅgavisayeka-kārato pubbākārassai-kārādeso.
465. In "Having intertwined with thread, etc.," "vassika flowers, etc." is understood. Gopphimaṃ is the name for a flower arrangement made by intertwining vassika, etc., flowers with thread or with strips of banana bark, etc. The analysis is: vaṇṭāni ekato yassa (whose stalks are at one side). The same method applies in Ubhatovaṇṭikā. The syllable ka should be understood as being used to mean either "small" or "own." In the feminine gender, the i-kāra replaces the a-kāra before the ka-kāra.
ekatovaṇṭikānāma, vaṇṭāni ubhayadisāya katvā ganthitapupphāvaliubhatovaṇṭikānāmātitaṃgopphimaṃ evaṃ duvidhaṃ hotīti attho. ‘‘Vākaṃ vā valliṃ vā rajjuṃ vā diguṇaṃ katvā tattha nīpakadambādivaṇṭarahitāni pupphāni veṭhetvā gahaṇaṃ gopphimaṃ nāmā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431 atthato samānaṃ)aṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ.
Ekatovaṇṭikā is the name, ubhatovaṇṭikā is the name for a garland of flowers intertwined with stalks made on both sides, thus taṃ (that) gopphimaṃ is twofold in this way, is the meaning. What is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, "Gopphimaṃ is the name for taking vāka, valli, or rajju, doubling it, and then wrapping flowers without stalks, such as nīpa and kadamba, around it" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431 atthato samānaṃ) [is similar in meaning].
466.Bundesūti mūlesu.Makulādikanti etthaādi-saddena vaṇṭarahitamadhukādipupphañca vaṇṭasahitamallikādipupphañca saṅgahitaṃ.Sūciādīhīti etthaādi-saddena tālahīrādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Mālāvikatīti pupphamālāvikati. Sūciādīhimakulādikaṃpupphaṃ bundesu vijjhitvā āvutā mālāvikativedhimaṃnāmāti vuccatīti yojanā.
466. Bundesū means at the roots. In Makulādika, ādi includes madhuka flowers without stalks and mallika flowers with stalks. In Sūciādīhī, ādi includes tālahīra, etc. Mālāvikatī means a flower garland vikati. The construction is: mālāvikati named vedhimaṃ is what is said to be a garland vikati, interwoven at the roots with makulādika flowers with sūci, etc.
467.‘‘Veṭhimaṃnāma pupphadāmapupphahatthakesu daṭṭhabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431)aṭṭhakathāyadassitappakāresu paṭhamappakāraṃ dasseti‘‘veṭhetvā kataṃ mālāguṇehi vā’’ti. Dhammadesanāya vā paṭimāya vā dhātuyā vā pūjaṃ kattukāmā muddhani ujukaṃ katvā mālādāmakalāpaṃ olambitvā agge ghaṭikākāradassanatthaṃ mālāvaliyo anekakkhattuṃ parikkhipantā veṭhenti, idaṃ evarūpaṃ mālāguṇakaraṇampi veṭhimaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
467. "Veṭhimaṃ should be seen in flower garlands and flower hand-bouquets," (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) the Aṭṭhakathā shows the first method of the ways it is shown: "Having wrapped and made with mālāguṇa, etc." Those wishing to make offerings to the Dhamma teaching, image, or relic, hang down a collection of flower garland strands directly on the head, and repeatedly encircle the ends to show the shape of a small pot, this sort of making a mālāguṇa is also named veṭhimaṃ, is what is said.
‘‘vākādīhi ca baddhaṃ vā’’ti, ‘‘bandhitvā’’tipi pāṭho, ‘‘kata’’nti iminā sambandho. Ekacce uppalādidīghadaṇḍakusumāni aṭṭha vā nava vā dasa vā kalāpaṃ katvā tesameva daṇḍānaṃ vākehi vā aññena yena kenaci daṇḍakagge ṭhapetvā vā visuṃ vā bandhitvā uppalahatthādiṃ karonti, tañca veṭhimaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Etaṃ dvayampi na vaṭṭati.
"Or bound with vāka, etc.," or the reading is "bandhitvā," it is connected with "kata." Making a bundle of eight, nine, or ten long-stemmed kusuma such as uppala, etc., and tying them with vāke of those stems themselves or with something else, either placing them at the ends of the stems or separately, they make an uppala hand bouquet, etc., and that too is named veṭhimaṃ, is what is said. Both of these are not allowed.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tesaṃyeva pana vākena vā daṇḍena bandhituṃ aṃsabhaṇḍikaṃ vā kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. ‘‘Vākena vā daṇḍena vā’ti ca idaṃ acchinditvā parikkhipitvā bandhanaṃ sandhāya vadantī’’tisīhaḷagaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. Padumādipupphāni padumādipaṇṇesu nāḷehi pavesetvā nāḷehi bahi katvā paṇṇena pupphāni paṭicchādetvā paṇṇagge bandhituṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Daṇḍe pana bandhituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) caaṭṭhakathāyameva vuttaṃ.
In the Aṭṭhakathā, "However, it is allowable to bind them with vāka or with a stem to make an aṃsabhaṇḍika." In the Sīhaḷagaṇṭhipada it is said, "And 'with vāka or with stem' is said referring to binding by encircling without cutting." It is allowable to insert paduma, etc., flowers into paduma, etc., leaves with nāḷa, bring them out with nāḷa, cover the flowers with the leaf, and bind the ends of the leaves. In the Aṭṭhakathā itself it is said, "However, it is not allowable to bind to a stem" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431).
468.Pupphamālāhi pūraṇeti pupphāvalīhi pūraṇe. Idaṃ kattha labbhatīti āha‘‘bodhi’’ntiādi.Pupphapaṭaṃnāma mālāvaliyo tantaṃ viya pasāretvā vatthaṃ vāyantehi viya tiriyañca mālāvalīhi vāyitapaṭaṃ vuccati. Idaṃ pupphapaṭaṃ mālāvalīhi dīghaso pūraṇaṃ sandhāya purime gahitaṃ, tiriyato vāyanaṃ sandhāya vakkhamāne vāyimepi gahitanti punaruttābhāvo veditabbo.Paṭādīnantiādi-saddena cetiyadhātukaraṇḍakavedikādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
468. Pupphamālāhi pūraṇe means filling with flower garlands. He says where this is obtained: "Bodhi," etc. Pupphapaṭaṃ is what is called a cloth woven with transverse flower garlands by spreading out mālāvalī like thread, as weavers weave cloth. This pupphapaṭaṃ is taken earlier in reference to filling lengthwise with mālāvalī, and it should be understood that there is no repetition as it is also taken in the vāyime that will be said later in reference to weaving transversely. In Paṭādīna, ādi includes taking cetiyas, dhātukaraṇḍakas, vedikas, etc.
Parikkhepesu labbhatīti bodhikkhandhādīnaṃ punappunaṃ parikkhipanesu labbhati. Bodhikkhandhādayo pupphāvalīhi parikkhipantehi paṭhamavaddhaṭṭhāne pupphāvaliyā anatikkāmite purimaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ yāva pāpuṇāti, tāva aññena gahetvā parikkhipantena āharitvā punapi tasmiṃ ṭhāne patte aññassa dānavasena bodhikkhandhaṃ, cetiyaṃ, dhātukaraṇḍakaṃ vā pupphakañcukena chādetuṃ vaṭṭatītiaṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ. Sacepi dveyeva bhikkhū ubhosu passesu ṭhatvā pariyāyena haranti, vaṭṭatiyevāti vadanti. Pupphapaṭavāyanatthaṃ pasāriyamānapupphāvalīsu ca eseva vinicchayo.
Labbhatī in parikkhepesu means it is obtained in repeatedly encircling the trunks of Bodhi trees, etc. When Bodhi trunks, etc., are encircled with mālāvalī, it is allowable to cover the Bodhi trunk, cetiya, or dhātukaraṇḍaka with a flower covering by having one who is encircling not go beyond the place where the mālāvalī was first bound, and by having another bring and offer it when it reaches that same place again, as a gift. So it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā. Even if just two monks stand on either side and take turns bringing it, they say that it is allowable. And this same decision applies to mālāvalī being spread out for weaving pupphapaṭa.
Dīghapupphāvaliṃ nāgadantesu pakkhipitvā puna pakkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Nāgadantesu pana pupphavalayaṃ pavesetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā aññehi valayaṃ katvā dinnapupphāvalivalayaṃ dhātukaraṇḍathupikāya pavesetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Mālāguṇehi pana bahūhipi kataṃ pupphadāmaṃ labhitvā āsanamatthakādīsu bandhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā pupphadāmapupphāvalīnaṃ puppharahitāya suttakoṭiyā rajjudaṇḍādīsu bandhituṃ vaṭṭati.
It is not allowable to insert a long flower garland into nāgadanta and then insert it again. Since it is said, "However, it is allowable to insert a flower garland made into a valaya into nāgadanta," it is allowable to insert a flower garland valaya made by others into the thūpika of a dhātukaraṇḍa. Since it is said, "However, having obtained a flower strand made with mālāguṇa even by many, it is allowable to bind it to the headrest of a seat, etc.," it is allowable to bind the thread end without flowers of flower strand flower garlands to ropes, sticks, etc.
469.Puppharūpaṃnāma ‘‘gopphimapuppheheva hatthiassādirūpakāni karonti, tānipi vāyimaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhantī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) vuttattā taṃtaṃrūpasaṇṭhānaṃ katvā pupphāvaliyo nivesetvā kariyamānaṃ hatthiassādirūpaṃ. Imasmiṃaṭṭhakathāpāṭhe ‘‘tānipi vāyimaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhantī’’ti vuttattā ca ‘‘aññehi kataparicchede pana pupphāni ṭhapentena hatthiassādirūpakampi kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431)aṭṭhakathāpāṭhassasāratthadīpaniyaṃ‘‘pupphāni ṭhapentenāti aganthitāni pākatikapupphāni ṭhapentena. Pupphadāmaṃ pana pūjanatthāya bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapentena phusāpetvā vā aphusāpetvā vā diguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.431) vuttattā ca imaṃ hatthiādirūpaṃ pūrentena mālāvaliṃ aññehi kataparicchede sambandhitvā pāsāṇaāsanamañcapīṭhahatthirūpādimatthake ṭhapetvā pūjanappakārovāyimanti viññāyati.
469. Puppharūpaṃ is the name for elephant, horse, etc., shapes made by placing mālāvalī having formed a particular shape, since it is said, "They make elephant, horse, etc., shapes only with gopphima flowers, and they stand in a woven place" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). And since in this Aṭṭhakathā reading it is said, "tānipi vāyimaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhantī," and since in the Aṭṭhakathā reading, "However, it is allowable to make even elephant, horse, etc., shapes by placing flowers in a boundary made by others" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431), it is said in the Sāratthadīpanī, "Pupphāni ṭhapentenāti means by placing unstitched natural flowers. However, it is not allowable for one placing a flower strand on the ground for the purpose of offering to place it having touched it or without having touched it, or having doubled it" (sārattha. ṭī. 2.431), therefore it is understood that the way of offering by one filling this elephant, etc., shape, binding a mālāvalī in a boundary made by others, and placing it on top of a stone seat, couch, platform, elephant shape, etc., is vāyima.
Pupphapaṭanti pubbe vuttappakāraṃ pupphapaṭaṃ pūrentena ekāpi pupphāvali parivattetvā na ṭhapetabbā, vāyantena aññehi pūritepi ekāpi pupphāvali na pātetabbā, idaṃ pūrimavāyimānaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ.Ādiggahaṇena pupphajālaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, taṃ karontassa jālacchiddagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ hoti. ‘‘Bhitticchattabodhitthambhādīsupi eseva nayo’’ti vuttattā chattādīsu ca pupphajālaṃ na dātabbaṃ.
Pupphapaṭanti, when filling a pupphapaṭa of the type previously stated, not even one flower strand should be turned around and placed, and when weaving, not even one flower strand should be dropped even if it is filled by others, this is the distinction between pūrima and vāyima. By the inclusion of ādi, pupphajāla is included, and for one making it, there is a dukkata for counting the holes in the net. Since it is said, "And the same method applies to walls, parasols, Bodhi trees, pillars, etc.," pupphajāla should not be given on parasols, etc.
470.Imassa sikkhāpadassa sādhāraṇattā‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañcā’’ti āha.Buddhassapīti etthapi-saddo sambhāvane, ‘‘pūjattha’’nti vattabbaṃ, buddhassa pūjatthāyapi kātuṃ vā kārāpetuṃ vā na vaṭṭatīti attho. Dhammasaṅgharatanānipi upalakkhaṇato saṅgayhanti. Sese kimeva vattabbanti byatirekattho.
470. Because of the universality of this training rule, he says, "For monks and nuns." In "For the Buddha too," the word pi indicates possibility; "pūjattha" should be said, meaning it is not allowable to do or have done even for the purpose of offering to the Buddha. The Dhamma and Saṅgha jewels are also included by way of indication. What more need be said about the rest? It is a contrasting meaning.
471.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘sayaṃ parehi vā kārāpetuṃ bhikkhūnañca bhikkhunīnañca buddhassapī’’ti anantaragāthāya vuttamatidisati.Kalambakanti dvinnaṃ dhanukānamantare olambakadāmaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kalambakoti aḍḍhacandanāgadantantare ghaṭikādāmaolambako vutto’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). Ettha caghaṭikādāmaolambakonāma ante ghaṭikākārayutto yamakadāmaolambako.Kātunti bandhituṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Ekekapupphadāmaṃ pana nikkhantasuttakoṭiyā pabandhitvā olambituṃ vaṭṭati. Pupphadāmadvayaṃ saṅghaṭitukāmenapi nikkhantasuttakoṭiyāva suttakoṭi saṅghaṭituṃ vaṭṭati.Aḍḍhacandakameva vāti ‘‘aḍḍhacandākārena mālāguṇaparikkhepo’’tiaṭṭhakathāyavuttasarūpaṃ vā.
471. With "Likewise," he reiterates what was said in the immediately preceding verse, "either oneself or by others having it done, for monks and nuns and for the Buddha too." Kalambaka means a hanging strand between two bows. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Kalambako means a ghātikā strand hanging between two aḍḍhacanda nāgadanta" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). And here, ghātikādāmaolambako means a yamaka strand hanging with a ghātikā shape at the end. The construction is: it is not allowable kātuṃ to bind. However, it is allowable to hang each flower strand having tied it with an exiting thread end. Even for one wishing to connect two flower strands, it is allowable to connect thread end to thread end only with an exiting thread end. Aḍḍhacandakameva vā means either in the form of what is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, "encircling with mālāguṇa in the shape of a half-moon."
aḍḍhacandākārena mālāguṇaparikkheponāma aḍḍhacandākārena mālāguṇassa punappunaṃ haraṇapaccāharaṇavasena pūretvā parikkhipanaṃ. Teneva taṃ pūrime paviṭṭhaṃ. Tasmā etampi aḍḍhacandākāraṃ punappunaṃ haraṇapaccāharaṇavasena pūritaṃ na vaṭṭati, ekavāraṃ pana aḍḍhacandākārena mālāguṇaṃ harituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho. ‘‘Tadubhayampi pūrimeyeva paviṭṭha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.Aññehi pūritanti aññehi āyataṃ pasāretvā pūritaṃ pupphapaṭaṃ.Vāyitumpi cāti tiriyaṃ ekapupphāvalimpi vāyituṃ ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti imināva sambandho.
Aḍḍhacandākārena mālāguṇaparikkhepo means encircling by filling in the shape of a half-moon by repeatedly moving mālāguṇa back and forth. Therefore, that too is included in pūrima. Therefore, it is not allowable to fill that half-moon shape repeatedly by moving it back and forth, however, they say that it is allowable to move the mālāguṇa once in the shape of a half-moon. The connection is that it is not allowable kātuṃ. In the Aṭṭhakathā it is said, "Tadubhayampi pūrimeyeva paviṭṭha" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431). Aññehi pūrita means a flower cloth filled by others having spread it out lengthwise. Vāyitumpi cā means that weaving even one flower strand transversely is connected with "na vaṭṭatī" itself.
472.Piṭṭhakācamayanti taṇḍulapiṭṭhādīhi katañceva kācamattikāya ca kataṃ pupphadāmaṃ.Bheṇḍupupphamayampi cāti bheṇḍudaṇḍakehi mallikāsumanacampakādisadisaṃ katvā chiddehi katadāmañca. ‘‘Geṇḍupupphamaya’’ntipi likhanti.Kharapattamayanti etthakharapattaṃnāma kuṅkuṭṭhakhacitaṃ pupphapaṭanti vadanti.Kātunti ganthanaganthāpanādīni kātuṃ. Bheṇḍukharapattadāmānaṃ paṭikkhittattā celādīhi katadāmampi na vaṭṭati akappiyānulomattāti vadanti.
472. Piṭṭhakācamaya means a flower strand made of rice flour, etc., and also made of glass, clay. Bheṇḍupupphamayampi cā means and also a strand made with holes having made bheṇḍu sticks similar to mallika, sumana, campaka, etc. They also write "Geṇḍupupphamaya." In Kharapattamaya, kharapattaṃ means a flower cloth inlaid with kuṅkuṭṭha, they say. Kātuṃ means to do ganthana, ganthāpana, etc. Since bheṇḍu and kharapatta strands are prohibited, they say that even strands made of cloth, etc., are not allowable because they accord with the unallowable.
473.Hīrādīhīti tālanāḷikerahīrādīhi.Ādi-saddena tiṇasalākādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Paṭākatthanti paṭākākārena pūjanatthaṃ.‘‘Vijjhantassā’’ti iminā kaṇṭakehi vijjhanaṃ, hīrādīhi āvuṇanañca saṅgahitaṃ.
473. Hīrādīhī means with tāla, nāḷikera, hīra, etc. Ādi includes tiṇasalākā, etc. Paṭākattha means for the purpose of offering in the shape of a banner. "Vijjhantassā" includes piercing with thorns and covering with hīra, etc.
475.Asokapiṇḍiādīnanti asokapupphamañjarikādīnaṃ.Ādi-saddenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) eteheva saddhiṃ dassitaṃ jālavitānaṃ, chiddāni dassetvā katavedikā, nāgadantakaṃ, pupphacaṅkoṭakāpidhānaṃ, tālapaṇṇavalayādiñca saṅgaṇhāti.Dhammarajjuyāti etthasāratthadīpaniyaṃ‘‘dhammarajju nāma cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā pupphapavesanattha āvajjitvā baddharajjū’timahāgaṇṭhipade, majjhimagaṇṭhipadeca vuttaṃ, tasmā tathā baddhāya rajjuyā cetiyassa ca antare pupphāni pavesetuṃ vaṭṭatīti viññāyati.Gaṇṭhipadepana‘dhammarajjunti sithilavaṭṭitaṃ rajjuṃ katvā bodhiṃ vā cetiyaṃ vā parikkhipitvā dhammāsane vā lambitvā tattha pupphāni pavesentī’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā sithilavaṭṭitāya rajjuyā antarepi pupphāni pavesetuṃ vaṭṭatīti viññāyati, vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi panettha nevatthi virodhoti amhākaṃ khantī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.431) likhitaṃ.
475. Asokapiṇḍiādīnaṃ means of Asoka flower clusters, etc. The word ādi (etc.) includes, as shown in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) along with these, a canopy of netting, a railing made after making holes, a bracket for hanging things, a covering for a flower basket, a fan made of palm leaves, and so on. Dhammarajjuyā: Here, in the Sāratthadīpanī, it is said in both the Mahāgaṇṭhipada and the Majjhimagaṇṭhipada: "Dhammarajju means a rope tied around a Cetiya or a Bodhi tree after bending it for the purpose of inserting flowers." Therefore, it is understood that it is permissible to insert flowers between the Cetiya and the rope tied in that way. In the Gaṇṭhipada, however, it is said: " Dhammarajju means making a loosely twisted rope and encircling a Bodhi tree or a Cetiya, or hanging it in a Dhamma seat, and then inserting flowers there." Therefore, it is understood that it is permissible to insert flowers even within a loosely twisted rope. One should consider carefully and take what is more reasonable. In both cases, we have no objection here," (sārattha. ṭī. 2.431) is written.
476.Vijjhantassapītipi-saddena dhammāsanavitānādīsu pupphapūjanatthaṃ sayaṃ kaṇṭakahīrādippavesanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Vitānādīsu pupphapūjanatthaṃ kaṇṭakahīrādippavesanaṃ na vaṭṭatī’ti idaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇato gahetabba’’ntisāratthadīpaniyaṃvuttaṃ.
476. Vijjhantassapī: The pi includes the act of personally inserting thorns, needles, etc., for the purpose of offering flowers on Dhamma seat canopies, etc. It is stated in the Sāratthadīpanī: “It is not permissible to insert thorns, needles, etc., for the purpose of offering flowers on canopies, etc.; this should be understood from the authority of the Commentary teachers.”
477.Kappiyavacanaṃnāma ‘‘evaṃ jāna, evaṃ kate sobheyya, yathā etāni pupphāni na vikiriyanti, tathā karohī’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431)aṭṭhakathāgataṃ kappiyavacanaṃ.Vatthupūjaneti ratanattayapūjane. Nimittādīsunimittaṃnāma pupphāni ca ganthanavāke ca gahetvā ganthituṃ jānantānaṃ samīpe ṭhapanaṃ.Obhāsonāma ‘‘tumhehi piḷandhitakusumāni kasmā na vikirantī’’ti vutte ‘‘ganthitattā’’ti ce vadati, nanu pūjanakapupphāni ganthituṃ na vaṭṭatītiādivacanāni.Pariyāyonāma paṇḍitehi pupphāni yathā na vikiriyanti, tathā ganthitvā pūjetuṃ manāpantiādivacanaṃ.Pakāsitāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
477. Kappiyavacanaṃ means permissible speech, such as "Know thus, doing it this way would be beautiful; do it in such a way that these flowers are not scattered," etc. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431), as found in the Commentary. Vatthupūjane means in the worship of the Triple Gem. In nimitta, etc., nimitta means placing flowers and tying materials near those who know how to tie them. Obhāso means if someone says, "Why don't the flowers you have worn scatter?" and you reply, "Because they are tied," then such statements as "It is not permissible to tie the flowers for worship," etc. Pariyāyo means statements such as, "It is pleasing to worship flowers tied in such a way that they are not scattered by the wise." Pakāsitā is explained in the Commentary.
478.‘‘Kulāni dūseti pupphena vā’’tiādipāṭhe (pārā. 437) ‘‘vejjikāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā’’ti (pārā. 437) vuttaṃ vejjakammādiṃ kuladūsanato visuṃ katvā ‘‘na kevalaṃ…pe… kudācana’’nti kasmā vuttanti? Visuṃ kātuṃ na vuttaṃ. Yojanā panettha evaṃ veditabbā ‘‘na kevalamidameva vuttappakāraṃ pupphadānādikuladūsanaṃ kudācanaṃ akattabbaṃ, atha kho vejjakammādi kuladūsanampi kudācanaṃ na kattabba’’nti.Vejjakammādīti etthaādi-saddena vakkhamānaparittodakasuttadānaanāmaṭṭhapiṇḍadānadūteyyajaṅghapesanike saṅgaṇhāti.
478. In the reading "Kulāni dūseti pupphena vā," etc. (pārā. 437), and "vejjikāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā" (pārā. 437) is stated. Why is the practice of medicine, etc., distinguished from defiling families and then said, "na kevalaṃ…pe… kudācanaṃ" (not only…but never)? It is not said to distinguish it. The connection here should be understood thus: "Not only should the defilement of families through giving flowers, etc., as described in the manner stated, never be done, but also the defilement of families through the practice of medicine, etc., should never be done." In Vejjakammādī, the word ādi includes the giving of protective water with thread (parittodaka suttadāna), unnamed alms-food, and the errand-running (dūteyya jaṅghapesanika) that will be mentioned later.
479.‘‘Kudācanaṃ na kattabba’’nti sāmaññena nisedhetvā idāni‘‘kattabba’’miccādinā apavādavidhiṃ dasseti.Pañcannaṃ sahadhamminanti bhikkhubhikkhunisikkhamānasāmaṇerasāmaṇerīnaṃ pañcannaṃ saha saddhiṃ caritabbo pabbajjāsāsanadhammo etesaṃ atthīti ‘‘sahadhammikā’’ti saṅkhaṃ gatānaṃ.Akataviññattiṃ katvāpīti aññātakaappavārite bhesajjaṃ yācitvāpi ‘‘vadeyyātha bhante yenattho’’ti evaṃ akataṭṭhāne viññattiakataviññatti. Attano dhaneti sasantakavisaye.
479. Having generally prohibited with "Kudācanaṃ na kattabbaṃ" (should never be done), now he shows the exception with "kattabba" (should be done), etc. Pañcannaṃ sahadhamminaṃ (to the five co-religionists) means those who are called "sahadhammikā," who have the monastic teaching (pabbajjāsāsana dhamma) to be practiced together with the five: monks, nuns, female trainees, male novices, and female novices. Akataviññattiṃ katvāpī means even after requesting medicine from an unknown, uninvited person, if a request is made in a place where no announcement has been made, such as "Please say, Bhante, what is needed," then that is akataviññatti. Attano dhane means in one's own property.
480.‘‘Tathā’’ti sahadhammikānaṃ vuttamatidisati.Tadupaṭṭhākajantunoti tesaṃ dvinnaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ veyyāvaccakarassa.Bhaṇḍukassāti gihiliṅge ṭhitassāpi pabbajjāpekkhassa.Attano veyyāvaccakarassapīti attano kammakarassapi. Ettakānañca janānaṃ pañcasahadhammikānaṃ viya akataviññattiyāpi bhesajjaṃ kātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
480. "Tathā" approves what the co-religionists have said. Tadupaṭṭhākajantuno means to the one who does service for those two parents. Bhaṇḍukassā means to one who is staying in the state of a householder but is expecting to ordain. Attano veyyāvaccakarassapī means even to one's own worker. It is said that for so many people, like the five co-religionists, medicine should be made even without making a request.
481.Jeṭṭhabhātāti attano pubbajo bhātā.Kaniṭṭhoti anujo bhātā.Tathā bhaginiyo duveti jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhā dve bhaginiyo.Cūḷamātāti mātu kaniṭṭhā.Cūḷapitāti pitu kaniṭṭho.Mahāmātāti mātu jeṭṭhā.Mahāpitāpitu jeṭṭhabhātā.
481. Jeṭṭhabhātā means one's elder brother. Kaniṭṭho means younger brother. Tathā bhaginiyo duve means two sisters, elder and younger. Cūḷamātā means the younger sister of one’s mother. Cūḷapitā means the younger brother of one’s father. Mahāmātā means the elder sister of one’s mother. Mahāpitā means the elder brother of one’s father.
482.Pitucchāti pitubhaginī jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhā.Mātuloti mātu bhātā. Jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhe dve pitucchā, dve mātule ca ekato katvā‘‘dasā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhesajjaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.
482. Pitucchā means the sisters of one's father, elder and younger. Mātulo means the brother of one's mother. After putting together two paternal aunts, elder and younger, and two maternal uncles, it is called "dasā" (ten). It is connected that it is permissible to make medicine.
484.‘‘Dassanti me ime’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā vā dātabbanti yojanā.
484. "Dassanti me ime" means it should be given after making an intention or expectation.
485.Etesaṃdasannaṃ ñātīnaṃ.Yāva sattamā kulāti ettha kulaparicchedo kathaṃ gahetabboti? ‘‘Saputtadāraṃ bhātu kuṭumbaṃ ekaṃ kulaṃ, evaṃ tassa puttassa vā dhītu vā kuṭumbaṃ ekaṃ kula’’nti evamādinā nayena yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā gahetabbā. ‘‘Saputtapatibhaginiyā kuṭumbaṃ ekaṃ kulaṃ, tathā tassa puttassa vā dhītu vā kuṭumbaṃ ekaṃ kula’’ntiādinā nayena yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā gahetabbā. Cūḷamātādīnampi kulaparamparā iminā niyāmena gahetabbāti vadanti.Kuladūsanaṃ na rūhatīti ‘‘dātuṃ pupphaṃ panaññassa, āgatasseva ñātino’’tiādinā (vi. vi. 443) nayena kathitavidhinā etesu pavattantassa kuladūsanaṃ na ruhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
485. Etesaṃ means to these ten relatives. Yāva sattamā kulā (up to the seventh generation): How should the limit of families be taken here? "The household of a brother with wife and children is one family; likewise, the household of his son or daughter is one family," in this way, up to the seventh generation should be taken. "The household of a brother with wife and children is one family; likewise, the household of his son or daughter is one family," in this way, up to the seventh family lineage should be taken. They say that the family lineage of the younger aunt, etc., should also be taken according to this rule. Kuladūsanaṃ na rūhatī (family defilement does not arise) means that, according to the method stated, "dātuṃ pupphaṃ panaññassa, āgatasseva ñātino" (to give flowers, etc., to another, only to a relative who has come) (vi. vi. 443), family defilement does not arise in one who behaves in this way.
486.Bhātujāyāti attano jeṭṭhassa vā kaniṭṭhassa vā bhātu bhariyā.Bhaginisāmikoti attano jeṭṭhāya vā kaniṭṭhāya vā bhaginiyā sāmiko.
486. Bhātujāyā means the wife of one's elder or younger brother. Bhaginisāmiko means the husband of one's elder or younger sister.
487.Bhātunoti jeṭṭhassa, kaniṭṭhassa ca bhātuno. Anu pacchā jātātianujā,kaniṭṭhabhaginī. ‘‘Anujā’’ti upalakkhaṇanti jeṭṭhāyapi saṅgaho. Jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhātūnaṃ bhariyā ca jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ sāmikā ca sace aññātakā hontīti yojanā.Dethāti ettha ‘‘imaṃ bhesajja’’nti pāṭhaseso.
487. Bhātuno means of the elder and younger brothers. Anu pacchā jātāti anujā, younger sister. "Anujā" is indicative, so it includes the elder sister as well. It should be connected that if the wives of elder and younger brothers and the husbands of elder and younger sisters are unknown. "Dethā": Here, "imaṃ bhesajjaṃ" (this medicine) is the implied part.
488.Tesampibhātubhaginīnaṃ.‘‘Puttāna’’nti iminā dhītūnampi saṅgaho.Katvāti vatvā.Tumhākaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dethāti etthāpi ‘‘imaṃ bhesajja’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati.Mātāpitūnanti ubhayasaṅgāhakavacanato ‘‘tuyhaṃ mātu vā, tuyhaṃ pitu vā’’ti yathāsambhavaṃ visuṃ visuñca vattabbaṃ.Tesanti catumhākanti ca sāmivacanaṃ.Puttānanti camātāpitūnanti ca sampadānavacanaṃ.
488. Tesampi means of those brothers and sisters. "Puttāna" includes daughters as well. Katvā means having said. Tumhākaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dethā: Here too, "imaṃ bhesajjaṃ" is obtained from the context. Mātāpitūnaṃ from the inclusive word, it should be said separately as appropriate, "to your mother or to your father." Tesaṃ and tumhākaṃ are possessive words. Puttānaṃ and mātāpitūnaṃ are dative words.
489.Bhesajjakaraṇārahānaṃ vattabbatāya‘‘akallako’’ti idaṃ issarādipadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Akallakoti āturo.Kallaṃvuccati sukhaṃ, taṃ etassa atthītikallako,na kallako akallako.Ñātijanujjhito vāti ñātijanena pariccatto vā.
489. To show what is proper to say to those who are fit to make medicine, the word "akallako" (unsuitable) should be connected individually with words such as issarādi (master, etc.). Akallako means a sick person. Kallaṃ is said to be happiness; one who has that is kallako, one who is not kallako is akallako. Ñātijanujjhito vā means one who has been abandoned by relatives.
490.Etesaṃ sabbesanti issarādiāturānaṃ sabbesametesaṃ janānaṃ.‘‘Sādhunā’’ti vakkhamānattāapaccāsīsatā satāti etthasatāti kiriyāpadaṃ. ‘‘Imasmiṃ kate ime mayhaṃ evarūpaṃ dassantī’’ti attano atthāya paccāsīsanaṃ akarontenāti attho. Bhikkhusaṅghassa upakārataṃ paccāsīsantena kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Paṭisanthāroti āmisapaṭisanthāro, dhammapaṭisanthāroti duvidho paṭisanthāro. Ettha āmisapaṭisanthāro gayhati. Bhesajjaṃ āmisenapi hotīti dhammakathāya saṅgahopi yujjateva. Paṭisantharaṇaṃ paṭisanthāro. Paṭiladdhāmisassa ca dhammassa ca tesu ca attani ca patirūpenākārena samaṃ attharaṇaṃ pavattananti attho.
490. Etesaṃ sabbesaṃ (to all of these): to all of these people who are masters, the sick, etc. Satā, since "sādhunā" (skillfully) will be said later, here satā is the verb. It means without expecting for one's own benefit that "If this is done, they will give me such and such." It is permissible to do it expecting to be helpful to the Sangha. Paṭisanthāro is of two kinds: material recompense (āmisapaṭisanthāro) and Dhamma recompense (dhammapaṭisanthāro). Here, material recompense is taken. Since medicine can also be material, the inclusion of Dhamma talk is fitting. Paṭisantharaṇaṃ is paṭisanthāro. It means that the giving of material things and the Dhamma is spread equally in a suitable manner to them and to oneself.
paṭisanthāro. Ayañhi lokasannivāso alabbhamānena āmisena ca dhammena cāti dvīhi chiddo, tassa taṃ chiddaṃ yathā na paññāyati, evaṃ pīṭhassa viya paccattharaṇena āmisena, dhammena ca paṭisantharaṇaṃ ‘‘āmisapaṭisanthāro, dhammapaṭisanthāro’’ti vuccatīti.Sādhunāti sāmīcippaṭipannatādiariyadhamme patiṭṭhitukāmena ariyācārena bhikkhunāti attho.‘‘Adhunā’’ti idaṃ imissā paṭipattiyā sabbakālaṃ paṭipajjitabbatāyapi pāpajanakaṇhakasaṃgāme imasmiṃ vipannakāle visesena appamattena pavattetabbanti adhippāyena vuttaṃ.
paṭisanthāro. This world is deficient in two things, in material things and in the Dhamma, which are not easily obtained; the recompense with material things and with the Dhamma is called "material recompense, Dhamma recompense" just as the deficiency is not apparent like a covering on a seat. Sādhunā (skillfully) means by a monk with good conduct who desires to be established in noble Dhamma, in noble conduct. "Adhunā" (now) is said with the intention that, although this practice should be practiced at all times, in this degenerate time, in this battle of bad, dark deeds, it should be especially promoted with diligence.
491-2.Kenacīti upalakkhaṇattā upāsakena vā upāsikāya vāti attho.Hatthenāti hatthāvayavā aṅguliyo vuttā samudāye pavattassa vohārassa avayave pavattanato.Katvāti ettha ‘‘paritta’’nti pāṭhaseso, karotissa kiriyāsāmaññe vattanato bhaṇitvāti attho.Tesameva ca santakanti parittaṃ bhaṇāpentānameva santakaṃ suttodakaṃ. Evaṃ vuttattā ‘‘attano suttodakaṃ āharitvā puññatthāya idaṃ hatthena cāletvā, āmasitvā vā parittaṃ bhaṇathā’’ti vutte kenaci parittodakaṃ suttaṃ kātabbaṃ. Kenaci ‘‘parittodakasuttāni dethā’’ti vutte bhikkhunā tesameva santakaṃ jalaṃ hatthena cāletvā suttakaṃ madditvā parittaṃ katvā dātabbanti yojanā.
491-2. Kenacī (by someone) is indicative, meaning by a male or female lay follower. Hatthena (by the hand) means the fingers, which are parts of the hand, are meant, since the usage that prevails in the collective prevails in the parts. Katvā: Here, "parittaṃ" (protection) is the implied part; since it is used in the general sense of the verb karonti (do), it means having spoken. Tesameva ca santakaṃ (and belonging to them) means the protective water and thread belong to those who cause the protection to be spoken. Because it is said in this way, if someone says, "Having brought your own protective water and moved it with your hand for merit, or having touched it, speak the protection," then the protective water and thread should be prepared by someone. If someone says, "Give protective water and threads," then the monk should move the water belonging to them with his hand, rub the thread, make it a protection, and give it; this is how it should be connected.
493.Anāmaṭṭhopīti hatthena anāmasitopi, apabbajitassa hatthato laddhā attanā vā aññena vā bhikkhunā agahitaggoti vuttaṃ hoti.
493. Anāmaṭṭhopī (even without touching): even without touching with the hand, it is said that it can be taken from the hand of a non-ordained person, whether taken by oneself or by another monk.
494.Coradāmarikassa cāti gāmavilopakassa corassa ca.
494. Coradāmarikassa cā (and to a robber and bandit): and to a robber who plunders villages.
495.Paṇḍupalāsassāti pabbajjāpekkhassa bhaṇḍukassa, paṇḍuvaṇṇo palāsopaṇḍupalāso,so viyāti paṇḍupalāso, taṃsadise tabbohāro ‘‘sīhoyaṃ māṇavako’’tiādīsu viya. Yathā paṇḍupalāso rukkhā patanābhimukho tiṭṭhati niyatapāto, evamayampi gihiliṅgato apagamābhimukho pabbajjūpagamane niyatova tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘paṇḍupalāsasadiso’’ti veditabbo.
495. Paṇḍupalāsassā (to one like a yellow leaf): to a bhaṇḍuka (candidate for ordination) who is expecting ordination, a yellow leaf is paṇḍupalāso, he is like that, hence paṇḍupalāso; this usage should be understood like in "this boy is a lion," etc. Just as a yellow leaf stands on a tree facing towards falling, certain to fall, so too this one stands certain towards going forth, facing towards ordination from the state of a householder, therefore, he should be understood as "like a yellow leaf."
Thālakepi cāti attano paribhogathālakepi. Idañca nidassanamattaṃ, pattopi gahitoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Ṭhapetvāti ettha ‘‘piṇḍapāta’’nti upayogavasena sambandhanīyaṃ.Taṃ panāti attano paribhogathālake ṭhapetvā diyyamānaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ. ‘‘Mātāpitūna’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ettha ‘‘pituno’’ti upalakkhaṇanti mātāpitūnampīti attho. Sace ekaseso icchito, ‘‘pitūnampī’’ti pāṭho yujjati.
Thālakepi cā (and even in a bowl): even in one's own bowl for use. This is just an indication; it should be seen that the bowl is indeed taken. Ṭhapetvā: Here, "piṇḍapātaṃ" (alms-food) should be connected according to the use. Taṃ pana (that, however): the alms-food that is given after placing it in one's own bowl for use. From the Commentary's (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) statement "Mātāpitūnaṃ" (to mother and father), here, "pituno" (to the father) is indicative, so it means to mother and father. If singular is intended, then the reading "pitūnampī" is fitting.
496.Jaṅghapesaniyanti gihīnaṃ dūteyyasāsanaharaṇakammaṃ ‘‘jaṅghapesaniya’’nti vuccati.Api cāti vuttasamuccayo.
496. Jaṅghapesaniyaṃ (errand-running) means the work of carrying messages and commands for householders is called "jaṅghapesaniyaṃ." Api cā (and also) is an accumulation of what has been said.
497.Ettāvatā sāmaññavidhiṃ dassetvā idāni apavādavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bhaṇḍū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Sāsananti sandesaṃ.Haritunti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ netuṃ.
497. Having shown the general rule up to this point, now, to show the exception, "bhaṇḍū," etc., is said. Sāsanaṃ means the message. Harituṃ means to take it to the place that has been said.
498.Aṭṭhavidhenapīti pupphadānādijaṅghapesaniyāvasānena aṭṭhappakārenapi.Kuladūsanakammenāti kulānaṃ saddhāvināsakena anācārakammena.Laddhanti ettha ‘‘bhojana’’nti idaṃ ‘‘bhuñjitu’’nti ca ‘‘ajjhohāresū’’ti ca vuttattā, ‘‘sesesupi ayaṃ nayo’’ti vakkhamānattā ca labbhati. Pañcasu sahadhammikesu ekenāpi kuladūsanena kammena uppāditapaccayo sabbesampi na vaṭṭatīti‘‘pañcannaṃ sahadhammīnaṃ na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti sabbapaṭisedho kato.
498. Aṭṭhavidhenapī (even by eight kinds) means even by eight kinds ending with flower-giving and errand-running. Kuladūsanakammenā (by family-defiling action) means by immoral action that destroys the faith of families. Laddhaṃ: Here, "bhojanaṃ" (food) is obtained because "bhuñjituṃ" (to eat) and "ajjhohāresū" (in eating) have been said, and because "sesesupi ayaṃ nayo" (this method also applies to the remaining) will be said. If even one of the five co-religionists has produced requisites through family-defiling actions, then it is not permissible for all of them; therefore, "pañcannaṃ sahadhammīnaṃ na ca vaṭṭatī" (and it is not permissible for the five co-religionists) is a complete prohibition.
499.Sabbatthāti ‘‘ajjhohāresū’’ti etassa visesanaṃ, sabbesūti attho. ‘‘Ajjhohāre ajjhohāre’’tiaṭṭhakathāgataṃ saṅgaṇhāti.‘‘Ajjhohāresū’’ti idaṃ paragalaṃ kātabbaṃ āmisaṃ sandhāyāha. Sesapaccaye paṭicca paribhogavaseneva‘‘sesesū’’ti āha, anajjhoharaṇīyesu sesapaccayesūti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Cīvarapaccaye sarīrato mocetvā paribhogagaṇanāya, senāsanapaccaye nibbakose udakapatanaṭṭhānato abbhantaraṃ paviṭṭhavāragaṇanāya, mañcapīṭhādisenāsane nisīdanasayanādiparibhogagaṇanāya, anajjhoharitvā abbhañjanālepanādivasena kātabbabhesajje sarīrato mocetvā vāragaṇanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ paridīpita’’nti vutto nayo.
499. Sabbatthā (everywhere) is a specification of "ajjhohāresū," meaning in all. It includes what is stated in the Commentary: "Ajjhohāre ajjhohāre" (in each and every eating). "Ajjhohāresū" is said referring to material things that are to be swallowed. Regarding the remaining requisites, he said "sesesū" (in the remaining) only with regard to the basis of use; it means in the remaining requisites that are not to be swallowed. What has been said? In the case of robes, it is by calculating the times they are taken off the body and used; in the case of lodgings, it is by calculating the number of times one enters inside the dripping eaves, not counting the open space; in the case of lodgings such as beds and chairs, it is by calculating the times of sitting and lying down for use; in the case of medicine to be used by applying oils, etc., without swallowing, it is by calculating the times they are taken off the body. Ayaṃ nayo (this method) means the method that has been said, "dukkaṭaṃ paridīpita" (a wrong-doing has been explained).
500.‘‘Uppannapaccayā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘abhūtārocanenā’’ti idamapekkhitvā vuttaṃ.‘‘Katvā rūpiyavohāra’’nti idamapekkhitvā ‘‘uppāditapaccayā’’ti yojanā kātabbā. Rūpiyavohāravinicchayo nissaggiye āvi bhavissati. Abhūtārocanavinicchayo catutthapārājike vutto.Samānāti pakāsitāti kuladūsanakammena uppāditapaccayehi sadisāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttāti attho. Iminā tatthāpi vinicchayo ettakoyevāti atidisati.
500. "Uppannapaccayā" (due to a cause that has arisen): this is stated with reference to "abhūtārocanena" (by falsely declaring). Regarding "Katvā rūpiyavohāra" (having engaged in transactions with money): the connection should be made to "uppāditapaccayā" (due to a cause that has been produced). The determination of transactions with money will become clear in the Nissaggiya section. The determination of falsely declaring has been stated in the fourth Pārājika. Samānāti pakāsitā (it is declared to be similar): the commentary states that it is similar to the produced causes due to the act of corrupting families. With this, it indicates that even there, the determination is only this much.
501.‘‘Saṃsāravāso dukkha’’nti ñatvā nibbānādhigame mānasaṃ bandhitvā nibbānagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ sandhāya sāsanāvatiṇṇena sikkhākāmena kulaputtena sevitakkhaṇeyeva jīvitaharaṇasamatthavisamissapūtimuttaṃ viya vajjanīyaṃ akappiyapaccayaṃ uppādetuṃ kariyamānaṃ akappiyopāyappakāraṃ ekato dassetumāha‘‘viññattī’’tiādi. Tatthaviññattiyācanā.Anuppadānanti piṇḍapaṭipiṇḍadānaṃ.Vejjakammaṃvuttanayameva.Anesanaṃnāma appicchatāya ananurūpena payogena paccayapariyesanaṃ.
501. Realizing that "Saṃsāravāso dukkha" (dwelling in saṃsāra is suffering) and having directed one's mind towards attaining nibbāna, a kulaputta (one of good family) who has entered the Teaching, aiming for the path leading to nibbāna, should avoid the ways of producing improper requisites as if they were deadly poison mixed with urine. To show the ways and means of improper conduct that are being done, he says, "viññattī" (entreating), etc. Here, viññatti means begging. Anuppadāna (giving in return) means giving alms in exchange. Vejjakammaṃ (medical practice) is as previously stated. Anesanaṃ (wrong ways of seeking) is seeking requisites in a way that is not suitable, due to a lack of desirelessness.
Pāribhaṭyatānāma issare sevituṃ parivāretvā tesaṃ cittarucitaṃ vilapantānaṃ paribhaṭānaṃ sevakajanānaṃ viya lābhatthikassa bhikkhuno paccayadāyakesu pavattīti veditabbo. Pari samantato bhaṭati sevatītiparibhaṭo,issarajanānaṃ samīpāvacaro sevakajano, paribhaṭo viyātiparibhaṭo,bhikkhu, paribhaṭassa kammaṃpāribhaṭyaṃ,tassa bhāvo pāribhaṭyatā. Atha vā paribhaṭati dhāti viya kuladārake aṅke karaṇādivasena dhāretītiparibhaṭo,paribhaṭassa kammaṃpāribhaṭyaṃ,tassa bhāvo pāribhaṭyatāti lābhāsāya bhikkhuno kuladārakesu ananulomikā pavatti vuccati.
Pāribhaṭyatā: This should be understood as the behavior of a bhikkhu who is seeking gain, towards the donors of requisites, like that of attendants (paribhaṭānaṃ) who, serving powerful people by surrounding them and speaking according to their tastes. Paribhaṭo means one who serves all around, a servant who is in close proximity to powerful people; paribhaṭo viyāti means like an attendant, a bhikkhu; paribhaṭassa kammaṃ means the action of an attendant; pāribhaṭyaṃ, tassa bhāvo pāribhaṭyatā means the state of being an attendant. Alternatively, paribhaṭo means one who cherishes, like one who holds a young child in their lap and cares for them; paribhaṭassa kammaṃ pāribhaṭyaṃ, tassa bhāvo pāribhaṭyatā means the action of cherishing, the state of being a cherisher, referring to the unsuitable behavior of a bhikkhu towards young children of families, motivated by the desire for gain.
Muggasūpatānāma pakkamuggā viya pakkāpakkabījamissā lābhāsāya dāyakānaṃ cittārādhanatthāya saccālīkamissakatā. Yathā muggesu paccamānesu kocideva na paccati, bahavo paccanti, evameva yassa dāyakehi saddhiṃ kathentassa kiñcideva saccaṃ hoti, asaccameva bahukaṃ hoti, ayaṃ vuccati muggasūpasadisattā‘‘muggasūpo’’ti, tassa kammaṃmuggasūpaṃ,tassa bhāvo muggasūpatā.Vatthuvijjakaṃnāma kūpavatthugehavatthuādīnaṃ ācikkhanaṃ. Vatthuvijjāyakānaṃ kataṃ vatthuvijjakaṃ.
Muggasūpatā: This refers to the mixing of truth and falsehood to please donors for the sake of gain, like unripe muggā beans mixed with ripe ones. Just as when muggā beans are being cooked, some do not ripen, but many do, similarly, when one speaks with donors, only some of it is true, but much of it is false; this is called "muggasūpo" because it is like mugga soup. Tassa kammaṃ muggasūpaṃ, tassa bhāvo muggasūpatā means the action of making mugga soup, the state of being like mugga soup. Vatthuvijjakaṃ means indicating the sites for wells, houses, land, etc. Vatthuvijjakaṃ kataṃ means done by those skilled in vatthuvijjā (site selection).
502.Jaṅghapesaniyaṃ, dūtakammañcavuttanayameva.Kuladūsananti vuttāvasesaṃ.Abhūtārocanañcavuttanayameva.Buddhapaṭikuṭṭhanti buddhehi paṭikkositaṃ garahitaṃ yathāvuttaṃ micchājīvañca avuttañca aṅgavijjānakkhattavijjāukkāpātadisāḍāhabhūmicālādibhedaṃ micchājīvanūpāyaṃ sabbaṃ.Vivajjayeti visamiva, gūthamuttaṃ viya ca ārakā parivajjeyyāti attho. ‘‘Sikkhākāmo kulaputto’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.
502. Jaṅghapesaniyaṃ, dūtakammañca (acting as a go-between and running errands) are as previously stated. Kuladūsana (corrupting families) is the remainder of what was stated. Abhūtārocanañca (falsely declaring) is as previously stated. Buddhapaṭikuṭṭhaṃ (censured by the Buddhas) means censured and reproached by the Buddhas. All the wrong livelihood that has been stated and not stated, such as aṅgavijjā, nakkhattavijjā, predicting falling meteors, directions, fires, earthquakes, and other forms of wrong livelihood, vivajjaye (should avoid): one should avoid from afar, like poison or excrement and urine. "Sikkhākāmo kulaputto" (a kulaputta who desires training) is understood by implication.
503.Paṭinissajjatopi tanti samanubhāsanakammato pubbe vā ñatticatutthāsu kammavācāsu antakammavācāyayya-kāraṃ appattāya vā kuladūsanakammaṃ pajahantassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Saṅghabhedasamanti paṭhamasaṅghabhedena samanti.
503. Paṭinissajjatopi taṃ (even if he relinquishes that): it is said that even if one abandons the act of corrupting families before the formal act of accusation, or before the yya-sound in the final declaration of the ñatti-catuttha-kamma is reached. Saṅghabhedasamaṃ (equal to causing a schism in the Sangha): equal to the first schism in the Sangha.
Kuladūsanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Talk of Corrupting Families.
504.‘‘Jāna’’nti imassa ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti etassa visesanattā jānatāti gahetabbaṃ. Pāḷiyā likhitesīhaḷagaṇṭhipadepana evarūpaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosmīti ñatvāti attho vutto.Yāvatīhanti yattakāni ahāni, ‘‘chāditā’’ti iminā sambandho, chādanakiriyāaccantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Chāditāti ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno’’ti sabrahmacārīnaṃ anārocanadivasena paṭicchāditā.Āpattīti saṅghādisesāpatti.Akāmāti aruciyāva saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjitvā akatapaṭikammassa saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakarattāti adhippāyo.Parivatthabbanti parivāsaṃ samādāya vatthabbaṃ. Kittakaṃ kālanti āha‘‘tāvatīha’’nti, tattakāni ahānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Āpajjitvā yattakāni ahāni paṭicchādeti, tattakāneva ahānīti attho.
504. Since "Jāna" (knows) is a qualifier of "bhikkhunā" (by the bhikkhu), it should be taken as "jānatā" (by one who knows). In the Sīhaḷa commentary word written in Pali, the meaning is given as "having known, 'I have committed such an offense.'" Yāvatīha (however many here) means as many days as; it is connected to "chāditā" (concealed); the instrumental case is used to indicate continuous association with the act of concealing. Chāditā (concealed) means concealed by not declaring to one's fellow brahmacārīs (those who live the holy life), "I have committed such and such an offense." Āpattī (an offense) means a saṅghādisesa offense. Akāmā (unwillingly) means having committed a saṅghādisesa offense against one's will, because it obstructs heavenly realms and liberation for one who has not performed the appropriate expiation. Parivatthabbaṃ (must live on probation) means one must undertake parivāsa and live (on probation). How long? He says, "tāvatīha" (however many here), meaning for that many days. The meaning is, for as many days as one conceals after committing an offense, for that many days (of parivāsa).
505-6.Āpatti kittakena paṭicchannā hotīti āha‘‘āpatti cā’’tiādi. Tatthaāpatti cāti saṅghādisesāpatti ca.Anukkhitto cāti ukkhepanīyakammena sayaṃ anissārito ca.Pahū cāti sayaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ santikaṃ gantvā ārocetuṃ pahoti ca.Anantarāyiko cāti gamanavibandhakena rājacorādiantarāyena virahito ca.Catusva pīti ettha ‘‘etesū’’ti seso, etesu catūsūti attho.Taṃsaññīti āpattisaññī anukkhittasaññī pahusaññī anantarāyikasaññīti vuttaṃ hoti.Tassaevaṃsaññino imesu catūsu tathāsaññino puggalassa.Chādetukāmatāti ācariyādīsu gāravena vā garahādibhayā vā ‘‘na ārocessāmī’’ti paṭicchādetukāmatā ca.Chādananti tathā cintetvā ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ āpanno’’ti avatvā paṭicchādanañcāti imehi dasahi aṅgehi.‘‘Bhikkhunā’’ti kattuniddesattāchannāti ettha chāditāti attho. Kālavidhiṃ dasseti‘‘aruṇuggamanenā’’ti, āpattiāpannadivasaṃ khepetvā aruṇuṭṭhānena saddhiṃ channā hotīti attho.
505-6. He says how long the offense is concealed: "āpatti cā" (and an offense), etc. Here, āpatti cā means a saṅghādisesa offense. Anukkhitto cā (and not expelled) means not expelled by oneself through an act of expulsion. Pahū cā (and able) means able to go to the presence of one's fellow brahmacārīs and declare it. Anantarāyiko cā (and without obstacles) means free from obstacles such as danger from kings or robbers that hinder one's going. Catusva pī (even in the four) here, "etesū" is understood, meaning in these four. Taṃsaññī (perceiving that) means perceiving it as an offense, perceiving oneself as not expelled, perceiving oneself as able, perceiving oneself as without obstacles. Tassa (of him), of a person who perceives thus in these four ways. Chādetukāmatā (desire to conceal) means the desire to conceal, thinking "I will not declare," due to respect for one's teacher, or fear of censure, etc. Chādanaṃ (concealing) means, having thought thus, concealing by not saying "I have committed such and such an offense." With these ten factors, since "Bhikkhunā" (by the bhikkhu) indicates the agent, "channā" (is concealed) means "chāditā" (is concealed). He shows the time limit: "aruṇuggamanena" (with the rising of the dawn), meaning, having spent the day one committed the offense, it is concealed with the rising of the dawn.
Dvebhāṇavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of Two Bhāṇavāras is Complete.
507.Evaṃ paṭicchannasaṅghādisesapaṭikammatthaṃ ‘‘akāmā parivatthabba’’nti vihitassa parivāsassa ko bhedo, ko pavattikkamoti āha‘‘tividho’’tiādi. So parivāso tividho dīpitoti sambandho. Kenāti āha‘‘tividhāpetacetasā’’ti. ‘‘Tisso vidhā, seyyohamasmīti vidhā, sadisohamasmīti vidhā, hīnohamasmīti vidhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305) vuttavidhāya mānanāmadheyyato tividhamānato apagatacittena sammāsambuddhenāti attho.
507. Thus, for the purpose of expiating a concealed saṅghādisesa offense, what is the difference and what is the order of procedure for the parivāsa that is prescribed, saying "akāmā parivatthabba" (must live unwillingly on probation)? He says "tividho" (of three kinds), etc. The connection is that the parivāsa is shown to be of three kinds. By what? He says "tividhāpetacetasā" (by one whose mind is devoid of three kinds). It means by the Sammāsambuddha, whose mind is devoid of the three kinds of conceit, named conceiving "I am superior," conceiving "I am equal," and conceiving "I am inferior" (D.N. 3.305), according to the method stated.
paṭicchanno. Arisādīnaṃ āgatigaṇattā tattha pakkhipanena a-kārapaccayo daṭṭhabbo. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘paṭicchannāya dātabbo’’tiādi.
paṭicchanno (concealed): the a-sound should be understood as a suffix, by including it in the group of words beginning with ari. Therefore, he will say "paṭicchannāya dātabbo" (it should be given for a concealed offense), etc.
Suddhantoti ‘‘ubho koṭiyo sodhetvā dātabbaparivāso suddhanto nāmā’’tipāḷigaṇṭhipadevuttattā upasampadākālasaṅkhāto suddho pubbanto, ārocitakālasaṅkhāto suddho aparanto ca parivāsasamādānakāle vā parivasanakāle vā upaparikkhitvā diṭṭhā suddhā antā anāpattikālasaṅkhātā ubho koṭiyo assāti katvāsuddhantanāmako parivāso ca. Ettha ca bhedādiṃ vakkhati.
Suddhanto (with pure ends): since it is stated in the Pali commentary word that "parivāsa that is to be given after purifying both ends is called suddhanto," having purified both the beginning, which is pure as counted from the time of ordination, and the end, which is pure as counted from the time of confession, after examining and seeing at the time of undertaking parivāsa or at the time of living (on probation) that both ends, counted as times without offenses, are pure, therefore, the parivāsa is named suddhanta. Here, he will state the difference, etc.
samodhāno,parivāso. Divasesu divase vā āpattīsu āpattiyo vā sabbā nānāvatthukā āpattiyo ekato katvā odhāya dātabbaparivāsoti attho. Etthāpi bhedādiṃ vakkhati.
samodhāno (accumulated), parivāsa. It means parivāsa that is to be given after accumulating all the different offenses, whether it be offenses upon offenses each day, or all offenses together. Here too, he will state the difference, etc.
508.Tatrāti tesu tīsu parivāsesu. ‘‘Yo’’ti seso.Itīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yo paṭicchannaparivāso, ayanti evaṃ pakāsitoti yojanā.
508. Tatrā (there), among those three kinds of parivāsa. "Yo" (that which) is understood. Itī (thus): this should be understood as "evaṃ" (thus). The connection is: that which is paṭicchannaparivāsa (parivāsa for a concealed offense), this is thus declared.
509-10.Parivāsadānakāle vuccamānāya kammavācāya padhānalakkhaṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vatthugottavasenā’’tiādi. Tattha‘‘vatthū’’ti sukkamocanādiko vītikkamo vuccati. Ayameva sukkavissaṭṭhiādikaṃ gaṃ vācaṃ saññañca tāyati rakkhatīti katvā ‘‘gotta’’nti vuccati. Tañhi sajātiyasādhāraṇavijātiyavinivattanavasena aññattha gantuṃ adatvā vācaṃ saddaṃ, tabbisayaṃ saññañca rakkhati. Idaṃ vatthugottadvayavācakaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhikāyasaṃsaggavisesavacanañca ‘‘nānāvatthukā’’ti sāmaññavacanañcāti iminā vacanadvayenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ kāyasaṃsagga’ntiādivacanenāpi ‘nānāvatthukāyo’tiādivacanenāpi vatthuceva gottañca saṅgahita’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102).Nāmāpattivasena vāti ettha saṅghādisesoti sajātisādhāraṇanāmaṃ, āpattīti sabbasādhāraṇanāmanti dvīhi nāmehi taṃtaṃvītikkamavasena āpajjitabbato tadeva āpattīti evamubhinnaṃ nāmāpattīnaṃ vasena vāti attho.
509-10. To show the main characteristics of the declaration that is recited at the time of giving parivāsa, he says "vatthugottavasenā" (based on the ground and lineage), etc. Here, "vatthū" (ground) means the transgression, such as emission of semen. This same thing protects the language, speech, and perception of emitting semen, therefore, it is called "gotta" (lineage). For it protects the language and speech, which are the objects of it, and the perception, by way of distinguishing what is common to its own kind and what is different from other kinds, without allowing it to go elsewhere. It is said that with these two terms, referring to ground and lineage, both the specific term "emission of semen and physical contact" and the general term "of various grounds" are included. This has been stated in the commentary: "both ground and lineage are included by the statement 'emission of semen, physical contact,' etc., and by the statement 'of various grounds,' etc." (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). Nāmāpattivasena vā (or based on the name and offense): here, saṅghādisesa is a name common to its own kind, and āpatti (offense) is a name common to all; thus, based on the two names, according to the different transgressions to be committed, "that itself is an offense," thus, it means based on the two names, both of them.
Kammavācā hi kātabbāti ‘‘vatthugottavasenāpī’’ti etthaapi-saddo ‘‘nāmāpattivasena vā’’ti ettha saṅghādisesoti sajātisādhāraṇanāmaṃ, āpattīti sabbasādhāraṇanāmanti dvīhi nāmehīti idaṃ samuccinotīti ubhayaṃ ekato yojetvā kammavācā kātabbāti. ‘‘Nāmāpattivasena vā’’ti ettha vikappatthenavā-saddena, ‘‘ahaṃ bhante sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’ti evaṃ nāmamattavasena vā yojanā kātabbā’’tiaṭṭhakathāyavuttavisesanivattanatthamattasaddavasena ca vatthugottavirahitena kevalena nāmāpattimattena payojetvā kātabbāyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kammavācāya karaṇappakāro panasamuccayakkhandhakeāgatanayena āpannapuggalanāmena ca ekāhapaṭicchannādivacanena ca yojetvā daṭṭhabbo. Tassa dātabboti yojanā. ‘‘Parivāso’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati, paṭicchannāpattikassa puggalassa parivāso dātabboti attho.
Kammavācā hi kātabbā (indeed, the kammavācā should be done): here, the api-particle in "vatthugottavasenāpī" (even based on ground and lineage) combines with "nāmāpattivasena vā" (or based on the name and offense); here, saṅghādisesa is a name common to its own kind, and āpatti is a name common to all, thus, both are collected together, and the kammavācā should be done. With the vā-particle in "nāmāpattivasena vā" having the meaning of optionality, it is stated in the commentary that "one should connect it even with a mere name, saying, 'bhante, I have committed many saṅghādisesa offenses that were concealed for one day,' etc." It is stated that it should be used only with the name and offense, devoid of ground and lineage, due to the force of the attha-particle (meaning "only") to exclude the distinctions stated. The way of performing the kammavācā, however, should be understood by connecting it with the name of the offending individual and with the statement "concealed for one day," etc., according to the method given in the Samuccayakkhandhaka. "Tassa dātabbo" (it should be given to him) is connected. "Parivāso" (probation) is obtained from the context; it means parivāsa should be given to the individual who has concealed an offense.
Tena cāti laddhaparivāsena antosīmāya ukkuṭikaṃ nisinnena paggahitañjalinā bhikkhunā ca.Samādiyitvāti etthāpi ‘‘vatta’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati. ‘‘Samādānepyayaṃ nayo’’ti (vi. vi. 514) vakkhamānattā ‘‘vattaṃ samādiyāmi, parivāsaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ aññataraṃ vā dvayameva vā tikkhattuṃ vatvāpārivāsikakkhandhakevuttavattapūraṇatthaṃ samādiyitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ādito saṅghassa ārocetabbanti yojanā. Tathā vattaṃ samādiyitvā nisinnena paṭhamaṃsaṅghassa‘‘ahaṃ bhante ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannaṃ, sohaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ yāciṃ, tassa me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ adāsi, sohaṃ parivasāmi, vedayāmāhaṃ bhante, vedayatīti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti evaṃārocetabbaṃ.
Tena cā (and by him), by the bhikkhu who has received parivāsa, sitting in the squatting posture within the boundary, with hands raised in añjali. Samādiyitvā (having undertaken): here too, "vattaṃ" (duty) is obtained by implication. Because it will be said, "samādānepyayaṃ nayo" (this is the method for undertaking) (Vi. Vi. 514), it is said that having undertaken, either one or both of these two, "vattaṃ samādiyāmi, parivāsaṃ samādiyāmī" (I undertake the duty, I undertake the probation) three times, for the purpose of fulfilling the duties stated in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka. From the beginning, it is connected to declaring to the Sangha. Thus, having undertaken the duty and being seated, first, saṅghassa (to the Sangha), one should ārocetabbaṃ (declare): "bhante, I have committed a saṅghādisesa offense, intentional emission of semen, concealed for one day; therefore, I request from the Sangha one day of parivāsa for one saṅghādisesa offense, intentional emission of semen, concealed for one day; the Sangha has given me one day of parivāsa for one saṅghādisesa offense, intentional emission of semen, concealed for one day; therefore, I am living on probation; I declare, bhante; may the Sangha remember me as declaring."
aṭṭhakathāvacanato yāya kāyaci bhāsāyapi ārocetuṃ vaṭṭati.
According to the commentary statement, it is permissible to declare it in any language.
511.Punappunāgatānanti ettha ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti seso. Pubbe ārocanaṭṭhānaṃ asampattānaṃ āgantukānaṃ bhikkhūnampi.Ārocentovāti ekassa ārocane so ce vuḍḍhataro hoti, ‘‘bhante’’ti vatvā pubbe vuttanayeneva vatvā, navako ce, ‘‘āvuso’’ti vatvā avasāne ‘‘maṃ āyasmā dhāretū’’ti, dve ce honti, ‘‘maṃ āyasmantā dhārentū’’ti, tayo ce, ‘‘maṃ āyasmanto dhārentū’’ti vatvā ārocentova.Rattiyā chedaṃ akatvāti ‘‘pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 81) nayena vuttaekasenāsane pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ aruṇuṭṭhāpanavasena kariyamānena sahavāsena vā ‘‘pakatattabhikkhūhi vinā ekakena vāso’’ti vuttavippavāsena vā ‘‘āgantukānaṃ ārocanāya akaraṇa’’nti vuttaanārocanena vā sambhavantaṃ ratticchedamakatvā.Vattabhedaṃ akatvā vāpārivāsikakkhandhake pārivāsikassa paññattavattato ekampi ahāpetvā ca.Sadā vaseti parivāsaṃ vasituṃ parikappitā sabbadivasā yāva khiṇanti, tāva vaseyyāti attho.
511. Punappunāgatānaṃ (to those who come again): here, "bhikkhūnaṃ" (to the bhikkhus) is understood. Even to bhikkhus who have newly arrived, who have not previously reached the place of declaration. Ārocentovā (or declaring): if one declares to one, if he is older, one should say "bhante" and speak in the manner previously stated; if he is newer, one should say "āvuso" and at the end, "may the venerable remember me"; if there are two, "may the venerables remember me"; if there are three, one should say "may the venerables remember me" and declare. Rattiyā chedaṃ akatvā (without breaking the night) means without breaking the night, which could occur by dwelling in the same lodging with a bhikkhu who is of good standing, according to the method stated, "in the same lodging with a bhikkhu who is of good standing" (Cūḷava. 81), by causing him to rise at dawn, or by living alone without bhikkhus who are of good standing, or by not declaring to newcomers. Vattabhedaṃ akatvā vā (or without breaking the duties) and without missing even one of the duties prescribed for one living on probation in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka. Sadā vase (always dwell): it means one should always dwell for all the days that are determined for living on probation, until it is finished.
512.Tattha parivāso visodhetuṃ na sakkā ceti tassa vihārassa mahantattā āgate āgantukabhikkhū pariyesitvā ārocentena ratticchedaṃ akatvā parivāsaṃ sodhetuṃ na sakkā ce hoti.Taṃ vattaṃ nikkhipitvānāti tathā samādinnaṃ vattaṃ upari vakkhamānanayena nikkhipitvā.
512. Tattha parivāso visodhetuṃ na sakkā ce (if it is not possible there to purify the parivāsa): if, because that monastery is large, it is not possible to purify the parivāsa by searching for the newly arrived bhikkhus and declaring to them without breaking the night.
513.Kattha nikkhipeyyāti āha‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.Tattheva saṅghamajjhe vāti attano yasmiṃ vattaṃ samādinnaṃ, tasmiṃyeva saṅghamajjhe vā.Puggale vāti bhikkhūsu uṭṭhāya tattha tattha gatesu antosīmāyayeva ohīne ekabhikkhumhi vā asatiyā bahisīmaṃ gatena saritakkhaṇe attanā saddhiṃ gacchante tassāyeva parisāya parivāsadāne sammukhībhūte puggale vā āgantukabhikkhu ce, tassa vā santike ārocetvā vattaṃ nikkhipitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kathaṃ nikkhipe’ti āha‘‘nikkhipāmī’’tiādi.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘nikkhipāmī’’ti etaṃ paccāmasati.Taṃ vattanti attanā samādinnaṃ taṃ vattaṃ.
513. Where should one relinquish it? He says, "tatthā" (there), etc. Tattheva saṅghamajjhe vā (either there in the midst of the Sangha): either in that same Sangha in which one undertook the duty. Puggale vā (or to an individual): or, when the bhikkhus have risen and gone here and there, to one bhikkhu who remains within the boundary, or, if there is no one, to an individual who has gone outside the boundary, who is present together with oneself at the moment one remembers it, in that same assembly that gave the parivāsa, or to a newly arrived bhikkhu. It means that having declared to him, one should relinquish the duty. How should one relinquish it? He says "nikkhipāmī" (I relinquish), etc. "Tathā" (thus) refers back to "nikkhipāmī" (I relinquish). Taṃ vattaṃ (that duty): that duty that was undertaken by oneself.
514.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘ekapadenāpi dvīhi padehi vā panā’’ti evaṃ anantaroditanayo.
514. Ayaṃ nayo means "even by one word or two words," the method stated immediately before.
515-20.Pakatattoti vuccatīti saggamokkhāvaraṇābhāvena pakato pubbasarūpeneva ṭhito attā etassāti ‘‘pakatatto’’ti kathīyati.Paccūsakālasminti aruṇato purimakāle.
515-20. Pakatattoti vuccatī means, because of the absence of obstruction to heaven and liberation, the self remains in its natural, original state; therefore, it is called "pakatatto". Paccūsakālasmi means in the time before dawn.
Parikkhittavihārassāti ettha pākārādīhi parikkhittaṃ ekampi senāsanaṃ viharanti asminti katvā tathā vuccati. Dve leḍḍupāte atikkammāti yojanā. Leḍḍupātadvayassa avadhiṃ dasseti‘‘parikkhepato bahī’’ti,‘‘aparikkhittato parikkhepārahaṭṭhānā bahī’’ti ca.
Parikkhittavihārassā means, here, even one dwelling that is enclosed by walls etc., by considering "he dwells in it", is called that. "Having transgressed two leḍḍupāta" is the construction. He shows the limit of the two leḍḍupāta by ‘‘parikkhepato bahī’’, and ‘‘aparikkhittato parikkhepārahaṭṭhānā bahī’’ too.
Visuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.31) dhutaṅganiddese ‘‘majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vihārassāpi gāmasseva upacāraṃ nīharitvā ubhinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ abbhantarā minitabba’nti vuttaṃ. Idametthapamāṇa’’nti vuttattā aparikkhittassa paṭhamaleḍḍupātaṃ hoti, gāme vuttena vidhinā vihārapariyante ṭhitabhattasālagilānasālādisenāsane ce parikkhepo atthi, tattha vā, natthi ce, nibbakosassa udakapātaṭṭhāne ṭhitena mātugāmena chaḍḍitabhājanadhovanodakapatanaṭṭhāne vā senāsanato dūre cetiyaṅgaṇe, bodhiyaṅgaṇe vā ṭhatvā balamajjhimassa purisassa hatthaṃ pasāretvā attano balappamāṇena khittassa muṭṭhiyā gahitapāsāṇassa patanaṭṭhānaṃ vihārūpacāro nāma, tadeva pākārādīhiparikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃnāma. Tattha ṭhatvā tatheva khittassa pāsāṇassa patanaṭṭhānaṃ eko leḍḍupāto, tatthāpi ṭhatvā tatheva khittassa pāsāṇassa patanaṭṭhānaṃ eko leḍḍupātoti evaṃ dve leḍḍupātā gahetabbā.
In the Visuddhimagga(visuddhi. 1.31), in the chapter on the dhutaṅga, it is said, "However, in the Majjhima Commentary, even the boundary of the vihāra is taken out like that of the village, and the inside of two leḍḍupāta should be measured." Since it is said, "This is the measure here," for the unenclosed, it is the first leḍḍupāta; if there is an enclosure in the alms hall, sick room, etc., which are dwellings situated at the boundary of the vihāra according to the method stated for the village, then there, or if not, the place where the water from washing dishes falls, thrown by a woman standing at the open place for pouring water, or in the cetiya courtyard or the bodhi courtyard far from the dwelling, having extended the hand of a man of medium strength, the place where a stone grasped in the fist and thrown with his strength falls, is called the vicinity of the vihāra; that itself is called parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ, a place worthy of enclosure. Standing there, the place where a stone thrown in the same way falls is one leḍḍupāta; standing even there, the place where a stone thrown in the same way falls is one leḍḍupāta; thus, two leḍḍupāta should be taken.
Maggato okkamitvāti maggato apasakkitvā.Gumbenāti rukkhagahanena vā latāgahanena vā.Vatiyāti kaṇṭakasākhādīhi katāya vatiyā.
Maggato okkamitvā means without deviating from the path. Gumbenā means by a thicket of trees or a thicket of vines. Vatiyā means by a fence made of thorny branches etc.
Vattamādāyāti pubbe vuttanayena vattaṃ samādiyitvā.Ārocetvāti yathāvuttanayena ārocetvā.
Vattamādāyā means having undertaken the duty in the manner previously stated. Ārocetvā means having announced in the manner stated.
Nikkhipitvāti pubbe vuttanayena vattaṃ nikkhipitvā.Bhikkhūti attanā saddhiṃ hatthapāsadānatthāya āgato bhikkhu.Yassa kassacīti ettha ‘‘santike’’ti seso.
Nikkhipitvā means having relinquished the duty in the manner previously stated. Bhikkhū means the bhikkhu who has come along with himself for the purpose of giving a hand's reach. Yassa kassacī means here, "in the presence" is implied.
Ārocetvāvāti attano navakataro ce, ‘‘āvuso’’ti, vuḍḍho ce, ‘‘bhante’’ti vatvā yathāvuttanayeneva ārocetvā.Sesanti avasesavinicchayaṃ.Samuccayassāti cūḷavaggāgatassa tatiyasamuccayakkhandhakassa.Aṭṭhakathāyacāti ‘‘sace añño koci bhikkhu kenacideva karaṇīyenā’’tiādinā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102)aṭṭhakathāgatavinicchayenāpi.
Ārocetvā vā means if he is junior to himself, saying "Āvuso"; if he is senior, saying "Bhante", having announced in the manner stated. Sesa means the remaining judgment. Samuccayassā means of the Third Samuccayakkhandhaka from the Cūḷavagga. Aṭṭhakathāyacā means also by the judgment given in the Aṭṭhakathā (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102), beginning with "If another bhikkhu, by whatever reason..."
Vibhāvayeti ‘‘sace yaṃ bhikkhuṃ tattha āgataṃ passati, bhāsamānassa saddaṃ suṇāti, tassa ārocetabbaṃ. Tathā akarontassa ratticchedo ca vattabhedo ca hoti dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Sace so dvādasaratanabbhantaraṃ patvā tassa ajānantasseva pakkanto hoti, ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedo. Sace attanā saddhiṃ āgato kenacideva karaṇīyena gato hoti, vihāraṃ gantvā yaṃ paṭhamaṃ passati, tassa santike ārocetvā vattaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Evaṃ parikappitadivase puṇṇe kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ atireke ca divase vattaṃ pūretvā pariyosāne vatte asamādinne mānattāraho na hotīti saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamma vattaṃ samādiyitvākhandhakeāgatanayeneva mānattaṃ yācitabbaṃ. Anikkhittavattena caritukāmassa puna vattasamādānaṃ kātabbaṃ na hotī’’ti ettako viseso, imaṃaṭṭhakathāgataṃ vinicchayaṃ pakāseyyāti vuttaṃ hotīti.
Vibhāvaye means "If he sees a bhikkhu who has come there, or hears the sound of one speaking, it should be announced to him. If he does not do so, there is a break of the night and a breach of duty, and he incurs a dukkaṭa offense. If, having gone within twelve cubits, he departs without the other knowing, there is only a break of the night, not a breach of duty. If, having come along with himself, he has gone for some reason, having gone to the vihāra, the duty should be relinquished in the presence of whoever he sees first. Thus, on the completion of the day determined, for the purpose of removing doubt, and having fulfilled the duty even on the extra day, at the end, without undertaking the vatta, he is not eligible for mānatta; having approached the saṅgha and undertaken the vatta, mānatta should be requested in the manner stated in the khandhaka. For one desiring to wander without relinquishing the vatta, there should be no renewed undertaking of the vatta," so much is the distinction; it means he should reveal this judgment given in the Aṭṭhakathā.
Paṭicchannaparivāsakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Concealed Parivāsa.
521.Na jānatīti ettha chandavasena rasso kato.Āpattīnañca rattīnaṃ, paricchedaṃ na jānatīti bahū saṅghādisese āpajjitvāpi ‘‘ettakāhaṃ āpattiyo āpanno’’ti attano āpannasaṅghādisesāpattīnaṃ paricchedaṃ na jānāti, ‘‘mayā āpannāpatti ettake divase paṭicchannā’’ti divasaparicchedaṃ na jānāti.
521. Na jānatī here, the short vowel is made by inclination. Āpattīnañca rattīnaṃ, paricchedaṃ na jānatī means, even after incurring many saṅghādisesa offenses, he does not know the limit of his incurred saṅghādisesa offenses, thinking, "I have incurred so many offenses"; he does not know the limit of the days, thinking, "The offense incurred by me was concealed for so many days."
522.Idāni tassa pabhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘esevā’’tiādi.Parisuddhehīti sakalasaṃkilesappahānena parisuddhasantānehi upālittherādipubbācariyehi.Esova suddhantoti eso yathāvuttasarūpo suddhantaparivāso.Cūḷasuddhantanāmo cāti ‘‘yo upasampadato paṭṭhāya anulomakkamena vā’’tiādinā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena upasampadamāḷakato paṭṭhāya anulomavasena vā ārocitadivasato paṭṭhāya paṭilomavasena vā sarante ‘‘kittakāni divasāni parisuddhoti sarasī’’ti vinayadharehi pucchite ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ parisuddhosmī’’ti vuttavato tena vuttasuddhadināni pariyantaṃ katvā dinno yāva upasampannadivaso, tāva bahudivasesu netabbaṃ mahāsuddhantaṃ sandhāya itaradinānaṃ pūretabbattā cūḷasuddhanto nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
522. Now, in order to show its division, he says ‘‘esevā’’ etc. Parisuddhehī means by the Elders such as Upāli Thera and others, who are pure in mind by the abandonment of all defilements. Esova suddhanto means this suddhanta parivāsa is of the nature stated. Cūḷasuddhantanāmo cā means, according to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102), beginning with "From the time of ordination or in direct order," from the ordination platform, either in direct order or in reverse order from the day announced until he remembers, when asked by the vinaya-holders, "For how many days have you been pure?", when he says, "I have been pure for so long," having made the pure days stated by him as the limit, the lesser suddhanta is named because of the need to fulfill the remaining days in relation to the great suddhanta that should be taken to many days up to the day of ordination, is what is said.
aṭṭhakathāgatanayo veditabbo.
The method in the Aṭṭhakathā should be understood.
Mahāsuddhantanāmakoti ‘‘yo pana yathāvuttena anulomapaṭilomanayena pucchiyamānopi rattipariyantaṃ na jānāti, neva sarati, vematiko vā hoti, tassa dinno suddhantaparivāso mahāsuddhantoti vuccatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102)aṭṭhakathāyaṃniddiṭṭhasarūpo mahāsuddhanto nāma. ‘‘Ayaṃ uddhaṃ nārohati, heṭṭhā pana orohatī’’ti vuttattā ayaṃ parivāso yāva upasampannadivaso, tāva pūretabbato tato uddhaṃ nārohati. Antarāḷe attano suddhakālaṃ parikappetvā sarati ce, tato paṭṭhāya nivattanato divasahānaṃ pana hoteva.
Mahāsuddhantanāmako means the great suddhanta is named because of the nature specified in the Aṭṭhakathā (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102), "But one who, even when questioned in the manner stated, in direct or reverse order, does not know the limit of nights, does not remember, or is doubtful, the suddhanta parivāsa given to him is called great suddhanta." Because it is said, "This does not ascend upwards, but descends downwards," this parivāsa does not ascend beyond that, since it must be fulfilled up to the day of ordination. If he determines his pure time in between and remembers, then from that point there is a reversion, and there is a loss of days.
523.‘‘Aññataro bhikkhu sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpanno hoti, so āpattipariyantaṃ na jānāti, rattipariyantaṃ na jānātī’’ti (cūḷava. 156) āgatavatthumhi imassa parivāsassa anuññātattā taṃ vatthuṃ saṅgahetuṃ ‘‘āpattīnaṃ cā’’tiādiṃ vatvāpi ‘‘āpattipariyantaṃ pana ‘ettakā ahaṃ āpattiyo āpanno’ti jānātu vā mā vā, akāraṇameta’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) paṭisedhetvāaṭṭhakathāyaṃpadhānabhāvena vuttarattipariyantassa aparijānanamattameva pamāṇanti dassetumāha‘‘duvidhopī’’tiādi.Duvidhopi ayaṃsuddhantaparivāso ekaccaṃ rattiparicchedaṃ, sakalaṃ vā rattiparicchedaṃ ajānato vā vimatissa vā dātabboti yojanā.
523. Because this parivāsa is permitted in the case that comes in the text, "A certain bhikkhu incurs several saṅghādisesa offenses; he does not know the limit of offenses, he does not know the limit of nights" (Cūḷava. 156), in order to include that case, even after saying "āpattīnaṃ cā" etc., and after prohibiting "but whether he knows the limit of offenses, thinking, 'I have incurred so many offenses,' or not, this is not a cause" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102), in order to show that only not knowing the limit of nights stated as the main thing in the Aṭṭhakathā is the measure, he says ‘‘duvidhopī’’ etc. Duvidhopi ayaṃ means this suddhanta parivāsa, whether one does not know a certain limit of nights or the entire limit of nights, or is doubtful, it should be given, is the construction.
Suddhantaparivāsakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Suddhanta Parivāsa.
524.Itaropi so samodhānaparivāso tidhā matoti yojanā. Dhātusaddānaṃ anekatthattā ‘‘odhāna’’nti makkhanaṃ vuccati. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘odhunitvā makkhetvā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102).‘‘Samodhāna’’nti pakkhepo vuccati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘samodahitvā’’ti. Odhānañca samodhānañcaodhānasamodhānaṃ,taṃ yattha so parivāso‘‘odhānasamodhāno’’ti veditabbo. Arisādigaṇe antogadhattā hettha, upari ca evarūpe ṭhāne a-kārapaccayo daṭṭhabbo. Parivutthadivasānaṃ makkhanañca mūlāpattiyaṃ antarāpattīnaṃ pakkhipanañca yasmiṃ so parivāsoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenevettha ‘‘divase parivutthe tu, odhunitvā padīyate’’ti vakkhati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘parivutthadivase odhunitvā makkhetvā purimāya āpattiyā mūladivasaparicchede pacchā āpannaṃ āpattiṃ samodahitvā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102).
524. That other samodhāna parivāsa too is regarded as threefold, is the construction. Because the meanings of verbal roots are various, "odhāna" means anointing. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā says, "odhunitvā makkhetvā" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102). ‘‘Samodhāna’’ means insertion. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "samodahitvā". Odhāna and samodhāna are odhānasamodhānaṃ, that where that parivāsa is, should be understood as ‘‘odhānasamodhāno’’. Because of being included in the arisādi group, here, and above, in such a place, the a-suffix should be seen. It means that parivāsa is that in which there is anointing of the days lived and insertion of the intervening offenses into the root offense. Therefore, here it will say, "When a day is lived, having anointed, it is given." As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Having anointed, having smeared the day lived, having inserted the offense incurred later into the determination of the root day of the former offense" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102).
agghamissakā,te pubbakā etassātiagghamissakapubbako,samodhāno. Agghena samodhānaṃagghasamodhānaṃ,taṃ yattha soagghasamodhāno,āpannāsu bahūsu sabbacirapaṭicchannāpattīnaṃ divasagaṇanaggheneva pacchā āpannaāpattīnaṃ pakkhepayuttaparivāsoti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘agghasamodhāno nāma sambahulāsu āpattīsu yā ekā vā dve vā tisso vā sambahulā vā āpattiyo sabbacirapaṭicchannāyo, tāsaṃ agghena samodhāya tāsaṃ rattiparicchedavasena avasesānaṃ ūnatarapaṭicchannānaṃ āpattīnaṃ parivāso diyyati, ayaṃ vuccati agghasamodhāno’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). Missakānaṃ nānāvatthukānaṃ āpattīnaṃ samodhānaṃmissakasamodhānaṃ,taṃ yattha so parivāsomissakasamodhāno. Missakānaṃ nānāvatthukānaṃ āpattīnaṃ ekato pakkhepayutto parivāsoti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘missakasamodhāno nāma yo nānāvatthukā āpattiyo ekato katvā diyyatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102).
agghamissakā, these are earlier, therefore agghamissakapubbako, samodhāno. Agghena samodhānaṃ is agghasamodhānaṃ, that where that is, agghasamodhāno, meaning that the parivāsa is that which is endowed with insertion of offenses incurred later, only by the value of calculating the days of the oldest concealed offenses among the many offenses incurred. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "agghasamodhāno means, among the many offenses, parivāsa is given by inserting with the value of those offenses, one, two, three, or many offenses that are the oldest concealed offenses, according to the limit of nights of those offenses; this is called agghasamodhāno" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102). Missakānaṃ, of diverse offenses, samodhānaṃ is missakasamodhānaṃ, that where that parivāsa is missakasamodhāno. It means that parivāsa is that which is endowed with insertion together of diverse offenses. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "missakasamodhāno means that which is given having made diverse offenses into one" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102).
525-7.Evaṃ tividhe samodhānaparivāse paṭhamaparivāsassa visesanabhūtatāya avayavānaṃ dvinnaṃ odhānasamodhānasaddānaṃ atthānuvādena tadubhayaodhānasamodhānasarūpaṃ vidhātumāha‘‘āpajjitvā…pe… pakāsito’’ti. Tattha paṭhamassa odhāna-saddasaṅkhātassa avayavassa atthasarūpānuvādamāha‘‘āpajjitvā…pe… padīyate’’ti. Dutiyāvayavasaṅkhātasamodhāna-saddassa atthasarūpānuvādamāha‘‘purimāpattiyā…pe… bhikkhuno’’ti. Teneva ubhayatthānuvāde‘‘bhikkhuno’’ti padadvayassa,‘‘padīyate dātabbo’’ti kiriyāpadadvayassa ca visuṃ visuṃ gahitattā punaruttidosābhāvo veditabbo. Evaṃ avayavatthānuvādena vidhātabbasamudāyaṃ dassetumāha‘‘esodhānasamodhānaparivāso pakāsito’’ti. Etthachādentassa hītihi-saddo hetumhi.Esodhānasamodhānoti ettha eta-saddasambandhena ‘‘yo’’ti labbhati.
525-7. Thus, in the threefold samodhāna parivāsa, in order to determine the nature of that combined odhānasamodhāna by way of stating the meanings of the two words odhānasamodhāna which are components because of being specific to the first parivāsa, he says ‘‘āpajjitvā…pe… pakāsito’’. There, he says the statement of the meaning-nature of the component called the first word odhāna, ‘‘āpajjitvā…pe… padīyate’’. He says the statement of the meaning-nature of the word samodhāna which is the second component, ‘‘purimāpattiyā…pe… bhikkhuno’’. Therefore, in the statement of the meaning of both, because of taking the two words ‘‘bhikkhuno’’ and the two verb phrases ‘‘padīyate dātabbo’’ separately, the fault of repetition should be understood as absent. Thus, in order to show the combination to be determined by the statement of the meaning of the components, he says ‘‘esodhānasamodhānaparivāso pakāsito’’. Here, in chādentassa hī, hi-word is in the sense of reason. In Esodhānasamodhāno, "yo" is obtained by association with the word eta.
Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – āpajjitvā…pe… odhunitvā yo yasmā padīyate, purimāpattiyā…pe… yo yasmā dātabbo, tasmā esodhānasamodhānaparivāso pakāsitoti.
Here, this is the construction: because having incurred…pe…anointing, that is given, because by the former offense…pe…that should be given to the bhikkhu, therefore this odhānasamodhāna parivāsa is declared.
antarāpattiṃ āpajjitvāti paṭicchannāpattiyā parivasanto vā mānattāraho vā mānattaṃ caranto vā abbhānāraho vā hutvā kadāci aññaṃ saṅghādisesāpattiṃ āpajjitvā.Chādentassāti paṭhamaṃ āpannāpattiyāpaṭicchāditakālena samaṃ vā ūnaṃ vā kālaṃ paṭicchādentassa. ‘‘Mūlāyapaṭikassanena te parivutthadivase ca mānattaciṇṇadivase ca sabbe odhunitvā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ettha‘‘parivutthe’’ti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘mānattaciṇṇe cā’’ti gahetabbaṃ.Odhunitvāti ca mūlāyapaṭikassanavasena makkhetvā, adivase katvāti adhippāyo.
antarāpattiṃ āpajjitvā means having incurred another saṅghādisesa offense sometimes while undergoing parivāsa for a concealed offense, or being eligible for mānatta, or while practicing mānatta, or being eligible for reinstatement. Chādentassā means concealing for a time equal to or less than the time concealed by the offense incurred first. Because of the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "Having anointed all the days lived and the days of practicing mānatta by the reversal of the root (offense)" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102), here, because ‘‘parivutthe’’ is indicative, "mānattaciṇṇe cā" should be taken. Odhunitvā means having smeared by way of reversing to the root, with the intention of making it a non-day.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘saṭṭhivassāni parivasitvā mānattāraho hutvāpi hi ekadivasaṃ antarāpattiṃ paṭicchādetvā punapi saṭṭhivassāni parivāsāraho hotī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102).
In the Aṭṭhakathā, "Even after undergoing parivāsa for sixty years and being eligible for mānatta, if he conceals an intervening offense even for one day, again he is eligible for parivāsa for sixty years" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102).
Purimāpattiyāti tena āpannāsu sambahulāsu āpattīsu sabbāpattīnaṃ puretarameva paṭicchannāya āpattiyā.Mūladivaseti paṭhamaṃ vītikkamadivase.Vinicchiteti ‘‘asukasaṃvacchare asukamāse asukadivase’’ti niyamite.Samodhāyapakkhipitvā dātabboti sambandho.Vidhānato yācamānassāti vidhānato saṅghena dātabboti yojetabbaṃ,samuccayakkhandhakevuttena vidhinā yācamānassa tattheva vuttavidhinā saṅghena dātabboti attho. ‘‘Eso odhānasamodhānaparivāso’’ti padacchedo.
Purimāpattiyā means by the offense that was concealed earlier than all the offenses among the many offenses incurred by him. Mūladivase means on the first day of transgression. Vinicchite means determined, "in such and such a year, such and such a month, such and such a day." Samodhāya is related to "having inserted, it should be given." Vidhānato yācamānassā means it should be connected, "when requesting according to the procedure, it should be given by the saṅgha according to the procedure stated," meaning it should be given by the saṅgha according to the procedure stated there, when requesting according to the procedure stated in the samuccayakkhandhaka. "Eso odhānasamodhānaparivāso" is the word division.
528-9.Tathā vuccatīti sambandho.Tāsaṃ agghavasena hītihi-saddo hetumhi.‘‘Soti taṃsaddasambandhena ‘‘yo’’ti labbhati. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – sambahulā…pe… tāsaṃ agghavasena tato ūnapaṭicchannānaṃ āpattīnaṃ samodhāya yo yasmā padātabbo parivāso, tasmā so yathā avayavatthavasena ‘‘odhānasamodhāno’’ti parivāso vutto, tathā ‘‘agghasamodhāno’’ti vuccatīti.
528-9. Thus it is called, is the connection. Tāsaṃ agghavasena hī means hi-word is in the sense of reason. ‘‘So means "yo" is obtained by association with the word taṃ. Here, this is the construction: because having inserted with the value of those (offenses), parivāsa that should be given to one who (has) offenses with less concealment than those (offenses), therefore, just as parivāsa called "odhānasamodhāno" was stated according to the component words, so it is called "agghasamodhāno".
sambahulāsūti yāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ parivasitukāmo, tāsu sambahulāsu āpattīsu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.‘‘Ekā vā’’tiādi niddhāriyaniddeso.Tāsaṃāpattīnaṃ.Agghavasenāti gaṇanavasena, rattiparicchedavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tāsaṃ rattiparicchedavasenā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). ‘‘Padātabbo’’ti iminā sambandho.Tatoti cirapaṭicchannāpattito.Ūnapaṭicchannānaṃ āpattīnanti ettha upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, ūnapaṭicchannāyo āpattiyo samodhāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
sambahulāsū means among those many offenses for which he desires to undergo parivāsa, in the determination. ‘‘Ekā vā’’ etc., is the designation of what is determined. Tāsaṃ means of those offenses. Agghavasenā means by way of calculation, it means by way of the limit of nights. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "by way of the limit of nights of those offenses" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102). It is related to "Padātabbo". Tato means than the oldest concealed offense. Ūnapaṭicchannānaṃ āpattīna means here, the genitive case is in the sense of usage, it means "having inserted the less concealed offenses."
530.Nānā sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni vatthūni yāsaṃ tānānāvatthukā,nānāvatthukā saññā yāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ tānānāvatthukasaññāyo. Sabbāti ettha ‘‘yā’’ti seso, sukkavissaṭṭhiādikuladūsanāvasānā yā sabbā terasa saṅghādisesā āpattiyoti attho.Tā sabbāti ettha pi-saddo vattabbo.Dātabboti ettha ‘‘parivāso’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tā sabbāpi ekato katvā dātabbo parivāsoti yojanā. Tassa terasa saṅghādisesāpattiyopi ekato katvāti attho. ‘‘Ahaṃ bhante sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ…pe… ekaṃ kuladūsakaṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ samodhānaparivāsaṃ yācāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ yācanāya ca tadanurūpāya ñattiyā ca kammavācāsu ca nāmaṃ vatvā dātabbaparivāsomissako mato‘‘missakasamodhānaparivāso’’ti ñāto. Dve, tisso, catasso, atirekā ca āpannassāpi parivāsaṃ dentena iminā niyāmena vatthuṃ, nāmaṃ visesetvā gahetabbaṃ.
530. The things consisting of seminal emission etc., for which they are things, those are nānāvatthukā (of different grounds); the perception of different grounds for the offenses, those are nānāvatthukasaññāyo (perceptions of different grounds). In sabbā, "yā" is understood, meaning all thirteen Saṅghādisesa offenses, ending with defiling a family, whatever they are. The word pi should be mentioned in tā sabbā. Having brought "parivāsa" to be connected in dātabbo (should be given). The construction is: having made all of them together, parivāsa should be given. The meaning is: having made even those thirteen Saṅghādisesa offenses together. "Venerable sir, I have committed many Saṅghādisesa offenses, one seminal emission…pe…one defiling of a family, therefore, venerable sir, I ask the Sangha for samodhāna-parivāsa for those offenses," by this request three times and by the corresponding ñatti and kammavācās, the parivāsa to be given mentioning the name is considered missako (mixed), known as "missakasamodhānaparivāsa" (mixed samodhāna-parivāsa). Even to one who has committed two, three, four, or more offenses, when giving parivāsa, the ground and name should be specified and taken according to this rule.
Samodhānaparivāsakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Samodhānaparivāsakathā.
531.Parivutthaparivāsassāti tividhe parivāse aññatarassa vasena parivutthaparivāsassa.Uttari cha rattiyoti parivāsato uttari cha rattiyo, cha divaseti vuttaṃ hoti, ‘‘caritu’’nti seso, caraṇakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Mānattaṃ deyyanti yojanā, ‘‘saṅghenā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.Samuccayakkhandhakevuttanayena yojetvā chārattañca dātabbo, bhikkhumānanavidhi bhikkhussa dātabboti attho.
531. Parivutthaparivāsassa: To one who has lived the parivāsa according to one of the three kinds of parivāsa. Uttari cha rattiyo: Six nights in addition to the parivāsa, which means six days; "carituṃ" (to live) is understood; the word expressing purpose is in absolute connection with the act of living. Mānatta should be given, this is obtained from the capability of "by the Sangha". The meaning is that, having connected and combined according to the method stated in the Samuccayakkhandhaka, six nights should be given, the method of mānatta that should be given to the bhikkhu.
pāḷiyaṃvuttattā tampi gahetvā ‘‘tidhā’’ti kasmā na vuttanti? Tampi paṭicchannāpattiyā parivutthaparivāsasseva dātabbamānattanti paṭicchannamānattavacaneneva saṅgahitattā visuṃ na vuttaṃ. Teneva catubbidhe mānatte imehi dvīhi vinā dassetabbesu dvīsu mānattesu pakkhamānattamattaṃ ‘‘chādentiyā’’tiādigāthāya dassetvā samodhānamānattaṃ visuṃ na dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Why isn't "tidhā" (in three ways) stated, having taken that also since it is stated pāḷiyaṃ? Because that mānatta that should be given to one who has lived the parivāsa for the covered offense is included by the statement of the covered mānatta, it is not stated separately. Therefore, in the fourfold mānatta, having shown only pakkha-mānatta in the two mānatta that should be shown without these two, "chādentiyā" etc. in the verse, the samodhāna-mānatta is not shown separately, this should be seen.
534-6.Viniddiṭṭhappakāranti ‘‘parikkhittavihārassā’’tiādinā yathāvuttagāthādvayena niddiṭṭhappakāraṃ.Ādiyitvāna taṃtesanti ettha ‘‘santike’’ti vakkhamānato labbhati.Tesaṃcatunnaṃ sammukhā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā taṃ vattaṃ samādiyitvāti attho. ‘‘Taṃ tesaṃ santike’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ārocetvā’’ti imināpi yujjati. Tesameva sammukhā nisinnena ‘‘ahaṃ bhante ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhi’’ntiādinā nayenasamuccayakkhandhakāgataṃ ārocanaṃ katvā. Iminā antoaruṇe diṭṭhānaṃ aññesampi ārocanaṃ upalakkhitaṃ.
534-6. Viniddiṭṭhappakāraṃ: The manner specified by the two verses stated as "parikkhittavihārassā" etc. Ādiyitvāna taṃ tesaṃ: Here, "santike" (in the presence) is obtained from what will be said next. Having sat down in the squatting position in front of those four, having raised the joined palms, having undertaken that vatta. This "taṃ tesaṃ santike" is connected to "ārocetvā" (having informed) as well. Having informed, sitting in front of those same ones, in the manner of "ahaṃ bhante ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhi" etc. the informing that came in the Samuccayakkhandhaka. By this, the informing of others seen in the dawn is also implied.
Nikkhipe santike tesaṃ vattanti ettha ‘‘aruṇe uṭṭhite’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Aruṇe uggate tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sammukhā yathāvuttanayeneva nisīditvā ‘‘vattaṃ nikkhipāmi, mānattaṃ nikkhipāmī’’ti imesu dvīsu ekaṃ vā dvayameva vā vatvā vattaṃ nikkhipe.
Nikkhipe santike tesaṃ vattaṃ: Here, "aruṇe uṭṭhite" (when dawn has arisen) should be supplied. When dawn has broken, having sat down in front of those bhikkhus in the manner stated, having said one or both of these two: "I give up the vatta, I give up the mānatta," he should give up the vatta.
537.Tassamānattassa.Ratticchedādikoti etthaādi-saddena vattabhedo gahito. Aṭṭhakathāvasena pāḷivasenāti yojanā.
537. Tassa: Of that mānatta. Ratticchedādiko: Here, ādi (etc.) includes the difference in vatta. The construction is: according to the Aṭṭhakathā and according to the Pāḷi.
538.Vīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ vaggo samūhovīsativaggo,so evavīsativaggiko. Abbheyyāti osāreyya, abbhantaraṃ kareyyāti attho.Vidhināti samuccayakkhandhakāgatakkamena.Abbhitoti saṃvāsena anto kato,pakatattoti pakatisabhāvo, āpattiṃ anāpannakālasadiso hotīti attho.
538. A group of twenty bhikkhus is vīsativaggo (a group of twenty), that same is vīsativaggiko (belonging to a group of twenty). Abbheyyā: Should draw in, should make inside, this is the meaning. Vidhinā: According to the order that came in the Samuccayakkhandhaka. Abbhito: Made inside by association, pakatatto: Of natural state, becomes similar to the time when he had not committed the offense, this is the meaning.
539.Āpattiṃ chādentiyā bhikkhuniyāti yojanā, ‘‘āpajjitvā’’ti seso, āpattiṃ āpajjitvā ‘‘āpatti cā’’tiādinā (vi. vi. 505) nayena pubbe dassitehi dasahi aṅgehi paṭicchādentiyā bhikkhuniyā attano āpattiṃ chādentiyā bhikkhuniyā.Na ca āpattīti ettha‘‘attano’’ti iminā aññissā āpattiṃ paṭicchādentiyā vajjapaṭicchādikāsaṅkhātapārājikāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti.‘‘Bhikkhuniyā’’ti iminā bhikkhussa dukkaṭāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti.
539. The construction is: by the bhikkhuni who conceals an offense, "āpajjitvā" (having committed) is understood, having committed the offense, by the bhikkhuni concealing her own offense by the ten factors previously shown in the manner of "āpatti cā" etc. (vi. vi. 505). Here, by ‘‘attano’’ (her own), it is indicated that it is a Pārājika offense called vajjapaṭicchādikā for concealing the offense of another. By ‘‘Bhikkhuniyā’’ (by a bhikkhuni), it indicates the state of a Dukaṭa offense for a bhikkhu.
541.Viruddhamatthaṃ nayati pajahatītivinayo,vinicchayo, taṃ vinayapiṭakatthavinicchayavisesavisayaṃ sammohasaṅkhātaṃ viruddhaṃ paccatthikaṃ tadaṅgavasena pajahanatovinayanayasaṅkhātaṃ tato eva atibuddhidīpanaṃ, atisayena buddhiṃ dīpetītiatibuddhidīpanaṃ,taṃ vinayatthavinicchayakaṃ ñāṇapadīpaṃ visesena jālentaṃ. Vividhehi nayehi yuttatāyavividhanayayutaṃ. Vinayanayeti vinayapiṭakassa parasantānapāpane, vinayavaṇṇanāyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
541. That which leads away the contradictory meaning is vinayo (discipline), vinicchayo (judgment); that vinayanaya (way of discipline) known as the special subject of judgment of meaning of the Vinaya Piṭaka, since it abandons the contradictory, the opposing, known as delusion, by way of its parts; atibuddhidīpanaṃ (illuminating superior wisdom), illuminating superior wisdom, that lamp of knowledge judging the meaning of the Vinaya, illuminating especially. Vividhanayayutaṃ (endowed with various methods), because it is endowed with various methods. Vinayanaye: In the leading of the Vinaya Piṭaka to the lineage of others, it means in the explanation of the Vinaya.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
The explanation of the Vinayavinicchaya.
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Saṅghādisesakathā is finished.
Aniyatakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Aniyatakathā
542-3.Idāni saṅghādisesakathānantaraṃ aniyatakathaṃ dassetumāha‘‘rahonisajjassādenā’’tiādi. Rahasi nisajjārahonisajjā,tassā assādo rahonisajjassādo, tenarahonisajjassādena,methunadhammasannissitena kilesenāti attho. Vuttañhiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘rahonisajjassādoti methunadhammasannissitakileso vuccatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.451). ‘‘Raho nāma cakkhussa raho sotassa raho. Cakkhussa raho nāma na sakkā hoti akkhiṃ vā nikhaṇiyamāne bhamukaṃ vā ukkhipiyamāne sīsaṃ vā ukkhipiyamāne passituṃ. Sotassa raho nāma na sakkā hoti pakatikathā sotu’’nti (pārā. 445)padabhājanevuttarahesu cakkhussa raho eva idhādhippeto. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ ‘sotassa raho’ti āgataṃ, cakkhussa raheneva pana paricchedo veditabbo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.444-445).
542-3. Now, after the Saṅghādisesakathā, to show the Aniyatakathā, he says ‘‘rahonisajjassādenā’’ etc. Rahasi nisajjā is rahonisajjā (sitting in secret), by the assāda of that, rahonisajjassādena (by the enjoyment of sitting in secret), meaning by the defilement associated with the sexual act. For it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "rahonisajjassāda means the defilement associated with the sexual act" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.451). "Raho is secrecy of the eye, secrecy of the ear. Secrecy of the eye means it is not possible to see if the eye is being cast down, or the eyebrow is being raised, or the head is being raised. Secrecy of the ear means it is not possible to hear ordinary talk" (pārā. 445). Among the secrets stated in the padabhājana, only secrecy of the eye is intended here. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Although 'secrecy of the ear' comes in the Pāḷi, the determination should be made only by secrecy of the eye" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.444-445).
‘‘Mātugāmassa santikaṃ gantukāmo’’ti iminā ‘‘mātugāmena saddhi’’nti idampi gahitameva. Evaṃ sāmatthiyā labbhamānapadopādānena yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho paṭicchanne āsane alaṃkammaniye nisajjassādenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Cakkhussa rahabhāvena kuṭṭādipaṭicchanne teneva methunasevanakammassa anurūpe āsane tadahujātāyapi manussitthiyā saha nisajjassādarāgena samannāgato hutvāti attho. Ettha ‘‘mātugāmassā’’ti tadahujātampi itthiṃ gaṇhātīti kuto labbhatīti? ‘‘Mātugāmo nāma manussitthī, na yakkhī, na petī, na tiracchānagatā, antamaso tadahujātāpi dārikā, pageva mahattarī’’ti (pārā. 445)padabhājanatolabbhati.
By ‘‘mātugāmassa santikaṃ gantukāmo’’ (desiring to go to the presence of a woman), "mātugāmena saddhiṃ" (together with a woman) is also included. Thus, by stating a word obtained by capability, it is said that the bhikkhu who, together with a woman, alone in secret, in a covered seat, in a suitable place, by the enjoyment of sitting. The meaning is: by the state of secrecy of the eye, in a seat covered by a wall etc., in a seat suitable for that same act of sexual intercourse, being associated with the enjoyment-desire while sitting together with a human woman even newly born. Here, how is it obtained that "mātugāmassa" includes even a newly born woman? It is obtained from the padabhājana, "mātugāmo means a human woman, not a female yaksha, not a female peta, not a female animal, at least even a newly born girl, what to say of an older woman" (pārā. 445).
‘‘Nivāsetī’’ti iminā ‘‘kāyabandhanaṃ bandhati, cīvaraṃ pārupatī’’ti idaṃ lakkhīyati.Sabbatthāti yathāvuttaṃ payogato pubbāparapayoge saṅgaṇhāti. Teneva‘‘payoge ca payoge cā’’ti vicchāpayogo kato. Nisīdato cassa dukkaṭanti yojanā. ‘‘Ubhinnampi nisajjāya pācittiya’’nti vakkhamānattā dukkaṭaṃ sandhāya ekakassa nisīdatoti gahetabbaṃ.
By ‘‘Nivāsetī’’ (dresses), "kāyabandhanaṃ bandhati, cīvaraṃ pārupatī" (ties the body-band, puts on the robe) is indicated. Sabbattha (everywhere) includes the previously mentioned earlier and later usage in the application. Therefore, ‘‘payoge ca payoge cā’’ (in each application) is the separation of uses that is done. Dukaṭa for one who sits down, this is the construction. Since it will be said "pācittiya for the sitting of both," it should be taken that it is dukaṭa for one who sits down alone.
544.Nisajjāyaubhinnampīti ettha ‘‘saki’’nti seso, ubhinnaṃ nisajjāpūraṇavasena aññamaññassa pure vā pacchā vā ekakkhaṇe vā mātugāmassa vā bhikkhussa vā ekavāraṃ nisajjāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃpāḷiyaṃ‘‘mātugāme nisinne bhikkhu upanisinno vā hotī’’tiādi (pārā. 445). Hoti pācittiyanti yojanā. Payogagaṇanāya ca honti pācittiyānīti gahetabbaṃ, mātugāmassa vā bhikkhuno vā ubhinnaṃ vā uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya punappunaṃ upanisīdanapayogagaṇanāya cāti attho. ‘‘Āpattīhipi tīhipī’’ti vakkhamānattāpācittiyaggahaṇaṃ pārājikasaṅghādisesānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ hoti, tīsu ekaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha‘‘payogagaṇanāyā’’ti idaṃ pārājikāya na labbhati ekapayogeneva sijjhanato. Kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādiseso, pana sarīrato punappunaṃ viyujjitvā phusanena pācittiyañca yathāvuttanayeneva labbhati.
544. Nisajjāya ubhinnampi: Here, "sakiṃ" is understood; it is said that the sitting of both, by way of completing the sitting, once for each other, either before or after or at the same moment, for either the woman or the bhikkhu. For this was said pāḷiyaṃ, "when a woman is sitting, the bhikkhu sits down nearby" etc. (pārā. 445). The construction is: hoti pācittiyaṃ (there is a pācittiya). And by the calculation of applications, hoti pācittiyāni (there are pācittiyas) should be taken; the meaning is that there are pācittiyas by the calculation of applications of sitting down again and again, getting up and getting up, either by the woman or the bhikkhu or both. Since it will be said "āpattīhipi tīhipi" (by one of the three offenses), the term pācittiya is indicative of pārājika and saṅghādisesa, it is said that there is one of the three. Here, ‘‘payogagaṇanāyā’’ (by the calculation of applications) is not obtained for pārājika because it is accomplished by one application. But the saṅghādisesa of bodily contact and the pācittiya by touching again and again after separating from the body are obtained in the manner stated.
Bahūsupimātugāmesubahukānipācittiyāni hontīti yojanā. Bahūsu mātugāmesu nisinnesu nisinnānaṃ gaṇanāya ekeneva payogena bahūni pācittiyāni ca saṅghādisesā ca honti. ‘‘Payogagaṇanāya cā’’ti imassa etthāpi yujjamānattā tāsu visuṃ visuṃ uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya punappunaṃ nisīdantīsu, sayañca uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya punappunaṃ nisīdato tāsaṃ gaṇanāya āpajjitabbāpattiyo payogagaṇanāya ca bahū hontīti idaṃ labbhati. Etthāpi pana pārājikaṃ na labbhati, saṅghādiseso, pācittiyañca labbhati.
The construction is: bahūsupi (even in many) women, bahukāni (many) pācittiyas are obtained. When many women are sitting, by the calculation of those sitting, there are many pācittiyas and saṅghādisesas by one application. Since "payogagaṇanāya cā" (and by the calculation of applications) applies here as well, it is obtained that, for those women getting up and getting up again and again and sitting down separately, and for him himself getting up and getting up again and again and sitting down, by the calculation of applications, there are many offenses to be incurred by the calculation of applications. But here too, pārājika is not obtained, saṅghādisesa and pācittiya are obtained.
545.Samīpe ṭhitopi andho anāpattiṃ na karotīti sotassa rahabhāve asatipi padhānabhūtassa ‘‘cakkhussa raho’’ti imassa aṅgassa vijjamānattā vuttaṃ‘‘antodvādasahatthake’’ti, iminā savanūpacāre vijjamānepīti vuttaṃ hoti. Itthīnaṃ tu satampi ca na karoti anāpattinti yojanā, viññuno purisassa asannihitabhāvenāti adhippāyo.‘‘Itthīnampi satampi cā’’ti likhanti, tatopi ayameva pāṭho sundaro.Pi-saddo vā tu-saddatthe daṭṭhabbo.
545. Even an blind man standing nearby does not commit an offense, since the limb of "cakkhussa raho" (secrecy of the eye), which is principal, is present even in the absence of secrecy of the ear, therefore, having said ‘‘antodvādasahatthake’’ (within twelve cubits), it is said that it is present even in the vicinity of hearing. But he does not commit an offense even if the women are nearby, this is the construction; the meaning is by the absence of a discerning man. They write ‘‘Itthīnampi satampi cā’’ (and even if the women are nearby), but this reading itself is more beautiful. The word Pi- should be seen in the sense of the word tu.
546.Nipajjitvāti ettha ‘‘samīpe’’ti seso, ‘‘niddāyantopī’’ti etassa visesakena‘‘nipajjitvā’’ti iminā nisīditvā niddāyantoti imassa nivattitattā samīpe nisīditvā niddāyantopi anandho manussapuriso anāpattiṃ karotīti labbhati.‘‘Kevala’’nti visesanena balavaniddūpagato gahitoti tathā ahutvā antarantarā āpannāpanne vinicchinitvā pavattamānāya kapiniddāya niddāyantopi anāpattiṃ karotīti ayamattho labbhati. ‘‘Pihitadvāragabbhassā’’ti vattabbe majjhapadalopīsamāsavasena‘‘pihitagabbhassā’’ti vuttaṃ.‘‘Dvāre’’ti iminā dvārekadesabhūtaṃ ummāraṃ vā taṃsamīpaṃ vā upacārena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sace gabbho pihitadvāro na hoti, anāpattīti byatirekato dassitaṃ.
546. Here, in Nipajjitvā (lying down), "samīpe" (nearby) is understood; by ‘‘nipajjitvā’’ (lying down), which is the qualifier of "niddāyantopi" (even if sleeping), since "nisīditvā niddāyanto" (sleeping while sitting) is prevented, it is obtained that even a human male who is not blind, sleeping nearby, does not commit an offense. By the qualifier ‘‘Kevala’’ (mere), one overcome by heavy sleep is included, and thus, even one sleeping with the sleep of a monkey, which is not so but which is intermittent, determining what is an offense and what is not, does not commit an offense, this meaning is obtained. Instead of saying ‘‘Pihitadvāragabbhassā’’ (of a room with a closed door), by way of compound with elision of the middle term, ‘‘pihitagabbhassā’’ (of a closed room) is said. By ‘‘Dvāre’’ (at the door), it should be seen that the sill, which is a part of the door, or its vicinity, is said by way of courtesy. It is shown by way of exclusion that if the room is not with a closed door, there is no offense.
547.Imasmiṃ aniyatasikkhāpadepāḷiyaṃanāpattivāre asatipi ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ raho paṭicchanne āsane nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 285) pañcamassa acelakavaggassa catutthasikkhāpade anāpattivāre ‘‘anāpatti yo koci viññū puriso dutiyo hoti, tiṭṭhati na nisīdati, arahopekkho, aññavihito nisīdati, ummattakassa ādikammikassā’’ti (pāci. 288) vutte anāpattivāre saṅgahetumāha‘‘anandhe satī’’tiādi. ‘‘Etassa samīpe’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati. Idha pulliṅganiddesena puriso labbhati, ‘‘tenāpi abālena bhavitabbaṃ, manussajātikena bhavitabba’’nti idañca‘‘viññusmi’’nti iminā labbhati. Andhasadisaniddūpagatapaṭipakkhavācianandhapadena ‘‘aniddāyante’’ti labbhati, manāpāmanāpaṃ jānante aniddāyante manussapurise dassanūpacārassa anto vijjamāneti attho.
547. In this Aniyata training rule, even though there is no anāpattivāra in the pāḷiyaṃ, in the fourth training rule of the fifth acelakavagga, "yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ raho paṭicchanne āsane nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ" (pāci. 285) (whatever bhikkhu should sit in private with a woman on a covered seat, it is a pācittiya), in the anāpattivāra (case of no offense) of the anāpattivāra it is said "anāpatti yo koci viññū puriso dutiyo hoti, tiṭṭhati na nisīdati, arahopekkho, aññavihito nisīdati, ummattakassa ādikammikassā" (pāci. 288) (there is no offense if any discerning man is a second person, he stands and does not sit, he is indifferent to secrecy, he sits otherwise, for an insane person, for one who is at the beginning), since it is included in the anāpattivāra, he says ‘‘anandhe satī’’ etc. ‘‘Etassa samīpe’’ (nearby to him) is obtained from the context. Here, by the masculine gender, a man is obtained, and this "tenāpi abālena bhavitabbaṃ, manussajātikena bhavitabba" (he must also be not foolish, must be of human race) is obtained by ‘‘viññusmiṃ’’ (when discerning). By the word anandha (not blind), which is an opposite word for one overcome by sleep similar to a blind man, "aniddāyante" (not sleeping) is obtained, meaning with a not sleeping human male who knows what is agreeable and disagreeable, existing within the vicinity of sight.
‘‘Ṭhitassā’’ti imināpi tadeva padaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Viññumhi paṭibale manussapurise asannihitepi tathāvidhe raho āsane mātugāme āsane nisinnepi sayānepi ṭhitepi sayaṃ ṭhitassa nisajjāya abhāvā tappaccayā āpatti na hotīti attho.Arahasaññino nisajjapaccayā doso natthīti raho āsane mātugāmena saddhiṃ nisajjantassāpi ‘‘raho’’ti saññārahitassa nisīdato nisajjapaccayā anāpattīti attho. Vikkhittacetaso nisajjapaccayā doso natthīti yojanā.
That same word should be connected even by ‘‘Ṭhitassā’’ (for one standing). Even in the absence of a discerning, capable human male, in such a secret seat, even when a woman is sitting or lying down on the seat, there is no offense because of the absence of sitting on his part when he himself is standing. Arahasaññino nisajjapaccayā doso natthī: There is no fault due to sitting for one sitting in secret with a woman in a secret seat, who is without the perception of "secret". The construction is: there is no fault due to sitting for one with a distracted mind.
548.Ettāvatā pācittiyāpattimattato anāpattippakāraṃ dassetvā idāni imassa sikkhāpadassa aniyatavohārahetubhūtāhi tīhi āpattīhi anāpattipakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘na doso’’tiādi.Āpattīhipi tīhipīti ‘‘nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamāno tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabbo pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā’’ti (pārā. 444)pāḷiyaṃvuttāhi ‘‘paṭhamapārājikāpattikāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesāpattipācittiyāpattī’’ti imāhi tīhipi āpattīhīti vuttaṃ hotīti.
548. Having shown up to this point the way of no offense from merely the Pācittiya offense, now, to show the way of no offense from the three offenses that are the cause of the term aniyata for this training rule, he says ‘‘na doso’’ etc. Āpattīhipi tīhipī: By these three offenses stated pāḷiyaṃ "nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamāno tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabbo pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā" (pārā. 444) (if a bhikkhu admits to sitting, he should be dealt with according to one of the three things: either a pārājika or a saṅghādisesa or a pācittiya), it is said that it means "paṭhamapārājikāpattikāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesāpattipācittiyāpattī" (the first pārājika offense, the saṅghādisesa offense of bodily contact, the pācittiya offense).
Paṭhamāniyatakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the First Aniyatakathā.
549.Vattabbabhāvenādhikatadutiyāniyatavinicchayato paṭhamāniyate vuttavinicchayehi samaṃ vinicchayaṃ pahāya tattha avuttaṃ imasseva vinicchayavisesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘anandhā’’tiādi. Idha duṭṭhullavācāsaṅghādisesassāpi gahitattā tato anāpattikaraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘abadhiro’’ti vuttaṃ.Anandho abadhiroti ‘‘puriso’’ti idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Itthī’’ti idaṃ sandhāya ‘‘anandhābadhirā’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Evamuparipi. Tenāpi savanūpacārantogadhena bhavitabbanti dassetuṃ‘‘antodvādasahatthaṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ.
549.To explain the unmentioned specific meaning there, setting aside the explanation already given in the first aniyata, based on the principle of what should be said, and to show the specific distinction of this explanation, he says, "blind," etc. Here, because duṭṭhullavācā saṅghādisesa is also included, to show that it does not lead to an offense, "not deaf" is said. "Blind, not deaf" refers to "a man." "Not blind, deaf" should be understood as referring to "a woman." And so on. To show that it must be within twelve hatthas, he says, "standing within twelve hatthas."
550.‘‘Andho abadhiro anāpattiṃ na karotī’’ti idaṃ kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.‘‘Badhiro vāpi cakkhumā, na karoti anāpatti’’nti idaṃ pana duṭṭhullavācāsaṅghādisesaṃ sandhāya vuttanti evamettha sandhāya bhāsitattho veditabbo.
550."A blind, not deaf, does not cause an offense" refers to the kāyasaṃsagga saṅghādisesa. "A deaf or seeing one does not cause an offense" refers to the duṭṭhullavācā saṅghādisesa. Thus, the meaning expressed with reference should be understood here.
Purimāniyatakathāya avuttavisesassa dutiyāniyatakathāya vattumicchitattā ayampi viseso idha vattabbo. Koyaṃ viseso, yo idha vattabboti ce? Tattha ‘‘paṭicchanne āsane alaṃkammaniye’’ti (pārā. 444) vuttaṃ āsanaṅgadvayaṃ idha ‘‘na heva kho pana paṭicchannaṃ āsanaṃ hoti nālaṃkammaniya’’nti (pārā. 453) nisedhetvā ‘‘alañca kho hoti mātugāmaṃ duṭṭhullāhi vācāhi obhāsitu’’nti (pārā. 453) idaṃ apubbaṅgaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatra mātugāmoti antamaso tadahujātāpi dārikā gahitā, idha ‘‘mātugāmo nāma manussitthī, na yakkhī, na petī, na tiracchānagatā, viññū paṭibalā subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ ājānitu’’nti (pārā. 454) viññū paṭibalo mātugāmova vutto. Tattha ‘‘pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā’’ti (pārā. 444) tisso āpattiyo vuttā, idha ‘‘nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamāno dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabbo saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā’’ti (pārā. 453) dveyeva āpattiyo vuttā. Saṅghādisesesu ca tattha ‘‘sā ce evaṃ vadeyya ‘ayyo mayā diṭṭho nisinno mātugāmena saddhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjanto’ti, so ca taṃ paṭijānāti, āpattiyā kāretabbo’’ti (pārā. 448) kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesova vutto, idha so ca vutto, ‘‘sā ce evaṃ vadeyya ‘ayyassa mayā sutaṃ nisinnassa mātugāmaṃ duṭṭhullāhi vācāhi obhāsentassā’ti, so ca taṃ paṭijānāti, āpattiyā kāretabbo’’ti (pārā. 455) duṭṭhullavācāsaṅghādiseso ca vutto. Ettako ubhinnamaniyatānaṃ viseso.
Because it is desired to state the unmentioned specifics of the first aniyata in the second aniyata, this specific is also to be stated here. What is this specific that should be stated here? There, the two aspects of the seat mentioned, "in a concealed seat, fit for private performance," (pārā. 444) here, having negated "it is not a concealed seat, nor fit for private performance" (pārā. 453), "but it is indeed fit to address a woman with rude words" (pārā. 453) is said, which is an unprecedented aspect. There, "woman" includes even a girl born that very day; here, "woman means a human woman, not a yakkha, not a petī, not an animal, intelligent, capable of understanding well-spoken and ill-spoken, rude and not rude" (pārā. 454) only the intelligent, capable woman is mentioned. There, "by a pārājika, or a saṅghādisesa, or a pācittiya" (pārā. 444) three offenses are mentioned; here, "the bhikkhu, claiming to be sitting, should be charged with one of two offenses: a saṅghādisesa or a pācittiya" (pārā. 453) only two offenses are mentioned. And among the saṅghādisesas, there, "if she should say, 'Venerable, I saw him sitting engaging in bodily contact with a woman,' and he admits it, he should be charged with an offense" (pārā. 448) only the kāyasaṃsagga saṅghādisesa is mentioned; here, that is mentioned, and "if she should say, 'Venerable, I heard him sitting addressing a woman with rude words,' and he admits it, he should be charged with an offense" (pārā. 455) the duṭṭhullavācā saṅghādisesa is also mentioned. This is the distinction between the two aniyatas.
Tisamuṭṭhānamevidaṃkāyacittavācācittakāyavācācittavasena tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni etassāti katvā.
This is a three-source arising: having made the three sources of arising as body-mind, speech-mind, body-speech-mind.
Imehipi dvīhi aniyatasikkhāpadehi sikkhāpadantaresu paññattāyeva āpattiyo, anāpattiyo ca dassitā, na koci āpattiviseso vutto, tasmā kimetesaṃ vacanenāti? Vuccate – vinayavinicchayalakkhaṇaṃ ṭhapetuṃ bhagavatā uppanne vatthumhi dve aniyatā paññattā. Kathaṃ? Evarūpāyapi saddheyyavacanāya upāsikāya vuccamāno paṭijānamānova āpattiyā kāretabbo, na appaṭijānamāno, tasmā ‘‘yāya kāyaci āpattiyā yena kenaci codite paṭiññātakaraṇaṃyevaṅgaṃ kātabba’’nti imehi sikkhāpadehi vinicchayalakkhaṇaṃ ṭhapitanti veditabbaṃ. Atha kasmā bhikkhunīnaṃ aniyataṃ na vuttanti? Idameva lakkhaṇaṃ sabbattha anugatanti na vuttaṃ.
By these two aniyata sikkhāpadas, only the offenses and non-offenses prescribed in other sikkhāpadas are shown, no specific offense is mentioned, so why is this statement made? It is said: to establish the characteristic of vinaya judgment, two aniyatas were prescribed by the Blessed One regarding an arisen incident. How? Being spoken to by a female lay follower who has faith in such a way, if admitting, he should be charged with an offense, not if not admitting; therefore, "by whatever offense, being accused by anyone, the act of admitting is the essential factor" thus, it should be understood that by these sikkhāpadas, the characteristic of judgment is established. Then why was an aniyata not stated for the bhikkhunīs? This very characteristic is consistent everywhere, therefore it was not stated.
Dutiyāniyatakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Second Aniyata.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus, in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
The Explanation of the Vinaya Judgement,
Aniyatakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Aniyata is Finished.
Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Nissaggiya
551.Evaṃ aniyatakathaṃ dassetvā idāni nissaggiyakathaṃ dassetumāha‘‘khoma’’ntiādi.Khomanti evaṃnāmakaṃ cīvaraṃ.Khomanti gacchavisesassa nāmaṃ, tassa vākehi katacīvaraṃ kāraṇopacāravohāravasena ‘‘khoma’’nti vuttaṃ.Kappāsanti kappāsasuttamayaṃ cīvaraṃ, idampi vuttanayeneva ‘‘kappāsa’’nti vuccati.Koseyyaṃnāma kosakārakimikosaṃ, kosena nibbattaṃ suttaṃ koseyyaṃ. Idha pana tena koseyyasuttena nibbattaṃ cīvaraṃ ‘‘koseyya’’nti vuttaṃ.Sāṇanti sāṇavākasuttehi vāyitvā katacīvaraṃ. Idañca khomaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ.Bhaṅganti khomasuttādīni sabbāni, ekaccāni vā missetvā katacīvaraṃ. Idampi karaṇappakārena laddhanāmakaṃ. ‘‘Bhaṅgaṃ nāma ekā gacchajāti, tassā vākamayasuttehi vāyitvā katacīvara’’nti keci. Imasmiṃ pakkhe khomaṃ viya gahetabbaṃ.Kambalanti manussalomavāḷalomaṃ vinā sesalomehi vāyitvā katacīvaraṃ vuttanti. Idaṃ ‘‘cīvaraṃ nāma channaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvara’’nti (pārā. 463)padabhājaneca ‘‘khomaṃ kappāsikaṃ koseyyaṃ kambalaṃ sāṇaṃ bhaṅga’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.462-463)aṭṭhakathāyaca vuttaṃ sandhāyāha.‘‘Jātito’’ti idaṃ pamāṇādibhedassa vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ.Jātitoti khomādisāmaññato. Sāmaññañhi ‘‘jātī’’ti vuccati. Dīgharassathūlasukhumanīlapītādibhedabhinnānaṃ sabbesaṃ vatthāvayavānaṃ saṅgāhikakhomasuttamayatāsāmaññaṃ jātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ sesesupi.
551.Having shown the aniyata explanation in this way, now to show the nissaggiya explanation, he says, "khoma," etc. Khoma is a robe of this name. Khoma is the name of a specific type of grass; a robe made from its fibers is called "khoma" due to the conventional usage of cause for effect. Kappāsa is a robe made of cotton threads; this too is called "kappāsa" in the manner already stated. Koseyya means silkworm cocoons; thread produced from silk is koseyya. Here, however, a robe made from that koseyya thread is called "koseyya." Sāṇa is a robe woven from sāṇa fiber threads. This should be seen like khoma. Bhaṅga is a robe made by mixing all or some of the khoma threads, etc. This too is named according to the method of its making. "Bhaṅga is the name of a type of grass; a robe made by weaving threads from its fibers" say some. On this view, it should be taken like khoma. Kambala means a robe woven from hair other than human or animal tail hair. This is said referring to what is stated in the padabhājana "a robe means one of six robes" (pārā. 463) and in the aṭṭhakathā "khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhaṅga" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.462-463). "By type" is said because the distinction of measurement, etc., is going to be said. "By type" means from the general category of khoma, etc. Generality, indeed, is called "type." The general nature of being made of khoma thread, encompassing all the cloth components that are different due to being long, short, thick, thin, blue, yellow, etc., is said to be the type. Thus, in the remaining cases as well.
552.Dukūlanti evaṃnāmakaṃ rukkhavākamayacīvaraṃ.Pattuṇṇanti pattuṇṇadese sañjātavatthaṃ. ‘‘Pattuṇṇaṃ koseyyaviseso’’tiabhidhānakosevuttaṃ.Cinanti cinadese uppannavatthaṃ.Somārapaṭṭakanti somāradese uppannavatthaṃ.‘‘Somāracinapaṭaka’’ntipi likhanti, soyevattho.Iddhijanti ehibhikkhūnaṃ puññiddhiyā nibbattaṃ cīvaraṃ.Devadinnanti devatāhi dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ. Tañhi kapparukkhe nibbattaṃ, jāliniyā devakaññāya anuruddhattherassa dinnavatthasadisaṃ.Tassāti jātito chabbidhassa kappiyacīvarassa.Idaṃchabbidhacīvaraṃ yathārahaṃ anulomikaṃ vuttanti attho. Dukūlañhi sāṇassa anulomaṃ vākamayattā, pattuṇṇādīni koseyyassa anulomāni pāṇakehi katasuttamayattā, iddhijampi khomādīnaṃyeva aññataraṃ hotīti tesaṃ anulomaṃ, devadinnampi khomādīnaṃyeva anulomaṃ hoti tesaṃ aññatarabhāvato. Yathāha –
552.Dukūla means a robe made from the bark fibers of a tree of this name. Pattuṇṇa means cloth produced in the Pattuṇṇa country. "Pattuṇṇa is a type of koseyya" is stated in the abhidhānakosa. Cina means cloth originating in China. Somārapaṭṭaka means cloth originating in the Somāra country. Some write "Somāracinapaṭaka," the meaning is the same. Iddhija means a robe produced by the power of merit of an ehibhikkhu. Devadinna means a robe given by deities. That is produced on a wishing tree, like the cloth given to Anuruddha Thera by the goddess Jālinī. Of that means of the six types of allowable robes. This six-fold robe is said to be allowable according to suitability, as appropriate. Dukūla is allowable with sāṇa because it is made of bark fibers; pattuṇṇa etc., are allowable with koseyya because they are made of thread created by living beings; iddhija is allowable with khoma etc., being one of them, devadinnampi is also allowable with khoma etc., being one of them. As it was said:
‘‘Sāṇassa tu dukūlañhi, iddhijaṃ devadinnakaṃ;
"Dukūla is allowable with sāṇa,
Khomādīnaṃvasiṭṭhaṃtu, koseyyassānulomika."
553.Tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ samāhāroticīvaranti pamāṇayuttaṃ saṅghāṭiādināmena adhiṭṭhitacīvarasseva nāmattā tadeva vuccati. Gaṇanavasena yaṃ kiñci cīvarattayaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Samuddekadesopi yathā ‘‘samuddo’’ti vuccati, evaṃ adhiṭṭhitesu tīsu cīvaresu aññataraṃ ‘‘ticīvara’’nti vuccati.Parikkhāracoḷanti saṅghāṭiādivisiṭṭhanāmehi anadhiṭṭhitaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave āyāmena aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ sugataṅgulena caturaṅgulavitthataṃ pacchimaṃ cīvara’’nti (pārā. 358) anuññātaṃ pacchimacīvarapariyantaṃ katvā katākatassa yassa kassaci cīvarassa ruḷhisaññā.
553.The combination of three robes is ticīvara, because it is the name only of a robe that is measured appropriately and designated by the name saṅghāṭi, etc. Any group of three robes by numerical count should not be referred to. Just as a part of the ocean is called "ocean," so too, one of the three robes that have been designated is called "ticīvara." Parikkhāracoḷa is a general term for any robe, made or unmade, up to the limit of the border-cloth allowed, "I allow, monks, a back-cloth eight fingers long by the Sugata's finger, four fingers wide" (pārā. 358), which is undesignated by specific names like saṅghāṭi, etc.
mukhapuñchananti kapolato niccaṃ sandamānalālānaṃ puñchanatthāya anuññātassa cīvaravisesassa nāmaṃ. Nisīdanti etthātinisīdananti ca bhikkhūnaṃ attharitvā nisīdituṃ anuññātassa cīvarassa nāmaṃ.Adhiṭṭheyyāti ‘‘imaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi’’ntiādinā (vi. vi. 585) vakkhamānanayena nāmaṃ gahetvā adhiṭṭheyyāti attho.Paccattharaṇameva cāti saṅghike mañcapīṭhe sarīrasamphusanena āpajjitabbāya āpattiyā mocanatthāya tattha attharitvā paribhogatthāya anuññātaṃ paccattharaṇacīvarañca.
mukhapuñchana is the name of the specific robe allowed for wiping saliva that constantly drips from the cheeks. nisīdana is the name of the cloth allowed for monks to spread out and sit on. Adhiṭṭheyyā means it should be designated by taking the name according to the method that will be stated, "imaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi," etc. (vi. vi. 585) Paccattharaṇameva cā also the cover-cloth that is allowed for spreading and using on a saṅghika bed or bench to avoid the offense that would be incurred by bodily contact.
554.Ekāhanti vasanakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Ticīvaranti ticīvarena.Vippavaseyyāti ‘‘saṅghāṭiyā vā uttarāsaṅgena vā antaravāsakena vā’’ti (pārā. 476) vuttattā ekadese samudāyopacāravasena avayavassa vacanato tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññatarenātipi vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘vinā’’ti idaṃ paccāmasati.Adhiṭṭhāti adhiṭṭhāyāti gahetabbaṃ ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.22, 23; a. ni. 6.58) yathā, ettha ‘‘vaḷañjiyamāna’’nti seso, adhiṭṭhāya vaḷañjiyamānaṃ nisīdanaṃ tathā vinā catumāsaṃ na vaseyyāti yojanā.
554.Ekāha the word "one" is used in the sense of close association in the act of dwelling. Ticīvara with the ticīvara. Vippavaseyyā because it is said "with the saṅghāṭi or the uttarāsaṅga or the antaravāsaka" (pārā. 476), the saying of a part by the conventional usage of the whole also means with one of the three robes. "Similarly," with this, he recalls "without." Adhiṭṭhā should be taken as adhiṭṭhāya, just as "paṭisaṅkhā yoniso" (ma. ni. 1.22, 23; a. ni. 6.58) as, here, "vaḷañjiyamāna" is the remainder; the construction is, similarly, without designating a sitting cloth being used, one should not dwell away for four months.
555.Kappiyanti kappiyakāraṇaṃ nīlādivaṇṇabhedakaraṇaṃ.Kappiyanti ca kāraṇe kāriyūpacārena gahetabbaṃ.Binduṃ datvāti ‘‘nīlaṃ vā kaddamaṃ vā kāḷasāmaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 368) vuttalohamalādinā yena kenacipi maṅgulapiṭṭhippamāṇādikaṃ binduṃ datvā.Tatthāti tesu adhiṭṭhātabbesu ticīvarādīsu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Ticīvaranti niddhāritabbaṃ.Upapannanti yuttaṃ.Pamāṇenāti anantaraṃ vakkhamānena pamāṇena.Adhiṭṭhātabbanti ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā vakkhamānanayena nāmaṃ vatvā adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ.Evakārena pana nāmaṃ vatvā na vikappetabbanti dasseti. Esa nayo sesacīvaresupi. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ, na vikappetu’’ntiādi (mahāva. 358). Tasmā ticīvarādīni adhiṭṭhahantena ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā nāmaṃ vatvā adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Vikappentena pana ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭi’’ntiādinā tassa cīvarassa nāmaṃ aggahetvā ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vikappetabbaṃ. Ticīvaraṃ vā hotu aññaṃ vā, yadi taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā vikappeti, avikappitaṃ hoti atirekacīvaraṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Taṃ cīvaranti sambandho.
555.Kappiya making allowable, doing the making of the distinction of blue color, etc. Kappiya should be taken as the effect by the treatment of cause. Binduṃ datvā having placed a dot with the lohamala, etc., mentioned as "blue or mud or blackish-brown" (pāci. 368), any dot of the size of a maṅgulapiṭṭhi, etc. There among those ticīvara etc., that should be designated, the locative is used in the sense of determination. Ticīvara is to be determined. Upapanna suitable. Pamāṇenā with the measure that will be stated immediately following. Adhiṭṭhātabba it should be designated by stating the name according to the method that will be stated, "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī," etc. Evakāra shows that having stated the name, it should not be disjoined. This method applies to the remaining robes as well. This, indeed, was said by the Blessed One, "I allow, monks, the ticīvara to be designated, not to be disjoined," etc. (mahāva. 358). Therefore, when designating ticīvara, etc., it should be designated by stating the name, "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī," etc. But when disjoining, one should disjoin it by not taking the name of that robe, "imaṃ saṅghāṭi," etc., but "imaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī." Whether it be a ticīvara or another, if he disjoins it taking that name, it is undisjoined, it remains in the place of an extra robe. Taṃ cīvaranti is the connection.
556-7.‘‘Upapannaṃ pamāṇenā’’ti ettha vuttappamāṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pacchimantenā’’tiādi. Saṅghaṭitaṭṭhenasaṅghāṭi. Vatthakhaṇḍāni sibbanakammena saṅghaṭetvā katattā ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti cīvarānaṃ sāmaññanāmaṃ. Idha pana ruḷhiyā antaravāsakādivisesanāmabyatiritte cīvaravisese vattati.Muṭṭhipañcakāti ettha ekādīnamaṭṭhārasantānaṃ saṅkhyāsaddānaṃ saṅkhyeyye vattamānattā pañcasaddo cīvarappamāṇappakaraṇato labbhamānahatthasaṅkhātarataneyeva pavattati, teneva muṭṭhisaddopi uttarapadalopena muṭṭhiratane vattati. Pañcannaṃ pūraṇopañcamo,muṭṭhiyā pañcamomuṭṭhipañcamo. Muṭṭhipañcamo parimāṇametissāti ‘‘muṭṭhipañcamakā’’ti vattabbe ma-kāralopena ‘‘muṭṭhipañcakā’’ti saṅghāṭi vuttā.
556-7.To show the measure stated in "Upapannaṃ pamāṇenā," he says "pacchimantenā" etc. Saṅghāṭi by the state of being joined together. Because they are joined and made by the work of sewing pieces of cloth together, "saṅghāṭi" is a general name for robes. Here, however, it is used by convention for a specific robe that is distinct from specific names like antaravāsaka, etc. Muṭṭhipañcakā here, because number words, from one to eighteen, refer to the numbered, the word "five" operates only as the number of hatthas that can be obtained from the context of the measure of the robe, therefore the word muṭṭhi operates as a muṭṭhiratana by the elision of the latter term. The ordinal of five is pañcamo, the fifth by a muṭṭhi is muṭṭhipañcamo. What has the measure of muṭṭhipañcamo should be "muṭṭhipañcamakā" but the saṅghāṭi is said "muṭṭhipañcakā" by the elision of the ma-kāra.
Muṭṭhittikāti ettha vuttanayena saṅkhyeyye vattamānoti-saddo cīvarappamāṇappakaraṇato labbhamānahatthasaṅkhātarataneyeva vattati, teneva muṭṭhisaddopi uttarapadalopena muṭṭhiratane vattati. Tiṇṇaṃ pūraṇotatiyo,muṭṭhiyā tatiyomuṭṭhitatiyo,muṭṭhitatiyo parimāṇametissāti ‘‘muṭṭhitatiyakā’’ti vattabbe tiya-paccayalopena ‘‘muṭṭhittikā’’ti saṅghāṭiyeva vuccati. Evamuparipi.Tiriyanti tiriyato.
Muṭṭhittikā here, according to the method stated, the word ti operating in the numbered refers only to the number of hatthas that can be obtained from the context of the measurement of the robe, therefore the word muṭṭhi operates as a muṭṭhiratana by the elision of the latter term. The ordinal of three is tatiyo, the third by a muṭṭhi is muṭṭhitatiyo, what has the measure of muṭṭhitatiyo should be "muṭṭhitatiyakā" but the saṅghāṭi is said "muṭṭhittikā" by the elision of the tiya-suffix. Thus, in the remaining cases as well. Tiriya across.
Uttamantenāti ukkaṭṭhaparimāṇantena.Satthuno cīvarūnāpīti ‘‘tatridaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ, dīghaso nava vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ cha vidatthiyo’’ti (pāci. 548) vuttappamāṇasugatacīvarato ūnāpi.Pi-saddo sambhāvane, ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena tattakampi vaṭṭati, tato ce ūnaṃ vattabbameva natthīti attho. Antadvayasandassanena ubhayamajjhe yaṃ pahonakaruccanakappamāṇaṃ, taṃ gahetabbanti dasseti.
Uttamantenā ti: with the highest limit. Satthuno cīvarūnāpī ti: Even less than the Sugata's robe of the specified size, "Here, this is the Sugata's robe size: nine Sugata spans in length, measured by the Sugata span, and six spans in width" (pāci. 548). The word Pi implies possibility; even that much is acceptable with the highest limit, and there's no need to mention if it's less than that. By showing both limits, it indicates that an appropriate and suitable size in between the two should be taken.
558.Muṭṭhipañcakasaddo pubbe vuttanayenidha dīghante vattati. Muṭṭhipañcako dīghanto yassa, yasmiṃ vā pamāṇeti viggaho, dīghantato muṭṭhipañcakappamāṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Muṭṭhipañcama’’ntipi likhanti.Tiriyantatoti vitthārantato. Aḍḍhahatthoaḍḍhouttarapadalopena, so teyyo tatiyo yassa pamāṇassāti gahetabbaṃ, taṃ, aḍḍhateyyaratanappamāṇaṃ hotīti attho.Dvihatthaṃ vāti dve hatthā yassa pamāṇassāti viggaho, dviratanappamāṇaṃ vā hotīti attho. Idañca ‘‘tiriyaṃ dvihatthopi vaṭṭati. Pārupanenapi hi sakkā nābhiṃ paṭicchādetu’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469)aṭṭhakathāgatattā vuttaṃ.‘‘Sese antaravāsake’’ti idaṃ yathāvuttaparimāṇena parimitacīvaranidassanaṃ.
558. The word Muṭṭhipañcaka here refers to length, as mentioned earlier. The analysis is: that whose length is five fists, or in which the measure is such. It is said that the measurement is to the extent of five fists from the length. Some write ‘‘Muṭṭhipañcama’’. Tiriyantato ti: from the limit of the width. Aḍḍhahattho is aḍḍho with the elision of the latter term; that whose measure is the third half should be taken; that is, it is a measure of one and a half cubits. Dvihatthaṃ vā ti: The analysis is: that whose measure is two cubits; that is, it is a measure of two cubits. And this is said because it is found in the Aṭṭhakathā: "two cubits in width is also acceptable, as it can cover the navel when worn" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469). ‘‘Sese antaravāsake’’ ti: This is an example of a robe limited to the size mentioned above.
559.Ahatāhatakappānanti ettha ‘‘vatthāna’’nti seso.Ahatānaṃ vatthānanti navavatthānaṃ. Ahatato kiñci ūnāniahatakappāni,tesaṃ navavohārūpagānaṃ katipayadhotānaṃ vatthānanti vuttaṃ hoti.Saṅghāṭīti saṅghāṭināmakacīvaraṃ.Diguṇāti dupaṭṭakatā.
559. Ahatāhatakappānaṃ ti: here, "vatthānaṃ" (of cloths) is understood. Ahatānaṃ vatthānaṃ ti: of new cloths. Ahatakappāni means slightly less than new; it refers to cloths that are somewhat used but still new. Saṅghāṭī ti: the robe called saṅghāṭī. Diguṇā ti: doubled over.
560.Utuddhaṭānanti atikkantadivasānaṃ, bahukālaṃ nivāsetvā pariccattānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yāni ututo uddhaṭāni, tesaṃ vatthānanti gahetabbaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ utūnamaññataraṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitānaṃ purāṇavatthānanti vuttaṃ hoti.Cīvarānanti cīvaratthāni vatthāneva gahitāni.Catugguṇāti catupaṭṭā.Sesā duveti antaravāsakauttarāsaṅgā dve.Yathāsukhanti yathāruci.Paṃsukūlanti susānādīsu patitapilotikacīvaraṃ.
560. Utuddhaṭānaṃ ti: of cloths that have been kept for a long time after being worn and discarded, or those removed from the season. Alternatively, it should be taken as cloths removed from the season, meaning old cloths that have been kept past one of the three seasons. Cīvarānaṃ ti: only cloths that are suitable for robes are taken. Catugguṇā ti: folded in four. Sesā duve ti: the remaining two, the antaravāsaka and uttarāsaṅga. Yathāsukhaṃ ti: as desired. Paṃsukūlaṃ ti: a rag-robe found discarded in a charnel ground etc.
561.‘‘Tīṇipī’’tiādīsu ‘‘ticīvare kayiramāne sabbaṃ chinnakaṃ nappahotī’’tipāḷiyaṃāgatavatthumhi ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave dve chinnakāni ekaṃ achinnaka’’nti (mahāva. 360) ādivacanato ‘‘cīvara’’nti seso.Chinditabbanti vatthāni chinditvā sibbetvā kātabbaṃ.Pahoti ceti vatthāni chinditvā karaṇe yadi cīvarassa pahoti.Sabbesūti tīsu cīvaresu.Appahontesūti vatthānaṃ chinditvā sibbanena appahontesu.Anvādhikanti vatthe ūnātirekaṃ apanetvā āgantukapattasaṅkhātaṃ anuvātaṃ cīvarassa pariyante, majjhe ca yathārahaṃ dīgharassaparimāṇayuttaṃ alliyāpetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
561. In ‘‘Tīṇipī’’ etc., in the passage in the pāḷi where it says, "when making the three robes, all of the cut pieces are not enough", from the initial statement, "I allow, monks, two cut pieces and one uncut piece" (mahāva. 360), "cīvara" (robe) is understood. Chinditabbaṃ ti: the cloths should be cut, sewn and made. Pahoti ce ti: if the cloths are enough for making a robe by cutting. Sabbesū ti: in all three robes. Appahontesū ti: when the cloths are not enough to be sewn after cutting. Anvādhikaṃ ti: removing any excess or deficiency in the cloths, the additional patch known as anuvāta should be attached to the edge of the robe, and in the middle, according to suitability, with appropriate measurements of length and breadth.
562.Acchinnaṃ vāti yathāvuttanayena acchinnaṃ vā.Anādinnanti anādinnaāgantukapattaṃ.Ticīvaranti tīsu cīvaresu ekekanti vuttaṃ hoti.Dubbhogenāti duṭṭhu paribhogena. Yathā paribhuttaṃ nassati, tathā kiliṭṭhānaṃ dhovanādimakatvā nivāsanādinā paribhogena.
562. Acchinnaṃ vā ti: or uncut in the manner mentioned. Anādinnaṃ ti: without an unaccepted additional patch. Ticīvaraṃ ti: one each in the three robes. Dubbhogena ti: by improper use; just as something is ruined when used, similarly by wearing etc. after washing dirty things.
563-4.Kusinti āyāmato ca vitthārato ca anuvātaṃ cīvaramajjhe tādisameva dīghapattañca. Vuttañhetaṃcīvarakkhandhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kusīti āyāmato ca vitthārato ca anuvātādīnaṃ dīghapattānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Aḍḍhakusinti anuvātasadisaṃ cīvaramajjhe tattha tattha rassapattaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhakusīti antarantarā rassapattānaṃ nāma’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Maṇḍalanti ekekasmiṃ khaṇḍe mahāmaṇḍalaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘maṇḍalanti pañcakhaṇḍikacīvarassa ekekasmiṃ khaṇḍe mahāmaṇḍala’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Aḍḍhamaṇḍalanti maṇḍalassa anto nivesiyamānaṃ khuddakamaṇḍalaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhamaṇḍalanti khuddakamaṇḍala’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Vivaṭṭanti maṇḍalaṃ, aḍḍhamaṇḍalañcāti dve ekato katvā sibbitaṃ vemajjhe khaṇḍaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭanti maṇḍalañca aḍḍhamaṇḍalañca ekato katvā sibbitaṃ majjhimakhaṇḍa’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Anuvivaṭṭanti majjhimakhaṇḍassa ubhosu passesu sibbitaṃ tatheva dvimaṇḍalapattaṃ khaṇḍadvayaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘anuvivaṭṭanti tassa ubhosu passesu dve khaṇḍānī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Bāhantanti tesaṃ anuvivaṭṭānaṃ bāhirapasse sibbitaṃ bāhirakhaṇḍadvayaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘bāhantanti tesaṃ anuvivaṭṭānaṃ bahi ekekaṃ khaṇḍa’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).
563-4. Kusiṃ ti: a long patch in the middle of the robe, both lengthwise and widthwise. This was said in the Cīvarakkhandhaaṭṭhakathā: "kusi means a term for long patches such as anuvāta etc., both lengthwise and widthwise" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Aḍḍhakusiṃ ti: a short patch here and there in the middle of the robe, similar to an anuvāta. This was also said: "aḍḍhakusīti is the name for short patches in between" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Maṇḍalaṃ ti: a large section in each piece. This was also said: "maṇḍalanti is the large section in each piece of a five-section robe" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Aḍḍhamaṇḍalaṃ ti: a small section placed inside a section. This was also said: "aḍḍhamaṇḍalanti is a small section" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Vivaṭṭaṃ ti: a piece sewn by putting together two sections, a maṇḍala and an aḍḍhamaṇḍala, in the middle. This was also said: "vivaṭṭanti is the middle section sewn by putting together a maṇḍala and an aḍḍhamaṇḍala" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Anuvivaṭṭaṃ ti: two pieces of sections sewn on both sides of the middle section, which are two-section patches of the same kind. This was also said: "anuvivaṭṭanti are the two sections on both sides of it" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Bāhantaṃ ti: two outer sections sewn on the outer sides of those anuvivaṭṭa. This was also said: "bāhantanti is one section each outside of those anuvivaṭṭa" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).
pañcakaṃ,dassitappakārapañcakhaṇḍehi sibbitacīvaraṃ pañcakaṃ nāma.Ādi-saddena sattakhaṇḍādīhi sibbitacīvarānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tenevetthāha‘‘kattabbaṃ tu ticīvara’’nti. Sattakhaṇḍassa cīvarassa ekaṃ majjhimakhaṇḍaṃ vivaṭṭanāmameva hoti, tassa ubhosu passesu dve dve khaṇḍāni cūḷānuvivaṭṭamahānuvivaṭṭasaṅkhātāni anuvivaṭṭanāmāneva honti. Vuttañcetaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘atha vā anuvivaṭṭanti vivaṭṭassa ekapassato dvinnaṃ, ekapassato dvinnanti catunnampi khaṇḍānametaṃ nāma’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345).Bāhantanti dvīsu pariyantesu sibbanīyaṃ bāhirakhaṇḍadvayaṃ, tañca saṅghaṭetvā bāhamatthake ṭhapiyamānattā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’tiādīsu viya ādheyye ādhāropacāravasena bāhāti ca cīvarassa pariyantāvayavattā ‘‘anta’’nti ca vuccati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘bāhantanti suppamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ pārupantena saṃharitvā bāhāya upari ṭhapitā ubho antā bahimukhā tiṭṭhanti, tesaṃ etaṃ nāma’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Idaṃ sattakhaṇḍacīvaramevamahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃvihitanti idānipi tadeva vaṭṭati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘ayameva hi nayo mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto’’ti. Bhikkhunā kusiṃ…pe… bāhantampicāti sabbaṃ vidhiṃ dassetvāva chinnaṃ pañcakādippabhedakaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ ticīvaraṃ kattabbanti yojanā.
pañcakaṃ, a robe sewn with five sections in the manner shown is called pañcaka. By the word Ādi, the taking of robes sewn with seven sections etc. Therefore, it is said here ‘‘kattabbaṃ tu ticīvaraṃ’’. For a robe with seven sections, one middle section is called vivaṭṭa itself, and the two sections on both sides of it are called anuvivaṭṭa, known as cūḷānuvivaṭṭa and mahānuvivaṭṭa. And this was said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "furthermore, anuvivaṭṭanti is the name for four sections, two from one side of the vivaṭṭa and two from one side" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Bāhantaṃ ti: the two outer sections to be sewn at the two ends, and because they are placed at the edge of the arm after folding them together, like in "they make the couch high", by transferring the location to the located, it is called bāhā, and because it is a part of the end of the robe, it is called anta. And this was said: "bāhantanti, when wearing the robe folded to the measure of a winnowing basket, both ends placed on top of the arm stand facing outwards; this is their name" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 345). Only this seven-section robe is prescribed in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, and it is valid even now. And this was said: "indeed, this very method is stated in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā." The construction is that a monk should make a three-robe appropriate for a samaṇa, which is divided into different types of cut robes with five sections etc., after showing all the rules: kusiṃ…pe… bāhantampi.
565-6.Yathāvuttavidhiṃ avirādhetvā cīvaraṃ kappabinduṃ datvā saṅghāṭiādināmena adhiṭṭhāya paribhuñjantassa adhiṭṭhānaṃ kathaṃ bhijjatīti āha‘‘dānenā’’tiādi.Dānenāti aññassa dānena.Acchijjagāhenāti aññena acchinditvā gahaṇena.Vissāsaggahaṇena cāti attani vissāsena aññassa gahaṇena.Hīnāyāvattanenāti sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya gihibhāvūpagamanena aññassa dāne viya cīvare nirālayabhāveneva pariccattā.
565-6. How does the determination break for one who uses a robe by giving the mark of acceptance (kappa bindu) and determining it with the name of saṅghāṭī etc., without violating the method mentioned above? He says: ‘‘dānenā’’ tiādi. Dānenā ti: by giving to another. Acchijjagāhenā ti: by another forcibly taking it away. Vissāsaggahaṇena cā ti: by another taking it with confidence in oneself. Hīnāyāvattanenā ti: by going to a lower state, by becoming a householder without renouncing the training, due to having no attachment to the robe, as if giving it to another, it is discarded.
‘‘hīnāyāvattanenāti bhikkhuniyā gihibhāvūpagamanenāti evamatthaṃ gahetvā bhikkhu pana vibbhantopi yāva sikkhaṃ na paccakkhāti, tāva bhikkhuyevāti adhiṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuniyā hīnāyāvattanenā’’ti visesetvā avuttattā, bhikkhuniyā ca gihibhāvūpagamane adhiṭṭhānavijahanaṃ visuṃ vattabbanti natthi tassā vibbhamaneneva assamaṇibhāvato.
Sikkhāyāti bhikkhusikkhāya.Pahānenāti paccakkhānena. Sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ panettha sace bhikkhuliṅge ṭhito sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, tassa kāyalaggampicīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahatīti dassanatthaṃ gahitaṃ.‘‘Sikkhāya ca pahānato’’ti ca likhanti, taṃ ‘‘hīnāyāvattanenāpi, sikkhāya ca pahānato’’ti pāṭhakkame sati yujjati. Yathāvutto pana pāṭho ‘‘sikkhāya ca pahānena, hīnāyāvattanenapī’’ti pāṭhakkame yujjati. Yathā tathā vā hotu, na koci virodho.
Sikkhāyā ti: of the bhikkhu's training. Pahānenā ti: by renunciation. The renunciation of training here is taken to show that if someone remains in the bhikkhu's garb and renounces the training, even the robe attached to his body loses its determination. Some write ‘‘Sikkhāya ca pahānato’’, which is consistent if the reading order is "hīnāyāvattanenāpi, sikkhāya ca pahānato". However, the reading mentioned is consistent if the reading order is "sikkhāya ca pahānena, hīnāyāvattanenapī". However it may be, there is no contradiction.
Paccuddhārenāti cīvarassa paccuddharaṇena. ‘‘Kālakiriyāyā’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanatovināsenāti cīvarasāmikassa jīvitavināsova vuccatīti.Liṅgassa parivattanāti bhikkhussa itthiliṅgaparivattanā, bhikkhuniyā purisaliṅgaparivattanāti evaṃ ubhayathā liṅgassa parivattanena.Sabbaṃnavavidhampi cīvaraṃ.Adhiṭṭhānanti ettha ‘‘imehi aṭṭhahī’’ti seso. Vuttovāyamatthoaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tattha purimehi aṭṭhahi sabbacīvarāni adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahantī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469).Bhijjatīti pajahati. Chiddassa bhāvochiddabhāvo,tasmiṃ, chidde sati chidde jāteti vuttaṃ hoti.Ticīvaranti tīsu cīvaresu aññataranti vuttaṃ hoti. Ticīvarameva vāti gahetabbaṃ. Vuttañca ‘‘chiddabhāvena pana ticīvarassevā’’ti.
Paccuddhārenā ti: by withdrawing the determination of the robe. According to the statement in the Aṭṭhakathā "Kālakiriyāyā", vināsenā ti: the destruction is said to be the destruction of the life of the owner of the robe. Liṅgassa parivattanā ti: the changing of the sex of a bhikkhu to a woman, or the changing of the sex of a bhikkhuni to a man; thus, by the changing of the sex in both ways. Sabbaṃ ti: all nine kinds of robes. Adhiṭṭhānaṃ ti: here, "imehi aṭṭhahī" is understood. This meaning has already been stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "there, by the first eight, all robes lose their determination" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469). Bhijjatī ti: gives up. Chiddassa bhāvo is chiddabhāvo, tasmiṃ, when there is a hole, it is said that a hole has occurred. Ticīvaraṃ ti: one among the three robes. Only the three robes should be taken. And it was said, "but by the presence of a hole, only of the three robes."
567.Kīvappamāṇe chidde jāteti āha‘‘kaniṭṭhassā’’tiādi.‘‘Kaniṭṭha…pe… māṇaka’’nti iminā heṭṭhimaparicchedaṃ dasseti.
567. How big of a hole causes it? He says, ‘‘kaniṭṭhassā’’ tiādi. ‘‘Kaniṭṭha…pe… māṇaka’’ ti: with this, he shows the lower limit.
568.Ekotantupīti dīghato vā tiriyato vā ekampi suttaṃ.
568. Eko tantupī ti: even one thread, lengthwise or widthwise.
569.Jiṇṇaṭṭhāne aggaḷaṃ dentena tecīvarikena vattitabbavidhiṃ dassetumāha‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādi.Paṭhamanti chinnaṭṭhānassa chindanato pubbeyeva.Aggaḷaṃ datvāti vatthakhaṇḍaṃ alliyāpetvā.Rakkhatīti ettha ‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’nti anuvattate, ‘‘tecīvariko bhikkhū’’ti labbhati, evaṃ vatthakhaṇḍaṃ alliyāpento tecīvariko bhikkhu adhiṭṭhānaṃ rakkhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vipariyāyena adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindatīti labbhati. Paṭhamaṃ dve koṭiyo ghaṭetvāti yojanā. Majjhe jiṇṇaṃ adhiṭṭhitacīvaraṃ majjhe chindanto tato pubbeyeva dve koṭiyo ekato ghaṭetvā sibbitvā.Pacchāti koṭighaṭanato pacchā.Chindatīti majjhaṃ ubhayakoṭiṃ kātuṃ chindati.Rakkhatīti vuttappakārameva.
569. To show the procedure to be followed by a monk who owns three robes, when putting a patch in a worn place, he says, ‘‘paṭhamaṃ’’ tiādi. Paṭhamaṃ ti: before the cutting of the cut place. Aggaḷaṃ datvā ti: after attaching a piece of cloth. Rakkhatī ti: here, "adhiṭṭhāna" (determination) continues, "tecīvariko bhikkhū" (a monk who owns three robes) is obtained; thus, it is said that a monk who owns three robes, while attaching a piece of cloth, protects the determination. By the opposite, it is obtained that he breaks the determination. The construction is: after first joining the two ends together. While cutting the determined robe that is worn in the middle, after first joining the two ends together and sewing them. Pacchā ti: after joining the ends. Chindatī ti: cuts the middle to make two ends. Rakkhatī ti: in the manner stated.
570.Ticīvare kattha jātaṃ chiddamadhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindatīti āha‘‘caturaṅgulā’’tiādi. Cattāri ca aṭṭha cacaturaṭṭhaṃ,catunnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vā aṅgulānaṃ samāhārocaturaṭṭhaṅgulaṃ,tasmāti gahetabbaṃ. Caturaṅgulā aṭṭhaṅgulāti yojanā.Oranti abbhantaraṃ. Ekañca dve ca ekadve, tesaṃekadvinnaṃ,‘‘cīvarāna’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati, ekassa cīvarassa, dvinnañca cīvarānanti yojanā. Yathāsaṅkhyānuddesavasena ekassa tiriyato caturaṅgulato oraṃ, dvinnaṃ tiriyato aṭṭhaṅgulato oranti yojanā. Vākyadvayepi ‘‘chiddaṃ bhindatevā’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
570. Where does a hole that occurs in the three robes break the determination? He says, ‘‘caturaṅgulā’’ tiādi. Cattāri ca aṭṭha ca is caturaṭṭhaṃ, catunnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vā aṅgulānaṃ samāhāro is caturaṭṭhaṅgulaṃ, from that it should be taken. The construction is: four aṅgulas and eight aṅgulas. Oraṃ ti: inside. Ekañca dve ca is ekadve, tesaṃ ekadvinnaṃ, "cīvarānaṃ" (of robes) is obtained from the context; the construction is: of one robe, and of two robes. According to the order of enumeration, the construction is that for one, inside of four aṅgulas widthwise, and for two, inside of eight aṅgulas widthwise. In both sentences, "chiddaṃ bhindateva" (the hole certainly breaks) should be connected.
Ekassa cīvarassāti antaravāsakacīvarassa.Tiriyatoti vitthārato.Caturaṅgulaṃ oranti caturaṅgulato abbhantare chiddaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindati.Dvinnanti uttarāsaṅgasaṅghāṭīnaṃ.Tiriyatoti vitthārato.Aṭṭhaṅgulato oranti aṭṭhaṅgulato abbhantare. Tiṇṇampi dīghato vidatthiyā oraṃ chiddaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindatevāti yojanā. Etthavidatthivaḍḍhakividatthi gahetabbā. Evaṃ vuttaparicchedabbhantare chidde jāte tassa cīvarassa atirekacīvarattā dasāhamanatikkamitvā sūcikammaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tathā akarontena pana parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ.
Ekassa cīvarassā ti: of the antaravāsaka robe. Tiriyato ti: in width. Caturaṅgulaṃ oraṃ ti: a hole inside four aṅgulas breaks the determination. Dvinnaṃ ti: of the uttarāsaṅga and saṅghāṭī. Tiriyato ti: in width. Aṭṭhaṅgulato oraṃ ti: inside eight aṅgulas. The construction is that a hole inside a span lengthwise in all three certainly breaks the determination. Here, the vidatthi should be taken as the carpenter's span. When a hole occurs inside the limit mentioned in this way, that robe must be determined by doing needlework within ten days, since it is an extra robe. But by not doing so, the baggage cloth must be determined.
571.‘‘Nisīdanassā’’ti ‘‘nisīdanacīvarassā’’ti vattabbe uttarapadalopena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Diyaḍḍhāti ettha visesitabbā vidatthi ‘‘dve vidatthiyo’’ti ca ‘‘sugatassa vidatthiyā’’ti ca vuttasāmatthiyā labbhati. Aḍḍhena dutiyādiyaḍḍhā,dutiyaṃ aḍḍhametassāti ‘‘dutiyaḍḍhā’’ti vattabbe tiya-paccayalopena‘‘diyaḍḍhā’’ti vuttaṃ, aḍḍhadutiyāti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Sugatassa vidatthiyā’’ti pamāṇaniyamassa katattā vaḍḍhakividatthiyā tisso vidatthiyo ekā sugatavidatthi hoti. Idaṃ nisīdanacīvaraṃ dīghato vaḍḍhakihatthena tihatthaṃ, vitthārato chaḷaṅgulādhikadvihatthappamāṇaṃ hoti. ‘‘Dasā vidatthī’’ti (pāci. 533) vuttattā diyaḍḍhahatthā dasāti veditabbā.
571. "Nisīdanassa": It should be understood that this is said by omitting the last word, when it should have been said "nisīdanacīvarassa" (for the sitting cloth). "Diyaḍḍhā": Here, the vidatthi (span) to be specified is obtained by the capacity of the statements "two spans" and "the Sugata's span." Diyaḍḍhā is second plus a half, and it should have been said "dutiyaḍḍhā," the tiya-suffix is dropped and it is said "diyaḍḍhā," meaning half of the second. "Sugatassa vidatthiyā": Because of the establishment of the standard size, three spans of a carpenter's span become one Sugata's span. This sitting cloth is three hattha (cubits) in length according to the carpenter's measure, and two hattha plus six finger-widths in width. Because it is said that "ten spans" (pāci. 533), it should be understood that diyaḍḍhahattha is ten spans.
572.Catassoti etthāpi ‘‘vidatthiyo’’ti sāmatthiyāva labbhati. ‘‘Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiyā’’ti vibhattipariṇāmena dīghatoti yojanā.
572. "Catasso": Here also, "vidatthiyo" (spans) is obtained by implication. "Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiyā": it is construed to mean "in length" by the transformation of the case ending.
573.Aḍḍhaṃ teyyaṃ tatiyaṃ yassā sāaḍḍhateyyā,aḍḍhatatiyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
573. She whose half is a third is aḍḍhateyyā, which means half of a third.
574.Tato uttariṃtaduttariṃ,tassa tassa vuttappamāṇato atirekaṃ.Adhikacchedananti adhikassa pamāṇātirittaṭṭhānassa chedanaṃ assa pācittiyassa desanāyāti adhikacchedanaṃ, vuttappamāṇato adhikaṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā desetabbaṃ pācittiyaṃ.Udīritaṃvuttaṃ pāḷiyāti attho.
574. More than that is taduttariṃ, exceeding that stated measure. "Adhikacchedana": Adhikacchedanaṃ means the cutting of the extra place, the place exceeding the measure, is for the declaration of a pācittiya. A pācittiya should be declared after cutting off the place exceeding the stated measure. "Udīritaṃ" means spoken in the Pali.
575.Appamāṇenāti guṇavasena appamāṇena sammāsambuddhena.
575. "Appamāṇena": By the immeasurable, in terms of virtues, Sammāsambuddha.
576.Sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.‘‘Sabba’’nti imināaṭṭhakathāyaāgataṃ nīlādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Mahantādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ paccattharaṇacīvaraṃ vaṭṭati.
576. "Sabbaṃ vaṭṭati" (everything is allowable) is the connection. "Sabba": By this, it includes blue etc. that came in the Aṭṭhakathā. All kinds of cloths such as large etc., are allowable as a cover cloth.
577.‘‘Mukhapuñchanacoḷaṃ eka’’nti padacchedo. Ekaṃ dhovitvā yāva sukkhāpīyati, tāva aññena mukhapuñchanena bhavitabbattā āha‘‘dvepi vaṭṭanti sabbathā’’ti.
577. "Mukhapuñchanacoḷaṃ ekaṃ" is the word division. Because when one is washed until it dries, another face-wiping cloth is necessary, he says, "dvepi vaṭṭanti sabbathā" (both are allowable in every way).
579.Pamāṇato, gaṇanato ca atītātipamāṇagaṇanātītā. ‘‘Pamāṇātītā’’ti vacanena vinayadharānaṃ appamāṇaguṇataṃ dasseti, ‘‘gaṇanātītā’’ti iminā atikkantagaṇanataṃ. Pakataṃ vinaye paṭhamaṃ kataṃ buddhena bhagavatā paññattaṃ jānantīti pakataññū, vinayadharā, tepakataññuno. Aparimāṇaguṇamaṇigaṇabhūsitaupālidāsakādimahātherācariyaparamparāgatā saṅkhyāpathātītā vinayadharāti vuttaṃ hoti.
579. Those who have gone beyond measure and counting are pamāṇagaṇanātītā. By the statement "pamāṇātītā," it shows that the Vinayadharas have immeasurable virtues, and by "gaṇanātītā," it means those who have transcended counting. Those who know what has been established, what was first done in the Vinaya, prescribed by the Buddha, the Blessed One, are pakataññū, the Vinayadharas, they are pakataññuno. It means the Vinayadharas who are beyond the path of calculation, who have come down in the lineage of the great Theras and teachers beginning with Upāli Dāsaka, who are adorned with gems of immeasurable virtues.
580.Sugataṭṭhaṅgulāyāmanti vaḍḍhakiratanappamāṇadīghaṃ.Caturaṅgulavitthatanti vaḍḍhakividatthippamāṇavitthāraṃ. Vikappanupagaṃ pacchimaṃ cīvaraṃ nāma hoti.Pacchimaṃ cīvaranti parissāvanapaṭādīnaṃ visesanaṃ, pacchimacīvarappamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
580. "Sugataṭṭhaṅgulāyāma": The length of a carpenter's ratana measure. "Caturaṅgulavitthata": The width of a carpenter's span. The last cloth, which is not subject to disjunction, is called. "Pacchimaṃ cīvara": It is an adjective of cloths for straining etc., it means the measure of the last cloth.
581.Parissāvapaṭanti udakaparissāvanatthaṃ paṭaṃ.Pattatthavikanti pattakañcukaṃ.Potthakatthavikanti potthakakañcukaṃ.Ādiggahaṇena pacchimappamāṇādiṃ yaṃ kiñci paṭaṃ, daṇḍapaṭañca saṅgaṇhāti.
581. "Parissāvapaṭa": Cloth for straining water. "Pattatthavika": A bag for the bowl. "Potthakatthavika": A bag for the book. By the "ādi" (etc.) taking, it includes any cloth of the last measure etc., and a stick-cloth.
582.Adhiṭṭhātunti parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ.Ṭhapiteti anadhiṭṭhāya ṭhapite.Mahāpaccariyaṃpana ‘‘anāpattī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) āha.Natthi dosatāti doso eva dosatā. ‘‘Attano santakabhāvato mocetvā ṭhapitaṃ sandhāyamahāpaccariyaṃanāpatti vuttā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Iminā bhesajjaṃ cetāpessāmi, idaṃ mātuyā dassāmī’’ti ṭhapentena adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ bhesajjassa, mātuyā’’ti vibhajitvā sasantakabhāvato mocite adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthīti adhippāyo. Hoti cettha –
582. "Adhiṭṭhātu": To determine a parikkhāracoḷa. "Ṭhapite": When it is placed without determining. However, the Mahāpaccariya says, "there is no offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469). "Natthi dosatā": Doso (fault) itself is dosatā. "Regarding what is placed after freeing it from one's own ownership, the Mahāpaccariya says there is no offense," some say. One who places it thinking, "I will have medicine bought with this, I will give this to my mother," should determine it. The meaning is that there is no need for determination when it is divided as "this is for medicine, for my mother" and it is freed from one's own ownership. There is this here:
‘‘Yaṃ vatthaṃ bhikkhunā laddhaṃ, kataṃ mātādisantakaṃ;
"That cloth which is obtained by a bhikkhu,
Made belonging to his mother, etc.;
It is not nissaggiya, so say those who know the Vinaya."
583.Vassamāse caturoti vassāne caturo māse, adhiṭṭhānakiriyāya cattāro māse avicchedoti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Vassike cattāro māse nivāsetabbā sāṭikāvassikasāṭikā.
583. "Vassamāse caturo": Four months in the rainy season, four months uninterrupted for the act of determination, the locative case is used in the sense of continuous connection. The robe to be worn for four months in the rainy season is vassikasāṭikā.
584.Kaṇḍuṃ paṭicchādetītikaṇḍuppaṭicchādi,kaṇḍurogāturassa bhikkhuno tappaṭicchādanatthamanuññātacīvarassetamadhivacanaṃ. Honti cettha –
584. That which covers the itch is kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, this is a designation for a robe allowed for a bhikkhu afflicted with itch disease for the purpose of covering it. There are these:
‘‘Mātikaṭṭhakathāyassā, kaṇḍucchādikasāṭiyā;
"In the Mātika Aṭṭhakathā, regarding the itch-covering robe;
No lapse of time is mentioned, nor the reversing of determination.
Adhiṭṭhānapahānaṅge-su vuttattā visesato;
Because it is mentioned in the aspects of abandoning determination,
It should be examined especially by the wise, whatever the reason may be there."
586.‘‘Asammukheetanti cā’’ti vacaneneva sammukhe ‘‘ima’’nti viññāyati. Vicakkhaṇo paccuddhareyyāti yojanā.
586. By the statement "Asammukhe etanti cā" itself, it is understood that "this" is in the presence. The discerning one should reverse it, is the construction.
587.Adhiṭṭhitantiadhiṭṭhānaṃ.
587. What is determined is adhiṭṭhānaṃ (determination).
588.Iti sabbamidanti evaṃ vuttaṃ idaṃ ticīvarādīnaṃ pamāṇādisabbavidhānaṃ.Tecīvarikabhikkhunoti ticīvarādhiṭṭhānena adhiṭṭhitatecīvarikassa vinayatecīvarikassa. Tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ samāhāroticīvaraṃ,tiṇṇaṃ ticīvarānaṃ samāhāroti ‘‘titicīvara’’nti vattabbe ekadesasarūpekasesanayena ‘‘ticīvara’’nti navacīvarāni saṅgahitāni, ticīvare niyutto tecīvarikoti vinayatecīvariko vuccati. Dhutaṅgatecīvarikassāpi ticīvare idameva vidhānanti sopi saṅgayhati. Aññesu vā pana chasu cīvaresu parikkhāracoḷaṃ ekaṃ aṃsakāsāvameva vaṭṭati.Tathā vatvāvāti ‘‘imaṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā nayena vatvā.Taṃparikkhāracoḷaṃ. Parikkhāracoḷamassa atthi, tattha vā niyuttotiparikkhāracoḷiko.
588. "Iti sabbamida": Thus, all this stated, the entire arrangement of measure etc. for the three robes and so on. "Tecīvarikabhikkhuno": Of the bhikkhu who possesses three robes, who has the three robes determined by the determination of three robes, who is a vinaya tecīvarika. The collection of three robes is ticīvaraṃ, when it should be said that the collection of three sets of three robes is "titicīvara," by the rule of oneness through similarity in one part, "ticīvara" includes nine robes, one devoted to the three robes is called a vinaya tecīvarika. This same arrangement is for a dhutaṅga tecīvarika too, so he is also included. Or in the other six robes, only one reddish-brown parikkhāracoḷa is allowable. Tathā vatvāvā: Having said in that manner, in the way of "imaṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" (I determine this parikkhāracoḷa) etc. Taṃ: That parikkhāracoḷa. He who has a parikkhāracoḷa, or is devoted to it is parikkhāracoḷiko.
589.‘‘Ticīvaraṃ pana parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭati, na vaṭṭatī’’ti anuyogaṃ katvā ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469)aṭṭhakathāyavuttattā idha‘‘ticīvara’’nti cīvarattayameva vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sukhaparihāratthaṃ ekampi vikappetabba’’nti vacanato ekadese samudāyopacāravasena ekampi vikappetabbameva hoti.
589. Because after asking the question, "Is it allowable to determine a ticīvara as a parikkhāracoḷa, or is it not allowable?" it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā that "it is allowable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469), here "ticīvara" means only three robes. Because of the saying that "even one should be disjoined for the sake of easy disposal," even one must be disjoined due to the treatment of the whole in a part.
Parikkhāracoḷaṃ kātumpi vaṭṭatīti baddhasīmato bahi vasantena ekakena tecīvarikena antoaruṇe asatiyā tīsu cīvaresu hatthapāse akatesu nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ hotīti, vinayakammaṃ kātuṃ sabhāgapuggalānaṃ dullabhattā ca sukhaparihāratthaṃ tīsu ekaṃ vā sabbāni eva vā ticīvaranāmena katādhiṭṭhānāni paccuddharitvā parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhātumpi vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
Parikkhāracoḷaṃ kātumpi vaṭṭatī: For one who lives outside the boundary of the baddha sīmā, a tecīvarika alone, in the absence of the inner dawn, if the three robes are not within arm's reach, a nissaggiya pācittiya occurs, and because it is difficult to find suitable persons to perform the vinayakamma, it is said that for the sake of easy disposal, it is allowable to reverse the determination of one or all three as named ticīvara and determine them as named parikkhāracoḷa.
‘‘evaṃ cudosite’’tiādi.Evaṃ ceti evaṃ ticīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā pariharituṃ vaṭṭati ce.Udositeti imassa sikkhāpadassa anantare dutiyakathinasikkhāpade.Vutto parihāroti ‘‘ekakulassa gāmo hoti parikkhitto ca. Antogāme cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā antogāme vatthabba’’ntiādinā (pārā. 478) nayenapadabhājanāvasāne vutto, idha ca ‘‘gāmādīsu padesesū’’tiādinā nayena anantaraṃ vakkhamāno ticīvarassa pariharaṇavidhi.Niratthakoti parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhitacīvarassa tena vidhinā ticīvaraṃ apariharantassāpi bhikkhuno anāpattibhāvato nippayojanoti attho.
"evaṃ cudosite" etc. "Evaṃ ce": If it is allowable to determine a ticīvara as a parikkhāracoḷa and use it in this way. "Udosite": In the second kathina sikkhāpada immediately after this sikkhāpada. Vutto parihāro: The method of disposal for the ticīvara that was said at the end of the padabhājanā in the way of "a village belongs to one family and is enclosed. Having left the robe inside the village, one should stay inside the village," etc. (pārā. 478), and that will be spoken of immediately in the way of "gāmādīsu padesesū" (in villages etc.). Niratthako: It is pointless because even for a bhikkhu who does not dispose of the ticīvara with that method, of a robe determined as a parikkhāracoḷa, there is no offense.
590.Tappariharitumāha‘‘na’’iccādi. Na niratthakoti yojanā. Hetuṃ dassetumāha‘‘tecīvarikassevā’’tiādi. Yo ticīvaranāmena adhiṭṭhānaṃ apaccuddharitvā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā antoaruṇe cīvaraṃ hatthapāsato amocetvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, tādisassatecīvarikassevatasmiṃ sikkhāpade udositaparihārassa bhagavatā desitattāti attho. Yasmā tādisasseva tecīvarikassa udositasikkhāpade parihāro vutto,tasmā. Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ navavidhaṃ sabbampi cīvaraṃ.Parikkhāracoḷassāti parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhahitvā cīvaraṃ paribhuñjitukāmassa parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhātuṃvaṭṭati.
590. To dispose of that, he says "na" etc. "Na niratthako" (it is not pointless) is the construction. To show the reason, he says "tecīvarikasseva" etc. The meaning is that the disposal taught by the Blessed One in that sikkhāpada is only for such a tecīvarikassa, who, without reversing the determination named ticīvara, having established mindfulness, raises the dawn without releasing the robe from arm's reach. Because the disposal in the udosita sikkhāpada is stated only for such a tecīvarika, tasmā. Taṃ sabbampī: Therefore, all that nine kinds of robes. Parikkhāracoḷassā: For one who desires to use the robe having determined it with the name of parikkhāracoḷa, it is allowable to determine it with the name of parikkhāracoḷa.
591.Iminā udositaparihārassa aniratthakabhāvaṃ sādhetvā idāni ‘‘ticīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷanāmenāpi adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti imassa adhikatthassa mahākāruṇikena anuññātabhāve kiriyantarānujānanasaṅkhātaadhikavacanassa ñāpakahetubhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘adhiṭṭhetī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃyeva sikkhāpade anāpattivāre ‘‘anāpatti antodasāhaṃ adhiṭṭheti, vikappetī’’ti pāṭhe anāpattibhāve ‘‘adhiṭṭhetī’’ti ettakeneva pariyatte (pārā. 469) ‘‘vikappetī’’ti kiriyantarānujānanena pakārantarenāpi doso natthīti adhippāyassa viññāpitattāti attho.
591. Having established the non-pointless nature of the udosita disposal with this, now, to show that the fact that it was allowed by the greatly compassionate one is a indicative reason counted as the allowing of another act for this additional meaning that "it is allowable to determine a ticīvara even with the name parikkhāracoḷa," he says "adhiṭṭhetī" etc. The meaning is that in this sikkhāpada itself, in the case of non-offense, in the reading "anāpatti antodasāhaṃ adhiṭṭheti, vikappetī" (there is no offense, he determines for up to ten days, he disjoins) (pārā. 469), it is made known that the intention is that there is no fault even by another method, because it is sufficient with just "adhiṭṭhetī" (he determines) for non-offense, due to the allowing of another act by "vikappetī" (he disjoins).
592.Evaṃ karontassāti ticīvaranāmena adhiṭṭhānaṃ paccuddharitvā parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhahantassa. Idāni atippasaṅgaṃ dassetukāmassa codakassa adhippāyaṃ dassetumāha‘‘eva’’ntiādi. Mūlādhiṭṭhānaṃ pahāya kātabbappakārantarassāpi vijjamānattā ticīvaraṃ paccuddharitvā mukhapuñchanādikaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhahatopi doso na siyāti kasmā nāpajjatīti attho. Naiti atippasaṅganivāraṇe.
592. "Evaṃ karontassā": Of one who, having reversed the determination named ticīvara, determines it with the name parikkhāracoḷa. Now, to show the intention of the objector who wants to show the excessive application, he says "eva" etc. Because there is another method to be done after abandoning the original determination, why is there no offense even if one reverses the ticīvara and makes a face-wiping cloth etc. and determines it? Na (no) is in prevention of overextension.
593.Kiccavidhānatoti tesaṃ mukhapuñchanādīnaṃ attano attano kiccassa sādhanato, tādisaṃ kiccavisesāpekkhaṃ vinā taṃtaṃnāmena adhiṭṭhātuṃ na yujjatīti adhippāyo.Akiccassāti mukhapuñchanādikiccarahitassa.Adhikassāti paccuddharitvā paṭhamaṃ adhiṭṭhānassa vijahitattā atirekassa.Assāti ticīvarassa.Adhiṭṭhānaṃ tu yujjatīti dasāhaṃ anatikkamitvā parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhānaṃ pana yujjati.
593. "Kiccavidhānato": Because of the accomplishment of the respective duties of those face-wiping cloths etc., the intention is that it is not proper to determine them with those respective names without regard to such a special duty. "Akiccassā": Of what is without the duty of face-wiping cloth etc. "Adhikassā": Of the extra, because the first determination has been abandoned by reversing it. "Assā": Of the ticīvara. "Adhiṭṭhānaṃ tu yujjatī": However, determination as a parikkhāracoḷa is proper without exceeding ten days.
594.Nidhānassa mukhaṃ upāyotinidhānamukhaṃ,antaravāsakāditaṃtaṃcīvaranāmena adhiṭṭhānato atirekaṃ yaṃ kiñci cīvaraṃ yathā ṭhapitaṃ āpattiṃ na karoti, tathā nidhānassa upāyoti attho.Etaṃparikkhāracoḷādhiṭṭhānaṃ.Mahāpaccariyanti brāhmaṇatissabhaye bhikkhusaṅghaṃ jambudīpaṃ netuṃ sakkassa devānamindassa āṇattiyā visukammena nimmitamahāpaccariyaṃ nisīditvā likhitattā taṃnāmakāyaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, ‘‘mahāpaccariyādisū’’tipi likhanti.
594. The mouth, the means of storing, is nidhānamukhaṃ, just as any cloth other than what is determined with the name of underwear etc., does not cause an offense when stored, so is the means of storing. Etaṃ: This parikkhāracoḷa determination. Mahāpaccariya: In that Vinaya Aṭṭhakathā named after the Mahāpaccariya, which was built by Vissakamma on the order of Sakka, the lord of the gods, to take the community of bhikkhus across Jambudīpa in the Brahman Tissa fear, and was written while sitting on it, they also write "mahāpaccariyādisū" (in the Mahāpaccariya etc.).
595.Parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhānavidhānassa vuttappamāṇaṃ katamanti āha‘‘cīvara’’ntiādi. ‘‘Nidāne uppattito’’ti padacchedo.‘‘Cīvaraṃ paripuṇṇa’’ntinidāne‘‘ticīvaraṃ sampuṇṇaṃ vijjati, idamatirekacīvaraṃ kiṃ kātabba’’nti bhikkhūhi bhagavato ārocitavatthumhi.Uppattitoti parikkhāracoḷādhiṭṭhānassa uppannattā, anuññātattāti attho. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti ticīvaraṃ, attho ca hoti parissāvanehipi thavikāhipi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi bhikkhave parikkhāracoḷaka’’nti (mahāva. 357) etthapāḷiyaṃevaṃ vippavāsasukhatthaṃ nāmenādhiṭṭhitaticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ paccuddharitvā parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭatīti sādhanena tadekasādhanattā eva ekampi cīvaraṃ vikappetuṃ vaṭṭatīti vuttameva hoti. Tenevāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘evañca sati yo ticīvare ekena cīvarena vippavasitukāmo hoti, tassa ticīvarādhiṭṭhānaṃ paccuddharitvā vippavāsasukhatthaṃ vikappanāya okāso dinno hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469).
595. He says what the stated measure of the method of determining as a parikkhāracoḷa is, "cīvara" etc. "Nidāne uppattito" is the word division. "Cīvaraṃ paripuṇṇa": In the nidāna, in the matter reported to the Blessed One by the bhikkhus that "the three robes are complete, what should be done with this extra robe?" Uppattito: Because of the arising of the determination of parikkhāracoḷa, because it was allowed. "Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti ticīvaraṃ, attho ca hoti parissāvanehipi thavikāhipi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi bhikkhave parikkhāracoḷaka"nti (mahāva. 357) in the Pali itself, it is already said that it is allowable to reverse the determination of the ticīvara determined by name for the happiness of living apart, and to determine it with the name of parikkhāracoḷa, with the establishment that it is the only means for that, because it is the only means for that, it is allowable to disjoin even one robe. Therefore, in the Aṭṭhakathā he says, "evañca sati yo ticīvare ekena cīvarena vippavasitukāmo hoti, tassa ticīvarādhiṭṭhānaṃ paccuddharitvā vippavāsasukhatthaṃ vikappanāya okāso dinno hotī"ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469).
596-8.Ettāvatā kappiyacīvarañca tattha kattabbañca dassetvā idāni akappiyacīvaraṃ dassetumāha‘‘kusavākādī’’tiādi.Kusanti dabbatiṇaṃ.Vākanti rukkhādīnaṃ vākaṃ.Ādi-saddena phalakaṃ gahitaṃ,cīra-saddo cīvarapariyāyo, imasmiṃ kusādayo ganthetvā kate cīvareyeva vattati.Kesajaṃ kambalanti manussakesehi vītakambalañca.Vālajaṃ kambalanti assavālacamaravālehi vītakambalañca.Ulūkapakkhanti kosiyasakuṇapattaṃ. Idha pana taṃ ganthetvā katacīvarameva gahetabbaṃ.Ajinakkhipeti ajinadīpicamme. ‘‘Dhārayato thullaccaya’’nti paccekaṃ sambandho.
596-8. Having shown what is a permissible robe and where it should be made, now, to show what is an impermissible robe, he says, "Kusa grass, etc.". Kusa means dabba grass. Vāka means the bark of trees, etc. The term "etc." includes a board; the word cīra is a synonym for robe, and it applies only to a robe made by weaving together kusa grass and the like. Kesaja kambala means a blanket woven from human hair. Vālaja kambala means a blanket woven from horsehair or yak tail hair. Ulūkapakkha means the feathers of owls. Here, however, only a robe made by weaving them together is meant. Ajinakkhipe means a deerskin. "Incur a thullaccaya," the connection applies to each.
Kadalidusseti kadalivākamayavatthe.Erakadusseti erakamayavatthe.Akkadusseti akkadaṇḍe vā tesaṃ suttāni vā gahetvā katavatthe.Potthaketi makacivākamayavatthe.Tirīṭe vāti evaṃnāmake rukkhatace.Veṭhaneti sīsaveṭhane.Kañcuketi kavace.
Kadalidusse means clothes made of banana fiber. Erakadusse means clothes made of eraka. Akkadusse means clothes made by using akka sticks or their threads. Potthake means clothes made of jute fiber. Tirīṭe vā means the bark of a tree of that name. Veṭhane means a head covering. Kañcuke means armor.
Sabbanīlaketi kevalanīlake. Esa nayomañjeṭṭhādīsu.Mahānāmaratteti tanupadumadalavaṇṇaratte.Mahāraṅgaratteti satapadivaṇṇaratte.
Sabbanīlake means entirely blue. The same applies to mañjeṭṭhā, etc. Mahānāmaratte means red the color of a tender lotus petal. Mahāraṅgaratte means red the color of the satapadī insect.
599.Acchinnadasaketi acchinnā dasā yassa, tasmiṃ cīvare. Esa nayodīghadasepi.Phaladaseti phalasadisaganthitā dasā yassa, tasmiṃ.Pupphadaseti kaṇṇikaṃ bandhitvā vikāsetvā katā dasā yassa, tasmiṃ cīvareti attho.Acchinnacīvarassāti naggaṃ katvā corehi viluttacīvarassa.Etthāti kusavākādīsu, sabbanīlādīsu ca.Kiñcīti ekampi akappiyaṃ natthi ananulomikaṃ natthi. ‘‘Naggena etesu akappiyacīvaresu yaṃkiñci laddhaṃ, tena hirikopinaṃ paṭicchādetvā pacchā kappiyacīvare laddhe taṃ adhivāsetvā idaṃ akappiyacīvaraṃ pariccajitabbaṃ. Sabbanīlakādivatthesu laddhesu kappiyarajanena rajitvā, taṃ vaṇṇaṃ nāsetvā vā kappiyavatthāni ubhayapassesu alliyāpetvā, paṭicchādetvā vā nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
599. Acchinnadasake means a robe with uncut fringes. The same applies to dīghadase (long fringes) as well. Phaladase means a robe with fringes knotted like fruits. Pupphadase means a robe with fringes made by tying and spreading out the kaṇṇika. Acchinnacīvarassā means of one whose robe has been stripped off by thieves after being made naked. Ettha means in these, kusa grass, etc., and entirely blue, etc. Kiñcī means not even one is impermissible, not unallowable. "If a naked person obtains any of these impermissible robes, he should cover his shame with it, and later, when a permissible robe is obtained, he should decide on that and discard this impermissible robe. When clothes of entirely blue, etc., are obtained, they should be dyed with a permissible dye, or without destroying that color, permissible cloths should be attached or covered on both sides and worn," is said in the Aṭṭhakathā.
600.‘‘Antodasāha’’nti idaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhetī’’tiādīhi sabbapadehipi yojetabbaṃ.Vissajjetīti aññassa deti. Idha dānaṃ duvidhaṃ sammukhādānaṃ, parammukhādānanti. Paṭiggāhakaṃ disvā ‘‘idaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti dānaṃsammukhādānaṃnāma. Parammukhā ‘‘idaṃ itthannāmassa dammī’’ti dinnaṃparammukhādānaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ tvaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vā ‘‘tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vā vutte ‘‘mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti sace vadati, dānagahaṇadvayampi suddhaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ tava santakaṃ karohi, tava santakaṃ hotu, tava santakaṃ hotī’’ti dāyakena vutte gaṇhantopi ‘‘mama santakaṃ karomi, mama santakaṃ hotu, mama santakaṃ hotī’’ti vadati ce, dānaṃ, gahaṇañca asuddhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tava santakaṃ karohī’’ti vutte pana ‘‘sādhu bhante mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti vatvā gaṇhāti, gahaṇaṃ suddhaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vutte ‘‘ahaṃ na gaṇhāmī’’ti vadati, puna ‘‘dinnaṃ mayā, tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vutte itaropi puna paṭikkhipati, taṃ cīvaraṃ kassaci asantakattā dasāhātikkamenāpi nissaggiyaṃ na hotīti pacchā tesu dvīsu yo icchati, tena adhiṭṭhāya paribhuñjitabbanti sabbamidaṃaṭṭhakathāya(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ.
600. "Antodasāha" this should be connected with all the words beginning with "adhiṭṭhetī". Vissajjetī means gives to another. Here, giving is of two kinds: giving in person and giving behind the back. Giving while seeing the recipient and saying, "I give this to you" is called sammukhādāna. Giving behind the back, saying, "I give this to so-and-so" is parammukhādāna. If, when it is said, "Take this" or "Take for yourself," he says, "I take for myself," both the giving and the taking are valid. If, when the giver says, "Make this your property, may this be your property, this is your property," the receiver also says, "I make this my property, may this be my property, this is my property," the giving and receiving are invalid. But if, when it is said, "Make this your property," he says, "Good, Bhante, I take it for myself," and takes it, the taking is valid. If, when it is said, "Take this for yourself," he says, "I do not take it," and again, when it is said, "Given by me, take it for yourself," the other person again refuses, that robe, because it belongs to no one, does not become nissaggiya even after ten days. Afterwards, whichever of the two wishes, may decide upon it and use it, all this is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469, similar in meaning).
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘na hi evaṃ jānāpetvā vinayakammaṃ karontassa musāvādo hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469). ‘‘Keci ‘tathā vematikacīvaraṃ aññena vissāsena gahetvā puna dātabba’nti vadanti, taṃ na sundara’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) tattheva vuttaṃ.
In the Aṭṭhakathā: "Indeed, there is no falsehood for one who performs a Vinaya act after making it known in this way" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469). "Some say, 'A doubtful robe should be taken with another's confidence and given back,' but that is not right" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469, slightly different), it is said there.
Vinassatīti corādīhi vinassati. ‘‘Nassati, ḍayhati, acchinditvā gaṇhantī’’ti imānipi vināsappakārattā ‘‘vinassatī’’ti imināva saṅgayhanti. Tattha‘‘nassatī’’ti idaṃ corādīhi haṭaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ,‘‘vinassatī’’ti idaṃ undūrakhāyitādiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ,‘‘ḍayhatī’’ti agginā daḍḍhaṃ sandhāya.Vissāseti ettha sandiṭṭho ca sambhatto ca ālapito ca jīvati ca gahite cattamano hotīti pañcaṅgasamannāgatena attani vissāsena aññena gahiteti attho.Pakāsitāti ‘‘anāpatti antodasāhaṃ adhiṭṭhetī’’tiādinā (pārā. 469) nayena vuttā.
Vinassatī means it is destroyed by thieves, etc. "It is lost, it is burned, they take it away by force," these too, being kinds of destruction, are included by "vinassatī" itself. There, "nassatī" this is said referring to being taken by force by thieves, etc., "vinassatī" this is said referring to being eaten by rats, etc., "ḍayhatī" referring to being burned by fire. Vissāse here means taken by another with confidence in oneself, endowed with five qualities: seen, associated with, addressed, living, and pleased when taken. Pakāsitā means stated by the method of "there is no offense in deciding for ten days," etc. (pārā. 469).
601.Idaṃ pana samuṭṭhānaṃ nāmena kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti attho. Idaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma kāyavācato ca kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Atirekacīvarabhāvassa jānanacittena paṇṇattijānanacitte asatipi āpattisambhavatoacittaṃ. Anadhiṭṭhānato, avikappanato caakriyaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjanto vā cetiyādiṃ vandanto vā ekādasamaṃ aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, kusalacitto āpajjati, kalahādipasuto vā vītikkamaṃ jānanto vā uṭṭhāpeti, akusalacitto āpajjati, khīṇāsavo pana asatiyā vā paṇṇattiṃ ajānanto vā tathā karonto abyākatacitto āpajjatītiticittaṃ. Vuttanayena kammaṭṭhānādimanuyuñjantassa somanassacittasamaṅgino sukhavedanā, upekkhācittasamaṅgino upekkhāvedanā, kalahādipasutassa domanassacittasamaṅgino dukkhavedanā hotītitivedanaṃ. Esa nayo uparipi evarūpe ṭhāne yojetabbo.
601. This, however, is called the origin, meaning it is called the origin of kathina. This origin of kathina arises from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind. Because an offense can occur even without awareness of the state of having an extra robe, and without awareness of the designation, it is acitta (without mind). Because of not deciding and not resolving, it is akriyaṃ (non-functional). One who is practicing kammaṭṭhāna or worshiping a cetiya, etc., makes the dawn break with the eleventh, a wholesome-minded person incurs an offense, or one who is devoted to quarrels, etc., or knowing the transgression, makes it break, an unwholesome-minded person incurs an offense, but a khīṇāsava, doing so through unawareness or not knowing the designation, incurs an offense with an unclassifiable mind, thus it is ticittaṃ (threefold mind). For one who is practicing kammaṭṭhāna, etc., in the manner stated, there is pleasant feeling associated with a mind of gladness, neutral feeling associated with a mind of equanimity, and for one who is devoted to quarrels, etc., there is painful feeling associated with a mind of sadness, thus it is tivedanaṃ (threefold feeling). This method should be applied to similar situations above.
Paṭhamakathinakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the First Kathina Discourse.
602.Gāmādīsupadesesu tipañcasūti ticīvarāni nikkhipitvā vippavāsena dosaṃ, uppajjanaṭṭhānañca dassetuṃ ‘‘gāmo ekūpacāro’’tiādinā (pārā. 477) nayenapāḷiyaṃvuttagāmanivesanaudositaaṭṭamāḷapāsādahammiyanāvāsatthakhettadhaññakara- ṇaārāmavihārarukkhamūlaajjhokāsasaṅkhātesu pannarasasu cīvaranikkhepaṭṭhānesūti vuttaṃ hoti. Etthagāmonāma ekakuṭikādigāmo.
602. Gāmādīsu padesesu tipañcasū in order to show the fault of separation by leaving the three robes, and the place of arising, it is said, "a village is a single boundary," etc., in the manner stated in the Pāḷi, that in the fifteen places for leaving a robe, namely a village, dwelling, residence, attic, hall, palace, mansion, boat, assembly hall, field, threshing floor, park, monastery, tree root, and open space, the leaving of a robe is mentioned. Here, gāmo means a village of one or more houses.
Nivesanaṃnāma gāmato bahi catusālādiko geho. Tenāhagaṇṭhipade‘‘gāmanivesanānaṃ visesaṃ vadantā ‘puna ekaparicchedaṃ katvā nivesitā bahugehā nivesanaṃ nāma hontī’ti vadanti, tasmā idaṃ nivesanādi sabbaṃ ‘gāmato bahī’ti gahetabba’’nti. Idañca tattheva vuttaṃ ‘‘nivesanādikaṃ antogāme ce hoti, gāme vuttaparihārasseva labbhanato antogāmato bahī’ti gahetabba’’nti.
Nivesanaṃ means a house with four halls, etc., outside the village. Therefore, the Gaṇṭhipada says, "Those who explain the difference between a village and a dwelling say, 'Many houses built after making a single enclosure are called a dwelling,' therefore all this, beginning with 'nivesana,' should be taken as 'outside the village.'" And it is said there, "If a dwelling, etc., is inside the village, it should be taken as inside the village, not outside the village, since the exception stated for a village is obtained."
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘udositoti yānādīnaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ sālā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.482-487) vuttasarūpaṃudositaṃnāma. ‘‘Aṭṭoti paṭirājādipaṭibāhanatthaṃ iṭṭhakāhi kato bahalabhittiko catupañcabhūmiko patissayaviseso’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.482-487) vuttasarūpoaṭṭonāma. ‘‘Māḷoti ekakūṭasaṅgahito caturassapāsādo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 482-487) vutto ekakaṇṇikasaṅgahito caturassagehomāḷonāma.Pāsādoti dīghapāsādo.Hammiyanti muṇḍacchadanapāsādo.Nāvāti yānappatti.Satthanti jaṅghasatthasakaṭasatthavasena duvidho janasamūho, so ca niviṭṭhāniviṭṭhavasena paccekaṃ duvidho. Tattha niviṭṭhe vatiādiparikkhepopi hoteva.
In the Aṭṭhakathā, udositaṃ means "a hall for goods of vehicles, etc.," as stated in its nature (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.482-487). Aṭṭo means "a special shelter with thick walls of four or five stories, made of bricks for repelling foreign kings, etc.," as stated in its nature (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.482-487). Māḷo means "a square palace with a single peak," (pārā. aṭṭha. 482-487) a square house with a single pinnacle. Pāsādo means a long palace. Hammiyanti a palace with a flat roof. Nāvā means a means of transport by boat. Sattha means a group of people, twofold as a caravan of foot soldiers and a caravan of carts, and each of these is twofold as settled and unsettled. There, in a settled one, there is certainly an enclosure of a fence, etc.
Khettanti yavakhettādikhettaṃ.Dhaññakaraṇaṃkhalaṃ.Ārāmopupphārāmo, phalārāmo ca.Vihāroti ekampi senāsanaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Rukkho nāma yaṃ majjhantike kāle samantā chāyā pharatī’’ti (pārā. 494) vuttappamāṇaparicchannorukkho. Ajjhokāsonāma sattabbhantaro, so viñcāṭaviādiagāmakāraññe ca macchabandhānaṃ agamanapathe samuddadīpe ca labbhati.Macchabandhānaṃ agamanapathonāma udakapiṭṭhiyā gantvā puna tadaheva gehaṃ āgantuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dūro samuddappadeso vuccati.
Khetta means a field, a field of barley, etc. Dhaññakaraṇaṃ means a threshing floor. Ārāmo means a flower park and a fruit park. Vihāroti means even a single dwelling. Rukkho means "a tree which, at midday, spreads shade all around," (pārā. 494) a tree defined by the stated measure. Ajjhokāso means within seven abbhantara, and this is found in a wild forest (viñcāṭavi), etc., in a village wilderness, and on a sea island where fishermen do not go. Macchabandhānaṃ agamanapatho means a distant sea area where one cannot go on the surface of the water and return home on the same day.
Aṭṭhakathāyampivuttaṃ ‘‘ekakulassa gāmoti ekassa rañño vā bhojakassa vā gāmo’’ti ca ‘‘nānākulassa gāmoti nānārājūnaṃ vā bhojakānaṃ vā gāmo vesālīkusinārādisadiso’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.479) ca.
In the Aṭṭhakathā also, it is said, "a village of one family means the village of one king or a bhojaka," and "a village of many families means a village of many kings or bhojaka, like Vesālī and Kusinārā," (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.479).
gaṇṭhipade‘‘vihāre ekakulanānākulavohāro kārāpakānaṃ vasena vutto’’ti. Ajjhokāse pana upacārabhedo abbhantaravasena veditabbo. Vuttañcetaṃpāḷiyaṃ‘‘ajjhokāso ekūpacāro nāma agāmake araññe samantā sattabbhantarā ekūpacāro. Tato paraṃ nānūpacāro’’ti. Idha ekaṃabbhantaraṃaṭṭhavīsatiratanaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ekaṃ abbhantaraṃ aṭṭhavīsatihattha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.489). Evaṃ saṅkhepato vuttasarūpappabhedāni pannarasa ṭhānāni dassetumāha ‘‘gāmādīsu padesesu tipañcasū’’ti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana pāḷiaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanato veditabbo.
In the gaṇṭhipada, "the usage of a monastery of one family or many families is stated in terms of the builders." But in an open space (ajjhokāsa), the difference in boundary should be understood in terms of the interior. And this is said in the Pāḷi, "An open space with a single boundary is an open space in a non-village forest within seven abbhantara all around. Beyond that, it is a non-boundary." Here, one abbhantara is twenty-eight cubits. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "one abbhantara is twenty-eight cubits" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.489). Thus, to show the fifteen places whose nature and varieties have been stated in brief, he says, "gāmādīsu padesesu tipañcasū". This is the summary here, but the details should be understood from the Pāḷi, Aṭṭhakathā, and commentary.
ticīvaranti tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānamaññatarameva cīvaraṃ vattabbaṃ.Ekarattanti vippavāsakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Api-saddena kiṃ pana dirattādikanti dasseti.
ticīvara means that only one of the three robes should be spoken of. Ekaratta means using the word to indicate the extreme connection in the action of separation. The word Api shows, "What then about two nights, etc.?"
Saṅghasammutiyā vināti ticīvaraṃ pariharituṃ asamatthena gilānena bhikkhunā saṅghaṃ vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggayha ‘‘ahaṃ bhante gilāno, na sakkomi ticīvaraṃ ādāya pakkamituṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ ticīvarena avippavāsasammutiṃ yācāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ yācitena saṅghena tassa ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya dinnaṃ avippavāsasammutiṃ vināti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā laddhasammutikassa gilānassa bhikkhuno tasmiṃ gelaññe avūpasante vā vūpasantepi cīvaranikkhepaṭṭhānaṃ āgamanakāle vā uppanne aññepi roge avūpasante tāyayeva sammutiyā na doso.
Saṅghasammutiyā vinā means without the agreement of the Saṅgha, a sick bhikkhu, unable to carry the three robes, having bowed to the Saṅgha, sits in the squatting position, raises his joined hands, and asks three times, "Bhante, I am sick, I am unable to leave carrying the three robes, therefore, Bhante, I ask the Saṅgha for agreement not to be separated from the three robes," the agreement not to be separated given by the Saṅgha to him by a motion and a second announcement. For a sick bhikkhu who has obtained such agreement, there is no offense as long as that sickness has not subsided, or even if it has subsided, if another disease arises when coming to the place where the robe was left, or has not subsided, because of that same agreement.
603.Bhikkhunoti aladdhasammutikassa bhikkhuno.Tenacīvarena.Vippavatthuṃ na vaṭṭatīti vinā vasituṃ na vaṭṭati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Ekakulassa gāmo hoti parikkhitto ca, antogāme cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā antogāme vatthabbaṃ. Aparikkhitto hoti, yasmiṃ ghare cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ ghare vatthabbaṃ, hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabbaṃ. Nānākulassa gāmo hoti parikkhitto ca, yasmiṃ ghare cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ ghare vatthabbaṃ sabhāye vā dvāramūle vā, hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabba’’ntiādinā (pārā. 478) nayenapāḷiyāvuttaṭṭhānato bahi aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
603. Bhikkhuno means of a bhikkhu who has not obtained agreement. Tena means with that robe. Vippavatthuṃ na vaṭṭatī means it is not proper to live apart. What is said? "A village of one family is enclosed, and having left the robe inside the village, one should live inside the village. If it is unenclosed, one should live in the house where the robe is left, or one should not leave the hand's reach. A village of many families is enclosed, and one should live in the house where the robe is left, or in the assembly hall or at the door, or one should not leave the hand's reach," etc., in the manner stated in the Pāḷi, it is said that it is not proper to make the dawn break outside the place stated.
‘‘parikkhitto’’ti idaṃ pākārena vā vatiyā vā parikhāya vā parikkhittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Hatthapāsā vāti etthahatthapāsānāma aḍḍhatiyaratanaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘taṃ gharaṃ samantato hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ, aḍḍhateyyaratanappamāṇā padesā uddhaṃ na vijahitabbanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.477-478).
"parikkhitto" this is said referring to being enclosed by a wall or a fence or a moat. Hatthapāsā vā here, hatthapāsā means one and a half cubits. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "That house should not be left within a hand's reach all around, meaning an area of one and a half cubits upwards should not be left" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.477-478).
‘‘hoti…pe… aruṇuggame’’ti. Anuññātaṭṭhānato hi bahi cīvarena vinā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpentassa taṃ cīvaraṃ nissajjitabbaṃ hoti, taṃhetukā pācittiyāpattipi hotīti attho. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘nissajjitvā…pe… viññunā’’ti.
"hoti…pe… aruṇuggame". For one who makes the dawn break without a robe outside the allowed place, that robe has to be forfeited, and there is an offense of pācittiya because of that, this is the meaning. Therefore, he will say, "nissajjitvā…pe… viññunā".
604.Nhāyantassevāti cīvarassa hatthapāsato dūre nahāyantasseva, anādare sāmivacanaṃ.
604. Nhāyantassevā even while bathing far from the hand's reach of the robe, a word of indifference.
606.Acchinnaṃ viluttaṃ cīvaraṃ yassa soacchinnacīvaro,bhikkhu, tassa ṭhānaṃacchinnacīvaraṭṭhānaṃ,tasmiṃ.
606. He whose robe has been cut or stolen is acchinnacīvaro, bhikkhu, the place of that one is acchinnacīvaraṭṭhānaṃ, in that place.
607.Nivāsetvāti ettha ‘‘antaravāsaka’’nti cagahetvāti ettha ‘‘itarānī’’ti ca seso. Idañca gantabbaṭṭhāne, āsanne magge ca manussasambādhe asati kattabbadassanaṃ. Itarattha nivāsetvā, pārupitvā ca saṅghāṭiṃ aṃse katvāva gantabbaṃ hoti. Vihāre sabhāgesu alabbhamānesu āsanasālampi gantvā sabhāgassa santike vinayakammaṃ kattabbantiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.495 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ.‘‘Nissajjitvā’’ti iminā ‘‘idaṃ me bhante cīvaraṃ rattivippavutthaṃ aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmī’’ti saṅghe vā ‘‘idaṃ me bhante cīvaraṃ…pe… ahaṃ āyasmantānaṃ nissajjāmī’’ti tiṇṇaṃ, dvinnaṃ vā santike vā ‘‘idaṃ me āvuso…pe… imāhaṃ āyasmato nissajjāmī’’ti ekassa santike vā vatvā nissajjitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Viññunāti evaṃ nissaggiyavatthunissajjanādinānappakāravidhijānanakena ñāṇavatāti attho.
607. Nivāsetvā means here "antaravāsaka (lower garment)," and gahetvā means "other than that." And this showing of what should be done is when going to a place, on a nearby road, and when there is no crowd of people. Otherwise, having put on the antaravāsaka and having draped the saṅghāṭi (outer robe) over the shoulder, one should go. It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.495, similar in meaning) that if one cannot obtain a share in the monastery, one should go even to the āsanasālā (hall) and perform the Vinaya act in the presence of a shareholder. "Nissajjitvā": by this it is said that one has performed the act of surrendering by saying in the Saṅgha, "Bhante, this robe of mine has been separated from me overnight without the agreement of the bhikkhus, it is to be forfeited. I surrender this to the Saṅgha," or in the presence of three or two bhikkhus, "Bhante, this robe of mine... I surrender to the venerable ones," or in the presence of one, "Āvuso (friend), this is mine… I surrender this to the venerable one." Viññunā: meaning one who has knowledge, because of knowing the various procedures such as the surrender of an object to be forfeited.
608.Taṃnissaggiyacīvaraṃ.
608.Taṃ: that forfeited robe.
609.‘‘Adentassa ca nissaṭṭhaṃ dukkaṭa’’nti iminā ‘‘byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena āpatti paṭiggahetabbā, nissaṭṭhacīvaraṃ dātabba’’nti vuttattā imaṃ vidhiṃ jānanatāyabyattenayathāvidhiṃ kātuṃ samatthatāyapaṭibalena khandhake(cūḷava. 239) āgatanayena āpattiṃ paṭiggahetvā nissaṭṭhacīvaraṃ hatthena gahetvā nisīdāpetvā sace saṅgho hoti, ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyā’’ti, sace tayo honti, ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ āyasmantānaṃ nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, āyasmantā imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyu’’nti, sace ekako hoti, ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ āyasmato dammī’’ti dātabbaṃ, nissaṭṭhacīvaraṃ ‘‘attanoyeva dinna’’nti suddhasaññāya gahetvā adentassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
609."Adentassa ca nissaṭṭhaṃ dukkaṭaṃ": because it is said by this that "a knowledgeable bhikkhu who is capable should accept the offense, the surrendered robe should be given," and because of knowing this procedure, byattena, because of being capable of doing it according to the rule, paṭibalena, having accepted the offense in accordance with the method that came in the Khandhaka (Cūḷava. 239), having taken the surrendered robe in his hand, and having seated himself, if there is a Saṅgha, "Bhante, may the Saṅgha hear me. This robe of so-and-so bhikkhu is to be forfeited, surrendered to the Saṅgha. If it is appropriate for the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha should give this robe to so-and-so bhikkhu," if there are three, "Venerable ones, may the venerable ones hear me. This robe of so-and-so bhikkhu is to be forfeited, surrendered to the venerable ones. If it is appropriate for the venerable ones, the venerable ones should give this robe to so-and-so bhikkhu," if there is one, "I give this robe to the venerable one," it should be given; it is said that a dukkaṭa offense occurs to one who does not give, taking the surrendered robe with the perception that "it was given to oneself."
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tassa santakabhāvaṃ pana ñatvā lesena acchindanto bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469).Pariyāputanti ‘‘na bhikkhave nissaṭṭhacīvaraṃ na dātabbaṃ, yo na dadeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 470)pāḷiyaṃvuttanti attho.
In the Aṭṭhakathā: "But knowing that it belongs to him, if he cunningly deprives him of it, he should have the item valued and made to pay." (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.469). Pariyāputaṃ: meaning it is said in the Pāḷi, "Bhikkhus, a surrendered robe should not be given back; whoever does not give it back incurs a dukkaṭa offense" (Pārā. 470).
610-1.There dahare cāti etesu ubhosupi maggaṃ gacchantesūti yojanā.‘‘There’’ti iminā anissitabhāvamāha,‘‘dahare cā’’ti iminā nissitabhāvaṃ.Ohīneti osakkite. Sace so thero nissayācariyo bhaveyyāti adhippāyenāha‘‘garu’’nti.Tasmiṃdahare.Vatthanti tassa hatthe ṭhitacīvaraṃ.Na passambhatīti dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā gamane saussāhattā nissayapaṭippassaddhi na hotīti adhippāyo. Teneva ‘‘muhutta’’ntiādimāha.
610-1.There dahare cāti: in both of these, the meaning is when going on the road. "There" indicates being independent, "dahare ca" indicates being dependent. Ohīne: having lagged behind. He says "garu" with the idea that that thera might be a preceptor on whom one is dependent. Tasmiṃ: in that dahara. Vatthaṃ: the robe standing in his hand. Na passambhati: because of being energetic in going without putting down the burden, the cessation of dependence does not occur, that is the meaning. Therefore, he says "muhuttaṃ," etc.
614.Paccuddhāre antoyevāruṇeti iminā sambandho, daharabhikkhuno dūrabhāvañca aruṇuggamanañca ñatvā cīvarassa anissaggiyatthaṃ tassa hatthe ṭhitabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā purāruṇā paccuddhareti attho.Vissajjetīti aññassa deti.Vinassatīti corādīhi nassati.
614.Paccuddhāre antoyevāruṇeti: the connection is with this; knowing the distant nature of the dahara bhikkhu and the rising of the dawn, considering the state of being in his hand for the sake of the robe not being forfeited, he should take it back before dawn, that is the meaning. Vissajjetī: he gives it to another. Vinassati: it is destroyed by thieves, etc.
Dutiyakathinakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Second Kathina Account.
616.Akālacīvaranti ‘‘akālacīvaraṃ nāma anatthate kathine ekādasamāse uppannaṃ, atthate kathine sattamāse uppannaṃ, kālepi ādissa dinna’’nti (pārā. 500) vacanato anatthatakathine vihāre ‘‘cīvaramāso’’ti yo pubbakattikakāḷapakkhapāṭipadato paṭṭhāya yāva aparakattikapuṇṇamī, tāva māso vuccati, tato paresu ekādasasu māsesu uppannañca atthatakathine vihāre yo cīvaramāso, hemantā ca cattāro māsāti pañcamāsato bahi sattasu māsesu uppannañca atthatakathine pañca māsā yathāparicchinnakāle saṅghassa ca ‘‘idaṃ akālacīvaraṃ dammī’’ti puggalassa ca ‘‘idaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti dinnañceti idaṃ akālacīvaranti attho. ‘‘Uppanna’’nti seso, ‘‘uppajjeyya saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā paṃsukūlato vā attano vā dhanenā’’ti (pārā. 500) vacanato saṅghassa vā ‘‘idaṃ suttantikagaṇassa dema, idaṃ ābhidhammikagaṇassa demā’’tiādinā nayena gaṇassa vā dinnato attano vassaggena vā ñātiādito vā susānādipaṃsukūlakhettato vā attano santakena suttakappāsādikappiyavatthuto vā uppannacīvaranti attho.
616.Akālacīvaraṃ: because of the statement that "akālacīvaraṃ (out-of-season robe) is that which arises in eleven months when the kathina has not been spread, and which arises in seven months when the kathina has been spread; even in season, it is given after having been requested" (Pārā. 500), in a monastery where the kathina has not been spread, the period called "robe-month," that is, from the first day of the dark fortnight of the early Kattika to the full-moon day of the later Kattika, is called a month; and that which arises in the eleven months after that, and in a monastery where the kathina has been spread, that which arises in the seven months outside the five months from the robe-month and the four months of the cold season; and what is given at the defined time to the Saṅgha as "I give this akālacīvaraṃ" and to an individual as "I give this to you"—this is the meaning of akālacīvaraṃ. "Uppannaṃ" is the remainder; the meaning of cīvaraṃ (robe) arisen from the statement, "it might arise from the Saṅgha, or from a group, or from a relative, or from a friend, or from paṃsukūla, or from one's own wealth" (Pārā. 500), is a robe arising from what is given to the Saṅgha, saying, "We give this to the group of Suttanta experts; we give this to the group of Abhidhamma experts," and so on; or from one's own resources, or from a relative, etc., or from a charnel ground or a paṃsukūla field, or from one's own permissible cloth, cotton, etc.
Māsaparamaṃ nikkhipeti māso paramaṃ pamāṇaṃ etassa nikkhipanassāti māsaparamaṃ, nikkhipananti kiriyāvisesanaṃ kātabbaṃ, māsaparamaṃ nikkhipanaṃ kareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ākaṅkhamānena bhikkhunā paṭiggahetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā khippameva kāretabbaṃ, no cassa pāripūrī, māsaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ ūnassa pāripūriyā’’ti (pārā. 500) vacanato evaṃ uppannaṃ cīvaraṃ icchantena paṭiggahetvā sace pahoti, dasāhamanatikkāmetvā kāretabbaṃ. Sace nappahoti, ūnassa paripūraṇatthaṃ māsaparamaṃ ṭhapetabbanti attho.
Māsaparamaṃ nikkhipe: māsaparamaṃ (a month at most) means a month is the highest limit for this depositing; nikkhipanaṃ (depositing) should be done as an adverb of the verb, it is said that one should do the depositing for a month at most. Because of the statement that "a bhikkhu who desires it should accept it, and having accepted it, he should have it made quickly; if it is not completed for him, that robe should be deposited by that bhikkhu for a month at most for the completion of what is lacking" (Pārā. 500), having accepted a robe that has arisen in this way, if he is able, he should have it made without exceeding ten days. If he is not able, it means that it should be kept for a month at most for the completion of what is lacking.
‘‘sati paccāsāyā’’ti, ‘‘paccāsā hoti saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā paṃsukūlato vā attano vā dhanenā’’ti (pārā. 500) vuttasaṅghādito attano vassaggādito labheyya, tena ‘‘imassa ūne paripuṇṇe kāressāmī’’ti paccāsāya sati evaṃ nikkhipitabbanti attho.Tato uddhaṃṭhapetuṃna vaṭṭatīti māsato atirekakālaṃ nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati, nissaggiyapācittiyaṃ hotīti attho.
"Sati paccāsāyā": the meaning is that it should be deposited in this way when there is an expectation of obtaining from the Saṅgha, etc., or from one's own resources, etc., mentioned in "paccāsā hoti saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā paṃsukūlato vā attano vā dhanenā" (Pārā. 500); that is, "I will have this completed when this deficiency is fulfilled." Tato uddhaṃ ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati: it is not proper to keep it deposited for a time longer than a month; it means that a nissaggiya-pācittiya offense occurs.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘mūlacīvarassa uppannadivasato yāva vīsatimo divaso, tāva uppannaṃ paccāsācīvaraṃ mūlacīvaraṃ attano gatikaṃ karotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.500).
In the Aṭṭhakathā: "Until the twentieth day from the day the original robe arose, the robe of expectation that has arisen makes the original robe move on its own account" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.500).
Tatiyakathinakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Third Kathina Account.
618-9.Bhikkhuniyā yo dhovāpetīti sambandho. ‘‘Bhikkhunī nāma ubhatosaṅghe upasampannā’’ti (pārā. 500) vacanato bhikkhunisaṅghe ñatticatutthāya kammavācāya, bhikkhusaṅghe ñatticatutthāya kammavācāyāti aṭṭhavācikāya upasampannābhikkhunīnāma.Bhuttanti bhikkhunā attanā paribhuttaṃ rajitaṃ ādinnakappaṃ, ‘‘paribhogaṃ karissāmī’’ti antamaso sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayanamattenāpi purāṇabhūtaṃ cīvaranti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘rajitvā kappaṃ katvā ekavārampi nivatthaṃ vā pārutaṃ vā antamaso paribhogasīsena aṃse vā matthake vā katvā maggaṃ gato hoti, ussīsakaṃ vā katvā nipanno hoti, etampi purāṇacīvaramevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.503-505).Vatthanti kāriye kāraṇopacāravasena cīvarameva āha.
618-9.The connection is, "bhikkhuniyā yo dhovāpeti (whoever has it washed by a bhikkhunī)." Bhikkhunī: a bhikkhunī is one who has received higher ordination in both Saṅghas" (Pārā. 500), that is, a bhikkhunī is one who has received higher ordination by a ñatticatutthā kamma-vācā (motion with three announcements) in the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha and by a ñatticatutthā kamma-vācā in the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, that is, by an eight-recitation ordination. Bhuttaṃ: a robe that has been used by a bhikkhu himself, soiled, regarded as being formerly allowable, meaning a robe that has become old, even by merely placing his head [on it] with the thought "I will use it." As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Having soiled it, having made it allowable, having worn or covered it even once, or having gone on the road with it on his shoulder or on his head, or having lain down with it as a head-rest, this too is an old robe" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.503-505). Vatthaṃ: because of treating the effect as the cause, it means the robe itself.
Aññātikāyāti ‘‘aññātikā nāma mātito vā pitito vā yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā asambaddhā’’ti vacanato attano vā tassā vā mātu vā pitu vā paramparāya yāva sattamā yugā, etthantare yena kenaci ñātakena asambaddhabhāvena aññātikāyāti attho. Yathā cāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pitāmahoyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo puriso, tāva yā asambaddhā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.503-505).Ākoṭāpetīti paharāpeti.
Aññātikāyā: because of the statement that "aññātikā (non-relative) is one who is not connected from the mother's side or the father's side for seven generations," aññātikā means one who is not connected by any relative within the interval of seven generations from one's own lineage or from the lineage of her mother or father. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "pitāmaha (paternal grandfather) is the same as pitāmaha-yuga (paternal grandfather generation). Beyond that, all ancestors are included by the term pitāmaha. Thus, up to the seventh person, she is not connected" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.503-505). Ākoṭāpeti: he has it beaten.
Tatodhovāpanādito.Nissaggiyāpattīti nissaggiyassa āpatti nissaggiyāpatti, nissaggiyassa cīvarassa nāmena visiṭṭhā pācittiyāpatti hotīti attho. Idañca tiṇṇaṃ payogānaṃ ante āpajjitabbāya āpattiyā dassanaṃ. Tassa niyogena dhovanādiṃ karontiyā bhikkhuniyā tadatthaṃ sabbapubbapayogagaṇanāya bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ hotīti gahetabbo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yāva naṃ dhovitvā ukkhipati, tāva bhikkhuniyā payoge payoge bhikkhussa dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.503-505).Paṭhamenāti tīṇipi kārāpentassa yaṃ paṭhamaṃ kārāpeti, tenāti attho.Dīpitanti ‘‘aññātikāya aññātikasaññī purāṇacīvaraṃ dhovāpeti rajāpeti ākoṭāpeti, nissaggiyena āpatti dvinnaṃ dukkaṭāna’’ntiādinā (pārā. 506) desitaṃ. Iminā nayena dve kārāpentassa paṭhamena nissaggiyāpatti, dutiyena dukkaṭanti ayamattho saṅgayhati.
Tato: from having it washed, etc. Nissaggiyāpatti: nissaggiyāpatti (offense of forfeiture) means the offense of forfeiture; it means a pācittiya offense specified by the name of the robe to be forfeited. And this is a showing of the offense to be incurred at the end of the three efforts. It should be understood that a dukkaṭa offense occurs to the bhikkhu for the sake of all the previous efforts, in the reckoning, of the bhikkhunī who is doing the washing, etc., by his instruction. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "As long as she does not wash it and lift it up, a dukkaṭa offense occurs to the bhikkhu for each effort of the bhikkhunī" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.503-505). Paṭhamena: meaning by the first of the three acts he has done. Dīpitaṃ: it has been taught by "aññātikāya aññātisaññī purāṇacīvaraṃ dhovāpeti rajāpeti ākoṭāpeti, nissaggiyena āpatti dvinnaṃ dukkaṭānaṃ" (Pārā. 506). By this method, it is understood that for one who has it done twice, the first is a nissaggiya offense, the second is a dukkaṭa offense.
620.‘‘Dhovanatthāya detī’’ti iminā ‘‘bhuttaṃ vattha’’nti adhikārato labbhati.
620."Dhovanatthāya deti": by this, "bhuttaṃ vatthaṃ (used cloth)" is obtained from the topic.
621.Sāmaṇeraniddesepīti ‘‘sāmaṇerā’’ti niddeso nāma yassa, tasmimpi, attanā paribhuttaṃ vatthaṃ dhovanatthāya detīti yojanā, attano paribhuttaṃ cīvaraṃ dhovanatthāya sāmaṇerassa detīti attho.Pi-saddo samuccayattho.Upasampajjāti pubbakiriyāya ‘‘dhovatī’’ti aparakiriyā sāmatthiyā labbhati.
621.Sāmaṇeraniddesepī: in that too where there is a specification of "sāmaṇera (novice)," the meaning is that he gives the cloth he has used to be washed; it means he gives the robe he has used to the novice to be washed. The word pi is in the sense of combination. Upasampajjā: "dhovatī (washes)" is the subsequent action, obtainable by the capacity of the prior action.
622.Daharānañca bhikkhūnanti attano navakatarānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.Niyyāditedinne.Esa nayoti ‘‘ekena pācittiyaṃ, avasiṭṭhehi dvīhi vā ekena vā sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ hotī’’ti nayo.
622.Daharānañca bhikkhūnaṃ: to bhikkhus who are younger than himself. Niyyādite: having given. Esa nayo: this is the method that "one pācittiya offense occurs, and a dukkaṭa offense occurs in all efforts by the remaining two or by one."
623.Cīvareti paribhuttacīvare.
623.Cīvare: in a robe that has been used.
624.‘‘Dhovanappaccayāyevā’’ti iminā itaradvayassa tassa anāṇattiyā katattā tato anāpattibhāvamāha.
624."Dhovanappaccayāyeva": by this, he indicates the state of being free from offense because the other two were done without his order.
626.Ñātikāti ettha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.22-23, 422; a. ni. 6.58; 8.9; mahāni. 206; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518) viya gāthābandhavasena ya-kāralopo, ñātikāya bhikkhuniyāti attho. ‘‘Ñātikā aññātisaññissā’’ti padacchedo.Paccattharaṇanti mañcapīṭhe attharitabbaṃ paccattharaṇacīvarañca.
626.Ñātikā: here, the loss of the ya-kāra is due to the structure of the verse, as in "paṭisaṅkhā yoniso" etc. (Ma. Ni. 1.22-23, 422; A. Ni. 6.58; 8.9; Mahāni. 206; Dha. Sa. 1355; Vibha. 518); it means a bhikkhunī who is a relative. "Ñātikā aññātisaññissā": this is the word division. Paccattharaṇaṃ: a paccattharaṇa-cīvara (spread) to be spread on a bed or seat.
627.‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃ vasenā’’ti idaṃ bhikkhusaṅghepi upasampannā ce, pācittiyasambhavā vuttaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya pana yathāvatthukamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.506). Bhikkhunisaṅghe paṭhamaṃ upasampajjitvā pacchā bhikkhusaṅghe ce upasampajjati, kevalaṃ bhikkhusaṅghe upasampannāti na vuccatīti tā bhagavati dharamāne paṭhamaṃ pabbajitā pañcasatā sākiyāniyo vuccanti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannā nāma pañcasatā sākiyāniyo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.506). Bhikkhuno liṅge parivatte tasseva upasampannakammassa anuññātattā sopi gahetabboyeva.
627."Bhikkhunīnaṃ vasenā": this is said because if she has received higher ordination in the Bhikkhu Saṅgha too, a pācittiya offense is possible. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "But for one who has received higher ordination in the presence of bhikkhus, it is only according to the object" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.506). If she receives higher ordination first in the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha and then later in the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, it is not said that she has received higher ordination only in the Bhikkhu Saṅgha; therefore, the five hundred Sākiyan women who went forth first while the Blessed One was living are called that. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "The five hundred Sākiyan women are called those who have received higher ordination in the presence of bhikkhus" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.506). Because the change of gender of the bhikkhu has been permitted for that ordination act itself, she too should be included.
628.Avuttā dhovatīti ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ dhovā’’ti avuttā cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ disvā avatvā ṭhapitaṭṭhānato cīvaraṃ gahetvā vā sayameva vatvā yācanādinayena vā anāṇattiyā ca gahetvā cīvaradhovanādiṃ kareyya ce.Aparibhuttaṃ vāti heṭṭhā vuttanayena aparibhuttaṃ cīvaraṃ.Aññaṃ vāti upāhanatthavikapattatthavikapotthakatthavikamañcapīṭhādiṃ yaṃ kiñci parikkhāraṃ.
628.Avuttā dhovatī: if she washes the robe without being told "wash this robe," having seen that the robe is dirty, without speaking, having taken the robe from where it was placed, or by herself speaking, or by way of request, or without an order. Aparibhuttaṃ vā: a robe that has not been used, in the manner stated below. Aññaṃ vā: or any other requisite, such as a shoe-cloth, a key-cloth, a book-cloth, a bed-seat, etc.
Purāṇacīvaradhovāpanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Account of Having an Old Robe Washed.
629.Vikappanupagaṃ pacchimaṃ upādāya kiñci cīvaraṃ gaṇhatoti yojanā, ettha ‘‘aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato’’ti ca ‘‘ñātikāya aññātikasaññissā’’ti ca ‘‘ekatoupasampannāya hatthato gaṇhātī’’ti ca vakkhamānavacanasāmatthiyā labbhamānato pubbe vuttanayena aññātikāya ubhatosaṅghe upasampannāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato vikappanupagaratanavidatthippamāṇavatthato paṭṭhāya yaṃ kiñci cīvaraṃ gaṇhantassāti attho.‘‘Āpattī’’ti sāmaññena vuttepi ‘‘nissaggiyā pācittiyāpattī’’ti pakaraṇato ca ‘‘nissaggiyāpattī’’ti vakkhamānato ca labbhati.Ṭhapetvā pārivattakanti ‘‘pārivattakaṃ parittena vā vipulaṃ, vipulena vā paritta’’nti (pārā. 514) vacanatomahāpaccariyaṃ‘‘antamaso harītakakhaṇḍenāpī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.514) vuttattā ca heṭṭhimantato harītakakhaṇḍampi datvā gahetabbaṃ ticīvarañca pārivattakaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ ṭhapetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Parivattanaṃparivattaṃ,taṃ etassa atthītipārivattakaṃ,kayavikkayena gahetabbaṃ cīvaranti attho.
629. The meaning is: taking any cloth as a cīvara that is subject to being set aside, having obtained it last. Herein, because of the force of the statements to be made later such as "from the hand of a bhikkhuni who is not a relative," and "from a relative who is not recognized as such," and "taking it from the hand of one ordained in both orders," it can be understood from the manner stated earlier that it means: for one who takes any cīvara whatsoever, starting from a cloth that measures at least one vidatthi that is subject to being set aside, from the hand of a bhikkhuni ordained in both orders who is not a relative. "An offense": even though stated generally, it is understood to be a "Nissaggiya Pācittiya offense" because of the context and because it will be stated as "Nissaggiya offense." Except for an exchange: because of the statement "pārivattakaṃ parittena vā vipulaṃ, vipulena vā parittanti" (pārā. 514) [a thing for exchange whether small or large, for a small or large thing], and because in the Mahāpaccariya it is stated "antamaso harītakakhaṇḍenāpīti" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.514) [even with a piece of myrobalan], even a piece of myrobalan at the lowest end should be given and taken. The three robes are called pārivattakaṃ, it is said that except them. Parivattanaṃ is parivattaṃ, that exists for it, so pārivattakaṃ, it means a cīvara that can be taken by buying and selling.
630.Gahaṇatthāyapayogeti gaṇhituṃ hatthapasāraṇādippayoge.Pariyāputanti ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti payoge dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. 512) desitaṃ.
630.In the effort for taking means in the effort of extending the hand etc. to take. Fully received means as taught in "paṭiggaṇhāti payoge dukkaṭa"nti (pārā. 512) [in the effort of receiving, there is a dukkata].
631.Anupasampannahattheti bhikkhubhikkhunito aññe sabbe anupasampannā gahitā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana sikkhamānāsāmaṇerasāmaṇeriupāsakaupāsikānaṃ hatthe pesitaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, anāpattī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.512).
631.In the hand of one not ordained: all those other than a bhikkhu or bhikkhuni are considered not ordained. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "sace pana sikkhamānāsāmaṇerasāmaṇeriupāsakaupāsikānaṃ hatthe pesitaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, anāpattī"ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.512) [but if one receives (it) having sent (it) into the hands of a sikkhamānā, sāmaṇera, sāmaṇeri, upāsaka, or upāsikā, there is no offense].
632.Ekatoti ettha bhikkhunisaṅghatoti gahetabbaṃ. Aññasmiṃ pakkhe pācittiyameva. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya pana pācittiyamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.513).
632.Ekato: here it should be taken as the bhikkhuni sangha. In the other case, it is only a pācittiya. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya pana pācittiyamevā"ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.513) [but for one ordained in the presence of bhikkhus, it is only a pācittiya].
633.‘‘Pārivattakaṃ dassāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, doso na vijjatīti yojanā.
633.If one takes it having made the intention, "I will give an exchange," there is no fault, is the meaning.
634.Aññaṃ parikkhāranti thavikakāyabandhanādi avikappiyaṃ vā avikappanupagaṃ vā parikkhārameva gahetabbaṃ. Vikappanupagaṃ pana na vaṭṭati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘vikappanupagaṃ pacchimacīvarappamāṇaṃ pana paṭaparissāvanampi na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.514). Cīvarapaṭiggaṇhanaṃ kiriyā, pārivattakassa adānaṃ akiriyāti kiriyāya ca akiriyāya ca āpajjitabbatokriyākriyaṃ.
634.Another requisite: one should only take a requisite such as a bag or waistband that is not subject to being set aside or is not subject to being set aside. But that which is subject to being set aside is not proper. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "vikappanupagaṃ pacchimacīvarappamāṇaṃ pana paṭaparissāvanampi na vaṭṭatī"ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.514) [but even a straining cloth that is the measure of a last robe, which is subject to being set aside, is not proper]. Receiving a robe is an action, not giving an exchange is a non-action, and because one incurs an offense by both action and non-action, it is kriyākriyaṃ.
Cīvarapaṭiggahaṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Talk on Receiving a Robe.
635.‘‘Aññātakaṃ appavārita’’nti padacchedo. ‘‘Gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Vuttañhi bhagavatā ‘‘aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā’’ti (pārā. 516, 518). Pubbe vuttanayena yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā sambaddhaññātikatāya abhāvatoaññātakaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ mayhaṃ gehe atthi, taṃ pavāremī’’tiādinā nayenaappavāritaṃ. ‘‘Gahapati nāma yo koci agāraṃ ajjhāvasatī’’ti (pārā. 519)pāḷiyaṃvuttaṃgahapatiṃ vā. ‘‘Gahapatānī nāma yā kāci agāraṃ ajjhāvasatī’’ti (pārā. 519)pāḷiyaṃvuttaṃ gharaṇiṃ vāti attho.
635.A stranger, uninvited: this is the word division. "Gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā"ti is the rest of the reading. For indeed, the Blessed One said, "aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā"ti (pārā. 516, 518) [a householder or a householder's wife who is a stranger]. A stranger because of the absence of a relative related up to the seventh generation of ancestors, according to the manner stated earlier. Uninvited by way of the method beginning with "Yaṃ mayhaṃ gehe atthi, taṃ pavāremī"ti [whatever I have in my house, I invite you]. Gahapatiṃ vā means a householder as stated in the Pāḷi, "Gahapati nāma yo koci agāraṃ ajjhāvasatī"ti (pārā. 519) [a householder is anyone who dwells in a house]. Gahapatānī means a householder's wife, that is, a housewife, as stated in the Pāḷi, "Gahapatānī nāma yā kāci agāraṃ ajjhāvasatī"ti (pārā. 519) [a householder's wife is anyone who dwells in a house].
Hoti nissaggiyāpattīti ‘‘aññatra samayā viññāpeti, payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. 519)pāḷiyaṃvuttesu sabbesu pubbapayogesu dukkaṭena saddhiṃ nissaggiyapācittiyaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññatra samayāti ‘‘tatthāyaṃ samayo, acchinnacīvaro vā hoti bhikkhu naṭṭhacīvaro vā’’ti (pārā. 518)mātikāya,‘‘acchinnacīvaro nāma bhikkhussa cīvaraṃ acchinnaṃ hoti rājūhi vā corehi vā dhuttehi vā yehi kehici vā acchinnaṃ hoti. Naṭṭhacīvaro nāma bhikkhussa cīvaraṃ agginā vā daḍḍhaṃ hoti, udakena vā vūḷhaṃ hoti, undūrehi vā upacikāhi vā khāyitaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. 519)padabhājaneca niddiṭṭhasarūpakālato aññatrāti attho.
There is a Nissaggiya offense: it is said that along with a dukkata for all the previous efforts in "aññatra samayā viññāpeti, payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hotī"ti (pārā. 519) [he asks at a time other than the exception, there is a dukkata in the effort, with the acquisition, there is a nissaggiya] in the Pāḷi, there is a Nissaggiya Pācittiya. Other than an exception means other than the time whose nature is specified in the Mātikā, "tatthāyaṃ samayo, acchinnacīvaro vā hoti bhikkhu naṭṭhacīvaro vā"ti (pārā. 518) [here is the exception: a bhikkhu is one whose robe is cut, or whose robe is lost], and in the Padabhājana, "acchinnacīvaro nāma bhikkhussa cīvaraṃ acchinnaṃ hoti rājūhi vā corehi vā dhuttehi vā yehi kehici vā acchinnaṃ hoti. Naṭṭhacīvaro nāma bhikkhussa cīvaraṃ agginā vā daḍḍhaṃ hoti, udakena vā vūḷhaṃ hoti, undūrehi vā upacikāhi vā khāyitaṃ hotī"ti (pārā. 519) [one whose robe is cut is a bhikkhu whose robe is cut by kings, thieves, tricksters, or whomever. One whose robe is lost is a bhikkhu whose robe is burned by fire, carried away by water, or eaten by mice or termites].
636.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘aññātake aññātakasaññī, vematiko, ñātakasaññī aññatra samayā cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 520) pācittiyattayaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ñātake aññātisaññissā’’ti padacchedo.Tatthāti tasmiṃ ñātake.Vematikassāti ‘‘ñātako nu kho, aññātako’’ti vematikassa. Dvikadukkaṭaṃ tathevāti yojanā.‘‘Tathevā’’ti ‘‘vutta’’nti idaṃ ākaḍḍhati, ‘‘ñātake aññātakasaññī, vematiko aññatra samayā cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 520) desitanti attho.
636.Three Pācittiyas are stated: the Blessed One stated three pācittiyas in "aññātake aññātakasaññī, vematiko, ñātakasaññī aññatra samayā cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya"nti (pārā. 520) [in the case of a stranger, being conscious of a stranger; in doubt; being conscious of a relative, he asks for a robe at a time other than the exception, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya]. "Ñātake aññātisaññissā"ti is the word division. There means in that relative. For one who is in doubt: for one who is in doubt, "is he a relative, or is he a stranger?". The meaning is that two dukkata offenses are incurred in the same way. "Tathevā"ti draws in "vutta"nti [stated], the meaning is "ñātake aññātakasaññī, vematiko aññatra samayā cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, āpatti dukkaṭassā"ti (pārā. 520) [being conscious of a stranger in the case of a relative, being in doubt, he asks for a robe at a time other than the exception, there is an offense of dukkata] is taught.
637-8.Samaye viññāpentassa anāpattīti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘cīvaraṃ aññātakaappavārita’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, yathāparicchinnakāladvayato aññatarasmiṃ kāle aññātakaappavāritaṃ cīvaraṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti attho.Ñātake vā pavāriteti etthāpi ‘‘attano’’ti ajjhāhāro, ‘‘samaye’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ, attano ñātakapavārite asamayepi cīvaraṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti attho.Aññassatthāyāti ettha ‘‘attano’’ti seso, attano ñātake, pavārite vā viññāpentassa anāpattīti yojanā, aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ nissāya attano ñātake vā pavārite vā cīvaraṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Itaraṃ pakkhaṃ dasseti‘‘tassa ñātake vā pavārite vā’’ti.Tassāti ‘‘aññassā’’ti vuttassa, ‘‘viññāpentassa anāpattī’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Vāti purimavikappāpekkhaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, tassa ñātake vā pavārite vā taṃyeva sandhāya cīvaraṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
637-8.The meaning is that there is no offense for one who asks in the exception. Here, "cīvaraṃ aññātakaappavārita"nti should be brought in and connected, the meaning is that there is no offense for one who asks for a robe from a stranger who is uninvited at a time other than either of the two defined periods. Ñātake vā pavāriteti here too, "attano"ti is implied, it should be connected with "samaye"ti, the meaning is that there is no offense for one who asks for a robe from his own relative or from one who has invited him even not in the exception. Aññassatthāyāti here "attano"ti is the remainder, the meaning is that there is no offense for one who asks from his own relative or from one who has invited him, it is said that there is no offense for one who asks for a robe from his own relative or from one who has invited him, relying on another bhikkhu. The other case is shown in "tassa ñātake vā pavārite vā"ti. Tassāti should be connected with "viññāpentassa anāpattī"ti [there is no offense for one who asks], of one spoken of as "aññassā"ti. Vāti is in relation to the previous alternative. It is said that there is no offense for one who asks for a robe relying on that very person from whose relative or from one who has invited him he asks for the robe in relation to whom he asks for the robe.
ummattakādinoti etthaādi-saddena saṅgayhati, attano santakaṃ suttakappāsādikaṃ kappiyavatthuṃ datvā gaṇhitukāmatāya akappiyavohārena yācantassa ca anāpattīti attho.
Ummattakādinoti here, ādi includes one who asks using improper language intending to take that allowable material of thread, cotton, etc., having given his own allowable object, and there is no offense.
Aññātakaviññattikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Talk on Asking from a Stranger.
639.Appavāritamaññātinti ettha ‘‘gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā’’ti idaṃ sāmatthiyā labbhati.Tatuttarinti tato santaruttaraparamato uttarinti gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabba’’nti (pārā. 523) vuttattā acchinnacīvarena sāditabbaantaravāsakauttarāsaṅgamattena adhikanti attho.
639.Appavāritamaññātinti here, "gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā"ti can be obtained by implication. Tatuttarinti should be taken to mean more and more above that, "santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabba"nti (pārā. 523) [the bhikkhu should ask for what is intermediate, further, and utmost from him] because the intermediate, further, and utmost that should be asked for by one whose robe is cut is more than the under robe and upper robe.
padabhājane‘‘tato ce uttari sādiyeyyāti tatuttari viññāpetī’’ti (pārā. 524) caāpattibhedasandassanaṭṭhāne‘‘aññātake aññātakasaññī tatuttari cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’ntiādivacanato (pārā. 525) ca vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ sikkhāpadeyeva ‘‘sāditabbaṃ, sādiyeyyā’’ti ca ubhayattha ‘‘viññāpetabbaṃ, viññāpeyyā’’ti ca kasmā na vuttanti? Acchinnacīvarabhāvaṃ ñatvā aviññāpitepi abhiharitvā diyyamānampi adhivāsentena evameva sāditabbanti na vuttaṃ. Imasseva ca adhikaviññāpananisedhanatthaṃ vadantenāpi ‘‘tañce aññātako gahapati vā gahapatānī vā bahūhi cīvarehi abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya, santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabba’’nti sāditabbaniyamappadhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā acchinnacīvarena attanā vā taṃ sandhāya aññena vā viññāpentenapi aviññāpentepi diyyamānaṃ sādiyantenāpi santaruttaraparamataṃ nātikkamitabbanti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade sandhāya bhāsitatthoti sallakkhetabbanti ettakaṃ ñāpetuṃ ‘‘sādiyantassā’’ti avatvā ‘‘viññāpentassā’’ti vuttanti ācariyābhisandhi veditabbā.
It is stated in the padabhājane "tato ce uttari sādiyeyyāti tatuttari viññāpetī"ti (pārā. 524) [if he should ask for more than that, he asks for more than that], and in the place showing the classification of offenses also, "aññātake aññātakasaññī tatuttari cīvaraṃ viññāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya"ntiādi-vacanato (pārā. 525) [being conscious of a stranger in the case of a stranger, he asks for a robe more than that, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya]. If so, why are "sāditabbaṃ, sādiyeyyā"ti [should ask for, would ask for] and "viññāpetabbaṃ, viññāpeyyā"ti [should ask, would ask] not stated in both places in the training rule itself? It is not stated because even if it is given having been brought without asking, having known the state of having a cut robe, it should be accepted in just the same way. And mainly to prohibit asking for more than this, it is said: "tañce aññātako gahapati vā gahapatānī vā bahūhi cīvarehi abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya, santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabba"nti, with the emphasis on the regulation of what should be accepted. Therefore, it should be understood that in this training rule, it is spoken with reference to not exceeding the intermediate, further, and utmost, even by one who asks for it himself or by another person in relation to him, or by one who accepts what is given without asking, for one whose robe is cut. The teachers' intention should be understood that "viññāpentassā"ti is said without saying "sādiyantassā"ti [of one who accepts] in order to make it known so much.
640.Idāni viññāpane ca adhivāsane ca ubhayattheva niyamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace tīṇi naṭṭhāni honti, dve sāditabbāni. Dve naṭṭhāni, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ. Ekaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, na kiñci sāditabba’’nti (pārā. 524)padabhājanevuttavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yassā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yassa tīṇipi naṭṭhāni, dve vā naṭṭhāni, ekaṃ vā naṭṭha’’nti sambandhitvā yathākkamaṃ ‘‘tena dve sāditabbāni, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ, na kiñcipi sāditabba’’nti yojanā kātabbā. Yassa tīṇipi cīvarāni naṭṭhāni, bahu ca diyyati, tena dveyeva cīvarāni sāditabbāni. Dve cīvarāni naṭṭhāni, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ. Ekañce naṭṭhaṃ, na sāditabbaṃ, avasiṭṭhaṃ pacchā dhammena samena laddhanīhārena gahetabbanti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sesaṃ sabhāgaṭṭhānato pariyesissatī’’ti. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyā pana pañcasupi naṭṭhesu dve sāditabbāni, catūsu naṭṭhesu ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ, tīsu naṭṭhesu kiñci na sāditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.522-524)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
640.Now, in order to show the regulation in both asking and accepting, he says in order to show the decision stated in the padabhājane: "sace tīṇi naṭṭhāni honti, dve sāditabbāni. Dve naṭṭhāni, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ. Ekaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, na kiñci sāditabba"nti (pārā. 524) [if three are lost, two should be asked for. If two are lost, one should be asked for. If one is lost, nothing should be asked for] "yassā"tiādi. Having connected "Yassa tīṇipi naṭṭhāni, dve vā naṭṭhāni, ekaṃ vā naṭṭha"nti [for whom even three are lost, or two are lost, or one is lost] in order, the connection should be made: "tena dve sāditabbāni, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ, na kiñcipi sāditabba"nti [by him two should be asked for, one should be asked for, nothing should be asked for]. If even three robes are lost for someone, and much is given, then only two robes should be asked for. If two robes are lost, one should be asked for. And if one is lost, it should not be asked for, the meaning is that the remainder should be taken later by means of a livelihood obtained righteously and fairly. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "sesaṃ sabhāgaṭṭhānato pariyesissatī"ti [he will seek the remainder from a place of sharing]. It is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "bhikkhuniyā pana pañcasupi naṭṭhesu dve sāditabbāni, catūsu naṭṭhesu ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ, tīsu naṭṭhesu kiñci na sāditabba"nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.522-524) [but for a bhikkhuni, if even five are lost, two should be asked for; if four are lost, one should be asked for; if three are lost, nothing should be asked for].
641-2.Sesakaṃ āharantassa anāpattīti ñātabbanti yojanā. Evamuparipi yojetabbaṃ. Cīvaraṃ yojetvā atirekaṃ vatthaṃ paccāharitvā ‘‘dassāmī’’ti bahumpi gahetvā gacchantassa anāpattīti attho. Atirekampi tumheyeva gaṇhathāti dinnaṃ gaṇhatopi anāpatti. Na acchinnakāraṇā dinneti yojanā, acchinnacīvarabhāvaṃ anuddissa bahūnaṃ cīvarānaṃ gahaṇanimittenāpi anāpattīti attho. Evameva ‘‘na naṭṭhakāraṇā dentī’’ti idampi dassitameva. Acchinnacīvare nissāya tatuttaricīvaraviññāpanavatthumhi imassa sikkhāpadassa paññattattāanāpattivāre‘‘aññassatthāyā’’ti na gahitaṃ.
641-2.The meaning is that it should be known that there is no offense for one who brings the remainder. It should be connected in the same way above too. The meaning is that there is no offense for one who goes taking even much having connected a robe and returned the extra cloth, saying "I will give." There is no offense even for one who takes what is given saying, "You yourselves take the extra." Na acchinnakāraṇā dinneti is the connection, the meaning is that there is no offense even for the cause of taking many robes not directed at the state of having a cut robe. In just the same way, "na naṭṭhakāraṇā dentī"ti [they do not give for the cause of loss] this too is shown. Because of the enactment of this training rule in the matter of asking for a robe more than that, relying on having a cut robe, "aññassatthāyā"ti [for the sake of another] is not included in the list of non-offenses.
Tatuttarikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Talk on More Than That.
643.Kalyāṇakamyatāhetūti sundarassa mahagghassa kāmataṃ paṭicca cīvare vikappanaṃ āpajjeyyāti yojanā, ‘‘kīdisena te bhante cīvarena attho’’ti pubbe appavārito ‘‘āyataṃ vā hotu vitthataṃ vā appitaṃ vā saṇhaṃ vā’’ti (pārā. 529)padabhājanevuttavisiṭṭhakappaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ karotīti attho.Tassa lābhā nissaggiyaṃ bhaveti tathā appavāritena hutvā katena adhikavidhānena nipphannacīvarassa lābhappayogena dukkaṭanissaggiyapācittiyā honti.
643.Kalyāṇakamyatāhetūti because of desiring a beautiful, expensive robe, one might incur an offense of making it subject to being set aside, is the connection, it means making a specific arrangement more than what was previously invited, "kīdisena te bhante cīvarena attho"ti [Venerable Sir, what sort of robe do you need?] saying "āyataṃ vā hotu vitthataṃ vā appitaṃ vā saṇhaṃ vā"ti (pārā. 529) [may it be long or wide or thin or smooth] in the padabhājane.
644.Mahagghaṃ…pe… viññāpetīti vīsatiagghanakaṃ cīvaraṃ dātukāmamhi upāsake, ‘‘alaṃ mayhaṃ etena, dasagghanakaṃ vā appagghanakaṃ vā dehī’’ti vadati.
644.Mahagghaṃ…pe… viññāpetīti for an upāsaka intending to give an expensive robe worth twenty, he says "alaṃ mayhaṃ etena, dasagghanakaṃ vā appagghanakaṃ vā dehī"ti [enough for me with that, give one worth ten or one of less value].
645.‘‘Ñātake aññātisaññissā’’ti padacchedo.
645.Ñātake aññātisaññissā"ti is the word division.
Paṭhamopakkhaṭakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Talk on the First Solicitation.
646.Paṭhamasikkhāpade ekena upāsakena pīḷā laddhā, idha dvīhīti ettakaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpadasadisamevāti āha‘‘dutiyo…pe… vinicchayo’’ti. Upakkhaṭapadena lakkhitaṃ sikkhāpadaṃupakkhaṭaṃ,dutiyañca taṃ upakkhaṭañcāti dutiyopakkhaṭaṃ, tasmiṃdutiyopakkhaṭe. Assāti dutiyopakkhaṭassa.
646.In the first training rule, suffering was obtained from one upāsaka, here, it is from two, so this is the only difference. The rest is just like the first training rule, so he says "dutiyo…pe… vinicchayo"ti [the second...the decision]. The training rule marked by the word solicitation is upakkhaṭaṃ, and the second one is also that solicitation, so dutiyopakkhaṭaṃ, in that dutiyopakkhaṭe. Assāti of the second solicitation.
Dutiyopakkhaṭakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Talk on the Second Solicitation.
647.Raññā vāti rājato vā. Rājato bhoggaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ assa atthīti‘‘rājabhoggo’’ti vutto, rājato bhattavettanalābhito yato kutoci dāyakā ābhatanti sambandho.Na ca vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘nissaggiyapācittiyabhāvato’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Idha uttarikaraṇīyaṃ ‘‘tikkhattu’’ntiādigāthāya (vi. vi. 671) vakkhati.
647.Raññā vāti or from a king. One who has a royal income that should be enjoyed from the king is called "rājabhoggo", the connection is that the donors bring (it) from anywhere at all from the benefit of food, wages, etc. from the king. Na ca vaṭṭatīti here, "nissaggiyapācittiyabhāvato"ti should be implied. Here, the further thing to be done will be said in the verse beginning with "tikkhattu"ntiādi (vi. vi. 671) [three times].
648.Cīvaracetāpannavasena adhigatarajatādi yena kenaci pariyāyenāpi na sāditabbanti dassetumāha‘‘rajataṃ vā’’tiādi. Dhavalasabhāvatāya rājatītirajataṃ,sajjhu. Jātaṃ rūpaṃ vaṇṇāyatanametassātijātarūpaṃ,suvaṇṇaṃ.Kiñcīti appamattakampi. Attano vā atthāya parassa vā atthāya diyyamānaṃ kiñci gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
648.In order to show that gold or silver etc. obtained by way of the price of a robe should not be accepted by any means, he says "rajataṃ vā"tiādi. Rajataṃ, silver because of its white nature. Jātarūpaṃ, gold, because it is a form that has arisen from color. Kiñcīti even a small amount. The connection is that it is not proper to take anything given for the sake of oneself or for the sake of another.
649.Attano paṭiggahaṇe āpattiyā rūpiyagahaṇasikkhāpade vakkhamānattā aññassa atthāya gahaṇe āpattidassanatthamāha‘‘aññassatthāyā’’tiādi. Tatthaaññassatthāyāti aññassa puggalassa, gaṇassa, saṅghassa, cetiyassa, navakammassa vā atthāya.Niddiṭṭhanti āharitvā ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttaṃ rajataṃ, jātarūpaṃ vā aññaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci nissaggiyadukkaṭavatthuṃ paṭiggaṇhato tassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ hotītimahāpaccariyaṃvuttanti yojanā.
649. Because an offense is incurred by oneself accepting (gold and silver), as will be explained in the Rūpiyagahaṇa Sikkhāpada, to show that an offense is incurred when accepting for the sake of another, he said, "aññassatthāya," etc. There, aññassatthāya means for the sake of another person, a group, the Saṅgha, a shrine, or construction work. Niddiṭṭhaṃ means gold, silver, or any other object involving expiation that has been brought and it has been said, "Take this." The connection is that it was stated in the Mahāpaccariya that a bhikkhu who accepts it incurs a dukkaṭa offense.
650-1.Vuttamevatthaṃ sarūpato vibhāvetumāha‘‘netvā’’tiādi.Netvāti ānetvā.Akappiyaṃ bhaṇḍanti ‘‘rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā’’ti yathāvuttameva akappiyabhaṇḍaṃ.Itthanti vakkhamānappakārena.Na ca vaṭṭatīti ettha ca-kārena vaṭṭati cāti anuññātaṃ katanti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
650-1. To explain the meaning that has been stated in its own form, he said, "netvā," etc. Netvā means having brought. Akappiyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ means unallowable goods, namely "gold or silver," as has been stated. Itthaṃ means in the manner to be explained. Na ca vaṭṭati here, the ca indicates that it is also allowed to do what is allowable. As it says in the Aṭṭhakathā:
‘‘Sace pana ‘nayidaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭatī’ti paṭikkhitte ‘vaḍḍhakīnaṃ vā kammakarānaṃ vā hatthe bhavissati, kevalaṃ tumhe sukatadukkaṭaṃ jānāthā’ti vatvā tesaṃ hatthe datvā pakkamati, vaṭṭati. Athāpi ‘mama manussānaṃ hatthe bhavissati, mayhameva vā hatthe bhavissati, kevalaṃ tumhe yaṃ yassa dātabbaṃ, tadatthāya peseyyāthā’ti vadati, evampi vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539).
"But if, when it has been refused, saying, 'It is not allowable for bhikkhus to receive this,' (he says,) 'It will be in the hands of carpenters or laborers; you just know what is well-done and ill-done,' and then departs after giving it into their hands, it is allowable. Or even if he says, 'It will be in the hands of my people, or it will be in my own hands; you just send (the requisites) for whatever purpose they are to be given,' even this is allowable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539).
652.Vihārassāti ettha ‘‘navakammassā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā vattabbaṃ gāthābandhavasena na vuttaṃ.
652. Regarding vihārassā, because it is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā as "navakammassā" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539), it should be stated, but it was not stated due to the structure of the verse.
654.Rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā saṅghassāti ettha ‘‘cattāro paccaye paribhuñjathāti dinna’’nti seso. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana koci bahumpi hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ ānetvā ‘idaṃ saṅghassa dammi, cattāro paccaye paribhuñjathā’ti vadati, taṃ ce saṅgho sampaṭicchati, paṭiggahaṇepi paribhogepi āpattī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539). Evaṃ ābhataṃ tasmiṃ saṅghe yo koci bhikkhu ‘‘nayidaṃ kappatī’’ti sace paṭikkhipati, ‘‘ayaṃ saṅghassa lābhantarāyaṃ karotī’’ti vadantasseva āpatti hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yo hi taṃ codeti, sveva sāpattiko hoti, tena pana ekena bahū anāpattikā katā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539). Idhasveva sāpattikoti ettha ‘‘dukkaṭāpattikoti vuttaṃ hotī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. Imissā gāthāya‘‘saṅghassā’’ti alikhitvā ‘‘bhikkhuno’’ti ca likhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Idāni dassitaaṭṭhakathāpāṭhe ‘‘saṅgho sampaṭicchatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539) vuttattā ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti pāṭho sundaro.
654. Regarding rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā saṅghassā, the rest is "given saying, 'use (this) for the four requisites.'" As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "But if someone brings even a large amount of gold and silver and says, 'I give this to the Saṅgha; use it for the four requisites,' if the Saṅgha accepts it, an offense is incurred in both the acceptance and the use" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539). Thus, in that Saṅgha, if any bhikkhu refuses, saying, "This is not allowable," an offense is incurred just by saying, "This one is obstructing the gain of the Saṅgha." As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "For whoever censures that, he himself is with offense; but by that one, many are made without offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539). Here, in sveva sāpattiko, it is stated in the Gaṇṭhipada that "it means he is incurring a dukkaṭa offense." In this verse, they write "bhikkhuno" instead of writing "saṅghassā," and that is not beautiful. Now, because it is stated in the shown Aṭṭhakathā passage that "saṅgho sampaṭicchatī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539), the reading "saṅghassā" is beautiful.
655.Taḷākassāti vāpiyā. Sassuppattinidānato taḷākaṃ khettaṃ, tato tassa gahaṇaṃ vā paribhogo vā na ca vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Taḷākassa cāti etthaca-kārena khettavatthu saṅgahitaṃ.Na ca vaṭṭatīti ettha cakārena vaṭṭati cāti dassitaṃ hoti.
655. Taḷākassā means of a pond. Because the source of the production of crops is the field surrounding the pond, therefore, the acceptance or use of that is not allowable; that is the connection. Regarding taḷākassa cā, the field-site is included by the ca. Regarding na ca vaṭṭati, it indicates that it is also allowable to do what is allowable.
656.Taṃ katamanti āha‘‘cattāro’’tiādi.Sabbampīti taḷākapokkharaṇikhettādi sabbampi.
656. What is that? He said, "cattāro" etc. Sabbampī means all of it, including ponds, lotus ponds, fields, etc.
658-9.Aparicchinnabhāgasminti ‘‘imasmiṃ bhūmibhāge katassa kammehi ettako bhāgo deyyo’’ti evaṃ pubbe aniyamitaāye bhūmibhāge. Akatapubbaṃnavasassaṃnāma.Ettakaṃ bhāgaṃ dethāti ettakaṃ kahāpaṇabhāgaṃ detha.Uṭṭhāpetīti uppādeti.
658-9. Aparicchinnabhāgasmiṃ means in a land area with income not previously fixed in this way: "For work done on this land area, so much share should be given." Navasassaṃ is called new grain that has not been cultivated before. Ettakaṃ bhāgaṃ dethā means give such a portion of kahāpaṇa coins. Uṭṭhāpeti means he produces.
Vapathāti cāti etthaca-saddo idha avuttaṃ taṃkattuyogakāle vuccamānaṃ akappiyavacanantaraṃ samuccinoti.Uppāditañcāti etthaca-saddo kahāpaṇaṃ samuccinoti.Sabbanti tathā uppāditakahāpaṇañca evaṃ akappiyavohārena uppāditañcāti sabbaṃ.
Vapathāti cā here, the word ca gathers together another unallowable statement that is being said at the time for doing that same action. Uppāditañcā here, the word ca gathers together kahāpaṇa coins. Sabbaṃ means everything, the kahāpaṇa coins that were produced in that way, and that which was produced by unallowable commerce.
660.Kasathādikaṃ vacanaṃ avatvā ‘‘ettikāya bhūmiyā ettako nāma bhāgo’’ti bhūmiṃ yo ca patiṭṭhāpeti, tassevetamakappiyanti vakkhamānena yojetabbaṃ.Ca-saddo ‘‘yo panā’’ti vakkhamānapuggalantarāpekkho.
660. One should connect to what will be said: "This is unallowable for the one who establishes the land saying, 'So much is the share of this much land,' without saying words such as 'buy'." The word ca is in expectation of another person to be stated who will be mentioned with "yo panā."
661-2.Bhūmiyā sayameva pamāṇassa jānanatthaṃ tūti yojanā, ‘‘ettake bhūmibhāge amhehi sassaṃ kataṃ, ettakaṃ nāma bhāgaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti kasakehi vutte tesaṃ vacanaṃ asaddahitvā sayameva khettabhūmiyā pamāṇaṃ ñātukāmatāyāti attho.Tu-saddo imameva visesaṃ joteti. Yo pana mināti, tassevetamakappiyanti vakkhamānena yojetabbaṃ.Rajjuyāpi ca daṇḍenāti ettha pādenāpi minituṃ na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. ‘‘Rakkhatī’’tiādikiriyāpadehipi evameva yojetabbaṃ.
661-2. The word tu is for the purpose of knowing the measurement of the land by oneself; that is the connection: the meaning is wanting to know the measurement of the field-land by oneself, not trusting the words of the farmers when they say, "We have cultivated grain in so much land area; take so much share." The word tu indicates just this distinction. One should connect to what will be said: "This is unallowable for the one who measures." Regarding rajjuyāpi ca daṇḍenā, they say that it is not allowable to measure even with the foot. The same should be connected with the verbs "rakkhati," etc.
Khaleṭhatvā rakkhatīti dhaññakaraṇe ṭhatvā aññe gaṇhituṃ adatvā pāleti. Kathaṃ rakkhituṃ vaṭṭati, kathaṃ rakkhituṃ na vaṭṭatīti? Taṃ pana vīhiṃ ‘‘idaṃ vā ettakaṃ vā mā gaṇha, idaṃ gahetuṃ na labbhatī’’ti vā ‘‘ito apanehi, idha puñjaṃ karohī’’ti vā evamādinā payogena ce rakkhati, taṃ akappiyaṃ. Sace ‘‘mayi ṭhite rakkhitaṃ hotī’’ti rakkhati, gaṇhante vā passitvā ‘‘kiṃ karothā’’ti bhaṇati, vaṭṭati. Rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpade dvāraṃ pidahitvā rakkhantena vasitabbanti hi vuttantigaṇṭhipadevuttanayena veditabbo. Aññasmimpigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ ‘‘thenetvā gaṇhante sati etaṃ bho pavattiṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa kiṃ ārocessāmīti paṭipucchituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadantī’’ti.Nīharāpetīti etthāpi sace pariyāyena vadati, vaṭṭatīti vadanti.Tassevetamakappiyanti idaṃ khettaminanādiṃ karontena laddhabbato aññassa abhinavuppāditassa abhāvā aññesaṃ vaṭṭatīti dvīsugaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.
Khale ṭhatvā rakkhati means standing at the threshing floor and guarding it without giving (permission) for others to take. How is it allowable to guard, and how is it not allowable to guard? If, indeed, he guards that rice with an expression such as, "Do not take this or so much," or "It is not permitted to take this," or "Move it away from here; make a pile here," that is unallowable. If he guards it (thinking,) "It is guarded while I am standing here," or if seeing them taking, he says, "What are you doing?", it is allowable. For it was stated in the Rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇa Sikkhāpada that one is allowed to stay with the door closed while guarding it; it should be understood according to the method stated in the Gaṇṭhipada. It is also stated in another Gaṇṭhipada: "If thieves are taking it away, it is allowable to ask back, 'Well, what should we announce this procedure to the Bhikkhu Saṅgha?'" Regarding nīharāpeti, they say that it is allowable if he speaks indirectly. Tassevetamakappiyaṃ means because there is no new arising of what has been obtained by the one who does this field-measurement, etc., for another, it is allowable for others, so it is stated in two Gaṇṭhipadas.
663.‘‘Ettakehi vīhīhi idaṃ āharathā’’ti vuttā sace āharantīti yojanā. Ettha‘‘tassevetamakappiya’’nti idaṃ dhaññassa vicāritattā vuttaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tasseva akappiyaṃ. Kasmā? Dhaññassa vicāritattā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539).
663. If, when they have been told, "Bring this with so much rice," they bring it; that is the connection. Here, "tassevetamakappiyaṃ" is stated because the grain has been assessed. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "It is unallowable for him alone. Why? Because the grain has been assessed" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539).
664.Hiraññenāti kahāpaṇena.‘‘Tamakappiya’’nti idaṃ kahāpaṇānaṃ vicāritattā vuttaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sabbesaṃ akappiyaṃ. Kasmā? Kahāpaṇānaṃ vicāritattā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539).
664. Hiraññena means with kahāpaṇa coins. "Tamakappiya" is stated because the kahāpaṇa coins have been assessed. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "It is unallowable for all. Why? Because the kahāpaṇa coins have been assessed" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539).
665.Pesakārakadāsaṃ vāti pesakārakasaṅkhātaṃ dāsaṃ vā,pesakārotantavāyo.Ārāmikānaṃ nāmena denteti ‘‘ārāmikaṃ dammi, veyyāvaccakaraṃ dammī’’tiādinā nayena dente.
665. Pesakārakadāsaṃ vā means a slave designated as a weaver; pesakāro means weaver. Ārāmikānaṃ nāmena dente means giving in the manner such as, "I give an ārāmika, I give a service-doer," etc.
666.Khīraṃ dadhi takkaṃ sappi navanītantipañcagorasā.
666. Milk, yogurt, buttermilk, ghee, and fresh butter are the five products of the cow.
667.Ajikādīsūtiādi-saddena mahisaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
667. Ajikādīsu the ādi-word includes the buffalo.
669.Paṭisiddhepīti paṭikkhittepi.Mūlaṃ datvāti kappiyabhaṇḍamūlaṃ datvā. Kukkuṭādayo pana ‘‘sukhena vasantū’’ti araññeyeva vissajjetabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kukkuṭasūkare ‘sukhaṃ jīvantū’ti araññe vissajjetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539). Sūkaramayūrādīsupi laddhesu tesaṃ anurūpeyeva visaye vissajjetabbā.
669. Paṭisiddhepī means even when refused. Mūlaṃ datvā means giving the price for allowable goods. But chickens and the like should be released in the forest itself so that they may live happily. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "It is allowable to release chickens and pigs in the forest so that they may live happily" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539). When pigs, peacocks, and the like have been obtained, they should be released in a suitable place for them.
671.‘‘Tikkhattu’’ntiādigāthāya ko sambandho? ‘‘Raññā vā rājabhoggenā’’tiādigāthāya saṅgahitanayena rājarājāmaccabrāhmaṇagahapatādīsu yena kenaci attanā vā cīvaracetāpannena cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā ‘‘itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ cīvarena acchādehī’’ti vatvā taṃ cīvaracetāpannasaṅkhātaṃ cīvaramūlaṃ datvā pahitadūtena vā bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘idaṃ kho bhante āyasmantaṃ uddissa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ, paṭiggaṇhātu āyasmā cīvaracetāpanna’’nti yadi vucceyya, bhikkhunā ‘‘na kho mayaṃ āvuso cīvaracetāpannaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma, cīvarañca kho mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma kālena kappiya’’nti vutte sace tena ‘‘atthi panāyasmato koci veyyāvaccakaro’’ti vutte cīvaratthikena bhikkhunā ‘‘eso kho āvuso bhikkhūnaṃ veyyāvaccakaro’’ti ārāmike vā upāsake vā dassite yadi so tassa attanā āharitvā ‘‘imassa bhikkhuno cīvarena atthe sati iminā cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā acchādehī’’ti vatvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘yaṃ kho bhante āyasmā veyyāvaccakaraṃ niddisi, saññatto so mayā, upasaṅkamatu āyasmā kālena, cīvarena taṃ acchādessatī’’ti yadi vadeyya, tena cīvaratthikena bhikkhunā kiṃ kātabbanti bhagavatā vuttanti āhāti ayamimissā gāthāya sambandho.
671. What is the connection with the verse beginning with "tikkhattuṃ"? The connection with this verse is that the Blessed One stated what should be done by a bhikkhu who desires a robe, (when) a robe-price has been raised by anyone among kings, royal officers, brahmins, householders, etc., according to the method included in the verse beginning with "raññā vā rājabhoggena," or by oneself, and having had a robe made with the robe-price, it has been said, "Clothe such-and-such bhikkhu with a robe," and if a messenger sent having given that robe-price, designated as a robe-price, approaches the bhikkhu and says, "Venerable sir, this robe-price has been brought intending (it) for the venerable one; may the venerable one accept the robe-price," if the bhikkhu says, "Friend, we do not accept a robe-price; but we accept a robe when it is allowable and at the right time," if he then says, "Does the venerable one have any service-doer?", if the bhikkhu desiring a robe points out an ārāmika or a lay follower, (and) if he approaches him by himself and says, "If this bhikkhu needs a robe, have a robe made by this one and clothe (him)," and approaching that bhikkhu, says, "Venerable sir, the one whom the venerable one pointed out as a service-doer, I have informed him; may the venerable one approach (him) at the right time; he will clothe (you) with a robe."
Tikkhattuṃ codanā vuttāti ‘‘cīvaratthikena bhikkhave bhikkhunā veyyāvaccakaro upasaṅkamitvā dvattikkhattuṃ codetabbo sāretabbo ‘attho me āvuso cīvarenā’’ti tikkhattuṃ codanā kātabbāti vuttā.
Tikkhattuṃ codanā vuttā means it has been said, "Bhikkhus, a bhikkhu desiring a robe should approach the service-doer and urge (him) two or three times, remind (him), (saying,) 'Friend, I need a robe'; an urging should be done three times."
Chakkhattuṃ ṭhānamabravīti ‘‘dvattikkhattuṃ codayamāno sārayamāno taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce abhinipphādeyya, catukkhattuṃ pañcakkhattuṃ chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtena uddissa ṭhātabba’’nti (pārā. 538) vuttattā tikkhattuṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘attho me āvuso cīvarenā’’ti katāya codanāya na nippajjeyya, tena puna gantvā yaṃ kiñci avatvā ‘‘na āsane nisīditabbaṃ, na āmisaṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ, na dhammo bhāsitabbo’’ti (pārā. 539) vacanato ṭhānabhañjanakaṃ nisajjādiṃ kiñci akatvā ‘‘kiṃ kāraṇaṃ āgatosī’’ti pucchite ‘‘jānāhi, āvuso’’ti ettakamattaṃ vatvā ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena chakkhattuṃ ṭhānaṃ saddhammavaracakkavattinā bhagavatā desitanti vuttaṃ hoti.
Chakkhattuṃ ṭhānamabravī means because it was said, "If, when being urged two or three times, being reminded, he would produce that robe, that is skillful; if he would not produce (it), one should stand silently, having (him) in mind, up to four, five, or six times at most" (pārā. 538), if (the robe) is not produced by the urging that has been done three times approaching (him) (saying,) "Friend, I need a robe," then going again without saying anything, (and) without doing anything that would break the standing, such as sitting down, etc., because "one should not sit on a seat, one should not accept food, one should not speak Dhamma" (pārā. 539), when asked, "Why have you come?", it has been said that the Blessed One, the Wheel-turning King of the true Dhamma, taught standing at most six times with a superior limit, saying just that much, "Know, friend."
Yadi codetiyevāti sace ṭhānaṃ akatvā codanāmattaṃ karoti, cha abravīti yojanā, ‘‘codanā’’ti sāmatthiyato labbhati, chakkhattuṃ codetvā sakimpi na ṭhātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
Yadi codetiyevā means if, without standing, he only does urging, the connection is "cha abravīti," it is obtained by implication that "codanā" means it has been stated that one should urge six times and not stand even once.
‘‘codanādiguṇā ṭhitī’’ti, ‘‘kātabbā’’ti seso, ‘‘abravī’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ, ‘‘catukkhattuṃ codetvā catukkhattuṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, pañcakkhattuṃ codetvā dvikkhattuṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, chakkhattuṃ codetvā na ṭhātabba’’nti (pārā. 539) vacanato, ‘‘chakkhattuparama’’nti (pārā. 539) vacanato ca chakkhattuṃ codanāya diguṇā dvādasakkhattukā ṭhiti hotīti siddhattā codanameva akatvā ṭhānamattameva karontassa dvādasakkhattuṃ vuttanayena ṭhātabbamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato paraṃ kātabbaṃ adassetvā ettakeneva nivattetabbanti ñāpento ‘‘tato ce uttari vāyamamāno taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeti, payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 539) vuttanayā āpatti hotīti dasseti.
"codanādiguṇā ṭhitī," "kātabbā" is the remainder, it should be connected with "abravī," because "having urged four times, one should stand four times; having urged five times, one should stand two times; having urged six times, one should not stand" (pārā. 539), and because of "chakkhattuparamaṃ" (pārā. 539), since it is established that standing is twice as much as urging for six urgings, twelve standings should be done, it is stated that for one who only does standing without doing any urging at all, standing should be done in the manner stated twelve times. Showing that it should be stopped with just this much without showing what should be done after that, it shows that an offense is incurred according to the method stated: "But if, striving beyond that, he produces that robe, there is a dukkaṭa in the effort, an expiable offense with the gain" (pārā. 539).
672.‘‘Acodetvā laddhe’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhatvā laddhe’’ti ca gayhamānattā.
672. "Acodetvā laddhe" this is indicative, because "aṭṭhatvā laddhe" is to be taken.
Rājasikkhāpadakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Rājasikkhāpada Story.
Cīvaravaggo paṭhamo.
The First Chapter, Cīvara Vagga.
673.‘‘Ekenāpī’’ti iminā kiṃ pana dvīhi, bahūhi vāti vuttaṃ hoti.Missetvāti antamaso vātena āhaṭenāpi kosiyaṃsunā missetvā.Santhatanti ‘‘santhataṃ nāma santharitvā kataṃ hoti avāyima’’nti (pārā. 544)padabhājaneca ‘‘same bhūmibhāge kosiyaṃsūni uparūpari santharitvā kañjikādīhi siñcitvā kataṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.542)aṭṭhakathāyaca vuttasarūpaṃ kañjikaṃ siñcitvā kosiyaṃsūni attharitvā yāva bahalamicchati, tāva vaḍḍhetvā nisīdananipajjanādiatthaṃ kātabbaṃ santhatanti attho.Kosiyaṃsunāti kosiyakimikosiyassa idantikosiyaṃ,suttaṃ, tassa suttassa aṃsu, tena kosiyaṃsunāti attho.Kārāpentassāti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘karontassā’’tipi gahetabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘kārāpeyyāti ekenāpi kosiyaṃsunā missetvā karoti vā kārāpeti vā’’ti (pārā. 544). Tenevāha ‘‘paratthāya karontassa kārāpentassā’’ti.
673. ‘‘Ekenāpī’’: By this, is it said what about two or many? Missetvā: Having mixed, even with a single strand of silk carried by the wind. Santhata: "Santhata means something made by spreading, not woven," (pāci. 239) and in the Padabhājana and the Aṭṭhakathā it says "Having spread silk threads on an even ground, sprinkling with kanjika etc., what is made is called santhata" (pārā. 544) (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.542). The meaning is that having sprinkled kanjika in the manner described, having spread silk threads, and having increased it to the thickness desired, a santhata should be made for the purpose of sitting and lying down. Kosiyaṃsunā: Kosiyaṃ means that which belongs to silk or silkworms; kosiyaṃ means thread, aṃsu means a strand of that thread; therefore, kosiyaṃsunā means by a strand of silk. Kārāpentassā: Because it is indicative, “karontassā” should also be taken. For it was said, "‘kārāpeyya’ means either he makes it himself having mixed it with even one silk thread, or he has it made." (pārā. 544) Therefore, he said, “karontassa kārāpentassa,” to one making or having it made for another.
675.Bhūmattharaṇanti parikammakatāya bhūmiyā chavirakkhanatthāya attharitabbaṃ attharaṇaṃ.Bhisināma mañcabhisi, pīṭhabhisīti dvayaṃ.Bibbohanaṃupadhānaṃ.
675. Bhūmattharaṇa: A covering to be spread on the prepared ground to protect the skin. Bhisi means two kinds of bhisi: bed bhisi and seat bhisi. Bibbohanaṃ: A pillow.
Kosiyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Silk Cloth.
676.Kāḷakeḷakalomānanti ‘‘kāḷakaṃ nāma dve kāḷakāni jātiyā kāḷakaṃ vā rajanakāḷakaṃ vā’’ti (pārā. 549) vacanato evaṃ kāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ.Suddhānanti itaravaṇṇehi eḷakalomehi amissānaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘suddhakāḷakānanti suddhānaṃ kāḷakānaṃ, aññehi amissitakāḷakānanti attho’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.547).Kareyyāti karontassa ca kārāpentassa cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘kārāpeyyāti karoti vā kārāpeti vā’’ti.Āpatti hotīti ‘‘payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiya’’ntipāḷiyaṃvuttaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭañca nissaggiyapācittiyañca āha.
676. Kāḷakeḷakalomāna: Thus, of black goat hairs, because it is said, "‘Kāḷaka’ means two kinds of black: either black by nature or dyed black" (pārā. 549). Suddhāna: Of pure goat hairs, unmixed with goat hairs of other colors. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, “suddhakāḷakānaṃ means of pure black, of unmixed black hairs, is the meaning” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.547). Kareyyā: It is said of one doing and one having done. As it says, "‘kārāpeyya’ means either he makes it himself or he has it made." Āpatti hoti: The Pāḷi says "dukkata for the effort, and nissaggiya upon acquisition," so he means both the dukkata for the initial effort and the nissaggiya pācittiya.
Suddhakāḷakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Pure Black Cloth.
677.Odātaṃ tulaṃ vā bahuṃ vā sabbameva vā gahetvānāti yojanā.Kapilampi vāti etthāpi evameva yojetabbaṃ. Etthasabbameva vāti santhatassa gahetabbaṃ sabbameva vā lomaṃ.Karontassāti ettha ‘‘santhata’’nti adhikārato labbhati. ‘‘Nava’’nti idaṃ ‘‘karontassā’’ti padasāmatthiyena labbhati, navaṃ santhataṃ karontassāti attho, ‘‘anāpattī’’ti iminā sambandho.Kapilampi vātivākārena pakārantarenāpi karontassa anāpattiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Seyyathidaṃ? ‘‘Navaṃ pana bhikkhunā santhataṃ kārayamānena dve bhāgā suddhakāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ ādātabbā tatiyaṃ odātānaṃ catutthaṃ gocariyāna’’nti (pārā. 553)mātikāyaanuññātappakāro veditabbo.
677. The construction is, having taken white cotton, either much or all of it. Kapilampi vā: Here too, it should be construed in the same way. Here, sabbameva vā should be taken for the santhata; or all the hair. Karontassā: Here, "santhata" is obtained from the context of "santhata". "Nava" is obtained by the force of the word "karontassā"; the meaning is, to one making a new santhata, and this is connected with "anāpatti". Kapilampi vā: by the particle vā, it includes also non-offense for one making it in a different way. How is this? The method allowed in the Mātikā should be understood, "A bhikkhu, having a new santhata made, should take two parts of pure black goat hair, a third of white, and a fourth of miscellaneous" (pārā. 553).
‘‘odātaṃ kapilampi vā’’ti etassa ‘‘bahuṃ vā’’ti visesanena kāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ yathāvuttabhāgadvayato adhikaṃ eḷakalomampi na gahetabbanti dīpeti kevalānaṃ kāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ aggahetabbatāya paṭhamasikkhāpadeneva vuttattā.‘‘Sabbameva vā’’ti imināpi purimasikkhāpade viya ime odātādayo sabbe kevalā na gahetabbā na hontīti dassitaṃ hoti.‘‘Anāpattī’’ti iminā evaṃ akatvā aññena pakārena karontassa āpatti hotīti byatirekato dīpitaṃ hoti.
‘‘odātaṃ kapilampi vā’’: By the specification "bahuṃ vā" of this, it shows that even more goat hair than the aforementioned two parts of black goat hair should not be taken, because the non-acceptance of exclusively black goat hair was already stated by the first training rule. ‘‘Sabbameva vā’’: By this also, as in the previous training rule, it is shown that all these exclusively white etc., should not and cannot be taken. ‘‘Anāpattī’’: By this, it is shown by way of exclusion that offense occurs for one doing it in a different way, not like this.
Seyyathidaṃ? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘anādā ce bhikkhu dve bhāge suddhakāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ tatiyaṃ odātānaṃ catutthaṃ gocariyānaṃ navaṃ santhataṃ kārāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti. Yattakappamāṇehi eḷakalomehi navaṃ santhataṃ kātukāmo hoti, te lome catubhāgaṃ tulayitvā dve tule vā ūne vā kāḷakalome gahetvā ekaṃ tulaṃ odātehi vā ekaṃ tulaṃ gocariyehi vā kāḷakehi vā ūne katvā dvīhipi adhike vā katvā kāḷakalome vajjetvā dvīsu ekaṃ vā dve eva vā gahetvā kātuñca kārāpetuñca vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ anāpattidassanena sabbopi sikkhāpadattho saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo.
How is this? For it was said by the Blessed One, “If a bhikkhu, not taking two parts of pure black goat hair, a third of white, and a fourth of miscellaneous, has a new santhata made, it is nissaggiya pācittiya.” Having weighed the hairs with however much measure of goat hairs he wishes to make a new santhata, having divided those hairs into four parts, having taken two parts or less of black goat hair, and having made one part less with white or one part with miscellaneous or black, having avoided black goat hair, and having taken one or two from the two, it is allowable to make or have made. Thus, it should be seen that the meaning of the entire training rule is included by the showing of non-offense.
678.‘‘Anukkamenā’’ti iminā imameva aggahetvā purimānantaraṃ vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca gahetabbanti dīpeti. Nissajjitvā laddhānipīti yojanā. ‘‘Apī’’ti iminā ‘‘aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 555) vuttadukkaṭañca ‘‘nissaggiyaṃ cīvaraṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 468) paṭhamanissaggiyasikkhāpade vuttanayena ihāpi ‘‘nissaggiyaṃ santhataṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttampi dhammasaṅgahakārakehi peyyālavasena saṃkhittaṃ taṃ dukkaṭañcāti idaṃ dvayaṃ saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
678. ‘‘Anukkamenā’’: By this, it shows that one should take not just this one, but also the two training rules stated immediately before. The construction is, having relinquished it and then acquired it. By ‘‘apī’’, both the dukkata stated, “If he enjoys it having obtained something made by another, there is an offense of dukkata” (pārā. 555), and also in the manner stated in the first nissaggiya training rule, "If he enjoys a nissaggiya cīvara without relinquishing it, there is an offense of dukkata" (pārā. 468), here also, "If he enjoys a nissaggiya santhata without relinquishing it, there is an offense of dukkata," and also that dukkata which was condensed in passing by the compilers of the Dhamma-Sangaha, this pair is included, so it should be seen.
679.Tatiyaṃ tu kriyākriyanti idaṃ tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ pana ‘‘dve bhāgā suddhakāḷakāna’’ntiādinā (pārā. 554) vuttanayena aggahetvā kāḷakānaṃ atirekaggahaṇavasena ananuññātappakārena karaṇato kiriyākiriyaṃ nāma. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ādāya ca anādāya ca karaṇato kiriyākiriya’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.552).
679. Tatiyaṃ tu kriyākriyaṃ: But the third training rule is called "doing and not doing" because of making in an unallowed manner due to taking an excess of black goat hair, not taking it in the manner stated with "dve bhāgā suddhakāḷakānaṃ," etc. (pārā. 554). As the Aṭṭhakathā says, “Because of making both taking and not taking, it is doing and not doing” (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.552).
Dvebhāgakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Two Parts.
680.Channaṃvassānaṃ orenāti pubbe santhatassa katadivasato paṭṭhāya upari channaṃ vassānaṃ abbhantareti attho.Hoti nissaggiyāpattīti chabbassantare katasanthataṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti, kārakassa ca pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho.Bhikkhusammutiṃ ṭhapetvāti santhataṃ gahetvā addhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjituṃ asamatthassa gilānassa ‘‘ahaṃ bhante gilāno na sakkomi santhataṃ ādāya pakkamituṃ, sohaṃ bhante saṅghaṃ santhatasammutiṃ yācāmī’’ti (pārā. 559) saṅghamajjhe nisajja añjaliṃ paggahetvā tikkhattuṃ yācite ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya gataṭṭhāne chabbassānaṃ antopi santhataṃ kātuṃ saṅghena dinnasammutiṃ vināti attho.
680. Channaṃ vassānaṃ orenā: Within six years, beginning from the day the santhata was made. Hoti nissaggiyāpattī: A santhata made within six years becomes nissaggiya, and there is a pācittiya for the maker. Bhikkhusammutiṃ ṭhapetvā: Except for the approval of the monks, because a sick person who is unable to take the santhata and travel on the road says, "bhante, I am sick and unable to depart taking the santhata, therefore, bhante, I ask the Sangha for approval regarding the santhata," (pārā. 559) sitting in the midst of the Sangha, raising his joined hands, having requested three times, except for the approval given by the Sangha by means of a motion and a second proclamation to make a santhata within six years in the place to which he has gone.
682.Chabbassāni karontassāti ettha ‘‘yadā paripuṇṇāni, tadā’’ti seso, chabbassesu paripuṇṇesu santhataṃ karontassāti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yadā chabbassāni paripuṇṇāni honti, tadā santhataṃ karotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.557).Taduddhampīti chabbassato uparipi.Vitāneti vitānanimittaṃ karontassa.Sāṇipākāreti pākārasadisatirokaraṇīyanimittaṃ karontassa.Nissajjitvā katepi cāti purāṇasanthate aññassa datvā aññasmiṃ santhate orato channaṃ vassānaṃ katepi ca anāpattīti yojanā. Ayamanāpattivāro neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāsu dissati, tasmā so ācariyaparamparābhato ācariyena dassitoti viññāyati. Sādhāraṇavinicchayaṃ pana ‘‘anantarassimassāpi, viseso nupalabbhatī’’ti vakkhati.
682. Chabbassāni karontassā: Here, "yadā paripuṇṇāni, tadā" is the remainder; the meaning is, to one making a santhata when six years are complete. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "yadā chabbassāni paripuṇṇāni honti, tadā santhataṃ karotī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.557). Taduddhampī: Even above six years. Vitāne: To one making it for the purpose of a canopy. Sāṇipākāre: To one making it for the purpose of a railing similar to a wall. Nissajjitvā katepi cā: Also, if having given the old santhata to another, and having made another santhata within six years, there is no offense. This case of non-offense is seen neither in the Pāḷi nor in the commentaries; therefore, it is understood that it was shown by the teacher, having come from the lineage of teachers. But he will state a general judgment that "anantarassimassāpi, viseso nupalabbhatī."
Chabbassakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Six Years.
683.Anādāyāti navaṃ nisīdanasanthataṃ karontena bhikkhunā tassa vivaṇṇakaraṇatthāyapāḷiyaṃ‘‘purāṇasanthatassa sāmantā sugatavidatthi ādātabbā dubbaṇṇakaraṇāyā’’ti (pārā. 567) yā ādātuṃ vuttā, taṃ purāṇasanthatassa chinnamukhāvattato sugatavidatthiṃ adatvā. Evametaṃ vuttanti kathaṃ viññāyatīti? ‘‘Anādānavasenassa, sugatassa vidatthiyā’’ti vakkhamānena viññāyati.Santhateti ettha ‘‘purāṇe’’iti cakāretuṃ katañcāti ettha ‘‘navaṃ nisīdanaṃ santhata’’nti ca seso, purāṇe santhate asante sāmantā sugatavidatthiṃ anādāya navaṃ nisīdanasanthataṃ karontassa anāpatti. Aññassatthāya navaṃ nisīdanasanthataṃ kāretuṃ, navaṃ nisīdanasanthataṃ aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjituñca anāpattīti yojanā.
683. Anādāyā: By a bhikkhu making a new sitting cloth, without taking the Sugata's span from around the edge of an old santhata to disfigure it, which was stated in the Pāḷi "purāṇasanthatassa sāmantā sugatavidatthi ādātabbā dubbaṇṇakaraṇāyā" (pārā. 567) to be taken. How is it understood that this was said? It is understood by what will be said, "Anādānavasenassa, sugatassa vidatthiyā." Santhate: Here, "purāṇe" and kāretuṃ katañcā: here, "navaṃ nisīdanaṃ santhataṃ" is the remainder; there is no offense to one making a new sitting cloth without taking the Sugata's span from around the edge when an old santhata is not present. There is no offense also to having a new sitting cloth made for another, and to enjoying a new sitting cloth made by another.
‘‘Aññassatthāyakāretu’’nti idamettha pācittiyeneva anāpattidassananti gahetabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘aññassatthāya karoti vā kārāpeti vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 569) vuttattā caaṭṭhakathāya,tabbaṇṇanāsu ca adissamānattā vā taṃ na vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Anāpatti chabbassāni karoti…pe… aññassatthāya karoti vā kārāpeti vā’’ti (pārā. 564) anantarasikkhāpade vuttamoloketvā vā dukkaṭassa ca vihitattā pācittiyena anāpattibhāvaṃ sandhāya likhitanti viññāyati.Katañca paribhuñjitunti ettha ‘‘aññenā’’ti vattabbaṃ, iminā ‘‘aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, anāpattī’’ti pāṭhova dassito.
‘‘Aññassatthāya kāretu’’: Here, this should be taken as showing non-offense only with a pācittiya. Therefore, because it was said, "aññassatthāya karoti vā kārāpeti vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (pārā. 569) and because it is not seen in the Aṭṭhakathā and its commentaries, that should not be stated. Or, having looked at what was said in the immediately preceding training rule, "Anāpatti chabbassāni karoti…pe… aññassatthāya karoti vā kārāpeti vā" (pārā. 564) and because a dukkata is prescribed, it is understood that it was written intending to show non-offense with a pācittiya. Katañca paribhuñjituṃ: Here, "aññena" should be stated; by this, the reading "aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, anāpattī" is shown.
684.Sugatassa vidatthiyā anādānavasena caassasanthatassa karaṇena ca satthārāetaṃsikkhāpadaṃ kiriyākiriyaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
684. Because of not taking the Sugata's span, and because of making the santhata without this, this training rule was stated by the Teacher as doing and not doing.
685.Nanu ca imassa sikkhāpadassaaṭṭhakathāya‘‘samuṭṭhānādīni kiriyākiriyattā imassa sikkhāpadassa dvebhāgasikkhāpadasadisānī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.567) vuttāni, iha ‘‘sañcarittasamā’’ti kasmā vuttānīti? Vuccate – dvebhāgasikkhāpade ‘‘samuṭṭhānādīnipi kosiyasikkhāpadasadisānevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.552)aṭṭhakathāyavuttāni, kosiyasikkhāpade samuṭṭhānādīnaṃ sañcarittena samabhāvassa vuttattā, mūlameva saritvā kiriyākiriyasaṅkhātavisesassa visuṃ dassitattā avasiṭṭhavinicchayamattaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Imaṃ visesaṃ muñcitvā avasiṭṭhavinicchayena dvīsu sikkhāpadesu sādhāraṇavinicchayassa avisesataṃ dassetumāha‘‘anantarassā’’tiādi.
685. But indeed, in the Aṭṭhakathā to this training rule, "samuṭṭhānādīni kiriyākiriyattā imassa sikkhāpadassa dvebhāgasikkhāpadasadisānī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.567) are stated, why are "sañcarittasamā" stated here? It is said: in the training rule about two parts, "samuṭṭhānādīnipi kosiyasikkhāpadasadisānevā" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.552) are stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, because in the training rule about silk cloth, the similarity of the origin etc., with movement was stated, having remembered the root itself, because the distinction called doing and not doing was shown separately, it should be taken that it was said thus intending merely the remaining decision. In order to show the non-distinction of the general judgment in the two training rules by the remaining decision excluding this distinction, he says ‘‘anantarassā’’ etc.
Nisīdanasanthatakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Sitting Cloth.
686-7.Gacchanteti tiyojanapūraṇaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamma gacchante.Yāneti sakaṭādike.Lomānīti eḷakalomāni.Sāmikassāti yānādisāmino.Ajānatoti anādare sāmivacanaṃ. Addhānamaggapaṭipanno yo pana bhikkhu eḷakalomaṃ labhitvā ‘‘tiyojanaparamaṃ sahatthā hāretabbānī’’ti (pārā. 573) anuññātattā tiyojanabbhantare sahatthenāpi haritvā tiyojanātikkame paresaṃ yānādīsu sāmikesu ajānantesu ‘‘ete harissantī’’ti cintetvā yadi ṭhapeyyāti attho.Tesūti yesu eḷakalomāni ṭhapitāni, tesu yānādīsutiyojanamatītesubhikkhussa payogaṃ vināpi tiyojanaṃ atikkantesu tassabhikkhuno āpattihotīti yojanā, tassa bhikkhuno ‘‘paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ tiyojanaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 573) vuttattā dukkaṭapācittiyā hontīti attho.
686-7. Gacchante: While going beyond a place that is a full three yojanas. Yāne: In a cart etc. Lomāni: Goat hairs. Sāmikassā: Of the owner of the cart etc. Ajānato: The word sāmikassa indicates lack of concern. But the meaning is, if a bhikkhu traveling on the road, having obtained goat hair, because it is allowed that "they may be carried by hand for at most three yojanas," (pārā. 573) having carried them by his own hand within three yojanas, thinks "these will carry them," and leaves them in carts etc. belonging to others without their knowledge beyond three yojanas. Tesū: In those carts etc. in which the goat hairs are left, tiyojanamatītesu when they have gone beyond three yojanas, even without the effort of the bhikkhu, there is āpatti for that bhikkhu, the construction. Because it was said for that bhikkhu that "the first step goes beyond three yojanas, there is an offense of dukkata. The second step goes beyond, it is nissaggiya pācittiya," (pārā. 573) the meaning is that there are dukkata and pācittiya.
Ayaṃ nayoti bhikkhuno payogaṃ vinā yattha eḷakalomāni ṭhapitāni,tesuyānādīsu tiyojanaṃ atikkamantesu āpatti hotīti ayamattho daṭṭhabboti attho.
Ayaṃ nayo: The meaning is that this meaning should be seen: where the goat hairs were left, tesu in those carts etc., when they go beyond three yojanas, there is offense.
688.Agacchanteti tiyojanabbhantare ṭhite.‘‘Abhirūhitvā’’ti idaṃ anāpattikāraṇesu ekaṃ dassetumāha. ‘‘Bhūmiyañhi ṭhatvā dento, avhāyanto vā purato gacchati, esevanayo’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Anāpattivāre ‘‘aññaṃ harāpetī’’ti vacanato attanā pesite aññasmiṃ harante vaṭṭatīti dassetumāha‘‘sace sāreti vaṭṭatī’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ panaññaṃ harāpeti, vacanena virujjhatī’’ti.
688. Agacchante: When it remains within three yojanas. ‘‘Abhirūhitvā’’: He says this to show one of the reasons for non-offense. ‘‘Bhūmiyañhi ṭhatvā dento, avhāyanto vā purato gacchati, esevanayo’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. In the section on non-offense, because it is said "aññaṃ harāpetī," in order to show that it is allowable when another sent by oneself is carrying, he says ‘‘sace sāreti vaṭṭatī’’. Therefore he says, “taṃ panaññaṃ harāpeti, vacanena virujjhatī.”
690.Kaṇṇacchiddesūti attano kaṇṇabilesu.
690. Kaṇṇacchiddesū: In his own ear holes.
691.Anāpattivāre ‘‘katabhaṇḍa’’nti vuttattā tattha antamaso suttakena baddhamattampi katabhaṇḍamevāti āha‘‘suttakena ca bandhitvā’’ti.Veṇiṃ katvāti kudrūsasīsapalālaveṇisadisaṃ veṇiṃ katvā.Āpatti paridīpitāti ‘‘veṇiṃ katvā harati, idaṃ nidhānamukhaṃ nāma, āpattiyevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.575)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
691. Because "katabhaṇḍa" is stated in the section on non-offense, there, he says, ‘‘suttakena ca bandhitvā’’, even just tying it with a thread is considered prepared goods. Veṇiṃ katvā: Having made a braid similar to a kudrusa, sīsa or palāla braid. Āpatti paridīpitā: It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "veṇiṃ katvā harati, idaṃ nidhānamukhaṃ nāma, āpattiyevā" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.575).
692.Suṅkaghātanti ettha ‘‘taṃ ṭhāna’’nti seso, yadi taṃ ṭhānaṃ suṅkaghātanti yojanā, tiyojanosānaṭṭhānaṃ yadi suṅkaghātaṭṭhānaṃ bhaveyyāti attho.Anuppatvāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā. Corādīhi upadduto vā gacchati, yo aññavihito vā gacchatīti yojanā.Āpattīti ettha āpatti tassa gacchatoti labbhati. Ettha‘‘āpattī’’ti iminā sikkhāpadena āpattimāha. Imissā acittakatāya tesaṃ dvinnampi hoti. Adinnādānapārājikaṃ pana sacittakatāya etesaṃ na hoti. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yā hi tattha āpatti, sā idha anāpatti. Yā idha āpatti, sā tattha anāpattī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.572). Theyyacittena harato bhaṇḍagghavasena pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭesu ekaṃ hoti. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘adinnādāne pana suṅkaghāte āpatti hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.572).
692. Suṅkaghātanti: Here, "taṃ ṭhānaṃ" (that place) is understood. The construction is: if that place is a custom-house; meaning, if a place within three yojanas happens to be a custom-house. Anuppatvāti: having arrived at that place. The construction is: either one goes, being harassed by thieves, etc., or one goes another way. Āpattīti: Here, the offense is obtained for one who goes. In this case, "āpattī" refers to the offense by this training rule. This offense, being unintentional, applies to both of them. However, the pārājika for theft does not apply to them, as it is intentional. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā says: "Indeed, the offense there is a non-offense here. The offense here is a non-offense there" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.572). If one steals with the intention of theft, depending on the value of the goods, one incurs a pārājika, thullaccaya, or dukkata. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā says: "However, in the case of theft at a custom-house, there is an offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.572).
693.Tiyojananti ettha haraṇakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.‘‘Harantassā’’ti imassa kammadīpakaṃ ‘‘lomānī’’ti idaṃ pakaraṇato labbhati. ‘‘Anāpatti pakāsitā’’ti idaṃ sabbattha vakkhamānena sambandhanīyaṃ. Tāniyeva paccāharantassāti yojanā.Tiyojananti ettha taṃyeva tiyojananti labbhati. Attanā gataṃ tiyojanaṃ puna tāneva lomāni gahetvā paccāgacchantassāti attho.
693. Tiyojananti: Here, the word is used in the sense of the extreme connection in the act of carrying. The word "lomāni" (hairs) indicating the object of "harantassa" (while carrying) is obtained from the context. "Anāpatti pakāsitā" (non-offense is declared) should be connected to everything that is going to be said. The construction is: while bringing back those very things. Tiyojananti: Here, "taṃyeva tiyojanaṃ" (that very three yojanas) is obtained. The meaning is: having gone three yojanas by oneself, if one comes back carrying those very hairs.
694.Nivāsatthāya vā gantvāti tiyojanabbhantare vā sīmāya vā āvāse vasitukāmatāya gantvā.Tato paraṃ harantassāti tasmiṃ āvāse uddesādiṃ alabhitvā tato paraṃ aññasmiṃ āvāse vasitukāmatāya punapi tiyojanaṃ harantassāti attho. Imināva nayena tatopi aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ, tatopi aññanti suddhacittena gatagataṭṭhānato punapi paramparaṃ ṭhānaṃ gamanavasena yojanasatampi harato doso natthīti idampi vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘evaṃ yojanasatampi harantassa anāpattī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.575).Acchinnaṃ vāpi labhitvā haratopīti ‘‘corāvahaṭapariccattaṃ labhitvā harantassa. Idha sabbattheva ‘‘nivāsatthāya vā gantvā’’tiādike anāpattivāre paṭhamaladdhaṭṭhānato pabhuti atirekatiyojanampi harantassa anāpattīti attho viññāyati.Nissaṭṭhaṃ labhitvāti nissajjitvā vinayakammaṃ katvā dinnaṃ labhitvā.
694. Nivāsatthāya vā gantvāti: Having gone within three yojanas or within the boundary or to a dwelling, desiring to reside. Tato paraṃ harantassāti: Not having found a suitable place in that dwelling, if one again carries for three yojanas desiring to reside in another dwelling. In this way, even if one carries for a hundred yojanas from one place to another with a pure intention, going from each place, there is no offense. This is also stated. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "Thus, even carrying for a hundred yojanas, there is no offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.575). Acchinnaṃ vāpi labhitvā haratopī: Having obtained what was snatched away by thieves or abandoned and carrying it. Here, in all the cases of non-offense like "nivāsatthāya vā gantvā" etc., it is understood that there is no offense even if one carries beyond the three yojanas from the place where it was first obtained. Nissaṭṭhaṃ labhitvāti: Having obtained what was given after relinquishing it and performing a Vinaya act.
695.Aññenāti tāni hārinā aññena.Katabhaṇḍakanti ‘‘kambalakojavasanthatādiṃ yaṃ kiñci antamaso suttakena baddhamattampī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.575)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaeḷakalomehi katabhaṇḍakaṃ.
695. Aññenāti: By another person other than the carrier. Katabhaṇḍakanti: "Any bundle made of woolen blankets, coarse cloth, bedding, etc., even if tied only with a thread" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.575) is the bundle made of sheep's wool, as stated in the Aṭṭhakathā.
696.Idaṃ samuṭṭhānanti idaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānanatāya vā ñatvāpi cīvarādiparikkhāresu lomassa allinabhāvaṃ ajānitvāpi vā tiyojanaṃ atikkāmentassa arahatopi imāya āpattiyā sambhavato‘‘acitta’’nti āha.
696. Idaṃ samuṭṭhānanti: This is the origination of sheep's wool. Because this offense can happen even to an arahant who exceeds three yojanas, either not knowing the rule or knowing it but not knowing that the wool is attached to the requisites like robes etc., he said "acitta" (unintentional).
Eḷakalomakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sheep's Wool Story.
697.Eḷakalomadhovāpanakathā uttānāyeva.
697. The story of washing sheep's wool is very clear.
Eḷakalomadhovāpanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sheep's Wool Washing Story.
698.Gaṇheyya vāti ettha ‘‘yo’’ti seso.‘‘Gaṇheyya vā gaṇhāpeyya vā’’ti iminā ‘‘tatthattano panatthāyā’’ti vakkhamānattā ca ‘‘nissajjitvā’’tiādivacanato ca attano atthāya uggaṇheyya vā uggaṇhāpeyya vāti vuttaṃ hoti.Vākārena ‘‘upanikkhittaṃ vā sādiyeyyā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘idaṃ ayyassa hotū’’ti upanikkhittaṃ ce sādiyatīti attho.
698. Gaṇheyya vāti: Here, "yo" (who) is understood. From "Gaṇheyya vā gaṇhāpeyya vā" (he may accept or cause to be accepted) and because of what is going to be said as "tatthattano panatthāyā" (for his own sake), and from the statement "nissajjitvā" (having relinquished), it is said that he may accept or cause to be accepted for his own sake. By the word "vā" (or), it includes "upanikkhittaṃ vā sādiyeyyā" (or he may approve of what has been deposited); meaning, if he approves of what has been deposited, saying, "let this be for the venerable one."
Rajatanti aññattha sajjhu vuccati, idha pana vohārūpagakahāpaṇādi vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃpāḷiyaṃ‘‘rajataṃ nāma kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako, ye vohāraṃ gacchantī’’ti (pārā. 584). Idha kahāpaṇādīnaṃ sarūpaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
Rajatanti: elsewhere it is called sajjhu, but here it is called kahāpaṇa etc., which is used in transactions. This was said in the Pāḷi: "Rajata means kahāpaṇa, lohamāsaka, dārumāsaka, jatumāsaka, which are used in transactions" (pārā. 584). Here, the nature of kahāpaṇa etc. is in the Aṭṭhakathā:—
‘‘Tattha kahāpaṇoti sovaṇṇamayo vā rūpiyamayo vā pākatiko vā. Lohamāsakoti tambalohādīhi katamāsako. Dārumāsakoti sāradārunā vā veḷupesikāya vā antamaso tālapaṇṇepi rūpaṃ chinditvā katamāsako. Jatumāsakoti lākhāya vā niyyāsena vā rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā katamāsako. ‘Ye vohāraṃ gacchantī’ti iminā pana padena yo yo yattha yattha janapade yadā yadā vohāraṃ gacchati, antamaso aṭṭhimayopi cammamayopi rukkhaphalabījamayopi samuṭṭhāpitarūpopi asamuṭṭhāpitarūpopi sabbo saṅgahito’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584) –
"There, kahāpaṇa means one made of gold, or made of silver, or natural. Lohamāsaka means a māsaka made of copper etc. Dārumāsaka means a māsaka made by cutting a shape from hardwood or bamboo shavings or even a palm leaf. Jatumāsaka means a māsaka made by creating a shape from lacquer or resin. However, by the phrase 'ye vohāraṃ gacchantī' (which are used in transactions), whatever goes into transaction in whatever country at whatever time, even one made of bone, or made of leather, or made of the seed of a tree fruit, or with a shape created, or without a shape created, is all included" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584) —
Vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
It should be understood in the manner stated.
pākatikonāma etarahi pakatikahāpaṇo.Rukkhaphalabījamayoti tintiṇikādirukkhānaṃ phalabījena kato.
pākatikonāma: means the current pakati kahāpaṇa. Rukkhaphalabījamayoti: made from the seed of fruits of trees like tamarind etc.
Jātarūpakaṃsuvaṇṇaṃ. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘jātarūpaṃ nāma satthuvaṇṇo vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 584).Nissajjitvāti ettha ‘‘tenā’’ti labbhati, ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti iminā yujjati, evaṃ sāditabhikkhunāti attho.Nissajjitvāti attanā uggahitaṃ vā parena uggahāpitaṃ vā upanikkhipitassa sādiyanavasena sāditaṃ vā rajataṃ vā jātarūpaṃ vā ‘‘tena bhikkhunā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā’’ti (pārā. 584) vacanato saṅghamajjhe upasaṅkamitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggayha ‘‘ahaṃ bhante rūpiyaṃ paṭiggahesiṃ, idaṃ me nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ nissajjāmī’’ti nissajjitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Jātarūpakaṃ: gold. As the Pāḷi says: "Jātarūpa means gold-colored" (pārā. 584). Nissajjitvāti: Here, "tena" (by him) is obtained, it is connected with "bhikkhunā" (by the bhikkhu), thus, it means by the bhikkhu who has approved. Nissajjitvāti: having approached the Sangha, having arranged the upper robe on one shoulder, having bowed at the feet of the elder bhikkhus, having knelt down, and having held up the joined palms, according to the saying "tena bhikkhunā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā" (pārā. 584) and having said "ahaṃ bhante rūpiyaṃ paṭiggahesiṃ, idaṃ me nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ nissajjāmī" (venerable sirs, I have accepted silver, this is to be forfeited by me, I forfeit this), he has relinquished it.
Āpattidesetabbāvāti attanā eva āpannaṃ nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ tasmiṃ saṅghamajjhe evameva nisīditvā desetabbā. Evaṃ desitā āpatti saṅghānumatena byattena paṭibalena bhikkhunā paṭiggahetabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena āpatti paṭiggahetabbā’’ti (pārā. 584).
Āpatti desetabbāvāti: the nissaggiya pācittiya, which he himself has incurred, should be confessed in that very Sangha assembly in the same way. The offense thus confessed should be accepted by a bhikkhu who is capable and intelligent with the approval of the Sangha. This was said: "The offense should be accepted by a bhikkhu who is intelligent and capable" (pārā. 584).
699.Rajatanti rūpiyaṃ.Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Iminā padadvayena katākataṃ sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Ubhinnaṃ māsakoti jātarūpamāsako, rajatamāsakopi cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idharajatamāsakoti ‘‘rajata’’ntipadabhājane(pārā. 584) vuttakahāpaṇādi pañcappakāro māsako gahito. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘vuttappakāro sabbopi rajatamāsako’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584). Idha ‘‘jātarūpamāsako’’ti visuṃ gahitattā kahāpaṇapadena suvaṇṇakahāpaṇaṃ vajjetvā itaradvayameva vattabbaṃ.‘‘Nissaggiyāvaha’’nti idaṃ attano atthāya uggaṇhanauggaṇhāpanasādiyanāni karontaṃ sandhāyāha. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā vakkhamānanayena dukkaṭāvahañca hoteva.
699. Rajatanti: silver. Jātarūpanti: gold. By these two words, it includes everything whether made or not made. Ubhinnaṃ māsakoti: it is said that it means a gold māsaka and also a silver māsaka. Here, rajatamāsakoti: the five kinds of māsaka like kahāpaṇa etc. mentioned in the padabhājana (pārā. 584) of rajatanti are taken. As the Aṭṭhakathā says: "All the kinds of silver māsaka mentioned" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584). Here, because "jātarūpamāsako" is taken separately, only the other two should be mentioned, excluding the gold kahāpaṇa by the word kahāpaṇa. "Nissaggiyāvaha"nti: this is said referring to one who does the acts of accepting, causing to be accepted, and approving for his own sake. By the method that will be said beginning with "Tatthā", it is indeed the cause of a dukkata.
700-1.Muttādīnaṃimasmiṃ sikkhāpadavibhaṅge avuttattepipācittiyakaṇḍe navamavaggedutiyassa ratanasikkhāpadassapadabhājane‘‘ratanaṃ nāma muttā maṇi veḷuriyo saṅkho silā pavālaṃ rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ lohitaṅko masāragalla’’nti (pāci. 506) vuttānaṃ dasannaṃ ratanānaṃ imasmiṃ sikkhāpade nissaggiyavatthuṃ katvā vuttaṃ rajataṃ, jātarūpañca vajjetvā avasiṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ratanānaṃ dukkaṭavatthubhāvo imassa aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vavatthāpitoti dassanatthamāha‘‘muttā…pe… masāragalla’’nti. Ettha veḷuriyo gāthābandhavasena na vutto, so ekayoganiddiṭṭhānaṃ sattannaṃ ratanānaṃ gahaṇeneva gayhati.Muttādayo yathādassitasarūpāyeva. Brahmajālādisuttantavasenāpi ‘‘akappiyā’’ti siddhānaṃ sattadhaññādīnaṃ paṭiggahaṇe āpattiṃ dassetumāha‘‘dhaññānī’’tiādi.
700-1. Although muttādīnaṃ (pearls etc.) were not mentioned in this section on the training rule, in order to show that in this Aṭṭhakathā, the status of the eight remaining jewels as objects of dukkata, excluding rajata and jātarūpa, which were mentioned making the ten jewels mentioned in the padabhājana (pāci. 506) of the second jewel training rule in the ninth section of the pācittiya chapter as nissaggiya objects in this training rule, it says "muttā…pe… masāragalla". Here, veḷuriya is not mentioned due to the meter of the verse, but it is included by the taking of the seven jewels specified in one designation. Muttā (pearls) etc. are of the same nature as shown. In order to show the offense in accepting the seven kinds of grains etc., which are established as "akappiya" (unallowable) according to Brahmajāla etc. discourses, it says "dhaññānī" etc.
702.Ratanasikkhāpadeyeva‘‘ratanasammata’’nti āgataṃ kappiyavatthuṃ paṭiggaṇhato anāpattibhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘muggamāsādika’’ntiādi.
702. In order to show the state of non-offense for one who accepts the allowable object that came as "ratanasammata" (approved as a jewel) in the jewel training rule itself, it says "muggamāsādika" (mung beans, māsa beans, etc.).
703-4.Evaṃ tippakārena ṭhitaṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhato adhippāyanānattena sambhavantaṃ āpattippabhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.Tatthāti tesu tīsu nissaggiyādivatthūsu.Saṅghādīnanti saṅghagaṇapuggalacetiyādīnaṃ.Tanti nissaggiyavatthuṃ.Sabbatthāyāti sabbesaṃ atthāyāti viggaho. Attano atthāya ca saṅghādīnamatthāya ca dukkaṭavatthuṃ gaṇhantassāpi dukkaṭameva hotīti attho. Avuttasamuccayenetthaca-saddena ‘‘sabbampi nikkhipanatthāya bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena sampaṭicchato upari ratanasikkhāpade āgatavasena pācittiya’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584)aṭṭhakathāyavuttavinicchayavisesassa saṅgaho kato.
703-4. Thus, in order to show the varieties of offenses that occur due to the difference in intention in accepting an object that exists in three ways, it says "tatthā" (there) etc. Tatthāti: in those three objects of nissaggiya etc. Saṅghādīnanti: to the Sangha, group, individual, shrine etc. Tanti: that nissaggiya object. Sabbatthāyāti: the separation is "sabbesaṃ atthāya" (for the sake of all). It means that even for one who accepts an object of dukkata for his own sake and for the sake of the Sangha etc., there is only a dukkata. By the unsaid collection, by the word "ca" (and) here, the special decision stated in the Aṭṭhakathā that "even one who receives everything for the purpose of depositing, headed by the treasurer, there is a pācittiya as it came in the jewel training rule" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584) is included.
705.Kahāpaṇādīnantiādi-saddena suvaṇṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho.‘‘Sahassa’’nti idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ, sahassampīti vuttaṃ hoti.
705. Kahāpaṇādīnanti: By the word "ādi" (etc.), it includes gold etc. "Sahassa" (thousand) is indicative, it means even a thousand.
706.Thavikādīsūtiādi-saddena sithilapūritāni bhājanāni gahitāni.‘‘Sithilabaddhesū’’ti visesanena byatirekavasena ‘‘ghanabaddhe, pana ghanapūrite vā ekāva āpattī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584)aṭṭhakathāsesaṃ dīpeti.
706. Thavikādīsūti: By the word "ādi" (etc.), containers filled loosely are taken. By the specification "sithilabaddhesū" (in loosely tied), it reveals the remainder of the Aṭṭhakathā by way of contrast that "however, in tightly tied or tightly filled, there is only one offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584).
707.Upanikkhittasādiyanakammaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ida’’ntiādi.Gaṇhitukāmopīti ettha ‘‘hotū’’ti seso.Nisedhetabbamevāti kāyena vā vācāya vā ‘‘idaṃ na kappatī’’ti paṭikkhipitabbameva, evaṃ sati anāpattiyevāti attho. Ayamatthoaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kāyavācāhi vā appaṭikkhipitvāpi suddhacitto hutvā ‘nayidaṃ amhākaṃ kappatī’ti na sādiyati, anāpattiyevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584) āgatoyeva.
707. In order to show the act of approving of what has been deposited, it says "ida" (this) etc. Gaṇhitukāmopīti: Here, "hotū" (let it be) is understood. Nisedhetabbamevāti: it should indeed be rejected by body or speech, saying "this is not allowable", in this case, there is indeed no offense. This meaning is already in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Even without rejecting by body or speech, being pure in mind, if he does not approve saying 'this is not allowable for us', there is indeed no offense" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584).
708.Taṃvatthunti tathā paṭikkhittaṃ vatthuṃ.Ṭhapetvā yadi gacchatīti ‘‘tumhe gaṇhatha vā, mā vā, dinnaṃ dinnamevā’’ti sace so ṭhapetvāva gacchati. Yathā taṃ na vinassati, tathā taṃ gopayitabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Añño tattha āgantvā pucchatī’’tiādināaṭṭhakathāyavuttanayena tatthāgatena kappiyakārakena ‘‘kimida’’nti pucchite sarūpaṃ āvi katvā ‘‘gopayissāmahaṃ bhante, guttaṭṭhānaṃ dassethā’’ti vutte ‘‘imaṃ gahetvā ehī’’ti avatvā sattabhūmikampi pāsādaṃ abhiruhitvā ‘‘idha ṭhapehī’’ti avatvā ‘‘idaṃ guttaṭṭhāna’’nti surakkhitaṭṭhānaṃ dassetvā tattha ṭhapite aggaḷaṃ datvā rakkhitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
708. Taṃ vatthunti: That object that was thus rejected. Ṭhapetvā yadi gacchatīti: If he leaves it there saying "whether you accept or not, what is given is indeed given." It should be protected so that it does not get destroyed. In the manner stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, if a suitable person who has come there asks "what is this?", after revealing the nature, if he says "venerable sir, I will protect it, show me a safe place", without saying "take this and come", even after ascending a seven-storied palace, without saying "put it here", after showing a secure place saying "this is a safe place", it is said that it should be kept there, locking it and protecting it.
709.Guttaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gacchantassa kappiyakārakassa avattabbavohāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘āharedamida’’ntiādi.Akappiyanti ettha ‘‘vacana’’nti labbhati. Evaṃ akappiyavacanaṃ avatvā surakkhitaṭṭhāne āharitvā ṭhapite kiṃ kātabbanti? Vikkāyike pattacīvarādikappiyabhaṇḍe āhaṭe ‘‘amhākaṃ iminā attho, imassa evarūpaṃ mūlampi atthi, kappiyakārako eva natthī’’ti vatvā tena ‘‘ahaṃ kappiyakārako, mayhaṃ dassethā’’ti vutte sace ruccati, dvāraṃ vivaritvā ‘‘idaṃ gaṇhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘ettha ṭhapita’’nti dassetvā tasmiṃ tassa agghappamāṇaṃ gahetvā dente adhivāsetabbaṃ. Atirekaṃ gaṇhante ‘‘mayaṃ tumhākaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ na gaṇhāma, gacchathā’’ti nīharitvā aggaḷaṃ datvā kappiyakārake laddhe ‘‘amhākaṃ evarūpena attho, idaṃ nāma mūlaṃ atthī’’ti vatvā tena kiṇitvā dinne adhivāsetabbantiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
709. In order to show the unutterable expression for a suitable person who is going, taking the safe place, it says "āharedamida" (bring this here) etc. Akappiyanti: Here, "vacana" (word) is obtained. Having brought it to a secure place and kept it without uttering such an unallowable word, what should be done? When an unallowable item like a bowl or robe that can be sold is brought, saying "we need this, this has such a price, but there is no suitable person", if he says "I am a suitable person, give it to me", if it pleases him, opening the door, without saying "take this", after showing "it is kept here", he should tolerate when he gives, taking the price of it. When he takes more, he should be driven out saying "we do not take your item, go away", and locking the door, when a suitable person is found, he should act in the manner stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, saying "we need such a thing, this is the price", and tolerating when it is bought and given by him.
710.Ṭhapetvā rūpiyaggāhanti anantarasikkhāpade vakkhamānasarūpaṃ suvaṇṇādirūpiyaṃ paṭiggahetvā nissajjitvā desitāpattikaṃ puggalaṃ ṭhapetvā.Nissaṭṭhaparivattitanti ettha nissajjitvā āpattiyā desitāya ‘‘sace tattha āgacchati ārāmiko vā upāsako vā’’tiādinā (pārā. 584)padabhājanevuttanayena tatthāgataṃ kappiyakārakaṃ ‘‘āvuso imaṃ jānā’’ti vatvā ‘‘iminā kiṃ āhariyyatū’’ti tena vutte ‘‘imaṃ vā imaṃ vā āharā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ sappi vā telaṃ vā madhu vā phāṇitaṃ vā’’ti (pārā. 584) vuttattā bhikkhūnaṃ kappiyavatthumatte ācikkhite tena nissaṭṭhavatthuṃ parivattetvā āhaṭaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍanti attho.
710. Ṭhapetvā rūpiyaggāha means, excluding the person who has accepted gold, silver, etc., of the nature to be described in the immediately following training rule, and who is subject to the offense declared after relinquishing it. Nissaṭṭhaparivattita: Here, having relinquished it and confessed the offense, according to the method stated in the padabhājana, such as, "If an ārāmika or an upāsaka comes there," (pārā. 584) one should say to the attendant who makes things allowable, "Friend, know this," and when he says, "What should be obtained with this?" without saying, "Bring this or that," one should indicate what is allowable, such as ghee, oil, honey, or molasses, (pārā. 584) because it is said that when allowable items are indicated to the bhikkhus, the allowable goods brought after exchanging the relinquished item are meant.
711.Attanopattabhāgampīti tathā āhaṭe kappiyabhaṇḍe saṅghassa bhājiyamāne attano vassaggena attano pattakoṭṭhāsampi.Paṭiggāhakabhikkhunoti rūpiyaṃ paṭiggahetvā āpajjitvā nissajjitvā desitāpattikassa bhikkhuno na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Aññatoti attato aññasmā pabbajitamanussāmanussatiracchānagatitthipurisānaṃ aññatarato.Laddhanti tehi attanā laddhakoṭṭhāsato dinnavasenapi laddhaṃ taṃ vatthuṃ.
711. Attano pattabhāgampi: Even one's own share, one's own portion of the bowl, when the allowable goods thus brought are being distributed to the Sangha according to seniority. Paṭiggāhakabhikkhuno: It is not proper for the bhikkhu who, having accepted silver, has committed an offense and confessed it after relinquishing it; this is the connection. Aññato: From someone other than oneself, from any one of the renunciants, humans, non-humans, animals, or women or men. Laddhaṃ: Even the item obtained by them in the manner of being given from their own obtained share.
712.Yaṃ kiñci paccayanti taṃ vatthuṃ parivattetvā gahitesu catūsu paccayesu aññatarampi paccayaṃ. Antamaso pathaviṃ khaṇitvā uppāditodakampi dārūhi ādittaaggimpi telena jalitapadīpampi rukkhe vā gehe vā pakatichāyampi tālapaṇṇampi upabhogaparibhogārahaṃ aññampi yaṃ kiñcītiaṭṭhakathāyavuttanayaṃ imināva saṅgahitanti gahetabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘antamaso makkaṭādīhi tato haritvā araññe ṭhapitaṃ vā tesaṃ hatthato gaḷitvā tiracchānapariggahitampi paṃsukūlampi na vaṭṭatiyevā’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584), ‘‘rūpiyapaṭiggāhakassa pana kenaci pariyāyena tato uppannapaccayaparibhogo na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.585) cāti.Bhikkhunoti rūpiyapaṭiggāhakassa bhikkhussa.
712. Yaṃ kiñci paccayaṃ: Any one of the four requisites obtained by exchanging that item. Even water produced by digging the earth, a fire lit with wood, a lamp lit with oil, shade naturally occurring in a tree or house, or a palm leaf; anything whatsoever suitable for use or consumption should be regarded as included by this, according to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Even a rag robe taken from there by monkeys, etc., and left in the forest, or fallen from their hands and taken by animals, is not proper," (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-584) and "The bhikkhu who accepts silver is not allowed to use any requisite arising from it in any way," (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.585) etc. Bhikkhuno: For the bhikkhu who accepts silver.
713.Ajjhārāme vāti upari vakkhamānalakkhaṇena paricchinne ajjhārāme vā.Taṃrūpiyaṃ, ‘‘patitaṃ disvā’’ti seso.Ajjhāvasathepi vāti vakkhamānalakkhaṇe antoāvāse ca.Nikkhipantassāti ‘‘yassa bhavissati, so harissatī’’ti vutte ṭhāne tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ gaṇanañca upalakkhaṇañca sallakkhetvā ṭhapentassa.
713. Ajjhārāme vā: In a delimited ajjhārāma with the characteristics to be described below. Taṃ: That silver, "having seen it fallen," the rest is understood. Ajjhāvasathepi vā: And also in an inner residence with the characteristics to be described below. Nikkhipantassa: For one placing it in a designated place, thinking and noting the reckoning and characteristics of that item in the place where it was said, "Whoever is the owner, he will take it."
714.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘rūpiye rūpiyasaññī, vematiko, arūpiyasaññī rūpiyaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 586) bhagavatā pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Dukkaṭanti ettha ‘‘dvikadukkaṭa’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati.
714. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: The pācittiya has been stated by the Blessed One, "Being of the perception of silver in (something that is) silver, being doubtful, being of the perception of not-silver, he accepts silver, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya." (pārā. 586) Dukkaṭaṃ: Here, "two dukkata" are obtained by implication.
715.Kriyākriyanti gahaṇena āpajjanato kiriyaṃ. Paṭikkhepassa akaraṇato akiriyanti.
715. Kriyākriyaṃ: Action ( kiriyaṃ ) because of incurring an offense by acceptance. Non-action ( akiriyaṃ ) because of not making an act of rejection.
Rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Story of Accepting Silver.
716-7.Nissaggiyassāpivatthunti ‘‘nissaggiyapācittiyassa vatthū’’ti paṭhamasikkhāpade niddiṭṭhesu rajatādīsu catūsu aññataraṃ vatthuṃ.Dukkaṭassa ca vatthuṃ vāti paṭhamaṃ dassitamuttādidukkaṭavatthūsu aññataraṃ vā, ihobhayattha hetuphalasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ.Kappiyassa ca vatthuṃ vāti yathādassitesu eva muggamāsādikappiyavatthūsu aññataraṃ vā, iha avayavāvayavisambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Avayavāvayavīnaṃ abhedepi bhedūpacāravasena yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti kappiyavatthunti vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘kappiyena vatthunā’’ti vakkhamānattā. Idānettha dukkaṭavatthuno, kappiyavatthuno ca nissaggiyavatthunā parivattitattā āpatti hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Nissaggiyavatthunā yo parivatteti, tassa āpattīti yojanā.
716-7. Nissaggiyassāpi vatthuṃ: An item, one of the four, such as silver, specified in the first training rule, "items for which a nissaggiya pācittiya is incurred." Dukkaṭassa ca vatthuṃ vā: Or any one of the dukkata items, such as pearls, shown first; here, in both cases, the possessive case is in the sense of a cause-and-effect relationship. Kappiyassa ca vatthuṃ vā: Or any one of the allowable items, such as green grams, etc., as shown; here, the possessive case is in the sense of a part-whole relationship. Although there is no difference between part and whole, it is said "an allowable item" because of treating the difference conventionally, as in "the body of a clay doll," because it will be said "with an allowable item." Now, here, it should be understood that an offense is incurred because the dukkata item or the allowable item has been exchanged for the nissaggiya item. The construction is that an offense is incurred for one who exchanges for a nissaggiya item.
Dukkaṭassa vatthunā, kappiyena ca vatthunā vatthuṃ nissaggiyassa parivatteti, āpattīti yojanā. Idha ubhayatthāpi parivattitassa nissaggiyavatthuttā āpatti hoti. Evaṃ tīsupi ṭhānesu ‘‘āpattī’’ti sāmaññavacanena nissaggiyapācittiyameva vuttanti pakaraṇato labbhati.
The construction is that an offense is incurred if a nissaggiya item is exchanged for a dukkata item or an allowable item. Here, in both cases, an offense is incurred because the exchanged item is a nissaggiya item. Thus, in all three cases, it is obtained from the context that only a nissaggiya pācittiya is stated by the general term "an offense."
718.Dukkaṭasseva vatthunā dukkaṭassa ca vatthuṃ vā parivatteti, dukkaṭanti yojanā.‘‘Vatthuṃ vā kappiyassā’’ti idaṃ vuttanayameva, kappiyavatthunti vuttaṃ hoti. Imassa kappiyavatthunopi dukkaṭavatthunā parivattitattā dukkaṭaṃ hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
718. The construction is that a dukkata is incurred if a dukkata item is exchanged for a dukkata item. "Vatthuṃ vā kappiyassā": This is as stated above; "an allowable item" is meant. It should be understood that a dukkata is incurred because this allowable item has also been exchanged for a dukkata item.
719.‘‘Vatthunā kappiyassā’’ti idampi vuttanayameva. Kappiyavatthunāpi parivattite dukkaṭavatthuvasena dukkaṭaṃ hotīti āha‘‘tathā’’ti.
719. "Vatthunā kappiyassā": This is also as stated above. He says "tathā" that a dukkata is incurred because of the dukkata item in the case of what has been exchanged for by an allowable item.
720.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘vatthuno’’ti idaṃ ākaḍḍhati.‘‘Nissaggiyassā’’ti iminā pācittiyamāha.Pubbanti paṭhamaṃ, pubbe vuttarūpiyapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadeti vuttaṃ hoti.Imināti rūpiyasaṃvohārasikkhāpadena. Parivattanaṃ vāritanti sambandho.
720. With "tathā," this "vatthuno" is drawn in. With "Nissaggiyassā," he means a pācittiya. Pubbaṃ: First, it means the training rule about accepting silver stated previously. Iminā: By this training rule about silver transactions. The connection is that exchange is prohibited.
721.Rūpiyanti ca saññissāti ‘‘rūpiyaṃ nāma satthuvaṇṇo kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako, ye vohāraṃ gacchantī’’ti (pārā. 589)padabhājanevuttesu rūpiyasaññitesu vatthūsu ‘‘aññatara’’nti saññissa.Arūpiyeti kharapattādimhi.Tenaarūpiyena. ‘‘Cetāpentassa arūpiya’’nti padacchedo. ‘‘Arūpiye rūpiyasaññī rūpiyaṃ cetāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 591) vuttattā rūpiyaparivattane dukkaṭassa abhāvato, pācittiyassa ca sambhavato rūpiyaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Arūpiye rūpiyaṃ iti saññissa ca vimatissa ca arūpiyaṃ cetāpentassa tena dve dukkaṭāni hontīti yojanā.
721. Rūpiyanti ca saññissā: Regarding "silver," among the items recognized as silver stated in the padabhājana, "Silver means gold coins, copper coins, iron māsakas, wooden māsakas, lacquer māsakas, which are in circulation," (pārā. 589) "any one" is understood. Arūpiye: In (something that is) not silver, such as a rough leaf. Tena: With that not-silver. "Cetāpentassa arūpiya" is the word division. Because it is said, "Being of the perception of silver in (something that is) not-silver, he gets (something that is) silver with it, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya," (pārā. 591) silver should not be taken, since there is no dukkata when exchanging silver and a pācittiya is possible. The construction is that two dukkata are incurred for one getting (something that is) not-silver, being of the perception of silver in (something that is) not-silver, or being doubtful.
722.Arūpiye arūpiyanti saññissāti ettha ‘‘arūpiyaṃ parivattentassā’’ti seso.Pañcahīti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, ‘‘sahadhammikehī’’ti seso, pañcahi sahadhammikehi saddhinti attho.Vadatoti voharato, kayavikkayaṃ karontassāti attho. Bhikkhubhikkhunisāmaṇerasāmaṇerisikkhamānāsaṅkhātehi pañcahi sahadhammikehi arūpiyaṃ parivattentassa anāpattīti attho.
722. Arūpiye arūpiyanti saññissā: Here, "parivattentassa" is understood. Pañcahī: The instrumental case is in the sense of association, "with co-religionists" is understood; it means with five co-religionists. Vadato: For one speaking, for one doing buying and selling. The meaning is that there is no offense for one exchanging (something that is) not-silver with five co-religionists, reckoned as bhikkhu, bhikkhuni, sāmaṇera, sāmaṇeri, and sikkhamānā.
723.Saṃvohārena samuṭṭhānatokriyasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
723. Kriyasamuṭṭhānaṃ: Arising from action, because of arising through transaction.
Rūpiyasaṃvohārakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Story of Silver Transactions.
724.Kappiyaṃnāma ‘‘cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, antamaso cuṇṇapiṇḍopi dantakaṭṭhampi dasikasuttampī’’tipadabhājanevuttāni kappiyavatthūni. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘cīvarādīnaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍānaṃ vasena anekavidha’’nti.Kappiyenevāti teneva kappiyena vatthunā. ‘‘Kayavikkayaṃ samāpajjeyyāti ‘iminā imaṃ dehi, iminā imaṃ āhara, iminā imaṃ parivattehi, iminā imaṃ cetāpehī’ti ajjhācaratī’’ti (pārā. 595) vacanato‘‘parivattayato’’ti imassa ‘‘kayavikkayaṃ samāpajjato’’ti pariyāyo.
724. Kappiyaṃ means the allowable items stated in the padabhājana, "requisites of robes, alms food, lodging, medicine for the sick, and other requisites; even a ball of powder, a toothpick, or a measuring string." As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "of many kinds by way of allowable goods such as robes, etc." Kappiyenevā: With that allowable item itself. Because of the statement, "He would engage in buying and selling, thinking 'Give this with this, bring this with this, exchange this with this, get this with this'," (pārā. 595) "parivattayato" is a synonym for "engaging in buying and selling."
kayonāma. Attano hatthato kappiyavatthuṃ parivattetvā dānaṃvikkayo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘iminā imaṃ dehī’tiādinā hi nayena parassa kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhanto kayaṃ samāpajjati, attano kappiyaṃ dento vikkaya’’nti. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā sahadhammike’’ti vuttattāparivattayatoti ettha aññehi saddhinti labbhati. Etthaaññenāma gihino itthipurisā, sāsanato bāhirā pabbajitā ca. Tasmā ayaṃ kayavikkayo antamaso mātāpitūhipi na kātabboyeva. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ayañhi kayavikkayo ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike avasesehi gihipabbajitehi antamaso mātāpitūhipi saddhiṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.595).
Kayo means giving by exchanging an allowable item from one's own hand. Vikkayo: Selling. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Indeed, when one takes another's allowable goods with the method beginning 'Give this with this,' one engages in buying, and when one gives one's own allowable item, it is selling." Because it is said, "excluding co-religionists," "parivattayato" here means with others. Here, aññe means householders, women, and renunciants external to the Dispensation. Therefore, this buying and selling should not be done even with one's parents. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Indeed, this buying and selling is not proper with any householders or renunciants except the five co-religionists, even one's parents." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.595)
725.Akappiyassa vatthussāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade vuttacīvarādikappiyavatthuto aññassa nissaggiyadukkaṭavatthussa.Tenevāti akappiyavatthunāyeva. ‘‘Kappiyassa cā’’ti pāṭhaseso, teneva akappiyena vatthunā kappiyassa vatthussa parivattanañcāti yojanā. Evañhi pāṭhasese akate akappiyena vatthunā kappiyassa parivattanaṃ kayavikkaye saṅgahetabbaṃ siyā, taṃ na yujjati tassa rūpiyasaṃvohāreyeva saṅgahitattā, idha ca ‘‘kappiyavatthusseva kappiyavatthunā parivattanaṃ kayavikkayo’’ti niyamitattā.Niddiṭṭhanti ‘‘akappiyabhaṇḍaparivattanañhi kayavikkayasaṅgahaṃ na gacchatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.594)aṭṭhakathāyaṃniddiṭṭhanti attho.
725. Akappiyassa vatthussa: Of an item that is not allowable, other than the allowable items of robes, etc., stated in this training rule; tenevā: with that unallowable item itself. "Kappiyassa ca" is the remaining reading; and also the exchange of an allowable item with that same unallowable item is the construction. Indeed, if the remaining reading were not made, it would be included under buying and selling to exchange an allowable item with an unallowable item, but that is not appropriate, since that is included under silver transactions, and here it is specified that "the exchange of an allowable item with an allowable item is buying and selling." Niddiṭṭhaṃ: It means it is specified in the Aṭṭhakathā that "the exchange of unallowable goods does not come under the heading of buying and selling." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.594)
726.Tasmāti yasmā aññatra sahadhammikehi kappiyavatthussāpi kayavikkayo na vaṭṭati, akappiyassa, kappiyassa ca vatthuno akappiyeneva vatthunā parivattanañca rūpiyasaṃvohāre saṅgahitattā kayavikkayasaṅgahaṃ na gacchati, tasmā.
726. Tasmā: Because buying and selling is not proper with others than co-religionists even for an allowable item, and because the exchange of an allowable item or an unallowable item with an unallowable item does not come under the heading of buying and selling since it is included under silver transactions, therefore.
729.Idaṃ nāmāti odanādikappiyavatthumeva āha.
729. Idaṃ nāmā: He means just an allowable item like rice, etc.
730-1.‘‘Gahetvā’’tiādigāthāya vatthulakkhaṇassa udāharaṇaṃ dassetvāva āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vighāsāda’’ntiādi.Challinti rukkhatacaṃ.Vallinti lataṃ.Kaṭṭhanti indhanadāruṃ.Dārunti gehasambhārādidāruṃ. Vipallāsenāpi vattabbaṃ ‘‘valliṃ vā pana challiṃ vā, dāruṃ vā kaṭṭhameva vā’’ti.Vatthūnanti tathā vatvā āharāpitānaṃ challiādivatthūnaṃ. Kayavikkaye āpattiyo hontīti yojanā, nissaggiyapācittiyāpattiyo hontīti vuttaṃ hoti.
730-1. Having shown an example of the characteristic of an item with the verse beginning "Gahetvā," he says "vighāsāda" etc., to show the variety of offenses. Challi: Tree bark. Valli: A creeper. Kaṭṭha: Firewood. Dāru: Timber for building houses, etc. It should also be stated in reverse order, "either a creeper or bark, or timber or just firewood." Vatthūnaṃ: Of the bark, etc., that was thus said and brought. The construction is that offenses are incurred in buying and selling; it means that nissaggiya pācittiya offenses are incurred.
732.‘‘Iti evā’’ti padacchedo, ‘‘pivitvā’’tiādinā nayena pubbakāle vihitapaccayantaṃ akatvā vuttanayenevāti attho.
732. "Iti evā" is the word division; it means in the manner stated, without doing what is implied by the word with a past participle ending, with the method beginning "pivitvā."
733.Bhūmiyā limpaneti yojanāyaṃ pana senāsanabhūmiyaṃ paribhaṇḍakaraṇakāḷakādivaṇṇakaraṇavasena lepane.Vatthudhovaneti cīvarādivatthūnaṃ dhovane.Etthāti tesu vuttappakāresu. Etesaṃ gahaṇassa upalakkhaṇattā evarūpesu aññesu ṭhānesu.
733. Bhūmiyā limpane: But in this construction, in smearing the ground of a dwelling, in the manner of coloring, making it black, etc., for decorating. Vatthudhovane: In washing items such as robes, etc. Ettha: In those ways stated. Because the taking of these is illustrative, in other instances of this kind.
734.Ayanti bhūmisodhanādivasena āpannā pācittiyāpatti.
734. Ayaṃ: This pācittiya offense incurred by way of cleaning the ground, etc.
735.Ṭhapetvā bhaṇḍasāmikanti ettha byatirekavasena aññassa kappiyakārassāti labbhati.
735. Ṭhapetvā bhaṇḍasāmikaṃ: Here, by way of exception, another who makes things allowable is obtained.
736.Bhāsato anāpattīti yojanā. Sesamettha uttānameva.
736. The construction is that there is no offense for one speaking. The rest here is easily understood.
Kayavikkayakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Story of Buying and Selling.
Kosiyavaggo dutiyo.
The Second Chapter, on Fine Cloth.
737.Kappiyā pattā mattikāyomayā jātito duveti yojanā.Vaṇṇāti pamāṇāni. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tayo pattassa vaṇṇāti tīṇi pattassa pamāṇānī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602). Tenāha‘‘ukkaṭṭho majjhimomako’’ti.
737. The construction is that allowable bowls are twofold by nature, made of clay and made of iron. Vaṇṇā: Sizes. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Tayo pattassa vaṇṇāti, there are three sizes of bowl." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602) Therefore he says, "ukkaṭṭho majjhimomako."
738.Dvinnaṃ taṇḍulanāḷīnanti sukoṭṭitānaṃ akhaṇḍānaṃ purāṇasālitaṇḍulānaṃ dve nāḷiyo gahetabbā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘anupahatapurāṇasālitaṇḍulānaṃ sukoṭṭitaparisuddhāna’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602).Bhattanti avassāvitaṃ anuttaṇḍulaṃ akilinnaṃ apiṇḍitaṃ suvisadaṃ kundamakularāsisadisaṃ supakkodanameva gahetabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘anuttaṇḍulaṃ akilinnaṃ apiṇḍitaṃ suvisadaṃ kundamakularāsisadisaṃ avassāvitodana’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602).Magadhanāḷiyāti magadharaṭṭhe nāḷiyā, sā nāḷi tilānaṃ aṭṭhapasatāni gaṇhāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
738. Dvinnaṃ taṇḍulanāḷīnaṃ: Two nāḷis of well-husked, unbroken, old rice grains should be taken. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Of old rice grains that are undamaged, well-husked, and pure." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602) Bhattaṃ: Cooked rice that is drained, without rice grains, not soggy, not lumped together, very clear, and just like a heap of jasmine buds should be taken. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Cooked rice that is without rice grains, not soggy, not lumped together, very clear, like a heap of jasmine buds, and drained." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602) Magadhanāḷiyā: By the nāḷi of the Magadha country; that nāḷi holds eight pasatas of sesame seeds. Therefore the ancients said:
‘‘Khāridasadvayaṃ vāho, khārī doṇaṭṭhakadvayaṃ;
"Two khāris are a vāha, a khārī is two groups of eight doṇas;
A doṇa is sixteen nāḷis, a nāḷi is eight pasatas;
A pasata is a hundred thousand sesame seeds; this is said according to measure."
andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Tabbaṇṇanāya ‘‘aḍḍhaterasapalāni māsehi gahetabbānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci panāhu –
It is stated in the Andhaka Aṭṭhakathā. In the explanation of that, it is stated, "Twelve and a half palas should be taken monthly." But some say:
‘‘Catuppasatikā muṭṭhi, palañcetaṃ catugguṇaṃ;
"Four pasatikas are a muṭṭhi, and four times that is a pala;
And a kuḍuva is one pasata, and four of those are a nāḷi."
‘‘Soyeva pattho cattāro, patthā aḷhakamuccate;
"Four patthas are called one āḷhaka; four āḷhakas are known as one doṇa."
Ācariyā pana ‘‘aṭṭhapasatā māgadhanāḷī’’ti pubbapakkhameva rocayanti.
But the teachers prefer the earlier view, saying, "eighty pasatas make a Magadhan nāḷī."
Khādanañca catubbhāganti tasmiṃ bhatte catudhā vibhatte ekabhāgamattaṃ hatthahāriyaghanamuggasūpanti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tassa odanassa catutthabhāgappamāṇo nātighano nātitanuko hatthahāriyo sabbasambhārasaṅkhato muggasūpo pakkhipitabbo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602).
And food one-fourth [of the rice]: meaning, in that meal divided into four parts, about one part is thick mung bean soup that can be taken up with the hand. As the ** commentary** says: "Into that rice, a mung bean soup should be poured, about one-fourth the amount of the rice, neither too thick nor too thin, that can be taken up with the hand, complete with all ingredients" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602).
Byañjanañca tadūpiyanti yāva carimālopaṃ, tāva sabbālopānurūpaṃ macchamaṃsādibyañjanañca. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ālopassa ālopassa anurūpaṃ yāvacarimālopappahonakaṃ macchamaṃsādibyañjanaṃ pakkhipitabba’’nti. Ettha caālopassa ālopassa anurūpanti ‘‘byañjanassa mattā nāma odanacatutthabhāgo’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.387)brahmāyusuttassa aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā ālopassa catutthabhāgappamāṇaṃ byañjanaṃ ālopassa anurūpanti gahetabbaṃ. Idha pana sūpasseva odanacatutthabhāgappamāṇaṃ dassetvā etassa lakkhaṇe dassite itarassāpi dassitameva hotīti byañjanassa tathā visesetvā pamāṇaṃ na dassitaṃ. Odane pakkhipitabbāni sappitelatakkarasakañjikādīni gaṇanūpagāni na honti.
And relish proportionate to it: meaning, relish such as fish and meat proportionate to all mouthfuls, until the last mouthful. As the commentary says: "Relish such as fish and meat should be poured in proportionate to each mouthful, sufficient until the last mouthful." Here, since it is said in the commentary to the Brahmāyu Sutta that "proportionate to each mouthful" means "the amount of relish is one-fourth of the rice" (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.387), the relish should be taken as proportionate to one-fourth of the mouthful. However, here, having shown the soup to be one-fourth of the rice and having given its characteristic, it is as good as showing the other as well, so the amount of relish is not specified in that way. Sesame oil, ghee, buttermilk, sour gruel, and other things that should be put into the rice are not counted.
739.Taṃ sabbanti yathāvuttabhattādiniravasesaṃ.Gaṇhatīti vakkhamānehi tīhi pakārehi gaṇhāti.Tassāti ukkaṭṭhassa pattassa.Upaḍḍhoti tasmiṃ patte gaṇhanakadabbasambhāragāhī patto taṃsahacariyena ‘‘upaḍḍho’’ti vutto.Tadupaḍḍho cāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tassa majjhimassa pattassa upaḍḍho tadupaḍḍhoti gahetabbaṃ.
739.All of that: all the aforementioned meal, etc., without exception. He takes: he takes in the three ways to be described. Of that: of the superior bowl. Half: the bowl that takes the ingredients and supplies for the meal, along with the person taking, is called "half" in that bowl. And half of that: here too, the same method applies. "Half of that" should be taken as half of that medium bowl.
740.Imesu tīsu pattesu ukkaṭṭhassa vuttaṃ odanādi sabbaṃ yasmiṃ patte pakkhittaṃ, tassa mukhavaṭṭimatthake puñjiyamānaṃ hīrakaṃ heṭṭhābhāge phusati, soukkaṭṭhamajjhimonāma, hīrato atirekaṃ tiṭṭhati, soukkaṭṭhomakonāma, antopatte mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimantaṃ appatvā tiṭṭhati, soukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhonāma, evaṃ majjhimo ca omako ca paccekaṃ tividho hotīti sabbe nava pattā hontīti dassetumāha‘‘ukkaṭṭhassā’’tiādi.Tassevāti ukkaṭṭhasseva. Omako ca majjhimo cātiomakamajjhimā. Idha majjhimo ca omako ca ukkaṭṭhasseva bhedo. Esa nayo itaradvayepi. ‘‘Eva’’nti iminā yathā ‘‘ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho ukkaṭṭhomako ukkaṭṭhamajjhimo’’ti yojetabbo, evaṃ majjhimomakānampi yathākkamayojanaṃ dasseti ‘‘majjhimo majjhimukkaṭṭho majjhimomako, omakukkaṭṭho omakamajjhimo omakomako cā’’ti.
740.Among these three bowls, all the rice, etc., mentioned for the superior bowl, if a heap is made on the edge of the rim of the bowl into which it is put, and a diamond touches the lower part, that is called superior-medium; if it stays exceeding the diamond, that is called superior-inferior; if it stays inside the bowl without reaching the lower edge of the rim, that is called superior-superior. Thus, to show that the medium and inferior ones each become threefold, there are all nine bowls, he says, "Of the superior," etc. Of that same: of the superior itself. Inferior and medium means inferior-medium. Here, medium and inferior are varieties of the superior itself. This method applies to the other two as well. By "Eva" (thus), just as one should connect "superior-superior, superior-inferior, superior-medium," similarly, he shows the connection in order for the medium and inferior ones as well: "medium-superior, medium-inferior, inferior-superior, inferior-medium, inferior-inferior."
741.Tesūti navasu pattesu.Tasmāti apattabhāvato.Na gacchantīti ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhañca omakomakañcāti dve apekkhitvā bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Ete bhājanasaṅkhepena paribhuñjitabbāti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tasmā ete bhājanaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602).
741.Among those: among the nine bowls. From that: because of not being bowls. Do not go: "superior-superior" and "inferior-inferior" are two, so the plural is used in relation to them. These should be used with the sharing of utensils. As the commentary says: "Therefore, these should be used by sharing utensils" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602).
742.Pattalakkhaṇasaṃyutanti etthapattalakkhaṇaṃnāma yathāvuttapamāṇayuttatā, ‘‘ayopatto pañcahi pākehi pakko mattikāpatto dvīhi pākehi pakko’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608) vuttā pākasampatti, kiṇitvā gaṇhāti ce, tassa dātabbamūlassa asesetvā dinnabhāvo, chiddābhāvo, chinnarājīnaṃ abhāvoti pañcavidhaṃ. Hoti cettha –
742.Endowed with bowl characteristics: here, bowl characteristic means being possessed of the measure as stated, the accomplishment of firing as stated: "an iron bowl is fired with five firings, a clay bowl is fired with two firings" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608), if he takes it having bought it, the fact of having given without exception the price to be given for it, the absence of holes, the absence of cut lines—these are fivefold. There is this here:
‘‘Pamāṇayuttatā pāka-sampatti dinnamūlatā;
"Being possessed of measure, accomplishment of firing,
Having given the price, absence of holes and lines—
These are the five bowl characteristics."
vā-saddo yojetabbo.Adhiṭṭhāyāti paṭhamaṃ paribhutte patte sati taṃ paccuddharitvā adhiṭṭhātabbapatto hatthapāse ce hoti, vakkhamānanayena ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vacībhedakaraṇavasena vācāya vā vacībhedaṃ akatvā evameva cintetvā hatthena gahetvā phandāpentena kāyena vā dūre ce hatthapāsā hoti, ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘etaṃ pattaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vācā bhinditabbātiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608 atthato samānaṃ) vuttanayena ekakena vā pacchā satisammose sarāpetvā kukkuccaṃ vūpasametuṃ samatthassa puggalassa sannidhāne vā adhiṭṭhāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Aññassa santike adhiṭṭhāne ayamānisaṃso – sacassa ‘adhiṭṭhito nu kho me, no’ti vimati uppajjati, itaro sāretvā vimatiṃ chindissatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608) ayamatthoaṭṭhakathāyaṃvutto. ‘‘Dve patte adhiṭṭhātuṃ na labhatī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
The word vā (or) should be connected. Having determined: if there is a bowl already used, having set that aside, if the bowl to be determined is within arm's reach, "I determine this bowl" either by way of making a verbal distinction in that way, or without making a verbal distinction, just thinking like that, having taken it with his hand and snapping it with his body, or if it is far from arm's reach, having noted the place where it is kept, the declaration should be made, "I determine this bowl"—in the way stated in the commentary (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608 meaning the same), or he is said to have determined it alone or in the presence of a person capable of reminding him in case of forgetfulness later, to dispel remorse. "In determining it near another, this is the benefit: if doubt arises in him, 'Is it determined for me, or not?', the other will remind him and cut off the doubt" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608)—this meaning is stated in the commentary. "One is not allowed to determine two bowls" is stated in the gaṇṭhipada.
Vikappetvāti (pāci. 373; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608; kaṅkā. aṭṭha. vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ttha vikappetabbassa pattassa ekattabahuttaṃ, sannihitāsannihitattañca sallakkhetvā ekaṃ ce sannihitaṃ, ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vā ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ tissassa bhikkhuno vikappemī’’ti vā ādinā nayena ekaṃ vikappetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ‘‘paribhuñjeyyā’’ti vuttattā, ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñjehi vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti tena apaccuddhaṭe paribhuñjituṃ ayuttattā ‘‘vikappetvā’’ti paccuddhaṭaviseso gahetabbo.
Having relinquished: (pāci. 373; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608; kaṅkā. aṭṭha. vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) here, having noted the singleness or plurality of the bowl to be relinquished and whether it is near or far, if one is near, "I relinquish this bowl to you" or "I relinquish this bowl to the monk Tissa," it is said to have relinquished one in this way, etc. Here, because it is said "he may use," since it is not proper to use it without setting it aside, [saying,] "use my property, or give it away, or do with it as you please," "having relinquished" should be taken as a specification of having set it aside.
743.Dhāreyyāti anadhiṭṭhahitvā, avikappetvā ca paribhuñjitabbo.Taṃkālaṃ pattaṃ atikkāmayatoti yojanā.‘‘Nissaggiya’’nti imināpi ‘‘patta’’nti idaṃ yujjati.Patta-saddo māgadhikānaṃ dviliṅgako, tasmā evaṃ vutto.
743.He may keep: he may use without having determined it or relinquished it. That time is the limit for the bowl—the connection [of the words] should be made. By "Nissaggiya" this word "bowl" is connected. The word patta (bowl) is neuter and masculine in Magadhi, therefore it is said in this way.
744.Adhiṭṭhitavikappitesu anantogadhattā atirekabhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yaṃ patta’’ntiādi.
744.To show the excess, because there is no end in determining and relinquishing, he says, "Whatever bowl," etc.
745.Sammukheti aḍḍhateyyahatthappadesato anto ṭhitaṃ pattaṃ.Dūrasminti aḍḍhateyyaratanato parabhāge ‘‘antogabbhe vā uparipāsāde vā sāmantavihāre vā’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttappakāre dūrepi. Yattha katthaci vikappanakālepi santikadūravacanabhedā evameva yojetvā vattabbā. ‘‘Vikappetuṃ pana bahūnipi labbhatī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ paccuddharāmī’’tiādinayo.
745.In front: a bowl placed within one and a half hatthas (cubits). Far: beyond one and a half ratanas (ells), even in a place far away in the manner stated in the commentary: "either inside a building or on an upper story or in an adjacent monastery." In any case, even at the time of relinquishing, the distinction of the words "near" and "far" should be connected and stated in just this way. "But it is allowable to relinquish even many" is said in the gaṇṭhipada. This method: the method beginning with "I set aside this bowl," etc.
746.Vācākāyavasena duvidhe adhiṭṭhāne vācādhiṭṭhānaṃ dassetvā kāyādhiṭṭhānaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ābhoga’’ntiādi.Ābhoganti ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ.‘‘Manasā’’ti iminā na vacasāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyavikārovakāyavikārakaṃ,hatthena phandāpanādikāyakiriyāti attho. Eteneva kāyādhiṭṭhānaṃ hatthena apattabbe dūre na kātabbanti dasseti.
746.Having shown verbal determination, of the twofold determination by way of speech and body, to show bodily determination, he says, "Intention," etc. Intention: intention, [thinking] "I determine this bowl." By "with the mind" it is said that it is not with speech. Bodily gesture means causing bodily gesture, meaning bodily action such as snapping with the hand. By this itself, he shows that bodily determination should not be done at a distance where the hand cannot reach.
747-8.‘‘Jahati adhiṭṭhāna’’nti padacchedo.Dānatoti aññassa dānena.Bhedakatoti bhijjanena.Nāsatoti pattasāmikassa kālakiriyāya.Vibbhamatoti sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya gihibhāvūpagamanena.Uddhāratoti paccuddharaṇena.Paccakkhatoti sikkhāpaccakkhānena.Parivattanatoti liṅgaparivattanena.Gāhatoti vissāsaggahaṇena, acchinditvā gahaṇena ca.
747-8."He gives up the determination"—this is the word division. By giving: by giving to another. By breaking: by breaking. By destruction: by the death of the bowl's owner. By renouncing: by going to the state of a householder without renouncing the training. By setting aside: by setting aside. By renouncing: by renouncing the training. By transformation: by transformation of gender. By taking: by taking by trusting, and by taking without cutting off.
Kaṅgusitthappamāṇenāti sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ khuddakatarassa kaṅguno sitthappamāṇena.Khenāti mukhavaṭṭiyā dvaṅgulato heṭṭhā ākāsapariyāyena chiddena.Āṇiyā vāti ayomayāya āṇiyā vā.
By the measure of a kaṅgu seed: by the measure of a kaṅgu seed, the smallest of the seven grains. By a hole: by a hole below two aṅgulas (finger-widths) from the rim, in the sense of open space. Or by a peg: or by an iron peg.
750-1.Maṇipattoti maṇinā kato.Veḷuriyubbhavoti marakatamaṇimayo.Phalikubbhavoti phalikapāsāṇena kato.Kācamayoti kācamattikāmayo.Kaṃsamayoti kaṃsalohena kato.Tipumayoti kāḷatipumayo.Sīsamayoti setatipumayo. Vipallāsena ca vadanti.Sajjhumayoti rajatamayo.
750-1.A jewel bowl: made of jewels. Made of beryl: made of emeralds. Made of crystal: made of crystal stone. Made of glass: made of glass clay. Made of bell metal: made of bell metal. Made of tin: made of black tin. Made of lead: made of white tin. They also say it in reverse. Made of silver: made of silver.
752.Ghaṭakaṭāhoti ghaṭakapālaṃ.Sīsakaṭāhoti chavasīsakapālaṃ.Tumbanti alābu.Assāti ekādasavidhassa pattassa.Anulomikanti akappiyavasena anulomaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ ekādasavidhe. Tambamayaṃ lohamayaṃ thālakaṃ pana vaṭṭatīti yojanā, pattoyeva na vaṭṭati, tambalohamayā thālakā pana vaṭṭantīti attho.
752.A pot-sherd: a piece of a pot. A skull-sherd: a piece of a corpse's skull. Tumba: a gourd. Of those: of the eleven kinds of bowls. Allowable: allowable because it is allowable. There: in those eleven kinds. But a plate made of copper or metal is suitable—the connection [of the words] should be made; only the bowl is not suitable, but plates made of copper or metal are suitable—this is the meaning.
753.Taṭṭikādīnītiādi-saddena vaṭṭakādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Vaṭṭakanti ca aḍḍhacandākāro lohādimayo bhājaniyaviseso.Puggalassāti bhikkhussa. Gihī ca saṅgho cagihisaṅghā,tesaṃ santakāgihisaṅghikā.
753.Mats, etc.: the etc. includes stands, etc. Stand means a special kind of vessel made of metal, etc., in the shape of a half-moon. Of a person: of a monk. Householders and the Saṅgha means householders and the Saṅgha; belonging to them means belonging to householders and the Saṅgha.
754.Yaṃ kiñci pattanti sattasu pattesu yaṃ kiñci pattaṃ.Vodakaṃ katvāti vigatodakaṃ katvā.Paṭisāmeyyāti nikkhepārahaṭṭhāne nikkhipanavasena, thavikāya pakkhipitvā bandhanavasena vā saṅgopeyya.
754.Whatever bowl: whatever bowl among the seven bowls. Having made it without water: having made it free of water. He should put away: he should conceal it, by putting it away in a place suitable for putting it away, or by putting it in a bag and tying it up.
755.Otāpetunti ātape, aggimhi vā tāpetuṃ.Uṇheti tasmiṃyeva uṇhe.Na nidahetabboti na jhāpetabbo. Sīsāpanayanameva na vaṭṭatīti na nidahetabboti attho adhikanivāraṇeneva viññāyati.
755.To warm: to warm in the sun or in the fire. Hot: in that heat itself. Should not scorch: should not burn. That only removing the lead is not allowable is understood by the additional prohibition, "should not scorch."
756.Miḍḍhanteti miḍḍhiyā ante.Paribhaṇḍanteti pamukhe mahāmiḍḍhiyā ante.‘‘Vitthiṇṇeti antamaso dvipattamattokāsavitthāre’’ti keci. Ṭhapetuṃ pana vaṭṭatīti yojanā, valayādiādhārena vināpi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho. ‘‘Miḍḍhiyā pamukhe miḍḍhiyā ca kharabhūmipadesādīsu ca valayamatthake ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
756.At the midden: at the edge of the midden. At the refuse heap: in front, at the edge of the great midden. "In a wide space: at least in a space wide enough for two bowls," some say. But it is allowable to put [a bowl down]—the connection [of the words] should be made; it is allowable to put [a bowl down] even without a support such as a ring—this is the meaning. "It is allowable to put [a bowl down] in front of the midden, at the midden, and on hard ground, etc., on top of a ring," they say.
757.Dāruādhāraketi udukkhalasadise dārumaye ādhāre.Dve patte ṭhapetumpi vaṭṭatīti pattamatthake aparassāpi pattassa ṭhapanavasena dve patte ṭhapetumpi vaṭṭati.Api-saddena ekasmiṃ vattabbameva natthīti dasseti.Ayameva nayoti ‘‘dvepi patte ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ayaṃ nayo.Daṇḍabhūmiādhārakesūti etthadaṇḍādhāronāma bahūhi daṇḍehi kato.Bhūmiādhārakonāma bhūmiyaṃ kato ālavālavalayākāro siliṭṭhādhāro. ‘‘Dantavettalatādimayo bhūmiādhārako’’ti keci.
757.On a wooden stand: on a wooden stand similar to a mortar. It is even allowable to put two bowls: it is even allowable to put two bowls, by way of putting another bowl on top of a bowl. The word Api (even) shows that there is nothing to say about one. This same method: this same method is that "it is allowable to put even two bowls." On a stick-ground support: here, stick support means made of many sticks. Ground support means a smooth support made in the ground in the shape of a trough or ring. "A ground support is made of bamboo, rattan, vine, etc.," some say.
758-9.Taṭṭikāyāti tālapaṇṇādīhi katataṭṭikāya.Potthaketi makacivākamaye vā rukkhavākamaye vā attharaṇe.Kaṭasāraketi tālapaṇṇādīhi vīte attharaṇe.Paribhaṇḍakatāyāti katagomayaparibhaṇḍāya.Api-saddena sudhākammaṃ katvā pāsāṇena ghaṃsitvā maṭṭhakatāya bhūmiyā vattabbameva natthīti dasseti.Vālukāsu vāti leḍḍupāsāṇasakkharakapālādiamissāsu saṇhasukhumavālukāsūti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenevāha‘‘tathārūpāsū’’tiādi. Rajamhi santepi asantepi visuṃyeva ‘‘kharabhūmiyā na ṭhapetabba’’nti vuttattā‘‘sarajāyā’’ti iminā rajokiṇṇaṃ saṇhabhūmimāha.Kharabhūmiyāti pharusabhūmiyā.
758-9.On a mat: on a mat made of palm leaves, etc. On a cloth: on a spread made of makaci bark or tree bark. On a rush mat: on a spread woven with palm leaves, etc. On a prepared refuse heap: on a prepared refuse heap of cow dung. The word Api (even) shows that there is nothing to say about smooth ground made by doing plaster work and rubbing with stone. Or in sand: in fine, soft sand mixed with clay, stones, gravel, sherds, etc.—this is what is said. Therefore, he says, "In such," etc. Even when there is or is not dust, because it is said separately that "it should not be placed on hard ground," by "on dusty" he means smooth ground covered with dust. On hard ground: on rough ground.
760.Laggetunti olambetuṃ. Daṇḍakoṭiyā, nāgadantakoṭiyā ca pattamukhena pakkhipitvā ṭhapanampilagganaṃnāma.Chattaṅkamañcapīṭhesūti chatte, aṅke, mañcapīṭhe ca.
760.To hang: to suspend. Placing it by inserting the bowl's opening on the tip of a stick or the tip of a peg is also called hanging. On a parasol, shoulder, bed, seat: on a parasol, shoulder, bed, and seat.
761.Aṭanīsūti aṅgesu.Bandhitvāti thavikāya aṃsavaddhanakādinā yena kenaci bandhitvā.Olambetumpīti laggetumpi. ‘‘Ṭhapetuṃ uparī’’ti padacchedo.
761.On the bones: on the bones. Having tied: having tied with a bag, a shoulder strap, etc., with whatever. Even to hang: even to suspend. "To put on top"—this is the word division.
762.Mañcapīṭhaṭṭaketi mañcapīṭhesu ṭhapitapattā yathā na patanti, tathā aṭanimatthake dārunā parikkhepe kate mañcapīṭhaṭṭakā nāma honti, tādise mañcapīṭhaṭṭake ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.Bhattapūropīti bhattassa pūropi.Api-saddena yāgutelaparipūritassāpi saṅgaho. Tucchapatte vinicchayo yathāvuttoyeva. Pūraṇaṃ pūro, bhattassa pūro bhattapūro.
762.Bed-seat stand: stands are made around the bones on beds and seats so that the bowls placed on the beds and seats do not fall; they are called bed-seat stands; it is allowable to place [a bowl] on such a bed-seat stand—this is the meaning. Even filled with food: even filled with a filling of food. The word Api (even) includes even one filled with gruel or oil. The decision regarding an empty bowl is as previously stated. Filling means fullness; the fullness of food means food-fullness.
Tibhāṇavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the three-recitation section is finished.
763.Kavāṭanti dvārakavāṭaphalakaṃ. ‘‘Senāsane dvārakavāṭavātapānakavāṭādī’’tiādīsu dvāraphalakaṃ ‘‘kavāṭa’’nti hi vuttaṃ.Na paṇāmeyyāti na nāmeyya na cāleyya, na ca pidaheyyāti attho. Pattaṃ hatthe yassa sopattahatthoti bhinnādhikaraṇoyaṃ bāhiratthasamāso ‘‘vajirapāṇī’’tiādīsu viya. ‘‘Paṇāmeyya assā’’ti padacchedo.
763. Kavāṭa means a door panel. As it is said, "In the dwelling, door panels, window panels, etc.," the door panel is called "kavāṭa." Na paṇāmeyya means he should not bend it, should not move it, and should not close it, is the meaning. One who has a bowl in his hand is pattahattho, this is a bahiratthasamāsa with different subjects, like in "vajirapāṇī," etc. The word separation is "paṇāmeyya assā."
764.Na nīhareyya pattena calakānīti rasaṃ pivitvā pātitamadhukaphalaṭṭhikādi chaḍḍitāni bahi chaḍḍetuṃ pattena na nīhareyya.Aṭṭhikāni vāti panasaṭṭhikolaṭṭhiādiaṭṭhikāni vā.Ucchiṭṭhamudakanti mukhadhovanādikaṃ ucchiṭṭhamudakaṃ. Pattena nīharantassāti yojanā, bahi chaḍḍetuṃ taṃ patte āsiñcitvā harantassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Itarathā ucchiṭṭhapattadhovanodakampi teneva pattena bahi na nīharitabbaṃ siyā.
764. Na nīhareyya pattena calakāni means after drinking the juice, he should not take out the discarded madhuka fruit pits, etc., with the bowl to throw them away outside. Aṭṭhikāni vā means pits of jackfruit, jujube, etc. Ucchiṭṭhamudaka means leftover water, such as water used for washing the face. The construction is, "Nīharantassa pattena," meaning carrying it after pouring it into the bowl to throw it away outside. Otherwise, even the leftover bowl washing water should not be taken out with the same bowl.
765.Paṭiggaheti mukhadhovanodakantipaṭiggaho,kheḷamallakova.Mukhato nīhaṭanti mukhena chaḍḍitaṃ maṃsakhaṇḍādi yaṃ kiñci.
765.To receive the water for washing the face means paṭiggaho, like a phlegm pot. Mukhato nīhaṭa means anything thrown out by the mouth, such as a piece of meat.
766.Vinassatīti vibbhamena vā sikkhāpaccakkhānena vā kālakiriyāya vā vinassati. Atha vāyoti paccattavacanaṃ ‘‘yassā’’ti sāmivasena pariṇāmetvā yassa bhikkhuno patto bhedena vā acchedena vā corikāya haraṇena vā nassati, tassa anāpattīti yojanā.
766. Vinassati means it perishes due to distraction, renunciation of the training, or death. Or else, yo is a singular word, changing it to "yassa" in the sense of possession, the construction is that if a bhikkhu's bowl is lost due to breakage, cutting, or theft, there is no offense for him.
767.Paṭhamassāti pattavaggassa paṭhamaṃ saṅgahitattā paṭhamassa.Pattassāti pattasikkhāpadassa.Paṭhamenāti cīvaravaggassa paṭhamaṃ saṅgahitattā paṭhamena kathinenāti sambandho.Mahesināti mahante sīlakkhandhādayo guṇe esi gavesīti mahesi. Paṭhamassa pattassasamuṭṭhānādayo sabbeidha aniddiṭṭhavinicchayā paṭhamena kathinenasamāsadisā iti mahesināmatāanumatā anuññātāti yojanā.
767. Paṭhamassā because it is the first to be included in the bowl chapter. Pattassā means of the bowl training rule. Paṭhamenā because it is the first to be included in the robe chapter, it is connected with the first kathina. Mahesinā means the great sage who seeks great qualities such as the aggregate of morality. The samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe (all arising etc.) of the first bowl, whose decisions are not specified here, are samā (similar) to the first kathina, so matā (considered), approved, and permitted by the great sage, is the construction.
Paṭhamapattakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the First Bowl Story.
768.Pañca bandhanāni ūnāni yassa sopañcabandhanaūno,patto, tasmiṃ, abandhanañca ekadviticatubandhanañca ‘‘pañcabandhanaūna’’nti gahitaṃ. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘ūnapañcabandhano nāma patto abandhano vā ekabandhano vā dvibandhano vā tibandhano vā catubandhano vā’’ti (pārā. 613). Bandhane akatepi bandhanāraho vakkhamānalakkhaṇarājiyuttopi ‘‘ūnapañcabandhanoyevā’’ti gahetabbo. Etthaabandhanonāma yassa bandhanameva natthi, so. Tenevāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yasmā abandhanassapi pattassa pañca bandhanāni na pūrenti sabbaso natthitāyā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613). Dvaṅgulappamāṇato ūnarājiyutto abandhanokāsopi ‘‘abandhanoyevā’’ti gahetabbo. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘abandhanokāso nāma patto yassa dvaṅgulā rāji na hotī’’ti (pārā. 613).
768. He whose five ties are incomplete is pañcabandhanaūno, in that bowl, a bowl with no ties and with one, two, three, or four ties are included in "pañcabandhanaūna." As it is said in the Pali, "A bowl that is deficient in five ties means a bowl with no ties, or with one tie, or with two ties, or with three ties, or with four ties" (pārā. 613). Even if the tie is not made, but it has the lines deserving of ties with the characteristics to be described, it should be regarded as "ūnapañcabandhanoyeva." Here, abandhano means one that has no tie at all. Therefore, it is said in the commentary, "Since the five ties of a bowl with no ties are not complete due to complete non-existence" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613). Even a space for no tie that has less than two fingerbreadths of lines should be regarded as "abandhanoyeva." As it is said in the Pali, "A space for no tie means a bowl that does not have two fingerbreadths of lines" (pārā. 613).
769.Uddiṭṭhanti ‘‘bandhanokāso nāma patto yassa dvaṅgulā rāji hotī’’ti (pārā. 613)padabhājanevuttaṃ. Dvaṅgulāya rājiyā ekañca bandhananti yojanā. ‘‘Mukhavaṭṭito heṭṭhā bhaṭṭhā’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613) ‘‘sabbāpi rājiyo mukhavaṭṭito paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā bhaṭṭhāyeva gahetabbā’’tinissandehevuttaṃ. Mukhavaṭṭiṃ vinā aññatthāpi ūnapañcabandhane vā ūnapañcabandhanokāse vā sati sopi patto ūnapañcabandhano na hotīti na sakkā vattuṃ, tasmā ‘‘mukhavaṭṭito paṭṭhāyā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613)aṭṭhakathāyaṃniyametvā vacanaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Idha pana tathā niyamo na dassito, tasmā ayameva vinicchayo sāmaññena vuttāya pāḷiyā aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti.Ca-kārassa avuttasamuccayatthattā dvaṅguladvaṅgulāhi dvīhi dve bandhanāni ca tīṇi bandhanāni cāti idampi vuttameva hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yassa pana dve rājiyo, ekāyeva vā caturaṅgulā, tassa dve bandhanāni dātabbāni. Yassa tisso, ekāyeva vā chaḷaṅgulā, tassa tīṇi bandhanāni dātabbānī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613).
769. Uddiṭṭha means it is stated in the padabhājana, "A space for ties means a bowl that has two fingerbreadths of lines" (pārā. 613). One tie for two fingerbreadths of lines is the construction. Since it is stated in the commentary "below the rim of the mouth" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613), it is said with certainty that "all the lines should be taken as starting from the rim of the mouth and going downwards." It cannot be said that even if there are ūnapañcabandhane (deficient in five ties) or ūnapañcabandhanokāse (space deficient in five ties) elsewhere without the rim of the mouth, that bowl is not ūnapañcabandhano (deficient in five ties), therefore, the statement in the commentary "starting from the rim of the mouth" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613) should be considered by restricting it. However, here such a restriction is not shown, therefore this decision agrees and aligns with the Pali stated generally. Because ca has the meaning of including what was not said, it is also stated that two ties for two fingerbreadths each, and three ties, too. As it is said in the commentary, "But for one that has two lines, or one line of four fingerbreadths, two ties should be given. For one that has three, or one of six fingerbreadths, three ties should be given" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.612-613).
‘‘bandhanāni cā’’tiādi. Mukhavaṭṭiyā aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇānaṃ catunnaṃ rājīnaṃ cattāri bandhanāni cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Cakāro pubbe vuttasseva samuccayaṃ karoti.Aṭṭhaṅgularājiyā tathāti mukhavaṭṭito paṭṭhāya aṭṭhaṅgulāyāmaṃ bhaṭṭhāya rājiyā dvaṅguladvaṅgulamatte ṭhāne teneva nīhārena baddhāni cattāri bandhanāni cāti attho.
"bandhanāni cā" etc. means four ties for four lines of eight fingerbreadths from the rim of the mouth. The ca-conjunction accumulates what was said earlier. Aṭṭhaṅgularājiyā tathā means from the rim of the mouth, in a line of eight fingerbreadths downwards, four ties tied in places measuring two fingerbreadths each, with the same method, is the meaning.
770.Evaṃ ūnapañcabandhanapattaṃ dassetvā idāni paripuṇṇapañcabandhanapattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pañca vā’’tiādi. Mukhavaṭṭiyā dvaṅguladvaṅgulāyāmaṃ otiṇṇā pañca rājiyo ca.Vā-saddena pañcabandhanavikappā dassitā.Ekā vāpi dasaṅgulāti mukhavaṭṭito dasaṅgulāyāmā ekā vā rāji hoti.Api-saddena tassā rājiyā bandhano pañcabandhanapakkho dassito.Ayaṃ pattoti yassa pañca rājiyo vā tattha bandhanāni pañcabandhanāni vā, dasaṅgulā ekā rāji vā tattha bandhanāni pañcabandhanāni vā santi, ayaṃ patto pañcabandhano nāma.
770. Having shown the ūnapañcabandhana bowl in this way, now, to show the paripuṇṇapañcabandhana bowl, he says "pañca vā" etc. And five lines extending two fingerbreadths each from the rim of the mouth. The vā-word shows the alternatives to five ties. Ekā vāpi dasaṅgulā means there is one line of ten fingerbreadths from the rim of the mouth. The api-word shows the five-tie aspect of that line. Ayaṃ patto means this bowl, which has five lines or five ties there, or one ten-fingerbreadth line and five ties there, is called a bowl with five ties.
771.Ettāvatā mattikāpatte vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni ayopatte dassetumāha‘‘ayopatto’’tiādi. Chiddāni paṭicchādetuṃ bandhitabbāni ayopaṭṭānilohamaṇḍalakānināma. ‘‘Bhaṇḍī’’tipi tasseva pariyāyo. Bhaṇḍitabbaṃ bandhitvā chidde paṭicchāditepi yattha asaṇhatāya āmisaṃ tiṭṭhati, tādisopi apattoyevāti āha‘‘maṭṭho vaṭṭatī’’ti.Ayocuṇṇena vāṇiyāti etthāpi ‘‘maṭṭho vaṭṭatī’’ti sambandhanīyaṃ.
771. Having shown the decision on clay bowls to this extent, now, to show the iron bowl, he says "ayopatto" etc. Lohamaṇḍalakāni means iron strips to be tied to cover the holes. "Bhaṇḍī" is also a synonym for that. Even when the holes are covered by tying it, if there is a place where food remains due to unevenness, he says that such is not a good bowl "maṭṭho vaṭṭatī". Ayocuṇṇena vāṇiyā here also "maṭṭho vaṭṭatī" should be connected.
772.Tassa nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ taṃ pattaṃ tasmiṃ anukampāya agaṇhantassāti yojanā, ‘‘saṅghamajjhe nissajjitabbo’’ti (pārā. 613) vacanato saṅghamajjhe nissaṭṭhaṃ tassa taṃ pattaṃtasmiṃpattanissajjake puggale anukampāya agaṇhantassa.
772. Its forfeiture is the relinquishment of that bowl to the Sangha, for one who does not accept it out of compassion, is the construction, since it is said "it should be relinquished in the midst of the Sangha" (pārā. 613), for one who does not accept that bowl relinquished in the midst of the Sangha out of compassion for tasmiṃ the person relinquishing the bowl.
773.Dīyamāne tu pattasminti ūnapañcabandhanena pattena viññāpitanavapatte bhikkhumhi taṃ pattaṃ saṅghamajjhe nissajjitvā āpattiṃ desetvā nisinne catasso agatiyo agamanaṃ, gahitāgahitajānananti imehi pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ saṅghaṃ yācitvā ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya saṅghena pattagāhakaṃ katvā sammatena nissaṭṭhapattaṃ hatthena gahetvā tasmiṃ saṅghe saṅghattherato paṭṭhāya anukkamena upasaṅkamma viññāyamānaṃ guṇaṃ vatvā paṇāmite.Yassāti tasmiṃ saṅghamajjhe nisinnassa yassa bhikkhuno, rocanatthayoge sampadānavacanaṃ.Sodīyamāno patto.Taṃdīyamānaṃ pattaṃ.
773. Dīyamāne tu pattasmiṃ means when a bhikkhu who has requested a new bowl with a bowl that is deficient in five ties, and who is sitting after relinquishing that bowl in the midst of the Sangha and declaring the offense, when the bowl is offered after requesting the Sangha first by a bhikkhu possessing these five qualities: not going to the four courses of bias, and knowing what has been taken and not taken; after being approved by the Sangha with a motion and a second announcement as the receiver of the bowl, having taken the relinquished bowl in his hand, having approached the Sanghatthera first in that Sangha and stating the known qualities in sequence, when it is offered. Yassā means for whichever bhikkhu sitting in that Sangha, the dative case for the sake of approval. So the bowl being given. Taṃ that bowl being given.
774.Dīpitoti ‘‘apattakassa na gāhetabbo’’ti (pārā. 615) vutto.Tatthāti tassaṃ bhikkhuparisāyaṃ.Pattapariyantoti ettha ‘‘evaṃ parivattetvā pariyante ṭhitapatto’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā tena pattaparivattanena āgato vā sabbehi aggahitattā āgato so eva vā patto pariyanto nāma hotīti attho.Tassa bhikkhunoti pattaṃ nissajjitvā nisinnassa tassa bhikkhuno.
774. Dīpito means stated as "it should not be taken by one who is subject to an offense" (pārā. 615). Tatthā means in that community of bhikkhus. Pattapariyanto here, since it is said in the commentary "the bowl that has come around by rotating it in this way and standing at the end" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615), the meaning is that the bowl that has come around by that bowl rotation or that has come because it has not been taken by anyone is called pariyanto. Tassa bhikkhuno means for that bhikkhu who is sitting after relinquishing the bowl.
775.Tanti attano dinnaṃ taṃ pariyantapattaṃ.Appadeseti mañcapīṭhādiaṭṭhāne. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘mañcapīṭhachattanāgadantādike adese’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615).Vissajjetīti aññassa deti. Attanā adāpetvā aññena taṃ pattaṃ sayameva attano gahetvā aññaṃ anurūpaṃ pattaṃ diyyamānaṃ gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatītiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.Abhogena paribhuñjatīti yāgurandhanādivasena paribhuñjati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘abhogenāti yāgurandhanarajanapacanādinā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615). ‘‘Antarāmagge pana byādhimhi uppanne aññasmiṃ bhājane asati mattikāya limpitvā yāguṃ vā pacituṃ udakaṃ vā tāpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā tādise ṭhāne tathāpi paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha viseso.
775. Taṃ means that pariyanta bowl given by oneself. Appadese means in an unsuitable place such as a bed or a seat. As it is said in the commentary "in an unsuitable place like a bed, seat, umbrella, or coat-rack" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615). Vissajjetī means he gives it to another. It is stated in the commentary that it is permissible to take that bowl oneself after not having it given by oneself, and to take another suitable bowl that is being given. Abhogena paribhuñjatī means he uses it for cooking gruel, etc. As it is said in the commentary "abhogena means by cooking gruel, dyeing, or cooking, etc." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615). There is a distinction here because it is stated in the commentary that "but on a journey, when sickness arises, in the absence of another vessel, it is permissible to smear it with clay and cook gruel or heat water" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.615), it is permissible to use it that way in such a place.
776.Naṭṭheti attano paribhuñjiyamāne patte coraggahaṇādinā naṭṭhe.Bhinneti bhedamupagate.Anāpattīti aññaṃ pattaṃ viññāpentassa anāpatti.Pakāsitāti ‘‘anāpatti naṭṭhapattassa bhinnapattassa ñātakānaṃ pavāritānaṃ aññassatthāya attano dhanenā’’tiādinā (pārā. 617) nayenapāḷiyaṃdesitā. Idha ‘‘aññassatthāyā’’ti vuttattā attano vaḷañjiyamāne patte satipi aññassatthāya pattaṃ viññāpetuṃ vaṭṭati.Ñātakādīnaṃ gaṇhatoti ettha ‘‘santaka’’nti labbhati. Attano dhanenāti yojanā. Ettha dhanaṃ nāma suttavatthādi kappiyavatthu.
776. Naṭṭhe means when the bowl being used by oneself is lost due to thieves or seizure. Bhinne means when it has broken. Anāpattī means there is no offense for requesting another bowl. Pakāsitā means it is taught in the Pali in the manner of "there is no offense for one whose bowl is lost or broken, for relatives who have been invited, for the sake of another, with one's own wealth," etc. (pārā. 617). Here, since it is said "aññassatthāyā (for the sake of another)," even when there is a bowl being used by oneself, it is permissible to request a bowl for the sake of another. Ñātakādīnaṃ gaṇhato here "santaka" is obtained. It is connected with "attano dhanena (with one's own wealth)." Here, wealth means permissible items such as cloths for robes.
777.Ettha viññāpanaṃkriyaṃ.
777. Here, the requesting is kriyaṃ (action).
Dutiyapattakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Second Bowl Story.
778.Sappiādiṃ bhesajjanti etthapāḷiyaṃ‘‘seyyathidaṃ? Sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇita’’nti (pārā. 622) uddisitvā ‘‘sappi nāma gosappi vā ajikāsappi vā mahiṃsasappi vā, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappī’’ti (pārā. 623) niddiṭṭhaṃ ghatañca ‘‘tesaṃyeva navanīta’’nti (pārā. 623) niddiṭṭhaṃ navanītañca ‘‘tilatelaṃ sāsapatelaṃ madhukatelaṃ eraṇḍakatelaṃ vasātela’’nti (pārā. 623) niddiṭṭhaṃ telañca ‘‘madhu nāma makkhikāmadhū’’ti (pārā. 623) niddiṭṭhaṃ madhuñca ‘‘phāṇitaṃ nāma ucchumhā nibbatta’’nti (pārā. 623) niddiṭṭhaṃ guḷādiphāṇitañcāti etasmiṃ pañcabhesajjarāsimhi yaṃ yaṃ bhesajjanti attho.Purebhattanti purebhatte.Paṭigayhāti paṭiggahetvā.
778. Sappiādiṃ bhesajja here in the Pali, after specifying "that is to say, ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, molasses" (pārā. 622), it is specified "sappi (ghee) means cow ghee, goat ghee, or buffalo ghee; the ghee of those whose meat is allowable" (pārā. 623), and navanīta (fresh butter) is specified as "of those same" (pārā. 623), and oil is specified as "sesame oil, mustard oil, madhuka oil, castor oil, tallow oil" (pārā. 623), and honey is specified as "madhu (honey) means bee honey" (pārā. 623), and phāṇita (molasses) is specified as "phāṇita means produced from sugarcane" (pārā. 623), the meaning is whichever medicine in this collection of five medicines. Purebhatta means before the meal. Paṭigayhā means having received.
779.Taṃpurebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ bhesajjaṃ.Sattāhanti ettha ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti kiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ atikkamantassā’’ti padacchedo.‘‘Sattāhātikkame tassā’’ti vā pāṭho. Sattāhassa atikkamo sattāhātikkamo, tasmiṃsattāhātikkame. Tassāti bhesajjapaṭiggāhakassa bhikkhuno.‘‘Nissaggiya’’nti iminā pācittiyameva dassitaṃ. Nissaggiyavatthu bhājanagaṇanāya āpattiṃ karoti. Ekasmiṃ bhājanepi visuṃ visuṃ ṭhapitāni navanītapiṇḍaguḷapiṇḍasakkaramadhupaṭalānipi attano gaṇanāya āpattiṃ karonti.
779. Taṃ that medicine received before the meal. Sattāha here, the accusative case in the sense of extreme connection with the verb "vaṭṭatī (it is allowable)." The word separation is "Sattāhaṃ atikkamantassa." Or the reading is "Sattāhātikkame tassā". Sattāhātikkamo means the passing of a week, in that sattāhātikkame (passing of a week). Tassā means for the bhikkhu who received the medicine. "Nissaggiya" here only shows pācittiya. The forfeited item causes an offense by the counting of vessels. Even the balls of fresh butter, balls of jaggery, lumps of sugar, or pieces of honey placed separately in one vessel cause an offense by one's own counting.
780.Gaṇhitvāti paṭiggahetvā. Sannidhīyatītisannidhi,sannihitavatthu, tassakārakaṃkaraṇaṃ aparāparadivasatthāya ṭhapanaṃ, taṃ katvā, pacchābhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ yathā aparaṃ divasaṃ gacchati, tathā katvā nikkhipitvāti attho.Nirāmisaṃ sāyatoti āmisena amissetvā bhuñjantassa.
780. Gaṇhitvā means having received. Sannidhīyatīti sannidhi, the object that is stored, its kārakaṃ (cause) means the action of storing for the sake of another day, having done that, the meaning is having received it after the meal and having put it away in such a way that it goes to another day. Nirāmisaṃ sāyato means for one eating without mixing it with meat.
781.Uggahitanti appaṭiggahāpetvā hatthena gahitaṃ.Sarīrabhogeti bahi sarīraparibhogeneva.
781. Uggahita means taken with the hand without having it received. Sarīrabhoge means only by external bodily use.
782.Gahitaṃpaṭiggahitaṃ.Tāpetvāti vilīyāpetvā.
782. Gahitaṃ means received. Tāpetvā means having melted.
783.‘‘Sayaṃ tāpeti…pe… na hoti so’’ti idaṃ sudhotanavanītaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, duddhotena pana dadhiguḷikādisahitena sāmaṃpāko hoteva. Navanītassa yaṃ sayaṃ tāpanaṃ, so sāmaṃpāko na hotīti yojanā.
783. "Sayaṃ tāpeti…pe… na hoti so" this is said referring to well-churned fresh butter, but for poorly churned butter mixed with curdled milk balls etc., it is self-cooked. The meaning is that the self-melting of fresh butter is not self-cooked.
784.Yena kenacīti upasampannena, anupasampannena vā.
784. Yena kenacī means by one who is ordained or unordained.
785.‘‘Sayaṃ karotī’’ti iminā anupasampannaṃ nivatteti. Tena kataṃ pana tadahu purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitakhīrena vā dadhinā vā katasappi anupasampannena kataṃ sāmisampi tadahu purebhattaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622).
785.‘‘Sayaṃ karotī’’: By this, he excludes one who is not fully ordained. But if it is made by him, even if it is mixed with meat, it is allowable before noon. As it is said in the commentary: "If ghee made with milk or curd received before noon is made by one who is not fully ordained, even if it is mixed with meat, it is allowable before noon" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622).
786.Savatthukassāti ettha vatthu nāma khīradadhi.
786.Savatthukassā: Here, vatthu means milk and curd.
787.Assāti paṭiggahitakhīradadhīhi katasappimāha.‘‘Paṭiggahetvā tānī’’ti vuttattāti idaṃ ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ? Sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ, tāni paṭiggahetvā’’ti (pārā. 622) imasmiṃmātikāpāṭhe‘‘yānī’’ti vuttasappiādīnameva ‘‘tāni paṭiggahetvā’’ti vuttattāti vuttaṃ hoti, tattha khīradadhīnaṃ avuttattāti adhippāyo.
787.Assā: He speaks of ghee made from received milk and curd. ‘‘Paṭiggahetvā tānī’’ti vuttattā: This means that in the mātikāpāṭha (textual passage) "Whatever medicines are allowable for sick monks, that is, ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, molasses, having received those..." (pārā. 622), it is said "having received those" referring to ghee etc., mentioned in the passage. The intention is that milk and curd are not mentioned there.
788.Kappiyasappimhīti kappiyamaṃsānaṃ sattānaṃ ghate.Akappiyasappimhīti akappiyamaṃsānaṃ sattānaṃ ghate, paṭiggahetvā sattāhe atikkanteti vuttaṃ hoti.
788.Kappiyasappimhī: In the ghee of animals whose meat is allowable. Akappiyasappimhī: In the ghee of animals whose meat is not allowable, it is said to have been received and kept beyond seven days.
789.Tena sappinā akappiyena bhavitabbanti idaṃ dukkaṭaṃ kathaṃ hotīti āha‘‘sabbā’’tiādi. Akappiyaṃ maṃsaṃ yesaṃ teakappiyamaṃsā,manussādayo, sabbe ca te akappiyamaṃsā cātisabbākappiyamaṃsā,tesaṃ.
789.Because that ghee is considered akappiya, he says how there is a dukkaṭa with ‘‘sabbā’’etc. Akappiyamaṃsā: Those whose meat is not allowable, such as humans, etc. Sabbākappiyamaṃsā: all of those whose meat is not allowable. [It means] belonging to all of them.
790-1.Evaṃ ce vaṭṭati, ‘‘yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappī’’ti kasmā pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā taṃ pariharitumāha‘‘yesa’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘yesañhi kappati maṃsaṃ, tesaṃ sappī’’tiidaṃvacanaṃkiṃpayojanaṃ sādhetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni paricchedaniyamanasaṅkhātaṃ taṃpayojanañca tabbisayañca dassetumāha‘‘paṇītabhojanassā’’tiādi. Paṇītabhojanassa paricchedaniyāmananti yojanā. Sattāhakālike pañcavidhe bhesajjeti vuttaṃ hoti, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Nissaggiyassa vatthūnanti niddhāritabbadassanaṃ.Nissaggiyassāti ettha taṃhetukassa pācittiyassāti attho.Vatthūnanti sappinavanītadvayameva vuttaṃ. Sattāhakālike nissaggiyapācittiyassa vatthu nāma etesameva sappinavanītāni, paṇītabhojanañca tesameva khīradadhisappinavanītānīti dassetuṃ tathā vuttaṃ, na akappiyamaṃsasattānaṃ sappiādinivāraṇatthaṃ vuttanti ayaṃ pāḷiyaṃ tathāgatā dhippeto atthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
790-1.If it is allowable in this way, why is it said in the Pali, "For those whose meat is allowable, their ghee is allowable?" To resolve the objection that arises, he says ‘‘yesa’’ntiādi. Here it says, what purpose does this statement achieve: ‘‘yesañhi kappati maṃsaṃ, tesaṃ sappī’’? Now, to show that purpose consisting of the limiting condition and its scope, he says ‘‘paṇītabhojanassā’’tiādi. Paṇītabhojanassa paricchedaniyāmananti yojanā: The limiting condition is for fine foods. It is said to be the five kinds of medicine allowable for seven days, a locative absolute. Nissaggiyassa vatthūnanti: Showing what must be forfeited. Nissaggiyassā: Here, it means the pācittiya caused by it. Vatthūnanti: Only ghee and fresh butter are mentioned. To show that the vatthu for the nissaggiya pācittiya allowable for seven days is only these ghee and fresh butter, and that fine foods are only those milk, curd, ghee and fresh butter, it is said in that way, and this Pali statement is not intended to exclude ghee etc., of animals whose meat is not allowable. This is the meaning intended by the Tathāgata, it is said.
792.Gahituggahitādikeuggahitapaṭiggahitādike navanītepi sabbo vinicchayo sappimhi vuttanayeneva veditabboti yojanā.Ādi-saddena purebhattaṃ, pacchābhattaṃ paṭiggahitakhīradadhīhi, uggahitakhīradadhīhi ca kataṃ navanītaṃ, tādisameva akappiyamaṃsanavanītañca saṅgahitaṃ.Sabbo vinicchayoti āpattiādikaṃ sabbavinicchayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sabbo āpattānāpattiparibhogāparibhoganayo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622).
792.Gahituggahitādike: In the case of fresh butter that is received or taken up etc., all the judgment should be understood in the same way as said for ghee. With the term ādi are included fresh butter made before noon, after noon, with received milk and curd, with taken-up milk and curd, and similar fresh butter from animals whose meat is not allowable. Sabbo vinicchayo: Includes all judgments regarding offenses, etc. As it is said in the commentary: "All the rules regarding offenses and non-offenses, use and non-use" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622).
793-4.Bhikkhūnaṃ ākirantīti ettha ‘‘patte’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.Ādiccapakkanti ātape vilīnaṃ.Saṃsaṭṭhaṃparissāvitaṃ.
793-4.Bhikkhūnaṃ ākirantī: Here, "in the bowl" is understood by implication. Ādiccapakka: Melted in the sun. Saṃsaṭṭhaṃ: Strained.
795-6.Tilatelaṃ sāsapatelaṃ madhukatelaṃ eraṇḍakatelaṃ.Gahitanti paṭiggahitaṃ. Purebhattaṃ sāmisampi nirāmisampi sāyitabbanti yojanā.Tesaṃ vasāti sattāhātikkantānaṃ tesaṃ telānaṃ vasena, telabhājanagaṇanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
795-6.Sesame oil, mustard oil, madhuka oil, castor oil. Gahitanti: Received. It should be consumed before noon, whether mixed with meat or not. Tesaṃ vasā: Because of those oils that have been kept beyond seven days, it is said to be counted as containers of oil.
798.Tesaṃ tiṇṇampīti eraṇḍamadhukasāsapabījānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ.
798.Tesaṃ tiṇṇampī: Of those three, castor, madhuka, and mustard seeds.
799.Nissaggiyaṃpācittiyaṃ.
799.Nissaggiyaṃ: Pācittiya.
800.Sāsapādīnanti etthaādi-saddena paṭilomena madhukeraṇḍakānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Gahetvāti paṭiggahetvā. Bhikkhunā telatthāyeva gahetvā ṭhapitānaṃ sāsapādīnaṃ sattāhātikkame dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
800.Sāsapādīnanti: Here, with the term ādi, madhuka and castor are included by inversion. Gahetvāti: Having received. If the mustard etc., which have been received and kept by a monk only for the purpose of oil, are kept beyond seven days, there would be a dukkaṭa, it is said.
801-2.Nāḷikerañca karañjañcanāḷikerakarañjāni,tesaṃ, nāḷikeraphalānaṃ, nattamālaṭṭhīnañca telanti sambandho.Kuruvakassāti atasibījassa. Nimbañca kosambakañcanimbakosambakāni,tesaṃ, pucimandabījassa ca phandanabījassa ca telanti sambandho.Bhallātakassāti evaṃnāmakassa rukkhabījassa.Samayaccayeti sattāhātikkame.
801-2.Coconut and karañja: nāḷikerakarañjāni, of those, the oil of coconut fruits and nattamālaṭṭhī. Kuruvakassā: Of linseed. Nimba and kosambaka: nimbakosambakāni, of those, the oil of pucimanda seeds and phandana seeds. Bhallātakassā: Of the seeds of a tree of that name. Samayaccaye: At the end of seven days.
803.Yāvakālikabhedañcāti ettha ‘‘yāvakālika’’nti bhedo visesanaṃ yassāti viggaho, ‘‘idaṃ vatthu’’nti etassa ajjhoharaṇīyavisesitabbassa visesanaṃ.Yāvajīvikantipi tasseva visesanaṃ.Sesanti ‘‘sāmaṃpākasavatthuka purebhattapacchābhattapaṭiggahitauggahitakavatthuvidhānaṃ sabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622)aṭṭhakathāyaṃdassitaṃ sesaṃ visesappakārajātamāha.Etthāpīti imasmiṃ telavinicchayepi.
803.Yāvakālikabhedañcā: Here, "yāvakālika" is a qualifier of bheda, "this is an item," is a qualifier to be brought in, that has to be qualified. Yāvajīvikantipi: Is also a qualifier of that. Sesanti: The remaining special types are those shown in the commentary "all the rules regarding items cooked by oneself, with ingredients, before noon, after noon, received and taken up" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622). Etthāpī: Even in this judgment regarding oil.
804.Acchassaisassa.Macchassajalajassa.Varāhassasūkarassa.Susukāsaṅkhātassa makarassa. Macchavacaneneva makarassa saṅgahitattepi vāḷamacchabhāvena visuṃ gahaṇantiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.Gadrabhassakharassa. Imesaṃpañcannaṃsattānaṃ vasena pañcavidhānaṃvasānaṃtelañca pañcappakāraṃ hotīti attho.
804.Acchassa: Of a bear. Macchassa: Of an aquatic animal. Varāhassa: Of a pig. Susukā: Of a susukā named crocodile. Although the crocodile is included by the term "fish" itself, it is mentioned separately because of its nature as a fierce fish, it is said in the commentary. Gadrabhassa: Of a donkey. It means that the vasā oils of these pañcannaṃ five types of beings are also five kinds.
805.Kappiyākappiyassa cāti kappiyākappiyamaṃsassa sattassāti vuttaṃ hoti, sabbameva vasātelaṃ vaṭṭatīti iminā sambandho. Ettha ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasa’’nti (mahāva. 262) anuññātapāṭheacchavasāggahaṇena manussehi aññesaṃ sabbākappiyamaṃsasattānaṃ vasāya anuññātattā taṃ saṅgahetuṃakappiyaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘acchavasa’nti vacanena ṭhapetvā manussavasaṃ sabbesaṃ akappiyamaṃsānaṃ vasā anuññātā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). Ettha akappiyamaṃsasattānaṃ maṃsānaṃ akappiyabhāvo ‘‘maṃsesu hi dasa manussahatthiassasunakhaahisīhabyagghadīpiacchataracchānaṃ maṃsāni akappiyāni. Vasāsu ekā manussavasāva. Khīrādīsu akappiyaṃ nāma natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623)aṭṭhakathāvacanato veditabbo. Akappiyavacanena manussavasāyapi gayhamānattā tasmiṃ nīharitumāha‘‘ṭhapetvā’’ti.
805.Kappiyākappiyassa cā: It is said to be of beings whose meat is allowable and not allowable, all the vasātela oils are allowable, this connects. Here, since in the passage allowing "I allow, monks, medicinal vasā oils: bear vasā, fish vasā, susukā vasā, pig vasā, donkey vasā" (mahāva. 262), by including acchavasā, the vasā of all beings whose meat is not allowable other than humans is allowed, the inclusion of akappiya is made to include that, it should be seen. As it is said in the commentary: "Having excluded human vasā by the word ‘bear vasā,’ the vasā of all animals whose meat is not allowable is allowed" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). Here, the unallowable nature of the meat of animals whose meat is not allowable should be understood from the commentary passage "Among meats, the meats of humans, elephants, horses, dogs, snakes, lions, tigers, leopards, cheetahs, and hyenas are not allowable. Among vasās, only human vasā. Among milk etc., there is nothing unallowable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). Since human vasā is also included by the term akappiya, he says ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’ to exclude that.
806.Purebhattanti purebhatte.Saṃsaṭṭhaṃparissāvitaṃ. ‘‘Purebhatta’’nti idaṃ ‘‘paṭiggahetvāna, pakkaṃ, saṃsaṭṭha’’nti imehi padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kāle nippakkaṃ kāle saṃsaṭṭhaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjitu’’nti (mahāva. 262).
806.Purebhattanti: Before noon. Saṃsaṭṭhaṃ: Strained. "Before noon" this should be connected to each of the words "having received, cooked, strained." As it is said in the Pali, "Having received at the proper time, cooked at the proper time, strained at the proper time, to be used with the use of oil" (mahāva. 262).
807.Taṃ katvā detīti apaṭiggahitavasaṃ gahetvā pacitvā telaṃ detīti attho. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘anupasampannehi kataṃ nibbaṭṭitavasātelaṃ purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). Tato uddhaṃ sattāhamanatikkammāti gahetabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya sattāhaṃ nirāmisameva vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). Idha ubhayatthāpi kāle, vikāle ca kappiyākappiyamaṃsavasānaṃ telaṃ diyyamānaṃ sukhumamaṃsacuṇṇādikaṃ abbohārikaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yaṃ pana tattha sukhumarajasadisaṃ maṃsaṃ vā nhāru vā aṭṭhi vā lohitaṃ vā hoti, taṃ abbohārika’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623).
807.Taṃ katvā detī: It means taking vasā that has not been received, cooking it and giving oil. Therefore, it is said in the commentary: "Oil made from vasā that has been rendered by someone not fully ordained, received before noon, even mixed with meat before noon is allowable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). From then on, it should be taken as not exceeding seven days. As it is said in the commentary: "From after noon onwards, only that not mixed with meat is allowable for seven days" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). Here, in both cases, giving oil of allowable and unallowable animal vasā at the proper time and improper time is not suitable for consumption due to subtle meat powder etc. As it is said in the commentary: "But whatever meat or sinew or bone or blood is there that is like subtle dust, that is not suitable for consumption" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623).
808.Paṭiggahetunti ettha ‘‘vasa’’nti cakātunti ettha ‘‘tela’’nti ca pakaraṇato labbhati.Kātunti ettha pacituṃ parissāvitunti ubhayamevāti attho.‘‘Na vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ paṭiggahaṇādipayogattaye visuṃ visuṃ dukkaṭattā vuttaṃ. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘vikāle ce bhikkhave paṭiggahitaṃ vikāle nippakkaṃ vikāle saṃsaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ ce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti tiṇṇaṃ dukkaṭāna’’nti (mahāva. 262). Imāni hi tīhi payogehi tīṇi dukkaṭāni honti.Sesoti uggahitakapaṭiggahitakasavatthukavisayo vinicchayo ca bhājanagaṇanāya āpattibhedo cāti evaṃpakāro vattabbaviseso.
808.Paṭiggahetunti: Here, "vasa" and kātunti: here, "oil" is understood from the context. Kātunti: It means both to cook and to strain. ‘‘Na vaṭṭatī’’: This is said because there is a separate dukkaṭa for each of the three instances of receiving, etc. As it is said in the Pali: "If, monks, it is received at the wrong time, cooked at the wrong time, strained at the wrong time, if one consumes it, there is an offense of three dukkaṭas" (mahāva. 262). These are three dukkaṭas due to the three instances. Seso: The remaining special points to be stated are the judgment regarding items that have been taken up or received, with ingredients, and the difference in offenses according to the counting of containers.
809.Gahitanti paṭiggahitaṃ.Madhukarīkatanti madhumakkhikākhuddakamakkhikābhamaramakkhikāsaṅkhātāhi tīhi madhukarīhi kataṃ.
809.Gahitanti: Received. Madhukarīkatanti: Made by three kinds of bees called honeybees, small bees, and bumblebees.
810.Vatthūnaṃ gaṇanāti madhupaṭalena ṭhitaṃ ce, paṭalagaṇanāya, pīḷetvā bhājane pakkhipitvā ṭhapitaṃ ce, bhājanagaṇanāya, silesamiva patthinnaṃ ce, mahābhamaramadhukhaṇḍapiṇḍavasena, visuṃ visuṃ kate tesaṃ gaṇanāyāti attho.
810.Vatthūnaṃ gaṇanā: If it remains with a layer of honey, it is counted by the layer; if it is squeezed, put in a container, and kept, it is counted by the container; if it is spread like phlegm, it is counted according to the pieces of large bumblebee honey; if they are made separately, it means counting them.
811.Ghanāghananti ettha guḷañca nānappakārā sakkarā ca ghanapakkaṃ nāma. Pakkatanukaṃ phāṇitaṃ aghanapakkaṃ nāma. Ucchusileso apakkaghanaṃ nāma. Ucchudaṇḍato pīḷitaraso apakkāghanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Phāṇitaṃ nāma ucchumhā nibbatta’’nti (pārā. 623) sādhāraṇapāḷivacanato, ‘‘phāṇitaṃ nāma ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā; vi. saṅga aṭṭha. 98)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca iha rasādīhi ucchupānampi saṅgahitaṃ. Keci ucchuno catukālikattaṃ vaṇṇayanti, taṃ na sārato paccetabbaṃ.
811.Ghanāghananti: Here, guḷa and various kinds of sugar are called ghanapakka (densely cooked). Molasses that is thinly cooked is called aghanapakka (not densely cooked). Sugarcane pulp is called apakkaghana (uncooked dense). Juice squeezed from sugarcane stalks is called apakkāghana (uncooked, not dense). Since it is said in the general Pali statement, "Molasses means that which is produced from sugarcane" (pārā. 623), and in the commentary statement, "Molasses means taking sugarcane juice..." (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā; vi. saṅga aṭṭha. 98), here even sugarcane drinks from juice etc., are included. Some describe sugarcane as allowable at all times; that should not be accepted as essential.
812.Phāṇitanti vuttappakāre tasmiṃ phāṇite aññataraṃ.Gahitaṃpaṭiggahitaṃ.
812.Phāṇitanti: In that molasses of the kind mentioned, one or another. Gahitaṃ: Received.
813.Asaṃsaṭṭhenāti aparissāvitena.Kataphāṇitanti parissāvetvā attanā kataphāṇitaṃ.Purebhattaṃ gahitenāti purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitena. ‘‘Sayaṃ kata’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) vuttattākatanti ucchuraso gahetabbo.
813.Asaṃsaṭṭhenā: With unstrained. Kataphāṇitanti: Molasses made by oneself after straining. Purebhattaṃ gahitenā: With that received before noon. Since it is said "made by oneself" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623), katanti means sugarcane juice should be taken.
816.Katvāti pacitvā phāṇitaṃ katvā.
816.Katvā: Having cooked, having made molasses.
817.Pacchābhattaṃ katañcāpīti pacchābhattaṃ attanā ca kataṃ anupasampannena ca kataṃ phāṇitampi.
817.Pacchābhattaṃ katañcāpī: Molasses made by oneself after noon, and also made by someone not fully ordained.
818.Kataṃ…pe… sītavārināti sītudake madhukapupphāni pakkhipitvā ṭhapetvā madditvā parissāvitarasena kataṃ madhukaphāṇitaṃ.
818.Kataṃ …pe… sītavārinā: Madhuka molasses made by putting madhuka flowers in cold water, keeping them, squeezing them, and making [molasses] with the strained juice.
819.Assāti madhukaphāṇitassa.Dukkaṭanti tadādhārabhājanagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ. Khīraṃ pakkhipitvā kataṃ madhukaphāṇitaṃ yāvakālikaṃ ce hoti, kathaṃ khaṇḍasakkarākataṃ sattāhakālikaṃ hotīti vicāraṇāyaṃ khīrajallikaṃ dhovitvā dhovitvā gayhamānattā vaṭṭatīti pariharanti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘khaṇḍasakkaraṃ pana khīrajallikaṃ apanetvā apanetvā sodhenti, tasmā vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). ‘‘Bījato paṭṭhāya na vaṭṭatī’’ti paṭikkhittamadhukapupphamerayaṃ vinā āmakañca pakkañca madhukapupphaṃ purebhattaṃ vaṭṭatītiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
819.Assā: Of that madhuka molasses. Dukkaṭanti: A dukkaṭa by counting the containers that hold it. If madhuka molasses made by adding milk is allowable at all times, how is molasses made with granulated sugar allowable for seven days? In investigating this, they resolve it by saying that since the milk residue is removed by repeated washing, it is allowable. As it is said in the commentary: "But they purify granulated sugar by repeatedly removing the milk residue; therefore, it is allowable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). It is said in the commentary that without madhuka flower wine which is prohibited from the seed onwards, both raw and cooked madhuka flowers are allowable before noon.
820.Sabbesaṃ pana phalānanti kadalikhajjūriādiphalānaṃ.
820.Sabbesaṃ pana phalāna: But of all fruits such as bananas and dates.
821.Sāmaññajotanāya visesepi avaṭṭhānato‘‘kālikā’’ti iminā ‘‘pacchābhattaṃ sati paccaye’’ti vacanasāmatthiyā yāvakālikavajjā tayo kālikā gahetabbā, ‘‘purebhattaṃ yathāsukha’’nti vacanasāmatthiyā cattāropi gahetabbā. Yāvakālikavajjā tayokālikā pacchābhattaṃvikālepaccayepipāsādikāraṇe sati kevalampi paccekampi missetvāpi paribhuñjituṃ bhikkhussa vaṭṭanti.Kālikācattāropipurebhattaṃkāle yāvamajjhanhā kevalampi missetvāpi yathāsukhaṃ asatipi paccaye paribhuñjituṃ bhikkhussa vaṭṭantīti yojanā.
821. Even in the Sāmaññajotanā with its distinctions, due to the established meaning, "kālikā" means, by the force of the statement "after the meal, given a reason," the three kālikas, excluding yāvakālika, should be taken; and by the force of the statement "before the meal, as one likes," all four should be taken. The three kālikas, excluding yāvakālika, after the meal, at an unseasonable time, when there is a reason, such as thirst, are allowable for a bhikkhu to consume, whether alone, individually, or mixed. The four kālikas, before the meal, at the proper time, until midday, are allowable for a bhikkhu to consume as one likes, whether alone or mixed, even without a reason—this is the construction.
822.Aruādīnīti vaṇādīni.‘‘Makkhetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā bāhiraparibhogopi nivārito.
822.Aruā and others means dyes and the like. "It is not allowable to smear" means even external use is prohibited.
823.Anāpattivāre‘‘antosattāha’’nti adhikāre ‘‘anupasampannassa cattena vantena muttena anapekkho datvā paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjatī’’ti (pārā. 625) vuttattācajitvāti ettha ‘‘antosattāhaṃ anupasampannassā’’ti vattabbaṃ.Labhitvāti ettha ‘‘sattāhātikkamepī’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Tenāhamahāpadumatthero‘‘antosattāhe dinnassa hi puna paribhoge āpattiyeva natthi, sattāhātikkantassa pana paribhoge anāpattīti dassanatthamidaṃ vutta’’nti.Labhitvāti gahitatelena anupasampannena sakkaccaṃ, asakkaccaṃ vā dinnaṃ labhitvā.Sāyitunti ettha ‘‘labhatī’’ti seso.
823.In the non-offense section, under the heading "within seven days," it is stated, "unsolicited, having given to one who is not fully ordained, vomited matter, bile, or expectorant, and having received it back, he consumes it" (pārā. 625), so in "having rejected," it should be stated, "within seven days, to one who is not fully ordained." "Having received" is obtained by implication, "even after the seven days have passed." Therefore, Mahāpaduma Thera said, "Indeed, there is no offense in consuming what was given within seven days, but this is said to indicate that there is no offense in consuming it after seven days have passed." "Having received" means having received oil that was given by one not fully ordained, intentionally or unintentionally. In "should taste," "he receives" is understood.
824.‘‘Anāpatti adhiṭṭhetī’’ti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare ‘‘antosattāha’’nti seso, sabbapadehipi yujjati.Adhiṭṭhetīti sattāhabbhantare sappiñca telañca vasañca muddhani telaṃ vā abbhañjanaṃ vā, madhuṃ arumakkhanaṃ, phāṇitaṃ gharadhūpanaṃ bhavissatīti adhiṭṭheti. Adhiṭṭhitena anadhiṭṭhitaṃ ce missaṃ hoti, punapi adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ.Vissajjetīti antosattāhe aññassa upasampannassa deti. Sace tathā dinnaṃ aññena appaṭiggahitattā, tena paṭiggahitampi itarassa dinnattā tesaṃ anāpattītiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ.
824.In "there is no offense if he determines," "within seven days" is understood between the two words, and it applies to all the words. "He determines" means within seven days, he determines that ghee, oil, fat, or oil on the head, or massage, honey for smearing on dyes, or molasses for fumigating the house will be used. If something undetermined is mixed with something determined, it must be determined again. "He gives up" means within seven days he gives it to another fully ordained bhikkhu. It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625 similar in meaning) that if what was given in that way is not received by another, or even if it is received by him, it is not an offense for them, because it was given to another.
Vinassatīti sattāhabbhantare yena kenaci ākārena yathā aparibhogaṃ hoti, tathā corikāya haraṇādivasena nassati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘vinassatīti aparibhogaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625).Acchinditvā gaṇhatīti añño tasmiṃ sattāhabbhantare vilumpitvā gaṇhāti.Vissāsaṃ gaṇhatīti tasmiṃyeva sattāhabbhantare añño vissāsaṃ gaṇhāti.
"Perishes" means within seven days, it perishes in some way, such that it cannot be used, such as being carried away by thieves. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Perishes means it becomes unusable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625). "Seizes by force" means another seizes it by force, plundering within that seven-day period. "Takes on trust" means another takes it on trust within that same seven-day period.
825.Akathinacittena satthunā samuṭṭhānādayo sabbeva paṭhamena kathinena samā pakāsitāti yojanā.Akathinacittenāti mahākaruṇārasena tintatāya akakkasacittena, avihiṃsābhiratacittenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Satthunāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikādīhi atthehi sadevakaṃ lokaṃ anusāsatīti satthā, tena sabbaññunā dasabalena sammāsambuddhena.
825.It should be construed that the Teacher revealed all the originations and so on with a mind that was not constrained, just like with the first kathina. "With a mind that was not constrained" means with a mind that was not harsh, because it was saturated with great compassion, with a mind that delighted in non-violence. "The Teacher" means the Teacher who instructs the world, including the devas, with benefits in this life and the next, the All-Knowing One, the Ten-Powered One, the Perfectly Enlightened One.
Bhesajjasikkhāpadakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Bhesajja (Medicine) Training Rule.
826.Gimhānanti ettha ‘‘māsāna’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati, niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ, gimhesu catūsu māsesūti attho. Niddhāritabbaṃ dasseti‘‘māso seso’’ti, ettha ‘‘vattabbe kāle’’ti seso. Phaggunamāsakaṇhapakkhapāṭipadato paṭṭhāya jeṭṭhamāsapuṇṇamipariyosānesu tīsu māsesu atikkantesūti attho.Sesamāsonāma jeṭṭhamāsassa kaṇhapakkhapāṭipadato paṭṭhāya āsāḷhimāsapuṇṇamipariyosāno. Gimhānaṃ māso sesoti vattabbe kāleti attho.
826.In "of the summer," "of the months" is understood by implication, the locative being used in the sense of determination, meaning in the four months of summer. He shows what is to be determined with "a month remaining," where "at the time it should be said" is understood. The meaning is: after the three months from the first day of the dark fortnight of the month of Phagguna until the full-moon ending of the month of Jeṭṭha have passed. "Remaining month" means from the first day of the dark fortnight of the month of Jeṭṭha until the full-moon ending of the month of Āsāḷhi. The meaning is: at the time when it should be said that a month of the summer remains.
Imasmiṃ pacchime gimhamāse jeṭṭhamāsassa kaṇhapakkho vassikasāṭikā ce na laddhā, pariyesituṃ laddhaṃ kātuṃ khettaṃ, adhiṭṭhānanivāsanānaṃ akhettaṃ. Āsāḷhipurimapakkho pariyesanakaraṇanivāsanānaṃ khettaṃ, adhiṭṭhātuṃ akhettaṃ. Āsāḷhikaṇhapakkhapāṭipadato yāva pacchimakattikapuṇṇamī, idaṃ catunnampi khettanti ayamettha saṅkhepo.
In this last summer month, if the rains-cloth has not been obtained in the dark fortnight of the month of Jeṭṭha, seeking is allowable, obtaining is allowable, making is a domain, determining and wearing are not domains. The first fortnight of Āsāḷhi is a domain for seeking, obtaining, and making, but not a domain for determining. From the first day of the dark fortnight of Āsāḷhi until the last full-moon of Kattika, this is a domain for all four—this is the summary here.
Pariyeseyyāti ‘‘ye manussā pubbe vassikasāṭikaṃ dentī’’tiādinā (pārā. 628)padabhājanevuttanayena pubbe vassikasāṭikadāyakaṃ upasaṅkamma ‘‘detha me vassikasāṭikacīvara’’ntiādinā vacanena aviññāpetvā ‘‘kālo vassikasāṭikāya samayo vassikasāṭikāya, aññepi manussā vassikasāṭikaṃ dentī’’ti evaṃ satuppādamattakaraṇena pariyeseyya.
"Should seek" means he should seek in the manner stated in the Padabhājana, "by approaching the former rains-cloth donors, 'These people used to give rains-cloths before'," (pārā. 628) without informing them with the words, "Give me a rains-cloth robe," but by merely creating a favorable impression, "It is the time for rains-cloth, it is the season for rains-cloth, other people also give rains-cloths."
Sāṭikanti vassikasāṭikaṃ.‘‘Addhamāso seso’’ti idaṃ ‘‘gimhāna’’nti imināva yujjati. Tattha ‘‘vattabbe kāle’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ, āsāḷhimāsassa purimapakkheti attho.Katvāti ettha ‘‘laddha’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Yathāvuttanayena satuppādena vā avasesānaṃ saddhāsampannakulānaṃ vā santikā laddhaṃ sibbanarajanakappabindudānavasena niṭṭhāpetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Paridaheti nivāseyya.
"Cloth" means the rains-cloth. "Half a month remains" agrees only with "of the summer." There, "at the time it should be said" should be supplied, meaning the first fortnight of the month of Āsāḷhi. "Having made" is obtained by implication, "having obtained." It means having completed the sewing, dyeing, and applying of the kappiya-dots from the remaining faithful families with a favorable impression, in the manner stated. "Should wear" means should wear it as a robe.
827-8.Piṭṭhisammate samayeti ‘‘kattikapuṇṇamāsiyā pana pacchimapāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva jeṭṭhamūlapuṇṇamā ime satta māsā piṭṭhisamayo nāmā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628) evaṃ dassitesu sattasu māsesu. Ñātakāññātakādino satuppādaṃ katvāti yojanā.Ādi-saddena pavāritāpavāritānaṃ saṅgaho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘aññātakaappavāritaṭṭhānato’’ti.
827-8.At the back-covering time means in the seven months shown thus: "These seven months from the day after the Kattika full-moon until the Jeṭṭhamūla full-moon are called the back-covering time" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628). It should be construed that having made a favorable impression, whether they are relatives or non-relatives. The Ādi-word includes those who have invited and those who have not invited. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "From a place of non-relatives and those who have not invited."
Tesuyevāti ñātakaaññātakapavāritaappavāritesu.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘hoti nissaggiyāpattī’’ti idaṃ dassitaṃ. Sā āpatti aññātakaappavāritesu aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadena hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘detha me vassikasāṭikacīvara’ntiādinā nayena viññattiṃ katvā nipphādentassa aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadena nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628). Ñātakapavāritesu tena sikkhāpadena anāpatti, piṭṭhisamayattā iminā āpatti hoti. Aññātakaappavāritesu ca vakkhamānanayena vattabhedadukkaṭena saddhiṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
In those same means among relatives, non-relatives, those who have invited, and those who have not invited. "Likewise" shows "there is an offense entailing forfeiture." That offense occurs, in the case of non-relatives and those who have not invited, by the training rule on soliciting from non-relatives. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "For one who solicits and completes it with the words 'Give me a rains-cloth robe' and so on, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya by the training rule on soliciting from non-relatives" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628). There is no offense by that training rule in the case of relatives and those who have invited, but because it is the back-covering time, there is an offense by this. It should be seen that in the case of non-relatives and those who have not invited, it occurs together with a dukkaṭa due to the difference in what should be said, according to the method to be explained.
829-30.Aññātakādino katvā pana satuppādanti yojanā.Ādi-saddena appavāritānaṃ saṅgaho.Kucchisaññite samayeti yathāvuttapiṭṭhisamaye sattamāse vinā itare pañca māsā vuttā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlapuṇṇamāsiyā pana pacchimapāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva kattikapuṇṇamā ime pañca māsā kucchisamayo nāmā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628).Vatthanti vassikasāṭikaṃ.Adinnapubbesūti yehi vassikasāṭikā na dinnapubbā, tesu, iminā vattabhedassa kāraṇamāha. Ihavattabhedonāma ‘‘ye manussā pubbe vassikasāṭikacīvaraṃ dentī’’tiādivacanato (pārā. 628) dinnapubbesu kātabbassa satuppādassa adinnapubbesu karaṇaṃ. Byatirekato dinnapubbesu natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti.
829-30.It should be construed that having made a favorable impression, from non-relatives and so on. The Ādi-word includes those who have not invited. At the womb-covering time means the five months other than the stated seven months of the back-covering time are stated. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "These five months from the day after the Jeṭṭhamūla full-moon until the Kattika full-moon are called the womb-covering time" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628). "Cloth" means the rains-cloth. "From those who have not given before" means from those by whom the rains-cloth has not been given before; with this, he states the reason for the difference in what should be said. Here, difference in what should be said means doing in the case of those who have not given before what should be done in the case of those who have given before, from the statement "These people used to give rains-cloth robes" (pārā. 628). It is indicated that, conversely, it does not exist in the case of those who have given before.
Tatrāti aññātakādimhi.‘‘Nissaggiya’’nti iminā aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadena āpattiṃ āha. Yathāha kucchisamayacatukke ‘‘viññattimpi katvā nipphādentassa aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadena nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti. Ayaṃ pācittiyāpatti pakatiyā vassikasāṭikadāyakesupi hotīti idaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘idaṃ pana pakatiyā vassikasāṭikadāyakesupi hotiyevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628) vacanato viññāyati.
"There" means in the case of non-relatives and so on. "Entailing forfeiture" refers to the offense by the training rule on soliciting from non-relatives. As it says about the fourfold womb-covering time, "For one who solicits and completes it, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya by the training rule on soliciting from non-relatives." This pācittiya offense also occurs naturally for those who are rains-cloth donors, and this is known from the Aṭṭhakathā's statement "But this occurs naturally even for those who are rains-cloth donors" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628).
831.Ovassāpetīti ākāsato patitaudakeneva kāyaṃ temeti, iminā ‘‘ghaṭādīhi osiñcituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti dīpitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Nibbakosambunā nahāyituṃ vaṭṭatī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Satipi cīvareti vassikasāṭikāya satiyāpi.‘‘Pariyosāne dukkaṭa’’nti iminā bindugaṇanāyāti dīpeti.Vivaṭaṅgaṇeti rukkhādinā kenaci anāvaṭaṭṭhāne.
831."Causes to be rained on" means he wets his body with water falling from the sky; with this, it is indicated that "it is allowable to sprinkle with a pot and so on." It is stated in the Gaṇṭhipada that "it is allowable to bathe naked in Kosambi." "Even with a robe" means even with a rains-cloth present. "At the end, a dukkaṭa" indicates counting the dots. "In an open courtyard" means in a place not covered by anything, such as a tree.
832.Māsasminti gimhānaṃ pacchimamāsasmiṃ.
832."In the month" means in the last month of the summer.
833.‘‘Acchinnacīvarassāti etaṃ vassikasāṭikameva sandhāya vutta’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.630)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Vassikasāṭikaṃ nivāsetvā nahāyantassa corupaddavoāpadānāma.Nhānakoṭṭhakanti nahānatthāya katakoṭṭhakaṃ.‘‘Vāpī’’ti iminā pokkharaṇijātassarādayo upalakkhitā.Nhāyantassāti naggo hutvā nahāyantassāti pakaraṇato labbhati. ‘‘Ākāsato patitaudakenevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.629)aṭṭhakathāyamevavuttaṃ.
833.It is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā that "the statement 'to one whose robe has been taken away' was said referring only to the rains-cloth" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.630). The disturbance of thieves for one bathing wearing a rains-cloth is called danger. "Bath-house" means a room made for bathing. "Pond" includes pools, lakes, and so on. "While bathing" is obtained from the context that it is while bathing naked. It is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā itself that "with water falling from the sky" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.629).
834.Kriyanti akāle pariyesanakaraṇaadhiṭṭhānanivāsanehi āpajjitabbato kiriyaṃ. Kāyena ca vācāya ca viññāpanādiṃ karontassakāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃhoti.
834."Action" means an action that incurs an offense by seeking, making, determining, or wearing at the wrong time. "Bodily action, verbal action" occurs for one who makes an announcement and so on with body and speech.
Vassikasāṭikakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Rains-Cloth Story.
835.‘‘Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvā’’ti (pārā. 632) vacanatosāmanti ettha ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti cadatvāti ettha ‘‘bhikkhussa’’iti ca labbhati.Cīvaranti channaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ vikappanupagaṃ pacchimaṃ. ‘‘Kupito anattamano acchindeyyā’’ti (pārā. 632) vacanatoacchindantassāti ettha ‘‘kupitassa anattamanassā’’ti seso, kupitassa anattamanassa acchindantassa vā acchindāpentassa vāti attho.Tanti attanā dinnacīvaraṃ.‘‘Sakasaññāyā’’ti iminā pārājikāya avatthubhāvaṃ dīpeti.
835.From the statement "Whatever bhikkhu, having himself given a robe to a bhikkhu" (pārā. 632), in "himself," "to a bhikkhu" is obtained, and in "having given," "to a bhikkhu" is obtained. "Robe" means any of the six robes that are not subject to disowning, the last one. From the statement "Being angry and displeased, he should take it away" (pārā. 632), in "of one who takes away," "of one who is angry and displeased" is understood, meaning of one who takes away, or causes to be taken away, being angry and displeased. "That" means the robe given by himself. "With his own perception" indicates that there is no basis for a pārājika offense.
836.Tathāti ekāyeva āpattīti dīpeti.
836."Likewise" indicates that there is only one offense.
837.Vatthānanti cīvarānaṃ.Assāti bhikkhussa.
837."Of the cloths" means of the robes. "To him" means to the bhikkhu.
841.Saṅghāṭiṃ gaṇha, uttarāsaṅgaṃ gaṇhāti yojanā.
841.Take the saṅghāṭi, take the uttarāsaṅga—this is the construction.
842.Vikappanupagaṃ pacchimanti ettha ‘‘cīvara’’nti labbhati. Āyāmato vaḍḍhakihatthaṃ tiriyaṃ tathā vidatthippamāṇaṃ vatthakhaṇḍaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedato vikappanupagaṃ nāma. Aññaṃ kiñci parikkhāranti yojanā, antamaso sucimpīti vuttaṃ hoti.Paraṃpuggalaṃ.Chindāpentassāti acchindāpentassa. Kāritantassa dvikammakattā ‘‘para’’nti ca ‘‘parikkhāra’’nti ca kammadvayagahaṇaṃ.Aññanti parikkhāravisesanaṃ.Dukkaṭaṃvatthugaṇanāya, vacanagaṇanāya ca.
842.In "not subject to disowning, the last," "robe" is understood. A piece of cloth that is a carpenter's cubit in length and the measure of a span across is called "not subject to disowning" from the lower limit. "Any other requisite"—this means even a needle is included. "Another" means another person. "Of one who causes to cut" means of one who causes to be taken away. Because it is a dual action for one who has it done, the taking of the two actions is indicated by "another" and "requisite." "Another" is a specification of "requisite." "Dukkaṭa" is by the counting of objects and by the counting of words.
844.Evanti yathā anupasampanne anupasampannasaññino dukkaṭaṃ, evaṃ anupasampanne…pe… vematikassāpi dukkaṭanti yojanā.Acchindantassāti ettha yathāvuttaṃ ‘‘anupasampanne’’ti idaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmena sāmivacanaṃ katvā ‘‘dinna’’nti ajjhāhārena saha yojetabbaṃ, ‘‘cīvara’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati, anupasampannassa dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ acchindantassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
844."Even so" means just as there is a dukkaṭa for one who perceives one not fully ordained as not fully ordained, so too there is a dukkaṭa for one who is doubtful about one not fully ordained. In "of one who takes away," the stated "not fully ordained" should be connected with the supplied "given" by changing the inflection to the genitive case, and "robe" is obtained from the context, meaning of one who takes away a robe given to one not fully ordained.
845.So vāti yassa cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, so eva vā bhikkhu. Tuṭṭho vā duṭṭho vā so detīti yojanā.Vissāsameva vāti vissāsaṃ katvā gaṇhatoti yojanā.
845."That one" means that very bhikkhu to whom the robe was given. He gives it, whether pleased or displeased—this is the construction. "Or on trust" means he takes it, having established trust—this is the construction.
846.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.
846."Here" means in this training rule.
Cīvaracchindanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Robe-Taking-Away Story.
847.Viññāpetvāti vatthavāyāpanaṃ sandhāya yācitvā.Chabbidhaṃ suttantipadabhājane‘‘khomaṃ kappāsikaṃ koseyyaṃ kambalaṃ sāṇaṃ bhaṅga’’nti (pārā. 638) āgataṃ chappakāraṃ suttaṃ.Kambalanti eḷakalomasuttaṃ. Sānulomāni chappakārasuttāni heṭṭhā cīvaravinicchaye vuttānusārena veditabbāni. Cīvaratthaṃ vatthaṃ‘‘cīvara’’nti vuttaṃ.Tantavāyehīti kappiyākappiyehi pesakārehi. Potthakesu‘‘vāyāpetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti pāṭho dissati, ‘‘sace’’ti iminā ayujjamānattā so apāṭho.‘‘Vāyāpeti na vaṭṭatī’’ti pāṭho yujjatīti sace vāyāpetīti yojanā, attano atthāya yadi vāyāpeyyāti attho.
847."Having requested" means having asked for with reference to having cloth woven. "Six kinds of thread" means the six kinds of thread that appear in the Padabhājana, "flax, cotton, silk, wool, hemp, and jute" (pārā. 638). "Wool" means thread made of sheep's wool. The six kinds of thread, with their allowable and unallowable aspects, should be understood according to what was stated below in the Cīvaravinicchaya. Cloth for a robe is called "robe." "By weavers" means by weavers who are allowable and unallowable. In books, the reading "it is not allowable to have woven" appears, but that is an incorrect reading because it does not fit with "if." The reading "it is not allowable to have it woven" fits, meaning if he has it woven for his own sake.
848.Tathāakappiyo. Kīdisoti āha‘‘aññātakādiko’’ti.Aññātakādikoti aññātako ādi yassa so aññātakādiko.Ādi-saddena appavārito gahito. Yo bhikkhu tantavāyassa aññātako, tena appavārito ca, tassa aññātakādiko bhikkhunā viññatto so tantavāyo akappiyoti attho.
848.Tathā also not allowable. What kind is it? He said, "aññātakādiko". Aññātakādiko means one for whom an unknown person is the beginning (ādi), that is aññātakādiko. By the word ādi (beginning), one who is uninvited is included. The meaning is, a weaver who is unknown to a bhikkhu and is also uninvited by him, the cloth woven by that aññātakādiko weaver is not allowable to that bhikkhu.
849.Akappiyenāti viññāpitena.Vāyāpentassāti ettha ‘‘payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhenā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘vāyāpeti, payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭilābhena nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 638).
849.Akappiyenā means by one who is unallowable (viññāpitena). Vāyāpentassā (when having it woven): here, "For each effort, there is a dukkata; upon acquisition," the rest should be understood. As he said, "He has it woven; for each effort, there is a dukkata. Upon acquisition, it is subject to forfeiture" (pārā. 638).
850.Kittake vīte nissaggiyaṃ hotīti āha‘‘vidatthimatte’’tiādi.Hatthamatteti ratanamatte.Padabhājane‘‘paṭilābhena nissaggiya’’nti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘vīte nissaggiya’’nti kasmā āhāti?Aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā. Tatthāpi tathā kasmā vuttanti? Tadanantaraṃ attano santakattā vītavītaṭṭhānaṃ paṭiladdhameva hoti,padabhājanepi iminā adhippāyena paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā yāva cīvaraṃ vaḍḍhati, tāva iminā pamāṇena āpattiyo vaḍḍhanti.Phalakepi cāti etthaphalakaṃnāma turivītaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha saṃharitvā ṭhapenti. Phalake phalakepi ca nissaggiyaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
850.How much being woven does it become subject to forfeiture? He said, "vidatthimatte" (when a span) etc. Hatthamatte (when a cubit) means when a ratana in length. In the Padabhājana it is said "upon acquisition, it is subject to forfeiture," why is it said here "when woven, it is subject to forfeiture?" Because it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā. Why is it said so even there? Because immediately after that, due to it being one's own property, the woven parts are considered already acquired, even in the Padabhājana, it is said "upon acquisition, it is subject to forfeiture" with this intention. Therefore, as long as the robe increases, offenses increase according to this measure. Phalakepi cā (and at each section of the frame): here, phalakaṃ means the place that has been woven (turivītaṭṭhānaṃ), where they gather and keep it. The meaning is that forfeiture is stated at each section of the frame (phalake phalakepi ca).
851.Tenevāti viññattatantavāyeneva.Kappiyaṃ suttanti aviññattiyā laddhasuttaṃ. Kappiyena tantavāyena akappiyasuttaṃ vāyāpentassa tatheva dukkaṭanti yojanā.
851.Tenevā (by that same): by the same weaver who was requested. Kappiyaṃ suttaṃ (allowable thread) means thread obtained without being requested. The meaning is that when having unallowable thread woven by an allowable weaver, it is also a dukkata in the same way.
852.Ekantarikato vā kappiyākappiyeheva suttehi vīte dukkaṭanti yojanā, antarantarā akappiyasuttānaṃ pasāraṇena, vāyanena ca dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Dīghato vā tiriyato vā kappiyākappiyeheva suttehi vīte dukkaṭanti yojanā, dīghato kappiyasuttaṃ pasāretvā tiriyaṃ akappiyasuttena vīte dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho.Vāggahaṇena vuttavipariyāyatopi yojetabbaṃ. Dīghato akappiyasuttaṃ pasāretvā tiriyato kappiyasuttena vīteti ayamettha vipariyāyo.Vīteti ettha ‘‘phalake phalake’’ti anuvattetabbaṃ.
852.The meaning is that when woven with allowable and unallowable threads alternately (ekantarikato) there is a dukkata, because of inserting and weaving unallowable threads in between. The meaning is that when woven with allowable and unallowable threads lengthwise or crosswise (dīghato vā tiriyato vā), there is a dukkata. The meaning is that when stretching allowable threads lengthwise and weaving with unallowable threads crosswise, there is a dukkata. By the inclusion of vā (or), the opposite of what was said should also be included. The opposite here is when stretching unallowable threads lengthwise and weaving with allowable threads crosswise. In Vīte (when woven), "phalake phalake" (at each section of the frame) should be supplied.
853.Kappiyākappiyehi tantavāyehi kappiyākappiyasuttaṃ missetvākatevīte phalake phalaketassabhikkhussa dukkaṭanti yojanā.Veti nipātamattaṃ, atha vā ve tasmiṃkatevīteti attho.
853.The meaning is that when allowable and unallowable threads are mixed by allowable and unallowable weavers, and it is woven (kate) at each section of the frame (phalake phalake), there is a dukkata for tassa (that) bhikkhu. Ve is merely a particle, or alternatively, ve means in that kate (done), there is weaving.
854-5.Tekappiyākappiyatantavāyā paricchedaṃ dassetvā vāreneva akappiyasuttaṃ sace vinantīti yojanā. Akappiyena tantavāyena vīte. Chandānurakkhanatthaṃ‘‘vite’’ti vuttaṃ.Pamāṇasminti vikappanupagapacchimappamāṇasmiṃ.Tadūneti tato vikappanupagapacchimappamāṇato ūne.Itarenāti kappiyatantavāyena.Ubhayatthāti pamāṇasmiṃ, tadūne ca dukkaṭaṃ evāti yojanā.
854-5.Te (those) allowable and unallowable weavers, after indicating the boundary, if they interweave only the unallowable thread in turn. Vīte (when woven) is for the sake of conforming to the meter. Pamāṇasmiṃ (at the measure): at the final measure which does not permit dispensation. Tadūne (less than that): less than that final measure which does not permit dispensation. Itarenā (with the other): with the allowable weaver. Ubhayattha (in both cases): in both the measure and less than the measure, it is a dukkata.
856.Sace kappiyākappiyatantavāyādvepivemaṃ ubhayakoṭiyāgahetvāekatova vinanti vāti yojanā. Tiriyaṃ suttaṃ pavesetvā yena ākoṭento ghanabhāvaṃ sampādenti, taṃvemaṃvuccati.
856.If allowable and unallowable weavers both pull (gahetvā) the weft threads (vemaṃ) from one side only, the meaning is whether they weave (vinanti) from one side only without pulling from both edges.
857.Sabbattha bhedeti kappiyākappiyasuttatantavāyehi kate pamāṇatadūnaekantarikadīghatiriyappakāre sabbattha vārabhede.Āpattibhedoti akappiyasuttehi āyāmavitthārato akappiyatantavāyena vītappadese pamāṇayutte pācittiyaṃ, itaratra dukkaṭanti bhedo.
857.Sabbattha bhede (in all distinctions): in all the distinctions of turns, in the cases of measure and less than the measure, alternate, lengthwise, and crosswise, done by allowable and unallowable threads and weavers. Āpattibhedo (distinction of offenses): in the area woven by an unallowable weaver with unallowable threads in length and width that meets the measure, there is a pācittiya; elsewhere, there is a dukkata - this is the distinction.
858.Kappiyo tantavāyonāma ñātako vā pavārito vā kappiyamūlena payojito vā.
858.Kappiyo tantavāyo (allowable weaver) means one who is a relative, or one who is invited, or one who is engaged with allowable materials.
859.‘‘Anāpatti cīvaraṃ sibbetuṃ, āyoge, kāyabandhane, aṃsabaddhake, pattatthavikāya, parissāvane, ñātakānaṃ, pavāritānaṃ, aññassatthāya, attano dhanenā’’tiādikaṃ (pārā. 640) anāpattivāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘anāpattī’’tiādi. Idha niddiṭṭhova lakkhaṇena aniddiṭṭhampi veditabbaṃ. Ettha cīvaraṃ sibbetuṃ suttaṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti yojanā.Dhanaṃnāma taṇḍulādi kappiyavatthu.‘‘Parissāvane’’tiādīsu nimittatthe bhummaṃ, parissāvanādinimittaṃ suttañca tantavāye ca viññāpentassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
859.To show the dispensation from offense (anāpattivāraṃ) such as "There is no offense in having a robe sewn, for a waist cord, a shoulder strap, a bag for an alms bowl, a water strainer, for relatives, for those who have been invited, for the sake of another, with one's own wealth," he said, "anāpattī" etc. Here, what is not specified should be understood by analogy with what is specified. Here, there is no offense for requesting thread to sew a robe. Dhanaṃ (wealth) means allowable items such as rice. In "Parissāvane" (for a water strainer) etc., the locative case is in the sense of cause (nimitta), it is said that there is no offense in requesting thread and weavers for the sake of a water strainer etc.
Suttaviññattikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Requesting Thread.
860.Appavāritaññātīnanti appavāritānaṃ aññātīnaṃ, ‘‘kīdisena te bhante cīvarena attho, kīdisaṃ te cīvaraṃ vāyāpemī’’ti (pārā. 643)padabhājanevuttanayena appavāritānaṃ aññātīnanti attho.Sameccāti upagantvā.Vikappanti visiṭṭhaṃ kappaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ.Āpajjatīti karoti, ‘‘idaṃ kho āvuso cīvaraṃ maṃ uddissa viyyati, āyatañca karotha, vitthatañca appitañca suvītañca suppavāyitañca suvilekhitañca suvitacchitañca karothā’’tiādinā (pārā. 642) nayena dāyakānaṃ adhippāyato adhikataraāyatādikaraṇatthaṃ vidhānaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
860.Appavāritaññātīnaṃ (uninvited relatives): means uninvited relatives, that is relatives who are uninvited in the manner said in the Padabhājana: "What kind of robe do you need, venerable sir? What kind of robe should I have woven for you?" (pārā. 643). Samecca (having approached): having gone to. Vikappaṃ (a stipulation): a special arrangement, an additional provision. Āpajjatī (incurs): does, means it is said that he makes a provision for things like making it longer, wider, denser, better woven, better spread, better marked and better cut, to a greater extent than the intention of the donors, in the manner: "This robe, friend, is being woven for me, make it long, make it wide, make it dense, weave it well, spread it well, mark it well, cut it well," etc. (pārā. 642).
āyatanti dīghaṃ.Vitthatanti puthulaṃ.Appitanti ghanaṃ.Suvītanti suṭṭhu vītaṃ sabbaṭṭhānesu samaṃ katvā vītaṃ.Suppavāyitanti suṭṭhu pavāyitaṃ sabbaṭṭhāne samaṃ katvā tante pasāritaṃ.Suvilekhitanti lekhaniyā suṭṭhu vilikhitaṃ.Suvitacchitanti kocchena suṭṭhu vitacchitaṃ, suviniddhotanti attho.
Āyataṃ (long): in length. Vitthataṃ (wide): broad. Appitaṃ (dense): compact. Suvītaṃ (well-woven): well-woven, woven evenly in all places. Suppavāyitaṃ (well-spread): well-spread, threads spread evenly in all places. Suvilekhitaṃ (well-marked): well-marked with a stylus. Suvitacchitaṃ (well-cut): well-cut with scissors, well-cleaned.
861.Suttavaḍḍhanappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘dīghāyatappitatthāyā’’ti. Tena capadabhājane‘‘tassa vacanena āyataṃ vā vitthataṃ vā appitaṃ vā karoti, payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. 643) etaṃ āyatādittayameva vuttaṃ.Suttavaḍḍhanake kateti ettha anantaraṃ vattabbena ‘‘payoge dukkaṭaṃ paṭilābhenā’’ti pāṭhasesena saha yojanā kātabbā, dāyakehi tulayitvā dinnappamāṇato suttaṃ vaḍḍhituṃ tena katena sabbenāpi payogena bhikkhuno dukkaṭañca paṭilābhena nissaggiyapācittiyañca hotīti attho.
861.To show the way of increasing the thread, he said "dīghāyatappitatthāya". And in the Padabhājana only these three – āyataṃ (long), vitthataṃ (wide), appitaṃ (dense) are mentioned: "By his word, he makes it long, or wide, or dense; for each effort, there is a dukkata; upon acquisition, it is subject to forfeiture" (pārā. 643). In Suttavaḍḍhanake kate (when making an increase in the thread), a connection should be made with the remaining text to be stated immediately after, "For each effort, there is a dukkata; upon acquisition." The meaning is that by all the effort made by the bhikkhu to increase the thread beyond the measure given after being weighed by the donors, there is a dukkata and upon acquisition, a nissaggiya-pācittiya.
862.Ñātakādīnaṃ tantavāyesu cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjantassa anāpattiṃ viniddiseti yojanā.Attano dhanenāti ettha ‘‘payojitesū’’ti seso,tantavāyesūti etassa visesanaṃ. Attano dhanena payojitesu tantavāyesu cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjantassa anāpattiṃ viniddiseti yojanā, attano santakaṃ kappiyavatthuṃ gahetvā vinantesu vikappaṃ āpajjantassāti attho. Aññassatthāya vinantesu vikappaṃ āpajjantassāti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā daṭṭhabbā.
862.The meaning is that he specifies that there is no offense for one who makes a stipulation about a robe among weavers who are relatives etc. In Attano dhanena (with one's own wealth), "payojitesū" (when employing) is to be supplied, it is an adjective of tantavāyesū (among weavers). The meaning is that he specifies that there is no offense for one who makes a stipulation about a robe among weavers who are employed with one's own wealth, that is for one who makes a stipulation when having it woven with allowable material that is one's own. The connection should be understood together with the remaining text, "for one who makes a stipulation when having it woven for the sake of another."
863.Mahagghaṃ kattukāmino tantavāyehi appagghaṃ vāyāpentassa anāpattiṃ viniddiseti yojanā.
863.The meaning is that he specifies that there is no offense for one who, intending to have an expensive robe made, has it woven with inexpensive materials.
Pesakārakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Robe-Makers.
864.Vassaṃvutthe bhikkhū uddissāti purimikāya vassūpagate bhikkhū uddisitvā. Pavāraṇāya pubbeva yaṃ cīvaraṃ dīyatīti sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘dasāhānāgataṃ kattikatemāsikapuṇṇama’’nti (pārā. 648) pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ mahāpavāraṇāuposathadivasassa puretarameva pubbakattikamāsassa juṇhapakkhapañcamiyaṃ yaṃ cīvaraṃ ‘‘accekacīvaraṃ nāma senāya vā gantukāmo hotī’’tiādinā (pārā. 649)padabhājanāgatesu gamikagilānagabbhiniabhinavuppannasaddhādīsu aññatarena dūtaṃ pesetvā vā attanā vā āgantvā ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ dammī’’ti vatvā diyyatīti.Taṃ hotaccekacīvaranti taṃ accāyikacīvaraṃ nāma hoti.
864.Vassaṃvutthe bhikkhū uddissā (intending [it] for a bhikkhu who has spent the rains): intending [it] for a bhikkhu who has entered the rains in the earlier period. The connection is that the robe is given even before the Pavāraṇā. This is what was said – on the fifth day of the waxing moon of the earlier Kattika month, well before the great Pavāraṇā uposatha day mentioned in the Pāḷi as "ten days before the Kattika full moon of the third month" (pārā. 648), that robe is given saying "I give [this as] a rains-residence gift" either by sending a messenger or by coming oneself due to any one of the reasons stated in the Padabhājana such as being about to go to the army, being sick, being pregnant, or having newly acquired faith. Taṃ hotaccekacīvaraṃ (that is called an emergency robe): that is called an accāyikacīvaraṃ (emergency robe).
865.Pure pavāraṇāyevāti mahāpavāraṇāya puretarameva pañcamito paṭṭhāya yasmiṃ kismiñci divase.Bhājetvā yadi gayhatīti ettha ‘‘yenā’’ti cana kātabboti ettha ‘‘tenā’’ti cakaroti ceti ettha ‘‘so vassaccheda’’nti ca sāmatthiyā labbhati. Bhājetvā yadi yena gayhati, tena vassacchedo na kātabbo. So vassacchedaṃ karoti ce, taṃ bhājetvā gahitacīvaraṃ saṅghikaṃ hotīti yojanā, chinnavassena taṃ cīvaraṃ saṅghasseva dātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
865.Pure pavāraṇāyevā (even before the Pavāraṇā): even before the great Pavāraṇā, on any day starting from the fifth. In Bhājetvā yadi gayhatī (if it is accepted by distributing), "yenā" (by whom) should be supplied by implication, and in na kātabbo (should not be done) "tenā" (by him), and in karoti ce (if he does), "so vassacchedaṃ" (he causes an interruption of the rains) should be supplied by implication. If it is accepted by distributing by whom it is accepted, by him the interruption of the rains should not be done. If he causes an interruption of the rains, that robe accepted by distributing belongs to the Saṅgha. The meaning is that the robe should be given to the Saṅgha by one whose rains-residence has been interrupted.
866.‘‘Antosamayamevā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhetī’’tiādīhi padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Padabhājane‘‘cīvarakālasamayo nāma anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañcamāsā’’ti vuttasamayabbhantareyeva taṃ accekacīvaraṃ.
866."Antosamayameva" (only within the time): this should be connected individually with the words "adhiṭṭhetī" (should be resolved) etc. In the Padabhājana: "The time for a robe is the last month of the rains when the kathina is not spread, and five months when the kathina is spread," that accāyikacīvaraṃ [should be kept] only within the time stated.
867.Kathine tu anatthateti yasmiṃ kathinaṃ anatthataṃ, tasmiṃ vihāreti vuttaṃ hoti.Tu-saddo visesatthajotako. Anadhiṭṭhāya avikappetvā pariharīyati ettha accekacīvarantiparihāro,māso, eko ca so māso cātiekamāso,pubbakattikamāsassa pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva aparakattikamāsassa puṇṇamī, ayaṃ cīvarakālasamayoti vutto māso. Dasannaṃ ahānaṃ samāhārodasāhaṃ,taṃ paramaṃ adhikaṃ etassātidasāhaparamo,māso. ‘‘Dasāhānāgataṃ kattikatemāsikapuṇṇama’’nti (pārā. 648)pāḷiyaṃvuttapubbakattikapuṇṇamipariyantadasāhādhikoti attho. Kathine anatthate tu dasāhaparamo ekamāsova tassa accāyikavatthassa parihāro matoti yojanā.
867.Kathine tu anatthate (but when the kathina is not spread): means in a monastery where the kathina is not spread. The particle tu indicates a distinction. The parihāro (keeping), is where the accāyikacīvaraṃ is kept without resolving [to keep it] or dispensing [with it]. Ekamāso (one month): one month, that is one month, the time for a robe, is said to be from the first day of the waxing moon of the earlier Kattika month until the full moon of the later Kattika month. Dasāhaṃ (ten days): a collection of ten days, dasāhaparamo (ten days at most): that which has ten days as the highest limit, the meaning is that it is up to ten days more than the earlier Kattika full moon mentioned in the Pāḷi as "ten days before the Kattika full moon of the third month" (pārā. 648). But when the kathina is not spread, it is considered that the keeping of that emergency item is one month with ten days at most.
868.Atthate kathineti kathinatthatavihāreti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa accāyikavatthassāti sambandho. Dasāhaparamā pañca māsāti sambandho. Anatthatakathine vihāre yathāvuttacīvarakālasamayasaṅkhātavassānāvasānamāso ca kathinuddhāradivasasaṅkhātapacchimakattikakāḷapakkhapāṭipadato yāva phaggunamāsapuṇṇamī, tāva hemantā cattāro māsā cātipañca māsā. Pakāsitāti ‘‘anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañca māsā’’ti (pārā. 649) dīpitā.Dasāhaparamāti vuttatthoyeva. Atthate kathine dasāhaparamā pañca māsātassaaccāyikavatthassaparihārokāloti munindena pakāsitāti yojanā.
868.Atthate kathine (when the kathina is spread): means in a monastery where the kathina is spread. "Tassa accāyikavatthassa" (of that emergency item) is connected. "Dasāhaparamā pañca māsā" (five months with ten days at most) is connected. Pañca māsā (five months): The final month of the rains, counted as the time for a robe as stated, when the kathina is not spread, and the four months of the cold season from the day of the kathina lifting, counted as the first day of the dark half of the later Kattika month until the full moon of the Phagguna month. Pakāsitā (declared): is declared as "The time for a robe is the last month of the rains when the kathina is not spread, and five months when the kathina is spread" (pārā. 649). Dasāhaparamā (ten days at most): has the meaning as stated above. The meaning is that when the kathina is spread, the keeping of tassa (that) accāyikavatthassa (emergency item) for five months with ten days at most, is parihāro (keeping), the time, declared by the Lord of Sages.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘anatthate kathine ekādasadivasādhiko māso, atthate kathine ekādasadivasādhikā pañca māsā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.650) vuttapāṭhena yathā na virujjhati, tathā vicāretvā gahetabbā. Evañhi pāṭhe sati na virujjhati –
In the Aṭṭhakathā, it should be considered and taken in such a way that it does not contradict the text stating "when the kathina is not spread, it is one month with eleven days, when the kathina is spread, it is five months with eleven days" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.650). Indeed, when the text is like this, it does not contradict:
‘‘Tassaccāyikavatthassa, kathine tu anatthate;
"Of that emergency item, when the kathina is not spread;
The keeping is considered one month, with eleven days at most.
Atthate kathine tassa, pañca māsā pakāsitā;
When the kathina is spread, of that, five months are declared;
The keeping, indeed, is with one day, eleven days at most."
869.Paṭhamena kathinenāti yojanā. ‘‘Akriyaṃ acitta’’nti padacchedo.Akriyanti antosamaye adhiṭṭhānādiakaraṇaṃ.
869.With the first kathina. "Akriyaṃ acittaṃ" is the word division. Akriyaṃ means not doing the resolving etc., within the time.
Accekacīvarakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Emergency Robes.
870-1.Bhikkhūti sāsaṅkasammate sappaṭibhaye āraññakasenāsane vasantaṃ bhikkhumāha. Yathāha ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni āraññakāni senāsanāni sāsaṅkasammatāni sappaṭibhayāni, tathārūpesu bhikkhu senāsanesu viharanto’’ti (pārā. 653). Pubbakattikapuṇṇamaṃ vasitvāti sambandho.Pubbakattikapuṇṇamānāma assayujamāsassa juṇhapakkhapannarasī, ettha pana sahacariyanayena tadupalakkhitā purimikā tayo vassānamāsā vuccanti.Puṇṇamanti ettha vāsakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Purimikāya vassaṃ upagantvā acchinnavasso hutvā tayo māse vasitvāti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yasmā pana yo vassaṃ upagantvā yāva paṭhamakattikapuṇṇamaṃ vasatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654).
870-1.Bhikkhū (bhikkhu): refers to a bhikkhu dwelling in a forest dwelling that is considered dangerous and frightening (sāsaṅkasammate sappaṭibhaye āraññakasenāsane). As he said, "When a bhikkhu is dwelling in such forest dwellings that are considered dangerous and frightening" (pārā. 653). "Pubbakattikapuṇṇamaṃ vasitvā" (having dwelt until the earlier Kattika full moon) is connected. Pubbakattikapuṇṇamā (earlier Kattika full moon) means the fifteenth day of the waxing moon of the Assayuja month, but here, by way of association, it refers to the preceding three months of the rains. In Puṇṇamaṃ (full moon), the accusative case is used in the sense of continuous connection with the act of dwelling. The meaning is having entered the rains and dwelt for three months without interrupting the rains. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "Because whoever enters the rains dwells until the first Kattika full moon" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654).
‘‘Cīvara’’nti tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ vuccati. Gāme ṭhapetvāti sambandho, ettha ‘‘kattikapuṇṇama’’nti ca ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno’’ti ca seso, aparakattikamāse kattikacorabhayena cīvaraṃ paṭisāmetukāmo bhikkhu āraññakasenāsanassa sāmantā gocaragāme nikkhipitvāti attho. Yathāha ‘‘upavassaṃ kho pana kattikapuṇṇamaṃ…pe… ākaṅkhamāno tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ antaraghare nikkhipeyyā’’ti (pārā. 653).
"Cīvaraṃ" (robe): means any one of the three robes. "Gāme ṭhapetvā" (having left in the village) is connected, here "kattikapuṇṇamaṃ" (Kattika full moon) and "ākaṅkhamāno" (desiring) are to be supplied, the meaning is that a bhikkhu, in the later Kattika month, wishing to retrieve the robe due to fear of robe-thieves, leaves it in a village near (sāmantā) the forest dwelling. As he said, "He may leave any one of the three robes in an inner chamber, in a village near, desiring the Kattika full moon after the rains-residence" (pārā. 653).
‘‘Samantā gocaragāme’’ti idaṃ ‘‘antaraghare nikkhipeyyāti samantā gocaragāme nikkhipeyyā’’ti (pārā. 654)padabhājanevuttattā vuttaṃ.‘‘Aparakattikamāse’’ti ca ‘‘kattikapuṇṇamanti kattikacātumāsinī vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 654)padabhājaniyavasena vuttaṃ. Idhāpi hi ‘‘kattikapuṇṇama’’nti aparakattikajuṇhapakkhapannarasiyā vuccamānāyāpi sahacariyanayena taṃsahacarito catuttho māso vutto.
"Samantā gocaragāme" (in a village near): this is said because it is said in the Padabhājana as "He may leave it in an inner chamber, he may leave it in a village near" (pārā. 654). "Aparakattikamāse" (in the later Kattika month) is said according to the Padabhājaniya as "Kattika full moon is called the Kattika four-month period" (pārā. 654). Here too, indeed, although "kattikapuṇṇama" (Kattika full moon) is said to be the fifteenth day of the waxing moon of the later Kattika month, by way of association, it refers to the fourth month associated with it.
Ettāvatā purimikāya vassaṃ upagantvā mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā vuttalakkhaṇe āraññakasenāsane vasantassa āraññakassa bhikkhuno pacchimakattikamāse kattikacorabhaye sati tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ gocaragāme ṭhapetvā āraññakaṅgaṃ pūrayato cīvarena vippavāso tasmiṃ māse na hotīti anuññātabhāvo dīpito. Tadeva pakāsetuṃ nikkhepopāyasandassanamukhena vakkhati ‘‘kattikeyeva māsasmiṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti.
Herein, having undertaken the rains in the earlier rains residence, having invited (exhorted) at the Great Pavāraṇā, while dwelling in a forest dwelling with the characteristics mentioned (above), if a forest-dwelling bhikkhu, in the month of Kattika (October-November) during the danger of thieves, leaves one of the three robes in a village for alms and fulfills the forest-dwelling practice, it is declared that there is no separation from the robe during that month. To clarify this very point, he will speak using the method of showing how to deposit (the robe): “In the month of Kattika itself…pe…it is allowable.”
‘‘paccaye…pe… sammuti’’nti.Paccaye sati tādiseti ‘‘siyā paccayo, siyā karaṇīya’’nti (pārā. 654) vacanato tādise kicce satīti attho.Chārattaparamanti cha rattiyo paramā yassa vāsakammassa taṃ chārattaparamaṃ, kiriyāvisesanaṃ, chārattaparamaṃ vāsakammaṃ kātabbanti attho.Tena vinā vasitabbanti gāme nikkhittena tena cīvarena vinā tamhā āvāsā aññattha vasitabbaṃ. Tadeva pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ vakkhati ‘‘aññattheva vasantassa, chārattaparamaṃ mata’’nti.
“Condition…pe…agreement” means in such a condition. Because of the statement "there may be a condition, there may be something to be done" (pārā. 654), it means when there is such a task. "At most six nights" means that the residence commitment (vāsakamma) has at most six nights; it is an adverb of action, meaning the residence commitment should be done for at most six nights. "To reside without it" means to reside elsewhere from that dwelling without that robe that was deposited in the village. To make that very thing clear, he will say "While residing elsewhere, it is considered at most six nights."
Tatoti chārattato.Uttari vasatoti sattamaṃ aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā vasantassāti attho. Yathāha ‘‘tato ce uttari vippavaseyyāti sattame aruṇuggamane nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 654).Dosoti nissaggiyapācittiyaṃ.‘‘Vinā saṅghassa sammuti’’nti iminā kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Udositasikkhāpade anupaññattiṃ katvā kosambiyaṃ gilānabhikkhuno ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave gilānassa bhikkhuno ticīvarena avippavāsasammutiṃ dātu’’nti (pārā. 473) anuññātattā gilānassa bhikkhuno saṅghena ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya purimameva yā avippavāsasammuti dinnā, taṃ vināti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena laddhasammutikena yāva rogo vūpasammati, tāva cirampi tena cīvarena vinā vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘aññatra bhikkhusammutiyāti yā udositasikkhāpade kosambakasammuti anuññātā, tassā sammutiyā aññatra. Sace sā laddhā hoti, chārattātirekampi vippavasituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654).
"After that" means after six nights. "Residing further" means residing allowing the seventh dawn to break. As he said, "If he separates further than that, at the seventh sunrise, it is Nissaggiya" (pārā. 654). "Fault" means Nissaggiya-Pācittiya. "Without the Saṅgha’s agreement" means what is said by this? Having made a sub-rule in the Udosita training rule, and because of the permission "I allow, bhikkhus, to give an agreement of non-separation with the three robes to a sick bhikkhu in Kosambi" (pārā. 473), it means that the agreement of non-separation that was previously given by the Saṅgha with a motion and a second announcement (ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya) to the sick bhikkhu, (residing) without that. The idea is that, for one who has obtained the agreement, it is allowable to reside for a long time without that robe until the illness subsides. As he said in the commentary: "Other than the bhikkhu's agreement means other than that agreement of Kosambi allowed in the Udosita training rule. If that has been obtained, it is allowable to separate for more than six nights" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654).
872-3.Cīvaranikkhepaṃ dassetumāha‘‘kattikeyeva…pe… pakāsito’’ti.Kattikeyeva māsasminti catunnaṃ vassānānaṃ māsānaṃ pacchime kattikamāseyeva idamekaṅgaṃ.Paṭhamāya pavāritoti dutiyamaṅgaṃ, idha paṭhamāya vassūpanāyikāya vassaṃ upagantvā pavāritoti yojanā, mahāpavāraṇāya pavāritoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘purimikāya upagantvā mahāpavāraṇāya pavārito hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654).Pacchimena pamāṇena yutteti tatiyamaṅgaṃ.Senāsaneti etassa visesanaṃ. Iha āraññakasenāsanassapacchimappamāṇaṃnāma pākārena vā vatiyā vā parikhāya vā parikkhittassa gāmassa indakhīlasaṅkhātagāmadvārakoṭṭhakummārato vā aparikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte pariyantagehassa upacāre ṭhitassa thāmamajjhimassa purisassa balappamāṇena vissaṭṭhaleḍḍupātadvayato vā paṭṭhāya parikkhittassa vihārassa saparikkhepaṃ vā aparikkhittassa vihārassa yassaṃ disāyaṃ gāmo hoti, tattha gāmapariyantasenāsanaṃ vā cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā avadhiṃ katvā vihāragamanīyena pakatimaggena vidatthigambhīraṃ āropitena ācariyadhanunā pamitapañcadhanusatapamāṇadūranti saṅkhepato gahetabbaṃ.
872-3. To show the depositing of the robe, he says, "In the month of Kattika itself…pe…is declared." "In the month of Kattika itself" means that this is one factor only in the last month of Kattika of the four months of the rains residence. "Having invited at the first" is the second factor; here, the construction is having undertaken the rains residence at the first rains residence invitation, which means having invited at the Great Pavāraṇā. As he said in the commentary: "Having undertaken the earlier rains residence, he is invited at the Great Pavāraṇā" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654). "Endowed with the latter measure" is the third factor. "Dwelling" is a qualifier of this. Here, the latter measure of a forest dwelling means, briefly, starting from either two cast-stone-throws of a man of strong, average build standing in the vicinity of a house considered suitable for boundary marking—either one enclosed by a wall, fence, or moat, or one not enclosed by a village's gate-pillar post (indakhīla), potter's workshop, or the like—or, if it is an enclosed monastery, including its enclosure; or, if it is an unenclosed monastery, the village boundary dwelling in the direction where the village is, making either the village boundary dwelling, a Cetiya, or a Bodhi tree a limit, at a distance of five hundred bow-lengths measured by an ācariya’s bow, raised to the depth of a span (vidatthi) along a natural path suitable for travelling to the monastery.
Sāsaṅkasammateti catutthamaṅgaṃ, ‘‘iha sappaṭibhaye’’ti seso. ‘‘Sāsaṅkasammatāni sappaṭibhayānī’’ti (pārā. 653) hi pāḷi. Idaṃ dvayampi ‘‘senāsane’’ti etassa visesanaṃ. Ārāmaārāmūpacāresu corānaṃ nisinnasayitaṭṭhitabhuttapītaṭṭhānādīnaṃ dissamānatāya āsaṅkāsahite tattheva ārāmādīsu pahaṭamāritaviluttamanussānaṃ dissamānatāya visesena sahabhayatāyasappaṭibhayeāraññake senāsaneti attho.Vasantobhikkhu.Vasantovāti etthaevakāro aṭṭhānappayutto. Tasmā tato ānetvā caturaṅgasamāyoge evāti yojetabbo.Caturaṅgasamāyoge evāti yathāvuttānaṃ catunnaṃ aṅgānaṃ samāyoge sannipāte sati eva. Etthaevakārena tassa aṅgassa abhāve alabbhamānataṃ dīpeti.Pakāsitoti ‘‘tatrāyaṃ aṅgasampattī’’tiādikāya (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654)aṭṭhakathāyavutto.
"Considered dangerous" is the fourth factor, "here, in a place with danger," the rest is understood. Indeed, the Pali states, "Considered dangerous and with danger" (pārā. 653). Both of these are qualifiers of "dwelling." "With danger (sappaṭibhaye)" means a forest dwelling in a monastery or the monastery’s vicinity that is full of danger, especially with fear, due to the visibility of places where thieves sit, lie down, stand, eat, and drink, etc., in the monastery, and the visibility of people struck, killed, plundered in those monasteries, etc. "Dwelling" bhikkhu. "Dwelling indeed" here, the word "eva" (indeed) is used out of place. Therefore, bringing it from there, it should be connected as "only in a combination of four factors." "Only in a combination of four factors" means only when there is a meeting, a gathering, of the four factors as mentioned. Here, the word "eva" shows the unavailability in the absence of that factor. "Declared" means spoken in the commentary beginning with "Here, this is the accomplishment of factors" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.653-654).
874.Taṃcīvaraṃ.Māsamekanti vassānassa pacchimamāsasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ māsaṃ. Yo gāmo sace purimabaddhāya avippavāsasīmāya anto hoti, tattha māsato atirekampi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti (vajira. ṭī. pārājika 653 atthato samānaṃ)vajirabuddhittherena vuttaṃ.
874. That robe. "One month" means one month counted as the last month of the rains. The Venerable Vajirabuddhi Thera said that if the village is within the previously established boundary of non-separation, it is allowable to keep (the robe) for more than a month (vajira. ṭī. pārājika 653 meaning is the same).
875.Aññatthevāti yassa āraññakasenāsanassa gocaragāme cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tato āraññakasenāsanato bahi eva.Ayaṃ adhippāyoti ‘‘yaṃ gāma’’ntiādikāya diyaḍḍhagāthāya paṭipāditatthadvayasaṅkhāto adhippāyo.Assāti sāsaṅkasikkhāpadassa. Evaṃ iminā sikkhāpadena ‘‘cīvarena vinā kattikamāse araññe vaseyyā’’ti anuññātattā ‘‘chārattaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tena cīvarena vippavasitabba’’nti (pārā. 653) iminā gocaragāme taṃ ṭhapetvā tasmiṃ āraññakāvāse vasitvā kenaci karaṇīyena tato āvāsato gantvā bahi vasato divasaparicchedassa viññāyamānattāyevāha‘‘paṭicchanno pakāsito’’ti.
875. "Elsewhere indeed" means outside the forest dwelling from that forest dwelling in whose village for alms the robe was deposited. "This is the intention" means the intention counted as the twofold meaning expounded in the one and a half verses beginning with "What village." "Of this" means of the training rule regarding danger. Thus, because it is allowed by this training rule to "reside in the forest in the month of Kattika without a robe," and because "separation from that robe by that bhikkhu should be for at most six nights" (pārā. 653), it is indeed said "hidden, revealed" because the limit of the days is being made known for one who deposits it in the village for alms, resides in that forest dwelling, and then goes from that dwelling due to some business and resides outside.
876.‘‘Sace gocaragāmato puratthimāya disāya senāsanaṃ, ayañca pacchimaṃ disaṃ gato hotī’’tiādinā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656)aṭṭhakathāyaṃkathitaniyāmena vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘senāsanamathāgantvā’’tiādi.Senāsananti attanā nivutthaṃ āraññakasenāsanaṃ.Āgantvāti bahi gataṭṭhānato āgantvā. Gocaragāme cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā tato puratthimāya disāya āraññakasenāsane viharato vihārā nikkhamma tato gocaragāmato pacchimadisāya dūraṭṭhānaṃ gatassa āgataṭṭhānato taṃ senāsanaṃ āgantvā vidūrattā sattamaṃ aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetuṃ asakkontassa bhikkhuno kiṃ vihitanti ayamettha yojanā.
876. To show the judgment according to the rule stated in the commentary beginning with "If the dwelling is to the east of the village for alms, and this one has gone to the west" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656), he says "Having come to the dwelling," etc. "Dwelling" means the forest dwelling that one has lived in. "Having come" means having come from the place one has gone outside. This is how it should be construed: what is permitted for a bhikkhu who, having deposited his robe in the village for alms, is dwelling in a forest dwelling to the east, and having left the monastery, has gone to a distant place to the west of that village for alms, and is unable to cause the seventh dawn to break due to being far away after coming to that dwelling from the place he has come.
877.Gāmasīmampivāgantvāti yattha cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, taṃ gāmasīmampi purāruṇāyeva āgantvā.Yattha katthacīti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656) sabhādevālayadvārakoṭṭhakādīsu yattha katthaci kappiyaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Yattha katthacī’’ti sāmaññena vuttattā tassā gāmasīmāya anto āraññakaṅgārakkhanārahaṃ dūraṭṭhānaṃ laddhaṃ ce, aṅgabhedaṃ akatvā tattha aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Dhutaṅge vijjamānepi āpattiṃ anāpajjituṃ antogāmepi aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā cīvarapavattiyeva ñātabbā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘gāmasīmampi okkamitvā sabhāyaṃ vā yattha katthaci vā vasitvā cīvarappavattiṃ ñatvā pakkamituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656).
877. "Having come to the village boundary" means having come to that village boundary where the robe was deposited before dawn. "Wherever it may be" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656) means in any suitable place whatsoever, such as a meeting hall, temple, gate tower, etc. Because it is said generally, "wherever it may be," if a distant place within that village boundary suitable for protecting the forest-dwelling factor is obtained, the dawn should be caused to break there without making a break in the factors. Even if the dhutaṅga is present, in order not to incur an offense, the dawn should be caused to break within the village itself, and only the continuation of the robe should be known. As he said in the commentary: "Having entered the village boundary, having resided in the meeting hall or wherever it may be, having known the continuation of the robe, it is allowable to depart" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656).
878.Evañcāpi asakkontoti aṅgabhedaṃ akatvā, katvā vā antogāmasīmāya aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetumpi gantuṃ asakkonto.Ñatvāti attano cīvarassa ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhetvā.Tatthevāti ettha ‘‘ṭhito’’ti labbhati.Khippanti sīghaṃ, purāruṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atireke ṭhāneti yojanā, yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘atirekacīvaraṭṭhāne ṭhassatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656), ‘‘atirekacīvaraṭṭhāne tiṭṭhatī’’ti cintetvāti attho.
878. "Even thus being unable" means being unable to go even to cause the dawn to break within the village boundary, whether having made a break in the factors or without having done so. "Having known" means having noticed the place where his robe has been deposited. "Just there" here, "standing" is obtained. "Quickly" means fast, it is said before dawn. A place in addition to (the robe) is the construction; as he said in the commentary: "He will stand in the place of the extra robe" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.656), meaning he will think, "He stands in the place of the extra robe."
879.Vissajjetīti sattamaaruṇuṭṭhānato puretarameva aññassa deti. Uparipi evameva vattabbaṃ.
879. "Relinquishes" means he gives to another even before the seventh dawn. The rest should be stated similarly above.
880.Sāsaṅkasammateevaṃnāmake sikkhāpade samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe tena dutiyena kathinena samā iti munindenamatāanumatā anuññātāti yojanā.
880. The Teacher has considered, approved, and allowed that the origin, etc., of the training rule called "considered dangerous" are all equal to that second Kathina.
Sāsaṅkakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Discourse on Considered Dangerous.
881.Jānanti ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti vacanena pariṇāmitabhāvaṃ yena kenaci ākārena jānanto. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘sāmaṃ vā jānātī’’tiādi (pārā. 659).Pariṇatanti etthapadabhājane‘‘pariṇataṃ nāma ‘dassāma karissāmā’ti vācā bhinnā hotī’’ti vuttaniyāmena saṅghassa pariṇatanti attho.Lābhanti labhitabbaṃ cīvarādi yaṃ kiñci. Yathāha ‘‘lābho nāma cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, antamaso cuṇṇapiṇḍopi dantakaṭṭhampi dasikasuttampī’’ti.Attano pariṇāmeyyāti ‘‘bahū āvuso saṅghassa dāyakā, bahū saṅghassa bhattā, mayaṃ tumhe nissāya tumhe sampassantā idha viharāma. Tumhe ce amhākaṃ na dassatha, atha ko carahi amhākaṃ dassati. Dethāvuso amhākaṃ imāni cīvarānī’’ti (pārā. 657) pāḷiyā āgatanayena attano pariṇāmeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tassa nissaggiyanti ettha ‘‘payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhenā’’ti seso.Nissaggiyanti idaṃ pariṇate pariṇatasaññiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vematikassa pana dukkaṭaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘pariṇate vematiko attano pariṇāmeti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti. Apariṇatasaññino anāpatti. Yathāha ‘‘pariṇate apariṇatasaññī attano pariṇāmeti, anāpattī’’ti.
881. "Knowing" means knowing in any way, by the statement that it has been transformed by the words "we give to the Saṅgha." As he said in the word commentary (padabhājane): "He himself knows," etc. (pārā. 659). "Transformed" here, in the word commentary (padabhājane), the meaning is "transformed means the words 'we will give, we will do' are different" according to what is stated. "Gain" means whatever is to be obtained, such as robes, etc. As he said, "Gain means robes, alms food, dwelling, requisites for the sick, medicine requisites, even a pinch of powder, a tooth stick, or a piece of cord." "Should transform to himself" means he should transform to himself in the manner that comes in the Pali, "Friends, there are many donors to the Saṅgha, many supporters of the Saṅgha; we live here depending on you, seeing you. If you do not give to us, who else will give to us? Give, friends, these robes to us" (pārā. 587). "To him, Nissaggiya" here, "dukaṭa in the attempt, by the gaining," the rest is understood. "Nissaggiya" this is said regarding one who thinks it is transformed when it is transformed. But for one who is doubtful, it is a dukaṭa. As he said, "If one who is doubtful about what is transformed transforms it to himself, the offense is a dukaṭa." For one who thinks it is not transformed, there is no offense. As he said, "If one who thinks it is not transformed when it is transformed transforms it to himself, there is no offense."
882.‘‘Aññassa dehī’’ti sace pariṇāmetīti tathā saṅghassa pariṇatabhāvaṃ jānanto ‘‘aññassa dehī’’ti yadi pariṇāmeti.Suddhikaṃ pācittiyanti nissajjitabbavatthurahitaṃ kevalaṃ pācittiyamattanti attho.Suddhacittenāti savāsanānavasesakilesappahānena parisuddhacittena bhagavatā.Pācittiyamudīritanti pācittiyesu aṭṭhamassasahadhammikavaggassaavasāne ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 490) desitaṃ.
882. "If he transforms, saying 'give to another'" means if he transforms, knowing that it has been transformed to the Saṅgha, saying "give to another." "Pure Pācittiya" means merely a Pācittiya, devoid of an article to be forfeited. "With a pure mind" by the Blessed One, with a completely purified mind by the abandoning of defilements along with their underlying tendencies. "Was uttered Pācittiya" means that which was taught at the end of the eighth Sahadhammika section in the Pācittiyas, "Whoever, bhikkhu, knowingly transforms gain belonging to the Saṅgha that has been transformed for an individual, there is a Pācittiya" (pāci. 490).
883.Ekaṃcīvaranti saṅghassa pariṇatacīvarato ekaṃ cīvaraṃ.Cīvaraṃ vāti etthavā-saddo paccayantaravikappattho.Vā panāti etthavā-saddo atthavikappattho. Ekaṃ cīvaraṃ vā aññaṃ vā paccayaṃ parassa, ekaṃ pana attano vā pariṇāmeyya ceti yojanā.Saddhinti ekato, ekakkhaṇeti vuttaṃ hoti. Dve pācittiyo saddhiṃ siyunti yojanā, aññassa pariṇāmanena suddhapācittiyañca attano pariṇāmanena nissaggiyapācittiyañcāti dve pācittiyo ekakkhaṇe hontīti attho.
883. "One robe" means one robe from the robes transformed to the Saṅgha. "Or a robe" here, the word "vā" is in the sense of an alternative reason. "Or again" here, the word "vā" is in the sense of an alternative meaning. The construction is one may transform one robe or another requisite for another, but one may transform it for oneself. "Together" means at once, in one moment. The construction is two Pācittiyas occur together, meaning at one moment, there are two Pācittiyas: a pure Pācittiya by transforming it for another, and a Nissaggiya-Pācittiya by transforming it for oneself.
884.Pariṇāmetvā ṭhapite vinicchayaṃ dassetvā pariccajitvā dinne vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘saṅghassā’’tiādi.‘‘Parājayo’’ti idaṃ pādappahonakaṃ vatthuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathāvatthuvasena pana dukkaṭathullaccayāpi vattabbā.
884. To show the judgment on what has been transformed and kept, to show the judgment on what has been given up and given away, he says, "Of the Saṅgha," etc. "Defeat" this is said referring to an object fit for offering at the base of a tree. However, according to the type of object, a dukaṭa or thullaccaya should also be stated.
885.Aññassa cetiyassapoṇaṃpariṇataṃ aññassa cetiyassa vā saṅghassa vā puggalassa vāpi pana pariṇāmeyyāti yojanā.Saṅghassa puggalassāti padadvayepi evameva yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘saṅghassa pariṇataṃ aññasaṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā puggalassa vā pariṇāmeti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādi (pāci. 492). Aññassa puggalassa poṇaṃ aññassa puggalassa pariṇāmeyyāti.
885. One may transform what belongs to another Cetiya to another Cetiya, or even to the Saṅgha or an individual. "Of the Saṅgha, of the individual" should be connected in the same way in both phrases. As he said, "If he transforms what has been transformed to one Saṅgha to another Saṅgha or to a Cetiya or to an individual, the offense is a dukaṭa," etc. (pāci. 492). One may transform what belongs to another individual to another individual.
886.Imassa sabbasattavisayataṃ dassetumāha‘‘yo panā’’tiādi.
886. To show that this applies to all beings, he says "Whoever," etc.
887.Idaṃpariṇatasikkhāpadaṃ.Tisamuṭṭhānanti kāyacittavācācittakāyavācācittasaṅkhātehi tīhi sacittakasamuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhānato tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Pariṇāmanapaccayā āpajjitabbatokriyaṃ. Saṅghādīnaṃ pariṇatantisaññāya abhāvena vimuccanatosaññāvimokkhaṃ. Kāyaviññattivacīviññattīhi pariṇāmetabbatokāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ.
887. "This" is the training rule regarding transformation. "Threefold origin (tisamuṭṭhāna)" arising from three kinds of intentional origins (sacittaka-samuṭṭhāna) counted as body-mind, speech-mind, and body-speech-mind; therefore, it is threefold origin. Action (kriyaṃ) because it is to be incurred by the condition of transformation. Release from perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ) because of release from the idea of what is transformed belonging to the Saṅgha, etc. Bodily action (kāyakamma), verbal action (vacīkamma) because it is to be transformed by bodily intimation and verbal intimation.
Pariṇatakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Discourse on Transformation.
Pattavaggo tatiyo.
The Third Bowl Section.
888.Ye imaṃ vinicchayaṃ taranti, te paññattimahāsamuddaṃ tarantīti yojanā. Paññattisaṅkhātaṃ vinayapiṭakameva mahāsamuddo viyātipaññattimahāsamuddo,taṃ. Evaṃ samudāyaṃ dassetvā tadavayave dassetumāha‘‘nekā’’tiādi. Nekāni nānappakārāni vattāni senāsanavattādīni khandhakāgatāni uggā uttuṅgā taraṅgamālā mahāvīciparamparā yassāti viggaho, nānappakārakhandhakavattasaṅkhātamahātaraṅgaparamparāya sajjitanti attho. Sīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarādikameva anto velāvalayo yassa sosīlanto,taṃ, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlādicatupārisuddhisīlameva paṭipādetabbatāya antaṃ velāvalayabhūtanti attho. Āpattiyo sattāpattikkhandhā, sīlācāradiṭṭhiājīvavipattiyo ca gāhakā makarādayo yassāti viggaho, sīlācārājīvadiṭṭhisampattisaṅkhātamudusattanāsakaāpattivipattisaṅkhā- tamātaṅgamakarādicaṇḍasattavantanti attho. Evaṃ ayaṃ gāthā samudāyāvayavānaṃ sabbesameva rūpakālaṅkārena viracitāti daṭṭhabbā.
888. Those who cross over this judgment, they cross over the great ocean of precepts—this is the interpretation. The Vinaya Piṭaka, known as precepts, is like a great ocean; hence, paññattimahāsamuddo, that. Having shown the entirety in this way, to show its parts, he says, "nekā" and so on. Nekāni, various kinds of vattāni (duties), such as senāsanavatta etc., contained in the khandhakas, are uggā (high), uttuṅgā (towering), taraṅgamālā (waves), a succession of great waves—this is the derivation, meaning adorned with a succession of great waves consisting of various khandhaka-vattas. Sīla, morality, namely, the pātimokkhasaṃvara, is the inner boundary; hence, sīlanto, that, meaning that the fourfold purity of morality, beginning with the pātimokkhasaṃvara-sīla, is the boundary because it is to be adhered to as the end. Āpattiyo, offenses, are the seven categories of offenses, and moral conduct, wrong views, and wrong livelihood, are the gāhakā (seizers) like makaras (sea monsters)—this is the derivation, meaning possessing fierce beings such as mātaṅgas (elephants), makaras, consisting of the attainment of moral conduct, livelihood, and views, and offenses consisting of the destruction of gentle beings. Thus, it should be seen that this verse is composed with a figure of speech for all of the whole and its parts.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
A commentary on Vinayavinicchaya,
Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Nissaggiya Section is Complete.
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pācittiya Section
889.Evaṃ nātivitthārasaṅkhepato nissaggiyavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni tadanantaraṃ niddiṭṭhassa pācittiyakaṇḍassa vinicchayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.Sampajānamusāvādeti attano vacanassa musābhāvaṃ ñatvā, adiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘diṭṭha’’ntiādinā nayena musāvāde sampajānantassa musābhaṇanetipi attho gahetabbo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘jānitvā jānantassa ca musābhaṇane’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 2). ‘‘Musāvāde’’ti hi nimittatthe bhummaṃ, musāvādanimittanti attho.
889. Having thus shown the decision on the nissaggiya rules, neither too extensively nor too concisely, now, to show the decision on the pācittiya section, which was specified immediately after that, the text beginning with "sampajānamusāvāde" is commenced. Sampajānamusāvāde means knowing the falsehood of one's speech, uttering a falsehood with awareness in the manner of saying "I saw" for what was not seen; this meaning should be taken. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "knowing and speaking falsely while knowing" (pāci. aṭṭha. 2). "Musāvāde" is an adverb in the sense of cause, meaning on account of falsehood.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sahasā bhaṇatīti avīmaṃsitvā anupadhāretvā vegena diṭṭhampi ‘adiṭṭhaṃ me’ti bhaṇatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 11).Ravā bhaṇantassāti ‘‘cīvara’’nti vattukāmassa ‘‘cīra’’nti vacanaṃ viya mandattā momūhattā ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññaṃ bhaṇantassa. Yathāha ‘‘ravā bhaṇati nāma ‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’ti aññaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti.
In the Aṭṭhakathā: "sahasā bhaṇati means speaking hastily, without considering or reflecting, quickly saying even what was seen as 'I did not see'" (pāci. aṭṭha. 11). Ravā bhaṇantassā means like saying "cīra" when intending to say "cīvara" due to dullness or delusion, saying something else when intending to say something else. As it says, "ravā bhaṇati nāma means saying something else when intending to say something else."
890.Aññatthāti catutthapārājikādīsu. Attanā aladdhaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ ‘‘laddhaṃ mayā’’ti musā yassa bhaṇati, tena taṅkhaṇameva sutvā tadatthe ñāte pārājikassa, aññāte kālantarena ñāte ca pariyāyavacane ca ñāte thullaccayassa, pariyāyavacane aviññāte dukkaṭassa, duṭṭhadosasikkhāpade pārājikaṃ anāpannassa ‘‘āpanno’’ti musābhaṇane saṅghādisesassa, omasavādasikkhāpade dubbhāsitassa ca vuttattā āha‘‘musāvādassa kāraṇā pañca āpattiyo’’ti. Imāya pācittiyā saddhiṃ cha āpattikkhandhā honti.
890. Aññattha means in the fourth pārājika etc. If one falsely says "I have attained" regarding a superior human quality that one has not attained, then immediately upon hearing it and understanding its meaning, it is a pārājika; if it is known after a time, it is a thullaccaya if known through circumlocution, and a dukkaṭa if not understood through circumlocution; and because it has been stated that in a duṭṭhadosa training rule, it is a pārājika for falsely claiming to have committed an offense when one has not committed it, a saṅghādisesa for the omasavāda training rule, and a dubbhāsita, therefore he says "musāvādassa kāraṇā pañca āpattiyo" (because of falsehood, there are five offenses). With this pācittiya, there are six categories of offenses.
Sampajānamusāvādakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sampajānamusāvāda Story.
891-3.Vuttesu jātiādīsu dasasu akkosavatthūsūti yojanā,padabhājanevuttesu jātināmagottakammasippaābādhaliṅgakilesaāpattiakkosānaṃ vasena dasasu akkosavatthūsūti attho. Tesu kilesaṃ vinā sabbete hīnukkaṭṭhavasena dvippakārā honti. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘jāti nāma dve jātiyo hīnā ca jāti ukkaṭṭhā ca jātī’’tiādi.
891-3. In the ten grounds for abuse, such as birth, etc., that were mentioned—this is the interpretation; padabhājane means in the ten grounds for abuse in terms of birth, name, lineage, occupation, craft, disease, gender, defilement, offense, and abuse, as mentioned in the explanation of the words. Of these, all except defilement are twofold in terms of inferior and superior. As the padabhājane says, "There are two kinds of birth: inferior birth and superior birth," etc.
Tattha caṇḍālādijāti hīnā, khattiyabrāhmaṇajātiyo ukkaṭṭhā. Nāmesu avakaṇṇakajavakaṇṇakādināmāni dāsanāmattā hīnāni, buddharakkhitādināmāni ukkaṭṭhāni. Kosiyādigottaṃ hīnaṃ, gotamādigottaṃ ukkaṭṭhaṃ. Kammesu vaḍḍhakimaṇikārādikammāni hīnāni, kasivāṇijjāgorakkhakammāni ukkaṭṭhāni. Sippesu naḷakārakumbhakārādisippaṃ hīnaṃ, muddāgaṇanādisippaṃ ukkaṭṭhaṃ. Ābādhesu sabbepi ābādhā hīnā, apica madhumeho pīḷājanakattābhāvā ukkaṭṭho. Liṅgesu atidīghatādayo hīnā, nātidīghatādayo ukkaṭṭhā. Sabbepi kilesā hīnā. Sabbāpattiyopi hīnā, apica sotāpattisamāpatti ukkaṭṭhā. Akkosesu ‘‘oṭṭhosi meṇḍosi goṇosī’’tiādiko hīno, ‘‘paṇḍitosi byattosī’’tiādiko ukkaṭṭho.
There, the birth of caṇḍālas (outcasts), etc., is inferior, and the birth of khattiyas (warriors) and brāhmaṇas (priests) is superior. Among names, names like Avakaṇṇaka and Javakaṇṇaka, which are names of slaves, are inferior, and names like Buddharakkhita are superior. Lineages like Kosiya are inferior, and lineages like Gotama are superior. Among occupations, occupations like those of carpenters and jewelers are inferior, and occupations like farming, trade, and cattle-rearing are superior. Among crafts, crafts like basket-making and pottery are inferior, and crafts like accounting and calculation are superior. Among diseases, all diseases are inferior, but diabetes is superior because it does not cause suffering. Among genders, being overly tall, etc., is inferior, and not being overly tall, etc., is superior. All defilements are inferior. All offenses are also inferior, but the attainment of stream-entry is superior. Among abuses, "You are an camel, you are a goat, you are an ox," etc., are inferior, and "You are wise, you are eloquent," etc., are superior.
Aññatraññāpadesenāti pariyāyakathanena vinā.Omasantassāti vacanapatodena ovijjhantassa.Sambuddhena pakāsitāti ‘‘caṇḍālosi venosi nesādosi rathakārosi pukkusosī’ti bhaṇati, āpatti vācāya vācāya pācittiyassā’’ti sāmaṃ sabbadhammāvabodhato ‘‘sambuddho’’ti paññātena bhagavatā desitā.
Aññatraññāpadesenā means without circumlocution. Omasantassā means piercing with the weapon of words. Sambuddhena pakāsitā means declared by the Blessed One, known as "Sambuddho" from the complete awakening to all things, "If he says, 'You are a caṇḍāla, a veṇa, a hunter, a cartwright, a pukkusa,' for each word, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 32).
894.Tehevāti jātiādīhi akkosavatthūheva. Aññāpadesena bhūtena vā…pe… āpannameva vā anupasampannaṃ akkosantassa dukkaṭaṃ sambuddhena pakāsitanti sambandho. Idha bhūtābhūtapadānitehīti apekkhitvā bahuvacanantāni yojetabbāni. Etena ‘‘santi idhekacce’’tiādidutiyavāratthaṃ (pāci. 26) dassentena dukkaṭasādhanatthena tadekakāriyaṃ tatiyaṃyenūnavārañcacatutthaṃna mayantiādivārañca saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘santi idhekacce’ti vāre pana pariharitvā vuttabhāvena dukkaṭaṃ. Eseva nayo‘yenūna…pe… na maya’nti vāresupī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 26).
894. Tehevā means with those grounds for abuse, namely, birth, etc. The connection is that the Blessed One declared a dukkaṭa for one who abuses a non-ordained person with circumlocution, whether it is true or…pe… or who has actually committed an offense. Here, the words "bhūta" (true) and "abhūta" (untrue) should be construed as plural, referring to tehī. By this, the third yenūnavārañca (and the deficient turn), and the fourth na mayantiādi (not we), are included as means of establishing a dukkaṭa by showing the second instance of "santi idhekacce" etc. (pāci. 26). As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "In the instance of 'santi idhekacce,' it is a dukkaṭa because it was said avoiding the offense. The same method applies in the instances of ‘yenūna…pe… na maya’" (pāci. aṭṭha. 26).
Pāḷimuttapadehipīti etthāpi tatheva ‘‘bhūtena vā’’tiādīni padāni sambandhitabbāni. ‘‘Corosi, gaṇṭhibhedakosī’’tiādipāḷimuttapadaṃnāma.Sabbatthāti sabbesu catūsu vāresu, pāḷimuttapadesu ca. Vuttañhi ‘‘anupasampanne pana catūsupi vāresu dukkaṭameva. ‘Corosi, gaṇṭhibhedakosī’tiādivacanehi pana upasampannepi anupasampannepi sabbavāresu dukkaṭamevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 26).‘‘Anupasampanna’’nti iminā ‘‘imasmiñca sikkhāpade ṭhapetvā bhikkhuṃ bhikkhuniādayo sabbe sattā anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 26)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttā anupasampannā saṅgahitā. Tenevetthāpi vakkhati ‘‘paviṭṭhānupasampannaṭṭhāne idha ca bhikkhunī’’ti.
Pāḷimuttapadehipī means here too, the words "bhūtena vā" etc. should be connected in the same way. Pāḷimuttapadaṃ means words outside the Pāḷi, such as "You are a thief, a burglar." Sabbatthā means in all four instances and in words outside the Pāḷi. For it was said, "For a non-ordained person, it is a dukkaṭa in all four instances. However, with words like 'You are a thief, a burglar,' it is a dukkaṭa in all instances for both ordained and non-ordained persons" (pāci. aṭṭha. 26). ‘‘Anupasampanna’’ (non-ordained) means that the non-ordained beings mentioned in the Aṭṭhakathā, "In this training rule, all beings except a bhikkhu, such as a bhikkhunī, are considered non-ordained" (pāci. aṭṭha. 26), are included. Therefore, it will also say here, "In the place of the non-ordained, here also is a bhikkhunī."
895.Davakamyatāti ettha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.22, 23, 422; a. ni. 6.58; 9.9; mahāni. 206; vibha. 518) viya ya-kāralopo.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vuttapācittiyavatthūsu ca dukkaṭavatthūsu cāti sabbattheva.Dubbhāsitamudīritanti ‘‘caṇḍālosi…pe… pukkusosī’ti bhaṇati, āpatti vācāya vācāya dubbhāsitassā’’ti (pāci. 32) vuttanti attho. Parammukhā pana pācittiyavatthūhi ca dukkaṭavatthūhi ca akkosane dukkaṭameva. Tathā davakamyatāya parammukhā vadantassāpi dubbhāsitamevāti ācariyā vadanti.
895. Davakamyatā (desiring harm), here the ya-kāra is dropped as in "paṭisaṅkhā yoniso" etc. (ma. ni. 1.22, 23, 422; a. ni. 6.58; 9.9; mahāni. 206; vibha. 518). Sabbatthā means in all the stated cases of pācittiya and cases of dukkaṭa, that is, everywhere. Dubbhāsitamudīrita means "If he says, 'You are a caṇḍāla…pe… a pukkusa,' for each word, there is an offense of dubbhāsita" (pāci. 32), as stated. However, if one abuses behind someone's back with the pācittiya cases and the dukkaṭa cases, it is only a dukkaṭa. Similarly, the teachers say that if one speaks desiring harm behind someone's back, it is only a dubbhāsita.
896-7.Atthaṃ purakkhatvā vadato bhikkhussa anāpattīti yojanā.Dhammonāma ‘‘caṇḍālosī’’tiādipāḷiyeva. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pāḷiṃ vācento dhammapurekkhāro’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 35).Anusāsanīnāma ‘‘idānipi caṇḍālosi, mā pāpadhammaṃ akāsi, mā tamo tamaparāyano ahosī’’tiādinā (pāci. aṭṭha. 35) nayenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttasarūpāyeva anusāsanīpurekkhatāya ṭhatvā vadantassa cittassa lahuparivattitabhāvato antarā kodhe uppannepi anāpatti.
896-7. There is no offense for a bhikkhu who speaks with the purpose of Dhamma—this is the interpretation. Dhammo means the Pāḷi itself, such as "caṇḍālosī" etc. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "reciting the Pāḷi is respecting the Dhamma" (pāci. aṭṭha. 35). Anusāsanī means that even if anger arises in between due to the mind's quick change while standing and speaking with the purpose of exhortation, which has the form stated in the Aṭṭhakathā in the manner of "Even now you are a caṇḍāla, do not do evil, do not become one devoted to darkness" etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 35), there is no offense.
Etthāti imasmiṃ omasavādasikkhāpade. Paṭighasampayuttacitteneva āpajjitabbattā mānasikadukkhavedanāva hoti.
Etthā means in this training rule of abusive speech. Because one incurs the offense only with a mind associated with aversion, there is only mental pain.
Omasavādakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Omasavāda Story.
898.Duvidhākārato bhikkhupesuññe āpatti siyāti yojanā. Pisatītipisuṇā,vācā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Pisuṇā evapesuññaṃ,tāya vācāya samannāgato puggalo sahacariyanayenapisuṇo,tassa kammaṃpesuññaṃ,bhikkhūnaṃ pesuññaṃ bhikkhupesuññaṃ, tasmiṃbhikkhupesuññe. Padabhājane‘‘upasampanno upasampannassa sutvā upasampannassa pesuññaṃ upasaṃharati ‘itthannāmo taṃ ‘caṇḍālo…pe… pukkuso’ti bhaṇatī’ti āpatti…pe… pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 39) vuttattā sayaṃ upasampanno hutvā upasampannassa jātiādīsu dasasu akkosavatthūsu aññatarena aññaṃ upasampannaṃ parammukhā akkosantassa sutvā tassa santikaṃ gantvā vakkhamānasarūpesu attano piyakāmatābhedādhippāyasaṅkhātesu dvīsu kāraṇesu aññatarakāraṇaṃ paṭicca ‘‘asuko tuyhaṃ evaṃ vadatī’’ti pesuññaṃ harati, tassa pesuññakathananimittaṃ pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho.
898. An offense occurs in the instance of tale-bearing among bhikkhus in two ways—this is the interpretation. Pisatīti pisuṇā, vācā, means speech that divides a united group of individuals who are part of a group. Pisuṇā eva pesuññaṃ, (tale-bearing), a person endowed with that speech is pisuṇo (a tale-bearer) by way of co-occurrence, the action of that person is pesuññaṃ, tale-bearing among bhikkhus is bhikkhupesuññaṃ, tasmiṃ bhikkhupesuññe (in that tale-bearing among bhikkhus). Padabhājane means because it was stated in the explanation of the words, "An ordained person, having heard something about an ordained person, conveys tale-bearing to another ordained person, saying, 'So-and-so says that you are a caṇḍāla…pe… a pukkusa,' there is an offense…pe… of pācittiya" (pāci. 39), having been ordained himself, if one conveys tale-bearing to another ordained person behind his back, after hearing him abuse another ordained person with one of the ten grounds for abuse, such as birth, etc., relying on one of the two reasons that will be explained, namely, an intention motivated by the desire to be liked by the other person, saying, "So-and-so is saying such-and-such about you," for the sake of that tale-bearing, there is an offense of pācittiya, this is the meaning.
Duvidhākāratoti etthaākāra-saddo kāraṇapariyāyo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘dvīhākārehīti dvīhi kāraṇehī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 38). Etthakāraṇaṃnāma adhippāyaviseso. Taṃ kāraṇaṃ adhippāyamukhena dassetumāha‘‘attano’’tiādi.Attano piyakāmassāti attano piyabhāvakāmassa pesuññaṃ bhaṇantassa, attano piyabhāvaṃ kāmayantassāti attho, tādisena adhippāyenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘evaṃ ahaṃ etassa piyo bhavissāmī’’ti attano piyabhāvaṃ patthayamānassā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 38).Parabhedatthinopi vāti akkosakassa ca attano pesuññavacanaṃ suṇantassa cāti ubhinnaṃ bhedaṃ icchantassāti attho, bhedādhippāyenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘parassa parena bhedaṃ icchantassā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 38).
Duvidhākārato (in two ways), here the word ākāra is a synonym for reason. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "dvīhākārehīti means by two reasons" (pāci. aṭṭha. 38). Here, kāraṇaṃ means a particular intention. To show that reason in terms of intention, he says "attano" etc. Attano piyakāmassā means for one who speaks tale-bearing desiring to be liked, meaning for one who desires to be liked by him; it is said to be with such an intention. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "for one who desires to be liked by him, thinking, 'Thus, I will be liked by him'" (pāci. aṭṭha. 38). Parabhedatthinopi vā means or for one who desires to cause dissension between the one who abused and the one who hears his tale-bearing, that is, with an intention of causing dissension. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "for one who desires to cause dissension between one person and another" (pāci. aṭṭha. 38).
899.Pariyāyanayena akkosantassa vacanassa…pe… dukkaṭanti yojanā, pariyāyaakkosavacanaṃ sutvā parassa santikaṃ gantvā vadantassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Yathāha ‘‘itthannāmo santi idhekacce caṇḍālā…pe… bhaṇati, na so aññaṃ bhaṇati, taṃyeva bhaṇatīti āpatti vācāya vācāya dukkaṭassā’’tiādi (pāci. 41). Pāḷimuttanayena akkosantassa vacanassa…pe… dukkaṭanti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘corosi, gaṇṭhibhedakosī’’tiādinā dassitopāḷimuttanayonāma.
899. For one who speaks with circumlocution in abuse…pe… it is a dukkaṭa—this is the interpretation, meaning that for a bhikkhu who hears speech with circumlocution in abuse and goes to the other person and speaks, there is a dukkaṭa. As it says, "So-and-so says, 'There are some caṇḍālas…pe…,' he does not say anything else, he says just that, there is an offense of dukkaṭa for each word" etc. (pāci. 41). For one who speaks in abuse with words outside the Pāḷi…pe… it is a dukkaṭa—this is the interpretation. Here, pāḷimuttanayo means the way outside the Pāḷi, as shown by "You are a thief, a burglar" etc.
900.Anupasampannassa akkosaṃ upasampannaṃ haratopi ca tathā dukkaṭanti yojanā.Ca-saddena upasampannassa akkosaṃ anupasampannaṃ haratopi ca, anupasampannassa akkosaṃ anupasampannaṃ haratopi ca tathā dukkaṭanti vikappadvayañca samuccinoti. ‘‘Idhāpi bhikkhuniṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbe anupasampannā nāmā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 38)aṭṭhakathāvacanato‘‘bhikkhunī’’ti upalakkhaṇaṃ.
900. For one who conveys abuse of a non-ordained person to an ordained person, it is also a dukkaṭa—this is the interpretation. The word ca (and) combines also the two alternatives: for one who conveys abuse of an ordained person to a non-ordained person, and for one who conveys abuse of a non-ordained person to a non-ordained person, it is also a dukkaṭa. From the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "Here also, all non-ordained persons, beginning with a bhikkhunī, are called non-ordained" (pāci. aṭṭha. 38), "bhikkhunī" is an example.
901.Na ceva piyakāmassāti piyabhāvaṃ akāmayantassa ca.Na bhedatthinopi cāti bhedaṃ anicchantassa ca.Pāpānaṃ garahatthāyāti ettha ‘‘kevala’’nti seso. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ekaṃ akkosantaṃ, ekañca khamantaṃ disvā ‘aho nillajjo, īdisampi nāma āyasmantaṃ puna vattabbaṃ maññissatī’ti evaṃ kevalaṃ pāpagarahitāya bhaṇantassa anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 38).
901. Na ceva piyakāmassā means for one who does not desire to be liked. Na bhedatthinopi cā means for one who does not desire to cause dissension. Pāpānaṃ garahatthāyā means here, "kevala" (solely) is implied. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Seeing one person abusing and one person enduring it, if he speaks solely for the purpose of censuring evil, saying, 'Alas, he is shameless, he will think that such a venerable one can be spoken to again,' there is no offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 38).
Pesuññakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Tale-Bearing Story.
903.Aññenāti sāmaṇerādinā. ‘‘Yañca padaṃ yañca anupadaṃ yañca anvakkharaṃ yañca anubyañjanaṃ, sabbametaṃ padaso nāmā’’ti (pāci. 46)padabhājanevuttattā avayave samudāyopacāravasena‘‘piṭakattaya’’nti tadekadesapadādi eva vuttoti gahetabbo. Ettha padādisarūpaṃaṭṭhakathāyaveditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘padanti eko gāthāpādo adhippeto. Anupadanti dutiyo pādo. Anvakkharanti ekekamakkharaṃ. Anubyañjananti purimabyañjanena sadisaṃ pacchābyañjana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 45). Idaṃ gāthāmayadesanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci vā ekamakkharaṃ anvakkharaṃ, akkharasamūho anubyañjanaṃ, akkharānubyañjanasamūho padaṃ, paṭhamapadaṃ padameva, dutiyaṃ anupadanti evamettha nānākaraṇaṃ veditabba’’ntipi (pāci. aṭṭha. 45) vuttaṃ. Idaṃ cuṇṇiyadesanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
903. Aññenāti: by a sāmaṇera and others. Since it is stated in the Padabhājana, "Whatever is a pada, whatever is an anupada, whatever is an anvakkhara, whatever is an anubyañjana, all this is called padaso (pāci. 46)," therefore, taking "three piṭakas" as a collective designation due to the usage of a part to denote the whole, only a part such as a word etc. is meant here. Here, the nature of pada etc. should be understood from the Aṭṭhakathā. For it is said there, " Pada means one line of a verse is intended. Anupada means the second line. Anvakkhara means each single letter. Anubyañjana means a subsequent consonant similar to the preceding consonant" (pāci. aṭṭha. 45). This is said with reference to teaching in verse. "Whatever single letter is anvakkhara, a group of letters is anubyañjana, a group of letters and anubyañjana is a pada, the first pada is just a pada, the second is an anupada—thus, a distinction should be understood here" (pāci. aṭṭha. 45) is also said. This is said with reference to the cuṇṇī teaching.
Dhammanti buddhabhāsitādipāḷidhammaṃ.Paṭisambhidāyañhi dhammapañcake pāḷipi dhammoti vuttā.Dhammapañcakaṃnāma phalanibbattako hetu, ariyamaggo, bhāsitaṃ, kusalākusalaṃ ceti ete dhammasaññitāti niddiṭṭhaṃ. Ettha hibhāsitanti pāḷi vuttā. Aṭṭhakathānissitopi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchati. So ca pubbe magadhabhāsāya ṭhito saṅgītittayāruḷho gahetabbo.
Dhammanti: the Pāḷi Dhamma such as that spoken by the Buddha. For in the five Dhammas of paṭisambhidā, the Pāḷi is also said to be Dhamma. Dhammapañcakaṃ nāma: Namely, the cause that produces a fruit, the Noble Path, what is spoken, skillful and unskillful—these are designated as Dhamma, thus it is defined. Here, bhāsitanti: Pāḷi is said. What is based on the commentary is included here itself. And that should be understood as being established in the Magadhi language and mounted on the three recitations (saṅgīti).
‘‘Saha bhaṇantassa pācittiyaṃ siyā’’ti iminā ‘‘ekato paṭṭhapetvā ekato osāpentī’’tiādinā (pāci. 46)padabhājanāgatanayena anupasampannena saddhiṃ ārabhitvā ekato uccāraṇavasena padaṃ vā anupadaṃ vā anvakkharaṃ vā anubyañjanaṃ vā vadato padādigaṇanāvasena pācittiyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘‘Saha bhaṇantassa pācittiyaṃ siyā’’ti: With this, according to the method stated in the Padabhājanā, "having started together and finished together" etc. (pāci. 46), it is said that an offense of pācittiya occurs in dependence on the counting of pada etc., for uttering a pada or anupada or anvakkhara or anubyañjana together with one who is not fully ordained.
904.Saṅgītiṃ anāruḷhesudhammesurājovādādayosuttantā āpattijanakāyevāti mahāpaccariyādisu vuttāti yojanā.Rājovādonāma eko suttanto.Ādi-saddena tikkhindriyādisuttantā gahitā.
904. Saṅgītiṃ anāruḷhesudhammesurājovādādayo: the suttantas such as the advice to the king are indeed productive of offenses, thus the connection is because it is said in the Mahāpaccariya etc. Rājovādo nāma: the advice to the king is one suttanta. By the word ādi: suttantas such as tikkhindriya are included.
905.Bhikkhusmimpi bhikkhuniyāpi ca anupasampannasaññino, vimatissa vā bhikkhussa tathā padasodhamme dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
905. For a monk, or for a nun, who is of the perception that someone is not fully ordained, or in the case of doubt, or for a monk, there is a duukkaṭa for each pada of the Dhamma, thus is the connection.
906-7.Ekato uddisāpetīti ekato uddesaṃ gaṇhantehi anupasampannehi saddhiṃ uccāraṇavasena uddisāpeti.Sajjhāyaṃ vā karotīti tathā ekato sajjhāyati.
906-7. Ekato uddisāpetīti: he causes one who is not fully ordained to learn by reciting together with those who are learning. Sajjhāyaṃ vā karotīti: similarly, he recites together.
aṭṭhakathāvacanatopaguṇaganthanti ettha ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti seso.Opātetīti ‘‘evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti ekato bhaṇati.Uddesanti uddisitabbaṃ.Tenāti anupasampannena.
aṭṭhakathā vacanato paguṇaganthanti: here, "for the most part" is the remainder. Opātetīti: he speaks together, saying "recite thus". Uddesanti: that which is to be learned. Tenāti: by one who is not fully ordained.
908.Yasmā idaṃ padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ vācato ca samuṭṭhāti, vācācittadvayāpi ca samuṭṭhāti, tasmā idaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ padasodhammasaññitanti vuttanti yojanā.
908. Since this training rule on reciting the Dhamma by word arises from speech, and also arises from both speech and mind, therefore this arising is designated as reciting the Dhamma by word, thus is the connection.
Padasodhammakathāvaṇṇanā.
Padasodhammakathāvaṇṇanā.
909-10.Sabbacchannasabbaparicchanne senāsane tissannaṃ pana rattīnaṃyo panabhikkhu rattiyaṃ ṭhapetvā bhikkhuṃ aññena sace nipajjeyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci paṭicchādanasamatthaṃ idha chadanañca paricchannañca veditabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā chadanārahaṃ iṭṭhakāsilāsudhātiṇapaṇṇādīnaṃ yena kenaci sabbaso chāditaṃ senāsanaṃsabbacchannaṃ. ‘‘Bhūmito paṭṭhāya yāva chadanaṃ āhacca pākārena vā aññena vā kenaci antamaso vatthenapi parikkhitta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā yena kenaci parikkhipitvā paṭicchāditasenāsanaṃsabbaparicchannaṃ. ‘‘Chadanaṃ anāhacca sabbantimena pariyāyena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhena pākārādinā parikkhittāpi sabbaparicchannāyevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘diyaḍḍhā’’tiādinā vakkhati.
909-10. In a dwelling that is entirely covered and entirely enclosed, if any monk, after keeping (another) monk away for three nights, should lie down with another, it is an offense of pācittiya, thus is the connection. Since it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "Here, both covered and enclosed should be understood as being capable of any kind of covering (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)," a dwelling entirely covered by anything fit for covering, such as bricks, stones, mortar, grass, leaves, etc., is sabbacchannaṃ: entirely covered. Since it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "Enclosed from the ground up to the covering by a wall or by anything else, even by a cloth (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)," a dwelling enclosed and covered by anything whatsoever is sabbaparicchannaṃ: entirely enclosed. It is said in the Kurundaṭṭhakathā, "Even if enclosed by a wall etc. to a height of two and a half hatthas in the very last circuit, without reaching the covering, it is still entirely enclosed (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)," that he will say with "two and a half" etc.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
‘‘Yebhuyyena paricchanne channe’’ti imināpi evameva yojetvā attho veditabbo. ‘‘Yassā pana upari bahutaraṃ ṭhānaṃ channaṃ, appaṃ acchannaṃ, samantato ca bahutaraṃ parikkhittaṃ, appaṃ aparikkhittaṃ, ayaṃ yebhuyyenachannā yebhuyyenaparicchannā nāmā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena yebhuyyena channaparicchannaṃ veditabbaṃ. Attho vuttanayoyeva. ‘‘Yebhuyyena paṃsukā’’ti etassaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 86) tīsu dve yebhuyyaṃ nāma, idha pana padasodhamme ‘‘yebhuyyena paguṇaṃ gantha’’nti etassaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 48) ‘‘ekagāthāyā’’tiādivivaraṇe viya catūsu tayopi bhāgā yebhuyyaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
‘‘Yebhuyyena paricchanne channe’’ti: even with this, the meaning should be understood by connecting it in just this way. "That of which the greater part of the place above is covered, a small part uncovered, and all around a greater part enclosed, a small part unenclosed—this is called mostly covered, mostly enclosed (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)," according to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, mostly covered and enclosed should be understood. The meaning is just as stated. In the Aṭṭhakathā of "Yebhuyyena paṃsukā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 86), two out of three is called mostly, but here in reciting the Dhamma by word, in the Aṭṭhakathā of "yebhuyyena paguṇaṃ gantha" (pāci. aṭṭha. 48), it should be understood that mostly means three parts out of four, as in the explanation "of one verse" etc.
911.Methunassa pahonakaṃ yaṃ pana vatthu paṭhamapārājikāya niddiṭṭhaṃ antamaso tiracchānagatenapi,tenapaṭhamapārājikavatthunā puggalena saha nipajjitvāāpattisahaseyyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
911. Whatever thing conducive to sexual intercourse was defined in the first pārājika, even with an animal, having lain down with that person or object of the first pārājika, the offense is the offense of sleeping together, thus is the connection.
912-3.‘‘Ubho vā nipajjantī’’ti vikappassa paṭhamagāthādvayeneva atthato dassitattā pubbāpariyavasenapi sambhavantaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anupasampanne’’tiādinā (pāci. 52-54) nayena dassitapakkhadvayaṃ nidassetumāha‘‘nipanne’’tiādi.‘‘Uṭṭhahitvā’’ti idaṃ vicchāvasena gahetabbaṃ.Anupasampannagaṇanāyapi vāti bahūsu anupasampannesu tesaṃ gaṇanāya ca. Anupasampannesu bahūsu tesaṃ gaṇanāya ekassa bhikkhuno bahū āpattiyo hontīti evaṃ dassanena upasampannesu bahūsu ekasmiṃ anupasampanne sati tesañca tassa payogagaṇanāya āpajjitabbā bahū āpattiyo ca ubhosupi bahūsu ekekasseva upasampannassa anupasampannagaṇanāya bahū āpattiyo ca hontītipi dassitaṃ hoti.
912-3. Since the alternative "both lie down" was shown in meaning by the first two verses alone, in order to show what is possible by way of both order and remainder, he says ‘‘nipanne’’tiādi: "having lain down" etc., in order to show the two sides shown by the method of "one who is not fully ordained" etc. (pāci. 52-54). ‘‘Uṭṭhahitvā’’ti: "having gotten up," this should be taken by way of exception. Anupasampannagaṇanāyapi vāti: and also in the counting of many who are not fully ordained. In many who are not fully ordained, by that counting, many offenses occur for one monk; by showing it thus, it is also shown that when there are many who are fully ordained and one who is not fully ordained, and by the counting of their efforts, many offenses should be incurred; and in both groups being many, for each fully ordained one there are many offenses by the counting of those not fully ordained.
914.Ekeneva dvārena vaḷañjitabbato ekūpacāre satagabbhepi senāsane upasampanno ekasmiṃ gabbhe vasanto attanā sayanagabbhe dvāraṃ pidahitvā vā apidahitvā vā catuttharattiyaṃ sayati ce, uparimatale, avasesagabbhesu ca sayantehi anupasampannehi pubbe vuttaāpattiniyamoyevāti dassanatthamāha‘‘sace pidhāyā’’tiādi. Gabbhadvāraṃ uttarapadalopena‘‘gabbha’’nti vuttaṃ. Catutthadivase atthaṅgate sūriye nipajjati, āpatti siyāti yojanā. ‘‘Anupasampannena sahā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.Āpattipācittiyaṃ.
914. Because it should be entered through one door alone, in a dwelling with a hundred rooms which is not completely enclosed, if a fully ordained monk, while dwelling in one room, having closed or not closed the door of his sleeping room, lies down on the fourth night, the rule about offenses as stated earlier (applies to) those not fully ordained who lie down on the upper floor and in the remaining rooms; in order to show this, he says ‘‘sace pidhāyā’’tiādi: "if having closed" etc. The word "room" is said as ‘‘gabbha’’nti: "room," with the middle word omitted. He lies down at sunset on the fourth day; the offense occurs, thus is the connection. ‘‘Anupasampannena sahā’’ti: "with one who is not fully ordained" is obtained from the context. Āpatti: offense, is pācittiya.
915.Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhenāti vaḍḍhakiratanena diyaḍḍharatanubbedhena.Pākāronāma niṭṭhito.Cayanaṃnāma vippakatapākārotipi vadanti. Iminā ca āḷindassa aggahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘dasahatthubbedhāpi jagati parikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 51) aṭṭhakathā pamāṇanti vadanti.Jagatīti āḷindaṃ.Ādi-saddena bhittipaṇṇāvaraṇādigahaṇaṃ.
915. Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhenāti: to a height of two and a half rattis by a carpenter's ratana. Pākāro nāma: a wall is what is finished. Cayanaṃ nāma: some say it is a wall under construction. And by this, to avoid including the veranda, some say that the Aṭṭhakathā is the standard, "even a platform ten hatthas high is not counted as an enclosure (pāci. aṭṭha. 51)." Jagatīti: a veranda. By the word Ādi: the taking of a wall, a screen of leaves, etc.
916.Dussakuṭiyanti vatthakuṭiyaṃ.
916. Dussakuṭiyanti: in a cloth hut.
917.‘‘Sabbacchannaparicchannādippabhedato yebhuyyādippabhedato’’tiādi-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Paṭhamenaādi-saddena sabbacchannayebhuyyaparicchannasabbacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannasabbaparicchannayebhuyyacchanna- sabbaparicchannaupaḍḍhacchannasaṅkhātāni cattāri senāsanāni gahitāni.Gāthāyasarūpena vuttasabbacchannasabbaparicchannena saddhiṃ pañca senāsanāni dassitāni honti. Dutiyenaādi-saddena yebhuyyacchannayebhuyyaparicchanna yebhuyyacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchanna yebhuyyaparicchannaupaḍḍhacchannasaṅkhātāni tīṇi senāsanāni gahitāni. Ime aṭṭha vikappā labbhanti. Kasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘satta pācittiyānī’’ti?Mahāaṭṭhakathāyavuttattā. Yathāha‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘sabbacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, sabbacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, sabbaparicchanne yebhuyyenacchanne pācittiyaṃ, sabbaparicchanne upaḍḍhacchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenaparicchanne upaḍḍhacchanne pācittiyaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ vuttapācittiyena saddhiṃ satta pācittiyānī’ti vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 53).
917. "From the distinction of entirely covered, entirely enclosed, etc., from the distinction of mostly, etc.," the word ādi- should be connected to each individually. By the first word ādi-, the four dwellings described as entirely covered-mostly enclosed, entirely covered-half enclosed, entirely enclosed-mostly covered, entirely enclosed-half covered are included. Along with the entirely covered and entirely enclosed described in the verse in their nature, five dwellings are shown. By the second word ādi-, the three dwellings described as mostly covered-mostly enclosed, mostly covered-half enclosed, mostly enclosed-half covered are included. These eight alternatives are obtained. Why is it said, "seven pācittiyas?" Because it is said in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā. As he says, "But in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, it is said, 'In the entirely covered-mostly enclosed there is a pācittiya, in the entirely covered-half enclosed there is a pācittiya, in the mostly covered-half enclosed there is a pācittiya, in the entirely enclosed-mostly covered there is a pācittiya, in the entirely enclosed-half covered there is a pācittiya, in the mostly enclosed-half covered there is a pācittiya, along with the pācittiya stated in the Pāḷi there are seven pācittiyas' (pāci. aṭṭha. 53)."
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘aṭṭha pācittiyānī’’ti vatvā ‘‘sattā’’ti gaṇanaparicchedo katoti?Nissandehetāva ‘‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā sabbaparicchannā, yebhuyyenacchannā yebhuyyenaparicchannā’ti (pāci. 52)pāḷiyaṃāgatesu dvīsu vikappesu ekasmiṃ vuttapācittiyaṃ gahetvā pāḷiyaṃ vuttena pācittiyena ‘sattā’ti vutta’’nti parihāro dassito.Sāratthadīpaniyañca ‘‘satta pācittiyānī’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttapācittiyadvayaṃ sāmaññato ekattena gahetvā vuttaṃ. Visuṃ pana gayhamāne sabbacchanne sabbaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiyanti aṭṭheva pācittiyāni hontī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.53) parihāro vutto.
In the Aṭṭhakathā, why, after saying "eight pācittiyas," was a numerical limit made as "seven?" Nissandehe: In what is free from doubt, "Sleeping is called entirely covered, entirely enclosed, mostly covered, mostly enclosed (pāci. 52)," in one of the two alternatives that come in the Pāḷi, after taking the pācittiya that is stated, the solution is shown that "it is said 'seven' with the pācittiya stated in the Pāḷi." And in the Sāratthadīpanī, it is said that "'seven pācittiyas' is said after taking the two pācittiyas stated in the Pāḷi as one in general. But when taken separately, in the entirely covered-entirely enclosed there is a pācittiya, in the mostly covered-mostly enclosed there is a pācittiya, there are indeed eight pācittiyas' (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.53) a solution is stated.
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā guṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti katvā ‘‘sattā‘‘ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.
In the Aṭṭhakathā, it should be taken that "seven" is said because a small deficiency or excess does not lead to error in the count. Etthāti: in this training rule.
918.‘‘Aḍḍhacchanne aḍḍhaparicchanne’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Sabbaparicchanne cūḷacchanne’’ti yathākkamena yojanā. Imināaṭṭhakathāgatesu pañcasu vikappesu tatiyavikappaṃ dassetvāādi-saddena sabbacchannādayo sesavikappā gahitā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sabbacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne dukkaṭaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne dukkaṭaṃ, sabbaparicchanne cūḷakacchanne dukkaṭaṃ, yebhuyyenaparicchanne cūḷakacchanne dukkaṭaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ āgatadukkaṭena saha pañca dukkaṭānīhi vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 53).Pāḷiyaṃ āgatadukkaṭaṃnāma imissāyeva gāthāya ādimhiyeva vuttadukkaṭaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 53).
918. "Half covered, half enclosed," thus is the connection. "Entirely enclosed, slightly covered," thus is the connection in order. With this, after showing the third alternative among the five alternatives that come in the Aṭṭhakathā, the remaining alternatives are included with the word ādi-. As he says in the Aṭṭhakathā, "In the entirely covered-slightly enclosed there is a duukkaṭa, in the mostly covered-slightly enclosed there is a duukkaṭa, in the entirely enclosed-slightly covered there is a duukkaṭa, in the mostly enclosed-slightly covered there is a duukkaṭa, along with the duukkaṭa that comes in the Pāḷi there are said to be five duukkaṭas' (pāci. aṭṭha. 53). Pāḷiyaṃ āgatadukkaṭaṃ nāma: The duukkaṭa that comes in the Pāḷi is the duukkaṭa stated at the very beginning of this verse. As he says, "In the half covered-half enclosed there is an offense of duukkaṭa (pāci. 53)."
Cūḷacchannādīni cettha evaṃ veditabbāni – yassa catūsu bhāgesu eko channo, sesā acchannā, idaṃcūḷakacchannaṃ. Yassa tīsu bhāgesu dve channā, eko acchanno, idaṃyebhuyyenacchannaṃ. Yassa dvīsu bhāgesu eko channo, eko acchanno, idaṃupaḍḍhacchannaṃnāma senāsanaṃ.Cūḷaparicchannādīni iminā nayena veditabbāni.Channādīhipīti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Pi-saddo samuccayattho. Sabbacūḷaparicchannachannādīhi catūhipi saha aḍḍhacchannaparicchanne pañcadhā dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti yojanā.
Cūḷacchannādīni: Here, "slightly covered" etc. should be understood thus: that of which one part out of four is covered, the rest uncovered, this is cūḷakacchannaṃ: slightly covered. That of which two parts out of three are covered, one uncovered, this is yebhuyyenacchannaṃ: mostly covered. That of which one part out of two is covered, one uncovered, this is called upaḍḍhacchannaṃ: half covered. Cūḷaparicchannādīni: "slightly enclosed" etc. should be understood in this way. Channādīhipīti: the instrumental case in the sense of being together. The word Pi- is in the sense of combination. It is shown that together with all four, namely, entirely-slightly enclosed-covered etc., there is a duukkaṭa in five ways, thus is the connection.
920.Sabbacchannādiketi etthaādi-saddena ‘‘sabbaparicchanne sabbaacchanne yebhuyyenaacchanne yebhuyyenaaparicchanne’’ti (pāci. 54)pāḷiyaṃvuttā anāpattivārasesā caaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttā ‘‘upaḍḍhacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne, upaḍḍhaparicchanne cūḷakacchanne, cūḷakacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 53) tayo anāpattivārā ca gahitā.
920. Sabbacchannādiketi: here, by the word ādi-, the remaining cases of non-offense stated in the Pāḷi, "in the entirely covered, in the entirely uncovered, in the mostly uncovered, in the mostly unenclosed (pāci. 54)," and the three cases of non-offense stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, "in the half covered-slightly enclosed, in the half enclosed-slightly covered, in the slightly covered-slightly enclosed (pāci. aṭṭha. 53)," are included.
921.Nipannepīti etthapi-saddena ‘‘bhikkhu nipanne anupasampanno nisīdati, ubho vā nisīdantī’’ti (pāci. 54)pāḷiyaṃvuttapakārantare samuccinoti.
921. Nipannepīti: here, the word pi- combines another aspect stated in the Pāḷi, "the monk is lying down, one who is not fully ordained sits down; or both sit down (pāci. 54)."
Sahaseyyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Sahaseyyakathāvaṇṇanā.
922.Api-saddena pageva mahattariyāti dasseti.Sahaseyyaṃ pakappeyyāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇaṃ sabbacchannasabbaparicchannādisenāsanaṃ pavisitvā sūriyatthaṅgamato paṭṭhāya pubbe vuttappakāreneva piṭṭhippasāraṇalakkhaṇaṃ seyyaṃ kappeyya.
922. With the word Api-, it shows that it is still very strong. Sahaseyyaṃ pakappeyyāti: after entering a dwelling of the kind described, namely, entirely covered-entirely enclosed etc., from sunset onward, he should intend the act of sleeping in just the way described earlier, namely, characterized by stretching out the back.
923-4.Deviyāti devitthiyā.Tiracchānagatitthiyāti godhādikāya.‘‘Methunavatthubhūtāyā’’ti iminā methunadhammassa avatthubhūtāya sahaseyyāya dosābhāvaṃ dasseti.Vatthūnaṃ gaṇanāyāti mātugāmassa gaṇanāya ca tāsañca attano ca payogagaṇanāya ca.Assāti bhikkhussa. Mātugāmena tayo divase sahaseyyāya iminā sikkhāpadena āpattiṃ āpajjitvā catutthadivase sahaseyyāya dvīhipi sikkhāpadehi āpattiṃ āpajjatīti ettha dukkaṭavatthubhūtāya itthiyā tattheva sahaseyyāya iminā sikkhāpadena dukkaṭaṃ āpajjitvā catutthadivase rattiyaṃ sahaseyyāya iminā sikkhāpadena āpajjitabbadukkaṭena saha purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ āpajjatīti veditabbaṃ.
923-4. Deviyā means of a female deity. Tiracchānagatitthiyā means of a female animal, such as a monitor lizard. ‘‘Methunavatthubhūtāyā’’: With this, it shows that there is no offense for lying down together with one who is not an object of sexual intercourse. Vatthūnaṃ gaṇanāyā: By counting the objects, that is, by counting the number of women, the number of times they had intercourse, and the number of times they themselves had intercourse. Assā: To the bhikkhu. By this training rule, if a bhikkhu incurs an offense by lying down together with a woman for three days, on the fourth day, he incurs an offense by lying down together with her, by two training rules. Here, it should be understood that by this training rule, having incurred a dukkaṭa offense by lying down together with a woman who is an object of dukkaṭa, on the fourth day, at night, by lying down together with her, he incurs a pācittiya offense by the previous training rule, together with the dukkaṭa offense that must be incurred.
Dutiyasahaseyyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Lying Down Together [with a Woman].
926.Chappañcavācāhi uddhaṃ itthiyā dhammaṃ bhaṇantassāti sambandho.Itthiyāti ‘‘mātugāmo nāma manussitthī, na yakkhī, na petī, na tiracchānagatā, viññū paṭibalā hoti subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ ājānitu’’ntipāḷiyaṃvuttamanussitthiyā.Bhaṇantassāti vakkhamānalakkhaṇaṃ dhammaṃ chahi padehi uttari bhaṇantassa.Viññuṃ purisaviggahaṃ vināti ‘‘viññū nāma purisaviggaho paṭibalo hoti subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ ājānitu’’nti (pāci. 64)pāḷiyaṃvuttasavanūpacāragatamanussapurisaṃ vinā.Dhammanti vakkhamānappakārasarūpaṃ desanādhammaṃ.
926. The connection is that of one who speaks the Dhamma to a woman using more than five or six words. Itthiyā: ‘‘Mātugāmo nāma manussitthī, na yakkhī, na petī, na tiracchānagatā, viññū paṭibalā hoti subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ ājānitu’’nti In the Pali, it refers to a human woman who is mentioned [as follows]: "A woman is a human female, not a yakkha woman, not a petī, not an animal, intelligent, capable of understanding well-spoken and ill-spoken words, coarse and non-coarse words." Bhaṇantassā: Of one who speaks the Dhamma with the characteristics to be mentioned, using more than six words. Viññuṃ purisaviggahaṃ vinā: Without an intelligent male person, that is, without a human male who is able to understand well-spoken and ill-spoken words, coarse and non-coarse words, who is mentioned in the Pali (pāci. 64) as "An intelligent male person is a man capable of understanding well-spoken and ill-spoken words, coarse and non-coarse words," and who is not attending. Dhamma: The teaching of the Dhamma with the characteristics and nature to be mentioned.
927.Gāthāmayā, cuṇṇiyaganthamayāti duvidhā desanā, tatthagāthāmayadesanāyavācā nāma gāthāpādalakkhaṇāti dassetumāha‘‘gāthāpādo’’tiādi. Cuṇṇiyadesanāyaṃ pana vācāparicchedo vibhatyantavasena veditabbo. Tenāhagaṇṭhipade‘‘eko gāthāpādo’ti idaṃ gāthābandhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vibhattiantapadameva gahetabba’’nti.Padasodhammaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ dhammanti piṭakattayaṃ.‘‘Aṭṭhakatha’’nti iminā saṅgītittayāruḷhaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tenevagaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadajātakādivatthuñcā’’ti. Imināpi porāṇakaṃ saṅgītiāruḷhameva aṭṭhakathaṃ vuttanti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathādipāṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā damiḷādibhāsantarena yathāruci kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti.
927. There are two kinds of teachings: those consisting of gāthās and those consisting of prose. Among them, to show that in teachings consisting of gāthās, a word is defined as a gāthā foot, he says, ‘‘gāthāpādo’’ etc. But in teachings consisting of prose, the limit of a word should be understood as ending with an inflected form. Therefore, the Gaṇṭhipada says, "The statement 'one gāthā foot' refers to the structure of a gāthā. Elsewhere, however, only a word ending in an inflected form should be taken." Padasodhammaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ dhamma: The Dhamma specified word by word, that is, the three Piṭakas. ‘‘Aṭṭhakatha’’: By this, the ancient commentary established in the three recitations should be taken. Therefore, the Gaṇṭhipada says, "The commentary includes the Dhammapada, Jātaka stories, etc." By this too, they say that only the ancient commentary established in the recitations is meant. It is permissible to speak according to one's preference in another language such as Tamil, setting aside the text of the commentary, etc.
928.Padādīnaṃ vasā channaṃ vācānaṃ upari dhammaṃ desentassāti yojanā.Desentassāti padasodhamme vuttalakkhaṇapadādisarūpāhi chahi vācāhi uttari dhammaṃ desentassa.Padādigaṇanāyāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇapadaanupadaanvakkharaanubyañjanagaṇanāya.
928. The interpretation is that of one who teaches the Dhamma using more than six words, based on words, etc. Desentassā: Of one who teaches the Dhamma using more than six words with characteristics such as words, etc., that are mentioned in the Dhamma specified word by word. Padādigaṇanāyā: By counting the words, non-words, letters, and non-consonants, with the characteristics as mentioned.
929.Purisaviggahanti manussapurisavesaṃ. Etthatiracchānagatānāma vesanimmānārahā iddhimantā nāgasupaṇṇā.
929. Purisaviggaha: A man in human form. Here, tiracchānagatā means nāgas and supaṇṇas with psychic power who are capable of creating forms.
931.Vadatoti adhikaṃ dhammaṃ bhāsato.
931. Vadato: Of one who speaks more Dhamma.
932.Itthirūpanti manussitthivesaṃ.Tiracchānagatitthiyāti vuttasarūpāya tiracchānagatitthiyā.
932. Itthirūpa: A woman in human form. Tiracchānagatitthiyā: Of a female animal with the nature as mentioned.
933.Sayaṃ uṭṭhāya nisīditvā puna dhammaṃ desentassa anāpatti pakāsitāti sambandho.Mātugāmassa vā tathāti ettha‘‘tathā’’ti iminā vuttappakārassa gahitattā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa mātugāmassa puna dhammaṃ desentassa anāpatti pakāsitāti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Uṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā iriyāpathaparivattanadassanena nānāiriyāpathepi anāpattiṃ dīpeti.
933. The connection is that the absence of offense is declared for one who gets up and sits down himself and then teaches the Dhamma again. Mātugāmassa vā tathā: Here, ‘‘tathā’’ because the previously mentioned manner is taken, it is said that the absence of offense is declared for a woman who gets up and sits down and then teaches the Dhamma again. ‘‘Uṭṭhāyā’’ti etc.: By showing the change of posture, it indicates the absence of offense even in different postures.
934.Aññissā puna aññissāti ettha ‘‘āgatāgatāyā’’ti seso. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘aññassa mātugāmassāti ekissā desetvā puna āgatāgatāya aññissāpi desetīti evaṃ ekāsane nisinno mātugāmasatasahassannampi desetīti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 66). Avuttasamuccayatthenaca-saddena ‘‘pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetī’’ti (pāci. 66) idaṃ samuccinoti. ‘‘Dīghanikāyo kimatthiyo bhante’’ti pañhaṃ pucchato mātugāmassa sabbaṃ dīghanikāyaṃ vadatopi anāpatti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchati, pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetīti mātugāmo ‘dīghanikāyo nāma bhante kimatthaṃ dīpetī’ti pucchati, evaṃ pañhaṃ puṭṭho bhikkhu sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ katheti, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 66). Ettha casabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetīti yāva na niṭṭhāti, tāva punadivasepi katheti.
934. Aññissā puna aññissā: Here, "to another and another who have come" is understood. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Aññassa mātugāmassāti: It means that even if a bhikkhu teaches hundreds of thousands of women sitting in one seat, teaching one and then teaching another and another who have come, there is no offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 66). With the word ca, in the sense of including what has not been said, it includes ‘‘pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetī’’ti (pāci. 66). There is no offense even for one who speaks the entire Dīgha Nikāya to a woman who asks, "Bhante, what is the purpose of the Dīgha Nikāya?" As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Pañhaṃ pucchati, pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetīti: If a woman asks, 'Bhante, what does the Dīgha Nikāya reveal?' and the bhikkhu, being asked the question, speaks the entire Dīgha Nikāya, there is no offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 66). Here, sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetī: He speaks even on the following day until it is finished.
935.Dhammassa desanāya, viññumanussapurisassa asannihitakaraṇena ca āpajjitabbatokriyākriyaṃ.
935. Kriyākriyaṃ: It is an action [that does not lead to offense] because of teaching the Dhamma and because of the non-availability of an intelligent human male.
Dhammadesanākathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Teaching the Dhamma.
936.Mahaggataṃrūpārūpajjhānaṃ.Paṇītaṃlokuttaradhammaṃ. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītanti paṇītaṃ.Ārocentassāti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādinā (pārā. 201) nayenacatutthapārājikevuttanayena vadantassa. Parinibbānakāle ca puṭṭhakāle ca bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ attanā laddhassa uttarimanussadhammassa ārocetabbattā‘‘ṭhapetvā bhikkhuniṃ bhikkhu’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Aññassā’’ti seso. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘upasampannassa bhūtaṃ ārocetīti uttarimanussadhammameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Parinibbānakāle, hi antarā vā atikaḍḍhiyamānena upasampannassa bhūtaṃ ārocetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 77).Bhūteti ettha ‘‘uttarimanussadhamme ārocite’’ti vattabbaṃ, nimittatthe bhummaṃ, attano santāne imasmiṃ attabhāve siddhauttarimanussadhammassa ārocananimittanti attho.
936. Mahaggataṃ: The jhānas of the form and formless realms. Paṇītaṃ: The supramundane Dhamma. "Brought to prominence" means exquisite. Ārocentassā: Of one who speaks in the manner mentioned in the fourth pārājika (pārā. 201), such as "I attain the first jhāna," etc. Because a bhikkhu or bhikkhunī must declare the superior human state attained by oneself at the time of final nibbāna or when asked, it is said, ‘‘ṭhapetvā bhikkhuniṃ bhikkhu’’. "To another" is understood. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Upasampannassa bhūtaṃ ārocetīti: This refers only to declaring the superior human state. At the time of final nibbāna, or if one is being severely harassed in between, it is permissible to declare the truth to an ordained person" (pāci. aṭṭha. 77). Bhūte: Here, it should be said, "uttarimanussadhamme ārocite," the locative is in the sense of cause; it means that it is the cause for declaring the superior human state that has been attained in this existence in one's own being.
937.Noce jānāti so vuttanti yassa āroceti, so sace sutakkhaṇeyeva vuttanayeneva ‘‘esa paṭhamajjhānassa lābhī’’tiādinā nayena vuttaṃ no jānāti.Pariyāyavacaneti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasati, so paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī’’ti evamādipariyāyavacane. Yassa uttarimanussadhammaṃ āroceti, so sace sutasamanantaraṃ ‘‘esa evaṃ vadatī’’ti vuttaṃ no jānāti, tādisassa ārocentassa bhikkhuno hoti āpatti dukkaṭanti sambandho.Assabhūtassa pariyāyavacane ca bhikkhuno āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
937. No ce jānāti so vuttaṃ: If the one to whom he declares does not know what has been said in the manner mentioned, right at the moment of hearing, in the way that "This person is a gainer of the first jhāna," etc. Pariyāyavacane: In indirect speech, such as "The one who lives in your monastery is a gainer of the first jhāna." If the one to whom he declares the superior human state does not know right after hearing, what has been said, such as "This person is speaking thus," the bhikkhu who declares to such a person incurs a dukkaṭa offense. The connection is that a bhikkhu incurs a dukkaṭa offense in indirect speech about something true. The interpretation is that a bhikkhu incurs a dukkaṭa offense in indirect speech about something true.
938.Tathārūpekāraṇe satīti parassa kāraṇabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi paṭipattiyā amoghabhāvadassanasamuttejanasampahaṃsanādikarasaṅkhāte kāraṇe sati.Sabbassāpīti upasampannānupasampannassa sabbassa.Sīlādinti sīlasutapariyattiguṇaṃ.Vadatoti ettha ‘‘bhikkhuno’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.
938. Tathārūpe kāraṇe satī: Even knowing that there is a reason for another, when there is a reason consisting of showing that the practice is not in vain, arousing enthusiasm, delighting, etc. Sabbassāpī: To everyone, ordained and unordained. Sīlādi: Virtue, learning, and qualities of the scriptures. Vadato: Here, "bhikkhuno" is obtained from the context.
939.Tadasambhavāti diṭṭhisampannassa ummādādīnaṃ asambhavā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘diṭṭhisampannānaṃ ummādassa vā cittakkhepassa vā abhāvāti. Mahāpaccariyampi hi vicārita’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 77). Ummattakapadassa avacane kāraṇaṃ vadanteneva khittacittādipadānaṃ avacane kāraṇañca upalakkhaṇato dassitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca maggaphaladiṭṭhiyā samannāgatānaṃ ariyānameva hi ummattakādibhāvo natthi. Jhānalābhino pana tasmiṃ sati jhānā parihāyanti, tasmā tesaṃ abhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti vattabbā, na bhūtārocanapaccayā.
939. Tadasambhavā: Because madness, etc., are impossible for one who is accomplished in [right] view. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "There is no madness or mental derangement for those who are accomplished in [right] view. This has also been investigated in the Mahāpaccariya" (pāci. aṭṭha. 77). It should be understood that by not mentioning the word "madman," the reason for not mentioning words such as "deranged of mind" has also been shown by implication. Here, only the noble ones who are endowed with the view of the path and fruit do not have the state of being a madman, etc. But those who have gained jhāna fall away from jhāna when that [madness, etc.] is present. Therefore, it should be said that there is no offense due to the cause of declaring what is untrue, not due to the cause of declaring what is true.
940.Imissāpattiyā aññatra jhānamaggādilābhīnaṃ aññassa asambhavā‘‘kusalābyākateheva dvicitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Idañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena ariyapuggaleyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantā pana jhānalābhī puthujjanā nānāvatthumhi lobhavasena akusalacittenāpi na ārocentīti natthi, tasmā ‘‘ticitta’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, tathāpi bahulena kusalābyākatānameva sambhavoti evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Dvivedanaṃsukhopekkhāvasena. Idañca sikkhāpadaṃ paṇṇattiajānanavasena acittakasamuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Ariyā cettha paṇṇattiṃ jānantā vītikkamaṃ na karonti, puthujjanā pana paṇṇattiṃ jānitvāpi vītikkamaṃ karonti. Te ca satthuno āṇāvītikkamacetanāya balavaakusalabhāvato jhānā parihāyantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
940. Because this offense does not occur to anyone else other than those who have gained jhāna, the path, etc., it is said, ‘‘kusalābyākateheva dvicitta’’. This is said referring to the noble individuals alone, by way of the highest limit. However, it is not the case that ordinary people who have gained jhāna and do not know the rule do not declare in various instances due to greed, with an unwholesome mind. Therefore, it should be said "ticitta." Even so, it should be understood that it is said thus because it mostly occurs to those with wholesome and indeterminate [minds]. Dvivedanaṃ: Two kinds of feeling, in terms of pleasure and equanimity. This training rule arises from an unintentional origin due to not knowing the rule. Here, the noble ones, knowing the rule, do not commit a transgression. Ordinary people, however, commit a transgression even after knowing the rule. And it should be understood that because the intention of transgressing the Teacher's command has a strong unwholesome nature, they fall away from jhāna.
Bhūtārocanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Declaring What is True.
941.Bhikkhuno duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ bhikkhusammutiṃ ṭhapetvā anupasampanne ārocentassa bhikkhuno āpattīti yojanā.Duṭṭhullaṃ āpattinti saṅghādiseso. Nanu ca ‘‘duṭṭhullā nāma āpatti cattāri ca pārājikāni terasa ca saṅghādisesā’’ti (pāci. 79)padabhājanepārājikasaṅghādisesā dassitā, kasmā idha saṅghādisesova gahitoti? Vuccate – pārājikaṃ duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, idha pana saṅghādisesoyeva bhagavatā adhippetotiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvicāritametaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘pārājikāni duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthaṃ vuttāni, saṅghādisesaṃ pana idha adhippeta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 78). Vakkhati ca ‘‘idha saṅghādisesāva, duṭṭhullāpattiyo matā’’ti.Anupasampanneti ‘‘bhikkhuñca bhikkhuniñca ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno’’ti (pāci. 80)padabhājaneniddiṭṭhaanupasampannassa ārocentassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
941. The interpretation is that a bhikkhu incurs an offense by declaring a serious offense of a bhikkhu to one who is not ordained, setting aside the agreement of the Saṅgha. Duṭṭhullaṃ āpatti: A Saṅghādisesa offense. Now, since in the Padabhājana (pāci. 79), it is shown that "Duṭṭhulla nāma āpatti: serious offenses are the four pārājikas and the thirteen saṅghādisesas," why is only the Saṅghādisesa offense taken here? It is said that the pārājika offenses are mentioned to show the meaning of the word "serious," but here, only the Saṅghādisesa offense is intended by the Buddha. This has been considered in the Aṭṭhakathā. For it is said there, "The pārājika offenses are mentioned to show the meaning of the word 'serious,' but here, the Saṅghādisesa offense is intended" (pāci. aṭṭha. 78). And it will be said, "Here, only the Saṅghādisesa offenses are considered serious offenses." Anupasampanne: It is said that one incurs an offense by declaring [a serious offense] to one who is not ordained, who is specified in the Padabhājana (pāci. 80) as "Avaseso anupasampanno: one who is not ordained is anyone other than a bhikkhu or bhikkhunī."
Ṭhapetvā bhikkhusammutinti ‘‘atthi bhikkhusammuti āpattipariyantā na kulapariyantā’’tiādinā (pāci. 80)padabhājanedassitaṃ abhiṇhāpattikassa bhikkhuno āyatiṃ saṃvaratthaṃ hirottappajananatthaṃ āpattiyo vā upāsakakulāni vā ubhayameva vā paricchinditvā vā aparicchinditvā vā āpattiyo ārocetuṃ saṅghena saṅghamajjhe tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā katasammutiṃ ṭhapetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘abhiṇhāpattikaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā ‘evamesa paresu hirottappenāpi āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjissatī’ti tassa bhikkhuno hitesitāya tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā saṅghena kātabbā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 80).
Ṭhapetvā bhikkhusammuti: Setting aside the agreement of the bhikkhus, that is, setting aside the agreement made by the Saṅgha, after announcing three times in the middle of the Saṅgha, to declare the offenses, having determined or not determined the offenses or families of lay supporters or both, for a bhikkhu who is a habitual offender, for the purpose of restraint in the future and for the purpose of generating shame and fear [of wrongdoing], which is shown in the Padabhājana (pāci. 80) as "Atthi bhikkhusammuti āpattipariyantā na kulapariyantā: There is an agreement of the bhikkhus that is limited to offenses, not to families." As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Disvā abhiṇhāpattikaṃ bhikkhuṃ: Seeing a bhikkhu who is a habitual offender, thinking, 'In this way, he will undertake restraint in the future even with shame and fear towards others,' [this agreement] should be made by the Saṅgha after announcing three times, for the sake of the benefit of that bhikkhu" (pāci. aṭṭha. 80).
942.Ghaṭetvā vadantassevātievakāro yathāṭhāne yojetabbo.Evakārena byavacchinnamatthaṃ vakkhati ‘‘vatthu’’ntiādinā.‘‘Asuciṃ mocetvā’’ti iminā vatthumāha,‘‘saṅghādisesa’’nti iminā āpattiṃ. Vajjamevavajjatā. ‘‘Pācittiyāpattī’’ti imassāyaṃ pariyāyo. ‘‘Ayaṃ asuciṃ mocetvā saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno’’ti vatthunā saddhiṃ ghaṭetvā āpattiṃ vadantassavajjatāpācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
942. Ghaṭetvā vadantassevā: The word eva should be connected in its proper place. The meaning excluded by the word eva will be stated with "vatthu," etc. ‘‘Asuciṃ mocetvā’’: With this, it mentions the object; ‘‘saṅghādisesa’’: with this, it mentions the offense. The very fault is vajjatā. This is a synonym for "pācittiyāpatti." The interpretation is that vajjatā, a pācittiya offense, occurs to one who declares the offense, connecting it with the object, saying, "This person, having emitted semen, has incurred a Saṅghādisesa offense."
943.Suddhassāti pārājikamanāpannassa.Vadanti vadanahetu, vatthunā saddhiṃ saṅghādisesassa kathanatoti attho.
943. Suddhassā: Of one who has not committed a pārājika offense. Vada: The reason for speaking, that is, the speaking of the Saṅghādisesa offense together with the object.
944.Aduṭṭhullāyāti saṅghādisesato aññāya āpattiyā.Duṭṭhullasaññinoti saṅghādisesasaññino.Sesā āpattiyopi vāti saṅghādisesaṃ vinā sese chaḷāpattikkhandhe.
944. Aduṭṭhullāyā: Of an offense other than a Saṅghādisesa offense. Duṭṭhullasaññino: One who perceives [it as] a Saṅghādisesa offense. Sesā āpattiyopi vā: Or the remaining six groups of offenses other than the Saṅghādisesa offense.
945.Tathāti dukkaṭaṃ atidisati. Pañcadhā mataṃ anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ ajjhācāraṃ ārocentassa tathā dukkaṭanti yojanā.Anupasampannassa pañcadhā mataṃ duṭṭhullaṃ ajjhācāranti ca pāṇātipātādipañcasikkhāpadavītikkamā gahitā. Keci pana ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhiādayo pañcā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīni hi daseva sikkhāpadāni sāmaṇerānaṃ paññattāni. Tesaṃ paññattesuyeva ca sikkhāpadesu duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullavicāraṇā kātabbā, na ca sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni visuṃ tesaṃ paññattāni atthīti.
945. Tathā: Thus, it extends to a dukkaṭa offense. The interpretation is that a dukkaṭa offense occurs in the same way for declaring a serious transgression to one who is not ordained, which is considered in five ways. Anupasampannassa pañcadhā mataṃ duṭṭhullaṃ ajjhācāraṃ: The five transgressions of the five training rules beginning with killing living beings are taken. Some, however, say that "the five are emission of semen, etc.," that should not be taken. For only ten training rules beginning with killing living beings are prescribed for the novices. And the consideration of serious and non-serious offenses should be done only in those prescribed training rules, and there are no separate prescriptions for emission of semen, etc., for them.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhi…pe… ajjhācāro nāmāti vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 82). Imināpi cetaṃ siddhaṃ ‘‘anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi duṭṭhullaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti. ‘‘Ajjhācāro nāmā’’ti hi vadanto anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi kevalaṃ ajjhācāro nāma hoti, na pana duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāroti dīpeti. ‘‘Ajjhācāro nāmā’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā, akattabbarūpattā ca anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni daṇḍakammavatthupakkhaṃ bhajanti. Tāni ca aññassa anupasampannassa avaṇṇakāmatāya ārocento bhikkhu dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti vadanti. Idha panaanupasampannaggahaṇena sāmaṇerasāmaṇerisikkhamānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
In the Commentary: "Sukkavissaṭṭhi…pe… is called Ajjhācāra" (pāci. aṭṭha. 82). By this also, it is established that "For one who is not fully ordained, Sukkavissaṭṭhi etc. is not called Duṭṭhulla." For in saying "is called Ajjhācāra," it indicates that for one not fully ordained, Sukkavissaṭṭhi etc. is only called Ajjhācāra, but not Ajjhācāra that is called Duṭṭhulla. And because it is said in the Commentary, "is called Ajjhācāra," and because it is an action that should not be done, Sukkavissaṭṭhi etc. for one not fully ordained, belong to the category of an object for Daṇḍakamma. And they say that a bhikkhu who accuses another unordained person of these, wishing to disparage them, incurs a Dukkaṭa. Here, by the term anupasampanna (not fully ordained), one should understand it to mean Sāmaṇera, Sāmaṇerī, and Sikkhamānā.
aduṭṭhullaṃ ajjhācāraṃvā. Yathāha ‘‘anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāra’’ntiādi (pāci. 82).
Aduṭṭhulla Ajjhācāra: As it says, "For one not fully ordained, it is Duṭṭhulla or Aduṭṭhulla Ajjhācāra" etc. (pāci. 82).
946.Kevalaṃvatthuṃ vā ārocentassāti ‘‘ayaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena vatthumattaṃ ārocentassa.Kevalaṃ āpattiṃ vā ārocentassāti ‘‘ayaṃ pārājikaṃ āpanno, ayaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena āpattimattaṃ ārocentassa ca.Bhikkhusammutiyāti ettha vatthunā ghaṭetvā āpattiṃ ārocentassāti gahetabbaṃ.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘anāpattī’’ti etaṃ parāmasati.
946.Onlyaccusing of the object: Meaning accusing of merely the object, in the manner of "This one has committed Sukkavissaṭṭhi" etc. Only accusing of the offense: Meaning accusing of merely the offense, in the manner of "This one has committed a Pārājika, this one has committed a Saṅghādisesa." Bhikkhu Sammuti: Here, it should be taken to mean accusing of the offense, connecting it with the object. "Tathā" (Thus): By this, it refers to "Anāpatti" (no offense).
Duṭṭhullārocanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the discourse on accusing of Duṭṭhulla.
948.Akappiyaṃ pathavintipadabhājane‘‘dve pathaviyo jātā ca pathavī ajātā ca pathavī’’ti (pāci. 86) uddisitvā –
948.Akappiyaṃ pathavi (unsuitable earth): In the Padabhājana, "There are two kinds of earth: Jātā Pathavī and Ajātā Pathavī" (pāci. 86) having specified –
‘‘Jātā nāma pathavī suddhapaṃsu suddhamattikā appapāsāṇā appasakkharā appakathalā appamarumbā appavālikā yebhuyyenapaṃsukā yebhuyyenamattikā, adaḍḍhāpi vuccati jātā pathavī. Yopi paṃsupuñjo vā mattikāpuñjo vā atirekacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭho, ayampi vuccati jātā pathavī’’ti (pāci. 86) ca,
"Jātā Pathavī is pure dust, pure clay, with few stones, few gravel, few potsherds, little sandy soil, little sand, mostly dust, mostly clay; Adaḍḍhā (unburnt) is also called Jātā Pathavī. Also, a heap of dust or a heap of clay that has been exposed for more than four months, this is also called Jātā Pathavī" (pāci. 86) and,
‘‘Ajātā nāma pathavī suddhapāsāṇā suddhasakkharā suddhakathalā suddhamarumbā suddhavālikā appapaṃsu appamattikā yebhuyyenapāsāṇā yebhuyyenasakkharā yebhuyyenakathalā yebhuyyenamarumbā yebhuyyenavālikā, daḍḍhāpi vuccati ajātā pathavī. Yopi paṃsupuñjo vā mattikāpuñjo vā ūnacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭho, ayampi vuccati ajātā pathavī’’ti (pāci. 86) ca –
"Ajātā Pathavī is pure stones, pure gravel, pure potsherds, pure sandy soil, pure sand, little dust, little clay, mostly stones, mostly gravel, mostly potsherds, mostly sandy soil, mostly sand; Daḍḍhā (burnt) is also called Ajātā Pathavī. Also, a heap of dust or a heap of clay that has been exposed for less than four months, this is also called Ajātā Pathavī" (pāci. 86) and –
Niddiṭṭhāsu dvīsu pathavīsu jātapathavisaṅkhātaṃ akappiyapathaviṃ.
Among the two kinds of earth that have been defined, Akappiya Pathavī is reckoned as Jāta Pathavī.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘muṭṭhippamāṇato upari pāsāṇāti veditabbā, muṭṭhippamāṇā sakkharā. Kathalāti kapālakhaṇḍāni. Marumbāti kaṭasakkharā. Vālikāti vālukāyevā’’ti vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yebhuyyenapaṃsukādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ ‘‘yebhuyyenapaṃsukāti tīsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāsā paṃsu, eko pāsāṇādīsu aññataro koṭṭhāso’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 86) ca ‘‘adaḍḍhāpīti uddhanapattapacanakumbhakārāvāpādivasena tathā tathā adaḍḍhā’’tiādiaṭṭhakathāto ca veditabbaṃ.‘‘Appapaṃsuappamattikā’’ti dvīsupi padesu niddesarūpena yebhuyyenapāsāṇādipadapañcakaṃ vuttaṃ, tatthāpi atthoyebhuyyenapaṃsupadādīsu vuttavipallāsena veditabbo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tesaṃyeva hi dvinnaṃ pabhedadassanameta’’nti (pāci. 86).
In the Commentary: "Stones larger than fist-size should be understood as Pāsāṇa; fist-size are Sakkharā. Kathalā means pieces of potsherds. Marumbā means coarse gravel. Vālikā is simply sand," should be understood in the manner that was stated. The characteristic of Yebhuyyenapaṃsuka etc. is "Yebhuyyenapaṃsuka means two parts out of three parts are dust, one part is any one of Pāsāṇa etc." (pāci. aṭṭha. 86) and "Adaḍḍhāpi: unburnt in such and such a way, due to being unburnt in the manner of hearth, cooking pot, potter's kiln" etc. should be understood from the Commentary. "Appapaṃsuappamattikā": in both places, the five terms beginning with Yebhuyyenapāsāṇa are stated in the form of a definition; there also, the meaning should be understood in the reverse order of what was stated in Yebhuyyenapaṃsupada etc. As the Commentary says, "Indeed, this is a showing of the distinction of those two" (pāci. 86).
Khaṇeyya vāti evarūpaṃ akappiyapathavipadesaṃ antamaso pādaṅguṭṭhenāpi sammuñjanisalākāyapi sayaṃ vā khaṇati.Khaṇāpeyya vāti aññena vā ‘‘idaṃ khaṇāhī’’tiādinā akappiyavohārena khaṇāpeyya.Bhedāpeyyāti tatheva bhedāpeyya.Bhindeyya vāti passāvadhārādīhipi bhindeyya. Adhikāravasenavā-saddassa sabbakiriyāpadehi sambandho labbhatītibhedāpeyya cāti etthaca-saddo idha avuttassa ‘‘dahati vā, dahāpeti vā’’ti padadvayassa samuccayakoti veditabbo. Antamaso pattampi pacanto sayaṃ vā dahati, aññena vā dahāpetītiādi imesaṃ padānaṃaṭṭhakathāvasena (pāci. aṭṭha. 87) veditabbaṃ.Pācittiyaṃ siyāti khaṇantassa, bhindantassa ca pahāre pahāre pācittiyaṃ.
Khaṇeyya vā (might dig): One might dig such a place of Akappiya Pathavī oneself, even with the big toe or with a broom-stick. Khaṇāpeyya vā (might have dug): Or one might have another dig it with Akappiya speech such as "Dig this." Bhedāpeyyā (might have split): Likewise, one might have it split. Bhindeyya vā (might break): One might break it even with a stream of urine etc. Because of the authority, the connection of the word vā (or) can be obtained with all the verbs, therefore, in bhedāpeyya cā (might have split also), the word ca (also) should be understood as a collective of the two words "dahati vā, dahāpeti vā" (burns or has burnt) which were not stated here. Even while cooking rice gruel, one either burns it oneself or has another burn it, etc., these words should be understood according to the Commentary (pāci. aṭṭha. 87). Pācittiyaṃ siyā (there would be a Pācittiya): For one who digs or breaks, there is a Pācittiya for each strike.
949.Āṇāpentassa āṇattigaṇanāya, dahantassa aggipātagaṇanāya hotīti idaṃ ‘‘pahāre pahāre pācittiya’’ntiādiaṭṭhakathāvacanavasena veditabbaṃ, imameva dassetumāha‘‘sayamevā’’tiādi.
949.For one who commands, it is according to the count of commands; for one who burns, it is according to the count of fire-droppings; this should be understood according to the statement of the Commentary, "there is a Pācittiya for each strike," etc.; to show this very thing, he says "sayamevā" (oneself) etc.
950.Āṇāpentassāti sakiṃ āṇāpentassa.
950.Āṇāpentassā (for one who commands): For one who commands once.
951.‘‘Khaṇāpeyyā’’ti sāmaññavacanassa apavādadassanatthaṃ‘‘khaṇa pokkharaṇi’’ntiādimāha.Koci doso na vijjatīti ettha pokkharaṇiāvāṭādisaddānaṃ pathavipariyāyattābhāvato evaṃvacanena anāpattīti adhippāyo.
951.To show an exception to the general statement "Khaṇāpeyya" (might have dug), he says "khaṇa pokkharaṇi" (dig a pond) etc. Koci doso na vijjatī (no fault is found): Here, because the words pokkharaṇi (pond), āvāṭa (pit), etc. do not have the same meaning as pathavī (earth), the intention is that there is no offense by such a statement.
952.‘‘Imaṃ idhā’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ paccakkhabhūtādhippetabhūmivācakattā tehi yojetvā vuttassa tasseva payogassa āpattikarabhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ima’’ntiādi.
952.To show that the very usage that was stated connecting it with those words, since the words "imaṃ idhā" (this here) etc. are expressive of ground that is perceived directly, is the cause of offense, he says "imaṃ" (this) etc.
953.Kandanti tālādikandaṃ.Kurundanti kulacocarukkhaṃ.Thūṇanti thambhaṃ.Khāṇukanti sākhāviṭaparahitaṃ rukkhāvayavaṃ.Mūlanti pathaviyā suppatiṭṭhitabhāvakaraṃ rukkhāvayavaṃ.Vaṭṭatīti aniyametvā vacanena anāpattibhāvato vaṭṭati.
953.Kanda (bulb): A bulb such as a palm tree bulb. Kurunda (kurunda tree): The kulaco tree. Thūṇa (pillar): A post. Khāṇuka (stump): A part of a tree without branches or twigs. Mūla (root): A part of a tree that makes the earth well-established. Vaṭṭatī (is allowable): Because it is allowable since there is no restriction by the statement.
954.Imanti paccakkhaparāmāsapadena niyametvā vacanato āpatti hotīti āha‘‘niyametvāna vattuṃ pana na vaṭṭatī’’ti.
954.He says "niyametvāna vattuṃ pana na vaṭṭatī" (but it is not allowable to speak restricting), because there is an offense since it is stated restricting it with a word referring to direct perception, "imaṃ" (this).
955.Ghaṭehi ussiñcitunti ghaṭehi gahetvā avasiñcituṃ.Tanukaddamoti jambālo.Bahalaṃkaddamaṃ bhikkhunā apanetuṃna ca vaṭṭatīti yojetabbaṃ.
955.Ghaṭehi ussiñcituṃ (to bail out with pots): To draw up and pour out with pots. Tanukaddamo (thin mud): Is jambāla. Bahalaṃ kaddamaṃ bhikkhunā apanetuṃ na ca vaṭṭatī (It is not allowable for a bhikkhu to remove thick mud) should be connected.
956.Nadiyādīnanti etthaādi-saddena gaṅgākandarādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Taṭa’’nti iminā sambandho.Vaṭṭhanti vuṭṭhīhi ovaṭṭhañca.Cātumāsanti vikopanakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ, cātumāsabbhantare vikopetuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.
956.Nadiyādīnaṃ (of rivers etc.): Here, the word ādi (etc.) includes the Gaṅgā, Kandarā, etc. It is related to "Taṭa" (bank). Vaṭṭhaṃ (covered): Also, that which is covered by rains. Cātumāsaṃ (four months): Is a usage in the absolute connection in the action of destroying; the meaning is, it is allowable to destroy within four months.
957.Sace toyasmiṃ patati taṭanti yojanā, sace kūlaṃ bhijjitvā antoudake patatīti.Deve vuṭṭhepīti pajjunnadeve vuṭṭhepi. Vuṭṭha-saddo kattusādhano. Cātumāsamatikkantepīti yojanā. Tattha hetudassanatthamāha‘‘toye devo hi vassatī’’ti.
957.The connection is, if the bank falls into the water, if the bank breaks and falls into the inner water. Deve vuṭṭhepī (even when the deva rains): Even when Pajjunnadeva rains. The word Vuṭṭha is a means of the agent. The connection is, even when four months have passed. There, he says to show the reason, "toye devo hi vassatī" (for the deva indeed rains in the water).
958.Soṇḍinti pāsāṇapokkharaṇiṃ.Tattha tūti udakarahite tasmiṃ soṇḍiāvāṭe.
958.Soṇḍi (pool): A stone pond. Tattha tū (there then): In that pool which is without water.
959.Antocātumāsaṃ sodhetuṃ bhinditunti yojanā.‘‘Sodhetuṃ bhindituṃ vikopetu’’nti kiriyāpadehi ‘‘raja’’nti kammapadaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Taṃ rajorāsiṃ deve vuṭṭhe pacchā udakassa chinnattā bahalabhūmisukkhampi vuṭṭhipātadivasato paṭṭhāya antocātumāse kopetuṃ bhindituṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.
959.The connection is, it is allowable to clear, break, and destroy within four months. The object "rajaṃ" (dust) should be brought and connected with the verbs "sodhetuṃ bhindituṃ vikopetuṃ" (to clear, to break, to destroy). The meaning is, it is allowable to break and destroy that heap of dust, even if the ground is thickly dry because the water is cut off after the deva rains, starting from the day of the rainfall, within four months.
960.Puṇṇesoṇḍimhitaṃ rajaṃvikopetuṃ vaṭṭati cātumāsato uddhanti yojanā.
960.Puṇṇe soṇḍimhi taṃ rajaṃ vikopetuṃ vaṭṭati cātumāsato uddhaṃ (It is allowable to destroy that dust in a full pool after four months) is the connection.
961.‘‘Phusāyante’’ti etena ‘‘devo’’ti idaṃ bhummavasena vipariṇāmetvā ‘‘deve phusāyante’’ti yojetabbaṃ, pajjunnadeve vuṭṭhipātaṃ karonteti attho.Piṭṭhipāsāṇaketi pāsāṇapiṭṭhe.Tampīti tathā pāsāṇapiṭṭhe laggaṃ tampi rajaṃ.
961.By "Phusāyante" (while drizzling), this "devo" (deva) should be transformed according to the ground and connected, "deve phusāyante" (while the deva is drizzling); the meaning is, while Pajjunnadeva is causing a rainfall. Piṭṭhipāsāṇake (on a stone surface): On the surface of a stone. Tampī (that also): That dust also, attached to the surface of the stone.
962.Akatapabbhāronāma yathā heṭṭhābhāgo vuṭṭhiphusitehi na temīyati, tathā namitvā ṭhitapabbatappadeso. Idaṃ anovassakaṭṭhāne uṭṭhitavammikānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ.
962.Akatapabbhāro (unmade slope): Means a mountain slope that stands bent over, such that the lower part is not wetted by the rain drizzles. This is an indication of anthills that have arisen in a place without rain.
963.Abbhokāse vuṭṭhito vammiko sace ovaṭṭho, kaṃ cātumāsaṃ vikopetuṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Cātumāsanti vikopanakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Rukkheti ca thambhapāsāṇādīnaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ.Upacikādīnantiādi-saddena kāḷakipillikādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.So nayoti ‘‘ovaṭṭhadivasato uttari cātumāsabbhantare kopetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti yathāvutto nayo.
963.The connection is, if an anthill that has rained in the open is covered, when is it allowable to destroy it for four months. Cātumāsaṃ (four months): Is a usage in the absolute connection in the action of destroying. Rukkhe (tree): Is an indication of posts, stones, etc. Upacikādīnaṃ (of termites etc.): The word ādi (etc.) includes black ants, etc. So nayo (that method): The method that was stated, "it is allowable to destroy it within four months from the day it was covered."
964.Mūsikukkiraṃnāma mūsikāhi uddhaṭapaṃsu. Mūsikānaṃ ukkiro mūsikukkiroti viggaho.Gokaṇṭakaṃnāma gunnaṃ khurānaṃ uṭṭhitamattikā.Gaṇḍuppādamalaṃnāma bhūlatāya malamattikā. Sambandhaṃ pana pakatibhūmiṃ akopentena matthakato gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati.
964.Mūsikukkiraṃ (mouseshred): Means dust dug up by mice. Mūsikānaṃ ukkiro mūsikukkiroti viggaho (mouseshred: shred of mice). Gokaṇṭakaṃ (cowthorn): Means clay raised by the hooves of cows. Gaṇḍuppādamalaṃ (earthworm feces): Means feces-clay of earthworms. But it is allowable to take it from the top, without destroying the natural ground.
965.Kasīti kasitaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha naṅgalena uddhaṭamattikākasinaṅgalamattikā. ‘‘Acchinnā’’tiiminā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ katvā āyataṃ hutvā ṭhitamattikāpaṭalampi ajātapathavī siyāti āsaṅkānivattanatthamāha‘‘bhūmisambandhā’’ti.Sāti kasinaṅgalamattikā.
965.Kasī (plowed): A plowed place; there, clay upturned by a plow is kasinaṅgalamattikā (plow clay). By "Acchinnā" (uninterrupted), to avert the concern that a stretch of clay made into fragments and lying lengthwise might be Ajāta Pathavī, he says "bhūmisambandhā" (connected to the ground). Sā (that): That plow clay.
966.Senāsananti ettha ‘‘purāṇa’’nti pāṭhaseso gahetabbo. Ovaṭṭhaṃ cātumāsato uddhaṃ na vikopayeti yojanā.
966.Senāsana (lodging): Here, the remainder of the reading "purāṇa" (old) should be taken. One should not destroy it after it has been covered for more than four months is the connection.
967.Tatotiovaṭṭhadivasato paṭṭhāya cātumāsātikkantagehato.‘‘Gopānasi’’nti iminā gopānasimatthake ṭhitaupacikāpaṃsumhi bhijjantepi anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti.‘‘Bhitti’’nti iminā tadekadesaṃ bhittipādādidārumāha. Idampi bhittimattikaṃ upacikāmattikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.‘‘Thambha’’nti idampi taṃsambandhapākārabhūmimattikāupacikādipaṃsuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Padarattharanti atthatapadaraṃ. Idampi padarānaṃ upari mattikāupacikāpaṃsuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.‘‘Gopānasi’’ntiādīhi padehi ‘‘gaṇhissāmī’’ti paccekaṃ yojanīyaṃ.‘‘Gaṇhissāmī’’ti iminā vikopanādhippāyābhāvaṃ dīpeti.
967.Tatoti (from there): From the house that has exceeded four months, starting from the day it was covered. "Gopānasi" (eaves): By this, it shows that even when the termite-dust standing on the top of the eaves is broken, there is no offense. "Bhitti" (wall): By this, it means a part of it, the wood of the base of the wall etc. This too is said referring to the wall-clay, termite-clay. "Thambha" (pillar): This too is said referring to the dust of termite etc. on the ground of the wall related to that pillar. Padaratthara (covering of a crack): The covering of a cracked floor. This too is said referring to the clay-termite-dust on top of the cracks. "Gopānasi" (eaves) etc. should be connected one by one with the words "gaṇhissāmī" (I will take). By "Gaṇhissāmī" (I will take), it shows that there is no intention to destroy.
968.Gaṇhantassāti ettha anādare sāmivacanaṃ, ‘‘suddhacittenā’’ti pāṭhaseso.Iṭṭhakāti chadaniṭṭhakā.Ādi-saddena pāsāṇasamuddapheṇādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Patatīti suddhacittena gaṇhante sace mattikā chijjitvā patati, anāpattīti attho.Mattikanti bhittiyaṃ, chadane ca cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhamattikaṃ, anovaṭṭhaṃ ce, gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace yā yā atintā, taṃ taṃ gaṇhāti, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 86). Yadi gaṇhati, āpatti siyāti yojanā.
968.Gaṇhantassā (for one who is taking): Here, it is a word of ownership without regard; the remainder of the reading is "suddhacittena" (with a pure mind). Iṭṭhakā (bricks): Roof tiles. The word ādi (etc.) includes stone, sea foam, etc. Patatī (falls): If the clay breaks and falls while taking with a pure mind, there is no offense, is the meaning. Mattika (clay): Clay on the wall and roof that has been covered for more than four months, and if it has not been covered, it is allowable to take it. As the Commentary says, "If it is not wet, then one may take it, there is no offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 86). If one takes it, there would be an offense, is the connection.
969.Atintoti vassodakena atinto, iminā vinicchitabbavatthuṃ dasseti. Tassa antogehe ca bahi ca sambhavato antogehe ṭhitassa tāva vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘antogehe sace siyā’’ti. Vassodakena tintātintesu dvīsu mattikāpuñjesu atintaṃ tāva dassetumāha‘‘anovaṭṭho cā’’ti.
969.Atinto (unwet): Unwet by rainwater; by this, he shows the object to be decided. Since it is possible both inside and outside the house, to show the decision first for that which is standing inside the house, he says "antogehe sace siyā" (if it is inside the house). To show the unwet of the two heaps of clay, wet and unwet by rainwater, he says first "anovaṭṭho cā" (and unwet).
970.Vassodakena tinte vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vuṭṭhe puna cā’’tiādi.‘‘Vuṭṭhe’’ti iminā ‘‘mattikāpuñjo’’ti padaṃ bhummavasena vipariṇāmetvā vuṭṭhe mattikāpuñjeti yojetabbaṃ, ‘‘ekadivasampī’’ti seso,gehasminti ettha ‘‘ṭhite’’ti vattabbaṃ, gehasmiṃ ṭhite mattikāpuñje vassodakena ekadivasampi tinteti vuttaṃ hoti. Vakkhamānanayena aññattha paharitvā uṭṭhitena tena atemitvā ujukaṃ patitehi vassaphusitehi tinteti gahetabbaṃ. Sace sabbo tinto hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Mattikāpuñjo’’ti iminā sambandho.
970.To show the decision on that which is wet by rainwater, he says "vuṭṭhe puna cā" (and again when it has rained) etc. "Vuṭṭhe" (when it has rained): By this, transforming the word "mattikāpuñjo" (heap of clay) according to the ground, it should be connected, vuṭṭhe mattikāpuñje (when the heap of clay has rained); "ekadivasampī" (even for one day) is the remainder; it is said that the heap of clay standing gehasmiṃ (in the house) has been wetted by rainwater even for one day. According to the manner that will be stated, it should be taken that it is wetted by rain drizzles falling directly, having struck elsewhere and risen up and wetted it. If all of it is wet, is the connection. It is related to the word "mattikāpuñjo" (heap of clay).
971.‘‘Sabbo’’ti iminā visesanena byavacchinnaṃ ekadesatinte vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yattaka’’ntiādi.Tu-saddo imameva visesaṃ joteti.Yattakanti heṭṭhā anotaritvā matthakato, pariyantakato ca yattakappamāṇaṃ.Tatthāti mattikāpuñje.‘‘Akappiya’’nti etassa ‘‘cātumāsaccayenā’’ti anuvattati.‘‘Atintaṃ…pe… kappiya’’nti iminā akappiyaṭṭhānaṃ pariharitvā vā kappiyakārakehi kappiyavacanena harāpetvā vā atintaṃ ṭhānaṃ yathākāmaṃ vaḷañjetabbanti ayamattho dassito hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kappiyakārakehī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 86).
971.With the specification "sabbo," to show the decision concerning a part excluded, he says, "yattaka," and so on. The word "tu" indicates this very specification. "Yattaka" means as much as is measured from the top without digging down, and from the boundary. "Tattha" means in a pile of clay. "Akappiya": the phrase "after four months" follows. "Atintaṃ…pe… kappiya": this shows that, having avoided an akappiya place or having had it removed by those who make things kappiya with kappiya words, one can move the atinta place as one pleases. This meaning is shown, as said in the commentary: "by those who make things kappiya," and so on (pāci. aṭṭha. 86).
972.Vārināti ujukaṃ ākāsato patitavassodakena. Aññattha paharitvā tattha patitvā temite vaṭṭati.Somattikāpuñjo.Tato paranti ekābaddhakālato uttariṃsomattikāpuñjo vārinā temito bhūmiyā ekābaddho ce hoti, tato paraṃ sā jātā pathavī eva, kopetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
972."Vārinā": with rainwater falling directly from the sky. It is allowable if it strikes elsewhere and falls there, wetting it. "So" means that pile of clay. "Tato paraṃ": after that single binding time, so that pile of clay, if wetted by water and bound to the earth as one, after that, it becomes earth itself, it is not allowable to disturb it; such is the connection.
973.‘‘Ovaṭṭho’’ti iminā anovaṭṭhapākāro kappiyoti byatirekavasena dasseti.‘‘Mattikāmayo’’ti visesanena iṭṭhakapākārādiṃ byavacchindati. Tassa pana kappiyabhāvaṃ vakkhati ‘‘sace iṭṭhakapākāro’’tiādinā.‘‘Cātumāsaccaye’’ti iminā tato anto vikopanīyabhāvaṃ dasseti.
973.With "ovaṭṭho," he shows by way of exception that a wall that is not plastered is kappiya. With the specification "mattikāmayo," he excludes brick walls, etc. But he will state its being kappiya with "sace iṭṭhakapākāro," and so on. With "cātumāsaccaye," he shows that it is to be disturbed before that.
974.Tatthāti ovaṭṭhe mattikapākāre.Aghaṃsantovāti pākāramattikaṃ akopento.Mattaso chupitvāti pamāṇato mudukaṃ katvā hatthatalaṃ ṭhapetvā.Allahatthenāti udakatintena hatthatalena. Hatthekadesohatthonāma.
974."Tattha": in that plastered clay wall. "Aghaṃsantovā": not disturbing the clay of the wall. "Mattaso chupitvā": having made it soft to the extent of measurement, placing the palm of the hand. "Allahatthenā": with a wet palm. A part of the hand is called "hattho."
975.Yebhuyyakathaleṭhāneti pubbe vuttanayena yassā tīsu bhāgesu dve bhāgā kathalā honti, tādise kappiyapathaviṭṭhāne.
975.Yebhuyyakathale ṭhāne: in a place with kappiya earth of the kind previously stated, where two parts out of three parts are hard.
976.Abbhokāseti upalakkhaṇattā antogehepi thambhaṃ cāletvā jātapathaviṃ vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvīsupi ṭhānesu suddhacittena niddosabhāvaṃ yathāvuttena ‘‘thambhaṃ vā padarattharaṃ. Gaṇhissāmī’ti saññāya, gahetuṃ pana vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā nayenāha.Pathavinti akappiyapathaviṃ.
976."Abbhokāse": by implication, it should be understood that even indoors, it is not allowable to disturb the earth that has arisen by moving a pillar. In both places, the faultless state with a pure mind is stated in the way previously said: "thambhaṃ vā padarattharaṃ. Gaṇhissāmī'ti saññāya, gahetuṃ pana vaṭṭatī," in this way. "Pathaviṃ": the akappiya earth.
977.Ujumuddharato na dosoti yojanā.
977.There is no fault in lifting it straight up; such is the connection.
978.Uccāletvāti ukkhipitvā cāletvā parivattetvā.Pavaṭṭatīti pavaṭṭetvā pavaṭṭetvā netīti attho.Suddhacittassāti ‘‘bhūmi bhijjatī’’ti asallakkhetvā ‘‘pāsāṇaṃ pavaṭṭetvā pavaṭṭetvā harissāmī’’ti suddhacittavato.
978."Uccāletvā": having lifted, moved, and turned it over. "Pavaṭṭatī": the meaning is, having rolled it along, he takes it away. "Suddhacittassā": for one with a pure mind, not considering "bhūmi bhijjatī," thinking, "I will roll the stone along and take it away."
979.Bhūmiyaṃ dārūni phālentānampi bhūmiyaṃ sākhādīni kaḍḍhato cāti yojanā.
979.Also for those splitting wood on the ground and those pulling branches, etc., on the ground; such is the connection.
980.Kaṇṭakanti rukkhakaṇṭakaṃ, macchakaṇṭakañca.Sūcināma ayomayadantamayatambamayakaṭṭhamayādisūcīnaṃ aññatarā.Aṭṭhiṃ vāti gomahiṃsādīnaṃ aṭṭhiṃ vā.Hīraṃ vāti nāḷikerādihīraṃ vā.Ākoṭetunti yathā ekakoṭi bhūmiṃ pavisati, tathā tāḷetuṃ.Pavesetunti bhūmiṃ gamayituṃ.
980."Kaṇṭakaṃ": a tree thorn and a fish bone. "Sūci" means any one of needles made of iron, ivory, copper, wood, etc. "Aṭṭhiṃ vā": or the bone of a cow, buffalo, etc. "Hīraṃ vā": or the core of a coconut, etc. "Ākoṭetuṃ": to strike so that one end enters the ground. "Pavesetuṃ": to make it go into the ground.
981.Passāvaṃmuttaṃ.Medaninti ettha akappiyapathavimāha.Bhindissāmīti ettha ‘‘evaṃ cintetvā’’ti seso.
981."Passāvaṃ": urine. "Medaniṃ": here he means the akappiya earth. "Bhindissāmī": here the rest is "evaṃ cintetvā."
982.Karontassāti suddhacittena passāvaṃ karontassātiyojetabbaṃ.‘‘Sammajjato’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sammajjantenā’’ti gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘sammajjaniyā’’ti seso, anantaraṃ medanīpadaṃ upayogavasena ‘‘medani’’nti gahetabbaṃ,‘‘visama’’nti seso,‘‘samaṃ kātu’’nti iminā yojetabbaṃ, sammajjantena uccaṭṭhānaṃ madditvā, āvāṭaṭṭhānaṃ pavesetvā samaṃ kātuṃ sammajjaniyā ghaṃsetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘visamaṃ bhūmiṃ samaṃ karissāmīti sammajjaniyā ghaṃsitumpi na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 86).
982."Karontassā": it should be connected as: for one urinating with a pure mind. "Sammajjato": this should be taken as "sammajjantenā," the rest is "sammajjaniyā," the word medanī is to be taken as "medani" in accordance with usage, the rest is "visamaṃ," it should be connected with "samaṃ kātuṃ," the meaning is that it is not allowable for one sweeping to rub with a broom to make it even by pressing down a high place and inserting it into a hollow place. As said in the commentary: "it is not allowable to rub with a broom thinking, 'I will level the uneven ground'" (pāci. aṭṭha. 86).
983.Pādaṅguṭṭhena vāti ettha samuccayatthenavā-saddenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ ‘‘kattarayaṭṭhiyā bhūmiṃ koṭṭentī’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Likhitumpīti rājiṃ kātumpi bhūmiṃ bhindantenāti yojanā.Pādehīti pādatalehi.
983."Pādaṅguṭṭhena vā": here the "vā"-word is in the sense of a collection, it includes "kattarayaṭṭhiyā bhūmiṃ koṭṭentī," stated in the commentary. "Likhitumpī": it also means to make a line by one who is disturbing the ground; such is the connection. "Pādehī": with the soles of the feet.
985.Bhūminti akappiyabhūmiṃ.Dahati dahāpetīti ettha ‘‘yo’’ti ca ‘‘tassā’’ti ca sambandhavasena labbhati.Pattaṃ dahantassāti chaviyā thirabhāvatthaṃ dhūmaṃ gāhāpetvā tiṇukkādīhi pattaṃ gaṇhantassa.
985."Bhūmiṃ": the akappiya ground. "Dahati dahāpetī": here "yo" and "tassā" are obtained by way of relation. "Pattaṃ dahantassā": for one holding a leaf with a grass torch, etc., causing smoke to be absorbed for the sake of firmness of the skin.
986.Tattakānevāti ṭhānappamāṇāneva. Idhāpi ‘‘yo’’ti ca ‘‘tassā’’ti ca sāmatthiyā labbhati.
986."Tattakānevā": just the size of the place. Here too, "yo" and "tassā" are obtained by ability.
987.Bhūmiyanti akappiyabhūmiyaṃ. Pattaṃ pacīyati etthātipattapacanaṃ,kapālaṃ, tasmiṃ kapāle.
987."Bhūmiyaṃ": in the akappiya ground. Pattaṃ pacīyati etthāti pattapacanaṃ, a potsherd; in that potsherd.
988.Soaggitānidārūni dahanto gantvāceekaṃsena bhūmiṃ dahati, tasmā dārūnaṃ upari aggiṃ ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
988.So aggi, tāni dārūni dahanto gantvā ce dahati ekaṃsena bhūmiṃ dahati, tasmā dārūnaṃ upari aggiṃ ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
989.Iṭṭhakā āvapīyanti paccanti etthātiiṭṭhakāvāpo,so evaiṭṭhakāvāpako,iṭṭhakāpacanaṭṭhānaṃ.Ādi-saddena kumbhakārāvāpādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
989.Iṭṭhakā āvapīyanti paccanti etthāti iṭṭhakāvāpo, so eva iṭṭhakāvāpako, the place where bricks are baked. The ādi-word includes a potter's kiln, etc.
990.Upādīyatītiupādānaṃ,indhanaṃ, na upādānaṃ anupādānaṃ, indhanato aññaṃ, tatoanupādānatoti attho.Khāṇuketi matakhāṇuke ca sukkharukkhe ca bhūmigataṃ adatvā ‘‘nibbāpessāmī’’ti aggidānaṃ vaṭṭati. Pacchā ussāhe katepi na nibbāyati, na dosoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana bhūmiṃ appattamevā’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 87).
990.Upādīyatīti upādānaṃ, fuel; na upādānaṃ anupādānaṃ, other than fuel; therefore, anupādānatoti, such is the meaning. "Khāṇuke": giving fire to a dead stump and a dry tree in the ground without giving permission, thinking, "I will extinguish it," is allowable. Even if effort is made afterward, if it does not go out, there is no fault. As said in the commentary: "sace pana bhūmiṃ appattamevā," and so on (pāci. aṭṭha. 87).
991.Tiṇukkanti tiṇena baddhaukkaṃ.Tiṇukkanti upalakkhaṇaṃ. Nāḷikerapaṇṇādīhi baddhāpi saṅgayhanti.
991."Tiṇukkaṃ": a torch tied with grass. "Tiṇukkaṃ" is an example. Those tied with coconut leaves, etc., are also included.
992.Tassaaggissa patitaṭṭhāne indhanaṃ datvā puna taṃ aggiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃrutaṃkathitanti yojanā.
992.It is said that in the Mahāpaccariya rutaṃ, it is allowable to make that fire again by giving fuel to the place where tassa aggi has fallen.
993.‘‘Tassa apathaviya’’nti padacchedo.Vimatissubhayatthāpīti pathaviapathavidvayepi vematikassa. Tattha jātāpathavī,itarāapathavī.
993.The word division is "tassa apathaviya." "Vimatissubhayatthāpī": for one who is doubtful about both earth and not-earth. There, that which arises is pathavī, the other is apathavī.
994.Imanti āvāṭaṃ, mattikaṃ, paṃsuṃ vā.
994."Imaṃ": this means a hole, clay, or dust.
Pathavīkhaṇanakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Description of the Discourse on Digging the Earth.
Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.
The First Chapter on False Speech.
995.Bhavantassāti jāyantassa, vaḍḍhamānassa ca.Bhūtassāti jātassa, vaḍḍhitassa cāti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhavanti ahuvuñcāti bhūtā, jāyanti vaḍḍhanti, jātā vaḍḍhitā cā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 90). Ettha ca‘‘bhavantī’’ti iminā viruḷhamūle nīlabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā vaḍḍhamānake taruṇagacche dasseti.‘‘Ahuvu’’nti iminā pana vaḍḍhitvā ṭhite mahante rukkhagacchādike dasseti.‘‘Bhavantī’’ti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘jayanti vaḍḍhantī’’ti,‘‘ahuvu’’nti imassa ‘‘jātā vaḍḍhitā’’ti. Evaṃ bhūta-saddo paccuppannātītavisayoti dasseti. ‘‘Bhavantassa bhūtassā’’ti iminā padadvayena‘‘bhūtagāmassā’’ti padassa tulyādhikaraṇatādassanena gāma-saddassa diṭṭhigatavanantādisaddānaṃ diṭṭhivanādisaddatthe viya bhūtasaddatthe vuttipakkhamāha. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 90) ‘‘bhūtā eva vā gāmo bhūtagāmo, patiṭṭhitaharitatiṇarukkhādīnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Bhūtānaṃ devatānaṃ gāmo nivāsoti vābhūtagāmo. Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā hi haritabhāvamāpannā tiṇarukkhagacchādayo devatāhi parigayhantīti. Jāyantassa vaḍḍhantassa vā sampattavuddhimariyādassa vā rukkhādinoti attho.
995."Bhavantassā": for that which is coming into being and growing. "Bhūtassā": for that which has come into being and grown; such is the meaning. As said in the commentary: "'bhavanti ahuvuñcāti bhūtā, jāyanti vaḍḍhanti, jātā vaḍḍhitā cā'ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 90). And here, with 'bhavantī,' he shows a young tree that has developed roots, has become blue, and is growing. But with 'ahuvuṃ,' he shows a large tree, etc., that has grown and stands firm. 'Bhavantī' is explained as 'jayanti vaḍḍhantī,' 'ahuvuṃ' is 'jātā vaḍḍhitā.' Thus, he shows that the word bhūta is concerned with the present and the past. With the two words 'bhavantassa bhūtassā,' by showing the co-ordination of the word 'bhūtagāmassā,' he states the possibility of the word-usage in the sense of bhūta, like the words diṭṭhi, vana, etc., in the sense of diṭṭhivana, etc., for the words gāma. As said in the commentary(pāci. aṭṭha. 90): 'bhūtā eva vā gāmo bhūtagāmo, patiṭṭhitaharitatiṇarukkhādīnametaṃ adhivacana.' Or bhūtagāmo means a village, a dwelling, of beings. Because grasses, trees, and shrubs that have taken on a green color by standing on the earth are taken up by beings. The meaning is a tree, etc., that is coming into being and growing or that has reached its full growth."
Pātabyatānimittanti ettha pātabyabhāvopātabyatā,‘‘chedanabhedanādīhi yathāruci paribhuñjitabbatāti attho’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanato pātabyatā-saddassa paribhuñjitabbatāti attho veditabbo, sā nimittaṃ hetu yassa pācittiyassa taṃ pātabyatānimittaṃ. Rukkhādīnaṃ chedanaphālanādivasena vikopanīyatāsaṅkhātapātabyatānimittaṃ paribhuñjitabbatāhetu pācittiyaṃudīritaṃvuttanti attho.
Pātabyatānimittaṃ: here pātabyabhāvo is pātabyatā, "the meaning is that it should be used according to one's desire by cutting, breaking, etc.," according to the commentary, the meaning of the word pātabyatā should be understood as "should be used," that is the nimitta, the cause, of which the pācittiya, that is pātabyatānimittaṃ. The meaning is that the pācittiya has been udīritaṃ stated because of the cause of being used, which is the cause of being disturbed, known as pātabyatā, by cutting, splitting, etc., of trees, etc.
996-7.Soti bhūtagāmo.Tilabījādikoti tilabījamettha sukhumapaṇṇasevālādiko.Ādi-saddena ca tādisā itarā sevālajāti gahitā. ‘‘Upari khuddānukhuddakapaṇṇaṅkuro, heṭṭhā khuddānukhuddakamūlaṅkuro sevālo tilabījaṃ nāmā’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttanti.Vikopentassa taṃ sabbanti bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāya udake jāyamānakasevālādiṃ bhūmiyā uppāṭanacchedanavasena jale eva patiṭṭhitaṃ sukhumapaṇṇanīlikādiṃ udakato uddharaṇacchedanavasena taṃ sabbaṃ sevālaṃ vikopentassāti attho.
996-7."So" means bhūtagāmo. "Tilabījādiko": here tilabīja means a fine leaf, moss, etc. The ādi-word includes other kinds of moss of that kind. "Upari khuddānukhuddakapaṇṇaṅkuro, heṭṭhā khuddānukhuddakamūlaṅkuro sevālo tilabījaṃ nāmā," as said in the gaṇṭhipada."Vikopentassa taṃ sabbaṃ": the meaning is, for one who is disturbing all that moss, etc., which arises in the water by standing on the earth, by uprooting and cutting it from the earth, and for one who is disturbing the fine leaves, nīlika, etc., which stand only in the water, by lifting and cutting them from the water.
998.Hatthenaviyūhitvāti jalato amocetvā hatthena dūrato apanetvā.‘‘Hotī’’tiādi tassa hetusandassanatthaṃ.Sakalaṃanavasesaṃ sabbaṃ jalaṃ tassa yasmā ṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmāti attho.
998."Hatthena viyūhitvā": having removed it from a distance with the hand without taking it out of the water. "Hotī" and so on is for showing the reason for that. "Sakalaṃ" means all the water without remainder is a place for it; such is the meaning.
999.Ceccāti jānanto.Taṃsevālajātikaṃ jalā uddharituṃ udakena vinā bhikkhussa na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Ṭhānasaṅkamanañhi tanti hetudassanaṃ.Taṃtathākaraṇaṃ yasmā ṭhānasaṅkamanaṃ ṭhānato cāvanaṃ, tasmā taṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
999."Ceccā": knowing. It is not allowable for a bhikkhu to lift taṃ that kind of moss from the water without water; such is the connection. "Ṭhānasaṅkamanañhi taṃ" is a showing of the reason. "Taṃ" that doing so is ṭhānasaṅkamana, moving from its place; therefore, that is not allowable; such is the connection.
1000.Yathāvuttassa byatirekaṃ dassetumāha‘‘udakenā’’tiādi. Tatthaudakenāti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Taṃsevālajātikaṃ.Vārisūti ettha vāsaṃ vārayantīti vārī, tesu.
1000.To show an exception to what was previously stated, he says "udakenā" and so on. There, "udakenā" is an instrumental word with the hand. "Taṃ" that kind of moss. "Vārisū": here, those that ward off dwelling are vārī; in those.
1001.Jale vallitiṇādīnīti jalamatthake valliñca jāyamānakaravallitiṇādīni ca.Uddharantassāti bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ bhūmito, udake patiṭṭhitaṃ udakato ca uddharantassa. Tattha antapakkhaṃ dassetumāha‘‘toyato’’ti.Vikopentassāti khaṇḍanādivasena kopentassa.Tatthāti tasmiṃ udake, eva-kāro luttaniddiṭṭho ‘‘tatthevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 92)aṭṭhakathāvacanato.
1001."Jale vallitiṇādīni": also creepers and grasses, etc., that arise on the surface of the water. "Uddharantassā": for one who is lifting up that which stands on the earth from the earth, and that which stands in the water from the water. There, to show the end case, he says "toyato." "Vikopentassā": for one who is disturbing by breaking, etc. "Tatthā": in that water; the eva-kāra is understood by ellipsis from the commentary statement, "tatthevā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 92).
1002.Etthāti udake eva.Vikopentassāti kappiyaṃ akārāpetvā chedanādiṃ karontassa.Tānīti tathā parehi uppāṭitattā bhūtagāmabhāvato muttāni vallitiṇādīni.Bījagāmenāti mūlabījagāmādivasena.
1002."Etthā": in the water itself. "Vikopentassā": for one who is doing cutting, etc., without having it made kappiya. "Tānī": those creepers and grasses, etc., having been uprooted by others, are freed from the state of being bhūtagāma. "Bījagāmenā": by way of mūlabījagāma, etc.
1003.Evaṃ udakaṭṭhe saṅkhepato vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni itaratrāpi vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘thalaṭṭhe’’tiādi.Haritakhāṇukoti ettha ‘‘yo’’ti seso. ‘‘Tassā’’ti iminā sambandho, kakudhakarañjādīnaṃ chinnāvasiṭṭhakhāṇukoti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Bhūtagāmena saṅgaho’’ti iminā taṃvikopane pācittiyabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Evamuparipi.
1003.Thus, having shown the decision concisely concerning that which stands in the water, now to show the decision concerning that which is elsewhere, he says "thalaṭṭhe" and so on. "Haritakhāṇuko": here the rest is "yo." The connection is with "tassā"; what is said is a stump left over from cutting down kakudha, karañja, etc. With "bhūtagāmena saṅgaho," he indicates that there is a pācittiya in disturbing it. And so above.
1004.Nāḷikerādikānaṃkhāṇūti etthāpi ‘‘upariharito’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.‘‘Bījagāmena saṅgaho’’ti iminā dukkaṭavatthutamāha. Evamuparipi. Kiñcāpi hi tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ khāṇu uddhaṃ avaḍḍhanako bhūtagāmassa kāraṇaṃ na hoti, tathāpi bhūtagāmasaṅkhātanibbattapaṇṇamūlabījato sambhūtattā bhūtagāmato uppanno nāma hotīti bījagāmena saṅgahaṃ gacchati.
1004."Nāḷikerādikānaṃ khāṇū": here too, "upariharito" is obtained by ability. With "bījagāmena saṅgaho," he means a dukkata offense. And so above. Although the stump of tāla, nāḷikera, etc., does not cause bhūtagāma by growing upwards, nevertheless, because it has arisen from the leaf, root, and seed that produce bhūtagāma, it is said to have arisen from bhūtagāma and therefore goes to the inclusion of bījagāma.
1005.Tathāpakāsitoti ‘‘bījagāmo’’ti vutto.
1005."Tathāpakāsito": stated as "bījagāmo."
1006.Phalitā kadalī yāva nīlapaṇṇā, tāva sā ca bhūtagāmoti pakāsitāti yojanā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kadalī pana phalitā yāva nīlapaṇṇā, tāva bhūtagāmeneva saṅgahitā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 92).Naḷanti khuddakaveḷu.Veḷūti mahāveḷu.Tiṇādīnantiādi-saddena sassādayo gahitā.
1006.The banana that has fruited is said to be bhūtagāma as long as it has blue leaves; such is the connection. As said in the commentary: "kadalī pana phalitā yāva nīlapaṇṇā, tāva bhūtagāmeneva saṅgahitā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 92). "Naḷaṃ": small bamboo. "Veḷū": large bamboo. "Tiṇādīnaṃ": the ādi-word includes grains, etc.
1007.Yo ayaṃ pana veḷu aggato paṭṭhāya yadā sussati, tadā so bījagāmena saṅgahito nāma hotīti yojanā.Bījagāmenāti phaḷubījagāmena. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘katarabījagāmena? Phaḷubījagāmenā’’ti.
1007. Moreover, the explanation is that when this bamboo withers from the top, it is considered included in bījagāma. Bījagāmena: with phaḷubījagāma. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "With which bījagāma? With phaḷubījagāma."
1008.Indasālosallakī.Ādi-saddena sobhañjanādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Tu-saddenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘kiñcāpi rāsikatadaṇḍakehi ratanappamāṇāpi sākhā nikkhamantī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 92) vuttavisesaṃ joteti. Chinditvā ṭhapitadaṇḍakesu ratanamattāsupi sākhāsu uṭṭhitāsu bhūtagāmaṃ ahutvā bījagāmameva hoti aviruḷhamūlakattāti ayaṃ vinicchayo vinayaññunā ñāto kukkuccakānamupakārāya hotīti āha‘‘viññeyyo vinayaññunā’’ti. Imamevatthaṃ ‘‘mūlamattepi vā’’tiādinā vakkhati.
1008.Indasālo is a sallakī tree. The term Ādi includes sobhañjana and others. The word Tu indicates a special case mentioned in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Even if branches of ratana measure emerge from cuttings as thick as one’s wrist" (pāci. aṭṭha. 92). This judgment is for the benefit of those who are doubtful, that even if shoots arise from the stalks that have been cut and placed, even those that are the size of jewels, it is still considered bījagāma and not bhūtagāma because the roots have not yet spread. Therefore, he said, "viññeyyo vinayaññunā" – "it should be understood by one who knows the Vinaya". He will explain this very meaning with "mūlamattepi vā," and so on.
1009.Maṇḍapādīnamatthāyāti maṇḍapavatipākārādīnamatthāya.Sace te nikkhaṇantīti yadi te indasālādidaṇḍake bhūmiyaṃ nikhaṇanti.Niggate mūlapaṇṇasminti tathā nikhātadaṇḍato mūle ca paṇṇe ca jāte.Bhūtagāmena saṅgahoti ettha ‘‘tesa’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati, ‘‘viññeyyo’’ti adhikāro.
1009.Maṇḍapādīnamatthāyā: for the purpose of maṇḍapa, vati, pākāra, etc. Sace te nikkhaṇantī: if they plant those indasāla, etc. cuttings in the ground. Niggate mūlapaṇṇasmi: when roots and leaves have grown from such planted cuttings. Bhūtagāmena saṅgaho: Here, "tesa" is obtained by implication and "viññeyyo" is the authority.
1010.Niggatepīti tatiyenapi-saddena atikhuddakataṃ sūceti.
1010.Niggatepī: the third pi indicates extreme smallness.
1011.Sakandā tālaṭṭhīti sakandatālabījaṃ.Pattavaṭṭīti sūcisaṇṭhānā aṅkurapattavaṭṭi. Na ca bījagāmoti vuccatīti yojanā. ‘‘Bhūtagāmo’’ti idaṃ yathāvuttassa byatirekavasena dasseti.
1011.Sakandā tālaṭṭhī: means germinating palmyra seeds. Pattavaṭṭī: means sprout-leaf buds in the shape of a needle. And it should not be called bījagāma. "Bhūtagāmo" indicates this in contrast to what was previously stated.
1012.Nāḷikeratacanti nāḷikeraphalachalliṃ.Dantasūcīvāti dantamayasūci iva.Sopīti nāḷikeropi. Rukkhatacasaddānaṃ phalesu vattamānakālesupi taṃliṅgatā na virujjhatīti‘‘so’’ti āhāti viññāyati.
1012.Nāḷikerataca: means the husk of a coconut. Dantasūcīvā: like an ivory needle. Sopī: even the coconut. It is understood that the gender of the words for tree bark does not change even when referring to fruits in the present tense, therefore, he said "so".
1013.Migasiṅgasamānāyāti haritavisāṇasadisāya.Pattavaṭṭiyāti aṅkurapattavaṭṭiyā.Satiyāti vijjamānāya.Bhūtagāmoti vuccatīti amūlakabhūtagāmoti vuccati. Idaṃ nāḷikerassa āveṇikaṃ katvā vuttaṃ.
1013.Migasiṅgasamānāyā: like a fresh horn. Pattavaṭṭiyā: with sprout-leaf buds. Satiyā: while existing. Bhūtagāmoti vuccatī: it is called amūlakabhūtagāma. This is stated specifically with reference to coconuts.
Catubhāṇavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Four-Bhāṇavāra Commentary is complete.
1015-6.Ambaṭṭhīti ambabījaṃ.Jambuṭṭhīti jambubījaṃ.Ādi-saddena madhukapanasādibījānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Vandākāti rukkhādanī.Aññaṃ vātibhaṇḍakadalimanorahaṃ vā. Assāti vandākādino.Amūlavallīti evaṃnāmikā valli.
1015-6.Ambaṭṭhī: mango seed. Jambuṭṭhī: rose-apple seed. The term Ādi includes the seeds of madhuka, jackfruit, and so on. Vandākā: tree parasite. Aññaṃ vā: or bhaṇḍakadalimanorahaṃ. Assā: of vandākā, etc. Amūlavallī: a creeper of such a name.
1017.So sevāloti yojanā.
1017. That is algae, is the connection.
1018.Ghaṃsitvāti yena kenaci ghaṃsitvā.Taṃsevālaṃ.Tasmāti tasmā pākārā.
1018.Ghaṃsitvā: having rubbed it with something. Taṃ: that algae. Tasmā: from that wall.
1019.Sevāleapanīte.Antoti pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ antokucchimhi. Kaṇṇakaṃ abbohāranti yojanā. Pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ bahi sevālo udake aṭṭhitattā, bījagāmānulomattā ca dukkaṭavatthūti vadanti. Kaṇṇakaṃ nīlavaṇṇampi abbohārikameva.
1019.Sevāle apanīte: when the algae has been removed. Anto: inside, in the inner cavity of water pots, etc. The connection is to disregard the kaṇṇaka. Because algae on the outside of water pots, etc., adheres to water and is in accordance with bījagāma, they say it is a dukkata offense. Even blue-colored kaṇṇaka is to be disregarded.
1020.Pāsāṇadaddūti manussasarīre rogākārena pāsāṇe jāyamānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Sevālanti pāsāṇasevālaṃ.Seleyyakānāma silāya sambhūtā ekā sugandhajāti.Apattānīti paṇṇarahitāni.
1020.Pāsāṇadaddū: is a term for what grows on rocks in the form of a disease on the human body. Sevāla: rock algae. Seleyyakā: is the name of a fragrant species that grows on stone. Apattānī: without leaves.
1021.Pupphitanti vikasitaṃ.Taṃahicchattaṃ.Makulanti avikasitaṃ.
1021.Pupphita: blossomed. Taṃ: that mushroom. Makula: unblossomed.
1022.Allasmiṃ rukkhe tacaṃ vikopetvā yathā gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati, tathā pappaṭikampi niyyāsampi vikopetvā gahetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā, pācittiyamevāti adhippāyo.Pappaṭikampīti allatacamatthake sukkhatacapaṭalampi.‘‘Allasmi’’nti iminā byatirekena matarukkhe dosābhāvaṃ dīpeti.‘‘Tacaṃ vikopetvā’’ti vacanato rukkhatacampi pappaṭikampi sālakapitthādiniyyāsampi rukkhe allatacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
1022.Just as it is not proper to take bark by cutting into a living tree, similarly, it is not proper to take pappaṭika and niyyāsa by cutting into it; the implication is that it is a pācittiya offense. Pappaṭikampī: even the layer of dry bark on top of fresh bark. The absence of offense in a dead tree is indicated by the phrase "Allasmi". From the statement "Tacaṃ vikopetvā", it is allowable to take tree bark and pappaṭika, and the sap of sālakapittha, etc., by cutting them off from the top without cutting into the fresh bark of the tree.
1023.Akkharacchindanārahesu nuhikadaliādīsu rukkhesu, tatthajātesu tālapaṇṇādikesu vā akkharaṃ likhato pācittiyamudīrayeti yojanā.‘‘Tatthajātesū’’ti iminā rukkhato apanītapaṇṇesu likhituṃ vaṭṭatīti byatirekato dīpeti.
1023.The meaning conveyed is that it is a pācittiya offense to write letters on trees like nuhikadali, etc., that are suitable for cutting letters, or on palmyra leaves, etc., that grow there. "Tatthajātesū" indicates by contrast that it is permissible to write on leaves removed from the tree.
1024.‘‘Pakkameva vā’’ti visuṃ vacanato‘‘phalaṃ vā’’ti iminā apakkaṃ phalaṃ gahitaṃ.
1024."Pakkameva vā": By separately stating "phalaṃ vā," unripe fruit is included.
1025.Phaliniṃsākhanti khādanārahaphalavatiṃ jambusākhādikaṃ sākhaṃ.Gaṇhatoanupasampannassāti gahetabbaṃ.Sayaṃ khāditukāmo ceti tathā onamitvā sākhato ocinitvā dinnaphalaṃ sace sayaṃ khāditukāmo hoti.Evaṃ dātunti yathāvuttappakāraṃ nāmetvā dātuṃ.
1025.Phaliniṃsākha: a branch of a jambu tree, etc., bearing edible fruits. Gaṇhato: must be taken by one who is not fully ordained. Sayaṃ khāditukāmo ce: if he himself wants to eat the fruit given after bending the branch and picking the fruit from it. Evaṃ dātu: to give by bending it in the manner described.
1026.Paraṃ kañci ukkhipitvāti aññaṃ kañci anupasampannaṃ ukkhipitvā.Pupphāni ocinantesūti kusumāni lunantesu.Ayameva vinicchayoti sāmaññaniddesepi ettha attano nāmetvā dinnasākhāya pupphāni pānīyavāsatthāya na gahetabbāni. Anupasampannaṃ ukkhipitvā pupphāni ocināpetvā gahitapupphāni gahetabbānīti ayamettha viseso. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tehi pana pupphehi pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbaṃ. Pānīyavāsatthikena sāmaṇeraṃ ukkhipitvā ocināpetabbānī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 92).
1026.Paraṃ kañci ukkhipitvā: having lifted up some other person who is not fully ordained. Pupphāni ocinantesū: while picking flowers. Ayameva vinicchayo: even with a general direction, flowers from a branch bent and given by oneself should not be taken for flavoring water or for washing. The distinction here is that flowers that have been picked by having a non-ordained person climb up and pick them can be taken. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "However, the water should not be flavored with those flowers. If one wants to flavor water, a novice should be lifted up and made to pick them" (pāci. aṭṭha. 92).
1027.‘‘Sākhā’’ti bhinditvā vā chinditvā vā mocitā vuccati.Sākhīnanti rukkhānaṃ.Tanti yathāvuttarukkhato mocitasākhaṃ. Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhati, tesaṃ sākhīnaṃtaṃsākhaṃ kappiyaṃ akārāpetvā vikopentassa dukkaṭanti yojanā.‘‘Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhatī’’ti vuttattā yesaṃ sākhā na ruhati, tesaṃ tassā kappiyakaraṇakiccaṃ natthīti vadanti.
1027."Sākhā" is said to be something that has been broken, cut, or detached. Sākhīna: of trees. Taṃ: that branch detached from the aforementioned tree. For those trees whose branches grow when replanted, there is a dukkata offense for one who fells taṃ that branch of Sākhīna without having it made allowable. Because it is said "Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhatī", they say that for those whose branches do not grow, there is no need to make it allowable.
1028.Allasiṅgiverādikesupītiādi-saddena vacalasuṇādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
1028.Allasiṅgiverādikesupī: The term ādi includes vācā, garlic, etc.
1029.Aniyāmato vaṭṭatevāti yojanā. Niyāmasarūpaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imaṃ rukkha’’ntiādivakkhamānattāaniyāmatoti sāmaññaniddese ‘‘ima’’nti niyāmavacanābhāvatoti gahetabbaṃ.
1029.It is allowable without restriction, is the connection. Because the nature of the restriction will be shown with "imaṃ rukkha," and so on, aniyāmato should be taken to mean that in a general statement, there is no restrictive word like "ima".
1032.Ucchukhaṇḍānanti pūraṇayoge sāmivacanaṃ, ucchukhaṇḍehīti vuttaṃ hoti.Sabbamevāti pacchiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ sabbaṃ khaṇḍaṃ.Kataṃ hotīti kataṃ kappiyaṃ hoti.Ekasmiṃ kappiye kateti pacchiyaṃ sabbakhaṇḍesu phusitvā ṭhitesu ekasmiṃ khaṇḍe kappiye kate. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ aggiparijitaṃ satthaparijitaṃ nakhaparijitaṃ abījaṃ nibbaṭṭabījaṃyeva pañcama’’nti (cūḷava. 250) iti vuttesu aggisatthanakhesu aññatarena tatta ayokhaṇḍena vā jalitagginā vā sūcimukhena vā nakhacchedanena vā satthakadhārāya vā manussasīhādīnaṃ uppāṭitānuppāṭitaapūtinakhena vā vijjhitvā vā chinditvā vā kappiyaṃ kātabbaṃ. Karontena ca anupasampannena bhikkhunā ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti vutteyeva ‘‘kappiya’’nti paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā aggiparijitādi kākabbanti gahetabbaṃ. Vakkhati ca ‘‘kappiyanti…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti. ‘‘Kappiya’’nti vacanaṃ pana yāya kāyaci vācāya vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Paṭhamaṃ aggiṃ nikkhipitvā nakhādīhi vā vijjhitvā vā chinditvā vā kappiyaṃ kātabbaṃ. Karontena ca taṃ anuddharitvāva ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā pacchā uddharituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti, ‘‘kappiya’’nti vattukāmo ‘‘kappa’’nti ce vadati, vaṭṭatīti keci.
1032.Ucchukhaṇḍāna: the genitive case is used in the sense of proximity, meaning with sugarcane pieces. Sabbamevā: all the pieces placed in the basket. Kataṃ hotī: it is considered allowable. Ekasmiṃ kappiye kate: when one piece is made allowable among all the pieces placed touching each other in the basket. "I allow, monks, the use of fruit by means of five samaṇa-kappas: that which has been burnt around, that which has been pierced with a knife, that which has been marked with a fingernail, that which is seedless, and that which has had the seeds removed as the fifth" (cūḷava. 250). Among those made allowable by fire, knife, or nail, it should be made allowable by piercing or cutting with a hot iron piece, burning fire, the point of a needle, a fingernail, the edge of a knife, or with the unrotted nail of a human or animal, whether extracted or not. And while doing so, when a non-ordained monk says "kappiyaṃ karohi", one should first say "kappiyaṃ" and then do the aggi-parijita, etc. It will be said "kappiyanti…pe… vaṭṭatī". However, they say that the word "kappiya" is allowable to be said in any way. First, one should make it allowable by placing fire or piercing or cutting with nails, etc. And they say that while doing so, one should say "kappiya" without taking it out first, and then it is allowable to take it out later. If one intending to say "kappiya" says "kappa," some say it is allowable.
1033.Dārunti ucchūhi saddhiṃ ekatobaddhadāruṃ.Dāruṃ vijjhatīti ettha jānitvāpi vijjhati vā vijjhāpeti vā, vaṭṭatiyeva. ‘‘Ekasitthepī’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo.
1033.Dāru: wood tied together with sugarcane. Dāruṃ vijjhatī: Here, it is allowable whether he pierces the wood knowingly or has it pierced. The same method applies in "Ekasitthepī".
1034.Tāniucchudārūni.Tanti valliṃ, rajjuṃ vā.
1034.Tāni: those sugarcane stalks. Taṃ: that vine or rope.
1035.Maricapakkehīti pariṇatehi maricapakkehi. Apariṇatānaṃ pana abījattā kappiye akatepi vaṭṭati. Idañca setalasuṇatacalasuṇādīhi missabhattassa upalakkhaṇaṃ. Ettha ca bhattasitthasambandhavasena ekābaddhatā veditabbā, na phalādīnameva aññamaññasambandhavasena.
1035.Maricapakkehī: with ripe peppercorns. However, unripe ones are allowable even without being made allowable because they are without seeds. And this is illustrative of mixed rice with white garlic, skin garlic, etc. And here, oneness should be understood in terms of the connection of rice and gravy, not just in terms of the mutual connection of fruits, etc.
1036.Tilataṇḍulakādisūti kappiyaṃ kātabbatilehi missataṇḍulādīsu.Ādi-saddena kappiyaṃ kātabbavatthūhi missitāni itaravatthūni gahitāni.Ekābaddhe kapitthepīti kaṭāhena baddhabīje pariṇatakapitthaphalepi.Kaṭāheti baddhamiñje kapāle.
1036.Tilataṇḍulakādisū: in rice mixed with sesame seeds, etc., that need to be made allowable. The term ādi includes other items mixed with items that need to be made allowable. Ekābaddhe kapitthepī: even in ripe wood-apple fruits with seeds tied with a shell. Kaṭāhe: in a tied shell, in a broken pot.
1037.Kaṭāhaṃ muñcitvāti sukkhattā samantato kaṭāhaṃ muñcitvā.Miñjakanti pariṇatakapitthaphalamiñjaṃ.Taṃ kapitthaṃ bhindāpetvāti kapitthakaṭāhaṃ bhindāpetvā, idaṃ bījato muttassa kaṭāhassa bhājanagatikattā vuttaṃ.
1037.Kaṭāhaṃ muñcitvā: having released the shell all around due to dryness. Miñjakaṃ: the pulp of the ripe wood-apple fruit. Taṃ kapitthaṃ bhindāpetvā: having had the wood-apple shell broken. This is said because the shell freed from the seed has the nature of a container.
1038.‘‘Abhūtagāmaabījesū’’ti padacchedo, abhūtagāme ca abīje cāti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘abīje bījasaññī, vematiko, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 92) pāṭhaṃ vinā ‘‘abhūtagāme bhūtagāmasaññī’’ti pāṭho natthīti abhūtagāmaggahaṇaṃ kasmā katanti? Vuccate – tasmiṃ pāṭhe bījaṃ bhūtagāmañca bījagāmaṃ bījañca bījabījanti vattabbe ekasesanayena ‘‘bīja’’nti gahetvā vinicchitanti ubhayaṃ vibhajitvā dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Tatthatasmiṃ abhūtagāmaabījagāmadvaye. Imissā gāthāya ‘‘abhūtagāme bhūtagāmasaññino dukkaṭaṃ, vematikassa dukkaṭaṃ, abījagāme bījagāmasaññino dukkaṭaṃ, vematikassa dukkaṭa’’nti cattāri dukkaṭāni dassitāni. Tatthaabhūtagāmanti bījagāmaṃ gahetabbaṃ.Abījagāmanti no bījaṃ.
1038.The word division is "Abhūtagāmaabījesū", the meaning is in abhūtagāma and in abīja. But why was the mention of abhūtagāma made since there is no reading "abhūtagāme bhūtagāmasaññī" without the reading "abīje bījasaññī, vematiko, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (pāci. 92)? It is said – In that reading, instead of saying bījaṃ bhūtagāmañca bījagāmaṃ bījañca bījabījanti, "bīja" is taken with the rule of ekasesa, so it is said to show both by dividing it to decide it. Tattha: in those two, abhūtagāma and abījagāma. In this verse, four dukkata offenses are shown: "dukkata for one who perceives bhūtagāma in abhūtagāma, dukkata for one who is doubtful, dukkata for one who perceives bījagāma in abījagāma, dukkata for one who is doubtful." There, abhūtagāma should be taken to mean bījagāma. Abījagāma: means no seed.
1039.Tatthatasmiṃ bhūtagāmabījagāmadvaye.‘‘Atathāsaññino’’tiādīsu ‘‘bhūtagāmaṃ vikopentassā’’ti seso, anāpatti pakāsitāti sambandho, abhūtagāmaṃ, abījanti vā saññino bhūtagāmaṃ bījampi vikopentassa anāpatti pakāsitāti attho gahetabbo. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘bīje abījasaññī chindati vā…pe… anāpattī’’ti.
1039.Tattha: in those two, bhūtagāma and bījagāma. In "Atathāsaññino," etc., the remainder is "bhūtagāmaṃ vikopentassā," the connection is that non-offense is declared, the meaning should be taken that non-offense is declared for one who fells bhūtagāma or bīja while perceiving abhūtagāma or abīja. As it is said in the Pāḷi, "anāpattī for one who perceives abīja in bīja and cuts, etc."
Asatissāti aññavihitasatissa vā aññena kathayato vā pādaṅguṭṭhādīhi tiṇādīni chindantassa.Ca-kārena idha avuttaṃ ‘‘ajānantassā’’ti idaṃ samuccitaṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ bhūtagāma’’nti vā ‘‘imasmiṃ aggimhi patite imaṃ ḍayhatī’’ti vā ‘‘iminā idaṃ bhijjati chijjatī’’tiādiṃ vā ajānantassa anāpattīti attho.
Asatissā: for one whose mindfulness is directed elsewhere, or for one who is talking about something else, or for one who is cutting grass, etc., with the toes of his feet. The word Ca combines "ajānantassa," which was not said here. The meaning is that there is no offense for one who does not know "this is bhūtagāma," or "this will be burnt when fire falls on it," or "this is broken or cut by this," etc.
1040.Idaṃcāti idaṃ bhūtagāmasikkhāpadañca.Tisamuṭṭhānanti kāyacittavācācittakāyavācācittavasena tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Chedanādikiriyāya āpajjanatokriyaṃ. Ticittanti paṇṇattiṃ ajānitvā cetiyādīsu tiṇagahanādikaṃ karontassa akhīṇāsavassa kusalaṃ, khīṇāsavassa kiriyaṃ, phalapupphādilobhena vikopentānaṃ sekhaputhujjanānaṃ akusalanti ticittaṃ.
1040.Idaṃ cā: and this bhūtagāma training rule. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ: has three origins: body-mind, speech-mind, body-speech-mind. Kriyaṃ: because of incurring an offense through the act of cutting, etc. Ticittaṃ: three minds: kusala for a non-arahant who does tiṇagahana, etc., in cetiyas, etc., without knowing the regulation; kiriyaṃ for an arahant; akusala for sekhas and worldlings who fell due to greed for fruits, flowers, etc.
Bhūtagāmakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Bhūtagāma Talk.
1041.Aññavādavihesake kammasmiṃ saṅghena kateti yojanā, aññavādakavihesakāropanakamme ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya paccekaṃ saṅghena kateti attho. ‘‘Aññaṃ vadatīti aññavādakaṃ, aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vihesetīti vihesakaṃ, tuṇhībhūtassetaṃ nāma’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 98) vacanato saṅghamajjhe vatthunā, āpattiyā vā codanāya katāya taṃ avattukāmo hutvā ‘‘ko āpanno, kiṃ āpanno, kismiṃ āpanno’’tiādinā (pāci. 94)padabhājanānukkamena pucchitaṃ ṭhapetvā aññassa avacanaṃ aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ, taṃ karontoaññavādako. Idha pana bhāvappadhānavasena kiriyā gahitā.
1041.The meaning conveyed is that it is done by the Saṅgha in the act of speaking differently and harassing, meaning that in the act of causing trouble by speaking differently, it is done individually by the Saṅgha with a ñattidutiyā kammavācā. Because it is said, "aññaṃ vadatīti aññavādakaṃ, this is the name for treating differently with something else. vihesetīti vihesakaṃ, this is the name for being silent" (pāci. aṭṭha. 98), in the midst of the Saṅgha, when an accusation is made regarding a matter or an offense, being unwilling to speak about it, setting aside the question asked in the order of padabhājanā such as "who has offended, what has he offended in, in what has he offended" (pāci. 94), not speaking of something else is treating differently with something else, one who does that is aññavādako. Here, however, the action is taken with the emphasis on the state.
vihesakonāma. Etthāpi bhāvappadhānavasena kiriyāva gahetabbā. Idha pana tabbhāvāropanakammaṃ vuccatīti saṃkhepo.Puna tathā karontassāti punapi teneva pakārena aññavādakavihesakāni visuṃ visuṃ karontassa.Pācittiyadvayaṃ hotītipadabhājane‘‘ropite aññavādake’’tiādinā (pāci. 100) nayena ca ‘‘ropite vihesake’’tiādinā (pāci. 100) nayena ca visuṃ visuṃ pācittiyassa vuttattā ekekasmiṃ vatthumhi ekekāya āpattiyā sambhavato pācittiyadvayaṃ hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
Vihesako means 'one who harasses'. Here too, the action should be understood in terms of its emphasis on the state of being. But here, the act of imposing that state is referred to, in brief. Puna tathā karontassā means for one who does harassing actions consisting of contradictory statements, again and again, in that same manner, separately. Pācittiyadvayaṃ hotīti—in the padabhājana, because the Pācittiya offence is stated separately by the method beginning with "ropite aññavādake" (pāci. 100) and by the method beginning with "ropite vihesake" (pāci. 100), two Pācittiya offences occur, since each offence is possible for each matter; this should be understood.
1042.Dhammeti ettha ‘‘kamme’’ti seso. Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī, vematiko, adhammakammasaññīti tīsu vikappesu.Adhammeti etthāpi eseva nayo.Kamme aropiteti aññavādakakammāropane akate.Evaṃ vadantassāti ‘‘ko āpanno’’tiādīni vadantassa.Vadantassa cāti ettha cakārena kamme aropite evaṃ vihesantassa ca dukkaṭanti samuccinoti. Imasmiṃ pakkhekamme aropiteti vihesakakālamāha.
1042. Dhammeti—here, "kamme" is to be supplied. In the three alternatives of one who perceives a legitimate action as a legitimate action, one who is uncertain, and one who perceives a legitimate action as an illegitimate action. Adhammeti—here too, this same method applies. Kamme aropiteti—before the imposition of contradictory speech is made. Evaṃ vadantassāti—for one who speaks, saying "who is guilty?" etc. Vadantassa cāti—here, the word 'ca' (and) includes a Dukkaṭa for one who harasses thus, even after the action has been imposed. In this case, kamme aropite refers to the time of harassment.
1043.Āpannanti attanā āpannaṃ.Bhaṇḍanaṃ bhavissatīti saññissāti mayā imasmiṃ vutte saṅghassa bhaṇḍanakalahādayo hontīti saññāya tuṇhī bhavantassa.Gilānassāti vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyamukharogādiyuttassa.
1043. Āpannanti—one who is guilty by his own action. Bhaṇḍanaṃ bhavissatīti saññissāti—for one who remains silent with the perception that if I speak in this matter, quarrels and disputes will arise for the Saṅgha. Gilānassāti—for one who is afflicted with a disease of the mouth, etc., that makes him unable to speak.
1044.Kriyākriyanti aññenaññapaṭicaraṇaṃ kriyaṃ. Tuṇhībhāvo akriyaṃ.
1044. Kriyākriyanti—doing a reciprocal service is kriya; remaining silent is akriya.
Aññavādakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Contradictory Speech
1045-6.Sammatassāti khandhakāgatasenāsanapaññāpakasammutiādīsu terasasu sammutīsu ekaṃ vā katipayā vā sabbā vā dātuṃ saṅghena ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kammavācaṃ vatvā dinnasammutikassa. ‘‘Upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammata’’nti (pāci. 106) vacanatobhikkhunoti upasampannamāha, ayasaṃ kattukāmoti sambandho.Vadantoti ‘‘chandena itthannāmo senāsanaṃ paññāpeti, chandena bhattāni uddisatī’’tiādiṃ bhaṇanto.‘‘Upasampanne’’ti idaṃ‘‘ujjhāpetī’’ti kiriyamapekkhitvā kammani upayogabahuvacanaṃ. Ayañhettha attho –ujjhāpetiavaññāya olokāpeti, lāmakato vā cintāpeti, khīyatīti ‘‘chandena itthannāmo senāsanaṃ paññapetī’’tiādiṃ kathento pakāsetīti. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘upasampannāna’’nti vattabbe sāmiatthe upayogavasena ‘‘upasampanne’’ti vuttaṃ, upasampannānaṃ santike pakāsetīti attho.
1045-6. Sammatassāti—for one who has been given a sammuti (formal agreement) by the Saṅgha, after establishing a ñatti (motion) to give one, some, or all of the thirteen sammutis, such as the agreement to allocate dwelling places mentioned in the Khandhaka. Because of the statement, "Upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammata" (pāci. 106), bhikkhuno means one who is fully ordained; the connection is 'wishing to make an avaṇṇa'. Vadantoti—one who speaks, saying "So-and-so allocates dwelling places by chanda, he assigns meals," etc. ‘‘Upasampanne’’ti—this is the locative plural, expecting the verb ‘‘ujjhāpetī’’ (causes to be scorned) in the sense of the object. Here, this is the meaning—ujjhāpeti—he scorns, looks down on in disrespect, or causes to be thought of as low, that is, revealing by saying "So-and-so allocates dwelling places by chanda," etc., it means he makes it known. In this instance, where "upasampannāna" should be said, "upasampanne" is said in the sense of ownership, meaning he makes it known in the presence of those who are fully ordained.
‘‘Pācittiyadvayaṃ hotī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ujjhāpanake khiyyanake pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 105) dvinnaṃ vatthūnaṃ ekato vuttattā idhāpi ekato vuttaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ pana gahetabbaṃ.Dhammeti ettha ‘‘kamme’’ti seso, upasampannassa sammatassa saṅghena dinnasammutikammaṃ sace dhammakammaṃ hotīti attho.Adhammeti etthāpi eseva nayo.
‘‘Pācittiyadvayaṃ hotī’’ti—this is said together here, because the two things "ujjhāpanake khiyyanake pācittiya" (pāci. 105) are stated together, but they should be taken separately. Dhammeti—here, "kamme" is to be supplied, meaning if the action of one who is fully ordained, who has been given a sammuti by the Saṅgha, if that action is a legitimate action. Adhammeti—here too, this is the same method.
1047-8.Bhikkhunoti sammatassa bhikkhuno. Asammatassa bhikkhussa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatoti yojanā.Yassa kassacīti ettha ‘‘santike’’ti seso, upasampannassa ca anupasampannassa ca yassa kassaci santiketi attho. Upasampannakāle sammataṃ pacchā sāmaṇerabhāvaṃ upagataṃ sandhāya ‘‘sammatassa sāmaṇerassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avaṇṇaṃ vadatoti yojanā.
1047-8. Bhikkhunoti—of a bhikkhu who has a sammuti. The construction is 'he speaks disparagingly of a bhikkhu who does not have a sammuti.' Yassa kassacīti—here, "santike" is to be supplied, meaning in the presence of anyone at all, whether fully ordained or not fully ordained. "Sammatassa sāmaṇerassā" is said referring to one who had a sammuti at the time of his full ordination, but who later reverted to the state of a sāmaṇera (novice). The construction is 'he speaks disparagingly.'
1049.Karontaṃ sammataṃ.Bhaṇatoti ujjhāpayato, khīyato. Attho pana vuttanayova. Ujjhāpanakhīyanakiriyāhi āpajjanatokriyaṃ. Yasmā ujjhāpanaṃ, khīyanañca musāvādavaseneva pavattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ādikammikassa anāpattī’’ti pācittiyaṭṭhāne, dukkaṭaṭṭhāne ca iminā ca anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Evañca katvā ujjhāpentassa, khīyantassa ca ekakkhaṇe dve dve āpattiyo hontīti āpannaṃ.
1049. Karontaṃ—one who is doing a sammuti. Bhaṇatoti—one who scorns, one who disparages. But the meaning is just as stated. Because of incurring (offences) by the actions of scorning and disparaging, it is kriyaṃ. Since scorning and disparaging occur just by way of false speech, it should be understood that this is said to show non-offence in the case of the 'first offender' in the Pācittiya situation, and in the Dukkaṭa situation. And having done so, two offences each occur in one moment for one who scorns and one who disparages, thus he is guilty.
Ujjhāpanakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Scornful Speech
1050.Saṅghassa mañcādinti sambandho. ‘‘Saṅghikaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā bhisiṃ vā kocchaṃ vā’’tipāḷiyaṃdassitaṃ saṅghasantakaṃ mañcādiṃ. Ettha camañconāmapāḷiyaṃ‘‘cattāro mañcā masārako bundikābaddho kuḷīrapādako āhaccapādako’’ti (pāci. 111) ca dassito catubbidho mañco. Tatthamasārakonāma mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭanisikhāhi āvuṇitvā katamañco. So idāni vattamāno vettamañco.Bundikābaddhonāma aṭanisīsesu bundikarantarato mañcapāde ḍaṃsāpetvā kato vettamañcapadaramañco daṭṭhabbo.Kuḷīrapādakonāma pādabunde assakhurādiākāraṃ dassetvā kakkaṭapādehi viya vaṅkapādehi yojitamañco.Āhaccapādakonāma aṭaniyo vijjhitvā aṭanichidde pādasīse sikhaṃ katvā taṃ pavesetvā aṭaniyā upari nikkhante pādasikhāmatthake tiriyaṃ vijjhitvā āṇiṃ pavesetvā katamañco.
1050. Saṅghassa mañcādinti—the connection is 'the Saṅgha's bed', etc. The Saṅgha's bed, etc., shown in the Pāḷi as "Saṅghikaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā bhisiṃ vā kocchaṃ vā" refers to the Saṅgha's beds etc. Here, mañco—the Pāḷi shows "cattāro mañcā masārako bundikābaddho kuḷīrapādako āhaccapādako" (pāci. 111)—the four kinds of beds. There, masārako means a bed made by piercing the legs of the bed and wrapping them with rattan splints. That which currently exists is a rattan bed. Bundikābaddho means a rattan or padarama bed made by fastening the legs of the bed by clamping bundles onto the rattan heads. Kuḷīrapādako means a bed joined with curved legs like crab's legs, showing the shape of a horse's hoof, etc., at the base of the legs. Āhaccapādako means a bed made by piercing the rattan, making a crest at the head of the legs in the rattan holes, inserting it, piercing transversely at the top of the leg crest protruding above the rattan, and inserting a peg.
Pīṭhaṃnāma evameva kataṃ tannāmakameva catubbidhaṃ;
Pīṭhaṃ—a stool made in just the same way, with four kinds with that same name;
Bhisināma ‘‘pañca bhisiyo uṇṇabhisi coḷabhisi vākabhisi tiṇabhisi paṇṇabhisī’’ti gabbhavasena dassitā pañca bhisiyo. Tatthauṇṇānāma manussalomaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesalomāni.Coḷānāma pilotikā.Vākaṃnāma makacivākādikaṃ.Tiṇaṃnāma dabbatiṇādi.Paṇṇaṃnāma tamālapaṇṇaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesapaṇṇaṃ.
Bhisi—a seat shown with five kinds based on content as "pañca bhisiyo uṇṇabhisi coḷabhisi vākabhisi tiṇabhisi paṇṇabhisī". There, uṇṇā means keeping human hair aside and any remaining hairs. Coḷā means rags. Vākaṃ means makacivāka etc. Tiṇaṃ means dabba grass etc. Paṇṇaṃ means keeping tamāla leaves aside and any remaining leaves.
Kocchantipāḷiyaṃ‘‘kocchaṃ nāma vākamayaṃ vā usīramayaṃ vā muñjamayaṃ vā pabbajamayaṃ vā anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. 111) dassitaṃ vākaṃ vā usīraṃ vā muñjatiṇaṃ vā eḷakalomāni vā pabbajatiṇaṃ vā ādāya ubhohi koṭīhi vitthataṃ katvā majjhe pīḷetvā saṅkucitvā taṃ bandhitvā sīhacammādīhi veṭhanabandhanāni paṭicchādetvā pādapuñchanī viya nisajjatthāya kataṃ āsananti vadanti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘heṭṭhā ca upari ca vitthataṃ, majjhe saṃkhittaṃ, paṇavasaṇṭhānaṃ katvā baddhaṃ hoti, taṃ kira majjhe sīhabyagghacammaparikkhittampi karonti. Akappiyacammaṃ nāmettha natthī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 111).Santharāpetvāti upasampannena vā anupasampannena vā santharāpetvā. Ettha vinicchayaṃ vakkhati.Santharitvāti sayaṃ santharitvā vā.
Kocchanti—the Pāḷi shows "kocchaṃ nāma vākamayaṃ vā usīramayaṃ vā muñjamayaṃ vā pabbajamayaṃ vā anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hotī" (pāci. 111)—taking vāka or usīra or muñja grass or goat hair or pabbaja grass, spreading it out at both ends, constricting it in the middle by pressing it together, binding it, and covering the binding wrappings with lion skins etc., it is an āsana (seat) made for sitting on, like a foot wiper. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "It is broad below and above, constricted in the middle, made and bound in the shape of a drum; they say that they even make it covered with lion or tiger skin in the middle. There is no non-allowable skin here" etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 111). Santharāpetvāti—having it spread by one who is fully ordained or not fully ordained. It will state the decision here. Santharitvāti—having spread it himself or another.
1051.Nevuddhareyyāti paññattaṭṭhānato uddharitvā na paṭisāmeyya.Na uddharāpeyya vāti aññena vā tathā na kārāpeyya.Tanti mañcādiṃ.Pakkamantoti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’ti labbhati, mañcādīnaṃ atthataṭṭhānato thāmamajjhimassa purisassa thāmappamāṇena hatthaṃ pasāretvā khittapāsāṇassa patanaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamma gacchantoti attho. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamantassā’’ti.
1051. Nevuddhareyyāti—he should not lift it from the designated place and put it away. Na uddharāpeyya vāti—nor should he have another cause it to be lifted. Tanti—that bed etc. Pakkamantoti—here, "yo bhikkhu" is obtained; it means going beyond the place of the falling stone thrown with the strength of a man of moderate strength, from the place where the bed etc., are laid out. As the Pāḷi says, "atikkamantassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ".
1052.Vassike caturo māseti antovassaṃ cātumāse.Sace devo na vassatīti ettha ‘‘katthaci janapade’’ti seso. Teneva‘‘sace’’ti sāsaṅkamāha. ‘‘Yesu janapadesu vassakāle na vassati, tesupi cattāro māse nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 110)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.Tathā cāpīti te cattāro māse avassantepi.
1052. Vassike caturo māseti—the four months during the rains. Sace devo na vassatīti—here, "katthaci janapade" is to be supplied. Therefore ‘‘sace’’ (if) indicates doubt. The Aṭṭhakathā states, "Even in those countries where it does not rain during the rainy season, it is still not proper to put it away for four months" (pāci. aṭṭha. 110). Tathā cāpīti—even if it does not rain during those four months.
1053.Yatthāti yasmiṃ laṅkādīpasadise dese. Yattha aparepi hemante cattāro māse devo vassati, tattha aṭṭha māse ajjhokāse mañcādiṃ ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Gimhāne pana cattāro māse bahi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti byatirekato dasseti.
1053. Yatthāti—in whatever country like the island of Laṅkā. The construction is that it is not proper to leave a bed etc., in the open for eight months in a place where the deva (rain) rains for four months even in other hemantas (cool seasons). But it shows by contrast that it is proper to leave it outside for four months in the hot season.
1054.Nivāsasminti rukkhe kulāvakaṃ katvā nirantaravāse sati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yasmiṃ pana dhuvanivāsena kulāvake katvā vasantī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 110).Kadācipīti anovassakālepi.
1054. Nivāsasminti—when there is continuous dwelling making a nest in a tree. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "but where they dwell making a nest with continuous dwelling" (pāci. aṭṭha. 110). Kadācipīti—even in a non-rainy season.
1055-6.Saṅghikaṃ yaṃ kiñci mañcādīti yojanā.Santhataṃ yadīti anāṇattena yadi atthataṃ, paññattanti vuttaṃ hoti.Yattha katthaci ṭhāneti rukkhamūlamaṇḍapaabbhokāsādimhi yattha katthaci ṭhāne.Yena kenacīti saddhivihārikena vā antevāsikena vā aññena vā.Bhikkhunāti upasampannena.Soti yassatthāya paññattaṃ, so bhikkhu.
1055-6. The construction is 'whatever Saṅghika bed etc.' Santhataṃ yadīti—if it is laid out without authorization, it is said to be paññattaṃ. Yattha katthaci ṭhāneti—in whatever place, whether at the root of a tree, in a maṇḍapa (pavilion), or in the open air etc. Yena kenacīti—by whoever, whether a saddhivihārika (co-resident), an antevāsika (pupil), or another. Bhikkhunāti—by a fully ordained one. Soti—that bhikkhu for whom it was laid out.
1057.Tanti taṃ saṅghikaṃ vettamañcādiṃ.Santharāpita-saddo kattusādhano, santharituṃ niyojakasseva bhikkhunoti attho.
1057. Tanti—that Saṅghika rattan bed etc. The word Santharāpita is in the active voice, meaning only the bhikkhu who directs it to be spread.
1058.Bhikkhunāti ettha ‘‘āṇāpako’’ti vakkhamānattā āṇattena bhikkhunā upasampannenāti labbhati.Tassevāti āṇattiyā āsanapaññāpakassa tasseva bhikkhuno.‘‘Nisīdatī’’ti vacanassa upalakkhaṇattā āgantvā thavikaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā yaṃ kiñcideva ṭhapeti, ‘‘mayhameva bhāro’’ti vā vadati, paññāpako muccatīti gahetabbo.
1058. Bhikkhunāti—here, because it will say "āṇāpako", it is obtained that it is by a bhikkhu who is fully ordained by authorization. Tassevāti—for that very bhikkhu who is the one who authorizes the laying out of the seat. Since the word ‘‘Nisīdatī’’ is indicative, even if he comes and places his bag or robe or whatever, or says "the burden is mine alone", it should be understood that the one who authorized it is freed (from offence).
1059-60.Anāpucchātiettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 113)aṭṭhakathāyavuttasarūpaṃ yaṃ kañci anāpucchāti attho. ‘‘Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 113) vuttattā alajjiṃ āpucchitvā gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. ‘‘Mayaṃ gamissāmā’’ti vatvā anumatigahaṇaṃ āpucchanaṃ nāma, taṃ anāpattiyā kathaṃ aṅgaṃ hotīti ce? Gamanassa anumatiyā laddhattā. ‘‘Kappaṃ labhitvā gantabba’’nti vacanato anumatidāyakena vattāvattaṃ sampaṭicchitaṃ viya hotīti laddhakappattā evaṃ gacchati ce, vaṭṭati.Aniyyātetvāti niyyātanaṃ akatvā vattāvattaṃ appaṭiyādetvā, asampaṭicchāpetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Vāreti padavāre.
1059-60. Anāpucchāti—here, Aṭṭhakathā states, "yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññatī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 113)—it means not asking permission from anyone who has the characteristics stated. Since it says, "Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hotī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 113), they say that it is not proper to go after asking permission from one who is not shy. What is asking permission, which involves taking agreement, and how is it part of non-offence? Because permission for going is obtained. Because of the statement "Kappaṃ labhitvā gantabbaṃ", it is as if the one who gives permission has accepted the duty, thus if he goes having obtained what is proper, it is allowable. Aniyyātetvāti—without doing the giving out, without informing about the duty, it is said 'without having it fully acknowledged.' Vāreti—in the turn.
1062.Tasmā ṭhānāti attanā ṭhatvā āṇāpitabhojanasālato. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhojanasālato nikkhamitvā aññattha gacchatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 111).
1062. Tasmā ṭhānāti—from the dining hall authorized by himself where he is staying. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "bhojanasālato nikkhamitvā aññattha gacchatī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 111).
1063.Saṅghike saṅghikasaññivematikapuggalikasaññīnaṃ vasenatikapācittiyaṃ. Tikātītenāti akusalamūlattikādito savāsanasamucchedappahānavasena atikkantena.Tikadukkaṭanti ‘‘puggalike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī aññassa puggalike āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 112) vacanato dukkaṭattayaṃ hoti.
1063. In the Saṅghika, based on one who perceives it as Saṅghika, one who is uncertain, and one who perceives it as individual, there is tikapācittiyaṃ. Tikātītenāti—by one who has gone beyond the root of the unwholesome triad with the destruction of the vasana (habitual tendencies) and complete eradication. Tikadukkaṭanti—because of the statement "puggalike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī aññassa puggalike āpatti dukkaṭassā" (pāci. 112), there are three Dukkaṭa offences.
1064-5.Cimilikaṃnāma parikammakatāya bhūmiyā chavirakkhanatthaṃ attharitabbapilotikaṃ.Taṭṭikānāma tālapaṇṇādīhi katataṭṭikā.Cammaṃsīhacammādi. Senāsanaparikkhāre akappiyacammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha‘‘aṭṭhakathāsuhi senāsanaparibhoge paṭikkhittacammaṃ nāma na dissati, tasmā sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 112). Imassa ca aṭṭhakathāpāṭhassasāratthadīpaniyā(sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.112) evaṃ attho vaṇṇito –
1064-5. Cimilikaṃnāma—a cloth to be spread to protect the skin on the prepared ground. Taṭṭikānāma—a mat made of palm leaves etc. Cammaṃ—lion skin etc. There is no non-allowable skin among the requisites for dwelling places. As the ‘‘Aṭṭhakathāsu states, hi senāsanaparibhoge paṭikkhittacammaṃ nāma na dissati, tasmā sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo" (pāci. aṭṭha. 112). The meaning of this Aṭṭhakathā passage is explained thus in the Sāratthadīpanī (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.112)—
khandhakapāḷiyāadhippāyaṃ vibhāveti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘antopi mañce paññattāni honti, bahipi mañce paññattāni hontī’’ti (mahāva. 255) imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadassa paññattattā mañcapīṭhesu attharitvā paribhogoyeva paṭikkhitto, bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhogo pana appaṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? Yathā ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti (cūḷava. 320) vacanato puggalikepi senāsane senāsanaparibhogavasena niyamitaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭādikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭamānampi kevalaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati, evamidaṃ bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhuñjiyamānampi attano santakaṃ katvā taṃ taṃ vihāraṃ haritvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo’’ti vuttanti.
it explains the intent of the khandhakapāḷi. This is said: Because the training rule was laid down in this matter that "antopi mañce paññattāni honti, bahipi mañce paññattāni hontī" (mahāva. 255), only using it for spreading on beds and benches is prohibited, but using it as ground cover is not prohibited. If so, why is this said that "pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo"? Just as, because of the statement "anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga" (cūḷava. 320), even gold vessels etc., that are limited as things to be used in a dwelling place even in individual dwelling places, it is not proper to use them making them only one's own property, so even though this is being used as ground cover, it is said that "pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo" to show that it is not proper to use it by carrying it off to that vihāra, making it one's own property.
‘‘Phalaka’’nti iminā pāṭhāgataṃ phalakapīṭhameva dassitaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘phalakapīṭhaṃ nāma phalakamayaṃ pīṭha’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 112).Pādapuñchaninti kadalivākādīhi kataṃ pādapuñchanikaṃ.Bhūmattharaṇaṃnāma cimilikāya sati tassā upari, asati suddhabhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā kaṭasārakādivikati.Uttarattharaṇaṃnāma saṅghikamañcapīṭhādīnaṃ upari attharitabbapaccattharaṇaṃ.
"Phalaka": This refers to the footstool made of planks as described in the text. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Phalaka-pīṭha means a seat made of planks" (pāci. aṭṭha. 112). Pādapuñchani: A footwiper made of banana fiber etc. Bhūmattharaṇa: A covering to be spread on the floor, on top of a cimilikā if there is one, or on the bare ground if there isn't, made of split bamboo mat etc. Uttarattharaṇa: A top-covering to be spread over communal couches, seats, etc.
Pattādhārakanti pattavalayādhārakaṃ. Taṃ yathāvuttaparikkhāraṃ.Gacchatoti leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamma gacchato. Sace pana dāyakehi dānakāleyeva sahassagghanakampi kambalaṃ ‘‘pādapuñchaniṃ katvā paribhuñjathā’’ti dinnaṃ, tatheva paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Tasmā imaṃ mañcapīṭhādisenāsanampi ‘‘abbhokāsepi yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti dāyakehi dinnaṃ ce, sabbasmimpi kāle abbhokāse nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.
Pattādhāraka: A stand for bowl supports. That, along with the requisites mentioned earlier. Gacchato: When departing, going beyond the range of a stone’s throw. But if the donors, at the time of donation, give even a blanket worth a thousand (coins) saying, "Use this as a footwiper," it is permissible to use it in that way. Therefore, it is said that if this monastic furnishing such as couches and seats is given by the donors saying, "Use this as you please, even in the open air," it is permissible to leave it in the open air at any time.
1066.Āraññakenāpi sace gantabbaṃ hoti, anovassake nosati mañcapīṭhādiṃ rukkhasmiṃ laggetvā yathāsukhaṃ gantabbanti yojanā.
1066.Even for a forest-dweller, if he needs to go away, the interpretation is that he can hang the couch, seat, etc., on a tree and depart as he pleases when there is no rain.
1067.Upacikādīhīti etthaādi-saddena mūsikā gahitā.Na lujjatīti na nassati.Taṃ sabbanti mañcādikaṃ sakalaṃ.
1067.Upacikādīhī: Here, the word ādi (etc.) includes mice. Na lujjatī: Does not get destroyed. Taṃ sabbaṃ: All of that, the couch, etc., entirely.
1068.Attano santaketi attano puggalike mañcādivisaye.Ruddheti vuḍḍhabhikkhunā vā issarādīhi vā yakkhasīhādīhi vā mañcādike ruddhe ajjhāvutthe, abhibhavitvā gahiteti attho.Āpadāsupīti brahmacariyantarāyādīsu ca santesu. Gacchato bhikkhuno anāpattīti yojanā.
1068.Attano santake: In regard to his own personal couch, etc. Ruddhe: When the couch, etc., is obstructed or taken over by an elderly bhikkhu, a powerful person, a Yakkha, a lion, etc., meaning having overcome and seized it. Āpadāsupi: And when there are dangers such as obstacles to the holy life. There is no offense for a bhikkhu who departs, that is the construction.
1069.Kāyavācato, kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhānaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Paññattiṃ ajānitvā sayaṃ anuddharantassa kāyena hoti, anāpucchantassa vācāya hoti, paññattiṃ jānitvā evaṃ akarontassa sacittakena teneva dvayena samuṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ. Leḍḍupātātikkamokriyaṃ. Mañcādīnaṃ anuddharaṇādiakriyaṃ.
1069.Kathina-samuṭṭhāna is arising from body and speech, or from body, speech, and mind. For one who does not know the rule and does not remove it himself, it is by the body; for one who does not ask permission, it is by speech; for one who knows the rule and does not do so intentionally, it should be understood that it arises from those two means. Transgressing the range of a stone’s throw is kriyaṃ (an action). Not removing the couch etc. is akriyaṃ (an inaction).
Paṭhamasenāsanakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the First Story on Monastic Furnishings.
1070-3.Bhisīti paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttapañcappakārā imissāaṭṭhakathāya‘‘mañcakabhisi vā pīṭhakabhisi vā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 116) evaṃ dassitabhisi ca.Paccattharaṇaṃnāma pāvāro kojavo vā. ‘‘Ettakameva vuttantiaṭṭhakathāsuvuttaṃ. ‘Idañca aṭṭhakathāsu tathāvuttabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, aññampi tādisaṃ mañcapīṭhesu attharitabbaṃ paccattharaṇamevā’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vutta’’nti (sārattha. aṭṭha. pācittiya 3.116)sāratthadīpaniyālikhitaṃ.Nisīdananti nisīdanacīvaraṃ.
1070-3.Bhisi: The five kinds mentioned in the first training rule, and the bhisi that is shown in this Aṭṭhakathā as "either a couch-bhisi or a seat-bhisi" (pāci. aṭṭha. 116). Paccattharaṇa: Namely, a pāvāro or kojavo. "Only this much is said," is said in the Aṭṭhakathās. "Sāratthadīpanī writes: ‘This is said to show that it is stated thus in the Aṭṭhakathās; any other such covering to be spread on couches and seats is indeed a paccattharaṇa,’ is stated in all three Gaṇṭhipadas" (sārattha. aṭṭha. pācittiya 3.116). Nisīdana: A sitting cloth.
Tiṇasanthāroerakādīni tiṇāni dvīsu tīsu ṭhānesu gopetvā katasanthāro.Paṇṇasanthāronāma nāḷikerādipaṇṇe tatheva gopetvā katasanthāro. Sayanti etthātiseyyā. ‘‘Sabbacchannaparicchanne’’ti idaṃ sahaseyyakathāya vuttatthameva.
Tiṇasanthāro: A spread made by securing erakā grass etc. in two or three places. Paṇṇasanthāro: A spread made by securing coconut leaves etc. in the same way. Seyanti etthāti, seyyā: A bed is where one lies down. "Sabbacchannaparicchanne": This meaning is the same as that stated in the story on sharing a bed.
Dasavidhaṃ seyyanti dasavidhāsu seyyāsu aññataranti vuttaṃ hoti.Santharitvāpi vāti etthapi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, so santharāpetvāpīti imaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Vā-saddaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ anuddharitvā’’ti ettha ‘‘anuddharitvā vā’’ti yojetvā ‘‘anuddharāpetvā vā’’ti ayaṃ vikappo saṅgayhati.Taṃseyyaṃ.
Dasavidhaṃ seyyaṃ: It is said that it means one of the ten kinds of beds. Santharitvāpi vā: Here, the particle pi has the meaning of combining, and it combines with "having someone spread it." The particle vā can be connected to "sayaṃ anuddharitvā" (without removing it himself) as "anuddharitvā vā" (or without removing it), and this alternative is included: "anuddharāpetvā vā" (or without having someone remove it). Taṃ, that bed.
Ārāmassūpacāranti ‘‘aparikkhittassa upacāro nāma senāsanato dve leḍḍupātā’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ upacāramāha.Assāti vihārassa parikkhittassa.
Ārāmassūpacāraṃ: The Aṭṭhakathā refers to the boundary, saying, "The boundary of a place that is not fenced is two stone throws from the monastic furnishing." Assā, of the vihāra that is fenced.
1074.Ubhayesanti senāsanaseyyānaṃ. Antogabbhe santharitvā gacchatoti sambandho.
1074.Ubhayesaṃ: Of the monastic furnishing and bed. The connection is that having spread (the bed) inside the dwelling, he departs.
1075.Upacāre vihārassāti etthavihāronāma antogabbhādisabbaparicchannaguttasenāsanaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘vihāroti antogabbho vā aññaṃ vā sabbaparicchannaṃ guttasenāsanaṃ veditabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 117). Tatthaupacāronāma taṃsamīpaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘upacāreti tassa bahi āsanne okāse’’ti.Maṇḍaponāma paricchannāparicchannasannipātamaṇḍapo. Yathāha ‘‘maṇḍape vāti aparicchanne paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātamaṇḍape’’ti.Ādi-saddena upaṭṭhānasālārukkhamūlāni saṅgahitāni.Upaṭṭhānasālānāma aguttā bhojanasālā. Yathāha ‘‘upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ vāti bhojanasālāyaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 117).Aguttatāca ‘‘ṭhānassa aguttatāyā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 117) aṭṭhakathāvacanato veditabbāti.
1075.Upacāre vihārassā: Here, vihāro means a guarded monastic furnishing with all enclosures, such as an inner chamber. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Vihāra should be understood as an inner chamber or any monastic furnishing that is completely enclosed and guarded" (pāci. aṭṭha. 117). There, upacāro means a place nearby. As it says, "Upacāra means a place nearby outside of it." Maṇḍapo means a pavilion for gatherings, whether enclosed or unenclosed. As it says, "Maṇḍape vā means in a pavilion for gatherings of many, whether unenclosed or enclosed." The ādi (etc.) includes the upaṭṭhānasālā and the base of a tree. Upaṭṭhānasālā means an unguarded refectory. As it says, "Upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ vā means in a refectory" (pāci. aṭṭha. 117). The fact of being aguttatā (unguarded) should be understood from the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "because of the unguarded nature of the place" (pāci. aṭṭha. 117).
1076.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘saṅghike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī’’ti vārattaye pācittiyattayaṃ vuttaṃ. Dasavatthūsu bhavaṃ tadantogadhattātidasavatthukaṃ,dasannaṃ vā vatthu dasavatthu, taṃyevadasavatthukanti bhisiādikaṃ aññataraṃ seyyābhaṇḍaṃ.Tassāti santhārakassa. ‘‘Puggalike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī aññassa puggalike āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 117)tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpitaṃ.
1076.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: The threefold pācittiya is stated as "in (a belonging) of the Saṅgha, he perceives (it as belonging) to the Saṅgha, he is doubtful, he perceives (it as belonging) to an individual" in the threefold turn. Because it exists in the ten instances, it is dasavatthukaṃ; or the ten instances are the dasavatthu, that itself is dasavatthukaṃ, meaning some item of bedding such as a bhisi. Tassā: Of that spread. "Tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpitaṃ (the threefold dukkaṭa is shown): In (a belonging) of an individual, he perceives (it as belonging) to the Saṅgha, he is doubtful, he perceives (it as belonging) to an individual; (if he uses it) in (a belonging) of another individual, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 117).
1077.Uddharitvāti atthataseyyaṃ yathā upacikāhi na khajjati, tathā paṭisāmetvā, ‘‘gacchato’’ti iminā sambandho.Aññenavuddhabhikkhuissarādinā.Palibuddheti senāsane paribuddhe nivārite.
1077.Uddharitvā: Having removed the spread bed, returning it so that it is not eaten by insects etc.; the connection is with "gacchato" (when departing). Aññena: By another, an elder bhikkhu, a powerful person, etc. Palibuddhe: When the monastic furnishing is obstructed, prevented.
1078.Sāpekkhova ca gantvāti ‘‘ajjeva gantvā idaṃ paṭisāmessāmī’’ti apekkhāsahitova gāmantarādiṃ gantvā. Yathāha ‘‘ajjeva āgantvā paṭijaggissāmī’ti evaṃ sāpekkho nadīpāraṃ vā gāmantaraṃ vā gantvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 118).Tattha ṭhatvāti gataṭṭhāne ṭhatvā, tato bahi gacchāmīti citte uppanneti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘yatthassa gamanacittaṃ uppannaṃ, tattheva ṭhito’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 118). Taṃ pucchatīti sambandho.Taṃseyyaṃ kañci pesetvā āpucchatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘kañci pesetvā āpucchatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 118). Ettha ca purimasikkhāpade mañcādīnaṃ paññattaṭṭhānato antovihāre vā hotu bahi vā, leḍḍupātātikkamena, idha upacārātikkamena pācittiyanti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo.
1078.Sāpekkhova ca gantvā: Having gone to another village etc. with expectation, thinking, "I will go today and return this." As it says, "Having gone to the other side of a river or to another village with such expectation, thinking, 'I will come back today and take care of it.'" (pāci. aṭṭha. 118). Tattha ṭhatvā: Having stood in the place he went, it is said that the thought arises in his mind that he will go outside from there. As it says, "Having stood right where the thought of leaving arose for him" (pāci. aṭṭha. 118). The connection is that he asks about that. Taṃ seyyaṃ: It is said that he asks permission by sending someone. As it says, "He asks permission by sending someone" (pāci. aṭṭha. 118). Here, the distinction should be understood that in the previous training rule, for couches etc., the pācittiya is for transgressing the range of a stone's throw, whether inside or outside the vihāra from the place designated by rule, whereas here it is for transgressing the boundary.
Abbhokāsamhi mañcādiṃ, vihāre seyyamattakaṃ;
Leaving a couch etc. in the open air,
And only bedding in the vihāra;
The fault for one who departs is,
The stone’s throw and the boundary.
Dutiyasenāsanakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Second Story on Monastic Furnishings.
1079.Yobhikkhu saṅghikāvāse pubbupagataṃ bhikkhuṃ jānaṃ anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeyya ce,assabhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.Pubbupagatonāma vassaggena pāpetvā dinnaṃ senāsanaṃ gahetvā vasanto.Jānanti ‘‘anuṭṭhāpanīyo aya’’nti jānanto.Anuṭṭhāpanīyānāma vuddhādayo. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘jānāti nāma vuḍḍhoti, gilānoti, saṅghena dinnoti jānātī’’ti (pāci. 121).Anupakhajjāti anupavisitvā, tassa paṭhamaṃ paññattaṃ mañcādīnaṃ āsannataraṃ vakkhamānalakkhaṇaṃ upacāraṃ pavisitvāti attho.Seyyaṃ kappeyyāti dasavidhāsu seyyāsu aññataraṃ attharitvā sayanaṃ kareyya, nipajjeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vakkhati ca ‘‘dasasvaññataraṃ seyya’’ntiādi. ‘‘Nisajjaṃ vā’’ti seso. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘abhinisīdati vā abhinipajjati vā’’ti.
1079.If yo bhikkhu, knowing a bhikkhu who has previously arrived in a communal dwelling, should make a bed without deferring, assa bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ siyā: there is a pācittiya for that bhikkhu, that is the construction. Pubbupagato nāma: One who has previously arrived means one who has taken and is living in a monastic furnishing that has been given after passing the rains residence. Jānaṃ: Knowing, meaning knowing that "this one is not to be evicted." Anuṭṭhāpanīyā nāma: One who is not to be evicted means elders etc. As the Padabhājana says, "Jānāti nāma: 'Knows' means he knows 'he is an elder, he is ill, it has been given by the Saṅgha'" (pāci. 121). Anupakhajjā: Without deferring, meaning without entering the boundary that is closer to the couch etc. that was previously designated for him, the characteristic of which will be stated next. Seyyaṃ kappeyya: If he should make a bed, meaning having spread one of the ten kinds of beds, he would lie down, recline, that is what is meant. And he will say, "dasasvaññataraṃ seyyaṃ" etc. ("one of the ten kinds of beds"). "Nisajjaṃ vā" is the remainder. As the Padabhājana says, "abhinisīdati vā abhinipajjati vā: either sits down or lies down."
1080-2.Uddiṭṭhamatthaṃ niddisitukāmo paṭhamaṃ ‘‘anupakhajjaseyyaṃ kappeyyā’’ti ettha vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pādadhovanapāsāṇā…pe… dukkaṭa’’nti. Senāsanaṃ pavisantassa bhikkhuno pādadhovanapāsāṇā yāva taṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā nikkhamantassa pana mañcapīṭhato yāva passāvaṭṭhānaṃ, etthantare tu yaṃ ṭhānaṃ, idameva upacāroti vuccatīti yojanā. Tattha upacāreti yojanā.Bādhetukāmassāti ‘‘yassa sambādho bhavissati, so pakkamissatī’’ti evaṃ uppannacittassa. Sayanti etthāti viggaho.
1080-2.Desiring to specify the meaning that has been stated in the outline, he first says in order to show the judgment regarding "anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeyya" (should make a bed without deferring): "pādadhovanapāsāṇā…pe… dukkaṭa". The construction is that, for a bhikkhu entering the monastic furnishing, the area from the foot-washing stone to that couch or seat, or for one leaving, from the couch or seat to the urinal, whatever space there is in between, this itself is called the boundary. There, the construction is upacāreti. Bādhetukāmassā: For one whose mind has arisen thinking, "Whoever is inconvenienced will leave." Sayanti etthāti: a bed is where one lies down.
1983.‘‘Pācittiyassā’’ti uddesato vuttaṃ niddisitumāha‘‘nisīdantassā’’tiādi.Tatthāti tathā anupakhajja atthatāya seyyāya.‘‘Pācittiyadvaya’’nti idaṃ ‘‘dvepi karontassā’’ti imaṃ pacchimavikappaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Purimavikappadvaye pana ‘‘nisīdantassa vā pācittiyaṃ, nipajjantassa vā pācittiya’’nti vattabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ vikappattaye paccekaṃ ‘‘tikapācittiyaṃ tikadukkaṭa’’nti ubhayassāpi vattabbatāaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttā. Kathaṃ? Saṅghike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī nisajjaṃ kappeti, pācittiyanti nisajjāya tikapācittiyaṃ, evaṃ seyyāya tikapācittiyaṃ, ubhayattha tikapācittiyadvayanti evaṃ vikappadvaye dvādasa pācittiyāni. Puggalike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī aññassa puggalike nisajjaṃ kappeti, dukkaṭanti nisajjāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, evaṃ seyyāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, ubhayattha tikadukkaṭadvayanti dvādasa dukkaṭāni ca veditabbāni.
1983."Pācittiyassā" is said in the outline, in order to specify it, he says "nisīdantassā" etc. Tattha: There, in that way, after deferring, for the bed that has been spread. "Pācittiyadvaya": This is said in reference to the last alternative, "dvepi karontassa" ("for one who does both"). But in the first two alternatives, it should be stated, "nisīdantassa vā pācittiyaṃ, nipajjantassa vā pācittiyaṃ: there is a pācittiya for one who sits down, or for one who lies down." In these three alternatives, the Aṭṭhakathā has stated that the possibility of stating "tikapācittiyaṃ tikadukkaṭaṃ" (a threefold pācittiya, a threefold dukkaṭa) individually in each case. How? "Saṅghike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī nisajjaṃ kappeti, pācittiyaṃ: In (a belonging) of the Saṅgha, he perceives (it as belonging) to the Saṅgha, he is doubtful, he perceives (it as belonging) to an individual, he makes a seat, there is a pācittiya" is the threefold pācittiya for sitting; likewise, the threefold pācittiya for lying down; thus, in two alternatives, there are twelve pācittiyas. "Puggalike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī aññassa puggalike nisajjaṃ kappeti, dukkaṭaṃ: In (a belonging) of an individual, he perceives (it as belonging) to the Saṅgha, he is doubtful, he perceives (it as belonging) to an individual; (if he) makes a seat in (a belonging) of another individual, there is a dukkaṭa" is the threefold dukkaṭa for sitting; likewise, the threefold dukkaṭa for lying down; thus, in both alternatives, twelve dukkaṭas should be understood.
1084.Karontassāti ettha ‘‘nisīdanādi’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘saṅghike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī’’ti vikappattaye tikapācittiyaṃpāḷiyaṃ(pāci. 122) vuttaṃ. Evaṃ puggalikepi tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha‘‘puggale tikadukkaṭa’’nti. Iminā yathāvuttapācittiyadukkaṭāni sāmaññena tike pakkhipitvā evaṃ vuttānīti veditabbaṃ.
1084.Karontassā: Here, "nisīdanādi" (sitting down etc.) is obtained from the context. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: The threefold pācittiya is stated in the Pāḷi (pāci. 122) in the three alternatives of "saṅghike saṅghikasaññī, vematiko, puggalikasaññī" (in (a belonging) of the Saṅgha, he perceives (it as belonging) to the Saṅgha, he is doubtful, he perceives (it as belonging) to an individual). Likewise, the threefold dukkaṭa is stated in the case of an individual. Therefore, he says "puggale tikadukkaṭaṃ". By this, it should be understood that the pācittiyas and dukkaṭas stated above are put into the threefold (division) in general, and thus it is stated.
1085-6.‘‘Vuttūpacāra’’ntiādigāthādvaye vihārassa vuttūpacāraṃ muñcitvā upacāre vā abbhokāsepi vā santharatopi vā santharāpayatopi vā tattha nisīdato vā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbattheva tassa nivāso vāritoti yojanā. Tatthavihārassāti yathāvuttasenāsanassa.Upacāreti avidūre.Abbhokāseti tassa senāsanassa naccāsanne aṅgaṇappadese.
1085-6.In the two verses beginning with "vuttūpacāra" etc., it is stated that there is a dukkaṭa for one who, having relinquished the stated boundary of the vihāra, either spreads (a bed) in the boundary or in the open air, or has (someone) spread it, or sits down there. There, the construction is that in all cases, his dwelling is prohibited. There, vihārassā: of the monastic furnishing as stated above. Upacāre: In the vicinity. Abbhokāse: In a courtyard area not very close to that monastic furnishing.
Nisīdato vātivāggahaṇena nipajjato vā dvepi karontassa vāti saṅgaṇhāti. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘abhinisīdati vā abhinipajjati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 122).Tatthāti tasmiṃ pubbūpagatassa patte senāsane.Sabbatthevāti yathāvuttūpacārato anto ca bahi ca antamaso ajjhokāsepīti sabbattheva.Tassāti anattamanassa anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappayato tassa visabhāgapuggalassa.Nivāso vāritoparaviheṭhakena sahavāsassa mahānatthakarattāti adhippāyo. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘evarūpena hi visabhāgapuggalena ekavihāre vā ekaṅgaṇe vā vasantena attho natthi, tasmā sabbatthevassa nivāso vārito’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 122).
Nisīdato vā: The particle vā includes either for one who lies down, or for one who does both. As the Pāḷi says, "abhinisīdati vā abhinipajjati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā: either sits down or lies down, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 122). Tattha: There, in that monastic furnishing that is in the possession of one who arrived earlier. Sabbatthevā: In all places, from the stated boundary, both inside and outside, even in the open air. Tassā: Of that individual who is displeased, who makes a bed without deferring, that non-conforming individual. Nivāso vārito: His dwelling is prohibited, the intention is because living together with one who harasses others is greatly harmful. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Indeed, there is no benefit from living in the same vihāra or in the same courtyard with such a non-conforming individual; therefore, his dwelling is prohibited in all places" (pāci. aṭṭha. 122).
1087.‘‘Sītādiupapīḷitassā’’ti padacchedo, sītādīhi upapīḷitassa bādhitassāti attho.Ādi-saddena ‘‘uṇhena vā’’tiādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yathāha ‘‘sītena vā uṇhena vā pīḷito pavisatī’’ti. Etthaāpadānāma bahi sayantassa jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyāpajjanaṃ.
1087."Sītādiupapīḷitassā" is the word division, the meaning is for one who is afflicted, troubled by cold etc. The ādi (etc.) includes "uṇhena vā" (or by heat) etc. As it says, "sītena vā uṇhena vā pīḷito pavisati: he enters being afflicted by cold or heat." Here, āpadā means the incurring of a danger to life or the holy life for one who sleeps outside.
1088.Idaṃsikkhāpadaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ hotīti yojanā.
1088.Idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ hoti: This training rule involves painful feeling, that is the construction.
Anupakhajjakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Story on Not Deferring.
1089.Nikkaḍḍheyyāti nīhareyya.Nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vāti nīharāpeyya vā.
1089.Nikkaḍḍheyyā: He should take it out. Nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vā: Or he should have (someone) take it out.
1990.Bahū bhūmiyo vālikātalasaṅkhātā yassa sobahubhūmo,pāsādo. Samāsantavidhivasena ‘‘bahubhūmo’’ti vuccati.
1990.Bahū bhūmiyo vālikātalasaṅkhātā yassa so bahubhūmo: A palace, which has many stories that are accounted as sandy levels. It is called "bahubhūmo" (many-storied) in the manner of compounded nominal stems.
1091.Ṭhapetvā ṭhapetvāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne gatinivattiṃ katvā katvā.
1091.Ṭhapetvā ṭhapetvā: Having made comings and goings in that very place.
1092.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘nikkhamā’ti ekavacanena gacchante anekepi dvārakoṭṭhake atikkante āṇāpakassa ekāva āpatti hoti, ṭhitaṭṭhānato ṭhatvā ṭhatvā nīharantassa dvārakoṭṭhagaṇanāya hotī’’ti ayaṃ nayo.Āṇattiyā khaṇeyevāti ‘‘imaṃ nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti āṇattikkhaṇeyeva.
1092. Ayaṃ nayo means: "Even if several doorposts are crossed when going out with a single utterance 'go out,' the one who commands incurs only one offense. But for one who stands and removes it, standing each time, the offense is counted by the number of doorposts." This is the principle. Āṇattiyā khaṇeyevā means: At the very moment of the command, "Drag this out."
1093.Ekāvāti ettha ‘‘pācitti hotī’’ti vattabbo.Bahukāni ceti ettha ‘‘dvārānī’’ti vattabbaṃ, atikkāmetīti sambandho. ‘‘Ettake dvārakoṭṭhake atikkamāpetvā nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti ca ‘‘yāva pariyantadvārakoṭṭhakā nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti ca ‘‘bahū dvārakoṭṭhake atikkāmetvā nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti ca āṇattattā bahū dvārakoṭṭhake atikkāmetvā sace nikkaḍḍhatīti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana ettakāni dvārāni nikkaḍḍhāhī’ti vā ‘yāva mahādvāraṃ, tāva nikkaḍḍhāhī’ti vā evaṃ niyametvā āṇatto hoti, dvāragaṇanāya pācittiyānī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 126). Bahūni pācittiyāni hontīti yojanā.
1093. In Ekāvā, "there is a pācittiya" should be said. In Bahukāni ce, "doors" should be said, connected with "crosses." The meaning is that if one drags something out after commanding, "Have (it) dragged out, crossing so many doorposts," or "Drag (it) out as far as the final doorpost," or "Have (it) dragged out, crossing many doorposts," then one incurs offenses for crossing many doorposts. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "But if he is commanded, having specified, 'Drag out so many doors,' or 'Drag out as far as the main door,' then there are pācittiyas according to the number of doors" (pāci. aṭṭha. 126). The construction is that there are many pācittiyas.
1094.Upaṭṭhānasālādīti ettha nissakkatthe paccattavacanato upaṭṭhānasālāditoti attho gahetabbo.‘‘Upacārato’’ti iminā samānādhikaraṇattā vihārassa upaṭṭhānasālādito upacāratoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhagaṇṭhipade‘‘upacāro nāma upaṭṭhānasālādimattamevā’’ti. Kāyenapi vācāyapi tathā nikkaḍḍhane ca dukkaṭanti vakkhamānena saha yojanā.Tassāti upasampannassa.Ādi-saddena maṇḍapādayo gahitā. Yathāha ‘‘vihārassa upacārā vā upaṭṭhānasālāya vā maṇḍapā vā rukkhamūlā vā ajjhokāsā vā nikkaḍḍhati vā nikkaḍḍhāpeti vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 127).‘‘Vācāyā’’ti iminā ‘‘nikkhamā’’ti ca ‘‘imaṃ nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti āṇāpanañca gahitaṃ.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ekena payogena ekāpatti, nānāpayogesu payogagaṇanāya, dvāragaṇanāya vā hotīti vuttameva pakāraṃ upasaṃharati.
1094. Upaṭṭhānasālādī here, due to the separate wording implying lack of possession, should be understood as "from the upaṭṭhānasālā, etc." ‘‘Upacārato’’ because it is in apposition, means that the vihāra's upacāra is from the upaṭṭhānasālā, etc. As the Gaṇṭhipada says, "Upacāra means only the upaṭṭhānasālā, etc." This connects with what will be said: "And with body or speech when dragging out in that way, there is a dukkaṭa." Tassā means of the one who is fully ordained. The Ādi-word includes maṇḍapas, etc. As it is said, "He drags out or has dragged out (a person) from the upacāra of the vihāra, or from the upaṭṭhānasālā, or a maṇḍapa, or the foot of a tree, or the open air, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 127). ‘‘Vācāyā’’ here includes both "go out" and the command "drag this out." ‘‘Tathā’’ here summarizes the manner that has been stated, that there is one offense for one application, or according to the count of applications, or according to the number of doors.
1095.‘‘Tathā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘itaraṃ nikkaḍḍhantassa dukkaṭa’’nti imināpi yojetabbaṃ. Yathā vihārūpacārato upaṭṭhānasālādito upasampannaṃ nikkaḍḍhantassa, nikkaḍḍhāpentassa ca dukkaṭaṃ hoti, tathā anupasampannassa vihārato ca vihārūpacārato ca nikkaḍḍhanādiṃ karontassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Tathā vihārassūpacārā vā vihārā vā sabbesampi parikkhāraṃ nikkaḍḍhantassa dukkaṭanti yojanā.Sabbesanti upasampannānupasampannānaṃ.Parikkhāranti antamaso rajanachallipi saṅgayhati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘antamaso rajanachallimpī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 126).
1095. This ‘‘Tathā’’ should also be connected with "there is a dukkaṭa for one who drags out another." Just as there is a dukkaṭa for dragging out or having dragged out a fully ordained person from the vihārūpacāra or from the upaṭṭhānasālā, etc., so too, there is a dukkaṭa for a bhikkhu who does the dragging out, etc., of a not-fully-ordained person from the vihāra and from the vihārūpacāra. Similarly, there is a dukkaṭa for dragging out any of the requisites from the upacāra of the vihāra or from the vihāra itself. Sabbesa means of both the fully ordained and not fully ordained. Parikkhāra includes even a rag for removing dust. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "even a rag for removing dust" (pāci. aṭṭha. 126).
1096.‘‘Asambaddhesū’’ti iminā byatirekato asithilabaddhesu parikkhāresu ekissāyeva āpattiyā sambhavaṃ dasseti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘gāḷhaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapitesu pana ekāva āpattī’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 126). Sithilabandhanaṃ pana sammā bandhanaṃ na hotīti asambaddhavacanena gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Assabhikkhussa vatthūnaṃ gaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ paridīpayeti yojanā, parikkhāraṃ nīharantassa, nīharāpentassa ca assa bhikkhunoti vuttaṃ hoti.
1096. ‘‘Asambaddhesū’’ shows the possibility of only one offense in the case of requisites loosely bound, by distinguishing them from those firmly bound. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "But it is said in the Mahāpaccariya, 'If they are tied and placed tightly, there is only one offense'" (pāci. aṭṭha. 126). It should be understood that loose binding is not proper binding, so it is included by the word "asambaddha." The construction, "reveals a dukkaṭa according to the count of the bhikkhu's belongings," means of that bhikkhu when removing or having removed the requisites.
1097-8.Antevāsinti casaddhivihārikanti ca ettha ‘‘asammāvattanta’’nti seso. Yathāhaanāpattivāre‘‘antevāsikaṃ vā saddhivihārikaṃ vā na sammā vattantaṃ nikkaḍḍhatī’’tiādi (pāci. 128).Nikkaḍḍhantassāti ettha ‘‘nikkaḍḍhāpentassā’’ti seso. Asammāvattantaṃ antevāsiṃ vā alajjiṃ vā tathā asammāvattantaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ vā ummattakaṃ vātesaṃantevāsiādīnaṃ parikkhāraṃ vā attano vasanaṭṭhānā vā tathā vissāsikassa vasanaṭṭhānā vā nikkaḍḍhantassa, nikkaḍḍhāpentassa vā upasampannaṃ vā anupasampannaṃ vā saṅghikavihārā nikkaḍḍhantassa sayaṃ ummattakassa vā anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
1097-8. In Antevāsi and saddhivihārika, "who does not behave properly" is understood. As it says in the Anāpattivāra, "He drags out an antevāsika or a saddhivihārika who does not behave properly," etc. (pāci. 128). In Nikkaḍḍhantassā, "nikkaḍḍhāpentassā" is understood. He drags out an antevāsika who does not behave properly or is shameless, or similarly a saddhivihārika who does not behave properly or is insane; or he drags out or has dragged out the requisites of tesaṃ, the antevāsika, etc., or from their dwelling place; or similarly from the dwelling place of a trustworthy person; or he drags out or has dragged out a fully ordained or not fully ordained person from a sanghika vihāra; or there is no offense for himself when insane; thus the meaning is declared.
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘alajjīādayo pana attano vasanaṭṭhānatoyeva nikkaḍḍhitabbā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 128) vuttaṃ,pāḷiyañca ‘‘attano puggalike anāpattī’’ti (pāci. 127) vuttaṃ, ‘‘attano vissāsikassa vasanaṭṭhānā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti ce? Imasseva pāṭhassa anulomato vuttaṃ. Antevāsikantiādīsu paṭhamaṃ asammāvattanādibhāvena ‘‘nikkaḍḍhissāmī’’ti cintetvā nikkaḍḍhantassa cittalahuparivattitāya kope uppannepi anāpatti.
In the Aṭṭhakathā it is said, "But the shameless ones, etc., should be dragged out from their own dwelling place" (pāci. aṭṭha. 128), and in the Pāḷi it is said, "There is no offense in one's own private (quarters)" (pāci. 127). Why is this, "from the dwelling place of one's trustworthy person," said? It is said to conform with this very reading. In the case of the antevāsika, etc., even if anger arises due to a change of mind, when he drags out (someone), having first thought, due to improper behavior, etc., "I will drag (him) out," there is no offense.
1099.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘nikkaḍḍhantassā’’ti ca tattheva sesaṃ ‘‘nikkaḍḍhāpentassā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 126) ca ‘‘tassa parikkhāraṃ vā’’ti ca yathāvuttaṃ upasaṃharati.‘‘Saṅghārāmāpi sabbasmā’’ti idaṃ kalahakārakeneva yojetabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhaṇḍanakārakakalahakārakameva sakalasaṅghārāmato nikkaḍḍhituṃ labhati. So hi pakkhaṃ labhitvā saṅghampi bhindeyyā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 128).Idaṃ tūti ettha visesatthajotakenatu-saddena vuttavisesanaṃ vinā avasesavinicchayo anantarasadisoyevāti dīpeti.Tisamuṭṭhānaṃkāyacittavācācittakāyavācācittato samuṭṭhānatoti.
1099. ‘‘Tathā’’ here summarizes "for the one dragging out," and in that same place, the remainder, "for the one having (him) dragged out" (pāci. aṭṭha. 126), and "or his requisites," as has been stated. ‘‘Saṅghārāmāpi sabbasmā’’ should be connected only with one who makes quarrels. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Only one who makes disputes and quarrels is allowed to be dragged out from the entire saṅghārāma. For that one, having gained a faction, might even split the Saṅgha" (pāci. aṭṭha. 128). Idaṃ tū here, with the particle tu that indicates distinction, shows that the remaining decision is similar to the immediately preceding one, without the stated distinctions. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ means arising from kāyacitta, vācācitta, and kāyavācācitta.
Nikkaḍḍhanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Nikkaḍḍhanakathā.
1100-1.Majjhimāsīsaghaṭṭāyāti sīsaṃ na ghaṭṭetītiasīsaghaṭṭā,majjhimassa asīsaghaṭṭā majjhimāsīsaghaṭṭā, tāya, pamāṇamajjhimassa purisassa sīsāghaṭṭanappamāṇubbedhaheṭṭhimatalāyāti attho.Vehāsakuṭiyāti padarādīhi upari acchannatalāya dvibhūmikādibhedāya kuṭiyā.Uparīti matthake, akatapadarādiattharaṇāya tulāmattayuttāya uparimataleti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yāhi kāhici upari acchannatalā dvibhūmikakuṭi vā tibhūmikādikuṭi vā ‘vehāsakuṭī’ti vuccati, idha pana asīsaghaṭṭā adhippetā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 131).Āhaccapādakemañceti ‘‘āhaccapādako nāma mañco aṅge vijjhitvā ṭhito hotī’’tipāḷiyaṃdassite aṭanisīsāni vijjhitvā pādasikhaṃ āvuṇitvā uparisikhāya anākoṭitaāṇimhi ṭhitamañceti attho. Āhaccapādake pīṭheti sambandho. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘āhaccapādakaṃ nāma pīṭhaṃ aṅge vijjhitvā ṭhitaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. 131). Soyevattho.
1100-1. Majjhimāsīsaghaṭṭāyā means asīsaghaṭṭā, one where the head does not strike; majjhimassa asīsaghaṭṭā, majjhimāsīsaghaṭṭā, by that, it means the lower level with a height that is about the height for the head of a person of medium size to strike. Vehāsakuṭiyā means of a kuṭi with an upper level not covered by padara, etc., and with divisions into two levels, etc. Uparī means at the top, it means the upper level fitted with a balance-beam (tulā) without a padara, etc., spread out. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "A two-storied kuṭi or a three-storied kuṭi, or any kuṭi with an upper level that is not covered is called a 'vehāsakuṭī,' but here, one that is asīsaghaṭṭā is intended" (pāci. aṭṭha. 131). Āhaccapādake mañce means the mañca described in the Pāḷi: "An āhaccapādaka mañca is one that stands having pierced the limbs," that is, a mañca standing with the leg-pegs piercing the aṭani-joints, encircling the top of the legs, and resting on the anākoṭita-nails at the upper end. The relation is to the āhaccapādaka pīṭha. As it is said in the Pāḷi: "An āhaccapādaka pīṭha is one that stands having pierced the limbs" (pāci. 131). The meaning is just that.
Tasmiṃāhaccapādake mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdantassa vā nipajjantassa vā tassa bhikkhuno payogagaṇanāya pācittiyo siyunti yojanā.
On Tasmiṃ that āhaccapādaka mañca or pīṭha, for that bhikkhu who sits or lies down, there are pācittiyas according to the number of efforts.
1102-3.Saṅghike saṅghikasaññivematikapuggalikasaññīnaṃ vasenatikapācittiyaṃ. Puggaleti puggalike vihāre. Vehāsakuṭiyā…pe… gaṇanāyeva tassa tikadukkaṭanti yojanā. Puggalike saṅghikasaññivematikaaññapuggalikasaññīnaṃ vasenatikadukkaṭaṃ.
1102-3. In the case of a saṅghika (seat), there is a tikapācittiyaṃ depending on whether one perceives it as saṅghika, saññivematika, or puggalaika. Puggale means in a puggalaika vihāra. Vehāsakuṭiyā…pe… the tikadukkaṭa occurs simply by counting. In a puggalaika (seat), there is a tikadukkaṭaṃ depending on whether one perceives it as saṅghika, saññivematika, or another puggalaika.
Heṭṭhā aparibhoge vāti dārusambhārādīnaṃ vasena heṭṭhimatale avalañje vā.Sīsaghaṭṭāya vāti sīsaghaṭṭanappamāṇatalāya kuṭiyā vā.Avehāsavihāre vāti avehāsakuṭiyā bhūmiyaṃ katapaṇṇasālādīsu. Etthāpi‘‘vissāsikavihāre’’ti idaṃ ‘‘attano puggalike anāpattī’’ti (pāci. 132) imassa anulomanato vuttaṃ.
Heṭṭhā aparibhoge vā means on the lower level or in the avalañja, depending on whether it is materials of wood, etc. Sīsaghaṭṭāya vā means in a kuṭi with a level that is about the height for the head to strike. Avehāsavihāre vā means in a paṇṇasālā, etc., built on the ground without a vehāsakuṭī. Here too, ‘‘vissāsikavihāre’’ is said to conform to this: "There is no offense in one's own private (quarters)" (pāci. 132).
1104.Yattha paṭāṇi vā dinnāti yasmiṃ mañce pādasīsānaṃ upari aṭanimatthakato tiriyaṃ āṇi pavesitā hoti, tattha abhinisīdato, abhinipajjato vā na dosoti yojanā.Tatthāti pubbe vuttaapavesitapaṭāṇimhi mañce vā pīṭhe vā.‘‘Ṭhatvā’’ti iminā nipajjanaṃ nivatteti.Lagetīti uparibaddhaaṅkusasikkādīsu yaṃ kiñci parikkhāraṃ lageti.Idaṃsikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānatoeḷakalomenasikkhāpadena samaṃ matanti yojanā.
1104. Yattha paṭāṇi vā dinnā means in whichever mañca a nail is driven in diagonally from above the top of the aṭani-joint over the leg-pegs, there is no offense in sitting down or lying down. Tatthā means on that mañca or pīṭha with paṭāṇis previously mentioned as not driven in. ‘‘Ṭhatvā’’ prevents lying down. Lagetī means he attaches any requisite to the hanging hooks or straps, etc., fastened above. This sikkhaāpada is considered the same as the eḷakalomena sikkhāpada with respect to origin (samuṭṭhāna).
Vehāsakuṭikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Vehāsakuṭikathā.
1105.Yāva dvārassa kosamhāti ettha ‘‘mahallakassa vihārassā’’ti seso, ‘‘mahallako nāma vihāro sassāmiko vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 136)pāḷiyaṃvuttattā kārāpetānaṃ dāyakānaṃ sambhavato mahallakassa ‘‘vihāro nāma ullitto vā hoti avalitto vā ullittāvalitto vā’’ti dassitabhedassa vihārassa dvārakosasaṅkhātapiṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa ‘‘samantā hatthapāsā’’ti (pāci. 136)pāḷiyaṃvuttadvārakavāṭaputhulappamāṇadvārabāhasamīpaṃ avadhiṃ katvāti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘dvārakoso nāma piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa samantā kavāṭavitthārappamāṇo okāso’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).
1105. Yāva dvārassa kosamhā here, "of a large vihāra" is understood, because in the Pāḷi it is said, "a large vihāra is said to be one with an owner" (pāci. 136), since the dāyakas who had it made are likely to be (present). "A vihāra is said to be one that is plastered or unplastered or both plastered and unplastered," having made the door-casing called piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa, taking the vicinity of the door-jambs, "a hand-span all around" (pāci. 136) described in the Pāḷi, the measure of the width of the door leaves, as the limit. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "The door-casing is the space all around the piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa that is the measure of the width of the leaves" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).
Aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyāti ettha aggaḷasahacariyena taṃsahitadvārakavāṭena yuttadvārabāhānameva vuttattā dvārabāhānaṃ niccalatthāyāti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sakavāṭassa dvārabandhassa niccalabhāvatthāyāti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).Limpitabbanti ettha ‘‘punappuna’’nti seso. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘punappunaṃ limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). Tiṇamattikānaṃ upari punappunaṃ mattikālepo kātabboti attho.
Aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā here, because the door-jambs together with the door leaves associated with the bolt have been spoken of, it means for the immovability of the door-jambs. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "The meaning is for the immovability of the door-frame with its leaves" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). Limpitabba here, "again and again" is understood. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "It should be plastered or caused to be plastered again and again" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). It means a layer of clay should be applied again and again on top of the grass and clay.
1106-7.Yo ñeyyo, ayaṃ nayoti sambandho, ‘‘punappunaṃ limpitabbaṃ vā lepāpetabbameva vā’’ti yo vutto,ayaṃ nayoveditabboti attho. Ālokaṃ sandheti pidhetītiālokasandhi,vātapānakavāṭānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘ālokasandhīti vātapānakavāṭakā vuccantī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). Ettha kavāṭassa sāmantā kavāṭadvāraphalakavitthārappamāṇaṃ lepaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sabbadisāsu kavāṭavitthārappamāṇo okāso’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).
1106-7. Yo ñeyyo, ayaṃ nayoti sambandho, that which has been said, "it should be plastered or caused to be plastered again and again," ayaṃ nayo should be known. Ālokaṃ sandheti pidhetīti ālokasandhi, this is a designation for window shutters. As it says, "Ālokasandhi means window shutters" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). Here, the place for plastering all around the shutter is the measure of the width of the shutter door-panel. As it says, "The space all around in every direction is the measure of the width of the shutter" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).
Gaṇṭhipadesupana tīsupi punappunaṃ lepadānassa vuttappamāṇato aññattha paṭikkhittamattaṃ ṭhapetvā pācittiyassa avuttattā dukkaṭaṃ anurūpanti vuttaṃ.
In the Gaṇṭhipada, however, because the pācittiya has not been stated elsewhere than in the stated measure for giving the plaster repeatedly in all three cases, except for putting a stop to it, a dukkaṭa is appropriate, it is said.
Chadanassātipadabhājanevuttānaṃ iṭṭhakāsilāsudhātiṇapaṇṇacchadanānaṃ aññatarassa.Dvattipariyāyanti etthaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pariyāyenāti parikkhepena, evaṃ chadanaṃ pana tiṇapaṇṇehi labbhatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 136) vuttattāpariyāyanti tiṇehi vā paṇṇehi vā parikkhipitvā chadanameva gahetabbaṃ. Iṭṭhakāya vā silāya vā sudhāya vā chadane labbhamānaṃ maggena chadanaṃ pana upalakkhaṇavasena labbhati. Dvattipariyāyena chadanañca ‘‘sabbampi cetaṃ chadanaṃ chadanūpari veditabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 136)aṭṭhakathāvacanato uparūpari chadanavasena veditabbaṃ.Haritaṃnāma pubbaṇṇādi. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘haritanti cettha sattadhaññabhedaṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ, muggamāsatilakulatthaalābukumbhaṇḍādibhedañca aparaṇṇaṃ adhippeta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). Imesu aññatarassābhāvena aharitaṃ nāma.
Chadanassā means of one of the types of roofing mentioned in the padabhājana: bricks, stones, stucco, grass, or leaves. Dvattipariyāya here, because in the Aṭṭhakathā it is said, "pariyāyena means by surrounding. But such roofing is obtained with grass or leaves" (pāci. aṭṭha. 136), pariyāya means only roofing surrounded with grass or leaves should be taken. Roofing by means of bricks, stones, or stucco is obtained by searching. Moreover, roofing by means of dvattipariyāya should be understood as roofing one upon another, according to the Aṭṭhakathā statement: "All this roofing should be understood as roofing upon roofing" (pāci. aṭṭha. 136). Haritaṃ means pubbaṇṇa, etc. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Here, harita means both pubbaṇṇa, the seven kinds of grain, and aparaṇṇa in varieties such as mugga beans, māsa beans, sesame, kulattha beans, gourds, and pumpkins" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). Aharitaṃ means lacking any of these.
Adhiṭṭheyyanti vidhātabbaṃ.Tato uddhanti tīhi pariyāyehi vā tīhi maggehi vā uddhaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vā pariyāyānaṃ vā uparī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 136).Pācittiyaṃ hotīti vakkhamānadūratāya yutte aharitaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā saṃvidahitvā tikkhattuṃ chādāpetvā tatiyavāre ‘‘evaṃ karohī’’ti āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbaṃ. Apakkamantena tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ, tato uttari catutthavāre chadanatthaṃ vidahantassa iṭṭhakādigaṇanāya, tiṇesu tiṇagaṇanāya, paṇṇesu paṇṇagaṇanāya pācittiyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhapāḷiyaṃ‘‘maggena chādentassa dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyāya maggaṃ āṇāpetvā pakkamitabba’’ntiādi (pāci. 136).Tatiyāya magganti etthatatiyāyāti upayogatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, tatiyaṃ magganti attho.Tatthāti harite, ‘‘sace harite ṭhito adhiṭṭhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 137) vacanato adhiṭṭhānāya tiṭṭhatoti labbhati. Bījaropanato paṭṭhāya yāva sassaṃ tiṭṭhati, tāvaharitaṃnāma. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yasmimpi khette vuttaṃ bījaṃ na tāva sampajjati, vasse pana patite sampajjissatī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).
Adhiṭṭheyyanti: Should decide. Tato uddhanti: Above by three methods or three paths. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Above three paths or methods" (pāci. aṭṭha. 136). Pācittiyaṃ hotī: Standing in a non-green area suitable for the distance to be mentioned, having arranged, having covered three times, and on the third time, having ordered, "Do it this way," one should leave. If one does not leave and remains silent, it is said to be Pācittiya for deciding to cover a fourth time or more, by counting bricks etc., counting blades of grass among grass, counting leaves among leaves. As it is said in the Pāḷi: "When covering a path, having decided on two paths, one should leave after ordering the third path," etc. (pāci. 136). Tatiyāya magganti: Here, tatiyāyā is a dative of use, meaning the third path. Tatthā: In green, "If he stands in green and decides, there is an offense of dukkata" (pāci. 137), so it is obtained that he stands for the decision. From the time of planting seeds until the crop remains, it is called haritaṃ. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "In whatever field the seed is sown, it has not yet ripened, but if rain falls, it will ripen," etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 135).
1108-9.Aharitaṭṭhānepi tiṭṭhato paricchedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘piṭṭhivaṃse’’tiādi.‘‘Piṭṭhivaṃse’’ti idaṃ vaṃsayuttasenāsanavasena vuttaṃ. Kaṇṇikaṃ gāhāpetvā katasenāsanassāpi upalakkhaṇaṃ hoti.Piṭṭhivaṃseti ca ‘‘gaṅgāyaṃ ghoso’’tiādīsu viya sāmīpikādhāre bhummaṃ. Kutoyaṃ viseso labbhatīti?Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘piṭṭhivaṃsassa vā kūṭāgārakaṇṇikāya vā upari, thupikāya vā passe nisinno hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 135) vuttavidhānato labbhati. ‘‘Nisinno’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanatoṭhitoti ettha gatinivattisāmaññena nisinno ca vuttoti gahetabbo.Yasmiṃ ṭhāneti ettha ‘‘aharite’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.‘‘Ṭhātu’’nti idaṃ adhiṭṭhānakaraṇatthāya ṭhānaṃ gahetvā vuttanti ‘‘tassa anto aharitepi ṭhatvā adhiṭṭhātuṃ na labbhatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 136)aṭṭhakathāvacanato viññāyati.
1108-9.To show the limit of standing even in a non-green area, he says, ‘‘piṭṭhivaṃse’’tiādi. ‘‘Piṭṭhivaṃse’’: This is said in terms of a dwelling with a bamboo frame. It is also indicative of a dwelling made by having a cornice installed. Piṭṭhivaṃse is a locative on the basis of proximity, like in "ghoso in the Ganges". From where is this distinction obtained? It is obtained from the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Whether he is sitting on the back frame, or on the roof-peak cornice, or near the pinnacle" (pāci. aṭṭha. 135). From the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "nisinno", ṭhito here, with the generality of stopping movement, "nisinno" is also stated, so it should be taken as included. Yasmiṃ ṭhāne: Here, it is obtained from the context of "aharite". ‘‘Ṭhātu’’: This is said having taken a place for the purpose of making a decision, and it is understood from the Aṭṭhakathā statement that "one cannot stand and decide even in the non-green area within it" (pāci. aṭṭha. 136).
Patanokāsatoti ettha paṭhamatthe to-paccayo.Tañhi ṭhānaṃ vihārassa patanokāsoti yojanā.Hīti hetuatthe vattamānato yasmā aharite patantassa vihārassetaṃ ṭhānaṃ patanokāso, tasmā tattha ṭhātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti gahetabbaṃ.
Patanokāsato: Here, the suffix "to" is in the sense of the first. Indeed, that place is a place of falling for the monastery, this is the connection. Because it is operating in the sense of cause, since this place is a place of falling for the monastery falling in the non-green area, therefore it should be taken that it is not proper to stand there.
1111.Imasmiṃ sikkhāpade ādo tāva vihārapadassapadabhājane‘‘vihāro nāma ullitto vā’’tiādivuttattā (pāci. aṭṭha. 136) tabbipariyāyato tiṇeheva katachadanabhittikā kuṭi tiṇakuṭikāti viññāyatīti tiṇachadanā kuṭikātiṇakuṭikā.
1111.In this sikkhāpada, first, in the padabhājane of the word vihāra, it is stated that "a vihāra is one that is plastered," etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 136), and from its opposite, it is understood that a hut with a roof and walls made of grass is a grass hut, so a hut roofed with grass is tiṇakuṭikā.
Dvattipariyāyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the two-three method discourse.
1112.Jānanti toyassa sappāṇakabhāvaṃ jānanto.Siñceyya siñcāpeyyāti ettha ‘‘tena udakenā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tena udakena sayaṃ vā siñceyyā’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 140).
1112.Jānanti: Knowing the water to be living. Siñceyya siñcāpeyyā: Here, it should be stated, "with that water". As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Whether he sprinkles himself with that water," etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 140).
1113.Yo pana dhāraṃ acchinditvā sace mattikaṃ siñceyya, evaṃ siñcato tassāti yojanā.
1113.Yo pana dhāraṃ acchinditvā sace mattikaṃ siñceyya, evaṃ siñcato tassāti yojanā.
1114-5.Sandamānakanti toyavāhiniṃ.Mātikaṃāḷiṃ.Sammukhaṃ karontassāti udakaṃ nhāyitumicchitaṃ yadi, sayaṃ abhimukhaṃ karontassa. Tattha tattha bandhatoassabhikkhussa payogagaṇanāya āpatti siyāti yojanā.Payogagaṇanāti payogagaṇanāya, udakaṃ bandhitvā bandhitvā yathicchitadisābhimukhakaraṇapayogānaṃ gaṇanāyāti attho.
1114-5.Sandamānakanti: A flowing stream. Mātikaṃ: A bank. Sammukhaṃ karontassā: If he wants to bathe in the water, to him making it face. Tattha tattha bandhatoassa: For that monk, an offense would occur by the calculation of effort, this is the connection. Payogagaṇanā: By the calculation of effort, the calculation of efforts of damming and damming water, directing it as desired, this is the meaning.
1116-7.Yaṃ jalaṃ tiṇādimhi pakkhitte sace khayaṃ vā āvilattaṃ vā gacchati, tādise udake mattikaṃ, tiṇameva vā sace sakaṭapuṇṇampi ekato pakkhipeyya, evaṃ pakkhipantassa ekā pācitti.Ekekaṃmattikaṃ, tiṇameva vā.Vā-saddena kaṭṭhagomayādiṃ vā pakkhipantassa payogagaṇanāya pācittiyanti yojanā.Āvilattanti pāṇakā yathā nassanti, tathā āluḷitabhāvaṃ. Iminā evaṃ avinassamānapāṇake mahāudake tiṇādiṃ pakkhipantassa anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘idaṃ pana mahāudakaṃ…pe… sandhāya vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 140).
1116-7.Yaṃ jalaṃ tiṇādimhi pakkhitte sace khayaṃ vā āvilattaṃ vā gacchati, tādise udake mattikaṃ, tiṇameva vā sace sakaṭapuṇṇampi ekato pakkhipeyya, evaṃ pakkhipantassa ekā pācitti.
1118.Dukkaṭaṃ hotīti āṇāpanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ hoti.Ekāpācitti.
Ekekaṃmattikaṃ, tiṇameva vā.Vā-saddena kaṭṭhagomayādiṃ vā pakkhipantassa payogagaṇanāya pācittiyanti yojanā.Āvilattanti pāṇakā yathā nassanti, tathā āluḷitabhāvaṃ. Iminā evaṃ avinassamānapāṇake mahāudake tiṇādiṃ pakkhipantassa anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘idaṃ pana mahāudakaṃ…pe… sandhāya vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 140).
1119.Sabbatthāti sappāṇake ca appāṇake ca.Vimatissāti sahacariyena vimatisahitamāha.
1118.Dukkaṭaṃ hotī: Because of the order, there is a dukkata.Ekāpācitti.
1120.‘‘Sabbatthāpāṇasaññissā’’tiādīsu adhikārato labbhamānaṃ ‘‘siñcanādīsu yaṃ kiñci karontassā’’ti idaṃ paccekaṃ sambandhanīyaṃ.Sabbatthāti sappāṇake, appāṇake ca.Apāṇasaññissāti evaṃ katena payogena nassamānā pāṇakā na santītisaññissa.Asañciccāti yathā pāṇakā na nassanti, evaṃ ghaṭādīhi gahitaṃ sappāṇakaudakaṃ udakeyeva osiñcantassa vā osiñcāpentassa vā vaṭṭitvā tasmiṃ udake tiṇādimhi patite asañcicca kataṃ nāma hoti.Asatissāti asatiyā karontassa.Ajānatoti pāṇakānaṃ atthibhāvaṃ ajānitvā karontassa.
1119.Sabbatthā: In all, both with living beings and without living beings. Vimatissā: With association, he speaks with doubt.
1121-2.Vadhakacitte sati sattame sappāṇakavaggepaṭhamasikkhāpadassavisayabhāvato tato visesetumāha‘‘vinā vadhakacittenā’’ti. Imasmiṃ sikkhāpadepāḷiyaṃ(pāci. 140) ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udaka’’nti imināaṭṭhakathāgataṃ paṭhamaṅgañca ‘‘jāna’’nti iminā dutiyaṅgañca ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti iminā catutthaṅgañca vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ tatiyaṅgaṃ. Tañca kho vadhakacittassa sattamavaggepaṭhamasikkhāpadenapācittiyavacanato ettha tadabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ tatiyaṅgaṃ vuttameva hotītiadhippāyenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanti āha ‘‘vinā vadhakacittenā’’ti. Tenevāha‘‘cattārevassa aṅgāni, niddiṭṭhāni mahesinā’’ti.Assāti imassa sikkhāpadassa.
1120.‘‘Sabbatthāpāṇasaññissā’’tiādīsu adhikārato labbhamānaṃ ‘‘siñcanādīsu yaṃ kiñci karontassā’’ti idaṃ paccekaṃ sambandhanīyaṃ.Sabbatthā: In all, both with living beings and without living beings. Apāṇasaññissā: Being under the impression that there are no living beings perishing due to such an action. Asañciccā: Without intention, if living beings do not perish in that way, to him pouring water with living beings taken in a pot etc., pouring it only in the water, or having it poured, and grass etc. falls into that water inadvertently, it is called done unintentionally. Asatissā: Doing it without mindfulness. Ajānato: Doing it without knowing the existence of living beings.
1123.Sappāṇakasaññissa ‘‘paribhogena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti pubbabhāge jānantassāpi siñcanasiñcāpanaṃ ‘‘padīpe nipatitvā paṭaṅgādipāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānantassa padīpujjalanaṃ viya vināpi vadhakacetanāya hotīti āha‘‘paṇṇattivajjaṃ ticitta’’nti. Ettha kismiñci kupitassa vā kīḷāpasutassa vā siñcato akusalacittaṃ, mālāgacchādiṃ siñcato kusalacittaṃ, paṇṇattiṃ ajānato khīṇāsavassa abyākatacittanti ticittaṃ veditabbaṃ.Tassāti sattamavagge paṭhamasikkhāpadassa.Assa cāti imassa siñcanasikkhāpadassa ca.Idaṃ visesananti idaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ.Etthaimasmiṃ pakaraṇeniddiṭṭhaṃpakāsitanti attho. Taṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Taṃ akusalacittaṃ, idaṃ ticittaṃ. Taṃ dukkhavedanaṃ, idaṃ tivedananti vuttaṃ hoti.
1121-2.Vadhakacitte sati sattame sappāṇakavaggepaṭhamasikkhāpadassavisayabhāvato tato visesetumāha‘‘vinā vadhakacittenā’’ti. Imasmiṃ sikkhāpadepāḷiyaṃ(pāci. 140) ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udaka’’nti imināaṭṭhakathāgataṃ paṭhamaṅgañca ‘‘jāna’’nti iminā dutiyaṅgañca ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti iminā catutthaṅgañca vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ tatiyaṅgaṃ. Tañca kho vadhakacittassa sattamavaggepaṭhamasikkhāpadenapācittiyavacanato ettha tadabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ tatiyaṅgaṃ vuttameva hotītiadhippāyenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanti āha ‘‘vinā vadhakacittenā’’ti. Tenevāha‘‘cattārevassa aṅgāni, niddiṭṭhāni mahesinā’’ti.Assāti imassa sikkhāpadassa.
Sattamavagge dutiyassa imassa ca ko visesoti ce? Imassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti bāhiraparibhogavasena paṭhamaṃ paññattattā ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā’’ti (pāci. 388) sikkhāpadaṃ attano nahānapānādiparibhogavasena paññattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vā paṭhamaṃ paññattepi attano paribhogavaseneva paññattattā puna idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ bāhiraparibhogavasena paññattanti gahetabbaṃ.
If there is a murderous intention, since it is the subject of the first sikkhāpada in the seventh Sappāṇaka Vagga, to distinguish from that, he says, "vinā vadhakacittenā". In this sikkhāpada, in the Pāḷi (pāci. 140), by "sappāṇakaṃ udaka", the first factor in the Aṭṭhakathā is stated, and by "jāna", the second factor is stated, and by "siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā", the fourth factor is stated, but the third factor is not stated. However, since there is a pācittiya stated in the first sikkhāpada in the seventh Vagga for murderous intent, it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā with the intention that the third factor, characterized by its absence here, is already stated, he says, "vinā vadhakacittenā". Therefore, he says, "cattārevassa aṅgāni, niddiṭṭhāni mahesinā". Assā: Of this sikkhāpada.
Sappāṇakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Sappāṇakasaññissa ‘‘paribhogena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti pubbabhāge jānantassāpi siñcanasiñcāpanaṃ ‘‘padīpe nipatitvā paṭaṅgādipāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānantassa padīpujjalanaṃ viya vināpi vadhakacetanāya hotīti āha‘‘paṇṇattivajjaṃ ticitta’’nti. Ettha kismiñci kupitassa vā kīḷāpasutassa vā siñcato akusalacittaṃ, mālāgacchādiṃ siñcato kusalacittaṃ, paṇṇattiṃ ajānato khīṇāsavassa abyākatacittanti ticittaṃ veditabbaṃ.Tassāti sattamavagge paṭhamasikkhāpadassa.Assa cāti imassa siñcanasikkhāpadassa ca.Idaṃ visesananti idaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ.Etthaimasmiṃ pakaraṇeniddiṭṭhaṃpakāsitanti attho. Taṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Taṃ akusalacittaṃ, idaṃ ticittaṃ. Taṃ dukkhavedanaṃ, idaṃ tivedananti vuttaṃ hoti.
Senāsanavaggo dutiyo.
Even if one knows beforehand, being aware that "living beings will die by using it," sprinkling or having sprinkled, for one who is under the impression of living being, is like lighting a lamp knowing that "moths and other living beings will die by falling into the lamp," it happens even without murderous intent, so he says, "paṇṇattivajjaṃ ticitta". Here, sprinkling with an unwholesome mind by someone angry or devoted to play, sprinkling a flower bush etc. with a wholesome mind, and the mind of a khīṇāsava who does not know the rule is indeterminate, thus, the three minds should be understood. Tassā: Of the first sikkhāpada in the seventh Vagga. Assa cā: And of this sprinkling sikkhāpada. Idaṃ visesana: This is a distinction. Ettha: In this context, niddiṭṭhaṃ means revealed. That is an offense against the world, this is an offense against the rule. That is an unwholesome mind, this is a threefold mind. That is painful feeling, this is threefold feeling, this is said.
1124-6.Aṭṭhaṅgayuttassāti ettha ‘‘sīlavā’’tiādi ekamaṅgaṃ, ‘‘bahussuto’’tiādi dutiyaṃ, ‘‘ubhayāni kho panassā’’tiādi tatiyaṃ, ‘‘kalyāṇavāco hotī’’tiādi catutthaṃ, ‘‘yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo’’ti pañcamaṃ, ‘‘paṭibalo hoti bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’nti chaṭṭhaṃ, ‘‘na kho panetaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissā’’tiādi sattamaṃ, ‘‘vīsativasso vā hoti atirekavīsativasso vā’’ti aṭṭhamanti etāni pāṭhāgatāni aṭṭha aṅgāni nāma. Bhikkhunīnaṃ ovādo, tadatthāya sammutīti viggaho.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Ñatti catutthī yassa kammassāti viggaho. ‘‘Kammenā’’ti seso.
Sattamavagge dutiyassa imassa ca ko visesoti ce? Imassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti bāhiraparibhogavasena paṭhamaṃ paññattattā ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā’’ti (pāci. 388) sikkhāpadaṃ attano nahānapānādiparibhogavasena paññattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vā paṭhamaṃ paññattepi attano paribhogavaseneva paññattattā puna idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ bāhiraparibhogavasena paññattanti gahetabbaṃ.
ñatticatutthenakammena yā bhikkhunovādakasammuti idha anuññātā, tāya asammato yo bhikkhūti yojanā.
What is the difference between the second one in the seventh Vagga and this one? Because the sikkhāpada "siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā" is first laid down in terms of external use, it should be understood that the sikkhāpada "sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā" (pāci. 388) is laid down in terms of one's own use, such as bathing and drinking. Or, even if that one is laid down first, since it is laid down only in terms of one's own use, this sikkhāpada should be taken as laid down again in terms of external use.
Garudhammehi aṭṭhahīti ‘‘vassasatūpasampannāya bhikkhuniyā tadahupasampannassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccupaṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kātabba’’ntiādīhi (pāci. 149)pāḷiyaṃāgatehi aṭṭhahi garudhammehi.Ekaṃbhikkhuniṃ,sambahulāvā bhikkhuniyoti idaṃ pakaraṇato labbhati.Osārentovāti pāḷiṃ uccārentova. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘osāretabbāti pāḷi vattabbā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 149).Te dhammeti pubbe vutte te aṭṭha garudhamme.Ovadeyyāti aṭṭhagarudhammapāḷibhāsanasaṅkhātaṃ ovādaṃ kareyya.
Sappāṇakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Pāṭipade ovādatthāya āgantvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinnā bhikkhuniyo ‘‘tena bhikkhunā’’tiādinā pāṭhāgatanayena ‘‘samaggattha bhaginiyo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘samaggamhayyā’’ti yadi vadeyyuṃ, ‘‘vattanti bhaginiyo aṭṭha garudhammā’’ti punapi pucchitvā ‘‘vattantayyā’’ti yadi vadeyyuṃ, ‘‘eso bhaginiyo ovādo’’ti niyyādeyya. ‘‘Na vattantayyā’’ti yadi vadeyyuṃ, ‘‘vassasatūpasampannāyā’’tiādinā aṭṭhagarudhammapāḷibhāsanavasena ovādaṃ kareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘osārentova te dhamme ovadeyyā’’ti.
Senāsanavaggo dutiyo.
1127.Aññena dhammenāti suttantena vā abhidhammena vā.Ekatoupasampannanti bhikkhunisaṅgheyeva upasampannaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘bhikkhunīnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannāyā’’ti.Tathāti ovadantassa dukkaṭanti dasseti.
1124-6.Aṭṭhaṅgayuttassā: Here, "sīlavā" etc. is one factor, "bahussuto" etc. is the second, "ubhayāni kho panassā" etc. is the third, "kalyāṇavāco hoti" etc. is the fourth, "yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo" is the fifth, "paṭibalo hoti bhikkhuniyo ovaditu" is the sixth, "na kho panetaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissā" etc. is the seventh, "vīsativasso vā hoti atirekavīsativasso vā" is the eighth, thus, these are the eight factors that come in the text. Bhikkhunīnaṃ ovādo, tadatthāya sammutīti viggaho. Idhā: In this sikkhāpada. Ñatti catutthī yassa kammassāti viggaho. "Kammenā"ti seso.
1128.Bhikkhūnaṃ santikeyeva upasampannanti mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā saddhiṃ pabbajitā pañcasatā sākiyāniyo saṅgaṇhāti.Liṅgavipallāseupasampannabhikkhuno liṅgaparivattane sati tathā pācitti eva pakāsitāti attho.
That bhikkhu who is not authorized by the ñatticatutthena kamma that is permitted here for the advice of nuns, this is the connection.
1129.Ovādaṃaniyyādetvāti ‘‘vattanti bhaginiyo aṭṭha garudhammā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘vattantayyā’’ti vutteti etthāpi soyevattho.
Garudhammehi aṭṭhahī: By the eight garudhamma that come in the Pāḷi, such as "a nun ordained for a hundred years should do reverence, rising up, paying homage with joined palms, and proper conduct to a bhikkhu ordained that day" (pāci. 149). Ekaṃbhikkhuniṃ,sambahulāvā bhikkhuniyoti idaṃ pakaraṇato labbhati.Osārentovā: Even reciting the Pāḷi. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "osāretabbāti pāḷi vattabbā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 149). Te dhamme: Those eight garudhamma previously mentioned. Ovadeyyā: Should give advice, that is, should give advice consisting of reciting the eight garudhamma.
1130.Garudhammehi ovadato dukkaṭanti yojanā.
What is said? If nuns who have come to be advised on the pāṭipada, having worshiped, and sitting on one side, were to ask in the way stated in the text beginning with "tena bhikkhunā", "Are you in concord, sisters?", and if they were to say, "We are in concord, venerable ones," if they were to ask again, "Are the eight garudhamma observed, sisters?", and if they were to say, "They are observed, venerable ones," he should hand over, "This is the advice, sisters." If they were to say, "They are not observed, venerable ones," he should give advice by reciting the eight garudhamma beginning with "vassasatūpasampannāyā", this is said. As he says, "osārentova te dhamme ovadeyyā".
1131.Agaṇhantassa ovādanti ettha ovādatthaṃ yācanasandeso tadatthatāya ovādoti gahitoti ovādasāsanaṃ asampaṭicchantassāti attho.Apaccāharatopi tanti taṃ attanā gahitaṃ ovādasāsanaṃ uposathagge ārocetvā pātimokkhuddesakena dinnaṃ paṭisāsanaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghassa netvā avadantassāpi.Bālanti sāsanasampaṭicchanañca uposathaggaṃ netvā ārocanañca paṭisāsanaṃ haritvā pāṭipade bhikkhunisaṅghagaṇapuggalānaṃ yathānurūpaṃ paccārocanañca kātuṃ ajānanatāya bālaṃ.Gilānanti uposathaggaṃ gantvāpi ārocanassa bādhakena gelaññena samannāgataṃ gilānaṃ.Gamikanti pāṭipadaṃ anisīditvā gantabbaṃ accāyikagamanaṃ gamikañca ṭhapetvā dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.
1127.Aññena dhammenā: By another teaching, either by the Suttanta or by the Abhidhamma. Ekatoupasampanna: Ordained only in the Bhikkhunī Sangha. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "To one ordained only in the presence of nuns".Tathā: Thus, it shows that there is a dukkata to him advising.
1132.Kammasminti etthakamma-saddena bhikkhunovādakassa ñatticatutthena kammena dinnaṃ sammutikammaṃ adhippetantiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Ñattiṃ, kammavācañca parihāpetvā, parivattetvā vā kataṃ ce, adhammakammaṃ nāma.Vaggeti chandārahānaṃ chandassa anāharaṇena vā sannipatitānaṃ ukkoṭena vā vagge sati.Tikapācittiyaṃ siyāti ‘‘adhammakamme adhammakammasaññī vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadati, vematiko ovadati, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 150) adhammakamme adhammakammasaññipakkhe vuttapācittiyattayaṃ hoti.
1132. Kammasminti: Here, the word kamma refers to the act of bestowing the formal act of agreement (sammutikamma) given through a ñatticatuttha-kamma (motion followed by three announcements) to one who advises bhikkhunis, as stated in the Aṭṭhakathā. If the ñatti (motion) and kammavācā (formal statement) are omitted or altered, it is called an adhammakamma (unlawful act). Vaggeti: When there is a group (vagga) due to not bringing the chanda (desire/approval) of those who are unable to attend, or due to assembling through bribery. Tikapācittiyaṃ siyāti: "In an unlawful act, one who perceives an unlawful act as unlawful, and advises a group of bhikkhunis, perceiving them as a group, or is doubtful, or perceives them as harmonious, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 150). There are three pācittiya offenses stated regarding the side that perceives an unlawful act as unlawful in an unlawful act.
1133.Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ vematikassāpīti yojanā.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘vagge bhikkhunisaṅghasmiṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ siyā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Adhammakamme vematikapakkhe ‘‘vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 150) adhammikakammeyeva vimativāre vuttatikapācittiyaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Dhammakammanti saññino’’ti imināpi ‘‘adhamme pana kammasmi’’nti idaṃ yojetabbaṃ, ‘‘tathā’’ti sambandho, tena ‘‘vagge’’tiādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Adhammakamme dhammakammasaññī vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadati, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 150) vuttaṃ tikapācittiyaṃ hoti. Evametā pācittiyo sandhāyāha‘‘nava pācittiyo vuttā’’ti.
1133.Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ vematikassāpīti: And also for one who is doubtful in an unlawful act, it should be construed. "Tathā"ti: With this "tathā" (thus), it includes "vagge bhikkhunisaṅghasmiṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ siyā" (in a group of bhikkhunis, there is a triple pācittiya offense). What is said is? In the case of doubt regarding an unlawful act, "one who perceives a group of bhikkhunis as a group, is doubtful, or perceives them as harmonious, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 150), it is said that there is a triple pācittiya offense stated in the case of doubt only in an unlawful act. "Dhammakammanti saññino"ti: This should also be connected with "adhamme pana kammasmiṃ" (but in an unlawful act), the connection is "tathā" (thus), therefore it includes "vagge" (in a group) and so on. "In an unlawful act, one who perceives a lawful act as an unlawful act, and advises a group of bhikkhunis, perceiving them as a group, or is doubtful, or perceives them as harmonious, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 150), there is a triple pācittiya offense stated. Thus, referring to these pācittiya offenses, he says, "nava pācittiyo vuttā"ti (nine pācittiya offenses are stated).
‘‘samaggepi ca tattakā’’ti āha. Yathāha ‘‘adhammakamme adhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Adhammakamme vematiko samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Adhammakamme dhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 150).
"samaggepi ca tattakā"ti āha (and the same number even in a harmonious assembly) he said. As he said, "In an unlawful act, one who perceives an unlawful act as unlawful advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis perceiving it as a group, is doubtful, or perceives it as harmonious, there is an offense of pācittiya. In an unlawful act, one who is doubtful advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis perceiving it as a group, is doubtful, or perceives it as harmonious, there is an offense of pācittiya. In an unlawful act, one who perceives a lawful act as an unlawful act advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis perceiving it as a group, is doubtful, or perceives it as harmonious, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 150).
1134.Dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasāti yathādassitaṃ vagganavakaṃ, samagganavakanti dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasena.Tāti pācittiyo.
1134. Dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasāti: Based on two sets of nine, as shown: the nine related to a group (vagga-navaka), and the nine related to a harmonious assembly (samagga-navaka). Tāti: Those pācittiya offenses.
vaggapakkhenava dukkaṭāni. ‘‘Dhammakamme adhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Dhammakamme vematiko samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko, samaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī, vematiko ovadati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ samaggasaññī ovadati, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. 151) ettha ante vuttaṃ anāpattivāraṃ vinā avasesesu aṭṭhasu vāresusamaggapakkheaṭṭha dukkaṭāni. Evaṃ purimāni nava, imāni aṭṭhāti dhammakammapakkhe sattarasa dukkaṭāni hontīti āha‘‘dukkaṭaṃ dhammakammepi, sattarasavidhaṃ siyā’’ti.
vaggapakkhenava dukkaṭāni (in the group case, there are nine dukkaṭa offenses). "In a lawful act, one who perceives an unlawful act as a lawful one advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis, perceiving it as a group, or is doubtful, or perceives it as harmonious, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. In a lawful act, one who is doubtful advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis, perceiving it as a group, or is doubtful, or perceives it as harmonious, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. In a lawful act, one who perceives a lawful act as a lawful one advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis, perceiving it as a group, or is doubtful, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. In a lawful act, one who perceives a lawful act as a lawful one advises a harmonious community of bhikkhunis, perceiving it as harmonious, there is no offense" (pāci. 151). Here, excluding the case of no offense stated at the end, in the remaining eight cases, samaggapakkheaṭṭha dukkaṭāni (in the harmonious case, there are eight dukkaṭa offenses). Thus, the previous nine and these eight, in the case of a lawful act, there are seventeen dukkaṭa offenses, he says, "dukkaṭaṃ dhammakammepi, sattarasavidhaṃ siyā"ti (even in a lawful act, there can be seventeen kinds of dukkaṭa offenses).
1135.‘‘Osārehī’’ti vutto katheti vāti yojanā. ‘‘Aṭṭhagarudhammaṃ kathehī’’ti vutto taṃ katheti vā.Pañhaṃ puṭṭho katheti vāti aṭṭhagarudhammavisaye pañhaṃ puṭṭho tameva vadati vā. Sikkhamānāya katheti vāti sambandho. Sikkhamānāya aṭṭhagarudhamme katheti vā, neva dosoti attho. Ummattakādino kathayato neva dosoti yojanā.
1135. "Osārehī"ti vutto katheti vāti yojanā (if asked "recite" he recites or). "Aṭṭhagarudhammaṃ kathehī"ti vutto taṃ katheti vā (if asked "recite the Eight Garudhamma" he recites that or). "Pañhaṃ puṭṭho katheti vā"ti (if asked a question he answers or): If asked a question about the Eight Garudhamma, he speaks about that very thing, or. Sikkhamānāya katheti vāti sambandho (he speaks to a sikkhamānā or) The connection is, he speaks about the Eight Garudhamma to a sikkhamānā, meaning there is no offense. Ummattakādino kathayato neva dosoti yojanā (there is no offense for one who speaks such as an insane person), this should be construed.
1136.Idāni tiṇṇampi bahussutānaṃ lakkhaṇe ekattha dassite bhikkhunovādakassa viseso suviññeyyo hotīti taṃ dassetumāha‘‘vācuggatāva kātabbā’’tiādi. Dve mātikā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbāti yojanā. Bhikkhubhikkhunivibhaṅge mātikā paguṇā vācuggatāva kātabbāti yojanā, bhikkhubhikkhunivibhaṅgamātikā paguṇā katvā tāsaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ uggahetvā pāḷito, atthato ca vacanapathāruḷhā vohārakkhamāyeva kātabbāti vuttaṃ hoti. Cattāro bhāṇavārā paguṇā vācuggatāva kātabbāti pakāsitāti yojanā.‘‘Paguṇā’’ti iminā pāḷiyaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā dhāretvā paripucchitabbanti dasseti.‘‘Vācuggatāva kātabbā’’ti iminā tadatthaṃ sutvā dhāretvā paripucchitabbamevāti dasseti.
1136.Idāni tiṇṇampi bahussutānaṃ lakkhaṇe ekattha dassite bhikkhunovādakassa viseso suviññeyyo hotīti taṃ dassetumāha "vācuggatāva kātabbā"tiādi (now, with the characteristics of the three learned ones shown in one place, the distinction of the bhikkhunovādaka becomes easily understood, therefore he says, "they should be mastered verbally" etc.). Dve mātikā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbāti yojanā (the two mātikā should be mastered verbally). Bhikkhubhikkhunivibhaṅge mātikā paguṇā vācuggatāva kātabbāti yojanā (in the Bhikkhu and Bhikkhuni Vibhaṅga, the mātikā should be mastered verbally). Having made the Bhikkhu and Bhikkhuni Vibhaṅga mātikā proficient, having memorized their commentaries, they should be mastered in both the Pāḷi and the meaning, and be capable of usage, it is said. Cattāro bhāṇavārā paguṇā vācuggatāva kātabbāti pakāsitāti yojanā (the four bhāṇavāra should be mastered verbally, it is declared). "Paguṇā"ti iminā (with "paguṇā") he shows that one should make the Pāḷi proficient, memorize it, and ask questions about it. "Vācuggatāva kātabbā"ti iminā (with "vācuggatāva kātabbā") he shows that one should listen to its meaning, memorize it, and definitely ask questions about it.
1137.Parikathatthāyāti sampattānaṃ dhammakathanatthāya.Kathāmaggoti mahāsudassanakathāmaggo.Maṅgala…pe… anumodanāti aggassa dānādimaṅgalesu bhattānumodanāsaṅkhātā dānakathā ca, kumāramaṅgalādīsu mahāmaṅgalasuttādimaṅgalānumodanā ca,amaṅgalaṃnāma kālakiriyā, tattha matakabhattādīsu tirokuṭṭādikathā cāti evaṃ tissoyevānumodanā.
1137. Parikathatthāyāti: For the purpose of speaking Dhamma to those who have arrived. Kathāmaggoti: The path of the Mahāsudassana Katha. Maṅgala…pe… anumodanāti: The dānakathā (talk on giving) consisting of the bhattānumodanā (rejoicing in the meal) at auspicious occasions like excellent giving, and the maṅgalānumodanā (rejoicing in auspiciousness) like the Mahāmaṅgala Sutta at auspicious occasions like kumāramaṅgala etc. amaṅgalaṃnāma kālakiriyā (inauspiciousness means death), there, the tirokuṭṭa etc. talks at matakabhatta etc., thus there are only these three kinds of anumodanā (rejoicing).
1138.Uposathādiatthāyāti etthaādi-saddena pavāraṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Kammākammavinicchayoti kammavagge vuttavinicchayo, parivāre kammavagge āgatakhuddānukhuddakakammavinicchayoti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Kammaṭṭhāna’’nti iminā ‘‘uttamatthassa pāpaka’’nti vakkhamānattā vipassanākammaṭṭhānamāha. Vipassanāvasena uggaṇhantena ca dhātuvavatthānamukhena uggahetabbantigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Uttamatthassāti arahattassa.
1138. Uposathādiatthāyāti: Here, the ādi (etc.) includes the pavāraṇā (invitation) etc. Kammākammavinicchayoti: The judgement stated in the Kamma Vagga, it means the minor and lesser minor kamma judgements that appear in the Kamma Vagga of the Parivāra. "Kammaṭṭhāna"nti iminā (with "Kammaṭṭhāna") because it will be said "uttamatthassa pāpaka" (leading to the highest goal), it refers to vipassanā-kammaṭṭhāna (insight meditation). In the gaṇṭhipadesu (Gaṇṭhipada), it is said that one should learn in terms of vipassanā through the method of analyzing the elements (dhātuvavatthāna). Uttamatthassāti: Of arahantship.
1139.Ettakaṃ uggahetvāna bahussutoti yathāvuttadhammānaṃ uggahitattā bahussuto.Pañcavassoti upasampadato paṭṭhāya paripuṇṇapañcasaṃvaccharo. ‘‘Dasavasso’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saṃvaccharavasena pañcavassesu paripuṇṇesu vutthavassavasena aparipuṇṇesupi pañcavassoyeva. Itarathā ūnapañcavassoti veditabbo. Paripuṇṇavīsativassūpasampadādīsu viya keci saṃvaccharagaṇanaṃ avicāretvā ‘‘pañcavasso’’tivacanasāmaññena vutthavassagaṇanameva gaṇhanti, tadayuttaṃ. Tathā gahaṇesu yutti vā maggitabbā.Muñcitvā nissayanti nissayavāsaṃ jahitvā.Issaroti nissayācariyavirahena issaro, iminā nissayamuttalakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ.
1139. Ettakaṃ uggahetvāna bahussutoti (having learned this much, he is learned): Because of having learned the Dhamma as stated, he is learned (bahussuto). Pañcavassoti (five years): One who has completed five years starting from the upasampadā (higher ordination). "Dasavasso"ti (ten years): The same method applies here too. Based on the completed year count, even if five years are incomplete based on the year of residence, he is still considered five years. Otherwise, he should be understood as less than five years. Like in the case of twenty years for higher ordination, some, without considering the year count, take only the residence year count simply by the word "pañcavasso" (five years), that is inappropriate. In such cases, a valid reason or justification should be sought. Muñcitvā nissayanti: Having abandoned dependence (nissaya-vāsa). Issaroti (independent): Independent due to the absence of a preceptor (nissayācariya), with this, the characteristic of being free from dependence is shown.
1140.Dvevibhaṅgāti bhikkhubhikkhunivibhaṅgadvayaṃ. Idha‘‘vācuggatā’’ti idaṃ paripucchampi sandhāyāhātipi vuttaṃ. Tenāhasāratthadīpaniyaṃ‘‘dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbā’tiidaṃ paripucchāvasena uggahaṇampi sandhāya vutta’nti vadantī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.145-147).Byañjanāditoti etthabyañjanaṃnāma padaṃ,ādi-saddena saṅgahitaṃanubyañjanaṃnāma akkharaṃ, padakkharāni aparihāpetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Catūsvapi nikāyesūti dīghamajjhimasaṃyutta aṅguttaranikāyesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Eko vā nikāyo potthakopi ca ekoti yojanā.Api-saddena khuddakanikāyassāpi saṅgaho veditabbo.‘‘Pi vā’’ti iminā khuddakanikāye jātakabhāṇakena sāṭṭhakathaṃ jātakaṃ uggahetvāpi dhammapadaṃ saha vatthunā uggahetabbamevāti dassite dve potthake samuccinoti, cattāri khandhakavattāni vā.
1140. Dve vibhaṅgāti: The two Vibhaṅgas of Bhikkhu and Bhikkhuni. Here, it is also said that "vācuggatā"ti idaṃ paripucchampi sandhāyāhāti (the "verbal mastery" includes questioning). Therefore, the Sāratthadīpanī says, "‘dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbā’tiidaṃ paripucchāvasena uggahaṇampi sandhāya vutta’nti vadantī"ti (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.145-147) ("'The two Vibhaṅgas should be mastered verbally' this is said also referring to learning by way of questioning," so they say). Byañjanāditoti: Here, byañjanaṃnāma padaṃ (byañjana means word), the ādi (etc.) includes anubyañjanaṃnāma akkharaṃ (anubyañjana means letter), it means without omitting the words and letters. Catūsvapi nikāyesūti (even in the four Nikāyas): In the Dīgha, Majjhima, Saṃyutta, and Aṅguttara Nikāyas, bhummaṃ (locative case) in specifying. Eko vā nikāyo potthakopi ca ekoti yojanā (one Nikāya or one book is one). The Khuddaka Nikāya should also be understood as included by the word Api (also). "Pi vā"ti iminā (with "pi vā"): In the Khuddaka Nikāya, it is shown that a Jātaka reciter should learn the Jātaka together with its commentary, and should also learn the Dhammapada together with its stories, thus he collects two books, or four Khandhaka duties.
1142.Disāpāmokkhoyattha yattha vasati, tassā tassādisāya pāmokkho padhāno.Yenakāmaṃgamoti yattha katthaci disābhāge yathākāmaṃ vuttiko hotīti attho. Parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ kāmaṃ labhate issaroti yojanā, issaro hutvā bhikkhuparisāya attānaṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ yathāruciyā labhatīti attho. Ettāvatā parisūpaṭṭhāpakalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
1142. Disāpāmokkho: In whichever direction he resides, he is the foremost, the chief, in that direction. Yenakāmaṃgamoti: It means he can live as he pleases in any direction. Parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ kāmaṃ labhate issaroti yojanā (he is able to attend to a following as he wishes, being independent): It means being independent, he is able to attend to a following of bhikkhus as he pleases. Thus, the characteristic of attending to a following is stated.
1143.Vācugganti vācuggataṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘idāni ayaṃ bhaṇḍapāthāvidhi na hotīti mihakaparipucchanakathānurūpato atthakaraṇaṃ na vācuggatakaraṇaṃ nāmāti viññāyatī’’tinissandehevuttaṃ. Iminā yathāvuttaṃ dutiyaṅgameva saṅgahitaṃ.
1143. Vācugganti: Vācuggataṃ (verbal mastery). And here, in the nissandehe (Nissandeha), it is said that "idāni ayaṃ bhaṇḍapāthāvidhi na hotīti mihakaparipucchanakathānurūpato atthakaraṇaṃ na vācuggatakaraṇaṃ nāmāti viññāyatī"ti (now, this is not the method of reciting from a manuscript, but understanding the meaning according to the conversation of mutual questioning, so it is understood that it is not called verbal mastery). With this, the second aspect as stated is included.
1144.Assāti imassa sikkhāpadassa.Asammatatādīni tīṇi aṅgānīti attano asammatatā, bhikkhuniyā paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovādavasena aṭṭhagarudhammabhaṇananti imāni tīṇi aṅgāni.
1144. Assāti: Of this (assā) sikkhāpada (precept). Asammatatādīni tīṇi aṅgānīti: One's own unconsented state (asammatatā), the bhikkhuni's fully ordained state (paripuṇṇūpasampannatā), and reciting the Eight Garudhamma as an instruction; these are the three factors.
Ovādakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Ovādakathā (Admonition)
1146.Tikapācittiyanti ‘‘atthaṅgate sūriye atthaṅgatasaññī, vematiko, anatthaṅgatasaññī’’ti vikappattaye.Ekatoupasampannanti bhikkhunisaṅghe upasampannaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghe upasampannaṃ pana ovadato pācittiyamevā’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
1146. Tikapācittiyanti: "atthaṅgate sūriye atthaṅgatasaññī, vematiko, anatthaṅgatasaññī"ti vikappattaye (at sunset, one who perceives it as sunset, is doubtful, or perceives it as not sunset), in the three alternatives. Ekatoupasampannanti: Ordained in the bhikkhuni sangha. In the Aṭṭhakathā it is said: "Bhikkhusaṅghe upasampannaṃ pana ovadato pācittiyamevā"ti (but for one ordained in the bhikkhu sangha, if he admonishes, there is an offense of pācittiya).
1148.Uddesādinayenāti ‘‘anāpatti uddesaṃ dento, paripucchaṃ dento’’tiādinā anāpattivāranayena.Assāti bhikkhussa.
1148. Uddesādinayenāti: "anāpatti uddesaṃ dento, paripucchaṃ dento"tiādinā anāpattivāranayena (no offense for giving a recitation, giving a question), by way of the cases of no offense, such as. Assāti: Of the bhikkhu.
Atthaṅgatasūriyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Atthaṅgatasūriyakathā (Sunset)
1149.‘‘Sace asammato’’ti vakkhamānattāovadantassāti ettha ‘‘sammatassā’’ti labbhati.Bhikkhunupassayanti bhikkhunivihāraṃ.Aññatra kālāti ‘‘tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānā hoti bhikkhunī’’ti vuttakālato aññatra. ‘‘Gilānā nāma bhikkhunī na sakkoti ovādāya vā saṃvāsāya vā gantu’’nti (pāci. 161) dassite gilānakāle anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1149. "Sace asammato"ti vakkhamānattā ovadantassāti ettha "sammatassā"ti labbhati (because it will be said "if unconsented," here in "of the admonisher" "of the consented" is obtained). Bhikkhunupassayanti: The bhikkhuni monastery. Aññatra kālāti: Other than the time stated: "tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānā hoti bhikkhunī"ti (that is the time, when the bhikkhuni is ill). In the gilānakāle (time of illness) shown as "gilānā nāma bhikkhunī na sakkoti ovādāya vā saṃvāsāya vā gantu"nti (pāci. 161) (an ill bhikkhuni is unable to go for admonition or association), it is said that there is no offense.
1150.Pācittiyadvayaṃ hotīti paṭhamasikkhāpadena, iminā ca sikkhāpadena dve pācittiyāni hontīti. ‘‘Tīṇipi pācittiyānī’’ti yojetabbā, paṭhamadutiyatatiyehi sikkhāpadehi tīṇi pācittiyāni hontīti attho.
1150. Pācittiyadvayaṃ hotīti: With the first sikkhāpada and with this sikkhāpada, there are two pācittiya offenses. "Tīṇipi pācittiyānī"ti yojetabbā (three pācittiya offenses should be connected), it means with the first, second, and third sikkhāpada, there are three pācittiya offenses.
1151.Aññena dhammenāti garudhammato aññena buddhavacanena.Dukkaṭadvayanti asammatabhikkhunupassayagamanamūlakaṃ dukkaṭadvayaṃ.Bhikkhunoti asammatassa ‘‘sammatassāpī’’ti vakkhamānattā. ‘‘Aṭṭhahi vā garudhammehi aññena vā dhammena ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 155)atthaṅgatasikkhāpadevuttattā‘‘rattihetuka’’nti āha, rattiovādanamūlanti attho.
1151. Aññena dhammenāti: With a Dhamma other than the garudhamma. Dukkaṭadvayanti: Two dukkaṭa offenses rooted in going to the bhikkhuni monastery without consent. Bhikkhunoti: Of the unconsented; because it will be said "sammatassāpī"ti (even of the consented). Because it is stated "Aṭṭhahi vā garudhammehi aññena vā dhammena ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā"ti (pāci. 155) (if he admonishes with the eight garudhamma or with another dhamma, there is an offense of pācittiya) in the atthaṅgatasikkhāpade (sikkhāpada about sunset), he says "rattihetuka"nti (due to the night), it means rooted in admonishing at night.
1152.Pācittiyadvayanti dutiyatatiyamūlakaṃ. Garudhammena ovādogarudhammo,so nidānaṃ yassa pācittiyassāti viggaho. Sammatattā garudhammanidānassa pācittiyassa abhāvatoti sambandho. Iminā paṭhamasikkhāpadena anāpattibhāvaṃ dasseti.
1152. Pācittiyadvayanti: Rooted in the second and third. Garudhammena ovādo garudhammo, so nidānaṃ yassa pācittiyassāti viggaho (Admonition with the garudhamma is garudhamma, that is the cause of which pācittiya). Because of being consented, the absence of pācittiya offense rooted in garudhamma, this is the connection. With this, he shows the state of no offense with the first sikkhāpada.
1153.Tassevāti sammatasseva.Dukkaṭaṃiminā tatiyasikkhāpadena.Anāpattipaṭhamasikkhāpadena, tenevāha‘‘sammatattā’’ti.Pācittidutiyasikkhāpadena, tenevāha‘‘rattiya’’nti.
1153. Tassevāti: Of the consented one. Dukkaṭaṃ: With this third sikkhāpada. Anāpatti: With the first sikkhāpada, therefore he says "sammatattā"ti (because of being consented). Pācitti: With the second sikkhāpada, therefore he says "rattiya"nti (of the night).
1154.Tikapācittiyaṃvuttanti ‘‘upasampannāya upasampannasaññī, vematiko, anupasampannasaññī bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā aññatra samayā ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 162) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Itaradvayeti ‘‘anupasampannāya upasampannasaññī, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anupasampannāya vematiko, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 162) dassite itaradvaye.Ovadantassāti yena kenaci ovadantassa.
1154. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti: "upasampannāya upasampannasaññī, vematiko, anupasampannasaññī bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā aññatra samayā ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā"ti (pāci. 162) (to one fully ordained, one who perceives her as fully ordained, is doubtful, or perceives her as not fully ordained, goes to a bhikkhuni monastery and admonishes other than at the time, there is an offense of pācittiya), the triple pācittiya is stated. Itaradvayeti: "anupasampannāya upasampannasaññī, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anupasampannāya vematiko, āpatti dukkaṭassā"ti (pāci. 162) (to one not fully ordained, one who perceives her as fully ordained, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. To one not fully ordained, one who is doubtful, there is an offense of dukkaṭa), in the other two cases as shown. Ovadantassāti: Of whoever is admonishing.
1155.Tikapācittiyaṃ, dukkaṭaṭṭhāne dukkaṭameva hotīti dassetumāha‘‘tathā’’ti. Bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā aññena dhammena ovadantassa tathāti yojanā.
1155.Tikapācittiyaṃ, dukkaṭaṭṭhāne dukkaṭameva hotīti dassetumāha "tathā"ti (to show that the triple pācittiya, in the place of dukkaṭa, there is only dukkaṭa, he says "tathā"). For one who goes to a bhikkhuni monastery and admonishes with another Dhamma, tathāti yojanā (thus, this should be construed).
Bhikkhunupassayakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Bhikkhunupassayakathā (Bhikkhuni Monastery)
1156.Cīvarādīnantiādi-saddena piṇḍapātādiitarapaccayattayañca sakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāni ca saṅgahitāni.Sammateti bhikkhunovādakasammutiyā sammate.
1156. Cīvarādīnanti: The ādi (etc.) includes the other three requisites such as piṇḍapāta, and acts of respect, honor, reverence, salutation, and worship. Sammateti: Consented through the bhikkhunovādaka-sammuti (agreement for bhikkhuni advisor).
1157.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī, vematiko, adhammakammasaññī evaṃ vadati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 167) tikapācittiyaṃpāḷiyaṃdassitameva. Idhakammaṃnāma yathāvuttaṃ sammutikammaṃ. Adhammakamme dhammakammasaññivematikaadhammakammasaññīnaṃ vasenatikadukkaṭaṃ. Vīsativasso vā atirekavīsativasso vāti sammutiyā aṅgāni.
1157. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti: "dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī, vematiko, adhammakammasaññī evaṃ vadati, āpatti pācittiyassā"ti (pāci. 167) (in a lawful act, one who perceives a lawful act as lawful, is doubtful, or perceives it as unlawful, speaks thus, there is an offense of pācittiya), the triple pācittiya is stated in the Pāḷi. Here, kammaṃnāma (kamma means) the sammutikamma (act of agreement) as stated. Adhammakamme dhammakammasaññivematikaadhammakammasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ (in an unlawful act, based on those perceiving it as lawful, doubtful, or unlawful, there is a triple dukkaṭa). Vīsativasso vā atirekavīsativasso vāti sammutiyā aṅgāni (twenty years or more than twenty years are the factors of the agreement).
1158.‘‘Sammataṃ anupasampanna’’nti kaṃ sandhāyāhāti ce? Sammatena hutvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya sāmaṇerabhāvamupagataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Āmisatthāyāti cīvarādīnamatthāya.
1158. "Sammataṃ anupasampanna"nti kaṃ sandhāyāhāti ce? (To whom does "consented, not fully ordained" refer?): Sammatena hutvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya sāmaṇerabhāvamupagataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ (It is said referring to one who, having been consented, renounced the training and attained the state of a novice). Āmisatthāyāti: For the sake of requisites such as robes.
Āmisakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Āmisakathā (Material Gain)
1162.Bhikkhuniyā dinnanti ettha ‘‘bhikkhussā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Bhikkhunā dinnanti yojanā. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyā’’ti seso.Tatthāti cīvarapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpade.Sūcitāti pakāsitā.
1162. Bhikkhuniyā dinnanti: Here, it should be said "bhikkhussā"ti (to a bhikkhu). Bhikkhunā dinnanti yojanā (it should be construed as given by a bhikkhu). "Bhikkhuniyā"ti seso (the rest is "by a bhikkhuni"). Tatthāti: In that sikkhāpada about receiving robes. Sūcitāti: Declared.
Cīvaradānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Cīvaradānakathā (Robe Giving)
1163.Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaranti yojanā.
1163.Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaranti, the meaning is: a robe for a bhikkhuni who is not a relative.
1164.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.
1164.Ettha: In this training rule.
1165.Sūciṃ cīvaraṃ pavesetvāti sambandho.Sūcinīharaṇeti cīvarato.
1165.Sūciṃ cīvaraṃ pavesetvā: Having inserted the needle into the robe, is the connection. Sūcinīharaṇe: From the robe.
1166.Payogassa vasāti ekakkhaṇe bahū āvuṇitvā sūciyā nīharaṇapayogagaṇanāya. Bahū pācittiyoti yojanā, payogappamāṇāpattiyo hontīti attho.
1166.Payogassa vasā: By way of the effort, meaning counting the efforts of bringing the needle out with many wrappings at one time. Bahū pācittiyoti yojanā: There are many pācittiyas, meaning there are offenses according to the number of efforts.
1169.Anekā pācittiyāpattī hontīti yojanā.Ārapatheti sūcimagge. Dutiyepatheti ettha āra-saddo gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ luttoti veditabbo.
1169.Anekā pācittiyāpattī hontīti yojanā: There are many pācittiya offenses. Ārapathe: In the path of the needle. Dutiye pathe: Here, the word āra is understood to be dropped for the sake of ease in the construction of the verse.
1170.Kā hi nāma kathāti ‘‘anekāpattiyo hontī’’ti ettha kiṃ vattabbanti attho.Tikapācittiyanti ‘‘aññātikāya aññātikasaññī, vematiko, ñātikasaññī cīvaraṃ sibbati vā sibbāpeti vā, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 178) vuttaṃ tikapācittiyaṃ.
1170.Kā hi nāma kathā: What is there to say in "anekāpattiyo hontī"?Tikapācittiyanti: The threefold pācittiya, "If a bhikkhuni sews or has a robe sewn for a non-relative, perceiving (her as) a non-relative, being in doubt, perceiving (her as) a relative, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 178), is called the threefold pācittiya.
1172.Aññaṃ parikkhāranti upāhanatthavikādiṃ.Sibbatoti ettha ‘‘sibbāpayato’’ti adhikārato labbhati. Sikkhamānasāmaṇeriyosikkhamānādikānāma.
1172.Aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ: Another requisite, such as a foot covering or a bag for sweeping. Sibbato: Here, "sibbāpayato" is obtained from the authority of the context. Sikkhamānasāmaṇeriyo sikkhamānādikā nāma: Sikkhamāna, sāmaṇera, etc., are called "sikkhamānādikā".
1173.Sibbanakiriyāya āpajjitabbatokriyaṃ.
1173.Sibbanakiriyāya āpajjitabbato kriyaṃ: The action by which one incurs an offense by the act of sewing.
Cīvarasibbanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sewing of Robes.
1174-5.Saṃvidhāyāti ‘‘ajja yāma, sve yāmā’’tiādinā nayena saṃvidahitvā. Yathāha ‘‘ajja vā hiyyo vā pare vā gacchāmāti saṃvidahatī’’ti (pāci. 183).Magganti ekaddhānamaggaṃ, antamaso gāmantarampi.Aññatra samayāti ‘‘tatthāyaṃ samayo, satthagamanīyo hoti maggo sāsaṅkasammato sappaṭibhayo’’ti (pāci. 182) vuttakālavisesā aññatrāti vuttaṃ hoti. Satthavāhehi vinā agamanīyo maggosatthagamanīyonāma. Corānaṃ sayitanisinnaṭṭhitakhāditapītaṭṭhānāni yattha dissanti, tādiso maggosāsaṅkonāma. Corehi hatamāritaghātaviluttamanussā yattha paññāyanti, sosappaṭibhayonāma.Idhāti imasmiṃ bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ katasaṃvidhānaṃ avirādhetvā tāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjanakāleti attho.
1174-5.Saṃvidhāyā: Having made an arrangement in the manner of "Today we will go, tomorrow we will go," etc. As it was said, "She arranges, 'Today or tomorrow or the next day we will go'" (pāci. 183). Maggaṃ: A single road, at least to another village.Aññatra samayā: Except for specific times, "In this case, this is a time when the road is suitable for a caravan, considered dangerous, frightening" (pāci. 182), which means other than the times mentioned. Satthavāhehi vinā agamanīyo maggo satthagamanīyo nāma: A road not suitable for travel without caravans is called "satthagamanīyo". Corānaṃ sayitanisinnaṭṭhitakhāditapītaṭṭhānāni yattha dissanti, tādiso maggo sāsaṅko nāma: A road where the places where thieves lie down, sit, stand, eat, and drink are visible is called "sāsaṅko". Corehi hatamāritaghātaviluttamanussā yattha paññāyanti, so sappaṭibhayo nāma: A road where people killed, murdered, slaughtered, and robbed by thieves are evident, that is called "sappaṭibhayo". Idha: In this case, it means without contradicting the arrangement made with the bhikkhuni, at the time of undertaking a single road with her.
gāmantaraṃ,tattha okkamanaṃ upagamanaṃgāmantarokkamo,tasmiṃ kateti attho. Agāmake araññe addhayojanātikkame vāti yojanā, gāmarahitaṃ araññamaggampi dvigāvutaṃ atikkante vāti attho.
gāmantaraṃ, tattha okkamanaṃ upagamanaṃ gāmantarokkamo, tasmiṃ kateti attho: another village, meaning entering or approaching that, is "gāmantarokkamo", meaning having done so. Agāmake araññe addhayojanātikkame vāti yojanā, gāmarahitaṃ araññamaggampi dvigāvutaṃ atikkante vāti attho: Or exceeding half a yojana in a village-less forest, meaning also exceeding two gāvuta on a forest path devoid of villages.
1176.‘‘Āpatti hotī’’ti sāmaññato dassitaāpattiyā bhedābhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘etthā’’tiādi.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpadavinicchaye, pakaraṇe vā. Dukkaṭaṃ dīpitanti sambandho.Akappiyabhūmaṭṭhoti etthaakappiyā bhūmināma antogāme bhikkhunupassayadvārakoṭṭhakoti evamādi. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana antogāme bhikkhunupassayadvāre rathikāya, aññesu vā catukkasiṅghāṭakahatthisālādīsu saṃvidahanti, bhikkhuno āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 182-183). Ettha ca catunnaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃcatukkaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃsiṅghāṭakaṃ.
1176."Āpatti hotī": To show the distinction and non-distinction of the offense shown generally, he says ‘‘etthā’’ tiādi. Ettha: In this adjudication of the training rule, or in this context. Dukkaṭaṃ dīpitanti sambandho: Dukkaṭaṃ is shown, is the connection. Akappiyabhūmaṭṭho: Here, akappiyā bhūmi nāma: Unsuitable ground means inside a village, the door of a bhikkhuni's residence, a storehouse, and so on. Yathāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ: As it was said in the commentary, "Sace pana antogāme bhikkhunupassayadvāre rathikāya, aññesu vā catukkasiṅghāṭakahatthisālādīsu saṃvidahanti, bhikkhuno āpatti dukkaṭassā"ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 182-183): "If they make an arrangement inside a village, at the door of a bhikkhuni's residence, on a road, or in other places such as a crossroads, a junction, an elephant stable, etc., there is an offense of dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu." Here, the place where four roads connect is called catukka. The place where three roads connect is called siṅghāṭaka.
1177.Kappiyabhūmināma bhikkhunupassayādi. Yathāha ‘‘sace ubhopi bhikkhunupassaye vā antarārāme vā āsanasālāya vā titthiyaseyyāya vā ṭhatvā saṃvidahanti, anāpatti. Kappiyabhūmi kirāyaṃ. Tasmā ettha saṃvidahanapaccayā dukkaṭāpattiṃ na vadantī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 182-183). Tenevāha‘‘na vadantassa dukkaṭa’’nti. ‘‘Na vadanti assā’’ti padacchedo.
1177.Kappiyabhūmi nāma bhikkhunupassayādi: Suitable ground means a bhikkhuni's residence, etc. Yathāha: As it was said, "Sace ubhopi bhikkhunupassaye vā antarārāme vā āsanasālāya vā titthiyaseyyāya vā ṭhatvā saṃvidahanti, anāpatti. Kappiyabhūmi kirāyaṃ. Tasmā ettha saṃvidahanapaccayā dukkaṭāpattiṃ na vadantī"ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 182-183): "If both stand in a bhikkhuni's residence, or in the inner monastery, or in a assembly hall, or in a heretical dwelling and make an arrangement, there is no offense. This is suitable ground. Therefore, they do not mention an offense of dukkaṭa because of making an arrangement here." Tenevāha ‘‘na vadantassa dukkaṭa’’nti: Therefore, he said, "There is dukkaṭa for one who does not say it." "Na vadanti assā"ti padacchedo: The word division is "na vadanti assā".
1178.Ubhayatthāti akappiyabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā saṃvidhāya gamane, kappiyabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā saṃvidhāya gamane cāti ubhayavikappe.Gacchantassevātievakārena nikkhantassa jotakaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘nikkhamane anāpattī’’ti.‘‘Bhikkhuno’’ti iminā bhikkhuniyā anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Āpattikhettaniyamanatthamāha‘‘anantarassā’’tiādi.
1178.Ubhayatthā: In both alternatives: making an arrangement while standing on unsuitable ground and then going, and making an arrangement while standing on suitable ground and then going. Gacchantassevā: The eva emphasizes the going out. Yathāha ‘‘nikkhamane anāpattī’’ti: As he said, "There is no offense in going out." ‘‘Bhikkhuno’’: With this, he shows that there is no offense for the bhikkhuni. Āpattikhettaniyamanatthamāha ‘‘anantarassā’’tiādi: To define the area of offense, he says, "For the immediately following..." etc.
1179.Tatrāpīti kappiyabhūmiupacārokkamanepi.Udīritanti mahāpaccariyaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘mahāpaccariyaṃ vutta’’nti.
1179.Tatrāpī: Even in approaching the vicinity of suitable ground. Udīritanti mahāpaccariyaṃ: Said in the Mahāpaccariya. Yathāha ‘‘mahāpaccariyaṃ vutta’’nti: As he said, "It is said in the Mahāpaccariya."
1180.Antarāti attano nikkhantagāmassa, anantaragāmassa ca vemajjhe. Yathāha ‘‘gāmato nikkhamitvā pana yāva anantaragāmassa upacāraṃ na okkamati, etthantare saṃvidahitepi bhikkhuno dukkaṭa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 182-183). Imasmiṃ sikkhāpade kāladvāramaggānaṃ vasena tayo saṅketavisaṅketāti tesu maggadvāravisaṅketepi āpatti hotevāti dassetumāha‘‘dvāra…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Kālavisaṅkete pana anāpattiṃ vakkhati.Āpattipācitti.
1180.Antarā: In between one's own village from which one has departed, and the immediately following village. Yathāha ‘‘gāmato nikkhamitvā pana yāva anantaragāmassa upacāraṃ na okkamati, etthantare saṃvidahitepi bhikkhuno dukkaṭa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 182-183): As he said, "But after departing from a village, as long as one does not approach the vicinity of the immediately following village, even if the bhikkhu makes an arrangement in between, there is dukkaṭa." Imasmiṃ sikkhāpade kāladvāramaggānaṃ vasena tayo saṅketavisaṅketāti tesu maggadvāravisaṅketepi āpatti hotevāti dassetumāha ‘‘dvāra…pe… vuccatī’’ti: In this training rule, there are three kinds of agreement and disagreement in terms of time, doorways, and roads. To show that there is an offense even in the disagreement of roads and doorways among them, he says, "Door...pe...is said." Kālavisaṅkete pana anāpattiṃ vakkhati: But he will say that there is no offense in disagreement of time. Āpatti pācitti: The offense is pācittiya.
1181.Asaṃvidahite kāleti ‘‘purebhattaṃ gamissāmā’’tiādinā katasaṃvidhānānaṃ pacchābhattādi asaṃvidahitakālaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ.Bhikkhusseva vidhānasminti bhikkhuniyā saṃvidhānaṃ vinā bhikkhusseva vidhāne sati āpatti dukkaṭaṃ.
1181.Asaṃvidahite kāle: At a time when no arrangement has been made, meaning a time when there is no arrangement, such as after the meal when the arrangement made was "We will go before the meal". Bhikkhusseva vidhānasmiṃ: If there is an arrangement only by the bhikkhu, without the bhikkhuni's arrangement, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.
1182.Samaye vidahitvā gacchato vā asamaye vidahitvā visaṅketena gacchato vā āpadāsu vidahitvā gacchato vā anāpattīti yojanā.Tathāti ‘‘vidahitvā gacchato anāpattī’’ti idaṃ atidisati.
1182.Samaye vidahitvā gacchato vā asamaye vidahitvā visaṅketena gacchato vā āpadāsu vidahitvā gacchato vā anāpattīti yojanā: There is no offense for one who goes having made an arrangement at the proper time, or one who goes having made an arrangement at an improper time but with disagreement, or one who goes having made an arrangement in times of danger. Tathā: This extends "there is no offense for one who goes having made an arrangement."
samayonāma yathāvuttakālaviseso.Visaṅketonāma kālavisaṅketo, ‘‘asukasmiṃ divase asukavelāya gamissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā gamanakāle tassa kālasaṅketassa vibhavananti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘kālavisaṅketeyeva anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 185).Āpadānāma raṭṭhabhede janapadānaṃ palāyanakālo. Yathāha ‘‘raṭṭhabhede cakkasamāruḷhā janapadā pariyāyanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsū’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 185). Ettha caraṭṭhabhedeti raṭṭhavilope.Cakkasamāruḷhāti iriyāpathacakkaṃ, sakaṭacakkaṃ vā samāruḷhā.Ummattakādinotiādi-saddena khittacittādayo gahitā.
samayo nāma yathāvuttakālaviseso: Time means the specific time as stated. Visaṅketo nāma kālavisaṅketo, ‘‘asukasmiṃ divase asukavelāya gamissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā gamanakāle tassa kālasaṅketassa vibhavananti vuttaṃ hoti: Disagreement means disagreement of time, meaning that at the time of going, the agreement of time is broken, having arranged "We will go on such and such a day at such and such a time." Yathāha ‘‘kālavisaṅketeyeva anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 185): As he said, "There is no offense only in disagreement of time." Āpadā nāma raṭṭhabhede janapadānaṃ palāyanakālo: Danger means the time of flight of the people when the kingdom is broken up. Yathāha ‘‘raṭṭhabhede cakkasamāruḷhā janapadā pariyāyanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsū’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 185): As he said, "When the kingdom is broken up, the people, mounted on carts, go around; in such dangers..." Ettha ca raṭṭhabhede: Here, raṭṭhabhedeti raṭṭhavilope: raṭṭhabhede means the destruction of the kingdom. Cakkasamāruḷhā: Cakkasamāruḷhāti iriyāpathacakkaṃ, sakaṭacakkaṃ vā samāruḷhā: Cakkasamāruḷhā means mounted on the cart of posture or on a wagon. Ummattakādino: With the ādi, those with deranged minds, etc., are included.
1183.Kāyavācādikattayāti etthaādi-saddena cittaṃ gahitaṃ, kāyavācācittāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1183.Kāyavācādikattayā: Here, with the ādi, mind is included; it means body, speech, and mind.
Saṃvidhānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Making Arrangements.
1184.Uddhaṃ javatītiujjavanī,paṭisotagāminī nāvā, taṃ. Adho javanatoojavanī,anusotagāminī nāvā, taṃ.Abhiruheyyāti ettha ‘‘saṃvidhāyā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyyā’’ti (pāci. 186). Lokassādasaṅkhātamittasanthavena taṃ nāvaṃ āruyha kīḷanacittaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā aññamaññaṃ saṃvidhāyāti attho. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhāro saṃvidahitvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 188).
1184.Uddhaṃ javatīti ujjavanī, paṭisotagāminī nāvā, taṃ: That which goes upwards is ujjavanī, a boat going against the current. Adho javanato ojavanī, anusotagāminī nāvā, taṃ: That which goes downwards is ojavanī, a boat going with the current. Abhiruheyyā: Here, "saṃvidhāyā" is understood. Yathāha ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyyā’’ti (pāci. 186): As he said, "If a bhikkhu, having made an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, should board a single boat..." Lokassādasaṅkhātamittasanthavena taṃ nāvaṃ āruyha kīḷanacittaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā aññamaññaṃ saṃvidhāyāti attho: It means having boarded that boat with friendship and intimacy known as worldly pleasure, making the mind of playfulness foremost, having arranged with each other. Yathāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ: As he said in the commentary, "lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhāro saṃvidahitvā"ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 188): "Having made an arrangement with playfulness foremost, due to worldly pleasure, friendship, and intimacy."
1185.Sagāmatīrapassena gamane gāmantaravasena vā pācitti, agāmatīrapassena gamane addhayojane pācitti addhayojanātireke ṭhāne gāme vijjamānepi avijjamānepi.
1185.Sagāmatīrapassena gamane gāmantaravasena vā pācitti, agāmatīrapassena gamane addhayojane pācitti addhayojanātireke ṭhāne gāme vijjamānepi avijjamānepi: If going along the side of a village bank, there is pācittiya according to the consideration of another village; if going along the side of a non-village bank, there is pācittiya at half a yojana, and at a place exceeding half a yojana, whether the village is present or not.
1186.Yojanaputhulāya nadiyā majjhena gacchato addhayojanavasena āpattidassanatthamāha‘‘tathā’’tiādi. ‘‘Ūnayojanaputhulāya nadiyā majjhaṃ ubhayabhāgaṃ bhajatīti tādisikāya nadiyā majjhena gacchantassa gāmantaragaṇanāya, addhayojanagaṇanāya ca āpattī’’ti vadanti.
1186.Yojanaputhulāya nadiyā majjhena gacchato addhayojanavasena āpattidassanatthamāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādi: To show the offense when going through the middle of a river one yojana wide, due to the consideration of half a yojana, he says, "Thus," etc. "Ūnayojanaputhulāya nadiyā majjhaṃ ubhayabhāgaṃ bhajatīti tādisikāya nadiyā majjhena gacchantassa gāmantaragaṇanāya, addhayojanagaṇanāya ca āpattī"ti vadanti: "If the middle of a river less than one yojana wide divides both sides, they say there is an offense for one going through the middle of such a river, due to the calculation of another village and the calculation of half a yojana."
1187.Yathāsukhaṃ samuddasminti ettha ‘‘gantabba’’nti seso.‘‘Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsū’’tiādinā yathāsukhagamanānuññāya hetuṃ dasseti. Imināva asandamānodakesu vāpitaḷākādīsu anāpattīti viññāyati.
1187.Yathāsukhaṃ samuddasmiṃ: Here, "gantabba" is understood.‘‘Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsū’’tiādinā yathāsukhagamanānuññāya hetuṃ dasseti: With "In all the commentaries," etc., he shows the reason for the permission to go at one's ease. Imināva asandamānodakesu vāpitaḷākādīsu anāpattīti viññāyati: From this alone it is understood that there is no offense in artificial ponds, etc., with non-flowing water.
1188.Titthasampādanatthāyāti paratitthaṃ pāpetuṃ.Taṃnāvaṃ.Yuttāti nāvāpājakā.
1188.Titthasampādanatthāyā: To bring (someone) to another landing place.Taṃ nāvaṃ.Yuttā: Boatmen.
1189.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘anāpatti pakāsitā’’ti imaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Asaṃvidahitvā bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya vā,tiriyaṃ taraṇāyabhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidahitvāpi ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya vā, āpadāsu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidahitvāpi ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya vā, tathā anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
1189.‘‘Tathā’’: With this, he includes "anāpatti pakāsitā". Asaṃvidahitvā bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya vā, tiriyaṃ taraṇāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidahitvāpi ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya vā, āpadāsu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidahitvāpi ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya vā, tathā anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā: Whether one boards a single boat without making an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, or whether one boards a single boat having made an arrangement with a bhikkhuni for swimming across, or whether one boards a single boat having made an arrangement with a bhikkhuni in times of danger, thus, it is shown that there is no offense.
‘‘Anantarasamo’’ti iminā ‘‘asaṃvidahite kāle’’tiādinā vuttavinicchayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Idhāpi kālavisaṅkete anāpatti, titthanāvāvisaṅkete āpattiyeva. Yathāha ‘‘idhāpi kālavisaṅketeneva anāpattī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 191). ‘‘Lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhāro saṃvidahitvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 188) vacanato keci ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajja’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya hi abhiruhitvā gāmantarokkamane, addhayojanātikkame vā kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgīpi hutvā āpattiṃ āpajjati. Yadi hi so saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā arahattaṃ vā sacchikareyya, niddaṃ vā okkameyya, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasi karonto gaccheyya, kuto tassa akusalacittasamaṅgitā, yenidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘akusalacittaṃ, lokavajja’’nti vuccati, tasmā paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittanti siddhaṃ.
‘‘Anantarasamo’’: With this, he includes the judgment stated in "asaṃvidahite kāle," etc. Idhāpi kālavisaṅkete anāpatti, titthanāvāvisaṅkete āpattiyeva: Here too, there is no offense in disagreement of time, but there is offense in disagreement of the landing place or boat. Yathāha ‘‘idhāpi kālavisaṅketeneva anāpattī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 191): As he said, "Here too, there is no offense only in disagreement of time," etc. ‘‘Lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhāro saṃvidahitvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 188) vacanato keci ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajja’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ: Because of the statement "Having made an arrangement with playfulness foremost, due to worldly pleasure, friendship, and intimacy" (pāci. aṭṭha. 188), some say that "this training rule is blameworthy in the world, (arising from) unwholesome thought," that should not be taken (as correct). Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya hi abhiruhitvā gāmantarokkamane, addhayojanātikkame vā kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgīpi hutvā āpattiṃ āpajjati: For, having boarded with playfulness foremost, even if one is endowed with wholesome or indeterminate thought at the entering of another village or exceeding half a yojana, one incurs an offense. Yadi hi so saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā arahattaṃ vā sacchikareyya, niddaṃ vā okkameyya, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasi karonto gaccheyya, kuto tassa akusalacittasamaṅgitā, yenidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘akusalacittaṃ, lokavajja’’nti vuccati, tasmā paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittanti siddhaṃ: For if he, having regained a sense of urgency, were to realize arahantship, or fall asleep, or go along giving attention to a meditation subject, how could he be endowed with unwholesome thought, on account of which this training rule is said to be "unwholesome thought, blameworthy in the world"? Therefore, it is established that it is an offense by enactment, threefold in thought.
Nāvābhiruhanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Boarding a Boat.
1190.Gihisamārambhaṃ hitvā bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ bhattaṃ ñatvā bhuñjato bhikkhuno pācitti hotīti yojanā.Paripācitaṃnāma bhikkhuno sīlasutādiguṇaṃ kulānaṃ vatvā nipphāditaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ, guṇappakāsanena nipphāditaṃ laddhabbaṃ katanti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 194).Gihisamārambhanti bhikkhuniyā paripācanato pubbeyeva gihipaṭiyattaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā paripācanato paṭhamameva yaṃ gihīnaṃ paṭiyāditaṃ bhatta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 194). Vakkhati hi ‘‘gihisampāditampi vā vinā’’ti.
1190.Gihisamārambhaṃ hitvā bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ bhattaṃ ñatvā bhuñjato bhikkhuno pācitti hotīti yojanā: For a bhikkhu who knowingly eats food prepared by a bhikkhuni, abandoning what was begun by laypersons, there is an offense of pācittiya. Paripācitaṃ nāma bhikkhuno sīlasutādiguṇaṃ kulānaṃ vatvā nipphāditaṃ: Prepared means produced by telling families of the bhikkhu's virtues of morality, learning, etc. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ, guṇappakāsanena nipphāditaṃ laddhabbaṃ katanti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 194): As he said, "Prepared by a bhikkhuni, it means having it obtained, produced, done by proclaiming the virtues." Gihisamārambhanti bhikkhuniyā paripācanato pubbeyeva gihipaṭiyattaṃ: Begun by laypersons means prepared by laypersons even before the bhikkhuni's preparation. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā paripācanato paṭhamameva yaṃ gihīnaṃ paṭiyāditaṃ bhatta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 194): As he said, "The food that is prepared for the laypersons even before the bhikkhuni's preparation." Vakkhati hi ‘‘gihisampāditampi vā vinā’’ti: For he will say, "Or even without what was provided by laypersons."
1191.‘‘Tassā’’ti vakkhamānattā ‘‘yaṃ bhojana’’nti yojetabbaṃ.Tassāti pañcadhā vuttassa bhojanassa.Sabbesuajjhohāresūti sabbesu paragalakaraṇappayogesu.
1191.‘‘Tassā’’ti vakkhamānattā ‘‘yaṃ bhojana’’nti yojetabbaṃ: Because it will be said "of that," "whatever food" should be connected. Tassā: Of that food stated in five ways.Sabbesu ajjhohāresū: In all acts of swallowing.
1192.Bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ bhuñjato dosoti yojanā.
1192.Bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ bhuñjato dosoti yojanā: The fault of eating what was prepared by a bhikkhuni.
1193.Ubhosūti paripācitepi aparipācitepi.Sabbatthāti imesu dvīsu paribhuñjato ajjhohāravaseneva dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1193.Ubhosū: In both, whether prepared or unprepared.Sabbatthā: In all these two, there is dukkaṭa only by way of the act of swallowing.
1195.Pañcabhojanaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pana yaṃ kiñci yāgukhajjaphalādikaṃ bhuñjantassa anāpattīti yojanā.
1195.Pañcabhojanaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pana yaṃ kiñci yāgukhajjaphalādikaṃ bhuñjantassa anāpattīti yojanā: There is no offense for one eating anything else such as gruel, edibles, fruit, etc., except for the five foods.
Paripācitakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of What is Prepared.
1197.Idaṃ sabbaṃ dasamaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānanayādinā dutiyāniyateneva sadisaṃ matanti yojanā.Idaṃ sikkhāpadanti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 199) vuttaṃ rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ.
1197.Idaṃ sabbaṃ dasamaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānanayādinā dutiyāniyateneva sadisaṃ matanti yojanā: It is considered that this entire tenth training rule is similar to the second aniyata in terms of origination, etc. Idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ: This training rule, "yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiya"nti (pāci. 199): "If a bhikkhu should arrange to sit in private with a bhikkhuni, just the two of them, there is an offense of pācittiya," that is, the training rule on private sitting.
Rahonisajjakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Private Sitting.
Bhikkhunivaggo tatiyo.
The Third Chapter on Bhikkhunis.
1198.Ekoti ekadivasiko.Āvasatho piṇḍoti puññatthikehi ekaṃ pāsaṇḍaṃ anuddissa yāvadatthaṃ dātuṃ sālādīsu paññattaṃ pañcasu bhojanesu aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘āvasathapiṇḍo nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ sālāya vā maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā ajjhokāse vā anodissa yāvadattho paññatto hotī’’ti (pāci. 206).Agilānenāti ettha ‘‘agilāno nāma sakkoti tamhā āvasathā pakkamitu’’nti vuttapadabhājaniyaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ sakkotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 206) vuttattā tamhā āvasathā addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ samatthena agilānenāti attho.Tato uddhanti dutiyadivasato uttari.
1198.Eko: For one day. Āvasatho piṇḍo: Avasatha Piṇḍa (alms) is one of the five foods designated in a hall, etc., for the purpose of giving to anyone without specifying a particular sect. Yathāha ‘‘āvasathapiṇḍo nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ sālāya vā maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā ajjhokāse vā anodissa yāvadattho paññatto hotī’’ti (pāci. 206): As he said, "Avasatha Piṇḍa is one of the five foods designated in a hall or pavilion or at the foot of a tree or in the open air, for as long as it is needed, without specifying (a particular person)." Agilānenā: Here, because it was said in the Padabhājaniya commentary, "agilāno nāma sakkoti tamhā āvasathā pakkamitu": "Agilāno (the non-ill) is one who is able to leave that guesthouse.", and in the commentary that "addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ sakkotī": "(He) is able to go half a yojana or a yojana.", the meaning is the non-ill, who is able to go half a yojana or a yojana from that guesthouse. Tato uddhanti: Beyond the second day.
1199.Anodissevapaññattepiṇḍeti yojanā, ‘‘imesaṃyeva vā’’ti aññataraṃ pāsaṇḍaṃ vā ‘‘ettakānaṃyeva vā’’ti tattha puggalaparicchedaṃ vā akatvā sabbasādhāraṇaṃ katvā paññatte āvasathapiṇḍeti attho.Yāvadattheeva piṇḍe paññatteti yojanā, yāvatā attho kucchipūraṇādikaṃ payojanamettha piṇḍeti viggaho, ‘‘ettakaṃ dātabba’’nti aparicchinditvā ‘‘bhuñjantānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ dātabba’’nti paññatte piṇḍe evāti attho.Bhuñjitabbanti kammasādhanaṃ vā bhāvasādhanaṃ vā. ‘‘Bhojana’’nti ajjhāharaṇīyaṃ.Sakinti ekavāraṃ.Tatthāti āvasathe.
1200.Tassapiṇḍassa.Ajjhohāresu sabbesūti sabbesu ajjhohārappayogesu katesu.Tassaajjhohārakassa.Pācittiyopayogagaṇanāya.
1201.‘‘Ekena kulena nānekaṭṭhānabhedesu paññatte’’ti, ‘‘nānākulehi vā nānekaṭṭhānabhedesu paññatte’’ti cāti yojanā. ‘‘Piṇḍe’’ti adhikāro. Nānā ca eko canānekā,ṭhānānaṃ bhedāṭhānabhedā,nānekā ca te ṭhānabhedā cāti viggaho, tesu.Ekabhogoti ekapiṇḍaparibhogo.Evakārena dutiyadivasādiparibhogaṃ nivatteti.
1204.Gilānassāti vuttalakkhaṇena gilāno hutvā punappunaṃ bhuñjantassa gacchato vā āgacchantassa vā anāpattīti yojanā, antamaso addhayojanampi gacchato, gantvā āgacchato vā antarāmagge ca gataṭṭhāne ca ekasmiṃ divase bhuñjantassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘yo gacchanto antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ, gataṭṭhāne ca ekadivasaṃ bhuñjati, tassāpi anāpatti. Āgacchantepi eseva nayo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 208).Odissa paññatteti ettha ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃyeva atthāya uddisitvā paññatto hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 208).Paritteti udarapūraṇāya appahonake thoke bhojane. Yathāha ‘‘yāvadatthaṃ paññatto na hoti, thokaṃ thokaṃ labbhati, tādisaṃ niccampi paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 208).Sakinti yāvadatthaṃ paññattaṃ vuttanayena ekavāraṃ bhuñjato anāpatti.
1205.Yāguādīnītiādi-saddena pañcabhojanato aññesaṃ ajjhoharaṇīyānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
Āvasathakathāvaṇṇanā.
1206.Vuttā samayā aññatrāti yojanā, ‘‘tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānasamayo cīvaradānasamayo cīvarakārasamayo addhānagamanasamayo nāvābhiruhanasamayo mahāsamayo samaṇabhattasamayo’’ti (pāci. 217) vuttā sattavidhakālā aññatra.
gilānasamayo. Atthatakathinānaṃ pañca māsā, itaresaṃ kattikamāsoti ayaṃcīvaradānasamayo. Yadā cīvare kariyamāne kiñcideva cīvare kattabbaṃ karoti, ayaṃcīvarakārasamayo. Yadā addhayojanampi gantukāmo vā hoti, gacchati vā, gato vā, ayaṃaddhānagamanasamayo. Nāvābhiruhanasamayepi eseva nayo. Yadā gocaragāme cattāro bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā na yāpenti, ayaṃmahāsamayo. Yadā yo koci pabbajito bhattena nimanteti, ayaṃsamaṇabhattasamayo. Gaṇo katamoti āha‘‘gaṇo’’tiādi.
1207.Gaṇabhojanaṃ nāma kinti āha‘‘ya’’ntiādi. Yaṃ pañcannaṃ aññataraṃ nimantanato, viññattito vā laddhaṃ, taṃ idha bhojananti adhippetaṃ hotīti yojanā.Nimantanatoti ‘‘bhojanāna’’ntiādinā vakkhamānappakārena kataṃ akappiyanimantanamāha.Viññattitopi vāti ‘‘sacepī’’tiādinā vakkhamānanayena katamakappiyaviññattimāha.
1208-11.Bhojanānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ, ‘‘aññatarassā’’ti seso, ‘‘odano sattu kummāso, maccho maṃsañca bhojana’’nti saṅgahitānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarassa.Nāmanti vakkhamānaṃ odanādināmaṃ.Bhikkhū nimantetīti ettha ‘‘ekato, nānato vā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘ekato nimantitā. Nānato nimantitā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 217-218).Ekato nimantanaṃnāma sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ekato ṭhitānaṃ nimantanaṃ.Nānato nimantanaṃnāma bhikkhūnaṃ visuṃ visuṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā vā ekato ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā vā anekehi nimantanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘cattāri pariveṇāni vā vihāre vā gantvā nānato nimantitā, ekaṭṭhāne ṭhitesuyeva vā eko puttena, eko pitarāti evampi nānato nimantitā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 217-218).
Vevacanaṃnāma odanādisabbapadānaṃ, sampaṭicchathātiādikiriyāpadānañca pariyāyavacanaṃ.Bhāsantaraṃnāma māgadhavacanato aññaṃ sīhaḷadamiḷādivohārantaraṃ. Vevacanehi eva vā bhāsantarena vā nimantetīti sambandho.
Tatonimantanānantaraṃ.Nimantananti yathāvuttaṃ akappiyanimantanaṃ.Ekato gaṇhantīti aññamaññassa dvādasahatthaṃ amuñcitvā ṭhitā vā nisinnā vā ekato gaṇhanti.
‘‘Gaṇabhojanakāraṇa’’nti idaṃ bhojanapaccayā pācittiyaṃ evaṃ gahaṇamantarena na hotīti vuttaṃ.
1212.Ekato, nānato vāpi yaṃ gamanaṃ, bhojanampi vā, taṃ gaṇabhojane na kāraṇantipi viññū bhaṇantīti yojanā.Ekato nānato vāpīti ettha ‘‘ṭhitā vā nisinnā vā’’ti seso.
1213-4.Viññāpetvāti ‘‘amhākaṃ catunnampi bhattaṃ dehī’’tiādinā ekato vā ‘‘mayhaṃ dehi, mayhaṃ dehī’’ti pāṭekkaṃ vā viññāpetvā.Evampīti viññattitopi.
1215.Duvidhassāti nimantakassa, viññāpakassa ca.
1216.Sattasupi samayesu bhuñjataṃ anāpattīti yojanā, ‘‘gaṇabhojana’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati, yathāvuttesu gilānādīsu sattasu kālesu lesaṃ vinā bhuñjantānanti attho.‘‘Ekato’’ti idaṃ ‘‘gahetvā’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Bhuñjatanti bhuñjantānaṃ.Tathāti ‘‘anāpattī’’ti idaṃ paccāmasati.
1217.Anupasampanno ca cārī ca patto ca animantito caanupasampanna…pe… nimantitā,te catutthe katvāti attho, anupasampannaṃ vā piṇḍacāriṃ vā catutthassa pattaṃ vā animantitaṃ vā catutthaṃ katvā ekato gahetvā bhuñjantānaṃ gaṇabhedo muninā pakāsito, gaṇassa aparipuṇṇatā dīpitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Piṇḍāya carati sīlenāti piṇḍacārī, so idha pubbapadalopena‘‘cārī’’ti vutto, piṇḍapātiko. So hi nimantanaṃ asādiyanto gaṇabhojanako gaṇakhādako na hotīti adhippāyo.Pattonāma vihāre nisīditvā catutthena attanā laddhabbabhojanatthāya pesito patto.Animantitonāma paṭhamaṃ akappiyanimantanāya nimantite anantogadho upasampanno.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Api-saddo heṭṭhā dassitaṃ dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vā vasena vuttavinicchayaṃ apekkhati.
1218.Samayaladdhānanti gilānādayo sattasamayā laddhā yehi te samayaladdhā, tesaṃ, niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Aññatarassā’’ti seso,‘‘vasenā’’ti iminā sambandho. Neva gaṇabhedoti yojanā. Samayaladdhakassa attano anāpattibhāvamantarena taṃ catutthaṃ katvā gaṇabhojanaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ pana āpattisambhavato āha‘‘āpatti pana veditabbā’’ti. Yathāhamahāpaccariyaṃ‘‘samayaladdhako sayameva muccati, sesānaṃ gaṇapūrakattā āpattikaro hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 220).
1219.Pañcabhojanesu aññatarassa nāmaṃ gahetvā nimantetvā tesuyeva aññaṃ diyyamānaṃ gaṇhantassa visaṅketābhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘bhojanānañcā’’tiādi.Bhojanānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ, aññatarassa vasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Taṃvisaṅketaṃ, odanādīnaṃ nāmena nimantetvā diyyamānaṃ yāguādiṃ gaṇhantassa gaṇabhojanaṃ na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1221.‘‘Niccabhatta’’nti dhuvabhattaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Niccabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, bahūnampi ekato gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Salākabhattādīsupi eseva nayo.
Gaṇabhojanakathāvaṇṇanā.
1223-4.Bahūhi manussakehīti visuṃ visuṃ nimantitehi anekehi manussehi.Pañcasu yassa kassāti ettha ‘‘sahadhammikesū’’ti seso, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, pañcasu sahadhammikesu yassa kassacīti attho.‘‘Hitvā’’tiādinā kimāhāti? Yassa vikappeti, tasmiṃ sannihite ‘‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti sammukhā vikappanavasena vā tasmiṃ asannihite tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ itthannāmassa dammī’’ti asammukhā vikappanavasena vā paṭhamanimantanāya vikappanaṃ hitvā, taṃ avikappetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Bhattanti ettha ‘‘yo bhuñjatī’’ti seso. Nimantito yo pacchā nimantitaṃ bhattaṃ bhuñjati, tassa pācittiyanti yojanā. Uppaṭipāṭiyā ekasitthampi bhuñjato tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanāti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Pacchā nimantitānaṃ bhojanaṃ paṭhamaṃ bhuñjitvā paṭhamaṃ nimantitānaṃ bhojanaṃ pacchā bhuñjantassa ca ekapatteyeva heṭṭhā paṭhamaṃ nimantitānaṃ bhojanaṃ pakkhipitvā itaraṃ upari pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā hatthaṃ otāretvā heṭṭhā ṭhitabhojane ekasitthampi paṭhamaṃ abhuñjitvā upari ṭhitaṃ paṭhamaṃ bhuñjantassa cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Teneva yathā uppaṭipāṭi na hoti, tathā missīkataṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjantassa na dosotimahāpaccariyaṃvinicchayo byatirekato dassito hoti. Yathāha ‘‘dve tīṇi kulāni nimantetvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nisīdāpetvā ito cito ca āharitvā bhattaṃ ākiranti, sūpabyañjanaṃ ākiranti, ekamissakaṃ hoti, ettha anāpattīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vutta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 229).
1225-6.Paramparabhojanassa sarūpaṃpadabhājanevuttanayena dassetumāha‘‘bhojanānampī’’tiādi. Tesameva pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ paribhuñjatīti yojanā.Mahesinā paridīpitantipadabhājane‘‘paramparabhojanaṃ nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanāna’’ntiādinā (pāci. 227) nayena vuttaṃ.
1227.Yatthāti anekehi ekabhājane pakkhitte yasmiṃ bhojaneti vuttaṃ hoti ekeneva dinne vicāraṇābhāvā.Sabbamekarasaṃ siyāti visuṃ visuṃ viññāyamānarasaṃ ahutvā ekarasameva hoti.
1230.‘‘Gāmenā’’ti iminā gāmaṭṭhāyeva vuttā.‘‘Nimantitassa doso na vijjatī’’ti idaṃ gāmapūganigamehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Gāma-saddena ‘‘gāmā vā araññā vā’’ti (pārā. 91) ettha viya nagarampi saṅgahitaṃ.Pūgonāma visuṃ visuṃ samūhā hutvā puññakārino dhammikamanussā.Nigamonāma sāpaṇo mahāgāmo. Sakalagāmena nimantito hutvā sampatte yattha katthaci gehe bhuñjantassa anāpattīti attho.Pūgādīsupi eseva nayo. Yathāha ‘‘sakalena gāmena ekato hutvā nimantitasseva yattha katthaci bhuñjato anāpatti. Pūgepi eseva nayo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 229).Niccabhatte doso na vijjatīti anekaṭṭhānato diyyamānaṃ niccabhattampi uppaṭipāṭiyā bhuñjantassa na dosoti vuttaṃ hoti.
1231.Kāyo vācā kāyavācācittanti imehi āpajjanaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma.Idha kriyaṃnāma bhojanaṃ,akriyaṃnāma paṭhamanimantanassa avikappanaṃ, idaṃ dvayamevāha‘‘bhojanañcāvikappana’’nti.
Paramparabhojanakathāvaṇṇanā.
1232-3.Pūvāti atirasādayo rasā.Paheṇakatthāyāti paṇṇākāratthāya.Paṭiyattāti sampāditā.Pātheyyatthāyāti gamikassa sambalatthāya. Paṭiyattā manthā vāti sambandho.Manthānāma baddhasattuabaddhasattutilataṇḍulādayo. Yathāha ‘‘baddhasattuabaddhasattutilataṇḍulādi sabbaṃ idha manthotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 233). Ye pūvā, manthā vāti yojanā.Hīti nipātamattaṃ.Tatthapaṭiyattesu tesu pūvesu vā manthesu vā.Bhikkhunāti ettha ‘‘ākaṅkhamānenā’’ti seso.
1232-3. Pūvā means flavors such as excessive sweetness. Paheṇakatthāya means for the purpose of a gift. Paṭiyattā means prepared. Pātheyyatthāyā means for the purpose of provisions for a traveler. The connection is that manthā are prepared. Manthā are things like tightly bound parched grain, tightly bound sesame seeds, rice, etc. As it is said, "All things like tightly bound parched grain, tightly bound sesame seeds, rice, etc., here go under the designation manthā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 233). The construction is "whether pūvā or manthā." Hī is merely an expletive. Tattha, regarding those prepared pūva or manthā. Bhikkhunā, here the rest is "by one who desires."
Dvattipattāti dve vā tayo vā pattāti viggaho.Pūrāti mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ puṇṇā. Yathāha ‘‘mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhāya samapūre patte gahetvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 233). ‘‘Dvattipattā pūrā’’ti cettha parimāṇaṃ dassitaṃ, parimāṇaparimeyyānaṃ abhedopacārena pūvamanthā gahetabbā yathā ‘‘dve tisso taṇḍulanāḷiyo’’ti. Pūvehi vā sattūhi vāti yojanā.Sattūti baddhasattuabaddhasattūnaṃ gahaṇaṃ, imināva tilādīni upalakkhitāni. Tatiyapattassa mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhārājiyā uddhaṃ katvā pakkhittañcetaṃ‘‘tato uttari’’nti iminā ca gayhati. Yathāha ‘‘sace tatiyaṃ pattaṃ thūpīkataṃ gaṇhāti, pūvagaṇanāya pācittiya’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 233).
Dvattipattā is resolved as "two or three bowls." Pūrā means full to the level of the lower rim of the mouth of the bowl. As it is said, "Having taken a bowl filled to the level of the lower line of the mouth rim" (pāci. aṭṭha. 233). Here, "Dvattipattā pūrā" indicates the measure; the pūva and manthā should be taken by treating measure and measured as non-different, just as "two or three nāḷi of rice." The construction is "with pūva or with parched grain." Sattū indicates the taking of tightly bound parched grain and loosely bound parched grain; by this itself sesame seeds and the like are indicated. When a third bowl is heaped up beyond the lower rim of the mouth, this is taken with "tato uttari". As it is said, "If he takes a third bowl heaped up, there is a pācittiya for counting the pūva" (pāci. aṭṭha. 233).
1237.Tatthatesu pūvesu vā manthesu vā dve ce pattapūrā laddhāti yojanā. Eko pattapūro padātabboti yojanā.Ekatoti ekapattapūrato na padātabboti yojanā, kiñcipi akāmā na dātabbanti attho. Yathāha ‘‘yena eko gahito, na tena kiñci akāmā dātabbaṃ. Yathāruci kātabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 233). Evaṃ dadantena āsanasālāya vā attano nibaddhavāsaṭṭhāne vā diṭṭhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa sādhāraṇaṃ katvā dānamantarena na mittānameva dātabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘yathāmittaṃ pana dātuṃ na labbhatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 233).
1237. Tattha, regarding those pūva or manthā, the construction is "if two bowlfuls are obtained." The construction is "one bowlful should be given." Ekato means that not more than one bowlful should be given; the meaning is that not even a little should be given unwillingly. As it is said, "Whatever is taken as one, nothing should be given unwillingly with that. It should be done as one likes" (pāci. aṭṭha. 233). When giving in this way, it should not be given only to friends without making it common to the Sangha seen in the assembly hall or in one's own regular dwelling place, but by means of an invitation to receive. As it is said, "But it is not permissible to give as a favor" (pāci. aṭṭha. 233).
1238-9.Apaheṇakaṃ apātheyyaṃ dentānanti sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘na paheṇakatthāya na pātheyyatthāya paṭiyattaṃ dentī’’ti (pāci. 235).Tatoti paheṇakapātheyyato.Vā-saddena idha avuttaṃ ‘‘gamane paṭippassaddhe dentī’’ti (pāci. 235)anāpattivārevuttaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tadūnakanti tato dvattipattato ūnakaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘ūnakadvattipattapūre paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti (pāci. 235). Apātheyyādiatthāya paṭiyāditanti saññāya pātheyyādiṃ gaṇhantassāpi āpattiyeva acittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Attanoyeva gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘imassa hatthe dehī’’ti vacanenāpi āpajjanato vacīkammaṃ.
1238-9. The connection is "to those who give what is neither a gift nor provisions." As it is said, "They give what is not prepared for the purpose of a gift or for the purpose of provisions" (pāci. 235). Tato, from a gift or provisions. The vā-particle includes here what is unsaid, "when desisting from going, they give" (pāci. 235) said in the anāpattivāra. Tadūnakaṃ means less than those two or three bowls. As it is said, "He accepts less than two or three full bowls" (pāci. 235). Even for one who takes provisions etc. with the perception that it is prepared for the purpose of provisions etc., there is still an offense because the sikkhāpada is unintentional. Because of incurring an offense even by the statement, "Give it into his hand," for the purpose of taking it oneself, it is a verbal act.
Kāṇamātukathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Story of Kāṇamātā.
1240.Aññenāti taddhitalopena niddeso, aññatarenāti attho, pavāritoti sambandho.Bhojanānanti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Pavāritoti ‘‘gaṇhatha bhante yāva icchathā’ti evaṃ yāvadatthapavāraṇāya, sayañca ‘alaṃ āvuso thokaṃ thokaṃ dehī’ti evaṃ paṭikkhepapavāraṇāyā’’tiaṭṭhakathāyavuttappakāradvayena pavāritoti attho. Vikappadvaye pakāradvaye pavārita-sadde vara-dhātussa patthanavāraṇatthavasenāyamattho veditabbo, ‘‘pācitti anatiritta’’nti padacchedo.‘‘Anatirittaṃ bhojana’’nti visesitabbamapekkhitvā‘‘aññenā’’ti ettha vibhattiṃ vipariṇāmetvā ‘‘pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojana’’nti yojetabbaṃ, vakkhamāne anatirittakatabhojananiddese vuttesu pañcasu bhojanesu aññataraṃ bhojananti attho. ‘‘Khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 236, 238) saha desitattā ekayogañāyena ‘‘khādanīyaṃ vā’’ti ca gahetabbaṃ. Pañca bhojanāni, kālikattayañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ yāvakālikaṃ khādanīyanti vuttaṃ.
1240. Aññenā is an indication by elision of the taddhita; the meaning is "by another," the connection is "being invited." Bhojanānaṃ is abundance in determination. Pavārito means invited in two ways as stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Having invited, 'Venerable Sir, take as much as you like,' by an invitation for as much as one wants; and oneself, 'Enough, friend, give a little, a little,' by an invitation to decline." In the two alternatives, two modes, in the word pavārita, this meaning should be understood because of the sense of requesting and preventing of the vara-dhātu. "Pācitti anatiritta" is the word division. "Anatirittaṃ bhojana" having been required to be specified, by changing the inflection here in "aññenā", it should be connected as "one food among the five foods," meaning one food among the five foods stated in the upcoming designation of unrestricted food. Because "khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā" (pāci. 236, 238) are taught together, "khādanīyaṃ vā" should also be taken by the rule of one aggregation. Having excluded the five foods and the three kinds of kālika, all the yāvakālika is said to be khādanīya.
1241.Asananti ettha vippakatabhojanaṃ dissati, bhuñjamāno ce puggalo hoti, bhojanakiriyānupacchinnā vattatīti attho.Bhojananti pavāraṇapahonakaodanādi hatthādīsu dissati.Hatthapāsoti pavāraṇapahonakaṃ bhojanaṃ dātuṃ abhiharitvā ṭhitokāso aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Abhiharaṇaṃabhihāro,so evaabhihāratā,tathā dātuṃ ṭhitassa kāyena kato abhihāro dissatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Kāyavācāpaṭikkhepoti tathā abhihaṭe bhojane paṭiggāhakassa hatthavikārādiko kāyiko vā ‘‘ala’’ntiādiko vācasiko vā paṭikkhepo paññāyatīti attho.
1241. Asanaṃ, here, prepared food is seen, meaning that if the person is eating, the act of eating is proceeding uninterrupted. Bhojanaṃ is seen on the hands etc., such as rice etc. that are suitable for invitation. Hatthapāso means that the space, about two and a half cubits, where food suitable for invitation is brought near to be given, is standing; so it is said. Abhiharaṇaṃ is abhihāro, that itself is abhihāratā, thus the bringing near done by the body of one standing to give is seen; so it is said. Kāyavācāpaṭikkhepo means that in that food that has been brought near in that way, a bodily refusal, such as a gesture of the hand, or a verbal refusal, such as "enough," of the recipient is evident.
1242.Nippapañcenāti saha vāsanāya pahīnataṇhādipapañcattayarahitena tathāgatena.
1242. Nippapañcenā means by the Tathāgata who is without the three kinds of papañca, with craving etc. that are abandoned along with latent tendencies.
1243.Tatthāti odanādīsu.Sattannanti ‘‘sālī’’tiādinā vakkhamānānurūpānaṃ.
1243. Tatthā, in rice etc. Sattannaṃ, of the seven that are in accordance with what will be said beginning with "sālī."
1244.Odakoti udake bhavo.Etthāti pañcaṅgapavāraṇāya.Ayaṃnicchayoti vakkhamānavidhippakāraṃ vinicchayaṃ dasseti.
1244. Odako means born in water. Etthā, in the five-factored invitation. Ayaṃnicchayo indicates the decision showing the mode of the upcoming regulation.
1245.Sālīti sabbasālijāti.Vīhīti sabbavīhijāti.Kaṅgūti setarattakāḷabhedā sabbā kaṅgujāti.Varakosetavarako.Dhaññenasambhatapuññasambhārena bhagavatā.
1245. Sālī means all kinds of sāli. Vīhī means all kinds of vīhi. Kaṅgū means all kinds of kaṅgu, with white, red, and black varieties. Varako is white varako. Dhaññena, by the Blessed One, with the accumulation of merit that is amassed.
1246.Tiṇanti tiṇabījameva vuttaṃ.Dīpitaṃsaṅgahitaṃ.Varakacorakoti sukhumavarako.
1246. Tiṇaṃ means only seed of grass is meant. Dīpitaṃ means included. Varakacorako is fine varako.
1248.Aṅgasampattiṃ dassetumāha‘‘hatthenā’’tiādi.
1248. To show the accomplishment of the factors, he says "hatthenā" etc.
1249.Tanūti tanukā.
1249. Tanū means thin.
1250.Na rakkhatipavāraṇaṃ.
1250. Na rakkhati the invitation.
1251-2.Dhaññarasādīnītiādi-saddena dadhiādayo gahitā.Āropetvāti uddhanaṃ āropetvā.Phalanti elāḷukādiphalaṃ.Paṇṇanti sūpasākaṃ.Kaḷīranti veḷuādīnaṃ kaḷīraṃ.Bahūnīti tesameva visesanaṃ.Tattha cāti pakkhittapaṇṇādimhi takkādike.Odhiṃ dassetīti ettha ‘‘paribhogakāle’’ti seso.Sañjanetīti ettha ‘‘phalādiyāgū’’ti labbhati.
1251-2. Dhaññarasādīnī, with the ādi-particle, curd etc. are taken. Āropetvā means having placed upon the hearth. Phalaṃ means fruit such as elāḷuka etc. Paṇṇaṃ means soup greens. Kaḷīraṃ means the shoots of bamboo etc. Bahūnī is an adjective of those themselves. Tattha ca, in that takka etc. into which greens etc. have been put. Odhiṃ dassetī, here the rest is "at the time of use." Sañjanetī, here "fruit juice gruel etc." is obtained.
1253-4.Raseti maṃsādirase. ‘‘Yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vā ‘‘yāgu’’nti vā vatvāti yojetabbā.Yāgu saṅgahitāti ettha odhipaññāyanaapaññāyanavikappadvaye yāguyā samo vinicchayoti adhippāyo.
1253-4. Rase, in broth of meat etc. It should be connected as "having said, 'Take gruel' or 'gruel'." Yāgu saṅgahitā, here the intention is that the decision is the same for gruel in the two alternatives of perceiving and not perceiving the presence of a flavoring ingredient.
1255.Chupantīti samphusanti. Chupa samphasseti dhātu, pakkhipantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘yattha macchamaṃsaṃ pakkhipantī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). Sāsapamattampi macchamaṃsaṃ vā sace paññāyatīti yojanā.Pavāraṇanti ettha ‘‘janetī’’ti seso.Yāguyāti padaṃ paccattavasena vipariṇāmetvā yāgu janetīti yojetabbaṃ.
1255. Chupantī means touch. The dhātu is chupa samphassati, meaning put in. As it is said, "Where they put in fish meat" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). The connection is that if even mustard-seed-sized fish meat is evident. Pavāraṇaṃ, here the rest is "generates." The word Yāguyā should be changed in accordance with its own form and connected as "gruel generates."
1256.Saṃsaṭṭhoti parissāvito na sañjanetīti yojanā.
1256. Saṃsaṭṭho means if it is strained, it does not generate; so it should be connected.
1257.Sabbaso ṭhapetvāti sambandho. Maṃsādipakkhittaodanādippakaraṇāvasesato aṅgaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sabbaso’’ti. Sabbaso na pavāretīti yojanā.Veḷutaṇḍulanti veḷuvīhīnaṃ taṇḍulaṃ.Ādi-saddena kandamūlaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘veṇutaṇḍulādīhi vā kandamūlaphalehi vā yehi kehici katabhatta’’nti.
1257. Having completely set aside, is the connection. To show a factor from the remainder of the discussion about rice etc. into which meat etc. have been put, he says "sabbaso". The connection is "he does not invite in every way." Veḷutaṇḍulaṃ means rice of bamboo shoots. With the ādi-particle, root tubers are included. As it is said, "Food made with bamboo shoot rice etc. or with root tubers and fruits, or with whatever."
1258.Tatoti sāliādito, veḷuādito ca, tato nibbattā puthukā vāti attho.Tāhīti puthukāhi.Suddhāti puthukādīhi amissā na pavārentīti sambandho.
1258. Tato, from sāli etc., and from bamboo shoots etc., meaning puthuka produced from that. Tāhī, with those puthuka. Suddhā means they do not invite with puthuka etc. unmixed; this is the connection.
1259.Bhaṭṭhānanti bhajjitānaṃ. Sattūhi saṅgahitaṃsattusaṅgahitaṃ.
1259. Bhaṭṭhānaṃ means fried. That which is included with parched grain is sattusaṅgahitaṃ.
1261.Sattūnaṃ modakoti sattubaddhaṃ, baddhasattūti attho.
1261. Sattūnaṃ modako means a ball of parched grain, meaning tightly bound parched grain.
1263.Tehevāti lājehi eva.Suddhaṃ khajjakaṃ vāti vakkhamānanayena macchādīhi asammissaṃ khajjakaṃ.
1263. Teheva means only with parched grain. Suddhaṃ khajjakaṃ vā means snack unmixed with fish etc. in accordance with the upcoming method.
1264.‘‘Pūrita’’ntiādinā tabbipariyāyaṃ dasseti.Tanti kuṇḍakādi.
1264. With "Pūrita" etc., he shows its opposite. Taṃ means the kuṇḍaka etc.
1266.Akappiyaṃmaṃsaṃ.Avatthuttāti akappiyamaṃsānaṃ vāretabbattā pavāraṇāya avatthuttā.
1266. Akappiyaṃ means meat that is impermissible. Avatthuttā means because impermissible meats are to be avoided, they are not the subject of invitation.
1267.Vatthukattāti kappiyamaṃsassa pavāraṇāya vatthubhūtattā.Pavāretīti ettha ‘‘khādiyamānassa ca maṃsattā’’ti seso daṭṭhabbo. Yathāha ‘‘yaṃ pana khādati, taṃ kiñcāpi paṭikkhipitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitaṃ, khādiyamānaṃ pana maṃsabhāvaṃ na jahatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239).
1267. Vatthukattā means because permissible meat is the subject of invitation. Pavāretī, here the rest, "and because it is being eaten as meat," should be seen. As it is said, "Whatever he eats, although it is situated in a place where it should be refused, it does not abandon the state of being meat while being eaten" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239).
1268.Kiñci kappiyabhojananti pañcasu bhojanesu yaṃ kiñci kappiyabhojanaṃ.
1268. Kiñci kappiyabhojanaṃ means whatever permissible food there is among the five foods.
1269.Akappiyaṃ maṃsaṃ aññanti akappiyamaṃsato avasesaṃ kuladūsanādivasena uppannabhojanaṃ gahitaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘kuladūsanavejjakammauttarimanussadhammārocanasāditarūpiyādīhi nibbattaṃ buddhapaṭikuṭṭhaṃ anesanāya uppannaṃ akappiyabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāretī’’ti.
1269. Akappiyaṃ maṃsaṃ aññaṃ means food that arises due to defaming families etc. remaining from impermissible meat is taken. As it is said, "He refuses impermissible food that has arisen by defaming families, medical treatment, announcing superior human qualities, attachment, gold and silver etc., that has been censured by the Buddha, that has arisen by wrong livelihood; he does not invite with it."
1270-1.Asanaṃ bhojananti aṅgadvaye vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sace ajjhohaṭa’’ntiādi.Ajjhohaṭanti paragalagataṃ hoti.‘‘Patte’’ti iminā thālakādibhājanañca gahitaṃ. Katthaci bhojanaṃ natthīti yojanā. Patte, hatthe, mukhe vā yattha katthaci pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ kiñci na vijjati, gandhamattaṃ paññāyatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1270-1. To show the decision in two factors, asana and bhojana, he says "sace ajjhohaṭa" etc. Ajjhohaṭa means it has reached the throat. With "Patte", a dish etc. such as a plate is also taken. There is no food anywhere; this is the connection. It is said that there is none of the five foods in a bowl, in the hand, or in the mouth, wherever it may be, but only a trace of odor is evident.
1272.Ādāyāti ettha ‘‘aññatra bhuñjitu’’nti seso. ‘‘Yopi aññatra gantvā bhuñjitukāmo mukhe bhattaṃ gilitvā sesaṃ ādāyā’’tiādinā (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239)mahāpaccariyaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttavacanassa pamāṇattā āha‘‘na pavāretī’’ti.
1272. Ādāyā, here the rest is "to eat elsewhere." Because of the authority of the statement said in the Mahāpaccariyaṭṭhakathā, "Even one who, having gone elsewhere, wishes to eat, having swallowed food in his mouth, takes the remainder," (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239) he says "na pavāretī".
1273.‘‘Mukhe bhattaṃ gilitaṃ, hatthe bhattaṃ vighāsādassa dātukāmo, patte bhattaṃ bhikkhussa dātukāmo, sace tasmiṃ khaṇe paṭikkhipati, na pavāretī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239) evamāgataṃkurundaṭṭhakathaṃsaṅgahetuṃ ‘‘mukhe ca bhatta’’ntiādivacanato ca ‘‘asanassa upacchedā’’tiādinā vakkhamānāya yuttiyā asanāvasāne yujjamānattā ca imissā gāthāya ‘‘bhottukāmo’’ti pāṭhaṃ aggahetvā‘‘dātukāmo’’ti pāṭho gahetabbo.
1273. "Food has been swallowed in the mouth, he wishes to give food in the hand to one who eats remnants, he wishes to give food in the bowl to a bhikkhu; if he refuses at that moment, he does not invite" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239), in order to include the Kurundaṭṭhakathā that has come in this way, and because of the reason that will be said beginning with "mukhe ca bhatta" etc. and because it accords with the end of eating by the reasoning of "asanassa upacchedā" etc., in this verse, not taking the reading "bhottukāmo", the reading "dātukāmo" should be taken.
1274.‘‘Asanassa upacchedā’’ti iminā tasmiṃyeva āsane yathānisinneneva kātabbe asane āsāvacchedo dīpito. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘tasmiṃ pana āsane na bhuñjitukāmo, vihāraṃ pavisitvā bhuñjitukāmo, aññassa vā dātukāmo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239).Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃtassa vinicchayassa dassitattā‘‘mahāpaññā’’ti kurundaṭṭhakathācariyaṃ sandhāyāha.Kāraṇākāraṇaññunoti ‘‘pavāraṇassa idaṃ kāraṇaṃ, idaṃ akāraṇa’’nti jānantā. ‘‘Kāraṇākāraṇaññunā’’ti katthaci potthake likhanti. Tattha mahāpaññā kāraṇākāraṇaññuno ācariyā asanassa…pe… soti hi kāraṇaṃ kathayantīti yojanā.
1274. With "Asanassa upacchedā", here the interruption of desire in the act of eating to be done while sitting in that same seat is shown. As it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "But he does not wish to eat in that seat, he wishes to enter the monastery and eat, or he wishes to give it to another" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). Because of the showing of that decision in the Kurundaṭṭhakathā, he says "mahāpaññā" referring to the teacher of the Kurundaṭṭhakathā. Kāraṇākāraṇaññuno, to those who know "this is the reason for invitation, this is not the reason." In some books they write "Kāraṇākāraṇaññunā." There, the construction is "the teachers of great wisdom who know the reason and non-reason say the reason why asanassa…pe…soti."
1275.Hatthapāsaṅge vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘gaṇhato…pe… pasārita’’nti.Gaṇhatoti yena iriyāpathena samannāgato hutvā gaṇhāti, evaṃ gaṇhato.Pacchimaṃ aṅganti dāyakena dinnassa paṭiggāhakassa yo avayavo parabhāge hoti, taṃ ṭhānādiiriyāpathasamannāgatassa paṭiggāhakassa paṇhiādiṃ pacchimaṃ aṅgaṃ. Dadato pasāritaṃ hatthaṃ vinā purimaṃ aṅganti yojanā.Pasāritaṃ hatthanti ettha ‘‘dātu’’nti seso.Ubhinnanti ettha ‘‘antare’’ti seso. Paṭiggāhakadāyakānaṃ pacchimapurimānaṃ ubhinnaṃ aṅgānaṃ antare okāse. Aḍḍhaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ hatthaṃ teyyaṃ tatiyaṃ yassāti viggaho, atirekavidatthidviratanappamāṇanti attho.
1275. To show the decision regarding the hand range, he says "gaṇhato…pe… pasārita". Gaṇhato, in whatever deportment he is endowed with when he takes, thus when he takes. Pacchimaṃ aṅgaṃ, of the recipient, the limb that is on the far side of the giver, the hinder limb of the recipient who is endowed with posture etc. such as standing is the heel etc. Without the hand extended by the one giving, it is the front limb; this is the connection. Pasāritaṃ hatthaṃ, here the rest is "to give." Ubhinnaṃ, here the rest is "in between." In the space between the hinder and front limbs of both the recipient and the giver. The dissolution is "a half, one third, or one fourth of a cubit it has," meaning a span, two spans, or a fathom in excess.
1276.Abhihāraṅge vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tasmi’’ntiādi. Aḍḍhateyyetasmiṃ ṭhāneṭhatvāti yojanā, dviratanavidatthipamāṇe tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhatvāti attho.Abhihaṭanti upanītaṃ.Tādisanti abhihaṭasadisaṃ, pavāraṇapahonakānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataranti attho.
1276. To show the decision regarding the offering, he says, "tasmiṃ" etc. The construction is: having stood in that place within a fathom's length; the meaning is: having stood in that place, which is two ratanas and a vidatthi in measure. Abhihaṭaṃ means brought near. Tādisaṃ means similar to what is brought near, meaning any one of the five foods suitable for invitation.
1277-8.Ādhārake vāpīti valayādipattādhārakepi.Ūrūsūti dvinnaṃ ūrūnaṃ majjhe, aṅketi attho.Āharitvāti abhiharitvā.Bhattaṃ gaṇhātīti ettha ‘‘ito’’ti seso, ‘‘ito bhattaṃ gaṇhā’’ti anantare nisinno ca bhāsatīti yojanā.Bhattanti upalakkhaṇaṃ, pañcasu bhojanesu yaṃ kiñcīti attho.Tanti tathā gaṇhituṃ vuttabhattādibhojanaṃ.Abhihārassa cāti etthaca-saddo padapūraṇattho, evakārattho vā, abhāvā evāti yojanā.
1277-8. Ādhārake vāpī means even in a bowl-holder made of wicker, etc. Ūrūsu means in the middle of the two thighs, meaning in the lap. Āharitvā means having brought near. Bhattaṃ gaṇhāti here, "ito" is understood; the construction is: "ito bhattaṃ gaṇhā," and the one sitting nearby speaks. Bhattaṃ is indicative, meaning any of the five foods. Taṃ means that food, such as rice, that has been mentioned for acceptance. In Abhihārassa cā, the word ca is merely a filler or has the force of "eva," the construction being "abhāvā eva."
1279.‘‘Bhattapacchi’’nti idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ.
1279. "Bhattapacchi" is indicative.
1280.Dīyamāneti ettha ‘‘bhojane’’ti seso.Itaroti hatthapāse nisinno. Abhihāraṅgassa abhāvā sona pavāritoti.
1280. Dīyamāne, "bhojane" is understood here. Itaro means the one sitting within arm's reach. Because of the absence of the offering element, he is not invited.
1281.Paṭikkhepaṅge vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘kāyenā’’tiādi. Vācābhihārassa anaṅgattā āha‘‘kāyenābhihaṭa’’nti. Yathāha ‘‘vācāya abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). Abhihaṭabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipituṃ aṅguliyo vā hatthaṃ vā hatthagatassa kassaci calanādiṃ yaṃ kañci kāyavikāraṃ karonto, bhamuṃ ukkhipanto, kujjhitvā olokento vā kāyena paṭikkhipatīti vuccati. ‘‘Ala’’nti vā ‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti vā ‘‘āgamehī’’ti vā ‘‘adhivāsehī’’ti vā ‘‘mā ākirā’’ti vā ‘‘apagacchāhī’’ti vā evamādikaṃ vadanto vācāya paṭikkhipatīti vuccati.
1281. To show the decision regarding the rejection element, he says, "kāyenā" etc. Because verbal offering is not an element, he says, "kāyenābhihaṭaṃ". As he said, "There is no invitation if one rejects with speech an offering brought near" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). While rejecting the offered food, doing any bodily gesture, such as moving the fingers or hand, or any movement of someone holding something in their hand, or raising an eyebrow, or looking with displeasure, is called rejecting with the body. Saying something like "Enough," or "I will not take it," or "Come here," or "Give it to me," or "Do not scatter," or "Go away," is called rejecting with speech.
1282-3.Ākirāti etthāpi ‘‘iti cā’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ vadantassa nivāretukāmatācitte satipi nivāraṇavacanena hontaṃ pavāraṇaṃ ākirātiādividhivacane na hotīti āha‘‘na pana’nti pavāraṇā’’ti. Pavāraṇā pana na atthīti yojanā.
1282-3. Ākirā also, "iti ca" should be added. Even if there is a desire to prevent someone who says this, the invitation that is about to occur does not occur with words of prohibition like "scatter," therefore, he says, "na pana’nti pavāraṇā". The construction is: but there is no invitation.
1284.‘‘Rasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadeti sambandho.Taṃ sutvāti taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā.
1284. The connection is that he says, "Take the sauce." Taṃ sutvā means having heard that statement.
1285.‘‘Sāra’’nti idaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanamattaṃ.‘‘Ida’’nti sāmaññena macchamaṃsaṃ vadati, pavāraṇaṅgaṃ hoti.Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasanti ettha dvandasamāsassapi sambhavato ‘‘macchaṃ, maṃsaṃ gaṇhā’’ti ca vuttaṃ hoti, tañca aṅgaṃ hoti.
1285. "Sāra" is just a manner of speaking. "Idaṃ" refers generally to fish and meat, and it is an element of invitation. Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasaṃ, because the dvanda compound is also possible here, it is also said, "Take fish, take meat," and that is an element.
1286.‘‘Rasaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vutte panassa vikappassa abhāvā pavāraṇassa aṅgaṃ na hoti. Tenevāha‘‘atthi ca maṃsaṃ ce’’ti.
1286. If he says, "Take the sauce," without any alternative, it is not an element of invitation. Therefore, he says, "atthi ca maṃsaṃ ce".
1287.Muhuttaṃāgamehīti kañci kālaṃ olokehi.
1287. Muhuttaṃ āgamehi means look for a moment.
1288.Panasādīhītiādi-saddena vettaṅgādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
1288. Panasādīhi, the ādi-word includes the acceptance of vettaṅga, etc.
1290.Macchasūpaṃ maṃsasūpanti ettha samāsavikappā ‘‘maccharasaṃ maṃsarasa’’nti ettha viya daṭṭhabbā.
1290. Macchasūpaṃ maṃsasūpaṃ, the options for the compound should be seen as in "maccharasaṃ maṃsarasaṃ."
1291.Karambakanti macchamaṃsena vā aññena vā missasseva sūpavisesassa nāmaṃ. Teneva ca ‘‘maṃsakarambakaṃ gaṇhatha, macchakarambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte nisedhena pavāraṇā hoti, ‘‘karambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte aniyatavacanattā na hoti. Kaḷīrasūpādīhi samānavinicchayabhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘eseva nayo vutto’’ti.
1291. Karambakaṃ is the name of a particular soup mixed with fish or meat or something else. Therefore, if it is said, "Take meat karambakaṃ, take fish karambakaṃ," there is no invitation due to the prohibition, but if it is said, "Take karambakaṃ," there is no invitation because of the indefinite statement. To show that the decision is similar to that for kaḷīrasūpa, etc., he says, "eseva nayo vutto".
1292.Vuttasminti vutte.
1292. Vuttasmiṃ means in what has been said.
1293.Yenāti bhattena.Āpucchitoti ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti vutto.Tassabhattassa.Atthitāyayāguyā vijjamānattā.Iti kāraṇanti idaṃ pavāraṇakāraṇaṃ.
1293. Yena means with the rice. Āpucchito means having been told, "Take it." Tassa bhattassa, because the rice-gruel exists. Iti kāraṇaṃ means this is the reason for the invitation.
1294.‘‘Yāgumissakaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vutte sā yāgutatthatasmiṃ abhihaṭe bhājane pakkhittabhattena samā vā bahutarā vā ce hoti,soevaṃ vatvā abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhepaṃ bhikkhu na pavāreti kirāti yojanā.Kirāti aruciṃ sūceti. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘kāraṇaṃ pana duddasa’’nti.
1294. If he says, "Take the rice-gruel mixture," if that rice-gruel is there, in that offered bowl, equal to or more than the rice placed in it, so, having said this, does the bhikkhu reject the offered food, or not, is the construction. Kirā indicates distaste. Therefore, he will say, "kāraṇaṃ pana duddasaṃ".
1295.Sabbatthāti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu.
1295. Sabbatthā means in all the commentaries.
1296.Visuṃ katvāti ekasitthampi yathā na hoti, tathā rasaṃ vā khīraṃ vā bhattato viyojetvā.
1296. Visuṃ katvā means separating the sauce or milk from the rice so that not even a single drop remains.
1297.Gacchantenevāti yāva bhojananiṭṭhānaṃ, tāva gacchanteneva. Yathāha ‘‘gacchantena nadipūraṃ pattenapi aṭṭhatvā naditīre gumbaṃ parikkhipitvā vicarantena nāvaṃ vā setuṃ vā āruḷhena aṭṭhatvā vaṭṭetvā vicarantenā’’ti.
1297. Gacchantenevā means even while still going, up to the completion of the meal. As he said, "Even while going, when the river is full, or when surrounded by bushes on the riverbank, or when wandering around, or when climbing a boat or a bridge, or when wandering around, having stopped and turned around."
1298.Soti gacchanto.Tatoti ṭhānato, gamanairiyāpathassa vikopitattāti adhippāyo.
1298. So means the one going. Tato means from that place, the idea is that the posture of going has been disrupted.
1299.Āsanaṃavicāletvāti nisajjāvasena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ acāletvā, anuṭṭhahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Adinnādāne viya ṭhānācāvanaṃ gahetabba’’ntigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
1299. Āsanaṃ avicāletvā means without moving the place touched by the act of sitting, it is said to mean without getting up. In the Gaṇṭhipada, it is said, "The removal from the spot should be understood as in the case of taking what is not given."
1300.Tatoti pavāritakālato uddhaṃ,tatonisinnaṭṭhānato vā. Ito, etto vā.Īsakampi saṃsaritunti nisinnaṭṭhānato ito cito ca thokampi saṃsarituṃ, apagantunti attho.
1300. Tato means after the time of invitation, or tato from that sitting place. From here, or from there. Īsakampi saṃsarituṃ means to move even a little bit from the sitting place, to go away.
1301.Sabbatthāti pīṭhakādisaṃhārime sabbasmiṃ āsane.‘‘Vinayaññunā’’ti iminā ‘‘sace pana naṃ saha mañcena ukkhipitvā aññatra nenti, vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239)aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pīṭhakādīsupi ayameva vinicchayo’’ti vuttabhāvaṃ jānantenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1301. Sabbatthā means on every seat, such as a stool, that can be moved. By "Vinayaññunā," it is said that one knows the statement in the commentary: "But if they lift it up together with the cot and take it elsewhere, it is allowable" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239), and "This same decision applies to stools, etc."
1302.Nipajjitvāti ettha ‘‘parivattantena yena passena nipanno, tassa ṭhānaṃ nātikkametabba’’nti vacanato pubbasayitaṭṭhānaṃ avijahitvā sayitvāyevāti attho.Tathevāti ukkuṭiko hutvāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tassa pana heṭṭhā palālapīṭhaṃ vā kiñci vā nisīdanakaṃ dātabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
1302. Nipajjitvā, here, according to the statement, "While turning around lying down, the place of the side with which he lay down should not be exceeded," the meaning is: having lain down without abandoning the previous lying-down position. Tathevā means as if having become squatting. It is said in the commentary: "But a mat of straw or something to sit on should be given under him" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239).
1303.Atirittaṃ karontena sikkhunā bhājanaṃ onametvāna bhojane dassite atha ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti vattabbanti yojanā. Tatthaatirittaṃ karontenāti ‘‘atirittaṃ nāma kappiyakataṃ hoti, paṭiggahitakataṃ hoti, uccāritakataṃ hoti, hatthapāse kataṃ hoti, bhuttāvinā kataṃ hoti, bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā avuṭṭhitena kataṃ hoti, ‘alametaṃ sabba’nti vuttaṃ hoti, gilānātirittaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. 239) vuttesu aṭṭhasu ākāresu antaṃ vinā purimehi sattahi vinayakammākārehi atirittaṃ karontenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘imehi sattahi vinayakammākārehi yaṃ atiritta’’ntiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239).
1303. Having offered the food by lowering the bowl, the bhikkhu who is making an excess should say, "Enough, this is all," is the construction. Here, atirittaṃ karontena means "Excess is what has been made allowable, what has been received, what has been raised up, what has been placed within arm's reach, what has been done by one who has eaten, what has been done by one who has been invited and has not gotten up from the seat, what has been said as 'Enough, this is all,' and what is excess for the sick" (pāci. 239), among these eight ways, without the last, by the first seven ways of Vinaya action, it is said to be making an excess. As he said, "That which is excess by these seven ways of Vinaya action," etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239).
kappiyakatanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evamuparipikata-saddassa attho ca samāsaviggaho ca veditabbo. Avasiṭṭhapadesu bhikkhunā paṭiggahitaṃpaṭiggahitaṃnāma. Taṃ kārāpetvā āgatena bhikkhunā thokaṃ uccāretvā, otāretvā vā dassitaṃuccāritakataṃnāma. Kappiyaṃ kārāpetumāgatassa aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇahatthapāsabbhantaragatena atirittakataṃ‘‘hatthapāse kata’’nti vuccati. Antamaso pavāraṇajanakaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhojanaṃ kusaggenāpi gahetvā bhuttattābhuttāvinā. Yathāha ‘‘pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ antamaso kusaggenāpi bhuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Bhuñjanto pavārito hutvā yo āsanaṃ na kopeti, so bhuttāvī pavārito ‘‘āsanā avuṭṭhito’’ti vuccati, tena kataṃ‘‘bhuttāvinā…pe… avuṭṭhitena kata’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Alametaṃ sabba’’nti vacībhedaṃ katvā vuttaṃ‘‘alametaṃ sabbanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti dassitaṃ. Ayaṃ sattavidho vinayakammākāro nāma.
It is said to be kappiyakataṃ. Similarly, the meaning of the word kata and the compound and its dissolution should be understood above. What is left over, received by the bhikkhu, is called paṭiggahitaṃ. What is shown by the bhikkhu who has had it made and has come, having raised it up a little or lowered it, is called uccāritakataṃ. What is made excess by being within arm's reach, which is a fathom and a half, of one who has come to have it made allowable is called "hatthapāse kataṃ." Having eaten because at least some food that generates invitation, even with a blade of grass, is bhuttāvinā. As he said, "If one of the five foods has been eaten, even with a blade of grass." One who, while eating, has been invited and does not disturb the seat is called bhuttāvī pavārito "āsanā avuṭṭhito," what is done by him is called "bhuttāvinā…pe… avuṭṭhitena kataṃ." What has been said after making a verbal distinction, "Enough, this is all," is shown as "alametaṃ sabbanti vuttaṃ hoti." This is called the sevenfold way of Vinaya action.
gilānātirittaṃnāma.
gilānātirittaṃ means excess for the sick.
‘‘Tena bhikkhunā’’ti iminā ‘‘bhuttāvinā’’ti ca ‘‘bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitenā’’ti ca vuttappakārena visiṭṭhaṃ teneva pākaṭaṃ bhikkhuṃ parāmasati, pavāraṇajanakānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ appamattakampi bhuttāvinā, bhuttāvī pavāritopi hutvā āsanā avuṭṭhitena vā bhikkhunāti vuttaṃ hoti.Onamitvāna bhājaneti ettha ‘‘dassite bhojane’’ti seso, ‘‘athā’’ti iminā sambandho. Kappiyakaraṇārahāni siṅgiverādīni kappiyaṃ kāretvā paṭiggahāpetvā āgantvā hatthapāsabbhantare patvā atirittaṃ kārāpentena bhikkhunā bhājanaṃ thokaṃ onāmetvā uccāretvā dassitakālānantarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Uttari kātabbaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ala’’ntiādi.
By "tena bhikkhunā," it refers to the bhikkhu who is distinct and well-known in the manner described as "bhuttāvinā" and "bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitenā," it is said to be by a bhikkhu who has eaten even a little bit of one of the five foods that generate invitation, or by one who has been invited and has not gotten up from his seat. In Onamitvāna bhājane, "dassite bhojane" is understood, and this is connected with "athā." It is said that after the time of having made allowable the siṅgivera, etc., which are fit to be made allowable, and having had it received, and having come and reached within arm's reach, the bhikkhu who is making an excess has slightly lowered or raised the bowl. To show what should be done further, he says, "ala" etc.
‘‘tena bhikkhunā’’ti iminā ‘‘bhuttāvinā kataṃ, bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā avuṭṭhitena kata’’nti aṅgadvayaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.‘‘Onametvāna bhājana’’nti iminā ‘‘uccāritakataṃ hotī’’ti idaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyakataṃ, paṭiggahitakataṃ, hatthapāsekata’’nti idaṃ tayaṃ anantariyavācināatha-saddena saṅgahitaṃ. ‘‘Alametaṃ sabba’’nti idaṃ panettha sarūpeneva dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
By "tena bhikkhunā," the two elements "bhuttāvinā kataṃ, bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā avuṭṭhitena kataṃ" are included. By "Onametvāna bhājanaṃ," "uccāritakataṃ hotī" is included. The three, "Kappiyakataṃ, paṭiggahitakataṃ, hatthapāsekataṃ," are included by the word atha, which expresses immediacy. "Alametaṃ sabba" should be seen as shown here in its own form.
1304.Patte ṭhitabhojanameva atirittaṃ kātabbanti natthi, pacchiādīsu yattha katthaci bhājane ṭhitampi kātabbanti dassetumāha‘‘kappiyaṃ panā’’ti.Kuṇḍeti bhaṇḍukkhaliyaṃ.Bhājaneti yaṃ kiñci bhājanaṃ gahitaṃ.
1304. It is not the case that only the food placed in the bowl can be made excess, it can also be made excess when placed in any container such as a basket, to show this, he says "kappiyaṃ panā". Kuṇḍe means in a pot for storing goods. Bhājane means any vessel is taken.
1305.Etanti atirittakataṃ etaṃ bhojanaṃ. Taṃ ekameva ṭhapetvāti yojanā. ‘‘Vaṭṭatevā’’ti vuttepi abbhaṅgādīnamatthāyāti gaṇheyyunti āha‘‘bhuñjitabba’’nti, tamekaṃ vinā parehi paribhuñjitabbanti attho.
1305. Etaṃ means this food that has been made excess. The construction is: having kept that one alone. Even if it is said "Vaṭṭatevā," he says, "bhuñjitabbaṃ," lest they take it for the purpose of massage, etc., meaning it should be used by others except for that one.
1306-7.Kappiyaṃ kāretvāti atirittaṃ kāretvā.Ākiranti ceti yadi pakkhipanti. Puna tathā atirittaṃ kāretvā bhuñjitabbanti yojanā.
1306-7. Kappiyaṃ kāretvā means having made it excess. Ākiranti ce means if they throw it in. It should be made excess again and eaten, is the construction.
‘‘yenā’’tiādi.Tanti atirittakataṃ bhojanaṃ.Yena akatanti yena bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ atirittaṃ na kataṃ, tena kātabbanti sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘yena akatanti aññena bhikkhunā yena paṭhamaṃ na kataṃ, tena kātabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). Yaṃ vā akataṃ, taṃ visuṃ tena vā kātabbanti yojanā.Yaṃ vā akatanti tasmiṃ atirittakatabhojane apakkhittaṃ yaṃ bhojanaṃ atirittaṃ na kataṃ.Taṃ visuṃ tena vā kātabbanti pacchā pakkhittaṃ bhojanaṃ atirittaṃ katena yathā amissaṃ hoti, tathā aññassa bhājanassa gahaṇavasena visuṃ kāretvā tena paṭhamaṃ katātirittenāpi atirittaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘yañca akatanti yena paṭhamaṃ kappiyaṃ kataṃ, tenāpi yaṃ akataṃ, taṃ kātabbaṃ. Paṭhamabhājane pana kātuṃ na labbhati. Tattha hi kariyamānaṃ paṭhamaṃ katena saddhiṃ kataṃ hoti, tasmā aññasmiṃ bhājane kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo’’ti.
"yenā" etc. Taṃ means the food that has been made excess. Yena akataṃ means it should be done by the bhikkhu by whom it was not made excess the first time, is the connection. As he said, "By whom it was not done means by another bhikkhu by whom it was not done the first time, it should be done by him" (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239). Or what was not done, that should be done separately by him, is the construction. Yaṃ vā akataṃ means what food was not made excess, which was not placed in that food that had been made excess. Taṃ visuṃ tena vā kātabbaṃ means the food placed later should be made excess separately, by taking another bowl so that it is not mixed with what has been made excess, and it should be made excess even by the one who first made it excess. As he said, "And what was not done means even by the one by whom the allowable was first made, that which was not done should be done. But it is not permissible to do it in the first bowl. For there, what is being done is done together with what was first done, therefore it is permissible to do it in another bowl, is the idea."
1308.Akappiyādīhisattahīti ‘‘anatirittaṃ nāma akappiyakataṃ hoti, appaṭiggahitakataṃ hoti, anuccāritakataṃ hoti, ahatthapāse kataṃ hoti, abhuttāvinā kataṃ hoti, bhuttāvinā ca pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena kataṃ hoti, ‘alametaṃ sabba’nti avuttaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. 239) vuttehi sattahi vinayakammākārehi. Atirittaṃ katanti yojanā. ‘‘Hoti anatirittaka’’nti padacchedo.
1308. Akappiyādīhi sattahī means by the seven ways of Vinaya action that were said: "What is not excess is what has been made unallowable, what has not been received, what has not been raised, what has not been placed within arm's reach, what has not been done by one who has not eaten, what has been done by one who has eaten and has been invited and has gotten up from the seat, what has not been said as 'Enough, this is all'" (pāci. 239). It should be made excess, is the construction. "Hoti anatirittaka" is the word division.
1309.Upakaṭṭhavelāyapi atirittaṃ karontena ‘‘ahaṃ pātova bhuñji’’nti vā ‘‘thokaṃ paribhuñji’’nti vā acintetvā kātabbanti dassetumāha‘‘yopī’’tiādi.Upakaṭṭhūpanītampīti upakaṭṭhavelāya upanītampi bhojanaṃ.
1309. Even when the time is near, when making an excess, he should do it without thinking, "I will eat early in the morning" or "I will eat a little," to show this, he says "yopī" etc. Upakaṭṭhūpanītampī means even food that is brought near at the time when it is near.
1310.Yāmādikālikanti yāmasattāhayāvajīvikakālikaṃ.Anāmissanti āmisena amissaṃ.Taṃyāmādikālikaṃ paribhuñjatoti sambandho.
1310. Yāmādikālikaṃ means yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, yāvajīvikakālika. Anāmissaṃ means not mixed with meat. Taṃ means he should partake of the yāmādikālika, is the connection.
1312.Gilānassa bhuttātirittaṃ viya kadāci bhuñjissatīti uddissa ṭhapitampi gilānātirittaṃ nāmātiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vihārādīsu gilānassa pāpuṇanakoṭṭhāsampi gilānātirittaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti.
1312.It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (Pāc. Aṭṭha. 238-239, similar in meaning) that even what is set aside for a sick person, thinking, "He might eat it sometime, like extra food left over from a meal," is called gilānātiritta. Some say, "The portion that should reach a sick person in monasteries etc., is also called gilānātiritta."
1313.Kathinenāti paṭhamakathinena.
1313.Kathinena means with the first Kathina.
Paṭhamapavāraṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the First Pavāraṇā and Kathina
1314.Anatirittenāti ettha ‘‘khādanīyena vā bhojanīyena vā’’ti seso. Ettha‘‘khādanīyaṃnāma pañcabhojanāni yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesa’’nti (pāci. 239) vuttaṃ pañcabhojanato aññaṃ sabbaṃ yāvakālikaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāma. ‘‘Bhojanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanāni odano kummāso sattu maccho maṃsa’’nti (pāci. 239) vuttaṃ. Ettha vinicchayo anantarasikkhāpade vutto.Pavāreyyāti ettha ‘‘abhihaṭṭhu’’nti seso.Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyyāti abhiharitvā ‘‘handa bhikkhu yāvatakaṃ icchasi, tāvatakaṃ gahetvā khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti evaṃ pavāreyya.‘‘Pavārita’’ntipadaṃ vuttatthameva.Jānanti sutvā vā disvā vā tassa pavāritabhāvaṃ jānanto.Āsādanāpekkhoti āsādanaṃ codanaṃ maṅkukaraṇabhāvaṃ apekkhamāno.Bhutteti tassa payogena itarena bhuñjitvā pariyosāpite.Tassāti yo tassa pavāritabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘bhuñjā’’ti niyojesi, tassa.
1314.Anatirittena: here, "either with something to be chewed or something to be eaten" is understood. Here, it is said, "Khādanīya means everything else except the five staple foods, yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika" (pāci. 239). Everything that can be accepted until dawn, other than the five staple foods, is called khādanīya. It is said, "Bhojanīya means the five staple foods: rice, gruel, barley flour, fish, and meat" (pāci. 239). The decision regarding this is stated in the immediately preceding training rule. Pavāreyya: here, "abhihaṭṭhuṃ" is understood. Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya: having brought it, he should invite, "Here, bhikkhu, take and chew or eat as much as you like." The word ‘‘pavārita’’ has the same meaning as stated above. Jānaṃ: knowing that it has been offered, either by hearing or seeing. Āsādanāpekkho: expecting āsādana, blame, or making one feel awkward. Bhutte: after the other person has eaten and finished it through his instigation. Tassā: to him, who, knowing that it has been offered, instructed "Eat!".
1315-6.Ekassa bhuñjanena aññassa pācitti hotīti kathametanti āsaṅkāya tathā vuttattā pariharitumāha‘‘dukkaṭaṃ…pe… dassita’’nti.Itarassa gahaṇeti pavāritabhikkhuno bhuñjanatthāya paṭiggahaṇe.Ajjhohārapayogesu cāti etthāpi ‘‘itarassā’’ti sambandho.Sabbaṃdukkaṭaṃ, pācittiyañca.Dassitanti ‘‘abhiharati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Tassa vacanena ‘khādissāmi bhuñjissāmī’ti paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Ajjhohāre ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassa. Bhojanapariyosāne āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 244) desitaṃ bhagavatāti attho.
1315-6.To avoid the objection "How does a pācittiya arise for someone else eating due to one person's action?", he says, "dukkaṭaṃ…pe… dassitaṃ" because it was stated that way. Itarassa gahaṇe: in accepting for the purpose of the bhikkhu who has been invited to eat. Ajjhohārapayogesu ca: here too, "itarassa" is connected. Sabbaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, and pācittiya as well. Dassitaṃ: it means that it was taught by the Blessed One, "He brings it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. By his words, 'I will chew, I will eat' he accepts it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. At each mouthful, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. At the end of the meal, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 244).
1317.Ubhayatthāpi vimatissāti pavārite ca apavārite ca vimatissa.Dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti ‘‘pavārite vematiko. Appavārite vematiko, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 245) desitaṃ.
1317.Ubhayatthāpi vimatissā: if he is doubtful in both, whether it has been offered or not offered. Dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ: it was taught, "He is doubtful whether it has been offered. He is doubtful whether it has not been offered, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 245).
1318.Kārāpetvāti ettha ‘‘bhuñjāhī’’ti seso.Aññassatthāyāti ettha ‘‘abhiharanto gacchāhī’’ti seso.
1318.Kārāpetvā: here, "bhuñjāhi" is understood. Aññassatthāyā: here, "abhiharanto gacchāhi" is understood.
1319.Omasavādatulyāvāti idaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha.
1319.Omasavādatulyāvā: this is said in reference to something that arises from taking what is not given.
Dutiyapavāraṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Second Pavāraṇā
1320.Khādanīyaṃ vāti pañca bhojanāni ca kālikattayañca vinā avasesesu yaṃ kiñci vā.Bhojanīyaṃ vāti pañcasu bhojanesu aññatarampi.Vikāleti vigate kāle. Kālo nāma aruṇuggamanato yāva majjhantikā, tadañño vikālo. Yathāha ‘‘vikālo nāma majjhantike vītivatte yāva aruṇuggamanā’’ti (pāci. 249). Ṭhitamajjhantikopi kāleyeva saṅgayhati. Yathāha ‘‘ṭhitamajjhantikopi kālasaṅgahaṃ gacchati. Tato paṭṭhāya pana khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā na sakkā, sahasā pivituṃ pana sakkā bhaveyya. Kukkuccakena pana na kātabbaṃ. Kālaparicchedajānanatthañca kālatthambho yojetabbo, kālabbhantareva bhattakiccaṃ kātabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249).Dosanti pācittiyaṃ.
1320.Khādanīyaṃ vā: whatever among the remaining things besides the five staple foods and the three kinds of time-permissible items. Bhojanīyaṃ vā: even one of the five staple foods. Vikāle: at the wrong time. Time (kāla) means from the rising of dawn until noon; other than that is the wrong time (vikāla). As it is said, "Vikāla means after noon has passed until the rising of dawn" (pāci. 249). Even the moment of noon is included in time. As it is said, "Even the moment of noon is included in time. But from then on, it is not possible to chew or eat, but it might be possible to drink quickly. But it should not be done out of worry. And a time-marker should be set up to know the division of time; the meal duty should be done within the time" (pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249).Dosaṃ: a pācittiya.
1321.‘‘Khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā’’ti ettha bhojanīyassa pavāraṇasikkhāpade dassitasarūpattā khādanīyaṃ tāva sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘yamāmisagata’’ntiādi.Etthāti etesu khādanīyabhojanīyesu. Yaṃ pana vanamūlaphalādikaṃāmisagataṃāmise yāvakālike pariyāpannaṃ, taṃ khādanīyanti yojanā.Kālikesvasamohatthanti ettha gāthābandhavasena ma-kāralopo, asammohatthanti vuttaṃ hoti.Idanti vakkhamānaṃ sandhāyāha.
1321.Here, in "khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā", since the nature of bhojanīya has been shown in the pavāraṇā training rule, he first shows the nature of khādanīya, starting with ‘‘yamāmisagata’’ntiādi. Etthā: among these khādanīya and bhojanīya. But that which is forest-root-fruit, etc., āmisagataṃ, included under āmisa as yāvakālika, that should be connected as khādanīya. Kālikesvasamohatthaṃ: here, due to the structure of the verse, the m-sound is dropped, it is said to mean asammohatthaṃ. Idaṃ: he refers to what will be said.
1322.Mūlanti yaṃ kiñci rukkhalatānaṃ mūlaṃ.Kandanti rukkhalatānameva kandaṃ.Muḷālanti padumagacchamūlakandaṃ.Matthakanti tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ matthakaṃ, veḷukaḷīrapallavaṅkurānañca ettheva saṅgaho.Khandhakanti ucchuādikhandhakaṃ.Tacanti challi.Pattanti paṇṇaṃ.Pupphanti kusumaṃ.Phalanti rukkhalatādīnaṃ phalaṃ.Aṭṭhīti rukkhalatādibījaṃ.Piṭṭhanti dhaññādipiṭṭhaṃ.Niyyāsanti silesaṃ. ‘‘Khādanīya’’nti sabbattha pakaraṇato labbhati.
1322.Mūlaṃ: whatever root of trees and creepers. Kandaṃ: the stem of trees and creepers. Muḷālaṃ: the root-stem of the lotus plant. Matthakaṃ: the pith of the tāla palm, coconut palm, etc.; the sprouts and shoots of bamboo and reeds are included here. Khandhakaṃ: the stalk of sugarcane, etc. Tacaṃ: bark. Pattaṃ: leaf. Pupphaṃ: flower. Phalaṃ: the fruit of trees and creepers. Aṭṭhī: the seed of trees and creepers. Piṭṭhaṃ: flour of grains, etc. Niyyāsaṃ: resin. "Khādanīya" is obtained everywhere from the context.
1323.Evaṃ khādanīyānaṃ mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā te sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘mūlakhādanīyādīna’’ntiādi. Tattha rukkhamūlameva khādanīyaṃ, taṃ ādi yesanti viggaho.Mukhamattanidassanaṃ nibodhathāti ettha ‘‘mayā kariyamāna’’nti seso.Mukhamattanti pavesadvāramattaṃ, niravasesato dassane papañcabhīrukānaṃ pubbe bhayaṃ hotīti saṅkhepato khādanīyāni dassissanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā dassane payojanamāha‘‘nāmatthesu bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavatthāyā’’ti, mūlakhādanīyādīnaṃ nāmesu ca tadatthesu ca bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavuppādanatthanti attho.
1323.Having thus laid down the matrix of chewable items, he says ‘‘mūlakhādanīyādīna’’ntiādi to show their nature in detail. Among them, only the root of a tree is chewable; the compound is to be analyzed as taṃ ādi yesanti. Mukhamattanidassanaṃ nibodhathā: here, "mayā kariyamānaṃ" is understood. Mukhamattaṃ: merely the entrance, it is said that they will show the chewables in brief because there is fear beforehand in those who are afraid of detail. He states the purpose in showing them thus: ‘‘nāmatthesu bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavatthāyā’’: it means for the purpose of producing skill in bhikkhus in the names and meanings of root-chewables etc.
1324-5.Mūlakamūlādīni upadesatoyeva veditabbāni. Na hi tāni pariyāyantarena vuccamānānipi sakkā viññātuṃ. Pariyāyantarenapi hi vuccamāne taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ ajānantānaṃ sammohoyeva siyā, tasmā tattha na kiñci vakkhāma.Sākānanti sūpeyyapaṇṇānaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Āhāratthanti āhārena kattabbapayojanaṃ, āhārakiccanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Āmisattha’’ntipi likhanti.Pharantīti vitthārenti.
1324-5.Root-root etc. should be understood only by instruction. For even if they are spoken of by another term, it is not possible to understand them. For even if they are spoken of by another term, confusion would arise for those who do not know that particular name; therefore, we will not say anything there. Sākānaṃ: of soup-leaves. Idhā: in this training rule. Āhāratthaṃ: purpose to be accomplished by food, it means food duty. Some write "Āmisatthaṃ". Pharantī: they spread out.
1326.Jaraṭṭhanti purāṇakandaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ jaraṭṭhanti sambandho. Sesānaṃ jaraṭṭhaṃ yāvakālikanti yojanā.Sesānanti mūlakādīni vuttāni. Yathāha ‘‘mūlakakhārakajajjharīmūlānaṃ pana jaraṭṭhānipi āmisagatikānevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249).
1326.Jaraṭṭhaṃ: old stem. Yaṃ taṃ jaraṭṭhaṃ is the connection. Jaraṭṭhaṃ of the rest is the yāvakālika, is the connection. Sesānaṃ: the roots etc. that have been mentioned. As it is said, "But even the old ones of root-khāraka-jajjharī roots are included under āmisa" (pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249).
1331.Dhototi nibbattitapiṭṭho.
1331.Dhotaṃ: flour that has been washed.
1332.Adhoto khīravalliyā kandoti yojanā.Vākyapathātītāti ‘‘asuko vā asuko vā’’ti vatvā pariyantaṃ pāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā vacanapathātītā.
1332.Adhotaṃ is the stem of the milk-creeper, is the connection. Vākyapathātītā: because it is not possible to bring it to an end by saying "such-and-such or such-and-such," it is beyond the path of speech.
1333.Puṇḍarīkaṃsetaṃ.Padumaṃrattaṃ.
1333.Puṇḍarīkaṃ is white. Padumaṃ is red.
1334.Sambhavaṃjātaṃ.
1334.Sambhavaṃ means born.
1338.Jaraṭṭhabundoti kandassa heṭṭhā atīva pariṇataṭṭhānaṃ.
1338.Jaraṭṭhabundo: the exceedingly ripe place below the stem.
1339.Pathaviyaṃ gatoti antopathaviyaṃ gato, pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā gatataruṇadaṇḍoti vuttaṃ hoti.
1339.Pathaviyaṃ gato: gone inside the earth, it means the young stalk that has sunk into the earth.
1340.Evaṃ antobhūmiyaṃ gato. ‘‘Paṇṇadaṇḍo uppalādīna’’nti padacchedo.Sabboti taruṇopi pariṇatopi. Uppalādīnaṃ, padumajātiyā ca sabbo paṇṇadaṇḍo yāvakālikoti yojanā.
1340.Thus, it has gone inside the ground. The word division is "Paṇṇadaṇḍo uppalādīnaṃ". Sabbo: both young and ripe. The entire leaf-stalk of lotuses etc., and of the lotus family, is yāvakālika, is the connection.
1345.Pattakhādanīyaṃnāmāti pattasaṅkhātaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāma.
1345.Pattakhādanīyaṃnāmā: what is called leaf-chewable.
1348.Mūlakādīnanti ‘‘mūlakaṃ khārakañcevā’’tiādikāya gāthāya vuttamūlakādīnaṃ.
1348.Mūlakādīnaṃ: of the root etc. that were stated in the verse beginning with ‘‘mūlakaṃ khārakañceva’’.
1349.Kaṇṇikāti padumakaṇṇikā.
1349.Kaṇṇikā: lotus pericarp.
1360.Ketakādīnanti etthaādi-saddena timbarusakaṃ gahitaṃ.Tālaphalaṭṭhīti taruṇaphalānaṃ aṭṭhi.
1360.Ketakādīnaṃ: here, ādi- includes timbarusaka. Tālaphalaṭṭhī: the seed of young fruits.
1361.‘‘Punnāgamadhukaṭṭhīnī’’ti ca‘‘punnāgamadhukaṭṭhicā’’ti ca potthakesu ubhayathā pāṭho dissati, attho pana ekoyeva. ‘‘Selu aṭṭhī’’ti padacchedo.Anāmiseti yāvajīvike.
1361.In the books, the reading appears in both ways, ‘‘Punnāgamadhukaṭṭhīnī’’ and ‘‘punnāgamadhukaṭṭhicā’’, but the meaning is the same. The word division is ‘‘Selu aṭṭhī’’. Anāmise: among the yāvajīvika.
1363.Dhotaṃtālapiṭṭhanti tālaphegguṃ koṭṭetvā udake madditvā parissāvetvā kalale bhājanatalaṃ otiṇṇe pasannodakaṃ apanetvā gahitatālapiṭṭhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā khīravalliyā piṭṭhanti yojanā, tatheva koṭṭetvā parissāvetvā gahitakhīravalliyā piṭṭhanti attho.
1363.Dhotaṃ tālapiṭṭhaṃ: it means tāla-pulp that has been pounded, mixed in water, strained, the clear water removed after the paste has settled on the bottom of the pot, and the tāla-flour taken. Similarly, flour of the milk-creeper should be connected; it means the flour of the milk-creeper that has been pounded, strained, and taken in the same way.
1364.Adhotaṃvuttavipariyāyato gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Āhāratthamasādhentaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ yāvajīvika’’nti vacanato tesu tesu janapadesu manussānaṃ āhārakiccaṃ akarontaṃ mūlādi yāvajīvikaṃ, tadaññaṃ yāvakālikanti saṅkhepalakkhaṇaṃ kātabbanti.
1364.Adhotaṃ should be taken in the opposite way to what was said. According to the statement "That which does not accomplish a food-purpose, all that is yāvajīvika," the general characteristic should be made that a root etc. is yāvajīvika if it does not do a food-duty for people in those various regions; other than that is yāvakālika.
Vikālabhojanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Wrong-Time-Eating Story
1369.Bhojanaṃ sannidhiṃ katvā khādanaṃ vāti ettha bhojanakhādanīyāni yathāvuttabhedasarūpāneva.Sannidhiṃ katvāti paṭiggahetvā ekarattampi atikkāmetvā, sannidahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘paṭiggahetvā ekarattampi vītināmitassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 253). Tadeva vakkhati ‘‘saya’’ntiādinā.Khādananti kammasādhanoyaṃ, ‘‘khajja’’nti iminā samānattho.
1369.Bhojanaṃ sannidhiṃ katvā khādanaṃ vā: here, bhojana and khādanīya have the same characteristics and distinctions as stated above. Sannidhiṃ katvā: having accepted it and let even one night pass, it means having stored it up. As it is said, "This is a term for that for which even one night has passed after accepting it" (pāci. aṭṭha. 253). That very thing he will state with ‘‘saya’’ntiādi. Khādanaṃ: this is an instrumental noun, synonymous with ‘‘khajja’’.
1371.‘‘Sannidhiṃ katvā’’ti ettha niddesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘saya’’ntiādi.
1371.He states ‘‘saya’’ntiādi to show the meaning in ‘‘sannidhiṃ katvā’’.
1372.‘‘Taṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti ettha atthaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tato’’tiādi.Tatoti sannidhikatabhojanato.Suddhacittenāti savāsanasakalakilesappahānato nimmalacittena.Tādināti aṭṭhasu lokadhammesu nibbikārabhāvena tādinā. Atha vā yādisā purimakā sammāsambuddhā rūpārūpaguṇehi ahesuṃ, tādisena bhagavatā.
1372.He states ‘‘tato’’tiādi to show the meaning in ‘‘taṃ na vaṭṭatī’’. Tato: than that bhojana that has been stored up. Suddhacittenā: with a pure mind, free from all defilements along with their underlying tendencies. Tādinā: by the Tādin, being without change in the eight worldly conditions. Or else, by the Blessed One who was just like the former Perfectly Enlightened Ones in terms of qualities of form and formlessness.
1373.Odanādīsu pañcasu bhojanesu tāva akappiyamaṃsena sannidhivasena pācittiyañca āpattivisesañca dassetumāha‘‘akappiyesū’’tiādi.Pācittīti sannidhipācittiyamāha.Itareti sīhādimaṃsamhi. Dukkaṭena saha pācittīti yojanā.
1373.He states ‘‘akappiyesū’’tiādi to show the pācittiya and specific offense in terms of storing up with akappiya meat in the five staple foods beginning with rice. Pācittī: he means the pācittiya for storing up. Itare: in meat such as lion meat. The connection is a pācittiya together with a dukkaṭa.
1374.Yāmakālikasaṅkhātaṃ paribhuñjatoti ettha ‘‘sannidhiṃ katvā’’ti adhikārato labbhati. ‘‘Dukkaṭena sahā’’ti avatvā‘‘pācittī’’ti vuttattā sati paccaye paribhuñjatoti gahetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye ajjhohārato pācittiyaṃ. Āhāratthāya ajjhohārato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiya’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 253).
1374.Yāmakālikasaṅkhātaṃ paribhuñjato: here, "sannidhiṃ katvā" is obtained by implication. Because it was said ‘‘pācittī’’ without saying ‘‘dukkaṭena saha’’, it should be taken to mean he consumes it when there is a reason. As it is said, "There is a pācittiya for consuming yāmakālika when there is a reason. There is a pācittiya together with a dukkaṭa for consuming it for the purpose of eating a meal" (pāci. aṭṭha. 253).
1375.Annanti etthāpi ‘‘sannidhikata’’nti idaṃ pure viya labbhati,‘‘pakati’’nti idaṃ ‘‘anna’’nti etassa visesanaṃ, manussamaṃsādīhi asammissaṃ nātirittakataṃ annamattanti attho.Pācittiyadvayanti anatirittapaccayā ca sannidhipaccayā ca dve pācittiyāni.
1376.‘‘Dve, dvaya’’nti ubhayatthāpi ayamevattho.
1376.‘‘Dve, dvaya’’nti: the meaning is the same in both places.
1377.Sāmisena mukhena dveti ettha ‘‘pañca bhojanāni yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāmā’’ti (pāci. 254) vuttattā khādanīyāsaṅgahitena yāmakālikena ca tena sammissattā sannidhināmena mukhagataāmisamūlakena ca sannidhipācittiyāni dve hontīti attho.Sāmisena mukhenāti upalakkhaṇattā yathākathañci āmise missībhūte ettakā āpattiyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirāmisaṃ yāmakālikaṃ bhuñjato ekameva pācittiyanti yojanā, yena kenaci ākārena asammissaṃ yāmakālikaṃ paribhuñjato ekameva pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho.
1377.Sāmisena mukhena dve: here, because it is said "Khādanīya means everything else except the five staple foods, yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika" (pāci. 254), it means there are two pācittiyas for storing up because it is included as a chewable and it is mixed with that yāmakālika, and on account of the āmisa in the mouth. Sāmisena mukhenā: because it is indicative, it should be seen that there are so many offenses when it is mixed with āmisa in any way. The connection is there is only one pācittiya for consuming yāmakālika that is nirāmisa, it means there is only one pācittiya for consuming yāmakālika that is not mixed in any way.
1378.Tamevāti sannihitameva kālikaṃ.Tesu dvīsu vikappesūti sāmisanirāmisavikappadvaye.Kevalaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhatīti paṭhamavikappe dvīhi pācittiyehi saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyavikappe pācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1378.Tamevā: that very kālika that has been stored up. Tesu dvīsu vikappesū: in those two alternatives of being with or without āmisa. Kevalaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhatī: it means that in the first alternative there is a dukkaṭa together with two pācittiyas, and in the second alternative there is a dukkaṭa together with a pācittiya.
1379.Suddhanti ettha ‘‘sannidhikataṃ bhojana’’nti seso. Idaṃ ‘‘pakatibhojane’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 253)aṭṭhakathāyaṃ,idha ca ‘‘na doso yāmakālike’’ti yāmakālikassa visuṃ vakkhamānattā viññāyati, akappiyamaṃsayāmakālikehi amissaṃ bhojananti vuttaṃ hoti.
1379.Suddhaṃ: here, "sannidhikataṃ bhojanaṃ" is understood. This is understood because it is said aṭṭhakathāyaṃ in "pakatibhojane" (pāci. aṭṭha. 253), and here in this passage, "na doso yāmakālike," the yāmakālika will be stated separately, it means bhojana that is not mixed with akappiya meat and yāmakālika.
1380.Maṃseti ettha ‘‘akappiye’’ti idaṃ thullaccayādivacaneneva labbhati.Vaḍḍhatīti pubbe vuttehi pācittiyadvayehi saddhiṃ manussamaṃse thullaccayañca sīhādimaṃse dukkaṭañca vaḍḍhati. Manussamaṃse casesesīhamaṃsādike akappiyamaṃse ca yathānukkamato thullaccayañceva dukkaṭañcāti dvayaṃ vaḍḍhatīti yojanā.
1380. Maṃse: Here, "akappiye" (unallowable) is obtained by the statement on thullaccaya and others. Vaḍḍhatī: Along with the two pācittiyas previously stated, a thullaccaya for human flesh and a dukkaṭa for lion's flesh and other such flesh increases. The explanation is that for human flesh, a thullaccaya, and for the remaining unallowable flesh like lion's flesh, a dukkaṭa, thus both increase in the stated order.
1381.Anatirittampibhojanaṃ vikāle paribhuñjato bhikkhuno tannimittako doso yathāvuttesusabbavikappesunatthīti yojanā. ‘‘Vikāla…pe… kālike’’ti yāmakālikassa visuṃ vakkhamānattā ca atirittakārāpanañca bhojaneyeva sambhavatītianatirittanti ettha ‘‘nihitabhojana’’nti seso. ‘‘Anatirittapaccayā pana vikāle sabbavikappesu anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 253) aṭṭhakathāvacanatodosoti anatirittapaccayā pācittiyamāha. Teneva vakkhati‘‘tannimittako’’ti, anatirittanimittakoti attho.Sabbavikappesūti ‘‘suddhaṃ vā manussamaṃsamissaṃ vā sīhādimaṃsamissaṃ vā yāmakālikamissaṃ vā’’ti sabbesu vikappesu.‘‘Tannimittako’’ti vacaneneva vāritavikālādinimittassa dosassa sambhavaṃ dasseti.
1381. Anatirittampi: The fault related to a bhikkhu consuming food at the wrong time, even if not extra, does not exist in all the options mentioned. Because the yāmakālika will be discussed separately under "vikāla…pe… kālike," and causing extra to be made is only possible with food, anatiritta here implies "nihitabhojana" (deposited food). According to the commentary statement, "Anatirittapaccayā pana vikāle sabbavikappesu anāpattī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 253), doso refers to the pācittiya due to the "not extra" condition. Therefore, he will say "tannimittako" meaning caused by "not extra". Sabbavikappesū: In all the options, "whether pure, mixed with human flesh, mixed with lion's flesh, or mixed with yāmakālika." The phrase "tannimittako" itself shows the possibility of a fault caused by eating at the wrong time, which has been prohibited.
1382-3.Vikālapaccayā vāti etthavā-saddena ‘‘anatirittapaccayā’’ti idaṃ samuccitaṃ.Api-saddo ‘‘yāmakālikepī’’ti yojetabbo. Sattāhakālikaṃ, yāvajīvikaṃ āhārasseva atthāya paṭiggaṇhato gahaṇe, yathāvuttassa sattāhakālikayāvajīvikabhedenaduvidhassa tuajjhohārapayogesu nirāmise vā dukkaṭanti yojanā.Tu-saddo eva-kārattho.
1382-3. Vikālapaccayā vā: Here, the word vā combines with "anatirittapaccayā." The word api should be connected with "yāmakālikepī." For one receiving a sattāhakālika, yāvajīvika for the purpose of food only, there is a dukkaṭa for both the acceptance and the consumption of the two kinds as previously mentioned, but only if it is vegetarian. Tu means eva (indeed).
1384.Athāti vākyārambhe nipāto.Āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃsattāhakālikaṃ, yāvajīvikaṃ vāti yojanā.Gahetvāti paṭiggahetvā.Ṭhapitanti aruṇaṃ atikkāmetvā ṭhapitaṃ.Pācittīti sannidhipācitti.
1834. Atha: is a particle at the beginning of a sentence. Āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ: It should be connected with "sattāhakālikaṃ, yāvajīvikaṃ vā". Gahetvā: Having received. Ṭhapitaṃ: Having kept it after sunrise. Pācittī: It is a sannidhi pācittiya.
1385.Kāloti aruṇuggamanādimajjhantikāvasāno kālo.Yāmoti majjhantikādidutiyaaruṇuggamanāvasāno. Taṃ taṃ kālaṃ kālikaṃ atikkāmayato tu dosoti yojanā.Tu-saddo evakārattho.Taṃvākālikanti yathākkamaṃ yāvakālikaṃ yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikanti vuttaṃ hoti.
1835. Kālo: Time is from the beginning of sunrise until the end of midday. Yāmo: A watch is from midday until the second sunrise. But there is a fault for passing that specific kālika time. Tu means eva (indeed). Taṃ vā kālikaṃ: Means, in order, yāvakālika, yāmakālika, and sattāhakālika have been said.
1386.Yāvakālikaṃ attanā sambhinnāni itarānitīṇikālikāni attanoyeva sabhāvaṃ upanetīti yojanā. Sako bhāvosabhāvo,taṃ.
1836. Yāvakālika brings the three other kālikas, which are associated with itself, into its own nature. One's own state is sabhāvo, that.
1387-8.Evamevaviniddiseti ‘‘purimaṃ purimaṃ kālikaṃ attanā sammissaṃ pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ attano sabhāvameva gāhāpetī’’ti katheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1837-8. Evameva viniddise: It has been said, "the earlier kālika, mixed with itself, makes the later kālika take on its own nature."
Imesūtiādīsu niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Antovutthaṃ hotīti akappiyakuṭiyaṃ ṭhapetvā aruṇuṭṭhāpanena antovutthaṃ nāma hoti.Sannidhi ca hotīti paṭiggahetvā paṭiggahaṇaṃ avijahitvā aruṇuṭṭhāpanena sannidhi ca nāma hoti. Potthakesu‘‘sannidhi’’nti sānunāsiko pāṭho dissati, ‘‘hotī’’ti kiriyāya sambandhattāsannidhi-saddo paṭhamekavacanantoti anunāsiko āgamasandhijoti veditabbo.Ubhayampīti yathāvuttaṃ antovutthaṃ, sannidhi cāti ubhayampi.Na hotevāti purimakālikadvayena amissaṃ na hoteva.
Imesū: In these and others, bhummaṃ (locative) is used in determination. Antovutthaṃ hotī: By placing it in an unallowable dwelling and raising the dawn, it is called antovuttha (staying inside). Sannidhi ca hotī: By receiving it and not giving up the act of receiving, and then raising the dawn, it is called sannidhi (storing up). In books, the reading "sannidhi" with anusvara is seen; because it is related to the verb "hotī," the word sannidhi should be understood as the nominative singular, with the anusvara being an āgama sandhi. Ubhayampī: Both the aforementioned antovuttha and sannidhi. Na hoteva: It is not mixed with the two earlier kālikas.
1389.Kappiyakuṭināmena akataṃ, asammataṃ, apariggahaṃ, pākārādīhi parikkhittaṃ senāsanaṃakappiyakuṭi nāmāti saṅkhepato gahetabbaṃ.Antadvayenāti sattāhakālikayāvajīvikena, sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.‘‘Missita’’nti seso.Gahitanti paṭiggahitaṃ.Taṃ pubbaṃ dvayanti yāvakālikayāmakālikadvayaṃ. Purimakālikadvaye yaṃ kiñci tadahupaṭiggahitampi akappiyakuṭiyāyeva ṭhapetvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpitena pacchimakālikadvaye yena kenaci sammissaṃ antovutthaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1839. A dwelling (senāsana) made without the name of a kappiyakuṭi (allowable hut), unapproved, unassigned, surrounded by walls and so on, is called an akappiyakuṭi. This should be taken as a summary. Antadvayenā: With sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika; sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ (instrumental case). Missita: It should be mixed. Gahitaṃ: Received. Taṃ pubbaṃ dvayaṃ: The two, yāvakālika and yāmakālika. It has been said that any of the previously received two, if placed in an akappiyakuṭi and the dawn is raised, becomes antovuttha when mixed with either of the later two kālikas.
1390.Antovutthena pacchimakālikadvayena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ yadidaṃ purimakālikadvayaṃ, ayaṃ mukhasannidhi nāma hotītiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 295 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana antovutthaṃ hoti, na kappati iti daḷhaṃ katvā vuttanti yojanā.
1390. In the aṭṭhakathā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295, similar in meaning), it is said that this pair of earlier kālikas, which is mixed with the pair of later kālikas through antovuttha, is called mukhasannidhi. However, in the Mahāpaccariya, it is stated with emphasis that it is antovuttha but not allowable.
‘‘mukhasannidhī’’ti ca‘‘antovuttha’’nti ca nāmamattameva nānākaraṇaṃ, soyevatthoti ubhinnaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanānaṃ anatthantaratā veditabbā. Tathā himukha-saddoanto-saddapariyāyo,sannidhi-saddo parivuttha-saddapariyāyo. Mukhe sannidhi mukhasannidhīti kammasādhanaṃ. Bahi sannidhinivattanatthaṃ aṭṭhakathāsumukha-ggahaṇaṃ,anto-gahaṇañca kataṃ.Bahīti ca paṭiggahetvā akappiyakuṭiyā bahi yattha katthaci parivutthaṃ pacchimakālikadvayaṃ purimena kālikadvayena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ adhippetaṃ. Mukhasannidhiantovutthapadānaṃ anatthantarabhāvosamantapāsādikāyaṃvutto.
The differentiation between "mukhasannidhī" and "antovuttha" is merely in name; the meaning is the same. The non-difference in meaning of both commentary statements should be understood. Thus, the word mukha is a synonym for the word anto, and the word sannidhi is a synonym for the word parivuttha. Mukhe sannidhi is mukhasannidhi, a kammasādhana (objective compound). In the commentaries, the use of mukha and anto is to exclude sannidhi outside (bahi). Bahī implies the later pair of kālikas mixed with the earlier pair of kālikas that are kept outside the akappiyakuṭi, wherever it may be after receiving. The non-difference in meaning between the terms mukhasannidhi and antovuttha has been stated in the Samantapāsādikā.
Nissandehepana aññathā vutto viya viññāyati, tatthapi ayameva nayo veditabbo.
In the Nissandeha, however, it appears to be stated differently, but the same method should be understood there as well.
1391.Nadosoti sannidhidoso na hoti.Nidahitvāti paṭiggahetvā paṭiggahaṇaṃ avijahitvā sakasakakālabbhantareyeva nidahitvā. Ettha ca heṭṭhimantato sannidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pattaṃ dhovitvā puna tattha acchodakaṃ vā āsiñcitvā aṅguliyā vā ghaṃsitvā nisnehabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 253)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Etena nirapekkhena paṭiggahaṇaṃ avissajjetvāva sayaṃ vā aññena vā tucchaṃ katvāna sammā dhovitvā niṭṭhāpite patte laggampi avijahitapaṭiggahitameva hotīti tattha āpatti vuttātigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Etena nirapekkhena paṭiggahaṇe vissaṭṭhe tādisepi patte doso natthīti siddhaṃ.
1391. Na doso: There is no fault of storing up. Nidahitvā: Having received it, without giving up the act of receiving, having stored it within its own time period. Here, in order to show sannidhi from the lowest limit, it is stated in the aṭṭhakathā, "After washing the bowl, pouring pure water into it again, or scraping it with a finger, the absence of oiliness should be ascertained" (pāci. aṭṭha. 253). Because of this, it is stated in the Ganthipada that even if the bowl is emptied by oneself or another without relinquishing the receiving, without dependence, and is thoroughly washed, what remains stuck is still considered unabandoned receiving, and there is a fault. Because of this, it is established that there is no fault in such a bowl if the receiving is abandoned without dependence.
Sannidhikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sannidhi Discussion.
1393.Paṇītāni bhojanānītipāḷiyaṃ‘‘seyyathidaṃ? Sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ maccho maṃsaṃ khīraṃ dadhī’’ti (pāci. 259) uddisitvā –
1393. Paṇītāni bhojanānī: In the Pāḷi, having specified "seyyathidaṃ? Sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ maccho maṃsaṃ khīraṃ dadhī" (pāci. 259) –
‘‘Sappi nāma gosappi vā ajikāsappi vā mahiṃsasappi vā, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi. Navanītaṃ nāma tesaññeva navanītaṃ. Telaṃ nāma tilatelaṃ sāsapatelaṃ madhukatelaṃ eraṇḍakatelaṃ vasātelaṃ. Madhu nāma makkhikāmadhu. Phāṇitaṃ nāma ucchumhā nibbattaṃ. Maccho nāma odako vuccati. Maṃsaṃ nāma yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ maṃsaṃ. Khīraṃ nāma gokhīraṃ vā ajikākhīraṃ vā mahiṃsakhīraṃ vā, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ khīraṃ. Dadhi nāma tesaññeva dadhī’’ti (pāci. 260) –
"Sappi nāma gosappi vā ajikāsappi vā mahiṃsasappi vā, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi. Navanītaṃ nāma tesaññeva navanītaṃ. Telaṃ nāma tilatelaṃ sāsapatelaṃ madhukatelaṃ eraṇḍakatelaṃ vasātelaṃ. Madhu nāma makkhikāmadhu. Phāṇitaṃ nāma ucchumhā nibbattaṃ. Maccho nāma odako vuccati. Maṃsaṃ nāma yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ maṃsaṃ. Khīraṃ nāma gokhīraṃ vā ajikākhīraṃ vā mahiṃsakhīraṃ vā, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ khīraṃ. Dadhi nāma tesaññeva dadhī" (pāci. 260) –
Agilānoti ‘‘agilāno nāma yassa vinā paṇītabhojanāni phāsu hotī’’ti (pāci. 260) vutto.Agilānoti ettha ‘‘hutvā’’ti seso.
Agilāno: He who is "agilāno nāma yassa vinā paṇītabhojanāni phāsu hotī" (pāci. 260). Agilāno should be interpreted as "hutvā" (having been).
1394.Sappinā dehītiādi viññāpanappakāro.Sappibhattanti ettha kiñcāpi sappisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ, sappi ca bhattañca sappibhattanti viññāyati,aṭṭhakathāsupana ‘‘sālibhattaṃ viya sappibhattaṃ nāma natthī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 259) kāraṇaṃ vatvā dukkaṭasseva daḷhataraṃ katvā vuttattā na sakkā aññaṃ vattuṃ.Aṭṭhakathācariyāeva hi īdisesu ṭhānesu pamāṇaṃ.
1394. Sappinā dehī: is a way of requesting. In Sappibhatta, although it seems to mean bhatta mixed with sappi, or sappi and bhatta, in the aṭṭhakathās, however, after stating the reason that "there is no such thing as sappibhatta like sālibhatta" (pāci. aṭṭha. 259), because it is stated by making the dukkaṭa very firm, it is not possible to say otherwise. The Aṭṭhakathācariyā are indeed the standard in such places.
1395.Pācitti pariyāputāti ‘‘ajjhohāre ajjhohāre āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 260) evaṃ ajjhohāragaṇanāya pācitti vuttā.
1395. Pācitti pariyāputā: The pācitti is stated according to the calculation of each swallowing, "ajjhohāre ajjhohāre āpatti pācittiyassā" (pāci. 260).
1396.Suddhānīti annena amissāni.Sekhiyesūti sikkhākaraṇīye vuttanti attho.
1396. Suddhānī: Unmixed with rice. Sekhiyesū: It means it is stated in the training rules.
1397.Yasmā suddhānaṃ paṇītabhojanānaṃ viññāpetvā paribhuñjanaṃ dukkaṭavisayaṃ,tasmā. Sattadhaññamayanti sāliādīnaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ aññatarassa vikārabhūtaṃ.
1397. Because consuming pure, choice foods after requesting them is in the domain of dukkaṭa, tasmā. Sattadhaññamaya: Something that is a product of one of the seven grains, such as sāli.
1398.Sace dadātīti yojanā.Visaṅketanti anāpatti hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1398. If he gives it, the meaning is that there is no offense. Visaṅketaṃ: It has been said that there is no āpatti.
1399.Deti ceti sambandho.Aññatarenāti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhatta’’nti adhikārato labbhati.Assabhikkhussa.Visaṅketanti aññaṃ yācitassa aññassa dinnattā saṅketassa virādhanena anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1399. Deti ca eti sambandho. Aññatarenā: sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ (instrumental case). From the context, Bhatta can be obtained. Assa: To that bhikkhu. Visaṅketaṃ: Because something else was given to someone who requested something else, and the indication was violated, it has been said that there is no āpatti.
1400.Yena yena hīti etthāpi tatheva karaṇavacanaṃ.‘‘Viññatta’’nti idaṃ adhikatassa ‘‘bhatta’’nti etassa visesanaṃ.Yenayenāti aniyamena paṇītena. Tena sappiādi visuṃ visuṃ gahitameva, sappiādīnaṃ gosappiādibhedo ca saṅgahito.Tasmiṃ laddhepīti yāciteyeva laddhe sati. Tassa tassa mūlepi laddheti vicchāvasena yojanā.
1400. Yena yena hī: Here too, it is the same, karaṇavacanaṃ (instrumental case). Viññatta is a specification of the additional bhatta. Yena yena: With whatever choice food without restriction. Therefore, sappi etc. are taken separately, and the distinction of sappi etc. into gosappi etc. is included. Tasmiṃ laddhepī: Even when it is obtained as it was requested. The connection is made with a distribution like "even if its root is obtained."
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Sappinā bhattaṃ dehī’’ti sāmaññena viññāpentassa tameva vā ‘‘iminā sappiṃ katvā gaṇhathā’’ti navanītādīsu aññataraṃ vā dhenuṃ vā mūlaṃ vā deti ce, ‘‘gosappinā bhattaṃ dehī’’ti visesayuttaṃ katvā viññāpentassa tameva vā gonavanītādīni vā gāviṃ vā ‘‘idaṃ datvā sappiṃ gaṇhathā’’ti mūlaṃ vā sace deti, visaṅketaṃ na hoti, yathāvatthukameva āpattiṃ āpajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
What has been said? If one requests generally, "dehī bhattaṃ sappinā", and one gives that same sappi, or one of the others like navanīta, or a cow, or a root, saying "katvā iminā sappiṃ gaṇhatha", or if one requests specifying, "gosappinā bhattaṃ dehī", and one gives that same gosappi, or gonavanīta etc., or a cow, or a root saying "idaṃ datvā sappiṃ gaṇhatha", there is no visaṅketa; it has been said that one incurs the āpatti according to the actual occurrence.
Na aññathāti sappiṃ yācitavato ‘‘imaṃ gahetvā sappiṃ katvā gaṇhathā’’ti avatvā ‘‘sappi natthi, idaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā vā tuṇhībhūtena vā navanītādīsu kismiñci dinne visesaviññāpakassa tadaññadānepi visaṅketameva hotīti attho. Pāḷiyā anāgatepi dinne visaṅketameva hoti. ‘‘Sace pana aññaṃ pāḷiyā āgataṃ vā anāgataṃ vā deti, visaṅketa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 259)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
Na aññathā: If, when one requested sappi, instead of saying "take this and make sappi and take it," if one says "there is no sappi, take this," or by remaining silent, if any of navanīta etc. is given, even the giving of something else to one who specified is indeed visaṅketa. It is indeed visaṅketa when something not expected is given in the Pāḷi. In the aṭṭhakathā it is said, "Sace pana aññaṃ pāḷiyā āgataṃ vā anāgataṃ vā deti, visaṅketaṃ" (pāci. aṭṭha. 259).
1401.Pāḷiyanti pubbe dassitaṃ ‘‘sappi nāma gosappī’’tiādiṃ niddesapāḷimāha. Yathāha ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ āgatanavanītādīni ṭhapetvā’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 259).Aññehinavanītādīhi. Sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.
1401. Pāḷiya: Refers to the statement shown earlier, "sappi nāma gosappī" etc. As he said, "ṭhapetvā pāḷiyaṃ āgatanavanītādīni" etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 259). Aññehi: With navanīta etc. sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ (instrumental case).
1402.‘‘Viññāpetvā’’ti imassa kammabhūtaṃ ‘‘bhatta’’nti adhikataṃ. Gāthābandhavasenavā-saddassa rasso kato. Ekato vāti yojanā, ‘‘nānato’’tipi gahitameva, ekaṭṭhānato vā nānaṭṭhānato vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘sace pana sabbehipi sappiādīhi ekaṭṭhāne vā nānaṭṭhāne vā viññāpetvā’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 259). Tenevabhuñjatīti ettha parikappasūcakaṃ ‘‘ce’’ti idañca avakaṃsasandassanatthaṃ ‘‘kusaggena ekabindumpī’’ti idañca ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Matātiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 259) vuttaṃ sandhāyāha. Ekato vā nānato vā ṭhānā bhattaṃ viññāpetvā ekarasaṃ katvā antamaso kusaggena ekabindumpi bhuñjati ce, nava pācittiyo matāti yojanā.
1402. "Viññāpetvā" The object of this is the bhatta, which has been taken up. Due to the meter of the verse, the vā has been shortened. Ekato vāti yojanā, "nānato"tipi gahitameva, ekaṭṭhānato vā nānaṭṭhānato vāti vuttaṃ hoti. As he said, "sace pana sabbehipi sappiādīhi ekaṭṭhāne vā nānaṭṭhāne vā viññāpetvā"tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 259). Therefore, here in bhuñjatī, the ce which is indicative of parikappa (imagining) and this idaṃ (this) to show avakaṃsa (an opportunity) and this idaṃ "kusaggena ekabindumpī" (even a single drop with a blade of grass) should be supplied. Matā: Having considered the statement in the aṭṭhakathā (pāci. aṭṭha. 259), he said. It should be connected that if, having requested bhatta from one place or different places, having made it one flavor, if one eats even a single drop with a blade of grass, it is considered nine pācittiyas.
1403.Akappiyena sappinā dehīti vuttepīti yojanā, sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhatta’’nti adhikataṃ. ‘‘Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappī’’ti (pāci. 260) vuttappakārassa vipariyāyatoakappiyaṃdaṭṭhabbaṃ.Tena ce detīti yadi tena yācitena teneva akappiyena saddhiṃ odanaṃ detīti.
1403. Even if it is said, "dehī akappiyena sappinā," the connection should be made, sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ (instrumental case). The Bhatta is taken by context. Akappiyaṃ should be seen as the opposite of the type stated, "Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappī" (pāci. 260). Tena ce detī: If he gives odana together with that akappiya that was requested with that itself.
1404.Tathāsaññissāti tathāsaññino, gilānomhītisaññinoti attho. Yathāha ‘‘gilāno gilānasaññī, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. 261).
1404. Tathāsaññissā: For one with such perception, the meaning is one who perceives "I am sick". As he said, "gilāno gilānasaññī, anāpattī" (pāci. 261).
1405.Gilānakāle viññattaṃ agilānassa bhuñjato anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā. Evamitarehipi dvīhi padehi yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anāpatti gilāno hutvā viññāpetvā agilāno bhuñjatī’’tiādi (pāci. 262).Ñātakādīnanti ettha ‘‘āyatta’’nti seso.Ādi-saddena ‘‘pavāritānaṃ aññassatthāya attano dhanena ummattakassa ādikammikassā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhātīti.
1405. It has been declared that there is no offense if what was requested during sickness is eaten by a non-sick person. It should be connected in this way with the other two phrases as well. As he said, "anāpatti gilāno hutvā viññāpetvā agilāno bhuñjatī"tiādi (pāci. 262). Ñātakādīna: Here, "āyatta" is implied. The Ādi includes "for relatives, for those who have given permission, for someone else's sake with one's own wealth, for the insane, for the beginner."
1406.Cattāri samuṭṭhānāni dassetumāha‘‘kāyato’’tiādi.
1406. To show the four origins, he says "kāyato" etc.
Paṇītabhojanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discussion on Choice Foods.
1407.‘‘Adinna’’nti imināadinnādānasikkhāpade(pārā. 91 ādayo) viya parapariggahitaṃ avatvā appaṭiggahitameva vattabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘adinnaṃ nāma appaṭiggahitakaṃ vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 266).Mukhadvāranti mukhe dvāraṃmukhadvāraṃ,galanāḷikā, iminā pana vacanena yaṃ kiñci ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ, taṃ mukhena vā pavisatu nāsikāya vā, galabilaṃ paviṭṭhameva āpattikaranti dīpeti.Āhāranti udakadantaponehi aññaṃ ajjhoharitabbaṃ yaṃ kiñci yāvakālikādiṃ. Yathāha ‘‘āhāro nāma udakadantaponaṃ ṭhapetvā yaṃ kiñci ajjhoharaṇīya’’nti (pāci. 266).
1407. "Adinna" here should be understood as not received, not in the sense of something taken that belongs to another, as in the adinnādāna training rule (pārā. 91 ff.). As it is said: "Adinna means what has not been received" (pāci. 266). Mukhadvāra means the opening of the mouth, the throat passage; however, with this statement, it indicates that anything to be ingested, whether it enters through the mouth or the nose, incurs an offense once it enters the throat passage. Āhāra means anything to be ingested other than water and a toothpick, such as yāvakālika etc. As it is said, "Āhāra means anything to be ingested, except for water and a toothpick" (pāci. 266).
Āhareyyāti mukhadvāraṃ paveseyya, iminā paragalaṃ akatvā mukhena paṭiggahitaggahaṇepi natthi dosoti sūcitaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘dantaponodakaṃ hitvā’’ti. Teneva vuttaṃgaṇṭhipade‘‘bhagavato dantakaṭṭhassa mukhadvāraṭhapane anāpattivacaneneva yaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ paragalaṃ akatvā mukhe ṭhapane anāpattibhāvo vutto’’ti. Udakañhi yathāsukhaṃ pātuṃ, dantakaṭṭhañca dantaponaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tassa pana rasaṃ gilituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepi dantakaṭṭharaso ajānantassa anto pavisati, pācittiyameva. Dante punanti nimmale karonti etenātidantaponaṃ.
Āhareyya means to put into the mouth. This indicates that there is no offense even if one receives something in the mouth without swallowing. Therefore, it says, "having left aside a toothpick and water." Therefore, it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada, "The fact that there is no offense in placing the Buddha's toothpick at the opening of the mouth indicates that there is no offense in placing any object in the mouth without swallowing." Indeed, it is permissible to drink water as one pleases and to use a toothpick for cleaning the teeth, but it is not permissible to swallow its juice. Even if the juice of a toothpick enters unintentionally, it is still a pācittiya offense. Dantapona means that which cleans and purifies the teeth.
1408-9.Byatirekamukhena adinnalakkhaṇaṃ, padabhājane ca vuttanayena paṭhamaṃ dinnalakkhaṇaṃ dassento āha‘‘hatthapāso’’tiādi.Hatthapāsoti pavāraṇasikkhāpade –
1408-9. Showing the characteristic of what is not given by way of contrast, and first showing the characteristic of what is given in the manner stated in the word analysis, he says, "hatthapāso," etc. Hatthapāso [hand-reach] is as in the Pāvaranā Sikkhāpada:
‘‘Gaṇhato pacchimaṃ aṅgaṃ, dadato purimaṃ pana;
"The furthest point for the one taking, and the nearest for the one giving;
Two and a half cubits for both, without the hand extended." (vi. vi. 1275)
Abhinīhāroti tattheva vuttanayena abhimukhaṃ katvā haraṇañca.Majjhimuccāraṇakkhamoti paṭiggahetabbabhārassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena thāmamajjhimena purisena ukkhipanārahatā. Bhāvappadhānoyaṃ niddeso. Avakaṃso pana ‘‘antamaso rathareṇumattampī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 269)aṭṭhakathāvacanato veditabbo.Uccāraṇaṃukkhipanaṃ.‘‘Amanusso’’ti iminā tadaññasattasāmaññena tiracchānagatāpi veditabbā. ‘‘Pakkhī vā’’tiādivakkhamānena vā veditabbā.Kāyādināti kāyakāyapaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ aññatarena. Tenevāha‘‘tidhā’’ti.
Abhinīhāro is the act of bringing it forward as stated there. Majjhimuccāraṇakkhamo means capable of being lifted by a person of middling strength, according to the upper limit of the weight to be received. This definition emphasizes the quality. However, the allowance should be understood from the Aṭṭhakathā statement: "even as small as a speck of dust from a chariot wheel" (pāci. aṭṭha. 269). Uccāraṇa means lifting up. "Amanusso" [non-human] here should be understood to include animals in general. Or it should be understood by the statement that will be said, "or a bird," etc. Kāyādinā means by one of the bodily actions or bodily-related relinquishments. Therefore, he says, "in three ways."
Dvidhāti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā.Pañcaṅgasaṃyogeti ettha ‘‘hatthapāso’’ti paṭhamaṅgaṃ, ‘‘abhinīhāro’’ti dutiyaṃ, ‘‘majjhimuccāraṇakkhamo’’ti tatiyaṃ, ‘‘manusso…pe… tidhā’’ti catutthaṃ, ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti…pe… dvidhā’’ti pañcamanti imāni pañca aṅgāni, pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ saṃyogo samāgamo sannipāto pañcaṅgasaṃyogo, tasmiṃ.Gahaṇanti paṭiggahaṇaṃ.Tassabhikkhuno.Rūhatisampajjati.
Dvidhā means by the body or by something connected to the body. Pañcaṅgasaṃyoge: here, "hatthapāso" is the first factor, "abhinīhāro" is the second, "majjhimuccāraṇakkhamo" is the third, "manusso…pe… tidhā" is the fourth, "paṭiggaṇhāti…pe… dvidhā" is the fifth. The combination, coming together, or confluence of these five factors is pañcaṅgasaṃyoga. Gahaṇa means receiving. Tassa means of that bhikkhu. Rūhati means it is accomplished.
1410-12.Itaroti paṭiggāhako.Tassaaṅgassa. Na gacchatītinago, ‘‘nago’’ti rukkhopi pabbatopi vuccati.Evarūpeti īdise uccanīcaṭṭhāne.
1410-12. Itaro means the receiver. Tassa means of that factor. Na gacchati iti nago, "nago" is said of both tree and mountain. Evarūpe means in such a high or low place.
1413.Soṇḍāyāti hatthena.
1413. Soṇḍāyā means by the hand.
1415-6.Īsakaṃ onatvāthokaṃ nāmetvā tena bhikkhunā taṃ heṭṭhimaṃ bhājanaṃ ekadesenāpi paṭicchitabbanti yojanā.
1415-6. Īsakaṃ onatvā: having bent down a little, the meaning is that the lower vessel is covered by that bhikkhu even in part.
1417.Ugghāṭetvāuccāretvā, bhājanāni visuṃ visuṃ oropetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1417. Ugghāṭetvā means having lifted up, it means having lowered the vessels separately.
1418.Kājabhattanti bhattakājaṃ, bhattabharitaṃ piṭakanti vuttaṃ hoti.Onatvā detīti sayaṃ onamitvā byābhaṅgiṃ deti.
1418. Kājabhatta means bhattakājaṃ, a basket filled with food. Onatvā detī means having bent down himself, he gives it askew.
1419.‘‘Tiṃsahattho’’ti idaṃ tiṃsaratanamatto ce hoti, ‘‘dūra’’nti na parisaṅkitabboti dassanatthamāha.Gahitekasminti ubhayakoṭīsu ṭhapite dve ghaṭe paṭiggahāpetuṃ hatthapāse ṭhitena dāyakena diyyamānaṃ tiṃsahatthaveṇuṃ paṭiggaṇhantena yena kenaci kāyappadesena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā mañcādīsu yattha katthaci phusitvā paṭiggahiteti vuttaṃ hoti.Taṃ sabbanti tesu dvīsu ghaṭesu pakkhittaṃ sabbameva.Gahitamevāti paṭiggahitameva hoti, dāyakassa hatthapāsabbhantare gatattā idaṃ tassa kāyapaṭibaddhanti ‘‘dūra’’nti saṅkā na kātabbātievakārena dīpeti. ‘‘Dvīsu ghaṭesu bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitesupi tattha bandhanaveḷuyaṃ paṭiggaṇhanamatteneva paṭiggahitaṃ hotī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
1419. "Tiṃsahattho": this is said to show that if it is thirty ratana-measures long, it should not be doubted as "too far." Gahitekasmiṃ: while the giver, standing within hand-reach, is giving a bamboo pole thirty cubits long, which is placed on two pots set on both ends to receive them, if the bhikkhu touches any part of it with any part of his body or something connected to his body, making the intention "I will take this," touching it on a couch or anywhere else, it is said to be received. Taṃ sabbaṃ means all that is put in those two pots. Gahitameva means it is indeed received, since it has gone within the hand-reach of the giver, and this is connected to his body, so the doubt that it is "too far" should not be made; this is indicated by the eva. In the Gaṇṭhipada it is said, "Even if the two pots are placed on the ground, it is received by merely receiving the bamboo attached to them."
1420-24.‘‘Kaṭasārake’’ti iminā doṇiphalakādayo upalakkhitā.‘‘Nisīdatī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘tiṭṭhatī’’tiādīnaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ.Mañcādīni phusitvāti ettha ‘‘aṅguliyāpī’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘paṭiggahaṇasaññāya mañcādīni aṅguliyāpi phusitvā ṭhitena vā nisinnena vā nipannena vā’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).Pattesūti tathā ṭhapitesu sabbesu pattesuyeva.Yañca dīyatīti ettha ‘‘tathā ṭhitenā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati.
1420-24. "Kaṭasārake": with this, containers made of woven bamboo, boards etc., are indicated. "Nisīdatī" this is representative of "tiṭṭhatī," etc. Mañcādīni phusitvā: here, "even with a finger" is understood. As it is said, "Having touched the couch etc. even with a finger, with the intention of receiving, whether standing, sitting, or lying down" etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). Pattesū means in all the bowls placed in that way. Yañca dīyatī: here, "by one standing in that way" is obtained by implication.
‘‘paṭiggahessāmī’’tiādi. Sace pana paṭiggahessāmicceva mañcādīni āruhitvā nisīdati, dāyakopi hatthapāse ṭhatvāna deti ce, taṃ sabbaṃ gahitaṃ hotīti yojanā.
"paṭiggahessāmī" etc. But if he sits down on the couch etc. intending only to receive, and the giver stands within hand-reach and gives, then all of that is received; this is the connection.
yaṃ yaṃpattaṃ aṅguliyāpi vā sūciyāpi vā phusitvā nisinno, tattha tattheva dīyamānampi paṭiggaṇhāti, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
yaṃ yaṃ bowl he touches with even a finger or a needle and sits down, what is given there is also received, it is allowable; this is the connection.
1425.Kaṭasārādayo sace mahantā, paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruheyyāti vikappo siyāti tannivattanatthamāha‘‘kaṭasārake’’tiādi.‘‘Mahantasmi’’nti iminā kaṭasārakassa puna vacane hetumāha.Hatthattharaṃnāma hatthipiṭṭhe attharitabbaṃ attharaṇaṃ.Ādi-saddena assatthararathattharādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ṭhitapattesu diyyamānaṃ gaṇhato paṭiggahaṇaruhaṇahetuṃ dasseti‘‘hatthapāsasmiṃ vijjamāne tū’’ti.Tu-saddo vuttavisesameva joteti.
1425. If the kaṭasāra etc. are large, there might be a doubt that the receiving is not accomplished; to prevent that, he says "kaṭasārake" etc. "Mahantasmi": by saying kaṭasāra again in "mahatasmi" he states the reason. Hatthattharaṃ means a covering to be spread on the back of an elephant. The term ādi includes a horse-blanket, chariot-blanket, etc. He shows the reason for the accomplishment of receiving when one is receiving what is being given into the standing bowls: "hatthapāsasmiṃ vijjamāne tū." The word tu indicates the specific feature mentioned.
1426.Tatthajātakapaṇṇesūti rukkheyeva ṭhitesu paṇṇesu.Gahetunti paṭiggahetuṃ.‘‘Na panetānī’’tiādi yena hetunā na vaṭṭati, tassa dassanaṃ.Hi-saddo pasiddhiṃ sūceti.
1426. Tatthajātakapaṇṇesū means in leaves still growing on the tree. Gahetuṃ means to receive. "Na panetānī" etc. shows the reason why it is not allowable. The word hi indicates fame.
1427.Thāmamajjhimena purisena ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃasaṃhāriyaṃ. Tādiseti tathārūpe, asaṃhāriyeti vuttaṃ hoti.Khāṇubaddheti bhūmiyaṃ nikhātakhāṇuke baddhe.
1427. asaṃhāriyaṃ means what a person of middling strength could not lift. Tādise means in such a form, that is, asaṃhāriya. Khāṇubaddhe means tied to a post fixed in the ground.
1428.Tintiṇikāti ciñcā.Ādi-saddena tathā khuddakānaṃ kadambapupphapaṇṇādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesū’’ti vacanato sākhāsu paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ patthaṭesūti yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ atthatesu sukhumesu tintiṇikādipaṇṇesupi paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruhatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1428. Tintiṇikā means tamarind. The term ādi includes the taking of small kadamba flowers, leaves, etc. From the statement "Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesū," it should be understood that receiving on the branches is accomplished. It should be connected to those spread on the ground. As it is said, "Receiving is not accomplished even in small, fine tamarind leaves etc. spread on the ground" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1429.Parivesakoti dāyako.
1429. Parivesako means the giver.
1430.Asesato puñchitvāti yojanā.
1430. The connection is: having wiped it completely.
1431.Paṭiggahetvāvāti pattaṃ paṭiggahetvāva. Bhikkhā gahetabbāti sambandho.
1431. Paṭiggahetvāvā means having received the bowl itself. The connection is: alms should be taken.
1432.Apaṭiggahiteti ettha ‘‘patte’’ti seso. Taṃ pacchā paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjato anāpattīti yojanā.
1432. Apaṭiggahite: here, "patte" is understood. The connection is: there is no offense for one who later receives and uses it.
1433.Anādiyitvāti aggahetvā, tasmiṃ vacane ādaraṃ akatvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1433. Anādiyitvā means without taking, without paying attention to that statement.
1435.Aññassaanupasampannassa.
1435. Aññassa means to one who is not fully ordained.
1436.Pubbābhogassa anurūpavasena‘‘sāmaṇerassa taṃ datvā…pe… pana vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ ‘‘aññassa dassāmī’’ti cittuppādamattena parasantakaṃ nāma na hoti, tasmā tassa adatvāpi paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
1436. In accordance with the initial intention, it is said: "sāmaṇerassa taṃ datvā…pe… pana vaṭṭatī." But since it does not become the property of another merely by the arising of the thought "I will give this to another," therefore it is permissible to receive and use it even without giving it to him.
1437-9.Bhikkhunoti aññassa bhikkhussa.Bhattassāti kañjikādidravamissabhattamāha.Uplavatīti upari plavati.Kañjikanti āranālaṃ, imassa upalakkhaṇattā khīratakkādidravaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.Pavāhetvāti matthakato palāpetvā.Anto paviṭṭhaṃ sace tanti taṃ rajaṃ yadi bhattassa anto paviṭṭhaṃ hoti.Paṭiggahetabbanti anupasampanne asati hatthato amocenteneva yattha anupasampanno atthi, taṃ tattha netvā paṭiggahetabbaṃ.
1437-9. Bhikkhuno means to another bhikkhu. Bhattassā refers to food mixed with liquid, such as gruel. Uplavatī means floats on top. Kañjika means āranāla; since this is representative, liquids such as milk and buttermilk are included. Pavāhetvā means having drained it from the top. Anto paviṭṭhaṃ sace taṃ: if that dirt has entered inside the food. Paṭiggahetabbaṃ: in the absence of a fully ordained person, it should be received after taking it from his hand and bringing it to where there is a fully ordained person.
1440.Apanīyāvāti ettha ‘‘thūla’’nti idaṃ ‘‘sukhumaṃ ce’’ti vakkhamānavipariyāyato labbhati. Sabhattaṃ apanīyāti sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘uparibhattena saddhiṃ apanetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā vā bhuñjitabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1440. Apanīyāvā: here, "thūla" is obtained by contrast from the opposite that will be said: "sukhumaṃ ce." The connection is: the whole portion should be removed. As it is said, "It should be removed together with the food on top, or it should be received and eaten" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1441.Thevoti bindu.Thevo…pe… vaṭṭatīti ettha yathā paṭhamataraṃ patitatheve doso natthi, tathā ākiritvā apanentānaṃ pacchā patitathevepi abhihaṭattā nevatthi doso.
1441. Thevo means a drop. Thevo…pe… vaṭṭatī: here, just as there is no offense for a drop that fell earlier, there is also no offense for drops that fall later when cleaning up the scattering, because it was unintentional.
1442-4.Carukenāti khuddakaukkhaliyā.Tatocarukato.Masīti jallikāādikā bhasmā.Bhājaneti bhājanapattādibhājane.Tassa cāti tassa masiādino ca.
1442-4. Carukenā means with a small ladle. Tato means from the ladle. Masī means soot, ashes, etc. Bhājane means in a bowl, patta, or other vessel. Tassa cā means of that soot etc.
‘‘Dīyamāna’’nti ettha ‘‘bhattādikaṃ yaṃ kiñcī’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.Vaṭṭatevā yanti ettha ‘‘vaṭṭateva aya’’nti padacchedo na kātabbo ‘‘aya’’nti iminā sambandhanīyassa abhāvato. Tasmāva-kāro gāthāchandavasena dīghaṃ katvā vuttoti veditabbo.
"Dīyamāna": here, "bhattādikaṃ yaṃ kiñcī" is obtained from the context. Vaṭṭatevā yaṃ: here, the word division should not be "vaṭṭateva ayaṃ," because there is nothing to be connected with "ayaṃ." Therefore, the va-sound should be understood as having been lengthened due to the meter of the verse.
1445-6.Pāyāsassāti ettha pūraṇayoge sāmivacanaṃ, pāyāsenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Uṇhatoti uṇhattā.Na sakkatīti na sakkoti.Mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ vaṭṭatīti mukhavaṭṭiṃ ukkhipitvā hatthe phusāpite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Tathā mukhavaṭṭiyā gahetuṃ na sakkā ce, ādhārakenapi gahetabboti yojanā.
1445-6. Pāyāsassā: here, the dative case is used in the sense of "with," meaning "with rice porridge." Uṇhato means because of the heat. Na sakkatī means he is not able. Mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ vaṭṭatī: it is permissible to take it with a ladle, having touched it on the hand. Similarly, if it is not possible to take it with a ladle, it should be taken with a support; this is the connection.
1447-8.Āhariyamānaṃ vā neva jānāti, dīyamānaṃ vā na jānātīti yojanā. Gāthābandhavasena‘‘jānatī’’ti rasso kato.Ābhoganti ‘‘gaṇhāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ. Yathāhamahāpaccariyaṃ‘‘ābhogamattameva hi ettha pamāṇa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). ‘‘Kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265) vuttattā pattaṃ gahetvā nisinnattā ‘‘kāyapaṭibaddhena gaṇhissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvātipi yujjateva.
1447-8. He does not know what is being brought, or he does not know what is being given; this is the connection. Due to the verse structure, "jānatī" is shortened. Ābhoga means the intention "I will take it." As it is said in the Mahāpaccariya, "Here, the intention alone is the measure" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). Because it is said "He receives with his body or something connected to his body" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265), it is also suitable if, having taken the bowl and sat down, he makes the intention "I will take it with something connected to my body."
1449.‘‘Hatthena muñcitvā’’ti idaṃ‘‘ādhārakampi vā’’ti imināpi yojetabbaṃ.‘‘Pādena pelletvā’’ti iminā pana‘‘ādhāraka’’nti idameva yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘hatthena ādhārakaṃ muñcitvā pādena pelletvā niddāyatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).Pelletvāti pīḷetvā, akkamitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1449. "Hatthena muñcitvā" this should also be connected with "ādhārakampi vā." But "Pādena pelletvā" should be connected only with "ādhāraka." As it is said, "Having released the support with his hand, he lies down, kicking it with his foot" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). Pelletvā means having pressed, having stepped on.
1450.Kami-dhātussa majjhe ‘‘akka’’iti padacchedo yatihīnadosoti.
1450. Inserting "akka" in the middle of the kami-dhātu is a fault of disrupting the meter.
‘‘Siloke niyataṭṭhānaṃ, padacchedaṃ yatiṃ vidū;
"In a verse, know the fixed place, the word division, the pause;
That which deviates from that pause is disturbed, like a sound causing aversion."
Jāgarassāpīti aniddāyantassāpi.Anādaroti anādarabhāvo.
Jāgarassāpī means even for one who is not sleeping. Anādaro means lack of respect.
1451.Tasmāti tathā gahaṇassa anādarabhāvato.Tanti taṃ ādhārakaṃ pādena akkamitvā paṭiggahaṇañca.Dīyamānanti dāyakena paṭiggahāpiyamānaṃ.Patatīti paṭiggāhakassa hatthaṃ aphusitvā rajorahitāya suddhabhūmiyā vā paduminipaṇṇādīsu vā patati. Yathāha ‘‘yaṃ diyyamānaṃ dāyakassa hatthato parigaḷitvā suddhāya bhūmiyā vā paduminipaṇṇavatthakaṭasārakādīsu vā patati, taṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). Sarajāya bhūmiyā patite rajaṃ puñchitvā vā dhovitvā vā paṭiggahāpetvā vā paribhuñjitabbanti idaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘sarajāya bhūmiyaṃ patatī’’tiādinā dassitaṃ.Gahetunti ettha ‘‘bhuñjitu’’nti cavaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘pariccattaṃ dāyakehī’’ti ca seso. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave yaṃ diyyamānaṃ patati, taṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ. Pariccattaṃ taṃ bhikkhave dāyakehī’’ti (cūḷava. 273). ‘‘Yaṃ diyyamānaṃ patatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā catūsupi kālikesu ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.
1451.Tasmāti, because of disregard for receiving in that manner. Tanti, that supporting (vessel) without stepping on it with the foot and receiving. Dīyamānanti, being made to receive by the giver. Patatīti, falling without touching the receiver's hand, either on clean ground free from dust or on lotus leaves, etc. As it was said: "That which, being given, drips from the giver's hand and falls on clean ground or on lotus leaves, cloths, or wooden planks, etc., it is allowable to take and use oneself" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). In the Aṭṭhakathā, however, it is shown with "falling on dusty ground," etc., that if it falls on dusty ground, one may wipe off or wash off the dust, or have it received, and then use it. Gahetunti, here, "to use" and vaṭṭatīti, here, "given up by the donors" are understood. As it was said: "I allow, monks, that which, being given, falls, to be taken and used oneself. For that, monks, is given up by the donors" (cūḷava. 273). Because it is said without specification, "that which, being given, falls," this method should be understood for all four kālikas.
1452.Abbohārikanayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘bhuñjantāna’’nti.
1452.To show the non-transactional method, he says, "Bhuñjantānanti."
1453-4.Taṃmalaṃ.Tesūti ucchuādīsu vatthūsu.Tanti malamissakaṃ ucchuādikaṃ vatthu.Na paññāyatīti na pana paññāyati.Tasminti ucchuādivatthusmiṃ.
1453-4.Taṃmalaṃ, that is dirt. Tesūti, in those things like sugarcane, etc. Tanti, that sugarcane, etc., mixed with dirt. Na paññāyatīti, but is not perceived. Tasminti, in that sugarcane, etc.
1455.Nisadodukkhalādīnantiādi-saddena nisadapotamusalādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
1455.Nisadodukkhalādīnanti, with the word ādi, the taking of nisada, potamusalas, etc., is included.
1456.Vāsiyā upalakkhaṇattā tajjātikaṃ yaṃ kiñci satthampi gahetabbaṃ.Khīreti anupasampannena tāpitakhīre, idaṃ upari āmakassa visuṃ gahaṇena viññāyati.Nīlikāti nīlavaṇṇaṃ.Satthake viya nicchayoti satthena uṭṭhitamale ucchukhaṇḍe viya paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbanti vinicchayo veditabbo.
1456.Because the adze is representative, any kind of related tool should also be taken. Khīreti, in milk heated by a non-ordained person; this is understood by the separate taking of raw (milk) above. Nīlikāti, blue color. Satthake viya nicchayoti, the decision should be understood as: one may receive and use sugarcane pieces from which dirt has been removed with a tool.
1457.Tanti taṃ aggisantattavāsiādiṃ, tāpavatthuto vāsi gahetabbā.
1457.Tanti, that heated adze, etc.; the adze should be taken from the heated material.
1459.Tanti taṃ hatthādikāyāvayavaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā dhovitvā patitakiliṭṭhajalamissamodanaṃ. Rukkhamūlādīsu nisīditvā bhuñjantassa pattādīsu rukkhapaṇṇādiṃ dhovitvā patitakiliṭṭhodakepi eseva vinicchayoti dassetumāha‘‘esevā’’tiādi.
1459.Tanti, that hand, or limb, or robe, or rice mixed with dirty water that has been washed off. To show that the same decision applies also to dirty water that has fallen from washing leaves, etc., into the bowl, etc., of one sitting and eating at the root of a tree, etc., he says, "esevātiādi."
1460.Jalaṃ sace suddhaṃ patati, vaṭṭatīti yojanā, ‘‘rukkhato’’ti labbhati. Abbhokāse ca sace suddhaṃ toyaṃ patati, vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘ākāsato’’ti labbhati. Ubhayatthāpi rukkhapaṇṇesu, ākāse ca rajassa paṭhamameva vassodakena dhovitattā āha‘‘suddha’’nti.
1460.If the water falls clean, it is allowable, is the construction; "from the tree" is obtained. And in the open air, if clean water falls, it is allowable; here, "from the sky" is obtained. In both cases, because the dust on the tree leaves and in the sky is already washed away by the rainwater, he says, "suddhanti."
1461.Acchupantenāti aphusantena.Tassasāmaṇerassa.
1461.Acchupantenāti, without touching. Tassasāmaṇerassa, of that novice.
1462.Pattanti anupasampannassa pattaṃ.Chupitvāti anupasampannapattagatodanaṃ phusitvā.Taṃattano patte bhattaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘appaṭiggahite odanaṃ chupitvā puna attano patte odanaṃ gaṇhantassa uggahitako hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1462.Pattanti, the bowl of a non-ordained person. Chupitvāti, having touched rice in the bowl of a non-ordained person. Taṃattano patte bhattaṃ, that rice in one's own bowl. As it was said: "For one who touches rice that has not been received and then takes rice into his own bowl, there is an offense of uggahitaka" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1464.Pacchāti tasmiṃ gahitepi agahitepi pacchā.Taṃpaṭiggahitabhojanaṃ.
1464.Pacchāti, even after that taking, whether received or not received, afterwards. Taṃpaṭiggahitabhojanaṃ, that received food.
1467.Tassaattano pattagatassa bhattassa.
1467.Tassa, of his own rice in the bowl.
1468.Parenāti appaṭiggahitapattena.
1468.Parenāti, with a bowl that has not been received.
1469-70.‘‘Yāguādīnaṃ pacane bhikkhūnaṃ bhājane’’ti sambandho. Pacanti etthātipacanaṃ,bhājanaṃ.Bhājanūpari hatthesu sāmaṇerassāti bhājanassa upari katesu sāmaṇerassa hatthesu.Patitaṃ hatthato tasminti tassa sāmaṇerassa hatthato parigaḷitvā tasmiṃ bhājane patitaṃ.
1469-70.The connection is "bhājane bhikkhūnaṃ, in the vessel of the monks, for the cooking of gruel, etc." Pacanaṃ, the vessel in which they cook. Bhājanūpari hatthesu sāmaṇerassāti, in the novice's hands held above the vessel. Patitaṃ hatthato tasminti, having dripped from the hand of that novice and fallen into that vessel.
1471.‘‘Na karoti akappiya’’nti ettha kāraṇamāha‘‘pariccattañhi ta’’nti. Tañhi yasmā pariccattaṃ, tasmā akappiyaṃ na karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.Evaṃ akatvāti yathāvuttapakārena akatvā.Ākirateva ceti sace bhājane ākirati eva.Taṃtathā pakkhittaṃ bhattabhājanaṃ.Nirāmisaṃ katvāti tattha patitaṃ āmisaṃ yathā na tiṭṭhati, evaṃ dhovitvā bhuñjitabbanti sambandho.
1471.Regarding "does not make unallowable," he gives the reason, "pariccattañhi tanti." Because that is given up, therefore it is said that it does not make it unallowable. Evaṃ akatvāti, without doing it in the manner described. Ākirateva ceti, but if he sprinkles it into the vessel. Taṃtathā pakkhittaṃ bhattabhājanaṃ, that vessel of rice thus thrown in. Nirāmisaṃ katvāti, having made it without stain, the connection is that he should wash it and eat it so that the stain does not remain where it fell.
1472-3.Kuṭanti ghaṭaṃ.Āvajjetīti kuṭaṃ nāmetvā yāguṃ āsiñcati.
1472-3.Kuṭanti, a pot. Āvajjetīti, lowering the pot, he pours in the gruel.
1474.Hattheti dve hatthe.Tatthāti tattha bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitesu dvīsu hatthatalesu.
1474.Hattheti, two hands. Tatthāti, on those two palms placed on the ground.
1475-6.Ekassa gahaṇūpagaṃ ce bhāranti thāmamajjhimena ekena purisena ukkhipanappamāṇaṃ bhāraṃ sace bhaveyya.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ekassa gahaṇūpagaṃ bhāra’’nti idaṃ paccāmasati.
1475-6.Ekassa gahaṇūpagaṃ ce bhāranti, if there is a load of a size that can be lifted by one person of average strength. "Tathā"ti, with this, he refers back to "a load that can be lifted by one person."
1477.Laggentīti olambanti.Tatthāti tasmiṃ mañcapīṭhe.Vaṭṭatevāti uggahitakaṃ na hotīti dīpeti.
1477.Laggentīti, they hang down. Tatthāti, on that bed or seat. Vaṭṭatevāti, he indicates that there is no offense of uggahitaka.
1478.Sammujjantoti sammajjanto.Ghaṭṭetīti asañcicca sammajjaniyā phusati.
1478.Sammujjantoti, sweeping. Ghaṭṭetīti, unintentionally touches with the broom.
1479.Taṃ ñatvāti paṭiggahitabhāvaṃ ñatvā.Ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatiuggahitakaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo.
1479.Taṃ ñatvāti, knowing that it has been received. Ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, the intention is that there is no offense of uggahitaka.
1480.Tanti paṭiggahitasaññāya gahitaṃ taṃ appaṭiggahitaṃ.Aññathā pana na kattabbanti apihitaṃ pidhātuñca pihitaṃ vivarituñca na vaṭṭatīti attho.
1480.Tanti, that unreceived (thing) taken with the perception of received. Aññathā pana na kattabbanti, but it is not allowable to close what is open or to open what is closed, is the meaning.
1481.Bahiṭhapeti ceti yadi pubbe ṭhapitaṭṭhānato bahi ṭhapeti.Tenāti bahi ṭhapetvā muttahatthena tena bhikkhunā.Tanti bahi ṭhapitaṃ hatthato muttaṃ.Ñatvāti appaṭiggahitabhāvaṃ ñatvā.Taṃtathā ñatvā ṭhapitaṃ.
1481.Bahi ṭhapeti ceti, if he places it outside from the place where it was previously placed. Tenāti, by that monk who placed it outside and let go of his hand. Tanti, that (thing) placed outside, released from the hand. Ñatvāti, knowing that it is unreceived. Taṃtathā ñatvā ṭhapitaṃ, that (thing) placed after knowing it thus.
1482-3.Uṭṭheti yadi kaṇṇikāti sace kaṇṇikā sañjāyati.Siṅgiverādiketi etthaādi-saddena pipphaliādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Mūleti pañcamūlādike mūle.Ghuṇacuṇṇanti ghuṇapāṇakehi uppāditacuṇṇaṃ.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘uṭṭhetī’’ti kiriyaṃ paccāmasati.Taṃsamuṭṭhānatoti paṭiggahitatelādīsu samuppannattā.Taññevāti pavuccatīti paṭhamapaṭiggahitaṃ tameva telādikanti vuccati. Tenāha‘‘paṭiggahaṇa…pe… na vijjatī’’ti.
1482-3.Uṭṭheti yadi kaṇṇikāti, if a kaṇṇikā arises. Siṅgiverādiketi, here, with the word ādi, the taking of pipphalī, etc., is included. Mūleti, in a root like pañcamūla, etc. Ghuṇacuṇṇanti, powder produced by weevils. "Tathā"ti, with this, he refers back to the action "arises." Taṃsamuṭṭhānatoti, because it arises in received oil, etc. Taññevāti pavuccatīti, that same first received oil, etc., is called. Therefore, he says, "paṭiggahaṇa…pe… na vijjatī."
1484-5.Kocipuggaloti sāmaṇeragamikādīsupi yo koci satto.Tālapiṇḍinti tālakaṇṇikaṃ phalaṃ.Añño bhūmaṭṭhoti bhūmiyaṃ ṭhito añño koci puggalo itthī vā puriso vā.
1484-5.Koci puggaloti, any being whatsoever, even a novice or a layperson, etc. Tālapiṇḍinti, a tāla kaṇṇikā fruit. Añño bhūmaṭṭhoti, another person standing on the ground, whether a woman or a man.
1486.Chinditvāti chindaṃ katvā.Vatinti hatthapāsappahonakabahalavatiṃ. Yathāha ‘‘hatthapāse satī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).Daṇḍake aphusitvāvāti yattakena gamanavego nibbāyati, ettakaṃ, paharaṇato vatidaṇḍake vā appaharitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paharitvā ṭhatvā gacchati ce, na vaṭṭati. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘mayaṃ pana ‘yaṃ ṭhānaṃ pahaṭaṃ, tato sayaṃ patitamiva hotī’ti takkayāma. Tasmimpi aṭṭhatvā gacchante yujjati suṅkaghātakato pavaṭṭetvā bahi patitabhaṇḍaṃ viyā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1486.Chinditvāti, having made (the branch) by cutting. Vatinti, a strong creeper thick enough to be within arm's reach. As it was said: "When it is within arm's reach" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). Daṇḍake aphusitvāvāti, to the extent that the speed of movement is stopped, that is to say, without striking or with a little striking the creeper stick from the striking. If he strikes it and stands (there), it is not allowable. As it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "But we think, 'the place that is struck, from there it is as if it falls by itself.' Even if he goes without standing there, it is suitable, like goods that have been dislodged from a custom barrier and fallen outside" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1487-8.Pākāroti ettha ‘‘vatiṃ vā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265)aṭṭhakathāyaṃāgatattā idaṃ adhikārato gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Na puthulo’’ti ettha adhippetappamāṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘anto…pe… pahoti ce’’ti.‘‘Uddhaṃ hatthasataṃ gantvā’’ti iminā dāyakassa dātumicchāya ākāsaṃ taṃ ukkhipitvā vissaṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñāpeti.Sampattanti hatthappattaṃ.Gaṇhatoti paṭiggahaṇasaññāya gaṇhato.
1487-8.Pākāroti, here, because "vatiṃ vā"ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265) comes in the Aṭṭhakathā, this should be taken from the context. To show the intended measure in "na puthulo," he says, "anto…pe… pahoti ce." "Uddhaṃ hatthasataṃ gantvā"ti, with this, he makes known that he throws it up into the sky, knowing the giver's intention to give it. Sampattanti, having reached the hand. Gaṇhatoti, as he takes it with the perception of receiving.
1489.‘‘Sāmaṇera’’nti idaṃ upalakkhaṇanti gihinopi gahaṇaṃ.Tatthevāti khandhe eva.Nisinnosāmaṇero.
1489."Sāmaṇera"nti, this is representative, so the taking by a householder is (also included). Tatthevāti, on the shoulder itself. Nisinnosāmaṇero, the novice is sitting.
1491-2.Phaliniṃ sākhanti phalavatiṃ sākhaṃ.‘‘Khāditu’’nti idaṃ ‘‘citte samuppanne’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ. Sace phalaṃ khādati, evaṃ khādituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Makkhikānaṃ nivāratthanti makkhikānaṃ nivāretuṃ.
1491-2.Phaliniṃ sākhanti, a branch bearing fruit. "Khāditu"nti, this should be connected with "citte samuppanne." The construction is: if he eats the fruit, it is allowable to eat it thus. Makkhikānaṃ nivāratthanti, to ward off flies.
1493.Chāyatthañca makkhikā nivāretuñca gayhamānā phalasākhā sukhaparibhogatthāya kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā paṭiggahitā ce, khāditumicchāya sati puna appaṭiggahitāpi vaṭṭatīti dassetumāha‘‘kappiyaṃ pana kāretvā’’tiādi.
1493.To show that if a fruit branch being taken for shade and to ward off flies is received after having it made allowable for ease of use, it is still allowable without being received again when there is a desire to eat (the fruit), he says, "kappiyaṃ pana kāretvā"tiādi.
1494-5.‘‘Taṃ so paṭiggahāpetvā’’ti vakkhamānattā‘‘gahetvā’’ti idaṃ appaṭiggahāpetvā gahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.Taṃ paṭiggahitanti ettha ‘‘ce pubbamevā’’ti seso.
1494-5.Because it will be said, "taṃ so paṭiggahāpetvā," "gahetvā"ti, this should be taken as referring to taking without having it received. Taṃ paṭiggahitanti, here, "ce pubbameva, if it was previously" is understood.
1496-9.Bhikkhussa pātheyyataṇḍuleti sambandho.Soti sāmaṇero.Itarehīti bhikkhunā gahitehi attano taṇḍulehi.
1496-9.The connection is pātheyyataṇḍule bhikkhussa, travel rice for the monk. Soti, that novice. Itarehīti, with his own rice taken by the monk.
Dvīsu pattesūti upalakkhaṇaṃ. Bahūsupi eseva nayo. Attanā laddhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ datvā tehi laddhaṃ attanā gahetvā aññesaṃ dānavasena bahunnampi dātuṃ vaṭṭatītiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 265 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ tameva dassetumāha‘‘yāguṃ bhikkhussā’’tiādi. ‘‘Āvuso tuyhaṃ yāguṃ mayhaṃ dehī’ti evaṃ therehi paṭipāṭiyā yācitvāpi pivituṃ vaṭṭati, sabbehi sāmaṇerassa santakameva bhuttaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.Sāmaṇerassa pītattāti ettha ‘‘yāguyā’’tiidaṃ adhikārato labbhati.
Dvīsu pattesūti, is representative. The same method applies even in many. The Aṭṭhakathā says that it is allowable to give what one has obtained to the monks, and having taken what they have obtained, to give it to many others in the manner of giving (pāci. aṭṭha. 265 meaning is similar); to show that same thing, he says, "yāguṃ bhikkhussā"tiādi. It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā that it is allowable for the elders to drink gruel by asking in order: "Āvuso, give your gruel to me," (pāci. aṭṭha. 265) since all have eaten what belongs to the novice. Sāmaṇerassa pītattāti, here, "yāguyā, of the gruel" is obtained from the context.
1500.Imassāti pātheyyataṇḍulahārakassa.‘‘Na visesatā’’ti iminā visuṃ avattabbataṃ dīpeti.
1500.Imassāti, of this carrying of travel rice. "Na visesatā"ti, with this, he indicates that there is no need to speak separately.
1501.Assa visesassāti yathāvuttavinicchayavisesassa visuṃ vattabbabhāveti seso.Tassāti sāmaṇerataṇḍulahārakassa bhikkhussa.Sālayabhāvanti attanā haṭataṇḍulesu parikkhīṇesu ‘‘idaṃ amhākampi padassatī’’ti sālayabhāvo. Chāyādīnamatthāya gayhamānāya sākhāya imissā phalaṃ khāditukāmatāya sati khādanārahanti ālayassa kātuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā ayampi avisesoti viññāyati, tattha sambhavantaṃ pana visesaṃ dassetumāhāti vattuṃ yujjati.
1501.Assa visesassāti, there is no need to speak separately of the specific decision as stated, is understood. Tassāti, of the monk who carries the novice's rice. Sālayabhāvanti, when his own taken rice is depleted, the quality of being attached, thinking, "this will be shown to us too." It is understood that this too is not different, since if there is a desire to eat the fruit of a branch taken for the sake of shade, etc., there can be attachment, thinking that it is worthy of being eaten. But it is fitting to say that he speaks to show the difference that could occur there.
1502-4.Niccāletuṃ na sakkotīti niccāletvā sakkharā apanetuṃ na sakkoti.Celakoti cūḷasāmaṇero. Pakkakālasmiṃ vivaritvā pakkatā ñātabbāti yojanā.Pi-saddo pana-saddatthe.Oropetvāti uddhanato oropetvā. Pubbataṇḍuladhovanatthāya katapaṭiggahaṇasseva pamāṇattā āha‘‘na pacchassa paṭiggahaṇakāraṇa’’nti.Assāti bhojanassa.
1502-4.Niccāletuṃ na sakkotīti, he cannot constantly stir and remove the gravel. Celakoti, a small novice. The construction is that the cooked state should be known by opening it at the time of cooking. The word pi is in the sense of pana. Oropetvāti, having lowered (it) from the hearth. Because the receiving done for the sake of washing the rice previously is the measure, he says, "na pacchassa paṭiggahaṇakāraṇa"nti. Assāti, of the meal.
1505.Kāritantassa dvikammakattā āha‘‘uddhanaṃ suddhabhājana’’nti, uddhaneti vuttaṃ hoti.
1505.Because the action is done by two people, he says, "uddhanaṃ suddhabhājana"nti, uddhanaṃ has been said.
1506.Kocīti anupasampanno.Tena bhikkhunāti uddhanaṃ suddhabhājanaṃ āropetvā yena aggi kato, tena bhikkhunā. Idañca upalakkhaṇaṃ aññenapi na kātabbattā.
1506.Kocīti, a non-ordained person. Tena bhikkhunāti, by that monk who made the fire after placing the uddhanaṃ in a clean vessel. And this is representative, because it should not be done by anyone else.
1507.Pacchāti taṇḍulapakkhepato pacchā.Taṃyāguṃ.Sace pacatīti aggiṃ karonto pacati.Sāmapākā na muccatīti taṃ yāguṃ pivanto sāmapākadukkaṭato na muccati.
1507.Pacchāti, after the rice is put in. Taṃyāguṃ, that gruel. Sace pacatīti, while making a fire, he cooks. Sāmapākā na muccatīti, while drinking that gruel, he is not freed from the dukkata of sāmapāka.
1508.Valliyā sahatatthavalliyaṃ jātaṃ phalaṃkiñciīsakampi cāleti, tato laddhaṃ kiñci phalaṃtassevabhikkhuno na vaṭṭatīti yojanā, taṃ paribhuñjato durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.Tassevātievakārena aññesaṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.
1508.Together with the creeper, even a little fruit born tatthavalliyaṃ, on that creeper, even a little fruit obtained from that is not allowable tassevabhikkhuno, for that monk; the construction is that, the intention is that there is a durupaciṇṇa dukkata for one who uses it. By the evakāra in Tassevā, he indicates that it is allowable for others.
1509.Parāmaṭṭhunti āmasituṃ.Apassayitunti avalambituṃ, apassanaṃ vā kātuṃ.‘‘Kirā’’ti iminā kevalaṃmahāpaccariyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 265) vuttabhāvaṃ sūceti.
1509.Parāmaṭṭhunti, to touch. Apassayitunti, to lean on, or to make a support. "Kirā"ti, with this, he indicates that it was said only in the Mahāpaccariyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1510-1.Tatthāti tasmiṃ tele. Hatthena saṇḍāsaggahaṇaṃamuñcantena.Taṃtelaṃ.
1510-1.Tatthāti, in that oil. Taking hold of the tongs with his hand amuñcantena, without releasing. Taṃtelaṃ, that oil.
1515-6.Loṇakiccanti alavaṇaṭṭhāne loṇena kātabbakiccaṃ. Sannihitasesakālikasammissaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ viya samuddodakassa asannidhibhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yāvajīvikasaṅkhāta’’ntiādi.Kālavinimmuttanti akālikaṃ, catūsu kālikesu asaṅgahitanti attho.
1515-6. Loṇakicca means the task to be done with salt in a place where there is no salt. To show that seawater is not always available like the yāvajīvika mixed with stored remaining kālikas, he said, "called yāvajīvika," etc. Kālavinimmutta means akālika, not included in the four kālikas; that is the meaning.
1517.Himassa karakāti himodakassa muttā viya patthinasakkharā.Bahalampi cāti pakkhittaṭṭhāne mukhe vā kaddamavaṇṇassa apaññāyanappamāṇabahalaṃ pānīyañca. Appaṭiggahitaṃvaṭṭati. Sace kaddamavaṇṇaṃ paññāyati, na vaṭṭatīti. Yathāha ‘‘sace pana mukhe ca hatthe ca laggati, na vaṭṭati, paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1517. Himassa karakā means hail, frozen water like scattered pearls. Bahalampi cā means thick water, the colour of mud, unrecognisably thick, in the place where it is thrown or in the mouth. It is allowable if unaccepted. If the colour of mud is recognisable, it is not allowable. As he said, "If it sticks to the mouth and hand, it is not allowable; it should be accepted and then used" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265).
1518.Kasitaṭṭhāneti kaṭṭhaṭṭhāne.Na vaṭṭatiappaṭiggahitaṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha.
1518. Kasitaṭṭhāne means a place that has been dug. Na vaṭṭati if unaccepted. Thus, everywhere.
1519.Sobbhodukkhogāhanajalāsayo. ‘‘Āvāṭo’’ti keci.Kakudhoti ajjuno.
1937. Sobbho is a deep lake, a reservoir of suffering. Some say "Āvāṭo". Kakudho means Arjuna.
1520.Pānīyassa ghaṭeti pānīyaghaṭe.Taṃpānīyaghaṭaṃ.
1520. Pānīyassa ghaṭe means in a water pot. Taṃ means that water pot.
1521.Vāsatthāya pupphānivāsapupphāni. Tatthāti tasmiṃ pānīyaghaṭe.Kamallikāsūti pāṭalikusumādīhipi saha kaṇṭakamallikāsu.Dinnāsūti pānīye pakkhittāsu.
1521. Vāsatthāya pupphāni means vāsapupphāni, fragrant flowers. Tatthā means in that water pot. Kamallikāsū means among kaṇṭakamallikās, along with pāṭalikusumādī. Dinnāsū means those put in the water.
1522.Visatīti antogalaṃ pavisati. Tenevaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘appaṭiggahetvā ṭhapitaṃ paṭiggahetabba’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265) vuttaṃ. Idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ ‘‘aññatra udakadantaponā’’ti (pāci. 266)pāḷiyāvirujjhatīti ce? Na virujjhati. Sā hi kevalaṃ dantakiccaṃ sandhāya vuttā, idaṃ rasaṃ sandhāya vuttanti. Teneva tadanantaraṃ ‘‘ajānantassa rase paviṭṭhepi āpattiyeva. Acittakañhi idaṃ sikkhāpada’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 265) vuttaṃ. Tassa sikkhāpadassa acittakatā ‘‘appaṭiggahitake paṭiggahitasaññī’’tiādikāyapāḷiyākappiyasaññinopi pācittiyassa vuttattā viññāyati. Pasannodakassa pana appaṭiggahetvāpi pātabbatāya dantakaṭṭhena sadisattā ekayoganiddiṭṭhānaṃ saheva pavattīti viññāyati. Udakassa ca dantaponassa ca tulyadosena bhavitabbanti.
1522. Visatī means it enters the throat. Therefore, in the Aṭṭhakathā, it is said, "What has been placed without being accepted should be accepted" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). If this statement of the Aṭṭhakathā contradicts the Pāḷi, "except for water for cleaning teeth" (pāci. 266)? It does not contradict. That (Pāḷi) was said referring only to the task of cleaning the teeth, this (Aṭṭhakathā) was said referring to the taste. Therefore, immediately after that, it is said, "Even if the taste enters without one knowing, there is still an offence. For this is a sikkhāpada without intention" (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). The unintentional nature of that sikkhāpada is known from the Pāḷi, "thinking that the unaccepted is accepted," where a Pācittiya (offence) is stated even for one who perceives it as allowable. However, since clear water can be drunk even without accepting it, it is known that it proceeds together with the tooth-stick, as they are specified in one combined passage. And there should be equal fault for water and tooth-cleaning water.
1523.Muttodakasiṅghāṇikādidravaassukhīrādidravassa āpodhātuppakārattā, kaṇṇamalādino ghanadabbassa pathavidhātuppakārattā‘‘sarīraṭṭhesu bhūtesū’’ti iminā khīrādimāha.‘‘Ki’’nti idaṃ na vaṭṭatīti padenapi yojetabbaṃ.Kappākappiyamaṃsānanti ettha ‘‘sattāna’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati.
1523. Since liquids like saliva from mucus, tears, and milk are forms of the water element, and solid substances like earwax are forms of the earth element, ‘‘sarīraṭṭhesu bhūtesū’’ means he is referring to milk etc. with this. ‘‘Ki’’ means this should also be connected with the word 'not allowable'. Kappākappiyamaṃsāna here, "of beings" is obtained from the context.
1524.Loṇanti ettha ‘‘etaṃ sabbampī’’ti idaṃ adhikārato labbhati.
1524. Loṇa here, "this entire thing" is obtained from the context.
1525.Etthāti etesu yathāvuttesu kaṇṇamalādīsu.
1525. Etthā means in these earwax etc. as stated.
1528.Cattārivikaṭānīti mahāvikaṭaṃ nāma gūthaṃ, mattikā, muttaṃ, chārikā cāti vuttāni cattāri vikaṭāni. Tāni hi viruddhāni sappavisāni katāni vihatānīti‘‘vikaṭānī’’ti vuccanti. Natthi dāyako etthātinadāyakaṃ,ṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ. ‘‘Na a no mā alaṃ paṭisedhe’’ti vuttattā paṭisedhavācināna-saddena samāso, ‘‘adāyake’’ti iminā anatthantaraṃ. Idha dubbaco ca asamattho ca asanto nāmātiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 265; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā, atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ. Idaṃ kālodissaṃ nāma.
1528. Cattāri vikaṭānī means the four vikaṭas that were said: excrement is called mahāvikaṭa, clay, urine, and ashes. Since they are contrary, made like snake venom, and spoiled, they are called ‘‘vikaṭānī’’. Natthi dāyako etthāti means nadāyakaṃ, ṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ, nadāyakaṃ ṭhāne (in a place where there is no giver). Because it is said, ‘‘Na a no mā alaṃ paṭisedhe’’ti, the compound is with the word na, which denotes prohibition; ‘‘adāyake’’ti is synonymous with this. Here, the Aṭṭhakathā (pāci. aṭṭha. 265; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā, atthato samānaṃ) said "dubbaco ca asamattho ca asanto nāmāti". This is called an occasional cause.
1529.Pathavinti akappiyapathaviṃ.Tarunti allarukkhaṃ. Iminā sappadaṭṭhakāle asati kappiyakārake vikaṭatthāya attanā ca kattabbanti dasseti.
1529. Pathavi means unallowable earth. Taru means a fresh tree. By this, he shows that in the event of a snake bite, if there is no allowable agent, one should oneself apply the vikaṭa.
1530.Acchedagāhatoti vilumpitvā gaṇhanato.‘‘Tassā’’ti idaṃ sabbehi hetupadehi yujjati.Tassāti appaṭiggahitassāti attho. Aparassa abhikkhukassa dānena cāti yojanā.‘‘Abhikkhukassā’’ti pana visesanena upasampannassa dinne paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti dīpeti.Sabbanti yathāvuttaṃ kāyena gahaṇādippakārassa kalyaṃ gahitaṃ.Evanti iminā niyāmena.
1530. Acchedagāhato means because of seizing after robbing. ‘‘Tassā’’ this is connected with all the reason-words. Tassā means of the unaccepted. And the connection is: by giving to another non-monk. ‘‘Abhikkhukassā’’ however, by the specification "non-monk," it indicates that the acceptance does not cease when given to one who is fully ordained. Sabba means the manner of receiving with the body etc., as stated, is well taken. Eva means by this rule.
1531.Durupaciṇṇeti duṭṭhu upaciṇṇe durāmaṭṭhe, appaṭiggahitassa āmisabhattabhājanādino kīḷāvasena hatthena parāmasane ca tatthajātakaphaliniṃ sākhāya vā valliyā vā gahetvā cālane cāti attho.Uggahitassa gahaṇeti appaṭiggahitabhāvaṃ ñatvāva gahitassa kassaci vatthuno paṭiggahaṇe ca.Antovutthe cāti akappiyakuṭiyā anto ṭhapetvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpite ca.Sayaṃpakke cāti yattha katthaci attanā pakke ca.Antopakke cāti akappiyakuṭiyā antoyeva pakke ca. Dukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭhanti sambandho.
1531. Durupaciṇṇe means badly accumulated, badly touched, and it means touching food or alms-bowl that has not been accepted, in a playful manner with the hand; and shaking a fruit-bearing branch or vine that grows there. Uggahitassa gahaṇe means accepting some object that has been received after knowing that it has not been accepted. Antovutthe cā means after placing it inside an unallowable hut, and making the dawn rise. Sayaṃpakke cā means after cooking it oneself anywhere. Antopakke cā means after cooking it inside an unallowable hut. Dukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭhanti is the connection.
1532-3.Paṭiggahitake tasmiṃ paṭiggahitasaññissāti sambandho.Dantaponaṃdantakaṭṭhaṃ.
1532-3. Paṭiggahitake tasmiṃ paṭiggahitasaññissāti is the connection. Dantaponaṃ means a tooth-stick.
1534.Bhikkhunīnanti bhikkhuno ca bhikkhuniyā ca bhikkhunīnaṃ, ekadesasarūpekaseso.Etthaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Vinicchayo navamajjhimatherabhikkhunīnaṃ yato avisesena icchitabbako,tatotasmā hetunā sakalo ayaṃ vinicchayo asamāsato mayā kathitoti yojanā. Kusalattikādīsu viya atthasākalyassa atthasaṅkhepatova vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā ‘‘sakalo’’ti vatvāpi kathāya vitthāritabhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘asamāsato’’ti.
1534. Bhikkhunīna means of a monk, a nun, and of nuns; a single remaining (word) with similar forms in some parts. Ettha means in this sikkhāpada. Since the judgment is desired impartially from both junior and senior nuns, tato for that reason, this entire judgment has been spoken by me without abbreviation, is the connection. Though it could be said that the meaning is complete in brief, as in the case of the wholesome triad etc., to show the expanded nature of the talk even after saying "entirely," he says ‘‘asamāsato’’.
Dantaponakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Tooth-Stick Discourse.
Bhojanavaggo catuttho.
The Fourth, Food, Section.
1535.‘‘Acelakādīna’’ntiādīsu ‘‘acelako nāma yo koci paribbājakasamāpanno naggo’’ti (pāci. 271)padabhājanevuttaṃ,tadaṭṭhakathāya‘‘paribbājakasamāpannoti pabbajjaṃ samāpanno’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 269) vuttaṃ, tasmā acelakapabbajjamupagatoyevettha acelako nāma.Ādi-saddena ‘‘paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā’’ti (pāci. 270)mātikā-gate dve saṅgaṇhāti. Imesu ca dvīsu ‘‘paribbājako nāma bhikkhuñca sāmaṇerañca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājakasamāpanno’’ti (pāci. 271) vuttoparibbājakonāma. ‘‘Bhikkhuniñca sikkhamānañca sāmaṇeriñca ṭhapetvā yā kāci paribbājikasamāpannā’’ti (pāci. 271) vuttāparibbājikānāmāti gahetabbā. Paribbājakā panettha channāyeva gahetabbā.Dentassāti ettha ‘‘bhikkhussā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati, ettha ‘‘kāyādinā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘dadeyyāti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā detī’’ti (pāci. 271).
1535. In ‘‘Acelakādīna’’ etc., in the Padabhājana, it is said "Acelaka means anyone who is a wandering ascetic who is naked" (pāci. 271), in Tadaṭṭhakathāya, "paribbājakasamāpannoti pabbajjaṃ samāpanno" is said (pāci. aṭṭha. 269), therefore here acelaka means only one who has undertaken the ascetic life of an acelaka. The Ādi-word includes the two found in the Mātikā: "to a wandering ascetic or a female wandering ascetic" (pāci. 270). And among these two, paribbājako means the one who is said to be "paribbājako nāma bhikkhuñca sāmaṇerañca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājakasamāpanno" (pāci. 271). Paribbājikā should be taken to mean "yā kāci paribbājikasamāpannā" (pāci. 271), except for bhikkhuniñca sikkhamānañca sāmaṇeriñca. Here, only the paribbājakas must be understood as concealed. In Dentassā, "of a monk" is obtained from the context; here "with the body etc." is the supplement. As he said, "dadeyyāti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā detī" (pāci. 271).
1536.Tikapācittiyanti titthiye titthiyasaññī, vematiko, atitthiyasaññīti tike pācittiyattayaṃ.
1536. Tikapācittiya means the three Pācittiya offences for one who thinks a titthiya is a titthiya, one who is doubtful, and one who thinks a non-titthiya is a titthiya.
1537.Atitthiye titthiyasaññissa, vematikassa ca tassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1537. Dukkata is for a monk who thinks that a non-titthiya is a titthiya or who is doubtful.
1538-9.Tesanti titthiyānaṃ.Bahilepananti bahisarīre limpitabbaṃ kiñci dentassa.Tesaṃtitthiyānaṃsantikesamīpe attano bhattapattādikaṃbhojanaṃṭhapetvā ‘‘bhojanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadantassa ca anāpattīti yojanā. ‘‘Samuṭṭhānaṃ eḷakūpama’’nti padacchedo.
1538-9. Tesa means of the titthiyas. Bahilepana means giving something to be smeared on the outer body. There is no offence for one who places his own food, bowl etc. Santike samīpe tesaṃ titthiyānaṃ bhojanaṃ and says, "Take the food". "Samuṭṭhānaṃ eḷakūpama" is the word division.
Acelakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Acelaka Discourse.
1540-2.Bhikkhu bhikkhuno yaṃ kiñci āmisaṃ dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vāti yojanā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Ehāvuso, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisissāmā’’ti (pāci. 275)sikkhāpadevuttanayeneva vatvā yena saddhiṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho, tassa bhikkhussa khādanīyādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci āmisaṃ dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vāti.
1540-2. Bhikkhu bhikkhuno yaṃ kiñci āmisaṃ dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vāti is the connection. What is said? After saying in the same way as said in the sikkhāpada, "Ehāvuso, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisissāmā" (pāci. 275), whether he causes some alms of the kind of edibles etc. to be given to that monk with whom he entered the village for alms, or whether he does not cause it to be given.
tappaccayātesaṃ itthiyāsaddhiṃ vacanādīnaṃ anācārānaṃ paccayā gantuṃ niyojetīti.Tappaccayāti ‘‘uyyojanamattasmi’’nti visesanaṃ.Paṭhamena cāti etthaca-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto ‘‘uyyojanamattasmiñcā’’ti yojetabbo.Tassāti uyyojakassa.
tappaccayā means he directs to go because of the causes of misconduct such as speech with those women. Tappaccayā is a specification for "just the act of sending". In Paṭhamena cā, the word ca is unsuitably used, it should be connected as "uyyojanamattasmiñcā". Tassā means of the sender.
Assāti uyyojitassa, avayavasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ.Upacārasmiṃ atikkanteti vakkhamānalakkhaṇe dassanūpacāre vā savanūpacāre vā atikkanteti attho, bhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ. Punaassāti upacārassa. Dvādasaratanapariyosānaṃ, tadantogadhaṃ pākārādi eva vā upacārassasīmānāma.
Assā means of the one who is sent, a possessive word in the sense of a part. Upacārasmiṃ atikkante means when the upacāra of seeing or the upacāra of hearing, whose characteristics will be spoken of, has passed; a locative in the sense of state. Again, assā means of the upacāra. Dvādasaratanapariyosānaṃ, tadantogadhaṃ pākārādi eva vā upacārassa sīmā nāma. Twelve ratanas is the limit, or a wall etc. included within that is called the boundary of the upacāra.
1543.Taṃ sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘dassane’’tiādi. Ajjhokāse dassane upacārassa dvādasa hatthā pamāṇaṃ desitāti yojanā. Savane ca ajjhokāse evaṃ savanūpacārassa ajjhokāse dvādasa hatthā pamāṇaṃ desitāti yojanā, savane ca upacārassa avadhi dvādasahatthappamāṇamevāti vuttanti attho.Na cetareti itarasmiṃ anajjhokāse evaṃ upacārassa pamāṇaṃ dvādasahatthā na ca desitā, kiṃ nu byāvadhākarā kuṭṭādayo upacārassa pamāṇanti desitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañcetaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace pana antarā kuṭṭadvārapākārādayo honti, tehi antaritabhāvoyeva dassanūpacārātikkamo, tassa vasena āpatti veditabbā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 276). Idha upacāradvaye samānepi uyyojitamavadhiantaṃ sandhāya asavanūpacāraṃ vuttanti viññāyati.
1543. To show that in its essence, he says ‘‘dassane’’ etc. It is taught that in an open space, the measure of the upacāra of seeing is twelve hatthas. And it is taught that in hearing also in an open space, similarly the measure of the upacāra of hearing is twelve hatthas, is the connection; it means it has been said that the limit of the upacāra in hearing is also a measure of twelve hatthas. Na cetare thus, the measure of the upacāra is not taught as twelve hatthas in the other, non-open space; but it has been said that the walls etc. that cause obstruction are the measure of the upacāra. And this has been said in the Aṭṭhakathā: "But if there are walls, doors, ramparts etc. in between, the transgression of the sight-range occurs only if they are obstructed; the offence should be understood according to that" (pāci. aṭṭha. 276). Here, it should be understood that the absence of hearing range has been spoken of with reference to the limit reached by the one who is sent, even though the two upacāras are the same.
1544.‘‘Tikapācittīti upasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīhi tikapācittiyaṃ.Itareti anupasampanne.Tikadukkaṭanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Itareti sāmaṇereyevā’’tinissandehelikhitaṃ. Etassevatthassa vajirabuddhināpi vuttabhāvo dassito. Tathādassanaṃ pañcasahadhammikesu idhādhippetamanupasampannaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ce, yujjati. Aññathāpāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu‘‘anupasampanne’’ti sāmaññena niddiṭṭhattā gahaṭṭhānupasampannampi tathā uyyojentassa anāpatti na vattabbāti amhākaṃ khanti.
1544. ‘‘Tikapācittī means the three Pācittiya offences for one who thinks that a fully ordained monk is a fully ordained monk, one who is doubtful, and one who thinks that one who is not fully ordained is fully ordained. Itare means in the case of one who is not fully ordained. Tikadukkaṭa means the three Dukkata offences for one who thinks that one who is not fully ordained is a fully ordained monk, one who is doubtful, and one who thinks that one who is not fully ordained is not fully ordained. In Nissandehe, "bhikkhusāmaṇerāna" is written. The fact that this meaning has also been spoken by Vajirabuddhi is shown. If that showing is said with reference to one who is not fully ordained, which is intended here among the five sahadhammikas, it is appropriate. Otherwise, since anupasampanne is specified generally in the Pāḷis and Aṭṭhakathās, we are content that it should not be said that there is no offence for one who similarly sends a householder who is not fully ordained.
Ubhinnanti upasampannānupasampannānaṃ.Nissandehepana ‘‘bhikkhusāmaṇerāna’’nti likhitaṃ.Kalisāsanāropaneti etthakalīti kodho, tassa sāsanaṃ āṇākalisāsanaṃ,tassa āropanaṃ pavattanaṃ kalisāsanāropanaṃ, tasmiṃ, kodhavasena ṭhānanisajjādīsu dosaṃ dassetvā ‘‘passatha bho imassa ṭhānaṃ nisajjaṃ ālokitaṃ vilokitaṃ, khāṇuko viya tiṭṭhati, sunakho viya nisīdati, makkaṭo viya ito cito ca viloketī’’ti evaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imināpi ubbāḷho pakkameyyā’’ti amanāpavacanassa bhaṇaneti vuttaṃ hoti.
Ubhinna means of the fully ordained and the not fully ordained. In Nissandehe, however, "bhikkhusāmaṇerāna" is written. Kalisāsanāropane here, kalī means anger, its command is kalisāsanaṃ, the causing of it is kalisāsanāropanaṃ, tasmiṃ, kalisāsanāropane (in the causing of the command of anger), it means after showing fault in sitting places etc. out of anger, saying amanāpavacanaṃ "Look at this person's seat, posture, looking around, gazing, he stands like a stump, sits like a dog, looks around here and there like a monkey," so that "perhaps even by this he might leave in distress," is said.
1545.Uyyojentassakiccenāti vihārapālakādīnaṃ bhojanaharaṇādikiccena pesentassa, imassa upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘anāpatti ‘ubho ekato na yāpessāmā’ti uyyojetī’’tiādinā (pāci. 278) anāpattivārāgatā sabbepi pakārā gahetabbā.
1545. Uyyojentassa kiccenā means for one who sends with a task, such as bringing food, for the vihārapāla etc.; since this is illustrative, all the types that come under the exception from offence should be taken, beginning with "there is no offence for one who sends (him) thinking 'we will not live together'" (pāci. 278).
Uyyojanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sending Discourse.
1546.Khuddaketi ettha ‘‘sayanighare’’ti seso upari ‘‘asayanighare tassa, sayanigharasaññino’’ti vakkhamānattā labbhati. ‘‘Mahallake’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Piṭṭhisaṅghāṭato aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇaṃ yassa vemajjhe hoti, īdise khuddake sayanighareti attho.Piṭṭhivaṃsanti piṭṭhivaṃsena niyamitaṃ gehamajjhaṃ. Tenāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā’ti iminā majjhātikkamaṃ dassetī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 280).Sabhojaneti saha bhojanehīti sabhojanaṃ, tasmiṃ sabhojane. Atha vāsabhojaneti sabhoge. Rāgapariyuṭṭhitassa purisassa hi itthī bhogo, itthiyā ca puriso, methunarāgena sārattapurisitthisahiteti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘sabhojanaṃ nāma kulaṃ itthī ceva hoti puriso ca, itthī ca puriso ca ubho anikkhantā honti, ubho avītarāgā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 281). Iminā pariyuṭṭhitassa methunarāgaggino taṅkhaṇe nibbattabhāvo dīpito.Kuleti ghare.
1546. Khuddake here, "sayanighare" should be supplemented, since it will be said above, "asayanighare tassa, sayanigharasaññino". This same method (should be applied) in "Mahallake" too. It means a small resting place that has a width of one and a half hatthas from the back-ridge in the middle. Piṭṭhivaṃsa means the middle of the house, limited by the back-ridge. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā says, "by 'piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā' he shows the transgression of the middle" (pāci. aṭṭha. 280). Sabhojane means with food, in that sabhojana. Or sabhojane means with enjoyment. For a man who is overcome with lust, a woman is an object of enjoyment, and for a woman, a man; it means together with a man and woman who are passionate with the lust of sexual intercourse. As the Padabhājana says, "sabhojanaṃ nāma kulaṃ itthī ceva hoti puriso ca, itthī ca puriso ca ubho anikkhantā honti, ubho avītarāgā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 281). By this, the arising at that moment of the fire of sexual lust of one who is overcome is indicated. Kule means in the house.
1547.Hatthapāsanti aḍḍhateyyaratanappamāṇadesaṃ.Piṭṭhisaṅghāṭakassa cāti dvārasabandhassa ca.Sayanassāti sayanti etthāti sayanaṃ, tassa, āsanne ṭhāne yo nisīdati sabhojane kule, ‘‘tassā’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ, sayanassa samīpe ṭhāne yo nisīdatīti attho.Mahallaketi pubbe vuttappamāṇato mahante sayanighare. ‘‘Īdisañca sayanigharaṃ mahācatusālādīsu hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 280)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
1547. Hatthapāsa means a distance of two and a half ratanas. Piṭṭhisaṅghāṭakassa cā means also of the door jamb. Sayanassā means sayana, that on which one lies; tassa should be connected with "in a family frequented for meals, who sits in a nearby place," meaning one who sits in a place near the sleeping place. Mahallake means in a large sleeping chamber, larger than the measure stated earlier. It is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Such a sleeping chamber exists in great assembly halls and the like" (pāci. aṭṭha. 280).
1548.Sayanametassa atthītisayanī,sayanī ca taṃ gharañcāti viggaho.Tatthāti sayanighare.
1548. Sayanī means a house that has a sleeping place; the compound is sayanī ca taṃ gharañcāti. Tatthā means in that sleeping chamber.
1549-50.Dutiye satīti dutiye bhikkhumhi sati. Yathāhaanāpattivāre‘‘bhikkhu dutiyo hotī’’ti (pāci. 283).Vītarāgesūti vītarāgapariyuṭṭhānesu.Vuttalakkhaṇaṃ padesanti khuddakamahantasenāsane vuttalakkhaṇapadesa.Anatikkamma nisinnassāti anatikkamitvā nisīdato.
1549-50. Dutiye satī means when there is a second bhikkhu. As it says in the Anāpattivāra: "A bhikkhu is the second" (pāci. 283). Vītarāgesū means in places devoid of lust. Vuttalakkhaṇaṃ padesa means a place with the characteristics described for small and large lodgings. Anatikkamma nisinnassā means for one who sits without going beyond.
Sabhojanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Talk on Food.
1552.Tesanti dvinnaṃ aniyatasikkhāpadānaṃ.Esanti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ rahopaṭicchannarahonisajjasikkhāpadānaṃ,ayameva visesoti anantarasikkhāpadena samuṭṭhānabhāvasaṅkhāto ayaṃ viseso dīpitoti yojanā.
1552. Tesa means of these two aniyata rules. Esa means of these two rules concerning secret, covered, and secluded sitting, ayameva viseso means this very difference, defined as the condition of arising with the immediately preceding rule, is shown, is the connection.
Rahopaṭicchannarahonisajjakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Talk on Secret, Covered, and Secluded Sitting.
1553-6.Vuttoti nimantito.Santaṃ bhikkhunti ‘‘kulaṃ upasaṅkamissāmī’’ti yasmiṃ padese cittaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa sāmantā dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhitaṃ bhikkhunti attho. Yathāha ‘‘yattha ṭhitassa kulāni payirupāsanacittaṃ uppannaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ passe vā abhimukhe vā passati, yassa ca sakkā hoti pakativacanena ārocetuṃ, ayaṃ santo nāmā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 298). Ettha yaṃ dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhitena sotuṃ sakkā bhaveyya, taṃpakativacanaṃnāma.Anāpucchāti ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmassa gharaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vā ‘‘cārittaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti vā īdisena vacanena anāpucchitvā.Cārittaṃ āpajjeyya ceti yadi sañcareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññatra samayāti ‘‘tatthāyaṃ samayo, cīvaradānasamayo cīvarakārasamayo’’ti (pāci. 299)sikkhāpadeanupaññattivasena vuttā duvidhā samayā aññasmiṃ kāle.
1553-6. Vutto means invited. Santaṃ bhikkhu means a bhikkhu standing within twelve hatthas of the area where the thought has arisen, "I will go to that family." As it says, "One for whom, while standing, the thought arises 'families will attend on me', from there onward, whom he sees, either in front or facing, and to whom it is possible to announce with ordinary speech, this is called 'present'" (pāci. aṭṭha. 298). Here, that which could be heard by one standing within twelve hatthas is called pakativacanaṃ. Anāpucchā means without asking, with such words as, "I am going to so-and-so's house" or "I will ask for permission to go on cāritta." Cārittaṃ āpajjeyya ce means if he should wander about. Aññatra samayā means at a time other than the two kinds of occasions stated in the sikkhāpada as an exception: "There is this occasion, an occasion for giving robes, an occasion for making robes" (pāci. 299).
‘‘ṭhapetvā’’tiādi.‘‘Avītivatte majjhanhe’’ti iminā purebhattaṃ, pacchābhattañca saṅgahitaṃ. Ettha capurebhattaṃ pacchābhattanti yena bhattena nimantito, tasmiṃ abhutte vā bhutte vāti attho. Yathāha ‘‘purebhattaṃ nāma yena nimantito, taṃ abhuttāvī. Pacchābhattaṃ nāma yena nimantito, taṃ antamaso kusaggenapi bhuttaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. 300)padabhājanevuttaṃ.Aññassa gharanti nimantitato aññassa gehaṃ. Gharūpacārokkamane dukkaṭanti sambandho, attanā gatagehassa upacārokkamane dukkaṭanti attho. Paṭhamena pādenāti sambandho.
‘‘Ṭhapetvā’’ etc. ‘‘Avītivatte majjhanhe’’ includes the time before and after the meal. Here, purebhattaṃ pacchābhatta means whether the meal for which he was invited has been eaten or not. As it says in the Padabhājana: " Purebhattaṃ means he has not eaten that for which he was invited. Pacchābhattaṃ means he has eaten at least with the tip of a kusa grass that for which he was invited" (pāci. 300). Aññassa ghara means another's house than the one he was invited to. The connection is that there is a dukkaṭa for entering the vicinity of the house, meaning there is a dukkaṭa for entering the vicinity of a house one has gone to. This is the connection with the first line.
Gharummāreti aññassa gehummāre. Gharūpacāre dukkaṭaṃ sandhāya‘‘aparampi cā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Samatikkame’’ti iminā saha ‘‘gharummāre’’ti padaṃ ‘‘gharummārassā’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmena yojetabbaṃ.
Gharummāre means on the threshold of another's house. ‘‘Aparampi cā’’ is said with reference to the dukkaṭa for the vicinity of the house. Along with "Samatikkame," the word "gharummāre" should be connected by changing the case to "gharummārassā."
1557.Ṭhitaṭṭhāneti yattha ṭhitassa gamanacittaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmiṃ ṭhāne dvādasahatthabbhantareti idaṃ yathāvuttaniyāmeneva gahetabbaṃ.Oloketvāti ubhayapassaṃ, abhimukhañca oloketvā. ‘‘Yaṃ passe vā abhimukhe vā passatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 298)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
1557. Ṭhitaṭṭhāne means in the place where, while standing, the thought of going arose, this should be taken in accordance with the rule stated above. Oloketvā means having looked both ways and in front. As it says in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Whom he sees, either in front or facing" (pāci. aṭṭha. 298).
1558.Dūreti dvādasahatthato dūramevāha. Ito cito ca gavesitvā ārocane kiccaṃ natthīti yojanā.
1558. Dūre means just far away from twelve hatthas. There is no need to search here and there and announce, is the connection.
1559.Na dosoti anāpatti.Samayeti ettha ‘‘anāpucchato’’ti seso. Ettha ca upari ca ‘‘na doso’’ti paccekaṃ yujjati. Santaṃ bhikkhunti sambandho.Gharenāti aññassa gharena, ettha ‘‘gharūpacārena cā’’ti seso.Ārāmaṃ gacchatoti ettha tena maggenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1559. Na doso means no offense. Samaye here implies "to one who does not ask permission." And here and above, "na doso" connects separately. Santaṃ bhikkhunti is the connection. Gharenā means by another's house, here implies "and by the vicinity of the house." Ārāmaṃ gacchato here implies by that path.
1560.‘‘Tena maggenā’’ti ca ‘‘gacchato’’ti ca padadvayaṃ ‘‘titthiyānaṃ passaya’’nti ca ‘‘bhikkhunipassaya’’nti ca ubhayatthatathā-saddena labbhati. Tena gharena, gharūpacārena vā gantabbamaggena titthiyārāmaṃ vā bhikkhunipassayaṃ vā gacchato anāpattīti attho. Āpadāya gacchatīti yojanā. Jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyāāpadā. Āsanasālaṃ vāti sīhaḷadīpe viya bhikkhūnaṃ bhuñjanatthāya yattha dānapatīhi āsanāni paññāpīyanti, taṃ āsanasālaṃ vā, bhojanasālanti attho. ‘‘Āpadāyāsanasāla’’nti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena yakāralopo.Bhattiyassa gharanti nimantitagharaṃ vā salākabhattadāyakānaṃ vā gharaṃ.
1560. The two words "Tena maggenā" and "gacchato" are obtained with the word "tathā" in both "titthiyānaṃ passaya" and "bhikkhunipassaya." Meaning, there is no offense for going by that house or by the path in the vicinity of the house, to a titthiya monastery or a bhikkhunī residence. Āpadāya gacchatīti is the connection, danger is an impediment to life or the holy life. Āsanasālaṃ vā means, as in Sri Lanka, that hall where seats are arranged by donors for the bhikkhus to eat, that is, a dining hall. Due to the constraints of verse, the yakāra is dropped in "Āpadāyāsanasāla" when it should be "Āpadāyāsanasālaṃ." Bhattiyassa ghara means the house he was invited to or the house of those who give ticket food.
1561.Pavesanaṃkriyaṃ. Anāpucchanaṃakriyaṃ. Acittakasamuṭṭhānamissakattā‘‘acitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Kusalākusalābyākatānaṃ aññataracittasamaṅginā āpajjitabbaṃ sandhāya‘‘ticittañcā’’ti vuttaṃ.
1561. Pavesanaṃ is kriyaṃ. Anāpucchanaṃ is akriyaṃ. Because it arises from a non-deliberate mixture, it is said to be ‘‘acitta’’. ‘‘Ticittañcā’’ is said with reference to incurring it with a mind of one of the three types, wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate.
Cārittakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Talk on Cāritta.
1562.‘‘Sabbā’’ti idaṃ vivaranto ‘‘catumāsapavāraṇā punapavāraṇā niccapavāraṇā’’ti pavāraṇattayaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca ‘‘catumāsapaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbāti gilānapaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbā’’ti (pāci. 307)padabhājanevuttaṃ.Punapavāraṇāca cattāroyeva māse bhesajjena pavāraṇaṃ. Tenāhaaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ‘‘tena hi tvaṃ mahānāma saṅghaṃ aparampi catumāsaṃ bhesajjena pavārehī’’ti.Niccapavāraṇānāma yāvajīvaṃ bhesajjeheva pavāraṇā. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatāaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ‘‘tena hi tvaṃ mahānāma saṅghaṃ yāvajīvaṃ bhesajjena pavārehī’’ti (pāci. 303).
1562. ‘‘Sabbā’’ showing this, he indicates the three kinds of pavāraṇā: "four-month pavāraṇā, repeated pavāraṇā, permanent pavāraṇā." Here it says in the Padabhājana: "A four-month dependence pavāraṇā should be requested, a dependence pavāraṇā for the sick should be requested" (pāci. 307). Punapavāraṇā is a pavāraṇā with medicine for just four months. Therefore he said in the Aṭṭhuppatti: "Then, Mahānāma, invite the Saṅgha again for four months with medicine." Niccapavāraṇā is a pavāraṇā for life with just medicine. And this was said by the Blessed One in the Aṭṭhuppatti: "Then, Mahānāma, invite the Saṅgha for life with medicine" (pāci. 303).
Sabbā cetā pavāraṇā bhesajjapariyantarattipariyantatadubhayapariyantaapariyantavasena catubbidhā honti. Yathāha –
All these pavāraṇās are fourfold by way of being limited by medicine, limited by night, limited by both, and unlimited. As it says –
‘‘Bhesajjapariyantā nāma bhesajjāni pariggahitāni honti ‘ettakehi bhesajjehi pavāremī’ti. Rattipariyantā nāma rattiyo pariggahitāyo honti ‘ettakāsu rattīsu pavāremī’ti. Bhesajjapariyantā ca rattipariyantā ca nāma bhesajjāni ca pariggahitāni honti rattiyo ca pariggahitāyo honti ‘ettakehi bhesajjehi ettakāsu rattīsu pavāremī’ti. Nevabhesajjapariyantā narattipariyantā nāma bhesajjāni ca apariggahitāni honti rattiyo ca apariggahitāyo hontī’’ti (pāci. 307).
"Limited by medicine means the medicines are specified, 'I will invite with this many medicines.' Limited by night means the nights are specified, 'I will invite for this many nights.' Limited by medicine and limited by night means the medicines are specified and the nights are specified, 'I will invite with this many medicines for this many nights.' Not limited by medicine nor limited by night means neither the medicines are specified nor are the nights specified" (pāci. 307).
1563.‘‘Sāditabbā’’ti vutte sādiyanappakāre dassetumāha‘‘viññāpessāmī’’tiādi. Bhesajjampi sati me paccaye viññāpessāmīti yojanā, ‘‘sāditabbā’’ti iminā sambandho. Tadeva byatirekato dassetumāha‘‘na paṭikkhipitabbā’’ti. Paṭikkhepakāraṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘rogodāni na meti cā’’ti.Sātividhā pavāraṇā.
1563. In saying, "Sāditabbā," in order to show the ways of requesting, he says ‘‘viññāpessāmī’’ etc. "I will request medicine when there is a reason for me," is the connection, it is connected with "sāditabbā." In order to show just that by way of exclusion, he says ‘‘na paṭikkhipitabbā’’. In order to show the reason for refusing, he says ‘‘rogodāni na meti cā’’. Sā means those three kinds of pavāraṇā.
1564.Tikapācittiyaṃvuttanti ‘‘tatuttari tatuttarisaññī, vematiko, natatuttarisaññī bhesajjaṃ viññāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 309) vuttaṃ pācittiyattayaṃ. Idhatatuttarīti ettha yehi bhesajjehi pavārito, yāsu ca rattīsu pavārito, tato ce uttari adhikanti attho. Yathāha ‘‘bhesajjapariyante yehi bhesajjehi pavārito hoti, tāni bhesajjāni ṭhapetvā aññāni bhesajjāni viññāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti ca ‘‘rattipariyante yāsu rattīsu pavārito hoti, tā rattiyo ṭhapetvā aññāsu rattīsu viññāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 308) ca. Tattha vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
1564. Tikapācittiyaṃvutta means the threefold pācittiya stated: "One who is sure he has more than enough, one who is doubtful, one who is sure he does not have more than enough, requests medicine, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 309). Here, tatuttarī means more than what he was invited with, with reference to those medicines and those nights. As it says, "In the case of being limited by medicine, having set aside those medicines he was invited with, he requests other medicines, there is an offense of pācittiya," and "In the case of being limited by night, having set aside those nights he was invited for, he requests for other nights, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 308). There it is stated that there is a dukkaṭa for one who is doubtful, is the connection.
1565.Tato catumāsato uttari atirekaṃtatuttari,tatuttari na hotītinatatuttari,natatuttarīti saññā assa atthītinatatuttarisaññī,bhikkhu, tassa anāpattīti yojanā.Yehibhesajjehi pavārito, tāni viññāpentassa anāpattīti saha sesena yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anāpatti yehi bhesajjehi pavārito hoti, tāni bhesajjāni viññāpetī’’ti (pāci. 310). Yena vā yehi bhesajjehi yāsu vā rattīsu pavārito, tato aññampi yathātathaṃ ācikkhitvā bhiyyo viññāpentassa anāpattīti saha sesena yojetabbaṃ.Yathātathaṃ ācikkhitvā bhiyyo viññāpentassāti ettha ‘‘imehi tayā bhesajjehi pavāritamha, amhākañca iminā ca iminā ca bhesajjena attho’ti ācikkhitvā viññāpeti, ‘yāsu tayā rattīsu pavāritamha, tāyo ca rattiyo vītivattā, amhākañca bhesajjena attho’ti ācikkhitvā viññāpetī’’ti (pāci. 310) vacanato yathātathaṃ vatvā adhikaṃ viññāpentassāti attho.
1565. Tatuttari means more than those four months, extra. Natatuttari means not more than that. Natatuttarisaññī means a bhikkhu who has the perception of not being more than that, for him there is no offense, is the connection. There is no offense for one who requests those medicines he was invited with, should be connected with the remainder. As it says, "There is no offense for one who requests those medicines he was invited with" (pāci. 310). There is no offense for one who, having truly declared something else besides those medicines or those nights he was invited with, requests more, should be connected with the remainder. Yathātathaṃ ācikkhitvā bhiyyo viññāpentassā here means, "Having declared, 'We were invited by you with these medicines, and we need this medicine and this medicine,' he requests; 'The nights we were invited by you for have passed, and we need medicine,' having declared, he requests" (pāci. 310), meaning for one who, having spoken truthfully, requests more.
1566.Aññassa bhikkhussa atthāya vā viññāpentassa bhikkhussa anāpattīti yojanā.Ñātakānaṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti ettha ñātakānaṃ santakaṃ viññāpentassa anāpattīti attho. Attano vā dhanena viññāpentassa anāpattīti yojanā. Ettha dhanaṃ nāma taṇḍulādi kappiyavatthu.
1566. There is no offense for a bhikkhu who requests for the sake of another bhikkhu, is the connection. Ñātakānaṃ viññāpentassa anāpattī here means there is no offense for one who requests what belongs to relatives. There is no offense for one who requests with his own wealth, is the connection. Here wealth means kappiya things like rice.
1567.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘viññāpentassā’’ti idaṃ paccāmasati.Ummattakādīnanti visesitabbamapekkhitvā ‘‘viññāpentāna’’nti bahuvacanaṃ kātabbaṃ.
1567. ‘‘Tathā’’ here refers back to "viññāpentassā." The plural "viññāpentāna" should be made omitting those to be distinguished, like the insane.
Bhesajjakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Talk on Medicine.
1568.Uyyuttanti saṅgāmatthāya katauyyogaṃ, gāmato nikkhamma gacchantaṃ vā ekattha sanniviṭṭhaṃ vā. Yathāha ‘‘uyyuttā nāma senā gāmato nikkhamitvā niviṭṭhā vā hoti payātā vā’’ti (pāci. 314).Aññatra paccayāti ṭhapetvā tathārūpapaccayaṃ.
1568. Uyyutta means ready for battle, either having left the village and going, or gathered in one place. As it says, "Uyyuttā means an army either having left the village and encamped or marched forth" (pāci. 314). Aññatra paccayā means except for such a reason.
1569.Dassanassupacārasminti etthadassanūpacāraṃnāma yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitassa senā paññāyati, taṃ ṭhānaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘yattha ṭhito passati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 314).Upacāraṃ vimuñcitvā passantassāti yathāvuttadassanopacāraṭṭhānaṃ ettha ṭhatvā oloketuṃ na sukarantiādinā kāraṇena taṃ ṭhānaṃ pahāya aññattha vilokentassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kenaci paṭicchannaṃ hutvā adissamānampi ninnaṃ ṭhānaṃ otiṇṇaṃ apaññāyamānampi paññāyantampi oloketuṃ na sakkā evameva vinicchayo veditabbo. Yathāha ‘‘kenaci antaritā vā ninnaṃ oruḷhā vā na dissatī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 314).Payogatoti yathāvuttadassanapayogagaṇanāya.
1569. Dassanassupacārasminti here dassanūpacāraṃ means that place from which the army is visible. As it says, "From where he sees, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 314). Upacāraṃ vimuñcitvā passantassā means, having abandoned the place of the described vicinity of seeing because it is not easy to look from there, for such a reason, for one who looks elsewhere. Even if it is covered by something and invisible, sunken down into a low place, unperceivable or perceivable, the decision should be understood in just the same way. As it says, "Either hidden by something or sunk into a low place, it is not visible" etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 314). Payogato means by way of the calculation of the described effort of seeing.
1570.Idāni caturaṅgasenālakkhaṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ārohā pana cattāro’’tiādi.Ārohāti ettha hatthārohā daṭṭhabbā.Tappādarakkhakāti tassa pādarakkhakāti viggaho.Dve dveti ekekaṃ pādaṃ rakkhantā dve dve.Dvādasaposoti dvādasa posā etassāti viggaho. Dvādasapurisayutto eko hatthī nāma.
1570. Now, in order to show the characteristics of a fourfold army, he says ‘‘ārohā pana cattāro’’ etc. Ārohā here should be seen as elephant riders. Tappādarakkhakā means tassa pādarakkhakāti, those who protect its feet. Dve dve means two each protecting one foot each. Dvādasaposo means dvādasa posā etassāti, it has twelve men. One elephant with twelve men is called one.
1571.Ārohoti ettha assāroho vuccati.Tipurisoti tayo purisā assāti viggaho.Hayoti asso.Eko sārathīti rathacāriko. ‘‘Yodho eko’’ti padacchedo.Āṇirakkhāti rathacakkadvayassa agaḷanatthaṃ akkhakassa ubhosu koṭīsu ākoṭitā dve āṇiyo rakkhanakā.
1571. Āroho here means a horse rider. Tipuriso means tayo purisā assāti, it has three men. Hayo means a horse. Eko sārathī means one who drives the chariot. Yodho eko is a separate word. Āṇirakkhā means those who protect the two linchpins fastened to both ends of the axle to prevent the wheels of the chariot from falling off.
1572.Catuposoti cattāro posā yassāti viggaho.Catusaccavibhāvināti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ desakena bhagavatā.Padahatthāti āvudhahatthā. Pajjate gamyate anena pare hanituntipadaṃ,āvudhaṃ, padāni hatthesu yesaṃ te padahatthāti bhinnādhikaraṇo bāhiratthasamāso yathā ‘‘vajirapāṇī’’ti. Pattipadāti-saddo anatthantarā, manussasenāya adhivacanaṃ.
1572. Catuposo means cattāro posā yassāti, it has four men. Catusaccavibhāvinā means by the Blessed One, the expounder of the four noble truths. Padahatthā means those with weapons in their hands. Padyate gamyate anena pare hanitunti padaṃ, a weapon, padāni hatthesu yesaṃ te padahatthā, is a bhinnādhikaraṇa bāhiratthasamāsa, external possessive compound with different referents, like "Vajirapāṇī." The word pattipada is not different in meaning, it is a term for the infantry.
1573.Caturaṅgasamāyuttāti catūhi aṅgehi avayavehi samāyuttāti viggaho.
1573. Caturaṅgasamāyuttā means catūhi aṅgehi avayavehi samāyuttāti, combined with four parts or limbs.
1574.Hatthiādīsūti yathāvuttalakkhaṇahatthiassarathapadātināmakesu catūsu aṅgesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Ekekanti ekekaṃ aṅgaṃ. Etesu avakaṃsato ekaṃ purisāruḷhamapi hatthiñca tathā assañca ekaṃ padahatthapurisañca ekamekaṃ katvā āha‘‘ekekaṃ dassanatthāya gacchato’’ti. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘antamaso ekapurisāruḷhaṃ ekampi hatthimpī’’tiādi (pāci. aṭṭha. 315).Anuyyuttepīti saṅgāmaṃ vinā aññena kāraṇena nikkhante. Yathāha ‘‘anuyyuttā nāma rājā uyyānaṃ vā nadiṃ vā gacchati, evaṃ anuyyuttā hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 315).
1574. Hatthiādīsū means in the four parts, the elephant, horse, chariot, and infantry of the described characteristics, bhumma in the determination. Ekekanti means one part each. Having made each one of these, an elephant with at least one man riding it, and likewise a horse, and one infantryman with a weapon in his hand, he says ‘‘ekekaṃ dassanatthāya gacchato’’. As it says in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Even one elephant with one man riding it" etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 315). Anuyyuttepī means having gone out for another reason besides battle. As it says, "Anuyyuttā means the king goes to a park or a river, thus it is anuyyuttā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 315).
1575.Sampattanti ettha ‘‘sena’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati.Āpadāsūti jīvitabrahmacariyantarāye sati ‘‘ettha gato muccissāmī’’ti gacchato anāpatti.Tathārūpe paccayegilānāvalokanādike gamanānurūpapaccaye sati anāpattīti yojanā.
1575. Sampattanti: Here, "sena" is obtained from the context. Āpadāsū: When there is danger to life or the holy life, there is no offense for one going thinking, "Having gone there, I will be freed." Tathārūpe paccaye: The meaning is that there is no offense when there is a suitable reason for going, such as attending to the sick.
Uyyuttakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Uyyutta Story.
1576-7.‘‘Siyā ca tassa bhikkhuno kocideva paccayo senaṃ gamanāya, dirattatirattaṃ tena bhikkhunā senāya vasitabba’’nti (pāci. 318) anuññātattā kenaci karaṇīyena saṅgāmatthaṃ uyyuttāya senāya dirattatirattaṃ paṭipāṭiyā vasitvā catuttharattiyaṃ vasantassa pana bhikkhuno āpattiṃ dassetumāha‘‘catutthe’’tiādi.Anāpattivāre‘‘gilāno vasatī’’ti (pāci. 321) vuttattā āha‘‘arogavā’’ti.Senāyāti ettha parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena vā sañcaraṇapariyantena vā senā paricchinditabbā, evaṃ paricchinnāya senāya antovāti attho.
1576-7.Because it is allowed that "If there should be some reason for that bhikkhu to go to the army, that bhikkhu may stay with the army for two or three nights" (pāci. 318), to show the offense to a bhikkhu who, for some business, having stayed with the army mobilized for battle for two or three nights in succession, stays on the fourth night, he says, "catutthe," etc. Because in the Anāpatti Vāra (exemption clause) it is said, "A sick person stays" (pāci. 321), he says, "arogavā"ti. Senāyā: Here, the army should be delimited by the area that can be surrounded or by the extent of movement. The meaning is within such a delimited army.
Tikapācittiyanti ‘‘atirekatiratte atirekasaññī, vematiko, ūnakasaññī senāya vasati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 320) pācittiyattayaṃ vuttaṃ.
Tikapācittiyanti: Three pācittiyas are stated: "He stays with the army thinking it is more than three nights, in doubt, or thinking it is less; there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 320).
Senāvāsakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Senāvāsa Story.
1580.Uyyodhikaṃnāma saṅgāmaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘uggantvā uggantvā ettha yujjhantīti uyyodhikaṃ, sampahāraṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 322).Balagganti ‘‘ettakā hatthī’’tiādinā (pāci. 324)padabhājanāgatanayena balassa gaṇanaṭṭhānaṃ balaggaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘balassa aggaṃ jānanti etthāti balaggaṃ, balagaṇanaṭṭhānanti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 322).Senābyūhanti ‘‘ito hatthī hontu, ito assā, ito rathā, ito pattī hontū’’ti (pāci. 324)padabhājanevuttasenāsannivesaṭṭhānaṃ senābyūhaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘senāya viyūhaṃ senābyūhaṃ, senāsannivesassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 322).
1580.Uyyodhikaṃ means the place of battle. As the Aṭṭhakathā says, "Because they fight having gone out and gone out again in this place, it is called uyyodhikaṃ, this is a designation for the place of combat" (pāci. aṭṭha. 322). Balagganti: The place for counting the army in the manner stated, "So many elephants," etc. (pāci. 324) in the padabhājanā. As it says, "They know the strength of the army in this place, therefore it is balaggaṃ, meaning the place for counting the army" (pāci. aṭṭha. 322). Senābyūhanti: The place for arranging the army as stated in the padabhājane, "Let there be elephants from here, horses from here, chariots from here, infantry from here" (pāci. 324). As it says, "The arrangement of the army is senābyūhaṃ, this is a designation for the arrangement of the army" (pāci. aṭṭha. 322).
1581.Purimeti anantarasikkhāpade. ‘‘Dvādasapuriso hatthī’’itiyohatthī vuttoti yojanā.Tenāti tena hatthinā hetubhūtena.
1581.Purimeti: In the immediately preceding training rule. The connection is that the elephant stated was "an elephant with twelve men." Tenā: Because of that elephant.
1582.‘‘Sesesū’’ti iminā assānīkarathānīkapattānīkā gahitā.Pattānīkaṃnāma ‘‘cattāro purisā padahatthā pattī pacchimaṃ pattānīka’’nti (pāci. 324) senaṅgesu paṭiniddesena nibbisesaṃ katvā vuttaṃ.Tiṇṇanti etesaṃ uyyuttādīnaṃ.
1582."Sesesū": With this, the divisions of horses, chariots, and infantry are included. Pattānīkaṃ means what is stated, having made no distinction by designating the elements of the army, "Four men are a padahattha, the rearmost is a pattānīka" (pāci. 324). Tiṇṇanti: Of these three, uyyutta, etc.
Uyyodhikakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Uyyodhika Story.
Acelakavaggo pañcamo.
The Fifth Acelaka Vagga.
1583.Piṭṭhādīhīti etthaādi-saddena pūvādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yathāha ‘‘surā nāma piṭṭhasurā pūvasurā odanasurā kiṇṇapakkhittā sambhārasaṃyuttā’’ti (pāci. 328). Ettha ca piṭṭhaṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā pakkhipitvā katāpiṭṭhasurā. Evaṃ pūve, odane ca bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā‘‘pūvasurā, odanasurā’’ti vuccati.‘‘Kiṇṇā’’ti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati, ye ‘‘surāmodakā’’tipi vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katākiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakisāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitāsambhārasaṃyuttā.
1583.Piṭṭhādīhī: Here, the ādi-word includes pūva (cake), etc. As it says, "Surā is piṭṭhasurā, pūvasurā, odanasurā, kinṇapakkhittā, sambhārasaṃyuttā" (pāci. 328). Here, piṭṭhasurā is made by putting flour into a vessel, adding water made from it, and fermenting it. Similarly, "pūvasurā, odanasurā" is said of that which is made by putting cake and cooked rice into a vessel, adding water made from it, and mashing it. "Kiṇṇā" is said of the starter for that surā, which is also called "surāmodakā," having put that in, it is called kiṇṇapakkhittā. That which is combined with various ingredients such as harītakī, kisāsapa, etc., is sambhārasaṃyuttā.
Pupphādīhīti etthaādi-saddena phalādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘merayo nāma pupphāsavo phalāsavo madhvāsavo guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyutto’’ti (pāci. 328). Tattha capupphāsavonāma madhukapupphādīnaṃ jātirasakato ceva tālanāḷikerapupphānañca raso ciraparivāsito.Phalāsavopana muddikāpanasaphalādīni madditvā tesaṃ rasena kato.Madhvāsavonāma muddikānaṃ jātirasena kato. Makkhikāmadhunāpi karīyatīti vadanti. Ucchurasoguḷāsavo. Harītakāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsitosambhārasaṃyutto. Āsavo merayaṃ hotīti yojanā.
Pupphādīhī: Here, the ādi-word includes fruits, etc. As it says, "Meraya is pupphāsavo, phalāsavo, madhvāsavo, guḷāsavo, sambhārasaṃyutto" (pāci. 328). There, pupphāsavo is the juice of the essence of madhuka flowers, etc., and also the juice of tāla, nāḷikera, and ketaka flowers, having been kept for a long time. Phalāsavo is made with the juice of muddikā, panasa fruits, etc., having mashed them. Madhvāsavo is made with the juice of the essence of muddikā. They say it is also made with bee honey. Guḷa juice is guḷāsavo. The juice of various ingredients such as harītakī, āmalaka, kaṭukabhaṇḍa, etc., having been kept for a long time is sambhārasaṃyutto. The meaning is that āsava and meraya are like this.
1584.Bījato paṭṭhāyāti sambhāre paṭiyāditvā cāṭiyaṃ pakkhittakālato paṭṭhāya tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ puppharase pupphato gaḷitābhinavakālatoyeva ca paṭṭhāya.Pivantassāti ettha ‘‘kusaggenā’’tipi seso.Ubhayampi cāti suraṃ, merayañcāti ubhayampi. Bījato pana paṭṭhāya kusaggena pivantassapi bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojetabbaṃ. Payogabāhullena āpattibāhullaṃ dassetumāha‘‘payoge ca payoge cā’’ti. Idañca vicchinditvā vicchinditvā pivantassa bhikkhuno payoge ca payoge ca pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vicchinditvā vicchinditvā pivato payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 328). Ekeneva payogena bahumpi pivantassa ekaṃ eva āpattiṃ byatirekato dīpeti. Yathāha ‘‘ekena pana payogena bahumpi pivantassa ekā āpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 328).
1584.Bījato paṭṭhāyā: From the time of preparing the ingredients and putting them into a jar, and from the very time the fresh juice has dripped from the flowers of tāla, nāḷikera, etc. Pivantassā: Here, the remainder is "with a blade of kusa grass." Ubhayampi cā: Both surā and meraya. It should be connected that even for a bhikkhu drinking with a blade of kusa grass from the very beginning, there is a pācittiya. To show the abundance of offenses due to the abundance of effort, he says, "payoge ca payoge cā". And this should be connected that for a bhikkhu drinking having interrupted it again and again, there is a pācittiya for each effort. As it says, "For one drinking having interrupted it again and again, there are offenses according to the count of the efforts" (pāci. aṭṭha. 328). He shows separately that for one drinking much with one effort, there is only one offense. As it says, "But for one drinking much with one effort, there is one offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 328).
1585.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘majje majjasaññī, majje vematiko, majje amajjasaññī pivati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 328) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
1585.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti: The threefold pācittiya is stated: "He drinks what is majja thinking it is majja, in doubt about majja, or thinking it is not majja; there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 328).
1586.‘‘Anāpatti namajjaṃ hoti majjavaṇṇaṃ majjagandhaṃ majjarasaṃ, taṃ pivatī’’ti (pāci. 328) vuttattā āha‘‘amajjaṃ majjavaṇṇa’’ntiādi.Ariṭṭhaṃnāma āmalakaphalarasādīhi kato āsavaviseso.Loṇasovīrakaṃnāmaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
1586.Because it is stated, "There is no offense if it is not majja, but has the color, smell, and taste of majja, and he drinks that" (pāci. 328), he says, "amajjaṃ majjavaṇṇa"ntiādi. Ariṭṭhaṃ means a special kind of āsava made with the juice of āmalaka fruits, etc. Loṇasovīrakaṃ: In the Aṭṭhakathā—
‘‘Harītakāmalakavibhītakakasāve, sabbadhaññāni, sabbaaparaṇṇāni, sattannampi dhaññānaṃ odanaṃ, kadaliphalādīni sabbaphalāni, vettaketakakhajjūrikaḷīrādayo sabbakaḷīre, macchamaṃsakhaṇḍāni, anekāni ca madhuphāṇitasindhavaloṇatikaṭukādīni bhesajjāni pakkhipitvā kumbhimukhaṃ limpitvā ekaṃ vā dve vā tīṇi vā saṃvaccharāni ṭhapenti, taṃ paripaccitvā jamburasavaṇṇaṃ hoti. Vātakāsakuṭṭhapaṇḍubhagandalādīnañca siniddhabhojanabhuttānañca uttarapānaṃ bhattajīraṇakabhesajjaṃ tādisaṃ natthi. Taṃ panetaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pacchābhattampi vaṭṭati, gilānānaṃ pākatikameva. Agilānānaṃ pana udakasambhinnaṃ pānaparibhogenā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.192) –
"Harītakī, āmalaka, vibhītaka, kasāva, all grains, all pulses, cooked rice of the seven grains, banana fruits, all fruits, vetta, ketaka, khajjūrika, ḷīra, all ḷīras, pieces of fish and meat, and various medicines such as madhu, phāṇita, sindhava salt, pungent things, etc., having put them in, they seal the mouth of the jar and keep it for one, two, or three years; having fully ripened, it becomes the color of jambura juice. There is no better after-drink or digestive medicine for those suffering from vāta, kāsa, kuṭṭha, paṇḍu, bhagandala, etc., or those who have eaten oily food. But this is also suitable for bhikkhus as an after-meal drink and is natural for the sick. But for the not-sick, it is used mixed with water." (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.192)—
Suttaṃnāma anekehi bhesajjehi abhisaṅkhato amajjabhūto āsavaviseso.
Suttaṃ means a special kind of āsava, not majja, combined with many medicines.
1587.Vāsagāhāpanatthāyāti sugandhibhāvagāhāpanatthaṃ.Īsakanti majjavaṇṇagandharasā yathā na paññāyanti, evaṃ appamattakaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anatikkhittamajjeyeva anāpatti. Yaṃ pana atikkhittamajjaṃ hoti, yattha majjassa vaṇṇagandharasā paññāyanti, tasmiṃ āpattiyevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 329).Sūpādīnaṃ tu pāketi etthaādi-saddena maṃsapākādayo saṅgahitā. Yathāha ‘‘sūpasampāke maṃsasampāke telasampāke’’ti (pāci. 328).
1587.Vāsagāhāpanatthāyā: For the purpose of imparting a fragrant quality. Īsakanti: So little that the color, smell, and taste of majja are not apparent. As it says, "There is no offense if it is not excessive majja. But if it is excessive majja, where the color, smell, and taste of majja are apparent, there is definitely an offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 329). Sūpādīnaṃ tu pāke: Here, the ādi-word includes the cooking of meat, etc. As it says, "In the preparation of soup, in the preparation of meat, in the preparation of oil" (pāci. 328).
1588.Vatthuajānanā acittanti sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘vatthuajānanatāya cettha acittakatā veditabbā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 329).Vatthuajānanatāca nāma ‘‘majja’’nti ajānanabhāvo.Idanti idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ.Ca-saddena aññāni ca giraggasamajjādisikkhāpadāni samuccinoti.Akusalenevāti akusalacitteneva.Pānatoti pātabbato.Lokavajjakanti sādhulokena vajjetabbanti attho. Lokavajjamevalokavajjakaṃ.
1588.The connection is that not knowing the object is unintentional. As it says, "Here, being unintentional should be understood due to not knowing the object" (pāci. aṭṭha. 329). And vatthuajānanatā means the state of not knowing "this is majja." Idanti: This training rule. With the ca-word, it includes other training rules such as giraggasamajja, etc. Akusalenevā: Only with an unwholesome thought. Pānato: Than drinking. Lokavajjakanti: It means what is blameworthy by the good people. Lokavajjaṃ eva is lokavajjakaṃ.
niḷinijātake(jā. 2.18.1 ādayo; jā. aṭṭha. 5.18.1 ādayo) bhesajjasaññāya itthiyā magge aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassa kumārassa ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘tassā magge methunaṃ paṭisevāmī’’ti vā saññāya abhāvepi kāmarāguppattiyā sīlādiguṇaparihāni vatthuniyāmato ca ahosi, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbo.
In the Niḷinī Jātaka(jā. 2.18.1 ādayo; jā. aṭṭha. 5.18.1 ādayo), even though there was no perception of "woman" or "I will engage in sexual intercourse in her opening" for the boy who was inserting his organ into the woman's vagina with the perception of medicine, there was a loss of qualities such as virtue due to the arising of lust and due to the fixed nature of the object. It should be seen similarly here.
Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 329), panakhuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(khu. pā. aṭṭha. sikkhāpadavaṇṇanā),vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathādīsu ca ‘‘ticitta’’nti avatvā ‘‘akusalacitta’’micceva vuttattā, sikkhāpadassa sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ dassentena pakkhantaralakkhaṇadassanassa ayuttattā caaṭṭhakathāsuyathārutavaseneva atthaggahaṇe ca kassaci virodhassa asambhavato sacittakapakkhameva sandhāya akusalacittatā, lokavajjatā cettha na vattabbā. ‘‘Vatthuṃ jānitvāpi ajānitvāpi majjaṃ pivato bhikkhussa pācittiyaṃ. Sāmaṇerassa pana jānitvāva pivato sīlabhedo, na ajānitvā’’ti (māhāva. aṭṭha. 108 atthato samānaṃ) yaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha kāraṇaṃ maggitabbaṃ. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyā buddhānameva visayattā na taṃ maggitabbaṃ, yathāpaññatteyeva vattitabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ, sukhopekkhāvedanānaṃ vasena duvedanañca hoti.Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 329), panamātikaṭṭhakathāyañca (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘tivedana’’nti pāṭho dissati,khuddakapāṭhavaṇṇanāya(khu. pā. aṭṭha. sikkhāpadavaṇṇanā),vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathādīsu(vibha. aṭṭha. 703 ādayo) ca ‘‘sukhamajjhattavedanāvasena duvedana’’nti ca ‘‘lobhamohamūlavasena dvimūlaka’’nti ca vuttattā so ‘‘pamādapāṭho’’ti gahetabbo.
However, because in the Vinayaṭṭhakathā(pāci. aṭṭha. 329), in the Khuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathā(khu. pā. aṭṭha. sikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), in the Vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathā, etc., it is stated only "akusalacitta" without saying "ticitta," and because it is inappropriate to show a different aspect by one showing the general characteristic of a training rule, and because there is no possibility of any contradiction when taking the meaning in the Aṭṭhakathās just as it is said, unwholesome thought and blameworthiness by the world should not be stated here referring only to the sacittaka aspect. The reason should be sought in what is said: "For a bhikkhu drinking majja knowingly or unknowingly, there is a pācittiya. But for a sāmaṇera, there is a break in virtue only when drinking knowingly, not unknowingly" (māhāva. aṭṭha. 108 atthato samānaṃ). Because the establishment of the training rule is only the domain of Buddhas, that should not be sought. One should act only according to what is established. But this training rule is unwholesome thought, and is two-fold vedanā by way of pleasant and neutral feeling. In the Vinayaṭṭhakathā(pāci. aṭṭha. 329), and in the Mātikaṭṭhakathā(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), the reading "tivedana" is seen. Because in the Khuddakapāṭhavaṇṇanā(khu. pā. aṭṭha. sikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), and in the Vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathādīsu(vibha. aṭṭha. 703 ādayo), it is stated "two-fold vedanā by way of pleasant and neutral feeling," and "two-rooted by way of greed and delusion," that should be taken as a "corrupt reading."
Surāpānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Surāpāna Story.
1589.Yenakenaci aṅgenāti aṅguliādinā yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena.Hasādhippāyinoti hase adhippāyohasādhippāyo,so etassa atthīti viggaho, tassa, iminā kīḷādhippāyarahitassa anāpattiṃ byatirekato dīpeti. Vakkhati ca ‘‘anāpatti nahasādhippāyassā’’ti.Phusatophusantassa.
1589.Yena kenaci aṅgenā: With any limb whatsoever, such as a finger, or any part of the body. Hasādhippāyino: Hasādhippāyo means one whose intention is laughter; the dissolution is, so etassa atthīti, of that. With this, he shows separately the absence of offense for one without the intention of play. And he will say, "There is no offense for one without the intention of laughter." Phusato: Of one touching.
1590.Sabbatthāti sabbesu upasampannānupasampannesu.Kāyapaṭibaddhādike nayeti ‘‘kāyena kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tievamādinā (pāci. 332) dassite naye. Anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tīṇi dukkaṭāni vuttānīti āha‘‘tathevānupasampanne, dīpitaṃ tikadukkaṭa’’nti. Ettha ca‘‘tathevā’’ti iminā upasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikapācittiyassa vuttabhāvo dīpito hoti. Yathā upasampanne tikapācittiyaṃ dīpitaṃ, tatheva anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpitanti yojanā.
1590.Sabbatthā: In all, those who are fully ordained and not fully ordained. Kāyapaṭibaddhādike naye: In the way shown, beginning with "If he touches a body that is connected to a body with his body, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 332). He says, "tathevānupasampanne, dīpitaṃ tikadukkaṭa"nti, that three dukkaṭas were stated in the case of one not fully ordained, by way of perception of one fully ordained, doubt, and perception of one not fully ordained. Here, with "tathevā", it is shown that the threefold pācittiya was stated in the case of one fully ordained, by way of perception of one fully ordained, doubt, and perception of one not fully ordained. The connection is that just as the threefold pācittiya was shown in the case of one fully ordained, so the threefold dukkaṭa was shown in the case of one not fully ordained.
1591.Ettha…pe… bhikkhunīti ettha bhikkhupi bhikkhuniyā anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitoti veditabbo.
1591.Ettha…pe… bhikkhunī: Here, it should be understood that even a bhikkhu is standing in a place where there is a bhikkhunī who is not fully ordained.
1592.Nahasādhippāyassa phusatoti hasādhippāyaṃ vinā vandanādīsu pādādisarīrāvayavena paraṃ phusantassa.Kicce satīti piṭṭhiparikammādikicce sati.
1592.Nahasādhippāyassa phusato: Of one touching another with a part of the body such as the feet without the intention of laughter in acts of homage, etc. Kicce satī: When there is a task such as massaging the back.
Aṅgulipatodakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Aṅgulipatodaka Story.
1593.Jaleti ettha ‘‘uparigopphake’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘uparigopphake udake’’ti (pāci. 337).Nimujjanādīnanti etthaādi-saddena ummujjanaplavanāni gahitāni. Yathāha ‘‘uparigopphake udake hasādhippāyo nimujjati vā ummujjati vā palavati vā’’ti (pāci. 337).‘‘Kevala’’nti iminā nahānādikiccena otarantassa anāpattīti dīpeti.
1593.Jale: Here, the remainder is "above the ankles." As it says, "in water above the ankles" (pāci. 337). Nimujjanādīna: Here, the ādi-word includes ummujjana and plavana. As it says, "In water above the ankles, with the intention of laughter, he dives or surfaces or floats" (pāci. 337). With "Kevala", he shows that there is no offense for one going down with a purpose such as bathing.
1594.Uparigopphake jaleti gopphakānaṃ uparibhāgappamāṇe jale.Nimujjeyyapi vāti antojalaṃ pavisanto nimujjeyya vā.Tareyya vāti plaveyya vā.
1594.Uparigopphake jale: In water the measure of the upper part of the ankles. Nimujjeyyapi vā: Or he might dive, entering into the water. Tareyya vā: Or he might float.
1595-6.Antoyevodake nimujjitvāna gacchato tassa hatthapādapayogehi pācittiṃ paridīpayeti yojanā.
1595-6.The connection is that he illustrates the pācittiya for one going having dived in the water itself, with the use of hands and feet.
1597.Hatthādisakalasarīrāvayavaṃ saṅgaṇhituṃ‘‘yena yenā’’ti aniyamāmeḍitamāha. Jalaṃ tarato bhikkhuno yena yena pana aṅgena taraṇaṃ hotīti yojanā.
1597.To include all parts of the body beginning with the hands, he says "yena yenā" with indefinite repetition. The connection is: by whatever limb there is floating for a bhikkhu floating in the water.
1598.Taruto vāpīti rukkhatopi vā.Tikapācittiyanti udake hasadhamme hasadhammasaññivematikaahasadhammasaññīnaṃ vasena tikapācittiyaṃ.‘‘Tikadukkaṭa’’nti pāṭho dissati, ‘‘udake ahasadhamme hasadhammasaññī, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Udake ahasadhamme vematiko, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 338) vatvā ‘‘udake ahasadhamme ahasadhammasaññī, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. 338) tatiyavikappepāḷiyaṃanāpatti vuttāti so pamādapāṭho,‘‘dvikadukkaṭa’’nti pāṭhoyeva gahetabbo.
1598. Taruto vāpī: Even from the trees. Tikapācittiyaṃ: A triple pācittiya based on whether one perceives a play object as a play object, is doubtful about it, or perceives it as a non-play object. A reading of ‘‘Tikadukkaṭa’’ is seen, but since in the third alternative in the Pāḷi, it says, "If in the water one perceives a non-play object as a play object, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. If in the water one is doubtful about a non-play object, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 338), and then says "If in the water one perceives a non-play object as a non-play object, there is no offense" (pāci. 338), that is a careless reading. Only the reading ‘‘dvikadukkaṭa’’ should be taken.
1599.Nāvaṃ tīre ussārentopi vāti sambandho.Ussārentoti tīramāropento.‘‘Kīḷatī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘pājento’’ti imināpi yojetabbaṃ.
1599. The connection is that even when raising a boat to the shore. Ussārento: While bringing up to the shore. ‘‘Kīḷatī’’: This should be connected with ‘‘pājento’’ as well.
1600.Kathalāya vāti khuddakakapālikāya vā.Udakanti ettha ‘‘bhājanagataṃ vā’’ti seso. ‘‘Bhājanagataṃ udakaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 338) hipadabhājanevuttaṃ.
1600. Kathalāya vā: Or with a small potsherd. Udakaṃ: Here, ‘‘bhājanagataṃ vā’’ is the remainder. Because ‘‘Bhājanagataṃ udakaṃ vā’’ (pāci. 338) is said in padabhājane.
1601.Kañcikaṃvāti dhaññarasaṃ vā.Api-saddo ‘‘khīraṃ vā takkaṃ vā rajanaṃ vā passāvaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 338)pāḷiyaṃāgate sampiṇḍeti.Cikkhallaṃ vāpīti udakakaddamaṃ vā. Ettha visesajotakenaapi-saddena ‘‘apica uparigopphake vuttāni ummujjanādīni ṭhapetvā aññena yena kenaci ākārena udakaṃ otaritvā vā anotaritvā vā yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ antamaso binduṃ gahetvā khipanakīḷāyapi kīḷantassa dukkaṭamevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 336)aṭṭhakathāgataṃ vinicchayavisesaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Vikkhipanti vikkhipitvā.
1601. Kañcikaṃ vā: Or rice-gruel. The word api combines what is said in the Pāḷi ‘‘khīraṃ vā takkaṃ vā rajanaṃ vā passāvaṃ vā’’ (pāci. 338). Cikkhallaṃ vāpī: Or muddy water. Here, with the word api, which indicates a specific case, it combines the specific judgment found in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Moreover, having set aside the jumping and other actions stated in the above-ankle section, even for one playing the throwing game while taking water, even a drop, that has settled anywhere, in any manner, whether having entered the water or without having entered," (pāci. aṭṭha. 336). Vikkhipaṃ: Having scattered.
1602.Sati kicce jalaṃ vigāhitvā nimujjanādikaṃ karontassa anāpattīti yojanā.Kiccaṃnāma nahānādikaṃ.
1602. The construction is that there is no offense for one who, having entered the water when there is a need, does diving and so on. Kiccaṃ means bathing and so on.
1603.Anantarassāti aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadassa. Visesovavisesatā,koci viseso natthīti attho.
1603. Anantarassā: Of the aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpada. Visesova visesatā: The special thing is the distinction; there is no other special thing, this is the meaning.
Hasadhammakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Hasadhammakathā.
1604-5.Yo bhikkhu bhikkhunā paññattena vuccamāno assa vacanaṃ akattukāmatāya ādaraṃ pana sace na karoti, tassa tasmiṃ anādariye pācittiyamudīrayeti yojanā, iminā vākyena puggalānādaramūlakaṃ pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anādariyaṃ nāma dve anādariyāni puggalānādariyañca dhammānādariyañcā’’ti (pāci. 342), ‘‘puggalānādariyaṃ nāma upasampannena paññattena vuccamāno ‘ayaṃ ukkhittako vā vambhito vā garahito vā imassa vacanaṃ akataṃ bhavissatī’ti anādariyaṃ karoti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 342) ca.
1604-5. The construction is: For that bhikkhu who, when being spoken to by a bhikkhu who has been appointed, does not give attention to the speech due to unwillingness to do it, it is said that there is a pācittiya for that disrespect. With this statement, a pācittiya rooted in disrespect for a person is stated. As it was said, "Disrespect is of two kinds: disrespect for persons and disrespect for the Dhamma" (pāci. 342), and "Disrespect for a person is when one being spoken to by an appointed bhikkhu who has been ordained, disrespectfully thinks, 'This one is either suspended, defeated, or censured; his speech will not be done,' there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 342).
Anādariyeti nimittatthe bhummaṃ.
Anādariye: Locative used in the sense of cause.
1606.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī, vematiko, anupasampannasaññī anādariyaṃ karoti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 343) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Tikātītenāti lokattikamatikkantena.Anupasampannānādare tikadukkaṭanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ.
1606. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: A triple pācittiya is stated: "To an ordained bhikkhu, if one disrespectfully perceives an ordained bhikkhu, is doubtful, or perceives an unordained person, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 343). Tikātītenā: By one who has transcended the three planes of existence. Anupasampannānādare tikadukkaṭaṃ: A triple dukkaṭa based on whether one perceives an unordained person as ordained, is doubtful, or perceives an unordained person.
1607.Suttenevābhidhammenāti etthaevakāro ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti iminā yojetabbo.‘‘Suttenaabhidhammenā’’ti padadvayena abhedopacārato suttābhidhammāgato pariyattidhammo vutto.Apaññattenāti paññattasaṅkhātavinayato aññattā apaññattena.‘‘Apaññattenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘suttena abhidhammenā’’ti padadvayavisesanaṃ. Bhikkhunā vuttassa tasmiṃ bhikkhumhi vā dhamme vā anādaraṃ karoto dukkaṭameva. Sāmaṇerenaubhayenapipaññattena vā apaññattena vā vuttassa tasmiṃ sāmaṇere vā paññatte vā apaññatte vā dhamme anādaraṃ karoto bhikkhussa dukkaṭamevāti yojanā.
1607. In Suttenevābhidhammenā, the eva word should be connected with ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ’’. With the two words ‘‘Suttena abhidhammenā’’, pariyatti Dhamma that has come from the Sutta and Abhidhamma is stated due to treating them as non-different. Apaññattenā: Other than the Vinaya known as the paññatti. ‘‘Apaññattenā’’: This is a qualifier of the two words ‘‘suttena abhidhammenā’’. For a bhikkhu who disrespects the speech of a bhikkhu, whether regarding that bhikkhu or the Dhamma, there is only a dukkaṭa. For a Sāmaṇera who disrespects the speech of a bhikkhu, whether paññatta or apaññatta, regarding that Sāmaṇera, or the Dhamma that is paññatta or apaññatta, there is only a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu, this is the construction.
1608.Dosoti pācittiyadukkaṭasaṅkhāto koci doso.
2039. Doso: Some offense known as pācittiya or dukkaṭa.
1609.Etthāti imasmiṃ ācariyānaṃ gāhe. Gārayho ācariyuggaho neva gahetabboti yojanā.Gārayho ācariyuggahoti ettha ‘‘yasmā ucchuraso sattāhakāliko, tassa kasaṭo yāvajīviko, dvinnaṃyeva samavāyo ucchuyaṭṭhi, tasmā vikāle ucchuyaṭṭhiṃ khādituṃ vaṭṭati guḷaharītake viyā’’ti evamādiko sampati nibbatto gārayhācariyavādo. Kataro pana gahetabboti? Paveṇiyā āgato ācariyuggahova gahetabbo.
1609. Etthā: In this, taking of the teachers. A censurable teaching lineage should not be taken. Gārayho ācariyuggaho: Here, "Since sugarcane juice is seven-day permissible, its sediment is permissible for life, the combination of the two is the sugarcane stalk, therefore it is allowable to eat sugarcane stalk in the non-meal time, like a guḷaharītakī," the censurable teaching tradition arisen in this way. Which one should be taken? Only the teaching lineage that has come by tradition should be taken.
Kurundiyaṃpana ‘‘lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭati, paṇṇattivajje pana vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 344) vuttaṃ.Mahāpaccariyaṃ‘‘suttaṃ, suttānulomañca uggahitakānaṃyeva ācariyānaṃ uggaho pamāṇaṃ, ajānantānaṃ kathā appamāṇa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 344) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ sabbaṃ paveṇiyā āgate samodhānaṃ gacchatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 344)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Etthalokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭatīti lokavajjasikkhāpade āpattiṭṭhāne yo ācariyavādo, so na gahetabbo, lokavajjamatikkamitvā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyuggaho’’ti vadantassa uggaho na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Suttānulomaṃnāma aṭṭhakathā.Paveṇiyā āgate samodhānaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘paveṇiyā āgato ācariyuggahova gahetabbo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 344) evaṃ vutte mahāaṭṭhakathāvādeyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti adhippāyo.
In the Kurundī, however, it is said "A teaching lineage is not allowable in a lokavajja, but it is allowable in a paṇṇattivajja" (pāci. aṭṭha. 344). In the Mahāpaccarī, it is said, "The Sutta and what is in accordance with the Sutta is the measure for the teaching lineages only of those who have learned them; the speech of those who do not know is not a measure" (pāci. aṭṭha. 344). "All of that goes to harmonizing with what has come by tradition," (pāci. aṭṭha. 344) it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā. Here, lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭatī: In a lokavajja training rule, that teaching tradition that is in the place of offense, that should not be taken. The meaning is that the lineage of one who says, having transgressed a lokavajja, "This is our teaching lineage," is not allowable. Suttānulomaṃ means Aṭṭhakathā. Paveṇiyā āgate samodhānaṃ gacchatī: The meaning is that, when it is said "Only the teaching lineage that has come by tradition should be taken," (pāci. aṭṭha. 344) it goes to inclusion only in the view of the Mahāaṭṭhakathā.
Anādariyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Anādariyakathā.
1610-1.‘‘Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ bhiṃsāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 346)mātikāvacanatobhayasañjananatthāyāti ettha ‘‘bhikkhussā’’ti seso. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘itarassa tu bhikkhussā’’ti.Rūpādinti rūpasaddagandhādiṃ.Upasaṃhareti upaṭṭhapeti, dassetīti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhayānakaṃ kathanti corakantārādikathaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘corakantāraṃ vā vāḷakantāraṃ vā pisācakantāraṃ vā ācikkhatī’’ti (pāci. 348).Parasantiketi ettha‘‘paro’’ti vuttanayena labbhamāno upasampanno gahetabbo.
1610-1. From the mātikā statement, "Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ bhiṃsāpeyya, pācittiya" (pāci. 346), bhayasañjananatthāyā, here ‘‘bhikkhussa’’ is the remainder. On account of that, he will say "itarassa tu bhikkhussa". Rūpādiṃ: Form, sound, smell, and so on. Upasaṃhare: Presents, it is said that shows. Bhayānakaṃ kathaṃ: Talk of robbers, wildernesses, and so on. As it was said, "Tells of a robber wilderness, or a wild animal wilderness, or a demon wilderness" (pāci. 348). Parasantike: Here ‘‘paro’’ should be taken as an ordained bhikkhu, obtainable in the manner stated.
Disvā vāti upaṭṭhāpitaṃ taṃ rūpādiṃ disvā vā.Sutvā vāti taṃ bhayānakaṃ kathaṃ sutvā vā. Yassa bhayadassanatthāya taṃ upaṭṭhāpesi, sobhāyatu vā mā vā bhāyatu. Itarassāti tadupaṭṭhāpakassa bhikkhussa.Taṅkhaṇeti upaṭṭhāpitakkhaṇe.
Disvā vā: Or having seen that form and so on that was presented. Sutvā vā: Or having heard that frightening talk. The one for whom he presented that in order to frighten him, whether he is frightened or not, bhāyatu vā mā vā bhāyatu. Itarassā: To that presenting bhikkhu. Taṅkhaṇe: In the moment of presenting.
1612.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī, vematiko, anupasampannasaññī bhiṃsāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 348) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Tikadukkaṭanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Anupasampannaṃ bhiṃsāpetukāmo’’tiādikedukkaṭavāreanupasampannaggahaṇena gihinopi saṅgayhamānattā‘‘sāmaṇeraṃ gahaṭṭhaṃ vā’’ti āha. Sāmaṇeraṃ…pe… bhikkhuno tatheva bhiṃsāpentassa tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
1612. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: A triple pācittiya is stated: "To an ordained bhikkhu, if one frighteningly perceives an ordained bhikkhu, is doubtful, or perceives an unordained person, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 348). Tikadukkaṭaṃ: A triple dukkaṭa based on whether one perceives an unordained person as ordained, is doubtful, or perceives an unordained person. Since even a householder is included by the taking of an unordained person in the dukkaṭavāre beginning with ‘‘Anupasampannaṃ bhiṃsāpetukāmo’’, he said ‘‘sāmaṇeraṃ gahaṭṭhaṃ vā’’. Sāmaṇeraṃ…pe…For a bhikkhu frightening a bhikkhu in that way, a triple dukkaṭa is stated, this is the construction.
Bhiṃsāpanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Bhiṃsāpanakathā.
1614.Jotinti aggiṃ.Tappetukāmoti visibbetukāmo. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū padīpepi jotikepi jantāgharepi kukkuccāyantī’’ti (pāci. 352)uppannavatthumhi‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave tathārūpapaccayā jotiṃ samādahituṃ samādahāpetu’’nti (pāci. 352) vuttattā ettha‘‘tathārūpaṃ paccaya’’nti iminā padīpujjalanañca pattapacanasarīrasedanādikammañca jantāgharavattañca gahetabbaṃ. Ettha cajotikepīti pattapacanasedanakammādīsu jotikaraṇeti attho.
1614. Joti: Namely, fire. Tappetukāmo: Desiring to heat up. Since in the uppannavatthu, "At that time, bhikkhus were scrupulous even about lamps, fire, and bathhouses," (pāci. 352) it was said, "I allow, monks, to start and have started a fire for such a reason," (pāci. 352) here the lamp lighting, the cooking of food in a pot, the body sweating work, and the bathhouse routine should be taken by ‘‘tathārūpaṃ paccaya’’. Here, jotikepī means making fire in cooking food in a pot, sweating work, and so on.
1615.Sayaṃsamādahantassāti attanā jālentassa.
1615. Sayaṃsamādahantassā: For one lighting it himself.
1616.Jālāpentassa…pe… dukkaṭanti āṇattiyā āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭaṃ sandhāyāha. Āṇattiyā jalite āpajjitabbāpatti ‘‘jāluṭṭhāne panāpatti, pācitti parikittitā’’ti anuvattamānattā siddhāti visuṃ na vuttā.
1616. Jālāpentassa…pe… dukkaṭaṃ: He speaks having in mind the dukkaṭa that should be incurred by command. Since the offense that should be incurred by lighting by command is established due to following "But in the torch-lighting, there is an offense, pācitti is declared," it was not stated separately.
1617.Gilānassāti ‘‘gilāno nāma yassa vinā agginā na phāsu hotī’’ti (pāci. 354) vuttassa gilānassa.Avijjhātaṃ alātaṃ ukkhipantassāti gahaṇena bhaṭṭhaṃ anibbutālātaṃ aggino samīpaṃ karontassa, yathāṭhāne ṭhapentassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1617. Gilānassā: To the sick one, "Sick is he who is not comfortable without fire," (pāci. 354) to that sick one. Avijjhātaṃ alātaṃ ukkhipantassā: By the taking, to one who brings a burned, unextinguished torch near the fire, it is said that to one who puts it in its place.
1618-9.Vijjhātaṃ alātanti nibbutālātaṃ.Yathāvatthukaṃpācittiyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññena vā kataṃ visibbentassa anāpattīti yojanā.Visibbentassāti tappentassa.Aṅgāranti vītaccikaṃ aṅgāraṃ.Padīpujjalanādiketiādi-saddena ‘‘jotike jantāghare tathārūpapaccayā’’ti (pāci. 352) āgataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ettha catathārūpapaccayāti ṭhapetvā padīpādīni aññenapi tathārūpena paccayena.
1618-9. Vijjhātaṃ alātaṃ: An extinguished torch. Yathāvatthukaṃ pācittiyaṃ is said. There is no offense to one extinguishing what was done by another, this is the construction. Visibbentassā: To one heating. Aṅgāraṃ: Charcoal without embers. Padīpujjalanādike: With the ādi-word, it includes what is come in "jotike jantāghare tathārūpapaccayā" (pāci. 352). Here, having set aside tathārūpapaccayā, with another such reason besides lamps and so on.
Jotisamādahanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Jotisamādahanakathā.
1620-1.Majjhime deseti jambudīpe yattha bodhimaṇḍalaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ navayojanasatāvaṭṭe majjhimamaṇḍale, iminā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tattheva desodissakatāya niyatanti dasseti. Teneva vakkhatianāpattivāre‘‘paccantimepi vā dese’’ti. Cuṇṇanti sirīsacuṇṇādikaṃ cuṇṇaṃ.Abhisaṅkharatoti paṭiyādentassa.
1620-1. Majjhime dese: In Jambudīpa, where the Bodhimaṇḍala is, in that Majjhima region which is nine hundred yojanas in circumference, with this he shows that this training rule is fixed as being for there only, due to being directed to a place. On account of that he will say in the anāpattivāre, "paccantimepi vā dese". Cuṇṇaṃ: Powder such as sirīsa powder. Abhisaṅkharato: For one preparing.
1622-3.‘‘Māse ūnasaññino’’ti padacchedo. Atirekaddhamāse ūnasaññino vā atirekaddhamāse vimatissa vā dukkaṭanti yojanā. Atirekaddhamāse nhāyantassa anāpattīti yojanā.Samayesu ca nhāyantassa anāpattīti ettha ‘‘uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo gilānasamayo kammasamayo addhānagamanasamayo vātavuṭṭhisamayo’’ti (pāci. 363) dassitesu chasu samayesu aññatare sampatte samaye satiṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā ūnamāsepi nahāyantassa anāpattīti attho.
1622-3. The word break is, ‘‘Māse ūnasaññino’’. The construction is: There is a dukkaṭa for one who perceives the excess half-month as less, or is doubtful about the excess half-month. There is no offense for one bathing in an excess half-month, this is the construction. Samayesu ca nhāyantassa anāpattī: Here, in these six times shown: "hot season, hot weather season, sick season, work season, travel season, rainy season" (pāci. 363), in any one of the times having arrived, when there is mindfulness established, there is no offense for one bathing even in the deficient month, this is the meaning.
uṇhasamayonāma. Yathāha ‘‘uṇhasamayo nāma diyaḍḍho māso seso gimhāna’’nti (pāci. 364), vassānassa paṭhamo māsopariḷāhasamayonāma. Yathāha ‘‘pariḷāhasamayo nāma vassānassa paṭhamo māso’’ti (pāci. 364). ‘‘Yassa vinā nahānā na phāsu hotī’’ti (pāci. 364) vutto samayogilānasamayonāma. ‘‘Antamaso pariveṇampi sammaṭṭhaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. 364) vuttokammasamayonāma. ‘‘Addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmī’ti nahāyitabba’’nti (pāci. 364) vuttoaddhānagamanasamayonāma. ‘‘Bhikkhū sarajena vātena okiṇṇā honti, dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitāni kāye patitāni hontī’’ti (pāci. 364) vuttovātavuṭṭhisamayonāma.
uṇhasamayonāma: As it was said, "Hot season is one and a half months remaining of summer" (pāci. 364). The first month of the rains is called pariḷāhasamayo. As it was said, "Hot weather season is the first month of the rains" (pāci. 364). The season said to be "for whom there is no comfort without bathing" (pāci. 364) is called gilānasamayo. The season said to be "even the monastery is swept" (pāci. 364) is called kammasamayo. The time said to be "should bathe if going half a yojana" (pāci. 364) is called addhānagamanasamayo. The season said to be "bhikkhus are covered with dusty wind, two or three drops of water have fallen on the body" (pāci. 364) is called vātavuṭṭhisamayo.
Vālikaṃ ukkiritvānāti ettha sukkhāya nadiyā vālikaṃ ukkiritvā. Katāvāṭesupi ūnakaddhamāse nhāyantassapi anāpattīti.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘nhāyantassa anāpattī’’ti idaṃ paccāmasati.
Vālikaṃ ukkiritvānā: Here, having dug up sand from a dry river. Even for one bathing in prepared bathing spots in a deficient half-month, there is no offense. With ‘‘Tathā’’ it remembers "nhāyantassa anāpattī".
1624.Paccantimepi vā deseti jambudīpe yathāvuttamajjhimadesato bahi paccantimesu janapadesu, khuddakesu ca dīpesu.Sabbesanti laddhasamayānaṃ, aladdhasamayānañca sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.Āpadāsūti bhamaraanubandhādiāpadāsu. Yathāha ‘‘bhamarādīhi anubaddhassa udake nimujjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 366). Kāyacittasamuṭṭhānaṃeḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃnāma.
1624. Paccantimepi vā dese: In Jambudīpa, in the border regions outside of the Majjhima region as stated, and in the small islands. Sabbesaṃ: Of all the bhikkhus who have obtained the times and who have not obtained the times. Āpadāsū: In dangers such as being followed by bees. As it was said, "It is allowable to dive into the water for one being followed by bees and so on" (pāci. aṭṭha. 366). Kāyacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ is called eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
Nhānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Nhānakathā.
1625-7.‘‘Navaṃ nāma akatakappaṃ vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 369) pāḷivacanato ca ‘‘paṭiladdhanavacīvarenāti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368)aṭṭhakathāvacanato cacīvaranti ettha ‘‘nava’’nti seso. Kappiyaṃ binduṃ adatvā navaṃ cīvaraṃ bhikkhu paribhuñjati, tassevaṃ paribhuñjato pācittīti sambandho.Channanti khomādīnaṃ, niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Aññataraṃ navaṃ cīvaranti niddhāretabbaṃ.Yattha katthacīti ‘‘catūsu vā koṇesu tīsu vā dvīsu vā ekasmiṃ vā koṇe’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368)aṭṭhakathāvacanato cīvarakoṇesu yattha katthaci.
1625-7. From the Pāḷi statement, "Navaṃ nāma akatakappaṃ vuccati" (pāci. 369) and from the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "paṭiladdhanavacīvarenāti attho" (pāci. aṭṭha. 368), here cīvaraṃ means "navaṃ" is the remainder. If a bhikkhu uses a new robe without giving a kappiya dot, for that very one using it in that way, there is a pācittiya, this is the connection. Channaṃ: Of khoma and so on, the genitive is used in determining. A new robe, one of them, should be determined. Yattha katthacī: In any place whatsoever on the corners of the robe, from the Aṭṭhakathā statement, "in four or three or two or one corner" (pāci. aṭṭha. 368).
Kaṃsanīlenāti cammakāranīlena.Cammakāranīlaṃnāma pakatinīlaṃ.Gaṇṭhipadepana ‘‘cammakārā udake tiphalaṃ, ayogūthañca pakkhipitvā cammaṃ kāḷaṃ karonti, taṃ cammakāranīla’’nti vuttaṃ.Mahāpaccariyaṃpana ‘‘ayomalaṃ lohamalaṃ, etaṃ kaṃsanīlaṃ nāmā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368) vuttaṃ.Pattanīlena vāti ‘‘yo koci nīlavaṇṇo paṇṇaraso’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368)aṭṭhakathāyavuttena nīlapaṇṇarasena.Yena kenaci kāḷenāti aṅgārajallikādīsu aññatarena yena kenaci kāḷavaṇṇena. ‘‘Kaddamo nāma odako vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 369) vuttattākaddamenāti udakānukaddamasukkhakaddamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
Kaṃsanīlenāti: with pigment made by a coppersmith. Cammakāranīlaṃ nāma: Namely, pigment that is naturally dark. However, in the Gaṇṭhipada, it is said, "Coppersmiths make leather black by soaking tiphala and ayogūtha in water; that is cammakāranīla." In the Mahāpaccariya, it is said, "Ayomalaṃ lohamalaṃ, etaṃ kaṃsanīlaṃ nāmā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 368). Pattanīlena vāti: or with blue dye; with any blue-colored dye as stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "yo koci nīlavaṇṇo paṇṇaraso" (pāci. aṭṭha. 368). Yena kenaci kāḷenāti: with any black color, such as charcoal dust, etc. Because it is said that "Kaddamo nāma odako vuccatī" (pāci. 369), kaddamenāti includes mud that is watery, semi-dry, dry, etc.
‘‘Maṅgulassa piṭṭhippamāṇakaṃ mayūrassa akkhippamāṇaka’’nti yathākkamena yojanā.
"Maṅgulassa piṭṭhippamāṇakaṃ mayūrassa akkhippamāṇakaṃ": The arrangement should be done sequentially.
1628.‘‘Pāḷikappo kaṇṇikākappo’’ti yojanā, muttāvali viya pāḷiṃ katvā appitakappo ca kaṇṇikākārena appitakappo cāti attho.Katthacīti ettha ‘‘yathāvuttappadese’’ti seso. ‘‘Catūsu vā koṇesu tīsu vā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368) vuttattā‘‘anekaṃ vā’’ti āha. Vaṭṭamevavaṭṭakaṃ,iminā aññaṃ vikāraṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Yathāha ‘‘ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vaṭṭabinduṃ aññena kenacipi vikārena kappo na kātabbo’’ti (pāci. 368).
1628. "Pāḷikappo kaṇṇikākappo": The construction is like this: a design applied in the manner of a row (pāḷiṃ) and a design applied in the manner of an ear ornament (kaṇṇikā). Katthaci: Here, the rest is "in the place as stated". Because it is said, "Catūsu vā koṇesu tīsu vā" (pāci. aṭṭha. 368), he says "anekaṃ vā": or in many places. Vaṭṭameva vaṭṭakaṃ: A circle is just a circle; this shows that no other alteration is allowed. As he said, "Ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vaṭṭabinduṃ aññena kenacipi vikārena kappo na kātabbo" (pāci. 368): except for placing a circular dot, the design should not be made with any other alteration.
1629.‘‘Anāpatti pakāsitā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘vimatissacā’’ti etthaca-saddena samuccitaṃ ‘‘ādinne ādinnasaññino’’ti tatiyavikappaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘ādinne ādinnasaññī, anāpattī’’ti.
1629. "Anāpatti pakāsitā": This is combined with the ca in "vimatissacā" and said with reference to the third alternative, "ādinne ādinnasaññino". As he said, "Ādinne ādinnasaññī, anāpattī": if he takes it thinking it has been taken, there is no offense.
1630.‘‘Kappe naṭṭhepi vā’’tiādīhi ca yojetabbaṃ.Pi-saddena ‘‘kappakatokāse jiṇṇe’’ti idaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Yathāha ‘‘kappakatokāso jiṇṇo hotī’’ti.Tenakappakatenāti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Saṃsibbitesūti ettha ‘‘akappakatesū’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘kappakatena akappakataṃ saṃsibbitaṃ hotī’’ti. Nivāsanapārupanaṃkriyaṃ. Kappabinduanādānaṃakriyaṃ.
1630. These should also be construed with "kappe naṭṭhepi vā" etc. The particle pi combines with "kappakatokāse jiṇṇe". As he said, "Kappakatokāso jiṇṇo hotī": the designated area is worn out. Tena: Here, with the appointed person, it is in the instrumental sense. Saṃsibbitesū: Here, the rest is "akappakatesū". As he said, "Kappakatena akappakataṃ saṃsibbitaṃ hotī": by the appointed person, it is sewn onto the unappointed (cloth). Nivāsanapārupanaṃ is the kriyaṃ: the action. Kappabinduanādānaṃ is the akriyaṃ: non-action.
Dubbaṇṇakaraṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the section on making a cloth discolored.
1631-4.‘‘Vikappanā nāma dve vikappanā sammukhāvikappanā ca parammukhāvikappanā cā’’ti (pāci. 374) vuttattā‘‘vikappanā duve’’tiādimāha.Itīti nidassane, evanti attho. Kathaṃ sammukhāvikappanā hotīti āha‘‘sammukhāya…pe… niddise’’ti.Ekassāti ettha ‘‘byattassā’’ti seso. Idhabyattonāma vikappanapaccuddhāraṇavidhiṃ jānanto.
1631-4. Because it is said that "Vikappanā nāma dve vikappanā sammukhāvikappanā ca parammukhāvikappanā cā" (pāci. 374), he says "vikappanā duve" etc. Itī: is an example; it means thus. How is there a sammukhāvikappanā? He says "sammukhāya…pe… niddise". Ekassā: Here, the rest is "byattassā". Here, byatto means one who knows the procedure for the disposal of the assigning (vikappanā).
Yathāvacanayogatoti ‘‘imaṃ cīvara’nti vā, ‘imāni cīvarānī’ti vā, ‘etaṃ cīvara’nti vā, ‘etāni cīvarānī’ti vā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469)aṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ anatikkamma, vacanasambandhakkamenāti attho. Tadekadesasarūpaṃ dasseti‘‘imaṃ cīvara’’nti.
Yathāvacanayogato: "imaṃ cīvara'nti vā, 'imāni cīvarānī'ti vā, 'etaṃ cīvara'nti vā, 'etāni cīvarānī'ti vā" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469): not transgressing what is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, meaning in accordance with the connection of the words. He shows something that is similar in part: "imaṃ cīvara": this robe.
‘‘Apaccuddhaṭato’’ti iminā ‘‘na kappatī’’ti etassa hetuṃ dasseti.
With "apaccuddhaṭato", he shows the reason for "na kappatī": it is not allowable.
1635.‘‘Santaka’’miccādi paccuddharaṇappakāro.Yathāpaccayaṃ karohīti tuyhaṃ ruccanakaṃ karohīti attho.
1635. "Santaka" etc., is the method of relinquishing (paccuddharaṇa). Yathāpaccayaṃ karohī: do as you like.
1636.Sammukhāvikappantaraṃ dassetumāha‘‘aparā sammukhā vuttā’’tiādi. Attanā abhirucitassa yassa kassaci nāmaṃ gahetvāti yojanā.Sahadhamminanti ettha ‘‘pañcanna’’nti seso, niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ.
1636. To show another sammukhāvikappa, he says "aparā sammukhā vuttā" etc. Attanā abhirucitassa yassa kassaci nāmaṃ gahetvāti: Taking the name of whomever one personally favors, the construction is like this. Sahadhammina: Here, the rest is "pañcanna", a genitive plural in determination.
1639.Evanti vakkhamānāpekkhaṃ.Api-saddo pana saddassatthe.
1639. Eva: awaiting what is to be said. The word Api- is in the sense of a particle.
1640.Mittoti daḷhamitto, ‘‘tena vattabbaṃ ‘ko te mitto vā sandiṭṭho vā’’ti (pāci. 374) vacanato idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Puna tenapi bhikkhunā vattabbanti yojanā.
1640. Mitto: a close friend, "tena vattabbaṃ 'ko te mitto vā sandiṭṭho vā'" (pāci. 374): because of this statement, this is an indication. Again, it should be said by that monk; the construction is like this.
1641-2.‘‘Ahaṃ tissassa bhikkhuno dammī’ti vā…pe… ‘tissāya sāmaṇeriyā dammī’ti vā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) sesaaṭṭhakathāpāṭhena‘‘ida’’miccādipāṭho yojetabbo.
1641-2. With the rest of the Aṭṭhakathā passage "Ahaṃ tissassa bhikkhuno dammī'ti vā…pe… 'tissāya sāmaṇeriyā dammī'ti vā" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469), the passage beginning with "ida"- should be construed.
1643.Dvīsūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, ettha ‘‘vikappanāsū’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.
1643. Dvīsū: in determination, the plural; here, it is obtained from the context of "vikappanāsū".
1644-5.Idhapanaimasmiṃ sāsaneyena pana bhikkhunāsaha cīvarasāmikena taṃ vinayakammaṃ kataṃ, tassaavissāsenavissāsabhāvaṃ vinā so vinayakammakato bhikkhu taṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjeyya, tassa bhikkhuno pācittīti yojanā. Chandānurakkhanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayaṃkamma’’nti anussārāgamo veditabbo, vinayakammanti attho. Taṃ cīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa vā vissajjantassa vā dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1644-5. Idhapana: However, in this Dispensation, yena pana bhikkhunā saha cīvarasāmikena taṃ vinayakammaṃ kataṃ: with whichever monk, together with the owner of the robe, that vinaya act was done, tassa avissāsena: without confidence, without a state of trust, that monk who performed the vinaya act should use that robe, for that monk, there is a pācittiya; the construction is like this. For the sake of conforming to the intention, "vinayaṃkamma" should be understood as a repetition of the stem, meaning vinayakamma. Dukaṭa for one who possesses or disposes of that robe; the construction is like this.
1646.Paccuddhārakavatthesūti paccuddhaṭavatthesu.Apaccuddhārasaññinoti apaccuddhaṭasaññino.Tatthāti apaccuddhaṭavatthesu.Vematikassāti ‘‘paccuddhaṭāni nu kho mayā, apaccuddhaṭānī’’ti saṃsayāpannassa.
1646. Paccuddhārakavatthesū: in robes that have been relinquished. Apaccuddhārasaññino: one who perceives that it has not been relinquished. Tatthā: in those un-relinquished robes. Vematikassā: for one who is doubtful, thinking, "Have I relinquished them, or have I not relinquished them?"
1647.Paccuddhāraṇasaññissāti paccuddhaṭamidanti saññissa.Vissāsāti yassa vā cīvaraṃ vikappesi, tena apaccuddhaṭampi tassa vissāsā paribhuñjato ca. Yathāha ‘‘tassa vā vissasanto paribhuñjatī’’ti (pāci. 376).
1647. Paccuddhāraṇasaññissā: for one who perceives "this has been relinquished". Vissāsā: or, whose robe was assigned, even if not relinquished, if one uses it with the confidence of that monk. As he said, "Tassa vā vissasanto paribhuñjatī" (pāci. 376): or using it trusting that monk.
Vikappanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the section on assigning.
1648-9.‘‘Patto nāma dve pattā ayopatto mattikāpatto’’ti (pāci. 379) jātiyā kappiyapattānaṃ vuttattā āha‘‘adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ patta’’nti.Tādisanti adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ.Sūcigharaṃnāma sasūcikaṃ vā asūcikaṃ vā.Kāyabandhanaṃnāma paṭṭikā vā sūkarantakaṃ vā.Nisīdanaṃnāma sadasaṃ vuccati.
1648-9. Because it is said that "Patto nāma dve pattā ayopatto mattikāpatto" (pāci. 379): "There are two kinds of bowl: an iron bowl and a clay bowl", speaking of allowable bowls by type, he says "adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ patta": a bowl that does not require determination. Tādisaṃ: that kind of bowl. Sūcigharaṃ nāma: Namely, with or without a needle case. Kāyabandhanaṃ nāma: Namely, a belt or a pig's bristle. Nisīdanaṃ nāma: Namely, it is called a seat with a border.
Nidhentassāti etassa‘‘hasāpekkhassā’’ti visesanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘hasāpekkhopīti kīḷādhippāyo’’ti (pāci. 379).‘‘Kevala’’nti iminā dunnikkhittassa paṭisāmanādhippāyādiaññādhippāyābhāvaṃ dīpeti. Vakkhati ca ‘‘dunnikkhittamanāpatti, paṭisāmayato panā’’ti.
Nidhentassā: to this, the qualifier is "hasāpekkhassā": expectant of laughter. As he said, "Hasāpekkhopīti kīḷādhippāyo" (pāci. 379): "expectant of laughter means intending to play". With "kevala", he reveals the absence of other intentions such as the intention of retrieval etc. for one who has put it down carelessly. And he will say, "dunnikkhittamanāpatti, paṭisāmayato panā": there is no offense for putting it down carelessly, but if he retrieves it...
1650.Tenāpīti āṇattena.Tassāti āṇāpakassa.Tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, iminā ca upasampannasantake tikapācittiyanti idañca vuttameva hoti.
1650. Tenāpī: even with the command. Tassā: of the one commanding. Tikadukkaṭaṃ vutta: a triple dukaṭa is stated in terms of one who is not ordained, one who is uncertain about whether he is ordained, and one who is not ordained; and with this, it is also stated that there is a triple pācittiya for what belongs to an ordained person.
1651.Aññanti pāḷiyaṃ anāgataṃ pattatthavikādiparikkhāraṃ.
1651. Aññaṃ: another requisite for a bowl holder etc. not mentioned in the Pāḷi.
1652.Sabbesūti pāḷiyaṃ āgatesu ca anāgatesu ca sabbesu parikkhāresu.
1652. Sabbesū: in all requisites, both those mentioned in the Pāḷi and those not mentioned.
1653.Dhammakathaṃ katvāti ‘‘samaṇena nāma anihitaparikkhārena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 377)aṭṭhakathāgatanayena dhammakathaṃ katvā.Anihitaparikkhārenāti appaṭisāmitaparikkhārena. Nidheti ce, tathā anāpattīti yojanā.Avihesetukāmassāti vihesādhippāyarahitassa.Akīḷassāti kīḷādhippāyarahitassa kevalaṃ vattasīsena ‘‘paṭisāmetvā dassāmī’’ti apanidhentassa.
1653. Dhammakathaṃ katvā: having given a talk on the Dhamma in accordance with the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "samaṇena nāma anihitaparikkhārena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭatī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 377): "It is not proper for an ascetic to be without his requisites put away". Anihitaparikkhārena: with requisites that are not put away. If he puts them away, there is no offense in that way; the construction is like this. Avihesetukāmassā: for one without the intention to harm. Akīḷassā: for one without the intention to play, merely out of respect, for one who puts it away, thinking, "I will retrieve it and give it back".
1654.Adinnādānasamuṭṭhānāpattīnaṃ akusalādivasenapi sacittakattā āha‘‘idaṃ akusaleneva sacitta’’nti.
1654. Because the offenses arising from taking what has not been given also have intention as their cause as well as being unwholesome, he says "idaṃ akusaleneva sacitta": this is intentionally unwholesome only.
Cīvarāpanidhānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the section on putting away robes.
Surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.
The sixth chapter, the Surāpāna chapter.
1655.‘‘Tiracchānagataṃ pāṇa’’nti iminā ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 383) imasmiṃsikkhāpadeadhippetaṃ pāṇaṃ dasseti. Āpattinānattābhāvā āha‘‘mahantaṃ khuddakampi vā’’ti. Yathāha ‘‘imasmiñca sikkhāpade tiracchānagatoyeva ‘pāṇo’ti veditabbo, taṃ khuddakampi mahantampi mārentassa āpattinānākaraṇaṃ natthi, mahante pana upakkamamahantattā akusalaṃ mahantaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 382). ‘‘Mārentassa assā’’ti padacchedo.‘‘Khuddakampi vā mārentassā’’ti imināaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘antamaso mañcapīṭhaṃ sodhento maṅgulabījakepi pāṇasaññī nikkāruṇikatāya taṃ bhindanto apaneti, pācittiyaṃ. Tasmā evarūpesu ṭhānesu kāruññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā appamattena vattaṃ kātabba’’nti vuttavinicchayopi saṅgahito.
1655. With "tiracchānagataṃ pāṇa", he shows the living being intended in this rule of training: "yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pācittiya" (pāci. 383): "whichever monk should intentionally deprive a living being of life, there is a pācittiya". Because there is no difference in the offenses, he says "mahantaṃ khuddakampi vā": whether large or small. As he said, "imasmiñca sikkhāpade tiracchānagatoyeva 'pāṇo'ti veditabbo, taṃ khuddakampi mahantampi mārentassa āpattinānākaraṇaṃ natthi, mahante pana upakkamamahantattā akusalaṃ mahantaṃ hotī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 382): "and in this rule of training, only a living being is to be understood as 'life'; for one who kills it, whether small or large, there is no distinction in the committing of the offense, but in the case of a large one, because of the greatness of the effort, the unwholesome is great". "Mārentassa assā": the word break is "mārentassa assā". With "khuddakampi vā mārentassā", the determination stated in the Aṭṭhakathā is also included: "antamaso mañcapīṭhaṃ sodhento maṅgulabījakepi pāṇasaññī nikkāruṇikatāya taṃ bhindanto apaneti, pācittiyaṃ. Tasmā evarūpesu ṭhānesu kāruññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā appamattena vattaṃ kātabba": "Even when cleaning a bed or chair, if one perceives life even in mustard seeds and heartlessly crushes and removes them, there is a pācittiya. Therefore, in such situations, having established compassion, care should be taken in small measure".
1656.Ubhayatthacāti pāṇe vā apāṇe vāti ubhayatthāpi. Avasesavinicchayo panettha manussaviggahe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
1656. Ubhayattha ca: in both: in what has life or what does not have life. The remaining determinations here should be understood in the same way as stated in the section on human beings.
Sañciccapāṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the section on intentionally (harming) life.
1658.Sappāṇakanti saha pāṇakehīti sappāṇakaṃ. Ye paribhogena maranti, evarūpā idha ‘‘pāṇakā’’ti adhippetā.Assāti bhikkhuno.
1658. Sappāṇaka: with living beings. Those that die through consumption, such beings are intended here as "living beings". Assā: of the monk.
1659.‘‘Avicchijjā’’ti iminā vicchedeneva payoganānattaṃ hotīti dīpeti.Pattapūrampīti etthapi-saddo byatireke.
1659. With "avicchijjā", he shows that there is a difference in effort only with interruption. Pattapūrampī: Here, the pi-particle is an exception.
1660-1.Assa pācitti paridīpitāti sambandho.Tādisenāti sappāṇakena.Āviñchitvānāti paribbhamitvā.Yāguyoti ettha ‘‘uṇhā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Idañca pāṇīnaṃ māraṇatthaṃ yaṃ kiñci uṇhavatthuṃ sappāṇakena udakena anibbāpetuṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ.Taṃsappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ.Nhāyatopi vāti etthapi-saddenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
1660-1. Assa pācitti paridīpitāti sambandho: For him, the pācittiya is fully declared; this is the connection. Tādisenā: with such that has life. Āviñchitvānā: having whirled around. Yāguyo: Here, "uṇhā" is obtained by implication. And this is an indication of not extinguishing any hot substance with water that has living beings in order to kill the beings. Taṃ: that water with living beings. Nhāyatopi vā: Here, with the pi-particle, the determination stated in the Aṭṭhakathā—
‘‘Udakasoṇḍiṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā pavisitvā bahi nikkhamanatthāya vīciṃ uṭṭhāpayatopi. Soṇḍiṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā sodhentehi tato gahitaudakaṃ udakeyeva āsiñcitabbaṃ. Samīpamhi udake asati kappiyaudakassa aṭṭha vā dasa vā ghaṭe udakasaṇṭhānakappadese āsiñcitvā tattha āsiñcitabbaṃ. ‘Pavaṭṭitvā udake patissatī’ti uṇhapāsāṇe udakaṃ nāsiñcitabbaṃ. Kappiyaudakena pana pāsāṇaṃ nibbāpetvā āsiñcituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 387) –
"Udakasoṇḍiṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā pavisitvā bahi nikkhamanatthāya vīciṃ uṭṭhāpayatopi. Soṇḍiṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā sodhentehi tato gahitaudakaṃ udakeyeva āsiñcitabbaṃ. Samīpamhi udake asati kappiyaudakassa aṭṭha vā dasa vā ghaṭe udakasaṇṭhānakappadese āsiñcitvā tattha āsiñcitabbaṃ. 'Pavaṭṭitvā udake patissatī'ti uṇhapāsāṇe udakaṃ nāsiñcitabbaṃ. Kappiyaudakena pana pāsāṇaṃ nibbāpetvā āsiñcituṃ vaṭṭatī" (pāci. aṭṭha. 387)—
Vuttavinicchayaṃ sampiṇḍeti.
He combines the determination stated.
1662.Ubhayatthapīti sappāṇakepi appāṇakepīti ubhayattheva.
1662. Ubhayatthapī: in both what has life and what does not have life.
1664-6.Pāṇapaṭibaddhatāya kāraṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘patana’’ntiādi.Salabhādīnanti paṭaṅgādīnaṃ.Ñatvāti ettha pi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Evamuparipi.Padīpujjalananti ettha ‘‘viyā’’ti seso.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Sappāṇabhāvovasappāṇabhāvatā,taṃ.Bhuñjatoti bhuñjitabbato.
1664-6. To show the reason for being connected to living beings, he says "patana" etc. Salabhādīna: of moths etc. Ñatvā: Here, the pi-particle is understood by omission. Likewise above. Padīpujjalana: Here, the rest is "viyā": like. Etthā: in this rule of training. Sappāṇabhāvova is sappāṇabhāvatā: that is sappāṇabhāvatā. Bhuñjato: for one to consume.
Salabhādīnaṃ patanaṃ ñatvāpi suddhena cetasā padīpujjalanaṃ viya sapāṇabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi jalasaññāya bhuñjitabbato ettha paṇṇattivajjatā ñeyyāti yojanā.
Knowing the falling of moths etc., just as lighting a lamp with a pure intention, although knowing the state of having life, because of having to consume thinking that it is water, in this case, the permissibility through designation should be understood; the construction is like this.
‘‘siñcane’’tiādi.Siñcanaṃsiñcanasikkhāpadaṃsiñcane vuttaṃsiñcanavisaye paññattaṃ,idaṃ panasappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃparibhoge vuttaṃajjhohāravisaye paññattanti ayameva tassa ceva assa ca visesoti yojanā.
"siñcane" etc. Siñcanaṃ: the sprinkling rule of training. Siñcane vuttaṃ: stated in the context of sprinkling. Idaṃ pana: However, this sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ: the rule of training on (using water) with living beings. Paribhoge vuttaṃ: stated in the context of use, **ajjhohāravisaye paññattanti ayameva tassa ceva assa ca visesoti: this itself is the difference between that and this; the construction is like this.
Sappāṇakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the section on (using water) with living beings.
1667.Yathādhammanti yo yassa adhikaraṇassa vūpasamanāya dhammo vutto, teneva dhammenāti attho.‘‘Kiccādhikaraṇa’’nti iminā itarāni adhikaraṇāni upalakkhitāni. Yathāha ‘‘adhikaraṇaṃ nāma cattāri adhikaraṇāni vivādādhikaraṇaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kiccādhikaraṇa’’nti (pāci. 394). Apalokanakammādīni cattāri saṅghakiccaṃ nāma, tadeva samathehi adhikaraṇīyattā vūpasametabbattā adhikaraṇantikiccādhikaraṇaṃ. Puna nīhātabbanti puna nīharitabbaṃ, vūpasametabbanti attho. Iminā ‘‘akataṃ kamma’’ntiādināpāḷiyaṃdassitā dvādasa ukkoṭā upalakkhitāti daṭṭhabbā.Ukkoṭentassāti tassa tassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘akataṃ kamma’’ntiādīni vatvā uccālentassa yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na dentassa. Ettha capatiṭṭhātuṃ na dentassāti tassa pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana dhammena adhikaraṇaṃ nihaṭaṃ, taṃ sunihaṭameva.
1667. Yathādhammaṃ: Meaning, according to the Dhamma by which a case (adhikaraṇa) is settled; that is, by that same Dhamma. Kiccādhikaraṇa: By this, the other cases are indicated. As it is said, "A case (adhikaraṇa) means these four cases: dispute case (vivādādhikaraṇa), accusation case (anuvādādhikaraṇa), offense case (āpattādhikaraṇa), and business case (kiccādhikaraṇa)" (pāci. 394). The four kinds of Sangha business, beginning with asking for approval (apalokanakamma), are called Sangha business (saṅghakicca); that itself, because it is to be addressed and settled by means of the means of appeasement (samatha), is the case (adhikaraṇa): hence, kiccādhikaraṇa. Puna nīhātabbaṃ: Should be brought out again, meaning, should be settled. By this, the twelve accusations (ukkoṭa) shown in the Pali beginning with "akataṃ kammaṃ (the act was not done)," etc., should be understood as indicated. Ukkoṭentassa: Of one who, going to that particular bhikkhu, says, "The act was not done," etc., and disparages it, not allowing it to stand as it was established. Here, patiṭṭhātuṃ na dentassa is said to show the manner of its occurrence. But that case which is settled according to the Dhamma is indeed well settled.
1668.‘‘Akataṃ kammaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ kammaṃ, puna kātabbaṃ kamma’’ntivadatāvadantena bhikkhunā taṃ kammaṃ uccāletuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
1668. The meaning is that a bhikkhu who says, "The act was not done, the act was wrongly done, the act should be done again" should not try to overturn that act by speaking thus.
1669.Vippakateti āraddhāniṭṭhite.Tanti paṭikkosantaṃ.Saññāpetvāti katakammassa anavajjabhāvaṃ ñāpetvā.Na panaññathāti tathā asaññāpetvā.
1669. Vippakate: Begun but not finished. Taṃ: One who refuses. Saññāpetvā: Having made it known that the act done is blameless. Na panaññathā: But not without making it known in that way.
1670.Adhamme pana kammasminti yathāpāḷiāgate kammasmiṃ.Ubhayatthāpīti dhammakamme, adhammakamme vāti ubhayattha.
1670. Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ: In an act that is not according to the Pali. Ubhayatthāpi: In both, whether in an act according to the Dhamma or in an act not according to the Dhamma.
1671.Na ca kammārahassa vāti etthaca-saddo ‘‘vaggena cā’’ti yojetabbo.Ca-saddo vā-saddatthe daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Adhammena, vaggena vā na kammārahassa vā kata’’nti jānato ukkoṭane doso natthīti yojanā.
1671. Na ca kammārahassa vā: Here, the word ca should be connected with "vaggena ca." The word ca should be understood in the sense of "vā." The meaning is that there is no fault in accusing when one knows that the act was done "not according to the Dhamma, or by a faction, or not of one who is worthy of the act."
Ukkoṭanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Accusation.
1673.‘‘Duṭṭhullā nāma āpatti cattāri ca pārājikāni terasa ca saṅghādisesā’’ti (pāci. 399) vacanato pārājikānampi duṭṭhullattā, idha ca pārājikassa anadhippetattā idhādhippetameva dassetuṃ‘‘saṅghādisesa’’nti iminā duṭṭhulla-padaṃ visesitaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘ettha cattāri pārājikāni atthuddhāravasena dassitāni, saṅghādisesāpatti pana adhippetā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 399).Ñatvāti sāmaṃ vā aññato vā jānitvā.Chādayato tassa pariyāputāti ‘‘imaṃ jānitvā codessanti, sāressanti, nārocessāmī’’ti paṭicchādentassa tassa pariyāputā desitā.
1673. Because the Pārājikas are also grave (duṭṭhulla), according to the statement "A grave offense (āpatti) is the four Pārājikas and the thirteen Saṅghādisesas" (pāci. 399), and because Pārājika is not intended here, the word grave (duṭṭhulla) is qualified by saṅghādisesa to show what is intended here. As it is said, "Here, the four Pārājikas are shown by way of excluding the meaning; however, the Saṅghādisesa offense is what is intended" (pāci. aṭṭha. 399). Ñatvā: Having known, whether by oneself or from another. Chādayato tassa pariyāputā: It is taught as completely encompassing one who conceals it, thinking, "Knowing this, they will accuse me, remind me; I will not declare it."
1674-5.Dhuraṃ nikkhipitvāti ‘‘aññassa na ārocessāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā.Tassāti duṭṭhullassa. Paṭicchādanaṃ hetu kāraṇaṃ yassa ārocanassāti viggaho.Paṭicchādanahetukanti ārocanakiriyāya visesanaṃ, ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno, aññassa na ārocehī’’ti vatvā ārocanaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.Itīti vuttanidassane,hīti evakāratthe, evameva vadatīti attho.
1674-5. Dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā: Having laid down the burden, having made a laying down of the burden, thinking, "I will not declare it to another." Tassā: Of that grave offense. The compound is resolved as: Paṭicchādanaṃ hetu kāraṇaṃ yassa ārocanassa, that for which concealment is the cause and reason for the declaring. Paṭicchādanahetukaṃ: Is a qualifier of the act of declaring; it means that one says, "So-and-so has committed such-and-such a Saṅghādisesa offense; do not declare it to another," and then declares it. Itī: In the case of the statement; hī: in the sense of "eva (just)," meaning, he speaks just so.
Yāva koṭi na chijjati, tāva evaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ satampi sahassampi taṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati evāti yojanā.
As long as the limit (koṭi) is not broken, a bhikkhu commits that offense even hundreds and thousands of times; that is the meaning.
1676.Mūlenāti saṅghādisesaṃ āpannapuggalena.Ārocitassa dutiyassāti samānādhikaraṇaṃ. Mūlena ‘‘mama āpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ aññassa na ārocehī’’ti ārocitassadutiyabhikkhussa santikā suṇantenatatiyenanivattitvā tasseva dutiyassapakāsiteārocanassakoṭichinnāti vuccatīti yojanā.Koṭīti ārocanakiriyāvasānaṃ vuccati.
1676. Mūlena: By the person who committed the Saṅghādisesa. Ārocitassa dutiyassa: Of the second one who was told, which is in the same case. By the second bhikkhu who hears from the third one who turns back and reveals the declaration, having been told by the original one, "Do not declare to another my having committed this offense," it is said that the limit (koṭi) of the declaration is broken; that is the meaning. Koṭi: Is called the end of the act of declaring.
1677.Duṭṭhullāya ca duṭṭhullasaññīti ettha ‘‘ārocento’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.Itaresu pana dvīsūti duṭṭhullāya vematiko, aduṭṭhullasaññīti dvīsu.
1677. Duṭṭhullāya ca duṭṭhullasaññī: Here, "ārocento (declaring)" is obtained from the context. Itaresu pana dvīsu: But in the other two, being doubtful about a grave offense, or perceiving it as not grave.
1678.Aduṭṭhullāyāti pañcavidhāya lahukāpattiyā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vikappesu.Tikadukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭhanti aduṭṭhullāya duṭṭhullasaññivematikaaduṭṭhullasaññīnaṃ vasena dukkaṭattayaṃpāḷiyaṃ(pāci. 400) dassitanti attho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu.Anupasampannavāresūti tīsu anupasampannavikappesu.Dukkaṭanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭanti attho.
1678. Aduṭṭhullāya: For a minor offense of five kinds. Sabbattha: In all alternatives. Tikadukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ: A triple dukkata is shown in the Pali (pāci. 400) based on the perception of a grave offense in a minor offense, being doubtful, or perceiving it as not grave; that is the meaning. Sabbattha: In all. Anupasampannavāresū: In the three alternatives of one who is not fully ordained. Dukkaṭaṃ: A triple dukkata based on the perception of one who is fully ordained in one who is not fully ordained, being doubtful, or perceiving it as not fully ordained; that is the meaning.
1679-80.‘‘Saṅghassa bhedanādīni bhavissantī’’tiādīhi sabbehi padehi ‘‘na āroceti ce, doso natthī’’ti idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Sabhāgaṃ vā na passatīti tathā apassanto na āroceti ce, doso natthi. Kakkhaḷo ayanti na āroceti ce, doso natthi.
1679-80. Each of the phrases beginning with "Saṅghassa bhedanādīni bhavissanti (there will be divisions in the Sangha)," etc., should be connected with "na āroceti ce, doso natthi (if he does not declare it, there is no fault)." Sabhāgaṃ vā na passati: If he does not see one who shares the same views, and does not declare it, there is no fault. Kakkhaḷo ayaṃ (this one is harsh); if he does not declare it, there is no fault.
1681.Aññassa anārocanena āpajjitabbato‘‘akriya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ārocetabba’’nti anuññātassa anārocanaṃ anādaramantarena na hotīti āha‘‘dukkhavedana’’nti. Ettha camātikaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘samanubhāsanasadisānevā’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. duṭṭhallasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, idha‘‘dhuranikkhepatulyāvā’’ti, ubhayattha nāmamattameva viseso, ekameva samuṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
1681. Because it is to be committed by not declaring to another, it is called akriya (non-action). Because not declaring what is allowed as "ārocetabbaṃ (should be declared)" does not occur without disrespect, he says, dukkhavedanaṃ (painful feeling). Here, in the Mātikā Commentary, it is said, "It is similar to admonishment" (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. duṭṭhallasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā); here, dhuranikkhepatulyāvā (or similar to laying down the burden); in both places, only the name is different; the arising is the same; that should be understood.
Duṭṭhullakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Grave Offense.
1682.Ūnavīsativassanti ettha ‘‘jāna’’nti seso, ‘‘ūnavīsativasso’’ti jānantoti attho.Ūnavīsativassonāma paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya aparipuṇṇavīsatisaṃvaccharo.Yoti yo bhikkhu upajjhāyo hutvā.Kareyyāti kārāpeyya. Upasampajjatītiupasampado,taṃ. Yo jānaṃ ūnavīsativassaṃ puggalaṃupasampadaṃupasampannaṃ kareyya,tassaevaṃ upasampādentassa bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.Sesānanti ‘‘gaṇassa ca ācariyassa ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 404)pāḷiyaṃdassitānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
1682. Ūnavīsativassaṃ: Here, "jānaṃ (knowing)" is to be supplied; the meaning is "knowing that he is under twenty years old." Ūnavīsativasso means one whose twentieth year is not complete, counting from rebirth. Yo: The bhikkhu who, having become an preceptor (upajjhāyo). Kareyyā: Should cause to be done. Upasampajjatīti upasampadā, that is full ordination. The meaning is that if a bhikkhu, knowing, should cause a person under twenty years old to be upasampadaṃ (fully ordained), fully ordained, there is a Pācittiya for that bhikkhu who thus gives full ordination. Sesānaṃ: Taking of those shown in the Pali as, "There is a dukkata for the group and for the teacher" (pāci. 404).
1683.Ūnavīsativassabhāvaṃjānatā vā ajānatā vābhikkhunā yo puggalo ce upasampādito, so anupasampannova hoti, punasoparipuṇṇavīsativasso samāno upasampannokātabboupasampādetabboyevāti yojanā.
1683. If a person is fully ordained by a bhikkhu knowing or not knowing that he is under twenty years old, he is not fully ordained; again, that one, having become twenty years old, being complete, should indeed be kātabbo (fully ordained), should indeed be fully ordained; that is the meaning.
1684.Dasavassaccayenaparipuṇṇadasavasso hutvā upajjhāyassa satoassabhikkhupaṭiññassa aññesaṃ upasampādane koci dosoceekaṃsenanatthina vijjatīti yojanā.
1684. After the passing of ten years (dasavassaccayena), having become one whose ten years are complete, when the preceptor (upajjhāyassa) is present, there is certainly no fault at all in the undertaking of that bhikkhu in fully ordaining others; that is the meaning.
1685.Taṃ bhikkhunti ūnavīsativasso hutvā upasampajjitvā paripuṇṇadasavasso upajjhāyo hutvā upasampādentaṃ taṃ bhikkhupaṭiññaṃ.Gaṇo ce paripūratīti majjhimadese dasavaggo, paccantimesu janapadesu pañcavaggo gaṇo sace anūno hoti.Teti upasampāditā.Sūpasampannāti suṭṭhu upasampannā.
1685. Taṃ bhikkhuṃ: That undertaking of the bhikkhu who, having been under twenty years old, was fully ordained, and who, having become a preceptor whose ten years are complete, fully ordains. Gaṇo ce paripūratī: If the group is not deficient, being ten in the Middle Country, and five in the border regions. Te: Those who are fully ordained. Sūpasampannā: Are well fully ordained.
1686-7.Yo bhikkhu upajjhāyo hutvā ‘‘ūnavīsativassapuggalaṃ upasampādayissāmi’’iti gaṇampi vā ācariyampi vā pattampi vā pariyesati,māḷakañca sammannatibaddhasīmaṃ bandhati, tassasabbesupayogesu dukkaṭaṃ. Tathā ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ. Tathā dvīsu kammavācāsupi dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1686-7. If a bhikkhu, having become a preceptor, seeks a group or a teacher or a bowl, thinking, "I will fully ordain a person under twenty years old," and appoints a boundary (māḷakaṃ sammannati), binds a fixed boundary (baddhasīmaṃ bandhati), there is a dukkata for him in all efforts. Likewise, there is a dukkata for the motion. Likewise, there is a dukkata in the two Kammavācās; that is the meaning.
1688-9.Vīsati ca tāni vassāni cāti vīsativassāni, ūnāni vīsativassāni yassa so ūnavīsativasso, ūnavīsativassoti saññā ūnavīsativassasaññā, sā etassa atthīti ‘‘ūnavīsativassasaññī’’iti vattabbe nipātanalakkhaṇena vassa-saddalopaṃ katvā ‘‘ūnavīsatisaññī’’ti vuttaṃ, tassaūnavīsatisaññissa. Paripuṇṇāni vīsativassāni etassāti ‘‘paripuṇṇavīsativasso’’ti vattabbe nipātanalakkhaṇena vīsativassa-saddalopaṃ katvā ‘‘paripuṇṇo’’ti puggalo vuccati, tasmiṃparipuṇṇe,paripuṇṇavīsativasse puggaleti attho.Ubhayatthāti ūnavīsatiparipuṇṇavīsativassesu ubhosu puggalesu.
1688-9. Vīsati ca tāni vassāni cāti vīsativassāni (twenty, and those are years: twenty years); ūnāni vīsativassāni yassa so ūnavīsativasso (deficient, twenty years, of whom, he is under twenty years old); ūnavīsativassoti saññā ūnavīsativassasaññā (under twenty years old, that is the perception: perception of under twenty years old); sā etassa atthīti "ūnavīsativassasaññī"iti vattabbe (that exists for him: "perceiver of under twenty years old," it should be said); by way of the characteristic of elision (nipātanalakkhaṇena), having elided the word "vassa," "ūnavīsatisaññī"ti vuttaṃ (perceiver of under twenty) is said; of that ūnavīsatisaññissa (perceiver of under twenty). Paripuṇṇāni vīsativassāni etassāti "paripuṇṇavīsativasso"ti vattabbe (complete, twenty years, of whom: "one whose twenty years are complete," it should be said); by way of the characteristic of elision, having elided the word "vīsativassa," "paripuṇṇo"ti puggalo vuccati (complete, the person is called); in that paripuṇṇe (complete one), meaning, in a person whose twenty years are complete. Ubhayatthā: In both persons, in those who are under twenty and those whose twenty years are complete.
Ūnavīsativassakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Under Twenty Years Old.
1691.Theyyasatthenasaddhinti ‘‘theyyasattho nāma corā katakammā vā honti akatakammā vā’’tiādinā (pāci. 409)padabhājanevuttasarūpena satthasaṅkhātena janasamūhena sahāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sahādiyoge karaṇavacanaṃ.Jānantoti ‘‘theyyasattho’’ti jānanto.Saṃvidhāyāti ‘‘gacchāmāvuso, gacchāma bhante, gacchāmāvuso, ajja vā hiyyo vā pare vā apare vā gacchāmā’’tipadabhājanevuttanayena saṃvidahitvāti attho.Magganti ekaddhānamaggaṃ, ettha ‘‘antamaso gāmantarampī’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya antamaso gāmantarampī’’ti.Pācittiyaṃ siyāti ‘‘gāme gāmantare gāmantare āpatti pācittiyassa. Agāmake araññe addhayojane addhayojane āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti vuttappakāraṃ pācittiyaṃ bhaveyya.
1691. Theyyasatthena saddhiṃ: "Theyyasattho nāma corā katakammā vā honti akatakammā vā (a caravan of thieves is called thieves, whether they have done an act or not done an act)," etc., as with the group of people called caravan (sattha) having such a nature as is stated in the Padabhājana (pāci. 409). This is what is said. In connection with "saha (with)," the instrumental case is used. Jānanto: Knowing, "It is a caravan of thieves." Saṃvidhāyā: Having conspired, in the way stated in the Padabhājana as, "Let us go, friend; let us go, venerable sir; let us go, friend; today or tomorrow or the day after tomorrow or later, let us go"; that is the meaning. Maggaṃ: A single long road; here, "antamaso gāmantarampi (at least even to another village)" is to be supplied. As he says, "He might go along a single long road, at least even to another village." Pācittiyaṃ siyā: There would be a Pācittiya of the kind stated as, "In each village, in each village in between, there is a Pācittiya offense. In a village-free forest, in each half-yojana in between, there is a Pācittiya offense."
1692.Na uddhaṭoti idha na vutto.
1692. Na uddhaṭo: Here, not stated.
1693-4.Maggāṭavivisaṅketeti maggavisaṅkete, aṭavivisaṅkete ca.Yathāvatthukamevāti pācittiyameva.Tesūti satthikesu.Asaṃvidahantesūti saṃvidhānaṃ akarontesu.Sayaṃ vidahatopi cāti attanā saṃvidahantassa ca.Ubhayatthāti theyyasatthe vā atheyyasatthe vāti dvīsu.
1693-4. Maggāṭavivisaṅkete: In a road crossing of danger, and in a forest crossing of danger. Yathāvatthukameva: Just a Pācittiya. Tesū: In those with caravans. Asaṃvidahantesū: In those not conspiring. Sayaṃ vidahatopi ca: And also for one who conspires by himself. Ubhayatthā: In both, whether with a caravan of thieves or with a caravan that is not of thieves.
1695.Atheyyasatthasaññissāti ettha ‘‘ubhayatthā’’ti anuvattetabbaṃ. Kālassāyantikāliko,visaṅketo, tasmiṃ, kālasambandhini visaṅkete ca anāpattīti attho.‘‘Kālike’’ti iminā visaṅketavisesanena maggāṭavivisaṅketepi āpattiyevāti dīpeti.
1695. Atheyyasatthasaññissa: Here, "ubhayattha" should be supplied. Kālassāyanti kāliko, visaṅketo (belonging to a time, a danger); in that danger that belongs to a time, there is no offense; that is the meaning. By this qualifier of danger as kālike (belonging to a time), he indicates that there is indeed an offense in a road crossing of danger or a forest crossing of danger.
1696.Kāyacittato, kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhānato idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ kathitanti yojanā.
1696. This training rule is said to have its origin from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind, and from the standpoint of arising: the origin from a caravan of thieves; that is the meaning.
Theyyasatthakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Caravan of Thieves.
1697.Sattamanti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāyā’’tiādinā (pāci. 413) uddiṭṭhaṃ sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhānenāti bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhānasikkhāpadena.Samuṭṭhānādināti samuṭṭhānādinā vinicchayena.Tulyanti sadisaṃ.Kocipīti appamattakopi.
1697. Sattamaṃ: The seventh training rule stated as, "Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāyā (whatever bhikkhu conspiring with a woman)," etc. (pāci. 413). Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhānenā: By the training rule of conspiring with a bhikkhuni. Samuṭṭhānādinā: By way of the arising, etc., and the decision. Tulyaṃ: Similar. Kocipī: Even a small amount.
Saṃvidhānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Conspiring.
1698.Ete pañca dhammā antarāyakarāti pakāsitāti yojanā. Idha ayaṃantarāyakara-saddopāḷiyaṃāgatena antarāyika-saddena samānattho. Tasmā kammantarāyikā, kilesantarāyikā, vipākantarāyikā, upavādantarāyikā, āṇāvītikkamantarāyikāti ime pañca antarāyikā dhammā bhagavatā pakāsitāti vuttaṃ hoti.
1698. These five things are declared to be obstructive (antarāyakarā); that is the meaning. Here, this word antarāyakara is synonymous with the word antarāyika that occurs in the Pali. Therefore, these five obstructive (antarāyika) things are declared by the Blessed One: karma-obstructive (kammantarāyika), defilement-obstructive (kilesantarāyika), result-obstructive (vipākantarāyika), disparagement-obstructive (upavādantarāyika), transgression-of-command-obstructive (āṇāvītikkamantarāyika); this is what is said.
antarāyo,diṭṭhadhammikādianattho, anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlātiantarāyikā(sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.417; kaṅkhā. abhi. ṭī. ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
antarāyo, a meaning such as visible-in-this-life (diṭṭhadhammikādi); being engaged in that obstacle in the sense of non-transgression, or deserving of the fruit of an obstacle, or being by nature a cause of an obstacle: therefore, antarāyikā (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.417; kaṅkhā. abhi. ṭī. ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
kammantarāyikā,tathā bhikkhunidūsakakammaṃ. Taṃ pana mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassa. Idañca micchācāralakkhaṇassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Na hi bhikkhuniyā dhammarakkhitabhāvo atthi. Pākatikabhikkhunivasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ariyāya pana pavattaṃ apāyasaṃvattanikameva. Nandamāṇavako (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.7; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.68 uppalavaṇṇattherīvatthu; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.34) cettha nidassanaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāvasena vā na saggantarāyikatā, mokkhantarāyikatā pana mokkhatthāya paṭipattiyā vidūsanato. Abhibhavitvā pana pavattiyā saggantarāyikatāpi na sakkā nivāretunti vadanti.
kammantarāyikā, such as an act of corrupting a bhikkhuni. However, that makes an obstacle only to liberation, not to heaven. And this is said because of the absence of the characteristic of wrong conduct. For a bhikkhuni does not have the state of being protected by the Dhamma. And this is said in terms of a natural bhikkhuni. However, for an Ariya one, what occurs leads only to states of woe. Nandamāṇavako (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.7; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.68 uppalavaṇṇattherīvatthu; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.34) is an example here. Or, because of the equal intention of both, it is not obstructive to heaven, but it is obstructive to liberation because it corrupts the practice for the sake of liberation. However, they say that even obstructiveness to heaven cannot be prevented by acting after overcoming.
kilesantarāyikānāma. Paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakānaṃ paṭisandhicittuppādadhammāvipākantarāyikānāma. Paṇḍakādiggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ sabbāyapi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Ariyūpavādāupavādantarāyikānāma. Te pana yāva ariye na khamāpenti, tāvadeva, na tato paraṃ. Sañcicca āpannā sattāpattikkhandhāāṇāvītikkamantarāyikānāma. Tepi yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ vā paṭijānāti, na vuṭṭhāti vā na deseti vā, tāvadeva, na tato paraṃ.
kilesantarāyikā is the condition for the arising of consciousness at rebirth for eunuchs, animals, and hermaphrodites. vipākantarāyikā is also that. And the taking of eunuchs, etc., here, is merely indicative, because all causeless rebirths are result-obstructive. Disparagement of an Ariya one is called upavādantarāyikā. However, those last only until they ask forgiveness of the Ariya one, not beyond that. The seven groups of offenses that are intentionally committed are called āṇāvītikkamantarāyikā. However, those last only until he acknowledges the state of a bhikkhu, or until he leaves or declares it, not beyond that.
1699-700.
1699-700.
‘‘Anantarāyikā ete;
"These are obstacles; I understand the Dhamma taught by the Buddha as they are,"—
Evaṃ dutiyagāthā vattabbā. Tathā avutte ‘‘tikkhattu’’ntiādigāthā paṭhamagāthāya saddhiṃ ghaṭanā eva na siyā. Tasmā etthāyaṃ gāthā parihīnāti viññāyati.
Thus, the second verse should be spoken. If it is not spoken in this way, the verse beginning with "three times" would not fit with the first verse. Therefore, it is understood that this verse is missing here.
Eteti ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti bhagavatā pakāsitā pañca dhammā ‘‘yathā anantarāyikā honti, tathā ahaṃ muninā desitaṃ dhammaṃ ājānāmī’’tiyobhikkhu vadeyya,so panabhikkhu tikkhattuṃ vattabboti sambandho. Kehi kathaṃ vattabboti āha‘‘ye passantī’’tiādi. Ye tathāvāditaṃ bhikkhuṃpassanti,‘‘asuko āyasmā evaṃvādī’’ti paratosuṇanti ca,tehi.So panabhikkhu ‘‘mā āyasmā evaṃ avacā’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabboti yojanā.
Ete (These): The five things declared by the Blessed One as "antarāyikā (obstacles)." Yo (Whoever): The bhikkhu pana (however) who would say, "I understand the Dhamma taught by the Buddha as these obstacles are," that bhikkhu should be told three times. Kehi kathaṃ कर्तव्योti āha (By whom and how should he be told?) The text says ‘‘ye passantī’’ (Those who see) etc. ‘‘passanti (see), suṇanti ca (and hear) that bhikkhu speaking in such a way, tehi (by them). The construction is So pana (However), that bhikkhu should be told three times, "Mā āyasmā evaṃ avacā (Venerable, do not speak thus)."
1701.Avadantassāti taṃ disvā vā sutvā vā yathāvuttanayena avadantassa.Dukkaṭanti ñātadukkaṭaṃ.Taṃduladdhiṃ.Anissajatoti bhikkhūhi evaṃ vuttepi anissajantassa. Tathā dukkaṭanti atidisati.
1701.Avadantassā (To one who does not speak): To one who, having seen or heard him, does not speak in the manner described above. Dukkaṭa (A wrong-doing): A dukkata of acknowledgment. Taṃ (That): That wrong view. Anissajato (To one who does not relinquish): Even when the bhikkhus have spoken thus, to one who does not relinquish it. Similarly, he indicates a dukkata.
1702.Kammavācāyāti tatiyāya kammavācāya.Osāneti pariyosāne,yyakāre patteti adhippāyo.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī na paṭinissajjati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Dhammakamme vematiko na paṭinissajjati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Dhammakamme adhammakammasaññī na paṭinissajjati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 421) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Adhamme tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttanti adhammakamme dhammakammasaññivematikaadhammakammasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
1702.Kammavācāyā (By the Kammavācā): By the third kammavācā. Osāne (At the end): At the conclusion, the intention is to reach the yya sound. Tikapācittiyaṃ vutta (The triple pācittiya is stated): "In a lawful act, one who perceives a lawful act and does not relinquish [the view], there is an offense of pācittiya. In a lawful act, one who is doubtful and does not relinquish [the view], there is an offense of pācittiya. In a lawful act, one who perceives an unlawful act and does not relinquish [the view], there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 421), the triple pācittiya is stated. Adhamme tikadukkaṭaṃ vutta (The triple dukkata is stated in an unlawful act): In an unlawful act, a triple dukkata is stated based on perceiving a lawful act, being doubtful, or perceiving an unlawful act.
1703.‘‘Anāpatti akatakammassā’’ti padacchedo.Kammaṃnāma samanubhāsanakammaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anāpatti asamanubhāsantassā’’ti (pāci. 422).
1703.‘‘Anāpatti akatakammassā (There is no offense for one who has not done the act)’’: This is the word division. Kammaṃ (Act) means the act of formal censure (samanubhāsanakammaṃ). As it says, "anāpatti asamanubhāsantassā (there is no offense for one who does not formally censure)" (pāci. 422).
Ariṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Ariṭṭha Story.
1704.Ñatvāti anosāritabhāvaṃ sayameva vā parato vā tassa vā santikā ñatvā.Akatānudhammenāti akato osāraṇasaṅkhāto anudhammo yassa so akatānudhammo, tena, sahayoge karaṇavacanaṃ.Tathāvādikabhikkhunāti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādiṃ vadantena bhikkhunā. ‘‘Akatānudhammenā’’ti iminā samānādhikaraṇaṃ.Saṃvaseyyāti uposathādikaṃ saṅghakammaṃ kareyya.Bhuñjeyya cāti āmisasambhogaṃ vā dhammasambhogaṃ vā kareyya.Saha seyya vāti nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjeyya.
1704.Ñatvā (Having known): Having known the state of not being restored, either oneself, or from another, or from that person's presence. Akatānudhammenā (By one who has not done the following): He whose restoration (osāraṇa) has not been done is akatānudhammo, by him; the instrumental case in the sense of association. Tathāvādikabhikkhunā (By the bhikkhu who speaks thus): By the bhikkhu who says, "I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One in that way," etc. This is in apposition to "akatānudhammenā." Saṃvaseyyā (Should live together): Should perform sanghakamma like Uposatha etc. Bhuñjeyya cā (And should partake): Should partake of material or Dhamma association. Saha seyya vā (Or should lie down with): Even without deference (anūpacārepi), should lie down under one roof.
1705.Idāni yathāvuttapācittiyassa khettaniyamaṃ dassetumāha‘‘uposathādikaṃ kamma’’ntiādi.Ādi-saddena pavāraṇaṃ gahitaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘uposathaṃ vā pavāraṇaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 425).Tena sahāti ukkhittakena saha.‘‘Kammassa pariyosāne’’ti idaṃ saṃvāsena āpattikhettanidassanaṃ.
1705.Now, to show the scope restriction of the pācittiya mentioned above, he says, ‘‘uposathādikaṃ kamma’’ (acts such as the Uposatha) etc. By the word ‘‘ādi’’ (etc.), pavāraṇa is included. As it says, "uposathaṃ vā pavāraṇaṃ vā (either the Uposatha or the Pavāraṇa)" (pāci. 425). Tena sahā (With him): With the one who has been suspended. ‘‘Kammassa pariyosāne’’ (At the conclusion of the act): This shows the scope of the offense in living together.
1706.Ekeneva payogena bahuṃ yāmakālikādiāmisaṃgaṇhatoekaṃpācittiyaṃ. Tathā ekeneva payogena bahuṃ āmisaṃ dadatopiekaṃpācittiyaṃ.Bahūsupayogesubahūnipācittiyānīti yojanā. Iminā ca āmisasambhogena tulyaphalaṃ dhammasambhogampi sahacariyena āhāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha pana padādīhi uddisantassa vā uddisāpentassa vā padasodhamme vuttanayena āpatti veditabbā.
1706.For taking much āmisaṃ (material), such as allowable for a watch, etc., with one effort, there is ekaṃ (one) pācittiya. Similarly, for giving much material with one effort, there is ekaṃ (one) pācittiya. In bahūsu (many) efforts, there are bahūni (many) pācittiyas. By this, it should be understood that Dhamma association, which has an equal result to material association, is also covered by association. There, however, the offense should be understood in the manner stated in the Padasodhamma for one who teaches or has others teach, beginning with verses.
1707.Itaroti pakatatto.Itarasminti ukkhittake.Paroti pakatatto.Ubhopi vāti pakatattaukkhittā dvepi vā. ‘‘Ekattha ekato nipajjantī’’ti seso. Imesu tīsupi ṭhānesu ‘‘pācittī’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.
1707.Itaro (The other): The one in good standing. Itarasmiṃ (To the other): To the one who has been suspended. Paro (The other): The one in good standing. Ubhopi vā (Or both): Or both the one in good standing and the one who has been suspended. "Ekattha ekato nipajjantī (They lie down together in one place)" is the remainder. In these three cases, "pācittī" is obtained from the context.
1708.Uṭṭhahitvā punappunaṃ nipajjantassa nipajjanapayogānaṃ vasena āpattiyo siyunti ajjhāhārayojanā kātabbā. ‘‘Ukkhittake nipannasmi’’ntiādinā vuttāpattivinicchayo kattha hotīti āha‘‘ekanānūpacāresu, ekacchanne vinicchayo’’ti.Nānūpacāresūti ettha pi-saddo ca ‘‘vinicchayo’’ti ettha ayanti ca yojetabbo. Eko upacāro assāti ekūpacāraṃ, nānā upacāro assāti nānūpacāraṃ, ekūpacārañca nānūpacārañcaekanānūpacārāniekadesasarūpekasesena, tesu. Ekato channāni ekacchannāni, tesu ekacchannesūti vattabbe vaṇṇalopena vā vacanavipallāsena vā‘‘ekacchanne’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekanānūpacāresupi senāsanesu ekacchannesu ayaṃ yathāvuttaāpattivinicchayo daṭṭhabboti attho.
1708.It should be construed and supplied that offenses occur based on the efforts of repeatedly getting up and lying down. Where does the determination of offenses stated by "Ukkhittake nipannasmi (When the suspended one lies down)" occur? He says ‘‘ekanānūpacāresu, ekacchanne vinicchayo’’ (The determination is in single and non-deference, under one roof). Here, the word pi (also) should be added to Nānūpacāresu (In non-deference) and aya (this) to ‘‘vinicchayo’’ (determination). Having one deference is ekūpacāraṃ, having different deference is nānūpacāraṃ, ekūpacārañca nānūpacārañca ekanānūpacārāni ekadesasarūpekasesena (single deference and non-deference are single and non-deference) in them. Ekattha channāni ekacchannāni (Roofs in one place are one roof), in those ekacchannesu, ‘‘ekacchanne’’ (under one roof) is said by deletion of a letter or inversion of words. The meaning is that this determination of offenses as stated above should be seen in dwellings with single and non-deference, under one roof.
1709.Ubhayatthāpīti ukkhittānukkhittesu dvīsupi.
1709.Ubhayatthāpī (In both cases): In both cases, whether suspended or not.
1710.‘‘Saññissa osāritoti cā’’ti padacchedo.
1710.‘‘Saññissa osāritoti cā (And to one who is aware that he has been restored)’’: This is the word division.
Ukkhittakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Suspension Story.
1712.Tathā vināsitanti ‘‘ajjatagge te āvuso samaṇuddesa na ceva so bhagavā satthā apadisitabbo, yampi caññe samaṇuddesā labhanti bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ, sāpi te natthi, cara pire vinassā’’ti (pāci. 429) vuttanayena nāsitaṃ. ‘‘Tathā nāsitaṃ samaṇuddesa’’nti (pāci. 428) vacanato ‘‘samaṇuddesa’’nti seso.Jānanti vuttanayena ‘‘nāsito aya’’nti jānanto.Upalāpeyyāti ‘‘upalāpeyya vāti tassa pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā dassāmī’’ti (pāci. 430)padabhājaneāgatanayena saṅgaṇheyya.Tenāti nāsitena.Upaṭṭhāpeyya vāti tena diyyamānāni cuṇṇamattikādīni sādiyanto tena attano upaṭṭhānaṃ kārāpeyya vā.‘‘Tenā’’ti idaṃ sahatthe karaṇavasena ‘‘sambhuñjeyyā’’tiādīhi ca yojetabbaṃ.Vāti ettha gāthābandhavasena rasso. Sambhogasahaseyyā anantarasikkhāpade vuttanayā eva. Tasmā āpattiparicchedopettha tasmiṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
1712.Tathā vināsita (Thus destroyed): Destroyed in the manner stated: "From today onward, friend novice, neither should you refer to that Blessed One as the Teacher, nor do you have that which other novices obtain, co-sleeping with bhikkhus for two or three nights; go away, perish!" (pāci. 429). "Tathā nāsitaṃ samaṇuddesa (Thus destroyed, the novice)" (pāci. 428), "samaṇuddesa (novice)" is the remainder. Jāna (Knowing): Knowing that "he is destroyed" in the manner stated. Upalāpeyyā (Should coax): Should associate in the manner that comes in the padabhājane (word analysis) "upalāpeyya vāti tassa pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā dassāmī (whether he coaxes, 'I will give you his bowl or robe or allocation or inquiry')" (pāci. 430). Tenā (With him): With the destroyed one. Upaṭṭhāpeyya vā (Or should have him attend): Or, while enjoying the powdered earth etc. given by him, should have his attendance done by him. ‘‘Tenā’’ (With him): This should also be connected to "sambhuñjeyyā (should partake)" etc. in the sense of doing with one's own hand. Vā (Or): Here, it is shortened due to the meter of the verse. Association and co-sleeping are in the manner stated in the immediately preceding training rule. Therefore, the determination of offenses here should be understood in the manner stated there.
1713.Atthuddhāravasenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 428) vuttā tisso nāsanā dassetumāha‘‘saṃvāsena…pe… tisso’’ti. Tattha tīsu katamā adhippetāti āha‘‘etthā’’tiādi. Daṇḍakammena nāsanā ettha adhippetāti yojanā. Etāsaṃ vibhāgo ca ‘‘tattha āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhepanā saṃvāsanāsanā nāma. ‘Dūsako nāsetabbo, mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsethā’ti ayaṃ liṅganāsanā nāma. ‘Ajjatagge te āvuso samaṇuddesa na ceva so bhagavā satthā apadisitabbo’ti ayaṃ daṇḍakammanāsanā nāmā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 428)aṭṭhakathāyavutto.
1713.To show the three destructions stated in the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (commentary) (pāci. aṭṭha. 428) in terms of extracting the meaning, he says, ‘‘saṃvāsena…pe… tisso’’ (by association…pe…three). Among the three, which one is intended? He says, ‘‘etthā’’ (here) etc. The construction is that destruction by punishment is intended here. The distinction of these is stated in the aṭṭhakathāya (commentary): "There, suspension, association destruction, and lineage destruction are names for not seeing an offense, etc. 'The defiler should be destroyed, the bhikkhuni Mettiyā should be destroyed' is called lineage destruction. 'From today onward, friend novice, neither should you refer to that Blessed One as the Teacher' is called destruction by punishment" (pāci. aṭṭha. 428).
1715.‘‘Vuttā samanubhāsane’’ti (vi. vi. 1703) tattha vuttattā āha‘‘ariṭṭhena samā matā’’ti.
1715.Because it is stated there, "Vuttā samanubhāsane (stated in formal censure)" (vi. vi. 1703), he says, ‘‘ariṭṭhena samā matā’’ (is considered similar to Ariṭṭha).
Kaṇṭakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Kaṇṭaka Story.
Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.
The Seventh Chapter, on Living Beings.
1716-7.Yo bhikkhusikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamanto taṃ vītikkamaṃ ye passanti, suṇanti ca, tehibhikkhūhi sikkhāpadena vuccamāno‘‘māvuso evaṃ akāsi, na kappati etaṃ bhikkhussā’’ti sikkhāpade vuttanayena vuccamāno ‘‘etasmiṃ sikkhāpade yena maṃ tumhe vadetha, etasmiṃ sikkhāpadatthe yāva aññaṃ viyattaṃ bahussutaṃ pakataññuṃ vinayadharaṃ na pucchāmi, tāva ahaṃ na sikkhissāmī’’ti bhaṇati,tassaevaṃ bhaṇantassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti sādhippāyayojanā.
1716-7.Yo bhikkhu (Whatever bhikkhu), while transgressing a training rule, those who see and hear that transgression, bhikkhūhi sikkhāpadena vuccamāno (being told by the bhikkhus according to the training rule), "Māvuso evaṃ akāsi, na kappati etaṃ bhikkhussa (Friend, do not do this, this is not allowable for a bhikkhu)," tassa (to him), while being told in the manner stated in the training rule, if he says, "In this training rule, by which you tell me, in this meaning of the training rule, until I ask another learned, well-versed, competent, and vinaya-holder, I will not train," to him thus speaking, there is an offense of pācittiya; this is the construction with intended meaning.
1718-9.Anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasenaanupasampanne satthunā tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpitanti yojanā, iminā ca upasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena upasampanne tikapācittiyaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti. Apaññattena ovadanappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘na sallekhāyidaṃ hotī’’ti.Ubhohipiupasampannānupasampannehi. ‘‘Idaṃ sallekhāya na hotī’’ti apaññattena vuccamānassa ‘‘na tāvāha’’ntiādīnivadato tassabhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Na doso ummattakādīna’’nti padacchedo.
1718-9.Anupasampanne satthunā tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpita (The triple dukkata is shown by the Teacher in regard to one who is not fully ordained) based on perceiving, being doubtful, and perceiving not fully ordained in one who is not fully ordained; this is the construction. By this, the triple pācittiya is shown in regard to one who is fully ordained based on perceiving, being doubtful, and perceiving not fully ordained in one who is fully ordained. To show the manner of admonishing without being appointed, he says ‘‘na sallekhāyidaṃ hotī’’ (This is not for expungement). Ubhohipi (By both): By both the fully ordained and the not fully ordained. The construction is that, to one who is being told without being appointed, "Idaṃ sallekhāya na hotī (This is not for expungement)," and vadato tassa (to him speaking) "na tāvāha (not so, I)..." etc., there is an offense of dukkata. "Na doso ummattakādīna (There is no offense for the insane, etc.)" is the word division.
Sahadhammikakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sahadhammika Story.
1720.‘‘Yo pana bhikkhu pātimokkhe uddissamāne evaṃ vadeyyā’’tiādisikkhāpadapāṭhato (pāci. 439)uddiṭṭhehīti ettha ‘‘khuddānukhuddakehi sikkhāpadehī’’ti seso. Pārājikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā upādāyupādāya khuddānukhuddakāti niddiṭṭhā. Etthakinti paṭikkhepe, etehi kiṃ, payojanaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.Etehīti samīpatthe vacanasāmaññena ‘‘imehī’’ti etassa pariyāyo. ‘‘Kiṃ panimehī’’ti (pāci. 439) sikkhāpadapāṭhe paṭikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti‘‘kukkuccādinidānato’’ti. Etthaādi-saddena vihesāvilekhā gahitā. Etthakukkuccaṃnāma ‘‘kappati nu kho, na kappati nu kho’’ti kukkuccakaraṇaṃ.Vihesānāma vippaṭisāro.Vilekhānāma vicikicchāsaṅkhātā manovilekhatā manovilekhā, imehi sakalehi padehi sikkhāpadavivaṇṇakappakāro dassito. ‘‘Iti sikkhāpadavivaṇṇane’’ti iti-saddo ajjhāharitvā yojetabbo.Vivaṇṇaneti nimittatthe bhummaṃ.
1720.From the training rule passage, "Yo pana bhikkhu pātimokkhe uddissamāne evaṃ vadeyya (Whatever bhikkhu should say thus while the Pātimokkha is being recited)" (pāci. 439), uddiṭṭhehi (recited): Here, the remainder is "khuddānukhuddakehi sikkhāpadehī (by the minor and lesser training rules)." Excluding the pārājikas, the remaining ones are specified as minor and lesser. Here, kiṃ (what) is in the sense of rejection; it is said that there is no use for these, what is the purpose. Etehi (By these): By the nearness of the word, this is a synonym for "imehī (by these)." In the training rule passage, "Kiṃ panimehī (What then is the purpose of these)?" (pāci. 439), he shows the reason for the rejection: ‘‘kukkuccādinidānato’’ (because of worry etc.). Here, by the word ‘‘ādi’’ (etc.), vexation and discontent are included. Here, kukkuccaṃ (worry) is the act of worrying, "Is it allowable, is it not allowable?" Vihesā (Vexation) is remorse. Vilekhā (Discontent) is mental discontent, called doubt; by all these words, the manner of disparaging the training rules is shown. "Iti sikkhāpadavivaṇṇane (Thus, in disparaging the training rules)," the word iti (thus) should be construed by supplying it. Vivaṇṇane (In disparaging): The locative is in the sense of cause.
Kukkuccādinidānato etehi khuddānukhuddakehi sikkhāpadehi uddiṭṭhehi kiṃ iti sikkhāpadavivaṇṇane pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
Because of worry etc., what is the purpose of these minor and lesser training rules being recited; thus, in disparaging the training rules, there is an offense of pācittiya; this is the construction.
1721.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī vinayaṃ vivaṇṇeti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Upasampanne vematiko…pe… anupasampannasaññī…pe… pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 441) tīṇi pācittiyāni vuttāni.Taṃvinayaṃ sace pana anupasampannassa santike vivaṇṇeti, tikadukkaṭanti yojanā.
1721.Tikapācittiyaṃ vutta (The triple pācittiya is stated): "In regard to one who is fully ordained, one who perceives a fully ordained person [and] disparages the Vinaya, there is an offense of pācittiya. In regard to one who is fully ordained, one who is doubtful…pe… one who perceives a not fully ordained person…pe… there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 441), these three pācittiyas are stated. The construction is that if he disparages Taṃ (that) Vinaya in the presence of one who is not fully ordained, there is a triple dukkata.
1722-4.Ubhinnampīti upasampannānaṃ, anupasampannānaṃ ubhinnampi, ‘‘santike’’ti seso.Aññadhammavivaṇṇaneti vinayato aññesaṃ suttābhidhammānaṃ vivaṇṇane.
1722-4.Ubhinnampī (To both): To both the fully ordained and the not fully ordained, "santike (in the presence of)" is the remainder. Aññadhammavivaṇṇane (In disparaging other dhammas): In disparaging suttas and abhidhammas other than the Vinaya.
‘‘navivaṇṇetukāmassā’’tiādi. Navivaṇṇetukāmassa ‘‘handa suttantaṃ pariyāpuṇa, pacchāpi vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇissasi’’ iti evaṃ vadantassa anāpattīti yojanā. Sadisā evasādisā.
‘‘navivaṇṇetukāmassā’’ (For one who does not intend to disparage) etc. For one who does not intend to disparage, if he says, "Come, master the Suttanta first, later you will master the Vinaya," there is no offense; this is the construction. Sadisā (Similar) are sādisā (very similar).
Vilekhanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Vilekhana Story.
1725.Mohanakathāyaṃ tāva –
1725.In the Mohana Story, firstly –
‘‘Anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ yo bhikkhu;
"Whatever bhikkhu, for half a month,
While the Pātimokkha in its entirety
Is being recited, because of ignorance,
Asks about it himself"—
Paṭhamagāthāya bhavitabbaṃ. Evañhi sati ‘‘aññāṇenā’’tiādigāthā paripuṇṇasambandhā siyāti viññāyati.
Should be the first verse. Thus, it is understood that the verse beginning with "aññāṇenā (because of ignorance)" would have a complete connection.
Aññāṇenāti ettha vā ‘‘āpannattā’’ti seso.Āpattimokkhoti āpattiyā mokkho. Aññāṇena āpannattā āpattimokkho neva vijjatīti yojanā. Kiṃ kātabbanti āha‘‘kāretabbo’’tiādi. Yathā dhammo ṭhito, tathā bhikkhu kāretabboti sambandho.Dhamma-saddo pāḷivācako, pāḷiyaṃ yathā vuttaṃ, tathā kāretabboti attho, desanāgāminī āpatti ce, desāpetabbo, vuṭṭhānagāminī ce, vuṭṭhāpetabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘yathādhammo kāretabbo’’ti (pāci. 444). Aññāṇena āpannattā tassa āpattiyā mokkho natthi. Yathā pana dhammo ca vinayo ca ṭhito, tathā bhikkhu kāretabbo, desanāgāminiṃ ce āpanno hoti, desāpetabbo, vuṭṭhānagāminiṃ ce, vuṭṭhāpetabboti attho.
Aññāṇenā (Because of ignorance): Here, the remainder is "āpannattā (because of offense)." Āpattimokkho (Release from the offense): Release from the offense. Because of being in offense due to ignorance, there is no release from the offense; this is the construction. What should be done? He says ‘‘kāretabbo’’ (should be made to do) etc. The construction is that the bhikkhu should be made to do according to how the Dhamma is established. The word ‘‘Dhamma’’ (Dhamma) refers to the Pali text; the meaning is that he should be made to do as stated in the Pali text; if it is an offense leading to confession (desanāgāminī), he should be made to confess; if it is an offense leading to rehabilitation (vuṭṭhānagāminī), he should be made to be rehabilitated. As it says, "yathādhammo kāretabbo (he should be made to do according to the Dhamma)" (pāci. 444). Because of being in offense due to ignorance, there is no release from that offense. However, the meaning is that the bhikkhu should be made to do according to how the Dhamma and Vinaya are established; if he has committed an offense leading to confession, he should be made to confess; if he has committed an offense leading to rehabilitation, he should be made to be rehabilitated.
1726.Uttarinti yathādhammakaraṇato uttariṃ.Dutiyenevāti ñattidutiyeneva.Ninditvāti ‘‘tassa te āvuso alābhā’’tiādinā garahitvā.
1726.Uttari (Further): Further than doing according to the Dhamma. Dutiyenevā (By the second): By the motion and the second [recitation] itself. Ninditvā (Having reproached): Having reproached with "tassa te āvuso alābhā (that is a loss for you, friend)" etc.
1727.Evaṃāropite moheti yathādhammakaraṇato upari yathāvuttanayena taṃ puggalaṃ garahitvā ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya tassa evaṃ mohe āropite. Puna yadi mohetīti yojanā. Tasmiṃ mohanake puggale pācitti vuttāti yojanā.
1727.Evaṃ (Thus), āropite mohe (when Moha has been imposed): Having reproached that person in the manner stated above, beyond doing according to the Dhamma, when Moha has been imposed on him thus by the motion and the second [recitation]. If he again deludes, this is the construction. It is stated that there is a pācitti for that deluded person; this is the construction.
1728.Dīpitaṃ tikadukkaṭanti ‘‘adhammakamme dhammakammasaññī moheti, vematiko, adhammakammasaññī moheti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 447) tikadukkaṭaṃ dassitaṃ. Etassa vipariyāyato tikapācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī moheti, vematiko, adhammakammasaññī moheti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 447). Etthakammanti mohāropanakammaṃ adhippetaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘dhammakammetiādīsu mohāropanakammaṃ adhippeta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 447).
1728.Dīpitaṃ tikadukkaṭa (The triple dukkata is shown): "In an unlawful act, one who perceives a lawful act deludes, one who is doubtful, one who perceives an unlawful act deludes, there is an offense of dukkata" (pāci. 447), the triple dukkata is shown. From its opposite, the triple pācittiya should be understood. As it says, "In a lawful act, one who perceives a lawful act deludes, one who is doubtful, one who perceives an unlawful act deludes, there is an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 447). Here, kamma (act) is intended to mean the act of imposing Moha. As it says, "In 'dhammakammetiādīsu (in lawful act etc.)', the act of imposing Moha is intended" (pāci. aṭṭha. 447).
1729-30.‘‘Na ca mohetukāmassā’’tiādīhi ‘‘anāpattīti viññeyya’’nti idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Vitthārena asutassā’’ti padacchedo. Ettha ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti kammapadaṃ apekkhitabbaṃ. Vitthārena ūnakadvattikkhattuṃ sutassa cāti yojanā.Tathāti iminā ‘‘anāpattīti viññeyya’’nti idaṃ paccāmasati.
1729-30.‘‘Na ca mohetukāmassā’’and so on, up to ‘‘anāpattīti viññeyya’’ (no offense is to be understood) should be connected individually. The word division is ‘‘vitthārena asutassā’’. Here, the object ‘‘pātimokkha’’ is to be understood. The construction is: "to one who has heard it in detail, or less than twice or thrice." Tathā—with this, he refers back to ‘‘anāpattīti viññeyya’’ (no offense is to be understood).
Mohanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Bewilderment.
1731-2.Kuddhoti kupito.Pahāraṃ detīti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā antamaso uppalapattenāpi pahāraṃ deti. Yathāha ‘‘pahāraṃ dadeyyāti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā antamaso uppalapattenāpi pahāraṃ detī’’ti (pāci. 451). Ettha ‘‘aññassa bhikkhussā’’ti seso.Tassāti apekkhitvā ‘‘yo’’ti labbhati.
1731-2.Kuddho means angry. Pahāraṃ detī means he gives a blow with the body, or with something attached to the body, or with something to be relinquished, even with a lotus leaf. As it was said: "He may give a blow with the body, or with something attached to the body, or with something to be relinquished, even with a lotus leaf" (pāci. 451). Here, ‘‘aññassa bhikkhussa’’ (to another bhikkhu) is understood. Tassā—depending on this, ‘‘yo’’ (who) is obtained.
Aṭṭhakathāgataṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sampaharitukāmenā’’tiādi, iminā maraṇādhippāyena pahaṭe pārājikanti vuttaṃ hoti.
To show the decision found in the Aṭṭhakathā, he says: ‘‘Sampaharitukāmenā’’ and so on. By this, it is stated that if he strikes with the intention of killing, it is a pārājika offense.
1733.‘‘Iti evaṃ kate ayaṃ saṅghamajjhena virocatī’’tivirūpakaraṇāpekkhovirūpakaraṇe apekkhavātassaca apekkhitassa bhikkhussa kaṇṇaṃ vā nāsaṃ vā yadi chindati, dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1733.‘‘Iti evaṃ kate ayaṃ saṅghamajjhena virocatī’’ti—virūpakaraṇāpekkho means one who expects disfigurement, one who has the desire for disfigurement; tassa—if he cuts off the ear or nose of that bhikkhu who is expected and desired, it is a dukkata offense, is the construction.
1734.Anupasampanneti sāmivacanatthe bhummaṃ. ‘‘Itthiyā’’tiādīhi padehi yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘anupasampannāya itthiyā anupasampannassa purisassā’’ti.Tiracchānagatassapīti ettha ‘‘antamaso’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘antamaso tiracchānagatassapī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 452).
1734.Anupasampanne—the suffix expresses the sense of the locative absolute. With the words ‘‘itthiyā’’ and so on, it should be connected appropriately: ‘‘to a woman who is not ordained, to a man who is not ordained’’. Tiracchānagatassapī—here, ‘‘antamaso’’ (at least) is understood. As it was said, ‘‘at least to a beast’’ (pāci. aṭṭha. 452).
1735.‘‘Sace paharati itthiñcā’’ti padacchedo.Rattena cetasāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena rattena cittena.Viniddiṭṭhāti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu otiṇṇo vipariṇatena cittena mātugāmena saddhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyā’’tiādinā (pārā. 270) dassitā.
1735.‘‘Sace paharati itthiñcā’’ti is the word division. Rattena cetasā means with a mind inflamed with passion for physical contact. Viniddiṭṭhā means shown by ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu otiṇṇo vipariṇatena cittena mātugāmena saddhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyā’’ti (pārā. 270) and so on.
1736.Mokkhādhippāyoti tato attano mokkhaṃ patthento.Doso na vijjatīti dukkaṭādikopi doso natthi.
1736.Mokkhādhippāyo means desiring his own release from that. Doso na vijjatī means there is no offense, even a dukkata one.
1737-9.Heṭhetukāmamāyantaṃ corampi vā paccatthikampi vā antarāmagge passitvāti yojanā. Disvā kathaṃ paṭipajjitabbanti āha‘‘mā idhāgacchupāsakā’’tiādi, āgamanapaṭikkhepena tattheva tiṭṭhāti vuttaṃ hoti.Āyantanti evaṃ vutte taṃ anādiyitvā āgacchantaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vacanaṃ anādiyitvā āgacchanta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 453).
1737-9.Having seen a thief or an enemy coming with the intention of harming on the road, is the construction. Having seen, how should he proceed? He says: ‘‘Mā idhāgacchupāsakā’’ and so on. By preventing their coming, it is stated that he remains there itself. Āyanta—when this is said, if he comes disregarding it. As it was said: ‘‘if he comes disregarding the word’’ (pāci. aṭṭha. 453).
Eseva nayoti ‘‘mā āgacchā’ti vuttepi āgacchantaṃ pahaṭe matepi anāpattī’’ti ayaṃ nayo.
Eseva nayo means this is the same method: "even if he comes after being told 'do not come', there is no offense even if he is struck dead."
1740.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī, vematiko, anupasampannasaññī pahāraṃ deti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 452) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Seseti anupasampanne.Tikadukkaṭanti ‘‘anupasampanne upasampannasaññī, vematiko, anupasampannasaññī pahāraṃ deti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 452) tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Anāṇattikattā āha‘‘kāyacittasamuṭṭhāna’’nti. Kāyacittānaṃ sukhopekkhāpi sambhavantīti tato visesetumāha‘‘dukkhavedana’’nti.
1740.Tikapācittiyaṃ vutta (the threefold pācittiya offense is stated) in "If he strikes an ordained person thinking he is ordained, in doubt, or thinking he is not ordained, there is a pācittiya offense" (pāci. 452). Sese means in the case of one not ordained. Tikadukkaṭa (the threefold dukkata) is stated in "If he strikes one not ordained thinking he is ordained, in doubt, or thinking he is not ordained, there is a dukkata offense" (pāci. 452). Because of being non-injunctive, he says: ‘‘kāyacittasamuṭṭhāna’’. Because pleasure and equanimity are also possible in body and mind, to distinguish from that, he says: ‘‘dukkhavedana’’ (painful feeling).
Pahārakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Striking.
1741.Kāyanti kāyekadesaṃ hatthādiavayavamāha.Vāti dutiyatthasampiṇḍane.Kāyabaddhanti kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ paharaṇayoggāyoggesu kattarayaṭṭhisatthādīsu aññataraṃ.Sace uccāreyyāti sace paharaṇākāraṃ dassetvā ukkhipeyya, idaṃ ‘‘kāyaṃ vā kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ vā’’ti imehi padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Tassāti uccāritakāyādikassa.Uggiraṇapaccayāti ukkhipanakāraṇā.
1741.Kāya means a part of the body, a limb such as a hand. Vā means an aggregation of secondary meanings. Kāyabaddha means something attached to the body, one of the instruments suitable or unsuitable for striking, such as a knife, stick, or weapon. Sace uccāreyyā means if, after showing the manner of striking, he raises it, this should be connected individually with the words ‘‘kāyaṃ vā kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ vā’’ (body or something attached to the body). Tassā—of the raised body, etc. Uggiraṇapaccayā means because of the cause of raising.
1742.Asampaharitukāmenāti pahāradānaṃ anicchantena.Dinnattāti pahārassa dinnattā. Appaharitukāmattā purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ na hoti, uggiritukāmatāya katapayogassa uggiraṇamatte aṭṭhatvā pahārassa dinnattā imināpi pācittiyaṃ na hoti, ajjhāsayassa, payogassa ca asuddhattā anāpattiyāpi na bhavitabbanti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
1742.Asampaharitukāmenā means not desiring to give a blow. Dinnattā means because the blow was given. Because he does not wish to strike, there is no pācittiya by the previous training rule; because of the intention to raise it, the application made does not extend beyond the mere raising; because the blow was given, there is no pācittiya by this either; because the intention and the application are impure, it should not even be without offense, therefore a dukkata offense is stated.
1743.Sace tena pahārena bhikkhuno hatthādīsupi yaṃ kiñci aṅgaṃ bhijjati,pahaṭassapahāradāyakassa dukkaṭanti sambandho.
1743.If by that blow, any limb, even a hand, etc., of the bhikkhu is broken, pahaṭassa—the connection is that there is a dukkata offense for the striker.
1744.Seso vinicchayo‘‘mokkhādhippāyo’’tiādiko idha avutto vinicchayo samuṭṭhānādinā saddhiṃ anantare vuttanayena vinayaññunā veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Tiracchānādīnaṃ vaccakaraṇādiṃ disvāna palāpetukāmatāya kujjhitvāpi uggirantassa mokkhādhippāyo evā’’ti vadanti.
1744.Seso vinicchayo—the remaining decisions, beginning with ‘‘mokkhādhippāyo’’ (with the intention of release), which are not stated here, should be understood by one skilled in the Vinaya, together with the origin, etc., in the manner stated immediately before, is the construction. "Even for one who, seeing the excretions, etc., of beasts and being angry, raises his hand with the intention of frightening them away, it is indeed with the intention of release," some say.
Talasattikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Raising the Hand.
1745.Amūlakenāti diṭṭhādimūlavirahitena, ettha ‘‘bhikkhu’’nti seso.Saṅghādisesenāti terasannaṃ aññatarena.Tassāti codakassa, codāpakassa vā pāpabhikkhuno. Sace cuditako tasmiṃ khaṇe ‘‘esa maṃ codetī’’ti jānāti, pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā, iminā ‘‘sace evaṃ na jānāti, cirena vā jānāti, dukkaṭaṃ hotī’’ti siddhaṃ.
1745.Amūlakena means without a basis in what is seen, etc.; here, ‘‘bhikkhu’’ (bhikkhu) is understood. Saṅghādisesenā means with one of the thirteen saṅghādisesa offenses. Tassā—of the wicked bhikkhu who is the accuser or the instigator of the accusation. If the accused knows at that moment, "this one is accusing me," there would be a pācittiya offense, is the construction; by this, it is established that "if he does not know in this way, or knows after a long time, there is a dukkata offense."
1746.Tatthāti upasampanne.Tikapācittiyanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃseti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Vematiko…pe… anupasampannasaññī amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃseti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 462) tikapācittiyaṃ.Diṭṭhācāravipattiyā codako dukkaṭāpattīti amūlikāya diṭṭhivipattiyā vā ācāravipattiyā vā anuddhaṃsentassa dukkaṭāpatti hotīti attho.Sese cāti anupasampanne.Tikadukkaṭanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tīṇi dukkaṭāni hontīti attho.
1746.Tatthā means in the case of one ordained. Tikapācittiya—‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃseti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Vematiko…pe… anupasampannasaññī amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃseti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 462)—the threefold pācittiya is this. Diṭṭhācāravipattiyā codako dukkaṭāpattī—the meaning is that there is a dukkata offense for one who accuses of an unfounded wrong view or wrong conduct. Sese cā means in the case of one not ordained. Tikadukkaṭa means that there are three dukkata offenses according to the distinction of one not ordained thinking he is ordained, being in doubt, and thinking he is not ordained.
1747.‘‘Tathāsaññissa anāpattī’’ti padacchedo.Tathāsaññissāti samūlakasaññissa.
1747.‘‘Tathāsaññissa anāpattī’’ti is the word division. Tathāsaññissā means for one who perceives it as having a basis.
Amūlakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Groundless Accusation.
1748-9.Sañciccāti tassa paripuṇṇavīsativassādibhāvaṃ jānantoyeva.Bhikkhunoti ettha ‘‘aññassā’’ti seso.Ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññeti ettha‘‘maññe’’ti iminā parikappatthavācinā nipātena ‘‘udakaṃ maññe āditta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 383) viya musāvādāpattiyā avisayataṃ dīpeti. Hitesitāya anusiṭṭhidānādike tathārūpe aññasmiṃpaccayekāraṇe asati ‘‘ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññe’’ iti evamādinā aññassabhikkhunoyo bhikkhu sace sañcicca kukkuccaṃ uppādeyya, tassa evaṃ kukkuccaṃ uppādentassa bhikkhuno vācāya vācāya pācitti hotīti yojanā.
1748-9.Sañciccā means knowing that he is fully twenty years old, etc. Bhikkhuno—here, ‘‘aññassā’’ (to another) is understood. Ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññe—here, with the particle ‘‘maññe’’, which expresses conjecture, as in ‘‘udakaṃ maññe āditta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 383) it indicates that it is not the domain of a falsehood offense. If, in such another paccaye (condition), cause, there is no giving of instruction, etc., for his benefit, that bhikkhu who deliberately causes remorse in another bhikkhuno (bhikkhu) by saying ‘‘ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññe’’ and so on, there is a pācittiya offense for that bhikkhu who causes remorse with his speech, is the construction.
1750.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī sañcicca kukkuccaṃ upadahati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Vematiko…pe… anupasampannasaññī sañcicca kukkuccaṃ upadahati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 467) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Sese cāti anupasampanne ca.Tikadukkaṭanti anupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ. Vajjamevavajjatā.
1750.Tikapācittiyaṃ vutta (the threefold pācittiya offense is stated) in ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññī sañcicca kukkuccaṃ upadahati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Vematiko…pe… anupasampannasaññī sañcicca kukkuccaṃ upadahati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 467). Sese cā means in the case of one not ordained. Tikadukkaṭa means a threefold dukkata according to the distinction of one not ordained thinking he is ordained, being in doubt, and thinking he is not ordained. Vajjameva—vajjatā—only blame is blameworthy.
1751.Hitesitāya bhāsatoti sambandho.Mā evanti ettha ‘‘karohī’’ti seso, punapi mā evaṃ karohīti attho. ‘‘Ahaṃ taṃ itthiyā saha nisinnaṃ maññe, tayā vikāle bhuttaṃ maññe, puna mā evaṃ karohi’’ iti hitesitāya bhāsato anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
1751.Hitesitāya bhāsatoti sambandho—it is connected to speaking with the intention of benefit. Mā eva—here, ‘‘karohī’’ti (do) is understood; the meaning is "do not do so again." If he speaks with the intention of benefit, saying "I thought you were sitting with a woman; I thought you ate at the wrong time; do not do so again," it is declared that there is no offense, is the construction.
Sañciccakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Deliberately (Causing Remorse).
1753.Bhaṇḍanaṃnāma kalaho, bhaṇḍanaṃ jātaṃ yesanti viggaho, jātabhaṇḍanānanti attho, ‘‘vacana’’nti seso. Sotuṃ upassutiṃ tiṭṭheyyāti yojanā. Upecca suyyati etthāti hiupassuti,ṭhānaṃ, yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatena sakkā hoti kathentānaṃ saddaṃ sotuṃ, tatthāti attho. Yo pana bhikkhu bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ upassutiṃ sace tiṭṭheyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
1753.Bhaṇḍanaṃ means quarrel; bhaṇḍanaṃ jātaṃ yesanti is the compound, meaning those for whom a quarrel has arisen; ‘‘vacana’’nti (word) is understood. Sotuṃ upassutiṃ tiṭṭheyyāti—he should stand in a hidden place to listen, is the construction. Here, upecca suyyati etthāti hi upassuti—upassuti is a place, meaning the place where it is possible, having approached, to hear the sound of those who are speaking. Yo pana bhikkhu bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ upassutiṃ sace tiṭṭheyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti—if any bhikkhu should stand in a hidden place to hear the words of bhikkhus for whom a quarrel has arisen, there would be a pācittiya offense for him, is the construction.
1754.Codetukāmatāya gacchato assāti yojanā.
1754.Codetukāmatāya gacchato assāti—it means for one who goes with the intention of accusing.
1755.Sotunti pacchato gacchantānaṃ bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ.Ohīyantassāti pakatigamanaṃ hāpetvā osakkantassa. Puratogacchatobhikkhussa dukkaṭanti yojanā.Gacchato turitaṃ vāpīti purato gacchantānaṃ bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ pacchato sīghaṃ gacchantassāpi.Ayameva vinicchayoti pade pade ayaṃ eva vinicchayo.
1755.Sotunti—to hear the words of those for whom a quarrel has arisen who are walking behind. Ohīyantassā means for one who withdraws, reducing his normal pace. Purato gacchato bhikkhussa dukkaṭanti—there is a dukkata offense for the bhikkhu who is walking ahead, is the construction. Gacchato turitaṃ vāpī—even for one who is walking quickly behind to hear the words of those for whom a quarrel has arisen who are walking ahead. Ayameva vinicchayo—this is the same decision at each step.
1756.Attano ṭhitokāsanti sambandho.Ukkāsitvāpi vāti ukkāsitasaddaṃ katvā vā. Ettha ahanti vā vatvā ñāpetabbanti yojanā.
1756.Attano ṭhitokāsanti sambandho—it is connected with his own standing place. Ukkāsitvāpi vā means or having made a coughing sound. Here, the construction is that he should make it known by saying "I" or by speaking.
1757.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena.Sese cāti anupasampanne.Tikadukkaṭaṃanupasampanne upasampannasaññivematikaanupasampannasaññīnaṃ vasena.
1757.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ—the threefold pācittiya offense is stated according to the distinction of one ordained thinking he is ordained, being in doubt, and thinking he is not ordained. Sese cā means in the case of one not ordained. Tikadukkaṭaṃ—a threefold dukkata offense according to the distinction of one not ordained thinking he is ordained, being in doubt, and thinking he is not ordained.
1758.Oramissanti mayā gahitaduggāhato viramissāmi.
1758.Oramissanti—I will abstain from what I have taken with difficulty.
1759.Kāyacittato ca kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhānatotheyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Siyā kiriyaṃ sotukāmatāya gamanavasena, siyā akiriyaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā mantayamānaṃ ajānāpanavasena, tenāha‘‘idaṃ hoti kriyākriya’’nti. Gamanena sijjhanatokāyakammaṃ. Tuṇhībhāvena sijjhanatovacīkammaṃ. Sadosanti sāvajjaṃ, akusalacittanti vuttaṃ hoti.
1759.Kāyacittato ca kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhānato—from the origin in body and mind, and from the origin in body, speech, and mind, there is theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ (originating from stealth and the Teacher's Dispensation). It could be active due to going with the intention of hearing speech; it could be inactive by not making it known that he is listening to them conversing, having come to a place where they are standing. Therefore, he said: ‘‘idaṃ hoti kriyākriya’’nti—this is both active and inactive. Because it is accomplished by going, there is kāyakammaṃ (bodily action). Because it is accomplished by being silent, there is vacīkammaṃ (verbal action). Sadosa—means blameworthy; it is said to be unwholesome thought.
Upassutikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Listening Secretly.
1760.Dhammikānanti dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena katānaṃ.Kammānanti apalokanakammaṃ, ñattikammaṃ, ñattidutiyakammaṃ, ñatticatutthakammanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ.Khīyatīti aruciṃ pakāseti.
1760.Dhammikānanti—of those done in accordance with the Dhamma, the Vinaya, the Teacher's Teaching. Kammānanti—of these four kinds of actions: the action of seeking approval, the action consisting of a motion, the action consisting of a motion and one proclamation, and the action consisting of a motion and three proclamations. Khīyatīti—he expresses displeasure.
1761.Ubhayatthāti adhamme, dhamme ca.
1761.Ubhayatthāti—in both the not-Dhamma and the Dhamma.
1762.Adhammenāti ettha ‘‘kammenā’’ti seso, dhammaviruddhena kammenāti attho. ‘‘Kammasmi’’nti idaṃ vibhattiṃ vipariṇāmetvā ‘‘kammenā’’ti anuvattetabbaṃ.Vaggenāti ‘‘chandārahānaṃ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosantī’’ti (mahāva. 387) vuttasāmaggilakkhaṇassa viruddhattā asamaggena, ettha ‘‘saṅghenā’’ti seso. ‘‘Tathā akammārahassā’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Adhammena kammena ime kammaṃ karontī’’ti ca ‘‘asamaggena saṅghena ime kammaṃ karontī’’ti ca ‘‘adhammena kammena vaggena saṅghena ime kammaṃ karontī’’ti ca tathā ‘‘akammārahassa ime kammaṃ karontī’’ti ca ñatvā yo khīyati, tassa ca anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
1762.Adhammenāti—here, ‘‘kammenā’’ti (by action) is understood, meaning by an action that is contrary to the Dhamma. ‘‘Kammasmi’’nti—this should be changed in inflection and construed as ‘‘kammenā’’. Vaggenāti—because it is contrary to the characteristic of harmony stated as ‘‘chandārahānaṃ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosantī’’ti (mahāva. 387), by a faction that is not harmonious; here, ‘‘saṅghenā’’ti (by the Sangha) is understood. ‘‘Tathā akammārahassā’’ti is the word division. "These are doing an action by an un-Dhamma action," and "these are doing an action by a Sangha that is not harmonious," and "these are doing an action by an un-Dhamma action and by a faction in the Sangha," and "these are doing an action by one who is not fit for the action"—having known thus, there is no offense for one who expresses displeasure, is the construction.
Kammapaṭibāhanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Opposition to an Act.
1764-5.Ārocitaṃ vatthu yāva na vinicchitaṃ vāti yojanā, ‘‘codakena ca cuditakena ca attano kathā kathitā, anuvijjako sammato, ettāvatāpi vatthumeva ārocitaṃ hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 481)aṭṭhakathāyavuttattā ārocitaṃ vatthu yāva na vinicchitaṃ hotīti attho. Ñatti vā ṭhapitā, kammavācā niṭṭhaṃ yāva na gacchati, etasmiṃ…pe…hoti āpatti dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1764-5.Ārocitaṃ vatthu yāva na vinicchitaṃ vāti—until the matter that has been announced is decided, is the construction; "the matter is indeed announced as soon as the accuser and the accused have spoken their story, and an investigator is appointed," because it is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā (pāci. aṭṭha. 481), the meaning is: until the matter that has been announced is decided. Ñatti vā ṭhapitā, kammavācā niṭṭhaṃ yāva na gacchati, etasmiṃ…pe…hoti āpatti dukkaṭanti—until the motion is introduced or the kammavācā is completed, in this… there is a dukkata offense, is the construction.
1766.Chandaṃ adatvā hatthapāsejahitetassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
1766.Chandaṃ adatvā hatthapāse—jahite—if he abandons the hand-range without giving his consent, there would be a pācittiya offense for him, is the construction.
1767-9.Adhammepi kammasmiṃ dhammakammanti saññino dukkaṭanti yojanā. Dhammakamme ca adhammakammasaññino anāpatti idha na vuttā, pāḷiyaṃ pana vuttattā idhāpi yojetabbā. ‘‘Saṅghassa bhaṇḍanādīni bhavissantī’’ti saññino gacchato ca yo vā gilāno hoti, tassa gacchato ca gilānassa karaṇīye sati gacchato ca kammaṃ nakopetukāmassa gacchato ca passāvanādinā pīḷitassa gacchato ca ‘‘āgamissāmi’’iti evaṃ gacchatopi na dosatāti yojanā. Tattha doso evadosatā,āpatti,nadosatāanāpatti. Hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā gamanena, chandassa adānena ca āpajjanatokriyākriyaṃ.
1767-9.Adhammepi kammasmiṃ dhammakammanti saññino dukkaṭanti—there is a dukkata offense for one who perceives an un-Dhamma act as a Dhamma act, is the construction. There is no statement here of no offense for one who perceives a Dhamma act as an un-Dhamma act, but since it is stated in the Pāḷi, it should be connected here as well. "Bhaṇḍanādīni bhavissantī saṅghassa—there will be quarrels, etc., for the Sangha"—for one who goes thinking thus, and for one who is sick, there is no offense for one who goes when there is something to be done for one who is sick, and for one who goes not wanting to spoil the action, and for one who goes afflicted by urination, etc., and for one who goes saying "I will come," is the construction. There, doso eva—dosatā—offense indeed is offensiveness, nadosatā—non-offensiveness is no offense. Because it is incurred by abandoning the hand-range and by not giving consent, there is kriyākriyaṃ—both active and inactive.
Chandaṃadatvāgamanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Going Away Without Giving Consent.
1770-1.Samaggena saṅghena saddhinti samānasaṃvāsakena samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitena saṅghena saddhiṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘samaggo nāma saṅgho samānasaṃvāsako samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhito’’ti (pāci. 486).Cīvaranti vikappanupagamāha. Yathāha ‘‘cīvaraṃ nāma channaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ vikappanupagaṃ pacchima’’nti (pāci. 486).Sammatassāti senāsanapaññāpakādisammutiṃ pattesu aññatarassa.Khīyatīti ‘‘yo yo mitto, tassa tassa dentī’’tiādinā nayena avaṇṇaṃ bhaṇati.
1770-1. Samaggena saṅghena saddhinti, "with the Saṅgha in unity," means with the Saṅgha dwelling in concord, staying within the same boundary. For it was said, "The Saṅgha in unity is that dwelling in concord, staying within the same boundary" (pāci. 486). Cīvaranti refers to the non-relinquished robe. As it was said, "A robe means any one of the six robes, a robe that is non-relinquished and the last" (pāci. 486). Sammatassāti, "to one authorized," means to one who has obtained authorization for allocating lodgings, etc. Khīyatīti, "speaks disparagingly," means speaking ill in such ways as, "He gives to whoever is his friend."
tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, the triple pācittiya is stated.
1772-4.Saṅghenāsammatassāpi cīvaraṃ, aññameva vā tatheva samaggena saṅghena datvā khīyati, tassa dukkaṭanti yojanā. Anupasampanne tatheva samaggena saṅghena dinnesabbatthacīvare, aññaparikkhāre ca dukkaṭanti yojanā.Anupasampanneti sampadānatthe bhummaṃ, anupasampannassāti attho.
1772-4. Even if the robe is given to one unauthorized by the Saṅgha, or if something else is given in the same way by the Saṅgha in unity and he speaks disparagingly, there is a dukkata; this is the connection. If a robe is given to one not yet ordained in the same way by the Saṅgha in unity, sabbattha, "in all instances," and other requisites too, there is a dukkata; this is the connection. Anupasampanneti, "to one not yet ordained," is a locative in the sense of dative, meaning to one not yet ordained.
Nayāvinicchayakkamā.
Nayā means the method of decision-making.
Dubbalakathāvaṇṇanā.
Dubbalakathāvaṇṇanā.
1775.Idaṃ dvādasamanti sambandho, ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 490)imaṃ dvādasamaṃsikkhāpadanti attho.Tiṃsakakaṇḍasmiṃnissaggiyakaṇḍe.Antimenāti ettha ‘‘sikkhāpadenā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.Ca-saddo evakārattho. ‘‘Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 658) iminā antimeneva sikkhāpadena sabbathāsabbaṃvattabbaṃ tulyanti yojanā.Ayameva visesatāti ettha visesoyevavisesatā,ayameva visesoti attho.
1775. Idaṃ dvādasamanti, "this is the twelfth," is the connection; imaṃ dvādasamaṃsikkhāpadanti, "this twelfth" means this training rule. Tiṃsakakaṇḍasmiṃnissaggiyakaṇḍe, "in the section of thirty," means in the Nissaggiya section. Antimenāti, "by the last," the "sikkhāpadena," "training rule," is obtained from the context here. The particle Ca is in the sense of "only." Sabbaṃ, "all," in all ways, sabbaṃvattabbaṃ tulyanti, "all should be said to be equal," the meaning is that everything should be stated in full by the last training rule itself, "Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ," "Whatever bhikkhu should knowingly divert for himself a gain dedicated to the Saṅgha, it is to be forfeited and confessed" (pārā. 658). Ayameva visesatāti, "this alone is the difference," here, visesoyevavisesatā, "the difference alone is the distinction," means this alone is the difference.
1776.Tatthāti tasmiṃ nissaggiyāvasāne sikkhāpade.Attano pariṇāmanāti attano pariṇāmanahetu.
1776. Tatthāti, "there," means in that training rule at the end of the Nissaggiya section. Attano pariṇāmanāti, "diverting for oneself," means because of diverting for oneself.
Pariṇāmanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Pariṇāmanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.
Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.
1777-8.Yopana bhikkhu deviyā vāpi rañño vāpi aviditāgamano appaṭisaṃviditāgamano sayanīyagharā rājasmiṃ anikkhante, deviyā anikkhantāyatassasayanīyagharassaummāraṃindakhīlaṃ sace atikkameyya, tassa bhikkhuno paṭhame pāde dukkaṭaṃ siyā, dutiye pāde pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
1777-8. Yopana bhikkhu deviyā vāpi rañño vāpi aviditāgamano appaṭisaṃviditāgamano sayanīyagharā rājasmiṃ anikkhante, deviyā anikkhantāyatassasayanīyagharassaummāraṃindakhīlaṃ sace atikkameyya, tassa bhikkhuno paṭhame pāde dukkaṭaṃ siyā, dutiye pāde pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā. "Whatever bhikkhu, without informing either the queen or the king, without announcing his arrival, should cross the ummāraṃ, threshold, or indakhīlaṃ, doorpost, of the royal sleeping quarters before the king has left or before the queen has left, for that bhikkhu, at the first step there is a dukkata, at the second step there is a pācittiya;" this is the construction.
1779.Paṭisaṃviditeti attano āgamane nivedite.Nevapaṭisaṃviditasaññinoti aniveditasaññino.Tatthāti tasmiṃ paṭisaṃviditāgamane.Vematikassāti ‘‘paṭisaṃviditaṃ nu kho, na paṭisaṃviditaṃ nu kho’’ti saṃsayamāpannassa.
1779. Paṭisaṃviditeti, "having announced," means having informed of one's arrival. Nevapaṭisaṃviditasaññinoti, "of one with the perception of not having announced," means of one with the perception of not having informed. Tatthāti, "there," means in that instance of having announced one's arrival. Vematikassāti, "for one who is doubtful," means for one who is assailed by doubt, thinking, "Was it announced, or was it not announced?"
1780-1.Neva khattiyassa appaṭisaṃviditepi vā na khattiyābhisekena abhisittassa appaṭisaṃviditepi vā pavisato na dosoti yojanā, evarūpānaṃ aniveditepi pavisantassa anāpattīti attho.
1780-1. Neva khattiyassa appaṭisaṃviditepi vā na khattiyābhisekena abhisittassa appaṭisaṃviditepi vā pavisato na dosoti yojanā, there is no offense for one entering without informing the noble or one not anointed with the anointing of a noble, even without informing; this is the construction, meaning that there is no offense for one entering without informing in such cases.
Ubhosurājini ca deviyā ca sayanigharato bahi nikkhantesu pavisatopi vā ubhinnaṃ aññatarasmiṃ nikkhante pavisatopi vā na dosoti yojanā.Kathinenāti ettha ‘‘samuṭṭhānādinā sama’’nti seso, idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānādivasena kathinasikkhāpadena samānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sayanīyagharappavesokriyaṃ. Appaṭisaṃvedanaṃakriyaṃ.
Ubhosurājini ca deviyā ca sayanigharato bahi nikkhantesu pavisatopi vā ubhinnaṃ aññatarasmiṃ nikkhante pavisatopi vā na dosoti yojanā, there is no offense for one entering after both the king and queen have exited from the sleeping quarters, or for one entering after either of the two has exited; this is the construction. Kathinenāti, "with the Kathina," here, "samaṃ samuṭṭhānādinā," "equal in arising, etc.," is to be supplied; this means that this training rule is equal to the Kathina training rule in terms of arising, etc. Sayanīyagharappavesokriyaṃ, entering the sleeping quarters is an action. Appaṭisaṃvedanaṃakriyaṃ, not informing is a non-action.
Antepurakathāvaṇṇanā.
Antepurakathāvaṇṇanā.
1782.Rajataṃ, jātarūpaṃ vāattanoatthāya uggaṇhantassa, uggaṇhāpayatopi vā tassa nissaggiyāpattīti yojanā.
1782. Rajataṃ, jātarūpaṃ vāattanoatthāya uggaṇhantassa, uggaṇhāpayatopi vā tassa nissaggiyāpattīti yojanā, for one taking up silver or gold for oneself, or for one causing it to be taken up, there is an offense entailing forfeiture; this is the construction.
1783.Gaṇapuggalasaṅghānaṃ atthāya cetiye navakammassa atthāya uggaṇhāpayato, uggaṇhatopi vā dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. Jātarūparajatānaṃ sarūpaṃ nissaggiye vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
1783. Gaṇapuggalasaṅghānaṃ atthāya cetiye navakammassa atthāya uggaṇhāpayato, uggaṇhatopi vā dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. For one taking up or causing to be taken up for the sake of a group, an individual, the Saṅgha, or new construction for a cetiya, there is a dukkata; this is the construction. The nature of gold and silver should be understood in the same way as stated in the section on forfeiture.
1784.Muttādiratanampi vuttasarūpameva.Saṅghādīnampīti etthaādi-saddena gaṇapuggalacetiyānaṃ saṅgaho.
1784. Muttādiratanampi vuttasarūpameva. The nature of pearls and other jewels is just as stated. Saṅghādīnampīti, "even for the Saṅgha, etc.," here, with the ādi, "etc.," is included a group, an individual, and cetiyas.
1785-6.Yaṃ kiñci gihisantakaṃ sace kappiyavatthu vā hotu, akappiyavatthu vāpi hotu, mātukaṇṇapiḷandhanaṃ tālapaṇṇampi vā hotu, bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena paṭisāmayato tassa pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
1785-6. Yaṃ kiñci gihisantakaṃ sace kappiyavatthu vā hotu, akappiyavatthu vāpi hotu, mātukaṇṇapiḷandhanaṃ tālapaṇṇampi vā hotu, bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena paṭisāmayato tassa pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā, whatever belongs to a householder, whether it is allowable or unallowable, whether it is a mother's ear ornament or a palm leaf, for one entrusting it into the charge of the head storekeeper, there is a pācittiya offense; this is the construction.
1787.Na nidhetabbamevāti na paṭisāmetabbameva.
1787. Na nidhetabbamevāti, "it should not be stored away," means it should certainly not be entrusted.
1788.Esohiyasmā palibodho nāma, tasmā ṭhapetuṃ pana vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
1888. Esohiyasmā palibodho nāma, tasmā ṭhapetuṃ pana vaṭṭatīti yojanā, since this is called an encumbrance, therefore it is allowable to set it aside; this is the construction.
1789.Anuññāte ṭhāneti ettha ‘‘patita’’nti seso. Etthaanuññātaṭṭhānaṃnāma ajjhārāmo vā ajjhāvasatho vā. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave ratanaṃ vā ratanasammataṃ vā ajjhārāme vā ajjhāvasathe vā uggahetvā vā uggahāpetvā vā nikkhipituṃ ‘yassa bhavissati, so harissatī’’ti (pāci. 504). Ettha caajjhārāmonāma parikkhittassa antoparikkhepo, aparikkhittassa dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ anto.Ajjhāvasathonāma parikkhittassa antoparikkhepo, aparikkhittassa musalapātabbhantaraṃ.‘‘Uggahetvā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ, uggahāpetvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.
1789. Anuññāte ṭhāneti, "in an approved place," here, "patitaṃ," "fallen," is to be supplied. Here, anuññātaṭṭhānaṃnāma, "an approved place," means either an ārāma under joint ownership or an āvasatha under joint ownership. As he said, "I allow, bhikkhus, to pick up or have picked up a jewel or what is considered a jewel in an ārāma or āvasatha under joint ownership and set it aside, thinking, 'Whoever it belongs to will take it'" (pāci. 504). And here, ajjhārāmonāma, "an ārāma under joint ownership," means within the boundary of what is enclosed, and within the range of two clod throws for what is unenclosed. Ajjhāvasathonāma, "an āvasatha under joint ownership," means within the boundary of what is enclosed, and within the range of a pestle throw for what is unenclosed. ‘‘Uggahetvā’’ti, "having picked up," this is indicative, it also implies "uggahāpetvā," "having caused to be picked up."
1790-1.Anuññāte pana ṭhāneyathāvuttaajjhārāmādike ṭhāne ratanaṃ vā ratanasammataṃ vā manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ vā sayanabhaṇḍaṃ vā gahetvā nikkhipantassa, ratanasammataṃ vissāsaṃ gaṇhantassa ca tāvakālikameva vā gaṇhantassa ubhayattha ummattakādīnañca na dosoti yojanā.
1790-1. Anuññāte pana ṭhāneyathāvuttaajjhārāmādike ṭhāne ratanaṃ vā ratanasammataṃ vā manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ vā sayanabhaṇḍaṃ vā gahetvā nikkhipantassa, ratanasammataṃ vissāsaṃ gaṇhantassa ca tāvakālikameva vā gaṇhantassa ubhayattha ummattakādīnañca na dosoti yojanā, there is no offense for an insane person, etc., in either case, for one taking and setting aside in an approved place, as stated above, in an ārāma, etc., a jewel or what is considered a jewel, or items for people to use and consume, or bedding, or for one taking what is considered a jewel and holding it for safekeeping, or for one taking it only temporarily; this is the construction.
Sañcarittasamodayanti ettha ‘‘samuṭṭhānādinā idaṃ sikkhāpada’’nti vattabbaṃ, idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānādinā sañcarittasamajātikanti attho.
Sañcarittasamodayanti, "of the same class as the Sañcaritta," here, "samuṭṭhānādinā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ," "this training rule in arising, etc.," should be stated, meaning that this training rule is of the same class as the Sañcaritta in terms of arising, etc.
Ratanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Ratanakathāvaṇṇanā.
1792.Pureti pubbabhāge.
1792. Pureti, "before," means in the former part.
1793-4.Santanti cārittasikkhāpade vuttasarūpaṃ.Anāpucchāti ‘‘vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti anāpucchitvā.Paccayaṃ vināti tādisaṃ accāyikaṃ karaṇīyaṃ vinā.Parikkhepokkameti parikkhepassa antopavese.Upacārokkameti etthāpi eseva nayo.
1793-4. Santanti, "existing," means of the nature stated in the training rule on conduct. Anāpucchāti, "without asking leave," means without asking, "I will enter the village at the wrong time." Paccayaṃ vināti, "without a reason," means without such an urgent task. Parikkhepokkameti, "at the boundary's entry," means at the entry of the boundary. Upacārokkameti, "at the vicinity's entry," here too, this is the same method.
1795.Athāti vākyantarārambhe.
1795. Athāti, "then," means at the beginning of another sentence.
1796.Tato aññanti paṭhamaṃ vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchitvā tato paviṭṭhagāmato aññaṃ gāmaṃ. Punatatoti dutiyagāmamāha. Katthaci potthake‘‘āpucchane kicca’’nti pāṭho dissati,‘‘āpucchanakicca’’nti pāṭhoyeva pana yuttataro. Yathāākaṅkhitapamāṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘gāmasatepi vā’’ti.
1796. Tato aññanti, "another than that," means another village from the village first entered at the wrong time after asking leave. Punatatoti, "again, from there," means referring to the second village. In some books, the reading ‘‘āpucchane kicca’’nti, "a task involving asking leave," is seen, but the reading ‘‘āpucchanakicca’’nti, "a task of asking leave," is more correct. In order to show the desired amount, he says, ‘‘gāmasatepi vā’’ti, "even in a hundred villages."
1797.Passambhetvānāti paṭivinodetvā. Antarāaññaṃgāmaṃ pavisanti ceti yojanā.
1797. Passambhetvānāti, "having calmed," means having dismissed. Antarāaññaṃgāmaṃ pavisanti ceti yojanā, they enter another village in between; this is the construction.
1798-9.Kulaghare vāaññatthaāsanasālāya vā bhattakiccaṃ katvāyobhikkhu sappibhikkhāya vā telabhikkhāya vā sace caritukāmo siyāti yojanā.
1798-9. Kulaghare vāaññatthaāsanasālāya vā bhattakiccaṃ katvāyobhikkhu sappibhikkhāya vā telabhikkhāya vā sace caritukāmo siyāti yojanā, having finished his meal in a family's house or elsewhere in a refectory, if whatever bhikkhu should desire to go for alms of ghee or alms of oil; this is the construction.
Passeti pakativacanasavanārahe attano samīpe, eteneva ettakā ṭhānā dūrībhūto asanto nāma hotīti byatirekato labbhatīti dasseti.Asanteti avijjamāne vā vuttappamāṇato dūrībhūte vā.Natthīti ettha ‘‘cintetvā’’ti seso.
Passeti, "near," means near oneself, within earshot; by this it is shown by contrast that one who is so far away from that location is called "asanto," "not near." Asanteti, "not near," means either not existing or being far away from the stated amount. Natthīti, "is not," here, "cintetvā," "having thought," is to be supplied.
1802.Anokkammāti anupasakkitvā.Maggāti gantabbamaggā.
1802. Anokkammāti, "without approaching." Maggāti, "from the road," means from the road to be traveled.
1803.Tikapācittiyanti vikāle vikālasaññivematikakālasaññīnaṃ vasena tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
1803. Tikapācittiyanti, "triple pācittiya," the triple pācittiya is stated based on whether it is the wrong time, perception of the wrong time, doubt about the time, or perception of the right time.
1804.Accāyike kicce vāpīti sappadaṭṭhādīnaṃ bhesajjapariyesanādike acirāyitabbakicce sati gacchato.
1804. Accāyike kicce vāpīti, "or in an emergency," means when there is an urgent task such as seeking medicine for one bitten by a snake, etc., for one who is going.
1805.Antarārāmanti gāmabbhantare saṅghārāmaṃ.Bhikkhunīnaṃ upassayanti bhikkhunivihāraṃ.Titthiyānaṃ upassayanti titthiyārāmaṃ.
1805. Antarārāmanti, "inner ārāma," means a Saṅgha ārāma within the village. Bhikkhunīnaṃ upassayanti, "nuns' residence," means a nun's monastery. Titthiyānaṃ upassayanti, "sectarians' residence," means a sectarian's ārāma.
1806-7.Antarārāmādigamane na kevalaṃ anāpucchā gacchatoyeva, kāyabandhanaṃ abandhitvā, saṅghāṭiṃ apārupitvā gacchantassāpi anāpatti.
1806-7. Antarārāmādigamane na kevalaṃ anāpucchā gacchatoyeva, kāyabandhanaṃ abandhitvā, saṅghāṭiṃ apārupitvā gacchantassāpi anāpatti. In going to an inner ārāma, etc., not only is there no offense for one who goes without asking leave, but there is also no offense for one who goes without tying the waistband or without throwing back the outer robe.
Āpadāsupīti sīho vā byaggho vā āgacchati, megho vā uṭṭheti, añño vā koci upaddavo uppajjati, evarūpāsu āpadāsupi bahigāmato antogāmaṃ gacchato anāpattīti attho.
Āpadāsupīti, "even in dangers," means even when dangers such as a lion or tiger approaching, or a cloud rising up, or any other trouble arising, there is no offense for one going from outside the village to inside the village; this is the meaning.
Vikālagāmappavesanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Vikālagāmappavesanakathāvaṇṇanā.
1808.Aṭṭhidantamayaṃ vāpi visāṇajaṃ vāpi sūcigharanti yojanā.Aṭṭhināma yaṃ kiñci aṭṭhi.Dantoti hatthidanto.Visāṇaṃnāma yaṃ kiñci visāṇaṃ.
1808. Aṭṭhidantamayaṃ vāpi visāṇajaṃ vāpi sūcigharanti yojanā, an ivory needle case or a horn needle case; this is the construction. Aṭṭhināma, "bone," means whatever bone. Dantoti, "ivory," means an elephant's tusk. Visāṇaṃnāma, "horn," means whatever horn.
1809.Lābheti paṭilābhe.Bhedanakanti bhedanameva bhedanakaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti bhedanakaṃ, paṭhamaṃ bhinditvā pacchā desetabbattā taṃ bhedanakaṃ assa pācittiyassa atthīti bhedanakaṃ, pācittiyaṃ, assatthiatthe a-kārapaccayo.
1809. Lābheti, "in gain," means in receiving. Bhedanakanti, "the cause of breach," bhedanameva bhedanakaṃ, "breach itself is breach-causing," taṃ assa atthīti bhedanakaṃ, "that exists for him, therefore breach-causing," because it must be broken first and then confessed, that breach-causing exists for him, therefore bhedanakaṃ, pācittiyaṃ, "pācittiya," a-kārapaccayo, a is the affix in the sense of "exists."
1810-1.‘‘Anāpatti araṇike’’ti padacchedo.Araṇiketi araṇidhanuke.Vidheti kāyabandhanassa vidhake.Añjanikāti añjanināḷikā.Dakapuñchaniyāti nahātassa gatte udakapuñchanapesikāya.Vāsijaṭeti vāsidaṇḍake.
1810-1. ‘‘Anāpatti araṇike’’ti padacchedo, "there is no offense for a wilderness-dweller" is the word division. Araṇiketi, "for a wilderness-dweller," araṇidhanuke, means for one who dwells in the wilderness. Vidheti, "for a fastening," vidhake kāyabandhanassa, "for a fastening" means for a waistband. Añjanikāti, "ointment tube," means a tube for ointment. Dakapuñchaniyāti, "for a water-wiping cloth," nahātassa gatte udakapuñchanapesikāya, "for a water-wiping cloth" means for a cloth for wiping water off the body of one who has bathed. Vāsijaṭeti, "for an adze handle," means for an adze handle.
Sūcigharakathāvaṇṇanā.
Sūcigharakathāvaṇṇanā.
1812-3.Mañcapīṭhasarūpaṃ dutiye bhūtagāmavagge catutthasikkhāpade vuttameva. ‘‘Sugataṅgulena aṭṭhaṅgulapādaka’’nti aṭṭhaṅgulapādakassa āgatattā ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇenā’’ti ettha ‘‘pādenā’’ti seso.
1812-3. Mañcapīṭhasarūpaṃ dutiye bhūtagāmavagge catutthasikkhāpade vuttameva. The nature of a couch or chair is just as stated in the fourth training rule of the second Bhūtagāma Vagga. ‘‘Sugataṅgulena aṭṭhaṅgulapādaka’’nti, "a leg eight fingers high by the Sugata's finger," since a leg eight fingers high has already been mentioned, ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇenā’’ti, "with a measure of eight fingers," here, "pādenā," "by a foot," is to be supplied.
Heṭṭhimāṭaninti aṭaniyā heṭṭhimatalaṃ. Aṭaniyā heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimāṭanī, taṃ ṭhapetvā, aññatra heṭṭhimāya aṭaniyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Desanāpubbabhāgiyena mañcapādacchedena saha vattatītisacchedā.Taṃpamāṇaṃ.Atikkamatoti atikkāmayato, gāthābandhavasena ya-kāralopo.
Heṭṭhimāṭaninti, "lower cross-piece," means the lower surface of the cross-piece. Aṭaniyā heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimāṭanī, the lower part of the cross-piece is the lower cross-piece, leaving that out, it is stated to be another lower cross-piece. Sacchedā, "with the cutting," it occurs together with the cutting of the couch leg which is the earlier part of the statement. Taṃpamāṇaṃ, "that" is the measure. Atikkamatoti, "for one exceeding," means for one exceeding, the ya-kāralopo, the dropping of the ya-kāra, is because of the requirements of the verse.
1815.Pamāṇena karontassāti aṭaniyā heṭṭhā vaḍḍhakiratanappamāṇena pādena yojetvā karontassa, eteneva ‘‘ūnakaṃ karontassā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhitaṃ.Tassāti tassa appamāṇikassa.Chinditvāti aṭanito heṭṭhā vaḍḍhakiratanātirittaṃ ṭhānaṃ chinditvā.
1815. Pamāṇena karontassāti, "for one making according to the measure," means for one joining the leg with the measure that exceeds the carpenter's measure below the cross-piece, by this the meaning "for one making it less" is implied. Tassāti, "of that," means of that immeasurable one. Chinditvāti, "having cut off," means having cut off the place below the cross-piece that exceeds the carpenter's measure.
1816.Pamāṇato nikhaṇitvāti ettha ‘‘adhika’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati, pamāṇato adhikaṃ ṭhānaṃ nikhaṇitvā, antobhūmiṃ pavesetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Uttānaṃ vāpīti uddhaṃ pādaṃ katvā bhūmiyaṃ vā dārughaṭikāsu vā ṭhapetvā.Aṭṭaṃ vā bandhitvā paribhuñjatoti ukkhipitvā tulāsaṅghāṭe ṭhapetvā aṭṭaṃ bandhitvā paribhuñjantassa anāpatti.
1816. Pamāṇato nikhaṇitvāti, "having dug out from the measure," here, "adhikaṃ," "more," is obtained by implication, having dug out a place that is more than the measure, it is stated as having made it enter into the interior ground. Uttānaṃ vāpīti, "or upturned," means having made the foot upwards and set it on the ground or on wooden supports. Aṭṭaṃ vā bandhitvā paribhuñjatoti, "or having tied a support and used it," means there is no offense for one lifting it up, setting it on a weighing scale, tying a support and using it.
Mañcakathāvaṇṇanā.
Mañcakathāvaṇṇanā.
1817.Tūlaṃ onaddhametthātitūlonaddhaṃ,tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā upari cimilikāya onaddhaṃ, ‘‘tūlaṃ nāma tīṇi tūlāni rukkhatūlaṃ latātūlaṃ poṭakitūla’’nti (pāci. 528) vuttatūlānaṃ aññataraṃ pakkhipitvā upari pilotikāya sibbitvā katanti vuttaṃ hoti.Poṭakitūlanti erakatūlādi yaṃ kiñci tiṇajātīnaṃ tūlaṃ. Uddālanameva uddālanakaṃ, taṃ assa atthītiuddālanakanti vuttanayameva. Atikkantā īti upaddavo yena so anīti, bhagavā, tenaanītinā.
1817. Tūlaṃ onaddhametthātitūlonaddhaṃ,tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā upari cimilikāya onaddhaṃ, "tūlaṃ nāma tīṇi tūlāni rukkhatūlaṃ latātūlaṃ poṭakitūla," "tūla means three kinds of tūla, tree tūla, creeper tūla, and pod tūla," (pāci. 528) having inserted one of the stated tūlas, having sewn it with pilotikāya, a covering, it is stated as having made it. Poṭakitūlanti, "pod tūla," means the tūla of grass species such as eraka. Uddālanameva uddālanakaṃ, "uprooting itself is uprooting-causing," taṃ assa atthītiuddālanakanti, "that exists for him, therefore uprooting-causing," is as stated above. Atikkantā īti upaddavo yena so anīti, bhagavā, "gone beyond is the disaster by whom, that is the Anīti, the Blessed One," tenaanītinā, "by the Anīti."
1818.Āyogeti āyogapatte.Bandhaneti kāyabandhane.Aṃsabaddhaketi aṃsabandhanake.Bibbohaneti upadhāne.Thavikāti pattathavikā.Thavikādīsūtiādi-saddena sipāṭikādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Thavikādīsu tūlonaddhesu paribhuttesu bhikkhuno anāpattīti yojanā.
1818. Āyogeti, "in a strap," means in a strap for the waist. Bandhaneti, "in a band," means in a waistband. Aṃsabaddhaketi, "in a shoulder-strap," means in a shoulder strap. Bibbohaneti, "in a pillow," means in a cushion. Thavikāti, "bag," means a bowl bag. Thavikādīsūti, "in a bag, etc.," with ādi, "etc.," is included sipāṭikā, a carrying bag, etc. There is no offense for a bhikkhu who has used tūla-filled items such as bags, etc.; this is the construction.
1819.Aññena ca katanti ettha ‘‘mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.Uddāletvāti pilotikaṃ uppāṭetvā tūlaṃ apanetvā.Nayāti samuṭṭhānādayo.
1819. Aññena ca katanti, "and made by another," here, "mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā," "couch or chair," is obtained from the context. Uddāletvāti, "having uprooted," means having pulled out the covering and removed the tūla. Nayāti, "the methods," means arising, etc.
Tūlonaddhakathāvaṇṇanā.
Tūlonaddhakathāvaṇṇanā.
1820.Nisīdananti nisīdanacīvaraṃ.Pamāṇatoti ‘‘tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso dve vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, dasā vidatthī’’ti (pāci. 531) vuttapamāṇato. Pamāṇātikkame payoge tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
1820. Nisīdananti, "sitting cloth," means a sitting cloth. Pamāṇatoti, "from the measure," means from the measure stated, "tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso dve vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, dasā vidatthī," "herein is the measure: lengthwise, two spans of the Sugata's span, breadthwise, one and a half, the fringe ten spans" (pāci. 531). There is a dukkata offense for an excess of the measure; this is the construction.
1821.Sacchedanti pamāṇato atirittapadesassa chedanakiriyāsahitapaṭikammaṃ pācittiyamudīritanti attho.Tassāti nisīdanassa. Dvīsu ṭhānesu phāletvā tisso dasā kātabbā siyunti yojanā.
1821. Saccheda means the expiation involving the act of cutting off the excess portion of the prescribed measurement; this is the meaning. Tassā means of the sitting cloth. The explanation is that it should be split in two places and three strips should be made.
1822.Tadūnakanti tato pamāṇato ūnakaṃ.Vitānādiṃ karontassāti etthaādi-saddena attharaṇasāṇipākārabhisibibbohanānaṃ saṅgaho.‘‘Sañcarittasamā nayā’’ti idaṃ vuttatthameva.
1822. Tadūnakaṃ means less than that measurement. Vitānādiṃ karontassā here, the word ādi includes canopies, sheets, surrounding walls, pillows, and bolsters. ‘‘Sañcarittasamā nayā’’ this has already been said.
Nisīdanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Sitting Cloth Section.
1823.Rogeti kaṇḍupiḷakādiroge sati. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave yassa kaṇḍu vā piḷakāvā assāvo vā thullakacchu vā ābādho, tassa kaṇḍupaṭicchādi’’nti (mahāva. 354). Etthakaṇḍūti kacchu.Piḷakāti lohitatuṇḍikā sukhumapiḷakā.Assāvoti arisabhagandalamadhumehādivasena asucipaggharaṇaṃ.Thullakacchu vā ābādhoti mahāpiḷakābādho vuccati.Pamāṇatoti ‘‘tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso catasso vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo’’ti (pāci. 538) vuttappamāṇato.
1823. Roge means in the presence of diseases such as scabies and boils. As it was said: "I allow, monks, a cloth for scratching for one who has scabies, a boil, discharge, thick rash, or illness." (mahāva. 354). Here, kaṇḍū means scabies. Piḷakā means red blisters or small blisters. Assāvo means the oozing of impurities in the form of piles, fistulas, diabetes, etc. Thullakacchu vā ābādho means a disease of large boils. Pamāṇato means from the measurement mentioned, "Here is the measurement for it: in length, four spans of the Sugata span; in width, two spans" (pāci. 538).
Kaṇḍupaṭicchādikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Cloth for Scratching Section.
1825.Pamāṇenevāti ‘‘tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso cha vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ aḍḍhateyyā’’ti (pāci. 543) vuttappamāṇeneva.Pamāṇātikkameti vassikasāṭikāya yathāvuttapamāṇato atikkamane, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Tassabhikkhussa.Nayoti chedanapācittiyādiko vinicchayanayo.
1825. Pamāṇenevā means according to the measurement stated: "Here is the measurement for it: in length, six spans of the Sugata span; in width, two and a half spans" (pāci. 543). Pamāṇātikkame means exceeding the stated measurement for the rains-bathing cloth; this is a locative case in the sense of a condition. Tassa of that monk. Nayo means the method of judgment, such as the pācittiya for cutting.
Vassikasāṭikakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Rains-Bathing Cloth Section.
1826.Sugatassa cīvarena tulyappamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ yo bhikkhu sace kāreyya, tassa cīvarassakaraṇetassa bhikkhussadukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā. Tulyaṃ pamāṇaṃ yassāti viggaho.
1826. If a monk should have a robe made equal in size to the Sugata’s robe, in the making of that robe, that monk would incur a dukkaṭa penalty, is the construction. Tulyaṃ pamāṇaṃ yassa means that which has equal measure.
1827.Attano vatthānaṃ karaṇakārāpanaṃ vinā aññato paṭilābho nāma natthi, sūcikammapariyosāne cīvarasarūpassa paṭilābhoyevetthapaṭilābhoti viññāyati.
1827. There is no obtaining (paṭilābho) from elsewhere without personally making or having one’s own cloths made; at the conclusion of the needlework, the obtaining of something in the form of a robe itself is what is known as paṭilābho here.
1828.Tassāti yaṃ ‘‘sugatassa cīvarenā’’ti vuttaṃ, tassa sugatacīvarassa. Dīghaso pamāṇena sugatassa vidatthiyā nava vidatthiyo, tiriyaṃ pamāṇena cha vidatthiyoviniddiṭṭhāsikkhāpadeyeva kathitāti yojanā.
1828. Tassā means that which was said, "equal to the Sugata's robe." In length, the measurement of the Sugata’s span is nine spans, and in width, the measurement is six spans; this is viniddiṭṭhā specifically stated in the training rule itself, is the construction.
Nandakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Nanda Section.
Rājavaggo navamo.
The Ninth Chapter, the Rāja Chapter.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Pācittiya Section in the Vinayavinicchaya commentary,
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Paṭhamo bhāgo niṭṭhito.
The First Part is completed.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Self-Enlightened One
Vinayapiṭake
In the Vinayapiṭaka
Vinayavinicchaya-ṭīkā (dutiyo bhāgo)
Vinayavinicchaya-ṭīkā (Second Part)
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya Section
1830-1.Evaṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayena dvenavuti pācittiyāni dassetvā tadanantaraṃ niddiṭṭhe pāṭidesanīye dassetumāha‘‘yo cantaraghara’’ntiādi. Tatthaantaragharanti rathikādimāha. Yathāha ‘‘antaragharaṃ nāma rathikā byūhaṃ siṅghāṭakaṃ ghara’’nti.
1830-1. Having thus shown the ninety-two pācittiyas in a manner that is neither too concise nor too elaborate, to show the pāṭidesanīyas specified immediately thereafter, he says, ‘‘yo antaraghara’’ etc. There, antaraghara means a street, etc. As it was said: "antaraghara means a street, a crossroad, a junction, a house."
tassabhikkhuno gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ,bhogeajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
For tassa that monk, there is a dukkaṭa in the taking; in the bhoge consuming, there is a pāṭidesanīya, is the construction.
Ito paṭṭhāya catasso gāthā uppaṭipāṭiyā potthakesu likhitā, tāsaṃ ayaṃ paṭipāṭi – ‘‘etthantaraghara’’nti tatiyā, ‘‘tasmā bhikkhuniyā’’ti catutthī, ‘‘rathikādīsū’’ti pañcamī, ‘‘rathikāyapi vā’’ti chaṭṭhī. Paṭipāṭi panāyaṃ mātikaṭṭhakathakkamena veditabbā. Imāya paṭipāṭiyā tāsaṃ atthavaṇṇanā hoti –
From here onwards, four verses are written in the wrong order in the books; their correct order is as follows: "etthantaraghara" is the third, "tasmā bhikkhuniyā" is the fourth, "rathikādīsū" is the fifth, "rathikāyapi vā" is the sixth. However, the order should be understood according to the sequence of the summary and the commentary. The meaning of these is explained according to this order –
1832-3.Purimagāthādvayena padabhājanāgatasāmaññavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni aṭṭhakathāgataṃ visesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘etthā’’tiādi. Tatthaetthāti imasmiṃ paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpade.Tassāti aññātikabhikkhuniyā.Vākyatoti ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāyā’’ti vacanato.Hi-saddo hetumhi. Yasmā bhikkhussa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ nappamāṇantiaṭṭhakathāya(pāci. aṭṭha. 553) vaṇṇitaṃ, tasmā ārāmādīsu ṭhatvā dentiyābhikkhuniyāhatthato vīthiādīsu ṭhatvā yo paṭiggaṇheyya ce, evaṃpaṭiggaṇhatotassa bhikkhuno na dosoti yojanā. Paribhogassa paṭiggahaṇamūlakattāna doso.‘‘Paṭiggaṇhato’’ti iminā paribhoge pāṭidesanīyābhāvo ca dīpito hoti.
1832-3. Having shown the general judgment that comes in the word analysis with the first two verses, now, to show the specifics that come in the commentary, he says, ‘‘etthā’’ etc. There, etthā in this first pāṭidesanīya training rule. Tassā of that non-related bhikkhuni. Vākyato from the statement "having entered a house". The word Hi is in the sense of a reason. Because the place where a monk stands is not a measurement, as was described in aṭṭhakathāya (pāci. aṭṭha. 553), therefore, if a bhikkhunī standing in a monastery, etc., gives something from her hand, and someone standing on a road, etc., receives it, in this way, there is no offense for paṭiggaṇhato that monk, is the construction. Because the consumption is rooted in the acceptance, there is na doso, no offense. By ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhato’’, the absence of a pāṭidesanīya in consumption is also indicated.
1834.Sace bhikkhunī rathikādīsu ṭhatvā bhojanaṃ deti, bhikkhu antarārāme ṭhatvā paṭiggaṇhāti ce, tassa āpattīti yojanā. Gāthābandhavasena‘‘bhikkhuni bhojana’’nti rassattaṃ.Āpattīti ca paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu dukkaṭapāṭidesanīyāpattiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ.
1834. If a bhikkhuni stands on the road, etc., and gives food, and a monk stands inside a monastery and accepts it, there is an offense for him, is the construction. Due to the meter of the verse, ‘‘bhikkhuni bhojana’’ is shortened. Āpattī is said referring to the dukkaṭa and pāṭidesanīya offenses in the accepting and consuming.
1835.Rathikādīsu ṭhatvā bhikkhunī bhojanaṃ deti ce, taṃ rathikāyapi vā…pe… ayaṃ nayoti yojanā. Tattharathikāti racchā.Byūhanti anibbijjhitvā ṭhitā gatapaccāgataracchā.Sandhināma gharasandhi.Siṅghāṭakanti catukkoṇaṃ vā tikoṇaṃ vā maggasamodhānaṭṭhānaṃ.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘āpattī’’ti anantaragāthāya vuttanayo.
1835. If a bhikkhuni standing on the road, etc., gives food, then also on that road...pe... this is the method, is the construction. There, rathikā means a street. Byūha means a street where comings and goings occur without obstruction. Sandhi means a house junction. Siṅghāṭaka means a place where roads meet at a four-way or three-way intersection. Ayaṃ nayo means the method stated in the immediately preceding verse, "there is an offense."
1837.Āmisena asambhinnarasaṃ sandhāya idaṃ dukkaṭaṃ bhāsitaṃ. Āmisena sambhinne ekarase yāmakālikādimhi paṭiggahetvā ajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyāpatti siyāti yojanā.
1837. This dukkaṭa was spoken referring to flavor that is unmixed with alms food. If it is mixed with alms food, in one flavor, having accepted yāmakālika etc., in the act of consuming there is a pāṭidesanīya offense, is the construction.
1838.Ekatoupasampannahatthatoti bhikkhunīnaṃ santike upasampannāya hatthato. Yathāha ‘‘ekatoupasampannāyāti bhikkhunīnaṃ santike upasampannāyā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 553). Bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya pana yathāvatthukamevāti.
1838. Ekatoupasampannahatthato means from the hand of one who is fully ordained in the presence of bhikkhunīs. As it was said, "By 'one who is fully ordained in the presence of bhikkhunīs' is meant one who is fully ordained in the presence of bhikkhunīs" (pāci. aṭṭha. 553). But one who is fully ordained in the presence of monks, it is just as it is.
1839.Aññātikāya ñātikasaññissa, tatheva vimatissa ca dukkaṭanti yojanā.
1839. For one who perceives a non-relative as a relative, and similarly for one who is in doubt, there is a dukkaṭa, is the construction.
1840.Aññātikāya dāpentiyā bhūmiyā nikkhipitvā dadamānāya vā antarārāmādīsu ṭhatvā dentiyā paṭiggaṇhato bhikkhussa anāpattīti yojanā.Antarārāmādīsūti etthaādi-saddena bhikkhunupassayatitthiyaseyyāpaṭikkamanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Paṭikkamanaṃnāma bhojanasālā.
1840. If a non-related bhikkhuni, giving while placing (it) on the ground or while handing (it) over, or standing inside a monastery etc., gives, there is no offense for the monk who accepts it, is the construction. Antarārāmādīsū here, the word ādi includes a bhikkhuni’s residence, a heretical dwelling, and a refectory. Paṭikkamanaṃ means a refectory.
1841.Gāmato bahi nīharitvā detīti yojanā.
1841. Having brought (it) outside the village, she gives it, is the construction.
1842.Hatthatoti ettha ‘‘gahaṇe’’ti seso.Tathāti anāpatti. Samuṭṭhānaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ eḷakalomena samaṃ matanti yojanā.
1842. Hatthato here, the word "in taking" is understood. Tathā means no offense. It should be understood that this training rule is equivalent to that regarding elaka wool, is the construction.
Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the First Pāṭidesanīya Section.
1843-4.Avutteti vakkhamānanayena avutte. Ekenapi ca bhikkhunāti sambandho.Apasakkāti apagaccha. Ādi-atthavācināiti-saddena ‘‘apasakka tāva, bhagini, yāva bhikkhū bhuñjantī’’ti vākyaseso saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Iminā apasādanākāro sandassito.‘‘Ekenapi ca bhikkhunā’’ti iminā avakaṃso dassito. Ukkaṃso pana ‘‘tehi bhikkhūhi sā bhikkhunī apasādetabbā’’ti pāḷitopi daṭṭhabbo.‘‘Āmisa’’nti sāmaññavacanepi pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarasseva gahaṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarenā’’ti.Bhogeti caekatoupasampannanti ca vuttatthameva.
1843-4. Avutte means unsaid, in the manner that will be explained. And it is connected with even one monk. Apasakkā means go away. By the word iti, which expresses the beginning, the rest of the sentence, "Go away, sister, until the monks have finished eating," is included, and should be understood. By this, the manner of sending away is shown. ‘‘Ekenapi ca bhikkhunā’’ by this, the minimum is shown. However, the maximum should be seen in the Pāḷi, "that bhikkhuni should be sent away by those monks." Although ‘‘Āmisa’’ is a general term, it refers only to one of the five foods. As it was said, "With one of the five foods." Bhoge and ekatoupasampanna have already been explained.
1845.Tathevāti dukkaṭaṃ.Tatthāti anupasampannāya.
1845. Tathevā dukkaṭaṃ. Tatthā in the presence of one who is not fully ordained.
1846.Attano bhatte dinnepi iminā sikkhāpadena anāpatti, purimasikkhāpadena pana āpattisambhavā‘‘na detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘attano bhattaṃ dāpeti, na detīti ettha sacepi attano bhattaṃ deti, iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattiyeva, purimasikkhāpadena āpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 558).Tathāti anāpatti. Ubhayasikkhāpadehipi anāpattiṃ dassetumāha‘‘padeti ce’’ti. Yathāha ‘‘aññesaṃ bhattaṃ deti, na dāpetīti ettha pana sacepi dāpeyya, iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti bhaveyya, dentiyā pana neva iminā, na purimena āpattī’’ti.
1846. Even if one's own meal is given, there is no offense by this training rule, but since an offense is possible by the previous training rule, ‘‘na detī’’ is said. As it was said: "Even if one gives one's own meal, there is no offense by this training rule, but there is an offense by the previous training rule." Tathā means no offense. To show no offense by either training rule, he says, ‘‘padeti ce’’. As it was said: "But if one gives another's meal or has (it) given, there would be an offense by this training rule, but there is no offense by either this or the previous (training rule) for the one who is giving."
1847.Bhikkhunī yaṃ na dinnaṃ, taṃ dāpeti, yattha vā na dinnaṃ, tattha dāpeti, tampisabbesaṃmittāmittānaṃ samaṃ dāpeti, tatthāpi anāpatti.
1847. A bhikkhuni gives what has not been given, or has (it) given where (it) has not been given, and she has (it) given equally to sabbesaṃ all, friends and foes alike; even in that case, there is no offense.
1848.Sikkhamānā vā sāmaṇerikā vā ‘‘idha sūpaṃ detha, odanaṃ dethā’’tivosāsantīvidhānaṃ karontī ṭhitā, taṃ anapasādentassa anāpatti. Pañceva bhojanāni vinā aññaṃ vosāsantiṃ bhikkhuniṃ anapasādentassa anāpatti. Anapasādentassa ummattakādinopi anāpattīti yojanā.
1848. A trainee or a novice stands vosāsantī urging, "Give soup here, give rice here," making arrangements, there is no offense for not sending her away. There is no offense for not sending away a bhikkhuni who is urging (for something) other than the five foods. There is also no offense for not sending away an insane person, etc., is the construction.
1849.Samuṭṭhānanti ettha ‘‘imassā’’ti seso. Bhojanaṃ kiriyaṃ, vosāsantiyā anivāraṇaṃ akiriyanti evamidaṃkriyākriyaṃ.
1849. Samuṭṭhāna here, the word "of this" is understood. Food is an action (kiriyaṃ), not preventing the urging is a non-action (akiriyaṃ); thus this is kriyākriyaṃ, action and non-action.
Dutiyapāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Second Pāṭidesanīya Section.
1850-1.Sekkhanti sammateti ‘‘sekkhasammataṃ nāma kulaṃ yaṃ kulaṃ saddhāya vaḍḍhati, bhogena hāyati, evarūpassa kulassa ñattidutiyena kammena sekkhasammuti dinnā hotī’’ti (pāci. 567) vuttaṃ idaṃ kulaṃ sekkhasammataṃ nāma. Tenāha‘‘laddhasammutike kule’’ti. Laddhā sammuti yenāti viggaho. Gharūpacāraṃ okkante nimantitopi animantitova hotīti āha‘‘gharūpacārokkamanā pubbevā’’ti. Yathāha ‘‘animantito nāma ajjatanāya vā svātanāya vā animantito, gharūpacāraṃ okkamante nimanteti, eso animantito nāmā’’ti (pāci. 567).
1850-1. Sekkhanti sammate "A family that is considered sekkha is a family that increases with faith, decreases with wealth; for a family of this kind, the sekkha designation has been given by a formal act with motion and one announcement" (pāci. 567). Therefore, he says, ‘‘laddhasammutike kule’’ in a family that has received designation. Laddhā sammuti yena means that by which designation has been received. Even when entering the confines of the house, one is considered uninvited whether invited or not; therefore, he says, ‘‘gharūpacārokkamanā pubbevā’’. As it was said, "Uninvited means uninvited for today or for tomorrow; upon entering the confines of the house, he invites; this is called uninvited" (pāci. 567).
Gahetvāti sahatthā paṭiggahetvā.‘‘Āmisa’’nti iminā sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā sahatthā paṭiggahetvā’’ti (pāci. 567).Gahaṇeti ettha ‘‘āhāratthāyā’’ti seso.
Gahetvā having taken with his own hand. ‘‘Āmisa’’ is related to this. As it was said, "Having accepted something edible or something consumable with one's own hand" (pāci. 567). Gahaṇe here, the words "for the purpose of food" are understood.
1853.Tatthāti asekkhasammate kule.Tatheva paridīpitanti dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ.
1853. Tatthā in a family that is not considered sekkha. Tatheva paridīpitaṃ dukkaṭaṃ is clearly shown.
1854.Nimantitassa vāti etthavā-saddena nimantitassa avasesaṃ gaṇhāti. Yathāha ‘‘nimantitassa vā gilānassa vā sesakaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti. Aññesaṃ bhikkhā tattha dīyatīti yojanā.Tatthāti tasmiṃ sekkhasammate kule.
1854. Nimantitassa vā here, the word vā includes the remainder of the invited. As it was said, "Or he eats the remainder of one who is invited or of one who is sick." Alms are given to other monks there, is the construction. Tatthā in that family that is considered sekkha.
1855.Yatthakatthacīti āsanasālādīsu yattha katthaci.Niccabhattādike vāpīti etthaādi-saddena salākabhattapakkhikauposathikapāṭipadikabhattānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
1855. Yatthakatthacī in whatever place, such as an assembly hall, etc. Niccabhattādike vāpī here, the word ādi includes regular meal, ticket meal, fortnightly, uposatha, and pāṭipadika meals.
1856.Dvāreti ettha ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’ti seso.Sampatteti ettha ‘‘pacchā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘sacepi anāgate bhikkhumhi paṭhamaṃyeva nīharitvā dvāre ṭhapetvā pacchā sampattassa denti, vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 569).
1856. Dvāre here, the word "having placed" is understood. Sampatte here, the word "afterwards" is understood. As it was said, "Even if they first take (it) out and place (it) at the door before the arrival of the monk in the future, and then give (it) to him when he arrives, it is allowable" (pāci. aṭṭha. 569).
1857.Mahāpaccariyā(paāci. aṭṭha. 569) gatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘bhikkhu’’ntiādi.Samuṭṭhāneḷakūpamanti samuṭṭhānato eḷakalomasikkhāpadasadisanti attho.
1857. To show the judgment that came in the Mahāpaccari (paāci. aṭṭha. 569), he says, ‘‘bhikkhu’’ etc. Samuṭṭhāneḷakūpama means it is similar to the training rule regarding elaka wool in terms of its origin.
Tatiyapāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Third Pāṭidesanīya Section.
1858-9.‘‘Pañcannaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ, etaṃ appaṭisaṃviditaṃ nāmā’’ti vacanato ca idhāpi ‘‘sahadhammikañāpita’’nti vakkhamānattā caagahaṭṭha-saddena paribbājakānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Vuttameva nayaṃ vohārantarena dassetumāha‘‘itthiyā purisena vā’’ti. ‘‘Yāni kho pana tāni āraññakāni senāsanānī’’ti (pāci. 573) vacanatoārāmanti āraññakārāmamāha. Sace evamārocitaṃ paṭisaṃviditanti hivuttaṃpadabhājaneti (pāci. 573) yojanā.Paṭisaṃviditanti pageva niveditaṃ.
1858-9. Because of the statement, "What is made known to five is called not made known," and because it will be said here, "having informed a co-religionist," the word agahaṭṭha includes wanderers. To show the same method with a different expression, he says, ‘‘itthiyā purisena vā’’. Because of the statement, "Those secluded forest lodgings" (pāci. 573), ārāma means a forest monastery. If it is announced in this way, it is indeed called made known; this is the construction of vuttaṃ padabhājaneti (pāci. 573). Paṭisaṃvidita means previously informed.
1860.Pacchā yathārocitaṃ tameva vā tassa ca parivāraṃ katvā aññaṃ bahuṃ vā āharīyatu, tampi paṭisaṃveditaṃ nāmāti yojanā.
1860. Afterwards, let what was announced be brought, or having made a retinue of that same (thing), or having made a great deal of something else; that too is called made known, is the construction.
1861.Yāguyā viditaṃ katvāti ettha ‘‘taṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti idaṃ sāmatthiyā labbhati. Idampi viditaṃ kurundiyaṃ vaṭṭatīti vuttanti yojanā.
1861. Yāguyā viditaṃ katvā here, "having set that aside" is obtained by implication. This too is allowable in the Kurundi, it was said, is the construction.
1862.Panāti api-saddattho. Aññānipi kulānīti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ paṭisaṃveditaṃ katvā khādanīyādīni gahetvā gacchatīti sutvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 573)aṭṭhakathāseso.Tenāti katapaṭisaṃveditena. Tampi ca sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
1862. Panāti: has the sense of api (also). Aññānipi kulānīti yojanā: connect to other families as well. Here, the rest of the Aṭṭhakathā is: "Having heard that a family named such-and-such, having been informed, is going away taking edibles, etc." (pāci. aṭṭha. 573). Tenāti: by the one who has informed. Tampi ca sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā: and that is all allowable.
1863.Evaṃ yaṃ anārocitanti ‘‘ārāmaṃ vā upacāraṃ vā pavisitvā’’tiādinā nayena yaṃ paṭhamaṃ aniveditaṃ.‘‘Eva’’nti idaṃ ‘‘yaṃ ārāmamanābhata’’nti imināpi yojetabbaṃ.Evanti ‘‘tassa parivāraṃ katvā’’tiādinā pakārena.‘‘Taṃ asaṃviditaṃ nāmā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sahadhammikañāpita’’nti imināpi yojetabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘pañcannaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ, etaṃ appaṭisaṃviditaṃ nāmā’’ti (pāci. 573).Aṭṭhakathāyañca‘‘pañcannaṃ paṭisaṃviditanti pañcasu sahadhammikesu yaṃ kiñci pesetvā ‘khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā āharissāmā’ti paṭisaṃviditaṃ katampi appaṭisaṃviditamevāti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 573) vuttaṃ.
1863. Evaṃ yaṃ anārocitanti: whatever was not announced in the manner beginning with "having entered the monastery or the vicinity." ‘‘Eva’’nti: this should be connected with "yaṃ ārāmamanābhata". Evanti: in the manner of "having made a retinue for him," etc. ‘‘Taṃ asaṃviditaṃ nāmā’’ti: this should be connected with "sahadhammikañāpita". As he said, "Informed to five, this is called uninformed" (pāci. 573). Aṭṭhakathāyañca: and in the Commentary, it is said, "Informed to five means, having sent to any five co-religionists, 'We will bring edibles or food,' even having informed in this way, it is still considered uninformed, that is the meaning" (pāci. aṭṭha. 573).
1864.Kārāpetvāti ettha ‘‘paṭisaṃvidita’’nti seso.
1864. Kārāpetvāti: here, "paṭisaṃvidita" is understood.
1865.Bhikkhunā vā gantvā antarāmagge gahetabbanti yojanā.Evamakatvāti ‘‘bahiārāmaṃ pesetvā’’tiādinā vuttavidhānaṃ akatvā.Upacāratoti ettha bhummatthe to-paccayo veditabbo.
1865. Bhikkhunā vā gantvā antarāmagge gahetabbanti yojanā: it should be connected that a bhikkhu goes and takes it on the way. Evamakatvāti: without doing according to the method stated, beginning with "having sent outside the monastery." Upacāratoti: here, the to-suffix should be understood in the sense of bhumma.
1868.‘‘Paṭisaṃvidite’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘anāpatte vā’’ti iminā sambandho.Paṭisaṃviditeti ettha ‘‘gilānassā’’ti seso. Paṭisaṃvidite anāpatti, gilānassāpi anāpatti, appaṭisaṃviditepitassapaṭisaṃviditassa avasesake vā gilānassa avasesake vā anāpatti evāti sambandho. Yathāhaanāpattivāre‘‘paṭisaṃviditassa vā gilānassa vā sesakaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti (pāci. 575). Bahārāme paṭiggahetvā antoyeva bhuñjato assa anāpattīti yojanā.Gahetvā vāti etthavā-saddo ‘‘tassā’’tiādīsupi yojetabbo.
1868. ‘‘Paṭisaṃvidite’’tiādīnaṃ: the connection of the words beginning with "paṭisaṃvidite" is with "anāpatte vā". Paṭisaṃviditeti: here, "gilānassa" (for the sick) is understood. Paṭisaṃvidite anāpatti: there is no offense when informed; gilānassāpi anāpatti: there is also no offense for the sick; appaṭisaṃviditepi: even when uninformed, there is no offense for the sick or the remainder of that which was informed. As he said in the anāpattivāre: "Or, eating the remainder of what was for the informed or the sick" (pāci. 575). Bahārāme paṭiggahetvā antoyeva bhuñjato assa anāpattīti yojanā: it should be connected that there is no offense for him who, having received it outside the monastery, eats it inside. Gahetvā vāti: here, the word vā should be connected with "tassā" etc.
1869.Tatthāti tasmiṃ āraññakārāme. Khādato anāpatti evāti yojanā, tattha ‘‘aññena kappiyaṃ katvā dinnānī’’ti seso.
1869. Tatthāti: in that wilderness monastery. Khādato anāpatti evāti yojanā: it should be connected that there is no offense in eating, here "aññena kappiyaṃ katvā dinnānī" (those given having made allowable by another) is understood.
Catutthapāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Fourth Pāṭidesanīya.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Pāṭidesanīya section
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
in the Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanā, the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Sekhiyakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sekhiya Rules
1870.Evaṃ pāṭidesanīyavinicchayaṃ dassetvā tadanantaraṃ uddiṭṭhānaṃ sekhiyānaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yo anādariyenevā’’tiādi.Yoti thero vā navo vā majjhimo vā. Etthaanādariyaṃnāma sañcicca āpattiāpajjanaṃ, nivāsanādivatthassa uggahaṇe nirussāhañca.Pacchatopi vāti etthavā-saddena ‘‘passatopi vā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tassa cāti etthaca-saddo vakkhamānasamuccayo.
1870. Thus, having shown the Vinicchaya of the Pāṭidesanīya rules, to show the Vinicchaya of the Sekhiya rules that were recited immediately after, he says ‘‘yo anādariyenevā’’tiādi. Yoti: whether a senior, a junior, or one in the middle. Here, anādariyaṃnāma: is intentionally incurring an offense, and being unenthusiastic in taking up the garment for wearing, etc. Pacchatopi vāti: here, the word vā includes "passatopi vā". Tassa cāti: here, the word ca is an accumulation of what is to come.
1871.Na kevalaṃ vuttanayena nivāsentasseva hoti,khandhakāgatahatthisoṇḍādiākārenāpi nivāsentassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti āha‘‘hatthisoṇḍādī’’tiādi. Hatthisoṇḍādinivāsanaṃ paratokhuddakavatthukkhandhake(cūḷava. 280) āvi bhavissati.Parimaṇḍalanti samantato maṇḍalaṃ katvā.Vatthabbanti nivatthabbaṃ nivāsetabbanti attho.
1871. Not only is there an offense of dukkaṭa for one who wears it in the manner stated, but he says ‘‘hatthisoṇḍādī’’tiādi: there is also a dukkaṭa for one who wears it in the manner of an elephant's trunk, etc., as in the Khandhaka. Wearing like an elephant's trunk, etc., will become clear later in the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka(cūḷava. 280). Parimaṇḍalanti: having made a circle all around. Vatthabbanti: should be worn, it means should be clothed.
1872.Jāṇumaṇḍalatoheṭṭhāti ettha ‘‘jaṅghaṭṭhisīsato paṭṭhāyā’’ti seso.Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇakanti vaḍḍhakiaṅgulena aṭṭhaṅgulamattanti ācariyā. ‘‘Yo pana sukkhajaṅgho vā mahāpiṇḍikamaṃso vā hoti, tassa sāruppatthāya jāṇumaṇḍalato aṭṭhaṅgulādhikampi otāretvā nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 576)aṭṭhakathaṃsaṅgaṇhitumāha‘‘tato ūnaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti.
1872. Jāṇumaṇḍalatoheṭṭhāti: here, "starting from the shin bone" is understood. Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇakanti: the teachers say it is eight aṅgulas by a carpenter's aṅgula. To include the Aṭṭhakathā: "For one who has thin shins or large calf muscles, it is allowable to let it hang down even eight aṅgulas more than the knee, for the sake of proper appearance" (pāci. aṭṭha. 576), he says ‘‘tato ūnaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti: less than that is not allowable.
1873.Asañcicca aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsentassa anāpattīti yojanā. Evamuparipi.Asañciccāti ‘‘aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsessāmī’’ti evaṃ asañcicca, atha kho ‘‘parimaṇḍalaṃyeva nivāsessāmī’’ti virajjhitvā aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsentassa anāpatti.Asatissāpīti aññavihitassāpi tathā nivāsentassa anāpatti.Ajānantassāti kevalaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetuṃ ajānantassa anāpatti. Apica nivāsanavattaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Uggahitavattopi sace ‘‘āruḷha’’nti vā ‘‘oruḷha’’nti vā na jānāti, tassāpi anāpattiyeva.Gilānassāti yassa jaṅghāya vā pāde vā vaṇo hoti, tassa ukkhipitvā vā otāretvā vā nivāsentassa anāpatti.Pādoti cettha pādasamīpaṃ adhippetaṃ.Āpadāsūti vāḷā vā corā vā anubandhanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti.
1873. Asañcicca aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsentassa anāpattīti yojanā: it should be connected that there is no offense for one who unintentionally wears it not in a circle. Evamuparipi: the same applies above as well. Asañciccāti: unintentionally in this way, thinking "I will wear it not in a circle," but rather, unintentionally wearing it not in a circle, having deviated from "I will wear it in a circle." Asatissāpīti: there is also no offense for one who wears it that way through lack of mindfulness. Ajānantassāti: there is no offense for one who simply does not know how to wear it in a circle. Moreover, the nivāsana vatta should be taken up. Even for one who has taken up the vatta, if he does not know "it is too high" or "it is too low," there is no offense for him either. Gilānassāti: for one who has a wound on his shin or foot, there is no offense for him who wears it having lifted it up or let it down. Pādoti: here, near the foot is intended. Āpadāsūti: there is no offense in dangers such as when tigers or thieves are chasing.
Parimaṇḍalakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Section on Wearing it in a Circle.
1874.Ubho koṇe samaṃ katvāti pārupanassa ekaṃse katassa piṭṭhipasse, udarapasse ca olambamāne ubho kaṇṇe hatthipiṭṭhe gaṇḍā viya samaṃ katvā.Parimaṇḍalaṃ katvāti etasseva atthapadaṃ.Sādaranti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Sādaraṃ vā pārupitabbanti yojanā, sādaraṃ pārupanaṃ kattabbanti attho.Evaṃ akarontassāti pārupanavatte ādaraṃ janetvā evaṃ apārupantassa.
1874. Ubho koṇe samaṃ katvāti: having made both corners even, the corners hanging down on the back side and stomach side made in one part of the robe that is put on, like humps on an elephant's back. Parimaṇḍalaṃ katvāti: this is a word expressing that meaning. Sādaranti: this is a neuter gender indication of respect. Sādaraṃ vā pārupitabbanti yojanā: it should be connected that one should put it on respectfully, it means one should put on the robe respectfully. Evaṃ akarontassāti: for one who does not put it on in this way, having generated respect in the pārupana vatta.
1875.‘‘Parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā’’ti (pāci. 576) vā ‘‘parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā’’ti (pāci. 577) vā ‘‘antaraghare’’ti avisesetvā vuttattā āha‘‘avisesena vutta’’nti. Idaṃ sikkhāpadadvayaṃ yasmā avisesena vuttaṃ, tasmā ghare, vihāre vā kātabbaṃ parimaṇḍalanti yojanā.Ghareti antaraghare.Vihāre vāti buddhupaṭṭhānādikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Parimaṇḍalaṃ kattabbanti parimaṇḍalameva nivāsetabbaṃ pārupitabbanti attho.
1875. Since it is said without distinction "The training should be done thinking 'I will wear it in a circle'" (pāci. 576) or "The training should be done thinking 'I will put it on in a circle'" (pāci. 577) "antaraghare," he says ‘‘avisesena vutta’’nti: it is said without distinction. Since these two training rules are said without distinction, therefore it should be done in a circle in a house or in a monastery. Ghareti: in the inner house. Vihāre vāti: this is said referring to the time of attending to the Buddha, etc. Parimaṇḍalaṃ kattabbanti: it means it should be worn and put on only in a circle.
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
1876.Ubho koṇe samaṃ katvāti sambandho. Gīvameva ca anuvātena chādetvāti yojanā.
1876. Ubho koṇe samaṃ katvāti sambandho: it should be connected that both corners are made even. Gīvameva ca anuvātena chādetvāti yojanā: it should be connected that one should cover only the neck from the wind.
1877.Tathā akatvāti yathāvuttavidhānaṃ akatvā.Jattūnipīti ubho aṃsakūṭānipi.Urampi cāti hadayampi.Vivaritvāti appaṭicchādetvā.Yathākāmanti icchānurūpaṃ.Gacchatoti ettha ‘‘antaraghare’’ti seso.Antaragharaṃnāma gāme vā hotu vihāre vā, pacitvā bhuñjitvā gihīnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ.
1877. Tathā akatvāti: without doing according to the method stated. Jattūnipīti: also both collarbones. Urampi cāti: also the heart. Vivaritvāti: without covering. Yathākāmanti: according to desire. Gacchatoti: here, "antaraghare" is understood. Antaragharaṃnāma: whether it is in a village or in a monastery, after cooking and eating, the dwelling place of laypeople.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
1878-9.‘‘Maṇibandhato’’ti imināpi ‘‘heṭṭhā’’ti yojetabbaṃ.Vāsūpagassāti ettha ‘‘kāyaṃ vivaritvā nisīdato’’ti seso.Vāsūpagonāma rattivāsatthāya upagato, etena vāsatthāya antaragharaṃ upagacchantena suppaṭicchanneneva upagantabbanti dīpitaṃ hoti, eteneva vāsūpagatassa santikaṃ upagatassa yathākāmaṃ gamane na dosoti ca vuttameva hoti. Tenāhagaṇṭhipade‘‘ekadivasampi vāsūpagatassa santikaṃ yathāsukhaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati, ko pana vādo catupañcāhaṃ vāsamadhiṭṭhāya vasitabhikkhūnaṃ santika’’nti.
1878-9. ‘‘Maṇibandhato’’ti: "heṭṭhā" should be connected with this as well. Vāsūpagassāti: here, "kāyaṃ vivaritvā nisīdato" (sitting having exposed the body) is understood. Vāsūpagonāma: is one who has approached for the sake of overnight stay, by this it is indicated that one approaching an inner house for the sake of overnight stay should approach only well-covered, and by this it is already stated that there is no fault in going as one pleases to the presence of one who has approached for overnight stay. Therefore, he said in the Gaṇṭhipada: "It is allowable to go as one pleases to the presence of one who has approached for overnight stay even for one day, what to say of the bhikkhus dwelling intending to stay for four or five days."
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
1880.Suvinītenāti hatthapādānaṃ akīḷāpaneneva suṭṭhu vinītena.
1880. Suvinītenāti: well-disciplined without playing with the hands and feet.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
1881.Gāthābandhavasena‘‘satīmatā’’ti dīgho kato.Avikārenāti taṃtadavalokāsahitena. Yugaṃ mattā pamāṇaṃ etassātiyugamattaṃ,rathayugaṃ catuhatthappamāṇaṃ, tattakaṃ padesaṃ.Pekkhināti olokentena. ‘‘Bhikkhunā okkhittacakkhunā’’ti padacchedo.
1881. Due to the structure of the verse, ‘‘satīmatā’’ti: is made long. Avikārenāti: without any glances. Yugaṃ mattā pamāṇaṃ etassāti: yugamattaṃ: a yoke is a measure, a chariot yoke is a measure of four hatthas, that much space. Pekkhināti: glancing. "Bhikkhunā okkhittacakkhunā" is the word division.
1882.Antaraghare yattha katthacipi ekasmimpi ṭhāne ṭhatvāti yojanā. Evaṃ vuttepi tathārūpe antarāye sati gacchatopi oloketuṃ labbhati.Ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvāti ettha gacchantopi parissayābhāvaṃ oloketuṃ labbhatiyeva. ‘‘Tathā gāme pūja’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Pi-saddo pana-saddattho, oloketuṃ pana vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
1882. Antaraghare yattha katthacipi ekasmimpi ṭhāne ṭhatvāti yojanā: it should be connected that having stood in one place, wherever it may be in the inner house. Even when it is said in this way, it is permissible to look around even when going, if there is such an obstruction. Ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvāti: here, even while going, it is permissible to look around if there is no danger. "Tathā gāme pūja" is said in the Gaṇṭhipadasu. The word pi has the meaning of pana, it is said that it is permissible to look around.
1883.Olokento tahaṃ tahanti yo anādariyaṃ paṭicca taṃ taṃ disābhāgaṃ pāsādaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ vīthiṃ olokento.
1883. Olokento tahaṃ tahanti: one who, regarding it disrespectfully, looks around in that and that direction, at the palace, the peaked house, the street.
Sattamaṃ.
Seventh.
1884.Ekatovāpīti ekaaṃsakūṭato vā.Ubhato vāpīti ubhayaṃsakūṭato vā.Indakhīlakato antoti gāmadvārindakhīlato anto, ghareti vuttaṃ hoti.
1884. Ekatovāpīti: from one corner post. Ubhato vāpīti: from both corner posts. Indakhīlakato antoti: inside the gatepost of the village gate, it means in the house.
Navamaṃ.
Ninth.
1885.Tathā nisinnakālepīti indakhīlassa anto nisinnakālepi. Kuṇḍikaṃ nīharantena ca cīvaraṃanukkhipitvā dātabbākuṇḍikāti yojanā.Kuṇḍikanti ca upalakkhaṇamattaṃ. Dhammakaraṇādīsupi eseva nayo.
1885. Tathā nisinnakālepīti: even at the time of sitting inside the gatepost. Kuṇḍikaṃ nīharantena ca cīvaraṃ: anukkhipitvā dātabbākuṇḍikāti yojanā: it should be connected that having lifted up the robe, the water pot should be given by one who is taking it out. Kuṇḍikanti ca: and "water pot" is merely an indication. The same method applies to the water filter, etc.
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth.
Paṭhamo vaggo.
The First Section.
1886.Gantuñceva nisīdituñca na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Ca-saddo kiriyāsamuccayo.Hasanīyasmiṃ vatthusminti hāsajanake kāraṇe.Sitamattanti mandahāsaṃ.
1886. Gantuñceva nisīdituñca na vaṭṭatīti yojanā: it should be connected that it is not allowable to go or to sit. Ca-saddo: is an accumulation of actions. Hasanīyasmiṃ vatthusminti: in a cause that generates laughter. Sitamattanti: a slight smile.
Paṭhamadutiyāni.
First and Second.
1887.Appasaddenāti ‘‘kittāvatā appasaddo hoti? Dvādasahatthe gehe ādimhi saṅghatthero, majjhe dutiyatthero, ante tatiyattheroti evaṃ nisinnesuyaṃ saṅghatthero dutiyattherena saddhiṃ manteti, dutiyatthero tassa saddañceva suṇāti, kathañca vavatthapeti. Tatiyatthero pana saddameva suṇāti, kathaṃ na vavatthapeti. Ettāvatā appasaddo hotī’’ti (pāci. 588) vuttaappasaddayuttena. Sace pana tatiyatthero kathañca vavatthapeti, mahāsaddo nāma hotīti.
1887. Appasaddenāti: with a sound that is not loud. "How much is a quiet sound? When the senior saṅghathera is sitting at the beginning in a twelve-cubit house, the second thera is in the middle, and the third thera is at the end, when this senior saṅghathera speaks with the second thera, the second thera hears the sound and understands the meaning. But the third thera only hears the sound and does not understand the meaning. That much is a quiet sound," it is said according to the quiet sound. But if the third thera understands the meaning, it is called a loud sound.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
1888.Kāyappacālakaṃ katvāti kāyaṃ cāletvā cāletvā. Uparipi eseva nayo. Hatthassa vuttalakkhaṇattā‘‘bāhū’’ti maṇibandhato yāva aṃsakūṭā gahetabbā.
1888. Kāyappacālakaṃ katvāti: having made the body shake and shake. The same method applies above as well. Since the hand has the characteristics stated, ‘‘bāhū’’ti: "arms" should be taken from the wrist up to the collarbone.
1889.Ujuṃ paggahetvāti ujuṃ ṭhapetvā.Āsitabbanti nisīditabbaṃ. ‘‘Samena iriyāpathena tū’’ti padacchedo.
1889. Ujuṃ paggahetvāti: having held it straight. Āsitabbanti: one should sit. "Samena iriyāpathena tū" is the word division.
1890.Itthambhūte karaṇavacanaṃ. Gamanapaṭisaṃyuttesu sikkhāpadesu gamanassa asambhavoti āha‘‘nisīdanena yuttesū’’ti.
1890. Itthambhūte karaṇavacanaṃ: this is a statement of the means. Since movement is not possible in the training rules associated with movement, he says ‘‘nisīdanena yuttesū’’ti: in those associated with sitting.
Pañcamachaṭṭhasattamaṭṭhamanavamāni.
Fifth, Sixth, Seventh, Eighth, and Ninth.
Dutiyo vaggo.
The Second Section.
1891.Khambhaṃ katvāti kaṭiyā ekapasse vā dvīsu vā passesu kapparasandhito ābhujitvā hatthaṃ ṭhapetvā. Yathāha – ‘‘khambhakato nāma kaṭiyaṃ hatthaṃ ṭhapetvā katakhambho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 596). Ukkuṭikāya vā gacchatoti yojanā.Ukkuṭikāvuccati paṇhiyo ukkhipitvā aggapādehi vā aggapāde ukkhipitvā paṇhīhi eva vā bhūmiṃ phusantassa gamanaṃ.
1891. Khambhaṃ katvāti: having made a pillar, having bent the hand from the joint of the elbow and placed it on one side or both sides of the waist. As he said, "Khambhakato nāma: having placed the hand on the waist, having made a pillar" (pāci. aṭṭha. 596). Ukkuṭikāya vā gacchatoti yojanā: it should be connected that he goes squatting. Ukkuṭikāvuccati: squatting is said to be going while lifting up the heels and touching the ground with the toes or lifting up the toes and touching the ground with the heels.
1892.Dussapallatthikāyāti āyogapallatthikāya. Antaraghare nisīdantassa tassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
1892. Dussapallatthikāyāti: with the robe as a seat. Antaraghare nisīdantassa tassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā: it should be connected that there is an offense of dukkaṭa for him sitting in the inner house.
1893.Dutiyecāti ‘‘na khambhakato antaraghare nisīdissāmī’’ti (pāci. 597) sikkhāpade ca.Catutthe cāti ‘‘na oguṇṭhito antaraghare nisīdissāmī’’ti (pāci. 599) sikkhāpade ca.Chaṭṭheti ‘‘na pallatthikāya antaraghare’’iccādi (pāci. 601) sikkhāpade ca.Itievaṃsāruppāsamaṇācārānucchavikāchabbīsatisikkhāpadāni pakāsitāni.
1893. Dutiyecāti: and in the second training rule, "na khambhakato antaraghare nisīdissāmī" (pāci. 597). Catutthe cāti: and in the fourth training rule, "na oguṇṭhito antaraghare nisīdissāmī" (pāci. 599). Chaṭṭheti: and in the sixth training rule, "na pallatthikāya antaraghare," etc. (pāci. 601). Itievaṃ: thus, sāruppā: befitting, samaṇācārānucchavikā: in accordance with the conduct of a renunciate, chabbīsati: twenty-six training rules have been revealed.
Paṭhamadutiyatatiyacatutthapañcamachaṭṭhāni.
First, Second, Third, Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth.
1894.Viññunā bhikkhunā sakkaccaṃ satiyuttena, pattasaññinā ca hutvā samasūpova piṇḍapāto gahetabboti yojanā. Evaṃ etāya gāthāya sikkhāpadattayaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.Sakkaccanti satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā.‘‘Satiyuttenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sakkacca’’nti etassa atthapadaṃ. ‘‘Satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 602) hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Patte saññāpattasaññā,sā assa atthītipattasaññī,anaññavihitena attano bhājaneyeva upanibaddhasaññināti attho.
1894.The interpretation is that a discerning bhikkhu, being conscientious and mindful, and being conscious of the bowl, should take the alms-food with balanced gravy. Thus, three training rules are included in this verse. Sakkaccaṃ means establishing mindfulness. ‘‘Satiyuttenā’’ti this is a meaning-elucidating term for "sakkaccaṃ." It is said in the commentary that "establishing mindfulness" (pāci. aṭṭha. 602). Bowl-consciousness is pattasaññā, one who possesses that is pattasaññī, meaning one who has a fixed consciousness only in his own bowl that is not ordained by another.
1895.Bhattacatubbhāgoti bhattassa catubbhāgappamāṇo. Tato adhikaṃ gaṇhato dukkaṭaṃ.
1895.Bhattacatubbhāgo means a quarter portion of rice. There is a dukkaṭa offense for taking more than that.
1896.‘‘Rasarase’’ti vattabbe‘‘raserase’’ti gāthābandhavasena vuttaṃ. Dve sūpe ṭhapetvā avasesāni oloṇisākasūpeyyamaccharasamaṃsarasādīni rasarasāti veditabbāni. Ettha ca‘‘oloṇīti dadhikataṃ gorasa’’nti keci. ‘‘Ekā byañjanavikatī’’ti apare. ‘‘Yo koci suddho kañjikatakkādiraso’’ti aññe.Sākasūpeyyaggahaṇena yā kāci sūpeyyasākehi katā byañjanavikati vuttā.Maṃsarasādīnītiādi-saddena avasesā sabbāpi byañjanavikati saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Ñātakādīnanti ettha ‘‘santakaṃ gaṇhantassā’’ti seso.Aññatthāyāti ettha ‘‘kataṃ gaṇhantassā’’ti seso.Dhanenāti ettha ‘‘attano’’ti ca ‘‘kīta’’nti ca ‘‘gaṇhantassā’’ti ca seso. Ñātakādīnaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhantassa, aññatthāya kataṃ gaṇhantassa, attano dhanena kītaṃ gaṇhantassa anāpattīti attho.
1896.Instead of saying ‘‘Rasarase,’’ it is said ‘‘raserase’’ for the sake of metrical composition. Having set aside two soups, the remaining oloṇi, vegetable soup, eyya, fish gravy, meat gravy, etc., should be understood as rasarasa. Here, some say ‘‘oloṇī is curdled milk made from cow's milk.’’ Others say, "It is a single kind of relish." Others say, "It is any pure sour gruel (kañjika) or buttermilk (takkādi)". By including Sākasūpeyya, any kind of relish made with leafy vegetables or soup vegetables is mentioned. By Maṃsarasādīnī, it should be seen that all the remaining kinds of relish are included by the ādi-word. In Ñātakādīna, "while taking what belongs to" is to be added. In Aññatthāyā, "while taking what is prepared" is to be added. In Dhanenā, "one's own," "bought," and "while taking" are to be added. The meaning is that there is no offense for one who takes what belongs to relatives, etc., or for one who takes what is prepared for another purpose, or for one who takes what is bought with one's own wealth.
Sattamaṭṭhamanavamāni.
The seventh, eighth, and ninth [rules].
1897.Adhiṭṭhānūpagassa pattassa mukhavaṭṭiyā antolekhāpamāṇena pūritova gahetabboti yojanā.
1897.The interpretation is that a bowl that is not designated should be taken only when filled to the inner line of the mouth rim.
1898.Anāpattivisayaṃ dassetvā āpattivisayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.Tatthāti adhiṭṭhānūpage patte.Thūpīkataṃ katvāti ettha ‘‘diyyamāna’’nti seso. Yathāvuttalekhātikkamo yathā hoti, evaṃ thūpīkataṃ diyyamānaṃ gaṇhato āpatti dukkaṭanti sambandho. Iminā paṭhamaṃ thūpīkatassa adhiṭṭhānūpagapattassa pacchā paṭiggahaṇañca paṭhamapaṭiggahitapatte pacchā bhojanassa thūpīkatassa paṭiggahaṇañca nivāritanti veditabbaṃ.
1898.After showing the scope of non-offense, he says ‘‘tatthā’’ etc., to show the scope of offense. Tatthā means in a bowl that is not designated. In Thūpīkataṃ katvā, "while being given" is to be added. The connection is that there is a dukkaṭa offense for one who takes what is given piled up, so that the transgression of the line mentioned above occurs. By this, it should be understood that taking a previously piled-up, undesignated bowl, and taking piled-up food in a previously taken bowl are prevented.
1899.Kālikattayameva ca thūpīkataṃ vaṭṭatevāti yojanā.Seseti anadhiṭṭhānūpage patte.Sabbanti catubbidhaṃ kālikaṃ thūpīkataṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
1899.The interpretation is that only the three kinds of kālika are permissible when piled up. In Sese, in a bowl that is not designated. The interpretation is that Sabbaṃ, all four kinds of kālika, are permissible when piled up.
1900.Pesetīti ettha ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti seso. Bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ yadi pesetīti yojanā. ‘‘Vihāraṃ pesetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 605)aṭṭhakathāyaadhippāyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti vacanena paṭiggahaṇaṃ avijahitvā bhikkhunā eva pesitaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Aññathā ‘‘pūretuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ettakameva vattabbanti viññāyati.
1900.In Pesetī, "bhikkhus" is to be added. The interpretation is that if a bhikkhu sends to bhikkhus. To show the intention of the commentary that "it is permissible to send to the monastery" (pāci. aṭṭha. 605), it is indicated by the word ‘‘bhikkhūna’’ that there is no offense for bhikkhus who take what is sent by a bhikkhu without abandoning the receiving. Otherwise, it would be understood that it is sufficient to say only "it is permissible to fill it."
1901.Pakkhippamānanti mukhavaṭṭito uccaṃ katvā majjhe pakkhipiyamānaṃ.Phalādikantiādi-saddena odanādimpi saṅgaṇhāti.Heṭṭhāorohatīti samantā okāsasambhavato cāliyamānaṃ mukhavaṭṭippamāṇato heṭṭhā bhassati.
1901.Pakkhippamāna means being thrown in the middle, having raised it higher than the mouth rim. Phalādika means that the ādi-word includes rice etc. as well. Heṭṭhā orohathī means that it falls below the extent of the mouth rim, being shaken due to the possibility of space all around.
1902.Takkolakādīnanti etthaādi-saddena pūgaphalādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Ṭhapetvāti bhattamatthake nikkhipitvā.Vaṭaṃsakanti avaṭaṃsakaṃ.
1902.In Takkolakādīna, the ādi-word includes betel nut, etc. Ṭhapetvā means having placed [it] on top of the rice. Vaṭaṃsaka means an ornament.
1903.Pūvassāti vikārasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ, pūvavaṭaṃsakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pūvassa yāvakālikattā āha‘‘idaṃ thūpīkataṃ siyā’’ti.
1903.Pūvassā is a possessive form in relation to the modification, it is said to be pūvavaṭaṃsaka. Because pūva is allowable only for a limited time, he says ‘‘idaṃ thūpīkataṃ siyā’’.
1904.Paṇṇānaṃ visuṃ bhājanattā āha‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti.
1904.Because leaves are separate containers, he says ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’.
1905.Assāti bhikkhussa.Taṃ tu sabbanti ‘‘thūpīkatattā na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ taṃ pana sabbaṃ.Gahitaṃ sugahitanti virādhetvā paṭiggahitaṃ ce, suppaṭiggahitaṃ.
1905.Assā means of the bhikkhu. Taṃ tu sabbaṃ means but all of that which was said "is not permissible because it is piled up." Gahitaṃ sugahitaṃ means if it is received without offense, it is well-received.
Dasamaṃ.
The tenth [rule].
Tatiyo vaggo.
The third chapter.
1906.‘‘Upari odhi’’nti padacchedo.Uparīti bhattassa upari.Odhinti paricchedaṃ.Paṭipāṭiyāti attano disāya pariyantato paṭṭhāya anukkamena.
1906.The word division is ‘‘Upari odhi’’. Uparī means on top of the rice. Odhi means a limit. Paṭipāṭiyā means successively, starting from the boundary in one's own direction.
1907.Aññesanti ettha ‘‘dento’’ti seso. Attano bhattaṃ aññesaṃ dento aññassa bhājaneākiraṃākiranto pana paṭipāṭiṃ vināpi tahiṃ tahiṃ omasati ce, natthi dosoti yojanā. Uttaribhaṅgakaṃ tathā ākiranto tattha tattha omasati, natthi dosoti yojanā. Bhuñjanatthāya gaṇhantopi cettha vattabbo.Uttaribhaṅgaṃnāma byañjanaṃ.
1907.In Aññesaṃ, "while giving" is to be added. The interpretation is that there is no offense if one gives one's own rice to others, but if one scatters it in another's bowl, and then if one touches here and there without order. There is no offense if one touches here and there while scattering additional relish in the same way. One who takes for the purpose of eating should also be mentioned here. Uttaribhaṅgaṃ means relish.
Tatiyaṃ.
The third [rule].
1908.Matthakaṃ omadditvā paribhuñjato dosoti yojanā. ‘‘Thūpakatoti matthakato, vemajjhato’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 610)aṭṭhakathāvacanatomatthakanti ettha bhattamatthakamāha.Omadditvāti hatthena bhattaṃ avamadditvā.
1908.The interpretation is that there is an offense for one who eats, having pressed down the top. From the commentary statement, "The top means the top part, the middle part" (pāci. aṭṭha. 610), matthaka here means the top of the rice. Omadditvā means having crushed the rice with the hand.
1909.Sesake parittepi cāti avasiṭṭhe appakepi ca.Saṃkaḍḍhitvānāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitaṃ saṃharitvā. Ekato pana madditvā bhuñjato anāpattīti yojanā.
1909.Sesake parittepi ca means even in a small remainder. Saṃkaḍḍhitvānā means having gathered together what is situated in that place. But there is no offense for one who eats having crushed it in one place.
Pañcamaṃ.
The fifth [rule].
1910.Bhiyyokamyatāhetūti puna gaṇhitukāmatāhetu.Sūpaṃ vāti muggādisūpaṃ vā.Byañjanaṃ vāti uttaribhaṅgaṃ vā.
1910.Bhiyyokamyatāhetū means because of the desire to take more again. Sūpaṃ vā means soup made from green gram beans, etc. Byañjanaṃ vā means additional relish.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
The sixth [rule].
1911.Viññattiyanti sūpodanaviññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Ñātakānaṃ vā pavāritānaṃ vā aññassa atthāya vā attano dhanena vā’’ti idaṃ anāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ. Gilānopi hutvā paresaṃ pattaṃ ujjhānasaññāya olokentassa āpatti hotīti āha‘‘ujjhāne gilānopi na muccatī’’ti.Ujjhāneti nimittatthe bhummaṃ.
1911.Viññattiyaṃ means in the requesting of soup and rice. "Or for relatives or for those who have been invited or for the sake of another or with one's own wealth" this is additional in non-offense. He says ‘‘ujjhāne gilānopi na muccatī’’ that even a sick person is not freed when looking at another's bowl with the perception of disdain. Ujjhāne is locative in the sense of a cause.
1912.Dassāmīti imassa bhattaṃ oloketvā ‘‘yaṃ tattha natthi, taṃ dassāmī’’ti vā ‘‘dāpessāmī’’ti vā. Avamaññitvā ujjhāyanacittaṃujjhānaṃ,ujjhāne saññāujjhānasaññā,sā assa atthīti viggaho. Naujjhānasaññino ca anāpattīti ñātabbanti yojanā.
1912.Having looked at the rice of Dassāmī, [thinking] "I will give what is not there" or "I will have [it] given." Ujjhānaṃ is a mind of disdain, without respect, ujjhānasaññā is the perception of disdain, this is the analysis of it as possessing that. It should be understood that there is no offense for one who does not have the perception of disdain.
Sattamaṭṭhamāni.
The seventh and eighth [rules].
1913.‘‘Tesaṃ majjhappamāṇenā’’ti iminā asāruppavasena khuddakapaṭikkhepo katoti veditabbo. ‘‘Nātimahanta’’nti ca atimahantasseva paṭikkhittattā khuddake āpatti na dissatīti.Kabaḷoti ālopo.
1913.By ‘‘Tesaṃ majjhappamāṇenā’’ it should be understood that the rejection of small-sized [portions] is done on the grounds of unsuitability. Because only the very large is rejected by “Nātimahanta,” it is not seen that there is an offense in small [portions]. Kabaḷo means a mouthful.
1914.Mūlakhādanīyādike sabbattha khajjake panāti yojanā.Phalāphaleti khuddake, mahante ca phale.
1914.The interpretation is that chewing is permissible everywhere in the case of root-food, etc., which are all kinds of edibles. Phalāphale means in small and large fruits.
Navamaṃ.
The ninth [rule].
1915.Dasame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
1915.There is nothing to be said in the tenth.
Dasamaṃ.
The tenth [rule].
Catuttho vaggo.
The fourth chapter.
1916.‘‘Anāhaṭe’’ti etassa atthapadaṃ ‘‘mukhadvāraṃ appatte’’ti. Yathāha ‘‘anāhaṭeti anāharite, mukhadvāraṃ asampāpiteti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 617). ‘‘Mukhadvāraṃ vivarantassā’’ti ettake vuttemukhadvāra-saddassa sambandhisaddattā kassāti apekkhāya ‘‘mukhadvāraṃ vivarissāmī’’ti attanopadekavacanena byañjitamevatthaṃ pakāsetuṃattano-gahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ.Ca-saddo evakārattho, appatte vāti yojetabbo, asampatteyevāti attho.
1916.The meaning of ‘‘Anāhaṭe’’ is ‘‘not having reached the mouth opening’’. As he said, "Anāhaṭe means not having brought, meaning not having reached the mouth opening" (pāci. aṭṭha. 617). When only "while opening the mouth opening" is said, the mouth opening-word is a relative word, due to the expectation of whose, to express that very meaning made clear by one's own instruction, "I will open the mouth opening," the attano-inclusion is made. The ca-word has the meaning of eva, it should be connected as "even when not reached," the meaning is only when not reached.
Paṭhamaṃ.
The first [rule].
1917.Sakalaṃhatthanti etthahattha-saddo tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Hatthamuddā’’tiādīsu viya samudāye pavattavohārassa avayavepi pavattanato ekaṅgulimpi mukhe pakkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati.
1917.Here, in Sakalaṃ hatthaṃ, the hattha-word should be seen as [referring to] the fingers which are part of it. As in "hand seal" etc., because usage that occurs in the aggregate also occurs in the part, it is not permissible to put even one finger in the mouth.
1918.Assāti bhikkhuno.Byāharantassāti kathentassa.
1918.Assā means of the bhikkhu. Byāharantassā means while speaking.
Dutiyatatiyāni.
The second and third [rules].
1920.Piṇḍukkhepakanti piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā ukkhipitvā. Idhāpi khajjakaphalāphalesu anāpatti.Kabaḷacchedakampi vāti kabaḷaṃ chinditvā. Idha khajjakaphalāphalehi saddhiṃ uttaribhaṅgepi anāpatti.Gaṇḍe katvāti ettha phalāphalamatteyeva anāpatti.
1920.Piṇḍukkhepaka means having thrown up a morsel and thrown up [another]. Here too, there is no offense regarding chewable and fruits. Kabaḷacchedakampi vā means having cut a morsel. Here, there is no offense along with chewable and fruits and additional relish. Gaṇḍe katvā means that there is no offense only in the case of fruits.
Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhāni.
The fourth, fifth, and sixth [rules].
1921-2.Hatthaṃ niddhunitvānāti hatthaṃ niddhunitvā bhattaṃ bhuñjatoti ca sambandho.Sitthāvakārakanti sitthāni avakiritvā avakiritvā.Jivhānicchārakaṃ vāpīti jivhaṃ nicchāretvā nicchāretvā.Capu capūti vāti ‘‘capu capū’’ti evaṃ saddaṃ katvā.Sattameti ‘‘na hatthaniddhunaka’’nti sikkhāpade.Aṭṭhameti ‘‘na sitthāvakāraka’’nti sikkhāpade.Kacavarujjhaneti kacavarāpanayane.
1921-2.There is also a connection as, Hatthaṃ niddhunitvānā means having shaken the hand, one eats rice. Sitthāvakāraka means having scattered away the grains. Jivhānicchārakaṃ vāpī means having stuck out the tongue and stuck out [it]. Capu capūti vā means having made a sound like "capu capū." Sattame means in the training rule "not a hand-shaker." Aṭṭhame means in the training rule "not a grain-scatterer." Kacavarujjhane means in the removal of rubbish.
Sattamaṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.
The seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth [rules].
Pañcamo vaggo.
The fifth chapter.
1923.‘‘Suru surū’’ti evaṃ saddaṃ katvā na bhottabbanti yojanā.Hatthanillehakaṃ vāpīti hatthaṃ nillehitvā nillehitvā.
1923.The interpretation is that one should not eat making a sound like ‘‘Suru surū’’. Hatthanillehakaṃ vāpī means having licked the hand and licked [it].
1924.Phāṇitaṃ, ghanayāguṃ vā aṅgulīhi gahetvā aṅguliyo mukhe pavesetvāpi taṃ bhottuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
1924.The interpretation is that it is permissible to eat phāṇita or thick rice-gruel by taking it with the fingers and inserting the fingers into the mouth.
1925.Ekāya aṅgulikāyapi patto na lehitabbova. Jivhāya ekaoṭṭhopi na nillehitabbakoti yojanā. Bahi oṭṭhañca jivhāya na lehitabbaṃ. Oṭṭhe laggaṃ sitthādiṃ yaṃ kiñci ubhohi oṭṭhamaṃsehiyeva gahetvā anto kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
1925.A bowl should not be licked even with one finger. An outer lip also should not be licked with the tongue. One should not lick the outer lip with the tongue. It is permissible to take anything, such as grains, stuck to the lip and bring it inside only with both parts of the lip.
Paṭhamadutiyatatiyacatutthāni.
The first, second, third, and fourth [rules].
1926-8.Naca gahetabbaṃ, paṭikkūlavasena paṭikkhittanti yojanā.Hi-iti ‘‘yasmā’’ti etassa atthe, teneva vakkhati ‘‘tasmā’’ti.‘‘Pānīyathālaka’’nti idaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ saṅkhādīnampi tathā nagahetabbattā.Sarāvaṃ vāti taṭṭakaṃ vā.
1926-8.It Na should not be taken, it is rejected because of repulsiveness. The Hi-word is in the sense of "because," therefore he will say "therefore." ‘‘Pānīyathālaka’’ is only an example, because pots, etc., should also not be taken in that way. Sarāvaṃ vā means a potsherd.
Anāmisena hatthenāti āmisarahitena hatthekadesena. Yathāha ‘‘sace pana hatthassa
Anāmisena hatthenā means with a part of the hand that is without food. As he said, "But if a part of the hand
Ekadeso āmisamakkhito na hoti, tena padesena gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 631). Āmisamakkhiteneva hatthena ‘‘dhovissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘dhovāpessāmī’’ti vā gaṇhantassa pana anāpatti.
is not smeared with food, it is permissible to take with that part" (pāci. aṭṭha. 631). But there is no offense for one who takes with the hand smeared with food, [thinking] "I will wash it" or "I will have [it] washed."
Pañcamaṃ.
The fifth [rule].
1929.Uddharitvāti sasitthakā pattadhovanā sitthakāni uddharitvā taṃ pattadhovanodakaṃ gharā bahi antaraghare chaḍḍentassa anāpatti.Bhinditvāti sasitthake pattadhovane sitthakāni madditvā udakena sambhinditvā udakagatikāneva katvā taṃ udakaṃ gharā bahi antaraghare chaḍḍentassa anāpatti.Gahetvāti sasitthakaṃ pattadhovanodakaṃ gahetvā paṭiggahe chaḍḍentassa anāpatti. Sasitthakaṃ pattadhovanodakaṃ gharā bahi nīharitvā antaraghare chaḍḍentassa anāpattīti ajjhāhārayojanā veditabbā. Etthapaṭiggahonāma kheḷamallādiko ucchiṭṭhahatthadhovanabhājanaviseso.
1929.Uddharitvā means having taken out the grains from washing the bowl with food particles, there is no offense for one who throws that bowl-washing water outside the house within the house. Bhinditvā means having crushed the grains in the bowl-washing with food particles, having mixed [them] with water, having made [them] only water-going, there is no offense for one who throws that water outside the house within the house. Gahetvā means having taken the bowl-washing water with food particles, there is no offense for one who throws [it] into the receptacle. It should be understood that the interpretation by supplying is that there is no offense for one who takes bowl-washing water with food particles outside the house and throws [it] within the house. Here, paṭiggaho means a particular kind of container for phlegm, etc., and for rinsing the hand after eating.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
The sixth [rule].
1930.Chattaṃ yaṃ kiñcīti ‘‘chattaṃ nāma tīṇi chattāni setacchattaṃ kilañjacchattaṃ paṇṇacchattaṃ maṇḍalabaddhaṃ salākabaddha’’nti (pāci. 634) vuttesu tīsu chattesu aññataraṃ. Ettha casetacchattanti vatthapaliguṇṭhitaṃ paṇḍaracchattaṃ.Kilañjacchattanti vilīvacchattaṃ.Paṇṇacchattanti tālapaṇṇādīhi yehi kehici kataṃ.‘‘Maṇḍalabaddhaṃ salākabaddha’’nti idaṃ pana tiṇṇampi chattānaṃ pañjaradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tāni hi maṇḍalabaddhāni ceva honti salākabaddhāni ca.‘‘Yaṃ kiñcī’’ti anavasesapariggahavacanena ‘‘yampi ca tatthajātadaṇḍena kataṃ ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ hoti, tampi chattamevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 634)aṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ chattavisesaṃ gaṇhāti.Hatthenāti ettha ‘‘amuñcitvā’’ti seso.Sarīrāvayavenāti ettha ‘‘gahetvā’’ti seso.Vā-saddo api-saddattho. Aṃsakūṭādisarīrāvayavena gahetvāpi hatthena amuñcitvā dhārentassāti attho.
1930.Chattaṃ yaṃ kiñcī means any one of the three umbrellas among those stated: "an umbrella means three umbrellas: a white umbrella, a rush umbrella, a leaf umbrella, bound in a circle, bound with ribs" (pāci. 634). Here, setacchatta means a white umbrella wrapped in cloth. Kilañjacchatta means a rush umbrella. Paṇṇacchatta means one made with palmyra leaves, etc., whatever it may be. ‘‘Maṇḍalabaddhaṃ salākabaddha’’ is said here to show the framework of all three umbrellas. For they are indeed bound in a circle and bound with ribs. By ‘‘Yaṃ kiñcī’’, by the expression including without remainder, it takes even that kind of umbrella stated in the commentary: "even a single-leaf umbrella that is made with a stick from what grows there, that too is indeed an umbrella" (pāci. aṭṭha. 634). In Hatthena, "without releasing" is to be added. In Sarīrāvayavenā, "having taken" is to be added. The vā-word has the meaning of the api-word. The meaning is that even having taken with a part of the body such as the shoulder, etc., [and] holding it without releasing it with the hand [there is an offense].
Sace panassa añño chattaṃ dhāreti, chattapādukāya vā ṭhitaṃ hoti, passe vā ṭhitaṃ hoti,
If another person is holding the umbrella for him, or he is standing on (something used as) a shoe, or (another person) is standing beside him,
Hatthato apagatamatte chattapāṇi nāma na hoti, tassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Na chattapāṇissa agilānassā’’ti vacanato, idha ‘‘sabbattha agilānassā’’ti vakkhamānattā ca ettha ‘‘agilānassā’’ti labbhati. Dhammaparicchedo cettha padasodhamme vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Evamuparipi.
Once (the umbrella) has gone from the hand, he is not called "with umbrella in hand," and it is permissible to teach him the Dhamma. Because it is said, "Not to one with an umbrella in hand, if he is not ill," and because here it will be said "everywhere, if he is not ill," therefore here "if he is not ill" is obtained. The demarcation of the Dhamma here should be understood in the same way as stated in the Padasodhammas. Thus, also above.
Sattamaṃ.
The seventh.
1931.Daṇḍapāṇimhīti ettha daṇḍo pāṇimhi assāti viggaho. Kittakappamāṇo daṇḍoti āha‘‘catuhatthappamāṇo’’tiādi.Majjhimahatthatoti pamāṇamajjhimassa purisassa hatthato, yo ‘‘vaḍḍhakihattho’’ti vuccati.
1931.Daṇḍapāṇimhi: Here, the derivation is daṇḍo pāṇimhi assa. How much should be the length of the stick? He says, "Of four-cubits length," etc. Majjhimahatthato: From the hand of a man of medium height, which is called "carpenter's hand."
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
The eighth.
1932.Satthapāṇissāti etthāpi viggaho vuttanayova. Vakkhamānaṃ sakalaṃ dhanuvikatiṃ, saravikatiñca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ khaggādisatthaṃnāma. Khaggaṃ sannahitvā ṭhitopi satthapāṇi nu khoti āsaṅkāya nivattanatthamāha‘‘satthapāṇī’’tiādi. ‘‘Na hoti asi’’nti padacchedo.
1932.Satthapāṇissa: Here too, the derivation is as stated above. Except for the bow-variants and arrow-variants that will be stated later, the remainder is called "weapon" (sattha), such as a sword. To eliminate the doubt whether one is considered to be "with a weapon in hand" even if standing with a sword fastened (to the body), he says, "Satthapāṇī," etc. The word division is "Na hoti asi."
Navamaṃ.
The ninth.
1933-5.Sarena saddhiṃ dhanuṃ vā suddhadhanuṃ vā suddhasaraṃ vā sajiyaṃ dhanudaṇḍaṃ vā nijiyaṃ dhanudaṇḍaṃ vā gahetvā ṭhitassāpi vā nisinnassāpi vā nipannassāpi vā sace yo tathā padasodhamme vuttalakkhaṇaṃ saddhammaṃ deseti, tassa āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. Sace panassa dhanu khandhe paṭimukkaṃ hoti, yāva na gaṇhāti, tāva vaṭṭati. Jiyāya saha vattatītisajiyaṃ.
1933-5.The construction is that if someone, whether standing, sitting, or lying down, holding a bow with an arrow, or just a bow, or just an arrow, or a bow-staff with a bowstring, or a bow-staff without a bowstring, teaches the Saddhamma as defined in the Padasodhammas, he incurs a dukkaṭa offense. But if the bow is slung over his shoulder, it is permissible until he picks it up. Sajiyaṃ: Functioning with a bowstring.
Dasamaṃ.
The tenth.
Chaṭṭho vaggo.
The sixth varga.
1936.Pādukāruḷhakassāti pādukaṃ āruḷhopādukāruḷho,soyeva pādukāruḷhako, tassa. Kathaṃ āruḷhassāti āha‘‘akkamitvā’’tiādi.Akkamitvā ṭhitassāti chattadaṇḍake aṅgulantaraṃ appavesetvā kevalaṃ pādukaṃ akkamitvā ṭhitassa.Paṭimukkassa vāti paṭimuñcitvā ṭhitassa. Etaṃ dvayampi ‘‘pādukāruḷhakassā’’ti etassa atthapadaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘na pādukāruḷhassa agilānassa dhammo desetabbo. Yo anādariyaṃ paṭicca akkantassa vā paṭimukkassa vā omukkassa vā agilānassa dhammaṃ deseti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 638).
1936.Pādukāruḷhakassa: One who has mounted a shoe is pādukāruḷho, he alone is pādukāruḷhako, of him. How does he mount? He says, "Having stepped on," etc. Akkamitvā ṭhitassa: Of one who, without inserting an inch between the umbrella-staff, merely steps on the shoe and stands. Paṭimukkassa vā: Or of one who has taken it off and is standing. Both of these are synonymous with "pādukāruḷhakassa." As he said, "The Dhamma should not be taught to one who has mounted on shoes, if he is not ill. Whoever, disregarding it, teaches the Dhamma to one who has stepped on (shoes), or has taken them off, or has removed them, if he is not ill, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pāci. 638).
Paṭhamaṃ.
The first.
1937-40.Upāhanagatassāpīti akkantādiākārena upāhanāruḷhassa ca. Yathāha ‘‘akkantassa vā paṭimukkassa vā’’ti.Sabbatthāti chattapāṇiādīsu sabbasikkhāpadesu.Agilānassāti idaṃ yojetabbanti seso. Yāne vā gatassa agilānassa dhammaṃ deseti, dukkaṭanti yojanā. Tatthayāne vā gatassāti sace dvīhi janehi hatthasaṅghātena gahito, sāṭake vā ṭhapetvā vaṃsena vayhati, ayutte vā vayhādike yāne, visaṅkharitvā vā ṭhapite cakkamattepi nisinno hoti, yānagatotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
1937-40.Upāhanagatassāpi: Also to one who has mounted on shoes in the manner of stepping on, etc. As he said, "To one who has stepped on or has taken off." Sabbattha: In all the training rules beginning with "chattapāṇi." Agilānassa: This should be connected, it remains. The construction is that if he teaches the Dhamma to one who is in a vehicle, if he is not ill, (there is a) dukkaṭa. There, yāne vā gatassa: If he is held by two people with a joining of hands, or having placed (the person) on a cloth, is carried by a bamboo (litter), or on a vehicle yoked to beasts of burden, or even if sitting on a single wheel that has been disassembled and set up, he is counted as being in a vehicle.
‘‘Ṭhatvā’’ti iminā ‘‘nisīditvā’’ti idañca saṅgahitameva. Sayanesu gatassa ca desentena sayanesu gatenāpi samāne vāpi ucce vā nipanneneva vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
"Having stood" includes "having sat down." And it is permissible for one who is being carried on a couch and teaching, just as for one who is lying down on a couch, whether on the same level or higher.
1941.‘‘Tathevacā’’ti iminā ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ gahitaṃ.
1941."Tatheva ca": By this, "it is permissible" is included.
Dutiyatatiyacatutthāni.
The second, third, and fourth.
1942.‘‘Pallatthikāya nisinnassā’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena yakārassa lopaṃ katvā‘‘pallatthikā nisinnassā’’ti vuttaṃ, āyogapallatthikāya vā hatthapallatthikāya vā dussapallatthikāya vā yāya kāyaci pallatthikāya nisinnassāti attho.Veṭhitasīsassāti dussaveṭhanena vā moliādīhi vā yathā kesanto na dissati, evaṃ veṭhitasīsassa.
1942.Instead of saying "pallatthikāya nisinnassa," due to the constraints of versification, having omitted the ya, "pallatthikā nisinnassa" is said, the meaning is to one sitting in any cross-legged posture, whether an āyoga-pallatthika, or hattha-pallatthika, or dussa-pallatthika. Veṭhitasīsassā: With his head covered so that the hairline is not visible, either by a cloth wrapping or by turbans, etc.
1943.Yadi kesantaṃ vivarāpetvā deseti, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.‘‘Ayameva vinicchayo’’ti iminā ‘‘sīsaṃ vivarāpetvā deseti, vaṭṭatī’’ti anāpattivāropi vutto hoti.
1943.If he teaches after uncovering the hairline, it is permissible. "Ayameva vinicchayo": By this, the dispensation of non-offense, "if he teaches after uncovering the head, it is permissible," is also stated.
Pañcamachaṭṭhasattamāni.
The fifth, sixth, and seventh.
1944-5.Aṭṭhame ‘‘āsane nisinnassāti antamaso vatthampi tiṇānipi santharitvā nisinnassā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 645) idañca navame ‘‘ucce āsaneti antamaso bhūmippadesepi unnate ṭhāne nisinnassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 647) idañca dasame ‘‘sacepī’’tiādinā vakkhamānavinicchayañca ṭhapetvā vattabbavisesābhāvā āha‘‘aṭṭhame navamevāpi, dasame natthi kiñcipī’’ti. Ettha ‘‘vattabba’’nti seso. Therupaṭṭhānaṃ gantvāna ṭhitaṃ daharaṃ āsane nisinno thero ce pañhaṃ pucchatīti ajjhāhārayojanā. Kathetabbamupāyaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tassa passe panaññassa, kathetabbaṃ vijānatā’’ti. Ettha ‘‘ṭhitassā’’ti seso. Tassa samīpavattino kassaci abhāve sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāpi vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
1944-5.In the eighth, "āsane nisinnassa, to one sitting on a seat, even if it is only a cloth or grass spread out" (pāci. aṭṭha. 645); in the ninth, "ucce āsaneti, to one sitting on a high seat, it is not permissible to teach even if it is only on an elevated spot on the ground" (pāci. aṭṭha. 647); and in the tenth, because there is no special point to be made, except for the ruling to be stated later beginning with "sacepī," he says, "In the eighth, in the ninth also, in the tenth there is nothing at all." Here, "to be stated" remains. The construction is that if a junior monk, after going to attend upon a senior monk, asks a question while the senior monk is sitting on a seat, an implication is made. To show a way to speak, he says, "To another standing near him, it should be spoken, by one who knows." Here, "standing" remains. If there is no one nearby, it is also permissible to recite (the answer) after making a determination for recitation.
Aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.
The eighth, ninth, and tenth.
Sattamo vaggo.
The seventh varga.
1946.Gacchato puratoti ettha ‘‘pacchato gacchantenā’’ti seso. Pacchato gacchantena purato gacchato pañhaṃ na vattabbanti yojanā. Sace purato gacchanto pañhaṃ pucchati, kiṃ kātabbanti āha‘‘pacchimassā’’tiādi.
1946.Gacchato purato: Here, "by one going behind" remains. The construction is that one going behind should not speak a question to one going ahead. If one going ahead asks a question, what should be done? He says, "Pacchimassā," etc.
1947.Uggahitaṃ dhammaṃ purato gacchantena saddhiṃ pacchato gacchanto sajjhāyati, vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Samameva gacchato yugaggāhaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Yugaggāhanti aññamaññaṃ. Aññamañña-saddapariyāyo hiyugaggāha-saddo.
1947.The construction is that one going behind recites the Dhamma that has been learned, together with one going ahead, it is permissible. The construction is that it is permissible to recite simultaneously, going at the same pace. Yugaggāha: Mutually. Indeed, the word yugaggāha is a synonym for the word "aññamañña."
Paṭhamaṃ.
The first.
1948.Sakaṭamagge ekekassa cakkassa pathena gacchanto ekekassa cakkassa pathena samaṃ gacchato dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭati. Uppathenāpi gacchanto uppathena samaṃ gacchantassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭatīti ajjhāhārayojanā.Uppathenāti amaggena. Evaṃ anāpattivisaye dassite tabbipariyāyato āpattivisayo dassitoyevāti veditabbo.
1948.It is permissible to teach the Dhamma to one going along the path of one wheel of a cart, by one going along the path of one wheel of a cart together. The construction, supplying (words), is that it is permissible to teach the Dhamma to one going off the path, by one going off the path together. Uppathena: By a path that is not a road. Thus, with the area of non-offense shown, the area of offense is certainly shown by implication, so it should be understood.
Dutiyaṃ.
The second.
1949.Tatiye natthi vattabbanti ‘‘na ṭhito agilāno uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karissāmī’’ti (pāci. 651) etassa vinicchayo yathārutavasena suviññeyyoti katvā vuttaṃ. Sace paṭicchannaṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchantassa sahasā uccāro vā passāvo vā nikkhamati, asañcicca kato nāma, anāpatti. Ayamettha viseso daṭṭhabbo. Siṅghāṇikāya kheḷeneva saṅgahitattepi bāttiṃsakoṭṭhāsesu visuṃyeva dassito eko koṭṭhāsoti sikkhāpadesu avuttampi saṅgahetvā āha‘‘uccārādicatukka’’nti.
1949.Tatiye natthi vattabba: "Na ṭhito agilāno uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karissāmī," because the ruling of this (pāci. 651) is very easy to understand as it is stated. If excrement or urine suddenly comes out of one going to a concealed place, it is called unintentional, there is no offense. This is the distinction to be seen here. Although included with phlegm and nasal mucus, because it is shown separately among the thirty-two parts (of the body), it is one part, so, including what is not said in the training rules, he says, "The four beginning with excrement."
1950.Ettha haritaṃ nāma idanti dassetumāha‘‘jīvarukkhassā’’tiādi.Rukkhassāti upalakkhaṇaṃ jīvamānakatiṇalatādīnampi hariteyeva saṅgahitattā.‘‘Dissamānaṃ gacchatī’’ti vacaneneva adissamānagataṃ aharitanti byatirekato viññāyati. Sākhā vā bhūmilaggā dissamānā gacchati, taṃ sabbaṃ haritamevāti yojanā.
1950.To show that "green" means this, he says, "Jīvarukkhassa," etc. Rukkhassa: "Of a tree" is indicative, because living grass, creepers, etc., are also included under "green." By the statement "dissamānaṃ gacchati," it is understood by exclusion that what is not visible is not "green." A branch touching the ground goes visibly, all of that is indeed "green."
1951.Sahasā vaccaṃ nikkhamatevāti sambandho.Assabhikkhuno.Vaccanti upalakkhaṇaṃ passāvādīnampi dassitattā.Vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘gilānaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā’’ti seso.
1951.The connection is that excrement suddenly comes out. Assa: Of that bhikkhu. Vaccaṃ: "Excrement" is indicative, because urine, etc., are also shown. Vaṭṭati: Here, "because he is standing in a sick person's situation" remains.
1952.Palālaṇḍupake vāpīti palālacumbaṭakepi. Ettha ‘‘appaharitaṃ alabhantenā’’ti seso.Kismiñcīti sukkhatiṇādimhi kismiñci.Taṃvaccaṃ pacchā haritaṃ ottharati, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
1952.Palālaṇḍupake vāpī: Even in a pile of straw. Here, "by one not obtaining non-green (ground)" remains. Kismiñcī: On some dry grass, etc. Taṃ vaccaṃ: That excrement later covers over the green, it is permissible.
1953.Etīti pavisati.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. ‘‘Kheḷena eva cā’’ti padacchedo.
1953.Etī: Enters. Ettha: In this training rule. The word division is "Kheḷena eva ca."
Tatiyacatutthāni.
The third and fourth.
1954.Vaccakuṭisamuddādiudakesūti etthaādi-saddena sabbaṃ aparibhogajalaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Teneva‘‘tesaṃ aparibhogattā’’ti aparibhogattameva kāraṇamāha.
1954.Vaccakuṭisamuddādiudakesū: Here, by the word ādi, all water that is not for use is included. Therefore, he gives only the reason "tesaṃ aparibhogattā," because it is not for use.
1955.Udakogheti ettha ‘‘jāte’’ti seso.Ajalanti ajalaṭṭhānaṃ.Jaleti paribhogārahajale. Idhāpi thalakato udakaṃ ottharati, anāpatti.
1955.Udakoghe: Here, "jāte" remains. Ajalaṃ: A non-water place. Jale: In water fit for use. Here too, if water from the land covers over, there is no offense.
Pañcamaṃ.
The fifth.
Aṭṭhamo vaggo.
The eighth varga.
1956-7.Pakiṇṇakavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘samuṭṭhānādayo’’tiādi.Ñeyyāti vakkhamānanayena veditabbā.Etthāti etesu sekhiyesu. Ujjagghikā ādi yesanti viggaho, tagguṇasaṃviññāṇoyaṃ bāhiratthasamāso, ujjagghikāappasaddapaṭisaṃyuttāni cattāri sikkhāpadānīti attho. Chamā ca nīcāsanañca ṭhānañca pacchā ca uppatho cachamānīcāsanaṭṭhānapacchāuppathā,te saddā etesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ atthīti tappaṭisaṃyuttāni sikkhāpadānichamā…pe… uppathavā,chamādipadavantāni pañca sikkhāpadānīti attho. Etthaṭhāna-saddena ṭhā-dhātusseva rūpattā sikkhāpadāgato ṭhita-saddo gahito. ‘‘Dasasū’’ti vattabbe vaṇṇalopena, vibhattivipallāsena vā‘‘dasā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samanubhāsane samuṭṭhānādīhi etesu dasasu sikkhāpadesu samuṭṭhānādayo tulyā vuttāti yojanā.
1956-7.To show miscellaneous rulings, he says, "Samuṭṭhānādayo," etc. Ñeyyā: Should be known by the method that will be stated. Ettha: In these Sekhiyas. Ujjagghikā ādi yesanti is the derivation; this is a Bahiratthasamāsa, the attribute of which is to be understood: the four training rules associated with ujjagghikā and speaking softly are meant. Chamā ca nīcāsanañca ṭhānañca pacchā ca uppatho ca are chamānīcāsanaṭṭhānapacchāuppathā, the training rules that have these words are the training rules connected with these, chamā…pe… uppathavā: the five training rules that have the words beginning with "chamā" are meant. Here, because the word ṭhāna is a form of the root ṭhā, the word ṭhita (standing) that comes in the training rule is included. Instead of saying "dasasu," by elision of a letter or by transposition of a vibhatti, "dasā" is said. The construction is that in the admonition, the samuṭṭhāna etc. are said to be the same in these ten training rules.
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānāni, ekekamettha kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti vuttaṃ hoti.
What is said is this: These ten training rules have identical admonitions and samuṭṭhānas; in each of these there is kiriya, saññāvimokkha, sacittaka, lokavajja, kāyakamma, vacīkamma, akusalacitta, dukkhavedanā. This is said.
1958-9.‘‘Chatta’’ntiādīni sikkhāpadānaṃ upalakkhaṇapadāni. Etāni ekādasa sikkhāpadāni samuṭṭhānādinā pana dhammadesanenatulyāvasadisā evāti yojanā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – imāni ekādasa sikkhāpadāni dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānāni, kiriyākiriyāni, saññāvimokkhāni, sacittakāni, lokavajjāni, vacīkammāni, akusalacittāni, dukkhavedanānīti.
1958-9."Chatta," etc., are indicative words for the training rules. These eleven training rules, with respect to samuṭṭhāna etc., are tulyāva, indeed similar with the act of teaching the Dhamma. What is said here is this: These eleven training rules have the same samuṭṭhānas as the teaching of the Dhamma, are kiriyākiriya, saññāvimokkha, sacittaka, lokavajja, vacīkamma, akusalacitta, dukkhavedanā.
Sūpodanena viññattītisūpodana-saddena lakkhitaṃ viññattisikkhāpadaṃ. Viññattisikkhāpadānaṃ bahuttā idameva visesitaṃ.Theyyasatthasamaṃ matanti samuṭṭhānādīhi theyyasatthasikkhāpadena samānaṃ matanti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Sūpodanena viññattī: The training rule of requesting, characterized by the word sūpodana. Because there are many training rules of requesting, this alone is specified. Theyyasatthasamaṃ mataṃ: It is considered to be the same as the training rule about a thief's weapon, in respect of samuṭṭhāna etc., is the meaning. What is said is this: The training rule of requesting pertaining to soup and rice has the same samuṭṭhāna as that about a thief's weapon; it is kiriya, saññāvimokkha, sacittaka, lokavajja, kāyakamma, vacīkamma, akusalacitta, dukkhavedanā.
1960.Avasesā tipaññāsāti avasesāni tepaññāsasikkhāpadāni.Samānā paṭhamena tūti paṭhamena pārājikena samuṭṭhānādito samānānīti attho, paṭhamapārājikasadisasamuṭṭhānānīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Anāpatti āpadāsū’’ti padacchedo. Parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā, pārupitvā carantānaṃ corupaddavādiāpadānāma.Api-saddena nadisantaraṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Sekhiyesu sabbesūti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ.
1960.Avasesā tipaññāsā: The remaining fifty-three training rules. Samānā paṭhamena tū: Are the same as the first pārājika in respect of samuṭṭhāna etc., is the meaning; it is said that the samuṭṭhānas are similar to the first pārājika. "Anāpatti āpadāsū" is the word division. When walking about wearing the robe fully and completely, āpadā means dangers such as robbery and violence. By the word api, crossing a river, etc., is included. Sekhiyesu sabbesū: Is said by way of generality.
1961.‘‘Na ujjhānasaññī paresaṃ pattaṃ olokessāmī’’tiādīnaṃ (pāci. 614) imassa anāpattivārassa asambhavato na panāgatotipāḷiyaṃna vutto. Tassāpi yathāvatthukāva āpattiyo daṭṭhabbā.
1961.Because this dispensation of non-offense of "Na ujjhānasaññī paresaṃ pattaṃ olokessāmī," etc. (pāci. 614) is not possible, it is not said in the pāḷi as it has not come up. The offenses for that (training rule) should also be seen according to the actual case.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Sekhiyakathāvaṇṇanā
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
in the Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanā,
Sekhiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
which is the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
1962.Yo imaṃ vinicchayaṃ viditvā ṭhito, sohiyasmā vinaye visārado hoti, vinītamānaso ca hoti, parehi duppadhaṃsiyo ca hoti,tatotasmā kāraṇā samāhito satataṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ sikkheyyāti yojanā.
1962.The construction is that the one who, having understood this ruling, remains (steadfast), hi, because he is skilled in the Vinaya and is of disciplined mind, and is difficult to defeat by others, tato, therefore, with a composed mind, one should constantly learn this Vinaya ruling.
imaṃ vinicchayaṃ viditvāti sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇasampattinidānaṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ atthato, ganthato, vinicchayato ca sakkaccaṃ ñatvā.Visāradoti sārajjanaṃsārado,vigato sārado assāti visārado, vinayapariyattiyā, āpattādivibhāge ca nibbhayo nirāsaṅkoti vuttaṃ hoti. Na kevalaṃ imassa jānane esova ānisaṃso, atha khovinītamānaso ca hoti,saṃyatacitto hotīti attho.Soti imaṃ vinicchayaṃ sakkaccaṃ viditvā ṭhito bhikkhu.Parehīti imaṃ ajānantehi aññehi.Duppadhaṃsiyo ca hotīti anabhibhavanīyo ca hoti.
imaṃ vinicchayaṃ viditvā: Having known, with care, this Vinaya ruling, which is the cause of acquiring all worldly and supramundane virtues, in terms of meaning, text, and judgment. Visārado: Sārado is one who has essence (sāra), visārado is one who is without essence (vigata sārado), it is said that he is fearless and without doubt in the Vinaya texts and in the division of offenses, etc. Not only is this the advantage of knowing this, but also vinītamānaso ca hoti, he is also of restrained mind, is the meaning. So: That bhikkhu who remains having known this ruling with care. Parehi: By others who do not know this. Duppadhaṃsiyo ca hotī: And he is unconquerable.
Tatoti tasmā vinaye visāradatādisabbaguṇasampannahetuttā.Hīti yasmāti attho.Sikkheti sajjhāyanasavanādivasena sikkheyya, uggaṇheyyāti attho.‘‘Satata’’nti iminā sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāne viya etthāpi satatābhiyogo kātabboti dasseti. Vikkhittassa yathābhūtapaṭivedhābhāvato tappaṭipakkhāya ekaggatāya niyojento āha‘‘samāhito’’ti, sammā vinayavinicchaye āhito patiṭṭhito ekaggacittoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘avikkhittassāyaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo vikkhittassā’’ti.
Tato means because of that, because it is the cause of being endowed with all virtues such as expertise in the Vinaya. Hī means because of that, that is the meaning. Sikkhe means should train, should learn through studying, hearing, and so on, that is the meaning. "Satata"—with this, it shows that here too, constant effort should be made, as in all-encompassing meditation subjects (sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāna). Because the scattered mind lacks realization of things as they are, enjoining the opposite, concentration, he says "samāhito", meaning with the mind well-established, grounded, concentrated on the decision of Vinaya. As he said, "This Dhamma is for one who is not scattered, this Dhamma is not for one who is scattered."
1963.Evaṃ imāya gāthāya vuttamevatthaṃ pakārantarenāpi dassetumāha‘‘ima’’ntiādi.Teti apekkhitvā ‘‘ye’’ti labbhati. Ye therā vā navā vā majjhimā vā.Paramanti amatamahānibbānappattiyā mūlakāraṇassa sīlassa pakāsanato uttamaṃ.Asaṃkaranti nikāyantaraladdhīhi asammissaṃ.Saṃkaranti vuttappakāraguṇopetattā kāyacittasukhakāraṇaṃ sammukhaṃ karotīti saṃkaraṃ.Savanāmatanti saddarasādiyogena kaṇṇarasāyanaṃ.Amatanti tatoyeva amataṃ sumadhuraṃ. Amatamahānibbānāvahattā vā phalūpacārenaamataṃ. Imaṃvinayavinicchayaṃ.Aveccāti sakkaccaṃ viditvā.Adhiketi adhisīlādisikkhattayappakāsanena ukkaṭṭhe.Hiteti lokiyalokuttarasukhahetuttena hite. Hinoti attano phalanti‘‘hita’’nti sukhahetu vuccati.Kalisāsaneti lobhādikilesaviddhaṃsane.Sāsaneti vinayapariyattisaṅkhātasāsanekadese.Paṭuttanti byattabhāvaṃ.Na yantina gacchanti.Ke teti katame te. ‘‘Na keci santi cā’’tinissandeheimissā gāthāya attho likhito.
1963. Thus, to show the meaning stated in this verse in another way, he says "ima" and so on. Te—looking for it, "ye" is obtained. Those who are elders, or new ones, or middling ones. Parama means supreme, because it reveals virtue, which is the root cause for attaining the deathless Great Nibbāna. Asaṃkara means unmixed, not mixed with doctrines obtained from other schools. Saṃkara means, because it possesses the qualities mentioned, it directly causes bodily and mental happiness, thus it is called saṃkara. Savanāmata means nectar to the ear because of the combination of sound and taste. Amata means deathless, very sweet, from that very reason. Or, metaphorically with the result, amata means deathless. Imaṃ means this Vinaya decision. Avecca means having known respectfully. Adhike means excelling, by revealing the three trainings beginning with higher virtue (adhisīla). Hite means beneficial, because it is the cause of worldly and transcendental happiness. Since it destroys one's own fruit, "hita" is called the cause of happiness. Kalisāsane means in the destruction of defilements such as greed. Sāsane means in a portion of the Dispensation (sāsana) counted as the Vinaya scriptures (pariyatti). Paṭuttaṃ means skillfulness. Na yanti means do not go. Ke te means who are they. The meaning of this verse is written in nissandehe as "Na keci santi cā".
paramaṃuttamaṃasaṃkaraṃnikāyantaraladdhīhi asammissaṃsaṃkaraṃsakalalokiyalokuttarasukhābhinipphādakaṃsavanāmataṃsotarasāyanaṃimaṃvinicchayappakaraṇaṃaveccasakkaccaṃ viditvāadhikeadhisīlādisikkhattayappakāsanena ukkaṭṭhehitelokiyalokuttarasukhahetubhūtekalisāsanesakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsakesāsanevinayapiṭakasaṅkhāte pariyattisāsane ye paṭuttaṃ na yanti, te ke nāmāti yojanā, ye imaṃ pakaraṇaṃ avecca viditvā ṭhitā, te ekaṃsato vinayapiṭake paṭuttaṃ pāpuṇanti yevāti adhippāyo.
paramaṃ supreme; asaṃkaraṃ unmixed with doctrines of other schools; saṃkaraṃ the producer of all worldly and transcendental happiness; savanāmataṃ nectar to the ear; imaṃ this compendium of decisions; avecca having respectfully known; adhike excelling through the declaration of the three trainings beginning with higher virtue; hite being the cause of worldly and transcendental happiness; kalisāsane in the Dispensation that destroys all defilements; sāsane in the Dispensation counted as the Vinaya Piṭaka scriptures; what are those who do not attain skillfulness (paṭuttaṃ)? That is the construction. The meaning is that those who, having known this compendium, remain established, will certainly attain skillfulness in the Vinaya Piṭaka.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
On the Explanation of the Vinaya-Vinicchaya,
Bhikkhuvibhaṅgakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Bhikkhu Vibhaṅga is Finished.
Bhikkhunivibhaṅgo
Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga
1964.Evaṃ bhikkhuvibhaṅgapāḷiyā, aṭṭhakathāya ca āgataṃ vinicchayasāraṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayena dassetvā idāni tadanantarāya bhikkhunivibhaṅgapāḷiyā, tadaṭṭhakathāya ca āgatavinicchayasāraṃ dassetumārabhanto āha‘‘bhikkhunīna’’ntiādi.Tasmiṃ apīti etthaapi-saddo vuttāpekkhāyaṃ.‘‘Samāsenā’’ti idaṃ ganthavasena saṅkhipanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.‘‘Kiñcimatta’’nti idaṃ atthavasenāti veditabbaṃ.
1964. Having shown the essence of the decisions (vinicchayasāraṃ) that came in the Bhikkhu Vibhaṅga text and its commentary, neither too condensed nor too expanded, now, beginning to show the essence of the decisions (vinicchayasāraṃ) that came in the Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga text immediately following that and its commentary, he says "bhikkhunīna" and so on. Tasmiṃ apī—here, the word api is in expectation of what was said. "Samāsenā"—this is said referring to the condensation in terms of the text. "Kiñcimatta"—this should be understood as in terms of the meaning.
Pārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pārājika Story
1965.Chandasoti methunasevanarāgapaṭisaṃyuttena chandena. Etena ‘‘chande pana asati balakkārena padhaṃsitāya anāpattī’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. methunadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā)aṭṭhakathāsūcitā hoti. Sā samaṇī pārājikā nāma hotīti pavuccatīti yojanā.
1965.Chandaso means with desire connected to the lust for sexual intercourse. With this, the commentary indicates "If, when desire is not present, she is violated by force, there is no offense" (Kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. methunadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). That female renunciant is said to be named Pārājikā, that is the construction.
1966-7.‘‘Sajīvassa api ajīvassā’’ti padacchedo.‘‘Santhataṃ vā asanthata’’nti idaṃ ‘‘aṅgajāta’’nti imassa visesanaṃ.Attano tividhe maggeti attano vaccapassāvamukhamaggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ magge. Ettha ‘‘santhate vā asanthate vā’’ti seso,‘‘allokāse’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Yebhuyyaakkhāyitādika’’nti padacchedo.Ādi-saddena akkhāyitaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
1966-7."Sajīvassa api ajīvassā"—word division. "Santhataṃ vā asanthata"—this is a qualification of "aṅgajāta". Attano tividhe magge means in one of the three passages of oneself: the passage of excrement, urine, or mouth. Here, "whether covered or uncovered" is the remainder, "allokāse" is related to this. "Yebhuyyaakkhāyitādika"—word division. Ādi includes akkhāyita.
Manussapurisādīnaṃ navannaṃ sajīvassapi ajīvassapi yassa kassaci santhataṃ vā asanthataṃ vā yebhuyyakkhāyitādikaṃ aṅgajātaṃ attano santhate vā asanthate vā tividhe magge allokāse tilaphalamattampi pavesentī parājitāti yojanā.
One who inserts the aṅgajāta (organ), whether covered or uncovered, of any living being or non-living being of nine types of human males etc., whether covered or uncovered, mostly explained etc., into one of the three passages of oneself, whether covered or uncovered, in an unconcealed place, even the size of a sesame seed, is defeated (parājitā), that is the construction.
1968.Sādhāraṇavinicchayanti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ sādhāraṇasikkhāpadavinicchayaṃ.
1968. Sādhāraṇavinicchaya means the common training rule decision for monks and nuns.
1969-70.Adhakkhakanti ettha akkhakānaṃ adhoti viggaho.Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalanti jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ ubbhanti viggaho.Ubbha-saddo uddhaṃ-saddapariyāyo. Idha ‘‘attano’’ti seso.Avassutassāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintassa.Avassutāti etthāpi eseva nayo.Yāti vuttattā ‘‘sā’’ti labbhati.Sarīranti ettha ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti seso. Paropakkamamūlakaṃ pārājikaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tena vā phuṭṭhā’’ti. Ettha ‘‘yathāparicchinne kāye’’ti ca ‘‘sādiyeyyā’’ti ca vattabbaṃ.
1969-70. Adhakkhaka means here, adho akkhakānaṃ is the separation. Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala means ubbha jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ is the separation. Ubbha is a synonym for the word uddhaṃ. Here, "attano" is the remainder. Avassutassā means drenched with the lust of bodily contact. Avassutā—here too, this is the same method. Yā—because it was stated, "sā" is obtained. Sarīra—here, "yaṃ kiñcī" is the remainder. To show the pārājika based on the instigation of another, he says "tena vā phuṭṭhā". Here, "in a body defined as usual" and "should approve" should be stated.
sarīraṃattanoadhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃyaṃ sarīrakaṃ, tena sarīrakena chupeyya,tenamanussapurisena yathāparicchinne kāyephuṭṭhāsādiyeyya vā, sā pārājikā siyāti yojanā.
sarīraṃ one's own adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ whichever body, with that body should touch, tena by that human male, in a body defined as usual, phuṭṭhā touched, or should approve, she becomes defeated (pārājikā), that is the construction.
1971-2.‘‘Gahitaṃ ubbhajāṇunā’’ti iminā kapparato uddhaṃ pārājikakkhettamevāti dīpeti. Attano yathāvuttappakārena kāyenāti yojanā, attano ‘‘adhakkhaka’’ntiādivuttappakārena kāyenāti attho. Tathā avassutāya avassutassapurisassakāyapaṭibaddhaṃ phusantiyā thullaccayaṃ hoti. Attano yathāparicchinnakāyapaṭibaddhena tathā avassutāya avassutassa purisassa kāyaṃ phusantiyā thullaccayaṃ hoti.
1971-2. "Gahitaṃ ubbhajāṇunā"—with this, it indicates that above the knee (kapparato uddhaṃ), it is only the pārājika territory. By one's own body in the manner stated, that is the construction, meaning by one's own body in the manner stated beginning with "adhakkhaka". Likewise, there is a thullaccaya for a woman touching the body of a man who is oozing with lust, and for a man whose lust is oozing. There is a thullaccaya for a woman touching the body of a man who is oozing with lust and for a man whose lust is oozing, with what is connected to her body defined as usual.
1973.Attano avasesena kāyena avassutāya avassutassa purisapuggalassakāyaṃphusantiyā thullaccayaṃ hoti. Evaṃ attano payoge ca purisassa payoge ca tassā bhikkhuniyāyeva thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā.
1973. There is a thullaccaya for a woman touching the body of a male individual who is oozing with lust and for a man whose lust is oozing, with the remainder of her body. Thus, there is a thullaccaya only for that nun in both her own instigation and in the man's instigation, that is the construction.
1974.Yakkhapetatiracchānapaṇḍakānaṃ kāyaṃ ‘‘adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala’’nti yathāparicchinnaṃ tatheva attano kāyena ubhatoavassave sati phusantiyāassābhikkhuniyā thullaccayaṃ, tatheva yakkhādīnaṃ payogepi tassāyeva thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā.
1974. Touching the body of a Yakkha, peta, animal, or eunuch, whether "adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala" or as usually defined, just so, with one's own body, when lust is present on both sides, there is a thullaccaya for that nun, likewise, there is a thullaccaya only for her in the instigation of the Yakkha, etc., that is the construction.
1975.Ekatovassave cāpīti bhikkhuniyā vasena ekatoavassave cāpi.Thullaccayamudīritanti pārājikakkhettabhūtena attano kāyena manussapurisassa kāyaṃ phusantiyā thullaccayaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 662) vuttanti attho.Avasese ca sabbatthāti yathāvuttapārājikakkhettato avasese thullaccayakkhette sabbattha ekatoavassave sati dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Kāyapaṭibaddhena kāyapaṭibaddhāmasanādīsu sabbattha ubhatoavassave vā ekatoavassave vā dukkaṭameva hoti.
1975. Ekatovassave cāpī means also when lust is present on one side in the case of the nun. Thullaccayamudīrita means there is a thullaccaya for a woman touching the body of a human male with her own body, which is a pārājika territory, this is what is said in the commentary (pāci. aṭṭha. 662), that is the meaning. Avasese ca sabbatthā means in all the remaining thullaccaya territories apart from the pārājika territory mentioned, there is a dukkaṭa when lust is present on one side, that is the meaning. Everywhere, in the touching of things connected to the body with things connected to the body, there is only a dukkaṭa whether lust is present on both sides or on one side.
1976.‘‘Ubbhakkhakamadhojāṇumaṇḍala’’ntiyaṃapārājikakkhettaṃ idha dassitaṃ, ettha ekatoavassave dukkaṭaṃ hoti. Kapparassa ca heṭṭhāpietthevaadhojāṇumaṇḍale saṅgahaṃ gatanti yojanā.
1976. "Ubbhakkhakamadhojāṇumaṇḍala"—that which is the non-pārājika territory shown here, in this, there is a dukkaṭa when lust is present on one side. Even below the knee (kapparassa ca heṭṭhāpi) it goes into the collection here, in the area below the knee, that is the construction.
1977-9.Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ sace kāyasaṃsaggaṃkelāyatisevatīti yojanā.Bhikkhuniyā nāso siyāti sīlavināso pārājikāpatti siyāti attho.Gehapemanti ettha ‘‘gehasitapema’’nti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena sita-saddalopo, attho panassa bhikkhuvibhaṅge vuttanayova.
1977-9. If a monk plays at bodily contact with a nun, meaning indulges, that is the construction. Bhikkhuniyā nāso siyā means there would be a destruction of virtue, the pārājika offense would occur, that is the meaning. Gehapema—here, "gehasitapema" should be stated, but the word sita is dropped due to the meter of the verse, but its meaning is the same as the manner stated in the Bhikkhu Vibhaṅga.
1980.Avisesenāti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā’’ti vā ‘‘bhikkhussā’’ti vā visesaṃ akatvā.
1980. Avisesenā means without making a distinction between "of the nun" or "of the monk".
1981.Yassāti bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā.Yatthāti bhikkhuniyaṃ vā bhikkhusmiṃ vā.Manosuddhanti kāyasaṃsaggādirāgarahitaṃ.Tassabhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vātatthabhikkhuniyaṃ vā bhikkhusmiṃ vā visayenadosatāanāpattīti attho.
1981. Yassā means of the monk or the nun. Yatthā means on the nun or on the monk. Manosuddha means free from lust for bodily contact etc. Tassa of that monk or nun, tattha in that matter, nadosatā there is no offense, that is the meaning.
1982.Bhinditvāti sīlabhedaṃ katvā. Bhikkhuniyā apakatattā āha‘‘neva hoti bhikkhunidūsako’’ti.
1982. Bhinditvā means having broken virtue. Because she has offended the nun, he says "neva hoti bhikkhunidūsako".
1983.Athāti vākyārambhe.Na hotāpatti bhikkhunoti ettha bhikkhunīhi kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesamāha.
1983. Athā means at the beginning of a sentence. Na hotāpatti bhikkhuno—here, bodily contact and saṅghādisesa by the nuns is referred to.
1984.‘‘Khette’’ti vakkhamānaṃ ‘‘phuṭṭhā’’ti iminā yojetvā‘‘pārājika’’ntiādīhi, ‘‘thullaccayaṃ khette’’tiādīhi ca sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pārājika’’nti vakkhamānattāphuṭṭhāti ettha ‘‘pārājikakkhette’’ti seso.
1984. "Khette" should be connected to "phuṭṭhā" which will be stated, and should be connected to "pārājika" etc., and to "thullaccayaṃ khette" etc. Because "pārājika" will be stated, phuṭṭhā here means "in the pārājika territory" is the remainder.
1985.Tathāti niccalāpi sādiyati.Khetteti thullaccayādīnaṃ khette. Kāyena niccalāyapi cittena sādiyantiyā āpatti kasmā vuttāti āha‘‘vuttattā…pe… satthunā’’ti, bhikkhupātimokkhe viya ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyā’’ti avatvā idha ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyeyyā’’ti vuttattāti adhippāyo.
1985. Tathā means she approves even when motionless. Khette means in the territory of thullaccaya etc. Why is an offense stated when she approves with her mind even when her body is motionless? He says "vuttattā…pe… satthunā", meaning because here it is stated "kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyeyyā" instead of "kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyā" as in the Bhikkhu Pāṭimokkha, that is the intention.
1986.Tassāāpattiyā.Kriyasamuṭṭhānanti kiriyāya samuṭṭhānaṃ.Evaṃ satīti sādiyanamatteneva āpajjitabbabhāve sati.Idanti ‘‘kiriyasamuṭṭhāna’’mitividhānaṃ.Tabbahuleneva nayenāti kiriyasamuṭṭhānabāhullena nayena khadiravanādivohāro viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
1986. Tassā of that offense. Kriyasamuṭṭhāna means arising from action. Evaṃ satī means if it is only necessary to incur an offense by approving. Ida means this injunction of "kiriyasamuṭṭhāna". Tabbahuleneva nayenā means in the way of an abundance of action arousal, it should be seen like the usage of khadiravana etc.
1987.Tassābhikkhuniyāasañciccavirajjhitvā āmasantiyā anāpatti, ‘‘ayaṃ puriso’’ti vā ‘‘itthī’’ti vāajānitvāāmasantiyā anāpatti, purisassa āmasane sati phassaṃ asādiyantiyā vā anāpattīti yojanā.
1987. Tassā of that nun, there is no offense for touching unintentionally, without passion, or for touching without knowing "this is a man" or "this is a woman", or if she does not approve of the contact when a man touches her, that is the construction.
1988.Khittacittāyāti yakkhummattāya.Ummattikāya vāti pittakopena ummādappattāya. Idañca ‘‘asucī’’ti vā ‘‘candana’’nti vā visesataṃ ajānanameva pamāṇaṃ.
1988. Khittacittāyā means for one who is possessed by a Yakkha. Ummattikāya vā means for one who has become insane due to bile disorder. And this is the measure: not knowing specifically whether it is "impure" or "sandalwood".
Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala Story.
1989-90.‘‘Pārājikattaṃ jānantī’’ti iminā avasesāpattiṃ jānitvā chādentiyā pārājikābhāvaṃ dīpeti.Saliṅge tu ṭhitāyāti pabbajjāliṅgeyeva ṭhitāya. Iti dhure nikkhittamattasminti yojanā.Iti-saddo nidassane. Itarāya pubbeyeva āpannattā tamapekkhitvā‘‘sā cā’’ti āha.
1989-90. "Pārājikattaṃ jānantī"—with this, he indicates the absence of a pārājika for one who conceals the remaining offense knowing it. Saliṅge tu ṭhitāyā means for one who remains in the appearance of renunciation itself. Thus, in merely placing the burden, that is the construction. Iti is an example. Because the other had already offended previously, looking at that, he says "sā cā".
1991.Vuttāvisiṭṭhaṃ sabbaṃ vinicchayaṃ saṅgahetumāha‘‘sesa’’ntiādi.Tatthāti duṭṭhullapaṭicchādane.
1991. To include all the decisions with the stated distinctions, he says "sesa" etc. Tatthā means in concealing a serious offense.
Vajjapaṭicchādikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Offense Concealment Story.
1992-5.Saṅghenāti samaggena saṅghena.Ukkhittakoti āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhittako.‘‘Ukkhepane ṭhito’’ti iminā ukkhepanīyakammakatassa anosāritabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Yā diṭṭhi etassātiyaṃdiṭṭhiko,so ukkhittako bhikkhu yāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato hotīti adhippāyo.‘‘Tassā diṭṭhiyā gahaṇenā’’ti iminā anuvattappakāro dassito. Taṃ ukkhittakaṃ bhikkhunti yojanā. Sā bhikkhunīaññāhibhikkhunīhi visumpica saṅghamajjhepi ‘‘eso kho ayye bhikkhu samaggena saṅghena ukkhitto’’tiādinā (pāci. 669) nayena tikkhattuṃ vuccamānāti yojanā. Taṃ vatthuṃ acajantī gahetvā yadi tatheva tiṭṭhatīti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā’’ti seso.Tassa kammassa osāneti tatiyāya kammavācāya yyakārappattavasena assa samanubhāsanakammassa pariyosāne.Asākiyadhītarāti asākiyadhītā, paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ.‘‘Puna appaṭisandheyā’’ti iminā puna teneva ca attabhāvena bhikkhunibhāve paṭisandhātuṃ anarahatā vuttā.
1992-5. Saṅghenā means by the united Saṅgha. Ukkhittako means one who has been suspended for not seeing an offense etc. "Ukkhepane ṭhito"—with this, it indicates the state of not being informed of one who has been subjected to the act of suspension (ukkhepanīyakammakatassa anosāritabhāvaṃ). Yā diṭṭhi etassāti yaṃdiṭṭhiko, the intention is that that suspended monk is endowed with whatever view. "Tassā diṭṭhiyā gahaṇenā"—with this, the way of conforming is shown. That nun who is suspended, that is the construction. That nun is being told three times by other nuns, separately or even in the middle of the Saṅgha, in the manner beginning "eso kho ayye bhikkhu samaggena saṅghena ukkhitto" (pāci. 669), that is the construction. If she takes up that object not relinquishing it and remains thus, that is the construction. Here, "yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā" is the remainder. Tassa kammassa osāne means at the end of that act of admonishment, in the way that the Yakkāra is obtained by the third verbal act (tatiyāya kammavācāya yyakārappattavasena assa samanubhāsanakammassa pariyosāne). Asākiyadhītarā means an unsākiyan daughter, karaṇavacanaṃ is in the individual. "Puna appaṭisandheyā"—with this, it is said that she is not worthy to be reborn again in the state of a nun with that same existence.
1996.Tikadukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭhanti adhammakamme adhammakammasaññā, vematikā, dhammakammasaññāti etāsaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Samanubhāsane vuttā samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe idha vattabbāti yojanā.
1996. Tikadukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭha means a triplet of dukkaṭas is stated based on perception of an unlawful act as an unlawful act, doubt, and perception of an unlawful act as a lawful act. All the arisings etc. that are stated in the admonishment should be stated here, that is the construction.
Ukkhittānuvattikakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Ukkhittānuvattika Story.
1997.‘‘Hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyyāti hattho nāma kapparaṃ upādāya yāva agganakhā. Etassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ gahaṇaṃ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pāci. 676) vuttattā āha‘‘apārājikakhettassā’’tiādi. ‘‘Ta’’nti vakkhamānattā ‘‘ya’’nti labbhati. Apārājikakkhettassa yassa kassaci aṅgassa yaṃ gahaṇaṃ, taṃ hatthaggahaṇanti pavuccatīti yojanā. Hatthe gahaṇaṃhatthaggahaṇaṃ.
1997. "Hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyyāti hattho nāma kapparaṃ upādāya yāva agganakhā. Etassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ gahaṇaṃ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassā"ti (pāci. 676)—because it is said, he says "apārājikakhettassā" etc. Because "Ta" will be stated, "ya" is obtained. Whichever touching of any limb of the non-pārājika territory, that is called hand-grabbing, that is the construction. Touching the hand is hatthaggahaṇaṃ.
1998.Yassa kassacīti vuttappakārena yassa kassaci cīvarassa yaṃ gahaṇanti yojanā.
1998. Yassa kassacī means: whichever robe, belonging to whomever, the taking of which (is being discussed).
1999.Asaddhamma-saddena methunassāpi vuccamānattā tato visesetumāha‘‘kāyasaṃsagga…pe… kāraṇā’’ti. Bhikkhunī kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhātassa asaddhammassa kāraṇā purisassa hatthapāsasmiṃ tiṭṭheyya vāti yojanā.
1999.Because the term asaddhamma can also refer to sexual intercourse, in order to differentiate from that, he said, "bodily contact...pe...because of." The meaning is: should a bhikkhuni remain within arm's reach of a man because of asaddhamma defined as bodily contact?
2000.Tatoti tassa asaddhammassa kāraṇā.Tatthāti hatthapāse.Purisenāti ettha ‘‘kata’’nti seso, ‘‘saṅketa’’nti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Āgamanaṃ assā’’ti padacchedo. Iccheyyāti vuttepi na gamanicchāmattena, atha kho bhikkhuniyā purisassa hatthapāsaṃ, purisena ca bhikkhuniyā hatthapāsaṃ okkantakāleyeva vatthupūraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘saṅketaṃ vā gaccheyyāti etassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya purisena ‘itthannāmaṃ āgacchā’ti vuttā gacchati, pade pade āpatti dukkaṭassa. Purisassa hatthapāsaṃ okkantamatte āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pāci. 676) ca ‘‘purisassa abbhāgamanaṃ sādiyati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Hatthapāsaṃ okkantamatte āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pāci. 676) ca. Ettha caitthannāmaṃ āgacchāti itthannāmaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgacchāti attho.
2000. Tato means: because of that asaddhamma. Tatthā means: within arm's reach. Purisenā means: here, "done" is understood, and it is connected with "arrangement." "Āgamanaṃ assā" is the word division. Even though "iccheyya" (should desire) is said, the intention is not just the desire to go, but rather, the fulfillment of the object should be seen as occurring at the very moment the bhikkhuni enters the man's arm's reach, or the man enters the bhikkhuni's arm's reach. As he said, "Or should go to an arranged meeting: if, for the purpose of engaging in this asaddhamma, she goes when told by a man, 'Come to such and such a place,' there is an offense of dukkaṭa at each step. The offense is thullaccaya as soon as she enters the man's arm's reach" (pāci. 676), and "She approves of the man's coming, offense of dukkaṭa. The offense is thullaccaya as soon as she enters his arm's reach" (pāci. 676). And here, itthannāmaṃ āgacchā means: come to such and such a place.
2001.Tadatthāyāti tasseva kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhātaasaddhammassa sevanatthāya.Paṭicchannaṭṭhānañcāti vatthādinā yena kenaci paṭicchannaokāsaṃ. Purisassa hatthapāse ṭhitā tadatthāya kāyaṃ upasaṃhareyya vāti yojanā.
2001. Tadatthāyā means: for the purpose of engaging in that asaddhamma defined as bodily contact. Paṭicchannaṭṭhānañcā means: a secluded place concealed by clothing or anything else. The meaning is: should she, standing within arm's reach of a man, bring her body close for that purpose?
2002.Hatthaggahaṇādīnaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vatthūnaṃ pūraṇena‘‘aṭṭhavatthukā’’ti saṅkhātāayaṃbhikkhunīvinaṭṭhā hotisīlavināsena, tatoyevaassamaṇī hotiabhikkhunī hotīti yojanā.
2002.Aṭṭhavatthukā is the designation because of the completion of the eight grounds, beginning with taking the hand, as previously described. Ayaṃ bhikkhunī vinaṭṭhā hoti - this bhikkhuni is ruined by the destruction of her morality; therefore, she assamaṇī hoti - is no longer a samaṇī, she is no longer a bhikkhuni.
2003.Anulomenavāti hatthaggahaṇādipaṭipāṭiyā vā.Paṭilomena vāti tabbipariyato paṭilomena vā.Ekantarikāya vāti ekamekaṃ antaritvā puna tassāpi karaṇavasena ekantarikāya vā. Anulomena vā paṭilomena vā tathekantarikāya vā aṭṭhamaṃ vatthuṃ paripūrentī cutāti yojanā.
2003. Anulomena vā means: either in the forward sequence of taking the hand, etc. Paṭilomena vā means: or in the reverse sequence from that. Ekantarikāya vā means: or with one intervening, due to doing even that again; in a sequence with one intervening. The meaning is: whether completing the eighth ground in a forward sequence, or in a reverse sequence, or in the same way with one intervening, she is defeated.
2004.Etadeva atthaṃ byatirekamukhena samatthetumāha‘‘athādito’’tiādi.Satakkhattumpīti bahukkhattumpi.Sata-saddo hettha bahu-saddapariyāyo. Pārājikā neva siyāti yojanā, iminā taṃtaṃvatthumūlakaṃ dukkaṭathullaccayaṃ āpajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
2004.To confirm this very meaning by way of contrast, he said, "Athādito," etc. Satakkhattumpī means: even many times. Here, the word sata is a synonym for the word "many." The meaning is: she would never be pārājika; with this, it is said that she incurs dukkaṭa and thullaccaya based on each of those grounds.
2005.Yā pana āpattiyo āpannā, desetvā tāhi muccatīti yojanā.Dhuranikkhepanaṃ katvāti ‘‘na punevaṃ karissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā.Desitā gaṇanūpikāti desitā desitagaṇanameva upeti, pārājikassa aṅgaṃ na hotīti attho. Tasmā yā ekaṃ āpannā, dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā desetvā puna kilesavasena āpajjati, puna deseti, evaṃ aṭṭha vatthūni pūrentīpi pārājikā na hoti.
2005.The meaning is: whichever offenses she has committed, she is freed from them by confessing them. Dhuranikkhepanaṃ katvā means: having laid down the burden, thinking "I will not do this again." Desitā gaṇanūpikā means: the confession only goes to the count of confessions; it is not a factor for pārājika. Therefore, if she commits one offense, confesses it after laying down the burden, and then commits another offense again due to the defilements, and confesses it again, she is not pārājika even when completing all eight grounds.
2006.Saussāhāya desitāti puna āpajjane anikkhittadhurāya bhikkhuniyā desitāpi āpatti desanāgaṇanaṃ na upeti. Kiṃ hotīti āha‘‘desitāpi adesitā’’ti, tasmā pārājikāpattiyā aṅgameva hotīti adhippāyo.
2006. Saussāhāya desitā means: a confession made by a bhikkhuni who has not laid down the burden when committing the offense again does not go to the count of confessions. What happens? He says, "desitāpi adesitā" - even though confessed, it is unconfessed; therefore, the meaning is that it is indeed a factor for a pārājika offense.
2008.Ayaṃ atthoti ‘‘asaddhammo nāma kāyasaṃsaggo’’ti ayaṃ attho.Uddisitoti pakāsito.
2008. Ayaṃ attho means: this meaning, "asaddhammo nāma kāyasaṃsaggo" - asaddhamma means bodily contact. Uddisito means: declared.
2009.Ayamattho kena vacanena uddisitoti āha‘‘viññū…pe… sādhakaṃ vacanaṃ ida’’nti.Idaṃ vacananti ‘‘viññū paṭibalo kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjitu’’nti (pāci. 676) idaṃ vacanaṃ.Sādhakaṃpamāṇaṃ.
2009.By which statement is this meaning declared? He says, "viññū...pe...sādhakaṃ vacanaṃ idaṃ" - this statement is a valid statement. Idaṃ vacanaṃ means: this statement, "viññū paṭibalo kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjituṃ" (pāci. 676). Sādhakaṃ means: authoritative.
Aṭṭhavatthukakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Eight Grounds
2010.Avassutā, vajjapaṭicchādikā, ukkhittānuvattikā, aṭṭhavatthukāti imācatassopārājikāpattiyo mahesinā asādhāraṇā bhikkhunīnameva paññattāti yojanā.
2010.These four pārājika offenses—avassutā, vajjapaṭicchādikā, ukkhittānuvattikā, and aṭṭhavatthukā—were uniquely prescribed by the great sage for bhikkhunis alone.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā
Thus ends the Pārājikakathāvaṇṇanā in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī,
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Explanation of Vinayavinicchaya.
Pārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Pārājika Chapter is Complete.
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Saṅghādisesa Chapter
2011.Evaṃ bhikkhunivibhaṅge āgataṃ pārājikavinicchayaṃ vatvā idāni tadanantaruddiṭṭhaṃ saṅghādisesavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī’’tiādi.Ussayavādāti kodhussayamānussayavasena vivadamānā. Tatoyeva aṭṭaṃ karoti sīlenātiaṭṭakārī. Ettha ca‘‘aṭṭo’’ti vohārikavinicchayo vuccati, yaṃ pabbajitā ‘‘adhikaraṇa’’ntipi vadanti. Sabbattha vattabbe mukhamassā atthītimukharī,bahubhāṇīti attho.Yena kenaci narena saddhinti ‘‘gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā’’tiādinā (pāci. 679) dassitena yena kenaci manussena saddhiṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Kirāti padapūraṇe, anussavane vā.
2011.Having stated the decision on the pārājika offenses as it appears in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga in this way, now, to show the decision on the saṅghādisesa offenses that were stated immediately after that, he says, "yā pana bhikkhunī," etc. Ussayavādā means: arguing due to anger, excitement, and pride. Aṭṭakārī means: therefore, one who makes a case with morality. And here, aṭṭo means: a customary decision, which renunciants also call "a legal dispute." Mukharī means: having a mouth in all matters to be spoken; in other words, talkative. Yena kenaci narena saddhiṃ means: with any man shown by "either a householder or the son of a householder," etc. (pāci. 679). Idhā means: in this dispensation. Kirā is only a particle, or hearsay.
2012.Sakkhiṃvāti paccakkhato jānanakaṃ vā. Aṭṭaṃ kātuṃ gacchantiyā pade pade tathā dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2012. Sakkhiṃ vā means: or one who knows directly. The meaning is: there is a dukkaṭa offense at each step when going to make a case.
2013.Vohāriketi vinicchayāmacce.
2013. Vohārike means: one who decides cases.
2014.Anantaranti tassa vacanānantaraṃ.
2014. Anantaraṃ means: immediately after that statement.
2015.Itaroti aṭṭakārako.Pubbasadisova vinicchayoti paṭhamārocane dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyārocane thullaccayanti vuttaṃ hoti.
2015. Itaro means: the one who makes the case. Pubbasadisova vinicchayo means: the decision is just like before; it has been said that there is a dukkaṭa offense for the first report and a thullaccaya offense for the second report.
2016.‘‘Tava, mamāpi ca kathaṃ tuvameva ārocehī’’ti itarenavuttābhikkhunīti yojanā.Yathākāmanti tassā ca attano ca vacane yaṃ paṭhamaṃ vattumicchati, taṃ icchānurūpaṃ ārocetu.
2016.The meaning is: a bhikkhuni vuttā - spoken to - by the other one, saying, "Why do you alone report the matter, which concerns both you and me?" Yathākāmaṃ means: to report whatever she wants to say first, according to her desire, concerning her own statement and that of the other person.
2018-9.Ubhinnampi yathā tathā ārocitakathaṃ sutvāti yojanā.Yathā tathāti pubbe vuttanayena kenaci pakārena.Tehīti vohārikehi.Aṭṭe pana ca niṭṭhiteti aṭṭakārakesu ekasmiṃ pakkhe parājite. Yathāha ‘‘parājite aṭṭakārake aṭṭapariyosānaṃ nāma hotī’’ti.Aṭṭassa pariyosāneti ettha ‘‘tassā’’ti seso. Tassa aṭṭassa pariyosāneti yojanā.
2018-9.The meaning is: having heard the matter reported as it is by both. Yathā tathā means: in some way in the manner previously stated. Tehī means: by the adjudicators. Aṭṭe pana ca niṭṭhite means: when one party in the case is defeated. As he said, "When the one who makes the case is defeated, that is called the conclusion of the case." Aṭṭassa pariyosāne means: here, "tassā" (of that) is understood. The meaning is: at the conclusion of that case.
2020-23.Anāpattivisayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘dūtaṃ vāpī’’tiādi. Paccatthikamanussehi dūtaṃ vāpi pahiṇitvā sayampi vā āgantvā yā pana ākaḍḍhīyatīti yojanā.Aññehīti gāmadārakādīhi aññehi. Kiñci paraṃ anodissāti yojanā. Imissā odissa vutte tehi gahitadaṇḍe tassā ca gīvāti sūcitaṃ hoti. Yā rakkhaṃ yācati,tatthatasmiṃ rakkhāyācane tassā anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā. Aññato sutvāti yojanā.Ummattikādīnanti etthaādi-saddena ādikammikā gahitā.
2020-23.To show the scope of non-offense, he said, "dūtaṃ vāpī," etc. The meaning is: but whichever one is dragged in, either by sending a messenger or coming herself due to hostile men. Aññehī means: by others, such as village boys, etc. Without aiming at anything further. It is implied that if it is said aiming at this, her neck and the sticks taken by them (would be at risk). The meaning is: there, in that request for protection, the non-offense for her is declared, the one who asks for protection. The meaning is: having heard from another. In ‘‘ummattikādīnaṃ’’, the ādi includes one who is in the beginning stages (of insanity).
‘‘sakiriyaṃ ida’’nti.Idaṃsikkhāpadaṃ. Kiriyāya saha vattatītisakiriyaṃaṭṭakaraṇena āpajjanato.‘‘Samuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā ca samuṭṭhānādivinicchayo upalakkhitoti daṭṭhabbo.
‘‘sakiriyaṃ idaṃ’’ti. Idaṃ - this training rule. Sakiriyaṃ - functioning with action, because of incurring an offense through making a case. ‘‘Samuṭṭhānaṃ’’ - with this, it should be seen that the origin etc., are indicated.
Aṭṭakārikākathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Aṭṭakārikā
2024-5.Jānantīti ‘‘sāmaṃ vā jānāti, aññe vā tassā ārocentī’’ti (pāci. 684) vuttanayena jānantī.Corinti yāya pañcamāsagghanakato paṭṭhāya yaṃ kiñci parasantakaṃ avaharitaṃ, ayaṃ corī nāma.Vajjhaṃ viditanti ‘‘tena kammena vadhārahā aya’’nti evaṃ viditaṃ.Saṅghanti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ.Anapaloketvāti anāpucchā.Rājānaṃ vāti raññā anusāsitabbaṭṭhāne taṃ rājānaṃ vā. Yathāha ‘‘rājā nāma yattha rājā anusāsati, rājā apaloketabbo’’ti.Gaṇameva vāti ‘‘tumheva tattha anusāsathā’’ti rājūhi dinnaṃ gāmanigamamallagaṇādikaṃ gaṇaṃ vā.Mallagaṇaṃnāma pānīyaṭṭhapanapokkharaṇikhaṇanādipuññakammaniyutto janasamūho. Eteneva evameva dinnagāmavarā pūgā ca seniyo ca saṅgahitā.Vuṭṭhāpeyyāti upasampādeyya.Kappanti ca vakkhamānalakkhaṇaṃ kappaṃ. Sā corivuṭṭhāpananti sambandho. Upajjhāyā hutvā yā coriṃ upasampādeti, sā bhikkhunīti attho. Upajjhāyassa bhikkhussa dukkaṭaṃ.
2024-5. Jānantī means: knowing in the way stated, "either she knows herself, or others report to her" (pāci. 684). Corī means: whatever belongs to another that has been taken away by someone from five māsa’s worth upwards; this is called a thief. Vajjhaṃ viditaṃ means: known as "she is worthy of execution because of that deed." Saṅghaṃ means: the bhikkhuni sangha. Anapaloketvā means: without asking permission. Rājānaṃ vā means: or that king in a place to be instructed by the king. As he said, "A king is to be consulted where the king instructs." Gaṇameva vā means: or a group, such as a village, town, or malla group, etc., that has been given by the kings, saying "you yourselves instruct there." Mallagaṇaṃ means: a group of people appointed to meritorious deeds, such as establishing drinking water facilities or digging ponds. With this alone, groups and guilds given favors by the village in the same way are included. Vuṭṭhāpeyya means: should ordain. Kappaṃ means: and a suitable thing with the characteristic to be stated. The connection is: that ordination of a thief. The meaning is: the bhikkhuni who ordains a thief, becoming her upajjhāyā. There is a dukkaṭa offense for a bhikkhu who is an upajjhāya.
2026.Pañcamāsagghananti ettha pañcamāsañca pañcamāsagghanakañca pañcamāsagghananti ekadesasarūpekasesanayena pañcamāsassāpi gahaṇaṃ.Atirekagghanaṃ vāpīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
2026.In pañcamāsagghana, the taking of even five māsa is included by way of the ekadesasarūpekasesanaya, where five māsa and five māsa’s worth are the same. Atirekagghanaṃ vāpī - the same method applies here too.
2027.Pabbajitaṃ pubbaṃ yāya sāpabbajitapubbā. Vuttappakāraṃ corakammaṃ katvāpi titthāyatanādīsu yā paṭhamaṃ pabbajitāti attho.
2027. Pabbajitapubbā means: she formerly went forth from somewhere. The meaning is: she formerly went forth in other religions and so on, even having committed the aforementioned act of theft.
2028-30.Idāni pubbapayogadukkaṭādiāpattivibhāgaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vuṭṭhāpeti ca yā cori’’ntiādi. Idha ‘‘upajjhāyā hutvā’’ti seso. Idaṃ kappaṃ ṭhapetvāti yojanā.Sīmaṃ sammannati cāti abhinavaṃ sīmaṃ sammannati, bandhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Assāti bhaveyya. ‘‘Dukkaṭa’’nti iminā ca ‘‘thullaccayaṃ dvaya’’nti iminā ca yojetabbaṃ.
2028-30.Now, to show the division of offenses, beginning with the dukkaṭa offense of prior effort, he says, "vuṭṭhāpeti ca yā cori," etc. Here, "having become an upajjhāyā" is understood. The meaning is: having established this suitable thing. Sīmaṃ sammannati cā means: she designates a new boundary; in other words, she establishes it. Assā means: there would be. This should be connected with "dukkaṭa" and with "thullaccayaṃ dvaya."
Kammanteti upasampadakammassa pariyosāne, tatiyāya kammavācāya yyakārappattāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Kammante means: at the conclusion of the ordination procedure, at the third recital of the kammavācā when yyakāra is obtained.
2031.Ajānantīti coriṃ ajānantī. (Idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ.)
2031. Ajānantī means: not knowing that she is a thief. (This training rule.)
2032.Corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ nāmāti idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma.Vācacittatoti khaṇḍasīmaṃ agantvā karontiyā vācācittehi.Kāyavācādito cevāti gantvā karontiyā kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Yathāha ‘‘kenacideva karaṇīyena pakkantāsu bhikkhunīsu agantvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā nadiṃ vā yathānisinnaṭṭhāneyeva attano nissitakaparisāya saddhiṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā vācācittato samuṭṭhāti, khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā nadiṃ vā gantvā vuṭṭhāpentiyā kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhātī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 683).Kriyākriyanti anāpucchāvuṭṭhāpanavasena kiriyākiriyaṃ.
2032. Corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ nāmā means: this training rule is called the origin of ordaining a thief. Vācacittato means: the origin is from thought and speech for one who does it without going to a limited boundary. Kāyavācādito cevā means: and the origin is from body, speech, and thought for one who does it after going there. As he said, "For bhikkhunis who have departed due to some business or other, if she ordains together with her dependent group in the very place where they are sitting without going to a limited boundary or a river, the origin is from thought and speech; if she ordains after going to a limited boundary or a river, the origin is from body, speech, and thought" (pāci. aṭṭha. 683). Kriyākriyaṃ means: action and non-action due to ordaining without asking permission.
Corivuṭṭhāpanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Corivuṭṭhāpana
2033-4.Gāmantaranti aññaṃ gāmaṃ. Yā ekā sace gaccheyyāti sambandho.Nadīpāranti etthāpi eseva nayo. Nadiyā pāraṃnadīpāraṃ. ‘‘Ekā vā’’ti uparipi yojetabbaṃ.Ohīyeyyāti vinā bhaveyya. Idha ‘‘araññe’’ti seso. Araññalakkhaṇaṃ ‘‘indakhīla’’iccādinā vakkhati. ‘‘Ekā vā rattiṃ vippavaseyya, ekā vā gaṇamhā ohīyeyyā’’ti sikkhāpadakkamo, evaṃ santepi gāthābandhavasena‘‘rattiṃ vippavaseyyā’’ti ante vuttaṃ. Teneva vibhāgavinicchaye desanāruḷhakkameneva ‘‘pureruṇodayāyevā’’tiādiṃ vakkhati. Sā paṭhamāpattikaṃ garukaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā siyāti yojanā. Paṭhamaṃ āpatti etassātipaṭhamāpattiko,vītikkamakkhaṇeyeva āpajjitabboti attho. ‘‘Garukaṃ dhamma’’nti iminā sambandho.Sakagāmā nikkhamantiyāti bhikkhuniyā attano vasanagāmato nikkhamantiyā.
2033-4. Gāmantaraṃ means: another village. The connection is: if she goes alone. Nadīpāraṃ - the same method applies here too. Nadīpāraṃ means: the far side of the river. ‘‘Ekā vā’’ - this should be connected above too. Ohīyeyyā means: she would be without. Here, "araññe" (in the wilderness) is understood. He will state the characteristic of a wilderness with "indakhīla," etc. "Ekā vā rattiṃ vippavaseyya, ekā vā gaṇamhā ohīyeyyā" is the sequence of the training rule; even so, ‘‘rattiṃ vippavaseyyā’’ is stated at the end due to the meter of the verse. Therefore, in the division of decisions, he will state "pureruṇodayāyevā," etc., only in the sequence of the teaching. The meaning is: she has committed a first-offense serious matter. Paṭhamāpattiko means: one for whom it is a first offense; in other words, it should be incurred at the very moment of transgression. This is connected with "garukaṃ dhammaṃ." Sakagāmā nikkhamantiyā means: for a bhikkhuni going out from her own village where she dwells.
2035.Tatosakagāmato.
2035. Tato means: from that own village.
2036-7.Ekena padavārena itarassa gāmassa parikkhepe atikkante, upacārokkame vā thullaccayanti yojanā.Atikkante okkanteti ettha ‘‘parikkhepe upacāre’’ti adhikārato labbhati.
2036-7.The meaning is: there is a thullaccaya offense upon passing beyond the boundary of the other village with one step, or upon entering its vicinity. Atikkante okkante - here, "parikkhepe upacāre" is obtained from the authority (of the Vibhaṅga).
2038-9.Nikkhamitvāti attano paviṭṭhagāmato nikkhamitvā.Ayameva nayoti ‘‘ekena padavārena thullaccayaṃ, dutiyena garukāpattī’’ti ayaṃ nayo.
2038-9. Nikkhamitvā means: having gone out from the village she has entered. Ayameva nayo means: this method - "a thullaccaya offense with one step, a serious offense with the second step."
‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘pākārenā’’ti etthāpivā-saddassa sambandhanīyataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bhikkhuvihārassa bhūmi tāsamakappiyā’’ti vakkhamānattāvihārassa bhūminti bhikkhunivihārabhūmi gahitā.‘‘Kappiyanti paviṭṭhattā’’ti iminā vakkhamānassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti.Koci dosoti thullaccayasaṅghādiseso vuccamāno yo koci doso.
‘‘Tathā’’ti - with this, he shows that the connection of the vā is also necessary in pākārenā. Since it will be said that "the grounds of a bhikkhu's dwelling are unsuitable for them," vihārassa bhūmi means: the grounds of a bhikkhuni's dwelling are taken. ‘‘Kappiyanti paviṭṭhattā’’ - with this, he shows the reason that will be stated. Koci doso means: whatever offense is being stated, namely, thullaccaya or saṅghādisesa.
2040.Tāsanti bhikkhunīnaṃ.‘‘Akappiyā’’ti iminā tatthāpi paviṭṭhāya gāmantarapaccayā āpattisambhavamāha.
2040. Tāsaṃ means: for the bhikkhunis. ‘‘Akappiyā’’ - with this, he states the possibility of an offense being incurred due to going to another village even after entering there.
2041.‘‘Paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmentiyā’’ti (pāci. 692) vuttattā‘‘hatthi…pe… anāpatti siyāpatti, padasā gamane panā’’ti vuttaṃ.
2041.Because it is said, ‘‘When she crosses the first foot’’ (pāci. 692), therefore it is said, "Concerning elephant...pe... no offense; it is an offense if she goes on foot."
2042.‘‘Yaṃ kiñci…pe… āpatti pavisantiyā’’ti vuttassevatthassa upasaṃhārattā na punaruttidoso.
2042.There is no fault of repetition, because it is a conclusion of the same meaning that was stated as ‘‘Whatever…pe… offense when entering.’’
2043-4.Lakkhaṇenupapannāyāti ‘‘nadī nāma timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetvā yattha katthaci uttarantiyā bhikkhuniyā antaravāsako temiyatī’’ti (pāci. 692) vuttalakkhaṇena samannāgatāya nadiyā. Yā pāraṃ tīraṃ gacchatīti yojanā.
2043-4.Accompanied by the characteristics: "A bhikkhuni whose lower garment gets wet when crossing a river which conceals the three sections (of the body) and goes across anywhere" (pāci. 692). The meaning is that she goes from this bank to the other bank of a river that is accompanied by the stated characteristics.
Paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ uddharitvāna tīre ṭhapentiyāti ‘‘idāni padavārena atikkamatī’’ti vattabbakāle paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ ukkhipitvā paratīre ṭhapentiyā. ‘‘Dutiyapāduddhāre saṅghādiseso’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 692)aṭṭhakathāvacanato‘‘atikkame’’ti iminā uddhāro gahito.
When raising the first foot and placing it on the bank: at the time when it can be said, “Now she crosses by foot," when she lifts the first foot and places it on the other bank. Because of the commentary statement, "At the raising of the second foot, it is a saṅghādisesa," (pāci. aṭṭha. 692) the word "crossing" here includes the lifting (of the foot).
2045.Antaranadiyanti nadivemajjhe.Bhaṇḍitvāti kalahaṃ katvā.Orimaṃ tīranti āgatadisāya tīraṃ. Tathā paṭhame thullaccayaṃ, dutiye garu hotīti attho. Iminā sakalena vacanena ‘‘itarissā pana ayaṃ pakkantaṭṭhāne ṭhitā hoti, tasmā paratīraṃ gacchantiyāpi anāpattī’’tiaṭṭhakathāpiulliṅgitā.
2045.In the middle of the river: in the very middle of the river. Having quarreled: having made a dispute. This bank: the bank in the direction from which she came. Thus, in the first instance it is a thullaccaya, in the second it becomes a grave offense, is the meaning. By this entire statement, the commentary is also highlighted: "But for the other one, she is standing in the place where she departed, therefore there is no offense even when going to the other bank."
2046.Rajjuyāti valliādikāya yāya kāyaci rajjuyā.
2046.By a rope: by any rope at all, such as vines.
2047.Pivitunti ettha ‘‘pānīya’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati. Avuttasamuccayatthenaapi-saddena bhaṇḍadhovanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Athāti vākyārambhe nipāto. ‘‘Nahānādikiccaṃ sampādetvā orimameva tīraṃ āgamissāmī’’ti ālayassa vijjamānattā āha‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti.
2047.Let her drink: here, it is obtained from the context of "drinking water". By the word api (also) in the sense of an unstated inclusion, it includes washing bowls, etc. Atha: is a particle at the beginning of a sentence. Because the intention exists, thinking, "Having completed the tasks of bathing, etc., I will come back to this very bank," therefore he says, "It is allowable."
2048.Padasānadiṃ otaritvānāti yojanā. Setuṃ ārohitvā tathā padasā uttarantiyā anāpattīti yojanā.
2048.The meaning is: having descended into the river on foot. It is allowable to cross on foot, similarly, having ascended a bridge, is the meaning.
2049.Gantvānāti ettha ‘‘nadi’’nti seso. Uttaraṇakāle padasā yātīti yojanā.
2049.Having gone: here "river" is the remainder. The meaning is that she goes on foot at the time of crossing.
2050.Vegenāti ekeneva vegena, antarā anivattitvāti attho.
2050.With speed: with a single speed, without turning back in between, is the meaning.
2051.‘‘Nisīditvā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘khandhe vā’’tiādīhipi yojetabbaṃ. Khandhādayo cettha sabhāgānameva gahetabbā.Hatthasaṅghātane vāti ubhohi baddhahatthavalaye vā.
2051."Having sat down": this should be connected with "on the shoulder, etc." Shoulders etc., here, should be understood as similar supports. Or by clasped hands: or by clasped hands bound together.
2052-3.Pāsanti hatthapāsaṃ.‘‘Ābhogaṃ vinā’’ti iminā ‘‘gamissāmī’’ti ābhoge kate ajānantiyā aruṇe uṭṭhitepi anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘sace sajjhāyaṃ vā savanaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci kammaṃ kurumānā ‘purearuṇeyeva dutiyikāya santikaṃ gamissāmī’ti ābhogaṃ karoti, ajānantiyā eva cassā aruṇo uggacchati, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 692). Nānāgabbhe vattabbameva natthīti dassetumāha‘‘ekagabbhepi vā’’ti. Ekagabbhepi vā dutiyikāya hatthapāsaṃ atikkamma aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapentiyā bhikkhuniyā āpatti siyāti yojanā.
2052-3.Within reach: within arm's reach. "Without prearrangement": by this it is shown that if she makes a prearrangement "I will go," but without knowing, dawn breaks, there is no offense. As it was said, "If, while doing recitation or listening to Dhamma or any other work, she makes a prearrangement 'I will go to the second bhikkhuni before dawn,' but dawn rises without her knowing, there is no offense," (pāci. aṭṭha. 692). To show that there is no need to even mention (this offense) in separate dwellings, he says, "Or even in the same dwelling." The meaning is: even in the same dwelling, if the dawn rises after a bhikkhuni has crossed within arm's reach of the second bhikkhuni, there would be an offense.
2054.Dutiyāpāsanti dutiyikāya hatthapāsaṃ. ‘‘Gamissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā gacchantiyā sace aruṇaṃ uṭṭheti, na dosoti yojanā.
2054.Second arm's reach: within the second bhikkhuni's arm's reach. The meaning is: if, having made a prearrangement "I will go," she goes, and dawn rises, there is no fault.
2055-6.Aññattha pañcadhanusatikassa (pārā. 654) pacchimassa āraññakasenāsanassa vuttattā tato nivattetumāha‘‘indakhīlamatikkammā’’tiādi.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Dīpitantiaṭṭhakathāya‘‘araññeti ettha nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 692) evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇamevaaraññaṃdassitanti attho.
2055-6.Because the last forest dwelling of five dhanus (bow-lengths) is stated elsewhere (pārā. 654), to turn back from that, he says, "Having crossed the indakhīla..." etc. Here: in this training rule. Shown: the commentary has shown "forest" by stating, "Here, having gone out, all of this beyond the indakhīla is forest" (pāci. aṭṭha. 692), that such are the characteristics, is the meaning.
‘‘Jahite’’ti idaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘upacāre’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabbo.
"Having abandoned": taking this into consideration, the inflectional change should be made for "vicinity".
2057.Sāṇipākārapākārataruantariteṭhāne asati dassanūpacāre satipi savanūpacāre āpatti hotīti yojanā.
2057.In a place intervening with embankments, enclosure walls, enclosure wall trees, even if there is auditory vicinity but no visual vicinity, there is an offense, is the meaning.
2058-60.Ettha kathanti yattha dūrepi dassanaṃ hoti, evarūpe ajjhokāse āpattiniyamo kathaṃ kātabboti attho. Anekesu ṭhānesu ‘‘savanūpacārātikkame’’ti vuccamānattā tattha lakkhaṇaṃ ṭhapetumāha‘‘magga…pe… evarūpake’’ti. Ettha ‘‘ṭhāne’’ti seso.Kūjantiyāti yathāvaṇṇavavatthānaṃ na hoti, evaṃ abyattasaddaṃ karontiyā.
2058-60.Here, how: in such an open space where seeing is possible even from afar, how should the determination of offense be made? is the meaning. Because in many places it is said, "crossing the auditory vicinity," to establish a characteristic there, he says, "Road...pe...of such a kind." Here, "place" is the remainder. While humming: while making an indistinct sound, such that there is no determination of the arrangement of sounds.
‘‘Bhikkhuniyā garukā hotī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘dutiyikaṃ na pāpuṇissāmī’’ti nirussāhavasena veditabbaṃ. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘ohīyitvātha gacchantī’’tiādi.Etthāti ‘‘gaṇamhā ohīyeyyā’’ti imasmiṃ.
"For the bhikkhuni, it is a grave offense": this should be understood as a lack of enthusiasm, thinking, "I will not reach the second one." Therefore, he will say, "Having fallen behind and then going," etc. Here: in "she might fall behind from the group."
2061.Atha gacchantī ohīyitvāti yojanā. ‘‘Idāni ahaṃ pāpuṇissāmi’’ iti evaṃ saussāhā anubandhati, vaṭṭati, dutiyopacārātikkamepi anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
2061.The meaning is: then, while going, having fallen behind. It is allowable, there is no offense even in crossing the second vicinity, if she follows with enthusiasm, thinking, "Now I will reach it."
2062.‘‘Gacchatu ayaṃ’’ iti ussāhassacchedaṃ katvā ohīnā ce, tassā āpattīti ajjhāhārayojanā.
2062.If she cuts off the effort, thinking, "Let this one go," and falls behind, there is an offense for her, is the meaning of interpretation by supplying the missing words.
2063.Itarāpīti gantuṃ samatthāpi.Ohīyatu ayanti cāti nirussāhappakāro sandassito. Vuttatthameva samatthayitumāha‘‘saussāhā na hoti ce’’ti.
2063.The other one too: even if she is able to go. And "Let her fall behind": the manner of lacking enthusiasm is shown. To support the stated meaning, he says, "If she is not enthusiastic."
2064-5.Purimā ekakaṃ maggaṃ yātīti yojanā. Ekamevaekakaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ekissā itarā pakkantaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, tasmā.Tatthāti tasmiṃ gaṇamhāohīyane.Pi-saddo evakārattho. Anāpatti eva pakāsitāti yojanā.
2064-5.The meaning is: the former one goes on the road alone. Alone is one single person. Therefore: since for one, the other stands in the place of departure. There: in that falling behind from the group. The particle pi has the meaning of "indeed". The meaning is: no offense is indeed proclaimed.
2066-7.Gāmantaragatāyāti gāmasīmagatāya. ‘‘Nadiyā’’ti iminā sambandho.Āpattiyocatassopīti rattivippavāsa gāmantaragamana nadipāragamana gaṇamhāohīyana saṅkhātā catasso saṅghādisesāpattiyo. Gaṇamhāohīyanamūlakāpattiyā gāmato bahi āpajjitabbattepi gāmantarokkamanamūlakāpattiyā antogāme āpajjitabbattepiekakkhaṇeti gāmūpacāraṃ sandhāyāha.
2066-7.Having gone to another village: having gone to the boundary of another village. The connection is with "of the river." The offenses are also four for her: the four saṅghādisesa offenses numbered as nighttime separation, going to another village, crossing a river, and falling behind from the group. Although an offense based on falling behind from the group must be incurred outside the village, and an offense based on entering another village must be incurred inside the village, he speaks of "one moment" with reference to the vicinity of the village.
2068-9.Yā saddhiṃ yātā dutiyikā, sā ca pakkantā vā sace hoti, vibbhantā vā hoti, petānaṃ lokaṃ yātā vā hoti, kālakatā vā hotīti adhippāyo, pakkhasaṅkantā vā hoti, titthāyatanasaṅkantā vā hotīti adhippāyo, naṭṭhā vā hoti, pārājikāpannā vā hotīti adhippāyo. Evarūpe kāle gāmantarokkamanādīni…pe… anāpattīti ñātabbanti yojanā. Ummattikāyapi evaṃ cattāripi karontiyā anāpattīti yojanā.
2068-9.Whatever second bhikkhuni who went together, if she has departed, or is confused, or has gone to the world of the departed, or has died—the meaning is thus—or has gone to another religious faction, or has gone to another sect—the meaning is thus—or is lost, or has incurred a pārājika offense—the meaning is thus. In such a case, entering another village, etc....pe...it should be known that there is no offense, is the meaning. For an insane woman also, there is no offense when doing these four in this way, is the meaning.
2070.‘‘Agāmake araññe’’ti idaṃ gāmābhāvena vuttaṃ, na viñjhāṭavisadisatāya.
2070."In a non-village, in the forest": this is said due to the absence of a village, not due to being similar to a difficult, trackless forest.
2071.Gāmabhāvato nadipāragamanagaṇamhāohīyanāpatti na sambhavati, tassāpi sakagāmattā gāmantaragamanamūlikāpatti ca divasabhāgattā rattivippavāsamūlikāpatti ca na sambhavatīti āha‘‘sakagāme…pe… na vijjare’’ti.Yathākāmanti yathicchitaṃ, dutiyikāya asantiyāpīti attho.
2071.Because of being a single village, the offense of crossing a river and falling behind from the group is not possible; and because for her too, it is her own village, the offense based on going to another village, and the offense based on nighttime separation are not possible, because of being a part of the day, therefore he says, "In one's own village...pe...do not exist." As she likes: as she pleases, even in the absence of a second bhikkhuni, is the meaning.
2072.Samuṭṭhānādayo paṭhamantimavatthunā tulyāti yojanā.
2072.The origin etc., are equal to the first and last object, is the meaning.
Gāmantaragamanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the story of going to another village.
2073.Sīmāsammutiyā cevāti ‘‘samaggena saṅghena dhammena vinayena ukkhittaṃ bhikkhuniṃ kārakasaṅghaṃ anāpucchā tasseva kārakasaṅghassa chandaṃ ajānitvā osāressāmī’’ti navasīmāsammannane ca. Dvīhi kammavācāhi duve thullaccayā hontīti yojanā.
2073.And by the agreement of the boundary: and in the new boundary agreement: "Without asking the group of those who are qualified, who were raised by the Saṅgha in concord, according to the Dhamma and the Vinaya, and without knowing the consent of that same group of qualified ones, I will depose her." Two thullaccaya offenses occur by the two declaration recitations, is the meaning.
2074.Kammassapariyosāneti osāraṇakammassa avasāne.Tikasaṅghādisesanti ‘‘dhammakamme dhammakammasaññā osāreti, āpatti saṅghādisesassa. Dhammakamme vematikā, dhammakamme adhammakammasaññā osāreti, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti (pāci. 697) tikasaṅghādisesaṃ vuttaṃ.Kammanti ca ukkhepanīyakammaṃ.Adhamme tikadukkaṭanti ‘‘adhammakamme dhammakammasaññā osāreti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Adhammakamme vematikā, adhammakammasaññā osāreti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti tikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
2074.At the end of the action: at the end of the deposition action. Triple saṅghādisesa: the triple saṅghādisesa is stated, "In a lawful action, (she) deposes with the perception of a lawful action; there is an offense of saṅghādisesa. In a lawful action, (she) is doubtful; there is an offense of saṅghādisesa. In a lawful action, (she) deposes with the perception of an unlawful action; there is an offense of saṅghādisesa" (pāci. 697). Action means the action of expulsion. Triple dukkaṭa in an unlawful action: the triple dukkaṭa is stated, "In an unlawful action, (she) deposes with the perception of a lawful action; there is an offense of dukkaṭa. In an unlawful action, (she) is doubtful; there is an offense of dukkaṭa. In an unlawful action, (she) deposes with the perception of an unlawful action; there is an offense of dukkaṭa."
2075.Gaṇassāti tasseva kārakagaṇassa.Vatte vā pana vattantinti tecattālīsappabhede nettāravatte vattamānaṃ. Tecattālīsappabhedaṃ panavattakkhandhake(cūḷava. 376) āvi bhavissati.Nettāravatteti kammato nittharaṇassa hetubhūte vatte.
2075.Of the group: of that very same group of qualified ones. Or is occurring in the round of duties: is occurring in the round of duties that has forty-three distinctions, the Netti duties. The forty-three distinctions, however, will become evident in the Chapter on Duties (cūḷava. 376). Netti duties: in duties that are the cause of release from the action.
2077.Osāraṇaṃkriyaṃ. Anāpucchanaṃakriyaṃ.
2077.Deposition is an action. Not asking is a non-action.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
2078-9.Avassutāti methunarāgena tintā. Evamuparipi.‘‘Manussapuggalassā’’ti iminā yakkhādīnaṃ paṭikkhepo. ‘‘Udake…pe… dukkaṭa’’nti vakkhamānattāāmisanti aññatra dantaponā ajjhoharaṇīyassa gahaṇaṃ.Payogatoti payogagaṇanāya.
2078-9.Flowing: wet with lustful passion. And so on above as well. "Of a human individual": by this, the exclusion of yakkhas, etc. Because it will be said, "In water...pe...dukkaṭa," āmisa means taking something other than tooth cleaners, which is suitable for consumption. From the effort: by counting the effort.
2080.Ekatovassuteti pumitthiyā sāmaññena pulliṅganiddeso. Kathametaṃ viññāyatīti? ‘‘Ekatoavassuteti ettha bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo daṭṭhabboti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panetaṃ na vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā sametī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 701) vuttattā viññāyati. Ettha caetaṃ na vuttanti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo daṭṭhabbo’’ti etaṃ niyamanaṃ na vuttaṃ.Tanti taṃ niyametvā avacanaṃ.Pāḷiyā sametīti ‘‘ekatoavassute’’ti (pāci. 701-702) avisesetvā vuttapāḷiyā, ‘‘anavassutoti jānantī paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti (pāci. 703) imāya ca pāḷiyā sameti. Yadi hi puggalassa avassutabhāvo nappamāṇaṃ, kiṃ ‘‘anavassutoti jānantī’’ti iminā vacanena. ‘‘Anāpatti ubho anavassutā honti, anavassutā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ siyā.Ajjhohārapayogesubahūsuthullaccayacayothullaccayānaṃ samūho siyā, payogagaṇanāya bahūni thullaccayāni hontīti adhippāyo.
2080.Flowing on one side: the masculine gender is a general reference to women and men. How is this to be understood? It is understood because it is said in the Mahāpaccari, "Here in 'flowing on one side,' the state of being flowing of the bhikkhuni should be seen." But this is not stated in the Great Commentary; it agrees with the Pāḷi" (pāci. aṭṭha. 701). Here, this is not stated means that this determination "the state of being flowing of the bhikkhuni should be seen" is not stated. That: that not stating, having determined. It agrees with the Pāḷi: with the Pāḷi stated without distinguishing, "flowing on one side" (pāci. 701-702), and with this Pāḷi, "Knowing that it is not flowing, she receives it" (pāci. 703). For if the state of being flowing of the individual were not authoritative, what would be the point of this statement, "knowing that it is not flowing"? It would be enough to say only, "There is no offense when both are not flowing, she receives it when it is not flowing." In the efforts of consuming, in many efforts, a mass of thullaccayas: there would be a collection of thullaccaya offenses, the meaning is that there would be many thullaccaya offenses by counting the efforts.
2081.Sambhave, byabhicāre ca visesanaṃ sātthakaṃ bhavatīti‘‘manussaviggahāna’’nti idaṃ visesanaṃ yakkhapetatiracchānapadehi yojetabbaṃ. Ubhatoavassute sati manussaviggahānaṃ yakkhapetatiracchānānaṃ hatthato ca paṇḍakānaṃ hatthato ca tathāti yojanā.Tathā-saddenettha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci āmisaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, dukkaṭaṃ. Ajjhohārapayogesu thullaccayacayo siyā’’ti yathāvuttamatidisati.
2081.The qualifier becomes meaningful in possibility and transgression, therefore, this qualifier "of human forms" should be connected with the words yakkha, peta, and animal. When flowing on both sides, and from the hand of yakkhas, petas, and animals of human form, and from the hand of eunuchs, it is the same, is the meaning. By the word "tathā" here, it overreaches to what was said earlier, "Whatever āmisa she receives, it is a dukkaṭa. In the efforts of consuming, there would be a mass of thullaccayas."
2082.Etthāti imesu yakkhādīsu. Ekatoavassute sati āmisaṃ paṭiggaṇhantiyā dukkaṭaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu manussāmanussesu ekato, ubhato vā anavassutesu.Udake dantakaṭṭhaketi udakassa, dantakaṭṭhassa ca gahaṇe.Paribhoge cāti paṭiggahaṇe ceva paribhoge ca.
2082.Here: in these yakkhas, etc. When flowing on one side, there is a dukkaṭa offense for the one receiving āmisa. Everywhere: in all humans and non-humans, whether not flowing on one side, or both sides. Water and tooth wood: in the taking of water and tooth wood. And in use: both in receiving and in using.
2083-4.Ubhayāvassutābhāveti bhikkhuniyā, puggalassa ca ubhinnaṃ avassutatte asati yadi āmisaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, na dosoti yojanā.Ayaṃpurisapuggalo.Na ca avassutoti neva avassutoti ñatvā. Yā pana āmisaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, tassā ca ummattikādīnañca anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā. ‘‘Yā gaṇhāti, tassā anāpattī’’ti vuttepi paribhuñjantiyāva anāpattibhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
2083-4.In the absence of flowing on both sides: if there is no flowing state for both, for the bhikkhuni and for the individual, if she receives āmisa, there is no fault, is the meaning. This male individual. And not flowing: having known that he is not flowing. And it is proclaimed that there is no offense for her who takes āmisa, and for the insane one, etc., is the meaning. Even if it is said, "There is no offense for her who takes it," it should be seen that the state of no offense is only for the one who uses it.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
2085.Uyyojaneti ‘‘kiṃ te ayye eso purisapuggalo karissati avassuto vā anavassuto vā, yato tvaṃ anavassutā, iṅgha ayye yaṃ te eso purisapuggalo deti khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā, taṃ tvaṃ sahatthā paṭiggahetvā khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti (pāci. 705) vuttanayena niyojane.Ekissāti uyyojikāya.Itarissāti uyyojitāya.Paṭiggaheti avassutassa hatthato āmisapaṭiggahaṇe.Dukkaṭāni cāti uyyojikāya dukkaṭāni.Bhogesūti uyyojitāya tathā paṭiggahitassa āmisassa paribhogesu.Thullaccayagaṇo siyāti uyyojikāya thullaccayasamūho siyāti attho.
2085.In instigating: in instructing in the manner said, "What will this male individual do for you, Venerable, whether he is flowing or not flowing, since you are not flowing? Come, Venerable, whatever this male individual gives you, whether it is something to eat or something to consume, having taken it with your own hand, eat or consume it" (pāci. 705). For one: for the instigator. For the other: for the one instigated. In receiving: in receiving āmisa from the hand of the one who is flowing. And dukkaṭa offenses: dukkaṭa offenses for the instigator. In the uses: in the uses of the āmisa thus received for the one instigated. There would be a group of thullaccayas: the meaning is that there would be a collection of thullaccaya offenses for the instigator.
2086-7.Bhojanassāvasānasminti uyyojitāya bhojanapariyante.Saṅghādisesatāti uyyojikāya saṅghādisesāpatti hoti.
2086-7.At the end of the meal: at the end of the meal for the one instigated. Saṅghādisesa state: for the instigator, there is a saṅghādisesa offense.
Yakkhādīnanti etthaādi-saddena petapaṇḍakatiracchānagatā gahitā.Tatheva purisassa cāti avassutassa manussapurisassa. ‘‘Gahaṇe uyyojane’’ti padacchedo.Gahaṇeti uyyojitāya gahaṇe.Uyyojaneti uyyojikāya attano uyyojane.Tesanti udakadantaponānaṃ.Paribhogeti uyyojitāya paribhuñjane.Dukkaṭaṃ parikittitanti uyyojikāya dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
Of yakkhas, etc.: here, the word ādi includes petas, eunuchs, and animals. Likewise, and of a male: of a human male who is flowing. "Receiving, instigating" is the word division. In receiving: in the receiving of the one instigated. In instigating: in the instigating of the instigator herself. Of those: of water and tooth cleaners. In use*: in the use of the one instigated. Dukkaṭa is spoken: a dukkaṭa* offense is stated for the instigator.
2088.Sesassāti udakadantaponato aññassa paribhuñjitabbāmisassa.‘‘Gahaṇuyyojane’’tiādi vuttanayameva.
2088. Sesassā: Sesassa means meat that is suitable to be eaten, excluding that which has been bitten by teeth or licked with the tongue. ‘‘Gahaṇuyyojane’’tiādi: "In refusing a gift," etc., is as previously stated.
2089-90.Yā panabhikkhunī ‘‘anavassuto’’ti ñatvā uyyojeti, ‘‘kupitā vā na paṭiggaṇhatī’’ti uyyojeti, ‘‘kulānuddayatā vāpi na paṭiggaṇhatī’’ti uyyojeti, tassā ca ummattikādīnañca anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā. Yathāha ‘‘anāpatti ‘anavassuto’ti jānantī uyyojeti, ‘kupitā na paṭiggaṇhatī’ti uyyojeti, ‘kulānuddayatāya na paṭiggaṇhatī’ti uyyojetī’’tiādi (pāci. 708).
2089-90. Yā pana: The interpretation is that if a bhikkhuni, knowing that a nun is "not rained upon" (i.e., has enough), refuses (a gift); if she refuses because "she is angry and does not accept it"; if she refuses because "she is without compassion for the family," there is no offense for her and for those who are insane, etc. As it was said: "There is no offense if, knowing she is 'not rained upon,' she refuses; if she refuses because 'she is angry and does not accept it'; if she refuses because 'she does not accept due to lack of compassion for the family,'" etc. (pāci. 708).
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
Sixth.
2091.Sattamanti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī kupitā anattamanā evaṃ vadeyya buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (pāci. 710) sattamasikkhāpadañca.Aṭṭhamanti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe paccākatā’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (pāci. 716) aṭṭhamasikkhāpadañca.
2091. Sattamaṃ: Sattamaṃ refers to the seventh training rule that begins with, "Whatever bhikkhuni, being angry and displeased, should say, ‘I renounce the Buddha,’" etc. (pāci. 710). Aṭṭhamaṃ: Aṭṭhamaṃ refers to the eighth training rule that begins with, "Whatever bhikkhuni, having been accused in any matter," etc. (pāci. 716).
Sattamaṭṭhamāni.
Seventh and Eighth.
2092.Navameti ‘‘bhikkhuniyo paneva saṃsaṭṭhā viharantī’’tiādisikkhāpade (pāci. 722) ca.Dasameti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya saṃsaṭṭhāva ayye tumhe viharatha, mā tumhe nānā viharitthā’’tiādisikkhāpade (pāci. 728) ca.
2092. Navame: Navame refers to the training rule beginning with "If bhikkhunis live together in close association," etc. (pāci. 722). Dasame: Dasame refers to the training rule beginning with "Whatever bhikkhuni should say, ‘Live together in close association, venerable ones; do not live separately,’" etc. (pāci. 728).
Navamadasamāni.
Ninth and Tenth.
2093.Tena mahāvibhaṅgāgatenaduṭṭhadosadvayenaca tattheva āgatena tena sañcarittasikkhāpadena cāti imehi tīhi saddhiṃ idhāgatāni cha sikkhāpadānīti evaṃ nava paṭhamāpattikā.Itobhikkhunivibhaṅgatocattāriyāvatatiyakānitatomahāvibhaṅgatocattāriyāvatatiyakānīti evaṃaṭṭhayāvatatiyakāni, purimāni nava cāti sattarasa saṅghādisesasikkhāpadāni mayā cettha dassitānīti adhippāyo.
2093. Thus, with these three—the duṭṭhadosadvayena that comes in the Mahāvibhaṅga and the sañcaritta training rule that comes in the same place—the six training rules that appear here make nine paṭhamāpattika. Ito: From this Bhikkhunivibhaṅga, cattāri: four yāvatatiyakāni; tato: from that Mahāvibhaṅga, cattāri: four yāvatatiyakāni; thus, these aṭṭha: eight yāvatatiyakāni, and the nine earlier ones, make seventeen Saṅghādisesa training rules that I have shown here, is the idea.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Saṅghādisesa Commentary in the Vinayatthasārasandīpani, a commentary on Vinaya decisions.
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Saṅghādisesa Commentary is complete.
Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
The Nissaggiya Commentary
2094-5.Evaṃ sattarasasaṅghādisese dassetvā idāni tadanantarāni nissaggiyāni dassetumāha‘‘adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ patta’’ntiādi.‘‘Adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ patta’’nti iminā padena kenaci kāraṇena anadhiṭṭhānupage patte anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Tassā’’ti ta-saddāpekkhāyabhikkhunīti ettha ‘‘yā’’ti labbhati.Pattasannidhikāraṇāti anadhiṭṭhāya, avikappetvā ekarattampi pattassa nikkhittakāraṇā.
2094-5. Having shown the seventeen Saṅghādisesas in this way, now to show the Nissaggiyas that immediately follow, he says, ‘‘adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ patta’’tiādi: "Adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ patta": with this term, he indicates that there is no offense for a bowl that has not been taken into possession (adhiṭṭhāna) for any reason. ‘‘Tassā’’ti: in relation to the word ta- (that), bhikkhunī (bhikkhuni) is obtained for "yā" (who). Pattasannidhikāraṇā: Pattasannidhikāraṇā means because of putting away the bowl, without resolving or deciding, even for one night.
2096.Idhaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade seso sabbo vinicchayo kathāmaggoti yojanā, avasesasabbavinicchayakathāmaggoti attho.Pattasikkhāpadeti mahāvibhaṅgapaṭhamapattasikkhāpade.
2096. Idha: Here, in this training rule, seso sabbo vinicchayo kathāmaggoti yojanā means the remainder is the entire discussion, the path of the story; the meaning is the path of the entire remaining discussion. Pattasikkhāpade: Pattasikkhāpade means in the first pāṭimokkha training rule of the Mahāvibhaṅga.
2097.Visesovavisesatā.
2097. Visesova: visesatā means specialty.
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
2098.Akāleti ‘‘anatthatakathine vihāre ekādasa māsā, atthatakathine vihāre satta māsā’’ti (pāci. 740 atthato samānaṃ) evaṃ vutte akāle. Vikappantaraṃ dassetumāha‘‘dinnaṃ kālepi kenacī’’tiādi. Vuttavipariyāyena kālaniyamo veditabbo. Kenaci akāle yaṃ cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, kālepi yaṃ cīvaraṃ ādissa dinnaṃ, taṃ akālacīvaraṃ nāmāti yojanā. Ādissa dānappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘sampattā bhājentū’’ti.Niyāmitanti ‘‘sampattā bhājentū’’ti evaṃ vatvā dinnañca ‘‘idaṃ gaṇassa, idaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti vatvā vā dātukāmatāya pādamūle ṭhapetvā vā dinnañca ādissa dinnaṃ nāmāti attho. Yathāha ‘‘sampattā bhājentū’ti vatvā vā ‘idaṃ gaṇassa, idaṃ tumhākaṃ dammī’ti vatvā vā dātukamyatāya pādamūle ṭhapetvā vā dinnampi ādissa dinnaṃ nāma hotī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 740).
2098. Akāle: Akāle means out of season, as said, "Eleven months in a residence without Kathina laying, seven months in a residence with Kathina laying" (pāci. 740 meaning is similar). To show an alternative option, he says ‘‘dinnaṃ kālepi kenacī’’tiādi: "Dinnaṃ kālepi kenacī’’tiādi." The rule for timeliness should be understood in the opposite way to what was said. Whatever robe is given out of season by someone, and whatever robe is given having been set aside even in season, that is called an out-of-season robe, is the interpretation. To show the way of setting aside for the gift, he says, ‘‘sampattā bhājentū’’ti: "Sampattā bhājentū’’ti." Niyāmitaṃ: Niyāmitaṃ means having said, "Let those who arrive share it," or having said, "I will give this to the Saṅgha, I will give this to you," or having placed it at the foot with the intention of giving, it is called setting aside the gift. As it was said, "Having said, 'Let those who arrive share it,' or having said, 'I will give this to the Saṅgha, I will give this to you,' or even having placed it at the foot with the intention of giving, it is called setting aside the gift" (pāci. aṭṭha. 740).
2099.Akālacīvaranti vuttappakāraṃ akālacīvaraṃ.
2099. Akālacīvaraṃ: Akālacīvaraṃ means an out-of-season robe of the type described.
2100.Attanā paṭiladdhanti tato yaṃ cīvaraṃ attanā vassaggena paṭiladdhaṃ. Nissajjitvā paṭiladdhakāle kattabbavidhiṃ dassetumāha‘‘labhitvā…pe… niyojaye’’ti.Yathādāne niyojayeti yathā dāyakena dinnaṃ, tathā upanetabbaṃ, akālacīvarapakkheyeva ṭhapetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
2100. Attanā paṭiladdhaṃ: Attanā paṭiladdhaṃ means whatever robe is obtained by oneself within the rainy season. To show the procedure to be done at the time of obtaining it back after forfeiting it, he says, ‘‘labhitvā…pe… niyojaye’’ti: "labhitvā…pe… niyojaye’’ti." Yathādāne niyojaye: Yathādāne niyojaye means it should be presented in the way that it was given by the donor; it has been said that it should be kept only in the category of out-of-season robes.
2101.Tassāti ‘‘yathādāne niyojaye’’ti vacanassa. Vinayakammaṃ katvā paṭiladdhampi taṃ puna sevituṃ na ca vaṭṭatīti ayamadhippāyoti yojanā.
2101. Tassā: Tassā (of that) refers to the statement "one should allocate as it was given." The interpretation is that even if it is received back after performing the Vinaya procedure, it is still not proper to use it again.
2102.Kālacīvare akālavatthasaññāya dukkaṭanti yojanā.Ubhayatthapīti akālacīvarepi kālacīvarepi. Vematikāya tathā dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2102. There is a dukkaṭa for thinking that an in-season robe is an out-of-season robe, is the interpretation. Ubhayatthapī: Ubhayatthapī means in both, in an out-of-season robe and an in-season robe. There is a dukkaṭa for doubt, is the interpretation.
2103.Ubhayatthapicīvarekālacīvare ca akālacīvare cāti ubhayacīvarepi kālacīvarasaññāya bhājāpentiyā nadosoti yojanā. Sacittakasamuṭṭhānattayaṃ sandhāyāha‘‘tisamuṭṭhānatā’’ti.
2103. Ubhayatthapi cīvare: Ubhayatthapi cīvare means there is no offense for sharing out the two types of robes, in-season robes and out-of-season robes, thinking of them as in-season robes, is the interpretation. Referring to the three types of arising with intention, he says ‘‘tisamuṭṭhānatā’’ti: "tisamuṭṭhānatā’’ti."
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
2104.Sace sayaṃ acchindatiaññāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ cīvaraṃ parivattetvā pacchā ‘‘tuyhaṃ cīvaraṃ tvameva gaṇha, mayhaṃ cīvaraṃ dehī’’ti evaṃ yadi sayaṃ acchindati. Ettha ‘‘sakasaññāyā’’ti seso. Sakasaññāya gahitattā pācittiyaṃ, dukkaṭañca vuttaṃ, itarathā bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo.
2104. Sace sayaṃ acchindati: Sace sayaṃ acchindati means if, having exchanged a robe with another bhikkhuni, one then forcibly takes it back, saying, "You take your robe, give me my robe." Here, "sakasaññāyā" (with the perception that it is one's own) is the remainder. Because it was taken with the perception that it is one's own, a pācittiya and a dukkaṭa were stated; otherwise, it should be made using the value of the item.
2105.Itaresūti abandhanañca āṇattibahuttañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tenāha‘‘vatthūnaṃ payogassa vasā siyā’’ti.
2105. Itaresū: Itaresū includes both not binding and an abundance of instructions. Therefore, he says ‘‘vatthūnaṃ payogassa vasā siyā’’ti: "vatthūnaṃ payogassa vasā siyā’’ti."
2106.‘‘Tikapācittī’’ti idamapekkhitvā ‘‘uddiṭṭhā’’ti sambandhanīyaṃ, upasampannāya upasampannasaññā, vematikā, anupasampannasaññāti etāsaṃ vasena tikapācitti vuttāti attho.Aññasmiṃ parikkhāreti upasampannānupasampannānaṃ aññasmiṃ parikkhāre.Itarissāti anupasampannāya.Tikadukkaṭanti anupasampannāya upasampannasaññāvematikāanupasampannasaññānaṃ vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ.
2106. ‘‘Tikapācittī’’ti: This should be connected to "uddiṭṭhā" (specified) in relation to this; it means that a triple pācittiya was stated based on the perception that an ordained bhikkhuni is ordained, doubt, and the perception that she is not ordained. Aññasmiṃ parikkhāre: Aññasmiṃ parikkhāre means in another item of equipment, for those who are ordained and unordained. Itarissā: Itarissā means for the unordained. Tikadukkaṭaṃ: Tikadukkaṭaṃ means a triple dukkaṭa was specified based on the perception that the unordained is ordained, doubt, and the perception that she is not ordained.
2107.Tāya vā dīyamānaṃtāya aññāya bhikkhuniyā duṭṭhāya vā tuṭṭhāya vā dīyamānaṃ gaṇhantiyā, tassā vissāsameva vā gaṇhantiyā anāpattīti yojanā.‘‘Tisamuṭṭhānatā matā’’ti idaṃ vuttatthameva.
2107. Tāya vā dīyamānaṃ: Tāya vā dīyamānaṃ means there is no offense for accepting something being given by that other bhikkhuni, whether angry or pleased, or even only accepting relying on her confidence, is the interpretation. ‘‘Tisamuṭṭhānatā matā’’ti: "‘‘Tisamuṭṭhānatā matā’’ti" this is the same as what was said.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
2108.Yā pana bhikkhunī ‘‘kiṃ te, ayye, aphāsu, kiṃ āharīyatū’’ti vuttā aññaṃ viññāpetvā taṃ āhaṭaṃ paṭikkhipitvā tañca aññañca gaṇhitukāmā sace aññaṃ viññāpeti, tassā viññattidukkaṭaṃ, lābhā nissaggiyaṃ siyāti sādhippāyayojanā. Viññattiyā dukkaṭaṃviññattidukkaṭaṃ.
2108. If a bhikkhuni, having been told, "What is troubling you, venerable one? What should be brought?" requests something else, and having rejected that brought thing, if she wants to accept that and also something else, if she requests something else, there is a dukkaṭa for the request, and if there is gain, it becomes subject to forfeiture, is the interpretation with a purpose. The dukkaṭa for the request is viññattidukkaṭaṃ: viññattidukkaṭaṃ.
2109-11.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘aññe aññasaññā, aññe vematikā, aññe anaññasaññā aññaṃ viññāpetvā aññaṃ viññāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 751) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Anaññe dvikadukkaṭanti anaññe aññasaññāya, vematikāya ca vasena dvikadukkaṭaṃ.‘‘Anaññenaññasaññāyā’’tiādinā anāpattivisayo dassito. ‘‘Anaññe anaññasaññāyā’’ti padacchedo. Anaññe anaññasaññāya viññāpentiyā anāpatti.Tasmiṃpaṭhamaviññāpite appahonte vā taññeva vā viññāpentiyā anāpatti. Aññenapi atthe sati tena saddhiṃ aññaṃ viññāpentiyā anāpatti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace paṭhamaṃ sappi viññattaṃ, ‘‘āmakamaṃsaṃ pacitabba’’nti ca vejjena vuttattā telena attho hoti, tato ‘‘telenāpi me attho’’ti evaṃ aññañca viññāpetīti. Ānisaṃsañca dassetvā tato aññaṃ viññāpentiyāpi anāpattīti ñātabbanti yojanā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace kahāpaṇassa sappi ābhataṃ hoti, iminā mūlena diguṇaṃ telaṃ labbhati, telenāpi ca idaṃ kiccaṃ nippajjati, tasmā telamāharāti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā viññāpetīti.
2109-11. Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ means the triple pācittiya was stated, "If she requests one thing thinking it is something else, if she is doubtful about what it is, if she requests one thing without perceiving it as something else, if she then requests something else, it is subject to forfeiture, requiring expiation" (pāci. 751). Anaññe dvikadukkaṭaṃ: Anaññe dvikadukkaṭaṃ means a double dukkaṭa for not different, based on perceiving something different or based on doubt. ‘‘Anaññenaññasaññāyā’’tiādinā: "‘‘Anaññenaññasaññāyā’’tiādinā" the scope of non-offense is shown. "Anaññe anaññasaññāyā" is the word division. There is no offense for requesting something not different with the perception of not different. Tasmiṃ: Tasmiṃ means there is no offense for requesting that same thing if that which was first requested is not available or not sufficient. There is no offense for requesting something else along with that even if there is a need. This is what was said—if ghee was first requested, and because the doctor said, "Raw meat should be cooked," there is a need for oil; then she requests something else in this way: "I also need oil." It should be known that there is also no offense for showing the benefit and then requesting something else, is the interpretation. This is what was said—if ghee could be brought for a kahāpaṇa, and twice as much oil can be obtained with this cost, and this task can be accomplished with oil, therefore, showing the benefit in this way, "Bring oil," she requests.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
2112-3.Pubbaṃ aññaṃ cetāpetvāti yojanā, attano kappiyabhaṇḍena ‘‘idaṃ nāma āharā’’ti pubbaṃ aññaṃ parivattāpetvāti attho.Evanti ettha ‘‘vutte’’ti seso. Dhanena nibbattaṃdhaññaṃ,attano dhanena nipphāditattā telādi idha ‘‘dhañña’’nti adhippetaṃ, na vīhādi. Evaṃ vutte mayhaṃ aññaṃ dhaññaṃ ānetvā deti iti saññāya pacchā aññaṃ cetāpeyyāti yojanā, na me iminā attho, aññaṃ āharāti vutte idañca datvā aññañca āharitvā detīti saññāya ‘‘na me idaṃ ruccati, aññaṃ āharā’’ti pacchā aññaṃ parivattāpeyyāti attho.Cetāpanapayogenāti āṇattāya cetāpanavasena.Mūlaṭṭhāyāti āṇāpikāya. Tena ca aññena vā mūlena ābhataṃ hotu, tassa lābhe nissaggiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2112-3. Pubbaṃ aññaṃ cetāpetvāti yojanā: the meaning is previously having something else ordered, having something else exchanged beforehand with one's own allowable item, saying "Bring such-and-such." Evaṃ: Evaṃ here, "vutte" (having been said) is the remainder. Dhanena nibbattaṃ: dhaññaṃ: dhaññaṃ, because it is produced from one's own money, oil etc., is here intended as "dhañña," not rice etc. Having been said in this way, if she later has something else ordered with the intention of bringing me something else of the same grain, is the interpretation; if it is said, "I do not need this," having given this and also bringing and giving something else, with the intention of doing so, the meaning is if she later has something else exchanged, saying, "I do not like this, bring something else." Cetāpanapayogenā: Cetāpanapayogenā means by means of ordering due to instruction. Mūlaṭṭhāyā: Mūlaṭṭhāyā means to the person who does the ordering. Whether it is brought with that money or with other money, there is forfeiture with its gain, is the interpretation.
2114.Sesanti tikapācittiyādikaṃ vinicchayavisesaṃ.
2114. Sesaṃ: Sesaṃ means the remaining special judgments such as the triple pācittiya, etc.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
2115-6.Aññadatthāya dinnenāti upāsakehi ‘‘evarūpaṃ gahetvā bhājetvā paribhuñjathā’’ti aññassatthāya dinnena.‘‘Saṅghikena parikkhārenā’’ti iminā sambandho.Parikkhārenāti kappiyabhaṇḍena.Saṅghikenāti saṅghassa pariccattena.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Tassāti yāya cetāpitaṃ.Nissaggiyaṃ siyāti ettha nissaṭṭhapaṭiladdhaṃ yathādāne upanetabbanti vattabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭilabhitvā yathādāne upanetabba’’nti (pāci. 761). Idaṃ heṭṭhā vuttatthādhippāyameva.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. ‘‘Anaññadatthike aññadatthikasaññā, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anaññadatthike vematikā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā āha‘‘anaññadatthike niddiṭṭhaṃdvikadukkaṭa’’nti. Iminā ca ‘‘aññadatthike tikapācittiya’’nti idaṃ vuttameva. ‘‘Aññadatthike aññadatthikasaññā, vematikā, anaññadatthikasaññā aññaṃ cetāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 761) hi vuttaṃ.
2115-6. Aññadatthāya dinnenā: Aññadatthāya dinnenā means by what was given by the lay followers for another purpose, saying, "Take this kind of thing, divide it, and use it." ‘‘Saṅghikena parikkhārenā’’: this is the connection with this. Parikkhārenā: Parikkhārenā means with an allowable item. Saṅghikenā: Saṅghikenā means with what has been relinquished to the Saṅgha. Idhā: Idhā means in this dispensation. Tassā: Tassā means by whom it was ordered. Nissaggiyaṃ siyā: Nissaggiyaṃ siyā: here, it should be said that what is forfeited should be received back and allocated as it was given. As it was said, "Having forfeited it, having received it back, it should be allocated as it was given" (pāci. 761). This is indeed with the same intention as what was said below. Etthā: Etthā means in this training rule. Because it was said, "With regard to something for another purpose, if there is the perception of something for a different purpose, there is an offense of a dukkaṭa. With regard to something for another purpose, if there is doubt, there is an offense of a dukkaṭa," he says ‘‘anaññadatthike niddiṭṭhaṃ dvikadukkaṭa’’nti: "‘‘anaññadatthike niddiṭṭhaṃ dvikadukkaṭa’’nti." And with this, "for something for a different purpose, there is a triple pācittiya," has already been stated. For it was said, "With regard to something for a different purpose, if there is the perception of something for a different purpose, doubt, the perception of something not for a different purpose, she has something else ordered, it is subject to forfeiture, requiring expiation" (pāci. 761).
2117.Sesakanti yadatthāya dinnaṃ, taṃ cetāpetvā āharitvā atirittaṃ mūlaṃ aññadatthāya upanentiyā anāpattīti yojetabbaṃ.Sāmike pucchitvāti ‘‘tumhehi cīvaratthāya dinnaṃ, amhākañca cīvaraṃ saṃvijjati, telādīhi pana attho’’ti evaṃ sāmike pucchitvā.Tanti taṃ cetāpannaṃ.Āpadāsūti bhikkhunīhi vihāraṃ pahāya gamanārahamupaddavo gahito. Yathāha ‘‘āpadāsūti tathārūpesu upaddavesu bhikkhuniyo vihāraṃ chaḍḍetvā pakkamanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu yaṃ vā taṃ vā cetāpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 762).
2117. Sesakaṃ: Sesakaṃ means it should be connected that there is no offense for allocating the remaining cost for another purpose, having had ordered and brought what it was given for. Sāmike pucchitvā: Sāmike pucchitvā means having asked the owners, "You gave it for the purpose of robes, and we have robes, but there is a need for oil etc." Taṃ: Taṃ means that which was ordered. Āpadāsū: Āpadāsū means the crisis when the bhikkhunis leave the monastery having been overcome. As it was said, "Āpadāsu means in such crises, bhikkhunis leave, abandoning the monastery; in such crises, it is permissible to have this or that ordered" (pāci. aṭṭha. 762).
2118.Sayaṃ yācitakaṃ vināti ‘‘saṃyācitaka’’nti padaṃ vinā, ettakameva visadisanti vuttaṃ hoti.
2118. Sayaṃ yācitakaṃ vinā: Sayaṃ yācitakaṃ vinā means it was said that it is only different by so much, without the word "saṃyācitaka".
Chaṭṭhasattamāni.
Sixth and Seventh.
2119.Adhikavacanaṃ dassetumāha‘‘mahājanikasaññācikenā’’ti.Padatādhikāti padamevapadatā. Mahājanikenāti gaṇassa pariccattena.Saññācikenāti sayaṃ yācitakena.
2119. To show the additional meaning, he says ‘‘mahājanikasaññācikenā’’ti: "‘‘mahājanikasaññācikenā’’ti." Padatādhikā: Padatādhikā means the word itself is padatā. Mahājanikenā: Mahājanikenā means with what has been relinquished to the community. Saññācikenā: Saññācikenā means with what was requested by oneself.
2120.Anantarasamā matāti idha ‘‘puggalikenā’’ti padaṃ vinā samuṭṭhānādinā saddhiṃ sabbe vinicchayā anantarasikkhāpadasadisā matāti attho. ‘‘Yā pana bhikkhunī aññadatthikena parikkhārena aññuddisikena puggalikenā’’ti hi sikkhāpadaṃ.Puggalikenāti ekabhikkhuniyā pariccattena. ‘‘Kiñcipī’’ti likhanti.‘‘Kocipī’’ti pāṭho sundaro ‘‘viseso’’ti iminā tulyādhikaraṇattā.
2120. Anantarasamā matā: Anantarasamā matā means here, without the term "puggalikenā" (for an individual), all the judgments together with the origination etc. are considered the same as the immediately preceding training rule. For the training rule is, "Whatever bhikkhuni should have something for a different purpose ordered with equipment that is for a different direction, for an individual." Puggalikenā: Puggalikenā means with what has been relinquished to one bhikkhuni. Kiñcipī: Kiñcipī is written. ‘‘Kocipī’’: "‘‘Kocipī’’:" this reading is nice, because of the equality of reference with the word "viseso" (difference).
Aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.
Eighth, Ninth, and Tenth.
Paṭhamo vaggo.
First Chapter.
2121-2.Cattāri kaṃsāni samāhaṭāni, catunnaṃ kaṃsānaṃ samāhāro vācatukkaṃsaṃ,catukkaṃsato atirekaṃ atirekacatukkaṃsaṃ, tena atirekacatukkaṃsagghanakaṃ pāvuraṇamāha, upacārena‘‘atirekacatukkaṃsa’’nti vuttaṃ. Kaṃsaparimāṇaṃ panettha sayameva vakkhati ‘‘kahāpaṇacatukkaṃ tu, kaṃso nāma pavuccatī’’ti. Tasmā atirekasoḷasakahāpaṇagghanakanti attho.Garupāvuraṇanti sītakāle pārupitabbapāvuraṇaṃ.Cetāpeyyāti viññāpeyya. Cattāri saccāni samāhaṭāni, catunnaṃ vā saccānaṃ samāhārocatusaccaṃ,taṃ pakāseti sīlenāticatusaccappakāsī,tena, catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ niddisakena sammāsambuddhena.Payogeti ‘‘dehī’’ti evaṃ viññāpanapayoge.Lābheti paṭilābhe.
2121-2.Four kaṃsa measures were collected; a collection of four kaṃsa measures is catukkaṃsaṃ. More than catukkaṃsaṃ is atirekacatukkaṃsaṃ. She asks for a robe worth more than atirekacatukkaṃsaṃ, and thus it is said by way of hyperbole, "atirekacatukkaṃsa". The measure of a kaṃsa here, he himself will state, "Indeed, four kahāpaṇa coins are said to be a kaṃsa." Therefore, the meaning is a price exceeding sixteen kahāpaṇa coins. Garupāvuraṇa means a thick robe to be worn in the cold season. Cetāpeyyā means she should request. Four truths are collected; a collection of four truths is catusaccaṃ. He reveals that with virtue; therefore, he is catusaccappakāsī, that is, the Perfectly Enlightened One who points out the four Noble Truths. Payoge means in the act of requesting, "Give me." Lābhe means in receiving.
catukkaṃ,kahāpaṇānaṃ catukkaṃ kahāpaṇacatukkaṃ. Kahāpaṇo cettha taṃtaṃkāle, taṃtaṃpadese ca vohārūpago gahetabbo. Imā vuttappakārā nissaggiyāvasānāpattiyo ‘‘ñātakānañca santake’’ti anāpattivisaye vakkhamānattā ‘‘yadā yena attho, tadā taṃ vadeyyāthā’’ti evaṃ niccapavāraṇaṃ akatvā tasmiṃ kāle kismiñci guṇe pasīditvā ‘‘vadeyyātha yena attho’’ti evaṃ pavāritaṭṭhāne sambhavantīti daṭṭhabbā.
catukkaṃ, a set of four, kahāpaṇānaṃ catukkaṃ is a set of four kahāpaṇa coins. Here, a kahāpaṇa should be understood as being in use at that time and in that place. These offenses ending in expiation stated in the manner described above occur in a place where invitation (pavāraṇa) is given in this way: "Speak when there is a need," being pleased with some quality at that time, without making a constant invitation (niccapavāraṇaṃ) "In the possession of relatives," should be seen because it will be discussed in the non-offense section, "When there is a need for something, at that time you should ask".
2123-5.Ūnakacatukkaṃse atirekasaññā, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Ūnakacatukkaṃse vematikā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā āha‘‘ūnake tu catukkaṃse, uddiṭṭhaṃ dvikadukkaṭa’’nti. Iminā ‘‘atirekacatukkaṃse atirekasaññā, vematikā, ūnakasaññā cetāpeti, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti tikapācittiyañca dassitaṃ hoti.
2123-5.Perception of 'more' in something less than catukkaṃsa, there is an offense of wrong-doing. If there is doubt in something less than catukkaṃsa, there is an offense of wrong-doing," he says, "ūnake tu catukkaṃse, uddiṭṭhaṃ dvikadukkaṭa," "But in something less than catukkaṃsa, two wrong-doings are declared." By this, the three pācittiyas are also shown: "Perception of 'more' in something more than catukkaṃsa, doubt, requesting with the perception of 'less', there is forfeiture and expiation."
Garukanti garupāvuraṇaṃ.Tadūnaṃ vāti catukkaṃsato ūnakaṃ vā.Ñātakānañcāti etthaca-saddena pavāritānaṃ saṅgaho. Yathāha anāpattivāre ‘‘ñātakānaṃ, pavāritāna’’nti (pāci. 787). Ettha ca ‘‘atirekacatukkaṃsampī’’ti vattabbaṃ‘‘tadūnaṃ vā’’ti iminā catukkaṃsūnassa vuttattā.‘‘Appameva vā’’ti iminā atirekacatukkaṃsepi mahagghataraṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
Garuka means a thick robe. Tadūnaṃ vā means less than catukkaṃsa. Ñātakānañcāti Here, the ca includes those who have been invited (pavāritānaṃ). As it says in the non-offense section, "To relatives, to those who have been invited" (pāci. 787). And here, "atirekacatukkaṃsampī" should be stated, because the lack of catukkaṃsa has been stated by "tadūnaṃ vā". By "Appameva vā" it should be understood that even in something more than catukkaṃsa, something very expensive is stated.
Ekādasamaṃ.
Eleventh.
2126-7.‘‘Lahupāvuraṇaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā cetāpentiyā aḍḍhateyyakaṃsaparamaṃ cetāpetabba’’nti (pāci. 789) vacanatolahupāvuraṇanti ettha ‘‘cetāpentiyā bhikkhuniyā’’ti caaḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghananti ettha ‘‘cetāpetabba’’nti ca seso.Lahupāvuraṇanti uṇhakāle pāvuraṇaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ pūraṇoteyyo,aḍḍho teyyo assātiaḍḍhateyyo,aḍḍhateyyo ca so kaṃso cātiaḍḍhateyyakaṃso,taṃ agghatītiaḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghanaṃ,dasakahāpaṇagghanakanti attho.Tatoti aḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghanakato. Yaṃ pana pāvuraṇaṃ aḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghanakaṃ, taṃ lahupāvuraṇaṃ.Tatoaḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghanakato lahupāvuraṇato.Uttarinti atirekaṃ. Aḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghanakaṃ yaṃ pāvuraṇaṃ yā bhikkhunī cetāpeti, tassa pāvuraṇassa paṭilābhetassābhikkhuniyā nissaggiyapācittiyā vuttāti yojanā.
2126-7.Because it is said, "When a nun is having a light robe made, she should have it made at most for one and a half kaṃsa," (pāci. 789) here, in lahupāvuraṇa, the remainder is "by the nun having it made" and in aḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghana the remainder is "should have it made." Lahupāvuraṇa means a robe for the hot season. The completion of three is teyyo, half of teyyo is aḍḍhateyyo, that which is aḍḍhateyyo and is a kaṃsa, that is aḍḍhateyyakaṃso, its value is aḍḍhateyyakaṃsagghanaṃ, the meaning is a price of ten kahāpaṇa coins. Tato means from that worth of one and a half kaṃsa. But that robe which is worth one and a half kaṃsa, that is a light robe. Tato from that worth of one and a half kaṃsa, from a light robe. Uttari means more. The connection is that for the receiving of that robe which is worth one and a half kaṃsa and which the nun is having made, for her, the nun, expiation entailing forfeiture is stated.
‘‘natthi kāci visesatā’’ti. Visesoyevavisesatā.
‘‘natthi kāci visesatā’’ti. Visesoyevavisesatā.
Dvādasamaṃ.
Twelfth.
2128.Idāni pātimokkhuddese āgatesu samatiṃsanissaggiyesu kesañci attano avacane kāraṇañca avuttehi saddhiṃ vuttānaṃ gahaṇañca dassetumāha‘‘sādhāraṇānī’’tiādi. Hi yasmā bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūhisādhāraṇāniyāni sikkhāpadānisesāniidha vuttehi aññāni,tāni aṭṭhārasasikkhāpadāni ceva idha vuttasarūpāni dvādasa sikkhāpadāni ceti iccevaṃ nissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadāni samatiṃseva hontīti yojanā.
2128.Now, to show the reason for not reciting some of the thirty expiations entailing forfeiture that have come in the recitation of the Pātimokkha, and the inclusion of those that have been recited along with those not recited, he says, "sādhāraṇānī," etc. Hi, because those training rules that are sādhāraṇāni common to the nuns and the monks, the sesāni remaining ones, other than those stated here, those tāni aṭṭhārasa eighteen training rules and the twelve training rules with the characteristics stated here - thus there are exactly thirty training rules entailing forfeiture and expiation, is the connection.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī, a commentary on the Vinayavinicchaya.
Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā is finished.
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā
2129-30.Evaṃ tiṃsa nissaggiyapācittiyāni dassetvā idāni suddhapācittiyāni dassetumāha‘‘lasuṇa’’ntiādi.Lasuṇanti ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. ‘‘Lasuṇaṃ’’iti bhaṇḍikaṃvuttaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 793-795). Catupañcamiñjādippabhedaṃ bhaṇḍikaṃlasuṇaṃnāma, na tato ūnaṃ. Tenāha‘‘na ekadvitimiñjaka’’nti. Pakkalasuṇato, sīhaḷadīpasambhavato ca visesamāha‘‘āmakaṃ māgadhaṃyevā’’ti. Magadhesu jātaṃmāgadhaṃ,‘‘vutta’’nti iminā sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘magadharaṭṭhe jātalasuṇameva hi idha lasuṇanti adhippeta’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 795). Taṃ ‘‘khādissāmī’’ti gaṇhatīti sambandho. Vuttappakāraṃ pācittiyañca ajjhohāravasenāti dassetumāha‘‘ajjhohāravaseneva, pācittiṃ paridīpaye’’ti.
2129-30.Having shown thirty expiations entailing forfeiture in this way, now to show the pure expiations, he says, "lasuṇa," etc. Lasuṇa Here, the iti word is understood as omitted. "Lasuṇaṃ" bhaṇḍikaṃ is vuttaṃ stated in the commentary (pāci. aṭṭha. 793-795). A bhaṇḍikaṃ sort of garlic, with varieties such as four or five cloves, is called lasuṇaṃ, not less than that. Therefore, he says, "na ekadvitimiñjaka," "not one, two, or three cloves." He says something special about garlic that is ready to sprout, and that which originates from Sri Lanka, "āmakaṃ māgadhaṃyevāti, raw, just that from Magadha." Māgadhaṃ, is that which is born in Magadha, "vutta" is related to this. As it says, "Indeed, only garlic born in the Magadha country is intended here as lasuṇa." (pāci. aṭṭha. 795). The connection is that one takes it thinking, "I will eat it." To show that the pācittiya stated in the manner described occurs only through the act of swallowing, he says, "ajjhohāravaseneva, pācittiṃ paridīpayeti, Only by way of swallowing, does it reveal expiation."
2131.Tadeva vakkhati‘‘dve tayo’’tiādinā.Saddhinti ekato.Saṅkhāditvāti galabilaṃ appavesetvā dantehi saṃcuṇṇiyantī khāditvā.Ajjhoharatiparagalaṃ karoti.
2131.He will state that itself with "dve tayo" etc. Saddhi means together. Saṅkhāditvā means chewing, crushing with the teeth without putting it into the throat. Ajjhoharati means putting it past the throat.
2132.Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhaṇḍikalasuṇe.‘‘Miñjānaṃ gaṇanāyā’’ti iminā ajjhohārapayogagaṇanāyeva dīpitā. Yathāha ‘‘bhinditvā ekekaṃ miñjaṃ khādantiyā pana payogagaṇanāya pācittiyānī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 795).
2132.Tatthā means in that bhaṇḍika garlic. By "Miñjānaṃ gaṇanāyā" it is shown that the count is only in relation to the act of swallowing. As it says, "However, for one who breaks off and eats each clove, there are expiations according to the count of acts of consumption" (pāci. aṭṭha. 795).
2133.Sabhāvato vaṭṭantevāti yojanā.
2133.The connection is that it stays naturally round.
2135.Yathāvuttapalaṇḍukādīnaṃ nānattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ekā miñjā’’tiādi. Idha miñjānaṃ vaseneva nānattaṃ dassitaṃ.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana vaṇṇavasenāpi. Yathāha ‘‘palaṇḍuko paṇḍuvaṇṇo hoti. Bhañjanako lohitavaṇṇo. Haritako haritapaṇṇavaṇṇo’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 797).
2135.To show the difference between the types of onions and so on that were mentioned, he says, "ekā miñjā," etc. Here, the difference is shown only by way of the cloves. In the Aṭṭhakathā, however, it is also by way of color. As it says, "The palaṇḍuko is pale in color. The bhañjanako is red in color. The haritako is the color of green leaves" (pāci. aṭṭha. 797).
2136.‘‘Sāḷave uttaribhaṅgake’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Badarasāḷavādīsū’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 797)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ettha badara-saddo seso.Badarasāḷavaṃnāma badaraphalāni sukkhāpetvā cuṇṇetvā kātabbā khādanīyavikati.Ummattikādīnanti etthaādi-saddena ādikammikā gahitā. Yathāha ‘‘ummattikāya ādikammikāyā’’ti (pāci. 797).
2136.The word division is "Sāḷave uttaribhaṅgake". From the Aṭṭhakathā saying, "In Badara-Sāḷava, etc." (pāci. aṭṭha. 797), here the word badara remains. Badarasāḷavaṃ namely, an edible confection to be made by drying and powdering badara fruits. In Ummattikādīnanti, by the ādi-word, those who are beginners are included. As it says, "For the ummattikā, for those who are beginners" (pāci. 797).
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
2137.Sambādheti paṭicchannokāse. Tassa vibhāgaṃ dassetumāha‘‘upakacchesu muttassa karaṇepi vā’’ti.
2137.Sambādhe means in a concealed place. To show its division, he says, "upakacchesu muttassa karaṇepi vā," "or even in making urine in the underarm area."
2138.Assā tathā pācittīti sambandho.‘‘Na lomagaṇanāyā’’ti iminā ‘‘payogagaṇanāyā’’ti idameva samatthayati.
2138.The connection is that in that case, there is an expiation. By "Na lomagaṇanāyā" this itself confirms "payogagaṇanāyā".
2139.Ābādheti kaṇḍuādike roge. Yathāha – ‘‘ābādhapaccayāti kaṇḍukacchuādiābādhapaccayā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 801).Maggasaṃvidhānasamā matāti bhikkhuniyā saṃvidhāya ekaddhānasikkhāpadena sadisā matā ñātāti attho.
2139.Ābādhe means in diseases such as itching, etc. As it says, "Ābādha-paccayā means due to a disease condition such as itching, scabies, etc." (pāci. aṭṭha. 801). Maggasaṃvidhānasamā matā means it is considered to be similar to the training rule regarding making an agreement for a journey for the bhikkhunī, the meaning is that it is known.
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
2140.Padumassa vā puṇḍarīkassa vā antamaso kesarenāpi kāmarāgena muttakaraṇassa talaghātanemuttakaraṇampi pahāradāne pācitti hotīti yojanā.Kesarenāpītiapi-saddena mahāpadumapaṇṇehi vattabbameva natthīti dīpeti. Yathāha – ‘‘antamaso uppalapattenāpīti ettha pattaṃ tāva mahantaṃ, kesarenāpi pahāraṃ dentiyā āpattiyevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 803).
2140.Even with the stamen of a lotus or a white lotus, if there is making urine with lustful desire, expiation occurs for striking the tala of the place of urination even for making urine. By Kesarenāpī, the api word shows that there is no need to mention it with the leaf of a great lotus. As it says, "Even with a lotus petal, here the petal is so big, there is certainly an offense even for one who strikes with the stamen" (pāci. aṭṭha. 803).
2141.Tatthāti tasmiṃ muttakaraṇatale.
2141.Tatthā means in that place of urination.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
2142.Yā pana bhikkhunīkāmarāgaparetākāmarāgena pīḷitā attanobyañjanemuttapathe uppalapattampi paveseti,na vaṭṭatipācitti hotīti yojanā.Pi-saddena ‘‘kesaramattampi pana pavesentiyā āpattiyevā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 812)aṭṭhakathāulliṅgitā.
2142.That bhikkhunī who is kāmarāgaparetā overwhelmed with lustful desire, even inserts a lotus petal into her byañjane urinary passage, na vaṭṭati, there is an expiation, is the connection. The Pi-word aṭṭhakathā implies, "there is certainly an offense even for one who inserts only a stamen's worth" (pāci. aṭṭha. 812).
2143-4.Yadyevaṃ ‘‘jatumaṭṭhake pācittiya’’nti kasmā vuttanti āha‘‘idaṃ…pe… jatumaṭṭhaka’’nti.Idaṃ jatumaṭṭhakaṃ vatthuvaseneva vuttanti ‘‘atha kho sā bhikkhunī jatumaṭṭhakaṃ ādiyitvā dhovituṃ vissaritvā ekamantaṃ chaḍḍesi. Bhikkhuniyo makkhikāhi samparikiṇṇaṃ passitvā evamāhaṃsu ‘kassidaṃ kamma’nti. Sā evamāha ‘mayhidaṃ kamma’nti. Yā tā bhikkhuniyo appicchā, tā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti ‘kathañhi nāma bhikkhunī jatumaṭṭhakaṃ ādiyissatī’’ti (pāci. 806) āgatavatthuvaseneva vuttaṃ, na taṃ vinā aññassa vaṭṭakassa sambhavatoti adhippāyo.Jatumaṭṭhakaṃnāma jatunā kato maṭṭhadaṇḍako.
2143-4.If so, why is it said "an expiation for a jatumaṭṭhaka"? He says, ‘‘idaṃ…pe… jatumaṭṭhaka’’. Idaṃ jatumaṭṭhakaṃ vatthuvaseneva vutta"This jatumaṭṭhaka is said only by way of the incident", that is, "Then that bhikkhunī, having taken a jatumaṭṭhaka, forgot to wash it and threw it aside. The bhikkhunīs, having seen it swarming with flies, said thus, 'Whose work is this?' She said thus, 'This is my work.' Those bhikkhunīs who were of few desires were annoyed, murmured, and criticized, 'How indeed could a bhikkhunī take a jatumaṭṭhaka?'" (pāci. 806), the intention is that it is said only by way of the incident that has come, not because of the possibility of another vaṭṭaka without that. Jatumaṭṭhakaṃ namely, a smooth stick made of lac.
Daṇḍanti ettha ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘antamaso uppalapattampi muttakaraṇaṃ pavesetī’’ti (pāci. 808). Etampi ca atimahantaṃ, kesaramattampi pana pavesentiyā āpatti eva.Eḷālukanti kakkāriphalaṃ vā.Tasminti attano muttakaraṇe.
Daṇḍa Here, "whatever" is the remainder. As it says, "She even inserts a lotus petal into the place of urination" (pāci. 808). And this too is very large, there is an offense certainly for even one who inserts only a stamen's worth. Eḷāluka means a kakkāri fruit or . Tasmi means in her own place of urination.
2145.Ābādhapaccayāti muttakaraṇappadese jātavaṇādimhi vaṇaṭṭhānanirupanādipaccayā.
2145.Ābādha-paccayā means due to a sore, etc., that has arisen in the area of the place of urination, due to inspecting the place of the sore, etc.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
2146.Aggapabbadvayādhikanti aggapabbadvayato kesaggamattampi adhikaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘antamaso kesaggamattampi atikkāmeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 812).Dakasuddhiṃ karontiyāti muttakaraṇaṭṭhāne dhovanaṃ karontiyā. Yathāha ‘‘udakasuddhikaṃ nāma muttakaraṇassa dhovanā vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 812).
2146.Aggapabbadvayādhika means more than two finger joints, even the tip of a hair's worth. As it says, "She transgresses even the tip of a hair's worth, there is an offense of expiation" (pāci. 812). Dakasuddhiṃ karontiyā means while cleaning the place of urination. As it says, "Cleaning with water is said to be the washing of the place of urination" (pāci. 812).
2147.‘‘Tīṇī’’ti iminā ekaṅguliyā pabbadvayassa pavesetvā dhovane dosābhāvaṃ dīpeti.Dīghatoti aṅguliyā dīghato. Tīṇi pabbāni gambhīrato muttakaraṇe pavesetvā udakasuddhiṃ ādiyantiyā pācittiyaṃ bhaveti yojanā.
2147.By "Tīṇī" it shows the absence of fault in washing after inserting two joints of one finger. Dīghato means the length of the finger. The connection is that there is an expiation for her who, inserting three joints deeply into the place of urination, commences the water-cleaning.
2148.Tisso, catasso vā aṅguliyo ekato katvā vitthārena pavesane ekapabbepi paviṭṭhe ‘‘dvaṅgulapabbaparama’’nti niyamitappamāṇātikkamato āha‘‘ekapabbampi yā panā’’ti.Yā panabhikkhunī catunnaṃ vāpi aṅgulīnaṃ tissannaṃ vāpi aṅgulīnaṃ ekapabbampi vitthārato paveseti, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
2148.When three or four fingers are put together and inserted with spread apart, even if one joint enters, he says, "ekapabbampi yā panā," because of transgressing the fixed measure, "at most two finger joints." Yā pana that bhikkhunī who inserts even one joint of four or three fingers spread apart, there would be an expiation for her, is the connection.
2149.Itīti evaṃ.Sabbappakārenāti gambhīrapavesanādinā sabbena pakārena.Abhibyattataraṃ katvāti supākaṭataraṃ katvā.Ayamatthoti ‘‘ekissaṅguliyā tīṇī’’tiādinā vutto ayamattho.
2149.Itī means thus. Sabbappakārenā means in all ways, such as inserting deeply. Abhibyattataraṃ katvā means having made it very clear. Ayamattho means this meaning stated by "three with one finger," etc.
2150.Dvaṅgulapabbe doso natthīti yojanā. Udakasuddhipaccaye pana satipi phassasādiyane yathāvuttaparicchede anāpatti.Adhikampīti dvaṅgulapabbato adhikampi. Udakasuddhiṃ karontiyā doso natthīti yojanā.
2150.There is no fault in two finger joints, is the connection. However, even when there is a reason for water-cleaning, there is no offense if there is enjoyment of touching within the stated limit. Adhikampī means even more than two finger joints. There is no fault for one who is cleaning with water, is the connection.
2151.Tathā udakasuddhiṃ karontīnaṃ ummattikādīnaṃ anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
2151.Likewise, it is declared that there is no offense for the insane and so on who are cleaning with water, is the connection.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
2152.Bhuñjato pana bhikkhussāti pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhuñjato bhikkhussa. Yathāha ‘‘bhuñjantassāti pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjantassā’’ti (pāci. 817).Pānīyaṃ vā vidhūpanaṃvāti vakkhamānaṃ pānīyaṃ, bījanīyañca.Upatiṭṭheyyāti ‘‘hatthapāse tiṭṭhatī’’ti (pāci. 817) vacanato etthaupa-saddo hatthapāsasaṅkhātaṃ samīpaṃ vadatīti veditabbaṃ.
2152.Bhuñjato pana bhikkhussā means to a monk who is eating one of the five foods. As it says, "Bhuñjantassa means to one who is eating one of the five foods" (pāci. 817). Pānīyaṃ vā vidhūpanaṃvā means the drinking water and the fan that will be mentioned. Upatiṭṭheyyā "He should stand within arm's reach" (pāci. 817). Here, the upa-word should be understood as speaking of the vicinity known as arm's reach.
2153.Vatthakoṇādi yā kāci ‘‘bījanī’’ti vuccatīti yojanā, iminā ‘‘bījanikiccaṃ sampādessāmī’’ti adhiṭṭhāya gahitacīvarakoṇappakāraṃ yaṃ kiñci ‘‘bījanī’’ti vuccatīti attho.
2153.Any piece of cloth and so on is called a "fan," is the connection. By this, the meaning is that whatever is determined as a piece of robe and taken with the intention "I will accomplish the work of fanning" is called a "fan".
2154.‘‘Atha kho sā bhikkhunī tassa bhikkhuno bhuñjantassa pānīyena ca vidhūpanena ca upatiṭṭhitvā accāvadati. Atha kho so bhikkhu taṃ bhikkhuniṃ apasādeti ‘mā, bhagini, evarūpaṃ akāsi, netaṃ kappatī’ti. ‘Pubbe maṃ tvaṃ evañca evañca karosi, idāni ettakaṃ na sahasī’ti pānīyathālakaṃ matthake āsumbhitvā vidhūpanena pahāraṃ adāsī’’ti (pāci. 815) imasmiṃvatthumhibhikkhūhi ārocite ‘‘kathañhi nāma, bhikkhave, bhikkhunī bhikkhussa pahāraṃ dassatī’’tiādīni (pāci. 815) vatvā ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhussa bhuñjantassa pānīyena vā vidhūpanena vā upatiṭṭheyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 816) vuttattā pahārapaccayā nu khoti āsaṅkaṃ nivattetumāha‘‘hatthapāse idha ṭhānapaccayāpatti dīpitā’’ti. Ettha caāsumbhitvāti pātetvā.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā bhikkhussa pahāro dātabbo. Yā dadeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 420)bhikkhunikkhandhakevuttaṃ gahetvā āha‘‘pahārapaccayā vuttaṃ, khandhake dukkaṭaṃ visu’’nti. Iminā vuttassevatthassa kāraṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
2154. "Then that bhikkhuni, attending upon that bhikkhu while he was eating with water and a fan, spoke disparagingly. Then that bhikkhu rebuked that bhikkhuni, saying, 'Sister, do not do such a thing; this is not allowable.' (She replied,) 'Formerly, you did such and such to me; now you cannot bear even this much!' Having poured the water bowl over his head, she struck him with the fan," (pāci. 815) after the bhikkhus reported this incident, saying, "How indeed could a bhikkhuni strike a bhikkhu?" etc. (pāci. 815) having said, "Whatever bhikkhuni should attend upon a bhikkhu who is eating with water or a fan, there is an offense of pācittiya," (pāci. 816) because it was said, to dispel the doubt whether it was due to the striking, he said, "Here, the offense is shown as being due to standing within arm's reach." And here, āsumbhitvā means having poured. Here means in this training rule. Taking what was said in the Bhikkhuni Khandhaka, "Bhikkhunis, a blow should not be given to a bhikkhu. Whoever should give one, there is an offense of dukkata," (cūḷava. 420) he says, "Striking is stated as the reason, dukkata in the Khandhaka is distinct." By this, the reason for the statement is shown.
2155.Hatthapāsaṃ jahitvāti ettha ‘‘bhojanaṃ bhuñjato’’ti cakhādanaṃ khādatoti ettha ‘‘hatthapāse’’ti ca vattabbaṃ. Bhojanaṃ bhuñjato hatthapāsaṃ jahitvā upatiṭṭhantiyā vā khādanaṃ khādato hatthapāse upatiṭṭhantiyā vā hoti āpatti dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2155.Having left arm's reach here, "while eating food" and while consuming edibles here, "within arm's reach" should be stated. The construction is: there is an offense of dukkata for a bhikkhuni who attends, having left arm's reach, while he is eating food, or who attends within arm's reach while he is consuming edibles.
2156.Detīti pānīyaṃ vā sūpādiṃ vā ‘‘imaṃ pivatha, iminā bhuñjathā’’ti deti. Tālavaṇṭaṃ ‘‘iminā bījantā bhuñjathā’’ti deti.Dāpetīti aññena ubhayampi dāpeti.Idaṃsikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānato eḷakalomena samaṃ matanti yojanā.
2156.Gives means she gives water or soup, etc., saying, "Drink this, eat with this." She gives a palm fan, saying, "Eat while fanning with this." Causes to give means she causes another to give either. This training rule should be understood as equal to the eḷakaloma from the perspective of origin.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
Sixth.
2157.Viññatvāti sayaṃ viññatvā, aññāya vā viññāpetvā. ‘‘Viññatvā vā viññāpetvā vā’’ti (pāci. 821) hi sikkhāpadaṃ.Āmakaṃ dhaññanti apakkaṃ abhaṭṭhaṃ sāliādikaṃ sattavidhaṃ dhaññaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘āmakadhaññaṃ nāma sāli vīhi yavo godhumo kaṅgu varako kudrūsako’’ti (pāci. 822).Koṭṭetvāti musalehi koṭṭetvā. Yadi paribhuñjatīti yojanā.
2157.Having requested means having requested oneself or having caused another to request. For the training rule says, "Having requested or having caused to request" (pāci. 821). Raw grain means uncooked, unroasted sāli etc., the seven kinds of grain. As he said, "Raw grain means sāli, vīhi, barley, wheat, kaṅgu, varaka, kudrūsaka" (pāci. 822). Having pounded means having pounded with pestles. If she consumes it, is the construction.
2158-60.‘‘Bhuñjissāmīti paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti idaṃ payogadukkaṭaṃ nāma, tasmā na kevalaṃ paṭiggahaṇeyeva dukkaṭaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (pāci. aṭṭha. 822)aṭṭhakathāgataṃvibhāgaṃ dassetumāha‘‘na kevalaṃ tu dhaññāna’’ntiādi.Panāti api-saddatthe, sukkhāpanepīti attho.Bhajjanatthāyāti ettha ‘‘vaddalidivase’’ti seso. ‘‘Kapallasajjane uddhanasajjane’’ti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Dabbisajjaneti kaṭacchusampādane. Tattha kapallake dhaññapakkhipaneti yojanā. ‘‘Ghaṭṭanakoṭṭane’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena na-kāralopaṃ katvā‘‘ghaṭṭakoṭṭane’’ti vuttaṃ.
2158-60. " 'I will eat' she accepts, there is an offense of dukkata, this is called effort-dukkata, therefore not only in accepting is there dukkata," etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 822) to show the distinction that comes in the commentary, he says, "Not only of grains indeed," etc. Panā is in the sense of api (also), meaning even in drying. For the purpose of frying here, "on the vaddaḷi day" is the remainder. "In preparing pans, in preparing ovens" should be connected individually. In preparing ladles means in preparing wooden spoons. There, the construction is, the grain is placed in the pan. In place of saying "ghaṭṭanakoṭṭane," having made a deletion of the na-kāra due to the meter of the verse, "ghaṭṭakoṭṭane" is said.
2161-3.Pamāṇa-saddassa āvattaliṅgasaṅkhyattā āha‘‘bhojanañceva viññattipamāṇa’’nti.Āvattaliṅgasaṅkhyattaṃnāma niyataliṅgekattabahuttaṃ. Tathā hetthapamāṇa-saddo niyatanapuṃsakaliṅge niyatekattaṃ vuccati.Etthaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade bhojanañceva viññatti cāti idaṃ dvayaṃhiyasmā pamāṇaṃ, tasmā sayaṃ viññatvā vā aññato bhajjanādīni kārāpetvā vā aññāya pana viññāpetvā sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvā vāyā panabhikkhunī ajjhoharati, tassā ajjhohārapayogesu pācittiyo siyunti yojanā.
2161-3.Because the word pamāṇa (measure) has varied gender and number, he says, "Food and request are the measure." Varied gender and number means having fixed gender, singular, and plural. Thus, here the word pamāṇa is said in the fixed neuter gender and in the fixed singular. Here, in this training rule, since both food and request indeed are the measure, therefore whatever bhikkhuni, having requested oneself or having caused frying etc. from another, or having caused another to request and having done the frying etc. oneself, for her, in the efforts of consuming, there would be pācittiya, is the construction.
Mahāpaccariyaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 823) vuttaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘mātaraṃ vā’’tiādi.Mātaraṃ vāpi yācitvāti etthavā-saddo atthantaravikappane.Pi-saddo sambhāvane. Mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā aññaṃ vā ñātakaṃ vā pavāritaṃ vā āmakadhaññaṃ yācitvā vā aññāya kārāpetvā vā yā paribhuñjati, tassā pācittīti yojanā.
To show the judgment stated in the Mahāpaccariya (pāci. aṭṭha. 823), he says, "Mother or," etc. Having begged from mother or also here, the word vā is for alternating another meaning. The word pi is for possibility. Whatever bhikkhuni, having begged raw grain from mother or father or another relative or an uninvited person, or having caused another to do so, consumes, there is pācittiya for her, is the construction.
2164.Aviññattiyā laddhaṃ sayaṃ vā bhajjanādīni katvā vā aññāya kārāpetvā vā yā paribhuñjati, tassā dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2164.Whatever (grain) obtained without requesting, whether having done the frying etc. oneself or having caused another to do so, she consumes, there is dukkata for her, is the construction.
2165.Aññāya pana viññattiyā laddhaṃ tāya kārāpetvāpi sayaṃ katvā vā ajjhoharantiyā tathā āpatti dukkaṭanti yojanā. Idañcamahāpaccariyāgatanayaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ.Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘aññāya viññattaṃ bhuñjantiyā dukkaṭa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 822) vuttattā viññattiyāpi aññāya laddhaṃ āmakaṃ dhaññaṃ tāya kārāpetvā vā sayaṃ katvā vā paribhuñjantassāpi dukkaṭameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
2165.Moreover, whatever (grain) obtained by requesting through another, whether having caused her to do it or having done it oneself, if she consumes, likewise there is an offense of dukkata, is the construction. And this is said taking the method that comes in the Mahāpaccariya. However, in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, because it is said "in consuming what is requested by another, there is dukkata," (pāci. aṭṭha. 822) it should be understood that even in consuming raw grain obtained through the request of another, whether having caused her to do it or having done it oneself, only dukkata is stated.
2166-7.Sedakammādiatthāyāti vātarogādinā āturānaṃ sedanādipaṭikāratthāya. Idha ‘‘aññātakaappavāritaṭṭhānepī’’ti seso. Bhikkhūnampi eseva nayo. Ṭhapetvā satta dhaññāni ñātakapavāritaṭṭhāne sesaviññattiyāpi anāpattīti ñātabbanti yojanā.Sesaviññattiyāti muggamāsaalābukumbhaṇḍakādīnaṃ vuttadhaññāvasesānaṃ viññattiyā.
2166-7.For the purpose of sweat treatment etc. means for the purpose of remedies such as sweat treatment for those who are ill with diseases of wind etc. Here, "even in a place of non-relatives and uninvited persons" is the remainder. This same method applies to bhikkhus as well. Except for the seven grains, there is no offense even in requesting the remaining things at the place of relatives and invited persons, it should be known, is the construction. Of the remaining requests means the request for mung beans, māsa beans, gourds, pumpkins, etc., the remaining things other than the grains mentioned.
‘‘ñātakānampī’’tiādi.
"Even of relatives," etc.
2168.Laddhanti labbhamānaṃ.Navakammesūti navakammatthāya, nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Ettha ‘‘sampaṭicchitu’’nti seso. ‘‘Aviññattiyā labbhamānaṃ pana navakammatthāya sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 823)mahāpaccariyaṃvuttaṃ.
2168.Obtained means being obtained. In new construction means for the purpose of new construction; bhummaṃ is in the sense of nimitta (cause). Here, "to accept" is the remainder. "However, it is allowable to accept what is being obtained without requesting for the purpose of new construction," (pāci. aṭṭha. 823) it is said in the Mahāpaccariya.
Sattamaṃ.
Seventh.
2169.Saṅkāranti kacavaraṃ.Vighāsakaṃ vāti ucchiṭṭhakamacchakaṇṭakamaṃsaṭṭhicalakamukhadhovanādikaṃ yaṃ kiñci.Chaḍḍeyya vāti ettha ‘‘saya’’nti seso ‘‘chaḍḍāpeyya parehī’’ti vakkhamānattā. Kuṭṭassa tirotirokuṭṭaṃ,tasmiṃ, kuṭṭassa parabhāgeti attho. ‘‘Pākārepi ayaṃ nayo’’ti vakkhamānattā kuṭṭanti vā byatirittā bhitti gahetabbā.
2169.Saṅkāra means refuse. Or vighāsaka means leftovers, fish bones, meat bones, rice gruel, mouth rinsing water, etc., whatever it may be. Should throw away here, "oneself" is the remainder, because it will be said "should cause to throw away by others." Tiro kuṭṭassa means on the other side of the wall, in that, it means on the other side of the wall. Because it will be said "this method applies to walls too," kuṭṭa should be taken as a separate wall.
2171.Ekāti ettha āpattīti seso. ‘‘Tassā’’ti iminā sambandho.
2171.One here, "offense" is the remainder. The connection is with "for her."
2172.Chaḍḍaneti etthapi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Dantakaṭṭhassa chaḍḍanepi bhikkhuniyā pācitti paridīpitāti yojanā.
2172.In throwing away here, the pi-sound is understood by ellipsis. Pācittiya is declared for the bhikkhuni even in throwing away a tooth stick, is the construction.
2173-4.Sabbatthāti vuttappakāresu sabbesu vikappesu. Anāpattivisayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘avalañjepī’’tiādi. Avalañje ṭhāne anoloketvā chaḍḍentiyāpi vā valañje ṭhāne oloketvāpi vā pana chaḍḍentiyā anāpattīti yojanā. Chaḍḍanaṃkriyaṃ. Anolokanaṃakriyaṃ.
2173-4.Everywhere means in all the options of the types mentioned. To show the scope of non-offense, he says, "Even in a drain," etc. There is no offense for a bhikkhuni even in throwing (it) without looking in a drain, or even in throwing (it) after looking in a drain in a valañja place, is the construction. Throwing is action. Not looking is non-action.
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
Eighth.
2175-6.Yā pana bhikkhunī khette vā nāḷikerādiārāme vā yattha katthaci ropime haritaṭṭhānetānivighāsuccārasaṅkāramuttasaṅkhātānicattāri vatthūnisace sayaṃ chaḍḍeti vā, tathā pare chaḍḍāpeti vā, tassā bhikkhuniyā āpattivinicchayovuttanayo‘‘ekeka’’miccādinā yathāvuttapakāroti yojanā.
2175-6.Whatever bhikkhuni in a field or in a grove of coconut palms etc., or wherever it may be, in a planted green place, those four things, namely, vighāsa, excrement, saṅkāra, and urine, if she herself throws away, or likewise causes others to throw away, the determination of offense for that bhikkhuni is of the type mentioned, in the manner stated as "one by one," etc., is the construction.
2177-8.Yā panabhikkhunī harite khette nisīditvā bhuñjamānā vā tathā haritetatthakhette ucchuādīnikhādantikhādamānā gacchantī vā yadi ucchiṭṭhaṃ udakaṃ vā calakādiṃ vā chaḍḍeti, tassā pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.Calakaṃnāma vamikaraṃ.
2177-8.Whatever bhikkhuni, sitting in a green field while eating, or likewise, there in the green field eating sugarcane etc., while going, if she throws away leftovers, water, or rice gruel etc., there is pācittiya for her, is the construction. Calaka means vomit-inducing.
2179.Tādiseharite ṭhāne antamaso matthakachinnaṃ nāḷikerampi jalaṃ pivitvā chaḍḍentiyā āpatti siyāti yojanā.
2179.In such a green place, there would be an offense even in throwing away the water of a coconut, at least after drinking it, of which the top has been cut off, is the construction.
2180.Sabbesanti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ.
2180.Of all means of bhikkhus and bhikkhunis.
2181.Lāyitampi khettaṃ puna rohaṇatthāya manussā rakkhanti ce,tatthatasmiṃ khette vighāsuccārādīni chaḍḍentiyāassābhikkhuniyāyathāvatthukameva hipācittiyamevāti yojanā.‘‘Assā yathāvatthuka’’nti iminā bhikkhussa dukkaṭanti vuttameva hoti.
2181.If people protect even a harvested field for the sake of regrowth, there, in that field, in throwing away vighāsa, excrement, etc., for her, for that bhikkhuni, indeed, according to the case itself there is pācittiya, is the construction. By "for her, according to the case," it is stated that for the bhikkhu there is dukkata.
2182.Chaḍḍite khetteti manussehi uddhaṭasasse khette. Yathāha – ‘‘manussesu sassaṃ uddharitvā gatesu chaḍḍitakhettaṃ nāma hoti, tattha vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 830). Evaṃ akatepi khette sāmike āpucchitvā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Yathāha ‘‘sāmike apaloketvā chaḍḍetī’’ti (pāci. 832). Idha khettapālakā, ārāmādigopakā casāmikāeva. Saṅghassa khette, ārāme ca sace ‘‘tattha kacavaraṃ na chaḍḍetabba’’nti katikā natthi, bhikkhussa chaḍḍetuṃ vaṭṭati saṅghapariyāpannattā, na bhikkhunīnaṃ. Tāsaṃ pana bhikkhusaṅghe vuttanayena na vaṭṭati, na tassa bhikkhussa, evaṃ santepi sāruppavasena kātabbanti.Sabbanti uccārādi catubbidhaṃ.
2182.In an abandoned field means in a field where the crop has been harvested by people. As he said, "When people have harvested the crop and left, it is called an abandoned field; it is allowable there," (pāci. aṭṭha. 830). Even if it is not done thus, it is allowable to do (so) after asking the owner in an unabandoned field. As he said, "Having not asked permission from the owner, she throws (it) away" (pāci. 832). Here, the field keepers and the grove etc. keepers are the owners. In the Saṅgha's field and grove, if there is no agreement that "refuse should not be thrown there," it is allowable for a bhikkhu to throw (it) away because it is included in the Saṅgha's (property), but not for bhikkhunis. However, for them, in the bhikkhu Saṅgha, it is not allowable in the manner stated, not for that bhikkhu; even if it is so, it should be done according to what is suitable. All means the four kinds of excrement etc.
Navamaṃ.
Ninth.
2183.Ettha ‘‘naccaṃ nāma yaṃ kiñci naccaṃ. Gītaṃ nāma yaṃ kiñci gītaṃ. Vāditaṃ nāma yaṃ kiñci vādita’’nti (pāci. 835) vacanato ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti seso. Yā pana bhikkhunī yaṃ kiñci naccaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci gītaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci vāditaṃ vā dassanatthāya gaccheyyāti yojanā. Tatthayaṃ kiñci naccanti naṭādayo vā naccantu soṇḍā vā, antamaso morasukamakkaṭādayopi, sabbampetaṃ naccameva.Yaṃ kiñci gītanti naṭādīnaṃ vā gītaṃ hotu ariyānaṃ parinibbānakāle ratanattayaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ sādhukīḷitagītaṃ vā asaññatabhikkhūnaṃ dhammabhāṇakagītaṃ vā, sabbampetaṃ gītameva.Yaṃ kiñci vāditanti ghanādivādanīyabhaṇḍavāditaṃ vā hotu kuṭabherivāditaṃ vā antamaso udarabherivāditampi, sabbampetaṃ vāditameva. ‘‘Dassanasavanatthāyā’’ti vattabbe virūpekasesanayena‘‘dassanatthāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ yathāsakaṃ visayassa ālocanasabhāvatāya vā‘‘dassanatthāya’’icceva vuttaṃ.
2183.Here, from the statement "dancing means whatever dancing. Singing means whatever singing. Playing means whatever playing" (pāci. 835), "whatever" is the remainder. Whatever bhikkhuni would go for the sake of seeing whatever dancing or whatever singing or whatever playing, is the construction. There, whatever dancing means actors etc. dancing or drunkards dancing, or even peacocks, wild dogs, monkeys etc., all of that is dancing indeed. Whatever singing means whether it is the singing of actors etc., or well-played singing endowed with the qualities of the Triple Gem at the time of the parinibbāna of noble ones, or the dhamma-preaching singing of unrestrained bhikkhus, all of that is singing indeed. Whatever playing means whether it is the playing of instruments like cymbals etc., or the playing of a kuṭabheri drum, or even the playing of a belly-drum, all of that is playing indeed. In place of saying "dassanasavanatthāya (for the purpose of seeing and hearing)," "dassanatthāya (for the purpose of seeing)" is said by the method of differing-form-one-remainder. Or, due to the nature of the five consciousnesses considering their respective objects, "dassanatthāya (for the purpose of seeing)" itself is said.
2184.Pubbapayogadukkaṭena saha pācittiyaṃ dassetumāha‘‘dassanatthāya naccassā’’tiādi.Gītassāti ettha ‘‘vāditassā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.
2184.To show the pācittiya together with the dukkata of the prior effort, he says, "For the sake of seeing dancing," etc. Of singing here, "of playing" is obtained from the context.
2185.Ekapayogenāti ekadisāvalokanapayogena. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘aññasmimpi…pe… siyu’’nti.Passatīti ettha ‘‘nacca’’nti seso.Tesanti yesaṃ naccaṃ passati.Pi-saddena vāditampi sampiṇḍeti. Yathāha ‘‘tesaṃyeva gītavāditaṃ suṇāti, ekameva pācittiya’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 836).
2185.By a single effort means by a single effort of looking in one direction. By that very reason he will say "in another... pe... there would be." Sees here, "dancing" is the remainder. By the word pi, he combines playing as well. As he said, "She hears the singing and playing of those very ones; there is only one pācittiya" (pāci. aṭṭha. 836).
2186.Aññatoti aññasmiṃ disābhāge.
2186.From another means in another direction.
2187.‘‘Visuṃ pācittiyo siyu’’nti idameva pakāsetumāha‘‘payogagaṇanāyettha, āpattigaṇanā siyā’’ti.Etthāti imasmiṃ nānādisābhāge. Naccagītavāditānaṃ dassanasavaneaṭṭhakathāgataṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘naccitu’’ntiādi.
2187.To clarify just this, that "there would be separate pācittiyas," he says, "Here, there would be a count of efforts, a count of offenses." Here, in this various directional part. To show the judgment that comes in the commentary regarding seeing and hearing dancing, singing, and playing, he says, "Naccitu," etc.
2188.‘‘Nacca itī’’ti padacchedo, ‘‘naccāhī’’tipi pāṭho.Upaṭṭhānanti bherisaddapūjaṃ.Sampaṭicchitunti ‘‘sādhū’’ti adhivāsetuṃ. Imassa upalakkhaṇavasena vuttattā naccagītepi eseva nayo.
2188.The word division is "nacca iti (dancing thus)"; "naccāhi (dance!)" is also a reading. Upaṭṭhāna means honoring with drum sounds. Sampaṭicchitu means to accept by saying "sādhu (good)." Because this is said by way of example, this same method applies to dancing and singing as well.
2189-90.Sabbatthāti naccanādīsu sabbattha.Upaṭṭhānaṃ karomātitumhākaṃ cetiyassa naccādīhi upahāraṃ karomāti.Upaṭṭhānaṃ pasatthantiupaṭṭhānakaraṇaṃ nāma sundaranti.
2189-90.Everywhere means everywhere in dancing etc. "I will do upaṭṭhāna" means "I will make an offering to your shrine with dancing etc." "Upaṭṭhāna is praiseworthy" means the doing of upaṭṭhāna is beautiful.
aṭṭhakathāyavuttaṃ.‘‘Ṭhatvā’’ti vuttepi sabbesupi iriyāpathesu labbhati.Ārāme ṭhatvāti na kevalaṃ ṭhatvāva, tato gantvāpi sabbiriyāpathehipi labhati. ‘‘Ārāme ṭhitā’’ti (pāci. 837) pana ārāmapariyāpannadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Itarathā nisinnāpi na labheyyātigaṇṭhipadādīsu vuttaṃ. Bhikkhūnampi eseva nayo.
It is stated in the commentary. "Having stood" is obtained in all postures even when it is said. "Having stood in the grove" means it is obtained not only by standing, but even by going from there, in all postures. However, "having stood in the grove" (pāci. 837) is said for the purpose of showing that it is included in the grove. Otherwise, it would not be obtained even when sitting, it is said in the gaṇṭhipada etc. This same method applies to bhikkhus as well.
2191.Yā attano ṭhitokāsaṃ āgantvā payojitaṃ passati vā suṇāti vāti yojanā.Ṭhitokāsanti ettha gatinivattisāmaññena sayitanisinnampi gayhati. Tathārūpā hi kāraṇā gantvā passantiyā vāpīti yojanā.Kāraṇaṃnāma salākabhattādikāraṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sati karaṇīyeti salākabhattādīnaṃ vā atthāya aññena vā kenaci karaṇīyena gantvā gataṭṭhāne passati vā suṇāti vā, anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 837).
2191. The meaning is: after coming to one's own location, she sees or hears something pertinent. Ṭhitokāsaṃ: here, ‘staying’ also includes lying down or sitting, in the general sense of ceasing movement. The meaning is that, due to such causes, she goes and sees or hears something. Kāraṇaṃ means a reason such as for a ticket-meal. As it was said, "If there is something to be done, either for the sake of ticket-meals etc., or some other task, and she goes and sees or hears at the place she has gone to, there is no offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 837).
2192.Maggaṃ gacchantī paṭipathe naccaṃ aṭṭhatvā passatīti evaṃ passantiyāpi ca tathā anāpattīti ajjhāhārayojanā.Paṭipatheti gamanamaggābhimukhe.Āpadāsupīti tādisena upaddavena upaddutā samajjaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati, evaṃ pavisitvā passantiyā vā suṇantiyā vā anāpatti.
2192. The meaning is to be supplied, that even for her seeing like this, such as going along the road and stopping to watch a dance, there is no offense. Paṭipathe means facing the path of travel. Āpadāsupī means being troubled by such a misfortune, she enters a festival ground, and there is no offense for her seeing or hearing after entering like that.
2193.Idaṃsikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānato eḷakalomasikkhāpadenasamaṃ mataṃ‘‘samāna’’nti viññātaṃ.
2193. This sikkhāpada is considered the same as the sheep’s wool sikkhāpada in terms of its origin, meaning it is known to be "similar."
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth.
Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.
The First Lasuṇa Vagga.
2194-5.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsane yā pana bhikkhunī rattandhakārasmiṃ appadīpe purisena saddhiṃ ekikā sace santiṭṭhati, tassā pācittiyaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Rattandhakārasminti rattiyaṃ. Rattipariyāyo hirattandhakāra-saddo. Yathāhapadabhājane‘‘rattandhakāreti oggate sūriye’’ti (pāci. 840).Appadīpeti pajjotacandasūriyaaggīsu ekenāpi anobhāsite, iminā rattikkhettaṃ dasseti.‘‘Santiṭṭhatī’’ti iminā gamananisinnasayanasaṅkhātaṃ iriyāpathattikañca upalakkhitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhi vajirabuddhinā ‘‘santiṭṭheyyāti ettha ṭhānāpadesena catubbidhopi iriyāpatho saṅgahito, tasmā purisena saddhiṃ caṅkamanādīni karontiyāpi pācittiyañca upalabbhatī’’ti (vajira. ṭī. pācittiya 839 thokaṃ visadisaṃ).Purisena saddhinti santiṭṭhituṃ, sallapituñca viññunā manussapurisena saddhiṃ.
2194-5. The meaning is: Here, in this Dispensation, whichever bhikkhunī remains alone with a man in the pitch darkness without a lamp, for her that pācittiya has been stated. Rattandhakārasmiṃ means at night. The word rattandhakāra is a synonym for night. As it is said in the Padabhājana, "Rattandhakāra means when the sun has set" (pāci. 840). Appadīpe means not illuminated by even one of a lamp, the moon, the sun, or a fire; with this, he shows the night area. ‘‘Santiṭṭhatī’’: it should be understood that the three modes of conduct—going, sitting, lying down—are indicated by this. For it was said by Vajirabuddhi, "In ‘santiṭṭheyya,’ all four modes of conduct are included by way of location, therefore the pācittiya is incurred even by doing walking etc. with a man" (vajira. ṭī. pācittiya 839, slightly different). Purisena saddhiṃ means together with a wise human man, for staying and conversing.
hatthapāsaṃsamāgantvā tenasaddhiṃsallapantiyā vā pācittiyaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
The meaning is that for one who comes within arm's reach and converses with him, that pācittiya has been stated.
2196-7.Yā pana bhikkhunī sace manussapurisassa hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā santiṭṭhati vā sallapati vā, yakkhapetatiracchānagatānaṃ hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā santiṭṭhati vā sallapati vā, tassā dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti yojanā.
2196-7. The meaning is: whichever bhikkhunī remains or converses abandoning a human man's arm's reach, and remains or converses not abandoning the arm's reach of yakkhas, petas, or animals, for her that dukkaṭa has been explained.
Viññuggahaṇena aviññū puriso anāpattiṃ na karotīti dīpeti.
By the inclusion of "viññu" (wise), it indicates that an unwise person does not cause an offense.
2198.Aññavihitāyāti rahoassādato aññaṃ cintentiyā. Yathāha ‘‘rahoassādato aññavihitāva hutvā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 841). Catutthena, chaṭṭhena ca samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhānatotheyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Santiṭṭhanasallapanavasenakriyaṃ. Saññāya vimokkho etasmintisaññāvimokkhakaṃ.
2198. Aññavihitāyā means considering something other than the pleasure of secrecy. As it was said, "having become diverted from the pleasure of secrecy" (pāci. aṭṭha. 841). In terms of origin, it has the origin of theft, from the fourth and sixth origins. In terms of action, it is an action. That in which there is release from perception is saññāvimokkhakaṃ.
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
2199.Paṭicchanne okāseti kuṭṭādīsu yena kenaci paṭicchanne okāse.Idaṃvacanaṃ.
2199. Paṭicchanne okāse means in a place covered by a wall, etc. Idaṃ is this statement.
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
2200.Tatiye ‘‘ajjhokāse’’ti ca catutthe ‘‘rathikāya, byūhe, siṅghāṭake’’ti padāni ca vajjetvā avasesaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘apubbaṃ natthi kiñcipī’’ti. Ettha ‘‘vattabba’’nti seso. Ettha carathikāyāti racchāya.Byūheti anibbiddharacchāya.Siṅghāṭaketi caccare okāse, tikoṇaṃ vā catukoṇaṃ vā maggasamodhānaṭṭhāneti vuttaṃ hoti.
2200. Except for the words "ajjhokāse" in the third, and the words "rathikāya, byūhe, siṅghāṭake" in the fourth, he says referring to the remainder, "there is nothing not previously stated." Here, "should be stated" is the remainder. And here, rathikāyā means on a street. Byūhe means on an un-bifurcated street. Siṅghāṭake means at a crossroad, it is said to be a three-way or four-way intersection.
Tatiyacatutthāni.
The Third and Fourth.
2201-2.‘‘Yā pana bhikkhunī purebhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā āsane nisīditvā sāmike anāpucchā pakkameyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 855) vacanato yā pana bhikkhunī purebhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā chadananto āsane nisīditvā sāmike anāpucchā anovassakappadesaṃ atikkameti,yāca ajjhokāse vā nisīditvā sace upacāraṃ atikkameti, tassā paṭhame pade dukkaṭaṃ hoti, dutiye pade pācitti pariyāputāti yojanā.‘‘Āsane’’ti iminā pallaṅkamābhujitvā nisīdanārahamāsanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘āsanaṃ nāma pallaṅkassa okāso vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 856).Anovassappadesanti nibbakosabbhantaraṃ. Abbhokāse āpattikhettaṃ dassetumāha‘‘upacārampi vā sace’’ti.Upacāranti dvādasahatthappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ. Yathāhagaṇṭhipade‘‘upacāro dvādasahattho’’ti.
2201-2. From the statement "Whichever bhikkhunī, having gone to families in the forenoon, sits on a seat and leaves without asking the owner, there is a pācittiya" (pāci. 855), the meaning is: whichever bhikkhunī, having gone to families in the forenoon and sat on a seat inside the eaves, crosses beyond a place without rain covering it without asking the owner, and whichever sits in the open and crosses beyond the vicinity, for her, in the first clause, there is a dukkaṭa, and in the second clause, the pācitti is completely fulfilled. ‘‘Āsane’’: with this, a seat suitable for sitting cross-legged is intended. As it was said, "āsanaṃ means the space for a pallaṅka" (pāci. 856). Anovassappadesanti means the space inside the eaves. To show the area of offense in the open, he says ‘‘upacārampi vā sace’’. Upacāra means a space measuring twelve cubits. As it was said in the Gaṇṭhipada, "upacāra is twelve cubits."
2203.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ samudīrita’’nti idaṃ paccāmasati. Āpuṭṭhe anāpuṭṭhasaññāya āpuṭṭhe vicikicchato pakkamantiyā tathā dukkaṭanti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘bhikkhuniyā’’ti sambandhiniyā samānattā ‘‘vicikicchantiyā’’ti vattabbe liṅgavipallāsavasena‘‘vicikicchato’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
2203. With ‘‘Tathā’’, he recalls ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ samudīritaṃ’’. The meaning is that there is dukkaṭa likewise for one who departs with uncertainty about whether she has been asked, thinking she has not been asked when she has been asked. And here, because of the sameness of the relationship to "bhikkhuniyā," it should be "vicikicchantiyā" (for one who is uncertain), but it should be understood that "vicikicchato" is stated due to the discrepancy in gender.
2204.Gilānāyāti yā tādisena gelaññena āpucchituṃ na sakkoti.Āpadāsūti ghare aggi uṭṭhito hoti corā vā, evarūpe upaddave anāpucchā pakkamantiyā anāpatti.
2204. Gilānāyā means she is unable to ask due to such illness. Āpadāsū means when a fire has broken out in the house, or there are thieves, in such misfortune there is no offense in departing without asking.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
2205-6.‘‘Gacchantiyā vajantiyā’’ti ca nisīdananipajjanāvasānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Pācittiyaṃ pana pacchābhattaṃ sāmike ‘‘idha nisīdāma vā sayāma vā’’ti anāpucchitvā nisinnanipannapaccayā hotīti veditabbaṃ. Pacchābhattaṃ sāmike anāpucchā āsanenisīditvāgacchantiyā ekā pācitti hotīti yojanā. Esa nayo‘‘nipajjitvā’’tiādīsupi.
2205-6. ‘‘Gacchantiyā vajantiyā’’ is stated to show the conclusion of sitting and lying down. But it should be understood that the pācittiya occurs due to sitting or lying down without asking the owner, "shall we sit or lie down here?" after the meal. The meaning is that there is one pācittiya for sitting on a seat and leaving without asking the owner after the meal. The same method applies to ‘‘nipajjitvā’’ etc.
Yathā pana tattha asaṃhārime anāpatti, evamidha dhuvapaññatte vā anāpattīti.
Just as there is no offense there in an unshared space, so here too there is no offense in a fixed designated place.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
Sixth.
2207.Tisamuṭṭhānanti sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhānato.
2207. Tisamuṭṭhāna means originating from three origins of what is self-originated.
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
Eighth.
2208.Yā pana bhikkhunī attānampi vā parampi vā nirayabrahmacariyehi abhisapeyya, tassā vācato vācato siyā pācittīti yojanā. Tatthaabhisapeyyāti sapathaṃ kareyya, ‘‘niraye nibbattāmi, avīcimhi nibbattāmī’’ti attānaṃ vā ‘‘niraye nibbattatu, avīcimhi nibbattatū’’ti paraṃ vā ‘‘gihinī homi, odātavatthā homī’’ti attānaṃ vā ‘‘gihinī hotu, odātavatthā hotū’’ti paraṃ vā abhisapeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
2208. The meaning is: whichever bhikkhunī should curse either herself or another with regard to hell or the brahmacariya, for her, with each utterance, there is a pācittiya. There, abhisapeyya means makes an oath, it means she should curse herself, "may I be reborn in hell, may I be reborn in Avīci," or curse another, "may she be reborn in hell, may she be reborn in Avīci," or "may I become a laywoman, may I become a white-clad woman," or "may she become a laywoman, may she become a white-clad woman."
2210.Akkosati attānaṃ vā paraṃ vāti sambandho.Tikapācittiyanti upasampannāya upasampannasaññāvematikāanupasampannasaññāvasena.Sesāyāti anupasampannāya. Anupasampannāya upasampannasaññā, vematikā, anupasampannasaññā akkosati, dukkaṭanti evaṃtikadukkaṭaṃ.
2210. The connection is: she scolds either herself or another. Tikapācittiya means in terms of an ordained woman with the perception of an ordained woman, doubt, or the perception of an unordained woman. Sesāyā means for an unordained woman. For an unordained woman, scolding with the perception of an ordained woman, with doubt, or with the perception of an unordained woman, is a dukkaṭa; thus, there is tikadukkaṭaṃ.
2211.Atthadhammānusāsaniṃ purakkhatvā vadantīnaṃ anāpattīti yojanā. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘atthapurekkhārāyāti aṭṭhakathaṃ kathentiyā. Dhammapurekkhārāyāti pāḷiṃ vācentiyā. Anusāsanipurekkhārāyāti ‘idānipi tvaṃ edisā, sādhu viramassu, no ce viramasi, addhā puna evarūpāni kammāni katvā niraye uppajjissasi, tiracchānayoniyā uppajjissasī’ti evaṃ anusāsaniyaṃ ṭhatvā vadantiyā anāpattī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 878).
2211. There is no offense for those speaking upholding the teaching on meaning and Dhamma. As it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "Atthapurekkhārāyā means for one relating the commentary. Dhammapurekkhārāyā means for one reciting the Pāḷi. Anusāsanipurekkhārāyā means for one standing in the teaching and speaking like this, ‘Even now you are like this, it is good if you abstain, but if you do not abstain, surely after doing such actions again, you will be reborn in hell, you will be reborn in the animal realm’" (pāci. aṭṭha. 878).
Navamaṃ.
Ninth.
2212.Vadhitvāti satthādīhi paharitvā.Vadhitvā vāti etthavā-saddopāḷiyaṃ‘‘vadhitvā vadhitvā’’ti (pāci. 880) vuttaṃ āmeḍitaṃ sūceti.
2212. Vadhitvā means having struck with a weapon etc. Vadhitvā vā: here, the word vā indicates the repetition stated in the Pāḷi as ‘‘vadhitvā vadhitvā’’ (pāci. 880).
2213.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Kāyavācācittasamuṭṭhānaṃdhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃnāma, samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānantipi etasseva nāmaṃ.
2213. Etthā means in this sikkhāpada. Originating from body, speech, and mind is called dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ, and samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhāna is also a name for this.
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth.
Andhakāravaggo dutiyo.
The Second Andhakāra Vagga.
2214.Yā pana bhikkhunīnaggāanivatthā apārutā hutvā nahāyati, assā sabbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ.Tassanahānassavosānepariyosāne sā bhikkhunījinavuttaṃjinena bhagavatā bhikkhunīnaṃ paññattaṃdosaṃpācittiyāpattiṃsamupetiāpajjatīti yojanā.Bhikkhuni dosanti ettha gāthābandhavasena rasso kato.
2214. The meaning is: whichever bhikkhunī, being naked, unclothed, uncovered, bathes, for her, in every instance of action, there is a dukkaṭa. At the end of that bathing, at the conclusion, that bhikkhunī incurs the fault declared by the Victor, by the Blessed One, for bhikkhunīs, the offense of pācittiya. Here, in Bhikkhuni dosa, the vowel is shortened due to the meter.
2215.Acchinnacīvarāti acchinnaudakasāṭikacīvarā.Naṭṭhacīvarāti corādīhi naṭṭhaudakasāṭikacīvarā.Āpadāsu vāti ‘‘mahagghaṃ imaṃ disvā corāpi hareyyu’’nti evarūpāsu āpadāsu vā naggāya nahāyantiyā na doso.
2215. Acchinnacīvarā means with robe and bathing-cloth intact. Naṭṭhacīvarā means with robe and bathing-cloth lost to thieves etc. Āpadāsu vā means there is no offense for bathing naked in such misfortunes as, "seeing this valuable item, thieves might take it."
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
2216.Dutiyeti ‘‘udakasāṭikaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā kārayamānāyā’’tiādisikkhāpade (pāci. 888).
2216. Dutiye means in the sikkhāpada beginning "udakasāṭikaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā kārayamānāyā" (pāci. 888).
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
2217-8.Dussibbitaṃ cīvaranti asakkaccasibbitaṃ cīvaraṃ.Visibbetvāti dussibbitaṃ puna sibbanatthāya sayaṃ vā vigatasibbanaṃ katvā. ‘‘Visibbāpetvā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘visibbetvā vā visibbāpetvā vā’’ti (pāci. 893).Anantarāyāti dasasu antarāyesu aññatarantarāyarahitā.Taṃvisibbitaṃ, visibbāpitaṃ vā cīvaraṃ. ‘‘Anantarāyā taṃ pacchā’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena rasso kato.Na sibbeyyāti etthāpi ‘‘na sibbāpeyyā’’ti seso. Yathāha ‘‘neva sibbeyya, na sibbāpanāya ussukkaṃ kareyyā’’ti (pāci. 893).
2217-8. Dussibbitaṃ cīvaranti means a robe stitched carelessly. Visibbetvā means having unstitched a badly-stitched robe oneself in order to stitch it again. "Visibbāpetvā" is the remainder. As it was said, "visibbetvā vā visibbāpetvā vā" (pāci. 893). Anantarāyā means without any of the ten hindrances. Taṃ refers to that unstitched or caused-to-be-unstitched robe. "Anantarāyā taṃ pacchā" should be stated, but the vowel is shortened due to the meter. Na sibbeyyā means "na sibbāpeyyā" is also the remainder here. As it was said, "neva sibbeyya, na sibbāpanāya ussukkaṃ kareyyā" (pāci. 893).
Catupañcāhanti ettha ‘‘uttarichappañcavācāhi (pāci. 62-64), uttaridirattatiratta’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 51-52) viya appasaṅkhyāya bahusaṅkhyāyaṃ antogadhattepi ubhayavacanaṃ lokavohāravasena vacanasiliṭṭhatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Dhureti sibbanussāhe.Nikkhittamatteti vissaṭṭhamatte.
Catupañcāha means here, as with "uttarichappañcavācāhi (pāci. 62-64), uttaridirattatiratta" (pāci. 51-52) etc., although the dual number is included within the unspecified multiple number, the plural is due to linguistic convention, according to popular usage. Dhure means in the effort of stitching. Nikkhittamatte means as soon as it is put down.
2219.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti upasampannāya upasampannasaññā, vematikā, anupasampannasaññāti tīsu vāresu tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Sesāyāti anupasampannāya.Tikadukkaṭanti vārattaye dukkaṭattayaṃ.
2219. Tikapācittiyaṃ vutta means tikapācittiyaṃ is stated in three instances: for an ordained woman, with the perception of an ordained woman, with doubt, and with the perception of an unordained woman. Sesāyā means for an unordained woman. Tikadukkaṭa means three dukkaṭas in three instances.
2220.Ubhinnanti upasampannānupasampannānaṃ.Aññasminti cīvarato aññasmiṃ.Antarāyepi vā satīti rājacorādiantarāyānaṃ dasannaṃ aññatare sati.
2220. Ubhinna means for both ordained and unordained women. Aññasmi means in something other than a robe. Antarāyepi vā satī means when there is one of the ten hindrances, such as royal or thieves.
2221.‘‘Dhuranikkhepanaṃ nāma, samuṭṭhānamidaṃ mata’’nti idaṃaṭṭhakathāya‘‘dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhāna’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 893) vuttameva gahetvā vuttaṃ, terasasu samuṭṭhānasīsesu ‘‘dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhāna’’nti visuṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ nāma natthi.Mātikaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhāna’’nti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā, atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ, taṃ samuṭṭhānasīsesu antogadhameva. Tasmā ‘‘dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhāna’’nti idaṃ samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānasseva pariyāyoti gahetabbaṃ.
2221. ‘‘Dhuranikkhepanaṃ nāma, samuṭṭhānamidaṃ mata’’: this is stated taking what was said in the Aṭṭhakathā as ‘‘dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhāna’’ (pāci. aṭṭha. 893) itself; among the thirteen categories of origins, there is no separate category of origin named ‘‘dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhāna’’. And in the Mātikaṭṭhakathā, ‘‘samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhāna’’ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā, similar in meaning) is stated, and that is included among the categories of origins. Therefore, ‘‘dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhāna’’ should be taken as a synonym for samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhāna.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
2222.Pañca ahānipañcāhaṃ,pañcāhamevapañcāhikaṃ.‘‘Atikkameyyā’’ti kiriyāya dvikammakattā‘‘pañcāhika’’nti ca‘‘saṅghāṭicāra’’nti ca upayogatthe eva upayogavacanaṃ. Saṅghaṭitaṭṭhenasaṅghāṭi,iti vakkhamānānaṃ pañcannaṃ cīvarānamevādhivacanaṃ, saṅghāṭīnaṃ cārosaṅghāṭicāro,paribhogavasena vā otāpanavasena vā parivattananti attho. ‘‘Pañcāhikaṃ saṅghāṭicāraṃ atikkameyyāti pañcamaṃ divasaṃ pañca cīvarāni neva nivāseti na pārupati na otāpeti pañcamaṃ divasaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 899) vacanato pañcadivasabbhantare yaṃ kiñci akatvā atikkāmentiyā cīvaragaṇanāya pācitti hotīti dassetumāha‘‘yātikkameyyā’’tiādi.
2222. Five days are pañcāhaṃ, pañcāhikaṃ means just five days. Since the verb ‘‘atikkameyyā’’ has two objects, ‘‘pañcāhika’’ and ‘‘saṅghāṭicāra’’ are the locative case used in the sense of the locative. Saṅghāṭi in the sense of being assembled is a designation for the five robes to be stated below, saṅghāṭicāro is the movement of the saṅghāṭis, meaning exchanging in terms of use or airing. To show that a pācitti is incurred by the counting of robes for one who spends five days without doing anything whatsoever within five days, from the statement ‘‘Pañcāhikaṃ saṅghāṭicāraṃ atikkameyyāti pañcamaṃ divasaṃ pañca cīvarāni neva nivāseti na pārupati na otāpeti pañcamaṃ divasaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 899), he says ‘‘yātikkameyyā’’ etc.
2223.Ticīvaranti antaravāsakauttarāsaṅgasaṅghāṭisaṅkhātaṃ ticīvarañca.Saṃkaccīti thanaveṭhanasaṅkhātaṃ cīvarañca.Dakasāṭīti utunikāle nivāsetabbaudakasāṭicīvarañca.Itiime pañca.Pañca tūti pañca cīvarāni nāma.
2223. Ticīvara means the three robes consisting of the antaravāsaka, uttarāsaṅga, and saṅghāṭi. Saṃkaccī means the cloth that wraps around the breasts. Dakasāṭī means the bathing cloth to be worn in the hot season. Iti means these five. Pañca tū means these five robes.
2224-5.Tikapācittīti pañcāhātikkantasaññā, vematikā, anatikkantasaññāti vikappattaye pācittiyattayaṃ hoti.Pañcāhānatikkanteatikkantasaññāvematikānaṃ vasena dvikadukkaṭaṃ.
2224-5. Tika-pācittī: A pācittiya for each of the three alternatives: having the perception of exceeding five days, being doubtful, and having the perception of not exceeding [five days]. With five days not exceeded: A double dukkata for the perceptions of exceeding [five days] and being doubtful.
‘‘Pañcame divase’’tiādi anāpattivārasandassanaṃ.Nisevatīti nivāseti vā pārupati vā.Otāpetīti ettha vā-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, otāpeti vāti attho.Āpadāsupīti mahagghaṃ cīvaraṃ, na sakkā hoti corabhayādīsu paribhuñjituṃ, evarūpe upaddave anāpatti.
"On the fifth day," etc., shows instances of non-offenses. Nisevati means to wear or cover. Otāpeti: Here, the word "vā" is understood by elision, meaning either "otāpeti." Āpadāsupī: A valuable robe that cannot be used due to fear of thieves, etc.; in such an emergency, there is no offense.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
2226.Aññissā saṅkametabbacīvaraṃ anāpucchā gahetvā yā paribhuñjati, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā,aññissāupasampannāya santakaṃ pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ tassā avatvā ādāya puna tassā dātabbaṃ, adatvāyābhikkhunī paṭisevati, tassā pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho. ‘‘Saṅkametabbacīvaraṃ saṅkamanīya’’nti pariyāyasaddā ete. Yathāha ‘‘cīvarasaṅkamanīyanti saṅkametabbacīvaraṃ, aññissā santakaṃ anāpucchā gahitaṃ puna paṭidātabbacīvaranti attho’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 903).
2226. The meaning is: If a bhikkhuni takes a robe that is to be transferred to another without asking, and uses it, she incurs a pācittiya. Aññissā: One of the five robes belonging to a fully ordained bhikkhuni, which is taken without her permission, intending to give it back to her, but yā if the bhikkhuni uses it without giving it back, she incurs a pācittiya. "Saṅkametabbacīvaraṃ" and "saṅkamanīya" are synonymous terms. As it is said, "Cīvarasaṅkamanīyaṃ means saṅkametabbacīvaraṃ, a robe belonging to another taken without permission, which should be given back" (pāci. aṭṭha. 903).
2227.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘upasampannāya upasampannasaññā…pe… vematikā …pe… anupasampannasaññā cīvarasaṅkamanīyaṃ dhāreti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 905) evaṃ tikapācittiyaṃpāḷiyaṃvuttaṃ.Sesāyāti anupasampannāya.‘‘Tikadukkaṭa’’nti idañca vuttanayameva.Āpadāsūti sace apārutaṃ vā anivatthaṃ vā corā haranti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu vā.
2227. Tika-pācittiyaṃ vutta: The tika-pācittiya is stated in the Pali as: "Having the perception of a fully ordained [bhikkhuni] regarding a fully ordained [bhikkhuni]... being doubtful... having the perception of an unordained [person], she wears a robe meant for transfer, an offense of pācittiya" (pāci. 905). Sesāyā: To an unordained [person]. "Tika-dukkata": This too, is as previously stated. Āpadāsu: If thieves steal it while it is unwrapped or unworn, or in such emergencies.
2228.Etaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kathinena tulyanti yojanā. Gahaṇaṃ, paribhogo cakriyaṃ. Anāpucchanaṃakriyaṃ.
2228. This arising is similar to that regarding the kathina. Taking and using are kriyaṃ (actions). Not asking permission is akriyaṃ (non-action).
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
2229.Labhitabbaṃ tu cīvaranti labhitabbaṃ vikappanupagaṃ cīvaraṃ.Nivāretīti yathā te dātukāmā na denti, evaṃ antarāyaṃ parakkamati.Pācittiṃ paridīpayeti sace tassā vacanena te na denti, bhikkhuniyā pācittiyaṃ vadeyyāti attho.
2229. Labhitabbaṃ tu cīvaraṃ: A robe that should be obtained, a robe that is subject to assignment. Nivāreti: Obstructs in such a way that those who are willing to give, do not give. Pācittiṃ paridīpaye: If they do not give because of her words, the bhikkhuni should declare a pācittiya.
2230.Ettha paṭhamaṃ ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti vuttattāgaṇassāti dve tayova gahetabbā.Lābheti ettha ‘‘nivārite’’ti seso. Sace aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ nivāreti, tatheva dukkaṭanti yojanā.Aññanti vikappanupagacīvarato aññaṃ.Parikkhāranti yaṃ kiñci thālakādīnaṃ vā sappitelādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ.
2230. Here, since it is first said "to the Sangha," gaṇassa means two or three should be taken. Lābhe: Here, "nivārite" is understood. If she obstructs another parikkhāra, then similarly, a dukkata is incurred. Aññaṃ: Other than a robe subject to assignment. Parikkhāraṃ: Any item whatsoever, such as a bowl or oil, etc.
2231.Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvāti ‘‘kittakaṃ agghanakaṃ dātukāmatthāti pucchati, ‘ettakaṃ nāmā’ti vadanti, ‘āgametha tāva, idāni vatthu mahagghaṃ, katipāhena kappāse āgate samagghaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā.Na dosatāti na doso, anāpattīti attho.
2231. Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvā: "Asking how much it is worth, they say, 'It is worth so much.' Showing the benefit by saying, 'Wait a while; right now cloth is expensive; in a few days, when cotton comes, it will be cheaper.'" Na dosatā: There is no fault, no offense.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
Sixth.
2232-3.Dhammikaṃsamaggena saṅghena sannipatitvā kariyamānaṃ cīvarānaṃvibhaṅgaṃbhājanaṃyābhikkhunīpaṭisedheyyapaṭibāheyya,tassāevaṃ paṭisedhentiyā pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā. Adhamme dhammasaññāya dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti yojanā.Ubho vematikāya vāti ubhosu vematikāya. Gāthābandhavasena su-saddalopo. Dhammike adhammike cīvaravibhaṅge vematikāya paṭibāhantiyā dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti yojanā. Yathāha ‘‘dhammike vematikā paṭibāhati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Adhammike vematikā paṭibāhati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti.Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvāti ‘‘ekissā ekaṃ sāṭakaṃ nappahoti, āgametha tāva, katipāheneva uppajjissati, tato bhājessāmī’’ti (pāci. 914) evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā.
2232-3. Dhammikaṃ: A distribution of robes vibhaṅgaṃ that is being done by the entire Sangha, having convened in agreement, yā if a bhikkhuni paṭisedheyya refuses or rejects it, tassā, for her thus refusing, a pācittiya is incurred. If she has a perception of dhamma in what is not dhamma, a dukkata is declared. Ubho vematikāya vā: Being doubtful in both. The su- sound is elided due to the metrical form. If she rejects the distribution of robes that is either according to dhamma or not according to dhamma, being doubtful, a dukkata is declared. As it is said, "If she rejects what is according to dhamma, being doubtful, an offense of dukkata is incurred. If she rejects what is not according to dhamma, being doubtful, an offense of dukkata is incurred." Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvā: Showing the benefit by saying, "One sāṭaka is not enough for one [bhikkhuni]; wait a while, it will arise in a few days, then we will distribute it" (pāci. 914).
Sattamaṃ.
Seventh.
2235-6.Nivāsanupagaṃ vā tathā pārupanupagaṃ vā kappabindukataṃ vā yaṃ kiñci cīvaraṃ pañcasahadhammikeca mātāpitaropimuñcitvāaññassa yassa kassacigahaṭṭhassa vā paribbājakassa vā yadi dadeyya, tassāpi pācittiyaṃ pariyāputanti yojanā. Ettha ca‘‘pitaro’’ti mātā ca pitā ca mātāpitaroti vattabbe virūpekasesavasena niddeso daṭṭhabbo.
2235-6. Whether it is for wearing as an undergarment or for wearing as an outer garment, or marked with an identifying kappabindu, whatever robe it may be, having released [it] from the five sahadhammike (co-religious), mātāpitaropi (mother and father), if she gives it to aññassa yassa kassaci (anyone at all), a layperson or a wandering ascetic, for her too, a pācittiya is incurred. Here, "pitaro" should be understood as an irregular instance of ekasesa compound, where it should have been stated as mātā ca pitā ca mātāpitaroti (mother and father).
2237.Etthaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade tā pana pācittiyo cīvarānaṃ gaṇanāya vasena gaṇetabbāti yojanā.
2237. Ettha: In this sikkhāpada, those pācittiyas, however, should be counted according to the calculation of the robes.
2238.Tāva sampaṭicchito kālo etassātitāvakālikaṃ,cīvaraṃ. ‘‘Aññassā’’ti pubbe vuttassa dūrattā punapi‘‘aññesa’’nti āha, soyevattho.
2238. Tāva sampaṭicchito kālo etassāti tāvakālikaṃ, cīvaraṃ: A robe that is accepted for that long. Because "aññassa" was said earlier and is far away, again he says "aññesa", the meaning is the same.
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
Eighth.
2239.Yā pana bhikkhunī ‘‘sace mayaṃ sakkoma, dassāma karissāmāti evaṃ vācā bhinnā hotī’’ti vuttāya dubbalāya cīvarapaccāsāya cīvarassa vibhaṅgaṃ nisedhetvā cīvare kālaṃ atikkameyya, assādosatāpācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.Cīvare kālanti ‘‘cīvarakālasamayo nāma anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañcamāsā’’ti (pāci. 922)padabhājanevuttaṃ cīvarakālaṃ.Atikkameyyāti ‘‘anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimaṃ divasaṃ, atthate kathine kathinuddhāradivasaṃ atikkāmetī’’ti vuttavidhiṃ atikkāmeyya.
2239. Ya pana bhikkhunī, "sace mayaṃ sakkoma, dassāma karissāmāti evaṃ vācā bhinnā hotī"ti vuttāya dubbalāya cīvarapaccāsāya cīvarassa vibhaṅgaṃ nisedhetvā cīvare kālaṃ atikkameyya, assā dosatā, a pācittiya offense is incurred. Cīvare kālaṃ: Padabhājane (in the word analysis) states "Cīvarakālasamayo nāma anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañcamāsā"ti (the time for robes is the last month of the rains when the kathina is not spread, or five months when the kathina is spread) (pāci. 922). Atikkameyyā: Should transgress the rule stated as "anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimaṃ divasaṃ, atthate kathine kathinuddhāradivasaṃ atikkāmetī" (should transgress the last day of the rains when the kathina is not spread, or the day of the removal of the kathina when the kathina is spread).
2240.‘‘Adubbalacīvare dubbalacīvarasaññā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vacanatosudubbalanti cetasāti etthasu-saddo padapūraṇe.Ubhosūti dubbale, adubbale ca.Kaṅkhitāya vāti vematikāya vā.
2240. Because of the statement "Adubbalacīvare dubbalacīvarasaññā, āpatti dukkaṭassā"ti (perceiving a weak robe in a not-weak robe, an offense of dukkata is incurred), sudubbalanti cetasā, here the su- is merely a filler. Ubhosū: In both, weak and not-weak. Kaṅkhitāya vā: Or being doubtful.
2241.Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvāti ‘‘kiñcāpi ‘na mayaṃ ayye sakkomā’ti vadanti, idāni pana tesaṃ kappāso āgamissati, saddho pasanno puriso āgamissati, addhā dassatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 921) evaṃaṭṭhakathāyavuttanayena ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā.
2241. Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvā: Showing the benefit in the manner stated in the aṭṭhakathā (commentary) as, "kiñcāpi 'na mayaṃ ayye sakkomā'ti vadanti, idāni pana tesaṃ kappāso āgamissati, saddho pasanno puriso āgamissati, addhā dassatī"ti (even though they say, 'we are not able, venerable lady,' now cotton will come to them, a faithful and pleased man will come, surely he will give) (pāci. aṭṭha. 921).
Navamaṃ.
Ninth.
2242.Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāranti ‘‘dhammiko nāma kathinuddhāro samaggo bhikkhunisaṅgho sannipatitvā uddharatī’’ti (pāci. 929) vuttaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ.
2242. Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ: The removal of the kathina is "dhammiko nāma kathinuddhāro samaggo bhikkhunisaṅgho sannipatitvā uddharatī"ti (according to the dhamma, the removal of the kathina is when the entire bhikkhuni Sangha convenes and removes it) (pāci. 929).
2243.Yassāti yassa kathinassa.Atthāramūlako ānisaṃsonāma ‘‘yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo, so nesaṃ bhavissatī’’ti (mahāva. 306) anuññāto tasmiṃ vihāre uppajjanakacīvaravatthānisaṃso.Uddhāramūlakonāma antarubbhāraṃ kārāpentehi upāsakehi diyyamānacīvaravatthānisaṃso.
2243. Yassā: Of which kathina. Atthāramūlako ānisaṃso nāma: The benefit rooted in the spreading, is the benefit of the cloth for robes arising in that monastery, which is "yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo, so nesaṃ bhavissatī"ti (whatever arising of robes there is, that will be for them) (mahāva. 306). Uddhāramūlako nāma: The benefit rooted in the removal, is the benefit of cloth for robes being given by the lay followers who are having the construction done.
2245.Samānisaṃsopīti atthāraānisaṃsena samānisaṃsopi ubbhāro.Saddhāpālanakaāraṇāti pasādānurakkhanatthāya dātabboti yojanā.Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvāti ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho jiṇṇacīvaro, kathinānisaṃsamūlako mahālābho’’ti evarūpaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā.
2245. Samānisaṃsopī: Even a removal with equal benefit to the benefit of the spreading. Saddhāpālanakaāraṇā: Should be given for the sake of preserving faith. Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvā: Showing a benefit of such a kind as, "the bhikkhuni Sangha has worn out robes, [and this is] a great gain rooted in the kathina-benefit."
2246.Samuṭṭhānādinā saddhiṃsesaṃ panavinicchayajātaṃasesenasabbākārenasattamenasikkhāpadenasamaṃ mataṃ‘‘sadisa’’nti viññātaṃ.Kiñcipiappakampiapubbaṃtattha vuttanayato aññaṃ natthīti yojanā.
2246. Sesaṃ pana: The rest, however, the arising of judgement, along with the origin etc., asesena (without exception), in every way, is samaṃ mataṃ (considered the same) as the sattamena (seventh) sikkhāpada (precept), "sadisa"nti viññātaṃ (is known as "similar"). Kiñcipi: Even a little, apubbaṃ: unprecedented, natthīti, there is nothing aññaṃ (different) from the manner stated tattha (there).
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth.
Naggavaggo tatiyo.
The third Naggavagga is complete.
2247.‘‘Yā pana bhikkhuniyo dve ekamañce tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 933) paññattasikkhāpade vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ekāyā’’tiādi.Ekāyāti ekāya bhikkhuniyā.Aparāti aññā upasampannā.Nipajjeyyunti ettha ‘‘ekamañce’’ti seso.Dveti dve bhikkhuniyo.
2247. To show the judgement on the sikkhāpada established as, "yā pana bhikkhuniyo dve ekamañce tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ, pācittiya"nti (whatever bhikkhunis lie down together, two on one bed, a pācittiya) (pāci. 933), he says "ekāyā" etc. Ekāyā: For one bhikkhuni. Aparā: Another fully ordained [bhikkhuni]. Nipajjeyyuṃ: Here, "ekamañce" is understood. Dve: Two bhikkhunis.
2248-9.‘‘Ekāya cā’’tiādi anāpattivāraniddeso. Ubho vāpi samaṃ nisīdantīti yojanā.Eḷakenāti eḷakalomasikkhāpadena.
2248-9. "Ekāya cā" etc., is an indication of instances of non-offense. Ubho vāpi samaṃ nisīdantīti yojanā: The meaning is, or both may sit together. Eḷakenā: By the eḷakaloma (wool) sikkhāpada.
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
2250-1.Pāvārakaṭasārādinti ettha bhummekavacanaṃ.‘‘Saṃhārimesū’’ti iminā samānādhikaraṇattā bahuvacanappasaṅge vacanavipallāsenettha ekavacananiddesoti daṭṭhabbo. Pāvāro ca kaṭasāro ca te ādi yassāti viggaho, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Ekakanti niddhāritabbanidassanaṃ. Ekamevaekakaṃ. Saṃhārimesu pāvārādīsu aññataranti attho.‘‘Pāvāroti kojavādayo’’ti vadanti.Kaṭasāroti kaṭoyeva.Ādi-saddena attharitvā sayanārahaṃ sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tenevāti yaṃ atthataṃ, teneva. Pārupitvā sace yā pana dve saheva nipajjanti, tāsaṃ pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā. Ettha ca attharaṇapāvuraṇakicce ekasseva niddiṭṭhattā ekassa antassa attharaṇañca ekassa antassa pārupanañca viññāyati. Yathāha ‘‘saṃhārimānaṃ pāvārattharaṇakaṭasārakādīnaṃ ekaṃ antaṃ attharitvā ekaṃ pārupitvā tuvaṭṭentīnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 937).
2250-1. Pāvārakaṭasārādi: Here, the single instance is used in a general sense. "Saṃhārimesū": Because of being in apposition with this, it should be seen that the single instance is indicated here by way of alteration of instances in the event of the possibility of the plural. Pāvāro ca kaṭasāro ca te ādi yassāti viggaho: Pāvāra and kaṭasāra, etc., is its separation, this generality is in the determination. Ekakaṃ: An instance of what should be determined. Ekameva ekakaṃ: Only one is one. Saṃhārimesu pāvārādīsu aññataranti attho: The meaning is, one of the pāvāra etc. among the bedding. "Pāvāroti kojavādayo"ti vadanti: "Pāvāra" means woolen blankets, etc., they say. Kaṭasāroti kaṭoyeva: "Kaṭasāra" is a mat. Ādi-saddena attharitvā sayanārahaṃ sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti: By the ādi-word, all that is suitable for lying down after spreading, is included. Tenevā: With that which has been spread. Sace yā pana dve saheva nipajjanti, tāsaṃ pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā: The meaning is, if those two lie down together having covered [themselves], a pācittiya is incurred for them. Here, because the action of spreading and covering has been indicated for only one, it is understood that spreading is for one end and covering is for one end. As it is said, "Saṃhārimānaṃ pāvārattharaṇakaṭasārakādīnaṃ ekaṃ antaṃ attharitvā ekaṃ pārupitvā tuvaṭṭentīnametaṃ adhivacana"nti (this is an expression for those who lie down after spreading one end and covering one [end] of the pāvāra-spreading-mat-etc. of the bedding) (pāci. aṭṭha. 937).
Ekasmiṃekattharaṇe vā ekapāvuraṇe vā nipajjane sati tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ dukkaṭanti sambandho.Dvikadukkaṭaṃ vuttanti ‘‘nānattharaṇapāvuraṇe ekattharaṇapāvuraṇasaññā…pe… vematikā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 939) vuttaṃ dukkaṭadvayaṃ.
Ekasmiṃ: The connection is, upon lying down on one spread or one covering, a dukkata is incurred for those two bhikkhunis. Dvikadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ: The double dukkata is stated as, "nānattharaṇapāvuraṇe ekattharaṇapāvuraṇasaññā…pe… vematikā, āpatti dukkaṭassa"ti (perceiving one spread or covering in different spreads and coverings… being doubtful, an offense of dukkata is incurred) (pāci. 939).
2252.Vavatthānaṃ nidassetvāti majjhe kāsāvaṃ vā kattarayaṭṭhiṃ vā antamaso kāyabandhanampi ṭhapetvā nipajjanti, anāpattīti attho.Sesaṃsamuṭṭhānādividhānaṃ.Ādināti imasmiṃyeva vagge paṭhamasikkhāpadena.Tulyanti samānaṃ.
2252. Vavatthānaṃ nidassetvā: After indicating a separation by placing a kāsāva robe or a knife or at least a waistband in the middle, they lie down, there is no offense. Sesaṃ: The rest, the procedure of origin etc. Ādinā: By the first sikkhāpada in this vagga itself. Tulyaṃ: Similar.
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
2253.Aññissābhikkhuniyā.Aphāsukāraṇāti aphāsukaraṇahetu.Anāpucchāti anāpucchitvā. Tassā purato ca caṅkamanādayo yadi kareyya, evaṃ karontiyā pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.Caṅkamanādayoti etthaādi-saddena ‘‘tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti uddisati vā uddisāpeti vā sajjhāyaṃ vā karotī’’ti (pāci. 943)padabhājanevuttānaṃ saṅgaho.
2253. Aññissā: Of another bhikkhuni. Aphāsukāraṇā: Because of causing discomfort. Anāpucchā: Without asking permission. Tassā purato ca caṅkamanādayo yadi kareyya, evaṃ karontiyā pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā: The meaning is, if she does walking meditation etc. in front of her, in thus doing, an offense of pācittiya is incurred. Caṅkamanādayo: Here, by the ādi-word, there is inclusion of those stated in the padabhājane (word analysis) as, "tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti uddisati vā uddisāpeti vā sajjhāyaṃ vā karotī"ti (whether she stands or sits or arranges a bed or recites or has [someone] recite or makes a recitation) (pāci. 943).
2254.Nivattanānaṃ gaṇanāyāti caṅkamantiyā caṅkamassa ubhayakoṭiṃ patvā nivattantiyā nivattanagaṇanāya.Payogatoyevāti payogagaṇanāyeva, iriyāpathaparivattanagaṇanāyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Dosāti pācittiyāpattiyo.
2254. Nivattanānaṃ gaṇanāyā: By counting the returns, the counting of the returns when she has reached both ends of the walking meditation. Payogatoyevā: By counting the effort alone, it is said, by counting the change in posture alone. Dosā: Pācittiya offenses.
2255.Padānaṃ gaṇanāvasāti ettha ādi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Yathāha ‘‘padādigaṇanāyā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 943).Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti upasampannāya upasampannasaññā, vematikā, anupasampannasaññāti vikappattayassa vasena pācittiyattayaṃ vuttaṃ.Sesāyāti anupasampannāya.
2255. Padānaṃ gaṇanāvasā: Here, the ādi-word is understood by elision. Yathāha ‘‘padādigaṇanāyā’’ti (as he said, "by counting the feet etc.") (pāci. aṭṭha. 943). Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ: The tika-pācittiya is stated as, "upasampannāya upasampannasaññā, vematikā, anupasampannasaññāti vikappattayassa vasena pācittiyattayaṃ vuttaṃ" (for a fully ordained [bhikkhuni], having the perception of a fully ordained [bhikkhuni], being doubtful, having the perception of an unordained [person], a triple pācittiya is stated, by way of the triple alternative). Sesāyā: For an unordained [person].
2256.Naca aphāsukāmāyāti āpucchitvātassābhikkhuniyā purato caṅkamanādīni karontiyā anāpattīti yojanā.
2256. Na ca aphāsukāmāyā: Having asked permission from tassā (that) bhikkhuni, there is no offense for doing walking meditation etc. in front of her.
2257.Kriyākriyanti caṅkamanādikaraṇaṃ kiriyaṃ. Āpucchāya akaraṇaṃ akiriyaṃ.Pāpamānasanti akusalacittaṃ.
2257. Kriyākriyaṃ: Doing walking meditation etc. is kiriyaṃ (action). Not doing [it] with permission is akiriyaṃ (non-action). Pāpamānasaṃ: An unwholesome mind.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
2258-9.Anantarāyāti vakkhamānesu rājantarāyādīsu dasasu antarāyesu aññatararahitā bhikkhunī.Dukkhitanti gilānaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘dukkhitā nāma gilānā vuccatī’’ti (pāci. 948).Sahajīvininti saddhivihāriniṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sahajīvinī nāma saddhivihārinī vuccatī’’ti.Aññāya vā nupaṭṭhāpeyyāti aññāya bhikkhuniyā, sikkhamānāya, sāmaṇeriyā vā gihiniyā vā upaṭṭhānaṃ na kārāpeyya.Nupaṭṭheyya sayampi vāti yā upaṭṭhānaṃ na kareyya.Dhure nikkhittamatte vāti ‘‘neva upaṭṭhessāmi, na upaṭṭhāpanāya ussukkaṃ karissāmī’’ti dhure ussāhe nikkhittamatteyeva.Tassāti upajjhāyāya.
2258-9. Anantarāyā: A bhikkhuni who is without any of the ten interferences among the rājantarāyādīsu (interferences of kings etc.) that will be stated. Dukkhitā: One who is ill. Yathāha ‘‘dukkhitā nāma gilānā vuccatī’’ti (as he said, "dukkhitā is said to be one who is ill") (pāci. 948). Sahajīvini: One who lives together, a saddhivihāriniṃ (co-resident). Yathāha ‘‘sahajīvinī nāma saddhivihārinī vuccatī’’ti (as he said, "sahajīvinī is said to be a saddhivihārinī"). Aññāya vā nupaṭṭhāpeyyā: She should not have the tending done by another bhikkhuni, a sikkhamānā, a sāmaṇerī, or a laywoman. Nupaṭṭheyya sayampi vā: Nor should she herself do the tending. Dhure nikkhittamatte vā: Or, merely upon having put down the burden, [thinking] "I will neither tend, nor will I make an effort for tending." Tassā: For the upajjhāyā (preceptor).
Antevāsiniyā vāpīti pabbajjāupasampadādhammanissayavasena catubbidhāsu antevāsinīsu aññatarāya.Itarāyāti anupasampannāya.
Antevāsiniyā vāpī: For any of the four kinds of antevāsinī (pupils) based on ordination, full ordination, dhamma, or dependence. Itarāyā: For one who is unordained.
2260.Gilānāyāti sayaṃ gilānāya. ‘‘Gavesitvā alabhantiyā’’ti padacchedo, aññaṃ upaṭṭhāyikaṃ pariyesitvā alabhamānāyāti attho. ‘‘Āpadāsu ummattikādīna’’nti padacchedo. Gāthābandhavasena vaṇṇalopopi daṭṭhabbo.Āpadāsūti tathārūpe upaddave sati.Dhuranikkhepanodayanti dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
2260. Gilānāyā means by a sick (bhikkhuni) herself. The word division is ‘‘Gavesitvā alabhantiyā’’, meaning not obtaining after searching for another attendant. The word division is ‘‘Āpadāsu ummattikādīnaṃ’’. The elision of letters should also be seen due to the structure of the verse. Āpadāsu means when there is such a trouble. Dhuranikkhepanodayaṃ means the arising of relinquishing the burden. What should be said here has already been said below.
Catutthaṃ.
The Fourth.
2261-2.Puggalikassa attāyattaparāyattavasena aniyamitattā‘‘saka’’nti iminā niyameti.Sakaṃ puggalikanti attano puggalikaṃ.Datvāti ettha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā’’ti seso.Sakavāṭanti parivattakadvārakavāṭasahitaṃ.Upassayanti gehaṃ.Dvārādīsūti etthaādi-saddena gabbhapamukhānaṃ saṅgaho, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Bahūnipīti niddhāretabbanidassanaṃ. Bahūnipi dvārāni vā bahū gabbhe vā bahūni pamukhāni vā.Tanti yassā upassayo dinno, taṃ bhikkhuniṃ.Nikkaḍḍhantiyāti atikkāmentiyā.Tassāti yā nikkaḍḍhati, tassā.
2261-2. Because it is unfixed whether it belongs to oneself or to another in the case of individual property, the term ‘‘saka’’ defines it. Sakaṃ puggalikaṃ means one's own individual property. Datvā here implies ‘‘by the bhikkhuni’’. Sakavāṭaṃ means together with the revolving door panel. Upassayaṃ means a dwelling. In Dvārādīsu, the word ādi includes the entrance to the inner chamber, and this is a locative used in determination. Bahūnipi is an example of what is to be determined: Even if there are many doors, or many inner chambers, or many entrances. Taṃ refers to that bhikkhuni to whom the dwelling was given. Nikkaḍḍhantiyā means causing to go out. Tassā means to her who causes to go out.
2263.Etthāti nikkaḍḍhane.Eseva nayoti ‘‘payogagaṇanāya āpattī’’ti dassitanayo. Etthapayogonāma āṇāpanaṃ, iminā ‘‘ekāyāṇattiyā anekesu dvāresu atikkāmitesupi ekāva āpatti hotī’’ti evamādikaṃ aṭṭhakathāgatavinicchayaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 943, 952 atthato samānaṃ) saṅgaṇhāti.
2263. Ettha means in this causing to go out. Eseva nayo means the method shown as "an offense for each effort." Here, payogo means ordering. By this, it includes such decisions found in the commentaries as "even if she causes (someone) to go out through many doors with one command, there is only one offense" (pāci. aṭṭha. 943, 952 similar in meaning).
2264.Tesu vinicchayesu ekaṃ vinicchayavisesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ettakāva imaṃ dvārā’’tiādi. Dvāragaṇanāya āpattiyodvāragaṇanāpattiyo.
2264.To show one particular decision among those decisions, he says, ‘‘ettakāva imaṃ dvārā’’ etc. Offenses counted by the number of doors are dvāragaṇanāpattiyo.
2265.Akavāṭamhāti akavāṭabandhato upassayā nikkaḍḍhantiyā dukkaṭanti yojanā.Sesāyāti anupasampannāya.Tikadukkaṭanti anupasampannāya upasampannasaññāya, vematikāya, anupasampannasaññāya ca vasena tikadukkaṭaṃ.Ubhinnanti upasampannānupasampannānaṃ.Parikkhāresūti pattacīvarādīsu parikkhāresu.Sabbatthāti sabbesu payogesu, nikkaḍḍhiyamānesu, nikkaḍḍhāpiyamānesu cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
2265. Akavāṭamhā means a dukkata for causing to go out of the dwelling from a place without a door panel, is the construction. Sesāyā means to one who is not fully ordained. Tikadukkaṭaṃ means a triple dukkata due to the perception of full ordination in one who is not fully ordained, due to doubt, and due to the perception of non-ordination. Ubhinnaṃ means to both the fully ordained and the not fully ordained. Parikkhāresu means in requisites such as bowls and robes. Sabbattha means in all efforts, it has been said, whether (she) is causing to go out or having (someone) caused to go out.
2266.Etthaimasmiṃ sikkhāpadesamuṭṭhānādivinicchayena sahasesaṃvinicchayajātaṃasesenasabbappakārena saṅghikā vihārasmā nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadenasamaṃ mataṃ‘‘sadisa’’nti sallakkhitanti yojanā.
2266. Ettha, in this training rule, sesaṃ all the kinds of decisions samuṭṭhānādi together with the decision about origin etc. asesena in every way, is samaṃ mataṃ considered "similar" or regarded as analogous to the training rule about causing to go out from a Saṅghika monastery.
Pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth.
2267.Chaṭṭheti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī saṃsaṭṭhā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā’’tiādimātikāya (pāci. 956) niddiṭṭhe chaṭṭhasikkhāpade.Idha vattabbanti imasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye kathetabbaṃ.Ariṭṭhassa sikkhāpadenāti ariṭṭhasikkhāpadena.Vinicchayoti samuṭṭhānādiko.
2267. Chaṭṭhe means in the sixth training rule specified by the mātikā beginning with "Ya pana bhikkhunī saṃsaṭṭhā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā" (pāci. 956). Idha vattabbaṃ means what should be said in this Vinaya decision. Ariṭṭhassa sikkhāpadenā means by the Ariṭṭha training rule. Vinicchayo means the decision concerning origin etc.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth.
2268.Sāsaṅkasammateti ettha ‘‘sappaṭibhaye’’ti seso. Ubhayampi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.Antoraṭṭheti yassa vijite viharati, tasseva raṭṭhe. Sāsaṅkasammate sappaṭibhaye antoraṭṭhe satthena vinā cārikaṃ carantiyā bhikkhuniyā āpatti siyāti yojanā.
2268. Sāsaṅkasammate here implies ‘‘sappaṭibhaye’’. Both have the meaning already stated below. Antoraṭṭhe means in the country of the one in whose domain she dwells. A bhikkhuni who goes on tour without a weapon in a country recognized as dangerous and frightening incurs an offense, is the construction.
2269.Evaṃ carantiyā sagāmakaṭṭhāne gāmantarappavese ca agāmake araññe addhayojane ca vinayaññunā bhikkhunāpācittiyanayopācittiyāpattividhānakkamo ñeyyo ñātabboti yojanā.
2269.When she is behaving in this way, the method of expiation, pācittiyanayo, the order of the expiation offense, should be understood by a bhikkhuni who knows Vinaya in a village location, when entering another village, and in a forest without villages at a distance of half a yojana, is the construction.
2270.Saha satthena carantiyā na dosoti yojanā. Khemaṭṭhāne carantiyā, āpadāsu vā carantiyā na dosoti yojanā.
2270. There is no fault for one who goes with a weapon, is the construction. There is no fault for one who goes in a safe location, or for one who goes in times of danger, is the construction.
Sattamaṃ.
The Seventh.
2271.Aṭṭhamenavame vāpīti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī tiroraṭṭhe’’tiādike (pāci. 966) aṭṭhamasikkhāpade ca ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī antovassaṃ cārikaṃ careyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 970) vuttanavamasikkhāpade ca.Anuttānaṃ na vijjati,sabbaṃ uttānameva, tasmā ettha mayā na vicārīyatīti adhippāyo.
2271. Aṭṭhame navame vāpī means in the eighth training rule beginning with "Yā pana bhikkhunī tiroraṭṭhe" (pāci. 966) and in the ninth training rule which says "Yā pana bhikkhunī antovassaṃ cārikaṃ careyya, pācittiyaṃ" (pāci. 970). Anuttānaṃ na vijjati, there is nothing that is not clear, everything is clear, therefore, I will not discuss it here, is the intention.
Aṭṭhamanavamāni.
The Eighth and Ninth.
2272.‘‘Yā pana bhikkhunī vassaṃvutthā cārikaṃ na pakkameyya antamaso chappañcayojanānipi, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 974) vuttasikkhāpade vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pācittī’’tiādi. Ahaṃna gamissāmina pakkamissāmītidhuranikkhepekate pācittīti yojanā.Tathāti pācitti.
2272. To show the decision in the training rule that says, "Yā pana bhikkhunī vassaṃvutthā cārikaṃ na pakkameyya antamaso chappañcayojanānipi, pācittiyaṃ" (pāci. 974), he says, ‘‘pācittī’’ etc. I na gamissāmi will not depart, dhuranikkhepe when the burden is laid down, there is an expiation offense, is the construction. Tathā means similarly there is expiation.
2273.Vassaṃvutthāya pavāretvā antamaso pañca yojanāni gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Etthaapi-saddassa sambhāvanatthataṃ dassetumāha‘‘chasū’’tiādi.Idhaimasmiṃ anāpattivārechasuyojanesu yadatthi vattabbaṃ, taṃ kinnu nāma siyā, natthi kiñci vattabbanti attho. Pavāretvā cha yojanāni gacchantiyā anāpattibhāvo avuttasiddhovāti dīpeti.
2273. It is allowable for one who has dwelt during the rains to depart on tour after invitation for at least five yojanas. Here, to show that the word api has the meaning of possibility, he says ‘‘chasū’’ etc. Idha in this case of no offense, chasu in six yojanas, what is there to be said, what could there be to say, there is nothing to say, is the meaning. It reveals that the state of no offense for one who goes six yojanas after invitation is understood without being stated.
2274.Tīṇiyojanāni.Tenevāti yena gatā, teneva maggena.Aññena maggenāti gatamaggato aññena pathena.
2274. Tīṇi three yojanas. Tenevā by that same path by which she went. Aññena maggenā by a different path from the path she went.
2275.Dasavidhe antarāyasmiṃ satīti vakkhamānesu antarāyesu aññatarasmiṃ sati. Tassā anāpattīti yojanā.Āpadāsūti aṭṭādikāraṇena kenaci palibuddhādibhāvasaṅkhātāsu āpadāsu.Gilānāyāti sayaṃ gilānāya.Dutiyāyabhikkhuniyā alābhe vā apakkamantiyā anāpatti.
2275. Dasavidhe antarāyasmiṃ satī means when any one of the dangers to be mentioned is present. There is no offense for her, is the construction. Āpadāsu means in dangers consisting of being obstructed etc. by some cause such as being bitten by a snake etc. Gilānāyā means for one who is herself sick. Dutiyāya there is no offense for a bhikkhuni if there is no second one available or if she is departing.
2276.Rājā ca corā ca amanussā ca aggi ca toyañca vāḷā ca sarīsapā cāti viggaho.Manussoti ettha gāthābandhavasena pubbapadalopo ‘‘lābūni sīdantī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.77) viya. Jīvitañca brahmacariyā ca jīvitabrahmacariyanti samāhāradvande samāso, tassajīvitabrahmacariyassa. Antarāyā evaantarāyikā. Etesaṃ dasannaṃ aññatarasmiṃ apakkamantiyā anāpatti. Yathāha ‘‘antarāyeti dasavidhe antarāye. ‘Paraṃ gacchissāmī’ti nikkhantā, nadipūro pana āgato, corā vā magge honti, megho vā uṭṭhāti, nivattituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 976).
2276. The breakdown is: a king, and thieves, and non-humans, and fire, and water, and wild beasts, and reptiles. Manusso here has elision of the first word due to the structure of the verse, as in "lābūni sīdantī" etc. (jā. 1.1.77). Jīvitañca brahmacariyā ca jīvitabrahmacariyanti is a compound in the collective dual, of that jīvitabrahmacariyassa. Dangers are themselves antarāyikā. There is no offense for one who departs when any one of these ten is present. As it was said, "antarāya means in ten kinds of dangers. If one has set out thinking, 'I will go to the other side,' but a flood comes in the river, or there are thieves on the road, or a cloud arises, it is allowable to turn back" (pāci. aṭṭha. 976).
2277.Apakkamanaṃakriyaṃ. Anādariyena āpajjanato āha‘‘dukkhavedana’’nti.
2277. Departure is akriyaṃ, non-action. Because she incurs (the offense) without respect, he says, ‘‘dukkhavedana’’.
Dasamaṃ.
The Tenth.
Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.
The Fourth Chapter, the Tuvaṭṭa Vagga.
2278-80.Rājāgāranti rañño kīḷanagharaṃ.Cittāgāranti kīḷanacittasālaṃ.Ārāmanti kīḷanaupavanaṃ.Kīḷuyyānanti kīḷanatthāya kataṃ uyyānaṃ.Kīḷāvāpinti ettha kiñcāpipāḷiyaṃ(pāci. 979) pokkharaṇī vuttā, sā pana sabbajalāsayānaṃ kīḷāya katānaṃ upalakkhaṇavasena vuttāti āha ‘‘kīḷāvāpi’’nti, kīḷanatthāya katavāpinti attho.‘‘Nānākāra’’nti idaṃ yathāvuttapadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Sabbasaṅgāhikavasena‘‘tānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Nānākāraṃ rājāgāraṃ cittāgāraṃ ārāmaṃ kīḷuyyānaṃ vā kīḷāvāpiṃdaṭṭhuṃ gacchantīnaṃ tānisabbāni ekato daṭṭhuṃ gacchantīnaṃtāsaṃbhikkhunīnaṃ pade pade dukkaṭaṃ muninā niddiṭṭhanti yojanā.
2278-80. Rājāgāraṃ means the king's pleasure house. Cittāgāraṃ means a picture hall for pleasure. Ārāmaṃ means a pleasure garden. Kīḷuyyānaṃ means a park made for pleasure. Kīḷāvāpiṃ here, although pāḷiyaṃ (pāci. 979) a lotus pond is mentioned, that is said by way of being representative of all bodies of water made for pleasure, thus he says, ‘‘kīḷāvāpi’’, meaning a pond made for pleasure. ‘‘Nānākāraṃ’’ this should be connected to each of the terms mentioned as appropriate. In a way that encompasses everything, ‘‘tāni’’ is said. The construction is: For those going to see a pleasure house, or a picture hall, or a park, or a pleasure garden, or a pleasure pond of various kinds, for those going to see tāni all of those together, tāsaṃ for those bhikkhunis, a dukkata offense has been specified by the Sage at each step.
Pañcapīti rājāgārādīni pañcapi. Ekāyeva pācitti āpatti paridīpitāti yojanā.Taṃ taṃdisābhāgaṃ gantvā passanti ce, pāṭekkāpattiyo payogagaṇanāya siyunti yojanā.
Pañcapi means all five of the king's house etc. One single expiation offense has been clearly shown, is the construction. Taṃ taṃ if they go and see in each direction, there would be individual offenses counted by the effort, is the construction.
2281.Gamanabāhullena āpattibāhullaṃ pakāsetvā gīvāparivattanasaṅkhātena payogabāhullenāpi āpattibāhullaṃ pakāsetumāha‘‘payogabahutāyāpi, pācittibahutā siyā’’ti.Sabbatthāti yattha bhikkhuniyā pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha sabbattha.
2281. After revealing the multitude of offenses by the multitude of going, to reveal the multitude of offenses by the multitude of effort consisting of turning the neck, he says, ‘‘payogabahutāyāpi, pācittibahutā siyā’’. Sabbattha means everywhere where an expiation offense is mentioned for a bhikkhuni, everywhere there.
2282.‘‘Avasesopi anāpattī’’ti padacchedo. Anāpatti ca kathāmaggo caanāpattikathāmaggo,tesaṃ vinicchayoanāpattikathāmaggavinicchayo,‘‘anāpatti ārāme ṭhitā passatī’’tiādiko (pāci. 981) anāpattivinicchayo caaṭṭhakathāgato (pāci. aṭṭha. 981) avasesavinicchayo cāti attho.‘‘Ārāme ṭhitā’’ti etena ajjhārāme rājāgārādīni karonti, tāni passantiyā anāpattīti ayamanāpattivāro dassito. Eteneva antoārāme tattha tattha gantvā naccādīni viya rājāgārādīnipi passituṃ labhatītipi siddhaṃ.Ādi-saddena ‘‘piṇḍapātādīnaṃ atthāya gacchantiyā magge honti, tāni passati, anāpatti. Rañño santikaṃ kenaci karaṇīyena gantvā passati, anāpatti. Kenaci upaddutā pavisitvā passati, anāpattī’’ti ete anāpattivārā saṅgahitā.Naccadassana…pe… sahāti samuṭṭhānādinā vinicchayena saha naccadassanasikkhāpadasadisova.
2282. The word division is ‘‘Avasesopi anāpattī’’. Anāpatti ca kathāmaggo ca anāpattikathāmaggo, the decision concerning them is anāpattikathāmaggavinicchayo, the decision about non-offense like ‘‘anāpatti ārāme ṭhitā passatī’’tiādiko (pāci. 981) and the remaining decision found in the aṭṭhakathā (pāci. aṭṭha. 981), is the meaning. ‘‘Ārāme ṭhitā’’ by this, it is shown that there is no offense for one who sees the king's house etc. if they are making it in the vicinity of the monastery. By this same (statement), it is also established that just as dances etc. are allowed to be seen by going here and there within the monastery, so too are the king's houses etc. Ādi by the word -saddena, these cases of no offense are included, "there is no offense for one who is going for the sake of alms etc. if they are on the road and she sees them. There is no offense for one who goes to the king's presence for some business and sees them. There is no offense for one who enters and sees them because she is troubled by someone." Naccadassana…pe… sahā is just like the training rule about seeing dances, together with the decision about origin etc.
Paṭhamaṃ.
The First.
2283.Mānato pamāṇato atītā apetāmānātītā,āsandī, taṃ. Vāḷehi upetovāḷūpeto,pallaṅko, taṃ. ‘‘Āsandī nāma atikkantappamāṇā vuccatī’’ti vacanato heṭṭhā aṭṭaniyā vaḍḍhakihatthato uccatarapādo āyāmacaturasso mañcapīṭhaviseso āsandī nāma samacaturassānaṃ atikkantappamāṇānampi anuññātattā. ‘‘Pallaṅko nāma āharimehi vāḷehi kato’’ti (pāci. 984) vacanato pamāṇayuttopi evarūpo na vaṭṭati. Āharitvā yathānurūpaṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbavāḷarūpāniāharimavāḷānāma, saṃharimavāḷarūpayuttoti vuttaṃ hoti. Mānātītaṃ āsandiṃ vā vāḷūpetaṃ pallaṅkaṃ vāsevantīnaṃabhinisīdantīnaṃ, abhinipajjantīnañcayāsaṃbhikkhunīnaṃ satthā pācittiyāpattiṃ āha.
2283. Mānato pamāṇato atītā apetā mānātītā, a chair, that. Vāḷehi upeto vāḷūpeto, a couch, that. Because it is said, "Āsandī nāma atikkantappamāṇā vuccatī," an āsandī is said to be a special kind of cot-seat with legs higher than eight fingerbreadths and with a rectangular dimension, since even those (seats) with square dimensions exceeding the measure are allowed. Because it is said, "Pallaṅko nāma āharimehi vāḷehi kato," (pāci. 984) even such a one that is within the measure is not allowable. Forms of reeds that are to be brought and placed in appropriate places are called āharimavāḷā, meaning possessed of the form of reeds that can be brought and attached. For those sevantīnaṃ bhikkhunis who sit down on or lie down on a chair that exceeds the measure or a couch adorned with reeds, the Teacher spoke of an expiation offense.
2284.Tāsaṃ nisīdanassāpi nipajjanassāpi payogabāhullavasena pācittiyānaṃ gaṇanā hoti iti evaṃ niddiṭṭhāevaṃayaṃ gaṇanāaccantayasenaanantaparivārena bhagavatā vuttāti yojanā. Ettha caiccevanti nipātasamudāyo,iti-saddo nidassane,evaṃ-saddo idamatthe daṭṭhabbo.
2284. For those, there is a counting of expiation offenses by way of the multitude of efforts of sitting down and lying down. Thus, this is a counting evaṃ thus accantayasena with endless variations said by the Blessed One, is the construction. Here, icceva is a collection of particles, the word iti is for illustration, the word evaṃ should be seen in the sense of "this".
2285.Pāde āsandiyā chetvāti āsandiyā pāde pamāṇato adhikaṭṭhānachindanena chetvā. Pallaṅkassa pāde vāḷakāpallaṅkavāḷakā,tehitvāapanetvā,anāpattīti sevantīnaṃ anāpatti.
2285. Pāde āsandiyā chetvā means having cut the legs of the chair by cutting off the portion exceeding the measure. The reeds on the legs of the couch are pallaṅkavāḷakā, having hitvā removed anāpattī, there is no offense, for those who use them.
Dutiyaṃ.
The Second.
2286-7.Channanti khomādīnaṃ channaṃ, niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ.Aññataraṃ suttanti niddhāritabbanidassanaṃ.Hatthāti hatthena, karaṇatthe cetaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ.Añcitanti hatthāyāmena ākaḍḍhitaṃ.Tasminti tasmiṃ añchite suttappadese.Takkamhīti kantanasūcimhi.Veṭhiteti paliveṭhite.
2286-7. Channaṃ means of cloths etc., a genitive in determination. Aññataraṃ suttaṃ is an example of what is to be determined. Hatthā means by the hand, this is an instrumental word in the sense of an instrument. Añcitaṃ means pulled by the measure of the hand. Tasmiṃ means in that pulled region of thread. Takkamhī means on the weaver's beam. Veṭhite means wrapped around.
Suttakantanato sabbapubbapayogesūti suttakantanato pubbesu kappāsavicinanādisabbapayogesu.Hatthavāratoti hatthavāragaṇanāya. Yathāha ‘‘kappāsavicinanaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbapubbapayogesu hatthavāragaṇanāya dukkaṭa’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 988).
Suttakantanato sabbapubbapayogesū means in all prior efforts before the spinning of the thread such as gathering cotton. Hatthavārato means by the counting of the hand's turns. As he said, "After beginning with the gathering of cotton, there is a dukkata for each turn of the hand in all prior efforts" (pāci. aṭṭha. 988).
2288.Kantitaṃ suttanti paṭhamameva kantitaṃ dasikasuttādiṃ.Puna kantantiyāti koṭiyā koṭiṃ saṅghāṭetvā puna kantantiyā.
2288. Kantitaṃ suttaṃ means thread already spun, such as thread made from coarse fiber. Puna kantantiyā means for one who spins again after joining end to end.
Tatiyaṃ.
The Third.
2289.Taṇḍulānaṃ koṭṭanaṃ tu ādiṃ katvā gihīnaṃveyyāvaccaṃkarontiyā sabbapubbapayogesu dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2289. For one who is doing veyyāvaccaṃ service to laypeople, after beginning with the pounding of rice, there is a dukkata for all prior efforts, is the construction.
2290.Yāguādisunipphādetabbesu tadādhārānibhājanānigaṇetvāva pācittiṃ paridīpaye, khajjakādīsu rūpānaṃ gaṇanāya pācittiṃ paridīpayeti yojanā.Yāguādisūti etthaādi-saddena bhattasūpādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Khajjakādīsūtiādi-saddena macchamaṃsādiuttaribhaṅgānaṃ saṅgaho.
2290. After counting the bhājanāni vessels that are the bases for the things to be produced yāguādisu, one should clearly show the expiation offense, one should clearly show the expiation offense by the counting of the shapes in the case of cakes etc. Yāguādisu here the word ādi includes rice, soup, etc. Khajjakādīsū in ādi the word includes the extra modifications of fish, meat, etc.
2291.‘‘Sacepi mātāpitaro āgacchanti, yaṃkiñci bījaniṃ vā sammajjanidaṇḍaṃ vā kārāpetvā veyyāvaccakaraṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāva yaṃ kiñci pacituṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāgataṃvinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sace’’tiādi.Saceti ettha ‘‘mātāpitaro āgacchantī’’ti seso. Attano evamāgatānaṃ mātāpitūnampi kiñci kammaṃ akāretvā kiñci kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Api-saddo sambhāvane, tena aññesaṃ kathāyeva natthīti dīpeti.
2291.To illustrate the judgment from the commentary—"Even if the parents come, after having them make some kind of seed container or sweeping stick, and placing them in the position of doing service, then it is allowable to cook something"—he says, "Sace" etc. Sace: here, "mātāpitaro āgacchanti" (if the parents come) is understood. The meaning is that, even for one's own parents who have come, it is not allowable to do any cooking without having them do some work. The word Api implies possibility, thus indicating there's no question for others.
2292-3.Saṅghassa yāgupāne veyyāvaccaṃ karontiyā anāpattīti yojanā.‘‘Saṅghabhattepī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Attano veyyāvaccakarassa vāti sambandho. Yathāha ‘‘yāgupāneti manussehi saṅghassatthāya kariyamāne yāgupāne vā saṅghabhatte vā tesaṃ sahāyikabhāvena yaṃ kiñci pacantiyā anāpatti. Cetiyapūjāya sahāyikā hutvā gandhamālādīni pūjeti, vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 993).
2292-3.The meaning is that there is no offense for one who does service in preparing rice-gruel and drinks for the Sangha. The same method applies to "Saṅghabhattepī" etc. The connection is "attano veyyāvaccakarassa vā" (or for one who does service for oneself). As it was said, "’Yāgupāneti manussehi saṅghassatthāya kariyamāne yāgupāne vā saṅghabhatte vā tesaṃ sahāyikabhāvena yaṃ kiñci pacantiyā anāpatti. Cetiyapūjāya sahāyikā hutvā gandhamālādīni pūjeti, vaṭṭatī’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 993) (’Rice-gruel and drinks’: there is no offense for one who cooks anything as a helper for them in the rice-gruel or Sangha-meal being prepared by people for the sake of the Sangha. It is allowable to worship with garlands of flowers etc., having become a helper in the worship of a Cetiya)."
Catutthaṃ.
The Fourth [Section].
2294.‘‘Yā pana bhikkhunī ‘ehāyye imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamehī’ti vuccamānā ‘sādhū’ti paṭissuṇitvā sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vūpasameyya na vūpasamāya ussukkaṃ kareyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 995) sikkhāpadassa vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pācitti dhuranikkhepe’’tiādi.Dhuranikkhepeti na dāni taṃ vūpasamessāmi, aññāhi vā na vūpasamāpessāmī’’ti evaṃ dhurassa ussāhassa nikkhepe pācittīti yojanā. Cīvarasibbane yathā pañcāhaparihāro labbhati, idha pana tathā ekāhampi parihāro na labbhatīti yojanā.
2294.To illustrate the judgment of the training rule: "Whatever bhikkhuni, being told, ‘Come, venerable one, settle this issue,’ having agreed ‘Good,’ afterwards, being free from obstacles, neither settles it nor makes an effort to settle it, there is a pācittiya," (pāci. 995) he says, "pācitti dhuranikkhepe" etc. Dhuranikkhepe: The meaning is, "I will not settle that now, nor will I have others settle it," thus, in abandoning the burden, the effort, there is a pācittiya. Just as in the sewing of robes, a five-day allowance is obtained, so here, not even a one-day allowance is obtained.
2295.Sesanti ‘‘dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā pacchā vinicchinantī āpattiṃ āpajjitvāva vinicchinātī’’tiādikaṃ vinicchayajātaṃ. Tattha cīvarasibbane vuttanayeneva veditabbanti yojanā.
2295.Sesa (remainder): the collection of judgments such as, "having abandoned the burden, afterwards, in deciding, one only decides after incurring an offense." There, it should be understood in the same way as stated in the sewing of robes.
Pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth [Section].
2296-7.Yāpanabhikkhunī gihīnaṃ vā sahadhammike ṭhapetvāaññesaṃparibbājakaparibbājikānaṃ vā dantaponodakaṃ vinā aññaṃ yaṃ kiñciajjhoharaṇīyaṃkhādanīyaṃ, bhojanīyaṃ vā kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā dadāti, tassā pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2296-7.The meaning is: Yaṃ pana bhikkhunī gihīnaṃ vā sahadhammike ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ paribbājakaparibbājikānaṃ vā dantaponodakaṃ vinā aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ khādanīyaṃ, bhojanīyaṃ vā kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā dadāti, tassā pācittiyaṃ hotīti (Whatever bhikkhuni, having set aside laypeople or co-religionists, gives to others, wanderers or female wanderers, anything that should be ingested, that is, food or edibles, with her body, or with something connected to the body, or something to be forfeited, for her there is a pācittiya).
2298-9.Idhaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade muninā dantakaṭṭhodake dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Yāpana bhikkhunī kāyādīhi sayaṃna detiaññenadāpeti,tassā ca kāyādīhi adatvā bhūmiyaṃnikkhipitvādentiyāpi yā bāhiralepaṃ vā deti, tassāpi ummattikāya cana dosoanāpattīti yojanā.
2298-9.The meaning is that Idha (here), in this training rule, a dukkata offense was stated by the Sage for a toothpick and water. Yā pana bhikkhunī kāyādīhi sayaṃ na deti, aññena dāpeti, tassā ca kāyādīhi adatvā bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipitvā dentiyāpi yā bāhiralepaṃ vā deti, tassāpi ummattikāya ca na doso anāpattīti (Whatever bhikkhuni does not herself give with her body etc., [but] has [someone] else give, and for her, not giving with her body etc., but having placed [it] on the ground gives [it], or one who gives an external application, and for a madwoman also, there is no fault, no offense).
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth [Section].
2300-1.Āvasathacīvaranti ‘‘utuniyo bhikkhuniyo paribhuñjantū’’ti dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ.Yābhikkhunī yaṃ ‘‘āvasathacīvara’’nti niyamitaṃ cīvaraṃ,taṃcatutthe divase dhovitvā antamaso utuniyā sāmaṇerāya vā adatvā sace paribhuñjeyya, tassā pācittiyaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Tikapācittiyaṃ siyāti ‘‘anissajjite anissajjitasaññā…pe… vematikā…pe… nissajjitasaññā paribhuñjati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 1006) vuttaṃ pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2300-1.Āvasathacīvara (lodging robe): a robe given [to be] "used by nuns in menstruation." The meaning is that yā (whatever) bhikkhuni, taṃ (that) robe which is designated as an "āvasathacīvara," if she should wash it on the fourth day and use it without giving it at least to a nun in menstruation or a female novice, for her a pācittiya was stated. Tikapācittiyaṃ siyā (there would be a triple pācittiya): the pācittiya stated, "anissajjite anissajjitasaññā…pe… vematikā…pe… nissajjitasaññā paribhuñjati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 1006) (in [a robe] not relinquished, [she uses it with the] perception of not relinquished…pe… in doubt…pe… perception of relinquished, there is an offense of pācittiya)."
2302-3.Tasmiṃcīvare nissajjite anissajjitasaññāya vā vematikāya vātassābhikkhuniyā dvikadukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā. Aññāsaṃ utunīnaṃ abhāve adatvāpi paribhuñjantiyā anāpatti.Puna pariyayeti puna utunivāre yathākālaṃ paribhuñjantiyā anāpatti. Acchinnacīvarādīnañca anāpattīti yojanā.Pariyayeti gāthābandhavasena rassattaṃ.Acchinnacīvarādīnanti etthaādi-saddena naṭṭhacīvarādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Āpadāsupīti mahagghacīvaraṃ sarīrato mocetvā suppaṭisāmitampi corā haranti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu paribhuñjantiyā anāpattīti yojanā.
2302-3.The meaning is that Tasmiṃ (in that) robe, with the perception of not relinquished or in doubt, when relinquished, for tassā (that) bhikkhuni, a double dukkata was stated. There is no offense for using it without giving it when there are no other nuns in menstruation. Puna pariyaye (again in turn): there is no offense for using it again in due time at the turn for menstruation. And there is no offense for a torn robe etc. Pariyaye: shortened due to metrical necessity. In Acchinnacīvarādīna (torn robe etc.), ādi (etc.) includes lost robes etc. Āpadāsupī (also in emergencies): even a valuable robe, after removing it from the body and carefully concealing it, is taken by thieves; in such emergencies, there is no offense for using it.
Sattamaṃ.
The Seventh [Section].
2304.Sakavāṭakaṃvihāranti kavāṭabandhavihāraṃ, dvārakavāṭayuttaṃ suguttasenāsananti vuttaṃ hoti.Rakkhanatthāya adatvāti ‘‘imaṃ jaggeyyāsī’’ti evaṃ anāpucchitvā.
2304.Sakavāṭakaṃ vihāraṃ (a vihara with its own door): a vihara with attached doors, it is said to be a well-protected dwelling with door frames. Rakkhanatthāya adatvā (without giving for protection): without asking, "May you watch this."
2305-6.‘‘Hoti pācittiyaṃ tassā, cārikaṃ pakkamantiyā’’ti vuttameva pakāsetumāha‘‘attano gāmato’’tiādi.Attano gāmatoti attano vasanakagāmato.Tathā itarassāti aparikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepaṃ upacāraṃ.Tantiādipadattaye bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepe paṭhamena padena samatikkante dukkaṭaṃ, tathāitarassaaparikkhittassa vihārassa tasmiṃ upacāre atikkante dukkaṭaṃ. Dutiyena padena parikkhepe, upacāre samatikkantamatte pācittīti yojanā.
2305-6.To make clear what was already stated, "hoti pācittiyaṃ tassā, cārikaṃ pakkamantiyā (there is a pācittiya for her, when departing on tour)," he says, "attano gāmato" etc. Attano gāmato (from one's own village): from the village where one dwells. Tathā itarassā (likewise for the other): the boundary, the vicinity, of the un-enclosed vihara. Ta (that): in the three words beginning with that, the use of the locative should be understood in the sense of abundance. The meaning is that, in the first word, upon exceeding the boundary of the enclosed vihara, there is a dukkata; likewise, itarassa (for the other), upon exceeding that vicinity of the un-enclosed vihara, there is a dukkata. In the second word, upon merely exceeding the boundary or the vicinity, there is a pācittiya.
2307.Akavāṭabandhanasmiṃkavāṭabandharahite vihāre tathā anissajjantiyā dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ.Jaggikaṃ alabhantiyāti ettha ‘‘pariyesitvā’’ti seso.Jaggikanti vihārapaṭijaggikaṃ.
2307.In the vihara Akavāṭabandhanasmiṃ (without door frames), it was stated that there is a dukkata for not entrusting it in that way. Jaggikaṃ alabhantiyā (not obtaining a watchman): here, "pariyesitvā" (having searched) is understood. Jaggikaṃ: a watchman for the vihara.
2308.Āpadāsūti raṭṭhe bhijjante āvāse chaḍḍetvā gacchanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu.Gilānāyāti vacībhedaṃ kātuṃ asamatthāyāti.
2308.Āpadāsu (in emergencies): when the country is being destroyed, abandoning the dwelling and leaving; in such emergencies. Gilānāyā (for a sick one): for one unable to make a verbal request.
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Eighth [Section].
2309-10.Hatthī ca asso ca ratho cahatthiassarathā,te ādi yesaṃ tehatthiassarathādayo,tehi.Ādi-saddena dhanu tharūti padadvayaṃ gahitaṃ.Saṃyuttanti yathāvuttehi hatthiassādipadehi saṃyojitaṃ, ‘‘hatthīnaṃ sippaṃ hatthisippa’’ntiādinā katasamāsanti attho, ‘‘hatthisippaṃ assasippaṃ rathasippaṃ dhanusippaṃ tharusippa’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ yaṃ kiñci sippanti vuttaṃ hoti. Hatthisikkhādisippaṃ sandīpako gantho vaccavācakānaṃ abhedopacārena evaṃ vuttoti gahetabbaṃ. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘padādīnaṃ vasenidhā’’ti.Parūpaghātakaṃ mantāgadayogappabhedakaṃ kiñcīti paresaṃ antarāyakaraṃ khilanavasīkaraṇasosāpanādibhedaṃ āthabbaṇamantañca visayogādippabhedakañca yaṃ kiñci sippanti attho.
2309-10.Hatthī ca asso ca ratho ca hatthiassarathā, te ādi yesaṃ te hatthiassarathādayo, tehi. Ādi (etc.) includes the two words dhanu (bow) and tharu (sword). Saṃyutta (connected): connected with the words elephant, horse, etc., as stated; the meaning is a compound made with "hatthīnaṃ sippaṃ hatthisippaṃ" etc. (the craft of elephants is elephant craft); whatever craft is stated, such as "hatthisippaṃ assasippaṃ rathasippaṃ dhanusippaṃ tharusippaṃ (elephant craft, horse craft, chariot craft, bow craft, sword craft)." The book illuminating the craft of elephant training etc., should be taken as stated in this way due to the non-difference treatment of words expressing content. Therefore, he will say, "padādīnaṃ vasenidhā (here, on the basis of words etc.)." Parūpaghātakaṃ mantāgadayogappabhedakaṃ kiñcī (something that harms others, incantations, medicine, or types of application): the meaning is any craft that causes harm to others, that is, āthabbaṇa incantations of the type that drive in pegs, control, or cause to wither, and types of application for counteracting poison etc.
khilanamantonāma dārusārakhilaṃ mantetvā pathaviyaṃ pavesetvā māraṇamanto.Vasīkaraṇamantonāma paraṃ attano vase vattāpanakamanto.Sosāpanakamantonāma parasarīraṃ rasādidhātukkhayena sukkhabhāvaṃ pāpanakamanto.Ādi-saddena videssanādimantānaṃ saṅgaho.Videssanaṃnāma mittānaṃ aññamaññassa veribhāvāpādanaṃ.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsane yā bhikkhunī hatthi…pe… kiñci yassa kassaci santike padādīnaṃ vasenapariyāpuṇeyyaadhīyeyya ce, tassā pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.
khilanamanto nāma dārusārakhilaṃ mantetvā pathaviyaṃ pavesetvā māraṇamanto (the incantation for pegging is an incantation for killing, after chanting over a peg of heartwood and driving it into the ground). Vasīkaraṇamanto nāma paraṃ attano vase vattāpanakamanto (the incantation for controlling is an incantation for causing others to conduct themselves under one’s control). Sosāpanakamanto nāma parasarīraṃ rasādidhātukkhayena sukkhabhāvaṃ pāpanakamanto (the incantation for withering is an incantation for causing another’s body to become dry by the wasting away of nutrients etc.). Ādi (etc.) includes incantations for alienation etc. Videssanaṃ nāma mittānaṃ aññamaññassa veribhāvāpādanaṃ (alienation is the causing of enmity between friends). Idha (here), in this Dispensation, if whatever bhikkhuni recites…pe… anything in the presence of anyone whatsoever, on the basis of words etc., pariyāpuṇeyya (should learn), should study, for her there is a pācittiya.
2311.Lekheti likhitasippe.Dhāraṇāya cāti dhāraṇasatthe, yasmiṃ vuttanayena paṭipajjantā bahūnipi ganthāni dhārenti.Guttiyāti attano vā paresaṃ vā guttatthāya.Parittesu ca sabbesūti yakkhaparittacoravāḷādisabbesu parittesu ca.
2311.Lekhe (in writing): in the craft of writing. Dhāraṇāya cā (and for memorization): in the science of memorization, by practicing which, in the manner stated, they memorize even many texts. Guttiyā (for protection): for the protection of oneself or others. Parittesu ca sabbesū (and in all protective texts): and in all protective texts against spirits, snakes, thieves, and wild beasts etc.
Navamaṃ.
The Ninth [Section].
2312.Dasameti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī tiracchānavijjaṃ vāceyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1018) samuddiṭṭhe dasamasikkhāpade.Idaṃdasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
2312.Dasame (in the tenth): in the tenth training rule recited, "yā pana bhikkhunī tiracchānavijjaṃ vāceyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1018) (whatever bhikkhuni should recite animal knowledge, there is a pācittiya)." Idaṃ (this) is the tenth training rule.
Dasamaṃ.
The Tenth [Section].
Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.
The Fifth Chapter [Named] Cittāgāra.
2313.Sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmanti yattha bhikkhū rukkhamūlepi vasanti, taṃ padesaṃ.Jānitvāti ‘‘sabhikkhuka’’nti jānitvā.Yaṃ kiñcīti bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā ārāmikaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci.
2313.Sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ (a park with bhikkhus): that place where bhikkhus dwell even at the foot of a tree. Jānitvā (having known): having known "it has bhikkhus." Yaṃ kiñcī (anything): any bhikkhu or novice or park attendant.
2314-5.‘‘Sabhikkhuko nāma ārāmo yattha bhikkhū rukkhamūlepi vasantī’’ti (pāci. 1025) vacanato āha‘‘sace antamaso’’tiādi. Yā pana bhikkhunī antamaso rukkhamūlassapi anāpucchā sace parikkhepaṃ atikkāmeti, tassā paṭhame pāde dukkaṭaṃ, aparikkhitte tassa vihārassa upacārokkame vāpi bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye pāde atikkāmite pācitti siyāti yojanā.
2314-5.From the statement, "Sabhikkhuko nāma ārāmo yattha bhikkhū rukkhamūlepi vasantī’ti (pāci. 1025) (A park with bhikkhus is one where bhikkhus dwell even at the foot of a tree)," he says, "sace antamaso" etc. Yā pana bhikkhunī antamaso rukkhamūlassapi anāpucchā sace parikkhepaṃ atikkāmeti, tassā paṭhame pāde dukkaṭaṃ, aparikkhitte tassa vihārassa upacārokkame vāpi bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye pāde atikkāmite pācitti siyāti (Whatever bhikkhuni, without asking, should transgress the boundary even of the foot of a tree, for her there is a dukkata in the first line; or for a bhikkhuni a dukkata upon stepping into the vicinity of that unenclosed vihara; in the second line, when transgressed, there would be a pācittiya).
2316.Abhikkhukeārāme sabhikkhūti saññāyaubhosupisabhikkhukābhikkhukesu ārāmesujātakaṅkhāyasañjātavicikicchāya, vematikāyāti attho. Tassā āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2316.Abhikkhuke ārāme sabhikkhūti saññāya ubhosupi sabhikkhukābhikkhukesu ārāmesu jātakaṅkhāya, sañjātavicikicchāya, vematikāyāti attho (in a park without bhikkhus, with the perception "it has bhikkhus," in both parks with and without bhikkhus, having arisen doubt, having arisen uncertainty, that is, in doubt). The meaning is that for her, the offense is a dukkata.
2317.Sīsānulokikā yā bhikkhunī gacchati, tassā ca anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā. Evamuparipi.Tābhikkhuniyo yatthasannipatitāhonti, tāsaṃ santikaṃ ‘‘gacchāmī’’tigacchati. Yathāha ‘‘yattha bhikkhuniyo paṭhamataraṃ pavisitvā sajjhāyaṃ vā cetiyavandanādīni vā karonti, tattha tāsaṃ santikaṃ gacchāmīti gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 1027).
2317.It is declared that there is no offense for a bhikkhuni who goes in accordance with custom. The same applies above as well. Tā (those) bhikkhunis, where they are sannipatitā (gathered), to the presence of those [bhikkhunis], she gacchati (goes), [saying] "gacchāmī (I will go)." As he said, "yattha bhikkhuniyo paṭhamataraṃ pavisitvā sajjhāyaṃ vā cetiyavandanādīni vā karonti, tattha tāsaṃ santikaṃ gacchāmīti gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 1027) (where bhikkhunis, having entered earlier, are doing recitation or worshipping cetiyas etc., it is allowable to go to their presence, [saying] "I will go")."
2318.‘‘Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā’’ti vacaneneva abhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ kiñci anāpucchā pavisantiyā anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Ārāmamajjhato vā maggo hoti, tena gacchantiyāpi.Āpadāsūti yena kenaci upaddutā hoti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu pavisantiyā.
2318.By the statement, "Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā" (without asking a bhikkhu who is present), it is indicated that there is no offense for entering a park without bhikkhus without asking anyone. Or there is a path through the middle of the park, by going on that path also [there is no offense]. Āpadāsu (in emergencies): she is troubled by someone or other; in such emergencies, there is no offense for entering.
Paṭhamaṃ.
The First [Section].
2320.Akkoseyyāti dasannaṃ akkosavatthūnaṃ aññatarena sammukhā, parammukhā vā akkoseyya vā.Paribhāseyya vāti bhaya’massa upadaṃseyya vā.Tikapācittiyanti ‘‘upasampanne upasampannasaññā…pe… vematikā…pe… anupasampannasaññā akkosati vā paribhāsati vā, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 1031) tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.Seseti anupasampanne. Tikadukkaṭaṃ tassā hotīti yojanā.
2320.Akkoseyyā (should insult): should insult to the face or behind the back, with one of the ten grounds for insult. Paribhāseyya vā (or should revile): or should cause fear for him/her. Tikapācittiya (triple pācittiya): the triple pācittiya stated, "upasampanne upasampannasaññā…pe… vematikā…pe… anupasampannasaññā akkosati vā paribhāsati vā, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 1031) (in a fully ordained [person, with the] perception of a fully ordained [person]…pe… in doubt…pe… perception of one not fully ordained, she insults or reviles, there is an offense of pācittiya)." Sese (in the remainder): in one not fully ordained. For her there is a triple dukkata.
2321.‘‘Purakkhatvā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘abhisapeyyā’’ti (pāci. 875) vuttasikkhāpade vuttanayameva.
2321.Whatever should be said in "Purakkhatvā" etc., is the same as was stated in the training rule stated in "abhisapeyyā" (pāci. 875) (should curse).
Dutiyaṃ.
The Second [Section].
2322-3.Saṅghanti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ.Paribhāseyyāti ‘‘bālā etā, abyattā etā, netā jānanti kammaṃ vā kammadosaṃ vā kammavipattiṃ vā kammasampattiṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 1035) āgatanayena paribhāseyyāti attho.Itarāyāti ettha upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Ekaṃ bhikkhuniṃ vā sambahulā bhikkhuniyo vā tatheva itaraṃ anupasampannaṃ vā paribhāsantiyā tassā dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti yojanā.
2322-3.Saṅgha (Sangha): the Bhikkhuni Sangha. Paribhāseyyā (should revile): the meaning is that she should revile in the way it comes in [the passage], "bālā etā, abyattā etā, netā jānanti kammaṃ vā kammadosaṃ vā kammavipattiṃ vā kammasampattiṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 1035) (these are foolish, these are inept, they do not know action, fault in action, result of action, or success in action)." Itarāyā (with regard to another): here the instrumental case is in the sense of the locative. It is stated that there is a dukkata for her when likewise reviling one bhikkhuni or many bhikkhunis, or reviling another, one not fully ordained.
Tatiyaṃ.
The Third [Section].
2324-6.Yā nimantanapavāraṇā ubhopigaṇabhojanasikkhāpade(pāci. 217-219),pavāraṇasikkhāpade(pāci. 238-239) ca vuttalakkhaṇā, tāhi ubhohi nimantanapavāraṇāhi yā ca bhikkhunī sace nimantitāpi vā pavāritāpi vā bhaveyya, sā purebhattaṃ yāguñca yāmakālikādikālikattayañcaṭhapetvā yaṃ kiñciāmisaṃyāvakālikaṃ ajjhoharaṇatthāya paṭiggaṇhāti ce, tassā gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ siyā, ajjhohāravasenaetthaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade pācitti paridīpitāti yojanā.
2324-6.Whatever invitation and invitation-cum-acceptance are of the characteristics stated in both the gaṇabhojanasikkhāpade (pāci. 217-219) (training rule on group meals) and the pavāraṇasikkhāpade (pāci. 238-239) (training rule on invitation), whatever bhikkhuni, if she should be invited or invited-cum-accepted by both of those invitations and invitation-cum-acceptances, if before the meal, after setting aside rice-gruel and the three kālikattayañca (three kālikas) beginning with the yāmakālika, she should accept any āmisa (raw food) yāvakālika for the purpose of ingesting, for her, there would be a dukkata in accepting; ettha (here), in this training rule, a pācittiya is stated in terms of ingesting.
nimantitānāma ‘‘pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantitā’’tigaṇabhojanasikkhāpadevuttalakkhaṇā.Pavāraṇāca ‘‘pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyatī’’tipavāraṇasikkhāpadevuttalakkhaṇāti veditabbā.
nimantitā (invited) means having the characteristics stated in the gaṇabhojanasikkhāpade (training rule on group meals), "nimantitā nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantitā (invited means invited with one of the five foods)." Pavāraṇā (invitation-cum-acceptance) should be understood as having the characteristics stated in the pavāraṇasikkhāpade (training rule on invitation), "pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyatī’’ti (invitation-cum-acceptance means there appears eating, there appears food, one standing within arm’s reach brings [it], there appears rejection)."
2327.Kālikāni ca tīṇevāti yāmakālikādīni tīṇi kālikāni eva.
2327.Kālikāni ca tīṇevā (and the kālikas are only three): the three kālikas beginning with the yāmakālika only.
2328-9.Nimantitapavāritānaṃ dvinnaṃ sādhāraṇāpattiṃ dassetvā anāpattiṃ dassetumāha‘‘nimantitā’’tiādi.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsaneyā panabhikkhunī nimantitā appavāritā sace yāguṃ pivati,vaṭṭatianāpattīti attho.Sāmikassāti yena nimantitā, tassa nimantanasāmikasseva.Aññabhojananti yena nimantitā, tato aññassa bhojanaṃ. Sace sā bhuñjati, tathā vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2328-9.After showing the common offense for the two invited and invited-cum-accepted, to show the non-offense, he says, "nimantitā" etc. Idha (here), in this Dispensation, yā pana (whatever) bhikkhuni, if invited but not invited-cum-accepted, if she drinks rice-gruel, vaṭṭati (it is allowable), the meaning is there is no offense. Sāmikassā (of the owner): of the owner of the invitation by whom she was invited. Aññabhojana (other food): food of another than the one by whom she was invited. If she eats that, it is allowable in that way.
Kālikāni ca tīṇevāti yāmakālikādīni tīṇi kālikāneva.Paccaye satīti pipāsādipaccaye sati.
Kālikāni ca tīṇevā (and the kālikas are only three): the three kālikas beginning with the yāmakālika only. Paccaye satī (when there is a reason): when there is a reason such as thirst.
2330.Imassa sikkhāpadassa idaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ addhānena tulyanti yojanā. Pavāritāya, appavāritāya vā nimantitāya vasena kiriyākiriyataṃ dassetumāha‘‘nimantitā’’tiādi. Nimantitā pana sāmikaṃ anāpucchā bhuñjati ce, tassā vasenaidaṃsikkhāpadaṃ kiriyākiriyaṃ hoti. Ettha bhuñjanaṃkriyaṃ. Sāmikassa anāpucchanaṃakriyaṃ.
2330. The interpretation of this training rule is that it is equivalent to a journey. To show whether it constitutes an offense or not depending on whether one is invited, with or without invitation, it is said, “nimantitā-ādi (being invited, etc.).” However, if she eats, being invited, without asking her husband, this training rule constitutes an offense or not depending on that. Here, eating is the action (kriya). Not asking the husband is the non-action (akriya).
2331.‘‘Kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā’’tiādiṃ pavāritameva sandhāyāha. Yā yadi paribhuñjati, tassā ca pācitti siyā kiriyato hotīti yojanā.Siyāti avassaṃ.Pavāraṇasikkhāpadevuttanayena kappiyaṃ kāretvā vā akārāpetvā vā paribhuñjantiyā tassā paribhogeneva iminā sikkhāpadena avassaṃ āpatti hotīti attho.
2331. “Kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā-ādi (having it made allowable, etc.)” is said referring only to being invited. The interpretation is that, if she uses it, there would necessarily be a pācittiya offense for her due to it being an action. Siyā (there would be) means necessarily. In the manner stated in the Pavāraṇasikkhāpada (training rule on invitation), whether she has it made allowable or does not have it made allowable, by her using it, she necessarily incurs an offense with this training rule.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth
2332.‘‘Yā pana bhikkhunī kulamaccharinī assa, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1043) imasmiṃ sikkhāpade vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘bhikkhunīna’’ntiādi. Kulasantike bhikkhunīnaṃ avaṇṇaṃ vadantiyā pācittīti sambandho, kulassa santike ‘‘bhikkhuniyo dussīlā pāpadhammā’’ti bhikkhunīnaṃ avaṇṇaṃ bhāsantiyāti attho.Kulassāvaṇṇanaṃ vāpīti ‘‘taṃ kulaṃ assaddhaṃ appasanna’’nti bhikkhunīnaṃ santike kulassa avaṇṇaṃ aguṇaṃ vadantiyā pācittīti sambandho.
2332. To show the judgment in this training rule, “Yā pana bhikkhunī kulamaccharinī assa, pācittiyaṃ (pāci. 1043) (Whatever bhikkhuni should be grudging about families, for that a pācittiya offense),” it is said, “bhikkhunīnaṃ-ādi (of the bhikkhunis, etc.).” The connection is that a pācittiya offense arises for speaking disparagingly of bhikkhunis near a family, meaning speaking disparagingly of bhikkhunis, saying "the bhikkhunis are immoral, of evil practices," near a family. Kulassāvaṇṇanaṃ vāpi (or disparaging families), the connection is that a pācittiya offense arises for speaking disparagingly, unfavorably, of a family near bhikkhunis, saying “that family is faithless, unpleasing.”
2333.Santaṃbhāsantiyā dosanti amaccharāyitvā kulassa vā bhikkhunīnaṃ vā santaṃ dosaṃ ādīnavaṃ kathentiyā.
2333. Santaṃ bhāsantiyā dosaṃ (speaking of an existing fault) means speaking of an existing fault, a danger, of a family or of bhikkhunis without being miserly.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth
2334-5.Ovādadāyakoti aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovādaṃ dento.Vassaṃ upagacchantiyāti vassaṃ vasantiyā.
2334-5. Ovādadāyako (one who gives advice) means giving advice with the eight Garudhamma conditions. Vassaṃ upagacchantiyā (while entering the rains) means while dwelling during the rains.
2336.Bhikkhūti ovādadāyakā bhikkhū.
2336. Bhikkhū (bhikkhus) means the bhikkhus who give advice.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
Sixth
2338.Yā sā bhikkhunīvassaṃ vutthāpurimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ vutthātatoanantaraṃubhatosaṅghebhikkhunisaṅghe ca bhikkhusaṅghe ca ‘‘nāhaṃ pavāressāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati ceti yojanā.
2338. The interpretation is that, whichever bhikkhuni has dwelt during the rains (vassaṃ vutthā), has dwelt the former or latter three months, then (tato), immediately in both Sanghas (ubhatosaṅghe), the Bhikkhuni Sangha and the Bhikkhu Sangha, relinquishes the responsibility, saying "I will not invite (pavāressāmī)."
Sattamaṃ.
Seventh
2341.Ovādādīnamatthāyāti aṭṭhagarudhammassavanādīnamatthāya.Ādi-saddena uposathapucchanapavāraṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
2341. Ovādādīnamatthāya (for the sake of advice, etc.) means for the sake of hearing the eight Garudhamma conditions, etc. The ādi (etc.) includes taking uposatha questions and pavāraṇā.
2342.Ovādādīnamatthāya agamanenaakriyaṃ. Kāyikanti kāyakammaṃ.
2342. Akriyaṃ (non-action) is due to not going for the sake of advice, etc. Kāyikaṃ (bodily) means a bodily action.
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
Eighth
2343.‘‘Anvaddhamāsaṃ bhikkhuniyā bhikkhusaṅghato dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā uposathapucchanañca ovādūpasaṅkamanañca, taṃ atikkāmentiyā pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1059) imasmiṃ sikkhāpade vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘na yācissāmī’’tiādi. Taṃ uttānatthameva.
2343. To show the judgment in this training rule, “Anvaddhamāsaṃ bhikkhuniyā bhikkhusaṅghato dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā uposathapucchanañca ovādūpasaṅkamanañca, taṃ atikkāmentiyā pācittiyaṃ (pāci. 1059) (Every half-month, two things are to be hoped for by a bhikkhuni from the Bhikkhu Sangha: questioning about the uposatha and going for advice; for one who exceeds that, a pācittiya offense),” it is said, “na yācissāmī-ādi (I will not ask, etc.).” That is evident in meaning.
Navamaṃ.
Ninth
2346-7.Pasākhonāma nābhiyā heṭṭhā, jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ upari padeso. Tathā hi yasmā rukkhassa sākhā viya ubho ūrū pabhijjitvā gatā, tasmā so pasākhoti vuccati, tasmiṃ pasākhe.Sañjātanti uṭṭhitaṃ.Gaṇḍanti yaṃ kiñci gaṇḍaṃ.Rudhitanti yaṃ kiñci vaṇaṃ.Saṅghaṃ vāti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vā.Gaṇaṃ vāti sambahulā bhikkhuniyo vā.Ekenāti ettha ‘‘purisenā’’ti seso, sahatthe idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā’’ti.Purisoti ca manussapurisova gahetabbo.
2346-7. Pasākho (hip) means the area below the navel and above the kneecaps. Thus, because the two thighs have split off and gone like the branches of a tree, therefore it is called pasākha (hip); in that pasākha (hip). Sañjātaṃ (arisen) means arisen. Gaṇḍaṃ (boil) means any kind of boil. Rudhitaṃ (sore) means any kind of wound. Saṅghaṃ vā (or the Sangha) means the Bhikkhuni Sangha. Gaṇaṃ vā (or a group) means a group of many bhikkhunis. Ekenā (by one), here, the remainder is "purisena (by a man)"; this is an instrumental case in the sense of "together with." As he said, "purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā (one-on-one with a man)." Puriso (man) should be taken as a human man.
Dhovāti ettha ādi-atthe vattamānenaiti-saddena ‘‘ālimpāpeyya vā bandhāpeyya vā mocāpeyya vā’’ti (pāci. 1063) sikkhāpadāgatānaṃ itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅgaṇhanato ‘‘ālimpa bandha mocehī’’ti āṇattittayaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘dukkaṭāniccha pācittiyo cha cā’’ti.
Dhovā (wash), here, because the iti-word, which exists in the sense of "beginning with," includes the other three that come in the training rule, "ālimpāpeyya vā bandhāpeyya vā mocāpeyya vā (pāci. 1063) (would have (it) smeared, or would have (it) bound, or would have (it) loosened)," the three commands "smear, bind, loosen" are included. Therefore, he will say, "dukkaṭāniccha pācittiyo cha ca (there are six dukkata offenses and six pācittiya offenses)."
ekenapurisena ekikā ‘‘bhinda phālehi dhova ālimpa bandha mocehī’’tisabbānikātabbāni āṇāpeti, tassā cha dukkaṭāni,katesubhindanādīsu chasu kiccesu tassā cha pācittiyo hontīti yojanā.
Ekenapurisena (by one man), ekikā (alone) commands all the things to be done, saying "bhinda phālehi dhova ālimpa bandha mocehi (break, split, wash, smear, bind, loosen)," for her there are six dukkata offenses; katesu (having been done), when the six tasks beginning with breaking have been done, for her there are six pācittiya offenses.
2348-9.Etthāti gaṇḍe vā vaṇe vā. ‘‘Yaṃ kātabbaṃ atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ tvaṃ karohi’’iti sace evaṃ yā āṇāpetīti yojanā. Tassā ekāya āṇāpanavācāyacha dukkaṭāni ca pācittiyacchakkañceti dvādasāpattiyo siyunti yojanā.
2348-9. Ettha (here), in the boil or in the wound. The interpretation is that if she commands in this way, saying, "Yaṃ kātabbaṃ atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ tvaṃ karohi (whatever needs to be done, do all of that)." For her, with that single utterance of command, there would be twelve offenses: six dukkata offenses and a set of six pācittiya offenses.
2351.Āpucchitvāvāti saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā āpucchitvā.Dutiyanti dutiyikaṃ. Viññuṃ dutiyaṃ gahetvāpi vāti yojanā.
2351. Āpucchitvā vā (having asked), having asked the Sangha or a group. Dutiyaṃ (a second) means a second person. The interpretation is that she may take a knowledgeable person as a second person.
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth
Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.
The Ārāma Chapter, the Sixth
2353.‘‘Gaṇapariyesanādismi’’nti vattabbe chandānurakkhanatthaṃ niggahitāgamo.Gabbhininti āpannasattaṃ, kucchipaviṭṭhasattanti attho.Vuṭṭhāpentiyāti upasampādentiyā.Kammavācāhīti dvīhi kammavācāhi.
2353. When it should be said "gaṇapariyesanādismiṃ (in seeking a group, etc.)," there is an augment of anusvāra for the sake of maintaining the meter. Gabbhini (pregnant) means one who has conceived, meaning a being who has entered the womb. Vuṭṭhāpentiyā (ordaining) means giving higher ordination. Kammavācāhī (with acts of declaration) means with two acts of declaration.
2354-5.Kammavācāya osāneti tatiyakammavācāya pariyosāne,yyakārappatteti attho.Gabbhinisaññāya na ca gabbhiniyāti agabbhiniyā gabbhinisaññāya ca.Ubho sañjātakaṅkhāyāti ubhosu samuppannasaṃsayāya, gabbhiniyā, agabbhiniyā ca vematikāyāti attho. Gāthābandhavasenetthasu-saddalopo. Tathā vuṭṭhāpentiyā upajjhāyāya āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.Ācariniyā tassāti upajjhāyā gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, tassā kammavācaṃ sāventiyā ācariniyā ca.Gaṇassāti upajjhāyācarinīhi aññassa bhikkhunigaṇassa ca. Tathā dukkaṭaṃ dīpitanti yojanā.
2354-5. Kammavācāya osāne (at the end of the act of declaration) means at the conclusion of the third act of declaration, meaning when the yya-sound has been reached. Gabbhinisaññāya na ca gabbhiniyā (with the perception of pregnant, but not pregnant) means with the perception of pregnant, but not pregnant. Ubho sañjātakaṅkhāyā (for both, doubt having arisen) means for both, doubt having arisen, for one who is pregnant and for one who is not pregnant, who are doubtful. Here, in accordance with verse form, there is elision of the su-sound. Thus, for the preceptor who ordains, there is a dukkata offense, the interpretation. Ācariniyā tassā (for her conductress) means the preceptor ordains a pregnant woman, and for her conductress who recites the act of declaration. Gaṇassā (for the group) means for the group of bhikkhunis other than the preceptor and conductress. Thus, a dukkata offense is indicated, the interpretation.
2356.‘‘Dvīsu agabbhinisaññāyā’’ti padacchedo.Dvīsūti gabbhiniyā, agabbhiniyā ca.
2356. “Dvīsu agabbhinisaññāyā (in the two, with the perception of not pregnant)” is the word division. Dvīsu (in the two) means in the pregnant and in the not pregnant.
Paṭhamaṃ.
First
2357.Dutiyeti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1073) sikkhāpade. Imasmiṃ sikkhāpade pāyantī nāma mātā vā hoti dhāti vāti ayaṃ viseso.
2357. Dutiye (in the second) means in the training rule, “Yā pana bhikkhunī pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ (pāci. 1073) (Whatever bhikkhuni should ordain a pāyanti, for that a pācittiya offense).” In this training rule, a pāyanti is either a mother or a wet nurse; this is the distinction.
Dutiyaṃ.
Second
2358.Yā pana bhikkhunī dve vassāni chasu dhammesuasikkhitasikkhaṃsikkhamānaṃ sace vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācitti siyāti yojanā. Tatthadve vassānīti pavāraṇavasena dve saṃvaccharāni.Chasu dhammesūti pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīsu vikālabhojanāveramaṇipariyosānesu chasu dhammesu.Asikkhitasikkhanti ‘‘pāṇātipātāveramaṇiṃ dve vassāni avītikkamma samādānaṃ samādiyāmī’’tiādinā (pāci. 1079) nayena anādinnasikkhāpadaṃ vā evaṃ samādiyitvāpi kupitasikkhaṃ vā.Sikkhamānaṃtesu chasu dhammesu sikkhanato vā te vā sikkhāsaṅkhāte dhamme mānanato evaṃ laddhanāmaṃ anupasampannaṃ.Vuṭṭhāpeyyāti upasampādeyya.Āpatti siyāti paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva kammavācāpariyosāne pācitti āpatti siyā, pācitti hotīti attho.
2358. The interpretation is that whatever bhikkhuni should ordain a sikkhamānā (probationer) who has not trained in the six conditions for two years, for that there would be a pācittiya offense. There, dve vassānī (two years) means two years in terms of pavāraṇā. Chasu dhammesū (in the six conditions) means in the six conditions ending with abstinence from eating at the wrong time, beginning with abstinence from killing living beings, etc. Asikkhitasikkhaṃ (untrained training) means either one who has not undertaken a training rule in the manner "pāṇātipātāveramaṇiṃ dve vassāni avītikkamma samādānaṃ samādiyāmī (I undertake the undertaking of abstinence from killing living beings for two years without transgressing)," etc. (pāci. 1079), or one whose training has been corrupted even having undertaken in this way. Sikkhamānaṃ (probationer), because of training in those six conditions, or because of honoring the condition that is counted as training, is an unordained one who has thus obtained the name. Vuṭṭhāpeyya (would ordain) means would give higher ordination. Āpatti siyā (there would be an offense) means in the same manner as stated in the first training rule, at the conclusion of the act of declaration there would be a pācittiya offense, a pācittiya offense occurs.
2359.‘‘Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Dhammakamme vematikā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Dhammakamme adhammakammasaññā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti evaṃdhammakamme satthunā tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Adhammakamme dhammakammasaññā, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Adhammakamme vematikā āpatti dukkaṭassa. Adhammakamme adhammakammasaññā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 1082) evaṃadhamme pana kammasmiṃ satthunā tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpitaṃ.
2359. Dhammakamme satthunā tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ (in a lawful act, a triple pācittiya offense was stated by the Teacher), “Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Dhammakamme vematikā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassa. Dhammakamme adhammakammasaññā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassā (In a lawful act, she ordains with the perception of a lawful act, for that an offense of pācittiya. In a lawful act, she ordains while doubting, for that an offense of pācittiya. In a lawful act, she ordains with the perception of an unlawful act, for that an offense of pācittiya)." Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ satthunā tikadukkaṭaṃ dīpitaṃ (but in an unlawful act, a triple dukkata offense was indicated by the Teacher), "Adhammakamme dhammakammasaññā, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Adhammakamme vematikā āpatti dukkaṭassa. Adhammakamme adhammakammasaññā vuṭṭhāpeti, āpatti dukkaṭassā (pāci. 1082) (In an unlawful act, (she ordains) with the perception of a lawful act, for that an offense of dukkata. In an unlawful act, (she ordains) while doubting, for that an offense of dukkata. In an unlawful act, she ordains with the perception of an unlawful act, for that an offense of dukkata)."
2360.Akhaṇḍatokhaṇḍaṃ akatvā.
2360. Akhaṇḍato (unbroken), without making it broken.
2361.Sace upasampadāpekkhā pabbajjāya saṭṭhivassāpi hoti, tassā imā cha sikkhāyo dve vassāni avītikkamanīyā padātabbā, imā adatvāna kārayeneva vuṭṭhāpeyyāti yojanā.
2361. If the one seeking higher ordination is even sixty years old from the going forth, these six training rules are to be given to her to be practiced without transgressing for two years; without giving these, na kāraye (she should not have it done), she should not ordain.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third
2362.Catutthe natthi vattabbanti vakkhamānavisesato aññaṃ vattabbaṃ natthīti yathāvuttanayamevāti adhippāyo.‘‘Idhā’’tiādinā imasmiṃ sikkhāpade labbhamānavisesaṃ dasseti. Idha imasmiṃ sikkhāpade saṅghena sammataṃ taṃ sikkhamānaṃvuṭṭhāpentiyābhikkhuniyā anāpatti hotīti yojanā.
2362. Catutthe natthi vattabbaṃ (in the fourth, there is nothing to be said) means there is nothing else to be said other than the specialty to be stated; the intention is that it is just in the manner as said. “Idhā-ādinā (Here, etc.)” shows the specialty that can be obtained in this training rule. Here, in this training rule, there is no offense for a bhikkhuni vuṭṭhāpentiyā (ordaining) that sikkhamānā (probationer) who is approved by the Sangha.
2363.Dve vassāni chasu dhammesu sikkhitasikkhāya sikkhamānāya bhikkhunisaṅghena upasampadato paṭhamaṃ ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya yā vuṭṭhānasammuti dātabbā hoti, sā vuṭṭhānasammutisace paṭhamaṃ adinnā hoti. Tatthatasmiṃ upasampadamāḷakepi padātabbāyevāti yojanā.
2363. For a sikkhamānā (probationer) who has trained in the six conditions for two years, that vuṭṭhānasaṃmuti (agreement to ordain) which must be given by the Bhikkhuni Sangha with an act of declaration with a motion as the second before the higher ordination, sace paṭhamaṃ adinnā hoti (if that has not been given first). Tattha (there), that must be given even in that sīmā (ordination territory).
2364.Tatiyañcāti tatiyasikkhāpadañca.Catutthañcāti idaṃ catutthasikkhāpadañca.Paṭhamena samaṃ ñeyyanti paṭhamena sikkhāpadena samuṭṭhānādinā vinicchayena samānanti ñātabbaṃ.Catutthaṃpana sikkhāpadaṃ vuṭṭhāpanasammutiṃ adāpetvā vuṭṭhāpanavasenakriyākriyaṃhoti.
2364. Tatiyañcā (and the third) means the third training rule. Catutthañcā (and the fourth) means this fourth training rule. Paṭhamena samaṃ ñeyyaṃ (should be known as equal to the first) means it should be known as equal to the first training rule in terms of origin, etc., and judgment. Catutthaṃ (the fourth), however, the fourth training rule kriyākriyaṃ (action and non-action) occurs through ordaining without having the agreement to ordain given.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth
2365.Gihigatanti purisantaragataṃ, purisasamāgamappattanti attho. Paripuṇṇadvādasavassāparipuṇṇāuttarapadalopena. Kiñcāpi na dosoti yojanā.Vuṭṭhāpentiyāti upajjhāyā hutvā upasampādentiyā.
2365. Gihigataṃ (gone to a householder) means gone to another man, having attained association with a man. Paripuṇṇadvādasavassā (fully twelve years old), paripuṇṇā (fully) is by elision of the latter word. Kiñcāpi na doso (even though there is no fault), the interpretation. Vuṭṭhāpentiyā (ordaining) means for one ordaining as a preceptor.
2366.Sesanti vuttaṃ.Asesenasabbaso.
2366. Sesaṃ (the rest) is what has been said. Asesena (entirely) means completely.
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth
2368.Dukkhitaṃ sahajīvininti ettha ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti seso. Tuvaṭṭakavaggasmiṃ ‘‘dukkhitaṃ sahajīvini’’nti imehi padehi yuttaṃyaṃsikkhāpadaṃ vuttaṃ,tenasikkhāpadena aṭṭhamaṃ samaṃ ñeyyaṃ,na visesatāviseso natthīti yojanā.Aṭṭhamanti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā dve vassāni neva anuggaṇheyya na anuggaṇhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1108) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ. Tatthasahajīvininti saddhivihāriniṃ.Neva anuggaṇheyyāti sayaṃ uddesādīhi nānuggaṇheyya.Na anuggaṇhāpeyyāti ‘‘imissā ayye uddesādīni dehī’’ti evaṃ na aññāya anuggaṇhāpeyya.Pācittiyanti dhure nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.
2368. Dukkhitaṃ sahajīvini (to a miserable cohabitant), here, the remainder is "sikkhāpadaṃ (training rule)." In the Tuvaṭṭaka Chapter, the yaṃ (which) training rule that was stated joined with these words "dukkhitaṃ sahajīvini (to a miserable cohabitant)" tena (with that) training rule, the eighth should be known as equal, na visesatā (there is no specialty), there is no distinction, the interpretation. Aṭṭhamaṃ (the eighth) means the training rule that was stated, “Yā pana bhikkhunī sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā dve vassāni neva anuggaṇheyya na anuggaṇhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ (pāci. 1108) (Whatever bhikkhuni, having ordained a cohabitant, for two years should neither support nor have (her) supported, for that a pācittiya offense).” There, sahajīvini (cohabitant) means a saddhivihāriṇī (one who lives together). Neva anuggaṇheyyā (should neither support) means she should not support by herself with giving the text for recitation, etc. Na anuggaṇhāpeyyā (nor have (her) supported) means she should not direct another in this way, "ayye, give the text for recitation, etc., to this one." Pācittiyaṃ (a pācittiya offense) means a pācittiya offense occurs as soon as the responsibility is relinquished.
Aṭṭhamaṃ.
Eighth
2369.Yā kācibhikkhunī vuṭṭhāpitapavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyya ce, tassā pācittipariyāputākathitāti yojanā. Vuṭṭhāpetītivuṭṭhāpitā,pavatteti susikkhāpetīti pavattinī, vuṭṭhāpitā ca sā pavattinī cātivuṭṭhāpitapavattinī,upajjhāyāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ, upajjhāyaṃ.Nānubandheyyāti cuṇṇena, mattikāya, dantakaṭṭhena, mukhodakenāti evaṃ tena tena karaṇīyena upaṭṭhaheyya.
2369. If yā kāci (whatever) bhikkhuni does not attend to a vuṭṭhāpitapavattiniṃ (an ordained trainer) for two years, for her that pācitti offense is pariyāputā (spoken), stated, the interpretation. Vuṭṭhāpetīti (ordains), therefore vuṭṭhāpitā (ordained); pavatteti susikkhāpetīti pavattinī (trains, therefore a trainer), vuṭṭhāpitā ca sā pavattinī cāti (ordained and that trainer), vuṭṭhāpitapavattinī (ordained trainer), this is a designation for the preceptor, that, preceptor. Nānubandheyyā (should not attend to) means should attend to with that and that which needs to be done: with washing powder, with clay, with a toothpick, with mouthwash, etc.
2370.‘‘Dve vassāni ahaṃ nānubandhissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati ce, evaṃ dhure nikkhittamattasmiṃ pana tassā pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
2370. If she relinquishes the responsibility, saying, "dve vassāni ahaṃ nānubandhissāmī (I will not attend to for two years)," thus, a pācittiya offense would occur for her as soon as the responsibility is relinquished.
2371.Yā pana bhikkhunī upajjhāyaṃ bālaṃ vā alajjiṃ vā nānubandhati, tassā, gilānāya vā āpadāsu vā ummattikāya vā nānubandhantiyā na dosoti yojanā.
2371. If whatever bhikkhuni does not attend to a preceptor who is foolish or shameless, for her, there is no fault for not attending to one who is sick or in danger or deranged.
2372.Anupaṭṭhānena hotīti āha‘‘akriyaṃ vutta’’nti.
2372. He says that it occurs due to not attending, “akriyaṃ vuttaṃ (non-action is stated).”
Navamaṃ.
Ninth
2373-5.Yā kāci bhikkhunīsahajīviniṃsaddhivihāriniṃvuṭṭhāpetvāupasampādetvā taṃ gahetvā antamaso chappañcayojanānipina gaccheyya na caññaṃ āṇāpeyya‘‘imaṃ, ayye, gahetvā gacchā’’ti aññañca na niyojeyya ce,dhure nikkhittamattasmiṃ‘‘na dāni gacchissāmi, aññañca gahetvā gantuṃ na niyojessāmī’’ti ussāhe vissaṭṭhamatte tassā pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
2373-5. If yā kāci (whatever) bhikkhuni sahajīviniṃ (cohabitant), saddhivihāriniṃ (one who lives together), vuṭṭhāpetvā (having ordained), having given higher ordination, having taken that, does not go even at least five or six yojanas, na gaccheyya na caññaṃ āṇāpeyya (should not go nor command another), and does not direct another, saying “imaṃ, ayye, gahetvā gacchā (ayye, take this one and go)”, dhure nikkhittamattasmiṃ (as soon as the responsibility is relinquished), a pācittiya offense would occur for her as soon as the effort is abandoned, saying, "na dāni gacchissāmi, aññañca gahetvā gantuṃ na niyojessāmī (now I will not go, nor will I direct another to take (her) and go)."
Antarāyasmiṃ sati vā dutiyaṃ alabhantiyā vā āpadāsu vā gilānāya vā ummattikāya vā na dosoti yojanā.
There is no fault if there is an obstacle, or if she does not obtain a second person, or in danger, or for one who is sick or deranged.
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth
Gabbhinivaggo sattamo.
The Gabbhini Chapter, the Seventh
2376.Gihigatehi tīhevāti anantare gabbhinivagge gihigatapadayuttehi pañcamachaṭṭhasattamehi tīheva sikkhāpadehi.Sadisānīti idha vīsativassavacanañca kumāribhūtavacanañca tattha dvādasavassavacanañca gihigatavacanañca ṭhapetvā avasesehi vinicchayehi yathākkamaṃ sadisānevāti.
2376. Gihigatehi tīhevā means with just these three training rules—the fifth, sixth, and seventh—that are associated with laywomen in the immediately preceding Gabbhinī Vagga. Sadisānī: Here, setting aside the rule about twenty years, the statement about a virgin, the statement there about twelve years, and the statement about laywomen, the remaining determinations are similar in accordance with their order.
2377.Mahūpapadāti mahā upapado yāsaṃ sikkhamānānaṃ tā mahūpapadā.Upapadaṃnāma padānameva yujjati, na atthānanti ‘‘yāsa’’nti aññapadena sikkhamānādipadānaṃ gahaṇaṃ, saddatthānamabhedopacārassa pana icchitattā sikkhamānapadagahitānamettha gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, mahāsikkhamānāti vuttaṃ hoti.Āditoti ettha ‘‘vuttā’’ti seso, gabbhinivagge tissannaṃ gihigatānaṃ purimesu tatiyacatutthasikkhāpadesu āgatā dve sikkhamānāti attho. Gihigatāya ‘‘paripuṇṇadvādasavassā’’ti ca kumāribhūtāya ‘‘paripuṇṇavīsativassā’’ti ca vassavasena nānākaraṇassa vuttattā tāhi dvīhi mahāsikkhamānāya vassavaseneva nānākaraṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘gatā vīsativassāti, viññātabbā vibhāvinā’’ti, atikkantavīsativassā mahāsikkhamānā nāma hotīti attho.
2377. Mahūpapadā: Those sikkhamānās for whom mahā is an upapada are mahūpapadā. Upapadaṃ means the very term is fitting, not the meaning. The word "yāsaṃ" refers to terms like sikkhamānā, but since the similarity of meaning and term is intended, it should be understood as referring to those included under the term sikkhamānā; thus, it means mahāsikkhamānā. Ādito: Here, "vuttā" is understood. The meaning is that in the previous third and fourth sikkhāpadas of the three laywoman-related ones in the Gabbhinī Vagga, the two sikkhamānās appear. Because the differentiation based on age has been stated for the laywoman as "having completed twelve years" and for the virgin as "having completed twenty years," to show the differentiation of the mahāsikkhamānā from those two based solely on age, he says "gatā vīsativassāti, viññātabbā vibhāvinā", meaning a mahāsikkhamānā is one who has passed twenty years.
2378.Tādve mahāsikkhamānā sace gihigatā vā hontu, na ca purisagatā vā hontu,sammutiādisukammavācāya ‘‘sikkhamānā’’ti vattabbāti yojanā. Ettha casammutināma ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya kātabbāya sikkhāya sammuti ceva vuṭṭhānasammuti ca.Ādi-saddena upasampadākammaṃ gahitaṃ.
2378. Tā, those two mahāsikkhamānās, whether they are laywomen or not, and not having been with a man, should be referred to as "sikkhamānā" in the kammavācā in sammutiādisu. Here, sammuti means both the granting of acceptance (sammuti) for the training, which should be done with a ñattidutiyā kammavācā, and the granting of acceptance for leaving the training. The word ādi includes the act of ordination (upasampadā).
2379.Imāsaṃ dvinnaṃ sammutidānādīsu ñattiyā ca kammavācāya ca vattabbaṃ dassetvā idāni avattabbaṃ dassetumāha‘‘na tā’’tiādi.Tā etā ubhopimahāsikkhamānā ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti vā tathā ‘‘gihigatā’’ti vā kammavācāyana vattabbāyasmā, tasmāevaṃ vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.‘‘Na vattabbā’’ti iminā tathā ce kammavācā vucceyya, taṃ kammaṃ kuppatīti dīpeti. Idhapana-saddo yasmā-padatthoti tadatthavasena yojanā dassitā.
2379. Having shown what should be said in the ñatti and kammavācā in the giving of acceptance etc. to these two, he now shows what should not be said, saying "na tā"-ādi. Tā etā ubhopi, both of these mahāsikkhamānās should not be referred to in the kammavācā as "virgin" or as "laywoman," therefore it is not proper to say this. "Na vattabbā" indicates that if such a kammavācā is uttered, the act is invalid. Here, the word pana is in the sense of "because," thus the connection is shown in terms of that meaning.
2380.Sammutinti sikkhamānasammutiṃ.Dasavassāyāti ettha ‘‘gihigatāyā’’ti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘gihigatāya dasavassakāle sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā dvādasavassakāle upasampadā kātabbā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 1119).Sesāsupīti ekādasavassakāle datvā terasavassakāle kātabbā, dvādasa, terasa, cuddasa, pannarasa, soḷasa, sattarasa, aṭṭhārasavassakāle sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā vīsativassakāle kātabbāti evaṃ aṭṭhārasavassapariyantāsu sesāsupi sikkhamānāsu.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘sammutiyā dinnasaṃvaccharato āgāmini dutiye saṃvacchare upasampādetabbā’’ti ayaṃ nayo. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘ekādasavassakāle datvā terasavassakāle kātabbā’’tiādi.
2380. Sammuti means acceptance as a sikkhamānā. Dasavassāyā: Here, "gihigatāyā" is understood. As he said, "Having given acceptance to a laywoman at the age of ten, ordination should be done at the age of twelve" (pāci. aṭṭha. 1119). Sesāsupī: Even to the remaining sikkhamānās up to the age of eighteen, having given acceptance at the age of eleven, it should be done at the age of thirteen; having given acceptance at the ages of twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, or eighteen, it should be done at the age of twenty. Ayaṃ nayo: This is the method that "ordination should be done in the second year following the year in which acceptance was given." Therefore, it was said, "Having given at the age of eleven, it should be done at the age of thirteen," and so on.
2381.‘‘Kumāribhūtā’’tipi ‘‘gihigatā’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttāti yojanā.
2381. In the commentary, it is stated that it is proper to say "virgin" or "laywoman."
2382.Yā panaparipuṇṇavīsativassāsāmaṇerī‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti vuttā, sā kammavācāya ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’icceva vattabbā,aññathā pana na vattabbā‘‘gihigatā’’ti vā ‘‘purisantaragatā’’ti vā na vattabbāti yojanā. Yathāha ‘‘kumāribhūtā pana ‘gihigatā’ti na vattabbā, ‘kumāribhūtā’icceva vattabbā’’ti.
2382. Yā pana—but she who is a sāmaṇerī of fully twenty years who has been called "virgin," she should be referred to in the kammavācā as just "virgin," but not otherwise, meaning she should not be referred to as "laywoman" or "having been with a man." As he said, "But a virgin should not be referred to as 'laywoman'; she should be referred to as just 'virgin.'"
2383.Etā tu pana tissopīti mahāsikkhamānā gihigatā, kumāribhūtāti vuttā pana etā tissopi.Api-saddena gihigatā kumāribhūtā dve sakasakanāmenāpi vattuṃ vaṭṭantīti dīpeti. ‘‘Kumāribhūtasikkhamānāyā’’tipāḷiyaṃavuttattā na vaṭṭatīti koci maññeyyāti āha‘‘na saṃsayo’’ti. Tathā vattabbatāhetudassanatthamāha‘‘sikkhāsammutidānato’’ti.
2383. Etā tu pana tissopī, but these three who are mahāsikkhamānā, laywomen, and called virgins. The word api indicates that the two, laywomen and virgins, are also proper to be referred to by their respective names. He says "na saṃsayo" because someone might think it is not proper since it is not stated in the pāḷi, "of a virgin sikkhamānā." To show the reason for it being proper to say so, he says "sikkhāsammutidānato."
Paṭhamadutiyatatiyāni.
First, second, and third.
2384-5.Yā pana bhikkhunīūnadvādasavassāvaupasampadāvasena aparipuṇṇadvādasavassā eva sayaṃ upajjhāyā hutvā paraṃ sikkhamānaṃ sace vuṭṭhāpeti, pubbe vuttanayeneva gaṇapariyesanādidutiyānussāvanapariyosānesu āpannānaṃdukkaṭānaṃanantaraṃkammavācānaṃ osānetatiyānussāvanāyayyatārappattāya tassā pācitti paridīpitāti yojanā.
2384-5. But the bhikkhunī who, being less than twelve years old, not having completed twelve years, herself becoming an upajjhāyā ordains a sikkhamānā, in the manner previously stated, in the search for a group etc., at the end of the second proclamation, immediately after the dukkaṭas for the offenses committed, at the conclusion of the kammavācās, at the third proclamation, the pācittiya for that one who has reached the state of "ayya" is declared. That is the connection.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
2386.Pañcameti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī paripuṇṇadvādasavassā saṅghena asammatā vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1142) sikkhāpade. Kāyacittavācācittakāyavācācittavasenatisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Kriyākriyanti vuṭṭhāpanaṃ kiriyaṃ, saṅghasammutiyā aggahaṇaṃ akiriyaṃ.
2386. Pañcameti: In the sikkhāpada, "Whatever bhikkhunī, not being authorized by the Saṅgha, ordains one who has completed twelve years, there is an offense entailing expiation" (pāci. 1142). It has three sources: body-mind-speech-mind-body-speech-mind. Kriyākriya: The ordination is an action (kiriya); not taking the Saṅgha's approval is a non-action (akiriya).
Pañcamaṃ.
Fifth.
2387.Saṅghenāti bhikkhunisaṅghena.Upaparikkhitvāti alajjibhāvādiṃ upaparikkhitvā.Alaṃ tāvāti ettha ‘‘te ayye’’ti seso.Vāritātiettha‘‘sādhūti paṭissuṇitvā’’ti seso. ‘‘Alaṃ tāva te, ayye, upasampāditenā’’ti vāritā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvāetthaetasmiṃ pavāraṇepacchā khīyati‘‘ahameva nūna bālā, ahameva nūna alajjinī’’tiādinā avaṇṇaṃ pakāseti, dosatā pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
2387. Saṅghenā: By the community of bhikkhunīs. Upaparikkhitvā: Without investigating blameworthiness, etc. Alaṃ tāvā: Here, "te ayye" is understood. Vāritā: Here, "having agreed with 'good'" is understood. Having been prevented with "Enough, venerable, with ordination," and having agreed with "good," here, in this invitation, later she resents and expresses disapproval with "Am I really foolish? Am I really shameless?" etc., due to the fault, there is an offense entailing expiation. That is the connection.
2388.Chandadosādīhikarontiyāti ettha ‘‘pakatiyā’’ti seso. Pakatiyāchandadosādīhiagatigamanehi nivāraṇaṃkarontiyāsace ujjhāyati, na dosoti yojanā.
2388. Chandadosādīhi karontiyā: Here, "pakatiyā" is understood. Chandadosādīhi, if she resents karontiyā the prevention with improper behavior, there is no offense. That is the connection.
Chaṭṭhaṃ.
Sixth.
2389-90.Laddhecīvareti sikkhāmānāya ‘‘sace me tvaṃ, ayye, cīvaraṃ dassasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti vatvā yācite tasmiṃ cīvare laddhe.Pacchāti cīvaralābhato pacchā.Asante antarāyiketi dasannaṃ antarāyānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ antarāye avijjamāne.Vuṭṭhāpessāmināhanti ahaṃ taṃ na samuṭṭhāpessāmīti dhuranikkhepane tassā pācittiyaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2389-90. Laddhe cīvare: Having obtained that robe from the sikkhamānā who asked, "If you, venerable, give me a robe, then I will ordain you." Pacchā: After obtaining the robe. Asante antarāyike: When there is no obstruction among the ten obstructions. Vuṭṭhāpessāmināha: If she refuses, saying "I will not ordain you," there is a pācittiya for her. That is the connection.
2391.Idanti idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ. Avuṭṭhāpanenaakriyaṃ.
2391. Idaṃ: This sikkhāpada. By not ordaining, it is a non-action (akriyaṃ).
Sattamaṃ.
Seventh.
2392.Aṭṭhamanti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī sikkhamānaṃ ‘sace maṃ tvaṃ, ayye, dve vassāni anubandhissasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’tiādi (pāci. 1155) sikkhāpadaṃ.Navameti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī purisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ kumārakasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ caṇḍiṃ sokāvāsaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1159) vuttasikkhāpade.‘‘Vattabbaṃ natthī’’ti idaṃ saddatthavisesamantarena vinicchayassa suviññeyyattā vuttaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘uttānamevida’’nti.
2392. Aṭṭhama: The sikkhāpada, "Whatever bhikkhunī should say to a sikkhamānā, 'If you attend upon me for two years, venerable, then I will ordain you'" (pāci. 1155). Navame: In the stated sikkhāpada, "Whatever bhikkhunī should ordain a sikkhamānā who is intimate with a man, intimate with a young man, irascible, or a resort of sorrow, there is an offense entailing expiation" (pāci. 1159). "Vattabbaṃ natthī": This was said because the determination is easily understood without any special meaning of the words. Therefore, he said "uttānamevidaṃ."
purisasaṃsaṭṭhanti paripuṇṇavīsativassena purisena ananulomikena kāyavacīkammena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ.Kumārakasaṃsaṭṭhanti ūnavīsativassena kumārena tatheva saṃsaṭṭhaṃ.Caṇḍinti kodhanaṃ.Sokāvāsanti saṅketaṃ katvā āgacchamānā purisānaṃ anto sokaṃ pavesetīti sokāvāsā, taṃ sokāvāsaṃ. Atha vā gharaṃ viya gharasāmikā, ayampi purisasamāgamaṃ alabhamānā sokaṃ āvisati, iti yaṃ āvisati, svāssā āvāso hotītisokāvāsā. Tenevassapadabhājane‘‘sokāvāsā nāma paresaṃ dukkhaṃ uppādeti, sokaṃ āvisatī’’ti (pāci. 1160) dvedhā attho vutto.Pācittiyanti evarūpaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā vuttanayeneva kammavācāpariyosāne upajjhāyāya pācittiyaṃ.
Purisasaṃsaṭṭha: Intimate with a man who has completed twenty years by way of improper bodily and verbal actions. Kumārakasaṃsaṭṭha: Intimate in the same way with a young man who is less than twenty years old. Caṇḍī: Irascible. Sokāvāsa: Having made a rendezvous, she causes sorrow to enter those men who come, therefore, she is sokāvāsā, that sokāvāsa. Or, like a house and its owner, even she, not obtaining association with men, enters into sorrow; thus, that which she enters is her abode, therefore, she is sokāvāsā. Therefore, in its padabhājana, two meanings are stated: "sokāvāsā means she causes suffering to others; she enters into sorrow" (pāci. 1160). Pācittiya: To the upajjhāyā who ordains such a one, there is a pācittiya at the conclusion of the kammavācā, in the manner stated.
2393.‘‘Natthi ajānantiyā’’ti pacchedo, sikkhamānāya purisasaṃsaṭṭhādibhāvaṃ ajānantiyāti attho.
2393. "Natthi ajānantiyā" is a separation; the meaning is, for one not knowing that the sikkhamānā is intimate with a man, etc.
Aṭṭhamanavamāni.
Eighth and ninth.
2394.Vijātamātarāvājanakapitarā vā sāmināpariggāhakasāminā vānānuññātaṃupasampadatthāya ananuññātaṃtaṃsikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā tassā pācittiyāpatti siyāti yojanā.
2394. Without the permission of the mother who bore her or the father who begot her, or the owner, the owner who takes her in; anānuññātaṃ, without permission for the sake of ordination; by the one who ordains that sikkhamānā, there would be an offense entailing expiation. That is the connection.
2395.Na bhikkhunāti bhikkhunā dvikkhattuṃ na pucchitabbaṃ, sakimeva pucchitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘bhikkhunīhi dvikkhattuṃ āpucchitabbaṃ pabbajjākāle ca upasampadākāle ca, bhikkhūnaṃ pana sakiṃ āpucchitepi vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 1162).
2395. Na bhikkhunā: A bhikkhu should not ask twice; it is said that he should ask only once. As he said, "By the bhikkhunīs, permission should be asked twice, at the time of going forth and at the time of ordination, but for bhikkhus, it is proper even if permission is asked once" (pāci. aṭṭha. 1162).
2396-7.Atthitanti atthibhāvaṃ. Catūhi samuṭṭhāti, cattāri vā samuṭṭhānāni etassāticatusamuṭṭhānaṃ. Katamehi catūhi samuṭṭhātīti āha‘‘vācato…pe… kāyavācāditopi cā’’ti. Kathaṃ vācādīhi catūhi samuṭṭhāti? Abbhānakammādīsu kenacideva karaṇīyena khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ nisinnā ‘‘pakkosatha sikkhamānaṃ, idheva naṃ upasampādessāmā’’ti upasampādeti, evaṃ vācato samuṭṭhāti. ‘‘Upassayato paṭṭhāya upasampādessāmī’’ti vatvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ gacchantiyā kāyavācato samuṭṭhāti. Dvīsupi ṭhānesu paṇṇattiṃ jānitvā vītikkamaṃ karontiyā vācācittato, kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Upasampādanaṃkriyaṃ,anāpucchanaṃakriyaṃ.
2396-7. Atthitaṃ: Existence. It arises from four sources, or it has four sources, therefore, it is catusamuṭṭhānaṃ. From which four sources does it arise? He says "vācato…pe… kāyavācāditopi cā." How does it arise from the four sources, speech, etc.? Sitting in a boundary section for some matter that needs to be done, such as an act of formal accusation, she ordains, saying "Call the sikkhamānā, we will ordain her right here"; in this way, it arises from speech. Having said "I will ordain (her) starting from the residence" and going to the boundary section, it arises from body and speech. In both places, having known the regulation and committing a transgression, it arises from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind. Ordination is an action (kriyaṃ); not asking permission is a non-action (akriyaṃ).
Dasamaṃ.
Tenth.
2398.Etthaimasmiṃ sāsane yā bhikkhunī pārivāsikena chandadānena sikkhamānaṃ sace vuṭṭhāpeti, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā. Tatthapārivāsikena chandadānenāti catubbidhaṃ pārivāsiyaṃ parisapārivāsiyaṃ, rattipārivāsiyaṃ, chandapārivāsiyaṃ, ajjhāsayapārivāsiyanti.
2398. Ettha: In this Dispensation, if the bhikkhunī ordains a sikkhamānā with provisional consent, there would be a pācittiya for her. That is the connection. There, pārivāsikena chandadānenā means four kinds of provisionality: provisionality of the assembly (parisa pārivāsiyaṃ), provisionality of the night (ratti pārivāsiyaṃ), provisionality of consent (chanda pārivāsiyaṃ), provisionality of intention (ajjhāsayapārivāsiyaṃ).
parisapārivāsiyaṃnāma bhikkhū kenacideva karaṇīyena sannipatitā honti, atha megho vā uṭṭhahati, ussāraṇā vā karīyati, manussā vā ajjhottharantā āgacchanti, bhikkhū ‘‘anokāso ayaṃ, aññatra gacchāmā’’ti chandaṃ avissajjetvāva uṭṭhahanti. Idaṃ parisapārivāsiyaṃ. Kiñcāpi parisapārivāsiyaṃ, chandassa pana avissaṭṭhattā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
Parisapārivāsiyaṃ means the bhikkhus have gathered for some matter, then a cloud arises, or an announcement is being made, or people come attacking; the bhikkhus get up without dismissing the consent, saying "This is not a suitable place, let's go elsewhere." This is parisapārivāsiyaṃ. Although it is parisapārivāsiyaṃ, because the consent has not been dismissed, it is proper to perform the act.
Puna bhikkhū ‘‘uposathādīni karissāmā’’ti rattiṃ sannipatitvā ‘‘yāva sabbe sannipatanti, tāva dhammaṃ suṇissāmā’’ti ekaṃ ajjhesanti, tasmiṃ dhammakathaṃ kathenteyeva aruṇo uggacchati. Sace ‘‘cātuddasikaṃ uposathaṃ karissāmā’’ti nisinnā, ‘‘pannaraso’’ti kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pannarasikaṃ kātuṃ nisinnā, pāṭipade anuposathe uposathaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Aññaṃ pana saṅghakiccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Idaṃ pana rattipārivāsiyaṃ nāma.
Furthermore, bhikkhus gather at night thinking "We will perform the uposatha, etc.," and they request one to say, "Until everyone gathers, we will listen to the Dhamma," while he is speaking on that Dhamma, dawn breaks. If they have sat down thinking "We will perform the cātuddasika uposatha," it is proper to do the "pannaraso." If they have sat down thinking to do the pannarasika, it is not proper to perform the uposatha on the pāṭipada which is not an uposatha day. But it is proper to perform another Saṅgha act. This is called rattipārivāsiyaṃ.
Puna bhikkhū ‘‘kiñcideva abbhānādisaṅghakammaṃ karissāmā’’ti nisinnā honti, tatreko nakkhattapāṭhako bhikkhu evaṃ vadati ‘‘ajja nakkhattaṃ dāruṇaṃ, mā idaṃ kammaṃ karothā’’ti, te tassa vacanena chandaṃ vissajjetvā tattheva nisinnā honti, athañño āgantvā –
Furthermore, bhikkhus sit down thinking "We will perform some Saṅgha act such as an act of formal accusation," there one nakkhattapāṭhaka bhikkhu says thus, "Today the constellation is inauspicious, do not do this act," having dismissed the consent by his words, they sit right there, then another comes and says—
‘‘Nakkhattaṃ paṭimānentaṃ, attho bālaṃ upaccagā’’ti. (jā. 1.1.49) –
‘‘Nakkhattaṃ paṭimānentaṃ, attho bālaṃ upaccagā’’ti. (jā. 1.1.49) –
Vatvā ‘‘kiṃ nakkhattena, karothā’’ti vadati. Idaṃ chandapārivāsiyañceva ajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca. Etasmiṃ pārivāsiye puna chandapārisuddhiṃ anāharitvā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pārivāsikena chandadānenā’’ti.
Having said, "What (use is) the constellation? Do (it)," he says. This is both chandapārivāsiyaṃ and ajjhāsayapārivāsiyaṃ. In this provisionality, without bringing forward the purification of consent again, it is not proper to perform the act. This was said intending that, "with provisional consent."
Pācittiyaṃ siyāti evaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā vuttanayeneva kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho.
Pācittiyaṃ siyā: Thus, for her who ordains (one), there would be a pācittiya at the conclusion of the kammavācā in the manner stated. That is the meaning.
2399.Chandaṃavihāya vāavissajjetvāvaavuṭṭhitāya parisāya tuyathānisinnāya parisāya vuṭṭhāpentiyā anāpattīti yojanā.Vā-saddo evakārattho.
2399. Chandaṃ avihāya vā, without dismissing the consent, avuṭṭhitāya parisāya tu, for the assembly that has not risen, for the assembly as it is sitting, there is no offense. That is the connection. The word vā is in the sense of "eva."
Ekādasamaṃ.
Eleventh.
2400.Dvādaseti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1171) sikkhāpade.Teraseti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1175) sikkhāpade.
2400.In the twelfth: refers to the training rule, "Whatever bhikkhuni should ordain (vuṭṭhāpeyya) (a female candidate) annually, there is expiation," (pāci. 1171). In the thirteenth: refers to the training rule, "Whatever bhikkhuni should ordain two (female candidates) in one year, there is expiation," (pāci. 1175).
Dvādasamaterasamāni.
The twelfth and thirteenth.
Kumāribhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.
The Kumāribhūta Vagga, the eighth.
2401.Agilānāti chattupāhanena vūpasametabbarogarahitā. Yathāha ‘‘agilānā nāma yassā vinā chattupāhanā phāsu hotī’’ti. Chattañca upāhanā cachattupāhanaṃ. Tattha chattaṃ vuttalakkhaṇaṃ, upāhanā vakkhamānalakkhaṇā.Dhāreyyāti ubhayaṃ ekato dhāreyya. Visuṃ dhārentiyā hi dukkaṭaṃ vakkhati.
2401.Not being ill: means being without an illness that can be alleviated by an umbrella and shoes. As it is said, "Not being ill means one for whom it is comfortable without an umbrella and shoes." Umbrella and shoes (chattupāhanaṃ): chattañca + upāhanā ca. Here, the umbrella (chattaṃ) has been defined previously, the shoes (upāhanā) will be defined subsequently. Should wear (dhāreyya): should wear both together. For wearing them separately, a dukkaṭa will be stated.
2402.Divasanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Sace dhāretīti yojanā.
2402.A day (divasaṃ): is an adverb of the continuous conjunction. The connection is: if she wears.
2403.Kaddamādīnīti etthaādi-saddena mahāvālukādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
2403.Mud, etc. (kaddamādīni): here, the word "etc. (ādi)" includes things like coarse sand (mahāvālukā).
2404.Sace gacchatīti sambandho.Disvā gacchādikanti chatte lagganayoggaṃ nīcataraṃ gacchādikaṃ disvā.Ādi-saddena gumbādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Dukkaṭanti upāhanamattasseva dhāraṇe dukkaṭaṃ.
2404.The connection is: if she goes. Seeing a gacchādika, etc. (disvā gacchādikaṃ): having seen a lower gacchādika suitable for attaching to an umbrella. The word "etc. (ādi)" includes things like bushes (gumba). A dukkaṭa: a dukkaṭa only for wearing the shoes.
2405.Apanāmetvāti sīsato apanāmetvā.Omuñcitvāti pādato omuñcitvā.Hoti pācittiyanti puna pācittiyaṃ hoti.
2405.Having removed (apanāmetvā): having removed from the head. Having taken off (omuñcitvā): having taken off from the feet. There is expiation (hoti pācittiyaṃ): again, there is expiation.
2406.Payogagaṇanāyevāti chattupāhanassa apanetvā apanetvā ekato dhāraṇapayogagaṇanāya.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti ‘‘agilānā agilānasaññā, vematikā, gilānasaññā chattupāhanaṃ dhāreti, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 1181) evaṃ tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Gilānā agilānasaññā, gilānā vematikā, chattupāhanaṃ dhāreti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 1182) evaṃdvikadukkaṭaṃ tatheva vuttanti sambandho.
2406.By counting each instance of application (payogagaṇanāyeva): by counting each instance of applying the effort to wear and remove the umbrella and shoes one by one. The triple expiation was stated (tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ): in this way, the triple expiation was stated: "Being not ill, with the perception of not being ill, being doubtful, with the perception of being ill, she wears an umbrella and shoes, there is an offense of expiation," (pāci. 1181). The double dukkaṭa was stated just so (dvikadukkaṭaṃ tatheva vuttaṃ): the connection is: in this way, "Being ill, with the perception of not being ill, being ill, being doubtful, she wears an umbrella and shoes, there is an offense of dukkaṭa," (pāci. 1182).
2407.Yattha bhikkhū vā bhikkhuniyo vā nivasanti, tasmiṃārāme vā upacāre vāaparikkhittassa ārāmassaupacāre vā. Āpadāsūti raṭṭhabhedādiāpadāsu.
2407.In a monastery (ārāme vā) or the vicinity (upacāre vā): where bhikkhus or bhikkhunis reside, in the vicinity of a monastery that is unfenced, or. In times of danger (āpadāsu): in dangers such as national unrest.
Paṭhamaṃ.
The first.
2408.Bhikkhuniyāti ettha ‘‘agilānāyā’’ti seso, pādena gantuṃ samatthāya agilānāya bhikkhuniyāti attho. Yathāha ‘‘agilānā nāma sakkoti padasā gantu’’nti (pāci. 1187).Yānaṃnāma rathādi, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttasarūpameva.
2408.By a bhikkhuni (bhikkhuniyā): here, "not being ill (agilānāyā)" is understood, meaning by a bhikkhuni who is not ill, who is capable of walking on foot. As it is said, "Not being ill means one who is able to go on foot," (pāci. 1187). Vehicle (yānaṃ): means a chariot, etc., the nature of which has already been stated.
2409.Āpadāsūti raṭṭhabhedādiāpadāsu. Chattupāhanasikkhāpade ārāme, ārāmūpacāre ca anāpatti vuttā, idha tathā avuttattā sabbatthāpi āpattiyeva veditabbā.
2409.In times of danger (āpadāsu): in dangers such as national unrest. In the training rule about umbrellas and shoes, non-offenses were stated in the monastery and the vicinity of the monastery, but here, because it was not stated in that way, an offense should be understood in every case.
Dutiyaṃ.
The second.
2410.‘‘Yaṃ kiñcipi kaṭūpiya’’nti idaṃ ‘‘saṅghāṇi’’nti etassa atthapadaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘saṅghāṇi nāma yā kāci kaṭūpagā’’ti.Saṅghāṇināma mekhalādikaṭipiḷandhanaṃ.Kaṭūpiyanti kaṭippadesopagaṃ.
2410."Whatever concerns the waist (yaṃ kiñcipi kaṭūpiyaṃ)": this is a term of meaning for "girdle (saṅghāṇi)". As it is said, "Girdle means whatever concerns the waist (yā kāci kaṭūpagā)". Girdle (saṅghāṇi): means a belt or tying cord for the waist. Kaṭūpiyaṃ: that which pertains to the region of the waist.
2412.Kaṭisuttaṃnāma kaṭiyaṃ piḷandhanarajjusuttakaṃ.
2412.Waist string (kaṭisuttaṃ): means a string or cord worn around the waist.
2413.Idhaimasmiṃ sikkhāpade cittaṃ akusalaṃ, idaṃ pana sikkhāpadaṃ lokavajjaṃ, iti idaṃ ubhayamevavisesatāpurimasikkhāpadato imassa nānākaraṇaṃ.
2413.Here (idha): in this training rule, the mind (cittaṃ) is unwholesome (akusalaṃ), but this training rule is a worldly offense (lokavajjaṃ), thus this is both a distinction (visesatā): this differentiating from the previous training rule.
Tatiyaṃ.
The third.
2414.Sīsūpagādisu yaṃ kiñci sace yā dhāreti, tassā tassa vatthussa gaṇanāya āpattiyo siyunti yojanā. Sīsaṃ upagacchatītisīsūpagaṃ,sīse piḷandhanārahanti attho.Ādi-saddena gīvūpagādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘itthālaṅkāro nāma sīsūpago gīvūpago hatthūpago pādūpago kaṭūpago’’ti.
2414.The connection is: for whatever touches the head, etc., if she wears it, there will be offenses according to the number of those objects. Touching the head (sīsūpagaṃ): that which touches the head, meaning suitable for wearing on the head. The word "etc. (ādi)" includes things that touch the neck, etc. As it is said, "A woman's ornament means that which touches the head, that which touches the neck, that which touches the hand, that which touches the foot, that which touches the waist."
2415.Na ca dosoti yojanā. ‘‘Sadisanti paridīpita’’nti vattabbe iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho.
2415.And there is no fault (na ca dosoti): the connection. The word "iti" is understood by elision, when it should have been said, "similar (sadisanti paridīpitaṃ)".
Catutthaṃ.
The fourth.
2416.Yenakenaci gandhenāti candanatagarādinā yena kenaci gandhakakkena.Savaṇṇāvaṇṇakena cāti vaṇṇena saha vattatītisavaṇṇakaṃ,haliddikakkādi, natthi etassa ubbaṭṭanapaccayā dissamāno vaṇṇavisesotiavaṇṇakaṃ,sāsapakakkādi, savaṇṇakañca avaṇṇakañca savaṇṇāvaṇṇakaṃ, tenasavaṇṇāvaṇṇakena ca. Ubbaṭṭetvā nhāyantiyā nhānosāne pācittiyāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
2416.With whatever fragrance (yena kenaci gandhena): with whatever fragrant powder, such as sandalwood or tagara. And with colored or uncolored (savaṇṇāvaṇṇakena ca): colored (savaṇṇakaṃ): that which exists together with color (vaṇṇena saha vattatīti), such as turmeric powder, etc. Uncolored (avaṇṇakaṃ): there is no distinct color appearing due to the cause of rubbing on, such as mustard powder, etc. Colored and uncolored (savaṇṇakañca avaṇṇakañca savaṇṇāvaṇṇakaṃ): with that colored or uncolored. The connection is: it was declared that there is an offense of expiation at the end of bathing for one who bathes after rubbing it on.
2417.Sabbapayogeti sabbasmiṃ pubbapayoge.Ābādhapaccayāti daddukuṭṭhādirogapaccayā.
2417.In every application (sabbapayoge): in every prior application. Due to a condition of illness (ābādhapaccayā): due to a condition of disease such as ringworm or leprosy, etc.
2418.Chaṭṭhanti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī vāsitakena piññākena nahāyeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1203) sikkhāpadaṃ.
2418.The sixth: is the training rule, "Whatever bhikkhuni should bathe with perfumed piññāka, there is expiation," (pāci. 1203).
Pañcamachaṭṭhāni.
The fifth and sixth.
2419.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññāya bhikkhuniyā sace ubbaṭṭāpeyya vā sambāhāpeyya vā, tassābhikkhuniyātathā pācittiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
2419.The connection is: whatever bhikkhuni should have another bhikkhuni rub on or massage her, there is an offense of expiation for that bhikkhuni (bhikkhuniyā) in that way.
2420.Etthaimasmiṃ ubbaṭṭane, sambāhane ca hatthaṃ amocetvā ubbaṭṭaneekāāpatti siyā, hatthaṃ mocetvā mocetvā ubbaṭṭane payogagaṇanāya siyāti yojanā.
2420.Here (ettha): in this rubbing on and massaging, there would be one (ekā) offense if she rubs on without releasing her hand, and if she rubs on releasing her hand repeatedly, there would be offenses according to the number of applications.
2421.Āpadāsūti corabhayādīhi sarīrakampanādīsu.Gilānāyāti antamaso maggagamanaparissamenāpi ābādhikāya.
2421.In times of danger (āpadāsu): in dangers such as fear of thieves, etc., or trembling of the body, etc. For one who is ill (gilānāya): for one who is sick, even from the fatigue of traveling on the road.
2422.Aṭṭhamasikkhāpade ‘‘sikkhamānāyā’’ti ca navamasikkhāpade ‘‘sāmaṇeriyā’’ti ca dasamasikkhāpade ‘‘gihiniyā’’ti ca visesaṃ vajjetvā avasesavinicchayo sattameneva samānoti dassetumāha‘‘aṭṭhamādīni tīṇipī’’ti.
2422.To show that the remaining judgment is the same as the seventh, except for the distinction in the eighth training rule, "for a sikkhamānā," and in the ninth training rule, "for a sāmaṇerī," and in the tenth training rule, "for a laywoman," therefore he says, "The eighth, etc., are also three (aṭṭhamādīni tīṇipī)."
Sattamaṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.
The seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth.
2423.Antoupacārasminti dvādasaratanabbhantare.‘‘Bhikkhussa purato’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā purato vā hotu pacchato vā passato vā, samantato dvādasaratanabbhantareti nidassanapadametaṃ.Chamāyapīti anantarahitāya bhūmiyāpi. Yā nisīdeyyāti sambandho.Na vaṭṭatipācittiyāpatti hotīti attho.
2423.Within (anto) the vicinity (upacārasmiṃ): within twelve cubits. "In front of a bhikkhu (bhikkhussa purato)": this is indicative. Therefore, whether it is in front, behind, or to the side, this is an example: within twelve cubits all around. Even on the bare (chamāyapī): even on the bare ground. The connection is: that she should sit down. It is not allowable (na vaṭṭati): meaning there is an offense of expiation.
2424.Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttanti anāpucchite anāpucchitasaññā, vematikā, āpucchitasaññāti tīsu vikappesu pācittiyattayaṃ vuttaṃ. Āpucchite anāpucchitasaññā, vematikā vā bhikkhussa purato nisīdeyyāti vikappadvayedukkaṭadvayaṃhoti.Āpadāsūti raṭṭhabhedādiāpadāsu. Āpucchituñca ṭhātuñca asakkontiyāgilānāya.
2424.The triple expiation was stated (tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ): in the three alternatives of without asking with the perception of without asking, being doubtful, with the perception of asking, three expiations were stated. In the two alternatives of having asked, with the perception of not asking, or being doubtful, if she should sit down in front of a bhikkhu, there is a double dukkaṭa (dukkaṭadvayaṃ). In times of danger (āpadāsu): in dangers such as national unrest, etc. For one who is ill (gilānāya): for one who is unable to ask or stand.
2425.Nipajjanaṃkriyaṃ. Anāpucchanaṃakriyaṃ.
2425.Lying down is an action (kriyaṃ). Not asking is a non-action (akriyaṃ).
Ekādasamaṃ.
The eleventh.
2426.Okāso kato yena sookāsakato,na okāsakatoanokāsakato,taṃ, akatokāsanti attho, ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne pucchāmī’’ti attanā pucchitabbavinayādīnaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā okāsaṃ kārāpanakāle adhivāsanavasena akatokāsanti vuttaṃ hoti.Dosatāti pācittiyāpatti. Ekasmiṃ piṭake okāsaṃ kārāpetvā aññasmiṃ piṭake pañhaṃ pucchantiyāpi pācittiyaṃ hotīti dassetumāha‘‘vinaye cā’’tiādi.
2426.Having made an opportunity (okāsakato): he by whom an opportunity has been made; not having made an opportunity (anokāsakato): not having made an opportunity, meaning not having made an opportunity. It is said to be "not having made an opportunity" in terms of acquiescence at the time of making the opportunity by taking the name of the Vinaya, etc., to be asked by oneself, saying "In such and such a place, I ask." Faultiness (dosatā): is an offense of expiation. To show that there is also expiation for asking a question in another Piṭaka after having had an opportunity made in one Piṭaka, therefore he says, "And in the Vinaya, etc. (vinaye cā'tiādi)."
Pucchantiyāpi cāti etthapi-saddena ‘‘abhidhammaṃ pucchantiyāpī’’ti idañca anuttasamuccayatthenaca-saddena ‘‘suttante okāsaṃ kārāpetvā vinayaṃ vā abhidhammaṃ vā pucchati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Abhidhamme okāsaṃ kārāpetvā suttantaṃ vā vinayaṃ vā pucchati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti idañca saṅgahitaṃ.
2427.In the asking also (pucchantiyāpi cā): here, with the word "also (pi)", this "in the asking of Abhidhamma also" is included with the meaning of an unsurpassed collection, and with the word "and (ca)", this is included: "Having had an opportunity made in the Suttanta, she asks about the Vinaya or Abhidhamma, there is an offense of expiation. Having had an opportunity made in the Abhidhamma, she asks about the Suttanta or Vinaya, there is an offense of expiation."
2427.Anodissāti ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ aniyametvā kevalaṃ ‘‘pucchitabbaṃ atthi, pucchāmi ayyā’’ti evaṃ vatvā.
2427.Without specifying (anodissā): without specifying, "In such and such a place, I ask," but simply saying, "There is something to ask, I ask, venerable one."
Dvādasamaṃ.
The twelfth.
2428-9.Saṃkaccikanti thanaveṭhanacīvaraṃ, taṃ pana pārupantiyā adhakkhakaṃ ubbhanābhimaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentiyā pārupitabbaṃ. Tenāhamātikaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘asaṃkaccikāti adhakkhakaubbhanābhimaṇḍalasaṅkhātassa sarīrassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ anuññātasaṃkaccikacīvararahitā’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. asaṃkaccikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). ‘‘Saṃkaccikāya pamāṇaṃ tiriyaṃ diyaḍḍhahatthanti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vutta’’nti (vajira. ṭī. pācittiya 1224-1226) vajirabuddhitthero.Parikkhepokkameti parikkhepassa antopavesane.Upacārokkamepīti aparikkhittassa gāmassa dutiyaleḍḍupātabbhantarapavesanepi.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Eseva nayoti ‘‘paṭhame pāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye pācittiya’’nti yathāvuttoyeva nayomatoviññātoti attho.
2428-9.Saṃkaccika: is a breast-covering robe; however, when wearing it, it should be worn in such a way that it covers the area from below the breasts to the navel. Therefore, it was said in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā, "Not a saṃkaccika means without the allowable saṃkaccika robe for the purpose of covering the body counted as the area from below the breasts to the navel," (Kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. asaṃkaccikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). Vajirabuddhi Thera said, "Saṃkaccika's measurement is one and a half hands across, according to the ancient commentary," (vajira. ṭī. pācittiya 1224-1226). Entering the boundary (parikkhepokkame): in entering within the boundary. Entering the vicinity also (upacārokkamepī): even in entering within the second clod-fall distance of a village that is unfenced. Here (ettha): in this training rule. This is the method (eseva nayo): the meaning is: it is understood (mato) that just as the method was stated, "In the first step there is a dukkaṭa, in the second there is expiation."
2430.Āpadāsupīti mahagghaṃ hoti saṃkaccikaṃ, pārupitvā gacchantiyā ca upaddavo uppajjati, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti.
2430.Even in times of danger (āpadāsupī): if the saṃkaccika is very expensive, and harm arises when going wearing it, in such dangers there is no offense.
2431.Sesanti idha sarūpato adassitañca.Vuttanayenevāti mātikāpadabhājanādīsu vuttanayeneva. Sunipuṇasmiṃ dhammajātaṃ, atthajātañca vibhāveti vividhenākārena pakāsetīti vibhāvī, tenavibhāvinā.
2431.The remainder (sesaṃ): here, that which was not shown in terms of its nature. By the method already stated (vuttanayenevā): just by the method already stated in the Mātikāpada, Bhājana, etc. One who discerns the Dhamma and matters skillfully, and reveals them in various ways, is a revealer (vibhāvī), by that revealer (vibhāvinā).
Terasamaṃ.
The thirteenth.
Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.
The Chattupāhana Vagga, the ninth.
Evaṃ navahi vaggehi bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni channavuti sikkhāpadāni dassetvā ito paresu musāvādavaggādīsu sattasu vaggesu bhikkhūhi sādhāraṇasikkhāpadāni bhikkhupātimokkhavinicchayakathāya vuttanayeneva veditabbānīti tāni idha na dassitāni.
Having shown these ninety-six training rules that are not shared by bhikkhunis with bhikkhus in this way in nine Vaggas, the training rules that are shared by bhikkhus in the seven Vaggas beginning with the Musāvāda Vagga should be understood just as stated in the explanation of the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha judgment, thus they are not shown here.
Sabbāneva bhikkhunīnaṃ khuddakesu channavuti, bhikkhūnaṃ dvenavutīti aṭṭhāsītisataṃ sikkhāpadāni. Tato paraṃ sakalaṃ bhikkhunivaggaṃ, paramparabhojanaṃ, anatirittabhojanaṃ, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇaṃ, paṇītabhojanaviññatti, acelakasikkhāpadaṃ, duṭṭhullapaacchādanaṃ, ūnavīsativassaupasampādanaṃ, mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya addhānagamanaṃ, rājantepurappavesanaṃ, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ, nisīdanaṃ, vassikasāṭikanti imāni bāvīsati sikkhāpadāni apanetvā sesāni satañca chasaṭṭhi ca sikkhāpadāni bhikkhunipātimokkhuddesamaggena uddiṭṭhānīti veditabbāni.
In total, there are one hundred and eighty-eight training rules for bhikkhunis in the Khuddaka, with ninety-six for bhikkhunis and ninety-two for bhikkhus. After that, having removed these twenty-two training rules: the entire Bhikkhuni Vagga, eating in succession, eating excessively, invitation to bring more than enough, requesting delicious food, the training rule about naked ascetics, improper covering of private parts, ordination under twenty years of age, traveling a road in agreement with a woman, entering the royal inner chambers, entering a village at the wrong time without informing a bhikkhu who is present, the sitting cloth, and the rain-bathing cloth; the remaining one hundred and sixty-six training rules should be understood as being recited by way of the Bhikkhuni Pātimokkha recitation.
acittakāni,citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattālokavajjānicevaakusalacittānica. Avasesāni acittakāni paṇṇattivajjāneva. Corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ, gāmantaraṃ, ārāmasikkhāpadaṃ, gabbhinivagge ādito paṭṭhāya satta, kumāribhūtavagge ādito paṭṭhāya pañca, purisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ, pārivāsiyachandadānaṃ, anuvassavuṭṭhāpanaṃ, ekantarikavuṭṭhāpananti imāni ekūnavīsati sikkhāpadāni sacittakāni, paṇṇattivajjāni. Avasesāni sacittakāni lokavajjānevāti.
Not intentional (acittakāni): because they must be committed with an unwholesome mind if there is a mind, therefore they are both worldly offenses (lokavajjāni) and unwholesome mental states (akusalacittāni). The remaining not intentional ones are only offenses against the rule (paṇṇattivajjāneva). These nineteen training rules are intentional and offenses against the rule: stealing ordination, another village, the monastery training rule, the seven from the beginning of the Gabbhinī Vagga, the five from the beginning of the Kumāribhūta Vagga, association with a man, giving parivāsa and consent, annually ordaining, ordaining with an interval.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Pācittiya section in the commentary on the Vinaya judgment in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā
2432.Evaṃ pācittiyavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni pāṭidesanīyaṃ dassetumāha‘‘agilānā’’tiādi. Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā sayaṃ attanā viññattiyā laddhaṃ sappiṃ sace ‘‘bhuñjissāmī’’ti gaṇhati, tassā evaṃ gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitanti yojanā. Tattha yassā vinā sappinā phāsu hoti, sāagilānānāma.Sappinti pubbe vuttavinicchayaṃ pāḷiāgataṃ gosappiādikameva.
2432.Having shown the Pācittiya judgment in this way, now to show the Pāṭidesanīya, he says "Not being ill (agilānā)", etc. The connection is: whatever bhikkhuni, not being ill, if she accepts ghee obtained by her own request, thinking "I will eat," for her in that acceptance, a dukkaṭa was declared. Therein, she for whom it is comfortable without ghee is called "not being ill (agilānā)". Ghee (sappiṃ): is just the go-sappi, etc., that comes in the Pāḷi, the judgment of which was previously stated.
2433.Tipāṭidesanīyanti agilānā agilānasaññā, vematikā, gilānasaññāti tīsu vikappesu tīṇi pāṭidesanīyāni.Gilānā dvikadukkaṭanti gilānāya dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Gilānā agilānasaññā, vematikā vāti dvīsu vikappesu dve dukkaṭāni.
2433.Triple Pāṭidesanīya (tipāṭidesanīyaṃ): in the three alternatives of not being ill with the perception of not being ill, being doubtful, with the perception of being ill, there are three Pāṭidesanīyas. Double dukkaṭa for one who is ill (gilānā dvikadukkaṭaṃ): there is a double dukkaṭa for one who is ill. In the two alternatives of being ill with the perception of not being ill, or being doubtful, there are two dukkatas.
2434-5.Gilānā hutvā sappiṃ viññāpetvā pacchā vūpasantagelaññā hutvāsevantiyāparibhuñjantiyāpi ca gilānāya avasesaṃ paribhuñjantiyā vāñātakāditoñātakapavāritaṭṭhānato viññattaṃ bhuñjantiyā vā aññassatthāya viññattaṃ paribhuñjantiyā vā attano dhanena gahitaṃ bhuñjantiyā vā ummattikāya vā anāpattīti yojanā.
2434-5.Also, there is no offense for a sick bhikkhuni who, having requested ghee and subsequently recovering from her illness, consumes it; or for a sick bhikkhuni who consumes the remainder; or for one who consumes what has been requested from relatives, from a place she has informed her relatives of; or for one who consumes what has been requested for someone else; or for one who consumes what has been obtained with her own money; or for one who is insane—this is how the passage should be construed.
Paṭhamaṃ.
The First.
2436.Sesesu dutiyādīsūti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā telaṃ…pe… madhuṃ…pe… phāṇitaṃ…pe… macchaṃ…pe… maṃsaṃ…pe… khīraṃ…pe… dadhiṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya, paṭidesetabbaṃ tāya bhikkhuniyā gārayhaṃ ayye dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti (pāci. 1236) evaṃ dutiyādīsu sattasu pāṭidesanīyesu.Natthi kāci visesatāti telādipadāni vinā añño koci viseso natthīti attho.
2436.In the remaining, the second and so on: "Whatever bhikkhuni, being not ill, having requested oil…pe… honey…pe… molasses…pe… fish…pe… meat…pe… milk…pe… curd, should consume it, that bhikkhuni should confess: 'Venerable ones, I have committed a blameworthy, unsuitable offense subject to confession. I confess it.'" (pāci. 1236) Thus, in the latter seven offenses subject to confession. There is no particular difference: there is no other difference except for the terms oil, etc.; this is the meaning.
2437.Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatesu sabbesu sappiādīsu aṭṭhasu aññataraṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjantiyāpi dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2437.In the Pali, even if she requests and consumes any one of the eight—ghee, etc.—in all future instances, there is a dukkata offense; this is how the passage should be construed.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus concludes the Pāṭidesanīya section in the Vinayavinicchaya commentary of the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya is finished.
Sikkhākaraṇīyakathāvaṇṇanā
Sikkhākaraṇīya Section
2438.Pāṭidesanīyānantaraṃ uddiṭṭhāni pañcasattati sekhiyāni mahāvibhaṅge vuttavinicchayānevāti tadeva atidisanto āha‘‘sekhiyā pana ye dhammā’’tiādi. Ye pana pañcasattati sekhiyā dhammā pāṭidesanīyānantaraṃuddiṭṭhā,tesaṃ atthavinicchayo mahāvibhaṅge vuttovāti yojanā, atthikehi tatova gahetabbo, na puna idha dassessāmīti adhippāyo.
2438.The seventy-five Sekhiya rules, recited after the Pāṭidesanīya, have already been decided in the Mahāvibhaṅga; thus, while repeating that same meaning, he says, "But those Sekhiya rules…" etc. Whatever seventy-five Sekhiya rules were recited after the Pāṭidesanīya rules, the interpretation of their meaning has been stated in the Mahāvibhaṅga. Those who are interested should learn it from there; I will not show it again here; this is the intention.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus concludes the Sikkhākaraṇīya section in the Vinayavinicchaya commentary of the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Sikkhākaraṇīyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Sikkhākaraṇīya is finished.
2439-40.Savibhaṅgānaṃubhatovibhaṅgasahitānaṃubhatopātimokkhānaṃbhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhunīnañca pātimokkhānaṃaṭṭhakathāsārosabbaṭṭhakathānaṃ sārabhūto yo so attho visesato samantapāsādikāyaṃvutto. Taṃ sabbaṃsārabhūtaṃ atthaṃ samādāya yo vinayassavinicchayo bhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhunīnañca hitatthāya mayākatoviracitoti sambandho.
2439-40.The essence of the commentaries to the Savibhaṅga, along with both Vibhaṅgas, to both Ubhatopātimokkhas, the Pātimokkhas for bhikkhus and bhikkhunis, is the essence of the commentaries: that meaning, which is the essence of all the commentaries, has been stated in detail in the Samantapāsādika. By collecting all of that essential meaning, the Vinaya-vinicchaya has been made by me for the benefit of the bhikkhus and bhikkhunis; this is the connection.
2441.Noamhākaṃpaṭibhāṇajaṃpaṭibhāṇato jātaṃimaṃ tuimaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ panaye jantunosattā suṇanti,tejantunojanassasattalokassahiteadhisīlasikkhāpakāsakattā upakārake sumatassa sobhaṇanti buddhādīhi matassa, sobhaṇehi vā buddhādīhi matassa paṭividdhassa amatamahānibbānassa ayane añjasabhūtejanassa tāyanekāyikavācasikavītikkamapaṭipakkhattā apāyabhayanivāraṇaṭṭhena tāṇabhūtevinayevinayapiṭakepakataññunoyathāsabhāvaṃ jānantātaññuno bhavantitaṃ taṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbaṃ jānantā bhavantevāti attho.
2441.Not from our Paṭibhāṇajaṃ, born of ready wit, but this this Vinayavinicchaya, however, those beings beings who hear, they, those beings, for the sake of the people, for the world of beings, for the welfare, being indicative of the higher training in morality, beneficial to those of good wisdom, considered by the Buddhas and others to be good, or by those who are good, understood as the path that is straight to the deathless great Nibbāna, for the protection of the people, being opposed to physical and verbal transgressions, being a refuge in the sense of preventing fear of the lower realms, in the Vinaya, in the Vinaya Piṭaka, knowing the facts, knowing things as they are, become knowers of that, become knowers of what is allowable and unallowable, what should and should not be practiced; this is the meaning.
2442.Bahavo sārabhūtā nayā etthāti bahusāranayo, tasmiṃbahusāranaye. Parameuttamevinayevinayapiṭakevisāradataṃvesārajjaṃ asaṃhīrañāṇaṃabhipatthayatāvisesato icchantenabuddhimatāñāṇātisayamantenayatināsabbakālaṃ tividhasikkhāparipūraṇe asithilapavattasammāvāyāmena bhikkhunā imasmiṃ vinayavinicchayeparamāuttaritarā mahatī ādaratākaraṇīyatamāvisesena kātabbāyevāti attho.
2442.There are many essential methods here; therefore, it is called "Bahusāranayo" (having many essential methods), in that Bahusāranaye. Supreme excellent in Vinaya in the Vinaya Piṭaka desiring Visāradataṃ, confidence, unflinching knowledge, by one who aspires, especially desiring by one who is wise, by a bhikkhu with an excess of knowledge by a yati, always by a bhikkhu with continuous and unwavering effort in the complete fulfillment of the threefold training, in this Vinayavinicchaya, the utmost the most excellent, great respect should especially be done should especially be made; this is the meaning.
2443.Iccevaṃ sīlavisuddhisādhane vinayapiṭake vesārajjahetutāya imassa vinayavinicchayassa sīlavisuddhiādisattavisuddhiparamparāya adhigantabbassa amatamahānibbānassa pattiyāpi mūlabhūtataṃ dassetumāha‘‘avagacchatī’’tiādi.
2443.Thus, in the Vinaya Piṭaka, which is the means for the purification of virtue, in order to show that this Vinayavinicchaya is fundamental for the attainment of the deathless great Nibbāna, which is to be attained through the succession of the purification of virtue and the seven purifications, he says, "Understands" etc.
imaṃvinayassavinicchayaṃavagacchatiavecca yāthāvato jānāti, so aparamparaṃ maraṇābhāvāamaraṃjarāyābhāvāajaraṃrāgādikilesarajapaṭipakkhattāarajaṃanekappakārarogānaṃ appavattihetuttāarujaṃ santipadaṃsabbakilesadarathapariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamahetuttā santisaṅkhātaṃ nibbānapadaṃadhigacchatisīlavisuddhiādisattavisuddhiparamparāya gantvā paṭivijjhatīti yojanā.
This Vinayavinicchaya understands, having understood, knows as it is, he, without a lineage of death, immortal without old age ageless opposed to the dust of defilements such as lust dustless, due to the non-occurrence of various kinds of diseases healthy, the peaceful state due to the calming of all the distress and burning of defilements, the state of Nibbāna known as peace attains having gone through the succession of the purification of virtue and the seven purifications, realizes it; this is how it should be construed.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus concludes the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga section in the Vinayavinicchaya commentary of the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī.
Bhikkhunivibhaṅgakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga is finished.
Khandhakakathā
Khandhaka Section
Mahāvaggo
Mahāvagga
Mahākhandhakakathā
Mahākhandhaka Section
Pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pabbajjā (Going Forth) Section
2444.Iccevaṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthāravasena vibhaṅgadvaye, tadaṭṭhakathāya ca āgataṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni khandhakāgataṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetumārabhanto āha‘‘sīlakkhandhādī’’tiādi. Tatthasīlakkhandhādiyuttenāti sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātehi pañcahi khandhehi guṇarāsīhi yuttena samannāgatena.Subhakkhandhenāti suvaṇṇāliṅgasadisavaṭṭakkhandhatāya subho sundaro khandho etassāti subhakkhandho, bhagavā, tena. Iminā bāttiṃsalakkhaṇānamekadesabhūtassa samavaṭṭakkhandhatālakkhaṇassa paridīpakena vacanena lakkhaṇāhāranayena bāttiṃsalakkhaṇādikā sabbāpi rūpakāyasirī sandassitāti veditabbā.
2444.Thus, having shown the decisions that came in the two Vibhaṅgas and their commentaries, without being too concise or too extensive, now, beginning to show the decisions that came in the Khandhakas, he says, "With the Sīlakkhandha etc." etc. There, "With the Sīlakkhandha etc." with the five aggregates of qualities known as virtue, concentration, wisdom, liberation, and the knowledge and vision of liberation; with them, endowed with them. "By Subhakkhandha" Subhakkhandha because his aggregate (khandha) is beautiful (subha) and lovely, like a golden image. Subhakkhandha, the Blessed One, by him. By this statement, which is indicative of the characteristic of having a well-rounded aggregate, which is part of the thirty-two marks, it should be understood that all the glory of the physical body, beginning with the thirty-two marks, is shown by way of the characteristic-extraction method.
Khandhaketi khandhānaṃ samūho khandhako, khandhānaṃ vā kāyanato dīpanato khandhako.‘‘Khandhā’’ti cettha pabbajjūpasampadādivinayakammasaṅkhātā, cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā ‘‘paññattiyo’’ti vuccanti. Paññattiyañcakhandha-saddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho (saṃ. ni. 4.241) aggikkhandho (paṭi. ma. 1.116) udakakkhandho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 6.37) viya. Apica bhāgarāsatthatā cettha yujjatiyeva tāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgaso, rāsito ca vibhattattā. Tasmiṃkhandhake.Pi-saddo vuttāpekkhāya pañcasatikasattasatikakkhandhake dve vajjetvā pabbajjakkhandhakādike bhikkhunikhandhakapariyosāne vīsatividhe khandhake vuttavinicchayassa idha vakkhamānattā. Tadeva sandhāyāha‘‘khandhakepi pavakkhāmi, samāsena vinicchaya’’nti.
Khandhake: the group of Khandhas is Khandhaka, or because it reveals the Khandhas, namely the body, it is Khandhaka. Here, "Khandhas" means the injunctions consisting of going forth, full ordination, and the Vinaya acts, and the injunctions consisting of the rules of training involving accepted and avoided behavior. For, going forth, etc., are called "injunctions" because they are enjoined by the Blessed One. The word khandha is seen in the injunction, as in "a log of wood" (dārukkhandho), "a mass of fire" (aggikkhandho), "a mass of water" (udakakkhandho)," etc. Moreover, being a mass of parts is also fitting here, because those injunctions are divided into parts and masses. In that Khandhake. The pi particle is with reference to what has been said, because the decisions stated in the Khandhakas, twenty in number, beginning with the Pabbajjā Khandhaka and ending with the Bhikkhuni Khandhaka, except for the five-hundred and seven-hundred Khandhakas, will be explained here. Intending that itself, he says, "Even in the Khandhaka, I will explain the decisions in brief."
2445.‘‘Mātarā pitarā’’ti iminā janakāyeva adhippetā. ‘‘Bhaṇḍukammaṃ, samaṇakaraṇaṃ, pabbājananti ca pariyāya-saddā’’ti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghaṃ apaloketuṃ bhaṇḍukammāyā’’ti (mahāva. 98) imissāpāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya(mahāva. aṭṭha. 98) vuttaṃ.Āpucchitvāti ettha ‘‘saṅgha’’nti seso.
2445.By "By mother and father" only the parents are meant. "Bhaṇḍukamma, samaṇakaraṇa, pabbājananti are synonymous terms," it is said in the commentary to this Pali: "I allow, monks, for the Sangha to ask permission for the tonsure ceremony" (mahāva. 98). Having asked permission: here, "Sangha" is understood.
2446.Vāvaṭoti pasuto, yuttapayuttoti attho. ‘‘Pabbājetvā ānaya iti cā’’ti padacchedo. Ettha ca tidhā pabbājanaṃ veditabbaṃ kesacchedanaṃ, kāsāyaacchādanaṃ, saraṇadānanti, imāni tīṇi karonto ‘‘pabbājetī’’ti vuccati. Tesu ekaṃ, dve vāpi karonto tathā voharīyatiyeva. Tasmā‘‘pabbājetvānayā’’ti iminā kese chinditvā kāsāyāni acchādetvā ānehīti ayamattho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbo.
2446.Vāvaṭo: busied, meaning suitable and proper. "Pabbājetvā ānaya iti ca" is the word division. And here, the going forth should be understood as threefold: cutting the hair, wearing the saffron robe, and giving the three refuges; while doing these three, he is said to "cause to go forth." While doing one or two of them, he is indeed referred to in that way. Therefore, it should be seen that by "having caused to go forth, bring him here," it indicates this meaning: having cut the hair and having covered him with saffron robes, bring him here.
2447.Avuttoti upajjhāyena anuyyojito. So daharo sace taṃ sayameva kesacchedanakāsāyacchādanehi pabbājeti, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2447.Avutto: not instructed by the preceptor. If that young man himself causes the going forth by cutting the hair and covering himself with the saffron robe, it is allowable; this is how the passage should be construed.
2448.Tatthāti attano samīpe.Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvāti bhaṇḍukammārocanaparihāratthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena sabhikkhuke vihāre aññampi bhikkhuṃ ‘‘etassa kese chindā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭati.Pabbājetvāti kesacchedanaṃ sandhāya vadati.
2448.There: near himself. Having led him to the boundary: this is said for the purpose of announcing the tonsure ceremony and avoiding offenses. Therefore, in a monastery with bhikkhus, it is not allowable to tell another bhikkhu, "Cut his hair." Having caused to go forth: he speaks with reference to cutting the hair.
2450.‘‘Purisaṃbhikkhuto añño, pabbājeti na vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ saraṇadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sāmaṇero’’tiādi.
2450."A man, other than a bhikkhu, should not cause to go forth" this is said with reference to giving the three refuges. Therefore, he says, "Sāmaṇero" etc.
2451.Ubhinnampitheratherīnaṃ ‘‘imehi cīvarehi imaṃ acchādehī’’tiāṇattiyāsāmaṇeropi vā hotu, tathā sāmaṇerī vā hotu,teubho sāmaṇerasāmaṇerī kāsāyāni dātuṃ labhantīti yojanā.
2451.By the order of both the elder bhikkhu and the elder bhikkhuni, "Cover this person with these robes," even if he is a sāmaṇera, or even if she is a sāmaṇerī, they, both the sāmaṇera and sāmaṇerī, are allowed to give the saffron robes; this is how the passage should be construed.
2452-4.Pabbājentena bhikkhunāti ettha ‘‘tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ datvā’’ti vattabbaṃ evañhi katvā kesāpanayanassaaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘āvuso, suṭṭhu upadhārehi, satiṃ upaṭṭhāpehīti vatvā tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ācikkhantena ca vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena asucijegucchapaṭikkūlabhāvaṃ, nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ vā pākaṭaṃ karontena ācikkhitabba’’ntiādi. Kimatthamevaṃ karīyatīti ce? Sace upanissayasampanno hoti, tassa khuraggeyeva arahattapāpuṇanatthaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
2452-4.By the bhikkhu causing to go forth: here, it should be said, "Having given the five primary objects of meditation on the body," for it is said in the commentary that the removal of hair is done in this way. For it is said there, "Having said, 'Friend, pay close attention, establish mindfulness,' the five primary objects of meditation on the body should be taught. And while teaching, the state of being impure, disgusting, and repulsive should be made clear by way of color, shape, smell, location, or the state of being lifeless and without a living entity," etc. Why is this done in this way? If he is endowed with supporting conditions, it is for the purpose of attaining arahantship at the razor's edge. And this has been said in the commentary:
‘‘Ye hi keci khuragge arahattaṃ pattā, sabbe te evarūpaṃ savanaṃ labhitvā kalyāṇamittena ācariyena dinnanayaṃ nissāya, no anissāya, tasmāssa āditova evarūpī kathā kathetabbā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 34).
"For whatever ones have attained arahantship at the razor's edge, all of them, having received such instruction, relying on the method given by a good friend, a teacher, not without it; therefore, such a talk should be spoken to him from the beginning" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 34).
Gomayādināti gomayacuṇṇādinā.Ādi-saddena mattikādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Pīḷakā vāti thullapīḷakā vā.Kacchu vāti sukhumakacchu vā.Niyaṃputtanti attano puttaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhunā’’ti imassa padassa dūrattā‘‘yatinā’’ti āha.
By cow dung, etc.: by cow dung powder, etc. The ādi (etc.) includes earth and other items. Pīḷakā vā: or thick scabs. Kacchu vā: or subtle scabies. Niyaṃputta: his own son. Because the word "bhikkhunā" is distant, he says "by a yati."
2455-6.Kasmā pana evaṃ nahāpetabboti āha‘‘ettakenāpī’’tiādi.Soti pabbajjāpekkho.Upajjhāyakādisūti etthaādi-saddena ācariyasamānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Pāpuṇanti hīti etthahi-saddo yasmā-padatthe vattati. Yasmā ettakenāpi upajjhāyādīsu sagāravo hoti, yasmā ca evarūpaṃ upakāraṃ labhitvā kulaputtā uppannaṃ anabhiratiṃ paṭivinodetvā sikkhāyo paripūretvā nibbānaṃ pāpuṇissanti, tasmā evarūpo upakāro kātabboti attho.
2455-6.But why should he be bathed in this way? He says, "Even by this" etc. He: the one seeking going forth. Upajjhāyakādisū: here, the ādi (etc.) includes the teacher, co-preceptor, and others. They attain: here, the particle hi has the sense of "because." Because even by this, he is respectful to the preceptor, etc., and because, having received such help, the sons of good families, having warded off arisen discontent, will fulfill the trainings and attain Nibbāna, therefore, such help should be given; this is the meaning.
2458.Ekatoti sabbāni cīvarāni ekato katvā.
2458.Ekato: having made all the robes into one.
2459.Athāti adhikārantarārambhe nipāto. Tassa hatthe adatvāpi upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vāpi sayamevataṃpabbajjāpekkhaṃ acchādeti, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2459.Atha: then; this is a particle at the beginning of another subject. Without giving it into his hand, the preceptor or teacher himself covers him, the one seeking going forth; it is allowable; this is how the passage should be construed.
2460.Adinnacīvarassa aggahetabbattā āha‘‘apanetvā tato sabbaṃ, puna dātabbameva ta’’nti.Tatoti tassa sarīrato.Tanti cīvaraṃ.
2460.Because a robe that has not been given should not be taken, he says, "Having removed it all from there, it must be given again." Tato: from his body. Taṃ: the robe.
2461-2.Etadeva āha‘‘bhikkhunā’’tiādinā.Adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha pabbajjā na ruhatīti vadanti. Tassevasantakaṃ vāpicīvaraṃ adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatiattasantakeācariyupajjhāyānaṃ attano santake cīvarekā kathāvattabbameva natthīti attho.Bhikkhūti ye tattha sannipatitā.Kārāpetvāna ukkuṭinti ettha sabbadhātvatthānugato karoti-saddo gahitoti ukkuṭikaṃ nisīdāpetvāti attho gahetabbo, ‘‘ukkuṭika’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 34)aṭṭhakathāpāṭho gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ idha ka-kāralopena niddiṭṭho.
2461-2.He says this itself with "by a bhikkhu" etc. "What has not been given is not allowable": here, they say that the going forth does not take root. Even his own robe is not allowable if it has not been given; what to say about robes in the possession of the teachers and preceptors, which belong to themselves there is nothing to say; this is the meaning. Bhikkhū: those who have gathered there. Having made him sit in the squatting position: here, the word karoti (makes) is taken to be in accordance with all the meanings of the root, so the meaning should be taken as "having made him sit in the squatting position"; the commentary reading "ukkuṭika" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 34) is indicated here with the dropping of the ka-kāra for the sake of ease in the verse form.
2464.Ekapadaṃvāpīti buddhamiccādikaṃ ekampi vā padaṃ.Ekakkharampi vāti bukārādiakkharesu ekampi vā akkharaṃ.Paṭipāṭinti ‘‘buddha’’miccādikaṃ padapantiṃ.
2464.Even one word: even one word, such as "Buddha," etc. Even one letter: even one letter among the letters beginning with bu. In sequence: the line of words "Buddha," etc.
2465.Akattabbappakārantaraṃ dassetumāha‘‘tikkhattuṃ yadi vā’’tiādi.Tathā sesesūti yadi vā ‘‘dhammaṃ saraṇa’’nti tikkhattuṃ deti, ‘‘saṅghaṃ saraṇa’’nti yadi vā tikkhattuṃ deti,evampitīṇi saraṇāni adinnāneva honti.
2465.To show another way in which it should not be done, he says, "If it is three times" etc. "Likewise, in the rest": if he gives "Dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ" three times, or if he gives "Saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ" three times, even so these three refuges are not given.
2466.Anunāsikantāni katvā dātabbānīti sambandho. Anunāsikantaṃ katvā dānakāle antarāvicchedaṃ akatvā dātabbānīti dassetuṃ‘‘ekābaddhāni vā panā’’ti vuttaṃ.Vicchinditvāpadapaṭipāṭito ma-kārantaṃ katvā dānasamaye vicchedaṃ katvā.Mantānīti ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ iccādinā ma-kārantāni. ‘‘Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’tiādinā nayena niggahitantameva katvā na dātabbanti‘‘athā’’ti āha.
2466.They should be given by making them end in a nasal consonant; this is the connection. To show that they should be given without interruption in between when giving them, making them end in a nasal consonant, "Or even continuously" has been said. Having interrupted: having made a break when giving, after making the word end in ma-kāra from the sequence of words. Mantānī: "ending in ma-kāra" with "Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ," etc. "Atha" he says, so that they should not be given by only making them end in a niggahīta, in the manner of "Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi," etc.
2467.Suddhināma ācariyassa ñattiyā, kammavācāya ca uccāraṇavisuddhi.Pabbajjāti sāmaṇerasāmaṇeripabbajjā.Ubhatosuddhiyā vināti ubhatosuddhiṃ vinā ācariyantevāsīnaṃ ubhinnaṃ tīsu saraṇattayadānaggahaṇesu uccāraṇasuddhiṃ vinā, ekassāpi akkharassa vipattisabbhāve na hotīti attho.
2467. Suddhi means purity of utterance through the teacher's ñatti (motion) and the recital of the kammavācā (ordination statement). Pabbajjā means the pabbajjā of a sāmaṇera (novice) or sāmaṇerī (female novice). Ubbhatosuddhiyā vinā means without purity on both sides, that is, without purity of utterance by both the teacher and the student in the three refuges and the giving and taking of the triple recitation; if even one syllable is incorrect, it does not happen, is the meaning.
2468-9.‘‘Pabbajjāguṇamicchatā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ācariyena, antevāsikenā’’ti padadvayassa visesanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, antevāsikassa pabbajjāguṇaṃ icchantena ācariyena, attano pabbajjāguṇaṃ icchantena antevāsikena cabu-ddha-kārādayo vaṇṇābu-kāra dha-kārādayo vaṇṇā akkharāṭhānakaraṇasampadaṃkaṇṭhatālumuddhadantaoṭṭhanāsikābhedaṃ ṭhānasampadañca akkharuppattisādhakatamajivhāmajjhādikaraṇasampadañcaahāpentenaaparihāpentena vattabbāti yojanā. Kasmā idameva daḷhaṃ katvā vuttanti āha‘‘ekavaṇṇavināsenā’’tiādi.Hi-saddo yasmā-padatthe, yasmā ekassāpi vaṇṇassavināsenaanuccāraṇena vā duruccāraṇena vā pabbajjā na ruhati, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo.
2468-9. ‘‘Pabbajjāguṇamicchatā’’ this should be seen as a qualification of the two words ‘‘by the teacher, by the student,’’ the teacher desiring the qualities of pabbajjā for the student, and the student desiring the qualities of his own pabbajjā, should speak bu-ddha-kārādayo vaṇṇā, the sounds beginning with the sounds bu, ddha, ensuring ṭhānakaraṇasampadaṃ, the perfection of place, distinguished as throat, palate, head, teeth, lips, and nose, and the perfection of action, the most effective means of producing sounds, such as the middle of the tongue; ahāpentena, not abandoning. Why is just this stated emphatically? He says, ‘‘ekavaṇṇavināsenā’’- etc. The word hi is in the sense of yasmā (because): because the pabbajjā does not take root with the vināsena, destruction, non-utterance or mispronunciation of even one sound, therefore it is said thus, is the intention.
2470.Yadi siddhāti sāsaṅkavacanena ubhatouccāraṇasuddhiyā dukkarattaṃ dīpetvā ‘‘appamattehi bhavitabba’’nti ubhinnaṃ ācariyantevāsikānaṃ anusiṭṭhi dinnā hoti.Saraṇagamanatovāti avadhāraṇena sāmaṇerapabbajjā upasampadā viya ñatticatutthena kammena na hoti, idānipi saraṇagamaneneva sijjhatīti dīpeti.Hi-saddo pasiddhiyaṃ. Yathāha –
2470. Yadi siddhā, by speaking with doubt, the difficulty of purity of utterance on both sides is indicated, and the instruction ‘‘one should be diligent’’ is given to both the teacher and the student. Saraṇagamanatovā, by the emphatic particle, it indicates that the sāmaṇera pabbajjā does not happen with a ñatticatuttha-kamma (formal act with motion and three announcements) like upasampadā (higher ordination); even now it succeeds by going for refuge. The word Hi is for renown. As it was said:
‘‘Yasmā saraṇagamanena upasampadā parato paṭikkhittā, tasmā sā etarahi saraṇagamanamatteneva na ruhati. Sāmaṇerassa pabbajjā pana yasmā paratopi ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi sāmaṇerapabbajja’nti (mahāva. 105) anuññātā eva, tasmā sā etarahipi saraṇagamanamatteneva ruhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 34).
"Since upasampadā was later rejected by going for refuge, therefore it does not take root by merely going for refuge now. But the pabbajjā of a sāmaṇera, since it was indeed permitted later, 'I allow, monks, the sāmaṇera pabbajjā with these three going for refuge' (Mahāva. 105), therefore it takes root even now by merely going for refuge" (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 34).
yadipikiñcāpisiddhānipphannā, tathāpi assa sāmaṇerassa ‘‘idañcidañca mayā pūretabbaṃ sīla’’nti ñatvāparipūraṇatthāyabhikkhunā dasa sīlāni dātabbānīti yojanā. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni, tesu ca sāmaṇerehi sikkhituṃ. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādi (mahāva. 106).
yadipi, although siddhā, accomplished, even so, knowing ‘‘this and that sīla (precept) must be fulfilled by me’’ for that sāmaṇera, paripūraṇatthāya, for the sake of complete fulfillment, ten sīlas should be given by a bhikkhu (monk), is the connection. As he said, "I allow, monks, ten training rules for sāmaṇeras, and for sāmaṇeras* to train in them. Abstaining from killing living beings," etc. (Mahāva. 106).
Pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Pabbajjākathā.
2471.Upajjhāyanti vajjāvajje upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāyo, taṃ, bhagavatā vuttehi aṅgehi samannāgato paripuṇṇadasavasso puggalo. Nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca sirasi añjaliṃ paggahetvā attano abhimukhe ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā āyācanāya katāya ‘‘sāhu, lahu, opāyikaṃ, paṭirūpaṃ, pāsādikena sampādehī’’ti imesu pañcasu padesu aññataraṃ kāyena vā vācāya vā ubhayena vā viññāpetvā tasmiṃ sampaṭicchite pituṭṭhāne ṭhatvā atrajamiva taṃ gahetvā vajjāvajjaṃ upaparikkhitvā dosena niggaṇhitvā saddhivihārike sikkhāpento upajjhāyo nāma.
2471. Upajjhāya because he contemplates faults and non-faults, therefore (he is called) upajjhāyo, that is, a person with fully ten years who is endowed with the qualities spoken of by the Blessed One. Having dressed and robed and raised his joined hands to his head, kneeling in front of him, when the request is made, saying three times, ‘‘May the venerable one be my upajjhāyo,’’ having made known one of these five phrases, ‘‘sāhu, lahu, opāyikaṃ, paṭirūpaṃ, pāsādikena sampādehī’’ (good, easy, connected, suitable, accomplish with inspiring qualities) either by body or speech or both, and when he has agreed, standing in the place of a father, taking him like his own son, examining faults and non-faults, restraining him with blame, training the saddhivihārika (pupil who lives with him), (he) is called upajjhāyo.
ācariyo,taṃ, upajjhāye vuttalakkhaṇasamannāgatoyeva puggalo. Vuttanayeneva nisīditvā ‘‘ācariyo me, bhante, hohi, āyasmato nissāya vacchāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā āyācanāya katāya ‘‘sāhū’’tiādīsu pañcasu aññataraṃ vatvā tasmiṃ sampaṭicchite pituṭṭhāne ṭhatvā puttaṭṭhāniyaṃ antevāsiṃ sikkhāpento ācariyo nāma.
ācariyo, that is, a person endowed with the qualities mentioned for the upajjhāyo. Sitting down in the manner described above and saying three times, “May the venerable one be my ācariyo, I will live in dependence on the venerable one," when the request is made, saying one of the five, ‘‘sāhū’’ etc., and when he has agreed, standing in the place of a father, training the antevāsī (pupil who lives nearby) in the place of a son, (he) is called ācariyo.
sāhūti sādhu.Lahūti agaru, mama tuyhaṃ upajjhāyabhāve bhāriyaṃ natthīti attho.Opāyikanti upāyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ, taṃ upajjhāyaggahaṇaṃ iminā upāyena tvaṃ me ito paṭṭhāya bhāro jātosīti vuttaṃ hoti.Paṭirūpanti anurūpaṃ te upajjhāyaggahaṇanti attho.Pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena kāyavacīpayogena.Sampādehīti tividhaṃ sikkhaṃ nipphādehīti attho.Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādiṃ dassento kāyena vā. Nāmavisesaṃ vinā pūretabbavattānaṃ samatāya ubhopi ekato vuttā.
sāhū, is good. Lahū, is not heavy, meaning there is no burden for you in my being your upajjhāyo. Opāyika means connected with means, that acceptance of an upajjhāyo means it is said, from now on you have become a burden to me by this means. Paṭirūpa means suitable, your acceptance of an upajjhāyo is fitting, is the meaning. Pāsādikenā, with inspiring qualities, through bodily and verbal effort. Sampādehī, accomplish the threefold training, is the meaning. Kāyena vā, by body, showing a hand gesture, or by body. Because of the equality of the vows to be fulfilled without specific names, both are spoken of together.
Vasatāti vasantena.Piyasīlenāti piyaṃ sīlametassāti piyasīlo, tena, sīlaṃ paripūritukāmenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Vasatā, by the one dwelling. Piyasīlenā, one whose sīla is dear, by him, meaning by one desiring to fulfill sīla.
2472-3.Āsanaṃ paññapetabbanti ettha ‘‘kālasseva vuṭṭhāya upāhanā omuñcitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā’’ti (mahāva. 66) vuttā pubbakiriyā vattabbā.Āsanaṃ paññapetabbanti dantakaṭṭhakhādanaṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā nisīdanatthāya āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ. Iminā ca yāgupānaṭṭhānādīsupi āsanāni paññapetabbānevāti dassitaṃ hoti.
2472-3. Āsanaṃ paññapetabba, here the preliminary actions stated, "having risen early in the morning, removed his shoes, arranged his upper robe over one shoulder" (Mahāva. 66) should be stated. Āsanaṃ paññapetabba, having swept the place for chewing a tooth-cleaner, a seat should be arranged for sitting. And by this, it is shown that seats should be arranged even in places for gruel and drinks and so on.
Dantakaṭṭhaṃ dātabbanti mahantaṃ, majjhimaṃ, khuddakanti tīṇi dantakaṭṭhāni upanetvā tato yaṃ tīṇi divasāni gaṇhāti, catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya tādisameva dātabbaṃ. Sace aniyamaṃ katvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā gaṇhāti, atha yādisaṃ labhati, tādisaṃ dātabbaṃ.
Dantakaṭṭhaṃ dātabba, three tooth-cleaners, large, medium, and small, should be brought, and then whichever one he takes for three days, from the fourth day onwards, one like that should be given. If he makes no rule and takes just any one, then whatever he gets, one like that should be given.
Mukhodakaṃ dātabbanti mukhadhovanodakaṃ mukhodakanti majjhepadalopīsamāso, taṃ dentena sītañca uṇhañca udakaṃ upanetvā tato yaṃ tīṇi divasāni vaḷañjeti, catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sace aniyamaṃ katvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā gaṇhāti, atha yādisaṃ labhati, tādisaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sace duvidhampi vaḷañjeti, duvidhampi upanetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mukhodakaṃ mukhadhovanaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā avasesaṭṭhānāni sammajjitabbāni. Sammajjantena ca vaccakuṭito paṭṭhāya sammajjitabbaṃ. There vaccakuṭiṃ gate pariveṇaṃ sammajjitabbaṃ, evaṃ pariveṇaṃ asuññaṃ hotī’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 64 atthato samānaṃ) vuttanayeneva sammajjitabbaṃ.
Mukhodakaṃ dātabba, mukhodakaṃ, water for washing the face, is a middle-word-omitted compound; in giving that, having brought both cold and hot water, then whichever one he uses for three days, from the fourth day onwards, the same water for washing the face should be given. If he makes no rule and takes just any one, then whatever he gets, one like that should be given. If he uses both kinds, both kinds should be brought. "Having placed the water for washing the face in the place for washing the face, the remaining places should be swept. In sweeping, it should be swept starting from the toilet. When the thera (elder) has gone to the toilet, the enclosure should be swept, thus the enclosure is not empty," in the way stated in the aṭṭhakathā (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 64, similar in meaning), it should be swept.
‘‘tassa kālenā’’tiādi.Tassāti upajjhāyassa vā ācariyassa vā.Kālenāti yāgupānakāle. Idhāpi ‘‘āsanaṃ paññapetabba’’nti seso. Yathāha ‘‘there vaccakuṭito anikkhanteyeva āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ. Sarīrakiccaṃ katvā āgantvā tasmiṃ nisinnassa ‘sace yāgu hotī’tiādinā nayena vuttaṃ vattaṃ kātabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 64).
‘‘tassa kālenā’’-etc. Tassā, of the upajjhāyo or ācariyo. Kālenā, at the time for gruel and drinks. Here also, ‘‘āsanaṃ paññapetabba’’ is the remainder. As it was said, "Even before the thera has come out of the toilet, a seat should be arranged. Having performed his bodily functions and returned, having sat down on it, the duties stated in the manner beginning 'if there is gruel' should be done" (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 64).
Yāgu tassupanetabbāti ettha ‘‘bhājanaṃ dhovitvā’’ti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāgu upanāmetabbā’’ti (mahāva. 66).Saṅghato vāti salākādivasena saṅghato labbhamānā vā.Kulatopi vāti upāsakādikulato vā.
Yāgu tassupanetabbā, here ‘‘having washed the bowl’’ is the remainder. As it was said, "Having washed the bowl, gruel should be brought near" (Mahāva. 66). Saṅghato vā, or obtainable from the saṅgha (community) by means of tickets etc. Kulatopi vā, or from the family of a lay follower etc.
‘‘Patte vattañca kātabba’’nti idaṃ ‘‘yāguṃ pītassa udakaṃ datvā bhājanaṃ paṭiggahetvā nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena dhovitvā paṭisāmetabbaṃ, upajjhāyamhi vuṭṭhite āsanaṃ uddharitabbaṃ. Sace so deso uklāpo hoti, so deso sammajjitabbo’’ti (mahāva. 66) āgatavattaṃ sandhāyāha. Divā bhuttapattepi kātabbaṃ eteneva dassitaṃ hoti.
‘‘Patte vattañca kātabba’’, this is said referring to the duty that comes, "having given water to the one who has drunk the gruel, having taken the bowl, having lowered it, having washed it carefully without bumping, it should be returned, when the upajjhāyo has risen, the seat should be removed. If that place is dirty, that place should be swept" (Mahāva. 66). By this, it is shown that the duty should be done even with the bowl used for eating during the day.
Vattaṃ ‘‘gāmappavesane’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sace upajjhāyo gāmaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti, nivāsanaṃ dātabbaṃ, paṭinivāsanaṃ paṭiggahetabba’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (mahāva. 66) vattaṃ sandhāyāha.‘‘Kātabba’’nti idaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ.
The duty ‘‘gāmappavesane’’, this is said referring to the duty that occurs in the manner beginning, "if the upajjhāyo wishes to enter the village, a robe should be given, the outer robe should be received back" (Mahāva. 66). ‘‘Kātabba’’, this should be connected with all the words.
2474.Cīvare yāni vattānīti gāmaṃ pavisitukāmassa cīvaradāne, paṭinivattassa cīvaraggahaṇasaṅgharaṇapaṭisāmanesu mahesinā yāni vattāni vuttāni, tāni ca kātabbāni.Senāsane tathāti ‘‘yasmiṃ vihāre upajjhāyo viharatī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 66) vuttanayena ‘‘senāsane kattabba’’nti dassitaṃ senāsanavattañca.
2474. Cīvare yāni vattānī, in giving a robe to one wishing to enter the village, and the duties stated by the Great Sage in the receiving of the robe and arranging and returning of it to one who has returned, those should be done. Senāsane tathā, and the duties for the lodging that are shown, "in whatever monastery the upajjhāyo dwells" (Mahāva. 66) in the manner stated.
Ādi-saddena ‘‘upajjhāyo pānīyena pucchitabbo’’tiādivattaṃ (mahāva. 66) saṅgaṇhāti.
By the word Ādi, he includes the duty, "the upajjhāyo should be asked for water" (Mahāva. 66) and so on.
2475.Evaṃ sabbattha vattesu pāṭiyekkaṃ dassiyamānesu papañcoti khandhakaṃ oloketvā sukhaggahaṇatthāya gaṇanaṃ dassetukāmo āha‘‘evamādīnī’’tiādi.Rogato vuṭṭhānāgamanantānīti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ rogato vuṭṭhānāgamanapariyosānāni.Sattatiṃsasataṃ siyunti sattatiṃsādhikasatavattānīti attho.
2475. Thus, when the duties are shown individually in all cases, desiring to show the count for the sake of easy grasping by looking at the khandhaka (section), he says, ‘‘evamādīnī’’-etc. Rogato vuṭṭhānāgamanantānī, the beginning, arrival, and end of rising from sickness of the ācariya and upajjhāyo. Sattatiṃsasataṃ siyu, would be one hundred and thirty-seven duties, is the meaning.
khandhakapāḷiyā(mahāva. 66) āgatakkamena evaṃ yathāvuttagaṇanāya samānetabbāni – dantakaṭṭhadānaṃ, mukhodakadānaṃ, āsanapaññāpanaṃ, sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāguyā upanāmanaṃ, yāguṃ pītassa udakaṃ datvā bhājanaṃ paṭiggahetvā nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena dhovitvā paṭisāmanaṃ, upajjhāyamhi vuṭṭhite āsanassa uddharaṇaṃ, sace so deso uklāpo hoti, tassa sammajjanaṃ, sace upajjhāyo gāmaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti, tassa nivāsanadānaṃ, paṭinivāsanapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, kāyabandhanadānaṃ, saguṇaṃ katvā saṅghāṭidānaṃ, dhovitvā sodakapattassa dānaṃ, sace upajjhāyo pacchāsamaṇaṃ ākaṅkhati, timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā saguṇaṃ katvā saṅghāṭiyo pārupitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ parimuñcitvā dhovitvā pattaṃ gahetvā upajjhāyassa pacchāsamaṇena gamanaṃ, nātidūranaccāsanne gamanaṃ, pattapariyāpannassa paṭiggahaṇaṃ, na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassa antarantarā kathāopātanaṃ, upajjhāyassa āpattisāmantā bhaṇamānassa ca nivāraṇaṃ, nivattantena paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanapaññāpanaṃ, pādodakapādapīṭhapādakathalikānaṃ upanikkhipanaṃ, paccuggantvā pattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, paṭinivāsanadānaṃ, nivāsanapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, sace cīvaraṃ sinnaṃ hoti, muhuttaṃ uṇhe otāpanaṃ, neva uṇhe cīvarassa nidahanaṃ, majjhe yathā bhaṅgo na hoti, evaṃ caturaṅgulaṃ kaṇṇaṃ ussāretvā cīvarassa saṅgharaṇaṃ, obhoge kāyabandhanassa karaṇaṃ, sace piṇḍapāto hoti, upajjhāyo ca bhuñjitukāmo hoti, udakaṃ datvā piṇḍapātassa upanāmanaṃ, upajjhāyassa pānīyena pucchanaṃ, bhuttāvissa udakaṃ datvā pattaṃ paṭiggahetvā nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā muhuttaṃ uṇhe otāpanaṃ, na ca uṇhe pattassa nidahanaṃ, pattacīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ –
According to the order that comes in the khandhakapāḷi (Mahāva. 66), these should be added up in the way stated: giving a tooth-cleaner, giving water for the face, arranging a seat, if there is gruel, bringing gruel after washing the bowl, having given water to the one who has drunk the gruel, having taken the bowl, having lowered it, having washed it carefully without bumping, returning it, when the upajjhāyo has risen, removing the seat, if that place is dirty, sweeping it, if the upajjhāyo wishes to enter the village, giving him a lower robe, receiving back the outer robe, giving a belt, having made the folds, giving the saṅghāṭi (double robe), having washed the bowl with water, if the upajjhāyo desires a follower, one should dress the three robes properly, robe the lower robe properly, tie the belt, make the folds, robe the double robes, untie the knot, take the washed bowl, and go as a follower of the upajjhāyo, going not too far and not too near, receiving the food that is obtained in the bowl, not interrupting the talk while the upajjhāyo is speaking, stopping the upajjhāyo when he is speaking about offenses in the neighborhood, having returned, coming first and arranging a seat, placing water for the feet, a footstool, and a foot-wiper, going to meet him and receiving the bowl and robes, giving the lower robe, receiving back the outer robe, if the robe is wet, warming it in the heat for a moment, not placing the robe in the heat, arranging the robe raising the four-finger hem so that the folds are not in the middle, making the belt at the side, if there is alms food, and the upajjhāyo wishes to eat, bringing the alms food after giving water, asking the upajjhāyo for water, having given water to the one who has eaten, having taken the bowl, having lowered it, having washed it carefully without bumping, having made it free from water, warming it in the heat for a moment, and the bowl should not be placed in the heat, the bowl and robes should be put away –
Pattaṃ nikkhipantena ekena hatthena pattaṃ gahetvā ekena hatthena heṭṭhāmañcaṃ vā heṭṭhāpīṭhaṃ vā parāmasitvā pattassa nikkhipanaṃ, na ca anantarahitāya bhūmiyā pattassa nikkhipanaṃ, cīvaraṃ nikkhipantena ekena hatthena cīvaraṃ gahetvā ekena hatthena cīvaravaṃsaṃ vā cīvararajjuṃ vā pamajjitvā pārato antaṃ orato bhogaṃ katvā cīvarassa nikkhipanaṃ, upajjhāyamhi vuṭṭhite āsanassa uddharaṇaṃ, pādodakapādapīṭhapādakathalikānaṃ paṭisāmanaṃ, sace so deso uklāpo hoti, tassa sammajjanaṃ, sace upajjhāyo nhāyitukāmo hoti, nhānassa paṭiyādanaṃ, sace sītena attho hoti, sītassa sace uṇhena attho hoti, uṇhassa paṭiyādanaṃ, sace upajjhāyo jantāgharaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti, cuṇṇassa sannayanaṃ, mattikātemanaṃ, jantāgharapīṭhaṃ ādāya upajjhāyassa piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gantvā jantāgharapīṭhaṃ datvā cīvaraṃ paṭiggahetvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, cuṇṇadānaṃ, mattikādānaṃ, sace ussahati, jantāgharaṃ pavisitabbaṃ –
In putting away the bowl, one should take the bowl with one hand and touch the lower cot or lower seat with one hand, and put away the bowl, and the bowl should not be put away on the bare ground, in putting away the robe, one should take the robe with one hand and wipe the robe-rod or robe-rope with one hand, and having made the edge from the far side, having made the fold from the near side, the robe should be put away, when the upajjhāyo has risen, the seat should be removed, the water for the feet, footstool, and foot-wiper should be returned, if that place is dirty, it should be swept, if the upajjhāyo wishes to bathe, preparation should be made for the bath, if he needs cold, preparation should be made for cold, if he needs hot, preparation should be made for hot, if the upajjhāyo wishes to enter the hot room, powder should be brought together, clay should be moistened, having taken the hot-room seat, going behind the upajjhāyo, giving the hot-room seat, taking the robe and putting it aside, giving powder, giving clay, if he is able, one should enter the hot room –
Jantāgharaṃ pavisantena mattikāya mukhaṃ makkhetvā purato ca pacchato ca paṭicchādetvā jantāgharappaveso, na therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anupakhajja nisīdanaṃ, na navānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āsanena paṭibāhanaṃ, jantāghare upajjhāyassa parikammassa karaṇaṃ, jantāgharā nikkhamantena jantāgharapīṭhaṃ ādāya purato ca pacchato ca paṭicchādetvā jantāgharā nikkhamanaṃ, udakepi upajjhāyassa parikammakaraṇaṃ, nhātena paṭhamataraṃ uttaritvā attano gattaṃ vodakaṃ katvā nivāsetvā upajjhāyassa gattato udakassa pamajjanaṃ, nivāsanadānaṃ, saṅghāṭidānaṃ, jantāgharapīṭhaṃ ādāya paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanassa paññāpanaṃ, pādodakapādapīṭhapādakathalikānaṃ upanikkhipanaṃ, upajjhāyassa pānīyena pucchanaṃ, sace uddisāpetukāmo hoti, uddisāpanaṃ, sace paripucchitukāmo hoti, paripucchanaṃ, yasmiṃ vihāre upajjhāyo viharati, sace so vihāro uklāpo hoti, sace ussahati, tassa sodhanaṃ, vihāraṃ sodhentena paṭhamaṃ pattacīvarassa nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, nisīdanapaccattharaṇassa nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, bhisibibbohanassa nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, mañcassa nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena asaṅghaṭṭentena kavāṭapīṭhaṃ nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, pīṭhassa nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena asaṅghaṭṭentena kavāṭapīṭhaṃ nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, mañcapaṭipādakānaṃ nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, kheḷamallakassa nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, apassenaphalakassa nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, bhūmattharaṇassa yathāpaññattassa sallakkhetvā nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipanaṃ, sace vihāre santānakaṃ hoti, ullokā paṭhamaṃ ohāraṇaṃ, ālokasandhikaṇṇabhāgānaṃ pamajjanaṃ, sace gerukaparikammakatā bhitti kaṇṇakitā hoti, coḷakaṃ temetvā pīḷetvā pamajjanaṃ, sace kāḷavaṇṇakatā bhūmi kaṇṇakitā hoti, coḷakaṃ temetvā pīḷetvā pamajjanaṃ, sace akatā hoti bhūmi, udakena paripphositvā pamajjanaṃ ‘‘mā vihāro rajena uhaññī’’ti, saṅkāraṃ vicinitvā ekamantaṃ chaḍḍanaṃ, bhūmattharaṇassa otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā atiharitvā yathāpaññattaṃ paññāpanaṃ, mañcapaṭipādakānaṃ otāpetvā pamajjitvā atiharitvā yathāṭṭhāne ṭhapanaṃ, mañcassa otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena asaṅghaṭṭentena kavāṭapīṭhaṃ atiharitvā yathāpaññattaṃ paññāpanaṃ, pīṭhassa otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena asaṅghaṭṭentena kavāṭapīṭhaṃ atiharitvā yathāpaññattaṃ paññāpanaṃ, bhisibibbohanassa otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā atiharitvā yathāpaññattaṃ paññāpanaṃ, nisīdanapaccattharaṇassa otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā atiharitvā yathāpaññattaṃ paññāpanaṃ, kheḷamallakassa otāpetvā pamajjitvā atiharitvā yathāṭṭhāne ṭhapanaṃ, apassenaphalakassa otāpetvā pamajjitvā atiharitvā yathāṭṭhāne ṭhapanaṃ, pattacīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ –
When entering the bathhouse, one should smear their face with clay, cover themselves in front and behind, and then enter. Senior monks should not sit crowding the junior monks, nor should they push them away from their seats. Services should be performed for the preceptor in the bathhouse. When leaving the bathhouse, one should take the bathhouse stool, cover themselves in front and behind, and then leave. Similarly, services should be performed for the preceptor in the water. After bathing, one should emerge first, dry their own body, put on the lower garment, and then wipe the water from the preceptor's body, give him a lower garment, and give him the outer robe. Taking the bathhouse stool, one should arrive first and prepare a seat, placing water for the feet, a footstool, and foot-wiping cloth. One should ask the preceptor for drinking water. If he wishes to have something recited, it should be recited for him; if he wishes to have something questioned, it should be questioned for him. In whatever monastery the preceptor dwells, if that monastery is untidy, one should clean it, if one is able. When cleaning the monastery, one should first remove the bowl and robes and put them aside, remove the sitting cloth and spread and put them aside, remove the water pot and fan and put them aside. Lowering the bed carefully without bumping or colliding, one should remove it from the door frame and put it aside. Lowering the stool carefully without bumping or colliding, one should remove it from the door frame and put it aside. Remove the bed legs and put them aside, remove the spittoon and put it aside, remove the leaning board and put it aside, carefully noting how the floor covering is arranged, remove it and put it aside. If there is a hanging decoration in the monastery, it should be taken down first from above, and the window frames and corners should be wiped. If the wall, finished with red ochre, is stained, it should be wiped with a soaked and squeezed cloth. If the floor, finished with black, is stained, it should be wiped with a soaked and squeezed cloth. If the floor is unfinished, it should be sprinkled with water and wiped, thinking, "May the monastery not be soiled by dust." The rubbish should be collected and thrown aside, the floor covering should be shaken out, cleaned, beaten, carried away, and arranged as before. The bed legs should be shaken out, wiped, carried away, and placed in their proper positions. The bed should be shaken out, cleaned, beaten, lowered carefully without bumping or colliding, carried away from the door frame, and arranged as before. The stool should be shaken out, cleaned, beaten, lowered carefully without bumping or colliding, carried away from the door frame, and arranged as before. The water pot and fan should be shaken out, cleaned, beaten, carried away, and arranged as before. The sitting cloth and spread should be shaken out, cleaned, beaten, carried away, and arranged as before. The spittoon should be shaken out, wiped, carried away, and placed in its proper position. The leaning board should be shaken out, wiped, carried away, and placed in its proper position. The bowl and robes should be put away properly.
Pattaṃ nikkhipantena ekena hatthena pattaṃ gahetvā ekena hatthena heṭṭhāmañcaṃ vā heṭṭhāpīṭhaṃ vā parāmasitvā pattassa nikkhipanaṃ, na ca anantarahitāya bhūmiyā pattassa nikkhipanaṃ, cīvaraṃ nikkhipantena ekena hatthena cīvaraṃ gahetvā ekena hatthena cīvaravaṃsaṃ vā cīvararajjuṃ vā pamajjitvā pārato antaṃ orato bhogaṃ katvā cīvarassa nikkhipanaṃ, sace puratthimāya sarajā vātā vāyanti, puratthimānaṃ vātapānānaṃ thakanaṃ, tathā pacchimānaṃ, tathā uttarānaṃ, tathā dakkhiṇānaṃ vātapānānaṃ thakanaṃ, sace sītakālo hoti, divā vātapānānaṃ vivaraṇaṃ, rattiṃ thakanaṃ, sace uṇhakālo hoti, divā vātapānānaṃ thakanaṃ, rattiṃ vivaraṇaṃ, sace pariveṇaṃ uklāpaṃ hoti, pariveṇassa sammajjanaṃ, sace koṭṭhako uklāpo hoti, koṭṭhakassa sammajjanaṃ, sace upaṭṭhānasālā uklāpā hoti, tassā sammajjanaṃ, sace aggisālā uklāpā hoti, tassā sammajjanaṃ, sace vaccakuṭi uklāpā hoti, tassā sammajjanaṃ, sace pānīyaṃ na hoti, pānīyassa upaṭṭhāpanaṃ, sace paribhojanīyaṃ na hoti, paribhojanīyassa upaṭṭhāpanaṃ, sace ācamanakumbhiyā udakaṃ na hoti, ācamanakumbhiyā udakassa āsiñcanaṃ, sace upajjhāyassa anabhirati uppannā hoti, saddhivihārikena vūpakāsanaṃ vūpakāsāpanaṃ vā, dhammakathāya vā tassa karaṇaṃ, sace upajjhāyassa kukkuccaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena vinodanaṃ vinodāpanaṃ vā, dhammakathāya vā tassa karaṇaṃ, sace upajjhāyassa diṭṭhigataṃ uppannaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena vivecanaṃ vivecāpanaṃ vā, dhammakathāya vā tassa karaṇaṃ, sace upajjhāyo garudhammaṃ ajjhāpanno hoti parivāsāraho, saddhivihārikena ussukkakaraṇaṃ ‘‘kinti nu kho saṅgho upajjhāyassa parivāsaṃ dadeyyā’’ti, sace upajjhāyo mūlāyapaṭikassanāraho hoti, saddhivihārikena ussukkakaraṇaṃ ‘‘kinti nu kho saṅgho upajjhāyaṃ mūlāya paṭikasseyyā’’ti, sace upajjhāyo mānattāraho hoti, saddhivihārikena ussukkakaraṇaṃ ‘‘kinti nu kho saṅgho upajjhāyassa mānattaṃ dadeyyā’’ti, sace upajjhāyo abbhānāraho hoti, saddhivihārikena ussukkakaraṇaṃ ‘‘kinti nu kho saṅgho upajjhāyaṃ abbheyyā’’ti, sace saṅgho upajjhāyassa kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti tajjanīyaṃ vā niyassaṃ vā pabbājanīyaṃ vā paṭisāraṇīyaṃ vā ukkhepanīyaṃ vā, saddhivihārikena ussukkakaraṇaṃ ‘‘kinti nu kho saṅgho upajjhāyassa kammaṃ na kareyya, lahukāya vā pariṇāmeyyā’’ti, kataṃ vā panassa hoti saṅghena kammaṃ tajjanīyaṃ vā niyassaṃ vā pabbājanīyaṃ vā paṭisāraṇīyaṃ vā ukkhepanīyaṃ vā, saddhivihārikena ussukkakaraṇaṃ ‘‘kinti nu kho upajjhāyo sammā vatteyya, lomaṃ pāteyya, netthāraṃ vatteyya, saṅgho taṃ kammaṃ paṭippassambheyyā’’ti, sace upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ dhovitabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena dhovanaṃ ussukkakaraṇaṃ vā ‘‘kinti nu kho upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ dhoviyethā’’ti, sace upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ kātabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena karaṇaṃ ussukkakaraṇaṃ vā ‘‘kinti nu kho upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ kariyethā’’ti, sace upajjhāyassa rajanaṃ pacitabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena pacanaṃ ussukkakaraṇaṃ vā ‘‘kinti nu kho upajjhāyassa rajanaṃ paciyethā’’ti, sace upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ rajetabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena rajanaṃ ussukkakaraṇaṃ vā ‘‘kinti nu kho upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ rajiyethā’’ti, cīvaraṃ rajantena sādhukaṃ samparivattakaṃ samparivattakaṃ rajanaṃ, na ca acchinne theve pakkamanaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā na ekaccassa pattadānaṃ, na ekaccassa pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, na ekaccassa cīvaradānaṃ, na ekaccassa cīvarapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, na ekaccassa parikkhāradānaṃ, na ekaccassa parikkhārapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, na ekaccassa kesacchedanaṃ, na ekaccena kesānaṃ chedāpanaṃ, na ekaccassa parikammakaraṇaṃ, na ekaccena parikammassa kārāpanaṃ, na ekaccassa veyyāvaccakaraṇaṃ, na ekaccena veyyāvaccassa kārāpanaṃ, na ekaccassa pacchāsamaṇena gamanaṃ, na ekaccassa pacchāsamaṇassa ādānaṃ, na ekaccassa piṇḍapātassa nīharaṇaṃ, na ekaccena piṇḍapātanīharāpanaṃ, na upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā gāmappavesanaṃ, na susānagamanaṃ, na disāpakkamanaṃ, sace upajjhāyo gilāno hoti, yāvajīvaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ, vuṭṭhānamassa āgamananti tesu kānici vattāni savibhattikāni, kānici avibhattikāni, tesu avibhattikānaṃ vibhāge vuccamāne yathāvuttagaṇanāya atirekatarāni honti, taṃ pana vibhāgaṃ anāmasitvā piṇḍavasena gahetvā yathā ayaṃ gaṇanā dassitāti veditabbā.
When putting away the bowl, one should take the bowl with one hand and touch the lower bed or lower stool with the other hand before placing the bowl. The bowl should not be placed directly on the bare ground. When putting away the robes, one should take the robe with one hand and wipe the robe-support or robe-rope with the other hand, folding it from edge to edge and hem to hem before placing the robe. If dusty winds are blowing from the east, the eastern windows should be closed, and likewise for the western, northern, and southern windows. If it is the cold season, the windows should be opened during the day and closed at night. If it is the hot season, the windows should be closed during the day and opened at night. If the enclosure is untidy, the enclosure should be swept. If the storehouse is untidy, the storehouse should be swept. If the service hall is untidy, it should be swept. If the fire hall is untidy, it should be swept. If the toilet is untidy, it should be swept. If there is no drinking water, drinking water should be provided. If there is no water for general use, water for general use should be provided. If there is no water in the washing pot, water should be poured into the washing pot. If displeasure arises in the preceptor, the co-resident should dispel it or have it dispelled, or do so by means of a Dhamma talk. If remorse arises in the preceptor, the co-resident should remove it or have it removed, or do so by means of a Dhamma talk. If wrong views arise in the preceptor, the co-resident should clarify them or have them clarified, or do so by means of a Dhamma talk. If the preceptor has fallen into a garudhamma deserving of probation (parivāsa), the co-resident should be diligent, thinking, "How can the Sangha grant parivāsa to the preceptor?" If the preceptor is deserving of reinstatement to the origin (mūlāya paṭikassana), the co-resident should be diligent, thinking, "How can the Sangha reinstate the preceptor to the origin?" If the preceptor is deserving of mānatta, the co-resident should be diligent, thinking, "How can the Sangha grant mānatta to the preceptor?" If the preceptor is deserving of absolution (abbhāna), the co-resident should be diligent, thinking, "How can the Sangha absolve the preceptor?" If the Sangha wishes to perform an action against the preceptor, whether it be censure (tajjanīya), demotion (niyassa), expulsion (pabbājanīya), penance (paṭisāraṇīya), or suspension (ukkhepanīya), the co-resident should be diligent, thinking, "How can the Sangha not perform the action against the preceptor, or change it to a lesser one?" Or if an action has been performed against him by the Sangha, whether it be censure, demotion, expulsion, penance, or suspension, the co-resident should be diligent, thinking, "How can the preceptor behave properly, humble himself, speak truthfully, so that the Sangha may rescind that action?" If the preceptor's robe needs washing, the co-resident should wash it or be diligent that the preceptor's robe is washed. If the preceptor's robe needs to be made, the co-resident should make it or be diligent that the preceptor's robe is made. If dye needs to be prepared for the preceptor, the co-resident should prepare it or be diligent that dye is prepared for the preceptor. If the preceptor's robe needs to be dyed, the co-resident should dye it or be diligent that the preceptor's robe is dyed, and when dyeing the robe, one should carefully turn it over and over in the dye, and not leave without cutting the threads. Without asking the preceptor, one should not give a bowl to one person, nor receive a bowl from one person, nor give a robe to one person, nor receive a robe from one person, nor give requisites to one person, nor receive requisites from one person, nor cut the hair of one person, nor have the hair of one person cut, nor perform services for one person, nor have services performed for one person, nor do personal service for one person, nor have personal service done by one person, nor go behind one novice, nor take one novice, nor take out alms food for one person, nor have alms food taken out for one person. Without asking the preceptor, one should not enter a village, nor go to a cemetery, nor depart in any direction. If the preceptor is ill, one should attend to him for life, awaiting his recovery. Of these duties, some are with inflections and some are without inflections. When the duties without inflections are analyzed, they are more numerous than the number previously stated. However, without going into that analysis, it should be understood that this enumeration is shown by taking them in summary.
2476.Akarontassāti ettha ‘‘vatta’’nti seso. Anādaravaseneva vattaṃ akarontassa bhikkhuno tenavattabhedenavattākaraṇenasabbatthasattatiṃsādhikasatappabhedaṭṭhāne tattakaṃyevadukkaṭaṃpakāsitanti yojanā.
2476.Akarontassa: Here, "duty" (vatta) is understood. The construction is: for a bhikkhu not doing a duty out of disrespect, by that breach of duty, by that non-performance of duty, in all the one hundred thirty-seven instances, just that many wrongdoings (dukkaṭa) are declared.
Upajjhāyācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on the Duties to Preceptors and Teachers.
2477.Evaṃ upajjhāyācariyavattāni saṅkhepena dassetvā upajjhāyācariyehi saddhivihārikantevāsīnaṃ kātabbavattāni dassetumāha‘‘upajjhāyassa vattānī’’tiādi.Upajjhāyassa vattānīti upajjhāyena saddhivihārikassa yuttapattakāle kattabbattā upajjhāyāyattavattānīti attho.Tathā saddhivihāriketi yathā saddhivihārikena upajjhāyassa kātabbāni, tathā upajjhāyena saddhivihārike kātabbāni.
2477.Having thus shown the duties to preceptors and teachers in brief, to show the duties to be performed by preceptors and teachers towards their co-residents and pupils, he says, "The duties of the preceptor," etc. "The duties of the preceptor" means the duties to be performed by the preceptor for the co-resident at the proper time for guidance; these are the duties dependent on the preceptor. "Likewise for the co-resident" means just as there are duties to be performed by the co-resident for the preceptor, so too there are duties to be performed by the preceptor for the co-resident.
‘‘sataṃ terasa hontevā’’ti, terasādhikasatavattāni hontīti attho. Ācariyena antevāsikepi ca kātabbavattāni tathā tattakānevāti attho.
"The total is one hundred and thirteen, O pupils," means the total is one hundred and thirteen duties. The duties to be performed by the teacher towards the pupils are also just that many.
Saddhivihārikantevāsikavattakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on the Duties to Co-residents and Pupils.
2478.Upajjhāyācariyehi saddhivihārikantevāsikānaṃ nissayapaṭippassaddhippakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘pakkante vāpī’’tiādi. Pakkante vāpi vibbhante vāpi pakkhasaṅkante vāpi mate vāpi āṇattiyā vāpi evaṃ pañcadhā upajjhāyā saddhivihārikena gahitonissayopaṭippassambhatīti yojanā.Pakkanteti tadahu apaccāgantukāmatāya disaṃ gate.Vibbhanteti gihibhāvaṃ patte.Pakkhasaṅkantaketi titthiyāyatanaṃ gate.Mateti kālakate.Āṇattiyāti nissayapaṇāmanena.
2478.To show how the dependence of co-residents and pupils on preceptors and teachers is relinquished, he says, "When departed, or," etc. When departed, or disrobed, or gone to a sectarian refuge, or dead, or by command, in these five ways, the dependence taken by the co-resident on the preceptor is relinquished. "Departed" means gone to another direction, not intending to return that day.
2479-80.Ācariyamhāpi antevāsikena gahitanissayassa bhedanaṃchadhāchappakārena hotīti yojanā. Kathanti āha‘‘pakkante cā’’tiādi. Taṃ upajjhāyato nissayabhede vuttanayameva. Visesaṃ pana sayameva vakkhati‘‘āṇattiya’’ntiādinā.Āṇattiyanti ettha visesatthajotako pana-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho.Ubhinnampi dhuranikkhepanepi cāti ācariyassa nissayapaṇāmane pana ubhinnaṃ ācariyantevāsikānaṃyeva aññamaññanirālayabhāve sati nissayabhedo hoti, na ekassāti attho. Tamevatthaṃ byatirekato daḷhīkaroti‘‘ekekassā’’tiādinā. Ekekassa vā ubhinnaṃ vā ālaye sati na bhijjatīti yojanā. Yathāha –
2479-80.The severing of dependence taken by the pupil from the teacher also occurs in six ways, in six manners. How? He says, "When departed, and" etc. That is the same as the manner stated for the severing of dependence from the preceptor. He will, however, explain the difference himself with "By command," etc. In "By command," the word "but" (pana), which indicates a distinction, is understood by ellipsis. "And also by the abandoning of the burden by both" means that when the teacher orders the relinquishing of dependence, the dependence is severed only when both the teacher and the pupil are mutually without attachment; it is not severed if one is attached. He strengthens that meaning by contrast with "If there is attachment by one," etc. It is not severed if there is attachment by one or both. As it is said:
‘‘Āṇattiyaṃ pana sacepi ācariyo muñcitukāmova hutvā nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmeti, antevāsiko ca ‘kiñcāpi maṃ ācariyo paṇāmeti, atha kho hadayena muduko’ti sālayova hoti, nissayo na paṭippassambhatiyeva. Sacepi ācariyo sālayo, antevāsiko nirālayo ‘na dāni imaṃ nissāya vasissāmī’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, evampi na paṭippassambhati. Ubhinnaṃ sālayabhāve pana na paṭippassambhatiyeva. Ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena paṭippassambhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 83).
"By command, even if the teacher, wishing to release him, orders the relinquishing of dependence, but the pupil is attached, thinking, 'Although the teacher is releasing me, he is kind at heart,' the dependence is not relinquished. Even if the teacher is attached, but the pupil, without attachment, abandons the burden, thinking, 'I will not now live in dependence on this one,' even then it is not relinquished. It is definitely not relinquished when both are attached. It is relinquished by both abandoning the burden" (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 83).
Sāratthadīpaniyaṃpana ‘‘sacepi ācariyo muñcitukāmova hutvā nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmetītiādi sabbaṃ upajjhāyassa āṇattiyampi veditabba’’nti vuttaṃ.
In the Sāratthadīpanī, however, it is said that "everything beginning with 'even if the teacher, wishing to release him, orders the relinquishing of dependence' should be understood as applying to the command of the preceptor as well."
2481.Evaṃ pañca sādhāraṇaṅgāni dassetvā asādhāraṇaṅgaṃ dassetumāha‘‘upajjhāyasamodhāna-gatassāpi ca bhijjatī’’ti. Tattha samodhānagamanaṃ sarūpato, pabhedato ca dassetumāha‘‘dassanaṃ savanañcāti, samodhānaṃ dvidhā mata’’nti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro panasamantapāsādikāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 83) gahetabbo. Ganthavitthārabhīrūnaṃ anuggahāya pana idha na vitthārito.
2481.Having thus shown the five common factors, to show the uncommon factor, he says, "It is also severed by going for reconciliation with the preceptor." To show the going for reconciliation in its essence and division, he says, "Seeing and hearing, reconciliation is considered twofold." This is the summary here, but the details should be taken from the Samantapāsādikā (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 83). However, for the benefit of those who fear lengthy texts, it is not elaborated here.
2482-3.Sabhāge dāyake asante addhikassa ca gilānassa ca ‘‘gilānena maṃ upaṭṭhahā’’tiyācitassagilānupaṭṭhākassa ca nissayaṃ vinā vasituṃ doso natthīti yojanā. ‘‘Gilānupaṭṭhākassā’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena rassattaṃ. Iminā sabhāge nissayadāyake sante ekadivasampi parihāro na labbhatīti dīpeti.Attano vane phāsuvihārataṃ jānatāti attano samathavipassanāpaṭilābhassa vane phāsuvihāraṃ jānantenapi. ‘‘Sabhāge dāyake asante’’ti padacchedo. Sabbametaṃ vidhānaṃ antovassato aññasmiṃ kāle veditabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro panasamantapāsādikāyagahetabbo.
2482-3.In the absence of a shared alms-giver, and for a sick monk, and for a monk attending to the sick who has been asked, "Attend to me while I am sick," there is no fault in living without dependence. The word "gilānupaṭṭhākassa" (for the attendant of the sick) is shortened due to metrical requirements. This indicates that when a shared alms-giver is present, even a single day's dispensation is not allowed. Attano vane phāsuvihārataṃ jānatā means even by one who knows a comfortable dwelling in the forest for their attainment of samatha and vipassanā. "Sabhāge dāyake asante" is a word division. All this regulation should be understood as applying to times other than the rainy season. This is the summary here, but the full details should be taken from the Samantapāsādikā.
Nissayapaṭippassambhanakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Abandoning Dependence.
2484.Kuṭṭhamassa atthītikuṭṭhī,taṃ.‘‘Gaṇḍi’’ntiādīsupi eseva nayo. Rattasetādibhedena yena kenaci kuṭṭhena vevaṇṇiyaṃ pattasarīranti attho. Yathāha –
2484.One who has leprosy is kuṭṭhī, that one. The same method applies to "gaṇḍi" etc. Meaning, a body with discolored skin due to leprosy of any kind, whether red or white. As it is said:
‘‘Rattakuṭṭhaṃ vā hotu kāḷakuṭṭhaṃ vā, yaṃ kiñci kiṭibhadaddukacchuādippabhedampi sabbaṃ kuṭṭhamevāti vuttaṃ. Tañce nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ hoti, na pabbājetabbo. Sace pana nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaṭicchannaṭṭhāne nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭati. Mukhe, pana hatthapādapiṭṭhesu vā sacepi avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ nakhapiṭṭhito khuddakapamāṇampi na vaṭṭatiyevāti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ tikicchāpetvā pabbājentenāpi pakativaṇṇe jāteyeva pabbājetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88).
"Whether it be red leprosy or black leprosy, whatever boils, scabs, eczema, etc., all are called leprosy. If it is located in a growing place, even the size of a nail-bed, he should not be ordained. But if it is located in a naturally covered place by the under-robe and outer-robe, even the size of a nail-bed, and is in a non-growing state, it is allowable. However, on the face or the back of the hands or feet, even if it is in a non-growing state, even if it is smaller than a nail-bed, it is not allowable at all," as stated in the Kurundī. "Having it treated, he should be ordained only when it has returned to its natural color" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88).
gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.
stated in the Gaṇṭhipada.
Gaṇḍinti medagaṇḍādigaṇḍabhedavantaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘medagaṇḍo vā hotu añño vā, yo koci kolaṭṭhimattakopi ce vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhito gaṇḍo hoti, na pabbājetabbo’’tiādi (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88).Kolaṭṭhīti badaraṭṭhi.Kilāsinti kilāsavantaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kilāsoti nabhijjanakaṃ napaggharaṇakaṃ padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇaṃ kuṭṭhaṃ, yena gunnaṃ viya sabalaṃ sarīraṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88).Ca-saddo sabbehi upayogavantehi paccekaṃ yojetabbo.Sosinti khayarogavantaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘sosoti sosabyādhi. Tasmiṃ sati na pabbājetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88).Apamārikanti apamāravantaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘apamāroti pittummāro vā yakkhummāro vā. Tattha pubbaverikena amanussena gahito duttikiccho hoti, appamattakepi pana apamāre sati na pabbājetabbo’’ti.
Gaṇḍi means one who has various types of boils, such as fat boils. As it is said, "Whether it is a fat boil or another, if any boil the size of a kolaṭṭhi seed is in a growing state, he should not be ordained" etc. (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88). Kolaṭṭhī means a jujube seed. Kilāsi means one who has kilāsa (a skin disease). As it is said, "Kilāsa is a type of leprosy that does not cause pus, does not spread, and is the color of lotus or white lotus leaves, making the body mottled like a cow" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88). The word "ca" (and) should be connected individually with all the terms designating disqualifications. Sosi means one who has consumption. As it is said, "Sosa is consumption disease. If that is present, he should not be ordained" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 88). Apamārika means one who has epilepsy. As it is said, "Apamāra is epilepsy caused by bile or epilepsy caused by a yakkha. In that case, he is difficult to cure because he is possessed by an antagonistic non-human being. However, even if there is a slight case of epilepsy, he should not be ordained."
Rājabhaṭanti rañño bhattavetanabhaṭaṃ vā ṭhānantaraṃ pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā rājapurisaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘amacco vā hotu mahāmatto vā sevako vā kiñci ṭhānantaraṃ patto vā appatto vā, yo koci rañño bhattavetanabhaṭo. Sabbo ‘rājabhaṭo’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’ti.Coranti manussehi appamādanaṃ gāmaghātapanthaghātādikammena pākaṭaṃ corañca.Likhitakanti yaṃ kañci corikaṃ vā aññaṃ vā garuṃ rājāparādhaṃ katvā palātaṃ, rājā ca naṃ paṇṇe vā potthake vā ‘‘itthannāmo yattha dissati, tattha gahetvā māretabbo’’ti vā ‘‘hatthapādādīnissa chinditabbānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakaṃ nāma daṇḍaṃ harāpetabbo’’ti vā likhāpeti, evarūpaṃ likhitakaṃ.
Rājabhaṭa means a royal servant, whether paid with food and wages by the king or one who has obtained a position, or a royal official who has not obtained a position. As it is said, "Whether he is a minister, a high-ranking minister, a servant, or one who has obtained some position or not, anyone who is a royal servant paid with food and wages, all are designated as 'royal servants'." Cora means a thief who is known by people for reckless acts of village destruction, highway robbery, and so on. Likhitaka means someone who has committed some theft or other serious offense against the king and has fled, and the king has written on a leaf or in a book, "Such-and-such a person, wherever he is seen, should be captured and killed," or "His hands and feet should be cut off," or "He should be made to pay such-and-such a fine." Such a person is a likhitaka.
‘‘Kārabhedaka’’nti gāthābandhavasena rasso kato.Kārabhedakanti dātabbakarassa vā katacorakammassa vā kāraṇā kārāghare pakkhitto vā nigaḷabandhanādīhi baddho vā, tato so muccitvā palāyati, evarūpaṃ kārābhedakañca. Yathāha – ‘‘kārā vuccati bandhanāgāraṃ, idha pana andubandhanaṃ vā hotu saṅkhalikabandhanaṃ vā rajjubandhanaṃ vā gāmabandhanaṃ vā nigamabandhanaṃ vā nagarabandhanaṃ vā purisagutti vā janapadabandhanaṃ vā dīpabandhanaṃ vā, yo etesu yaṃ kiñci bandhanaṃ chinditvā bhinditvā muñcitvā vivaritvā vā passamānānaṃ vā apassamānānaṃ vā palāyati, so ‘kārābhedako’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 92).
"Kārabhedaka" is shortened due to metrical requirements. Kārabhedaka means one who has been put in prison due to a payable tax or a crime committed, or one who is bound with fetters and so on, and then escapes from there. Such a person is a kārābhedaka. As it is said, "Kārā means a prison. Here, it refers to being bound in iron, being bound in chains, being bound with rope, being bound in a village, being bound in a town, being bound in a city, being held in custody by men, being bound in a district, or being bound on an island. Whoever breaks, destroys, releases, or opens any of these bonds and escapes, whether seen or unseen, is designated as a 'kārābhedaka'" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 92).
2485.Kasāhatanti iṇaṃ gahetvā dātuṃ asamatthattā ‘‘ayameva te daṇḍo hotū’’ti kasādinā dinnappahāraṃ avūpasantavaṇaṃ. Yathāha –
2485.Kasāhata means one who has unhealed wounds from being struck with a whip because he was unable to pay a debt, and it was said, "Let this be your punishment." As it is said:
‘‘Yo vacanapesanādīni akaronto haññati, na so katadaṇḍakammo. Yo pana keṇiyā vā aññathā vā kiñci gahetvā khāditvā puna dātuṃ asakkonto ‘ayameva te daṇḍo hotū’ti kasāhi haññati, ayaṃ kasāhato katadaṇḍakammo. Yo ca kasāhi vā hato hotu addhadaṇḍakādīnaṃ vā aññatarena, yāva allavaṇo hoti, tāva na pabbājetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 94).
"One who is beaten for not doing what he is told is not considered to have undergone punishment. But one who has taken and consumed something on credit or otherwise, and is unable to repay it, and is beaten with whips, with the words 'Let this be your punishment,' this is one beaten with whips who has undergone punishment. And whether he is beaten with whips or with any other form of minor punishment, he should not be ordained until the wound is healed" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 94).
Lakkhaṇāhatanti ekaṃsaṃ katvā pārutena uttarāsaṅgena appaṭicchādanīyaṭṭhāne tattena lohena āhataṃ asacchavibhūtalakkhaṇena samannāgataṃ. Yathāha –
Lakkhaṇāhata means one who has been branded with a mark on an area that should not be covered by the upper robe, having made it one-sided, with hot iron, having a disfigured mark on the skin. As it is said:
‘‘Yassa pana nalāṭe vā urādīsu vā tattena lohena lakkhaṇaṃ āhataṃ hoti, so sace bhujisso, yāva allavaṇo hoti, tāva na pabbājetabbo. Sacepissa vaṇā ruḷhā honti chaviyā samaparicchedā, lakkhaṇaṃ pana paññāyati, timaṇḍalaṃ nivatthassa uttarāsaṅge kate paṭicchannokāse ce hoti, pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Appaṭicchannokāse ce, na vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 95).
"If someone has a mark branded on his forehead or chest with hot iron, if he is a free man, he should not be ordained until the wound is healed. Even if his wounds are healed and level with the skin, but the mark is still visible, and it is in a covered area when the three robes are worn and the upper robe is in place, it is permissible to ordain him. If it is in an uncovered area, it is not permissible" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 95).
Iṇāyikañcāti mātāpitupitāmahādīhi vā attanā vā gahitaiṇaṃ. Yathāha –
Iṇāyikañcā means a debt taken by parents, grandparents, or oneself. As it is said:
‘‘Iṇāyiko nāma yassa pitipitāmahehi vā iṇaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, sayaṃ vā iṇaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, yaṃ vā āṭhapetvā mātāpitūhi kiñci gahitaṃ hoti, so taṃ iṇaṃ paresaṃ dhāretīti iṇāyiko. Yaṃ pana aññe ñātakā āṭhapetvā kiñci gaṇhanti, so na iṇāyiko. Na hi te taṃ āṭhapetuṃ issarā. Tasmā taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 96).
"A debtor is one whose father or grandfather has taken a debt, or who has taken a debt himself, or something has been taken by the parents as collateral, so he owes that debt to others. However, if other relatives take something as collateral, he is not a debtor, because they are not in a position to offer that as collateral. Therefore, it is permissible to ordain him" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 96).
Dāsanti antojāto, dhanakkīto, karamarānīto, sayaṃ vā dāsabyaṃ upagatoti catunnaṃ dāsānaṃ aññataraṃ. Dāsavinicchayo panetthasamantapāsādikāya(mahāva. aṭṭha. 97) vitthārato gahetabbo.Pabbājentassa dukkaṭanti ‘‘kuṭṭhi’’ntiādīhi upayogavantapadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
Dāsa means one of the four types of slaves: born in the household, bought with wealth, captured by force, or one who has voluntarily become a slave. The determination of what constitutes a slave should be taken in detail from the Samantapāsādikā here (mahāva. aṭṭha. 97). Pabbājentassa dukkaṭa (a dukkata offense for one who ordains) should be individually connected with the terms designating disqualifications, such as "kuṭṭhi" etc.
2486.Hatthacchinnanti hatthatale vā maṇibandhe vā kappare vā yattha katthaci chinnahatthaṃ.Aṭṭhacchinnanti yathā nakhaṃ na paññāyati, evaṃ catūsu aṅguṭṭhakesu aññataraṃ vā sabbe vā yassa chinnā honti, evarūpaṃ.Pādacchinnanti yassa aggapādesu vā gopphakesu vā jaṅghāya vā yattha katthaci eko vā dve vā pādā chinnā honti. Hatthapādachinnassāpipāḷiyaṃ(mahāva. 119) āgatattā sopi idha vattabbo, yathāvuttanayeneva tassa dukkaṭavatthutā paññāyatīti na vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
2486.Hatthacchinna means one whose hand is cut off at the palm, wrist, or elbow, or anywhere else. Aṭṭhacchinna means one who has one or all of the four fingers cut off so that the nails are not visible. Pādacchinna means one who has one or both feet cut off at the toes, ankles, or shins, or anywhere else. Even though the one with hands and feet cut off appears in the Pāli (mahāva. 119), he should be mentioned here as well, because his case of being a dukkata offense is evident in the manner described above. It should be understood that he is not mentioned separately for that reason.
Kaṇṇanāsaṅgulicchinnanti ettha ‘‘kaṇṇacchinnaṃ nāsacchinnaṃ kaṇṇanāsacchinnaṃ aṅgulicchinna’’nti yojanā.Kaṇṇacchinnanti yassa kaṇṇamūle vā kaṇṇasakkhalikāya vā eko vā dve vā kaṇṇā chinnā honti. Yassa pana kaṇṇāvaṭṭe chinnā honti, sakkā ca honti saṅghāṭetuṃ, so kaṇṇaṃ saṅghāṭetvā pabbājetabbo.Nāsacchinnanti yassa ajapadake vā agge vā ekapuṭe vā yattha katthaci nāsā chinnā hoti. Yassa pana nāsikā sakkā hoti sandhetuṃ, so taṃ phāsukaṃ katvā pabbājetabbo.Kaṇṇanāsacchinnanti tadubhayacchinnaṃ.Aṅgulicchinnanti yassa nakhasesaṃ adassetvā ekā vā bahū vā aṅguliyo chinnā honti. Yassa pana suttatantumattampi nakhasesaṃ paññāyati, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.Kaṇḍaracchinnameva cāti yassa kaṇḍaranāmakā mahānhārū purato vā pacchato vā chinnā honti, yesu ekassāpi chinnattā aggapādena vā caṅkamati, mūlena vā caṅkamati, na vā pādaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ sakkoti.
Kaṇṇanāsaṅgulicchinna means, here, "one with ears cut off, one with a nose cut off, one with ears and nose cut off, one with fingers cut off." Kaṇṇacchinna means one who has one or both ears cut off at the base of the ear or the earlobe. But if the outer rim of the ear is cut, and it can be repaired, then he should be ordained after repairing the ear. Nāsacchinna means one who has the nose cut off at the bridge, tip, or one nostril, or anywhere else. But if the nose can be rejoined, then he should be ordained after having it made sound. Kaṇṇanāsacchinna means one who has both of them cut off. Aṅgulicchinna means one who has one or more fingers cut off, without showing any remnant of the nail. But if even a thread or fiber of the nail remains visible, it is permissible to ordain him. Kaṇḍaracchinnameva cā means one whose major tendons called kaṇḍara are cut in the front or back, so that with even one of them cut, he walks with the tip of his foot or walks with the heel, or is unable to place his foot down.
2487.Kāṇanti pasannandho vā hotu pupphādīhi vā upahatapasādo, yo dvīhi vā ekena vā akkhinā na passati, taṃ kāṇaṃ.Kuṇinti hatthakuṇī vā pādakuṇī vā aṅgulikuṇī vā, yassa etesu hatthādīsu yaṃ kiñci vaṅkaṃ paññāyati, so kuṇī.Khujjañcāti yo urassa vā piṭṭhiyā vā passassa vā nikkhantattā khujjasarīro, taṃ khujjaṃ. Yassa pana kiñci kiñci aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ īsakaṃ vaṅkaṃ, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Mahāpuriso eva hi brahmujugatto, avaseso satto akhujjo nāma natthi.
2487.Kāṇa means one who is completely blind or one whose sight is impaired by cataracts or other causes, so that he cannot see with one or both eyes. Kuṇi means one who has a bent hand, foot, or finger; one in whom any of these hands etc. is noticeably crooked. Khujjañcā means one who has a hunched body because the chest, back, or side protrudes. But if any of his limbs are slightly crooked, it is permissible to ordain him, because only a Great Being has a perfectly straight body; there is no other being who is not akhujja (not hunched).
Vāmananti yo jaṅghavāmano vā kaṭivāmano vā ubhayavāmano vā, taṃ. Tattha jaṅghavāmanassa kaṭito paṭṭhāya heṭṭhimakāyo rasso hoti, uparimakāyo paripuṇṇo. Kaṭivāmanassa kaṭito paṭṭhāya uparimakāyo rasso hoti, heṭṭhimakāyo paripuṇṇo hoti. Ubhayavāmanassa ubhopi kāyā rassā honti. Yesaṃ kāyarassattā bhūtānaṃ viya parivaṭumo mahākucchighaṭasadiso attabhāvo hoti. Taṃ tividhampi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
Vāmana means one who has short legs, a short torso, or both. Among these, the one with short legs has a short lower body from the waist down, and a complete upper body. The one with a short torso has a short upper body from the waist up, and a complete lower body. The one with both short has both bodies short. Because of their short bodies, their existence is like that of ghosts, with a large belly resembling a pot. It is not permissible to ordain any of these three.
Phaṇahatthakanti yassa vaggulipakkhakā viya aṅguliyo sambaddhā honti, taṃ. Etaṃ pabbājetukāmena aṅgulantarikāyo phāletvā sabbaṃ antaracammaṃ apanetvā phāsukaṃ katvā pabbājetabbo. Yassāpi cha aṅguliyo honti, taṃ pabbājetukāmena adhikaṃ aṅguliṃ chinditvā phāsukaṃ katvā pabbājetabbo.
Phaṇahatthaka means one whose fingers are connected like the wings of a bat. One who wants to ordain this person should separate the spaces between the fingers, remove all the skin in between, make it sound, and then ordain him. Also, if someone has six fingers, one who wants to ordain him should cut off the extra finger, make it sound, and then ordain him.
Khañjanti yo natajāṇuko vā bhinnajaṅgho vā majjhe saṃkuṭitapādattā kuṇḍapādako vā piṭṭhipādamajjhena caṅkamanto agge saṃkuṭitapādattā kuṇḍapādako vā piṭṭhipādaggena caṅkamanto aggapādeneva caṅkamanakhañjo vā paṇhikāya caṅkamanakhañjo vā pādassa bāhirantena caṅkamanakhañjo vā pādassa abbhantarantena caṅkamanakhañjo vā gopphakānaṃ upari bhaggattā sakalena piṭṭhipādena caṅkamanakhañjo vā, taṃ pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Etthanatajāṇukoti antopaviṭṭhaānatapādo.Pakkhahatanti yassa eko hattho vā pādo vā aḍḍhasarīraṃ vā sukhaṃ na vahati.
Khañja means one who has bent knees, broken shins, a clubfoot because the foot is contracted in the middle, or one who walks on the middle of the back of his foot, or one who has a clubfoot because the foot is contracted at the tip and walks on the tip of his foot, or one who is lame and walks on the tip of his foot, or one who is lame and walks on his heel, or one who is lame and walks on the outer edge of his foot, or one who is lame and walks on the inner edge of his foot, or one who has broken ankles and walks with his entire back foot. It is not permissible to ordain him. Here, natajāṇuko means one whose feet are turned inwards. Pakkhahata means one whose hand, foot, or half of the body does not function properly.
Sīpadinti bhārapādaṃ. Yassa pādo thūlo hoti sañjātapīḷako kharo, so na pabbājetabbo. Yassa pana na tāva kharabhāvaṃ gaṇhāti, sakkā hoti upanāhaṃ bandhitvā udakaāvāṭe pavesetvā udakavālikāya pūretvā yathā sirā paññāyanti, jaṅghā ca telanāḷikā viya honti, evaṃ milāpetuṃ sakkā, tassa pādaṃ īdisaṃ katvā taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace puna vaḍḍhati, upasampādentenāpi tathā katvāva upasampādetabbo.Pāparoginanti yo arisabhagandarapittasemhakāsasosādīsu yena kenaci rogena niccāturo atekiccharogo jeguccho amanāpo, taṃ.
Sīpadi means elephantiasis. One whose foot is thick, hard, and has formed tumors should not be ordained. However, if it has not yet become hard, and it is possible to tie a poultice, immerse it in a water trough, fill it with water and sand so that the veins become visible and the legs are like oil funnels, and thus make it shrink, then it is permissible to ordain that person after making his foot like this. If it grows again, even the one who is ordaining him should ordain him only after doing it in that way. Pāparogina means one who is constantly sick with some incurable, repulsive, and unpleasant disease such as piles, fistulas, bilious diseases, phlegm diseases, cough, or consumption.
2488.Jarāya dubbalanti yo jiṇṇabhāvena dubbalo attano cīvararajanādikammampi kātuṃ asamattho, taṃ. Yo pana mahallakopi balavā hoti attānaṃ paṭijaggituṃ sakkoti, so pabbājetabbo.Andhanti jaccandhaṃ.Padhirañcevāti yo sabbena sabbaṃ na suṇāti, taṃ. Yo pana mahāsaddaṃ suṇāti, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.Mammananti yassa vacībhedo vattati, saraṇagamanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ bhāsituṃ na sakkoti, tādisaṃ mammanampi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yo pana saraṇagamanamattaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ bhāsituṃ sakkoti, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vāmammananti khalitavacanaṃ, yo ekameva akkharaṃ catupañcakkhattuṃ vadati, tassetamadhivacanaṃ.Pīṭhasappinti chinniriyāpathaṃ.Mūganti yassa vacībhedo nappavattati.
2488.Jarāya dubbala means one who is weakened by old age and unable to do even his own tasks such as dyeing robes. However, one who is old but strong and able to take care of himself should be ordained. Andha means one who is born blind. Padhirañcevā means one who cannot hear anything at all. One who can hear loud sounds should be ordained. Mammana means one who has a speech impediment and cannot pronounce the words of going for refuge perfectly; such a mammana should not be ordained. One who can pronounce the words of going for refuge perfectly should be ordained. Alternatively, mammana means one who has faltering speech, who says the same letter four or five times; this is a designation for that. Pīṭhasappi means one who has disordered posture. Mūga means one whose speech does not function.
2489.Attano virūpabhāvena parisaṃ dūsentena parisadūsake (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119) dassetumāha‘‘atidīgho’’tiādi.Atidīghoti aññesaṃ sīsappamāṇanābhippadeso.Atirassoti vuttappakāro ubhayavāmano viya atirasso.Atikāḷo vāti jhāpitakhette khāṇuko viya atikāḷavaṇṇo. Maṭṭhatambalohanidassano accodātopi vāti sambandho, dadhitakkādīhi majjitamaṭṭhatambalohavaṇṇo atīva odātasarīroti attho.
2489. To illustrate how one who disgusts the assembly through their deformed appearance is a 'corruptor of the assembly' (parisadūsaka) (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119), he said, "Extremely tall," etc. Extremely tall means exceeding the head height of others. Extremely short is as described, like being extremely short, similar to being both a dwarf and a hunchback. Or extremely dark means having an extremely dark complexion, like a charred stump in a burnt field. The connection is that they are exceedingly pale, appearing like polished copper or iron, whitened with yogurt whey, etc.; the meaning is that their body is exceedingly pale like polished copper or iron rubbed with whey.
2490.Atithūlovāti bhāriyamaṃso mahodaro mahābhūtasadiso.Atikisoti mandamaṃsalohito aṭṭhisirācammasarīro viya. Atimahāsīso vāti yojanā.Atimahāsīso vāti pacchiṃ sīse katvā ṭhito viya. ‘‘Atikhuddakasīsena asahitenā’’ti padacchedo.Asahitenāti sarīrassa ananurūpena.‘‘Atikhuddakasīsenā’’ti etassa visesanaṃ. Asahitena atikhuddakasīsena samannāgatoti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘atikhuddakasīso vā sarīrassa ananurūpena atikhuddakena sīsena samannāgato’’ti.
2490.Or extremely stout means being heavy with flesh, having a large belly, resembling a great being. Extremely thin means having little flesh and blood, like a body of skin, sinew, and bones. The connection is that they have an exceedingly large head. Or with an extremely large head means as if having a carrying basket placed on their head. "With an extremely small head, out of proportion" is a separation of words. Out of proportion means not corresponding to the body. "With an extremely small head" is a qualifier for this. It connects as: endowed with an extremely small head that is out of proportion. As it was said: "Or with an extremely small head, endowed with an extremely small head that is out of proportion to the body."
2491.Kuṭakuṭakasīsoti tālaphalapiṇḍisadisena sīsena samannāgato.Sikharasīsakoti uddhaṃ anupubbatanukena sīsena samannāgato, matthakato saṃkuṭiko mūlato vitthato hutvā ṭhitapabbatasikharasadisasīsoti attho.Veḷunāḷisamānenāti mahāveḷupabbasadisena.Sīsenāti dīghasīsena. Yathāha – ‘‘nāḷisīso vā mahāveḷupabbasadisena sīsena samannāgato’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119).
2491.Kuṭakuṭaka-headed means endowed with a head like a cluster of palmyra fruit. Sikharasīsako means endowed with a head that is thin, gradually tapering upwards, meaning a head that is peaked at the top and wide at the base, resembling the peak of a mountain. Like a bamboo tube means like a section of great bamboo. Head means a long head. As it was said, "Nāḷisīso or endowed with a head like a section of great bamboo" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119).
2492.Kappasīsopīti majjhe dissamānaāvāṭena hatthikumbhasadisena dvidhābhūtasīsena samannāgato.Pabbhārasīso vāti catūsu passesu yena kenaci passena oṇatena sīsena samannāgato.Vaṇasīsakoti vaṇehi samannāgatasīso.Kaṇṇikakeso vāti pāṇakehi khāyitakedāre sassasadisehi tahiṃ tahiṃ uṭṭhitehi kesehi samannāgato.Thūlakesopi vāti tālahīrasadisehi kesehi samannāgato.
2492.Kappasīsopī means endowed with a head that is divided into two, like an elephant's forehead with a visible depression in the middle. Or Pabbhārasīso means endowed with a head that slopes downwards on one side or another of the four sides. Vaṇasīsako means having a head covered with sores. Kaṇṇikakeso means having hair like young sprouts of grain eaten by insects in tilled fields, hair that grows here and there. Thūlakesopi vā means having hair like the fibers of a palmyra palm.
2493.Pūtisīsoti duggandhasīso.Nillomasīso vāti lomarahitasīso.Jātipaṇḍarakesakoti jātiphalitehi paṇḍarakeso vā.Jātiyā tambakeso vāti ādittehi viya tambavaṇṇehi kesehi samannāgato.Āvaṭṭasīsakoti gunnaṃ sarīre āvaṭṭasadisehi uddhaggehi kesāvaṭṭehi samannāgato.
2493.Pūtisīso means having a foul-smelling head. Nillomasīso vā means having a hairless head. Jātipaṇḍarakesako means having hair that is pale as if by nature. Jātiyā tambakeso vā means endowed with reddish-brown hair, as if ignited. Āvaṭṭasīsako means having whorls of hair that curl upwards on the body like whirlpools.
2494.Sīsalomekabaddhehi bhamukehi yutopīti sīsalomehi saddhiṃ ekābaddhalomehi bhamukehi samannāgato.Sambaddhabhamuko vāti ekābaddhaubhayabhamuko, majjhe sañjātalomehi bhamukehi samannāgatoti attho.Nillomabhamukopi vāti bhamulomarahito.Nillomabhamukopi vātipi-saddena avuttasamuccayatthena makkaṭabhamuko saṅgahito.
2494.Sīsalomekabaddhehi bhamukehi yutopī means endowed with eyebrows that have hairs connected to the hair of the head. Sambaddhabhamuko vā means having both eyebrows connected, meaning eyebrows with hairs joined in the middle. Nillomabhamukopi vā means having hairless eyebrows. Nillomabhamukopi vā The word pi includes the unmentioned monkey-like eyebrows by way of accumulation.
2495.Mahantakhuddanettovāti etthanetta-saddo mahantakhudda-saddehi paccekaṃ yojetabbo, mahantanetto vā khuddakanetto vāti attho.Mahantanetto vāti atimahantehi nettehi samannāgato.Khuddakanetto vāti mahiṃsacamme vāsikoṇena paharitvā katachiddasadisehi atikhuddakakkhīhi samannāgato.Visamalocanoti ekena mahantena, ekena khuddakena akkhinā samannāgato.Kekaro vāpīti tiriyaṃ passanto. Etthaapi-saddena nikkhantakkhiṃ sampiṇḍeti, yassa kakkaṭakasseva akkhitārakā nikkhantā honti.Gambhīranettoti yassa gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā viya akkhitārakā paññāyanti. Ettha caudakatārakānāma udakapubbuḷaṃ.Akkhitārakāti akkhigeṇḍakā.Visamacakkaloti ekena uddhaṃ, ekena adhoti evaṃ visamajātehi akkhicakkehi samannāgato.
2495.Mahantakhuddanetto vā Here, the word netta (eye) should be connected to each of the words mahanta (large) and khudda (small) individually, meaning having large eyes or small eyes. Mahantanetto vā means endowed with exceedingly large eyes. Khuddakanetto vā means endowed with exceedingly small eyes, like holes made by striking leather with an awl on an animal hide. Visamalocano means endowed with one large eye and one small eye. Kekaro vāpī means looking sideways. Here, api combines with protruding eyes, whose eyeballs protrude like those of a crab. Gambhīranetto means one whose eyeballs appear like water bubbles in a deep well. Here, udakatārakā means a water bubble. Akkhitārakā means eyeballs. Visamacakkalo means endowed with uneven eye sockets, one upwards and one downwards.
2496.Jatukaṇṇovāti atikhuddikāhi kaṇṇasakkhalīhi samannāgato.Mūsikakaṇṇo vāti mūsikānaṃ kaṇṇasadisehi kaṇṇehi samannāgato.Hatthikaṇṇopi vāti ananurūpāhi mahantāhi hatthikaṇṇasadisāhi kaṇṇasakkhalīhi samannāgato.Chiddamattakakaṇṇo vāti yassa vinā kaṇṇasakkhalīhi kaṇṇacchiddameva hoti.Aviddhakaṇṇakoti kaṇṇabandhatthāya aviddhena kaṇṇena samannāgato.
2496.Jatukaṇṇo vā means endowed with extremely small earlobes. Mūsikakaṇṇo vā means endowed with ears like those of a mouse. Hatthikaṇṇopi vā means endowed with disproportionately large earlobes, like the ears of an elephant. Chiddamattakakaṇṇo vā means one who only has ear holes without earlobes. Aviddhakaṇṇako means endowed with ears that are not pierced for earrings.
2497.Ṭaṅkitakaṇṇo vāti gobhattanāḷikāya aggasadisehi kaṇṇehi samannāgato, gohanukoṭisaṇṭhānehi kaṇṇehi samannāgatoti attho.Pūtikaṇṇopi vāti sadā paggharitapubbena kaṇṇena samannāgato.Pūtikaṇṇopītiapi-saddena kaṇṇabhagandariko gahito.Kaṇṇabhagandarikoti niccapūtinā kaṇṇena samannāgato. Aviddhakaṇṇo parisadūsako vutto, kathaṃ yonakajātīnaṃ pabbajjāti āha‘‘yonakādippabhedopi, nāyaṃ parisadūsako’’ti, kaṇṇāvedhanaṃ yonakānaṃ sabhāvo, ayaṃ yonakādippabhedo parisadūsako na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
2497.Ṭaṅkitakaṇṇo vā means endowed with ears like the tip of a goad, meaning ears shaped like the tip of a goad. Pūtikaṇṇopi vā means endowed with an ear that always oozes pus. Pūtikaṇṇopī The word api includes a fistula in the ear. Kaṇṇabhagandariko means endowed with an ear that constantly emits pus. It was said that one with unpierced ears is a corruptor of the assembly; how can those of Yona birth be ordained? He said, "Even a different type of Yona, this is not a corruptor of the assembly," meaning that piercing the ears is the custom of the Yonas, and this different type of Yona is not a corruptor of the assembly.
2498.Atipiṅgalanettoti atisayena piṅgalehi nettehi samannāgato. Madhupiṅgalaṃ pana pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.Nippakhumakkhi vāti akkhidalaromehi virahitaakkhiko.Pakhuma-saddo hi loke akkhidalaromesu niruḷho.Assupaggharanetto vāti paggharaṇassūhi nettehi samannāgato.Pakkapupphitalocanoti pakkalocano pupphitalocanoti yojanā. Paripakkanetto sañjātapupphanettoti attho.
2498.Atipiṅgalanetto means endowed with exceedingly brown eyes. However, one with honey-brown eyes is fit to be ordained. Nippakhumakkhi vā means having eyes devoid of eyelashes. The word pakhuma is commonly used in the world for eyelashes. Assupaggharanetto vā means endowed with eyes that shed tears constantly. Pakkapupphitalocano means having ripe eyes and flowered eyes. It means having eyes that are ripe and eyes that have developed cataracts.
2499.Mahānāsoti sarīrassa ananurūpāya mahatiyā nāsāya samannāgato.Atikhuddakanāsikoti tathā atikhuddikāya nāsāya samannāgato.Cipiṭanāso vāti cipiṭāya anto paviṭṭhāya viya allināsāya samannāgato.Cipiṭanāso vāti avuttavikappatthenavā-saddena dīghanāsiko saṅgayhati. So ca sukatuṇḍasadisāya jivhāya lehituṃ sakkuṇeyyāya nāsikāya samannāgato.Kuṭilanāsikoti mukhamajjhe appatiṭṭhahitvā ekapasse ṭhitanāsiko.
2499.Mahānāso means endowed with a nose that is disproportionately large for the body. Atikhuddakanāsiko means similarly endowed with a nose that is exceedingly small. Cipiṭanāso vā means endowed with a flat nose, as if pressed inwards, with a sunken nose. Cipiṭanāso vā With the word vā, in the sense of an unstated alternative, it includes one with a long nose. And he is endowed with a nose that can be licked by the tongue, like a parrot's beak. Kuṭilanāsiko means having a nose that does not rest in the middle of the face but is situated on one side.
2500.Niccavissavanāso vāti niccapaggharitasiṅghāṇikanāso vā.Mahāmukhoti yassa paṭaṅgamaṇḍukasseva mukhanimittaṃyeva mahantaṃ hoti, mukhaṃ pana lābusadisaṃ atikhuddakaṃ.Paṭaṅgamaṇḍukonāma mahāmukhamaṇḍuko.Vaṅkabhinnamukho vāpīti ettha ‘‘vaṅkamukho vā bhinnamukho vāpī’’ti yojanā.Vaṅkamukhoti bhamukassa, nalātassa vā ekapasse ninnatāya vaṅkamukho.Bhinnamukho vāti makkaṭasseva bhinnamukho.Mahāoṭṭhopi vāti ukkhalimukhavaṭṭisadisehi oṭṭhehi samannāgato.
2500.Niccavissavanāso vā means having a nose that constantly drips mucus. Mahāmukho means one whose facial features, like a large-mouthed frog, are very large, but whose mouth is exceedingly small, like a gourd. Paṭaṅgamaṇḍuko means a large-mouthed frog. Vaṅkabhinnamukho vāpī Here, the connection is "Vaṅkamukho vā bhinnamukho vāpī". Vaṅkamukho means having a crooked mouth because of a depression on one side of the eyebrow or forehead. Bhinnamukho vā means having a split mouth like a monkey. Mahāoṭṭhopi vā means endowed with lips like the rim of a cooking pot.
2501.Tanukaoṭṭho vāti bhericammasadisehi dante pidahituṃ asamatthehi oṭṭhehi samannāgato.Bhericammasadisehīti bherimukhacammasadisehi.Tanukaoṭṭho vāti etthavā-saddena mahādharoṭṭho vā tanukauttaroṭṭho vā tanukaadharoṭṭho vāti tayo vikappā saṅgahitā.Vipuluttaraoṭṭhakoti mahāuttaroṭṭho.Oṭṭhachinnoti yassa eko vā dve vā oṭṭhā chinnā honti.Uppakkamukhoti pakkamukho.Eḷamukhopi vāti niccapaggharaṇamukho.
2501.Tanukaoṭṭho vā means endowed with lips that are thin like drum skin and unable to cover the teeth. Bhericammasadisehī means like the skin of a drumhead. Tanukaoṭṭho vā Here, the word vā includes three alternatives: having large lips, or having thin upper lips, or having thin lower lips. Vipuluttaraoṭṭhako means having large upper lips. Oṭṭhachinno means one who has one or both lips cut. Uppakkamukho means a blistered mouth. Eḷamukhopi vā means a mouth that constantly drips saliva.
2502-3.Saṅkhatuṇḍopīti bahi setehi anto atirattehi oṭṭhehi samannāgato.Duggandhamukhoti duggandhakuṇapamukho.Mahādantopīti aṭṭhakadantasadisehi samannāgato.Accantanti atisayena.‘‘Heṭṭhā uparito vāpi, bahi nikkhantadantako’’ti idaṃ ‘‘asuradantako’’ti etassa atthapadaṃ.Asuroti dānavo. ‘‘Sippidanto vā oṭṭhadanto vā’’tigaṇṭhipadelikhito. Yassa pana sakkā honti oṭṭhehi pidahituṃ, kathentasseva paññāyati, no akathentassa, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.Adantoti dantarahito.Pūtidantoti pūtibhūtehi dantehi samannāgato.
2502-3.Saṅkhatuṇḍopī means endowed with lips that are white on the outside and exceedingly red on the inside. Duggandhamukho means having a foul-smelling corpse-like mouth. Mahādantopī means endowed with teeth like sesame seeds. Accanta means exceedingly. "Whether the teeth protrude below or above, or outwards" This is the meaning of "asuradantako" (demon teeth). Asuro means a demon. "Sippidanto vā oṭṭhadanto vā" is written in the glossary. But if it is possible to cover [the teeth] with the lips, and it is only apparent when speaking, not when not speaking, then it is fitting to ordain them. Adanto means toothless. Pūtidanto means endowed with decayed teeth.
2504.‘‘Atikhuddakadantako’’ti imassa‘‘yassā’’tiādi apavādo. Yassa dantantarekāḷakadantasannibhokalandakadantasadiso danto sukhumova ṭhito ce, taṃ tu pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Pabbājetumpīti etthapi-saddo tu-saddattho.
2504.The text beginning with "yassā" is an exception to "Atikhuddakadantako". If one has a tooth that stands subtly in the interdental space, similar to a black kālakadanta seed or a kalandaka grain, then it is fitting to ordain them. Pabbājetumpī Here, the word pi has the meaning of the word tu.
2505.Yo posoti sambandho.Mahāhanukoti gohanusadisena hanunā samannāgato.‘‘Rassena hanunā yuto’’ti idaṃ ‘‘cipiṭahanuko vā’’ti imassa atthapadaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘cipiṭahanuko vā antopaviṭṭhena viya atirassena hanukena samannāgato’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119).Cipiṭahanuko vāpīti etthapi-saddena ‘‘bhinnahanuko vā vaṅkahanuko vā’’ti vikappadvayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
2505.The connection is "yo poso" (that person). Mahāhanuko means endowed with a jaw like a cow's jaw. "Endowed with a short jaw" This is the meaning of "cipiṭahanuko vā". As it was said: "Cipiṭahanuko vā or endowed with a very short jaw as if pressed inwards" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119). Cipiṭahanuko vāpī Here, the word pi includes the two alternatives "bhinnahanuko vā vaṅkahanuko vā" (having a split jaw or a crooked jaw).
2506.Nimmassudāṭhiko vāpīti bhikkhunisadisamukho.Atidīghagalopi vāti bakagalasadisena galena samannāgato.Atirassagalopi vāti antopaviṭṭhena viya galena samannāgato. Bhinnagalo vā gaṇḍagalopi vāti yojanā, bhinnagalaṭṭhiko vā gaṇḍena samannāgatagalopi vāti attho.
2506.Nimmassudāṭhiko vāpī means having a mouth like a bhikkhunī. Atidīghagalopi vā means endowed with a throat like that of a stork. Atirassagalopi vā means endowed with a throat that is as if pressed inwards. The connection is bhinnagalo vā gaṇḍagalopi vā, meaning having a split throat or a throat with a goiter.
2507.Bhaṭṭhaṃsakūṭovāti mātugāmassa viya bhaṭṭhena aṃsakūṭena samannāgato. Bhinnapiṭṭhi vā bhinnauropi vāti yojanā, sudīghahattho vā surassahattho vāti yojanā, atidīghahattho vā atirassahattho vāti attho.Vā-saddena ahatthaekahatthānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Kacchusamāyuto vā kaṇḍusamāyuto vāti yojanā.Vā-saddena ‘‘daddugatto vā godhāgatto vā’’ti ime dve saṅgaṇhāti. Tatthagodhāgatto vāti yassa godhāya viya gattato cuṇṇāni patanti.
2507.Bhaṭṭhaṃsakūṭo vā means endowed with sloping shoulders like a woman. The connection is bhinnapiṭṭhi vā bhinnauropi vā, the connection is sudīghahattho vā surassahattho vā, meaning having extremely long arms or extremely short arms. The word vā includes those with no arms or one arm. The connection is kacchusamāyuto vā kaṇḍusamāyuto vā. The word vā includes these two: "daddugatto vā godhāgatto vā". There godhāgatto vā means one from whose body powders fall, like from a lizard.
2508.Mahānisadamaṃsoti imassa atthapadaṃ ‘‘uddhanaggupamāyuto’’ti. Yathāha – ‘‘mahāānisado vā uddhanakūṭasadisehi ānisadamaṃsehi accuggatehi samannāgato’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119).Mahānisadamaṃso vāti etthavā-saddena bhaṭṭhakaṭiko saṅgahito.Vātaṇḍikoti aṇḍakosesu vuddhirogena samannāgato.Mahāūrūti sarīrassa ananurūpehi mahantehi sattīhi samannāgato.Saṅghaṭṭanakajāṇukoti aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭehi jāṇūhi samannāgato.
2508.The meaning of Mahānisadamaṃso is "uddhanaggupamāyuto". As it was said: "mahāānisado vā or endowed with prominent buttocks, like upturned cooking pots, with very high buttocks" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119). Mahānisadamaṃso vā Here, the word vā includes having sloping hips. Vātaṇḍiko means afflicted with hydrocele in the testicles. Mahāūrū means endowed with thighs that are disproportionately large for the body. Saṅghaṭṭanakajāṇuko means endowed with knees that rub against each other.
2509.Bhinnajāṇūti yassa eko vā dve vā jāṇū bhinnā honti.Mahājāṇūti mahantena jāṇunā samannāgato.Dīghajaṅghoti yaṭṭhisadisajaṅgho.Vikaṭo vāti tiriyaṃ gamanapādehi samannāgato, yassa caṅkamato jāṇukā bahi niggacchanti.Paṇho vāti pacchato parivattapādehi samannāgato, yassa caṅkamato jāṇukā anto pavisanti. ‘‘Panto’’ti ca ‘‘saṇho’’ti ca etasseva vevacanāni.Ubbaddhapiṇḍikoti heṭṭhā oruḷhāhi vā upari āruḷhāhi vā mahatīhi jaṅghapiṇḍikāhi samannāgato.
2509.Bhinnajāṇū means one who has one or two broken knees. Mahājāṇū means endowed with large knees. Dīghajaṅgho means having shins like sticks. Vikaṭo vā means endowed with feet that walk sideways, whose knees stick out when walking. Paṇho vā means endowed with feet that turn inwards from behind, whose knees turn inwards when walking. "Panto" and "saṇho" are synonyms for this. Ubbaddhapiṇḍiko means endowed with large calves that hang down or are raised up.
2510.Yaṭṭhijaṅghoti yaṭṭhisadisāya jaṅghāya samannāgato.Mahājaṅghoti sarīrassa ananurūpāya mahatiyā jaṅghāya samannāgato.Mahāpādopi vāti sarīrassa ananurūpehi mahantehi pādehi samannāgato.Api-saddena thūlajaṅghapiṇḍiko saṅgahito, bhattapuṭasadisāya thūlāya jaṅghapiṇḍiyā samannāgatoti attho.Piṭṭhikapādo vāti pādavemajjhato uṭṭhitajaṅgho.Mahāpaṇhipi vāti ananurūpehi atimahantehi paṇhīhi samannāgato.
2510.Yaṭṭhijaṅgho means endowed with shins like sticks. Mahājaṅgho means endowed with shins that are disproportionately large for the body. Mahāpādopi vā means endowed with feet that are disproportionately large for the body. The word api includes having thick calves, meaning endowed with thick calves like rice cakes. Piṭṭhikapādo vā means having shins that rise from the middle of the foot. Mahāpaṇhipi vā means endowed with heels that are disproportionately large.
2511.Vaṅkapādoti anto vā bahi vā parivattapādavasena duvidho vaṅkapādo.Gaṇṭhikaṅgulikoti siṅgiveraphaṇasadisāhi aṅgulīhi samannāgato.‘‘Andhanakho vāpī’’ti etassa atthapadaṃ ‘‘kāḷapūtinakhopi cā’’ti. Yathāha – ‘‘andhanakho vā kāḷavaṇṇehi pūtinakhehi samannāgato’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119).
2511.Vaṅkapādo There are two kinds of clubfoot: those that turn inwards or outwards. Gaṇṭhikaṅguliko means endowed with fingers like ginger roots. "Andhanakho vāpī" The meaning of this is "kāḷapūtinakhopi cā". As it was said: "andhanakho vā or endowed with black, rotten nails" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 119).
2512.Iccevanti yathāvuttavacanīyanidassanatthoyaṃ nipātasamudāyo. Aṅgavekallatāya bahuvidhattā anavasesaṃ vekallappakāraṃ saṅgaṇhitumāha‘‘iccevamādika’’nti.
2512.Icceva This is a particle group showing examples of what has been said. To include without omission the types of defects, due to the many kinds of defects in the limbs, he said, "iccevamādika" (and so on).
Parisadūsakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Corruptors of the Assembly.
2514.Pattacīvaranti ettha ‘‘sāmaṇerassā’’ti adhikārato labbhati.Anto nikkhipatoti ovarakādīnaṃ anto nikkhipantassa.Sabbapayogesūti pattacīvarassa āmasanādisabbapayogesu.
2514.Pattacīvara Here, "sāmaṇerassa" is obtained from the authority. Anto nikkhipato For one who deposits it inside an ovaraka etc. Sabbapayogesū In all uses such as touching the bowl and robe.
2515-6.Daṇḍakammaṃ katvāti daṇḍakammaṃ yojetvā. Daṇḍenti vinenti etenātidaṇḍo,soyeva kattabbattā kammanti daṇḍakammaṃ, āvaraṇādi.Anācārassadubbacasāmaṇerassa kevalaṃ hitakāmena bhikkhunādaṇḍakammaṃ katvādaṇḍakammaṃ yojetvā yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vāvā-saddena pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā dassetvā ‘‘daṇḍakamme āhaṭe tvaṃ idaṃ lacchasi’’ iti bhāsituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Kirāti padapūraṇatthe nipāto.
2515-6. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvā means having imposed daṇḍakamma. Daṇḍo means that by which one disciplines or corrects, and that itself, being something to be done, is kamma, hence daṇḍakamma, i.e., enclosure, etc. Anācārassa means to a dubbacasāmaṇera. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvā means having imposed daṇḍakamma by a bhikkhu who wishes only for his welfare, having imposed daṇḍakamma, it is allowable to give him rice-gruel or cooked rice, or—by the word vā—a bowl or robe, saying, "You will get this as a result of the daṇḍakamma." This is the connection. Kirā is a particle used to fill out the sentence.
2517.Dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitadaṇḍakammaṃ dassetumāha‘‘aparādhānurūpenā’’tiādi.Taṃaparādhānurūpadaṇḍakammaṃ nāma vālikāsalilādīnaṃ āharāpanamevāti yojetabbaṃ.Ādi-saddena dāruādīnaṃ āharāpanaṃ gaṇhāti. Tañca kho ‘‘oramissatī’’ti anukampāya, na ‘‘nassissati vibbhamissatī’’tiādinayappavattena pāpajjhāsayena.
2517. To show the daṇḍakamma established by the elders who compiled the Dhamma, he says, ‘‘aparādhānurūpenā’’ etc. Taṃ here should be connected thus: that daṇḍakamma that is appropriate to the offense, is just having him bring sand, water, etc. By the word ādi, he includes having him bring wood, etc. And that is with compassion, thinking "it might get mixed up," not with the evil intention expressed by such phrases as "it will get ruined and destroyed."
2518-9.Akattabbaṃ daṇḍakammaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sīse vā’’tiādi.Sīse vāti ettha ‘‘sāmaṇerassā’’ti adhikārato labbhati.Pāsāṇādīnīti etthaādi-saddena iṭṭhakādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Sāmaṇeraṃ uṇhe pāsāṇe nipajjāpetuṃ vā uṇhāya bhūmiyā nipajjāpetuṃ vā udakaṃ pavesetuṃ vā bhikkhuno na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2518-9. To show the daṇḍakamma that should not be done, he says, ‘‘sīse vā’’ etc. Sīse vā here is understood to refer to "of a sāmaṇera" from the context. In pāsāṇādīnī, by the word ādi is included bricks, etc. It is not allowable for a bhikkhu to make a sāmaṇera lie down on a hot stone, or to make him lie down on hot ground, or to put him in water. This is the connection.
‘‘idhā’’tiādi.Idhāti imasmiṃ daṇḍakammādhikāre.Āvaraṇamattanti ‘‘mā idha pāvisī’’ti nivāraṇamattaṃ.Pakāsitanti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yattha vā vasati, yattha vā paṭikkamati, tattha āvaraṇaṃ kātu’’nti (mahāva. 107) bhāsitaṃ.
‘‘idhā’’tiādi. Idhā means in this context of daṇḍakamma. Āvaraṇamattanti means merely preventing him [from entering], saying, "Do not enter here." Pakāsitanti means as it was said: "I allow, monks, to make an enclosure wherever he dwells or wherever he departs." (mahāva. 107)
aṭṭhakathāyavuttattā yāva yojitaṃ daṇḍakammaṃ karonti, tāva attano puggalikapariveṇaṃ vā vassaggena pattasenāsanaṃ vā pavisituṃ adatvā nivāraṇaṃāvaraṇaṃnāma.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘attano’’ti vacanaṃ ye āvaraṇaṃ karonti, te ācariyupajjhāye sandhāya vuttanti viññāyati. Keci panettha ‘‘attano’’ti idaṃ yassa āvaraṇaṃ karonti, taṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetvā tattha vinicchayaṃ vadanti. Keci ubhayathāpi atthaṃ gahetvā ubhayatthāpi āvaraṇaṃ kātabbanti vadanti. Vīmaṃsitvā yamettha yuttataraṃ, taṃ gahetabbaṃ.
aṭṭhakathāya it is said that as long as they are doing the daṇḍakamma that has been imposed, preventing him from entering his own personal enclosure, or a lodging assigned by the community, or a resting place, without permission, is called āvaraṇaṃ. In the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, the word "attano" (one's own) is understood to refer to the teachers and preceptors who make the enclosure. But some here take this "attano" to refer to the one for whom the enclosure is made, and they state a judgment there. Some take the meaning in both ways and say that the enclosure should be made in both cases. Having investigated, what is more reasonable here should be taken.
Nivāraṇakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Exclusion.
2520.Pakkho ca opakkamiko ca āsitto cāti viggaho. Ettha ca ‘‘anuposathe uposathaṃ karotī’’tiādīsu yathā uposathadine kattabbakammaṃ ‘‘uposatho’’ti vuccati, tathā māsassa pakkhe paṇḍakabhāvamāpajjanto‘‘pakkho’’ti vutto. Atha vā pakkhapaṇḍakopakkhouttarapadalopena yathā ‘‘bhīmaseno bhīmo’’ti. Idañca pāpānubhāvena kaṇhapakkheyeva paṇḍakabhāvamāpajjantassa adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘akusalavipākānubhāvena kāḷapakkhe kāḷapakkhe paṇḍako hoti, juṇhapakkhe panassa pariḷāho vūpasammati, ayaṃ pakkhapaṇḍako’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 109).
2520. Pakkho ca opakkamiko ca āsitto cāti viggaho. Here, just as in "anuposathe uposathaṃ karotī" etc., the action to be done on the uposatha day is called "uposatho," so too, the paṇḍaka who becomes a paṇḍaka in a fortnight of the month is called ‘‘pakkho’’. Or, pakkhapaṇḍako [is shortened to] pakkho by the elision of the final word, just as bhīmaseno [is shortened to] bhīmo. And this is a designation for one who becomes a paṇḍaka in the dark fortnight due to the power of evil. As he said: "Due to the effect of unwholesome result, he becomes a paṇḍaka in each dark fortnight, but in the bright fortnight, his burning subsides; this is a pakkhapaṇḍako." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 109).
opakkamikapaṇḍako. Yassa paresaṃ aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gahetvā asucinā āsittassa pariḷāho vūpasammati, ayaṃāsittapaṇḍako. Usūyakoti yassa paresaṃ ajjhācāraṃ passato usūyāya uppannāya pariḷāho vūpasammati, ayaṃ usūyapaṇḍako. Yo paṭisandhiyaṃyeva abhāvako uppanno, ayaṃnapuṃsakapaṇḍako.
opakkamikapaṇḍako: [is he] whose burning subsides when his organ is taken into another's mouth and sprinkled with impurity; this is an āsittapaṇḍako. Usūyako: [is he] whose burning subsides when jealousy arises upon seeing another's misconduct; this is an usūyapaṇḍako. He who is born an impotent one at conception, this is a napuṃsakapaṇḍako.
2521.Tesūti tesu pañcasu paṇḍakesu. ‘‘Pakkhapaṇḍakassa yasmiṃpakkhe paṇḍako hoti, tasmiṃyevassa pakkhe pabbajjā vāritā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 109) kurundiyaṃ vuttattā‘‘tiṇṇaṃ nivāritā’’ti idaṃ tassa paṇḍakassa paṇḍakapakkhaṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
2521. Tesūti means among those five types of paṇḍaka. Since it is said in the Kurundi, "For the pakkhapaṇḍaka, ordination is forbidden in the fortnight in which he becomes a paṇḍaka," (mahāva. aṭṭha. 109) the statement ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ nivāritā’’ should be understood as referring to the paṇḍaka fortnight of that paṇḍaka.
2522.‘‘Nāsetabbo’’ti idaṃ liṅganāsanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sopi liṅganāsaneneva nāsetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 109). Esa nayo uparipi īdisesu ṭhānesu.
2522. ‘‘Nāsetabbo’’ means this is said referring to the destruction of the sexual characteristics. As he said: "He, too, should be expelled only by the destruction of the sexual characteristics." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 109). This method [applies] also in similar places above.
Paṇḍakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Paṇḍakas.
2523.Thenetītitheno,liṅgassa pabbajitavesassa thenoliṅgatheno. Saṃvāsassa bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikassa thenosaṃvāsatheno.Tadubhayassa cāti tassa liṅgassa, saṃvāsassa ca ubhayassa thenoti sambandho. Esa tividhopi theyyasaṃvāsako nāma pavuccatīti yojanā.
2523. Thenetīti theno, a thief; liṅgassa pabbajitavesassa theno means a thief of the guise of a renunciate; liṅgatheno. Saṃvāsassa bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikassa theno means a thief of association, of the reckoning of a bhikkhu's years of seniority, etc.; saṃvāsatheno. Tadubhayassa cāti means a thief of both, of that guise and of association. This threefold [person] is called a theyyaṃsaṃvāsako. This is the connection.
2524-6.Tatthatesu tīsu theyyasaṃvāsakesu yo sayameva pabbajitvā bhikkhuvassāni na gaṇhati, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanampi neva gaṇhati,api-saddena āsanena neva paṭibāhati uposathapavāraṇādīsu neva sandissatīti saṅgaṇhanato tadubhayampi na karoti, ayaṃliṅgamattassapabbajitavesamattassathenatocorikāya gahaṇato liṅgattheno siyāti yojanā.
2524-6. Tattha among those three theyyasaṃvāsakas, he who himself goes forth [as a monk] and does not count the years of seniority of the bhikkhus, and does not even give salutations according to seniority, and—by the word api—does not even ward off [others] with the seat, and does not even appear at the uposatha and pavāraṇā ceremonies etc.; thus, by including [these omissions], he does not do either of the two; this one, by stealing just the liṅgamattassa, just the outward appearance of a renunciate, by theft, is a liṅgattheno. This is the connection.
saṃvāsaṃsādiyantova saṃvāsatthenako matoti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko hi sabbopi kiriyabhedo imasmiṃ atthe ‘saṃvāso’ti veditabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110).
saṃvāsaṃ means, accepting association itself, he is considered a saṃvāsa-thenako. This is the connection. As he said: "Indeed, all the different kinds of actions, beginning with the reckoning of the bhikkhu's years of seniority, should be understood in this context as 'association'." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110).
Vuttanayoyevāti ubhinnaṃ paccekaṃ vuttalakkhaṇameva etassa lakkhaṇanti katvā vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ tividhopi theyyasaṃvāsako anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo, puna pabbajjaṃ yācantopi na pabbājetabbo. Byatirekamukhena theyyasaṃvāsalakkhaṇaṃ niyametuṃaṭṭhakathāya(mahāva. aṭṭha. 110) vuttagāthādvayaṃ udāharanto āha‘‘yathāha cā’’ti. Yathā aṭṭhakathācariyo rājadubbhikkhādigāthādvayamāha, tathāyamattho byatirekato veditabboti adhippāyo.
Vuttanayoyevāti by making the definition of each of the two just as was said, it is said [to apply to this case]. This threefold theyyasaṃvāsako is unordained and should not be ordained; if ordained, he should be expelled; even if he asks for re-ordination, he should not be ordained. To determine the characteristics of a theyyasaṃvāsa by means of an exclusion, citing the two verses stated in the aṭṭhakathāya (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110), he says ‘‘yathāha cā’’ti. Just as the aṭṭhakathācariya spoke the two verses beginning with rājadubbhikkhādi, so this meaning should be understood by exclusion. This is the intention.
2527-8.Rājadubbhikkhakantāra-rogaveribhayehi vāti etthabhaya-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘rājabhayena dubbhikkhabhayenā’’tiādinā.Cīvarāharaṇatthaṃ vāti attanā pariccattacīvaraṃ puna vihāraṃ āharaṇatthāya.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsane.Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānasoti rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāya so suddhamānaso yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāsetīti attho.
2527-8. Rājadubbhikkhakantāra-rogaveribhayehi vāti here the word bhaya should be connected to each individually with "rājabhayena dubbhikkhabhayenā," etc. Cīvarāharaṇatthaṃ vāti for the purpose of bringing back to the monastery a robe that one has given up. Idha in this dispensation. Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānasoti because of having taken the guise due to being seized by fear of a king etc., until he is pure in mind, he does not consent to association. This is the meaning.
gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.
gaṇṭhipadesu it is said.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃavūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyane atheyyasaṃvāsakatā dassitā. ‘‘Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto’’ti ca iminā avūpasantabhayenāpi saṃvāsaṃ asādiyanteneva vasitabbanti dīpeti. Teneva tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā vihāraṃ āgantvā saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantassa saṃvāsaṃ pariharituṃ dukkaraṃ, tasmā ‘sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto’ti idaṃ vutta’’nti. Tasmā rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatā cettha suddhacittatāti gahetabbaṃ.
In the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, the state of not being a theyyasaṃvāsaka is shown to be [the case] when one consents to association without the fear having ceased. And by "sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto," he indicates that even with the fear not having ceased, one lives without consenting to association. Therefore, in all three gaṇṭhipadesu it is said, "Since it is difficult to avoid association for one who comes to the monastery and partakes of what belongs to the Sangha, therefore this was said: 'sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto'." Therefore, here it should be understood that the purity of mind is due to having taken the guise because of being seized by fear of a king, etc.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 110) āgatanayena veditabbo.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110) it should be understood in the way that has come.
Theyyasaṃvāsakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Theyyasaṃvāsakas.
2529-30.Yo upasampanno bhikkhu ‘‘ahaṃ titthiyo bhavissa’’ntisaliṅgenevaattano bhikkhuveseneva titthiyānaṃ upassayaṃ yāti ceti sambandho. Titthiyesu pakkantako paviṭṭhotitthiyapakkantako. Tesaṃ liṅge nissiteti tesaṃ titthiyānaṃ vese gahite.
2529-30. Yo upasampanno bhikkhu ‘‘ahaṃ titthiyo bhavissa’’nti that bhikkhu who is ordained, thinking "I will become a sectarian," goes to the monastery of the sectarians saliṅgeneva, with his bhikkhu guise itself. One who has gone forth and entered among the sectarians is a titthiyapakkantako. Tesaṃ liṅge nissiteti means having taken the guise of those sectarians.
2531.‘‘Ahaṃ titthiyo bhavissa’’nti kusacīrādikaṃ yo sayameva nivāseti, sopipakkantakotitthiyapakkantako siyāti yojanā.
2531. He who himself puts on a garment of kusa grass, etc., thinking "I will become a sectarian," he, too, pakkantako, would be a sectarian who has gone forth. This is the connection.
2532-4.Naggo tesaṃ ājīvakādīnaṃ upassayaṃ gantvāti yojanā.Kese luñcāpetīti attano kese luñcāpeti. Tesaṃ vatāni ādiyati vāti yojanā.Vatāni ādiyatīti ukkuṭikappadhānādīni vā vatāni ādiyati.Tesaṃtitthiyānaṃ morapiñchādikaṃliṅgaṃsaññāṇaṃ sace gaṇhāti vā tesaṃ pabbajjaṃ, laddhimeva vā sārato vāetiupagacchati vāti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ pabbajjā seṭṭhāti seṭṭhabhāvaṃ vā upagacchatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110 titthiyapakkantakakathā)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Esa titthiyapakkantako hoti eva,na pana vimuccatititthiyapakkantabhāvato.Naggassa gacchatoti ‘‘ājīvako bhavissa’’nti kāsāyādīni anādāya naggassa ājīvakānaṃ upasaṃgacchato.
2532-4. Naggo means having gone naked to the monastery of those Ājīvakas etc. This is the connection. Kese luñcāpetīti means he has his own hair plucked out. Tesaṃ vatāni ādiyati vāti yojanā. Vatāni ādiyatīti means he undertakes the practices such as the practice of squatting, etc. Tesaṃ means of those sectarians. Morapiñchādikaṃ means peacock feathers etc., which are a liṅgaṃ, a distinguishing mark. If he takes that or their ordination, or indeed approaches [them] as the essence: This is the connection. It is said in the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110 titthiyapakkantakakathā): "Or approaches the highest state, [thinking] 'This ordination is the best'." This sectarian who has gone forth is certainly like this, na pana vimuccati but does not become freed from the state of being a sectarian who has gone forth. Naggassa gacchatoti means for him who goes naked to the Ājīvakas, without taking the brown robes etc., thinking "I will become an Ājīvaka."
2535.Theyyasaṃvāsakoanupasampannavasena vutto,no upasampannavasena. Iminā ‘‘upasampanno bhikkhu kūṭavassaṃ gaṇhantopi assamaṇo na hoti. Liṅge saussāho pārājikaṃ āpajjitvā bhikkhuvassādīni gaṇentopi theyyasaṃvāsako na hotī’’tiaṭṭhakathāgatavinicchayaṃ dīpeti. Tathā vuttoti yojanā.‘‘Upasampannabhikkhunā’’ti iminā anupasampannaṃ nivatteti. Tena ca ‘‘sāmaṇero saliṅgena titthāyatanaṃ gatopi puna pabbajjañca upasampadañca labhatī’’tikurundaṭṭhakathāgatavinicchayaṃ dasseti.
2535. Theyyasaṃvāsakoanupasampannavasena vutto, means the theyyasaṃvāsako was spoken of in the context of the unordained, not in the context of the ordained. By this, he indicates the judgment found in the aṭṭhakathā: "Even if an ordained bhikkhu counts false years of seniority, he does not become a non-recluse. Even if he is zealous in [taking on] the guise after committing a pārājika offense, and counts the bhikkhu years of seniority, etc., he does not become a theyyasaṃvāsako." Thus, it is said. ‘‘Upasampannabhikkhunā’’ti by this he excludes the unordained. And thereby he shows the judgment found in the kurundaṭṭhakathā: "Even if a sāmaṇera goes to the abode of sectarians with the [bhikkhu's] guise, he can again obtain ordination and higher ordination."
pāḷitoca ‘‘so na kevalaṃ na upasampādetabbo, atha kho na pabbājetabbopī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110 titthiyapakkantakakathā)aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca veditabbo.
pāḷitoca and also from the aṭṭhakathā statement, "He should not only not be ordained, but he should not even be allowed to go forth," (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110 titthiyapakkantakakathā) it should be understood.
Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Sectarians Who Have Gone Forth.
2536.Idhāti imasmiṃ pabbajjūpasampadādhikāre. Manussajātikato aññassa tiracchānagateyeva antogadhattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘yakkho sakkopi vā’’ti.Tiracchānagato vuttoti ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. ‘‘Tiracchānagato, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’ti (mahāva. 111) vacanato pabbajjāpi upalakkhaṇato nivāritāyevāti katvā vuttaṃ‘‘pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti. Tena tiracchānagato ca bhagavato adhippāyaññūhiaṭṭhakathācariyehina pabbājetabboti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 111) vuttaṃ.
2536. Idhā means in this context of ordination and higher ordination. To show that internal corruption exists only in a being of the animal realm, different from the human species, he says ‘‘yakkho sakkopi vā’’. Tiracchānagato vuttoti here the word iti is understood but not explicitly stated. Since it is said, "A being of the animal realm who is unordained should not be ordained; if ordained, he should be expelled," (mahāva. 111) ordination, too, is prevented by implication, and therefore it is said ‘‘pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’. Therefore, it was said by the aṭṭhakathācariyehi, those who know the intention of the Blessed One, that a being of the animal realm should not be allowed to go forth (mahāva. aṭṭha. 111).
Tiracchānakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Animals.
2537.Pañcānantarike poseti mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, lohituppādako, saṅghabhedakoti ānantariyakammehi samannāgate pañca puggale.
2537. Pañcānantarike poseti means the five individuals endowed with the ānantariya deeds: matricide, patricide, the killing of an arahant, the shedding of blood, and causing a schism in the Sangha.
mātughātako(mahāva. aṭṭha. 112) nāma yena manussitthibhūtā janikā mātā sayampi manussajātikeneva satā sañcicca jīvitā voropitā, ayaṃ ānantariyena mātughātakakammena mātughātako, etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca paṭikkhittā. Yena pana manussitthibhūtāpi ajanikā posāvanikamātā vā cūḷamātā vā mahāmātā vā janikāpi vā namanussitthibhūtā mātāghātitā, tassa pabbajjā na vāritā, na ca ānantariyo hoti. Yena sayaṃ tiracchānabhūtena manussitthibhūtā mātā ghātitā, sopi ānantariyo na hoti, tiracchānagatattā panassa pabbajjā paṭikkhittāva.Pitughātakepi eseva nayo. Sacepi hi vesiyā putto hoti, ‘‘ayaṃ me pitā’’ti na jānāti, yassa sambhavena nibbatto, so ce anena ghātito, ‘‘pitughātako’’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, ānantariyañca phusati.
mātughātako (mahāva. aṭṭha. 112) nāma means the mother who is a human female, and is the one who bore him, has been intentionally deprived of life by himself, being also of human species; this one, by the ānantariya deed of matricide, is a matricide, and his going forth and higher ordination are forbidden. But if a human female who is not the mother, such as a foster mother, or a stepmother, or a great-aunt, or even the [actual] mother, but not a human female, is killed, then his going forth is not forbidden, and he does not commit an ānantariya deed. If the mother who is a human female is killed by himself, being an animal, even then he is not an ānantariya, but his going forth is certainly forbidden because he is an animal. The same method [applies] Pitughātake also. Even if he is the son of a prostitute, he does not know "This is my father," but if the one by whose intercourse he was conceived is killed by him, he is called "patricide," and he experiences the ānantariya, [result].
Arahantaghātakopi manussaarahantavaseneva veditabbo. Manussajātiyañhi antamaso apabbajitampi khīṇāsavaṃ dārakaṃ vā dārikaṃ vā sañcicca jīvitā voropento arahantaghātakova hoti, ānantariyañca phusati, pabbajjā cassa vāritā. Amanussajātikaṃ pana arahantaṃ, manussajātikaṃ vā avasesaṃ ariyapuggalaṃ ghātetvā ānantariyo na hoti, pabbajjāpissa na vāritā, kammaṃ pana balavaṃ hoti. Tiracchāno manussaarahantampi ghātetvā ānantariyo na hoti, kammaṃ pana bhāriyaṃ.
Arahantaghātakopi should be understood only in terms of a human arahant. For indeed, one of human species who intentionally deprives of life even a young khīṇāsava boy or girl who has not gone forth, is an arahant-slayer and experiences the ānantariya, and his going forth is forbidden. But by killing a non-human arahant, or any other noble individual of human species, he does not commit an ānantariya deed, and his going forth is not forbidden, but the action is weighty. An animal, even by killing a human arahant, does not commit an ānantariya deed, but the action is serious.
lohituppādakonāma, etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca vāritā. Yo pana rogavūpasamanatthaṃ jīvako viya satthena phāletvā pūtimaṃsañca lohitañca nīharitvā phāsuṃ karoti, bahuṃ so puññaṃ pasavati.
lohituppādakonāma means shedding blood. His going forth and higher ordination are forbidden. But if, for the purpose of relieving illness, like Jīvaka, one cuts with a scalpel and removes pus and blood and makes [the patient] comfortable, he generates much merit.
saṅghabhedakonāma, etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca vāritā. ‘‘Mātughātako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’tiādikāya (mahāva. 112)pāḷiyāupasampadāpaṭikkhepo pabbajjāpaṭikkhepassa upalakkhaṇanti āha‘‘pabbājentassa dukkaṭa’’nti.
saṅghabhedakonāma means causing a schism in the Sangha. His going forth and higher ordination are forbidden. By the pāḷiyā, "A matricide, monks, who is unordained should not be ordained; if ordained, he should be expelled," (mahāva. 112) the prohibition of higher ordination implies the prohibition of going forth. Therefore, he says ‘‘pabbājentassa dukkaṭa’’nti.
Ubhatobyañjananti ka-kāralopena niddeso. Itthinimittuppādanakammato ca purisanimittuppādanakammato ca ubhato byañjanamassa atthītiubhatobyañjanako. So duvidho hoti itthiubhatobyañjanako, purisaubhatobyañjanakoti.
Ubhatobyañjananti is an indication with the elision of the ka sound. One who has both characteristics (byañjana) due to actions producing female characteristics and actions producing male characteristics is called ubhatobyañjanako. He is of two kinds: female ubhatobyañjanaka and male ubhatobyañjanaka.
Tattha itthiubhatobyañjanakassa (mahāva. aṭṭha. 116) itthinimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, purisanimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisanimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, itthinimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthīsu purisattaṃ karontassa itthinimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, purisanimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisānaṃ itthibhāvaṃ upagacchantassa purisanimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, itthinimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Itthiubhatobyañjanako sayañca gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, parañca gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpeti. Purisaubhatobyañjanako sayaṃ na gaṇhāti, paraṃ gaṇhāpetīti idametesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Imassa pana duvidhassāpi ubhatobyañjanakassaneva pabbajjā atthi, na upasampadāti idamidha sanniṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
Of these, for the female ubhatobyañjanaka (mahāva. aṭṭha. 116), the female characteristic is evident, the male characteristic is concealed. For the male ubhatobyañjanaka, the male characteristic is evident, the female characteristic is concealed. For a female ubhatobyañjanaka who performs masculinity among women, the female characteristic is concealed, the male characteristic is evident. For a male ubhatobyañjanaka who adopts femininity among men, the male characteristic is concealed, the female characteristic is evident. The female ubhatobyañjanaka herself conceives and causes others to conceive. The male ubhatobyañjanaka does not conceive himself, but causes others to conceive; this is the distinction among them. However, for both of these two kinds of ubhatobyañjanaka, only ordination is possible, not full ordination (upasampadā); this determination should be understood here.
bhikkhunidūsakonāma, etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca vāritā. Yo pana kāyasaṃsaggena sīlavināsaṃ pāpeti, tassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca na vāritā. Balakkārena pana odātavatthavasanaṃ katvā anicchamānaṃyeva dūsentopi bhikkhunidūsakoyeva. Balakkārena pana odātavatthavasanaṃ katvā icchamānaṃ dūsento bhikkhunidūsako na hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā gihibhāve sampaṭicchitamatteyeva sā abhikkhunī hoti. Sakiṃ sīlavipannaṃ pana pacchā dūsento neva bhikkhunidūsako hoti, pabbajjampi upasampadampi labhati.
bhikkhunidūsako nāma, for this person, both ordination and full ordination are prohibited. But one who causes the loss of virtue through physical contact, for him, neither ordination nor full ordination is prohibited. However, even if one forcibly makes a bhikkhunī wear white clothes and defiles her against her will, he is still a bhikkhunidūsaka. But one who forcibly makes her wear white clothes and defiles her with her consent is not a bhikkhunidūsaka. Why? Because as soon as she consents to lay life, she is no longer a bhikkhunī. But one who defiles her after her virtue is once corrupted is not a bhikkhunidūsaka; he can obtain both ordination and full ordination.
2538.Pāḷiaṭṭhakathāvimuttaṃ ācariyaparamparābhatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ekato’’tiādi.‘‘Ekato’’ti iminā bhikkhusaṅghassāpi gahaṇaṃ bhaveyyāti taṃ parivajjetuṃ‘‘bhikkhunīnaṃ tu santike’’ti vuttaṃ. Etena taṃdūsakassa bhabbataṃ dīpeti. So neva bhikkhunidūsako siyā, ‘‘upasampadaṃ labhateva ca pabbajjaṃ, sā ca neva parājitā’’ti idaṃ dutiyagāthāya idhānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Kevalaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghe upasampannā nāma na hotīti adhippāyeneva vuttaṃ.‘‘Sā ca neva parājitā’’ti iminā tassā ca puna pabbajjūpasampadāya bhabbataṃ dīpeti. Ayamattho aṭṭhakathāgaṇṭhipadepivuttoyeva ‘‘bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena ekatoupasampannaṃ dūsetvā bhikkhunidūsako na hoti, pabbajjādīni labhati, sā ca pārājikā na hotīti vinicchayo’’ti.
2538. To show the determination of the Vinaya that is beyond the Pali commentary, received through the lineage of teachers, he says, "ekato" etc. By "ekato", there might be inclusion of the bhikkhu sangha, therefore, to avoid that, "bhikkhunīnaṃ tu santike" is said. By this, he shows the suitability of the defiler. He might not be a bhikkhunidūsaka, and "he obtains upasampadā and pabbajja, and she is not defeated"; this should be connected by bringing it into the second verse. It is said with the intention that she is merely not fully ordained in the bhikkhunī sangha. By "sā ca neva parājitā", he shows the suitability for her to be re-ordained and fully ordained. This meaning is already stated in the gaṇṭhipada commentary, "Having defiled one fully ordained among bhikkhunīs, he is not a bhikkhunidūsaka; he obtains ordination etc., and she is not defeated, is the determination."
2539.‘‘Sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu ca vippaṭipajjanto neva bhikkhunidūsako hoti, pabbajjampi upasampadampi labhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 115)aṭṭhakathāgatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sace anupasampannadūsako’’ti.‘‘Upasampadaṃ labhateva ca pabbajja’’nti idaṃ yathāṭhānepi yojetabbaṃ.Sā ca neva parājitāti idaṃ panaaṭṭhakathāyaanāgatattā ca anupasampannāya upasampannavikappābhāvā ca na yojetabbaṃ. Asati hi upasampannavikappe parājitavikappāsaṅgaho paṭisedho niratthakoti sā pabbajjūpasampadānaṃ bhabbāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Ime pana paṇḍakādayo ekādasa puggalā ‘‘paṇḍako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’tiādivacanato (mahāva. 109) abhabbāyeva, nesaṃ pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca na ruhati, tasmā na pabbājetabbā. Jānitvā pabbājento, upasampādento ca dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Ajānitvāpi pabbājitā, upasampāditā ca jānitvā liṅganāsanāya nāsetabbā.
2539. To show the determination stated in the commentary (mahāva. aṭṭha. 115) that "One who behaves improperly towards a sikkhamānā or a sāmaṇerī is not a bhikkhunidūsaka; he obtains both ordination and full ordination," he says, "sace anupasampannadūsako". "Upasampadaṃ labhateva ca pabbajja" this should be connected in its proper place. However, "Sā ca neva parājitā" this should not be connected because it is not mentioned in the commentary, and because there is no possibility of the fully ordained being considered un-ordained. Because without the possibility of being fully ordained, the inclusion and rejection of defeat is meaningless, therefore, she should be seen as suitable for ordination and full ordination. But these eleven individuals, beginning with the paṇḍaka, are unsuitable because of the statement, "A paṇḍaka, bhikkhus, if unordained, should not be ordained; if ordained, should be expelled" etc. (mahāva. 109); ordination and full ordination do not grow for them, therefore, they should not be ordained. One who, knowing this, ordains or fully ordains incurs a dukkata offense. Even if ordained or fully ordained without knowing, they should be expelled by destroying the signs after knowing.
Ekādasaabhabbapuggalakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Eleven Unsuitable Individuals.
2540.Nūpasampādanīyovāti na upasampādetabbova.Anupajjhāyakoti asannihitaupajjhāyo vā aggahitaupajjhāyaggahaṇo vā.Karototi anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādayato.Dukkaṭaṃ hotīti ācariyassa ca gaṇassa ca dukkaṭāpatti hoti.Na kuppati sace katanti sace anupajjhāyakassa upasampadākammaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya, taṃ na kuppati samaggena saṅghena akuppena ṭhānārahena katattā.
2540. Nūpasampādanīyovāti means he should certainly not be fully ordained. Anupajjhāyakoti means without a preceptor present, or without the acceptance of a preceptor. Karototi means one who fully ordains without a preceptor. Dukkaṭaṃ hotīti means the teacher and the group incur a dukkata offense. Na kuppati sace katanti means if an act of full ordination has been done for one without a preceptor, it does not fail because it was done by a harmonious sangha that is suitable for the un-failing act.
2541.Eketi abhayagirivāsino.‘‘Na gahetabbamevā’’tiaṭṭhakathāyadaḷhaṃ vuttattā vuttaṃ.Taṃvacanaṃ. Ettha ca upajjhāye asannihitepi upajjhāyaggahaṇe akatepi kammavācāyaṃ pana upajjhāyakittanaṃ kataṃyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti vuttāya kammavipattiyā sambhavato kammaṃ kuppeyya. Teneva ‘‘upajjhāyaṃ akittetvā’’ti avatvā ‘‘upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 117)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Yathā ca aparipuṇṇapattacīvarassa upasampadākāle kammavācāyaṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti asantaṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā kammavācāya katāyapi upasampadā ruhati, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti asantaṃ puggalaṃ kittetvā kevalaṃ santapadanīhārena kammavācāya katāya upasampadā ruhatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘na kuppati sace kata’’nti. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, anupajjhāyako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 117) ettakameva vatvā ‘‘so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’ti avuttattā, kammavipattilakkhaṇassa ca asambhavato ‘‘na gahetabbameva ta’’nti vuttaṃ.
2541. Eketi means the residents of Abhayagiri. "Na gahetabbameva"ti is said because it is firmly stated in the commentary. Taṃ means that statement. And here, even though the preceptor is not present, even though the acceptance of a preceptor is not done, the recitation of the preceptor in the kammavācā is done. Otherwise, because of the possibility of the fault in the act arising from the statement that "it does not refer to a person", the act would fail. Therefore, instead of saying "without reciting the preceptor", the commentary says "without causing the preceptor to be accepted" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 117). And just as at the time of full ordination of one whose robe and bowl are incomplete, even though the object that is not present is recited in the kammavācā as "complete robe and bowl", the full ordination grows, similarly, it should be seen that even though a person who is not present is recited by saying "This Buddharakkhita is seeking full ordination from venerable Dhammarakkhita", the full ordination certainly grows by means of merely reciting the existing word. Therefore, he said, "na kuppati sace kata". Because only this much is said, "A person without a preceptor, bhikkhus, should not be fully ordained; whoever fully ordains incurs a dukkata offense" (mahāva. 117), and because it is not said that "that person is not fully ordained", and because the characteristic of the fault in the act is not possible, it is said that "it should certainly not be accepted."
Sesesu sabbatthapīti saṅghagaṇapaṇḍakatheyyasaṃvāsakatitthiyapakkantakatiracchānagatamātupituarahantaghātakabhikkhunidūsakasaṅghabhedakalohituppādakaubhatobyañjanakasaṅkhātehi upajjhāyehi upasampāditesu sabbesu terasasu vikappesu. Vuttañhi bhagavatā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, saṅghena upajjhāyena upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādi. Na kevalaṃ etesuyeva terasasu, atha ‘‘apattakaacīvarakaacīvarapattakayācitakapattayācitakacīvarayācitakapattacīvarakā’’ti etesu chasu vikappesu ayaṃ nayo yojetabboti.Sesa-ggahaṇena etesampi saṅgaho. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, apattako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādi (mahāva. 118).Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘na kuppati sace kata’’nti vuttanayo.
Sesesu sabbatthapīti means in all the thirteen instances where those were fully ordained by preceptors who are counted as sanghagaṇa, paṇḍaka, theyyasaṃvāsaka, titthiyapakkantaka, tiracchānagata, mātupituarahantaghātaka, bhikkhunidūsaka, saṅghabhedaka, lohituppādaka, ubhatobyañjanaka. For it was said by the Blessed One, "A person should not be fully ordained by the sangha as preceptor; whoever fully ordains incurs a dukkata offense" etc. Not only in these thirteen, but this method should be connected in these six instances as well: "apattaka acīvaraka acīvarapattaka yācitakapatta yācitakacīvara yācitakapattacīvaraka." By the inclusion of Sesa, there is inclusion of these as well. For this was said by the Blessed One, "A person without a robe, bhikkhus, should not be fully ordained; whoever fully ordains incurs a dukkata offense" etc. (mahāva. 118). Ayaṃ nayoti means the method stated as "na kuppati sace kata."
2542.Pañcavīsatīti catuvīsati pārājikā, ūnavīsativasso cāti pañcavīsati. Vuttañhi ‘‘na, bhikkhave, jānaṃ ūnavīsativasso puggalo upasampādetabbo. Yo upasampādeyya, yathādhammo kāretabbo’’ti (mahāva. 99).Osāroti upasampadāsaṅkhāto osāro. Tenevacampeyyakkhandhake‘‘tañce saṅgho osāreti, ekacco sosārito’’tiādipāṭhassa (mahāva. 396)aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘osāretīti upasampadākammavasena pavesetī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 396) vuttaṃ.‘‘Nāsanāraho’’ti iminā ‘‘paṇḍako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo’’tiādivacanato (mahāva. 109) upasampāditassāpi setakāni datvā gihibhāvaṃ pāpetabbataṃ dīpeti.
2542. Pañcavīsatīti means twenty-four pārājikas and one less than twenty years old, totaling twenty-five. For it was said, "A person known to be less than twenty years old, bhikkhus, should not be fully ordained. Whoever fully ordains should be dealt with according to the law" (mahāva. 99). Osāroti means expulsion, referring to full ordination. Therefore, in the Campeyyakkhandhaka, in the commentary on the passage "If the sangha expels him, one is expelled" etc. (mahāva. 396), it is said, "expels, means causes to enter by way of the act of full ordination" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 396). By "Nāsanāraho", he shows that because of the statement beginning with "A paṇḍaka, bhikkhus, if unordained, should not be ordained" (mahāva. 109), even one who has been fully ordained should be made to return to lay life by giving him white clothes.
2543.Hatthacchinnādibāttiṃsāti campeyyakkhandhake–
2543. Hatthacchinnādibāttiṃsāti in the Campeyyakkhandhaka—
‘‘Hatthacchinno, bhikkhave, appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, sosārito. Pādacchinno…pe… hatthapādacchinno… kaṇṇacchinno… nāsacchinno… kaṇṇanāsacchinno… aṅgulicchinno… aḷacchinno… kaṇḍaracchinno… phaṇahatthako… khujjo… vāmano… galagaṇḍī… lakkhaṇāhato… kasāhato… likhitako… sīpadiko… pāparogī… parisadūsako… kāṇo… kuṇī… khañjo… pakkhahato… chinniriyāpatho… jarādubbalo… andho… mūgo… padhiro… andhamūgo… andhapadhiro… mūgapadhiro… andhamūgapadhiro, bhikkhave, appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, sosārito’’ti (mahāva. 396) bāttiṃsa.
"One with a cut-off hand, bhikkhus, is not fit for expulsion; if the sangha expels him, he is expelled. One with a cut-off foot…pe… one with a cut-off hand and foot… one with a cut-off ear… one with a cut-off nose… one with a cut-off ear and nose… one with cut-off fingers… one with a mutilated penis… one with severed tendons… one with a deformed hand… a hunchback… a dwarf… one with a goiter… one marked with brands… one marked with lashes… one with inscriptions… one with elephantiasis… one with ringworm… one who corrupts assemblies… a blind person… a cripple… a lame person… one paralyzed… one with impaired conduct… one weakened by old age… a sightless person… a mute person… a deaf person… a blind mute… a blind deaf… a mute deaf… a blind mute deaf, bhikkhus, is not fit for expulsion; if the sangha expels him, he is expelled" (mahāva. 396), are thirty-two.
Kuṭṭhiādi ca terasātimahākhandhakeāgatā –
Kuṭṭhiādi ca terasāti are those that came in the Mahākhandhaka—
‘‘Kuṭṭhiṃ gaṇḍiṃ kilāsiñca, sosiñca apamārikaṃ;
“One with leprosy, boils, white leprosy, consumption and epilepsy;
Likewise, a royal servant, a thief, one with inscriptions, a destroyer of work.
‘‘Kasāhataṃ narañceva, purisaṃ lakkhaṇāhataṃ;
“And a person marked with lashes, a person marked with brands;
One in debt and a slave, incurs a dukkata offense if he ordains them.”
Yathāvuttā terasa.
The thirteen are as stated.
Evamete pañcacattālīsa vuttā. Tesu kasāhatalakkhaṇāhatalikhitakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ubhayattha āgatattā aggahitaggahaṇena dvācattālīseva daṭṭhabbā.
Thus these forty-five were stated. Among these, because the three, one marked with lashes, one marked with brands, and one with inscriptions, came in both places, they should be seen as forty-two by non-inclusion of what has already been included.
tesaṃ. Osāro appattoti upasampadāananurūpāti attho.Kato ceti akattabbabhāvamasallakkhantehi bhikkhūhi yadi upasampadāsaṅkhāto osāro kato bhaveyya.Rūhatīti sijjhati, te puggalā upasampannāyevāti adhippāyo. Ācariyādayo pana āpattiṃ āpajjanti. Yathāhacampeyyakkhandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ– ‘‘hatthacchinnādayo pana dvattiṃsa suosāritā, upasampāditā upasampannāva honti, na te labbhā kiñci vattuṃ. Ācariyupajjhāyā, pana kārakasaṅgho ca sātisārā, na koci āpattito muccatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 396).
tesaṃ. Osāro appattoti means not suitable for full ordination. Kato ceti means if the expulsion referring to full ordination would be done by bhikkhus not considering their unsuitability. Rūhatīti means it is successful, those individuals are certainly fully ordained, is the meaning. However, the teachers etc. incur an offense. As it was said in the Campeyyakkhandhaka commentary— "However, the thirty-two beginning with one with a cut-off hand, if they are properly expelled, fully ordained, they are certainly fully ordained; it is not possible to say anything to them. However, the teachers and preceptors and the group who perform the act are blameworthy; no one is freed from the offense" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 396).
2544-5.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve tayo ekānussāvane kātuṃ, tañca kho ekena upajjhāyenā’’ti (mahāva. 123) vacanato sace tayo ācariyā ekasīmāyaṃ nisinnā ekassa upajjhāyassa nāmaṃ gahetvā tiṇṇaṃ upasampadāpekkhānaṃ visuṃ visuṃyeva kammavācaṃ ekakkhaṇe vatvā tayo upasampādenti, vaṭṭatīti dassetumāha‘‘ekūpajjhāyako hotī’’tiādi.
2544-5. Because of the statement, "I allow, bhikkhus, two or three to be done with one recitation, but that is with one preceptor" (mahāva. 123), to show that if three teachers are sitting within one boundary, reciting the kammavāca separately for the three seeking full ordination, taking the name of one preceptor, ordaining the three at one moment, it is allowable, he says, "ekūpajjhāyako hotī" etc.
‘‘Tayo’’ti idaṃaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ‘‘sambahulānaṃ therāna’’nti (mahāva. 123) āgatattā vuttaṃ.Ekatoti ekakkhaṇe.Anusāvananti kammavācaṃ.Osāretvāti vatvā.Kammanti upasampadākammaṃ.Na ca kuppatīti na vipajjati.Kappatīti avipajjanato evaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
"Tayo"ti this is said because in the Aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ it came as "to many theras" (mahāva. 123). Ekatoti means at one moment. Anusāvananti means the kammavāca. Osāretvāti means having recited. Kammanti means the act of full ordination. Na ca kuppatīti means it does not fail. Kappatīti means because it does not fail, it is allowable to do it this way.
2546-7.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve tayo ekānussāvane kātu’’nti (mahāva. 123) vacanato sace eko ācariyo ‘‘buddharakkhito ca dhammarakkhito ca saṅgharakkhito ca āyasmato sāriputtassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti upasampadāpekkhānaṃ paccekaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā kammavācaṃ vatvā dve tayopi upasampādeti, vaṭṭatīti dassetumāha‘‘ekūpajjhāyako hotī’’tiādi.
2546-7. Because of the statement, "I allow, bhikkhus, two or three to be done with one recitation" (mahāva. 123), to show that if one teacher ordains two or three, reciting the kammavāca, taking the name of each of those seeking full ordination, saying "Buddharakkhita and Dhammarakkhita and Saṅgharakkhita are seeking full ordination from venerable Sāriputta", it is allowable, he says, "ekūpajjhāyako hotī" etc.
‘‘upasampadāpekkhā’’ti upasampajjanakā vuccanti.Tesaṃ nāmanti tesaṃ upasampajjantānañceva upajjhāyānañca nāmaṃ. Anupubbena sāvetvāti yojanā, ‘‘buddharakkhito’’tiādinā yathāvuttanayena kammavācāyaṃ sakaṭṭhāne vatvā sāvetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tenāti ekena ācariyena.Ekatoti dve tayo jane ekato katvā.Anusāvetvāti kammavācaṃ vatvā.Kataṃupasampadākammaṃ.
"upasampadāpekkhā"ti means those who are called seekers of full ordination. Tesaṃ nāmanti means the names of those being fully ordained as well as the preceptors. The connection is, having made it known in sequence, it is said that having made it known in its proper place in the kammavāca in the manner previously stated beginning with "Buddharakkhito." Tenāti means by one teacher. Ekatoti means having made two or three people as one. Anusāvetvāti means having recited the kammavāca. Kataṃ means the act of full ordination.
2548.Aññamaññānusāvetvāti aññamaññassa nāmaṃ anusāvetvā, gahetvāti attho, aññamaññassa nāmaṃ gahetvā kammavācaṃ vatvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
2548. Aññamaññānusāvetvāti means having recited the name of each other, having taken it, is the meaning, it is said that having taken the name of each other, having recited the kammavāca.
2549.Taṃ vidhiṃ dassetumāha‘‘sumano’’tiādi.Sumanoti ācariyo.Tissatherassaupajjhāyassa.Sissakaṃsaddhivihārikaṃ.Anusāvetīti kammavācaṃ sāveti.Tissoti paṭhamaṃ upajjhāyabhūtassa gahaṇaṃ.Sumanatherassāti paṭhamaṃ ācariyattheramāha. Ime dve ekasīmāyaṃ nisīditvā ekakkhaṇe aññamaññassa saddhivihārikānaṃ kammavācaṃ vadantā attano attano saddhivihārikaṃ paṭicca upajjhāyāpi honti, antevāsike paṭicca ācariyāpi honti, aññamaññassa gaṇapūrakā ca hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha –
2549. To show that method, he says, "sumano" etc. Sumanoti means the teacher. Tissatherassa means of the preceptor Tissa. Sissakaṃ means his pupil. Anusāvetīti means recites the kammavāca. Tissoti means the first taking of the one who is the preceptor. Sumanatherassāti means the first saying of the teacher Sumana. It is said that these two, sitting in one boundary, reciting the kammavāca of each other's pupils at one moment, are preceptors with respect to their own pupils, are teachers with respect to their novices, and are the counters of the quorum for each other. As he said—
‘‘Sace pana nānācariyā nānāupajjhāyā honti, tissatthero sumanattherassa saddhivihārikaṃ, sumanatthero tissattherassa saddhivihārikaṃ anussāveti, aññamaññañca gaṇapūrakā honti, vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 123).
"If there are different teachers and different preceptors, thera Tissa recites the kammavāca for thera Sumana's pupil, and thera Sumana recites the kammavāca for thera Tissa's pupil, and they are the counters of the quorum for each other, it is allowable" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 123).
2550.Idhāti imasmiṃ upasampadādhikāre.Paṭikkhittāti ‘‘na tveva nānupajjhāyenā’’ti (mahāva. 123) paṭisiddhā. Lokiyehi ādiccaputto manūti yo paṭhamakappiko manussānaṃ ādirājā vuccati, tassa vaṃse jātattā ādicco bandhu etassātiādiccabandhu,bhagavā, tena.
2550. Idhāti means in this chapter on full ordination. Paṭikkhittāti means prohibited by "but certainly not without a preceptor" (mahāva. 123). Because he was born in the lineage of Ādiccabandhu, who is called the first king of men of the first age, Ādicca is a relative of his, therefore, ādiccabandhu, the Blessed One, prohibited it.
Mahākhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Mahākhandhaka is completed.
Uposathakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Uposathakkhandhaka
2551-2.Yā ekādasahi sīmāvipattīhi vajjitā tisampattisaṃyutā nimittena nimittaṃ ghaṭetvā sammatā, sā ayaṃ baddhasīmā nāma siyāti yojanā. Tattha atikhuddakā, atimahatī, khaṇḍanimittā, chāyānimittā, animittā, bahisīme ṭhitasammatā, nadiyā sammatā, samudde sammatā, jātassare sammatā, sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā, sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatāti ‘‘imehi ekādasahi ākārehi sīmato kammāni vipajjantī’’ti (pari. 486) vacanato imā ekādasavipattisīmāyonāma, vipannasīmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
2551-2. The meaning is: that which is free from the eleven boundary defects, endowed with the three perfections, properly established by connecting landmark with landmark, that is called a ‘fixed boundary’ (baddha-sīmā). Herein, atikhuddakā (too small), atimahatī (too large), khaṇḍanimittā (with broken landmarks), chāyānimittā (with shadow landmarks), animittā (without landmarks), bahisīme ṭhitasammatā (established while standing outside the boundary), nadiyā sammatā (established in a river), samudde sammatā (established in the sea), jātassare sammatā (established in a natural pond), sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā (established by overlapping one boundary with another), sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatā (established by encroaching one boundary upon another)—“through these eleven ways, actions concerning the boundary fail” (pari. 486). Therefore, these are called the eleven defective boundaries (vipattisīmāyo); it is said to be a failed boundary.
atikhuddakānāma yattha ekavīsati bhikkhū nisīdituṃ na sakkonti.Atimahatīnāma yā antamaso kesaggamattenāpi tiyojanaṃ atikkamitvā sammatā.Khaṇḍanimittānāma aghaṭitanimittā vuccati. Puratthimāya disāya nimittaṃ kittetvā anukkameneva dakkhiṇāya, pacchimāya, uttarāya disāya kittetvā puna puratthimāya disāya pubbakittitaṃ paṭikittetvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, evaṃ akhaṇḍanimittā hoti. Sace pana anukkamena āharitvā uttarāya disāya nimittaṃ kittetvā tattheva ṭhapeti, khaṇḍanimittā nāma hoti. Aparāpikhaṇḍanimittānāma yā animittupagaṃ tacasārarukkhaṃ vā khāṇukaṃ vā paṃsupuñjavālikāpuñjānaṃ vā aññataraṃ antarā ekaṃ nimittaṃ katvā sammatā.Chāyānimittānāma pabbatacchāyādīnaṃ yaṃ kiñci chāyaṃ nimittaṃ katvā sammatā.Animittānāma sabbena sabbaṃ nimittāni akittetvā sammatā.Bahisīme ṭhitasammatānāma nimittāni kittetvā nimittānaṃ bahi ṭhitena sammatā.
Atikhuddakā means where twenty-one bhikkhus cannot sit. Atimahatī means that which, even by the tip of a hair, exceeds three yojanas when established. Khaṇḍanimittā means with unconnected landmarks. Having marked a landmark in the eastern direction, it is proper to mark successively in the southern, western, and northern directions, and then to return to the eastern direction and re-establish the previously marked landmark; thus, it becomes an unbroken landmark. But if, having brought them successively, one marks a landmark in the northern direction and leaves it there, it is called a broken landmark. Another khaṇḍanimittā means that which is established by making one landmark in between, such as a tree with no obvious marks, a stump, or a pile of earth or sand. Chāyānimittā means that which is established by making any shadow, such as the shadow of a mountain, into a landmark. Animittā means that which is established without marking any landmarks at all. Bahisīme ṭhitasammatā means that which is established by standing outside the landmarks after marking the landmarks.
Nadiyā samudde jātassare sammatānāma etesu nadiādīsu sammatā. Sā hi evaṃ sammatāpi ‘‘sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmā, sabbo samuddo asīmo, sabbo jātassaro asīmo’’ti (mahāva. 148) vacanato asammatāva hoti.Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatānāma attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā. Sace hi porāṇakassa vihārassa puratthimāya disāya ambo ceva jambū cāti dve rukkhā aññamaññaṃ saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā honti, tesu ambassa pacchimadisābhāge jambū, vihārasīmā ca jambuṃ anto katvā ambaṃ kittetvā baddhā hoti, atha pacchā tassa vihārassa puratthimāya disāya vihāre kate sīmaṃ bandhantā bhikkhū taṃ ambaṃ anto katvā jambuṃ kittetvā bandhanti, sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhinnā hoti.Sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatānāma attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatā. Sace hi paresaṃ baddhasīmaṃ sakalaṃ vā tassā padesaṃ vā anto katvā attano sīmaṃ sammannati, sīmāya sīmā ajjhottharitā nāma hotīti. Iti imāhi ekādasahi vipattisīmāhi vajjitāti attho.
Nadiyā samudde jātassare sammatā means that which is established in these rivers, etc. For even if it is established in this way, it is still not valid, because it is said: “All rivers, monks, are unbounded; all seas are unbounded; all natural ponds are unbounded” (mahāva. 148). Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā means that which is established by overlapping one’s own boundary with someone else’s boundary. If, in the eastern direction of an ancient monastery, there are two trees, a mango and a jambū, whose branches are intertwined, and the jambū is to the west of the mango, and the monastery boundary is fixed by including the jambū but marking the mango; and then later, when a monastery is built in the eastern direction of that monastery, the bhikkhus, when establishing the boundary, include the mango but mark the jambū, it is overlapping one boundary with another. Sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatā means that which is established by encroaching one’s own boundary upon someone else’s boundary. If one establishes one’s own boundary by including either the entirety of someone else’s established boundary or a part of it, it is said to be encroaching one boundary upon another. Thus, the meaning is: free from these eleven defective boundaries.
Tisampattisaṃyutāti nimittasampatti, parisāsampatti, kammavācāsampattīti imāhi tīhi sampattīhi samannāgatā. Tatthanimittasampattiyuttānāma ‘‘pabbatanimittaṃ, pāsāṇanimittaṃ, vananimittaṃ, rukkhanimittaṃ, magganimittaṃ, vammikanimittaṃ, nadinimittaṃ, udakanimitta’’nti (mahāva. 138) evaṃ vuttesu aṭṭhasu nimittesu tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge yathāladdhāni nimittupagāni nimittāni ‘‘puratthimāya disāya kiṃ nimittaṃ? Pabbato, bhante, eso pabbato nimitta’’ntiādinā nayena sammā kittetvā sammatā.
Tisampattisaṃyutā means endowed with the three perfections: perfection of landmarks, perfection of the assembly, and perfection of the act of declaration. Herein, nimittasampattiyuttā (endowed with perfection of landmarks) means that which is properly established by marking the landmarks in each direction with landmarks that accord with what is found in that area, from among the eight landmarks mentioned: “mountain landmark, rock landmark, forest landmark, tree landmark, path landmark, anthill landmark, river landmark, water landmark” (mahāva. 138), in the manner of: “What is the landmark in the eastern direction? A mountain, venerable sir; this mountain is the landmark,” etc.
Parisāsampattiyuttānāma sabbantimena paricchedena catūhi bhikkhūhi sannipatitvā yāvatikā tasmiṃ gāmakhette baddhasīmaṃ vā nadisamuddajātassare vā anokkamitvā ṭhitā bhikkhū, te sabbe hatthapāse vā katvā, chandaṃ vā āharitvā sammatā.
Parisāsampattiyuttā (endowed with perfection of the assembly) means that which is established by convening the assembly with four bhikkhus in the final count, and with all the bhikkhus standing within the boundary area, or without moving beyond the river, sea, or natural pond, in that village area, either having them within arm’s reach or having brought their consent.
Kammavācāsampattiyuttānāma ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, yāvatā samantā nimittā kittitā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 139) nayena vuttāya parisuddhāya ñattidutiyakammavācāya sammatā. Evaṃ ekādasa vipattisīmāyo atikkamitvā tividhasampattiyuttā nimittena nimittaṃ ghaṭetvā sammatā sīmā baddhasīmāti veditabbā.
Kammavācāsampattiyuttā (endowed with perfection of the act of declaration) means that which is established with a pure ñattidutiyakammavācā (motion with one accompanying announcement) as stated in the manner of “May the Sangha hear me, venerable sirs; to the extent that landmarks have been marked all around,” etc. (mahāva. 139). Thus, a boundary that has overcome the eleven defective boundaries, is endowed with the threefold perfection, and is properly established by connecting landmark with landmark should be understood as a fixed boundary.
2553-4.Khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsaavippavāsā ādayo ādibhūtā, ādimhi vā yāsaṃ sīmānaṃ tākhaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsāvippavāsādī,tāsaṃ, tāhi vā pabhedo khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsādibhedo, tatokhaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsādibhedato,khaṇḍasīmā, samānasaṃvāsasīmā, avippavāsasīmāti imāsaṃ sīmānaṃ etāhi vā karaṇabhūtāhi, hetubhūtāhi vā jātena vibhāgenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Samānasaṃvāsāvippavāsānamantare khaṇḍā paricchinnā tāhi asaṅkarā sīmākhaṇḍasīmānāma. Samānasaṃvāsehi bhikkhūhi ekato uposathādiko saṃvāso ettha karīyatītisamānasaṃvāsānāma.Avippavāsāyalakkhaṇaṃ ‘‘bandhitvā’’tiādinā vakkhati.Iti baddhā tidhā vuttāti evaṃ baddhasīmā tippabhedā vuttā.
2553-4. Khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsaavippavāsā ādayo ādibhūtā, ādimhi vā yāsaṃ sīmānaṃ tā khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsāvippavāsādī, tāsaṃ, tāhi vā pabhedo khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsādibhedo, tato khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsādibhedato, the meaning is: because of the distinctions that arise due to the distinctions consisting of boundary with separate territory, boundary with shared residence, and boundary for non-separation—or, with these as instrumental causes, or root causes—the boundaries being boundary with separate territory (khaṇḍasīmā), boundary with shared residence (samānasaṃvāsasīmā), and boundary for non-separation (avippavāsasīmā). The boundary that is separate, distinct from those sharing residence and not separating, is called khaṇḍasīmā. Because the bhikkhus in shared residence carry out the uposatha and other communal acts together in this place, it is called samānasaṃvāsā. The characteristic of Avippavāsāya (for non-separation) will be stated beginning with “having fixed.” Iti baddhā tidhā vuttā (thus, the fixed [boundary] is said to be threefold): Thus, the fixed boundary is said to have three distinctions.
Udakukkhepāti hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ. Sattannaṃ abbhantarānaṃ samāhārāsattabbhantarā,tatopi ca. Abaddhāpi tividhāti sambandho.Tatthāti tāsu tīsu abaddhasīmāsu.Gāmaparicchedoti sabbadisāsu sīmaṃ paricchinditvā ‘‘imassa padesassa ettako karo’’ti evaṃ karena niyamito gāmappadeso. Yathāha – ‘‘yattake padese tassa gāmassa bhojakā baliṃ haranti, so padeso appo vā hotu mahanto vā, ‘gāmasīmā’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Yampi ekasmiṃyeva gāmakkhette ekaṃ padesaṃ ‘ayaṃ visuṃ gāmo hotū’ti paricchinditvā rājā kassaci deti, sopi visuṃgāmasīmā hotiyevā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 147).
Udakukkhepā is an ablative used in the sense of cause. Sattannaṃ abbhantarānaṃ samāhārā sattabbhantarā, (a collection of seven inner [lengths] is seven inner [lengths]); the connection is: even an unfixed [boundary] is threefold. Tatthā (therein) means among those three unfixed boundaries. Gāmaparicchedo means a village area delimited in all directions by circumscribing the boundary and stipulated by taxes in the manner of: “So much is the tax for this area.” As it was said: “In whatever area the householders of that village pay taxes, whether that area is small or large, it goes by the name of ‘village boundary.’ Also, if in a single village area, the king divides off one area, saying, ‘Let this be a separate village,’ that too is indeed a separate village boundary” (mahāva. aṭṭha. 147).
pāḷiyaṃ‘‘yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati. Yā tassa vā gāmassa gāmasīmā, nigamassa vā nigamasīmā, ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekuposathā’’ti (mahāva. 147). Imissā visuṃyeva lakkhaṇassa vuttattā gāmasīmālakkhaṇeneva upalakkhitā.
pāḷiyaṃ (in the Pali): “dwelling in dependence on whatever village or town; whatever is the village boundary of that village, or the town boundary of that town, that is the shared residence for one uposatha” (mahāva. 147). Because its specific characteristic has been stated separately, it is defined by the characteristic of the village boundary.
2555.‘‘Jātassare’’tiādīsu jātassarādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – yo pana kenaci khaṇitvā akato sayaṃjāto sobbho samantato āgatena udakena pūrito tiṭṭhati, yattha nadiyaṃ vakkhamānappakāre vassakāle udakaṃ santiṭṭhati, ayaṃjātassaronāma. Yopi nadiṃ vā samuddaṃ vā bhinditvā nikkhantaudakena khaṇito sobbho etaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayampijātassaroyeva.Samuddopākaṭoyeva.
2555. The characteristics of jātassare (natural pond), etc., in ‘‘Jātassare’’tiādīsu should be understood thus: that which is not made by anyone digging, but arises naturally, is filled with water coming from all around, where water remains during the rainy season in the manner to be stated regarding rivers—this is called a jātassaro (natural pond). Even a hollow that is dug by water breaking away from a river or sea and flowing out, if it acquires this characteristic, this too is a jātassaro. Samuddo (the sea) is well-known.
sikkhākaraṇīyeāgatalakkhaṇena timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetvā antaravāsakaṃ anukkhipitvā uttarantiyā bhikkhuniyā ekadvaṅgulamattampi antaravāsako temiyati, ayaṃ samuddaṃ vā pavisatu taḷākaṃ vā, pabhavato paṭṭhāyanadīnāma.
According to the characteristic that comes in the training rule (sikkhākaraṇīye), if a bhikkhuni, having covered the three maṇḍalas and pulled up her lower robe, even to the extent of one or two finger-widths, wets her lower robe, whether she enters the sea or a pond, from its source onward, it is called a nadī (river).
Samantatoti samantā.Majjhimassāti thāmamajjhimassa purisassa.Udakukkhepoti vakkhamānena nayena thāmappamāṇena khittassa udakassa vā vālukāya vā patitaṭṭhānena paricchinno antopadeso. Yathā akkhadhuttā dāruguḷaṃ khipanti, evaṃ udakaṃ vā vālukaṃ vā hatthena gahetvā thāmamajjhimena purisena sabbathāmena khipitabbaṃ, tattha yattha evaṃ khittaṃ udakaṃ vā vālukā vā patati, ayaṃudakukkheponāmāti.Udakukkhepasaññitoti ‘‘udakukkhepo’’ti sallakkhito.
Samantato means from all around. Majjhimassā means of a man of moderate strength. Udakukkhepo means the inner area delimited by the place where the water or sand thrown with measured force in the manner to be stated falls. Just as dice players throw wooden balls, so too, having taken water or sand in hand, it should be thrown with full force by a man of moderate strength; there, wherever the water or sand thus thrown falls, this is called udakukkhepo. Udakukkhepasaññito means reckoned as “udakukkhepo.”
2556.Agāmake araññeti viñjhāṭavisadise gāmarahite mahāaraññe.Samantato sattevabbhantarāti attano ṭhitaṭṭhānato parikkhipitvā satteva abbhantarā yassā sīmāya paricchedo, ayaṃ sattabbhantaranāmikā sīmā nāma.
2556. Agāmake araññe means in a large forest without a village, like the Viñjhāṭavī forest. Samantato sattevabbhantarā means a boundary whose limit is seven inner [lengths] encircling the place where one is standing; this boundary is called sattabbhantarā (seven inner [lengths]).
2557.Guḷukkhepanayenāti akkhadhuttakānaṃ dāruguḷukkhipanākārena.Udakukkhepakāti udakukkhepasadisavasena.
2557. Guḷukkhepanayenā means in the manner of dice players throwing wooden balls. Udakukkhepakā means in a way similar to throwing water.
2558.Imāsaṃ dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ vaḍḍhanakkamaṃ dassetumāha‘‘abbhantarūdakukkhepā, ṭhitokāsā paraṃ siyu’’nti.Ṭhitokāsā paranti parisāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paraṃ, parisapariyantato paṭṭhāya sattabbhantarā ca minitabbā, udakukkhepo ca kātabboti attho.
2558. To show the order of increase of these two boundaries, he says, ‘‘abbhantarūdakukkhepā, ṭhitokāsā paraṃ siyu’’. Ṭhitokāsā para means beyond the place where the assembly is standing; the meaning is that the seven inner [lengths] and the throwing of water should be done starting from the edge of the assembly.
2559-60.Antoparicchedeti udakukkhepena vā sattabbhantarehi vā paricchinnokāsassa anto. Hatthapāsaṃ vihāya ṭhito vā paraṃ tattakaṃ paricchedaṃ anatikkamma ṭhito vāti yojanā, sīmantarikatthāya ṭhapetabbaṃ ekaṃ udakukkhepaṃ vā sattabbhantaraṃ eva vā anatikkamma ṭhitoti attho.
2559-60. Antoparicchede means inside the area delimited by the throwing of water or by the seven inner [lengths]. The meaning is: either standing outside arm’s reach or standing without exceeding that much delimitation further on, one should establish a single throwing of water or seven inner [lengths for the sake of interposition of the boundary; the meaning is: one stands without exceeding that.
Kammaṃ vikopetīti anto ṭhito kammassa vaggabhāvakaraṇato, bahi tattakaṃ padesaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhito aññassa saṅghassa gaṇapūraṇabhāvaṃ gacchanto sīmāya saṅkarabhāvakaraṇena kammaṃ vikopeti. Iti yasmā aṭṭhakathānayo,tasmā soantosīmāya hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhito hatthapāse vā kātabbo, sīmantarikatthāya paricchinnokāsatobahi vākātabbo. Tattakaṃ paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhito yathāṭhitova sace aññassa kammassa gaṇapūrako na hoti, kammaṃ na kopetīti gahetabbaṃ.
Kammaṃ vikopetī means, because one standing inside is a factor in the disruption of the action, or one standing outside without exceeding that area and joining another Sangha as one who completes the quorum is a factor in the confusion of the boundary, one disrupts the action. Thus, because that is the way of the Commentary, tasmā so (therefore, he) should either be within arm’s reach, having relinquished arm’s reach inside the boundary, or bahi vā (outside) the area delimited for the sake of interposition of the boundary. If one standing without exceeding that much delimitation is not a quorum-completer for another action, it should be understood that he does not disrupt the action.
2561-2.Saṇṭhānanti tikoṭisaṇṭhānaṃ.Nimittanti pabbatādinimittaṃ.Disakittananti ‘‘puratthimāya disāya kiṃ nimitta’’ntiādinā disākittanaṃ.Pamāṇanti tiyojanaparamaṃ pamāṇaṃ.Sodhetvāti yasmiṃ gāmakkhette sīmaṃ bandhati, tattha vasante upasampannabhikkhū baddhasīmavihāre vasante sīmāya bahi gantuṃ adatvā, abaddhasīmavihāre vasante hatthapāsaṃ upanetabbe hatthapāsaṃ netvā avasese bahisīmāya katvā sabbamaggesu ārakkhaṃ vidahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Sīmanti khaṇḍasīmaṃ.
2561-2. Saṇṭhāna means a three-cornered shape. Nimitta means a landmark such as a mountain. Disakittana means stating the direction in the manner of “What is the landmark in the eastern direction?” etc. Pamāṇa means a maximum extent of three yojanas. Sodhetvā means that in whatever village area one fixes the boundary, having kept watch in all directions—having not given those ordained bhikkhus dwelling in the fixed-boundary monastery permission to go outside the boundary, having brought those dwelling in the unfixed-boundary monastery within arm’s reach, or having brought them within arm’s reach—the meaning is that one makes all the rest outside the boundary. Sīma means a boundary with separate territory (khaṇḍasīma).
‘‘tikoṇa’’ntiādi.Paṇavūpamanti paṇavasaṇṭhānaṃ majjhe saṃkhittaṃ ubhayakoṭiyā vitthataṃ. ‘‘Vitānākāraṃ dhanukākāra’’ntiākāra-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo.Dhanukākāranti āropitadhanusaṇṭhānaṃ, ‘‘mudiṅgūpamaṃ sakaṭūpama’’ntiupamā-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo.Mudiṅgūpamanti majjhe vitthataṃ ubhayakoṭiyā tanukaṃ turiyavisesaṃ mudiṅganti vadanti, tādisanti attho. Sīmaṃ bandheyyāti yojanā.
‘‘tikoṇa’’ntiādi. Paṇavūpama means shaped like a paṇava drum, narrow in the middle and wide at both ends. The word ākāra (shape) in “vitānākāraṃ dhanukākāra” (shaped like a canopy, shaped like a bow) should be connected to each individually. Dhanukākāra means shaped like a strung bow. The word upamā (like) in “mudiṅgūpamaṃ sakaṭūpama” (like a mudiṅga drum, like a cart) should be connected to each individually. Mudiṅgūpama means like a particular musical instrument called a mudiṅga, which is wide in the middle and narrow at both ends; that is the meaning. The meaning is: one should fix the boundary.
2563.Pabbatādinimittupaganimittāni dassetumāha‘‘pabbata’’ntiādi. Iti aṭṭha nimittāni dīpayeti yojanā. Tatrevaṃ saṅkhepato nimittupagatā veditabbā – suddhapaṃsusuddhapāsāṇaubhayamissakavasena (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; mahāva. aṭṭha. 138) tividhopi hipabbatohatthippamāṇato paṭṭhāya uddhaṃ nimittupago, tato omakataro na vaṭṭati. Antosārehi vā antosāramissakehi vā rukkhehi catupañcarukkhamattampivanaṃnimittupagaṃ, tato ūnataraṃ na vaṭṭati.Pāsāṇanimitteayaguḷampi pāsāṇasaṅkhyameva gacchati, tasmā yo koci pāsāṇo ukkaṃsena hatthippamāṇato omakataraṃ ādiṃ katvā heṭṭhimaparicchedena dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍaparimāṇo nimittupago, na tato khuddakataro. Piṭṭhipāsāṇo pana atimahantopi vaṭṭati.Rukkhojīvantoyeva antosāro bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhito antamaso ubbedhato aṭṭhaṅgulo pariṇāhato sūcidaṇḍappamāṇopi nimittupago, na tato oraṃ vaṭṭati.Maggojaṅghamaggo vā hotu sakaṭamaggo vā, yo vinivijjhitvā dve tīṇi gāmakkhettāni gacchati, tādiso jaṅghasakaṭasatthehi vaḷañjiyamānoyeva nimittupago, avaḷañjo na vaṭṭati. Heṭṭhimaparicchedena taṃdivasaṃ jāto aṭṭhaṅgulubbedho govisāṇamattopivammikonimittupago, tato oraṃ na vaṭṭati.Udakaṃyaṃ asandamānaṃ āvāṭapokkharaṇitaḷākajātassaraloṇisamuddādīsu ṭhitaṃ, taṃ ādiṃ katvā antamaso taṅkhaṇaṃyeva pathaviyaṃ khate āvāṭe ghaṭehi āharitvā pūritampi yāva kammavācāpariyosānā saṇṭhahanakaṃ nimittupagaṃ, itaraṃ sandamānakaṃ, vuttaparicchedakālaṃ atiṭṭhantaṃ, bhājanagataṃ vā na vaṭṭati. Yā abaddhasīmālakkhaṇenadīvuttā, sā nimittupagā, aññā na vaṭṭatīti.
2563. To show the landmarks that accord with landmarks such as mountains, he says, ‘‘pabbata’’ntiādi. Thus, he reveals eight landmarks. Herein, those which accord with landmarks should be known in brief thus: the pabbato (mountain), even though threefold by way of pure earth, pure rock, and a mixture of both (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; mahāva. aṭṭha. 138), accords with landmarks if it is from the size of an elephant upwards; anything less than that is not suitable. The vanaṃ (forest), with trees that have heartwood or a mixture of heartwood, even if only four or five trees, accords with landmarks; anything less than that is not suitable. In pāsāṇanimitte (rock landmark), even an iron ball goes by the name of rock; therefore, whatever rock, beginning with the highest limit of the size of an elephant downwards, with a lower limit of the quantity of a lump of thirty-two palas, accords with landmarks; nothing smaller than that. But a flat rock (piṭṭhipāsāṇo) is suitable even if it is very large. The rukkho (tree), if it is living, has heartwood, is established in the ground, and is at least eight finger-widths in height and the size of a needle-stick in circumference, accords with landmarks; nothing less than that is suitable. The maggo (path), whether it is a walking path or a cart path, if it pierces through and goes through two or three village areas, such a path that is constantly frequented by walking persons, carts, and caravans accords with landmarks; one that is not frequented is not suitable. With a lower limit of a height of eight finger-widths formed that day and the size of an ox’s horn, the vammiko (anthill) accords with landmarks; anything less than that is not suitable. The udakaṃ (water) that is unmoving, standing in hollows, ponds, lakes, natural ponds, salt water, seas, etc., beginning with that, even if it is filled with water brought in pots into a hollow dug in the earth at that very moment, is suitable as a landmark as long as it remains until the end of the kammavācā; other moving water, that does not remain for the period defined above, or that is in a vessel, is not suitable. The nadī (river) that was mentioned in the definition of an unfixed boundary is suitable as a landmark; others are not suitable.
2564.Tesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Tīṇīti niddhāritabbadassanaṃ, iminā ekaṃ vā dve vā nimittāni na vaṭṭantīti dasseti. Yathāha – ‘‘sā evaṃ sammannitvā bajjhamānā ekena, dvīhi vā nimittehi abaddhā hotī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138).Satenāpīti etthapi-saddo sambhāvanāyaṃ daṭṭhabbo, tena vīsatiyā, tiṃsāya vā nimittehi vattabbameva natthīti dīpeti.
2564. Tesūti is a locative case used to specify from a group. Tīṇīti shows what is being specified; this indicates that one or two signs are not sufficient. As it was said: "That boundary, being marked, is not bound by one or two signs" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138). Satenāpīti here, the word pi should be seen in the sense of possibility, thereby implying that there is no need to even mention twenty or thirty signs.
2565.Tiyojanaṃ paraṃ ukkaṭṭho paricchedo etissātitiyojanaparā. ‘‘Vīsatī’’tiādīnaṃ saṅkhyāne, saṅkhyeyye ca vattanato idha saṅkhyāne vattamānaṃvīsati-saddaṃ gahetvāekavīsati bhikkhūnanti bhinnādhikaraṇaniddeso katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekavīsati’’nti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena niggahītalopo, vīsativaggakaraṇīyaparamattā saṅghakammassa kammārahena saddhiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ekavīsatiṃ gaṇhantīti attho, idañca nisinnānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhimantato hi yattha ekavīsati bhikkhū nisīdituṃ sakkonti, tattake padese sīmaṃ bandhituṃ vaṭṭatīti.
2565. Tiyojanaparā means its maximum limit is three yojanas. Because the word vīsati (twenty) etc. can refer to both the number and what is numbered, here, taking vīsati as the number, the separate subject specification ekavīsati bhikkhūnaṃ (twenty-one monks) has been made. It should be seen that although "ekavīsati" should be said, the elision of the nasal consonant is due to the metrical requirements of the verse; the meaning is that, because twenty is the maximum number required for a Sangha act, they count twenty-one monks together with one who is fit for the act; and this is said in terms of those who are seated. For, it is proper to establish a boundary in a place large enough for twenty-one monks to sit from the bottom up.
2566.Yā ukkaṭṭhāyapi yā ca heṭṭhimāyapi kesaggamattatopi adhikā vā ūnā vā,etā dvepisīmāyo ‘‘asīmā’’ti ādiccabandhunā vuttāti yojanā.
2566. The meaning is that both the boundary that exceeds even the highest limit and the one that is less than even the lowest limit, even by the amount of a hair tip, are said to be "no boundary" by the Kinsman of the Sun.
2567.Samantato sabbameva nimittaṃ kittetvāti pubbadisānudisādīsu parito sabbadisāsu yathāladdhaṃ nimittopagaṃ sabbanimittaṃ ‘‘vinayadharena pucchitabbaṃ ‘puratthimāya disāya kiṃ nimitta’nti? ‘Pabbato, bhante’ti. Puna vinayadharena ‘eso pabbato nimitta’’ntiādinā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena nimittena nimittaṃ ghaṭetvā kittetvā. Ñatti dutiyā yassāti viggaho, ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, yāvatā samantā nimittā kittitā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 139)padabhājanevuttena ñattidutiyena kammenāti attho.Arahatipahoti vinayadharoti adhippāyo.
2567. Samantato sabbameva nimittaṃ kittetvā means that having enumerated all the signs appropriately in all directions around, such as the eastern and intermediate directions, connecting each sign with the sign encountered according to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "The Vinaya-holder should ask, 'What is the sign in the eastern direction?' 'A mountain, venerable sir.' Then the Vinaya-holder should connect sign with sign, saying, 'This mountain is a sign'" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138). The meaning is by the second declaration (dutiyā ñatti) mentioned in the Padabhājana, of which the dissolution is "ñatti dutiyā yassa," such as "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me, to the extent that all the signs around have been enumerated" (mahāva. 139). Arahati means the Vinaya-holder is capable.
2568.Bandhitvāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇanayena samānasaṃvāsasīmaṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhitvā.Anantaranti kiccantarena byavahitaṃ akatvā, kālakkhepaṃ akatvāti vuttaṃ hoti, sīmaṃ samūhanitukāmānaṃ paccattikānaṃ okāsaṃ adatvāti adhippāyo.Pacchāti samānasaṃvāsasammutito pacchā. Cīvarāvippavāsakaṃ sammannitvāna yā baddhā, sā ‘‘avippavāsā’’ti vuccatīti yojanā.
2568. Bandhitvā means having first established a boundary with equal dwelling in accordance with the method of the characteristics stated earlier. Anantara means without interruption by other business, without delay; it means not giving an opportunity to individual monks who wish to disrupt the boundary. Pacchā means after the agreement for equal dwelling. The meaning is that a boundary established after agreeing to non-separation from the robe is called "non-separation."
cīvarāvippavāsakaṃ sammannitvāna yā baddhāti ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, yā sā saṅghena sīmā sammatā samānasaṃvāsā ekuposathā…pe… ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti (mahāva. 144) vuttanayena cīvarena avippavāsaṃ sammannitvā yā baddhā.Sā avippavāsāti vuccatīti tattha vasantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cīvarena vippavāsanimittāpattiyā abhāvato tathā vuccati, ‘‘avippavāsasīmā’’ti vuccatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
cīvarāvippavāsakaṃ sammannitvāna yā baddhā means the boundary that is established after agreeing to non-separation from the robe according to the method stated: "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me, the boundary that has been agreed upon by the Sangha for equal dwelling, for a single Uposatha…pe…excepting the village and the vicinity of the village, if it is agreeable to the Sangha, therefore it is silent; thus I hold it" (mahāva. 144). Sā avippavāsāti vuccatīti it is so called because there is no offense of separation from the robe for the monks residing there; it means it is called "a non-separation boundary."
2569.‘‘Yā kāci nadilakkhaṇappattā nadī nimittāni kittetvā ‘etaṃ baddhasīmaṃ karomā’ti katāpi asīmāva hotī’’tiādikaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 147)aṭṭhakathānayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘nadī…pe… na vottharatī’’ti, na pattharati sīmābhāvena byāpinī na hotīti attho.Tenevāti yena na vottharati, teneva kāraṇena.Abravīti ‘‘sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmā, sabbo samuddo asīmo, sabbo jātassaro asīmo’’ti (mahāva. 147) avoca.
2569. To show the method of the Aṭṭhakathā, such as "Whatever river that has the characteristics of a river, even if it is designated as a sign, saying, 'Let us make this a boundary,' it is still not a boundary" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 147), he said ‘‘nadī…pe… na vottharatī’’, meaning it does not spread, it is not pervasive due to the absence of the nature of a boundary. Tenevā means because of that very reason why it does not spread. Abravīti means he said: "All rivers, monks, are not boundaries; all oceans are not boundaries; all natural lakes are not boundaries" (mahāva. 147).
Sīmākathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of Boundary Discourse.
2570.Aṭṭhamiyāpi uposathavohārattā dinavasena uposathānaṃ atirekattepi idha adhippeteyeva uposathe gahetvā āha‘‘navevā’’ti.
2570. Because the eighth day is also referred to as Uposatha, even though there are extra Uposathas in terms of days, here, taking only the intended Uposatha, he said ‘‘navevā’’ti.
2571-3.Te sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘cātuddaso…pe… kammenuposathā’’ti. Catuddasannaṃ pūraṇocātuddaso. Pannarasannaṃ pūraṇopannaraso. Yadā panakosambakkhandhake(mahāva. 451 ādayo) āgatanayena bhinne saṅghe osārite tasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ saṅgho tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṃ karoti, tadā ‘‘tāvadeva uposatho kātabbo, pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti (mahāva. 475) vacanato ṭhapetvā cātuddasapannarase aññopi yo koci divasosāmaggī uposathoti. Ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Cātuddaso, pannaraso, sāmaggī ca uposathoti ete tayopi uposathādivaseneva niddiṭṭhādivaseneva vuttāti yojanā.
2571-3. To show them in their specific forms, he said ‘‘cātuddaso…pe… kammenuposathā’’. Cātuddaso means the fourteenth as a completion. Pannaraso means the fifteenth as a completion. But when, according to the method presented in the Kosambakkhandhaka (mahāva. 451 ff.), the Sangha makes peace with that monk who has been expelled in a divided Sangha, then, because of the statement "an Uposatha should be done immediately, the Pātimokkha should be recited" (mahāva. 475), any day other than the fourteenth and fifteenth is the Sāmaggī uposatho. Here, the word "iti" is understood but not explicitly stated. The meaning is that these three Uposathas—the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the Sāmaggī—are divaseneva niddiṭṭhā, that is, stated only in terms of the day.
Saṅgheuposathoti saṅghena kātabbauposatho.Gaṇepuggaluposathoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sādhyasādhanalakkhaṇassa sambandhassa labbhamānattā ‘‘saṅghe’’tiādīsu sāmivacanappasaṅge bhummaniddeso. Uposatho sādhyo kammabhāvato, saṅghagaṇapuggalā sādhanaṃ kārakabhāvato.
Saṅgheuposathoti means the Uposatha to be done by the Sangha. Gaṇepuggaluposathoti the same method applies here as well. Because the relationship of characteristic and example is obtained, the plural number is specified in "saṅghe" etc. when the genitive case is expected. Uposatha is the thing to be accomplished because of its nature as an action, and the Sangha, group, and individual are the means because of their nature as the doer.
suttuddeso,suttuddesoti abhidhānaṃ nāmaṃ yassa sosuttuddesābhidhāno. Kammenāti kiccavasena.
suttuddeso, means whose designation or name is suttuddesa, thus suttuddesābhidhāno. Kammenāti means in terms of function.
2574.‘‘Adhiṭṭhāna’’nti vāccaliṅgamapekkhitvā‘‘niddiṭṭha’’nti napuṃsakaniddeso. Vāccaliṅgā hi tabbādayoti pātimokkho niddiṭṭho, pārisuddhi niddiṭṭhāti pumitthiliṅgena yojetabbā.
2574. Without considering the expressed gender of "adhiṭṭhāna," the neuter specification ‘‘niddiṭṭha’’ is used. For tabbādis are expressed genders, thus "pātimokkho niddiṭṭho" and "pārisuddhi niddiṭṭhā" should be connected with the masculine and feminine genders.
2575.Vuttāti ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, pātimokkhuddesā, nidānaṃ uddisitvā avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ, ayaṃ paṭhamo pātimokkhuddeso’’tiādinā (mahāva. 150) desitā, sayañca tesañca uddese saṅkhepato dassetumāha‘‘nidāna’’ntiādi.Sāvetabbanti ettha ‘‘sutenā’’ti seso.Sesakanti anuddiṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ –
2575. Vuttāti means stated by "These five, monks, are recitations of the Pātimokkha: having recited the Nidāna, the rest should be recited by the Sutta; this is the first recitation of the Pātimokkha" etc. (mahāva. 150), and to show briefly the recitation of them himself, he said ‘‘nidāna’’ntiādi. Sāvetabbanti here, "sutenā" is understood. Sesakanti means the unrecited section –
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho…pe… āvikatā hissa phāsu hotīti imaṃ nidānaṃ uddisitvā ‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ, tatthāyasmante pucchāmi kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi…pe… evametaṃ dhārayāmī’ti vatvā ‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ. Sutā kho panāyasmantehi cattāro pārājikā dhammā…pe… avivadamānehi sikkhitabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 150) –
"Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me…pe…it is comfortable for him if it is disclosed; having recited this Nidāna, saying 'The Nidāna has been recited, venerable sirs, in regard to that, I ask you, venerable sirs, are you completely pure? I ask a second time…pe…thus I hold it,' and then saying 'The Nidāna has been recited, venerable sirs. The four Pārājika Dhamma have been heard by you…pe…should be trained in without dispute'" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 150) –
Aṭṭhakathāyavuttanayena avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ.
The rest should be recited by the Sutta according to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā.
2576.Sesesupīti uddiṭṭhāpekkhāya sesesu pārājikuddesādīsupi.‘‘Ayameva nayo ñeyyo’’ti sāmaññena vuttepi ‘‘vitthāreneva pañcamo’’ti vacanato vitthāruddese ‘‘sāvetabbaṃ tu sesaka’’nti ayaṃ nayo na labbhati. ‘‘Sāvetabbaṃ tu sesaka’’nti vacanato pārājikuddesādīsu yasmiṃ vippakate antarāyo uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ. Nidānuddese pana anuddiṭṭhe sutena sāvetabbaṃ nāma natthi. Bhikkhunipātimokkhe aniyatuddesassa parihīnattā‘‘bhikkhunīnañca cattāro’’ti vuttaṃ.Uddesā navime panāti bhikkhūnaṃ pañca, bhikkhunīnaṃ cattāroti ubhatopātimokkhe ime nava uddesā vuttāti attho.
2576. Sesesupīti means even in the remaining recitations of the Pārājika etc. relative to the recited Nidāna. Although it is said generally ‘‘Ayameva nayo ñeyyo’’, because of the statement "the fifth should be in detail," this method is not obtained in the detailed recitation: "sāvetabbaṃ tu sesaka." Because of the statement "sāvetabbaṃ tu sesaka," in the recitations of the Pārājika etc., whatever matter is disputed, together with that, the remainder should be recited by the Sutta. But in the recitation of the Nidāna, there is nothing unrecited to be recited by the Sutta. Because the recitation of the Aniyata is omitted in the Bhikkhunī Pātimokkha, it is said ‘‘bhikkhunīnañca cattāro’’. Uddesā navime panāti means these nine recitations are stated in both Pātimokkhas, five for monks and four for nuns.
2577.Uposatheti saṅghuposathe.Antarāyanti rājantarāyādikaṃ dasavidhaṃ antarāyaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘rājantarāyo corantarāyo agyantarāyo udakantarāyo manussantarāyo amanussantarāyo vāḷantarāyo sarīsapantarāyo jīvitantarāyo brahmacariyantarāyo’’ti (mahāva. 150).
2577. Uposatheti means in the Sangha Uposatha. Antarāyanti means the ten kinds of obstacles such as royal obstacles. As it was said: "royal obstacle, thief obstacle, fire obstacle, water obstacle, human obstacle, non-human obstacle, wild beast obstacle, reptile obstacle, life obstacle, obstacle to the holy life" (mahāva. 150).
rājantarāyo. Corā āgacchanti, ayaṃcorantarāyo. Davadāho āgacchati vā, āvāse vā aggi uṭṭhahati, ayaṃagyantarāyo. Megho vā uṭṭheti, ogho vā āgacchati, ayaṃudakantarāyo. Bahū manussā āgacchanti, ayaṃmanussantarāyo. Bhikkhuṃ yakkho gaṇhāti, ayaṃamanussantarāyo. Byagghādayo caṇḍamigā āgacchanti, ayaṃvāḷantarāyo. Bhikkhuṃ sappādayo ḍaṃsanti, ayaṃsarīsapantarāyo. Bhikkhu gilāno vā hoti, kālaṃ vā karoti, verino vā taṃ māretuṃ gaṇhanti, ayaṃjīvitantarāyo. Manussā ekaṃ vā bahuṃ vā bhikkhū brahmacariyā cāvetukāmā gaṇhanti, ayaṃbrahmacariyantarāyo.
rājantarāyo. Thieves are coming, this is corantarāyo. Wildfire is coming, or fire arises in the dwelling, this is agyantarāyo. A cloud arises, or a flood comes, this is udakantarāyo. Many people are coming, this is manussantarāyo. A yakkha seizes a monk, this is amanussantarāyo. Tigers and other fierce animals are coming, this is vāḷantarāyo. Snakes etc. bite a monk, this is sarīsapantarāyo. A monk is sick, or dies, or enemies seize him to kill him, this is jīvitantarāyo. People seize one or many monks wishing to make them renounce the holy life, this is brahmacariyantarāyo.
‘‘Cevā’’ti iminā antarāyeva antarāyasaññinā vitthāruddese akatepi anāpattīti dīpeti.Anuddesoti vitthārena anuddeso.Nivāritoti ‘‘na, bhikkhave, asati antarāye saṃkhittena pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 150) paṭisiddho. Iminā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sati antarāye saṃkhittena pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti (mahāva. 150) idampi vibhāvitaṃ hoti.
‘‘Cevā’’ti with this, it indicates that there is no offense even if the detailed recitation is not done by one who perceives an obstacle as an obstacle. Anuddesoti means the non-recitation in detail. Nivāritoti means prohibited by "Monks, the Pātimokkha should not be recited in brief in the absence of an obstacle" etc. (mahāva. 150). With this, it is also explained: "I allow, monks, the Pātimokkha to be recited in brief in the presence of an obstacle" (mahāva. 150).
2578.Tassāti pātimokkhassa. Issaraṇassa hetumāha‘‘‘therādheyya’nti pāṭhato’’ti.Therādheyyanti therādhīnaṃ, therāyattanti attho.Pāṭhatoti pāḷivacanato. ‘‘Yo tattha bhikkhu byatto paṭibalo, tassādheyyaṃ pātimokkha’’nti (mahāva. 155) vacanato āha‘‘avattantenā’’tiādi.Avattantenāti antamaso dvepi uddese uddisituṃ asakkontena. Therena yoajjhiṭṭho,evamajjhiṭṭhassayassa panatherassa, navassa, majjhimassa vāsopātimokkhovattatipaguṇo hoti, so issaroti sambandho.
2578. Tassāti means of that Pātimokkha. He states the reason for being in authority: ‘‘‘therādheyya’nti pāṭhato’’ti. Therādheyyanti means dependent on the elder, subject to the elder. Pāṭhatoti means from the Pāḷi statement. Because of the statement "Whatever monk there is who is competent and capable, the Pātimokkha is subject to him" (mahāva. 155), he said ‘‘avattantenā’’tiādi. Avattantenāti means by one who is unable to recite even two recitations at the very least. The Pātimokkha ajjhiṭṭho, which is ordered by the elder, yassa pana, to whichever elder, new or middle, so the Pātimokkha vattati, is proficient, he is the authority, is the connection.
Ajjhiṭṭhoti ‘‘tvaṃ, āvuso, pātimokkhaṃ uddisā’’ti āṇatto, iminā anāṇattassa uddisituṃ sāmatthiyā satipi anissarabhāvo dīpito hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘sace therassa pañca vā cattāro vā tayo vā pātimokkhuddesā nāgacchanti, dve pana akhaṇḍā suvisadā vācuggatā honti, therāyattova pātimokkho. Sace pana ettakampi visadaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, byattassa bhikkhuno āyatto hotī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 155).
Ajjhiṭṭhoti means commanded by "You, friend, recite the Pātimokkha," with this, it is indicated that even if there is ability to recite without being commanded, there is no authority. As it was said: "If the elder does not remember five, four, or three recitations of the Pātimokkha, but two are unbroken and very clear, memorized by heart, the Pātimokkha is subject to the elder. But if he is not able to make even that much clear, it is subject to a competent monk" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 155).
2579.Uddisanteti pātimokkhuddesake pātimokkhaṃ uddisante.Samā vāti āvāsikehi gaṇanena samā vā.Appā vāti ūnā vā.Āgacchanti sace panāti sace pana āgantukā bhikkhū āgacchanti.Sesakanti anuddiṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ.
2579. Uddisanteti means while the Pātimokkha reciter is reciting the Pātimokkha. Samā vāti means equal in number to the resident monks. Appā vāti means less. Āgacchanti sace panāti means if visiting monks come. Sesakanti means the unrecited section.
2580.Uddiṭṭhamatteti uddiṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva kathārambhato pubbameva. ‘‘Vā’’ti idaṃ etthāpi yojetabbaṃ, iminā avuttaṃ ‘‘avuṭṭhitāya vā’’ti imaṃ vikappaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Avuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti ca bhikkhuparisāya aññamaññaṃ sukhakathāya nisinnāyayevāti attho.Parisāyāti ettha ‘‘ekaccāyā’’ti ca ‘‘sabbāyā’’ti ca seso. Bhikkhūnaṃ ekaccāya parisāya vuṭṭhitāya vā sabbāya parisāya vuṭṭhitāya vāti yojanā.Tesanti vuttappakārānaṃ āvāsikānaṃ.Mūleti santike. Pārisuddhi kātabbāti yojanā. ‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave…pe… āgacchanti bahutarā, tehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi puna pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti vuttanayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sace bahū’’ti. Ettha ‘‘puna pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti seso. Sabbavikappesu pubbakiccaṃ katvā puna pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabbanti attho. Ayaṃ panettha sesavinicchayo –
2580. Uddiṭṭhamatteti means at the moment of recitation, even before the beginning of the talk. The word "vā" should be connected here as well; with this, it combines the unsaid option "or without rising." Avuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti ca means while the company of monks is seated, talking pleasantly to each other. Parisāyāti here, "ekaccāyā" and "sabbāyā" are understood. The meaning is whether some of the company of monks has risen or the entire company has risen. Tesanti means of the resident monks mentioned in the way described. Mūleti means near. Pārisuddhi is to be done, is the connection. To show the method stated, "Here, monks…pe…many come, the Pātimokkha should be recited again by those monks," he said ‘‘sace bahū’’ti. Here, "puna pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba" is understood. In all options, having done the preliminary duty, the Pātimokkha should be recited again, is the meaning. This is the remaining judgment here –
‘‘Pannarasovāsikānaṃ, itarānaṃ sacetaro;
"For those residing for fifteen days, if the others are different;
Let those who are equal follow, if those who are earlier are more;
Let the former follow, the same method for them."
‘‘Pāṭipadovāsikānaṃ,
"For those residing for the first day,
The Uposatha for the others;
For those who are equal, harmony,
Let those at the origin give as they wish."
Bahi gantvāna kātabbo,
"Having gone outside, it should be done,
If the Uposatha is not given;
Harmony should be given unwillingly,
Among many, go outside."
‘‘Pāṭipadegantukānaṃ, evameva ayaṃ nayo;
"For those visiting on the first day, this is the same method;
He should deliberately recite the Sutta, there is a dukkata for not reciting."
2581.Viniddiṭṭhassāti āṇattassa, iminā itaresaṃ anāpattīti dīpeti. Idha ‘‘agilānassā’’ti seso. Therena āṇāpentena ‘‘kiñci kammaṃ karonto vā sadākālameva eko vā bhāranittharaṇako vā sarabhāṇakadhammakathikādīsu aññataro vā na uposathāgārasammajjanatthaṃ āṇāpetabbo, avasesā pana vārena āṇāpetabbā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 159)aṭṭhakathāyavuttavidhinā āṇāpetabbo. Sace āṇatto sammajjaniṃ tāvakālikampi na labhati, sākhābhaṅgaṃ kappiyaṃ kāretvā sammajjitabbaṃ. Tampi alabhantassa laddhakappiyaṃ hoti.
2581. Viniddiṭṭhassāti means of the one who has been commanded, with this, it indicates that there is no offense for the others. Here, "agilānassa" is understood. The meaning is that the one commanding should command according to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Whoever is doing some work or is always alone or is carrying a burden or is one of the reciters, Dhamma-speakers, etc., should not be commanded for sweeping the Uposatha hall; but the remaining ones should be commanded in turn" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 159). If the one who is commanded does not get a broom even temporarily, he should make a permissible branch-breaker and sweep with it. If he does not get that either, it becomes permissible by what he gets.
Āsanapaññāpanāṇattiyampi vuttanayeneva āṇāpetabbo. Āṇāpentena ca sace uposathāgāre āsanāni natthi, saṅghikāvāsatopi āharitvā paññapetvā puna āharitabbāni. Āsanesu asati kaṭasārakepi taṭṭikāyopi paññapetuṃ vaṭṭati, taṭṭikāsupi asati sākhābhaṅgāni kappiyaṃ kāretvā paññapetabbāni, kappiyakārakaṃ alabhantassa laddhakappiyaṃ hoti.
The arrangement of seats should also be instructed in the manner already described. And when instructing, if there are no seats in the Uposatha hall, they should be brought from a community residence, arranged, and then returned. If seats are unavailable, mats made of palm leaves or other materials may be used; if mats are also unavailable, branches should be broken into permissible pieces and arranged. For one who cannot find someone to make it permissible, it is considered permissible when obtained.
Padīpakaraṇepi vuttanayeneva āṇāpetabbo. Āṇāpentena ca ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma okāse telaṃ vā vaṭṭi vā kapallikā vā atthi, taṃ gahetvā karohī’’ti vattabbo. Sace telādīni natthi, bhikkhācārenapi pariyesitabbāni. Pariyesitvā alabhantassa laddhakappiyaṃ hoti. Apica kapāle aggipi jāletabbo.
The making of a lamp should also be instructed in the manner already described. And when instructing, one should say, "In such and such a place, there is oil, wick, or a potsherd; take it and make a lamp." If oil and so on are not available, they should be sought even by going for alms. For one who cannot find it after searching, it is considered permissible when obtained. Moreover, a fire should also be lit in a potsherd.
2582.Dīpanti ettha ‘‘jāletvā’’ti seso. Atha vā ‘‘katvā’’ti iminā ca yojetabbaṃ.Gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvāti ‘‘suṇantu me, āyasmantā, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyāmā’’ti evaṃ gaṇañattiṃ nikkhipitvā.Kattabbo tīhuposathoti tīhi bhikkhūhi uposatho kātabbo. Tīsu therena ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ katvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā dve evaṃ tikkhattumeva vattabbo ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, āvuso, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti (mahāva. 168). Dutiyena, tatiyena ca yathākkamaṃ ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, bhante, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti tikkhattumeva vattabbaṃ.
2582.Here, Dīpa means "after lighting," which is to be added. Or it should be connected with "after making." Gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā means, "Let the venerable ones listen to me; today is the fifteenth, the Uposatha day. If it is the appropriate time for the venerable ones, let us perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha together," after setting aside this formal announcement to the assembly. Kattabbo tīhuposatho means the Uposatha should be performed by three bhikkhus. Among the three, the elder, having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder, squatting, raising his joined hands, should say three times thus: "I am pure, venerable sirs; remember me as pure" (mahāva. 168). The second and third should say three times in succession, "I am pure, venerable sir; remember me as pure" (mahāva. 168).
2583.Pubbakiccādīni katvā ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā therena navo evaṃ tikkhattumeva vattabbo ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, āvuso, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti (mahāva. 168), navena theropi ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, bhante, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti (mahāva. 168) tikkhattuṃ vattabbo. Imasmiṃ pana vāre ñattiyā aṭṭhapanañca ‘‘dhārehī’’ti ekavacananiddeso cāti ettakova visesoti taṃ anādiyitvā puggalena kātabbaṃ uposathavidhiṃ dassetumāha‘‘pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā, adhiṭṭheyya panekako’’ti.Adhiṭṭheyyāti ‘‘ajja me uposatho, pannaraso’ti vā ‘cātuddaso’ti vā adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭheyya.Assāti avasāne vuttapuggalaṃ sandhāya ekavacananiddeso. Yathāvutto saṅghopi tayopi dvepi attano attano anuññātaṃ uposathaṃ antarāyaṃ vinā sace na karonti, evameva āpattimāpajjantīti veditabbo.
2583.Having performed the preliminary duties and established the formal announcement, the elder should say three times thus to the new one: "I am pure, venerable sirs; remember me as pure" (mahāva. 168), and the new one should also say to the elder three times, "I am pure, venerable sir; remember me as pure" (mahāva. 168). In this instance, the establishment of the announcement and the singular form of "remember" are the only differences, so disregarding that, to show the Uposatha procedure to be performed by an individual, he says, ‘‘pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā, adhiṭṭheyya panekako’’. Adhiṭṭheyyā means one should resolve, "Today is my Uposatha, the fifteenth or fourteenth." Assā is a singular reference to the individual mentioned at the end. Just as the Sangha, or the three, or the two, if they do not perform their respective permitted Uposatha without obstruction, in the same way, it should be understood that they incur an offense.
2584-5.Idāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, uposathakammāni, adhammena vaggaṃ uposathakamma’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 149) nayena vuttaṃ kammacatukkaṃ dassetumāha‘‘adhammena ca vaggenā’’tiādi. Adhammena vaggena kammaṃ, adhammato samaggena kammaṃ, dhammena vaggena kammaṃ, dhammato samaggena kammanti etāni cattāri uposathassa kammānīti jino abravīti yojanā.Catūsvapi panetesūti etesu catūsu kammesu pana.Catutthanti ‘‘samaggena ca dhammato’’ti vuttaṃ catutthaṃ uposathakammaṃ ‘‘dhammakamma’’nti adhippetaṃ.
2584-5.Now, to show the four types of acts mentioned in the manner beginning with "Bhikkhus, there are these four Uposatha acts: Uposatha act by an unlawful faction..." (mahāva. 149), he says ‘‘adhammena ca vaggenā’’ etc. The connection is that the Buddha said that these four are the acts of Uposatha: an act by an unlawful faction, an act by an unlawful but harmonious assembly, an act by a lawful faction, and an act by a lawful and harmonious assembly. Catūsvapi panetesū means, however, in these four acts. Catuttha means the fourth Uposatha act, "by a harmonious and lawful assembly," is intended as "dhamma kamma."
2586-7.Tāni kammāni vibhāvetumāha‘‘adhammenidhā’’tiādi.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsaneetthaetesu catūsu uposathesu. Adhammena vaggo uposatho katamoti kathetukāmatāpucchā.Yatthayassaṃ ekasīmāyaṃ bhikkhuno cattāro vasantīti yojanā.
2586-7.To explain those acts, he says ‘‘adhammenidhā’’ etc. Idha means in this Dispensation. ettha means in these four Uposathas. The question is, what is the Uposatha done unlawfully by a faction? Yattha means in whichever single boundary four bhikkhus reside.
pārisuddhiṃuposathaṃ karonti ce, evaṃ kato uposatho adhammo vagguposatho nāmāti yojanā, ekasīmaṭṭhehi catūhi saṅghuposathe kātabbe gaṇuposathassa katattāadhammoca saṅghamajjhaṃ vinā gaṇamajjhaṃ pārisuddhiyā agamanato tassa hatthapāsaṃ anupagamanenavaggoca hotīti attho.
If they perform the pārisuddhiṃ Uposatha, the Uposatha done in this way is called an unlawful factional Uposatha, because in a single boundary, the Sangha Uposatha should be done by four, but a group Uposatha is done; therefore, it is adhammo (unlawful), and because of not going to the midst of the Sangha for purity but going to the midst of a group, and due to not coming within arm's reach, it is vaggo (factional), is the meaning.
2588.Adhammena samaggoti ettha ‘‘uposatho katamo’’ti anuvattetabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhuno ekato’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Hoti adhammiko’’ti padacchedo. Catūhi samaggehi saṅghuposathe kātabbe gaṇuposathakaraṇaṃadhammo,hatthapāsupagamanatosamaggohoti.
2588.Here, in Adhammena samaggo, "uposatho katamo" (what kind of Uposatha) should be repeated. The word division is "bhikkhuno ekato." The word division is "hoti adhammiko." Because the group Uposatha is done when the Sangha Uposatha should be done by four harmonious ones, it is adhammo (unlawful), but because of coming within arm's reach, it is samaggo (harmonious).
2589-90.Yo uposatho dhammena vaggo hoti, so katamoti yojanā.Yatthayassaṃ ekasīmāyaṃ cattāro bhikkhuno vasanti, tatra ekassa pārisuddhiṃ ānayitvā te tayo janā pātimokkhaṃ uddisante ce, dhammena vaggo uposatho hotīti yojanā. Ekasīmaṭṭhehi catūhi saṅghuposathassa katattādhammo,ekassa hatthapāsaṃ anupagamanenavaggoca hotīti attho.
2589-90.The connection is, what kind of Uposatha is that which is lawful but factional? Yattha means in whichever single boundary four bhikkhus reside, if, having brought the purity of one, those three people recite the Pātimokkha, the connection is that the Uposatha is lawful but factional. Because in a single boundary, the Sangha Uposatha should be done by four, it is dhammo (lawful), but because one does not come within arm's reach, it is vaggo (factional), is the meaning.
2591.Yo dhammato samaggo, so katamoti yojanā.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsane cattāro bhikkhuno ekato pātimokkhaṃ uddisanti ce, ayaṃ dhammato samaggo uposathotimatoadhippetoti yojanā. Catūhi saṅghuposathassa katattādhammo,ekassāpi hatthapāsaṃ avijahanenasamaggoti adhippāyo.
2591.The connection is, what kind of Uposatha is that which is lawful and harmonious? Idha means in this Dispensation, if four bhikkhus recite the Pātimokkha together, this Uposatha is considered lawful and harmonious, is the intended meaning. Because the Sangha Uposatha is done by four, it is dhammo (lawful), and because not even one is outside arm's reach, it is samaggo (harmonious), is the idea.
2592.Vaggesaṅghe vaggoti saññino,samaggeca saṅghe vaggoti saññino ubhayattha vimatissa vā uposathaṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ āpatti hotīti yojanā.
2592.The connection is that for one who is uncertain whether the vagge Sangha is factional or the samagge Sangha is harmonious, and performs the Uposatha, a dukkata offense occurs.
2593.Bhedādhippāyatoti ‘‘nassantete, vinassantete, ko tehi attho’’ti evaṃ bhedapurekkhāratāya ‘‘uposathaṃ karontassā’’ti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.Tassabhikkhunothullaccayaṃ hotiakusalabalavatāya ca thullaccayaṃ hotīti. Yathāha – ‘‘bhedapurekkhārapannarasake akusalabalavatāya thullaccayaṃ vutta’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 176).Vagge vā samaggevā saṅghe samaggo iti saññino uposathaṃ karontassa anāpattīti yojanā. Avaseso panettha vattabbavinicchayo pavāraṇavinicchayāvasāne ‘‘pārisuddhippadānenā’’tiādīhi (vi. vi. 2642) ekato vattumicchantena na vutto.
2593.Bhedādhippāyato means, adding and connecting "uposathaṃ karontassa" (for one who performs the Uposatha) with the intention of creating dissension, thinking, "These will be destroyed, these will perish, what is the use of them?" Tassa means for that bhikkhu, thullaccayaṃ hoti, and because of the strength of unwholesomeness, a thullaccaya occurs. As it was said, "On the fifteenth with the intention of creating dissension, a thullaccaya is stated because of the strength of unwholesomeness" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 176). The connection is that for one who, thinking a vagge vā samagge Sangha is harmonious, performs the Uposatha, there is no offense. The remaining decision to be made here was not mentioned by one who intended to speak about it together with the decisions to be made at the end of the Pavāraṇā, beginning with "by the giving of purity" (vi. vi. 2642).
2594-5.‘‘Ukkhittenā’’tiādikāni karaṇavacanantāni padāni ‘‘sahā’’ti iminā saddhiṃ ‘‘uposatho na kātabbo’’ti padena paccekaṃ yojetabbāni.Ukkhittenāti āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittakoti tividhena ukkhittena. Etesu hi tividhe ukkhittake sati uposathaṃ karonto saṅgho pācittiyaṃ āpajjati.
2594-5.The words ending in instrumental case, beginning with ‘‘Ukkhittenā’’, should each be connected individually with the phrase "uposatho na kātabbo" (the Uposatha should not be done) together with "sahā" (with). Ukkhittenā means with one who has been suspended for not seeing an offense, one who has been suspended for not making amends for an offense, one who has been suspended for not relinquishing a wrong view; with these three kinds of suspended persons. Indeed, if the Sangha performs the Uposatha when these three kinds of suspended persons are present, it incurs a pācittiya offense.
‘‘Gahaṭṭhenā’’ti iminā titthiyopi saṅgahito.Sesehi sahadhammihīti bhikkhunī, sikkhamānā, sāmaṇero, sāmaṇerīti catūhi sahadhammikehi.Cutanikkhittasikkhehīti ettha cuto ca nikkhittasikkho cāti viggaho.Cutonāma antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannako.Nikkhittasikkhonāma sikkhāpaccakkhātako.
With ‘‘Gahaṭṭhenā’’, even a titthiya is included. Sesehi sahadhammihī means with the four fellow-religionists: bhikkhunī, sikkhamānā, sāmaṇera, sāmaṇerī. Cutanikkhittasikkhehī means the compound is resolved as "cuto ca nikkhittasikkho ca" (one who has fallen away and one who has renounced the training). Cuto means one who has fallen into the last ground of defeat. Nikkhittasikkho means one who has renounced the training.
Ekādasahīti paṇḍako, theyyasaṃvāsako, titthiyapakkantako, tiracchānagato, mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, bhikkhunidūsako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, ubhatobyañjanakoti imehi ekādasahi abhabbehi.
Ekādasahī means with these eleven incapable persons: paṇḍaka, theyyasaṃvāsaka, titthiyapakkantaka, tiracchānagato, mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, bhikkhunidūsako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, ubhatobyañjanaka.
‘‘sabhāgāpattī’’ti vatthusabhāgāpattiyeva gahetabbā.
‘‘sabhāgāpattī’’ means only an offense of the same kind should be taken.
Uposathadivase sabbova saṅgho sace sabhāgāpattiṃ āpanno hoti,
If on the Uposatha day, the entire Sangha has incurred an offense of the same kind,
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, aññatarasmiṃ āvāse tadahuposathe sabbo saṅgho sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno hoti, tehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi eko bhikkhu sāmantā āvāsā sajjukaṃ pāhetabbo ‘gacchāvuso, taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikaritvā āgaccha, mayaṃ te santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmā’ti. Evañcetaṃ labhetha, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce labhetha, byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo – ‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ sabbo saṅgho sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, yadā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ suddhaṃ anāpattikaṃ passissati, tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’’ti (mahāva. 171) ca,
‘‘Here, bhikkhus, in a certain monastery, on that Uposatha day, the entire Sangha has incurred an offense of the same kind. Then, bhikkhus, one bhikkhu should be sent straight to a monastery in the neighborhood, saying, ‘Go, friend, after making amends for that offense, come back. We will make amends for that offense in your presence.’ If he obtains it in this way, that is skillful. If he does not obtain it, the Sangha should be informed by an experienced and capable bhikkhu: ‘Venerable sirs, may the Sangha listen to me. This entire Sangha has incurred an offense of the same kind. Whenever it sees another bhikkhu who is pure and without offense, it will make amends for that offense in his presence’" (mahāva. 171), and,
Vematiko ce hoti,
If he is doubtful,
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissati, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’’ti (mahāva. 171) ca,
"Venerable sirs, may the Sangha listen to me. This entire Sangha is doubtful about an offense of the same kind. Whenever it becomes free from doubt, it will make amends for that offense" (mahāva. 171), and,
Vuttanayena uposatho kātabbo.
The Uposatha should be performed in the manner described.
sajjhukanti tadahevāgamanatthāya.Gaṇuposathādīsupi eseva nayo. Vuttañhiaṭṭhakathāgaṇṭhipade‘‘yathā saṅgho sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā suddhaṃ alabhitvā ‘yadā suddhaṃ passissati, tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’ti vatvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ labhati, evaṃ dvīhipi aññamaññaṃ ārocetvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ekenāpi ‘parisuddhaṃ labhitvā paṭikarissāmī’ti ābhogaṃ katvā kātuṃ vaṭṭati kirā’’ti.Kirāti cettha anussavatthe daṭṭhabbo, na panāruciyaṃ.
sajjhuka means for the purpose of coming back on that very day. This same method applies to Gaṇuposathā etc. Indeed, it was said in the aṭṭhakathāgaṇṭhipada, "Just as when the Sangha, having incurred an offense of the same kind and not obtaining a pure one, is able to perform the Uposatha after saying, 'Whenever it sees a pure one, it will make amends for that offense in his presence,' in the same way, even two people are permitted to perform the Uposatha after informing each other. Even one person is permitted to do it after making the intention 'after obtaining purity, I will make amends.'" Here, Kirā should be seen in the sense of hearsay, not in the sense of disapproval.
Pārivutthena chandenāti chandaṃ āharitvā kammaṃ kātuṃ nisinnenapi ‘‘asubhalakkhaṇatādinā kenaci kāraṇena na karissāmī’’ti vissaṭṭhe chande sace puna karissati, puna chandapārisuddhiṃ āharitvā kātabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘etasmiṃ pārivāsiye puna chandapārisuddhiṃ anānetvā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 1167).
Pārivutthena chandenā means even for one who is seated to perform the act after bringing the Chanda, if the Chanda is released because of dispassion due to some reason such as contemplating repulsiveness, if he performs it again, he should perform it again after bringing the Chanda and purity. As he said, "In this surrounding area, it is not permitted to perform the act without bringing the Chanda and purity again" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 1167).
2596.Adesetvāpanāpattinti āpannaṃ āpattiṃ adesetvā.Nāvikatvāna vematinti ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulāsu āpattīsu vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā tā āpattiyo paṭikarissāmī’’ti vimatiṃ anārocetvā.‘‘Yadā nibbematikoti ettha sace panesa nibbematiko na hoti, vatthuṃ kittetvāva desetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 169)andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ desanāvidhi – sace meghacchanne sūriye ‘‘kālo nu kho, vikālo’’ti vematiko bhuñjati, tena bhikkhunā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, vematiko bhuñjiṃ, sace kālo atthi, sambahulā dukkaṭā āpattiyo āpannomhi. No ce atthi, sambahulā pācittiyāpattiyo āpannomhī’’ti evaṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, yā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sambahulā dukkaṭā vā pācittiyā vā āpattiyo āpanno, tā tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbāpattīsūti.
2596.Adesetvā panāpatti means without declaring the offense that has been incurred. Nāvikatvāna vemati means without announcing the doubt, "Venerable sir, I am doubtful about numerous offenses; whenever I become free from doubt, I will make amends for those offenses." In ‘‘Yadā nibbematiko, it was said in the andhakaṭṭhakathā, "if he does not become free from doubt, it is proper to declare it after specifying the thing." There, this is the method of declaration: If, when the sun is covered by clouds, he eats being doubtful whether it is the right time or the wrong time, that bhikkhu should say, "Venerable sir, I ate being doubtful; if it is the right time, I have incurred numerous dukkata offenses. If it is not, I have incurred numerous pācittiya offenses," thus specifying the thing, "Venerable sir, whatever numerous dukkata or pācittiya offenses I have incurred in that thing, I declare them in your presence." This same method applies to all offenses.
Gaṇṭhipadesupanevaṃ vinicchayo vutto – ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’ti vatvā uposatho kātabbo, pātimokkhaṃ sotabba’’nti (mahāva. 170) vacanato yāva nibbematiko na hoti, tāva sabhāgāpattiṃ paṭiggahetuṃ na labhati. Aññesañca kammānaṃ parisuddho nāma hoti. ‘‘Puna nibbematiko hutvā desetabbamevā’’ti (kaṅkhā. abhi. ṭī. nidānavaṇṇanā) neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ atthi, desite pana na doso. ‘‘Ito vuṭṭhahitvā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti (mahāva. 170) etthāpi eseva nayoti.
In the Gaṇṭhipadasu, however, this decision was stated: "Having said, 'Friend, I am doubtful about such and such an offense; whenever I become free from doubt, I will make amends for that offense,' the Uposatha should be performed, the Pātimokkha should be listened to" (mahāva. 170), because until he becomes free from doubt, he is not permitted to receive an offense of the same kind. For other acts, he is called pure. "It should be declared only after becoming free from doubt again" (kaṅkhā. abhi. ṭī. nidānavaṇṇanā) is not in the Pali, nor in the Commentary, but there is no fault if it is declared. "After getting up from here, I will make amends for that offense" (mahāva. 170), this same method applies here as well.
2597.Uposatheti dinakārakakattabbākāravasena pannarasī, saṅghuposatho, suttuddesoti imehi tīhi lakkhaṇehi samannāgate uposathe.Sabhikkhumhā ca āvāsāti ‘‘yasmiṃ uposathe kicca’’ntiādinā vakkhamānappakārā sabhikkhukā āvāsā. Idha ‘‘anāvāsā’’ti seso.Āvāso vā anāvāso vāti ettha ‘‘abhikkhuko vā nānāsaṃvāsakehi sabhikkhuko vā’’ti cana gantabboti ettha ‘‘aññatra saṅghena aññatra antarāyā’’ti ca seso.‘‘Anāvāso’’ti udositādayo vuttā. Bhikkhunā uposathe sabhikkhumhā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā abhikkhuko vā nānāsaṃvāsakehi sabhikkhuko vā āvāso vā anāvāso vā aññatra saṅghena aññatra antarāyākudācanaṃkadācipi na gantabboti yojanā.
2597.Uposathe means on the Uposatha, which is complete with these three characteristics: the fifteenth day in terms of what the day-maker does, the Sangha Uposatha, the Suttuddesa. Sabhikkhumhā ca āvāsā means from monasteries with bhikkhus, of the kind that will be explained later in "yasmiṃ uposathe kicca." Here, "anāvāsā" (from places without residence) is to be added. Āvāso vā anāvāso vā means "either without bhikkhus or with bhikkhus of different communities," and in na gantabbo means "except by the Sangha, except for danger" is to be added. ‘‘Anāvāso’’ means the places that have been mentioned such as abandoned places. By a bhikkhu, on the Uposatha, from a residence with bhikkhus or a residence without bhikkhus, either without bhikkhus or with bhikkhus of different communities, a residence or a non-residence, except by the Sangha, except for danger, kudācanaṃ (ever) should never be gone to, is the connection.
2598.Yasmiṃ āvāse pana uposathe kiccaṃ sace vattati, so āvāso ‘‘sabhikkhuko nāmā’’ti pakāsitoti yojanā, iminā sace yattha uposatho na vattati, so santesupi bhikkhūsu abhikkhuko nāmāti dīpeti.
2598.However, if there is something to be done for the Uposatha in whichever residence, that residence is declared "to be with bhikkhus," is the connection; by this, it indicates that if there is no Uposatha to be done in a place, that is called without bhikkhus even if there are bhikkhus.
2599.Uposathassa payojanaṃ, tappasaṅgena pavāraṇāya ca niddhāretukāmatāyāha‘‘uposatho kimatthāyā’’tiādi.
2599.Because he wants to determine the purpose of the Uposatha and, in connection with that, the Pavāraṇā, he says ‘‘uposatho kimatthāyā’’ etc.
2600.Paṭikkoseyyāti nivāreyya.Adentassapi dukkaṭanti ettha ‘‘kopetuṃ dhammikaṃ kamma’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
2600.Paṭikkoseyyā means should prevent. Adentassapi dukkaṭa means here, "kopetuṃ dhammikaṃ kamma" (to anger a lawful act) should be added and connected.
2601.So cāti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) catuvaggādippabhedena pañcavidho so saṅgho ca. Heṭṭhimaparicchedenakattabbakammānaṃ vasena paridīpito,na chabbaggādīnaṃ kātuṃ ayuttatādassanavasena.
2601.So cā (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) means that Sangha, which has five divisions beginning with the fourfold group, has been kattabbakammānaṃ vasena paridīpito (described in terms of the acts to be done) by the lower chapter, not to show that it is improper to be done by groups of six or more.
2602.Catuvaggādibhedanibandhanaṃ kammaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pavāraṇa’’ntiādi. Pavāraṇañca tathā abbhānañca upasampadañca ṭhapetvā catuvaggena akattabbaṃ kammaṃ na vijjatīti yojanā.
2602.To show the act that is bound by the division into fourfold groups, etc., he says ‘‘pavāraṇa’’ etc. The connection is that there is no act that cannot be done by a fourfold group except for Pavāraṇā, Abbhāna, and Upasampadā.
2603.Majjhadese upasampadāmajjhadesūpasampadā,taṃ. Abbhānaṃ, majjhadesūpasampadañca vinā pañcavaggenasabbaṃkammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2603. Majjhadese upasampadā majjhadesūpasampadā, that is. Except for Abbhāna and Majjhadesūpasampadā, it is appropriate to perform all actions with a group of five, this is the meaning.
2604.Kiñcipi kammaṃ na na kattabbanti yojanā, sabbampi kammaṃ kattabbamevāti attho. Dve paṭisedhā pakatatthaṃ gamayantīti. Vīsativaggena saṅghena sabbesampi kammānaṃ kattabbabhāve kimatthaṃ atirekavīsativaggassa gahaṇanti āha‘‘ūne dosoti ñāpetuṃ, nādhike atirekatā’’ti. Yathāvutte catubbidhe saṅghe gaṇanatoūne dosohoti, adhike doso na hotīti ñāpetuṃatirekatā dassitā,atirekavīsativaggasaṅgho dassitoti adhippāyo.
2604.The meaning is that not even a single action should not be done, but all actions should be done. Two negations imply the intended meaning. If all actions must be performed by a group of twenty, then why mention a group exceeding twenty? He said, "To indicate a fault with fewer, not excess with more." In the four types of saṅgha mentioned, a fault occurs with fewer in number, but no fault occurs with more. Excess is shown to indicate that a saṅgha exceeding twenty is indicated, this is the intention.
2605.Catuvaggena kattabbe pakatattāva cattāro kammappattāti dīpitāti yojanā. Sesā pakatattā chandārahāti seso.Pakatattāti anukkhittā ceva antimavatthuṃ anajjhāpannā ca gahetabbā.Sesesu cāti pañcavaggādīsupi.
2605.It is shown that only four are qualified for the action since it is appropriate to be done with a group of four. The remainder are unqualified because they are excluded. By pakatattā, those who are not suspended and have not committed an ultimate offense should be included. And in the remaining, even in groups of five, etc.
2606.Catuvaggādikattabbakammaṃasaṃvāsapuggalaṃ gaṇapūraṃ katvā karontassa dukkaṭaṃ hoti. Na kevalaṃ dukkaṭameva, katañca kammaṃ kuppatīti yojanā.
2606.Performing an action that should be done by a group of four or more, including an asaṃvāsa person to complete the quorum, results in a dukkaṭa. Not only is there a dukkaṭa, but the action performed is also invalid, this is the meaning.
2607.Parivāsādīti etthaādi-saddena mūlāyapaṭikassanādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Tatraṭṭhanti parivāsādīsu ṭhitaṃ.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘kataṃ kuppati dukkaṭa’’nti idaṃ anuvatteti.Sesaṃ tūti parivāsādikammato aññaṃ pana uposathādikammaṃ.Vaṭṭatīti te pārivāsikādayo gaṇapūrake katvā kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
2607.Parivāsa, etc. Here, the word "etc." includes mūlāyapaṭikassana, etc. "Situated therein" means situated in parivāsa, etc. By "Thus", this statement, "the action performed is invalid, a dukkaṭa" is repeated. But the remaining, the remaining actions apart from parivāsa etc., such as uposatha. Is appropriate, it is appropriate for those undergoing parivāsa etc. to perform it, having included them to complete the quorum.
Uposathakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Uposatha Section.
Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Section on Entering the Rainy Season Residence
2608.Vassūpanāyikā vuttāti seso.Pacchimā cāti etthaiti-saddo nidassane.Vassūpanāyikāti vassūpagamanā. Ālayo, vacībhedo vā kātabbo upagacchatāti iminā vassūpagamanappakāro dassito. Upagacchatā ālayo kattabbo, vacībhedo vā kattabboti sambandho. Upagacchantena ca senāsane asati ‘‘idha vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ti cittuppādamattaṃ vā kātabbaṃ, senāsane sati ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti ca ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti ca vacībhedo vā kātabboti attho.
2608. Vassūpanāyikā has been stated, the rest [is to be understood]. And the latter, here the word "iti" is for example. Vassūpanāyikā means entering the rainy season residence. A dwelling or a verbal declaration should be made, with this the manner of entering the rains residence is shown. A dwelling should be made by the one entering, or a verbal declaration should be made, is the connection. And for the one entering, if there is no lodging, then a mere arising of thought, "I will reside here for the rains" should be made, or if there is lodging, then "I enter into the rains for these three months in this monastery" and "I enter into the rains here," such a verbal declaration should be made, this is the meaning.
2609.Jānaṃ vassūpagamanaṃ anupagacchato vāpīti yojanā.Temāsanti ettha ‘‘purimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā’’ti seso.Carantassāpīti ettha ‘‘cārika’’nti seso. Purimaṃ vātemāsaṃpacchimaṃ vātemāsaṃavasitvāva cārikaṃ carantassāpi dukkaṭanti yojanā.Temāsanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, vassaṃ upagantvā purimaṃ vā temāsaṃ pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ avasitvā cārikā pakkamitabbā, yo pakkameyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 185).
2609.Knowing, not entering the rains residence, or even... this is the meaning. Three months, here the remainder is "either the first or the last." Even for one wandering, here the remainder is "on pilgrimage." Even for one wandering on pilgrimage only after residing for either the first three months or the last three months, there is a dukkaṭa, this is the meaning. Three months is a word used in continuous connection. As he said: "Monks, having entered the rains residence, one should not depart on pilgrimage without residing for either the first three months or the last three months; whoever departs incurs an offense of dukkaṭa" (Mahāva. 185).
2610.Rukkhassasusireti ettha ‘‘suddhe’’ti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘rukkhasusireti ettha suddhe rukkhasusireyeva na vaṭṭati, mahantassa pana rukkhasusirassa anto padaracchadanaṃ kuṭikaṃ katvā pavisanadvāraṃ yojetvā upagantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.‘‘Rukkhassa susire’’ti iminā rukkhekadeso viṭapopi saṅgahito, sopi suddhova na vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘rukkhaviṭabhiyāti etthāpi suddhe viṭapamatte na vaṭṭati, mahāviṭape pana aṭṭakaṃ bandhitvā tattha padaracchadanaṃ kuṭikaṃ katvā upagantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 203).
2610.In the hollow of a tree, here the remainder is "empty." As he said, "In the hollow of a tree, it is not appropriate if it is merely an empty hollow of a tree, but for a large hollow of a tree, it is appropriate to enter after making a small hut with a covering of leaves inside, fitting a door." By "In the hollow of a tree", even a branch of a tree is included, and even that is not appropriate if it is merely empty. As he said, "Even in a tree branch, it is not appropriate if it is merely an empty branch, but in a large branch, it is appropriate to enter after constructing a platform and making a small hut with a covering of leaves there" (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 203).
Cāṭiyāti etthāpi mahantena kapallena chatte vuttanayena kuṭiṃ katvāva upagantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāvacanato evamakatāsu suddhachattacāṭīsu nivāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.Chavakuṭīti ṭaṅkitamañcādayo vuttā. Yathāha – ‘‘chavakuṭikā nāma ṭaṅkitamañcādibhedā kuṭi, tattha upagantuṃnavaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 203).
In a pot, here also, from the commentary saying "it is appropriate to enter only after making a hut in the manner stated with a large potsherd as a roof," the prohibition should be understood regarding such empty potsherds that have been made. A charnel ground hut refers to a bed that has been hewn, etc., as stated. As he said, "A charnel ground hut is a hut of various kinds, such as a bed that has been hewn, it is not appropriate to enter there" (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 203).
andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃchavakuṭi vuttā. ‘‘Ṭaṅkitamañcoti kasikuṭikāpāsāṇagharanti likhita’’nti (vajira. ṭī. mahāvagga 203)vajirabuddhitthero. Catunnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ upari pāsāṇaṃ attharitvā kato gehopi‘‘ṭaṅkitamañco’’ti vuccati. Dīghe mañcapāde majjhe vijjhitvā aṭaniyo pavesetvā mañcaṃ karontīti tassa idaṃ upari, idaṃ heṭṭhāti natthi, parivattetvā atthatopi tādisova hoti, taṃ susāne, devaṭṭhāne ca ṭhapenti, ayampiṭaṅkitamañconāma.
In the Andhaka commentary, a charnel ground hut has been stated. Vajirabuddhi Thera [said], "A bed that has been hewn' is written as 'a grass hut or a stone house'" (Vajira. Ṭī. Mahāvagga 203). A dwelling made by laying stones on top of four stones is also called "a bed that has been hewn." They make a bed by piercing long bed legs in the middle and inserting pegs, so it does not have this side is up, this side is down; even when turned over, it is the same, they place that in the cemetery or shrine. This is also called "a bed that has been hewn."
2611.‘‘Sati paccayavekalle, sarīrāphāsutāya vā’’ti avasesantarāyānaṃ vakkhamānattā‘‘antarāyo’’ti iminā rājantarāyādi dasavidho gahetabbo.
2611."With a lack of supporting conditions, or bodily discomfort," since the remaining obstacles will be stated later, by "obstacle" the ten kinds of obstacles, such as royal obstacles, should be taken.
2612-4.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sattannaṃ sattāhakaraṇīyena appahitepi gantuṃ, pageva pahite bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā sikkhamānāya sāmaṇerassa sāmaṇeriyā mātuyā ca pitussa cā’’ti (mahāva. 198) vuttanayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘mātāpitūna’’ntiādi.
2612-4."I allow, monks, going even when not sent, for one who has a seven-day duty, what to speak of when sent, to a monk, a nun, a female trainee, a novice, a female novice, a mother, and a father" (Mahāva. 198), to show the meaning stated, he said "to parents," etc.
anabhirataṃukkaṇṭhitaṃ ahaṃ gantvā vūpakāsessaṃ vā vūpakāsāpessāmi vā dhammakathamassa karissāmīti vātassapañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ aññatarassauṭṭhitaṃuppannaṃ diṭṭhiṃ vivecessāmi vā vivecāpessāmi vā dhammakathamassa karissāmīti vā tathā uppannaṃ kukkuccaṃ vinodessāmīti vā vinodāpessāmīti vā dhammakathamassa karissāmīti vā evaṃ vinayaññunā bhikkhunā sattāhakiccena apesitepi gantabbaṃ, pageva pahiteti yojanā.
Discontented, agitated, I will go and calm [him] down, or I will have [him] calmed down, or I will give [him] a Dhamma talk... or his, of one of the five fellow practitioners, arisen view, I will dispel, or I will have [it] dispelled, or I will give [him] a Dhamma talk... or likewise, arisen worry, I will remove, or I will have [it] removed, or I will give [him] a Dhamma talk... Thus, by a monk who knows the Vinaya, even when not sent for a seven-day duty, [one] should go, what to speak of when sent, this is the meaning.
Bhattādīti etthaādi-saddena bhesajjapariyesanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yathāha – ‘‘gilānabhattaṃ vā pariyesissāmi, gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ vā pariyesissāmi, gilānabhesajjaṃ vā pariyesissāmi, pucchissāmi vā upaṭṭhahissāmi vā’’ti.Vūpakāsessanti yattha anabhirati uppannā, tato aññattha gahetvā gamissāmīti attho.
Food, etc. Here, the word "etc." includes seeking medicine, etc. As he said, "I will seek sick person's food, or I will seek food for one who attends to the sick, or I will seek medicine for the sick, or I will ask, or I will attend." Vūpakāsessanti means where discontent has arisen, taking [him] away from there, I will go.
Vinodessāmahanti vāti etthavā-saddena ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu garudhammaṃ ajjhāpanno hoti parivāsāraho, so ce bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pahiṇeyya ‘ahañhi garudhammaṃ ajjhāpanno parivāsāraho, āgacchantu bhikkhū, icchāmi bhikkhūnaṃ āgata’nti. Gantabbaṃ, bhikkhave, sattāhakaraṇīyena appahitepi, pageva pahite ‘parivāsadānaṃ ussukkaṃ karissāmi vā anussāvessāmi vā gaṇapūrako vā bhavissāmī’’tiādinayaṃ (mahāva. 193) saṅgaṇhāti. Evaṃ sattāhakiccena gacchantena antoupacārasīmāya ṭhiteneva ‘‘antosattāhe āgacchissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā gantabbaṃ. Sace ābhogaṃ akatvā upacārasīmaṃ atikkamati, chinnavasso hotīti vadanti.
Vinodessāmahanti vāti here the word "vā" includes "Here, monks, if a monk has fallen into a grave offense, and is eligible for parivāsa, if he should send a messenger to the monks, 'I have fallen into a grave offense and am eligible for parivāsa; let the monks come, I desire the monks to come.' Monks, [one] should go, even when not sent for a seven-day duty, what to speak of when sent, 'I will be diligent in giving parivāsa, or I will announce [it], or I will be one who completes the quorum'" (Mahāva. 193), this way of reasoning is included. Thus, one who is going for a seven-day duty, remaining within the boundary of the inner enclosure, should go having made the determination "I will return within seven days." If he crosses the boundary of the enclosure without making the determination, he becomes one whose rains residence is broken, so they say.
2615.‘‘Ayaṃ panettha pāḷimuttakaratticchedavinicchayo’’tiaṭṭhakathāgataṃ ratticchedavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vassaṃ upagatenetthā’’tiādi.Etthāti imasmiṃ sattāhakiccādhikāre. Ayaṃ pāḷimuttakavinicchayo daṭṭhabboti attho.
2615."Here, this is a determination regarding the breaking of the night, based on what is beyond the pāḷi" to show the determination regarding the breaking of the night that occurs in the commentary, he said "Having entered the rains residence here," etc. Here in this matter of seven-day duties. This determination beyond the pāḷi should be seen, this is the meaning.
2616.‘‘Asukaṃ nāma divasa’’ntiādinā nimantanākāraṃ vakkhati.Pubbanti paṭhamaṃ.Vaṭṭatīti sattāhakiccena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘sace ekasmiṃ mahāvāse paṭhamaṃyeva katikā katā hoti ‘asukadivasaṃ nāma sannipatitabba’nti, nimantitoyeva nāma hoti, gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 199). ‘‘Upāsakehi ‘imasmiṃ nāma divase dānādīni karoma, sabbe eva sannipatantū’ti katikāyapi katāya gantuṃ vaṭṭati, nimantitoyeva nāma hotī’’ti keci.
2616.He will state the manner of invitation with "On such and such a day," etc. First, at first. Is appropriate, it is appropriate to go for a seven-day duty. As he said, "If in one large residence, a prior agreement has already been made, 'We should assemble on such and such a day,' it is as if he has been invited, it is appropriate to go" (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 199). "Even if lay followers have made an agreement, 'We will do alms giving etc. on this day, let everyone assemble,' it is appropriate to go; it is as if he has been invited," so say some.
2617.Bhaṇḍakanti attano cīvarabhaṇḍaṃ.Na vaṭṭatīti sattāhakiccena gantuṃ na vaṭṭati.Pahiṇantīti cīvaradhovanādikammena pahiṇanti. Ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ āṇattiyena kenaci anavajjakiccena sattāhakaraṇīyena gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti imināva dīpitaṃ hoti.
2617.Goods, one's own belongings for robes. Is not appropriate, it is not appropriate to go for a seven-day duty. Send, they send by way of doing robes washing etc. It is shown by this itself that it is appropriate to go for some blameless matter with a seven-day duty by the order of the preceptor or teacher.
2618.Uddesādīnamatthāyāti pāḷivācanāni sandhāya.Ādi-saddena paripucchādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Garūnanti agilānānampi ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ.Gantuṃ labhatīti sattāhakaraṇīyena gantuṃ labhati.Puggaloti pakaraṇato bhikkhuṃyeva gaṇhāti.
2618.For the sake of learning, etc. Referring to recitations of the pāḷi. The word "etc." includes questioning, etc. Of the elders, of the preceptors and teachers even when they are not sick. Is able to go, is able to go for a seven-day duty. Person, from the context, it includes only a monk.
2619.Ācariyoti nidassanamattaṃ, upajjhāyena nivāritepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Sace pana naṃ ācariyo ‘ajja mā gacchā’ti vadati, vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 199)aṭṭhakathānayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ratticchede anāpatti, hotīti paridīpitā’’ti.Ratticchedeti vassacchedanimittaṃ. ‘‘Ratticchede’’ti sabbattha vassacchedoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā vadanti, evaṃ sattāhakaraṇīyena gataṃ naṃ antosattāheyeva puna āgacchantaṃ sace ācariyo vā upajjhāyo vā ‘‘ajja mā gacchā’’ti vadati, sattāhātikkamepi anāpattīti adhippāyo, vassacchedo pana hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ sattāhassa bahiddhā vītināmitattā.
2619.Preceptor is just an example, this is the same way even when prevented by the teacher. To show the commentary saying "If the preceptor says to him, 'Do not go today,' it is appropriate" (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 199), he said "No offense for breaking the night, is clearly explained." Breaking the night, for the reason of breaking the rains residence. Everywhere they make the determination "Breaking the night" means breaking the rains residence. Thus, if the preceptor or teacher says to [one] who has gone for a seven-day duty and is returning within seven days, "Do not go today," even if seven days pass, there is no offense, this is the intention, but the breaking of the rains residence definitely occurs, since the seven days have passed, it should be seen.
2620.Yassa kassaci ñātissāti mātāpitūhi aññassa ñātijanassa.‘‘Gacchato dassanatthāyā’’ti iminā sesañātikehi ‘‘mayaṃ gilānā bhadantānaṃ āgamanaṃ icchāmā’’ti ca ‘‘upaṭṭhākakulehi dānaṃ dassāma, dhammaṃ sossāma, bhikkhūnaṃ dassanaṃ icchāmā’’ti ca evaṃ kattabbaṃ niddisitvā dūte vā pesite sattāhakaraṇīyena gacchato ratticchedo ca dukkaṭañca na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhussa ñātako gilāno hoti…pe… gantabbaṃ, bhikkhave, sattāhakaraṇīyena pahite, na tveva appahite’’ti (mahāva. 199) ca ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, upāsakena saṅghaṃ uddissa vihāro kārāpito hoti…pe… icchāmi dānañca dātuṃ dhammañca sotuṃ bhikkhū ca passitunti. Gantabbaṃ, bhikkhave, sattāhakaraṇīyena pahite, na tveva appahite’’ti (mahāva. 188) ca.
2620.To any relative whatsoever, to a relative other than mother and father. By "For the sake of seeing one who is going", it has been stated that with the remaining relatives "We are sick, we desire the venerable one's arrival" and "We will give alms in the attending families, we will hear the Dhamma, we desire to see the monks," in this way, having specified what should be done and having sent messengers, there is neither breaking of the night nor a dukkaṭa for one going for a seven-day duty. As he said, "Here, monks, if a relative of a monk is sick... [one] should go, monks, when sent for a seven-day duty, but not when not sent" (Mahāva. 199), and "Here, monks, if a lay follower has had a monastery built intending [it] for the saṅgha... I desire to give alms and to hear the Dhamma and to see the monks. [One] should go, monks, when sent for a seven-day duty, but not when not sent" (Mahāva. 188).
2621.‘‘Ahaṃ gāmakaṃ gantvā ajjeva āgamissāmī’’tiāgacchaṃāgacchanto sace pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoteva, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘ajjeva āgamissāmī’’ti gantvā āgacchantassa antarāmagge sace aruṇuggamanaṃ hoti, vassacchedopi na hoti, ratticchedadukkaṭañca natthīti adhippāyo.
2621.Coming, if one says "I will go to the village and return today" but is truly unable to arrive, it is appropriate, this is the meaning. Is appropriate, here, for one who goes saying "I will return today" and is coming back, if the sunrise occurs on the way, there is neither breaking of the rains residence, nor is there breaking of the night or a dukkaṭa, this is the intention.
2622.Vajeti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 203) gopālakānaṃ nivāsanaṭṭhāne.Sattheti jaṅghasatthasakaṭasatthānaṃ sanniviṭṭhokāse.Tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno, vassacchede anāpattīti tehi saddhiṃ gacchantasseva natthi āpatti, tehi viyuñjitvā gamane pana āpattiyeva, pavāretuñca na labhati.
2622.Vajeti (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 203) at the dwelling place of cowherds. Sattheti in the assembled location of caravans of foot soldiers or cart caravans. In three places for a monk, there is no offense for breaking the rains residence, there is no offense only for one going together with them, but if traveling separated from them, there is definitely an offense, and he is not allowed to invite.
Ālayonāma ‘‘idha vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ti cittuppādamattaṃ.
Dwelling means just a mere arising of thought, "I will reside here for the rains."
Sace maggappaṭipanneyeva satthe pavāraṇadivaso hoti, tattheva pavāretabbaṃ. Atha sattho antovasseyeva bhikkhunā patthitaṭṭhānaṃ patvā atikkamati. Patthitaṭṭhāne vasitvā tattha bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ pavāretabbaṃ. Athāpi sattho antovasseyeva antarā ekasmiṃ gāme tiṭṭhati vā vippakirati vā, tasmiṃyeva gāme bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasitvā pavāretabbaṃ, appavāretvā tato paraṃ gantuṃ na vaṭṭati.
If the day of invitation occurs on the road itself for one who has set out on the path, then he should invite there. Then, within the rains residence period itself, the caravan arrives at the place desired by the monk and passes beyond. Having resided at the desired place, he should invite together with the monks there. Or else, within the rains residence period itself, the caravan stops or scatters in a village somewhere, having resided together with the monks in that very village, he should invite. He is not allowed to go beyond that without having invited.
Nāvāya vassaṃ upagacchantenāpi kuṭiyaṃyeva upagantabbaṃ. Pariyesitvā alabhante ālayo kātabbo. Sace antotemāsaṃ nāvā samuddeyeva hoti, tattheva pavāretabbaṃ. Atha nāvā kūlaṃ labhati, sayañca parato gantukāmo hoti, gantuṃ na vaṭṭati. Nāvāya laddhagāmeyeva vasitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ pavāretabbaṃ. Sacepi nāvā anutīrameva aññattha gacchati, bhikkhu ca paṭhamaṃ laddhagāmeyeva vasitukāmo, nāvā gacchatu, bhikkhunā tattheva vasitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ pavāretabbaṃ.
Even for one entering the rains residence on a ship, he should enter in a hut itself. If, after searching, he does not find one, he should make a dwelling. If within the three-month period itself the ship is still on the ocean, then he should invite right there. Then the ship reaches the shore, and he himself wants to go further, he is not allowed to go. Having resided in the village that was reached by the ship, he should invite together with the monks. Even if the ship goes elsewhere right along the shore, and the monk desires to reside in the first village that was reached, let the ship go, the monk should reside right there and invite together with the monks.
Iti vaje, satthe, nāvāyanti tīsu ṭhānesu natthi vassacchede āpatti, pavāretuñca labhati.
Thus, in three places: vaje, satthe, and on a ship, there is no offense for breaking the rains residence, and he is allowed to invite.
2623.Sati paccayavekalleti piṇḍapātādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ ūnatte sati.Sarīrāphāsutāya vāti sarīrassa aphāsutāya ābādhe vā sati.Vassaṃ chetvāpi pakkameti vassacchedaṃ katvāpi yathāphāsukaṭṭhānaṃ gaccheyya.Api-saddena vassaṃ achetvā vassacchedakāraṇe sati sattāhakaraṇīyena gantumpi vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.
2623.Sati paccayavekalle means when there is a deficiency in the requisites such as alms food. Sarīrāphāsutāya vā means when there is discomfort or illness of the body. Vassaṃ chetvāpi pakkame means even after breaking the rains residence, one may go to a comfortable place. The word Api indicates that even without breaking the rains, if there is a reason to break the rains residence, it is permissible to leave with a seven-day allowance.
2624.Yena kenantarāyenāti rājantarāyādīsu yena kenaci antarāyena.Yobhikkhu vassaṃ nopagato, tenāpi chinnavassena vāpidutiyāvassūpanāyikā upagantabbāti yojanā.
2624.Yena kenantarāyenā means due to any obstacle such as royal obstacles. The construction is that even a bhikkhu who has not entered the rains residence, or one who has broken the rains residence, should undertake a dutiyā (second) rains residence.
2625-6.Sattāhanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.‘‘Vītināmetī’’ti iminā sambandho. Upagantvāpi vā bahiddhā eva sattāhaṃ vītināmeti ce. Yo gacchati, yo ca vītināmeti,tassa bhikkhussa. Purimāpi na vijjatīti anupagatattā, chinnavassattā ca purimāpi vassūpanāyikā na vijjati na labhati. Imesaṃ dvinnaṃ yathākkamaṃ upacārātikkame, sattāhātikkame ca āpatti veditabbā.
2625-6.Sattāha is a term used in the sense of absolute connection. It is related to ‘‘Vītināmeti’’. Even after undertaking it, if he spends the seven days outside, that bhikkhu, the one who goes and the one who spends the time, tassa bhikkhussa. Purimāpi na vijjatī because he has not undertaken it, and because the rains residence is broken, he does not have the former rains residence, he does not obtain it. Regarding these two, the offense should be understood as according to whether there is transgression of the proper conduct or transgression of the seven-day limit.
Paṭissave ca bhikkhussa, hoti āpatti dukkaṭanti ‘‘idha vassaṃ vasathā’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā tassa visaṃvāde asaccāpane āpatti hoti. Katamāti āha‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti. Na kevalaṃ etasseva visaṃvāde āpatti hoti, atha kho itaresampi paṭissavānaṃ visaṃvāde āpatti veditabbā. Yathāha – ‘‘paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha na kevalaṃ ‘imaṃ temāsaṃ idha vassaṃ vasathā’ti etasseva paṭissavassa visaṃvāde āpatti, ‘imaṃ temāsaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhatha, ubhopi mayaṃ idha vassaṃ vasissāma, ekatova uddisāpessāmā’ti evamādināpi tassa tassa paṭissavassa visaṃvāde dukkaṭa’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 207). Tañca kho paṭissavakāle suddhacittassa pacchā visaṃvādanapaccayā hoti. Paṭhamaṃ asuddhacittassa pana paṭissave pācittiyaṃ, visaṃvādena dukkaṭanti pācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ yujjati.
Paṭissave ca bhikkhussa, hoti āpatti dukkaṭa means that if, when told "Reside here for the rains," he replies "Good," and then breaks that promise, makes it untrue, there is an offense. What offense is it? He says ‘‘dukkaṭa’’. Not only is there an offense for breaking this promise, but an offense should be understood for breaking other promises as well. As it is said: "Regarding 'paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassa,' it is not only for breaking the promise 'Reside here for these three months of the rains' that there is an offense, but also for breaking other promises such as 'Take this alms food for these three months, we will both reside here for the rains, we will both recite the Pāṭimokkha together,' there is a dukkaṭa offense" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 207). However, that occurs due to breaking the promise later with a pure mind at the time of the promise. But if the mind was impure at first, there is a pācittiya offense for the promise and a dukkaṭa for breaking it, so a dukkaṭa offense is combined with a pācittiya.
2627.‘‘Vassaṃ upagantvā pana aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvā tadaheva sattāhakaraṇīyena pakkamantassāpi antosattāhe nivattantassa anāpattī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 207)aṭṭhakathāvacanato, ‘‘ko vādo vasitvā bahi gacchato’’ti vakkhamānattā ca‘‘nuṭṭhāpetvā panāruṇa’’nti pāṭho gahetabbo. Katthaci potthakesu ‘‘uṭṭhāpetvā panāruṇa’’nti pāṭho dissati, so na gahetabbo.
2627.From the aṭṭhakathā statement, "Having undertaken the rains residence, but without establishing the dawn, even if he leaves on the very same day with a seven-day reason, there is no offense for returning within the seven days" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 207), and because it will be said later, "What need to say of one who dwells and goes outside?" the reading ‘‘nuṭṭhāpetvā panāruṇa’’ should be taken. In some books, the reading "uṭṭhāpetvā panāruṇa" is seen, that should not be taken.
2628.Vasitvāti dvīhatīhaṃ vasitvā. Yathā vassaṃ vasitvā aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvāva sattāhakaraṇīyena gacchato anāpatti, tathā gataṭṭhānato antosattāhe āgantvā punapi aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvāva sattāhakaraṇīyena gacchato anāpatti. ‘‘Sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 201)aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃsattamāruṇena paṭibaddhadivasaṃ sattamena aruṇeneva saṅgahetvā sattamaaruṇabbhantare anāgantvā aṭṭhamaṃ aruṇaṃ bahi uṭṭhāpentassa ratticchedadassanaparaṃ, na sattamaaruṇasseva tattha uṭṭhāpetabbabhāvadassanaparanti gahetabbaṃsikkhābhājanaaṭṭhakathāya,sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadesu ca tathā vinicchitattā.
2628.Vasitvā means having dwelt for two or three days. Just as there is no offense for one who, having dwelt for the rains residence, leaves with a seven-day reason without establishing the dawn, similarly, having come from the place he went to within seven days, there is again no offense for leaving with a seven-day reason without establishing the dawn. The aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, "The dawn should be established on the seventh day" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 201), should be understood as referring to showing the breaking of the night for one who, having associated the day with the seventh dawn, does not come within the seventh dawn and establishes the eighth dawn outside, not as showing that the seventh dawn itself must be established there, because it is decided that way in the sikkhābhājanaaṭṭhakathā and in the Sinhala commentaries.
2629.‘‘Nopeti asatiyā’’ti padacchedo,nopetīti ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti vacībhedena na upagacchati.
2629.‘‘Nopeti asatiyā’’ is the word division, nopetī means he does not undertake with a verbal change, "In this monastery, I will undertake the rains residence for these three months."
2630.Vuttamevatthaṃ samatthetumāha‘‘na doso koci vijjatī’’ti.
2630.To support the meaning that has been stated, he says ‘‘na doso koci vijjatī’’.
2631.‘‘Imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vacanenicchāriteeva vassaṃ upagato siyāti yojanā.‘‘Nicchāriteva tikkhattu’’nti idaṃ ukkaṃsavasena vuttaṃ, sakiṃ, dvikkhattuṃ vā nicchāritepi vassūpagato nāma hotīti. Yathāha – ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemīti sakiṃ vā dvattikkhattuṃ vā vācaṃ nicchāretvāva vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184).
2631.The construction is that he has undertaken the rains residence only when it is nicchārite (declared), with the statement "In this monastery, I will undertake the rains residence for these three months," said three times. ‘‘Nicchāriteva tikkhattu’’ this is said by way of excellence, even when declared once or twice, he is said to have undertaken the rains residence. As it is said: "Having declared the words 'In this monastery, I will undertake the rains residence for these three months' once, twice, or three times, one should undertake the rains residence" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184).
2632.Navamito paṭṭhāya gantuṃ vaṭṭati, āgacchatu vā mā vā, anāpattī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 207)aṭṭhakathānayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ādiṃ tu navamiṃ katvā’’tiādi. Navamiṃ pabhuti ādiṃ katvā, navamito paṭṭhāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti sattāhakaraṇīyeneva gantuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā pavāraṇadivasepi tadaheva āgantuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭhānaṃ pavāraṇatthāya gacchantena labbhamānena sattāhakaraṇīyena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Pavāretvā pana gantuṃ vaṭṭati pavāraṇāya taṃdivasasannissitattā’’ti (vajira. ṭī. mahāvagga 207) hivajirabuddhitthero. So pacchā āgacchatu vā mā vā, doso na vijjatīti yojanā.
2632.To show the aṭṭhakathā method, "It is permissible to leave starting from the ninth, whether he comes back or not, there is no offense" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 207), he says ‘‘ādiṃ tu navamiṃ katvā’’ etc. Having made the ninth the beginning, it is said starting from the ninth. Gantuṃ vaṭṭatī means it is permissible to go only with a seven-day reason, therefore on the day of pavāraṇā, it is permissible to go for the pavāraṇā to a place where he cannot come back on the same day, with the seven-day allowance that is obtained. Vajirabuddhitthero indeed says, "Having performed pavāraṇā, it is permissible to go, because of the dependence of that day for pavāraṇā" (vajira. ṭī. mahāvagga 207). Whether he comes back later or not, there is no fault, is the construction.
Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Vassūpanāyikakkhandhaka is finished.
Pavāraṇakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Pavāraṇakkhandhaka
2633.‘‘Pavāraṇā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘cātuddasī’’tiādīhi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ dine kātabbā pavāraṇā abhedopacārena tathā vuttā.Sāmaggīuposathakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanāya vuttasarūpāva. Sāmaggipavāraṇaṃ karontehi ca paṭhamaṃ pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā pāṭipadato paṭṭhāya yāva kattikacātumāsipuṇṇamā etthantare kātabbā, tato pacchā vā pure vā na vaṭṭati.Tevācī dvekavācīti ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante…pe… tevācikaṃ pavāreyya, dvevācikaṃ pavāreyya, ekavācikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti taṃ taṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kātabbā pavāraṇā vuccati.
2633.‘‘Pavāraṇā’’ this should be connected to each of "cātuddasī" etc. The pavāraṇā that should be done on that particular day is spoken of that way with an undifferentiated treatment. Sāmaggī is just as the nature of the sāmaggī was stated in the explanation of the Uposathakkhandhaka. Those doing the sāmaggīpavāraṇā should first establish the pavāraṇā and it should be done from the first day of the lunar fortnight up to the full moon day of Kattika month, after that or before that it is not allowed. Tevācī dvekavācī means the pavāraṇā that should be done after establishing that particular ñatti, "Let the Sangha listen to me, Venerable Sirs...pe...he should perform a three-utterance pavāraṇā, a two-utterance pavāraṇā, a one-utterance pavāraṇā," is called that.
2634.Tīṇi kammāni muñcitvā, anteneva pavārayeti ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, pavāraṇakammāni, adhammena vaggaṃ pavāraṇakammaṃ…pe… dhammena samaggaṃ pavāraṇakamma’’nti (mahāva. 212) vatvā ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, yadidaṃ adhammena vaggaṃ pavāraṇakammaṃ, na, bhikkhave, evarūpaṃ pavāraṇakammaṃ kātabbaṃ…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yadidaṃ dhammena samaggaṃ pavāraṇakammaṃ, evarūpaṃ, bhikkhave, pavāraṇakammaṃ kātabba’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 212) tīṇi akattabbāni pavāraṇakammāni muñcitvā kātuṃ anuññātena catutthena pavāraṇakammena pavāreyyāti attho. Tassa vibhāgekadesaṃ ‘‘pañca yasmiṃ panāvāse’’tiādinā vakkhati.
2634.Tīṇi kammāni muñcitvā, anteneva pavāraye means having abandoned the three kammas that should not be done, saying "Bhikkhus, there are these four pavāraṇā kammas, a pavāraṇā kamma done unlawfully by a divided group...pe... a pavāraṇā kamma done lawfully by a united group" (mahāva. 212), and saying "There, bhikkhus, this pavāraṇā kamma that is done unlawfully by a divided group, bhikkhus, such a pavāraṇā kamma should not be done...pe... there, bhikkhus, this pavāraṇā kamma that is done lawfully by a united group, bhikkhus, such a pavāraṇā kamma should be done" (mahāva. 212), one should perform pavāraṇā with the fourth pavāraṇā kamma that is allowed to be done. He will explain a partial division of that with "pañca yasmiṃ panāvāse" etc.
2635.Pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvāti –
2635.Pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā means –
‘‘Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;
"The broom and the lamp, and water with a seat;
These for pavāraṇā, are called 'preliminary deeds.'"
‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;
"Consent, purity, invitation, count of the bhikkhus, and the exhortation;
These for pavāraṇā, are called 'preliminary duties.'"
Vuttaṃ navavidhaṃ pubbakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā.
Having completed the nine kinds of preliminary duties that have been stated.
Pattakalle samāniteti –
Pattakalle samānite means –
‘‘Pavāraṇā yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā,
"The pavāraṇā and as many bhikkhus as are qualified,
And there are no offenses of the same kind;
And there are no individuals to be avoided in it,
It is called 'qualified time.'"
Vutte catubbidhe pattakalle samodhānite parisamāpite.
Having assembled and completed the four kinds of qualified time that have been stated.
Ñattiṃ ṭhapetvāti ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti (mahāva. 210) evaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikavasena ca ‘‘tevācikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti ca dānādikaraṇena yebhuyyena rattiyā khepitāya ca rājādiantarāye sati ca tadanurūpato ‘‘dvevācikaṃ, ekavācikaṃ, samānavassikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti ca ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā, tāsaṃ visesoaṭṭhakathāyaṃdassitoyeva. Yathāha –
Ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā means having established the ñatti "Let the Sangha listen to me, Venerable Sirs, today is pavāraṇā, if it is the right time for the Sangha, let the Sangha perform pavāraṇā" (mahāva. 210), and in a way that includes all, and because the night is spent mostly by giving and so on, and if there is an obstacle from the king and so on, accordingly, also "he should perform a three-utterance pavāraṇā," and correspondingly "a two-utterance, a one-utterance, a co-resident pavāraṇā," the distinctions of those have already been shown in the aṭṭhakathā. As it is said –
‘‘Evañhi vutte tevācikañca dvevācikañca ekavācikañca pavāretuṃ vaṭṭati, samānavassikaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘Tevācikaṃ pavāreyyā’ti vutte pana tevācikameva vaṭṭati, aññaṃ na vaṭṭati, ‘dvevācikaṃ pavāreyyā’ti vutte dvevācikañca tevācikañca vaṭṭati, ekavācikañca samānavassikañca na vaṭṭati. ‘Ekavācikaṃ pavāreyyā’ti vutte pana ekavācikadvevācikatevācikāni vaṭṭanti, samānavassikameva na vaṭṭati. ‘Samānavassika’nti vutte sabbaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 210).
"When it is said in this way, it is permissible to perform a three-utterance, a two-utterance, and a one-utterance pavāraṇā, it is not permissible to perform a co-resident pavāraṇā. But when it is said 'He should perform a three-utterance pavāraṇā,' only a three-utterance pavāraṇā is permissible, another is not permissible. When it is said 'He should perform a two-utterance pavāraṇā,' a two-utterance and a three-utterance pavāraṇā are permissible, a one-utterance and a co-resident pavāraṇā are not permissible. But when it is said 'He should perform a one-utterance pavāraṇā,' a one-utterance, two-utterance, and three-utterance pavāraṇā are permissible, only a co-resident pavāraṇā is not permissible. When it is said 'Co-resident,' everything is permissible" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 210).
Kātabbāti therena bhikkhunā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘saṅghaṃ, āvuso, pavāremi diṭṭhena vā…pe… tatiyampi āvuso, saṅghaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā…pe… passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti (mahāva. 210) vuttanayena kātabbā. Navakena bhikkhunā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā…pe… tatiyampi, bhante, saṅghaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā…pe… passanto paṭikarissāmīti (mahāva. 210) vuttanayena kātabbā.
Kātabbā means the senior bhikkhu, having arranged his upper robe on one shoulder, squatting down, raising his joined palms, should say in this way, "I invite the Sangha, friend, to admonish me for what has been seen...pe... for the third time also, friend, I invite the Sangha to admonish me for what has been seen...pe... seeing it, I will rectify it" (mahāva. 210), it should be done in the manner that has been stated. The junior bhikkhu, having arranged his upper robe on one shoulder...pe... for the third time also, Venerable Sir, I invite the Sangha to admonish me for what has been seen...pe... seeing it, I will rectify it" (mahāva. 210), it should be done in the manner that has been stated.
2636.Theresu pavārentesu yo pana navo, so sayaṃ yāva pavāreti, tāva ukkuṭikaṃ nisīdeyyāti yojanā.
2636.When the seniors are performing pavāraṇā, the junior should squat down until he himself performs pavāraṇā, is the construction.
2637.Cattāro vā tayopi vāekāvāseekasīmāyaṃ vasanti ce,ñattiṃ vatvā‘‘suṇantu me, āyasmanto, ajja pavāraṇā, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pavāreyyāmā’’ti (mahāva. 216) gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā pavāreyyunti yojanā.
2637.If four or three live ekāvāse (in one dwelling), in one boundary, ñattiṃ vatvā (having stated the motion) "Let the venerable ones listen to me, today is pavāraṇā, if it is the right time for the venerable ones, we may admonish one another" (mahāva. 216), having established a group motion, they should perform pavāraṇā, is the construction.
Pavāreyyunti ettha therena bhikkhunā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ katvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā te tayo vā dve vā bhikkhū evamassu vacanīyā ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti (mahāva. 216) pavāretabbaṃ. Navenapi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti pavāretabbaṃ.
Pavāreyyu here, the senior bhikkhu, having arranged his upper robe on one shoulder, squatting down, raising his joined palms, those three or two bhikkhus should be told in this way: "I invite the venerable ones, friend, to admonish me for what has been seen or heard or suspected; let the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion, seeing it, I will rectify it. For the second time...pe... for the third time, friend, I invite the venerable ones to admonish me for what has been seen or heard or suspected; let the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion, seeing it, I will rectify it" (mahāva. 216), he should perform pavāraṇā. The junior also, "I invite the venerable ones, Venerable Sir, to admonish me for what has been seen or heard or suspected; let the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion, seeing it, I will rectify it. For the second time...pe... for the third time, Venerable Sir, I invite the venerable ones to admonish me for what has been seen or heard or suspected; let the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion, seeing it, I will rectify it," he should perform pavāraṇā.
2638.Aññamaññaṃ pavāreyyuṃ, vinā ñattiṃ duve janā. Tesu therena ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi…pe… paṭikarissāmī’’ti (mahāva. 217) pavāretabbaṃ. Navenapi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi…pe… vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi…pe… paṭikarissāmī’’ti pavāretabbaṃ.
2638.Aññamaññaṃ pavāreyyuṃ, vinā ñattiṃ duve janā (Two people may admonish one another without a motion). Among them, the senior should perform pavāraṇā, "I invite the venerable one, friend, to admonish me for what has been seen or heard or suspected; let the venerable one speak to me out of compassion, seeing it, I will rectify it. For the second time...pe... for the third time, friend, I invite the venerable one to admonish me...pe... I will rectify it" (mahāva. 217). The junior also, "I invite the venerable one, Venerable Sir, to admonish me...pe... let the venerable one speak to me out of compassion, seeing it, I will rectify it. For the second time...pe... for the third time, Venerable Sir, I invite the venerable one to admonish me...pe... I will rectify it," he should perform pavāraṇā.
Adhiṭṭheyyāti pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā ‘‘ajja me pavāraṇā cātuddasī’’ti vā ‘‘pannarasī’’ti vā vatvā ‘‘adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭheyya. Yathāha ‘‘ajja me pavāraṇāti ettha sace cātuddasikā hoti, ‘ajja me pavāraṇā cātuddasī’ti, sace pannarasikā, ‘ajja me pavāraṇā pannarasī’ti evaṃ adhiṭṭhātabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 218), iminā sabbasaṅgāhādiñattīsu ca tasmiṃ tasmiṃ divase so so vohāro kātabboti dīpitameva.
Adhiṭṭheyyā means having completed the preliminary duties, he should determine, saying "Today is my pavāraṇā, the fourteenth" or "the fifteenth," saying "I determine." As it is said, "Regarding 'Today is my pavāraṇā,' if it is the fourteenth, 'Today is my pavāraṇā, the fourteenth,' if it is the fifteenth, 'Today is my pavāraṇā, the fifteenth,' should be determined in this way" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 218), by this it is indeed indicated that in all the ñattis including the sabbasangāha, that particular usage should be done on that particular day.
Sesā saṅghapavāraṇāti pañcahi, atirekehi vā bhikkhūhi kattabbā pavāraṇā saṅghapavāraṇā.
Sesā saṅghapavāraṇā means the pavāraṇā that should be done by five or more bhikkhus is the saṅghapavāraṇā.
2639.Pavāriteti paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavārite.Anāgatoti kenaci antarāyena purimikāya ca pacchimikāya ca vassūpanāyikāya vassaṃ anupagato.Avutthoti pacchimikāya upagato. Vuttañhikhuddasikkhāvaṇṇanāya‘‘avutthoti pacchimikāya upagato apariniṭṭhitattā ‘avuttho’ti vuccatī’’ti. Pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyāti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘tesaṃ santike’’ti seso.
2639. Pavārite means having performed the Pavāraṇā on the first Pavāraṇā day. Anāgato means one who has not entered the rains residence period for either the earlier or later Vassūpanāyikā due to some hindrance. Avuttho means one who has entered the later one. For it was said in the Khuddasikkhāvaṇṇanā: "Avuttho means one who has entered the later one; because it is not completed, it is called 'Avuttho'." The meaning is that he should perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha. Here, "tesaṃ santike" is understood.
2640-1.Yasmiṃ panāvāse pañca vā cattāro vā tayo vā samaṇā vasanti, te tattha ekekassa pavāraṇaṃ haritvāna sace aññamaññaṃ pavārenti, āpatti dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2640-1. However, in whatever monastery five, four, or three samaṇas reside, if they each take the Pavāraṇā from each other and then Pavāraṇā each other, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. This is the meaning.
Sesanti ‘‘adhammena samagga’’ntiādikaṃ vinicchayaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ pavāraṇādhikāre.Budhoti vinayadharo.Uposathe vuttanayenāti uposathavinicchaye vuttakkamena.Nayeti jāneyya.
Sesa means the remaining judgment starting with "adhammena samagga." Idhā means in this Pavāraṇā context. Budho means a Vinaya holder. Uposathe vuttanayenā means in the manner stated in the Uposatha judgment. Naye means one should know.
2642.Sampādetattano sucinti attano uposathaṃ sampādeti.Sabbaṃ sādhetīti uposathādisabbaṃ kammaṃ nipphādeti.Nattanoti attano uposathaṃ na nipphādeti.
2642. Sampādetattano suciṃ means one should accomplish one's own Uposatha. Sabbaṃ sādhetī means one completes all the tasks, such as Uposatha. Nattano means one does not complete one's own Uposatha.
2643.Tasmāti yasmā attano suciṃ na sādheti, tasmā.Ubhinnanti attano ca saṅghassa ca.Kiccasiddhatthamevidhāti uposathādikammanippajjanatthaṃ idha imasmiṃ uposathakammādipakaraṇe.Pārisuddhipīti etthapi-saddena pavāraṇā saṅgahitā. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘chandaṃ vā pārisuddhiṃ vā, gahetvā vā pavāraṇa’’nti.
2643. Tasmā means because one does not accomplish one's own purity, therefore. Ubhinnampi means for oneself and for the Sangha. Kiccasiddhatthamevidhā means for the purpose of accomplishing the tasks such as Uposatha, here in this Uposatha procedure, etc. Pārisuddhipī—here, the pi includes Pavāraṇā. Therefore, it will be said, "Having taken the chanda or pārisuddhi or pavāraṇā."
Chandapārisuddhipavāraṇaṃ dentena sace sāpattiko hoti, āpattiṃ desetvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ katvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā chandādihārako bhikkhu vattabbo ‘‘chandaṃ dammi, chandaṃ me hara, chandaṃ me ārocehī’’ti (mahāva. 165), ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ dammi, pārisuddhiṃ me hara, pārisuddhiṃ me ārocehī’’ti (mahāva. 164), ‘‘pavāraṇaṃ dammi, pavāraṇaṃ me hara, pavāraṇaṃ me ārocehi, mamatthāya pavārehī’’ti (mahāva. 213).
When giving the chanda, pārisuddhi, or pavāraṇā, if one is subject to an offense, having confessed the offense, having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder, kneeling down, holding the añjali, the bhikkhu who is to convey the chanda should be told, "I give chanda, take my chanda, announce my chanda" (mahāva. 165), "I give pārisuddhi, take my pārisuddhi, announce my pārisuddhi" (mahāva. 164), "I give pavāraṇā, take my pavāraṇā, announce my pavāraṇā, perform pavāraṇā for me" (mahāva. 213).
2644.‘‘Chando ekenā’’ti padacchedo. Ekena bahūnampi chando hātabbo, tathā pārisuddhi hātabbā.Pi-saddena pavāraṇā hātabbāti yojanā.Paramparāhaṭo chandoti bahūnaṃ vā ekassa vā chandādihārakassa hatthato antarā aññena gahitā chandapārisuddhipavāraṇā.Visuddhiyā na gacchatianavajjabhāvāya na pāpuṇāti biḷālasaṅkhalikachandādīnaṃ saṅghamajjhaṃ agamanena vaggabhāvakaraṇato.
2644. "Chando ekenā" is the word division. The chanda should be taken by one, even for many, and so should the pārisuddhi. The pi includes the pavāraṇā, is the meaning. Paramparāhaṭo chando means the chanda, pārisuddhi, or pavāraṇā taken from the hand of one or many chanda carriers, having been taken by another in between. Visuddhiyā na gacchati does not reach faultlessness because of acting as a divider due to the chanda, etc., like the cat-chain not reaching the middle of the Sangha.
Ettha ca yathā biḷālasaṅkhalikāya paṭhamavalayaṃ dutiyavalayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na tatiyaṃ, evamimepi chandādayo dāyakena yassa dinnā, tato aññattha na gacchatīti biḷālasaṅkhalikāsadisattā ‘‘biḷālasaṅkhalikā’’ti vuttā. Biḷālasaṅkhalikāggahaṇañcettha yāsaṃ kāsañci saṅkhalikānaṃ upalakkhaṇamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Here, just as the first ring of the cat-chain reaches the second ring, but not the third, similarly, these chandas, etc., do not go elsewhere from the giver to whom they were given. Because of being similar to a cat-chain, it is called "cat-chain." And here, the taking of the cat-chain should be seen as merely indicative of any kind of chain.
2645-6.Chandaṃ vā pārisuddhiṃ vā pavāraṇaṃ vā gahetvā chandādihārako saṅghamappatvā sace sāmaṇerādibhāvaṃ paṭijāneyya vā vibbhameyya vā mareyya vā, taṃ sabbaṃ chandādibhāvaṃ nāhaṭaṃ hoti, saṅghaṃ patvāevaṃ siyāsāmaṇerādibhāvaṃ paṭijānanto, vibbhanto, kālakato vā bhaveyya, taṃ sabbaṃhaṭaṃānītaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2645-6. Having taken the chanda, pārisuddhi, or pavāraṇā, if the chanda carrier declares himself to be a sāmaṇera, etc., or becomes confused, or dies before reaching the Sangha, all that chanda, etc., is not brought. If it happens thus after reaching the Sangha—declaring himself to be a sāmaṇera, etc., or becoming confused, or dying—all that is brought, meaning it has been brought. This is the meaning.
sāmaṇerādibhāvaṃ vā paṭijāneyyāti ‘‘ahaṃ sāmaṇero’’tiādinā bhūtaṃ sāmaṇerādibhāvaṃ katheyya, pacchā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhaheyyāti attho.Ādi-saddena antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpanno gahito.
sāmaṇerādibhāvaṃ vā paṭijāneyyā means he states the existing state of being a sāmaṇera, etc., by saying "I am a sāmaṇera," etc., and afterwards establishes himself in the sāmaṇera state. Ādi includes one who has undertaken an antimavatthu.
2647.Saṅghaṃ patvāti antamaso taṃtaṃkammappattassa catuvaggādisaṅghassa hatthapāsaṃ patvāti attho.Pamattoti pamādaṃ satisammosaṃ patto.Suttoti niddūpagato.Khittacittakoti yakkhādīhi vikkhepamāpāditacitto.Nārocetīti attano chandādīnaṃ āhaṭabhāvaṃ ekassāpi bhikkhuno na katheti.Sañciccāti sañcetetvā jānantoyeva anādariyo nāroceti, dukkaṭaṃ hoti.
2647. Saṅghaṃ patvā means at least reaching the hand-span of the four-membered Sangha, etc., appropriate for that task. Pamatto means one who has fallen into negligence, loss of mindfulness. Sutto means one who has gone to sleep. Khittacittako means one whose mind has been disturbed by yakkhas, etc. Nārocetī means he does not tell even one bhikkhu that his chandas, etc., have been brought. Sañciccā means intentionally, knowingly, he does not announce out of disrespect; there is a dukkaṭa.
2648.Ye teti ye te bhikkhū therā vā navā vā majjhimā vā.Vipassanāti sahacariyena samathopi gayhati. Samathavipassanā ca idha taruṇāyeva adhippetā, tasmāvipassanāyuttāti ettha taruṇāhi samathavipassanāhi samannāgatāti attho.Rattindivanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Atanditāti analasā.
2648. Ye te means those bhikkhus, whether they are elders, new ones, or middle ones. Vipassanā means, by association, samatha is also included. And here, samatha and vipassanā are intended as immature; therefore, vipassanāyuttā here means endowed with immature samatha and vipassanā. Rattindivaṃ is a locative of continuous association. Atanditā means unwearied.
ratti-saddena rattiyāyeva gahaṇaṃ, udāhu ekadesassāti āha‘‘pubbarattāpararatta’’nti. Pubbā ca sā ratti cātipubbaratti,paṭhamayāmo, aparā ca sā ratti cātiapararatti,pacchimayāmo, pubbaratti ca apararatti cāti samāhāradvande samāsante a-kārapaccayaṃ katvā‘‘pubbarattāpararatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Idhāpi accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Majjhimayāme kāyadarathavūpasamanatthāya supanaṃ anuññātanti taṃ vajjetvā purimapacchimayāmesu nirantarabhāvanānuyogo kātabboti dassanatthameva vuttaṃ. Vipassanā parāyanā samathavipassanāva paraṃ ayanaṃ patiṭṭhā etesantivipassanāparāyanā,samathavipassanāya yuttapayuttā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti.
The question is whether ratti means the entire night or just a part of it. He says, "pubbarattāpararattaṃ." Pubbaratti means the earlier part of the night, the first watch; apararatti means the later part of the night, the last watch. Pubbaratti ca apararatti ca is a collective dvanda compound, with the addition of the a-kāra suffix at the end of the compound, resulting in "pubbarattāpararattaṃ." Here too, it is a locative of continuous association. What is said is merely to show that the practice of continuous development should be done in the first and last watches, avoiding the middle watch, where sleep is allowed for the calming of bodily fatigue. Vipassanā parāyanā—vipassanā, that is, samatha and vipassanā, is the ultimate refuge, the foundation for these—vipassanāparāyanā, meaning they are engaged and committed to samatha and vipassanā.
2649.Laddho phāsuvihāro yehi teladdhaphāsuvihārā,tesaṃ.Phāsuvihāroti ca sukhavihārassa mūlakāraṇattā taruṇā samathavipassanā adhippetā, paṭiladdhataruṇasamathavipassanānanti attho.Siyā na parihānitiparihāni nāma evaṃ kate na bhaveyya.
2649. Those by whom comfortable dwelling is attained are laddhaphāsuvihārā, for them. Phāsuvihāro—and because it is the root cause of comfortable dwelling, immature samatha and vipassanā are intended, meaning those who have regained immature samatha and vipassanā. Siyā na parihāniti—decline would not occur if it is done this way.
Kattikamāsaketi cīvaramāsasaṅkhāte kattikamāse pavāraṇāya saṅgaho vuttoti yojanā. Gāthābandhavasena‘‘saṅgāho’’ti dīgho kato, pavāraṇāsaṅgaho vuttoti attho. Yathāha –
Kattikamāsake means that in the Kattika month, which is counted as the robe month, a compilation of Pavāraṇā is stated. Because of the metrical form, "saṅgāho" is made long; the meaning is that a Pavāraṇā compilation is stated. As it was said:
‘‘Pavāraṇāsaṅgaho ca nāmāyaṃ vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānānaṃ thāmagatasamathavipassanānaṃ sotāpannādīnañca na dātabbo. Taruṇasamathavipassanālābhino pana sabbe vā hontu, upaḍḍhā vā, ekapuggalo vā, ekassapi vasena dātabboyeva. Dinne pavāraṇāsaṅgahe antovasse parihārova hoti, āgantukā tesaṃ senāsanaṃ gahetuṃ na labhanti. Tehipi chinnavassehi na bhavitabbaṃ, pavāretvā pana antarāpi cārikaṃ pakkamituṃ labhantī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 241).
"This compilation of Pavāraṇā should not be given to those who have abandoned their meditation subjects, to those who have strong samatha and vipassanā, or to sotāpannas, etc. But it should definitely be given on the basis of even one who has gained immature samatha and vipassanā, whether all or half have it, or even one individual. If the Pavāraṇā compilation is given, there is a decline during the rains residence period, and newcomers cannot take their lodging. Nor should they be those who have completed the rains residence period; but having performed Pavāraṇā, they are allowed to depart for a journey even in between" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 241).
pāḷitogahetabbo.
pāḷito should be taken.
Pavāraṇakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Pavāraṇā Khandhaka.
Cammakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Leather Khandhaka
2650.Eḷakā ca ajā ca migā cāti viggaho. Pasūnaṃ dvande ekattanapuṃsakattassa vibhāsitattā bahuvacananiddeso. Eḷakānañca ajānañca migānaṃ rohiteṇikuruṅgānañca. Pasadā ca migamātā capasadamigamātā,‘‘pasadamigamātuyā’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena‘‘pasada’’nti niggahitāgamo. Pasadamigamātuyā ca cammaṃ bhikkhuno vaṭṭatīti yojanā. ‘‘Migāna’’nti iminā gahitānamevettha vibhāgadassanaṃ‘‘rohiteṇī’’tiādi.Rohitādayo migavibhāgavisesā.
2650. Eḷakā ca ajā ca migā ca is the dissolution. Since the singular neuter form of a pair of animals is optional, the plural is indicated. Of eḷakas, ajas, and migas—rohitas, eṇis, and kuruṅgas. Pasadā ca migamātā ca is pasadamigamātā; instead of saying "pasadamigamātuyā," the āgama of "pasada" is included due to the metrical form. The meaning is that the hide of a pasadamigamātā is allowable for a bhikkhu. The showing of the distinctions "rohiteṇī," etc., is a division of those already included by "migāna." Rohitā, etc., are specific kinds of migas.
2651.Etesaṃyathāvuttasattānaṃ cammaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ cammaṃ dukkaṭāpattiyā vatthubhūtanti attho.Aññanti ca –
2651. Etesaṃ—except for the hides of the aforementioned beings, other hides are the basis for an offense of dukkaṭa. This is the meaning. And añña means—
‘‘Makkaṭo kāḷasīho ca, sarabho kadalīmigo;
"Monkey, black lion,
Sarabha, kadalīmiga;
And whatever fierce animals there are,
Their hides are not allowable." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 259)—
Aṭṭhakathāyapaṭikkhittaṃ cammamāha.Makkaṭonāma sākhamigo.Kāḷasīhonāma mahāmukhavānarajātiko.Vāḷamigānāma sīhabyagghādayo. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha vāḷamigāti sīhabyagghaacchataracchā, na kevalañca eteyeva, yesaṃ pana cammaṃ vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ, te ṭhapetvā avasesā antamaso gomahiṃsassamiḷārādayopi sabbe imasmiṃ atthe ‘vāḷamigā’tveva veditabbā’’ti.
He mentions the hides prohibited in the Aṭṭhakathā. Makkaṭo means a branch-dwelling animal. Kāḷasīho means a kind of large-faced monkey. Vāḷamigā means lions, tigers, etc. As it was said, "There, vāḷamiga means lions, tigers, bears, hyenas; and not only these, but all the remaining ones except those whose hides are said to be allowable, even gomahiṃsas, miḷāras, etc., should be understood as 'fierce animals' in this context."
thavikopāhanaṃ. Amānusaṃmanussacammarahitaṃ sabbaṃ cammaṃ thavikopāhane vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Etthathavikāti upāhanādikosakassa gahaṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘manussacammaṃ ṭhapetvā yena kenaci cammena upāhanā vaṭṭati. Upāhanākosakasatthakakosakakuñjikākosakesupi eseva nayo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 259).
thavikopāhanaṃ. Amānusaṃ—all hides other than human hide are allowable for bags and shoes. This is the meaning. Here, thavikā includes cases for shoes, etc. As it was said, "Except for human hide, shoes are allowable made of any kind of hide. This same principle applies to shoe cases, book cases, key cases, and needle cases" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 259).
2652.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbapaccantimesu janapadesu guṇaṅguṇūpāhana’’nti (mahāva. 259) vacanato‘‘vaṭṭanti majjhime dese, na guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā’’ti vuttaṃ.Majjhime deseti ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo’’tiādinā (mahāva. 259) vuttasīmāparicchede majjhimadese.Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanāti catupaṭalato paṭṭhāya bahupaṭalā upāhanā. Yathāha – ‘‘guṇaṅguṇūpāhanāti catupaṭalato paṭṭhāya vuccatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 245). Majjhimadese guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā na vaṭṭantīti yojanā.Antoārāmeti ettha pakaraṇato ‘‘sabbesa’’nti labbhati, gilānānamitaresañca sabbesanti attho.Sabbatthāpi cāti antoārāme, bahi cāti sabbatthāpi.Roginoti gilānassa vaṭṭantīti yojanā.
2652. Because of the statement "I allow, bhikkhus, guṇaṅguṇūpāhana in all border regions" (mahāva. 259), it is said, "vaṭṭanti majjhime dese, na guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā." Majjhime dese means in the central region within the boundary defined by "In the eastern direction is a village called Gajaṅgalaṃ," etc. (mahāva. 259). Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā means shoes with many layers, starting from four layers. As it was said, "Guṇaṅguṇūpāhana is said starting from four layers" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 245). Guṇaṅguṇūpāhana are not allowable in the central region. This is the meaning. Antoārāme—here, from the context, "sabbesa" is obtained, meaning for all, both sick and healthy. Sabbatthāpi cā means everywhere, both inside and outside the monastery. Rogino means it is allowable for the sick. This is the meaning.
2653.Puṭabaddhā khallakabaddhācāti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Viseso panetāsaṃaṭṭhakathāyamevavutto ‘‘puṭabaddhāti yonakaupāhanā vuccati, yā yāvajaṅghato sabbapādaṃ paṭicchādeti. Khallakabaddhāti paṇhipidhānatthaṃ tale khallakaṃ bandhitvā katā’’ti.Pāliguṇṭhimāca ‘‘paliguṇṭhitvā katā, yā upari pādamattameva paṭicchādeti, na jaṅgha’’ntiaṭṭhakathāyaṃdassitāva.Tūlapuṇṇāti tūlapicunā pūretvā katā.
2653. Puṭabaddhā and khallakabaddhā, etc., should be connected individually. The distinction, however, of these is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā itself: "Puṭabaddhā means Yonaka shoes, which cover the entire foot up to the shin. Khallakabaddhā means made by tying a khallaka on the sole for covering the heel." The Pāliguṇṭhimā is "made by wrapping, which covers only up to the foot above, not the shin," as shown in the Aṭṭhakathā. Tūlapuṇṇā means made by filling with cotton wool.
sabbanīlā,sā ādi yāsaṃ tāsabbanīlādayo. Ādi-saddena mahānāmarattapariyantānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Etāsaṃ sarūpaṃaṭṭhakathāyamevavuttaṃ ‘‘nīlikā umāpupphavaṇṇā hoti, pītikā kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇā, lohitikā jayasumanapupphavaṇṇā, mañjiṭṭhikā mañjiṭṭhavaṇṇā eva, kaṇhā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā, mahāraṅgarattā satapadipiṭṭhivaṇṇā, mahānāmarattā sambhinnavaṇṇā hoti paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇā.Kurundiyaṃpana ‘padumapupphavaṇṇā’ti vutta’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 246).Sabbanīlādayopi cātiapi-saddena nīlādivaddhikānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
sabbanīlā—those for which that is the beginning are sabbanīlādayo. Ādi includes the taking of those up to mahānāmaratta. The nature of these is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā itself: "Nīlikā is the color of umā flowers, pītikā is the color of kaṇikāra flowers, lohitikā is the color of jayasumana flowers, mañjiṭṭhikā is the color of mañjiṭṭha itself, kaṇhā is the color of addāriṭṭhaka, mahāraṅgarattā is the color of the back of a centipede, mahānāmarattā is a mixed color, the color of a withered palāsa leaf. In the Kurundī, however, it is said to be 'the color of a lotus flower'" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 246). Sabbanīlādayopi cā—the api includes the increases of nīla, etc.
2654.Citrāti vicitrā.Meṇḍavisāṇūpamavaddhikāti meṇḍānaṃ visāṇasadisavaddhikā, kaṇṇikaṭṭhāne meṇḍasiṅgasaṇṭhāne vaddhe yojetvā katāti attho. ‘‘Meṇḍavisāṇūpamavaddhikā’’ti idaṃ ajavisāṇūpamavaddhikānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ.Morassa piñchena parisibbitāti talesu vā vaddhesu vā morapiñchehi suttakasadisehi parisibbitā. Upāhanā na ca vaṭṭantīti yojanā.
2654. Citrā means variegated. Meṇḍavisāṇūpamavaddhikā means having an increase similar to the horns of rams, made by attaching an increase in the shape of a ram's horn in the ear-place. "Meṇḍavisāṇūpamavaddhikā" is indicative of increases similar to the horns of goats. Morassa piñchena parisibbitā means stitched around the soles or increases with peacock feathers similar to thread. It also means shoes are not allowable. This is the meaning.
2655.Majjārāti biḷārā.Kāḷakārukkhakaṇṭakā.Ūlūkāpakkhibiḷālā.Sīhāti kesarasīhādayo sīhā.Uddāti catuppadajātikā.Dīpīsaddalā.Ajinassāti evaṃnāmikassa.Parikkhaṭāti upāhanapariyante cīvare anuvātaṃ viya vuttappakāraṃ cammaṃ yojetvā katā.
2655. Majjārā means cats. Kāḷakā—tree thorns. Ūlūkā—bird-cats. Sīhā means lions with manes, etc. Uddā—a kind of quadruped. Dīpī—spotted leopards. Ajinassā—of this name. Parikkhaṭā means made by attaching leather of the type stated around the edge of the shoe, like a windbreak of cloth.
2656.Sace īdisā upāhanā labhanti, tāsaṃ vaḷañjanappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘puṭādiṃ apanetvā’’tiādi. Puṭādiṃ sabbaso chinditvā vā apanetvā vā upāhanā dhāretabbāti yojanā. Evamakatvā laddhanīhāreneva dhārentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘etāsu yaṃ kiñci labhitvā sace tāni khallakādīni apanetvā sakkā honti vaḷañjituṃ, vaḷañjetabbā, tesu pana sati vaḷañjantassa dukkaṭa’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 246).
2656. If such shoes are obtained, he says "puṭādiṃ apanetvā," etc., to show the way of alteration. Shoes should be worn either by cutting off or removing the puṭa, etc., completely. This is the meaning. There is a dukkaṭa for one who wears them in the manner thus made and obtained. As it was said, "Having obtained any of these, if it is possible to alter them by removing the khallaka, etc., they should be altered; but there is a dukkaṭa for one who wears them with those still present" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 246).
Vaṇṇabhedaṃtathā katvāti ettha ‘‘ekadesenā’’ti seso. ‘‘Sabbaso vā’’ti āharitvā sabbaso vā ekadesena vā vaṇṇabhedaṃ katvā sabbanīlādayoupāhanādhāretabbāti yojanā. Tathā akatvā dhārentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘etāsu yaṃ kiñci labhitvā rajanaṃ coḷakena puñchitvā vaṇṇaṃ bhinditvā dhāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Appamattakepi bhinne vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti. Nīlavaddhikādayopi vaṇṇabhedaṃ katvā dhāretabbā.
Vaṇṇabhedaṃ tathā katvāti: Here, "ekadesena" (partially) is understood. Bringing in "sabbaso vā" (or entirely), the construction is: having made a color difference either entirely or partially, all blue and other upāhanā (footwear) should be worn. If one wears them without doing so, there is a dukaṭa. As it was said, "Having obtained any of these dyes, wiping it with a rag and changing the color, it is permissible to wear. It is permissible even if a very small amount is changed." Nīlavaddhikā and other (footwear) should also be worn after changing the color.
2657.Tatthaṭhāne passāvapādukā, vaccapādukā, ācamanapādukāti tisso pādukāyo ṭhapetvāsabbāpi pādukātālapattikādibhedā sabbāpi saṅkamanīyā pādukā dhāretuṃ na vaṭṭantīti yojanā.
2657.Tattha: In that place, having placed three pādukā (footwear): a urination-pādukā, a defecation-pādukā, and a rinsing-pādukā, the construction is: all pādukā, all saṅkamanīya pādukā (footwear for walking), differentiated as tālapattikā and others, are not allowed to be worn.
2658.Atikkantapamāṇaṃ uccāsayanasaññitaṃ āsandiñceva pallaṅkañca sevamānassa dukkaṭanti yojanā.Āsandīvuttalakkhaṇāva.Pallaṅkoti pādesu āharimāni vāḷarūpāni ṭhapetvā kato, ekasmiṃyeva dārumhi kaṭṭhakammavasena chinditvā katāni asaṃhārimāni tatraṭṭhāneva vāḷarūpāni yassa pādesu santi, evarūpo pallaṅko kappatīti ‘‘āharimenā’’ti imināva dīpitaṃ. ‘‘Akappiyarūpakato akappiyamañco pallaṅko’’ti hisārasamāsevuttaṃ.
2658.The construction is: for one using a seat and a couch that exceed the measure and are designated as high, there is a dukaṭa. Āsandī (seat) is as defined before. Pallaṅkoti (couch): a couch made by placing Vāḷarūpa-like (animal-shaped) supports on the legs, or one made by cutting animal-shaped supports that cannot be removed from a single piece of wood using carpentry, which remain in that same place on its legs—such a couch is allowable. This is indicated by "āharimenā." For in the Sārasamāsa, it is said, "An unallowable couch or pallaṅka is one made in an unallowable form."
2659.Gonakanti dīghalomakamahākojavaṃ. Caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni, kāḷavaṇṇañca hoti. ‘‘Caturaṅgulato ūnakappamāṇalomo kojavo vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Kuttakanti soḷasannaṃ nāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccanayoggaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Cittanti bhitticchiddādikavicitraṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Paṭikanti uṇṇāmayaṃ setattharaṇaṃ.Paṭalikanti ghanapupphakaṃ uṇṇāmayaṃ lohitattharaṇaṃ, yo ‘‘āmalakapatto’’tipi vuccati.
2659.Gonakanti: a large long-haired woolen rug. It is said that its hairs are four finger-widths or more, and it is black in color. "A woolen rug with hairs less than four finger-widths in measure is allowable," some say. Kuttakanti: a woolen spread suitable for sixteen dancing girls to stand and dance on. Cittanti: a woolen spread variegated with designs like wall openings, etc. Paṭikanti: a white woolen spread. Paṭalikanti: a thick, flower-patterned, red woolen spread, which is also called "āmalakapatto" (embroidery resembling myrobalan leaves).
Ekantalominti ubhato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Vikatinti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitraṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇa’’nti dīghanikā.Tūlikanti rukkhatūlalatātūlapoṭakitūlasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatarapuṇṇaṃ pakatitūlikaṃ.Uddalomikanti ekato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Uddalomīti ubhatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇa’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15)dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.Sārasamāsepana ‘‘uddalomīti ekato uggatapupphaṃ. Ekantalomīti ubhato uggatapuppha’’nti vuttaṃ.
Ekantalominti: a woolen spread with hair raised on both sides. Vikatinti: a woolen spread variegated with various forms like lions and tigers. In the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā, "Ekantalomīti: a woolen spread with pile on one side," is said. Tūlikanti: a filled cushion of genuine cotton, namely one filled with any of the three types of cotton: tree cotton, creeper cotton, or pod cotton. Uddalomikanti: a woolen spread with hair raised on one side. In the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā, "Uddalomīti: a woolen spread with pile on two sides. Ekantalomīti: a woolen spread with pile on one side," is said (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15). But in the Sārasamāsa, it is said, "Uddalomīti: with flowers raised on one side. Ekantalomīti: with flowers raised on both sides."
2660.Kaṭṭissanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyakaṭṭissamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti koseyyakasaṭamaya’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.15)ācariyadhammapālattherenavuttaṃ, kantitakoseyyapuṭamayanti attho.Koseyyanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ kosiyasuttamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ. Ratanaparisibbanarahitaṃ suddhakoseyyaṃ pana vaṭṭati.
2660.Kaṭṭissanti: a covering made of silk and kaṭṭissa (a kind of cloth), embroidered with jewels. In the Dīghanikāyaṭīkā, Ācariya Dhammapāla Thera said, "Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti: made of silk mixed with kaṭṭissa (a kind of cloth)" (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.15), meaning made of cut silk cloth. Koseyyanti: a covering made of silk thread, embroidered with jewels. However, pure silk without jewel embroidery is allowable.
Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃpanettha ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni na vaṭṭantī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15) vuttaṃ. Tattha‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlika’’nti etena ratanaparisibbanarahitāpi tūlikā na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.‘‘Ratanaparisibbitāni na vaṭṭantī’’ti iminā pana yāni ratanaparisibbitāni, tāni bhūmattharaṇavasena yathānurūpaṃ mañcādīsu ca upanetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca vinayapariyāyaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabbattā idha vuttanayenevettha vinicchayo veditabbo. Suttantikadesanāyaṃ pana gahaṭṭhānampi vasena vuttattā nesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ…pe… vaṭṭantīti vutta’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15) apare.
In the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā, it is said here, "Except for a tūlika, all the gonaka and others embroidered with jewels are not allowable" (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15). There, "ṭhapetvā tūlika" (except for a tūlika) indicates that even a tūlika without jewel embroidery is not allowable. "Ratanaparisibbitāni na vaṭṭantī" (those embroidered with jewels are not allowable) indicates that those embroidered with jewels are allowable to be used on couches and other (furniture) as appropriate in the manner of a ground covering. Here, the decision should be understood according to the method stated here because it is heavy (with restrictions) having reached the Vinaya context. However, in the Suttanta teaching, it is said even with the laity in mind; therefore, to include them, "ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ…pe… vaṭṭantīti vutta" (except for a tūlika...etc...is said) (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15), say others.
Hatthiassarathattharanti hatthipiṭṭhe attharitaṃ attharaṇaṃ hatthattharaṇaṃ nāma. Assarathattharepi eseva nayo.Kadalimigapavara-paccattharaṇakampi cāti kadalimigacammaṃ nāma atthi, tena kataṃ pavarapaccattharaṇanti attho. Taṃ kira setavatthassa upari kadalimigacammaṃ pattharitvā sibbetvā karonti.Pi-saddena ajinappaveṇī gahitā.Ajinappaveṇīnāma ajinacammehi mañcapamāṇena sibbetvā katā paveṇī. Tāni kira cammāni sukhumatarāni, tasmā dupaṭṭatipaṭṭāni katvā sibbanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajinappaveṇī’’ti.
Hatthiassarathattharanti: a spread spread on the back of an elephant is called a hatthattharaṇa (elephant spread). The same method applies to horse and chariot spreads. Kadalimigapavara-paccattharaṇakampi cāti: there is a kadalimiga hide, meaning a fine covering made from it. It is said that they make it by spreading the kadalimiga hide over white cloth and sewing it. The word Pi includes ajinappaveṇī. Ajinappaveṇī nāma: a mat made by sewing together ajina hides to the size of a couch. It is said that those hides are very thin; therefore, they sew them together making them two or three layers thick. Hence, it is said "ajinappaveṇī."
2661.Rattavitānassa heṭṭhāti kusumbhādirattassa lohitavitānassa heṭṭhā kappiyapaccattharaṇehi atthataṃ sayanāsanañca. Kasāvarattavitānassa pana heṭṭhā kappiyapaccattharaṇena atthataṃ vaṭṭati. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘heṭṭhā akappiye’’tiādi.
2661.Rattavitānassa heṭṭhāti: a sleeping or sitting place covered with allowable coverings under a red canopy, such as one dyed with safflower. However, it is allowable (to use a sitting or sleeping place) covered with an allowable covering under a kasāva (ochre)-colored canopy. Therefore, he will say, "heṭṭhā akappiye" (underneath, if unallowable), etc.
Dvidhārattūpadhānakanti sīsapasse, pādapasse cāti ubhatopasse paññattarattabibbohanavantañca sayanāsanaṃ. Idaṃ sabbaṃ akappiyaṃ paribhuñjato dukkaṭaṃ hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ pana ekameva upadhānaṃ ubhosu passesu rattaṃ vā hoti padumavaṇṇaṃ vā vicitraṃ vā, sace pamāṇayuttaṃ, vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 254)aṭṭhakathāvinicchayoeteneva byatirekato vutto hoti. ‘‘Yebhuyyarattānipi dve bibbohanāni na vaṭṭantī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. Teneva yebhuyyena rattavitānampi na vaṭṭatīti viññāyati.
Dvidhā rattūpadhānakanti: a sleeping or sitting place that has two red pillows—one at the head end and one at the foot end. All this is unallowable. There is a dukaṭa for using what is unallowable. Aṭṭhakathāvinicchayo (commentarial judgement): "However, if there is only one pillow that is red, lotus-colored, or variegated on both sides, if it is of proper size, it is allowable" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 254) is stated distinctively by this very (statement). Gaṇṭhipada (Sub-commentary): "Even two predominantly red pillows are not allowable" is said. Therefore, it is understood that even a predominantly red canopy is not allowable.
dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘alohitakāni dvepi vaṭṭantiyeva, tato uttari labhitvā aññesaṃ dātabbāni, dātuṃ asakkonto mañce tiriyaṃ attharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjitumpi labhatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15) avisesena vuttaṃ.Senāsanakkhandhakasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃpana ‘‘agilānassa sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti dvayameva vaṭṭati, gilānassa bibbohanāni santharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjitumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297) vuttattā gilānoyeva mañce tiriyaṃ attharitvā nipajjituṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ.
In the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā, "Even two non-red (pillows) are allowable. Having obtained more than that, they should be given to others. If one is unable to give, it is permissible to spread (the extra pillow) sideways on the couch, put a covering over it, and lie down" (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15) is said without distinction. However, in the Senāsanakkhandhakasaṃvaṇṇanā, "For one who is not ill, only two are allowable: a head pillow and a foot pillow. For one who is ill, it is permissible to spread pillows, put a covering over them, and lie down" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297) is said. Therefore, it should be understood that only a sick person is allowed to spread (pillows) sideways on the couch and lie down.
2662.Uddhaṃ setavitānampi heṭṭhā akappiye paccattharaṇe sati na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Tasminti akappiyapaccattharaṇe.
2662.A white canopy above is also not allowable if there is an unallowable covering underneath. Tasminti: in that unallowable covering.
2663.‘‘Ṭhapetvā’’ti iminā āsandādittayassa vaṭṭanākāro natthīti dīpeti.Sesaṃ sabbanti gonakādi dvidhārattūpadhānakapariyantaṃ sabbaṃ.Gihisantakanti gihīnaṃ santakaṃ tehiyeva paññattaṃ, iminā pañcasu sahadhammikesu aññatarena vā tesaṃ āṇattiyā vā paññattaṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.Labhateti nisīdituṃ labhati.
2663.‘‘Ṭhapetvā’’ti: By this, he indicates that there is no way the three—seat, etc.—are allowable. Sesaṃ sabbanti: all the rest—up to the two red pillows. Gihisantakanti: belonging to the laity, provided by them. By this, he indicates that what is provided by one of the five sahadhammika (co-religionists) or by their order is not allowable. Labhateti: he is allowed to sit.
2664.Taṃ kattha labhatīti padesaniyamaṃ dassetumāha‘‘dhammāsane’’tiādi.Dhammāsaneti etthaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yadi dhammāsane saṅghikampi gonakādiṃ bhikkhūhi anāṇattā ārāmikādayo sayameva paññāpenti ceva nīharanti ca, etaṃ gihivikatanīhāraṃ nāma. Iminā gihivikatanīhārena vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathā 56 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ.Bhattagge vāti vihāre nisīdāpetvā parivesanaṭṭhāne vā bhojanasālāyaṃ vā. Apisaddena gihīnaṃ gehepi tehi paññatte gonakādimhi nisīdituṃ anāpattīti dīpeti.Dhammāsanādipadesaniyamanena tato aññattha gihipaññattepi tattha nisīdituṃ na vaṭṭatīti byatirekato viññāyati.
2664.To show where that is allowed, he says ‘‘dhammāsane’’tiādi. Dhammāsaneti: Here, in the Aṭṭhakathā, "If in a dhamma seat, even a gonaka or other item belonging to the Saṅgha is provided and removed by the ārāmika (monastery attendant) or others on their own without the order of the monks, this is called removal violated by the laity. It is allowable with this removal violated by the laity" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathā 56 atthato samānaṃ) is said. Bhattagge vāti: either in the refectory, in a place where one is made to sit and served in the monastery, or in the dining hall. By the word api (also), he indicates that there is no offense in sitting on a gonaka or other item provided by the laity even in their home. By specifying the places dhammāsanā (preaching hall), etc., it is understood distinctively that it is not allowable to sit there even if it is provided by the laity elsewhere.
Bhūmattharaṇaketi ettha ‘‘kate’’ti seso.Tatthāti saṅghike vā gihisantake vā gonakādimhi sahadhammikehi anāṇattehi gihīhi eva bhūmattharaṇe kate.Sayitunti upari attano paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati.Api-saddena nisīditumpi vāti samuccinoti. ‘‘Bhūmattharaṇake’’ti iminā gihīhi eva mañcādīsu sayanatthaṃ atthate upari attano paccattharaṇaṃ datvā sayituṃ vā nisīdituṃ vā na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.
Bhūmattharaṇaketi: Here, "kate" (having been made) is understood. Tatthāti: when a ground covering is made by the laity themselves in a gonaka or other item belonging to the Saṅgha or to the laity without the order of the sahadhammika (co-religionists). Sayitunti: it is allowable to lie down after putting one's own covering on top. The word Api- also includes "to sit." Bhūmattharaṇaketi: By this, he indicates that it is not allowable to lie down or sit on a couch or other (furniture) spread by the laity themselves for sleeping after putting one's own covering on top.
Cammakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Cammakkhandhaka.
Bhesajjakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Bhesajjakkhandhaka
2665.Gahapatissa bhūmi, sammutibhūmi, ussāvanantikābhūmi, gonisādibhūmīti kappiyabhūmiyo catasso hontīti vuttā bhagavatāti yojanā.
2665.The Blessed One said that there are four allowable grounds: the ground of a householder, the ground of consent, the ground of announcement, and the gonisāda ground, is the construction.
2666.Kathaṃ kappiyaṃ kattabbanti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, catasso kappiyabhūmiyo ussāvanantikaṃ gonisādikaṃ gahapatiṃ sammuti’’nti (mahāva. 295) evaṃ catasso bhūmiyo uddharitvā tāsaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ dassetumāha‘‘saṅghassā’’tiādi. Saṅghassa santakaṃ vāsatthāya kataṃ gehaṃ vā bhikkhuno santakaṃ vāsatthāya kataṃ gehaṃ vāti yojanā.Kappiyaṃ kattabbanti kappiyaṭṭhānaṃ kattabbaṃ.Sahaseyyappahonakanti sabbacchannaparicchannādilakkhaṇena sahaseyyārahaṃ.
2666.How should it be made allowable? To show the common characteristics of those four grounds after extracting those four grounds, ‘‘saṅghassā’’tiādi, beginning with "I allow, monks, four allowable grounds: announcement, gonisādika, householder, and consent" (mahāva. 295), the construction is: either a house belonging to the Saṅgha and made for dwelling or a house belonging to a monk and made for dwelling. Kappiyaṃ kattabbanti: An allowable place should be made. Sahaseyyappahonakanti: suitable for joint lodging due to having characteristics such as being fully roofed and enclosed.
2667.Idāni catassopi bhūmiyo sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘ṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā aññehi kappiyabhūmiyā atthāya dinnaṃ vā tesaṃ santakaṃ vā yaṃ gehaṃ, idaṃ evagahapatibhūmi nāmāti yojanā.
2667.Now, to show each of the four grounds in its own form, he says ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Setting aside the monk, whatever house is given by others for the purpose of an allowable ground or belongs to them, this itself is called the Gahapati (householder) ground, is the construction.
2668.Yāpana kuṭi saṅghenasammatāñattidutiyāya kammavācāya, sā sammutikā nāma. Tassā sammannanakāle kammavācaṃ avatvā apalokanaṃ vā kātuṃ vaṭṭatevāti yojanā.
2668.Moreover, the hut that is sammatā (consented to) by the Saṅgha with a motion and a second pronouncement is called sammutikā. It is indeed permissible to make an announcement or an apalokana (invitation for agreement), without reciting the formal motion at the time of its consent, is the construction.
2669-70.Paṭhamaiṭṭhakāya vā paṭhamapāsāṇassa vā paṭhamatthambhassa vāādi-ggahaṇena paṭhamabhittipādassa vā ṭhapaneparesumanussesu ukkhipitvā ṭhapentesu samantato parivāretvā ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karoma, kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti abhikkhaṇaṃ vadantehi āmasitvā vā sayameva ukkhipitvā vā iṭṭhakāṭhapeyyapāsāṇo vā thambho vā bhittipādo vā ṭhapeyya ṭhapetabbo, ayaṃ ussāvanantikā kuṭīti yojanā.
2669-70.At the placing of the first brick, or the first stone, or the first pillar, or, by taking ādi (beginning), the first foundation of a wall, while other people are lifting and placing (it), having surrounded (it) on all sides, while constantly saying, "We are making an allowable hut, we are making an allowable hut," having touched (it) or having lifted (it) oneself, the brick should be placed, or the stone, or the pillar, or the wall foundation should be placed, this is called an ussāvanantikā kuṭī (hut on the ground of announcement), is the construction.
2671.Iṭṭhakādipatiṭṭhānanti paṭhamiṭṭhakādīnaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ.Vadatanti ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karoma, kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti vadantānaṃ.Samakālaṃ tu vaṭṭatīti ekakālaṃ vaṭṭati, iminā ‘‘sace hi aniṭṭhite vacane thambho patiṭṭhāti, appatiṭṭhite vā tasmiṃ vacanaṃ niṭṭhāti, akatā hoti kappiyakuṭī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295)aṭṭhakathāvinicchayosūcito.
2671.Iṭṭhakādipatiṭṭhānanti: the placing of the first brick, etc., on the ground. Vadatanti: of those saying, "We are making an allowable hut, we are making an allowable hut." Samakālaṃ tu vaṭṭatīti: it is allowable at the same time. By this, the Aṭṭhakathāvinicchayo (commentarial judgement) is indicated: "If the pillar is established before the statement is finished, or the statement is finished before it is established, the allowable hut is not made" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295).
2672.Ārāmo sakalo aparikkhitto vā yebhuyyato aparikkhitto vāti duvidhopiviññūhivinayadharehi ‘‘gonisādī’’ti vuccati. Pavesanivāraṇābhāvena paviṭṭhānaṃ gunnaṃ nisajjāyogato tathā vuccatīti yojanā.
2672.The entire monastery, whether unfenced or mostly unfenced, is called "gonisādī" by the Viññūhi (wise), the Vinaya-holders. Because there is no prevention of entry and because it is suitable for cows that have entered to sit, therefore it is called that, is the construction.
2673.Payojanaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ettha pakkañcā’’tiādi.Āmisanti purimakālikadvayaṃ. ‘‘Āmisa’’nti iminā nirāmisaṃ itarakālikadvayaṃ akappiyakuṭiyaṃ vutthampi pakkampi kappatīti dīpeti.
2673.To show the purpose, he says ‘‘ettha pakkañcā’’tiādi. Āmisanti: the two purimakālika (foods stored for a short period). By Āmisanti (material things), he indicates that nirāmisa (immaterial things) and the two itarakālika (foods stored for a longer period) and what is cooked, even if it has stayed in an unallowable hut, are allowable.
2674-5.Imā kappiyakuṭiyo kadā jahitavatthukā hontīti āha‘‘ussāvanantikā yā sā’’tiādi. Yā ussāvanantikā yesu thambhādīsu adhiṭṭhitā, sā tesu thambhādīsu apanītesu tadaññesupi thambhādīsu tiṭṭhatīti yojanā.
2674-5.When do these allowable huts become abandoned (i.e., no longer valid)? He says ‘‘ussāvanantikā yā sā’’tiādi. The ussāvanantikā (ground of announcement) that is established on which ever pillars, etc., when those pillars, etc., are removed, it remains even on other pillars, etc., is the construction.
parikkhittāvatiādīhi jahitavatthukā siyā.Parikkhittāti ca ‘‘ārāmo pana upaḍḍhaparikkhittopi bahutaraṃ parikkhittopi parikkhittoyeva nāmā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295)kurundimahāpaccariyādīsuvuttattā na kevalaṃ sabbaparikkhittāva, upaḍḍhaparikkhittāpi yebhuyyaparikkhittāpi gahetabbā.
parikkhittāvatiādīhi jahitavatthukā siyā: it may be abandoned with the fenced (grounds), etc. Parikkhittāti ca: and "parikkhittā (fenced) also means that a monastery is considered "fenced" whether it is half-fenced or mostly fenced" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295) is said in the Kurundimahāpaccariyādīsu. Therefore, not only those that are fully fenced, but also those that are half-fenced or mostly fenced should be taken (into consideration).
Sesāti gahapatisammutikuṭiyo. Chadananāsato jahitavatthukā siyunti yojanā.Chadananāsatoti ettha ‘‘gopānasimattaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti seso. Sace gopānasīnaṃ upari ekampi pakkhapāsamaṇḍalaṃ atthi, rakkhati. Yatra panimā catassopi kappiyabhūmiyo natthi, tattha kiṃ kātabbaṃ? Anupasampannassa datvā tassa santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
Sesā ti: Ready-made huts with householder consent. The meaning is that they should be such that the main structure is sound even if the roof is removed. Chadananāsato ti: Here, the remainder is "leaving only the framework." If there is even one covering of roofing tiles above the framework, it protects it. But where none of these four allowable grounds exist, what should be done? It should be given to a non-ordained person, made their property, and then used.
2676.Bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ hatthato paṭiggaho ca tesaṃ sannidhi ca tesaṃ antovutthañca bhikkhussa vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2676. The meaning is that receiving from the hands of others except a bhikkhu, storing with them, and dwelling within their premises is allowable for a bhikkhu.
2677.Bhikkhussa santakaṃ saṅghikampi vā akappiyabhūmiyaṃ sahaseyyappahonake gehe antovutthañca antopakkañca bhikkhussa na vaṭṭati. Bhikkhuniyā santakaṃ saṅghikampi vā akappiyabhūmiyaṃ sahaseyyappahonake gehe antovutthañca antopakkañca bhikkhuniyā na vaṭṭatīti evaṃubhinnaṃbhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2677.It is not allowable for a bhikkhu to dwell or cook inside a dwelling that belongs to a bhikkhuni, even if it belongs to the Sangha, if it is on unallowable ground, or if the dwelling is large enough for shared occupancy. Similarly, it is not allowable for a bhikkhuni to dwell or cook inside a dwelling that belongs to a bhikkhu, even if it belongs to the Sangha, if it is on unallowable ground, or if the dwelling is large enough for shared occupancy. Thus, the meaning is that it is not allowable for both bhikkhus and bhikkhunis.
2678.Akappakuṭiyāti akappiyakuṭiyā, ‘‘akappiyabhūmiyaṃ sahaseyyappahonake gehe’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttāya akappiyabhūmiyāti attho.Ādi-saddena navanītatelamadhuphāṇitānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
2678.Akappakuṭiyā ti: In an unallowable hut, the meaning of unallowable ground is “on unallowable ground in a dwelling large enough for shared occupancy,” as stated in the Aṭṭhakathā. The term ādi includes taking নবনীত, oil, honey and molasses.
2679.Tehevaantovutthehisappiādīhisattāhakālikehi saha bhikkhunā pakkaṃ taṃ yāvajīvikaṃ nirāmisaṃ sattāhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatevāti yojanā.
2679. The meaning is that food cooked by a bhikkhu with ghee and other seven-day allowable items, after storing them, may be consumed as a lifetime allowable without meat for seven days.
2680.Pakkaṃsāmaṃpakkaṃtaṃyāvajīvikaṃ sace āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ paribhuñjati, antovutthañca bhuñjati, kiñca bhiyyo sāmaṃpakkañca bhuñjatīti yojanā. Yāvajīvikassa āmisasaṃsaṭṭhassa āmisagatikattā‘‘antovuttha’’nti vuttaṃ.
2680.Pakkaṃ: Cooked by oneself; taṃ: that lifetime allowable. If one consumes it mixed with meat, and consumes what has been stored, and furthermore consumes what has been cooked oneself, that is not allowable. Because a lifetime allowable mixed with meat goes in the direction of meat, it is called ‘‘antovuttha.’’
2682.Udakaṃna hoti kālikaṃcatūsu kālikesu asaṅgahitattā.
2682.Water is not kālika because it is not included in the four kālikas.
2683.Tikālikāyāvakālikā yāmakālikā sattāhakālikāti tayo kālikā paṭiggahavaseneva attano attano kālaṃ atikkamitvā bhuttā dosakarā honti, tatiyaṃ sattāhātikkame nissaggiyapācittiyavatthuttā abhuttampi dosakaranti yojanā.
2683. The three kālikas—tikālikā yāvakālikā, yāmakālikā, sattāhakālikā—become blameworthy if consumed after their respective time limits have passed, due to accepting them. The meaning is that the third, sattāhakālika, is blameworthy even if not consumed, because it becomes an object for Nissaggiya Pācittiya if the seven days are exceeded.
‘‘Bhuttā dosakarā’’ti iminā purimakālikadvayaṃ paṭiggahetvā kālātikkamanamattena āpattiyā kāraṇaṃ na hoti, bhuttameva hoti. Sattāhakālikaṃ kālātikkamena aparibhuttampi āpattiyā kāraṇaṃ hotīti dīpeti. Tesu sattāhakālikeyeva visesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘abhuttaṃ tatiyampi cā’’ti.Ca-saddo tu-saddatthe. Yāvajīvikaṃ pana paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvaṃ paribhuñjiyamānaṃ itarakālikasaṃsaggaṃ vinā dosakaraṃ na hotīti na gahitaṃ.
‘‘Bhuttā dosakarā’’ ti this indicates that the first two kālikas do not incur an offense merely by exceeding the time limit after being received; it only occurs if they are consumed. The sattāhakālika, however, incurs an offense even if not consumed if the time limit is exceeded. To show the distinction in the sattāhakālika itself, he says, ‘‘abhuttaṃ tatiyampi cā’’ ti. The word Ca is in the sense of the word tu. However, a yāvajīvika, once received, is not blameworthy as long as it is consumed throughout one's life without mixing it with other kālikas, therefore it is not included.
2684.Ambādayo saddā rukkhānaṃ nāmabhūtā taṃtaṃphalepi vattamānā idha upacāravasena tajje pānake vuttā, tenevāha‘‘pānakaṃ mata’’nti.Cocaṃaṭṭhikakadalipānaṃ.Mocaṃitarakadalipānaṃ.Madhūti muddikaphalānaṃ rasaṃ.Muddikāti sītodake madditānaṃ muddikaphalānaṃ pānaṃ. ‘‘Sālūkapānanti rattuppalanīluppalādīnaṃ sālūke madditvā katapāna’’ntipāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāya(mahāva. aṭṭha. 300) ca sālūka-saddassa dīghavasena saṃyogadassanato‘‘sālu phārusakañcā’’ti gāthābandhavasena rasso kato.
2684.Words such as ambādayo, which are names of trees, apply to their respective fruits as well, but here they are referred to in terms of their juice through courtesy, hence he said ‘‘pānakaṃ mata’’nti. Cocaṃ: juice of seed-bananas. Mocaṃ: juice of other bananas. Madhū: juice of grapes. Muddikā: juice of grapes crushed in cold water. In the Pāḷi and Aṭṭhakathā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300), "Sālūkapānanti rattuppalanīluppalādīnaṃ sālūke madditvā katapāna," the long vowel and conjunct consonant of the word sālūka are seen, so in the verse ‘‘sālu phārusakañcā’’ it is made short.
Sālūkaṃkumuduppalānaṃ phalarasaṃ.Khuddasikkhāvaṇṇanāyaṃpana ‘‘sālūkapānaṃ nāma rattuppalanīluppalādīnaṃ kiñjakkhareṇūhi katapāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Phārusaka’ntiādīsu eko rukkho’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. Tassa phalarasophārusakaṃnāma. Etesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ phalānaṃ raso udakasambhinno vaṭṭati, sītudake maddito pasanno nikkasaṭova vaṭṭati, udakena pana asambhinno raso yāvakāliko.
Sālūkaṃ: The fruit juice of kumuda and uppala lotuses. In the Khuddasikkhāvaṇṇanā, however, it is said, "Sālūkapānaṃ nāma rattuppalanīluppalādīnaṃ kiñjakkhareṇūhi katapāna." In Gaṇṭhipada, "Phārusaka'ntiādīsu eko rukkho" is said. The fruit juice of that is called phārusakaṃ. The juice of these eight fruits mixed with water is allowable; crushed in cold water, clarified, and without sediment is allowable; but juice unmixed with water is yāvakālika.
2685.Phalanti ambādiphalaṃ.Savatthukapaṭiggahoti pānavatthukānaṃ phalānaṃ paṭiggaho. Vasati ettha pānantivatthu,phalaṃ, vatthunā saha vaṭṭatītisavatthukaṃ,pānaṃ, savatthukassa paṭiggaho savatthukapaṭiggaho. Savatthukassa paṭiggahaṃ nāma vatthupaṭiggahaṇamevāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pānavatthukānaṃ phalānaṃ paṭiggaho’’ti.
2685.Phalaṃ ti: Fruits such as mangoes. Savatthukapaṭiggaho ti: Receiving fruits that are drinking items. Vatthu is where the drink resides, i.e., the fruit. Savatthukaṃ is allowable with the fruit, i.e., the drink. Savatthukassa paṭiggaho savatthukapaṭiggaho. Considering that receiving with the fruit is simply receiving the fruit, it is said, "pānavatthukānaṃ phalānaṃ paṭiggaho."
2686.‘‘Sukoṭṭetvā’’ti vuccamānattā‘‘ambapakka’’nti āmakameva ambaphalaṃ vuccati.Udaketi sītodake.Parissavaṃparissāvitaṃ.Katvāti madhuādīhi abhisaṅkharitvā. Yathāha – ‘‘tadahupaṭiggahitehi madhusakkarakappūrādīhi yojetvā kātabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300).Pātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha vinicchayo ‘‘evaṃ kataṃ purebhattameva kappati, anupasampannehi kataṃ labhitvā pana purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ purebhattaṃ sāmisaparibhogenāpi vaṭṭati, pacchābhattaṃ nirāmisaparibhogena yāva aruṇuggamanā vaṭṭatiyeva. Esa nayo sabbapānesū’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvutto.
2686.Because it is said "Sukoṭṭetvā," ‘‘ambapakka’’nti only unripe mango fruits are referred to. Udake ti: In cold water. Parissavaṃ: Filtered. Katvā ti: Having flavored it with honey and so on. As it was said – "it should be made by combining it with honey, sugar, camphor, etc., that have been received." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300). Pātuṃ vaṭṭatī ti: The decision here is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "What is prepared in this way is suitable only before the meal; however, having obtained what has been prepared by those not fully ordained and received it before the meal, it is suitable even with meat consumption before the meal, and with non-meat consumption after the meal, it is definitely suitable until sunrise. This method applies to all drinks."
2687.Sesapānakesupīti jambupānakādīsupi.
2687.Sesapānakesupī ti: Even in other drinks such as jambu juice.
2688.Ucchuraso antogadhattā idha vutto, na pana yāmakālikattā, so pana sattāhakālikoyeva.
2688.Sugarcane juice is mentioned here because it is contained within, but not because it is yāmakālika; it is only sattāhakālika.
2689.Madhukassa rasanti madhukapupphassa rasaṃ. Ettha madhukapuppharaso aggipāko vā hotu ādiccapāko vā, pacchābhattaṃ na vaṭṭati. Purebhattampi yaṃ pānaṃ gahetvā majjaṃ karonti, so ādito paṭṭhāya na vaṭṭati. Madhukapupphaṃ pana allaṃ vā sukkhaṃ vā bhajjitaṃ vā tena kataphāṇitaṃ vā yato paṭṭhāya majjaṃ na karonti, taṃ sabbaṃ purebhattaṃ vaṭṭati.
2689.Madhukassa rasaṃ ti: Juice of the madhuka flower. Here, whether the madhuka flower juice is cooked by fire or by the sun, it is not allowable after the meal. That juice which is taken to make alcohol is not allowable from the beginning. However, madhuka flowers, whether fresh or dry or fried, or molasses made from them, which are not used to make alcohol from the start, are all allowable before the meal.
Pakkaḍākarasanti pakkassa yāvakālikassa rasaṃ. Sabbo pattaraso yāmakāliko vuttoti yojanā.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yāvakālikapattānañhi purebhattaṃyeva raso kappatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300) imameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.
Pakkaḍākarasaṃ ti: The juice of ripe yāvakālika leaves. The meaning is that all leaf juices are said to be yāmakālika. In the Aṭṭhakathā, "yāvakālikapattānañhi purebhattaṃyeva raso kappatī" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300) is said with this very meaning in mind.
2690.Sānulomānaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ phalajaṃ rasaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo phalajo rasovikāleyāmasaññite anulomato paribhuñjituṃ anuññātoti yojanā.
2690.Excluding the fruit juice of the seven grains that are in accordance, all fruit juice is allowed to be consumed in accordance vikāle, at the time called yāma.
2691.Yāvakālikapattānaṃ sītudake madditvā kato rasopi apakko, ādiccapākopi vikāle pana vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2691.The juice of yāvakālika leaves, crushed in cold water, whether uncooked or cooked by the sun, is also allowable in the afternoon.
2692-3.Sattadhaññānulomāni sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘tālañcanāḷikerañcā’’tiādi.Aparaṇṇaṃmuggādi.‘‘Sattadhaññānulomika’’nti iminā etesaṃ raso yāvakāliko yāmakālasaṅkhāte vikāle paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.
2692-3.To show the seven grains that are in accordance in form, he says ‘‘tālañcanāḷikerañcā’’ and so on. Aparaṇṇaṃ: Mung bean and so on. ‘‘Sattadhaññānulomika’’nti this shows that the juice of these is yāvakālika and not allowed to be consumed in the afternoon, which is counted as yāmakāla.
2695.Evamādīnaṃ khuddakānaṃ phalānaṃ raso pana aṭṭhapānānulomattāanulomikeyāmakālikānulomikeniddiṭṭhokathitoti yojanā.
2695.The juice of such small fruits is not niddiṭṭho anulomike in accordance with the eight drinks, in accordance with the yāmakālika because they are anulomike, that have been spoken about.
2696.Idhaimasmiṃ loke sānulomassa dhaññassa phalajaṃ rasaṃ ṭhapetvā ayāmakāliko añño phalaraso natthīti yojanā, sabbo yāmakālikoyevāti dīpeti.
2696.Idha: In this world, excluding the fruit juice of grains that are in accordance, there is no other fruit juice that is not yāmakālika, meaning that all are yāmakālika.
Bhesajjakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Bhesajjakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Kathinakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Kathinakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
2697.Vutthavassānaṃpurimikāya vassaṃ upagantvā yāva mahāpavāraṇā, tāva ratticchedaṃ akatvā vutthavassānaṃbhikkhūnaṃekassa vā dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ atirekānaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃpañcannaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃvakkhamānānaṃ anāmantacārādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ paṭilābhakāraṇā munipuṅgavosabbesaṃ agārikādimunīnaṃ sakalaguṇagaṇehi uttamo bhagavā kathinatthāraṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvutthānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kathinaṃ attharitu’’nti (mahāva. 306)abrvikathesīti yojanā.
2697.Vutthavassānaṃ: For those who have entered the rains in the earlier rains residence and observed the rains without a break until the great Pavāraṇā, bhikkhūnaṃ: for one, two, three, four, five, or more bhikkhus, pañcannaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ: because of obtaining the five benefits to be mentioned, namely, wandering without invitation and so on, munipuṅgavo: the Buddha, the best of all sages, including those who are householders, the Blessed One, supreme with all the groups of virtues, abrvi spoke, said, ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvutthānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kathinaṃ attharitu’’nti (mahāva. 306) regarding the spreading of the Kathina.
aṭṭhakathāyaatthārakassa bhikkhuno saṅghassa kathinadussadānakammaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vutthavassavasena purimikāya vassaṃ upagantvā paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāritā labhanti, chinnavassā vā pacchimikāya upagatā vā na labhanti. Aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vutta’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 306) idaṃaṭṭhakathāyaānisaṃsalābhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na kammaṃ.
The Aṭṭhakathā refers to the Sangha's Kathina-cloth-giving act for the bhikkhu who spreads it. "Those who have entered the rains residence in the earlier rains and have completed Pavāraṇā at the first Pavāraṇā receive it, but those who have interrupted their rains residence or entered in the later rains do not receive it. Those who have observed the rains in another monastery also do not receive it," this is said in the Mahāpaccariya (mahāva. aṭṭha. 306). This Aṭṭhakathā refers to obtaining the benefits, not the act.
Idāni tadubhayaṃ vibhajitvā dasseti –
Now, it shows dividing both of them –
‘‘Purimikāya upagatānaṃ pana sabbe gaṇapūrakā honti, ānisaṃsaṃ na labhanti, ānisaṃso itaresaṃyeva hoti. Sace purimikāya upagatā cattāro vā honti, tayo vā dve vā eko vā, itare gaṇapūrake katvā kathinaṃ attharitabbaṃ. Atha cattāro bhikkhū upagatā, eko paripuṇṇavasso sāmaṇero, so ce pacchimikāya upasampajjati, gaṇapūrako ceva hoti, ānisaṃsañca labhati. Tayo bhikkhū dve sāmaṇerā, dve bhikkhū tayo sāmaṇerā, eko bhikkhu cattāro sāmaṇerāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sace purimikāya upagatā kathinatthārakusalā na honti, atthārakusalā khandhakabhāṇakattherā pariyesitvā ānetabbā, kammavācaṃ sāvetvā kathinaṃ attharāpetvā dānañca bhuñjitvā gamissanti, ānisaṃso pana itaresaṃyeva hotī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 306).
‘‘However, all those who have entered the rains residence in the earlier rains are completion of quorum, but do not receive the benefits; the benefits are only for the others. If four bhikkhus have entered the rains residence in the earlier rains, or three, or two, or one, the Kathina should be spread after making the others a completion of quorum. Now, four bhikkhus have entered, one is a sāmaṇera with complete rains residence; if he receives higher ordination in the later rains, he is both a completion of quorum and receives the benefits. Three bhikkhus, two sāmaṇeras; two bhikkhus, three sāmaṇeras; one bhikkhu, four sāmaṇeras—the same method applies here as well. If those who have entered the rains residence in the earlier rains are not skilled in spreading the Kathina, Theras who are skilled in spreading and who are experts in the Khandhaka should be sought and brought; after reciting the Kammavācā and having the Kathina spread and enjoying the offering, they will leave, but the benefits are only for the others" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 306).
Kathinaṃ kena dinnaṃ vaṭṭatīti? Yena kenaci devena vā manussena vā pañcannaṃ vā sahadhammikānaṃ aññatarena dinnaṃ vaṭṭati. Kathinadāyakassa vattaṃ atthi, sace so taṃ ajānanto pucchati ‘‘bhante, kathaṃ kathinaṃ dātabba’’nti, tassa evaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññatarappahonakaṃ sūriyuggamanasamaye vatthaṃ ‘kathinacīvaraṃ demā’ti dātuṃ vaṭṭati, tassa parikammatthaṃ ettakā nāma sūciyo, ettakaṃ suttaṃ, ettakaṃ rajanaṃ, parikammaṃ karontānaṃ ettakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yāgubhattañca dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.
By whom is the Kathina allowed to be given? It is allowed to be given by anyone, whether a deva or a human, or by one of the five co-religionists. There is a duty for the Kathina-giver. If he asks, not knowing it, "Bhante, how should the Kathina be given?" he should be told thus: "A cloth suitable for one of the three robes is allowed to be given at sunrise, saying, 'We give a Kathina robe'; and it is allowed to give this many needles, this much thread, this much dye for its preparation, and gruel and food to this many bhikkhus who are doing the preparation."
Kathinatthārakenāpi dhammena samena uppannaṃ kathinaṃ attharantena vattaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tantavāyagehato hi ābhatasantāneneva khalimakkhitasāṭakopi na vaṭṭati, malīnasāṭakopi na vaṭṭati, tasmā kathinatthārasāṭakaṃ labhitvā suddhaṃ dhovitvā sūciādīni cīvarakammūpakaraṇāni sajjetvā bahūhi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ tadaheva sibbitvā niṭṭhitasūcikammaṃ rajitvā kappabinduṃ datvā kathinaṃ attharitabbaṃ. Sace tasmiṃ anatthateyeva añño kathinasāṭakaṃ attharitabbakaṃ āharati, aññāni ca bahūni kathinānisaṃsavatthāni deti, yo ānisaṃsaṃ bahuṃ deti, tassa santakeneva attharitabbaṃ. Itaro yathā tathā ovaditvā saññāpetabbo.
The one spreading the Kathina should also know the duty when spreading the Kathina that has arisen in accordance with the Dhamma. A sāṭaka smeared with mud or a soiled sāṭaka from the house of a weaver, simply as it is brought, is not allowed. Therefore, having obtained a Kathina-spreading-sāṭaka, having thoroughly washed it, having prepared the needles and other requisites for robe-making, and having sewn it together on that very day with many bhikkhus, having finished the needlework, having dyed it, having applied the Kappabindu, the Kathina should be spread. If, while that one is not yet spread, another brings a Kathina-sāṭaka to be spread, and gives many other Kathina-benefit-items, it should be spread with what belongs to the one who gives many benefits. The other should be advised and persuaded accordingly.
Kathinaṃ pana kena attharitabbaṃ? Yassa saṅgho kathinacīvaraṃ deti. Saṅghena pana kassa dātabbaṃ? Yo jiṇṇacīvaro hoti. Sace bahū jiṇṇacīvarā honti, vuḍḍhassa dātabbaṃ. Vuḍḍhesupi yo mahāparivāro tadaheva cīvaraṃ katvā attharituṃ sakkoti, tassa dātabbaṃ. Sace vuḍḍho na sakkoti, navakataro sakkoti, tassa dātabbaṃ. Api ca saṅghena mahātherassa saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā ‘‘tumhe, bhante, gaṇhatha, mayaṃ katvā dassāmā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
By whom should the Kathina be spread? By the one to whom the Sangha gives the Kathina-robe. To whom should it be given by the Sangha? To the one who has worn out robes. If there are many with worn out robes, it should be given to the elder. Among the elders, it should be given to the one with a large retinue who is able to make the robe and spread it on that very day. If the elder is not able, and a younger one is able, it should be given to him. Moreover, it is appropriate for the Sangha to show regard for the Mahāthera; therefore, it should be said, "Bhante, please take it; we will make it and give it to you."
Tīsu cīvaresu yaṃ jiṇṇaṃ hoti, tadatthāya dātabbaṃ. Pakatiyā dupaṭṭacīvarassa dupaṭṭatthāyeva dātabbaṃ. Sacepissa ekapaṭṭacīvaraṃ ghanaṃ hoti, kathinasāṭako ca pelavo, sāruppatthāya dupaṭṭappahonakameva dātabbaṃ. ‘‘Ahaṃ alabhanto ekapaṭṭaṃ pārupāmī’’ti vadantassāpi dupaṭṭaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Yo pana lobhapakatiko hoti, tassa na dātabbaṃ. Tenāpi kathinaṃ attharitvā ‘‘pacchā visibbitvā dve cīvarāni karissāmī’’ti na gahetabbaṃ.
It should be given for the sake of whichever of the three robes is worn out. For one who naturally has a double robe, it should be given for the sake of the double robe. If his single robe is thick and the Kathina-sāṭaka is flimsy, it should be given suitable for a double robe. Even if he says, "Not obtaining it, I will wear a single robe," it is appropriate to give a double robe. However, it should not be given to one who is greedy by nature. Having spread the Kathina, he should not take it intending, "Later, I will unsew it and make two robes."
Yassa pana diyyati, tassa –
To the one to whom it is given: –
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, idaṃ saṅghassa kathinadussaṃ uppannaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ kathinadussaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyya kathinaṃ attharituṃ, esā ñatti.
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, idaṃ saṅghassa kathinadussaṃ uppannaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ kathinadussaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyya kathinaṃ attharituṃ, esā ñatti.
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, idaṃ saṅghassa kathinadussaṃ uppannaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ kathinadussaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno deti kathinaṃ attharituṃ, yassāyasmato khamati imassa kathinadussassa itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dānaṃ kathinaṃ attharituṃ, so tuṇhassa, yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.
"Venerable Sangha, may the Sangha hear me. This kathina cloth has arisen for the Sangha. The Sangha gives this kathina cloth to the bhikkhu named so-and-so to spread the kathina. If it is agreeable to the venerable ones that this kathina cloth be given to the bhikkhu named so-and-so to spread the kathina, let them be silent; if it is not agreeable, let them speak.
‘‘Dinnaṃ idaṃ saṅghena kathinadussaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno kathinaṃ attharituṃ, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti (mahāva. 307) –
"This kathina cloth is given by the Sangha to the bhikkhu named so-and-so to spread the kathina. It is agreeable to the Sangha; therefore, they are silent. Thus, I hold it" (Mahāva. 307) –
Evaṃ ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya dātabbanti evaṃ dinnaṃ.
Thus, it should be given with a motion and a second proclamation. Thus, it is given.
2698-9.Na ullikhitamattādi-catuvīsativajjitantipāḷiyaṃāgatehi ‘‘na ullikhitamattena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti (mahāva. 308) ullikhitamattādīhi catuvīsatiyā ākārehi vajjitaṃ.Cīvaranti ‘‘ahatena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti (mahāva. 309)pāḷiyaṃāgatānaṃ soḷasannaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena yuttaṃ katapariyositaṃ dinnaṃ kappabinduṃ tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataracīvaraṃ. Te pana catuvīsati ākārā, soḷasākārā capāḷito(mahāva. 308),aṭṭhakathāto(mahāva. aṭṭha. 308) ca gahetabbā. Ganthagāravaparihāratthamidha na vuttā.
2698-9.Na ullikhitamattādi-catuvīsativajjitantipāḷiyaṃ means, according to the Pali statement "the kathina is not spread merely by outlining" (Mahāva. 308), it is free from the twenty-four conditions beginning with merely outlining. Cīvaranti means, according to the Pali statement "the kathina is spread with an unused cloth" (Mahāva. 309), it is endowed with one of the sixteen conditions, completely finished, given with a kappabindu, one of the three cloths. These twenty-four conditions and sixteen conditions should be taken from the Pāḷi (Mahāva. 308) and Aṭṭhakathā (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 308). They are not mentioned here to avoid prolixity.
Bhikkhunāvakkhamāne aṭṭhadhamme jānantena attharakenaādāyagahetvāpurāṇakaṃattanā paribhuñjiyamānaṃ attharitabbacīvarena ekanāmakaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃuddharitvāpaccuddharitvānavaṃattharitabbaṃ cīvaraṃadhiṭṭhahitvāpurāṇapaccuddhaṭacīvarassa nāmena adhiṭṭhahitvāva taṃ antaravāsakaṃ ce, ‘‘iminā antaravāsakena kathinaṃ attharāmi’’iti vacasā vattabbanti yojanā. Sace uttarāsaṅgo hoti, ‘‘iminā uttarāsaṅgena kathinaṃ attharāmi’’, sace saṅghāṭi hoti, ‘‘imāya saṅghāṭiyā kathinaṃ attharāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
Bhikkhunā, by the bhikkhu spreading, knowing the eight conditions, ādāya having taken, purāṇakaṃ, an old cloth that is being used by oneself, of the same name as the cloth to be spread, uddharitvā, having removed, paccuddharitvā, having put it back, navaṃ, the new cloth to be spread, adhiṭṭhahitvā, having determined, determining it by the name of the old, removed cloth, that is, if it is an antaravāsaka, the meaning is that it should be said verbally, "with this antaravāsaka, I spread the kathina." If it is an uttarāsaṅga, one should say, "with this uttarāsaṅga, I spread the kathina"; if it is a saṅghāṭi, one should say, "with this saṅghāṭi, I spread the kathina."
2700-1.Iccevaṃ tikkhattuṃ vutte kathinaṃ atthataṃ hotīti yojanā.Tena pana bhikkhunānavakena kathinacīvaraṃādāyasaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamma ‘‘atthataṃ, bhante, saṅghassa kathinaṃ, dhammiko kathinatthāro, anumodatha’’iti vattabbanti yojanā.
2700-1.The meaning is that the kathina is spread when it is said thus three times. Tena pana bhikkhunā, then by that bhikkhu, having ādāya taken the new kathina cloth, approaching the Sangha, one should say, "Venerable sirs, the kathina is spread for the Sangha; the spreading of the kathina is in accordance with the Dhamma; rejoice!"
2702.Anumodakesu ca therehi ‘‘atthataṃ, āvuso, saṅghassa kathinaṃ, dhammiko kathinatthāro, anumodāmā’’ti vattabbaṃ, navena pana ‘‘atthataṃ, bhante, saṅghassa kathinaṃ, dhammiko kathinatthāro, anumodāmī’’ti iti punaīrayekatheyyāti yojanā. Gāthāya pana anumodanapāṭhassa atthadassanamukhena‘‘suatthataṃ tayā bhante’’ti vuttaṃ, na pāṭhakkamadassanavasenāti veditabbaṃ.
2702.Among those rejoicing, the Theras should say, "Friend, the kathina is spread for the Sangha; the spreading of the kathina is in accordance with the Dhamma; we rejoice!" But the new bhikkhu should say, "Venerable sirs, the kathina is spread for the Sangha; the spreading of the kathina is in accordance with the Dhamma; I rejoice!" Thus, again, he should īraye, speak. In the verse, however, the phrase "suatthataṃ tayā bhante" is stated in the sense of showing the meaning of the rejoicing passage, not in the way of showing the order of the text.
Atthārakesu ca anumodakesu ca navehi vuḍḍhānaṃ vacanakkamo vutto, vuḍḍhehi navānaṃ vacanakkamo pana tadanusārena yathārahaṃ yojetvā vattabboti gāthāsu na vuttoti veditabbo. Atthārakena therena vā navena vā gaṇapuggalānaṃ vacanakkamo ca gaṇapuggalehi atthārakassa vacanakkamo ca vuttanayena yathārahaṃ yojetuṃ sakkāti na vutto.
The order of speaking for the new bhikkhus to the elders has been stated both for those who are spreading the kathina and those who are rejoicing. The order of speaking for the elders to the new bhikkhus, however, is not stated in the verses, but it should be understood that it should be connected and stated appropriately according to that. The order of speaking for the spreading bhikkhu, whether a Thera or a new bhikkhu, to the group or individual, and the order of speaking for the group or individuals to the spreading bhikkhu, can be connected appropriately in the manner stated, and therefore it is not stated.
Evaṃ atthate pana kathine sace kathinacīvarena saddhiṃ ābhataṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dāyakā ‘‘yena amhākaṃ kathinaṃ gahitaṃ, tasseva ca demā’’ti denti, bhikkhusaṅgho anissaro. Atha avicāretvāva datvā gacchanti, bhikkhusaṅgho issaro. Tasmā sace kathinatthārakassa sesacīvarānipi dubbalāni honti, saṅghena apaloketvā tesampi atthāya vatthāni dātabbāni, kammavācāya pana ekāyeva vaṭṭati. Avasese kathinānisaṃse balavavatthāni vassāvāsikaṭhitikāya dātabbāni, ṭhitikāya abhāve therāsanato paṭṭhāya dātabbāni, garubhaṇḍaṃ na bhājetabbaṃ. Sace pana ekasīmāya bahū vihārā honti, sabbe bhikkhū sannipātetvā ekattha kathinaṃ attharitabbaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ attharituṃ na vaṭṭati.
When the kathina is spread in this way, if the donors, together with the benefit brought with the kathina cloth, give, saying, "we will give it to the one by whom our kathina was taken," the community of bhikkhus is not the master. But if they give and leave without considering, the community of bhikkhus is the master. Therefore, if the remaining cloths of the kathina-spreading bhikkhu are also worn out, after informing the Sangha, cloths should be given for their benefit as well, but only one Kammavācā is sufficient. The remaining benefits of the kathina, strong cloths, should be given according to the seniority of the rains-residence. In the absence of seniority, they should be given starting from the Thera's seat; heavy goods should not be divided. But if there are many monasteries within one boundary, all the bhikkhus should be assembled and the kathina should be spread in one place; it is not proper to spread it separately.
2703.‘‘Kathinassa ca kiṃ mūla’’ntiādīni sayameva vivarissati.
2703."Kathinassa ca kiṃ mūla"ntiādīni, he himself will explain.
2706.Aṭṭhadhammuddesagāthāya pubbakiccaṃpubba-vacaneneva uttarapadalopena vuttaṃ. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘pubbakiccanti vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Paccuddhāra’’iti vattabbe‘‘paccuddhara’’iti gāthābandhavasena rasso. Teneva vakkhati‘‘paccuddhāro’’ti. Adhiṭṭhahanaṃadhiṭṭhānaṃ. Paccuddhāro ca adhiṭṭhānañcapaccuddharādhiṭṭhānā. Itarītarayogena dvandasamāso.Atthāroti ettha ‘‘kathinatthāro’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati.
2706.In the verse on the eight conditions, the preliminary task is stated by the word pubba itself, by the elision of the latter part of the word. Therefore, he will say, "pubbakiccaṃ means the preliminary task." Instead of saying "paccuddhāra", it is "paccuddhara" because of the meter of the verse. Therefore, he will say "paccuddhāro". Adhiṭṭhahanaṃ means adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Paccuddhāro ca adhiṭṭhānañca are paccuddharādhiṭṭhānā. This is a dvanda compound by mutual connection. Atthāro, here, "kathinatthāro" is obtained from the context.
‘‘Mātikā’’ti iminā ‘‘aṭṭha kathinubbhāramātikā’’ti pakaraṇato viññāyati. Yathāha – ‘‘aṭṭhimā, bhikkhave, mātikā kathinassa ubbhārāyā’’ti (mahāva. 310).Mātikāti mātaro janettiyo, kathinubbhāraṃ etā aṭṭha janentīti attho.Uddhāroti kathinassa uddhāro.Ānisaṃsāti ettha ‘‘kathinassā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati. Kathinassa ānisaṃsātiime aṭṭhadhammāti yojanā. Yathāha ‘‘atthatakathinānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, pañca kappissantī’’tiādi (mahāva. 306).‘‘Ānisaṃsenā’’tipi pāṭho. Ānisaṃsena saha ime aṭṭha dhammāti yojanā.
"Mātikā", by this, it is understood from the context that "aṭṭha kathinubbhāramātikā" means the eight conditions for the removal of the kathina. As he said, "These eight conditions, monks, are the grounds for the removal of the kathina" (Mahāva. 310). Mātikā means mothers, producers; these eight produce the removal of the kathina, that is the meaning. Uddhāro means the removal of the kathina. Ānisaṃsā, here, "kathinassa" is obtained from the context. Kathinassa ānisaṃsāti, these eight conditions, that is the meaning. As he said, "For you, monks, who have spread the kathina, five things will be allowed," etc. (Mahāva. 306). "Ānisaṃsenā" is also a reading. Ānisaṃsena saha ime aṭṭha dhammāti, these eight conditions together with the benefit, that is the meaning.
2707.‘‘Na ullikhitamattādi-catuvīsativajjita’’ntiādinā kathinaṃ attharituṃ katapariyositaṃ cīvaraṃ ce laddhaṃ, tattha paṭipajjanavidhiṃ dassetvā sace akatasibbanādikammaṃ vatthameva laddhaṃ, tattha paṭipajjanavidhiṃ pubbakiccavasena dassetumāha‘‘dhovana’’ntiādi. Tatthadhovananti kathinadussassa setabhāvakaraṇaṃ.Vicāroti ‘‘pañcakaṃ vā sattakaṃ vā navakaṃ vā ekādasakaṃ vā hotū’’ti vicāraṇaṃ.Chedananti yathāvicāritassa vatthassa chedanaṃ.Bandhananti moghasuttakāropanaṃ.Sibbananti sabbasūcikammaṃ.Rajananti rajanakammaṃ.Kappanti kappabindudānaṃ.‘‘Pubbakicca’’nti vuccatiidaṃ sabbaṃ kathinatthārassa paṭhamameva kattabbattā.
2707.Having shown the procedure to be followed when a cloth completely finished for spreading the kathina has been obtained, beginning with "Na ullikhitamattādi-catuvīsativajjita" and so on, he now says "dhovana" etc., to show the procedure to be followed as a preliminary task when only cloth that has not been made into robes has been obtained. There, dhovananti means making the kathina cloth white. Vicāro means considering "Let it be five, or seven, or nine, or eleven." Chedananti means cutting the cloth according to what has been considered. Bandhananti means applying the moghasuttaka. Sibbananti means all the sewing work. Rajananti means the dyeing process. Kappanti means giving the kappabindu. "Pubbakicca"nti vuccati, all this is called "preliminary task" because it must be done first by the kathina spreader.
2708.Antaravāsakoti etthaiti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Saṅghāṭi, uttarāsaṅgo, atho antaravāsakoti esameva tu paccuddhāropi adhiṭṭhānampi atthāropi vuttoti yojanā.
2708.Antaravāsako, here, the word iti is understood by ellipsis. Saṅghāṭi, uttarāsaṅgo, atho antaravāsako, thus it is said that the removal, the determination, and the spreading are the same, that is the meaning.
2709.Aṭṭhamātikā (mahāva. 310-311; pari. 415; mahāva. aṭṭha. 310-311) dassetumāha‘‘pakkamanañcā’’tiādi. Pakkamanaṃ anto etassāti pakkamanantikāti vattabbe uttarapadalopena ‘‘pakkamana’’nti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.Aṭṭhimāti ettha ‘‘mātikā’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati. Imā aṭṭha mātikāti yojanā.
2709.To show the eight conditions (Mahāva. 310-311; pari. 415; Mahāva. aṭṭha. 310-311), he says "pakkamanañcā" etc. Pakkamanaṃ anto etassāti pakkamanantikāti, instead of saying pakkamanantikā, it is said "pakkamana" by the elision of the latter part of the word. This method is everywhere. Aṭṭhimā, here, "mātikā" is obtained from the context. Imā aṭṭha mātikāti, these eight conditions, that is the meaning.
2710.Uddesānukkamena niddisitumāha‘‘katacīvaramādāyā’’tiādi.‘‘Katacīvaramādāyā’’ti iminā cīvarapalibodhupacchedo dassito.‘‘Āvāse nirapekkhako’’ti iminā dutiyo āvāsapalibodhupacchedo dassito. Ettha sabbavākyesu ‘‘atthatakathino yo bhikkhu sace pakkamatī’’ti seso.Atikkantāya sīmāyāti vihārasīmāya atikkantāya.Hoti pakkamanantikāti ettha ‘‘tassa bhikkhuno’’ti seso, tassa bhikkhuno pakkamanantikā nāma mātikā hotīti attho.
2710.To indicate according to the order of the summary, he says "katacīvaramādāyā" etc. "Katacīvaramādāyā", by this, the interruption of the robe-attachment is shown. "Āvāse nirapekkhako", by this, the second interruption of the dwelling-attachment is shown. Here, in all the sentences, "atthatakathino yo bhikkhu sace pakkamatī" is the remainder. Atikkantāya sīmāyā, when the monastery boundary has been crossed. Hoti pakkamanantikā, here, "tassa bhikkhuno" is the remainder, the meaning is that for that bhikkhu, there is a condition called pakkamanantikā.
2711-2.Ānisaṃsaṃnāma vutthavassena laddhaṃ akatasūcikammavatthaṃ. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘karotī’’tiādi.‘‘Vihāre anapekkhako’’ti iminā ettha paṭhamaṃ āvāsapalibodhupacchedo dassito. Sukhaviharaṇaṃ payojanamassātisukhavihāriko,vihāroti.Tatthatasmiṃ vihāre viharantova taṃ cīvaraṃ yadi karoti, tasmiṃ cīvare niṭṭhiteniṭṭhānantāniṭṭhānantikāti vuccatīti yojanā.‘‘Niṭṭhitecīvare’’ti iminā cīvarapalibodhupacchedo dassito.
2711-2.Ānisaṃsaṃ means cloth for which the sewing work has not been done, obtained by dwelling during the rains. Therefore, he will say "karotī" etc. "Vihāre anapekkhako", by this, here, the first interruption of the dwelling-attachment is shown. Sukhaviharaṇaṃ payojanamassāti, sukhavihāriko, means dwelling happily, means monastery. Tattha, while dwelling in that monastery, if he makes that cloth, when that cloth is finished, niṭṭhānantā, it is called niṭṭhānantikā, that is the meaning. "Niṭṭhitecīvare", by this, the interruption of the robe-attachment is shown.
2713.Tamassamanti taṃ vutthavassāvāsaṃ.Dhuranikkhepeti ubhayadhuranikkhepavasena cittappavattakkhaṇe.Sanniṭṭhānaṃnāma dhuranikkhepo. Ettha palibodhadvayassa ekakkhaṇeyeva upacchedoaṭṭhakathāyaṃvutto ‘‘sanniṭṭhānantike dvepi palibodhā ‘nevimaṃ cīvaraṃ kāressaṃ, na paccessa’nti cintitamatteyeva ekato chijjantī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 311).
2713.Tamassamanti, that rains-residence. Dhuranikkhepe, at the moment of the mind's inclination in the way of abandoning both burdens. Sanniṭṭhānaṃ means abandoning the burdens. Here, the interruption of the two attachments at one moment is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā thus: "In sanniṭṭhānantika, both attachments are cut off together merely by thinking 'I will neither have this robe made nor received'" (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 311).
2714.Kathinacchādananti kathinānisaṃsaṃ cīvaravatthuṃ.Na paccessanti na paccāgamissāmi.Karontassevāti ettha ‘‘cīvara’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati.‘‘Kathinacchādana’’nti idaṃ vā sambandhanīyaṃ.Karontassāti anādare sāmivacanaṃ.Naṭṭhanti corehi haṭattā vā upacikādīhi khāditattā vā naṭṭhaṃ.Daḍḍhaṃ vāti agginā daḍḍhaṃ vā.Nāsanantikāti evaṃ cīvarassa nāsanante labbhamānā ayaṃ mātikā nāsanantikā nāmāti attho. Ettha ‘‘na paccessa’’nti iminā paṭhamaṃ āvāsapalibodhupacchedo dassito. ‘‘Karontassevā’’ti iminā dutiyaṃ cīvarapalibodhupacchedo dassito.
2714.Kathinacchādananti, the cloth-object that is the benefit of the kathina. Na paccessanti, I will not come back. Karontassevā, here, "cīvara" is obtained from the context. "Kathinacchādana", this should be connected, or. Karontassā, is a possessive word in disregard. Naṭṭhanti, lost because it was suddenly taken by thieves or eaten by white ants, etc. Daḍḍhaṃ vā, or burnt by fire. Nāsanantikā, thus, this condition that can be obtained at the destruction of the robe is called nāsanantikā, that is the meaning. Here, by "na paccessa," the first interruption of the dwelling-attachment is shown. By "karontassevā," the second interruption of the robe-attachment is shown.
2715.Laddhānisaṃsoti laddhakathinānisaṃsacīvaro. Ānisaṃse cīvaresāpekkhoapekkhavābahisīmagatovassaṃvutthasīmāya bahisīmagato taṃ cīvaraṃ karoti,sokatacīvaroantarubbhāraṃantarā ubbhāraṃ suṇāti ce, savanantikā nāma hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Bahisīmagato’’tiādinā dutiyapalibodhupacchedo dassito. Ettha ‘‘katacīvaro’’ti vuttattā cīvarapalibodhupacchedo paṭhamaṃ hoti, itaro pana ‘‘saha savanena āvāsapalibodho chijjatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 311)aṭṭhakathāyavuttattā pacchā hoti.
2715.Laddhānisaṃso, one who has obtained a kathina-benefit robe. Sāpekkho, having expectations for the benefit cloth, or apekkhavā, or desiring, bahisīmagato, having gone outside the boundary of the rains-residence, makes that cloth, so, that made-robe person, if he hears antarubbhāraṃ, an obstacle inside, then it is called savanantikā, that is the meaning. "Bahisīmagato"tiādinā, by this, the second interruption of attachment is shown. Here, because it is stated "katacīvaro," the robe-attachment occurs first, but the other, "saha savanena āvāsapalibodho chijjatī" (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 311), because it is stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, it occurs later.
2716-7.Cīvarāsāya vassaṃvuttho āvāsatopakkanto‘‘tuyhaṃ cīvaraṃ dassāmī’’ti kenaci vutto bahisīmagato pana savati, puna ‘‘tava cīvaraṃ dātuṃ na sakkomī’’ti vuttoāsāya chinnamattāyacīvare paccāsāya upacchinnamattāyaāsāvacchedikānāma mātikātimatāñātāti yojanā. Āsāvacchādike kathinubbhāre āvāsapalibodho paṭhamaṃ chijjati, cīvarāsāya upacchinnāya cīvarapalibodho chijjati.
2716-7.One who has resided for the rains, having pakkanto left the residence, having gone outside the boundary, having been told by someone "I will give you a robe," but then, having been told again "I am unable to give you your robe," āsāya chinnamattāya, because the expectation for the robe has been merely interrupted, āsāvacchedikā, that condition is matā, known, that is the meaning. In āsāvacchādike kathinubbhāre, the dwelling-attachment is cut off first, and when the expectation for the robe is interrupted, the robe-attachment is cut off.
2718-20.Yo vassaṃvutthavihāramhā aññaṃ vihāraṃ gato hoti, soāgacchaṃāgacchanto antarāmagge kathinuddhāraṃ atikkameyya, tassa so kathinuddhāro sīmātikkantiko matoti yojanā. Tattha sīmātikkantike kathinubbhāre cīvarapalibodho paṭhamaṃ chijjati, tassa bahisīme āvāsapalibodho chijjati.
2718-20.He who has gone to another monastery from the monastery where he resided for the rains, āgacchaṃ, while coming, if he exceeds the kathina removal in the middle of the road, that kathina removal is considered sīmātikkantiko, that is the meaning. There, in sīmātikkantike kathinubbhāre, the robe-attachment is cut off first, and his dwelling-attachment is cut off outside the boundary.
kenacivuttaṃ. ‘‘Bahisīmāyaṃ cīvarakālasamayassa atikkantattā sīmātikkantiko’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. mahāva. 311)sāratthadīpaniyaṃvuttaṃ. ‘‘Āgacchaṃ antarāmagge, taduddhāramatikkame’’ti vuttattā pana saṅghena kariyamānaṃ antarubbhāraṃ āgacchanto vihārasīmaṃ asampatteyeva kathinubbhārassa jātattā taṃ na sambhuṇeyya, tassevaṃ sīmamatikkantasseva sato puna āgacchato antarāmagge jāto kathinubbhāro sīmātikkantikoti amhākaṃ khanti.
kenacivuttaṃ, is said by someone. "Because the time for making robes has passed outside the boundary, it is sīmātikkantiko," is said in the Sāratthadīpanī (sārattha. ṭī. mahāva. 311). However, because it is said "Āgacchaṃ antarāmagge, taduddhāramatikkame," if, while coming, the removal being done by the Sangha occurs in the middle of the road, before reaching the monastery boundary, he should not approve of it; even though the kathina removal has occurred to him who has thus exceeded the boundary, our opinion is that the kathina removal that occurs in the middle of the road to one who is coming back is sīmātikkantiko.
Kathinānisaṃsacīvaraṃ ādāya sace āvāse sāpekkhova gato hoti, puna āgantvākathinuddhāraṃkathinassa antarubbhāramevasambhuṇāti ceyadi pāpuṇeyya, tassa so kathinuddhāro hoti, so ‘‘sahubbhāro’’ti vuccatīti yojanā. Sahubbhāre dve palibodhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ chijjanti.
Having taken the kathinānisaṃsa robe, if he has gone while still attached to the residence, then, having come back, kathinuddhāraṃ, if he sambhuṇāti ce attains the removal of the kathina itself, that kathina removal belongs to him; that is called "sahubbhāro," that is the meaning. In sahubbhāre, the two attachments are cut off without order, not at the same time.
2721.‘‘Sīmātikkantikenā’’ti vattabbe uttarapadalopena‘‘sīmato’’ti vuttaṃ. Pakkamanañca niṭṭhānañca sanniṭṭhānañcasīmatosīmātikkantikena saha imecattārokathinubbhārāpuggalādhīnāpuggalāyattā sahubbhārasaṅkhātoantarubbhārosaṅghādhīnoti yojanā.‘‘Antarubbharo’’ti gāthābandhavasena rassattaṃ.
2721.Instead of saying "Sīmātikkantikenā," it is said "sīmato" by the elision of the latter part of the word. Pakkamanañca niṭṭhānañca sanniṭṭhānañca, these cattāro, four kathina removals, together with sīmato, sīmātikkantika, are puggalādhīnā, dependent on the individual; antarubbhāro, known as sahubbhārasaṅkhāto, is dependent on the Sangha, that is the meaning. "Antarubbharo" is shortened because of the meter of the verse.
2722.Nāsananti nāsanantiko.Savananti savanantiko. Āsāvacchedikāpi cāti tayopi kathinubbhārā.Na tu saṅghā na bhikkhutoti saṅghatopi na honti, puggalatopi na hontīti attho. Cīvarassa vināso saṅghassa vā cīvarasāmikassa vā payogena na jātoti nāsanako tāva kathinubbhāro ubhatopi na hotīti vutto. Savanañca ubhayesaṃ payogato na jātanti tathā vuttaṃ. Tathā āsāvacchedikāpi.
2722.Nāsananti, destruction-ending. Savananti, hearing-ending. Āsāvacchedikāpi cāti, and also expectation-cutting; all three of these kathina removals are na tu saṅghā na bhikkhuto, not from the Sangha, nor from the bhikkhu, that is the meaning. The destruction of the robe did not occur by the action of the Sangha or of the owner of the robe; therefore, it is said that the destruction-ending kathina removal does not occur from either. Hearing also did not occur from the action of both; therefore, it is said thus. Likewise, expectation-cutting as well.
2723.Āvāsoyeva palibodhoti viggaho.Palibodho ca cīvareti etthacīvareti bhedavacanicchāya nimittatthe bhummaṃ, cīvaranimittapalibodhoti attho, cīvarasaṅkhāto palibodhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Saccādiguṇayuttaṃ musāvādādidosavimuttaṃ atthaṃ vadati sīlenātiyuttamuttatthavādī,tena.
2723. "Āvāsoyeva palibodhoti" is the interpretation. "Palibodho ca cīvare", here, "cīvare" is a locative case used to indicate the reason, meaning palibodha because of the robe; it is said to be palibodha related to the robe. He speaks of the meaning endowed with qualities like truth and free from faults like false speech through virtue; he is "yuttamuttatthavādī," by him.
2724.Aṭṭhannaṃmātikānanti bahisīmagatānaṃ vasena vuttā pakkamanantikādayo satta mātikā, bahisīmaṃ gantvā antarubbhāraṃ sambhuṇantassa vasena vutto sahubbhāroti imāsaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ mātikānaṃ vasena ca.Antarubbhāratopi vāti bahisīmaṃ agantvā tattheva vasitvā kathinubbhārakammena ubbhārakathinānaṃ vasena labbhanato antarubbhārato cāti mahesinā kathinassa duve ubbhārāpi vuttāti yojanā. Bahisīmaṃ gantvā āgatassa vasena sahubbhāro, bahisīmaṃ āgatānaṃ vasena antarubbhāroti ekoyeva ubbhāro dvidhā vutto, tasmā antarubbhāraṃ visuṃ aggahetvā aṭṭheva mātikāpāḷiyaṃ(mahāva. 310) vibhattāti veditabbā.
2724."Aṭṭhannaṃ mātikāna" means the seven mātikās, such as pakkamanantikā, which are mentioned with reference to those outside the boundary (sīmā), and sahubbhāra, which is mentioned with reference to one who goes outside the boundary and manages the antarubbhāra; thus, it is because of these eight mātikās. "Antarubbhāratopi vā" means the great sage (Mahesi) stated two kinds of removal (ubbāra) of the kathina, because of obtaining the kathina-removing (ubbhāra) from the antarubbhāra act of kathina while residing there without going outside the boundary. The sahubbhāra is with reference to one who has gone outside the boundary and returned, and the antarubbhāra is with reference to those who have come outside the boundary; thus, only one removal (ubbāra) is stated in two ways; therefore, without taking antarubbhāra separately, only eight mātikās are distinguished in the "pāḷiyaṃ" (mahāva. 310), it should be understood.
2725.Anāmantacāro uttarapadalopavasena‘‘anāmantā’’iti vutto. Yāva kathinaṃ na uddharīyati, tāva anāmantetvā caraṇaṃ kappissati, cārittasikkhāpadena anāpatti bhavissatīti attho.
2725. Anāmantacāro is called "anāmantā" by eliding the latter word. As long as the kathina is not removed, wandering without informing is allowable; it means there will be no offense by the rule of conduct (cārittasikkhāpada).
‘‘asamādāna’’nti uttarapadalopena vutto.Asamādānacāroti ticīvaraṃ asamādāya caraṇaṃ, cīvaravippavāso kappissatīti attho.
"Asamādāna" is stated by eliding the latter word. "Asamādānacāro" means wandering without taking the three robes (ticīvara); it means separation from the robe is allowable.
‘‘Gaṇato’’ti iminā uttarapadalopena gaṇabhojanaṃ dassitaṃ. Gaṇabhojanampi kappissati, taṃ sarūpato pācittiyakaṇḍe vuttaṃ.
"Gaṇato" shows gaṇabhojana (eating in a group) by eliding the latter word. Gaṇabhojana is also allowable; it is stated in detail in the Pācittiya section.
‘‘Yāvadatthika’’nti iminā yāvadatthacīvaraṃ vuttaṃ.Yāvadatthacīvaranti yāvatakena cīvarena attho, tāvatakaṃ anadhiṭṭhitaṃ avikappitaṃ kappissatīti attho.
"Yāvadatthika" means yāvadatthacīvara (robe according to need). "Yāvadatthacīvara" means as much robe as is needed, that much unaccepted (anadhiṭṭhita) and unassigned (avikappita) is allowable.
‘‘Tattha yo cīvaruppādo’’ti iminā ‘‘yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo’’ti (mahāva. 306) vutto ānisaṃso dassito.Yo ca tattha cīvaruppādoti tattha kathinatthatasīmāyaṃ matakacīvaraṃ vā hotu saṅghassa uddissa dinnaṃ vā saṅghikena tatruppādena ābhataṃ vā, yena kenaci ākārena yaṃ saṅghikaṃ cīvaraṃ uppajjati, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissatīti attho. Ime pañca kathinānisaṃsā ca vuttāti sambandho.
"Tattha yo cīvaruppādo" shows the benefit (ānisaṃsa) stated in "yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo" (mahāva. 306). "Yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo" means whatever robe belonging to the Sangha arises there within the kathina-spreading boundary (kathinatthatasīmā), whether it is a corpse robe (matakacīvara) or given intending for the Sangha or brought by the Sangha with that local arising (tatruppādena), in any way, that robe belonging to the Sangha will belong to them. These five kathina benefits are stated, is the connection.
Kathinakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Kathinakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Cīvarakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Cīvarakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
2726-7.Cīvaraṃ uppajjati etāsūti‘‘uppādā’’ti janikāva vuccanti, cīvaravatthaparilābhakkhettanti attho. Yathāha – ‘‘yathāvuttānaṃ cīvarānaṃ paṭilābhāya khettaṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhimā bhikkhave mātikātiādimāhā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379).Cīvaramātikāti cīvaruppādahetubhūtamātaro. Tenāhakathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ‘‘mātikāti mātaro, janettiyoti attho’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 310).Mātikāti cettha cīvaradānamadhippetaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sīmāya dānaṃ ekā mātikā, katikāya dānaṃ dutiyā’’tiādi. Sīmāya deti, katikāya deti, bhikkhāpaññattiyā deti, saṅghassa deti, ubhatosaṅghe deti, vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa deti, ādissa deti, puggalassa deti.‘‘Imā pana aṭṭha mātikā’’ti vuttameva nigamanavasena vuttaṃ.
2726-7."Uppādā" means those in which robes arise, they are called sources (janikā), it means the field for obtaining robe-cloth. As it was said – "to show the field for obtaining the robes mentioned above, he said beginning with 'atthimā bhikkhave mātikāti' (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). "Cīvaramātikā" means mothers who are the cause of robe-arising. Therefore, in the kathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanā, it was said, "mātikā means mothers, it means producers" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 310). Here, "Mātikā" means the giving of robes is intended. As it was said, "giving within the boundary (sīmā) is one mātikā, giving by agreement (katikā) is the second," etc. He gives within the sīmā, he gives by katikā, he gives by bhikkhāpaññatti, he gives to the Sangha, he gives to both Sanghas, he gives to the Sangha that has spent the rains, he gives designating, he gives to an individual. "Imā pana aṭṭha mātikā" is stated as a conclusion of what was already said.
2728.Tatthāti tāsu aṭṭhamātikāsu.Sīmāya detīti ‘‘sīmāya dammī’’ti evaṃ sīmaṃ parāmasitvā dento sīmāya deti, evaṃ dinnaṃ antosīmagatehi bhikkhūhi bhājetabbanti vaṇṇitanti yojanā. Tatthaantosīmagatehīti dāyako yaṃ sīmaṃ apekkhitvā evamāha, tassā sīmāya antogatehi sabbehi.Bhājetabbanti taṃ cīvaraṃ bhājetabbaṃ.Varavaṇṇināti ‘‘itipi so bhagavā araha’’ntiādinā sakalalokabyāpiguṇātisayayuttena byāmappabhāya, chabbaṇṇānaṃ raṃsīnañca vasena uttamappabhātisayayuttena varavaṇṇināvaṇṇitaṃkathitaṃ. Ayamettha padavaṇṇanā, ayaṃ pana vinicchayo –sīmāya detīti ettha tāva khaṇḍasīmā upacārasīmā samānasaṃvāsasīmā avippavāsasīmā lābhasīmā gāmasīmā nigamasīmā nagarasīmā abbhantarasīmā udakukkhepasīmā janapadasīmā raṭṭhasīmā rajjasīmā dīpasīmā cakkavāḷasīmā iti pannarasa sīmā veditabbā.
2728."Tattha" means among those eight mātikās. "Sīmāya detī" means giving while referring to the boundary (sīmā) saying "I give within the sīmā," thus, it is connected as explained that such giving should be shared by the monks within the sīmā. There, "antosīmagatehī" means all those within the sīmā that the giver refers to and says thus. "Bhājetabba" means that robe should be shared. "Varavaṇṇinā" means by the Excellent One (varavaṇṇinā) who has the surpassing qualities pervading the entire world by "itipi so bhagavā araha" etc., and has the supreme radiance by way of the fathom-long aura and the six-colored rays; it is "vaṇṇitaṃ" (described). This is the word-explanation here, but this is the judgment – in "sīmāya detī", there are fifteen boundaries (sīmā) to be understood: khaṇḍasīmā, upacārasīmā, samānasaṃvāsasīmā, avippavāsasīmā, lābhasīmā, gāmasīmā, nigamasīmā, nagarasīmā, abbhantarasīmā, udakukkhepasīmā, janapadasīmā, raṭṭhasīmā, rajjasīmā, dīpasīmā, cakkavāḷasīmā.
khaṇḍasīmāsīmākathāyaṃ vuttā.Upacārasīmāparikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepena, aparikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena paricchinnā hoti. Apica bhikkhūnaṃ dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānato vā pariyante ṭhitabhojanasālato vā nibaddhavasanakaāvāsato vā thāmamajjhimassa purisassa dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ anto upacārasīmā veditabbā. Sā pana āvāsesu vaḍḍhantesu vaḍḍhati, parihāyantesu parihāyati.Mahāpaccariyaṃpana ‘‘bhikkhūsupi vaḍḍhantesu vaḍḍhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379) vuttaṃ. Tasmā sace vihāre sannipatitabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ ekābaddhā hutvā yojanasatampi pūretvā nisīdanti, yojanasatampi upacārasīmāva hoti, sabbesaṃ lābho pāpuṇāti.Samānasaṃvāsaavippavāsasīmādvayampi vuttameva.
khaṇḍasīmā is stated in the sīmā discussion. Upacārasīmā is defined by the boundary of the enclosed monastery, or by the space suitable for enclosure in an unenclosed monastery. Moreover, the upacārasīmā should be understood as within two leḍḍupātas (stone throws) of a man of moderate strength from the fixed gathering place of the monks or from the dining hall where meals are regularly taken or from the residence where they regularly dwell. It increases as the residences increase, and decreases as they decrease. However, in Mahāpaccariyaṃ, it is said that "it increases as the monks increase" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). Therefore, if the monks gathered in the monastery sit together in a unified manner, even filling a hundred yojanas, even a hundred yojanas is the upacārasīmā, and the benefit reaches all. Samānasaṃvāsaavippavāsasīmā both are stated already.
Lābhasīmānāma neva sammāsambuddhena anuññātā, na dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitā, apica kho rājarājamahāmattā vihāraṃ kāretvā gāvutaṃ vā aḍḍhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā samantato paricchinditvā ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa lābhasīmā’’ti nāmalikhitake thambhe nikhaṇitvā ‘‘yaṃ etthantare uppajjati, sabbaṃ taṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa demā’’ti sīmaṃ ṭhapenti, ayaṃ lābhasīmā nāma.Gāmanigamanagaraabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmāpivuttā eva.
Lābhasīmā is not sanctioned by the Sammāsambuddha, nor established by the Elders who compiled the Dhamma; rather, kings or great ministers build a monastery and enclose it on all sides for a gāvuta, half a yojana, or a yojana, and establish a boundary by erecting pillars with the name written on them, saying, "whatever arises within this area, we give all of that to our monastery," this is called lābhasīmā. Gāmanigamanagaraabbhantaraudakukkhepasīmāpi also are stated already.
Janapadasīmānāma kāsikosalaraṭṭhādīnaṃ anto bahū janapadā honti, ettha ekeko janapadaparicchedo janapadasīmā.Raṭṭhasīmānāma kāsikosalādiraṭṭhaparicchedo.Rajjasīmānāma mahācoḷabhogo keraḷabhogoti evaṃ ekekassa rañño āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃ.Dīpasīmānāma samuddantena samucchinnamahādīpā ca antaradīpā ca.Cakkavāḷasīmānāma cakkavāḷapabbateneva paricchinnā.
Janapadasīmā means within regions such as Kāsī and Kosala, there are many janapadas (districts); here, each district boundary is the janapadasīmā. Raṭṭhasīmā means the boundary of the Kāsīkosala etc. region. Rajjasīmā means the area of authority of each king, such as the great Chola territory or the Kerala territory. Dīpasīmā means the great islands separated by the ocean and the smaller islands in between. Cakkavāḷasīmā means that which is bounded by the Cakkavāḷa mountains themselves.
Evametāsu sīmāsu khaṇḍasīmāya kenaci kammena sannipatitaṃ saṅghaṃ disvā ‘‘ettheva sīmāya saṅghassa demī’’ti vutte yāvatikā bhikkhū antokhaṇḍasīmagatā, tehi bhājetabbaṃ. Tesaṃyeva hi taṃ pāpuṇāti, aññesaṃ sīmantarikāya vā upacārasīmāya vā ṭhitānampi na pāpuṇāti. Khaṇḍasīmāya ṭhite pana rukkhe vā pabbate vā ṭhitassa heṭṭhā vā pathaviyā vemajjhaṃ gatassa pāpuṇātiyeva.
Thus, among these sīmās, if one sees the Sangha gathered for some act within the khaṇḍasīmā and says, "I give to the Sangha right here within this sīmā," it should be shared by as many monks as are within the khaṇḍasīmā. It only reaches them, it does not reach others standing outside the sīmā or within the upacārasīmā. However, it does reach one standing on a tree or a mountain within the khaṇḍasīmā, or one who has gone halfway down into the ground.
‘‘Imissā upacārasīmāya saṅghassa dammī’’ti dinnaṃ pana khaṇḍasīmāsīmantarikāsu ṭhitānampi pāpuṇāti. ‘‘Samānasaṃvāsasīmāya dammī’’ti dinnaṃ pana khaṇḍasīmāsīmantarikāsu ṭhitānaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Avippavāsasīmālābhasīmāsu dinnaṃ tāsu sīmāsu antogatānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti. Gāmasīmādīsu dinnaṃ tāsaṃ sīmānaṃ abbhantare baddhasīmāya ṭhitānampi pāpuṇāti. Abbhantarasīmāudakukkhepasīmāsu dinnaṃ tattha antogatānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti. Janapadaraṭṭharajjadīpacakkavāḷasīmāsupi gāmasīmādīsu vuttasadisoyeva vinicchayo.
However, if it is given saying, "I give to the Sangha within this upacārasīmā," it reaches even those standing outside the khaṇḍasīmā. However, if it is given saying, "I give within the samānasaṃvāsasīmā," it does not reach those standing outside the khaṇḍasīmā. What is given within the avippavāsasīmā or lābhasīmā reaches only those within those sīmās. What is given within the gāmasīmā etc., reaches even those standing within the bounded sīmā inside those sīmās. What is given within the abbhantarasīmā or udakukkhepasīmā reaches only those within. In the janapadaraṭṭharajjadīpacakkavāḷasīmāsupi, the judgement is similar to what was said in the gāmasīmā etc.
Sace pana jambudīpe ṭhito ‘‘tambapaṇṇidīpe saṅghassa dammī’’ti vadati, tambapaṇṇidīpato ekopi gantvā sabbesaṃ gaṇhituṃ labhati. Sacepi tatreva eko sabhāgabhikkhu sabhāgānaṃ bhāgaṃ gaṇhāti, na vāretabbo. Evaṃ tāva yo sīmaṃ parāmasitvā deti, tassa dāne vinicchayo veditabbo.
If someone standing in Jambudīpa says, "I give to the Sangha in Tambapaṇṇidīpa," even one person going from Tambapaṇṇidīpa can obtain it for everyone. Even if one co-resident bhikkhu there takes the share for the co-residents, he should not be prevented. Thus, the judgement should be understood regarding the giving of one who refers to the sīmā.
Yo pana ‘‘asukasīmāyā’’ti vattuṃ na jānāti, kevalaṃ ‘‘sīmā’’ti vacanamattameva jānanto vihāraṃ āgantvā ‘‘sīmāya dammī’’ti vā ‘‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghassa dammī’’ti vā bhaṇati, so pucchitabbo ‘‘sīmā nāma bahuvidhā, kataraṃ sīmaṃ sandhāya bhaṇasī’’ti, sace vadati ‘‘ahaṃ ‘asukasīmā’ti na jānāmi, sīmaṭṭhakasaṅgho bhājetvā gaṇhatū’’ti, katarasīmāya bhājetabbaṃ? Mahāsīvatthero kirāha ‘‘avippavāsasīmāyā’’ti. Tato naṃ āhaṃsu ‘‘avippavāsasīmā nāma tiyojanāpi hoti, evaṃ sante tiyojane ṭhitā lābhaṃ gaṇhissanti, tiyojane ṭhatvā āgantukavattaṃ pūretvā ārāmaṃ pavisitabbaṃ bhavissati, gamiko tiyojanaṃ gantvā senāsanaṃ āpucchissati, nissayapaṭipannassa tiyojanātikkame nissayo paṭippassambhissati, pārivāsikena tiyojanaṃ atikkamitvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetabbaṃ bhavissati, bhikkhuniyā tiyojane ṭhatvā ārāmappavesanaṃ āpucchitabbaṃ bhavissati, sabbampetaṃ upacārasīmāparicchedavaseneva kattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tasmā upacārasīmāyameva bhājetabba’’nti.
But one who does not know how to say "in such-and-such sīmā," knowing only the mere word "sīmā," comes to the monastery and says, "I give within the sīmā" or "I give to the Sangha within the sīma," he should be asked, "sīmā is of many kinds, which sīmā do you intend when you say that?" If he says, "I do not know 'such-and-such sīmā,' let the Sangha within the sīmā divide and take it," in which sīmā should it be divided? It seems Mahāsīvatthera said, "in the avippavāsasīmā." Then they said to him, "the avippavāsasīmā can be three yojanas; in that case, those standing three yojanas away will take the gain, and having stood three yojanas away, one will have to fulfill the duties of a newcomer and enter the monastery, the one going will ask for permission for lodging having gone three yojanas, the dependence of one who has undertaken dependence will cease with the crossing of three yojanas, the probationer will have to make the dawn break after crossing three yojanas, a bhikkhuni will have to ask for permission to enter the monastery standing three yojanas away, all of this should be done only within the boundary of the upacārasīmā. Therefore, it should be divided only within the upacārasīmā."
2729.Ye vihārā saṅghena katikāyaekalābhakāsamānalābhakāetthaetesu vihāresudinnaṃ‘‘katikāya dammī’’ti dinnaṃsabbehibhikkhūhi sahabhājetabbaṃcīvaraṃ katikāya vuccatīti yojanā.
2729.The monasteries which are ekalābhakā (having one profit) or samānalābhakā (having equal profit) by agreement (katikā) with the Sangha, ettha (here), in these monasteries, dinnaṃ (given), "katikāya dammī" (I give by katikā), sabbehi (by all), with the bhikkhus, bhājetabbaṃ (should be divided), what is called katikā, is the connection.
Ayamettha vinicchayo – katikā nāma samānalābhakatikā, tatrevaṃ katikā kātabbā – ekasmiṃ vihāre sannipatitehi bhikkhūhi yaṃ vihāraṃ saṅgaṇhitukāmā samānalābhaṃ kātuṃ icchanti, assa nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘asuko nāma vihāro porāṇako’’ti vā ‘‘buddhādhivuttho’’ti vā ‘‘appalābho’’ti vā yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘taṃ vihāraṃ iminā vihārena saddhiṃ ekalābhaṃ kātuṃ saṅghassa ruccatī’’ti tikkhattuṃ sāvetabbaṃ. Ettāvatā tasmiṃ vihāre nisinnopi idha nisinnova hoti. Tasmiṃ vihārepi saṅghena evameva kātabbaṃ. Ettāvatā idha nisinnopi tasmiṃ vihāre nisinnova hoti. Ekasmiṃ lābhe bhājiyamāne itarasmiṃ ṭhitassa bhāgaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ ekena vihārena saddhiṃ bahūpi āvāsā ekalābhā kātabbāti.
Here is the judgment: katikā means samānalābhakatikā (equal-profit agreement), there the agreement should be made thus: by the bhikkhus gathered in one monastery, desiring to include any monastery and wanting to make it equal-profit, taking its name and saying any reason such as "such-and-such monastery is ancient" or "occupied by Buddhas" or "has little gain," it should be announced three times, "is it agreeable to the Sangha to make that monastery one profit together with this monastery?" By this much, one sitting in that monastery is as if sitting here. In that monastery too, it should be done by the Sangha in the same way. By this much, one sitting here is as if sitting in that monastery. When dividing one gain, one standing in the other can take a share. Thus, many residences can be made one profit together with one monastery.
2730.Cīvaradāyakena dhuvakārā pākavattādiniccasakkārā yattha saṅghassakrīyantikarīyantitatthatasmiṃ vihāre teneva dāyakena saṅghassadinnaṃvihāraṃ ‘‘bhikkhāpaññattiyā dinna’’nti mahesinā vuttanti yojanā.
2730.Where permanent services such as cooking and constant honorings are krīyanti (done), tattha (there), in that monastery, dinnaṃ (given) to the Sangha by that giver, the monastery is said by the great sage (Mahesi) to be "given by bhikkhāpaññatti," is the connection.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – yasmiṃ vihāre imassa cīvaradāyakassa santakaṃ saṅghassa pākavattaṃ vā vattati, yasmiṃ vā vihāre bhikkhū attano bhāraṃ katvā sadā gehe bhojeti, yattha vā tena āvāso kārito, salākabhattādīni vā nibaddhāni, yena pana sakalopi vihāro patiṭṭhāpito, tattha vattabbameva natthi, ime dhuvakārā nāma. Tasmā sace so ‘‘yattha mayhaṃ dhuvakārā karīyanti, ettha dammī’’ti vā ‘‘tattha dethā’’ti vā bhaṇati, bahūsu cepi ṭhānesu dhuvakārā honti, sabbattha dinnameva hoti.
Here is the judgment: in whatever monastery the cooking service belonging to this robe-giver exists for the Sangha, or in whatever monastery the monks always take food at his house having done their duties, or where he has built a residence, or the food-tickets (salākabhatta) are regularly provided, there is no need to mention where the entire monastery has been established, these are called permanent services (dhuvakārā). Therefore, if he says, "I give where my permanent services are done" or "give there," even if the permanent services are in many places, it is given in all places.
Sace pana ekasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū bahutarā honti, tehi vattabbaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ dhuvakāre ekattha bhikkhū bahū, ekattha appakā’’ti, sace ‘‘bhikkhugaṇanāya gaṇhathā’’ti bhaṇati, tathā bhājetvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Ettha ca vatthabhesajjādi appakampi sukhena bhājīyati, yadi pana mañco vā pīṭhakaṃ vā ekameva hoti, taṃ pucchitvā yassa vā vihārassa ekavihārepi vā yassa senāsanassa so vicāreti, tattha dātabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘asukabhikkhu gaṇhatū’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati.
If there are many monks in one monastery, they should say, "in your permanent service, the monks are many in one place, and few in another," if he says, "take it by counting the monks," it is allowable to divide and take it that way. Here, small items like cloth and medicine are easily divided, but if there is only one bed or stool, it should be given to whichever monastery or residence he decides after asking. If he says, "let such-and-such bhikkhu take it," it is allowable.
Atha ‘‘mayhaṃ dhuvakāre dethā’’ti vatvā avicāretvāva gacchati, saṅghassapi vicāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ pana vicāretabbaṃ – ‘‘saṅghattherassa vasanaṭṭhāne dethā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace tattha senāsanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti. Yattha nappahoti, tattha dātabbaṃ. Sace eko bhikkhu ‘‘mayhaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne senāsanaparibhogabhaṇḍaṃ natthī’’ti vadati, tattha dātabbanti.
Then, if he says "give to my permanent service" and goes away without deciding, the Sangha should also decide. It should be decided thus: "give it to the residence of the Sangha Elder." If the residence is full there, it should be given where it is not sufficient. If one bhikkhu says, "there is no furniture or equipment in my residence," it should be given there.
2731.Saṅghassa pana yaṃ dinnanti vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni saṅghassa dammī’’ti yaṃ cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ. ‘‘Sammukhībhūtenā’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhena rassattaṃ.Sammukhibhūtenāti ca upacārasīmāya ṭhitena.Bhājetabbanti ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā kālaṃ ghosetvā bhājetabbaṃ. Idamettha mukhamattadassanaṃ. Vinicchayoaṭṭhakathāya(mahāva. aṭṭha. 379) veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – cīvaradāyakena vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni saṅghassa dammī’’ti dinnesu bhājiyamānesu sīmaṭṭhassa asampattassapi bhāgaṃ gaṇhanto na vāretabbo. Vihāro mahā hoti, therāsanato paṭṭhāya vatthesu diyyamānesu alasajātikā mahātherā pacchā āgacchanti, ‘‘bhante, vīsativassānaṃ diyyati, tumhākaṃ ṭhitikā atikkantā’’ti na vattabbā, ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā tesaṃ datvā pacchā ṭhitikāya dātabbaṃ.
2731. "Saṅghassa pana yaṃ dinnaṃ" means: the robe that is given upon entering the monastery, saying, "I give these robes to the Saṅgha." The shortening (of the word) is due to metrical requirements, where it should have been "Sammukhībhūtena". Sammukhibhūtena means: by one standing at the boundary of the upacāra. Bhājetabbaṃ means: it should be distributed after striking the gong and announcing the time. This is just a brief overview here. The detailed judgment should be understood from the Aṭṭhakathā (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). That is to say, if robes are given by a robe-donor who enters the monastery and says, "I give these robes to the Saṅgha," even if someone is standing at the boundary and has not yet arrived, he should not be prevented from taking his share. If the monastery is large, and the giving of robes begins from the seat of the elders, and lazy senior monks arrive late, one should not say, "Venerable sir, it is being given to those of twenty years' standing, your turn has passed." After setting aside their share according to seniority, then the remainder should be given according to seniority.
‘‘Asukavihāre kira bahuṃ cīvaraṃ uppanna’’nti sutvā yojanantarikavihāratopi bhikkhū āgacchanti, sampattasampattānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dātabbaṃ. Asampattānampi upacārasīmaṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ antevāsikādīsu gaṇhantesu dātabbameva. ‘‘Bahi upacārasīmāya ṭhitānaṃ dethā’’ti vadanti, na dātabbaṃ. Sace pana upacārasīmaṃ okkantehi ekābaddhā hutvā attano vihāradvāre vā antovihāreyeva vā honti, parisavasena vaḍḍhitā nāma sīmā hoti, tasmā dātabbaṃ. Saṅghanavakassa dinnepi pacchā āgatānaṃ dātabbameva. Dutiyabhāge pana therāsanaṃ āruḷhe āgatānaṃ paṭhamabhāgo na pāpuṇāti, dutiyabhāgato vassaggena dātabbaṃ.
Having heard that "many robes have arisen in such and such monastery," monks come even from monasteries a yojana away, and robes should be given to those who have arrived, starting from where they are standing. Even to those who have not arrived but have entered the upacāra boundary, it should indeed be given if their pupils or others are taking (on their behalf). If they say, "Give to those standing outside the upacāra boundary," it should not be given. But if those standing outside the upacāra boundary are connected as one group and are at the gate of their own monastery or inside the monastery itself, the boundary is considered extended due to the size of the assembly, therefore it should be given. Even if given to a new Saṅgha, it should still be given to those who arrive later. However, in the second distribution, those who arrive after the elder's seat has been occupied do not receive a share of the first distribution; they should be given (a share) from the second distribution, according to seniority.
Ekasmiṃ vihāre dasa bhikkhū honti, dasa vatthāni ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti denti, pāṭekkaṃ bhājetabbāni. Sace ‘‘sabbāneva amhākaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti gahetvā gacchanti, duppāpitāni ceva duggahitāni ca, gatagataṭṭhāne saṅghikāneva honti. Ekaṃ pana uddharitvā ‘‘idaṃ tumhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti saṅghattherassa datvā sesāni ‘‘imāni amhākaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
If there are ten monks in one monastery and they give ten cloths, saying, "Let us give to the Saṅgha," they should be distributed individually. But if they take (them) and leave, (thinking) "all of these accrue to us," they are both badly acquired and badly taken; wherever they go, they remain the property of the Saṅgha. However, it is permissible to set aside one and give it to the Saṅgha elder, (saying) "this accrues to you," and take the rest, (saying) "these accrue to us."
Ekameva vatthaṃ ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti āharanti, abhājetvāva ‘‘amhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gaṇhanti, duppāpitañceva duggahitañca, satthakena, pana haliddiādinā vā lekhaṃ katvā ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ ‘‘imaṃ ṭhānaṃ tumhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti saṅghattherassa pāpetvā sesaṃ ‘‘amhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana vatthasseva pupphaṃ vā vali vā, tena paricchedaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace ekaṃ tantaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘idaṃ ṭhānaṃ tumhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti saṅghattherassa datvā sesaṃ ‘‘amhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gaṇhanti, vaṭṭati. Khaṇḍaṃ khaṇḍaṃ chinditvā bhājiyamānaṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.
If they bring just one cloth, (saying) "let us give to the Saṅgha," and take it without distributing it, (thinking) "it accrues to us," it is both badly acquired and badly taken. However, it is permissible to draw a line on it with a knife or turmeric, marking off one portion, give it to the Saṅgha elder, (saying) "this portion accrues to you," and take the rest, (saying) "the rest accrues to us." But it is not permissible to make the distinction with a flower or fringe that is part of the cloth itself. If one thread is pulled out and given to the Saṅgha elder, (saying) "this spot accrues to you," and the rest is taken, (saying) "the rest accrues to us," that is permissible. It is indeed permissible to divide it by cutting it into pieces.
Ekabhikkhuke vihāre saṅghassa cīvaresu uppannesu sace pubbe vuttanayeneva so bhikkhu ‘‘sabbāni mayhaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti gaṇhāti, suggahitāni, ṭhitikā pana na tiṭṭhati. Sace ekekaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti gaṇhāti, ṭhitikā tiṭṭhati. Tattha ṭhitikāya aṭṭhitāya puna aññasmiṃ cīvare uppanne sace eko bhikkhu āgacchati, majjhe chinditvā dvīhipi gahetabbaṃ. Ṭhitāya ṭhitikāya puna aññasmiṃ cīvare uppanne sace navakataro āgacchati, ṭhitikā heṭṭhā orohati. Sace vuḍḍhataro āgacchati, ṭhitikā uddhaṃ ārohati. Atha añño natthi, puna attano pāpetvā gahetabbaṃ.
If, in a monastery with only one monk, robes arise for the Saṅgha, and if that monk, according to the method described earlier, takes all of them, (thinking) "all of these accrue to me," they are well-taken, but the seniority (ṭhitikā) is not maintained. If he sets aside each one, (thinking) "this accrues to me," the seniority is maintained. There, if the seniority is not maintained, and another robe arises again, if another monk arrives, it should be cut in the middle and taken by both. If seniority has been maintained, and another robe arises again, if a newer monk arrives, the seniority descends. If a more senior monk arrives, the seniority ascends. But if there is no other, it should be obtained by assigning it to oneself again.
‘‘Saṅghassa demā’’ti vā ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa demā’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena saṅghaṃ āmasitvā dinnaṃ pana paṃsukūlikānaṃ na vaṭṭati ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipāmi, paṃsukūlikaṅgaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti vuttattā, na pana akappiyattā. Bhikkhusaṅghena apaloketvā dinnampi na gahetabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhu attano santakaṃ deti, taṃ bhikkhudattiyaṃ nāma vaṭṭati. Paṃsukūlaṃ pana na hoti. Evaṃ santepi dhutaṅgaṃ na bhijjati. ‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ dema, therānaṃ demā’’ti vutte pana paṃsukūlikānampi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Idaṃ vatthaṃ saṅghassa dema, iminā upāhanatthavikapattatthavikaāyogaaṃsabaddhakādīni karothā’’ti dinnampi vaṭṭati.
If something is given after addressing the Saṅgha in any way, saying, "Let us give to the Saṅgha," or "Let us give to the Saṅgha of monks," it is not permissible for rag-robe wearers because it was said (by the Buddha), "I reject householder's robes; I undertake the rag-robe practice (paṃsukūlikaṅgaṃ)," not because it is unallowable. It should not be taken even if it is given without informing the Saṅgha of monks (apaloketvā). But what a monk gives from his own possessions is called a personal gift to a monk (bhikkhudattiyaṃ), and it is permissible. However, it is not considered paṃsukūla. Even so, the dhutaṅga is not broken. But if it is said, "We give to the monks, we give to the elders," it is permissible even for rag-robe wearers. If it is given (saying), "We give this cloth to the Saṅgha; with this, make straps for shoes (upāhanatthavika), coverings (pattatthavika), waistbands (āyogaaṃsa), binding cords (baddhaka), etc.," that is also permissible.
Pattatthavikādīnaṃ atthāya dinnāni bahūnipi honti, cīvaratthāyapi pahonti, tato cīvaraṃ katvā pārupituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana saṅgho bhājitātirittāni vatthāni chinditvā upāhanatthavikādīnaṃ atthāya bhājeti, tato gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sāmikehi vicāritameva hi vaṭṭati, na itaraṃ.
Even if many (cloths) are given for the purpose of straps for bowls, etc., they are sufficient even for robes, so it is permissible to make robes and wear them. But if the Saṅgha cuts up the cloths remaining after distribution and distributes them for the purpose of straps for shoes, etc., it is not permissible to take them. Only what has been considered by the owners is permissible, not the other way around.
‘‘Paṃsukūlikasaṅghassa dhammakaraṇaaṃsabaddhādīnaṃ atthāya demā’’ti vuttepi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Parikkhāro nāma paṃsukūlikānampi icchitabbo. Yaṃ tattha atirekaṃ hoti, taṃ cīvarepi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Suttaṃ saṅghassa denti, paṃsukūlikehipi gahetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni saṅghassa dammī’’ti dinnesu vinicchayo.
Even if it is said, "We give to the Saṅgha of rag-robe wearers for the purpose of dusters (dhammakaraṇa), waistbands, etc.," it is permissible to take them. Parikkhāra (requisites) are indeed desired even by rag-robe wearers. Whatever is left over there, it is permissible to apply it to robes as well. If thread is given to the Saṅgha, it should also be taken by the rag-robe wearers. This is the judgment regarding what is given upon entering the monastery, (saying,) "I give these robes to the Saṅgha."
Sace pana bahi upacārasīmāya addhānapaṭipanne bhikkhū disvā ‘‘saṅghassa dammī’’ti saṅghattherassa vā saṅghanavakassa vā āroceti, sacepi yojanaṃ pharitvā parisā ṭhitā hoti, ekābaddhā ce, sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ye pana dvādasahi hatthehi parisaṃ asampattā, tesaṃ na pāpuṇātīti.
But if, seeing monks on a journey outside the upacāra boundary, one announces to the Saṅgha elder or a new monk in the Saṅgha, "I give to the Saṅgha," even if the assembly is spread out over a yojana, if they are connected as one group, it accrues to all of them. But it does not accrue to those who are not within twelve hands of the assembly.
2732.Idāni ‘‘ubhatosaṅghe detī’’ti mātikaṃ vivaranto āha‘‘ubhatosaṅghamuddissā’’tiādi.Ubhatosaṅghamuddissāti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ, bhikkhunisaṅghañca uddisitvā.Detīti ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa demī’’ti deti.‘‘Bahu vā’’ti ettha ‘‘bahū vā’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena rassattaṃ. Bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhū thokā vā hontu bahū vā, puggalaggena akatvā ubhatosaṅghavasena samabhāgova kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2732. Now, explaining the topic "he gives to the Saṅgha of both (monks and nuns)," he says, "ubhatosaṅghamuddissā" etc. Ubhatosaṅghamuddissā means, having designated both the Saṅgha of monks and the Saṅgha of nuns. Detī means, he gives, (saying) "I give to the Saṅgha of both." In "bahu vā" (whether many), the shortening is due to metrical reasons, where it should have been "bahū vā". The meaning is that whether there are few or many monks compared to the nuns, it should be divided equally according to the number of the two Saṅghas, without doing it by counting individuals.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa dammī’’ti vuttepi ‘‘dvedhāsaṅghassa dammi, dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ dammi, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunisaṅghassa ca dammī’’ti vuttepi ubhatosaṅghassa dinnameva hoti, dve bhāge same katvā eko dātabbo.
Here is the judgment: even if it is said, "I give to the Saṅgha of both," or "I give to the two Saṅghas," or "I give to the Saṅgha of monks and the Saṅgha of nuns," it is still considered given to the Saṅgha of both; having made two equal parts, one part should be given to each.
Ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā.
Because it is taken by the mention of Ubhatosaṅgha (the Saṅgha of both).
‘‘Ubhatosaṅghassa ca cetiyassa ca dammī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Idha pana cetiyassa saṅghato pāpuṇanakoṭṭhāso nāma natthi, ekapuggalassa pattakoṭṭhāsasamova koṭṭhāso hoti.
The same method applies even if it is said, "I give to the Saṅgha of both and to the shrine." Here, however, there is no share accruing to the shrine from the Saṅgha; the share is just like the share accruing to a single individual.
‘‘Ubhatosaṅghassa ca tuyhañca cetiyassa cā’’ti vutte pana dvāvīsati koṭṭhāse katvā dasa bhikkhūnaṃ, dasa bhikkhunīnaṃ, eko puggalassa, eko cetiyassa dātabbo. Tattha puggalo saṅghatopi attano vassaggena puna gahetuṃ labhati. Cetiyassa ekoyeva.
But if it is said, "To the Saṅgha of both, and to you, and to the shrine," then having divided it into twenty-two shares, ten should be given to the monks, ten to the nuns, one to the individual, and one to the shrine. There, the individual can take (a share) again from the Saṅgha according to his seniority. The shrine gets only one.
‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunīnañca dammī’’ti vutte pana majjhe bhinditvā na dātabbaṃ, bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca gaṇetvā dātabbaṃ.
But if it is said, "I give to the Saṅgha of monks and to the nuns," it should not be divided in the middle and given; the monks and nuns should be counted and (the offering) given accordingly.
Bhikkhusaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā.
Because it is taken by the mention of Bhikkhusaṅgha (the Saṅgha of monks).
‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunīnañca tuyhañca cetiyassa cā’’ti vuttepi cetiyassa ekapuggalapaṭivīso labbhati, puggalassa visuṃ na labbhati. Tasmā ekaṃ cetiyassa datvā avasesaṃ bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca gaṇetvā bhājetabbaṃ.
Even if it is said, "To the Saṅgha of monks, and to the nuns, and to you, and to the shrine," the shrine gets a share equivalent to that of one individual, but the individual does not get a separate share. Therefore, after giving one share to the shrine, the monks and nuns should be counted and the rest divided accordingly.
‘‘Bhikkhūnañca bhikkhunīnañca dammī’’ti vuttepi na majjhe bhinditvā dātabbaṃ, puggalagaṇanāya eva vibhajitabbaṃ.
Even if it is said, "I give to the monks and to the nuns," it should not be divided in the middle and given; it should be divided according to the count of individuals.
‘‘Bhikkhūnañca bhikkhunīnañca tuyhañca cetiyassa cā’’ti evaṃ vuttepi cetiyassa ekapuggalapaṭivīso labbhati, puggalassa visuṃ natthi, bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca gaṇetvā eva bhājetabbaṃ. Yathā ca bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ādiṃ katvā nayo nīto, evaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ ādiṃ katvāpi netabbo.
Even if it is said like this, "To the monks, and to the nuns, and to you, and to the shrine," the shrine gets a share equivalent to that of one individual, but the individual does not get a separate share; the monks and nuns should be counted and divided accordingly. And just as the method has been shown starting with the Saṅgha of monks, so too it should be applied starting with the Saṅgha of nuns.
‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca tuyhañcā’’ti vutte puggalassa visuṃ na labbhati, vassaggeneva gahetabbaṃ.
If it is said, "To the Saṅgha of monks and to you," the individual does not get a separate share; it should be taken only according to seniority.
‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca cetiyassa cā’’ti vutte pana cetiyassa visuṃ paṭivīso labbhati.
But if it is said, "To the Saṅgha of monks and to the shrine," the shrine gets a separate share.
‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca tuyhañca cetiyassa cā’’ti vuttepi cetiyasseva labbhati, na puggalassa.
Even if it is said, "To the Saṅgha of monks, and to you, and to the shrine," only the shrine gets (a share), not the individual.
‘‘Bhikkhūnañca tuyhañcā’’ti vuttepi visuṃ na labbhati.
Even if it is said, "To the monks and to you," a separate share is not obtained.
‘‘Bhikkhūnañca cetiyassa cā’’ti vutte pana cetiyassa labbhati.
But if it is said, "To the monks and to the shrine," the shrine obtains (a share).
‘‘Bhikkhūnañca tuyhañca cetiyassa cā’’ti vuttepi cetiyasseva visuṃ labbhati, na puggalassa. Bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ ādiṃ katvāpi evameva yojetabbaṃ.
Even if it is said, "To the monks, and to you, and to the shrine," only the shrine obtains a separate share, not the individual. The same should be applied starting with the Saṅgha of nuns as well.
Pubbe buddhappamukhassa ubhatosaṅghassa dānaṃ denti, bhagavā majjhe nisīdati, dakkhiṇato bhikkhū, vāmato bhikkhuniyo nisīdanti, bhagavā ubhinnaṃ saṅghatthero, tadā bhagavā attano laddhapaccaye attanāpi paribhuñjati, bhikkhūnampi dāpeti. Etarahi pana paṇḍitamanussā sadhātukaṃ paṭimaṃ vā cetiyaṃ vā ṭhapetvā buddhappamukhassa ubhatosaṅghassa dānaṃ denti, paṭimāya vā cetiyassa vā purato ādhārake pattaṃ ṭhapetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ datvā ‘‘buddhānaṃ demā’’ti tattha yaṃ paṭhamaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ denti, vihāraṃ vā āharitvā ‘‘idaṃ cetiyassa demā’’ti piṇḍapātañca mālāgandhādīni ca denti, tattha kathaṃ paṭipajjitabbanti? Mālāgandhādīni tāva cetiye āropetabbāni, vatthehi paṭākā, telena padīpā kātabbā. Piṇḍapātamadhuphāṇitādīni pana yo nibaddhaṃ cetiyassa jaggako hoti pabbajito vā gahaṭṭho vā, tassa dātabbāni. Nibaddhajaggake asati āhaṭapattaṃ ṭhapetvā vattaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Upakaṭṭhe kāle bhuñjitvā pacchāpi vattaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.
In the past, they would give a donation to the Saṅgha of both (monks and nuns) with the Buddha at its head. The Blessed One would sit in the middle, with the monks sitting to the right and the nuns to the left. The Blessed One was the elder of both Saṅghas. At that time, the Blessed One would partake of the requisites received and also give them to the monks. Nowadays, however, wise people set up an image or a shrine containing relics and give a donation to the Saṅgha of both with the Buddha at its head. Having placed a bowl in front of the image or shrine on a stand, they pour water as a dedication and give it, (saying,) "We give to the Buddhas." And whatever food or edibles they give first there, or having brought it to the monastery, they give alms-food and flowers, incense, etc., (saying,) "We give this to the shrine," how should one proceed in that case? The flowers, incense, etc., should be offered to the shrine, and cloths should be made into banners, and oil should be used for lamps. But the alms-food, honey, molasses, etc., should be given to the monk or layperson who regularly takes care of the shrine. If there is no regular caretaker, it is permissible to place the bowl that was brought, make an allocation, and partake of it. Having eaten when the time is near, it is indeed permissible to make an allocation afterwards as well.
Mālāgandhādīsu ca yaṃ kiñci ‘‘idaṃ haritvā cetiyassa pūjaṃ karothā’’ti vutte dūrampi haritvā pūjetabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhaṃ saṅghassa harā’’ti vuttepi haritabbaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘ahaṃ piṇḍāya carāmi, āsanasālāya bhikkhū atthi, te harissantī’’ti vutte ‘‘bhante, tuyhaṃyeva dammī’’ti vadati, bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Atha pana ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa dassāmī’’ti harantassa gacchato antarāva kālo upakaṭṭho hoti, attano pāpetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
And whatever is said regarding flowers, incense, etc., (saying) "take this and make an offering to the shrine," it should be taken even a long distance and offered. Even if it is said, "Take the alms-food to the Saṅgha," it should be taken. But if, when one says, "I am going for alms, there are monks in the assembly hall, they will take it," (the donor) says, "Venerable sir, I will give it to you alone," it is permissible to eat it. But if, while one is taking (food) to give to the Saṅgha of monks, the time is near while going, it is permissible to bring it to oneself and eat it.
2733.Yaṃ pana cīvaraṃ ‘‘yasmiṃ āvāse vassaṃvutthassa saṅghassa dammī’’ti deti,tasmiṃyeva āvāsevutthavassenasaṅghena vā gaṇena vā puggalena vātaṃcīvaraṃ bhājetabbantivaṇṇitaṃdesitanti yojanā.
2733. The robe that is given, (saying,) "I give to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains in whichever dwelling," that robe should be distributed by the Saṅgha that has spent the rains in that very dwelling, or by a group, or by an individual; thus it is described, thus it is taught, is the meaning.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa dammī’’ti deti, yāvatikā bhikkhū tasmiṃ āvāse vassaṃvutthā, yattakā vassacchedaṃ akatvā purimavassaṃvutthā, tehi bhājetabbaṃ, aññesaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Disāpakkantassāpi sati gāhake yāva kathinassa ubbhārā dātabbaṃ. Anatthate pana kathine antohemante evañca vatvā dinnaṃ pacchimavassaṃvutthānampi pāpuṇātīti lakkhaṇaññū vadanti. Aṭṭhakathāsu panetaṃ avicāritaṃ.
Here is the judgment: having entered the monastery, one gives, (saying,) "I give these robes to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains." As many monks as have resided for the rains in that dwelling, and as many as have resided for the previous rains without a break in the rains-residence, should distribute it; it does not accrue to others. Even to one who has departed for another direction, it should be given until the lifting of the Kathina, if there is someone to take it (on their behalf). But if the Kathina is not laid down, and near the end of the season it is given in this way, those knowledgeable in the texts say that it accrues even to those who resided for the rains in the later period. However, this has not been considered in the commentaries.
Sace pana bahi upacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhito ‘‘vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa dammī’’ti vadati, sampattānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti. Atha ‘‘asukavihāre vassaṃvutthasaṅghassā’’ti vadati, tatra vassaṃvutthānameva yāva kathinassubbhārā pāpuṇāti. Sace pana gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya evaṃ vadati, tatra sammukhībhūtānaṃyeva sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā. Antovasseyeva ‘‘vassaṃ vasantānaṃ dammī’’ti vutte chinnavassā na labhanti, vassaṃ vasantāva labhanti. Cīvaramāse pana ‘‘vassaṃ vasantānaṃ dammī’’ti vutte pacchimikāya vassūpagatānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti, purimikāya vassūpagatānañca chinnavassānañca na pāpuṇāti.
But if, standing outside the upacāra boundary, one says, "I give to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains," it accrues to all who have arrived. But if one says, "To the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains in such and such monastery," it accrues only to those who have resided for the rains there until the lifting of the Kathina. But if one says so from the first day of the hot season onwards, it accrues to all those present there. Why? Because it arose at a time away from the rains. If, within the rains period itself, it is said, "I give to those residing for the rains," those whose rains-residence is broken do not receive it, only those residing for the rains receive it. But in the robe month, if it is said, "I give to those residing for the rains," it accrues only to those who have undertaken the rains-residence in the later period; it does not accrue to those who undertook the rains-residence in the earlier period, nor to those whose rains-residence is broken.
Cīvaramāsato paṭṭhāya yāva hemantassa pacchimo divaso, tāva ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ demā’’ti vutte kathinaṃ atthataṃ vā hotu anatthataṃ vā, atītavassaṃvutthānameva pāpuṇāti. Gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya vutte pana mātikā āropetabbā ‘‘atītavassāvāsassa pañca māsā abhikkantā, anāgate cātumāsaccayena bhavissati, kataravassāvāsassa desī’’ti. Sace ‘‘atītavassaṃvutthānaṃ dammī’’ti vadati, taṃ antovassaṃ vutthānameva pāpuṇāti. Disāpakkantānampi sabhāgā gaṇhituṃ labhanti.
From the beginning of the robe season until the last day of winter, even if the kathina is laid out or not laid out, if it is said, "We give the vassāvāsika," it only accrues to those who have resided during the past rains. However, if it is said from the first day of summer, the mātikā should be raised: "Five months have passed since the previous rains residence, and the next will be in four months; for which rains residence is this intended?" If he says, "I give it for those who resided during the past rains," it only accrues to those who resided within the rains. Those who have departed to other directions may also take a share.
Sace ‘‘anāgate vassāvāsikaṃ dammī’’ti vadati, taṃ ṭhapetvā vassūpanāyikadivase gahetabbaṃ. Atha ‘‘agutto vihāro, corabhayaṃ atthi, na sakkā ṭhapetuṃ, gaṇhitvā vā āhiṇḍitu’’nti vutte ‘‘sampattānaṃ dammī’’ti vadati, bhājetvā gahetabbaṃ. Sace vadati ‘‘ito me, bhante, tatiye vasse vassāvāsikaṃ na dinnaṃ, taṃ dammī’’ti, tasmiṃ antovasse vutthabhikkhūnaṃ pāpuṇāti. Sace te disāpakkantā, añño vissāsiko gaṇhāti, dātabbaṃ. Atha ekoyeva avasiṭṭho, sesā kālakatā, sabbaṃ ekasseva pāpuṇāti. Sace ekopi natthi, saṅghikaṃ hoti, sammukhībhūtehi bhājetabbanti.
If he says, "I will give it for the future rains residence," it should be kept and taken on the day of the rains invitation (vassūpanāyika). Then, if it is said, "The monastery is unguarded, there is danger of thieves, it is not possible to keep it, or to wander around having taken it," if he says, "I give it to those who are present," it should be divided and taken. If he says, "Venerable sir, for the past three years, the rains residence gift has not been given by me; I give that," it accrues to the monks who resided in that period. If they have departed to other directions, another trustworthy person takes it; it should be given. Then, if only one remains and the rest have passed away, it all accrues to that one. If even one is not there, it belongs to the Sangha; it should be divided by those present.
2734.Yāguyā panapītāya vābhatte vābhutte sacepana ādissa‘‘yena me yāgu pītā, tassa dammi, yena me bhattaṃ bhuttaṃ, tassa dammī’’ti paricchinditvā cīvaraṃ deti, vinayadharena tattha tattheva dānaṃ dātabbanti yojanā. Esa nayo khādanīyacīvarasenāsanabhesajjādīsu.
2734.However, after drinking rice gruel or after eating alms food, if, however, having specified, "I give to the one by whom my rice gruel was drunk; I give to the one by whom my alms food was eaten," and gives a robe, it should be construed that the vinayadhara should give the gift there and then. This is the method for edibles, robes, lodgings, medicines, etc.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – bhikkhū ajjatanāya vā svātanāya vā yāguyā nimantetvā tesaṃ gharaṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ yāguṃ deti, yāguṃ datvā pītāya yāguyā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni yehi mayhaṃ yāgu pītā, tesaṃ dammī’’ti deti, yehi nimantitehi yāgu pītā, tesaṃyeva pāpuṇanti, yehi pana bhikkhācāravattena gharadvārena gacchantehi vā gharaṃ paviṭṭhehi vā yāgu laddhā, yesaṃ vā āsanasālato pattaṃ āharitvā manussehi nītā, ye vā therehi pesitā, tesaṃ na pāpuṇanti.
Herein is the judgment: Having invited monks for today's or tomorrow's rice gruel, having given rice gruel to those who have entered their house, having given rice gruel, "These robes I give to those by whom rice gruel has been drunk," they accrue only to those by whom the rice gruel has been drunk, due to invitation. However, those who obtained rice gruel while going on alms round or having entered the house, or for whom rice gruel was brought in a bowl from the refectory by people, or those who were sent by the elders, it does not accrue to them.
Sace pana nimantitabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ aññepi bahū āgantvā antogehañca bahigehañca pūretvā nisinnā, dāyako ca evaṃ vadati ‘‘nimantitā vā hontu animantitā vā, yesaṃ mayā yāgu dinnā, sabbesaṃ imāni vatthāni hontū’’ti, sabbesaṃ pāpuṇanti. Yehi pana therānaṃ hatthato yāgu laddhā, tesaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Atha so ‘‘yehi mayhaṃ yāgu pītā, sabbesaṃ hontū’’ti vadati, sabbesaṃ pāpuṇanti. Bhattakhādanīyesupi eseva nayo.
However, if along with the invited monks, many others come and fill up the inner house and the outer house and sit down, and the donor says thus, "Whether invited or uninvited, may these cloths be for all by whom rice gruel has been given by me," they accrue to all. However, it does not accrue to those by whom rice gruel has been obtained from the hands of the elders. Then, if he says, "May it be for all by whom rice gruel has been drunk by me," it accrues to all. The same method applies to alms food and edibles.
Cīvare vāti pubbepi yena vassaṃ vāsetvā bhikkhūnaṃ cīvaraṃ dinnapubbaṃ hoti, so ce bhikkhū bhojetvā vadati ‘‘yesaṃ mayā pubbe cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, tesaṃyeva imaṃ cīvaraṃ vā suttaṃ vā sappimadhuphāṇitādīni vā hontū’’ti, sabbaṃ tesaṃyeva pāpuṇāti.
Or in robes: Even previously, one who has provided robes to monks after having them spend the rains there, if he feeds the monks and says, "May this robe or thread or ghee, honey, molasses, etc., be only for those by whom a robe was previously given," it all accrues only to them.
Senāsane vāti ‘‘yo mayā kārite vihāre vā pariveṇe vā vasati, tassidaṃ hotū’’ti vutte tasseva hoti.
Or in lodging: If it is said, "May this be for the one who dwells in the monastery or enclosure made by me," it belongs to that one.
Bhesajje vāti ‘‘mayaṃ kālena kālaṃ therānaṃ sappiādīni bhesajjāni dema, yehi tāni laddhāni, tesaṃyevidaṃ hotū’’ti vutte tesaṃyeva hotīti.
Or in medicine: If it is said, "From time to time, we give ghee, etc., as medicine to the elders; may this be for those by whom those were obtained," it belongs to them.
2735.Dīyatetidānanti kammasādhanena cīvaraṃ vuccati.Yaṃ-saddena cīvarassa parāmaṭṭhattātaṃ-saddenāpi tadeva parāmasitabbanti.
2735.Dīyateti giving, hence dāna means robe by way of the accomplishment of action. Since the robe is referred to by the word "yaṃ," it should be understood that the same is referred to by the word "taṃ" as well.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa dammī’’ti evaṃ parammukhā vā ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, tumhākaṃ dammī’’ti evaṃ sammukhā vā pādamūle ṭhapetvā vā deti, taṃ tasseva hoti. Sace pana ‘‘idaṃ tumhākañca tumhākaṃ antevāsikānañca dammī’’ti evaṃ vadati, therassa ca antevāsikānañca pāpuṇāti. Uddesaṃ gahetuṃ āgato gahetvā gacchanto ca atthi, tassāpi pāpuṇāti. ‘‘Tumhehi saddhiṃ nibaddhacārikabhikkhūnaṃ dammī’’ti vutte uddesantevāsikānaṃ vattaṃ katvā uddesaparipucchādīni gahetvā vicarantānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātīti.
Herein is the judgment: "I give this robe to so-and-so by name," thus giving it in absentia, or "Venerable sir, I give this to you," thus placing it at his feet in his presence, it belongs to that one. However, if he says, "I give this to you and your pupils," it accrues to the elder and the pupils. It also accrues to the one who has come to take instruction and is going away having taken it. If it is said, "I give it to the monks wandering in dependence along with you," it accrues to all those wandering, having performed duties for those receiving instruction, those asking questions, etc.
2737.Vadaticcevamevaceti iccevaṃ yathāvuttanayena vadati ce.Tanti taṃ parikkhāraṃ.Tesanti mātuādīnaṃ. Saṅghasseva santakaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2737.Vadaticcevamevaceti if he speaks thus according to the manner stated. Tanti that requisite. Tesanti to the mother, etc. It belongs to the Sangha alone, is the construction.
2738.‘‘Pañcannaṃ…pe… hotī’’ti iminā purimagāthādvayena vitthāritamevatthaṃ saṃkhipitvā dasseti.Pañcannaṃsahadhammikānaṃ.Accayeti kālakiriyāya.Dānanti ‘‘mayi kālakate imaṃ parikkhāraṃ tuyhaṃ hotu, tava santakaṃ karohī’’tiādinā pariccajanaṃ.Kiñcipīti antamaso dantakaṭṭhampi. Gihīnaṃ pana dānaṃ tathā dāyakānaṃ gihīnameva accaye rūhatīti yojanā.
2738."To five…pe… it belongs": By this pair of verses, he shows concisely the meaning that was expanded upon in the previous verses. Pañcannaṃ: To five co-religionists. Accaye: At the death. Dānanti: Giving, abandonment, by way of "When I am dead, may this requisite be for you; make it your property," etc. Kiñcipī: Even a toothpick at the very least. However, giving to lay people ripens for the lay people who are the donors at their death, is the construction.
2739.Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā bhikkhuniupassaye kālaṃ karoti,assabhikkhussa vā sāmaṇerassa vā parikkhārābhikkhūnaṃyeva santakābhikkhusaṅghasseva santakāti yojanā. Bhikkhusaṅghasseva santakā kālakatassa bhikkhusaṅghapariyāpannattā.
2739.If a monk or a novice dies in a nun's residence (bhikkhuniupassaya), the requisites of that monk or novice belong to the monks alone, they belong to the community of monks, is the construction. They belong to the community of monks alone, because the deceased is included in the community of monks.
2740.Sāmaṇerī vāti etthavā-saddena ‘‘sikkhamānā vā’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Vihārasmiṃbhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanaṭṭhāne.Tassāti bhikkhuniyā vā sāmaṇeriyā vā sikkhamānāya vā parikkhārā bhikkhunīnaṃ santakā hontīti yojanā.Santakāti etthāpi bhikkhūsu vuttanayenevattho gahetabbo.
2740.Sāmaṇerī vāti: Here, by the word vā, "or a trainee (sikkhamānā)" is included. Vihārasmiṃ: In the dwelling place of the monks. Tassāti: The requisites of that nun or female novice or trainee belong to the nuns, is the construction. Santakā: Here also, the meaning should be taken in the same way as stated regarding the monks.
2741.Dehi netvāti ettha ‘‘imaṃ cīvara’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati. ‘‘Imaṃ cīvaraṃ netvā asukassa dehī’’ti yaṃ cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, taṃ tassa purimasseva santakaṃ hoti. ‘‘Idaṃ cīvaraṃ asukassa dammī’’ti yaṃ cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, taṃ yassa pahiyyati, tassa pacchimasseva santakaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2741.Dehi netvāti: Here, "this robe" is obtained from the context. That robe which has been given, "Having brought this robe, give it to so-and-so," belongs to the former one. That robe which has been given, "I give this robe to so-and-so," belongs to the latter one to whom it is sent, is the construction.
2742.Yathāvuttavacanappakārānurūpena sāmike ñatvā sāmikesu vissāsena vā tesu matesu matakacīvarampi gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatīti dassetuṃ āha‘‘eva’’ntiādi. ‘‘Matassa vā amatassa vā’’ti padacchedo.Vissāsaṃ vāpi gaṇheyyāti jīvantassa santakaṃ vissāsaggāhaṃ gaṇheyya.Gaṇhe matakacīvaranti matassa cīvaraṃ matakaparikkhāranīhārena pāpetvā gaṇheyya.
2742.To show that it is fitting to take even a dead person's robe, having known the owner in accordance with the manner of speech stated previously, by trust in the owners or with their approval, he says, "eva" etc. "Matassa vā amatassa vā" is the word division. Vissāsaṃ vāpi gaṇheyyā: One should take the acceptance of trust of the living one. Gaṇhe matakacīvaranti: One should take the robe of the dead one, having obtained it by the disposal of the requisites of the dead one.
2743.Rajate anenātirajananti mūlādisabbamāha.Vantadosenāti savāsanasamucchinnarāgādidosena.Tādināti rūpādīsu chaḷārammaṇesu rāgādīnaṃ anuppattiyā aṭṭhasu lokadhammesu nibbikāratāya ekasadisena.
2743.That by which it is colored is rajana: Color, meaning all the roots, etc. Vantadosenā: By one who has abandoned defilements, by one whose passion and other defilements have been eradicated along with their tendencies. Tādinā: By one who is unchanging, even, due to the non-arising of passion, etc., towards the six objects—forms, etc.—and in the eight worldly conditions.
2744-5.‘‘Mūle’’tiādīsu niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Mūlarajane haliddiṃ ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ mūlarajanaṃ vaṭṭati.Khandhesurajanesu mañjeṭṭhañca tuṅgahārakañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ khandharajanaṃ vaṭṭati.Pattesurajanesu alliyā pattaṃ tathā nīliyā pattañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ pattarajanaṃ vaṭṭati.Puppharajanesu kusumbhañca kiṃsukañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ puppharajanaṃ vaṭṭati.Tacarajane loddañca kaṇḍulañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ tacarajanaṃ vaṭṭati.Phalarajanaṃ sabbampi vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2744-5.In "Mūle" etc., the locative is used in the sense of determination. In root colors, all root colors are allowable except turmeric. In trunk colors, all trunk colors are allowable except madder and tuṅgahāraka. In leaf colors, all leaf colors are allowable except allī leaf and nīliyā leaf. In flower colors, all flower colors are allowable except safflower and kiṃsuka. In bark colors, all bark colors are allowable except lodh and kaṇḍula. All fruit colors are allowable, is the construction.
Mañjeṭṭhanti eko sakaṇṭakarukkho, valliviseso ca, yassa rajanaṃ mañjeṭṭhabījavaṇṇaṃ hoti. Mañjeṭṭharukkhassa khandho setavaṇṇoti so idha na gahetabbo rajanādhikārattā.Tuṅgahārakonāma eko sakaṇṭakarukkho, yassa rajanaṃ haritālavaṇṇaṃ hoti.Allīti cullatāpiñcharukkho, yassa paṇṇarajanaṃ haliddivaṇṇaṃ hoti.Nīlīti gacchaviseso, yassa pana rajanaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ hoti.Kiṃsukaṃnāma vallikiṃsukapupphaṃ, yassa rajanaṃ lohitavaṇṇaṃ hoti.
Mañjeṭṭhanti: Madder is a thorny tree, also a type of creeper, whose color is the color of madder seeds. Since the trunk of the madder tree is white, that is not to be taken here, because the topic is color. Tuṅgahāraka is a thorny tree whose color is the color of orpiment. Allī is a small fig tree whose leaf color is the color of turmeric. Nīlī is a type of plant whose color is blue. Kiṃsuka is the flower of the climbing kiṃsuka, whose color is red.
2746.Kiliṭṭhasāṭakanti malīnasāṭakaṃ.Dhovitunti ekavāraṃ dhovituṃ. Alliyā dhotaṃ kira sammadeva rajanaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti.
2746.Kiliṭṭhasāṭakanti: A soiled cloth. Dhovitunti: To wash once. It is said that cloth washed with allī properly accepts the color.
2747.Cīvarānaṃkathā sesāti bhedakāraṇappakārakathādikā idha avuttakathā. Paṭhame kathine vuttāti seso.Vibhāvināti khandhakabhāṇakena.
2747.Cīvarānaṃ kathā sesāti: The remaining talk about robes, such as talk about the grounds for division, etc., is the talk not spoken of here. The rest was spoken of in the first kathina section. Vibhāvinā: By the reciter of the section (khandhakabhāṇaka).
Cīvarakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Explanation of the Robe Section is Finished.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Explanation of the Great Division in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī, the Explanation of the Vinaya Judgments.
Mahāvaggavinicchayavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Mahāvagga Judgments is Finished.
Cūḷavaggo
Cūḷavagga
Pārivāsikakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Parivāsika Section
2748.Evaṃ mahāvaggavinicchayaṃ saṅkhepena dassetvā cūḷavaggāgatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tajjanīya’’ntiādi.Tajjanīyanti kalahakārakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tato viramanatthāya niggahavasena anuññātaṃ ñatticatutthaṃ tajjanīyakammañca.Niyassanti bālassa abyattassa āpattibahulassa anapadānassa ananulomikehi gihisaṃsaggehi saṃsaṭṭhassa viharato bhikkhuno niggahavasena nissāya vasanatthāya kātuṃ anuññātaṃ ñatticatutthaṃ niyassakammañca.
2748.Having thus shown concisely the judgments in the Mahāvagga, to show the judgments in the Cūḷavagga, he says, "tajjanīya" etc. Tajjanīyanti: The censure (tajjanīyakamma) which is a motion with three announcements, allowed as a way of restraint for monks who are quarrelsome, to desist therefrom. Niyassanti: The dependence (niyassakamma) which is a motion with three announcements, allowed to be done as a way of restraint for a monk who is foolish, incompetent, has many offenses, is without grounds for expulsion, is associated with unsuitable lay associations, to live in dependence for the sake of restraint.
Pabbājanti kuladūsakassa bhikkhuno yattha tena kuladūsanaṃ kataṃ, tattha na labhitabbaāvāsatthāya niggahavasena anuññātaṃ ñatticatutthaṃ pabbājanīyakammañca.Paṭisāraṇanti saddhassa upāsakassa dāyakassa kārakassa saṅghupaṭṭhākassa jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi akkosakassa bhikkhuno taṃkhamāpanatthāya niggahavasena anuññātaṃ ñatticatutthaṃ paṭisāraṇīyakammañca.
Pabbājanti: The banishment (pabbājanīyakamma) which is a motion with three announcements, allowed as a way of restraint so that a monk who is a family defiler may not obtain lodging in the place where he committed the family defilement. Paṭisāraṇanti: The reconciliation (paṭisāraṇīyakamma) which is a motion with three announcements, allowed as a way of restraint so that a monk who insults a faithful lay follower, a donor, a benefactor, a supporter of the Sangha with grounds for insult such as birth, etc., may obtain forgiveness from him.
Tividhukkhepananti āpattiyā adassane, āpattiyā appaṭikamme, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ca tato oramituṃ niggahavasena anuññātaṃ ñatticatutthaṃ tividhaṃ ukkhepanīyakammañcāti.Dīpayetipāḷiyā, aṭṭhakathāyaca vuttanayena pakāseyyāti attho.
Tividhukkhepananti: The threefold suspension (ukkhepanīyakamma) which is a motion with three announcements, allowed as a way of restraint to desist from not seeing an offense, not atoning for an offense, and not relinquishing a wicked view. Dīpayeti: He should reveal it in the manner stated in the Pali and the Commentary.
‘‘satta kammānī’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā dassito panetesaṃ viseso atthuppattivasenāti daṭṭhabbo. Vitthāro panesaṃ kammakkhandhakato veditabbo.
It should be understood that "seven acts" have been stated. However, the distinction of these that has been shown should be seen in terms of the arising of meaning. However, the expansion of these should be understood from the Khandhaka on Acts (kammakkhandhaka).
2749.Khandhakekammasaṅkhāte khandhake āgatāni tecattālīsa vattāni.Tadanantareti tassa kammakkhandhakassa anantare.Khandhaketi pārivāsikakkhandhake. Nava adhikāni yesaṃ tenavādhikāni tiṃsevavattāni, ekūnacattālīsa vattānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
2749.Khandhake: Forty-three duties that have come in the section called the Acts section (kammasaṅkhāta). Tadanantare: Immediately after that Acts section. Khandhake: In the Pārivāsika section. Those for which nine are additional are navādhikāni tiṃseva, forty-nine duties, is what is said, meaning thirty-nine duties.
Kammakkhandhaketāva –
Kammakkhandhaketāva –
‘‘Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakatena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā sammā vattitabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanā – na upasampādetabbaṃ, na nissayo dātabbo, na sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabbo, na bhikkhunovādakasammuti sāditabbā, sammatenāpi bhikkhuniyo na ovaditabbā, yāya āpattiyā saṅghena āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kataṃ hoti, sā āpatti na āpajjitabbā, aññā vā tādisikā, tato vā pāpiṭṭhatarā, kammaṃ na garahitabbaṃ, kammikā na garahitabbā, na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ āsanābhihāro seyyābhihāro pādodakaṃ pādapīṭhaṃ pādakathalikaṃ pattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇaṃ nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabbaṃ, na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo, na ācāravipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo, na diṭṭhivipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo, na ājīvavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo, na bhikkhu bhikkhūhi bhedetabbo, na gihiddhajo dhāretabbo, na titthiyaddhajo dhāretabbo, na titthiyā sevitabbā, bhikkhū sevitabbā, bhikkhusikkhāya sikkhitabbaṃ, na pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabbaṃ, na ekacchanne anāvāse vatthabbaṃ, na ekacchanne āvāse vā anāvāse vā vatthabbaṃ, pakatattaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā āsanā vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, na pakatatto bhikkhu āsādetabbo anto vā bahi vā, na pakatattassa bhikkhuno uposatho ṭhapetabbo, na pavāraṇā ṭhapetabbā, na savacanīyaṃ kātabbaṃ, na anuvādo paṭṭhapetabbo, na okāso kāretabbo, na codetabbo, na sāretabbo, na bhikkhūhi sampayojetabba’’nti (cūḷava. 51) –
"A monk against whom the act of suspension for not seeing an offense has been performed should conduct himself properly. Herein is the proper conduct: He is not to be given the Going Forth, he is not to be given Dependence, a novice is not to be supported, the authorization to admonish nuns is not to be accepted, even with authorization, nuns are not to be admonished. The offense on account of which the Sangha has performed the act of suspension for not seeing an offense is not to be committed, nor another such offense, nor one more wicked than that. The act is not to be disparaged, those performing the act are not to be disparaged. The salutation, rising up, reverential salutation, proper behavior, offering of a seat, offering of lodging, offering of foot-water, a footstool, a foot-wiper, receiving of bowl and robe, bathing, back-rubbing is not to be accepted from a monk in good standing. A monk in good standing is not to be reproached for lapse in virtue, he is not to be reproached for lapse in conduct, he is not to be reproached for lapse in view, he is not to be reproached for lapse in livelihood. A monk is not to be set against other monks, the banner of a householder is not to be carried, the banner of a sectarian is not to be carried, sectarians are not to be associated with, monks are to be associated with, one should train in the training of monks. A monk in good standing is not to be lived with in the same covered dwelling, nor in the same uncovered area, nor in the same covered dwelling or uncovered area. On seeing a monk in good standing, one should get up from one's seat. A monk in good standing is not to be approached whether inside or outside. The uposatha is not to be suspended for a monk in good standing, the pavāraṇā is not to be suspended, a formal statement is not to be made, accusation is not to be initiated, an opportunity is not to be created, he is not to be charged, he is not to be reminded, he is not to be associated with monks" (cūḷava. 51) –
‘‘tecattālīsa vattāni, khandhake kammasaññite’’ti.
"tecattālīsa vattāni, khandhake kammasaññite"ti.
Pārivāsikakkhandhake(cūḷava. 76-82) –
Pārivāsikakkhandhaka (Cūḷava. 76-82) –
‘‘Pārivāsikena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā sammā vattitabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanā – na upasampādetabbaṃ, na nissayo dātabbo, na sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabbo, na bhikkhunovādakasammuti sāditabbā, sammatenapi bhikkhuniyo na ovaditabbā, yāya āpattiyā saṅghena parivāso dinno hoti, sā āpatti na āpajjitabbā, aññā vā tādisikā, tato vā pāpiṭṭhatarā, kammaṃ na garahitabbaṃ, kammikā na garahitabbā, na pakatattassa bhikkhuno uposatho ṭhapetabbo, na pavāraṇā ṭhapetabbā, na savacanīyaṃ kātabbaṃ, na anuvādo paṭṭhapetabbo, na okāso kāretabbo, na codetabbo, na sāretabbo, na bhikkhūhi sampayojetabbaṃ.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should conduct himself properly. Herein is the proper conduct: He should not confer the upasampadā ordination, he should not give dependence (nissaya), he should not have a sāmaṇera wait upon him, he should not solicit the agreement of being appointed as a preceptor of nuns, even with the agreement, he should not instruct nuns. He should not commit the offense for which parivāsa was assigned by the Sangha, nor another offense similar to it, or even more grave than that. He should not criticize the act (kamma), he should not criticize those performing the act (kammika). The Uposatha should not be suspended for a monk who has been restored (pakatatta), nor the Pavāraṇā, no savacanīyaṃ should be done, no formal accusation (anuvāda) should be initiated, no opportunity (okāsa) should be requested, he should not be charged, he should not be reminded, he should not be involved with the monks.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pakatattassa bhikkhuno purato gantabbaṃ, na purato nisīditabbaṃ, yo hoti saṅghassa āsanapariyanto seyyāpariyanto vihārapariyanto, so tassa padātabbo, tena ca so sāditabbo.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not walk in front of a monk who has been restored, should not sit in front of him. Whatever is the Sangha's designated area for seats, the designated area for beds, the designated area for dwellings, that should be given to him, and he should accept it from him.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pakatattassa bhikkhuno puresamaṇena vā pacchāsamaṇena vā kulāni upasaṅkamitabbāni, na āraññikaṅgaṃ samādātabbaṃ, na piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ samādātabbaṃ, na ca tappaccayā piṇḍapāto nīharāpetabbo ‘mā maṃ jāniṃsū’ti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not visit families accompanied by a senior or junior monk who has been restored. He should not undertake the practice of living in the forest (āraññikaṅga), he should not undertake the practice of being a alms-food eater (piṇḍapātikaṅga), nor should he have alms-food brought on that account, thinking, 'lest they know me'.
‘‘Pārivāsikena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā āgantukena ārocetabbaṃ, āgantukassa ārocetabbaṃ, uposathe ārocetabbaṃ, pavāraṇāya ārocetabbaṃ, sace gilāno hoti, dūtenapi ārocetabbaṃ.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should announce himself to a visiting monk, it should be announced to a visiting monk, it should be announced at the Uposatha, it should be announced at the Pavāraṇā. If he is ill, it should be announced even by a messenger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā abhikkhuko āvāso gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence (āvāsa) with monks to a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā abhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā abhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence with monks to a place without a residence (anāvāsa), except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence with monks to a residence or a place without a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā abhikkhuko āvāso gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā abhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā abhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a place without a residence with monks to a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a place without a residence with monks to a place without a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a place without a residence with monks to a residence or a place without a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā abhikkhuko āvāso gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā abhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā abhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence or a place without a residence with monks to a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence or a place without a residence with monks to a place without a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence or a place without a residence with monks to a residence or a place without a residence without monks, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā sabhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence with monks to a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions (nānāsaṃvāsaka), except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence with monks to a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence with monks to a residence or a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā sabhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a place without a residence with monks to a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a place without a residence with monks to a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a place without a residence with monks to a residence or a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā sabhikkhuko āvāso gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā sabhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā. Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā sabhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo yatthassu bhikkhū nānāsaṃvāsakā aññatra pakatattena aññatra antarāyā.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence or a place without a residence with monks to a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence or a place without a residence with monks to a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger. A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not go from a residence or a place without a residence with monks to a residence or a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of different communions, except with a monk who has been restored or except in case of danger.
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a residence with monks or to a residence with monks where the monks are of the same communion (samānasaṃvāsaka), if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā sabhikkhuko anāvāso yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a residence with monks or to a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a residence with monks or to a residence or a place without a residence where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a place without a residence with monks or to a residence with monks where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā sabhikkhuko anāvāso yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a place without a residence with monks or to a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā anāvāsā sabhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a place without a residence with monks or to a residence or a place without a residence where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā sabhikkhuko āvāso yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a residence or a place without a residence with monks or to a residence with monks where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā sabhikkhuko anāvāso yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a residence or a place without a residence with monks or to a place without a residence with monks where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Gantabbo, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā sabhikkhukā āvāsā vā anāvāsā vā sabhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā yatthassu bhikkhū samānasaṃvāsakā yaṃ jaññā ‘sakkomi ajjeva gantu’nti.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, may go to a residence or a place without a residence with monks or to a residence or a place without a residence where the monks are of the same communion, if he knows, 'I am able to go today'."
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabbaṃ, na ekacchanne anāvāse vatthabbaṃ, na ekacchanne āvāse vā anāvāse vā vatthabbaṃ, pakatattaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā āsanā vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, pakatatto bhikkhu āsanena nimantetabbo, na pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekāsane nisīditabbaṃ, na nīce āsane nisinne ucce āsane nisīditabbaṃ, na chamāyaṃ nisinne āsane nisīditabbaṃ, na ekacaṅkame caṅkamitabbaṃ, na nīce caṅkame caṅkamante ucce caṅkame caṅkamitabbaṃ, na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabbaṃ.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not live in a residence under the same roof with a monk who has been restored, should not live in a place without a residence under the same roof, should not live in a residence or a place without a residence under the same roof. Upon seeing a monk who has been restored, he should rise from his seat. A monk who has been restored should be invited with a seat. He should not sit on the same seat with a monk who has been restored. He should not sit on a high seat when (the other) is sitting on a low seat, he should not sit on a seat when (the other) is sitting on the ground. He should not walk on the same cloister walk (caṅkama), he should not walk on a high cloister walk when (the other) is walking on a low cloister walk, he should not walk on a cloister walk when (the other) is walking on the ground.
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikena vuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ…pe… mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ…pe… mānattārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ…pe… mānattacārikena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ…pe… abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabbaṃ, na ekacchanne anāvāse vatthabbaṃ, na ekacchanne āvāse vā anāvāse vā vatthabbaṃ, na ekāsane nisīditabbaṃ, na nīce āsane nisinne ucce āsane nisīditabbaṃ, na chamāyaṃ nisinne āsane nisīditabbaṃ, na ekacaṅkame caṅkamitabbaṃ, na nīce caṅkame caṅkamante ucce caṅkame caṅkamitabbaṃ, na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabbaṃ.
"A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not live in a residence under the same roof with a monk who is senior undergoing parivāsa...pe... with a monk who is deserving of being drawn back to the root offense (mūlāyapaṭikassanāraha)...pe... with a monk who is deserving of mānatta...pe... with a monk who is practicing mānatta (mānattacārika)...pe... with a monk who is deserving of rehabilitation (abbhānāraha), should not live in a place without a residence under the same roof, should not live in a residence or a place without a residence under the same roof, should not sit on the same seat, he should not sit on a high seat when (the other) is sitting on a low seat, he should not sit on a seat when (the other) is sitting on the ground. He should not walk on the same cloister walk, he should not walk on a high cloister walk when (the other) is walking on a low cloister walk, he should not walk on a cloister walk when (the other) is walking on the ground.
‘‘Pārivāsikacatuttho ce, bhikkhave, parivāsaṃ dadeyya, mūlāya paṭikasseyya, mānattaṃ dadeyya, taṃvīso abbheyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’nti (cūḷava. 76-82) –
"If a monk undergoing parivāsa is the fourth when parivāsa is given, when a monk is drawn back to the root offense, when mānatta is given, when twenty are rehabilitating, it is not an act and is not to be done" (Cūḷava. 76-82) –
Evaṃ pārivāsikānaṃ catunavuti vattāni.
Thus, there are ninety-four duties of those undergoing parivāsa.
Sā ca nesaṃ catunavutisaṅkhā evaṃ veditabbā – naupasampādanādinakammikagarahapariyosānāni nava vattāni, tato pakatattassa uposathaṭṭhapanādibhikkhūhisampayojanapariyosānāni aṭṭha, tato napuratogamanādī pañca, napuregamanādī cattāri, āgantukena ārocanādī cattārīti tiṃsa, sabhikkhukāvāsādito abhikkhukāvāsādigamanapaasaṃyuttāni tīṇi navakāni cāti sattapaññāsa, tato napakatattena saddhiṃ ekacchannavāsādipaṭisaṃyuttāni ekādasa, tato napārivāsikavuḍḍhataramūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahamānattacārikaabbhānārahehi saddhiṃ ekacchannavāsādipaṭisaṃyuttāni paccekaṃ ekādasa katvā pañcapaññāsāya vattesu pārivāsikavuḍḍhataramūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samānattā tesu ekaṃ ekādasakaṃ, mānattacārikaabbhānārahānaṃ dvinnaṃ samānattā tesu ekaṃ ekādasakanti duve ekādasakāni, ante pārivāsikacatutthassa saṅghassa parivāsādidānacatukke gaṇapūraṇatthadosato nivattivasena cattāri cattārīti catunavuti vattāni. Tāni aggahitaggahaṇena ekūnacattālīsavattāni nāma. Ādito nava, uposathaṭṭhapanādīni aṭṭha, pakatattena ekacchannavāsādī cattāri cāti ekavīsati vattāni kammakkhandhake gahitattā idha gaṇanāya aggahetvā tato sesesu tesattatiyā vattesu pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīhi ekacchanne vāsādipaṭisaṃyuttāni dvāvīsati vattāni pakatattehi samānattā tāni ca ‘‘gantabbo bhikkhave’’tiādikaṃ navakaṃ tathā gacchantassa anāpattidassanaparaṃ, na āvāsato gacchantassa āpattidassanaparanti tañca aggahetvā avasesesu dvācattālīsavattesu pārivāsikacatautthādikammacatukkaṃ garukāpattivuṭṭhānāya gaṇapūraṇatthasāmaññena ekaṃ katvā tayo apanetvā gaṇitāni ekūnacattālīsāni hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘navādhikāni tiṃseva, khandhake tadanantare’’ti.
And their count of ninety-four should be understood thus: nine duties ending with not giving the upasampadā ordination, etc., and criticizing those performing the act; then eight from suspending the Uposatha, etc., for the restored monk to not being involved with the monks; then five beginning with not walking in front, etc.; four beginning with not walking in front; four beginning with announcing to a visiting monk; thus thirty. Three groups of nine (navaka) connected with going from a residence with monks to a residence without monks, etc., thus fifty-seven. Then eleven connected with not dwelling under the same roof with a restored monk, etc.; then eleven each connected with dwelling under the same roof with a senior monk undergoing parivāsa, a monk deserving of being drawn back to the root offense, a monk deserving of mānatta, a monk practicing mānatta, and a monk deserving of rehabilitation, totaling fifty-five duties. Among these, since the senior monk undergoing parivāsa, the monk deserving of being drawn back to the root offense, and the monk deserving of mānatta have the same duties, one group of eleven for them; since the monk practicing mānatta and the monk deserving of rehabilitation have the same duties, one group of eleven for them, thus two groups of eleven. At the end, the four duties of giving parivāsa, etc., to the Sangha when the monk undergoing parivāsa is the fourth, are considered as one due to being averted by the fault of not fulfilling the quorum, thus four. Therefore, there are ninety-four duties. By taking what should be taken and not taking what should not be taken, these are called thirty-nine duties. Nine from the beginning, eight from suspending the Uposatha, etc., and four from dwelling under the same roof with a restored monk, etc., thus twenty-one duties are included in the Kammakkhandhaka, therefore not taken in the count here. Then, in the remaining seventy-three duties, the twenty-two duties connected with dwelling under the same roof with a senior monk undergoing parivāsa, etc., are the same as those of the restored monk, and that group of nine beginning with "Gantabbo bhikkhave" is meant to show that there is no offense for the one who is going, not to show that there is an offense for the one who is going from the residence; therefore, not taking that, and considering the four duties regarding the monk undergoing parivāsa being the fourth in the act, etc., as one due to the similarity of fulfilling the quorum for the reinstatement from a grave offense, and subtracting three, the counted duties become thirty-nine, therefore it was said, "nine more than thirty in the section immediately following that."
2750.Imāni ekūnacattālīsa vattāni purimehi tecattālīsavattehi saddhiṃ dvāsīti hontīti āha‘‘evaṃ sabbāni…pe… gahitāgahaṇena tū’’ti.
2750.These thirty-nine duties, together with the previous forty-three duties, become eighty-two, thus he said, "Thus, all...pe...by taking what should be taken and not taking what should not be taken."
Evaṃ kammakkhandhakapārivāsikakkhandhakesu mahesinā vuttāni khandhakavattāni gahitāgahaṇena dvāsīti eva hontīti yojanā. Evamettha dvāsītikkhandhakavattāni dassitāni.
Thus, the section duties stated by the great sage in the Kammakkhandhaka and Pārivāsikakkhandhaka are indeed eighty-two by taking what should be taken and not taking what should not be taken. Thus, eighty-two section duties are shown here.
Āgamaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanāyaṃpana –
In the commentary on the Āgama, however –
‘‘Pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmīti (cūḷava. 75) ārabhitvā ‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’nti (cūḷava. 76-81) vuttāvasānāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikena vuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ, mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena, mānattārahena, mānattacārikena, abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabba’ntiādīnaṃ (cūḷava. 82) pakatatte caritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ te agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitāni pañcāti ekasattati vattāni, ukkhepanīyakammakatavattesu vattapaññāpanavasena vuttaṃ ‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ …pe… nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’nti (cūḷava. 51) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo’tiādīni ca dasāti evametāni dvāsīti honti. Etesveva kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāni, kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsīti evā’’ti (ma. ni. ṭī. 2.25; sārattha. ṭī. 2.39; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.39) –
"I will prescribe the duties for monks undergoing parivāsa" (Cūḷava. 75), beginning with that and ending with "he should not walk on a cloister walk when (the other) is walking on the ground" (Cūḷava. 76-81), there are sixty-six duties. After that, "A monk undergoing parivāsa, bhikkhus, should not live in a residence under the same roof with a monk who is senior undergoing parivāsa, a monk deserving of being drawn back to the root offense, a monk deserving of mānatta, a monk practicing mānatta, and a monk deserving of rehabilitation" (Cūḷava. 82). Since these are not different from the duties to be practiced towards the restored monk, not counting them separately, and because they are to be practiced towards different individuals among the senior monk undergoing parivāsa, etc., counting them by combining them into one each, there are five, thus seventy-one duties. Among the duties of those who have undergone the Ukkhepanīyakamma, it was said in the manner of prescribing duties, "He should not accept the salutation of a restored monk...pe...the back massage during bathing" (Cūḷava. 51). This not accepting the salutation, etc., is one, and "a restored monk should not be reproached for a breach of morality," etc., are ten, thus these are eighty-two. Among these, some are duties of those who have undergone Tajjanīyakamma, etc., and some are duties of those undergoing parivāsa, etc., thus eighty-two by taking what should be taken and not taking what should not be taken" (Ma. Ni. Ṭī. 2.25; Sārattha. Ṭī. 2.39; Vi. Vi. Ṭī. 1.39) –
Vuttaṃ. Etāni pana vattāni kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāle, pārivāsikādikāle ca caritabbāni khuddakavattānīti gahetabbāni āgantukavattādīnaṃ cuddasamahāvattānaṃ vakkhamānattā.
It was said. But these duties should be understood as minor duties to be practiced sometimes at the time of those who have undergone Tajjanīyakamma, etc., and at the time of those undergoing parivāsa, etc., because the fourteen major duties such as the duties of a guest (āgantukavatta), etc., will be spoken of.
2751.Idāni pārivāsikassa bhikkhuno ratticchedaṃ, vattabhedañca dassetumāha‘‘parivāsañca vattañcā’’tiādi.Parivāsañca vattañca samādinnassāti ‘‘parivāsaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti parivāsañca ‘‘vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti vattañca pakatattassa bhikkhuno santike ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā vacībhedaṃ katvā samādinnassa.Bhikkhunoti pārivāsikassa bhikkhuno.
2751. Now, to show the break of the night (ratticcheda) and the difference in duties (vattabheda) for a bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa, he says, "Parivāsañca vattañca" and so on. Parivāsañca vattañca samādinnassā means having undertaken parivāsa by saying "Parivāsaṃ samādiyāmī" (I undertake parivāsa) and having undertaken the duties by saying "Vattaṃ samādiyāmī" (I undertake the duties), having sat in the squatting position (ukkuṭikaṃ) before a bhikkhu who is qualified, having raised the joined palms (añjaliṃ paggahetvā), and having made a distinction in speech (vacībhedaṃ katvā). Bhikkhuno means of the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa.
2752.Sahavāsādayo ‘‘ekacchanne’’tiādinā sayameva vakkhati. Sahavāso, vināvāso, anārocanameva cāti imehi tīhi pārivāsikabhikkhussa ratticchedo ca dukkaṭañca hotīti yojanā.
2752. Sahavāsā (living together) and others, he himself will explain with "ekacchanne" (under one roof) and so on. Living together (sahavāso), living apart (vināvāso), and not informing (anārocanameva ca): these three cause a break of the night and a dukkaṭa offense for the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa. This is the connection.
2753.Udakapātenasamantā nibbakosassa udakapātaṭṭhānena.Ekacchanneti ekacchanne paricchanne vā aparicchanne vā āvāse. Pakatattena bhikkhunā saha ukkhittassa nivāso nivāritoti yojanā.‘‘Nivārito’’ti iminā dukkaṭaṃ hotīti dīpeti.
2753. Udakapātena means by the place where water is poured, with the area all around being exposed (samantā nibbakosassa). Ekacchanne means in a dwelling that is under one roof, whether enclosed (paricchanne) or unenclosed (aparicchanne). The meaning is that living with a qualified bhikkhu who has been expelled is prohibited (nivārito). "Nivārito" indicates that a dukkaṭa offense occurs.
2754.Antoyevāti ekacchannassa āvāsaparicchedassa antoyeva.‘‘Na labbhatī’’ti iminā ratticchedo ca dukkaṭañca hotīti dīpeti.
2754. Antoyeva means just inside the enclosure (paricchedassa) of a dwelling under one roof. "Na labbhatī" indicates that a break of the night and a dukkaṭa offense occur.
2755.Mahāaṭṭhakathādisūtiādi-saddena kurundaṭṭhakathādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Ubhinnanti ukkhittakapārivāsikānaṃ. Iti avisesena niddiṭṭhanti yojanā.
2755. Mahāaṭṭhakathādisūti, the word ādi includes the Kurunda Commentary (kurundaṭṭhakathādi). Ubhinnanti means to those who are expelled and undergoing parivāsa. Thus, it is indicated without distinction. This is the connection.
2756.Iminā sahavāsena ratticchedañca dukkaṭañca dassetvā vināvāsena dassetumāha‘‘abhikkhuke panāvāse’’ti.Āvāseti vasanatthāya katasenāsane.Anāvāseti vāsatthāya akate cetiyaghare vā bodhighare vā sammajjaniaṭṭake vā dāruaṭṭake vā pānīyamāḷe vā vaccakuṭiyaṃ vā dvārakoṭṭhake vā aññatra vā yattha katthaci evarūpe ṭhāne.Vippavāsaṃ vasantassāti pakatattena vinā vāsaṃ kappentassa.Ratticchedo ca dukkaṭanti ratticchedo ceva vattabhedadukkaṭañca hoti.
2756. Having shown the break of the night and the dukkaṭa offense with this living together, he now says "abhikkhuke panāvāse" (but in a dwelling without bhikkhus) to show it with living apart (vināvāsena). Āvāse means in a prepared dwelling (katasenāsane) for the purpose of dwelling. Anāvāse means in a place not prepared for dwelling, such as a cetiya shrine, a bodhi tree shrine, a sweeping stand, a wooden stand, a water pavilion, a toilet, a gatehouse, or anywhere else of this kind. Vippavāsaṃ vasantassā means for one living separately (vinā vāsaṃ kappentassa) from the qualified bhikkhu. Ratticchedo ca dukkaṭanti means there is a break of the night and a dukkaṭa offense for violating the duties.
2757.Evaṃ vippavāsena ratticchedadukkaṭāni dassetvā anārocanena dassetumāha‘‘pārivāsikabhikkhussā’’tiādi.Bhikkhuṃ disvānāti ākāsenāpi gacchantaṃ samānasaṃvāsakaṃ āgantukaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā.Taṅkhaṇeti tasmiṃ diṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva. ‘‘Anārocentassa eva etassā’’ti padacchedo.Evakārena ratticchedo ca dukkaṭañcāti ubhayaṃ etassa hotīti dīpentena adiṭṭho ce, ratticchedova hotīti ñāpeti. Yathāha – ‘‘sopissa ratticchedaṃ karoti, aññātattā pana vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ natthī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75). Nānāsaṃvāsakena saha vinayakammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, tassa anārocanepi ratticchedo na hoti.
2757. Having thus shown the break of night and dukkaṭa offenses with living separately, he now shows it with not informing, "pārivāsikabhikkhussā" (for a bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa) and so on. Bhikkhuṃ disvānā means having seen a bhikkhu of the same residence (samānasaṃvāsakaṃ), even if going through the air, or a visiting bhikkhu (āgantukaṃ). Taṅkhaṇe means at that very moment of seeing. "Anārocentassa eva etassā" is the word division. The Eva indicates that a break of the night and a dukkaṭa offense both occur for him, thus indicating that if he is not seen, there is only a break of the night. As it was said: "He also causes a break of the night for him, but because he is unknown, there is no dukkaṭa offense for violating the duties" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75). It is not proper to perform an act of Vinaya with one of different residence (nānāsaṃvāsakena); even if he does not inform, there is no break of the night.
2758-9.Pārivāsikobhikkhu yattha saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne ṭhito,tatthevatasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhatvāyathāvuḍḍhaṃpakatattehipi saddhiṃ vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyāpañcakiccāni kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2758-9. The meaning is that the pārivāsiko bhikkhu, standing in whatever Saṅgha-appointed place, should remain tattheva (right there) in that very place and is allowed to perform yathāvuḍḍhaṃ (according to seniority), along with the qualified bhikkhus, the pañca (five) duties.
‘‘uposathapavāraṇa’’ntiādi. Uposathapavāraṇaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ kātuṃ labhatīti yojanā.Dentīti ettha ‘‘ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā’’ti seso.Saṅghadāyakāti kammadhārayasamāso. Saṅghassa ekattepi garūsu bahuvacananiddeso.‘‘Deti ce saṅghadāyako’’tipi pāṭho. Tattha ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhājetvā dento saṅgho vassikasāṭikaṃ deti ce, pārivāsikoyathāvuḍḍhaṃattano pattaṭṭhāne labhatīti yojanā.
"uposathapavāraṇa" and so on. The meaning is that he is allowed to perform the uposatha and pavāraṇa according to seniority. Dentīti, here "ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā" (having struck the bell) is understood. Saṅghadāyakāti is a karmadhāraya compound. Although the Saṅgha is singular, the plural designation is out of respect. There is also the reading "Deti ce saṅghadāyako". There, the meaning is that if the Saṅgha, having struck the bell and divided it, gives a rains-cloth (vassikasāṭikaṃ), the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa receives it yathāvuḍḍhaṃ (according to seniority) at his designated place.
Oṇojananti vissajjanaṃ, saṅghato attano pattānaṃ dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vā uddesabhattādīnaṃ attano puggalikabhattapaccāsāya paṭiggahetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ ajja bhattapaccāsā atthi, sve gaṇhissāmī’’ti vatvā saṅghavissajjanaṃ labhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhattanti āgatāgatehi vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā gahetvā gantabbaṃ vihāre saṅghassa catussālabhattaṃ. Tathā pārivāsiko yathāvuḍḍhaṃ labhatīti yojanā.Ime pañcāti vuttamevatthaṃ nigamayati.
Oṇojananti means distribution (vissajjanaṃ), the meaning is that he can receive from the Saṅgha, in anticipation of his individual meal, the assigned meals (uddesabhattādīnaṃ) for two or three of his bowls, saying "I have an invitation for a meal today; I will take it tomorrow," and thus obtain the Saṅgha's distribution. Bhattanti means the four-hall meal (catussālabhattaṃ) of the Saṅgha in the monastery, which is to be taken by those who come in order of seniority. Similarly, the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa receives it according to seniority. Ime pañcāti concludes the meaning just stated.
uposathapavāraṇetāva pātimokkhe uddissamāne hatthapāse nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati.Mahāpaccariyaṃpana ‘‘pāḷiyā anisīditvā pāḷiṃ vihāya hatthapāsaṃ amuñcantena nisīditabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Pārisuddhiuposathe kariyamāne saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisīditvā tattheva nisinnena attano pāḷiyā pārisuddhiuposatho kātabbova. Pavāraṇāyapi saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisīditvā tattheva nisinnena attano pāḷiyā pavāretabbaṃ. Saṅghena ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhājiyamānaṃ vassikasāṭikampi attano pattaṭṭhāne gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
uposathapavāraṇetāva, during the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha, it is proper to sit within arm's reach. In the Mahāpaccariyaṃ, however, it is said that "one should sit without reciting the Pāḷi, abandoning the Pāḷi, and not releasing the arm's reach." While performing the Pārisuddhi uposatha, one should sit in the Saṅgha-appointed place and perform one's own Pārisuddhi uposatha while sitting right there. In the pavāraṇa also, one should sit in the Saṅgha-appointed place and declare one's pavāraṇa in one's own Pāḷi while sitting right there. One is also allowed to take the rains-cloth, which is distributed by the Saṅgha after striking the bell, at one's designated place.
Oṇojanesace pārivāsikassa dve tīṇi uddesabhattādīni pāpuṇanti, aññā cassa puggalikabhattapaccāsā hoti, tāni paṭipāṭiyā gahetvā ‘‘bhante, heṭṭhā gāhetha, ajja mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsā atthi, sveva gaṇhissāmī’’ti vatvā vissajjetabbāni, evaṃ tāni punadivasesu gaṇhituṃ labhati. ‘‘Punadivase sabbapaṭhamaṃ etassa dātabba’’ntikurundiyaṃvuttaṃ. Yadi pana na gaṇhāti na vissajjeti, punadivase na labhati. Idaṃ oṇojanaṃ nāma pārivāsikasseva odissa anuññātaṃ. Kasmā? Tassa hi saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisinnassa bhattagge yāgukhajjakādīni pāpuṇanti vā na vā, tasmā ‘‘so bhikkhāhārena mā kilamitthā’’ti idamassa saṅgahakaraṇatthāya odissa anuññātaṃ.
Oṇojanesace, if the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa receives two or three assigned meals and he also has an invitation for an individual meal, he should take them in order and say, "Bhante, take from below; I have an invitation for a meal today; I will take it tomorrow," and thus they should be distributed (vissajjetabbāni); in this way, he is allowed to take them on subsequent days. In the Kurundiyaṃ it is said that "on the subsequent day, it should be given to him first of all." But if he does not take them and does not distribute them, he does not receive them on the subsequent day. This distribution is specifically allowed only for the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa. Why? Because for him, sitting in the Saṅgha-appointed place, gruel, sweets, and so on may or may not come to him; therefore, this is specifically allowed for him as an act of support, so that "he may not be fatigued by seeking alms."
Bhattecatussālabhattaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ labhati, pāḷiyā pana gantuṃ vā ṭhātuṃ vā na labhati. Tasmā pāḷito osakkitvā hatthapāse ṭhitena hatthaṃ pasāretvā yathā seno nipatitvā gaṇhāti, evaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ. Ārāmikasamaṇuddesehi āharāpetuṃ na labhati. Sace sayameva āharanti, vaṭṭati. Rañño mahāpeḷabhattepi eseva nayo. Catussālabhatte pana sace oṇojanaṃ kattukāmo hoti, attano atthāya ukkhitte piṇḍe ‘‘ajja me bhattaṃ atthi, sveva gaṇhissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Punadivase dve piṇḍe labhatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75)mahāpaccariyaṃvuttaṃ. Uddesabhattādīnipi pāḷito osakkitvāva gahetabbāni. Yattha pana nisīdāpetvā parivisanti, tattha sāmaṇerānaṃ jeṭṭhakena bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghanavakena hutvā nisīditabbanti.
Bhatte, he receives the four-hall meal according to seniority, but he is not allowed to go or stand in the line. Therefore, having moved away from the line and standing within arm's reach, he should extend his hand and take it as a hawk swoops down. It is not allowed to have it brought by attendants or novices. If they bring it themselves, it is proper. This is the same method for the king's great feast. However, in the four-hall meal, if he wishes to make a distribution, he should say, regarding the alms-food set aside for his sake, "I have a meal today; I will take it tomorrow." In the Mahāpaccariyaṃ it is said that "on the subsequent day, he receives two portions." The assigned meals should also be taken after moving away from the line. But where they seat and serve, the most senior of the novices should sit as the Saṅgha-appointed place for the bhikkhus.
Pārivāsikakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Exposition of the Parivāsika Khandhaka is Concluded.
Samathakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Exposition of the Samatha Khandhaka
2760.Idāni samathavinicchayaṃ dassetuṃ yesu adhikaraṇesu santesu samathehi bhavitabbaṃ, tāni tāva dassento āha‘‘vivādādhāratā’’tiādi.Vivādādhāratāti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ.Āpattādhāratāti etthāpi eseva nayo.Ādhāratāti adhikaraṇapariyāyo. Ādhārīyati abhibhuyyati vūpasammati samathehītiādhāro,vivādo ca so ādhāro cātivivādādhāro,so evavivādādhāratā. Evamādhārādhikaraṇa-saddānaṃ vivādādisaddehi saha kammadhārayasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Adhikarīyati abhibhuyyati vūpasammati samathehītiadhikaraṇanti vivādādicatubbidhameva pāḷiyaṃ dassitaṃ. Ayamattho ‘‘etesaṃ tu catunnampi, samattā samathā matā’’ti vakkhamānena viññāyati.
2760. Now, to show the determination of the settlements (samathavinicchayaṃ), he says "vivādādhāratā" (having dispute as its basis) and so on, first showing those disputes in which settlements must occur. Vivādādhāratā means dispute-adjudication (vivādādhikaraṇaṃ). The same method applies to Āpattādhāratā (having offense as its basis). Ādhāratāti is a synonym for adjudication (adhikaraṇa). Ādhāro means that by which (something) is supported, overcome, or settled by settlements, and that is a dispute, hence vivādādhāro, and that itself is vivādādhāratā. In this way, karmadhāraya compounds should be understood with the words ādhāra and adhikaraṇa together with the words vivāda and so on. Adhikaraṇanti means that which is supported, overcome, or settled by settlements; only the fourfold vivāda and so on are shown in the Pāḷi. This meaning is understood by what will be said: "But for these four, settlements are considered settlements."
2761.Etāni cattāriadhikaraṇāni ca ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū vivadanti ‘dhammo’ti vā ‘adhammo’ti vā’’ti (cūḷava. 215) aṭṭhārasabhedakārakavatthūnica mahesinā vuttāni.Tatthatesu catūsu adhikaraṇesuvivādoadhikaraṇasaṅkhāto etāni aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūninissitonissāya pavattoti yojanā.
2761. These Etāni cattāri (four) adjudications and the eighteen bhedakārakavatthūni (grounds for causing division) stated by the great sage are: "Here, bhikkhus dispute, saying 'This is the Dhamma' or 'This is not the Dhamma'" (cūḷava. 215). Tattha (there), among those four adjudications, vivādo (dispute) is considered an adjudication, which nissito (based on) these eighteen grounds for division, meaning it occurs in dependence upon them. This is the connection.
2762.Vipattiyo catassovāti ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ anuvadanti sīlavipattiyā vā ācāravipattiyā vā diṭṭhivipattiyā vā ājīvavipattiyā vā’’ti (cūḷava. 215) vuttā catasso vipattiyo. Diṭṭhādīnaṃ anugantvā sīlavipattiādīhi vadanaṃ codanāanuvādo. Upāgatoti nissito, anuvādo catasso vipattiyo nissāya pavattoti attho. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti paṭhamameva niddhāraṇassa vuttattā idha punavacane payojanaṃ na dissati, ‘‘sambhavā’’ti vacanassāpi na koci atthaviseso dissati. Tasmā ‘‘āpattādhāratā tattha, sattaāpattisambhavā’’ti pāṭho na yujjati,‘‘āpattādhāratā nāma, satta āpattiyo matā’’ti pāṭho yuttataro,āpattādhāratā nāmaāpattādhikaraṇaṃ nāmasatta āpattiyo matāsatta āpattiyova adhippetāti attho.
2762. Vipattiyo catassovāti (there are only four kinds of failure): "Here, bhikkhus accuse a bhikkhu of failure in morality (sīlavipattiyā) or failure in conduct (ācāravipattiyā) or failure in view (diṭṭhivipattiyā) or failure in livelihood (ājīvavipattiyā)" (cūḷava. 215). Accusation by following views and criticizing with failures in morality and so on is anuvādo (accusation). Upāgatoti means based upon, the meaning is that accusation occurs in dependence upon the four kinds of failure. Since the specification was already stated in the first instance with "Tatthā," no purpose is seen in the repetition here, and no special meaning is seen in the word "sambhavā" (origination) either. Therefore, the reading "āpattādhāratā tattha, sattaāpattisambhavā" is not suitable; the reading "āpattādhāratā nāma, satta āpattiyo matā" (offense as its basis, known as, seven offenses are considered) is more suitable; āpattādhāratā nāma means offense-adjudication; satta āpattiyo matā means that only the seven offenses are intended.
2763.Saṅghakiccāni nissāyāti apalokanakammādīni cattāri saṅghakammāni upādāya kiccādhikaraṇābhidhānaṃ siyā, kiccādhikaraṇaṃ nāma cattāri saṅghakammānīti attho.Etesaṃ tu catunnampīti etesaṃ pana catunnampi adhikaraṇānaṃ.Samattāti vūpasamahetuttā.Samathā matāti sammukhāvinayādayo satta adhikaraṇasamathāti adhippetā. Adhikaraṇāni samenti, sammanti vā etehīti‘‘samathā’’ti vuccantīti ‘‘samattā samathā matā’’ti imināsamatha-saddassa anvatthaṃ dīpeti.
2763. Saṅghakiccāni nissāyāti (depending on the duties of the Saṅgha) means that by taking the four Saṅgha-duties (saṅghakammāni), such as the motion for approval, there would be the designation "duty-adjudication"; the meaning is that duty-adjudication means the four Saṅgha-duties. Etesaṃ tu catunnampīti (but for these four), of these four adjudications. Samattāti because they are the cause of settlement (vūpasamahetuttā). Samathā matāti the seven settlements of adjudications, such as the Presence-Vinaya, are intended. "samathā" is said because they settle or calm down adjudications, thus "samattā samathā matā" (settlements are considered settlements) indicates the literal meaning of the word samatha (settlement).
2764-5.Te sarūpato dassetumāha‘‘sammukhā’’tiādi.‘‘Vinayo’’ti idaṃsammukhādipadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘sammukhāvinayo sativinayo amūḷhavinayo’’ti.‘‘Paṭiññāvinayo’’ti ca paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.Sattamo vinayoti samatho adhippeto. Tiṇavatthārakoti ime satta samathā buddhenādiccabandhunā vuttāti yojanā.
2764-5. To show them in their own form, he says "sammukhā" (in the presence) and so on. "Vinayo" (Vinaya) should be connected individually with the words sammukhā and so on: "Sammukhāvinayo, sativinayo, amūḷhavinayo" (Presence-Vinaya, Mindfulness-Vinaya, Recovery-from-Insanity-Vinaya). "Paṭiññāvinayo" (Confession-Vinaya) means the act of confessing is stated. Sattamo vinayo (the seventh Vinaya) means the Thatching-Over settlement is intended. These seven settlements were stated by the Buddha, the kinsman of the sun. This is the connection.
2766.Catūsu adhikaraṇesu yaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ yattakehi samathehi sammati, te saṅgahetvā dassento āha‘‘vivādo’’tiādi.
2766. To show, by collecting them together, how many settlements settle each adjudication among the four adjudications, he says "vivādo" (dispute) and so on.
2767-9.‘‘Vivādo’’tiādinā uddiṭṭhamatthaṃ niddisanto āha‘‘chaṭṭhenā’’tiādi.Etthaetesu catūsu adhikaraṇesu, samathesu ca kiṃ kena sammatīti ce?Vivādovivādādhikaraṇaṃchaṭṭhenayebhuyyasikāya,paṭhamenasamathena sammukhāvinayena cāti dvīhi samathehisammati. Yassā kiriyāya dhammavādino bahutarā, esāyebhuyyasikā. ‘‘Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā’’ti (cūḷava. 229, 234, 236, 237, 242) vuttānaṃ saṅghādīnaṃ catunnaṃ sannidhānena vā gaṇapuggalehi samiyamānaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ saṅghasammukhataṃ vinā itarehi tīhi vā sammatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
2767-9. Saying what was indicated by "Vivādo" and so on, he states "chaṭṭhenā" (by the sixth) and so on. Ettha (here), among these four adjudications and settlements, if asked what is settled by what, vivādo (dispute), dispute-adjudication, is sammati (settled) by chaṭṭhena (the sixth), by the majority, and by paṭhamena (the first) settlement, the Presence-Vinaya, by two settlements. That action in which those who speak the Dhamma are more numerous is yebhuyyasikā (deciding by majority). It is stated that dispute-adjudication settled by the assembly of the four, namely, "Presence of the Saṅgha, Presence of the Dhamma, Presence of the Vinaya, Presence of the Person" (cūḷava. 229, 234, 236, 237, 242), or by a group of individuals, is settled by the three excluding the Saṅgha-Presence.
saṅghasammukhatā,sametabbassa vatthuno bhūtatādhammasammukhatā,yathā taṃ sametabbaṃ, tathevassa samanaṃvinayasammukhatā,yo ca vivadati, yena ca vivadati, tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ atthapaccatthikānaṃ sammukhībhāvopuggalasammukhatā.
saṅghasammukhatā, (Presence of the Saṅgha), the fact that the matter to be settled is true is dhammasammukhatā, (Presence of the Dhamma), the settling of it is just as it should be settled is vinayasammukhatā, (Presence of the Vinaya), and the presence of both those who dispute and those with whom they dispute is puggalasammukhatā (Presence of the Person).
‘‘sammukhā’’tiādi.Anupubbenāti anupaṭipāṭiyā.Sammukhāvinayādīhi tīhipīti sammukhāvinayasativinayaamūḷhavinayehi tīhipi.Tathevāti yathā tīhi, tathāpañcamenatassapāpiyasikāsamathenāpi anuvādo sammati, pageva catūhīti attho.
"sammukhā" (in the presence) and so on. Anupubbenāti (in due order). Sammukhāvinayādīhi tīhipīti (by the three, Presence-Vinaya, Mindfulness-Vinaya, and Recovery-from-Insanity-Vinaya). Tathevāti (just so) as by the three, so also pañcamena (by the fifth) the Accusation-against-one's-Own-Offense settlement also settles an accusation, what to say of the four!
‘‘tassapāpiyasikā’’ti kammaṃ vuccati. Āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa viya sativepullappattassa khīṇāsavassa katā amūlikā sīlavipatticodanā sammukhāvinayena, ñatticatutthāya kammavācāya dinnena sativinayena ca sammati. Ummattakassa bhikkhuno katā āpatticodanā sammukhāvinayena ca tatheva dinnena amūḷhavinayena ca sammati. Saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā codiyamānassa avajānitvā paṭijānanādiṃ karontassa pāpabhikkhuno bahulāpatticodanā sammukhāvinayena ceva tatheva pakatena tassapāpiyasikākammena ca vūpasammatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
"tassapāpiyasikā" (Accusation-against-one's-Own-Offense) is called an action. A groundless accusation of failure in morality made against the venerable Dabba Mallaputta, who had attained great mindfulness and was a khīṇāsava, is settled by the Presence-Vinaya and by the Mindfulness-Vinaya given by a motion with three announcements and a fourth. An accusation of offense made against an insane bhikkhu is settled by the Presence-Vinaya and by the Recovery-from-Insanity-Vinaya given in the same way. The extensive accusation of offense against an evil bhikkhu who, being accused of an offense in the middle of the Saṅgha, denies it and makes admissions, is settled by the Presence-Vinaya and by the Accusation-against-one's-Own-Offense action done in the same way. This is what is said.
‘‘sammukhenā’’tiādi.Sammukhenasammukhāvinayena,paṭiññāyapaṭiññātakaraṇena, tiṇavatthārakena vā imehi tīhi eva samathehisā āpattiāpattādhikaraṇaṃ upasamaṃ yātīti yojanā. Etthapaṭiññātakaraṇaṃnāma āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇhantena ‘‘passasī’’ti vutte āpattiṃ desentena ‘‘āma passāmī’’ti sampaṭicchanaṃ.Tiṇavatthārakaṃpana sayameva vakkhati.
"sammukhenā" (in the presence) and so on. Sammukhena (in the presence) by the Presence-Vinaya, paṭiññāya (by confession) by the Confession act, or by the Thatching-Over act, only by these three settlements does sā āpatti (that offense), offense-adjudication, come to settlement. Here, paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ (Confession act) means that when the one confessing an offense is asked "Do you see (it)?" and the one declaring the offense agrees, saying "Yes, I see (it)." He himself will explain Tiṇavatthārakaṃ (Thatching-Over) later.
Tīheva samathehīti ettha garukāpatti sammukhāvinayena, paṭiññātakaraṇena cāti dvīhi, lahukāpattiṃ āpajjitvā saṅghe vā gaṇe vā puggale vā desanāya sammukhāvinayena ceva paṭiññātakaraṇena ca, kosambakānaṃ viggahasadisaṃ mahāviggahaṃ karontehi āpannā anekavidhā āpattiyo sace honti, tāsu vakkhamānasarūpaṃ thullavajjādiṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā sabbā āpattiyo sammukhāvinayena, tiṇavatthārakena ca sammantīti attho.
Tīheva samathehīti: Here, garukāpatti (serious offenses) are settled by means of sammukhāvinaya (procedure in the presence of the Sangha) and paṭiññātakaraṇa (acknowledgment of the offense); thus, by two means. For a lahukāpatti (minor offense), after committing it, settlement is done by confession (desanā) to the Sangha, a group, or an individual, and by sammukhāvinaya and paṭiññātakaraṇa. When those who cause great disputes, similar to the quarrel of the Kosambians, commit various kinds of offenses, if such offenses exist, except for thullavajja (serious offense) and others of the nature to be described, all remaining offenses are settled by sammukhāvinaya and tiṇavatthāraka (covering over with grass), meaning they are concluded.
Kiccaṃkiccādhikaraṇaṃekenasammukhāvinayeneva sammatīti yojanā.
Kiccaṃkiccādhikaraṇaṃekena: The settlement of a matter (kiccādhikaraṇa) is concluded by only one means, sammukhāvinaya. This is the connection.
2770.Yebhuyyasikakammeti ettha nimittatthe bhummaṃ.Salākaṃ gāhayeti vinicchayakārake saṅghe dhammavādīnaṃ bahuttaṃ vā appatarattaṃ vā jānituṃ vakkhamānena nayena salākaṃ gāhāpeyya.Budhoti ‘‘na chandāgatiṃ gacchati…pe… gahitāgahitañca jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ puggalaṃ dasseti.‘‘Gūḷhenā’’tiādinā salākaggāhappakāro dassito.Kaṇṇajappenāti ettha kaṇṇe jappo yasmiṃ salākaggāhapayogeti viggaho. Etthagūḷhasalākaggāhonāma dhammavādisalākā ca adhammavādisalākā ca visuṃ visuṃ cīvarakaṇṇe pakkhipitvā puggalānaṃ santikaṃ visuṃ visuṃ upasaṅkamitvā salākā visuṃ visuṃ dassetvā ‘‘ito tava ruccanakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti raho ṭhatvā gāhāpanaṃ.Vivaṭakaṃnāma dhammavādīnaṃ bahubhāvaṃ ñatvā sabbesu jānantesu puggalānaṃ santikaṃ gāhāpanaṃ.Kaṇṇajappanaṃnāma evameva kaṇṇamūle raho ṭhatvā gāhāpanaṃ.
2770.Yebhuyyasikakamme: Here, bhūmaṃ (majority) is in the sense of a cause (nimittaṭṭhe).Salākaṃ gāhaye: In the Sangha that decides, to know the majority or minority of those speaking in accordance with the Dhamma, one should have lots (salāka) taken according to the method to be described.Budho: Shows the person endowed with five qualities, as stated, "He does not go to partiality due to desire… he knows what has been taken and what has not been taken."‘‘Gūḷhenā’’tiādinā: The method of taking lots is shown by "with concealment," and so on.Kaṇṇajappenā: Here, kaṇṇe jappo yasmiṃ salākaggāhapayogeti viggaho (the application of taking lots in which whispering occurs in the ear, this is the compound). Here, gūḷhasalākaggāho (taking lots in secret) means placing lots for those speaking in accordance with the Dhamma and lots for those speaking against the Dhamma separately in the corner of the robe, approaching individuals separately, showing the lots separately, and having them take the one they prefer while standing in secrecy. Vivaṭakaṃ (openly) means having them take when the majority of those speaking in accordance with the Dhamma is known, in the presence of all who know.Kaṇṇajappanaṃ (whispering in the ear) means having them take while standing secretly near the ear in the same way.
2771.Alajjussadeti ettha ‘‘saṅghe’’ti seso.Lajjisu bālesūti etthāpi ‘‘ussadesū’’ti vattabbaṃ.
2771.Alajjussade: Here, "in the Sangha" (saṅghe) is to be understood.Lajjisu bālesū: Here also, "in the ussesa" (ussadesū) should be stated.
2772.Sakena kammunāyevāti attano yaṃ kiccaṃ, tenevāti.
2772.Sakena kammunāyevā: By one's own duty, that is, by that alone.
2773-5.‘‘Āpajjatī’’tiādi ‘‘alajjī, lajjī, bālo’’ti jānanassa hetubhūtakammadassanaṃ.Duccintitoti abhijjhāditividhamanoduccaritavasena duṭṭhu cintento.Dubbhāsīti musāvādādicatubbidhavacīduccaritavasena vacīdvāre paññattānaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ vītikkamavasena duṭṭhu bhāsanasīlo.Dukkaṭakārikoti pāṇātipātāditividhakāyaduccaritavasena kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadānaṃ vītikkamavasena kucchitakammassa karaṇasīlo.Iti lakkhaṇenevāti yathāvuttaṃ alajjīlajjībālalakkhaṇaṃ nigameti.
2773-5.‘‘Āpajjatī’’tiādi: The showing of the action that is the cause for knowing "he commits," and so on, "shameless, shameful, foolish."Duccintito: Thinking badly with evil thoughts in terms of the three types of mental misconduct, such as covetousness, etc.Dubbhāsī: Being in the habit of speaking badly in terms of transgression of the precepts (sikkhāpada) prescribed at the door of speech (vacīdvāra) in terms of the four types of verbal misconduct, such as false speech, etc.Dukkaṭakāriko: Being in the habit of doing bad actions in terms of transgression of the precepts prescribed at the door of the body (kāyadvāra) in terms of the three types of bodily misconduct, such as killing living beings, etc.Iti lakkhaṇenevā: He concludes the characteristics of the shameless, shameful, and foolish, as stated.
2776.‘‘Yebhuyyasikā’’tiādigāthāhi niddiṭṭhameva atthaṃ nigametumāha‘‘tidhā’’tiādi.Tidhāsalākagāhenāti tividhassa salākagāhassa aññatarena. Bahukā dhammavādino yadi siyunti yojanā.Kātabbanti ettha ‘‘vivādādhikaraṇavūpasamana’’nti seso.
2776.To conclude the meaning indicated by the verses beginning with "Yebhuyyasikā," he says ‘‘tidhā’’tiādi.Tidhāsalākagāhenā: By one of the three kinds of taking lots. If there are many who speak in accordance with the Dhamma, this is the connection.Kātabbanti: Here, "the settling of the dispute" (vivādādhikaraṇavūpasamana) is to be understood.
2777.Yo puggalo alajjī ca hoti sānuvādo cakammatokāyakammato, vacīkammato ca asuci ca sambuddhajigucchanīyoti attho.Soevaṃvidho pāpapuggalotassa pāpiyasikakammassa yogo hotīti sambandho.Sānuvādoti etthaanuvādonāma codanā, saha anuvādena vattatītisānuvādo,pāpagarahitapuggalehi kātabbacodanāya anurūpoti attho.
2777.The person who is shameless and blameworthykammato: From bodily action (kāyakammato) and from verbal action (vacīkammato), and impure and abhorrent to the Fully Enlightened One, this is the meaning.So: Such a sinful person is fit for that pāpiyasikakamma, this is the connection.Sānuvādo: Here, anuvādo (censure) means accusation (codanā); sānuvādo means existing with accusation, corresponding to the accusation to be made by people who despise evil.
2778-9.Bhaṇḍaneti kalahassa pubbabhāge.Kalaheti kāyavacīdvārappavatte hatthaparāmasādike kalahe ca.Vivādamhi anappaketi bahuvidhe vivāde jāte.Bahuassāmaṇe ciṇṇeti samaṇānaṃ ananucchavike nānappakāre kāyikavācasikavītikkame ca kate.Anaggeti anante.Bhassaketi kucchite amanāpavacane ciṇṇeti yojanā,bhāsiteti attho.Gavesantanti gavesiyamānaṃ, āpattādhikaraṇanti seso.Vāḷanti caṇḍaṃ.Kakkhaḷanti āsajjaṃ.Kātabbanti vūpasametabbaṃ.
2778-9.Bhaṇḍane: In the preliminary stage of quarrel.Kalahe: And in the quarrel that arises through the door of body and speech, involving touching with the hand, etc.Vivādamhi anappake: When various kinds of disputes have arisen.Bahuassāmaṇe ciṇṇe: And when various kinds of bodily and verbal transgressions, unsuitable for ascetics, have been committed.Anagge: Endless.Bhassake: In bad, unpleasant speech, the connection is "committed," meaning spoken (bhāsite).Gavesantanti: Being sought, the remainder is "an offense dispute."Vāḷanti: Fierce.Kakkhaḷanti: Harsh.Kātabbanti: Should be settled.
2780-2.Yathā ca vūpasammati, tathā tiṇavatthārake suddho hotīti sambandho.
2780-2.And as it is settled, he is pure through tiṇavatthāraka, this is the connection.
Thullavajjanti pārājikañceva saṅghādisesañca.Gihīhi paṭisaṃyutanti gihīnaṃ jātiādīhi pāḷiyā āgatehi dasahi akkosavatthūhi, aṭṭhakathāgatehi ca tadaññehi akkosavatthūhi khuṃsanavambhanapaccayā ca dhammikapaṭissavassa asaccāpanapaccayā ca āpannāpattiṃ. Esā eva hi āpatti gihipaṭisaṃyuttā nāmaparivāre‘‘atthi gihipaṭisaṃyuttā, atthi nagihipaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti dukaṃ nikkhipitvā ‘‘gihipaṭisaṃyuttāti sudhammattherassa āpatti, yā ca dhammikassa paṭissavassa asaccāpane āpatti. Avasesā nagihipaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 321) vacanato.
Thullavajjanti: A pārājika offense and a saṅghādisesa offense.Gihīhi paṭisaṃyutanti: An offense committed due to reviling and disparaging with the ten grounds for abuse that come in the Pali, such as birth, etc., regarding laypersons, and other grounds for abuse contained in the Commentary, and due to the cause of breaking a promise related to the Dhamma. For this offense is indeed called related to laypersons. For in the Parivāra, after setting forth the pair "there is related to laypersons, there is not related to laypersons," it is said, "Related to laypersons means the offense of Thera Sudhamma, and the offense that is the breaking of a promise related to the Dhamma. The remaining offenses are not related to laypersons" (pari. aṭṭha. 321).
Sudhammattherassa āpattīti ca tena cittassa gahapatino jātiṃ paṭicca khuṃsanavambhanapaccayā āpannā omasavādasikkhāpadavibhāgagatā dukkaṭāpatti gahetabbā. Idañca upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, tasmā itarehipi akkosavatthūhi gihiṃ khuṃsentānaṃ vambhentānaṃ itaresaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sā āpatti gihipaṭisaṃyuttāvāti veditabbaṃ. Tathā āpannaṃ āpattiṃ desāpentena dassanūpacāraṃ avijahāpetvā savanūpacāraṃ jahāpetvā ekaṃse uttarāsaṅgaṃ kārāpetvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīdāpetvā añjaliṃ paggaṇhāpetvā sā āpatti desāpetabbā.
Sudhammattherassa āpattīti ca: And the dukkata offense pertaining to the division of the training rule on abusive speech, committed by him due to reviling and disparaging regarding the birth of Citta the householder, should be taken. And this is merely an indication. Therefore, it should be understood that that offense is related to laypersons for other monks who revile and disparage a layperson with other grounds for abuse. In that case, having the monk who has committed the offense confess the offense, without causing him to give up the manner of showing respect, but causing him to give up the manner of listening to the law, having him wear the upper robe on one shoulder, having him sit in the squatting position, having him raise his joined palms, that offense should be confessed.
Diṭṭhāvikammikanti diṭṭhāvikamme niyutto diṭṭhāvikammiko, taṃ,aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘ye pana ‘na metaṃ khamatī’ti aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhāvikammaṃ karontī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 214) ye puggalā dassitā, tesamaññatarasseva gahaṇaṃ.
Diṭṭhāvikammikanti: One appointed to diṭṭhāvikamma is a diṭṭhāvikammika; that.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ: The taking of only one of those persons shown in the Commentary, "But those who do diṭṭhāvikamma to one another, saying, 'This is not pleasing to me'" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 214).
Yoti bhaṇḍanakārakehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ mahantaṃ viggahaṃ katvā sambahulā āpattiyo āpanno yo bhikkhu.Tatthāti tasmiṃ tiṇavatthārakasamathakārake bhikkhusamūhe.Na hotīti chandaṃ datvā taṃ bhikkhuparisaṃ anāgatattā na saṃvijjati. Tañca ṭhapetvāti yojanā.
Yo: The monk who, having made a great quarrel with monks who cause disputes, has committed many offenses.Tatthā: In that group of monks who perform the tiṇavatthāraka settlement.Na hotī: Because he does not exist, since that company of monks has not come, having given his consent. And that should be set aside, this is the connection.
Tiṇavatthārakekate sati yāva upasampadamāḷato pabhuti āpannāyasesāya āpattiyānirāpatti hutvāsuddho hotisaṅghoti yojanā.
Tiṇavatthārakekate sati: When tiṇavatthāraka has been performed, suddho hoti (is pure), the Sangha, having become free from sesāya āpattiyā (the remaining offense) committed from the upasampadāmaḷa (ordination platform) onward, this is the connection.
Samathakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
The explanation of the Samathakkhandhaka is finished.
Khuddakavatthukkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka
2783.Kuṭṭeti iṭṭhakāsilādārukuṭṭānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ.Aṭṭāneti etthaaṭṭānaṃnāma rukkhe phalakaṃ viya tacchetvā aṭṭhapadākārena rājiyo chinditvā nahānatitthe nikhaṇanti, tattha cuṇṇāni ākiritvā manussā kāyaṃ ghaṃsanti.
2783.Kuṭṭe: On one of the brick, stone, or wooden walls.Aṭṭāne: Here, aṭṭānaṃ means cutting a tree like a plank and cutting rows in the shape of an eight-legged creature and erecting it at the bathing place; after scattering powders there, people rub their bodies.
2784.Gandhabbahatthenāti nahānatitthe ṭhapitena dārumayahatthena. Tena kira cuṇṇāni gahetvā manussā sarīraṃ ghaṃsanti.Kuruvindakasuttiyāti kuruvindakapāsāṇacuṇṇāni lākhāya bandhitvā kataguḷikakalāpako vuccati, taṃ ubhosu antesu gahetvā sarīraṃ ghaṃsanti.Mallakenāti makaradantakaṃ chinditvā mallakamūlasaṇṭhānena katena mallakena, idaṃ gilānassāpi na vaṭṭati.Aññamaññañca kāyatoti aññamaññaṃ sarīrena ghaṃseyya.
2784.Gandhabbahatthenā: With the wooden hand placed at the bathing place. It is said that people rub their bodies after taking powders with that.Kuruvindakasuttiyā: Kuruvindaka means a collection of balls made by binding kuruvindaka stone powder with lac; they rub their bodies after taking that at both ends.Mallakenā: With a mallaka made by cutting a makaradantaka (crocodile tooth) in the shape of the root of a mallaka plant; this is not allowable even for the sick.Aññamaññañca kāyato: And they might rub one another with their bodies.
2785.Akataṃ mallakaṃnāma makaradante acchinditvā kataṃ, idaṃ agilānassa na vaṭṭati.
2785.Akataṃ mallakaṃ: An uncut mallaka means one made without cutting a crocodile tooth; this is not allowable for one who is not sick.
2786.Kapāliṭṭhakakhaṇḍānīti kapālakhaṇḍaiṭṭhakakhaṇḍāni.Sabbassāti gilānāgilānassa sarīre ghaṃsitvā ubbaṭṭetuṃ vaṭṭati.‘‘Puthupāṇika’’nti hatthaparikammaṃ vuccati, tasmā sabbassa hatthena piṭṭhiparikammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.‘‘Vatthavaṭṭī’’ti idaṃpāḷiyaṃvuttaukkāsikassa pariyāyaṃ, tasmā nahāyantassa yassa kassaci nahānasāṭakavaṭṭiyāpi ghaṃsituṃ vaṭṭati.
2786.Kapāliṭṭhakakhaṇḍānī: Pieces of potsherd and pieces of brick.Sabbassā: It is allowable for everyone, sick or not, to rub and scrub the body.‘‘Puthupāṇika’’nti: Is called hand massage, therefore it is allowable for everyone to do back massage with the hand.‘‘Vatthavaṭṭī’’: This is a synonym for the Pali term "ukkaāsika," therefore it is allowable for anyone who is bathing to rub with a bathing cloth (sāṭakavaṭṭī).
2787.Pheṇakaṃnāma samuddapheṇaṃ.Kathalanti kapālakhaṇḍaṃ. Pādaghaṃsanevuttāanuññātā.Katakaṃnāma padumakaṇṇikākāraṃ pādaghaṃsanatthaṃ kaṇṭake uṭṭhāpetvā kataṃ, etaṃ neva paṭiggahetuṃ, na paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
2787.Pheṇakaṃ: Pheṇaka means sea foam.Kathalanti: A piece of potsherd. Pādaghaṃsanevuttā: Allowed for rubbing the feet.Katakaṃ: Kataka means made in the shape of a lotus pericarp, with thorns raised up for rubbing the feet; it is not allowable either to receive or to use this.
2788.Yaṃ kiñcipi alaṅkāranti hatthūpagādialaṅkāresu yaṃ kiñci alaṅkāraṃ.
2788.Yaṃ kiñcipi alaṅkāra: Whatever ornament among ornaments such as hand ornaments, etc.
2789.Osaṇṭheyyāti alaṅkāratthaṃ saṅkharonto nameyya.Hatthaphaṇakenāti hattheneva phaṇakiccaṃ karontā aṅgulīhi osaṇṭhenti.Phaṇakenāti dantamayādīsu yena kenaci.Kocchenāti usiramayena vā muñjapabbajamayena vā kocchena.
2789.Osaṇṭheyyā: He might rub while preparing for the sake of adornment.Hatthaphaṇakenā: Preparing with the hand alone, doing the work of a comb with the fingers, they prepare.Phaṇakenā: With any comb made of ivory, etc.Kocchenā: With a koccha made of usira root or of muñja grass.
2790.Sitthatelodatelehīti sitthatelañca udakatelañcāti viggaho, tehi. Tatthasitthatelaṃnāma madhusitthakaniyyāsādi yaṃ kiñci cikkaṇaṃ.Cikkaṇaṃnāma niyyāsaṃ.Udakatelaṃnāma udakamissakaṃ telaṃ. Katthaci potthakesu ‘‘siṭṭhā’’ti pāṭho, soyevattho.Anulomanipātatthanti nalāṭābhimukhaṃ anulomena pātanatthaṃ.Uddhalomenāti uddhaggaṃ hutvā ṭhitalomena.
2790.Sitthatelodatelehī: The compound is sitthatelañca udakatelañcāti viggaho, with these. Here, sitthatelaṃ means any oily substance (cikkaṇaṃ) such as beeswax resin, etc.Cikkaṇaṃ means resin.Udakatelaṃ means oil mixed with water. In some books there is the reading "siṭṭhā," the meaning is the same.Anulomanipātatthanti: For the sake of pouring in the natural order, towards the forehead.Uddhalomenā: With the hairs standing up, having become erect.
2791.Hatthaṃ telena temetvāti karatalaṃ telena makkhetvā.Siroruhākesā.Uṇhābhitattassāti uṇhābhitattarajasirassa. Allahatthena siroruhe puñchituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2791.Hatthaṃ telena temetvā: After moistening the palm of the hand with oil.Siroruhā: Hairs.Uṇhābhitattassā: Of one whose head is hot with heat. It is allowable to wipe the hairs with a damp hand, this is the connection.
2792.Ādāseudapatte vāti ettha kaṃsapattādīnipi, yesu mukhanimittaṃ paññāyati, sabbāni ādāsasaṅkhameva gacchanti, kañjiyādīnipi ca udapattasaṅkhameva, tasmā yattha katthaci olokentassa dukkaṭaṃ.
2792.Ādāse udapatte vā: Here, bronze bowls, etc., in which the image of the face appears, all go to the designation of "mirror" (ādāsasaṅkhameva), and kañji gruel, etc., also go to the designation of "water bowl" (udapattasaṅkhameva), therefore there is a dukkata offense for looking in any of them.
2793.Yena hetunā mukhaṃ olokentassa anāpatti, taṃ dassetumāha‘‘sañchavi’’ntiādi. Ābādhapaccayā ‘‘me mukhe vaṇo sañchavi nu kho, udāhu na sañchavī’’ti mukhaṃ daṭṭhuñca ‘‘ahaṃ jiṇṇo nu kho, udāhu no’’ti attano āyusaṅkhārajānanatthañca mukhaṃ daṭṭhuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
2793.To show the reason why there is no offense for looking at the face, he says ‘‘sañchavi’’ntiādi. Due to a disease, it is allowable to look at the face to see "is there a sore on my face, is it smooth or not?", and to look at the face to know one's age, "am I old or not?", this is the connection.
2794.Naccaṃ vāti yaṃ kiñci naccaṃ antamaso moranaccampi.Gītanti yaṃ kiñci naṭagītaṃ vā sādhugītaṃ vā antamaso dantagītampi, yaṃ ‘‘gāyissāmā’’ti pubbabhāge okūjantā karonti, etampi na vaṭṭati.Vāditanti yaṃ kiñci vāditaṃ.Daṭṭhuṃ vā pana sotuṃ vāti naccaṃ daṭṭhuṃ vā gītaṃ vāditaṃ sotuṃ vā.
2794.Naccaṃ vā: Whatever dance, even a peacock dance.Gītanti: Whatever singing of actors or good singing, even singing with the teeth, which they do making a preliminary humming noise saying, "we will sing," that is also not allowable.Vāditanti: Whatever playing of instruments.Daṭṭhuṃ vā pana sotuṃ vā: Either to see dancing or to hear singing or playing.
2795.Sayaṃ naccantassa vā naccāpentassa vā gāyantassa vā gāyāpentassa vā vādentassa vā vādāpentassa vā dukkaṭamevaaṭṭhakathāya(cūḷava. aṭṭha. 248) vuttanti tadekadesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘daṭṭhumantamaso’’tiādi.
2795.There is a dukkata offense indeed for oneself dancing or having others dance, oneself singing or having others sing, oneself playing instruments or having others play instruments. To show a part of that which is stated in the Commentary (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 248), he says ‘‘daṭṭhumantamaso’’tiādi.
2796.Suṇātīti gītaṃ vā vāditaṃ vā.Passatīti naccaṃ passati.
2796.Suṇātī: He hears singing or playing.Passatī: He sees dancing.
2797.Passissāmīti ettha ‘‘suṇissāmī’’ti seso. ‘‘Naccaṃ passissāmi, gītaṃ, vāditaṃ vā suṇissāmī’’ti vihārato vihāraṃ gacchato vāpi dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2797.Passissāmī: Here, "suṇissāmī" is to be understood. There is a dukkata offense also for one going from one monastery to another thinking, "I will see dancing, I will hear singing or playing," this is the connection.
2798.Uṭṭhahitvāna gacchatoti ‘‘naccaṃ passissāmī’’ti, ‘‘gītaṃ, vāditaṃ vā suṇissāmī’’ti nisinnaṭṭhānato uṭṭhahitvā antovihārepi taṃ taṃ disaṃ gacchato āpatti hotīti yojanā. Vīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā gīvaṃ pasāretvā passatopi ca āpattīti yojanā.
2798.Uṭṭhahitvāna gacchato: For one rising from a sitting place and going in that direction even within the monastery, thinking, "I will see dancing," "I will hear singing or playing," there is an offense, this is the connection. There is also an offense for one standing in the street and stretching out the neck to see, this is the connection.
2799.Dīghāti dvaṅgulato dīghā.Na dhāreyyāti na dhāretabbā.Dvaṅgulaṃ vā dumāsaṃ vāti ettha dve aṅgulāni parimāṇaṃ etassātidvaṅgulo,keso. Dve māsā ukkaṭṭhaparicchedo assātidumāso. Kesaṃ dhārento dvaṅgulaṃ vā dhāreyya dumāsaṃ vā.Tato uddhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti tato dvaṅgulato vā dumāsato vā kesato uddhaṃ kesaṃ dhāretuṃ na vaṭṭati.
2799.Dīghā: Longer than two fingerbreadths.Na dhāreyyā: Should not be kept.Dvaṅgulaṃ vā dumāsaṃ vā: Here, dvaṅgulo means that two fingerbreadths is its measure, the hair. Dumāso means that two months is its maximum limit. While keeping the hair, one may keep it two fingerbreadths or two months.Tato uddhaṃ na vaṭṭatī: It is not allowable to keep the hair longer than that, longer than two fingerbreadths or two months of hair.
dvaṅgulaṃ,dve māsā samāhaṭādumāsaṃ,ubhayattha accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Kese dhārento dvaṅgulamattaṃ vā dhāreyya dumāsamattaṃ vā,tatokālaparimāṇato uddhaṃ kese dhāretuṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho. Sace kese antodvemāse dvaṅgule pāpuṇanti, antodvemāseyeva chinditabbā. Dvaṅgule hi atikkametuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepi na dīghā, dvemāsato ekadivasampi atikkametuṃ na labhatiyeva. Evamayaṃ ubhayenapi ukkaṭṭhaparicchedeneva vutto, tato oraṃ pana navaṭṭanabhāvo nāma natthi.
Dvaṅgulaṃ: two finger-breadths; dve māsā samāhaṭā dumāsaṃ: two months taken together, dumāsaṃ; an expression used for complete connection in both cases. While keeping hair, one should keep it either to the extent of two finger-breadths or to the extent of two months; tato: from that, meaning it is not permissible to keep hair longer than that period or measurement. If the hair reaches two finger-breadths within two months, it should be cut within those two months. For it is not permissible to exceed two finger-breadths. Even if it is not long, it is not allowed to exceed two months even by a single day. Thus, this is stated only with the maximum limit in both respects; therefore, there is no such thing as not being permissible below that.
2800.Dīghe nakhe, dīghāni nāsikalomāni ca na dhārayeti yojanā, na dhāreyya, chindeyyāti attho.Vīsatimaṭṭhanti vīsatiyā nakhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ likhitamaṭṭhabhāvaṃ kātuṃ bhikkhuno na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Satthakena tacchetvā cuṇṇakena pamajjitvā phalikamaṇīnaṃ viya ujjalakaraṇaṃlikhitamaṭṭhaṃnāma. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, malamattaṃ apakaḍḍhitu’’nti (cūḷava. 274) anuññātattā muggaphalatacādīhi nakhamalaṃ apanetuṃ vaṭṭati.
2800.The meaning is that one should not keep long nails and long nose hairs; one should not keep them, one should cut them. Vīsatimaṭṭhaṃ: The meaning is that it is not permissible for a bhikkhu to make the nails like twenty smooth surfaces, like written smooth surfaces. Likhitamaṭṭhaṃ means making them shiny like crystal gems by smoothing them with a knife and polishing them with powder. Since it is allowed, "I allow, monks, to remove the dirt" (cūḷava. 274), it is permissible to remove nail dirt with things like the skin of green grams.
2801.Kappāpeyyavisuṃ massunti yo kesacchinno visuṃ massuṃ kappāpeyya.Dāṭhikaṃ ṭhapeyyāti kese chindāpetvā massuṃ akappāpetvā visuṃ ṭhapeyya.Sambādheti upakacchakamuttakaraṇasaṅkhāte sambādhaṭṭhāne.Lomaṃ saṃharāpeyyavāti satthena vā saṇḍāsena vā aññena yena kenaci parena chindāpeyya, sayaṃ vā chindeyya. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ābādhapaccayā sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpetu’’nti (cūḷava. 275) anuññātattā yathāvuttasambādhe gaṇḍapiḷakavaṇādike ābādhe sati lomaṃ saṃharāpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
2801.Kappāpeyya visuṃ massuṃ: whoever has his hair cut, and separately has his beard trimmed. Dāṭhikaṃ ṭhapeyyā: having had his hair cut, but keeping the beard untrimmed and separate. Sambādhe: in a crowded place, known as making an armpit-covering. Lomaṃ saṃharāpeyyavā: should have the hair removed by someone else with a knife or tweezers or anything else, or he himself should cut it. Since it is allowed, "I allow, monks, to have hair removed in a crowded place due to illness" (cūḷava. 275), it is permissible to have hair removed when there is an illness such as a boil, pimple, or wound in the aforementioned crowded place.
2802.Agilānassa chindato dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.Aññenavā puggalena tathā kattariyā chindāpentassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti sambandho.
2802.It is said that there is a dukkaṭa for one who cuts it without being ill. The connection is that it is said that there is a dukkaṭa also for having it cut by another person with scissors.
2803.Sesaṅgachedaneti aṅguliyādiavasesasarīrāvayavānaṃ chedane.Attavadheti attupakkamena vā āṇattiyā upakkamena vā attano jīvitanāse.
2803.Sesaṅgachedane: in cutting off the remaining parts of the body such as fingers. Attavadhe: in killing oneself, either by one's own effort or by an order to make an effort to end one's own life.
2804.Aṅganti aṅgajātato avasesaṃ sarīrāvayavaṃ. Ahikīṭādidaṭṭhassa tappaṭikāravasenaaṅgaṃ chindatona doso. Tādisābādhapaccayā tappaṭikāravasenaaṅgaṃ chindatona doso. Lohitaṃ mocentassāpi na dosoti yojanā.
2804.Aṅgaṃ: a remaining body part from the limb area. Aṅgaṃ chindato: There is no offense for cutting off a limb as a remedy for someone bitten by a snake or insect. Aṅgaṃ chindato: There is no offense for cutting off a limb as a remedy due to such illness. There is no offense for drawing blood either.
2805.Aparissāvanobhikkhu sace maggaṃ gacchati, dukkaṭaṃ.Maggeaddhānetaṃparissāvanaṃ yācamānassa yo na dadāti, tassaadadatoadentassāpi tatheva dukkaṭamevāti yojanā. Yo pana attano hatthe parissāvane vijjamānepi yācati, tassa na akāmā dātabbaṃ.
2805.If a aparissāvano (one without a water strainer) bhikkhu goes on a journey, there is a dukkaṭa. Magge: on the road, taṃ: that strainer, if someone who is asked for it on the road does not give it, for adadato (one not giving), there is a dukkaṭa just the same. However, if someone asks even though he has a strainer in his hand, it should not be given against his will.
2806.‘‘Naggo’’ti padaṃ ‘‘na bhuñje’’tiādi kiriyāpadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Na bhuñjeti bhattādiṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ na bhuñjeyya.Na piveti yāguādiṃ pātabbaṃ na piveyya.Na ca khādeti mūlakhādanīyādikaṃ khādanīyaṃ na khādeyya.Na sāyayeti phāṇitādikaṃ sāyitabbañca na sāyeyya na liheyya.Na dadeti aññassa bhattādiṃ kiñci na dadeyya.Na gaṇheyyāti tathā sayaṃ naggo hutvā na paṭiggaṇheyya.Añjasaṃmaggaṃ.
2806.The word "Naggo" (naked) should be connected individually with the action verbs such as "na bhuñje" (should not eat). Na bhuñje: should not eat food, etc., that should be eaten. Na pive: should not drink gruel, etc., that should be drunk. Na ca khāde: should not eat edibles such as root vegetables that should be eaten. Na sāyaye: and should not taste or lick things that should be tasted, such as molasses. Na dade: should not give anything, such as food, to another. Na gaṇheyyā: likewise, being naked oneself, should not accept anything. Añjasaṃ: the direct road.
2807.Parikammaṃ na kātabbanti piṭṭhiparikammādiparikammaṃ na kātabbaṃ.Kārayeti sayaṃ naggo hutvā aññena piṭṭhiparikammādiparikammaṃ na kārāpeyyāti attho.
2807.Parikammaṃ na kātabbaṃ: Physical grooming such as back massage should not be done. Kāraye: He should not have physical grooming such as back massage done by another while he himself is naked.
2808.Piṭṭhikammādikeparikammejantāgharādikā tisso paṭicchādīvuttā‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tisso paṭicchādiyo jantāgharapaṭicchādiṃ udakapaṭicchādiṃ vatthapaṭicchādi’’nti (cūḷava. 261) anuññātāti yojanā. Paṭicchādeti hirikopinantipaṭicchādi,jantāgharameva paṭicchādijantāgharapaṭicchādi. Udakameva paṭicchādiudakapaṭicchādi. Vatthameva paṭicchādivatthapaṭicchādi. ‘‘Sabbattha pana vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā itarapaṭicchādidvayaṃ parikammeyeva vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.Sabbatthāti bhojanādisabbakiccesu.
2808.Parikamme: In physical grooming like back massage, the three coverings such as the bathhouse, etc., are vuttā (mentioned) as allowed, "I allow, monks, three coverings: a bathhouse covering, a water covering, and a cloth covering" (cūḷava. 261). Paṭicchādi: that which covers, which is modesty; jantāgharapaṭicchādi: the bathhouse itself is a covering; udakapaṭicchādi: water itself is a covering; vatthapaṭicchādi: cloth itself is a covering. "Sabbattha pana vaṭṭatī": By this, it indicates that the other two coverings are only permissible for physical grooming. Sabbatthā: in all activities such as eating.
2809.Yattha katthaci peḷāyanti tambalohavaṭṭalohakaṃsalohakāḷalohasuvaṇṇarajatādīhi katāya vā dārumayāya vā yāya kāyaci peḷāya āsittakūpadhāne.Bhuñjituṃ na ca vaṭṭatīti bhājanaṃ ṭhapetvā bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘āsittakūpadhānaṃ nāma tambalohena vā rajatena vā katāya peḷāya etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ‘na bhikkhave āsittakūpadhāne bhuñjitabba’nti sāmaññena paṭikkhittattā pana dārumayāpi na vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 264). ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave maḷorika’’nti (cūḷava. 264) anuññātattā maḷorikāya ṭhapetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.‘‘Maḷorikā’’ti ca daṇḍādhārako vuccati, yaṃ tayo, cattāro, bahū vā daṇḍake upari ca heṭṭhā ca vitthataṃ majjhe saṅkucitaṃ katvā bandhitvā ādhārakaṃ karonti. Yaṭṭhiādhārakapaṇṇādhārakapacchikapiṭṭhaghaṭakakavāṭakādibhājanamukhaudukkhalādīnipi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti.Yaṭṭhiādhārakoti yaṭṭhiṃyeva ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā bandhīkataādhārako.
2809.Yattha katthaci peḷāya: on any box made of copper, brass, bronze, iron, gold, silver, or wood, with a reclining cushion. Bhuñjituṃ na ca vaṭṭatī: it is not permissible to eat placing the bowl on it. As he said, "āsittakūpadhānaṃ (reclining cushion) is a term for a box made of copper or silver; since 'monks, one should not eat on a reclining cushion' is generally prohibited, even a wooden one is not permissible" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 264). "I allow, monks, a maḷorika" (cūḷava. 264); it is permissible to eat placing it on a maḷorika. "Maḷorikā" is said to be a stand for a staff, which is made by widening three, four, or many small staffs above and below and narrowing them in the middle, and tying them to make a stand. Items such as a staff stand, a leaf stand, a basket, a back-rest, a pot-lid, a door leaf, a mortar mouth, and a pestle are also included here. Yaṭṭhiādhārako: a stand made by placing and tying the staff upright itself.
‘‘ekato’’ti.‘‘Bhuñjato’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Ekato ekabhājane yāguādipānampi na vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ekathālake pātabba’’nti (cūḷava. 264). Atha vābhuñjatoti ajjhohārasāmaññena pānampi saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ. Ayamettha vinicchayo – sace eko bhikkhu bhājanato phalaṃ vā pūvaṃ vā gahetvā gacchati, tasmiṃ apagate itarassa sesakaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Itarassāpi tasmiṃ khaṇe puna gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti.
"Ekato" (together). "Bhuñjato" (while eating): this is illustrative. It is not permissible to drink gruel, etc., from one bowl together. As he said, "monks, one should not drink from one plate" (cūḷava. 264). Or, bhuñjato (while eating) should be understood as including drinking by the general term of consuming. Here is the determination in this matter: if one bhikkhu takes a fruit or cake from a bowl and leaves, it is permissible for the other to eat the remaining portion after he has gone. It is also permissible for the other to take it again at that moment.
2810.Ye dve vā tayo vā bhikkhū ekapāvuraṇā vā ekattharaṇā vā ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā vā nipajjanti, tesañca, ye ekamañcepi ekato nipajjanti, tesañca āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2810.For those two or three bhikkhus who lie down on one outer robe or one spread, or one spread and outer robe, and for those who lie down together on one bed, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.
2811.Saṅghāṭipallatthikamupāgatoti etthasaṅghāṭīti saṅghāṭināmena adhiṭṭhitacīvaramāha. Saṅghāṭipallatthikaṃ upagatena yutto hutvāti attho.Na nisīdeyyāti vihāre vā antaraghare vā yattha katthaci na nisīdeyya. ‘‘Saṅghāṭīti nāmena adhiṭṭhitacīvaravohārappattamadhiṭṭhitacīvaraṃ ‘saṅghāṭī’ti vutta’’ntinissandehe, khuddasikkhāvaṇṇanāyampi‘‘saṅghāṭiyā na pallattheti adhiṭṭhitacīvarena vihāre vā antaraghare vā pallatthiko na kātabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘antogāme vāsatthāya upagatena adhiṭṭhitaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ vinā sesacīvarehi pallatthikāya nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
2811.Saṅghāṭipallatthikamupāgato: here, saṅghāṭī refers to the robe designated by the name saṅghāṭī. The meaning is: being associated with one who has approached a saṅghāṭipallatthika. Na nisīdeyyā: he should not sit down anywhere, whether in a monastery or inside a house. Nissandehe: In the Khuddasikkhā commentary, "saṅghāṭīti nāmena adhiṭṭhitacīvaravohārappattamadhiṭṭhitacīvaraṃ 'saṅghāṭī'ti vuttaṃ" (the designated robe that is commonly referred to by the name saṅghāṭī is called saṅghāṭī); even it is said, "saṅghāṭiyā na pallattheti adhiṭṭhitacīvarena vihāre vā antaraghare vā pallatthiko na kātabbo" (one should not sit cross-legged in a monastery or inside a house with the designated robe). However, in the Aṭṭhakathā, it is said, "antogāme vāsatthāya upagatena adhiṭṭhitaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ vinā sesacīvarehi pallatthikāya nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī" (it is permissible for one who has approached a village for residence to sit cross-legged with the remaining robes other than the designated saṅghāṭī).
Kiñcikīḷaṃ na kīḷeyyāti jutakīḷādikaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāyikavācasikakīḷikaṃ na kīḷeyya.Na ca gāhayeti na ca gāhāpeyya, na harāpeyyāti attho.
Kiñci kīḷaṃ na kīḷeyyā: he should not play any kind of physical or verbal game, such as dice games. Na ca gāhaye: and he should not make others play, should not have them bring it about.
2812.Dāṭhikāyapīti massumhi.Uggatanti ettha ‘‘bībhaccha’’nti seso.Aññanti apalitaṃ.Tādisanti bībhacchaṃ.
2812.Dāṭhikāyapī: even on the beard. Uggataṃ: here, "bībhacchaṃ" (disgusting) is the remainder. Aññaṃ: not gray. Tādisaṃ: disgusting.
2813.‘‘Agilāno’’ti iminā gilānassa anāpattibhāvaṃ dīpeti.‘‘Dhāreyyā’’ti iminā suddhakattuniddesena agilānassapi paraṃ dhārāpane, parassa dhāraṇasādiyane ca anāpattīti viññāyatīti. Attano guttatthaṃ, cīvarādīnaṃ guttatthañca vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 270) – yassa kāyadāho vā pittakopo vā hoti, cakkhu vā dubbalaṃ, añño vā koci ābādho vinā chattena uppajjati, tassa gāme vā araññe vā chattaṃ vaṭṭati. Vāḷamigacorabhayesu attaguttatthaṃ, vasse pana cīvaraguttatthampi vaṭṭati. Ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ pana sabbattheva vaṭṭati. ‘‘Ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ nāma tālapatta’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttanti.
2813."Agilāno": by this, he indicates the state of non-offense for the sick. "Dhāreyyā": by this indication of not keeping, it is understood that there is no offense even for the non-sick in having another keep it, and in approving of another's keeping it. It is permissible for the sake of protecting oneself and for the sake of protecting robes, etc. Here is the determination in this matter (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 270): for someone who has body heat or bile disorder, or whose eyesight is weak, or any other illness arises without an umbrella, an umbrella is permissible in a village or in the forest. It is permissible for protecting oneself from wild animals and fear of thieves, and in the rain, it is also permissible for protecting robes. However, an ekapaṇṇacchatta (single-leaf umbrella) is permissible everywhere. In the Gaṇṭhipadas, it is said that "ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ nāma tālapattaṃ" (a single-leaf umbrella is a palm leaf).
2814.Hatthisoṇḍākāro abhedopacārena‘‘hatthisoṇḍa’’nti vutto. Evamuparipi. Cīvarassa nāmadheyyaṃ‘‘vasana’’nti idaṃ.‘‘Nivāsentassa dukkaṭa’’nti padadvayañca ‘‘hatthisoṇḍa’’ntiādīhi sabbapadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Velliyanti ettha gāthābandhavasena saṃ-saddalopo, saṃvelliyanti attho.
2814.The shape of an elephant's trunk is called "hatthisoṇḍa" (elephant's trunk) by metaphorical non-distinction. Likewise, above also. "Vasana" (clothing) is the name of the robe. The two words "nivāsentassa dukkaṭaṃ" (there is a dukkaṭa for wearing) should each be connected with all the words beginning with "hatthisoṇḍa". Velliya: here, due to the meter of the verse, there is a loss of the saṃ- syllable; the meaning is saṃvelliyanti (wrapping).
hatthisoṇḍaṃ(cūḷava. aṭṭha. 280) nāma nābhimūlato hatthisoṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ olambakaṃ katvā nivatthaṃ coḷikitthīnaṃ nivāsanaṃ viya.Catukkaṇṇaṃnāma uparito dve, heṭṭhato dveti evaṃ cattāro kaṇṇe dassetvā nivatthaṃ.Macchavāḷakaṃnāma ekato dasantaṃ ekato pāsantaṃ olambetvā nivatthaṃ.Saṃvelliyanti mallakammakārādayo viya kacchaṃ bandhitvā nivāsanaṃ.Tālavaṇṭakaṃnāma tālavaṇṭākārena sāṭakaṃ olambetvā nivāsanaṃ.Ca-saddena satavalikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Satavalikaṃnāma dīghasāṭakaṃ anekakkhattuṃ obhañjitvā ovaṭṭikaṃ karontena nivatthaṃ, vāmadakkhiṇapassesu vā nirantaraṃ valiyo dassetvā nivatthaṃ. Sace pana jāṇuto paṭṭhāya ekā vā dve vā valiyo paññāyanti, vaṭṭati. Evaṃ nivāsetuṃ gilānassapi maggapaṭipannassapi na vaṭṭati.
Hatthisoṇḍaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 280) means wearing the lower robe making a hanging loop in the shape of an elephant's trunk from the navel area, like the way coḷi women wear their lower garment. Catukkaṇṇaṃ means wearing the lower robe showing four corners, two above and two below. Macchavāḷakaṃ means wearing the lower robe hanging down with one side extending and one side passing over. Saṃvelliyaṃ means wearing the lower robe tying it at the hip, like wrestlers and artisans. Tālavaṇṭakaṃ means wearing the lower robe hanging down the sāṭakaṃ in the shape of a palm fan. The word ca includes satavalikaṃ. Satavalikaṃ means wearing the lower robe by folding a long sāṭakaṃ many times and making it round, or wearing it showing continuous folds on the left and right sides. However, if one or two folds are visible starting from the knee, it is permissible. It is not permissible to wear it in this way even for the sick or for one who is on a journey.
Yampi maggaṃ gacchantā ekaṃ vā dve vā koṇe ukkhipitvā antaravāsakassa upari laggenti, anto vā ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ tathā nivāsetvā bahi aparaṃ nivāsenti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati. Gilāno pana antokāsāvassa ovaṭṭikaṃ dassetvā aparaṃ upari nivāsetuṃ labhati. Agilānena dve nivāsentena saguṇaṃ katvā nivāsetabbāni. Iti yañca idha paṭikkhittaṃ, yañca sekhiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ vajjetvā nibbikāraṃ timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci vikāraṃ karonto dukkaṭā na muccati.
Even when going on a journey, if they lift one or two corners and attach them above the undergarment, or if they wear one kāsāva inside in that way and wear another outside, all of it is not permissible. However, a sick person is allowed to wear another kāsāva on top of the antokāsāva showing the round fold. A non-sick person, when wearing two, should wear them folded properly. Therefore, avoiding whatever is prohibited here and whatever is in the Sekhiya description, one should wear the lower robe perfectly covering the three maṇḍalas. One is not freed from a dukkaṭa while making any kind of alteration.
2815.Gihipārupananti ‘‘setapaṭapārutaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 280) paribbājakapārutaṃ ekasāṭakapārutaṃ soṇḍapārutaṃ antepurikapārutaṃ mahājeṭṭhakapārutaṃ kuṭipavesakapārutaṃ brāhmaṇapārutaṃ pāḷikārakapāruta’’nti evamādiparimaṇḍalalakkhaṇato aññathā pārutaṃ, sabbametaṃ gihipārutaṃ nāma. Tasmā yathā setapaṭā aḍḍhapālakanigaṇṭhā pārupanti, yathā ca ekacce paribbājakā uraṃ vivaritvā dvīsu aṃsakūṭesu pāvuraṇaṃ ṭhapenti, yathā ca ekasāṭakā manussā nivatthasāṭakassa ekenantena piṭṭhiṃ pārupitvā ubho kaṇṇe ubhosu aṃsakūṭesu ṭhapenti, yathā ca surāsoṇḍādayo sāṭakena gīvaṃ parikkhipantā ubho ante udare vā olambenti, piṭṭhiyaṃ vā khipanti, yathā ca antepurikāyo akkhitārakamattaṃ dassetvā oguṇṭhikaṃ pārupanti, yathā ca mahājeṭṭhā dīghasāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā tasseva ekenantena sakalasarīraṃ pārupanti, yathā ca kassakā khettakuṭiṃ pavisantā sāṭakaṃ paliveṭhetvā upakacchake pakkhipitvā tasseva ekenantena sarīraṃ pārupanti, yathā ca brāhmaṇā ubhinnaṃ upakacchakānaṃ antarena sāṭakaṃ pavesetvā aṃsakūṭesu pakkhipanti, yathā ca pāḷikārako bhikkhu ekaṃsapārupanena pārutaṃ vāmabāhaṃ vivaritvā cīvaraṃ aṃsakūṭaṃ āropeti, evaṃ apārupitvā sabbepi ete, aññe ca evarūpe pārupanadose vajjetvā nibbikāraṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbaṃ. Tathā apārupitvā ārāme vā antaraghare vā anādarena yaṃ kiñci vikāraṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ. Parimaṇḍalato vimuttalakkhaṇanivāsanapārupanadose vajjetvā parimaṇḍalabhāvoyeva vuttalakkhaṇo adhippetoti attho.
2815.Gihipārupananti: "Wrapped in a white cloth (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 280), like a wanderer, in a single cloth, like a drunkard, like women of the inner court, like an elder, entering a hut, like a Brahmin, like a guard"—any wrapping that deviates from the standard prescribed manner is called "wrapping like a layperson." For example, just as the naked ascetics of the Aḍḍhapālaka sect wrap themselves in white cloths; just as some wanderers leave the chest bare and place the robe on both shoulder joints; just as people with a single cloth cover their backs with one end of the cloth they wear and place both corners on both shoulder joints; just as drunkards wrap the cloth around their necks and let both ends hang down in front of their stomachs or throw them over their backs; just as women of the inner court show only the eyes and wrap themselves in a veil; just as elders wear a long cloth and cover the entire body with one end of it; just as farmers entering a field hut wrap the cloth around themselves, tucking it under the armpits, and cover the body with one end of it; just as Brahmins insert the cloth between both armpits and tuck it into the shoulder joints; just as a guard bhikkhu wraps himself with a single upper robe, leaving the left arm bare and placing the robe on the shoulder joint. Avoiding all these ways of wrapping improperly, one should wrap the robe in the standard, unaltered manner. Moreover, if one carelessly makes any alteration in the monastery or inside a dwelling, there is a dukkata offense. The meaning is that one should avoid the faults of wearing and wrapping robes that deviate from the standard manner, and only intend to maintain the standard manner as described.
2816.Lokāyataṃ na vāceyyāti ‘‘sabbaṃ ucchiṭṭhaṃ, sabbaṃ anucchiṭṭhaṃ, seto kāko, kāḷo bako iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenā’’ti evamādiniratthakakāraṇapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ titthiyasatthaṃ aññesaṃ na vāceyya.Na ca taṃ pariyāpuṇeti taṃ lokāyataṃ na ca pariyāpuṇeyya na uggaṇheyya.Tiracchānavijjāti hatthisippaassasippadhanusippādikā paropaghātakarā vijjā ca. Bhikkhunā na pariyāpuṇitabbā, na vācetabbāti yojanā.
2816.Lokāyataṃ na vāceyyāti: One should not recite to others the treatises of heretics that are connected with useless reasons, such as, "Everything is leftover, everything is not leftover, the crow is white, the heron is black because of this and that reason." Na ca taṃ pariyāpuṇeti: Nor should one learn or memorize that lokāyata. Tiracchānavijjāti: Also, mundane knowledge, such as elephant training, horse training, archery, which harms others. The construction is that a bhikkhu should neither learn nor teach it.
2817.Sabbācāmaribījanīti setādivaṇṇehi sabbehi camaravālehi katā bījanī.Na cālimpeyya dāyaṃ vāti davaḍāhādiupaddavanivāraṇāya anuññātaṃ paṭaggidānakāraṇaṃ vinā araññaṃ agginā na ālimpeyya. Davaḍāhe pana āgacchante anupasampanne asati paṭaggiṃ dātuṃ, appaharitakaraṇena vā parikhākhaṇanena vā parittāṇaṃ kātuṃ, senāsanaṃ pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā aggiṃ allasākhaṃ bhañjitvā nibbāpetuñca labhati. Udakena pana kappiyeneva labhati, netarena. Anupasampanne pana sati teneva kappiyavohārena kārāpetabbaṃ.Mukhaṃ na ca lañjeti manosilādinā mukhaṃ na limpeyya, tilakena aṅgaṃ na kareyyāti attho.
2817.Sabbācāmaribījanīti: A fan made of all yak-tail hairs of all colors, such as white. Na cālimpeyya dāyaṃ vāti: One should not set fire to a forest without a paṭaggi (controlled burn), which is allowed for the purpose of preventing dangers such as forest fires. However, when a forest fire is approaching, if there is no one fully ordained to set a paṭaggi, one is allowed to create a means of protection by clearing vegetation, digging a trench, or extinguishing the fire by breaking off damp branches, whether the dwelling has been reached by the fire or not. However, one is allowed to use water if it is allowable, but not otherwise. But if there is someone fully ordained, it should be done using that allowable means. Mukhaṃ na ca lañjeti: One should not smear the face with red arsenic or other substances; that is, one should not decorate the body with tilaka marks.
2818.Ubhatokājanti ubhatokoṭiyā bhāravahanakoṭikājaṃ.Antarakājakanti ubhayakoṭiyā ṭhitavāhakehi vahitabbaṃ majjhebhārayuttakājaṃ.Sīsakkhandhakaṭibhārādayoheṭṭhā vuttalakkhaṇāva.
2818.Ubhatokājanti: A carrying pole with carrying points at both ends. Antarakājakanti: A carrying pole with the load in the middle, to be carried by bearers standing at both ends. Sīsakkhandhakaṭibhārādayo: The characteristics of loads carried on the head, shoulders, waist, etc., have already been described below.
2819.Yo bhikkhu vaḍḍhakiaṅgulena aṭṭhaṅgulādhikaṃ vā teneva aṅgulena caturaṅgulapacchimaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhaṃ khādati, evaṃ khādato tassa āpatti dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2819.The construction is: the āpatti of dukkata occurs for a bhikkhu who chews a toothpick that is eight finger-widths longer than the standard finger-width, or four finger-widths shorter than the standard length.
2820.Kicce satipīti sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇakicce pana sati.Porisanti purisappamāṇaṃ, byāmamattanti vuttaṃ hoti.Āpadāsūti vāḷamigādayo vā disvā maggamūḷho vā disā oloketukāmo hutvā davaḍāhaṃ vā udakoghaṃ vā āgacchantaṃ disvā vā evarūpāsu āpadāsu.Vaṭṭatevābhirūhitunti atiuccampi rukkhaṃ ārohituṃ vaṭṭati eva.
2820.Kicce satipīti: But when there is a need to collect dry wood, etc. Porisanti: The size of a man, it has been said, means about a fathom. Āpadāsūti: Or having seen wild animals, or being lost and wanting to look around, or having seen a forest fire or a flood approaching, in such dangers. Vaṭṭatevābhirūhitunti: It is indeed allowable to climb even a very tall tree.
2821.Saceakallakogilāno na siyā,lasuṇaṃmāgadhaṃ āmakaṃ bhaṇḍikalasuṇaṃna ca khādeyyaneva paribhuñjeyyāti yojanā.Bhaṇḍikalasuṇaṃnāma catumiñjato paṭṭhāya bahumiñjaṃ. Palaṇḍukabhañjanakādilasuṇe magadhesu jātattepi na doso. Lasuṇavibhāgo heṭṭhā dassitoyeva. Gilānassa pana lasuṇaṃ khādituṃ vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ābādhapaccayā lasuṇaṃ khāditu’’nti (cūḷava. 289).Ābādhapaccayāti yassa ābādhassa lasuṇaṃ bhesajjaṃ hoti, tappaccayāti attho.Buddhavacananti saṅgītittayāruḷhā piṭakattayapāḷi.Aññathāti sakkaṭādikhalitavacanamayaṃ vācanāmaggaṃ na ropetabbaṃ, tathā na ṭhapetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
2821.The construction is: if he is not akallako, not sick, he na ca khādeyya, should not eat, lasuṇaṃ, Māgadhan garlic that is raw, bhaṇḍikalasuṇaṃ, preserved garlic, should never partake of it. Bhaṇḍikalasuṇaṃnāma: Preserved garlic means that with many cloves, starting from four. There is no offense in garlic varieties such as the Palaṇḍuka and Bhañjanaka, even if they grow in Magadha. The classification of garlic has already been shown below. But it is allowable for a sick person to eat garlic. As it was said: "I allow, bhikkhus, to eat garlic for the sake of illness" (cūḷava. 289). Ābādhapaccayāti: For the sake of whatever illness for which garlic is a medicine, that is the meaning. Buddhavacananti: The texts of the three baskets established by the three councils. Aññathāti: The teaching method consisting of non-standard speech such as Sanskrit, should not be established, that is, it should not be maintained.
2822.Khipiteti yena kenaci khipite. ‘‘Jīvā’’ti na vattabbanti yojanā. Bhikkhunā khipite gihinā ‘‘jīvathā’’ti vuttena puna ‘‘ciraṃ jīvā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.‘‘Cira’’nti pade satipi vaṭṭati.
2822.Khipiteti: When someone sneezes. The construction is: "One should not say 'Live!'" If a layperson says "May you live" when a bhikkhu sneezes, it is allowable for the bhikkhu to say in return, "May you live long." ‘‘Cira’’: Even with the word "long," it is allowable.
2823.Ākoṭentassāti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhādīhi vā paharantassa.Pupphasaṃkiṇṇeti pupphasanthate.
2823.Ākoṭentassāti: For one who strikes with the body or with something connected to the body, etc. Pupphasaṃkiṇṇeti: In a flower-strewn place.
2824.Nhāpitā pubbakā etassātinhāpitapubbako,nhāpitajātikoti attho.Khurabhaṇḍanti nhāpitaparikkhāraṃ.Na gaṇheyyāti na parihareyya. Sace yo nhāpitajātiko hoti, so khurabhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā na hareyyāti attho. Aññassa hatthato gahetvā kesacchedādi kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Uṇṇīti kesakambalaṃ vinā uṇṇamayā pāvuraṇajāti. ‘‘Gonakaṃ kuttakaṃ cittaka’’miccādinā vuttabhedavantatāya āha‘‘sabbā’’ti. Uṇṇamayaṃ antokaritvā pārupituṃ vaṭṭatīti āha‘‘bāhiralomikā’’ti. Yathāha – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bāhiralomī uṇṇīdhāretabbā’’ti (cūḷava. 249).Sikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘uṇṇalomāni bahi katvā uṇṇapāvāraṃ pārupanti, tathā dhārentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Lomāni anto katvā pārupituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 249).
2824.Nhāpitā pubbakā etassāti nhāpitapubbako: "One who used to be a barber" is the meaning. Khurabhaṇḍanti: Barber's equipment. Na gaṇheyyāti: Should not carry around. The meaning is that one who used to be a barber should not take and carry barber's equipment. It is allowable to take it from another's hand and perform hair cutting, etc. Uṇṇīti: A woolen covering excluding a hair blanket, a type of woolen wrap. Because of having the divisions stated as "Gonakaṃ kuttakaṃ cittaka," he said ‘‘sabbā’’: "all." He said ‘‘bāhiralomikā’’: "with the wool inside," meaning it is allowable to wear the wool inside. As it was said, "Bhikkhus, a woolen cloth with the wool outside should not be worn" (cūḷava. 249). Sikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ: "They wear a woolen cloak with the wool outside; there is a dukkata for wearing it that way. It is allowable to wear it with the wool inside" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 249).
2825.Aṅgarāgaṃnāma kuṅkumādi.Karontassāti abbhañjantassa. Akāyabandhanassa gāmaṃ pavisatopi dukkaṭaṃ samudīritanti yojanā. Ettha ca asatiyā abandhitvā nikkhantena yattha sarati, tattha bandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Āsanasālāya bandhissāmī’’ti gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Saritvā yāva na bandhati, na tāva piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ.
2825.Aṅgarāgaṃnāma: Aṅgarāga means saffron, etc. Karontassāti: For one who applies it. It has been said that a dukkata offense arises even for entering a village without tying the waistband. Here, if one has gone out without tying it and remembers, it should be tied where one remembers. It is allowable to go thinking, "I will tie it in the assembly hall." As long as one has not tied it after remembering, one should not go for alms.
2826.Sabbaṃ āyudhaṃ vinā sabbaṃlohajaṃlohamayabhaṇḍañca pattaṃ, saṅkamanīyapādukaṃ, yathāvuttalakkhaṇaṃ pallaṅkaṃ, āsandiñca vinā sabbaṃdārujaṃdārumayabhaṇḍañca vuttalakkhaṇamevakatakaṃ,kumbhakārikaṃdhaniyasseva sabbamattikāmayaṃ kuṭiñca vinā sabbaṃmattikāmayaṃbhaṇḍañca kappiyanti yojanā.
2826.Everything made of metal except all weapons and metal objects such as the bowl, the transition sandals, the divan as described, and the chair; everything made of wood except all wooden objects as described and the kataka and kumbhakārika; everything made of clay except the hut made of clay like a shed, and all clay objects, are allowable, is the construction.
Khuddakavatthukkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka is finished.
Senāsanakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Senāsanakkhandhaka
2827.Āsandikoti caturassapīṭhaṃ.Atikkantapamāṇoti heṭṭhā aṭaniyā vaḍḍhakihatthato uccatarappamāṇapādako. Ekapassato dīgho pana uccapādako na vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘uccakampi āsandikanti vacanato ekatobhāgena dīghapīṭhameva hi aṭṭhaṅgulādhikapādakaṃ na vaṭṭati, caturassaāsandiko pana pamāṇātikkantopi vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297).
2827.Āsandikoti: A square seat. Atikkantapamāṇoti: With legs higher than the standard measurement from the carpenter's hand below the crossbar. However, a high-legged seat that is long on one side is not allowable. As it was said: "Because of the statement 'even a high seat,' only a long bench with legs exceeding eight finger-widths on one side is not allowable, but a square seat is allowable even if it exceeds the standard" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297).
Tathāti iminā ‘‘atikkantapamāṇo’’ti idaṃ paccāmasati.Pañcaṅgapīṭhanti cattāro pādā, apassenanti imehi pañcaṅgehi yuttapīṭhaṃ.Sattaṅganti tīsu disāsu apassaye yojetvā kataṃ. Tañhi catūhi pādehi, tīhi apassehi ca yuttattā ‘‘sattaṅgapīṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo mañcepi. Yathāha – ‘‘sattaṅgo nāma tīsu disāsu apassayaṃ katvā katamañco, ayampi pamāṇātikkanto vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297).
Tathāti: With this, he recalls that "exceeding the standard." Pañcaṅgapīṭhanti: A seat with five parts, four legs and a backrest. Sattaṅganti: Made by attaching backrests in three directions. Indeed, because it is fitted with four legs and three backrests, it is called "seven-part seat." This method applies to couches as well. As it was said: "What is called 'seven-part' is a couch made by attaching backrests in three directions; this too is allowable even if it exceeds the standard" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297).
2828.Tūlonaddhāti upari tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā baddhā.Ghareyevāti gihīnaṃ geheyeva nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.‘‘Nisīditu’’nti imināva sayanaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ.Sīsapādūpadhānanti sīsūpadhānañceva pādūpadhānañca.Ca-saddo pi-saddatthe so ‘‘agilānassā’’ti ettha ānetvā sambandhitabbo, tena agilānassāpi tāva vaṭṭati, pageva gilānassāti dīpeti.
2828.Tūlonaddhāti: Stuffed with cotton and tied on top. Ghareyevāti: The connection is that it is allowable to sit in the houses of householders. With this "to sit," lying down is prohibited. Sīsapādūpadhānanti: Both a head pillow and a foot pillow. The ca ("and") is in the sense of pi ("also"), and should be brought into connection with "agilānassā" ("for one who is not sick"), thus indicating that it is allowable even for one who is not sick, what to say of one who is sick.
2829.Na kevalaṃ gilānassa sīsapādūpadhānameva vaṭṭati, atha kho idampīti dassetumāha‘‘santharitvā’’tiādi.Upadhānāni santharitvāti bahū upadhānāni attharitvā.Tattha cāti tasmiṃ upadhānasanthare.Paccattharaṇakaṃ datvāti upari paccattharaṇakaṃ attharitvā.
2829.To show that not only a head pillow and foot pillow are allowable for the sick, but also this, he said ‘‘santharitvā’’tiādi: "Having spread," etc. Upadhānāni santharitvāti: Having spread out many pillows. Tattha cāti: And on that spread of pillows. Paccattharaṇakaṃ datvāti: Having spread a top sheet on top.
2830.Tiriyanti vitthārato.Muṭṭhiratananti pākatikamuṭṭhikaratanaṃ. Taṃ pana vaḍḍhakīnaṃ vidatthimattaṃ.Mitanti pākaṭitaṃ pamāṇayuttaṃ hotīti yojanā. Katthaci potthakesu‘‘mata’’nti pāṭho dissati, so na gahetabbo.Dīghatoti bimbohanassa dīghato.Diyaḍḍhanti diyaḍḍhahatthaṃ vā dvihatthaṃ vā hotītikurundiyaṃvuttanti sambandho. Idameva hi ‘‘sīsappamāṇabimbohana’’nti adhippetaṃ. Yathāha –
2830.Tiriyanti: In width. Muṭṭhiratananti: The natural fist measurement. That is approximately a vidatthi (hand-span) for carpenters. Mitanti: It should be measured, of standard size, is the construction. In some books, the reading ‘‘mata’’nti is seen, but that should not be taken. Dīghatoti: In length of the headrest. Diyaḍḍhanti: It should be one and a half or two cubits, the connection is that it was said kurundiyaṃ. This indeed is what is meant by "head-size headrest." As it was said:
kurundiyaṃvuttaṃ. Ayaṃ sīsappamāṇassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedo, ito uddhaṃ na vaṭṭati, heṭṭhā pana vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297).
it was said kurundiyaṃ. This is the maximum limit for the head size; it is not allowable above this, but it is allowable below" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297).
2831.Coḷanti pilotikā.Paṇṇanti rukkhalatānaṃ paṇṇaṃ.Uṇṇāti eḷakādīnaṃ lomaṃ.Tiṇanti dabbatiṇādi yaṃ kiñci tiṇaṃ.Vākanti kadaliakkamakacivākādikaṃ. Etehi pañcahi pūritā bhisiyotūlānaṃ gaṇanāvasāhetugabbhānaṃ etesaṃ pañcannaṃ gabbhānaṃ gaṇanāvasena pañca bhāsitāti yojanā.
2831.Coḷanti: Rags. Paṇṇanti: Leaves of trees and vines. Uṇṇāti: Wool of sheep, etc. Tiṇanti: Any kind of grass such as dabba grass. Vākanti: Bark of trees such as banana, akkamakaca, and civāka. tūlānaṃ gaṇanāvasāhetugabbhānaṃ etesaṃ pañcannaṃ gabbhānaṃ gaṇanāvasena pañca bhāsitāti yojanā: The five fillings for cushions with these five fillings are spoken of on the basis of the enumeration of these five fillings, is the construction.
2832.Bimbohanagabbhaṃ dassetumāha‘‘bhisī’’tiādi.Pañcevāti yathāvuttacoḷādipañceva.Tathā tūlāni tīṇipīti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tīṇi tūlāni rukkhatūlaṃ latātūlaṃ poṭakitūla’’nti (cūḷava. 297) anuññātāni tīṇipi tūlāni. Ettha carukkhatūlaṃnāma simbalirukkhādīnaṃ yesaṃ kesañci rukkhānaṃ tūlaṃ.Latātūlaṃnāma khīravalliādīnaṃ yāsaṃ kāsañci vallīnaṃ tūlaṃ.Poṭakitūlaṃnāma poṭakitiṇādīnaṃ yesaṃ kesañci tiṇajātikānaṃ antamaso ucchunaḷādīnampi tūlaṃ.Lomāni migapakkhīnanti sīhādicatuppadānaṃ, morādipakkhīnaṃ lomāni.Imeti bhisigabbhādayo ime dasa bimbohanassa gabbhāti sambandho.
2832.To show the filling of the headrest, he said ‘‘bhisī’’tiādi: "Cushion," etc. Pañcevāti: Only the five as described, rags, etc. Tathā tūlāni tīṇipīti: Also the three kinds of cotton allowed, "I allow, bhikkhus, three kinds of cotton: tree cotton, vine cotton, and reed cotton" (cūḷava. 297). Here, rukkhatūlaṃnāma: Tree cotton means cotton from any tree, such as the silk-cotton tree. Latātūlaṃnāma: Vine cotton means cotton from any vine, such as the khīravalli vine. Poṭakitūlaṃnāma: Reed cotton means cotton from any reed, even sugar cane and reeds. Lomāni migapakkhīnanti: Hair from four-legged animals such as lions, and feathers from birds such as peacocks. Imeti: These, the fillings of cushions, etc., these ten are the fillings for a headrest, is the connection.
2833.Evaṃ kappiyaṃ bhisibimbohanagabbhaṃ dassetvā idāni akappiyaṃ dassetumāha‘‘manussaloma’’ntiādi. Lomesu manussalomañca pupphesu bakulapiyaṅgupupphādikaṃ sabbaṃ pupphañca paṇṇesu casuddhaṃkevalaṃ tamālapattañca na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.‘‘Suddha’’nti iminā tamālapattaṃ sesagabbhehi missaṃ vaṭṭatīti byatirekato dīpeti.
2833.Having shown the allowable filling for cushions and headrests in this way, now to show the unallowable, he said ‘‘manussaloma’’ntiādi: "Human hair," etc. Among hairs, human hair, and among flowers, all flowers such as bakula and piyaṅgu flowers, and among leaves, suddhaṃ, only tamāla leaves, are not allowable, is the construction. With this "only," he indicates indirectly that tamāla leaves are allowable mixed with other fillings.
2834.Masūraketi cammachavibhisibimbohane.
2834.Masūraketi: In coverings for leather or cushions.
2835.‘‘Suddha’’nti iminā byatirekato dassitamevatthaṃ sarūpato vibhāvetumāha‘‘missa’’ntiādi.
2835.To explain in essence what was shown indirectly with "only," he said ‘‘missa’’ntiādi: "Mixed," etc.
2836.Tiracchānagatassa vāti antamaso gaṇḍuppādassāpi.Kārentassāti cittakammakaṭṭhakammādivasena kārāpentassa vā karontassa vā.
2836.Tiracchānagatassa vāti: Even of an earthworm. Kārentassāti: For one who causes it to be made with painting, carpentry, etc., or for one who makes it.
2837.Jātakanti apaṇṇakajātakādijātakañca.Vatthunti vimānavatthuādikaṃ pasādajanakaṃ vā petavatthuādikaṃ saṃvegajanakaṃ vā vatthuṃ.Vā-saddenaaṭṭhakathāgataṃidha dassitapakaraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Parehi vāti etthavā-saddo avadhāraṇe, tena parehi kārāpetumeva vaṭṭati, na sayaṃ kātunti dīpeti.Sayaṃ kātumpīti etthaapi-saddo pageva kārāpetunti dīpeti.
2837. Jātaka: means the Jātaka collection, beginning with the Apaṇṇaka Jātaka. Vatthu: means a story, such as the Vimānavatthu, which generates joy, or the Petavatthu, which generates a sense of urgency. The word "vā" includes the Aṭṭhakathā-derived material, the cases illustrated here. Parehi vā: Here, the word "vā" is for emphasis, indicating that it is only appropriate to have it done by others, not to do it oneself. Sayaṃ kātumpī: Here, the word "api" indicates that it's even more important to have it done by others.
2838.Yo panabhikkhu dvīhi vassehi vā ekena vā vassena yassa bhikkhuno vuḍḍhataro vā hoti daharataro vā, so tena bhikkhunā samānāsaniko nāma hotīti yojanā.
2838. Yo pana bhikkhu dvīhi vassehi vā ekena vā vassena yassa bhikkhuno vuḍḍhataro vā hoti daharataro vā, so tena bhikkhunā samānāsaniko nāma hotīti yojanā: The meaning is: "Any bhikkhu who is senior or junior to another bhikkhu by two years or one year is considered to be of equal standing (samānāsaniko) with that bhikkhu."
2839.‘‘Sattavassena pañcavasso’’ti idaṃ dvīhi vassehi vuḍḍhanavakānaṃ samānāsanikatte udāharaṇaṃ.‘‘Chavassena pañcavasso’’ti idaṃ ekavassena vuḍḍhanavakānaṃ samānāsanikatte udāharaṇaṃ.
2839. "Sattavassena pañcavasso"ti idaṃ dvīhi vassehi vuḍḍhanavakānaṃ samānāsanikatte udāharaṇaṃ.‘‘Chavassena pañcavasso’’ti idaṃ ekavassena vuḍḍhanavakānaṃ samānāsanikatte udāharaṇaṃ: “One who is seven years old compared to one who is five years old” – this is an example of equal standing for those senior or junior by two years. “One who is six years old compared to one who is five years old” – this is an example of equal standing for those senior or junior by one year.
2840.Yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ nisīdituṃ pahoti, taṃ heṭṭhā dīghāsanaṃ nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Samānāsanikā mañce nisīditvā mañcaṃ bhindiṃsu, pīṭhe nisīditvā pīṭhaṃ bhindiṃsū’’ti (cūḷava. 320) āropite vatthumhi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, duvaggassa mañcaṃ duvaggassa pīṭha’’nti (cūḷava. 320) anuññātattā‘‘dve’’ti samānāsanike dve sandhāya vuttaṃ.
2840. Yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ nisīdituṃ pahoti, taṃ heṭṭhā dīghāsanaṃ nāmāti yojanā: The meaning is: what is capable of seating three people is called a long seat (dīghāsana). Because in the incident where "monks sitting on a bench broke the bench, and sitting on a stool broke the stool" (cūḷava. 320) was brought up, "I allow, monks, a bench for two, a stool for two" (cūḷava. 320) was allowed, "dve" refers to two equal-status persons.
2841.Ubhatobyañjanaṃ, itthiṃ, paṇḍakaṃ ṭhapetvāsabbehipigahaṭṭhehi, pabbajitehi vā purisehi saha dīghāsane nisīdituṃ anuññātanti yojanā. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘sabbesa’’nti sāmivacananto pāṭho dissati, tato‘‘sabbehipī’’ti karaṇavacanantova pāṭho yuttataro. Karaṇavacanappasaṅge vā sāmivacananiddesoti veditabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pahoti, taṃ saṃhārimaṃ vā hotu asaṃhārimaṃ vā, tathārūpe api phalakakhaṇḍe anupasampannenāpi saddhiṃ nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320).
2841. Ubhatobyañjanaṃ, itthiṃ, paṇḍakaṃ ṭhapetvāsabbehipigahaṭṭhehi, pabbajitehi vā purisehi saha dīghāsane nisīdituṃ anuññātanti yojanā: It is allowable to sit on a long seat with all men, whether householders or renunciates, except for hermaphrodites, women and eunuchs. However, in some books, the reading "sabbesa" in the genitive case is seen; therefore, the reading "sabbehipī" in the instrumental case is more appropriate. Or, it should be understood that the genitive case is indicated in the context of the instrumental case. As it was said, "Whatever is enough for three, whether it is joined or not joined, it is allowable to sit on a piece of wood of that sort even with one who is not ordained" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320).
2842.Purimikoti ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya sammatena ‘‘na chandāgatiṃ gaccheyya…pe… gahitāgahitañca jāneyyā’’ti (cūḷava. 317) vuttehi pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā purimavassūpanāyikadivase ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū gaṇetuṃ, paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū gaṇetvā seyyā gaṇetuṃ, seyyā gaṇetvā seyyaggena gāhetu’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 318) nayena anuññātaniyāmeneva senāsanaggāhāpanaṃ purimiko nāma senāsanaggāho. Evameva pacchimikāya vassūpanāyikadivase senāsanaggāhāpanaṃpacchimikonāma. Evameva mahāpavāraṇādivasassa anantaradivase ‘‘bhante, antarāmuttakaṃ senāsanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā senāsanaggāhāpanaṃantarāmuttakonāma.Pakāsito‘‘aparajjugatāya āsāḷhiyāpurimiko gāhāpetabbo, māsagatāya āsāḷhiyā pacchimiko gāhetabbo, aparajjugatāya pavāraṇāya āyatiṃ vassāvāsatthāya antarāmuttako gāhetabbo’’ti (cūḷava. 318) vutto.
2842. Purimiko: means the allocation of dwelling places (senāsana) according to the rule that was approved with a formal motion and a second announcement, by a monk who is endowed with the five qualities stated as "should not follow the path of desire… and should know what has been taken and what has not been taken" (cūḷava. 317), on the first day of entering the rains period (vassūpanāyika), following the method allowed with "I allow, monks, first to count the monks, first to count the monks and then to count the lodgings, to have the lodgings assigned according to seniority," and so on (cūḷava. 318). In the same way, the allocation of dwelling places on the last day of entering the rains period is called pacchimiko. Similarly, on the day immediately following the Mahāpavāraṇā day, the allocation of dwelling places according to seniority, after saying, "Bhante, please take the interim dwelling places," is called antarāmuttako. Pakāsito: it was said "The allocation before the full moon should be done by the preliminary allocator, the allocation after the full moon should be done by the subsequent allocator, the interim allocation should be done after the Pavāraṇā for the purpose of dwelling during the rains in the future" (cūḷava. 318).
2843.Vuttamevatthaṃ niyametvā dassetumāha‘‘pubbāruṇā’’tiādi. Idhapāṭipadānāma dve vassūpanāyikadivasā ceva mahāpavāraṇāya anantaradivaso ca. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pāṭipadadivasānaṃ aruṇopubbāruṇonāma. Te divase atikkamma dutiyatithipaṭibaddho aruṇopunāruṇonāma.Idanti ubhayāruṇānantaraṃ.Senāsanagāhakassāti ettha sakatthe ka-paccayo, senāsanaggāhassāti attho. Yathāha – ‘‘idañhi senāsanaggāhassa khetta’’nti.Vassūpagatevassūpagame kātabbe sati, sādhetabbapayojane bhummaṃ.Vassūpagateti vā nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Purimikāya, hi pacchimikāya ca vassūpagamanassa taṃ tadahu senāsanaggāho nimittaṃ, antarāmuttako pana āgamino vassūpagamanassāti evaṃ tividhopi senāsanaggāho vassūpagamanassa nimittaṃ hoti.
2843. Vuttamevatthaṃ niyametvā dassetumāha‘‘pubbāruṇā’’tiādi: To show the meaning that was stated with certainty, he says, "pubbāruṇā," etc. Here, pāṭipadā means the two days for entering the rains retreat and the day after the Mahāpavāraṇā. The dawn of these three pāṭipadā days is called pubbāruṇo. The dawn that occurs after those days, tied to the second lunar day, is called punāruṇo. Idaṃ: means after both dawns. Senāsanagāhakassā: Here, the suffix "ka" is used in the sense of self, meaning "of the dwelling place allocator." As it was said, "This indeed is the responsibility of the dwelling place allocator." Vassūpagate: means, "when it is time to enter the rains retreat," an ablative absolute expressing the purpose to be accomplished. Or Vassūpagate is an ablative absolute expressing the cause. For the preliminary and subsequent entering of the rains retreat, the dwelling allocation is the cause for that particular day, but the interim allocation is the cause for the coming entering of the rains retreat, thus, all three kinds of dwelling allocations are the cause for entering the rains retreat.
2844.Pāṭipadadivasassa aruṇe uggateyeva senāsane pana gāhite añño bhikkhu āgantvā sace senāsanapaññāpakaṃ senāsanaṃyācati,so bhikkhu senāsanapaññāpakena ‘‘senāsanaṃ gāhita’’nti vattabboti yojanā.
2844. Pāṭipadadivasassa aruṇe uggateyeva senāsane pana gāhite añño bhikkhu āgantvā sace senāsanapaññāpakaṃ senāsanaṃyācati,so bhikkhu senāsanapaññāpakena ‘‘senāsanaṃ gāhita’’nti чтоб обязанности yojanā: If, after the dawn of the Pāṭipadā day, and the dwelling has been allocated, another bhikkhu comes and requests a dwelling from the dwelling-place assigner, that bhikkhu should be told by the dwelling-place assigner, "The dwelling has been allocated."
2845.Vassāvāsassa idaṃvassāvāsikaṃ,vassaṃvutthānaṃ dātabbacīvaraṃ, gāthābandhavasena ‘‘vassavāsika’’nti rassattaṃ. Saṅghikaṃ apaloketvā gahitaṃvassāvāsikaṃcīvaraṃ sacetatrajaṃtatruppādaṃ hoti, antovasse vibbhantopi labhateti yojanā.‘‘Tatrajaṃ sace’’ti iminā cassa dāyakānaṃ vassāvāsikapaccayavasena gāhitaṃ pana na labhatīti dīpeti. Yathāha – ‘‘paccayavasena gāhitaṃ pana na labhatīti vadantī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 318).
2845. Vassāvāsassa idaṃvassāvāsikaṃ,vassaṃvutthānaṃ dātabbacīvaraṃ, gāthābandhavasena ‘‘vassavāsika’’nti rassattaṃ: That which belongs to the rains-residence is vassāvāsikaṃ, the robe to be given to those who have resided during the rains; due to metrical requirements in verse, it is shortened to "vassavāsika." Saṅghikaṃ apaloketvā gahitaṃvassāvāsikaṃcīvaraṃ sacetatrajaṃtatruppādaṃ hoti, antovasse vibbhantopi labhateti yojanā: If the vassāvāsikaṃ robe, which was taken after seeking the Community's approval, is tatrajaṃ, produced there, even if one becomes disturbed during the rains retreat, he can obtain it. ‘‘Tatrajaṃ sace’’ti iminā cassa dāyakānaṃ vassāvāsikapaccayavasena gāhitaṃ pana na labhatīti dīpeti: By this "Tatrajaṃ sace" it shows that what is taken from donors on account of the conditions of the rains-residence, one cannot obtain. As it was said, "But they say that what is taken on account of conditions, one cannot obtain" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 318).
2846-8.Sace vutthavasso yo bhikkhu āvāsikahatthato kiñci ticīvarādikaṃkappiyabhaṇḍaṃattano gahetvā ‘‘asukasmiṃ kule mayhaṃ gahitaṃ vassāvāsikacīvaraṃ gaṇha’’ iti evaṃ vatvātassaāvāsikassa datvā disaṃgacchatipakkamati, so tattha gataṭṭhāne saceuppabbajatigihī hoti,tassadisaṃgatassa sampattaṃtaṃvassāvāsikaṃ tena tathā dinnampi āvāsiko bhikkhugahetuṃ na labhati,tassa pāpitaṃ vassāvāsikacīvaraṃsaṅghikaṃyevasiyāti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, vassaṃvuttho bhikkhu vibbhamati, saṅghasseveta’’nti.
2846-8.Sace vutthavasso yo bhikkhu āvāsikahatthato kiñci ticīvarādikaṃkappiyabhaṇḍaṃattano gahetvā ‘‘asukasmiṃ kule mayhaṃ gahitaṃ vassāvāsikacīvaraṃ gaṇha’’ iti evaṃ vatvātassaāvāsikassa datvā disaṃgacchatipakkamati, so tattha gataṭṭhāne saceuppabbajatigihī hoti,tassadisaṃgatassa sampattaṃtaṃvassāvāsikaṃ tena tathā dinnampi āvāsiko bhikkhugahetuṃ na labhati,tassa pāpitaṃ vassāvāsikacīvaraṃsaṅghikaṃyevasiyāti yojanā: If a bhikkhu who has resided for the rains, takes some kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ (allowable goods), such as the three robes, from the hand of a resident monk (āvāsika), and says, "Take the vassāvāsika robe that I received in such-and-such family," and gives it to that resident monk, and then goes away to another district; if he disrobes and becomes a householder in the place he has gone to, that vassāvāsika robe that was given to him who went to another district, even though it was given in that way, the resident monk cannot receive; the vassāvāsika robe that was passed on to him belongs to the Saṅgha alone. As it was said, "Here, monks, a bhikkhu who has resided for the rains disrobes; this belongs to the Saṅgha."
2849.Tasmiṃ kule dāyakemanussesammukhā ce paṭicchāpeti, tassa disaṃgamissa sampattaṃ vassāvāsikacīvaraṃ āvāsiko labhatīti yojanā.
2849.Tasmiṃ kule dāyakemanussesammukhā ce paṭicchāpeti, tassa disaṃgamissa sampattaṃ vassāvāsikacīvaraṃ āvāsiko labhatīti yojanā: If he obtains the consent of the donor people in that family face to face, the resident monk can obtain the vassāvāsika robe that was given to the one who went to another district.
2850.Tatthaārāmonāma pupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā.Vihāronāma yaṃ kiñci pāsādādisenāsanaṃ.Vatthūni duvidhassapīti ārāmavatthu, vihāravatthūti duvidhassa vatthūni ca.Ārāmavatthunāma tesaṃyeva ārāmānaṃ atthāya paricchinditvā ṭhapitokāso, tesu vā ārāmesu vinaṭṭhesu tesaṃ porāṇakabhūmibhāgo.Vihāravatthunāma tassa patiṭṭhānokāso.Bhisināma uṇṇabhisiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ aññatarā.Bimbohanaṃnāma vuttappakārānaṃ bimbohanānaṃ aññataraṃ.Mañcaṃnāma masārako bundikābaddho, kuḷīrapādako, āhaccapādakoti imesaṃ pubbe vuttānaṃ catunnaṃ mañcānaṃ aññataraṃ.Pīṭhaṃnāma masārakādīnaṃyeva catunnaṃ pīṭhānaṃ aññataraṃ.
2850.Tatthaārāmonāma pupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā.Vihāronāma yaṃ kiñci pāsādādisenāsanaṃ.Vatthūni duvidhassapīti ārāmavatthu, vihāravatthūti duvidhassa vatthūni ca.Ārāmavatthunāma tesaṃyeva ārāmānaṃ atthāya paricchinditvā ṭhapitokāso, tesu vā ārāmesu vinaṭṭhesu tesaṃ porāṇakabhūmibhāgo.Vihāravatthunāma tassa patiṭṭhānokāso.Bhisināma uṇṇabhisiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ aññatarā.Bimbohanaṃnāma vuttappakārānaṃ bimbohanānaṃ aññataraṃ.Mañcaṃnāma masārako bundikābaddho, kuḷīrapādako, āhaccapādakoti imesaṃ pubbe vuttānaṃ catunnaṃ mañcānaṃ aññataraṃ.Pīṭhaṃnāma masārakādīnaṃyeva catunnaṃ pīṭhānaṃ aññataraṃ: Here, ārāmo means a flower garden or a fruit garden. Vihāro means any dwelling place such as a monastery. Vatthūni duvidhassapī means two kinds of property: ārāmavatthu (garden land) and vihāravatthu (monastery land). Ārāmavatthu means the space set aside for the sake of those gardens, or the old land area of those gardens when they have been destroyed. Vihāravatthu means the place of its foundation. Bhisi means any one of the five kinds of seat coverings, beginning with wool seat covering. Bimbohanaṃ means any one of the previously mentioned kinds of pillows. Mañcaṃ means any one of the four previously mentioned couches: the couch with interwoven cane, the couch with legs like a bunch of flowers, the couch with crab-like legs, or the couch with legs made by hammering. Pīṭhaṃ means any one of the four previously mentioned stools of the same types.
2851.Lohakumbhīnāma kāḷalohena vā tambalohena vā yena kenaci lohena katā kumbhī.Kaṭāhopākaṭova.‘‘Bhāṇaka’’nti alañjaro vuccati.Alañjaroti ca bahuudakagaṇhanikā mahācāṭi, jalaṃ gaṇhituṃ alanti alañjaro. ‘‘Vaṭṭacāṭi viya hutvā thokaṃ dīghamukho majjhe paricchedaṃ dassetvā kato’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.Vārakoti ghaṭo. Ku vuccati pathavī, tassā dālanato vidāraṇato‘‘kudālo’’ti ayomayaupakaraṇaviseso vuccati.
2851. Lohakumbhīnāma kāḷalohena vā tambalohena vā yena kenaci lohena katā kumbhī.Kaṭāhopākaṭova.‘‘Bhāṇaka’’nti alañjaro vuccati.Alañjaroti ca bahuudakagaṇhanikā mahācāṭi, jalaṃ gaṇhituṃ alanti alañjaro. ‘‘Vaṭṭacāṭi viya hutvā thokaṃ dīghamukho majjhe paricchedaṃ dassetvā kato’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.Vārakoti ghaṭo. Ku vuccati pathavī, tassā dālanato vidāraṇato‘‘kudālo’’ti ayomayaupakaraṇaviseso vuccati: Lohakumbhī means a pot made of black iron or copper or any kind of metal. Kaṭāho is well-known. "Bhāṇaka" means alañjaro. Alañjaro is a large pot that holds a lot of water; because it is sufficient (alaṃ) to hold water, it is called alañjaro. "Having been made like a round pot, with a slightly long mouth, showing a division in the middle" is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. Vārako means a water pot (ghaṭo). Ku means earth; because it cuts and splits it, "kudālo" is said to be a special kind of iron tool.
2852.Valliveḷuādīsuveḷūti mahāveṇu.Tiṇanti gehacchādanaṃ tiṇaṃ.Paṇṇaṃtālapaṇṇādikaṃ.Muñjanti muñjatiṇaṃ.Pabbajanti pabbajatiṇaṃ,mattikāpakatimattikā vā gerukādipañcavaṇṇā vā mattikā.Āha caaṭṭhakathācariyo.
2852. Valliveḷuādīsuveḷūti mahāveṇu.Tiṇanti gehacchādanaṃ tiṇaṃ.Paṇṇaṃtālapaṇṇādikaṃ.Muñjanti muñjatiṇaṃ.Pabbajanti pabbajatiṇaṃ,mattikāpakatimattikā vā gerukādipañcavaṇṇā vā mattikā.Āha caaṭṭhakathācariyo: Among valliveḷu and so on, veḷū means the great bamboo. Tiṇa means thatch. Paṇṇaṃ means leaves such as palm leaves. Muñja means muñja grass. Pabbaja means pabbaja grass. Mattikā means natural clay or clay of five colors such as red ochre. And the Aṭṭhakathā teacher said:
2853.Dveti paṭhamadutiyagarubhaṇḍāni.Dvīhi saṅgahitāni‘‘āromo, ārāmavatthu, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ. Vihāro, vihāravatthu, idaṃ dutiya’’nti (cūḷava. 321-322) vuttattā.Catusaṅgahanti catūhi bhisiādīhi saṅgaho yassāti viggaho.Navakoṭṭhāsanti lohakumbhiādayo nava koṭṭhāsā assāti viggaho.Aṭṭhadhāvalliādīhi aṭṭhahi pakārehi.
2853. Dveti paṭhamadutiyagarubhaṇḍāni.Dvīhi saṅgahitāni‘‘āromo, ārāmavatthu, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ. Vihāro, vihāravatthu, idaṃ dutiya’’nti (cūḷava. 321-322) vuttattā.Catusaṅgahanti catūhi bhisiādīhi saṅgaho yassāti viggaho.Navakoṭṭhāsanti lohakumbhiādayo nava koṭṭhāsā assāti viggaho.Aṭṭhadhāvalliādīhi aṭṭhahi pakārehi: Dve means the first and second heavy items. Dvīhi saṅgahitāni because it was said, "A garden, garden land, this is the first. A monastery, monastery land, this is the second" (cūḷava. 321-322). Catusaṅgaha means that which has a collection of four, beginning with seat coverings, is the resolution. Navakoṭṭhāsa means that which has nine sections beginning with the metal pot is the resolution. Aṭṭhadhā means in eight ways, beginning with creepers.
2854.Itīti nidassanatthe. Evaṃ vuttanayenapañcahi rāsīhiniddiṭṭhānaṃ garubhaṇḍagaṇanānaṃ piṇḍavasena pañcavīsatividhaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ pañcanimmalalocano nātho pakāsayīti yojanā. Pañca nimmalāni locanāni yassāti viggaho, maṃsadibbadhammabuddhasamantacakkhuvasena pañcavidhavippasannalocanoti attho.
2854. Itīti nidassanatthe. Evaṃ vuttanayenapañcahi rāsīhiniddiṭṭhānaṃ garubhaṇḍagaṇanānaṃ piṇḍavasena pañcavīsatividhaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ pañcanimmalalocano nātho pakāsayīti yojanā: Itī is in the sense of example. Thus, according to the method that was said, the lord with five pure eyes revealed twenty-five kinds of heavy items in summary form, of the heavy item enumerations indicated by five categories. Pañca nimmalāni locanāni yassāti viggaho, maṃsadibbadhammabuddhasamantacakkhuvasena pañcavidhavippasannalocanoti attho: The resolution is "he who has five pure eyes," meaning "he who has five kinds of very clear eyes, namely, eyes of flesh, divine eyes, eyes of Dhamma, eyes of wisdom and Buddha's all-seeing eye."
2855.Vissajjentoti issaravatāya parassa vissajjento.Vibhājentoti vassaggena pāpetvā vibhājento. Idañhi sabbampi garubhaṇḍaṃsenāsanakkhandhake(cūḷava. 321) ‘‘avissajjiyaṃ.Kiṭāgirivatthumhi(cūḷava. 322) avebhaṅgiya’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Ubhayattha āgatavohārabhedadassanamukhena tattha vippaṭipajjantassa āpattiṃ dassento āha‘‘bhikkhu thullaccayaṃ phuse’’ti.Parivārepana –
2855. Vissajjentoti issaravatāya parassa vissajjento.Vibhājentoti vassaggena pāpetvā vibhājento. Idañhi sabbampi garubhaṇḍaṃsenāsanakkhandhake(cūḷava. 321) ‘‘avissajjiyaṃ.Kiṭāgirivatthumhi(cūḷava. 322) avebhaṅgiya’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Ubhayattha āgatavohārabhedadassanamukhena tattha vippaṭipajjantassa āpattiṃ dassento āha‘‘bhikkhu thullaccayaṃ phuse’’ti.Parivārepana: Vissajjento means giving away to others as if being the owner. Vibhājento means distributing after receiving it by the year. Indeed, all of these heavy items are said to be "not to be given away" in the Senāsanakkhandhaka (cūḷava. 321) and "not to be divided" in the Kiṭāgirivatthu (cūḷava. 322). Showing the offense for one who acts contrary to this, by way of showing the difference in usage that has come in both places, he says, "bhikkhu thullaccayaṃ phuse." However, in the Parivāra:
Avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyaṃ, pañca vuttā mahesinā;
Avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyaṃ, pañca vuttā mahesinā;
Vissajjentassa paribhuñjantassa anāpatti;
Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitāti. (pari. 479) –
Āgataṃ. Tasmā mūlacchejjavasena avissajjiyaṃ, avebhaṅgiyañca, parivattanavasena pana vissajjentassa, paribhuñjantassa ca anāpattīti evamettha adhippāyo.
Āgataṃ: It has come down that "Not to be given away, not to be divided, five were said by the great sage; there is no offense for one who gives away or uses through transformation; this is a question pondered by the skilled."
2856.Bhikkhunāpuggalena vā saṅghena vā gaṇena vā garubhaṇḍaṃ tu vissajjitaṃ avissaṭṭhameva hoti, vibhattañca avibhājitameva hotīti yojanā.
2856.Bhikkhunā puggalena vā saṅghena vā gaṇena vā garubhaṇḍaṃ tu vissajjitaṃ avissaṭhameva hoti, vibhattañca avibhājitameva hotīti yojanā: Heavy goods, however, whether given away by a bhikkhu, an individual, the Saṅgha or a group, are in fact not given away; and what is divided is in fact not divided.
2857.Etthaetesu pañcasu garubhaṇḍesu purimesu tīsuagarubhaṇḍakaṃkiñci na ca atthīti yojanā. Catutthe pana garubhaṇḍeaṭṭhakathāya‘‘lohakumbhī, lohabhāṇakaṃ, lohakaṭāhanti imāni tīṇi mahantāni vā hontu khuddakāni vā, antamaso pasatamattaudakagaṇhanakānipi garubhaṇḍāniyevā’’ti vuttanayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘lohakumbhī’’tiādi.
2857. Etthaetesu pañcasu garubhaṇḍesu purimesu tīsuagarubhaṇḍakaṃkiñci na ca atthīti yojanā: Ettha, in these five heavy items, there is nothing that is a light item in the first three. However, in the fourth heavy item, to show the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā that "A metal pot, a metal drinking vessel, a metal bowl, whether these three are large or small, even if they hold only a pasata of water, they are heavy items," he says "lohakumbhī" etc.
2858.Idaṃ tividhanti sambandho.Pādagaṇhanakoti etthapādonāma magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷimattagaṇhanako bhājanaviseso. Bhājanānaṃ pamāṇaṃ karontā sīhaḷadīpe yebhuyyena teneva pādena minanti. Tasmāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sīhaḷadīpe pādagaṇhanako bhājetabbo’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) vuttaṃ.Lohavārakoti kāḷalohatambalohavaṭṭalohakaṃsalohānaṃ yena kenaci kato.Bhājiyoti bhājetabbo.
2858. Idaṃ tividhanti sambandho: This is connected with the three types. Pādagaṇhanako: Here, pādo means a special kind of container that holds five nāḷis in the measure of Magadha. When measuring the size of containers, they mostly measure with that pāda in Sri Lanka. Therefore, it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "In Sri Lanka, a container holding a pāda should be divided." Lohavārako means one made of black iron, copper, round iron, or bell metal. Bhājiyo means to be divided.
2859.Tato uddhanti tato pādagaṇhanakavārakato uddhaṃ adhikaṃ gaṇhanako. Evaṃ pāḷiāgatānaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetvāaṭṭhakathāgatānaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) dassetumāha‘‘bhiṅgārādīnī’’tiādi.Bhiṅgāronāma ukkhittahatthisoṇḍākārena katajalaniggamakaṇṇiko uccagīvo mahāmukhaudakabhājanaviseso.Ādi-saddenaaṭṭhakathāgatāni ‘‘paṭiggahauḷuṅkadabbikaṭacchupātitaṭṭakasarakasamuggaaṅgārakapalladhūmakaṭacchuādīni khuddakāni vā mahantāni vā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) vuttāni saṅgaṇhāti.Sabbānīti khuddakāni vā mahantāni vā.
2859. Tato uddhaṃ: means more than that, more than the container holding a pāda. After showing the decision of what has come in the Pāḷi, to show what has come in the Aṭṭhakathā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321), he says "bhiṅgārādīnī" etc. Bhiṅgāro means a special kind of water container with a high neck and a large mouth, with a water outlet shaped like an elephant's trunk raised up. The word Ādi includes those stated in the Aṭṭhakathā as "a bowl, a trough, a ladle, a spoon, a plate, a shard, a casket, an ember-shovel, and a smoke-ladle, whether small or large" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321). Sabbānī means all, whether small or large.
2860.Tambathālakā ayathālakā bhājetabbāti yojanā.Ca-saddenaaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā pana bhājanavikatiṃ aññasmimpi kappiyalohabhaṇḍe añjanī añjanisalākā kaṇṇamalaharaṇī sūci paṇṇasūci khuddako pipphalako khuddakaṃ ārakaṇṭakaṃ kuñcikā tāḷaṃ kattarayaṭṭhivedhako natthudānaṃ bhindivālo lohakūṭo lohakuṭṭi lohaguḷo lohapiṇḍi lohaaraṇī cakkalikaṃ aññampi vippakataṃ lohabhaṇḍaṃ bhājiya’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) vacanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Dhūmanettanti dhūmanāḷikā.Ādi-saddena ‘‘phāladīparukkhadīpakapallakaolambakadīpakaitthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni pana aññāni vā bhitticchadanakavāṭādīsu upanetabbāni antamaso lohakhilakaṃ upādāya sabbāni lohabhaṇḍāni garubhaṇḍāniyeva hontī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) vuttaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
2860. Tambathālakā and ayathālakā should be divided, is the meaning. The word ca includes the statement in the Aṭṭhakathā: "But excluding vessel modifications, other suitable iron implements like añjanī, añjanisalākā, kaṇṇamalaharaṇī, sūci, paṇṇasūci, khuddako pipphalako, khuddakaṃ ārakaṇṭakaṃ, kuñcikā, tāḷaṃ, kattarayaṭṭhivedhako, natthudānaṃ, bhindivālo, lohakūṭo, lohakuṭṭi, lohaguḷo, lohapiṇḍi, lohaaraṇī, cakkalikaṃ, and other diverse iron implements are divisible" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321). Dhūmanetta means a smoking pipe. The word ādi includes the statement: "But other items that can be placed on walls, roofs, doors, etc., such as phāladīpa, rukkhadīpa, kapallakaolambakadīpa, and forms representing women, men, or animals, and all iron implements including even an iron peg, are indeed heavy items" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321).
2861.Attanā paṭiladdhanti ettha pi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, attanā paṭiladdhampīti attho. Bhikkhunā attanā paṭiladdhampi taṃ lohabhaṇḍaṃ kiñcipi puggalikaparibhogena na bhuñjitabbanti yojanā.
2861.Attanā paṭiladdhaṃ: Here, the pi-sound is omitted, implying attanā paṭiladdhampi, meaning even if obtained by oneself. The meaning is that a bhikkhu should not use such iron implements, even if obtained by himself, for personal use.
2862.Kaṃsavaṭṭalohānaṃ vikārabhūtāni tambamayabhājanānipipuggalikaparibhogena sabbaso paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭantīti yojanā.
2862.Utensils made of copper, which are modifications of bronze and iron, are entirely unsuitable for personal use.
2863.Eseva nayoti ‘‘na puggalikabhogenā’’tiādinā dassitanayo. Saṅghikesu vāgihīnaṃ santakesu vāyathāvuttabhaṇḍesu paribhogapaccayādoso na atthīti yojanā. ‘‘Kaṃsalohādibhājanaṃ saṅghassa dinnampi pārihāriyaṃ na vaṭṭati, gihivikatanīhāreneva paribhuñjitabba’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)mahāpaccariyaṃvuttaṃ. Ettha capārihāriyaṃ na vaṭṭatiattano santakaṃ viya gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti.‘‘Gihivikatanīhārenevaparibhuñjitabba’’nti iminā sace ārāmikādayo paṭisāmetvā paṭidenti, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti.
2863.Eseva nayo: This is the method shown by "na puggalikabhogenā," etc. There is no fault regarding the use of appropriately mentioned items that are Saṅghika or belong to laypeople. In the Mahāpaccariyaṃ it is stated: "Even if a bronze or iron vessel is given to the Saṅgha, it is not pārihāriya; it should be used in the manner of laypeople's disposal" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321). Here, pārihāriyaṃ na vaṭṭati means it is not suitable to use it by taking it as one's own property. By "Gihivikatanīhāreneva paribhuñjitabba" it indicates that if ārāmikas, etc., return it after use, it is suitable to use.
2864.Khīrapāsāṇanti mudukā pāṇajāti. Vuttañhi mātikāṭṭhakathāgaṇṭhipade‘‘khīrapāsāṇo nāma muduko pāsāṇo’’ti.Garukanti garubhaṇḍaṃ.Taṭṭakādikantiādi-saddena sarakādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Ghaṭakoti khīrapāsāṇamayoyeva vārako.‘‘Pādagaṇhanato uddha’’nti iminā pādagaṇhanako agarubhaṇḍanti dīpeti.
2864.Khīrapāsāṇa means a soft animal species. Indeed, in the Gaṇṭhipada of the Mātikāṭṭhakathā, it is said: "Khīrapāsāṇa means soft stone." Garuka means a heavy item. Taṭṭakādika: The word ādi includes items like sarakā. Ghaṭako means a vārako made of khīrapāsāṇa itself. "Pādagaṇhanato uddha" indicates that a pādagaṇhanaka is not a heavy item.
2865.‘‘Suvaṇṇarajatahārakūṭajātiphalikabhājanāni gihivikatānipi na vaṭṭanti, pageva saṅghikaparibhogena vā puggalikaparibhogena vā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘siṅgī’’tiādi.Siṅgīti suvaṇṇaṃ.Sajjhurajataṃ.Hārakūṭaṃnāma suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ lohajātaṃ. Phalikena ubbhavaṃ jātaṃ, phalikamayaṃ bhājananti attho.Gihīnaṃ santakānipītiapi-saddena gihivikataparibhogenāpi tāva na vaṭṭanti, pageva saṅghikaparibhogena vā puggalikaparibhogena vāti dīpeti. Senāsanaparibhoge pana āmāsampi anāmāsampi sabbaṃ vaṭṭati.
2865.To show the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Vessels made of gold, silver, hārakūṭa, jātiphalika, even those disposed of by laypeople, are not suitable, let alone for Saṅghika or personal use" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321), he says "siṅgī" etc. Siṅgī means gold. Sajjhu means silver. Hārakūṭaṃ is a kind of metal with a golden color. Born or originated from crystal, meaning a vessel made of crystal. Gihīnaṃ santakānipī: The word api indicates that it is not suitable even for use disposed of by laypeople, let alone for Saṅghika or personal use. However, everything is suitable for use in senāsana, whether āmāsa or anāmāsa.
2866.Khuddāti yāya vāsiyā ṭhapetvā dantakaṭṭhacchedanaṃ vā ucchutacchanaṃ vā aññaṃ mahākammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, evarūpā khuddakā vāsi bhājanīyā.Mahattarīti yathāvuttappamāṇāya vāsiyā mahantatarā yena kenaci ākārena katavāsi garubhaṇḍaṃ. Vejjānaṃ sirāvedhanakampi ca pharasu tathā garubhaṇḍanti yojanā.
2866.Khuddā: A small adze with which it is not possible to cut toothpicks, peel sugar cane, or do other major work, such a small adze is a bhājanīya item. Mahattarī: A larger adze than the size mentioned above, an adze made in any form, is a garubhaṇḍa. Also, a surgeon's vein-cutting tool and a hatchet are similarly garubhaṇḍa.
2867.Kuṭhārīti ettha pharasusadisova vinicchayo. Yā pana āvudhasaṅkhepena katā, ayaṃ anāmāsā.Kudāloantamaso caturaṅgulamattopi.Sikharanti dhanurajjuto nāmetvā dāruādīnaṃ vijjhanakakaṇṭako.Tenevāti nikhādaneneva.
2867.Kuṭhārī: Here, the judgment is similar to that of a hatchet. However, one made as a weapon is anāmāsa. Kudālo even if it is only four aṅgulas in size. Sikhara means a spike for piercing wood etc., after bending a bowstring. Tenevā means by that piercing itself.
2868.Nikhādanassa bhedavantatāya taṃ vibhajitvā dassetumāha‘‘caturassamukhaṃ doṇimukha’’nti.Doṇimukhanti doṇi viya ubhayapassena nāmitamukhaṃ.Vaṅkanti aggato nāmetvā katanikhādanaṃ.Pi-saddena ujukaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tattha cāti tasmiṃ nikhādane. Sadaṇḍaṃ khuddakañca nikhādanaṃ sabbaṃ garubhaṇḍanti yojanā.‘‘Sadaṇḍaṃ khuddaka’’nti iminā visesanadvayena adaṇḍaṃ phalamattaṃ sipāṭikāya ṭhapetvā pariharaṇayoggaṃ sammajjanidaṇḍavedhanakaṃ nikhādanaṃ agarubhaṇḍaṃ, tato mahantaṃ nikhādanaṃ adaṇḍampi garubhaṇḍanti dīpeti. Yehi manussehi vihāre vāsiādīni dinnāni ca honti, te ce ghare daḍḍhe vā corehi vā vilutte ‘‘detha no, bhante, upakaraṇe puna pākatike karissāmā’’ti vadanti, dātabbā. Sace āharanti, na vāretabbā, anāharantāpi na codetabbā.
2868.Because of the variety of piercing tools, to show them divided, he says "caturassamukhaṃ doṇimukhaṃ." Doṇimukhaṃ means a mouth bent on both sides like a trough. Vaṅka means a piercing tool made by bending at the tip. The word pi includes the straight one. Tattha cā: In that piercing tool. A small piercing tool with a handle is all garubhaṇḍa. By the two qualifications "sadaṇḍaṃ khuddakaṃ" it indicates that a piercing tool without a handle, only the blade, suitable for keeping in a sipāṭikā and using as a broom handle, is not a heavy item; a piercing tool larger than that, even without a handle, is a heavy item. If people who have donated adzes etc. to the monastery say, "Give us the tools, venerable ones, we will make them like before" when their house is burned or looted by thieves, they should be given. If they bring them back, they should not be prevented; even if they do not bring them back, they should not be urged.
2869.‘‘Kammārataṭṭakāracundakāranaḷakāramaṇikārapattabandhakānaṃ adhikaraṇimuṭṭhikasaṇḍāsatulādīni sabbāni lohamayaupakaraṇāni saṅghe dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍāni. Tipukoṭṭakasuvaṇṇakāracammakāraupakaraṇesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tipukoṭṭakaupakaraṇesupi tipucchedanasatthakaṃ, suvaṇṇakāraupakaraṇesu suvaṇṇacchedanasatthakaṃ, cammakāraupakaraṇesu kataparikammacammachindanakaṃ khuddakasatthanti imāni bhājanīyabhaṇḍānī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)aṭṭhakathāgataṃvinicchayekadesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘muṭṭhika’’ntiādi.Tulādikanti etthaādi-saddena kattariādiupakaraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
2869.To show a part of the judgment from the Aṭṭhakathā: "All iron implements of carpenters, tṭaṭṭakāras, cundakāras, naḷakāras, maṇikāras, and pattabandhakas, such as adhikaraṇi, muṭṭhika, saṇḍāsa, and tulā, are garubhaṇḍa from the time they are given to the Saṅgha. The same method applies to the implements of tipukoṭṭakas, goldsmiths, and leather workers. But this is the distinction: among the implements of tipukoṭṭakas, the knife for cutting tips; among the implements of goldsmiths, the knife for cutting gold; and among the implements of leather workers, the small knife for cutting leather that has been processed—these are bhājanīya items" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321), he says "muṭṭhika" etc. Tulādika: Here, the word ādi includes implements like scissors.
2870.‘‘Nahāpitatunnakārānaṃ upakaraṇesupi ṭhapetvā mahākattariṃ, mahāsaṇḍāsaṃ, mahāpipphalakañca sabbaṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Mahākattariādīni garubhaṇḍānī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)aṭṭhakathāgataṃvinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘nhāpitakassā’’tiādi. Nhāpitakassa upakaraṇesu saṇḍāso, mahattarī kattarī ca tunnakārānañca upakaraṇesu mahattarī kattarī ca mahāpipphalakañca garubhaṇḍakanti yojanā.
2870.To show the judgment from the Aṭṭhakathā: "Among the implements of barbers and tailors, except for the large scissors, large tongs, and large pipphalaka, everything is bhājanīya. The large scissors etc. are garubhaṇḍa" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321), he says "nhāpitakassā" etc. Among the implements of barbers, tongs and large scissors; and among the implements of tailors, large scissors and large pipphalaka are garubhaṇḍa.
2871.Ettāvatā catutthagarubhaṇḍe vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni pañcamagarubhaṇḍe vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vallī’’tiādi. Vettalatādikāvallidullabhaṭṭhāne saṅghassa dinnā vātatthasaṅghassa bhūmiyaṃ jātā,rakkhitāgopitā vā aḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Aḍḍhabāhūti kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva aṃsakūṭa’’ntigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ. ‘‘Aḍḍhabāhu nāma vidatthicaturaṅgula’’ntipi vadanti. Sace sā valli saṅghakamme, cetiyakamme ca kate atirekā hoti, puggalikakammepi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Arakkhitā pana garubhaṇḍameva na hoti.
2871.Having shown the judgment on the fourth garubhaṇḍa, he now shows the judgment on the fifth garubhaṇḍa, saying "vallī" etc. A creeper, such as a rattan or lata, given to the Saṅgha in a difficult place or growing there in the Saṅgha's land, or protected, is a garubhaṇḍa if it is half a bāhu in size. In the Gaṇṭhipada it is said: "Aḍḍhabāhu is from the elbow to the shoulder joint." Some say, "Aḍḍhabāhu means twelve aṅgulas." If that creeper is extra after a Saṅghakamma or cetiyakamma is done, it is suitable to use in a personal kamma. But an unprotected one is never a garubhaṇḍa.
2872.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘suttamakacivākanāḷikerahīracammamayā rajjukā vā yottāni vā vāke ca nāḷikerahīre ca vaṭṭetvā katā ekavaṭṭā vā dvivaṭṭā vā saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ. Suttaṃ pana avaṭṭetvā dinnaṃ, makacivākanāḷikerahīrā ca bhājanīyā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) āgatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘suttavākādinibbattā’’tiādi.Vākādītiādi-saddena makacivākanāḷikerahīracammānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Nātidīghārajjukā. Atidīghaṃyottakaṃ.
2872.To show the judgment that comes in the Aṭṭhakathā: "Ropes or straps made of thread, makacivāka, nāḷikera, hīra, or leather; or single or double strands made by twisting vāka with nāḷikera and hīra are garubhaṇḍa from the time they are given to the Saṅgha. However, thread given without twisting, and makacivāka, nāḷikera, and hīra are bhājanīya" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321), he says "suttavākādinibbattā" etc. Vākādī: The word ādi includes makacivāka, nāḷikera, hīra, and leather. Rajjukā not too long. Yottakaṃ very long.
2873.Nāḷikerassa hīre vā makacivāke vāvaṭṭetvā katā ekavaṭṭāpi garubhaṇḍakanti yojanā. Yehi panetāni rajjukayottādīni dinnāni honti, te attano karaṇīyena harantā na vāretabbā.
2873.Even a single strand made by twisting the hīra or makaci vāke vā of a nāḷikera is a garubhaṇḍa. However, people who have given these rajjuka, yotta, etc., should not be prevented from taking them for their own use.
2874.Vaḍḍhakiaṅgulenaaṭṭhaṅgulāyato sūcidaṇḍamattopariṇāhato sīhaḷadīpe lekhakānaṃ lekhanisūcidaṇḍamatto saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vārakkhitogopito veḷu garubhaṇḍaṃ siyāti yojanā. ‘‘Yaṃ majjhimapurisassa kaniṭṭhaṅguliyā aggappamāṇaṃ, idaṃ sīhaḷadīpe lekhakānaṃ lekhanisūciyā pamāṇa’’nti vadanti. So ca saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atireko puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati.
2874.A bamboo that is eight aṅgulas long according to the vaḍḍhakiaṅgula, about the size of a writing stylus for writers in Sri Lanka, given to the Saṅgha or grown there, or protected, is a garubhaṇḍa. Some say, "The size of the tip of the middle person's little finger is the size of a writing stylus for writers in Sri Lanka." If it is extra after a Saṅghakamma or cetiyakamma is done, it is suitable to give for a personal kamma.
2875.Daṇḍo ca salākā cadaṇḍasalākā,chattassa daṇḍasalākāti viggaho.Chattadaṇḍonāma chattapiṇḍi.Chattasalākāti chattapañjarasalākā.Daṇḍoti upāhanadaṇḍako.‘‘Daṇḍo’’ti sāmaññena vuttepi aṭṭhakathāgatesu sarūpena idhāvutto upāhanadaṇḍoyeva sāmaññavacanena pārisesato gahetabboti. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gaṇhitvā gacchantā na vāretabbā.
2875.Daṇḍo ca salākā ca is daṇḍasalākā, chattassa daṇḍasalākāti is the analysis. Chattadaṇḍo means the handle of an umbrella. Chattasalākā means the ribs of an umbrella. Daṇḍo means the handle of a shoe. Even when "Daṇḍo" is said generally, the shoe handle mentioned in the Aṭṭhakathā by its form is to be taken here as referred to, by the generality of the word pārisesato. People whose houses have burned should not be prevented from taking them as they go.
2876.Muñjādīsugehacchadanārahesu tiṇesu yaṃ kiñcimuṭṭhimattaṃtiṇaṃ vā gehacchadanārahaṃtālapaṇṇādiekampi saṅghassa dinnaṃ vātatthasaṅghikabhūmiyaṃ jātaṃ vā garubhaṇḍaṃ siyāti yojetabbā. Tatthamuṭṭhimattaṃnāma karaḷamattaṃ. Idañca karaḷaṃ katvā chādentānaṃ chadanakaraḷavasena gahetabbaṃ.Tālapaṇṇādītiādi-saddena nāḷikerapaṇṇādigehacchadanapaṇṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tampi muñjādi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gahetvā gacchanti, na vāretabbāti.
2876.Any muṭṭhimattaṃ grass or tālapaṇṇādi suitable for roofing houses, among tiṇas such as muñjā that are suitable for roofing, even one, given to the Saṅgha or grown there in the Saṅghika land, should be connected as a garubhaṇḍa. Here, muṭṭhimattaṃ means the size of a karaḷa. And this karaḷa should be taken as the roofing karaḷa for those who are roofing. Tālapaṇṇādī: The word ādi includes leaves for roofing houses, such as nāḷikerapaṇṇādi. That muñjādi, too, if extra after a Saṅghakamma or cetiyakamma is done, is suitable to give for a personal kamma. People whose houses have burned should not be prevented from taking them as they go.
2877-8.Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇoti dīghato aṭṭhaṅgulamatto. Keci ‘‘puthulato’’ti vadanti.Rittapotthakoti lekhāhi suññapotthako, na likhitapotthakoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇo’’ti iminā aṭṭhaṅgulato ūnappamāṇo bhājiyo, ‘‘rittapotthako’’ti iminā aṭṭhaṅgulato atirekappamāṇopi likhitapotthako bhājiyoti dasseti.
2877-8.Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇo means about eight aṅgulas in length. Some say "in width." Rittapotthako means an empty notebook, it is said not a written notebook. By "Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇo" it indicates that one smaller than eight aṅgulas is bhājiyo, and by "rittapotthako" it indicates that even one larger than eight aṅgulas, if it is a written notebook, is bhājiyo.
aṭṭhakathāgatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘mattikā’’tiādi. Pākatikā vā setagerukādipañcavaṇṇāvāpi mattikāti yojanā.Silesonāma kabiṭṭhādisileso.Ādi-saddena sajjurasakaṅguṭṭhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Tālapakkapamāṇanti ekaṭṭhitālaphalapamāṇāpi. Tampi mattikādi saṅghakamme, cetiyakamme ca niṭṭhite atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati.
2879-80.‘‘Veḷuādika’’nti padacchedo. Rakkhitaṃ gopitaṃ vāpi gaṇhatāsamakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vāthāvaraṃ antamaso taṃagghanakaṃ vālikameva vā datvā gahetabbanti yojanā.
2879-80.Veḷuādika is the word division. The meaning is that one who takes bamboo that is protected or guarded should give equal or more immovable property, or at least the value of it, even if it is only sand.
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘rakkhitagopitaṃ veḷuṃ gaṇhantena samakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā thāvaraṃ antamaso taṃagghanakavālikāyapi phātikammaṃ katvā gahetabbo. Phātikammaṃ akatvā gaṇhantena tattheva vaḷañjetabbo, gamanakāle saṅghike āvāse ṭhapetvā gantabbaṃ. Asatiyā gahetvā gatena pana pahiṇitvā dātabbo. Desantaragatena sampattavihāre saṅghikāvāse ṭhapetabbo’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) veḷumhiyeva ayaṃ vinicchayo vutto, idha pana ‘‘valliveḷādikaṃ kiñcī’’ti valliādīnampi sāmaññena vuttattā taṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ valliādīsupi yathārahaṃ labbhatīti veditabbaṃ.
In the Aṭṭhakathā, however, "One who takes protected bamboo should do phātikamma by giving equal or more immovable property, or at least sand of equal value. One who takes it without doing phātikamma should be vaḷañjetabbo right there; when leaving, it should be left in a Saṅghika residence. But if one takes it and leaves, it should be sent back. One who has gone to another country should leave it in a Saṅghika residence in the monastery he has arrived at" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321). This judgment is said only about bamboo, but here, since it is said generally about "valliveḷādikaṃ kiñcī," it should be understood that it is merely illustrative, and that it can be obtained appropriately for vallīādi as well.
2881.Añjananti silāmayo.Evaṃ haritālamanosilāpi.
2881.Añjana is made of stone. Evaṃ haritālamanosilāpi.
2882.Dārubhaṇḍe ayaṃ vinicchayo – pariṇāhato yathāvuttasūcidaṇḍappamāṇakoaṭṭhaṅguladīghoyo koci dārubhaṇḍakodārudullabhaṭṭhāne saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2882.The judgment on wooden articles is as follows: Any wooden article that is damaged, made to the measure of a previously mentioned needle-handle (sūcidaṇḍappamāṇako), eight aṅgulas in length, given to the Saṅgha in a place where wood is scarce, or originating from there, and is protected and guarded, is considered a heavy (garu) item. This is the interpretation.
2883.Evaṃkurundaṭṭhakathāyaāgatavinicchayaṃ dassetvāmahāaṭṭhakathāya(cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) āgataṃ dassetumāha‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāya’’ntiādi. Tatthaāsandikasattaṅgāvuttalakkhaṇāva.‘‘Bhaddapīṭha’’nti vettamayaṃ pīṭhaṃ vuccati.Pīṭhikāti pilotikābaddhapīṭhameva.
2883.Having shown the judgment that came in the Kurunda Aṭṭhakathā, to show what came in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321), he says "Mahā-aṭṭhakathāya" etc. There, āsandikasattaṅgā are those with the characteristics already mentioned. "Bhaddapīṭha" means a seat made of rattan. Pīṭhikā means a seat fastened with pilotikā creeper only.
2884.Eḷakapādapīṭhaṃnāma dārupaṭṭikāya upari pāde ṭhapetvā bhojanapallaṅkaṃ viya katapīṭhaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Āmalakavaṭṭakapīṭha’’nti etassa‘‘āmaṇḍakavaṭṭaka’’nti pariyāyo, tasmā ubhayenāpi āmalakākārena yojitaṃ bahupādakapīṭhaṃ vuccati. Kesuci potthakesu‘‘tathāmaṇḍakapīṭhaka’’nti pāṭho. Gāthābandhavasenamaṇḍaka-saddapayogo.Kocchaṃbhūtagāmavagge catutthasikkhāpade vuttasarūpaṃ.Palālapīṭhanti nipajjanatthāya katā palālabhisi, iminā kadalipattādimayapīṭhampi upalakkhaṇato dassitaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘palālapīṭhena cettha kadalipattādipīṭhānipi saṅgahitānī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321).Dhovanephalakanti cīvaradhovanaphalakaṃ, dhovanādisaddānaṃ viyettha vibhattialopo. Imesu tāva yaṃ kiñci khuddakaṃ vā hotu mahantaṃ vā, saṅghassa dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Byagghacammaonaddhampi vāḷarūpaparikkhittaṃ ratanaparisibbitaṃ kocchaṃ garubhaṇḍameva.
2884.Eḷakapādapīṭhaṃ means a seat made like a dining couch, with legs placed on a wooden plank. Āmalakavaṭṭakapīṭha has the synonym āmaṇḍakavaṭṭaka; therefore, both refer to a multi-legged seat constructed in the shape of an āmalaka fruit. In some books, the reading is tathāmaṇḍakapīṭhaka. The use of the word maṇḍaka is due to the meter of the verse. Kocchaṃ is of the form described in the fourth training rule in the section on plant life. Palālapīṭha means a straw cushion made for lying down; this also indicates a seat made of banana leaves, etc., by way of implication. As it was said: "Here, with 'palālapīṭha,' seats made of banana leaves, etc., are also included" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321). Dhovane phalaka means a plank for washing robes, and here there is the elision of the विभक्ति (case ending) in words like dhovana. Among these, whatever is small or large, if given to the Saṅgha, becomes a heavy (garu) item. A koccha inlaid with tiger skin, surrounded by vāḷarūpa, and sewn with jewels is also a heavy item.
2885.Bhaṇḍikāti daṇḍakaṭṭhacchedanabhaṇḍikā.Muggaroti daṇḍamuggaro.Daṇḍamuggaronāma yena rajitacīvaraṃ pothenti.Vatthaghaṭṭanamuggaroti cīvaraghaṭṭanamuggaro, yena anuvātādiṃ ghaṭṭenti.Ambaṇanti phalakehi pokkharaṇisadisaṃ katapānīyabhājanaṃ.Mañjūsānāma doṇipeḷā.Nāvāpoto.Rajanadoṇikānāma yattha cīvaraṃ rajanti, pakkarajanaṃ vā ākiranti.
2885.Bhaṇḍikā means a kit for cutting wood. Muggaro means a wooden mallet. Daṇḍamuggaro means that with which dyed robes are beaten. Vatthaghaṭṭanamuggaro means a mallet for rubbing robes, with which the anuvāta etc. are rubbed. Ambaṇa means a water container made of planks, resembling a pond. Mañjūsā means a trough-basket. Nāvā means a boat. Rajanadoṇikā means where robes are dyed, or where dye solution is sprinkled.
2886.Uḷuṅkoti nāḷikeraphalakaṭāhādimayo uḷuṅko. Ubhayaṃ pidhānasamakosamuggo. ‘‘Khuddako parividhano karaṇḍa’’nti vadanti.Karaṇḍoca pādagaṇhanakato atirekappamāṇo idha adhippeto.Kaṭacchūti dabbi.Ādi-saddena pānīyasarāvapānīyasaṅkhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
2886.Uḷuṅko means a water dipper made of coconut shell, etc. Samuggo is a container with matching lids. They say "Khuddako parividhano karaṇḍa". Karaṇḍo here is intended to mean one exceeding the standard size for a foot-wiper. Kaṭacchū means a ladle. The word "Ādi" includes water pots, water ladles, conches, etc.
2887.Gehasambhāranti gehopakaraṇaṃ. Thambhatulāsopānaphalakādi dārumayaṃ, pāsāṇamayampi imināva gahitaṃ.Kappiyacammanti ‘‘eḷakājamigāna’’ntiādinā (vi. vi. 2650) heṭṭhā dassitaṃ kappiyacammaṃ. Tabbipariyāyaṃakappiyaṃ. Abhājiyaṃgarubhaṇḍattā. Bhūmattharaṇaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
2887.Gehasambhāra means household equipment. Wooden items such as pillars, beams, steps, and planks, and also stone items, are included by this. Kappiyacamma means allowable leather, which will be shown below with "eḷakājamigāna" etc. (vi. vi. 2650). Akappiyaṃ is the opposite. Abhājiyaṃ, because it is a heavy (garu) item. It is suitable to use by spreading on the floor.
2888.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘eḷakacammaṃ pana paccattharaṇagatikameva hoti, tampi garubhaṇḍamevā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) vuttattā āha‘‘eḷacammaṃ garuṃ vutta’’nti.Kurundiyaṃpana ‘‘sabbaṃ mañcappamāṇaṃ cammaṃ garubhaṇḍa’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) vuttaṃ. Ettha ca‘‘paccattharaṇagatikamevā’’ti iminā mañcapīṭhepi attharituṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. ‘‘Pāvārādipaccattharaṇampi garubhaṇḍa’’nti eke, ‘‘no’’ti apare, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.Mañcappamāṇanti ca pamāṇayuttaṃ mañcaṃ.Pamāṇayuttamañconāma yassa dīghaso nava vidatthiyo tiriyañca tadupaḍḍhaṃ. Uddhaṃ mukhamassātiudukkhalaṃ.Ādi-saddena musalaṃ, suppaṃ, nisadaṃ, nisadapoto, pāsāṇadoṇi, pāsāṇakaṭāhañca saṅgahitaṃ.Pesakārādītiādi-saddena cammakārādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Turivemādipesakārabhaṇḍañcabhastādi cammakārabhaṇḍañcakasibhaṇḍañcayuganaṅgalādisaṅghikaṃsaṅghasantakaṃ garubhaṇḍanti yojanā.
2888.Because it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "eḷakacammaṃ pana paccattharaṇagatikameva hoti, tampi garubhaṇḍamevā" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321), he says "eḷacammaṃ garuṃ vutta". In the Kurundī, however, it is said, "sabbaṃ mañcappamāṇaṃ cammaṃ garubhaṇḍa" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321). And here, with "paccattharaṇagatikamevā", it indicates that it is suitable for spreading on couches and seats as well. Some say, "Pāvārādi paccattharaṇa is also a heavy item"; others say, "No." It should be decided after considering. Mañcappamāṇa means a couch of standard size. Pamāṇayuttamañco means a couch whose length is nine spans and whose width is half of that. Uddhaṃ mukhamassāti udukkhalaṃ means a mortar. The word "Ādi" includes a pestle, winnowing basket, nisada, nisadapoto, stone trough, and stone pot. Pesakārādī means the word "ādi" includes leather workers, etc. Tailors' tools such as a loom etc., leather workers' tools such as bellows etc., and farmers' tools such as yokes and ploughs, if saṅghikaṃ (belonging to the Saṅgha), are heavy items. This is the interpretation.
2889.‘‘Tathevā’’ti iminā ‘‘saṅghika’’nti idaṃ paccāmasati.Ādhārakoti pattādhāro.Tālavaṇṭanti tālavaṇṭehi kataṃ. Veḷudantavilīvehi vā morapiñchehi vā cammavikatīhi vā katampi taṃsadisaṃ ‘‘tālavaṇṭa’’nteva vuccati. Vaṭṭavidhūpanānaṃ tālavaṇṭeyeva antogadhattā‘‘bījanī’’ti caturassavidhūpanañca ketakapārohakuntālapaṇṇādimayadantamayavisāṇamayadaṇḍakamakasabījanī ca vuccati.Pacchipākaṭāyeva. Pacchito khuddako tālapaṇṇādimayo bhājanavisesocaṅkoṭakaṃ. Sabbā sammajjanīti nāḷikerahīrādīhi baddhā yaṭṭhisammajjanī, muṭṭhisammajjanīti duvidhā pariveṇaṅgaṇādisammajjanī ca tatheva duvidhā khajjūrināḷikerapaṇṇādīhi baddhā gehasammajjanī cāti sabbāpi sammajjanī garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti.
2889.With "Tathevā," he refers back to "saṅghika". Ādhārako means a stand for a bowl. Tālavaṇṭa means made of palm fronds. Anything similar made of bamboo splints, shavings, peacock feathers, or leather pieces is also called "tālavaṇṭa". Because round fans are included in tālavaṇṭa, bījanī means a square fan and a fan made of screwpine shoots, palm leaves, ivory, horn, or reeds. Pacchi is well-known. Caṅkoṭakaṃ is a small container made of palm leaves etc. that is smaller than a pacchi. Sabbā sammajjanī means all brooms: stick brooms tied with coconut husks etc., and hand brooms; both types of brooms for sweeping the monastery grounds, and both types of house brooms tied with date palm leaves or coconut leaves, are all heavy items.
2890.Cakkayuttakayānanti hatthavaṭṭakasakaṭādiyuttayānañca.
2890.Cakkayuttakayāna means vehicles fitted with wheels, such as handcarts and carts.
2891.Chattanti paṇṇakilañjasetacchattavasena tividhaṃ chattaṃ.Muṭṭhipaṇṇanti tālapaṇṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Visāṇabhājanañca tumbabhājanañcāti viggaho, ekadesasarūpekaseso, gāthābandhavasena niggahitāgamo ca. Visāṇamayaṃ, bhājanaṃ tumbamayaṃ bhājanañcāti attho. Idha ‘‘pādagaṇhanakato atirittappamāṇa’’nti seso.Araṇīaraṇisahitaṃ.Ādi-saddena āmalakatumbaṃ anuññātavāsiyā daṇḍañca saṅgaṇhāti.Lahuagarubhaṇḍaṃ, bhājanīyanti attho. Pādagaṇhanakato atirittappamāṇaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ.
2891.Chatta means three kinds of umbrellas: leaf umbrellas, kilañja umbrellas, and white umbrellas. "Muṭṭhipaṇṇa" is said referring to palm leaves. "Visāṇabhājanañca tumbabhājanañcāti" is the dissolution, ekadesasarūpekaseso, and the augment of ru is due to the meter of the verse. The meaning is a container made of horn and a container made of gourd. Here, the rest is "exceeding the standard size for a foot-wiper." Araṇī means fire-sticks. The word "Ādi" includes an āmalaka gourd and a walking stick allowed for a resident monk. Lahu means a light item, meaning one that can be used. One exceeding the standard size for a foot-wiper is a heavy item.
2892.Visāṇanti govisāṇādi yaṃ kiñci visāṇaṃ. Atacchitaṃ yathāgatameva bhājanīyaṃ. Aniṭṭhitaṃ mañcapādādi yaṃ kiñci bhājanīyanti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘mañcapādo mañcaaṭanī pīṭhapādo pīṭhaaṭanī vāsipharasuādīnaṃ daṇḍoti etesu yaṃ kiñci vippakatatacchanakammaṃ aniṭṭhitameva bhājanīyaṃ, tacchitamaṭṭhaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ hotī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321).
2892.Visāṇa means any horn, such as cow horn etc. Untrimmed, just as it is, it is to be used. Anything unfinished, such as a couch leg, is to be used. As it was said, "A couch leg, a couch rung, a seat leg, a seat rung, the handle of an axe, adze, etc.—whatever is unfinished rough work among these is to be used; but what is trimmed and finished is a heavy item" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321).
2893.Niṭṭhito tacchito vāpīti tacchitaniṭṭhitopi.Vidhoti kāyabandhane anuññātavidho.Hiṅgukaraṇḍakoti hiṅgumayo vā tadādhāro vā karaṇḍako.Añjanīti añjananāḷikā ca añjanakaraṇḍako ca.Salākāyoti añjanisalākā.Udapuñchanīti hatthidantavisāṇādimayā udakapuñchanī. Idaṃ sabbaṃ bhājanīyameva.
2893.Niṭṭhito tacchito vāpī means even if finished and trimmed. Vidho means an allowed bandage for the body. Hiṅgukaraṇḍako means a container made of hiṅgu or a container for it. Añjanī means an eye-salve tube and an eye-salve container. Salākāyo means an eye-salve stick. Udapuñchanī means a water-wiper made of elephant ivory, horn, etc. All this is to be used.
2894.Paribhogārahanti manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogayoggaṃ.Kulālabhaṇḍanti ghaṭapiṭharādikumbhakārabhaṇḍampi.Pattaṅgārakaṭāhanti pattakaṭāhaṃ, aṅgārakaṭāhañca.Dhūmadānaṃnāḷikā.Kapallikāti dīpakapallikā.
2894.Paribhogāraha means suitable for human use and consumption. Kulālabhaṇḍa means potters' ware such as pots and bowls. Pattaṅgārakaṭāha means a bowl for food and a bowl for charcoal. Dhūmadānaṃ means a pipe. Kapallikā means an oil lamp.
2895.Thupikāti pāsādādithupikā.Dīparukkhoti padīpādhāro.Cayanacchadaniṭṭhakāti pākāracetiyādīnaṃ cayaniṭṭhakā ca gehādīnaṃ chadaniṭṭhakā ca.Sabbampīti yathāvuttaṃ sabbampi anavasesaṃ parikkhāraṃ.
2895.Thupikā means finials of buildings, etc. Dīparukkho means a lamp stand. Cayanacchadaniṭṭhakā means bricks for constructing walls, cetiyas etc., and bricks for roofing houses etc. Sabbampī means all the requisites as mentioned, without remainder.
2896.Kañcanakoti sarako.Ghaṭakoti pādagaṇhanakato anatirittappamāṇo ghaṭako. ‘‘Yathā ca mattikābhaṇḍe, evaṃ lohabhaṇḍepi kuṇḍikā bhājanīyakoṭṭhāsameva bhajatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)aṭṭhakathānayaṃsaṅgahetumāha‘‘lohabhaṇḍepi kuṇḍikāpi ca bhājiyā’’ti.
2896.Kañcanako means a small pot. Ghaṭako means a small pot that is not larger than the standard size for a foot-wiper. Because the Aṭṭhakathā-naya includes the saying "Just as with clay pots, so too with metal pots, the kuṇḍikā partakes of the same category as usable items" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321), he says "lohabhaṇḍepi kuṇḍikāpi ca bhājiyā".
2897.Garunāma pacchimaṃ garubhaṇḍattayaṃ.Thāvaraṃnāma purimadvayaṃ.Saṅghassāti saṅghena.Parivattetvāti puggalikādīhi tādisehi tehi parivattetvā. Tatrāyaṃ parivattananayo (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) – saṅghassa nāḷikerārāmo dūre hoti, kappiyakārakā taṃ bahutaraṃ khādanti, tato sakaṭavetanaṃ datvā appameva āharanti, aññesaṃ pana tassa ārāmassa avidūragāmavāsīnaṃ manussānaṃ vihārassa samīpe ārāmo hoti, te saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā sakena ārāmena taṃ ārāmaṃ yācanti, saṅghena ‘‘ruccati saṅghassā’’ti apaloketvā sampaṭicchitabbo. Sacepi bhikkhūnaṃ rukkhasahassaṃ hoti, manussānaṃ pañcasatāni, ‘‘nanu tumhākaṃ ārāmo khuddako’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi ayaṃ khuddako, atha kho itarato bahutaraṃ āyaṃ deti. Sacepi samakameva deti, evampi icchiticchitakkhaṇe paribhuñjituṃ sakkāti gahetabbameva.
2897.Garu means the latter three heavy items. Thāvaraṃ means the former two. Saṅghassā means by the Saṅgha. Parivattetvā means exchanging with personal items or similar items. Here is the method of exchange (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 321): A coconut grove belonging to the Saṅgha is far away, and those who are not allowable eat much of it; therefore, they bring only a little after paying the cart fee. But other people living not far from that grove near the monastery ask the Saṅgha for that grove in exchange for their own grove. The Saṅgha should accept it after announcing, "Does the Saṅgha approve?" Even if the monks have a thousand trees and the people have five hundred, it should not be said, "Is not your grove small?" Although this one is small, it yields more income than the other. Even if it yields the same, it should still be taken, as it can be used at any desired moment.
Sace pana manussānaṃ bahutarā rukkhā honti, ‘‘nanu tumhākaṃ bahutarā rukkhā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘atirekaṃ amhākaṃ puññaṃ hotu, saṅghassa demā’’ti vadanti, jānāpetvā sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūnaṃ rukkhā phaladhārino, manussānaṃ rukkhā na tāva phalaṃ gaṇhanti. Kiñcāpi na gaṇhanti, na cirasseva gaṇhissantīti sampaṭicchitabbameva. Manussānaṃ rukkhā phaladhārino, bhikkhūnaṃ na tāva phalaṃ gaṇhanti. ‘‘Nanu tumhākaṃ rukkhā phaladhārino’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, amhākaṃ puññaṃ bhavissatī’’ti vadanti, jānāpetvā sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ ārāmena ārāmo parivattetabbo. Eteneva nayena ārāmavatthupi vihāropi vihāravatthupi ārāmena parivattetabbaṃ. Ārāmavatthunā ca mahantena vā khuddakena vā ārāmaārāmavatthuvihāravihāravatthūni.
But if the people have more trees, it should be said, "Do you not have more trees?" If they say, "Let there be extra merit for us; let us give it to the Saṅgha," it should be accepted after informing them. The monks' trees are fruit-bearing, but the people's trees are not yet bearing fruit. Even if they are not bearing fruit, it should still be accepted, as they will soon bear fruit. The people's trees are fruit-bearing, but the monks' trees are not yet bearing fruit. It should be said, "Are not your trees fruit-bearing?" If they say, "Take them, Venerable, may there be merit for us," it should be accepted after informing them. In this way, a grove should be exchanged for a grove. In the same way, a grove land can be exchanged for a monastery, and a monastery land for a grove. With grove land, whether large or small, a grove, grove land, monastery, and monastery land can be exchanged.
Kathaṃ vihārena vihāro parivattetabbo? Saṅghassa antogāme gehaṃ hoti, manussānaṃ vihāramajjhe pāsādo, ubhopi agghena samakā, sace manussā tena pāsādena taṃ gehaṃ yācanti, sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūnaṃ ce mahagghataraṃ gehaṃ hoti, ‘‘mahagghataraṃ amhākaṃ geha’’nti vutte ca ‘‘kiñcāpi mahagghataraṃ, pabbajitānaṃ pana asāruppaṃ, na sakkā tattha pabbajitehi vasituṃ, idaṃ pana sāruppaṃ, gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, evampi sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana manussānaṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, ‘‘nanu tumhākaṃ gehaṃ mahaggha’’nti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Hotu, bhante, amhākaṃ puññaṃ bhavissati, gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pana sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ vihārena vihāro parivattetabbo. Eteneva nayena vihāravatthupi ārāmopi ārāmavatthupi vihārena parivattetabbaṃ. Vihāravatthunā ca mahagghena vā appagghena vā vihāravihāravatthuārāmaārāmavatthūni. Evaṃ tāva thāvarena thāvaraparivattanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
How should a monastery be exchanged for a monastery? The Saṅgha has a house inside the village, and the people have a building in the middle of the monastery, both of equal value. If the people ask for that house in exchange for that building, it is proper to accept it. If the monks have a more valuable house, and when it is said, "Our house is more valuable," they say, "Although it is more valuable, it is unsuitable for renunciates; it is not possible for renunciates to live there, but this is suitable; take it," it is proper to accept it in this way. But if the people's house is more valuable, it should be said, "Is not your house more valuable?" If they say, "Let it be, Venerable, may there be merit for us, take it," then it is proper to accept it. In this way, a monastery should be exchanged for a monastery. In the same way, monastery land can be exchanged for a grove, and a grove land for a monastery. With monastery land, whether of great or little value, monasteries, monastery lands, groves, and grove lands can be exchanged. Thus, the exchange of one permanent item for another should be understood.
Garubhaṇḍena garubhaṇḍaparivattane pana mañcapīṭhaṃ mahantaṃ vā hotu khuddakaṃ vā, antamaso caturaṅgulapādakaṃ gāmadārakehi paṃsvāgārakesu kīḷantehi katampi saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Sacepi rājarājamahāmattādayo ekappahāreneva mañcasataṃ vā mañcasahassaṃ vā denti, sabbe kappiyamañcā sampaṭicchitabbā, sampaṭicchitvā vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjathā’’ti dātabbā, puggalikavasena na dātabbā. Atirekamañce bhaṇḍāgārādīsu paññapetvā pattacīvaraṃ nikkhipitumpi vaṭṭati.
In the exchange of one heavy item for another, a couch or seat, whether large or small, even one with four-aṅgula legs made by village children playing in dust heaps, is a heavy item from the time it is given to the Saṅgha. Even if kings, great ministers, etc., give a hundred or a thousand couches in one offering, all allowable couches should be accepted. Having accepted them, they should be given out in order of seniority, saying, "Use them for the Saṅgha's communal use." They should not be given out as personal property. Extra couches can also be designated in the storehouse, etc., for placing bowls and robes.
Bahisīmāya ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti dinnamañco saṅghattherassa vasanaṭṭhāne dātabbo. Tattha ce bahū mañcā honti, mañcena kammaṃ natthi, yassa vasanaṭṭhāne kammaṃ atthi, tattha ‘‘saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjathā’’ti dātabbo. Mahagghena satagghanakena, sahassagghanakena vā mañcena aññaṃ mañcasataṃ labhati, parivattetvā gahetabbaṃ. Na kevalaṃ mañcena mañcoyeva, ārāmaārāmavatthuvihāravihāravatthupīṭhabhisibimbohanānipi parivattetuṃ vaṭṭanti. Esa nayo pīṭhabhisibimbohanesupi etesu hi kappiyākappiyaṃ vuttanayameva. Tattha akappiyaṃ na paribhuñjitabbaṃ, kappiyaṃ saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Akappiyaṃ vā mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ vā parivattetvā vuttavatthūni gahetabbāni, agarubhaṇḍupagaṃ pana bhisibimbohanaṃ nāma natthīti.
A bed given with the declaration "I give to the Sangha" should be given to the Sangha Elder in his dwelling place. If there are many beds there, and the bed is not needed, then it should be given where there is a need for it in a dwelling place, with the declaration "May you use this through Sangha sharing." If another hundred beds can be obtained with a bed of great value, worth a hundred or a thousand [kahapanas], it should be exchanged and taken. Not only a bed for a bed, but also ārāma properties, vihāra properties, seats, cushions, and pillows can be exchanged. This method applies to seats, cushions, and pillows as well; in these cases, the allowable and unallowable are as previously stated. Therein, what is unallowable should not be used; what is allowable should be used through Sangha sharing. Unallowable or valuable things may be exchanged for allowable things, and the items mentioned above may be taken, but there is nothing called a cushion or pillow that is an agarubhaṇḍa.
2898.Bhikkhu adhotena pādena, allapādena vā senāsanaṃ nakkameti sambandho. Sayanti ettha, āsanti cātisayanāsanaṃ,parikammakatabhūmattharaṇādi.Allapādena vāti yena akkantaṭṭhāne udakaṃ paññāyati, evarūpena tintapādena. Yathāha – ‘‘allehi pādehīti yehi akkantaṭṭhāne udakaṃ paññāyati, evarūpehi pādehi paribhaṇḍakatabhūmi vā senāsanaṃ vā na akkamitabbaṃ. Sace pana udakasinehamattameva paññāyati, na udakaṃ, vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324).Saupāhanoti ettha ‘‘dhotapādaka’’nti vattabbaṃ. Pāde paṭimukkāhi upāhanāhisaupāhanobhikkhu dhotapādakaṃ dhotapādehi akkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ tatheva na akkameti yojanā.
2898. "Bhikkhu adhotena pādena, allapādena vā senāsanaṃ nakkameti" is the connection. Sayanāsanaṃ means a place for lying down and sitting, i.e., ground coverings that have been prepared etc. Allapādena vā means with wet feet of such a kind that water appears in the place stepped on. As it was said: "allehi pādehīti yehi akkantaṭṭhāne udakaṃ paññāyati, evarūpehi pādehi paribhaṇḍakatabhūmi vā senāsanaṃ vā na akkamitabbaṃ. Sace pana udakasinehamattameva paññāyati, na udakaṃ, vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324). Saupāhanoti here, it should be said "dhotapādaka". The meaning is that a saupāhano bhikkhu with feet covered by shoes, a place that should be stepped on with washed feet, should not be stepped on as is.
2899.Parikammakatāyāti sudhādiparikammakatāya.Niṭṭhubhantassāti kheḷaṃ pātentassa.Parikammakataṃ bhittinti setabhittiṃ vā cittakammakataṃ vā bhittiṃ. Na kevalañca bhittimeva, dvārampi vātapānampi apassenaphalakampi pāsāṇatthambhampi rukkhatthambhampi cīvarena vā kenaci vā appaṭicchādetvā apassayituṃ na labhatiyeva. ‘‘Dvāravātapānādayo pana aparikammakatāpi apaṭicchādetvā na apassayitabbā’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
2899.Parikammakatāyāti means a place prepared with plaster etc. Niṭṭhubhantassāti means while spitting phlegm. Parikammakataṃ bhittinti means a white wall or a wall with paintings. Not only the wall itself, but also the door, window, screen panel, stone pillar, or wooden pillar should not be leaned on without covering it with a robe or anything else. In the gaṇṭhipada it is said that "Doors and windows, even if unprepared, should not be leaned on without covering them."
2901.Niddāyato tassa koci sarīrāvayavo paccattharaṇe saṅkuṭite sahasā yadi mañcaṃ phusati, dukkaṭanti yojanā.
2901. The meaning is that if a bhikkhu is sleeping and some part of his body, constricted on the mattress, suddenly touches the bed, it is a dukkata.
2902.Lomesumañcaṃ phusantesu. Hatthapādānaṃ talena akkamituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Mañcapīṭhaṃ nīharantassa kāye paṭihaññati, anāpatti.
2902.Lomesu means when the hairs are touching the bed. The meaning is that it is allowable to step on it with the soles of the hands and feet. If, when taking out a bed or seat, it strikes the body, there is no offense.
sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadevuttattā tathā paribhuñjantassa anāpatti. ‘‘Imaṃ mañcapīṭhādiṃ saṅghassa dammī’’ti vutte garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, na bhājetabbaṃ saṅghassa parāmaṭṭhattā. ‘‘Imaṃ mañcapīṭhādiṃ bhadantānaṃ vassaggena gaṇhituṃ dammī’’ti vutte satipi garubhaṇḍabhāve kappiyavatthuṃ bhājetvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, akappiyabhaṇḍameva bhājetvā gahetuṃ na labbhati. ‘‘Imaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ vassaggena gahetuṃ saṅghassa dammī’’ti vutte vassaggena bhājetvā gahetabbaṃ vassaggena bhājanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā saṅghassa parāmaṭṭhattā. ‘‘Saṅghassa imaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ vassaggena gaṇhituṃ dammī’’ti vutte pana garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti paṭhamaṃ saṅghassa parāmaṭṭhattāti ayampi viseso mātikaṭṭhakathāgaṇṭhipadeyevavutto.
Because it is stated in the sīhaḷagaṇṭhipada, there is no offense for one using it in that way. When it is said, "I give this bed, seat, etc. to the Sangha," it becomes a garubhaṇḍa and should not be divided because it has been accepted by the Sangha. Even when it is said, "I give this bed, seat, etc. to the venerable ones to take for the vassagga," it is allowable to divide and take the kappiya item because it is a garubhaṇḍa, but it is not allowable to divide and take an akappiya item. When it is said, "I give this bed to the Sangha to take for the vassagga," it should be divided and taken for the vassagga because the division for the vassagga is mentioned first, and acceptance by the Sangha comes later. However, when it is said, "I give this bed to the Sangha to take for the vassagga," it becomes a garubhaṇḍa because of the initial acceptance by the Sangha. This distinction is also stated in the gaṇṭhipada of the mātikatthakathā.
2903-4.Uddesabhattavinicchayekadesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sahassagghanako’’tiādi. Sahassagghanako sacīvaro piṇḍapāto avassikaṃ bhikkhuṃ patto, tasmiṃ vihāre ca ‘‘evarūpo piṇḍapāto avassikaṃ bhikkhuṃ patto’’tilikhitvā ṭhapitopi ca hoti, tato saṭṭhivassānamaccayetādisosahassagghanako sacīvaro koci piṇḍapāto sace uppanno hoti, taṃ piṇḍapātaṃbudhovinicchayakusalo bhikkhu avassikaṭṭhitikāya adatvā saṭṭhivassikaṭṭhitikāyadadeyyāti yojanā.
2903-4. To show a part of the uddesabhatta determination, he says ‘‘sahassagghanako’’tiādi. A piṇḍapāta worth a thousand [kahapanas] together with a robe, obtained by an avassika bhikkhu, and in that vihāra it has been written and kept that "Such a piṇḍapāta has been obtained by an avassika bhikkhu," and after the passing of sixty years, if another such piṇḍapāta worth a thousand [kahapanas] together with a robe arises, then a wise bhikkhu skilled in determination should give that piṇḍapāta to the ṭṭhitikāya of sixty years, not to the avassikaṭṭhitikāya.
2905.Uddesabhattaṃ bhuñjitvāti upasampannakāle attano vassaggena pattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ paribhuñjitvā.Jāto ce sāmaṇerakoti sikkhāpaccakkhānādivasena sace sāmaṇero jāto.Tanti upasampannakāle gahitaṃ tadeva uddesabhattaṃ.Sāmaṇerassa pāḷiyāti sāmaṇerapaṭipāṭiyā attano pattaṃ pacchā gahetuṃ labhati.
2905.Uddesabhattaṃ bhuñjitvāti means after enjoying the uddesabhatta obtained at the time of ordination according to his vassa. Jāto ce sāmaṇerakoti means if he becomes a sāmaṇera through abandoning the training etc. Tanti means that same uddesabhatta taken at the time of ordination. Sāmaṇerassa pāḷiyāti means according to the sāmaṇera's procedure, he can take what he has obtained later.
2906.Yosāmaṇero sampuṇṇavīsativasso ‘‘sve uddesaṃ labhissatī’’ti vattabbo, ajja so upasampanno hoti, ṭhitikā atītā siyāti yojanā, sve pāpetabbā sāmaṇeraṭṭhitikā ajja upasampannattā atikkantā hotīti attho, taṃ bhattaṃ na labhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
2906.Yosāmaṇero means that sāmaṇera who is fully twenty years old should be told, "Tomorrow he will receive the uddesa"; today he is ordained, and the ṭhitikā has passed, is the connection. The meaning is that the sāmaṇeraṭṭhitikā that should be given tomorrow has passed today because of ordination, and it is said that he does not receive that bhatta.
2907.Uddesabhattānantaraṃ salākabhattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sace panā’’tiādi. Sace salākā laddhā, taṃdine bhattaṃ na laddhaṃ, punadine tassa bhattaṃ gahetabbaṃ,na saṃsayo‘‘gahetabbaṃ nu kho, na gahetabba’’nti evaṃ saṃsayo na kātabboti yojanā.
2907.After uddesabhatta, to show salākabhatta, he says ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi. If a salākā has been obtained, and bhatta has not been obtained on that day, then the bhatta should be taken on the next day, na saṃsayo means there should be no doubt like "Should it be taken, or should it not be taken?"
2908.Uttari uttaraṃ atirekaṃ bhaṅgaṃ byañjanaṃ etassātiuttaribhaṅgaṃ,tassa, atirekabyañjanassāti attho.Ekacarassāti ekacārikassa. Salākāyevasalākikā.
2908. Uttaribhaṅgaṃ, means something that has more and more, extra relish, meaning extra relish. Ekacarassāti means for the one who goes alone. Salākikā means just the salākā.
2909.Uttaribhaṅgamevauttaribhaṅgakaṃ.
2909.Uttaribhaṅgakaṃ means just uttaribhaṅga.
2910.Yena yena hīti gāhitasalākena yena yena bhikkhunā.Yaṃ yanti bhattabyañjanesu yaṃ yaṃ bhattaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ byañjanaṃ vā.
2910.Yena yena hīti means by whichever bhikkhu who has taken a gāhitasalākā. Yaṃ yanti means whatever bhatta or relish among the bhattabyañjanas.
2911.Saṅghuddesādikanti saṅghabhattauddesabhattādikaṃ.Ādi-saddena nimantanaṃ, salākaṃ, pakkhikaṃ, uposathikaṃ, pāṭipadikanti pañca bhattāni gahitāni.
2911.Saṅghuddesādikanti means beginning with saṅghabhatta and uddesabhatta. By the ādi-sadda, the five bhattas: nimantanaṃ, salākaṃ, pakkhikaṃ, uposathikaṃ, and pāṭipadikanti are included.
saṅghabhattaṃnāma. ‘‘Saṅghato ettake bhikkhū uddisitvā dethā’’tiādinā vatvā dinnaṃuddesabhattaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghato ettakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādinā vatvā dinnaṃnimantanaṃnāma. Attano attano nāmena salākagāhakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dinnaṃsalākabhattaṃnāma. Cātuddasiyaṃ dinnaṃpakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dinnaṃuposathikaṃ. Pāṭipade dinnaṃpāṭipadikaṃ. Taṃtaṃnāmena dinnameva tathā tathā voharīyati. Etesaṃ pana vitthārakathā ‘‘abhilakkhitesū’’tiādinā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 325 pakkhikabhattādikathā)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena veditabbā.Āgantukādīti etthaādi-saddena gamikabhattaṃ, gilānabhattaṃ, gilānupaṭṭhākabhattanti tīṇi gahitāni. Āgantukānaṃ dinnaṃ bhattaṃāgantukabhattaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesu.
saṅghabhattaṃnāma means what is given after saying "Having designated this many bhikkhus, give from the Sangha" etc. uddesabhattaṃ means what is given after saying "Having designated this many bhikkhus, take bhatta" etc. nimantanaṃnāma means what is given to the bhikkhus who take salākā by their own names. salākabhattaṃnāma means what is given on the fourteenth [day of the lunar cycle]. pakkhikaṃ means what is given on the uposatha day. uposathikaṃ means what is given on the pāṭipada day. pāṭipadikaṃ means what is given with that particular name is called that. However, the detailed explanation of these should be understood according to the method stated in the aṭṭhakathā beginning with "abhilakkhitesū’’tiādinā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 325 pakkhikabhattādikathā). In Āgantukādīti, by the ādi-sadda, the three, gamikabhattaṃ, gilānabhattaṃ, and gilānupaṭṭhākabhattanti are included. āgantukabhattaṃ means the bhatta given to guests. The same method applies to the rest.
2912.Vihāranti vihārabhattaṃ uttarapadalopena, vihāre tatruppādabhattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Vārabhattanti dubbhikkhasamaye ‘‘vārena bhikkhū jaggissāmā’’ti dhuragehato paṭṭhāya dinnaṃ.Niccanti niccabhattaṃ uttarapadalopena, tañca tathā vatvāva dinnaṃ.Kuṭibhattaṃnāma saṅghassa āvāsaṃ katvā ‘‘amhākaṃ senāsanavāsino amhākaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti dinnaṃ. Pannarasavidhaṃ sabbameva bhattaṃidhaimasmiṃ senāsanakkhandhakeuddiṭṭhaṃkathitaṃ. Etesaṃ vitthāravinicchayo atthikehisamantapāsādikāyagahetabbo.
2912.Vihāranti means vihārabhattaṃ with the elision of the latter word, this is a designation for bhatta produced there in the vihāra. Vārabhattanti means what is given starting from a household in rotation, in a time of famine, saying "We will support the bhikkhus by turns." Niccanti means niccabhattaṃ with the elision of the latter word, and that is given by saying so. Kuṭibhattaṃnāma means what is given after building a residence for the Sangha, saying "May those residing in our dwelling take our bhatta." All fifteen kinds of bhatta have been uddiṭṭhaṃ mentioned idha in this senāsanakkhandhaka. Those who desire it should take the detailed determination from the samantapāsādikāya.
2913.Paccayabhājane micchāpaṭipattiyā mahādīnavattā appamatteneva paṭipajjitabbanti paccayabhājanakaṃ anusāsanto āha‘‘pāḷi’’ntiādi.
2913.Because of the great danger in wrong practice regarding the use of requisites, he instructs on paccayabhājanakaṃ, saying ‘‘pāḷi’’ntiādi, so that one should practice with diligence.
Senāsanakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Senāsanakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Vattakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Vattakkhandhakathāvaṇṇanā
2914-5.Āgantuko ca āvāsiko ca piṇḍacāriko ca senāsanañca āraññako ca anumodanā cāti viggaho, tāsu vattāni, itarītarayogadvandasamāsassa uttarapadaliṅgattā itthi liṅganiddeso.Bhattebhattagge, uttarapadalopo.‘‘Bhatte’’tiādīhi padehi ‘‘vattānī’’ti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
2914-5. Āgantuko ca āvāsiko ca piṇḍacāriko ca senāsanañca āraññako ca anumodanā cāti is the breakup, the observances (vattāni) in these. Because of the gender of the latter word of the itarītarayogadvandasamāsa, the designation of the feminine gender is used. Bhatte means in the bhattagga, with elision of the latter word. The word "vattānī" should be connected to each of the words beginning with ‘‘Bhatte’’tiādi.
Sabbasoti sabbāvayavabhedehi.Catuddasevāti avayavabhedehi bahuvidhānipivattānivisayabhedena cuddasa eva vuttāni.Visuddhacittenāti savāsanasakalasaṃkilesappahānato accantaparisuddhacittasantānena.Vināyakenāti satte vinetīti vināyako, anuttarapurisadammasārathibhāvena dammadevabrahmanāgādike satte nānāvidhena vinayanupāyena dametīti attho. Atha vā vigato nāyako assātivināyako,tena.
Sabbasoti means in all aspects. Catuddasevāti means even though there are many kinds of observances in aspects, only fourteen have been stated, according to the difference in subject. Visuddhacittenāti means with a mindstream that is exceedingly pure due to the abandonment of all defilements including latent tendencies. Vināyakenāti means the Vināyaka because he leads beings, meaning that he tames beings such as humans, devas, brahmas, and nāgas, who are to be tamed, with various methods of taming, due to being the unsurpassed charioteer of men to be tamed. Or vināyako, means one without a leader; by him.
2916.Ārāmanti ettha taṃsamīpe tabbohāro. Yathāha ‘‘idāni ‘ārāmaṃ pavisissāmī’ti iminā upacārasīmasamīpaṃ dasseti, tasmā upacārasīmaṃ patvā upāhanāomuñcanādi sabbaṃ kātabba’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357). ‘‘Pana apanetabba’’nti padacchedo.Muñcitabbāti upāhanāpādato apanetabbā.
2916.Ārāmanti here, the usage is in proximity to it. As it was said, "idāni ‘ārāmaṃ pavisissāmī’ti iminā upacārasīmasamīpaṃ dasseti, tasmā upacārasīmaṃ patvā upāhanāomuñcanādi sabbaṃ kātabba’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357). Muñcitabbāti upāhanā means the shoes should be removed from the feet.
2917.Oguṇṭhananti sasīsapārupanaṃ. Sīse cīvarameva vā na kātabbanti sambandho.Tenāti āgantukena.Pānīyavārināti pātabbajalena.
2917.Oguṇṭhananti means covering the head. The connection is that one should not do just that, even just a robe, on the head. Tenāti means by the guest. Pānīyavārināti means with drinking water.
2918.Pucchitvāti vassagaṇanaṃ pucchitvā. Vihāre vuḍḍhabhikkhuno āgantukena bhikkhunāvanditabbāva. Kāleti kālasseva.Tenaāgantukenabhikkhunāsenāsanaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ kataraṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tipucchitabbañcāti yojanā.
2918.Pucchitvāti means after asking the vassa count. In the vihāra, the guest bhikkhu should vanditabbāva to the elder bhikkhu. Kāleti means in due time. The connection is that Tena bhikkhunā, the guest bhikkhunā, should ask pucchitabbañcā "Which dwelling should I obtain?"
2919.‘‘Pucchitabba’’nti idaṃ‘‘vaccaṭṭhāna’’ntiādikehi sabbehi upayogantapadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Pānīyameva cāti ‘‘kiṃ imissā pokkharaṇiyā pānīyameva pivanti, udāhu nahānādiparibhogampi karontī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357)aṭṭhakathāgatanayena pānīyañca. Tathāparibhojanīyañca. Saṅghakatikanti ‘‘kesuci ṭhānesu vāḷamigā vā amanussā vā honti, tasmā kaṃ kālaṃ pavisitabbaṃ, kaṃ kālaṃ nikkhamitabba’’ntiaṭṭhakathāgatanayena saṅghassa katikasaṇṭhānañca.Gocarādikanti ettha ca ‘‘gocaro pucchitabboti ‘gocaragāmo āsanne, udāhu dūre, kālasseva ca piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ, udāhu no’ti evaṃ bhikkhācāro pucchitabbo’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357) vuttanayena gocarañca.Ādi-saddena agocaraṃ gahitaṃ. ‘‘Agocaro nāma micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vā gāmo paricchinnabhikkho vā gāmo, yattha ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā bhikkhā diyyati, sopi pucchitabbo’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357) vuttanayenaagocarañca.
2919. "Pucchitabba" should be connected individually with all the ending words beginning with ‘‘vaccaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Pānīyameva cāti means according to the method stated in the aṭṭhakathā "kiṃ imissā pokkharaṇiyā pānīyameva pivanti, udāhu nahānādiparibhogampi karontī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357), both drinking water. Similarly, also paribhojanīyañca. Saṅghakatikanti means the Sangha's agreement according to the method stated in the aṭṭhakathā "kesuci ṭhānesu vāḷamigā vā amanussā vā honti, tasmā kaṃ kālaṃ pavisitabbaṃ, kaṃ kālaṃ nikkhamitabba’’nti. In Gocarādikanti, here gocaro pucchitabboti ‘gocaragāmo āsanne, udāhu dūre, kālasseva ca piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ, udāhu no’ti evaṃ bhikkhācāro pucchitabbo’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357) the going for alms should be asked according to the method stated. By the ādi-sadda, agocaraṃ is included. agocarañca** According to the method stated, "Agocaro nāma micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vā gāmo paricchinnabhikkho vā gāmo, yattha ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā bhikkhā diyyati, sopi pucchitabbo’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357)."
2920.Evaṃ āgantukavattaṃ dassetvā idāni āvāsikavattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vuḍḍha’’ntiādi. Paccuggantvā pattañca cīvarañca paṭiggahetabbanti yojanā. Ca-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho.
2920.Having shown the duties of a guest in this way, now, to show the duties of a resident, he says ‘‘vuḍḍha’’ntiādi. The connection is that he should go to meet him and receive the bowl and robe. The ca-sadda is understood by elision.
2921.Tassāti āgantukassa.Pādodakañcātica-saddena dhotādhotapādā yattha ṭhapīyanti, taṃ pādapīṭhaṃ, pādakathalikañca upanikkhipitabbanti etaṃ gahitaṃ.Pucchitabbañca vārināti ‘‘pānīyena pucchantena sace sakiṃ ānītaṃ pānīyaṃ sabbaṃ pivati, ‘puna ānemī’ti pucchitabboyevā’’ti vuttanayena pānīyena pucchitabbo. Idhaca-saddena –
2921.Tassāti means of the guest. Pādodakañcāti by the ca-sadda, what is included is that the pādapīṭhaṃ and pādakathalikaṃ, where the washed and unwashed feet are placed, should be placed. Pucchitabbañca vārināti means he should be asked about water, according to the method stated, "pānīyena pucchantena sace sakiṃ ānītaṃ pānīyaṃ sabbaṃ pivati, ‘puna ānemī’ti pucchitabboyevā’’ti. Here, by the ca-sadda –
‘‘Apica bījanenapi bījitabbo, bījantena sakiṃ pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ bījitvā sakiṃ majjhe, sakiṃ sīse bījitabbaṃ, ‘alaṃ hotū’ti vuttena tato mandataraṃ bījitabbaṃ. Puna ‘ala’nti vuttena tato mandataraṃ bījitabbaṃ. Tatiyavāraṃ vuttena bījanī ṭhapetabbā. Pādāpissa dhovitabbā, dhovitvā sace attano telaṃ atthi, tena makkhetabbā. No ce atthi, tassa santakena makkhetabbā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 359) –
‘‘Apica bījanenapi bījitabbo, bījantena sakiṃ pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ bījitvā sakiṃ majjhe, sakiṃ sīse bījitabbaṃ, ‘alaṃ hotū’ti vuttena tato mandataraṃ bījitabbaṃ. Puna ‘ala’nti vuttena tato mandataraṃ bījitabbaṃ. Tatiyavāraṃ vuttena bījanī ṭhapetabbā. Pādāpissa dhovitabbā, dhovitvā sace attano telaṃ atthi, tena makkhetabbā. No ce atthi, tassa santakena makkhetabbā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 359) –
Vuttavattāni saṅgaṇhāti.
He includes the stated duties.
2922-3.Vandeyyoti vuḍḍhāgantuko vanditabbo.Paññapetabbanti ‘‘kattha mayhaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti pucchitena senāsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ, ‘‘etaṃ senāsanaṃ tumhākaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti evaṃ ācikkhitabbanti attho. ‘‘Vattabbo’’ti idaṃ‘‘ajjhāvutthamavuttha’’ntiādīhi padehi taṃtaṃliṅgavacanānurūpena parivattetvā paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Ajjhāvutthanti paññattasenāsanassa bhikkhūhi paṭhamaṃ vutthabhāvaṃ.Avutthaṃ vāti cīvarakālaṃ tasmiṃ bhikkhūhi anajjhāvutthabhāvaṃ vā.Gocarāgocaraṃvuttameva.
2922-3. Vandeyyo means a newly arrived elder should be venerated. Paññapetabba means, when asked, "Where will my lodging be?" lodging should be assigned, meaning it should be indicated, "This lodging is assigned to you." The word "Vattabbo" should be connected to each term appropriately by changing it according to gender and number, such as "ajjhāvutthamavuttha." Ajjhāvuttha means previously occupied by monks, referring to assigned lodging. Avutthaṃ vā means, during the robe season, not previously occupied by monks. Gocarāgocaraṃ has already been explained.
Sekkhakulāni cāti laddhasekkhasammutikāni kulāni ca vattabbāni.‘‘Pavese nikkhame kālo’’ti idaṃ ‘‘saṅghakatika’’nti ettha vuttatthameva.Pānīyādikantiādi-saddena paribhojanīyakattarayaṭṭhīnaṃ ācikkhanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
Sekkhakulāni cā means families that have received the Sekkha designation should also be addressed. "Pavese nikkhame kālo" has the same meaning as stated in "saṅghakatika." Pānīyādika The term ādi includes indicating items such as a razor and a staff for personal use.
2924.Yathānisinnenevāti attanā nisinnaṭṭhāneyeva nisinnena.Assāti navakassa.
2924. Yathānisinnenevā means sitting in the same place where one is already sitting. Assā means for a new monk.
2925.‘‘Atra pattaṃ ṭhapehi, idamāsanaṃ nisīdāhī’’tiiccevaṃiminā pakārena sabbaṃ vattabbanti yojanā.Deyyaṃ senāsanampi cāti senāsanañca dātabbaṃ.Ca-saddena ‘‘avutthaṃ vā ajjhāvutthaṃ vā ācikkhitabba’’ntiādinā vuttaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Mahāāvāsepi attano santikaṃ sampattassa āgantukassa vattaṃ akātuṃ na labbhati.
2925.The phrase "Place the bowl here, sit on this seat" – iccevaṃ – everything should be stated in this manner. Deyyaṃ senāsanampi cā means lodging should also be given. The word ca combines what has been said such as "Avutthaṃ vā ajjhāvutthaṃ vā ācikkhitabba." Even in a large monastery, one is not allowed to neglect the duties towards a newly arrived guest who has come to one's presence.
2926.‘‘Mātikāya niddiṭṭhakkameneva vattāni kātabbāni, udāhu yathānuppattivasenā’’ti koci maññeyyāti mātikākkameneva kātabbanti niyamo natthi, yathānuppattavaseneva kātabbanti viññāpetuṃ mātikākkamamanādiyitvā gamikavattaṃ āraddhaṃ. Atha vā vatticchānupubbakattā saddapayogassa mātikākkamamanādiyitvā yathicchaṃ niddeso katoti veditabboti.Dārumattikabhaṇḍānīti mañcapīṭhādīni ceva rajanabhājanāni ca.Paṭisāmetvāti guttaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā.Āvasathampi thaketvāti āvasathe dvārakavāṭādīni ca thaketvā.
2926.Someone might think, "Should the duties be performed according to the order specified in the Mātikā, or according to what arises?" To clarify that there is no fixed rule that they must be done in the order of the Mātikā, but rather according to what arises, the Gamika duties are begun without regard to the Mātikā order. Alternatively, it should be understood that the instruction is given as desired, without regard to the Mātikā order, due to the sequence of desired duties in the word usage. Dārumattikabhaṇḍānī means items made of wood and clay, such as beds and seats, as well as dye containers. Paṭisāmetvā means after placing them in a safe place. Āvasathampi thaketvā means securing the doors and gates of the dwelling.
2927.Āpucchitvāpīti bhikkhussa vā sāmaṇerassa vā ārāmikassa vā ‘‘imaṃ paṭijaggāhī’’ti niyyādetvā vā.Pucchitabbe asantepīti etthapi-saddo pana-saddattho.Gopetvā vāpi sādhukanti ‘‘catūsu pāsāṇesu mañcaṃ paññapetvā mañce mañcaṃ āropetvā’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 360) vuttanayena sammā paṭisāmetvā gantabbanti yojanā.
2927.Āpucchitvāpī means entrusting it to a monk, novice, or ārāmika, saying, "Take care of this." Pucchitabbe asantepī Here, the word pi has the sense of pana. Gopetvā vāpi sādhuka means going away after properly storing them in the manner described, such as "after placing the bed on four stones and lifting the bed onto the bed." (cūḷava. 360)
2928.Piṇḍacārikavattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sahasā’’tiādi. Piṇḍacāriko bhikkhu antaragharaṃ pavisantosahasā na pavisesīghaṃ na paviseyya, nikkhamantosahasā na nikkhamesīghaṃ na nikkhameyya, bhikkhusāruppena paviseyya, nikkhameyya ca.Piṇḍacārinābhikkhunā gehadvāraṃ sampattenaatidūre na ṭhātabbaṃnibbakosato atidūraṭṭhāne na ṭhātabbaṃ.Accāsanne na ṭhātabbaṃnibbakosato āsannatare ṭhāne na ṭhātabbaṃ.
2928.To show the Piṇḍacārika duties, he says "sahasā" etc. A monk who is a Piṇḍacārika, when entering a house, should sahasā na pavise not enter quickly; when leaving, should sahasā na nikkhame not leave quickly; he should enter and leave in a manner befitting a monk. A Piṇḍacārinā monk, upon reaching the house door, should atidūre na ṭhātabbaṃ not stand too far from the opening; accāsanne na ṭhātabbaṃ not stand too close to the opening.
2929.Uccāretvāti upanāmetvā.Bhājananti pattaṃ.Dakkhiṇena paṇāmetvāti dakkhiṇena hatthena upanāmetvā.Bhikkhaṃ gaṇheyyāti ettha ‘‘ubhohi hatthehi paṭiggahetvā’’ti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘ubhohi hatthehi pattaṃ paṭiggahetvā bhikkhā gahetabbā’’ti (cūḷava. 366).
2929.Uccāretvā means raising it up. Bhājana means the bowl. Dakkhiṇena paṇāmetvā means extending it with the right hand. Bhikkhaṃ gaṇheyyā In this context, "after receiving it with both hands" is implied. As it was said - "Having received the bowl with both hands, alms should be taken" (cūḷava. 366).
2930.Sūpaṃ dātukāmā vā adātukāmā vā iti muhuttakaṃsallakkheyyatiṭṭheyya.Antarāti bhikkhādānasamaye.Nabhikkhādāyikāti itthī vā hotu puriso vā, bhikkhādānasamaye mukhaṃ na oloketabbanti.
2930.Whether willing to give soup or not, one should sallakkheyya pause for a moment. Antarā during the time of giving alms. Na bhikkhādāyikā means whether it is a woman or a man, one should not look at the face during the time of giving alms.
2931.Piṇḍacārikavattaṃ dassetvā āraññikavattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘pānīyādī’’tiādi.Pānīyādītiādi-saddena paribhojanīyaaggiaraṇisahitakattarayaṭṭhīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo –pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbanti sace bhājanāni nappahonti, pānīyameva paribhojanīyampi katvā upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Bhājanaṃ alabhantena veḷunāḷikāyapi upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Tampi alabhantassa yathā samīpe khuddakaāvāṭo hoti, evaṃ kātabbaṃ. Araṇisahite asati aggiṃ akātumpi ca vaṭṭati. Yathā ca āraññikassa, evaṃ kantārapaṭipannassāpi araṇisahitaṃ icchitabbaṃ. Gaṇavāsino pana tena vināpi vaṭṭatīti.
2931.After showing the Piṇḍacārika duties, to show the Āraññika duties, he says "pānīyādī" etc. Pānīyādī the term ādi includes the acceptance of items such as a razor and a staff for personal use, along with a fire-drill. Here is the judgment in that regard - pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabba if containers are not available, then even drinking water should be prepared as water for use. If a container is not available, it should be prepared even with a bamboo tube. If even that is not available, it should be done in such a way that there is a small well nearby. Without a fire-drill, it is also proper not to make a fire. And just as for an Āraññika, so too for one who has set out on a journey through the wilderness, a fire-drill is desirable. But for those living in a group, it is acceptable even without it.
Nakkhattanti assayujādisattavīsatividhaṃ nakkhattaṃ jānitabbanti sambandho. Kathaṃ jānitabbanti āha‘‘tena yogo cā’’ti, tena nakkhattena candassa yogo ñātabboti attho.Jānitabbā disāpi cāti araññe viharantena aṭṭhapi disā asammohato jānitabbā.
Nakkhatta means that one should know the twenty-seven kinds of constellations beginning with Assayuja. How should one know? He says "tena yogo cā", meaning that one should know the conjunction of the moon with that constellation. Jānitabbā disāpi cā meaning one living in the forest should know the eight directions without confusion.
2932.Aññavattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘vaccapassāvatitthānī’’tiādi.Paṭipāṭiyā bhavantīti gatānukkamena sevitabbā bhavanti. Yathāha – ‘‘vaccakuṭiyaṃ, passāvaṭṭhāne, nhānatittheti tīsupi āgatapaṭipāṭiyeva pamāṇa’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 373).Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ karontassāti gatapaṭipāṭiṃ vinā vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā karontassa.
2932.To show other duties, he says "vaccapassāvatitthānī" etc. Paṭipāṭiyā bhavantī means they should be attended to in the order they occur. As it was said – "At the toilet, the place for urination, and the bathing place, the order in which one arrives is the measure" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 373). Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ karontassā means performing duties according to seniority, without regard to the order of arrival.
2933.Vaccakuṭiṃ pavisanto sahasā na paviseyya.Ubbhajitvāti cīvaraṃ ukkhipitvā.
2933.When entering the toilet, one should not enter quickly. Ubbhajitvā means raising the robe.
2934.Nitthunantena bhikkhunā vaccaṃ na kātabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Vaccassa dunniggamanena upahato hutvā nitthunati ce, na doso’’tisikkhābhājanavinicchayevuttaṃ. Daṇḍakaṭṭhaṃ khādato vaccaṃkarotobhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā.
2934.It should be construed that a monk should not make a sound when defecating. "If he makes a sound because he is afflicted by difficult bowel movements, there is no offense," is stated in Sikkhābhājanavinicchaya. If a monk defecates while chewing on a piece of wood, a dukkaṭa arises, this should be construed.
2936.Kharenāti pharusena vā phālitakaṭṭhena vā gaṇṭhikena vā kaṇṭakena vā susirena vā pūtinā vā daṇḍenana avalekheyyana puñcheyya.Na kaṭṭhaṃ vaccakūpake chaḍḍeyyāti taṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vaccakūpe na chaḍḍeyya. Passāvadoṇiyā kheḷaṃ na pāteyyāti yojanā.
2936.Kharenā means one should na avalekheyya not wipe with a rough, split piece of wood, or with a knotty, thorny, hollow, or rotten piece of wood. Na kaṭṭhaṃ vaccakūpake chaḍḍeyyā means one should not throw that piece of wood into the toilet pit. It should be construed that one should not spit phlegm into the urinal trough.
2937.Pādukāsūti vaccapassāvapādukāsu.Nikkhamanenikkhamanakāle.Tatthevāti vaccapassāvapādukāsveva.Paṭicchādeyyāti ukkhittaṃ cīvaraṃ otāretvā sarīraṃ paṭicchādeyya.
2937.Pādukāsū means at the toilet and urination slippers. Nikkhamane at the time of leaving. Tatthevā means at the toilet and urination slippers themselves. Paṭicchādeyyā means after lowering the raised robe, one should cover the body.
2938.Yo vaccaṃ katvā salile satisace nācameyyaudakakiccaṃ na kareyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ uddiṭṭhanti yojanā.Mohanāsināti savāsanassa mohassa, tena sahajekaṭṭhapahānekaṭṭhānaṃ sakalasaṃkilesānañca pahāyinā āsavakkhayañāṇena samucchindatāmunināsabbaññunā sammāsambuddhena.‘‘Salile satī’’ti iminā asati niddosataṃ dīpeti. Yathāha –
2938.It should be construed that if there is water available, and one sace nācameyya does not perform the water duty, a dukkaṭa is prescribed for him. Mohanāsinā means by the destroyer of delusion along with its latent tendencies, by the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas that cuts off all defilements along with their single root and single cause, by the muninā All-Knowing, Perfectly Enlightened One. By saying "Salile satī" it indicates blamelessness when water is not available. As it was said:
‘‘Sati udaketi ettha sace udakaṃ atthi, paṭicchannaṭṭhānaṃ pana natthi, bhājanena nīharitvā ācamitabbaṃ. Bhājane asati pattena nīharitabbaṃ. Pattepi asati asantaṃ nāma hoti. ‘Idaṃ ativivaṭaṃ, purato aññaṃ udakaṃ bhavissatī’ti gatassa udakaṃ alabhantasseva bhikkhācāravelā hoti, kaṭṭhena vā kenaci vā puñchitvā gantabbaṃ, bhuñjitumpi anumodanampi kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 373).
"In 'Sati udake,' if there is water but no concealed place, one should fetch water in a vessel and rinse. If there is no vessel, one should fetch it with the bowl. If there is no bowl either, it is considered unavailable. If one is going thinking, 'This is too exposed; there will be other water ahead,' and then does not find water, and it is time for the alms round, one should wipe with a stick or something else and go; it is permissible to eat and to give anumodana" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 373).
2939.Sasaddanti udakasaddaṃ katvā. ‘‘Pāsāṇādiṭṭhāne paharitvā udakaṃ saddāyati ce, na doso’’tisikkhābhājanavinicchayevuttaṃ.Capu capūti cāti tādisaṃ anukaraṇaṃ katvā nācametabbanti yojanā.Ācamitvāti udakakiccaṃ katvā.Sarāveācamanabhājane udakaṃ na sesetabbanti yojanā, idaṃ pana sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathāhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
2939.Sasadda means making a noise with the water. "If the water makes a noise after striking a stone or something similar, there is no offense," is stated in Sikkhābhājanavinicchaye. Capu capūti cā means one should not rinse imitating such a sound. Ācamitvā means after performing the water duty. Sarāve one should not leave water remaining in the rinsing vessel, this statement however, is made in reference to a place used by all. As it was said in the Aṭṭhakathā–
‘‘Ācamanasarāvaketi sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatra hi aññe aññe āgacchanti, tasmā udakaṃ na sesetabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana saṅghikepi vihāre ekadese nibaddhagamanatthāya kataṃ ṭhānaṃ hoti puggalikaṭṭhānaṃ vā, tasmiṃ vaṭṭati. Virecanaṃ pivitvā punappunaṃ pavisantassāpi vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 374).
"‘Ācamanasarāvake’ this is said in reference to a place used by all. For indeed, different people come and go there, therefore water should not be left remaining. However, in a Saṅghika monastery, a place that is made in one area for regular use, or a private place, that is acceptable. It is also acceptable for one who repeatedly enters after drinking a purgative" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 374).
2940.Ūhatampīti aññena vā attanā vā asañcicca ūhataṃ malena dūsitaṭṭhānaṃ.Adhovitvāti jale sati asodhetvā jale asati kaṭṭhena vā kenaci vā puñchitvā gantabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘udakaṃ atthi bhājanaṃ natthi, asantaṃ nāma hoti, bhājanaṃ atthi udakaṃ natthi, etampi asantaṃ, ubhaye pana asati asantameva, kaṭṭhena vā kenaci vā puñchitvā gantabba’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 374).Uklāpāpi sace hontīti vaccapassāvaṭṭhānāni sace kacavarākiṇṇāni honti.‘‘Asesato sodhetabba’’nti iminā tato kassaci kacavarassa apanayanaṃ sodhanaṃ nāma na hoti, nissesakacavarāpanayanameva sodhananti dīpeti.
2940.Ūhatampī Even a place contaminated by dirt swept by someone else or oneself unintentionally. Adhovitvā means if there is water, one should go without cleaning it; if there is no water, one should wipe it with a stick or something else and go. As it was said – "There is water, but no vessel; it is considered unavailable. There is a vessel, but no water; this too is unavailable. But when both are unavailable, it is simply unavailable; one should wipe with a stick or something else and go" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 374). Uklāpāpi sace hontī If the toilet and urination areas are full of rubbish. "Asesato sodhetabba" This indicates that removing some of the rubbish from there is not called cleaning; only the removal of all the rubbish is cleaning.
2941.Piṭharoti avalekhanakaṭṭhanikkhepanabhājanaṃ.Kumbhī ce rittāti ācamanakumbhī sace tucchā.
2941.Piṭharo means a vessel for disposing of wiping sticks. Kumbhī ce rittā if the rinsing pot is empty.
2942.Evaṃ vaccakuṭivattaṃ dassetvā senāsanavattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘anajjhiṭṭho’’tiādi.Anajjhiṭṭhoti ananuññāto.
2942.Having thus shown the toilet duties, to show the Senāsana duties, he says "anajjhiṭṭho" etc. Anajjhiṭṭho means without being instructed.
2943.Vuḍḍhaṃ āpucchitvā kathentassāti yojanā.Vuḍḍhatarāgameti yaṃ āpucchitvā kathetumāraddho, tatopi vuḍḍhatarassa bhikkhuno āgame sati.
2943.It should be construed that one speaks after asking an elder. Vuḍḍhatarāgame when an even older monk arrives than the one whom one has started to speak after asking.
2944.Ekavihārasminti ekasmiṃ gehe.‘‘Anāpucchā’’ti idaṃ vakkhamānehi yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
2944.Ekavihārasmi in one dwelling. "Anāpucchā" This should be connected appropriately with what will be said next.
2945.Paṭhamaṃ yattha katthaci vuḍḍhānaṃ sannidhāne kattabbavattaṃ niddiṭṭhanti idāni ekavihāre vasantenāpi tassa kātabbataṃ dassetuṃ punapi‘‘na ca dhammo kathetabbo’’ti āha.Dhammacakkhunāti dhammalocanena dhammagarukena, iminā atādisassa kato vāro niratthakoti dīpeti.
2945.First, the duties to be performed in the presence of elders wherever they may be have been specified; now, to show that those duties should also be performed by one living in the same dwelling, he again says "na ca dhammo kathetabbo." Dhammacakkhunā with the eye of Dhamma, with respect for the Dhamma; by this it indicates that if it is done by one who is not like that, it is pointless.
2946.Kātabboti jāletabbo.Soti dīpo. ‘‘Dvāraṃ nāma yasmā mahāvaḷañjaṃ, tasmā tattha āpucchanakiccaṃ natthī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 369) vacanato taṃ avatvā āpattikkhettameva dassetumāha‘‘vātapānakavāṭāni, thakeyya vivareyya no’’ti.
2946.Kātabbo should be lit. So the lamp. Since "a door is called a Mahāvaḷañja, therefore there is no need to ask permission there" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 369), without saying that, to show only the area of offense, he says "vātapānakavāṭāni, thakeyya vivareyya no."
2947.Vuḍḍhatoparivattayeti yena vuḍḍho, tato parivattaye, piṭṭhiṃ adassetvā vuḍḍhābhimukho tena parivattayeti attho. Cīvarakaṇṇena vā kāyena vātaṃvuḍḍhaṃ na ca ghaṭṭaye.
2947.Vuḍḍhato parivattaye means one should turn away from the elder, turn towards the elder without showing one's back. One should not touch taṃ that elder with the edge of one's robe or with one's body.
2948.Evaṃ senāsanavattaṃ dassetvā jantāgharavattaṃ dassetumāha‘‘purato’’tiādi. Therānaṃ purato neva nhāyeyya,uparipaṭisote na ca nhāyeyya,otarantānaṃvuḍḍhānaṃuttaraṃuttaranto maggaṃ dadeyya,na ghaṭṭayekāyena vā cīvarena vā na ghaṭṭayeyyāti yojanā.
2948.Having thus shown the Senāsana duties, to show the Jantāghara duties, he says "purato" etc. One should never bathe in front of the elders; upari one should not bathe upstream; to the elders otarantānaṃ descending, one should give way uttaraṃ ascending; one should na ghaṭṭaye not touch with one's body or robe, this should be construed.
sekhiyakathāyavuttattā ca upajjhāyavattādīnaṃmahākhandhakakathāyavuttattā ca anumodanavattānaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhattagge catūhi pañcahi therānutherehi bhikkhūhi āgametu’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 362) nayena bhattaggavatteyeva antogadhabhāvena vuttattā ca niddese tāni na vuttāni, tathāpi tesu anumodanavattaṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 362) – saṅghatthere anumodanatthāya nisinne heṭṭhā paṭipāṭiyā catūhi nisīditabbaṃ. Anuthere nisinne mahātherena ca heṭṭhā ca tīhi nisīditabbaṃ. Pañcame nisinne upari catūhi nisīditabbaṃ. Saṅghattherena heṭṭhā daharabhikkhusmiṃ ajjhiṭṭhepi saṅghattherato paṭṭhāya catūhi nisīditabbameva. Sace pana anumodako bhikkhu ‘‘gacchatha, bhante, āgametabbakiccaṃ natthī’’ti vadati, gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Mahātherena ‘‘gacchāma, āvuso’’ti vutte ‘‘gacchathā’’ti vadati, evampi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bahigāme āgamessāmā’’ti ābhogaṃ katvāpi bahigāmaṃ gantvā attano nissitake ‘‘tumhe tassa āgamanaṃ āgamethā’’ti vatvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Sace pana manussā attano rucitena ekena anumodanaṃ kārenti, neva tassa anumodato āpatti, na ca mahātherassa bhāro hoti. Upanisinnakathāyameva hi manussesu kathāpentesu mahāthero āpucchitabbo, mahātherena ca anumodanāya ajjhiṭṭhova āgametabboti idamettha lakkhaṇanti.
Since the duties regarding a sekhiya are mentioned in the Sekhiyakathā, and the duties regarding the dependence on preceptor, etc., are mentioned in the Mahākhandhakakathā, and since the duties regarding approval are included within the duties of the refectory by way of the statement, "I allow, monks, to approach the refectory with four or five senior and junior monks," etc. (Cūḷava. 362), they are not mentioned in the explanation. Nevertheless, regarding those, the duty of approval should be understood thus (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 362): When the senior monk of the Sangha is seated for approval, four should sit below him in order. When a junior monk is seated, the most senior monk and three below him should sit. When a fifth is seated, four should sit above him. Even if a junior monk is requested below the senior monk of the Sangha, four should still sit beginning from the senior monk of the Sangha. But if the monk giving approval says, "Go, venerable ones, there is no need for approaching," it is permissible to go. If the senior monk says, "Let us go, friend," and he says, "Go," even then it is permissible. Having made an arrangement, saying, "We will approach in another village," and even after going to another village and telling his dependents, "You await his arrival," it is still permissible to go. But if people have approval done by one person according to their liking, there is no offense for that person giving approval, nor is there a burden on the senior monk. For when people are speaking on a raised platform, the senior monk should be asked for permission, and the senior monk should be requested to approach for approval; this is the characteristic here.
2949.Vattanti yathāvuttaṃ ābhisamācārikavattaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘ābhisamācārikaṃ aparipūretvā sīlaṃ paripūressatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti.Na vindatīti na labhati.
2949.Vatta means the duties of proper conduct as stated above. As it was said, "Without fulfilling the proper conduct, he will fulfill the morality; this is not possible." Na vindati means does not obtain.
2950.Anekaggoti vikkhittattāyeva asamāhitacitto.Na ca passatīti ñāṇacakkhunā na passati, daṭṭhuṃ samattho na hotīti attho.Dukkhāti jātidukkhādidukkhato.
2950.Anekaggo means with a scattered mind, due to being distracted, not concentrated. Na ca passati means does not see with the eye of wisdom; it means he is not able to see. Dukkhā means from suffering such as the suffering of birth.
2951.Tasmāti yasmā dukkhā na parimuccati, tasmā. Ovādaṃ katvā kiṃ visesaṃ pāpuṇātīti āha‘‘ovādaṃ buddhaseṭṭhassa, katvā nibbānamehitī’’ti.Ehitipāpuṇissati.
2951.Tasmā means because he is not freed from suffering. After giving advice, what distinction does he attain? He says, ‘‘ovādaṃ buddhaseṭṭhassa, katvā nibbānamehitī’’ti. Ehiti means will attain.
Vattakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Vattakkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā
2952.Vivaritvānacīvaraṃ apanetvā.
2952.Vivaritvāna means having uncovered the robe, having removed it.
2953.Yaṃ kiñci sampayojentiyāti yaṃ kiñci anācāraṃ karontiyā.Tatoti tena anācārasaṅkhātena asaddhammena.Bhāsantiyāti vācāya bhāsantiyā.
2953.Yaṃ kiñci sampayojentiyā means doing any kind of improper conduct. Tato means from that unrighteousness, which is the cause of improper conduct. Bhāsantiyā means speaking with the voice.
2954-6.Dīghanti ekaparikkhepato dīghaṃ.Vilīvena ca paṭṭenāti saṇhehipi vilīvehi katapaṭṭena.Cammapaṭṭenāti cammamayapaṭṭena.Dussapaṭṭenāti setavatthena.Dussaveṇiyāti dussena gaṇṭhitaveṇiyā.Dussavaṭṭiyāti dussena katavaṭṭiyā.Na phāsukā nametabbāti majjhimassa tanubhāvatthāya gāmadārikā viya phāsulikā na nāmetabbā.Jaghananti muttakaraṇappadesaṃ.Aṭṭhikādināti gojāṇuṭṭhikādinā.Na ghaṃsāpeyyāti na ghaṭṭāpeyya. ‘‘Aṭṭhikādinā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘na ghaṃsāpeyyā’’ti iminā ca ‘‘koṭṭāpetī’’ti iminā kiriyāpadena ca sambandhitabbaṃ.
2954-6.Dīgha means long from one circumference. Vilīvena ca paṭṭenā means with a strip made of smooth vilīva. Cammapaṭṭenā means with a leather strip. Dussapaṭṭenā means with white cloth. Dussaveṇiyā means with a braid tied with cloth. Dussavaṭṭiyā means with a roll made of cloth. Na phāsukā nametabbā means the ribs should not be bent down like village girls, for the sake of a thin waist. Jaghana means the area where urine and feces are eliminated. Aṭṭhikādinā means with a kneebone, etc. Na ghaṃsāpeyyā means should not cause to rub. "Aṭṭhikādinā" should be connected with both "na ghaṃsāpeyyā" and the verb "koṭṭāpeti".
2957.‘‘Koṭṭāpetī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘hatthaṃ vā’’tiādīhi upayogantapadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Hatthanti aggabāhaṃ.Hatthakocchanti piṭṭhihatthaṃ.Pādanti jaṅghaṃ.
2957.‘‘Koṭṭāpetī’’ This should be connected individually with the instrumental case words beginning with "hatthaṃ vā." Hattha means the upper arm. Hatthakoccha means the back of the hand. Pāda means the shin.
2958.Na mukhaṃ limpitabbanti chavipasādakarena tilasāsapakakkādinā anekavidhena limpanena na limpitabbaṃ.Na cuṇṇetabbanti mukhacuṇṇalepanaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Manosilāya mukhaṃ lañjantiyā āpatti siyāti yojanā.
2958.Na mukhaṃ limpitabba means the face should not be smeared with various kinds of smearing agents such as sesame, mustard, or kakkā that beautify the skin. Na cuṇṇetabba means facial powder should not be applied. The explanation is that an offense would occur if the face is painted with red arsenic.
2959.Aṅgarāgo na kātabboti haliddikuṅkumādīhi sarīracchavirāgo na kātabbo.Avaṅgaṃ na ca kātabbanti añjanaṃ bahi akkhikoṭiyā lekhaṃ ṭhapetvā na añjitabbaṃ.Na kātabbaṃ visesakanti gaṇḍapadese vicitrasaṇṭhānaṃ visesakaṃ vattabhaṅgaṃ na kātabbaṃ.
2959.Aṅgarāgo na kātabbo means the body complexion should not be colored with turmeric, saffron, etc. Avaṅgaṃ na ca kātabba means añjana should not be applied by keeping a line outside the corner of the eye. Na kātabbaṃ visesaka means a visesaka of various shapes should not be made on the cheek.
2960.Olokanakatoti vātapānato.Rāgāti kāmarāgena.Oloketunti antaravīthiṃ viloketuṃ, sāloke na ca ṭhātabbanti yojanā. Sāloke dvāraṃ vivaritvā upaḍḍhakāyaṃ dassentīhi na ṭhātabbaṃ.Sanaccanti naṭasamajjaṃ.
2960.Olokanakato means from the window. Rāgā means with sensual desire. Oloketu means to look into the inner street; the explanation is that one should not stand in the public view. One should not stand showing half of the body, having opened the door in public view. Sanacca means a dancing assembly.
2961.Gaṇikaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyāvesiṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā.‘‘Vikkiṇantiyā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sura’’ntiādīhi upayogantapadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
2961.Gaṇikaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā means establishing a prostitute. ‘‘Vikkiṇantiyā’’ this should be connected individually with the instrumental case words beginning with "sura."
2963.Nacevupaṭṭhāpetabboti attano veyyāvaccaṃ neva kārāpetabbo. Tiracchānagatopi dāso vā dāsī vā tiracchānagatopi kammakaro vāna ceva upaṭṭhāpetabboneva attano veyyāvaccaṃ kārāpetabbo.Api-saddena pageva manussabhūtoti dīpeti.
2963.Na ceva upaṭṭhāpetabbo means one should not have one's own services performed. Even a slave, male or female, who is an animal, or a worker who is an animal, na ceva upaṭṭhāpetabbo means one should not have one's own services performed. The api emphasizes that one should not even have a human being do it.
2964.‘‘Sabbanīlādi’’nti iminā –
2964.‘‘Sabbanīlādi’’ in this –
‘‘Sabbanīlakamañjeṭṭha-kaṇhalohitapītake;
‘‘Sabbanīlakamañjeṭṭha-kaṇhalohitapītake;
Mahānāmamahāraṅga-rattesū’’ti. (vi. vi. 598) –
aṭṭhakathāyavuttattā,gaṇṭhipadeca ‘‘santharaṇasadiso pilotikāhi kato parikkhāraviseso’’ti vuttattā ca nipajjāya paribhuñjitabbo parikkhāravisesonamatakaṃnāma.
since it is mentioned in the Aṭṭhakathā, and in the Gaṇṭhipada, it is said, "A special kind of equipment made of rags similar to a santharaṇa," namatakaṃ is the name of a special kind of equipment to be used for lying down.
2965.Channampi purisabyañjanaṃ ‘‘etthā’’ti cintetvā rāgacittena olokentiyā dukkaṭaṃ hoti.Sabbanti vuttappakāraṃ sabbaṃ.
2965.There is a dukkaṭa offense for looking at all six male characteristics with a lustful mind, thinking "here". Sabba means all of the type mentioned.
2966.Bhikkhuṃ dūratova passitvātassabhikkhuno dūrato okkamitvāna maggo dātabboti yojanā.
2966.Having seen a monk from afar, the explanation is that one should move away from that monk from a distance and give way.
2967.Bhikkhaṃcarantiyābhikkhuniyā bhikkhuṃ passitvā pana yena bhikkhāya carati,taṃpattaṃnīharitvāupari chādetvā ṭhitaṃ saṅghāṭicīvaraṃ apanetvāukkujjaṃuddhaṃmukhaṃ katvā bhikkhuno dassetabbanti yojanā.
2967.Having seen a monk while a bhikkhunī is going for alms, the explanation is that the bhikkhunī should take that bowl with which she goes for alms, remove the outer robe that is covering it, turn it upside down, and show it to the monk.
2968.Utunīnaṃbhikkhunīnaṃutukālesañjātapupphe kālesaṃvellikaṃ kātuṃkacchaṃ bandhituṃ mahesinā kaṭisuttakaṃ anuññātanti yojanā, iminā aññasmiṃ kāle kaṭisuttakaṃ bandhituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Yathāha – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā sabbakālaṃ kaṭisuttakaṃ dhāretabbaṃ, yā dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, utuniyā kaṭisuttaka’’nti (cūḷava. 422).
2968.The explanation is that for bhikkhunīs who are menstruating, the waist-string was allowed by the great sage to tie the kaccha during the time when menstruation occurs. This indicates that it is not permissible to tie the waist-string at other times. As it was said, "Monks, a bhikkhunī should not wear a waist-string at all times. Whoever would wear it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. I allow, monks, a waist-string for one who is menstruating" (Cūḷava. 422).
2969.Itthiposayutanti itthīhi vā purisehi vā itthipurisehi vā yuttaṃ. Itthiposayuttaṃ hatthavaṭṭakameva vā.Pāṭaṅkīti paṭapoṭṭalikaṃ.
2969.Itthiposayuta means associated with women, men, or both women and men. Itthiposayutta refers to a hatthavaṭṭaka. Pāṭaṅkī means a bag made of cloth.
2970.Garudhammeti saṅghādisese.Mānattanti pakkhamānattaṃ.Sammannitvāti ñattidutiyāya kammavācāya sammannitvā.
2970.Garudhamme means in the saṅghādisesa. Mānatta means pakkhamānatta. Sammannitvā means having appointed with a declaration and a second declaration.
2971.Yassā itthiyā pabbajitakāle gabbhovuṭṭhātivijāyati yadi, putto ce,tassāpidārakamātu yāva so dārako viññutaṃ pāpuṇāti, yāva khādituṃ, bhuñjituṃ, nahāyituñca attano dhammatāya sakkoti, tāva dutiyā bhikkhunī tathā sammannitvā dātabbāti yojanā.
2971.If the womb of a woman who has gone forth is vuṭṭhāti delivered, if it is a son, the explanation is that a second bhikkhunī should be appointed and given to the mother of the child until that child reaches maturity, until he is able to eat, consume, bathe, and act according to his own nature.
2972.Sāpana mātābhikkhunī attano puttaṃ pāyetuṃ, bhojetuṃ, maṇḍetuṃ, ure katvā sayituñca labhatīti yojanā.
2972.Sā pana mātā The explanation is that the bhikkhunī who is the mother is allowed to nurse, feed, adorn her own son, and lie down holding him to her breast.
2973.Dutiyikāyabhikkhuniyā dārakenasahaseyyaṃṭhapetvā yathā aññesu purisesuvattitabbaṃpaṭipajjitabbaṃ, tathā evatasmiṃdārake vattitabbanti yojanā.
2973.The explanation is that the second bhikkhunī should conduct herself towards that child in the same way that she should conduct herself towards other men, not keeping sahaseyyaṃ with the child.
2974.Vibbhamenevāti attano ruciyā setavatthānaṃ gahaṇeneva. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmā sā vibbhantā attano ruciyā khantiyā odātāni vatthāni nivatthā, tasmāyeva sā abhikkhunī, na sikkhāpaccakkhānenā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 434).Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.
2974.Vibbhamenevā means just by taking white clothes according to one's own liking. As it was said, "Because she is deranged, having worn white clothes according to her own liking and tolerance, therefore she is not a bhikkhunī, not by renouncing the training" (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 434). Idhā means in this Dispensation.
2975.Gatāyāti ettha ‘‘sakāvāsā’’ti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘yā sā, bhikkhave, bhikkhunī sakāvāsā titthāyatanaṃ saṅkantā, sā āgatā na upasampādetabbā’’ti. Na kevalaṃ na upasampādetabbā, pabbajjampi na labhati. Odātāni gahetvā vibbhantā pana pabbajjāmattaṃ labhati.
2975.Gatāyā the rest here is "sakāvāsā". As it was said, "Monks, that bhikkhunī who has gone from her own dwelling to a heretical hermitage, she should not be ordained when she has come back." Not only should she not be ordained, but she also does not obtain the going forth. However, one who is deranged, having taken white clothes, obtains just the going forth.
2976.Vandananti pāde sambāhetvā vandanaṃ.Sādituṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāditu’’nti (cūḷava. 434) anuññātattā vaṭṭati. Tatreke ācariyā ‘‘sace ekato vā ubhato vā avassutā honti sārattā, yathāvatthukamevā’’ti vadanti. Eke ācariyā ‘‘natthi ettha āpattī’’ti vadantīti evaṃ ācariyavādaṃ dassetvā ‘‘idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāsuvuttaṃ, taṃ pamāṇaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāditu’’nti (cūḷava. 434) hi vacaneneva kappiyaṃ.
2976.Vandana means bowing down after massaging the feet. Sādituṃ vaṭṭatī means it is allowable, because it is permitted, "I allow, monks, to massage" (Cūḷava. 434). Some teachers say, "If they are lustful, discharging from one or both sides, it is just as the case may be." Some teachers say, "There is no offense here." Thus, having shown the teachers' opinions, it is said in the Aṭṭhakathās, "This is allowed with reference to this," that is the standard. For by the very statement, "I allow, monks, to massage" (Cūḷava. 434), it is allowable.
2977.Yāya kāyaci vaccakuṭiyā vacco na kātabbo, heṭṭhā vivaṭe uddhaṃ paṭicchanne pana vaccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Heṭṭhā vivaṭe upari paṭicchannetiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘sace kūpo khato hoti, upari pana padaramattameva sabbadisāsu paññāyati, evarūpepi vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 435) vuttaṃ.
2977.Feces should not be disposed of in any latrine whatsoever, but it is permissible to dispose of feces where it is open below and covered above. In the Aṭṭhakathā, regarding Heṭṭhā vivaṭe upari paṭicchanne, it is said, "If a pit has been dug, but only a layer of earth is visible in all directions above, it is allowable even in such a place" (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 435).
2978.Sabbatthāti bhikkhuniupassayaantaragharādisabbaṭṭhānesu.Gilānāyāti yassā vinā pallaṅkaṃ na phāsu hoti.Aḍḍhapallaṅkanti ekapādaṃ ābhujitvā katapallaṅkaṃ. So ekaṃ paṇhiṃ ūrumūlāsannaṃ katvā itaraṃ dūre katvā ābhujitapallaṅko nāma.
2978.Sabbatthā means in all places, such as inside the dwelling of a bhikkhunī. Gilānāyā means for one who is not comfortable without a couch. Aḍḍhapallaṅka means a couch made by folding one leg. That is called a half-couch, having put one heel near the root of the thigh and having the other far away.
2979.Naratittheti purisānaṃ nahānatitthe. Yathāha – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā purisatitthe nahāyitabbaṃ, yā nahāyeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mahilātitthe nahāyitu’’nti (cūḷava. 436).
2979.Naratitthe means in a bathing place for men. As it was said, "Monks, a bhikkhunī should not bathe in a bathing place for men. Whoever would bathe, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. I allow, monks, to bathe in a bathing place for women" (Cūḷava. 436).
2980.Yā samaṇī gandhacuṇṇena vāvāsitamattiyāvāsitakāya mattikāya vā paṭisote vā nhāyeyya, tassā āpatti dukkaṭanti yojanā.Vāsitavisesanena avāsitā vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Yathāha – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pakatimattika’’nti (cūḷava. 436).
2980.The explanation is that for whatever female ascetic who would bathe with fragrant powder or with vāsitamattiyā, clay that has been scented, or against the current, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. The specification Vāsita indicates that un-scented is allowable. As it was said, "I allow, monks, natural clay" (Cūḷava. 436).
2981.Abhutvāti ettha āmisaaggaṃ gahaṇamattampi akatvā, pattacīvaraṃ katipayadivasānipi aparibhuñjitvāti attho. Sace asappāyaṃ, sabbampi apanetuṃ vaṭṭati.
2981.Abhutvā means without even taking a morsel of food, without using even the bowl and robe for a few days. If it is unsuitable, it is permissible to remove everything.
2982.Anupasampanne asantesabbaṃbhikkhūhi paṭiggahitaṃ vā appaṭiggahitaṃ vā sannidhikataṃ vā sabbaṃ ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ bhikkhūhi paṭiggahāpetvā paribhuñjituṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ pakaraṇavasena vuttaṃ. Bhikkhunīhipi paṭiggahāpetvā bhikkhūnampi tathāvidhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Yathāha – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṃ sannidhiṃ bhikkhunīhi paṭiggāhāpetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 421).
2982.The explanation is that for a non-ordained person who is not present, sabbaṃ, all that has been received or not received by the monks, or all that has been stored up, is to be consumed, it is allowable for the bhikkhunīs to consume after having it received by the monks. ‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ this is said in accordance with the context. It is also allowable for monks to consume such things after having them received by the bhikkhunīs. As it was said, "I allow, monks, for monks to consume stores after having them received by the bhikkhunīs" (Cūḷava. 421).
Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the Khandhakakathāvaṇṇanā in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī, the commentary on the Vinayavinicchaya.
Khandhakakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Khandhaka Section is finished.
Catubbidhakammakathāvaṇṇanā
Catubbidhakammakathāvaṇṇanā
2983.Apalokanasaññitaṃ kammaṃ, ñattikammaṃ, ñattidutiyakammaṃ, ñatticatutthakammanti imāni cattāri kammānīti yojanā. Tatthacattārīti gaṇanaparicchedo.Imānīti anantarameva vakkhamānattā āsannapaccakkhavacanaṃ.Kammānīti paricchinnakammanidassanaṃ.‘‘Apalokanasaañata’’ntiādi tesaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ.
2983.The explanation is that these four actions are: the action designated as apalokana, the action of declaration, the action of declaration with a second statement, and the action of declaration with a fourth statement. There, cattārī means a numerical limit. Imānī means a word indicating something near and visible, because it will be stated immediately after. Kammānī means an illustration of actions that have been delimited. ‘‘Apalokanasaañata’’ etc., is a showing of their form.
apalokanakammaṃnāma sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā ‘‘ruccati saṅghassā’’ti tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā kattabbaṃ kammaṃ vuccati.Ñattikammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.Ñattidutiyakammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā, ekāya ca anussāvanāyāti evaṃ ñattidutiyāya anussāvanāya kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.Ñatticatutthakammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā, tīhi ca anussāvanāhīti evaṃ ñatticatutthāhi tīhi anussāvanāhi kattabbaṃ kammaṃ. Ñatti dutiyā yassa anussāvanassa taṃñattidutiyaṃ,tena kattabbaṃ kammaṃñattidutiyakammaṃ. Ñatti catutthā yassa anussāvanattayassa taṃñatticatutthaṃ,tena kātabbaṃ kammaṃñatticatutthakammaṃ.
Apalokanakamma means an act to be done by purifying the Saṅgha residing within the boundary, bringing the consent of those eligible to give consent, announcing the matter three times with the approval of the united Saṅgha, saying, "It is pleasing to the Saṅgha." Ñattikamma means an act to be done with one announcement (ñatti), with the approval of the united Saṅgha, in the manner stated above. Ñattidutiyakamma means an act to be done with one announcement (ñatti) and one proclamation (anussāvana), with the approval of the united Saṅgha, in the manner stated above; thus, an act to be done with an announcement and a second proclamation. Ñatticatutthakamma means an act to be done with one announcement (ñatti) and three proclamations (anussāvana), with the approval of the united Saṅgha in the manner stated above; thus, an act to be done with an announcement and three proclamations. That which has a second proclamation (dutiya) with an announcement is ñattidutiya; the act to be done with that is ñattidutiyakamma. That which has four (catuttha) proclamations (anussāvana) with an announcement is ñatticatuttha; the act to be done with that is ñatticatutthakamma.
2984-7.Tesaṃ ṭhānavasena bhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘apalokanakamma’’ntiādi. Navannaṃ ṭhānānaṃ samāhāronavaṭṭhānaṃ,‘‘gacchatī’’ti iminā sambandho.Ñattikammanti gamanakiriyākattunidassanaṃ.Navaṭṭhānanti kammanidassanaṃ.Dutiyanti ñattidutiyakammaṃ.Sattaṭhānāni gacchatīti yojanā.
2984-7. To show the distinction based on their location, he says, "apalokanakamma" etc. The collection of nine locations is navaṭṭhānaṃ; it is connected with "gacchati" [it goes]. Ñattikamma is an example of the subject of the action of going. Navaṭṭhāna is an example of the object. Dutiya means ñattidutiyakamma. It should be construed that seven locations go.
‘‘nissāraṇañcā’’tiādi. Nissāraṇādi kammavisesānaṃ saññā. Apalokanakammañhi nissāraṇaṃ…pe… pañcamaṃ kammalakkhaṇanti imāni pañca ṭhānāni gacchatīti yojanā.
"nissāraṇañcā" etc. [are] names of specific acts beginning with expulsion (nissāraṇa). Indeed, apalokanakamma [goes to] expulsion…pe… these five locations are the fifth characteristic of an act, is how it should be construed.
‘‘nissāraṇañcā’’tiādi.Samaṇuddesatoti kaṇṭakasāmaṇerato nissāraṇañca osāraṇañca vadeti yojanā. Tattha kaṇṭakasāmaṇerassa nissāraṇā tādisānaṃyeva sammāvattaṃ disvā pavesanā ‘‘osāraṇā’’ti veditabbā.
"nissāraṇañcā" etc. "Samaṇuddesato" means expulsion (nissāraṇa) and restoration (osāraṇa) from a troublesome novice (kaṇṭakasāmaṇera). Here, the expulsion of a troublesome novice and the re-admission upon seeing proper conduct are known as "restoration" (osāraṇā).
Pabbajantenahetubhūtenabhaṇḍukaṃbhaṇḍukammapucchanaṃ vadeyyāti attho. Pabbajjāpekkhassa kesacchedanapucchanaṃbhaṇḍukammaṃnāma.Channenahetubhūtenabrahmadaṇḍakaṃkammaṃ vadeti yojanā.Tathārūpassāti channasadisassa mukharassa bhikkhū duruttavacanena ghaṭṭentassa.Kātabboti ‘‘bhante, itthannāmo bhikkhu mukharo bhikkhū duruttavacanehi ghaṭṭento viharati, so bhikkhu yaṃ iccheyya, taṃ vadeyya. Bhikkhūhi itthannāmo bhikkhu neva vattabbo, na ovaditabbo, na anusāsitabbo. Saṅghaṃ, bhante, pucchāmi ‘itthannāmassa bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa dānaṃ ruccati saṅghassā’ti. Dutiyampi pucchāmi… tatiyampi pucchāmi ‘itthannāmassa, bhante, bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa dānaṃ ruccati saṅghassā’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 495-496) evaṃ brahmadaṇḍo kātabbo.
Pabbajantena, because of [him] desiring ordination (pabbajja), he should mention bhaṇḍukaṃ, the questioning about suitability. The questioning about hair cutting of one seeking ordination is called bhaṇḍukamma. Channena, because of Channa, it speaks of brahmadaṇḍakaṃ act. Tathārūpassā, to a bhikkhu like Channa, who is talkative and offends bhikkhus with harsh speech. Kātabbo [is done thus]: "Bhante, a bhikkhu named so-and-so is talkative, living while offending bhikkhus with harsh speech; that bhikkhu might say whatever he wants. Bhikkhus should neither speak to, nor admonish, nor instruct a bhikkhu named so-and-so. Bhante, I ask the Saṅgha, ‘Does giving the brahmadaṇḍa penalty to the bhikkhu named so-and-so please the Saṅgha?’ I ask a second time… I ask a third time, ‘Bhante, does giving the brahmadaṇḍa penalty to the bhikkhu named so-and-so please the Saṅgha?’" (pari. aṭṭha. 495-496) Thus, the brahmadaṇḍa should be done.
2988-9.‘‘Āpucchitvānā’’ti pubbakiriyāya ‘‘gahitāyā’’ti aparakiriyā ajjhāharitabbā,‘‘ruciyā’’ti etassa visesanaṃ.Detīti ettha ‘‘acchinnacīvarādīna’’nti seso. Sabbo saṅgho sannipatitvānasabbasosabbe sīmaṭṭhe āgatāgate bhikkhūāpucchitvāna‘‘itthannāmena parikkhārena bhavitabbaṃ, ruccati tassa dāna’’nti visuṃ pucchitvā gahitāya bhikkhūnaṃ ruciyā tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā cīvarādiparikkhāraṃ acchinnacīvarādīnaṃ deti, yaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ saṅghassa dānaṃ, taṃtassaapalokanakammassa kammalakkhaṇaṃ hotīti yojanā. Lakkhīyatītilakkhaṇaṃ,kammameva lakkhaṇaṃ, na nissāraṇādīnītikammalakkhaṇaṃ.
2988-9. "Āpucchitvānā": after asking, the subsequent action "gahitāyā" must be supplied, [it is] a specification of "ruciyā". Detīti, here, "acchinnacīvarādīna" is the remainder. After the entire Saṅgha has assembled, sabbaso, all the bhikkhus who have come to all the locations within the boundary āpucchitvāna, after asking individually, "Should it be with this parikkhāra (requisite); does its giving please him?" and with the approval of the bhikkhus having been obtained, after announcing three times, he gives the robes and other requisites to those with incomplete robes, etc.; that kind of giving of the Saṅgha, that tassa is the characteristic of the act of apalokanakamma. Lakkhīyatīti lakkhaṇaṃ, the act itself is the characteristic, not expulsion etc., thus it is kammalakkhaṇaṃ.
2990-1.Evaṃ apalokanakammassa pañca ṭhānāni uddesaniddesavasena dassetvā idāni ñattikammassa kammalakkhaṇaṃ tāva dassetumāha‘‘nissāraṇa’’ntiādi. Iti‘‘ñattiyā nava ṭhānānī’’ti ayamuddeso vakkhamānena ‘‘vinicchaye’’tiādiniddeseneva vibhāvīyati.
2990-1. Having shown the five locations of apalokanakamma in terms of statement and specification, now, to show the characteristic of the act of ñattikamma, he says, "nissāraṇa" etc. Thus, "ñattiyā nava ṭhānānī": this statement becomes clear by the specification beginning with "vinicchaye" that will be said.
2992.Vinicchayeti ubbāhikavinicchaye.Asampatteti niṭṭhaṃ agate.Therassāti dhammakathikassa. Tenevāha‘‘avinayaññuno’’ti.Tassa‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu dhammakathiko, imassa neva suttaṃ āgacchati, no suttavibhaṅgo, so atthaṃ asallakkhetvā byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ paṭibāhati, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā avasesā imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasameyyāmā’’ti (cūḷava. 233) evaṃ ubbāhikavinicchaye dhammakathikassa bhikkhuno yā nissaraṇā vuttā, sā ñattikamme ‘‘nissāraṇā’’ti vuttāti yojanā.
2992. Vinicchaye: in a verdict involving ejection (ubbāhika). Asampatte: not having reached conclusion. Therassā: of the dhamma speaker. Therefore he says "avinayaññuno". Tassa: "Suṇantu me āyasmantā, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu dhammakathiko, imassa neva suttaṃ āgacchati, no suttavibhaṅgo, so atthaṃ asallakkhetvā byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ paṭibāhati, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā avasesā imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasameyyāmā" (cūḷava. 233) [May the venerable ones listen to me, this bhikkhu named so-and-so is a speaker of Dhamma, but the suttas do not occur to him, nor the Sutta-vibhaṅga. Not considering the meaning, he rejects the meaning by the reflection of the letter. If it seems right to the venerable ones, having removed the bhikkhu named so-and-so, let us settle the remainder of this issue]. Thus, in a verdict involving ejection (ubbāhika), the expulsion of the bhikkhu who is a dhamma speaker, that which is stated, that is called "nissāraṇā" in ñattikamma, is how it should be construed.
2993-4.Upasampadāpekkhassa‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato upasampadāpekkho, anusiṭṭho so mayā, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo āgaccheyyāti. Āgacchāhī’’ti (mahāva. 126) vacanapaṭisaṃyuttassa saṅghassa sammukhānayanaṃ, sā osāraṇā nāma. ‘‘Āgaccha osāraṇā’’ti padacchedo.
2993-4. Upasampadāpekkhassa: "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato upasampadāpekkho, anusiṭṭho so mayā, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo āgaccheyyāti. Āgacchāhī"ti (mahāva. 126) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. This so-and-so is a candidate for higher ordination of venerable so-and-so. He has been instructed by me. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, let so-and-so come. Come here]. Bringing him before the Saṅgha in conjunction with this statement, that is called restoration (osāraṇā). The word division is "Āgaccha osāraṇā".
Uposathavasenāpi, pavāraṇāvasenāpi. Ñattiyā ṭhapitattāti ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya’’ (mahāva. 134), ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti (mahāva. 210) uposathapavāraṇāvasena ñattiyā ṭhapitattā uposatho, pavāraṇā vāti imāni dve ñattikammāni.
Uposathavasenāpi, pavāraṇāvasenāpi. Ñattiyā ṭhapitattā: "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya" (mahāva. 134) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. Today is the fifteenth, the Uposatha day. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha should perform the Uposatha], "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā"ti (mahāva. 210) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. Today is the Pavāraṇā, the fifteenth. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha should hold Pavāraṇā]. Because the Uposatha and Pavāraṇā are established by announcement (ñatti), Uposatha and Pavāraṇā, these two are ñattikammāni.
‘‘Upasampadāpekkhañhi, anusāseyyahanti cā’’ti iminā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato upasampadāpekkho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ anusāseyya’’nti (mahāva. 126) ayaṃ ekā ñatti gahitā.
"Upasampadāpekkhañhi, anusāseyyahanti cā": by this "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato upasampadāpekkho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ anusāseyya"nti (mahāva. 126) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. This so-and-so is a candidate for higher ordination of venerable so-and-so. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, I would instruct so-and-so], this one ñatti is taken.
2995.‘‘Itthannāmamahaṃ bhikkhuṃ, puccheyyaṃ vinayanti cā’’ti iminā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ vinayaṃ puccheyya’’nti (mahāva. 151) ayaṃ ekā ñatti gahitā.Evamādītiādi-saddena ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ anusāseyyā’’ti, ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ antarāyike dhamme puccheyya’’nti (mahāva. 126), ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ antarāyike dhamme puccheyyā’’ti, ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ vinayaṃ puccheyyā’’ti (mahāva. 151), ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyya’’nti (mahāva. 152), ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyyā’’ti – (mahāva. 152) imā cha ñattiyo gahitā. Evaṃ purimā dve, imā ca chātiedisāimā aṭṭha ñattiyo ‘‘sammutī’’ti vuttā.
2995. "Itthannāmamahaṃ bhikkhuṃ, puccheyyaṃ vinayanti cā": by this, "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ vinayaṃ puccheyya"nti (mahāva. 151) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, I would question so-and-so on the Vinaya], this one ñatti is taken. Evamādī: by the ādi-word, "yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ anusāseyyā"ti, "yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ antarāyike dhamme puccheyya"nti (mahāva. 126) [If it seems right to the Saṅgha, so-and-so would instruct so-and-so], [If it seems right to the Saṅgha, I would question so-and-so on the obstructive qualities], "yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ antarāyike dhamme puccheyyā"ti, "yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ vinayaṃ puccheyyā"ti (mahāva. 151) [If it seems right to the Saṅgha, so-and-so would question so-and-so on the obstructive qualities], [If it seems right to the Saṅgha, so-and-so would question so-and-so on the Vinaya], "yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyya"nti (mahāva. 152) [If it seems right to the Saṅgha, I, questioned by so-and-so, would answer on the Vinaya], "yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyyā"ti – (mahāva. 152) [If it seems right to the Saṅgha, so-and-so, questioned by so-and-so, would answer on the Vinaya], these six ñattis are taken. Thus, the previous two and these six, thus edisā, these eight ñattis are called "sammutī".
2996.Nissaṭṭhacīvarādīnaṃ dānanti ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyā’’ti (pārā. 464) evaṃ nissaṭṭhacīvarapattādīnaṃ dānaṃ ‘‘dāna’’nti vuccati.Āpattīnaṃ paṭiggāhoti ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati vivarati uttāniṃ karoti deseti, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya’’nti (cūḷava. 239), ‘‘yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya’’nti (cūḷava. 239). Tena vattabbo ‘‘passasī’’ti. ‘‘Āma passāmī’’ti. ‘‘Āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti. Evaṃ āpattīnaṃ paṭiggāho ‘‘paṭiggāho’’ti vuccati.
2996. Nissaṭṭhacīvarādīnaṃ dānanti "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyā"ti (pārā. 464) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. This robe, forfeited by the bhikkhu named so-and-so, is relinquished to the Saṅgha. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha would give this robe to the bhikkhu named so-and-so]. Thus, the giving of robes and bowls that have been relinquished is called "dāna". Āpattīnaṃ paṭiggāho: "suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati vivarati uttāniṃ karoti deseti, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya"nti (cūḷava. 239) [Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me. This bhikkhu named so-and-so remembers an offense, discloses it, reveals it, declares it. If it seems right to the Saṅgha, I would accept the offense from the bhikkhu named so-and-so], "yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya"nti (cūḷava. 239) [When it seems right to the venerable ones, I would accept the offense from the bhikkhu named so-and-so]. He should be told "passasī". "Āma passāmī". "Āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī". Thus, the acceptance of offenses is called "paṭiggāho".
2997.Pavārukkaḍḍhanāti pavāraṇukkaḍḍhanā. Gāthābandhavasena ṇa-kāralopo. Atha vā pavāraṇaṃ pavāroti pavāraṇa-saddapariyāyopavāra-saddo.‘‘Imaṃ uposathaṃ katvā, kāḷe pavārayāmī’’ti iminā ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā āvāsikā, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, idāni uposathaṃ kareyyāma, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāma, āgame kāḷe pavāreyyāmā’’ti (mahāva. 240) ayaṃ ñatti upalakkhaṇato dassitā. Evaṃ katapavāraṇā ‘‘paccukkaḍḍhanā’’ti matā. Ettha cakāḷeti pubbakattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhuposathe. Iminā ca ‘‘āgame juṇhe pavāreyyāmā’’ti ayaṃ ñatti ca upalakkhitā.Juṇheti aparakattikajuṇhapakkhauposathe.
2997. Pavārukkaḍḍhanā: the withdrawing of Pavāraṇā. Due to the meter of the verse, the ṇa-kara (ण) is dropped. Or else, pavāraṇaṃ pavāroti, the word pavāra is a synonym for the word pavāraṇa. "Imaṃ uposathaṃ katvā, kāḷe pavārayāmī": by this, "suṇantu me āyasmantā āvāsikā, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, idāni uposathaṃ kareyyāma, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāma, āgame kāḷe pavāreyyāmā"ti (mahāva. 240) [May the venerable resident bhikkhus listen to me. If it seems right to the venerable ones, now we would perform the Uposatha, recite the Pātimokkha, and on the coming dark time, we would hold Pavāraṇā]. This ñatti is shown as an example. Thus, Pavāraṇā that has been done is considered "paccukkaḍḍhanā". Here, kāḷe means on the Uposatha of the dark fortnight of the first Kattika month. And by this, the ñatti "āgame juṇhe pavāreyyāmā"ti is also exemplified. Juṇhe means on the Uposatha of the bright fortnight of the subsequent Kattika month.
2998.Tiṇavatthāraketi tiṇavatthārakasamathe.Sabbapaṭhamā ñattīti sabbasaṅgāhikā ñatti vuccati.Itarā cāti ubhayapakkhe paccekaṃ ṭhapitā dve ñattiyo cāti evaṃ tidhā pavattaṃetaṃñattikammaṃ kammalakkhaṇaṃitievaṃ vuttanayena ‘‘vinicchaye’’tiādinā ñattiyā nava ṭhānāni veditabbānīti yojanā.
2998. Tiṇavatthārake: in the tiṇavatthāraka reconciliation. Sabbapaṭhamā ñattī: the ñatti that is all-inclusive is called the first. Itarā cā: and the two ñattis that are established individually in both parties. Thus, this etaṃ ñattikamma that occurs in three ways is the characteristic of the act, iti in this way, by the manner stated, the nine locations of the ñatti are to be understood by "vinicchaye" etc., is how it should be construed.
2999-3000.Evaṃ ñattikamme nava ṭhānāni dassetvā idāni ñattidutiyakamme satta ṭhānāni dassetumāha‘‘ñattidutiyakammampī’’tiādi.‘‘Ñattidutiyakamma’’ntiādikā uddesagāthā uttānatthāva.
2999-3000. Having shown the nine locations in ñattikamma, now, to show the seven locations in ñattidutiyakamma, he says, "ñattidutiyakammampī" etc. The statement verse beginning with "Ñattidutiyakamma" is of obvious meaning.
pattanikkujjanādītiādi-saddena pattukkujjanaṃ gahitaṃ.Nissārosāraṇā matāti ‘‘nissāraṇā, osāraṇā’’ti ca matā. Tattha bhikkhūnaṃ alābhāya parisakkanādikehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgatassa upāsakassa saṅghena asambhogakaraṇatthaṃ pattanikkujjanavasena nissāraṇā ca tasseva sammā vattantassa pattukkujjanavasena osāraṇā ca veditabbā. Sā khuddakavatthukkhandhakevaḍḍhalicchavivatthusmiṃ(cūḷava. 265) vuttā.
pattanikkujjanādī: by the ādi-word, pattukkujjanaṃ is included. Nissārosāraṇā matā: "nissāraṇā, osāraṇā" is considered. There, the expulsion (nissāraṇā) by overturning the bowl, for the purpose of non-intercourse by the Saṅgha with a lay follower possessing the eight factors beginning with scheming for the bhikkhus' disadvantage, and the restoration (osāraṇā) by upturning the bowl of that very person who is conducting himself properly, should be understood. That is stated in the khuddakavatthukkhandhaka in the vaḍḍhalicchivatthusmiṃ (cūḷava. 265).
3001.Sīmādisammuti sammuti nāma.Sā pañcadasadhā matāti sīmāsammuti ticīvarenaavippavāsasammuti santhatasammuti bhattuddesaka senāsanaggāhāpaka bhaṇḍāgārika cīvarapaṭiggāhaka yāgubhājaka phalabhājaka khajjabhājaka appamattakavissajjaka sāṭiyaggāhāpaka pattaggāhāpaka ārāmikapesaka sāmaṇerapesakasammutīti evaṃ sā sammuti pañcadasavidhā matāti attho. Kathinassa vatthaṃ, tassa. Matoyevamatako,matakassa vāso matakavāso, tassamatakavāsaso,matakacīvarassa.
3001. Sīmādi is a sammuti, a boundary agreement. Sā pañcadasadhā matā: that boundary agreement is considered to be fifteen-fold: sīmāsammuti, ticīvarenaavippavāsasammuti, santhatasammuti, bhattuddesaka, senāsanaggāhāpaka, bhaṇḍāgārika, cīvarapaṭiggāhaka, yāgubhājaka, phalabhājaka, khajjabhājaka, appamattakavissajjaka, sāṭiyaggāhāpaka, pattaggāhāpaka, ārāmikapesaka, sāmaṇerapesakasammutīti, thus that agreement is considered to be fifteen kinds. Kathinassa vatthaṃ, tassa [Cloth for the Kathina, for that]. Matoyeva matako, matakassa vāso matakavāso, tassa matakavāsaso, matakacīvarassa [the deceased indeed, the dwelling of the deceased is the dwelling of the deceased, for that, for the robe of the deceased].
3002.Ānisaṃsakhettabhūtapañcamāsabbhantareyeva ubbhāroantarubbhāro. Kuṭivatthussa, vihārassa vatthuno ca desanā desanā nāmāti yojanā.
3002. Within the five months which are the field of benefits, the removal is antarubbhāro. The indication of the dwelling-site and the property of the monastery is called indication (desanā), is how it should be construed.
3003.Tiṇavatthārake dvinnaṃ pakkhānaṃ sādhāraṇavasena ṭhapetabbañatti ca pacchā pakkhadvaye visuṃ visuṃ ṭhapetabbā dve ñattiyo cāti tisso ñattiyo kammavācāya abhāvena ñattikamme ‘‘kammalakkhaṇa’’nti dassitā, pacchā visuṃ visuṃ dvīsu pakkhesu vattabbā dve ñattidutiyakammavācā ñattidutiyakamme ‘‘kammalakkhaṇa’’nti dassitāti taṃ dassetumāha‘‘tiṇavatthārake kamme’’ti.‘‘Mohāropanatādisū’’ti iminā pācittiyesu dassitamohāropanakammañca aññavādakavihesakāropanakammādiñca saṅgaṇhāti.Etthāti imasmiṃ ñattidutiyakamme. Kammalakkhaṇamevakammalakkhaṇatā.
3003. In the tiṇavatthāraka, the ñatti that should be established in common by the two parties, and the two ñattis that should be established separately in the two parties afterwards, these three ñattis are shown in ñattikamma as the "characteristic of the act" due to the absence of the kammavācā, the two ñattidutiyakammavācā that should be spoken separately in the two parties afterwards are shown in ñattidutiyakamma as the "characteristic of the act," to show that, he says, "tiṇavatthārake kamme". "Mohāropanatādisū": by this, it includes the mohāropanakamma shown in the pācittiyas, and the aññavādakavihesakāropanakammādi. Etthā: in this ñattidutiyakamma. Kammalakkhaṇameva kammalakkhaṇatā.
3004-5.Itievaṃ yathāvuttanayenaime sattaṭhānabhedā ñattidutiyakammassa. Evaṃ ñattidutiyakamme satta ṭhānāni dassetvā ñatticatutthakamme ṭhānabhedaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tathā’’tiādi.
3004-5. Iti, thus, in the manner stated, ime satta, these seven kinds of locations are of ñattidutiyakamma. Having shown the seven locations in ñattidutiyakamma, to show the distinction of locations in ñatticatutthakamma, he says "tathā" etc.
3006.Tajjanādīnantiādi-saddena niyassādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Tesaṃsattannaṃ kammānaṃ.Passaddhivūpasamo.
3006. Tajjanādīna: by the ādi-word, the taking of niyassa etc. Tesaṃ: of those seven acts. Passaddhi: subsidence.
3007.‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃovādo’’ti bhikkhunovādakasammuti phalūpacārena vuttā.
3007. "Bhikkhunīnaṃ ovādo": the appointment of a bhikkhus as advisor to the bhikkhunīs is spoken of metaphorically.
3008-9.Mūlapaṭikkassomūlāya paṭikassanā, gāthābandhavasena ka-kārassa dvebhāvo.Ukkhittassānuvattikāti ukkhittānuvattikā ekā yāvatatiyakā, aṭṭha saṅghādisesā, ariṭṭho caṇḍakāḷī ca dve, ime ekādasa yāvatatiyakā bhavanti.Imesaṃ vasāti ukkhittānuvattikādīni puggalādhiṭṭhānena vuttāni, imesaṃ samanubhāsanakammānaṃ vasena.Dasekāti ekādasa.
3008-9. Mūlapaṭikkasso means turning back to the root; due to the meter of the verse, the letter "ka" is doubled. Ukkhittassānuvattikā means one who follows after one who has been suspended, up to the third instance; the eight Saṅghādisesas; and Ariṭṭha and Caṇḍakāḷī, these eleven are up to the third instance. Imesaṃ vasā means based on these acts of formal reproof, which are stated with reference to individuals like one who follows after one who has been suspended. Dasekā means eleven.
3011.Evaṃ catunnampi kammānaṃ ṭhānabhedaṃ dassetvā anvayato, byatirekato ca kātabbappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘apalokanakammañcā’’tiādi. Ñattiyāpi na kāraye, ñattidutiyenapi na kārayeti yojanā.
3011. Thus, after showing the different positions of all four kinds of acts (kamma), he now says, "apalokanakammañcā," etc., to show the manner in which they should be done by way of agreement and difference. The meaning is that one should not have an act done even with a ñatti, let alone with a ñattidutiyakamma.
3012.Apalokanakamme vuttalakkhaṇena ñattikammādīnampi kātabbappakāro sakkā viññātunti taṃ adassetvā ñattidutiyakamme labbhamānavisesaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ñattidutiyakammānī’’tiādi. Apaloketvā kātabbāni lahukānipi ñattidutiyakammāni atthīti yojanā. Tāni pana katamānīti āha‘‘sabbā sammutiyo siyu’’nti. Ettha sīmāsammutiṃ vinā sesā ticīvarenaavippavāsasammutiādayo sabbāpi sammutiyoti attho.
3012. Since the manner in which the ñattikamma and other acts should be done can be understood from the characteristics stated in the apalokanakamma, he now says, "ñattidutiyakammānī," etc., to show the special features that can be obtained in the ñattidutiyakamma without showing that. The meaning is that there are even minor ñattidutiyakamma that should be done after formal announcement. But what are those? He says, "sabbā sammutiyo siyu." Here, the meaning is that all the agreements (sammuti) other than the boundary agreement, starting with the agreement not to be separated with the three robes, are all agreements.
3013.Sesānīti yathāvuttehi sesāni sīmāsammutiādīni cha kammāni.Na vaṭṭatīti na vaṭṭanti, gāthābandhavasena na-kāralopo. Yathāha ‘‘sīmāsammuti, sīmāsamūhananaṃ, kathinadānaṃ, kathinuddhāro, kuṭivatthudesanā, vihāravatthudesanāti imāni cha kammāni garukāni apaloketvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭanti, ñattidutiyakammavācaṃ sāvetvāva kātabbānī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 482).‘‘Apaloketvā kātuṃ pana na vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, ñatticatutthakammavasenāpi kātuṃ na vaṭṭanteva. Tenevāha‘‘yathāvuttanayeneva, tena teneva kāraye’’ti, yo yo nayo taṃ taṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ vutto, teneva teneva nayenāti attho.
3013. Sesānī means the remaining six acts, such as the boundary agreement, which are different from those mentioned above. Na vaṭṭatī means they are not suitable; the "na" is dropped due to the meter of the verse. As he said, "These six acts, namely, the boundary agreement, the removal of the boundary, the giving of the Kathina, the raising of the Kathina, the assigning of a place for a hut, and the assigning of a place for a monastery, are weighty and not suitable to be done after formal announcement; they should be done only after announcing the ñattidutiyakamma-sentence" (pari. aṭṭha. 482). ‘‘Apaloketvā kātuṃ pana na vaṭṭatī’’ this is merely an introductory statement; they are not even suitable to be done as ñatticatutthakamma. Therefore, he said, "yathāvuttanayeneva, tena teneva kāraye," meaning each and every method that was mentioned to perform that particular act, should be done in that very way.
Catubbidhakammakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Four Kinds of Acts (Kamma)
Kammavipattikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Failure of Acts (Kammavipatti)
3014.Kammānaṃ vipattiyā dassitāya sampattipi byatirekato viññāyatīti kammavipattiṃ tāva dassetumāha‘‘vatthuto’’tiādi. Vasati ettha kammasaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyātivatthu,kammassa padhānakāraṇaṃ, tatovatthutoca.Anussāvanasīmatoti anussāvanato, sīmato ca.Pañcevātievakārena kammadosānaṃ etaṃparamataṃ dasseti.
3014. Since the success of the acts can be understood by difference when the failure of the acts is shown, he now says, "vatthuto," etc., to show the failure of the acts first. Vatthu means a basis, as the result called "act" dwells here, because its function depends on it; hence, it is the principal cause of the act; therefore, it is vatthuto. Also, Anussāvanasīmato means from the announcement and from the boundary. Pañcevā with the particle eva indicates that this is the opinion of another school regarding the defects of the acts.
3015.Yathānikkhittakammadosamātikānukkame kammavipattiṃ vibhajitvā dassetumāha‘‘sammukhā’’tiādi. Saṅghadhammavinayapuggalasammukhāsaṅkhātaṃ catubbidhaṃ sammukhāvinayaṃ upanetvā kātabbaṃ kammaṃsammukhākaraṇīyaṃnāma.
3015. To show the failure of the acts by dividing them according to the order of the matrix of the defects of the acts that have been laid down, he now says, "sammukhā," etc. An act that should be done after bringing in the four kinds of facing-vinaya (sammukhāvinaya) called facing the Saṅgha, Dhamma, Vinaya, and individuals, is called sammukhākaraṇīyaṃ.
saṅghasammukhatā. Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena saṅgho taṃ kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃdhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā. Tatthadhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu.Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca.Satthusāsanaṃnāma ñattisampadā ceva anussāvanasampadā ca. Yassa saṅgho taṃ kammaṃ karoti, tassa sammukhabhāvopuggalasammukhatā. Evaṃ catubbidhena sammukhāvinayena yaṃ saṅghakammaṃ ‘‘karaṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ,taṃ asammukhā karoticatubbidhalakkhaṇato ekampi parihāpetvā karoti, taṃ kammaṃvatthuvipannaṃsammukhāvinayasaṅkhātena vatthunā vekallaṃ ‘‘adhammakamma’’nti pavuccatīti yojanā.
saṅghasammukhatā. The act that the Saṅgha does with which Dhamma, with which Vinaya, with which Teacher's instruction, this is dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā. Here, dhammo means the actual thing. Vinayo means both accusation and clarification. Satthusāsanaṃ means both the accomplishment of the motion (ñatti) and the accomplishment of the announcement (anussāvana). The state of facing of the person for whom the Saṅgha does that act, is puggalasammukhatā. Thus, the Saṅghakamma that has been said to be "should be done" with the four kinds of facing-vinaya, if taṃ asammukhā karoti, it does so by omitting even one from the four characteristics, that act is called vatthuvipannaṃ, defective in basis, which is incomplete with the basis called facing-vinaya, and is called "unlawful act," that is the connection.
3016-8.Evaṃ sammukhākaraṇīye vatthuto kammavipattiṃ dassetvā asammukhākaraṇīyaṃ vibhajitvā dassetumāha‘‘asammukhā’’tiādi.
3016-8. Thus, after showing the failure of the act in terms of basis in the act that should be done facing (sammukhākaraṇīye), he now says, "asammukhā," etc., to show the act that should not be done facing, by dividing it.
pakāsanīyakammañca. Sekkhasammuti ummattakasammutīti yojanā. Avandiyakammaṃ puggalasīsena‘‘avandiyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Aḍḍhakāsiyā gaṇikāya anuññātā dūtena upasampadādūtūpasampadā. Iti imāni aṭṭha kammāni ṭhapetvāna sesāni panasabbasosabbāni kammāni ‘‘sammukhākaraṇīyānī’’ti sobhanagamanādīhisugatosatthāabrvikathesīti yojanā.
pakāsanīyakammañca. Sekkhasammuti ummattakasammutīti is the connection. Avandiyakammaṃ means a person who has been declared "avandiyo" by head of individual. Dūtūpasampadā means the higher ordination through a messenger that was permitted for the prostitute in Aḍḍhakāsī. Thus, having set aside these eight acts, the sabbaso all the remaining acts, "sammukhākaraṇīyānī" should be done facing, thus the sugato Teacher abrvi spoke with beautiful gait and so on, that is the connection.
3019-20.Evaṃ vatthuto kammavipattiṃ dassetvā ñattito dassetumāha‘‘ñattito’’tiādi.Vipajjananayāti vinayavipajjanakkamā.Vatthuṃ na parāmasatīti yassa upasampadādikammaṃ karoti, taṃ na parāmasati tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vadati. Evaṃ vatthuṃ na parāmasati.
3019-20. Thus, after showing the failure of the act in terms of basis, he now says, "ñattito," etc., to show it in terms of the motion (ñatti). Vipajjananayā means by way of the failure of the Vinaya. Vatthuṃ na parāmasatī means he does not touch on that for whom he is doing the higher ordination, etc.; he does not mention his name. Instead of saying, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita is a candidate for higher ordination under the venerable Buddharakkhita," he says, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. A candidate for higher ordination under the venerable Buddharakkhita." Thus, he does not touch on the basis.
Saṅghaṃ na parāmasatīti saṅghassa nāmaṃ na parāmasati tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vadati. Evaṃ saṅghaṃ na parāmasati.
Saṅghaṃ na parāmasatī means he does not touch on the name of the Saṅgha; he does not mention its name. Instead of saying, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita," he says, "May the venerable sirs hear me. This Dhammarakkhita." Thus, he does not touch on the Saṅgha.
Puggalaṃna parāmasatīti yo upasampadāpekkhassa upajjhāyo, taṃ na parāmasati tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito upasampadāpekkho’’ti vadati. Evaṃ puggalaṃ na parāmasati.
Puggalaṃ na parāmasatī means he does not touch on the preceptor of the candidate for higher ordination; he does not mention his name. Instead of saying, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita is a candidate for higher ordination under the venerable Buddharakkhita," he says, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita is a candidate for higher ordination." Thus, he does not touch on the individual.
Ñattiṃ na parāmasatīti sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiṃ na parāmasati, ñattidutiyakamme ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā dvikkhattuṃ kammavācāya eva anussāvanakammaṃ karoti, ñatticatutthakammepi ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā catukkhattuṃ kammavācāya eva anussāvanakammaṃ karoti. Evaṃ ñattiṃ na parāmasati.
Ñattiṃ na parāmasatī means he does not touch on the motion (ñatti) at all; in the ñattidutiyakamma, he only performs the announcement act twice by the Kammavācā without establishing the motion, and in the ñatticatutthakamma, he only performs the announcement act four times by the Kammavācā without establishing the motion. Thus, he does not touch on the motion.
Pacchā vā ñattiṃ ṭhapetīti paṭhamaṃ kammavācāya anussāvanakammaṃ katvā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vatvā ‘‘khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti vadati. Evaṃ pacchā ñattiṃ ṭhapeti.Pañcahetehīti etehi pañcahi kāraṇehi.
Pacchā vā ñattiṃ ṭhapetī means after first performing the announcement act by the Kammavācā, he says, "This is the motion," and then says, "It is pleasing to the Saṅgha; therefore, it is silent; thus, I hold it." Thus, he establishes the motion afterwards. Pañcahetehī means by these five reasons.
3021-2.Evaṃ ñattito kammavipattiṃ dassetvā idāni anussāvanato dassetumāha‘‘anussāvanato’’tiādi. Anussāvanato kammadosā pañca pakāsitāti yojanā.‘‘Na parāmasati vatthuṃ vā’’tiādīsu vatthuādīni vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Evaṃ pana nesaṃ aparāmasanaṃ hoti (pari. aṭṭha. 485) – ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho’’ti paṭhamānussāvane vā ‘‘dutiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi… tatiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi, ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho’’ti dutiyatatiyānussāvanesu vā ‘‘ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vadanto vatthuṃ na parāmasati nāma.
3021-2. Thus, after showing the failure of the act in terms of the motion (ñatti), he now says, "anussāvanato," etc., to show it in terms of the announcement. It is to be connected that the five defects of the act have been declared from the announcement. ‘‘Na parāmasati vatthuṃ vā’’ in these, the basis (vatthu), etc., should be understood in the manner already stated. But how does their non-touching occur? (pari. aṭṭha. 485) – In the first announcement (paṭhamānussāvane), "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me," or in the second and third announcements (dutiyatatiyānussāvanesu), "I say this matter for the second time... I say this matter for the third time, May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me," instead of saying, "This Dhammarakkhita is a candidate for higher ordination under the venerable Buddharakkhita," if he says, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear the venerable Buddharakkhita," he does not touch on the basis.
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vadanto saṅghaṃ na parāmasati nāma.
Instead of saying, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita," if he says, "May the venerable sirs hear me. This Dhammarakkhita," he does not touch on the Saṅgha.
‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito upasampadāpekkho’’ti vadanto puggalaṃ na parāmasati nāma.
Instead of saying, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita is a candidate for higher ordination under the venerable Buddharakkhita," if he says, "May the Saṅgha, venerable sirs, hear me. This Dhammarakkhita is a candidate for higher ordination," he does not touch on the individual.
Sāvanaṃ hāpetīti sabbena sabbaṃ kammavācāya anussāvanaṃ na karoti, ñattidutiyakamme dvikkhattuṃ ñattimeva ṭhapeti, ñatticatutthakamme catukkhattuṃ ñattimeva ṭhapeti. Evaṃ anussāvanaṃ hāpeti. Yopi ñattidutiyakamme ekaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā ekaṃ kammavācaṃ anussāvento akkharaṃ vā chaḍḍeti, padaṃ vā duruttaṃ karoti, ayampi anussāvanaṃ hāpetiyeva. Ñatticatutthakamme pana ekaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā sakimeva vā dvikkhattuṃ vā kammavācāya anussāvanaṃ karontopi akkharaṃ vā padaṃ vā chaḍḍentopi duruttaṃ karontopi anussāvanaṃ hāpetiyevāti veditabbo.
Sāvanaṃ hāpetī means he does not perform the announcement by the Kammavācā at all; in the ñattidutiyakamma, he only establishes the motion twice, and in the ñatticatutthakamma, he only establishes the motion four times. Thus, he diminishes the announcement. Even if someone establishes one motion in the ñattidutiyakamma and announces one Kammavācā, and omits a letter or makes a word mispronounced, he still diminishes the announcement. However, in the ñatticatutthakamma, even if someone establishes one motion and announces the Kammavācā only once or twice, and omits a letter or makes a word mispronounced, it should be understood that he still diminishes the announcement.
Duruttaṃ karotīti ettha pana ayaṃ vinicchayo (pari. aṭṭha. 485) – yo hi aññasmiṃ akkhare vattabbe aññaṃ vadati, ayaṃ duruttaṃ karoti nāma. Tasmā kammavācaṃ karontena bhikkhunā yvāyaṃ –
Duruttaṃ karotī regarding this, this is the judgment (pari. aṭṭha. 485) – He who says something different when another letter should be said, is said to make a mispronunciation. Therefore, the bhikkhu who is performing the Kammavācā should properly observe this –
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ;
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ;
Garukaṃ lahukañca niggahitaṃ;
Sambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ;
Dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti. (pari. aṭṭha. 485) –
Vutto, ayaṃ suṭṭhu upalakkhetabbo.
That was said.
sithilaṃnāma pañcasu vaggesu paṭhamatatiyaṃ.Dhanitaṃnāma tesveva dutiyacatutthaṃ.Dīghanti dīghena kālena vattabbaṃ ākārādi.Rassanti tato upaḍḍhakālena vattabbaṃ akārādi.Garukanti dīghameva, yaṃ vā ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassa, yassa nakkhamatī’’ti evaṃ saṃyogaparaṃ katvā vuccati.Lahukanti rassameva, yaṃ vā ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitatherassa, yassa na khamatī’’ti evaṃ asaṃyogaparaṃ katvā vuccati.Niggahitanti yaṃ karaṇāni niggahetvā avissajjetvā avivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ katvā vattabbaṃ.Sambandhanti yaṃ parapadena sambandhitvā ‘‘tuṇhassā’’ti vā ‘‘tuṇhissā’’ti vā vuccati.Vavatthitanti yaṃ parapadena asambandhaṃ katvā vicchinditvā ‘‘tuṇhī assā’’ti vā ‘‘tuṇha assā’’ti vā vuccati.Vimuttanti yaṃ karaṇāni aniggahetvā vissajjetvā vivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ akatvā vuccati.
sithilaṃ means the first and third in the five classes. Dhanitaṃ means the second and fourth in those very ones. Dīgha means ā-kāra, etc., which should be said with a long time. Rassa means a-kāra, etc., which should be said with half that time. Garuka means only long, or that which is said by making it follow a conjunct consonant, such as "āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassa, yassa nakkhamatī." Lahuka means only short, or that which is said by making it not follow a conjunct consonant, such as "āyasmato buddharakkhitatherassa, yassa na khamatī." Niggahita means that which should be said by controlling the organs, without releasing them, and making it nasal with an unopen mouth. Sambandha means that which is connected with another word, and is said as "tuṇhassā" or "tuṇhissā." Vavatthita means that which is disconnected from another word, and is said by separating it as "tuṇhī assā" or "tuṇha assā." Vimutta means that which is said by not controlling the organs, by releasing them, and without making it nasal with an open mouth.
sithilassa dhanitakaraṇaṃnāma, tathā ‘‘pattakallaṃ, esā ñattī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘patthakallaṃ, esā ñatthī’’tiādivacanañca. ‘‘Bhante saṅgho’’ti vattabbe bhakāraghakārānaṃ bakāragakāre katvā ‘‘bante saṃgo’’ti vacanaṃdhanitassa sithilakaraṇaṃnāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me’’ti vivaṭena mukhena vattabbe pana ‘‘suṇaṃtu me’’ti vā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘esaṃ ñattī’’ti vā avivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ katvā vacanaṃvimuttassa niggahitavacanaṃnāma. ‘‘Pattakalla’’nti avivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ katvā vattabbe ‘‘pattakallā’’ti vivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ akatvā vacanaṃniggahitassa vimuttavacanaṃnāma. Iti sithile kattabbe dhanitaṃ, dhanite kattabbe sithilaṃ, vimutte kattabbe niggahitaṃ, niggahite kattabbe vimuttanti imāni cattāri byañjanāni antokammavācāya kammaṃ dūsenti. Evaṃ vadanto hi aññasmiṃ akkhare vattabbe aññaṃ vadati, duruttaṃ karotīti vuccati.
sithilassa dhanitakaraṇaṃ means, likewise, the saying "patthakallaṃ, esā ñatthī" when it should be said "pattakallaṃ, esā ñattī," etc. The saying "bante saṃgo" by making the letters bha and gha into the letters ba and ga when it should be said "bhante saṅgho," is dhanitassa sithilakaraṇaṃ. The saying "suṇaṃtu me" or "esaṃ ñattī" with an unopen mouth by making it nasal when it should be said "suṇātu me" with an open mouth, or "esā ñattī," is vimuttassa niggahita vacanaṃ. The saying "pattakallā" with an open mouth without making it nasal when it should be said "pattakallaṃ" by making it nasal with an unopen mouth, is niggahitassa vimutta vacanaṃ. Thus, these four consonants, the dhanita when sithila should be done, the sithila when dhanita should be done, the niggahita when vimutta should be done, the vimutta when niggahita should be done, spoil the act within the Kammavācā. For he who says thus says something different when another letter should be said, he is said to make a mispronunciation.
Itaresu pana dīgharassādīsu chasu byañjanesu dīghaṭṭhāne dīghameva, rassaṭṭhāne ca rassamevāti evaṃ yathāṭhāne taṃ tadeva akkharaṃ bhāsantena anukkamāgataṃ paveṇiṃ avināsentena kammavācā kātabbā. Sace pana evaṃ akatvā dīghe vattabbe rassaṃ, rasse vā vattabbe dīghaṃ vadati, tathā garuke vattabbe lahukaṃ, lahuke vā vattabbe garukaṃ vadati, sambandhe vā pana vattabbe vavatthitaṃ, vavatthite vā vattabbe sambandhaṃ vadati, evaṃ vuttepi kammavācā na kuppati. Imāni hi cha byañjanāni kammaṃ na kopenti.
But in the other six consonants, dīgha, rassa, etc., the Kammavācā should be done by saying that very letter in its proper place, with dīgha in the place of dīgha, and rassa in the place of rassa, thus without destroying the tradition that has come down in succession, by saying each and every letter in its proper place. But if he does not do so, and says rassa when dīgha should be said, or dīgha when rassa should be said, likewise, if he says lahuka when garuka should be said, or garuka when lahuka should be said, or if he says vavatthita when sambandha should be said, or sambandha when vavatthita should be said, even when said thus, the Kammavācā does not become corrupt. For these six consonants do not corrupt the act.
Yaṃ pana suttantikattherā ‘‘da-kāro ta-kāramāpajjati, ta-kāro da-kāramāpajjati, ca-kāro ja-kāramāpajjati, ja-kāro ca-kāramāpajjati, ya-kāro ka-kāramāpajjati, ka-kāro ya-kāramāpajjati, tasmā da-kārādīsu vattabbesu ta-kārādivacanaṃ na virujjhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ kammavācaṃ patvā na vaṭṭati. Tasmā vinayadharena neva da-kāro ta-kāro kātabbo…pe… na ka-kāro ya-kāro. Yathāpāḷiyā niruttiṃ sodhetvā dasavidhāya byañjananiruttiyā vuttadose pariharantena kammavācā kātabbā. Itarathā hi sāvanaṃ hāpeti nāma.
But what the Suttanta Elders say, "the letter 'da' becomes the letter 'ta,' the letter 'ta' becomes the letter 'da,' the letter 'ca' becomes the letter 'ja,' the letter 'ja' becomes the letter 'ca,' the letter 'ya' becomes the letter 'ka,' the letter 'ka' becomes the letter 'ya,' therefore, the saying of 'ta'-sound etc., when 'da'-sound etc., should be said, does not contradict," that is not suitable when it comes to Kammavācā. Therefore, the Vinaya-holder should never make 'da' into 'ta'...pe... nor 'ka' into 'ya.' The Kammavācā should be done by purifying the expression according to the text and avoiding the faults mentioned in the ten kinds of consonant expressions. Otherwise, it is called diminishing the announcement.
Asamaye sāvetīti sāvanāya akāle anavakāse ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā paṭhamaṃyeva anussāvanakammaṃ katvā pacchā ñattiṃ ṭhapeti. Iti imehi pañcahākārehi anussāvanato kammāni vipajjanti. Tenāha –‘‘evaṃ pana vipajjanti, anussāvanatopi cā’’ti.
Asamaye sāvetī means announcing at an improper time, at an inopportune moment, establishing the motion (ñatti) and performing the announcement act (anussāvanakamma) first, and then establishing the motion afterwards. Thus, the acts fail due to these five reasons. Therefore, he said – ‘‘evaṃ pana vipajjanti, anussāvanatopi cā’’.
3023.Evaṃ anussāvanato kammavipattiṃ dassetvā sīmato kammavipatti uposathakkhandhakakathāya vuttanayā evāti tameva atidisanto āha‘‘ekādasahi…pe… mayā’’ti. Kammadosoyevakammadosatā. Tāvapaṭhamaṃ.
3023. Thus, after showing the failure of the act in terms of the announcement, he now says, "ekādasahi…pe… mayā," by way of extending that very thing, since the failure of the act in terms of the boundary is in the manner stated in the Uposatha-khandhaka discourse. Kammadosatā means just the defect of the act. Tāva means first.
3024-7.Evaṃ sīmato kammavipattiṃ atidesato dassetvā idāni parisavasena dassetumāha‘‘catuvaggenā’’tiādi.Kammapattāti ettha ‘‘cattāro pakatattā’’ti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘catuvaggakaraṇe kamme cattāro bhikkhū pakatattā kammapattā’’ti (pari. 497). Ettha capakatattānāma anukkhittā anissāritā parisuddhasīlā cattāro bhikkhū.Kammapattākammassa arahā anucchavikā sāmino. Na tehi vinā taṃ kammaṃ karīyati, na tesaṃ chando vā pārisuddhi vā eti.Anāgatāti parisāya hatthapāsaṃ anāgatā.Chandoti ettha ‘‘chandārahāna’’nti seso. Yathāha ‘‘avasesā pakatattā chandārahā’’ti. Iminā ayamattho dīpito hoti – ‘‘avasesā pana sacepi sahassamattā honti, sace samānasaṃvāsakā, sabbe chandārahāva honti, chandapārisuddhiṃ datvā āgacchantu vā mā vā, kammaṃ pana tiṭṭhatī’’ti.Sammukhāti sammukhībhūtā.
3024-7. Thus, having shown the transgression of a kamma (act) from the perspective of the boundary, now, to show it from the perspective of the assembly, he says: "By a group of four," etc. "Eligible for the act": here, "four who are competent" is understood. As he said: "In an act performed by a group of four, four bhikkhus are competent, eligible for the act" (pari. 497). Here, "competent" means four bhikkhus who are not suspended (ukkhitta), not expelled (nissārita), and of pure moral conduct. "Eligible for the act" means suitable, appropriate masters of the act. Without them, that act cannot be done, nor does their consent (chanda) or purity (pārisuddhi) arrive. "Absent" means not within the hand-reach of the assembly. "Consent": here, "of those entitled to consent" is understood. As he said, "The remaining competent ones are entitled to consent." By this, this meaning is clarified: "However, even if the remaining ones are about a thousand, if they share the same dwelling, all are entitled to consent; whether they come having given consent and purity or not, the act stands." "Present" means being face-to-face.
Tivaṅgikoti kammapattānāgamanachandānāharaṇapaṭikkosanasaṅkhātaaṅgattayayutto.Dosokammavipattilakkhaṇo.Parisāya vasā siyāti parisavasena hoti.
"Three-factored" means endowed with the three factors: those eligible for the act, non-arrival, and non-presentation of consent and objection. "Fault" is characterized by transgression of the act. "Dependent on the assembly" means it occurs depending on the assembly.
Paṭisedhentīti paṭikkosanti.Dutiye catuvaggikekamme duvaṅgiko doso parisāya vasā siyāti yojanā.
"Objecting" means dissenting. In the second group-of-four act, a two-factored fault occurs depending on the assembly, is the connection.
Etthaetasmiṃ tatiye catuvaggikepaṭikkosova atthi,na itare parisadosāti ekaṅgiko doso parisāya vasā siyāti yojanā. Duvaṅga yuttaparisādosassa dutiyaṃ desitattā duvaṅga yuttaparisādoso ‘‘dutiyo’’ti vutto. Tathā tatiyaṃ desitattā ekaṅgayutto tatiyo veditabbo. Imameva nayaṃ pañcavaggādisaṅghattayassa atidisanto āha‘‘evaṃ…pe… tividhesupī’’ti.Ādi-saddena dasavaggavīsativaggasaṅghānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
"Here," in this third group-of-four act, "only objection exists," not the other faults of the assembly, thus a one-factored fault occurs depending on the assembly, is the connection. Because the two-factored assembly fault was taught second, the two-factored assembly fault is called "second." Similarly, because the one-factored fault was taught third, it should be understood as third. Extending this very method to the Sangha of five or more, he says, "Thus...to...in the three kinds also." The word "etc." includes the Sanghas of ten and twenty.
3028.Evaṃ catūsu saṅghesu catunnaṃ tikānaṃ vasena parisato kammavipattiyā dvādasavidhataṃ dassetumāha‘‘catutthikā’’ti. Anuvādena‘‘dasa dve siyu’’nti vidhīyati. Parisāvasā catutthikā dosādasa dvedvādasa siyunti yojanā.Etthāti etesu ‘‘vatthuto’’tiādinā vuttesu pañcasu kammadosesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.‘‘Parisāvasā’’ti idaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ.Kammānīti apalokanādīni cattāri. Ettha ca catuvaggādikaraṇīyesu kammesu pakatattena kammavācaṃ sāvetvā katameva kammaṃ kammapattena kataṃ hoti. Kammapatte pakatatte ṭhapetvā apakatattena kenaci, kevaleneva kammavācaṃ sāvetvā kataṃ apakatattakammapattalakkhaṇābhāvā, kammapattena ca kammavācāya assāvitattā anussāvanadosena vipannaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva porāṇakavinayadharattherā kammavipattisaṅkāparihāratthaṃ dvīhi tīhi ekato kammavācaṃ sāvayanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana parivārāvasānepāḷiyā(pari. 482 ādayo) vāaṭṭhakathāya(pari. aṭṭha. 482 ādayo) ca gahetabbo.
3028. Thus, in the four Sanghas, to show the twelve-fold nature of the transgression of an act from the assembly's perspective based on the four triplets, he says, "The fourths." By way of restatement, "ten, two, would be" is prescribed. The fourth faults dependent on the assembly would be ten, two, twelve, is the connection. "Here," among these five faults of the act stated with "in substance," etc., the locative case is used in determination. "Dependent on the assembly," this should be determined. "Acts" means the four beginning with announcements. Here, in acts that should be done by a group of four or more, having announced the act of competence by the competent, which act is done by the eligible? Having placed the competent in competence, and having announced the kammavācā (declaration of the act) by someone incompetent, merely by that, because of the absence of the characteristic of being eligible for the act by the incompetent, and because the kammavācā was not announced by the eligible, it should be understood that it is transgressed by the fault of non-announcement. Therefore, the ancient Vinaya-holder elders announce the kammavācā together by two or three in order to avoid the doubt of transgression of the act. This is the summary here; however, the full explanation should be taken at the end of the Parivāra, in the Pali (pari. 482 ff.) or in the commentary (pari. aṭṭha. 482 ff.).
Kammavipattikathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Discourse on the Transgression of Acts.
Pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Miscellaneous Vinaya Judgments Discourse
3029.Chattaṃpaṇṇamayaṃ kiñcīti tālapaṇṇādipaṇṇacchadanaṃ yaṃ kiñci chattaṃ.Bahīti upari.Antoti heṭṭhā.Sibbitunti rūpaṃ dassetvā sūcikammaṃ kātuṃ.
3029.Umbrella, any made of leaves: any umbrella covered with leaves such as palm leaves. Outside: above. Inside: below. To sew: to do needlework showing a shape.
3030.Paṇṇeti chadanapaṇṇe.Aḍḍhacandanti aḍḍhacandākāraṃ.Makaradantakanti makaradantākāraṃ, yaṃ ‘‘girikūṭa’’nti vuccati. Chindituṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Mukhavaṭṭiyā nāmetvā baddhapaṇṇakoṭiyā vā matthakimaṇḍalakoṭiyā vā girikūṭādiṃ karonti, iminā taṃ paṭikkhittaṃ.Daṇḍeti chattadaṇḍe.Ghaṭakanti ghaṭākāro.Vāḷarūpaṃ vāti byagghādivāḷānaṃ rūpakaṃ vā.Lekhāti ukkiritvā vā chinditvā vā cittakammavasena vā katarāji.
3030.On the leaf: on the covering leaf. Half-moon: shaped like a half-moon. Crocodile-tooth: shaped like a crocodile's tooth, which is called "mountain peak." It is not proper to cut, is the connection. By naming the mouth-rim or the bound leaf-tip or the head-circle-tip, they make a mountain peak, etc.; by this, that is rejected. On the stick: on the umbrella stick. Pot-shaped: shaped like a pot. Or the shape of a wild animal: or a likeness of wild animals such as tigers. Line: a row made by carving or cutting or by means of painting.
3031.Pañcavaṇṇānaṃsuttānaṃ antare nīlādiekavaṇṇenasuttena thiratthaṃ chattaṃ anto ca bahi casibbituṃ vāchattadaṇḍaggāhakasalākapañjaraṃthiratthaṃ vinandhituṃ vā vaṭṭatīti yojanā.‘‘Pañcavaṇṇānaṃ ekavaṇṇena thirattha’’nti iminā anekavaṇṇehi suttehi vaṇṇamaṭṭhatthāya sibbituñca vinandhituñca na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.
3031. Among threads of five colors, with a single-colored thread such as blue, for firmness, both inside and outside, it is proper to sew the umbrella, or to firmly lace the cage that holds the umbrella stick tip, is the connection. By "for firmness, with a single color among five colors," it shows that it is not proper to sew or lace with threads of various colors for the sake of color.
‘‘pañcavaṇṇenā’’ti pāṭho dissati, tassa ekavaṇṇena, pañcavaṇṇena vā suttena thiratthaṃ sibbituṃ, vinandhituṃ vā vaṭṭatīti yojanā kātabbā hoti, so ettheva heṭṭhā vuttena –
The reading "with five colors" is seen; its connection should be made that it is proper to sew or lace for firmness with a single-colored or five-colored thread. That contradicts the statement below in this very text—
‘‘Pañcavaṇṇena suttena, sibbituṃ na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti –
"It is not proper to sew with a five-colored thread"—
aṭṭhakathāpāṭhena ca virujjhati, tasmā so na gahetabbo.
and the reading of the commentary, therefore it should not be taken.
3032.Lekhāvā pana kevalāti yathāvuttappakārā salākalekhā vā.Chinditvāti ukkiritvā kataṃ chinditvā.Ghaṃsitvāti cittakammādivasena kataṃ ghaṃsitvā.
3032. Line, or only: or a rib line of the kind described. Having cut: having cut after carving. Having polished: having polished after making it by means of painting, etc.
3033.Daṇḍabundamhīti chattadaṇḍassa pañjare gāhaṇatthāya phālitabundamhi, mūleti attho. Ayametthanissandehevuttanayo.Khuddasikkhāgaṇṭhipadepana ‘‘chattapiṇḍiyā mūle’’ti vuttaṃ.Ahichattakasaṇṭhānanti phullaahichattākāraṃ. Rajjukehi gāhāpetvā daṇḍe bandhanti, tasmiṃ bandhaṭṭhāne valayamivaukkiritvāuṭṭhāpetvā.Bandhanatthāyāti vātena yathā na calati, evaṃ rajjūhi daṇḍe pañjarassa bandhanatthāya. Ukkiritvā katā lekhā vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘vātappahārena acalanatthaṃ chattamaṇḍalikaṃ rajjukehi gāhāpetvā daṇḍe bandhanti, tasmiṃ bandhanaṭṭhāne valayamiva ukkiritvā lekhaṃ ṭhapenti, sā vaṭṭatī’’ti. ‘‘Sacepi na bandhanti, bandhanārahaṭṭhānattā valayaṃ ukkirituṃ vaṭṭatī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
3033. On the stick-bund: in the split bund for holding the umbrella stick in the cage; "root" is the meaning. Here, this is the manner stated without doubt. However, in the Khuddasikkhā-Ganthipada, it is stated "at the root of the umbrella-ball." Mushroom-shaped: shaped like a full mushroom. After making it grasp with ropes, they tie it to the stick; in that tied place, having carved it like a ring, for tying: so that it does not move in the wind, for tying the cage to the stick with ropes. It is proper to make a carved line, is the connection. As he said, "To prevent movement by the force of the wind, having made the umbrella circle grasp with ropes, they tie it to the stick; in that tied place, having carved a line like a ring, they place it; that is proper." "Even if they do not tie, because it is a place fit for tying, it is proper to carve a ring," is stated in the Ganthipada.
3034.Samaṃ satapadādīnanti satapadādīhi sadisaṃ, tulyatthe karaṇavacanappasaṅge sāmivacanaṃ.
3034. Equal to centipede, etc.: similar to centipedes, etc.; the word sāmivacana (similarity) is used instead of the instrumental case indicating equality.
3035.Pattassa pariyante vāti anuvātassa ubhayapariyante vā.Pattamukhepi vāti dvinnaṃ ārāmavitthārapattānaṃ saṅghaṭitaṭṭhāne kaṇṇepi vā, ekasseva vā pattassa ūnapūraṇatthaṃ saṅghaṭitaṭṭhānepi vā.Veṇinti kudrūsasīsākārena sibbanaṃ.Keci‘‘varakasīsākārenā’’ti vadanti.Saṅkhalikanti biḷāladāmasadisaṃ sibbanaṃ.Keci‘‘satapadisama’’nti vadanti.
3035. Or at the edge of the leaf: or at both edges of the space between the winds. Or at the leaf-mouth: or at the ear where two spreading-leaves of the ārāma (park) meet, or even where a single leaf meets to fill a gap. Braid: sewing in the shape of a kudrūsa head. Some say "in the shape of a varaka head." Chain-like: sewing similar to a cat's intestine. Some say "similar to a centipede."
3036.Paṭṭanti paṭṭampi. Aṭṭhakoṇādiko vidhi pakāro etassātiaṭṭhakoṇādikavidhi,taṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhakoṇādika’’nti gāthābandhavasena niggahitāgamo.‘‘Aṭṭhakoṇādikaṃ vidhi’’nti etaṃ ‘‘paṭṭa’’nti etassa samānādhikaraṇavisesanaṃ, kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā, ‘‘karontī’’ti iminā sambandho. Atha vāpaṭṭanti ettha bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, paṭṭeti attho. Imasmiṃ pakkhe‘‘aṭṭhakoṇādika’’nti upayogavacanaṃ.‘‘Vidhi’’nti etassa visesanaṃ. Idha vakkhamānacatukoṇasaṇṭhānato aññaṃ aṭṭhakoṇādikaṃ nāmaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ paṭṭadvaye.Agghiyagadārūpanti agghiyasaṇṭhānañceva gadāsaṇṭhānañca sibbanaṃ.Muggaranti laguḷasaṇṭhānasibbanaṃ.Ādi-saddena cetiyādisaṇṭhānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
3036. Patch: even a patch. It has a method of eight-cornered, etc., therefore eight-cornered-method, that. "Eight-cornered, etc." is an Agama (traditional teaching) by way of omitting letters for the sake of verse structure. "Eight-cornered, etc., method" is a co-referential adjective of the word "patch," or it is an adverb, and it is connected with "they do." Or, in "patch," the locative case is used in the sense of usage, meaning on the patch. In this case, "eight-cornered, etc." is the usage-case. It is an adjective of the word "method." Here, another name for eight-cornered, etc., other than the four-cornered shape to be stated next. There: in those two patches. Agghiya-club-shaped: sewing both in the shape of an agghiya and in the shape of a club. Hammer: sewing in the shape of a mallet. The word "etc." includes the shapes of shrines, etc.
3037.Tatthāti paṭṭadvaye tasmiṃ ṭhāne.Kakkaṭakakkhīnīti kuḷīraacchisadisāni sibbanavikārāni.Uṭṭhāpentīti karonti.Tatthāti tasmiṃ gaṇṭhikapāsakapaṭṭake.Suttāti koṇato koṇaṃ sibbitasuttā ceva caturasse sibbitasuttā ca.Piḷakāti tesameva suttānaṃ nivattetvā sibbitakoṭiyo ca.Duviññeyyāvāti rajanakāle duviññeyyarūpā anoḷārikā dīpitā vaṭṭantīti. Yathāha – ‘‘koṇasuttapiḷakā ca cīvare ratte duviññeyyarūpā vaṭṭantī’’ti.
3037. There: in that place in the two patches. Crab-eye: sewing decorations similar to crab eyes. They make: they do. There: in that patch of knot-loop. Threads: both threads sewn from corner to corner and threads sewn in a square. Blisters: and the tips of those very threads sewn by turning them back. Or difficult to discern: at the time of dyeing, unexalted shapes difficult to discern are allowable. As he said, "Corner threads and blisters are allowable in a dyed cloth as shapes difficult to discern."
3038.Gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭakāti gaṇṭhikapaṭṭakapāsakapaṭṭakāti yojanā.Kaṇṇakoṇesu suttānīti cīvarakaṇṇesu suttāni ceva gaṇṭhikapāsakapaṭṭānaṃ koṇesu suttāni ca chindeyya. Ettha ca cīvare āyāmato, vitthārato ca sibbitvā anuvātato bahi nikkhantasuttaṃ cīvaraṃ rajitvā sukkhāpanakāle rajjuyā vā cīvaravaṃse vā bandhitvā olambituṃ anuvāte baddhasuttāni ca kaṇṇasuttāni nāma. Yathāha – ‘‘cīvarassa kaṇṇasuttakaṃ na vaṭṭati, rajitakāle chinditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṇṇasuttaka’nti (mahāva. 344) evaṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ anuvāte pāsakaṃ katvā bandhitabbaṃ, rajanakāle lagganatthāyā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85 pāḷimuttakavinicchaya).
3038. Knot-loop-patches: knot-patch and loop-patch, is the connection. Threads at the corner-edges: both threads at the edges of the cloth and threads at the edges of the knot-loop-patches should be cut. Here, in the cloth, having sewn lengthwise and widthwise, the thread projecting outward from the space between the winds, and the threads tied in the space between the winds to tie and hang the cloth to dry on a rope or cloth-frame at the time of dyeing, are called corner-threads. As he said, "The corner-thread of the cloth is not proper; it should be cut at the time of dyeing. But that which is allowed thus, 'I allow, O bhikkhus, a corner-thread' (mahāva. 344), that should be tied after making a loop in the space between the winds, for the purpose of hanging at the time of dyeing" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85 pāḷimuttakavinicchaya).
3039.Sūcikammavikāraṃ vāti cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya nānāsuttakehi satapadisadisaṃ sibbantā āgantukapaṭṭaṃ ṭhapenti, evarūpaṃ sūcikammavikāraṃ vā.Aññaṃ vā pana kiñcipīti aññampi yaṃ kiñci mālākammamigapakkhipādādikaṃ sibbanavikāraṃ.Kātunti sayaṃ kātuṃ.Kārāpetunti aññena vā kārāpetuṃ.
3039. Or a decoration of needlework: or for the adornment of the cloth, placing an adventitious patch sewing similar to a centipede with various threads, or such a decoration of needlework. Or anything else: or any other decoration of sewing whatsoever, like garland-work, animal-bird feet, etc. To do: to do oneself. To have done: or to have done by another.
3040.Yo bhikkhuparaṃuttamaṃ vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃabhipatthayaṃpatthayanto kañjipiṭṭhakhaliallikādīsu cīvaraṃ pakkhipati,tassa panabhikkhuno dukkaṭā mokkho na vijjatīti yojanā.Kañjīti vāyanatantamakkhanakañjisadisā thūlākañji.Piṭṭhanti taṇḍulapiṭṭhaṃ. Taṇḍulapiṭṭhehi pakkākhali.Allikāti niyyāso.Ādi-saddena lākhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
3040. The bhikkhu who, desiring excessive supreme color, puts the cloth in rice-gruel, flour, khali, allikā, etc., for that bhikkhu, there is a dukkaṭa, there is no release, is the connection. Rice-gruel: thick rice-gruel similar to the rice-gruel for weaving yarn. Flour: rice flour. Khali: khali cooked with rice flour. Allikā: extract. The word "etc." includes lākhā (lac), etc.
3041.Cīvarassakaraṇekaraṇakāle samuṭṭhitānaṃ sūcihatthamalādīnaṃ dhovanatthaṃ, kiliṭṭhakāle ca dhovanatthaṃ kañjipiṭṭhikhaliallikādīsu pakkhipati, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3041. At the making of the cloth, for the sake of washing away the needle-hand dirt, etc., that arose, and for the sake of washing at the time of being dirty, he puts it in rice-gruel, flour, khali, allikā, etc., it is proper, is the connection.
3042.Tatthāti yena kasāvena cīvaraṃ rajati, tasmiṃ rajane cīvarassa sugandhabhāvatthāyagandhaṃ vāujjalabhāvatthāyatelaṃ vāvaṇṇatthāyalākhaṃ vā. Kiñcīti evarūpaṃ yaṃ kiñci.
3042. There: in that dye with which he dyes the cloth, perfume for the sake of fragrance of the cloth, or oil for the sake of brightness, or lākhā for the sake of color. Anything: anything of this kind.
3043.Maṇināti pāsāṇena.Aññenapi ca kenacīti yena ujjalaṃ hoti, evarūpena muggarādinā aññenāpi kenaci vatthunā.Doṇiyāti rajanambaṇe.Na ghaṃsitabbaṃhatthena gāhetvā na ghaṭṭetabbaṃ.
3043. With a jewel: with a stone. Or with anything else: with any other thing such as a mallet of this kind, by which it becomes bright. In the trough: in the dye-trough. Should not be rubbed: having grasped with the hand, it should not be rubbed.
3044.Rattaṃ cīvaraṃ hatthehikiñcithokaṃ paharituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. ‘‘Yattha pakkarajanaṃ pakkhipanti, sā rajanadoṇi, tattha aṃsabaddhakakāyabandhanādiṃ ghaṭṭetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
3044. It is proper to strike the dyed cloth a little with the hands, is the connection. "Where they put the dissolving dye, that is the dye-trough; there it is proper to rub the shoulder-strap, waistband, etc.," is stated in the Ganthipada.
3045.Gaṇṭhiketi veḷudantavisāṇādimayagaṇṭhike.Lekhā vāti vaṭṭādibhedā lekhā vā.Piḷakā vāti sāsapabījasadisā khuddakapubbuḷā vā.Pāḷikaṇṇikabhedakoti maṇikāvaḷirūpapupphakaṇṇikarūpabhedako. Kappabinduvikāro vā na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3045. Knob: a knob made of bamboo, ivory, horn, etc. Or a line: or lines of various kinds such as circles. Or blisters: or small blisters similar to mustard seeds. Distinction of pāḷi-ear-flower: a distinction in the form of a jewel-creeper, flower-ear, etc. Or a change of the kappabindu (allowable dot) is not proper, is the connection.
3046.Āraggenāti ārakaṇṭakaggena, sūcimukhena vā.Kācipi lekhāti vaṭṭakagomuttādisaṇṭhānā yā kācipi rāji.
3046. With the tip of an awl: with the tip of an awl-thorn, or with the tip of a needle. Any line: any row whatsoever, shaped like a circle, cow's urine, etc.
3047.Bhamaṃ āropetvāti bhame alliyāpetvā.
3047. Having raised it to a whirl: having attached it to a whirl.
3048.Pattamaṇḍalaketi patte chavirakkhanatthāya tipusīsādīhi kate pattassa heṭṭhā ādhārādīnaṃ upari kātabbe pattamaṇḍalake.Bhittikammanti vibhattaṃ katvā nānākārarūpakakammacittaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘na bhikkhave citrāni pattamaṇḍalāni dhāretabbāni rūpakākiṇṇāni bhittikammakatānī’’ti (cūḷava. 253).Tatthāti tasmiṃ pattamaṇḍale.Assāti bhikkhussa.Makaradantakanti girikūṭākāraṃ.
3048.Pattamaṇḍalaka: A pattamaṇḍalaka is a stand made of bamboo strips, ivory, etc., placed under a bowl to protect its surface. Bhittikamma: Diverse pictorial work done by dividing a surface into sections. As it is said: "Monks, painted bowl stands should not be kept, those crowded with figures, made with bhittikamma." (Cūḷava. 253). Tattha: In that bowl stand. Assā: To the monk. Makaradantaka: Shaped like a mountain peak.
3049.Mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ yā lekhā parissāvanabandhanatthāya anuññātā,taṃ lekhaṃṭhapetvā dhammakaraṇacchatte vā kucchiyaṃ vā kācipi lekhā na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3049.The line that is allowed on the mouth rim for binding the filter cloth, leaving that line, no other line is allowed on an umbrella or a bag for carrying the Dhamma, is the meaning.
3050.Tahiṃ tahinti mattikāya tattha tattha.Tanti tathākoṭṭitadiguṇasuttakāyabandhanaṃ.
3050.Tahiṃ tahiṃ: On the clay here and there. Taṃ: Binding with double thread in that manner.
3051.Antesu daḷhatthāya dasāmukhe diguṇaṃ katvā koṭṭenti, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Cittikampīti mālākammalatākammacittayuttampi kāyabandhanaṃ.
3051.It is allowable to knot the ends by doubling them at the ten ends for strength. Cittikampī: Even a waistband adorned with pictorial work of garlands and creepers.
3052.Akkhīnīti kuñjarakkhīni.Tatthāti kāyabandhane vaṭṭatīti kā kathā.Uṭṭhāpetunti ukkirituṃ.
3052.Akkhīni: Like elephant eyes. Tattha: What to say about its allowability on a waistband. Uṭṭhāpetuṃ: To remove.
3053.Ghaṭanti ghaṭasaṇṭhānaṃ.Deḍḍubhasīsaṃ vāti udakasappasīsamukhasaṇṭhānaṃ vā. Yaṃ kiñci vikārarūpaṃ dasāmukhe na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3053.Ghaṭa: Shaped like a pot. Deḍḍubhasīsaṃ vā: Or shaped like the head of a water snake. Any kind of decorative shape is not allowable on the ten ends, is the meaning.
3054.Macchakaṇṭanti macchakaṇṭakākāraṃ.Khajjūripattakākāranti khajjūripattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Macchakaṇṭaṃ vā maṭṭhaṃ paṭṭikaṃ vā khajjūripattakākāraṃ vā ujukaṃ katvā koṭṭitaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Ettha ca ubhayapassesu macchakaṇṭakayuttaṃ macchassa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ viya yassa paṭṭikāya vāyanaṃ hoti, idaṃ kāyabandhanaṃmacchakaṇṭakaṃnāma. Yassa khajjūripattasaṇṭhānamiva vāyanaṃ hoti, taṃkhajjūripattakākāraṃnāma.
3054.Macchakaṇṭa: Shaped like a fish bone. Khajjūripattakākāra: Shaped like a date palm leaf. It is allowable to knot it straight, like a macchakaṇṭa or a smooth strip, or shaped like a date palm leaf, is the meaning. Here, the waistband that has a weaving like the backbone of a fish with macchakaṇṭaka on both sides is called macchakaṇṭaka. That which has a weaving like the shape of a date palm leaf is called khajjūripattakākāra.
3055.Pakativītāpaṭṭikā.Sūkarantaṃnāma kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhānaṃ.Tassaduvidhassa kāyabandhanassa. Tattha rajjukā sūkarantānulomikā, dussapaṭṭaṃ paṭṭikānulomikaṃ.Ādi-saddena muddikakāyabandhanaṃ gahitaṃ, tañca sūkarantānulomikaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘ekarajjukaṃ, pana muddikakāyabandhanañca sūkarantakaṃ anulometī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278). Tatthaekarajjukānāma ekavaṭṭā. Bahurajjukassa akappiyabhāvaṃ vakkhati. ‘‘Muddikakāyabandhanaṃ nāma caturassaṃ akatvā sajjita’’ntigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.
3055.Paṭṭikā: A naturally plain strip of cloth. Sūkarantaṃ: Shaped like a keyhole. Tassa: Of those two kinds of waistbands. There, the string follows the sūkaranta, and the cloth strip follows the paṭṭikā. By the term ādi (etc.), the muddika waistband is included, and that follows the sūkaranta. As it is said: "A single string and also the muddika waistband follow the sūkaranta." (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278). There, ekarajjukā means a single strand. He will speak about the inappropriateness of multiple strands. It is said in the section on gaṇṭhipada that "muddikakāyabandhanaṃ is prepared without making it square."
3056.Murajaṃnāma murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhānaṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ.Veṭhetvāti nānāsuttehi veṭhetvā.Sikkhābhājanavinicchayepana ‘‘bahukā rajjuyo ekato katvā ekāya rajjuyā veṭhitaṃ murajaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.Maddavīṇaṃnāma pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ.Deḍḍubhakaṃnāma udakasappasīsasadisaṃ.Kalābukaṃnāma bahurajjukaṃ.Rajjuyoti ubhayakoṭiyaṃ ekato abaddhā bahū rajjuyo, tathā baddhā kalābukaṃ nāma hotīti.Na vaṭṭantīti murajādīni imāni sabbāni kāyabandhanāni na vaṭṭanti.Purimā dveti murajaṃ, maddavīṇañcāti dve. ‘‘Dasāsu siyu’’nti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena vaṇṇalopena‘‘dasā siyu’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘murajaṃ maddavīṇa’nti idaṃ dasāsuyeva anuññāta’’nti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278).
3056.Murajaṃ: Made by wrapping in the shape of a muraja drum rim. Veṭhetvā: By wrapping with various threads. However, in the Sikkhābhājanavinicchaya, it is said: "What is wrapped with a single thread after putting many threads together is called muraja." Maddavīṇaṃ: Shaped like a lute. Deḍḍubhakaṃ: Similar to the head of a water snake. Kalābukaṃ: Multiple strands. Rajjuyo: Many strands not tied together at both ends; thus, when tied, it is called kalābuka. Na vaṭṭantī: All these waistbands, beginning with muraja, are not allowable. Purimā dve: The two, muraja and maddavīṇa. Instead of saying "dasāsu siyu," it is said "dasā siyu" by means of vowel elision for metrical reasons. As it is said: "The muraja and maddavīṇa are allowed only for the ten ends" (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278).
3057.Pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānāti pāmaṅgadāmaṃ viya caturassasaṇṭhānā.
3057.Pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānā: Shaped like a pāmaṅga garland, i.e., square-shaped.
3058.Ekarajjumayanti nānāvaṭṭe ekato vaṭṭetvā katarajjumayaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ. Vaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘rajjukā dussapaṭṭādī’’ti ettha ekavaṭṭarajjukā gahitā, idha pana nānāvaṭṭe ekato vaṭṭetvā katāva ekarajjukā gahitā.Tañcāti tampi ekarajjukakāyabandhanaṃ.Pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ ekampi na ca vaṭṭatīti kevalampi na vaṭṭati.
3058.Ekarajjumayaṃ: A waistband made of strands twisted together into a single cord. Since "single-strand strings, cloth strips, etc." are accepted where strands are twisted together, here a single cord is taken where different strands are twisted together. Tañcā: Even that single-strand waistband. Pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ ekampi na ca vaṭṭati: Even a simple square shape is not allowable.
3059.Bahū rajjuke ekato katvāti yojanā.Vaṭṭati bandhitunti murajaṃ, kalābukaṃ vā na hoti, rajjukakāyabandhanameva hotīti adhippāyo. Ayaṃ pana vinicchayo ‘‘bahū rajjuke ekato katvā ekena nirantaraṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ ‘bahurajjuka’nti na vattabbaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85 pāḷimuttakavinicchaya)aṭṭhakathāgatova idha vutto.Sikkhābhājanavinicchaye‘‘bahukā rajjuyo ekato katvā ekāya rajjuyā veṭhitaṃ murajaṃ nāmā’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā virujjhanato na gahetabbaṃ.
3059.The meaning is: having put many strands together. Vaṭṭati bandhituṃ: The intention is that it is only a string waistband, not a muraja or kalābuka. However, this judgment is stated here as it appears in the aṭṭhakathā: "What is made by continuously wrapping many strands put together with one strand should not be called 'bahurajjuka'; that is allowable" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85 pāḷimuttakavinicchaya). The statement in the Sikkhābhājanavinicchaya that "what is wrapped with a single thread after putting many threads together is called muraja" should not be taken because it contradicts this.
3060.Danta-saddena hatthidantā vuttā.Jatūti lākhā.Saṅkhamayanti saṅkhanābhimayaṃ.Vidhakā matāti ettha ‘‘veṭhakā’’tipi pāṭho vidhapariyāyo.
3060.By the term danta is meant ivory. Jatū: Lac. Saṅkhamaya: Made of conch. Vidhakā matā: Here, the reading "veṭhakā" is also a synonym for vidha.
3061.Kāyabandhanavidheti kāyabandhanassa dasāya thirabhāvatthaṃ kaṭṭhadantādīhi kate vidhe.Vikāroaṭṭhamaṅgalādiko.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne, ubhayakoṭiyanti attho.Tu-saddena ghaṭākāropi vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.
3061.Kāyabandhanavidhe: A vidha made of wood, ivory, etc., for the sake of stability of the ten ends of the waistband. Vikāro: Decoration, such as the eight auspicious symbols. Tattha tatthā: In that particular place, meaning at both ends. The term tu indicates that even a pot shape is allowable.
3062.Mālā…pe… vicittitāti mālākammalatākammehi ca migapakkhirūpādinānārūpehi ca vicittitā.Janarañjanīti bālajanapalobhinī.
3062.Mālā…pe… vicittitā: Decorated with garland work, creeper work, and various forms of animal figures, etc. Janarañjanī: Appealing to foolish people.
3064.Aṭṭhaṃsā vāpīti etthaapi-saddena soḷasaṃsādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Vaṇṇamaṭṭhāti mālākammādivaṇṇamaṭṭhā.
3064.Aṭṭhaṃsā vāpī: Here, the term api includes sixteen sections, etc. Vaṇṇamaṭṭhā: Decorated with garland work, etc.
3065.Añjanisalākāpi tathā vaṇṇamaṭṭhā na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. ‘‘Añjanitthavikāya ca, nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi, cittakammaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti pāṭho yujjati.‘‘Thavikāpi cā’’ti pāṭho dissati, so na gahetabbo.
3065.The meaning is that even an añjanisalākā similarly decorated is not allowable. The reading "Añjanitthavikāya ca, nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi, cittakammaṃ na vaṭṭatī" is appropriate. The reading "Thavikāpi cā" is seen, but it should not be taken.
3066.Rattādināyena kenaci ekavaṇṇena suttenapilotikādimayaṃ yaṃ kiñci sipāṭikaṃ sibbetvā vaḷañjantassa vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3066.It is allowable for one who wears a loincloth to sew any kind of covering made of rags, etc., with any thread of one color, such as red.
3067.Maṇikanti thūlapubbuḷaṃ.Piḷakanti sukhumapubbuḷaṃ.Pipphaleti vatthacchedanasatthe.Ārakaṇṭaketi pattādhāravalayānaṃ vijjhanakaṇṭake.Ṭhapetunti uṭṭhāpetuṃ.Yaṃ kiñcīti sesaṃ vaṇṇamaṭṭhampi ca.
3067.Maṇika: A large blister. Piḷaka: A small blister. Pipphale: A knife for cutting cloth. Ārakaṇṭake: A thorn for piercing the rings of bowl stands. Ṭhapetuṃ: To remove. Yaṃ kiñcī: And the remaining decoration, too.
3068.Daṇḍaketi pipphaladaṇḍake. Yathāha – ‘‘pipphalakepi maṇikaṃ vā piḷakaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci uṭṭhāpetuṃ na vaṭṭati, daṇḍake pana paricchedalekhā vaṭṭatī’’ti.Paricchedalekhāmattanti āṇibandhanaṭṭhānaṃ patvā paricchindanatthaṃ ekāva lekhā vaṭṭati.Valitvāti ubhayakoṭiyā mukhaṃ katvā majjhe valiyo gāhetvā. Nakhacchedanaṃ yasmā karonti, tasmā vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3068.Daṇḍake: In the pipphaladaṇḍaka. As it is said: "It is not allowable to remove any maṇika or piḷaka even on the pipphalaka; however, a paricchedalekhā is allowable on the daṇḍaka." Paricchedalekhāmatta: Only one line is allowable for the purpose of cutting after reaching the place of the ring binding. Valitvā: After making a mouth at both ends and inserting a valī in the middle. Because nails are cut with it, it is allowable, is the meaning.
3069.Araṇisahite kantakiccakaro daṇḍouttarāraṇīnāma.Vāpītipi-saddena adharāraṇiṃ saṅgaṇhāti, udukkhaladaṇḍassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Añchanakayantadhanudhanukaṃnāma. Musalamatthakapīḷanadaṇḍakopelladaṇḍakonāma.
3069.The stick that does the work of kindling fire together with the araṇi is called uttarāraṇī. Vāpī: By the term pi, it includes the lower araṇi, this is a designation for the pestle stick. Añchanakayantadhanu, the bow is called dhanukaṃ. The stick for grinding mustard and pressing the head is called pelladaṇḍako.
3070.Saṇḍāseti aggisaṇḍāsaṃ vadanti. Kaṭṭhacchedanavāsiyātathā yaṃ kiñci vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Dvīsu passesūti vāsiyā ubhosu passesu.Lohenāti kappiyalohena.Bandhituṃ vaṭṭatīti ujukameva caturassaṃ vā aṭṭhaṃsaṃ vā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati.‘‘Saṇḍāseti aggisaṇḍāse’’tinissandehevuttaṃ.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpanettha sūcisaṇḍāso dassito.
3070.Saṇḍāsa: They call the fire tongs saṇḍāsa. Similarly, any wood cchedanavāsiyā that is decorated is not allowable, is the connection. Dvīsu passesū: On both sides of the adze. Lohenā: With allowable metal. Bandhituṃ vaṭṭati: It is allowable to bind it straight, either square or octagonal. It is said in the Nissandeha that "Saṇḍāsa means fire tongs." However, in the Aṭṭhakathā, a needle holder is shown here.
3071.Heṭṭhatoti heṭṭhā ayopaṭṭavalayassa. ‘‘Upari ahicchattamakulamatta’’ntiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
3071.Heṭṭhato: Below the metal strip ring. It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā that "Upari ahicchattamakulamatta."
3072.Visāṇeti telāsiñcanakagavayamahiṃsādisiṅge.Nāḷiyaṃ vāpīti veḷunāḷikādināḷiyaṃ.Api-saddena alābuṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Āmaṇḍasāraketi āmalakacuṇṇamayatelaghaṭe.Telabhājanaketi vuttappakāreyeva telabhājane.Sabbaṃ vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭatīti pumitthirūparahitaṃ mālākammādi sabbaṃ vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭati.
3072.Visāṇe: In the horns of cattle, buffaloes, etc., for pouring oil. Nāḷiyaṃ vāpī: In a bamboo tube, etc. By the term api, it includes a gourd. Āmaṇḍasārake: In a container made of āmalaka powder and oil. Telabhājanake: In an oil container of the type mentioned. Sabbaṃ vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭati: All decorations that lack male and female figures, such as garland work, etc., are allowable.
3073-5.Pānīyassa uḷuṅketi pānīyauḷuṅke.Doṇiyaṃ rajanassapīti rajanadoṇiyampi.Phalakapīṭheti phalakamaye pīṭhe.Valayādhārakādiketi dantavalayādiādhārake.Ādi-saddena daṇḍādhārako saṅgahito.Pādapuñchaniyanti coḷādimayapādapuñchaniyaṃ.Pīṭheti pādapīṭhe. Sahacariyena pādakathalikāyañca.Cittaṃ sabbameva ca vaṭṭatīti yathāvutte bhikkhuparikkhāre mātugāmarūparahitaṃ, bhikkhuniparikkhāre purisarūparahitaṃ avasesaṃ sabbaṃ cittakammaṃ.
3073-5.Pānīyassa uḷuṅke: In a water dipper. Doṇiyaṃ rajanassapī: And even in a dye trough. Phalakapīṭhe: On a wooden seat. Valayādhārakādike: On stands such as tooth ring stands. By the term ādi, a stick stand is included. Pādapuñchaniyaṃ: On a foot wiper made of rags, etc. Pīṭhe: On a footstool. And also on a footrest by association. Cittaṃ sabbameva ca vaṭṭati: All pictorial work is allowable on the requisites mentioned for monks, lacking the figure of a woman, and on the requisites for nuns, lacking the figure of a man.
3076.Nānā ca te maṇayo cātinānāmaṇī,indanīlādayo, nānāmaṇīhi katānānāmaṇimayā,thambhā ca kavāṭā ca dvārā ca bhittiyo cathambhakavāṭadvārabhittiyo,nānāmaṇimayā thambhakavāṭadvārabhittiyo yasmiṃ taṃ tathā vuttaṃ.Kā kathā vaṇṇamaṭṭhaketi mālākammalatākammacittakammādivaṇṇamaṭṭhake vattabbameva natthīti attho.
3076.Nānā ca te maṇayo cāti nānāmaṇī, various gems, such as sapphires; katā nānāmaṇimayā, made of various gems; thambhā ca kavāṭā ca dvārā ca bhittiyo ca thambhakavāṭadvārabhittiyo, pillars, doors, gates and walls; yasmiṃ nānāmaṇimayā thambhakavāṭadvārabhittiyo taṃ tathā vuttaṃ, that in which are pillars, doors, gates and walls made of various gems, that is so said. Kā kathā vaṇṇamaṭṭhake: There is nothing to say about decorations such as garland work, creeper work, pictorial work, etc., is the meaning.
3077.Thāvarassa ratanamayapāsādassa kappiyabhāvaṃ dassetvā suvaṇṇādimayassāpi sabbapāsādaparibhogassa kappiyabhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sovaṇṇaya’’ntiādi.Sovaṇṇayanti suvaṇṇamayaṃ. Dvārakavāṭānaṃ anantaragāthāya dassitattā ‘‘dvārakavāṭabandha’’nti iminā dvārakavāṭabāhāsaṅkhātaṃ piṭṭhasaṅghāṭaṃ gahitaṃ. Dvārañca kavāṭañcadvārakavāṭāni,dvārakavāṭānaṃ bandhaṃdvārakavāṭabandhaṃ,uttarapāsakummārasaṅkhātaṃ piṭṭhasaṅghāṭanti attho. Nānā ca te maṇayo cātinānāmaṇī, suvaṇṇañca nānāmaṇī casuvaṇṇanānāmaṇī,bhitti ca bhūmi cabhittibhūmisuvaṇṇanānāmaṇīhi katā bhittibhūmisuvaṇṇanānāmaṇibhittibhūmi.Itiimesu senāsanāvayavesu.Na kiñci ekampi nisedhanīyanti ekampi senāsanaparikkhāraṃ kiñci na nisedhanīyaṃ, senāsanampi na paṭikkhipitabbanti attho.Senāsanaṃ vaṭṭati sabbamevāti sabbameva senāsanaparibhogaṃ vaṭṭati. Yathāha –
3077.Having shown the appropriateness of a permanent palace made of jewels, to show the appropriateness of all uses of palaces made of gold, etc., he says "sovaṇṇaya" etc. Sovaṇṇaya: Made of gold. Because door leaves are shown in the following verse, by "dvārakavāṭabandha" is meant the door frame, i.e. the lintel. Dvārañca kavāṭañca dvārakavāṭāni, door and gate are dvārakavāṭāni, dvārakavāṭānaṃ bandhaṃ dvārakavāṭabandhaṃ, the bond or connection of doors and gates, meaning the lintel consisting of the upper crosspiece and the kumāra. Nānā ca te maṇayo cāti nānāmaṇī, various gems, suvaṇṇañca nānāmaṇī ca suvaṇṇanānāmaṇī, gold and various gems, bhitti ca bhūmi ca bhittibhūmi, wall and floor, suvaṇṇanānāmaṇīhi katā bhittibhūmi suvaṇṇanānāmaṇibhittibhūmi, walls and floors made of gold and various gems. Iti: In these parts of the dwelling. Na kiñci ekampi nisedhanīyaṃ: Not even a single thing is to be prohibited, no dwelling requisite is to be rejected, is the meaning. Senāsanaṃ vaṭṭati sabbamevā: All uses of the dwelling are allowable. As it is said:
‘‘Sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoganti suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrāni kavāṭāni mañcapīṭhāni tālavaṇṭāni suvaṇṇarajatamayāni pānīyaghaṭapānīyasarāvāni yaṃ kiñci cittakammakataṃ, sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. ‘Pāsādassa dāsidāsaṃ khettavatthuṃ gomahiṃsaṃ demā’ti vadanti, pāṭekkaṃ gahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, pāsāde paṭiggahite paṭiggahitameva hoti. Gonakādīni saṅghikavihāre vā puggalikavihāre vā mañcapīṭhakesu attharitvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭanti. Dhammāsane pana gihivikatanīhārena labbhanti, tatrāpi nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320).
"All uses of a palace, such as diverse doors made of gold, silver, etc., beds and chairs, palm-leaf fans, water pots and water bowls made of gold and silver, whatever is made with pictorial work, all are allowable. If they say, 'We give the palace's male and female slaves, fields and property, cattle and buffaloes,' there is no need to take them individually; when the palace is accepted, it is already accepted. Gonaka cloths, etc., are not allowable to be spread and used on beds and chairs in a Saṅghika monastery or a personal monastery. However, they are obtained in the Dhamma seat by the proper management of lay people; even there, it is not allowable to lie down." (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320).
‘‘Sovaṇṇadvārakavāṭabandha’’nti vā pāṭho, bahubbīhisamāso. Iminā ca dutiyapadena ca senāsanaṃ visesīyati.
"Sovaṇṇadvārakavāṭabandha" is also a reading, a bahubbīhi compound. And by this second term, the dwelling is qualified.
3078.Na davaṃ kareti ‘‘kiṃ buddho silakabuddho? Kiṃ dhammo godhammo ajadhammo? Kiṃ saṅgho gosaṅgho ajasaṅgho migasaṅgho’’ti parihāsaṃ na kareyya. Titthiyabbataṃ mūgabbatādikaṃ neva gaṇheyyāti yojanā.
3078. Na davaṃ kare means one should not make fun, saying, "Is the Buddha a silaka Buddha? Is the Dhamma a cow-Dhamma, a goat-Dhamma? Is the Sangha a cow-Sangha, a goat-Sangha, a deer-Sangha?" The explanation is that one should never adopt the practices of the titthiyas, such as the vow of silence.
3079.Tābhikkhuniyo udakādinā vāpi na siñceyyāti yojanā.
3079. The explanation is that they should not sprinkle those bhikkhunis with water or anything else.
3080.Aññatthaaññasmiṃ vihāre vassaṃvutthoaññatthaaññasmiṃ vihārebhāgaṃvassāvāsikabhāgaṃ gaṇhāti ce, dukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ cīvare naṭṭhe vājajjarejiṇṇe vā gīvā puna dātabbanti yojanā.
3080. If one who has spent the rains in one monastery (aññattha) takes a share (bhāgaṃ) of the vassāvāsika (rains-residence share) in another monastery (aññattha), there is a dukkata offense. The explanation is that if that robe is lost or becomes worn out (jajjare), it should be given again.
3081.Soti aññattha bhāgaṃ gaṇhanako bhikkhu.Tehīti cīvarasāmikehi.Tanti tathā gahitaṃ vassāvāsikabhāgaṃ.Tesanti cīvarasāmikānaṃ.
3081. So means the bhikkhu who takes a share elsewhere. Tehī means by the owners of the robe. Ta means that vassāvāsika share taken in that way. Tesa means to the owners of the robe.
3082.Karototi kārāpayato.Davā silaṃ pavijjhantoti pantikīḷāya kīḷatthikānaṃ sippadassanavasena sakkharaṃ vā ninnaṭṭhānaṃ pavaṭṭanavasena pāsāṇaṃ vā pavijjhanto. Na kevalañca pāsāṇaṃ, aññampi yaṃ kiñci dārukhaṇḍaṃ vā iṭṭhakakhaṇḍaṃ vā hatthena vā yantena vā pavijjhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Cetiyādīnaṃ atthāya pāsāṇādayo hasantā hasantā pavaṭṭentipi khipantipi ukkhipantipi, kammasamayoti vaṭṭati.
3082. Karoto means while causing to do. Davā silaṃ pavijjhanto means while piercing a stone or gravel by way of showing skill for the sake of playing a target game, or by way of propelling a stone from a low place to a high place. Not only a stone, but anything else, whether a piece of wood or a piece of brick, it is not proper to propel it with the hand or with a tool. It is proper to hoist, throw, or lift stones, etc., for the sake of a cetiya, etc., while laughing and enjoying oneself, at the time of work.
3083.Gihigopakadānasminti gihīnaṃ uyyānagopakādīhi attanā gopitauyyānādito phalādīnaṃ dāne yāvadatthaṃ diyyamānepi.Na doso koci gaṇhatoti paṭiggaṇhato bhikkhuno koci doso natthi.Saṅghacetiyasantaketālaphalādimhi uyyānagopakādīhi diyyamāneparicchedanayotesaṃ vetanavasena paricchinnānaṃyeva gahaṇe anāpattinayo vuttoti yojanā.
3083. Gihigopakadānasmiṃ means even when, in the giving of fruits, etc., from a garden, etc., guarded by oneself by garden-keepers, etc., of lay people, as much as is needed is being given. Na doso koci gaṇhato means there is no offense whatsoever for the bhikkhu who receives it. Saṅghacetiyasantake means when tāla fruits, etc., are being given by garden-keepers, etc., from what belongs to the Sangha or a cetiya, the explanation is that the rule of non-offense applies only when receiving what has been allocated as their wages (paricchedanayo).
3084.Purisasaṃyuttanti parivisakehi purisehi vuyhamānaṃ.Hatthavaṭṭakanti hattheneva pavaṭṭetabbasakaṭaṃ.
3084. Purisasaṃyuttaṃ means being drawn by men who are servers. Hatthavaṭṭakaṃ means a cart that must be propelled by hand.
3085.Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃkiñcipianācāraṃna sampayojeyyana kāreyyāti yojanā.‘‘Kiñcī’’tipi pāṭho, gahaṭṭhaṃ vā pabbajitaṃ vā kiñci bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ anācāravasena na sampayojeyyāti attho.Obhāsentassāti kāmādhippāyaṃ pakāsentassa.
3085. The explanation is that one should not engage in kiñcipi (any) misconduct (anācāraṃ) with a bhikkhuni, nor cause it to be done (na sampayojeyya). There is also the reading ‘‘Kiñcī’’, meaning one should not engage in any misconduct with any bhikkhuni, whether a lay person or a renunciant. Obhāsentassa means while revealing the intention of desire.
3086.Haveti ekaṃsatthe nipāto.
3086. Have is a particle expressing certainty.
3087.Attano paribhogatthaṃ dinnanti ‘‘tumheyeva paribhuñjathā’’ti vatvā dinnaṃ ticīvarādiṃ.
3087. Attano paribhogatthaṃ dinnaṃ means robes, etc., given saying, "May you yourself use this."
3088.Asappāyanti pittādidosānaṃ kopanavasena aphāsukāraṇaṃ.Apanetumpijahitumpi, pageva dātunti adhippāyo.Aggaṃ gahetvā dātuṃ vāti tathā gahaṇārahaṃ annādiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katipāhaṃ bhutvā’’ti seso. Piṇḍapātādito aggaṃ gahetvā pattādiṃ katipāhaṃ bhutvā dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.
3088. Asappāyaṃ means causing discomfort due to the excitation of bile and other defects. Apanetumpi means even to abandon, the intention is to give it away quickly. Aggaṃ gahetvā dātuṃ vā means this was said with reference to food, etc., which is worthy of being taken in that way. "Having eaten for a few days" is the remainder. The meaning is that it is proper to take a portion from alms food, etc., and give it away after having eaten from the bowl, etc., for a few days.
3089.Pañcavaggūpasampadāti vinayadharapañcamena saṅghena kātabbaupasampadā.Navāti aññehi ekavārampi aparibhuttā.Guṇaṅguṇaupāhanācatupaṭalato paṭṭhāya bahupaṭalaupāhanā.Cammatthāroti kappiyacammattharaṇañca.Dhuvanhānanti pakatinahānaṃ.
3089. Pañcavaggūpasampadā means upasampadā that should be done by a Sangha with five, including a Vinaya-holder. Navā means unused even once by others. Guṇaṅguṇaupāhanā means sandals with many layers, starting from four layers. Cammatthāro means a permissible leather mat. Dhuvanhānaṃ means a regular bath.
3090.Sambādhassāti vaccamaggapassāvamaggadvayassa sāmantā dvaṅgulā anto satthavatthikammaṃ vāritanti yojanā. Satthena antamaso nakhenāpi chedanaphālanādivasenasatthakammañcavatthīhi bhesajjatelassa anto pavisanavasena kātabbaṃvatthikammañcathullaccayāpattividhānena vāritanti attho. Passāvamaggassa sāmantā dvaṅgulaṃ aṅgajātassa aggato paṭṭhāya gahetabbaṃ.
3090. Sambādhassa means it is prohibited to do surgical work within two fingerbreadths all around the two paths of the excretion passage and the urine passage, or even inward cutting with an instrument. The meaning is that satthakammañca (surgical work) by means of cutting, splitting, etc., even with an instrument or at least with a nail, and vatthikammañca (the work of enema), which should be done by means of medicine oil entering inside by means of suppositories is prohibited by way of the provision for a thullaccaya offense. Two fingerbreadths should be taken all around the urine passage, starting from the tip of the sexual organ.
3091.‘‘Pākattha’’nti iminā nibbāpetuṃ calane niddosabhāvaṃ dīpeti.
3091. With ‘‘Pākattha,’’ he indicates the state of being without fault in moving it to extinguish it.
3092.Upaḷāletīti ‘‘pattacīvarādiparikkhāraṃ te dammī’’ti vatvā palobhetvā gaṇhāti.Tatthāti tasmiṃ puggale.Ādīnavanti alajjitādibhāvaṃ dassetvā tena saha sambhogādikaraṇe alajjibhāvāpajjanādiādīnavaṃ.Tassāti tato viyojetabbassa tassa.
3092. Upaḷāleti means he allures and takes, saying, "I will give you robe-bowl and other requisites." Tatthā means in that person. Ādīnavaṃ means showing the state of being shameless, and the faults of falling into a state of shamelessness, etc., when engaging in association, etc., with him. Tassā means of that one who should be separated from him.
3093.Ādīnavadassanappakāraṃ dassetumāha‘‘makkhana’’ntiādi. ‘‘Nahāyituṃ gatena gūthamuttehi makkhanaṃ viya dussīlaṃ nissāya viharatā tayā kata’’nti evaṃ tattha ādīnavaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.
3093. In order to show the way of showing the faults, he says ‘‘makkhana’’ntiādi (smearing, etc.). The explanation is that it is proper to say a fault there in this way: "By you, living in dependence on an immoral person is like smearing with excrement and urine by one who has gone to bathe."
3094-5.Bhattaggebhojanasālāya bhuñjamāno.Yāgupāneti yāguṃ pivanakāle.Antogāmeti antaraghare.Vīthiyanti nigamanagaragāmādīnaṃ rathikāya.Andhakāreti andhakāre vattamāne, andhakāragatoti attho. Tañhi vandantassa mañcapādādīsupi nalāṭaṃ paṭihaññeyya.Anāvajjoti kiccapasutattā vandanaṃ asamannāharanto.Ekāvattoti ekato āvatto sapattapakkhe ṭhito verī visabhāgapuggalo. Ayañhi vandiyamāno pādenapi pahareyya.Vāvaṭoti sibbanakammādikiccantarapasuto.
3094-5. Bhattagge means while eating in the dining hall. Yāgupāne means at the time of drinking rice-gruel. Antogāme means inside a house. Vīthiya means on the road of a town, city, or village. Andhakāre means while proceeding in the darkness, meaning one who has gone into the darkness. For, while venerating, his forehead might strike against a bed-leg, etc. Anāvajjo means one who does not intend veneration because he is busy with a task. Ekāvatto means one who has turned away, a hostile person standing on the side of the enemy, a person of a different disposition. For, when he is being venerated, he might even strike with his foot. Vāvaṭo means one who is engaged in another task such as sewing, etc.
Suttoti niddaṃ okkanto.Khādanti piṭṭhakakhajjakādīni khādanto.Bhuñjantoti odanādīni bhuñjanto.Vaccaṃ muttampi vā karanti uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karontoitiimesaṃ terasannaṃ vandanā ayuttatthena vāritāti sambandho.
Sutto means one who has fallen asleep. Khādaṃ means while eating cakes and sweets, etc. Bhuñjanto means while eating rice, etc. Vaccaṃ muttampi vā karaṃ means while passing excrement or urine. Iti means the connection is that because it is improper, the veneration of these thirteen is prohibited.
3096-7.Kammaladdhisīmāvasena tīsu nānāsaṃvāsakesu kammanānāsaṃvāsakassa ukkhittaggahaṇena gahitattā, sīmānānāsaṃvāsakavuḍḍhatarapakatattassa vandiyattā, pārisesañāyena ‘‘nānāsaṃvāsako vuḍḍhataro adhammavādī avandiyo’’ti (pari. 467) vacanato ca laddhinānāsaṃvāsako idha‘‘nānāsaṃvāsako’’ti gahitoti veditabbo.Ukkhittoti tividhenāpi ukkhepanīyakammena ukkhittako.Garukaṭṭhā ca pañcāti pārivāsikamūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahamānattacārikaabbhānārahasaṅkhātā pañca garukaṭṭhā ca. Ime pana aññamaññassa yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanādīni labhanti, pakatattena avandiyattāva avandiyesu gahitā.Ime bāvīsati puggaleti naggādayo yathāvutte.
3096-7. Because the kamma-nānāsaṃvāsaka (one in disagreement by an act) in the three kinds of nānāsaṃvāsakas (those in disagreement) in terms of the boundary of the acquisition of an act has been taken by taking one who is expelled, and because the elder in disagreement by boundary is worthy of veneration, and by the rule of remainder, and because it is said, "The elder in disagreement, one who speaks against the Dhamma, is not worthy of veneration" (pari. 467), it should be understood that here the laddhinānāsaṃvāsaka (one in disagreement by view) has been taken as ‘‘nānāsaṃvāsako’’. Ukkkhitto means one who has been expelled by any of the three acts of expulsion. Garukaṭṭhā ca pañca means and the five grave cases consisting of those who are worthy of parivāsa, root-expulsion, reinstatement, mānatta, reinstatement, and cārikā. However, these receive veneration, etc., from each other according to seniority; because they are improper due to being condemned, they are taken among those who are not worthy of veneration. Ime bāvīsati puggale means the naked ones, etc., as stated above.
3098.‘‘Dhammavādī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘nānāsaṃvāsavuḍḍhako’’ti etassa visesanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, vandiyā. Pacchā upasampannena pureupasampanno vandiyo, nānāsaṃvāsako vuḍḍhataro dhammavādī vandiyo, sadevake loke, bhikkhave, samārake…pe… tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vandiyo’’ti (cūḷava. 312).
3098. ‘‘Dhammavādī’’ (speaker of the Dhamma) this is an adjective of "elder in disagreement." As he said, "There are these three, bhikkhus, who are worthy of veneration. One who was ordained later should venerate one who was ordained earlier; an elder in disagreement, a speaker of the Dhamma, is worthy of veneration; in the world with its gods, with its Māra… the Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One is worthy of veneration" (cūḷava. 312).
3099.‘‘Eteyeva vandiyā, na aññe’’ti niyāmassa akatattā aññesampi vandiyānaṃ sabbhāvaṃ dassetumāha‘‘tajjanādī’’tiādi. Etthaādi-saddena niyassapabbājanīyapaasāraṇīyakamme saṅgaṇhāti.Etthāti etasmiṃ vandanīyādhikāre.Kammanti apalokanādi catubbidhaṃ kammaṃ.
3099. In order to show that there are other who are worthy of veneration, since the restriction that "These alone are worthy of veneration, not others" has not been made, he says ‘‘tajjanādī’’tiādi (censure, etc.). Here, by the term ādi (etc.), he includes acts of dependence and banishment. Etthā means in this topic of those worthy of veneration. Kammaṃ means the fourfold act beginning with investigation.
3100.Saṅghena adhammakamme kariyamāne taṃ vāretuṃ asakkontena, asakkontehi ca paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassetumāha‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Adhiṭṭhānaṃ panekassa uddiṭṭhanti yojanā, adhammakammaṃ karontānaṃ bhikkhūnamantare nisīditvā taṃ ‘‘adhamma’’nti jānitvāpi taṃ vāretuṃ asakkontassa ekassa ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti cittena adhiṭṭhānamuddiṭṭhanti vuttaṃ hoti.Dvinnaṃ vā tiṇṇameva cāti tameva vāretuṃ asakkontānaṃ dvinnaṃ vā tiṇṇaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃ aññamaññaṃ ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’tidiṭṭhāvikammaṃsakasakadiṭṭhiyā pakāsanaṃ uddiṭṭhanti attho.Tato uddhaṃtīhi uddhaṃ catunnaṃ kammassa paṭikkosanaṃ ‘‘idaṃ adhammakammaṃ mā karothā’’ti paṭikkhipanaṃ uddiṭṭhanti attho.
3100. In order to show the method to be followed by one who is unable to prevent the Sangha from doing an unlawful act, he says ‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi (determination, etc.). However, determination is designated for one person, the explanation is that determination has been designated with the thought "This is not pleasing to me" by one person who is unable to prevent those bhikkhus who are doing an unlawful act after sitting among them and knowing that it is unlawful. Dvinnaṃ vā tiṇṇameva cā means the meaning is that the disclosure of one's own view (diṭṭhāvikammaṃ) to each other with "This is not pleasing to me" has been designated for two or three bhikkhus who are unable to prevent that. Tato uddhaṃ means above three, the meaning is that the rejection of the act by four upwards with "Do not do this unlawful act" has been designated.
3101.Vissāsaggāhalakkhaṇaṃ aggahitaggahaṇena pañcavidhanti dassetumāha‘‘sandiṭṭho’’tiādi. Yojanā panettha evaṃ veditabbā – sandiṭṭho ca hoti, jīvati ca, gahite ca attamano hoti, sambhatto ca hoti, jīvati ca, gahite ca attamano hoti, ālapito ca hoti, jīvati ca, gahite ca attamano hotīti evaṃ sandiṭṭhasambhattaālapitānaṃ tiṇṇamekekassa tīṇi tīṇi vissāsaggāhalakkhaṇāni katvā navavidhaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Vacanattho, panettha vinicchayo ca heṭṭhā vuttova.
3102.Sīlavipatti, diṭṭhivipatti ca ācārājīvasambhavā dve vipattiyo cāti yojanā, ācāravipatti, ājīvavipatti cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
3103.Tatthāti tesu catūsu vipattīsu.Appaṭikammāpārājikāvuṭṭhānagāminīsaṅghādisesāpattikā duve āpattiyo sīlavipattīti pakāsitāti yojanā.
3104.Yā ca antaggāhikā diṭṭhi, yā dasavatthukā diṭṭhi, ayaṃ duvidhā diṭṭhi diṭṭhivipattīti dīpitāti yojanā. Tatthaantaggāhikadiṭṭhināma ucchedantasassatantagāhavasena pavattā diṭṭhi. ‘‘Natthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattā dasavatthukā diṭṭhi.
3105.Thullaccayādikā desanāgāminikāyā pañcaāpattiyo,ācārakusalenabhagavatā sā ācāravipattīti vuttāti yojanā.Ādi-saddena pācittiyapāṭidesanīyadukkaṭadubbhāsitānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Yāti pañcāpattiyo apekkhitvā bahuttaṃ.Sāti ācāravipatti sāmaññamapekkhitvā ekattaṃ.
3106.Kuhanādītiādi-saddena lapanā nemittikatā nippesikatā lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatā gahitā, kuhanādīnaṃ vitthārovisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.16) vuttanayena veditabbo. Ājīvo paccayo hetu yassā āpattiyāti viggaho.Chabbidhāti catutthapārājikasañcarittathullaccayapācittiyapāṭidesanīyadukkaṭāpattīnaṃ vasena chabbidhā.Pakāsitā–
‘‘Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā pāpiccho icchāpakato asantaṃ abhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapati, āpatti pārājikassa. Ājīvahetu…pe… sañcarittaṃ samāpajjati, āpatti saṅghādisesassa. Ājīvahetu…pe… ‘yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu arahā’ti bhaṇati, paṭijānantassa āpatti thullaccayassa. Ājīvahetu…pe… bhikkhu paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Ājīvahetu…pe… bhikkhunī paṇītabhojanāni agilānā attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjati, āpatti pāṭidesanīyassa. Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā sūpaṃ vā odanaṃ vā agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pari. 287) –
Desitā. Iminā ājīvavipatti dīpitā.
3107.‘‘Ukkhitto’’tiādi yathākkamena tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakānaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Tattha tayo ukkhittakā vuttāyeva.
3108-9.‘‘Yo saṅghena ukkhepanīyakammakatānaṃ adhammavādīnaṃ pakkhe nisinno ‘tumhe kiṃ bhaṇathā’ti tesañca itaresañca laddhiṃ sutvā ‘ime adhammavādino, itare dhammavādino’ti cittaṃ uppādeti, ayaṃ tesaṃ majjhe nisinnova tesaṃ nānāsaṃvāsako hoti, kammaṃ kopeti. Itaresampi hatthapāsaṃ anāgatattā kopetī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 455) āgataaṭṭhakathāvinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘adhammavādipakkhasmi’’ntiādi.
Adhammavādipakkhasminti ukkhepanīyakammena nissāritānaṃ adhammavādīnaṃ pakkhasmiṃ.Nisinnovāti hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā gaṇapūrako hutvā nisinnova.Vicintayanti ‘‘ime nu kho dhammavādino, udāhu ete’’ti vividhenākārena cintayanto. ‘‘Ete pana dhammavādī’’ti mānasaṃ uppādeti, evaṃuppanne pana mānase. Adhammavādipakkhasmiṃ nisinnova evaṃ mānasaṃ uppādentoayaṃbhikkhu.Laddhiyāti evaṃ uppāditamānasasaṅkhātāya laddhiyā. Tesaṃ adhammavādīnaṃnānāsaṃvāsako nāmahotīti pakāsito.
Tatraṭṭho pana soti tasmiṃ adhammavādipakkhasmiṃ nisinnova so. Sada-dhātuyā gatinivāraṇatthattā tatra nisinno ‘‘tatraṭṭho’’ti vuccati.Dvinnanti dhammavādiadhammavādipakkhānaṃ dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ.Kammanti catuvaggādisaṅghena karaṇīyakammaṃ.Kopetīti adhammavādīnaṃ asaṃvāsabhāvaṃ gantvā tesaṃ gaṇapūraṇattā, itaresaṃ ekasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā hatthapāsaṃ anupagatattā, chandassa ca adinnattā kammaṃ kopeti. Yo pana adhammavādīnaṃ pakkhe nisinno ‘‘adhammavādino ime, itare dhammavādino’’ti tesaṃ majjhe pavisati, yattha vā tattha vā pakkhe nisinno ‘‘ime dhammavādino’’ti gaṇhāti, ayaṃ attanāva attānaṃ samānasaṃvāsakaṃ karotīti veditabbo.
Tatraṭṭho pana so means he is seated in that faction of those who speak against the Dhamma. Because it prevents movement to one's own element, being seated there is called "tatraṭṭho". Dvinnaṃ means of the two Saṅghas, the faction of those who speak for the Dhamma and those who speak against the Dhamma. Kammaṃ means an act to be done by a Saṅgha of four or more bhikkhus. Kopeti means, by going to the state of non-communion with those who speak against the Dhamma, because he completes their quorum, and because he stands within the same boundary as the others without approaching within arm's reach, and because consent is not given, he corrupts the act. But one who, seated in the faction of those who speak against the Dhamma, enters among them, saying, "These are the speakers against the Dhamma, and the others are the speakers for the Dhamma," or seated in whichever faction, considers, "These are the speakers for the Dhamma," it should be understood that he makes himself one in communion by himself.
3110.Bahisīmāgatopakatatto bhikkhu sace hatthapāse ṭhito hoti, so sīmāya nānāsaṃvāsako matoti yojanā. Taṃ gaṇapūraṇaṃ katvā katakammampi kuppati.Evaṃyathāvuttaniyāmena tayo nānāsaṃvāsakā mahesinā vuttāti yojanā.
3110.The interpretation is that a bhikkhu who has reverted and is outside the boundary is considered to be in non-communion with the boundary if he is standing within arm's reach. Even an act done by completing that quorum is corrupted. The interpretation is that the Most Venerable One has spoken of three kinds of non-communion in this manner, according to the rule stated.
3111.Cutoti pārājikāpanno sāsanato cutattā ‘‘cuto’’ti gahito. ‘‘Bhikkhunī ekādasa abhabbā’’ti padacchedo.Imeti bhedamanapekkhitvā sāmaññena sattarasa janā.Asaṃvāsāti na saṃvasitabbā, natthi vā etehi pakatattānaṃ ekakammādiko saṃvāsotiasaṃvāsānāma siyuṃ.
3111.Cuto means one who has fallen into defeat (pārājika), taken as "cuto" because he has fallen from the Sāsana. "Bhikkhunī ekādasa abhabbā" is the word division. Ime means seventeen people generally, without regard to division. Asaṃvāsā means not to be lived with, or there is no communion consisting of one act, etc., for those who have reverted, therefore they would be called asaṃvāsā.
3112.Asaṃvāsassa sabbassāti yathāvuttassa sattarasavidhassa sabbassa asaṃvāsassa.Tathā kammārahassa cāti ‘‘yassa saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, so neva kammapatto, nāpi chandāraho, apica kammāraho’’ti (pari. 488) evaṃparivārevuttakammārahassa ca.Ummattakādīnantiādi-saddena khittacittādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Saṅghetajjanīyādīni karonte.Paṭikkhepoti paṭikkosanā.Na rūhatīti paṭikkosaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati, kammaṃ na kopetīti adhippāyo.
3112.Asaṃvāsassa sabbassā means of all the non-communion of the seventeen kinds as stated. Tathā kammārahassa cā means also of one deserving of an act, which is said in the Parivāra as "He for whom the Saṅgha performs an act is neither entitled to an act, nor deserving of consent, but he is deserving of an act" (pari. 488). Ummattakādīnaṃ means the taking of the deranged in mind, etc., by the ādi-word. Saṅghe means while performing the act of censure, etc., in the Saṅgha. Paṭikkhepo means rejection. Na rūhati means it does not stand in the place of rejection; the meaning is that it does not corrupt the act.
3113.Sasaṃvāseka…pe… bhikkhunoti vuttanayena kammena vā laddhiyā vā asaṃvāsikabhāvaṃ anupagatattā samānasaṃvāsakassa sīmāya asaṃvāsikabhāvaṃ anupagantvā ekasīmāya ṭhitassa antimavatthuṃ anajjhāpannattā pakatattassa bhikkhuno.Anantarassapihatthapāsevacanenavacībhedakaraṇenapaṭikkhepopaṭikkosoruhatipaṭikkosanaṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhati, kammaṃ kopetīti adhippāyo.
3113.Sasaṃvāseka…pe… bhikkhuno means of a bhikkhu who is in communion, because he has not gone to the state of non-communion by an act or by belief in the way stated, and because he has not gone to the state of non-communion within the boundary, and because he has not committed the final offense. Anantarassapi means even if he is nearby. Hatthapāse vacanena means by words that cause division. Paṭikkhepo means rejection. Ruhati means it stands right in the place of rejection; the meaning is that it corrupts the act.
3114.Chahi ākārehīti (pāci. aṭṭha. 438; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) lajjitāya, aññāṇatāya, kukkuccapakatatāya, satisammosāya, akappiyekappiyasaññitāya, kappiyeakappiyasaññitāyāti imehi chahi ākārehi. Pañca samaṇakappā ca vuttā, pañca visuddhiyo ca vuttāti yojanā.
3114.Chahi ākārehī means by these six ways: through being ashamed, through ignorance, through being affected by doubt, through lapse of mindfulness, through perceiving the unallowable as allowable, and through perceiving the allowable as unallowable (pāci. aṭṭha. 438; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā). And five items proper for a Samaṇa were stated, and five purifications were stated, is the connection.
khuddakavatthukeanuññātāpañca samaṇakappānāma.Pañca visuddhiyoti parivāreekuttare‘‘pañca visuddhiyo’’ti imassa niddese ‘‘nidānaṃ uddisitvā avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ, ayaṃ paṭhamā visuddhī’’tiādinā (pari. 325) nayena dassitā pañca pātimokkhuddesasaṅkhātā pañca visuddhiyo ca ‘‘suttuddeso pārisuddhiuposatho adhiṭṭhānuposatho pavāraṇā sāmaggiuposathoyeva pañcamo’’ti (pari. 325) evaṃ vuttā pañca visuddhiyo cāti dvepañcavisuddhiyo ‘‘dvipañcaviññāṇānī’’tiādīsu viya sāmaññavacanena saṅgahitā.
Khuddakavatthuke anuññātā pañca samaṇakappā means the five items proper for a Samaṇa that were allowed in the minor matters. Pañca visuddhiyo means the five purifications shown in the Parivāra, in the Ekuttara, in the exposition of "five purifications" by the method beginning with "having stated the cause, the remainder should be made known by the Sutta; this is the first purification" (pari. 325), and the five purifications consisting of the statement of the Pātimokkha that were stated as "the Sutta statement, the Uposatha of complete purity, the Uposatha of resolution, invitation, and the Uposatha of concord as the fifth" (pari. 325), these five and two purifications are included by the general expression as in "two sets of five consciousnesses," etc.
3115-7.Nissesena dīyati paññapīyati ettha sikkhāpadantinidānaṃ,tesaṃ tesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ paññattiyā ṭhānabhūtaṃ vesālīādi. Puṃ vuccati nirayo, taṃ galati maddati nerayikadukkhaṃ anubhavatītipuggalo,satto. Ariyapuggalā taṃsadisattā, bhūtapubbagatiyā vā ‘‘puggalā’’ti veditabbā. Idha panete sikkhāpadavītikkamassa ādikammikā adhippetā. Idāni puggalaniddesaṃ vakkhati. Vasati ettha bhagavato āṇāsaṅkhātā sikkhāpadapaññatti taṃ paṭicca pavattatītivatthu,tassa tassa puggalassa sikkhāpadapaññattihetubhūto ajjhācāro.
3115-7.Herein, a training rule is given completely and made known; therefore, nidāna means the place for the enactment of those training rules, such as Vesālī, etc. Puṃ means hell, one who goes there, is crushed, and experiences the suffering of the hells is puggala, a being. Noble individuals should be understood as puggalā because they are similar to that, or by the past course. But here, those who are first offenders of transgression of the training rules are intended. Now, he will state the definition of individuals. Here, the enactment of the training rule known as the Buddha's command dwells, and occurs in relation to that; therefore, vatthu means the transgression that is the cause of the enactment of the training rule for that individual.
vidhi,pabhedo. Paññāpīyati bhagavato āṇā pakārena ñāpīyati etāyātipaññatti,paññattiyā vidhi pabhedo ‘‘paññattividhi’’nti vattabbe ‘‘vidhiṃ paññattiyā’’ti gāthābandhavasena asamatthaniddeso. Sā pana paññattividhi paññattianupaññatti anuppannapaññatti sabbatthapaññatti padesapaññatti sādhāraṇapaññatti asādhāraṇapaññatti ekatopaññatti ubhatopaññattivasena navavidhā hoti.
Vidhi means division. The Buddha's command is made known, is manifested in this way; therefore, paññatti means the division, the distinction of the enactment. Where it should have been said, "paññattividhi," "vidhiṃ paññattiyā" is stated, an unbalanced definition because of the meter of the verse. But that distinction of the enactment is ninefold as original enactment, subsequent enactment, unpromulgated enactment, general enactment, partial enactment, shared enactment, unshared enactment, enactment for one side, and enactment for both sides.
vipatti. Sā pana sīlaācāradiṭṭhiājīvānaṃ vasena catubbidhā. Sā pana uddesavasena heṭṭhā dassitāva. Āpajjanti etāya akusalābyākatabhūtāya bhagavato āṇāvītikkamantiāpatti. Sā pubbapayogādivasena anekappabhedā āpatti.Anāpattiajānanādivasena āṇāya anatikkamanaṃ. Samuṭṭhāti etehi āpattītisamuṭṭhānāni,kāyādivasena chabbidhāni āpattikāraṇāni. Samuṭṭhānānaṃ nayosamuṭṭhānanayo,taṃ.
Vipatti means failure. But that is fourfold in terms of morality, conduct, views, and livelihood. But that has already been shown below in terms of statement. One falls into this; one transgresses the Buddha's command by this, which is unwholesome and indeterminate; therefore, āpatti means offense. That offense is of many kinds in terms of preliminary action, etc. Anāpatti means non-offense, non-transgression of the command in terms of unknowing, etc. Offenses arise from these; therefore, samuṭṭhānāni means origins, the six causes of offenses in terms of body, etc. The way of the origins is samuṭṭhānanayo, that.
vajjakammakriyāsaññācittāṇattiyo,tāsaṃ vidhi tathā vuccati, taṃ.Vajjavidhinti ‘‘yassā sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, ayaṃ lokavajjā, sesā paṇṇattivajjā’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ vajjavidhiṃ.Kammavidhinti ‘‘sabbā ca kāyakammavacīkammatadubhayavasena tividhā hontī’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) dassitaṃ kammavidhiṃ.Kriyāvidhinti ‘‘atthāpatti kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, atthi akiriyato, atthi kiriyākiriyato, atthi siyā kiriyato siyā akiriyato’’tiādinā (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) nayena dassitaṃ kiriyāvidhiṃ.Saññāvidhinti ‘‘saññāvimokkhā’’tiādinā (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) nayena dassitaṃ saññāvidhiṃ.
Vajjakammakriyāsaññācittāṇattiyo means offenses, actions, activities, perceptions, thoughts, and commands; the rule of those is called that, that. Vajjavidhi means the rule for offenses stated as, "For whom the thought is only unwholesome in the intentional side, this is an offense against the world; the rest are offenses against the enactment" (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā). Kammavidhi means the rule for action shown as, "All are threefold in terms of bodily action, verbal action, and both of those" (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā). Kriyāvidhi means the rule for activity shown by the method beginning with, "There is an offense that arises from action; there is one from non-action; there is one from action and non-action; there is one that may be from action or may be from non-action" (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā). Saññāvidhi means the rule for perception shown by the method beginning with "perceptions of liberation," etc. (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā).
Cittavidhinti ‘‘sabbāpi cittavasena duvidhā honti sacittakā, acittakā cā’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ cittavidhiṃ.Āṇattividhinti ‘‘sāṇattikaṃ anāṇattika’’nti vuttaṃ āṇattividhiṃ.Aṅgavidhānanti sabbasikkhāpadesu āpattīnaṃ vuttaṃ aṅgavidhānañca. Vedanāttikaṃ, kusalattikañcāti yojanā. Taṃ pana ‘‘akusalacittaṃ, dvicittaṃ, ticittaṃ, dukkhavedanaṃ, dvivedanaṃ, tivedana’’nti tattha tattha dassitameva.
Cittavidhi means the rule for thought stated as, "All are twofold in terms of thought: intentional and unintentional" (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā). Āṇattividhi means the rule for command stated as "commanded and uncommanded". Aṅgavidhāna means the definition of factors stated in all the training rules regarding offenses. The triad of feeling and the triad of the wholesome, is the connection. But that has already been shown there as "unwholesome thought, dual thought, triple thought, painful feeling, dual feeling, and triple feeling" in that place.
Sattarasavidhaṃetaṃ lakkhaṇanti yathāvuttanidānādisattarasappabhedaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ sādhāraṇalakkhaṇaṃ.Dassetvāti pakāsetvā.Budhovinayakusalo. Tattha tattha sikkhāpadesu yathārahaṃ yojeyyāti sambandho.
Sattarasavidhaṃ etaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ means the common characteristic of all the training rules, the seventeen kinds of divisions beginning with cause, as stated. Dassetvā means having shown, having revealed. Budho means one skilled in the Vinaya. The connection is that he should connect it appropriately in those training rules.
3118.Imesu sattarasasu lakkhaṇesu nidānapuggale tāva niddisitumāha‘‘nidāna’’ntiādi.Tatthāti tesu sattarasasu sādhāraṇalakkhaṇesu, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Nidānanti niddhāritabbadassanaṃ.‘‘Pura’’nti idaṃ ‘‘vesālī’’tiādipadehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Sakkabhaggāti etehi janapadavācīhi saddehi ṭhānanissitā nāgarāva gahetabbā. Tāni ca ‘‘sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṃ, bhaggesu viharati susumāragire’’ti tattha tattha sikkhāpadanidāne nidassitāneva.
3118.Among these seventeen characteristics, to specify the cause and individual, he says, ‘‘nidāna’’ntiādi. Tattha means among those seventeen common characteristics; this is an adverb used in specification. Nidāna means showing what is to be specified. ‘‘Pura’’ means this should be connected individually with the words beginning with "Vesālī." Sakkabhaggā means the townsfolk established in the place should be taken by these words denoting region. And those are shown in the nidāna of the training rules in that place as "He dwells among the Sakyans at Kapilavatthu, he dwells among the Bhaggas at Susumāragira."
3119.‘‘Dasa vesāliyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthavinicchayouttareāvi bhavissati.Giribbajeti rājagahanagare. Tañhi samantā ṭhitehi isigiliādīhi pañcahi pabbatehi vajasadisanti ‘‘giribbaja’’nti vuccati.
3119.The meaning of ‘‘Dasa vesāliyā’’tiādi will become manifest uttare. Giribbaje means in the city of Rājagaha. Because it is like a stockade (vaja) with the five mountains beginning with Isigili situated all around, it is called "Giribbaja".
3121.Bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhasmiṃ sudinnadhaniyādayo tevīsatividhā ādikammikapuggalā vuttāti yojanā.
3121.It should be connected that twenty-three kinds of first offender individuals beginning with Sudinna and Dhaniya were stated in the Bhikkhus' Pātimokkha.
3122.Ubhayapātimokkhe āgatāte sabbeādikammikapuggalā paripiṇḍitā tiṃsa bhavantīti yojanā.Vatthuādīnaṃ vinicchayouttarevakkhamānattā idha na vutto. Nanu ca nidānapuggalavinicchayampi tattha vakkhatīti so idha kasmā vuttoti? Nāyaṃ doso, imassa pakaraṇattā idhāpi vattabboti. Yadi evaṃ vatthuādivinicchayopi idha vattabbo siyā, so kasmā na vuttoti? Ekayoganiddiṭṭhassa imassa vacanena sopi vuttoyeva hotīti ekadesadassanavasena saṃkhittoti daṭṭhabbo.
3122.It should be connected that all those first offender individuals who came in both Pātimokkhas are totaled as thirty. Because the meaning of vatthu and the others will be stated uttare, it was not stated here. But indeed, since the meaning of nidāna and puggala will also be stated there, why was that stated here? This is not a fault, because it should also be stated here because of it being a section here. If so, the meaning of vatthu, etc., should also be stated here; why was that not stated? It should be seen that, by this statement of what was specified as one unit, that is also stated, and it is brief in terms of showing one part.
3123.Yo enaṃ taruṃ jānāti, so paññattiṃ asesato jānātīti sambandho. Ettha‘‘enaṃ taru’’nti iminā nidānādisattarasappakāraṃ sabbasikkhāpadasādhāraṇalakkhaṇasamudāyaṃ rūpakena dasseti. Kiṃ visiṭṭhaṃ tarunti āha‘‘timūla’’ntiādi.
3123.The connection is that one who knows this tree knows the enactment completely. Here, by ‘‘enaṃ taru’’, he shows the collection of common characteristics of all the training rules with seventeen aspects beginning with nidāna, by way of a metaphor. What is a special tree? He says, ‘‘timūla’’ntiādi.
timūlanti nidānapuggalavatthusaṅkhātāni tīṇi mūlāni etassāti timūlaṃ.Navapattanti navavidhapaṇṇattisaṅkhātāni pattāni etassāti navapattaṃ.Dvayaṅkuranti lokavajjapaṇṇattivajjasaṅkhātā dve aṅkurā etassāti dvayaṅkuraṃ. ‘‘Dviaṅkura’’nti vattabbe i-kārassa ayādesaṃ katvā ‘‘dvayaṅkura’’nti vuttaṃ.Sattaphalanti āṇattiāpattianāpattivipattisaññāvedanākusalattikasaṅkhātāni satta phalāni etassāti sattaphalaṃ.Chapupphanti chasamuṭṭhānasaṅkhātāni pupphāni etassāti chapupphaṃ.Dvippabhavanti cittakammasaṅkhātā dve pabhavā etassāti dvippabhavaṃ.Dvisākhanti kiriyaaṅgasaṅkhātā dve sākhā etassāti dvisākhaṃ.Enaṃ taruṃ yo jānātīti yo vutto bhikkhu vuttasarūpasādhāraṇasattarasalakkhaṇarāsivinicchayasaṅkhātataruṃ jānāti.Soti so bhikkhu.Paññattinti vinayapiṭakaṃ.Asesatoti sabbaso.
Timūla means it has three roots consisting of nidāna, puggala, and vatthu; therefore, it is timūla. Navapatta means it has leaves consisting of the nine kinds of enactment; therefore, it is navapatta. Dvayaṅkura means it has two shoots consisting of offenses against the world and offenses against the enactment. Where it should have been said "dviaṅkura," having done the ayādesaṃ of the i-sound, it is said "dvayaṅkura". Sattaphala means it has seven fruits consisting of command, offense, non-offense, failure, perception, feeling, and the triad of the wholesome. Chapuppha means it has flowers consisting of the six origins. Dvippabhava means it has two sources consisting of thought and action. Dvisākha means it has two branches consisting of activity and factor. Enaṃ taruṃ yo jānāti means the bhikkhu who knows the tree that was stated, that is, the collection of seventeen characteristics, common in nature, the meaning of which was stated. So means that bhikkhu. Paññatti means the Vinaya Piṭaka. Asesato means completely.
3124.Itievaṃ madhurapadatthaṃ anākulaṃparamaṃuttamaṃ imaṃ vinicchayaṃ yopaṭhativācuggataṃ karonto pariyāpuṇāti, garusantike sādhukaṃsuṇāti, paripucchate caatthaṃ paripucchati ca,sobhikkhu vinayavinicchaye upālisamo bhavativinayadharānaṃ etadaggaṭṭhāne nikkhittena upālimahātherena sadiso bhavatīti yojanā.
3124.Iti in this way, this paramaṃ excellent exposition of the meaning of the sweet words, free from confusion, one who paṭhati recites, learns by heart, studies well near the teacher, suṇāti hears well, and paripucchate ca asks about the meaning, so the bhikkhu, bhavati becomes equal to Upāli vinayavinicchaye in the decision of the Vinaya, comparable to the great Elder Upāli, who was placed in the foremost position among the vinayadharas, is the connection.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the exposition of the Pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathā in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī, the exposition of the Vinayavinicchaya.
Pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathāvaṇṇanā is finished.
Kammaṭṭhānavibhāvanāvidhānakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Kammaṭṭhānavibhāvanāvidhānakathā
3125.‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya.
3125.‘‘At the beginning, one should show virtue;
Majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye;
In the middle, one should explain the path;
And at the end, Nibbāna;
This is the structure of the speaker.’’ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.291; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.64) –
‘‘pāmokkhe’’tiādi. Tatthapāmokkheti samādhiādīnaṃ anavajjadhammānaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvena uttame.Mokkhappavesaneti amatamahānibbānanagarassa pavesananimitte.Mukheasahāyadvārabhūte. Yathāha –
‘‘Pāmokkhe’’tiādi. Herein, pāmokkhe means supreme, because it is the foundation for the faultless qualities of samādhi, etc. Mokkhappavesane means it is the cause for entrance into the great city of deathlessness, Nibbāna. Mukhe means it is an unparalleled gateway. As it was said –
‘‘Saggārohaṇasopānaṃ, aññaṃ sīlasamaṃ kuto;
‘‘What other stairway is there to ascend to heaven,
That is equal to virtue?
Or else, a gateway to enter the city of Nibbāna?’’ (visuddhi. 1.9; bu. baṃ. aṭṭha. 3.dīpaṅkarabuddhavaṃsavaṇṇanā);
Sabbadukkhakkhayeti jātidukkhādisabbadukkhānaṃ khayassa ariyamaggassa adhigamūpāyattā phalūpacārena sabbadukkhakkhayasaṅkhāte.‘‘Pāmokkhe’’ti ca‘‘mokkhappavesane mukhe’’ti ca‘‘sabbadukkhakkhaye’’ti ca ‘‘pātimokkhasmi’’nti etassa visesanaṃ.Vutteti pārājikato paṭṭhāya nānappakārato niddiṭṭhe sati. Itarattayaṃ vuttamevāti sambandho. Indriyasaṃvarasīlaājīvapārisuddhisīlapaccayasannissitasīlasaṅkhātaṃ itaraṃ sīlattayaṃ vuttameva hoti ‘‘rājā āgato’’ti vutte parisāya āgamanaṃ viya, tasmā taṃ na vakkhāmāti adhippāyo.
Sabbadukkhakkhaye means designated as the destruction of all suffering because of its use as a means for the attainment of the Ariya Path, for the destruction of all suffering such as the suffering of birth, etc., by way of the designation of the result. ‘‘Pāmokkhe’’, ‘‘mokkhappavesane mukhe’’, and ‘‘sabbadukkhakkhaye’’ are specifications of "pātimokkhasmiṃ". The connection is that the other triad was already stated. The other triad of virtue consisting of virtue of sense restraint, virtue of purification of livelihood, and virtue dependent on requisites was already stated, like the arrival of the retinue when it is said "the king has arrived"; therefore, the intention is that we will not state that.
3126.Idaṃ catubbidhaṃ sīlanti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlādiṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ.Ñatvāti lakkhaṇādito, vodānato, hānabhāgiyaṭṭhitibhāgiyavisesabhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyādippakārato ca jānitvā.Tatthāti catubbidhasīle.Patiṭṭhitoti acchiddādiaṅgasamannāgatabhāvamāpādanena patiṭṭhito.Samādhinti upacārappanābhedalokiyasamādhiṃ.Bhāvetvāti samacattālīsāya kammaṭṭhānesu punappunaṃ anuyogavasena vaḍḍhetvā.Paññāyāti tilakkhaṇākārādiparicchedikāya lokuttarāya paññāya hetubhūtāya, karaṇabhūtāya ca.Parimuccatīti sabbakilesabandhanaṃ chetvā saṃsāracārakā samantato muccati, anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyatīti adhippāyo.
3126. Idaṃ catubbidhaṃ sīla means the fourfold purification of virtue (catupārisuddhisīla), beginning with the virtue of the Pātimokkha restraint (pātimokkhasaṃvarasīla). Ñatvā means having known it from the perspective of its characteristics, purification, aspects of decline, stability, specific advantages, and factors leading to revulsion. Tatthā means in that fourfold virtue. Patiṭṭhito means established by achieving a state endowed with unbrokenness, etc. Samādhiṃ means worldly concentration (samādhi) of the level of access (upacāra) and absorption (appanā). Bhāvetvā means having developed it by repeatedly applying oneself to the forty meditation subjects. Paññāya means by the supramundane wisdom (paññā) that discerns the characteristics, etc., and that is the cause and the instrument. Parimuccati means, having cut all bonds of defilements, he is entirely freed from wandering in saṃsāra and attains final Nibbāna in the element of Nibbāna without residue (anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati); this is the intended meaning.
3127.Evaṃ samāsato vuttamevatthaṃ niddisanto āha‘‘dasānussatiyo’’tiādi. Dasa anussatiyo ca dasa kasiṇā ca dasa asubhā ca catasso appamaññāyo ca tathā cattāro āruppā ca vuttā. Aparaṃ kammaṭṭhānadvayañca vuttanti sambandho.
3127. Thus, revealing the meaning that has been stated summarily, he says, ‘‘dasānussatiyo’’ etc. The ten recollections, the ten kasiṇas, the ten kinds of foulness, the four illimitables, and the four immaterial states have been stated. The connection is that another two meditation subjects have also been stated.
dasānussatiyonāma ‘‘buddhānussati, dhammānussati, saṅghānussati, sīlānussati, cāgānussati, devatānussati, kāyagatāsati, maraṇānussati, ānāpānasati, upasamānussatī’’ti (visuddhi. 1.47) evaṃ vuttā dasa anussatiyo.
Dasa anussatiyo means the ten recollections that have been stated thus: "recollection of the Buddha, recollection of the Dhamma, recollection of the Saṅgha, recollection of virtue, recollection of generosity, recollection of deities, mindfulness of the body, recollection of death, mindfulness of breathing, recollection of peace" (visuddhi. 1.47).
Dasa kasiṇānāma ‘‘pathavīkasiṇaṃ, āpokasiṇaṃ, tejokasiṇaṃ, vāyokasiṇaṃ, nīlakasiṇaṃ, pītakasiṇaṃ, lohitakasiṇaṃ, odātakasiṇaṃ, ālokakasiṇaṃ, paricchinnākāsakasiṇa’’nti (visuddhi. 1.47) vuttā ime dasa kasiṇā.
Dasa kasiṇā means these ten kasiṇas that have been stated: "earth kasiṇa, water kasiṇa, fire kasiṇa, air kasiṇa, blue kasiṇa, yellow kasiṇa, red kasiṇa, white kasiṇa, light kasiṇa, limited-space kasiṇa" (visuddhi. 1.47).
Dasa asubhānāma ‘‘uddhumātakaṃ, vinīlakaṃ, vipubbakaṃ, vicchiddakaṃ, vikkhāyitakaṃ, vikkhittakaṃ, hatavikkhittakaṃ, lohitakaṃ, puḷuvakaṃ, aṭṭhika’’nti (visuddhi. 1.47) vuttā ime dasa asubhā.
Dasa asubhā means these ten kinds of foulness that have been stated: "a bloated corpse, a livid corpse, a festering corpse, a cut-up corpse, a gnawed corpse, a scattered corpse, a mutilated and scattered corpse, a bloody corpse, a worm-infested corpse, a skeleton" (visuddhi. 1.47).
Catasso appamaññāyonāma ‘‘mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā’’ti (visuddhi. 1.47) vuttā ime appamaññāyo.
Catasso appamaññāyo means these four illimitables that have been stated: "loving-kindness, compassion, sympathetic joy, equanimity" (visuddhi. 1.47).
Cattāro āruppānāma ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ, viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’nti (visuddhi. 1.47) vuttā ime āruppā.Aparaṃ kammaṭṭhānadvayaṃnāma ‘‘āhārepaṭikkūlasaññā, catudhātuvavatthāna’’nti vuttaṃ ṭṭhānaubhayaṃ.
Cattāro āruppā means these four immaterial states that have been stated: "the sphere of boundless space (ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ), the sphere of boundless consciousness (viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ), the sphere of nothingness (ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ), the sphere of neither perception nor non-perception (nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ)" (visuddhi. 1.47). Aparaṃ kammaṭṭhānadvayaṃ means the two other meditation subjects that have been stated: "perception of the loathsomeness of food (āhārepaṭikkūlasaññā), analysis of the four elements (catudhātuvavatthāna)."
3128.Iccevaṃ cattālīsavidhaṃ manobhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ sabbampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ samuddiṭṭhaṃ siyāti yojanā. Kammassa yogasaṅkhātassa ṭhānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena pavattiṭṭhānantikammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyātiṭhānaṃ,kāraṇaṃ, kammassa vipassanāya ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃkammaṭṭhānaṃ,kassāti āha‘‘manobhuno’’ti. Mano abhibhavatīti manobhū, tassamanobhuno,kusalacittappavattinivāraṇena tathāladdhanāmassa kāmadevassāti attho. Iminā kammaṭṭhānagaṇanāparicchedo dassito.
3128. Thus, the meaning is that all forty kinds of meditation subjects that defeat the mind (manobhuno) should be regarded as enumerated. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ: the place of the activity consisting of effort, the place of occurrence by way of being an object. Ṭhānaṃ: because the fruit depends on it, it exists there. Ṭhānaṃ, the cause; kammaṭṭhānaṃ, the place, the cause of the activity of insight. To whom? He says, ‘‘manobhuno’’. Manobhuno, of him who conquers the mind, that is, Kāmadeva, who has obtained that name because he obstructs the arising of wholesome thoughts. By this, the limit of the enumeration of meditation subjects is shown.
3129-30.Imesaṃ kammaṭṭhānānaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ bhinditvā dassetuṃ mātikaṃ tāva dassento āha‘‘upacārappanāto’’tiādi. Tatthaupacārappanātoti ‘‘ettakāni kammaṭṭhānāni upacārāvahāni, ettakāni appanāvahānī’’ti evaṃ upacārappanāvasena ca.Jhānabhedāti ‘‘ettakāni paṭhamajjhānikāni, ettakāni tikacatukkajjhānikāni, ettakāni pañcakajjhānikānī’’tiādinā jhānabhedā ca.Atikkamāti aṅgānaṃ, ārammaṇānañca atikkamato.Vaḍḍhanāvaḍḍhanā cāpīti aṅguladvaṅgulādivasena vaḍḍhetabbā, avaḍḍhetabbā ca.Ārammaṇabhūmitoti nimittārammaṇādiārammaṇato ceva labbhamānālabbhamānabhūmito ca.
3129-30. Now, to show the fabricated nature of these meditation subjects by breaking them down, he shows the matrix, saying, ‘‘upacārappanāto’’ etc. There, upacārappanāto means by way of access and absorption, thus: "so many meditation subjects lead to access, so many lead to absorption." Jhānabhedā means by way of the distinctions of jhāna, thus: "so many are of the first jhāna, so many are of the triple and quadruple jhāna, so many are of the quintuple jhāna," etc. Atikkamā means by way of the transcending of factors and objects. Vaḍḍhanāvaḍḍhanā cāpī means those that should be increased by an inch or two, etc., and those that should not be increased. Ārammaṇabhūmito means by way of the object of a sign, etc., and by way of the attainable and unattainable ground.
Gahaṇāti diṭṭhādivasena gahetabbato.Paccayāti taṃtaṃṭhānānaṃ paccayabhāvato ca.Bhiyyoti puna-saddatthanīhārattho.Cariyānukūlatoti rāgacariyādīnaṃ anukūlabhāvatotiayaṃ visesoayaṃ bhedo.Etesucattālīsāya kammaṭṭhānesu.
Gahaṇā means by way of being apprehended by sight, etc. Paccayā means by way of being a condition for those states. Bhiyyo is like the extraction of the meaning of the word "again." Cariyānukūlato means by way of being favorable to those of the passionate temperament, etc. Ayaṃ viseso this is the distinction, this is the difference. Etesu in these forty meditation subjects.
3131.Evaṃ mātikaṃ niddisitvā yathākkamaṃ niddisanto paṭhamaṃ tāva upacārāvahādayo dassetumāha‘‘aṭṭhānussatiyo’’tiādi.Tatthāti tissaṃ mātikāyaṃ, tesu vā cattālīsāya kammaṭṭhānesu.Aṭṭhānussatiyoti kāyagatāsatiānāpānasatidvayavajjitā buddhānussatiādikā aṭṭha anussatiyo ca.Saññāāhārepaṭikkūlasaññā ca.Vavatthānañcacatudhātuvavatthānañcātiimedasa.Upacārāvahāti buddhaguṇādīnaṃ paramatthabhāvato, anekavidhattā, ekassāpi gambhīrabhāvato ca etesu dasasu kammaṭṭhānesu appanāvasena samādhissa patiṭṭhātumasakkuṇeyyattā appanābhāvanāppatto samādhi upacārabhāveyeva patiṭṭhāti, tasmā ete upacārāvahā.
3131. Thus, having stated the matrix, to state them in order, he first says, ‘‘aṭṭhānussatiyo’’ etc., to show those that lead to access, etc. Tatthā in that threefold matrix, or in those forty meditation subjects. Aṭṭhānussatiyo means the eight recollections beginning with recollection of the Buddha, excluding the two, mindfulness of the body and mindfulness of breathing. Saññā means perception of the loathsomeness of food (āhārepaṭikkūlasaññā). Vavatthānañca means analysis of the four elements (catudhātuvavatthāna). Ime these ten. Upacārāvahā because of the ultimate nature of the qualities of the Buddha, etc., and because of their multifaceted nature, and because even one of them is profound, in these ten meditation subjects, because of the impossibility of establishing concentration by way of absorption, the concentration that reaches the stage of absorption is established only at the level of access; therefore, these lead to access.
Nanu cettha dutiyacatutthāruppasamādhi, lokuttaro ca samādhi paramatthadhamme appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmā ‘‘paramatthabhāvato’’ti hetu appanamapāpuṇane kāraṇabhāvena na vuccatīti? Na, tassa bhāvanāvisesena paramatthadhamme pavattisambhavato, imassa ca rūpāvacaracatutthabhāvanāvisesasambhavato ca. Tathā hi dutiyacatutthāruppasamādhi appanāpattassa arūpāvacarasamādhissa catutthajjhānassa ārammaṇasamatikkamamattabhāvanāvasena sabhāvārammaṇepi appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Visuddhibhāvanānukkamabalena lokuttaro samādhi appanaṃ pāpuṇātīti.
But here, the second and fourth immaterial concentrations and the supramundane concentration attain absorption in ultimate realities, therefore, is the reason "because of ultimate nature" not stated as the cause of not attaining absorption? No, because its occurrence in ultimate realities is possible through a special development, and because this is possible through a special development of the fourth jhāna belonging to the form realm. Thus, the second and fourth immaterial concentrations of concentration that has attained absorption reach absorption even in their own object by way of mere development of transcending the object of the fourth jhāna of the immaterial realm concentration that has attained absorption. The supramundane concentration attains absorption by the power of the order of the purification development.
3132.Tatthāti tesu jhānāvahesu tiṃsakammaṭṭhānesu.Asubhāti uddhumātakādayo dasa asubhā.Kāyagatāsatīti kāyagatāsati cātiimeekādasa.Paṭhamajjhānikāti imesaṃ paṭikkūlārammaṇattā, paṭikkūlārammaṇe ca cittassa caṇḍasotāya nadiyā arittabalena nāvāṭṭhānaṃ viya vitakkabaleneva pavattisambhavato avitakkānaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ asambhavoti savitakkassa paṭhamajjhānasseva sambhavato paṭhamajjhānikā. Ānāpānañca kasiṇā cātiimeekādasacatukkajjhānikārūpāvacaracatukkajjhānikā ca catukkanayena, pañcakajjhānikā ca.
3132. Tatthā in those thirty meditation subjects that are jhāna-inducing. Asubhā means the ten kinds of foulness beginning with the bloated corpse. Kāyagatāsatī means mindfulness of the body. Ime these eleven. Paṭhamajjhānikā because, for these, the object is repulsive, and in a repulsive object, just as a boat cannot remain in a torrential river without the strength of oars, the occurrence is possible only with the strength of initial thought; because of the impossibility of the second jhāna, etc., which are without initial thought, only the first jhāna, which has initial thought, is possible. Ānāpānañca kasiṇā cāti ime these eleven. Catukkajjhānikā means the quadruple jhāna belonging to the form realm is quadruple in method, and also the quintuple jhāna.
3133.Tissova appamaññāti mettā, karuṇā, muditāti appamaññā tissova. Sāmaññaniddese etāsameva gahaṇaṃ kathaṃ viññāyatīti?‘‘Atha pacchimā’’tiādinā catutthāya appamaññāya catutthajjhānikabhāvassa vakkhamānattā pārisesato taṃ viññāyati.Tikajjhānānīti tikajjhānikā. ‘‘Tikajjhānā’’ti vattabbe liṅgavipallāsena evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mettādīnaṃ domanassasahagatabyāpādavihiṃsānabhiratīnaṃ pahāyakattā domanassapaṭipakkhena somanasseneva sahagatatā vuttāti catukkanayena tikajjhānikatā vuttā, pañcakanayena catukkajjhānikatā ca.
3133. Tissova appamaññā means loving-kindness, compassion, and sympathetic joy, these three illimitables. How is it known that the grasping is only of these in a general designation? It is known from the remainder, because the fourth illimitable is going to be stated as having the nature of the fourth jhāna in ‘‘Atha pacchimā’’ etc. Tikajjhānānī means of the triple jhāna. It should be regarded that it is stated thus by a gender shift from what should be said, "tikajjhānā." Because loving-kindness, etc., have the property of abandoning ill-will, harm, and discontent associated with displeasure, they are stated to be associated only with pleasure, which is the opposite of displeasure; thus, their being of the triple jhāna is stated by the quadruple method, and their being of the quadruple jhāna by the quintuple method.
‘‘Athā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘pacchimā’’ti padassa ‘‘tisso’’ti iminā purimapadena sambandhanivattanatthaṃ. Pacchimā appamaññā, cattāro āruppā ca catutthajjhānikā matā catukkanayena, pañcamajjhānikā ca. ‘‘Sabbe sattā sukhitā hontu, dukkhā muccantu, laddhasukhasampattito mā vigacchantū’’ti mettāditividhavasappavattaṃ byāpārattayaṃ pahāya kammassakatādassanena sattesu majjhattākārappattabhāvanānibbattāya tatramajjhattopekkhāya balavatarattā appanāppattassa upekkhābrahmavihārassa sukhasahagatatāsambhavato upekkhāsahagatatā vuttā.
‘‘Atha’’ this word is for the purpose of preventing a connection of the word "pacchimā" with the prior word "tisso." The last illimitable and the four immaterial states are regarded as of the fourth jhāna by the quadruple method, and also of the quintuple jhāna. Because of the greater power of the equanimity that belongs there, brought about by the development of reaching a state of neutrality in beings by showing ownership of deeds, abandoning the triple activity that occurs in various ways such as "May all beings be happy, may they be freed from suffering, may they not be separated from the attainment of happiness they have obtained," because there is no possibility of association with pleasure for the Brahmavihāra of equanimity that has attained absorption, association with equanimity is stated.
3134.Aṅgārammaṇato atikkamo dvidhā vuttoti yojanā.Catukkatikajjhānesūti dasakasiṇā, ānāpānasatīti ekādasasu catukkajjhānikesu ceva mettādipurimabrahmavihārattayasaṅkhātesu tikajjhānikesu ca kammaṭṭhānesu.Aṅgātikkamatāti ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe vitakkādijhānaṅga samatikkamena paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ ārammaṇeyeva dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ uppattito aṅgātikkamo adhippetoti attho. Aṅgātikkamoyevaaṅgātikkamatā.
3134. The meaning is that the transcending of factors and objects has been stated in two ways. Catukkatikajjhānesū in the eleven quadruple jhānas, the ten kasiṇas and mindfulness of breathing, and in the triple jhānas, counted as the initial three Brahmavihāras. Aṅgātikkamatā means in just one object itself, the intention is that, from the arising of the first jhāna, etc., by transcending the jhāna factors of initial thought, etc., the arising of the second jhāna, etc., occurs in the very same object; the transcending of factors itself is aṅgātikkamatā.
3135.Aṅgātikkamatoti tatiyajjhānasampayuttasomanassātikkamanato.Ārammaṇamatikkammāti paṭibhāganimittakasiṇugghāṭimākāsatabbisayapaṭhamāruppaviññāṇatadabhāvasaṅkhātāni cattāri ārammaṇāni yathākkamaṃ atikkamitvā. Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsatabbisayapaṭhamāruppaviññāṇatadabhāvatabbisayatatiyāruppaviññāṇasaṅkhātesu catūsu ārammaṇesuāruppāākāsānañcāyatanādīni cattāri arūpāvacarajjhānānijāyareuppajjanti.
3135. Aṅgātikkamato from the transcending of the pleasure associated with the third jhāna. Ārammaṇamatikkammā having transcended the four objects, namely, the learning sign, the kasiṇa-withdrawal space, the object which is its counterpart, the first immaterial state, the consciousness, and the absence of that in due order. Āruppā the four immaterial jhānas, the sphere of boundless space (ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ), etc., jāyare arise in the four objects, namely, the kasiṇa-withdrawal space, the object which is its counterpart, the first immaterial state, the consciousness, the absence of that, the object which is its counterpart, the third immaterial state, and the consciousness.
3136.Etthāti etesu ārammaṇesu.Vaḍḍhetabbānīti ‘‘yattakaṃ okāsaṃ kasiṇena pharati, tadabbhantare dibbāya sotadhātuyā saddaṃ sotuṃ, dibbena cakkhunā rūpaṃ passituṃ, parasattānañca cetasā cittaṃ aññātuṃ samattho hotī’’ti vuttappayojanaṃ sandhāya aṅgagaṇanādivasena paricchinditvā yattakaṃ icchati, tattakaṃ vaḍḍhetabbāni.Sesaṃasubhādisabbaṃ taṃkammaṭṭhānaṃ payojanābhāvāna vaḍḍhetabbamevāti yojanā.
3136. Etthā in these objects. Vaḍḍhetabbānī having delimited them by way of counting factors, etc., intending the stated purpose that "to the extent that he pervades space with the kasiṇa, within that he is capable of hearing sounds with the divine element of hearing, of seeing forms with the divine eye, and of knowing the minds of other beings with his mind," to whatever extent he wishes, to that extent they should be increased. Sesaṃ the remaining, sabbaṃ taṃ all that, namely, the foulness, etc., na vaḍḍhetabbameva should not be increased, because there is no purpose.
3137.Tatthatesu kammaṭṭhānesu dasa kasiṇā ca dasa asubhā ca kāyagatāsati, ānāpānasatītiime bāvīsatikammaṭṭhānāni paṭibhāgārammaṇānīti yojanā. Ettha‘‘kasiṇā’’tiādinā tadārammaṇāni jhānāni gahitāni.
3137. Tattha in those meditation subjects, ime bāvīsati these twenty-two meditation subjects, the ten kasiṇas, the ten kinds of foulness, mindfulness of the body, and mindfulness of breathing, are those that have the learning sign as their object. Here, the jhānas that have those as their objects are taken by ‘‘kasiṇā’’ etc.
3138.Dhātuvavatthananti catudhātuvavatthānaṃ, gāthābandhavasena rassattaṃ.Viññāṇañcāti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ.Nevasaññāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ.Dasa dveti dvādasa.Bhāvagocarāti sabhāvadhammagocarā, paramatthadhammālambaṇāti vuttaṃ hoti.
3138. Dhātuvavatthana means analysis of the four elements; the abbreviation is due to metrical constraints. Viññāṇañcā means the sphere of boundless consciousness (viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ). Nevasaññā means the sphere of neither perception nor non-perception (nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ). Dasa dve means twelve. Bhāvagocarā means having one's range in real things, having the ultimate realities as one's support; this has been stated.
3139.Dve ca āruppamānasāti ākāsānañcāyatanaākiñcaññāyatanasaṅkhātā arūpāvacaracittuppādā dve ca. Cha ime dhammā navattabbagocarā niddiṭṭhāti yojanā catunnaṃ appamaññānaṃ sattapaññattiyā, paṭhamāruppassa kasiṇugghāṭimākāsapaññattiyā, tatiyāruppassa paṭhamāruppaviññāṇābhāvapaññattiyā ca ārammaṇattā.
3139. Dve ca āruppamānasā and the two immaterial-realm consciousnesses counted as the sphere of boundless space (ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ) and the sphere of nothingness (ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ). These six phenomena are stated as not having a name as their range; the reason is that the four illimitables have the concept of beings (sattapaññatti), the first immaterial state has the space concept of the kasiṇa-withdrawal space (kasiṇugghāṭimākāsapaññatti), and the third immaterial state has the concept of the absence of the consciousness of the first immaterial state (paṭhamāruppaviññāṇābhāvapaññatti) as their object.
3140.Paṭikkūlasaññāti āhārepaṭikkūlasaññā. Kāyagatāsatīti dvādaseva bhūmitodevesukāmāvacaradevesu kuṇapānaṃ, paṭikkūlārahassa ca asambhavāna pavattantīti yojanā.
3140. Paṭikkūlasaññā means perception of the loathsomeness of food (āhārepaṭikkūlasaññā). Kāyagatāsatīti from just twelve as the ground, devesu in the deities of the sense realm, because there is no foulness and no possibility of loathsomeness, they na pavattantī do not occur.
3141.Tāni dvādasa ca.Bhiyyoti adhikatthe nipāto, tato adhikaṃ ānāpānasati cāti terasa rūpārūpaloke assāsapassāsānañca abhāvā sabbasona jāyareti yojanā.
3141. Those twelve. Bhiyyo is a particle in the sense of "additional"; in addition to that, mindfulness of breathing—these thirteen altogether na jāyare do not arise at all, because there are no inhalations and exhalations in the realm of form and the immaterial realm.
3142.Arūpāvacarearūpabhave caturo āruppe ṭhapetvāaññechattiṃsa dhammā rūpasamatikkamābhāvāna jāyantīti yojanā.Sabbesamacattālīsa dhammāmānusemanussaloke sabbesameva labbhamānattājāyanti.
3142. Arūpāvacare in the immaterial existence, having excluded the four immaterial states, the aññe thirty-six phenomena na jāyantī do not arise, because there is no transcending of form. Sabbe all forty meditation subjects mānuse arise in the human world, because they are all attainable for everyone.
3143.Catutthakasiṇaṃ hitvāti vāyokasiṇaṃ diṭṭhaphuṭṭhena gahetabbattā taṃ vajjetvā navakasiṇā cadasa asubhā cātiteekūnavīsati dhammādiṭṭhenevacakkhuviññāṇenapubbabhāgeparikammakāle gahetabbā bhavantīti yojanā. Pubbabhāge cakkhunā oloketvā parikammaṃ kataṃ, tena uggahitanimittaṃ tesaṃ gahetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
3143. Catutthakasiṇaṃ hitvā having abandoned the air kasiṇa, because it should be apprehended by what is seen and touched, nava kasiṇā ca nine kasiṇas, dasa asubhā ca and ten kinds of foulness, te these nineteen phenomena diṭṭheneva should be apprehended in the earlier part cakkhuviññāṇena by visual consciousness. Having looked at it with the eye in the earlier part, the practice is done; thus, it is stated that their learning sign is apprehended.
3144.Phuṭṭhenāti nāsikagge, uttaroṭṭhe vā phuṭṭhavasena. Kāyagatāsatiyaṃ tacapañcakaṃ diṭṭhena gahetabbaṃ.Mālutoti vāyokasiṇaṃ diṭṭhaphuṭṭhena gahetabbaṃ ucchusassādīnaṃ pattesu calamānavaṇṇaggahaṇamukhena, kāyappasādaghaṭṭanena ca gahetabbattā.Etthaetesu kammaṭṭhānesu.Sesakanti vuttāvasesaṃ. Buddhānussatiādikā aṭṭhānussatiyo, cattāro brahmavihārā, cattāro āruppā, āhārepaṭikkūlasaññā, catudhātuvavatthānaṃ, kāyagatāsatiyaṃ vakkapañcakādīni cāti sabbametaṃ parato sutvā gahetabbattā suteneva gahetabbanti vuttaṃ.
3144. Phuṭṭhenā by way of touching the tip of the nose or the upper lip. In mindfulness of the body, the fivefold layer of skin should be apprehended by sight. Māluto the air kasiṇa should be apprehended by what is seen and touched, by way of apprehending the changing color in the leaves of sugarcane, etc., and by the touching of the sensitive part of the body. Ettha in these meditation subjects. Sesakaṃ the remainder that has been stated. All this—the eight recollections beginning with recollection of the Buddha, the four Brahmavihāras, the four immaterial states, perception of the loathsomeness of food, analysis of the four elements, and the fivefold groups of skin, etc., in mindfulness of the body—should be apprehended only by hearing, because they should be apprehended after hearing from another.
3145.Etthaetesu kammaṭṭhānesu ākāsakasiṇaṃ ṭhapetvā nava kasiṇā paṭhamāruppacittassa ārammaṇabhūtakasiṇugghāṭimākāsassa hetubhāvatopaccayā jāyarepaccayā bhavantīti yojanā.
3145.Here, in these meditation subjects, setting aside the space kasiṇa, the nine kasiṇas are causes for the arising of the first form realm consciousness because of the kasiṇa-extraction-space being the object, is the connection: "paccayā jāyare" means they arise as conditions.
3146.Dasapi kasiṇāabhiññānaṃdibbacakkhuñāṇādīnaṃ paccayā bhavantīti yojanā.Catutthassāti catutthassa brahmavihārassa.
3146.The ten kasiṇas are conditions for higher knowledges, such as the divine eye knowledge, is the connection. "Of the fourth" means of the fourth Brahmavihāra.
3147.Heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimāruppanti ākāsānañcāyatanādikaṃ.Parassa ca parassa cāti viññāṇañcāyatanādiuttarajjhānassa paccayoti pakāsitanti yojanā.Nevasaññāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ.Nirodhassāti saññāvedayitanirodhassa, tāya nirodhasamāpattiyā.
3147.Lower and lower formless states means beginning with the sphere of infinite space. "And each successive one" means it is declared to be a condition for the higher jhāna such as the sphere of infinite consciousness, is the connection. "Neither perception" means the sphere of neither-perception-nor-non-perception. "Of cessation" means of the cessation of perception and feeling, by that cessation attainment.
3148.Sabbeti samacattālīsakammaṭṭhānadhammā.Sukhavihārassāti diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa.Bhavanissaraṇassacāti vibhavūpanissayatāya vipassanāpādakattena āsavakkhayañāṇena adhigantabbassa nibbānassa ca.Bhavasukhānañcāti parikammopacārabhāvanāvasappavattāni kāmāvacarakusalacittāni kāmasugatibhavasukhānaṃ, rūpāvacarappanāvasapavattāni rūpāvacaracittāni rūpāvacarabhavasukhānaṃ, itarāni arūpāvacarabhūtāni arūpāvacarabhavasukhānañca paccayāti dīpitā.
3148.All means all forty-four meditation subjects. "Of dwelling in ease" means of dwelling in ease in this very life. "And of escape from existence" means because of being supported by cessation, being the basis for insight, and for the extinction of defilements, and also of Nibbāna, which is to be attained by knowledge. "And of the pleasures of existence" means wholesome consciousness in the desire realm that arises based on preliminary work and access, are conditions for the pleasures of existence in the desire realm; form realm consciousnesses that arise based on the establishment of absorption are conditions for the pleasures of existence in the form realm; the remaining formless states are conditions for the pleasures of existence in the formless realm are indicated.
3149.Dasa asubhā, kāyagatāsatītiimeekādasa rāgacaritassa visesato anukūlā viññeyyāti yojanā.‘‘Visesato’’ti iminā rāgassa ujuvipaccanīkabhāvena ca atisappāyato ca vutto, itare ca apaṭikkhittāti dīpeti. Vuttañhetaṃvisuddhimagge‘‘sabbañcetaṃ ujuvipaccanīkavasena ca atisappāyavasena ca vuttaṃ, rāgādīnaṃ pana avikkhambhikā, saddhādīnaṃ vā anupakārā kusalabhāvanā nāma natthī’’ti (visuddhi. 1.47).
3149.These eleven, the ten impurities and mindfulness of the body, are especially conducive to one of lustful temperament, is the connection. "Especially" means that by this it is said to be directly opposed to lust and very suitable, and the others are not rejected, is indicated. For it was said in the Visuddhimagga: "All this is said in terms of direct opposition and great suitability, but there is no skillful development that is not a means of suppressing lust etc., or helpful to faith etc." (Visuddhi. 1.47).
3150.Savaṇṇakasiṇāti catūhi vaṇṇakehi kasiṇehi sahitā. Catasso appamaññāyotiimeaṭṭha dosacaritassa anukūlāti pakāsitāti yojanā.
3150.Colored kasiṇas means together with the kasiṇas of the four colors. These eight, the four immeasurables, are declared to be conducive to one of hateful temperament, is the connection.
3151.Mohappakatinoti mohacaritassa. ‘‘Ānāpānasati ekāvā’’ti padacchedo.
3151.Of one with a propensity to delusion means for one of deluded temperament. "Ānāpānasati ekāvā" is the word division.
3152.Maraṇūpasameti maraṇañca upasamo ca maraṇūpasamaṃ, tasmiṃ maraṇūpasame.Satīti maraṇānussati, upasamānussati cātietecattāro dhammā.Paññāpakatinoti buddhicaritassa.
3152.In the stilling of death means death and stilling, in that stilling of death. These four things, mindfulness means mindfulness of death, and mindfulness of stilling. Of one with a propensity to wisdom means for one of wise temperament.
3153.Ādianussaticchakkanti buddhadhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussatisaṅkhātaṃ chakkaṃ.Saddhācaritavaṇṇitanti saddhācaritassa anukūlanti kathitaṃ.Āruppāti cattāro āruppā.Sesā kasiṇāti bhūtakasiṇaālokākāsakasiṇānaṃ vasena cha kasiṇātisesā dasadhammā.Sabbānurūpakāti sabbesaṃ channaṃ cariyānaṃ anukūlāti attho.
3153.The set of six recollections beginning with means the set counted as the six recollections of Buddha, Dhamma, Sangha, virtue, generosity, and deities. "Described for one of faithful temperament" means it is said to be conducive to one of faithful temperament. "Formless states" means the four formless states. "Remaining kasiṇas" means the six kasiṇas, in terms of the element kasiṇas, light and space kasiṇas, the remaining ten things. "Suitable for all" means suitable for all six temperaments, is the meaning.
3154-8.Evaṃ yathānikkhittamātikānukkamena kammaṭṭhānappabhedaṃ vibhāvetvā idāni bhāvanānayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘eva’’ntiādi.Evaṃ pabhedato ñatvā kammaṭṭhānānīti yathāvuttabhedanayamukhena bhāvanāmayārambhadassanaṃ.Paṇḍitoti tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāya paññavā bhabbapuggalo.Tesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Medhāvīti pārihāriyapaññāya samannāgato.Daḷhaṃ gahetvānātiādimajjhapariyosāne suṭṭhu sallakkhantena daḷhaṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā sakkaccaṃ uggahetvā.Kalyāṇamittakoti –
3154-8.Having thus distinguished the variety of meditation subjects in accordance with the order of the matrices laid down, now in order to show the method of development, he says "Thus" and so on. "Having known the meditation subjects in this way with their distinctions" means showing the beginning of the development of mental cultivation in accordance with the method of the divisions mentioned above. "Wise" means one endowed with wisdom by the three-rooted rebirth consciousness, a capable individual. "In them" is a locative of determination. "Intelligent" means endowed with retentive wisdom. "Having firmly grasped" means having carefully learned, making it a firm foundation, by one who discerns well the beginning, middle, and end. "A good friend" is one who is –
‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo;
"Beloved, venerable, cultivatable;
A speaker, and patient with speech;
A speaker of profound things;
And does not employ one in unsuitable things." (Visuddhi. 1.37; Netti. 113) –
Vuttalakkhaṇako sīlasutapaññādiguṇasamannāgatakalyāṇamittako.
Of the characteristics mentioned, a good friend endowed with virtue, learning, wisdom, and other qualities.
Paṭhamanti bhāvanārambhato paṭhamameva.Palibodhānaṃ ucchedaṃ katvāti –
"First" means right at the beginning of the development. "Having cut off the hindrances" means –
‘‘Āvāso ca kulaṃ lābho;
"Dwelling and family, gain;
Group and work as the fifth;
Journey, relatives, and sickness;
Books, psychic power: these are the ten." (Visuddhi. 1.41) –
Iddhipanettha vipassanāya palibodho hoti, na samādhibhāvanāya. Vuttañhetaṃvisuddhimagge‘‘iddhīti pothujjanikā iddhi. Sā hi uttānaseyyakadārako viya, taruṇasassaṃ viya ca dupparihārā hoti, appamattakeneva bhijjati. Sā pana vipassanāya palibodho hoti, na samādhissa samādhiṃ patvā pattabbattā’’ti (visuddhi. 1.41).
Psychic power here is a hindrance to insight, not to concentration development. For it was said in the Visuddhimagga: "Psychic power means worldly psychic power. For that is difficult to maintain, like an infant lying on its back, and like a tender crop, it breaks with very little. That, however, is a hindrance to insight, not to concentration, since concentration can be attained after attaining concentration" (Visuddhi. 1.41).
Dosavajjiteti –
"Devoid of faults" means –
‘‘Mahāvāsaṃ navāvāsaṃ, jarāvāsañca panthaniṃ;
"A large dwelling, a new dwelling, a dilapidated dwelling, and a roadside;
A marsh, leaves, and flowers, fruits, and what is wished for.
‘‘Nagaraṃ dārunā khettaṃ, visabhāgena paṭṭanaṃ;
"A city, a forest, a field, a place unsuitable due to unevenness;
A frontier region that is agreeable, where a friend is not found.
‘‘Aṭṭhārasetāni ṭhānāni, iti viññāya paṇḍito;
"Having understood these eighteen places,
A wise man should avoid them from afar, like a dangerous path." (Visuddhi. 1.52) –
Aṭṭhakathāsuvuttehi imehi aṭṭhārasahi dosehi gajjite.
Oppressed by these eighteen faults mentioned in the commentaries.
Anurūpe vasantenāti –
"Dwelling in a suitable" means –
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ nātidūraṃ hoti naccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannaṃ, divā appākiṇṇaṃ, rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosaṃ, appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasireneva uppajjanti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane ye te bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā, te kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhati ‘idaṃ, bhante, kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’ti, tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttāniṃ karonti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhaṭṭhānīyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodenti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 10.11) –
"Here, monks, a dwelling is not too far, nor too near, complete with coming and going, uncrowded by day, quiet at night, with little noise, free from the touch of gadflies, mosquitoes, wind, heat, and creeping things, and while dwelling in that dwelling, robes, alms food, lodging, medicine and requisites for the sick arise without difficulty, and in that dwelling those monks dwell who are learned, who have acquired the teachings, who are upholders of the Dhamma, upholders of the Vinaya, upholders of the matrices, approaching them from time to time, one asks and questions, ‘What is the meaning of this, Bhante?’, those venerable ones reveal what is unopened, make manifest what is unmanifest, and dispel doubt in various doubtful things. Thus, monks, a dwelling is complete with five factors" (A. Ni. 10.11) –
Paṭhamādīnīti paṭhamadutiyādīni rūpāvacarajjhānāni.Sabbaso bhāvetvātivisuddhimagge‘‘sabbaṃ bhāvanāvidhānaṃ aparihāpentena bhāvetabbo’’ti (visuddhi. 1.41) nikkhittassa mātikāpadassa vitthārakkamena bhāvetvā, cittavisuddhiṃ sampādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
"The first and so on" means the first, second, and so on, form realm jhānas. "Having fully developed" means having developed by the method of expansion of the matrix term laid down in the Visuddhimagga "everything should be developed without diminishing the method of development" (Visuddhi. 1.41), it is said to accomplish purity of mind.
Sappaññoti kammajatihetukapaṭisandhipaññāya ceva kammaṭṭhānamanasikārasappāyāni pariggahetvā asappāyaṃ parivajjetvā sappāyasevanopakārāya pārihāriyapaññāya ca samannāgato yogāvacaro.Tatoti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanavajjitarūpārūpajjhānaṃ vipassanāpādakabhāvena samāpajjitvā aṭṭhannaṃ vipassanāpādakajjhānānamaññatarato jhānā vuṭṭhāya. Tenāhavisuddhimagge‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’ti (visuddhi. 2.663).
"Wise" means the yogi who is endowed with the wisdom of the karma-born three-rooted rebirth consciousness, and with retentive wisdom for the benefit of grasping what is suitable for the meditation subject and avoiding what is unsuitable. "Then" means having attained, as a basis for insight, a form or formless jhāna other than the sphere of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, having arisen from one of the eight jhānas that are bases for insight. Therefore, the Visuddhimagga said, "Setting aside the sphere of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, having arisen from one of the remaining form and formless realm jhānas" (Visuddhi. 2.663).
Nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ katvāti visuddhimaggediṭṭhivisuddhiniddesevuttanayena pañcakkhandhādimukhesu yathicchitena mukhena pavisitvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā ‘‘idaṃ nāmaṃ, idaṃ rūpaṃ, imamhā nāmarūpato byatirittaṃ attādi kiñci vattabbaṃ natthī’’ti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā, iminā diṭṭhivisuddhi dassitā.
"Having determined name and form" means having entered through the five aggregates and other means, in whatever way one likes, in the manner stated in the chapter on purity of view in the Visuddhimagga, having determined name and form, having reached the conclusion "this is name, this is form, there is nothing to be said as self etc. apart from this name and form," by this purity of view is shown.
Kaṅkhaṃ vitīriyāti yathādiṭṭhanāmarūpadhammānaṃ visuddhimaggekaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiniddese(visuddhi. 2.678 ādayo) vuttanayena pañcadhā pariggahetvā ‘‘na tāvidaṃ nāmarūpaṃ ahetukaṃ, na attādihetuka’’nti yāthāvato nāmarūpassa pañcadhā dassanena addhattayagataṃ ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20; mahāni. 174) soḷasavidhaṃ kaṅkhaṃ, ‘‘satthari kaṅkhatī’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (dha. sa. 1008) aṭṭhavidhañca kaṅkhaṃ vīriyena taritvā pajahitvā, iminā kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi dassitā hoti.
"Having dispelled doubt" means having grasped in five ways, in the manner stated in the chapter on purity by overcoming doubt in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 2.678 ff), the things of name and form that have been seen, "this name and form is not without a cause, nor is it caused by a self etc.," by seeing the name and form in five ways according to reality, having overcome and abandoned the sixteen kinds of doubt that proceed in the way "did I exist in the past?" and the eight kinds of doubt that proceed in the way "he doubts the teacher" (Dha. Sa. 1008), by effort, by this purity by overcoming doubt is shown.
maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhiniddese(visuddhi. 2.692 ādayo) vuttanayena saṅkhāre sammasanto obhāso, ñāṇaṃ, pīti, passaddhi, sukhaṃ, adhimokkho, paggaho, upaṭṭhānaṃ, upekkhā, nikantīti dasasu upakkilesesu pātubhūtesu tathā pātubhūteobhāsādayo dasa upakkilese‘‘amaggo’’ti maggavīthipaṭipannaṃvipassanāñāṇameva ‘‘maggo’’tipaṇḍitopaññavā yogāvacaro jānātīti attho, iminā maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi saṅkhepato dassitā hoti.
Having considered formations in the manner stated in the chapter on purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and not the path(Visuddhi. 2.692 ff), when the ten imperfections appear—illumination, knowledge, joy, tranquility, happiness, conviction, effort, mindfulness, equanimity, and contentment—then when these ten imperfections have appeared, the wise, intelligent yogi knows that these ten imperfections are "not the path", and only insight knowledge is "the path", in short, this shows the purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and not the path.
3159.Ettāvatā tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vavatthāneti yojanā.Ettāvatāti ‘‘nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ katvā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato dassitanayena.Tesaṃ tiṇṇanti diṭṭhivisuddhi, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhīti tīhi visuddhīhi sakasakavipassanānaṃ nāmarūpatappaccayamaggāmaggānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ.Vavatthāne kateniyame kate.Tiṇṇaṃ saccānanti dukkhasamudayamaggasaṅkhaātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saccānaṃ.Vavatthānaṃ kataṃ siyāti ñātatīraṇapariññāsaṅkhātena lokiyeneva ñāṇena anubodhavasena nicchayo kato hotīti attho. Kathaṃ? Nāmarūpavavatthānasaṅkhātena diṭṭhivisuddhiñāṇena dukkhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti, paccayapariggahasaṅkhātena kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiñāṇena samudayasaccavavatthānaṃ, maggāmaggavavatthānasaṅkhātena maggāmaggañāṇadassanena maggasaccavavatthānaṃ.
3159.So far, this connects to the determination of the three. "So far" means by the method shown in short by "having determined name and form" and so on. "Of those three" means of the three purities, namely purity of view, purity by overcoming doubt, purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and not the path, of the three, name-and-form, conditionality, path and not-path of their respective insights. "When the determination has been done" means when the rule has been made. "Of the three truths" means of the three truths counted as suffering, origin, and path. "The determination would have been done" means the decision is made by way of understanding with mundane knowledge counted as knowing, investigating, and comprehending. How? By the purity-of-view knowledge counted as determining name and form, the determination of the truth of suffering is done; by the purity-by-overcoming-doubt knowledge counted as grasping conditions, the determination of the truth of origin; by the knowledge of purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and not the path, the determination of the truth of the path.
3160-1.Evaṃ ñātatīraṇapariññādvayaṃ saṅkhepato dassetvā pahānapariññāya sarīrabhūtāni nava ñāṇāni dassetumāha‘‘udayabbayā’’tiādi. Tatthaudayabbayāti uppādabhaṅgānupassanāvasappavattā uttarapadalopena ‘‘udayabbayā’’ti vuttā. Tattha udayaṃ muñcitvā vaye vā pavattā bhaṅgānupassanā‘‘bhaṅgā’’ti vuttā. Bhayañca ādīnavo ca nibbidā cabhayādīnavanibbidā,saṅkhārānaṃ bhayato anupassanavasena pavattā bhayānupassanā ca diṭṭhabhayānaṃ ādīnavato pekkhanavasena pavattā ādīnavānupassanā ca diṭṭhādīnavesu nibbedavasena pavattā nibbidānupassanā ca tathā vuttā. Nibbinditvā saṅkhārehi muccitukāmatāvaseneva pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃmuccitukāmatāñāṇaṃ. Muccanassa upāyasampaṭipādanatthaṃ puna saṅkhārattayapaṭiggahavasapavattaṃ ñāṇaṃpaṭisaṅkhānupassanā.
3160-1.Having thus shown in short the two, knowing-investigating-comprehending, now in order to show the nine knowledges that are the essence of abandoning-comprehending, he says "arising and passing away" and so on. There, "arising and passing away" means the knowledge that proceeds based on contemplation of arising and passing away is called "arising and passing away" by way of eliding the latter term. There, the contemplation of dissolution that proceeds only on dissolution, setting aside arising, is called "dissolution." Fear, danger, and disgust are "fear, danger, and disgust," the contemplation of fear that proceeds by way of contemplating the fear in formations, and the contemplation of danger that proceeds by way of seeing the danger in what is seen, and the contemplation of disgust that proceeds by way of being disgusted in what is seen, are thus described. The knowledge that proceeds only with the desire to be freed from formations having become disgusted, is "knowledge of desire to be freed." The knowledge that proceeds again by way of grasping the three characteristics of formations, for the sake of preparing the means for liberation, is "contemplation of re-observation."
saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ,saccānulomo tadadhigamāya ekantapaccayo hotīti‘‘saccānulomika’’nti ca kalāpasammasanañāṇādīnaṃ purimānaṃ navannaṃ kiccanipphattiyā, upari ca sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyadhammānañca anulomanato ‘‘anulomañāṇa’’nti ca vuttaṃnavamaṃñāṇañcāti yā navānupubbavipassanāsaṅkhātā pahānapariññā dassitā, ayaṃ‘‘paṭipadāñāṇadassana’’nti pakāsitāti yojanā.
"Equanimity towards formations, because it is in accordance with the truths, and is the sole condition for their attainment, is "in accordance with the truths," and because of being in accordance with the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment, and for the accomplishment of the work of the preceding nine, from knowledge of aggregate-discerning onwards, it is called "adaptation knowledge," this ninth knowledge, thus this is said to be "knowledge and vision of the course of practice" which shows the abandoning-comprehending counted as the nine knowledges in serial order.
3162.Tatoanulomañāṇato paraṃ maggassa āvajjanaṭṭhāniyaṃ hutvā nibbānamālambitvā uppannassa puthujjanagottassa abhibhavanato, ariyagottassa bhāvanato vaḍḍhanato ca‘‘gotrabhū’’ti saṅkhaṃ gatassacittassasamanantarameva ca.Santimārammaṇaṃ katvāti sabbakilesadarathānañca saṅkhāradukkhaggino ca vūpasamanimittattā ‘‘santi’’nti saṅkhātaṃ nirodhamālambitvā.Ñāṇadassananti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena jānanaṭṭhenañāṇaṃ,cakkhunā viya paccakkhato dassanaṭṭhenadassananti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ sotāpattimaggañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ sattamavisuddhiñāṇaṃjāyateuppajjatīti attho.
3162."Then" immediately after the consciousness that has attained the name "change-of-lineage" because after adaptation knowledge, having become the place of adverting to the path, and having taken Nibbāna as its object, it overpowers the lineage of the worldling, and because of developing and increasing the noble lineage. "Having made peace its object" because stillness, which is counted as "peace," is the condition of the subsiding of all the torments of defilements and the fire of the suffering of formations. "Knowledge and vision" is the seventh purity-knowledge, counted as the knowledge of the path of stream-entry, which has attained the name "knowledge" in the sense of knowing by way of comprehension and direct experience of the four noble truths, and "vision" in the sense of seeing directly as with the eye, arises, is produced.
3163.Paccavekkhaṇapariyantanti paccavekkhaṇajavanapariyosānaṃ.Tassāti ñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa sotāpattimaggassa.Phalanti phalacittaṃanupacchā maggānantaraṃ hutvā jāyate.
3163."Up to review" means up to the end of the reviewing impulsion. "Of that" means of the path of stream-entry counted as knowledge and vision. "Result" means the fruition consciousness arises after, immediately after the path.
Ettha ‘‘paccavekkhaṇapariyanta’’nti idaṃ ‘‘phala’’nti etassa visesanaṃ, kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā, paccavekkhaṇajavanaṃ mariyādaṃ katvāti attho. Maggānantaraṃ phale dvikkhattuṃ, tikkhattuṃ vā uppajjitvā niruddhe tadanantarameva bhavaṅgaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭetvā paccavekkhitabbaṃ maggamālambitvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tato paccavekkhaṇajavanāni. Evaṃ phalacittaṃ bhavaṅgapariyantameva hoti, na paccavekkhaṇapariyantaṃ. Tathāpi aññena javanena anantarikaṃ hutvā phalajavanānamanantaraṃ paccavekkhaṇajavanameva pavattatīti dassanatthaṃ phalapaccavekkhaṇajavanānantare uppannāni bhavaṅgāvajjanāni abbohārikāni katvā ‘‘paccavekkhaṇapariyantaṃ, phalaṃ tassānujāyate’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
Here, "ending in review" (paccavekkhaṇapariyantaṃ) is an adjective of "fruit" (phala), or an adverb modifying the action, meaning having the reviewing-javana as its limit. After the path, when the fruit arises and ceases two or three times, immediately after that, bhavaṅga occurs. After interrupting the bhavaṅga, reviewing should be done. An attention at the mind-door arises, taking the path as its object, and then the reviewing-javanāni. Thus, the fruit-mind is limited to bhavaṅga, not to the reviewing. Even so, to show that immediately after the fruit-javanāni, the reviewing-javana occurs, having been immediately preceded by another javana, the bhavaṅga and attention that arise immediately after the fruit-reviewing-javanāni are treated as non-essential, and it should be understood that it is said, "ending in review, the fruit is born of that."
Paccavekkhaṇañca maggaphalanibbānapahīnakilesaavasiṭṭhakilesānaṃ paccavekkhaṇavasena pañcavidhaṃ hoti. Tesu ekekaṃ ekekena javanavārena paccavekkhatīti pañca paccavekkhaṇajavanavārāni honti. Tāni paccavekkhaṇaggahaṇena sāmaññato dassitānīti daṭṭhabbāni.
And the reviewing is fivefold, by way of reviewing the path, fruit, Nibbāna, defilements abandoned, and defilements remaining. Among them, each is reviewed by a single javana sequence, so there are five reviewing-javana sequences. These should be seen as shown generally by the mention of reviewing.
3164.Teneva ca upāyenāti udayabbayānupassanādivipassanānaṃ paṭhamaṃ maggo adhigato, teneva upāyena.So bhikkhūti so yogāvacaro bhikkhu.Punappunaṃ bhāventoti punappunaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā. Yathā paṭhamamaggaphalāni patto,tathā. Sesamaggaphalāni cāti dutiyādimaggaphalāni ca pāpuṇāti.
3164. By that same method: by the same method by which the path was first attained through insight knowledges such as contemplation of arising and passing away. That bhikkhu: that meditating bhikkhu. Cultivating again and again: having developed insight again and again. Just as he attained the first path and fruit, so too, the remaining paths and fruits: he attains the second and subsequent paths and fruits.
3165.Iccevaṃyathāvuttanayena uppādavayantātītakattāaccantaṃamataṃdhammaṃ aveccapaṭivijjhitvā asesaṃ akusalaṃviddhaṃsayitvāsamucchedappahānena pajahitvātayo bhavekāmabhavādīsu tīsu bhavesu nikantiyā sosanavasena tayo bhave visesena sosayitvāsoaggadakkhiṇeyyo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu paṭhamaṃ kilesaparinibbāne sositavipākakkhandhakaṭattārūpasaṅkhātaupādisesarahitattānirupādisesaṃnibbānadhātuṃupetiadhigacchatīti yojanā.
3165. Thus, by the method described, because of transcending arising and passing away, absolutely, the deathless Dhamma, having known, having penetrated, completely, all unwholesome things, having destroyed, having abandoned by way of eradication, the three existences, having especially dried up the three existences in the sense of drying up attachment in the three existences, beginning with the existence of desire, he, the foremost worthy of offerings, the khīṇāsava bhikkhu, first, in the cessation of defilements, due to being without the remainder of the aggregates of resultant-skandhas, cut-off form, which is called the condition-skandha, without remainder of condition, the Nibbāna-element, attains, reaches, is the meaning.
Iccevaṃ saṅkhepato kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo ācariyena dassitoti ganthabhīrujanānuggahavasena vitthāravaṇṇanaṃ anāmasitvā anupadavaṇṇanāmattamevettha kataṃ. Vitthāravaṇṇanā panassa visuddhimaggato, tabbaṇṇanato ca gahetabbā.
Thus, the method of meditation practice has been shown in brief by the teacher. Without touching on a detailed explanation, for the sake of helping those who are timid about texts, only a description of the immediate meaning has been done here. The detailed explanation, however, should be taken from the Visuddhimagga and its commentary.
3166-7.Viññāsakkamato vāpīti akkharapadavākyasaṅkhātagantharacanakkamato vā.Pubbāparavasena vāti vattabbānamatthavisesānaṃ paṭipāṭivasena vā.Akkharabandhe vāti saddasatthaalaṅkārasatthachandovicitisatthānupātena kātabbāya akkharapadaracanāya, gāthābandheti attho. Ayuttaṃ viya yadi dissatīti yojanā.
3166-7. Or from the order of discernment: or from the order of the composition of the text consisting of letters, words, and sentences. Or by way of prior and subsequent: or by way of the order of the special meanings of the statements to be made. Or in the arrangement of letters: in the arrangement of letters and words to be done in accordance with grammar, rhetoric, and metrics, the arrangement of verses is the meaning. If it appears as unsuitable, is the meaning.
Tanti taṃ ‘‘ayutta’’nti dissamānaṭṭhānaṃ.Tathā na gahetabbanti dissamānākāreneva ayuttanti na gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ gahetabbanti āha‘‘gahetabbamadosato’’ti. Tassa kāraṇamāha‘‘mayā upaparikkhitvā, katattā pana sabbaso’’ti. Yo yo panettha doso dissati khittadoso vā hotu vipallāsaggahaṇadoso vā, nāparaṃ dosoti dīpeti. Tenetaṃ pakaraṇaṃ sabbesaṃ tipiṭakapariyattippabhedāyatanabahussutānaṃ sikkhākāmānaṃ therānaṃ attano pamāṇabhūtataṃ sūceti. Attano pamāṇasūcanena attanā viracitassa vinayavinicchayassāpi pamāṇataṃ vibhāvento tassa savanuggahadhāraṇādīsu sotujanaṃ niyojetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
That: that place appearing as "unsuitable." Should not be taken as such: should not be taken as unsuitable in the way it appears. How should it be taken? He says, "Should be taken as faultless." He gives the reason for that: "Because it was done by me, having investigated completely." Whatever fault is seen here, whether it is a textual error or a fault of mistaken interpretation, he indicates that there is no other fault. Therefore, this treatise indicates its own authority to all the elders who are learned in the divisions of the Tipiṭaka-pariyatti and who desire to train. By indicating his own authority, he makes clear the authority of the Vinayavinicchaya composed by himself, thereby directing the hearers to its learning, uptake, retention, and so on, it should be seen.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpaniyā vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
Thus ends the commentary on the Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvidhānakathā in the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī, a commentary on the Vinayavinicchaya.
Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvidhānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Discourse on the Method of Meditation Practice is finished.
Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Concluding Discourse
3168-78.Evaṃ ‘‘vinayo saṃvaratthāya, saṃvaro avippaṭisāratthāya, avippaṭisāro pāmojjatthāya, pāmojjaṃ pītatthāya, pīti passaddhatthāya, passaddhi sukhatthāya, sukhaṃ samādhatthāya, samādhi yathābhūtañāṇadassanatthāya, yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ nibbidatthāya, nibbidā virāgatthāya, virāgo vimuttatthāya, vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanatthāya, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ anupādāpaanibbānatthāyā’’ti (pari. 365) dassitānisaṃsaparamparāniddhāraṇamukhena anupādisesanibbānadhātupariyantaṃ sānisaṃsaṃ vinayakathaṃ kathetvā tassā pamāṇatañca vibhāvetvā attano sutabuddhattā ‘‘sanidānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (a. ni. 3.126; kathā. 806) vacanato bhagavato caritamanuvattanto tassa desakālādivasena nidānaṃ dassetumāha‘‘seṭṭhassā’’tiādi.
3168-78. Thus, having spoken the Vinaya-katha with its benefits, up to the Nibbāna-element without remainder of condition, through the determination of the succession of benefits shown as "Vinaya is for the sake of restraint, restraint is for the sake of freedom from remorse, freedom from remorse is for the sake of joy, joy is for the sake of rapture, rapture is for the sake of tranquility, tranquility is for the sake of happiness, happiness is for the sake of concentration, concentration is for the sake of knowledge and vision of things as they are, knowledge and vision of things as they are is for the sake of disenchantment, disenchantment is for the sake of dispassion, dispassion is for the sake of liberation, liberation is for the sake of the knowledge and vision of liberation, knowledge and vision of liberation is for the sake of Nibbāna without clinging" (pari. 365), and having made clear its authority, following the conduct of the Blessed One, because of his own learning and understanding, from the saying, "I teach the Dhamma with its reasons, monks" (A. Ni. 3.126; Kathā. 806), he says, in order to show the reason in terms of place and time of the teaching, "Of the best," etc.
seṭṭhassāti dhanadhaññavatthālaṅkārādiupabhogaparibhogasampattiyā ceva gāmarājadhānikhettavatthunaditaḷākārāmādisampattiyā ca pasatthatarassa.Nābhibhūteti majjhavattitāya nābhisadise.Nirākuleti majjhavattitāyeva parimaṇḍalādisambhavato vilopādiākularahite.Sabbassa pana lokassarāmaṇīyakesampiṇḍite viyaramaṇīyatare bhūtamaṅgale gāmeti sambandho.
Of the best: most famous by way of wealth, grain, clothing, ornaments, and other possessions to be used and consumed, and by way of the prosperity of villages, capitals, fields, land, rivers, ponds, parks, etc. Not overcome: similar to the navel because of being in the middle. Without agitation: without agitation such as plunder arising from being in the middle. Of the entire world, however, like brought together into loveliness, more lovely, in an auspicious place, the connection is with the village.
‘‘kadalī’’tiādi. Kadalī ca sālañca tālañca ucchu ca nāḷikerā cakadalī…pe… nāḷikerā,tesaṃ vanānikadalī…pe… nāḷikeravanāni,tehi ākule ākiṇṇeti attho. Kamalāni ca uppalāni cakamaluppalāni,tehi sañchannākamaluppalasañchannā,salilassa āsayāsalilāsayā,kamaluppalasañchannā ca te salilāsayā cātikamala…pe… salilāsayā,tehi sobhitokamaluppalasañchannasalilāsayasobhito,tasmiṃ.
"Banana," etc. Banana, sala, tala, sugarcane, and coconut; banana...pe... coconut, groves of them; banana...pe... coconut groves, filled, crowded with them, is the meaning. Lotuses and water lilies; lotuses and water lilies, covered with them; covered with lotuses and water lilies, the abode of water; abodes of water, covered with lotuses and water lilies, and those abodes of water; lotus...pe... abodes of water, adorned with them; adorned with abodes of water covered with lotuses and water lilies, in that.
kāverijalaṃ,kāverijalassa sampāto pavattanaṃkāverijalasampāto,tena pari samantato bhūtaṃ pavattitaṃ mahītalaṃ etassātikāverijalasampātaparibhūtamahītalo,tasmiṃ.Iddheti nānāsampattiyā samiddhe.Sabbaṅgasampanneti sabbasukhopakaraṇasampanne.Maṅgaleti janānaṃ iddhivuddhikāraṇabhūte.Bhūtamaṅgaleti evaṃnāmake gāme.
Kāverī water, the confluence, the flow of the Kāverī water; the confluence of the Kāverī water, by that, the earth is completely surrounded, pervaded; the earth pervaded by the confluence of the Kāverī water, in that. Prosperous: rich with various kinds of prosperity. Endowed with all features: endowed with all pleasant requisites. Auspicious: the cause of prosperity and growth for people. Auspicious place: in the village named thus.
pavarākārā,pākārā ca parikhā capākāraparikhā,pavarākārā ca tā pākāraparikhā cātipavarākārapākāraparikhā,tāhi parivāritopavarākārapākāraparikhāparivārito,tasmiṃ.Dassanīyeti dassanārahe. Mano ramati etthātimanoramo,tasmiṃ.
Excellent enclosure, enclosure and moat; enclosure and moat, excellent enclosure and that enclosure and moat; excellent enclosure, enclosure, and moat, surrounded by them; surrounded by an excellent enclosure, enclosure, and moat, in that. Delightful: worthy of being seen. The mind delights in this; delightful, in that.
tīranto,tīrameva vā antotīranto,pokkharaṇisobbhaudakavāhakaparikhādīnaṃ kūlappadeso, tīrante ruhiṃsu jāyiṃsūtitīrantaruhā,tīrantaruhā ca te bahuttā atīrā aparicchedā cātitīrantaruhavātīrā. Va-kāro sandhijo, tarūnaṃ rājānotarurājāno,tīrantaruhavātīrā ca te tarurājāno cātitīrantaruhavātīratarurājāno,tehi virājitotīranta…pe… virājito,tasmiṃ, pupphūpagaphalūpagachāyūpagehi mahārukkhehi paṭimaṇḍiteti attho.‘‘Tīrantaruhavānatarurājivirājite’’ti vā pāṭho, tīrantaruhānaṃ vānatarūnaṃ vetarūparukkhānaṃ rājīhi pantīhi paṭimaṇḍiteti attho. Dijānaṃ gaṇādijagaṇā,nānā ca te dijagaṇā cātinānādijagaṇā,te tato tato āgantvā ramanti etthātinānādijagaṇārāmo,tasmiṃ, sukakokilamayūrādisakuṇānaṃ āgantvā ramanaṭṭhānabhūteti attho.Nānārāmamanorameti nānā aneke ārāmā pupphaphalārāmānānārāmā,tehi manoramotinānārāmamanoramo,tasmiṃ.
Shore-end, or just the shore itself is the end; shore-end, the bank of ponds, ditches, water channels, moats, etc., at the shore-end, they grow, are born; shore-end-growing, shore-end-growing and those are many, unlimited; shore-end-growing-unlimited. The va-kāra is a euphonic addition, kings of trees; tree-kings, shore-end-growing-unlimited and those tree-kings; shore-end-growing-unlimited-tree-kings, embellished with them; shore-end...pe... embellished, adorned with great trees with flowers, fruits, foliage, and shade, is the meaning. "Embellished with rows of shore-end-growing forest-trees," or alternatively, embellished with rows of forest-trees, various trees, is the meaning. Flocks of birds; bird-flocks, various and those bird-flocks; various-bird-flocks, they come from here and there and delight in this; various-bird-flock-delight, in that, being a place where birds such as parrots, cuckoos, and peacocks come and delight, is the meaning. Pleasing with various parks: various, many parks, flower and fruit parks; various-parks, delightful with them; pleasing with various parks, in that.
cārupaṅkajā,kamaluppalakumudādayo, cārupaṅkajehi saṃkiṇṇā sañchannācārupaṅkajasaṃkiṇṇā,cārupaṅkajasaṃkiṇṇā ca te taḷākā ceticārupaṅkajasaṃkiṇṇataḷākā,tehi samalaṅkato vibhūsitocāru…pe… samalaṅkato,tasmiṃ. Sundaro madhuro raso assātisurasaṃ,surasañca taṃ udakañcātisurasodakaṃ,surasodakena sampuṇṇāsurasodakasampuṇṇā,varā ca te kūpā cātivarakūpā,surasodakasampuṇṇā ca te varakūpā cetisurasodakasampuṇṇavarakūpā,tehi upasobhitosuraso…pe… kūpasobhito,tasmiṃ.
Lovely lotuses, lotuses, water lilies, kumuda lilies, etc., crowded, covered with lovely lotuses; crowded with lovely lotuses, crowded with lovely lotuses and those ponds; ponds crowded with lovely lotuses, adorned with them; lovely...pe... adorned, in that. Its taste is beautiful and sweet; sweet-tasting, sweet-tasting and that water; sweet-tasting water, filled with sweet-tasting water; filled with sweet-tasting water, excellent and those wells; excellent wells, filled with sweet-tasting water and those excellent wells; excellent wells filled with sweet-tasting water, graced with them; sweet-tasting...pe... well-graced, in that.
vicitrā,vicitrā ca te vipulā cātivicitravipulā,vicitravipulā ca te maṇḍapā cāti…pe… maṇḍapā, atisayena uggatāaccuggatā,accuggatā ca te varamaṇḍapā cātiaccuggavaramaṇḍapā,gāthābandhavasena vaṇṇalopo, vicitravipulā ca te accuggavaramaṇḍapā cātivicitravipulaaccuggavaramaṇḍapā,tehi maṇḍito vibhūsitovicitra…pe… maṇḍito,tasmiṃ. Maṇḍaṃ sūriyarasmiṃ pāti rakkhatītimaṇḍapo. Tato tato āgamma vasanti etthātiāvāso,pāsādahammiyamāḷādayo.Anekehīti bahūhi.Accantanti atisayena.
Various, various and those extensive; various-extensive, various-extensive and those pavilions...pe... pavilions, exceedingly high; exceedingly-high, exceedingly-high and those excellent pavilions; exceedingly-high-excellent-pavilions, there is a loss of a syllable in the verse form, various-extensive and those exceedingly-high-excellent-pavilions; various-extensive-exceedingly-high-excellent-pavilions, adorned with them; various...pe... adorned, in that. A pavilion (maṇḍapa) protects from the sun's rays. From here and there they come and dwell; dwelling, palaces, mansions, terraces, etc. With countless: with many. Extremely: exceedingly.
kharaṃpharusaṃ kelāsasikharaṃ jitvā avahasantena viya thūpena ca upasobhite vihāreti yojanā.
Harsh, rough, and graced with a stupa as if mocking by surpassing the peak of Mount Kailāsa, is the connection.
ambudo,sarade ambudosaradambudo,thullanatamahantabhāvasāmaññena saradambudena saṅkāsosaradambudasaṅkāso,tasmiṃ. Sammā ussito uggatotisamussito,tasmiṃ. Olokentānaṃ, vasantānañca pasādaṃ cittassa tosaṃ janetītipasādajananaṃ,tasmiṃ. Ettāvatā vinayavinicchayakathāya pavattitadesaṃ dasseti,‘‘vasatā mayā’’ti kattāraṃ.
Cloud, a cloud in autumn; autumn-cloud, similar to an autumn cloud due to the commonality of being large, stout, and massive; autumn-cloud-like, in that. Well-raised, risen up; well-raised, in that. Generating delight, pleasure of mind for those who look and those who dwell; delight-generating, in that. So far, he shows the place where the Vinayavinicchaya-katha was delivered. "By me dwelling," shows the agent.
sīho,buddho ca so sīho cātibuddhasīho. Seṭṭhapariyāyo vāsīha-saddo, buddhaseṭṭhenāti attho.Vuttassāti desitassa.Vinayassavinayapiṭakassa.Vinicchayoti pāṭhāgato ceva aṭṭhakathāgato ca ācariyaparamparābhato ca vinicchayo.Buddhasīhanti evaṃnāmakaṃ mahātheraṃ.Samuddissāti uddisitvā, tena kataāyācanaṃ paṭiccāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā bāhiranimittaṃ dassitaṃ.
Lion, Buddha and that Lion; Buddha-Lion. Or, lion is a synonym for best, by the best Buddha, is the meaning. Of the stated: of the Vinaya that was taught. The Vinicchaya: the Vinicchaya that comes from the text, as well as from the commentary, and from the lineage of teachers. Buddha-Lion: the great elder named thus. Having addressed: having addressed, meaning having responded to the request made by him. By this, the external cause is shown.
pāsādevasatā mayā katoti yojanā.
In the palace it was done by me dwelling, is the connection.
‘‘vinayassāvabodhatthaṃ, sukhenevācirena cā’’ti, anupādisesena nibbānapariyantānisaṃsassa vinayapiṭakassa pakaraṇassa ganthavasena samāsetvā atthavasena suṭṭhu vinicchitattā sukhena ceva acirena ca avabodhanatthanti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhikkhūnanti padhānanidassanaṃ, ekasesaniddeso vā heṭṭhā –
"For the sake of understanding of the Vinaya, easily and quickly," because the Vinaya-piṭaka, which has the benefit up to Nibbāna without remainder of condition, has been completely arranged in the form of a book and well-decided in terms of meaning, it is said to be for the sake of understanding easily and quickly. Of the bhikkhus: a primary example, or an indication by way of leaving out one of a pair, below –
‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca hitatthāya samāhito. Pavakkhāmī’’ti (vi. vi. ganthārambhakathā 2) –
"For the benefit of bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs, well-composed, I will speak" (Vi. Vi. Ganthārambhakathā 2) –
Āraddhattā. Iminā payojanaṃ dassitaṃ.
Because it was begun. By this, the purpose is shown.
3179.Evaṃ desakattunimittapayojanāni dassetvā kālaniyamaṃ dassetumāha‘‘accutā’’tiādi. Vikkamanaṃvikkanto,vikkamoti attho. Accutaṃ kenaci anabhibhūtaṃ, tañca taṃ vikkantañcātiaccutavikkantaṃ,accutassa nārāyanassa viya accutavikkantaṃ etassātiaccutaccutavikkanto. Ko so? Rājā, tasmiṃ. Kalambhakulaṃ nandayatītikalambhakulanandano,tasmiṃ. Iminā tassa kulavaṃso nidassito. Kalambhakulavaṃsajāte accutaccutavikkantanāme coḷarājinimahiṃcoḷaraṭṭhaṃsamanusāsantesammā anusāsante sati tasmiṃ coḷarājini rajjaṃ kārente sati ayaṃ vinicchayo mayā āraddho ceva samāpito cāti. Iminā kālaṃ nidasseti.
3179. Having thus shown the place, agent, cause, and purpose, he says, in order to show the fixed time, "When," etc. Going forth; gone forth, is the meaning. Unsurpassed by anyone, and that gone forth; unexcelled-gone forth, like that of Nārāyana who is unexcelled; of the unexcelled-gone forth. Who is that? The king, in that. He gladdens the Kalambha clan; Kalambha-clan-gladdener, in that. By this, his family lineage is shown. When the Coḷa queen named Accutavikkanta, born in the Kalambha clan, righteously ruled the earth, the Coḷa country, at that time, this Vinicchaya was begun and completed by me. By this, he shows the time.
3180.Idāni imaṃ vinayavinicchayappakaraṇaṃ karontena attano puññasampadaṃ sakalalokahitatthāya pariṇāmento āha‘‘yathā’’tiādi.Ayaṃvinayavinicchayo antarāyaṃ vinā yathāsiddhiṃnipphattiṃ patto, tathā sattānaṃdhammasaṃyutākusalanissitāsaṅkappācittuppādā, adhippetatthā vā sabbe antarāyaṃ vināsijjhantunippajjantūti yojanā.
3180. Now, while making this Vinayavinicchaya treatise, directing his own accumulation of merit for the benefit of the entire world, he says, "Just as," etc. This Vinayavinicchaya, just as it attained success, completion, without obstruction, so may all the thoughts and mental acts of beings connected with Dhamma, based on wholesome things, or their intended meanings, be successful without obstruction, is the connection.
3181.Teneva puññapphalabhāvena sakalalokahitekahetuno bhagavato sāsanassa ciraṭṭhitimāsīsanto āha‘‘yāva tiṭṭhatī’’tiādi.‘‘Mandāro’’ti vuccati sītasiniddhaekapabbatarājā.Kaṃvuccati udakaṃ, tena dārito niggamappadeso‘‘kandaro’’ti vuccati. Sītasiniddhavipulapulinatalehi, sandamānasātasītalapasannasalilehi, kīḷamānanānappakāramacchagumbehi, ubhayatīrapupphaphalapallavālaṅkatatarulatāvanehi, kūjamānasukasālikakaokilamayūrahaṃsādisakuntābhirutehi, tattha tattha paribhamantabhamarāmavajjāhi ca cāru manuññā kandarā etassāticārukandaro. Kalivuccati aparādho, taṃ sāsati hiṃsati apanetītikalisāsanaṃ. ‘‘Kalusāsana’’nti vā pāṭho.Kalusaṃvuccati pāpaṃ, taṃ asati vikkhipati dūramussārayatītikalusāsanaṃ,pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhasaṅkhātaṃ tividhasāsanaṃ.
3181. By that same fruit of merit, wishing for the long endurance of the dispensation of the Blessed One, which is the sole cause of benefit for the entire world, he says, "As long as," etc. "Mandāra" is said to be a king of mountains that is cool and soothing. Kaṃ is said to be water, a place from which it flows, forced open by it; "kandara" is said. Because it has a delightful valley with cool, soothing, extensive sands, flowing cool, pleasant waters, various kinds of fish and bushes playing, banks adorned with flowers, fruits, and shoots, resounding with the sounds of birds such as parrots, mynahs, cuckoos, peacocks, and swans, and charming and delightful with swarms of bees roaming here and there, therefore, delightful valley. Kali is said to be offense, that which chastises, harms, removes it; kali-chastisement. Or, "kalusa-sāsana" is the reading. Kalusa is said to be evil, that which dispels, scatters, drives away; kalusa-sāsana, the three-fold dispensation consisting of learning, practice, and realization.
3182.Evaṃ okassa diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthahitasādhakassa sāsanassa ciraṭṭhitiṃ patthetvā teneva puññakammānubhāvena lokassa diṭṭhadhammikatthahetumāsīsanto āha‘‘kāle’’tiādi.Kāleti sassasamiddhīnaṃ anurūpe kāle.Sammā pavassantūti avuṭṭhiativuṭṭhidosarahitā yathā sassādīni sampajjanti, tathāvassaṃvuṭṭhidhāraṃ pavassantūti attho.Vassavalāhakāti vassavalāhakādhiṭṭhitā pajjunnadevaputtā.Mahīpālāti rājāno.Dhammatoti dasarājadhammato.Sakalaṃ mahinti pathavinissitasabbajanakāyaṃ.
3182. Thus, wishing for the long-lasting stability of the Dispensation that accomplishes visible, future, and ultimate welfare, and desiring the cause of visible benefit for the world through the power of that meritorious action, he says, beginning with "kāle": Kāle means at the appropriate time for the prosperity of crops. Sammā pavassantu means may they pour down vassaṃ, a stream of rain, in such a way that crops and other things flourish, free from the harm of drought and excessive rain. Vassavalāhakā means the cloud-dwelling devaputtas. Mahīpālā means kings. Dhammato means according to the ten royal virtues. Sakalaṃ mahi means the entire population that depends on the earth.
3183.Evaṃ sabbalokassa lokiyalokuttarasampattisādhanatthāya attano puññapariṇāmaṃ katvā idāni viditalokuttarasampattinipphādanavaseneva puññapariṇāmaṃ karonto āha‘‘ima’’ntiādi. Iminā attano viracitaṃ paccakkhaṃ vinicchayamāha.Sārabhūtanti sīlasārāditividhasikkhāsārassa pakāsanato hatthasāramiva bhūtaṃ.Hitanti tadatthe paṭipajjantānaṃ anupādisesanibbānāvasānassa hitassa āvahanato, saṃsāradukkhassa ca vūpasamanato amatosadhaṃ viya hitaṃ.Atthayuttanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vinayanādīhi yuttattā atthayuttaṃ.Karontenāti racayantena mayā.Yaṃ puññaṃ pattanti kārakaṃ punātīti puññaṃ, pujjabhavaphalanipphādanato vā‘‘puñña’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ yaṃ kusalakammaṃ aparimeyyabhavapariyantaṃ pasutaṃ adhigataṃ.Tenapuññena hetubhūtena.Ayaṃ lokoti ayaṃ sakalopi sattaloko.Munindappayātanti munindena sammāsambuddhena sampattaṃ.Vītasokanti vigatasokaṃ. Sokaparidevadukkhadomanassaupāyāsādīhi vigatattā, tesaṃ nikkamananimittattā ca apagatasokādisaṃsāradukkhaṃ.Sivaṃ puraṃnibbānapuraṃpāpuṇātusacchikarotu, kilesaparinibbānena, anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā ca parinibbātūti vuttaṃ hoti.
3183. Thus, after performing the act of transferring merit for the sake of accomplishing worldly and supramundane prosperity for the entire world, now, while performing the act of transferring merit solely for the sake of producing known supramundane prosperity, he says, beginning with "imaṃ": With imaṃ, he refers to the direct judgment composed by himself. Sārabhūtaṃ means being like the essence of the hand because of the revelation of the essence of training in various ways, beginning with the essence of virtue (sīlasāra). Hitaṃ means beneficial like the medicine of immortality because of bringing about benefit ending in the Nibbāna where no aggregates remain for those who practice according to it, and because of the cessation of the suffering of Saṃsāra. Atthayuttaṃ means consistent with meaning because it is endowed with discipline for visible, future, and ultimate benefits. Karontenā means by me, the composer. Yaṃ puññaṃ pattaṃ means that meritorious action that purifies the agent, or that which has gone to the designation of "puñña" because of producing the fruits of a praiseworthy existence, the wholesome action that has been accumulated and attained up to the limit of countless existences. Tena means with that meritorious cause. Ayaṃ loko means this entire world of beings. Munindappayātaṃ means attained by the Lord of Sages, the Sammāsambuddha. Vītasokaṃ means free from sorrow. Because it is free from sorrow, lamentation, suffering, sadness, and despair, and because it is the cause of the departure of these, it is the state where sorrow and other sufferings of Saṃsāra are gone. Sivaṃ puraṃ means the city of Nibbāna. Pāpuṇātu means may they realize, may they attain final Nibbāna through the Nibbāna of the defilements, and through the Nibbāna element without aggregates remaining.
Iti tambapaṇṇiyenātiādi pakaraṇakārakassa pabhavasuddhibāhusaccādiguṇamukhena pakaraṇe gāravaṃ janetukāmena etassa sissena ṭhapitaṃ vākyaṃ.
Thus, this statement was placed by the student of the author of the treatise, desiring to create respect for the treatise through the qualities of the purity of origin and great learning of the author of the treatise, beginning with "iti tambapaṇṇiyena."
tambapaṇṇiyenāti tambapaṇṇimhi jāto, tattha vidito, tato āgatoti vātambapaṇṇiyo,tena. Byākaraṇamavecca adhītavātiveyyākaraṇo,paramo ca uttamo ca so veyyākaraṇo cātiparamaveyyākaraṇo,tena. Tīṇi piṭakāni samāhaṭāni, tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samāhāro vātipiṭakaṃ,nīyanti bujjhīyanti seyyatthikehītinayā,nayanti vā etehi lokiyalokuttarasampattiṃ visesenātinayā,pāḷinayaatthanayaekattanayādayova, tipiṭake āgatā nayātipiṭakanayā,vidhānaṃ pasāsanaṃ, pavattanaṃ vāvidhi,tipiṭakanayānaṃ vidhitipiṭakanayavidhi,tipiṭakanayavidhimhi kusalotipiṭakanayavidhikusalo,tena.
Tambapaṇṇiyenā means by the one born in Tambapaṇṇi, known there, or coming from there, the Tambapaṇṇiyo. Veyyākaraṇo means the one who has studied grammar with discernment; paramaveyyākaraṇo means the one who is both the highest and best grammarian, by him. Tipiṭakaṃ means the three baskets that are gathered together, or the collection of the three baskets; nayā means those through which Seyyatthikas are led and understand, or those through which they especially lead to worldly and supramundane prosperity; tipiṭakanayā means the methods that have come in the Tipiṭaka; vidhi means the ordinance, administration, or procedure; tipiṭakanayavidhi means the ordinance of the methods of the Tipiṭaka; tipiṭakanayavidhikusalo means the one skilled in the ordinance of the methods of the Tipiṭaka, by him.
paramakavijanā,paramakavijanānaṃ hadayāniparamakavijanahadayāni,padumānaṃ vanānipadumavanāni,paramakavijanahadayāni ca tāni padumavanāni cātiparamakavijanahadayapadumavanāni,tesaṃ vikasanaṃ bodhaṃ sūriyo viya karotītiparamakavijanahadayapadumavanavikasanakaro,tena. Kavī ca te varā cātikavivarā,kavīnaṃ varāti vākavivarā,kavivarānaṃ vasabho uttamokavivaravasabho,tena, kavirājarājenāti attho.
Paramakavijanā means the hearts of the best wise poets; paramakavijanahadayāni means lotus groves; paramakavijanahadayapadumavanāni means those that are both the hearts of the best wise poets and lotus groves; paramakavijanahadayapadumavanavikasanakaro means the one who makes their blossoming like the sun makes understanding blossom, by him. Kavivarā means those who are both poets and excellent; kavivaravasabho means the best and foremost of the excellent poets, by him, meaning by the king of poets.
paramarati,paramaratiṃ karontītiparamaratikarāni,varāni ca tāni madhurāni cātivaramadhurāni,varamadhurāni ca tāni vacanāni cātivaramadhuravacanāni,paramaratikarāni ca tāni varamadhuravacanāni cātiparamaratikaravaramadhuravacanāni,uggiraṇaṃ kathanaṃuggāro,paramaratikaravaramadhuravacanānaṃ uggāro etassātiparama…pe… vacanuggāro,tena. Uragapuraṃ paramapaveṇigāmo assa nivāsotiuragapuro,tena.Buddhadattenāti evaṃnāmakena therena, ācariyabuddhadattattherenāti attho. Ayaṃ vinayavinicchayo racitoti sambandho.
Paramarati means those who cause supreme delight; paramaratikarāni means those that are both excellent and sweet; varamadhurāni means words that are both excellent and sweet; paramaratikaravaramadhuravacanāni means the utterance; uggāro means the expression, the statement; paramaratikaravaramadhuravacanuggāro means the expression of words that cause supreme delight and are excellent and sweet, by him. Uragapuro means his residence is the chief ancestral village of Uragapura, by him. Buddhadattenā means by the Thera named thus, meaning by Ācariya Buddhadatta Thera. The connection is that this Vinayavinicchaya was composed.
Niṭṭhitā cāyaṃ vinayatthasārasandīpanī nāma
Here ends that which is named the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanā.
Commentary on the Vinayavinicchaya.
Vinayavinicchaya-ṭīkā samattā.
The ṭīkā on the Vinayavinicchaya is complete.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Homage to that Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Fully Enlightened One
Uttaravinicchaya-ṭīkā
Uttaravinicchaya-ṭīkā
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Introductory Narrative
(Ka)
(Ka)
Devātidevaṃ sugataṃ, devabrahmindavanditaṃ;
Having paid homage to the God of Gods, the Well-Gone One, who is revered by gods, Brahmās, and Indras;
And to the Dhamma that severs the cycle, and to the Community that has transcended the cycle,
(Kha)
(Kha)
Vandanāmayapuññena, kammena ratanattaye;
By the merit of homage, by the action towards the Triple Gem;
Having cut off all dangers, composed, I shall begin.
(Ga)
(Ga)
buddhadattena,racitassa samāsato;
The Saṃvaṇṇana, unmixed, of the Uttaravinicchaya, composed in brief
by Buddhadatta, according to ability.
1.Athāyamācariyo attano viracite vinaye tassupanissaye vinayapiṭake ca bhikkhūnaṃ nānappakārakosallajananatthaṃ parivāraṭṭhakathāyañca āgatavinicchayaṃ saṅgahetvā uttarapakaraṇaṃ vaṇṇayitukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva antarāyanivāraṇena yathādhippetasādhanatthaṃ ratanattayaṃ vandanto āha‘‘sabbasattuttama’’ntiādi.
1. Now, this teacher, desiring to explain the Uttara treatise by collecting the judgments that have come in the Vinaya and in the Parivāra commentary, which are the basis for that Vinaya, for the purpose of generating various kinds of skill in the monks, first says, beginning with "sabbasattuttama", while paying homage to the Triple Gem for the purpose of preventing obstacles and accomplishing the desired goal.
Pakaraṇārambhe ratanattayavandanāpayojanaṃ tattha tatthācariyehi bahudhā papañcitaṃ, amhehi ca vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāyaṃ samāsato dassitanti na taṃ idha vaṇṇayissāma. Pakaraṇābhidheyya karaṇappakārapayojanānipi tattha dassitanayānusārena idhāpi veditabbāni. Sambandhādidassanamukhena anuttānapadavaṇṇanamevettha karissāmi.
The purpose of paying homage to the Triple Gem at the beginning of a treatise has been extensively elaborated in various places by the teachers, and we have shown it briefly in the commentary on the Vinayavinicchaya, so we will not describe it here. The subject matter of the treatise, the method of composition, and the purpose should also be understood here in accordance with the method shown there. Here, I will only elaborate on the words that are not clear, with a presentation of connection, etc.
‘‘sabbasattuttama’’ntiādi. Tatthasabbasattuttamanti pañcasu kāmaguṇesu sattā āsattā visattā laggitātisattā,paramatthato sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtā upādānakkhandhā vohārato khandhasantatiṃ upādāya paññattā sammuti ‘‘sattā’’ti vuccanti. Te pana kāmāvacarādibhūmivasena, nirayādipadesavasena, ahetukādipaṭisandhivasenāti evamādīhi anantapabhedā. Tesu khīṇāsavānaṃ yathāvuttanibbacanatthena sattavohāro na labbhati. Tathāpi te bhūtapubbagatiyā vā taṃsadisattā vā ‘‘sattā’’ti vuccanti. Sabbe ca te sattā cā tisabbasattā. Uddhaṭatamattā, uggatatamattā, seṭṭhattā cauttamo,sabbasattānaṃ lokiyalokuttarehi rūpārūpaguṇehi uttamo, sabbasattesu vā uttamo pavaro seṭṭhotisabbasattuttamo. ‘‘Jina’’nti etassa visesanaṃ.
"Sabbasattuttama", etc. Therein, sattā means those who are attached, clinging, and stuck to the five strands of sense pleasure; in the ultimate sense, the aggregates of clinging that are the basis for the designation of a being, in conventional terms, the aggregates designated by dependence on the continuum of aggregates are called "sattā." But they are of endless kinds in terms of the planes beginning with the plane of sense desire, in terms of locations beginning with the hells, and in terms of rebirths beginning with the ahetuka. Among them, the designation of "being" is not obtained for those who are arahants, according to the definition stated above. Even so, they are called "sattā" because of their former state or because of their similarity to beings. All those sattā are sabbasattā. Uttamo means the most eminent, the highest, and the best; sabbasattuttamo means the best among all beings in terms of worldly and supramundane rūpa and arūpa qualities, or the best, the most excellent, the most superior among all beings. This is a specification of "Jina."
‘‘dhīra’’nti.Dhīvuccati paññā, tāya īrati vattatītidhīro,taṃ. Tādibhāvena indakhīlasineruādayo viya aṭṭhalokadhammasaṅkhātena bhusavātena akampiyaṭṭhena, catuvesārajjavasena sadevake loke kenaci akampanīyaṭṭhena cadhīraṃ,dhitisampannanti attho. Idampi tasseva visesanaṃ.
"Dhīraṃ": Dhī means wisdom; the one who lives by that is dhīro, that. Because of being unshaken like Indakhīla, Sineru, etc., by the strong wind called the eight worldly conditions, and because of being unshakable by anyone in the world with its devas due to the state of the four confidences, dhīraṃ means possessing firmness. This too is a specification of that.
Vanditvāti kāyavacīmanodvārehi abhivādetvāti attho, yathābhuccaguṇasaṃkittanena thometvā.Sirasāti bhattibhāvanatuttamaṅgena karaṇabhūtena. Iminā visesato kāyapaṇāmo dassito, guṇasaṃkittanena vacīpaṇāmo, ubhayapaṇāmehi nānantariyakatāya manopaṇāmopi dassito ca hoti.
Vanditvā means having greeted with the doors of body, speech, and mind, having praised by reciting the qualities as they truly are. Sirasā means with the head as the best organ of reverence. With this, the bodily prostration is shown specifically, the verbal prostration is shown by reciting the qualities, and the mental prostration is also shown by the uninterruptedness of both prostrations.
Jinanti devaputtakilesābhisaṅkhāramaccukhandhamārasaṅkhāte pañcavidhe māre balavidhamanasamaucchedapahānasahāyavekallanidānopacchedavisayātikkamavasena pañcahi ākārehi jitavātijino,taṃ.
Jinaṃ: The one who has conquered the five kinds of Māras, namely, the Māra of the sons of the gods, the Māra of the defilements, the Māra of the conditioned, the Māra of death, and the Māra of the aggregates, in five ways, namely, by the destruction of strength, by the cessation of violence, by the cutting off of accumulation, by abandonment through repression, by escape, by transcendence of the object that is the cause of separation, jino, that.
‘‘Dhamma’’nti etassa nibbacanādivasena atthavinicchayo heṭṭhā dassitova.Adhammaviddhaṃsanti dhammasaṅkhātassa kusalassa paṭipakkhattāadhammovuccati akusaladhammo, taṃ akusalasaṅkhātaṃ adhammaṃ viddhaṃseti vināseti pajahati tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇappahānenātiadhammaviddhaṃso,sapariyattiko navalokuttaro dhammo. Pariyatti hi pañcannaṃ pahānānaṃ mūlakāraṇattā phalūpacārena tathā vuccati, taṃ adhammaviddhaṃsaṃ. ‘‘Dhamma’’nti etassa visesanaṃ.
The interpretation of the meaning of "Dhamma" in terms of its characteristics, etc., has already been shown below. Adhammaviddhaṃsaṃ means adhamma is called unwholesome dhamma because it is the opposite of the wholesome called Dhamma; the one that destroys, eliminates, and abandons that unwholesome called Adhamma by abandonment through the parts, through repression, through cutting off, through tranquility, and through escape is adhammaviddhaṃso, the ninefold supramundane Dhamma with its literature. For the literature is called that by a transferred epithet because it is the root cause of the five kinds of abandonment; that adhammaviddhaṃsaṃ. This is a specification of "Dhamma."
Gaṇanti aṭṭhannaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ samūhaṃ, saṅghanti attho.Aṅgaṇanāsananti attano nissayaṃ aṅganti matthentītiaṅgaṇā,kilesā rāgadosamohā, te aṅgaṇe nāseti yathāyogaṃ tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇappahānehi pajahatītiaṅgaṇanāsano,taṃ. ‘‘Gaṇa’’nti etassa visesanaṃ.
Gaṇaṃ means the group of eight noble individuals, meaning the Saṅgha. Aṅgaṇanāsanaṃ: Those who consider defilements their own possession are aṅgaṇā; the one that destroys those defilements, namely, greed, hatred, and delusion, by abandoning them through the abandonment through the parts, through repression, through cutting off, through tranquility, and through escape, as appropriate, is aṅgaṇanāsano, that. This is a specification of "Gaṇa."
2.Mayā vinayassa yo sāro vinicchayo racito,tassavinicchayassāti yojanā. Natthi tassa uttarotianuttaro,sabbesu vinicchayesu, sabbesaṃ vā vinicchayānaṃ anuttaro uttamo vinicchayotisabbānuttaro,taṃ.Uttaraṃpakaraṇaṃ idāni karissāmīti yojanā.
2. The meaning is that I will now make the uttaraṃ treatise, which is sabbānuttaro, the Vinicchaya that has no superior in all Vinicchayas, or is the highest Vinicchaya of all Vinicchayas, and is the sāro Vinicchaya that was composed by me.
3.Bhaṇatoti bhaṇantassa paguṇaṃ vācuggataṃ karontassa.Paṭhatoti paṭhantassa vācuggataṃ sajjhāyantassa.Payuñjatoti tattha pakārena yuñjantassa, taṃ aññesaṃ vācentassa vā.Suṇatoti parehi vuccamānaṃ suṇantassa.Cintayatoti yathāsutaṃ atthato, saddato ca cintentassa. ‘‘Abuddhassa buddhivaḍḍhana’’nti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena vibhattilopo.Abuddhassabālassa vinaye appakataññuno bhikkhubhikkhunijanassa.Buddhivaḍḍhanaṃvinayavinicchaye paññāvuddhinipphādakaṃ. Atha vābuddhassavinicchaye kataparicayattā paññavato janassabuddhivaḍḍhanaṃbuddhiyā paññāya tikkhavisadabhāvāpādanena bhiyyobhāvasādhakaṃ.Paramaṃuttamaṃuttaraṃnāma pakaraṇaṃvadatokathentassamemama santikāniratāvinicchaye, tīsu sikkhāsu vā visesena ratānibodhathajānātha sutamayañāṇaṃ abhinipphādethāti sotujanaṃ savane niyojeti.
3. Bhaṇato means for the one who speaks, making it fluent in speech. Paṭhato means for the one who recites, repeating it fluently. Payuñjato means for the one who applies it in various ways there, or for the one who makes others recite it. Suṇato means for the one who hears it being spoken by others. Cintayato means for the one who reflects on it in terms of meaning and words, as heard. In what should be said as "Abuddhassa buddhivaḍḍhana," there is the elision of the विभक्ति due to the meter of the verse. Abuddhassa means for the ignorant bhikkhu or bhikkhunī who is inexperienced in the Vinaya. Buddhivaḍḍhanaṃ means the producer of the increase of wisdom in the Vinaya judgment. Or, buddhassa means for the person who is wise because of being familiar with the judgment; buddhivaḍḍhanaṃ means the accomplisher of a greater state by bringing about sharpness and clarity of wisdom. Nibodhatha means especially delighting in the judgment, or in the three trainings, me, from my presence, paramaṃ uttaraṃ name, which is vadato, the speaker, know, generate knowledge based on hearing, thus he directs the audience to listen.
Mahāvibhaṅgasaṅgahakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Mahāvibhaṅga Saṅgaha Story
4.Evaṃ sotujanaṃ savane niyojetvā yathāpaṭiññātaṃ uttaravinicchayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘methuna’’ntiādi.‘‘Kati āpattiyo’’ti ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanā, adiṭṭhajotanā, vimaticchedanā, anumati, kathetukamyatāpucchāti pañcannaṃ pucchānaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā.Tisso āpattiyo phuseti tassā saṅkhepato vissajjanaṃ.
4. Thus, having directed the audience to listen, he says, beginning with "methunaṃ", in order to show the Uttaravinicchaya as promised. "Kati āpattiyo" is the question of wanting to speak, of the five questions: seen comparison, unseen illumination, doubt cutting, approval, and wanting to speak.
5.Evaṃ gaṇanāvasena dassitānaṃ‘‘bhave’’tiādi sarūpato dassanaṃ.Khetteti tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ allokāse tilabījamattepi padese. Methunaṃ paṭisevantassa pārājikaṃ bhaveti sambandho. ‘‘Thullaccaya’’nti vuttanti yojanā.‘‘Yebhuyyakkhāyite’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, upaḍḍhakkhāyitepi thullaccayassa heṭṭhā vuttattā. Vaṭṭakate mukhe aphusantaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
5. "Bhave", etc., is the showing in essence of that which was shown by way of counting. Khette means in any open space, even the size of a sesame seed, in one of the three paths. The connection is that pārājika occurs for one who engages in sexual intercourse. The connection is that "thullaccaya" was stated. "Yebhuyyakkhāyite" this is merely a condition, because thullaccaya was stated below even in the case of partial manifestation. The connection is that dukkaṭa was stated for the one who introduces the genital organ without touching the mouth that is like a cartwheel.
6.‘‘Adinnaṃādiyanto’’tiādayopi vuttanayāyeva.
6. "Adinnaṃ ādiyanto", etc., are also in accordance with the method stated.
7.Pañcamāsagghane vāpīti porāṇakassa nīlakahāpaṇassa catutthabhāgasaṅkhāte pañcamāse, tadagghanake vā.Adhike vāti atirekapañcamāsake vā tadagghanake vā. Adinne pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññatarena avahaṭe parājayo hotīti attho. Māse vā ūnamāse vā tadagghanake vā dukkaṭaṃ.Tato majjheti pañcamāsakato majjhe. Pañca māsā samāhaṭā, pañcannaṃ māsānaṃ samāhāroti vāpañcamāsaṃ,pañcamāsaṃ agghatītipañcamāsagghanaṃ,pañcamāsañca pañcamāsagghanañcapañcamāsagghanaṃ,ekadesasarūpekasesoyaṃ, tasmiṃ.Māse vāti etthāpi māso ca māsagghanakañca māsamāsagghanakoti vattabbe ‘‘māse’’ti ekadesasarūpekaseso, uttarapadalopo ca daṭṭhabbo.
7. Pañcamāsagghane vāpi means in the fifth māsa, which is the fourth part of an ancient blue kahāpaṇa, or in something of that value. Adhike vā means or in an additional fifth māsa, or in something of that value. The meaning is that pārājika occurs if something not given is taken away through one of the twenty-five dealings. Dukkaṭa occurs in a māsa or less than a māsa, or in something of that value. Tato majjhe means in the middle of that fifth māsaka. Pañcamāsaṃ means five māsas collected together, or the collection of five māsas; pañcamāsagghanaṃ means that which is worth five māsas; pañcamāsañca pañcamāsagghanañca means the fifth māsa and that which is worth five māsas; this is an instance of one remainder of similar form, in that. Māse vā, here too, "māse" should be said as māso ca māsagghanakañca māsamāsagghanako, this is an instance of one remainder of similar form, and the elision of the final term should be seen.
Aṭṭhakathāyañca–
And in the Aṭṭhakathā—
‘‘Pañcamāsako pādoti pāḷiṃ ulliṅgitvā ‘tadā rājagahe vīsatimāsako kahāpaṇo hoti, tasmā pañcamāsako pādo’. Etena lakkhaṇena sabbajanapadesu kahāpaṇassa catuttho bhāgo ‘pādo’ti veditabbo. So ca kho porāṇakassa nīlakahāpaṇassa vasena, na itaresaṃ dudradāmakādīnaṃ. Tena hi pādena atītā buddhāpi pārājikaṃ paññapesuṃ, anāgatāpi paññapessanti. Sabbabuddhānañhi pārājikavatthumhi vā pārājike vā nānattaṃ natthi, imāneva cattāri pārājikavatthūni, imāneva cattāri pārājikāni, ito ūnaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā natthi. Tasmā bhagavāpi dhaniyaṃ vigarahitvā pādeneva dutiyapārājikaṃ paññapento ‘yo pana bhikkhu adinnaṃ theyyasaṅkhāta’ntiādimāhā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.88) vuttaṃ.
It is said, "Having cited the Pali passage, 'A foot is five māsakas,' [it means that] at that time in Rājagaha, a kahāpaṇa was twenty māsakas; therefore, a foot is five māsakas.' By this definition, in all regions, a quarter of a kahāpaṇa should be understood as a 'foot.' And that is in terms of an old nīlakahāpaṇa, not others like durdadāmaka. Thus, even past Buddhas established the pārājika based on a foot, and future Buddhas will also establish it. For all Buddhas, there is no difference in the object of a pārājika or in the pārājika itself; these are the four objects of pārājika, these are the four pārājikas; there is nothing less or more than this. Therefore, even the Blessed One, having rebuked Dhaniya, declared the second pārājika with a foot, saying, 'Whatever bhikkhu should take what is not given, reckoned as theft,' etc." (pāci. 239)
Sāratthadīpaniyañca–
And in the Sāratthadīpanī:
‘‘Catuttho bhāgo pādoti veditabboti imināva sabbajanapadesu kahāpaṇasseva vīsatimo bhāgomāsakoti idañca vuttameva hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Porāṇasatthānurūpaṃ lakkhaṇasampannā uppāditā nīlakahāpaṇāti veditabbā. Dudradāmena uppādito dudradāmako. So kira nīlakahāpaṇassa tibhāgaṃ agghatī’ti vatvā ‘yasmiṃ padese nīlakahāpaṇā na santi, tatthāpi nīlakahāpaṇavaseneva paricchedo kātabbo. Kathaṃ? Nīlakahāpaṇānaṃ vaḷañjanaṭṭhāne ca avaḷañjanaṭṭhāne ca samānaagghavasena pavattamānaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ nīlakahāpaṇena samānagghaṃ gahetvā tassa catutthabhāgagghanakaṃ nīlakahāpaṇassa pādagghanakanti paricchinditvā vinicchayo kātabbo’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.88) ayamatthova vutto.
"By 'A quarter should be understood as a foot,' it should be seen that it is already stated that in all regions, a twentieth part of a kahāpaṇa is a māsaka. Nīlakahāpaṇas should be understood as produced in accordance with the ancient treatises, possessing the proper characteristics. A durdadāmaka is produced with a durdadāma. It is said that it is worth a third of a nīlakahāpaṇa. In whatever region nīlakahāpaṇas do not exist, even there, the determination should be made in terms of nīlakahāpaṇas. How? By taking goods circulating at the same value in places where nīlakahāpaṇas are valued and not valued, considering them equivalent in value to nīlakahāpaṇas, and deciding by determining a quarter of that value as the value of a foot of a nīlakahāpaṇa." (sārattha. ṭī. 2.88) This is the meaning stated.
kahāpaṇaṃnāma karontā suvaṇṇenapi karonti rajatenapi tambenapi suvaṇṇarajatatambamissakenapi. Tesu kataraṃ kahāpaṇaṃ nīlakahāpaṇanti?Kecitāva ‘‘suvaṇṇakahāpaṇa’’nti.Keci‘‘missakakahāpaṇa’’nti. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇakahāpaṇa’’nti vadantānaṃ ayamadhippāyo – pārājikavatthunā pādena sabbattha ekalakkhaṇena bhavitabbaṃ, kāladesaparibhogādivasena agghanānattaṃ pādasseva bhavitabbaṃ. Bhagavatā hi dhammikarājūhi hananabandhanapabbājanānurūpeneva adinnādāne pārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, na itarathā. Tasmā esā sabbadā sabbattha abyabhicārīti suvaṇṇamayassa kahāpaṇassa catutthena pādena bhavitabbanti.
A kahāpaṇa is made with gold, silver, copper, or a mixture of gold, silver, and copper. Among these, which kahāpaṇa is the nīlakahāpaṇa? Some say it is a "gold kahāpaṇa." Some say it is a "mixed kahāpaṇa." Among them, those who say it is a "gold kahāpaṇa" have this intention: The pārājika object, the foot, should be uniform everywhere; the difference in value should be only of the foot due to time, place, use, etc. The Blessed One declared the pārājika for taking what is not given only in accordance with the kings' punishments of execution, imprisonment, and banishment, not otherwise. Therefore, it should always and everywhere be invariable, with a quarter of a kahāpaṇa made of gold.
‘‘Missakakahāpaṇa’’nti vadantānaṃ pana ayamadhippāyo –
But those who say it is a "mixed kahāpaṇa" have this intention:
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
In the Commentary:
‘‘Tadā rājagahe vīsatimāsako kahāpaṇo hoti, tasmā pañcamāsako pādo. Etena lakkhaṇena sabbajanapadesu kahāpaṇassa catuttho bhāgo ‘pādo’ti veditabbo. So ca kho porāṇakassa nīlakahāpaṇassa vasena, na itaresaṃ dudradāmakādīna’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.88) –
"At that time in Rājagaha, a kahāpaṇa was twenty māsakas; therefore, a foot is five māsakas. By this definition, in all regions, a quarter of a kahāpaṇa should be understood as a 'foot.' And that is in terms of an old nīlakahāpaṇa, not others like durdadāmaka." (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.88)
sāratthadīpaniyañca–
And in the Sāratthadīpanī:
‘‘Porāṇasatthānurūpaṃ lakkhaṇasampannā uppāditā nīlakahāpaṇāti veditabbā’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.88) –
"Nīlakahāpaṇas should be understood as produced in accordance with the ancient treatises, possessing the proper characteristics." (sārattha. ṭī. 2.88)
Vuttattā ca ‘‘vinayavinicchayaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabba’’nti vacanato ca missakakahāpaṇoyeva nīlakahāpaṇo. Tattheva hi porāṇasatthavihitaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ dissati. Kathaṃ? Pañca māsā suvaṇṇassa, tathā rajatassa, dasa māsā tambassāti ete vīsati māse missetvā bandhanatthāya vīhimattaṃ lohaṃ pakkhipitvā akkharāni ca hatthiādīnamaññatarañca rūpaṃ dassetvā kato niddosattā nīlakahāpaṇo nāma hotīti.
And because it is said, "Having attained the Vinaya decision, one should stand firm on the serious," and because the characteristic prescribed in the ancient treatises is seen there, the mixed kahāpaṇa is indeed the nīlakahāpaṇa. How? Having mixed five māsas of gold, likewise of silver, and ten māsas of copper, these twenty māsas, and having put in an amount of iron the size of a grain of rice to bind them, and having shown letters and one of the shapes such as an elephant, it is called nīlakahāpaṇa because it is free from defects.
Sikkhābhājanavinicchayeca kesuci potthakesu ‘‘pādo nāma pañca māsā suvaṇṇassā’’ti purimapakkhavādīnaṃ matena pāṭho likhito. Kesuci potthakesu dutiyapakkhavādīnaṃ matena ‘‘pañca māsā hiraññassā’’ti pāṭho likhito. Sīhaḷabhāsāya porāṇakehi likhitāyasāmaṇerasikkhāyapana –
And in the Sikkhābhājanavinicchaya, in some books, the reading "A foot is five māsas of gold" is written according to the opinion of those advocating the former position. In some books, the reading "five māsas of silver" is written according to the opinion of those advocating the second position. However, in the Sāmaṇerasikkhā written in Sinhala language by the ancients:
aṭṭhakathāvacanassa, porāṇake ratanasuttābhidhānakasutte vuttakahāpaṇalakkhaṇassa ca anurūpato ‘suvaṇṇarajatatambāni missetvā uṭṭhāpetvā katakahāpaṇaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ nāmā’ti ca ‘sāmaṇerānamupasampannānañca adinnādānapārājikavatthumhi ko viseso’ti pucchaṃ katvā ‘sāmaṇerānaṃ dasikasuttenāpi pārājiko hoti, upasampannānaṃ pana suvaṇṇassa vīsativīhimattenā’’ti –
In accordance with the commentary statement and the characteristic of the kahāpaṇa stated in the ancient sutta called Ratanasutta, it is said, "A kahāpaṇa is a kahāpaṇa made by mixing gold, silver, and copper and raising it up," and "What is the difference in the object of the adinnādāna pārājika for novices and fully ordained monks?" Having made the question, "For novices, there is a pārājika even with the Tens Sutta, but for the fully ordained, it is with twenty rice grains of gold"—
Ca viseso dassito.
And a difference is shown.
Taṃ pana suvaṇṇamāsakavasena aḍḍhatiyamāsakaṃ hoti, pañcamāsakena ca bhagavatā pārājikaṃ paññattaṃ. Tasmā tassa yathāvuttalakkhaṇassa kahāpaṇassa sabbadesesu alabbhamānattā sabbadesasādhāraṇena tassa missakakahāpaṇassa pañcamāsapādagghanakena suvaṇṇeneva pārājikavatthumhi niyamite sabbadesavāsīnaṃ upakārāya hotīti evaṃ suvaṇṇeneva pārājikavatthuparicchedo kato. Ayameva niyamo sīhaḷācariyavādehi sāroti gahito. Tasmā sikkhāgarukehi sabbattha pesalehi vinayadharehi ayameva vinicchayo sārato paccetabbo. Honti cettha –
But that is half a māsaka in terms of gold māsakas, and the Blessed One declared the pārājika with five māsakas. Therefore, because that kahāpaṇa with the characteristic as stated is not obtainable in all countries, it is determined for the benefit of the inhabitants of all countries that the object of pārājika should be only with gold equivalent to five māsas of that mixed kahāpaṇa, which is common to all countries. Thus, the determination of the object of pārājika is made only with gold. This very rule is taken as the essence by the Sinhala teachers' tradition. Therefore, by those who are respectful of the training, who are skilled everywhere, and by the Vinaya experts, this very decision should be accepted as the essence. Here are some verses:
‘‘Hemarajatatambehi, satthe niddiṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ;
"With gold, silver, and copper, a characteristic specified in the treatise;
Having caused it to be made, a twenty-māsa nīlakahāpaṇa.
Hemapādaṃ sajjhupādaṃ, tambapādadvayañhi so;
A gold foot, a silver foot, and indeed two copper feet is that;
Having mixed them, having applied a shape, it is shown in the treatises to be made.
‘Elā’ti vuccate doso, niddosattā tathīrito;
‘Elā’ is said to be a defect, thus it is called flawless;
Its foot of gold, is considered to be worth twenty rice grains.
Yasmiṃ pana padese so, na vattati kahāpaṇo;
But in whatever region that kahāpaṇa does not circulate;
Twenty gold rice grains, its foot's worth should be known.
Vīsasovaṇṇavīhagghaṃ, thenentā bhikkhavo tato;
Bhikkhus stealing twenty gold rice grains from there;
Fall away from the qualities of the ascetic, thus say the Vinaya experts."
9.Opātanti āvāṭaṃ. Dukkhe jāteti yojanā.
9.Opāta means a pit. The connection is: born in suffering.
10.Uttariṃ dhammanti ettha ‘‘uttarimanussadhamma’’nti vattabbe niruttinayena majjhapadalopaṃ, niggahītāgamañca katvā ‘‘uttariṃ dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammaṃuttarimanussadhammaṃ. Attupanāyikanti attani taṃ upaneti ‘‘mayi atthī’’ti samudācaranto, attānaṃ vā tattha upaneti ‘‘ahaṃ ettha sandissāmī’’ti samudācarantoti attupanāyiko, taṃ attupanāyikaṃ, evaṃ katvā vadantoti sambandho.
10.Uttariṃ dhamma: here, instead of saying "uttarimanussadhamma" (superior human quality), the middle term is elided by the rule of interpretation, and with the addition of niggahīta, it is said "uttariṃ dhamma." The quality of superior humans, both meditators and noble ones, is uttarimanussadhamma. Attupanāyika: one who applies it to oneself, declaring "it exists in me," or applying oneself there, declaring "I am seen here," is attupanāyiko; that is attupanāyika; thus, the connection is: those who speak having done so.
11.Pariyāyeti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu arahā’’tiādinā (pari. 287) pariyāyabhaṇane.Ñāteti yaṃ uddissa bhaṇati, tasmiṃ viññumhi manussajātike acirena ñāte.No ceti no ce jānāti.
11.Pariyāye: in speaking by way of explanation, such as, "The bhikkhu who lives in your monastery, that bhikkhu is an Arahat" (pari. 287). Ñāte: to one who is quickly known, who is intended in the speech, who is intelligent, and who is of the human species. No ce: if he does not know.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the explanation of the hidden meanings in the Uttara,
Pārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Pārājika Chapter is finished.
13.Ceteti, upakkamati, muccati, evaṃ aṅgattaye puṇṇe garukaṃ vuttaṃ.Dvaṅgeceteti, upakkamati yadi na muccati, evaṃ aṅgadvaye thullaccayanti yojanā.Payogeti payojetvā upakkamituṃ aṅgajātāmasanaṃ, parassa āṇāpananti evarūpe sāhatthikāṇattikapayoge.
13.Ceteti, upakkamati, muccati: when these three factors are complete, it is said to be a serious offense. Dvaṅge: ceteti, upakkamati, if one does not escape, thus with two factors, it is a thullaccaya, is the connection. Payoge: in the application of undertaking to assault, having applied, such as touching the genitals or ordering another, in such an application of acting oneself with an alien intention.
14.Vuttanayeneva uparūpari pañhāpucchanaṃ ñātuṃ sakkāti taṃ avattukāmo āha‘‘ito paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi. Mayampi yadettha pubbe avuttamanuttānatthañca, tadeva vaṇṇayissāma.
14.Because it is possible to know by repeatedly asking questions in the way stated, not wishing to say that, he said, "ito paṭṭhāya" (from here onwards), etc. We also will describe only what was previously unsaid here, and what was not of clear meaning.
15.Kāyenāti attano kāyena.Kāyanti itthiyā kāyaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘kāyabaddha’’nti etthāpi.
15.Kāyena: with one's own body. Kāya: the body of a woman. This method is also applicable to "kāyabaddha."
16.Attanokāyena paṭibaddhenaitthiyā kāyapaṭibaddhephuṭṭhe tu dukkaṭanti yojanā.
16.The connection is: if one touches bound by one's own body, a woman's body bound, there is a dukaṭa.
17.Tissoāpattiyo siyunti yojanā.Dvinnaṃ maggānanti vaccamaggapassāvamaggānaṃ.
17.The connection is: three offenses are possible. Dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ: of the excrement passage and the urine passage.
18.Vaṇṇādibhaññeti vaṇṇādinā bhaṇane. Kāyapaṭibaddhe vaṇṇādinā bhaññe dukkaṭanti yojanā.
18.Vaṇṇādibhaññe: in speaking with praise, etc. The connection is: if one speaks with praise, etc., of one who is body-bound, there is a dukaṭa.
19.Attakāmacariyāyāti attakāmapāricariyāya.
19.Attakāmacariyāyā: for the sake of one's own pleasure.
20.Paṇḍakassa santikepi attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ vadatotassabhikkhunoti yojanā.Tiracchānagatassāpi santiketi etthāpi eseva nayo.
20.The connection is: to the bhikkhu tassa who speaks praise for the sake of one's own pleasure even in the presence of a paṇḍaka. Tiracchānagatassāpi santike: this same method applies here too.
21.Itthipurisānamantaresañcarittaṃsañcaraṇabhāvaṃsamāpannebhikkhumhipaṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsāpaccāharaṇakattikesampanne tassa budho garukaṃ niddiseti yojanā.
21.Sañcarittaṃ (wandering), the state of wandering sañcaraṇabhāvaṃ samāpanne (completed), the wise one indicates a serious offense for the bhikkhu bhikkhumhi who is paṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsāpaccāharaṇakattike (engaged in receiving, investigating, and bringing back), is the connection.
22.Dvaṅgasamāyogeti tīsvetesu dvinnaṃ aṅgānaṃ yathākathañci samāyoge.Aṅge sati panekasminti tiṇṇamekasmiṃ pana aṅge sati.
22.Dvaṅgasamāyoge: in the combination of two of these three factors in any way. Aṅge sati panekasmiṃ: but when one of the three factors is present.
24.Payogeti ‘‘adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ kuṭiṃ, adesitavatthukaṃ mahallakavihārañca kāressāmī’’ti upakaraṇatthaṃ araññagamanato paṭṭhāya sabbapayoge.Ekapiṇḍe anāgateti sabbapariyantimaṃ piṇḍaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
24.Payoge: in all applications from going to the forest for the purpose of materials, saying "I will have a dwelling built that exceeds the prescribed measure without specifying the ground, and a large monastery without specifying the ground." Ekapiṇḍe anāgate: said referring to the very last lump.
25.Idhayobhikkhu amūlakena pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃsetīti yojanā.
25.Here, the connection is: yo bhikkhu falsely accuses with a pārājika offense.
26.Okāsaṃna ca kāretvāti ‘‘karotu me, āyasmā, okāsaṃ, ahaṃ te vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ tena bhikkhunā okāsaṃ akārāpetvā.
26.Okāsaṃ na ca kāretvā: without causing the bhikkhu to make an opportunity, saying "May the venerable one make an opportunity for me, I want to speak to you."
28.Aññabhāgiyeti aññabhāgiyapadena upalakkhitasikkhāpade. Evaṃ aññatrapi īdisesu ṭhānesu attho veditabbo.
28.Aññabhāgiye: in a training rule characterized by the term "aññabhāgiya". Thus, the meaning should be understood elsewhere too in such places.
29.‘‘Samanubhāsanāya evā’’ti padacchedo.Na paṭinissajanti appaṭinissajanto.
29."Samanubhāsanāya evā": this is the word division. Na paṭinissaja: not relinquishing.
30.Ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ āpanno siyā, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullataṃ āpanno siyā, kammavācāya osāne garukaṃ āpanno siyāti yojanā.‘‘Thullata’’nti idaṃ thullaccayāpattiupalakkhaṇavacanaṃ.
30.The connection is: one would incur a dukaṭa with the ñatti, one would incur a thullaccaya with the two kammavācās, and at the end of the kammavācā, one would incur a serious offense. "Thullata": this is a word indicative of a thullaccaya offense.
31.Catūsu yāvatatiyakesu paṭhame āpattiparicchedaṃ dassetvā itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ tenapi ekaparicchedattā tattha vuttanayameva tesu atidisanto āha‘‘bhedānuvattake’’tiādi.
31.Having shown the determination of the offense in the first of the four up to the third, because the other three also have one determination, extending there the very method stated, he says "bhedānuvattake" (in one who follows division), etc.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the explanation of the hidden meanings in the Uttara,
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Saṅghādisesa Chapter is finished.
32.Atirekacīvaranti anadhiṭṭhitaṃ, avikappitaṃ vikappanupagapamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ laddhā dasāhaṃ atikkamanto ekameva nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ āpajjati. Ticīvarena ekarattimpivinā vasantoekameva nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ āpajjati. Idañca jātivasena ekattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ vatthugaṇanāya āpattīnaṃ paricchinditabbattā.
32.Atirekacīvara: having obtained an extra robe, not determined, not assigned, of allowable measure for assignment, one incurs only one nissaggiya pācittiya by exceeding ten days. Vinā vasanto: dwelling vinā even one night with three robes, one incurs only one nissaggiya pācittiya. And this is said referring to unity by kind, because the offenses are to be determined by counting the items.
33.Gahetvākālacīvaranti akālacīvaraṃ paṭiggahetvā.Māsanti satiyā paccāsāya nikkhipituṃ anuññātaṃ māsaṃ.Atikkamantoti satiyāpi paccāsāya vītikkamanto antomāse anadhiṭṭhahitvā, avikappetvā vā tiṃsadivasāni atikkamanto, cīvaruppādadivasaṃ aruṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā ekatiṃsamaṃ aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpentoti attho. Ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjatīti udīritanti yojanā.
33.Gahetvākālacīvaraṃ: having received an out-of-season robe. Māsaṃ: the month allowed for keeping it with the expectation of a reason. Atikkamanto: exceeding, even with the expectation of a reason, exceeding thirty days without determining or assigning within the month, raising the thirty-first dawn, making the day of the robe's arising the beginning, is the meaning. The connection is: it is said that one incurs one nissaggiya offense.
34.Aññātikāyabhikkhuniyā.Yaṃkiñci purāṇacīvaranti ekavārampi paribhuttaṃ saṅghāṭiādīnamaññataraṃ cīvaraṃ.
34.Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā: by a bhikkhuni who is not a relative. Yaṃkiñci purāṇacīvaraṃ: whatever old robe, even once used, one of the saṅghāṭi robes, etc.
35.Payogasminti ‘‘dhovā’’tiādike bhikkhuno āṇattikapayoge, evaṃ āṇattāya ca bhikkhuniyā uddhanādike sabbasmiṃ payoge ca.‘‘Nissaggiyāva pācitti hotīti nissaggiyā pācitti ca hotīti yojanā.
35.Payogasmiṃ: in the application of ordering the bhikkhu, saying "wash," etc., and likewise in all applications such as pounding by the bhikkhuni by order. "Nissaggiyāva pācitti hotī": the connection is, a nissaggiya, and a pācitti, occur.
36.Paṭigaṇhatoti ettha ‘‘aññatra pārivattakā’’ti yojanā.
36.Paṭigaṇhato: here, the connection is "aññatra pārivattakā" (except in exchange).
38.Payogasminti viññāpanapayoge.Viññāpiteti viññāpitacīvare paṭiladdhe.
38.Payogasmiṃ: in the application of requesting. Viññāpite: in a robe obtained by requesting.
39.Bhikkhūti acchinnacīvaro vā naṭṭhacīvaro vā bhikkhu.Taduttarinti santaruttaraparamato uttariṃ.
39.Bhikkhū: a bhikkhu with a robe torn or lost. Taduttariṃ: more than the highest allowable limit.
41.Payogeti vikappanāpajjanapayoge.
41.Payoge: in the application of assigning.
42.Duveti dukkaṭapācittiyavasena duve āpattiyo phuseti yojetabbaṃ.
42.Duve: it should be connected that one experiences two offenses, by way of dukaṭa and pācittiya.
44.Payogeti anuññātapayogato atirekābhinipphādanapayoge.Lābheti cīvarassa paṭilābhe.
44.Payoge: in the application of producing more than what is allowed. Lābhe: in obtaining the robe.
Kathinavaggavaṇṇanā paṭhamā.
The first chapter, Kathinavagga, is finished.
45.Kosiyavaggassaādīsu pañcasusikkhāpadesu dve dve āpattiyoti yojanā.Payogeti karaṇakārāpanapayoge.Lābheti katvā vā kāretvā vā pariniṭṭhāpane.
45.Ādīsu pañcasu: in the first five training rules of the Kosiyavagga, there are two offenses each, is the connection. Payoge: in the application of doing and having done. Lābhe: in completing, having done or having had done.
46.‘‘Gahetvā eḷakalomānī’’ti padacchedo.Atikkamanti atikkamanto.
46.‘‘Gahetvā eḷakalomānī’’ti is a word division. Atikkamanti: exceeding.
47.Aññāyāti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā. ‘‘Dhovāpeti eḷalomaka’’nti padacchedo.Eḷalomakanti eḷakalomāni. Niruttinayena ka-kārassa vipariyāyo.Payogeti dhovāpanapayoge.
47.Aññāyati: by a bhikkhuni who is not a relative. ‘‘Dhovāpeti eḷalomaka’’nti is a word division. Eḷalomakanti: goat's hair. According to the rules of etymology, the ka-sound is reversed. Payogeti: in the act of having it washed.
48.Payogeti paṭiggaṇhanapayoge.
48.Payogeti: in the act of receiving.
49.Nānākāranti nānappakāraṃ.Samāpajjanti samāpajjanto bhikkhu.Samāpanneti saṃvohāre samāpanne sati.Payogeti samāpajjanapayoge.
49.Nānākāranti: various kinds. Samāpajjanti: a bhikkhu undertaking. Samāpanneti: when one has been suspended. Payogeti: in the act of suspending.
50.Payogeti kayavikkayāpajjanapayoge.Tasmiṃ kateti tasmiṃ bhaṇḍe attano santakabhāvaṃ nīte.
50.Payogeti: in the act of engaging in buying and selling. Tasmiṃ kateti: when that item has been made one's own property.
Kosiyavaggavaṇṇanā dutiyā.
The second section, Kosiyavagga, is complete.
51.Atirekakanti anadhiṭṭhitaṃ, avikappitaṃ vā pattaṃ. Dasāhaṃ atikkamentassa tassa bhikkhuno ekāva nissaggiyāpatti hotīti yojanā.
51.Atirekakanti: a bowl that has not been authorized or allocated. The construction is that if that bhikkhu exceeds ten days, there is only one nissaggiya offense.
52-3.Natthi etassa pañca bandhanānītiapañcabandhano,tasmiṃ, ūnapañcabandhane patteti attho.Payogeti viññāpanapayoge.Tassapattassalābhepaṭilābhe.
52-3.There are not five ties for this, therefore it is apañcabandhano, meaning in that bowl which has less than five ties. Payogeti: in the act of requesting. Tassa—of that bowl—in lābhe, in receiving.
54.Bhesajjanti sappiādikaṃ.
54.Bhesajjanti: medicine, such as ghee, etc.
55.Payogeti pariyesanapayoge.
55.Payogeti: in the act of seeking.
56.Payogeti acchindanaacchindāpanapayoge.Haṭeti acchinditvā gahite.
56.Payogeti: in the act of seizing and having seized. Haṭeti: having seized by force.
57.Dve panāpattiyo phuseti vāyāpanapayoge dukkaṭaṃ, vikappanupagapacchimacīvarapamāṇena vīte nissaggiyanti dve āpattiyo āpajjatīti attho.
57.Dve panāpattiyo phuseti: in the act of urging, a dukkata, and with the passing of the measure of the last robe without allocation, a nissaggiya; thus, he incurs two offenses.
58-9.Yo pana bhikkhu appavārito aññātakasseva tantavāyesameccaupasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjanto hoti.Soti so bhikkhu. Dve āpattiyo āpajjati, na saṃsayoti yojanā.Payogeti vikappāpajjanapayoge.
58-9.Yo pana bhikkhu appavārito aññātakasseva tantavāye samecca upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjanto hoti: whatever bhikkhu, not being authorized, having agreed with a weaver who is unknown, undertakes an allocation with respect to a robe. Soti: that bhikkhu. The construction is that he incurs two offenses, there is no doubt. Payogeti: in the act of undertaking allocation.
60.Accekasaññitaṃ cīvaraṃ paṭiggahetvāti yojanā.Kālanti cīvarakālaṃ.
60.Accekasaññitaṃ cīvaraṃ paṭiggahetvāti is the construction: having received a robe that was given as an emergency gift. Kālanti: robe season.
61.Tiṇṇamaññataraṃ vatthanti tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ.Ghareti antaraghare.Nidahitvāti nikkhipitvā.Tenacīvarena vinā chārattatoadhikaṃdivasaṃ yassa āraññakassa vihārassa gocaragāme taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tamhā vihārā aññatra vasanto nissaggiyaṃ phuseti yojanā.
61.Tiṇṇamaññataraṃ vatthanti: one of the three robes. Ghareti: in an inhabited house. Nidahitvāti: having deposited. Tena—without that robe—more than six nights, the construction is that a nissaggiya is incurred by one dwelling elsewhere than that monastery in the village that is the resort for alms of that forest dwelling monastery where that robe was deposited.
62.Saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃjānaṃjānanto.
62.Saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ jānaṃ: knowing that a gain has been dedicated to the Sangha.
63.Payogeti pariṇāmanapayoge.Sabbatthāti pārājikādīsu sabbasikkhāpadesu.Appanāvāraparihānīti parivāre paṭhamaṃ vuttakatthapaññattivārassa parihāpanaṃ, idha avacananti attho, tassa vārassa parivāre sabbapaṭhamattā paṭhamaṃ vattabbabhāvepi tattha vattabbaṃ pacchā gaṇhitukāmena mayā taṃ ṭhapetvā paṭhamaṃ āpattidassanatthaṃ tadanantaro katāpattivāro paṭhamaṃ vuttoti adhippāyo.
63.Payogeti: in the act of dedicating. Sabbatthāti: in all trainings, beginning with the pārājikas. Appanāvāraparihānīti: the omission of the initial statement on the topic as stated in the Parivara, here means not saying it; the intention is that although that topic should have been stated first in the Parivara, because I wanted to address the offenses first and then include what should be said later, I set that aside and stated the section on incurred offenses immediately after that.
Pattavaggavaṇṇanā tatiyā.
The third section, Pattavagga, is complete.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the detailed explanation in Uttare
Tiṃsanissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the thirty nissaggiya rules is complete.
64.Manussuttaridhammeti uttarimanussadhamme.Abhūtasmiṃ uttarimanussadhammesamullapiteparājayopārājikāpatti.
64.Manussuttaridhammeti: in a superhuman state. Abhūtasmiṃ uttarimanussadhamme samullapite parājayo: if he declares a non-existent superhuman state, a parajika offence.
65.Amūlantimavatthunāamūlakena pārājikena dhammena bhikkhuṃ codanāyagarusaṅghādiseso hotīti yojanā.Pariyāyavacaneti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasatī’’tiādinā (pari. 287) pariyāyena kathane.Ñāteti yassa katheti, tasmiṃ vacanānantarameva ñāte.
65.Amūlantimavatthunā—with an unfounded matter—by accusing a bhikkhu with an unfounded pārājika offence, garu—a saṅghādisesa results—is the construction. Pariyāyavacaneti: in speaking indirectly, such as ‘‘he dwells in your monastery’’ etc. (pari. 287). Ñāteti: known immediately after the statement to whom it is said.
66.Noce pana vijānātīti atha taṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ vacanānantarameva sace na jānāti.Samudāhaṭanti kathitaṃ.
66.No ce pana vijānātīti: but if he does not know immediately after that statement that was said indirectly. Samudāhaṭanti: said.
67.Omasato bhikkhussa duve āpattiyo vuttā. Upasampannaṃ omasato pācitti siyā.Itaraṃanupasampannaṃ omasato dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
67.Two offences are stated for touching a bhikkhu with lust. If he touches one who is ordained, it may be a pacittiya. Itaraṃ—if he touches one who is not ordained—it may be a dukkata—is the construction.
68.Pesuññaharaṇepi dve āpattiyo honti.
68.There are two offenses in tale-bearing as well.
69.Payogeti padaso dhammaṃ vācentassa vacanakiriyārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva padādīnaṃ parisamāpanaṃ, etthantare akkharuccāraṇapayoge dukkaṭaṃ. Padānaṃ parisamattiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.
69.Payogeti: from the start of the act of verbally reciting the Dhamma word by word until the completion of the words etc.; in this interval, a dukkata for the act of uttering the syllables. At the completion of the words, a pacittiya.
70.‘‘Tirattā anupasampannasahaseyyāyā’’ti padacchedo. Anupasampannena sahaseyyāanupasampannasahaseyyā,tāya. Tirattā uttariṃ anupasampannasahaseyyāyāti yojanā.Payogeti sayanatthāya seyyāpaññāpanakāyāvajjanādipubbapayoge.Panneti kāyapasāraṇalakkhaṇena sayanena nipanne.
70.‘‘Tirattā anupasampannasahaseyyāyā’’ti is the word division. Anupasampannena sahaseyyā anupasampannasahaseyyā: sleeping together with one who is not ordained; tāya: by that. Tirattā uttariṃ anupasampannasahaseyyāyāti: sleeping together with one who is not ordained for more than three nights—is the construction. Payogeti: in the preliminary effort of arranging a bed for the purpose of sleeping etc. Panneti: having lain down in the act of lying down, characterized by stretching out the body.
71.Yo pana bhikkhu ekarattiyaṃmātugāmena sahaseyyaṃkappeti. Dukkaṭādayoti ‘‘payoge dukkaṭaṃ, nipanne pācittiya’’nti yathāvuttadveāpattiyo āpajjatīti yojanā.
71.Yo pana bhikkhu eka rattiyaṃ mātugāmena sahaseyyaṃ kappeti. Dukkaṭādayoti: whatever bhikkhu arranges a shared sleeping place with a woman for one night. Dukkaṭādayoti: ‘‘in the effort, a dukkata; having lain down, a pacittiya’’; thus, he incurs two offenses as stated above.
72.Payogeti yathāvuttalakkhaṇapayoge.
72.Payogeti: in the effort having the characteristics as stated above.
73.Anupasampanneti samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Anupasampannassa santike bhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ yo saceārocetīti yojanā.Dukkaṭādayoti yassa āroceti, so nappaṭivijānāti, dukkaṭaṃ, paṭivijānāti, pācittiyanti evaṃ dve āpattiyo tassa honti.
73.Anupasampanneti: this is a locative in the sense of proximity. Yo sace ārocetī: whatever bhikkhu declares a superhuman state to one who is not ordained, being near to one who is not ordained—is the construction. Dukkaṭādayoti: if the one to whom he declares does not understand, a dukkata; if he understands, a pacittiya; thus, he incurs two offenses.
74.Aññatoaññassa upasampannassa duṭṭhullassa āpattiṃanupasampanneanupasampannassa santikevadaṃvadantoti yojanā.Payogeti ārambhato paṭṭhāya pubbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ āgacchati dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Ārocite pācitti siyāti yojanā.
74.Aññato—of another—of an ordained person, an offense that is serious, anupasampanne—near to one who is not ordained—vadaṃ—speaking—is the construction. Payogeti: from the start, a dukkata occurs in the preliminary effort; having declared it, a pacittiya results—is the construction.
75.Payogeti ‘‘akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇissāmī’’ti kudāla pariyesanādisabbapayogeti.
75.Payogeti: in all the efforts, beginning with seeking a hoe with the thought, ‘‘I will dig in unallowable ground.’’
Musāvādavaggavaṇṇanā paṭhamā.
The first section, Musāvadavagga, is complete.
76.Pātentoti vikopento.Tassāti bhūtagāmassa.Pāteti vikopane.
76.Pātentoti: destroying. Tassāti: of that plant life. Pāteti: in destroying.
77.Aññavādakavihesakānaṃ ekayoganiddiṭṭhattā tattha vuttanayeneva vihesake ca ñātuṃ sakkāti tattha visuṃ āpattibhedo na vutto.
77.Because of the single designation of accusers and harassers, it should be known regarding the harasser in the same way as stated there, thus, a specific distinction of offenses is not stated there.
78.Paranti aññaṃ saṅghena sammatasenāsanapaññāpakādikaṃ upasampannaṃ.Ujjhāpentoti tassa ayasaṃ uppādetukāmatāya bhikkhūhi avajānāpetuṃ ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo idaṃ nāma karotī’’tiādīni vatvā avaññāya olokāpento, lāmakato vā cintāpento.Payogeti ujjhāpanatthāya tassa avaṇṇabhaṇanādike pubbapayoge.
78.Paranti: another, an ordained person who is one who announces the boundaries of a residence permitted by the Sangha etc. Ujjhāpentoti: wanting to cause loss of respect for him, causing him to be despised by the bhikkhus, saying such things as ‘‘so and so is doing such and such according to his desire,’’ looking down on him with contempt, or thinking of him as lowly. Payogeti: in the preliminary effort for the purpose of causing contempt, such as speaking disparagingly of him.
83.Saṅghike vihāre pubbūpagataṃ bhikkhuṃjānaṃjānanto anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeti, tassevaṃ seyyaṃkappayatoti yojanā.Payogedukkaṭādayoti ettha aluttasamāso.Ādi-saddena seyyākappane pācittiyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
83.Saṅghike vihāre pubbūpagataṃ bhikkhuṃ jānaṃ: knowing a bhikkhu has previously arrived in a monastery belonging to the Sangha, anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeti, tassevaṃ seyyaṃ kappayato: he arranges a sleeping place without deferring to him; of him thus arranging a sleeping place—is the construction. Payogedukkaṭādayo: here the compound has elided (vowel). By the word ādi- is included the pacittiya for arranging a sleeping place.
84.Payogeti ‘‘nikkaḍḍhatha ima’’ntiādike āṇattike vā ‘‘yāhi yāhī’’tiādike vācasike vā hatthena tassa aṅgaparāmasanādivasena kate kāyike vā nikkaḍḍhanapayoge.Sesanti pācittiyaṃ.
84.Payogeti: in the effort of dragging out, whether by ordering, such as ‘‘drag this one out’’, or verbally, such as ‘‘go away, go away’’, or physically, by touching his limbs with the hand etc. Sesanti: the pacittiya.
85.‘‘Vehāsakuṭiyā uparī’’ti padacchedo.Āhaccapādaketi ettha ‘‘mañce vā pīṭhe vā’’ti seso.Sīdanti nisīdanto.Dukkaṭādayoti payoge dukkaṭaṃ, nipajjāya pācittiyanti imā āpattiyo phuseti attho.
85.‘‘Vehāsakuṭiyā uparī’’ti is a word division. Āhaccapādaketi: here ‘‘on a couch or a chair’’ is implied. Sīdanti: sitting down. Dukkaṭādayoti: in the effort, a dukkata; in lying down, a pacittiya; these offenses are incurred—is the meaning.
86.Assa pajjassa paṭhamapādaṃ dasakkharapādakaṃ chandovicitiyaṃ vuttagāthā, ‘‘gāthāchando atītadvaya’’nti iminā chandovicitilakkhaṇena gāthāchandattāadhiṭṭhitvā dvattipariyāyeti ettha akkharadvayaṃ adhikaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Payogeti adhiṭṭhānapayoge.Adhiṭṭhiteti dvattipariyāyānaṃ upari adhiṭṭhāne kate.
86.The first line of this verse is a line of ten syllables, a verse stated in Chandoviciti; because it is a verse meter according to the definition in Chandoviciti, ‘‘verse meter, two past’’, adhiṭṭhitvā dvattipariyāyeti: here it should be seen that two syllables are stated in excess. Payogeti: in the act of placing over. Adhiṭṭhiteti: when placed over the two or three layers.
87.Payogeti siñcanasiñcāpanapayoge.Sitteti siñcanakiriyapariyosāne.
87.Payogeti: in the effort of watering and having watered. Sitteti: at the completion of the act of watering.
Bhūtagāmavaggavaṇṇanā dutiyā.
The second section, Bhūtagāmavagga, is complete.
88.Dukkaṭaṃ phuseti yojanā. Ovadite pācitti siyāti yojanā.
88.He incurs a dukkata—is the construction. Ovadite pācitti siyāti: if he advises, it may be a pacittiya—is the construction.
89.Vibhāgoyevavibhāgatā.
89.Vibhāgoyeva vibhāgatā: separateness is indeed separation.
90.Aññātikāyabhikkhuniyā aññatra pārivattakā cīvaraṃdentobhikkhuduveāpattiyo phuseti yojanā.Payogeti dānapayoge.
90.Aññātikāya—to a bhikkhuni who is not a relative—a bhikkhu dento—giving—a robe other than in exchange—duve—incurs two—offenses—is the construction. Payogeti: in the act of giving.
93.‘‘Nāvaṃ eka’’nti padacchedo.Payogeti abhiruhaṇapayoge.Dukkaṭādayotiādi-saddena abhiruḷhe pācittiyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
93.‘‘Nāvaṃ eka’’nti is a word division. Payogeti: in the act of boarding. Dukkaṭādayoti: by the word ādi- is included the pacittiya for having boarded.
94.‘‘Duvidhaṃ āpatti’’nti padacchedo.
94.‘‘Duvidhaṃ āpatti’’nti is a word division.
96.Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ raho nisajjaṃ kappento bhikkhu payogedukkaṭādayodvepiāpattiyo phuseti yojanā.
96.Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ raho nisajjaṃ kappento bhikkhu payogedukkaṭādayo dvepi āpattiyo phuseti: a bhikkhu arranging a private sitting place with a bhikkhuni incurs both offenses, dukkata in the effort etc.—is the construction.
Ovādavaggavaṇṇanā tatiyā.
The third section, Ovadavagga, is complete.
97.Taduttarinti tato bhuñjituṃ anuññātaekadivasato uttariṃ dutiyadivasato paṭṭhāya.Anantarassa vaggassāti ovādavaggassa.Navamenāti bhikkhuniyā paripācitapiṇḍapātasikkhāpadena.
97.Taduttarinti: more than that, from the second day onwards, more than the one day permitted for eating. Anantarassa vaggassāti: of the Ovadavagga. Navamenāti: by the training rule regarding alms food cooked by a bhikkhuni.
99.Dvattipatteti dvattipattapūre.Taduttarinti dvattipattapūrato uttariṃ.Payogeti paṭiggahaṇapayoge.
99.Dvattipatteti: two or three bowlfuls. Taduttarinti: more than two or three bowlfuls. Payogeti: in the act of receiving.
101.Abhihaṭṭhunti abhiharitvā.
101.Abhihaṭṭhunti: having brought near.
102.Tassāti abhiharantassa.Piṭaketi vinayapiṭake.
102.Tassāti: of him bringing near. Piṭaketi: in the Vinaya Piṭaka.
103.Dasamepīti ettha ‘‘dasame apī’’ti padacchedo.
103.Dasamepīti: here ‘‘dasame api’’ is the word division.
Bhojanavaggavaṇṇanā catutthā.
The fourth section, Bhojanavagga, is complete.
104.Acelakādinotiādi-saddena ‘‘paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā’’ti (pāci. 270) vutte saṅgaṇhāti.Bhojanādikantiādi-saddena khādanīyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Payogeti sahatthā dānapayoge.
104.Acelakādinoti: by the word ādi- is included what is stated: ‘‘to a wanderer or a female wanderer’’ (pāci. 270). Bhojanādikanti: by the word ādi- is included what is edible. Payogeti: in the act of giving with one’s own hand.
105.Dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vākiñci āmisaṃ.Payogeti uyyojanapayoge.Tasminti tasmiṃ bhikkhumhi. Uyyojite pācitti siyāti yojanā.
105.Dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vā—having given or having had given—kiñci āmisaṃ—some delicacy. Payogeti: in the act of urging. Tasminti: regarding that bhikkhu. Uyyojite pācitti siyāti: if he is urged, it may be a pacittiya—is the construction.
109.Ummārātikkameti indakhīlātikkame.
109.Ummārātikkameti: in stepping over a threshold.
110.Taduttarinti tato paricchinnarattipariyantato vā paricchinnabhesajjapariyantato vā uttariṃ.
110.Taduttarinti: more than that, more than the limit of the allotted night or the limit of the allotted medicine.
111.Uyyuttaṃ dassanatthāya gacchanto dve āpattiyo phuseti yojanā.
111.Uyyuttaṃ dassanatthāya gacchanto dve āpattiyo phuseti: in going for the purpose of seeing the army, he incurs two offenses—is the construction.
Acelakavaggavaṇṇanā pañcamā.
The fifth section, Acelakavagga, is complete.
114.Mereyyanti merayaṃ. Niruttinayena a-kārassa e-kāro, ya-kārassa ca dvittaṃ. Meraya-saddapariyāyo vāmereyya-saddo.Munīti bhikkhu.
114.Mereyyanti: meraya. According to the rules of etymology, the a-sound becomes e, and the ya-sound is doubled. Or, mereyya-saddo is a synonym for meraya-saddo. Munīti: bhikkhu.
115.‘‘Bhikkhu aṅgulipatodenā’’ti padacchedo.Payogeti hāsāpanapayoge.Tassāti hāsāpentassa.
115.‘‘Bhikkhu aṅgulipatodenā’’ti is the word division. Payogeti: in the act of causing laughter. Tassāti: of him causing laughter.
116.Gopphakāheṭṭhāudake dukkaṭaṃ. Gopphakato upariuparigopphakaṃ,udakaṃ, tasmiṃ, gopphakato adhikappamāṇe udaketi attho.
116.Gopphakā heṭṭhā—below the ankle—in the water, a dukkata. Gopphakato upari uparigopphakaṃ: above the ankle; udakaṃ, tasmiṃ: in that water which is above the ankle, meaning in water the measure of which is more than the ankle.
117.Anādariyanti puggalānādariyaṃ, dhammānādariyaṃ vā.Payogeti anādariyavasena pavatte kāyapayoge vā vacīpayoge vā.Kateanādariye.
117.Anādariyanti: disrespect for persons or disrespect for the Dhamma. Payogeti: in the bodily effort or verbal effort occurring in the way of disrespect. Kate—in the act of disrespect.
118.Payogeti bhiṃsāpanapayoge.
118.Payogeti: in the act of frightening.
119.Jotinti aggiṃ.Samādahitvānāti jāletvā.‘‘Visibbento’’ti iminā phalūpacārena kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Visibbanakiriyā hi samādahanakiriyāya phalanti visibbanakiriyāvohārena samādahanakiriyāva. Tasmāvisibbentoti ettha samādahantoti attho.Payogeti samādahanasamādahāpanapayoge.Visīviteti vuttanayena samādahiteti attho.
119.Jotinti: fire. Samādahitvānāti: having lit. ‘‘Visibbento’’ti: by this result is stated the cause. For the act of extinguishing is the result of the act of lighting; thus, by the expression ‘act of extinguishing’ is meant the act of lighting. Therefore, visibbentoti here means samādahanto: lighting. Payogeti: in the act of lighting and having lit. Visīviteti: in the act of extinguishing, meaning having lit in the way stated above.
120.Payogeti cuṇṇamattikābhisaṅkharaṇādisabbapayoge.Itaranti pācittiyaṃ.
120.Payogeti: in all efforts, beginning with mixing powder and clay. Itaranti: the pacittiya.
121.Tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānanti kaṃsanīlapattanīlakaddamasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ.Ekaṃaññataraṃanādiyaadatvā.Cīvaranti navacīvaraṃ.
121.Tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānanti: of the three means of discoloring—namely, kamsa dye, nila dye, and mud. Ekaṃ—one—aññataraṃ—another—anādiya—without having given. Cīvaranti: a new robe.
122.Natthi etassa uddhāranti anuddhāro, taṃ anuddhāranti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena rassattaṃ, akatapaccuddhāranti attho.
122.Natthi etassa uddhāranti anuddhāro: there is no removal of this, therefore it is unremovable; in saying taṃ anuddhāranti, it is shortened due to the needs of the verse, meaning without making a return.
123.Apanidhentoti apanetvā nidhento nikkhipento.Pattādikantiādi-saddena cīvaranisīdanasūcigharakāyabandhanānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Payogeti apanidhānapayoge.Tasmiṃpattādike pañcavidhe parikkhāre. Apanihitesesāpācittiyāpatti siyāti yojanā.
123.Apanidhentoti: removing and depositing, putting down. Pattādikanti: by the word ādi- is included the taking of the robe, sitting cloth, needle case, and waistband. Payogeti: in the act of removing and depositing. Tasmiṃ—in that—pattādike—the five kinds of requisites. Apanihite sesā pācittiyāpatti siyāti: if they are removed and deposited, the remaining offense may be a pacittiya—is the construction.
Surāpānavaggavaṇṇanā chaṭṭhā.
The sixth section, Surāpānavagga, is complete.
124.Tapodhanoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasaṅkhātaṃ tapodhanamassāti tapodhano, bhikkhu.
124.Tapodhanoti: tapodhano, bhikkhu: one whose wealth is austerity, meaning the austerity consisting of the virtue of the Patimokkha restraint.
125.Tasmiṃopāte.
125.Tasmiṃ: in that pit.
126.Manussaviggahomanussasarīro.Tiracchānagatonāgo vā supaṇṇo vā.Tassaopātakhaṇakassa.
126.Manussaviggaho—the body of a human; Tiracchānagato—gone to an animal—a nāga or a supaṇṇa. Tassa—of that—opātakhaṇakassa—digger of the pit.
127.Paṭubuddhināti sabbesu ñeyyadhammesu nipunañāṇena bhagavatā.
127.Paṭubuddhinā: By the Buddha, who has acute wisdom regarding all knowable phenomena.
128.Payogeti paribhogatthāya gahaṇādike payoge.Tassāti bhikkhussa.
128.Payoge: In the application, such as taking something for use. Tassā: Of that bhikkhu.
129.Ukkoṭentoti uccālento yathāṭhāne ṭhātuṃ adento.Payogeti ukkoṭanapayoge. Ukkoṭite pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
129.Ukkoṭento: Lifting up, not allowing to stay in its place. Payoge: In the application of lifting up. The meaning is: there is a pācittiya when it is lifted up.
130.Duṭṭhullaṃ vajjakanti saṅghādisesādike. Ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati iti dīpitanti yojanā.
130.Duṭṭhullaṃ vajjaka: An offense entailing a saṅghādisesa, etc. The meaning is: it is shown that one incurs one pācittiya offense.
131.Payogeti gaṇapariyesanādipayoge.Dukkaṭaṃ patto siyādukkaṭāpattiṃ āpanno bhaveyyāti attho.Sesāti pācittiyāpatti upasampādite siyā. Gāthābandhavasena upasaggalopo.
131.Payoge: In the application of seeking a group, etc. Dukkaṭaṃ patto siyā: One would be subject to a dukkata offense, that is the meaning. Sesā: The remaining pācittiya offenses would occur when one is ordained. There is elision of the upasagga due to the verse form.
132-3.Jānaṃ theyyasatthena saha saṃvidhāya maggaṃ paṭipajjato ca tatheva mātugāmena saha saṃvidhāya maggaṃ paṭipajjato cāti yojanā.Payogeti saṃvidhāya gantuṃ paṭipucchādikaraṇapayoge.Paṭipanneti maggapaṭipanne.Anantaranti addhayojanagāmantarātikkamanānantaraṃ.
132-3.The meaning is: and knowingly conspiring with a thief and setting out on a journey, and likewise, conspiring with a woman and setting out on a journey. Payoge: In the application of making inquiries to set out in conspiracy. Paṭipanne: When one has set out on the journey. Anantaraṃ: Immediately after passing the boundary between the journey's stage and the village.
134.Ñattiyā osāne dukkaṭaṃ phuseti yojanā.
134.At the end of the motion, one touches a dukkata, is the meaning.
135.Akatānudhammenātianudhammovuccati āpattiyā adassane vā appaṭikamme vā pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge vā dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena ukkhittakassa anulomavattaṃ disvā katvā osāraṇā, so osāraṇasaṅkhāto anudhammo yassa na kato, ayaṃ akatānudhammo nāma, tādisena bhikkhunā saddhinti attho.Sambhuñjantoti āmisasambhogaṃ karonto bhikkhu.Payogeti bhuñjituṃ āmisapaṭiggahaṇādipayoge.Bhutteti sambhutte, ubhayasambhoge, tadaññatare vā kateti attho.
135.Akatānudhammenā: Anudhammo means the removal of one expelled by the Dhamma, by the Vinaya, by the Teacher's instruction, for not seeing an offense, or for not making amends, or for not relinquishing a bad view, after seeing and doing what is in accordance with him. One by whom that anudhamma consisting of removal has not been done, that is called "akatānudhammo," the meaning is: with such a bhikkhu. Sambhuñjanto: A bhikkhu who partakes of material things. Payoge: In the application of receiving alms to partake of. Bhutte: When partaken, in both partakings, or one of them has been done, that is the meaning.
136.Upalāpentoti pattacīvarauddesaparipucchanādivasena saṅgaṇhanto.Payogeti upalāpanapayoge.
136.Upalāpento: Flattering by way of asking about or inquiring about the bowl and robe, etc. Payoge: In the application of flattery.
Sappāṇakavaggavaṇṇanā sattamā.
The seventh Sappāṇakavagga Commentary.
137.Sahadhammikanti karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ, pañcahi sahadhammikehi sikkhitabbattā, tesaṃ vā santakattā ‘‘sahadhammika’’nti laddhanāmena buddhapaññattena sikkhāpadena vuccamānassāti attho.Bhaṇatoti ‘‘bhikkhussā’’ti iminā samānādhikaraṇaṃ.
137.Sahadhammika: Is a usage in the sense of instrumentality because it is to be trained in by five co-religious principles, or because they belong to them, the meaning is: by the training rule promulgated by the Buddha, named "sahadhammika". Bhaṇato: Is in apposition with "bhikkhussa".
138.Vivaṇṇentoti ‘‘kiṃ panimehi khuddānukhuddakehi sikkhāpadehi uddiṭṭhehī’’tiādinā garahanto.Payogeti ‘‘kiṃ imehī’’tiādinā garahaṇavasena pavatte vacīpayoge.Vivaṇṇitegarahite.
138.Vivaṇṇento: Criticizing by saying, "What is the use of these minor training rules that have been recited?" etc. Payoge: In the verbal application that occurs by way of criticizing, saying "What is the use of these?" etc. Vivaṇṇite: When criticized.
139.Mohentoti ‘‘idāneva kho ahaṃ, āvuso, jānāmī’’tiādinā attano ajānanattena āpannabhāvaṃ dīpetvā bhikkhuṃ mohento, vañcentoti attho.Moheti mohāropanakamme.Aropitekate.
139.Mohento: Deceiving a bhikkhu by revealing one's own state of not knowing after incurring an offense by saying, "Only now, friend, do I know," etc., that is, deceiving. Mohe: In the act of imposing delusion. Aropite: When imposed.
140.Bhikkhussa kupito pahāraṃ dento phuseti yojanā.Payogeti daṇḍādānādipayoge.
140.The meaning is: A bhikkhu, being angry, strikes someone, he incurs an offense. Payoge: In the application of taking a stick, etc.
141.Payogeti uggiraṇapayoge.Uggiriteti uccārite.
141.Payoge: In the application of uttering. Uggirite: When uttered.
142.Amūlenevāti diṭṭhādimūlavirahiteneva.Yogeti okāsakārāpanādipayoge.Uddhaṃsiteti codite.
142.Amūleneva: Without any basis of seeing, etc. Yoge: In the application of creating opportunity, etc. Uddhaṃsite: When accused.
143.Kukkuccaṃ janayantoti ‘‘ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññe upasampanno’’tiādinā kukkuccaṃ upadahanto.Yogeti kukkuccuppādanapayoge.Uppāditeti kukkucce uppādite.
143.Kukkuccaṃ janayanto: Causing remorse by saying, "I think you were ordained when you were under twenty years old," etc. Yoge: In the application of causing remorse. Uppādite: When remorse is caused.
144.‘‘Tiṭṭhanto upassuti’’nti padacchedo. Sutiyā samīpaṃupassuti,savanūpacāreti attho.
144.The word division is "Tiṭṭhanto upassuti". Upassuti, near to hearing, that is, near to the place of hearing.
145.Dhammikānaṃ tu kammānanti dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena katānaṃ apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ.Tato punāti chandadānato pacchā.Khīyanadhammanti attano adhippetabhāvavibhāvanamantanaṃ.Dve phuse dukkaṭādayoti khīyanadhammāpajjanapayoge dukkaṭaṃ, khīyanadhamme āpanne pācittiyanti evaṃ dukkaṭādayo dve āpattiyo āpajjeyyāti attho.
145.Dhammikānaṃ tu kammānaṃ: Of the four acts of lawful procedures done by Dhamma, by Vinaya, by the Teacher's instruction, such as the formal act of announcement. Tato punā: After giving consent. Khīyanadhammaṃ: Uttering a statement expressing one's own dissatisfaction. Dve phuse dukkaṭādayo: In the application of expressing dissatisfaction, there is a dukkata, when dissatisfaction is incurred, there is a pācittiya, thus, the meaning is: one would incur two offenses beginning with dukkata.
146.Saṅghesaṅghamajjhe.Vinicchayeti vatthuto otiṇṇavinicchaye.Niṭṭhaṃ agateti vatthumhi avinicchite, ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kammavācāya vā apariyositāya.
146.Saṅghe: In the midst of the Saṅgha. Vinicchaye: In a decision that has come down regarding the case. Niṭṭhaṃ agate: When the case is undecided, without having completed the formal motion, or without having completed the Kammavācā.
148.Samaggena saṅghenāti samānasaṃvāsakena samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitena saṅghena.
148.Samaggena saṅghena: By the Saṅgha that dwells in the same residence, standing within the same boundary.
Sahadhammikavaggavaṇṇanā aṭṭhamā.
The eighth Sahadhammikavagga Commentary.
150.Aviditohutvāti rañño aviditāgamano hutvā.
150.Avidito hutvā: Having come without the king's knowledge.
152.Ratananti muttādidasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ.Payogeti ratanaggahaṇapayoge.
152.Ratanaṃ: A jewel of various kinds such as pearl, etc. Payoge: In the application of taking a jewel.
153.Vikāleti majjhantikātikkamato paṭṭhāya aruṇe.
153.Vikāle: From after the time of midday until dawn.
155.Aṭṭhidantavisāṇābhinibbattanti aṭṭhidantavisāṇamayaṃ.Payogeti kārāpanapayoge.
155.Aṭṭhidantavisāṇābhinibbattaṃ: Made of bone, tooth, or horn. Payoge: In the application of having it made.
156.Tasmiṃ mañcādimhikārāpite sesāpācittiyāpatti siyāti yojanā.
156.The meaning is: When it is made, on that bed, etc., there would be the remaining pācittiya offenses.
Ratanavaggavaṇṇanā navamā.
The ninth Ratanavagga Commentary.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus, in the Uttara Līnatthapakāsanī,
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Pācittiyakathā Commentary is concluded.
159.Catūsu pāṭidesanīyesupi avisesena ādiccabandhunā buddhena dvidhā āpatti niddiṭṭhāti yojanā.
159.The meaning is: Among the four pāṭidesanīya rules, without distinction, two kinds of offenses have been specified by the Buddha, the kinsman of the sun.
160.Sabbatthāti sabbesu catūsu.
160.Sabbatthā: In all four.
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Pāṭidesanīyakathā Commentary.
161.Sekhiyakathā uttānatthāyeva.
161.The Sekhiyakathā is indeed straightforward in meaning.
Sekhiyakathāvaṇṇanā.
The Sekhiyakathā Commentary.
162.Parivāre paṭhamaṃ dassitasoḷasavārappabhede mahāvibhaṅge ‘‘paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādippabhedo (pari. 1) katthapaññattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto kati āpattiyo āpajjatī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 157) katāpattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ vipattīnaṃ kati vipattiyo bhajantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 182) vipattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ katihi āpattikkhandhehi saṅgahitā’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 182) saṅgahavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo channaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhānānaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhahantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 184) samuṭṭhānavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ katamaṃ adhikaraṇa’’ntiādippabhedo (pari. 185) adhikaraṇavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katihi samathehi sammantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 186) samathavāro, tadanantaro imehi sattahi vārehi misso aṭṭhamo samuccayavāroti imesu aṭṭhasu vāresu ādibhūte katthapaññattināmadheyye appanāvāre saṅgahetabbānaṃ nidānādisattarasalakkhaṇānaṃ ubhayavibhaṅgasādhāraṇato upari vakkhamānattā taṃ vāraṃ ṭhapetvā tadanantaraṃ asādhāraṇaṃ katāpattivāraṃ sekhiyāvasānaṃ pāḷikkamānurūpaṃ dassetvā tadanantarā vipattivārādayo cha vārā ubhayavibhaṅgasādhāraṇato vakkhamānāti katvā tepi ṭhapetvā ime paccayasaddena ayojetvā dassitā aṭṭheva vārā, puna ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanapaccayā pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā (pari. 188) paccaya-saddaṃ yojetvā dassitā apare aṭṭha vārā yojitāti tatthāpi dutiyaṃ katāpattipaccayavāraṃ iminā katāpattivārena ekaparicchedaṃ katvā dassetumāha‘‘paññattā’’tiādi.Paṭisevanapaccayāti paṭisevanahetunā.
162.In the Parivāra, in the Mahāvibhaṅga with its sixteen modes shown first, the katthapaññattivāra (Parivāra 1) is the mode beginning with "Where was the first pārājika rule promulgated?", the katāpattivāra (Parivāra 157) is the mode beginning with "In indulging in sexual intercourse, how many offenses does one incur?", the vipattivāra (Parivāra 182) is the mode beginning with "In indulging in sexual intercourse, how many of the four kinds of misfortune are associated with the offenses?", the saṅgahavāra (Parivāra 182) is the mode beginning with "In indulging in sexual intercourse, the offenses are included by how many of the seven groups of offenses?", the samuṭṭhānavāra (Parivāra 184) is the mode beginning with "In indulging in sexual intercourse, the offenses arise from how many of the six sources of arising?", the adhikaraṇavāra (Parivāra 185) is the mode beginning with "In indulging in sexual intercourse, which of the four legal questions are the offenses?", the samathavāra (Parivāra 186) is the mode beginning with "In indulging in sexual intercourse, the offenses are settled by how many of the seven settlements?", the eighth samuccayavāra, mixed with these seven modes immediately after that, among these eight modes, since the seventeen characteristics of the nidāna, etc., which are to be included in the appanāvāra, which is primary and named katthapaññatti, will be stated above as common to both Vibhaṅgas, having set aside that mode, showing the uncommon katāpattivāra next to that, in accordance with the order of the Pāḷi up to the end of the Sekhiya rules, having set aside the six modes beginning with the vipattivāra next to that, because they will be stated as common to both Vibhaṅgas, these eight modes shown by connecting with the word paccaya, again, the other eight modes shown by connecting the word paccaya beginning with "Where was the pārājika rule promulgated on account of indulging in sexual intercourse?" (Parivāra 188) are connected, in that connection too, in order to show the second katāpattipaccayavāra by making one section with this katāpattivāra, he says ‘‘paññattā’’ etc. Paṭisevanapaccayā: By the cause of indulging.
163.Allokāsappavesaneti jīvamānasarīre tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ magge allokāsappavesane. Mate akkhāyite vāpi-saddena yebhuyyaakkhāyite pavesane pavesananimittaṃmethunaṃdhammaṃpaṭisevantobhikkhu pārājikaṃ phuseti sambandho.
163.Allokāsappavesane: In introducing into the cavity in one of the three paths in a living body. In a dead body or when it has been acknowledged, or with the word pi, when it has been mostly acknowledged, in introducing, the connection is: paṭisevanto bhikkhu incurs a pārājika for methunaṃ dhammaṃ with the cause of introducing.
164.Tathā yebhuyyakkhāyite, upaḍḍhakkhāyite ca methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto bhikkhu thullaccayaṃ phuseti yojanā. Vaṭṭakate mukhe dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Jatumaṭṭhaketi bhikkhuniyā jatumaṭṭhake dinne pācitti vuttāti sambandho.
164.Likewise, when it has been mostly acknowledged, and when it has been partly acknowledged, the meaning is: a bhikkhu incurring sexual intercourse incurs a thullaccaya offense. The connection is: it has been said that there is a dukkata in the vaṭṭakate mukhe. The connection is: it has been said that there is a pācittiya when jatumaṭṭhake is given to a bhikkhunī.
166.Avassutassāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintassa.Posassāti gahaṇakiriyāsambandhe sāmivacanaṃ.Bhikkhuniyāti attasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Attano’’ti seso. Avassutena posena attano adhakkhakādigahaṇaṃ sādiyantiyā tathā avassutāya bhikkhuniyā pārājikanti yojanā.
166.Avassutassā: Of one drenched with lustful passion by bodily contact. Posassā: A word expressing ownership in relation to the act of taking. Bhikkhuniyā: A word expressing ownership in relation to oneself. "Of oneself" is the remainder. The meaning is: there is a pārājika for a bhikkhunī who approves the taking of her own adhakkhakā by a lustful man, and likewise, for a lustful bhikkhunī.
167.Kāyenāti attano kāyena.Kāyanti mātugāmassa kāyaṃ.Phusatoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena phusato.Kāyena kāyabaddhanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
167.Kāyenā: With his own body. Kāyaṃ: The body of a woman. Phusato: For one touching with lustful passion by bodily contact. Kāyena kāyabaddhaṃ: Here too, this is the method.
168.Kāyena paṭibaddhenāti attano kāyapaṭibaddhena.Paṭibaddhanti itthiyā kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ phusantassa dukkaṭaṃ.Tassabhikkhussa.
168.Kāyena paṭibaddhenā: With what is attached to his own body. Paṭibaddhaṃ: There is a dukkata for one touching what is attached to the body of a woman. Tassa: Of that bhikkhu.
‘‘Mahāvibhaṅgasaṅgaho niṭṭhito’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu soḷasavārasaṅgahe mahāvibhaṅge katāpattivāroyevettha vutto, na itare vārāti? Saccaṃ, avayave pana samudāyopacārena vuttaṃ. Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇānaṃ mahāvibhaṅge gatānaṃ sabbāpattipabhedānaṃ dassanopacārabhūto katāpattivāro dassitoti taṃdassanena appadhānā itarepi vārā upacārato dassitā hontīti ca tathā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
Why is it said that "The Mahāvibhaṅga Saṅgaha is concluded"? Indeed, in the sixteen-mode Saṅgaha of the Mahāvibhaṅga, only the katāpattivāra has been stated, not the other modes? It is true, but it is said by superimposing the whole on a part. It should be understood that because the katāpattivāra, which is the occasion for showing all the classes of offenses that have gone in the Mahāvibhaṅga as common and uncommon, has been shown, therefore the other minor modes are also shown by implication, and thus it is said.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus, in the Uttara Līnatthapakāsanī,
Mahāvibhaṅgasaṅgahavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Mahāvibhaṅga Saṅgaha Commentary is concluded.
Bhikkhunivibhaṅgo
Bhikkhunivibhaṅga
170.Vinayassa vinicchaye bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavatthāyāti bhikkhunīnaṃ pāṭavassāpi tadadhīnattā padhānadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Atha vā dassanaliṅgantarasādhāraṇatte icchite pulliṅgena, napuṃsakaliṅgena vā niddeso saddasatthānuyogatoti‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti pulliṅgena vuttaṃ.
170.Vinayassa vinicchaye bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavatthāyā: Because the competence of the bhikkhunīs is also dependent on that, it is said by way of showing the principal. Or else, because gender-neutral designation is desired in the expression showing a different gender, the word ‘‘bhikkhūna’’ is stated in the masculine gender because it is in accordance with the science of grammar.
171.Nandantīsādiyantī.
171.Nandantī: Approving.
172.Tisso āpattiyo phuseti yojanā. Jāṇussa uddhaṃ, akkhakassa adho gahaṇaṃ sādiyantiyā tassā pārājikanti yojanā.
172.The meaning is: one incurs three offenses. The meaning is: there is a pārājika for her when she approves the taking upwards from the knee and downwards from the collarbone.
173.Kāyapaṭibaddhe vā gahaṇaṃ sādiyantiyā dukkaṭaṃ.
173.There is a dukkata for her when she approves the taking on what is attached to the body.
174.Vajjanti aññissā bhikkhuniyā pārājikāpattiṃ.
174.Vajjaṃ: A pārājika offense of another bhikkhunī.
176.Taṃladdhinti ukkhittassa yaṃ laddhiṃ attano rocesi, taṃ laddhiṃ na nissajjantīti yojanā.
176.Taṃ laddhiṃ: Not relinquishing that view, that is, the view of one expelled which she approves of.
178.‘‘Idha āgacchā’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Vuttā āgacchatī’’ti padacchedo.
178.The word division is "Idha āgacchā". The word division is "Vuttā āgacchatī".
179.Hatthapāsappavesaneti hatthapāsūpagamane.‘‘Hatthagatappavesane’’ti vā pāṭho, soyeva attho.
179.Hatthapāsappavesane: In approaching within hand's reach. Or, the reading is ‘‘Hatthagatappavesane’’, that is the meaning.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā bhikkhunivibhaṅge
Thus, in the Uttara Līnatthapakāsanī, in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga,
Pārājikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Pārājikakathā Commentary is concluded.
180.Ekassāti attano attano aṭṭakārassa vā.Ārocaneti vattabbassa vohārikānaṃ nivedane.
180.Ekassā: Of one's own, or of one who is in the same situation. Ārocane: In informing those who should be told, those who are capable of understanding.
181.Dutiyārocaneti dutiyassa, dutiyaṃ evaṃ ārocane.
181.Dutiyārocane: In informing the second one, the second time in this way.
182.Dvīhīti dvīhi kammavācāhi.Kammavācosāneti kammavācāosāne.
182.Dvīhī: By two kammavācās. Kammavācosāne: At the conclusion of the kammavācā.
183.Parikkhepe atikkanteti attano gāmato gantvā itaraṃ gāmaṃ pavisantiyā paṭhamena pādena tassa gāmassa parikkhepe atikkante, paṭhamapāde parikkhepaṃ atikkametvā antogāmasaṅkhepaṃ gateti attho.
183.Parikkhepe atikkante: When she goes from her own village and enters another village, when the boundary of that village is crossed by the first foot, the meaning is: having crossed the boundary with the first foot, she has entered within the village enclosure.
184.Dutiyenāti gāmaparikkhepato bahi ṭhitena dutiyapādena.Atikkanteti tasmiṃ gāmaparikkhepe atikkante, tasmiṃ pāde antogāmaṃ pavesiteti attho. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
184.Dutiyenā: By the second foot, standing outside the village boundary. Atikkante: When that village boundary is crossed, the meaning is: that foot has been placed inside the village. The rest is straightforward in meaning.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā bhikkhunivibhaṅge
Thus, in the Uttara Līnatthapakāsanī, in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga,
Saṅghādisesakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Saṅghādisesakathā Commentary is concluded.
193.Iha bhikkhunī pattasannicayaṃ karontī hoti, sā ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃyeva phuseti yojanā.
193.Here, a bhikkhunī amasses bowls, she incurs only one nissaggiya pācittiya, is the meaning.
194.Akālacīvaraṃ kālacīvaraṃkatvā bhājāpentiyāti yojanā.Payogeti bhājanapayoge.
194.The meaning is: making non-seasonal robes into seasonal robes, she distributes them. Payoge: In the application of distributing.
195.Chinneti acchinne.
195.Chinne: Uncut.
196.Tato paranti tato paṭhamato aññaṃ.
196.Tato paraṃ: Other than that first one.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā bhikkhunivibhaṅge
Thus, in the Uttara Līnatthapakāsanī, in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga,
Nissaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Nissaggiyakathā Commentary is concluded.
199.Lasuṇaṃ khādati ce,dveāpattiyo phuṭāti yojanā.
199. If she eats garlic, the explanation is that two offenses are incurred.
200.Payogeti saṃhārāpanapayoge.Saṃhaṭeti attanā saṃhaṭe, parena saṃharāpite ca āpattipācittihoti.
200. Payoge means in the effort of putting together and taking apart. Saṃhaṭe means if she puts it together herself, or causes another to put it together, there is an offense of pācitti.
201.Kateti talaghāte kate.
201. Kate means when a slap with the palm of the hand is done.
202.Jatunā maṭṭhakanti jatunā kataṃ maṭṭhadaṇḍakaṃ. ‘‘Dukkaṭaṃ ādinne’’ti padacchedo.
202. Jatunā maṭṭhaka means a walking stick made of lac. "Dukkaṭaṃ ādinne" is a word division.
204.Bhuñjamānassa bhikkhussa hatthapāseti yojanā.Hitvāhatthapāsaṃ.
204. The explanation is that it extends to the hand-span of a monk who is eating. Hitvā means outside the hand-span.
205.Viññāpetvāti antamaso mātarampi yācitvā. Ajjhohāre pācittiṃ dīpayeti yojanā.
205. Viññāpetvā means requesting even from her own mother. The explanation indicates a pācitti for consuming it.
206.Uccārādintiādi-saddena vighāsasaṅkāramuttānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
206. Uccārādi means, with the word ādi, the inclusion of taking leftovers and thrown-away food.
Lasuṇavaggavaṇṇanā paṭhamā.
The First Chapter on Garlic is Concluded.
209.Idhaimasmiṃ rattandhakāravagge. Paṭhame, dutiye, tatiye, catutthepi vinicchayo lasuṇavaggassachaṭṭhenasikkhāpadenatulyosadisoti yojanā.
209. Idha means in this chapter on darkness at night. The judgment in the first, second, third, and fourth rules is tulyo, similar to the sixth training rule of the Garlic Chapter.
210.Āsaneti pallaṅke tassokāsabhūte.Sāmike anāpucchāti tasmiṃ kule yaṃ kiñci viññumanussaṃ anāpucchā.
210. Āsane means on a couch, in a place suitable for it. Sāmike anāpucchā means without asking any sensible person in that family.
211.Anovassanti bhittiyā bahi nibbakosabbhantaraṃ.Dutiyātikkameti dutiyena pādena nibbakosassa udakapātaṭṭhānātikkame.
211. Anovassa means outside the wall, in an uncovered open space. Dutiyātikkame means exceeding the place where water falls from the uncovered space with the second foot.
212.Nisīditeti nisinne.
212. Nisīdite means when one is seated.
213.Payogeti ujjhāpanapayoge.
213. Payoge means in the effort of inciting.
214.Nirayādinā attānaṃ vā paraṃ vāabhisappentīsapathaṃ karontī dve phuseti yojanā.Abhisappiteti abhisapite.
214. The explanation is that she incurs two offenses when abhisappentī, cursing, making an oath against oneself or another with hell and so on. Abhisappite means when cursed.
215.Vadhitvāti hatthādīhi paharitvā. ‘‘Karoti eka’’nti padacchedo.
215. Vadhitvā means striking with hands and so on. "Karoti eka" is a word division.
Rattandhakāravaggavaṇṇanā dutiyā.
The Second Chapter on Darkness at Night is Concluded.
216.Naggāti anivatthā vā apārutā vā.Payogeti cuṇṇamattikāabhisaṅkharaṇādipayoge.
216. Naggā means either unclothed or uncovered. Payoge means in the effort of applying powder, clay, and preparations.
217.Pamāṇātikkantanti ‘‘dīghasocatasso vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo’’ti (pāci. 888) vuttapamāṇamatikkantaṃ.Payogeti kārāpanapayoge.
217. Pamāṇātikkanta means exceeding the stated measure, "the length is four spans according to the Sugata's span, the width is two spans" (pāci. 888). Payoge means in the effort of having it made.
218.Visibbetvāti dussibbitaṃ puna sibbanatthāya visibbetvā.
218. Visibbetvā means having unstiched a poorly stitched robe for the purpose of stitching it again.
219.Pañca ahānipañcāhaṃ,pañcāhamevapañcāhikaṃ. Saṅghāṭīnaṃ cārosaṅghāṭicāro,paribhogavasena vā otāpanavasena vā saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ ‘‘ticīvaraṃ, udakasāṭikā, saṃkaccikā’’ti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ parivattanaṃ.Atikkameti bhikkhunī atikkameyya. Assā pana ekāva pācitti paridīpitāti yojanā.
219. Five days are pañcāhaṃ, five days itself is pañcāhikaṃ. Saṅghāṭīnaṃ cāro is saṅghāṭicāro, the changing of these five robes: "ticīvaraṃ, udakasāṭikā, saṃkaccikā," which have obtained the name "saṅghāṭī" due to being assembled in the sense of use or in the sense of spreading out. Atikkame means a bhikkhunī would exceed. But for her, only one pācitti is indicated, so the explanation goes.
220.Saṅkamanīyanti saṅkametabbaṃ. Aññissā santakaṃ anāpucchā gahitaṃ puna dātabbaṃ pañcannaṃ aññataraṃ.
220. Saṅkamanīya means something that should be transferred. One of the five items belonging to another, taken without asking, should be given back.
221.Gaṇacīvaralābhassāti bhikkhunisaṅghena labhitabbacīvarassa.Antarāyaṃ karotīti yathā te dātukāmā na denti, evaṃ parakkamati.
221. Gaṇacīvaralābhassa means regarding a robe to be obtained by the community of bhikkhunīs. Antarāyaṃ karotī means she acts in such a way that they do not give, though they are willing to give.
222.Dhammikanti samaggena saṅghena sannipatitvā kariyamānaṃ.Paṭibāhantīti paṭisedhentī.Paṭibāhitepaṭisedhite.
222. Dhammika means something done by the entire Sangha, having assembled. Paṭibāhantī means preventing. Paṭibāhite means when prevented.
223.Agārikādinotiādi-saddena ‘‘paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā’’ti (pārā. 917) vutte saṅgaṇhāti.Samaṇacīvaranti kappakataṃ nivāsanapārupanupagaṃ.Payogeti dānapayoge.
223. Agārikādino means, with the word ādi, including those stated as "to a wanderer or a female wanderer" (pārā. 917). Samaṇacīvara means a robe that is allowable, not suitable for wearing or using as an outer robe. Payoge means in the effort of giving.
224.Cīvare dubbalāsāyāti dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya ‘‘sace sakkoma, dassāmā’’ti ettakamattaṃ sutvā uppāditāya āsāyāti attho.Kālanti cīvarakālasamayaṃ.Samatikkameti bhikkhunīhi kālacīvare bhājiyamāne ‘‘āgametha, ayye, atthi saṅghassa cīvarapaccāsā’’ti vatvā taṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ samatikkameyya.
224. Cīvare dubbalāsāyā means in expectation of a worn-out robe, meaning with the hope generated from hearing just that much: "if we are able, we will give." Kāla means the time for robes. Samatikkame means when robes are being distributed to the bhikkhunīs at the right time, she exceeds that distribution of robes, saying, "wait, Ayye, there is an expectation of robes for the Sangha."
225.Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāranti samaggena saṅghena kariyamānaṃ kathinassa antarubbhāraṃ.Paṭibāhantiyāti nivārentiyā.
225. Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāra means the removal of the Kathina being done by the entire Sangha. Paṭibāhantiyā means while preventing.
Nhānavaggavaṇṇanā tatiyā.
The Third Chapter on Bathing is Concluded.
226.Tuvaṭṭeyyunti nipajjeyyuṃ.Itaraṃpācittiyaṃ.
226. Tuvaṭṭeyyu means they should lie down. Itaraṃ means pācittiya.
227.Payogeti bhikkhuniyā aphāsukakaraṇapayoge kariyamāne.
227. Payoge means when effort is being made by a bhikkhunī to make someone uncomfortable.
228.Dukkhitanti gilānaṃ.Nupaṭṭhāpentiyā vāpīti tassā upaṭṭhānaṃ parehi akārāpentiyā, sayaṃ vā akarontiyā.
228. Dukkhita means sick. Nupaṭṭhāpentiyā vāpī means either not causing her to be attended to by others, or not doing it herself.
229.Upassayaṃ datvāti kavāṭabandhaṃ attano puggalikavihāraṃ datvā.Kaḍḍhiteti nikkaḍḍhite.
229. Upassayaṃ datvā means having given the lodging, having given her own personal monastery with the door closed. Kaḍḍhite means when dragged out.
230.Saṃsaṭṭhāti gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā saṃsaṭṭhavihārī bhikkhunī saṅghena saṃsaṭṭhavihārato nivattiyamānā.Ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuseti samanubhāsanakammañattiyā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyya.
230. Saṃsaṭṭhā means a bhikkhunī who lives in close association with a householder or a son of a householder, when being turned away from living in close association by the Sangha. Ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuse means she incurs a dukkata offense with the motion of the act of formal censure.
231.Antoraṭṭheti yassa vijite viharati, tassa raṭṭhe.Paṭipannāyāti cārikaṃ kappentiyā.Sesakanti pācittiyaṃ.
231. Antoraṭṭhe means in the country of the one in whose territory she is dwelling. Paṭipannāyā means while intending to travel. Sesaka means pācittiya.
Tuvaṭṭavaggavaṇṇanā catutthā.
The Fourth Chapter on Lying Down is Concluded.
233.Rājāgārādikantiādi-saddena cittāgārādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
233. Rājāgārādika means, with the word ādi, the inclusion of painting halls and so on.
235.Payogeti kappāsavicāraṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbapayoge.Ujjavujjavaneti yattakaṃ hatthena añchitaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ takkamhi veṭhite.
235. Payoge means beginning with the sorting of cotton, in all efforts. Ujjavujjavane means in the amount of buttermilk that is wrapped in what has been gathered by hand.
237.Payogeti agārikassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyādīnaṃ dānapayoge.
237. Payoge means in the effort of giving eatables and so on with one's own hand to a householder, a wanderer, or a female wanderer.
238.‘‘Samaṃ āpattipabhedato’’ti padacchedo.
238. "Samaṃ āpattipabhedato" is a word division.
239.Tiracchānagataṃvijjanti yaṃ kiñci bāhirakaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ parūpaghātakaraṃ hatthisikkhādisippaṃ.Paṭhantiyāti sikkhantiyā.Payogeti durupasaṅkamanādipayoge.Pade padeti padādivasena pariyāpuṇantiyā pade pade akkharapadānaṃ vasena.
239. Tiracchānagataṃ vijja means any external knowledge that is unbeneficial, associated with harming others, such as skills in elephant training. Paṭhantiyā means while learning. Payoge means in the effort of improper association and so on. Pade pade means in each and every word, as she masters it, in terms of letters and words.
240.Navame‘‘pariyāpuṇātī’’ti padaṃ, dasame‘‘vācetī’’ti padanti evaṃ padamattameva ubhinnaṃvisesakaṃbhedakaṃ.
240. In the ninth, the word "pariyāpuṇātī" is the term, in the tenth, the word "vācetī" is the term; thus, only the term is the visesakaṃ, differentiator, of the two.
Cittāgāravaggavaṇṇanā pañcamā.
The Fifth Chapter on the Painting Hall is Concluded.
241.Tamārāmanti yattha bhikkhū rukkhamūlepi vasanti, taṃ sabhikkhukaṃ padesaṃ.
241. Tamārāma means that place with bhikkhus, where bhikkhus also dwell at the foot of trees.
243.Akkosatīti dasannaṃ akkosavatthūnaṃ aññatarena sammukhā vā parammukhā vā akkosati.Paribhāsatīti bhayadassanena tajjeti. ‘‘Pācitti akkosite’’ti padacchedo.
243. Akkosatī means scolding to one's face or behind one's back with one of the ten grounds for scolding. Paribhāsatī means threatening by showing fear. "Pācitti akkosite" is a word division.
244.Caṇḍikabhāvenāti kodhena.Gaṇanti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ.Paribhāsatīti ‘‘bālā etā’’tiādīhi vacanehi akkosati.Payogeti paribhāsanapayoge.Paribhaṭṭheti akkosite.Itaraṃpācittiyaṃ.
244. Caṇḍikabhāvenā means with anger. Gaṇa means the community of bhikkhunīs. Paribhāsatī means scolding with words such as, "these are foolish." Payoge means in the effort of scolding. Paribhaṭṭhe means when scolded. Itaraṃ means pācittiya.
245.Nimantitāti gaṇabhojane vuttanayena nimantitā.Pavāritāti pavāraṇasikkhāpade vuttanayena vāritā.Khādanaṃ bhojanampi vāti yāgupūvakhajjakaṃ, yāvakālikaṃ mūlakhādanīyādikhādanīyaṃ, odanādibhojanampi vā yā bhikkhunībhuñjantīhoti, sā pana dveyeva āpattiyo phuseti yojanā.
245. Nimantitā means invited in the manner stated in the rule on group meals. Pavāritā means prevented in the manner stated in the training rule on invitation. The explanation is that when a bhikkhunī bhuñjantī eats either khādanaṃ bhojanampi vā, soft food or hard food which lasts for a day, or eatables such as roots that can be consumed, or food such as rice, she incurs two offenses.
247.Maccharāyantīti maccharaṃ karontī, attano paccayadāyakakulassa aññehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahantīti attho.Payogeti tadanurūpe kāyavacīpayoge.Macchariteti maccharavasena katapayoge nipphanne.
247. Maccharāyantī means being miserly, meaning not tolerating the sharing of her own supporting family with others. Payoge means in bodily and verbal effort corresponding to that. Maccharite means when the effort done due to miserliness is accomplished.
248.Abhikkhuke panāvāseti yato bhikkhunupassayato addhayojanabbhantare ovādadāyakā bhikkhū na vasanti, maggo vā akhemo hoti, na sakkā anantarāyena gantuṃ, evarūpe āvāse.Pubbakiccesūti ‘‘vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ti senāsanapaññāpanapānīyaupaṭṭhāpanādipubbakicce pana kariyamāne dukkaṭaṃ bhaveti yojanā.
248. Abhikkhuke panāvāse means in a dwelling where bhikkhus who give advice do not dwell within a half-yojana from the bhikkhunī's residence, or the path is unsafe, it is not possible to go without danger, in such a dwelling. Pubbakiccesū means, however, when preliminary duties such as "I will dwell in the rains," preparing lodging, providing water, and so on are being done, it becomes a dukkata offense.
249.Vassaṃvutthāti purimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ vutthā.Ubhatosaṅgheti bhikkhunisaṅghe, bhikkhusaṅghe ca.Tīhipi ṭhānehīti ‘‘diṭṭhena vā’’tiādinā vuttehi tīhi kāraṇehi.
249. Vassaṃvutthā means having dwelt for three months, either the first or the last. Ubhatosaṅghe means in the community of bhikkhunīs and in the community of bhikkhus. Tīhipi ṭhānehī means with the three reasons stated beginning with "by sight."
250.Ovādatthāyāti garudhammovādanatthāya.Saṃvāsatthāyāti uposathapucchanatthāya ceva pavāraṇatthāya ca.Na gacchatīti bhikkhuṃ na upagacchati.
250. Ovādatthāyā means for the sake of advice on the weighty matters. Saṃvāsatthāyā means both for the sake of asking about the Uposatha and for the sake of Invitation. Na gacchatī means she does not approach the bhikkhu.
251.Ovādampi na yācantīti uposathādivasena ovādūpasaṅkamanaṃ bhikkhuṃ na yācantī na pucchantī.Uposathanti uposathadivasato purimadivase terasiyaṃ vā cātuddasiyaṃ vā uposathaṃ na pucchantī.
251. Ovādampi na yācantī means she does not request or ask the bhikkhu for approaching for advice on the occasion of the Uposatha and so on. Uposatha means she does not ask about the Uposatha on the thirteenth or fourteenth day, the day before the Uposatha day.
252.Apucchitvāva saṅghaṃ vāti saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā anapaloketvāva.‘‘Bhedāpetī’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ ‘‘phālāpeyya vā dhovāpeyya vā ālimpāpeyya vā bandhāpeyya vā mocāpeyya vā’’ti imesampi kiriyāvikappānaṃ saṅgahetabbattā.Pasākhajanti nābhiyā heṭṭhā, jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ upari padese jātaṃ gaṇḍaṃ vā rudhitaṃ vā.Payogeti bhedāpanādipayoge.
252. Apucchitvāva saṅghaṃ vā means without informing either the Sangha or the group. ‘‘Bhedāpetī’’ means this is just an instance; because the alternative actions "she should have it split, or have it washed, or have it painted, or have it tied, or have it released" are to be included. Pasākhaja means a boil or blood that has arisen in the area below the navel and above the kneecaps. Payoge means in the effort of having it split and so on.
Ārāmavaggavaṇṇanā chaṭṭhā.
The Sixth Chapter on the Park is Concluded.
253.Gabbhininti āpannasattaṃ sikkhamānaṃ.Vuṭṭhāpentīti upajjhāyā hutvā upasampādentī.Payogeti gaṇapariyesanādipayoge.Vuṭṭhāpiteti upasampādite, kammavācāpariyosāneti attho.
253. Gabbhini means a trainee who is pregnant. Vuṭṭhāpentī means ordaining, having become an upajjhāyā. Payoge means in the effort of seeking a group and so on. Vuṭṭhāpite means when ordained, at the conclusion of the formal utterance, is the meaning.
255.Sahajīvininti saddhivihāriniṃ.Nānuggaṇhantīti uddesadānādīhi na saṅgaṇhantī.
255. Sahajīvini means a co-resident. Nānuggaṇhantī means not supporting with giving instructions and so on.
Gabbhinivaggavaṇṇanā sattamā.
The Seventh Chapter on the Pregnant Woman is Concluded.
258.‘‘Alaṃ vuṭṭhāpitenā’’tivuccamānābhikkhunīhi nivāriyamānā.Khīyatīti aññāsaṃ byattānaṃ lajjīnaṃ vuṭṭhānasammutiṃ dīyamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ahameva nūna bālā’’tiādinā bhaṇamānā khīyati.Payogeti khīyamānapayoge.Khīyiteti khīyanapayoge niṭṭhite.
258. Vuccamānā means when a bhikkhunī is being prevented by others saying, "enough with the ordaining." Khīyatī means becoming upset, thinking, "am I the only foolish one?" when seeing the ordination approval being given to others who are skilled and modest. Payoge means in the effort of becoming upset. Khīyite means when the effort of becoming upset is completed.
Kumāribhūtavaggavaṇṇanā aṭṭhamā.
The Eighth Chapter on One Who Has Not Been a Mother is Concluded.
260.Chattupāhananti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ chattañca upāhanāyo ca.Payogeti dhāraṇapayoge.
260. Chattupāhana means the umbrella and shoes of the characteristics stated. Payoge means in the effort of wearing.
261.Yānenāti vayhādinā.Yāyantīti sace yānena gatā hoti.
261. Yānenā means by a vehicle and so on. Yāyantī means if she has gone by vehicle.
262.Saṅghāṇinti yaṃ kiñci kaṭūpagaṃ.Dhārentiyāti kaṭiyaṃ paṭimuccantiyā.
262. Saṅghāṇi means anything that is sharply pungent. Dhārentiyā means while fastening around the waist.
263.Gandhavaṇṇenāti yena kenaci vaṇṇena ca yena kenaci gandhena ca.Gandhonāma candanālepādi.Vaṇṇonāma kuṅkumahaliddādi.Payogeti gandhādipayoge racanato paṭṭhāya pubbapayoge.
263. Gandhavaṇṇenā means with any color and with any scent. Gandho means ointment of sandalwood and so on. Vaṇṇo means saffron, turmeric, and so on. Payoge means in the effort of applying scents and so on, starting from the preparation, in the prior effort.
266.Anāpucchāti ‘‘nisīdāmi, ayyā’’ti anāpucchitvā.Nisīditebhikkhussa upacāre antamaso chamāya nisinne.
266. Anāpucchā means without asking, "May I sit down, Ayyā?" Nisīdite means when seated in the presence of a bhikkhu, even on the ground.
267.Anokāsakatanti ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne pucchissāmī’’ti evaṃ akataokāsaṃ.
267. Anokāsakata means without having made an opportunity, such as "I will ask in such and such a place."
268.Pavisantiyāti vinicchayaṃ ārāmavaggassapaṭhamenevasikkhāpadenasadisaṃkatvā vadeyyāti yojanā.
268. Pavisantiyā means one should speak, making the judgment sadisaṃ, similar to the paṭhameneva first training rule of the Park Chapter.
Chattupāhanavaggavaṇṇanā navamā.
The Ninth Chapter on Umbrellas and Shoes is Concluded.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā bhikkhunivibhaṅge
Thus, in the Later, in the Līnatthapakāsani, in the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga,
Pācittiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Pācittiya Section is Concluded.
269-70.Aṭṭhasu pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadesupi dvidhā āpatti hotīti yojanā.Tatoti gahaṇahetu.Sabbesūti pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadesu.
269-70. The explanation is that in the eight pāṭidesanīya training rules, there are two kinds of offenses. Tato means because of the act of taking. Sabbesū means in all the pāṭidesanīya training rules.
Pāṭidesanīyakathāvaṇṇanā.
Commentary on the Pāṭidesanīya Section.
271-2.Imaṃparamaṃuttamaṃniruttaraṃkenaci vā vattabbena uttarena rahitaṃ niddosaṃuttaraṃevaṃnāmakaṃdhīropaññavā bhikkhu atthavasena viditvāduruttaraṃkicchena uttaritabbaṃpaññattamahāsamuddaṃvinayamahāsāgaraṃ sukheneva yasmā uttarati, tasmākaṅkhacchedevinayavicikicchāya chindanesatthesatthasadiseasmiṃ sattheimasmiṃ uttarapakaraṇeusmāyuttokammajatejodhātuyā samannāgato jīvamāno bhikkhuniccaṃnirantaraṃsattoabhiratoniccaṃ yogaṃsatatābhiyogaṃ kātuṃyuttoanurūpoti yojanā.
271-2. The explanation is that a dhīro, wise, bhikkhu, having known this paramaṃ, supreme, niruttaraṃ, unsurpassed, devoid of any answerable question, uttaraṃ, named thus, duruttaraṃ, difficult to cross, paññattamahāsamuddaṃ, the great ocean of the Vinaya, easily crosses it; therefore, in this satthe, scripture, which is like a weapon in cutting off doubt, in the destruction of doubt about the Vinaya, a bhikkhu usmāyutto, full of vital heat, endowed with the element of heat from his actions, living, niccaṃ, constantly, satto, delighted, is yutto, fit, niccaṃ yogaṃ kātuṃ, to constantly apply himself.
Bhikkhunivibhaṅgo niṭṭhitoti etthāpi uppatti vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
Bhikkhunivibhaṅgo niṭṭhito the origin here should also be understood in the manner stated.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the Uttara Līnatthapakāsani,
Bhikkhunivibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga.
Catuvipattikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Fourfold Failure
273.Idāni ubhayasādhāraṇaṃ katvā vipattivārādīnaṃ visiṭṭhavārānaṃ saṅgahaṃ kātumāha‘‘kati āpattiyo’’tiādi.
273. Now, making it common to both, to include the specific sections beginning with the failure section, he says, "How many offenses?" etc.
274.Bhikkhunī sace chādeti, cutā hoti. Sace vematikā chādeti, thullaccayaṃ siyāti yojanā.
274. If a bhikkhunī conceals it, she is cut off (cutā hoti). If, being in doubt, she conceals it, there would be a thullaccaya offense, is the connection.
275.Saṅghādisesanti parassa saṅghādisesaṃ.
275.Saṅghādisesa means another's saṅghādisesa.
276.‘‘Kati ācāravipattipaccayā’’ti padacchedo.
276.The word division is, "How many causes of failure of conduct?".
277.Ācāravipattinti attano vā parassa vā ācāravipattiṃ.
277.Ācāravipatti means failure of conduct of oneself or of another.
279.Pāpikaṃ diṭṭhinti ahetukaakiriyanatthikadiṭṭhiādiṃ lāmikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ.
279.Pāpikaṃ diṭṭhi means immoral views, such as the view of no cause, no action, or annihilation.
281.Manussuttaridhammanti uttarimanussadhammaṃ.
281.Manussuttaridhamma means the uttarimanussadhamma.
282.Ājīvahetu sañcarittaṃ samāpannoti yojanā.Pariyāyavacaneti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu arahā’’tiādike lesavacane. Ñāteti yaṃ uddissa vadati, tasmiṃ manussajātike vacanasamanantarameva ñāte.
282.It should be connected that she undertakes trafficking for the sake of livelihood. Pariyāyavacane means veiled speech, like, "The bhikkhu who dwells in your monastery is an arahat." Ñāteti means that immediately upon uttering the words, it is known in the human species to whom it is directed.
283.Vatvāti agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā. Bhikkhunī pana sace evaṃ hoti, bhikkhunī agilānā attano atthāya paṇītabhojanaṃ viññāpetvā bhuttāvinī sace hotīti adhippāyo. Tassā pāṭidesanīyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
283.Vatvā means having requested for one's own sake, being not ill. If the bhikkhunī is in this way, the meaning is, if a bhikkhunī, not being ill, having requested fine food for her own sake, and having eaten it, it would be. For her, there would be a pāṭidesanīya offense, is the connection.
284.‘‘Attano atthāya viññāpetvānā’’ti iminā parassa ñātakapavārite tassevatthāya viññāpetvā tena dinnaṃ vā tassa vissāsena vā paribhuñjantassa tesaṃ attano aññātakaappavārite suddhacittatāya anāpattīti dīpeti.
284."Attano atthāya viññāpetvānā": by this, it indicates that there is no offense for those who consume what is given by another, who is related or invited, after requesting for the same purpose, or by his confidence, with a pure mind towards those others who are unknown and uninvited.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the Uttara Līnatthapakāsani,
Catuvipattikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Fourfold Failure.
Adhikaraṇapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Causes of Disputes
285.Vivādādhikaraṇamhāti ‘‘adhammaṃ ‘dhammo’ti dīpetī’’tiādinayappavattā aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthunissitā vivādādhikaraṇamhā.
285.Vivādādhikaraṇamhā: from the dispute which arises according to the method, "He declares what is not the Dhamma to be the Dhamma," based on the eighteen grounds for dispute.
286.Upasampannaṃ omasato bhikkhussa pācitti hotīti yojanā.
286.There is a pācitti offense for a bhikkhu who reviles an ordained bhikkhu, is the connection.
287.Anuvādādhikaraṇapaccayāti codanāparanāmadheyyaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇameva paccayo, tasmā, anuvādanādhikaraṇahetūti attho.
287.Anuvādādhikaraṇapaccayā: the cause is solely the anuvādādhikaraṇa, which has the other name of accusation, therefore, the meaning is, due to the anuvādādhikaraṇa.
289.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā amūlakattaṃ atidisati.
289."Tathā": by this, he indicates the groundlessness.
290.Āpattipaccayāti āpattādhikaraṇapaccayā.
290.Āpattipaccayā: due to the offense ādhikaraṇa.
293.Kiccādhikaraṇapaccayāti apalokanādicatubbidhakammasaṅkhātakiccādhikaraṇahetu.
293.Kiccādhikaraṇapaccayā: due to the kiccādhikaraṇa, which is reckoned as the fourfold act beginning with invitation.
294.Accajantīvāti attano laddhiṃ apariccajantī eva.
294.Accajantīvā: or not abandoning her own view.
297.Pāpikāya diṭṭhiyāpariccajanatthāya katāyayāvatatiyakaṃ samanubhāsanāyataṃ diṭṭhiṃ accajantiyātassābhikkhuniyā, tassa bhikkhussa caaccajatopācitti hotīti yojanā.
297.Pāpikāya diṭṭhiyāpariccajanatthāya katāyayāvatatiyakaṃ samanubhāsanāyataṃ diṭṭhiṃ accajantiyātassābhikkhuniyā, tassa bhikkhussa caaccajato: for that bhikkhunī or that bhikkhu who does not relinquish that view, after the formal accusation up to three times made for the purpose of abandoning the immoral view, there is a pācitti offense, is the connection.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the Uttara Līnatthapakāsani,
Adhikaraṇapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Causes of Disputes.
Khandhakapucchākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Khandhaka Questions
300.Sesesūti abhabbapuggalaparidīpakesu sabbapadesu.
300.Sesesū: in all the sections describing unqualified individuals.
302.‘‘Nassantu ete’’ti padacchedo.Purakkhakāti ettha sāmiatthe paccattavacanaṃ, bhedapurekkhakassa, bhedapurekkhakāyāti attho.
302.The word division is, "Let these be destroyed." Purakkhakā: here, the singular number is in the sense of ownership; the meaning is one who gives precedence to division, for one who gives precedence to division.
303.Sesesūti avasesesu asaṃvāsakādidīpakesu paṭikkhepapadesu.
303.Sesesū: in the remaining sections describing non-association, etc., in the sections on rejection.
304.Ekāvadukkaṭāpatti vuttāti vassaṃ anupagamanādipaccayā jātito ekāva dukkaṭāpatti vuttā.
304.Ekāvadukkaṭāpatti vuttā: only one dukkaṭa offense is stated, due to causes such as not attending the rains residence.
305.Uposathasamāmatāti uposathakkhandhake vuttasadisā jātā āpattiyo matā adhippetā.
305.Uposathasamāmatā: offenses that are similar, stated in the Uposatha Khandhaka, are considered intended.
306.Cammeti cammakkhandhake. Vacchatariṃ gahetvāmārentānaṃchabbaggiyānaṃ pācitti vuttāti sambandho.Vacchatarinti balasampannaṃ taruṇagāviṃ. Sā hi vacchakabhāvaṃ taritvā atikkamitvā ṭhitattā‘‘vacchatarī’’ti vuccati.
306.Camme: in the leather khandhaka. The connection is that a pācitti offense is stated for the Group-of-Six bhikkhus mārentānaṃ having taken and killed a young cow.Vacchatari: a young cow with strength. She is called "vacchatarī" because she has passed beyond the state of being a calf and stands there.
307.Aṅgajātaṃ chupantassāti gāvīnaṃ aṅgajātaṃ attano aṅgajātena bahi chupantassa.Sesesūti gāvīnaṃ visāṇādīsu gahaṇe, piṭṭhiabhiruhaṇe ca. Yathāha ‘‘chabbaggiyā bhikkhū aciravatiyā nadiyā gāvīnaṃ tarantīnaṃ visāṇesupi gaṇhantī’’tiādi (mahāva. 252).
307.Aṅgajātaṃ chupantassā: for one who touches the genitals of cows externally with his own genitals. Sesesū: in the seizing of the cows' horns, etc., and in mounting on the back. As he said, "The Group-of-Six bhikkhus were seizing even the horns of cows swimming in the Aciravatī River," etc. (mahāva. 252).
309.Tatthabhesajjakkhandhake.Sāmantā dvaṅguleti vaccamaggapassāvamaggānaṃ sāmantā dvaṅgulamatte padese. Satthakammaṃ karontassa thullaccayamudīritanti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, sambādhassa sāmantā dvaṅgule satthakammaṃ vā vatthikammaṃ vā kāretabbaṃ, yo kāreyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 279). Ettha ca‘‘sāmantā dvaṅgule’’ti idaṃ satthakammaṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vatthikammaṃ pana sambādheyeva paṭikkhittaṃ.
309.Tattha: in the medicine khandhaka.Sāmantā dvaṅgule: in a place approximately two finger-widths around the urinary and excretory passages. A thullaccaya offense is declared for one who has surgical work done, is the connection. As he said, "Monks, surgical work or probing should not be done within two finger-widths of the confined area. Whoever does so incurs a thullaccaya offense." (mahāva. 279). Here, "sāmantā dvaṅgule" is said referring only to surgical work. However, probing is prohibited only in the confined area.
‘‘bhojjayāgūsu pācittī’’ti. Ettha cabhojjayāgunāma bahalayāgu. ‘‘Piṇḍaṃ vaṭṭetvā pātabbayāgū’’tigaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.Pācittīti paramparabhojanapavāraṇasikkhāpadehi pācitti.Sesesūti antovutthaantopakkasayaṃpakkaparibhogādīsu. Yathāha ‘‘na, bhikkhave, antovutthaṃ antopakkaṃ sāmaṃpakkaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ, yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādi (mahāva. 274).
"bhojjayāgūsu pācittī": Here, bhojjayāgu means thick gruel. "Gruel suitable for drinking after rolling a lump" is said in the Gaṇṭhipada.Pācittī: the pācitti offense is through the training rule on successive meals and invitation. Sesesū: in dwelling within, cooking within, cooking oneself, consuming oneself, etc. As he said, "Monks, dwelling within, cooking within, cooking oneself, should not be consumed. Whoever consumes it incurs a dukkaṭa offense," etc. (mahāva. 274).
310.Cīvarasaṃyutteti cīvarakkhandhake.
310.Cīvarasaṃyutte: in the robe khandhaka.
313.Campeyyakeca kosambeti campeyyakkhandhake ceva kosambakakkhandhake ca.‘‘Kammasmi’’ntiādīsupi eseva nayo.
313.Campeyyakeca kosambe: both in the Campeyyaka khandhaka and in the Kosambaka khandhaka."Kammasmi"ntiādīsu: This same method applies also in the sections beginning with "Regarding the act."
317.Romantheti bhuttassa lahuṃ pākattāya kucchigataṃ mukhaṃ āropetvā saṇhakaraṇavasena anucālane.
317.Romanthe: regurgitating into the mouth and chewing gently for easy digestion of what has been eaten.
318.Senāsanasminti senāsanakkhandhake.Garunoti garubhaṇḍassa.
318.Senāsanasmi: in the dwelling khandhaka.Garuno: of heavy goods.
320.Saṅghabhedeti saṅghabhedakakkhandhake.
320.Saṅghabhede: in the Saṅghabhedaka khandhaka.
321.Bhedānuvattakānanti saṅghabhedānuvattakānaṃ.Gaṇabhogeti gaṇabhojane.
321.Bhedānuvattakāna: for those who follow schism in the Saṅgha.Gaṇabhoge: in communal eating.
322.Sāti ettha sabbavattesu anādariyena hotīti seso. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
322.Sā: here, "hotīti seso": the remainder (seso) is that it occurs through lack of respect in all duties. The remainder is clear in meaning itself.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the Uttara Līnatthapakāsani,
Khandhakapucchākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Khandhaka Questions.
Samuṭṭhānasīsakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Arising Heads
325-6.Mahesinā dvīsu vibhaṅgesu paññattāniyāni pārājikādīnisikkhāpadāni uposathe uddisanti,tesaṃsikkhāpadānaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavatthāya ito paraṃ pavakkhāmi, taṃ samāhitā suṇāthāti yojanā.
325-6.The training rules yāni pārājikādīni which were laid down by the great sage in the two vibhaṅgas, which they recite on the Uposatha, tesaṃ I will hereafter explain the arising of those training rules, for the purpose of recitation by the bhikkhus; listen attentively to that, is the connection.
327.Kāyo ca vācā ca kāyavācā cāti acittakāni yāni tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni, tāneva cittena paccekaṃ yojitāni sacittakānitīṇisamuṭṭhānāni hontīti evameva samuṭṭhānaṃ purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ vasenaekaṅgikaṃ,tatiyacatutthapañcamānaṃ vasenadvaṅgikaṃ,chaṭṭhassa vasenativaṅgikañcāti evaṃ chadhā samuṭṭhānavidhiṃ vadantīti yojanā. Kāyo, vācāti ekaṅgikaṃ dvayaṃ, kāyavācā, kāyacittaṃ, vācācittanti duvaṅgikattayaṃ, kāyavācācittanti aṅgabhedena tividhampi avayavabhedena samuṭṭhānabhedavidhiṃ chappakāraṃ vadantīti adhippāyo.
327.Whatever three arisings are non-conscious: body, speech and body-and-speech, those same arisings are conscious when connected individually with mind, tīṇi those three arisings are conscious. Thus, arising is ekaṅgikaṃ, single-factored due to the first two, dvaṅgikaṃ, two-factored due to the third, fourth, and fifth, tivaṅgikañcā, and three-factored due to the sixth; thus they state the method of arising in six ways, is the connection. "Body," and "speech," are a single-factored pair. "Body-and-speech," "body-and-mind," "speech-and-mind" are a three-fold two-factored set. "Body-speech-mind" is three-factored by division of factors; the meaning is that they state a six-fold method of division of arising due to the division of parts.
328.Tesuchasu samuṭṭhānesu ekena vā samuṭṭhānena dvīhi vā tīhi vā catūhi vā chahi vā samuṭṭhānehinānāāpattiyo jāyareti sambandho.
328.Tesu: among those six arisings. Nānā various offenses are born by one arising, or by two, three, four, or six arisings, is the connection.
329.Tatthatāsu nānāpattīsu. Pañca samuṭṭhānāni etissātipañcasamuṭṭhānā,evarūpā kāci āpatti na vijjati. Ekamekaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ yāsanti viggaho.Pacchimeheva tīhipīti sacittakeheva tīhi samuṭṭhānehi, yā āpatti ekasamuṭṭhānā hoti, sā sacittakānaṃ tiṇṇamaññatarena hotīti adhippāyo.
329.Tattha: among those various offenses. Pañcasamuṭṭhānā: it has five arisings; there is no offense of such a kind. "Ekamekaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ yāsanti": the dissolution is, they go to each arising.Pacchimeheva tīhipī: even by only the last three conscious arisings, the offense that has one arising occurs by one or another of the three conscious ones, is the meaning.
330-1.Tatiyacchaṭṭhatopi cāti kāyavācato, kāyavācācittato ca.Catutthacchaṭṭhato cevāti kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca.Pañcamacchaṭṭhatopi cāti vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca. ‘‘Kāyato kāyacittato’’ti paṭhamaṃ dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘vācato vācācittato’’ti dutiyaṃ, ‘‘kāyavācato kāyavācācittato’’ti tatiyaṃ, ‘‘kāyacittato kāyavācācittato’’ti catutthaṃ, ‘‘vācācittato kāyavācācittato’’ti pañcamaṃ dvisamuṭṭhānanti evaṃ pañcadhā eva ṭhitehi dvīhi samuṭṭhānehiesādvisamuṭṭhānāpattijāyatesamuṭṭhāti.Na aññatoti kāyato vācatoti ekaṃ, vācato kāyavācatoti ekanti evaṃ yathāvuttakkamavipariyāyena yojitehi aññehi samuṭṭhānehi na samuṭṭhāti.
330-1.Tatiyacchaṭṭhatopi cā: from body-and-speech, and from body-speech-and-mind.Catutthacchaṭṭhato cevā: and from body-and-mind and from body-speech-and-mind.Pañcamacchaṭṭhatopi cā: and from speech-and-mind and from body-speech-and-mind. "Kāyato kāyacittato" the first is a two-fold arising, "vācato vācācittato" the second, "kāyavācato kāyavācācittato" the third, "kāyacittato kāyavācācittato" the fourth, "vācācittato kāyavācācittato" the fifth is a two-fold arising; thus esā this two-fold arising jāyate arises from those two arisings remaining in five ways.Na aññato: it does not arise from other arisings that are connected by reversing the order of what was said, such as, "from body and speech," or "from speech and body-and-speech."
332.Paṭhamehi ca tīhīti ‘‘kāyato, vācato, kāyavācato’’ti paṭhamaṃ niddiṭṭhehi tīhi acittakasamuṭṭhānehi.Pacchimehi cāti ‘‘kāyacittato, vācācittato, kāyavācācittato’’ti evaṃ pacchā vuttehi sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi.Na aññatoti ‘‘kāyato, vācato, kāyacittato, vācato, kāyavācato, kāyacittato’’ti evaṃ vuttavipallāsato aññehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi na samuṭṭhāti.
332.Paṭhamehi ca tīhī: by the first three non-conscious arisings that were specified, "from body, from speech, from body-and-speech."Pacchimehi cā: and by the three conscious arisings that were said afterward, "from body-and-mind, from speech-and-mind, from body-speech-and-mind." Na aññato: it does not arise from three other arisings in such stated inversions as, "from body, from speech, from body-and-mind, from speech, from body-and-speech, from body-and-mind."
333-4.Paṭhamā tatiyā ceva, catutthacchaṭṭhatopi cāti kāyato, kāyavācato, kāyacittato, kāyavācācittatoti etehi catūhi samuṭṭhānehi ceva.Dutiyā…pe… cchaṭṭhatopi cāti vācato, kāyavācato, vācācittato, kāyavācācittatoti imehi catūhi cāti catusamuṭṭhānenāpatti.
333-4.Paṭhamā tatiyā ceva, catutthacchaṭṭhatopi cā: and certainly from these four arisings: from body, from body-and-speech, from body-and-mind, and from body-speech-and-mind. Dutiyā…pe… cchaṭṭhatopi cā: and from these four: from speech, from body-and-speech, from speech-and-mind, and from body-speech-and-mind, the offense is four-arisen.
Na panaññatoti ‘‘kāyato, vācato, kāyavācato, kāyacittato’’ti evamādinā vipallāsanayena yojitehi catūhi samuṭṭhānehi na samuṭṭhāti. Cha samuṭṭhānāni yassā sāchasamuṭṭhānā. Sacittakehi tīhi, acittakehi tīhīti chahi eva samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhātīti. Pakārantarābhāvā idha ‘‘na aññato’’ti na vuttaṃ.
Na panaññato: it does not arise from four arisings that are connected in an inverted manner, such as, "from body, from speech, from body-and-speech, from body-and-mind." Chasamuṭṭhānā: that which has six arisings. It arises from only six arisings, three conscious and three non-conscious. Because of the absence of another way, "na aññato" is not said here.
Āha caaṭṭhakathācariyo mātikaṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
Āha ca: and the commentary master said in the Mātika commentary.
335.Samuṭṭhāti etasmātisamuṭṭhānaṃ,kāyādi chabbidhaṃ, ekaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ yassā sāekasamuṭṭhānā. Pakārantarābhāvātidhā. Kathaṃ? Sacittakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samuṭṭhānānaṃ vasena tividhā. Dvīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhitādvisamuṭṭhitā,dvisamuṭṭhānāpattīti attho.Pañcadhāti vuttanayena pañcappakārā. Tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni yassā sātisamuṭṭhānā,cattāri samuṭṭhānāni yassā sācaturuṭṭhānā,tisamuṭṭhānā ca caturuṭṭhānā caticaturuṭṭhānāti ekadesasarūpekaseso, tisamuṭṭhānā dvidhā vibhattā, catusamuṭṭhānā ca dvidhā eva vibhattāti attho. Chahi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhitāchasamuṭṭhitā,chasamuṭṭhānāti attho.Ekadhāti pakārantarābhāvā ekadhāva ṭhitāti adhippāyo.
335.That from which it arises is samuṭṭhānaṃ, sixfold, such as body, etc. That which has one arising as its cause is ekasamuṭṭhānā. Because of the absence of another way, it is tidhā. How? It is threefold in terms of the three conscious arisings. Dvisamuṭṭhitā: that which has arisen from two arisings; the meaning is, an offense with two arisings.Pañcadhā: in five ways, as stated. That which has three arisings is tisamuṭṭhānā, that which has four arisings is caturuṭṭhānā, ticaturuṭṭhānā both three-arisen and four-arisen; it is a single remainder with similar parts, the meaning is that the three-arisen is divided in two ways, and the four-arisen is also divided in two ways. Chasamuṭṭhitā: that which has arisen from six arisings; the meaning is, six-arisen. Ekadhā: because of the absence of another way, the meaning is that it remains in only one way.
336.Sabbā āpattiyo samuṭṭhānavisesatoevaṃ terasadhā ṭhitānaṃ samuṭṭhānabhedānaṃ nānattato tehi samuṭṭhitānaṃ paṭhamaṃ paññattattā sīsabhūtānaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ vasenateraseva nāmāni labhanti,tāni ito paraṃ vakkhāmīti yojanā.
336.Sabbā āpattiyo samuṭṭhānavisesato because of the difference in the types of arising of those arising distinctions that remain in thirteen ways in this manner, the teraseva nāmāni labhanti, all offenses are first named after and headed by their respective origins; I will state those hereafter, is the connection.
337.Paṭhamantimavatthuñcāti paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Dutiyanti adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Sañcarittakanti sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Samanubhāsananti samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Kathinaṃ eḷakalomaka’’nti padacchedo, kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānañca.
337.Paṭhamantimavatthuñcā: and the first pārājika arising.Dutiyanti: the arising of taking what is not given.Sañcarittakanti: the arising of trafficking.Samanubhāsananti: the arising of formal accusation. The word division is "Kathinaṃ eḷakalomaka," and the kathina arising and the goat's hair arising.
338.Padasodhammanti padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Addhānaṃ theyyasatthanti addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Desanāti dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ.Bhūtārocanakanti bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Corivuṭṭhāpananti corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
338. Padasodhamma means arising from padasodhamma. Addhānaṃ theyyasattha means arising from addhāna and arising from theyyasattha. Desanā means arising from dhammadesanā. Bhūtārocanaka means arising from bhūtārocana. Corivuṭṭhāpana means arising from corivuṭṭhāpana.
339.Ananuññātakañcāti ananuññātakasamuṭṭhānañcāti etāni terasa tehi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ paṭhamaṃ paṭhamaṃ niddiṭṭhānaṃ paṭhamapārājikādisikkhāpadasamuṭṭhānānaṃ itaresaṃ pubbaṅgamabhāvato‘‘sīsānī’’ti vuttāni. Yathāhaparivāraṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘paṭhamapārājikaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisānī’’tiādi (pari. aṭṭha. 258).Terasete samuṭṭhānanayāti ete sīsavasena dassitā terasa samuṭṭhānanayā.Viññūhiupālittherādīhi.
339. Ananuññātakañcā means also arising from ananuññātaka; these thirteen, the first of those sikkhāpadas, arising from these origins that are initially specified, the origins of the first pārājika etc., sikkhāpadas, are called "sīsānī" because they are preeminent. As it is said in the Parivāra commentary: "The first pārājika is called the head of one origin; the rest are similar to it," etc. (pari. aṭṭha. 258). Terasete samuṭṭhānanayā means these thirteen ways of arising shown in terms of heads. Viññūhi by wise ones, such as Upāli Thera and others.
340.Tatthaterasasu samuṭṭhānasīsesu.Yāti yā pana āpatti.Ādipārājikuṭṭhānāti paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānā.
340. Tattha in those thirteen origin-heads. Yā means whichever āpatti.
341.Adinnādāna-saddo pubbako paṭhamo etissā taṃsamuṭṭhānāpattiyātiadinnādānapubbakā,adinnādānasamuṭṭhānāti uddiṭṭhāti yojanā.
341.The word adinnādāna is first for that āpatti arising from it, thus it is adinnādānapubbakā, the designation is that it arises from adinnādāna.
342.Jātūti ekaṃsena.
342. Jātū certainly.
343.Ayaṃ samuṭṭhānavasena ‘‘samanubhāsanāsamuṭṭhānā’’ti vuttāti yojanā.
343.This, in terms of origin, is said to be "arising from samanubhāsanā," is the meaning.
344.Kathina-saddo upapado yassā taṃsamuṭṭhānāya āpattiyā sākathinupapadā,kathinasamuṭṭhānātimatāñātā, ayaṃ samuṭṭhānavasena ‘‘kathinasamuṭṭhānā’’ti ñātāti attho.
344.The word kathina is a prefix to that āpatti arising from it, that is kathinupapadā, is considered, it is known that it arises from kathina, this is the meaning; in terms of origin, it is known as "arising from kathina."
345.Eḷakaloma-saddo ādi yassā taṃsamuṭṭhānāpattiyā sāeḷakalomādisamuṭṭhānāti attho.
345.The word eḷakaloma is the beginning of that āpatti arising from it, that is eḷakalomādisamuṭṭhānā is the meaning.
349.Etthasamuṭṭhānesu.
349. Ettha in these origins.
350.Bhūtārocana-saddo pubbabhāgo etissā taṃsamuṭṭhānāya āpattiyātibhūtārocanapubbakā,bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānāti attho.
350.The word bhūtārocana is the first part of that āpatti arising from it, that is bhūtārocanapubbakā, the meaning is that it arises from bhūtārocana.
351.Samuṭṭhānaṃsamuṭṭhitaṃ,corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ yassā sācorivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhitā,corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānāti attho.
351.Arising means samuṭṭhitaṃ, the corivuṭṭhāpana arises from that, that is corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhitā, the meaning is that it arises from corivuṭṭhāpana.
353.Tatthāti terasasamuṭṭhānasīsesu,‘‘samuṭṭhānaṃ sacittaka’’nti idaṃ ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādīhi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.Paṭhamaṃ samuṭṭhānanti paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Dutiyaṃ samuṭṭhānanti adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Catutthaṃ samuṭṭhānanti samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Navamaṃ samuṭṭhānanti theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Dasamaṃ samuṭṭhānanti dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ.Dvādasamaṃ samuṭṭhānanti corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
353. Tatthā in those thirteen origin-heads, this "samuṭṭhānaṃ sacittaka" should be connected individually with "paṭhama" etc. Paṭhamaṃ samuṭṭhāna means arising from the first pārājika. Dutiyaṃ samuṭṭhāna means arising from adinnādāna. Catutthaṃ samuṭṭhāna means arising from samanubhāsana. Navamaṃ samuṭṭhāna means arising from theyyasattha. Dasamaṃ samuṭṭhāna means arising from dhammadesanā. Dvādasamaṃ samuṭṭhāna means arising from corivuṭṭhāpana.
354.Samuṭṭhāneti samuṭṭhānasīse.Sadisāti tena tena samuṭṭhānasīsena samuṭṭhānā āpattiyo.Idhāti imasmiṃ samuṭṭhānavinicchaye.Dissareti dissante, dissantīti attho. Atha vāidha dissareti idha ubhatovibhaṅge etesu terasasamuṭṭhānesu ekekasmiṃ aññānipi sadisāni samuṭṭhānāni dissantīti attho. Idāni tāni sarūpato nidassetumāha‘‘sukkañcā’’tiādi. Tatthasukkanti sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadaṃ. Esa nayo‘‘kāyasaṃsaggo’’tiādīsupi. Yadettha duviññeyyaṃ, taṃ vakkhāma.
354. Samuṭṭhāne in the origin-head. Sadisā means āpattis arising from that origin-head. Idhā here in this analysis of origins. Dissare are seen, it means they are seen. Or else, idha dissare means here in this Ubhatovibhaṅga, in each of these thirteen origins, other similar origins are seen. Now, to show those in their own form, he says "sukkañcā" etc. Therein, sukka means the sukkavissaṭṭhi sikkhāpada. This method applies to "kāyasaṃsaggo" etc. as well. Whatever is difficult to understand here, we will explain.
355.Pubbupaparipāko cāti ‘‘jānaṃ pubbupagataṃ bhikkhu’’nti (pāci. 120) sikkhāpadañca ‘‘bhikkhuniparipācita’’nti (pāci. 192, 194) piṇḍapātasikkhāpadañca.Raho bhikkhuniyāsahāti bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ raho nisajjasikkhāpadañca.Sabhojane, raho dve cāti sabhojane kule anupakhajjasikkhāpadañca dve rahonisajjasikkhāpadāni ca.Aṅgulī udake hasanti aṅgulipatodañca udakahasadhammasikkhāpadañca.
355. Pubbupaparipāko cā means the sikkhāpada "a bhikkhu knowingly approaching a woman" (jānaṃ pubbupagataṃ bhikkhu)" (pāci. 120) and the piṇḍapāta sikkhāpada "bhikkhuniparipācita" (pāci. 192, 194). Raho bhikkhuniyāsahā means the sikkhāpada on sitting in private with a bhikkhunī. Sabhojane, raho dve cā means the sikkhāpada on not frequenting families at mealtime (sabhojane kule anupakhajjasikkhāpada) and the two sikkhāpadas on sitting in private (rahonisajjasikkhāpadāni). Aṅgulī udake hasa means the sikkhāpadas on poking with a finger and playing in the water (udakahasadhammasikkhāpada).
356.Pahāre uggire cevāti pahāradānasikkhāpadañca talasattiuggiraṇasikkhāpadañca.Tepaññāsā ca sekhiyāti pañcasattatisekhiyāsu vakkhamānāni ujjagghikādīni samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānāni dasa, chattapāṇiādīni dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānāni ekādasa, theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadañcāti bāvīsati sikkhāpadāni ṭhapetvā parimaṇḍalanivāsanādīni itarāni tepaññāsa sekhiyasikkhāpadāni ca.Adhakkhakubbhajāṇuñcāti bhikkhunīnaṃ adhakkhakaubbhajāṇusikkhāpadañca.Gāmantaramavassutāti gāmantaragamanaṃ, avassutassa hatthato khādanīyaggahaṇasikkhāpadañca.
356. Pahāre uggire cevā means the sikkhāpada on striking and the talasattiuggiraṇa sikkhāpada. Tepaññāsā ca sekhiyā means, among the seventy-five Sekhiya rules to be described, ten arising from samanubhāsana, namely the ujjagghikā etc., eleven arising from dhammadesanā, namely the chattapāṇi etc., the theyyasattha arising, and the sūpodanaviññatti sikkhāpada, setting aside those twenty-two sikkhāpadas, and the other forty-three Sekhiya sikkhāpadas such as parimaṇḍalanivāsana etc. Adhakkhakubbhajāṇuñcā means the adhakkhakaubbhajāṇu sikkhāpada for bhikkhunīs. Gāmantaramavassutā means going to another village, and the sikkhāpada on accepting food from the hand of one who is dripping (avassutassa hatthato khādanīyaggahaṇasikkhāpada).
357-8.Talamaṭṭhudasuddhi cāti talaghātaṃ, jatumaṭṭhaṃ, udakasuddhikādiyanañca.Vassaṃvutthāti ‘‘vassaṃvutthā…pe… chappañcayojanānī’’ti (pāci. 974) sikkhāpadañca.Ovādāya na gacchantīti ovādāya agamanasikkhāpadañca.Nānubandhe pavattininti ‘‘vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyyā’’ti (pāci. 1112) sikkhāpadañcāti ubhatovibhaṅge niddiṭṭhā imepañcasattatidhammā kāyacittasamuṭṭhitā methunena samā ekasamuṭṭhānā matāti yojanā.
357-8. Talamaṭṭhudasuddhi cā means slapping, using lacquer, and the like of water purification. Vassaṃvutthā means the sikkhāpada "having resided in the rains...up to...fifty-six yojanas" (vassaṃvutthā…pe… chappañcayojanānī) (pāci. 974). Ovādāya na gacchantī means the sikkhāpada on not going for exhortation. Nānubandhe pavattini means the sikkhāpada "she should not attend upon an expelled pavattinī for two years" (vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyyā) (pāci. 1112); these seventy-five things specified in the Ubhatovibhaṅga, arising from body and mind, together with sexual intercourse, are considered to be of one origin, is the meaning.
pāḷiyaṃ‘‘chasattatī’’ti gaṇanaparicchedo samuṭṭhānasikkhāpadena saha dassito. Idha pana taṃ vinā taṃsadisānameva gaṇanā dassitā. Teneva paṭhamaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ pāḷiyaṃ gaṇanāyapi dassitaṃ, idheva na dassitaṃ. Upari katthaci samuṭṭhānasīsassa dassanaṃ panettha vakkhamānānaṃ taṃsadisabhāvadassanatthaṃ, gaṇanāya vakkhamānāya antogadhabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Teneva tatthapi taṃ vinā gaṇanaṃ vakkhati.
Pāḷiyaṃ the enumeration "seventy-six" is shown together with the sikkhāpada on origin. But here, only the enumeration of similar things is shown, without that. Therefore, in the Pāḷi, the first origin-head is shown in the enumeration as well, but here it is not shown. The showing of the origin-head somewhere above is to show the similarity to those to be described here, to show that they are included in the enumeration to be described. Therefore, there too, he will state the enumeration without that.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Commentary on the arising from the first pārājika.
359.Viggahanti manussaviggahasikkhāpadaṃ.Uttari cevāti uttarimanussadhammasikkhāpadañca.Duṭṭhullanti duṭṭhullavācāsikkhāpadaṃ.Attakāmatāti attakāmapāricariyasikkhāpadañca.Duṭṭhadosā duve cevāti dve duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadāni ca.Dutiyāniyatopi cāti dutiyaaniyatasikkhāpadañca.
359. Viggaha means the manussaviggaha sikkhāpada. Uttari cevā means also the uttarimanussadhamma sikkhāpada. Duṭṭhulla means the duṭṭhullavācā sikkhāpada. Attakāmatā means the attakāmapāricariya sikkhāpada. Duṭṭhadosā duve cevā means also the two duṭṭhadosa sikkhāpadas. Dutiyāniyatopi cā means also the second Aniyata sikkhāpada.
360.Acchindanañcāti sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvā acchindanañca.Pariṇāmoti saṅghikalābhassa attano pariṇāmanañca.Musāomasapesuṇāti musāvādo ca omasavādo ca bhikkhupesuññañca.Duṭṭhullārocanañcevāti duṭṭhullāpattiārocanasikkhāpadañca.Pathavīkhaṇanampi cāti pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadañca.
360. Acchindanañcā means also taking back after giving a robe oneself. Pariṇāmo means also diverting communal gain for oneself. Musāomasapesuṇā means also false speech, abusive speech, and tale-bearing about bhikkhus. Duṭṭhullārocanañcevā means also the sikkhāpada on announcing a grave offense. Pathavīkhaṇanampi cā means also the sikkhāpada on digging the earth.
361.Bhūtagāmañcavādo cāti bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṃ, aññavādakasikkhāpadañca.Ujjhāpanakameva cāti ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadañca.Nikkaḍḍho siñcanañcevāti vihārato nikkaḍḍhanañca udake tiṇādisiñcanañca.Āmisahetu cāti āmisahetu bhikkhuniyo ovādasikkhāpadañca.
361. Bhūtagāmañca vādo cā means the bhūtagāma sikkhāpada, and the aññavādaka sikkhāpada. Ujjhāpanakameva cā means also the ujjhāpanaka sikkhāpada. Nikkaḍḍho siñcanañcevā means also dragging out of the monastery and sprinkling grass etc. with water. Āmisahetu cā means also the sikkhāpada on exhorting bhikkhunīs for the sake of material gain.
362.Bhuttāvinti bhuttāviṃ anatirittena khādanīyādinā pavāraṇasikkhāpadañca.Ehanādarinti ‘‘ehāvuso, gāmaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 275) vuttasikkhāpadañca anādariyasikkhāpadañca.Bhiṃsāpanameva cāti bhikkhubhiṃsanakañca.Apanidheyyāti pattādiapanidhānasikkhāpadañca.Sañcicca pāṇanti sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitāvoropanañca.Sappāṇakampi cāti jānaṃ sappāṇakaudakasikkhāpadañca.
362. Bhuttāvi means also the pavāraṇā sikkhāpada with insufficient food etc. when one has finished eating. Ehanādari means also the sikkhāpada "Come, friend, to the village" (ehāvuso, gāmaṃ vā) (pāci. 275) and the anādariya sikkhāpada. Bhiṃsāpanameva cā means also frightening bhikkhus. Apanidheyyā means also the apanidhāna sikkhāpada regarding bowls etc. Sañcicca pāṇa means also intentionally depriving a living being of life. Sappāṇakampi cā means also knowingly using water with living beings (jānaṃ sappāṇakaudakasikkhāpada).
363.Ukkoṭanañcāti punakammāya ukkoṭanañca.Ūnoti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadañca.Saṃvāsoti ukkhittakena saddhiṃ saṃvāsasikkhāpadañca.Nāsane cāti nāsitakasāmaṇerasambhogasikkhāpadañca.Sahadhammikanti sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānasikkhāpadañca.Vilekhā cāti ‘‘vilekhāya saṃvattantī’’ti (pāci. 439) āgatasikkhāpadañca.Mohanāti mohanasikkhāpadañca.Amūlakena cāti amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanasikkhāpadañca.
363. Ukkoṭanañcā means also urging for punakamma. Ūno means also the ūnavīsativassa sikkhāpada. Saṃvāso means also associating with an expelled person. Nāsane cā means also associating with a destroyed sāmaṇera. Sahadhammika means also the sahadhammika being spoken. Vilekhā cā means also the sikkhāpada that comes as "vilekhāya saṃvattantī" (pāci. 439). Mohanā means also the mohana sikkhāpada. Amūlakena cā means also the anuddhaṃsana sikkhāpada with a groundless Saṅghādisesa.
364.Kukkuccaṃ khīyanaṃ datvāti kukkuccauppādanañca dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā khīyanañca cīvaraṃ datvā khīyanañca.Pariṇāmeyya puggaleti saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ puggalassa pariṇāmanasikkhāpadañca.Kiṃ te, akālaṃ, acchindeti ‘‘kiṃ te, ayye, eso purisapuggalo karissatī’’ti (pāci. 705) āgatasikkhāpadañca akālacīvaraṃ ‘‘kālacīvara’’nti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājanasikkhāpadañca bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ cīvaraṃ parivattetvā acchindanasikkhāpadañca.Duggahanirayena cāti duggahitena dupadhāritena paraṃ ujjhāpanasikkhāpadañca nirayena vā brahmacariyena vā abhisapanasikkhāpadañca.
364. Kukkuccaṃ khīyanaṃ datvā means also causing remorse, being displeased after giving consent to lawful acts, and being displeased after giving a robe. Pariṇāmeyya puggale means also diverting communal gain to an individual (saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ puggalassa pariṇāmanasikkhāpada). Kiṃ te, akālaṃ, acchinde means also the sikkhāpada that comes as "What will that person do to you, lady?" (kiṃ te, ayye, eso purisapuggalo karissatī) (pāci. 705), designating untimely robes as "timely robes" and the sikkhāpada on sharing. Duggahanirayena cā means also reproaching another with what has been wrongly grasped or poorly understood, or cursing with hell or the spiritual life.
365.Gaṇassa cāti ‘‘gaṇassa cīvaralābhaṃ antarāyaṃ kareyyā’’ti (pāci. 908) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Vibhaṅgañcāti ‘‘dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāheyyā’’ti (pāci. 912) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Dubbalāsā tatheva cāti ‘‘dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyyā’’ti (pāci. 921) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāranti ‘‘dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāheyyā’’ti (pāci. 928) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Sañciccāphāsumeva cāti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā sañcicca aphāsuṃ kareyyā’’ti (pāci. 942) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
365. Gaṇassa cā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should cause obstruction to the gain of robes for the Order" (gaṇassa cīvaralābhaṃ antarāyaṃ kareyyā) (pāci. 908). Vibhaṅgañcā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should reject a lawful distribution of robes" (dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāheyyā) (pāci. 912). Dubbalāsā tatheva cā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should let the time for robes pass by in the hope of inferior robes" (dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyyā) (pāci. 921). Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāra means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should reject the lawful removal of the kathina" (dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāheyyā) (pāci. 928). Sañciccāphāsumeva cā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should intentionally cause discomfort to a bhikkhunī" (bhikkhuniyā sañcicca aphāsuṃ kareyyā) (pāci. 942).
366.Sayaṃ upassayaṃ datvāti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā upassayaṃ datvā kupitā anattamanā nikkaḍḍheyyā’’ti (pāci. 951) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Akkoseyya cāti ‘‘bhikkhuṃ akkoseyya vā paribhāseyya vā’’ti (pāci. 1029) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Caṇḍikāti ‘‘caṇḍīkatā gaṇaṃ paribhāseyyā’’ti (pāci. 1034) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Kulamaccharinī assāti ‘‘kulamaccharinī assā’’ti (pāci. 1043) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya cāti ‘‘gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1068) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
366. Sayaṃ upassayaṃ datvā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "having given lodging to a bhikkhunī, being angry and displeased, should drag her out" (bhikkhuniyā upassayaṃ datvā kupitā anattamanā nikkaḍḍheyyā) (pāci. 951). Akkoseyya cā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should scold or abuse a bhikkhu" (bhikkhuṃ akkoseyya vā paribhāseyya vā) (pāci. 1029). Caṇḍikā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "being fierce, she should abuse the Order" (caṇḍīkatā gaṇaṃ paribhāseyyā) (pāci. 1034). Kulamaccharinī assā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "she should be miserly towards families" (kulamaccharinī assā) (pāci. 1043). Gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya cā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should expel a pregnant woman" (gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1068).
367.Pāyantinti ‘‘pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1073) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Dve ca vassānīti ‘‘dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1080) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Saṅghenāsammatanti ‘‘sikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1086) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tisso gihigatā vuttāti ‘‘ūnadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ (pāci. 1091), paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ (pāci. 1097), dvevassāni sikkhitasikkhaṃ saṅghena asammata’’nti (pāci. 1103) vuttasikkhāpadāni ca.Tissoyeva kumārikāti ‘‘ūnavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūta’’ntiādinā (pāci. 1120) nayena vuttā tisso ca.
367. Pāyanti means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should expel a woman who is nursing" (pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1073). Dve ca vassānī means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should expel one training in the six rules for two years without having trained in the training" (dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1080). Saṅghenāsammata means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should expel one training in the training who has not been approved by the Order" (sikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1086). Tisso gihigatā vuttā means also the sikkhāpadas stated as "having gone to lay life before twelve years old (ūnadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ) (pāci. 1091), having gone to lay life with full twelve years, not having trained in the six rules for two years (paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ) (pāci. 1097), having trained in the training for two years, not approved by the Order" (dvevassāni sikkhitasikkhaṃ saṅghena asammata) (pāci. 1103). Tissoyeva kumārikā means also the three stated in the way beginning with "being a maiden under twenty years old" (ūnavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūta) (pāci. 1120).
368.Ūnadvādasavassā dveti ‘‘ūnadvādasavassā vuṭṭhāpeyya (pāci. 1137), paripuṇṇadvādasavassā saṅghena asammatā vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1142) vuttāni dve sikkhāpadāni ca.Alaṃ tāva teti ‘‘alaṃ tāva te, ayye, vuṭṭhāpitenā’’ti (pāci. 1147) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Sokāvassāti ‘‘caṇḍiṃ sokāvāsaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1159) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Pārivāsikacchandadānatoti ‘‘pārivāsikachandadānena sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1167) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
368. Ūnadvādasavassā dve means also the two sikkhāpadas stated as "should expel one under twelve years old (ūnadvādasavassā vuṭṭhāpeyya) (pāci. 1137), should expel one fully twelve years old not approved by the Order (paripuṇṇadvādasavassā saṅghena asammatā vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1142). Alaṃ tāva te means also the sikkhāpada stated as "Enough, lady, with expelling" (alaṃ tāva te, ayye, vuṭṭhāpitenā) (pāci. 1147). Sokāvassā means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should expel one training who is prone to grief and lamentation" (caṇḍiṃ sokāvāsaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1159). Pārivāsikacchandadānato means also the sikkhāpada stated as "should expel one training with the giving of consent for pārivāsa" (pārivāsikachandadānena sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā) (pāci. 1167).
369.Anuvassaṃ duve cāti ‘‘anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya (pāci. 1171), ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1175) vuttasikkhāpadāni cātiekūnasattatisikkhāpadāni.Adinnādānatulyattāti adinnādānena samānasamuṭṭhānattā.Tisamuṭṭhānikā katāti sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhahantīti vuttā.
369. Anuvassaṃ duve cāti, the seventy minus one sikkhāpadas, namely the sikkhāpadas stated as "should ordain annually two (pāci. 1171), should ordain two in one year" (pāci. 1175). Adinnādānatulyattāti, because of having the same origin as stealing. Tisamuṭṭhānikā katāti, are said to arise from three origins with intention.
Dutiyapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Origin of the Second Pārājika.
370.Sañcarikuṭimahallakanti sañcarittaṃ, saññācikāya kuṭikaraṇaṃ, mahallakavihārakaraṇañca.Dhovāpanañca paṭiggahoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā purāṇacīvaradhovāpanañca cīvarapaṭiggahaṇañca.Cīvarassa ca viññattinti aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā cīvaraviññāpanasikkhāpadañca.Gahaṇañca taduttarinti taduttarisādiyanasikkhāpadañca.
370. Sañcarikuṭimahallakanti, wandering, building a hut by solicitation, and building a large vihāra. Dhovāpanañca paṭiggahoti, having an unrelated bhikkhunī wash an old robe and accepting a robe. Cīvarassa ca viññattinti, and the sikkhāpada about requesting a robe from an unrelated householder or his wife. Gahaṇañca taduttarinti, and the sikkhāpada about accepting more than that.
371.Upakkhaṭadvayañcevāti ‘‘cīvaracetāpannaṃ upakkhaṭaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. 528) āgatasikkhāpadadvayañca.Tathā dūtena cīvaranti dūtenacīvaracetāpannapahitasikkhāpadañca.Kosiyanti kosiyamissakasikkhāpadañca.Suddhakāḷānanti ‘‘suddhakāḷakāna’’ntiādisikkhāpadañca (pārā. 548).Dve bhāgādānameva cāti ‘‘dve bhāgā ādātabbā’’ti (pārā. 553) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
371. Upakkhaṭadvayañcevāti, and the two sikkhāpadas that come as "when the price of a robe has been arranged" (pārā. 528). Tathā dūtena cīvaranti, and the sikkhāpada about a robe sent through a messenger when the price has been arranged. Kosiyanti, the sikkhāpada about silk mixed with other materials. Suddhakāḷānanti, and the sikkhāpada beginning with "pure black wool" (pārā. 548). Dve bhāgādānameva cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "two parts should be taken" (pārā. 553).
372.Chabbassānīti chabbassāni dhāraṇasikkhāpadañca.Purāṇassāti ‘‘purāṇasanthatassā’’ti (pārā. 567) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Lomadhovāpanampi cāti eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpadañca.Rūpiyassa paṭiggāhoti rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadañca.Ubho nānappakārakāti rūpiyasaṃvohārakayavikkayasikkhāpadāni ca.
372. Chabbassānīti, the sikkhāpada about keeping for six years. Purāṇassāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "an old mat" (pārā. 567). Lomadhovāpanampi cāti, and the sikkhāpada about having sheep's wool washed. Rūpiyassa paṭiggāhoti, the sikkhāpada about accepting money. Ubho nānappakārakāti, and the sikkhāpadas about various kinds of monetary transactions and sales.
373.Ūnabandhanapatto cāti ūnapañcabandhanapattasikkhāpadañca.Vassasāṭikasuttakanti vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadañca suttaṃ viññāpetvā cīvarakārāpanasikkhāpadañca.Vikappāpajjananti tantavāye upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappāpajjanañca.Yāva dvāradānañca sibbananti ‘‘yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’ti (pāci. 135) vuttasikkhāpadañca ‘‘aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadeyya (pāci. 171), cīvaraṃ sibbeyyā’’ti (pāci. 176) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.
373. Ūnabandhanapatto cāti, and the sikkhāpada about a bowl with less than five ties. Vassasāṭikasuttakanti, the sikkhāpada about a rains-bathing cloth, and the sikkhāpada about having a robe made after requesting thread. Vikappāpajjananti, and assigning a robe to a weaver with conditions. Yāva dvāradānañca sibbananti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "up to the door sockets for fixing the bolt" (pāci. 135), and the two sikkhāpadas stated as "should give a robe to an unrelated bhikkhunī (pāci. 171), should sew a robe (pāci. 176)".
374.Pūvehīti pūvehi vā manthehi vā abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇasikkhāpadañca.Paccayoti catumāsapaccayapavāraṇasikkhāpadañca.Jotīti jotiyā samādahanasikkhāpadañca.Ratananti ratanasikkhāpadañca.Sūci…pe… sugatassa cāti sūcigharasikkhāpadādīni satta sikkhāpadāni ca.
374. Pūvehīti, the sikkhāpada about inviting by offering cakes or mantras. Paccayoti, the sikkhāpada about inviting for four months for requisites. Jotīti, the sikkhāpada about combining with light. Ratananti, the sikkhāpada about jewels. Sūci…pe… sugatassa cāti, and the seven sikkhāpadas beginning with the sūcighara sikkhāpada.
375.Aññaviññattisikkhā cāti ‘‘aññaṃ viññāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 749) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Aññaṃ cetāpanampi cāti ‘‘aññaṃ cetāpetvā aññaṃ cetāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 749) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Saṅghikena duve vuttāti ‘‘saṅghikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya (pāci. 759), saṅghikena saññācikena aññaṃ cetāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 764) vuttāni dve sikkhāpadāni ca.Dve mahājanikenāti ‘‘mahājanikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya (pāci. 769), mahājanikena saññācikena aññaṃ cetāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 774) vuttāni dve sikkhāpadāni ca.
375. Aññaviññattisikkhā cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "should request something else" (pāci. 749). Aññaṃ cetāpanampi cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "having arranged for one thing, should arrange for another" (pāci. 749). Saṅghikena duve vuttāti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated as "having arranged for something else with saṅghika funds (pāci. 759), having arranged for something else with saṅghika funds through a messenger" (pāci. 764). Dve mahājanikenāti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated as "having arranged for something else with mahājanika funds (pāci. 769), having arranged for something else with mahājanika funds through a messenger" (pāci. 774).
376.Tathāpuggalikenekanti ‘‘puggalikena saññācikena aññaṃ cetāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 779) vuttamekasikkhāpadañca.Garupāvuraṇanti garupāvuraṇacetāpanasikkhāpadañca.Lahunti lahupāvuraṇacetāpanasikkhāpadaṃ. ‘‘Vighāsā udasāṭi cā’’ti padacchedo.Dve vighāsāti ‘‘uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā saṅkāraṃ vā vighāsaṃ vā tirokuṭṭe vā tiropākāre vā chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā (pāci. 825), harite chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā’’ti (pāci. 829) evaṃ vuttāni dve vighāsasikkhāpadāni ca.Udasāṭi cāti udakasāṭikasikkhāpadañca.Tathā samaṇacīvaranti tathā ‘‘samaṇacīvaraṃ dadeyyā’’ti (pāci. 917) vuttasikkhāpadañcāti.
376. Tathā puggalikenekanti, and the one sikkhāpada stated as "having arranged for something else with personal funds through a messenger" (pāci. 779). Garupāvuraṇanti, the sikkhāpada about arranging for a heavy outer cloak. Lahunti, the sikkhāpada about arranging for a light outer cloak. "Vighāsā udasāṭi cā" is a division of words. Dve vighāsāti, and the two vighāsa sikkhāpadas stated as "should throw or have thrown excrement or urine or rubbish or leftovers over a wall or enclosure (pāci. 825), should throw or have thrown on greenery" (pāci. 829). Udasāṭi cāti, and the water-cloth sikkhāpada. Tathā samaṇacīvaranti, similarly, the sikkhāpada stated as "should give a samaṇacīvara" (pāci. 917).
377.Iti ete ekūnapaṇṇāsa dhammādukkhantadassinābhagavatā chasamuṭṭhānikā teyevasañcarittasamāsañcarittasikkhāpadena samākatāanumatā paññattāti yojanā.
377. Thus, these forty-nine minus one dhammas, were approved, prescribed, and declared by the dukkhantadassinā (the one who sees the end of suffering) Bhagavat, those same ones are of six origins; sañcarittasamā (similar to wandering), they are similar to the sañcaritta sikkhāpada; katā they were made; this is how to connect it.
Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Origin of Wandering.
378.Saṅghabhedoti saṅghabhedasikkhāpadañca.Bhedānuvattadubbacadūsakāti bhedānuvattakadubbacakuladūsakasikkhāpadāni ca.Duṭṭhullacchādananti duṭṭhullapaṭicchādanasikkhāpadañca.Diṭṭhīti diṭṭhiappaṭinissajjanasikkhāpadañca.Chandaujjagghikā duveti chandaṃadatvāgamanasikkhāpadañca ujjagghikāya antaraghare gamananisīdanasikkhāpadadvayañca.
378. Saṅghabhedoti, the saṅghabheda sikkhāpada (causing dissension in the Sangha). Bhedānuvattadubbacadūsakāti, and the bhedānuvattaka, dubbaca, and kuladūsaka sikkhāpadas. Duṭṭhullacchādananti, the duṭṭhulla paṭicchādana sikkhāpada (concealing serious offenses). Diṭṭhīti, the diṭṭhi appaṭinissajjana sikkhāpada (not giving up wrong view). Chandaujjagghikā duveti, the sikkhāpada about going without giving consent and the two sikkhāpadas about going and sitting in houses on the strength of a message.
379.Appasaddā duve vuttāti ‘‘appasaddo antaraghare gamissāmi, nisīdissāmī’’ti (pāci. 588, 589) vuttāni dve sikkhāpadāni ca.Na byāhareti ‘‘na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmī’’ti (pāci. 619) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Chamā, nīcāsane, ṭhānanti ‘‘chamāyaṃ nisīditvā (pāci. 645), nīce āsane nisīditvā (pāci. 647), ṭhito nisinnassā’’ti (pāci. 648) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Pacchato uppathena cāti ‘‘pacchato gacchanto purato gacchantassa (pāci. 649), uppathena gacchanto pathena gacchantassā’’ti (pāci. 650) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.
379. Appasaddā duve vuttāti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated as "I will go silently into a house, I will sit down" (pāci. 588, 589). Na byāhareti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "I will not speak with a mouthful of food" (pāci. 619). Chamā, nīcāsane, ṭhānanti, and the sikkhāpadas stated as "having sat on the ground (pāci. 645), having sat on a low seat (pāci. 647), one standing to one sitting" (pāci. 648). Pacchato uppathena cāti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated as "one going behind to one going in front (pāci. 649), one going off the path to one going on the path" (pāci. 650).
380.Vajjacchādāti vajjato paṭicchādanasikkhāpadañca.Anuvattā cāti ukkhittānuvattanasikkhāpadañca.Gahaṇanti ‘‘hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyyā’’ti (pāci. 675) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Osāreyya cāti ‘‘anapaloketvā kārakasaṅghaṃ anaññāya gaṇassa chandaṃ osāreyyā’’ti (pāci. 695) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Paccakkhāmīti sikkhā cāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccācikkhāmī’’ti (pāci. 710) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tathā kismiñcideva cāti ‘‘kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe paccākatā’’ti (pāci. 716) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
380. Vajjacchādāti, the vajjato paṭicchādana sikkhāpada (concealing a fault). Anuvattā cāti, the ukkittānuvattana sikkhāpada (following an expelled bhikkhu). Gahaṇanti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "should approve of grasping the hand" (pāci. 675). Osāreyya cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "without informing the Sangha of artisans, without announcing it to the group, should lower consent" (pāci. 695). Paccakkhāmīti sikkhā cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "I renounce the Buddha" (pāci. 710). Tathā kismiñcideva cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "having been rejected in some case" (pāci. 716).
381.Saṃsaṭṭhā dve cāti ‘‘bhikkhuniyo paneva saṃsaṭṭhā viharantī’’ti (pāci. 722) ca ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya saṃsaṭṭhāva, ayye, tumhe viharathā’’tiādivacanaṃ (pāci. 728) paṭicca vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.Vadhitvā cāti ‘‘attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyyā’’ti (pāci. 880) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Visibbetvā cāti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ visibbetvā vā visibbāpetvā vā’’ti (pāci. 893) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Dukkhitanti ‘‘dukkhitaṃ sahajīvini’’nti (pāci. 947) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Punadeva ca saṃsaṭṭhāti ‘‘saṃsaṭṭhā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā’’ti (pāci. 956) evaṃ puna vuttasaṃsaṭṭhasikkhāpadañca.Neva vūpasameyya cāti ‘‘‘ehāyye, imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamehī’ti (pāci. 995) vuccamānā ‘sādhū’ti paṭissuṇitvā sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vūpasameyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca.
381. Saṃsaṭṭhā dve cāti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated in relation to "if indeed bhikkhunīs live together in association" (pāci. 722) and "if any bhikkhunī should say thus: 'You, venerable ones, live together in association'" (pāci. 728). Vadhitvā cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "having struck herself, should cry" (pāci. 880). Visibbetvā cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "having torn or having had torn a bhikkhunī's robe" (pāci. 893). Dukkhitanti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "distressed co-habitant" (pāci. 947). Punadeva ca saṃsaṭṭhāti, and again, the saṃsaṭṭha sikkhāpada stated as "should live together in association with a householder or a householder's son" (pāci. 956). Neva vūpasameyya cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "when being told 'come, venerable, settle this case' (pāci. 995), having promised 'good' and later, without obstruction, should not settle it".
382.Jānaṃsabhikkhukārāmanti ‘‘jānaṃ sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ anāpucchā paviseyyā’’ti (pāci. 1024) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tatheva na pavārayeti ‘‘ubhatosaṅghe tīhi ṭhānehi na pavāreyyā’’ti (pāci. 1051) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tathā anvaddhamāsañcāti ‘‘anvaddhamāsaṃ bhikkhuniyā bhikkhusaṅghato dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā’’ti (pāci. 1059) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Sahajīviniyo duveti ‘‘sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā dve vassāni neva anuggaṇheyya (pāci. 1108), sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā neva vūpakāseyyā’’ti (pāci. 1116) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.
382. Jānaṃ sabhikkhukārāmanti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "knowing, should enter a ārāma with bhikkhus without asking permission" (pāci. 1024). Tatheva na pavārayeti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "in the same way, should not invite in both Sanghas in three ways" (pāci. 1051). Tathā anvaddhamāsañcāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "every half-month, a bhikkhunī should expect two things from the Sangha of bhikkhus" (pāci. 1059). Sahajīviniyo duveti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated as "having ordained a co-habitant, should not support her for two years (pāci. 1108), having ordained a co-habitant, should not introduce her" (pāci. 1116).
383-4.Sace me cīvaraṃ ayyeti ‘‘sace me tvaṃ, ayye, cīvaraṃ dassasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti (pāci. 1151) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Anubandhissasīti ‘‘sace maṃ tvaṃ, ayye, dve vassāni anubandhissasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti (pāci. 1155) vuttasikkhāpadañca. Asamena sambuddhena pakāsitā ime sattatiṃsa dhammā sabbekāyavācāditokāyavācācittatoekasamuṭṭhānā katā samanubhāsanā siyuṃsamuṭṭhānato samanubhāsanasikkhāpadena sadisā siyunti yojanā.
383-4. Sace me cīvaraṃ ayyeti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "if you, venerable, will give me a robe, only then will I ordain you" (pāci. 1151). Anubandhissasīti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "if you, venerable, will attend on me for two years, only then will I ordain you" (pāci. 1155). These thirty-seven dhammas, all revealed by the unequalled Sambuddha, kāyavācādito (from body and speech), kāyavācācittato (from body, speech, and mind), ekasamuṭṭhānā katā (made of single origin) samanubhāsanā siyuṃ (are of the nature of admonition), samuṭṭhānato samanubhāsanasikkhāpadena sadisā siyuṃti yojanā (they are similar to the admonition sikkhāpada in origin, this is how to connect it).
Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Origin of Admonition.
385.Kathināni ca tīṇīti ‘‘niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine’’ti (pārā. 462) vuttāni ādito tīṇi sikkhāpadāni.Pattoti ‘‘dasāhaparamaṃ atirekapatto’’ti (pārā. 601) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Bhesajjameva cāti ‘‘paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjānī’’ti (pārā. 622) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Accekampi cāti accekasikkhāpadañca.Sāsaṅkanti tadanantarameva sāsaṅkasikkhāpadañca.Pakkamantadvayampi cāti ‘‘taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyyā’’ti (pāci. 109, 115) bhūtagāmavagge vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.
385. Kathināni ca tīṇīti, the first three sikkhāpadas stated as "when the robe-making is completed, when the Kathina is withdrawn by the bhikkhu" (pārā. 462). Pattoti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "a surplus bowl for a maximum of ten days" (pārā. 601). Bhesajjameva cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "suitable medicines" (pārā. 622). Accekampi cāti, and the accekasikkhāpada (a robe received unexpectedly). Sāsaṅkanti, immediately after that, the sāsaṅka sikkhāpada (a robe received with apprehension). Pakkamantadvayampi cāti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated in the Bhūtagāmavagga as "when departing, should not remove it" (pāci. 109, 115).
386.Tathā upassayaṃ gantvāti ‘‘bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhuniyo ovadeyyā’’ti (pāci. 158) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Paramparaṃ bhojananti ‘‘paramparabhojane pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 221) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Anatirittanti ‘‘anatirittaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 238) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Sabhattoti ‘‘nimantito sabhatto samāno’’ti (pāci. 299) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Vikappetvā tatheva cāti ‘‘cīvaraṃ vikappetvā’’ti (pāci. 373) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
386. Tathā upassayaṃ gantvāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "having approached a bhikkhunī residence, should instruct the bhikkhunīs" (pāci. 158). Paramparaṃ bhojananti, the sikkhāpada stated as "there is a Pācittiya for successive eating" (pāci. 221). Anatirittanti, the sikkhāpada stated as "un-surplus food or edibles" (pāci. 238). Sabhattoti, the sikkhāpada stated as "being invited, being a group meal" (pāci. 299). Vikappetvā tatheva cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "having assigned a robe" (pāci. 373).
387.Raññoti ‘‘rañño khattiyassā’’ti (pāci. 498) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Vikāleti ‘‘vikāle gāmaṃ paviseyyā’’ti (pāci. 509-512) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Vosāsāti ‘‘vosāsamānarūpā ṭhitā’’ti (pāci. 558) vuttasikkhāpadañca. ‘‘Āraññake ussayavādikā’’ti padacchedo.Āraññaketi ‘‘tathārūpesu āraññakesu senāsanesu pubbe appaṭisaṃvidita’’nti (pāci. 570) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Ussayavādikāti ‘‘ussayavādikā vihareyyā’’ti (pāci. 679) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Pattasannicayañcevāti ‘‘pattasannicayaṃ kareyyā’’ti (pāci. 734) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Pure, pacchā, vikālaketi ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī purebhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā’’ti (pāci. 855) ca ‘‘pacchābhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā’’ti (pāci. 860) ca ‘‘vikāle kulāni upasaṅkamitvā’’ti (pāci. 865) ca vuttasikkhāpadattayañca.
387. Raññoti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "of a king, a noble" (pāci. 498). Vikāleti, the sikkhāpada stated as "should enter a village at the wrong time" (pāci. 509-512). Vosāsāti, the sikkhāpada stated as "standing in the manner of one who has finished eating" (pāci. 558). "Āraññake ussayavādikā" is a division of words. Āraññaketi, and the sikkhāpada stated as "in such forest dwellings not previously known" (pāci. 570). Ussayavādikāti, the sikkhāpada stated as "should live inciting talk" (pāci. 679). Pattasannicayañcevāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "should collect bowls" (pāci. 734). Pure, pacchā, vikālaketi, and the three sikkhāpadas stated as "if any bhikkhunī having approached families before the meal" (pāci. 855) and "having approached families after the meal" (pāci. 860) and "having approached families at the wrong time" (pāci. 865).
388-9.Pañcāhikanti ‘‘pañcāhikaṃ saṅghāṭicāraṃ atikkameyyā’’ti (pāci. 898) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Saṅkamaninti ‘‘cīvarasaṅkamanīyaṃ dhāreyyā’’ti (pāci. 903) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tathā āvasathadvayanti ‘‘āvasathacīvaraṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjeyya (pāci. 1004), āvasathaṃ anissajjitvā cārikaṃ pakkameyyā’’ti (pāci. 1009) evaṃ āvasathena saddhiṃ vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.Pasākheti ‘‘pasākhe jātaṃ gaṇḍaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 1063) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Āsane cāti ‘‘bhikkhussa purato anāpucchā āsane nisīdeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1215) vuttasikkhāpadañcāti ime pana ekūnatiṃsa dhammā kāyavācato, kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhānato sabbedvisamuṭṭhānikā,tatoyevakathinasambhavākathinasamuṭṭhānā hontīti yojanā.
388-9. Pañcāhikanti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "should exceed a five-day round with the double robe" (pāci. 898). Saṅkamaninti, the sikkhāpada stated as "should wear a garment suitable for changing robes" (pāci. 903). Tathā āvasathadvayanti, and the two sikkhāpadas stated with the āvasatha as "having not relinquished the dwelling-cloth, should use it (pāci. 1004), having not relinquished the dwelling, should depart on a journey" (pāci. 1009). Pasākheti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "a boil born on the Pasākha day" (pāci. 1063). Āsane cāti, and the sikkhāpada stated as "should sit on a seat in front of a bhikkhu without asking permission" (pāci. 1215), these twenty-nine minus one dhammas, however, originate from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind, all are dvisamuṭṭhānikā (of two origins), therefore, kathinasambhavā (arising from the Kathina), they are kathinasamuṭṭhānā hontīti yojanā (of the origin of the Kathina, this is how to connect it).
Kathinasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Origin of the Kathina.
390.Dve seyyāti dve sahaseyyasikkhāpadāni ca.Āhaccapādo cāti āhaccapādakasikkhāpadañca.Piṇḍañcāti āvasathapiṇḍabhojanasikkhāpadañca.Gaṇabhojananti gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadañca.Vikāleti vikālabhojanasikkhāpadañca.Sannidhiñcevāti sannidhikārakasikkhāpadañca.Dantaponanti dantaponasikkhāpadañca.Acelakanti acelakasikkhāpadañca.
390. Dve seyyāti, the two sahaseyya sikkhāpadas (sleeping together). Āhaccapādo cāti, the āhaccapādaka sikkhāpada (deliberately agitating). Piṇḍañcāti, the āvasatha piṇḍabhojana sikkhāpada (meal obtained from dwelling alms). Gaṇabhojananti, the gaṇabhojana sikkhāpada (group meal). Vikāleti, the vikālabhojana sikkhāpada (meal at the wrong time). Sannidhiñcevāti, the sannidhikāraka sikkhāpada (storing up). Dantaponanti, the dantapona sikkhāpada (tooth stick). Acelakanti, the acelaka sikkhāpada (naked).
391.Uyyuttañcāti ‘‘uyyuttaṃ senaṃ dassanāya gaccheyyā’’ti (pāci. 311) vuttasikkhāpadañca. ‘‘Vase uyyodhi’’nti padacchedo.Vaseti ‘‘senāya vaseyyā’’ti (pāci. 318) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Uyyodhinti ‘‘uyyodhikaṃ vā…pe… anīkadassanaṃ vā gaccheyyā’’ti (pāci. 323) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Surāti surāpānasikkhāpadañca.Orena nhāyananti orenaddhamāsanahāyanasikkhāpadañca.Dubbaṇṇakaraṇañcevāti ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇāna’’nti (pāci. 368) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Pāṭidesanīyadvayanti vuttāvasesaṃ pāṭidesanīyadvayañca.
391. Uyyuttañcā ti: "Should go to see an army arrayed" (pāci. 311)—this stated training rule; Vase: The word division is "Vase uyyodhi." Vase ti: "Should stay in an army" (pāci. 318)—this stated training rule; Uyyodhi nti: "Should go to see a battle array or…pe…an army review" (pāci. 323)—this stated training rule; Surā ti: The training rule about alcoholic drink; Orena nhāyana nti: The training rule about bathing in the forepart of the half-month; Dubbaṇṇakaraṇañcevā ti: The training rule stated as "the three ways of discolouring" (pāci. 368); Pāṭidesanīyadvaya nti: And the two remaining pāṭidesanīya rules mentioned.
392.Lasuṇanti lasuṇasikkhāpadañca.Upatiṭṭheyyāti ‘‘bhikkhussa bhuñjantassa pānīyena vā vidhūpanena vā upatiṭṭheyyā’’ti (pāci. 816) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Naccadassanameva cāti ‘‘naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā vāditaṃ vā dassanāya gaccheyyā’’ti (pāci. 834) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Nagganti ‘‘naggā nahāyeyyā’’ti (pāci. 884) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Attharaṇanti ‘‘ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā tuvaṭṭeyyu’’nti (pāci. 937) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Mañceti ‘‘ekamañce tuvaṭṭeyyu’’nti (pāci. 933) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Antoraṭṭheti ‘‘antoraṭṭhe sāsaṅkasammate’’ti (pāci. 962) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tathā bahīti ‘‘tiroraṭṭhe sāsaṅkasammate’’ti (pāci. 966) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
392. Lasuṇa nti: The training rule about garlic; Upatiṭṭheyyā ti: "Should attend to a bhikkhu who is eating with water or a fan" (pāci. 816)—this stated training rule; Naccadassanameva cā ti: "Should go to see dancing, singing, or instrumental music" (pāci. 834)—this stated training rule; Nagga nti: "Should bathe naked" (pāci. 884)—this stated training rule; Attharaṇa nti: "Should sleep together using only one covering" (pāci. 937)—this stated training rule; Mañce ti: "Should sleep together on one bed" (pāci. 933)—this stated training rule; Antoraṭṭhe ti: "In an inner district that is considered dangerous" (pāci. 962)—this stated training rule; Tathā bahī ti: "In an outer district that is considered dangerous" (pāci. 966)—this stated training rule.
393.Antovassanti ‘‘antovassaṃ cārikaṃ careyyā’’ti (pāci. 970) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Agārañcāti ‘‘rājāgāraṃ vā cittāgāraṃ vā…pe… pokkharaṇiṃ vā dassanāya gaccheyyā’’ti (pāci. 978) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Āsandinti ‘‘āsandiṃ vā pallaṅkaṃ vā paribhuñjeyyā’’ti (pāci. 983) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Suttakantananti ‘‘suttaṃ kanteyyā’’ti (pāci. 987) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Veyyāvaccanti ‘‘gihiveyyāvaccaṃ kareyyā’’ti (pāci. 991) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Sahatthā cāti ‘‘agārikassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1000) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Āvāse ca abhikkhuketi ‘‘abhikkhuke āvāse vassaṃ vaseyyā’’ti (pāci. 1047) vuttasikkhāpadañca.
393. Antovassa nti: "Should go on tour within the rains" (pāci. 970)—this stated training rule; Agārañcā ti: "Should go to see a royal residence or a picture gallery or…pe…a lotus pond" (pāci. 978)—this stated training rule; Āsandi nti: "Should use a chair or a couch" (pāci. 983)—this stated training rule; Suttakantana nti: "Should spin thread" (pāci. 987)—this stated training rule; Veyyāvacca nti: "Should perform service for a householder" (pāci. 991)—this stated training rule; Sahatthā cā ti: "Should personally give solid food or staple food to a householder or a wanderer or a female wanderer" (pāci. 1000)—this stated training rule; Āvāse ca abhikkhuke ti: "Should spend the rains in a residence without bhikkhus" (pāci. 1047)—this stated training rule.
394.Chattanti ‘‘chattupāhanaṃ dhāreyyā’’ti (pāci. 1178) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Yānañcāti ‘‘yānena yāyeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1186) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Saṅghāṇinti ‘‘saṅghāṇiṃ dhāreyyā’’ti (pāci. 1191) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Alaṅkāranti ‘‘itthālaṅkāraṃ dhāreyyā’’ti (pāci. 1195) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Gandhavāsitanti ‘‘gandhavaṇṇakena nahāyeyya (pāci. 1199), vāsitakena piññākena nahāyeyyā’’ti (pāci. 1203) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.‘‘Bhikkhunī…pe… gihiniyā’’ti etena ‘‘bhikkhuniyā ummaddāpeyyā’’tiādīni (pāci. 1207) cattāri sikkhāpadāni vuttāni.
394. Chatta nti: "Should wear a sunshade or shoes" (pāci. 1178)—this stated training rule; Yānañcā ti: "Should ride in a vehicle" (pāci. 1186)—this stated training rule; Saṅghāṇi nti: "Should wear a girdle" (pāci. 1191)—this stated training rule; Alaṅkāra nti: "Should wear feminine adornments" (pāci. 1195)—this stated training rule; Gandhavāsita nti: "Should bathe with scented powder (pāci. 1199), should bathe with scented oil-cake" (pāci. 1203)—these two stated training rules; ‘‘Bhikkhunī…pe… gihiniyā’’ ti: By this, the four training rules beginning with "Should have a bhikkhunī massaged…pe…a female householder" (pāci. 1207) are stated.
395.Tathāsaṃkaccikāti ‘‘asaṃkaccikā gāmaṃ paviseyyā’’ti (pāci. 1225) evaṃ vuttasikkhāpadañca.Ime pana tecattālīsadhammā sabbe kāyacittavasenadvisamuṭṭhānikā. Eḷakalomena samuṭṭhānatosamāhontīti yojanā.
395. Tathāsaṃkaccikā ti: "Should enter a village without prior arrangement" (pāci. 1225)—thus, the stated training rule; Ime pana tecattālīsadhammā sabbe kāyacittavasena: However, all these forty-three dhammas arise from two sources: body and mind; The connection is that they are equal through arising from eḷakaloma.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of arising from eḷakaloma.
396-7.Aññatrāti ‘‘mātugāmassa uttarichappañcavācāhi dhammaṃ deseyya aññatra viññunā purisaviggahenā’’ti (pāci. 63) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Asammato cevāti ‘‘asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyyā’’ti (pāci. 146) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tathā atthaṅgatena cāti ‘‘atthaṅgate sūriye bhikkhuniyo ovadeyyā’’ti (pāci. 154) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tiracchānavijjā dve vuttāti ‘‘tiracchānavijjaṃ pariyāpuṇeyya, vāceyyā’’ti (pāci. 1014, 1018) evaṃ vuttāni dve sikkhāpadāni ca.Anokāsakatampi cāti ‘‘anokāsakataṃ bhikkhuṃ pañhaṃ puccheyyā’’ti (pāci. 1220) vuttasikkhāpadañcāti ime pana sabbe cha dhammā vācato, vācācittato cāti imehi dvīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhānikā honti.Padasodhammatulyatāayametesaṃ padasodhammena sadisabhāvoti yojanā.
396-7. Aññatrā ti: "Should teach dhamma to a woman with more than five or six sentences, except in the presence of an intelligent man" (pāci. 63)—this stated training rule; Asammato ceva ti: "An unappointed one should advise bhikkhunīs" (pāci. 146)—this stated training rule; Tathā atthaṅgatena cā ti: "Should advise bhikkhunīs after the sun has set" (pāci. 154)—this stated training rule; Tiracchānavijjā dve vuttā ti: "Should learn a low art, should recite it" (pāci. 1014, 1018)—thus, the two stated training rules; Anokāsakatampi cā ti: "Should question a bhikkhu who has not given permission" (pāci. 1220)—this stated training rule; However, all these six dhammas arise from two sources: from speech, and from speech and mind; Padasodhammatulyatā: The meaning is that these are similar in nature to arising from padasodhamma.
Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of arising from padasodhamma.
398-9.Ekanti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyyā’’ti (pāci. 180) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Nāvanti ‘‘ekanāvaṃ abhiruheyyā’’ti (pāci. 188) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Paṇītañcāti ‘‘paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvābhuñjeyyā’’ti (pāci. 259) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Saṃvidhānañcāti mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya gamanasikkhāpadañca.Saṃhareti ‘‘sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpeyyā’’ti (pāci. 799) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Dhaññanti ‘‘āmakadhaññaṃ viññatvā vā’’ti (pāci. 821) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Nimantitā cevāti ‘‘nimantitā vā pavāritā vā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā’’ti (pāci. 1038) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Pāṭidesaniyaṭṭhakanti bhikkhunīnaṃ vuttā aṭṭha pāṭidesanīyā ceti buddhaseṭṭhena paññattā etā cuddasa sikkhācatusamuṭṭhānākāyato, kāyavācato, kāyacittato, vācācittato cāti catūhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhahanti. Samuṭṭhānatoaddhānenaaddhānasikkhāpadena samā hontīti matāti yojanā.
398-9. Eka nti: "Should travel along a road for a distance having made an arrangement with a bhikkhunī" (pāci. 180)—this stated training rule; Nāva nti: "Should embark in the same boat" (pāci. 188)—this stated training rule; Paṇītañcā ti: "When not ill, should request choice foods for his own sake and eat them" (pāci. 259)—this stated training rule; Saṃvidhānañcā ti: The training rule about traveling after making an arrangement with a woman; Saṃhare ti: "Should have hair removed in a crowded place" (pāci. 799)—this stated training rule; Dhañña nti: "Having requested fresh grain" (pāci. 821)—this stated training rule; Nimantitā cevā ti: "Whether invited or uninvited, should eat or consume solid food or staple food" (pāci. 1038)—this stated training rule; Pāṭidesaniyaṭṭhaka nti: And the eight pāṭidesanīya rules stated for bhikkhunīs; These fourteen training rules proclaimed by the foremost Buddha arise from four sources: from body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from speech and mind; The connection is that they are equal through the distance to the training rule about distance.
Addhānasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of arising from distance.
400-1.Sutinti upassutitiṭṭhanasikkhāpadañca.Sūpādiviññattinti sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadañca.Andhakāreti ‘‘rattandhakāre appadīpe’’ti (pāci. 839) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Tatheva ca paṭicchanneti ‘‘paṭicchanne okāse’’ti (pāci. 843) vuttasikkhāpadañca.Okāseti ‘‘ajjhokāse purisena saddhi’’nti (pāci. 847) evaṃ vuttasikkhāpadañca.Byūhe cāti tadanantarameva ‘‘rathikāya vā byūhe vā siṅghāṭake vā purisena saddhi’’nti (pāci. 851) āgatasikkhāpadañcāti ime sabbepi ādiccabandhunā desitā cha dhammācatutthacchaṭṭhatokāyacittato, kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhahantātheyyasatthasamuṭṭhānātheyyasatthasikkhāpadena samānasamuṭṭhānā siyunti yojanā.
400-1. Suti nti: The training rule about eavesdropping; Sūpādiviññatti nti: The training rule about requesting soup, etc.; Andhakāre ti: "In the darkness of night without a lamp" (pāci. 839)—this stated training rule; Tatheva ca paṭicchanne ti: "In a concealed place" (pāci. 843)—this stated training rule; Okāse ti: "In the open with a man" (pāci. 847)—thus, the stated training rule; Byūhe cā ti: Immediately after that, "In a street or a crossroad or at the junction of four roads with a man" (pāci. 851)—this stated training rule that comes; All these six dhammas taught by the Kinsman of the Sun arise from the fourth and sixth: from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; The connection is that they have the same arising as the training rule about theft, the meaning is that they are of equal arising to the training rule about theft.
Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of arising from theft.
402.Chatta, daṇḍakarassāpīti ‘‘na chattapāṇissa daṇḍapāṇissā’’ti (pāci. 635) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.Satthāvudhakarassāpīti ‘‘na satthapāṇissa (pāci. 636), na āvudhapāṇissā’’ti (pāci. 637) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.Pādukūpāhanā, yānanti ‘‘na pādukāruḷhassa (pāci. 638), na upāhanāruḷhassa (pāci. 639), na yānagatassā’’ti (pāci. 640) vuttasikkhāpadattayañca.Seyyā, pallatthikāya cāti ‘‘na sayanagatassa (pāci. 641), na pallatthikāya nisinnassā’’ti (pāci. 642) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.
402. Chatta, daṇḍakarassāpī ti: "To one holding a sunshade or holding a stick" (pāci. 635)—these two stated training rules; Satthāvudhakarassāpī ti: "To one holding a knife (pāci. 636), to one holding a weapon" (pāci. 637)—these two stated training rules; Pādukūpāhanā, yāna nti: "To one wearing shoes (pāci. 638), to one wearing sandals (pāci. 639), to one riding in a vehicle" (pāci. 640)—these three stated training rules; Seyyā, pallatthikāya cā ti: "To one lying down (pāci. 641), to one sitting cross-legged" (pāci. 642)—these two stated training rules.
403.Veṭhitoguṇṭhito cāti ‘‘na veṭhitasīsassa (pāci. 643), na oguṇṭhitasīsassā’’ti (pāci. 644) vuttasikkhāpadadvayañcāti nidassitāsabbe ekādasadhammā vācācittasaṅkhātena ekena samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhitā dhammadesanasamuṭṭhānāti saññitā sallakkhitāti yojanā.
403. Veṭhitoguṇṭhito cā ti: "To one with covered head (pāci. 643), to one with veiled head" (pāci. 644)—these two stated training rules; All these eleven dhammas shown arise from one source: designated as speech and mind, and are identified as the arising of teaching dhamma.
Dhammadesanasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the arising of teaching dhamma.
404.Evaṃ tāva sambhinnasamuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ, niyatasamuṭṭhānaṃ tividhaṃ, taṃ ekasseva sikkhāpadassa hotīti visuṃyeva dassetumāha‘‘bhūtārocanakañcevā’’tiādi.Bhūtārocanakañcevāti tīhi acittakasamuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhitaṃ bhūtārocanasikkhāpadañca.Corivuṭṭhāpanampi cāti vācācittato, kāyavācācittato cāti dvīhi samuṭṭhitaṃ corivuṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadañca. Ananuññātamevaananuññātamattaṃ. Ananuññātamattanti vācato, kāyavācato, vācācittato, kāyavācācittato cāti catūhi samuṭṭhitaṃ ananuññātasikkhāpadañcāti.Idaṃ tayanti idaṃ sikkhāpadattayaṃ.Asambhinnanti kenaci aññena sikkhāpadena asammissasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
404. Thus, the mixed arising should be understood. The specific arising is threefold; To show that it belongs only to one training rule separately, he says ‘‘bhūtārocanakañcevā’’ etc.; Bhūtārocanakañcevā ti: And the training rule about revealing what is actual that arises from three non-mental sources; Corivuṭṭhāpanampi cā ti: And the training rule about ousting a thief that arises from two sources: speech and mind, and body, speech, and mind; Ananuññātamevaananuññātamattaṃ. Ananuññātamatta nti: The training rule about what is unpermitted that arises from four sources: from speech, from body and speech, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; Idaṃ taya nti: This set of three training rules has unmixed arising, meaning it is not mixed with any other training rule.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the explanation of the section on Arising
Samuṭṭhānasīsakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
in the Uttara Līnatthapakāsanī.
Āpattisamuṭṭhānakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Arising of Offences
405.Ādināti paṭhamena kāyasaṅkhātena samuṭṭhānena.
405. Ādinā ti: By the first arising designated as body.
406-7.Dukkaṭādayotiādi-saddena thullaccayasaṅghādisesā gahitā. Yathāha – ‘‘payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Ekaṃ piṇḍaṃ anāgate āpatti thullaccayassa. Tasmiṃ piṇḍe āgate āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti (pari. 277).Vikāle pana pācittīti vikālabhojanapācitti.Aññātihatthatoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāya hatthato.Gahetvāti khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā sahatthā paṭiggahetvā. ‘‘Pañca imā āpattiyo’’ti padacchedo.
406-7. Dukkaṭādayo ti: By the word ādi (etc.), thullaccaya and saṅghādisesa are included; As he said: "Dukkaṭa with each effort. If one eats a morsel and an offence is to come in the future, thullaccaya. When that morsel is swallowed, an offence of saṅghādisesa" (pari. 277); Vikāle pana pācittī ti: But pācittiya for eating at the wrong time; Aññātihatthato ti: From the hand of a bhikkhunī who is an outsider, who has entered an inner apartment; Gahetvā ti: Having personally received solid food or staple food; The word division is "Pañca imā āpattiyo" ("These are five offences").
408.Dutiyenāti vācāsaṅkhātena samuṭṭhānena.
408. Dutiyenā ti: By the arising designated as speech.
409-10.Samādisatikatheti ce.Sabbathā vipannanti adesitavatthukatādinā sabbappakārena vipannappadesaṃ.Kuṭinti saññācikāya kuṭiṃ. Yathāhaparivāre‘‘tassa kuṭiṃ karonti adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ sārambhaṃ aparikkamana’’nti (pari. 278). Padasodhammaṃ mūlaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ yassa pācittiyassāti tathā vuttaṃ, tenapadasodhammamūlena,sahatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.
409-10. Samādisatikatheti ce: If he instructs and speaks; Sabbathā vipanna nti: An area that is ruined in every way with the absence of stating the grounds etc.; Kuṭi nti: A hut for which they ask; As it says in the Parivāra: "They make a hut for him without stating the grounds, exceeding the proper measure, with damaging activity, without providing a surrounding space" (pari. 278); That pācittiya has padasodhamma as its root arising, therefore it is said to be padasodhammamūlena, and this is a phrase of doing with one's own hand (sahatthe**).
411.Tatiyena samuṭṭhānenāti kāyavācāsaṅkhātena samuṭṭhānena.
411. Tatiyena samuṭṭhānenā ti: By the arising designated as body and speech.
412.Saṃvidahitvānāti saddhiṃ vidahitvā, ‘‘kuṭiṃ karomā’’ti aññehi saddhiṃ mantetvāti attho.
412. Saṃvidahitvānā ti: Having made an arrangement together, meaning having conferred with others, "Let us make a hut."
413.Vatvāti attano atthāya viññāpetvā.Bhikkhuninti bhikkhūnaṃ bhuñjanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā ‘‘idha sūpaṃ detha, idha odanaṃ dethā’’ti vosāsamānaṃ upāsakānaṃ vatvā dāpentiṃ bhikkhuniṃ.Na nivāretvāti ‘‘apasakka tāva, bhagini, yāva bhikkhū bhuñjantī’’ti anapasādetvā bhuñjatoti yojanā.
413. Vatvā ti: Having requested for his own sake; Bhikkhuni nti: A bhikkhunī standing in the place where the bhikkhus eat, saying to the lay followers, "Give soup here, give rice here," and having them give it, being importunate; Na nivāretvā ti: Not turning her away, "Go away for a while, sister, until the bhikkhus have eaten," he eats without dismissing her, is the connection.
414.Catutthena kāyacittasamuṭṭhānena katiāpattiyo siyunti yojanā.
414. By the fourth arising of body and mind, how many offences can arise, is the connection.
417.Pañcamenāti vācācittasamuṭṭhānena.Vadanti vadanto samudācaranto.
417. Pañcamenā ti: By the arising of speech and mind; Vada nti: Speaking, uttering.
418.Kuṭinti nidassanamattaṃ, adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ sārambhaṃ aparikkamanaṃ senāsanampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
418. Kuṭi nti: This is merely an example; it should be understood to include a dwelling place without stating the grounds, exceeding the proper measure, with damaging activity, without providing a surrounding space.
419.Vāceti padaso dhammanti ettha ‘‘anupasampanna’’nti seso. Yathāha – ‘‘bhikkhu akappiyasaññī anupasampannaṃ padaso dhammaṃ vācetī’’ti (pari. 281).Davakamyatā vadantassāti jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi kīḷādhippāyena vadantassa.Davakamyatāti ca ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.22, 24, 422; a. ni. 6.58; 8.9; mahāni. 199, 206; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518) viya ya-kāralopena niddeso.
419. Vāceti padaso dhamma nti: Here, "to one who is not fully ordained" is understood; As he said: "A bhikkhu, perceiving what is allowable as unallowable, recites dhamma phrase by phrase to one who is not fully ordained" (pari. 281); Davakamyatā vadantassā ti: To one speaking with the intention of playing with grounds for abuse such as birth, etc.; Davakamyatā ti: And this is an indication with the elision of the ya-sound, like in "Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso," etc. (ma. ni. 1.22, 24, 422; a. ni. 6.58; 8.9; mahāni. 199, 206; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518).
420.Chaṭṭhena kāyavācācittasamuṭṭhānena.Saṃvidahitvānāti saṃvidhāya, ‘‘tvañca ahañca ekato avaharissāmā’’ti sammantanaṃ katvā.Bhaṇḍaṃ haratīti ‘‘bhāriyaṃ tvaṃ ekaṃ passaṃ gaṇha, ahaṃ ima’’nti vatvā tena saha ṭhānā cāveti ce.
420. By the sixth arising of body, speech, and mind; Saṃvidahitvānā ti: Having made an arrangement, having made an agreement, "You and I will steal together;" Bhaṇḍaṃ haratī ti: Saying, "You take one heavy side, and I will take this," if he moves it from its place with him.
423.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsane.Vimatūparamaṃ paramanti ettha ‘‘kappiyaṃ nu kho, akappiya’’nti vā ‘‘āpatti nu kho, anāpattī’’ti vā ‘‘dhammo nu kho, adhammo’’ti vā evamādinā nayena vividhenākārena pavattā vimati vicikicchā vimati. Vimatiṃ uparameti vināsetītivimatūparamaṃ. Paramaṃuttamaṃ.Uttaranti vibhaṅgakhandhakāgatānaṃ nidānādivinicchayānaṃ pañhauttarabhāvena ṭhitattā uttaraṃ. Imaṃ uttaraṃ nāma pakaraṇaṃyo uttaratipaññāya ogāhetvā pariyosāpeti. Idha ‘‘uttaraṃ uttara’’nti padadvaye ekaṃ guṇanidassanaṃ, ekaṃ satthanidassananti gahetabbaṃ. Sunayena yuto so puggalovinayaṃpiṭakaṃ uttaratīti sambandho. Kiṃ visiṭṭhanti āha‘‘sunaya’’ntiādi. Suṭṭhu cārittavārittadaḷhīkaraṇasithilakaraṇabhedā paññattianaupaññattādinayā etthātisunayo,taṃ. Suṭṭhu nīyati vinicchayo etenātisunayo,uttaravinicchayo, tena. Vinicchayāvabodhena saṃyutto samannāgato. Dukkhena uttarīyatītiduttaraṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīladīpakattena samādhipaññānibbānasaṅkhātauttarappattiyā patiṭṭhābhāvatouttaraṃ uttaratiogāhetvā pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇātīti attho.
423. Idha: In this Dispensation. Vimatūparamaṃ paramaṃ: Here, "vimatūparamaṃ paramaṃ" means that vimati, doubt or uncertainty, is the wavering or questioning that arises in various ways, such as "Is this allowable or not allowable?", "Is this an offense or not an offense?", or "Is this Dhamma or not Dhamma?" Vimatūparamaṃ: One who dispels or destroys doubt. Paramaṃ: Supreme, excellent. Uttaraṃ: "Uttaraṃ" refers to the decisions, beginning with the origin (nidāna), found in the Vibhaṅga and Khandhaka, which stand as answers to questions. Yo uttarati: One who masters, comprehends, and completes this section called uttaraṃ with wisdom. Here, in the two words "uttaraṃ uttaraṃ," one should take one as indicating a quality and the other as indicating the teaching (satthu). The connection is that the person endowed with good method also masters the Vinaya Piṭaka. What is special? He says, "Sunayaṃ" etc. Sunayo: Because good methods of strengthening or relaxing (daḷhīkaraṇa-sithilakaraṇa) rules, such as those pertaining to what is established (paññatti) and not established (anaupaññatti), are present here. Sunayo: Because it leads well, it is a good method, a decision, and it involves the decision regarding the uttaraṃ. He is joined and endowed with the understanding of decisions. Duttaraṃ: Difficult to cross over. Uttaraṃ uttarati: Because it serves as a foundation for attaining the supreme (uttara) state, which includes the virtue of Pātimokkhasaṃvara, and the achievement of higher attainments—samādhi, paññā, and Nibbāna—he crosses over, masters, and reaches the end.
Idha yo vimatūparamaṃ paramaṃ uttaraṃ uttaraṃ nāma pakaraṇaṃ uttarati, sunayena yuto so puggalo sunayaṃ duttaraṃ uttaraṃ vinayaṃ uttaratīti yojanā. Ca-saddena satthantarasamuccayatthena imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Seyyathidaṃ, idha yo sunayaṃ duttaraṃ uttaraṃ vinayaṃ uttarati, sunayena yuto so puggalo vimatūparamaṃ paramaṃ uttaraṃ uttaraṃ nāma pakaraṇaṃ uttaratīti. Iminā yo uttaraṃ jānāti, so vinayaṃ jānāti. Yo vinayaṃ jānāti, so uttaraṃ jānātīti uttarapakaraṇassa vinayapiṭakajānane accantūpakāritā vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Here, the meaning is that one who masters the supreme uttaraṃ, which dispels doubt, and who is endowed with good method, masters the Vinaya, which is of good method and difficult to cross. The conjunction "ca" indicates that this meaning encompasses other teachings as well. For example, one who masters the Vinaya, which is of good method and difficult to cross, is endowed with good method, and also masters the supreme uttaraṃ, which dispels doubt. Through this, it should be seen that the uttaraṃ section is extremely helpful in understanding the Vinaya Piṭaka, as one who knows the uttaraṃ knows the Vinaya, and one who knows the Vinaya knows the uttaraṃ.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the explanation of the hidden meanings in the Uttara.
Āpattisamuṭṭhānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Discourse on the Arising of Offences is concluded.
Ekuttaranayakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on the Ekuttara Method
424.Ito paranti ito samuṭṭhānavinicchayakathāya paraṃ.Paranti uttamaṃ.Ekuttaraṃ nayanti ekekaaṅgātirekatāya ekuttarasaṅkhātaṃ ekakadukādinayaṃ.
424. Ito paraṃ: Beyond this, beyond the discourse on the determination of arising (samuṭṭhānavinicchayakathā). Paraṃ: Supreme, excellent. Ekuttaraṃ nayaṃ: The method known as "Ekuttara," consisting of numerical categories beginning with one, increasing by one.
425-7.Ke āpattikarā dhammā…pe… kā cādesanagāminīti ekekapañhavasena uttānatthoyeva.
425-7. Ke āpattikarā dhammā…pe… kā cādesanagāminī: The meaning is straightforward through individual questions.
428.Samuṭṭhānānīti ādiko vissajjanasaṅkhāto uttaravādo. Tatthasamuṭṭhānāni…pe… dīpitāti yasmā etesaṃ vasena puggalo āpattiṃ karoti āpajjati, tasmā‘‘āpattikarā’’ti vuttā.
428. Samuṭṭhānāni: The reply, known as the explanation, begins with this. There, samuṭṭhānāni…pe… dīpitā: Because a person commits or incurs an offense based on these, they are called "āpattikarā."
429.Tatthāti tāsu āpattīsu.Lahukāti lahukena vinayakammena visujjhanato lahukā. Garukena vinayakammena visujjhanato saṅghādisesāpatti, kenaci ākārena anāpattibhāvaṃ upanetuṃ asakkuṇeyyato pārājikāpatti ca garukāpatti nāma, tā pana lahukāsu vuttāsu tabbipariyāyato ñātuṃ sakkāti vissajjane visuṃ na vuttā.
429. Tattha: Among those offenses. Lahukā: Light, because they are purified by a light disciplinary act (vinayakamma). Saṅghādisesa offenses are heavy because they are purified by a heavy disciplinary act, and Pārājika offenses are heavy because they cannot be brought to a state of non-offense in any way. However, since they can be understood from the opposite of what is stated about the light offenses, they are not stated separately in the explanation.
431.Duṭṭhuṃ kucchitabhāvaṃ paramajegucchaṃ nindanīyabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatītiduṭṭhullaṃ,pārājikasaṅghādisesaṃ. Tenāha‘‘duvidhāpatti ādito’’ti.
431. Duṭṭhullaṃ: That which goes to a state of disgust, revulsion, and blameworthiness; a Pārājika or Saṅghādisesa offense. Therefore, he said, "duvidhāpatti ādito."
432.Pañcānantariyasaṃyuttāti mātughātakapitughātakaarahantaghātakehi āpannā manussaviggahapārājikāpatti ca lohituppādakasaṅghabhedakānaṃ abhabbatāhetukā kāyavacīdvārappavattā akusalacetanāsaṅkhātā pārājikā ca anantarameva apāyuppattihetutāya ime pañca anantarasaṃyuttā nāma. Tā pana micchattaniyatesu antogadhattā‘‘niyatā’’ti vuttā.
432. Pañcānantariyasaṃyuttā: Those who have committed matricide, patricide, or the murder of an Arahant, along with the Pārājika offense involving the intentional emission of semen, and the Pārājika consisting of the evil intention (akusalacetanā) that arises through the doors of body and speech, causing schism in the Saṅgha, which results in inability (to attain liberation), are called the five immediately effective (anantariya) offenses. However, because these are included among those definitely wrong, they are called "niyatā."
Parivāre(pari. 321) pana aññepi antarāyikādī bahū ekakā dassitā, te pana ganthabhīrukajanānuggahena ācariyena idha na dassitā. Atthikehiparivāreyeva (pari. 321) gahetabbā. Ettha ca sattapi āpattiyo sañcicca vītikkantā saggantarāyañceva mokkhantarāyañca karontītiantarāyikā. Ajānantena vītikkantā pana paṇṇattivajjāpatti neva saggantarāyaṃ, na mokkhantarāyaṃ karotītianantarāyikā. Antarāyikaṃ āpannassapi desanāgāminiṃ desetvā vuṭṭhānagāminito vuṭṭhāya suddhipattassa, sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa ca avārito saggamaggamokkhamaggoti.
In the Parivāra (pari. 321), many other single categories such as obstacles (antarāyika) are shown, but the teacher did not show them here out of consideration for those who fear prolixity. Those who are interested should take them from the Parivāra itself (pari. 321). Here, the seven offenses intentionally transgressed are antarāyikā, obstacles, as they cause obstacles to heaven and liberation. However, the offenses that are transgressed unknowingly, those that are offenses against the rule (paṇṇattivajja), do not cause obstacles to heaven or liberation and are anantarāyikā. Even for one who has committed an obstacle offense (antarāyikaṃ), the path to heaven and liberation is not blocked after confessing the offense subject to confession (desanāgāminiṃ) and rising from the offense subject to rising, and for one who stands in the state of a novice.
Ekakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Single Categories.
435.Addhavihīnonāma ūnavīsativasso.Aṅgavihīnonāma hatthacchinnādibhedo.Vatthuvipannonāma paṇḍako, tiracchānagato, ubhatobyañjanako ca. Avasesā theyyasaṃvāsakādayo aṭṭha abhabbaṭṭhānappattā dukkaṭakārino nāma, imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkaṭena attano kammena abhabbaṭṭhānappattāti attho.Aparipuṇṇoti aparipuṇṇapattacīvaro.No yācatīti upasampannaṃ na yācati.Paṭisiddhāti ‘‘dve puggalā na upasampādetabbā’’tiādinā (pari. 322) vāritā.
435. Addhavihīno: One who is less than twenty years old. Aṅgavihīno: One who is mutilated, such as having a hand cut off. Vatthuvipanno: One who is a paṇḍaka (impotent), an animal, or of dual gender. The remaining eight, beginning with those living in dependence (theyyasaṃvāsaka), who have reached a state of inability (abhabbaṭṭhāna), are called those who commit wrongdoings (dukkaṭakārino); that is, in this very existence, they have reached a state of inability due to their own wrongdoing (dukkaṭa). Aparipuṇṇo: One whose robe and bowl are incomplete. No yācati: Does not request from an ordained monk. Paṭisiddhā: Those prohibited by rules such as "Two people should not be ordained" (pari. 322).
436.Haveti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Laddhasamāpattissa bhikkhuno dīpitā āpattiatthi haveattheva.No laddhasamāpattissāti aladdhasamāpattissa dīpitā āpatti atthevāti yojanā.
436. Have: An expletive particle. The offense shown to a bhikkhu who has attained attainment atthi have: certainly exists. No laddhasamāpattissā: The offense shown to one who has not attained attainment also certainly exists.
437.Bhūtassāti attani santassa uttarimanussadhammassa.Abhūtārocanāpattīti catutthapārājikāpatti. Asamāpattilābhino niddiseti yojanā.
437. Bhūtassā: Of a superior human state that exists in oneself. Abhūtārocanāpattī: The offense of falsely claiming such attainment, the fourth Pārājika. It indicates one who has not attained attainment.
438.‘‘Atthisaddhammasaṃyuttā’’tiādīsuatthi-saddo paccattekavacanantehi paccekaṃ yojetabbo.
438. In "Atthi saddhammasaṃyuttā" etc., the word "atthi" should be connected individually with each word in the singular.
439.Padasodhammamūlādītiādi-saddena ‘‘uttarichappañcavācādhammadesanā’’ti āpattīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
439. Padasodhammamūlādī: The "ādi"-word includes offenses such as "Preaching the Dhamma with more than five or six words."
440.Bhogeti paribhoge.‘‘Saparikkhārasaṃyutā’’ti idañca nidassanamattaṃ. ‘‘Pattacīvarānaṃ nissajjane, kiliṭṭhacīvarānaṃ adhovane, malaggahitapattassa apacane’’ti evamādikā ayuttaparibhogā āpattiyopi sakaparikkhārasaṃyuttāyeva.
440. Bhoge: In use, consumption. "Saparikkhārasaṃyutā": This is merely an example. Offenses involving improper use, such as "abandoning bowls and robes," "leaving soiled robes in the open air," and "not cooking with a bowl covered in dirt," are also connected with one's requisites.
441.Mañcapīṭhādintiādi-saddena bhisiādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Ajjhokāsattharepi cāti ajjhokāse atthare attharāpane sati.Anāpucchāva gamaneti anāpucchitvā vā gamane.Vā-saddena anuddharitvā vā anuddharāpetvā vā gamanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Parasantakasaṃyutāti paraparikkhārapaṭibaddhā.
441. Mañcapīṭhādi: The "ādi"-word includes cushions and so on. Ajjhokāsattharepi ca: And when spreading out in the open air. Anāpucchāva gamane: Or going without asking permission. The word "vā" includes going without removing or having removed the spread. Parasantakasaṃyutā: Connected with another's property.
443.‘‘Sikharaṇīsī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ saccaṃ, taṃ bhaṇatogarukaṃduṭṭhullavācāsaṅghādiseso siyāti yojanā.
443. The connection is that if one speaks what is true, saying "Sikharaṇīsī," it could be a garukaṃ, a grave Duṭṭhulla-vācā, a Saṅghādisesa offense.
445.Garukāpattīti uttarimanussadhammapārājikāpatti.Bhūtassārocaneti bhūtassa uttarimanussadhammassa anupasampannassa ārocane.Saccaṃ vadatoti saccaṃ vacanaṃ vadantassa.Lahukāti pācittiyāpatti.
445. Garukāpattī: Grave offense, the Pārājika of falsely claiming superior human states. Bhūtassārocane: Announcing a real superior human state to one who is not ordained. Saccaṃ vadato: While speaking the truth. Lahukā: A Pācittiya offense.
447.Vikopetunti vaggakaraṇena vikopetuṃ.Hatthapāsaṃ jahanti antosīmāya eva hatthapāsaṃ jahanto, hatthapāsaṃ jahitvā ekamantaṃ nisīdantoti attho.Phuseti bhūmigato phuseyya.
447. Vikopetuṃ: To disrupt by creating a faction. Hatthapāsaṃ jahaṃ: Abandoning the hand-span boundary only within the boundary, meaning abandoning the hand-span boundary and sitting to one side. Phuse: Should touch the ground.
448.Vehāsakuṭiyā upari āhaccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā abhinisīdanto vehāsagato āpajjatīti yojanā. Sace taṃ bhūmiyaṃ paññapetvā nisajjeyya, na āpajjeyya. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘na bhūmito’’ti.
448. The connection is that one sitting on a bench or seat placed above the ground-level dwelling incurs an offense while in the air. If one were to set it on the ground and sit, one would not incur an offense. Therefore, it was said, "na bhūmito."
449.Pavisantoti ārāmaṃ pavisanto.Nikkhamanti tato eva nikkhamanto.Tanti ārāmaṃ.
449. Pavisanto: Entering the ārāma. Nikkhamaṃ: Exiting from there. Taṃ: That ārāma.
450.Vattamapūretvānāti sīsato chattāpanayanaṃ, pādato upāhanāmuñcanavattaṃ akatvā.Nikkhamanti bahi nikkhamanto chattupāhanaṃ dhārentopi na āpajjati.
450. Vattamapūretvānā: Without fulfilling the duty of removing the umbrella from the head and the shoes from the feet. Nikkhamaṃ: One who holds an umbrella or wears shoes while exiting does not incur an offense.
451.‘‘Nikkhamanto’’ti idaṃ ‘‘nikkhama’’nti etassa atthapadaṃ.Pavisaṃ na cāti yaṃ ārāmaṃ sandhāya gato, taṃ pavisanto na āpajjeyya.
451. "Nikkhamanto" This is the meaning of "nikkhamaṃ". Pavisaṃ na cā: One who is going in reference to that ārāma, should not incur an offense when entering.
453.Yā kāci bhikkhunī atigambhīraṃ udakasuddhikaṃ ādiyantī āpattiṃ āpajjatīti yojanā.
453. The connection is that whatever bhikkhunī takes up very deep water, she incurs an offense.
457.Vattaṃ panattanoti yaṃ attano netthāravattaṃ vuttaṃ, so taṃ asamādiyantova āpajjati nāmāti yojanā.
457. Vattaṃ panattano: The connection is that one incurs an offense for not undertaking one’s own stated netthāra duty.
460.Itarassaācariyassa, tathā saddhivihārikassa ca.
460. Itarassa: Of the teacher, and also of the pupil living with him.
462.Dadamānoti pārivattakaṃ vinā dadamāno.
462. Dadamāno: Giving without exchange.
463.Mudūti mudupiṭṭhiko. ‘‘Lambīādino’’ti padacchedo.Ādi-saddena ‘‘hatthena upakkamitvā asuciṃ mocentassa, ūrunā aṅgajātaṃ pellantassa, attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodantiyā bhikkhuniyā āpattī’’ti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Attāti ettha nissitāti uttarapadalopo, vibhattilopo ca niruttilakkhaṇena daṭṭhabbo.Sesāti methunadhammakāyasaṃsaggapahāradānādīsu vuttāpatti.Paranissitāti paraṃ nissāya āpajjitabbāti attho.
463. Mudū: Soft-backed. "Lambīādino": The word division is "Lambī-ādino". The "ādi"-word includes "one who attempts to discharge excrement with the hand, one who moves the genital organ with the thigh, and offenses of a bhikkhunī who kills herself and cries." Attā: Here, "nissitāti" is a deletion of the last word and a deletion of the case ending, which should be understood by the characteristics of etymology. Sesā: The offenses stated in relation to sexual intercourse, physical contact, striking, giving, and so on. Paranissitā: Meaning, to incur an offense by relying on another.
465.‘‘Na, bhikkhave, ovādo na gahetabbo’’ti vacanato ovādaṃna gaṇhantona paṭiggaṇhanto vajjataṃ āpajjati nāma.
465. Na gaṇhanto: Because of the saying "Bhikkhus, advice should not be taken," one who does not accept or receive advice incurs an offense.
470.Aruṇuggeti aruṇuggamane.Naaruṇuggameti aruṇuggamanato aññasmiṃ kāle.
470. Aruṇugge: At the rising of dawn. Naaruṇuggame: At a time other than the rising of dawn.
471.Ekarattātikkame chārattātikkame sattāhātikkame dasāhātikkameti yojanā.Ādi-saddena māsādīnaṃ saṅgaho.Vuttamāpattinti sabbattha nissaggiye pācittiyāpattiṃ. ‘‘Āpajjati aruṇuggame’’ti padacchedo.
471. The connection is to exceed one night, exceed six nights, exceed seven days, exceed ten days. The "ādi"-word includes months and so on. Vuttamāpattiṃ: Everywhere, the Nissaggiya Pācittiya offense. The word division is "Āpajjati aruṇuggame."
473.Parasantakaṃ rukkhalatādiṃ theyyāya chindantassa pārājikaṃ, chindantassa pācittimattaṃ hotīti āha‘‘bhūtagāmaṃ chindanto pārājikañca pācittiñca phuse’’ti.
473. He says, "bhūtagāmaṃ chindanto pārājikañca pācittiñca phuse," meaning that if one fells another's tree or creeper with the intention of theft, it is a Pārājika, but if one is merely felling it, it is only a Pācittiya.
475.Chādento panāti ettha ‘‘kā āpattī’’ti seso. Tatra āha‘‘āpattiṃ chādento naro āpajjatī’’ti.
475. Chādento panā: Here, "kā āpattī" is understood. There he says, "āpattiṃ chādento naro āpajjatī."
Acchinnoti acchinnacīvaro.Nacchādentoti tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā sākhābhaṅgādinā yena kenaci attano hirikopinaṃ appaṭicchādento. Yathāha – ‘‘tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā paṭicchādetvā āgantabbaṃ, na tveva naggena āgantabbaṃ. Yo āgaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 517).
Acchinno: With an unpatched robe. Nacchādento: Not covering one's private parts with grass, leaves, broken branches, or anything else. As he said – "One should cover oneself with grass or leaves and come, but one should not come naked. Whoever should come, there is an offense of Dukaṭa" (pārā. 517).
476.Kusacīrādintiādi-saddena vākacīraphalakacīrādīnaṃ titthiyadhajānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Dhārento koci āpajjatīti seso. Tatrāha – ‘‘kusacīrādīni dhārento dhārento āpajjatī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 322).
476. Kusacīrādi: The "ādi"-word includes garments made of bark, fruit, or leaves, and the emblems of sectarians. "Dhārento koci āpajjatīti" is understood. There he says - "Whoever wears kusacīra etc. incurs an offense while wearing them" (pari. aṭṭha. 322).
477.Yaṃ nissaṭṭhapattaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ te bhikkhu patto yāvabhedanāya dhāretabbo’’tidinnaṃ,taṃ sakkaccaṃ adhārentocadosavāhoti āpajjati āpattiṃ. Sacittakācittakadukassa saññāvimokkhadukaṃ yathākkamaṃ pariyāyoti āha‘‘sacittakaduka’’ntiādi.
477. He says, "sacittakaduka" etc., meaning that one incurs an offense by not respectfully wearing a bowl that has been given, saying, "This bowl should be kept by you, bhikkhu, until it breaks." The two categories of intention and non-intention, and the two categories of recognition and release, are the respective arrangements.
Dukakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Two Categories.
478.Yā āpatti nāthe tiṭṭhante hoti, no parinibbute, sā āpatti atthi. Yā āpatti nāthe parinibbute hoti, na tu tiṭṭhante, sāpi atthi. Yā āpatti nāthe tiṭṭhantepi hoti parinibbutepi, sā āpatti atthīti yojanā.
478. There is an offense that occurs when the Teacher is present, but not when he has passed away. There is also an offense that occurs when the Teacher has passed away, but not when he is present. There is also an offense that occurs both when the Teacher is present and when he has passed away.
479.Sā katamāti āha‘‘ruhiruppādanāpattī’’tiādi. Tatthatheramāvusavādena, vadato parinibbuteti ‘‘yathā kho panānanda, etarahi bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ āvusovādena samudācaranti, na kho mamaccayena evaṃ samudācaritabbaṃ…pe… navakatarena bhikkhunā therataro bhikkhu ‘bhante’ti vā ‘āyasmā’ti vā samudācaritabbo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216) vacanato theraṃ āvusovādena samudācaraṇapaccayā āpattiṃ parinibbute bhagavati āpajjati, no tiṭṭhanteti attho.
479. What is that? He says, "ruhiruppādanāpattī" etc. There, theramāvusavādena, vadato parinibbute: Because of the saying "Just as, Ānanda, bhikkhus now address each other by name, this should not be done after my passing away… a junior bhikkhu should address a senior bhikkhu as ‘bhante’ or ‘āyasmā’" (dī. ni. 2.216), the meaning is that an offense is incurred in the case of addressing an elder with the word āvuso after the Blessed One has passed away, but not when he is present.
481.Kathaṃ kāleyeva āpatti siyā, na vikāle. Kathaṃ vikāleyeva āpatti siyā, kāle na siyā. Kathaṃ kāle ceva vikāle cātiubhayatthasiyāti pañhe.
481. How could an offense occur only at the proper time and not at the wrong time? How could an offense occur only at the wrong time and not at the proper time? How could an offense occur ubhayattha, at both the proper time and the wrong time?
482.Yathākkamaṃ vissajjento āha‘‘bhuñjato’’tiādi.
482. Answering in order, he says "bhuñjato" etc.
483.Avasesaṃ pana sabbaṃ āpattiṃ kālavikālesu sabbadā āpajjati, tattha ca saṃsayo natthīti yojanā.
483. However, the connection is that one always incurs all the remaining offenses at the proper and wrong times, and there is no doubt about it.
484.‘‘Atthāpatti rattiṃ āpajjati, no divā, atthāpatti divā āpajjati, no rattiṃ, atthāpatti rattiñceva āpajjati divā cā’’ti (pari. 323) vuttaṃ tikaṃ dassetumāha‘‘rattimevā’’tiādi.
484. To show the triad that was said – "There is an offense that is incurred at night, not during the day; there is an offense that is incurred during the day, not at night; there is an offense that is incurred both at night and during the day" (pari. 323) – he says "rattimevā" etc.
486.Atthāpatti dasavasso āpajjati, no ūnadasavasso, sā kathaṃ siyā. Atthāpatti ūnadasavasso āpajjati, no dasavasso, sā kathaṃ hoti. Atthāpatti dasavassopi āpajjati ūnadasavassopītiubhayatthapiāpatti kathaṃ hotīti yojanā.
486. How could there be an offense that a ten-year-old incurs, but not one who is under ten years old? How could there be an offense that one under ten years old incurs, but not one who is ten years old? How could an offense occur ubhayatthapi, both for one who is ten years old and for one who is under ten years old?
487.Tattha vissajjanamāha‘‘upaṭṭhāpetī’’tiādi. ‘‘Bālo’’ti etassa hi atthapadaṃ‘‘abyatto’’ti.
487.Here, the explanation begins with ‘‘upaṭṭhāpetī’’ (establishes), etc. The meaning of ‘‘bālo’’ (foolish) is explained by the word ‘‘abyatto’’ (inexperienced).
488.Ūnadasavasso evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ paṇḍito’’ti parisaṃ gaṇhati, tathā āpattiṃ āpajjatīti yojanā. ‘‘Dasavasso ūno’’ti padacchedo. Dasavasso, ūnadasavasso cāti ubhopete parisupaṭṭhāpanāpattito aññaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjatīti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘āpajjante’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena na-kāralopo.
488.The meaning is that a person under ten years old takes himself to be wise and includes himself in the assembly, and thus incurs an offense. ‘‘Dasavasso ūno’’ (less than ten years old) is a separation of words. The meaning is that both someone who is ten years old and someone who is less than ten years old incur an offense other than the offense of establishing a gathering. Here, the na-kāra (n) is dropped due to the meter of the verse, where ‘‘āpajjante’’ (they incur) should have been used.
489.Kathaṃ kāḷe āpattiṃ āpajjati, na juṇhe, kathaṃ juṇhe āpattiṃ āpajjati, na kāḷasmiṃ, kathaṃ kāḷe ca juṇhe cātiubhayatthapiāpajjatīti yojanā.
489.How does one incur an offense in the dark period (kāḷa), but not in the bright period (juṇha)? How does one incur an offense in the bright period, but not in the dark period? How does one incur an offense in both the dark and bright periods?
490.Vissajjanamāha‘‘vassa’’ntiādi. ‘‘Āpajjate appavārento’’ti padacchedo.Juṇheti purimapakkhe.Kāḷaketi aparapakkhe.
490.The explanation begins with ‘‘vassa’’ (rainy season), etc. ‘‘Āpajjate appavārento’’ (one incurs by not inviting) is a separation of words. Juṇhe (in the bright period) means in the waxing fortnight. Kāḷake (in the dark period) means in the waning fortnight.
491.Avipattināti catubbidhavipattirahitattā avipattinā bhagavatā paññattaṃ.Avasesanti vassaṃ anupagamanāpattiyā ca pavāraṇāpattiyā ca avasesaṃ sabbaṃ āpattiṃ.
491.Avipattinā (without fault) means declared by the Buddha, who is without the four kinds of faults. Avasesaṃ (the remainder) means all offenses except for incurring an offense by not entering the rainy season residence (vassaṃ) and the offense regarding pavāraṇā.
492.Vassūpagamanaṃ kāḷe kappati, juṇhe no kappati, pavāraṇā juṇhe kappati, kāḷe no kappati,sesaṃanuññātaṃ sabbaṃ saṅghakiccaṃ kāḷe ca juṇhe cātiubhayatthapikappatīti yojanā.
492.Entering the vassa period is suitable (kappati) in the dark period but not suitable in the bright period; pavāraṇā is suitable in the bright period, but not suitable in the dark period; the remaining permitted Sangha business is suitable in both the dark and bright periods.
493.Atthāpatti hemante hoti,itarautudvayegimhānavassānasaṅkhāte na hoti, atthāpatti gimheyeva hoti, nasesesuvassānahemantasaṅkhātesu, atthāpatti vasse hoti, noitaradvayehemantagimhasaṅkhāteti yojanā.
493.The atthāpatti (offense regarding that) occurs in the cold season (hemanta), but does not occur in the other two seasons, namely the hot season (gimha) and the rainy season (vassāna); the atthāpatti occurs only in the hot season, but not in the remaining cold and rainy seasons; the atthāpatti occurs in the rainy season, but not in the other two, namely the cold and hot seasons.
494-6.Sā tividhāpi āpatti katamāti āha‘‘dine pāṭipadakkhāte’’tiādi. Tatthadine…pe… puṇṇamāsiyāti aparakattikapuṇṇamāsiyā kāḷapakkhapāṭipadadivase paccuddharitvā vikappetvā ṭhapitaṃ pana taṃ vassasāṭikacīvaraṃ sace hemante nivāseti, hemante āpajjatīti yojanā.
494-6.He says, ‘‘dine pāṭipadakkhāte’’ (on the day called pāṭipada), etc., to show which is that threefold offense. There, dine…pe…puṇṇamāsiyā (on the day…until…the full-moon day): if that vassasāṭikacīvara (rain-cloth robe), having been put away after disassociating and changing it on the day of the pāṭipada of the dark fortnight of the latter Kattika full-moon day, is worn in the cold season, then one incurs the offense in the cold season.
Pacchimeti ettha sāmivacanappasaṅge bhummaṃ. Pacchimassa kattikassa yasmiṃ puṇṇame divase vassikasāṭikacīvaraṃ paccuddharitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ divase taṃ apaccuddharitvāva pāṭipade aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpento apaccuddharaṇapaccayā āpatti hemanteyeva āpajjati,itaregimhānavassānautudvaye na āpajjatīti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pari. aṭṭha. 323) niddiṭṭhanti yojanā. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassikasāṭikaṃ vassānaṃ catumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ, tato paraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358) vuttapāḷiyākurundaṭṭhakathāvacanassa avirujjhanato ‘‘tampi suvutta’’nti (pari. aṭṭha. 323)samantapāsādikāyavuttattā ‘‘hemante āpajjatī’’ti vacanassa ubhayampi attho hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
Pacchime (in the latter) here is a locative case where the nominative is expected. On whatever full-moon day of the latter Kattika the vassikasāṭikacīvara should be put away, if one raises the dawn on the pāṭipada without having put it away on that day, one incurs the offense in the cold season itself due to the condition of not putting it away, and one does not incur it in the other two seasons of the hot and rainy seasons. This is how it is stated in the Kurunda commentary (pari. aṭṭha. 323). Because it does not contradict the Pali statement, ‘‘I allow, monks, to keep the vassikasāṭika for four months of the rainy season, and to disassociate it after that’’ (mahāva. 358), and the statement of the Kurunda commentary, and because it is stated in the Samantapāsādikā, ‘‘that too is well said’’ (pari. aṭṭha. 323), it should be understood that the statement ‘‘one incurs the offense in the cold season’’ has both meanings.
497.Gimhānamāsānaṃ sambandhinigimhikeutumhi. Māsato atireko atirekamāsoti katvāatirekamāsokālo sesoti vattabbe kāle.Pariyesantoti aññātikaappavāritaṭṭhānato satuppādakaraṇena vassikasāṭikaṃ pariyesanto ca atirekamāso sesoti katvā nivāsento ca gimhe āpattiṃ āpajjati. ‘‘Na tu eva itarautudvaye’’ti padacchedo. Gimhe pariyesanto purimamāsattaye āpajjatīti katvā nivāsento aḍḍhamāsādhike gimhamāsattaye āpajjati.Nissandehe‘‘gimhānaṃ pacchimamāsato purimesu sattasu māsesū’’ti vuttaṃ, tadayuttaṃ ‘‘gimhāneyeva āpajjatī’’ti gimhāpattiyā dassitattā, ‘‘itarautudvaye’’ti paṭisiddhattā ca. Ettha ca gāthāya pariyesanāpattiyāyeva dassanaṃ nidassanamattanti katvā nivāsanāpattiyā ca gimheyeva sambhavoti sāpi dassitā.
497.Gimhike (summerly) means in the hot season (gimha) related to the months of the hot season. Atirekamāso (extra month) is made to be an extra month by considering more than a month as the time. Pariyesanto (searching) means that while searching for the vassikasāṭika from a place unknown and uninvited, with the intention of producing it, and while wearing it after considering there is an extra month left, one incurs an offense in the hot season. ‘‘Na tu eva itarautudvaye’’ (but not in the other two seasons) is a separation of words. While searching in the hot season, one incurs an offense in the first three months, and while wearing it after considering, one incurs an offense in three and a half hot season months. In Nissandeha, it is stated, "in the seven months prior to the last month of the hot season," but that is wrong, because the hot season offense has been shown by ‘‘gimhāneyeva āpajjati’’ (one incurs the offense in the hot season itself), and because it is prohibited by ‘‘itarautudvaye’’ (in the other two seasons). Here, the verse shows only the searching offense as a reason, and the wearing offense also occurs only in the hot season, so that too is shown.
498.Idhapana imasmiṃ sāsaneyobhikkhu vassikasāṭikacīvare vijjamāne naggo kāyaṃ ovassāpeti, sohaveekaṃsenavassevassānautumhi āpajjatīti yojanā.
498.Idha (here), however, in this Dispensation (sāsana), yo (whoever) bhikkhu makes his body wet (ovassāpeti) while naked when a vassikasāṭikacīvara is available, have, without a doubt, vasse (in the rainy season), incurs an offense in the rainy season.
499.‘‘Atthāpatti saṅgho āpajjati, na gaṇo na puggalo, atthāpatti gaṇo āpajjati, na saṅgho na puggalo, atthāpatti puggalo āpajjati, na saṅgho na gaṇo’’ti (pari. 323) vuttattikaṃ dassetumāha‘‘āpajjati hi saṅghovā’’tiādi.
499.He says, ‘‘āpajjati hi saṅghovā’’ (for the Sangha incurs an offense), etc., to show the triad that is stated as, ‘‘The Sangha incurs the atthāpatti, not the group, not the individual; the group incurs the atthāpatti, not the Sangha, not the individual; the individual incurs the atthāpatti, not the Sangha, not the group’’ (pari. 323).
500.Kathamāpajjatīti āha‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi.Adhiṭṭhānanti adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ karonto pārisuddhiuposathaṃ vāti sambandho. Idha attano yathāpattamuposathaṃ akatvā apattauposathakaraṇaṃ āpajjitabbāpattidassanassa adhippetattā, attakaraṇadosassa visuṃ visuṃ vakkhamānattā cana gaṇo na ca puggaloti ettha adhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto puggalo ca pārisuddhiṃ karonto gaṇo ca nāpajjatīti yathālābhayojanā kātabbā. Yathākkamaṃ yojanaṃ karomīti vipariyāyavikappo na kātabbo. Evamuparipi vipariyāyavipakkhaṃ katvā yathālābhayojanāva kātabbā.
500.He says, ‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’ (determination), etc., how does one incur it? Adhiṭṭhāna (determination) means in connection with undertaking the determination-uposatha (adhiṭṭhānuposatha) or the pārisuddhi-uposatha (declaration of purity uposatha). Here, because the undertaking of the uposatha regarding offenses without having done one's own appropriate uposatha is intended to show the offense to be incurred, and because the fault of doing it oneself will be stated separately, here in na gaṇo na ca puggalo (not the group nor the individual), the interpretation should be done as appropriate: the individual who makes the determination and the group who makes the declaration of purity do not incur the offense. The reverse alternative should not be done, saying, "I will do the interpretation in sequence." Even above, having done the reverse contrary, the interpretation should be done only as appropriate.
501.‘‘Uposatha’’nti idaṃ ‘‘suttuddesamadhiṭṭhāna’’nti padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
501.‘‘Uposatha’’ (Uposatha) should be connected individually with the words ‘‘suttuddesaṃ adhiṭṭhāna’’ (recitation of the sutta, determination).
502.Suttuddesaṃ karonto vāti etthavā-saddena pārisuddhiṃ gaṇhāti. Suttuddesaṃ, pārisuddhiṃ vā uposathaṃ karonto puggalo āpattiṃ āpajjati, suttuddesaṃ karonto saṅgho ca nāpajjati, pārisuddhiṃ karonto gaṇo ca na āpajjatīti yojanā.
502.Here, in ‘‘suttuddesaṃ karonto vā’’ (or while reciting the sutta), the word ‘‘vā’’ (or) includes pārisuddhi (purity). The interpretation is that the individual incurs the offense while undertaking the uposatha by reciting the sutta or the declaration of purity; the Sangha does not incur it while reciting the sutta, and the group does not incur it while making the declaration of purity.
503.Kathaṃ pana gilānova āpattiṃ āpajjati, na agilāno, kathaṃ agilānova āpattiṃ āpajjati, no gilāno, kathaṃ gilāno ca agilāno caubhopiāpajjantīti yojanā.
503.But how does only a sick person incur the offense, not a healthy person? How does only a healthy person incur the offense, not a sick person? How do both a sick and a healthy person incur the offense?
504.Yo panaakallakogilāno aññena pana bhesajjena atthe satitadaññaṃtato aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ viññāpeti,so āpajjatipācittiyāpattinti yojanā.
504.However, if a invalid sick person, when there is a need for another medicine, asks for another medicine different from that, he incurs a pācittiya offense.
505.Bhesajjena atthe avijjamānepi sace bhesajjaṃ viññāpeti, agilānova viññattipaccayā āpattiṃāpajjati. Sesaṃpana āpattiṃ gilānaagilānāubhopiāpajjanti.
505.Even when there is no need for medicine, if he asks for medicine, only the healthy person incurs the offense due to the condition of asking. The remaining offense both the sick and healthy incur.
506.Atthāpatti antova āpajjati, na bahiddhā, tathā atthāpatti bahi eva āpajjati, na anto, atthāpatti anto, bahiddhātiubhayatthapiāpajjatīti yojanā.
506.The atthāpatti occurs only inside, not outside; similarly, the atthāpatti occurs only outside, not inside; the atthāpatti occurs inside and outside, both.
507.Kevalaṃ antoyeva āpajjatīti yojanā.
507.It occurs only inside.
508.Mañcādinti saṅghikamañcādiṃ.
508.Mañcādi (couch etc.) means Sangha couches, etc.
509.‘‘Antosīmāya eva āpatti’’nti padacchedo. Kathaṃ antosīmāya eva āpattiṃ āpajjati, neva bahisīmāya āpattiṃ āpajjati, kathaṃ bahisīmāya eva āpattiṃ āpajjati, no antosīmāya āpattiṃ āpajjati, kathaṃ antosīmāya ca bahisīmāya cātiubhayatthapiāpajjatīti yojanā.
509.‘‘Antosīmāya eva āpatti’’nti (the offense is only within the boundary) is a word separation. How does one incur an offense only within the boundary, but not incur an offense outside the boundary? How does one incur an offense only outside the boundary, but not incur an offense inside the boundary? How does one incur an offense in both inside and outside the boundary?
510.Sachattupāhano bhikkhūti chattupāhanasahito āgantuko bhikkhu.Pavisanto tapodhanoti āgantukavattaṃ adassetvā saṅghārāmaṃ pavisanto.
510.Sachattupāhano bhikkhū (a bhikkhu with an umbrella and shoes) means an incoming bhikkhu with an umbrella and shoes. Pavisanto tapodhano (entering the hermitage) means entering the Sangha residence without showing the duties of an incoming bhikkhu.
511.‘‘Upacārassa atikkame’’ti padacchedo.
511.‘‘Upacārassa atikkame’’ (in transgression of the vicinity) is a separation of words.
512.Sesaṃsabbaṃ āpattiṃ antosīmāya ca bahisīmāya ca āpajjatīti yojanā. Ettha ca kiñcāpi vassacchedāpattiṃ bahisīmāgato āpajjati, bhikkhunīārāmapavesanāpattiṃ antosīmāya āpajjati, tadubhayaṃ pana āgantukagamikavattabhedāpattīhi ekaparicchedanti upalakkhaṇato eteneva viññāyatīti visuṃ na vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha īdisesu ṭhānesu vinicchayo veditabbo.
512.The remaining all offenses one incurs both inside and outside the boundary. Here, although one incurs the offense of cutting off the rainy season residence (vassacchedāpattiṃ) by going outside the boundary, and one incurs the offense of entering a bhikkhunī's residence inside the boundary, both of these are one section of the offenses due to the difference in the duties of incoming and outgoing bhikkhus, and it should be understood that they are indicated by this itself, so they are not stated separately. In this way, the decision should be understood in all such places.
Tikakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Trika Story.
515.Vacīdvārikamāpattinti musāvādapesuññaharaṇādivasena vacīdvāre āpajjitabbāpattiṃ.Paravācāya sujjhatīti saṅghamajjhe ekavācikāya tiṇavatthārakakammavācāya sujjhati.
515.Vacīdvārikamāpatti (offense through the door of speech) means an offense to be incurred through the door of speech, such as by means of false speech, tale-bearing, or stealing. Paravācāya sujjhati (is purified by the speech of others) means it is purified in the midst of the Sangha by the declaration of the tiṇavatthāraka act by one voice.
516.Vajjamevavajjatā,taṃ, pācittiyanti attho.
516.Vajja (fault) itself is vajjatā (faultiness); that is, pācittiya.
518-9.Taṃdesetvā visujjhantoti taṃ desetvā visuddho honto.Yāvatatiyakaṃ panāti yāvatatiyena samanubhāsanakammena āpannaṃ saṅghādisesāpattiṃ pana.Parivāsādītiādi-saddena mānattamūlāyapaṭikassanaabbhānāni gahitāni.
518-9.Taṃ desetvā visujjhanto (confessing that and becoming purified) means confessing that and becoming purified. Yāvatatiyakaṃ panā (but up to the third) means the Sanghādisesa offense incurred with the act of probation up to the third time. Parivāsādī (parivāsa etc.) means ādi (etc.) includes mānatta, mūlāya-paṭikassana, and abbhāna.
522.Kāyadvārikamāpattinti kāyadvārena āpajjitabbaṃ pahāradānādiāpattiṃ.
522.Kāyadvārikamāpatti (offense through the door of the body) means an offense to be incurred through the door of the body, such as the offense of giving a blow.
523.Kāyeneva visujjhatīti tiṇavatthārakaṃ gantvā kāyasāmaggiṃ dento visujjhati.
523.Kāyeneva visujjhati (is purified by the body itself) means one is purified by going to the tiṇavatthāraka and giving bodily unity.
526.Yo sutto āpattiṃ āpajjati, so kathaṃ paṭibuddho visujjhati. Yo paṭibuddhova āpanno, so kathaṃ sutto sujjhatīti yojanā.
526.How does one who incurs an offense while asleep become purified when awake? How does one who incurs an offense while awake become purified while asleep?
528.Sagāraseyyakādinti mātugāmena sahaseyyādiāpattiṃ.
528.Sagāraseyyakādi (sleeping with a woman etc.) means an offense such as sleeping with a woman.
529.Jaggantoti jāgaranto niddaṃ vinodento.
529.Jagganto (keeping awake) means keeping awake, removing sleepiness.
531.Paṭibuddhoti aniddāyanto.
531.Paṭibuddho (awake) means not sleeping.
532.Acittoti ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamissāmī’’ti cittā bhāvena acitto.
532.Acitto (unmindful) means without the thought, "I will transgress the training rule."
535.Sacittakāpattinti vikālabhojanādiāpattiṃ. Tiṇavatthāresayantoniddāyanto tiṇavatthārakakamme kariyamāne ‘‘imināhaṃ kammena āpattito vuṭṭhāmī’’ti cittarahito vuṭṭhahanto acittako visujjhati.
535.Sacittakāpatti (offense with mind) means an offense such as eating at the wrong time. While sayanto (lying down) in the tiṇavatthāra, while the tiṇavatthāraka act is being done, one who arises without a mind, without a thought of ‘‘by this act I will arise from the offense,’’ is purified unmindfully.
536.Pacchimaṃ tu padadvayanti –
536.Pacchimaṃ tu padadvayaṃ (but the last two words) are:
‘‘Āpajjitvā acittova, acittova visujjhati;
‘‘Having incurred it unmindfully, he is purified unmindfully;
Having incurred it mindfully, he is purified mindfully.’’
Amissetvāti acittasacittapadehi evameva missaṃ akatvā.Etthāti purimapadadvaye.Vuttānusārenāti vuttanayānusārena.
Amissetvā (without mixing) means without mixing unmindful and mindful in this way. Etthā (here) means in the former two words. Vuttānusārenā (according to what was said) means according to the way it was said.
539.Kammatoti samanubhāsanakammato.
539.Kammato (from the act) means from the act of probation.
540.Āpajjitvā akammatoti samanubhāsanakammaṃ vināva āpajjitvā.
540.Āpajjitvā akammato (having incurred it without the act) means having incurred the offense without the act of probation.
541.Samanubhāsane āpajjitabbaṃ saṅghādisesāpattiṃsamanubhāsanamāha kāraṇūpacārena.
541.Samanubhāsana (probation) refers to the Sanghādisesa offense to be incurred in probation, by way of figurative usage.
542.Avasesanti musāvādapācittiyādikaṃ.
542.Avasesaṃ (the remainder) means false speech, pācittiya, etc.
543.Visujjhati asammukhāti saṅghassa asammukhā visujjhati. Idañca sammukhāvinayena ceva paṭiññātakaraṇena ca samentaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha puggalasammukhatāya sabbhāvepi saṅghassa asammukhatāya āpajjati vā visujjhati vāti ‘‘asammukhā’’ti vuttaṃ.
543.Visujjhati asammukhā (is purified in the absence) means one is purified in the absence of the Sangha. And this is said with reference to the issue (adhikaraṇa) of offense that comes together with the presence-rule (sammukhāvinaya) and the declaration of acknowledgement (paṭiññātakaraṇa). There, even though there is a full presence for the individual, it is said ‘‘asammukhā’’ (in the absence) because one incurs or is purified in the absence of the Sangha.
551.‘‘Acittakacatukkaṃ ajānantacatukka’’nti kusalattikaphassapañcakādivohāro viya ādipadavasena vutto.
551.‘‘Acittakacatukkaṃ ajānantacatukka’’nti (the tetrad of the unmindful, the tetrad of the unknowing) is said by way of the word ādipada (beginning word) like the usage of kusalattika, phassapañcaka, etc.
552-3.Atthāpatti āgantuko āpajjati, nacetaroāvāsiko āpajjati, atthāpatti āvāsikova āpajjati, nacetaroāgantuko āpajjati, atthāpatti āgantuko ca āvāsiko ca te ubhopi āpajjanti, ubho sesaṃ na āpajjanti atthīti yojanā.
552-3.The atthāpatti is that the incoming bhikkhu incurs it, not cetaro (the other), the resident bhikkhu; the atthāpatti is that the resident bhikkhu incurs it, not cetaro (the other), the incoming bhikkhu; the atthāpatti is that both the incoming and the resident bhikkhu incur it; both do not incur the remaining, there is, is the meaning.
555.Itaroti āvāsiko.Āvāsavattanti āvāsikena āgantukassa kātabbavattaṃ.Āvāsīti āvāsiko.
555.Itaro (the other) means the resident bhikkhu. Āvāsavattaṃ (duties of the resident) means the duties to be done by the resident for the incoming bhikkhu. Āvāsī (resident) means a resident bhikkhu.
556.Na cevāgantukoti taṃ āvāsikavattaṃ akaronto āgantuko na ceva āpajjati.Sesaṃkāyavacīdvārikaṃ āpattiṃ.Ubhopiāgantukaāvāsikā. Bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃasādhāraṇaṃ āpattiṃna āpajjanti.
556.Na cevāgantuko (and not the incoming bhikkhu) means the incoming bhikkhu does not incur it by not doing those duties of the resident bhikkhu. Sesaṃ (the remaining) means the offense through the door of body and speech. Ubhopi (both) means the incoming and the resident. Bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs do not incur a shared offense.
557.Vatthunānattatāti vītikkamanānattatā.Āpattinānattatāti pārājikādīnaṃ sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ aññamaññanānattatā.
557.Vatthunānattatā (difference in basis) means difference in transgression. Āpattinānattatā (difference in offense) means the difference from each other of the seven groups of offenses, namely pārājika, etc.
563.‘‘Pārājikānaṃ…pe… nānabhāvo’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ saṅghādisesānaṃ aniyatādīhi vatthunānatāya ceva āpattinānatāya ca labbhamānattā.
563.‘‘Pārājikānaṃ…pe…nānabhāvo’’ (the difference…until…pārājika) is a reason, since it is obtained that there is a difference in basis and a difference in offense with the Sanghādisesa, etc., by means of the aniyata, etc.
565.Ayameva vinicchayoti na kevalaṃ pārājikāpattīsuyeva sādhāraṇāpattiyo ekato ca visuñca āpajjantānaṃ yathāvuttavinicchayo, atha kho avasesasādhāraṇāpattiyopi vuttanayena āpajjati, ayameva vinicchayo yojetabbo.
565.Ayameva vinicchayo (this is the decision) means not only in the pārājika offenses is the stated decision regarding those who incur shared offenses together and separately, but also the remaining shared offenses are incurred in the way it was said; this decision should be applied.
577.Ādiyantogaṇhanto.Payojentotigaṇhāpento.
577.Ādiyanto (taking the beginning) means taking. Payojentoti (causing to take) means causing to take.
579.Ūnakaṃpādaṃ…pe… lahuṃ phuseti thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭañca sandhāyāha.
579.Ūnakaṃ pādaṃ…pe…lahuṃ phuse (slightly touches the foot) refers to thullaccaya and dukkata.
580.Eteneva upāyena, sesakampi padattayanti yo ayaṃ paṭhamavinicchaye vuttanayo, eteneva nayena ūnapādaṃ ādiyanto lahukāpattiṃ āpajjati, pādaṃ vā atirekapādaṃ vā gahaṇatthaṃ āṇāpento garuṃ pārājikāpattiṃ āpajjati, pādaṃ vā atirekapādaṃ vā gaṇhanto ca gahaṇatthāya āṇāpento ca garuke pārājikāpattiyaṃyeva tiṭṭhati, ūnapādaṃ gaṇhanto ca gahaṇatthāya āṇāpento ca lahuke thullaccaye, dukkaṭe vā tiṭṭhatīti evaṃ sesakampi imaṃ padattayaṃ.Atthasambhavatoyevāti yathāvuttassa atthassa sambhavavaseneva.
580.Eteneva upāyena, sesakampi padattayanti, meaning "by this very method, also the remaining three terms": just as the method stated in the first determination (paṭhamavinicchaye), by this method, beginning with a deficient pāda, he incurs a light offense; ordering the acceptance of a pāda or an excess pāda, he incurs a grave, pārājika offense; both accepting a pāda or an excess pāda and ordering its acceptance, he remains in a grave pārājika offense; both accepting a deficient pāda and ordering its acceptance, he remains in a light thullaccaya or dukkaṭa offense. Thus, the remaining three terms (padattaya) should also be understood.Atthasambhavatoyevāti, meaning "only by the possibility of the meaning": by the very possibility of the meaning as stated above.
581-2.Kathaṃ kāleyeva āpatti siyā, no vikāle, vikāleyeva āpatti siyā, na ca kāle, atthāpatti kāle ca pakāsitā vikāle ca, atthāpatti neva kāle ca pakāsitā neva vikāle cāti yojanā.
581-2.The connection is as follows: How is there an offense at the right time (kāle) but not at the wrong time (vikāle)? How is there an offense at the wrong time but not at the right time? How is the matter-offense (atthāpatti) made known both at the right time and at the wrong time? How is the matter-offense made known neither at the right time nor at the wrong time?
586-7.Kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kiṃ kāle kappati vikāle tu no kappati, vikāle gahitaṃ kiṃ vikāle kappati, no kāle kappati, kāle ca vikāle ca paṭiggahitaṃ kiṃ nāma kāle ca vikāle ca kappati, kāle ca vikāle ca paṭiggahitaṃ kiṃ nāma kāle ca vikāle ca na kappati, vada bhadramukhāti yojanā.
586-7.The connection is as follows: What is received at the right time, does it suit at the right time but not at the wrong time? What is received at the wrong time, does it suit at the wrong time but not at the right time? What is received both at the right time and at the wrong time, what indeed suits both at the right time and at the wrong time? What is received both at the right time and at the wrong time, what indeed does not suit both at the right time and at the wrong time? Tell me, O venerable one.
589.Vikāleyeva kappati, aparajju kālepi na kappatīti yojanā.
589.The connection is as follows: It suits only at the wrong time, and it does not suit even at the right time on the following day.
592.Kuladūsanakammādintiādi-saddena abhūtārocanarūpiyasaṃvohāraviññattikuhanādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
592.Kuladūsanakammādinti, meaning "actions that defile families, etc.": By the term ādi ("etc."), the inclusion is of behavior such as insincere speech, hinting, boasting, etc., which are forms of false boasting.
593-4.Katamā āpatti paccantimesu desesu āpajjati, na majjhime, katamā āpatti majjhime pana desasmiṃ āpajjati, na ca paccantimesu, katamā āpatti paccantimesu ceva desesu āpajjati majjhime ca, katamā āpatti paccantimesu ceva desesu na āpajjati na majjhime cāti yojanā.
593-4.The connection is as follows: What offense is incurred in border regions (paccantimesu desesu) but not in central regions (majjhime)? What offense is incurred in central regions but not in border regions? What offense is incurred both in border regions and in central regions? What offense is not incurred either in border regions or in central regions?
596.‘‘So guṇaṅguṇupāhana’’nti padacchedo.Sobhikkhūti attho.
596.‘‘So guṇaṅguṇupāhana’’nti is the word separation. So means that bhikkhu.
599.Evaṃ ‘‘āpajjati, nāpajjatī’’ti padavasena paccantimacatukkaṃ dassetvā ‘‘neva kappati, na kappatī’’ti padavasena dassetumāha‘‘paccantimesū’’tiādi.
599.Thus, having shown the quaternary (catukka) regarding border areas in terms of the words "incurs, does not incur" (āpajjati, nāpajjatī), now, to show it in terms of the words "never suits, does not suit" (neva kappati, na kappati), he says, ‘‘paccantimesū’’tiādi ("in border areas," etc.).
601.Vuttanti ‘‘gaṇena pañcavaggenā’’tiādigāthāya heṭṭhā vuttaṃ.
601.Vuttanti, meaning "stated": stated below in the verse beginning "with a group of five" (gaṇena pañcavaggenā)..
603.Evaṃ vattunti ‘‘na kappatī’’ti vattuṃ.Pañcaloṇādikanti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, loṇānī’’tiādi.
603.Evaṃ vattunti, meaning "to say thus": to say "does not suit" (na kappati). Pañcaloṇādikanti, meaning "five salts, etc.": beginning with "I allow, monks, salts" (anujānāmi, bhikkhave, loṇānī), etc.
608.Anuññātaṭṭhānassaantono āpajjati, taṃ atikkamanto bahiyeva ca āpajjatīti yojanā.
608.The connection is as follows: One does not incur [an offense] within the allowed area; one incurs [an offense] only when going beyond it, outside.
612.Sekkhapaññattīti sekhiyapaññatti.
612.Sekkhapaññattīti, meaning "training rules": training rules (sekhiyapaññatti).
613.Agaṇāti adutiyā. Ettha hi ekāpi gaṇo nāma.
613.Agaṇāti, meaning "not a group": without a second. For here, even one is called a group (gaṇo nāma).
614.Ubhayatthapi asādhāraṇamāpattinti bhikkhunīnaṃ niyatāpaññatti veditabbā.
614.Ubhayatthapi asādhāraṇamāpattinti, meaning "an offense uncommon in both": the rules specific to bhikkhunīs should be understood.
616.Gilāno ca nāpajjati, agilāno ca nāpajjatīti evaṃ ubhopi nāpajjantīti yojanā. Tikādīsu dassitānaṃ padānaṃ catukkādidassanavasena punappunaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
616.The connection is as follows: A sick person (gilāno) does not incur [an offense], and a non-sick person (agilāno) does not incur [an offense]; thus, both do not incur [an offense]. The repeated taking of terms shown in the triads, etc., is due to showing them in terms of quaternaries, etc.
618.‘‘Āpajjati agilānovā’’ti padacchedo.
618.‘‘Āpajjati agilānovā’’ti is the word separation.
Catukkakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Quaternary Talk (Catukkakathāvaṇṇanā).
620.‘‘Garuthullaccaya’’nti vattabbe‘‘garu’’nti niggahītāgamo.
620.Instead of saying "grave and thullaccaya" (garuthullaccaya), ‘‘garu’’nti, meaning "grave": the addition of the niggahīta.
621.Pañca kathinānisaṃsā heṭṭhā vuttāyeva.
621.The five advantages of the kathina are stated below.
626.Aggisatthanakhakkantanti aggisatthanakhehi akkantaṃ phuṭṭhaṃ, pahaṭanti attho.Abījanti nobījaṃ.Ubbaṭṭabījakanti nibbaṭṭabījakaṃ.
626.Aggisatthanakhakkantanti, meaning "cut by fire, weapon, or nail": cut, touched, struck by fire, weapon, or nails. Abījanti, meaning "seedless": without seed. Ubbaṭṭabījakanti, meaning "with the seed removed": with the seed removed.
628.Pavāraṇāpīti paṭikkhepapavāraṇāpi.Odanādīhītiādi-saddena sattukummāsamacchamaṃsānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Kāyādigahaṇenāti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā gahaṇena. ‘‘Dātukāmābhihāro ca, hatthapāseraṇakkhama’’nti imehi catūhi aṅgehi saddhiṃ tesaṃ dvinnamekaṃ gahetvā paṭiggahaṇā pañceva honti.
628.Pavāraṇāpīti, meaning "also pavāraṇā": also the pavāraṇā of rejection (paṭikkhepapavāraṇāpi). Odanādīhīti, meaning "with rice gruel, etc.": By the term ādi ("etc."), the taking is of parched grain powder (sattu), roasted barley flour mixed with molasses (kummāsa), fish, and meat. Kāyādigahaṇenāti, meaning "by taking with the body, etc.": by taking with the body or something connected with the body. "And the gesture of offering, and the hand extended for receiving" (dātukāmābhihāro ca, hatthapāseraṇakkhama): along with these four factors, by taking one of each two, there are only five ways of receiving.
629-30.Vinayaññukasminti vinayadhare puggale.Sakañca sīlanti attano pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlañca.Surakkhitaṃ hotīti āpattānāpattikappiyākappiyānaṃ vijānantatāya asevitabbaṃ pahāya sevitabbaṃyeva sevanavasena suṭṭhu rakkhitaṃ hoti.Kukkuccamaññassa nirākarotīti aññassa sabrahmacārino kappiyākappiyavisaye uppannaṃ kukkuccaṃ nivāreti.Visārado bhāsati saṅghamajjheti kappiyākappiyānaṃ vinicchayakathāya uppannāya nirāsaṅko nibbhayo voharati.Veribhikkhūti attapaccatthike puggale.Dhammassa ceva ṭhitiyā pavattoti ‘‘vinayo nāma sāsanassa āyu, vinaye ṭhite sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.maṅgalasuttavaṇṇanā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251) vacanato saddhammaṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hoti.Tasmākāraṇā.Tatthavinayaññubhāve.Dhīropaññavā bhikkhu.
629-30.Vinayaññukasminti, meaning "in a person who knows the Vinaya": in a person who upholds the Vinaya. Sakañca sīlanti, meaning "and his own morality": and his own morality consisting of the pātimokkha restraint. Surakkhitaṃ hotīti, meaning "is well protected": because of knowing what is an offense, what is not an offense, what is allowable, and what is unallowable, it is well protected by abandoning what should not be practiced and only practicing what should be practiced. Kukkuccamaññassa nirākarotīti, meaning "removes doubt for another": removes doubt that has arisen in another fellow monastic in regard to what is allowable and unallowable. Visārado bhāsati saṅghamajjheti, meaning "speaks confidently in the midst of the Sangha": speaks without hesitation or fear when a question has arisen in regard to the determination of what is allowable and unallowable. Veribhikkhūti, meaning "hostile monks": in a person who is an opponent to himself. Dhammassa ceva ṭhitiyā pavattoti, meaning "devoted to the stability of the Dhamma": because of the saying, "Vinaya is the life of the Teaching; when the Vinaya stands, the Teaching stands" (vinayo nāma sāsanassa āyu, vinaye ṭhite sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hotī), he is devoted to the stability of the true Dhamma. Tasmākāraṇā, meaning "for that reason": Tatthavinayaññubhāve, meaning "in that state of Vinaya-knowing": Dhīropaññavā bhikkhu, meaning "the wise bhikkhu": the bhikkhu who is wise.
Pañcakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Pentad Talk (Pañcakakathāvaṇṇanā).
631-2.Chaḷabhiññenāti cha abhiññā etassāti chaḷabhiñño, tena. Atikkantapamāṇaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ, atikkantapamāṇaṃ nisīdanañca tathā atikkantapamāṇaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādivassasāṭikacīvarañca sugatassa cīvare pamāṇikacīvaranti cha.
631-2.Chaḷabhiññenāti, meaning "with the six knowledges": one who has six knowledges is chaḷabhiñño; by that [one]. A bench or chair of excessive size, and likewise a sitting cloth of excessive size, and also a rain cloth or robe-cloth of excessive size, and a robe of Sugata's robe size: these are the six.
633-4.Aññāṇañca kukkuccañcaaññāṇakukkuccā,tehi, aññāṇatāya ceva kukkuccapakatatāya cāti vuttaṃ hoti.Viparītāya saññāyakappiye akappiyasaññāya, akappiye kappiyasaññāya.
633-4.Aññāṇañca kukkuccañca, meaning "ignorance and doubt": aññāṇakukkuccā, meaning "by ignorance and doubt"; tehi, meaning "by them"; aññāṇatāya ceva kukkuccapakatatāya cāti vuttaṃ hoti, meaning "it is said because of ignorance and because of being overcome by doubt." Viparītāya saññāyakappiye akappiyasaññāya, akappiye kappiyasaññāya, meaning "with a distorted perception: perceiving the allowable as unallowable, or perceiving the unallowable as allowable."
Tattha kathaṃ alajjitāya āpajjati? Akappiyabhāvaṃ jānantoyeva madditvā vītikkamaṃ karoti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā). Vuttampi cetaṃ –
Therein, how does one incur [an offense] due to shamelessness? Knowing the state of being unallowable, he crushes [the doubt] and commits the transgression (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā). And this also was said:
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati;
‘‘Intentionally one incurs an offense;
One conceals an offense;
And one goes to a wrong destination;
Such a person is called shameless.’’ (pari. 359);
Kathaṃ aññāṇatāya āpajjati? Aññāṇapuggalo mando momūho kattabbākattabbaṃ ajānanto akattabbaṃ karoti, kattabbaṃ virādheti. Evaṃ aññāṇatāya āpajjati.
How does one incur [an offense] due to ignorance? An ignorant person, dull and deluded, not knowing what should and should not be done, does what should not be done and neglects what should be done. Thus, one incurs [an offense] due to ignorance.
Kathaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya āpajjati? Kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vinayadharaṃ pucchitvā kappiyaṃ ce, kattabbaṃ siyā, akappiyaṃ ce, na kattabbaṃ, ayaṃ pana ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti madditvā vītikkamatiyeva. Evaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya āpajjati.
How does one incur [an offense] due to being overcome by doubt? When doubt has arisen regarding what is allowable and unallowable, having asked a Vinaya-holder, if it is allowable, it should be done; if it is unallowable, it should not be done. But this one, crushing [the doubt] saying, "It is fitting," commits the transgression. Thus, one incurs [an offense] due to being overcome by doubt.
Kathaṃ kappiye akappiyasaññāya āpajjati? Sūkaramaṃsaṃ ‘‘acchamaṃsa’’nti khādati, kāle vikālasaññāya bhuñjati. Evaṃ kappiye akappiyasaññāya āpajjati.
How does one incur [an offense] by perceiving the allowable as unallowable? He eats pig meat thinking, "It is dog meat"; he eats at the right time, with the perception of the wrong time. Thus, one incurs [an offense] by perceiving the allowable as unallowable.
Kathaṃ akappiye kappiyasaññāya āpajjati? Acchamaṃsaṃ ‘‘sūkaramaṃsa’’nti khādati, vikāle kālasaññāya bhuñjati. Evaṃ akappiye kappiyasaññāya āpajjati.
How does one incur [an offense] by perceiving the unallowable as allowable? He eats dog meat thinking, "It is pig meat"; he eats at the wrong time, with the perception of the right time. Thus, one incurs [an offense] by perceiving the unallowable as allowable.
Kathaṃ satisammosāya āpajjati? Sahaseyyacīvaravippavāsādīni satisammosāya āpajjati.
How does one incur [an offense] due to loss of mindfulness? One incurs [offenses] like sleeping under the same roof and separation from the robe due to loss of mindfulness.
635-8.‘‘Bhikkhunā upaṭṭhapetabbo’’ti padacchedo.Dhammacakkhunāti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasaṅkhāto paṭipattidhammova cakkhu etassāti dhammacakkhu, tena chahi aṅgehi yuttena dhammacakkhunā pana bhikkhunā upasampādanā kātabbā, nissayo ceva dātabbo, sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabboti yojanā. Āpattiṃ jānāti, anāpattiṃ jānāti, garuṃ āpattiṃ jānāti, lahuṃ āpattiṃ jānātīti yojanā.Assabhikkhuno ubhayāni pātimokkhāni vitthārā svāgatāni bhavanti, atthato suvibhattāni bhavanti, suttaso anubyañjanaso suvinicchitāni bhavanti, dasavasso vā hoti, atirekadasavasso vāti yojanā.
635-8.‘‘Bhikkhunā upaṭṭhapetabbo’’ti is the word separation. Dhammacakkhunāti, meaning "with the eye of Dhamma": the Dhamma of practice consisting of pātimokkha-restraint-morality is the eye for him, therefore, with the eye of Dhamma, endowed with six factors, ordination should be performed by a bhikkhu, and dependence should be given, and the novice should be looked after. The connection is as follows: He knows an offense, he knows what is not an offense, he knows a grave offense, he knows a light offense. Assabhikkhuno ubhayāni pātimokkhāni vitthārā svāgatāni bhavanti, atthato suvibhattāni bhavanti, suttaso anubyañjanaso suvinicchitāni bhavanti, dasavasso vā hoti, atirekadasavasso vāti, meaning "For that bhikkhu, both pātimokkhas are well-learned in detail, well-divided in meaning, well-decided in terms of the suttas and detailed explanations, or he is ten years [ordained], or more than ten years," is the connection.
Chakkakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Hexad Talk (Chakkakathāvaṇṇanā).
639.Sattasāmīciyo vuttāti ‘‘so ca bhikkhu anabbhito, te ca bhikkhū gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, yuñjantāyasmanto sakaṃ, mā vo sakaṃ vinassāti ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, ayaṃ te bhikkhu patto yāva bhedanāya dhāretabboti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, tato nīharitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvibhajitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, yassa bhavissati, so harissatīti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī’’ti cha sāmīciyo bhikkhupātimokkhevuttā, ‘‘sā ca bhikkhunī anabbhitā, tā ca bhikkhuniyo gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī’’ti bhikkhunipātimokkhe vuttāya saddhiṃ satta sāmīciyo vuttā.Satteva samathāpi cāti sammukhāvinayādisamathāpi satteva vuttā.Paññattāpattiyo sattāti pārājikādayo paññattāpattiyo satta vuttā.Sattabojjhaṅgadassināti satisambojjhaṅgādayo satta bojjhaṅge yāthāvato passantena bhagavatā.
639.Sattasāmīciyo vuttāti, meaning "seven proper courses of action are stated": the six proper courses of action stated in the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha, "and that monk is not scolded, and those monks are blameworthy, this is proper conduct there; may the venerable ones apply themselves to their own [duties], may your own not be destroyed, this is proper conduct there; this bowl is yours, monk, it is to be kept until it is broken, this is proper conduct there; then, having taken it out, it should be divided among the monks, this is proper conduct there; it should be investigated, asked about, and examined, this is proper conduct there; whoever it will belong to, he will take it, this is proper conduct there" (so ca bhikkhu anabbhito, te ca bhikkhū gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, yuñjantāyasmanto sakaṃ, mā vo sakaṃ vinassāti ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, ayaṃ te bhikkhu patto yāva bhedanāya dhāretabboti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, tato nīharitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvibhajitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci, yassa bhavissati, so harissatīti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī), along with that stated in the Bhikkhunī Pātimokkha, "and that nun is not scolded, and those nuns are blameworthy, this is proper conduct there" (sā ca bhikkhunī anabbhitā, tā ca bhikkhuniyo gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī), seven proper courses of action are stated. Satteva samathāpi cāti, meaning "and also seven settlements": the settlements such as settling disputes in the presence [of both parties] (sammukhāvinaya) are also seven. Paññattāpattiyo sattāti, meaning "seven offenses that are rules": the seven offenses that are rules, beginning with pārājika, are stated. Sattabojjhaṅgadassināti, meaning "by the one who sees the seven factors of enlightenment": by the Blessed One who sees the seven factors of enlightenment, beginning with mindfulness enlightenment-factor (satisambojjhaṅga), as they really are.
Sattakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Heptad Talk (Sattakakathāvaṇṇanā).
640-1.Idha kuladūsako bhikkhu ājīvasseva kāraṇā pupphena, phalena, cuṇṇena, mattikāya, dantakaṭṭhehi, veḷuyā, vejjikāya, jaṅghapesanikenāti imehi aṭṭhahi ākārehi kulāni dūsetīti yojanā.‘‘Pupphenā’’tiādinā pupphādinā dānameva upalakkhaṇato dasseti.Pupphenāti pupphadānenāti attho gahetabbo. Pupphadānādayo kuladūsane vuttā.
640-1.Here, a bhikkhu who defiles families, only for the sake of livelihood, defiles families in these eight ways: with flowers, with fruits, with powder, with earth, with tooth-cleaners, with bamboo, with a bag for needles, and with a go-between. ‘‘Pupphenā’’tiādinā, meaning "with flowers, etc.": by "with flowers, etc.," it shows only the giving of flowers as illustrative. Pupphenāti, meaning "with flowers": the meaning should be taken as "by giving flowers." The giving of flowers, etc., is stated in defiling families.
642-5.‘‘Aṭṭhadhānatirittāpi, atirittāpi aṭṭhadhā’’tidvīsu aṭṭhakesu aṭṭha anatiritte tāva dassetumāha‘‘akappiyakatañcevā’’tiādi. Gilānānatirittakanti niddiṭṭhā ime aṭṭheva anatirittakā ñeyyāti yojanā.Akappiyakatādayopavāraṇasikkhāpadakathāvaṇṇanāya vuttā.
642-5.To show those eight that are not additional among the two eights in ‘‘Aṭṭhadhānatirittāpi, atirittāpi aṭṭhadhā’’ti, meaning "also eightfold non-additional, also eightfold additional": he says, ‘‘akappiyakatañcevā’’tiādi ("and what is made unallowable," etc.). The connection is as follows: These eight are specified as not additional to the sick person; these eight non-additional things should be understood. Akappiyakatādayopavāraṇasikkhāpadakathāvaṇṇanāya vuttā, meaning "what is made unallowable, etc., are stated in the Explanation of the Training Rule Talk on Pavāraṇā."
646.Ñātañattisūti ñātadukkaṭaṃ, ñattidukkaṭañca.Paṭisāvaneti paṭissave. Aṭṭhadukkaṭānaṃ vinicchayo dutiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanāya vutto.
646.Ñātañattisūti, meaning "in what is known and notified": in what is known as a dukkaṭa, and in what is notified as a dukkaṭa.Paṭisāvaneti, meaning "in promising": in a promise. The determination of the eight dukkaṭas is stated in the Explanation of the Talk on the Second Pārājika.
648-9.Ehibhikkhūpasampadāti yasakulaputtādīnaṃ ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti vacanena bhagavatā dinnaupasampadā.Saraṇagamanena cāti paṭhamabodhiyaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi anuññātaupasampadā.Pañhābyākaraṇovādāti sopākassa pañhābyākaraṇopasampadā, mahākassapattherassa dinnaovādapaṭiggahaṇopasampadā ca.Garudhammapaṭiggahoti mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā anuññātagarudhammapaṭiggahaṇopasampadā.
648-9.Ehibhikkhūpasampadāti, meaning "Ehi Bhikkhu ordination": the ordination given by the Blessed One with the words "Ehi Bhikkhu" to Yasakulaputta, etc. Saraṇagamanena cāti, meaning "and by going for refuge": the ordination allowed by the three going-for-refuges at the first enlightenment. Pañhābyākaraṇovādāti, meaning "question, answer, and advice": the ordination of Sopāka by question and answer, and the ordination of Mahākassapa Thera by accepting the given advice. Garudhammapaṭiggahoti, meaning "accepting the grave rules": the ordination of Mahāpajāpatī Gotamī by accepting the allowed grave rules.
Ñatticatutthena kammenāti idāni bhikkhuupasampadā.Aṭṭhavācikāti bhikkhunīnaṃ santike ñatticatutthena kammena, bhikkhūnaṃ santike ñatticatutthena kammenāti aṭṭhahi kammavācāhi bhikkhunīnaṃ upasampadā aṭṭhavācikā nāma.Dūtena bhikkhunīnanti aḍḍhakāsiyā gaṇikāya anuññātā bhikkhunīnaṃ dūtena upasampadā.
Ñatticatutthena kammenāti, meaning "by a procedure with a motion and three announcements": now, the bhikkhu ordination. Aṭṭhavācikāti, meaning "eight utterances": the ordination of bhikkhunīs with eight formal statements, by a procedure with a motion and three announcements in the presence of the bhikkhunīs and by a procedure with a motion and three announcements in the presence of the bhikkhus. Dūtena bhikkhunīnanti, meaning "by a messenger of the bhikkhunīs": the ordination of the bhikkhunīs by a messenger, allowed for the courtesan of Addhakāsī.
650.Suddhadiṭṭhināti suṭṭhu savāsanakilesānaṃ pahānena parisuddhā samantacakkhusaṅkhātā diṭṭhi etassāti suddhadiṭṭhi, tena samantacakkhunā sammāsambuddhena.
650.Suddhadiṭṭhināti, meaning "with pure vision": by the Sammāsambuddha, whose vision is pure, free from defilements with their underlying tendencies, and is called the All-Seeing Eye (samantacakkhu).
651.Pāpicchānāma asantaguṇasambhāvanicchā.
651.Pāpicchānāma, meaning "evil desire": desire for qualities that do not exist.
652-3.Naca majjapo siyāti majjapo na siyā majjaṃ pivanto na bhaveyya, majjaṃ na piveyyāti attho.Abrahmacariyāti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.71) aseṭṭhacariyato methunā virameyya.Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojananti uposathaṃ upavuttho rattibhojanañca divāvikālabhojanañca na bhuñjeyya.Na ca gandhamācareti gandhañca na vilimpeyya.Mañce chamāyaṃ va sayetha santhateti kappiyamañce vā sudhādiparikammakatāya bhūmiyā vā tiṇapaṇṇapalālādīni santharitvā kate santhate vā sayethāti attho.Etañhi aṭṭhaṅgikamāhuposathanti etaṃ pāṇātipātādīni asamācarantena upavutthaṃ uposathaṃ aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgatattā ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgika’’nti vadanti.Dukkhantagunāti vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ amatamahānibbānaṃ gatena pattena buddhena pakāsitanti yojanā.
652-3.Naca majjapo siyāti, meaning "and should not be a drinker of intoxicants": he should not be a drinker of intoxicants, he should not be one who drinks intoxicants, he should not drink intoxicants, is the meaning. Abrahmacariyāti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.71), meaning "from un-Brahmacariya": he should abstain from sexual intercourse, which is non-celibacy. Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojananti, meaning "should not eat at night, wrong-time food": having observed the uposatha, he should not eat night food and food at the wrong time during the day. Na ca gandhamācareti, meaning "and should not practice scents": and he should not smear on scents. Mañce chamāyaṃ va sayetha santhateti, meaning "he should lie on a bed or on the ground, on a spread": the meaning is that he should lie on an allowable bed or on the ground plastered with plaster, etc., or on a spread made by spreading grass, leaves, or straw, etc. Etañhi aṭṭhaṅgikamāhuposathanti, meaning "this is called the eight-factored uposatha": this uposatha, observed by one who does not practice killing living beings, etc., is called "eight-factored" because it is endowed with eight factors. Dukkhantagunāti, meaning "qualities ending suffering": declared by the Buddha, who has gone to the end of suffering, to the deathless great Nibbāna.
654.Bhikkhunovādakabhikkhuno aṭṭhaṅgāni bhikkhunovādakathāvaṇṇanāya dassitāneva.
654.The eight qualities of a bhikkhu-advisor are shown in the Explanation of the Talk on the Bhikkhu-Advisor.
Aṭṭhakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Octad Talk (Aṭṭhakakathāvaṇṇanā).
655.Bhojanāni paṇītāni nava vuttānīti paṇītāni hi bhojanasikkhāpade vuttāni. Dasasu akappiyamaṃsesu manussamaṃsavajjitāninava maṃsānikhādantassa dukkaṭaṃ niddiṭṭhanti yojanā.
655. Bhojanāni paṇītāni nava vuttāni means the delicious foods mentioned in the food training rule. The plan is that a dukkaṭa offense is specified for eating nine kinds of meat, excluding human meat, from the ten impermissible meats.
656.Pātimokkha…pe… paridīpitāti bhikkhūnaṃ pañcuddesā, bhikkhunīnaṃ aniyatuddesehi vinā cattāroti uddesā nava dīpitā.Uposathā navevāti divasavasena tayo, kārakavasena tayo, karaṇavasena tayoti nava uposathā.Etthāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Saṅgho navahi bhijjatīti navahi puggalehi saṅgho bhijjatīti yojanā. Yathāha –
656. Pātimokkha…pe… paridīpitā means the five recitations for monks, and the four recitations for nuns excluding the aniyata offenses, making nine recitations in total are explained. Uposathā navevā means three kinds based on the day, three kinds based on the purpose, and three kinds based on the means, making nine uposathas. Etthā means in this dispensation. Saṅgho navahi bhijjatī means the Saṅgha is split by nine individuals. As it was said:
‘‘Ekato, upāli, cattāro honti, ekato cattāro, navamo anussāveti, salākaṃ gāheti ‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo, idaṃ satthusāsanaṃ, imaṃ gaṇhatha, imaṃ rocethā’ti. Evampi kho, upāli, saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo ca. Navannaṃ vā, upāli, atirekanavannaṃ vā saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo cā’’ti (cūḷava. 351).
‘‘Here, Upāli, four are on one side, four on the other, the ninth announces, and makes them take a ballot, saying: ‘This is the Dhamma, this is the Vinaya, this is the Teacher’s instruction; accept this, approve of this.’ Thus, Upāli, there is both a schism in the Saṅgha and a faction in the Saṅgha. Or with nine or more than nine, Upāli, there is both a faction in the Saṅgha and a schism in the Saṅgha’’ (cūḷava. 351).
Navakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Group of Nine Topics (Navakakathā)
657.Dasa akkosavatthūni vakkhati. Dasa sikkhāpadāni pākaṭāneva. Manussamaṃsādīni dasa akappiyamaṃsāni heṭṭhā vuttāneva.Sukkāni ve dasāti nīlādīni dasa sukkāni.
657. He will speak of ten grounds for abuse. The ten training rules are already well-known. The ten impermissible meats, beginning with human meat, have already been mentioned below. Sukkāni ve dasā means ten kinds of white, beginning with blue.
659.Rañño antepurappavesane dasa ādīnavā evaṃ pāḷipāṭhena veditabbā –
659. The ten disadvantages of entering the king's inner chambers should be understood according to the Pali text, as follows:
‘‘Dasayime, bhikkhave, ādīnavā rājantepurappavesane. Katame dasa? Idha, bhikkhave, rājā mahesiyā saddhiṃ nisinno hoti, tatra bhikkhu pavisati, mahesī vā bhikkhuṃ disvā sitaṃ pātukaroti, bhikkhu vā mahesiṃ disvā sitaṃ pātukaroti, tattha rañño evaṃ hoti ‘addhā imesaṃ kataṃ vā karissanti vā’ti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘These, monks, are ten disadvantages of entering the royal inner chambers. Which ten? Here, monks, the king is sitting with his chief queen; a monk enters there, and the queen, seeing the monk, reveals a smile, or the monk, seeing the queen, reveals a smile; there the king thinks, ‘Surely, these two have done something or will do something.’ This, monks, is the first disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā bahukicco bahukaraṇīyo aññataraṃ itthiṃ gantvā na sarati, sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, tattha rañño evaṃ hoti ‘na kho idha añño koci pavisati aññatra pabbajitena, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, dutiyo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, the king, being busy with much business, goes to some woman and does not remember; she becomes pregnant by him; there the king thinks, ‘No one else enters here except for a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the second disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rañño antepure aññataraṃ ratanaṃ nassati, tattha rañño evaṃ hoti ‘na kho idha añño koci pavisati aññatra pabbajitena, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, tatiyo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, some jewel disappears in the king’s inner chambers; there the king thinks, ‘No one else enters here except for a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the third disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rañño antepure abbhantarā guyhamantā bahiddhā sambhedaṃ gacchanti, tattha rañño evaṃ hoti ‘na kho idha añño koci pavisati aññatra pabbajitena, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, catuttho ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, secret counsels within the king’s inner chambers leak out; there the king thinks, ‘No one else enters here except for a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the fourth disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rañño antepure pitā vā puttaṃ pattheti, putto vā pitaraṃ pattheti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘na kho idha añño koci pavisati aññatra pabbajitena, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, pañcamo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, in the king’s inner chambers, the father desires the son, or the son desires the father; they think, ‘No one else enters here except for a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the fifth disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā nīcaṭṭhāniyaṃ ucce ṭhāne ṭhapeti, yesaṃ taṃ amanāpaṃ, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘rājā kho pabbajitena saṃsaṭṭho, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, chaṭṭho ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, the king puts someone of low status in a high position; those who dislike it think, ‘The king is associating with a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the sixth disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā uccaṭṭhāniyaṃ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti, yesaṃ taṃ amanāpaṃ, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘rājā kho pabbajitena saṃsaṭṭho, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, sattamo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, the king puts someone of high status in a low position; those who dislike it think, ‘The king is associating with a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the seventh disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā akāle senaṃ uyyojeti, yesaṃ taṃ amanāpaṃ, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘rājā kho pabbajitena saṃsaṭṭho, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, aṭṭhamo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, the king sends out the army at an inopportune time; those who dislike it think, ‘The king is associating with a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the eighth disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rājā kāle senaṃ uyyojetvā antarāmaggato nivattāpeti, yesaṃ taṃ amanāpaṃ, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘rājā kho pabbajitena saṃsaṭṭho, siyā nu kho pabbajitassa kamma’nti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, navamo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane.
‘‘Furthermore, monks, the king sends out the army at the right time and turns it back from the middle of the road; those who dislike it think, ‘The king is associating with a renunciate; could it be the act of the renunciate?’ This, monks, is the ninth disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers.
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rañño antepuraṃ hatthisammaddaṃ assasammaddaṃ rathasammaddaṃ rajanīyāni rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbāni, yāni na pabbajitassa sāruppāni, ayaṃ, bhikkhave, dasamo ādīnavo rājantepurappavesane. Ime kho, bhikkhave, dasa ādīnavā rājantepurappavesane’’ti (a. ni. 10.45; pāci. 497).
‘‘Furthermore, monks, the king’s inner chambers are crowded with elephants, crowded with horses, crowded with chariots, and filled with delightful sights, sounds, smells, tastes, and touches, which are not suitable for a renunciate; this, monks, is the tenth disadvantage of entering the royal inner chambers. These, monks, are the ten disadvantages of entering the royal inner chambers’’ (a. ni. 10.45; pāci. 497).
pitā vā puttaṃ patthetīti puttaṃ māretumicchatīti attho. Eseva nayoputto pitaraṃ patthetīti.Hatthisammaddanti hatthīnaṃ sammaddo saṃsaṭṭho etthāti hatthisammaddaṃ. Evaṃ‘‘assasammadda’’ntiādīsupi.
pitā vā puttaṃ patthetī means he wants to kill the son. The same method applies to putto pitaraṃ patthetī. Hatthisammadda means a crowd or contact with elephants is here called hatthisammadda. The same applies to ‘‘assasammadda’’ and so on.
Dasākārehīti –
Dasākārehī means –
‘‘Āpattinukkhittamanantarāya-
‘‘The imposed penalty, uninterrupted,
Abundance, and so is it perceived;
Desiring to conceal, and then concealment;
Concealed at the rise of the dawn with ten factors." –
Gahitehi dasahi aṅgehi.
With these ten factors being taken.
660.Dasa kammapathā puññāti pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādayo dasa kusalakammapathā.Apuññāpi tathā dasāti pāṇātipātādayo dasa akusalakammapathāva. Dasa dānavatthūni vakkhati.Daseva ratanāni cāti –
660. Dasa kammapathā puññā means the ten meritorious courses of action, beginning with abstinence from killing living beings. Apuññāpi tathā dasā means the ten unwholesome courses of action, beginning with killing living beings. He will speak of ten objects of giving. Daseva ratanāni cā means –
‘‘Muttā maṇī veḷuriyā ca saṅkhā;
‘‘Pearls, gems, beryl, and conch,
Stone, coral, silver, and gold,
Ruby, and also sapphire,
The wise one should know these ten jewels.’’ –
Niddiṭṭhāni dasa ratanāni.
The ten specified jewels.
662.Munindena avandiyā dasa puggalā dīpitāti yojanā. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Dasayime, bhikkhave, avandiyā. Pure upasampannena pacchā upasampanno avandiyo, anupasampanno avandiyo, nānāsaṃvāsako vuḍḍhataro adhammavādī avandiyo, mātugāmo avandiyo, paṇḍako avandiyo, pārivāsiko avandiyo, mūlāyapaṭikassanāraho avandiyo, mānattāraho avandiyo, mānattacāriko avandiyo, abbhānāraho avandiyo. Ime kho, bhikkhave, dasa avandiyā’’ti (cūḷava. 312).
662. It should be construed that the ten individuals unworthy of reverence were taught by the Sage. How? ‘‘These, monks, are ten who are unworthy of reverence. One ordained later is unworthy of reverence by one ordained earlier, one who is not ordained is unworthy of reverence, an elder who lives separately and speaks against the Dhamma is unworthy of reverence, a woman is unworthy of reverence, an eunuch is unworthy of reverence, one undergoing parivāsa is unworthy of reverence, one deserving to be drawn back to the root penalty is unworthy of reverence, one deserving mānatta is unworthy of reverence, one conducting mānatta is unworthy of reverence, one deserving reinstatement is unworthy of reverence. These, monks, are ten who are unworthy of reverence’’ (cūḷava. 312).
663-4.Sosānikanti susāne chaḍḍitaṃ.Pāpaṇikanti āpaṇadvāre chaḍḍitaṃ.Undūrakkhāyitanti undūrehi khāyitaṃ pariccattaṃ pilotikaṃ.Gokhāyitādīsupi eseva nayo.Thūpacīvarikanti balikammatthāya vammike parikkhipitvā pariccattavatthaṃ.Ābhisekiyanti rājūnaṃ abhisekamaṇḍape pariccattavatthaṃ.Gatapaccāgatañcāti susānagatamanussehi paccāgantvā nahāyitvā chaḍḍitaṃ pilotikaṃ.
663-4. Sosānika means discarded in a cemetery. Pāpaṇika means discarded at a shop doorway. Undūrakkhāyita means chewed and abandoned by mice, a rag. The same method applies to Gokhāyitā and so on. Thūpacīvarika means cloth abandoned after being placed around an anthill for a funeral offering. Ābhisekiya means cloth abandoned in the coronation pavilion of kings. Gatapaccāgatañcā means a rag discarded after being washed by people who have gone to the cemetery and returned.
665.Sabbanīlādayo vuttā, dasa cīvaradhāraṇāti ‘‘sabbanīlakāni cīvarāni dhārentīti vuttavasena dasā’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 330)kurundiyaṃvuttaṃ.Etthaimasmiṃ dasake saṃkaccikāya vā udakasāṭikāya vā saddhiṃ ticīvarāni nāmena adhiṭṭhitāni nava cīvarāni ‘‘dasacīvaradhāraṇā’’ti vuttāni. Yathāha – ‘‘navasu kappiyacīvaresu udakasāṭikaṃ vā saṃkaccikaṃ vā pakkhipitvā dasāti vutta’’nti (pari. aṭṭha. 330).
665. Sabbanīlādayo vuttā, dasa cīvaradhāraṇā means "ten according to the statement that they wear completely blue robes and so on" is stated in the Kurundiya. Ettha means in this decad, together with the bathing cloth or the waist cloth, the nine robes that are designated by name as the three robes are referred to as "ten robe-wearing". As it was said: "Having included the bathing cloth or the waist cloth among the nine permissible robes, it is called ten" (pari. aṭṭha. 330).
Dasakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Group of Ten Topics (Dasakakathā)
666.Paṇḍakādayo ekādasa abhabbapuggalā pana upasampāditāpi anupasampannā hontīti yojanā.
666. It should be construed that the eleven incapable individuals, beginning with eunuchs, are considered unordained even if they have been ordained.
667.‘‘Akappiyā’’ti vuttā pattā ekādasa bhavantīti yojanā.Dārujena pattenāti dārumayena pattena.Ratanubbhavāti ratanamayādasapattā ekādasa bhavantīti yojanā.Dārujena cāti etthaca-saddena tambalohamayapattassa saṅgaho. Yathāha ‘‘ekādasa pattāti tambalohamayena vā dārumayena vā saddhiṃ dasaratanamayā’’ti. Idharatanaṃnāma muttādidasaratanaṃ.
667. It should be construed that the bowls that are stated to be "impermissible" are eleven. Dārujena pattenā means with a bowl made of wood. Ratanubbhavā means made of jewels. It should be construed that dasa bowls made of jewels are eleven. In Dārujena cā, the particle ca includes a bowl made of copper. As it was said, "Eleven bowls means ten made of jewels together with one made of copper or wood". Here, ratanaṃ means the ten jewels beginning with pearls.
668.Akappiyā pādukā ekādasa hontīti yojanā. Yathāha ‘‘ekādasa pādukāti dasa ratanamayā, ekā kaṭṭhapādukā. Tiṇapādukamuñjapādukapabbajapādukādayo pana kaṭṭhapādukasaṅgahameva gacchantī’’ti.
668. It should be construed that eleven sandals are impermissible. As it was said, "Eleven sandals means ten made of jewels, and one wooden sandal. Sandals made of grass, muñja grass, pabbaja grass, and so on, are included in the category of wooden sandals."
669-70.Atikhuddakā atimahantāti yojanā. Khaṇḍanimittakā chāyānimittakāti yojanā.Bahiṭṭhena sammatāti sīmāya bahi ṭhitena sammatā. Nadiyaṃ, jātassare, samudde vā tathā sammatāti yojanā. Sīmāya sambhinnā sīmāya ajjhotthaṭā sīmāti yojanā. Imā ekādasa asīmāyo siyunti yojanā.
669-70. It should be construed that extremely small and extremely large. It should be construed as having limited markers and shadow markers. Bahiṭṭhena sammatā means approved by someone standing outside the boundary. It should be construed that it is similarly approved in a river, a natural lake, or the sea. It should be construed that being mixed with the boundary means overlapping with the boundary. It should be construed that these eleven are not valid boundaries.
671.Ekādaseva pathavī kappiyā, ekādaseva pathavī akappiyāti yojanā.
671. It should be construed that only eleven kinds of ground are permissible, and only eleven kinds of ground are impermissible.
ekādasa kappiyapathavīnāma suddhapāsāṇā, suddhasakkharā, suddhakathalā, suddhamarumbā, suddhavālukā, yebhuyyenapāsāṇā, yebhuyyenasakkharā, yebhuyyenakathalā, yebhuyyenamarumbā, yebhuyyenavālukāti imā dasa daḍḍhāya pathaviyā vā catumāsovaṭṭhakapaṃsupuñjena vā mattikāpuñjena vā saddhiṃ ekādasa. ‘‘Appapaṃsukā, appamattikā’’ti (pāci. 86) aparāpi pathaviyo vuttā, tā yebhuyyenapāsāṇādīsu pañcasuyeva saṅgahitā.
ekādasa kappiyapathavī means pure stones, pure gravel, pure chips, pure laterite, pure sand, mostly stones, mostly gravel, mostly chips, mostly laterite, mostly sand, these ten together with burnt earth or a pile of dust or a pile of clay that has been lying for four months, making eleven. Other grounds are also mentioned as "with little dust, with little clay" (pāci. 86), but those are included in the five that are mostly stones, and so on.
Ekādasa akappiyapathavīnāma ‘‘suddhapaṃsu suddhamattikā appapāsāṇā appasakkharā appakathalā appamarumbā appavālukā yebhuyyenapaṃsukā yebhuyyenamattikā, adaḍḍhāpi vuccati jātā pathavī. Yopi paṃsupuñjo vā mattikāpuñjo vā atirekacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭho, ayampi vuccati jātapathavī’’ti (pāci. 86) vuttā ekādasa.
Ekādasa akappiyapathavī means the eleven that are stated as "pure dust, pure clay, few stones, few gravel, few chips, few laterite, few sand, mostly dust, mostly clay, unburnt is also called natural ground. Also, a pile of dust or a pile of clay that has been lying for more than four months, this too is called natural ground" (pāci. 86).
Gaṇṭhikākappiyā vuttā, ekādasa ca vīdhakāti ettha kappiyā gaṇṭhikā vidhakā ca ekādasa vuttāti yojanā. Te pana –
Gaṇṭhikā kappiyā vuttā, ekādasa ca vīdhakā means it should be construed that eleven permissible belt-hooks and knives are mentioned here. But those are –
‘‘Veḷudantavisāṇaṭṭhi-kaṭṭhalākhāphalāmayā;
‘‘Bamboo, tooth, horn, bone,
Chips, lac, fruit, and iron;
Conch, ivory, string,
Reed, and made of metal too;
Knives are allowable, so are belt-hooks,
Made of those materials as well". –
Imāya gāthāya saṅgahitāti veditabbā.
It should be understood that these are included in this verse.
674-5.Ukkhittassānuvattikābhikkhunīubhinnaṃbhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ vasā saṅghādisesesuaṭṭhayāvatatiyakāti ime ekādasa yāvatatiyakāti pakāsitāti yojanā.
674-5. The nun who is Ukkhittassānuvattikā is subject to both monks and nuns in offenses requiring Saṅghādisesa, and these eleven, including aṭṭha up to the third instance, are declared up to the third instance.
676.Nissayassa paṭippassaddhiyodasekāvaekādaseva vuttāti yojanā.Chadhācariyato vuttāti –
676. The cessation of dependence, dasekāva, it should be construed that only eleven are stated. Chadhācariyato vuttā means –
‘‘Pakkante pakkhasaṅkante, vibbhante cāpi nissayo;
‘‘Departing, departing, changed,
Bewildered, and also dependence;
Death, other than ordination,
With the teachers’ agreement". –
Upajjhāyā tu pañcadhāti tāsu upajjhāyasamodhānaṃ vinā avasesāhi pañcadhā upajjhāyapaṭippassaddhiyo vuttāti ime ekādasa.
Upajjhāyā tu pañcadhā means it should be construed that the cessation of the preceptor is stated in five ways, excluding the agreement of the preceptor from those, so these are eleven.
Ekādasakakathāvaṇṇanā.
Explanation of the Group of Eleven Topics (Ekādasakakathā)
677.Teraseva dhutaṅgānīti paṃsukūlikaṅgādīni dhutaṅgāni teraseva honti.
677. Teraseva dhutaṅgānī means there are only thirteen dhutaṅga practices, beginning with wearing robes made of rags.
Paramāni ca cuddasāti ‘‘dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabbaṃ, māsaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ, santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabbaṃ, chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtena uddissa ṭhātabbaṃ, navaṃ pana bhikkhunā santhataṃ kārāpetvā chabbassāni dhāretabbaṃ chabbassaparamatā dhāretabbaṃ, tiyojanaparamaṃ sahatthā haritabbāni, dasāhaparamaṃ atirekapatto dhāretabbo, sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbāni, chārattaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tena cīvarena vippavasitabbaṃ, catukkaṃsaparamaṃ, aḍḍhateyyakaṃsaparamaṃ, dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabbaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ mañcapaṭipādakaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ dantakaṭṭha’’nti iti imāni cuddasa paramāni.
Paramāni ca cuddasā means "an extra robe should be kept for ten days at most; that robe should be put away by that monk for one month at most; that robe should be sought by that monk, having the same size, at most; one should stand silently when addressed six times at most; but a new spread should be made by a monk and worn for six years, it should be worn for six years at most; they should be carried by hand for three yojanas at most; an extra bowl should be kept for ten days at most; requisites that have been stored up may be used for seven days at most; that monk should be separated from that robe for six nights at most; a limit of four joints of a finger, a limit of two and a half joints of a finger, a limit of two finger-joints should be taken, a bed leg of eight inches at most, a toothpick of eight inches at most," thus these are fourteen limits (paramāni).
Soḷaseva tu ‘‘jāna’’nti paññattānīti ‘‘jāna’’nti evaṃ vatvā paññattāni soḷasa. Te evaṃ veditabbā – jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, jānaṃ pubbupagataṃ bhikkhuṃ anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeyya, jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ tiṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā, jānaṃ bhikkhuniparipācitaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjeyya, jānaṃ āsādanāpekkho, bhuttasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ, jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyya, jānaṃ yathādhammaṃ nihaṭādhikaraṇaṃ puna kammāya ukkoṭeyya, jānaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ paṭicchādeyya, jānaṃ ūnavīsativassaṃ puggalaṃ upasampādeyya, jānaṃ theyyasatthena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya, jānaṃ tathāvādinā bhikkhunā akatānudhammena, jānaṃ tathānāsitaṃ samaṇuddesaṃ, jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, jānaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpannaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nevattanā paṭicodeyya, jānaṃ coriṃ vajjhaṃ viditaṃ anapaloketvā, jānaṃ sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ anāpucchā paviseyyāti.
But the sixteen are designated as "knowing": The sixteen are designated by saying "knowing." These should be understood as follows: Knowing, one converts a Saṅgha's gain that has been allocated, for oneself; knowing, without consulting a bhikkhu who arrived earlier, one makes a bedding; knowing, one sprinkles or has sprinkled water with living beings, grass, or mud; knowing, one consumes alms food prepared for a bhikkhu; knowing, one is intent on offending—upon eating, there is a pācittiya; knowing, one uses water with living beings; knowing, one reopens an issue that has been rightfully settled, for further action; knowing, one conceals a serious offense; knowing, one ordains a person under twenty years of age; knowing, having made an agreement with thieves, one travels together on the same road; knowing, by a bhikkhu speaking in accordance with the truth without having observed the Dhamma; knowing, one who has been abandoned, a samaṇuddesa; knowing, one converts a Saṅgha's gain that has been allocated, for an individual; knowing, one should not admonish a bhikkhunī who has fallen into an offense entailing expulsion in one's own defense; knowing, a thief who is to be executed, having been recognized, without informing the authorities; knowing, one enters a monastery with bhikkhus without asking permission.
678.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsaneyobhikkhu anuttaraṃsauttaraṃuttarapakaraṇena sahitaṃ sakalampi vinayavinicchayaṃ jānāti,mahattareativipuleanuttareuttaravirahite uttamevinayanayevinayāgate āpattianāpattigarukalahukakappiyaakappiyādivinicchayakamme. Atha vāvinayanayevinayapiṭake pavattamānosobhikkhuniruttaro bhavatipaccatthikehi vattabbaṃ uttaraṃ atikkamitvā ṭhito, seṭṭho vā bhavati, tassa ceva paresañca saṃsayo na kātabboti yojanā.Jānatīti gāthābandhavasena rasso.
678. Here, in this Dispensation, yo, that bhikkhu, the unsurpassed, sauttaraṃ, together with superior conduct, knows all the Vinaya decisions, mahattare, very extensive, anuttare, without superior, the best vinayanaye, in Vinaya matters, in the decision-making regarding offenses and non-offenses, serious and light, allowable and unallowable, etc. Or, vinayanaye, while proceeding in the Vinaya Piṭaka, so, that bhikkhu, niruttaro bhavati, becomes unanswerable, having surpassed the answer to be given by opponents, or becomes the best; doubt should not be made regarding him, either by himself or by others. Jānatī is shortened due to the metrical composition of the verse.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the commentary on the hidden meanings in the Uttara
Ekuttaranayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Ekuttaranaya is finished.
Sedamocanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sedamocanakathā
679.Suṇataṃsuṇantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃpaṭubhāvakarāvinayavinicchaye paññākosallasādhikā tatoyevavarāuttamā.Sedamocanagāthāyoti atthapaccatthikānaṃ, sāsanapaccatthikānañca vissajjetumasakkuṇeyyabhāvena cintayantassa khinnasarīrā sede mocentītisedamocanā. Atthānugatapañhā upālittherena ṭhapitā pañhagāthāyo, tappaṭibaddhā vissajjanagāthāyo ca ito paraṃ vakkhāmīti yojanā.
679.Suṇataṃ, for bhikkhus who are listening, paṭubhāvakarā, making them proficient, achieving skill in wisdom in Vinaya decisions, therefore varā, excellent. Sedamocanagāthāyo, because they cause sweat to flow from the bodies of those pondering over difficult points who cannot dismiss opponents in meaning, and opponents of the Teaching, they are called sedamocanā. The question verses established by Upāli Thera, along with the answering verses pertaining to them, I will explain hereafter, is the connection.
681.Kabandhaṃnāma asīsaṃ urasi jātaakkhimukhasarīraṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘asīsakaṃ kabandhaṃ, yassa ure akkhīni ceva mukhañca hotī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 479).Mukhenakaraṇabhūtena.Katvāti sevitvā.
681.Kabandhaṃ, is a headless body with eyes and a mouth born on the chest. As it was said: "A headless body, which has eyes and a mouth on its chest" (pari. aṭṭha. 479). Mukhena, by means of the mouth. Katvā, having done, meaning having served.
682.Tassabhikkhunokathaṃ pārājiko siyāpārājikadhammo kathaṃ siyā.
682.Tassa, for that bhikkhu, kathaṃ pārājiko siyā, how can there be a pārājika offense?
684.Kiñcīti pādaṃ vā pādārahaṃ vā parasantakaṃ.Parañca na samādapeti ‘‘amukassa itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharāhī’’ti paraṃ na āṇāpeyya.
684.Kiñcī, even a foot or something worth a foot belonging to another. Parañca na samādape, and he should not command another, saying, "Take such and such an item belonging to so and so."
685.Parassa kiñci nādiyantoti sambandho.Āṇattiñcātica-saddena saṃvidhānaṃ, saṅketañca saṅgaṇhāti.
685.The connection is that he does not give anything to another. Āṇattiñcā, the ca includes arrangement and sign.
686.Garukaṃ bhaṇḍanti pādagghanakabhāvena garubhaṇḍaṃ.‘‘Parikkhāra’’nti etassa visesanaṃ.Parassa parikkhāranti parasantakaṃ yaṃ kiñci parikkhāraṃ.
686.Garukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, a heavy item due to being worth a foot. "Parikkhāra" is a specification of this. Parassa parikkhāraṃ, any requisite belonging to another.
692.Manussuttarike dhammeti uttarimanussadhammavisaye.Katikaṃ katvānāti ‘‘evaṃ nisinne evaṃ ṭhite evaṃ gamane atthaṃ āvikarotī’’tiādiṃ katvā.Sambhāvanādhippāyoti ‘‘arahā’’ti gahetvā mahāsambhāvanaṃ karotīti adhippāyo hutvā.Atikkamati ceti tathā kataṃ katikaṃ atikkamati ce, tathārūpaṃ nisajjaṃ vā ṭhānaṃ vā gamanaṃ vā karotīti attho.Cutoti tathārūpaṃ nisajjādiṃ disvā kenaci manussajātikena ‘‘arahā’’ti taṅkhaṇe ñāte so puggalo pārājikaṃ āpajjati.
692.Manussuttarike dhamme, in the matter of superhuman qualities. Katikaṃ katvānā, having made an agreement such as, "When sitting like this, standing like this, or going like this, he reveals the meaning." Sambhāvanādhippāyo, having taken him as an "arahant," his intention is to make a great assumption. Atikkamati ce, if he violates the agreement so made, if he does such sitting, standing, or going, is the meaning. Cuto, having seen such sitting, etc., if someone of human kind recognizes him as an "arahant," at that moment, that person incurs a pārājika offense.
693.Ekavatthukā kathaṃ bhaveyyunti yojanā.
693.How can there be a single basis, is the connection.
694.Itthiyāti ekissā itthiyā.Paṭipajjantoti ekakkhaṇe aññena purisena vuttasāsanaṃ vatvā, iminā ca ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti, vīmaṃsatī’’ti aṅgadvayassa purimasiddhataṃ dīpeti imassa paccāharaṇakatañca. Kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjitvā duṭṭhullaṃ vatvā attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇanto.
694.Itthiyā, to one woman. Paṭipajjanto, at one moment, having spoken the teaching stated by another man, and by this, it indicates the prior accomplishment of the two factors of "accepting and considering," and also the repelling done by this one. Having engaged in bodily contact, having spoken offensively, praising for one's own sexual gratification.
695.Yathāvuttaṃ vattaṃ acaritvāti bhagavatā vuttaṃ parivāsādivattaṃ acaritvā.
695.Yathāvuttaṃ vattaṃ acaritvā, without performing the observances stated by the Blessed One, such as parivāsa.
696.Bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇasikkhāpadattā āha‘‘natthi saṅghādisesatā’’ti.
696.Because the training rules are not common to bhikkhunīs, he says, "natthi saṅghādisesatā".
697.Yena kuddho pasaṃsitoti ettha ‘‘nindito cā’’ti seso.
697.Yena kuddho pasaṃsito, here, "and criticized" is to be added.
698.Titthiyānaṃ vaṇṇamhi bhaññamāne yo kujjhati, so ārādhakoti yojanā, paritosito pasaṃsitoti adhippāyo. Titthiyapubbo imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajjaṃ labhitvā titthiyānaṃ vaṇṇasmiṃ bhaññamāne sutvā sace kuppati anattamanaṃ karoti,ārādhakosaṅghārādhako saṅghaṃ paritosento hoti, sambuddhassa vaṇṇasmiṃ bhaññamāne yadi kujjhati, ninditoti yojanā. Etthasambuddhassāti upalakkhaṇaṃ.
698.When the qualities of the sectarians are being spoken, he who gets angry, is one who pleases them, is the idea, one who is satisfied is praised, is the intention. Having obtained ordination in this Dispensation, having been formerly a sectarian, when the qualities of the sectarians are being spoken, if he gets angry, is displeased, ārādhako, is one who pleases the Saṅgha, pleasing the Saṅgha, if he gets angry when the qualities of the Fully Enlightened One are being spoken, he is criticized, is the connection. Here, sambuddhassā is indicative.
701.Gahetvāti paṭiggahetvā.
701.Gahetvā, having accepted.
751.‘‘Na rattacitto’’tiādinā purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pārājikānaṃ vītikkamacittuppādamattassāpi abhāvaṃ dīpeti.Maraṇāyāti ettha ‘‘manussajātikassā’’ti idaṃ pārājikapakaraṇatova labbhati.Tassāti kiñci dentassa.Tanti tathā dīyamānaṃ.
751."Na rattacitto," etc., indicates the absence of even the thought of transgression for the first three pārājika offenses. Maraṇāyā, here, "of human kind" is obtained from the pārājika section itself. Tassā, of one who is giving something. Taṃ, that which is being given in that way.
752.‘‘Parājayo’’ti idaṃ abhabbapuggalesu saṅghabhedakassa antogadhattā vuttaṃ. Salākaggāhenāpi saṅghaṃ bhindanto saṅghabhedakova hoti.
752."Parājayo," this is said because divisiveness of the Saṅgha is included among those who are incapable. Even while dividing the Saṅgha by means of drawing lots, he is just a divider of the Saṅgha.
753.Addhayojane yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ ekaṃcīvaraṃnikkhipitvānāti yojanā.
753.Having placed one of the three robes, any one, cīvaraṃ, at a distance of half a yojana, is the connection.
754.Suppatiṭṭhitanigrodhasadise rukkhamūlake ticīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā addhayojane aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpentassāti yojanā.
754.Having placed the three robes at the foot of a tree similar to a well-established nigrodha tree, he causes dawn to arise at a distance of half a yojana, is the connection.
755.Kāyikā nānāvatthukāyosambahulāāpattiyo apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe kathaṃ phuseti yojanā.
755.How does one touch many different offenses, sambahulā, not prior, not subsequent, at one moment?
757.Vācasikā na kāyikā nānāvatthukāyo sambahulā āpattiyo apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe kathaṃ phuseti yojanā.
757.How does one touch many different offenses that are verbal, not physical, sambahulā, not prior, not subsequent, at one moment?
758.Vinayanasattheti vinayapiṭake.Tassabhikkhussa.
758.Vinayanasatthe, in the Vinaya Piṭaka. Tassa, for that bhikkhu.
759.‘‘Itthiyā’’tiādīsu sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Itthiyā vā purisena vā paṇḍakena vā nimittake methunaṃ nasevantona paṭisevanto methunapaccayā cutoti yojanā.
759.In "itthiyā," etc., the instrumental case is used in the sense of the instrument. Not sevanto, not engaging in sexual intercourse with a woman, man, or eunuch, not experiencing, is cut off from the cause of sexual intercourse, is the connection.
760.Kāyasaṃsaggoyevakāyasaṃsaggatā,taṃ āpannā.Aṭṭhavatthukaṃ chejjanti evaṃnāmakaṃ pārājikaṃ.
760.Bodily contact itself is kāyasaṃsaggatā, one who has committed that. Aṭṭhavatthukaṃ chejjaṃ, is a pārājika of such a name.
762.Samaye piṭṭhisaññiteti gimhānaṃ pacchimamāsassa paṭhamadivasato yāva hemantassa paṭhamadivaso, etthantare sattamāsamatte piṭṭhisaññite samaye. ‘‘Mātuyāpi cā’’ti vattabbe‘‘mātarampi cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Soyeva vā pāṭho.
762.Samaye piṭṭhisaññite, in the time known as the "back," from the first day of the last month of summer until the first day of winter, in this interval of about seven months. Instead of saying "mātuyāpi cā," "mātarampi cā" is said. Or that is the reading.
764.‘‘Avassutahatthato hi piṇḍaṃ gahetvā’’ti iminā saṅghādisesassa vatthumāha,lasuṇanti pācittiyassa vatthuṃ,manussamaṃsanti thullaccayavatthuṃ,akappamaññanti dukkaṭavatthuṃ.Akappamaññanti ettha ‘‘maṃsa’’nti seso. ‘‘Sabbe ekato’’ti padacchedo.Ekatoti ettha ‘‘madditvā’’ti seso, akappiyamaṃsehi saddhiṃ ekato madditvā khādatīti attho. Sabbametaṃ ‘‘gahetvā, madditvā, khādatī’’ti kiriyānaṃ kammavacanaṃ.Manussamaṃsañcāti etthaca-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo hoti.Tassāti bhikkhuniyā. Saṅghādisesapācittiyadukkaṭapāṭidesanīyathullaccayāni ekakkhaṇe honti.
764.With "avassutahatthato hi piṇḍaṃ gahetvā," he states the basis for a saṅghādisesa, lasuṇaṃ is the basis for a pācittiya, manussamaṃsaṃ is the basis for a thullaccaya, akappamaññaṃ is the basis for a dukkaṭa. Akappamaññaṃ, here, "maṃsaṃ" is to be added. "Sabbe ekato" is the word division. Ekato, here, "madditvā" is to be added, meaning having crushed together with unallowable meats, he eats. All this is the passive voice of the verbs "gahetvā, madditvā, khādatī". Manussamaṃsañcā, here the ca should be connected separately. Tassā, of that bhikkhunī. Saṅghādisesa, pācittiya, dukkaṭa, pāṭidesanīya, and thullaccaya occur at one moment.
765.‘‘Puggalo eko’’ti padacchedo.Dvepi ca puṇṇavassāti paripuṇṇavīsativassā ca dve sāmaṇerā.Ekāva tesaṃ pana kammavācāti tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ ekena ācariyena ekāva upasampadakammavācā katā.Ekassāti ekassāpi sāmaṇerassa.Kammanti upasampadakammaṃ.Na rūhateti na sampajjati, kimettha kāraṇaṃ, vada bhaddamukhāti adhippāyo.
765."Puggalo eko" is the word division. Dvepi ca puṇṇavassā, and two novices who are fully twenty years old. Ekāva tesaṃ pana kammavācā, for those two novices, one kammavācā for ordination was done by one preceptor. Ekassā, even for one novice. Kammaṃ, the ordination act. Na rūhate, does not succeed, what is the reason here, tell me, good sir, is the idea.
766.Mahiddhikesūti dvīsu sāmaṇeresu. Sace pana eko kesaggamattampiākāsagoākāsaṭṭho hoti, ākāsagatasseva kataṃ taṃ upasampadakammaṃ neva rūhatineva sampajjati, bhūmigatassa rūhatīti yojanā.
766.Mahiddhikesū, of the two novices. If even one hair-tip is ākāsago, in the sky, that ordination act done for one in the sky kammaṃ neva rūhati, does not succeed, it succeeds for one on the ground, is the connection.
767.Iddhiyā ākāse ṭhitena saṅghena bhūmigatassa sāmaṇerassa upasampadakammaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Yadi karoti, kuppatīti yojanā. Idañca sabbakammānaṃ sādhāraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘saṅghenāpi ākāse nisīditvā bhūmigatassa kammaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Sace karoti, kuppatī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 481).
767.An ordination act should not be done by a Saṅgha standing in the sky for a novice on the ground. If it is done, it fails, is the connection. And this is a common characteristic of all acts. As it was said: "Even the Saṅgha should not sit in the sky and do an act for one on the ground. If it is done, it fails" (pari. aṭṭha. 481).
768.Vatthaṃ kappakatañca na hoti, rattañca na hoti, kesakambalādi akappiyañca hoti,nivatthassa panāpattitaṃ pana nivatthassa bhikkhuno āpatti hoti. Anāpatti kathaṃ siyā, vada bhaddamukhāti yojanā.
768.The cloth is not allowable, nor is it dyed, and it is unallowable, such as one made of hair, nivatthassa panāpatti, but for a bhikkhu who wears that, there is an offense. How can there be no offense, tell me, good sir, is the connection.
769.Etthaetasmiṃ akappiyavatthudhāraṇe tannimittaṃ. Acchinnacīvarassa bhikkhuno anāpatti siyāti yojanā.‘‘Kiñcipī’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ samattheti.Assaacchinnacīvarassa bhikkhussa akappiyaṃ nāma kiñcipi cīvaraṃ na vijjati, tasmā anāpattīti adhippāyo.
769.Ettha, in this wearing of unallowable cloth, for the reason of that. There is no offense for a bhikkhu with a cut-off robe, is the connection. With "kiñcipī," etc., he supports the meaning that was stated. Assa, for the bhikkhu with a cut-off robe, there is no such thing as an unallowable robe, therefore there is no offense, is the idea.
770.Kutopi capurisassa hatthato bhojanassakiñcina gaṇhati, bhojanato kiñcipi sayampi kassaci purisassa na deti, tathāpigarukaṃ vajjaṃsaṅghādisesāpattiṃupetiāpajjati, taṃ kathamāpajjati, tvaṃ yadi vinaye kusalo asi,memayhaṃvadaetaṃ kāraṇaṃ kathehīti yojanā.Haveti nipātamattaṃ.
770.Kutopi ca, and from someone's hand, he does not take kiñci, anything of food, nor does he himself give anything of food to anyone, even so, he garukaṃ vajjaṃ, incurs a serious offense, a upeti, saṅghādisesa offense, how does he incur it, if you are skilled in Vinaya, me, to me, vada, tell this reason, is the connection. Have is merely an expletive.
771.Yā panabhikkhunī aññāya bhikkhuniyā ‘‘iṅgha, ayye, yaṃ te eso purisapuggalo deti khādanīyaṃ vā’’tiādinā (pāci. 705) saṅghādisesamātikāya vuttanayena uyyojitāavassutamhāpurisapuggalā yaṃ kiñci bhojanaṃādāyapaṭiggahetvā sace bhuñjati, sā tathā bhuñjantī yāya uyyojitā bhuñjati, tassā uyyojikāyadhīrāvinayadharā paṇḍitāsaṅghādisesaṃ kathayantitassā uyyojitāya bhojanapariyosāne uyyojikāya saṅghādisesaṃ vadantīti yojanā. Yathāha – ‘‘tassā hi bhojanapariyosāne uyyojikāya saṅghādiseso hotī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 481).
771.Yā pana, that bhikkhunī, having incited another bhikkhunī, saying, "Come, venerable lady, that which that person gives to you," etc. (pāci. 705), according to the method stated in the preamble to the saṅghādisesa, avassutamhā, from that person, whatever food ādāya, having taken, having accepted, if she eats, that one who is eating in that way, because of whom she eats, to that inciter, dhīrā, Vinaya experts, wise ones, saṅghādisesaṃ kathayanti, declare a saṅghādisesa for that inciter at the conclusion of the meal, is the connection. As it was said: "For her, at the conclusion of the meal, there is a saṅghādisesa for the inciter" (pari. aṭṭha. 481).
772.Taṃ kathaṃ yadibujjhasijānāsi, sādhukaṃbrūhikathehīti yojanā.
772.How is that, if you bujjhasi, know, brūhi, tell me correctly, is the connection.
773.Niseviteti tāya uyyojitāya bhikkhuniyā tassa purisapuggalassa hatthato paṭiggahite tasmiṃ dantapone paribhutte uyyojikā lahuvajjaṃ āpajjatīti attho.
773.Nisevite, by that inciting bhikkhunī, in that toothpick that was accepted from the hand of that person and used, the inciter incurs a light offense, is the meaning.
775.‘‘Ukkhittako’’ti iminā āpattivajjamāha. Yathāha – ‘‘tena hi saddhiṃ vinayakammaṃ natthi, tasmā so saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjitvā chādento vajjaṃ na phusatī’’ti.
775.With "ukkhittako," he states an offense. As it was said: "There is no Vinaya act with him, therefore, by concealing a saṅghādisesa offense, he does not touch an offense."
776.Sappāṇappāṇajanti sappāṇake ca appāṇake ca jātaṃ.Neva jaṅgamanti pādehi bhūmiyaṃ neva carantaṃ.Na vihaṅgamanti ākāse pakkhaṃ pasāretvā na carantaṃ.Dvijanti dvīhi paccayehi, dvikkhattuṃ vā jātattā dvijaṃ.Kantanti manoharaṃ.Akantanti amanoharaṃ.
776.Sappāṇappāṇajaṃ, born from living and non-living things. Neva jaṅgamaṃ, not moving on the ground with feet. Na vihaṅgamaṃ, not moving in the sky spreading wings. Dvijaṃ, a "twice-born" because of two causes, or because of being born twice. Kantaṃ, delightful. Akantaṃ, undelightful.
777.Sappāṇajo saddo cittajo vutto, appāṇajo utujo saddo vutto, so panadvīhevapaccayehi jātattā ‘‘dvijo’’ti matoti yojanā.
777.A sound born of living things is said to be mind-born, a sound born of non-living things is said to be temperature-born, that is considered "dvijo" because of being born from two causes, is the connection.
778.‘‘Vinaye’’tiādigāthā vaṇṇitatthāyeva.
778.The "Vinaye," etc., verse is of the meaning as described.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the commentary on the hidden meanings in the Uttara
Sedamocanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Sedamocanakathā is finished.
Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇakathā
779-80.Sabbasikkhāpadānanti ubhatovibhaṅgāgatānaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ.Bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīhīti ubhayattha sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnañca, bhikkhunīhi bhikkhūnañcāti ubhayattha asādhāraṇapaññattañca,tathābhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnañca, bhikkhunīhi bhikkhūnañcāti ubhayattha sādhāraṇasikkhāpadañca ahaṃ vakkhāmīti yojanā.Samāhitāti ekaggacittā.Taṃmayā vuccamānaṃ nidānādinayaṃ.Suṇāthāti sotujanaṃ sakkaccasavane niyojeti.
779-80. Sabbasikkhāpadānanti: All the training rules that come in both Vibhaṅgas. Bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīhīti: "By monks and by nuns," is a co-operative instrumental usage in both cases. I will explain the rules not shared by monks and nuns, i.e. by monks in relation to nuns, and by nuns in relation to monks; tathā, similarly, the rules shared by both monks and nuns, i.e. by monks in relation to nuns, and by nuns in relation to monks. Samāhitā: With concentrated minds. Taṃ: That which is being spoken by me, beginning with the Nidāna. Suṇātha: He enjoins the audience to listen respectfully.
781.‘‘Nidāna’’ntiādigāthā vuttatthāva.
781. The verses beginning with "Nidāna" have meanings that have already been stated.
782-3.‘‘Kati vesāliyā’’tiādi pucchāgāthā uttānatthāyeva.
782-3. The question verses beginning with "Kati Vesāliyā" etc., have straightforward meanings.
786.‘‘Dasa vesāliyā’’tiādivissajjanagāthānaṃ‘‘methuna’’ntiādayo niddesavasena vuttā.Viggahoti manussaviggahaṃ pārājikaṃ.Catutthantimavatthukanti uttarimanussadhammapārājikaṃ.Atirekacīvaranti paṭhamakathinaṃ.Suddhakāḷakeḷakalomakanti eḷakalomavagge dutiyaṃ.
786. In the verses of explanation beginning with "Dasa Vesāliyā", the meanings of "methuna" etc., have been stated by way of definition. Viggaho: Pārājika (defeat) regarding human form. Catutthantimavatthuka: The pārājika regarding false claims of superior human states. Atirekacīvara: The first Kathina. Suddhakāḷakeḷakalomaka: The second in the Eḷakaloma section.
787.Bhūtanti paṭhame musāvādavagge aṭṭhamaṃ.Paramparañcevāti paramparabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ.Mukhadvāranti catutthe bhojanavagge dasamaṃ.Bhikkhunīsu ca akkosoti bhikkhunipātimokkhe chaṭṭhe ārāmavagge dutiyaṃ.
787. Bhūta: The eighth in the first Musāvāda section. Paramparañcevā: The training rule on consecutive eating. Mukhadvāra: The tenth in the fourth Bhojana section. Bhikkhunīsu ca akkoso: The second in the sixth Ārāma section of the Bhikkhunī Pātimokkha.
788.Dveanuddhaṃsanānīti aṭṭhamanavamasaṅghādisesā.Cīvarassa paṭiggahoti cīvaravagge pañcamaṃ.
788. Dve anuddhaṃsanānī: The eighth and ninth Saṅghādisesas. Cīvarassa paṭiggaho: The fifth in the Cīvara section.
789.Rūpiyanti eḷakalomavagge aṭṭhamaṃ.Suttaviññattīti pattavagge chaṭṭhaṃ.Ujjhāpananti dutiye bhūtagāmavagge tatiyaṃ.Paripācitapiṇḍoti tatiye ovādavagge navamaṃ.Tatheva gaṇabhojananti catutthe bhojanavagge dutiyaṃ.
789. Rūpiya: The eighth in the Eḷakaloma section. Suttaviññattī: The sixth in the Patta section. Ujjhāpana: The third in the second Bhūtagāma section. Paripācitapiṇḍo: The ninth in the third Ovāda section. Tatheva gaṇabhojana: The second in the fourth Bhojana section.
790.Vikāle bhojanañcevāti tattheva sattamaṃ.Cārittanti acelakavagge pañcame chaṭṭhaṃ.Nhānanti surāpānavagge chaṭṭhe sattamaṃ.Ūnavīsativassanti sattame sappāṇakavagge pañcamaṃ.Datvā saṅghena cīvaranti aṭṭhame sahadhammikavagge navamaṃ.
790. Vikāle bhojanañcevā: The seventh in that same section. Cāritta: The sixth in the fifth Acelaka section. Nhāna: The seventh in the sixth Surāpāna section. Ūnavīsativassa: The fifth in the seventh Sappāṇaka section. Datvā saṅghena cīvara: The ninth in the eighth Sahadhammika section.
791.Vosāsantīti dutiyaṃ bhikkhupāṭidesanīyaṃ.Naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vāti paṭhame lasuṇavagge dasamaṃ.Cārikadvayanti catutthe tuvaṭṭavagge sattamaṭṭhamāni.Chandadānenāti aṭṭhame kumāribhūtavagge ekādasamaṃ.‘‘Chandadānetī’’ti vā pāṭho. ‘‘Chandadānaṃ iti ime’’ti padacchedo.
791. Vosāsantī: The second Bhikkhu Pāṭidesanīya. Naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā: The tenth in the first Lasuṇa section. Cārikadvaya: The seventh and eighth in the fourth Tuvaṭṭa section. Chandadānenā: The eleventh in the eighth Kumāribhūta section. Alternatively, the reading is "Chandadānetī." The word division is "Chandadānaṃ iti ime".
792.Kuṭīti chaṭṭho saṅghādiseso.Kosiyanti nissaggiyesu dutiye eḷakalomavagge paṭhamaṃ.Seyyanti musāvādavagge pañcamaṃ.Pathavīti musāvādavagge dasamaṃ.Bhūtagāmakanti bhūtagāmavagge dutiye paṭhamaṃ.Sappāṇakañca siñcantīti bhūtagāmavagge dasamaṃ.
792. Kuṭī: The sixth Saṅghādisesa. Kosiya: The first in the second Eḷakaloma section among the Nissaggiyas. Seyya: The fifth in the Musāvāda section. Pathavī: The tenth in the Musāvāda section. Bhūtagāmaka: The first in the second Bhūtagāma section. Sappāṇakañca siñcantī: The tenth in the Bhūtagāma section.
800.Chaūnāni tīṇeva satānīti chahi ūnāni tīṇeva satāni, catunavutādhikāni dvisatānīti attho.Samacetasāti –
800. Chaūnāni tīṇeva satānīti: Three hundred less six, meaning two hundred and ninety-four. Samacetasā: With an even mind—
‘‘Vadhake devadattamhi, core aṅgulimālake;
‘‘Towards the murderer Devadatta, the thief Aṅgulimāla,
Dhanapāla, and Rāhula, everywhere with an equal mind.’’ (mi. pa. 6.6.5; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.16 devadattavatthu; itivu. aṭṭha. 100) –
Vacanato sabbesu hitāhitesu, lābhālābhādīsu ca aṭṭhasu lokadhammesu nibbikāratāya ca samānacittena tathāgatena.
Due to the unperturbed nature of the Tathāgata, with an equal mind in all matters of benefit and harm, gain and loss, and the eight worldly conditions.
Vuttāvasesāti vesāliyādīsu chasu nagaresu vuttehi avasiṭṭhāni.Ime sabbeimāni sabbāni sikkhāpadāni sāvatthiyaṃ katāni bhavanti, paññattāni hontīti attho.
Vuttāvasesā: Remaining after what has been said in the six cities, Vesāli etc. Ime sabbe: All these training rules were made, i.e. enacted, in Sāvatthi.
801.Pārājikāni cattārīti vesāliyaṃ vuttaṃ methunamanussaviggahauttarimanussadhammaṃ, rājagahe adinnādānanti cattāri.Satta saṅghādisesakāti rājagahe vuttā dve anuddhaṃsanā, dve ca bhedā, āḷaviyaṃ kuṭikāro, kosambiyaṃ mahallakavihāro, dovacassanti satta.Nissaggiyāni aṭṭhevāti vesāliyaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ, kāḷakaeḷakalomaṃ, rājagahe cīvarapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, suttaviññatti, āḷaviyaṃ kosiyamissakaṃ, kapilavatthumhi eḷakalomadhovanaṃ, ūnapañcabandhananti aṭṭha.
801. Pārājikāni cattārīti: The four pārājikas spoken in Vesāli: sexual intercourse, human form, false claims of superior human states, and stealing in Rājagaha. Satta saṅghādisesakā: The seven Saṅghādisesas spoken in Rājagaha: the two Anuddhamsanas, the two Bhedas, the Kuṭikāro in Āḷavī, the Mahallakavihāro in Kosambī, and Dovacassa. Nissaggiyāni aṭṭhevā: The eight Nissaggiyas: Atirekacīvara in Vesāli, Kāḷakaeḷakaloma, Cīvarapaṭiggahaṇa in Rājagaha, Rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇa, Suttaviññatti, Kosiyamissakaṃ in Āḷavī, Eḷakalomadhovanaṃ in Kapilavatthu, and Ūnapañcabandhana.
Dvattiṃseva ca khuddakāti vesāliyaṃ bhūtārocanaṃ, paramparabhojanaṃ, appaṭiggahaṇaṃ, acelakaṃ, ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuṃ akkoseyyā’’ti pañca, rājagahe ujjhāpanakaṃ, bhikkhuniparipācitapiṇḍo, gaṇabhojanaṃ, vikālabhojanaṃ, ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu nimantito’’tiādi ca, ‘‘orenaḍḍhamāsaṃ nahāyeyyā’’ti, ūnavīsativassaṃ, ‘‘samaggena saṅghena cīvaraṃ datvā’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ aṭṭha, bhikkhunīnaṃ pana ‘‘naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā’’tiādi ca, ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī antovassa’’ntiādi ca, ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī vassaṃvutthā’’tiādi cāti dvayaṃ, ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī pārivāsikachandadānenā’’tiādi cāti cattāri, āḷaviyaṃ anupasampannena uttari dirattatirattaṃ, ‘‘pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā’’tiādi, bhūtagāmapātabyatāya, ‘‘jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udaka’’nti cattāri, kosambiyaṃ aññavādake vihesake, yāvadvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya, surāmerayapāne, anādariye, ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūhi sahadhammika’’ntiādi cāti pañca, kapilavatthumhi ‘‘bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā’’tiādi, ‘‘agilānena bhikkhunā cātumāsa’’ntiādi, ‘‘aṭṭhimayaṃ vā dantamayaṃ vā’’tiādi tīṇi bhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ pana ‘‘udakasuddhikaṃ panā’’tiādi, ‘‘ovādāya vā’’tiādīti dve, bhaggesu ‘‘agilāno visibbanāpekkho’’tiādi ekanti etāni bāttiṃseva pācittiyāni.
Dvattiṃseva ca khuddakā: The thirty-two Khuddakas: Bhūtārocanaṃ in Vesāli, Paramparabhojanaṃ, Appaṭiggahaṇaṃ, Acelakaṃ, "Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuṃ akkoseyyā" and five others, Ujjhāpanakaṃ in Rājagaha, Bhikkhuniparipācitapiṇḍo, Gaṇabhojanaṃ, Vikālabhojanaṃ, "Yo pana bhikkhu nimantito" etc., "Orenaḍḍhamāsaṃ nahāyeyya", Ūnavīsativassaṃ, "Samaggena saṅghena cīvaraṃ datvā" eight for monks, and for nuns "Naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā" etc., and "Yā pana bhikkhunī antovassa" etc., and "Yā pana bhikkhunī vassaṃvutthā" etc., two, "Yā pana bhikkhunī pārivāsikachandadānenā" etc., four, Anupasampannena uttari dirattatirattaṃ in Āḷavī, "Pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā" etc., due to destroying vegetation, "Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udaka" four, Aññavādake vihesake in Kosambī, Yāvadvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya, Surāmerayapāne, Anādariye, "Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūhi sahadhammika" etc., five, "Bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā" etc., in Kapilavatthu, "Agilānena bhikkhunā cātumāsa" etc., "Aṭṭhimayaṃ vā dantamayaṃ vā" etc., three for monks, and for nuns "Udakasuddhikaṃ panā" etc., "Ovādāya vā" etc., two, "Agilāno visibbanāpekkho" etc., one in Bhaggesu, these are the thirty-two Pācittiyas.
802.Dvegārayhāti ‘‘bhikkhu paneva kulesū’’tiādi, ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni āraññakānī’’tiādi cāti dve pāṭidesanīyā.Tayo sekhāti kosambiyaṃ na surusurukārakaṃ, bhaggesu na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakaṃ, na sasitthakaṃ pattadhovananti tīṇi sekhiyāni.Chappaññāsevasikkhāpadāni piṇḍitāni vesāliyādīsuchasu nagaresupaññattāni bhavantīti yojanā.
802. Dve gārayhā: Two blameworthy (offenses), "Bhikkhu paneva kulesū" etc., and "Yāni kho pana tāni āraññakānī" etc., two Pāṭidesanīyas. Tayo sekhā: Three Sekhiyas: Na surusurukārakaṃ in Kosambī, Na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakaṃ, Na sasitthakaṃ pattadhovanaṃ in Bhaggesu. Chappaññāseva are the training rules collected and enacted in the chasu nagaresu, the six cities, Vesāli etc.
803.Sattasu nagaresu paññattānietāni sabbānevasikkhāpadāni pana aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāneva bhavanti. Sāvatthiyaṃ paññattehi catunavutādhikadvisatasikkhāpadehi saddhiṃ chasu nagaresu paññattāni chapaññāsa sikkhāpadāni paññāsādhikāni tīṇi satāni bhavantīti attho. Aḍḍhena catutthaṃ yesaṃ tāniaḍḍhuḍḍhāni.
803. Etāni sabbāneva, all these training rules enacted in the seven cities, are one hundred and fifty in total. Together with the two hundred and ninety-four training rules enacted in Sāvatthi, the fifty-six training rules enacted in the six cities amount to three hundred and fifty. Those which are fourth by half, aḍḍhuḍḍhāni.
804-10.Evaṃ nidānavasena nagaraṃ dassetvā idāni nidānamaññamasesetvā ubhatovibhaṅgāgatānaṃ sabbesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ kevalaṃ piṇḍavasena gaṇanaṃ dassetumāha‘‘sikkhāpadāni bhikkhūna’’ntiādi.
804-10. Having thus shown the cities by way of origin (nidāna), now, after setting aside all other origins, he says "sikkhāpadāni bhikkhūna" etc., to show a mere counting by way of collection of all the training rules that come in both Vibhaṅgas.
811.Evaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ nidānañca gaṇanañca dassetvā idāni asādhāraṇāni dassetumāha‘‘chacattālīsā’’tiādi. Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇabhāvaṃ mahesinā gamitāni sikkhāpadāni chacattālīseva hontīti yojanā. Iminā uddesamāha.
811. Having thus shown the origin and the counting of all the training rules, now he says "chacattālīsā" etc., to show the non-shared (rules). The training rules made known by the great seer as not shared by monks with nuns are forty-six. This indicates the Uddesa (summary).
814.‘‘Cha ca saṅghādisesā’’tiādīhi dvīhi gāthāhi niddesaṃ dassetvā‘‘vissaṭṭhī’’tiādinā paṭiniddesamāha.
814. After showing the Niddesa (definition) with the two verses beginning with "Cha ca saṅghādisesā" etc., he shows the Paṭiniddesa (counter-definition) with "vissaṭṭhī" etc.
815.‘‘Nissaggiye ādivaggasmi’’nti padacchedo.Dhovananti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaradhovanaṃ.Paṭiggahoti tassāyeva hatthato cīvarapaṭiggahaṇaṃ.
815. The word division is, "Nissaggiye ādivaggasmi". Dhovana: Washing a robe for a nun who is not a relative. Paṭiggaho: Accepting a robe from the hand of that same nun.
816.Āraññanti ekūnatiṃsatimaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ.
816. Ārañña: The twenty-ninth training rule.
817.Bhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhunīnañca vuttāni sabbāni pācittiyāni gaṇanāvasā aṭṭhāsītisataṃ bhavantīti yojanā.Aṭṭhāsītisatanti bhikkhunipātimokkhāgataṃ chasaṭṭhisatapācittiyaṃ vakkhamānehi bhikkhuniyatehi bāvīsatipācittiyehi saddhiṃ aṭṭhāsītisataṃ hoti.Tatoti aṭṭhāsītādhikasatapācittiyato niddhāritāni etāni dvāvīsati khuddakāni bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhake bhavantīti yojanā.
817. The total count of all the Pācittiyas spoken for monks and nuns is one hundred and eighty-eight. Aṭṭhāsītisata: The one hundred and sixty-six Pācittiyas that come in the Bhikkhunī Pātimokkha, together with the twenty-two Pācittiyas for nuns that will be spoken of, is one hundred and eighty-eight. Tato: Determined from the one hundred and eighty-eight Pācittiyas, these twenty-two Khuddakas are in the monks' Pātimokkha.
818.Bhikkhunivaggoti bhikkhunīnaṃ ovādavaggo. Paramparabhojane paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃparamparabhojanaṃ,paramparabhojanena saha vattatītisaparamparabhojano.
818. Bhikkhunivaggo: The Ovāda section for nuns. The training rule enacted in Paramparabhojanaṃ, paramparabhojanaṃ, existing together with Paramparabhojanaṃ, is saparamparabhojano.
822.‘‘Ekato pana paññattā’’tiādi nigamanaṃ. Bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇataṃ gatā ekatova paññattāimeimāni sikkhāpadāni piṇḍitāni chacattālīsa hontīti yojanā.
822. "Ekato pana paññattā" etc., is the conclusion. These training rules ime that have gone to a state of not being shared by nuns, enacted solely for them, collected together, amount to forty-six.
823.Mahesinā bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇabhāvaṃ gamitāni bhikkhunīnaṃ sikkhāpadāni paripiṇḍitāni sataṃ, tiṃsa ca bhavantīti yojanā.
823. The training rules for nuns, made known by the great seer as not shared by monks, collected together, amount to one hundred and thirty.
824.Evaṃ uddiṭṭhānaṃ niddesamāha‘‘pārājikānī’’tiādinā.Pārājikāni cattārīti ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikavajjapaṭicchādikaukkhittānuvattikaaṭṭhavatthukasaṅkhātāni cattāri pārājikāni.
824. Thus, he gives the Niddesa for what has been summarized, beginning with "pārājikānī". Pārājikāni cattārī: The four pārājikas counted as Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikavajjapaṭicchādikaukkhittānuvattikaaṭṭhavatthukasaṅkhātāni.
826.Dvīhi gāthāhi niddiṭṭhānaṃ paṭiniddeso‘‘bhikkhunīnaṃ tu saṅghādisesehī’’tiādi. Catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ uddesavaseneva pākaṭattā paṭiniddese aggahaṇaṃ.Ādito chāti ussayavādikādayo cha saṅghādisesā.‘‘Ādito’’ti idaṃ ‘‘yāvatatiyakā’’ti imināpi yojetabbaṃ, aṭṭhasu yāvatatiyakesu purimāni cattāri sikkhāpadānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
826. The Paṭiniddesa for what has been defined in the two verses is "bhikkhunīnaṃ tu saṅghādisesehī" etc. The four pārājikas are not included in the Paṭiniddesa because they are evident from the Uddesa. Ādito chā: The six Saṅghādisesas beginning with Ussayavādikā. "Ādito" should also be connected with "yāvatatiyakā", which means that the first four training rules are among the eight Yāvatatiyakas.
827.Sattaññadatthikādīnītiādi-saddena aññadatthikasikkhāpadato pacchimāni cattāri, purimāni ‘‘aññaṃ viññāpeyya, aññaṃ cetāpeyyā’’ti dve ca gahitāni.Patto cevāti paṭhamaṃ pattasannicayasikkhāpadamāha. Dutiyavagge purimasikkhāpadadvayaṃ‘‘garuṃ lahu’’nti iminā gahitaṃ.
827. Sattaññadatthikādīnī: With the ādi-word, the four training rules after the Aññadatthika training rule, and the two preceding ones "Aññaṃ viññāpeyya, aññaṃ cetāpeyya" are taken. Patto cevā: He speaks of the first training rule regarding the accumulation of bowls. In the second section, the two preceding training rules are taken with "garuṃ lahu".
828.Idhabhikkhunipātimokkhe etāni pana dvādaseva nissaggiyāni satthārā bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena ekato paññattānīti yojanā.
828. Idha, in this Bhikkhunī Pātimokkha, these twelve Nissaggiyas were enacted solely for the nuns by the Teacher.
829-30.‘‘Sabbeva gaṇanāvasā’’tiādi nigamanaṃ. Bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇataṃ gatā bhikkhunīnaṃ ekato paññattā sataṃ, tiṃsa bhavantīti yojanā.
829-30. "Sabbeva gaṇanāvasā" etc., is the conclusion. For the nuns, those which have gone to a state of not being shared by monks, enacted solely for them, amount to one hundred and thirty.
831-3.‘‘Asādhāraṇā ubhinna’’nti padacchedo. Ubhinnaṃ asādhāraṇasikkhāpadāni satañca sattati ca cha ca bhavanti. Evamuddiṭṭhānaṃ niddeso‘‘pārājikāni cattārī’’tiādi. Bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnaṃcattāri pārājikāni. Dasacchacāti bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnaṃ saṅghādisesā dasa, bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhūnaṃ vissaṭṭhiādikā saṅghādisesā cha cāti saṅghādisesā soḷasa.
831-3. The word division is "Asādhāraṇā ubhinna". The training rules not shared by both, are one hundred and seventy-six. The Niddesa for what has been summarized is "pārājikāni cattārī" etc. Cattāri pārājikāni are the four pārājikas for nuns that are not shared by monks. Dasaccha ca: The ten Saṅghādisesas for nuns that are not shared by monks, and the six Saṅghādisesas for monks that are not shared by nuns, Vissaṭṭhi etc., thus sixteen Saṅghādisesas.
Aniyatā duve cevāti bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhūnaṃ aniyatā dve ca.Nissaggā catuvīsatīti bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhūnaṃ dvādasa, bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnaṃ dvādasāti evaṃ nissaggiyā catuvīsati ca.Sataṃ aṭṭhārasa khuddakāti bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhūnaṃ bāvīsati, bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnaṃ channavutīti aṭṭhārasādhikasataṃ khuddakāni ca.Etthāti imasmiṃ asādhāraṇasaṅgahe.
Aniyatā duve cevā: The two Aniyatas for monks that are not shared by nuns. Nissaggā catuvīsatī: The twelve Nissaggiyas for monks that are not shared by nuns, and the twelve Nissaggiyas for nuns that are not shared by monks, thus twenty-four Nissaggiyas. Sataṃ aṭṭhārasa khuddakā: The twenty-two Khuddakas for monks that are not shared by nuns, and the ninety-six Khuddakas for nuns that are not shared by monks, thus one hundred and eighteen Khuddakas. Etthā: In this collection of non-shared rules.
Dvādaseva ca gārayhāti bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhūnaṃ cattāri, bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnaṃ aṭṭhāti ete pāṭidesanīyā cāti ime chasattatiadhikāni satasikkhāpadāni ubhinnampi asādhāraṇānīti yojanā.
Dvādaseva ca gārayhā: The four Pāṭidesanīyas for monks that are not shared by nuns, and the eight Pāṭidesanīyas for nuns that are not shared by monks, thus these twelve Pāṭidesanīyas, thus these one hundred and seventy-six training rules are not shared by both.
834.Ubhinnampi sādhāraṇāni satthunā paññattāni sikkhāpadāni satañca sattati ca cattāri ca bhavantīti pakāsitāti yojanā.
834. The training rules enacted by the Teacher that are shared by both, are declared to be one hundred and seventy-four.
835-6.Pārājikāni cattārīti methunaadinnādānamanussaviggahauttarimanussadhammapārājikāni cattāri ca.Satta saṅghādisesakāti sañcarittaamūlakaaññabhāgiyā, cattāro yāvatatiyakā cāti saṅghādisesā satta ca.Aṭṭhārasa ca nissaggāti nissaggiyesu paṭhame cīvaravagge dhovanapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadadvayavajjitāni aṭṭha, eḷakalomavagge aṭṭhamanavamadasamānīti tayo, pattavagge paṭhamapattavassikasāṭikaāraññakasikkhāpadattayassa vajjitāni satta cāti imāni aṭṭhārasa nissaggiyasikkhāpadāni ca.Samasattati khuddakāti –
835-6.Four pārājikas are: sexual intercourse, taking what is not given, depriving a human being of life, and claiming a superhuman attainment. Seven saṅghādisesas are: offenses involving contact, baseless accusations, offenses of another degree, and the four offenses requiring probation. And eighteen nissaggiyas are: In the first chapter of robes among the nissaggiyas, eight excluding the two training rules about washing and receiving robes; in the chapter on goat's wool, three - the eighth, ninth, and tenth; and in the chapter on bowls, seven excluding the first bowl, the rain cloth, and the forest-dwelling training rules. These are the eighteen nissaggiya training rules. Seventy-seven minor ones -
‘‘Sabbo bhikkhunivaggopi…pe… dvāvīsati bhavanti hī’’ti. (u. vi. 818-821) –
‘‘The entire Bhikkhuni section…pe… indeed there are twenty-two.’’ (u. vi. 818-821) –
ubhinnaṃbhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃsamasikkhatāsādhāraṇasikkhāpadāni sabbaso sataṃ, sattati, cattāri ca hontīti yojanā.
The meaning is that the common training rules shared by both bhikkhus and bhikkhunis, who have equal training, total one hundred and seventy-four.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the explanation of the hidden meanings in the Uttara-vinicchaya,
Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of shared and unshared training rules is complete.
Lakkhaṇakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Characteristics
837.Itoti sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇakathāya paraṃ.Sabbaganti sabbasikkhāpadasādhāraṇaṃ.Vadato meti vadato mama vacanaṃ.Nibodhathāti nisāmetha, ekaggacittā hutvā sakkaccaṃ suṇāthāti attho.
837.Here, after the discussion of shared and unshared rules. Pervading all means common to all training rules. As I speak means my words as I speak. Understand means listen, pay attention carefully with a focused mind.
838-9.‘‘Vipatti āpatti anāpattī’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Āṇatti aṅga’’nti padacchedo.Vajjakammapabhedakanti vajjapabhedakaṃ kammapabhedakaṃ.Tikadvayanti kusalattikavedanāttikadvayaṃ.Sabbatthātiidaṃ panasattarasavidhasabbasādhāraṇalakkhaṇaṃ.Sabbatthasabbesu sikkhāpadesu.
838-9.The word divisions are: "Vipatti, āpatti, anāpatti." The word divisions are: "Āṇatti, aṅga." Distinguishing faults and actions means distinguishing faults and actions. The two triads are the triad of wholesome factors and the triad of feeling. Everywhere, however, this seventeenfold characteristic is common everywhere, in all training rules.
840.Idhaimasmiṃ sattarasavidhe yaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ pubbe vuttanayaṃ, yañca uttānaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ vajjetvāatthajotanaṃatthappakāsanaṃ karissāmīti yojanā.
840.Here, in this seventeenfold characteristic, whatever has been said before, and whatever is obvious, except for all that, I will illuminate the meaning, I will explain the meaning.
841.Nidānaṃ nāma rājagahādisikkhāpadapaññattiṭṭhānabhūtāni satta nagarāni, taṃ pubbe dassitanti avasiṭṭhāni dassetumāha‘‘puggalo’’tiādi.Puggalo nāmakatamo? Yaṃ yaṃ bhikkhuniṃ, bhikkhuñca ārabbha sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ,ayaṃbhikkhunī ca bhikkhu ca sikkhāpadapaññattiyā ādikammiko puggaloti vuccatīti yojanā.
841.‘Nidāna’ means the seven cities, such as Rājagaha, which are the locations where the training rules were established; that has been shown previously, so to show the remainder, he says, “The individual,” etc. The individual named - who is that? Whichever bhikkhu or bhikkhuni concerning whom a training rule was established, this bhikkhu or bhikkhuni is called the first offender in the establishment of the training rule.
842.Dhaniyādayotiādi-saddena sambahulā bhikkhū, vaggumudātīriyā bhikkhū, seyyasako, udāyī, āḷavakā bhikkhū, channo, mettiyabhūmajakā, devadatto, assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū, chabbaggiyā bhikkhū, upanando sakyaputto, aññataro bhikkhu, hatthako sakyaputto, anuruddho, sattarasavaggiyā bhikkhū, cūḷapanthako, belaṭṭhasīso, āyasmā ānando, sāgatatthero, ariṭṭho bhikkhu, āyasmā ānandoti ime ekavīsati saṅgahitā.
842.Dhaniyā and others - by the word "ādi" are included many bhikkhus, the bhikkhus of Vaggumudātīriya, Seyyasaka, Udāyī, the bhikkhus of Āḷavaka, Channa, Mettiya and Bhūmajaka, Devadatta, Assaji and Punabbasu, the group-of-six bhikkhus, Upananda Sakyaputta, a certain bhikkhu, Hatthaka Sakyaputta, Anuruddha, the group-of-seventeen bhikkhus, Cūḷapanthaka, Belaṭṭhasīsa, Venerable Ānanda, Sāgata Thera, Ariṭṭha bhikkhu, Venerable Ānanda; these twenty-one are included.
843.Thullanandādayotiādi-saddena sundarīnandā, chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo, aññatarā bhikkhunī, caṇḍakāḷī, sambahulā bhikkhuniyo, dve bhikkhuniyoti chayime saṅgahitā.Sabbeti ubhayapātimokkhe ādikammikā sabbe puggalā.
843.Thullanandā and others - by the word "ādi" are included Sundarīnandā, the group-of-six bhikkhunis, a certain bhikkhuni, Caṇḍakāḷī, many bhikkhunis, two bhikkhunis; these six are included. All means all individuals who are the first offenders in both pātimokkhas.
844.Vatthūtivatthunāma sudinnādino tassa tasseva puggalassa methunādikassa cavatthunosabbappakārenaajjhācārovītikkamo pavuccatīti yojanā.
844.The object - the object means the transgression, the violation, in every way, of the object of sexual intercourse etc., of that particular individual beginning with Sudinna.
845-6.Kevalā mūlabhūtā paññatti. Anu ca anuppanno ca sabbattha ca padeso caanvanuppannasabbatthapadesā,teyeva padānianvanuppannasabbatthapadesapadāni,tāni pubbakāni yāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ tāanvanuppannasabbatthapadesapadapubbikā. Tatheva sā paññattīti yojanā. Anupaññatti anuppannapaññatti sabbatthapaññatti padesapaññatti hoti. Ekato ubhato pubbā katheva sā paññattīti yojanā. Ekatopadaṃ ubhatopadañca pubbamassātiekatoubhatopubbā,ekatopaññatti ubhatopaññattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
845-6.The original, root regulation. ‘Anu’ (secondary), and ‘anuppanna’ (not yet arisen), and ‘sabbattha’ (everywhere), and ‘padesa’ (in a certain place) are "anvanuppannasabbatthapadesā," those same words are "anvanuppannasabbatthapadesapadāni," those that precede the regulations are "anvanuppannasabbatthapadesapadapubbikā." That is how that regulation is. ‘Anupaññatti’ is a secondary regulation, ‘sabbattha-paññatti’ is a regulation everywhere, ‘padesapaññatti’ is a regulation in a certain place. That regulation is previously stated, either in one way or in two ways. That which has one word or two words preceding it is "ekatoubhatopubbā," which means one regulation or two regulations are stated.
847.Tatthanavadhāsu paññattīsu. Paññatti nāma katamāti āha‘‘yo methuna’’ntiādi. ‘‘Yo bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’ti ca ‘‘yo bhikkhu adinnaṃ ādiyeyyā’’ti ca evamādikā sikkhāpadassa mūlabhūtāpaññattihotīti yojanā.
847.There, among the nine kinds of regulations. What is meant by ‘paññatti’? He says, "The bhikkhu who engages in sexual intercourse," etc. The original, root regulation of the training rule is: "Whatever bhikkhu engages in sexual intercourse," and "Whatever bhikkhu takes what is not given," and so on.
848.Iccevamādikātiādi-saddena ‘‘sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti ca ‘‘gāmā vā araññā vā’’ti ca evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
848.And so forth - by the word "ādi" is included the collection of "without renouncing the training, without declaring weakness," and "whether in a village or in the forest," and so on.
849.Vajjake anuppanneyeva paññattā anuppannapaññatti,sāanuppannapaññatti.
849.A regulation established when a fault has not yet arisen is a secondary regulation, that secondary regulation.
850-1.Guṇaṅguṇupāhanasikkhāpadena saha cammattharaṇasikkhāpadañcadhuvanhānaṃdhuvanahānasikkhāpadaṃ, pañcavaggena upasampādanasikkhāpadañcātiesā catubbidhāpaññatti padesapaññatti nāmāti vuttāti yojanā.Majjhimadesasmiṃyeva hotīti majjhimadesasmiṃyeva āpattikarā hoti.Na aññatoti na aññatra paccantimesu janapadesu desantare ṭhāne.
850-1.The training rule on leather sandals, together with the training rule on using leather coverings, and the training rule on fixed bathing fees, the training rule on fixed bathing, and the training rule on conferring full ordination with a group of five – this fourfold regulation is called a regulation applying to a specific region. It only applies in the Middle Country means it only leads to an offense in the Middle Country. Not elsewhere means not elsewhere in the border regions, in other countries or places.
852.Itoti catubbidhapadesapaññattito.Etthāti imasmiṃ paññattibhede.Sādhāraṇadukādikanti sādhāraṇapaññatti asādhāraṇapaññatti, ekatopaññatti ubhatopaññattīti dukadvayaṃ.Atthato ekamevāti atthato aññamaññasamānameva. Vipattāpattānāpattivinicchayo vitthāritoti idha na dassito. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo –vipattīti sīlaācāradiṭṭhiājīvavipattīnaṃ aññatarā.Āpattīti pubbapayogādivasena āpattibhedo.Anāpattīti ajānanādivasena anāpatti.
852.From here, from the fourfold regulation applying to a specific region. Here, in this kind of regulation. The common dyads, etc., the dyads of common and uncommon regulations, and regulations applying in one way or two ways. In meaning, they are the same, in meaning, they are mutually identical. The analysis of downfall, offense, and non-offense has been extensively explained, so it is not shown here. Here is a summary: downfall is one of the downfall of morality, conduct, views, or livelihood. Offense is a kind of offense due to prior action, etc. Non-offense is non-offense due to ignorance, etc.
853.Āpatti pana sāṇattikāpi hoti, anāṇattikāpi hotīti yojanā.‘‘Āṇattīti ca nāmesā āṇāpanā’’ti iminā āṇatti-saddassa sabhāvasādhāraṇattāti idhāha.
853.Moreover, an offense can be an order or not an order. "This is called an order, an instruction," here it says that the word ‘Āṇatti’ has a nature that is commonly understood.
854.Sabbasikkhāpadesupi sabbāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ sabbo pana aṅgabhedopi vibhāvinā ñātabboti yojanā.
854.In all the training rules, all the offenses, all the divisions of the limbs should be understood by the discerning.
856.‘‘Sā ca akriyasamuṭṭhānā’’ti padacchedo. Kāyena, vācāya vā dasāhabbhantare atirekacīvarassa anadhiṭṭhānena nissaggiyapācittiyaṃ hotīti‘‘paṭhame kathine viyā’’ti udāharaṇaṃ kataṃ.
856.The word division is: "Sā ca akriyasamuṭṭhānā." Because of not resolving to keep an extra robe within ten days, by body or by speech, there is a nissaggiya-pācittiya; "in the first Kathina, as it were," an example is made.
857.Kriyākriyato hotīti kiriyato ca akiriyato ca hoti. Tattha udāharaṇamāha‘‘cīvaraggahaṇeviyā’’ti. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato cīvaraggahaṇaṃkriyā,pārivattakassa adānaṃakriyāti evaṃ kiriyāya ceva akiriyāya ca imaṃ āpajjati.
857.It arises from action and non-action means it arises from action and from non-action. Here, he gives an example: "in the acceptance of a robe, as it were." Receiving a robe from the hand of a non-relative bhikkhuni is action, not giving in exchange is non-action, thus one incurs this offense by both action and non-action.
858.Siyā pana karontassa akarontassāti yā pana āpatti siyā karontassa, siyā akarontassa hoti, ayaṃ siyā kiriyato, siyā akiriyato samuṭṭhāti.Siyāti ca kadāci-saddatthe nipāto. Atrodāharaṇamāha‘‘rūpiyoggahaṇe viyā’’ti. Rūpiyassa uggahaṇe, uggaṇhāpane siyā kadāci kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, upanikkhittassa sādiyane kāyavācāhi kātabbassa akaraṇena kadāci akarontassa hotīti.
858.It may be that for one who does, or for one who does not means that an offense may be incurred by one who does, and it may be incurred by one who does not; this arises sometimes from action, sometimes from non-action. 'Siyā' is a particle in the sense of 'sometimes.' Here he gives an example: "in the taking of money, as it were." In the taking or causing to be taken of money, it sometimes arises from action; in the consenting to money that has been deposited, it sometimes arises from not doing what should be done by body and speech.
859.Yā karoto akubbato, kadāci karontassa ca hoti, sā āpatti siyā kiriyākiriyato, siyā kiriyatopi ca hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Kuṭikārāpatti viyā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sā hi vatthuṃ desāpetvā pamāṇātikkantaṃ karoto kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, adesāpetvā pamāṇātikkantaṃ, pamāṇayuttaṃ vā karoto kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti.
859.That offense which occurs to one who does, to one who does not, and sometimes to one who does, that offense sometimes arises from action and non-action, and sometimes from action also. "Like the offense regarding a hut," should be said. For that arises from action for one who, having had the site assigned, makes it exceeding the proper measurement; and for one who, without having had the site assigned, makes it exceeding the proper measurement, or of the proper measurement, it arises from action and non-action.
861.Yatoāpattito.Ayaṃāpatti. Saññāya karaṇabhūtāya vimokkho etāyātisaññāvimokkhā. Ettha ca vītikkamasaññā avijjamānāpi āpattiyā vimuccanassa sādhakatamaṭṭhena gahitā. Yathā vuṭṭhiyā abhāvena jātaṃ dubbhikkhaṃ ‘‘vuṭṭhikata’’nti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.Ayaṃsacittakāpatti.
861.From which offense. This offense. Because liberation comes from this through the act of awareness, it is "saññāvimokkhā" (liberation through awareness). Here, although awareness of transgression is non-existent, it is included because it is the most effective cause of release from the offense. Just as a famine caused by the absence of rain is called "caused by rain," so should this be understood. This is a sacittaka offense (involving intention).
862-4.Itarā panaacittakāpatti. Vītikkamasaññāya abhāvena natthi vimokkho etāyātinosaññāvimokkhā.Sucittenasavāsanakilesappahānena, sakalalokiyalokuttarakusalasampayogena ca sundaracittena bhagavatāpakāsitā sabbāvaāpatti cittassa vasena duvidhā siyunti yojanā.Sacittakasamuṭṭhānavasena panāti sacittakasamuṭṭhānavaseneva. Sacittakamissakavivajjanatthāyapana-saddo evakārattho vutto.
862-4.The other, however, is an acittaka offense (not involving intention). Because there is no awareness of transgression, there is no liberation from it, it is "nosaññāvimokkhā" (no liberation through awareness). All offenses declared by the Blessed One with a beautiful mind, sucittena, with a beautiful mind that is complete with the abandonment of latent defilements and the association with all worldly and supramundane wholesome qualities, may be twofold depending on the mind. However, only on the basis of arising with intention means only on the basis of arising with intention. The word pana is used in the sense of ‘eva’ (only) to exclude what is mixed with non-intention.
Yā sacittakehi vā acittakamissakasamuṭṭhānavasena vā samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ acittakā.
That which arises due to intentional or unintentional mixed causes is an acittaka (unintentional) offense.
865.Suvijjenāti sobhamānāhi tīhi vijjāhi vā aṭṭhahi vā vijjāhi samannāgatattā suvijjena.Anavajjenāti savāsanakilesāvajjarahitattā anavajjena bhagavatā.Lokapaṇṇattivajjatolokapaṇṇattivajjavasena sabbāva āpattiyo vajjavasena duvidhā dukā vuttāti yojanā.
865.By the well-knowing one because he is endowed with either the three or eight kinds of shining knowledge. By the blameless one because he is free from all faults of defilements with their latent tendencies. From the fault of worldly custom, all offenses are said to be twofold depending on the fault.
866.Yassā sacittake pakkhe, cittaṃ akusalaṃ siyāti yassā sacittakācittakasamuṭṭhānāya acittakāya surāpānādiāpattiyā sacittakasamuṭṭhānapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, ayaṃ lokavajjā nāmāti attho. Yassā pana sacittakasamuṭṭhānāya paṭhamapārājikādiāpattiyā cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, tassā lokavajjatāya vattabbameva natthi. Acittakāpi vā āpatti sacittakapakkhe kusalacitte sati lokavajjatāya siddhāya acittakapakkhepi lokavajjo hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana akusalacitteneva āpajjitabbāya āpattiyā lokavajjatāti sā visuṃ na vuttā.
866.If in the intentional aspect of that offense, the mind is unwholesome, that is, in the intentional aspect of that offense, whether it arises intentionally or unintentionally, such as the offense of drinking alcohol, the mind is always unwholesome; this is called a lokavajja (worldly fault). But if in the intentional aspect of that offense, such as the first pārājika, the mind is always unwholesome, there is no need to say that it is a lokavajja. Or even if an unintentional offense has a wholesome mind in its intentional aspect, since it is established as a lokavajja, it is also a lokavajja in its unintentional aspect; how much more so for an offense that is committed only with an unwholesome mind? Therefore, it is not stated separately.
‘‘sesā paṇṇattivajjakā’’ti.‘‘Paṇṇattivajjakā’’ti iminā ca lakkhaṇena vatthuvijānanacittena sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ siyā kusalaṃ, siyā akusalaṃ, siyā abyākataṃ, tasmā tassā sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti ayaṃ niyamo natthīti āha.
"The rest are paṇṇattivajjakā" (faults against the training rule). "Paṇṇattivajjakā" by this characteristic, with a mind that understands the object, in the intentional aspect, the mind may be wholesome, unwholesome, or neutral; therefore, it is said that in that intentional aspect, there is no rule that the mind is always unwholesome.
867.Kāyadvārena āpajjitabbākāyakammaṃ. Ubhayattha āpajjitabbātadubhayaṃkāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ. Manodvāre āpatti nāma natthīti manokammaṃ na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Manodvāre āpatti nāma natthīti ca idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ upanikkhittasādiyanādīsu manodvārepi āpattisambhavato’’ti ācariyā.
867.Bodily action is what is committed through the door of the body. That which is both is bodily action and verbal action, which are committed through both. An offense through the mind door does not exist, so mental action is not mentioned. "That an offense through the mind door does not exist, this is said according to the majority, since an offense can occur through the mind door in cases such as consenting to money that has been deposited," say the teachers.
868-9.Kusalāditikadvayanti kusalattikañceva vedanāttikañca. Āpattiṃ āpajjanto kusalākusalacitto, tathā abyākatacitto vā hutvā āpajjatīti yojanā.
868-9.The two triads of wholesome, etc. are the triad of wholesome factors and the triad of feeling. One incurs an offense with a wholesome, unwholesome, or neutral mind.
Dukkhādisaṃyutotiādi-saddena upekkhāvedanāsamaṅgino saṅgaho. Evaṃ santepi sabbasikkhāpadesu akusalacittavasena ekaṃ cittaṃ, kusalābyākatavasena dve cittāni, sabbesaṃ vasena tīṇi cittāni. Dukkhavedanāvasena ekā vedanā, sukhaupekkhāvasena dve, sabbāsaṃ vasena tisso vedanāti ayameva bhedo labbhati, na añño bhedo.
Associated with painful, etc. - by the word "ādi" is included the association with equanimous feeling. Even so, in all the training rules, there is one mind that is unwholesome, two minds that are wholesome and neutral, and three minds in all. There is one feeling that is painful, two feelings that are pleasant and neutral, and three feelings in all; this is the only difference that can be found, no other difference.
samathakkhandhake‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti (cūḷava. 222; pari. 303). Ayaṃ pana pāṭho paṇṇattivajjaṃyeva sandhāya vutto, na lokavajjaṃ. Yasmiñhi pathavikhaṇanabhūtagāmapātabyatādike āpattādhikaraṇe kusalacittaṃ aṅgaṃ hoti, tasmiñca sati na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti. Tasmā nayidaṃ aṅgapahonakacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ tāva āpattādhikaraṇaṃ lokavajjaṃ, taṃ ekantato akusalameva. Tattha ‘‘siyā akusala’’nti vikappo natthi. Yaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, taṃ yasmā sañcicca ‘‘imaṃ āpattiṃ vītikkamāmī’’ti vītikkamantasseva akusalaṃ hoti, asañcicca pana kiñci ajānantassa sahaseyyādivasena āpajjanato abyākataṃ hoti, tasmā tattha sañciccāsañciccavasena imaṃ vikappabhāvaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti. Sace pana ‘‘yaṃ kusalacitto āpajjati, idaṃ vuccati āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti vadeyya, acittakānaṃ eḷakalomapadasodhammādisamuṭṭhānānampi kusalacittaṃ āpajjeyya, na ca tattha vijjamānampi kusalacittaṃ āpattiyā aṅgaṃ, kāyavacīviññattivasena pana calitapavattānaṃ kāyavācānaṃ aññatarameva aṅgaṃ, tañca rūpakkhandhapariyāpannattā abyākatanti.
In the Samatha Khandhaka, "An offense-adjudication may be unwholesome, may be neutral, there is no offense-adjudication that is wholesome" (cūḷava. 222; pari. 303). But this passage is said referring only to a paṇṇattivajja, not a lokavajja. For in that offense-adjudication that involves digging the earth, overturning a village, or drinking alcohol, a wholesome mind is a factor, and when that is present, it is not possible to say, "there is no offense-adjudication that is wholesome." Therefore, this is not said referring to the contributing mind. That offense-adjudication which is a lokavajja is entirely unwholesome. There is no doubt about it being "may be unwholesome." But that which is a paṇṇattivajja, since it is unwholesome only for one who intentionally transgresses, "I will violate this offense," but for one who unintentionally commits an offense, such as lying down together without awareness, it is neutral; therefore, this is said referring to this possibility of doubt depending on intentional and unintentional action, "An offense-adjudication may be unwholesome, may be neutral, there is no offense-adjudication that is wholesome." But if one were to say, "That which one commits with a wholesome mind, this is called an offense-adjudication that is wholesome," even unintentional offenses, such as those arising from goat's wool, the order of steps, and sodhammā, may be committed with a wholesome mind, but even if a wholesome mind is present there, it is not a factor in the offense; only one of the bodily or verbal expressions that are moving and occurring as bodily and verbal actions is a factor, and that is included in the aggregate of form and is neutral.
870.Idaṃ tu lakkhaṇanti idaṃ nidānādisādhāraṇavinicchayalakkhaṇaṃ.
870.This, however, is the characteristic means this is the characteristic of the common judgment beginning with nidāna.
871.‘‘Taru’’ntiādigāthā pubbe vuttatthāva. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha ‘‘dvayaṅkura’’nti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘catussikha’’nti. Tattha ‘‘dvayaṅkura’’nti lokavajjapaṇṇattivajjānaṃ gahaṇaṃ, idhacatussikhanti catunnaṃ vipattīnaṃ. Cattāro sīkhā aṅkurā etassāti viggaho. Tattha vipatti ‘‘sattaphala’’nti sattaphalesu antogadhā, idha vipattiṭṭhāne vajjaṃ gahetvā sattaphalāni.
871. The verses beginning with ‘‘Taru’’ have meanings as previously stated. However, this is the distinction: there, it was stated ‘‘dvayaṅkura,’’ here it is ‘‘catussikha.’’ There, ‘‘dvayaṅkura’’ means the grasping of worldly faults and precepts; here, catussikha means the four kinds of misfortune (vipatti). The explanation is that it has four peaks or sprouts. There, the misfortune (vipatti) is included within the ‘‘seven fruits’’ (sattaphala); here, taking fault (vajja) in place of misfortune (vipatti), and the seven fruits.
872.Anuttarataṃ gataṃattanā uttarassa uttamassa kassaci avijjamānattāimaṃ uttaraṃuttaraṃ nāma pakaraṇaṃyotheranavamajjhimesu aññataropariyāpuṇātipāṭhassa paguṇavācuggatakaraṇena adhīyati,paripucchatiatthañca atthavaṇṇanaṃ sutvā sakkaccaṃ uggahetvā manasā pekkhitvā paññāya suppaṭivijjhitvā dhāreti, so ca bhikkhuca-saddena evameva vinayavinicchaye yo bhikkhu yutto, so cakāyavācavinayekāyavācāvītikkamānaṃ vinayane saṃvaraṇevinayevinayapiṭakeanuttarataṃ upayātiattano uttaritarassa avijjamānataṃ upagacchati. Ettha kāraṇamāha‘‘uttarato’’ti, paguṇavācuggatakaraṇena adhītena atthavaṇṇanaṃ sutvā dhāraṇena suṭṭhu dhāritena iminā uttarapakaraṇena hetubhūtenāti attho.
872. Anuttarataṃ gataṃ: Gone to the unsurpassed state, because there is no one superior to the highest (uttara). Imaṃ uttaraṃ: This uttara, the section named uttara. Yo: Whichever, whether a Thera, a new one, or one in the middle. Pariyāpuṇāti: Studies by means of making the recitation fluent and well-memorized. Paripucchati: And after hearing the meaning and the explanation of the meaning, carefully grasps it, examines it in mind, thoroughly penetrates it with wisdom, and retains it. And that bhikkhu, and the bhikkhu who is likewise engaged in deciding on the Vinaya, he also kāyavācavinaye: In the disciplining, restraining of transgressions of body and speech. Vinaye: In the Vinaya Piṭaka. Anuttarataṃ upayāti: Approaches the state of having no one superior to oneself. Here, he states the reason: ‘‘Uttarato’’, meaning by this uttara section being the cause, due to having studied with fluent recitation and having heard and well-retained the explanation of the meaning.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the Lakkhaṇakathāvaṇṇanā,
Lakkhaṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
the exposition that reveals the hidden meaning in the Uttara section.
Sabbasaṅkalananayakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Collection and Analytical Method (Sabbasaṅkalananayakathāvaṇṇanā)
873.Parivāre mukhāgatā katthapaññattivārādayo aṭṭha vārā, teyeva paccaya-saddena yojetvā vuttā aṭṭhapaccayavārāti vibhaṅgadvaye visuṃ visuṃ dassitā soḷasa parivārā assāti soḷasaparivāro, tassasoḷasaparivārassa.Sabbaṃ saṅkalanaṃ nayanti sabbesaṃ vuttānaṃ saṅkalananayānaṃ saṅgahetabbato sabbaṃ saṅkalabhedanaṃ nayaṃ.
873. Soḷasaparivārassa: Of the sixteenfold Parivāra, which has sixteen Parivāras distinctly shown in both Vibhaṅgas, having eight vāras such as kathapaññattivāra etc., that are accessible from the mouth in the Parivāra, those same ones spoken linking with the word paccaya, are the eight paccayavāras. Sabbaṃ saṅkalanaṃ nayaṃ: Because it collects all the collection methods that were stated, [it is] the method of completely collecting.
875.Kāyikā chabbidhāti paṭhamapārājikāpatti, kuṭikaraṇe payoge dukkaṭāpatti, ekaṃ piṇḍaṃ anāgate thullaccayāpatti, tasmiṃ āgate saṅghādisesāpatti, vikālabhojane pācittiyāpatti, paṭhamapāṭidesanīyāpattīti chabbidhā.
875. Kāyikā chabbidhā: The first pārājika offense; the dukkata offense in the effort of hut-making; the thullaccaya offense [if] expecting one alms-lump in the future; the saṅghādisesa offense when that arrives; the pācittiya offense for eating at the wrong time; the first pāṭidesanīya offense—[these are] sixfold.
Tathā vācasikāpi cāti catutthapārājikā, kuṭiyā kārāpane pubbagatiyo, padasodhammapācittiyaṃ, davakamyatāya hīnena khuṃsanaṃ, tassa dubbhāsitanti tathā chabbidhā.
Tathā vācasikāpi cā: And likewise, the fourth pārājika; the preliminary stages in constructing a hut; the padasodhammapācittiya; reviling a lowly person due to desire for gain, and the dubbhāsita for that—thus, [these are] sixfold.
Chādentassaca tissoti bhikkhuniyā vajjapaṭicchādikāya pārājikaṃ, bhikkhuno saṅghādisesachādane pācittiyaṃ, attano duṭṭhullacchādane dukkaṭanti tisso ca.
Chādentassa ca tisso: For a bhikkhuni who conceals another's offense, a pārājika; for a bhikkhu who conceals a saṅghādisesa, a pācittiya; a dukkata for concealing one's own serious offense—thus, [these are] three.
Pañcasaṃsaggapaccayāti kāyasaṃsagge bhikkhuniyā pārājikaṃ, bhikkhuno saṅghādiseso, kāyena kāyapaṭibaddhe thullaccayaṃ, nissaggiyena kāyapaṭibaddhe dukkaṭaṃ, aṅgulipatodake pācittiyanti kāyasaṃsaggapaccayā pañca āpattiyo.
Pañca saṃsaggapaccayā: For bodily contact with a bhikkhuni, a pārājika for the bhikkhuni, a saṅghādisesa for the bhikkhu; a thullaccaya for bodily contact with something pertaining to the body; a dukkata for bodily contact with something to be relinquished; a pācittiya for poking with a finger—[these are] five offenses due to bodily contact.
877.Bhikkhuniyā vajjapaṭicchādikāya pārājikaṃ, bhikkhussa saṅghādisesapaṭicchādakassa pācittiyanti duṭṭhullacchādane duve.
877. For a bhikkhuni who conceals another's offense, a pārājika; for a bhikkhu who conceals a saṅghādisesa, a pācittiya—two for concealing a serious offense.
879.‘‘Gāmantare catassovā’’tiādi paṭiniddesato ca viññāyati.
879. It is also understood from the specification, ‘‘Gāmantare catassovā’’ etc.
881.Vajantiyāti gacchantiyā.
881. Vajantiyā: Of one who is going.
885.Yā pana bhikkhunī rattandhakāre appadīpe hatthapāse purisena saddhiṃ yadi sallapeyya, tassā pācitti.Dūre ṭhitāhatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitā vadeyya ce, dukkaṭamevāti yojanā.
885. Moreover, if a bhikkhuni were to converse with a man in the darkness of night, without a lamp, within arm's reach, there is a pācittiya for her. The connection is that if she were to speak Dūre ṭhitā, standing having abandoned arm's reach, it is only a dukkata.
886.Yā panabhikkhunīchannepaṭicchannaṭṭhāne divā purisena saddhiṃassapurisassa hatthapāse ṭhitāvadeyyasallapeyya, tassā pācitti. Hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā vadeyya ce, dukkaṭamevāti yojanā.
886. Yā pana bhikkhunī, channe, in a hidden place, during the day, with a man, assa, standing within the arm's reach of the man, vadeyya, were to converse, there is a pācittiya for her. The connection is that if she were to speak having abandoned arm's reach, it is only a dukkata.
891.Sanissaggā ca pācittīti nissajjanavinayakammasahitāyeva pācitti.
891. Sanissaggā ca pācittī: And the pācittiya only when accompanied by the act of relinquishment.
893.Idhaimasmiṃ sāsane.
893. Idha: In this Sāsana.
896.Duvinnanti dvinnaṃ.
896. Duvinna: Of two.
898.Samānasaṃvāsakabhūmināma pakatattassa bhikkhuno samānaladdhikassa ekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitabhāvo. Nānāpadaṃ pubbaṃ etissātinānāpadapubbikā,nānāsaṃvāsakabhūmīti attho. Ukkhittanānāladdhikanānāsīmagatānānāsaṃvāsakabhūmi. Imā dveyeva saṃvāsakabhūmiyo hi mahesinā kāruṇikena vuttāti yojanā.
898. Samānasaṃvāsakabhūmi is the state of a bhikkhu who has been declared competent and who has the same doctrine, residing within the same boundary. Nānāpadapubbikā: Because a different term comes before it, meaning the ground for non-communion. Nānāsaṃvāsakabhūmi: Is those gone to different boundaries who have been expelled, having different doctrines. It should be connected that only these two grounds for communion were spoken by the compassionate Great Sage.
899.Duvinnanti pārivāsikamānattacārīnaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ.Dvayātītenāti kāmasukhallikānuyogaattakilamathānuyogasaṅkhātaṃ antadvayaṃ atikkamma majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhitena. Atha vā sassatucchedadvayaṃ atikkantena.
899. Duvinna: Of two individuals who are undergoing parivāsa and practicing mānatta. Dvayātītena: By one standing on the middle path, having gone beyond the two extremes known as indulgence in sensual pleasure and self-mortification. Or alternatively, having transcended the two [false] views of eternalism and annihilationism.
900.‘‘Dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabba’’nti ca tatheva ‘‘dvaṅgulaṃ vā dumāsaṃ vā’’ti ca dvaṅgulā duve paññattāti yojanā.
900. And that which is, "it should be taken, at most, the length of two finger-joints" and that which is, "either two finger-widths or two months," the connection is that two finger-widths [are] two regulations.
905.Āṇattiyā manussamāraṇaṃ, āṇattiyā adinnādānampīti yojanā.
905. The killing of a human being on command, and likewise, theft on command, is [also to be connected].
907.Tisso obhāsanāyimāti imā tisso methunādhippāyappakāsanā.
907. Tisso obhāsanāyimā: These are the three expressions of intent for sexual intercourse.
908.Saṅghādiseso evasaṅghādisesatā.
908. Saṅghādisesatā: Is precisely the state of being a saṅghādisesa.
910.Vanappatināma pupphaṃ vinā phalantī nigrodhaudumbaraassatthapilakkhakādirukkhajāti, idha pana vanajeṭṭho rakkhitagopitacetiyarukkho vanappatīti adhippāyo.Thullatāti thullaccayaṃ.
910. Vanappati means a kind of tree such as the banyan, fig, assattha, or pilakkha that bears fruit without flowers; however, here, the intention is vanapati as the chief tree of the forest, a protected and guarded cetiya tree. Thullatā: A thullaccaya.
912.Vissaṭṭhīti vissajji sambhavadhātu.Chaḍḍaneti upakkamitvā mocane. ‘‘Harite uccāraṃ passāvaṃ chaḍḍane’’ti padacchedo.
912. Vissaṭṭhī: Discharged, the generative fluid. Chaḍḍane: In the act of approaching and releasing. "Harite uccāraṃ passāvaṃ chaḍḍane" is the word separation.
913.Kiṃ pamāṇametāsantikittakā.
913. Kiṃ pamāṇametāsanti: kittakā: How many?
915.Bhikkhubhikkhuniyā saddhinti ettha bhikkhūti sāmivacanappasaṅge paccattaṃ, bhikkhunoti attho. Gāthābandhavasena vā vaṇṇalopo.
915. Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ: Here, bhikkhu, in the context of speaking about the owner, is an individual, meaning a bhikkhuni. Or alternatively, there is a loss of a syllable due to the structure of the verse.
918.Dutiyāya hatthapāsakaṃ.
918. For the second, within arm's reach.
922.‘‘Yāvatatiyake tisso āpattiyo’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 476 atthato samānaṃ) padassa niddese ‘‘thullaccayaṃ siyā saṅgha-bhedakassānuvattino’’ti paṭhanti. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ saṅghabhedānuvattākānaṃ kokālikādīnaṃ saṅghādiseso’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā tathā pāṭho na gahetabbo.
922. In the specification of the passage, "Yāvatatiyake tisso āpattiyo" (pari. aṭṭha. 476, similar in meaning), they recite, "thullaccayaṃ siyā saṅghabhedakassānuvattino." Because it was stated aṭṭhakathāyaṃ: "For Kokālika and others who follow those who split the Sangha, a saṅghādisesa," that recitation should not be taken.
923.Yāvatatiyaketi tiṇṇaṃ pūraṇītatiyā,kammavācā, yāvatatiyāya kammavācāya pariyosāne āpajjitabbā āpattiyāvatatiyakānāma.
923. Yāvatatiyake: The ordinal of three is tatiyā, the kammavācā; the offense to be committed at the end of the three kammavācās is called yāvatatiyakā.
926.‘‘Avassutassa…pe… kiñcī’’ti idaṃ garukāpattiyā vatthudassanaṃ.‘‘Sabbaṃ maṃsaṃ akappiya’’nti idaṃ thullaccayadukkaṭānaṃ vatthudassanaṃ.
926. ‘‘Avassutassa…pe… kiñcī’’: This is the object-showing regarding a serious offense. ‘‘Sabbaṃ maṃsaṃ akappiya’’: This is the object-showing regarding a thullaccaya and a dukkata.
927.‘‘Viññāpetvāna…pe… bhojanampi cā’’ti idaṃ pāṭidesanīyavatthudassanaṃ.‘‘Lasuṇampi cā’’ti idaṃ pācittiyavatthudassanaṃ. ‘‘Ekato ajjhoharantiyā’’ti padacchedo.
927. ‘‘Viññāpetvāna…pe… bhojanampi cā’’: This is the object-showing regarding a pāṭidesanīya. ‘‘Lasuṇampi cā’’: This is the object-showing regarding a pācittiya. "Ekato ajjhoharantiyā" is the word separation.
930.Rattacittena itthiyā aṅgajātaṃ olokentassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
930. The connection is that a dukkata was stated for looking at the genitals of a woman with a lustful mind.
931.Sammāvattanāvasammāvattanakā.Tecattālīsa vattanādvāsītikkhandhakavattānaṃ paripūraṇaṭṭhāne dassitā.
931. Sammāvattanakā: Is simply a correct rolling-back. Tecattālīsa vattanā: The forty-three rollings-back were shown in the place for completing the eighty-two Khandhaka rollings-back.
932.Adassanaapaṭikamme āpannāpattiyāduvepuggalā, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge āpannāpattiyā ekoti ime tayo ukkhittapuggalā.
932. Duve: Two individuals who committed an offense of non-seeing and non-atonement; one who committed an offense of non-relinquishing a wrong view—these three are those who have been suspended.
934.Dūsakoti bhikkhunidūsako.Kaṇṭakoti kaṇṭakasāmaṇero.
934. Dūsako: One who corrupts a bhikkhuni. Kaṇṭako: A Kaṇṭaka sāmaṇera.
937.Dadeyyaccevamādikāti ñattikāle ‘‘saṅgho dadeyyā’’tiādibhedā ñattikappanā, ñattikiriyāti attho.Deti saṅgho karotītiādīti kammavācākāle ‘‘saṅgho detī’’ti vā ‘‘karotī’’ti vā ādibhedā vacanakammassa aniṭṭhitattā vippakatapaccuppannaṃ nāma siyā.
937. Dadeyyaccevamādikā: During the time of the motion (ñatti), ñattikappanā has variations such as "saṅgho dadeyyā" etc., meaning the motion-procedure. Deti saṅgho karotītiādī: During the time of the kammavācā, if the utterance of the action is incomplete, with variations such as "saṅgho detī" or "karotī" etc., it would be called vippakatapaccuppanna.
938.Dinnaṃ kataṃ paniccādīti kammavācāya niṭṭhitāya ‘‘dinnaṃ saṅghenā’’ti vā ‘‘kataṃ saṅghenā’’ti vātiādivacanaṃ atītakaraṇaṃ nāma siyā.
938. Dinnaṃ kataṃ paniccādī: When the kammavācā has been completed, the statement, "dinnaṃ saṅghenā" or "kataṃ saṅghenā" etc., would be called atītakaraṇa.
939.Saṅgheti saṅghamajjhe.
939. Saṅghe: In the midst of the Sangha.
aṭṭhakathāyañca(pari. aṭṭha. 458) ‘‘pañcahi kāraṇehī’’ti vacanato ca idha imehi dvīheva kāraṇehi saṅghabhedakathanaṃ ayuttanti? Vuccate – nāyuttaṃ pubbapayogakārakavasena vuttattā. Tathā hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ–
Since it is stated in aṭṭhakathāyañca (pari. aṭṭha. 458), "by five reasons," isn't it improper to state the splitting of the Sangha here by only these two reasons? It is said: it is not improper, because it was stated in terms of what was previously done. For so it is in the aṭṭhakathāyaṃ:
‘‘Kammenāti apalokanādīsu catūsu kammesu aññatarena kammena. Uddesenāti pañcasu pātimokkhuddesesu aññatarena uddesena. Voharantoti kathayanto, tāhi tāhi upapattīhi ‘adhammaṃ dhammo’tiādīni aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni dīpento. Anussāvanenāti ‘nanu tumhe jānātha mayhaṃ uccākulā pabbajitabhāvaṃ, bahussutabhāvañca, mādiso nāma uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ kareyyāti citte uppādetuṃ tumhākaṃ yuttaṃ, kiṃ mayhaṃ avīci nīluppalavanamiva sītalo, kimahaṃ apāyato na bhāyāmī’tiādinā nayena kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvā anussāvanena. Salākaggāhenāti evaṃ anussāvetvā tesaṃ cittaṃ upatthambhetvā anivattidhamme katvā ‘gaṇhatha imaṃ salāka’nti salākaggāhena.
"By the action (kammena), by any one of the four actions beginning with announcing (apalokana). By recital (uddesena), by any one of the five pātimokkhas recitals. Voharanto: One who speaks, revealing the eighteen grounds for splitting beginning with 'non-Dhamma is Dhamma,' by those various arguments. By making known (anussāvanena), by making a split in speech at the ear, by the method of 'surely you know that I ordained from a high-class family, and I have much learning; it is fitting for you to produce in your mind that someone like me would not do what is contrary to Dhamma or contrary to Vinaya or the Teaching of the Teacher; is Avīci cool for me like a blue lotus pond? Do I not fear the lower realms?' By taking a voting-ticket (salākaggāhena), by encouraging their minds by making known in this way, making them firm in non-return, [saying] 'take this ticket'."
‘‘Ettha ca kammameva, uddeso vā pamāṇaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhā pana pubbabhāgā. Aṭṭhārasavatthudīpanavasena hi voharante tattha rucijananatthaṃ anussāvetvā salākāya gahitāyapi abhinnova hoti saṅgho. Yadā pana evaṃ cattāro vā atireke vā salākaṃ gāhetvā āveṇikaṃ kammaṃ vā uddesaṃ vā karoti, tadā saṅgho bhinno nāma hotī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 458) –
"And here, the action (kamma) alone or the recital (uddeso) is the measure, but speaking, making known, and taking a voting-ticket are preliminary parts. For by speaking in terms of revealing the eighteen grounds, the Sangha is not yet split even by taking a ticket after making known in order to generate interest there. But when four or more take a ticket in this way and do a separate action or recital, then it is said that the Sangha is split" (pari. aṭṭha. 458)—
Vuttattā salākaggāhakammāni dve padhānakāraṇānīti idha tāneva dassitāni.
Because it was stated, taking a voting-ticket and the action are the two main reasons; therefore, just those were shown here.
Nanu ca salākaggāhopi saṅghabhedassa pubbabhāgo vutto, uddesakammāneva padhānabhāvena vuttāni, tasmā kathamassa salākaggāhassa padhānakāraṇabhāvoti? Vuccate – uddesakammānipi salākaggāhe siddhe avassambhavanato atthasādhanapayogena vinā asiddhāneva hontīti so padhānabhāvena idha gahito, uddeso pana paññattakammapubbaṅgamattā kammeneva saṅgahitoti idha visuṃ na vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
But surely, taking a voting-ticket was said to be a preliminary part of splitting the Sangha, and the action and recital were said to be the main things; therefore, how is it that the taking of a voting-ticket is a main reason? It is said: the action and recital also necessarily occur after taking a voting-ticket is accomplished, and therefore, they are not accomplished without the application of achieving the aim; so, that was taken here as the main thing; but the recital, being merely a preliminary to the regulation-action, is included in the action itself, and therefore, it should be seen that it was not stated separately here.
941.Payuttāyuttavācāyāti paccayuppādanatthāya payuttā ca sā sakyaputtiyabhāvassa ayuttā ananurūpā cātipayuttāyuttā,sāyeva vācāti payuttāyuttavācā, tāya.
941. Payuttāyuttavācāyā: By speech that is both applied for the sake of producing a cause, and is unsuitable and inappropriate for the state of being a Sakyan son—that is payuttāyuttā, or that very speech, by that speech that is applied and unsuitable.
944.Yā bhikkhunī viññāpetvā bhuñjati, tassā ca pāṭidesanīyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
944. The connection is that whichever bhikkhuni eats after soliciting, there would be a pāṭidesanīya for her.
945.Anāmayoti agilāno.
945. Anāmayo: Not sick.
946.‘‘Dasasatānī’’tiādigāthāyarattīnanti ettha ‘‘sata’’nti seso. Chādanakiriyāya accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Dasasatāni āpattiyo rattīnaṃ sataṃ chādetvāti yojanā. Evaṃ kattabbayojanāyaṃ –
946. In the verse beginning with ‘‘Dasasatānī’’, here in rattīna, "sata" is the remainder. The word implying complete connection in the action of concealing. The connection is that having concealed a hundred offenses for ten hundred nights. The way it should be connected is:
‘‘Dasa sataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvāna;
‘‘Dasa sataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvāna;
Dasa rattiyo vasitvāna, mucceyya pārivāsiko’’ti. (pari. 477)
Dasa rattiyo vasitvānāti ‘‘sabbāva tā āpattiyo dasāhapaṭicchannā’’ti parivāsaṃ yācitvā dasa rattiyo vasitvāti attho.Mucceyya pārivāsikoti parivāsaṃ vasanto bhikkhu attanā vasitabbaparivāsato mucceyya, mutto bhaveyyāti attho.
Dasa rattiyo vasitvānā: Meaning having requested parivāsa, and having lived for ten nights, [thinking] "all those offenses were concealed for ten days." Mucceyya pārivāsiko: Meaning, the bhikkhu living in parivāsa, would be released from the parivāsa to be lived by himself, would be freed.
947.Pārājikāni aṭṭhevāti aggahitaggahaṇena.Tevīsa garukāti bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā bhikkhunīnaṃ dasa, bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇā bhikkhūnaṃ cha, ubhinnaṃ sādhāraṇā sattāti evaṃ tevīsa saṅghādisesā.
947. Pārājikāni aṭṭhevā: Precisely eight pārājikas, by the method of grasping what should be grasped. Tevīsa garukā: Twenty-three serious [offenses], that are not common to bhikkhus: ten for bhikkhunis, six for bhikkhus that are not common to bhikkhunis, and seven common to both—thus, twenty-three saṅghādisesas.
948.Vuttānīti yathāvuttāni nissaggiyāni.Dvecattālīsa hontīti bhikkhuvibhaṅgāgatā tiṃsa, bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā bhikkhunīnaṃ ādito dvādasa cāti dvācattālīsa nissaggiyāni honti. Aṭṭhāsītisataṃ pācittiyā pubbe dassitāva.
948. Vuttānī: The relinquishments as stated. Dvecattālīsa hontī: Forty-two relinquishments exist: thirty from the Bhikkhu Vibhaṅga and the twelve from the beginning for bhikkhunis that are not common to bhikkhus. Eighteen hundred pācittiyas have already been shown.
949.Susikkhenāti suṭṭhu sikkhitaadhisīlāditividhasikkhena bhagavatā.
949. Susikkhenā: By the Blessed One, who is well-trained in the diverse trainings of higher morality etc.
950.Supaññenāti sobhaṇā dasabalacatuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇādayo paññā yassa so supañño, tena.Yasassināti aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūhasaṅkhātaparivārayasā ca sabbalokabyāpakaguṇaghosasaṅkhātakittiyasā ca tena samannāgatattā yasassinā.Aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni bhavantīti yathādassitagaṇanāya piṇḍavasena paññāsādhikāni tīṇi satāni bhavantīti attho. Supaññena yasassinā gotamenapaññattāni sabbānisikkhāpadāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni bhavantīti yojanā.
950. Supaññenā means by one who has excellent wisdom, wisdom that is beautiful, possessing the ten powers, the four grounds of self-confidence, the six uncommon qualities, and so on. Yasassinā means by the famous one, endowed with the glory of having a retinue consisting of the eight noble individuals and the glory of a reputation spread throughout the world. Aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni bhavantī means, according to the calculation shown, by way of a comprehensive total, they amount to three hundred and fifty. The construction is: all the precepts paññattāni sabbāni laid down by Gotama, who was of excellent wisdom and famous, supaññena yasassinā, amount to three hundred and fifty, aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni bhavantī.
951.Etesusikkhāpadesu yo sārabhūto vinicchayo vattabbo, so sakalo mayā samāsenasabbathāsabbākārena vuttoti yojanā.
951. Etesu sikkhāpadesu, in these precepts, the essential judgement, vinicchayo, that should be spoken about, I have spoken about that entirely, sabbathā, in every way, sabbākārena, in brief, samāsena.
952.Idaṃuttaraṃ nāma pakaraṇaṃ.
952. Idaṃ is the section called Uttara.
953.Tasmāti mayā vicāretvā vuttattāva.Attheti vacanatthabhāvatthādibhede atthe vā.Akkharabandhevāti akkharasaṅkhātapadabandhe vā.Viññāsassa kamepi vāti uddesavasena ganthanikkhepassa kamepi.Kaṅkhā na kātabbāti ‘‘yathāadhippetassa idaṃ vācakaṃ nu kho, avācaka’’nti vā ‘‘idamayuttaṃ nu kho, yutta’’nti vā ‘‘idamadhikaṃ nu kho, ūna’’nti vā ‘‘idamaghaṭṭitakkamaṃ nu kho, ghaṭṭitakkama’’nti vā ‘‘idaṃ viruddhasamayaṃ nu kho, aviruddhasamaya’’nti vā ‘‘idaṃ duruttaṃ nu kho, suvutta’’nti vā ‘‘idaṃ satthakaṃ nu kho, niratthaka’’nti vā kaṅkhā vimati yena kenaci na kātabbā.Bahumānatāti ‘‘vinayo saṃvaratthāyā’’tiādinā (pari. 366) niddiṭṭhapayojanaparamparāya mūlakāraṇattā mahatī sammānā kātabbāti attho.
953. Tasmā because it has been spoken having investigated it, atthe, whether in the meaning, which has differences such as the meaning of a word, the essential meaning, etc., vā akkharabandhe or in the arrangement of words consisting of letters, vā viññāsassa kamepi vā, or even in the order of the arrangement of the treatise by way of topic headings, kaṅkhā na kātabbā, doubt, vimati, should not be made by anyone, thinking, "Is this expression in accordance with what was intended, or not?" or "Is this fitting, or not?" or "Is this excessive, or deficient?" or "Is this arranged in a confused order, or in an orderly fashion?" or "Is this contrary to convention, or not contrary to convention?" or "Is this poorly expressed, or well-expressed?" or "Is this meaningful, or meaningless?". Bahumānatā great respect, mahatī sammānā, should be done because it is the root cause of the succession of benefits indicated by "the Vinaya is for the purpose of restraint," and so on (pari. 366).
954.Yobhikkhusauttaraṃuttarapakaraṇena sahitaṃvinayassavinicchayaṃnāma pakaraṇaṃjānātidhammato ceva atthato ca vinicchayato ca sabbathā avabujjhati,sobhikkhu attanā sikkhitabbāya sikkhāya sabbaso viññātattā sikkhāpakena ācariyena vināpi sikkhituṃ samatthoti.Nissayaṃ vimuñcitvāti ācariyupajjhāye nissāya vāsaṃ muñcitvā.Yathākāmaṅgato siyāti yādisā yādisā attanā gāmitā, tattha tattha gamanāraho bhaveyyāti attho.
954. Yo bhikkhu sauttaraṃ, the bhikkhu who, together with the Uttara section, vinayassavinicchayaṃ knows the section called Vinaya-vinicchaya, jānāti, fully understands in every way, sabbathā, both from the point of view of the Dhamma, atthato, and from the point of view of the meaning, atthato ceva, and from the point of view of judgement, vinicchayato ca, so bhikkhu, that bhikkhu, because he has fully understood the training to be learned by himself, is able to train even without a teacher who instructs in the training, sikkhāpakena ācariyena vināpi sikkhituṃ samattho ti. Nissayaṃ vimuñcitvā, having given up living in dependence on a preceptor or teacher, yathākāmaṅgato siyā, he may be worthy to go wherever he is inclined, yādisā yādisā attanā gāmitā, tattha tattha gamanāraho bhaveyya ti, that is, he may become worthy to go to whatever places he is inclined to.
955.Nissayaṃ dātukāmena. Saha vibhaṅgenasavibhaṅgaṃ. Saha mātikāyasamātikaṃ. Idaṃsauttaraṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇaṃsuṭṭhu vācuggataṃ katvāganthato suṭṭhu paguṇaṃ vācuggataṃ katvā atthato, vinicchayato ca sammā jānitvā evaṃ dātabbanti yojanā.
955. Savibhaṅgaṃ, with the Vibhaṅga. Samātikaṃ, with the Mātikā. This, idaṃ, Vinaya-vinicchaya section with the Uttara, sauttaraṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇaṃ, having well learned by heart, suṭṭhu vācuggataṃ katvā, having well learned by heart from the point of view of the text, ganthato suṭṭhu paguṇaṃ vācuggataṃ katvā, and having correctly known from the point of view of the meaning and from the point of view of judgement, atthato, vinicchayato ca sammā jānitvā, should be given in this way, evaṃ dātabbanti yojanā.
956-7.Yobhikkhuimaṃsauttaraṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇaṃ vācāyapaṭhati,manasācinteti,aññehi vuccamānaṃsuṇāti,atthaṃparipucchati,paraṃvāceti,niccaṃatthaṃ upaparikkhatiyathāparipucchitamatthaṃ hetuudāharaṇapavattivasena upagantvā samantato ikkhati paññāya niyameti vavatthapeti, tassa pana bhikkhussavinayanissitā sabbeva atthāāpattānāpattikappiyākappiyādipabhedā sabbe atthāhatthe āmalakaṃ viyakaratale amalamaṇiratanaṃ viyaupaṭṭhahantipākaṭā bhavantīti yojanā. Natthi etassa malantiamalaṃ,amalamevaāmalakanti maṇiratanaṃ vuccati.
956-7. Yo bhikkhu imaṃ sauttharaṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇaṃ vācāya paṭhati, the bhikkhu who recites this Vinaya-vinicchaya section with the Uttara with his voice, manasā cinteti, thinks about it in his mind, aññehi vuccamānaṃ suṇāti, listens to it being spoken by others, atthaṃ paripucchati, inquires about the meaning, paraṃ vāceti, causes another to recite, niccaṃ atthaṃ upaparikkhati, constantly investigates the meaning, yathāparipucchitamatthaṃ hetuudāharaṇapavattivasena upagantvā samantato ikkhati paññāya niyameti vavatthapeti, having approached the meaning as inquired about in terms of cause, example, and sequence, examines it from all sides, ascertains it with wisdom, determines it; for that bhikkhu, vinayanissitā sabbeva atthā, all the meanings dependent on the Vinaya, āpattānāpattikappiyākappiyādipabhedā sabbe atthā, all the meanings with distinctions such as offense and non-offense, allowable and unallowable, etc., hatthe āmalakaṃ viya, like an amalaka fruit in the hand, upaṭṭhahanti, like a flawless jewel-stone in the palm of the hand, karatale amalamaṇiratanaṃ viya, become manifest, pākaṭā bhavanti, that is, become apparent. What is without stain, natthi etassa malanti, is called amalaṃ, a jewel-stone is called amalameva āmalakaṃ.
958.Natthi etesaṃ buddhītiabuddhī,abuddhī ca te janā cātiabuddhijanā,abuddhijanānaṃ sāraṃ avasāraṃ osīdanaṃ dadāti ādadāti karotītiabuddhijanasāradaṃ,buddhivirahitānaṃ agādhaṃ gambhīraṃ. Tehi aladdhapatiṭṭhaṃamatasāgaraṃsaddattharasāmatassa, nibbānāmatassa vā paṭilābhakāraṇattā sāgarasadisaṃparamaṃuttamaṃimaṃ uttaraṃ sāgaraṃāsannapaccakkhaṃ uttarapakaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ samuddasāgaraṃ sārado hutvāuttaraṃuttaranto pariyosāpentonarobhikkhuhiyasmāvinayapāragovinayapiṭakassa pariyantaṃ gato hutvāpāragopāraṃ saṃsārassa pārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchantosiyābhaveyyāti yojanā.
958. Abuddhī, is those who have no intellect, natthi etesaṃ buddhīti, abuddhī ca te janā cāti abuddhijanā, and those people who are without intellect are called abuddhijanā; abuddhijanasāradaṃ, because it gives, ādadāti, does, karotīti, the essence, osīdanaṃ, the heartwood, sāraṃ, to those without intellect, agādhaṃ gambhīraṃ. Amatasāgaraṃ, the deathless ocean, by which the unintelligent cannot gain a footing, tehi aladdhapatiṭṭhaṃ, is like an ocean because it is the cause of obtaining the flavor of the true meaning, saddattharasāmatassa, or the deathlessness of Nibbāna, nibbānāmatassa vā paṭilābhakāraṇattā sāgarasadisaṃ. Paramaṃ imaṃ uttaraṃ sāgaraṃ, this supreme, excellent, neighboring, visible ocean called Uttara, the bhikkhu, naro, becoming a heartwood, sārado hutvā, uttaraṃ uttaranto pariyosāpento hi yasmā vinayapārago, because he is one who goes to the end of the Vinaya Piṭaka, vinayapiṭakassa pariyantaṃ gato hutvā, pārago siyā, would be one who goes to the further shore, goes to Nibbāna, which is the further shore of saṃsāra, pāraṃ saṃsārassa pārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchanto.
959.Atoti tasmādeva kāraṇāavapūratoratopāpapūrato nirāsaṅkatāya orato nivatto pāpabhīruko narotamaṃ vidhūyapāpabhīrukatāya eva cittapariyuṭṭhānavasena uppajjanakaṃ mohandhakāraṃ tadaṅgapahānavasena vidhametvā.Sabbaṅgaṇakammadaṃsabbesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ aṅgaṇānaṃ kammaṃ tadaṅgādipahānaṃ dadāti āvahatīti ‘‘sabbaṅgaṇakammada’’nti laddhanāmaṃsukhassa padaṃlokiyalokuttarassa sukhassa kāraṇaṃguṇasaṃhitaṃsīlādīhi atthabhūtehi guṇehi saṃhitaṃ yuttaṃ guṇappakāsakaṃhitaṃamatosadhaṃ viya sabbadosasabbabyādhirahitatāya ajarāamatādiguṇāvahattā hitaṃimaṃ uttaraṃnāma pakaraṇaṃsakkaccaṃādaro hutvāniccaṃsatataṃsikkhe‘‘evaṃ paricayantaṃ karomī’’ti cintetvā ekantena yathāvuttapayojanasādhanayoggaṃ katvā ajjhenādivasena sikkheyya eva, na ajjhupekkhako bhaveyyāti yojanā.
959. Ato therefore, avapūratorato, the person who shrinks from evil, pāpabhīruko naro, who is turned away from the fullness of evil, pāpapūrato nirāsaṅkatāya orato nivatto, tamaṃ vidhūya, dispelling the darkness of delusion, mohandhakāraṃ, which arises by way of mental agitation simply due to shrinking from evil, pāpabhīrukatāya eva cittapariyuṭṭhānavasena uppajjanakaṃ, by means of its removal by way of its parts, tadaṅgapahānavasena vidhametvā. Sabbaṅgaṇakammadaṃ, giving the work of all defilements, sabbesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ aṅgaṇānaṃ kammaṃ, the removal of their parts, etc., tadaṅgādipahānaṃ dadāti āvahatīti, thus it has the name "sabbaṅgaṇakammadaṃ". Sukhasa padaṃ, the cause of happiness, lokiyalokuttarassa sukhassa kāraṇaṃ, guṇasaṃhitaṃ, endowed with qualities that are meaningful, atthabhūtehi guṇehi saṃhitaṃ yuttaṃ guṇappakāsakaṃ, that is, endowed with virtues such as morality, hitaṃ, beneficial, like the medicine of deathlessness, amatosadhaṃ viya, because it brings qualities of non-aging, deathlessness, etc., due to being free from all faults and all diseases, sabbadosasabbabyādhirahitatāya ajarāamatādiguṇāvahattā hitaṃ, this section called imaṃ uttaraṃ, sakkaccaṃ niccaṃ sikkhe, always, satataṃ, carefully, ādaro hutvā, thinking, "I will make it familiar in this way," should certainly train by way of study, etc., having made it fit for the accomplishment of the purpose as stated, ekantena yathāvuttapayojanasādhanayoggaṃ katvā ajjhenādivasena sikkheyya eva, he should not be neglectful, na ajjhupekkhako bhaveyyāti yojanā.
960.Paṭubhāvakarepātimokkhasaṃvarasīlapūraṇe, sāsanapaccatthikābhibhavane ca paṭubhāvaṃ chekattaṃ vesārajjaṃ karoti attānaṃ dhārentānaṃ lajjipuggalānanti paṭubhāvakareparametatoyeva uttamepiṭakevinayapiṭakepaṭutaṃpāṭavaṃ paññākosallaṃ abhipatthayantena paṭunā yatinā nimmalappavattikenapaṭunā vidhināchekena sārena vidhānenaidaṃsauttaraṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇaṃsatataṃnirantaraṃpariyāpuṇitabbaṃuggahaṇadhāraṇaparipucchācintanādivasena sikkhitabbanti yojanā.
960. Paṭubhāvakare, because it produces skillfulness, paṭubhāvaṃ chekattaṃ vesārajjaṃ karoti, in those who maintain themselves with shame, lajjipuggalānaṃ attānaṃ dhārentānaṃ, in the fulfillment of morality consisting of the Pātimokkha restraint, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlapūraṇe, and in overcoming the adversaries of the Teaching, sāsanapaccatthikābhibhavane, thus it produces skillfulness. Parame piṭake, in this supreme Piṭaka, paṭutaṃ abhipatthayantena, by the clever ascetic, paṭunā yatinā, who desires proficiency, pāṭavaṃ paññākosallaṃ abhipatthayantena, who is of pure conduct, nimmalappavattikena, paṭunā vidhinā, by the clever, essential method, chekena sārena vidhānena, this Vinaya-vinicchaya section with the Uttara, idaṃ sauttharaṃ vinayavinicchayapakaraṇaṃ, should constantly, satataṃ, be learned, pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ, by way of memorizing, retaining, inquiring, thinking, etc.,uggahaṇadhāraṇaparipucchācintanādivasena sikkhitabbanti yojanā.
Iti uttare līnatthapakāsaniyā
Thus ends the Līnatthapakāsanī on the Uttara.
Sabbasaṅkalananayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The compilation of all explanations of the system of exposition is completed.
Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Concluding Account
961-3.Mahesino tividhassāpisāsanassa suciraṭṭhitikāmenaaticirakālappavattiṃ icchantenadhīmatāpasatthatarañāṇenasuddhacittenalābhasakkāranirapekkhatāya parisuddhajjhāsayenabuddhadattenabuddhadattābhidhānena ācariyavarena racito.
961-3. It was composed by the wise one, dhīmatā, of excellent wisdom, pasatthatarañāṇena, who has a pure mind, suddhacittena, who is indifferent to gain and honor, lābhasakkāranirapekkhatāya parisuddhajjhāsayena, named Buddhadatta, buddhadattābhidhānena, the excellent teacher, ācariyavarena, who desires the long standing of the Teaching, sāsanassa suciraṭṭhitikāmena, of the Great Sage, Mahesino, of all three kinds.
ganthato, atthato cevaparamuttarouttarovinicchayoantarāyaṃ antarenaajjhattikaṃ, bāhiraṃ vā antarāyaṃ vinā yathāsiddhiṃ upāgatopariniṭṭhānaṃ patto, tathā sattānaṃdhammasaṃyutākusalūpasaṃhitāsaṅkappāmanorathāsijjhantuantarāyaṃ vinā nippajjantu, etena uttaravinicchayaracanāmayena mahatā puññodayena catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ rañjetīti‘‘rājā’’ti saṅkhaṃ gato mahīpālomahiṃpathavisannissitaṃ janakāyaṃsammāñāyena dasa rājadhamme akopento pāletu.Devopajjunnokālethāvarajaṅgamānaṃ upayogārahakālesammā pavassatuavuṭṭhiativuṭṭhikaṃ akatvā sammā pavacchatu.
Therefore, may the meanings of the Vinaya, ganthato, atthato ceva, well-judged, paramuttaro uttaro vinicchayo, which has come to completion, siddhiṃ upāgato, without obstacles, antarāyaṃ antarena, internal or external, ajjhattikaṃ, bāhiraṃ vā antarāyaṃ vinā, similarly may the intentions of beings, sattānaṃ, which are connected with the Dhamma, dhammasaṃyutā, associated with merit, kusalūpasaṃhitā, saṅkappā sijjhantu, be accomplished without obstacles, antarāyaṃ vinā nippajjantu. By this great surge of merit consisting of the composition of the Uttara-vinicchaya, may the king, mahīpālo, who has gone to the designation of "rājā", he who delights the people with the four bases of sympathy, catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ rañjetīti, mahiṃ sammā pāletu, rightly protect the populace resting on the earth, pathavisannissitaṃ janakāyaṃ, not violating the ten royal virtues, dasa rājadhamme akopento. May the god, devo, Pajjunna, rain well, kāle sammā pavassatu, at the proper time, thāvarajaṅgamānaṃ upayogārahakāle, without excessive rain or drought, avuṭṭhiativuṭṭhikaṃ akatvā sammā pavacchatu.
964.Selindosinerupabbatarājāyāva tiṭṭhatiyāva loke pavattati,candosakalajanapadanayanasāyanoyāva virocatiyāva attano sabhāvaṃ joteti, tāva yasassinogotamassaarahato sammāsambuddhassasaddhammopariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividho saddhammotiṭṭhatupavattatu.
964. As long as the king of mountains, selindo, Sineru, yāva tiṭṭhati, stands, yāva loke pavattati, as long as the moon, cando, the delight of the eyes of all people, sakalajanapadanayanasāyano, shines, yāva virocati, as long as it illuminates its own nature, yāva attano sabhāvaṃ joteti, so long may the Good Dhamma, saddhammo, of the famous Gotama, yasassino gotamassa, the Arahant, the Fully Enlightened One, arahato sammāsambuddhassa, stand, tiṭṭhatu, continue, pavattatu, the Good Dhamma of three kinds by way of learning, practice and realization, pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividho saddhammo.
965.Sīhādīnaṃ, dāhādīnañca bāhirajjhattikānaṃ parissayānaṃ khamanaṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavitvā pavattanaṃkhanti. Soraccanti sobhane ratotisurato,suratassa bhāvo soraccaṃ. Sundaraṃ akhaṇḍatādiguṇasamannāgataṃ sīlaṃ assātisusīlo. Susīlassa bhāvo.
965. Khanti is the endurance, khamanaṃ, the bearing, sahanaṃ, the overcoming and continuation, abhibhavitvā pavattanaṃ, of external and internal dangers such as cold, heat, etc., sīhādīnaṃ, dāhādīnañca bāhirajjhattikānaṃ parissayānaṃ. Soracca means gentleness. Surato, is one who delights in goodness, sobhane ratoti, the state of the surato is soraccaṃ. Susīlo, is one who has beautiful morality, sundaraṃ akhaṇḍatādiguṇasamannāgataṃ sīlaṃ assāti. The state of the susīla is gentleness.
Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of the concluding account is ended.
Uttaravinicchayaṭīkā niṭṭhitā.
The Ṭīkā on the Uttara-vinicchaya is ended.
Iti vinayatthasārasandīpanī nāma vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanā,
Thus ends the Vinayatthasārasandīpanī named Vinaya-vinicchaya-vaṇṇanā, and
Līnatthapakāsanī nāma uttaravinicchayavaṇṇanā ca
the Līnatthapakāsanī named Uttara-vinicchaya-vaṇṇanā is
Samattā.
Completed.
Pacchā ṭhapitagāthāyo
Verses added later:
Therena thiracittena, sāsanujjotanatthinā;
By the Elder who is firm in mind, desiring to illuminate the Teaching;
Meritorious, wise, virtuous, a good friend and gentle as well.
Yo sīhaḷārimaddesu, candimā sūriyo viya;
He, sīvali Thera, with great energy and great fame,
Is like the moon and the sun among those who crush the enemies of Sīhaḷa.
Tena nītā sīhaḷā yā, idha pattā sudhīmatā;
By him, the wise one, the Sīhaḷas were led and arrived here;
This commentary, well-written in the Sīhaḷa script.
Revatoiti nāmena, therena thiracetasā;
By the Elder named Revato, with a steadfast mind;
While protecting Arimaddana, having carefully revised it.
Likhāpitā hitatthāya, bhikkhūnaṃ arimaddike;
It was caused to be written for the benefit of the bhikkhus in Arimaddana;
This commentary has reached its conclusion well;
Just so, may every success be accomplished for all beings!